JP7115454B2 - game machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a game machine represented by a pachinko machine.

2. Description of the Related Art Some gaming machines such as pachinko machines are provided with display devices such as liquid crystal display devices. In this conventional gaming machine, symbols are variably displayed on the display device, and the symbols are stopped and displayed in a predetermined combination, thereby providing a winning game advantageous to the player. In addition, various images such as characters and landscapes are displayed on the display device in addition to the patterns, and various entertainment effects are executed to enhance the interest of the game.

JP-A-2003-325886

However, there has been a demand for further enhancement of interest.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the interest of a player in playing a game.

In order to achieve this object, the game machine according to claim 1 comprises main control means for executing main control relating to a game, slave control means for performing control according to a control signal output from the main control means, The main control means comprises: first discrimination means for executing a first discrimination based on the establishment of a first discrimination condition; Based on the determination result of , a privilege game executing means for executing a privilege game advantageous to the player, and a first determination result signal indicating the determination result of the first determination means to the slave control means first output means for outputting; first determination information acquisition means for acquiring first determination information used for determination by the first determination means based on the establishment of a predetermined first acquisition condition; a second output means capable of outputting a first discrimination information signal based on the first discrimination information acquired by the discrimination information acquisition means to the slave control means before the first discrimination condition is satisfied; A ball entry means into which a ball can enter, a first position in which a game ball can enter the ball entry means, and a second position in which a game ball is more difficult to enter than the first position. variably variable means; second determination means for executing a second determination different from the first determination based on establishment of a second determination condition different from at least the first determination condition; 2 A variable game for executing a variable game in which the variable means is varied from the second position to the first position for a predetermined period based on the determination result of the determination means becoming a predetermined second determination result. Execution means, and as the type of the variable game executed by the variable game execution means, a plurality of at least a first variable game and a second variable game that is more likely to be advantageous to the player than the first variable game. Type determination means for determining the type of one of the variable games, and second determination for acquiring second determination information used for determination of the second determination means based on establishment of a predetermined second acquisition condition Information acquisition means and a second discrimination information signal based on the second discrimination information acquired by the second discrimination information acquisition means can be output to the slave control means before the second discrimination condition is established. and a third output means, wherein the slave control means outputs the first determination result signal output by the first output means, the first determination information signal output by the second output means, a signal receiving means configured to receive at least the second discrimination information signal output by the third output means; and a signal receiving means thereof. a first effect execution means for executing a first effect according to the determination result indicated by the received first determination result signal based on the stage receiving the first determination result signal; and the signal receiving means. Based on the fact that the first discrimination information signal is received by the and information storage means capable of storing at least information until it is received by a signal receiving means; and a determination result of the slave determination means when information corresponding to the first determination information signal stored in the information storage means satisfies a predetermined specific condition. a second performance executing means for executing a second performance that continues at least until the corresponding determination result of the second determination is shown, based on the fact that is a predetermined specific determination result.

In the gaming machine according to claim 2, in the gaming machine according to claim 1, the secondary discriminating means, when the second discriminating information signal is a signal indicating discriminating information corresponding to the second variable game, determines whether the specified It is configured so that it can be the determination result of

In the gaming machine according to claim 3, in the gaming machine according to claim 1 or 2, the second effect is an effect for executing a predetermined specific effect mode during the execution period of the plurality of the first effects. The second effect execution means stores a plurality of pieces of information corresponding to the first discrimination information signal stored in the information storage means, and outputs the discrimination result of the subordinate discrimination means. becomes the specific determination result, a predetermined specific effect mode is executed for a plurality of the first effects that are started until the corresponding second determination result is indicated. As described above, the second effect is configured to be executable.

In the gaming machine according to claim 4, in the gaming machine according to claim 3, the secondary control means, during the execution of the second effect, has a predetermined value that is executed before the second determination result is indicated. A period from the execution of the first determination to the display of the second determination result is defined as a performance period, and a pseudo first performance configured in a performance mode that is difficult to distinguish from the first performance is executed. A first effect executing means is provided.

In the gaming machine according to claim 5, in the gaming machine according to claim 4, the pseudo first effect execution means is started before the second determination result is shown during execution of the second effect. when the period from the execution of the first determination that starts last among the plurality of the first determinations to the display of the second determination result is a period shorter than a predetermined specific period , the pseudo first determination is a period from the start of the first determination that is started one time before the first determination that is started last to the display of the second determination result. It is configured to be able to execute production.

According to the gaming machine of claim 1, it has main control means for executing main control relating to games, and sub-control means for performing control according to control signals output from the main control means. , the main control means comprises a first determination means for executing a first determination based on the establishment of a first determination condition, and a determination result of the first determination means as a predetermined first determination result. a privilege game executing means for executing a privilege game advantageous to the player, and a first output for outputting a first determination result signal indicating the determination result of the first determination means to the slave control means based on the means, first discrimination information acquisition means for acquiring first discrimination information used for discrimination by the first discrimination means based on the establishment of a predetermined first acquisition condition, and by the first discrimination information acquisition means a second output means capable of outputting a first discrimination information signal based on the acquired first discrimination information to the slave control means before the first discrimination condition is satisfied; a ball-entering means, a first position where a game ball can enter the ball-entering means, and a second position where the game ball is more difficult to enter than the first position. a second determination means for executing a second determination different from the first determination based on the establishment of a second determination condition different from at least the first determination condition; and determination by the second determination means. variable game executing means for executing a variable game in which the variable means is varied from the second position to the first position for a predetermined period of time based on the result being a predetermined second determination result; As the type of the variable game executed by the variable game executing means, one variable out of a plurality including at least a first variable game and a second variable game that is more likely to be advantageous to the player than the first variable game Type determination means for determining the type of game, second determination information acquisition means for acquiring second determination information used for determination by the second determination means based on establishment of a predetermined second acquisition condition, Third output means capable of outputting a second discrimination information signal based on the second discrimination information acquired by the second discrimination information acquisition means to the slave control means before the second discrimination condition is established. and the slave control means outputs the first determination result signal output by the first output means, the first determination information signal output by the second output means, and the third output means. a signal receiving means configured to be able to receive at least the second determination information signal output by the signal receiving means; a first effect executing means for executing a first effect according to the determination result indicated by the received first determination result signal based on the reception of the other result signal; and the first determination by the signal receiving means. Based on the reception of the information signal, the signal receiving means receives information corresponding to the received first determination information signal up to a predetermined number of information, and the corresponding first determination result signal is received by the signal receiving means. and information storage means capable of storing at least until the second determination information signal is received by the signal receiving means, and performing determination using at least the second determination information signal received by the signal receiving means. The determination result of the slave determination means is determined in advance in a state in which the information corresponding to the first determination information signal stored in the information storage means and the slave determination means satisfies a predetermined specific condition. A second effect execution means for executing a second effect that continues at least until a corresponding determination result of the second determination is indicated based on a specific determination result.

As a result, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

According to the gaming machine of claim 2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine of claim 1, the secondary discriminating means provides a signal in which the second discriminating information signal indicates discriminating information corresponding to the second variable game. Since it is configured so that the specific determination result can be obtained in the case of , it is possible to indicate that the second variable game with a high degree of advantage will be performed by the second effect. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the player can be improved when the second effect is executed.

According to the gaming machine according to claim 3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine according to claim 1 or 2, the second effect is a predetermined specific effect during the execution period of the plurality of the first effects. The second effect executing means performs the above-described performance in a state in which a plurality of pieces of information corresponding to the first discrimination information signal stored in the information storage means are stored. Based on the determination result of the sub-determination means becoming the specific determination result, a predetermined specific determination is made for the plurality of first effects that are started until the corresponding second determination result is indicated. is configured to be able to execute the second effect so that the effect mode of is executed.

As a result, it is possible to realize an extremely special effect mode in which a specific effect mode is successively executed for a plurality of first effects, and finally the second determination result is displayed. There is an effect that it is possible to improve the interest in.

According to the gaming machine according to claim 4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine according to claim 3, the secondary control means, during the execution of the second effect, rather than the second determination result is shown A period from execution of the predetermined first determination performed before to display of the second determination result is defined as a performance period, and a pseudo-first performance configured in a performance mode indistinguishable from the first performance. A pseudo first effect executing means for executing one effect is provided.

As a result, it is possible to realize a novel performance mode that makes the player think that the second discrimination result is the discrimination result of the first discrimination means, thereby enhancing the player's interest in the game. It has the effect of being able to

According to the gaming machine of claim 5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine of claim 4, the pseudo first effect executing means indicates the second determination result during execution of the second effect. A period from the execution of the first determination that is started last among the plurality of the first determinations that are started before the first determination to the indication of the second determination result is longer than a predetermined specific period If it is a short period, the period from the start of the first determination that is started one time before the first determination that is started last to the display of the second determination result is the performance period. The pseudo first effect is configured to be executable.

As a result, it is possible to ensure a sufficient execution period of the pseudo first effect, so that there is an effect that the player can surely recognize that the second determination result has been obtained.

1 is a front view of a pachinko machine according to a first embodiment; FIG. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in the first embodiment. It is a rear view of the pachinko machine in the first embodiment. (a) is a front perspective view of the right variable winning device with the opening/closing door closed, and (b) is a front perspective view of the right variable winning device with the opening/closing door opened. It is a top view of the right variable winning device in the first embodiment. (a) is a diagram schematically showing area division setting and valid line setting of a display screen, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of an actual display screen. (a) and (b) are diagrams showing an example of the display mode of the standby state effect executed in the jackpot standby state. It is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine in the first embodiment. (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM of the main controller in the first embodiment, (b) is a first per random number table set in the ROM of the main controller in the first embodiment It is the figure which showed the contents of regulation typically. (a) is a diagram schematically showing the specified contents of the first hit type selection table set in the ROM of the main control device in the first embodiment, (b) is the main control in the first embodiment It is the figure which showed typically the defined content of the 2nd winning random number table set to ROM of the apparatus. (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of a variation pattern selection table set in the ROM of the main control device in the first embodiment, (b) defines the big hit variation pattern table in the first embodiment FIG. 4 is a diagram schematically showing the contents, (c) is a diagram schematically showing the defined contents of the deviation (normal) variation pattern table in the first embodiment, and (d) is the first embodiment FIG. 10 is a diagram schematically showing the defined contents of a deviation (probability variation) variation pattern table in a form; It is a figure showing typically composition of various counters in a 1st embodiment. 3 is a block diagram showing the configuration of a RAM of the main controller in the first embodiment; FIG. 2A is a block diagram showing the configuration of a ROM of the audio ramp control device according to the first embodiment, and FIG. 4B is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM of the audio ramp control device according to the first embodiment; FIG. . 2 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the display control device according to the first embodiment; FIG. (a) to (c) are explanatory diagrams for explaining a power-on image. (a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining a rear surface A, and (b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining a rear surface B. FIG. 4 is a diagram schematically showing an example of a display data table according to the first embodiment; FIG. 4 is a diagram schematically showing an example of a transfer data table in the first embodiment; FIG. FIG. 4 is a diagram schematically showing an example of a drawing list according to the first embodiment; FIG. 4 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing executed by the MPU in the main controller in the first embodiment; It is a flow chart showing a special symbol variation process executed by the MPU in the main control device in the first embodiment. It is a flow chart showing a special symbol variation start process executed by the MPU in the main control device in the first embodiment. 4 is a flow chart showing a starting winning process executed by an MPU in the main controller in the first embodiment; 4 is a flow chart showing prefetching processing executed by an MPU in the main controller in the first embodiment; It is a flow chart showing normal symbol variation processing executed by the MPU in the main controller in the first embodiment. 4 is a flow chart showing through gate passage processing executed by the MPU in the main controller in the first embodiment; 4 is a flow chart showing NMI interrupt processing executed by the MPU in the main controller in the first embodiment; 4 is a flow chart showing startup processing executed by an MPU in the main controller in the first embodiment; 4 is a flow chart showing main processing executed by an MPU in the main controller in the first embodiment; It is a flow chart which shows big hit start processing performed by MPU in a main control unit in a 1st embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows big hit control processing performed by MPU in the main control unit in a 1st embodiment. 4 is a flow chart showing start-up processing executed by the MPU in the audio ramp control device in the first embodiment; 4 is a flow chart showing main processing executed by an MPU in the audio lamp control device in the first embodiment; 4 is a flowchart showing effect update processing executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the first embodiment; 4 is a flow chart showing command determination processing executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the first embodiment; 4 is a flow chart showing a win-related process executed by an MPU in the audio ramp control device in the first embodiment; 4 is a flow chart showing a variable display setting process executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the first embodiment; 4 is a flowchart showing main processing executed by an MPU in the display control device according to the first embodiment; 4 is a flowchart showing boot processing executed by an MPU in the display control device according to the first embodiment; (a) is a flowchart showing command interrupt processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment, (b) is executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment; 4 is a flowchart showing V interrupt processing; 4 is a flowchart showing command determination processing executed by an MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment; (a) is a flowchart showing a variation pattern command process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment, (b) is executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment 8 is a flowchart showing stop type command processing; 4 is a flowchart showing standby state command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment; (a) is a flowchart showing opening command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment; (b) is a flow chart executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment; 10 is a flowchart showing number command processing; 4 is a flow chart showing ending command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment; (a) is a flowchart showing rear image change command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment; (b) is a flowchart executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment; 4 is a flowchart showing error command processing. 4 is a flowchart showing display setting processing executed by an MPU in the display device according to the first embodiment; 4 is a flowchart showing warning image setting processing executed by an MPU in the display control device according to the first embodiment; 4 is a flowchart showing pointer update processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment; (a) is a flowchart showing transfer setting processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment, and (b) is executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment. 10 is a flowchart showing resident image transfer setting processing; 7 is a flow chart showing normal image transfer setting processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment; 4 is a flowchart showing drawing processing executed by an MPU in the display control device according to the first embodiment; It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in the second embodiment. It is the figure which showed typically the specification content of the 1st winning classification selection table set to ROM of the main-control apparatus in 2nd Embodiment. It is the block diagram which showed the structure of RAM of the main controller in 2nd Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the special design variation process 2 performed by MPU in the main controller in 2nd Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the start-up process 2 performed by MPU in the main controller in 2nd Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the jackpot starting process 2 performed by MPU in the main control unit in 2nd Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the jackpot control processing 2 performed by MPU in the main controller in 2nd Embodiment. FIG. 10 is a flow chart showing a win-related process 2 executed by an MPU in the audio lamp control device in the second embodiment; FIG. 9 is a flow chart showing standby state command processing executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the second embodiment; It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in the third embodiment. (a) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode in the case of a small hit in the lottery of the second special symbol during the variable probability state in the third embodiment, (b) is a small It is the figure which showed an example of the display mode in a winning state. (a) is a diagram schematically showing the content of the first hit random number table set in the ROM of the main controller in the third embodiment, (b) is the main controller in the third embodiment 1 is a block diagram showing the configuration of a RAM in FIG. It is the flowchart which showed the main process 3 performed by MPU in the main controller in 3rd Embodiment. It is the flow chart which showed the small hit control processing which is executed by the MPU in the main control unit in 3rd execution form. 13 is a flow chart showing win-related command processing 3 executed by an MPU in the audio lamp control device in the third embodiment; It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in the fourth embodiment. (a) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode of the standby state effect while the left-operated winning hole is in a state where a ball can be entered in the fourth embodiment, and (b) is a diagram showing a fourth embodiment. In the form, it is a diagram showing an example of the display mode of the standby state effect while the right-acting winning opening is in a state where the ball can be entered. It is a block diagram showing the configuration of a RAM of the main controller in the fourth embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the jackpot start process 4 performed by MPU in the main control unit in 4th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the jackpot control processing 4 performed by MPU in the main controller in 4th Embodiment. FIG. 12 is a flow chart showing a win-related process 4 executed by an MPU in the audio lamp control device in the fourth embodiment; FIG. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in the fifth embodiment. (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM of the main controller in the fifth embodiment, (b) is the first hit type selection table set in the ROM of the main controller in the fifth embodiment (c) is a diagram schematically showing the defined contents of the period length selection table set in the ROM of the main controller in the fifth embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the special design variation processing 5 performed by MPU in the main controller in 5th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the jackpot control processing 5 performed by MPU in the main controller in 5th Embodiment. FIG. 16 is a flow chart showing interval setting processing executed by an MPU in a main controller in the fifth embodiment; FIG. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in the modification of the fifth embodiment. It is a top view of the right variable winning device in 6th Embodiment. (a) and (b) are diagrams showing an example of a display mode when a right-handed expectation degree suggesting effect is set as the effect mode during super reach in the sixth embodiment. (a) and (b) are diagrams showing an example of a display mode when a right-handed expectation degree suggesting effect is set as the effect mode during super reach in the sixth embodiment. (a) is a diagram schematically showing the change over time of the effect mode when a special symbol lottery results in a big win and a right-handed expectation degree suggesting effect is set in the sixth embodiment, and (b) ) is a diagram schematically showing the change over time of the effect mode when the special symbol lottery is lost and the right-handed expectation suggesting effect is set in the sixth embodiment. (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM of the audio ramp control device according to the sixth embodiment; (b) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM of the audio ramp control device according to the sixth embodiment; be. FIG. 22 is a diagram schematically showing the defined contents of a presentation mode selection table set in the ROM of the sound lamp control device in the sixth embodiment; FIG. 21 is a flow chart showing effect update processing 6 executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the sixth embodiment; FIG. FIG. 16 is a flow chart showing notification start determination processing executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the sixth embodiment; FIG. FIG. 16 is a flow chart showing variable display setting processing 6 executed by an MPU in the sound lamp control device in the sixth embodiment; FIG. It is the flowchart which showed the production|presentation mode selection process performed by MPU in the sound lamp control apparatus in 6th Embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in the seventh embodiment. In the seventh embodiment, it is a diagram schematically showing the change over time of the effect mode when the left trigger big win. (a) is a diagram showing an example of the display mode of the opening effect of the left trigger jackpot in the seventh embodiment, and (b) is a view showing an example of the display mode after the opening effect of the left trigger jackpot is finished. It is a diagram. FIG. 21 is a block diagram showing the configuration of a RAM of the audio ramp control device in the seventh embodiment; FIG. FIG. 16 is a flow chart showing main processing 7 executed by an MPU in the audio ramp control device in the seventh embodiment; FIG. FIG. 20 is a flow chart showing pseudo-normal state presentation processing executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the seventh embodiment; FIG. FIG. 21 is a flow chart showing a win-related process 7 executed by an MPU in the sound lamp control device in the seventh embodiment; FIG. FIG. 14 is a flow chart showing standby state command processing 7 executed by an MPU in the audio lamp control device in the seventh embodiment; FIG. FIG. 21 is a flow chart showing opening command processing executed by an MPU in the audio ramp control device in the seventh embodiment; FIG. It is a front view of the pachinko machine in the first control example. (a) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode during the variable probability state in the first control example, and (b) is a display when a music selection menu screen is displayed during the variable probability state in the first control example. It is the figure which showed an example of the aspect. (a) is a diagram showing an example of an initial layout of a music selection menu screen displayed when shifting to the music selection mode in the first control example; 10A and 10B are diagrams showing an example of a display mode when an operation on an operation button is detected; FIG. It is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine in the first control example. 3A is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM of the audio ramp control device in the first control example, and FIG. 4B is the block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM of the audio ramp control device in the first control example; FIG. . (a) is a diagram schematically showing the defined contents of an item layout storage area set in the RAM of the audio ramp control device in the first control example, and (b) is the audio ramp control in the first control example. FIG. 4 is a diagram schematically showing the contents of a music selection frequency storage area set in the RAM of the device; 4 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the audio output device in the first control example; FIG. (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM of the audio output device in the first control example, (b) is the block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM of the audio output device in the first control example. FIG. 10 is a diagram schematically showing defined contents of an audio file storage area set in the ROM of the audio output device in the first control example; FIG. 4 is a diagram showing an example of the configuration of a music data group in the first control example; 8 is a flowchart showing main processing 8 executed by the MPU in the audio ramp control device in the first control example; 8 is a flowchart showing operation detection processing executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the first control example; 8 is a flowchart showing command determination processing 8 executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the first control example; 4 is a flow chart showing status command processing executed by the MPU in the audio ramp control device in the first control example; 8 is a flow chart showing a win-related process 8 executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the first control example; (a) is a flowchart showing main processing executed by the MPU in the audio output device in the first control example, (b) is a command executed by the MPU in the audio output device in the first control example; 4 is a flowchart showing interrupt processing; 8 is a flowchart showing command determination processing executed by the MPU in the audio output device in the first control example; 8 is a flowchart showing audio setting processing executed by the MPU in the audio output device in the first control example; It is the figure which showed the correspondence of the transition of the state of a big hit in a 2nd control example, and the transition of a sound mode. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of the correspondence relationship between transitions in the state of the jackpot and transitions in the parts of the music when it is determined that the reproduction order is to be rearranged at the rearrangement determination timing 1 set for the jackpot in the second control example. . FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of a correspondence relationship between transitions in the jackpot state and transitions in music parts when it is determined that the playback order is to be rearranged at rearrangement determination timing 2 set for the jackpot in the second control example. . FIG. 10 is a diagram schematically showing the correspondence relationship between the transition of the jackpot state and the transition of the music part when it is determined that the start timing of the ending effect is delayed in the jackpot in the second control example. (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM of the audio ramp control device in the second control example, (b) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM of the audio ramp control device in the second control example; . FIG. 11 is a diagram schematically showing the defined contents of a rearrangement determination table set in the ROM of the sound lamp control device in the second control example; It is the figure which showed typically the content of the ending production|presentation selection table set to ROM of the sound lamp control apparatus in the 2nd control example. FIG. 11 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the audio output device in the second control example; FIG. 11 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM of the audio output device in the second control example; 9 is a flow chart showing main processing 9 executed by the MPU in the audio ramp control device in the second control example; 10 is a flowchart showing operation detection processing 9 executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the second control example; FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing ending effect start determination processing executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the second control example; FIG. FIG. 10 is a flow chart showing a win-related process 9 executed by an MPU in the sound lamp control device in the second control example; FIG. FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing round number command processing executed by the MPU in the audio ramp control device in the second control example; FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing music selection period setting processing executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the second control example; FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing interval command processing executed by the MPU in the audio ramp control device in the second control example; FIG. FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing ending command processing executed by the MPU in the audio ramp control device in the second control example; FIG. FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing music command processing executed by the MPU in the audio ramp control device in the second control example; FIG. 9 is a flow chart showing main processing 9 executed by the MPU in the audio output device in the second control example; 10 is a flowchart showing command determination processing 9 executed by the MPU in the audio output device in the second control example; It is the flowchart which showed the jackpot music related process performed by MPU in the audio|voice output device in a 2nd control example. FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing audio setting processing 9 executed by an MPU in the audio output device in the second control example; FIG. (a) and (b) are diagrams showing an example of a music selection menu screen in the third control example. (a) and (b) are diagrams showing an example of a display mode during execution of a big win with a simulated small round effect set in the third control example. (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM of the audio ramp control device in the third control example, and (b) is the block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM of the audio ramp control device in the third control example. . FIG. 14 is a diagram schematically showing the defined contents of a random music selection table set in the ROM of the sound ramp control device in the third control example; 10 is a flowchart showing operation detection processing 10 executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the third control example; FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing song determination processing executed by the MPU in the audio ramp control device in the third control example; FIG. 10 is a flow chart showing a win-related process 10 executed by an MPU in the audio ramp control device in the third control example; 14 is a flow chart showing a pseudo small round lottery process executed by the MPU in the sound ramp control device in the third control example; 10 is a flow chart showing round number command processing 10 executed by an MPU in the audio ramp control device in the third control example; 10 is a flow chart showing interval command processing 10 executed by the MPU in the audio ramp control device in the third control example; 10 is a flow chart showing a variable display setting process 10 executed by an MPU in the audio lamp control device in the third control example; (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM of the audio ramp control device in the fourth control example, and (b) is the block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM of the audio ramp control device in the fourth control example. . (a) is a diagram schematically showing the prescribed contents of a pseudo-small round lottery table set in the ROM of the voice ramp control device in the fourth control example, and (b) is a diagram showing the voice ramp control device in the fourth control example. 4 is a diagram schematically showing the contents of a priority rule table set in a ROM of the . FIG. 14 is a diagram schematically showing the defined contents of a chorus loop determination table set in the ROM of the sound ramp control device in the fourth control example; FIG. 14 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM of the audio output device in the fourth control example; FIG. 12 is a flowchart showing main processing 11 executed by an MPU in the audio ramp control device in the fourth control example; FIG. FIG. 14 is a flowchart showing operation detection processing 11 executed by an MPU in the audio lamp control device in the fourth control example; FIG. FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing music piece determination processing 11 executed by an MPU in the audio ramp control device in the fourth control example; FIG. FIG. 14 is a flow chart showing a chorus part loop process executed by an MPU in the sound ramp control device in the fourth control example; FIG. FIG. 12 is a flow chart showing a win-related process 11 executed by an MPU in the sound ramp control device in the fourth control example; FIG. FIG. 14 is a flow chart showing a pseudo small round lottery process 11 executed by the MPU in the sound ramp control device in the fourth control example; FIG. FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing round number command processing 11 executed by an MPU in the audio ramp control device in the fourth control example; FIG. FIG. 14 is a flow chart showing music selection period setting processing 11 executed by an MPU in the sound lamp control device in the fourth control example; FIG. FIG. 16 is a flow chart showing history area setting processing executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the fourth control example; FIG. 10 is a flow chart showing interval command processing 11 executed by the MPU in the audio ramp control device in the fourth control example; FIG. 14 is a flow chart showing selected music setting processing executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the fourth control example; FIG. FIG. 14 is a flowchart showing main processing 11 executed by an MPU in the audio output control device in the fourth control example; FIG. 14 is a flowchart showing command determination processing 11 executed by the MPU in the audio output control device in the fourth control example; 14 is a flow chart showing provisional music selection command processing executed by the MPU in the audio output control device in the fourth control example; FIG. 14 is a flow chart showing processing during a provisional music selection period, which is executed by the MPU in the audio output control device in the fourth control example; FIG. FIG. 20 is a diagram showing an example of the contents of a number-of-plays-in-effects storage area set in the RAM of the sound ramp control device in the modification of the fourth control example; FIG. 14 is a flow chart showing history area setting processing 12 executed by an MPU in the sound lamp control device in a modified example of the fourth control example; FIG. FIG. 14 is a flow chart showing a variable display setting process 12 executed by an MPU in the sound lamp control device in a modified example of the fourth control example; FIG. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in the eighth embodiment. (a) is a diagram showing a case where a game ball reaches the closed gate valve in the eighth embodiment from above, and (b) is a view of the gate valve in the eighth embodiment. It is a diagram showing a case where the gate induction valve is opened in a state in which the game ball is parked on the upper surface, (c) shows that the game ball that has been parked with the gate induction valve opened in the eighth embodiment falls. It is the figure which showed the case where the gate guide valve was closed immediately after doing. (a) is a diagram showing a state in which the game ball in the eighth embodiment is rolling on the inner wall of the 3-hole croon, and (b) is a game ball entering the MAX operation winning opening It is a diagram showing a state in which the non-electric accessory is released in conjunction with. (a) is a diagram showing an example of the display mode of the ending effect when the jackpot ends with the special MAX operation winning port opened in the eighth embodiment, and (b) is the eighth embodiment. It is a diagram showing an example of a display mode (waiting state effect) during the jackpot standby state when the jackpot is won during the MAX zone in the form. (a) is a diagram showing an example of the display mode of the third pattern display device when the number of times of time saving ends during the MAX zone in the eighth embodiment, and (b) is a MAX zone in the eighth embodiment It is a diagram showing an example of the display mode of the third symbol display device when the MAX zone ends by entering the ball into the special MAX operation winning opening in . It is the figure which showed typically the specification content of the 1st winning classification selection table set to ROM of the main control unit in 8th Embodiment. FIG. 21 is a block diagram showing the configuration of a RAM of an audio ramp control device according to an eighth embodiment; FIG. It is the flowchart which showed the special design variation processing 12 performed by MPU in the main controller in 8th Embodiment. FIG. 20 is a flow chart showing start-up processing 12 executed by an MPU in a main controller in an eighth embodiment; FIG. FIG. 20 is a flow chart showing main processing 12 executed by an MPU in a main controller in an eighth embodiment; FIG. It is the flowchart which showed the jackpot start process 12 performed by MPU in the main control unit in 8th Embodiment. FIG. 21 is a flow chart showing a win-related process 12 executed by an MPU in an audio ramp control device in an eighth embodiment; FIG. FIG. 23 is a flow chart showing winning hole type command processing executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the eighth embodiment; FIG. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in the ninth embodiment. It is an enlarged front view of a lottery device in a ninth embodiment. (a) is a diagram showing a case where a plurality of game balls enter the lottery device with both the ball discharge door and the ball stop portion closed in the ninth embodiment, and (b). [Fig. 10] is a diagram showing a state in which the ball discharge door is opened while the game ball entered inside the lottery device in the ninth embodiment is stopped. (a), (b) is a top view of the distribution rotary body in 9th Embodiment. It is the figure which showed typically the operation|movement pattern of each part of a lottery apparatus when it becomes a small hit by lottery of the 2nd special design in 9th Embodiment. (a) is a diagram showing an example of the display mode of the special small winning effect for the low expectation in the ninth embodiment, (b) is a special small winning effect for the high expectation in the ninth embodiment is a diagram showing an example of the display mode of. (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM of the main controller in the ninth embodiment, (b) is the first per random number table set in the ROM of the main controller in the ninth embodiment It is the figure which showed the contents of regulation typically. (a) is a diagram schematically showing the specified contents of the first winning type selection table set in the ROM of the main controller in the ninth embodiment, (b) is the main control in the ninth embodiment It is the figure which showed typically the defined content of the small hitting classification selection table set to ROM of the apparatus. It is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM of the main controller in the ninth embodiment. a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM of the audio ramp control device in the ninth embodiment, and (b) is an expectation selection table set in the ROM of the audio ramp control device in the ninth embodiment. It is the figure which showed the contents of regulation typically. FIG. 21 is a block diagram showing the configuration of a RAM of an audio ramp control device according to a ninth embodiment; FIG. It is the flowchart which showed the special design variation processing 13 performed by MPU in the main controller in 9th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the special design fluctuation|variation start processing 13 performed by MPU in the main controller in 9th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the small hit start processing performed by MPU in the main controller in 9th Embodiment. FIG. 20 is a flow chart showing start-up processing 13 executed by an MPU in a main controller in a ninth embodiment; FIG. FIG. 21 is a flow chart showing main processing 13 executed by an MPU in a main controller in a ninth embodiment; FIG. It is the flowchart which showed the jackpot control processing 13 performed by MPU in the main controller in 9th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the small hit control processing 13 performed by MPU in the main controller in 9th Embodiment. FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing V passage detection processing executed by the MPU in the main controller in the ninth embodiment; FIG. FIG. 21 is a flow chart showing a win-related process 13 executed by an MPU in the audio lamp control device in the ninth embodiment; FIG. FIG. 16 is a flow chart showing expectation level suggestion setting processing executed by the MPU in the audio ramp control device in the ninth embodiment; FIG. FIG. 20 is a flow chart showing V winning opening command processing executed by the MPU in the audio ramp control device in the ninth embodiment. FIG. FIG. 16 is a flow chart showing V passage detection processing executed by an MPU in a main controller in a modified example of the ninth embodiment; FIG. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in the tenth embodiment. It is an enlarged front view of the lottery apparatus periphery in 10th Embodiment. (a) is an enlarged front view of the guide channel and its surroundings in a state in which both the upper opening/closing door and the lower opening/closing door are closed in the tenth embodiment; (b) is an enlarged front view of the upper opening/closing door in the tenth embodiment; FIG. 12C is an enlarged front view of the guide flow passage in a state where the door is open and the lower door is closed; FIG. 10 is an enlarged front view of the periphery of the guide channel in the state; It is a top view of the distribution rotary body in 10th Embodiment. It is the figure which showed typically the operation|movement pattern of each part in the lottery apparatus during execution of the small winning game in 10th Embodiment. (a) to (d) are diagrams showing an open pattern set for a small hit attacker when the first special symbol lottery in the tenth embodiment results in a small hit. (a) to (c) are diagrams showing an open pattern set for a small winning attacker when a small winning is achieved in the second special symbol lottery in the tenth embodiment. It is the figure which showed an example of the display mode of the selection production|presentation performed when it becomes a small hit by the lottery of the 1st special design in 10th Embodiment. (a) is a diagram showing the change over time of the display mode when the V challenge small win is won in the tenth embodiment, and (b) is an effect when the normal small win is won in the tenth embodiment It is the figure which showed the temporal change of the aspect. (a) is a diagram schematically showing the specified contents of the first winning random number table set in the ROM of the main controller in the tenth embodiment, (b) is the main controller in the tenth embodiment It is a block diagram showing the configuration of a small hit type selection table set in the ROM of. It is the figure which showed typically the defined content of the special-figure 1 small hit table set to ROM of the main controller in 10th Embodiment. It is the figure which showed typically the defined content of the special figure 2 small hit table set to ROM of the main controller in 10th Embodiment. FIG. 20 is an enlarged front view of the guide channel and its surroundings of the lottery device in the first modified example of the tenth embodiment; It is the figure which showed the special opening pattern set when the special small hit of the 2nd special design in the 1st modification of 10th Embodiment is elected. (a) and (b) are top views showing a portion on the right side of the ball discharge door in the guide channel of the lottery device in the second modification of the tenth embodiment. (a), (b) is the figure which showed an example of the display mode of the operation support production|presentation in 11th Embodiment. (a) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode when a character image in a character mode with a low degree of expectation is displayed during execution of an operation support effect in the eleventh embodiment; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of a display mode when a character image in a character mode with a high degree of development expectation is displayed during execution of an operation support effect in the embodiment; In the eleventh embodiment, it is a diagram showing an effect period when the operation support effect is set for the fluctuation pattern of super reach. (a) and (b) are diagrams showing an example of a display mode when the first action of the mini-character preview effect is executed in the eleventh embodiment. (a) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode when the second action of the mini-character forewarning effect in the eleventh embodiment is executed; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of a display mode when an action is executed; FIG. 22 is a diagram showing changes over time in the presentation mode of the mini-character preview presentation in the eleventh embodiment. (a) is a diagram showing the correspondence relationship between the variation time and the action timing of the mini-character when the mini-character advance notice effect is set for the variation pattern that is too long in the eleventh embodiment; FIG. 11C is a diagram showing the correspondence relationship between the variation time and the action timing of the mini character when a low-expectation mini-character announcement effect is set for the variation pattern out of normal reach in the eleventh embodiment; 20 is a diagram showing the correspondence relationship between variation times and action timings of mini characters in the eleventh embodiment when a low-expectation mini-character announcement effect is set for variation patterns of winning normal reach; FIG. (a) is a diagram showing the correspondence relationship between the variation time and the action timing of the mini character in the eleventh embodiment, when a mini character announcement effect with medium expectations is set for the variation pattern out of normal reach, (b) is a diagram showing the correspondence relationship between the variation time and the action timing of the mini character in the eleventh embodiment when a mini character announcement effect with a medium expectation level is set for the variation pattern of the hit normal reach; (c) is a diagram showing the correspondence relationship between the variation time and the action timing of the mini character in the eleventh embodiment, when a high-expectation mini-character announcement effect is set for the variation pattern out of normal reach, (d) is a diagram showing the correspondence relationship between the variation time and the action timing of the mini character in the eleventh embodiment when a high-expectation mini character announcement effect is set for the variation pattern of the winning normal reach. (a) and (b) are diagrams showing an example of a display mode in the case of a small hit in the lottery of the second special symbol during the time saving state of the normal symbol in the eleventh embodiment. (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM of the audio ramp control device according to the eleventh embodiment, and (b) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM of the audio ramp control device according to the eleventh embodiment. . (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of a character mode selection table set in the ROM of the sound lamp control device in the eleventh embodiment; FIG. 20C is a diagram schematically showing the defined contents of the table for (before completion), and (c) is a diagram schematically showing the defined contents of the table for hit (after completion of development) of the character mode selection table in the eleventh embodiment. is. (a) is a diagram schematically showing the defined contents of a table for deviation (before completion of development) of the character mode selection table in the eleventh embodiment; (b) is a diagram showing the deviation of the character mode selection table in the eleventh embodiment; FIG. 11 is a diagram schematically showing the defined contents of a table for (after completion of development); (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of a mini character effect selection table set in the ROM of the sound lamp control device in the eleventh embodiment; FIG. 11 is a diagram schematically showing the contents of a win table; (a) is a diagram schematically showing the prescribed contents of a normal small winning table of the mini character effect selection table in the eleventh embodiment, and (b) is a non-small winning table of the mini character effect selection table in the eleventh embodiment. It is the figure which showed the specification content of the table typically. (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of a small hit time effect selection table set in the ROM of the sound lamp control device in the eleventh embodiment, (b) is a small hit time effect selection table in the eleventh embodiment is a diagram schematically showing the defined contents of the table for small hits H14 to J14, and (c) schematically shows the defined contents of the table for small hits K14 to M14 of the small hit production selection table in the eleventh embodiment. is a diagram shown in FIG. It is the flowchart which showed the small hit start process 14 performed by MPU in the main controller in 11th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the small hit control processing 14 performed by MPU in the main controller in 11th Embodiment. FIG. 21 is a flow chart showing main processing 14 executed by an MPU in the audio lamp control device in the eleventh embodiment; FIG. FIG. 22 is a flow chart showing effect update processing 14 executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the eleventh embodiment; FIG. FIG. 23 is a flowchart showing operation support effect processing executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the eleventh embodiment; FIG. FIG. 22 is a flow chart showing development determination processing executed by the MPU in the audio ramp control device in the eleventh embodiment; FIG. FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing character mode setting processing executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the eleventh embodiment; FIG. FIG. 22 is a flow chart showing mini-character setting processing executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the eleventh embodiment; FIG. FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing various setting button input monitoring processing executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the eleventh embodiment; FIG. FIG. 22 is a flow chart showing a limit period setting process executed by an MPU in the audio ramp control device in the eleventh embodiment; FIG. FIG. 22 is a flow chart showing a win-related process 14 executed by an MPU in the audio lamp control device in the eleventh embodiment; FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the small hitting classification command process performed by MPU in the sound lamp control apparatus in 11th Embodiment. FIG. 22 is a flow chart showing operation content command processing executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the eleventh embodiment; FIG. FIG. 21 is a flow chart showing a variable display setting process 14 executed by an MPU in the audio lamp control device in the eleventh embodiment; FIG. FIG. 23 is a flow chart showing support effect setting processing executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the eleventh embodiment; FIG. FIG. 22 is a flow chart showing action timing determination processing executed by the MPU in the audio ramp control device in the eleventh embodiment; FIG. FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing command determination processing 14 executed by the MPU in the display control device in the eleventh embodiment; FIG. FIG. 21 is a flow chart showing action command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the eleventh embodiment; FIG. FIG. 32 is a top view of a guiding channel of a lottery device in a twelfth embodiment; (a), (b) is the figure which showed an example of the display mode during execution of the operation support production|presentation in 12th Embodiment. (a), (b) is the figure which showed an example of the display mode at the time of selecting the item of volume setting during execution of the operation support production|presentation in 12th Embodiment. It is the figure which showed typically the operation|movement pattern of each part in the lottery apparatus during execution of the small winning game in 12th Embodiment. (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of a ROM of an audio ramp control device according to a twelfth embodiment; (b) is a block diagram showing the configuration of a RAM of an audio ramp control device according to a twelfth embodiment; . (a) is a diagram schematically showing the defined contents of a button mode selection table set in the ROM of the sound lamp control device in the twelfth embodiment; (b) is a diagram of the button mode selection table in the twelfth embodiment; FIG. 12C is a diagram schematically showing the prescribed contents of the hit (non-operation) table, and FIG. 11C is a diagram schematically showing the prescribed contents of the hit (operation) table of the button mode selection table in the twelfth embodiment; is. (a) is a diagram schematically showing the defined contents of the table for deviation (non-operation) of the button mode selection table in the twelfth embodiment, and (b) is a deviation ( Operation) is a diagram schematically showing the contents of the table for operation. FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing various setting button input monitoring processing 15 executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the twelfth embodiment; FIG. FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing various setting button input monitoring processing 15 executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the twelfth embodiment; FIG. FIG. 22 is a flow chart showing processing when up and down buttons are pressed, which is executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the twelfth embodiment; FIG. FIG. 22 is a flow chart showing left and right button depression processing executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the twelfth embodiment; FIG. It is the figure which showed an example of the display mode during the light amount setting in 12th Embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in the thirteenth embodiment. It is a partial enlarged view of the vicinity of the small winning prize device in the thirteenth embodiment. It is the figure which showed the ball flow in the prize winning device for small hits in 13th Embodiment. FIG. 22 is a diagram showing a ball flow to a character object route channel in the thirteenth embodiment; FIG. 22 is a diagram showing sphere flow into a straight V flow path in the thirteenth embodiment; (a) is a cross-sectional view schematically showing the configuration of the rotating body positioned in the operating state in the thirteenth embodiment, and (b) is the configuration of the rotating body positioned in the initial state in the thirteenth embodiment. It is a cross-sectional view schematically shown. (a) is a front view schematically showing the configuration of the accessory device according to the thirteenth embodiment, and (b) is a plan view schematically showing the configuration of the accessory device according to the thirteenth embodiment; be. (a) is a plan view schematically showing the ball flow when the ball wins V among the ball flows in the accessory device in the thirteenth embodiment; (b) is a plan view showing the ball flow in the thirteenth embodiment; FIG. 10 is a plan view schematically showing a ball flow in the accessory device when the ball has won an out prize. FIG. 22 is a partially enlarged view of the vicinity of the gate-type electric accessory in the thirteenth embodiment; It is the timing chart which showed the operation content of the small hit opening pattern A in 13th Embodiment. It is the timing chart which showed the operation content of the small hit opening pattern B in 13th Embodiment. It is the figure which showed the game flow of the pachinko machine in 13th Embodiment. (a) is a diagram showing the period from the small winning A winning to the small winning game in the 13th embodiment, (b) shows the period from the small winning B winning to the small winning game in the 13th embodiment Fig. 3 shows. (a) is a diagram schematically showing a display screen at the time of winning a small hit in the thirteenth embodiment, (b) schematically shows a display screen at the start of the small winning game in the thirteenth embodiment It is a diagram. (a) is a diagram schematically showing a display screen when V is won during the small winning game in the thirteenth embodiment, and (b) is executed during the small winning game in the thirteenth embodiment It is the figure which showed typically the display screen of the role object challenge production|presentation. (a) is a diagram schematically showing a display screen during a role object challenge production in the thirteenth embodiment, and (b) schematically shows a success screen of the role object challenge production in the thirteenth embodiment. It is a diagram. (a) is a diagram schematically showing a failure screen of the role object challenge production in the thirteenth embodiment, and (b) is a display screen displayed when power is turned on in an error state in the thirteenth embodiment. It is a diagram schematically showing the. (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM of the main controller in the thirteenth embodiment, (b) is the first random number 14 table set in the ROM of the main controller in the thirteenth embodiment It is a diagram schematically showing the contents of the provisions of. (a) is a diagram schematically showing the defined contents of the first winning type selection 14 table set in the ROM of the main controller in the thirteenth embodiment, (b) is the main in the thirteenth embodiment It is the figure which showed typically the specification content of the small hitting classification selection 14 table set to ROM of the control apparatus. It is the figure which showed typically the specification content of the small hit scenario table set to ROM of the main controller in 13th Embodiment. (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of a variation pattern selection 14 table set in the ROM of the main controller in the thirteenth embodiment, (b) is in the ROM of the main controller in the thirteenth embodiment It is a diagram schematically showing the specified contents of the set normal variation pattern 14 table, (c) is the specified contents of the time saving variation pattern 14 table set in the ROM of the main controller in the thirteenth embodiment It is a diagram schematically showing the. FIG. 22 is a block diagram showing the structure of a RAM of a main controller in a thirteenth embodiment; FIG. (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM of the audio ramp control device in the thirteenth embodiment, (b) is a display comment selection table set in the ROM of the audio ramp control device in the thirteenth embodiment; It is a diagram schematically showing the contents of the provisions of. FIG. 21 is a block diagram showing the configuration of a RAM of a sound ramp control device in a thirteenth embodiment; FIG. It is the flowchart which showed the special design variation processing 15 performed by MPU in the main controller in 13th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the small hit start process 15 performed by MPU in the main controller in 13th Embodiment. FIG. 20 is a flow chart showing start-up processing 15 executed by an MPU in a main controller in a thirteenth embodiment; FIG. It is the flowchart which showed the return processing in the small hit performed by MPU in the main controller in 13th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the small hit control processing 15 performed by MPU in the main controller in 13th Embodiment. FIG. 17 is a flow chart showing V passage detection processing 15 executed by an MPU in a main controller in a thirteenth embodiment; FIG. FIG. 16 is a flow chart showing a game situation setting process executed by an MPU in a main control device in a thirteenth embodiment; FIG. FIG. 22 is a flow chart showing gaming situation determination processing executed by the MPU in the main controller in the thirteenth embodiment; FIG. It is the flowchart which showed the monitoring processing during the small hit performed by MPU in the main control unit in 13th Embodiment. 29 is a flow chart showing effect update processing 15 executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the thirteenth embodiment; FIG. 21 is a flow chart showing a win-related process 15 executed by an MPU in an audio lamp control device in a thirteenth embodiment; FIG. It is the flowchart which showed the small hit winning command processing which is executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the thirteenth embodiment. (a) is a front view schematically showing the configuration of the accessory device according to the fourteenth embodiment, and (b) is a plan view schematically showing the configuration of the accessory device according to the fourteenth embodiment. be. (a) is a plan view schematically showing the ball flow when the ball wins V among the ball flows in the accessory device according to the fourteenth embodiment; (b) is a plan view showing the FIG. 10 is a plan view schematically showing a ball flow in the accessory device when the ball has won an out prize. It is the timing chart which showed the operation content of the small hit opening pattern A in 14th Embodiment. (a) is a diagram schematically showing a display screen during the role object challenge production in the 14th embodiment, and (b) is a diagram showing the display screen when the role object challenge production in the 14th embodiment has passed a predetermined period. It is the figure which showed the displayed screen typically. (a) is a front view schematically showing the configuration of the accessory device in the first modification of the fourteenth embodiment, and (b) is the accessory device in the first modification of the fourteenth embodiment. It is the top view which showed the structure typically. (a) is a plan view schematically showing the ball flow when the ball wins V among the ball flows in the accessory device in the first modified example of the fourteenth embodiment; FIG. 30 is a plan view schematically showing a ball flow when the ball wins out among the ball flows in the accessory device in the first modified example of the fourteenth embodiment; It is the timing chart which showed the operation|movement content of the small hit opening pattern C in the 1st modification of 14th Embodiment. (a) is an enlarged view schematically showing the configuration of a delay device in a second modification of the fourteenth embodiment, and (b) is a plan view of the delay device in a second modification of the fourteenth embodiment; is. It is the timing chart which showed the operation|movement content of the small hit opening pattern D in the 2nd modification of 14th Embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in 15th Embodiment. It is the elements on larger scale of the lower right side area|region of the pachinko machine in 15th Embodiment. It is the figure which showed the case where the ball|ball was awarded by each operation|movement opening in 15th Embodiment. FIG. 21 is a timing chart showing a correspondence relationship between the operation of the gate-type electric accessory during time saving and the switching operation of the switching valve in the fifteenth embodiment; FIG. It is the figure which showed the game flow of the pachinko machine in 15th Embodiment. It is a timing chart showing the operation content of various devices during the small winning game in the fifteenth embodiment. (a) is a diagram showing an example of the display screen during the time saving A state in the fifteenth embodiment, (b) shows an example of the special 2 jackpot end screen during the time saving A state in the fifteenth embodiment It is a diagram. (a) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen during a character product rush in the fifteenth embodiment, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of a character product rush end screen in the fifteenth embodiment. (a) is a diagram showing an example of a jackpot screen during a character rush in a fifteenth embodiment, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of a jackpot middle screen during a character rush in a fifteenth embodiment. is. FIG. 32 is a diagram showing an example of an error screen in the fifteenth embodiment; FIG. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing part of the contents of a ROM of a main controller in a fifteenth embodiment, and (b) is a schematic diagram of a first per random number 16 table in a fifteenth embodiment. 2 is a schematic diagram shown in FIG. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the first hit type selection 16 table in the fifteenth embodiment, (b) schematically shows the small hit type selection 16 table in the fifteenth embodiment It is a schematic diagram. It is a schematic diagram which showed typically the small hit scenario table in 15th Embodiment. FIG. 21 is a schematic diagram schematically showing part of the contents of a RAM of a main controller in a fifteenth embodiment; (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing part of the contents of a ROM of a sound ramp control device in a fifteenth embodiment, and (b) schematically shows a title selection table in the fifteenth embodiment; It is a schematic diagram. FIG. 21 is a schematic diagram schematically showing part of the contents of a RAM of an audio ramp control device according to a fifteenth embodiment; It is the flowchart which showed the design fluctuation|variation process 16 normally performed by MPU in the main controller in 15th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the return processing 16 in the small hit performed by MPU in the main control unit in 15th Embodiment. FIG. 20 is a flow chart showing main processing 16 executed by an MPU in a main controller in a fifteenth embodiment; FIG. It is the flowchart which showed the small hit control processing 16 performed by MPU in the main controller in 15th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the small hit end timing process 16 performed by MPU in the main controller in 15th Embodiment. FIG. 20 is a flow chart showing V passage detection processing 16 executed by an MPU in a main controller in a fifteenth embodiment; FIG. FIG. 16 is a flow chart showing power-off processing executed by the MPU in the main control unit in the fifteenth embodiment; FIG. FIG. 21 is a flow chart showing command determination processing 16 executed by an MPU in the audio lamp control device in the fifteenth embodiment; FIG. FIG. 22 is a flow chart showing state command processing 16 executed by an MPU in the audio ramp control device in the fifteenth embodiment; FIG. FIG. 22 is a flow chart showing a win-related process 16 executed by an MPU in the audio lamp control device in the fifteenth embodiment; FIG. FIG. 16 is a flow chart showing a variable display setting process 16 executed by an MPU in the audio lamp control device in the fifteenth embodiment; FIG. FIG. 23 is a flow chart showing final variation effect setting processing executed by the MPU in the audio ramp control device in the fifteenth embodiment; FIG. (a) is a diagram showing an example of a jackpot screen during a normal rush in Modification 1 of the fifteenth embodiment, and (b) is an example of a screen during resurrection chance in Modification 1 of the fifteenth embodiment. It is a figure showing. It is the figure which showed the game flow of the pachinko machine in the modified example 1 of 15th Embodiment. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing part of the contents of a ROM of a main controller in Modification 1 of the fifteenth embodiment, and (b) is a first modification in Modification 1 of the fifteenth embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which showed typically the per type selection table. (a) is an enlarged front view of a rolling device in Modification 2 of the fifteenth embodiment, and (b) is an enlarged plan view of the rolling device in Modification 2 of the fifteenth embodiment. be. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in the modified example 3 of the fifteenth embodiment. It is the timing chart which showed the operation content of the various devices in the small hit game in the modified example 3 of 15th Embodiment. It is the figure which showed an example of the special 2 small hit screen in the normal rush in the modification 3 of 15th Embodiment. (a) is a diagram showing an example of a normal time small hit game start screen in the 16th embodiment, (b) shows an example of the display screen of the first time the normal time small hit game opening in the 16th embodiment Fig. 3 shows. (a) is a diagram showing an example of a normal small winning game opening second start screen in the 16th embodiment, (b) shows an example of a normal small winning game start screen in the 16th embodiment It is a diagram. (a) is a diagram showing an example of a ball storage completion screen during a small winning game in the 16th embodiment, and (b) is an example of a standby screen until stored balls are discharged in the 16th embodiment. It is a diagram. 29 is a flow chart showing effect update processing 17 executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the sixteenth embodiment; FIG. 22 is a flow chart showing a win-related process 17 executed by an MPU in the audio lamp control device in the sixteenth embodiment; FIG. FIG. 22 is a flow chart showing status command processing performed by the MPU in the audio ramp control device in the sixteenth embodiment; FIG. It is a game board front view of the pachinko machine in the structural modification of 15th Embodiment. It is the elements on larger scale of the lower right side area|region of the pachinko machine in the structural modification of 15th Embodiment. FIG. 20 is a timing chart showing a correspondence relationship between the operation of the gate-type electric accessory during time saving and the switching operation of the switching valve in the structural modification of the fifteenth embodiment; FIG. (a), (b) is the figure which showed the production|presentation display screen in the production|presentation modification of 15th Embodiment. (a), (b) is the figure which showed the display screen at the time of power-on in the control modification of 15th Embodiment. (a) is a diagram showing the configuration of the RAM of the MPU in the main control unit in the control modification of the fifteenth embodiment in the control modification of the fifteenth embodiment; (b) is the fifteenth embodiment; is a diagram showing the configuration of a power recovery state selection table that a RAM of an MPU in a main control device has in the control modification of . FIG. 22 is a diagram showing a configuration of a RAM of an MPU in a main control unit in a control modification of the fifteenth embodiment; FIG. 16 is a flow chart showing power-off process A executed by the MPU in the main control unit in the control modification of the fifteenth embodiment; FIG. It is the flowchart which showed the return process A in the small hit performed by MPU in the main control unit in the control modification of 15th Embodiment. It is a front view of the pachinko machine in 17th Embodiment. 1 is a front view of a game board of a pachinko machine; FIG. It is a rear view of the pachinko machine. It is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine. It is an exploded perspective front view of the game board. FIG. 365 is a cross-sectional view of the game board taken along line VI-VI in FIG. 365; (a) is a front view of a ball-throwing unit, and (b) is a side view of the ball-throwing unit. (a) is an exploded perspective front view of the ball throwing unit, and (b) is an exploded perspective rear view of the ball throwing unit. (a) is a front view of a sorting unit, and (b) is a side view of the sorting unit. 4 is an exploded perspective front view of the sorting unit; FIG. FIG. 4 is an exploded perspective rear view of the sorting unit; 372(a) is a cross-sectional view of the sorting unit taken along the line XIIa-XIIa of FIG. 372(a), and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the sorting unit taken along the line XIIb-XIIb of FIG. 375(a). 375(a) and 375(b) are partially enlarged cross-sectional views of the sorting unit in the range XIIIa of FIG. 375(b). (a) is a front view of a passageway unit, and (b) is a side view of the passageway unit. 4 is an exploded perspective front view of the passage unit; FIG. FIG. 4 is an exploded perspective rear view of the passageway unit; FIG. 32 is a front exploded perspective view of a game board and operation units in an eighteenth embodiment; It is a front view of a game board. It is a rear view of the game board. It is a front perspective view of a game board. It is a rear perspective view of the game board. It is an exploded front perspective view of the game board. It is an exploded rear perspective view of the game board. Fig. 2 is an exploded front perspective view of the central configuration unit; FIG. 4 is an exploded rear perspective view of the central configuration unit; 382 is an enlarged front view of the game board in area XXVI of FIG. 381; FIG. 390 is a partial cross-sectional view of the game board taken along line XXVII-XXVII of FIG. 389. FIG. FIG. 389 is a partial cross-sectional view of the game board taken along line XXVIII-XXVIII of FIG. 389; It is an exploded front perspective view of the game board. It is an exploded rear perspective view of the game board. 382 is an enlarged front view of the game board in area XXXI of FIG. 381; FIG. FIG. 395 is a partial cross-sectional view of the game board taken along line XXXII-XXXII of FIG. 394; It is an exploded front perspective view of a sorting unit. It is an exploded rear perspective view of the sorting unit. 382 is a partially enlarged front view of the game board in area XXXV of FIG. 381; FIG. FIG. 4 is a front view of the operating unit; FIG. 4 is a front view of the operating unit; FIG. 4 is a front view of the operating unit; FIG. 4 is a front view of the operating unit; 4 is an exploded front perspective view of the operating unit; FIG. 4 is an exploded rear perspective view of the operation unit; FIG. 4 is an exploded front perspective view of the operating unit; FIG. 4 is an exploded rear perspective view of the operation unit; FIG. FIG. 399 is a cross-sectional view of the operating unit along line XLIV-XLIV of FIG. 399; 408 is a partial enlarged cross-sectional view of the operating unit at area XLV of FIG. 407; FIG. FIG. 399 is a cross-sectional view of the operating unit along line XLIV-XLIV of FIG. 399; 4 is an exploded front perspective view of the operating unit; FIG. 4 is an exploded rear perspective view of the operation unit; FIG. 411(a) is an exploded front perspective view of the outer member, elevator plate member and resistance generator in area XLIXa of FIG. 410, and (b) is a front perspective view of the outer member in area XLIXb of FIG. 410. FIG. (a) is an exploded front perspective view of the lifting plate member, the inner member, the displacement member, and the rotational posture assisting member in the range La of FIG. 410, and (b) is the displacement member and the rotational posture assisting member in the range Lb of FIG. Figure 3 is an exploded front perspective view of the member; It is an exploded front perspective view of a light emitting operation production unit. It is a back exploded perspective view of a light emission operation production|presentation unit. It is an exploded front perspective view of a light emitting operation production unit. (a) is a front view of the right intermediate connecting member, (b) is a side view of the intermediate connecting member as viewed in the direction of arrow LIVb in FIG. 417 (a), and (c) is a 417(d) is a cross-sectional view of the intermediate connecting member taken along line LIVd-LIVd of FIG. 417(a). FIG. 399 is a cross-sectional view of the game board and the action unit taken along line LV-LV in FIG. 399; FIG. 399 is a cross-sectional view of the game board and the action unit taken along line LV-LV in FIG. 399; FIG. 399 is a cross-sectional view of the game board and the action unit taken along line LV-LV in FIG. 399; (a) to (c) are schematic side views of the first elongated hole, the second elongated hole, and the curved elongated hole, which schematically show the first elongated hole, the second elongated hole, and the curved elongated hole. FIG. 4 is a front view of the operating unit; FIG. 4 is a front view of the operating unit; FIG. 4 is a front view of the operating unit; FIG. 4 is a front view of the operating unit; (a) to (c) are schematic front views of the fastening portion of the displacement member, the elongated hole of the connected hole, and the support hole. FIG. 399 is a cross-sectional view of the operating unit taken along line LXIV-LXIV of FIG. 399; FIG. 399 is a cross-sectional view of the operating unit taken along line LXIV-LXIV of FIG. 399; FIG. 399 is a cross-sectional view of the operating unit taken along line LXIV-LXIV of FIG. 399; FIG. 399 is a cross-sectional view of the game board and the action unit taken along line LXVII-LXVII in FIG. 399; FIG. 399 is a cross-sectional view of the game board and the action unit taken along line LXVII-LXVII in FIG. 399; FIG. 399 is a cross-sectional view of the game board and the action unit taken along line LXVII-LXVII in FIG. 399; (a) is a front view of the distribution unit in 19th Embodiment, (b) is a rear view of a distribution unit. (a) is a front view of the distribution unit in 20th Embodiment, (b) is a rear view of a distribution unit. FIG. 21 is a partially enlarged front view of the game board in the twenty-first embodiment; FIG. 436 is a partial cross-sectional view of the game board taken along line LXXIII-LXXIII in FIG. 435; FIG. 399 is a partial cross-sectional view of the pachinko machine in the twenty-second embodiment along the line corresponding to the LV-LV line in FIG. 399; FIG. 399 is a partial cross-sectional view of the pachinko machine along the line corresponding to the LV-LV line in FIG. 399; (a) to (c) are schematic side views of the guide portion and the L-shaped elongated hole, which schematically show the guide portion and the L-shaped elongated hole in the twenty-third embodiment. (a) to (c) schematically show the second long hole, the curved long hole, the third long hole, the upper part of the first long hole, and the lower part of the first long hole in the twenty-fourth embodiment. FIG. 4 is a schematic side view of a long hole, a third long hole, an upper portion of the first long hole, and a lower portion of the first long hole; 400(a) and (b) are partial cross-sectional views of the displacement member and the light emitting operation rendering unit in the twenty-fifth embodiment taken along the line corresponding to line LXXVIIIa-LXXVIIIa in FIG. (a) and (b) are front views of a rotating member and attitude detection means in a twenty-sixth embodiment. It is a front view of a pachinko machine in a twenty-seventh embodiment. FIG. 22 is a front view of a game board of a pachinko machine in a twenty-seventh embodiment; It is a partially enlarged front view of the sorting device. It is a rear view of the pachinko machine in 27th Embodiment. (a) to (d) are schematic diagrams schematically showing procedures for changing settings in the twenty-seventh embodiment, and (e) to (g) are settings confirmation in the twenty-seventh embodiment. FIG. 2 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the procedure for (a) is a diagram schematically showing area division setting and valid line setting of a display screen, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of an actual display screen. (a) is a diagram showing an example of the display mode of the pending prefetch effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the twenty-seventh embodiment, and (b) is the third symbol display device in the twenty-seventh embodiment. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of a display mode of a pending prefetch effect displayed at 81. FIG. (a) is a diagram showing an example of the display mode when reaching the holding upper limit displayed in the third symbol display device 81 in the twenty-seventh embodiment, and (b) is the third symbol display in the twenty-seventh embodiment It is the figure which showed an example of the display mode in case there exists a jackpot pending|hold when the holding|maintenance upper limit reached|attained displayed on the apparatus 81. FIG. (a) is a diagram showing an example of the display mode during the SP time displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the twenty-seventh embodiment, and (b) is the third symbol display device in the twenty-seventh embodiment. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of a display mode of the 30th rotation during the SP time displayed at 81; It is a diagram showing an example of the display mode of the variation effect of the 30th rotation during the SP time after pressing the frame button 22 displayed in the third symbol display device 81 in the twenty-seventh embodiment, (b) is the second FIG. 27 is a diagram schematically showing the relationship between the type of look-ahead effect and the look-ahead prohibited period in the twenty-seventh embodiment. (a) is a diagram showing an example of the display mode of the variation effect at the end of the SP time when the remaining variation time displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the twenty-seventh embodiment is 20 seconds or more, b) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode during a suggestive effect high certainty period displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the twenty-seventh embodiment. FIG. 32 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a setting suggestion effect during SP time in the twenty-seventh embodiment; (a) to (d) are timing charts showing the passage of time from power-on and the flow of the variable effect in the twenty-seventh embodiment. (a) is a diagram showing an example of the display mode of the 81st high-speed variation mode in the probability variation state displayed in the third symbol display device 81 in the twenty-seventh embodiment, and (b) is It is a diagram showing an example of the display mode of the 81st special figure variation is 6 seconds off variation in the probability variation state displayed in the third symbol display device 81 in the twenty-seventh embodiment. (a) is a diagram showing an example of the display mode of the high-speed variation mode when the 81st special figure variation is a variation per 12 seconds in the probability variation state displayed in the third symbol display device 81 in the 27th embodiment There is, (b) is a diagram showing an example of the display mode of the pseudo winning variation effect (6 seconds) that is executed after the end of the pseudo high speed variation displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the twenty-seventh embodiment. (a-1) to (c-2) are timing charts showing the flow of effects executed when the high-speed fluctuation period is set in the twenty-seventh embodiment. (a) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode during a jackpot game displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the twenty-seventh embodiment, and (b) is a third symbol display device in the twenty-seventh embodiment. It is the figure which showed an example of the display mode of acquisition of the predetermined number of prize balls during the jackpot game displayed in 81. FIG. (a) is a diagram showing an example of an additional privilege display screen during a jackpot game displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the twenty-seventh embodiment; It is a schematic diagram which showed the privilege content typically. (a) is a diagram showing an example of the display mode at the end of the jackpot during the SP time displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the twenty-seventh embodiment, and (b) is a diagram showing the It is the figure which showed an example of the display mode at the time of the jackpot completion at the time of SP time omission displayed on the 3-symbol display device 81. FIG. FIG. 22 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of a pachinko machine in a twenty-seventh embodiment; FIG. 21 is a diagram showing an outline of various counters in the twenty-seventh embodiment; FIG. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing part of the contents of the ROM of the main controller in the twenty-seventh embodiment, and (b) is a part of the contents of the RAM of the main controller in the twenty-seventh embodiment. It is the schematic diagram which showed the part typically. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a special symbol jackpot random number table in the twenty-seventh embodiment, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a normal symbol random number table in the twenty-seventh embodiment. be. It is a schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the jackpot classification selection table in 27th Embodiment. FIG. 11 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a variation pattern selection table in a twenty-seventh embodiment, and (b) schematically shows a normal variation pattern table which is part of the variation pattern selection table in the twenty-seventh embodiment; It is a schematic diagram shown, and (c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a time-saving/probability variable table which is a part of the variation pattern selection table in the twenty-seventh embodiment. FIG. 23 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a high-speed variation variation pattern selection table which is a part of the variation pattern selection table in the twenty-seventh embodiment; FIG. 23 is a schematic diagram schematically showing a variation pattern scenario table in the twenty-seventh embodiment; (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing part of the contents of the ROM of the audio ramp control device in the twenty-seventh embodiment, and (b) is the contents of the RAM of the audio ramp control device in the twenty-seventh embodiment. is a schematic diagram schematically showing a part of. FIG. 22 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an effect switching table in the twenty-seventh embodiment; FIG. FIG. 32 is a schematic diagram schematically showing a setting suggestion effect selection table in the twenty-seventh embodiment; (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a look-ahead prohibition period selection table in the twenty-seventh embodiment, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a hold upper limit effect selection table in the twenty-seventh embodiment. is. It is a schematic diagram which showed typically the number selection table of the production|presentation in 27th Embodiment. FIG. 24 is a schematic diagram schematically showing a mission selection table in the twenty-seventh embodiment; FIG. 23 is a schematic diagram schematically showing a promotion point selection table in the twenty-seventh embodiment; FIG. It is a schematic diagram schematically showing a promotion effect selection table in the twenty-seventh embodiment. FIG. 20 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of a clock device according to a twenty-seventh embodiment; FIG. FIG. 22 is a schematic diagram schematically showing a register table in the twenty-seventh embodiment; FIG. FIG. 21 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of a display control device in a twenty-seventh embodiment; FIG. (a) to (c) are explanatory diagrams for explaining a power-on image. (a) to (d) are explanatory diagrams for explaining an image during boot processing. (a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining a rear surface A, and (b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining a rear surface B. FIG. FIG. 24 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a display data table in the twenty-seventh embodiment; FIG. FIG. 32 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a transfer data table in the twenty-seventh embodiment; FIG. FIG. 32 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a drawing list in the twenty-seventh embodiment; FIG. 29 is a flow chart showing timer interrupt processing executed by the MPU in the main control unit in the twenty-seventh embodiment; It is the flowchart which showed the special design fluctuation|variation process performed by MPU in the main controller in 27th Embodiment. 29 is a flow chart showing variation execution determination processing executed by the MPU in the main controller in the twenty-seventh embodiment; It is the flowchart which showed the special design 1 fluctuation|variation start process performed by MPU in the main controller in 27th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the special symbol 2 fluctuation|variation start processing performed by MPU in the main controller in 27th Embodiment. 29 is a flow chart showing a starting winning process executed by an MPU in a main controller in a twenty-seventh embodiment; FIG. 20 is a flow chart showing prefetching processing executed by an MPU in a main controller in a twenty-seventh embodiment; FIG. It is the flowchart which showed the design variation processing normally performed by MPU in the main controller in 27th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the normal design variation start processing performed by MPU in the main controller in 27th Embodiment. 29 is a flow chart showing through gate passage processing executed by an MPU in the main controller in the twenty-seventh embodiment; 29 is a flow chart showing NMI interrupt processing executed by the MPU in the main controller in the twenty-seventh embodiment; FIG. 14 is a flow chart showing startup processing executed by an MPU in a main controller in a twenty-seventh embodiment; FIG. 29 is a flow chart showing initialization processing executed by the MPU in the main controller in the twenty-seventh embodiment; 29 is a flow chart showing set value control processing executed by the MPU in the main controller in the twenty-seventh embodiment; 29 is a flow chart showing main processing executed by an MPU in a main controller in a twenty-seventh embodiment; 29 is a flow chart showing a jackpot control process executed by the MPU in the main controller in the twenty-seventh embodiment; FIG. 22 is a flow chart showing start-up processing executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the twenty-seventh embodiment; FIG. 29 is a flow chart showing time acquisition processing executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the twenty-seventh embodiment; 29 is a flow chart showing standby processing executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the twenty-seventh embodiment; 29 is a flow chart showing main processing executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the twenty-seventh embodiment; 29 is a flow chart showing command determination processing executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the twenty-seventh embodiment; 29 is a flow chart showing a pending ball number command reception process executed by the MPU in the audio ramp control device in the twenty-seventh embodiment. 29 is a flow chart showing a look-ahead effect execution determination process executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the twenty-seventh embodiment. 29 is a flow chart showing winning command reception processing executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the twenty-seventh embodiment. 29 is a flow chart showing a jackpot-related process executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the twenty-seventh embodiment; 29 is a flow chart showing round effect setting processing executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the twenty-seventh embodiment; 29 is a flow chart showing stop processing executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the twenty-seventh embodiment; 29 is a flow chart showing boot completion processing executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the twenty-seventh embodiment; 29 is a flow chart showing a variable display setting process executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the twenty-seventh embodiment; FIG. 22 is a flow chart showing effect mode setting processing executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the twenty-seventh embodiment; FIG. It is the flowchart which showed the production|presentation setting processing for time reduction and probability variation performed by MPU in the sound lamp control apparatus in 27th Embodiment. 29 is a flow chart showing period effect setting processing executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the twenty-seventh embodiment; 29 is a flow chart showing stop type effect setting processing executed by an MPU in a sound lamp control device in a twenty-seventh embodiment; 29 is a flow chart showing frame button input monitoring/effect processing executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the twenty-seventh embodiment; 29 is a flow chart showing elapsed time confirmation processing executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the twenty-seventh embodiment; 29 is a flow chart showing specialized mode setting processing executed by an MPU in the audio lamp control device in the twenty-seventh embodiment; 29 is a flow chart showing main processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the twenty-seventh embodiment; 29 is a flow chart showing boot processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the twenty-seventh embodiment; (a) is a flowchart showing command interrupt processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the twenty-seventh embodiment; (b) is a flow chart executed by the MPU in the display control device in the twenty-seventh embodiment; 4 is a flow chart showing V interrupt processing. 29 is a flow chart showing command determination processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the twenty-seventh embodiment; (a) is a flowchart showing a variation pattern command process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the twenty-seventh embodiment, (b) is executed by the MPU in the display control device in the twenty-seventh embodiment 10 is a flowchart showing stop type command processing. (a) is a flowchart showing opening command processing executed by an MPU in a display control device in a twenty-seventh embodiment, and (b) is a flow chart executed by an MPU in a display control device in a twenty-seventh embodiment; FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing round number command processing; FIG. 29 is a flow chart showing ending command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the twenty-seventh embodiment; (a) is a flow chart showing fluctuation stop command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the twenty-seventh embodiment; (b) is a flow chart executed by the MPU in the display control device in the twenty-seventh embodiment; It is a flow chart showing a notification command process. (a) is a flowchart showing rear image change command processing executed by an MPU in a display control device according to a twenty-seventh embodiment; (b) is a flowchart executed by an MPU in a display control device in a twenty-seventh embodiment; 10 is a flow chart showing error command processing performed. 29 is a flowchart showing display setting processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the twenty-seventh embodiment; 29 is a flowchart showing warning image setting processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the twenty-seventh embodiment; 29 is a flow chart showing pointer update processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the twenty-seventh embodiment; (a) is a flowchart showing transfer setting processing executed by an MPU in a display control device in a twenty-seventh embodiment, and (b) is a flow chart executed by an MPU in a display control device in a twenty-seventh embodiment; 10 is a flowchart showing resident image transfer setting processing; 29 is a flow chart showing normal image transfer setting processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the twenty-seventh embodiment; 29 is a flow chart showing drawing processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the twenty-seventh embodiment; (a) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode during a jackpot game displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the twenty-eighth embodiment, and (b) is a third symbol display device in the twenty-eighth embodiment. 81 is a diagram showing an example of a display mode of a lucky effect lottery displayed at 81. FIG. (a) is a diagram showing an example of the display mode of the holding consecutive effect when there is no overlap with the SP time period displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the twenty-eighth embodiment; It is the figure which showed an example of the display mode during the pending|holding continuous production|presentation displayed in the 3rd design display device 81 in 28 embodiment. It is a diagram showing an example of a display mode during the shortened hold continuous effect when part overlaps with the SP time displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the twenty-eighth embodiment. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing part of the contents of the ROM of the audio ramp control device in the twenty-eighth embodiment, and (b) is the contents of the RAM of the audio ramp control device in the twenty-eighth embodiment. is a schematic diagram schematically showing a part of. FIG. 20 is a schematic diagram schematically showing a prefetching restriction period table in the twenty-eighth embodiment; It is a schematic diagram schematically showing an alternative effect selection table in the twenty-eighth embodiment. FIG. 20 is a flow chart showing a jackpot-related process 2 executed by an MPU in the sound lamp control device in the twenty-eighth embodiment; FIG. 29 is a flow chart showing round effect setting processing 2 executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the twenty-eighth embodiment; 29 is a flow chart showing a holding continuous effect setting process executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the twenty-eighth embodiment; 29 is a flow chart showing alternative effect setting processing executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the twenty-eighth embodiment; (a) is a diagram showing an example of a look-ahead effect screen during SP time preparation displayed in the third symbol display device 81 in a modification of the twenty-eighth embodiment, and (b) is a diagram of the twenty-eighth embodiment. It is the figure which showed an example of the display mode at the time of entering SP time during the look-ahead production|presentation displayed in the 3rd pattern display apparatus 81 in a modification. (a) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen displayed when the display mode of the pending symbol changes to the specific display mode by the pending change effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the twenty-ninth embodiment. and (b) shows an example of a display screen displayed when eight reserved memories are acquired in a state in which reserved patterns in a specific display mode are displayed on the third pattern display device 81 in the twenty-ninth embodiment. (c) is an example of the display screen displayed when the specific display mode changes to the normal display mode by the pending change effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the twenty-ninth embodiment. (d) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen displayed when the display mode of the pending symbol changes from the specific display mode to the special display mode by the pending change effect. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing part of the contents of the ROM of the audio ramp control device according to the twenty-ninth embodiment, and (b) is the contents of the RAM of the audio ramp control device according to the twenty-ninth embodiment. is a schematic diagram schematically showing a part of. FIG. 32 is a schematic diagram schematically showing a pending change effect selection table in the twenty-ninth embodiment; FIG. FIG. 20 is a flow chart showing a pending ball count command process 3 executed by an MPU in the audio ramp control device in the twenty-ninth embodiment; FIG. 29 is a flow chart showing a hold mode setting process executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the twenty-ninth embodiment; 29 is a flow chart showing winning command reception processing 3 executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the twenty-ninth embodiment; 29 is a flow chart showing a hold change effect setting process executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the twenty-ninth embodiment; 29 is a flow chart showing variable display setting processing 3 executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the twenty-ninth embodiment; 29 is a flow chart showing liquid crystal presentation execution management processing 3 executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the twenty-ninth embodiment; (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a part of the contents of the ROM of the audio ramp control device in the thirtieth embodiment, and (b) is the contents of the RAM of the audio ramp control device in the thirtieth embodiment. is a schematic diagram schematically showing a part of. FIG. 32 is a schematic diagram schematically showing a variation pattern selection 4 table in the thirtieth embodiment; FIG. 32 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an end mode selection table in the thirtieth embodiment; 29 is a flowchart showing elapsed time confirmation processing 4 executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the thirtieth embodiment; FIG. 22 is a flow chart showing end screen setting processing executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the thirtieth embodiment; FIG. FIG. 22 is a flow chart showing startup processing executed by an MPU in the main controller in the thirty-first embodiment; FIG. FIG. 22 is a flow chart showing start-up processing executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the 31st embodiment; FIG. FIG. 16 is a flow chart showing standby processing 5 executed by an MPU in the audio lamp control device in the 31st embodiment; FIG. FIG. 22 is a schematic diagram schematically showing part of the contents of a ROM of an audio ramp control device in a thirty-second embodiment; It is a schematic diagram which showed typically the production|presentation switching 6 table in 32nd Embodiment. FIG. 16 is a schematic diagram schematically showing a prefetching prohibited period selection 6 table in the thirty-second embodiment; 29 is a flow chart showing a look-ahead effect execution determination process 6 executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the 32nd embodiment. FIG. 22 is a flow chart showing winning command reception processing 6 executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the 32nd embodiment; FIG. (a) is a diagram showing an example of the display mode of the first 1.5-second pseudo-off fluctuation in the high-speed fluctuation mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the thirty-third embodiment, and (b) is a diagram showing 14 is a diagram showing an example of a display mode of the second 1.5-second pseudo-off fluctuation in the high-speed fluctuation mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the thirty-third embodiment. FIG. (a) to (f) are timing charts showing display contents of reserved symbols during the high-speed variation mode in the 33rd embodiment. FIG. 23 is a schematic diagram schematically showing part of the contents of a RAM of the audio ramp control device in the thirty-third embodiment; FIG. 16 is a flow chart showing winning command reception processing 7 executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the 33rd embodiment; FIG. 29 is a flow chart showing a winning effect setting process during high-speed display executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the 33rd embodiment. 29 is a flow chart showing stop processing 7 executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the 33rd embodiment; It is the flowchart which showed the production|presentation setting processing 7 for time reduction and probability variation performed by MPU in the sound lamp control apparatus in 33rd Embodiment. 29 is a flow chart showing liquid crystal presentation execution management processing 7 executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the 33rd embodiment. 29 is a flow chart showing a pseudo hold effect setting process executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the 33rd embodiment; (a) is a diagram showing an example of the display mode after the boot process during the setting change in the high-speed fluctuation mode displayed on the third pattern display device 81 in the thirty-fourth embodiment; It is the figure which showed an example of the display mode at the time of raising a volume level during setting change displayed in the 3rd pattern display apparatus 81 in 34 embodiment. It is a front view of the pachinko machine in 35th Embodiment. FIG. 20 is a front view of a game board of a pachinko machine in a thirty-fifth embodiment; (a) is an enlarged front view of the vicinity of the sorting device when the electric accessory is buried (stored) in the game board in the thirty-fifth embodiment; (b) is the thirty-fifth embodiment; It is an enlarged front view of the vicinity of the sorting device when the electric accessory in the form is in a state of protruding to the front side in the front view with respect to the game board. (a) is a timing chart showing the flow of the electric accessary product operation mode when the game state in the thirty-fifth embodiment is the normal state, and (b) is a timing chart showing the flow of the game state in the thirty-fifth embodiment. It is a timing chart showing the flow of the electric accessary product operation mode in the case of the variable probability state. It is a rear view of the pachinko machine in 35th Embodiment. FIG. 22 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of a pachinko machine in a thirty-fifth embodiment; (a) is a diagram schematically showing the area division setting and effective line setting of the display screen of the third symbol display device in the thirty-fifth embodiment, and (b) is the third symbol in the thirty-fifth embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which showed an example of the display mode displayed with a display apparatus. (a) is a diagram showing an example of the display contents of the RUSH acquisition challenge effect displayed by the third symbol display device in the thirty-fifth embodiment, and (b) is the third symbol display device in the thirty-fifth embodiment. It is the figure which showed an example of the display content at the time of the RUSH acquisition challenge success displayed by . It is the figure which showed an example of the display content at the time of RUSH acquisition challenge failure displayed with the 3rd pattern display apparatus in 35th Embodiment. (a) is a diagram showing an example of the display content during super RUSH displayed by the third pattern display device in the thirty-fifth embodiment, and (b) is the third pattern display device in the thirty-fifth embodiment It is the figure which showed an example of the display content in super RUSH at the time of winning the jackpot D of non-reaching of the time reduction limit displayed. (a) is a diagram showing an example of the display content during super RUSH when there is one remaining time until the time saving limit displayed on the third symbol display device in the 35th embodiment, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of the display content It is a diagram showing an example of the display content during super RUSH when winning the jackpot D of reaching the time saving limit displayed on the third symbol display device in the 35th embodiment. (a) is a diagram showing an example of the display contents during the revenge mode displayed by the third symbol display device in the thirty-fifth embodiment, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of display contents in the third symbol display device in the thirty-fifth embodiment. It is a diagram showing an example of the display contents in the revenge mode when winning the big win C to be displayed. (a) is a diagram showing an example of the display contents during the revenge mode when winning the jackpots A and B or the small hits displayed on the third symbol display device in the thirty-fifth embodiment, and (b) is a diagram showing an example. 14 is a diagram showing an example of display contents during the revenge mode when winning the jackpots A, B or the small hits displayed on the third symbol display device in the thirty-fifth embodiment and when the transition condition is established. FIG. (a) is a diagram showing an example of the display contents during the challenge mode displayed by the third symbol display device in the thirty-fifth embodiment, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of display contents in the third symbol display device in the thirty-fifth embodiment. It is a figure showing an example of the display contents in the challenge mode when winning the big win C to be displayed. (a) is a diagram showing an example of the display contents during the challenge mode when winning the jackpot A, B or the small hit displayed on the third symbol display device in the thirty-fifth embodiment, and (b) 14 is a diagram showing an example of display contents during the challenge mode when the jackpot C displayed on the third symbol display device in the thirty-fifth embodiment is won and the transition condition is established. FIG. It is the figure which showed an example of the display content in challenge mode at the time of winning the jackpots A and B displayed on the 3rd symbol display apparatus in 35th Embodiment, and transition conditions being satisfied. (a) is a diagram showing an example of the display content during RUSH displayed by the third pattern display device in the thirty-fifth embodiment, and (b) is displayed by the third pattern display device in the thirty-fifth embodiment. It is the figure which showed an example of the display content when the lottery|lottery result is out by remaining 10 times to the time saving limit performed. (a) is a diagram showing an example of the display content during RUSH when winning the jackpot D displayed on the third symbol display device in the thirty-fifth embodiment, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of the display content in the thirty-fifth embodiment It is the figure which showed an example of the display content when winning the jackpot D displayed on a 3rd design display apparatus, and transition conditions are satisfied. (a) is 5 times remaining to the probability variation limit displayed on the 3rd symbol display device in the 35th embodiment, and 10 times remaining to the short time limit, and the lottery result is out of RUSH Display contents of It is a diagram showing an example, (b) is an example of the display content during RUSH in the case of one time remaining to the probability variation limit displayed in the third symbol display device in the thirty-fifth embodiment, and one time remaining to the time saving limit It is a figure showing. It is the figure which showed an example of the display content in RUSH at the time of winning the big hit D which reaches|attains the probability variation limit and time-saving limit displayed with the 3rd symbol display apparatus in 35th Embodiment. (a) is a diagram showing an example of display contents during the tenth change after entering the EXTRA mode displayed by the third symbol display device in the thirty-fifth embodiment, and (b) is It is the figure which showed an example of the display content in EXTRA mode at the time of winning the jackpot D displayed by the 3rd symbol display apparatus in 35th Embodiment. (a) is a diagram showing an example of display contents during the EXTRA mode when the jackpot is not won or when the small win is won, displayed on the third symbol display device in the 35th embodiment, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of the display contents. 14 is a diagram showing an example of display contents at the end of the EXTRA mode displayed on the third symbol display device in the thirty-fifth embodiment; FIG. (a) is a diagram showing an example of display contents during the SPECIAL mode displayed by the third pattern display device in the thirty-fifth embodiment, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of display contents in the third pattern display device in the thirty-fifth embodiment. It is the figure which showed an example of the display content at the time of winning the jackpot D displayed. It is the timing chart which showed the flow of the game state and execution production|presentation in 35th Embodiment. It is the timing chart which showed the flow of the game at the time of pulling back during the 2nd probability variation in 35th Embodiment. It is the timing chart which showed the flow of the game at the time of pulling back during time saving in 35th Embodiment. It is the timing chart which showed the flow of the game when the 1st probability variation and the time saving game in 35th Embodiment are complete|finished simultaneously. It is the figure which showed typically the outline|summary of the production|presentation mode in 35th Embodiment. FIG. 22 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the game flow of the pachinko machine in the thirty-fifth embodiment; FIG. 22 is a diagram schematically showing configurations of various counters in the thirty-fifth embodiment; FIG. 22 is a block diagram showing a configuration of a ROM of a main controller in a thirty-fifth embodiment; FIG. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the first winning random number table set in the ROM of the main controller in the 35th embodiment, (b) is the main controller in the 35th embodiment is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the special symbol 1 random number table set in the ROM of, (c) is the contents of the special symbol 2 random number table set in the ROM of the main control device in the 35th embodiment is a schematic diagram showing, and (d) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the second winning random number table set in the ROM of the main controller in the thirty-fifth embodiment. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the first winning type selection table set in the ROM of the main controller in the 35th embodiment, (b) is the main control in the 35th embodiment It is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a special figure 1 jackpot type selection table set in the ROM of the device, and (c) is a special figure 2 jackpot set in the ROM of the main control device in the 35th embodiment FIG. 4 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a type selection table; (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of a variation pattern table set in the ROM of the main controller in the 35th embodiment, (b) is the ROM of the main controller in the 35th embodiment is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a normal fluctuation pattern table set to . (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a time saving variation pattern table set in the ROM of the main controller in the 35th embodiment, and (b) is the main controller in the 35th embodiment is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the first probability variation variation pattern table set in the ROM of. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the second probability variation variation pattern table set in the ROM of the main controller in the thirty-fifth embodiment, (b) is the main in the thirty-fifth embodiment It is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a special variation pattern table set in the ROM of the control device. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the time reduction provision table set to ROM of the main controller in 35th Embodiment. FIG. 23 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a variation pattern scenario table set in the ROM of the main controller in the thirty-fifth embodiment; FIG. 22 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a win operation table set in the ROM of the main controller in the thirty-fifth embodiment; It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the operation table per normal figure set to ROM of the main controller in 35th Embodiment. FIG. 22 is a block diagram showing a configuration of a RAM of a main controller in the thirty-fifth embodiment; FIG. (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM of the audio ramp control device according to the thirty-fifth embodiment; (b) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM of the audio ramp control device according to the thirty-fifth embodiment; be. It is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the production mode selection table set in the ROM of the audio lamp control device in the thirty-fifth embodiment. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a stock notification number selection table set in the ROM of the sound lamp control device in the thirty-fifth embodiment, and (b) is a sound lamp in the thirty-fifth embodiment. FIG. 4 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a challenge mode transition table set in the ROM of the control device; FIG. 20 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of a display control device in a thirty-fifth embodiment; FIG. (a) to (c) are explanatory diagrams for explaining a power-on image. (a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the rear surface A, and (b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the rear surfaces BD. FIG. 4 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a display data table; FIG. 4 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a transfer data table; FIG. FIG. 4 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a drawing list; 4 is a flow chart showing timer interrupt processing executed by the MPU in the main control unit; It is a flow chart showing a special symbol variation process executed by the MPU in the main controller. It is a flow chart showing a first special symbol variation start process executed by the MPU in the main control device. It is a flow chart showing a first special symbol jackpot determination process executed by the MPU in the main control device. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure 1 deviation fluctuation|variation process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flow chart showing a first special symbol variation pattern selection process executed by the MPU in the main control device. It is a flow chart which shows the special figure 1 deviation fluctuation pattern selection processing which is executed by the MPU in the main controller. It is a flow chart showing a process during execution of the first special symbol variation executed by the MPU in the main control device. It is a flow chart showing the first special symbol variation stop processing executed by the MPU in the main control device. It is a flowchart which shows special figure 1 deviation stop processing performed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flow chart showing a special figure 2 discarding process performed by the MPU in the main control device. It is a flow chart which shows time saving update processing performed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flow chart showing a second special symbol variation start process executed by the MPU in the main control device. It is a flow chart showing a second special symbol jackpot determination process executed by the MPU in the main control device. It is a flow chart showing a second special symbol variation pattern selection process executed by the MPU in the main control device. It is a flow chart showing a second special symbol variation in-execution process that is executed by the MPU in the main control device. It is a flow chart showing a second special symbol variation stop process executed by the MPU in the main control device. It is a flow chart which shows the 2nd time saving update processing performed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flow chart which shows the start prize-winning processing performed by MPU in a main control unit. 4 is a flowchart showing first prefetching processing executed by an MPU in a main controller; It is a flow chart showing normal symbol variation processing that is executed by the MPU in the main controller. 4 is a flow chart showing through gate passage processing executed by an MPU in a main controller; 4 is a flow chart showing NMI interrupt processing executed by the MPU in the main controller; 4 is a flow chart showing start-up processing executed by an MPU in the main controller; 4 is a flowchart showing main processing executed by an MPU in a main controller; It is a flowchart which shows a jackpot control process performed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flow chart which shows big hit operation setting processing performed by MPU in a main control device. It is a flow chart showing a jackpot ending process executed by the MPU in the main control device. It is a flow chart which shows probability variation limit processing performed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flow chart which shows time saving limit processing performed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flow chart which shows small hit control processing performed by MPU in a main control unit. Fig. 10 is a flow chart showing a start-up process performed by the MPU in the audio ramp controller; 4 is a flow chart showing main processing executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device; 4 is a flow chart showing command determination processing executed by an MPU in an audio lamp control device; Fig. 10 is a flow chart illustrating status command processing performed by the MPU in the audio lamp controller; It is a flow chart showing a game state update process executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device. 4 is a flow chart showing limit information update processing executed by the MPU in the audio ramp control device; It is the flowchart which showed the production|presentation mode setting process performed by MPU in a sound lamp control apparatus. It is the flow chart which showed time saving related processing which is performed by MPU in an audio lamp control device. Fig. 10 is a flow chart showing the hit-related processing performed by the MPU in the audio ramp controller; It is the flowchart which showed the jackpot-related processing performed by MPU in a sound lamp control device. It is the flowchart which showed the small hitting related processing which is executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device. 4 is a flow chart showing a variable display setting process executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device; It is the flowchart which showed the special figure 1 fluctuation production setting processing which is executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device. It is the flowchart which showed the special figure 2 fluctuation production setting processing which is executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device. 4 is a flow chart showing liquid crystal execution management processing executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device; 4 is a flowchart showing main processing executed by an MPU in the display control device; 4 is a flowchart showing boot processing executed by an MPU in the display control device; (a) is a flow chart showing command interrupt processing executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flow chart showing V interrupt processing executed by the MPU in the display control device. be. 4 is a flowchart showing command determination processing executed by an MPU in a display control device; (a) is a flowchart showing a variation pattern command process executed by the MPU in the display control device, (b) is a flowchart showing a stop type command process executed by the MPU in the display control device be. (a) is a flowchart showing opening command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing round number command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device. . 4 is a flowchart showing ending command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device; (a) is a flow chart showing effect mode command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flow chart showing notification command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device. . (a) is a flow chart showing back image change command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flow chart showing error command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device; be. 4 is a flowchart showing display setting processing executed by an MPU in the display control device; 4 is a flowchart showing warning image setting processing executed by an MPU in a display control device; 4 is a flow chart showing pointer update processing executed by the MPU in the display control device; (a) is a flow chart showing a transfer setting process executed by an MPU in a display control device, and (b) is a flow chart showing a resident image transfer setting process executed by an MPU in a display control device; be. 10 is a flowchart showing normal image transfer setting processing executed by the MPU in the display control device; 4 is a flowchart showing drawing processing executed by an MPU in a display control device; (a) is a diagram showing an example of the display content when the special figure 1 high-speed fluctuation zone is set with 12 remaining times to the probability variation limit displayed on the third symbol display device in the 36th embodiment, (b) is a diagram showing an example of the display content when the special figure 1 high-speed fluctuation zone is set with two remaining times until the probability variation limit displayed on the third symbol display device in the thirty-sixth embodiment. (a) is a diagram schematically showing the transition of average paid balls in the thirty-sixth embodiment, and (b) schematically shows the transition of average paid balls in the thirty-sixth embodiment. It is a diagram. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the second probability variation disadvantageous variation pattern table set in the ROM of the main controller in the thirty-sixth embodiment, (b) is a schematic diagram in the thirty-sixth embodiment It is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a second probability variation advantageous variation pattern table set in the ROM of the main controller. FIG. 23 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a variation pattern scenario 2 table set in the ROM of the main controller in the thirty-sixth embodiment; It is the flowchart which showed the special figure 1 fluctuation production|presentation setting process 2 performed by MPU in the sound lamp control apparatus in 36th embodiment. (a) is a diagram schematically showing the transition of the average number of balls released in the first modification of the thirty-sixth embodiment, and (b) is the average number in the second modification of the thirty-sixth embodiment It is the figure which showed typically the transition of the payout ball. FIG. 32 is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in the thirty-seventh embodiment; FIG. 32 is an enlarged front view of a ball distribution accessory in the thirty-seventh embodiment; FIG. 24 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the game flow of the pachinko machine in the thirty-seventh embodiment; (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the first winning random number 3 table set in the ROM of the main controller in the thirty-seventh embodiment, (b) is a main control in the thirty-seventh embodiment It is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a special symbol 1 random number 3 table set in the ROM of the device, (c) is a special symbol 2 random number 3 set in the ROM of the main control device in the 37th embodiment FIG. 12D is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a table, and FIG. 14D is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a second winning random number 3 table set in the ROM of the main controller in the thirty-seventh embodiment; be. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a special figure 1 jackpot type selection 3 table set in the ROM of the main controller in the 37th embodiment, and (b) is a schematic diagram in the 37th embodiment It is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a special figure 2 jackpot type selection table set in the ROM of the main controller. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the time saving variation pattern 3 table set in the ROM of the main controller in the 37th embodiment, (b) is a main control in the 37th embodiment It is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the first probability variation variation pattern 3 table set in the ROM of the device. It is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the second probability variation variation pattern 3 table set in the ROM of the main controller in the thirty-seventh embodiment. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the time reduction provision 3 table set to ROM of the main controller in 37th Embodiment. FIG. 32 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a variation pattern scenario 3 table set in the ROM of the main controller in the thirty-seventh embodiment; FIG. 22 is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in the thirty-eighth embodiment; FIG. 32 is an exploded perspective view of the variable winning device in the thirty-eighth embodiment; (a) is a cross-sectional view of the variable winning device of the La-La cross section in the 38th embodiment, (b) is the Lb-Lb cross-sectional view, and (c) is the variable winning device in the 38th embodiment. is a top view of the. (a)-(b) are rear views of a part of the variable winning device in the thirty-eighth embodiment. (a) is a diagram showing an example of the display content during the V winning challenge during the first probability variation when the time saving limit is not reached, which is displayed on the third symbol display device in the thirty-eighth embodiment, and (b) is a diagram showing an example. , It is a diagram showing an example of the display contents during the V winning challenge during the second probability variation when there are 15 times remaining until the probability variation limit displayed on the third symbol display device in the thirty-eighth embodiment. It is a diagram showing an example of the display content during the V winning challenge during the second probability variation when there are two times remaining to the probability variation limit displayed on the third symbol display device in the thirty-eighth embodiment. FIG. 22 is a block diagram showing the configuration of a RAM of a main controller in a thirty-eighth embodiment; FIG. FIG. 20 is a flow chart showing a jackpot control process 4 executed by an MPU in a main controller in a thirty-eighth embodiment; FIG. 29 is a flow chart showing a jackpot operation setting process 4 executed by the MPU in the main controller in the thirty-eighth embodiment; 29 is a flow chart showing probability variation limit update processing 4 executed by the MPU in the main controller in the thirty-eighth embodiment; FIG. 20 is a flow chart showing notification processing executed by an MPU in a main controller in the thirty-eighth embodiment; FIG. 29 is a flow chart showing prize winning processing executed by an MPU in a main controller in a thirty-eighth embodiment; 29 is a flow chart showing abnormality processing executed by the MPU in the main controller in the thirty-eighth embodiment; 29 is a flowchart showing a jackpot-related process 4 executed by the MPU in the main controller in the thirty-eighth embodiment; 29 is a flow chart showing round effect setting processing executed by the MPU in the main controller in the thirty-eighth embodiment; (a) is the display content during the variation production when winning the jackpot C5 during the second probability variation when the remaining number of probability variation limits displayed on the third symbol display device in the thirty-ninth embodiment is 15 or more times. It is a diagram showing an example, (b), when the remaining number of probability variation limit displayed in the third symbol display device in the thirty-ninth embodiment is 4 times to 14 times, during the second probability variation jackpot C5 It is a diagram showing an example of the display content during the variable effect in the case of winning . (a) is, when the remaining number of times of probability variation limit displayed on the third symbol display device in the 39th embodiment is 1 to 3 times, during the variation production in the case of winning the jackpot C5 during the second probability variation It is a diagram showing an example of the display content, (b) is the second probability variation when the remaining number of probability variation limit and the remaining number of time saving limit displayed on the third symbol display device in the thirty-ninth embodiment are the same It is the figure which showed an example of the display content during the fluctuation|variation production|presentation at the time of winning the jackpot C5 inside. It is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a special figure 1 jackpot type selection 5 table set in the ROM of the main controller in the thirty-ninth embodiment. It is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a special figure 2 jackpot type selection 5 table set in the ROM of the main controller in the thirty-ninth embodiment. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the time saving variation pattern 5 table set in the ROM of the main controller in the 39th embodiment, (b) is the main control in the 39th embodiment It is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the first probability variation variation pattern 5 table set in the ROM of the device. It is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the second probability variation variation pattern 5 table set in the ROM of the main controller in the thirty-ninth embodiment. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the time reduction provision 5 table set to ROM of the main controller in 39th Embodiment. FIG. 23 is a block diagram showing the configuration of a ROM of an audio ramp control device in a thirty-ninth embodiment; FIG. FIG. 24 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a background mode selection table set in the ROM of the audio lamp control device in the thirty-ninth embodiment; 29 is a flowchart showing probability variation limit update processing 5 executed by the MPU in the main controller in the thirty-ninth embodiment; 29 is a flow chart showing time saving limit update processing 5 executed by the MPU in the main controller in the thirty-ninth embodiment; It is a flow chart showing a special figure 1 fluctuation effect setting process 5 executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the thirty-ninth embodiment. 29 is a flow chart showing limit remaining count suggestion mode determination processing executed by the MPU in the audio ramp control device in the thirty-ninth embodiment; It is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a special figure 1 jackpot type selection 6 table set in the ROM of the main controller in the fortieth embodiment. It is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a special figure 2 jackpot type selection 6 table set in the ROM of the main controller in the fortieth embodiment. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the time reduction provision 6 table set to ROM of the main controller in 40th Embodiment. 29 is a flow chart showing round effect setting processing 6 executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the 40th embodiment; (a) is the first variable middle time reduction A jackpot when the remaining number of times of the time reduction A limit displayed on the third symbol display device in the 41st embodiment is 4 times and the remaining number of times of the time reduction B limit is 5 times (b) is a diagram showing an example of the display content when winning, and (b) shows that the remaining number of times of the time saving A limit displayed on the third symbol display device in the 41st embodiment is 4 times, and the remaining time saving B limit is displayed. When the number of times is 5 times, it is a diagram showing an example of the display contents at the time of stopping the first variable time reduction A jackpot symbol. (a) is the display content during the first probability change when the remaining number of times of the time saving A limit displayed on the third symbol display device in the 41st embodiment is 1 time and the remaining number of times of the time saving B limit is 1 time It is a diagram showing an example, (b) is a diagram showing an example of the display content of the time-saving effect when the time-saving end condition displayed on the third symbol display device in the forty-first embodiment is satisfied. (a) is a timing chart showing the flow of the game when reaching the shortest time limit in the 41st embodiment, (b) is the longest period until reaching the time saving limit in the 41st embodiment It is a timing chart showing the flow of the game to become. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a special figure 1 jackpot type selection 7 table set in the ROM of the main controller in the 41st embodiment, and (b) is a schematic diagram in the 41st embodiment It is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the special figure 2 jackpot type selection 7 table set in the ROM of the main controller, (c) is set in the ROM of the main controller in the 41st embodiment FIG. 3 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a variation pattern table for FIG. 2; It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the time reduction provision 7 table set to ROM of the main controller in 41st Embodiment. FIG. 22 is a block diagram showing a configuration of a RAM of a main controller in the 41st embodiment; FIG. FIG. 22 is a block diagram showing a configuration of a RAM of an audio ramp control device in the 41st embodiment; FIG. 29 is a flow chart showing time saving limit update processing 7 executed by the MPU in the main controller in the 41st embodiment. 29 is a flowchart showing limit information update processing 7 executed by the MPU in the audio ramp control device in the 41st embodiment; It is the flowchart which showed the time reduction remaining frequency|count update process performed by MPU in the sound lamp control apparatus in 41st Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the production|presentation mode setting process 7 performed by MPU in the sound lamp control apparatus in 41st Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the special figure 2 fluctuation production|presentation setting process 7 performed by MPU in the sound lamp control apparatus in 41st Embodiment. (a) is an example of the display contents when the time saving A jackpot symbol stops when the remaining number of time saving A limit is 3 times during RUSH displayed on the third symbol display device in the 42nd embodiment. It is a diagram shown, (b) is when the time saving B jackpot pattern stops when the remaining number of time saving A limit is 3 times during RUSH displayed on the third pattern display device in the 42nd embodiment is a diagram showing an example of display contents of . FIG. 22 is a block diagram showing the configuration of a RAM of a main controller in the 42nd embodiment; FIG. (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM of the audio ramp control device according to the forty-second embodiment; (b) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM of the audio ramp control device according to the forty-second embodiment; be. FIG. 24 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of an enemy character selection table set in the ROM of the voice ramp control device in the 42nd embodiment; 29 is a flow chart showing time saving limit update processing 8 executed by the MPU in the main controller in the 42nd embodiment; FIG. 22 is a flow chart showing state command processing 8 executed by an MPU in the audio lamp control device in the 42nd embodiment; FIG. FIG. 16 is a flow chart showing a time saving remaining number update process 8 executed by an MPU in a sound lamp control device in a 42nd embodiment; FIG. It is the flowchart which showed the production|presentation mode setting process 8 performed by MPU in the sound lamp control apparatus in 42nd Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the special figure 2 fluctuation production|presentation setting process 8 performed by MPU in the sound lamp control apparatus in 42nd Embodiment. FIG. 22 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the game flow of the pachinko machine in the forty-third embodiment; It is the timing chart which showed the flow of the game of the time reduction limit frequency|count and game state transition in 43rd Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a special figure 1 jackpot type selection 9 table set in the ROM of the main controller in the 43rd embodiment. It is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a special figure 2 jackpot type selection 9 table set in the ROM of the main controller in the 43rd embodiment. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the first probability variation variation pattern 9 table set in the ROM of the main control device in the 43rd embodiment, (b) in the 43rd embodiment It is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the second probability variation variation pattern 9 table set in the ROM of the main controller. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the time reduction provision 9 table set to ROM of the main controller in 43rd Embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in the forty-fourth embodiment. FIG. 22 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the game flow of the pachinko machine in the forty-fourth embodiment; It is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a special figure 1 jackpot type selection 10 table set in the ROM of the main controller in the 44th embodiment. It is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the special figure 2 jackpot type selection 10 table set in the ROM of the main controller in the 44th embodiment. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the time saving variation pattern 10 table set in the ROM of the main controller in the 44th embodiment, (b) is the main control in the 44th embodiment It is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the first probability variation variation pattern 10 table set in the ROM of the device. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the time reduction provision 10 table set to ROM of the main controller in 44th Embodiment. FIG. 22 is a block diagram showing a configuration of a ROM of a main control device in a forty-fourth embodiment; FIG. It is a flow chart showing a special symbol variation process 10 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the forty-fourth embodiment. It is a flow chart showing a special symbol variation start process 10 executed by the MPU in the main controller in the forty-fourth embodiment. FIG. 22 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the game flow of the pachinko machine in the forty-fifth embodiment; It is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a special figure 1 jackpot type selection 11 table set in the ROM of the main controller in the 45th embodiment. It is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a special figure 2 jackpot type selection 11 table set in the ROM of the main controller in the 45th embodiment. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the time reduction provision 11 table set to ROM of the main controller in 45th Embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in the forty-sixth embodiment. (a) is an enlarged view of the right side area of the game board in the 46th embodiment, and (b) is an enlarged view of the right side area of the game board in the 46th embodiment. (a) is an enlarged view showing the flow of balls in the right area of the game board in the forty-sixth embodiment, and (b) is an enlarged view showing the flow of balls in the right area of the game board in the forty-sixth embodiment. (a) is an enlarged view showing the flow of balls in the right area of the game board in the forty-sixth embodiment, and (b) is an enlarged view showing the flow of balls in the right area of the game board in the forty-sixth embodiment. It is a figure which shows the content of the release pattern A per normal figure of the pachinko machine in 46th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the content of the release pattern B per normal figure of the pachinko machine in 46th Embodiment. FIG. 32 is a diagram showing a game flow of a pachinko machine in the forty-sixth embodiment; (a) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen when winning a jackpot in a pachinko machine in the forty-sixth embodiment, and (b) is an example of a display screen during a jackpot game in a pachinko machine in the forty-sixth embodiment. Fig. 3 shows. (a) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen at the end of a jackpot of a pachinko machine in the 46th embodiment, and (b) is an example of a game explanation screen in the time-saving B mode of the pachinko machine in the 46th embodiment. It is a figure showing. (a) is a diagram showing an example of the display screen during the time saving B mode of the pachinko machine in the 46th embodiment, (b) is a display screen during the time saving B mode of the pachinko machine in the 46th embodiment It is the figure which showed an example. (a) is a diagram showing an example of a game explanation screen in the time saving A mode of the pachinko machine in the 46th embodiment, and (b) is a display screen during the time saving A mode of the pachinko machine in the 46th embodiment. It is the figure which showed an example. (a) is a diagram showing an example of a treasure box opening effect screen of a pachinko machine in the forty-sixth embodiment, and (b) is an example of the effect display screen of the treasure box opening effect of a pachinko machine in the forty-sixth embodiment. Fig. 3 shows. (a) is a diagram showing an example of a presentation result display screen for opening a treasure box presentation of a pachinko machine in the forty-sixth embodiment, and (b) is an example of a mode type suggestion presentation screen of a pachinko machine in the forty-sixth embodiment. It is a figure showing. (a) is a diagram showing an example of an emphasized guidance effect screen of a pachinko machine in the forty-sixth embodiment, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of a special effect screen of a pachinko machine in the forty-sixth embodiment. . (a) is a diagram showing an example of the display during the time saving A mode of the pachinko machine in the 46th embodiment, (b) is an example of the display screen during the time saving A mode of the pachinko machine in the 46th embodiment It is a figure showing. (a) is a diagram showing an example of the final variation display during the time saving A mode of the pachinko machine in the 46th embodiment, (b) is the final variation during the time saving A mode of the pachinko machine in the 46th embodiment It is a figure showing an example of a display. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of the ROM in the main controller in the forty-sixth embodiment, and (b) schematically shows the contents of the first winning random number table in the forty-sixth embodiment. It is a schematic diagram shown. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the first winning type selection 17 table in the 46th embodiment, and (b) schematically shows the contents of the second winning random number 17 table in the 46th embodiment. It is a schematic diagram schematically shown. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the small per type selection 17 table in the 46th embodiment, (b) is a schematic representation of the contents of the per normal figure selection 17 table in the 46th embodiment It is a schematic diagram schematically shown. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the variation pattern 17 table in the 46th embodiment, and (b) schematically shows the contents of the time saving A1, B variation pattern table in the 46th embodiment and (c) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the time-saving A2 variation pattern table in the forty-sixth embodiment. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the time reduction provision 17 table in 46th Embodiment. FIG. 24 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of a RAM in the main controller in the forty-sixth embodiment; (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of the ROM of the sound ramp control device in the 46th embodiment, (b) is a schematic diagram showing an expectation level selection table in the 46th embodiment It is a diagram. FIG. 24 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of the RAM of the audio ramp control device in the forty-sixth embodiment; It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol variation process 17 performed by MPU in the main controller in 46th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the time saving update process 17 performed by MPU in the main control unit in 46th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the special design fluctuation|variation start processing 17 performed by MPU in the main controller in 46th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the small hit start processing performed by MPU in the main controller in 46th Embodiment. FIG. 20 is a flow chart showing main processing 17 executed by an MPU in a main controller in the forty-sixth embodiment; FIG. 29 is a flow chart showing a jackpot control process 17 executed by an MPU in the main controller in the 46th embodiment; It is a flowchart which shows the small hit control processing 17 performed by MPU in the main controller in 46th Embodiment. 29 is a flow chart showing V passage detection processing 17 executed by the MPU in the main controller in the forty-sixth embodiment; FIG. 17 is a flow chart showing main processing 17 executed by an MPU in the audio lamp control device in the forty-sixth embodiment; FIG. FIG. 17 is a flow chart showing command determination processing 17 executed by an MPU in the audio lamp control device in the forty-sixth embodiment; FIG. FIG. 22 is a flow chart showing state command processing 17 executed by an MPU in the audio lamp control device in the forty-sixth embodiment; FIG. FIG. 22 is a flow chart showing game state update processing executed by an MPU in the sound ramp control device in the 46th embodiment; FIG. 29 is a flow chart showing a win-related process 17 executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the forty-sixth embodiment; It is the flowchart which showed the per-universal figure per process 17 performed by MPU in the sound lamp control apparatus in 46th Embodiment. It is the flow chart which showed time saving related processing 17 performed by MPU in an audio lamp control device in a 46th embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the normal figure fluctuation|variation related process 17 performed by MPU in the sound lamp control apparatus in 46th Embodiment. FIG. 22 is a flow chart showing variable display setting processing 17 executed by an MPU in the audio lamp control device in the forty-sixth embodiment; FIG. It is the flowchart which showed the special figure 1 fluctuation production|presentation setting process 17 performed by MPU in the sound lamp control apparatus in 46th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the special figure 2 fluctuation production|presentation setting process 17 performed by MPU in the sound lamp control apparatus in 46th Embodiment. 29 is a flow chart showing liquid crystal effect execution management processing 17 executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the 46th embodiment. FIG. 22 is a flow chart showing a non-power state management process executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the forty-sixth embodiment; FIG. It is a front view showing the game board of the pachinko machine in the forty-seventh embodiment. (a) is an enlarged view of the right side area of the game board of the pachinko machine in the forty-seventh embodiment, and (b) is an enlarged view of the right side area of the game board of the pachinko machine in the forty-seventh embodiment. be. FIG. 16 is a flow chart showing start-up processing 18 executed by the MPU of the main controller in the forty-seventh embodiment; FIG. It is a front view showing the game board of the pachinko machine in the 48th embodiment. It is an enlarged view of the right area of the game board of the pachinko machine in the forty-eighth embodiment. It is an enlarged view showing the flow of balls in the right area of the game board of the pachinko machine in the forty-eighth embodiment, and (b) is an enlarged view showing the flow of balls in the right area of the game board of the pachinko machine in the forty-eighth embodiment. . (a) is a diagram showing an example of the display screen during the time saving B mode of the pachinko machine in the 49th embodiment, (b) is a display screen during the time saving B mode of the pachinko machine in the 49th embodiment It is the figure which showed an example. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of the ROM in the main controller in the 49th embodiment, (b) is a schematic representation of the contents of the type selection 20 table per normal figure in the 49th embodiment It is a schematic diagram schematically shown. It is a schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the time reduction provision 20 table in 49th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the time reduction related process 20 performed by MPU of the sound lamp control apparatus in 49th Embodiment. (a) is a diagram showing an example of the display screen during the time saving A mode of the pachinko machine in the 50th embodiment, (b) is a display screen during the time saving A mode of the pachinko machine in the 50th embodiment It is the figure which showed an example. (a) is a diagram showing an example of the display screen during the time saving A mode of the pachinko machine in the 50th embodiment, (b) is a display screen during the time saving A mode of the pachinko machine in the 50th embodiment It is the figure which showed an example. (a) is a diagram showing an example of the display screen during the time saving A mode of the pachinko machine in the 50th embodiment, (b) is a display screen during the time saving C mode of the pachinko machine in the 50th embodiment It is the figure which showed an example. It is the figure which showed an example of the display screen in time saving C mode of the pachinko machine in 50th Embodiment. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the first winning random number 21 table in the fiftieth embodiment, and (b) schematically shows the contents of the first winning type selection 21 table in the fiftieth embodiment. It is a schematic diagram schematically shown. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the small per type selection 21 table in the 50th embodiment, (b) is a schematic representation of the contents of the per normal type selection 21 table in the 50th embodiment It is a schematic diagram schematically shown. It is a schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the time reduction provision 21 table in 50th Embodiment. FIG. 20 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of a RAM within a main controller in a fiftieth embodiment; It is the flowchart which showed the special design variation process 21 performed by MPU of the main control unit in 50th Embodiment. FIG. 20 is a flow chart showing a time saving update process 21 executed by the MPU of the main controller in the fiftieth embodiment; FIG. It is a front view showing the game board of the pachinko machine in the fifty-first embodiment. It is a front view showing the game board of the pachinko machine in the fifty-second embodiment. It is an enlarged view of the right side area of the game board of the pachinko machine in the modified example of the forty-eighth embodiment. It is a front view showing the game board of the pachinko machine in the fifty-third embodiment. (a) is an enlarged view of the lower right area of the game board of the pachinko machine according to the fifty-third embodiment, and (b) is an enlarged view of the lower right area of the game board of the pachinko machine according to the fifty-third embodiment. It is an enlarged view. It is a diagram showing an operation pattern of a small winning game in the fifty-third embodiment. (a) is a diagram showing an example of the display screen during the jackpot waiting state of the pachinko machine according to the fifty-third embodiment, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of the display screen during the jackpot waiting state of the pachinko machine according to the fifty-third embodiment. It is the figure which showed an example. (a) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen during a small winning game of the pachinko machine in the fifty-third embodiment, and (b) is a display screen during a small winning game of the pachinko machine in the fifty-third embodiment. It is the figure which showed an example. It is a schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the time saving classification selection table at the time of V passage in 53rd Embodiment. FIG. 22 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of a RAM in the main controller in the fifty-third embodiment; FIG. 24 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of a RAM in the audio ramp control device in the fifty-third embodiment; It is the flowchart which showed the special design variation processing 24 performed by MPU of the main control unit in 53rd Embodiment. 29 is a flow chart showing a jackpot start process 24 executed by the MPU of the main controller in the fifty-third embodiment. 29 is a flow chart showing a jackpot control process 24 executed by the MPU of the main control device in the fifty-third embodiment. 29 is a flowchart showing V passage detection processing 24 executed by the MPU of the main controller in the fifty-third embodiment; 29 is a flow chart showing a win-related process 24 executed by the MPU of the sound lamp control device in the fifty-third embodiment; It is a front view showing the game board of the pachinko machine in the fifty-fourth embodiment. It is an enlarged view of the right area of the game board of the pachinko machine in the fifty-fourth embodiment. It is an enlarged view of the right area of the game board of the pachinko machine in the fifty-fourth embodiment. It is the figure which showed typically the content of the variation pattern 25 table for time saving A1, B in 54th Embodiment. (a) is a diagram showing an example of the display mode of the third symbol display device when the portent effect A is executed in the fifty-fifth embodiment; (b) is a view showing a portent effect in the fifty-fifth embodiment; It is the figure which showed an example of the display mode of the 3rd design display apparatus when B is performed. FIG. 32 is a diagram showing an example of the display mode of the third symbol display device when the portent effect C is executed in the fifty-fifth embodiment; (a) is a diagram showing the transition of the effect mode when the premonitory effect is set in a state where the reach variation is not included in the hold in the fifty-fifth embodiment, and (b) is the fifty-fifth embodiment. In a form, it is the figure which showed the transition of the production|presentation mode when the premonition production|presentation is set in the state in which reach fluctuation|variation is included in suspension. (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM of the audio ramp control device according to the fifty-fifth embodiment; (b) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM of the audio ramp control device according to the fifty-fifth embodiment; be. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of an omen yes/no lottery table in the fifty-fifth embodiment, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of an omen type selection table in the fifty-fifth embodiment. It is a diagram. FIG. 30 is an explanatory diagram for explaining an outline of logical sum data generated when the precursor lottery prohibition state is canceled in the fifty-fifth embodiment; FIG. 22 is a flow chart showing command determination processing A executed by an MPU in the audio lamp control device in the fifty-fifth embodiment; FIG. 29 is a flow chart showing winning information command processing executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the fifty-fifth embodiment; FIG. 22 is a flow chart showing a sign start determination process executed by an MPU in the sound lamp control device in the fifty-fifth embodiment; FIG. FIG. 22 is a flow chart showing stop command processing executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the fifty-fifth embodiment; FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing a win-related process A executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the fifty-fifth embodiment; 29 is a flow chart showing a sign lottery process at the end of winning executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the fifty-fifth embodiment. 29 is a flow chart showing a variable display setting process A executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the fifty-fifth embodiment; FIG. 23 is a flow chart showing an indication effect setting process executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the fifty-fifth embodiment; FIG. FIG. 22 is a flow chart showing canceling precursor lottery processing executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the fifty-fifth embodiment; FIG. FIG. 32 is a diagram showing an example of a display mode of the third symbol display device when a special portent effect is executed as a portent effect in the fifty-sixth embodiment; (a) and (b) are diagrams showing the transition of the effect mode when the premonition effect is set while the reach variation is included in the hold in the fifty-sixth embodiment. (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM of the audio ramp control device according to the fifty-sixth embodiment; (b) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM of the audio ramp control device according to the fifty-sixth embodiment; be. (a) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of a precursor scenario selection table in the fifty-sixth embodiment; (b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of a switching timing selection table in the fifty-sixth embodiment; It is a diagram. 29 is a flow chart showing a precursor start determination process B executed by an MPU in the sound lamp control device in the fifty-sixth embodiment; 29 is a flow chart showing stop command processing B executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the fifty-sixth embodiment; 29 is a flow chart showing an indication effect setting process B executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the fifty-sixth embodiment; FIG. 22 is a flow chart showing re-lottery processing executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the fifty-sixth embodiment; FIG. (a) and (b) are diagrams showing the transition of an effect mode in the fifty-seventh embodiment when a premonitory effect is set in a state in which a long failure B is included in the hold. FIG. 32 is a diagram showing the transition of an effect mode when a premonition effect is set in a state in which a long failure A is included in the hold in the fifty-seventh embodiment; FIG. 15 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a variation pattern selection table in the fifty-seventh embodiment, and (b) schematically shows a deviation variation pattern table that is part of the variation pattern selection table in the fifty-seventh embodiment. It is a schematic diagram shown. FIG. 23 is a flow chart showing an omen start determination process C executed by an MPU in the sound lamp control device in the fifty-seventh embodiment; FIG. FIG. 22 is a flow chart showing an indication effect setting process C executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the fifty-seventh embodiment; FIG. FIG. 32 is a flow chart showing standby state processing executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the fifty-seventh embodiment; FIG. FIG. 22 is a flow chart showing an out-of-long variation determination process executed by the MPU in the audio ramp control device in the fifty-seventh embodiment; FIG. (a) is a diagram showing the transition of the effect mode when an irregular winning of the second special symbol corresponding to the complete failure is detected during execution of the precursor effect in the fifty-eighth embodiment, and (b) is It is the figure which showed the transition of the production|presentation mode at the time of detecting the irregular winning of the 2nd special design corresponding to reach variation during execution of the indication production|presentation in 58th Embodiment. FIG. 32 is a diagram showing the transition of an effect mode when a pseudo complete failure 2-variation effect, which is a type of precursor scenario for irregular winning in the fifty-eighth embodiment, is set. (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM of the audio ramp control device according to the fifty-eighth embodiment; (b) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM of the audio ramp control device according to the fifty-eighth embodiment; be. FIG. 32 is a schematic diagram schematically showing a sign rewriting table in the fifty-eighth embodiment; 29 is a flow chart showing winning information command processing D executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the fifty-eighth embodiment; FIG. 22 is a flow chart showing sign rewriting processing executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the fifty-eighth embodiment; FIG. 29 is a flow chart showing an indication effect setting process D executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the fifty-eighth embodiment; FIG. 16 is a flow chart showing a canceling precursor lottery process D executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the fifty-eighth embodiment; FIG. FIG. 23 is a flow chart showing a precursor mode setting process executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the fifty-eighth embodiment; FIG. (a) And (b) is the figure which showed an example of the production|presentation aspect of the special figure 2 chance production|presentation in the time saving A mode of 59th Embodiment. (a) is a diagram showing an example of the display mode of the indication effect A in the time saving A mode of the fifty-ninth embodiment, and (b) is a temporary stop of the chance eye in the time saving A mode of the fifty-ninth embodiment. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an example of a display mode in this case; It is the figure which showed the transition of the production|presentation mode of the omen production|presentation triggered by the detection of normal figure hit B in 59th Embodiment. It is the figure which showed the transition of the production|presentation mode of the omen production|presentation triggered by the detection of normal figure hit B in 59th Embodiment. It is the figure which showed the transition of the production|presentation mode at the time of being elected per normal figure B during reach fluctuation in 59th Embodiment. It is the figure which showed the transition of the production|presentation mode at the time of being elected to normal figure per B during big-hit fluctuation|variation in 59th Embodiment. (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM of the audio ramp control device according to the fifty-ninth embodiment; (b) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM of the audio ramp control device according to the fifty-ninth embodiment; be. 29 is a flow chart showing command determination processing E executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the fifty-ninth embodiment; 29 is a flow chart showing winning information command processing E executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the fifty-ninth embodiment; FIG. 22 is a flow chart showing special portent effect determination processing executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the fifty-ninth embodiment; FIG. 29 is a flow chart showing a win-related process E executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the fifty-ninth embodiment; 29 is a flow chart showing opening command processing E executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the fifty-ninth embodiment; 29 is a flow chart showing a normal pattern per process E executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the fifty-ninth embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the normal figure fluctuation|variation related process E performed by MPU in the sound lamp control apparatus in 59th Embodiment. FIG. 22 is a flow chart showing a normal figure effect setting process executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the fifty-ninth embodiment; FIG. 39 is a flow chart showing stop symbol rewrite processing executed by the MPU in the audio ramp control device in the fifty-ninth embodiment; 29 is a flow chart showing an indication effect setting process E executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the fifty-ninth embodiment; FIG. 22 is a flow chart showing special precursor control processing executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the fifty-ninth embodiment; FIG.

<First embodiment>
A first embodiment of the present invention will be described below with reference to the accompanying drawings. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of a game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG.

The pachinko machine 10, as shown in FIG. and an inner frame 12 supported so as to be openable and closable. In order to support the inner frame 12, the outer frame 11 is provided with metal hinges 18 at two upper and lower positions on the left side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1). A frame 12 is supported toward the front side so that it can be opened and closed.

A game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails and ball entrances 64, 640, 67, etc. is detachably attached to the inner frame 12 from the back side. A pinball game is performed by causing game balls to flow down the front surface of the game board 13 . The inner frame 12 includes a ball shooting unit 112a (see FIG. 8) that shoots game balls to the front area of the game board 13 and guides the game balls shot from the ball shooting unit 112a to the front area of the game board 13. A launch rail (not shown) or the like is attached.

On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 covering the front upper side and a lower tray unit 15 covering the lower side are provided. In order to support the front frame 14 and the lower tray unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached at two upper and lower positions on the left side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1). 14 and a lower tray unit 15 are supported toward the front side so that they can be opened and closed. The locking of the inner frame 12 and the locking of the front frame 14 are unlocked by inserting a dedicated key into the keyhole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

The front frame 14 is assembled with decorative resin parts, electrical parts, and the like, and has a window portion 14c having a substantially elliptical opening at its substantially central portion. A glass unit 16 having two sheet glasses is arranged on the back side of the front frame 14, and the front side of the game board 13 can be visually recognized on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 16.例文帳に追加

An upper tray 17 for storing game balls projects forward from the front frame 14 and is formed in a substantially box-like shape with an open upper surface. The bottom surface of the upper tray 17 is inclined downward to the right in a front view (see FIG. 1), and the inclination guides the game ball thrown into the upper tray 17 to the ball shooting unit 112a. A frame button 22 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17 . The frame button 22 is operated by the player when, for example, the effect or background displayed on the third symbol display device 81, which will be described later, is changed.

Light-emitting means such as various lamps are provided around the front frame 14 (for example, corner portions). These light emitting means are controlled to change the light emitting mode by lighting or blinking in response to changes in the game state such as when a big win or a predetermined reach, and play a role of enhancing the performance effect during the game. Illuminated portions 29 to 33 containing light emitting means such as LEDs are provided on the periphery of the window portion 14c. In the pachinko machine 10, these electric decoration parts 29 to 33 function as production lamps such as big win lamps, and the respective electric decoration parts 29 to 33 are lit by lighting or blinking of built-in LEDs at the time of a big win or a ready-to-win production. Alternatively, it flashes to indicate that the jackpot is in progress or that the player is in the process of reaching one step before the jackpot. In addition, a display lamp 34 having a built-in light emitting means such as an LED or the like and capable of displaying whether prize balls are being paid out or when an error has occurred is provided in the upper left portion of the front frame 14 when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1).

In addition, a small window 35 is formed by attaching a transparent resin from the back side so that the back side of the front frame 14 can be visually recognized on the lower side of the right electrical decoration part 32, and a pasting space K1 on the front side of the game board 13 (Fig. 2) can be visually recognized from the front of the pachinko machine 10. In addition, in the pachinko machine 10, in order to bring out more splendor, a plated member 36 made of ABS resin, which is plated with chrome, is attached to the area around the electric decorations 29-33.

A ball rental operation unit 40 is arranged below the window portion 14c. The ball rental operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41 , a ball rental button 42 and a return button 43 . When a ball lending operation unit 40 is operated with bills, cards, etc. inserted into a card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, game balls are operated in accordance with the operation. will be lent out. Specifically, the frequency display section 41 is an area in which the balance information of the card or the like is displayed, and the built-in LED is turned on to display the remaining amount in numbers as the balance information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain lending balls based on information recorded on a card or the like (recording medium), and lending balls are supplied to the top tray 17 as long as the card or the like has a balance. be done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of the card or the like inserted in the card unit. A pachinko machine in which game balls are directly lent to the upper tray 17 from a ball lending device or the like without going through the card unit, that is, a so-called cash machine, does not require the ball lending operation unit 40. A decorative seal or the like may be added to the installation portion of 40 to make the parts configuration common. It is possible to achieve commonality between a pachinko machine using a card unit and a cash machine.

In the lower tray unit 15 located below the upper tray 17, a lower tray 50 for storing game balls that could not be stored in the upper tray 17 is formed in a substantially box shape with an open upper surface. ing. On the right side of the lower plate 50, an operation handle 51 operated by the player is arranged to hit the game ball to the front surface of the game board 13, and inside the operation handle 51, the ball shooting unit 112a is permitted to be driven. a touch sensor 51a for pressing down, a push-button stop switch 51b for stopping the shooting of the game ball during the pressing operation, and a variable switch for detecting the rotation amount of the operation handle 51 by changes in electric resistance. A resistor (not shown) is built in. When the operating handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes according to the amount of operation. A game ball is shot with a strength corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor that changes with the movement of the player, and the game ball is hit to the front surface of the game board 13 with a flying distance corresponding to the player's operation. Further, when the operating handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the stop switch 51b are turned off.

In this embodiment, the configuration described above is used, but the present invention is not limited to this configuration. may be configured to detect that has fired a game ball. Further, the number of game balls detected may be counted and stored until processing such as RAM clearing is executed.

A ball extracting lever 52 is provided at the front lower portion of the lower tray 50 for operation when the game balls stored in the lower tray 50 are ejected downward. The ball extracting lever 52 is always biased to the right, and when it is slid to the left against the bias, the bottom opening formed in the bottom of the lower tray 50 is opened. Game balls naturally fall from the bottom opening and are discharged. The operation of the ball extracting lever 52 is normally performed with a box (generally called a "dollar box") placed below the lower tray 50 for receiving game balls ejected from the lower tray 50 . The operation handle 51 is arranged on the right side of the lower tray 50 as described above, and the ashtray 53 is attached on the left side of the lower tray 50 .

As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 includes a wooden base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape when viewed from the front, a large number of nails and windmills for guiding balls, rails 61 and 62, a general prize opening 63, a 1 ball entrance 64 , second ball entrance 640 , variable winning device 65 , operating winning port 660 , variable display device unit 80 and the like are assembled, and the peripheral portion thereof is attached to the back side of inner frame 12 . The general prize winning port 63, the first ball inlet 64, the second ball inlet 640, the variable prize winning device 65, the operating prize winning port 660, and the variable display device unit 80 are arranged in through holes formed in the base plate 60 by router processing. It is fixed from the front side of the game board 13 with wood screws or the like. Also, the front center portion of the game board 13 can be visually recognized from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14c (see FIG. 1) of the front frame 14. As shown in FIG. Hereinafter, the configuration of the game board 13 will be described mainly with reference to FIG.

On the front surface of the game board 13, an outer rail 62 formed by bending a strip-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is erected, and a strip-shaped metal plate is placed inside the outer rail 62 like the outer rail 62. An arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed by is erected. The outer periphery of the front surface of the game board 13 is surrounded by the inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62, and the front and rear parts of the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1) surround the front surface of the game board 13. A game area is formed in which a game is played by the behavior of the ball. The game area is the front surface of the game board 13 and is a substantially circular area defined by the two rails 61 and 62 and the arc member 70 (where a starting port and the like are arranged and a game ball is is flowing down). In addition, the game area includes all areas where the game ball that has passed through the return ball prevention member 68 flows down before passing through the out port 66 or the prize winning port.

The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the game ball shot from the ball shooting unit 112a (see FIG. 8) to the upper part of the game board 13. As shown in FIG. At the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper left part in FIG. 2), there is provided an operating winning hole 660 into which game balls can enter. This operation winning hole 660 shifts to a jackpot state (special game state) which is an advantageous state for the player when a game ball enters. More specifically, when a special symbol (first symbol) lottery determines a big win, a state (big win standby state) is set in which entry of a ball into the operation winning opening 660 is validated. In addition, even if a game ball enters the operation winning hole 660 in normal times, it does not affect the game at all. In the jackpot standby state, when the player shoots the game ball toward the operating winning port 660, the game ball enters (wins) the operating winning port 660 to start the jackpot. In addition, as shown in FIG. 2, a rotating member 670a that rotates at a constant rotational speed is arranged on the left side of the operation winning opening 660 in front view. Since this rotating member 670a can take an arrangement that prevents the game ball shot toward the operating winning opening 660 from moving in the direction of the operating winning opening 660, and an arrangement that does not prevent it, the rotating member 670a can be rotated. The game ball cannot be entered into the operation winning opening 660 (starting the jackpot) unless the game ball is launched aiming at the timing at which the moving member 670a is arranged so as not to interfere with the game ball. Therefore, when the lottery for the special symbols is determined to be a big hit, the game ball can be shot in consideration of the arrangement of the rotating member 670a, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 2, the operation winning opening 660 is provided at the end of a flow path (operation winning opening flow path) having a width wider than one game ball and narrower than two game balls. A game ball launched with a predetermined range of launch intensity (for example, a range of launch intensity of 95% to 100%) including at least the maximum momentum (shooting intensity) reaches (flows into) the operating winning port flow path. is configured as Therefore, when it is judged as a big win in the lottery of the special symbols and the big win waiting state is entered, when aiming at the operation winning opening 660, it is possible to easily rotate the handle 51 to the maximum movable range. A game ball can be entered into the operation winning hole 660 .

A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip portion of the inner rail 61 . A game ball shot with a predetermined shooting intensity (for example, shooting intensity in the range of 90% to 95%) hits the return rubber 69 and is bounced back toward the central portion while its momentum is attenuated. Between the lower right tip of the inner rail 61 and the upper right tip of the outer rail 62, a resin-made arc member 70 is formed by providing an arc connecting the rails on the inner surface side. It is fixed by driving it into the plate 60 .

In this pachinko machine 10, when a game ball enters either the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640, a special symbol (first symbol) lottery is performed, and the game ball enters normally. When passing through the ball opening 67, a lottery for a normal symbol (second symbol) is performed. In the special symbol lottery performed for the ball entering the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640, it is determined whether or not the special symbol is a big hit, and the special symbol is a big hit. When it is done, the judgment of the jackpot type is also performed. When the jackpot of the special pattern is achieved, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the special game state, and the specific winning opening 65a normally closed is closed for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds), or a predetermined number of game balls are won. until), and the opening is repeated the number of times (number of rounds) according to the jackpot type. As a result, since a large amount of game balls enter the specific winning hole 65a, a larger amount of prize balls than usual is paid out. As the jackpot types of special symbols, six types of "jackpot A" to "jackpot F" are provided. (game value) is given to the player. The three types of "jackets A to C" are the jackpot types that can be determined when a special symbol lottery executed when a game ball enters the first ball entrance 64 results in a jackpot. , and the three types of "jackets D to F" are jackpots that can be determined when a special pattern lottery executed when a game ball enters the second ball entrance 640 results in a big win. It is a type. Henceforth, for simplification of explanation, the lottery for the special symbol executed when the game ball enters the first ball entrance 64 will be referred to as the lottery for the first special symbol, and the game ball will be called the lottery for the first special symbol. The special symbol lottery executed when the ball enters the second ball entrance 640 is called a second special symbol lottery.

When the special symbol (first symbol) lottery is performed, the variable display of the special symbol is started in the first symbol display device 37, and after a predetermined time (for example, 7 seconds to 90 seconds) elapses, the lottery result A special symbol indicating is stopped and displayed. When the game ball enters the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640 while the variable display is being performed on the first symbol display device 37, the number of times the ball enters is determined by the type of the entrance. , and the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37 and also by the third symbol display device 81 . When the variable display is finished on the first symbol display device 37, if the number of reserved balls for the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640 remains, the lottery for the next special symbol is carried out. , the variable display corresponding to the lottery is started.

On the other hand, in the normal symbol lottery performed for the passage of the game ball through the normal ball entrance 67, the success or failure determination as to whether or not the normal symbol wins is performed. When the normal pattern hits, the second ball entrance 640 is opened by changing the electric accessory 640a attached to the second ball entrance 640 to the open position for a predetermined time (for example, 0.2 seconds or 1 second). be released. It should be noted that normally, the second ball entrance 640 is closed because the electric accessory 640a is arranged at the closed position. Therefore, the ball flowing down toward the second ball entrance 640 from above in the front view becomes impossible (difficult) to enter the second ball entrance 640 because it is blocked by the electric accessory 640a. . On the other hand, in the case of winning the normal pattern, the electric accessory 640a is opened, so that the ball flowing down toward the second ball entrance 640 easily enters the second ball entrance 640. As a result, the lottery for the second special symbol is facilitated.

Further, when the lottery for the normal design (second design) is performed, the fluctuation display of the normal design is started in the second design display device 83, and after a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds, 30 seconds, etc.) has passed, A normal symbol indicating the result of the lottery is stopped and displayed. When the game ball passes through the normal ball entrance 67 while the second pattern display device 83 is performing the variable display, the number of passages is suspended up to four times, and the number of reserved balls is changed to the first pattern display device 37. , and is also shown in the second symbol reserve lamp 84 . When the variable display is completed in the second symbol display device 83, if the number of reserved balls for the normal ball entrance 67 remains, the lottery for the next normal symbol is performed, and the variable display corresponding to the lottery is displayed. be started.

As described above, six types of "jackpot A" to "jackpot F" are provided as jackpot types of special symbols.

When "jackpot A" is reached, the number of rounds becomes a special game state of 8 rounds (8-round jackpot). On the other hand, when it becomes "jackpot B" or "jackpot C", the number of rounds becomes a special game state with 5 rounds (5 rounds jackpot), and when it becomes "jackpot D", the number of rounds becomes a special game state with 16 rounds (16 rounds When it becomes "jackpot E" and "jackpot F", the number of rounds becomes a special game state of 10 rounds (10 round jackpot). Further, when ``jackpot A'', ``jackpot B'', ``jackpot D'', and ``jackpot E'' are obtained, the state is shifted to a special pattern high probability state (during the probability change of the special pattern) after the jackpot is finished. In addition, when the high probability state of the special design is given, the hit probability of the normal design is also increased (the time saving state of the normal design is given). The high-probability state of the special design and the time-saving state of the normal design continue after the end of the big win until the next big win. On the other hand, when the "jackpot C" or "jackpot F" is reached, the time-saving state of normal symbols is provided after the completion of the jackpot, but the high-probability state of special symbols is not provided. The time-saving state of the normal symbols provided after the end of the "big win C" or "big win F" ends when the lottery of the special symbols is executed 100 times.

Here, the "special symbol high probability state" means a state in which the special symbol jackpot probability is up, the so-called "special symbol high probability state" (probability change state of the special symbol), in other words, the special game state It is a game state that easily shifts to (jackpot). On the other hand, if it is not a "special symbol high probability state", it is called a "special symbol low probability state", which is a state in which the probability of a big hit is lower than the variable state of a special symbol, that is, the probability of a special symbol is normal. Indicates the state (low probability state of special symbols). In addition, the ``time-saving state of normal symbols'' (high-probability state of normal symbols) refers to a gaming state in which the winning probability of normal symbols is increased and the game ball easily enters the second ball entrance 640. - 特許庁. On the other hand, when it is not "time saving state of normal design", it is called "normal state of normal design" (low probability state of normal design), which means that the probability of winning normal design is normal, that is, during time saving Indicates a low probability of winning.

As described above, in the special symbol jackpot in the present embodiment, the number of rounds at the time of the jackpot is varied according to the type of jackpot. On the other hand, the number of rounds may be common (for example, all 5 rounds) for all jackpot types. Further, in the present embodiment, the "probability variable state of the special symbol" given after the big win is configured to continue until the next big win, but it is not limited to this. For example, the period during which the "probability variable state of special symbols" continues may be limited until the special symbol lottery is executed a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times). In this case, the number of times of lottery to be "probability variable state of special symbols" and the number of times of lottery to be "time-saving state of normal symbols" may be different. Moreover, according to the kind of big hit, it is good also as a structure which changes the number of times of lottery.

When the pachinko machine 10 is initialized by turning on the power supply, etc., it is always set to "low probability state of special symbols" and "normal state of normal symbols". And, when it becomes one of "jackpot A", "jackpot B", "jackpot D" and "jackpot E", it shifts from "special pattern low probability state" to "special pattern variable state". , "Normal pattern normal state" to "normal pattern time saving state". In this case, the set "probability variable state of special symbols" and "time saving state of normal symbols" continue until the next big hit. On the other hand, when the "jackpot C" or the "jackpot F" is reached, the game shifts to the "special symbol low probability state" and the "ordinary symbol time-saving state". Henceforth, for the sake of simplification of explanation, the jackpot (“jackpot A”, “jackpot B”, “jackpot D”, “jackpot A,” “jackpot B,” “jackpot D, The "jackpot E") is referred to as a "variable probability jackpot". On the other hand, the jackpot (“jackpot C”, “jackpot F”) in which only the “ordinary pattern time-saving state” is given 100 times after the jackpot is finished is called “normal jackpot”.

A plurality of light-emitting diodes (hereinafter abbreviated as "LEDs") 37a and a 7-segment display 37b, which are light-emitting means, are provided on the lower left side of the game board 13 when viewed from the front (lower left side in FIG. 2). A pattern display device 37 is provided. The first symbol display device 37 provides display corresponding to each control performed by the main control device 110, which will be described later, and mainly displays the game state of the pachinko machine 10. FIG. The plurality of LEDs 37a perform variable display by indicating whether or not the lottery for the special symbol performed with the entry of the ball into the first ball entrance 64 (start winning) is being executed by the lighting state. As a stop symbol after the end, a special symbol (first symbol) corresponding to the lottery result of the special symbol is indicated by a lighting state, or a game in which a ball is entered into the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640. The lighting state indicates the number of held balls, which is the number of game balls (held balls) for which variation has not been executed among the balls.

When the game ball enters the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640 while the special symbol (first symbol) is being displayed in the first symbol display device 37, The number of balls is reserved up to four times, and the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37 and is also indicated by the third symbol display device 81 . In the present embodiment, the balls entering the first ball entrance 64 and the second ball entrance 640 are each suspended up to four times, but the maximum number of suspensions is limited to four. The number of times may be set to 3 times or less, or 5 times or more (for example, 8 times).

The 7-segment display 37b displays the number of rounds during the jackpot and an error display. In addition, the LEDs 37a are configured so that each LED emits a different color (for example, red, green, and blue). Depending on the combination of the emitted colors, various game states (high-probability state of special symbols) of the pachinko machine 10 can be achieved with a small number of LEDs. , etc.) can be displayed. In addition, the LED 37a not only indicates whether or not the lottery result of the special symbol is a jackpot as a stop symbol after the fluctuation is completed, but also indicates that the jackpot type (special symbol corresponding to the jackpot AF) (first pattern) is shown.

The game area is also provided with a plurality of general winning holes 63 through which 5 to 15 game balls are paid out as prize balls when the game balls win. A variable display device unit 80 is arranged in the central portion of the game area. The variable display device unit 80 is provided with a third pattern display device 81 composed of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply referred to as a "display device") and a second pattern display device 83 composed of LEDs. . A center frame 86 is arranged in the variable display device unit 80 so as to surround the outer periphery of the third pattern display device 81 .

The third pattern display device 81 performs decorative display according to the display of the first pattern display device 37 . For example, when a game ball enters the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640 (start winning), the first symbol display device 37 triggers a variable display of a special symbol (first symbol). is executed. Furthermore, in the third symbol display device 81, in synchronization with the variable display of the special symbol, the variable display of the third symbol corresponding to the variable display of the special symbol is performed.

The third pattern display device 81 is composed of a large 8-inch liquid crystal display, and the display contents are controlled by a display control device 114, which will be described later. columns are displayed. Each symbol row is composed of a plurality of symbols, and these symbols are vertically scrolled for each symbol row to variably display the third symbol on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 . In this embodiment, the display of the game state accompanying the control of the main control device 110 is performed by the first symbol display device 37, while the third symbol display device 81 displays the display of the first symbol display device 37. A corresponding decorative display is performed. Incidentally, instead of the display device, for example, the third symbol display device 81 may be configured using a reel or the like.

Here, the display contents of the third pattern display device 81 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 7 is a drawing for explaining the display screen of the third pattern display device 81, and FIG. 6(a) is a diagram schematically showing area division setting and effective line setting of the display screen, FIG.6(b) is the figure which illustrated the actual display screen.

The third pattern consists of 9 types of main patterns numbered from "1" to "9". Each main pattern is configured to imitate the numbers "1" to "9". Each main design consists of a back design made of a wooden box with a number from "1" to "9". , Large numbers are added to almost the entire front of the wooden box. On the other hand, the main designs with even numbers (2, 4, 6, 8) have attached designs that imitate characters such as planes, furoshiki, helmets, etc. that cover almost the entire front of the wooden box. An even number is attached to the lower right side of , in green, small, and displayed in front of the attached symbols.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the result of the special symbol lottery performed by the main controller 110 (see FIG. 8) described later is a big hit, a variable display in which the same main symbols are aligned is performed. , the jackpot is generated after the variable display is finished. On the other hand, when the lottery result of the special symbol is a loss, a variable display in which the same main symbols are not aligned is performed.

For example, if the lottery result of the special symbol is a probability variable jackpot (any one of “jackpot A”, “jackpot B”, “jackpot D”, and “jackpot E”), add one of “1” to “9” A variable display is performed in which the displayed main symbols are aligned. Also, in the case of a normal jackpot (“jackpot C” or “jackpot F”), a variable display is performed in which the main symbols with even numbers “0, 2, 4, 6, 8” are added. That is, there is a possibility that the variation display in which the main symbols to which the odd numbers "1, 3, 5, 7, 9" are added are aligned, only in the probability variation jackpot. Even in the case of a probability variable jackpot, by configuring it so that there is a possibility of performing a variable display in which the main symbols with even numbers are aligned, even when the main symbols with even numbers are aligned, the probability variable jackpot It is possible to play a game during the jackpot with the expectation that the player will win the jackpot. On the other hand, if the lottery result of the special symbol is out, a variable display is performed in which the main symbols of the same number are not aligned. In addition, in the probability variable jackpot, the rate at which the variable display in which the main symbols with even numbers are aligned is set to, for example, 60%. In addition, when the probability variable jackpot is started by the variable display in which the main symbols with even numbers are aligned, it is notified that the probability variable jackpot was achieved during a predetermined period of the jackpot (for example, during the round period of 5 rounds). A production is executed.

As shown in FIG. 6(a), the display screen of the third pattern display device 81 is roughly divided into two upper and lower parts. The upper one-third of the area is a sub-display area Ds for displaying an advance notice effect, characters, the number of pending balls, and the like.

The main display area Dm is divided into three left, middle and right display areas Dm1 to Dm3, and three pattern rows Z1, Z2 and Z3 are displayed in the three display areas Dm1 to Dm3, respectively. The above-described third symbols are displayed in a prescribed order in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. That is, the main symbols are arranged in ascending or descending numerical order in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, and each symbol row Z1 to Z3 is periodically scrolled from top to bottom for variable display. In particular, the left symbol row Z1 is arranged so that the numbers of the main symbols appear in descending order, and the middle symbol row Z2 and the right symbol row Z3 are arranged so that the numbers of the main symbols appear in ascending order.

Further, in the main display area Dm, the third symbols are displayed in three stages of upper, middle and lower stages for each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. The middle part of the main display area Dm is set as the activated line L1, and the third symbols stop on the activated line L1 in the order of the left symbol row Z1→right symbol row Z3→middle symbol row Z2 in each game. Is displayed. This stop display state is maintained for at least one second. In this way, by displaying the stopped third symbol for a certain period of time (one second or more), the player can determine whether the combination of the third symbols corresponds to the big win (the lottery result of the special symbol is the big win). presence or absence) can be suppressed from being overlooked. Further, when the combination of the big winning symbols (in this embodiment, the combination of the same main symbols) is aligned on the effective line L1 when the third symbol is stopped, the big winning is decided, and the standby state effect indicating the big winning waiting state is displayed. be. The details of this waiting state effect will be described later with reference to FIG. Also, by entering (winning) a game ball into the operation winning opening 660 during the jackpot standby state, the jackpot starts and a jackpot animation (opening effect) is displayed.

In addition, when the combination of the third symbols stopped and displayed is a combination corresponding to a loss and there is a held ball, a variable display corresponding to a lottery based on the held ball is started after the stop display for 1 second. . In addition, when there are a plurality of reserved balls, a lottery is executed based on the reserved ball corresponding to the oldest incoming ball in terms of time.

On the other hand, when the third pattern of the combination corresponding to the missing of the special pattern is stop-displayed for one second in the absence of the reserved ball, the stop-display of the third pattern continues thereafter. This state continues until a predetermined time (for example, 15 seconds) elapses or until a new game ball enters the first ball entrance 64 . Then, when a predetermined time (for example, 15 seconds) has passed since the third symbol was stop-displayed, a demonstration effect indicating that the game is not being executed is displayed. It is rare that no ball enters the first ball entrance 64 even though the player continuously shoots the game ball for a predetermined time (for example, 15 seconds), and the third symbol is stopped. Most of the cases where the displayed state continues for a predetermined period of time (for example, 15 seconds) are due to the fact that the pachinko machine 10 is not playing any games because the player has quit the game. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when a predetermined time (for example, 15 seconds) has passed after the third symbol is stopped and displayed, it is determined that the player is not playing a game, and a demonstration effect is started. do. Thereby, the player who is going to select the pachinko machine 10 to start the game can easily judge whether the game is being played based on the presence or absence of display of the demonstration performance. On the other hand, when a new game ball enters the first ball entrance 64 before a predetermined time (for example, 15 seconds) elapses, the variable display of the third symbol corresponding to the new ball enters. executed.

The sub-display area Ds is provided horizontally above the main display area Dm, and is evenly divided into three sub-areas Ds1 to Ds3 in the horizontal direction. Of these, the small area Ds1 is the number of held balls, which is the number of game balls (hold balls) that have not been changed among the game balls that have entered the first ball entrance 64 and the second ball entrance 640. , and the small areas Ds2 and Ds3 are areas for displaying the preview effect image.

On the actual display screen, as shown in FIG. 4(b), a total of nine main patterns of the third pattern are displayed in the main display area Dm. In the secondary display area Ds, a moving image is displayed in the right small area Ds3, suggesting to the player that the state is more likely to transition to a big win than usual. In the central small area Ds2, a predetermined character 710 (a boy wearing a headband in this embodiment) normally performs a predetermined action, and sometimes performs a special action different from the predetermined action, or another character performs a specific action. A notice effect is performed by appearing or the like.

On the other hand, when the game ball enters the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640 while the variable display is being performed on the third symbol display device 81 (first symbol display device 37), The number of ball entries is reserved up to four times for each type of ball inlet, and the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first pattern display device 37 and is also indicated in the small area Ds1 of the sub-display area Ds. In the small area Ds1, one reserved ball number pattern is displayed for one reserved ball number, and the number of reserved balls is displayed according to the number of displayed reserved ball number patterns. That is, when one reserved ball pattern is displayed in the small area Ds1, it indicates that the number of reserved balls is one, and when four reserved ball patterns are displayed, the number of reserved balls is Indicates 4 balls. Further, when the reserved ball number pattern is not displayed in the small area Ds1, it indicates that the number of reserved balls is 0, that is, there is no reserved ball. The left half of the small area Ds1 displays a reserved ball number pattern indicating the number of held balls based on the number of balls entered into the first ball entrance 64, and the right half of the small area Ds2 displays the number of held balls. It is configured to display a reserved ball number pattern indicating the number of reserved balls based on the number of balls entered into the 2-ball opening 640 . In the example of FIG. 6(b), the left half of the small area Ds1 displays four reserved ball numbers, while the right half does not display any reserved ball numbers. It shows a state in which there are four reserved balls of the symbol, but the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol is zero.

In the present embodiment, the number of balls entering the first ball entrance 64 and the second ball entrance 640 are each suspended up to four times. It is not limited, and may be set to 3 times or less, or 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). Alternatively, instead of displaying the number of reserved balls in the small area Ds1, the number of reserved balls may be indicated by a number on a part of the third pattern display device 81, or an area divided into four areas may be changed by the number of reserved balls. (For example, colors or lighting patterns) may be displayed. Further, since the number of reserved balls is displayed by the first symbol display device 37, the third symbol display device 81 may not display the number of reserved balls. Furthermore, the variable display device unit 80 may be provided with four holding lamps indicating the number of holding balls, which is the maximum holding number, and the number of holding balls may be displayed according to the number of holding lamps in the lighting state.

The second symbol display device 83 performs variable display by indicating whether or not the normal symbol lottery that is performed when the game ball passes through the normal ball entrance 67 is being executed by the lighting state, As a stop symbol after the end of variation, a normal symbol (second symbol) corresponding to the lottery result of the normal symbol is indicated by the lighting state.

More specifically, in the second symbol display device 83, every time the game ball passes through either the left or right normal ball entrance 67, the symbol "O" and the symbol "X" are displayed as the normal symbol (second symbol). A variable display is performed by alternately lighting up the symbols of . In the pachinko machine 10, when the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 stops at a predetermined symbol (“○” symbol in this embodiment), the electric accessory 640a associated with the second ball entrance 640 is displayed for a predetermined period of time. It is configured to be in an operating state (opened), and as a result, a state in which game balls can easily enter the second ball inlet 640 . The number of passages of game balls passing through the normal ball entrance 67 is reserved up to four times, and the number of reserved balls is displayed by the above-described first symbol display device 37, and the second symbol reservation lamp 84 is also lit and displayed. be. Four second symbol holding lamps 84 corresponding to the maximum number of holding lamps are provided, and arranged symmetrically below the third symbol display device 81 .

In addition, the variable display of the normal symbol (second symbol) is performed by switching between lighting and non-lighting of a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device 83 as in the present embodiment, and the first symbol display device 37 And part of the third pattern display device 81 may be used. Similarly, the lighting of the second symbol reservation lamp 84 may be performed by a part of the third symbol display device 81 . Also, as with the first ball entrance 64 and the second ball entrance 640, the maximum number of held balls passing through the normal ball entrance 67 is not limited to four times, and is three times or less. Alternatively, the number of times may be set to 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). Further, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37, the lighting display of the second symbol reservation lamp 84 may not be performed.

Below the variable display device unit 80, a first ball entrance 64 through which game balls can enter is arranged. When a game ball enters the first ball inlet 64, a first ball inlet switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the first ball inlet switch is turned on. Then, the main control device 110 draws a first special symbol, and the LED 37a of the first symbol display device 37 indicates a display corresponding to the result of the lottery. In addition, the first ball entrance 64 is also one of the prize winning openings from which five prize balls are paid out when game balls enter. In this first ball entrance 64, a game ball (a game ball hit to the left) flowing down the flow path on the left side of the variable display unit 80 flows down the flow path on the right side of the variable display unit 80. Nails and the like are arranged so that it is easier to enter a ball than a game ball hit rightward (a game ball hit to the right).

A second ball entrance 640 through which a game ball can enter is provided on the lower right side of the variable display device unit 80 when viewed from the front. When a game ball enters the second ball inlet 640, a second ball inlet switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the second ball inlet switch is turned on. Then, the main control device 110 draws a second special symbol, and the LED 37 a of the first symbol display device 37 displays the result of the lottery. In addition, the second ball entrance 640 is also one of the prize winning openings from which five prize balls are paid out when a game ball enters. As shown in FIG. 2, the second ball entrance 640 is provided on the right side of the game board 13, so basically only game balls that flow down the flow path provided on the right side of the variable display device unit 80 enters the ball.

A right variable prize winning device 65 is arranged in the lower left direction of the second ball entrance 640 in a front view, and a laterally elongated rectangular right specific prize winning port 65a is provided substantially in the center thereof. A left variable winning device 650 is arranged in the lower left direction of the right variable winning device 65 when viewed from the front. The left variable prize winning device 650 includes a horizontally long rectangular opening/closing plate covering the left specific prize winning opening 650a, and a large opening solenoid (not shown) for opening and closing forward with the lower side of the opening/closing plate as an axis. I have. The opening/closing plate is normally in a closed state in which game balls cannot win prizes. In the closed state of the opening/closing plate, since the opening/closing plate and the game board 13 are closed so as to be on the same plane, the game ball can pass through the front side of the opening/closing plate. In addition, the opening/closing plate tilts to the lower side of the front surface, thereby temporarily forming an open state in which the game ball easily enters the left specific winning hole 650a. In the pachinko machine 10, when the lottery for special symbols performed by the main controller 110 results in a big win, the LED 37a of the first symbol display device 37 is turned on after a predetermined time (fluctuation time) elapses so that the big win stops. At the same time, the stop symbol of the third symbol corresponding to the big win is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 to indicate that the big win has been confirmed (that the right to the big win has been obtained). Then, in the jackpot standby state that has shifted due to the confirmation of the jackpot, the game state is transitioned to a special game state in which a larger amount of prize balls than normal is paid out by entering the game ball into the operation winning hole 660. do. In this special game state, the right specific prize winning port 65a and the left specific prize winning port 650a, which are normally closed, are opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds have passed or until a predetermined number of game balls have been won). be. That is, the opening/closing door 65f1, which normally closes the right specific winning hole 65a, is opened by the first round of the big win (special game state), and the ball can enter the right specific winning hole 65a. Become. Ten prize balls are awarded each time one game ball enters the right specific winning hole 65a. In addition, in each round after the second round of the jackpot (special game state), the left specific winning hole 650a is opened to allow entry of a ball. Like the right specific winning opening 65a, the left specific winning opening 650a also gives 10 winning balls each time one game ball enters.

Note that the right specific winning hole 65a, the left specific winning hole 650a, and the above-described second ball entry hole 640 enter the game balls that have flowed down the flow path on the right side of the variable display device unit 80 (game balls that have been hit to the right). It is placed in a position where the ball is possible (easy to enter). In other words, the game ball that has flowed down the left channel of the variable display device unit 80 is arranged at a position where it is impossible to enter (difficult to enter). Therefore, in order for the player to receive the payout of prize balls (gain a profit) during the big win, the player should hit the game ball to the right. Here, as shown in FIG. 2, the right variable winning device 65 is arranged in a state of being slightly inclined downward in the lower left direction when viewed from the front. As a result, when the player hits to the right with the opening/closing door 65f1 closed and the game ball reaches the upper surface of the right variable winning device 65, the game ball that has reached the right variable winning device 65 is tilted. The ball can be made to flow down in the lower left direction when viewed from the front, and the ball can be entered into the out hole 66 . Therefore, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the game ball shot by hitting to the right from staying on the upper part of the right variable winning device 65 (the upper surface of the opening/closing door 65f1). In addition, as shown in FIG. 2, the left variable winning device 650 is arranged at the lower left of the right variable winning device 65, so when the left specific winning port 650a is opened, the right variable winning device 65 A game ball that has flowed down in the lower left direction in a front view along the slope enters the left specific winning hole 650a.

In the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, the conditions for ending each round of the jackpot (reclosing the opened right specific prize winning port 65a or the left specific prize winning port 650a) are the conditions for the jackpot round (open It is made different according to the type of specific winning opening). Specifically, in the first round (the round in which the right specific winning opening 65a is opened), 30 seconds have passed since the open/close door 65f1 was opened, or two or more game balls have entered the right specific winning opening. When the player wins (enters the ball) in 65a, the opening/closing door 65f1 is closed and the first round ends. On the other hand, in each round after the second round of the jackpot (the round in which the left specific winning opening 650a is opened), 30 seconds have passed since the left specific winning opening 650a was opened, or 10 or more games have been played. When the ball enters the left specific winning hole 650a, the left specific winning hole 650a is closed and the round ends.

In addition, in the right variable winning device 65, a sensor for detecting the entry of a game ball into the right specific winning hole 65a is provided inside the right variable winning device 65. FIG. Therefore, there is a time lag between when the game ball enters the right specific winning hole 65a and when the ball is detected. More specifically, it takes about 0.5 seconds from when the game ball enters the right specific winning hole 65a to when the number of entering balls is actually counted. In other words, it takes about 0.5 seconds from when the number of game balls that satisfies the end condition of the round enters the right specific winning hole 65a until the opening/closing door 65f1 is closed. Therefore, if game balls can be additionally entered during this 0.5 seconds, it is possible to obtain more prize balls than usual (when only the number of winning balls that satisfies the upper limit of the end of the round is won). . In the first embodiment, in one round (the round in which the right specific winning hole 65a is opened), the player intentionally enters more than the number of game balls that are the conditions for ending the round into the right specific winning hole 65a. It is configured to be able to sphere. Hereinafter, for the sake of simplification of explanation, the fact that the number of game balls exceeding the upper limit number of winning prizes (number of winning balls) specified in each round wins (wins) the specific winning port 65a is called "over winning". called.

Details will be described later with reference to FIGS. 4 and 5, but in the first embodiment, in order to make it easier to generate over-winning, after the game ball reaches the upper surface of the opening and closing door 65f1, the opening and closing door The upper surface of the opening/closing door 65f1 is configured so that the period until it completely passes through the upper surface of the opening/closing door 65f1 is long. With this configuration, while one game ball is flowing down the upper surface of the opening/closing door 65f1, it becomes easier to add a plurality of game balls to reach the upper surface of the opening/closing door 65f1. Therefore, in the jackpot standby state, at the timing when more game balls are flowing down the upper surface of the opening/closing door 65f1, the game ball is entered into the operating winning prize opening 660 to start the jackpot (the opening/closing door 65f1 is opened). ), all game balls flowing down the upper surface of the opening/closing door 65f1 can be entered into the opened right specific winning hole 65a. As described above, the first round of the jackpot ends when two or more winnings (balls) are detected in the specific winning hole 65a. However, if the first round of the jackpot can be started in a state in which three or more game balls reach the upper surface of the opening/closing door 65f1 before the start of the jackpot, three or more game balls enter the right specific winning port 65a. By winning (entering a prize), more prize balls than originally (prize balls for two winning prizes) can be obtained. Therefore, it is possible to provide a game property that affects the number of prize balls that the player can obtain in the first round of the jackpot according to the timing of entering the game ball into the operation winning hole 660, so that the jackpot standby can be provided. It is possible to make the game more enjoyable during the state. In order for the game ball to reach the open/close door 65f1 during the jackpot standby state, the game ball should not enter the operating winning opening 660 (the game ball should not enter the operating winning opening flow path (see FIG. 2)). It is sufficient to hit to the right with a firing intensity (less than 95% firing intensity) that does not flow in).

Next, referring to FIGS. 4 and 5, the structure of the upper surface of the opening/closing door 65f1 will be described. First, FIG. 4(a) is a front perspective view of the variable winning device 65 with the opening/closing door 65f1 closed, and FIG. 4(b) is a front perspective view of the variable winning device 65 with the opening/closing door 65f1 opened. It is a front perspective view.

As shown in FIG. 4(a), the upper surface of the opening/closing door 65f1 is provided with projections 65f1a to 65f1c provided to prevent game balls from flowing down. The game ball flowing down the upper surface of the opening/closing door 65f1 is prevented from flowing down by the projections 65f1a to 65f1c, so it flows down on the opening/closing door 65f1 along the outer periphery of the projections 65f1a to 65f1c. That is, on the opening/closing door 65f1, a serpentine flow path is formed by the projections 65f1a to 65f1c. For this reason, compared to the case where the convex portions 65f1a to 65f1c are not provided (that is, the case where the game ball can flow down the opening/closing door 65f1 linearly from the right direction to the left direction in front view), the opening/closing door It is possible to lengthen the period required until the water completely flows down the upper surface of 65f1. As a result, while one game ball is flowing down the upper surface of the opening/closing door 65f1, it becomes easier to add a plurality of game balls to reach the upper surface of the opening/closing door 65f1. Therefore, in the jackpot standby state, at the timing when more game balls are flowing down the upper surface of the opening/closing door 65f1, the game ball is entered into the operating winning prize opening 660 to start the jackpot (the opening/closing door 65f1 is opened). ), it is possible to over-win more game balls.

FIG. 4(b) is a diagram showing a state in which the opening/closing door 65f1 is opened. As shown in FIG. 4(b), the opening/closing door 65f1 slides from the front side in front view toward the back side in front view, and moves inside the game board 13 through an opening provided in the game board 13. be stored. As a result, the right specific winning opening 65a is opened. When the right specific winning hole 65a is opened, the game ball flowing down from the right direction of the right variable winning device 65 can enter the right specific winning hole 65a. In addition, since the height of the opening for housing the opening/closing door 65f1 is sufficiently low with respect to the diameter of the game ball, the upper surface of the opening/closing door 65f1 is flowing down when the opening/closing door 65f1 starts to slide. It is possible to prevent the game ball from being stored inside the game board 13 together with the opening/closing door 65f1. Therefore, when the opening/closing door 65f1 slides into the game board 13, the game balls on the upper surface of the opening/closing door 65f1 can be dropped into the specific winning hole 65a.

Here, in the first embodiment, the period required for one game ball to completely pass through the opening/closing door 65f1 is set to about 4 seconds. The shooting interval of the game balls (the interval from shooting one game ball to shooting the next game ball) is configured to be 0.6 seconds at the shortest. As a result, while one game ball is flowing down the upper surface of the opening/closing door 65f1, about six additional game balls can be shot. Therefore, in the jackpot standby state, about 7 game balls are continuously shot toward the variable winning device 65, and then about 7 games are played by entering the game balls into the operation winning hole 660. The first round can be started while the ball is flowing down the upper surface of the opening/closing door 65f1. That is, the opening/closing door 65f1 can be opened and all game balls flowing down the upper surface of the opening/closing door 65f1 can be made to enter the specific winning opening 65a. As a result, it is possible to acquire more prize balls than originally (prize balls for two prizes), so in the jackpot standby state, the operating prize opening is operated in a state in which more game balls reach the open/close door 65f1. It is possible to allow the player to devise ways to enter the game ball into 660 . Therefore, the player's interest in the game in the jackpot waiting state can be improved. As a result, in the jackpot standby state, the game ball is entered into the operation winning port 660 while the game ball is flowing down the opening/closing door 65f1, thereby providing a game property capable of intentionally generating over winning. can provide.

In the first embodiment, three protrusions 65f1a to 65f1c are provided on the upper surface of the opening/closing door 65f1, so that the game balls pass through the opening/closing door 65f1. Although it is configured so that the passage period is long, it is not limited to this. For example, instead of providing the protrusions 65f1a to 65f1c, or in addition, the material of the upper surface of the open/close door 65f1 has a higher coefficient of friction than other parts (the surface of the game board 13, the inner surface of the variable winning device 65, etc.). It may be made of a large material (for example, an elastic body, etc.), or may be processed to make it difficult for the game ball to roll (for example, providing an uneven surface, etc.).

In the first embodiment, 30 seconds have passed since the start of one round, or when two or more game balls enter the specific winning opening 65a before 30 seconds have passed, the first round It was configured to terminate. That is, the end condition was set so that if the player hits right, the upper limit number (two) of game balls are almost certainly entered into the specific winning hole 65a to end the first round. It is not limited to this. For example, even if a right-handed shot is aimed at the right specific winning hole 65a after the start of the first round, the first round may be completed in a period of time during which it is difficult to enter the game ball. . Specifically, for example, 0.5 seconds have passed since the start of one round, or when 10 or more game balls have entered the specific winning hole 65a before 0.5 seconds have passed, the first round may be configured to end. When configured in this way, if the game ball is not passing through the upper surface of the opening/closing door 65f1 at the timing when the game ball enters the operation winning hole 660, even one game ball enters the right specific winning hole 65a. It is possible to provide a playability that increases the possibility that the first round will end without hitting the ball. Therefore, a player who wants to win a prize ball in the first round is made to launch a game ball toward the opening/closing door 65f1 before entering the game ball into the operation winning hole 660 in the jackpot standby state. It is possible to entertain the game property of aiming at the operation winning hole 660 later. Therefore, the player's interest in the game in the jackpot waiting state can be improved.

FIG. 5 is a top view of the opening/closing door 65f1 viewed from the vertical top side. As shown in FIG. 5, passage detection sensors 228a to 228f capable of detecting the passage of game balls are embedded in the zigzagging path on which the game ball can (easily) roll on the upper surface of the opening/closing door 65f1. . These passage detection sensors 228a to 228f are arranged apart from each other at a distance exceeding at least the diameter of the game ball in the path formed on the upper surface of the opening/closing door 65f1. These passage detection sensors 228a to 228f output H (high) when a game ball is placed above them, and output L (low) when there is nothing to obstruct the above. It consists of an optical sensor. In the first embodiment, the combination of the outputs of these passage detection sensors 228a to 228f is monitored by the audio lamp control device 113 side. During the jackpot standby state, an effect suggesting the approximate number of game balls flowing down the upper surface of the opening/closing door 65f1 can be executed according to the combination of the outputs of the passage detection sensors 228a to 228f. . That is, it is configured to be able to execute an effect suggesting the degree of advantage when a game ball is entered into the operation winning hole 660 . As a result, more game balls are entered into the operation winning hole 660 at the timing when it is suggested that more game balls are flowing down on the opening/closing door 65f1 according to the content of the effect, thereby increasing the number of game balls. A game ball can be more easily awarded an over prize. Therefore, the player can easily aim for over winning. The details of the waiting state effect executed during this jackpot waiting state will be described with reference to FIG.

FIGS. 7(a) and (b) are diagrams showing the display mode during the standby state production executed in the jackpot standby state. As shown in FIG. 7(a), when the game enters the jackpot standby state, a display area HR1 in which characters "jackpot confirmed!" The display content of the display area HR1 makes it possible for the player to easily recognize that the big win has been confirmed (the right to win the big win has been obtained). Further, below the display area HR1, a combination (final stop symbol) of the third symbols finally stopped and displayed (determined display) in the variable display effect executed before the big win standby state is displayed. . By displaying the final stop pattern even during the big win standby state, the player can easily confirm at any timing whether the current big win is a variable probability big win or a normal big win.

On the right side of the final stop symbol when viewed from the front, a vertically elongated chance meter CM divided into six small areas in the vertical direction is displayed. Each area constituting the chance meter CM is configured to be variable between a mode of appearing to be unlit and a mode of appearing to emit light, and the number of small areas appearing to appear to emit light determines the operation prize. It is configured to suggest the degree of advantage when a game ball is entered into the mouth 660. - 特許庁More specifically, the number of small regions is determined in order (preferentially) from the lower small region according to the number of sensors whose output is H (high) among the passage detection sensors 228a to 228f. It is configured to be set to look like it emits light (lighting mode). That is, in the chance meter CM, game balls corresponding to the number of small areas that appear to emit light (lighting mode) are passing through at least the upper surface of the opening/closing door 65f1 (when the opening/closing door 65f1 is opened). It is suggested that it is possible to win a prize to the right specific prize winning port 65a). Hereinafter, for simplification of explanation, the small areas that appear to emit light in the chance meter CM will be referred to as a "gauge", and the number of small areas that appear to emit light will be referred to as a "gauge number". The change in the appearance of the emitted light will be referred to as "accumulating the gauge".

At the bottom of the final stop pattern, "Aim for 'GO!' to charge the meter! ! ”, the characters “Aim right at the right timing!!”, and an image suggesting to aim at the operation winning opening 660 are displayed in the display area HR2. According to the display contents of the display area HR2, the player can aim at the normal entrance (through gate) 67 (see FIG. 2) marked with "GO!" It can be easily understood that the gauge number of the displayed chance meter CM can be increased. As described above, the chance meter CM has a variable number of gauges in conjunction with the detection contents of the passage detection sensors 228a to 228f arranged on the upper surface of the opening/closing door 65f1. By shooting a game ball with a shooting intensity (shooting speed) to the extent that the ball enters a normal ball entrance (through gate) 67, the game ball also reaches a variable winning device 65 arranged downstream thereof. can be made Therefore, by continuously shooting game balls in the direction in which the normal ball entrance (through gate) 67 is arranged, the game balls continuously reach the upper surface of the opening and closing door 65f1 of the variable winning device 65. do. In this state, by shooting a game ball aiming at the operation winning hole 660 according to the display contents of the display area HR2 (that is, with a shooting intensity of 95% to 100%), a big win is started and the opening/closing door 65f1 is opened. be. As a result, the game ball flowing down the opening/closing door 65f1 can be made to enter the right specific winning hole 65a. As described above, a rotating member 670a that rotates at a constant rotational speed is provided on the left side of the operation winning port 660 in front view. Since this rotating member 670a can prevent a game ball from entering the operation winning hole 660 according to its rotating position, it is possible for the player to not only check the gauge number of the chance meter CM, but also rotate it. The game ball can be shot at the shooting timing considering the rotational position of the member 670a. Therefore, it is possible to further enhance the player's interest in the game in the jackpot waiting state.

FIG. 7(b) is a diagram showing a state in which three gauges of the chance meter CM are accumulated. As shown in FIG. 7(b), when the game ball is passing above the three passage detection sensors 228c to 228e, the outputs of these three sensors become H (high). The audio lamp control device 113 detects the number of sensors with H output and reflects it in the mode of the chance meter CM. In the example of FIG. 7(b), since the outputs of the three sensors (passage detection sensors 228c to 228e) are H, the chance meter CM is displayed in a state in which three gauges are accumulated. In this way, the number of game balls passing over the upper surface of the opening/closing door 65f1 is detected by the passing detection sensors 228a to 228f, and the gauge number of the chance meter CM is calculated according to the detection result. , it is possible to make it easier for the player to understand when to aim at the operation winning hole 660 . Therefore, even a player who has little experience playing a game with the pachinko machine 10 can intuitively understand the timing of aiming at the operation winning hole 660.例文帳に追加As a result, even a player who plays the game for the first time can easily play the game, so that the operating rate of the pachinko machine 10 can be improved.

In addition, in the first embodiment, in the jackpot standby state, by suggesting the number of game balls passing through the upper surface of the open/close door 65f1 by the gauge number of the chance meter CM, the game balls are sent to the operation winning opening 660. Although it was configured to suggest the degree of advantage when entering the ball, it is not limited to this. For example, the gauge number of the chance meter CM may be used to indicate the degree of advantage of the big win. Specifically, for example, the gauge number of the chance meter CM may be used to suggest the type of jackpot, thereby suggesting to the player the degree of advantage when the game ball is entered into the operation winning hole 660 . Further, for example, the number of rounds for the big win may be set to be unfixed when the big win is confirmed, and the number of rounds for the big win may be drawn by lottery at the timing of passing through the operation winning opening 660.例文帳に追加By suggesting the number of rounds determined by a lottery executed when a game ball is entered into the operating winning hole 660 according to the number of gauges, the number of rounds when a game ball is entered into the operating winning hole 660 is suggested. A configuration may be adopted in which the degree of advantage is suggested to the player.

Returning to FIG. 2, the description continues. At the lower right corner of the game board 13, an affixing space K1 for affixing a certificate stamp, an identification label, or the like is provided. The certificate stamp or the like pasted on the pasting space K1 can be visually recognized through the small window 35 (see FIG. 1) of the front frame 14. As shown in FIG.

Furthermore, the game board 13 is provided with an out port 66 . A game ball that has not won any winning hole is guided to a ball discharge path (not shown) through an out hole 66.例文帳に追加The game board 13 is provided with a large number of nails for appropriately dispersing and adjusting the falling direction of game balls, and various members (accessories) such as windmills.

As shown in FIG. 3, the back side of the pachinko machine 10 is mainly provided with control board units 90 and 91 and a back pack unit 94 . The control board unit 90 is unitized by mounting a main board (main controller 110), an audio lamp control board (audio lamp control device 113), and a display control board (display control device 114). The control board unit 91 is unitized by mounting a payout control board (payout control device 111), a launch control board (launch control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116.

The back pack unit 94 is formed by unitizing a back pack 92 forming a protective cover portion and a dispensing unit 93 . In addition, each control board has an MPU as a 1-chip microcomputer that manages each control, a port that communicates with various devices, a random number generator that is used for various lotteries, and is used for time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generation circuit or the like is mounted as required.

The main control device 110, the sound lamp control device 113, the display control device 114, the payout control device 111, the firing control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in the board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. . Each of the board boxes 100 to 104 has a box base and a box cover that covers the opening of the box base. The box base and the box cover are connected to each other to accommodate each controller and each board.

In addition, the board box 100 (main controller 110) and the board box 102 (dispensing control device 111 and firing control device 112) connect the box base and the box cover in an unopenable manner (caulking structure) by a sealing unit (not shown). consolidation). A sealing seal (not shown) is attached to the connecting portion between the box base and the box cover over the box base and the box cover. The sealing seal is made of a brittle material, and if the sealing seal is peeled off in order to open the circuit board boxes 100, 102, or if the circuit board boxes 100, 102 are forcibly opened, the box base and the box cover may be damaged. cut to the side. Therefore, by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal, it is possible to know whether the substrate boxes 100, 102 have been opened.

The dispensing unit 93 includes a tank 130 located at the top of the back pack unit 94 and open upward, a tank rail 131 connected to the lower side of the tank 130 and gently inclined toward the downstream side, and a tank rail 131 downstream of the tank rail 131. A case rail 132 vertically connected to the side, and a payout device 133 provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132, which pays out game balls by a predetermined electrical configuration of a payout motor 216 (see FIG. 8). I have. The tank 130 is successively replenished with game balls supplied from the island facilities of the game hall, and a payout device 133 appropriately pays out the required number of game balls. A vibrator 134 for applying vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131 .

In addition, the payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the firing control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor operation knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3). ing. The state recovery switch 120 is operated to eliminate ball clogging (return to normal state) when a dispensing error such as a ball clogging in the dispensing motor 216 (see FIG. 8) occurs. The operating knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is operated when the power is turned on to return the pachinko machine 10 to its initial state.

<Regarding the electrical configuration in the first embodiment>
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 8 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10. As shown in FIG.

The main control unit 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer that is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 includes a ROM 202 storing various control programs and fixed value data to be executed by the MPU 201, and a memory for temporarily storing various data when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 202. A RAM 203 and other various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission/reception circuit are incorporated. In addition, various commands are transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sub-controllers by the data transmission/reception circuit in order to instruct the sub-controllers such as the payout controller 111 and the sound lamp controller 113 to operate. Such commands are sent in only one direction from the main controller 110 to the sub-controllers.

The main controller 110 executes major processing of the pachinko machine 10, such as the jackpot lottery, display setting of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, and the display result lottery of the second symbol display device 83. The RAM 203 is provided with a counter buffer (see FIG. 12) that stores various counters for controlling these processes.

Here, with reference to FIG. 12, counters and the like provided in the RAM 203 of the main controller 110 will be described. These counters and the like are used by the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110 in order to set the jackpot lottery, the display settings of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, the lottery of the display result of the second symbol display device 83, and the like. used in

For the setting of the jackpot lottery and the display of the first symbol display device 37 and the third pattern display device 81, the first winning random number counter C1 used for the jackpot lottery and the first winning type counter C2 used for selecting the jackpot symbols are used. , a stop type counter C3 used to select a stop type, a variation type counter CS1 used to select a variation pattern, and a first initial value random number counter CINI1 used to set the initial value of the first random number counter C1. and are used. A second winning random number counter C4 is used for lottery of normal symbols (second symbol display device 83), and a second initial value random number counter CINI2 is used for setting the initial value of the second winning random number counter C4. Each of these counters is a loop counter that adds 1 to the previous value each time it is updated and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value.

Each counter is updated, for example, at intervals of 2 milliseconds, which is the execution interval of timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 21), and some counters are updated irregularly during the main processing (see FIG. 30). Then, the updated value is appropriately stored in a counter buffer set in a predetermined area of the RAM 203 . The RAM 203 is provided with a first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a consisting of four reserved areas (first to fourth reserved areas). Each value of the first winning random number counter C1, the first winning type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 is stored in accordance with the timing of the ball. In addition, the RAM 203 is provided with a second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b consisting of four reserved areas (first to fourth reserved areas). The values of the first hit random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 are stored in accordance with the timing of entering the ball. Further, the RAM 203 is provided with an execution area 203c, which stores the values of the first winning random number counter C1, the first winning type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3, which are targets for the lottery. Furthermore, the RAM 203 is provided with a normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203d consisting of one execution area and four reserved areas (first to fourth reserved areas), and each of these areas contains a game ball. The value of the second winning random number counter C4 is stored in time with the timing of passing through the normal entrance (through gate) 67. FIG.

Each counter will be described in detail. The first hit random number counter C1 is incremented by 1 in order within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 399). It is configured to return to In particular, when the first winning random number counter C1 completes one cycle, the value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 at that time is read as the initial value of the first winning random number counter C1.

The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is configured as a loop counter updated within the same range as the first random number counter C1. That is, for example, if the first random number counter C1 is a loop counter that can take values from 0 to 399, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is also a loop counter that ranges from 0 to 399. The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is updated once each time the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 21) is executed, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main processing (see FIG. 30).

The value of the first hit random number counter C1 is, for example, periodically updated (once per timer interrupt processing in this embodiment), and when a game ball enters the first ball entrance 64, the value is stored in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a of the RAM203. On the other hand, when the game ball enters the second ball entrance 640, the value is stored in the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b.

As described above, the value of the random number for the special symbol jackpot is set by the first winning random number table 202a (see FIG. 9B) stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110, and the first winning random number counter When the value of C1 coincides with the value of the random number for the big win set by the first random number table, it is determined as the special symbol big win. In addition, this first random number table 202a is for when the probability of special symbols is low (a period in which the probability of special symbols is low), and when the probability of winning a special symbol is high (special The number of random numbers that will be the jackpot included in each type is set differently (see FIG. 9(b)). In this way, by varying the number of random numbers that result in a big win, the probability of a big win is changed between when the probability of special symbols is low and when the probability of special symbols is high.

The first win type counter C2 determines the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 when a special symbol jackpot is won, and adds 1 in order within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 99). and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (for example, 99 in the case of a counter that can take values from 0 to 99). The value of the first hit type counter C2, for example, is periodically updated (once per timer interrupt processing in this embodiment), and when the game ball enters the first ball entrance 64, the The value is stored in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a of the RAM 203 (execution area 203c when the special symbol lottery is not being executed). On the other hand, when the game ball enters the second ball entrance 640, the value is stored in the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203 (the execution area 203c if the special symbol lottery is not being executed). Stored.

Here, if the value of the first winning random number counter C1 stored in the execution area 203c is not a random number that will result in a special symbol jackpot, that is, if it is a random number that will result in a loss of the special symbol, the first symbol display device 37 The display mode corresponding to the stop symbol displayed in , is the one when the special symbol is removed.

On the other hand, if the value of the first winning random number counter C1 stored in the execution area 203c is a random number for a special symbol jackpot, the display mode corresponding to the stop symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is It will be the one at the time of the special pattern jackpot. In this case, the specific display mode at the time of the big hit is indicated by the value of the first winning type counter C2 stored in the same first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a or second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b. display mode.

The first hit random number counter C1 in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment is configured as a 2-byte loop counter ranging from 0 to 399. FIG. In this first winning random number counter C1, there are two random numbers that become a jackpot with special symbols when the probability of special symbols is low. It is stored in the table (see 202a1 in FIG. 9B). In this way, when the probability of the special symbol is low, the total number of random number values that become a big hit is 2 among the total number of random number values of 400, so the probability of a big win of the special symbol is "1/200". It should be noted that the random number value (counter value) that becomes a big hit is common to the lottery for the first special symbol and the lottery for the second special symbol.

On the other hand, when the probability of special symbols is high, there are 20 random numbers that become the jackpot of special symbols, and the values "0 to 19" are stored in the first random number table for high probability ( See 202a2 in FIG. 9(b)). In this way, when the probability of special symbols is high, the total number of random numbers that will be a big win is 20 out of 400 random numbers, so the probability of a special symbol being a big win is "1/20".

Further, the value of the first win type counter C2 in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment is configured as a loop counter within the range of 0-99. Then, as shown in FIG. 10(a), when the first special symbol lottery results in a big win and the value of the first win type counter C2 is "0 to 4", the big win type is "jackpot A" ( 8 round definite variable jackpot). In addition, the jackpot type when the value is "5 to 64" is "jackpot B" (5 round probability variable jackpot), and the jackpot type when the value is "65 to 99" is "jackpot C". (5 rounds normal jackpot).

On the other hand, the jackpot type is "jackpot D" (16 round probability variable jackpot) when the second special symbol lottery results in a jackpot and the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "0 to 4". In addition, the jackpot type when the value is "5 to 64" is "jackpot E" (10 round probability variable jackpot), and the jackpot type when the value is "65 to 99" is "jackpot F". (10 rounds normal jackpot).

In this way, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured so that six types of winning (jackpots A to F) are determined by the type of special symbol and the value of the random number indicated by the first winning type counter C2. It is

The stop type selection counter C3 is, for example, incremented by one within a range of 0 to 99, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 99). In this embodiment, the stop type selection counter C3 selects the stop type at the time of loss displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and after the occurrence of the ready-to-win, the final stop symbol shifts by one before and after the ready-to-win symbol. "Reach outside the front and rear" (for example, 98, 99) to stop at the same time, and "Reach other than the front and back" (for example, the range of 90 to 97) in which the final stop symbol stops at a position other than the front and rear of the reach symbol after the same reach occurs. Three stop (effect) patterns such as "completely out of reach" (for example, the range of 0 to 89) are selected. The value of the stop type selection counter C3 is, for example, periodically updated (once per timer interrupt processing in this embodiment), and when a game ball enters the first ball entrance 64, the value is stored in the RAM 203. is stored in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a (execution area 203c when special symbol lottery is not being executed). In addition, when the game ball enters the second ball entrance 640, the value is stored in the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203 (the execution area 203c when the special symbol lottery is not being executed). be.

In addition, from the value (random number) of the stop type selection counter C3, the random value for determining the stop type of the special symbol is set by a stop type selection table (not shown), and this table is the main control It is provided in ROM 202 of device 110 . In addition, in this embodiment, this table is divided into a special symbol for high probability and a special symbol for low probability. is changing This is because the selection ratio of the stop type is changed depending on whether the pachinko machine 10 is in a special symbol high probability state or a special symbol low probability state.

For example, in a high-probability state, a table for high-probability situations with a wide random number range of 0 to 89 corresponding to the stop type of "complete failure" so that the reach effect is not selected more than necessary because the jackpot is likely to occur. is selected, making it easier for "completely out" to be selected. In this table, the "front-rear out-of-reach reach" is narrowed to 98 and 99, and the "non-front-rear out-of-reel reach" is also narrowed from 90 to 97, making it difficult to select the "front-rear out-of-reel reach" or the "non-rear-rear out-of-reel reach". In addition, in the low probability state, the range of the random number value corresponding to the stop type of "complete failure" is narrow as 0 to 79 in order to secure the time for the game ball to enter the first ball entrance 64. A table for time is selected, and "completely out" is less likely to be selected.

In this stop type selection table, the range of random numbers corresponding to the stop type of "Reach other than front-rear deviation" is widened from 80 to 97, making it easier for "Reach other than front-rear deviation" to be selected. Therefore, in the low-probability state, it is possible to perform many ready-to-win displays with a long performance time, so that the time for the game ball to enter the first ball entrance 64 can be ensured, and the variable display by the third symbol display device 81 can be continued. easier to do. In the latter table as well, the range of random numbers corresponding to the stop type of "outside reach" is set to 98,99.

The fluctuation type counter CS1 is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 198, for example, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 198). Rough display modes such as so-called normal reach and super reach are determined by the fluctuation type counter CS1. Determination of the display mode is, specifically, determination of the variation time of the symbol variation. Based on the variation time determined by the variation type counter CS1, the reach type of the third symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the detailed symbol variation mode are determined by the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114. be. The value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is updated once each time the main process (see FIG. 30), which will be described later, is executed, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process. A variation pattern table 202d (see FIG. 11(a)) storing a random value for determining one variation time of symbol variation from the value (random value) of the variation type counter CS1 is stored in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110. is provided in

Here, the variation pattern table 202d will be described with reference to FIGS. 11(a) to 11(d). As shown in FIG. 11(a), this variation pattern table 202d is a table for selecting a variation pattern based on the lottery of the first special symbol, and a variation pattern table 202d1 for big hits (see FIG. 11(b)). , At least a deviation (normal) variation pattern table 202d2 (see FIG. 11(c)) and a deviation (probable variation) variation pattern table 202d3 (see FIG. 11(d)) are defined.

First, with reference to FIG. 11(b), the big winning variation pattern table 202d1 will be described. FIG. 11(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of this big winning variation pattern table 202d1. The large winning variation pattern table 202d1 is a data table that defines the type of variation pattern (variation time) to be selected when the lottery result of the special symbols is a large winning. As the variation pattern of the jackpot, various types of normal reach (30 seconds), various types of super reach (60 seconds), and special reach (90 seconds) are defined. In the big hit variation pattern table 202d1, each variation pattern is associated with each value of the variation type counter CS1.

Specifically, as the judgment value of the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1, the range of "0 to 50" is associated with the fluctuation pattern of various normal reach (30 seconds), and the range of "51 to 179" is associated with various super reach (60 seconds) is associated with the variation pattern, and the range of "180 to 198" is associated with various special reach (90 seconds) variation patterns. The MPU 201 of the main controller 110 selects a variation pattern in which a determination value corresponding to the acquired value of the variation type counter CS1 is set when selecting a variation pattern when the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit. Selection is made from the big hit variation pattern table 202d1.

FIG. 11(c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the (normal) variation pattern table 202d2 for failure. The (normal) variation pattern table 202d2 for loss is a data table that defines the type (variation time) of the variation pattern selected when the lottery result of the special symbol is a loss in the low probability state of the special symbol. . If the lottery result of the special symbol is out, as described above, the stop type is completely out (non-reach) from the stop type selection table (not shown) or the out of reach (common reach). It is determined by the value of the selection counter C3. Specifically, for example, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of "0 to 79" in the low probability state of the special symbol, it is set to be completely out, and if it is in the range of "80 to 99", it is out. Set (front-to-back out-of-reach reach, front-to-back out-of-reach reach).

Here, when the variation pattern type is complete failure, either a short failure (7 seconds) with a relatively short variation time or a long failure (10 seconds) with a relatively long variation time is set. "0 to 98" is set as the determination value of the variation type counter CS1 for short deviation (7 seconds), and "99 to 198" is set for long deviation (10 seconds).

In addition, for the outlier reach, the judgment value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is in the range of "0 to 149" Normal reach (30 seconds) out of the range, "150 to 197" out of range Super reach (60 seconds), and "198" is set to a different special reach (90 seconds).

In this way, the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 determines the stop type when the lottery result of the special symbol is lost during the normal game state, and the variation obtained from the (normal) variation pattern table 202d2 for loss. A variation pattern is selected from the deviation (normal) variation pattern table 202d2 based on the value of the type counter CS1.

FIG. 11(d) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the deviation (variable probability) variation pattern table 202d3. This loss (probability variation) variation pattern table 202d3 is a data table that defines the type (variation time) of the variation pattern selected when the special symbol lottery is lost in the probability variation state of the special symbol. In this deviation (probable variation) variation pattern table 202d3, the set value of the variation type counter CS1 is different from that in the deviation (normal) variation pattern table 202d2.

In addition, as described above, when the gaming state is the probability variable gaming state, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of "0 to 89" according to the stop type selection table (not shown), complete loss is determined. , and within the range of “90 to 99”, the out-of-reach reach (front-rear out-of-reach reach, reach other than front-rear out-of-order reach) is determined.

In this way, when the probability variation gaming state is higher than the normal gaming state, the probability of becoming a reach when it is out is set low. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the fact that the variation time of the loss becomes longer at the time of the probability variation, and the period until the big win becomes longer. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the problem that the game is slowed down in the probability variable game state in which a big win is likely to occur, and the player feels bored.

Returning to FIG. 12, the description continues. The second hit random number counter C4 is configured as a loop counter that increments by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 239, for example, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 239). Further, when the second winning random number counter C4 completes one cycle, the value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is read as the initial value of the second winning random number counter C4. The value of the second hit random number counter C4 is updated, for example, periodically for each timer interrupt process in this embodiment, and is acquired when it is detected that the game ball has passed through the through gate 67, and is stored in the RAM 203 as a normal symbol. It is stored in the reserved ball storage area 203d.

Then, the value of the random number that is the normal winning pattern is set by the second winning random number table 202c (see FIG. 10(b)) stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device, and the value of the second winning random number counter C4. is equal to the winning random number value set by the second winning random number table, it is determined that the win is a normal symbol. In addition, this second hit random number table is for when the probability of normal patterns is low (period in which normal patterns are normal), and when the probability of winning normal patterns is high than that of low probability (normal patterns) It is divided into two types, one for a time saving state) and the other, and the number of random numbers to be a big hit included in each is set differently (see FIG. 10(b)). In this way, by making the number of random numbers to be winning different, the probability of winning is changed between when the probability of normal symbols is low and when the probability of normal symbols is high.

As shown in FIG. 10(b), when the probability of normal symbols is low, there are 24 random numbers that will win normal symbols, and the values are "5 to 28". In this way, when the probability of normal symbols is low, the total number of random numbers that will be a big hit is 24 out of the total number of random numbers of 240, so the probability of a big win of special symbols is "1/10".

When the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal pattern low probability mode, when the game ball passes through the normal ball entrance (through gate) 67, the value of the second hit random number counter C4 is obtained and the second pattern display device is obtained. At 83, the variable display of normal symbols is executed for 30 seconds. Then, if the value of the acquired second winning random number counter C4 is within the range of "5 to 28", it is determined that the winning is done, and after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is completed, the stop symbol (the second As a symbol), the symbol "O" is lit and displayed, and the electric accessory 640a associated with the second ball entrance 640 is opened only "0.2 seconds x 1 time". In the present embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 has a low probability of normal symbols, the electric accessory 640a is opened only for "0.2 seconds x 1 time" when the normal symbols are won. The time and number of times may be set arbitrarily. For example, it may be opened "0.5 sec x 2 times".

On the other hand, there are 200 random numbers for the normal symbol jackpot when the probability of the normal symbol is high, and the range is "5 to 204". These random numbers are stored in the second winning random number table for high probability. In this way, when the probability of the special symbol is low, the total number of random numbers that will be a big hit is 200 out of the total number of random numbers of 240, so the probability of a big win of the special symbol is "1/1.2".

When the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal pattern high probability mode, when the game ball passes through the normal ball entrance (through gate) 67, the value of the second winning random number counter C4 is acquired and the second pattern display device is obtained. At 83, variable display of normal symbols is executed for 3 seconds. Then, if the value of the acquired second winning random number counter C4 is in the range of "5 to 204", it is determined that the winning is a normal symbol. In this case, after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is completed, the symbol "○" is lighted and displayed as the stop symbol (second symbol), and the electric accessory 640a is opened "1 second x 2 times". be done. In this way, when the probability of normal symbols is high, the variable display time is very short, from 30 seconds to 3 seconds, compared to when the probability of normal symbols is low. Since it becomes very long, such as “0.2 seconds×1 time→1 second×2 times”, the game ball easily enters the second ball entrance 640 . In the present embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 has a high probability of normal symbols, the electric accessory 64a is opened only "1 second x 2 times" when the normal symbols are won. The number of times can be set arbitrarily. For example, it may be opened "3 seconds x 2 times".

The second initial value random number counter CINI2 is configured as a loop counter that is updated within the same range as the second random number counter C4 (value = 0 to 239), and is updated once per timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 21). In addition, it is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main processing (see FIG. 30).

In this way, the RAM 203 is provided with various counters and the like, and the main control device 110 controls the big winning lottery and the display on the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 according to the values of the counters and the like. Main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as setting and lottery of the display result in the second pattern display device 83 can be executed.

Returning to FIG. 8, the description is continued. The RAM 203 includes a buffer for the counter shown in FIG. 12, a stack area for storing the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 201 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 201, various flags and counters, and an I/O memory. and a work area (work area) in which values such as are stored. The RAM 203 is configured to retain (back up) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply 115 even after the pachinko machine 10 is powered off, and all the data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. .

When power is interrupted due to power failure or the like, the RAM 203 stores the stack pointer and the values of each register at the time of power interruption (including power failure; the same applies hereinafter). On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including when the power is turned on due to the cancellation of the power failure; the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power was cut off based on the information stored in the RAM 203 . Writing to the RAM 203 is executed by the main processing (see FIG. 30) when the power is turned off, and restoration of each value written in the RAM 203 is executed during the start-up processing (see FIG. 29) when the power is turned on. The NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 is configured to receive a power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when power is shut off due to a power failure or the like. , NMI interrupt processing (see FIG. 28) is immediately executed as power failure processing.

Next, specific contents of the ROM 202 will be described with reference to FIG. 9(a). FIG. 9(a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM 202 provided in the main controller 110 in this embodiment. The ROM 202 of the main controller 110 stores at least a first winning random number table 202a, a first winning type selection table 202b, a second winning random number table 202c, and a variation pattern selection table 202d as part of the above fixed value data. ing.

The first winning random number table 202a (see FIG. 9B) is a data table that defines the correspondence between the value of the first winning random number counter C1 and the lottery result. Specifically, in the low probability state of the special symbol, "0, 1" is defined as the range of the determination value determined to be a jackpot (see 202a1 in FIG. 9(b)), and the high probability state of the special symbol (probability variable state), "0 to 19" is defined as the range of the judgment value judged to be a big hit (see 202a2 in FIG. 9(b)). When the value of the first winning random number counter C1 obtained based on the starting prize matches one of the determination values corresponding to the big winning defined in the first winning random number table 202a (see FIG. 9(b)) , is determined to be a special symbol jackpot.

The first hit type selection table 202b (see FIG. 10(a)) is a data table in which the determination value for determining the jackpot type is stored for each type of special symbol, and the first hit type counter C2 determines A value is defined in association with each jackpot type. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when it is determined to be a special symbol jackpot, the value of the first winning type counter C2 acquired based on the start winning is compared with the first winning type selection table 202b. A jackpot type corresponding to the value of the type counter C2 per one is selected.

As shown in FIG. 10(a), for the first special symbol, the value of the first winning type counter C2 is defined in the range of "0 to 4" in association with "jackpot A". (See 202b1 in FIG. 10(a)). This "jackpot A" has 8 rounds, and after the jackpot ends, it is a jackpot to which a "variable special pattern state" and a "ordinary pattern short-time state" are given until the next big win. . Among the 100 possible counter values of the first winning type counter C2, the counter value of "jackpot A" is five, so when the first special pattern lottery results in a jackpot, "jackpot A" is determined. ratio is 5% (5/100). This "jackpot A" has the largest number of rounds among the first special pattern jackpots, and is given an advantageous "special pattern variable state" and "ordinary pattern time saving state" after the jackpot. , is the most advantageous jackpot type among the jackpots of the first special symbol.

For the first special symbol, the value of the first winning type counter C2 is defined in the range of "5 to 64" in association with "jackpot B" (see 202b2 in FIG. 10(a)). . This "jackpot B" has five rounds, and after the jackpot ends, it is a jackpot to which a "variable special pattern state" and a "ordinary pattern short-time state" that continue until the next big win are given. . Of the 100 possible counter values of the first winning type counter C2, 60 counter values are "jackpot B", so when the first special pattern lottery results in a jackpot, "jackpot B" is determined. ratio is 60% (60/100). Although this "jackpot B" has a small number of rounds, as with the "jackpot A", an advantageous "variable special pattern state" and a "normal pattern time-saving state" are given after the end of the jackpot, so the game can be played. It is a jackpot type that is relatively advantageous for people.

For the first special symbol, the value of the first winning type counter C2 is defined in the range of "65 to 99" in association with "jackpot C" (see 202b3 in FIG. 10(a)). . This "jackpot C" has 5 rounds, and is a jackpot to which a "time-saving state of normal patterns" is given, which continues until the lottery of special patterns is completed 100 times after the completion of the jackpot. Of the 100 counter values that can be taken by the first winning type counter C2, 35 counter values are the "jackpot C". ratio is 35% (35/100). This "jackpot C" has a smaller number of rounds, and the game state after the jackpot ends is also disadvantageous compared to the "jackpot A" and "jackpot B", so it is a jackpot type that is disadvantageous to the player.

Further, as shown in FIG. 10(a), the value of the first hit type counter C2 is defined in the range of "0 to 4" for the second special symbol in association with "jackpot D". (See 202b4 in FIG. 10(a)). This "jackpot D" has 16 rounds, and after the jackpot ends, it is a jackpot to which a "variable state of special symbols" and a "reduced working hours state of normal symbols" are given until the next big win. . Among 100 counter values that can be taken by the first winning type counter C2, the number of counter values that become "jackpot D" is 5, so when the second special pattern lottery results in a jackpot, "jackpot D" is determined. ratio is 5% (5/100). This "jackpot D" is the most advantageous jackpot type for the player because the number of rounds is the largest and the game state after the jackpot ends is also advantageous.

For the second special symbol, the value of the first winning type counter C2 is defined in the range of "5 to 64" in association with "jackpot E" (see 202b5 in Fig. 10(a)). . This "jackpot E" has 10 rounds, and after the jackpot ends, it is a jackpot to which a "variable special pattern state" and a "ordinary pattern short-time state" are given until the next big win. . Of the 100 counter values that can be taken by the first winning type counter C2, 60 counter values are the "jackpot E", so when the first special symbol lottery results in a big win, the "jackpot E" is determined. ratio is 60% (60/100). Although this "jackpot E" has a smaller number of rounds than the "jackpot D", the game state after the jackpot ends is an advantageous game state similar to the "jackpot A", "jackpot B" and "jackpot D". is set, it is a kind of jackpot type that is advantageous for the player.

For the second special symbol, the value of the first winning type counter C2 is defined in the range of "65 to 99" in association with "jackpot F" (see 202b6 in Fig. 10(a)). . This "jackpot F" has 10 rounds, and after the jackpot is finished, a "time-saving state of normal patterns" is given, which continues until the lottery of special patterns is completed 100 times. Of the 100 counter values that can be taken by the first winning type counter C2, 35 counter values become the "jackpot F", so when the first special pattern lottery results in a big win, the "jackpot F" is determined. ratio is 35% (35/100). This "jackpot F" has more rounds than the first special symbol jackpots ("jackpot A" to "jackpot C"), but the game state after the jackpot ends is disadvantageous, which is disadvantageous to the player. It is a jackpot type.

In this way, when the lottery of the second special pattern results in a big win, the lottery of the second special pattern is more popular than the lottery of the first special pattern because the jackpot type has a larger number of rounds than the lottery of the first special pattern. is advantageous for the player. The ratio between the probability variable big win and the normal big win is set to be the same (65% for the probability variable big win and 35% for the normal big win) in both the lottery for the first special symbol and the lottery for the second special symbol.

The second hit random number table 202c (see FIG. 10(b)) is a data table in which hit determination values for normal symbols are defined (stored). Specifically, in the normal state of the normal design, "5 to 28" is defined as the determination value for winning the normal design (see 202c1 in FIG. 10(b)). In addition, in the high-probability state of the normal design, "5 to 204" is defined as the judgment value for winning the normal design (see 202c2 in FIG. 10(b)). In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the value of the second winning random number counter C4 obtained based on the game ball passing through the normal ball entrance (through gate) 67 and the second winning random number table 202c are referred to. Then, it is determined whether or not it is a normal pattern hit.

The variation pattern table 202d (see FIG. 11) is a data table in which the determination value of the variation type counter CS1 for determining the display mode of the variation pattern is defined for each display mode. The details of the fluctuation pattern table 202d are as described above in the explanation of the fluctuation type counter CS1, so the detailed explanation thereof will be omitted here.

Next, details of the RAM 203 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 13 is a block diagram showing the configuration of RAM 203 of main controller 110. As shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 13, the RAM 203 includes a first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a, a second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b, an execution area 203c, a normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203d, and a first special symbol reserved ball number counter. 203e, second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203f, normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203g, variable probability flag 203h, time saving medium counter 203i, ball waiting flag 203j, jackpot start flag 203k, jackpot medium flag 203m, and other memory area 203z at least have.

The first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a has four reserved areas (first reserved area to fourth reserved area). Each value of the counter C2 and the stop type selection counter C3 is stored.

More specifically, at the timing when the game ball enters the first ball entrance 64 (start winning), each value of each counter C1 to C3 is acquired, and the acquired data is stored in four holding areas (holding Among the vacant areas (1st area to 4th reservation area), the area numbers (1st to 4th) are stored in ascending order. That is, the smaller the area number, the data corresponding to the oldest winning is stored, and the first reserved area stores the data corresponding to the oldest winning. Note that if data is stored in all of the four reserved areas, nothing is newly stored.

After that, in the main controller 110, when a special symbol lottery is performed, the values of the counters C1 to C3 stored in the first reserved area of the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a are stored in the execution area 203c. (Refer to FIG. 12) is shifted (moved), and based on each value of each counter C1 to C3 stored in the execution area, a determination such as a lottery for a special symbol is performed.

When data is shifted from the first reservation area to the execution area 203c, the first reservation area becomes empty. Therefore, there is a shift process that packs the winning data stored in other reservation areas (second reservation area to fourth reservation area) to reservation areas (first reservation area to third reservation area) with an area number smaller by 1. done. In this embodiment, in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a, data shift is performed only for the reserved areas (reserved second area to reserved fourth area) in which winning data is stored.

The second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b has four reserved areas like the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a. In this second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b, each counter value obtained based on the start winning to the second ball entrance 640 is stored. Since the counter value storage method and the like are the same as those of the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The execution area 203c is a storage area in which the values of the respective counters C1 to C3 are stored for use in executing the special symbol lottery. The values of the counters C1 to C3 stored in the execution area 203c are compared with the above-described first winning random number table 202a, first winning type selection table 202b, etc., and a special symbol lottery is executed.

The normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203d has one execution area and four reserved areas (first reserved area to fourth reserved area). Each of these areas stores a second winning random number counter C4. More specifically, the value of the counter C4 is acquired at the timing when the game ball passes through the normal ball entrance (through gate) 67, and the acquired data is stored in four holding areas (holding first area to holding Among the vacant areas of the fourth area), the area numbers (first to fourth) are stored in ascending order. In other words, like the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a and the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b, the data corresponding to the winning are stored while the winning order is maintained. If data is stored in all four holding areas, nothing is newly stored.

After that, in the main controller 110, when the normal symbol winning lottery is performed, the value of the counter C4 stored in the first reserved area of the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203d is shifted to the execution area ( ), and based on the value of the counter C4 stored in the execution area, a determination such as a lottery for winning a normal symbol is performed.

If the data is shifted from the first reserved area to the execution area, the first reserved area becomes empty, so it is the same as the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a and the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b. Then, a shift process is performed to shift the prize winning data stored in other reserve areas into a reserve area with an area number smaller by one. Also, the data shift is performed only for the reserved areas in which the winning data are stored.

The first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is a special symbol (first symbol) variable display (third It is a counter that counts the number of held balls (number of waiting times) of variable display performed by the pattern display device 81 up to a maximum of 4 times. The initial value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is set to zero. 1 is added up to 4 (see S404 in FIG. 24). On the other hand, the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is decremented by 1 each time a special symbol variable display is newly executed (see S210 in FIG. 22).

The value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e (the number of times N1 of holding the variable display in the first special symbol) is notified to the voice lamp control device 113 by the reserved ball number command (S211 in FIG. 22, FIG. 24 (see S405). The pending ball number command is a command transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sound lamp controller 113 every time the value of the first special symbol pending ball number counter 203e is changed.

The voice lamp control device 113 changes the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e, by the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main controller 110, the change display of the variable display withheld by the main controller 110 It is possible to acquire the value of the number of retained balls itself. As a result, the number of holding balls of the variable display managed by the first special symbol holding ball number counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113 is suspended from the actual variable display held by the main controller 110 due to the influence of noise and the like. Even if there is a deviation from the number of pitches, the deviation can be corrected by the next received number of pending pitches command.

In addition, the voice lamp control device 113 manages the number of pending balls based on the number of pending balls command, and every time the number of pending balls changes, the display control device 114 is notified of the number of pending balls. Send a pitch command. The display control device 114 displays the reserved ball number pattern on the third pattern display device 81 based on the reserved ball number notified by the display reserved ball number command.

The second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is a variable display (third It is a counter that counts the number of held balls (number of waiting times) of variable display performed by the pattern display device 81 up to a maximum of 4 times. The initial value of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is set to zero. 1 is added up to 4 (see S410 in FIG. 24). On the other hand, the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is decremented by 1 each time a special symbol variable display is newly executed (see S205 in FIG. 22). The value of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is also notified to the voice lamp control device 113 by the reserved ball number command, like the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e.

The normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203g is the normal symbol (second symbol) variable display held ball number ( This is a counter that counts the number of standby times up to four times. The initial value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203g is set to zero, and each time a game ball passes through the through gate 67 and the number of reserved balls of variable display increases, 1 is added up to a maximum value of 4. (See S704 in FIG. 27). On the other hand, the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203g is decremented by 1 each time the variable display of the normal symbol (second symbol) is newly executed (see S605 in FIG. 26).

When the game ball passes through the through gate 67, if the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203g (the number of times M of holding variable display in normal symbols) is less than 4, the value of the second hit random number counter C4 is acquired. The acquired data is stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203d (S705 in FIG. 27). On the other hand, when the game ball passes through the through gate 67, if the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203g is 4, nothing is newly stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203d (S703 in FIG. 27: No).

The variable probability flag 203h is a flag indicating whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in the variable probability state of the special symbols. If the flag 203h is off, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in a special symbol low probability state. In addition, as described above, during the probability variation state of the special symbol, it becomes the time saving state of the normal symbol. Therefore, if the variable probability flag 203h is ON, it indicates that the variable probability state of the special symbol and the time saving state of the normal symbol.

The probability variable flag 203h has an initial value set to off, and when a probability variable jackpot (one of "jackpot A", "jackpot B", "jackpot D", and "jackpot E") is achieved, the jackpot It is set to ON at the end (see S1215 in FIG. 32). Further, the variable probability flag 203h is reset to OFF when a jackpot game is started (see S219 in FIG. 22).

This probability variation flag 203h is referred to in order to determine whether or not the game state is the probability variation state in the special symbol variation start process (see S302 in FIG. 23). Specifically, when the special symbol variation start process (FIG. 23, S213) is executed, a special symbol lottery is performed. In the special symbol variation start process (FIG. 23, S213), the probability variation flag 203h is referred to, and if it is ON, the first per random number table 202a for high probability (see 202a2 in FIG. 9(b)) Based on, A lottery for special designs will be held. On the other hand, if the variable probability flag 203h is off, a special symbol lottery is performed based on the first winning random number table 202a for low probability (see 202a1 in FIG. 9B).

In addition, the probability variation flag 203h is also referred to in order to determine whether or not the game state is the time-saving state in the normal symbol variation processing (S608, S614, S620 in FIG. 26). Specifically, the probability variation flag 203h and the time saving counter 203i to be described later are referred to in the normal symbol variation process, and the probability variation flag 203h is on, or if the value of the time saving counter 203i is 1 or more, It is determined that the normal symbol is in the time saving state, and the normal symbol lottery is performed based on the second winning random number table 202c for high probability (see 202c2 in FIG. 10(b)) (see S609 in FIG. 26). . On the other hand, if the probability variation flag 203h is off and the value of the time saving counter 203i is 0, it is determined that the normal pattern is in the normal state, and the second random number table 202c for low probability (FIG. 10 ( (See S610 in FIG. 26). In addition, in the normal symbol variation process, the probability variation flag 203h is also referred to when determining the variation time of the normal symbol and the opening time of the electric accessory 640a when the normal symbol is hit (S614 in FIG. 26, S620).

The time saving medium counter 203i is a counter indicating whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal pattern time saving state, and if the value of the time saving medium counter 203i is 1 or more, the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal pattern time saving state. If the value of the time saving medium counter 203i is 0 and the variable probability flag 203h is off, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of normal symbols. The initial value of the counter 203i for reducing time is set to 0, and the special pattern lottery is performed in the main control device 110, and every time a normal big win is made, the value is set to 100 at the end of the normal big win. (See S1214 in FIG. 32). Also, regardless of the type of jackpot, when a jackpot is won by lottery of special symbols, the value is set to 0 during setting of the start of the jackpot (see S219 in FIG. 22).

When the lottery for the normal pattern is performed, the value of the time saving medium counter 203i and the state of the probability variation flag 203h are referred to, and the value of the time saving medium counter 203i is 1 or more, or the probability variation flag 203h is on. For example, it is determined that it is during the time saving of the normal pattern. In this case, based on the second winning random number table for high probability, a lottery for normal symbols is performed (see S609 in FIG. 26). On the other hand, if the value of the time saving counter 203i is 0 and the probability variation flag 203h is off, it is normally determined as a normal state of the design, and based on the second hit random number table for low probability, the normal design lottery is performed (see S610 in FIG. 26).

The ball entry standby flag 203j is a flag that indicates whether or not there is a jackpot standby state in which the start of the jackpot is waited until a game ball enters the operating winning hole 660 or not. If this ball entry standby flag 203j is ON, it means that the game is in the big win standby state, and if it is OFF, it means that the game is not in the big win standby state. This entry standby flag 203j is set to ON when a special symbol lottery results in a big win and the variation time of the variation pattern corresponding to the big win has passed (see S220 in FIG. 22). Also, the ball entry standby flag 203j is set to OFF when a game ball enters the operation winning hole 660 during the jackpot standby state (see S1104 in FIG. 31). While this ball entry standby flag 203j is on, the ball entry into the operation winning opening 660 is treated as valid (when the ball entry is detected, the jackpot is started).

The jackpot start flag 203k is a flag indicating whether or not to start a jackpot. If this jackpot start flag 203k is ON, it means that it is time to start a jackpot (the game ball enters the operation winning opening 660 and the jackpot waiting state is finished), and if it is OFF, the jackpot. It means that it is not time to start This jackpot start flag 203k is set to ON when a game ball enters the operation winning hole 660 during the jackpot standby state (see S1103 in FIG. 31). Also, the jackpot start flag 203k is set to OFF when the jackpot start is set (see S1203 in FIG. 32).

The jackpot flag 203m is a flag indicating whether or not the jackpot (special game state) is in progress. If the big-hit flag 203m is on, it means that the big-hit is in progress, and if it is off, it means that the big-hit is not in progress. The jackpot medium flag 203m is set to ON as soon as the jackpot (special game state) is started (see S1203 in FIG. 32) when a jackpot is won by a lottery of special symbols. Also, it is set to OFF at the end of the jackpot (special game state) (see S1217 in FIG. 32). In the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 22), this big-hit flag 203m is referenced to determine whether or not a big-hit is in progress (see S201 in FIG. 22).

The other memory area 203z is an area for temporarily storing other counter values and the like used by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 .

Thus, the RAM 203 of the main controller 110 is provided with various counters and flags.

Returning to FIG. 8, the description is continued. An input/output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 via a bus line 204 comprising an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 205 includes a payout control device 111, a sound lamp control device 113, a first symbol display device 37, a second symbol display device 83, an opening/closing door for closing or opening the right specific winning port 65a and the left specific winning port 650a. A solenoid 209 including a large opening solenoid for opening and closing the 65f1 and a solenoid for driving an electric accessory, and a rotating body motor 670c for rotating the rotating member 670a are connected. Various commands and control signals are transmitted to them via the output port 205 .

The input/output port 205 is connected to various switches 208 including a switch group and a sensor group (not shown), and a RAM erase switch (FIG. 3, 122) circuit 253 provided in the power supply 115, which will be described later. Various processes are executed based on the signals output from the various switches 208 and the RAM erasing signal SG2 output from the RAM erasing switch (122 in FIG. 3) circuit 253. FIG.

The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of prize balls and rental balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic unit, has a ROM 212 storing control programs executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 213 used as a work memory and the like.

The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, has a stack area for storing the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211, and various flags and counters. , and a work area (work area) in which values such as I/O are stored. The RAM 213 is configured to retain (back up) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply 115 even after the pachinko machine 10 is powered off, and all the data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. As with the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is also configured to receive a power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when power is shut off due to a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, NMI interrupt processing (see FIG. 28) is immediately executed as power failure processing.

An input/output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 215 is connected to the main controller 110, the dispensing motor 216, the launch controller 112, and the like. Although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected with a prize ball detection switch for detecting paid prize balls. The winning ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111 but not to the main control device 110 .

The shooting control device 112 controls the ball shooting unit 112a so that the shooting strength of the game ball corresponds to the amount of rotation of the operating handle 51 when the main controller 110 issues an instruction to shoot the game ball. be. The ball shooting unit 112a has a shooting solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the operation is performed on the condition that the stop switch 51b for stopping the shooting of the game ball is turned off (not operated). A shooting solenoid is energized corresponding to the amount of rotation of the handle 51, and a game ball is shot with strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operating handle 51. - 特許庁

The audio lamp control device 113 outputs audio from an audio output device (such as a speaker (not shown)) 226, outputs lighting and extinguishing from a lamp display device (electrical parts 29 to 33, display lamp 34, etc.) 227, and outputs variable display effects ( It controls the setting of the display mode of the third pattern display device 81 performed by the display control device 114 such as variable display). The MPU 221, which is an arithmetic device, has a ROM 222 storing control programs executed by the MPU 221, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 223 used as a work memory and the like.

An input/output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 comprising an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 225 is connected to the main controller 110, the display controller 114, the audio output device 226, the lamp display device 227, the passage detection sensors 228a to 228f, the frame button 22, and the like.

The sound ramp control device 113 monitors the outputs of the passage detection sensors 228a to 228f, and from the number of sensors whose output is H (high), roughly determines the number of game balls flowing down the upper surface of the open/close door 65f1. configured to be comprehensible. Then, in the jackpot standby state, the mode (gauge amount) of the chance meter CM displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is varied in accordance with the number of game balls grasped according to the number of sensors. As a result, the player can visually see the amount of prize balls obtained when the game balls are entered into the operation winning opening 660 (the number of game balls entered when the opening/closing door 65f1 is opened). can be easily understood. Therefore, during the jackpot standby state, the ball is hit to the right with a firing intensity (less than 95% firing intensity) that does not reach the operation winning port 660 more positively, and more game balls reach the upper surface of the opening/closing door 65f1. you can try. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest in the game during the jackpot waiting state.

In addition, the sound lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, changes the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81 or super reach. It controls the voice output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 and instructs the display control device 114 so as to change the performance contents of the hour. When the stage is changed, a rear image change command including information about the stage after the change is transmitted to the display control device 114 in order to display the rear image corresponding to the stage after the change on the third pattern display device 81. . Here, the back image is an image displayed on the back side of the third design, which is the main image to be displayed on the third design display device 81 .

The audio lamp control device 113 determines an error according to the command from the main control device 110 and the status of various devices connected to the audio lamp control device 113, and displays and controls the error command including the error type. Send to device 114 . The display control device 114 controls the third pattern display device 81 to display an error message image corresponding to the error type (for example, vibration error) indicated by the received error command without delay.

Next, the details of the electrical configuration of the audio ramp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 14A is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 222 of the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113. FIG. The ROM 222 has at least a variation pattern selection table 222a.

The variation pattern selection table 222a is based on the variation pattern command output from the main controller 110, and includes rough variation contents (variation time, variation type (reach, deviation, etc.)) indicated by the variation pattern command, and more detailed variation. Used to determine content. This makes it possible to determine more diverse variations. Here, one variation mode out of a plurality of types is determined by lottery for the rough variation contents instructed by the main controller 110 .

Next, the RAM 223 in the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 14(b). FIG. 14(b) is a block diagram showing the contents of the RAM 223. As shown in FIG. The RAM 223 has a winning information storage area 223a, a first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b, a second special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c, a fluctuation start flag 223d, a stop type selection flag 223e, and a fluctuation time counter 223f. , a standby state effect flag 223g, a level counter 223h, a game state storage area 223i, and another memory area 223z.

The winning information storage area 223a has a storage area consisting of four areas (first area to fourth area) for each of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. In addition, it has one execution area. Winning information is stored in each area. In the pachinko machine 10, when the start winning is detected in the main controller 110, each of the first winning random number counter C1, the first winning type counter C2 and the stop type selection counter C3 obtained according to the starting winning Based on the value, various information (win/fail, stop type, variation pattern) obtained when a special symbol lottery corresponding to the starting prize is performed is predicted (estimated) in the main controller 110, and the predicted various information. is notified from the main controller 110 to the audio lamp controller 113 by means of the winning information command.

When the winning information command is received, the audio lamp control device 113 extracts the various information (win/fail, stop type, variation pattern) notified by the winning information command as winning information. It is stored in the storage area 223a. More specifically, the extracted winning information is stored in order from the area with the smallest area number (1st to 4th) among the four open areas (1st to 4th areas). be done. That is, the smaller the area number, the data corresponding to the oldest winning is stored, and the first area stores the data corresponding to the oldest winning.

The first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b is a counter that counts up to four times the number of reserved balls (number of standby times) corresponding to the lottery of the first special symbol reserved in the main control device 110, and the second special The symbol reserved ball number counter 223c is a counter that counts up to four times the number of reserved balls corresponding to the second special symbol lottery.

As described above, the voice lamp control device 113 directly accesses the main control device 110, the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e stored in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, and the second special symbol reserved ball number The value of the counter 203f cannot be obtained. Therefore, the voice lamp control device 113 counts the number of reserved balls based on the number of reserved balls command transmitted from the main controller 110, and the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b and the second special symbol reserved ball number counter At 223c, the number of reserved balls is managed for each type of special symbol.

Specifically, in the main controller 110, when the ball entering the first ball entrance 64 and the second ball entrance 640 is added to the number of pending balls in the variable display, or when the main controller 110 When the variable display is executed and the number of reserved balls is subtracted, the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e after addition or subtraction, or the value of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203f. A number of balls command is sent to the audio ramp controller 113 .

When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main controller 110, the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e or the second special symbol of the main controller 110 from the reserved ball number command The value of the reserved ball number counter 203f is acquired and stored in the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b or the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c (see S4308 in FIG. 36). Thus, the voice lamp control device 113 updates the values of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b and the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c according to the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main controller 110. Therefore, while synchronizing with the values of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e and the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203f of the main controller 110, the values can be updated.

The values of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b and the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c are used to display the reserved ball number symbols on the third symbol display device 81. FIG. That is, the voice lamp control device 113 stores the number of reserved balls indicated by the command in response to the reception of the reserved ball number command in the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b and the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c. At the same time, in order to notify the display control device 114 of the values of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b and the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c after storage, a display reserved ball number command is sent to the display control device 114. send to.

When the display control device 114 receives this display pending ball number command, the value of the pending ball number indicated by the command, that is, the first special symbol pending ball number counter 223b of the audio lamp control device 113 and the second special The drawing of the image is controlled so that the number of reserved ball symbols corresponding to the value of the number of reserved ball counter 223c is displayed in the sub-display area Ds of the third symbol display device 81. FIG. As described above, the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b and the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c correspond to the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e and the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e of the main controller 110. 203f, its value is changed. Therefore, the number of reserved ball number symbols displayed in the small area Ds1 of the third symbol display device 81 is also the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e and the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203f of the main controller 110. can be changed while synchronizing with Therefore, the third symbol display device 81 can accurately display the number of held balls whose variable display is held.

The fluctuation start flag 223d is turned on when a fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main controller 110 is received (see S4302 in FIG. 36), and is turned off when the fluctuation display in the third pattern display device 81 is set. (See S4502 in FIG. 38). When the fluctuation start flag 223d is turned on, a fluctuation pattern command for display is set based on the fluctuation pattern extracted from the received fluctuation pattern command.

The display variation pattern command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is executed by the MPU 221 in the command output processing (S4102) of the main processing (see FIG. 34), It is transmitted toward the display control device 114 . In the display control device 114, by receiving this display variation pattern command, the third pattern display device 81 performs the variation display of the third pattern in the variation pattern indicated by this display variation pattern command, Display control of the variable effect is started.

The stop type selection flag 223e is turned on when a stop type command transmitted from the main controller 110 is received (see S4305 in FIG. 36), and turned off when the stop type is set in the third symbol display device 81. (see S4507 in FIG. 38). When the stop type selection flag 223e is turned on, the stop type is determined based on the stop type (jackpot type in the case of a jackpot) extracted from the received stop type command.

The fluctuation time counter 223f is a counter that counts the fluctuation time of the special symbol fluctuation display. When a variation pattern command is received from main controller 110, a variation time corresponding to the variation pattern notified by the variation pattern command is set in variation time counter 223f.

The standby state effect flag 223g is a flag indicating whether or not the standby state effect (see FIGS. 7A and 7B) is being executed. If this standby state effect flag 223g is ON, it means that the standby state effect is being executed, and if it is OFF, it means that the standby state effect is not being executed. This standby state effect flag 223g is set to ON when a standby state command indicating that the jackpot standby state has been received from the main control device 110 and the start of the standby state effect is set (FIG. 37). (see S4403 of ). Also, this standby state effect flag 223g is set to OFF when an opening command indicating the start of a big win is received from the main controller 110 (see S4406 in FIG. 37).

The level counter 223h is a counter that indicates the gauge number (level) of the chance meter CM displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 in the standby state effect (see FIGS. 7A and 7B). The value of the level counter 223h is updated in conjunction with the number of sensors whose output is H (high) among the passage detection sensors 228a to 228f (see S4204 in FIG. 35). That is, the number of sensors whose output is H (high) is set as the counter value.

The game state storage area 223i is a storage area for storing data corresponding to the game state of the pachinko machine 10. FIG. This game state storage area 223i is updated each time a state command output each time a change occurs in the game state of the pachinko machine 10 is received from the main controller 110 (see S4310 in FIG. 36). The game state storage area 223i is composed of, for example, a 1-byte storage area, and is configured so that the game state can be specified by the state of the lower 2 bits. More specifically, for example, the least significant bit indicates whether or not it is the time saving state of normal symbols, and the bit of the second lower order bit indicates whether or not it is the probability variable state of special symbols. Therefore, in the "low-probability state of special symbols" and "normal state of normal symbols", the lower 2 bits are "00B", and in the "low-probability state of special symbols" and "time-saving state of normal symbols", the lower The 2 bits are "01B", and in the "probability variable state of special symbols" and "time saving state of normal symbols", the lower 2 bits are "11B". The MPU 221 of the voice ramp control device 113 can grasp the game state of the pachinko machine 10 on the side of the voice ramp control device 113 based on the data stored in the game state storage area 223i.

The other memory area 223z is provided as an area for storing data other than the above data, and is an area for temporarily storing other counter values and the like used by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113. FIG.

The RAM 223 also has a command storage area (not shown) that temporarily stores commands received from the main control unit 110 until processing corresponding to the commands is performed, and a time-lapse timer that measures the presentation time. is doing. The command storage area is composed of a ring buffer, and data is read and written by a FIFO (First In First Out) method. When the command determination process (see FIG. 36) of the sound lamp control device 113 is executed, the command stored first among the unprocessed commands stored in the command storage area is read out, and the command determination process The command is parsed and processing is performed according to the command.

The display control device 114 is connected to the sound lamp control device 113 and the third pattern display device 81, and based on the command received from the sound lamp control device 113, the third pattern display device 81 performs variable display (variation production) and continuous announcement production are controlled. Details of the display control device 114 will be described later with reference to FIG.

The power supply device 115 includes a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each part of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to power failure, etc., and a RAM provided with a RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3). and an erase switch circuit 253 . The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies necessary operating voltages to the control devices 110 to 114 and the like through a power supply path (not shown). As an overview, the power supply unit 251 takes in a voltage of 24 volts supplied from the outside, various switches such as the various switches 208, solenoids such as the solenoid 209, a voltage of 12 volts for driving a motor, etc. A voltage of 5 volts for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, etc. are generated, and these 12 volts, 5 volts and backup voltages are supplied to the controllers 110 to 114 and the like as necessary voltages.

The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 at the time of power failure due to power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the voltage of stable DC 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and determines that a power failure (power shutdown, power shutdown) has occurred when this voltage is less than 22 volts. Then, a power failure signal SG1 is output to the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111. By the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute NMI interrupt processing. Even after the stable DC voltage of 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts, the power supply unit 251 outputs a voltage of 5 volts, which is the driving voltage of the control system, for a time sufficient to execute the NMI interrupt processing. is configured to maintain a normal value. Therefore, the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 28).

The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing backup data to the main controller 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. When the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, the main controller 110 clears the backup data when the RAM erase signal SG2 is input, and controls the payout initialization command for clearing the backup data in the payout control device 111. Send to device 111 .

Next, the electrical configuration of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 15 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the display control device 114. As shown in FIG. The display control device 114 includes an MPU 231, a work RAM 233, a character ROM 234, a resident video RAM 235, a normal video RAM 236, an image controller 237, an input port 238, an output port 239, and bus lines 240 and 241. have.

The output side of the sound lamp control device 113 is connected to the input side of the input port 238 , and the MPU 231 , work RAM 233 , character ROM 234 and image controller 237 are connected to the output side of the input port 238 via the bus line 240 . . A resident video RAM 235 and a normal video RAM 236 are connected to the image controller 237 , and an output port 239 is connected via a bus line 241 . A third symbol display device 81 is connected to the output side of the output port 239 .

Even if the pachinko machine 10 is a different model with a different lottery probability of a special symbol jackpot or a different number of prize balls paid out for one special symbol jackpot, the symbols displayed on the third symbol display device 81 are different. Since there are models with exactly the same specifications, the display control device 114 is made a common component to reduce costs.

The MPU 231, character ROM 234, image controller 237, resident video RAM 235, and normal video RAM 236 will be described first, and then the work RAM 233 will be described below.

First, the MPU 231 controls the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 based on the display variation pattern command output from the audio ramp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command of the main control device 110 . The MPU 231 incorporates an instruction pointer 231a, reads and fetches the instruction code stored at the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a, and executes various processes according to the instruction code. The MPU 231 is designed so that a system reset is applied from the power supply 115 immediately after power is turned on (including recovery from a power failure; the same shall apply hereinafter). is automatically set to “0000H” by the hardware of the MPU 231 . Each time an instruction code is fetched, the value of the instruction pointer 231a is incremented by one. Further, when the MPU 231 executes an instruction pointer setting instruction, the value of the pointer indicated by the setting instruction is set in the instruction pointer 231a.

Although the details will be described later, in this embodiment, the control program executed by the MPU 231 and various fixed value data used in the control program are stored in a dedicated program ROM as in a conventional game machine. The image data to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 is stored in the character ROM 234 provided for storing the data.

Although the details will be described later, the character ROM 234 is composed of a NAND flash memory 234a capable of increasing the capacity with a small area. As a result, not only image data but also control programs and the like can be sufficiently stored. If the control program and the like are stored in the character ROM 234, there is no need to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing the control program and the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and an increase in failure rate due to an increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

On the other hand, NAND-type flash memories generally have a problem that the read speed becomes slow especially when performing random access. For example, when reading data continuously arranged in a plurality of pages, the data of the second and subsequent pages can be read at high speed. It takes a long time before the data is output. Also, when reading discontinuous data, a long time is required each time the data is read. As described above, since the NAND flash memory has a slow read speed, if the MPU 231 is configured to directly read the control program from the character ROM 234 and execute various processes, it takes time to read the instructions that make up the control program. However, even if a high-performance processor is used as the MPU 231, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may deteriorate.

Therefore, in this embodiment, when the system reset of the MPU 231 is released, first, the control program stored in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234 is transferred to the work RAM 233 provided for temporary storage of various data. store. The MPU 231 then executes various processes according to the control program stored in the work RAM 233 . The work RAM 233 is composed of a DRAM (Dynamic RAM), as will be described later, and reads and writes data at high speed. Therefore, the MPU 231 can read instructions constituting the control program without delay. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and the third pattern display device 81 can be used to easily execute diversified and complicated effects.

The character ROM 234 is a memory that stores control programs executed by the MPU 231 and image data displayed on the third pattern display device 81 , and is connected to the MPU 231 via a bus line 240 . The MPU 231 directly accesses the character ROM 234 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, and transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the character ROM 234 to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. An image controller 237 is also connected to the bus line 240, and the image controller 237 transfers image data stored in a character storage area 234a2 of the character ROM 234 to a resident video RAM 235, which is connected to the image controller 237. Transfer to the normal video RAM 236 .

The character ROM 234 is constructed by modularizing a NAND flash memory 234a, a ROM controller 234b, a buffer RAM 234c, and a NOR ROM 234d.

The NAND type flash memory 234a is a non-volatile memory provided as a main storage unit in the character ROM 234, and stores most of the control program executed by the MPU 231 and fixed value data for driving the third symbol display device 81. It has at least a second program storage area 234a1 for storage and a character storage area 234a2 for storing data of an image (such as a character) to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. FIG.

Here, the NAND type flash memory has a feature that a large storage capacity can be obtained in a small area, and the capacity of the character ROM 234 can be easily increased. Thus, in this pachinko machine, by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a capacity of, for example, 2 gigabytes, many images can be stored in the character storage area 234a2 as images to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. can. Therefore, the images displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be diversified and complicated in order to increase the interest of the player.

In addition, the NAND flash memory 234a can store control programs and fixed value data in the second program storage area 234a1 while storing a large amount of image data in the character storage area 234a2. In this way, the control program and fixed value data are provided for storing the data of the image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 without providing and storing a dedicated program ROM as in the conventional game machine. Since the characters can be stored in the character ROM 234, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and an increase in the failure rate due to an increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

The ROM controller 234b is a controller for controlling the operation of the character ROM 234. For example, based on the address transmitted from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, the corresponding data is retrieved from the NAND flash memory 234a or the like. is read out and output to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240 .

Here, the NAND type flash memory 234a, due to its nature, generates a relatively large number of error bits (bits in which erroneous data is written) when writing data, and generates defective data blocks into which data cannot be written. or Therefore, the ROM controller 234b applies known error correction to the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a, and avoids bad data blocks when reading and writing data to the NAND flash memory 234a. data address translation.

The ROM controller 234b corrects errors in the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a including error bits. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the MPU 231 from performing processing and the image controller 237 from generating various images.

In addition, the ROM controller 234b analyzes the defective data blocks of the NAND flash memory 234a and avoids access to the defective data blocks. Access to the character ROM 234 can be easily performed without considering the address position of the block. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, it is possible to prevent the access control to the character ROM 234 from becoming complicated.

The buffer RAM 234c is a memory used as a buffer for temporarily storing data read from the NAND flash memory 234a. When an address allocated to the character ROM 234 is designated from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, the ROM controller 234b reads one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) of data corresponding to the designated address. is set in the buffer RAM 234c. If not set, one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) of data including the data corresponding to the specified address is read from the NAND flash memory 234a (or NOR ROM 234d) and temporarily set in the buffer RAM 234c. do. Then, the ROM controller 234 b outputs the data corresponding to the designated address to the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 via the bus line 240 after performing known error correction processing.

The buffer RAM 234c is composed of two banks, and one page of data of the NAND flash memory 234a can be set in each bank. As a result, the ROM controller 234b, for example, outputs the data of the NAND flash memory 234a to the outside by using the other bank while data is set in one bank, or outputs the data specified by the MPU 231 or the image controller 237. One page of data including the data corresponding to the specified address is transferred from the NAND flash memory 234a to one bank and set, and the data corresponding to the address specified by the MPU 231 or image controller 237 is transferred to the other bank. The processing of reading from the bank and outputting to the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 can be processed in parallel. Therefore, the responsiveness in reading the character ROM 234 can be improved.

The NOR type ROM 234d is a non-volatile memory provided as a sub-storage unit in the character ROM 234, and is intended to complement the NAND type flash memory 234a. ). Among the control programs stored in the character ROM 234, the NOR-type ROM 234d stores programs that are not stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND-type flash memory 234a. At least a first program storage area 234d1 is provided for storing a portion of the boot program to be executed.

The boot program is a control program for activating the display control device 114 so that various controls on the third pattern display device 81 can be executed, and the MPU 231 first executes this boot program after releasing the system reset. As a result, the display control device 114 can be put into a state in which various controls can be executed. The first program storage area 234d1 stores the boot program within the capacity of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c (that is, one page of the NAND flash memory 234a), which should be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. A predetermined number of instructions (for example, if the capacity of one page is 2 kilobytes, instructions for 1024 words (1 word=2 bytes)) are stored. The number of instructions of the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 only needs to be within the capacity of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. There may be.

When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the value of the instruction pointer 231a to "0000H" by hardware and instructs the bus line 240 to specify the address "0000H" indicated by the instruction pointer 231a. It is configured. On the other hand, when the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address "0000H" is specified on the bus line 240, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d is transferred to one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. , and outputs the corresponding data (instruction code) to the MPU 231 .

When the MPU 231 fetches the instruction code received from the character ROM 234, it executes various processes according to the fetched instruction code, adds 1 to the instruction pointer 231a, and transfers the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. to specify. Then, the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234, while the address specified by the bus line 240 is the address indicating the program stored in the NOR ROM 234d, selects the program previously set in the buffer RAM 234c from the NOR ROM 234d. , the instruction code of the corresponding address is read from the buffer RAM 234 c and output to the MPU 231 .

Here, in this embodiment, instead of storing all the control programs in the NAND flash memory 234a, a predetermined number of instructions from the boot program to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NOR ROM 234d. The reason for storing in is as follows. That is, as described above, the NAND flash memory 234a is unique to the NAND flash memory in that it takes a long time to read out the data of the first page after the address is specified until the data is output. There's a problem.

When all the control programs are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 in order to fetch the instruction code that the MPU 231 should execute first after the system reset is released. If so, the character ROM 234 must read one page of data including the data (instruction code) corresponding to the address "0000H" from the NAND flash memory 234a and set it in the buffer RAM 234c. Due to the nature of the NAND-type flash memory 234a, it takes a long time to read and set the data in the buffer RAM 234c. You spend a lot of time waiting to receive your code. Therefore, the time taken to start the MPU 231 becomes longer, and as a result, there arises a problem that the control of the third pattern display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

On the other hand, since the NOR type ROM is a memory from which data can be read at high speed, a predetermined number of instructions from the boot program to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NOR type ROM 234d. Thus, when the address "0000H" is designated from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 immediately stores the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d into the buffer RAM 234c. , and the corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231 . Therefore, the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" in a short time after specifying the address "0000H", and the MPU 231 can be activated in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the control of the third pattern display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately.

The boot program is a control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, that is, a control program other than the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d. , fixed value data (for example, a display data table, a transfer data table, etc., which will be described later) used in the control program are stored in the program storage area of the work RAM 233 by a predetermined amount (for example, the capacity of one page of the NAND flash memory 234a). 233a and the data table storage area 233b. The MPU 231 first sets the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 according to the boot program read from the first program storage area 234d1 after the system reset is released. While using a bank different from the bank of the buffer RAM 234c that is stored, a predetermined amount is transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a.

Here, since the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 has a capacity corresponding to one bank of the buffer RAM 234c, as described above, the address of the internal bus is designated as "0000H". When the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 is set in the buffer RAM 234c in response to this, the boot program is set only in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. Therefore, when transferring the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a according to the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1, the first program set in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c is transferred to the program storage area 233a. The transfer process can be performed using the other bank while leaving the boot program in storage area 234d1. Therefore, after the transfer process, it is not necessary to set the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 again in the buffer RAM 234c, so the time required for the boot process can be shortened.

When the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 transfers a predetermined amount of the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a, the command pointer 231a is transferred to the program storage area 233a. It is programmed to be set to a first predetermined address. As a result, when the MPU 231 transfers a predetermined amount of the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a after the system reset is released, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the first predetermined number in the program storage area 233a. Set to a street address.

Therefore, when a predetermined amount of the control programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 are stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 reads out the control programs stored in the program storage area 233a, Various processing can be executed. That is, the MPU 231 does not read the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 and fetch the instruction, but rather reads the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a and fetches the instruction. and execute various processes. As will be described later, since the work RAM 233 is composed of a DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even if most of the control program is stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, which has a slow read speed, the MPU 231 can fetch instructions at high speed and execute processing for those instructions.

Here, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 includes the remaining boot program not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. On the other hand, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 is transferred to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 by a predetermined amount from the second program storage area 234a1. The instruction pointer 231a is programmed to be included, and the start address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a is set as the first predetermined address.

As a result, the MPU 231 transfers a predetermined amount of the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a by the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1. Execute the rest of the boot program contained in the control program.

In this remaining boot program, the remaining control programs that have not been transferred to the program storage area 233a and fixed value data (for example, a display data table, a transfer data table, etc., which will be described later) used in the control programs are all stored in the second program. A process of transferring a predetermined amount from the area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b is executed. Also, at the end of the boot program, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address in the program storage area 233a. Specifically, the initialization process (see S6002 in FIG. 39) executed after the boot process (see S6001 in FIG. 39) by the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a as the second predetermined address. Set the start address of the program corresponding to .

By executing the remaining boot program, the MPU 231 transfers all the control programs and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b. Then, when the boot program is executed by the MPU 231 to the end, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address, and thereafter the MPU 231 is transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. Various processes are executed using the control program.

Therefore, even if most of the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the control program is transferred to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 after the system reset is released. Thus, the MPU 231 can read the control program from the work RAM configured by the DRAM with high read speed and perform various controls. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and the third pattern display device 81 can be used to easily execute diversified and complicated effects.

Further, as described above, instead of storing all the boot programs in the NOR type ROM 234d, a predetermined number of instructions are stored from the first instruction to be processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released, and the rest of the boot programs are Even if it is stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start up the MPU 231 in a short time simply by adding a NOR type ROM 234d with a very small capacity, so that an increase in the cost of the character ROM 234 due to the shortening of the time can be suppressed. can be done.

The image controller 237 is a digital signal processor (DSP) that draws an image and causes the third pattern display device 81 to display the drawn image at a predetermined timing. The image controller 237 draws an image for one frame based on a drawing list (see FIG. 20) sent from the MPU 231 to be described later, and stores the frame in either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c, which will be described later. The image drawn in the buffer is developed, and the image information for one frame previously developed in the other frame buffer is output to the third pattern display device 81 to display the image on the third pattern display device 81.例文帳に追加. The image controller 237 performs this one-frame image drawing process and one-frame image display process within the image display time of one frame on the third pattern display device 81 (20 milliseconds in this embodiment). parallel processing in

The image controller 237 transmits a vertical synchronization interrupt signal (hereinafter referred to as “V interrupt signal”) to the MPU 231 every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing processing for one frame is completed. Each time the MPU 231 detects this V interrupt signal, the MPU 231 executes V interrupt processing (see FIG. 41(b)), and instructs the image controller 237 to draw the image for the next one frame. In response to this instruction, the image controller 237 executes the drawing process of the image for the next one frame, and also executes the process of causing the third pattern display device 81 to display the image developed by the previous drawing.

In this manner, the MPU 231 executes the V interrupt process in response to the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 and issues a drawing instruction to the image controller 237. Therefore, the image controller 237 performs image drawing processing and display. An image drawing instruction can be received from the MPU 231 at each processing interval (20 milliseconds). Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive an instruction to draw the next image before the image drawing processing or display processing is completed. It is possible to prevent an image from being developed in accordance with a new drawing instruction in a frame buffer storing image information being displayed.

The image controller 237 also executes processing for transferring image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 based on transfer instructions from the MPU 231 and transfer data information included in the drawing list.

Image drawing is performed using the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 . That is, the image data required for drawing is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236 based on instructions from the MPU 231 before the drawing is performed.

Here, in general, a NAND flash memory facilitates increasing the capacity of a ROM, but has a slower read speed than other ROMs (mask ROM, EEPROM, etc.). On the other hand, in the display control device 114, the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to transfer part of the image data stored in the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on. is configured to As will be described later, the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 is controlled so as to be resident without being overwritten.

Thus, after the transfer of the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is completed after the power is turned on, the image controller 237 draws an image while using the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235. can be processed. Therefore, if the image data used for drawing processing is resident in the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a, which has a slow read speed, when drawing the image. , the time required for reading the image can be omitted, and the image can be drawn immediately and the drawn image can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 .

In particular, the resident video RAM 235 is resident with image data of frequently displayed images and image data of images to be displayed immediately after display is determined by the main controller 110 or the display controller 114. Even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a, it is possible to maintain high responsiveness until some image is displayed on the third pattern display device 81. FIG.

Further, when the display control device 114 draws an image using non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235, before the drawing is performed, the display control device 114 stores necessary data for drawing from the character ROM 234 in the normal video RAM 236. The MPU 231 is configured to instruct the image controller 237 to transfer the image data. As will be described later, the image data transferred to the normal-use video RAM 236 may be deleted by overwriting after being used for image drawing. Since it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 composed of , and the time required for reading the data can be saved, the image can be drawn immediately and the drawn image can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. can.

Further, by storing the image data in the normal video RAM 236 as well, there is no need to keep all the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235, so there is no need to prepare a large-capacity resident video RAM 235. FIG. Therefore, an increase in cost due to the provision of the resident video RAM 235 can be suppressed.

The image controller 237 has a buffer RAM 237a composed of an SRAM of 132 kilobytes, which is the capacity of one block of the NAND flash memory 234a.

The image data transfer instruction given to the image controller 237 by the MPU 231 based on the transfer instruction or the transfer data information of the drawing list includes the head address (storage source head address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data to be transferred is stored. Final address (storage source final address), transfer destination information (information indicating whether to transfer to resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236), and top of transfer destination (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) Contains an address. Note that the data size of the image data to be transferred may be included instead of the storage source final address.

The image controller 237 reads out one block of data from a predetermined address in the character ROM 234 according to various information of this transfer instruction, temporarily stores it in the buffer RAM 237a, and stores it in the buffer RAM 237a when the resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236 is not in use. , is transferred to the resident RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 . Then, the processing is repeatedly executed until all the image data stored in the storage source start address to the storage source end address indicated by the transfer instruction are transferred.

As a result, the image data read out from the character ROM 234 over time is temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a, and then the image data is transferred from the buffer RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236 in a short time. can be done. Therefore, while the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236, the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is prevented from being occupied for a long time by transferring the image data. be able to. Therefore, since the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are occupied by the transfer of image data, these video RAMs 235 and 236 cannot be used for image drawing processing. , it is possible to prevent the display on the third pattern display device 81 from being too late.

In addition, since image data is transferred from the buffer RAM 234c to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 by the image controller 237, the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are used for image drawing processing and third symbol display. It is possible to easily determine the period during which the display processing on the device 81 is not used, and to simplify the processing.

The resident video RAM 235 is used so that the image data transferred from the character ROM 234 can be retained while the power is turned on without being overwritten. 235e and an error message image area 235f are provided, and at least a power-on variation image area 235b and a third pattern area 235d are provided.

The power-on main image area 235a is a power-on main image to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 after power is turned on until all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is stored. This is an area for storing corresponding data. In the power-on variation image area 235b, a game is started by the player while the main image at power-on is being displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance is displayed. This is an area for storing image data corresponding to a power-on variable image that displays the results of the lottery performed by the main controller 110 in a variable effect when a ball entering the mouth 640 is detected.

The MPU 231 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on varying image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a from the character ROM 234 when power supply from the power supply unit 251 is started. A transfer instruction is transmitted to the controller 237 (see S6003 and S6004 in FIG. 39).

Here, the power-on variation image will be described with reference to FIG. 16 . FIG. 16 shows a power-on image displayed on the third pattern display device 81 while the image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is being transferred from the character ROM 234 immediately after the display control device 114 is powered on. It is an explanatory view explaining a time image.

Immediately after the power is turned on, the display control device 114 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on varying image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on varying image area 235b. Subsequently, the remaining image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 . While the remaining image data is being transferred, the display control device 114 uses the image data previously stored in the power-on main image area 235a to perform the power-on main image shown in FIG. The image is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 .

At this time, when receiving the display variation pattern command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command from the main controller 110, which is an instruction command to start variation, the display control device 114 executes the command shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 16( c ), on the display screen of the main image at power-on, a variation image at power-on with a “○” pattern at the lower right position of the screen, and a “○” at power-on as shown in FIG. A power-on fluctuation image of an "x" pattern is alternately and repeatedly displayed at the same position as the pattern during the fluctuation period. Then, based on the variation pattern command and the stop type command from the main controller 110, the lottery performed by the main controller 110 is selected from the display variation pattern command and the display stop type command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113. Judging the result, if it is a "special symbol jackpot", the image shown in FIG. The image shown is displayed for a certain period of time after the stop of the variable effect.

The MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to use the image data stored in the power-on main image area 235a until all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235. Instructs to draw the main image when the power is turned on. As a result, while the rest of the image data to be resident is being transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player or the person involved in the hall can confirm the power-on main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. can. Therefore, the display control device 114 takes time to transfer the remaining image data to be resident from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 while displaying the main image on the third pattern display device 81 when the power is turned on. be able to. Also, since the player or the like can recognize that some processing is being performed while the main image is being displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, the remaining image to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is displayed. To wait until the transfer of image data to the resident video RAM 235 is completed without worrying whether the operation is stopped until the data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235.例文帳に追加can be done.

Also, in an operation check at a factory or the like during manufacturing, the main image is immediately displayed on the third pattern display device 81 when the power is turned on. Furthermore, by using the NAND type flash memory 234a with a slow read speed for the character ROM 234, it is possible to suppress deterioration in the efficiency of the operation check.

Also, when the power is turned on, while the main image is being displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the player starts playing the game, and the entry of the ball into the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640 is detected. 16(b) and 16(c), the image data corresponding to the power-on variation image resident in the power-on variation image area 235b is used to draw the power-on variation image, and the images shown in FIGS. The MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to display on the third pattern display device 81 at 10:00 a.m. As a result, a simple variation effect can be performed using the power-on variation image. Therefore, even while the main image is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 when the power is turned on, the player can confirm that the lottery has been surely performed by the simple variation performance.

Further, when the power-on main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation effect image is already resident in the power-on fluctuation image area 235b. When a ball is detected in the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640 while the main image is being displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the corresponding variation effect is displayed in the third symbol. It can be displayed on the device 81 immediately.

Returning to FIG. 15, the description is continued. The back image area 235c is an area for storing image data corresponding to the back image displayed on the third pattern display device 81. FIG. Here, with reference to FIG. 17, the rear image and the range of the rear image stored in the rear image area 235c among the rear images will be described. 17A and 17B are explanatory diagrams for explaining four kinds of back images and the range of the back images stored in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 for each back image. FIG. FIG. 17B shows the back surface A corresponding to the "sand beach stage" and the back surface B corresponding to the "deep sea stage".

As shown in FIG. 17, the character ROM 234 prepares back images corresponding to the respective back images A and B, which are longer in the horizontal direction than the display area displayed on the third pattern display device 81 . The image controller 237 draws the image so that the back image is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 while scrolling the image horizontally from left to right.

The images prepared for the back surfaces A and B (hereinafter referred to as "scrolling images") are configured such that the back images are continuous at positions a and c. The image between position c and position d and the image between position a and position a' are composed of images corresponding to the horizontal width of the display area, and the image between position c and position d is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 as the display area, and then the third pattern display device 81 displays an image between the position a and the position a' as the display area. The background image is scrolled in a continuous manner.

When it is determined to change the back face type and the stage is changed to the "sand beach stage" or "deep sea stage", the MPU 231 first sets the position between position a and position a' of the corresponding back face image as the initial position of the display area. Then, the image controller 237 is controlled so that the image at the initial position is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 . Then, as time elapses, the display area is moved from left to right with respect to the scroll image, and the image controller 237 is controlled so that the display area is sequentially displayed on the third pattern display device 81. When the area reaches the image between position c and position d, the image controller 237 is controlled so that the display area is again displayed on the third pattern display device 81 as an image from position a to position a'. Therefore, the third pattern display device 81 can display the images between the position a to the position c by scrolling repeatedly in a smooth manner so as to flow leftward.

Next, for each rear image, the range of the rear image stored in the rear image area 235c will be described. As shown in FIG. 17(a), the rear surface A corresponding to the sandy beach stage, which is the initial stage, has all the image data corresponding to the entire range of the rear surface A, that is, from position a to position d. It is stored in the image area 235c. Usually, the game is often played without changing the stage while the initial stage "Beach Stage" is displayed. By keeping all of them resident in the back image area 235c, the number of data accesses to the character ROM 234 can be reduced. Therefore, the processing load on the display control device 114 can be reduced.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 17(b), only image data corresponding to a partial area of the back surface, that is, an image between position a and position b is resident in the back surface B corresponding to the "deep sea stage". It is stored in the rear image area 235 c of the video RAM 235 .

Here, in order to immediately change the back image, it is ideal to keep the entire range of image data for all back images resident in the resident video RAM 235 . As such, a very large capacity RAM must be used, which may lead to an increase in cost.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10, the initial position of the rear image displayed first when the stage is changed is set to the range from position a to position a' (or the range shown in FIGS. 17(a) to 17(b)). ), and the image data corresponding to the image between position a and position b including the initial position (or the image between FIGS. Therefore, even if the character ROM 234 is composed of a NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, if a lottery at the start of fluctuation decides to change the stage, the resident video RAM 235 can store the characters on the back of the resident video RAM 235. By using the image data resident in the image area 235c, the initial position of the back surface B can be immediately displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and the scroll display or the color tone can be changed with the passage of time. can be displayed. In addition, since only image data corresponding to a partial range of images is stored for the back surface B, an increase in storage capacity of the resident video RAM 235 can be suppressed, and an increase in cost can be suppressed.

After the image of the initial position is displayed on the rear face B, the image data resident in the rear face image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 is used to scroll the range from position a to position b from left to right. The range from the position a to the position b is set so that the image data corresponding to the image from the position b' to the position d can be completely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal RAM 236 during this period. As a result, the image data from position b' to position d can be transferred to the normal video RAM 236 while the range from position a to position b is being scrolled. After scrolling the range from position a to position b by using the image data corresponding to the rear image stored in the normal video RAM 236 without delay, the range from position b' to position d is scrolled to the third position. It can be displayed on the pattern display device 81 .

Image data stored in the normal-use video RAM 236 on the back surface B is stored in a sub-area dedicated to the rear-surface image provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal-use video RAM 236 (see FIG. 15). As a result, the rear image data stored in the sub-area dedicated to the rear image is not overwritten by other image data, so that the rear image can be reliably displayed.

Further, in the back surface B, the image data stored in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 and the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 are images corresponding to images between positions b′ and b. Data is stored redundantly. Under the control of the image controller 237 by the MPU 231, the image up to the position b is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 using the image data stored in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, and then the normal video image is displayed. By displaying the image from the position b' on the third pattern display device 81 using the image data stored in the RAM 236, the back image is scrolled and displayed in a smooth connection on the third pattern display device 81. ing.

Further, the MPU 231 uses the image data in the normal video RAM 236 to control the image controller 237 so that the image between position c and position d is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 as a display area. The MPU 231 uses the image data in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 to control the image controller 237 so that the image between position a and position a' is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 as the display area. do. As a result, the third pattern display device 81 can repeatedly scroll and display the images between the positions a to c in a smooth manner so as to flow toward the left.

Returning to FIG. 15, the description is continued. The third symbol area 235d is an area for permanently storing the third symbol used in the variable effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81. FIG. That is, in the third pattern area 235d, image data corresponding to the nine types of main patterns (see FIG. 6(b)) with numbers "1" to "9", which are the third patterns, are resident. be. As a result, when the third pattern display device 81 performs a variable effect, it is not necessary to read image data from the character ROM 234 one by one. It is possible to quickly start a variable production. Therefore, after the ball enters the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640, although the first symbol display device 37 starts the variable effect, the third symbol display device In 81, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a state in which the variable performance is not immediately started.

Further, image data corresponding to the main symbols with no numerals "1" to "9" are also resident in the third symbol area 235d. These image data are used for a demonstration effect displayed on the third pattern display device 81 when the next variable effect associated with the starting prize is not started even after a predetermined time has passed since one variable effect was stopped. be done. Thus, when the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the main symbol with no number is displayed as the third symbol in the demonstration effect. Therefore, the player can easily recognize that the pachinko machine 10 is in the demonstration state by visually recognizing the main symbols with no numbers from the display image of the third symbol display device 81.例文帳に追加

The character design area 235e is an area for storing image data corresponding to character designs used in various effects displayed on the third design display device 81. FIG. In this pachinko machine 10, various characters such as "young man" and "woman" are displayed according to various effects, and data corresponding to these characters are resident in the character pattern area 235e. Therefore, when the display control device 114 changes the character design based on the content of the command received from the sound lamp control device 113, the corresponding image data is not newly read out from the character ROM 234, but the character data in the resident video RAM 235 is changed. The image controller 237 can draw a predetermined image by reading the image data pre-resident in the pattern area 235e. This eliminates the need to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, so even if the character ROM 234 uses the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the character design can be changed immediately.

The error message image area 235f is an area for storing image data corresponding to an error message displayed when an error occurs in the pachinko machine 10. FIG. In the pachinko machine 10, for example, when vibration is detected by the sound ramp control device 113 from the output of a vibration sensor (not shown) attached to the back surface of the game board 13, the sound ramp control device 113 detects the occurrence of a vibration error. Notify the display controller 114 with an error command. Also, when the audio lamp control device 113 detects the occurrence of another error, the audio lamp control device 113 notifies the display control device 114 of the error occurrence and the error type by an error command. The display control device 114 is configured to display an error message corresponding to the received error on the third symbol display device 81 when an error command is received.

Here, the error message is required to be displayed almost simultaneously with the occurrence of the error from the standpoint of preventing fraud by the player and protecting the player against errors. In the pachinko machine 10, image data corresponding to various error messages are preliminarily resident in the error message image area 235f. By reading the image data previously resident in the image area 235f, the image controller 237 can immediately draw each error message image. As a result, it is not necessary to sequentially read the image data corresponding to the error message from the character ROM 234. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed is used as the character ROM 234, the corresponding error message is read after receiving the error command. It can be displayed immediately.

The normal video RAM 236 is used so that data is overwritten and updated as needed, and is provided with at least an image storage area 236a, a first frame buffer 236b and a second frame buffer 236c.

The image storage area 236a is an area for storing image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235, among the image data necessary for drawing an image to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. FIG. The image storage area 236a is divided into a plurality of sub-areas, and the type of image data to be stored in each sub-area is predetermined.

The MPU 231 extracts image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 and that is required for subsequent image drawing from the character ROM 234 in a sub area provided in the image storage area 236 a of the normal video RAM 236 . , instructs the image controller 237 to transfer the type of the image data to a predetermined sub-area for storing. As a result, the image controller 237 reads the image data instructed by the MPU 231 from the character ROM 234 and transfers the read image data to a specified sub-area of the image storage area 236a via the buffer RAM 237a.

The transfer instruction of the image data is performed by including transfer data information in a later-described drawing list in which the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to draw an image. As a result, the MPU 231 can issue an image drawing instruction and an image data transfer instruction simply by transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, thereby reducing the processing load.

The first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c are buffers for developing an image to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. FIG. The image controller 237 writes the one-frame image drawn according to the instruction from the MPU 231 to either one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c, thereby rendering the one-frame image to the frame buffer. While the image is developed and the image is developed in one of the frame buffers, the image information for one frame previously developed is read out from the other frame buffer, and sent to the third pattern display device 81 together with the drive signal. By transmitting the image information with the third pattern display device 81, a process for displaying the image for one frame is executed.

By providing two frame buffers, the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c, as described above, the image controller 237 can expand the one-frame image drawn in one of the frame buffers and simultaneously , the image of one frame developed earlier can be read from the other frame buffer, and the read image of one frame can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 .

A frame buffer for developing an image for one frame and a frame buffer for reading image information for one frame for displaying an image on the third pattern display device 81 are used for drawing processing of an image for one frame. The MPU 231 alternately designates either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c every 20 milliseconds.

That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for developing the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for developing the image of one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing process of the image of one frame is completed. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information of is read. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read out and displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. be.

After the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. be done. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read out and displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. be. After that, the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame are set to either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c every 20 milliseconds. By alternating designations, it is possible to continuously perform display processing of an image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while performing drawing processing for an image for one frame.

The work RAM 233 is a memory for storing the control programs and fixed value data stored in the character ROM 234, and for temporarily storing work data and flags used when various control programs are executed by the MPU 231. Configured. The work RAM 233 includes a program storage area 233a, a data table storage area 233b, a simple image display flag 233c, a display data table buffer 233d, a transfer data table buffer 233e, a pointer 233f, a drawing list area 233g, a clock counter 233h, and a stored image data discrimination. It has at least a flag 233i and a drawing target buffer flag 233j.

The program storage area 233a is an area for storing control programs executed by the MPU 231 . When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 reads the control program from the character ROM 234, transfers it to the work RAM 233, and stores it in the program storage area 233a. After storing all the control programs in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 thereafter executes various controls using the control programs stored in the program storage area 233a. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of a DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the display control device 114 can maintain high processing performance, and the third symbol display device 81 can be used to easily execute diversified and complicated effects.

The data table storage area 233b includes a display data table describing display contents to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 with the passage of time for one effect to be displayed based on a command from the main control device 110, and a display data table. This is an area for storing transfer data information of image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 among the image data used in one effect displayed by the table and a transfer data table defining transfer timing.

These data tables are normally stored as a type of fixed value data in the second program storage area 234a1 provided in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234, and according to the boot program executed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. , these data tables are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the work RAM 233 and stored in the data table storage area 233b. After all the data tables are stored in the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 controls the display of the third symbol display device 81 using the data tables stored in the data table storage area 233b. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of a DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when various data tables are stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and the third symbol display device 81 can be used to easily implement diversified and complicated effects.

Here, details of various data tables will be described. First, the display data table is prepared one by one for each effect mode of each effect displayed on the third pattern display device 81 based on a command from the main control device 110. For example, a variable effect, an opening effect, etc. , round effects, ending effects, and demonstration effects are provided.

The variation effect is an effect that is started in the third symbol display device 81 when a display variation pattern command from the sound lamp control device 113 is received. In addition, when the display variation pattern command is received, the display stop type command indicating the stop type of the variation effect is also received. For example, when the variable performance is started, if the stop type of the variable performance is off, the stop symbol indicating the failure is finally stopped and displayed, and the stop type of the variable performance is jackpots A to F. In either case, a stop symbol indicating each jackpot type is finally stopped and displayed. The player can recognize the jackpot type by visually recognizing the stop symbols in this variable effect, and can easily determine the game value to be given according to the jackpot type.

The opening performance is a performance for notifying the player that the pachinko machine 10 will shift to a special game state and that the right specific winning port 65a and the left specific winning port 650a, which are normally closed, will be repeatedly opened. , and the round effect is a effect for notifying the player of the number of rounds to be started from now on. The ending effect is a effect for informing the player of the end of the special game state.

In addition, as described above, the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the next variable effect associated with the start winning does not start even after a predetermined time has elapsed since one variable effect stopped. The third pattern consisting of the main patterns with no numerals '0' to '9' is stopped and displayed, and only the rear image changes. If the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the player and the persons involved in the hall can recognize that the pachinko machine 10 is not playing a game.

The data table storage area 233b stores one display data table corresponding to each of the opening effect, round effect, ending effect and demonstration effect. Further, if there are 32 variable performance patterns to be set, the variable display data table, which is a display data table for the variable performance, is prepared with one table for one variable performance pattern, and a total of 32 tables.

Details of the display data table will now be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 18 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the variable display data table among the display data tables. The display data table should be displayed at that time in association with an address that represents the time (in this embodiment, 20 milliseconds) during which an image for one frame is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 as one unit. It defines in detail the content (drawing content) of an image for one frame.

The drawing contents specify the type of sprite for each sprite that is a display object that constitutes an image for one frame, and display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, and translucency according to the type of sprite. Rendering information for causing the third pattern display device 81 to render sprites, such as values, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information, is defined.

The sprite type is information for specifying the sprite to be displayed. The display position coordinates are information for specifying the coordinates on the third pattern display device 81 where the sprite should be displayed. The enlargement ratio is information for designating an enlargement ratio with respect to a standard display size preset for the sprite, and the size of the sprite to be displayed is specified according to the enlargement ratio. If the magnification is greater than 100%, the sprite will be displayed larger than the standard size, and if the magnification is less than 100%, the sprite will be displayed smaller than the standard size. Is displayed.

The rotation angle is information for specifying the rotation angle when rotating and displaying the sprite. The translucency value is for specifying the transparency of the entire sprite, and the higher the translucency value, the more the image displayed behind the sprite can be seen through. The α-blending information is information for specifying known α-blending coefficients used when performing superimposition processing with other sprites. Color information is information for designating the color tone of the sprite to be displayed. The filter designation information is information for designating an image filter to be applied to the sprite when rendering the designated sprite.

In the variable display data table, the drawing contents for one frame defined corresponding to each address are one rear image, nine third patterns (design 1, design 2, . Rendering information for each sprite, such as an effect expressing an insertion of a character, a boy image, a character used for various effects such as characters, etc., is defined for each address. One or a plurality of information regarding effects and characters are defined according to the content to be displayed in the frame.

Here, the display position of the rear image is fixed to the entire screen of the third pattern display device 81, and the magnification ratio, rotation angle, translucency value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information are changed over time. Since it is fixed, only the back surface type, which is information for specifying the back image type, is defined in the variable display data table. The type of the back surface is to display either back surface A or B corresponding to the stage selected by the player (either "sand beach stage" or "deep sea stage"), or to display a back surface different from back surface A or B. Information specifying whether to display an image is described. In addition, when specifying that a back image different from the back faces A and B is to be displayed, the back face type also includes information specifying which back face image is to be displayed.

When the type of the back surface specifies that one of the back surfaces A and B is to be displayed, the MPU 231 specifies the back image corresponding to the stage determined by lottery among the back surfaces A and B as the object to be drawn. In addition, the range of the rear image to be displayed for that frame is specified according to the lapse of time. On the other hand, when it is specified to display a rear image different from the rear faces A and B, the rear face image to be displayed is specified from the rear face type.

In the present embodiment, only the back surface type is specified as the drawing content of the back surface image in the display data table. may be defined as position information indicating whether the should be displayed. This position information may be, for example, information indicating the elapsed time since the rear image in the range corresponding to the initial position was displayed. In this case, the MPU 231 identifies the range of the back image to be displayed for that frame based on the elapsed time since the back image in the range corresponding to the initial position indicated by the position information was displayed.

Further, the position information may be information indicating the elapsed time since the drawing of the image based on this display data table (or the display of the third pattern display device 81) was started. In this case, the MPU 231 displays the range of the rear image to be displayed for that frame at the stage when the drawing of the image (or the display of the third pattern display device 81) is started based on the display database. It is specified based on the position of the back image and the elapsed time since the drawing of the image indicated by the position information (or the display of the third pattern display device 81) was started.

Furthermore, the position information is information indicating the elapsed time since the back image in the range corresponding to the initial position was displayed according to the back surface type, and the drawing of the image based on the display data table (or the third pattern display device 81 display) may indicate any of the information indicating the elapsed time since the start of the display, or along with the back surface type and position information, the type information of the position information (for example, the range corresponding to the initial position It is information indicating the elapsed time since the back image was displayed, or information indicating the elapsed time since the drawing of the image based on the display database (or the display of the third pattern display device 81) was started. (information indicating whether or not the back surface image is drawn) may be defined as the drawing content of the back image. Alternatively, the position information may be information indicating an address in which the range of the rear image to be displayed is stored instead of information indicating the elapsed time.

The third symbols (symbol 1, symbol 2, . . . ) describe symbol type offset information as symbol type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed. This offset information is information representing the difference between the numbers attached to the respective third symbols. Instead of directly specifying the type of the third symbol, the offset information is specified because the display of the third symbol in the variable effect is the stop symbol of the variable effect performed one before and the variable effect performed this time. This is because it changes according to the stop pattern, and in the pattern offset information from the start of the variation until the predetermined time elapses, the offset information from the stop pattern of the previous variation performance is described. As a result, the variable performance is started from the stop symbol in the previous variable performance.

On the other hand, after a predetermined time has passed since the start of the fluctuation, the offset from the stop pattern set according to the stop type command (stop type command for display) received from the main control device 110 via the sound lamp control device 113 Include information. As a result, the variable effect can be stopped with a stop symbol corresponding to the stop type designated by the main controller 110. - 特許庁

In addition, since each third symbol is assigned a unique number, the variable symbol in the previous variable performance or the stop symbol corresponding to the stop type specified by the main controller 110 can be selected as the third symbol. , and the offset information is represented by the difference between the numbers attached to the respective third symbols, the third symbols to be displayed can be easily identified from the offset information.

In addition, in the pattern offset information, the third pattern fluctuates at high speed for a predetermined time in which the offset information of the stop pattern of the variable performance performed immediately before is switched to the offset information of the stop pattern of the variable performance performed this time. It is set to be the displayed time. While the third pattern is being variably displayed at high speed, the third pattern is invisible to the player. By switching from the offset information to the offset information of the stop pattern of the variable performance being performed this time, even if the continuity of the numbers of the third pattern is interrupted, the player does not recognize the interruption of the continuity of the numbers. be able to.

"Start" information indicating the start of the data table is described at "0000H" which is the top address of the display data table, and the last address of the display data table ("02F0H" in the example of FIG. 18) is the data table. "End" information indicating the end of is described. Then, for each address between the address "0000H" in which the "Start" information is described and the address in which the "End" information is described, the drawing contents corresponding to the presentation mode to be defined in the display data table are displayed. is described.

The MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) or the like transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110, and displays the selected display data table. The data table is read from the data table storage area 233b and stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and the pointer 233f is initialized. Each time drawing processing for one frame is completed, the pointer 233f is incremented by 1, and in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, based on the drawing content defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f, the next A drawing list (see FIG. 20), which will be described later, is created by specifying the image contents to be drawn. By transmitting this drawing list to the image controller 237, a drawing instruction for the image is given. As a result, as the pointer 233f is updated, the drawing contents are specified in the order specified in the display data table, so the image specified in the display data table is displayed on the third pattern display device 81.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, the display control device 114 responds to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) or the like transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. Instead of changing the program to be executed by the MPU 231, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d. .

Here, as in a conventional pachinko machine, if a program to be executed by the MPU 231 is started each time the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed, the effect image becomes more diverse. Therefore, the processing capacity of the display control device 114 is limited, and there is a risk that the diversification of controllable effect images will be limited. there were. On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed only by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d. A wide variety of effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 regardless of the processing capability of the control device 114 .

In this way, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each effect mode, a display data table buffer is set according to the effect mode to be displayed, and a drawing list is created frame by frame according to the set data table. The reason why it can be created is that the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined in advance in the pachinko machine 10 based on the result of the lottery performed based on the starting prize. On the other hand, in game machines other than pachinko machines, the display contents change on the spot based on the user's operation, so the display contents cannot be predicted. It is not possible to have a display data table corresponding to the mode of presentation. Thus, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each presentation mode, a display data table buffer is set according to the presentation mode to be displayed, and a drawing list is created for each frame according to the set data table. This configuration can be realized only when the pachinko machine 10 is configured to determine the performance mode to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 in advance based on the result of the lottery performed based on the starting prize.

Next, details of the transfer data table will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 19 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the transfer data table. The transfer data table is prepared corresponding to the display data table prepared for each effect. Transfer data information for transferring image data not resident in the video RAM 235 for normal use from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a of the video RAM 236 for normal use and its transfer timing are defined.

If all the image data of the sprites used in the effects specified in the display data table are stored in the resident video RAM 235, no transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is prepared. As a result, an increase in capacity of the data table storage area 233b can be suppressed.

The transfer data table contains transfer data information of sprite image data (hereinafter referred to as "transfer target image data") to be transferred at the time indicated by the address specified in the display data table in correspondence with the address. (corresponding to addresses "0001H" and "0097H" in FIG. 19). Here, the transfer start timing of the transfer target image data is set so that the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a before the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. In the transfer data table, the transfer data information of the transfer target image data is defined in association with the address corresponding to the transfer start timing.

On the other hand, if there is no transfer target image data to start transferring at the time indicated by the address defined in the display data table, there is no transfer target image data to start transferring corresponding to that address. (corresponding to address "0002H" in FIG. 19).

The transfer data information includes the head address (storage source head address) and the end address (storage source end address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data to be transferred is stored, and the head address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236). is included.

It should be noted that, similarly to the display data table, "Start" information indicating the start of the data table is described in "0000H", which is the top address of the transfer data table, and the end address of the transfer data table (in the example of FIG. 19, "02F0H") describes "End" information indicating the end of the data table. Then, for each address between the address "0000H" in which the "Start" information is described and the address in which the "End" information is described, the transfer data information of the transfer target image data to be defined in the transfer data table is described.

When the MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) or the like transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110, the display data table exists, the transfer data table is read from the data table storage area 233b and stored in a transfer data table buffer 233e of the work RAM 233, which will be described later. Then, each time the pointer 233f is updated, the drawing contents defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f are specified from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and a drawing list (see FIG. 20), which will be described later, is created. At the same time, from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the transfer data information of the image data of the predetermined sprite whose transfer is to be started at that time is acquired, and the transfer data information is added to the created drawing list. to add.

For example, in the example of FIG. 19, when the pointer 233f becomes "0001H" or "0097H", the MPU 231 creates the transfer data information defined for the address in the transfer data table based on the display data table. The drawing list is added, and the drawing list after the addition is transmitted to the image controller 237 . On the other hand, when the pointer 233f is "0002H", Null data is defined at the address "0002H" of the transfer data table. The drawing list is sent to the image controller 237 without adding transfer data information to the drawing list.

When transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 transfers the transfer target image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. process.

Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a before the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred is specified for a predetermined address, by transferring the image data from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table, When drawing a predetermined sprite according to the display data table, image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 required for drawing the sprite can be stored in the image storage area 236a without fail. Using the image data stored in the image storage area 236a, a predetermined sprite can be drawn based on the display data table.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the image required for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance and transferred to the normal video RAM 236 without delay, so that the image can be displayed. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. - 特許庁Also, only the image data temporarily resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 by the description of the transfer data table.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 10, the display control device 114 responds to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) or the like transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110, and displays the display data. As the table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. It is possible to reliably transfer from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing.

The transfer data table defines transfer data information so that image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to a sprite. As a result, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the processing related to the transfer can be easily performed. By controlling the transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 on a sprite-by-sprite basis, the transfer of image data can be controlled in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in the load applied to the transfer.

The transfer data table has a data structure similar to that of the display data table, and is associated with an address defined in the display data table. Since the data information is defined, the image data is reliably stored in the normal video RAM 236 before the image data of the predetermined sprite is used based on the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d. As described above, since the timing of starting transfer can be instructed, even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, various effects images can be easily displayed on the third symbol display device 81. be able to.

The simple image display flag 233c indicates whether or not to display the power-on images (power-on main image and power-on fluctuation image) shown in FIGS. flag to indicate This simple image display flag 233c is set after the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and power-on varying image is transferred to the power-on main image area 235a or power-on varying image area 235b of the resident video RAM. , is set to ON in the main processing (see FIG. 39) executed by the MPU 231 (see S6005 in FIG. 39). Then, at the stage when all the resident target image data are stored in the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer processing of the image transfer processing, in order to display an image other than the power-on image on the third symbol display device 81, It is set to OFF (see S7705 in FIG. 51(b)).

The simple image display flag 233c is referenced in the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 each time the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 is detected (see S6301 in FIG. 41B). When the image display flag 233c is ON, the simple command determination process (see S6308 in FIG. 41B) and the simple display setting process (see S6308 in FIG. 41(b) S6309) is executed. On the other hand, when the simple image display flag 233c is off, command determination is performed so that various images are displayed according to commands transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on commands from the main control device 110 or the like. Processing (see FIGS. 42 to 47) and display setting processing (see FIGS. 48 to 50) are executed.

Further, the simple image display flag 233c is referred to in the transfer setting process executed by the MPU 231 during the V interrupt process (see S7601 in FIG. 51A), and when the simple image display flag 233c is on. Since there is resident target image data that is not stored in the resident video RAM 235, resident image transfer setting processing (see FIG. 51(b)) is executed to transfer the resident target image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. However, if the simple image display flag 233c is off, normal image transfer setting processing (see FIG. 52) is executed to transfer image data necessary for drawing processing from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. FIG.

The display data table buffer 233d stores a display data table corresponding to an effect mode to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 in response to a command or the like transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. It is a buffer for The MPU 231 determines the effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the command or the like transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113, and stores the display data table corresponding to the effect mode from the data table storage area 233b. It selects and stores the selected display data table in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, the MPU 231 increments the pointer 233f by 1, and based on the rendering content defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the image controller 237 A later-described drawing list (see FIG. 20) is generated in which the content of the instruction for drawing an image is described. As a result, the third symbol display device 81 displays an effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d.

While incrementing the pointer 233f one by one, the MPU 231 draws an image for the image controller 237 for each frame based on the drawing contents defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. A drawing list (see FIG. 20), which will be described later, is generated in which the content of the drawing instruction is described. As a result, the effect corresponding to the display data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 .

The transfer data table buffer 233e transfers a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d according to a command or the like transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. is a buffer for storing When the display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 selects the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table from the data table storage area 233b, and transfers the selected transfer data table. Store in the data table buffer 233e. If all of the sprite image data used in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is stored in the resident video RAM 235, the transfer data table corresponding to that display data table is not prepared. Therefore, the MPU 231 clears the contents of the transfer data table buffer 233e by writing Null data indicating that there is no transfer target image data.

While incrementing the pointer 233f by one, the MPU 231 defines the transfer data information of the transfer target image data specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e. (that is, if Null data is not described), the transfer data information is included in a later-described rendering list (see FIG. 20) describing the image rendering instruction contents for the image controller 237 generated for each frame. to add.

As a result, when the transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 transfers the transfer target image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the transfer process. Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a before the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Transfer data information of transfer target image data is defined for a predetermined address. Therefore, by transferring the image data from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information specified in this transfer data table, when drawing a predetermined sprite according to the display data table, the data necessary for drawing the sprite can be obtained. Image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can always be stored in the image storage area 236a.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the image required for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance and transferred to the normal video RAM 236 without delay, so that the image can be displayed. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. - 特許庁Also, only the image data temporarily resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 by the description of the transfer data table.

The pointer 233f is an address at which transfer data information of corresponding drawing contents or transfer target image data should be obtained from the display data table and the transfer data table stored in the respective buffers of the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table buffer 233e. is for specifying The MPU 231 once initializes the pointer 233f to 0 when the display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, display setting processing for V interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 based on a V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when drawing processing for one frame of image is completed (see FIG. 41(b)). ), the pointer update process (see S7305 in FIG. 48) is executed, and the value of the pointer 233f is incremented by one.

Every time the pointer 233f is updated, the MPU 231 identifies the drawing content defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and stores the drawing content in the drawing list described later. (see FIG. 20), acquires the transfer data information of the image data of the predetermined sprite whose transfer is to be started at that time from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, and obtains the transfer data Add information to the created drawing list.

As a result, an effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. FIG. Therefore, the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be easily changed only by changing the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Therefore, regardless of the processing capability of the display control device 341, various effects can be displayed.

In addition, when the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e is stored, the sprite is displayed based on the transfer data table before the corresponding display data table starts drawing a predetermined sprite. Image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 used for drawing can be stored in the image storage area 236a without fail. As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the image necessary for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance and transferred to the normal video RAM 236 without delay, so that the image can be displayed. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. - 特許庁Also, only the image data temporarily resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 by the description of the transfer data table.

The drawing list area 233g is used by the image controller to draw an image for one frame generated based on the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e. This is an area for storing a draw list instructing 237.

Details of the drawing list will now be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 20 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the drawing list. The drawing list is an instruction table for instructing the image controller 237 to draw an image for one frame, and as shown in FIG. Symbol 2, ...), effect (effect 1, effect 2, ...), character (character 1, character 2, ..., reserved ball pattern 1, reserved ball pattern 2, ..., error (pattern) describes detailed drawing information (detailed information) of the sprite for each sprite. The drawing list also describes transfer data information for causing the image controller 237 to transfer predetermined image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 .

The detailed drawing information (detailed information) of each sprite includes information indicating the type of RAM (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) in which the image data of the corresponding sprite (display object) is stored, and its type. The image controller 237 acquires the image data of the sprite from the memory area specified by the RAM type and address. The detailed drawing information (detailed information) includes display position coordinates, magnification, rotation angle, translucent value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information. A standard image generated from the image data of the sprite read from the video RAM is scaled according to the enlargement ratio, rotated according to the rotation angle, and translucent according to the translucency value. alpha blending information, compositing with other sprites, color tone correction according to color information, and filtering according to filter specification information. After that, an image obtained by performing various processes at the display position indicated by the display position coordinates is drawn. Then, the drawn image is developed by the image controller 237 in either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233j.

In the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 stores the drawing content defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f and the content of other images to be drawn (for example, the pending number of balls to be displayed). Image, warning image that notifies the occurrence of an error, etc.), generates detailed drawing information (detailed information) for all sprites used to draw the image for one frame, and provides the detailed information for each sprite. Create a draw list by sorting.

Here, among the detailed information of each sprite, the RAM type and address for storing the data of the sprite (display object) are the sprite type defined in the display data table or the sprite type specified from the contents of other images. Generated accordingly. That is, since the area of the resident video RAM 235 in which the image data of the sprite is stored or the sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed for each sprite, the MPU 231 can store the image data according to the sprite type. Therefore, the type and address of the storage RAM where the image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately specified, and such information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

In addition, the MPU 231 sets other information (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucency value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information) among the detailed information of each sprite as defined in the display data table. copy the information as is.

Further, in generating the drawing list, the MPU 231 rearranges the sprites to be arranged in the order of the sprites to be arranged in the front side from the sprites to be arranged in the rearmost side in the image for one frame, and provides detailed drawing information for each sprite. Describe (detailed information). That is, in the drawing list, detailed information corresponding to the back image is first described, followed by the third pattern (pattern 1, pattern 2, . . . ), effect (effect 1, effect 2, . Detailed information corresponding to each sprite is described in the order of (character 1, character 2, . . . , reserved ball pattern 1, reserved ball pattern 2, .

The image controller 237 executes the drawing process of each sprite according to the order described in the drawing list, and develops the drawn sprites in the frame buffer by overwriting. Therefore, in the one-frame image generated by the drawing list, the first-drawn sprite can be arranged on the rearmost side, and the last-drawn sprite can be arranged on the frontmost side.

In the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, if the transfer data information is written at the address indicated by the pointer 233f, the MPU 231 stores the transfer data information (character in which the transfer target image data is stored). The storage source start address and storage source end address in the ROM 234, and the storage destination start address of the sub-area provided in the image storage area 236a where the image data to be transferred is to be stored are added to the end of the drawing list. If the transfer data information is included in the drawing list, the image controller 237 draws an image from a predetermined area of the character ROM 234 (the area indicated by the storage source start address and the storage source end address) based on the transfer data information. The data is read, and the image data to be transferred is transferred to a predetermined sub-area (storage destination address) provided in the image storage area 236 a of the normal video RAM 236 .

The clock counter 233h is a counter that counts the effect time of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. When one display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 sets time data indicating the effect time of the effect to be displayed based on the display data table. This time data is a value obtained by dividing the performance time by the image display time for one frame on the third pattern display device 81 (20 milliseconds in this embodiment).

Then, the MPU 231 executes V interrupt processing based on a V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when drawing processing and display processing for one frame of image are completed (FIG. 41(b)). )) is executed, the timer counter 233h is decremented by one (see S7307 in FIG. 48). As a result, when the value of the clock counter 233h becomes 0 or less, the MPU 231 judges that the effect displayed by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d has ended, and performs the effect in accordance with the end of the effect. perform various operations to

The storage image data discrimination flag 233i is set to indicate whether image data corresponding to all sprites whose corresponding image data are not resident in the resident video RAM 235 are stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. It is a flag indicating a storage state indicating whether or not there is.

This stored image data determination flag 233i is generated by initial setting processing (see S6002 in FIG. 39) executed by the MPU 231 in the main processing when the power is turned on. The storage image data determination flag 233i generated here is set to "OFF" indicating that the storage status for all sprites is not stored in the image storage area 236a.

The storage image data determination flag 233i is updated when an instruction to transfer image data to be transferred corresponding to one sprite is set during normal image transfer setting processing (see FIG. 52) executed by the MPU 231. will be In this update, the storage state corresponding to one sprite for which the transfer instruction is set is set to "on" indicating that the corresponding image data is stored in the image storage area 236a. Also, image data of other sprites to be stored in the same sub-area of the image storage area 236a as the one sprite is always unstored by storing the image data of the one sprite. Therefore, the stored state corresponding to the other sprites is set to "off".

Also, when transferring the image data of a sprite whose image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, the MPU 231 refers to the stored image data determination flag 233i and determines the sprite to be transferred. It is determined whether image data has already been stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 (see S7813 in FIG. 52). Then, if the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is "OFF" and the corresponding image data is not stored in the image storage area 236a, an instruction to transfer the image data is set (see S7814 in FIG. 52). , causes the image controller 237 to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a. On the other hand, if the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is "on", the corresponding image data is already stored in the image storage area 236a, so the transfer processing of that image data is stopped. As a result, unnecessary transfer from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 can be suppressed, and the processing load on each unit of the display control device 114 and the traffic on the bus line 240 can be reduced. can.

The drawing target buffer flag 233j selects a frame buffer for developing an image drawn by the image controller 237 (hereinafter referred to as a "drawing target buffer") from among the two frame buffers (the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c). ), and when the drawing buffer flag 233j is 0, it designates the first frame buffer 236b as the drawing buffer, and when it is 1, it designates the second frame buffer 236c. Then, the information of the specified drawing target buffer is sent to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list (see S7902 in FIG. 53).

As a result, the image controller 237 executes the drawing process of drawing the image drawn based on the drawing list on the specified drawing target buffer. In parallel with the drawing process, the image controller 237 reads the drawn image information previously developed from the frame buffer different from the drawing object buffer, and transmits the image to the third pattern display device 81 together with the drive signal. By transferring the information, display processing for displaying an image on the third pattern display device 81 is executed.

The drawing target buffer flag 233j is updated as the drawing target buffer information is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list. This update is done by inverting the value of the drawing target buffer flag 233j, that is, by setting the value to "1" if it was "0" and to "0" if it was "1". done by As a result, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c each time the drawing list is transmitted. Also, the transmission of the drawing list is executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing processing and display processing of the image for one frame are completed. This is performed each time the rendering process (see S6306 in FIG. 41B) is performed.

That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for developing the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for developing the image of one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing process of the image of one frame is completed. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information of is read. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read out and displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. be.

After the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. be done. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read out and displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. be. After that, the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame are set to either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c every 20 milliseconds. By alternating designations, it is possible to continuously perform display processing for one frame of image in units of 20 milliseconds while performing drawing processing for one frame of image.

<Regarding the control process of the main controller in the first embodiment>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flow charts of FIGS. 21 to 32. FIG. The processing of the MPU 201 can be broadly classified into startup processing that is started when the power is turned on, main processing that is executed after the startup processing, and a timer that is started periodically (in this embodiment, at intervals of 2 milliseconds). There are interrupt processing and NMI interrupt processing activated by the input of the power failure signal SG1 to the NMI terminal. and main processing.

FIG. 21 is a flow chart showing timer interrupt processing executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 . Timer interrupt processing is periodic processing that is executed, for example, every 2 milliseconds. In the timer interrupt process, first, various winning switch reading processes are executed (S101). That is, it reads the states of various switches connected to the main controller 110, determines the states of the switches, and saves detection information (winning detection information).

Next, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S102). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (399 in this embodiment). Then, the updated value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM203. Similarly, 1 is added to the second initial random number counter CINI2, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (239 in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0, and the updated value of the second initial random number counter CINI2 is cleared. is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203 .

Furthermore, the first winning random number counter C1, the first winning type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the second winning random number counter C4 are updated (S103). Specifically, 1 is added to each of the first winning random number counter C1, the first winning type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the second winning random number counter C4, and their counter values are the maximum values (in this embodiment 399, 99, 99, 239), respectively, are cleared to 0 respectively. Then, the updated values of the counters C1 to C4 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203. FIG.

Next, a special symbol variation process for setting the variation pattern of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 is executed (S104), and then, A starting winning process associated with winning (starting winning) to the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640 is executed (S105). The details of the special symbol variation process and the starting winning process will be described later with reference to FIGS.

After executing the starting winning process, the normal symbol variation process, which is the process for displaying on the second symbol display device 83, is executed (S106), and the through gate passage process associated with the passage of the game ball in the through gate 67 is executed. Execute (S107). The details of the normal symbol variation processing and the through gate passage processing will be described later with reference to FIGS. 26 and 27. FIG. After executing the through-gate passage processing, the firing control processing is executed (S108), and further, other processing that should be periodically executed is executed (S109), and the timer interrupt processing ends. Note that the shooting control process is performed on the condition that the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51 and that the stop switch 51b for stopping shooting is not operated. This is a process of determining on/off of the . The main controller 110 instructs the shooting control device 112 to shoot a game ball when the game ball shooting is on.

Next, with reference to FIG. 22, the special symbol variation process (S104) executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 22 is a flow chart showing this special symbol variation process (S104). This special symbol variation process (S104) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 21), and the variable display of the special symbol (first symbol) performed in the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device This is a process for controlling the variable display of the third pattern performed in 81.

In this special symbol variation process, first, it is determined whether the current state is the jackpot waiting state or the special symbol jackpot (S201). Specifically, it is determined whether any of the entering ball waiting flag 203j and the jackpot flag 203m is ON. As a result of the determination, if it is in the jackpot waiting state or the jackpot of the special symbol is in progress (S201: Yes), this processing is finished as it is.

In the processing of S201, if it is determined that neither the jackpot standby state nor the jackpot of the special symbol is in progress (S201: No), it is determined whether or not the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S202). , If the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is not fluctuating (S202: No), the value of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203f (the number of times N2 of holding the variable display based on the lottery of the second special symbol) Acquire (S203). Next, it is determined whether or not the value (N2) of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is greater than 0 (S204). If the value (N2) of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is not 0 (S204: Yes), subtract 1 from the value (N2) of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203f (S205), and change by calculation. A reserved ball number command indicating the value of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is set (S206). The pending ball number command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is executed by the MPU 201 during the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 30), which will be described later. , is sent to the audio ramp controller 113 . When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball number command, it extracts the value of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203f from the reserved ball number command, and stores the extracted value in the second special symbol reserved ball number counter of the RAM 223. 223c.

After setting the reserved ball number command by the process of S206, the data stored in the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b is shifted (S207). In the process of S207, the data stored in the reservation first area to the reservation fourth area of the second special symbol reservation ball storage area 203b are sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, the first holding area → execution area, the second holding area → the first holding area, the third holding area → the second holding area, the fourth holding area → the third holding area, etc. Data is shifted, and the process proceeds to S213.

On the other hand, in the process of S204, when it is determined that the value (N2) of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is 0 (S204: No), the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e (first (S208), and determines whether or not the acquired value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is greater than 0 (S209). .

In the processing of S209, when it is determined that the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is 0 (S209: No), this processing is terminated as it is. On the other hand, in the process of S209, if it is determined that the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is not 0 (that is, is 1 or more) (S209: Yes), the first special symbol reserved ball number 1 is subtracted from the value (N1) of the counter 203e (S210), and a reserved ball number command indicating the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e changed by calculation is set (S211). The pending ball number command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is executed by the MPU 201 during the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 30), which will be described later. , is sent to the audio ramp controller 113 . When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball number command, it extracts the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e from the reserved ball number command, and stores the extracted value in the first special symbol reserved ball number counter of the RAM 223. 223b.

After setting the reserved ball number command by the process of S211, the data stored in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a is shifted by the same method as the process of S207 (S212), and the process proceeds to S213. Transition. In the process of S213 executed after the process of S207 or S212, the special symbol variation start process for starting the variation display in the first symbol display device 37 is performed (S213), and this process ends. The details of this special symbol variation start process will be described later with reference to FIG.

In the process of S202, if the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S202: Yes), the variable time counter for measuring the variable time is updated (S214), and the updated variable time counter is Based on the value, it is determined whether or not the variation time of the variation display executed in the first symbol display device 37 has elapsed (S215). The variation time of the variation display executed in the first pattern display device 37 is determined according to the variation pattern selected by the variation type counter CS1 (determined according to the variation pattern command), and this variation time has not elapsed (S215: No), the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is updated (S216), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the processing of S215, if the variation time of the variable display being executed has passed (S215: Yes), the display mode corresponding to the stop symbol of the first symbol display device 37 is set (S217). The setting of the stop symbols is performed in advance by special symbol variation start processing (S213), which will be described later with reference to FIG. When this special symbol variation start process (S213) is executed, a special symbol lottery is performed based on the values of various counters stored in the execution area. More specifically, whether or not the special symbol jackpot is determined according to the value of the first winning random number counter C1, and in the case of the special symbol jackpot, depending on the value of the first winning type counter C2. One of the jackpots A to F is determined.

In the present embodiment, when the jackpot A is reached, the first symbol display device 37 turns on the blue LED, when the jackpot B is reached, the red LED is turned on, and when the jackpot C is reached, , the green LED is lit, and if the jackpot D is reached, the blue and green LEDs are lit; In this case, the blue LED, the red LED and the green LED are lit. If it is out, the blue LED and the red LED are turned on. The display of each LED is turned off when the next variable display is started, but it may be turned on only for several seconds after the variable display is stopped.

After the process of S217 is completed, when the variation display being executed in the first symbol display device 37 is started, the special symbol lottery result (this lottery result) performed by the special symbol variation start process is It is determined whether or not it is a special symbol jackpot (S218). If the lottery result of this time is a special symbol jackpot (S218: Yes), the variable probability flag 203h is set to OFF, and the value of the counter 203i during time saving is reset to 0 (S219). Then, the ball entry standby flag 203j is set to ON, and a standby state command indicating the start of the jackpot standby state is set (S220), and the process proceeds to S223. The standby state command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is executed by the MPU 201 during the external output processing (S1001) of the main processing (see FIG. 30), which will be described later. It is sent to the audio lamp controller 113 . When the audio lamp control device 113 receives the standby state command, it issues a display standby state command for starting the standby state effect (see FIGS. 7A and 7B) on the display screen of the third pattern display device 81. It is set as a command to be output to the display control device 114 . As a result, in the third symbol display device 81, the standby state effect is started.

On the other hand, in the processing of S218, if the lottery result of this time is out of the special design (S218: No), whether the value of the time saving medium counter 203i is a value greater than 0 (that is, whether it is a normal working time saving state of the design) ) is determined (S221), and if it is determined that the value of the time saving counter 203i is greater than 0 (S221: Yes), the value of the time saving counter 203i is subtracted by 1 (S222), and the process proceeds to S223 do. On the other hand, in the process of S221, when it discriminate|determines that the value of the counter 203i is 0 (S221:No), the process of S222 is skipped and a process transfers to S223. In addition, although omitted for illustration, when the value of the time saving counter 203i after subtraction in the process of S222 becomes 0, the game state has been changed from the time saving state of the normal design to the normal state of the normal design A status command is set to indicate The status command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is output by voice during the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 30) executed by the MPU 201, which will be described later. It is sent to the lamp control device 113 . When receiving the state command, the sound lamp control device 113 acquires the game state included in the state command. As a result, the state grasped by the sound lamp control device 113 can be matched with the actual state of the pachinko machine 10 .

In the process of S223, a stop command indicating the stop type is set, and this process ends. The stop command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is output by voice during the external output processing (S1001) of the main processing (see FIG. 30) executed by the MPU 201, which will be described later. It is transmitted to the lamp control device 113 . When the state command is received, the sound lamp control device 113 sets the stop symbol of the third symbol based on the stop type indicated by the stop command.

Next, with reference to FIG. 23, the special symbol variation start process (S213) executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 23 is a flow chart showing the special symbol variation start process (S213). This special symbol variation start process (S213) is a process executed in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 22) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 21), and the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a and Based on the values of the various counters stored in the execution area of the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b, a lottery (whether or not a special symbol wins) or a "special symbol omission" is performed (determination of success or failure), and the first symbol is selected. It is a process for determining the effect pattern (variation pattern) of the variable effect performed by the display device 37 and the third pattern display device 81.

In the special symbol variation start process, first, each value of the first hit random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 stored in the execution area 203c is obtained (S301).

Next, the variable probability flag 203h is read to determine whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the variable probability state of the special symbols (S302). In the process of S302, if the variable probability flag 203h is ON, it is determined that the special symbol is in the variable probability state, and if the variable probability flag 203h is OFF, it is determined as the low probability state (not the variable probability state) of the special symbol. In the process of S302, when it is determined that the pachinko machine 10 is in the probability variable state of the special symbol (S302: Yes), the value of the first per random number counter C1 obtained in the process of S301 and the special symbol for high probability time Based on the big hit random number table, the lottery result as to whether or not the special symbol is a big hit is obtained (S303). Specifically, the value of the first winning random number counter C1 is compared with the first winning random number table for high probability (see 202a2 in FIG. 9B). As described above, 20 random numbers from "0 to 19" are set as the random numbers that become the jackpot of special symbols, and the value of the first winning random number counter C1 and the random numbers that become these winnings match. If so, it is determined to be a special symbol jackpot. When the lottery result of the special symbol is obtained, the process proceeds to S305.

On the other hand, in the processing of S302, when it is determined that the pachinko machine 10 is not in the special symbol probability variable state (it is in the special symbol low probability state) (S302: No), the first winning random number counter C1 obtained in the processing of S301 and the first winning random number table for low probability (see 202a1 in FIG. 9(b)), the lottery result as to whether or not the special symbol is a jackpot is obtained (S304). Specifically, the value of the first hit random number counter C1 is compared with the special symbol jackpot random number table for low probability. When the value of the first winning random number counter C1 coincides with the winning random number value (that is, "0, 1"), it is determined that the special symbol is a jackpot. When the lottery result of the special symbol is obtained, the process proceeds to S305.

Then, it is determined whether or not the special symbol lottery result obtained by the processing of S303 or S304 is a special symbol jackpot (S305), and when it is determined to be a special symbol jackpot (S305: Yes), Based on the value of the first hit type counter C2 acquired in the process of S301, the display mode at the time of the big hit is set (S306). More specifically, the value of the first hit type counter C2 acquired in the process of S301 is compared with the first hit type selection table 202b (see FIG. 10(a)) to determine what the jackpot type is. do. As described above, in the case of a big hit in the lottery of the first special symbol, if the value of the first hit type counter C2 is in the range of "0 to 4", it is a big hit A (8 round probability variable big hit). If it is in the range of "5 to 64", it is determined to be a jackpot B (5 rounds of variable probability), and if it is in the range of "65 to 99", it is a jackpot C (5 rounds of normal jackpot). Determine (see FIG. 10(a)). On the other hand, when the lottery of the second special symbol results in a big win, if the value of the first win type counter C2 is in the range of "0 to 4", it is determined to be a big win D (16 round probability variable big win), If it is in the range of "5 to 64", it is determined to be a jackpot E (10 rounds normal jackpot), and if it is in the range of "65 to 99", it is determined to be a jackpot F (10 rounds normal jackpot) ( See FIG. 10(a)).

In the process of S306, the display mode (lighting state of the LED 37a) of the first symbol display device 37 is set according to the determined jackpot type (jackpot A to F). Also, in order to stop and display the stop symbols corresponding to the big win types on the third symbol display device 81, the big win types (jackpots A to F) are set as the stop types.

Next, the variation pattern at the time of the big win is determined (S307). When the variation pattern is set in the process of S307, the variation time (display time) of the variation effect in the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the third symbol display device 81 until it stops at the jackpot symbol. A pattern variation time is determined. At this time, the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203 is compared with the variation pattern table 202d (see FIG. 11A), and the variation pattern corresponding to the value of the variation type counter CS1 ( to determine the variable time).

On the other hand, in the processing of S305, when it is determined that the special symbol is out (S305: No), the display mode at the time of being out is set (S308). In the process of S308, the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is set to the display mode corresponding to the off symbol, and the third symbol is displayed based on the value of the stop type selection counter C3 stored in the execution area 203c. As the stop type to be displayed in the device 81, it is set whether it is a front-rear out-of-reach reach, a reach other than front-rear out-of-order, or a complete out-of-reach.

Here, if the pachinko machine 10 is in the special symbol probability variable state, the value of the stop type selection counter C3 acquired in the process of S301 is compared with the random value stored in the stop type selection table for high probability. to set the stop type. Specifically, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of "0 to 89", set the complete out. , 99”, set the front-rear out-of-reach reach. On the other hand, if the pachinko machine 10 is in a normal state with special symbols, the stop type is set by comparing the value of the stop type selection counter C3 with the random number value stored in the stop type selection table for low probability. do. Specifically, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of "0 to 79", set the complete out. , 99”, set the front-rear out-of-reach reach.

Next, the variation pattern at the time of deviation is determined (S309). Here, the display time of the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the fluctuation time of the third symbol until the third symbol display device 81 stops at the lost symbol is determined. At this time, similarly to the processing of S307, the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203 is compared with the variation pattern table 202d, and the variation pattern (variation pattern) corresponding to the value of the variation type counter CS1 time).

When the process of S307 or the process of S309 is completed, next, a variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 of the variation pattern determined in the process of S307 or S309 is set (S310). Next, a counter value corresponding to the variation time of the current variation pattern is set in the variation time counter (S311). Then, a stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type set in the process of S306 or S308 is set (S312). These variation pattern command and stop type command are stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203 and transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 in the processing of S1001 of the main processing (see FIG. 30). When the process of S312 ends, the process returns to the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 22).

Next, the starting winning process (S105) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 24 is a flow chart showing the starting winning process (S105). This starting winning process (S105) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 21), and determines whether or not there is a winning (starting winning) to the first ball entrance 64 and the second ball entrance 640. , when there is a start winning a prize, processing for executing the holding processing of the values indicated by the various counters.

When the starting winning process is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the game ball has won the first ball entrance 64 (starting winning) (S401). Here, the ball entering the first ball entrance 64 is detected over three times of timer interrupt processing. Then, when it is determined that the game ball has entered the first ball entrance 64 (S401: Yes), the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e (the number of times of holding variable display in the special symbol N1) is acquired. (S402). Then, it is determined whether or not the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is less than the upper limit (4 in this embodiment) (S403).

Then, whether the game ball has won the first ball entrance 64 (S401: No), or even if the game ball has won the first ball entrance 64, the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e (N1) is not less than 4 (S403: No), the process proceeds to S407. On the other hand, there is a winning to the first ball entrance 64 (S401: Yes), and if the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is less than 4 (S403: Yes), the first special 1 is added to the value (N1) of the symbol reserved ball number counter 203e (S404). Then, a reserved ball number command indicating the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e changed by the calculation is set (S405).

The pending ball number command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is executed by the MPU 201 during the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 30), which will be described later. , is sent to the audio ramp controller 113 . When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball number command, it extracts the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e from the reserved ball number command, and stores the extracted value in the first special symbol reserved ball number counter of the RAM 223. 223b.

After setting the pending ball number command by the process of S405, the values of the first winning random number counter C1, the first winning type counter C2, and the variation type counter CS1 updated in S103 of the timer interrupt process described above are stored in the RAM 203. It is stored in the first area among the empty reservation areas (reservation first area to reservation fourth area) of the first special symbol reservation ball storage area 203a (S406), and the process proceeds to S407. In the process of S406, the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is referred to, and if the value is 0, the first reserved area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the second reserved area is the first area, if the value is 2, the third reserved area is the first area, and if the value is 3, the fourth reserved area is the first area.

In the processing of S407, it is determined whether or not the game ball has won the second ball entrance 640 (start winning) (S407). In this process as well, similarly to the process of S401, the ball entering the second ball entrance 640 is detected over three timer interrupt processes. Then, when it is determined that the game ball has won the second ball entrance 640 (S407: Yes), the value of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203f (number of times N2 of holding variable display in special symbols) is acquired. (S408), it is determined whether or not the value (N2) of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is less than the upper limit (4 in this embodiment) (S409).

Then, there is no winning to the second ball entrance 640 (S407: No), or even if there is a winning to the second ball entrance 640, the value (N2) of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203f If it is determined that it is not less than 4 (that is, it is 4) (S409: No), the process proceeds to S413. On the other hand, there is a winning to the second ball entrance 640 (S407: Yes), and if the value (N2) of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is less than 4 (S409: Yes), the second special 1 is added to the value (N2) of the symbol reserved ball number counter 203f (S410). Then, a reserved ball number command indicating the value of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203f changed by the calculation is set (S411).

The pending ball number command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is executed by the MPU 201 during the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 30), which will be described later. , is sent to the audio ramp controller 113 . When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball number command, it extracts the value of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203f from the reserved ball number command, and stores the extracted value in the second special symbol reserved ball number counter of the RAM 223. 223c.

After setting the pending ball number command by the process of S411, each value of the first hit random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2 and the variation type counter CS1 updated in the process of S103 of the timer interrupt process described above is Stored in the first area among the empty reservation areas (reservation first area to reservation fourth area) of the second special symbol reservation ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203 (S412), and proceeds to the processing of S413. In the process of S412, as in the process of S406, the value of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is referred to, and if the value is 0, the first reserved area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the second reserved area is the first area, if the value is 2, the third reserved area is the first area, and if the value is 3, the fourth reserved area is the first area.

In the processing of S413, a prefetching process is executed for prefetching success or failure from the various counter values acquired based on the start winning (S413), and the process ends. Details of this prefetch processing will be described with reference to FIG.

FIG. 25 is a flow chart showing the prefetching process (S413). In this look-ahead processing (S413), first, it is determined whether or not a new ball entering the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640 has been detected in the current starting winning processing (see FIG. 24). (S501), if no new ball is detected (S501: No), this process is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S501 that a new ball has been detected (S501: Yes), then whether the number of held balls corresponding to the detected ball is the upper limit (that is, 4). It is determined whether or not it is (S502), and if it is determined that it is the upper limit value (S502: Yes), this processing ends. On the other hand, in the process of S502, if it is determined that the number of pending balls is less than the upper limit (S502: No), whether the timing to start the variable display based on the incoming ball is the probability variable state of the special symbol (S503). In the process of S503, it is determined whether or not the variable probability state is obtained according to the current game state and the result of the read-ahead of the reserved balls that were reserved before the current ball entry. Specifically, if the big hit is not included in the held balls, the current game state and the timing of starting the variable display based on the entered ball detected this time match, so the current game state is the probability variable state. It is determined that In addition, when a jackpot is included in the reserved balls, there is a possibility that the game state is changed according to the type of the jackpot. Specifically, when the variable probability jackpot is reserved, the state is shifted to the variable probability state after the jackpot, and when the normal jackpot is reserved, the state is shifted to the normal state after the jackpot. Taking these factors into consideration, it is determined whether or not the start timing of the variation display based on the hit ball detected this time is in the probability variation state.

In the processing of S503, if it is determined that the start time of the variation based on the detected ball entry this time is the probability variable state of the special symbol (S503: Yes), the type of the entrance where the ball is detected and the high probability time Based on the first winning random number table (see 202a2 in FIG. 9(b)), the lottery result based on the current ball entry is obtained (S504), and the process proceeds to S506. On the other hand, if it is determined that the fluctuation start time is a low probability state of special symbols (S503: No), the type of entrance where the ball is detected and the first random number table for low probability (Fig. 9 202a1 in (b)), the lottery result based on the current ball entry is acquired (S505), and the process proceeds to S506.

In the process of S506 that is executed after the process of S504 or S505, a winning information command is set based on the type of entrance where the current ball is detected and the lottery result obtained in the process of S504 or S505. (S506), this processing ends. The winning information command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is executed by the MPU 201 during the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 30), which will be described later. It is sent to the audio lamp controller 113 . Upon receiving the prize winning information command, the sound lamp control device 113 stores the type of ball entrance notified by the prize winning information command and the lottery result in the prize winning information storage area 223a.

Next, referring to FIG. 26, the normal symbol variation process (S106) executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 26 is a flow chart showing this normal symbol variation process (S106). This normal design variation processing (S106) is executed in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 21), and the variation display of the normal design (second design) performed in the second design display device 83, the second entrance This is a process for controlling the opening time of the electric accessary 640a associated with 640, and the like.

In the normal symbol variation process (S106), first, it is determined whether or not the normal symbol (second symbol) is currently hitting (S601). During the winning of the normal symbol (second symbol), the second symbol display device 83 is displaying the winning, and the opening and closing control of the electric accessory 640a attached to the second ball entrance 640 is performed. including while As a result of the determination, if the normal symbol (second symbol) is in the process of winning (S601: Yes), this process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, if the normal symbol (second symbol) is not hit (S601: No), it is determined whether or not the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is fluctuating (S602), and the second symbol display device is determined. If the display mode of 83 is not fluctuating (S602: No), the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203g (the number of times of suspension of variable display in normal symbols M) is obtained (S603). Next, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203g is greater than 0 (S604), and if the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203g is 0 (S604: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if the value (M) of the normal design reserved ball number counter 203g is not 0 (S604: Yes), the value (M) of the normal design reserved ball number counter 203g is subtracted by 1 (S605).

Next, the data stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203d is shifted (S606). In the process of S606, the data stored in the first reservation area to the fourth reservation area of the normal symbol reservation ball storage area 203d are sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, the first holding area → execution area, the second holding area → the first holding area, the third holding area → the second holding area, the fourth holding area → the third holding area, etc. Shift data. After shifting the data, the value of the second hit random number counter C4 stored in the execution area of the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203d is obtained (S607).

Next, it is determined whether or not it is normal symbol time saving state (S608). In addition, as described above, in the pachinko machine 10 in the present embodiment, whether the probability variation flag 203h is on, or if the value of the time saving medium counter 203i is 1 or more, it is determined that the normal symbol time saving state Then, if the variable probability flag 203h is off and the value of the time saving medium counter 203i is 0, it is determined that the game is in the normal state of the normal symbol.

In the process of S608, when it is determined that the time saving state of the normal symbol (S608: Yes), the value of the second per random number counter C4 obtained in the process of S607, the random number table per normal symbol for high probability time Based on this, the lottery result as to whether or not the normal symbol wins is obtained (S609). Specifically, the value of the second hit random number counter C4 is compared with the random number value stored in the normal per symbol random number table for high probability. As described above, if the value of the second hit type counter C4 is in the range of "5 to 204", it is determined that it is a hit of the normal symbol, and if it is in the range of "0 to 4,205 to 239", It is determined that it is out of the normal pattern (see 202c2 in FIG. 10(b)).

In the process of S608, when it is determined that the normal symbol is not in the time saving state (S608: No), the process proceeds to S610. In the process of S610, since the pachinko machine 10 is in the special symbol jackpot or the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the normal symbol, the value of the second winning random number counter C4 acquired in the process of S607 and the low A lottery result as to whether or not the normal symbol wins is obtained based on the normal symbol winning random number table for the probability time (S610). Specifically, the value of the second hit random number counter C4 is compared with the random number value stored in the normal per symbol random number table for low probability. As described above, if the value of the second hit type counter C4 is in the range of "5 to 28", it is determined that it is a hit of the normal symbol, and if it is in the range of 0 to 4, 29 to 239", it is normal It is determined that the design is out of line (see 202c1 in FIG. 10(b)).

Next, it is determined whether the lottery result of the normal symbol acquired by the process of S609 or S610 is a normal symbol hit (S611), and when it is determined that it is a normal symbol hit (S611: Yes), The display mode at the time of winning is set (S612). In the process of S612, after the variable display in the second symbol display device 83 is completed, the symbol "O" is set to be illuminated as the stop symbol (second symbol), and the process proceeds to S614. . On the other hand, in the processing of S611, when it is determined that the normal symbol is not hit (the normal symbol is out) (S611: No), the display mode at the time of loss is set (S613). In the process of S613, after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is completed, the symbol "x" is set to be lit and displayed as the stop symbol (second symbol), and the process proceeds to S614. .

In the processing of S614 executed after the processing of S612 or S613, it is determined whether the time saving state of the normal symbol (probability variation flag 203h is ON, or the time saving counter 203i is 1 or more) (S614), normally If the symbol is in the time-saving state (S614: Yes), the variation time of the variation display on the second symbol display device 83 is set to 3 seconds (S615), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that it is not a normal symbol time saving state (that is, the probability variation flag 203h is off, and the value of the time saving medium counter 203i is 0) (S614: No), the second symbol display device 83 The fluctuation time of the fluctuation display is set to 30 seconds (S616), and this process is terminated.

Also, in the process of S602, if the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is changing (S602: Yes), whether or not the variation time of the variation display executed in the second symbol display device 83 has elapsed is determined (S617). It should be noted that the variable time here is the time set in advance by the process of S615 or the process of S616 before the second symbol display device 83 starts the variable display.

In the process of S617, if it is determined that the variable time has not elapsed (S617: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the processing of S617, if the variation time of the variation display being executed has passed (S617: Yes), the stop display of the second symbol display device 83 is set (S618). In the process of S618, if the normal symbol lottery is won and the display mode is set by the process of S612, the "○" symbol as the second symbol is stopped and displayed (lighted up) on the second symbol display device 83. displayed). On the other hand, if the lottery for the normal symbol is lost and the display mode is set by the process of S613, the "x" symbol as the second symbol is stopped and displayed (lighted up) on the second symbol display device 83. is set to When the stop display is set by the process of S618, when the second symbol display update process (see S1008) of the main process (see FIG. 30) is executed next, the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is changed. After the game ends, the stop symbol (second symbol) is stopped (lighted up) on the second symbol display device 83 in the display mode set in the process of S612 or S613.

Next, when the variation display being executed in the second symbol display device 83 is started, whether the result of the normal symbol lottery (this lottery result) performed by the normal symbol variation process is a hit of the normal symbol. is determined (S619). If the lottery result of this time is a hit of the normal design (S619: Yes), then, whether it is in the time saving state of the normal design (that is, the probability variation flag 203h is ON, or the time saving medium counter 203i is 1 or more) is determined (S620), and if it is not in the time saving state (S620: No), the opening time and the number of times of opening of the electric accessory 640a attached to the second entrance 640 are set to "0.2 seconds x 1 time" After setting (S621), the process proceeds to S623. On the other hand, in the processing of S620, if it is determined that the normal pattern is in the time saving mode (S620: Yes), the opening time and the number of opening times of the electric accessory 640a associated with the second entrance 640 are set to "1 second x 2 times” (S622), and the process proceeds to S623.

In the process of S623, the opening time and the number of times of opening determined in the process of S621 or S622 are set (S623), and the process ends. When the opening/closing control start of the electric accessory 640a is set by the process of S623, when the electric accessory opening/closing process (see S1006) of the main process (see FIG. 30) is executed next, the electric accessory 640a The opening/closing control is started, and the opening/closing control of the electric accessory 640a is continued until the opening time and the number of times of opening set in the processing of S621 or S622 are completed. On the other hand, in the process of S619, if the lottery result of this time is out of the normal symbol (S619: No), each process of S620 to S623 is skipped, and this process ends.

Next, the through gate passage processing (S107) executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 27 is a flow chart showing this through gate passage processing (S107). This through gate passage processing (S107) is executed in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 21) to determine whether or not a game ball has passed through the normal ball entrance (through gate) 67, and determines whether or not the game ball has passed. This is a process for acquiring and holding the value indicated by the second winning random number counter C4 when there is.

In the through gate passing process, first, it is determined whether or not the game ball has passed through the normal ball entrance 67 (S701). Here, passage of a game ball through the normal ball entrance 67 is detected over three times of timer interrupt processing. Then, when it is determined that the game ball has passed through the normal ball entrance 67 (S701: Yes), the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203g (the number of times of suspension of variable display in normal symbols M) is obtained (S702). . Then, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203g is less than the upper limit (4 in this embodiment) (S703).

The game ball has not passed through the normal ball entrance 67 (S701: No), or even if the game ball has passed through the normal ball entrance 67, the value (M) of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203g is 4. If it is not less than (S703: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, if the game ball passes through the normal ball entrance 67 (S701: Yes) and the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203g is less than 4 (S703: Yes), the number of normal symbol reserved balls The value (M) of the counter 203g is incremented by 1 (S704). Then, the value of the second hit random number counter C4 updated in S103 of the timer interrupt process described above is set to the first among the empty reservation areas (reservation first area to reservation fourth area) of the normal symbol reservation ball storage area 203d of the RAM 203. area (S705), and the process ends. In addition, in the process of S705, the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203g is referred to, and if the value is 0, the first reserved area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the second reserved area is the first area, if the value is 2, the third reserved area is the first area, and if the value is 3, the fourth reserved area is the first area.

FIG. 28 is a flow chart showing NMI interrupt processing executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 . The NMI interrupt process is a process executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 when the pachinko machine 10 is powered off due to power failure or the like. By this NMI interrupt processing, information on occurrence of power failure is stored in the RAM 203 . That is, when the pachinko machine 10 is powered off due to a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 . Then, the MPU 201 interrupts the control being executed, starts the NMI interrupt processing, stores the power interruption occurrence information in the RAM 203 as the setting of the power interruption occurrence information (S801), and ends the NMI interruption processing. do.

The NMI interrupt process described above is also executed in the payout launch control device 111 in the same manner, and information on the occurrence of power failure is stored in the RAM 213 by the NMI interrupt process. That is, when the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to a power failure or the like, a power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 in the payout control device 111, and the MPU 211 interrupts the control being executed. Then, NMI interrupt processing is started.

Next, with reference to FIG. 29, startup processing executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 when main controller 110 is powered on will be described. FIG. 29 is a flow chart showing this start-up process. This start-up process is started by a reset when the power is turned on. In the start-up process, first, an initial setting process is executed upon power-on (S901). For example, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. Next, in order to wait for the sub-side control devices (peripheral control devices such as the sound lamp control device 113 and the payout control device 111) to become operable, a wait process (one second in this embodiment) is executed. (S902). Then, access to the RAM 203 is permitted (S903).

After that, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) provided in the power supply device 115 is turned on (S904), and if it is turned on (S904: Yes), the process proceeds to S915. On the other hand, if the RAM erasing switch 122 is not turned on (S904: No), it is determined whether or not power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S905), and if not stored (S905: No). , there is a possibility that the process at the time of the previous power shutdown did not end normally, so in this case as well, the process proceeds to S915.

If the power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S905: Yes), the RAM determination value is calculated (S906). If the determination value does not match the RAM determination value saved at the time of power shutdown, the backed up data is destroyed. Note that the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in the work area address of the RAM 203, as will be described later in the processing of S1015 in FIG. Instead of the RAM judgment value, the effectiveness of the backup may be judged based on whether or not the keyword written in the predetermined area of the RAM 203 is correctly saved.

In the process of S915, a payout initialization command is transmitted in order to initialize the payout control device 111, which is a sub-side control device (peripheral control device) (S915). When the payout control device 111 receives this payout initialization command, it clears the area (work area) other than the stack area of the RAM 213, sets the initial value, and becomes ready to start the game ball payout control. After transmitting the payout initialization command, main controller 110 executes the initialization process of RAM 203 (S916, S917).

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, the power is turned on while the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed when the RAM data is initialized when the power is turned on, such as when the hall starts operating. Therefore, if the RAM erasing switch 122 is pushed during the start-up process, the RAM initialization process (S916, S917) is executed. Also, if power failure occurrence information is not set, or if a backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM judgment value (checksum value, etc.), the initialization processing of the RAM 203 (S916, S917) is similarly executed. . In the RAM initialization process (S916, S917), the used area of the RAM 203 is cleared to 0 (S916), and then the initial value of the RAM 203 is set (S917). After the process of S917 ends, the process proceeds to S910.

On the other hand, if the RAM erasing switch 122 is not turned on (S904: No), power failure occurrence information is stored (S905: Yes), and the RAM determination value (checksum value, etc.) is normal ( S907: Yes), while retaining the data backed up in the RAM 203, clear the power failure occurrence information (S908). Next, the sub-side control device (peripheral control device) transmits a payout return command at the time of power recovery for returning to the game state at the time of drive power interruption (S909), and the process proceeds to S910. When the payout control device 111 receives this payout return command, the game ball payout control can be started while retaining the data stored in the RAM 213 .

In the processing of S910, an effect permission command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113, and the execution of various effects is permitted to the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114. FIG. After the process of S910 is completed, the probability variation flag 203h, the time saving counter 203i, the entering ball waiting flag 203j, and the big hit flag 203m are read (S911), and the read probability variation flag 203h, the time saving counter 203i, the entering ball waiting flag 203j, sets a state command for notifying the gaming state indicated by the jackpot middle flag 203m (S912). After the processing of S912 is completed, the drive start of the rotating body motor 670c is set (S913), the interrupt is permitted (S914), and the process proceeds to the main processing described later. The drive setting of the rotating body motor 670c set by the process of S913 is not changed until the power is turned off. As a result, while the gaming machine is powered on, the rotating member 670a can always be rotated at a constant speed. Therefore, in the jackpot standby state, the game ball is placed aiming at the timing at which the rotation position of the rotating member 670a is arranged so as not to hinder the game ball from flowing down (flying) in the direction of the operation winning opening 660 with respect to the player. Since the ball can be shot, the player can enjoy shooting the game ball with good timing. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In addition, in the first embodiment, the rotating member 670a is configured to continue to rotate at a constant speed while the game machine is powered on, but the present invention is not limited to this. In the jackpot standby state, the rotational position of the rotating member 670a may be changed between an arrangement that prevents the entry of a ball into the operation winning opening 660 and an arrangement that does not interfere with it. Only the rotating member 670a may be rotated at a constant speed, and the operation may be stopped in other states.

In addition, in the first embodiment, the rotation speed of the rotating member 670a is constant, but this is not restrictive, and the rotation speed and rotation direction are changed randomly or regularly. It may be configured to be variable. By configuring in this way, the degree of difficulty of entering the game ball into the operating winning hole 660 becomes higher, so when the game ball enters the operating winning hole 660 as intended, the player is more likely to enter. can please.

Next, with reference to FIG. 30, the main processing executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 after the start-up processing described above will be described. FIG. 30 is a flow chart showing this main process. Main processing of the game is executed in this main processing. As an overview, each process of S1001 to S1008 is executed as a periodical process with a period of 4 ms, and the counter update process of S1011 and S1012 is executed in the remaining time.

In the main process, first, during execution of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 21), output data such as commands stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203 is transmitted to each sub-side control device (peripheral control device). (S1001). Specifically, the presence or absence of winning detection information detected in the switch reading process of S101 in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 21) is determined, and if there is winning detection information, the payout control device 111 corresponds to the number of winning balls. Send a prize ball command to In addition, it transmits to the sound lamp control device 113 the reserved ball number command set in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 22) and the starting winning process (see FIG. 24). Also, the winning information command set in the starting winning process is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 . Also, when the game state is changed, a state command for notifying the change of the game state is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 . Further, by this external output processing, the variation pattern command, the stop type command, etc. necessary for the variation display of the third pattern by the third pattern display device 81 are transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 . Also, the opening command, round number command, and ending command set in the jackpot control process (see FIG. 32) are transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 . In addition, when shooting a game ball, a ball shooting signal is transmitted to the shooting control device 112 .

Next, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is updated (S1002). Specifically, the variation type counter CS1 is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (198 in this embodiment). Then, the updated value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM203.

When the update of the variation type counter CS1 is finished, the ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (S1003), then in the jackpot standby state, the entry of the ball into the operation winning opening 660 is monitored, A jackpot start process is executed for starting a jackpot when a ball entering the operation winning opening 660 is detected (S1004). The details of this jackpot start process (S1004) will be described later with reference to FIG. When the processing of S1004 is completed, next, in the case of the special symbol jackpot state, jackpot control for executing the jackpot effect and opening or closing the right specific prize winning port 65a and the left specific prize winning port 650a of the variable winning device 65 Processing is executed (S1005). In the jackpot control process, the right specific prize winning port 65a (opening/closing door 65f1) or the left specific prize winning port 650a is opened for each round of the jackpot, and it is determined whether the maximum opening time has elapsed or whether a specified number of game balls have won. do. Then, when any one of these conditions is established, the right specific winning opening 65a (opening/closing door 65f1) or the left specific winning opening 650a is closed. Here, in this embodiment, the jackpot control process (S1005) is executed in the main process, but it may be executed in the timer interrupt process. The details of this jackpot control process (S1005) will be described later with reference to FIG.

When the processing of S1005 ends, next, an electric accessory opening/closing process for controlling opening/closing of the electric accessory 640a associated with the second ball entrance 640 is executed (S1006). In the electric accessary product opening/closing process, when the opening/closing control start of the electric accessary product 640a is set by the processing of S623 of the normal symbol variation processing (see FIG. 26), the opening/closing control of the electric accessary product 640a is started. The opening/closing control of the electric accessory 640a is continued until the opening time and number of times set in the processing of S621 or S622 in the normal symbol variation processing (see FIG. 26) are completed.

Next, a first symbol display update process for updating the display of the first symbol display device 37 is executed (S1007). In the first symbol display update process, when a variation pattern is set by the process of S307 or the process of S309 of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 23), the variation display corresponding to the variation pattern is displayed as the first symbol display. Start at device 37 . In this embodiment, among the LEDs 37a of the first pattern display device 37, from the start of the variation until the variation time elapses, for example, if the currently lit LED is red, the red LED is extinguished. At the same time, the green LED is lit, and if the green LED is lit, the green LED is extinguished and the blue LED is lit, and if the blue LED is lit, the blue LED is extinguished. At the same time, the red LED is lit.

Note that the main process is executed every 4 milliseconds, but if the lighting color of the LED is changed each time the main process is executed, the player cannot confirm the change in the lighting color of the LED. Therefore, a counter (not shown) is counted by 1 each time the main process is executed so that the player can confirm the change in the lighting color of the LED, and when the counter reaches 100, the LED change the lighting color of That is, the lighting color of the LED is changed every 0.4 seconds. The value of the counter is reset to 0 when the lighting color of the LED is changed.

In addition, in the first symbol display update process, when the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern set by the process of S307 or the process of S309 of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 23) ends, the first symbol display device The variable display being executed in 37 is ended, and the stop symbol (first symbol) is displayed as the first symbol in the display mode set by the process of S306 or S308 of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 23). Stop display (illumination display) is performed on the device 37 .

Next, a second symbol display update process for updating the display of the second symbol display device 83 is executed (S1008). In the second symbol display update process, when the variation time of the normal symbol (second symbol) is set by the process of S615 or the process of S616 of the normal symbol variation start process (see FIG. 26), the second symbol display device 83 , the variable display is started. As a result, in the second symbol display device 83, a variable display is performed in which the symbol "O" and the symbol "X" as the normal symbol (second symbol) are alternately lit. Further, in the second symbol display update process, when the stop display of the second symbol display device 83 is set by the process of S618 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 26), it is executed in the second symbol display device 83. After finishing the current variation display, the stop symbol (second symbol) is stop-displayed on the second symbol display device 83 in the display mode set by the process of S612 or S613 of the normal symbol variation start process (see FIG. 26). (lit display).

After that, it is determined whether power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1009). SG1 is not output and the power is not cut off. Therefore, in such a case, it is determined whether or not it is time to execute the next main process, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 milliseconds in this embodiment) has elapsed since the start of the main process (S1010). ), if the predetermined time has already passed (S1010: Yes), the process proceeds to S1001, and the above-described processes after S1001 are repeatedly executed.

On the other hand, if the predetermined time (4 milliseconds) has not yet passed since the start of the main processing this time (S1010: No), the time until the predetermined time, that is, until the execution timing of the next main processing is reached. Within the remaining time, the first initial value random number counter CINI1, the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and the fluctuation type counter CS1 are repeatedly updated (S1011, S1012).

First, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S1011). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter values reach their maximum values (both 399 in this embodiment). Then, the updated values of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203, respectively. Next, the change type counter CS1 is updated by the same method as the processing of S1002 (S1012).

Here, since the execution time of each process of S1001 to S1008 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main process is not constant and fluctuates. Therefore, by repeatedly updating the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 using the remaining time, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 (that is, , the initial value of the first winning random number counter C1, and the initial value of the second winning random number counter C4) can be randomly updated, and similarly, the variation type counter CS1 can also be randomly updated.

In addition, in the process of S1009, if information on occurrence of power failure is stored in the RAM 203 (S1009: Yes), the power is shut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the power is turned off, and the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252. As a result, the NMI interrupt process of FIG. 28 has been executed, so the power-off process after S1013 is executed. First, to prohibit the occurrence of each interrupt processing (S1013), to other control devices (peripheral control devices such as the payout control device 111 and the sound lamp control device 113) a power-off command indicating that the power has been cut off and transmit (S1014). Then, a RAM determination value is calculated and stored (S1015), access to the RAM 203 is prohibited (S1016), and the infinite loop continues until the power supply is completely cut off and processing cannot be executed. Here, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in the stack area and work area backed up in the RAM 203 .

It should be noted that the processing of S1009 is performed at the end of a series of processing corresponding to the game state change performed in S1001 to S1008, or at the timing of the end of one cycle of the processing of S1011 and S1012 performed within the remaining time. It is running. Therefore, in the main processing of the main controller 110, information on the occurrence of power failure is confirmed at the timing when each setting is completed. It can start from the processing of S1001. That is, the process can be started from the process of S1001, as in the case of initialization in the start-up process. Therefore, even if the contents of each register used by the MPU 201 are not saved in the stack area or the value of the stack pointer is not saved in the processing when the power is turned off, the initial setting processing (see S901 in FIG. 29) , the stack pointer is set to a predetermined value (initial value), the processing can be started from S1001. Therefore, the control load on the main controller 110 can be reduced, and accurate control can be performed without the main controller 110 malfunctioning or running out of control.

Next, details of the jackpot start process (S1004) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. As described above, this jackpot start process (S1004) is a process for monitoring the entry of a ball into the operation winning opening 660 and starting the jackpot when the entry is detected.

In this jackpot start process (see FIG. 31), first, it is determined whether the entry standby flag 203j is on (S1101), and if it is determined that the entry standby flag 203j is off (S1101: No), Since it means that the current state is not the jackpot waiting state, the processing is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, in the process of S1101, if it is determined that the entering ball standby flag 203j is ON (S1101: Yes), it means that the current jackpot standby state is in progress. It is determined whether or not an entering ball has been detected (S1102). In the process of S1102, if it is determined that the ball entering the operation winning hole 660 has not been detected (S1102: No), it is not the start timing of the jackpot, so the process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, in the processing of S1102, if it is determined that the ball has entered the operation winning opening 660 (S1102: Yes), the start of the big win is set, and the big win start flag 203k is set to ON (S1103). ). Then, by setting the incoming ball waiting flag 203j to OFF, the big win waiting state is terminated (S1104), and the processing is ended.

Next, the jackpot control process (S1005) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 32 is a flow chart showing this jackpot control process (S1005). This jackpot control process (S1005) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 30). 65a, and processing for opening or closing the left specific winning port 650a.

In the jackpot control process (see FIG. 32), first, it is determined whether the jackpot start flag 203k is ON (ie, whether the jackpot start is set) (S1201). In the process of S1201, when it is determined that the jackpot start flag 203k is ON (S1201: Yes), an opening command for notifying the start of the jackpot opening period is set (S1202). The opening command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is executed by the MPU 201 during the external output processing (S1001) of the main processing (see FIG. 30). It is sent towards device 113 . Upon receiving the opening command, the audio lamp control device 113 transmits a display opening command to the display control device 114 . When the display opening command is received by the display control device 114, the third pattern display device 81 starts the opening effect. In addition, in the first embodiment, the opening period is 0.1 seconds, and one round is started with almost no time difference after detecting the entry of the game ball into the operation winning opening 660 (the opening and closing door 65f1 is opened). ) configuration. By configuring in this way, the game ball flowing down the upper surface of the opening/closing door 65f1 can be almost entered into the right specific winning hole 65a when the ball enters the operation winning hole 660. Therefore, it is possible for the player to easily determine the timing of entering the game ball into the operation winning hole 660 . After the process of S1202, while setting the flag 203m in a big hit to ON, the big-hit start flag 203k is set to OFF (S1203), and this process is complete|finished.

On the other hand, in the process of S1201, when it is determined that the jackpot flag 203j is off (S1201: No), it is determined whether the jackpot flag 203m is on (whether or not a special symbol jackpot is in progress) (S1204). . In the process of S1204, when it is determined that the jackpot flag 203m is off (the special symbol jackpot is not in progress) (S1204: No), this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S1204, if it is determined that the big hit flag 203m is ON (S1204: Yes), it is determined whether it is the start timing of a new round (S1205), and whether it is the start timing of a new round If (S1205: Yes), the opening of the specific winning opening corresponding to the number of rounds is set (S1206). More specifically, if this is the start timing of the first round, the opening/closing door 65f1 is opened to set the right specific winning opening 65a to an open state, and if it is other than the first round, the left specific winning opening 650a is set. to open. When the process of S1206 is finished, next, a round number command indicating the number of rounds to be newly started is set (S1207), and this process is finished. The round number command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in the external output processing (S1001) of the main processing (see FIG. 30) executed by the MPU 201, the sound lamp It is transmitted toward the control device 113 . When the audio ramp controller 113 receives the round number command, it extracts the round number from the round number command. Then, a display round number command corresponding to the extracted number of rounds is transmitted to the display control device 114 . When the display round number command is received by the display control device 114, the third pattern display device 81 starts a new round effect.

On the other hand, in the processing of S1205, if it is determined that it is not the time to start a new round (S1205: No), it is determined whether the conditions for closing the specific winning opening (the right specific winning opening 65a or the left specific winning opening 650a) are established. Determine (S1208). Specifically, if the current round period is one round, a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed after opening the right specific winning opening 65a, or the game is played after opening the right specific winning opening 65a. When it is detected that two or more balls have entered the right specific winning hole 65a, it is determined that the closing condition is met. Also, if the current is a round period other than the first round, a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) has passed after opening the left specific winning opening 650a, or after opening the left specific winning opening 650a When it is detected that 10 or more game balls have entered the left specific winning hole 650a, it is determined that the closing condition is met.

In the processing of S1208, when it is determined that the closing condition of the specific winning opening (the right specific winning opening 65a or the left specific winning opening 650a) is met (S1208: Yes), the specific winning opening set in the open state (Right specific winning opening 65a or left specific winning opening 650a) is set to be closed (S1209), and this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S1208, when it is determined that the condition for closing the specific winning opening is not satisfied (S1208: No), it is determined whether it is time to start the ending effect (S1210). Specifically, when all the rounds in the special game state in which a larger amount of prize balls are paid out than in the normal state are completed, it is determined that it is time to start the ending effect.

In the processing of S1210, when it is determined that it is time to start the ending effect (S1210: Yes), an ending command is set (S1211), and this processing ends. The ending command set here is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and is executed by the MPU 201 during the external output processing (S1001) of the main processing (see FIG. 30). It is sent towards device 113 . When receiving the ending command, the audio lamp control device 113 transmits a display ending command to the display control device 114 . When the display control device 114 receives the display ending command, the third symbol display device 81 starts the ending effect.

In the process of S1210, if it is determined that it is not the start timing of the ending effect (S1210: No), then it is determined whether it is the end timing of the ending effect (S1212), and it is determined that it is not the end time of the ending effect. If so (S1212: No), this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S1212, if it is determined that it is the end timing of the ending effect (S1212: Yes), it is determined whether or not the current big win is a probability variable big win (any of the big wins A, B, D, E). It is determined (S1213).

In the processing of S1213, when it is determined that the probability variable jackpot is not (that is, the normal jackpot) (S1213: No), by overwriting the value of the counter 203i during time saving with 100, 100 times of normal symbols after the jackpot is completed. A time period is set to be given (S1214), and the process proceeds to S1216. On the other hand, in the process of S1213, if it is determined that the current jackpot is a probability variation jackpot (S1213: Yes), by turning on the probability variation flag 203h, the probability variation state of the special symbol is given after the end of the jackpot (S1215), and the process proceeds to S1216.

In the process of S1214, or in the process of S1216 executed after the process of S1215, the gaming state after the jackpot is completed (the variable state of the special symbol and the time saving state of the normal symbol, or the low probability state of the special symbol, And set a state command for notifying the voice lamp control device 113 (S1216), set the end of the jackpot (S1217), and end this process.

<Regarding control processing of the audio ramp control device in the first embodiment>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIGS. 33 to 38. FIG. The processing of the MPU 221 is roughly classified into startup processing that is activated upon power-on and main processing that is executed after the startup processing.

First, referring to FIG. 33, start-up processing executed by MPU 221 in sound lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 33 is a flow chart showing this startup process. This start-up process is started when the power is turned on.

When the start-up process is executed, first, an initial setting process is executed upon power-on (S4001). Specifically, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. After that, depending on whether or not the power-off processing flag is turned on, the power-off processing in S4117 (see FIG. 34) is caused by a momentary voltage drop (instantaneous power failure, so-called "instantaneous power failure"). ) is started during execution (S4002). As will be described later with reference to FIG. 34, when the audio lamp control device 113 receives a power-off command from the main controller 110 (see S4114 in FIG. 34), it executes power-off processing in S4117. Before the power-off processing is executed, the power-off processing flag is turned on, and after the power-off processing is completed, the power-off processing flag is turned off. Therefore, whether or not the power-off processing of S4117 is being executed can be determined by the state of the power-off processing in-progress flag.

If the power-off processing flag is off (S4002: No), the startup process this time was started after the power was completely shut off, or after a momentary power failure occurred and the power was shut off in S4117. Either it was started after the execution of the process was completed, or it was started when only the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 was reset due to noise (without receiving a power off command from the main controller 110). be. Therefore, in these cases, it is checked whether or not the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (S4003).

Destruction of data in the RAM 223 is confirmed as follows. That is, data as a keyword of "55AAh" is written in a specific area of the RAM 223 by the process of S4006. Therefore, the data stored in the specific area is checked, and if the data is "55AAh", there is no data destruction in the RAM 223. Conversely, if it is not "55AAh", it can be confirmed that the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed. If data destruction of RAM223 is confirmed (S4003: Yes), it will transfer to S4004 and will start initialization of RAM223. On the other hand, if destruction of data in the RAM 223 is not confirmed (S4003: No), the process proceeds to S4008.

It should be noted that if the startup process this time is started after the power is completely cut off, the keyword "55AAh" is not stored in the specific area of the RAM 223 (the memory of the RAM 223 is lost due to the power cut). ), it is determined that the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (S4003: Yes), and the process proceeds to S4004. On the other hand, whether the current start-up processing was started after a momentary power failure occurred and after the execution of the power-off processing in S4117 was completed, or only the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 was reset due to noise or the like. If the process is started after the above, the keyword "55AAh" is stored in the specific area of the RAM 223, so the data in the RAM 223 is determined to be normal (S4003: No), and the process proceeds to S4008. .

In the process of S4002, if the power-off processing flag is ON (S4002: Yes), the startup process this time is after a momentary power failure occurs, and during the execution of the power-off process of S4117, It is started when the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 is reset. In such a case, the memory state of the RAM 223 is not necessarily correct because the power-off process is in progress. Therefore, since control cannot be continued in such a case, the process proceeds to S4004 and initialization of the RAM 223 is started.

In the process of S4004, the entire storage area of the RAM 223 is checked (S4004), and then it is determined whether each storage area of the RAM 223 is normal (S4005). As a checking method, first, "0FFh" is written for each byte, read for each byte to check whether it is "0FFh", and if it is "0FFh", it is determined as normal. Such writing and confirmation for each byte is performed in the order of "0FFh", "55h", "0AAh", and "00h". All storage areas of the RAM 223 are cleared to 0 by this read/write check of the RAM 223 .

In the process of S4005, if it is determined that the read/write check is normal for all storage areas of the RAM 223 (S4005: Yes), the keyword "55AAh" is written in the specific area of the RAM 223 to set the RAM destruction check data ( S4006), and the process proceeds to S4008. By confirming the keyword "55AAh" written in this specific area, it is checked whether or not the RAM 223 has data destruction.

On the other hand, in the process of S4005, if an abnormality in the read/write check is detected in any storage area of the RAM 223 (S4005: No), the abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified (S4007), and an infinite loop is performed until the power is shut off. . An abnormality in the RAM 223 is notified by the display lamp 34 . In addition, it is possible to output a sound by the sound output device 226 to notify the abnormality of the RAM 223, or to transmit an error command to the display control device 114 and display an error message on the third symbol display device 81. can be

In the processing of S4008, it is determined whether or not the power-off flag is turned on (S4008). The power-off flag is turned on when the power-off process of S4117 is executed (see S4117 in FIG. 34). In other words, the power-off flag is turned on before the power-off processing of S4117 is executed. This is after a power failure has occurred, and when the process is started in a state where the execution of the power-off process in S4117 has been completed. Therefore, in such a case (S4008: Yes), the work area of the RAM is cleared to initialize each process of the sound lamp control device 113 (S4009), and the initial values of the RAM 223 are set (S4010). The work area of the RAM 223 refers to an area other than the area for storing commands and the like received from the main controller 110 .

After the processing of S4010, the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 analyzes the notification contents of the state command set in the start-up processing (see FIG. 29) (S4011), and according to the analysis result, the game state storage area 223i data is updated (S4012). As a result, the game state of the pachinko machine 10 can be accurately grasped from the time the power is turned on. After the process of S4012, interrupt permission is set (S4013), and the process proceeds to the main process.

On the other hand, the process of S4008 is reached with the power-off flag turned off because the current start-up process was started after the power supply was completely shut off, for example. This is the case where the processing has been reached, or only the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 has been reset due to noise or the like (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110). Therefore, in such a case (S4008: No), S4009 for clearing the work area of the RAM 223 is skipped, the processes of S4010 to S4013 are executed, and the process proceeds to the main process.

The reason why the clearing process of S4009 is skipped is that when the process of S4008 is reached from S4004 via the process of S4006, all storage areas of the RAM 223 have already been cleared by the process of S4004, When only the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 is reset due to noise or the like and start-up processing is started, the data in the work area of the RAM 223 is saved without being cleared, so that the audio lamp control device 113 This is because the control of can be continued.

Next, with reference to FIG. 34, main processing executed by the MPU 221 in the audio ramp control device 113 after startup processing of the audio ramp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 34 is a flow chart showing this main process. When the main process is executed, first, it is determined whether or not 1 ms or more has passed since the main process was started or since the previous process of S4101 was executed (S4101). If not (S4101: No), the process proceeds to S4112 without performing the processes of S4102 to S4111. In the process of S4101, it is determined whether or not 1 ms has passed because S4102 to S4111 are mainly processes related to display (effect), and there is no need to edit in a short cycle (within 1 ms). This is because it is preferable to execute the command determination processing in S4112 and the variable display setting processing in S4113 in a short cycle. By executing the processing of S4112 in a short cycle, it is possible to prevent the command transmitted from the main controller 110 from being missed, and by executing the processing of S4113 in a short cycle, the command received by the command determination processing Based on this, it is possible to make settings related to variable production without delay.

If 1 millisecond or more has elapsed in the processing of S4101 (S4101: Yes), first, various commands for the display control device 114 set by the processing of S4103 to S4113 are transmitted to the display control device 114 ( S4102). Next, the output of each lamp is set so as to set the lighting mode of the display lamp 34 and the lighting mode of the lamp edited in the process of S4108 described later (S4103), and then the power-on notification process is executed (S4104). In the power-on notification process, when the power is turned on, it is notified that the power has been turned on for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds). will be Also, a command may be sent to the display control device 114 to notify that the power is supplied on the screen of the third pattern display device 81 . Note that if the power is not turned on, the process proceeds to S4105 without notifying by the power-on notification process.

In the process of S4105, the customer waiting effect process is executed, and then the pending number display update process is executed (S4106). In the customer waiting effect process, when the pachinko machine 10 is not played by a player for a predetermined period of time, a setting such as switching the display of the third symbol display device 81 to a title screen is performed, and the setting is used as a command for display control. It is sent to device 114 . In the pending number display update process, a process of lighting a pending lamp (not shown) according to the values of the first special symbol pending ball number counter 223b and the second special symbol pending ball number counter 223c is performed.

After that, frame button input monitoring/effect processing is executed (S4107). In this frame button input monitoring and effect processing, input as to whether or not the frame button 22 operated by the player has been pressed is monitored in order to enhance the effect of the effect, and the case where the input of the frame button 22 is confirmed is dealt with. This is a process of setting to perform production. In this process, when the operation of the frame button 22 by the player is detected, a frame button operation command is set to notify the display control device 114 that the frame button 22 has been operated.

Further, when the frame button 22 is pressed during a period in which the variable effect is not executed or during a high-speed fluctuation period, processing for changing the stage is performed, and a back image change command is set for the display control device 114.例文帳に追加By including information about the type of the back image corresponding to the changed stage in the back image change command, the display control device 114 changes the back image displayed on the third pattern display device 81 to an image corresponding to the stage. A process to change to is performed. In addition, when a notice character appears at the start of the variable display, by pressing the frame button 22, the expected value of the big win due to this change is displayed, and by pressing the frame button 22 during the ready-to-win production, the expectation for the big win is displayed. Alternatively, the frame button 22 may be used as a decision button for selecting one ready-to-win effect out of a plurality of ready-to-win effects. Note that if the frame button 22 is not arranged, the process of S4107 is omitted.

When the frame button input monitoring/effect processing is completed, the lamp editing processing is executed (S4108), and then the sound editing/output processing is executed (S4109). In the lamp editing process, the lighting patterns of the illumination parts 29 to 33 are set so as to correspond to the display performed by the third pattern display device 81 . In the sound editing/output process, the output pattern of the voice output device 226 is set so as to correspond to the display performed by the third pattern display device 81, and the sound is output from the voice output device 226 according to the setting.

When the processing of S4109 ends, liquid crystal effect execution management processing is executed (S4110). In the liquid crystal effect execution management process, based on the variation pattern command transmitted from the main controller 110, the time required for the variation display performed by the third symbol display device 81 and the time synchronized therewith are set. Lamp edit processing of S4108 is executed based on the time set in this liquid crystal effect execution monitoring processing. It should be noted that the sound editing/output processing of S4109 is also executed at the time synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed by the third pattern display device 81. FIG.

When the process of S4110 ends, next, the effect update process is executed (S4111), and the process proceeds to S4112. In the effect update process (S4111), the effect mode (the number of gauges of the chance meter CM (see FIGS. 7A and 7B)) of the effect during the standby state executed in the jackpot standby state is detected by the passage detection sensors 228a to 228f. Control is executed to vary according to the detection result of . Details of this rendering update process will be described later with reference to FIG.

In the process of S4112, a command determination process for performing a process according to the command received from the main controller 110 is performed (S4112). The details of this command determination process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 36 and 37. FIG. After the command determination process, a variable display setting process is executed (S4113). In the variable display setting process, a variable pattern command for display is generated and set based on the variable pattern command received from the main controller 110 in order to cause the third symbol display device 81 to perform a variable effect. As a result, the command is sent to display controller 114 . The details of this variable display setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

When the processing of S4113 is completed, it is determined whether or not the work RAM 233 stores power failure occurrence information (S4114). The power-off occurrence information is stored when a power-off command is received from main controller 110 . In the processing of S4114, if it is determined that the power-off occurrence information is stored (S4114: Yes), both the power-off flag and the power-off processing flag are set to ON (S4116), and the power is turned off. Processing is executed (S4117). After the power-off processing is executed, the power-off processing in progress flag is turned off (S4118), and then the processing is looped infinitely. In the power-off processing, interrupt processing is prohibited, each output port is turned off, and outputs from the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 are turned off. Also, the memory of information on occurrence of power failure is erased.

On the other hand, if the power-off occurrence information is not stored in the process of S4114 (S4114: No), it is determined whether or not the RAM 223 is destroyed based on the keyword stored in the RAM 223 (S4115), and the RAM 223 is destroyed. If not (S4115: No), the process returns to S4101, and the main process is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the RAM 223 is destroyed (S4115: Yes), the process is looped infinitely to stop execution of subsequent processes. Here, since the main process is not executed when it is determined that the RAM is destroyed and an infinite loop is performed, the display by the third symbol display device 81 does not change after that. Therefore, since the player can know that an abnormality has occurred, the player can call the pachinko hall clerk or the like and ask them to repair the pachinko machine 10 or the like. Further, when it is confirmed that the RAM 223 is destroyed, the RAM destruction may be notified by the voice output device 226 or the lamp display device 227 .

Next, details of the rendering update process (S4111) executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 35 is a flow chart showing the effect update process (S4111). This effect update process (S4111) is, as described above, a process for updating the effect mode in the standby state effect.

In the production update process (see FIG. 35), first, it is determined whether the standby state production flag 223g is ON (S4201). Since it is not in progress (there is no possibility of updating the effect mode), this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of S4201, if it is determined that the standby state effect flag 223g is ON (S4201: Yes), the number of sensors whose output is H (high) among the passage detection sensors 228a to 228f is counted ( counting) (S4202).

When the process of S4202 is completed, it is determined whether the count value (count value) obtained by the process of S4202 and the counter value of the level counter 223h match (S4203). As described above, the level counter 223h is a counter that indicates the gauge number of the chance meter CM displayed on the third symbol display device 81. FIG. The number of gauges of the chance meter CM is varied in conjunction with the number of sensors whose output is H (high) among the passage detection sensors 228a to 228f. Therefore, in the process of S4203, when it is determined that the count value of the level counter 223h is different from the count value in the process of S4202 (S4203: No), the number of game balls on the upper surface of the opening/closing door 65f1 has changed. , etc. means that the display mode of the chance meter CM and the number of sensors whose output is H (high) are out of alignment. By doing so, it is updated (S4204). Then, the mode of the chance meter CM is updated to the mode of the number of gauges corresponding to the value of the level counter 223g updated in the process of S4204 (S4205), and this process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S4203, if it is determined that the count value (count value) obtained by the process of S4202 and the value of the level counter 223g match (S4203: Yes), the current passage detection sensors 228a to 228f Since the output matches the number of gauges of the chance meter CM, and there is no need to update the display mode of the chance meter CM (the presentation mode of the standby state presentation), the processing of S4204 and S4205 is skipped and left as it is. End this process.

By executing this effect update processing (see FIG. 35), the mode of the chance meter CM can be updated in correspondence with the number of game balls flowing down the upper surface of the opening/closing door 65f1. Therefore, by referring to the mode of the chance meter CM, it is possible to play a game aiming at the game ball entering the operation winning hole 660 while the number of gauges is greater. In other words, it is possible to make it easier for the player to understand the timing at which the player should aim at the operation winning opening 660 . Therefore, even a player who has little experience playing a game on the pachinko machine 10 can intuitively understand the timing of aiming at the operation winning hole 660.例文帳に追加As a result, even a player who plays the game for the first time can easily play the game, so that the operating rate of the pachinko machine 10 can be improved.

In the first embodiment, during execution of the standby state effect, every time the effect update process (see FIG. 35) is executed, the output status of the passage detection sensors 228a to 228f and the chance meter CM Although it is configured to determine whether there is any discrepancy with the gauge number (whether the aspect of the chance meter CM should be updated), the frequency of updating the aspect of the chance meter CM may be reduced. Specifically, for example, during execution of the standby state effect, the processing of S4203 may be executed only once every 0.5 seconds. By configuring in this way, the processing load of the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 can be reduced.

Next, the command determination processing (S4112) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 36 is a flow chart showing this command determination process (S4112). This command determination process (S4112) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 34) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp controller 113, and as described above, determines the command received from the main controller 110. This process is for

In the command determination process, first, among the unprocessed commands, the first command received from the main controller 110 is read from the command storage area provided in the RAM 223, analyzed, and a variation pattern command is received from the main controller 110. It is determined whether or not (S4301). In the process of S4301, when it is determined that the variation pattern command has been received (S4301: Yes), the variation start flag 223d provided in the RAM 223 is turned on (S4302), and the variation pattern type is determined from the received variation pattern command is extracted (S4303), and the process ends. The variation pattern type extracted here is stored in the RAM 223 and referred to when the variation display setting process (see FIG. 38) described later is executed. Then, it is used to set a display variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 of the start of the variation effect and the variation pattern type.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4301 that the variation pattern command has not been received (S4301: No), then it is determined whether or not the stop type command has been received from the main controller 110 (S4304). When the stop type command is received (S4304: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223e of the RAM 223 is set to ON (S4305), and the stop type is extracted from the received stop type command (S4306). End the process. The stop type extracted here is stored in the RAM 223 and referred to when the variable display setting process (see FIG. 38) described later is executed. Then, it is used to set a display stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type of the variable effect.

On the other hand, in the processing of S4304, if it is determined that the stop type command has not been received (S4304: No), then it is determined whether or not the pending ball count command has been received from the main controller 110 (S4307). . Then, when it is determined that the pending ball number command has been received (S4307: Yes), the value included in the received pending ball number command, that is, the first special symbol pending ball number counter 203e of the main controller 110 The value of (the number of times of holding the variable display based on the lottery of the first special symbol N1), or the value of the second special design holding ball number counter 203f (the number of times of holding the variable display based on the second special symbol N2) is extracted, and this is stored in the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b or the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c of the voice lamp control device 113 (S4308). In addition, in the process of S4308, a display reserved ball number command for notifying the display control device 114 of the updated values of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b and the updated values of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c is set. . After the process of S4308 ends, this process ends.

Here, when the game ball enters the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640 (start winning), or when a special symbol lottery is performed, the main controller 110 Since it is transmitted from, each time the starting winning prize is detected, or each time a special symbol lottery is performed, the first special symbol holding ball number counter 223b of the sound lamp control device 113 and the second The value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c can be matched with the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e of the main controller 110 and the value of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203f. Therefore, due to the influence of noise, etc., the values of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b and the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c of the voice lamp control device 113 are changed to the first special symbol reserved ball number counter of the main control device 110. 203e and the value of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203f, the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113 and the second The value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c can be corrected to match the values of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e and the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203f of the main controller 110. In addition, when the process of S4308 is executed, the values of the updated first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b and second special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c are displayed for notification to the display control device 114. Number commands are set. As a result, in the display control device 114 , the reserved ball number pattern corresponding to the reserved ball number is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 .

In the process of S4307, if it is determined that the command for the number of pending balls has not been received (S4307: No), then it is determined whether or not the status command has been received from the main controller 110 (S4309). When it is determined that the state command has been received (S4309: Yes), the data in the game state storage area 223i is updated according to the received command (S4310). That is, based on the information corresponding to the game state notified by the state command, when the probability variable state of the special design and the time saving state of the normal design are notified, the lower two bits of the game state storage area 223i are set to "11B". , and when the special symbol low probability state and normal symbol time saving state are notified, the lower 2 bits of the game state storage area 223i are set to "01B", and the special symbol low probability state and When the normal state of the normal symbol is notified, the lower two bits of the game state storage area 223i are set to "00B". Thereby, when the game state of the pachinko machine 10 is changed, the voice lamp control device 113 can easily grasp the change.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4309 that the status command has not been received (S4309: No), then it is determined whether or not the winning information command has been received (S4311). In the processing of S4311, if it is determined that the winning information command has been received (S4311: Yes), the information notified by the received winning information command (the type of entrance where the new start winning was detected, and the lottery result information) is stored in the corresponding storage area of the winning information storage area 223a (S4312), and the process ends.

In the processing of S4311, if it is determined that the winning information command has not been received (S4311: No), then a command related to winning (any of the standby state command, opening command, number of rounds command, and ending command) is issued. It is determined whether or not it has been received (S4313). Then, when it is determined that a win-related command has been received (S4313: Yes), win-related processing for executing control corresponding to the type of win-related command is executed (S4314), and this End the process. The details of this hit-related process (S4314) will be described later with reference to FIG.

On the other hand, in the process of S4313, when it is determined that the command related to the big win is not received (S4313: No), the process according to other commands is executed (S4315), and this process ends. In the process of S4315, if the other command is a command used by the sound lamp control device 113, the process corresponding to the command is performed, the processing result is stored in the RAM 223, and if the command is used by the display control device 114, the command is processed. is transmitted to the display control device 114.

Next, with reference to FIG. 37, the winning-related processing (S4314) executed by MPU 221 in sound lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 37 is a flow chart showing this win-related processing (S4314).

In the hit-related process, first, it is determined whether or not the standby state command is received (S4401), and if the standby state command is received (S4401: Yes), the display standby state for starting the standby state effect A command is set (S4402). The standby state command for display set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 223, and in the command output processing (S4102) of the main processing (see FIG. 34) executed by the MPU 221, It is transmitted toward the display control device 114 . When the display control device 114 receives the display standby state command, the third symbol display device 81 starts a standby state effect for informing that the third symbol display device 81 is in a jackpot standby state. When the processing of S4402 ends, next, the waiting state effect flag 223g is set to ON to indicate that the waiting state effect is being executed (S4403), and this processing ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S4401 that the standby state command has not been received (S4401: No), then it is determined whether or not the opening command has been received (S4404). If (S4404: Yes), the display opening command for starting the opening effect is set (S4405), and the end of the standby state effect is set by turning off the standby state effect flag 223g (S4406). End the process. The display opening command set in the process of S4405 is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is executed in the command output process (S4102) of the main process (see FIG. 34) executed by the MPU 221. , is transmitted to the display controller 114 . When the display control device 114 receives the display opening command, the third symbol display device 81 starts an opening effect for notifying the start of the big win.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4404 that an opening command has not been received (S4404: No), then it is determined whether or not a round number command has been received from main controller 110 (S4407). If it is determined that the round number command has been received (S4407: Yes), the round number is extracted from the received round number command, and a display round number command is set according to the extracted round number (S4408). ). The display round number command set here is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and in the command output processing (S4102) of the main processing (see FIG. 34) executed by the MPU 221, It is transmitted toward the display control device 114 . When the display control device 114 receives the display round number command, the third symbol display device 81 starts a new round effect. After the processing of S4408, this processing ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4407 that the round number command has not been received (S4407: No), then it is determined whether or not an ending command has been received from main controller 110 (S4409). Then, when it is determined that the ending command has been received (S4409: Yes), a display ending command for starting the ending effect is set (S4410), and this processing ends. The display opening command set in the process of S4410 is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is executed in the command output process (S4102) of the main process (see FIG. 34) executed by the MPU 221. , is transmitted to the display controller 114 . When the display control device 114 receives the opening command for display, the third symbol display device 81 starts an ending effect for notifying the end of the jackpot.

On the other hand, in the process of S4409, if it is determined that the ending command has not been received (S4409: No), this process ends. By executing this win-related processing (see FIG. 37), appropriate control can be executed in response to various win-related commands.

Next, the variable display setting process (S4113) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 38 is a flow chart showing this variable display setting process (S4113). This variable display setting process (S4113) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 34) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113, and in order to execute the variable effect in the third symbol display device 81, Based on the variation pattern command received from the main controller 110, a variation pattern command for display is generated and set.

In the variable display setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the variable start flag 223d provided in the RAM 223 is ON (S4501). Then, when it is determined that the fluctuation start flag 223d is not ON (that is, it is OFF) (S4501: No), since the fluctuation pattern command has not been received from the main controller 110, the process proceeds to S4506. Transition. On the other hand, in the process of S4501, if it is determined that the fluctuation start flag 223d is on (S4501: Yes), the fluctuation start flag 223d is turned off (S4502), and then S4303 of the command judgment process (see FIG. 36). In the process of , the variation pattern type in the variation effect extracted from the variation pattern command is acquired from the RAM 223 (S4503).

Then, based on the obtained variation pattern type, a display variation pattern command for notification to the display control device 114 is generated, and the command is set for transmission to the display control device 114 (S4504). In the display control device 114, by receiving this display variation pattern command, the variation pattern indicated by this display variation pattern command is used to perform the variation display of the third symbol on the third symbol display device 81. Display control of the variable effect is started.

Next, the data stored in the winning information storage area 223a is shifted (S4505), and the process proceeds to S4506. In the process of S4505, the data stored in the first to fourth areas of the prize winning information storage area 223a are sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, the data in each area is shifted in the order of 1st area→execution area, 2nd area→1st area, 3rd area→2nd area, 4th area→3rd area.

In the process of S4506, it is determined whether or not the stop type selection flag 223e provided in the RAM 233 is ON (S4506). If it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223e is not ON (that is, it is OFF) (S4506: No), it means that the stop type command has not been received from the main controller 110, so this variable display is performed. The setting process (see FIG. 38) is terminated, and the process returns to the main process.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223e is ON (S4506: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223e is set to OFF (S4507), and then the processing of S4306 of the command determination processing (see FIG. 36) , the stop type in the variable effect extracted from the stop type command is acquired from the RAM 223 (S4508). Next, based on the stop type acquired in the process of S4508, a display stop type command is set (S4509), and this process ends. When the display control device 114 receives the display stop type command, the display control device 114 controls the third pattern display device 81 to stop and display the third pattern in the stop type indicated by the display stop type command. be done.

<Regarding control processing of the display control device in the first embodiment>
Next, each control executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIGS. 39 to 53. FIG. The processing of the MPU 231 can be broadly classified into main processing that is repeatedly executed after power is turned on, command interrupt processing that is executed when a command is received from the audio lamp control device 113, and processing for one frame from the image controller 237. There is V interrupt processing that is executed when the MPU 231 detects a V interrupt signal that is transmitted every 20 milliseconds when image drawing processing is completed. The MPU 231 normally executes main processing, and executes command interrupt processing and V interrupt processing in accordance with reception of a command and detection of a V interrupt signal. If command reception and V interrupt signal detection are performed at the same time, command reception processing is preferentially executed. As a result, it is possible to quickly reflect the content of the command received from the sound lamp control device 113 and execute the V interrupt process.

First, the main processing executed by the MPU 231 in the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 39 is a flow chart showing this main process. The main processing is to execute initialization processing when the power is turned on.

Activation of this main process is specifically performed according to the following flow. When power is turned on from the power supply device 115 to the display control device 114 and the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the instruction pointer 231a provided in the MPU 231 to "0000H" according to its hardware configuration. , the address "0000H" indicated by the instruction pointer 231a is specified for the bus line 240. FIG. When the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address specified on the bus line 240 is "0000H", it sets the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR flash memory 234d in the buffer RAM 234c. Then, the corresponding data (instruction code) is output to the MPU 231 . Then, the MPU 231 fetches the instruction code received from the character ROM 234, and starts the main process by starting the execution of the process according to the fetched instruction.

Here, if all the boot programs to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, the character ROM 234 indicates that the address designated to the bus line 240 is "0000H". When detected, one page of data including the data (instruction code) corresponding to the address "0000H" must be read from the NAND flash memory 234a and set in the buffer RAM 234c. Due to the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a long time to read out and set it in the buffer RAM 234c. It will consume a lot of waiting time. Therefore, the time taken to start the MPU 231 becomes longer, and as a result, there arises a problem that the control of the third pattern display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

In contrast, as in the present embodiment, a predetermined number of instructions from the boot program to be processed first by the MPU 231 after releasing the system reset are stored in the NOR flash memory 234d. is a memory from which data can be read at high speed, when the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 immediately stores the first data in the NOR type flash memory 234d. The boot program stored in the program storage area 234 d 1 can be set in the buffer RAM 234 c and the corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231 . Therefore, since the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" in a short time after specifying the address "0000H", the MPU 231 can start the main process in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the control of the third pattern display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately.

When the main process is executed as described above, first, the boot process executed by the boot program is executed (S6001), and the display control device 114 is set so that various controls for the third pattern display device 81 can be executed. to start.

Here, the boot processing (S6001) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 40 is a flowchart showing boot processing (S6001) executed in the main processing in the MPU 231 of the display control device 114. FIG.

As described above, in this embodiment, the control program and fixed value data to be executed by the MPU 231 are stored in the third symbol display device 81 instead of being stored in a dedicated program ROM as in conventional game machines. The character ROM 234 provided for storing the data of the image to be displayed is stored. The character ROM 234 is composed of a NAND-type flash memory 234a capable of increasing the capacity with a small area. There is no need to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing programs and the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and an increase in failure rate due to an increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

On the other hand, the NAND flash memory 234a has a slow read speed, especially when performing random access. Even if a high-performance processor is used as a processor, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may deteriorate. Therefore, in this boot process, the control program and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are transferred to the program storage area 233a provided in the work RAM 233 constituted by DRAM and the data table. A process of transferring and storing in the storage area 233b is executed.

Specifically, first, based on the hardware operations of the MPU 231 and the character ROM 234 described above, following the boot program read out from the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR flash memory 234d and set in the buffer RAM 234c after the system reset is cancelled, , a predetermined amount of the control programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 are transferred to the program storage area 233a (S6101). The predetermined amount of control programs transferred here includes the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1.

Then, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the first predetermined address of the program storage area 233a, that is, the top address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a (S6102). As a result, the MPU 231 starts executing the rest of the boot program included in the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a by the process of S6101.

By setting the command pointer 231a to a predetermined address in the program storage area 233a by the processing of S6102, the MPU 231 can execute various processes while reading the control program stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. become. That is, the MPU 231 does not read the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 and fetch the instruction, but rather reads the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a and fetches the instruction. and execute various processing. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of a DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the MPU 231 can fetch the instruction at high speed and execute the process for the instruction.

After the command pointer 231a is set by the process of S6102, the remaining boot program whose execution is started by the set command pointer 231a is stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a. Of the control programs stored, the remaining control programs and fixed value data that have not been transferred to the program storage area 233a are transferred by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b (S6103). Specifically, the control program and some fixed data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233, and the above-mentioned various data tables (display data table, transfer data table) of the fixed value data are stored in the data table. Transfer to the storage area 233b.

After executing other processes necessary for the boot process (S6104), the instruction pointer 231a is moved to the second predetermined address of the program storage area 233a, that is, after the boot process (see S6001 in FIG. 39) is completed. By setting the top address of the program corresponding to the initializing process (see S6002 in FIG. 39) (S6105), the execution of the boot program is finished, and the boot process ends.

By executing the boot process (S6001) in this way, the control program and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are stored in the work RAM 233, which is composed entirely of DRAM. It is transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a and the data table storage area 233b. At the end of the boot process, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address, and thereafter the MPU 231 reads the control program transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. Various processing is executed using

Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the control program and fixed value data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 and the fixed value data after the system reset is released. By transferring to the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 can read the control program and fixed value data from the work RAM configured by the DRAM with a high read speed and perform various controls. High processing performance can be maintained, and diversified and complicated presentations can be easily executed using the auxiliary presentation section.

On the other hand, without storing the entire boot program in the NOR flash memory 234d, a predetermined number of instructions are stored from the first instruction to be processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released, and the rest of the boot program is stored in the NAND flash memory. Even if it is stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the memory 234a, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start up the MPU 231 in a short time simply by adding a very small capacity NOR flash memory 234d. can do.

Note that in the boot process shown in FIG. 40, the predetermined amount of control programs transferred to the program storage area 233a by the process of S6101 includes all remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. However, it is not necessarily limited to this. may be part of As for the boot program transferred here, a predetermined amount of the control program including all remaining boot programs is transferred to the program storage area 233a. 231a may be executed. Then, the processes of S6103 to S6105 may be executed by all remaining boot programs stored in the program storage area 233a.

In addition, the boot program transferred by the process of S6101 further transfers a part of the remaining boot program by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a. A process of setting an address to the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. In addition, part of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a by this process is further transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount of part of the remaining boot program, and subsequently transferred to the program storage area 233a. A process of setting the start address of the stored boot program to the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. Then, a predetermined amount of a part of the remaining boot program is transferred to the program storage area 233a, and then the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a is set in the command pointer 231a in step S6101. and the processing of S6102 may be repeated a plurality of times, and then the processing of S6103 to S6105 may be executed.

As a result, even if the program size of the boot program is large and the rest of the boot program not stored in the first program storage area 234d1 cannot be transferred to the program storage area 233a at once, the MPU 231 is already stored in the program storage area 233a. Using the boot program, a predetermined amount can be transferred to the program storage area 233a.

Further, in the present embodiment, the first program storage area 234d1 has been described as having a part of the boot program that is first executed by the MPU 231 when the system reset is released. It may be stored in the 1-program storage area 234d1. In this case, the MPU 231 may perform the processes of S6103 to S6105 without performing the processes of S6101 and S6102 after starting the boot process. This eliminates the need to transfer the boot program to the program storage area 233a, reducing the number of times the program is transferred to the character ROM 234 or the program storage area 233a, thereby reducing the boot processing time. Therefore, it is possible to start the control of the auxiliary effect section in the MPU 231, which becomes possible after the boot process, more quickly.

Now, return to the description of FIG. After the boot process is completed, the initial setting process is executed according to the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 (S6002). Specifically, the value of the stack pointer is set in the MPU 231, and various settings are made for the registers in the MPU 231 and the I/O device. In addition, processing for clearing the memory of the work RAM 233, the resident video RAM 235, and the normal video RAM 236 is performed. Furthermore, various flags are provided in the work RAM 233, and initial values are set to the respective flags. As the initial value of each flag, "off" or "0" is set unless otherwise specified.

Further, in the initial setting process, after the image controller 237 is initialized, the image controller 237 is instructed to draw an image so that an image of a specific color is displayed on the entire screen of the third pattern display device 81. and instructs execution of display processing. As a result, immediately after the power is turned on, an image of a specific color is first displayed on the entire screen of the third pattern display device 81 . Here, the color of the image displayed on the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81 immediately after the power is turned on is set to be a different color according to the model of the pachinko machine. As a result, in the operation check at the factory or the like at the time of manufacture, immediately after turning on the power, it is inspected whether or not the image of the color corresponding to the model is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the pachinko machine 10 It is possible to easily and immediately judge whether or not the activation can be started normally.

Next, a transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller 237 to transfer the image data corresponding to the power-on main image to the power-on main image area 235a of the resident video RAM 235 (S6003). This transfer instruction contains the leading and trailing addresses of the character ROM 234 storing the image data corresponding to the main image when the power is turned on, the transfer destination information (here, the resident video RAM 235), and the transfer destination. The image controller 237 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 according to this transfer instruction. It is transferred to the image area 235a.

Then, when the transfer of all the image data indicated by the transfer instruction is completed, the image controller 237 transmits a transfer end signal indicating transfer end to the MPU 231 . By receiving this transfer end signal, the MPU 231 can grasp that the transfer of the image data designated by the transfer instruction has ended. When the transfer of all the image data indicated by the transfer instruction is completed, the image controller 237 stores transfer end information indicating transfer end in a register provided inside the image controller 237 or in a partial area of the built-in memory. It may be written. The MPU 231 reads information from this register or a partial area of the built-in memory at any time, and detects that the image controller 237 has written transfer end information, thereby grasping that the transfer of the image data specified by the transfer instruction has ended. You may do so.

The image data transferred to the main image area 235a when the power is turned on is held so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off. When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on main image to the power-on main image area 235a is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 by the process of S6003, the power-on variation image is transferred to the power-on main image area 235a. A transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller so as to transfer the image data corresponding to . This transfer instruction includes the starting address of the character ROM 234 storing the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image, the data size of the image data, and the transfer destination information (here, the resident video RAM 235). , and the head address of the power-on fluctuation image area 235b, which is the transfer destination. It is transferred to the change image area 235b when the power is turned on. The image data transferred to the power-on variation image area 235b is held so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off.

When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on variation image to the power-on variation image area 235b is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 by the processing of S6004, then the simple image display flag 233c is set. is turned on (S6005). As a result, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 in the transfer setting process (see FIG. 51(a)), which will be described later. Resident image transfer setting processing is executed to instruct the image controller 237 to transfer the image (see S7602 in FIG. 51A).

Further, the simple image display flag 233c indicates that all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 based on the transfer instruction to the image controller 237 by the resident image transfer setting process. Remains on until terminated. As a result, during this time, in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 41(b)), the simple command is executed so that the power-on image (power-on main image and power-on fluctuation image) shown in FIG. 16 is drawn. Determination processing (see S6308 in FIG. 41B) and simple display setting processing (see S6309 in FIG. 41B) are executed.

As described above, the pachinko machine 10 uses the NAND flash memory 234a for the character ROM 234. Due to its slow read speed, all the image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is It takes a long time to transfer from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 . Therefore, as in this main process, after the power is turned on, the power-on main image and the power-on varying image are first transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, and the main image at power-on is transferred to the third image. By displaying on the symbol display device 81, while the rest of the image data to be resident is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player or the person involved in the hall can see the image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on. You can check the main image. Therefore, the display control device 114 takes time to transfer the remaining image data to be resident from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 while displaying the main image on the third pattern display device 81 when the power is turned on. be able to. On the other hand, while the main image is being displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, the player or the like can recognize that some kind of initialization processing is being performed. It is possible to wait until the initialization is completed without worrying whether the operation is stopped while the image data to be processed is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 .

Also, in an operation check at a factory or the like during manufacturing, the main image is immediately displayed on the third pattern display device 81 when the power is turned on. Therefore, it is possible to suppress deterioration in the efficiency of the operation check by using the NAND type flash memory 234a having a slow read speed for the character ROM 234. FIG.

In the display control device 114 of the pachinko machine 10, after the power is turned on, the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, so that the power-on main image is the third symbol. When the player starts the game while the display is displayed on the display device 81, a ball enters the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640 (start winning), and an instruction to start the variable effect is issued. When received from the main control device 110 via the sound lamp control device 113, that is, when the display variation pattern command is received, the power-on variation image is immediately displayed during the variation presentation period, and simple variation is performed. can perform. Therefore, even while the main image is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 when the power is turned on, the player can confirm that the lottery has been surely performed by the simple variation performance.

Further, as described above, while the remaining image data to be resident is being transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, the third symbol display device 81 continues to display the main image when the power is turned on. is composed of a NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, and it takes a long time to transfer the data. However, in this pachinko machine 10, since it is possible to perform a simple variation effect using the power-on fluctuation image transferred to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on, immediately after the power is turned on, for example, after the power is restored, Immediately after the power is turned on, even while the main image is displayed, the player can play the game without worry.

After the processing of S6005, interrupt permission is set (S6006), and thereafter the main processing executes infinite loop processing until the power is turned off. Accordingly, after the interrupt permission is set by the process of S6006, the command interrupt process and the V interrupt process are executed in accordance with the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal.

Next, command interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. 41(a). FIG. 41(a) is a flow chart showing the command interrupt processing. As described above, when a command is received from the audio lamp control device 113, the MPU 231 executes command interrupt processing.

In this command interrupt process, the received command data is extracted, and the extracted command data is sequentially stored in the command buffer area provided in the work RAM 233 (S6201), and the process ends. Various commands stored in the command buffer area by this command interrupt processing are read out by command determination processing or simple command determination processing of V interrupt processing, which will be described later, and processing corresponding to the command is performed.

Next, V interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. 41(b). FIG. 41(b) is a flow chart showing the V interrupt processing. In this V interrupt process, various processes corresponding to the command stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt process are executed, and after specifying the image to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81, the image is drawn. By creating a list and transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, the image controller 237 is instructed to execute drawing processing and display processing of the image.

As described above, this V interrupt process is started when the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 is detected. This V interrupt signal is a signal that is generated in the image controller 237 and sent to the MPU 231 every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing processing for one frame is completed. Therefore, by executing V interrupt processing in synchronization with this V interrupt signal, a drawing instruction is issued to the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when drawing processing for one frame of image is completed. become. Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive an instruction to draw the next image before the image drawing processing or display processing is completed. It is possible to prevent an image from being developed in accordance with a new drawing instruction in a frame buffer storing image information being displayed.

Here, first, the outline of the flow of V interrupt processing will be described, and then the details of each processing will be described with reference to other drawings. In this V interrupt process, as shown in FIG. 41(b), first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is on (S6301). If it is off (S6301: No), it means that the transfer of all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been completed. In order to display on the display device 81, command determination processing (S6302) is executed, and then display setting processing (S6303) is executed.

In the command determination process (S6302), the content of the command from the sound lamp control device 113 stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt process is analyzed, and the process corresponding to the command is executed. When the display variation pattern command is stored, the demonstration display data table or the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern type is set in the display data table buffer 233d, and the transfer corresponding to the set display data table is performed. The data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

In this command determination process, all commands stored in the command buffer area at that time are analyzed and processed. This is because the command determination process is performed at intervals of 20 milliseconds when the V interrupt process is executed, and there is a high possibility that multiple commands are stored in the command buffer area during that 20 millisecond period. be. In particular, when main controller 110 decides to start the variable effect, there is a high possibility that the display variation pattern command, the display stop type command, and the like are stored in the command buffer area at the same time. Therefore, by analyzing and executing these commands all at once, it is possible to quickly comprehend the mode and stop type of the variable performance selected by the main control device 110 and the sound lamp control device 113, and generate a performance image corresponding to the mode. Drawing of the image can be controlled so as to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 . The details of this command determination process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 42 to 47. FIG.

In the display setting process (S6303), based on the contents of the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the command determination process (S6302), etc., the image for one frame to be displayed next on the third pattern display device 81 is displayed. specifically identify the content of In addition, depending on the status of processing, etc., the effect mode to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 is determined, and the display data table corresponding to the determined effect mode is set in the display data table buffer 233d. The details of this display setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 48 to 50. FIG.

After the display setting process is executed, task processing is executed (S6304). In this task processing, the image is configured based on the content of the next one-frame image to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 specified by the display setting processing (S6303) or the simple display setting processing (S6309). In addition to specifying the type of sprite (display object) to be displayed, various parameters required for drawing such as display coordinate position, enlargement ratio, and rotation angle are determined for each sprite.

Next, transfer setting processing is executed (S6305). In this transfer setting process, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, the image controller 237 is caused to transfer image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined area of the resident video RAM 235. Set instructions. Further, while the simple image display flag 233c is off, predetermined image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image controller 237 based on the transfer data information of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. In addition to setting a transfer instruction to transfer to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236 a of the video RAM 236 , even when a rear image change command is received from the sound lamp control device 113 , the image controller 237 is notified of the changed rear image. A transfer instruction is set to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236 a of the normal video RAM 236 . The details of the transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 51 and 52. FIG.

Next, drawing processing is executed (S6306). In this drawing process, based on the types of sprites that make up one frame determined in the task process (S6304) and the parameters necessary for drawing each sprite, and the transfer instruction set in the transfer setting process (S6305), 20, and transmits the drawing list to the image controller 237 together with the drawing object buffer information. Accordingly, the image controller 237 executes image drawing processing according to the drawing list (S6306). Details of the rendering process will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, update processing of various counters provided in the display control device 114 is executed (S6307). Then, the V interrupt processing ends. As a counter updated by the process of S6307, for example, there is a stop symbol counter (not shown) for determining a stop symbol. The value of the stop symbol counter is stored in the work RAM 233, and is updated each time the V interrupt process is executed. Then, in the command determination process, when reception of the stop type command for display is detected, it corresponds to the stop type indicated by the stop type command for display (jackpot A to F, front and back reach, reach other than front and back, complete loss) Then, the stop type table and the stop type counter are compared, and the stop design after the variable effect displayed on the third design display device 81 is finally set.

On the other hand, in the process of S6301, if it is determined that the simple image display flag 233c is ON (S6301: Yes), it means that transfer of all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been completed. Therefore, in order to display the power-on image on the third pattern display device 81, simple command determination processing (S6308) is executed, then simple display setting processing (S6309) is executed, and the process proceeds to S6304.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 42 to 47, the details of the command determination process (S6302), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. First, FIG. 42 is a flow chart showing this command determination processing.

In this command determination process, as shown in FIG. 42, first, it is determined whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area (S6401). After completing the command determination process, the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, if there is an unprocessed new command (S6401: Yes), the new command flag for notifying the display setting process (S6303) that the new command has been processed in the ON state is set to ON (S6402). All unprocessed commands stored in the buffer area are analyzed for their command types (S6403).

Then, it is determined whether or not there is a display variation pattern command among the unprocessed commands (S6404). Then, if there is a variation pattern command for display (S6404: Yes), the variation pattern command process is executed (S6405), and the process returns to S6401.

Here, the details of the variation pattern command process (S6405) will be described with reference to FIG. 43(a). FIG. 43(a) is a flow chart showing the variation pattern command process (S6405). This variation pattern command processing (S6405) executes processing corresponding to the display variation pattern command received from the sound lamp control device 113. FIG.

In the variation pattern command process, first, the variation display data table corresponding to the variation effect pattern indicated by the variation pattern command for display is determined, and the determined variation display data table is read out from the data table storage area 233b to display the display data table. It is set in the buffer 233d (S6501).

Here, since the main controller 110 always determines the start of variation at a distance of several seconds or more, it does not receive two or more display variation pattern commands within 20 milliseconds. When executing, it is impossible that two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, but part of the command changes due to the influence of noise, etc., and another command is mistakenly used for display. It could be interpreted as a variation pattern command. In the process of S6501, in preparation for such a case, if it is determined that two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern with the shortest variation time is set in the display data table buffer 233d.

If a variation display data table corresponding to a variation pattern with a long variation time is set in the display data table buffer 233d, a variation effect having a shorter variation time than the set display data table is actually displayed by the main controller. 110, the next display variation pattern command is received from the main controller 110 while the third pattern display device 81 is displaying the variation performance according to the set variation display data table. As a result, another variable display is suddenly started, which may make the player feel uncomfortable.

On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, by setting the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern with the shortest variation time in the display data table buffer 233d, a variation longer than the set display data table is actually obtained. Even if the variable effect with time is instructed by main controller 110, after the variable effect according to display data table buffer 233d is completed, main controller 110 will send the next display for the next display, as will be described later. Since the display of the third pattern display device 81 is controlled by the display setting process so that the demonstration effect is displayed until the pattern command is received, the player can feel the third pattern display device 81 without any discomfort. 3 You can continue to see the variation of the pattern.

Next, a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table set in S6501 is determined, read from the data table storage area 233b, and set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S6502). Then, based on the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the fluctuation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the process of S6501, time data representing the fluctuation time is set in the clock counter 233h (S6503), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S6504). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the fixed display flag are set to OFF (S6505), the variation pattern command is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

By executing this variation pattern command process, in the display setting process, while updating the pointer 233f initialized by the process of S6504, the variable display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the process of S6501 , extracts the drawing contents specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f, and specifies the contents of the image for one frame to be displayed next on the third pattern display device 81. At the same time, the transfer data table buffer 233e The transfer data information specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted from the transfer data table set to 1, and the sprite image data required in the set variable display data table is stored in advance from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. image storage area 236a.

Further, in the display setting process, the time counter 233h to which the time data is set by the process of S6503 is used to measure the time for the variable presentation specified in the variable display data table, and when the variable presentation in the variable display data table ends. When it is determined, the setting of the stop display is controlled so that the stop pattern corresponding to the stop type command for display from the main control device 110 is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 .

Now, return to the description of FIG. In the process of S6404, if it is determined that there is no display variation pattern command (S6404: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display stop type command in the unprocessed commands (S6406), If there is a stop type command for display (S6406: Yes), the stop type command process is executed (S6407), and the process returns to S6401.

Details of the stop type command process (S6407) will now be described with reference to FIG. 43(b). FIG.43(b) is a flowchart which shows a stop classification command process. This stop type command processing is for executing processing corresponding to the display variation type command received from the sound lamp control device 113 .

In the stop type command processing (S6407), first, a stop type table corresponding to the stop type information indicated by the stop type command for display (any of jackpot A to F, front-rear out reach, reach other than front-rear out, complete out) is determined (S6601), and the stop type table is compared with the value of the stop type counter updated each time the V interrupt process (see FIG. 41(b)) is executed, and the third symbol display device Finally, the stop symbol after the variable effect displayed in 81 is set (S6602).

Then, among the stop symbol discrimination flags provided for each stop symbol, the stop symbol discrimination flag corresponding to the stop symbol set by the process of S6602 is turned on, and the stop symbol discrimination flag corresponding to the other stop symbols is turned on. (S6603) and returns to the command determination process.

Here, as described above, in the variation display data table, after a predetermined time has passed since the variation based on the data table is started, the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is specified as the type information. , offset information (design offset information) from the stop design set by the processing of S6602. In the above-described task processing (S6304), after a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the variation, the stop design set by the processing of S6602 is specified from the stop design determination flag set by S6603, and the specified stop By adding the design offset information acquired by the display setting process to the design, the third design to be actually displayed is specified. Then, the address where the image data corresponding to the specified third pattern is stored is specified. Image data corresponding to the third design is stored in the third design area 235d of the resident video RAM 235, as described above.

It should be noted that since the main controller 110 always determines the start of fluctuation at a time interval of several seconds or more, two or more stop type commands for display are not received within 20 milliseconds, and therefore command determination processing is executed. In this case, it is impossible that two or more display stop type commands are stored in the command buffer area. It may be interpreted as a type command. In the processing of S6601, in preparation for such a case, if it is determined that two or more stop type commands for display are stored in the command buffer area, it is assumed that the stop type is completely out, and the stop type Decide on a table. As a result, the stop symbol corresponding to the complete loss is set by the processing of S6602.

If a stop symbol corresponding to a "special symbol jackpot" is set, the third symbol display device 81 displays "a special symbol" even if it is actually a "special symbol omission". A stop pattern corresponding to the "big win" is displayed, and the player is misled into thinking that the pachinko machine 10 has "a special pattern big win", and there is a risk of lowering the reliability of the pachinko machine 10.例文帳に追加On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, by setting the stop symbol corresponding to the complete loss, in fact, if it is a "special symbol jackpot", the third symbol display device 81 stops the complete loss. Even if the symbols are displayed, the pachinko machine 10 becomes a "jackpot of special symbols", so that the player can be pleased.

Returning to FIG. 42, the description is continued. In the processing of S6406, if it is determined that there is no display stop type command (S6406: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display standby state command among the unprocessed commands (S6408), If there is a standby state command for display (S6408: Yes), the standby state command process is executed (S6409), and the process returns to S6401.

Details of the standby state command processing (S6409) will now be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 44 is a flow chart showing standby state command processing. In this standby state command processing, processing corresponding to the standby state command received from the sound lamp control device 113 is executed.

In the standby state command process, first, the display data table for standby state effect is set in the display data table buffer 233d (S6701). After that, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table for standby state effect is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S6702), and based on the set display data table for standby state effect, time data is set in the clock counter 233h. (S6703). After that, the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S6704). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the fixed display flag are set to OFF (S6705), the standby state command is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

Returning to FIG. 42, the description is continued. In the processing of S6408, if it is determined that there is no standby state command (S6408: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display opening command among the unprocessed commands (S6410), and the display opening command is determined. If there is a command (S6410: Yes), the opening command process is executed (S6411), and the process returns to S6401.

Details of the opening command process (S6411) will now be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 45(a) is a flow chart showing the opening command process. This opening command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the opening command received from the sound lamp control device 113 .

In the opening command process, first, the opening display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d (S6801). Thereafter, a transfer data table corresponding to the opening display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S6802), and based on the set opening display data table, time data is set in the clock counter 233h (S6803). After that, the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S6804). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the fixed display flag are set to off (S6805), the opening command is terminated, and the process returns to command determination processing.

Returning to FIG. 42, the description is continued. In the process of S6410, if it is determined that there is no display opening command (S6410: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display round number command in the unprocessed commands (S6412), and the If there is a round number command for use (S6412: Yes), the round number command process is executed (S6413), and the process returns to S6401.

Details of the round number command processing (S6413) will now be described with reference to FIG. 45(b). FIG. 45(b) is a flow chart showing the round number command process. The number-of-rounds command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the number-of-rounds command for display received from the sound lamp control device 113 .

In the round number command processing, first, a round number display data table corresponding to the number of rounds indicated by the display round number command is determined, and the determined round number display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b to display data. It is set in the table buffer 233d (S6901). Next, by writing Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e, the contents are cleared (S6902).

Then, based on the round number display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S6901, time data representing the performance time is set in the clock counter 233h (S6903), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0. (S6904). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the confirmation display flag are set to OFF (S6905), the round number command process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

Returning to FIG. 42, the description continues. In the processing of S6412, if it is determined that there is no command for the number of rounds for display (S6412: No), then it is determined whether or not there is an ending command for display among the unprocessed commands (S6414), and the command is displayed. If there is an ending command (S6414: Yes), the ending command process is executed (S6415), and the process returns to S6401.

Details of the ending command process (S6415) will now be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 46 is a flowchart showing ending command processing. This ending command process is to execute the process corresponding to the display ending command received from the sound lamp control device 113 .

In the ending command process, first, the ending display data table corresponding to the display mode of the ending effect indicated by the display ending command is determined, the determined ending display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, and the display data table is displayed. It is set in the buffer 233d (S7001). Next, by writing Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e, the contents are cleared (S7002).

Next, based on the ending display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S7001, time data representing the performance time is set in the clock counter 233h (S7003), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 ( S7004). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the fixed display flag are set to OFF (S7005), the ending command process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

Returning to FIG. 42, the description is continued. In the processing of S6414, if it is determined that there is no display ending command (S6414: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a back image change command among the unprocessed commands (S6416), and the back image is displayed. If there is a change command (S6416: Yes), the back image change command process is executed (S6417), and the process returns to S6401.

Details of the back image change command process (S6417) will now be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 47(a) is a flow chart showing the back image change command process. This back image change command process is for executing a process corresponding to the back image change command received from the sound lamp control device 113 .

In the back image change command processing, first, the back image change flag for notifying the normal image transfer setting processing (S7603) of the change in the back image accompanying the reception of the back image change command in the ON state is set to ON (S7101). . Then, among the bits of the back image determination flag provided for each back image type (back surface A, B), the bit corresponding to the back image type indicated by the back image change command is set to ON, and the other bits are set to ON. The bit corresponding to the back image type is set to OFF (S7102), the back image change command process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

In the normal image transfer setting process, when it is detected that the back image change flag set by the process of S7101 is turned on, the back image type after change is specified from the back image discrimination flag set by the process of S7102. .

Further, in task processing (S6304), if it is specified to display either back face A or B according to the back face type of the back face image defined in the display data table, the back face image determination flag set in S7102 is determined. Then, the type of the back image to be displayed at that time is specified, and furthermore, the range of the back image to be displayed is specified according to the passage of time, and image data corresponding to the range of the back image is stored in the RAM. The type (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) and its RAM address are specified.

Since the player does not continuously operate the frame button 22 for 20 milliseconds or less, two or more background image change commands are not received within 20 milliseconds, so the command determination process is executed. In this case, there should be no cases where two or more background image change commands are stored in the command buffer area. It could be interpreted as a command. In the process of S7102, if it is determined that two or more back image commands are stored in the command buffer area, the back image determination flag corresponding to the back image type indicated by the previously received back image command is turned on. Alternatively, the back image discrimination flag corresponding to the back image type indicated by the back image command received later may be turned on. Alternatively, any one back image change command may be extracted and the back image determination flag corresponding to the back image type indicated by the command may be turned on. Since the change of the back image does not directly affect the game value of the pachinko machine 10, it is preferable to appropriately set it according to the characteristics and operability of the pachinko machine 10. FIG.

Now, return to the description of FIG. In the process of S6416, if it is determined that there is no back image change command (S6416: No), then it is determined whether or not there is an error command among the unprocessed commands (S6418). Otherwise (S6418: Yes), the error command process is executed (S6419), and the process returns to S6401.

Details of the error command processing (S6419) will now be described with reference to FIG. 47(b). FIG. 47(b) is a flowchart showing error command processing. This error command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the error command received from the sound lamp control device 113 .

In the error command process, first, an error occurrence flag indicating that an error has occurred in the ON state is set to ON (S7201). Then, among the error determination flags provided for each error type, the error determination flag corresponding to the error type indicated by the error command is turned on, and the other error determination flags are set to off (S7202). End the process and return to the command determination process.

In the display setting process (S6303), if the occurrence of an error is detected based on the error occurrence flag set by the process of S7201, the type of error that has occurred is determined from the error determination flag set by the process of S7202. A process is executed to cause the third symbol display device 81 to display a warning image corresponding to the type.

Note that if it is determined that two or more error commands are stored in the command buffer area, in the process of S7202, the error discrimination flags corresponding to all error types indicated by the respective error commands are set to ON. As a result, the warning images corresponding to all the error types are displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the player and the people involved in the hall can correctly grasp the occurrence of the error.

Now, return to the description of FIG. If it is determined in the process of S6418 that there is no error command (S6418: No), then the process corresponding to other unprocessed commands is executed (S6420), and the process returns to the process of S6401.

In the process of S6401, which is executed again after each command has been processed, it is again determined whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area, and if there is an unprocessed new command (S6401: Yes ), and the processing of S6402 to S6420 is executed again. Then, the processing of S6401 to S6420 is repeatedly executed until there is no unprocessed new command in the command buffer area. End the process.

The simple command determination process (S6308) executed when the simple image display flag 233c is ON in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 41(b)) is similar to the command determination process. However, in the simple command determination process, only the commands necessary to display the power-on image, that is, the fluctuation pattern command for display and the stop type command for display, are extracted from the unprocessed commands stored in the command buffer area. It extracts and executes fluctuation pattern command processing (see FIG. 43(a)) and stop type command processing (see FIG. 43(b)), which are processing corresponding to each command, and for other commands, A process to discard the command without executing the process corresponding to the command is performed.

Here, in the variation pattern command processing (see FIG. 43A) executed in this case, in the processing of S6501, the display data table buffer corresponding to the display of the variation image at power-on is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. The image data of the power-on main image and the power-on varying image which are set and required in that case are stored in the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on varying image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, in the process of S6502, the process of writing Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e and clearing the contents thereof is performed.

Next, details of the display setting process (S6303), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described with reference to FIGS. 48 to 50. FIG. FIG. 48 is a flow chart showing this display setting process.

In this display setting process, as shown in FIG. 48, first, it is determined whether or not the new command flag is on (S7301). ), it is determined that the new command has not been processed in the command determination processing executed first, the processing of S7302 to S7304 is skipped, and the processing proceeds to S7305. On the other hand, if the new command flag is ON (S7301: Yes), it is determined that the new command has been processed in the previously executed command determination processing, and after setting the new command flag to OFF (S7302), S7303-S7304 , the process corresponding to the new command is executed.

In the process of S7303, it is determined whether or not the error occurrence flag is ON (S7303). Then, if the error occurrence flag is on (S7303: Yes), warning image setting processing is executed (S7304).

Details of the warning image setting process will now be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 49 is a flowchart showing warning image setting processing. This process is a process for developing image data for displaying a warning image corresponding to an error that has occurred on the third pattern display device 81. First, the error determination flag is referred to, and all error determination flags set to ON are displayed. Warning image data for displaying an error warning image corresponding to the flag on the third pattern display device 81 is developed (S7401).

In task processing (S6304), based on the expanded warning image data, the types of sprites (display objects) that make up the warning image are specified, and for each sprite, the display coordinate position, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, etc. are specified. Determine various parameters required for drawing.

Then, in the warning image setting process, after the process of S7401, the error occurrence flag is set to OFF (S7402), and the process returns to the display setting process.

Now, return to the description of FIG. After the warning image setting process (S7304), or when it is determined in the process of S7303 that the error occurrence flag is not ON, that is, it is OFF (S7303: No), the process proceeds to S7305.

In S7305, pointer update processing is executed (S7305). Details of the pointer update process will now be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 50 is a flowchart showing pointer update processing. This pointer updating process acquires the transfer data information of the corresponding drawing contents or transfer target image data from the display data table and the transfer data table stored in the respective buffers of the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table buffer 233e. This is the process of updating the pointer 233f that specifies the target address.

In this pointer update process, first, 1 is added to the pointer 233f (S7501). That is, the pointer 233f is basically updated so that it is incremented by 1 each time the V interrupt process is executed. Further, as described above, in the various data tables, the Start information is described at the address "0000H", and the substance of each data is specified after the address "0001H". When the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 in accordance with the storage in the data table buffer 233d, the value is updated to 1 by this pointer update processing. Substantial data can be read from the data table.

After the value of the pointer 233f is updated by the processing of S7501, it is then checked whether the data at the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d is End information. is determined (S7502). As a result, if it is End information (S7502: Yes), it means that the pointer 233f has been updated past the address where the substance data is described in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d.

Therefore, it is determined whether or not the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is a demonstration display data table (S7503). Time data corresponding to the presentation time of the demonstration display data table set in the table buffer 233d is set in the clock counter 233h (S7504), and the process proceeds to S7507.

On the other hand, in the process of S7503, if it is determined that the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is not the demonstration display data table (S7503: No), the display data table is the standby state rendering display data table. (S7505), if it is the display data table for standby state effect (S7505: Yes), in the effect time of the display data table for standby state effect set in the display data table buffer 233d The corresponding time data is set in the clock counter 233h (S7506), and the process proceeds to S7507.

In the process of S7507, the pointer 233f is initialized by setting it to 1 (S7507), this process is terminated, and the process returns to the display setting process. As a result, in the display setting process, the drawing contents can be developed sequentially from the top of the demonstration display data table, so that the third symbol display device 81 can repeatedly display the demonstration effect.

On the other hand, in the process of S7505, if it is determined that the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is not the display data table for waiting state effect (S7505: No), the value of the pointer 233f is decremented by one. (S7508), this process is terminated, and the process returns to the display setting process. As a result, in the display setting process, when a display data table other than the demonstration display data table, for example, a variable display data table, is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the previous address in which the End information is described is displayed. is always developed, the third pattern display device 81 can display the last image defined by the display data table in a stopped state. On the other hand, in the process of S7502, if the data of the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f is not the End information (S7502: No), this process is terminated and the process returns to the display setting process.

Here, returning to FIG. 48, the description is continued. After the pointer update process, the drawing contents of the address indicated by the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update process are obtained from the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d (S7306). In the task processing (S6304), the type of the sprite (display object) that constitutes the image is specified based on the rendering content developed in the process of S7306 together with the previously developed warning image, etc., and for each sprite, Determine various parameters required for drawing, such as display coordinate position, magnification, and rotation angle.

Next, the value of the clock counter 233h is decremented by 1 (S7307), and it is determined whether or not the value of the clock counter 233h after the subtraction is 0 or less (S7308). Then, if the value of the clock counter 233h is 1 or more (S7308: No), the display setting process is terminated and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, if the value of the clock counter 233h is 0 or less (S7308: Yes), it means that the effect time corresponding to the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d has elapsed. At this time, if the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, it is time to end the variable display and perform the stop display, so it is checked whether the fixed display flag is on. (S7309).

As a result, if the confirmed display flag is off (S7309: No), the confirmed display effect has not yet been performed, and it is time to perform the confirmed display effect. setting (S7310), and then, by writing Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e, the content is cleared (S7311). Then, the time data corresponding to the presentation time of the fixed display data table is set in the clock counter 233h (S7312), and the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S7313). Then, after the confirmation display flag indicating that the confirmation display effect is being performed in the ON state is set to ON (S7314), the content of the stop symbol discrimination flag is copied as it is to the previous stop symbol discrimination flag provided in the work RAM 233. (S7315), returns to V interrupt processing.

Thereby, when the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, etc., the fixed display effect of the stop symbol in the variable effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in accordance with the end of the effect. You can set the drawing contents like this. In addition, only by changing the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d to the fixed display data table, the effect displayed on the third pattern display device 81 can be easily changed to the fixed display effect. In addition, compared to the conventional case of changing the display contents by activating another program, the program does not become complicated and bloated, and therefore the MPU 231 is not overloaded. A wide variety of effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 regardless of the processing capability of the display control device 114 .

It should be noted that the last stop symbol determination flag set by the process of S7315 is used to specify the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the next variation effect. That is, as described above, the display of the third symbol in the variable effect changes according to the stop symbol of the variable effect performed immediately before. Until a predetermined time elapses after the start, the pattern offset information from the stop pattern of the fluctuation performance performed one before is described. In the task processing (S6304), until a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the variation, from the last stop design determination flag set by S7315, the stop design of the fluctuation production performed one before is specified, and the The third symbol to be actually displayed is specified by adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the specified stop symbol. As a result, the variable performance is started from the stop symbol in the previous variable performance.

On the other hand, in the process of S7309, if the fixed display flag is ON (S7309: Yes), it is determined whether or not the demonstration display flag is ON (S7316). Then, if the demonstration display flag is off (S7316: No), it means that the value of the clock counter 233h has become 0 or less with the end of the fixed display effect. After that, a process for displaying a demonstration effect on the third symbol display device 81 is performed.

First, the demonstration display data table is acquired and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S7317), and the contents thereof are cleared by writing Null data in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S7318). Then, the time data corresponding to the presentation time of the demonstration display data table is set in the clock counter 233h (S7319). Then, the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S7320), the demonstration display flag indicating that the demonstration is being performed in the ON state is set to ON (S7321), the process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process.

As a result, when the display variation pattern command indicating the start of the next variation effect is not received after the fixed display effect is completed, the demonstration effect is automatically displayed on the third pattern display device 81. , you can set its drawing contents.

In the process of S7316, if the demonstration display flag is ON (S7316: Yes), it means that the demonstration effect is performed after the fixed display effect is finished, and that demonstration effect is finished, so the display setting process is finished as it is. and return to V interrupt processing. In this case, various settings are made so that the demonstration effect is started again by the pointer updating process executed in the next V interrupt process. The demonstration effect can be repeatedly displayed on the third pattern display device 81 until a new display variation pattern command is received.

The simple display setting process (S6309) executed when the simple image display flag 233c is ON in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 41(b)) also performs the same process as the display setting process. However, in the simple display setting process, one of the power-on variable images according to the stop pattern set based on the display stop type command is displayed for a predetermined time after the effect time of the power-on variable image ends. A process of setting a display data table specifying that the image is to be displayed still in the display data table buffer 233d is performed.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 51 and 52, the details of the transfer setting process (S6305), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. First, FIG. 51(a) is a flow chart showing this transfer setting process.

In this transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is ON (S7601). If the simple image display flag 233c is on (S7601: Yes), all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, so the resident image transfer setting is made. Processing is executed (S7602), the transfer setting processing is terminated, and the processing returns to the V interrupt processing. As a result, a transfer instruction is set for the image controller 237 to transfer the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 . Details of the resident image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

On the other hand, if the simplified image display flag 233c is not turned on as a result of the processing of S7601, that is, if it is turned off (S7601: No), all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video data. It has been transferred to the RAM 235 . In this case, the normal image transfer setting process is executed (S7603), the transfer setting process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. As a result, the transfer instruction is set so that the subsequent transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236 . Details of the normal image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, resident image transfer setting processing (S7602), which is part of the transfer setting processing (S6305) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 51B is a flow chart showing this resident image transfer setting process (S7602).

In this resident image transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not an instruction to transfer untransferred image data has been given to the image controller 237 (S7701). ), and further determines whether or not the image data transfer processing performed by the image controller 237 based on the transfer instruction has ended (S7702). In the process of S7702, after instructing the image controller 237 to transfer the image data, if a transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process has ended. . If it is determined by the process of S7702 that the transfer process has not ended (S7702: No), the image controller 237 continues the image transfer process, so this resident image transfer setting process is executed. finish. On the other hand, if it is determined that the transfer process has ended (S7702: Yes), the process proceeds to S7703. Also, as a result of the processing of S7701, even if the transfer instruction for the image data that has not been transferred has not been transmitted to the image controller 237 (S7701: No), the process proceeds to S7703.

In the process of S7703, it is determined whether or not all resident target image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 have been transferred (S7703). A transfer instruction is set for the image controller 237 so as to transfer the resident image data to be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 (S7704), and this processing is terminated.

As a result, the transfer data information about the untransferred resident target image data is included in the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing process, and the image controller 237 transfers the transfer data described in the drawing list. Based on the data information, the resident target image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 . The transfer data information includes the head address and the end address of the character ROM 234 in which the resident target image data is stored, the transfer destination information (in this case, the resident video RAM 235), and the transfer destination (where the data is transferred). The first address of the area provided in the resident video RAM 235 where the resident target image data is to be stored is included. The image controller 237 executes image transfer processing based on this transfer data information, reads the image data specified in the transfer processing from the character ROM 234, temporarily stores it in the buffer RAM 237a, and then stores it in the buffer RAM 237a while the resident video RAM 235 is not in use. , it is transferred to the specified address of the resident video RAM 235 . Then, when the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231 .

As a result of the process of S7703, if all the resident target image data have been transferred (S7703: Yes), the simple image display flag 233c is set to OFF (S7705), and this process ends. As a result, in the V interrupt processing (see FIG. 41B), the command is executed instead of the simple command determination processing (see S6308 in FIG. Since determination processing (see FIGS. 42 to 47) and display setting processing (see FIGS. 48 to 50) are executed, normal image drawing is set, and third symbol display device 81 has A normal image is displayed. Further, subsequent transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 is carried out to the normal video RAM 236 by normal image transfer setting processing (see FIG. 52) (see S7601: No in FIG. 51A).

By executing this resident image transfer setting process, the MPU 231 transfers all resident images to be resident in the resident video RAM 235, excluding the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image that have already been transferred in the main process. The target image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 . The MPU 231 then controls the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 to be held without being overwritten while the power is turned on. As a result, the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer setting process will be resident in the resident video RAM 235 while the power is turned on.

Therefore, after all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the display controller 114 uses the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235 while the image controller 237 can perform image drawing processing. As a result, if the image data used for drawing processing is resident in the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a, which has a slow read speed, when drawing the image. Therefore, the time required for the reading can be omitted, and the image can be drawn immediately and the drawn image can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 .

In particular, the resident video RAM 235 stores image data of frequently displayed images such as rear images, third designs, character designs, and error messages, as well as main controller 110, sound lamp controller 113, and display controller 114. Since the image data of the image to be displayed is immediately resident after the display is determined by such as, even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND type flash memory 234a, various operations performed by the player at any timing can be prevented. , high responsiveness can be maintained until the third pattern display device 81 displays some image.

Next, with reference to FIG. 52, the normal image transfer setting process (S7603), which is one process of the transfer setting process (see FIG. 51A and S6305) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. FIG. 52 is a flow chart showing this normal image transfer setting process (S7603).

In this normal image transfer setting process, first, the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e is updated by the pointer update process (S7305) of the previously executed display setting process (see FIG. 48, S6303). The information described in the address indicated by the pointer 233f is obtained (S7801). Then, it is determined whether or not the acquired information is transfer data information (S7802). , and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are extracted and stored in the transfer data buffer provided in the work RAM 233 ( S7803), furthermore, the transfer start flag, which is provided in the work RAM 233 and indicates that there is image data to be transferred in the ON state, is set to ON (S7804), and the process proceeds to S7805.

Also, in the processing of S7802, if the acquired information is not the transfer data information but Null data (S7802: No), the processing of S7803 and S7804 is skipped and the processing proceeds to S7805. In the process of S7805, it is determined whether or not a new image data transfer instruction has been set for the image controller 237 after the previous image data transfer is completed (S7805), and the transfer instruction is set. If so (S7805: Yes), it is further determined whether or not the image data transfer performed by the image controller 237 based on the transfer instruction has ended (S7806).

In the process of S7806, after setting an image data transfer instruction to the image controller 237, if a transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process has ended. . If it is determined by the process of S7806 that the transfer process has not ended (S7806: No), the image controller 237 continues the image transfer process, so the normal image transfer setting process is executed. finish. On the other hand, if it is determined that the transfer process has ended (S7806: Yes), the process proceeds to S7807. Also, as a result of the process of S7805, even if the image data transfer instruction is not set for the image controller 237 after the previous transfer process is completed (S7805: No), the process proceeds to S7807.

In the processing of S7807, it is determined whether or not the transfer start flag is on (S7807). is turned off (S7808), the image data of the sprite indicated by the various information stored in the transfer data buffer by the processing of S7803 is set as the image data to be transferred, and then the processing proceeds to S7813. On the other hand, if the transfer start flag is not on, but off (S7807: No), then it is determined whether or not the back image change flag is on (S7809). Then, if the back image change flag is not on but off (S7809: No), there is no image data to start transferring, so the normal image transfer setting process ends.

On the other hand, if the back image change flag is on (S7809: Yes), it means that the back image has been changed. Of the discrimination flags, the image data of the back image corresponding to the back image discrimination flag in ON state is specified, and the image data is set as the transfer target image data (S7811). Furthermore, the head address (storage source head address) and the end address (storage source end address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data of the back image corresponding to the back image discrimination flag in the ON state is stored, and the transfer destination (usually (S7812), and the process proceeds to S7813.

In the process of S7813, it is determined whether or not the image data to be transferred has already been stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S7813). The determination in the process of S7813 is performed by referring to the stored image data determination flag 233i. That is, the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is read from the stored image data discrimination flag 233i, and if the storage state is "on", the image data of the sprite to be transferred is normal video. If it is determined that the data is stored in the RAM 236 and the storage state is "OFF", it is determined that the image data of the sprite to be transferred is not stored in the normal video RAM 236. FIG.

As a result of the process of S7813, if the image data to be transferred is stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S7813: Yes), there is no need to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. , the normal image transfer setting process ends. This makes it possible to prevent image data from being wastefully transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, thereby reducing the processing load on each unit of the display control device 114 and the traffic on the bus line 240. can be planned.

On the other hand, if the image data to be transferred is not stored in the normal video RAM 236 as a result of the process of S7813 (S7813: No), a transfer instruction for the image data to be transferred is set (S7814). As a result, the transfer data information of the transfer target image data is included in the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing process, and the image controller 237 receives the transfer data information described in the drawing list. Based on this, the image data of the image to be transferred can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 . The transfer data information includes the leading address and the trailing address of the character ROM 234 storing the image data of the image to be transferred, information on the transfer destination (in this case, the normal video RAM 236), and the transfer destination (in this case, the transfer destination). The start address of the sub-area provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 in which the image data of the image to be transferred is to be stored. The image controller 237 executes image transfer processing based on this transfer data information, reads the image data specified in the transfer processing from the character ROM 234, and specifies the specified video RAM (normal video RAM 236 here). forward to the specified address. Then, when the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231 .

After the processing of S7814, the stored image data determination flag 233i is updated (S7815), and this normal image transfer setting processing is terminated. The stored image data determination flag 233i is updated by, as described above, setting the storage state corresponding to the sprite that has become the image data to be transferred to "on", and by substituting the same image storage area 236a as the one sprite. This is done by setting the storage state corresponding to other sprites that are to be stored in the area to "off".

By executing the normal image transfer process in this way, the process corresponding to the display stop type command is executed in the previously executed command determination process. When the received stop type information is determined to be a jackpot stop type, the image data used in the opening effect can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. Further, when the back image is changed based on the reception of the back image change command in the previously executed command determination process, the image data used for the back image is stored in the back image of the resident video RAM 235 . Image data not stored in the image area 235c can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 without delay.

In addition, in this embodiment, the display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d in response to a command (for example, display variation pattern command) or the like transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. , a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Then, by executing the normal image transfer setting process, the MPU 231 sends to the image controller 237 according to the transfer data information described in the area indicated by the pointer 233f of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Since the transfer instruction of the image data to be transferred is set, the sprite image data used in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d can be reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing. can be done.

Here, the transfer data table stores the image data to be transferred so that the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a before the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information is defined for a predetermined address, the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a in accordance with the transfer data information defined in this transfer data table, whereby the predetermined address is displayed according to the display data table. image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 necessary for drawing the sprite can be stored in the image storage area 236a without fail.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the image required for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance and transferred to the normal video RAM 236 without delay, so that the image can be displayed. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. - 特許庁Also, only the image data temporarily resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 by the description of the transfer data table.

The transfer data table defines transfer data information so that image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to a sprite. As a result, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the processing related to the transfer can be easily performed. By controlling the transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 on a sprite-by-sprite basis, the transfer of image data can be controlled in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in the load applied to the transfer.

Next, with reference to FIG. 53, details of the drawing process (S6306), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. FIG. 53 is a flow chart showing this drawing process.

In the drawing process, the types of various sprites that make up one frame determined in task processing (S6304) and the parameters necessary for drawing each sprite (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucency value, α blending information , color information, filter designation information) and the transfer instruction set by the transfer setting process (S6305), a drawing list (see FIG. 20) is generated (S7901). That is, in the processing of S7901, the type and address of the storage RAM in which the image data of the sprite is stored are specified for each sprite from the types of various sprites forming one frame determined in the task processing (S6304). , parameters necessary for the sprite determined by task processing are associated with the specified storage RAM type and address. Then, after rearranging each sprite in the order of the sprite that should be placed on the front side from the sprite that should be placed on the back side in the image for one frame, the details of each sprite are displayed in the order of the sprites after the rearrangement. As drawing information (detailed information), a drawing list is generated by describing the storage RAM type and address in which sprite image data is stored and the parameters necessary for drawing the sprite. When a transfer instruction is set by the transfer setting process (S6305), the top address (storage source top address) of the character ROM 234 where the image data to be transferred is stored as the transfer data information is displayed at the end of the drawing list. , the final address (storage source final address), and the top address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236).

As described above, the area of the resident video RAM 235 in which the image data of the sprite is stored or the subarea of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed for each sprite. , according to the sprite type, the storage RAM type and address where the image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately specified, and such information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

When the drawing list is generated, the generated drawing list and the drawing target buffer information specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233j are transmitted to the image controller (S7902). Here, when the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 0, the drawing target buffer flag 233j includes information instructing to expand the image drawn in the first frame buffer 236b as the drawing target buffer information. includes information instructing to develop the image drawn in the second frame buffer 236c as drawing target buffer information.

Based on the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 draws the images in order from the sprite described at the head of the drawing list, and develops the images in the frame buffer indicated by the drawing object buffer information by overwriting. As a result, in the image for one frame generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be arranged on the rearmost side, and the sprite drawn last can be arranged on the frontmost side.

When transfer data information is included in the drawing list, the transfer data information is used to determine the start address (storage source start address) and the end address (storage source end address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data to be transferred is stored. ) and the head address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236), and the image data stored from the head address of the storage source to the end address of the storage source are sequentially read from the character ROM 234 and temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a. After that, the image data stored in the buffer RAM 237a are sequentially transferred to the area indicated by the transfer destination start address of the normal video RAM 236 when the normal video RAM 236 is not in use. The image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 is used based on the drawing list transmitted from the MPU 231 after that, and the image is drawn according to the drawing list.

The image controller 237 reads the image information of the previously developed image from a frame buffer different from the frame buffer designated by the drawing object buffer information, and sends the image information along with the drive signal to the third pattern display device 81. Send to As a result, the image developed in the frame buffer can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 . Also, while expanding the image drawn in one of the frame buffers, the image drawn from one of the frame buffers can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and drawing processing and display processing are simultaneously processed in parallel. be able to.

In the drawing process, after the process of S7902, the drawing target buffer flag 233j is updated (S7903). Then, the drawing process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. The rendering target buffer flag 233j is updated by inverting its value, that is, by setting the value to "1" if it was "0" and to "0" if it was "1". done. As a result, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c each time the drawing list is transmitted.

Here, the transmission of the drawing list is executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing processing and display processing of one frame of image are completed. This is performed each time the drawing process of the load process (see FIG. 41(b)) is performed. As a result, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image of one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information for one frame is read. is executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for developing the image for one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing processing for the image for one frame is completed. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information for the first half is read. Therefore, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read out and displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. .

After the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. be done. Therefore, the image information of the image developed in the second frame buffer 236c earlier can be read out and displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. . After that, the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame are set to either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c every 20 milliseconds. By specifying these alternately, it is possible to perform display processing of an image for one frame continuously in units of 20 milliseconds while drawing processing for an image for one frame is being performed.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, the opening/closing door 65f1 of the variable winning device 65, which pays out prize balls when a game ball enters the jackpot, is closed, and the right specific prize winning opening 65a is closed. In a state in which it is impossible to enter a game ball, the upper surface of the opening/closing door 65f1 is configured so that a game ball can flow down. The upper surface of the opening/closing door 65f1 is configured so that game balls in a number exceeding the number of entering balls (that is, two) which is the condition for ending the first round can flow down at the same time. In other words, after one game ball reaches the upper surface of the opening and closing door 65f1, until it passes through the upper surface of the opening and closing door 65f1, the number of entering balls (that is, two) that is the end condition of the first round is set. It is configured so that more game balls can reach the upper surface of the opening/closing door 65f1. As a result, at the timing when the first round is started (the opening/closing door 65f1 is opened), the more game balls flowing down the upper surface of the opening/closing door 65f1, the more game balls flowing down on the opening/closing door 65f1. , the ball is entered into the right specific prize winning opening 65a from the opened opening/closing door 65f1, and more prize balls can be obtained. Therefore, at the start timing of one round of the jackpot, the game can be played by paying attention to the number of game balls flowing down the upper surface of the opening/closing door 65f1, so that the interest of the player at the start of the first round is improved. can be made

In addition, the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment is configured to start a big win when a game ball enters the operation winning hole 660 when a special symbol lottery results in a big win. As a result, the player can adjust the timing of starting the first round of the big win by adjusting the timing of shooting the game ball toward the operation winning hole 660, which is more advantageous for the player. It is possible to realize a game property in which a game ball is entered into the operation winning opening 660 by targeting the timing (that is, the timing when more game balls are passing over the upper surface of the opening/closing door 65f1). Therefore, it is possible to vary the amount of prize balls (privileges) that the player can obtain during the predetermined period of the jackpot (until the end of one round) according to the skill of the player (the timing of aiming at the operation winning hole 660). The timing of entering the game ball into the operation winning hole 660 can be determined more seriously. Therefore, it is possible to further enhance the player's interest in the game.

Furthermore, in the first embodiment, in the jackpot standby state from when the jackpot is confirmed until the jackpot is started, when the game ball is entered into the operation winning hole 660, the player can receive A possible benefit (the number of prize balls) is suggested to the player by an effect mode (the number of gauges of the chance meter CM). By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it easier to understand the timing at which the operation winning opening 660 should be aimed. Therefore, even a player who has little experience playing a game with the pachinko machine 10 can realize easy-to-understand game characteristics, so that a game machine that is difficult for the player to shy away from can be provided. Therefore, the operating rate of the pachinko machine 10 can be improved.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, by providing three convex portions 65f1a to 65f1c on the upper surface of the opening/closing door 65f1, the game ball is configured to detour around the convex portions 65f1a to 65f1c, and the game ball passes through the opening/closing door. Although the passage period through 65f1 is long, it is not limited to this. For example, instead of or in addition to providing the convex portions 65f1a to 65f1c, the material of the upper surface of the open/close door 65f1 is set to have a higher friction coefficient than other portions (the surface of the game board 13, the inner surface of the right variable winning device 65, etc.). It may be made of a material with a high tensile strength (for example, an elastic body), or may be processed to make it difficult for the game ball to roll (for example, providing unevenness on the surface).

In the first embodiment, 30 seconds have passed since the start of one round, or when two or more game balls enter the right specific winning hole 65a before 30 seconds have passed, the first round was configured to end the That is, the end condition was set such that if the player hits to the right, the upper limit number (two) of game balls are almost certainly entered into the right specific winning hole 65a to end the first round. , but not limited to these. For example, after the first round is started, even if the player hits to the right aiming at the right specific winning hole 65a, the first round may be finished in a period of time during which it becomes difficult to enter the game ball. . Specifically, for example, 0.5 seconds have passed since the start of one round, or 10 or more game balls have entered the right specific winning hole 65a before 0.5 seconds have passed, one round It is good also as a structure which ends an eye. When configured in this way, if the game ball is not passing through the upper surface of the opening/closing door 65f1 at the timing when the game ball enters the operation winning hole 660, even one game ball enters the right specific winning hole 65a. It is possible to provide a playability that increases the possibility that the first round will end without making a ball. Therefore, a player who wants to win a prize ball in the first round is made to launch a game ball toward the opening/closing door 65f1 before entering the game ball into the operation winning hole 660 in the jackpot standby state. It is possible to entertain the game property of aiming at the operation winning hole 660 later. Therefore, the player's interest in the game in the jackpot waiting state can be improved.

In the first embodiment, in the jackpot standby state, the number of game balls passing through the upper surface of the opening/closing door 65f1 is indicated by the gauge number of the chance meter CM, thereby allowing the game balls to enter the operation winning opening 660. Although the configuration suggests the degree of advantage when the ball is thrown, it is not limited to this. For example, the gauge number of the chance meter CM may be used to indicate the degree of advantage of the big win. Specifically, for example, by suggesting the type of jackpot based on the number of gauges of the chance meter CM, it may be configured to suggest to the player the degree of advantage when the game ball is entered into the operation winning hole 660 . Further, for example, the number of rounds for the big win may be set to be unfixed when the big win is confirmed, and the number of rounds for the big win may be drawn by lottery at the timing of passing through the operation winning opening 660.例文帳に追加Then, by suggesting the number of rounds determined by a lottery executed when a game ball is entered into the operating winning hole 660 according to the number of gauges, the number of rounds when a game ball is entered into the operating winning hole 660 is suggested. It may be configured to suggest the degree of advantage to the player.

In the first embodiment, the rotating member 670a is configured to continue to rotate at a constant speed while the game machine is powered on, but the present invention is not limited to this. In the jackpot standby state, the rotational position of the rotating member 670a may be changed between an arrangement that prevents the entry of a ball into the operation winning opening 660 and an arrangement that does not interfere with it. Only the rotating member 670a may be rotated at a constant speed, and the operation may be stopped in other states.

In the first embodiment, the rotational speed of the rotating member 670a is constant, but the present invention is not limited to this. may be configured. By configuring in this way, the degree of difficulty of entering the game ball into the operating winning hole 660 becomes higher, so when the game ball enters the operating winning hole 660 as intended, the player is more likely to enter. can please.

In the first embodiment, the waiting state effect suggests the degree of advantage (the number of prize balls that can be obtained in the first round) when the big win is started, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, in place of or in addition to the degree of advantage when the big win is started, an effect suggesting the degree of advantage of the big win itself may be executed by a standby state effect. Specifically, for example, it may be configured to execute an effect suggesting the game state after the jackpot (whether or not the variable probability jackpot is achieved), the number of rounds, or the like. In addition, when executing an effect suggesting the degree of advantage of the big win itself, it does not have to be executed during the big win waiting state. For example, when the third symbol is stopped and displayed, the type of the third symbol may suggest the degree of advantage of the big win itself during execution. Also, the degree of advantage of the big win itself may be suggested during the opening period, the round period, the ending period, or the like.

In the first embodiment, the pachinko machine 10 of the type in which a jackpot is won in a special symbol lottery and the jackpot starts when a game ball enters the operation winning hole 660 has been described as an example, but the specifications are different. may be applied to the pachinko machine 10. For example, it may be applied to a pachinko machine 10 in which a jackpot is started when a game ball enters a specific area on the game board 13 . That is, the type of pachinko machine 10 (so-called two-type type) that is not equipped with the function itself for performing the special symbol lottery, or the function of performing the special symbol lottery is installed, but what is the result of the special symbol lottery? Regardless, it may be applied to a pachinko machine 10 of a type in which a jackpot is started when a game ball enters a specific area (so-called one type and two types mixed type). By configuring in this way, it is possible to vary the advantage of the first round of the big hit according to the number of game balls on the upper surface of the opening/closing door 65f1 when the game balls enter the specific area.

<Second embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 54 to 62. FIG. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment described above, when a special symbol lottery results in a big win, the state shifts to a big win standby state, and a game ball is entered into the operation winning hole 660 during the big win standby state. It was configured to start a jackpot when Also, the operation winning opening 660 is configured to be provided only at one place on the upper right side of the game board 13 . That is, in the case of the jackpot waiting state, regardless of the jackpot type, the jackpot starts unless the game ball is shot toward the upper right side of the game board 13 and entered into the operation winning hole 660. It was configured to not be

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment, the operation winning openings (right operation winning opening 661, left operation winning opening 662) are provided on the upper right side and the lower left side of the game board 13 to trigger the start of the jackpot. is provided, and according to the type of jackpot, the operation winning opening that triggers the start of the jackpot is changed. In addition, the left operation winning opening 662 is configured such that game balls enter almost automatically in a relatively short time (approximately 0.5 seconds) when a jackpot standby state is entered. In other words, in the case of the jackpot type that triggers the start of the jackpot, the first round of the jackpot is started before the game ball reaches the upper surface of the opening/closing door 65f1. . In other words, it is configured to provide a jackpot type that makes it impossible for the player to aim for an over-winning in the first round. As a result, it is possible to set a jackpot type that can aim for over-winning and a jackpot type that cannot aim for over-winning. Differences can be made.

The pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment is structurally different from the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment in that the board structure of the game board 13 is partially changed. , and the configuration of the RAM 203 is partially changed, the control processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 is partially changed, and the control executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 The only difference is that the process has changed. Other configurations, other processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, other processing executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113, and various processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 are described in It is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in one embodiment. Hereinafter, elements that are the same as those of the first embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals, and illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

First, referring to FIG. 54, the board configuration of the game board 13 in the second embodiment will be described. As shown in FIG. 54, on the upper right side of the game board 13 in the front view, instead of the operation winning hole 660 in the first embodiment, a right operating winning hole 661 into which a game ball can enter is provided. This right operation winning port 661 is an operation winning that triggers the start of six types of jackpots A2, B2, D2, F2 to H2 among the eight types of jackpots (jackets A2 to H2) in the second embodiment. is the mouth. This right-operating winning port 661 is entered only during the jackpot standby state that is shifted when one of the six types of jackpots (jackpots A2, B2, D2, F2 to H2) is obtained in the special symbol lottery. It is configured to be determined as valid.

Further, as shown in FIG. 54, on the lower left side in front view with respect to the first ball entrance 64, there is provided a left-operating winning opening 662 into which a game ball can enter. This left operating winning port 662 is an operating winning port that triggers the start of two types of jackpots C2 and E2 among the eight types of jackpots (jackpots A2 to H2) in the second embodiment. That is, in the jackpot standby state that shifts when either jackpot C2 or E2 is obtained in the lottery of special symbols, it is an operation winning port where entry of a game ball is determined to be effective. As shown in FIG. 54, a storage device 675 is provided above the left operation winning port 662 in a front view. This storage device 675 is configured to be able to store only one game ball that has flowed down from vertically above. The storage device 675 can receive and store a game ball that has entered the storage device 675 (prevent the flow of the game ball) at the lower end of the flow path configured with a width that allows one game ball to flow down. A storage valve 675a is provided which can be changed between a closed position and an open position where the game ball is discharged downward from the storage device 675 without hindering the flow of the game ball entering the storage device 675. there is

The storage valve 675a of the storage device 675 is changed to the open position when the big win standby state is set, and is changed to the closed position at the end of the big win. As shown in FIG. 54, the left operation winning port 662 is arranged directly below the storage device 675, so when the game balls are stored in the storage device 675 and the game balls are stored in the jackpot standby state, the storage valve 675a is opened. As a result of the stored game balls flowing downward due to the opening, the game balls enter the left operation winning opening 662 immediately after the big win standby state (after about 0.5 seconds). Here, in the normal state (low probability state of special symbols and normal state of normal symbols), it is difficult for the game ball to enter the second ball entrance 640 (the electric accessory 640a is difficult to be opened). Aiming at the first ball entrance 64 by hitting to the left is the most profitable game method for the player. When a game ball is shot aiming at the first ball entrance 64, the game ball also flows down in the direction of a storage device 675 arranged on the lower left side of the first ball entrance 64. - 特許庁As a result, during normal times, the game balls are almost stored in the storage device 675 until the big win is achieved. Therefore, when either of the jackpots C2 and E2 occurs in the normal state, the jackpot is started almost immediately after the jackpot standby state. Therefore, when the jackpots C2 and E2 are reached, the period of the jackpot waiting state is too short, and it is almost impossible to let the game balls reach the upper surface of the opening/closing door 65f1 during the jackpot waiting state, so that the over-winning is avoided. You can no longer aim. For this reason, the number of winning balls in the first round of the jackpot is likely to be the minimum (two), and as a result, compared to the first round of other jackpots, it is disadvantageous in terms of the number of prize balls that can be obtained. Become.

Thus, in the first embodiment, in the jackpot types (jackpots A2, B2, D2, F2 to H2) in which the right operation winning port 661 is the trigger for the start of the jackpot, in the first round as in the first embodiment While the game can be played with the game property of acquiring more prize balls aiming at over winning, in the jack winning types (jack C2, E2) in which the left operation winning opening 662 triggers the start of the jackpot, almost over winning. It was configured so that the jackpot will start soon after aiming. As a result, the degree of advantage in the first round of the jackpot can be differentiated according to the jackpot type, so that when the jackpot is won, the player can be made to pay more attention to the jackpot type. Therefore, the interest of the player can be further improved. In the following, for the sake of simplification of explanation, the type of jackpot that starts when the ball enters the right-acting winning port 661 will be referred to as a "right-motivated jackpot" and will be referred to as a "right-acting jackpot". A jackpot type that is triggered by a ball is referred to as a “left trigger jackpot”.

<Electrical configuration in the second embodiment>
Next, the ROM 202 and RAM 203 of the main controller 110 in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 55 and 56. FIG. In addition, the ROM 202 of the second embodiment is different from the ROM 202 of the first embodiment described above, except that the contents of the first winning type selection table 202b are partially changed. , are the same as those of the first embodiment described above. Therefore, as explanation of ROM202 in 2nd Embodiment, only the detail of the 1st winning classification selection table 202b is demonstrated.

FIG. 55 is a diagram showing the defined contents of the first winning type selection table 202b defined in the ROM 202 in the second embodiment. As shown in FIG. 55, the first hit type selection table 202b in the second embodiment includes five types of jackpot types (jackets A2 to E2) that can be determined when a jackpot is won in the first special symbol lottery. And three types of jackpots (jackpots F2 to H2) that can be determined when a jackpot is won in the lottery of the second special symbols are defined.

As the jackpot of the first special symbol, "jackpot A2" is defined in association with the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the range of "0 to 4" (see 202b1 in FIG. 55). Of the 100 counter values that can be taken by the first winning type counter C2, the number of counter values that become "jackpot A2" is five, so when the first special pattern lottery results in a jackpot, "jackpot A2" is determined. ratio is 5% (5/100). This "jackpot A2" has 8 rounds in the same manner as the "jackpot A" in the first embodiment. It is a jackpot type. In addition, this "jackpot A2" is a kind of right trigger jackpot that is started when the ball enters the right actuation winning hole 661 as a trigger. For this reason, if a game ball can be entered into the right operation winning opening 660 with more game balls reaching the upper surface of the opening and closing door 65f1 during the jackpot standby state, normally (1 round is started) Since a larger number of prize balls can be obtained than when the game ball is hit to the right from the start, the number of prize balls that can be obtained in the first round tends to be more advantageous than the left trigger jackpot.

As the jackpot of the first special symbol, "jackpot B2" is defined in association with the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the range of "5 to 14" (see 202b2 in FIG. 55). Of the 100 counter values that can be taken by the first winning type counter C2, 10 counter values are "jackpot B2", so when the first special symbol lottery results in a jackpot, "jackpot B2" is determined. ratio is 10% (10/100). This "jackpot B2" has 5 rounds like the "jackpot B" in the first embodiment, and after the jackpot ends, "variable state of special symbols" and "time-saving state of normal symbols" are given. It is a jackpot type. Also, this "jackpot B2" is a kind of right trigger jackpot that is started when the ball enters the right actuation winning hole 661, like the "jackpot A2". For this reason, the number of prize balls that can be obtained in the first round tends to be more advantageous than the left trigger jackpot.

As the jackpot of the first special symbol, "jackpot C2" is defined in association with the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the range of "15 to 64" (see 202b3 in FIG. 55). Of the 100 possible counter values of the first winning type counter C2, 50 counter values are the "jackpot C2", so when the first special symbol lottery results in a jackpot, the "jackpot C2" is determined. ratio is 50% (50/100). This "jackpot C2" has 5 rounds like the "jackpot B" in the first embodiment, and after the jackpot is finished, "variable state of special symbols" and "time-saving state of normal symbols" are given. It is a jackpot type. Also, this "jackpot C2" is a kind of left trigger jackpot that is started when the ball enters the left actuation winning hole 662 as a trigger. For this reason, the number of prize balls that can be obtained in the first round tends to be disadvantageous compared to the right trigger jackpot.

As the jackpot of the first special symbol, "jackpot D2" is defined in association with the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the range of "65 to 74" (see 202b4 in FIG. 55). Of the 100 possible counter values of the first winning type counter C2, 10 counter values are "jackpot D2", so when the first special symbol lottery results in a jackpot, "jackpot D2" is determined. ratio is 10% (10/100). This "jackpot D2" has 5 rounds in the same manner as the "jackpot C" in the first embodiment, and after the jackpot ends, "special pattern low probability state" and "ordinary pattern time saving state" are given. It is a jackpot type that is played. In addition, this "jackpot D2" is a kind of right trigger jackpot that is started when the ball enters the right actuation winning hole 661 as a trigger. For this reason, the number of prize balls that can be obtained in the first round tends to be more advantageous than the left trigger jackpot.

As the jackpot of the first special symbol, "jackpot E2" is defined in association with the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the range of "75 to 99" (see 202b5 in FIG. 55). Of the 100 possible counter values of the first winning type counter C2, 25 counter values are the "jackpot E2", so when the first special symbol lottery results in a jackpot, the "jackpot E2" is determined. ratio is 25% (25/100). This "jackpot E2" has 5 rounds like the "jackpot C" in the first embodiment, and after the jackpot ends, "special pattern low probability state" and "ordinary pattern time saving state" are given. It is a jackpot type that is played. Also, this "jackpot E2" is a kind of left trigger jackpot that is started when the ball enters the left actuation winning hole 662 as a trigger. For this reason, the number of prize balls that can be obtained in the first round tends to be disadvantageous compared to the right trigger jackpot.

Thus, in the second embodiment, when the first special symbol lottery results in a jackpot, the right trigger jackpot (any of the jackpots A2, B2, and D2) at a rate of 25%, and a rate of 75%. It is configured so that it becomes a left opportunity jackpot (either jackpot C2 or E2). That is, it is possible to play the game with the game property of aiming at the right operation winning opening 661 with good timing after making more game balls reach the upper surface of the opening and closing door 65f1 during the jackpot waiting state. It is 25% of the case of winning a jackpot in the lottery. Most of them (75%) are jackpots in which the jackpot starts immediately (within about 0.5 seconds) after the jackpot standby state, so when the right timing jackpot hits, the player is forced to win. can make you more happy.

Also, as shown in FIG. 55, the second special symbol jackpot is composed only of the right trigger jackpot. Therefore, when the lottery for the second special symbol results in a big win, the big win is started when the game ball enters the right-operating winning hole 661 without fail. The reason for this configuration is that the second special symbol lottery is basically executed during the "ordinary symbol time saving state", and the player continuously hits the game ball to the right. This is because there is a high possibility that the game ball is not stored in the storage device 675 at the start of the jackpot standby state because it is during the shooting. In other words, even if the left trigger jackpot is provided in the jackpot of the second special symbol, there is a high possibility that the jackpot cannot be started immediately after the jackpot standby state, so the left trigger jackpot is not provided uselessly. It is configured to provide only the right opportunity jackpot. As a result, since the number of jackpot types can be reduced, the storage capacity of the storage area for storing data for each jackpot type can be reduced.

Each jackpot (jackpot F2 to H2) of the second special pattern in the second embodiment is each jackpot (jackpot D to F) of the second special pattern in the first embodiment, and the game state after the number of rounds and the jackpot are exactly the same. Therefore, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In addition, in the second embodiment, when the jackpot of the second special symbol is achieved, the right trigger jackpot is always achieved, but the present invention is not limited to this. Even when the second special symbol hits the jackpot, it may be configured to be the left trigger jackpot at a predetermined ratio (for example, 10%). As described above, when the lottery of the second special symbol is a big hit, the possibility that the game balls are stored in the storage device 675 is low, so even when the left trigger big win, it will be in a big hit waiting state. The game ball does not immediately enter the left operation winning port 662 when the game ball is played. Therefore, when the left trigger jackpot hits, it is possible to provide the game property of measuring the timing of entering the game ball into the left actuation winning opening 662 . That is, depending on whether the right-handed jackpot or the left-handed jackpot is achieved, it is possible to differentiate the operation winning opening to be aimed during the jackpot standby state. Therefore, it is possible to diversify game variations during the jackpot waiting state.

Next, with reference to FIG. 56, the RAM 203 of main controller 110 in the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 56 is a block diagram showing the configuration of RAM 203. As shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 56, the RAM 203 of the second embodiment differs from the RAM 203 of the first embodiment (see FIG. 13) in that a start trigger storage area 203n is added. there is Since other configurations are the same as those of the RAM 203 in the first embodiment, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The start opportunity storage area 203n is a storage area in which data indicating the type of the operation winning opening that serves as the start opportunity for the jackpot is stored. More specifically, when "01H" is stored as data in the starting opportunity storage area 203n, the starting opportunity for the jackpot is the right-actuated winning opening 661 (this jackpot is the right trigger jackpot). When "02H" is stored, it means that the start timing of the jackpot is the left actuation winning port 662 (this jackpot is the left trigger jackpot). The initial value of the start opportunity storage area 203n is set to "00H", and when a special symbol lottery results in a big win and the state shifts to a big win standby state, data corresponding to the big win type this time is overwritten ( See S232 in FIG. 57). During the jackpot standby state, the ball entering the operation winning opening corresponding to the data stored in the start opportunity storage area 203n is monitored, and when the ball entering the monitored operating winning opening is detected, It is configured to set the start of the jackpot (see S1113 and S1114 in FIG. 59). As a result, according to the type of jackpot, it is possible to start a jackpot with a ball entering a different operation winning hole as a trigger. Therefore, when the right trigger jackpot is achieved, it operates with good timing, as in the first embodiment. While the game property of aiming at the winning hole can be realized, the game property of starting the big win without aiming at the operation winning hole can be realized when the left trigger big win occurs. Therefore, it is possible to diversify the playability in the jackpot waiting state.

<Regarding the control process of the main controller in the second embodiment>
Next, various control processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 57 to 60. FIG. First, with reference to FIG. 57, the special symbol variation process 2 (S111) will be described. This special symbol variation process 2 (S111) is a process executed in place of the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 22) in the first embodiment, and is similar to the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 22). This is a process for setting the display in the symbol display device 37, setting the variation pattern of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81, and the like.

Among the special symbol variation processing 2 (see FIG. 57) in the second embodiment, in each processing of S201 to S23, each processing of S201 to S223 of the special symbol variation processing in the first embodiment (see FIG. 22) The same processing is performed.

In addition, in the special symbol variation process 2 (see FIG. 57) in the second embodiment, when the process of S220 ends, the opening of the storage valve 675a is set (S231). By opening the storage valve 675a, when the game ball is stored in the storage device 675, the game ball can enter the left operation winning port 662 immediately after the start of the jackpot standby state. As a result, when the left trigger jackpot is achieved, the jackpot can be started before the game ball reaches the upper surface of the open door 65f1.

When the process of S231 is completed, the data stored in the start opportunity storage area 203n is updated to the data corresponding to the type of the big hit (S232), and the process proceeds to S223. In the process of S232, if the current jackpot is a right trigger jackpot (any of jackpots A2, B2, D2, F2 to H2), "01H" is stored as data, and left trigger jackpot (jackets C2, E2) is stored. Either), "02H" is stored as data.

Next, startup processing 2 in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. This start-up process 2 is a process that is executed in place of the start-up process (see FIG. 29) in the first embodiment, and is a process that is started when the power is turned on.

In the start-up process 2 (see FIG. 58) in the second embodiment, each process of S901-S914 is the same as each process of S901-S914 of the start-up process (see FIG. 29) in the first embodiment. Processing is performed.

Also, in the start-up process 2 (see FIG. 58) in the second embodiment, when the process of S911 is completed, it is then determined whether either the ball waiting flag 203j or the jackpot flag 203m is on ( S921), if it is determined that any flag is ON (S921: Yes), it means that the period during which the retention state of the retention device 675 should be released (during the jackpot standby state or during the jackpot). Therefore, the opening of the storage valve 675a is set (S922), and the process proceeds to S912. On the other hand, in the process of S921, when it is determined that both the incoming ball standby flag 203j and the jackpot flag 203m are off (S921: No), the period during which the storage device 675 should be set to the storage state Since it means that it is (during normal play), the retention valve 675a is set to be closed (S923), and the process proceeds to S912.

Next, with reference to FIG. 59, the jackpot start process 2 (S1021) in the second embodiment will be described. This jackpot start process 2 (S1021) is a process executed instead of the jackpot start process (see FIG. 31) in the first embodiment in the main process (see FIG. 30), and is an operation corresponding to the jackpot type. This is a process for monitoring the entry of a ball into a winning opening (right-operating winning opening 661 or left-operating winning opening 662) and starting a big hit when a ball entering the operating winning opening is detected.

In each of S1101, S1103, and S1104 of the jackpot start processing 2 (see FIG. 59) in the second embodiment, S1101, S1103, and S1104 of the jackpot start processing (see FIG. 31) in the first embodiment, respectively are executed.

In addition, in the jackpot start processing 2 (see FIG. 59) in the second embodiment, when it is determined that the entering ball waiting flag 203j is ON (that is, the jackpot waiting state) in the processing of S1101 (S1101: Yes ), then, the data in the start opportunity storage area 203n is read out (S1111), and it is determined whether the read data is the data (ie, "01H") indicating the right operation winning opening 661 (S1112). In the processing of S1112, if it is determined that the data (that is, "01H") corresponding to the right-acting winning opening 661 is stored (S1112: Yes), then the ball entering the right-acting winning opening 661 is detected. (S1113), and if no ball entry is detected (S1113: No), this process is terminated as it is in order to continue the jackpot standby state. On the other hand, in the process of S1113, if it is determined that the ball has entered the right-acting winning opening 661 (S1113: Yes), the process proceeds to S1103 in order to end the jackpot standby state and start the jackpot. do.

On the other hand, in the process of S1112, when it is determined that the data stored in the start opportunity storage area 203n is the data (that is, "02H") indicating the left actuation winning opening 662 (S1112: No). , determines whether or not a ball entering the left-acting winning port 662 is detected (S1114), and if not detecting a ball entering the left-acting winning port 662 (S1114: No), this processing is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of S1114, when it is determined that the ball has been entered into the left-acting winning hole 662 (S1114: Yes), the process proceeds to S1103 in order to end the jackpot standby state and start the jackpot. do.

By executing this jackpot start process 2 (see FIG. 59), the type of the operation winning opening that triggers the jackpot can be switched according to the jackpot type (whether it is a right trigger jackpot or a left trigger jackpot). can be done. Therefore, when the right trigger jackpot is achieved, the player can enjoy a variable profit (the number of prize balls) in one round of the jackpot according to the timing of aiming for the right-actuated winning hole 661, The game method can be switched to a game property that does not affect the profit (the number of prize balls).

Next, with reference to FIG. 60, the jackpot control process 2 (S1022) in the second embodiment will be described. This jackpot control process 2 (S1022) is a process executed instead of the jackpot control process (see FIG. 32) in the first embodiment in the main process (see FIG. 30). ), it is a process for executing a jackpot effect and opening or closing the specific winning opening 65 a of the variable winning device 65 .

Among the jackpot control processing 2 (see FIG. 60) in the second embodiment, each processing of S1201 to S1217 is the same as each processing of S1201 to S1217 of the jackpot control processing (see FIG. 32) in the first embodiment. Processing is performed. In addition, in the jackpot control process 2 (see FIG. 60) in the second embodiment, after the process of S1214 or S1215 is completed, the closing of the storage valve 675a of the storage device 675 is set (S1221), and the process is started. The process proceeds to S1216. Thereby, the period during which the storage state of the storage device 675 is released can be limited to during the big win standby state and during the big win.

<Regarding control processing of the sound ramp control device in the second embodiment>
Next, control processing executed by the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 61 and 62. FIG. First, with reference to FIG. 61, the winning-related process 2 (S4321) in the second embodiment will be described. This win-related process 2 (S4321) is a process executed instead of the win-related process (see FIG. 37) in the first embodiment. It is a process for executing control corresponding to the type of.

Among the hit-related processes (see FIG. 61) in the second embodiment, S4401 and S4404 to S4410 are the hit-related processes in the first embodiment (see FIG. 37) S4401 and S4404 to S4410, respectively. The same processing as each processing is executed. Also, in the hit-related process 2 (see FIG. 61) in the second embodiment, in the process of S4401, when it is determined that there is a standby state command in the commands received from the main controller 110 (S4401: Yes), A standby state command process for determining the content of the standby state effect is executed according to the received standby state command (S4421), and this process ends. Details of this standby state command processing (S4421) will be described with reference to FIG.

FIG. 62 is a flowchart showing standby state command processing (S4421). In the standby state command processing (S4421), first, it is determined whether or not the current jackpot is the right trigger jackpot (S4601). Similarly, a display standby state command for executing the standby state effect (see FIG. 7) is set (S4602), the standby state effect flag 223g is set to ON (S4603), and this processing ends.

On the other hand, in the processing of S4601, when it is determined that the current jackpot is not the right trigger jackpot (the left trigger jackpot) (S4601: No), instead of executing the standby state production, fixed display was performed in the variable display production. A display standby state command for executing a standby state effect in which the third symbol is continued to be fixedly displayed (extending the fixed display) is set (S4604), and this processing is terminated. In the case of the left trigger jackpot, the reason why the standby state production is such that the fixed display of the third symbol is simply extended is that the jackpot standby state in the case of the left trigger jackpot is extremely short (about 0.5 seconds). This is because the jackpot is started after finishing with . Therefore, when the left trigger jackpot is achieved, if the standby state effect (see FIG. 7) similar to the right trigger jackpot is executed, the standby state effect is displayed for a moment (about 0.5 seconds). Since the big win is started, there is a risk that the player will feel uncomfortable with the displayed content or that the player will be confused. Therefore, in the second embodiment, in the jackpot standby state set based on the left trigger jackpot, the jackpot is started in the display mode (final display of the third symbol) at the end of the variable display effect. It is configured to continue to be displayed as it is until. By configuring in this way, the player can feel as if the big win has just started after the end of the variable display, so that the player feels uncomfortable or is confused. It is possible to prevent (suppress) that it will be done.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment, two types of operation winning openings are provided on the upper right side and the lower left side of the game board 13, and the start timing of the jackpot is determined according to the jackpot type. It is configured to have different operation winning openings. A right-acting winning hole 661 provided on the upper right side of the game board 13 is provided at a position where a game ball can be entered when shot with the right hand, while it is provided on the lower left side of the game board 13. The left actuation winning hole 662 is provided at a position where a game ball can be entered when the game ball is shot by hitting to the left. In addition, above the left operation winning opening 662, a storage device 675 that can store only one game ball is arranged, and the game state of hitting left (low probability state of special symbols, and , normal state of normal symbols), when the player plays a game in which a game ball is shot aiming at the first ball entrance 64, the storage device 675 is almost filled until the jackpot of the first special symbol is achieved. On the other hand, it is constructed so that game balls are stored. Since the storage state of the storage device 675 is canceled when the jackpot standby state is entered, the jackpot type (left trigger jackpot) is started when the ball enters the left actuation winning port 662. In this case, the game balls stored in the storage device 675 flow downward and enter the left operation winning opening 662, so that the big win is started immediately after the big win waiting state. As a result, the left trigger jackpot is more likely to start in the first round of the jackpot when the game ball has not reached the upper surface of the opening/closing door 65f1. The number of prize balls obtained is almost the same each time. On the other hand, when the right trigger jackpot hits, the jackpot does not start unless the game ball is shot aiming at the right-actuated prize-winning port 661, so the game ball enters the right-actuated prize-winning port 661 as in the first embodiment. It is possible to realize a game property in which the number of prize balls that the player can obtain in the first round of the jackpot can be varied according to the timing of the game. Therefore, in the second embodiment, depending on whether the left trigger jackpot or the right trigger jackpot is achieved, the game characteristics in the jackpot waiting state and the first round of the jackpot can be changed. It is possible to make the player pay attention to the game.

In addition, in the second embodiment, according to the type of the jackpot, the operation winning opening that triggers the start of the jackpot is different, but it is not limited to this. For example, in all the jackpot types, the jackpot is configured to start when the game ball enters either the left or right operation winning hole, and then the storage valve 675a is opened and the jackpot type is not opened. It is good also as a structure which provides a jackpot classification. That is, in the case of the left trigger jackpot, the storage valve 675a is opened from the start of the jackpot waiting state to the end of the jackpot, while in the case of the right trigger jackpot, the jackpot waiting state is started. The storage valve 675a may remain closed until the jackpot ends. By configuring in this way, in the case of the left trigger jackpot, immediately after the jackpot is confirmed and displayed, the game ball stored by releasing the reservoir valve 675a enters the left operation winning port 662 (winning). Therefore, as in the above-described second embodiment, the big win can be started without waiting for the game balls to accumulate on the upper surface of the opening/closing door 65f1 (about 0.5 seconds after the big win waiting state). On the other hand, since the storage valve 675a is not opened when the right trigger jackpot hits, the possibility of the game ball entering the left actuation winning hole 662 immediately even if the jackpot is confirmed and displayed is low. Therefore, since the possibility that the big win will start immediately after the confirmation of the big win is displayed, the shooting speed (shooting intensity) of the game ball is varied as in the above-described first and second embodiments. As a result, the number of winning prizes that is the end condition of the first round (that is, It is possible to provide an epoch-making game property in which the number of game balls exceeding 2) can win in the right specific winning hole 65a. As a result, similar to the second embodiment, depending on the jackpot type, the game property that the first round ends with a predetermined number of winning prizes, and the number of winning prizes exceeding the predetermined number depending on the skill of the player. Since it is possible to switch between a game feature in which a game ball can win a prize, the player's interest in the game can be further improved.

In the second embodiment, two operating winning ports (right operating winning port 661 and left operating winning port 662) are provided, and the operating winning port that triggers the start of the jackpot is changed according to the type of jackpot. . That is, immediately after the combination of the third symbols indicating the big hit (that is, the grid) is confirmed and displayed, the game ball enters (wins) the left-operated winning hole 662 where the possibility of the game ball entering is high. After the combination of the jackpot type and the third symbol indicating the jackpot is confirmed and displayed, the game ball enters the right-actuated winning hole 661 where the possibility of the game ball entering is low unless the player aims. It was configured to provide a jackpot type that is started by entering a ball (winning a prize). On the other hand, only the right-operating winning opening 661 is provided, and even if the game ball does not enter (winning) the right-operating winning opening 661 (that is, the combination of the third symbols indicating the big hit is confirmed and displayed. It is also possible to provide a jackpot type in which the jackpot is started only when the game is played and a jackpot type in which the jackpot is not started unless the game ball enters (wins) the right-acting winning port 661 . Since it becomes unnecessary to provide the left operation prize-winning mouth 662 and the storage device 670 by comprising in this way, the number of parts of the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced. Therefore, the cost rate of the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced.

In the second embodiment, the ease with which a game ball enters the first ball entrance 64 is constant regardless of the state of the storage device 675. It is good also as a structure which makes it variable according to the state of the storage device 675 (whether game balls are stored or not). Specifically, for example, the storage device 675 is configured to be provided on the upper left side of the first ball entrance 64, and when game balls are stored in the storage device 675, the stored game balls The height of the storage device 675 is set so that the upper surface partially protrudes from the upper surface of the storage device 675 . Then, when the game ball fired by left-hand hitting collides with the game ball stored in the storage device 675, it is easily repelled in the direction in which the first ball entrance 64 is arranged. Set the location of the reservoir 675 . By configuring in this way, when game balls are stored in the storage device 675, the game balls are easily entered into the first ball entrance 64, so that the lottery for the first special symbol is easily executed. Become. In other words, the game balls stored in the storage device 675 are more advantageous for the player, so that the player can actively store the game balls during normal times. Therefore, since the jackpot standby state can be started in a state where the game balls are more reliably stored in the storage device 675, the game balls stored in the storage device 675 can be immediately released when the left trigger jackpot occurs. A ball can be entered into the left-actuated winning hole 662 to start a left-moment jackpot.

In the second embodiment, by switching the operation winning opening that triggers the start of the jackpot according to the jackpot type, the period from the jackpot waiting state to the start of the jackpot is changed. is not limited to For example, the operation winning hole itself may be deleted (that is, the jackpot is started without going through the jackpot standby state), and only the opening period may be changed according to the jackpot type. With this configuration, in the case of a jackpot with a long opening period, more game balls can reach the upper surface of the opening/closing door 65f1 by hitting right during the opening, whereas in the case of a jackpot with a short opening period. Since it becomes difficult for the game ball to reach the upper surface of the opening/closing door 65f1, the advantage degree in the first round can be varied according to the type of jackpot without using the operation winning opening.

In the second embodiment, the configuration is such that the operation winning opening that triggers the start of the jackpot is switched according to the type of the jackpot, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, in the jackpot standby state, the jackpot may be started regardless of which of the operation winning holes the game ball enters. And it is good also as a structure which changes the advantage degree of a big hit according to the classification of the operation|movement prize-winning mouth which won. More specifically, for example, the number of rounds of the jackpot tends to increase when the jackpot is started by entering the right-actuated prize-winning port 661 rather than by entering the left-actuated prize-winning port 662 and the jackpot is started. It may be configured as follows. By constructing in this way, if the game ball can be won (entered) to the right operation winning port 661 immediately when the big win standby state is reached, the result will be advantageous for the player. Whether or not it will be predicted from the execution of the variable display, and immediately after the big hit standby state (during about 0.5 seconds until the game ball enters the left operation winning port 662) the game ball A game can be played by devising a ball to enter the right-actuated winning hole 661.例文帳に追加Further, in this case, instead of switching the degree of advantage according to the type of the activated winning hole, the configuration may be such that the game characteristics are switched. Specifically, for example, when a ball enters the left-operating winning port 662 and a jackpot starts, a 10-round jackpot is always started, while the player enters the right-operating winning port 661. When the jackpot starts with a ball, either 4 rounds or 16 rounds of jackpots may be selected by lottery. By configuring in this way, it is possible to switch between a game property in which 10 rounds of jackpots are stably awarded and an unstable game property (highly gambling-like) in which the number of rounds may be large or small. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In the second embodiment, the jackpot is started when the game ball enters the operation winning hole corresponding to the jackpot type after the jackpot is won in the special pattern lottery, but it is limited to this. not a thing For example, a jackpot (so-called one type win) that starts immediately when a jackpot is won in a special pattern lottery without including an operating winning port in the configuration, and a game ball is placed in a specific area provided on the game board 13 The right variable winning device 65 of the present embodiment is applied to a pachinko machine 10 (so-called 1-type 2-type mixed machine) in which there is a jackpot (so-called 2-type win) that starts when a ball is entered. can achieve the same operation. That is, in the case of a one-type hit, the jackpot starts shortly after the game ball is shot toward the right variable prize winning device 65, so it becomes impossible to aim for over prize winning, but the ball can enter the specific area. (a state where you can aim for two types), first shoot the game ball on the upper surface of the opening and closing door 65f1 and then shoot the game ball aiming at a specific area, thereby intentionally over winning. can be generated at

<Third embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 63 to 68. FIG. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment described above, when a special symbol lottery results in a big win and the state shifts to a big win standby state, the game ball passes through the upper surface of the opening and closing door 65f1 at the timing when the game ball enters the operation winning opening 660. The more game balls there are, the more advantageous the player is (the number of prize balls that can be obtained in the first round increases).

On the other hand, in the third embodiment, a scene is provided in which the player's advantage is varied according to the number of game balls passing over the upper surface of the opening/closing door 65f1, even when the game is not a big hit. More specifically, in some cases where the special symbol lottery is lost, the right specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined period (for example, 0.2 seconds) as a lottery result (small win). . As a result, as the number of game balls passing through the upper surface of the opening/closing door 65f1 at the timing when the small winning starts increases, the number of prize balls that can be obtained in the small winning increases. It is possible to make the player pay attention to the game.

The pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment is structurally different from the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment in that the board structure of the game board 13 is partially changed, and the ROM 202 in the main controller 110 , and the configuration of the RAM 203 is partially changed, the control processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 is partially changed, and the control executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 The only difference is that the process has changed. Other configurations, other processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, other processing executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113, and various processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 are described in It is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in one embodiment. Hereinafter, elements that are the same as those of the first embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals, and illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

First, referring to FIG. 63, the board configuration of the game board 13 in the third embodiment will be described. As shown in FIG. 63, in the third embodiment, a normal ball entrance (through gate) 67 and a second ball entrance 640 are arranged in a channel provided on the left side of the variable display device unit 80. It is configured to In addition, as a result, the game ball can be entered into any of the normal ball entrance (through gate) 67, the first ball entrance 64, and the second ball entrance 640 by shooting the game ball in a left-handed manner. can be balled. Therefore, it is possible to make the player play the game by hitting to the left regardless of the game state except during the big win waiting state and the big win. Then, when a big win or a small win occurs, game balls are shot to the upper surface of the opening/closing door 65f1 by striking to the right, and more game balls are released at the timing when the opening/closing door 65f1 is opened. It is possible to entertain the amusement of winning a prize.

It should be noted that in the third embodiment, the opening and closing door 65f1 is opened for a predetermined period (0.2 seconds) as a small hit in some cases where the second special symbol is lost in the lottery, but the first special In the lottery of the pattern, it is configured not to win a small hit. By configuring in this way, it is possible to further increase the degree of advantage while the time saving state of the normal symbol is set. Therefore, it is possible to further improve the interest of the player in the time-saving state of the normal symbols.

Next, with reference to FIG. 64, the display effect executed in the third symbol display device 81 of the pachinko machine 10 in the present third embodiment will be described. First, FIG. 64(a) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode in the case of a small hit in the second special symbol lottery in the probability variable state (the probability variable state of the special symbol and the time saving state of the normal symbol). be. In the present embodiment, when a small win is achieved, the third symbol display device 81 displays "3", "4", and "1" as a combination of third symbols (so-called chance eyes) indicating a small win. A combination of numbered third symbols is displayed. FIG. 64(a) shows the moment when all the symbol rows are stopped and displayed as a small win.

As shown in FIG. 64(a), in the variable probability state, an image prompting the player to hit to the left is displayed in the small area Ds3 until the symbol combination corresponding to the small win is confirmed and displayed. As a result, in the variable probability state, the second ball entrance 640 provided on the left side of the game board 13 can be aimed at and left-handed.

FIG. 64(b) is a diagram showing a display mode during the confirmation display of a small hit. While the small win is being displayed, a speech balloon is formed in the small area Ds3 of the third symbol display device 81 with the text "From the right!" According to this display content, the game ball can reach the upper surface of the opening/closing door 65f1 by hitting to the right. Therefore, when the opening period of the small winning is started, the game ball arranged on the upper surface of the opening/closing door 65f1 can be entered into the right specific winning hole 65a. This confirmation display of the small win (see FIG. 64(b)) continues to be displayed after the fluctuation period of the fluctuation display corresponding to the small win has passed and until the small win ends. Henceforth, for simplification of description, the image which is displayed between small hits and which encourages hitting to the right (see FIG. 64(b)) will be referred to as a " hitting to the right notification image."

It should be noted that the small winning in the third embodiment is configured such that an opening period of 4 seconds is set. That is, after 4 seconds have passed since the display of the right hitting notification image (see FIG. 64(b)) started on the display screen, the opening/closing door 65f1 is opened for a predetermined period (0.2 seconds). there is As a result, more game balls are allowed to reach the upper surface of the opening/closing door 65f1 during the opening period of 4 seconds, thereby becoming an opening period for a small hit, and when the opening/closing door 65f1 is opened, more game balls are released. A ball can be entered into the right specific winning hole 65a.

Further, as described above, the upper surface of the opening/closing door 65f1 is configured so that a game ball can pass through in about 4 seconds. That is, the game ball reaching the upper surface of the opening/closing door 65f1 rolls on the upper surface of the opening/closing door 65f1 for a period substantially the same as the opening period of the small win. Therefore, when the right-handed hitting is started after the right-handed informing image (see FIG. 64(b)) is displayed, the game ball passes the upper surface of the opening/closing door 65f1 before the opening period elapses. can be suppressed. In addition, after the small hit is confirmed and displayed, the sooner the game ball starts hitting to the right, the more game balls can reach the upper surface of the opening and closing door 65f1. And, in the time-saving state of normal symbols) and in the time-saving state (low-probability state of special symbols, and time-saving state of normal symbols), the game can be performed by paying attention to the display contents of the third symbol display device 81. can.

<Electrical configuration in the third embodiment>
Next, referring to FIG. 65, the ROM 202 and RAM 203 of the main controller 110 in the third embodiment will be explained. It should be noted that the ROM 202 of the third embodiment is different from the ROM 202 of the first embodiment described above, except that the contents of the first winning random number table 202a are partially changed. It is the same as the first embodiment described above. Therefore, as the description of the ROM 202 in the third embodiment, only the details of the first winning random number table 202a will be described.

FIG. 65(a) is a diagram showing the defined contents of the first winning random number table 202a in the third embodiment. As shown in FIG. 65(a), in the first winning random number table 202a in the third embodiment, in addition to random numbers (counter values) determined to be big wins, random numbers (counter values) to be determined to be small wins ) are stipulated.

More specifically, regardless of whether it is a special symbol low probability state or a special symbol high probability state, the value of the first winning random number counter C1 is "360" for the lottery of the second special symbol. ~ 399”, a small win is defined in association with it (see 202a2 and 202a4 in FIG. 65(a)). On the other hand, no value of the first winning random number counter C1 corresponding to the small winning is associated with the first special symbol lottery (see 202a2 and 202a4 in FIG. 65(a)). Therefore, when the first special symbol lottery is executed, there is no possibility of a small hit, but when the second special symbol lottery is executed, the probability of a small hit is 1/10 (40/400). becomes. Therefore, in the probability variable state and the time saving state, the probability of winning the normal pattern is high, so that the game ball is easily entered into the second ball entrance 640, and the prize ball becomes a small hit with a relatively high probability. is obtained, the game state becomes extremely advantageous for the player. In addition, a large difference can be provided in the degree of advantage of the player depending on whether or not the game is played aiming at the specific winning hole 65a when a small win is achieved. That is, in the present embodiment, after a small hit is reported, a game ball is struck to the right during an opening period of 4 seconds, thereby causing a large amount (around 6) of game balls to reach the upper surface of the opening/closing door 65f1. be able to. In other words, at the time when the opening period of the small win is started, it is possible to make a state in which about six game balls are passing through the upper surface of the opening/closing door 65f1. Since 10 prize balls are given each time one game ball wins in the specific winning hole 65a, right hit according to the right hit notification (see FIG. 64(b)) displayed in the small area Ds3. By doing so, it is possible to obtain around 60 prize balls for each small win. Therefore, depending on whether or not to hit to the right according to the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 (hitting to the right notification image) when a small hit occurs, the degree of advantage between the variable probability state and the time saving state can be greatly changed. can. Therefore, it is possible to pay more attention to the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 and play the game.

Next, the RAM 203 provided in the main controller 110 in the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 65(b). FIG. 65(b) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 203. As shown in FIG. The RAM 203 in the third embodiment differs from the configuration of the RAM 203 in the first embodiment (see FIG. 13) in that a small hit medium flag 203p is added. Since other configurations are the same as those of the RAM 203 in the first embodiment, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The small hit medium flag 203p is a flag indicating whether or not the small hit is in progress. If it is on, it means that the small hit is in progress. On the other hand, if it is off, it means that it is not during the small hit. Here, the middle of the small hit indicates the period from the start of the opening period of the small hit to the end of the ending period of the small hit. This small hit medium flag 203p is set to ON at the start of the opening period of the small hit (see S1303 in FIG. 67), and is set to OFF at the end of the small hit (see S1311 in FIG. 67).

<Regarding the control process of the main controller in the third embodiment>
Next, various control processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 66 and 67. FIG. First, main processing 3 in the third embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. This main process 3 is a process executed in place of the main process (see FIG. 30) in the first embodiment, and is a process for performing main control of the game like the main process (see FIG. 30). be.

S1001 to S1005 and S1006 to S1016 of the main process 3 (see FIG. 66) in the third embodiment correspond to S1001 to S1005 and S1006 of the main process (see FIG. 30) in the first embodiment, respectively. The same processing as each processing of S1016 is executed. In addition, in the main processing 3 (see FIG. 66) in the third embodiment, when the processing of S1005 is completed, next small winning control processing for controlling the opening and closing operation of the specific winning opening 65a during execution of the small winning is executed (S1021), and the process proceeds to S1006. Details of this small hit control process (S1021) will be described with reference to FIG.

FIG. 67 is a flow chart showing the small winning control process (S1021). In this small hit control process (S1021), first, it is determined whether or not it is the small hit start timing (S1301). In addition, in the process of S1301, the variation pattern is executed based on the determination that the special symbol lottery result is a small hit in the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 23), and the variation pattern corresponding to the small hit ends. When the timing comes, it is determined that it is the start timing of the small winning.

In the process of S1301, when it is determined that it is the start timing of the small hit (S1301: Yes), the opening command for the small hit indicating the start of the opening period of the small hit is set (S1302), and the flag 203p during the small hit is set. It is set to ON (S1303), and this processing ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S1301, if it is determined that it is not the start timing of the small hit (S1301: No), then it is determined whether the flag 203p during the small hit is on (that is, whether it is during the small hit) (S1304), when it is determined that the small hit middle flag 203p is off (S1304: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined that the small hit middle flag 203p is ON (S1304: Yes), then it is determined whether or not it is time to open the right specific winning opening 65a (S1305). That is, it is determined whether it is the end timing of the opening period (3 seconds).

In the process of S1305, when it is determined that it is time to open the right specific winning opening 65a (S1305: Yes), the opening of the right specific winning opening 65a is set (S1306), and this process ends. By setting the opening of the right specific winning hole 65a by the processing of S1306, the opening/closing door 65f1 is opened and the game ball passing through the upper surface of the opening/closing door 65f1 wins (enters) the right specific winning hole 65a. . As a result, the more game balls reach the upper surface of the opening/closing door 65f1, the more prize balls the player can get. Therefore, since more game balls can be shot to the player during the opening period of the small win, the player's willingness to participate in the game can be improved.

In the process of S1305, if it is determined that it is not the opening timing of the right specific winning opening 65a (that is, it is not the end timing of the opening period) (S1305: No), then the closing condition of the right specific winning opening 65a is established. (S1307). In the third embodiment, it is determined that the closing condition is established when 0.2 seconds have passed since the right specific winning hole 65a was opened, or when two game balls have won.

In the processing of S1307, when it is determined that the condition for closing the right specific winning opening 65a is satisfied (S1307: Yes), the closing of the right specific winning opening 65a is set (S1308) to indicate the start of the ending period for the small winning. An ending command for a small hit is set (S1309), and this process is terminated. In addition, the ending period of the small hit is set to a period (for example, 0.5 seconds) sufficient to discharge all the game balls entered into the right specific winning hole 65a.

On the other hand, in the process of S1307, if it is determined that it is not the timing at which the closing condition of the right specific winning opening 65a is established (S1307: No), then whether it is the end timing of the small hit (that is, the end timing of the ending period (S1310), and if it is determined that it is the end timing of the small hit (S1310: Yes), the end of the small hit is set by turning off the flag 203p during the small hit (S1311 ), the process ends. In addition, in the processing of S1310, when it is determined that it is not the end timing of the small hit (S1310: No), this processing is terminated as it is.

By executing this small winning control process (see FIG. 66), the opening and closing operation of the same right specific winning opening 65a can be realized for each small winning.

<Regarding control processing of the sound ramp control device in the third embodiment>
Next, referring to FIG. 68, control processing executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the third embodiment will be described. FIG. 68 is a flow chart showing the win-related process 3 (S4331) executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 in the third embodiment. The hit-related process 3 (S4331) in the third embodiment is a process executed instead of the hit-related process (see FIG. 37) in the first embodiment in the command determination process (see FIG. 36). Similar to the win-related process (see FIG. 37), this is a process for executing control corresponding to the type of win-related command.

Of the hit-related process 3 (see FIG. 68) in the third embodiment, each process of S4401 to S4410 is the same as each process of S4401 to S4410 of the hit-related process (see FIG. 37) in the first embodiment. Processing is performed.

Also, in the hit-related process 3 (see FIG. 68) in the third embodiment, when it is determined that the ending command has not been received in the process of S4409 (S4409: No), then from the main controller 110 It is determined whether the opening command for the small hit is received (S4431), and when it is determined that the opening command for the small hit is received (S4431: Yes), the right hitting notification image (see FIG. 64 (b)) is displayed. A display command for this purpose is set for the display control device 114 (S4432), and this processing ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S4431, if it is determined that the opening command for the small hit is not received (S4431: No), then it is determined whether the ending command for the small hit is received from the main controller 110 (S4433 ), when it is determined that the ending command for a small hit has been received (S4433: Yes), display for returning to the image (see FIG. 64 (a)) for canceling the right-handed notification image and notifying normal left-handed hitting command is set (S4434), and this process ends. By canceling the right hitting notification image at the start of the ending period of the small win instead of the end timing of the small win, the right specific winning hole 65a is closed and the game ball can enter the right specific winning hole 65a. It is possible to prevent (suppress) the player from continuing to shoot the game ball by hitting it to the right despite the fact that there is no property. Therefore, it is possible to prevent loss for the player. On the other hand, in the process of S4433, when it is determined that the ending command for the small hit is not received (S4433: No), this process is terminated as it is.

By the processing of S4431 to S4434 in the hit related process 3 (see FIG. 68) in the third embodiment, the display of the right hitting notification image is set over the period from the start of the opening period of the small hit to the end of the small hit. can do. Therefore, the player can be made to hit to the right before the opening period of the small win starts (during the opening period of 4 seconds). A plurality of game balls can reach the upper surface of the opening/closing door 65f1 at the start of the winning open period. Therefore, although the opening period of the small hit is short (maximum 0.2 seconds), a plurality of game balls can be entered into the specific winning hole 65a, so the game is played according to the right-handed notification image. It is possible to increase the degree of advantage in the case of As a result, the player can more seriously confirm the display contents of the third symbol display device 81, so that the player's willingness to participate in the game can be enhanced.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment, in some cases where the special symbol lottery is lost, the lottery result (small winning ) is provided. When this small win is reached, the right specific prize winning opening 65a is opened for 0.2 seconds after an opening period of 4 seconds is set. Therefore, by continuously shooting game balls toward the upper surface of the opening/closing door 65f1 during the opening period of 4 seconds, a plurality of game balls are passing over the upper surface of the opening/closing door 65f1 at the start of the opening period. Therefore, the plurality of game balls can be entered into the opened right specific winning hole 65a. In addition, when a small win is obtained in the lottery of special symbols, a right-handed informing image is displayed from the start of the opening period of the small win to the end of the opening period. By constructing in this way, by performing right hitting only while the right hitting notification image is displayed according to the display contents of the third symbol display device 81, a plurality of game balls can be easily reduced to 0.00 with each small hit. It is possible to win a prize to the right specific prize winning port 65a during the open period of 2 seconds. Therefore, the game can be played while paying more attention to the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 . Furthermore, in the third embodiment, right-handed hitting is advantageous only in the case of a big win or a small win, and the game is normally played by left-handed hitting. By constructing in this way, right-handed hitting and left-handed hitting can be frequently switched during the time-saving state or the variable-probability state, so that the player has the pleasure of switching the direction in which the game ball is shot. be able to. In addition, since it is a chance to win a prize ball if a right hit is reported, the player can be pleased when a right hit is reported.

In addition, in the third embodiment, when there is a small hit at normal times, the effect of notifying the right-handed hit is executed, and in other cases, the effect of notifying the left-handed hit is executed, but it is limited to this. is not. For example, in the case of a small hit, the opening period is set immediately (for example, 0.1 seconds after the end of fluctuation). In other words, it is configured so that it is difficult to enter a game ball during the opening period of the small win unless hitting to the right is started during execution of the variable display. And it is good also as a structure which performs the production|presentation which suggests the expectation degree which becomes a small hit during the variable display of a 2nd special design. Specifically, for example, during the execution of the variable display of the third pattern, the characters "10%", the characters "30%", and the characters "60%" are displayed for the small area Ds3. , and “100%” may be selected and displayed. At the time of selection, the characters to be displayed may be determined with a selection probability according to the lottery result of the second special symbol. More specifically, the character "100%" is selected only in the case of a small win, but the probability of being selected is lower than that of other characters. In addition, the character "10%" is less likely to be selected than "30%" or "60%" when the lottery result of the second special symbol is a small hit, and is most likely to be selected when it is out. configured as follows. In addition, the character "30%" is configured so that the probability of being selected in the case of a small win is higher than "10%" and lower than "60%", while it is selected in the case of a loss. It is configured so that the probability that the In addition, the character "60%" is configured so that the probability of being selected in the case of a small hit is higher than "30%", while the probability of being selected in the case of a loss is higher than "30%". Configure it to be low. By configuring in this way, most of the characters displayed when a small win is made are "30%" or "60%" which can be displayed even when a win is lost. A player can be made to predict whether or not a small win will occur. Then, the game ball can be shot toward the upper surface of the opening/closing door 65f1 by hitting rightward during execution of the variable display (before the start of the small win) for the player who predicts that a small win will occur. As a result, if the player predicts a small win, the opening/closing door 65f1 is opened and a prize ball can be obtained. It is possible to make the player more seriously predict whether or not it is a small win. In addition, when the characters "100%" are displayed, a small win is guaranteed, so that the player can be made to hit to the right while the variable display is being performed without anxiety. Therefore, it is possible to further improve the player's interest in the game in the variable probability state and the time saving state.

In the third embodiment, as the small hit type, only the small hit with an opening period of 4 seconds was provided, but it is not limited to this. For example, a configuration may be adopted in which a plurality of types with different opening periods are provided. Specifically, for example, the opening period may be configured to provide a type of one second, a type of two seconds, a type of four seconds, and a type of eight seconds. By configuring in this way, when a small hit of a type with a short opening period (1 second or 2 seconds) is made, when hitting right after the opening period of the small win starts, the small win Since the number of game balls reaching the open/close door 65f1 is reduced until the opening period of 2 starts, the number of prize balls tends to be reduced as compared with the small winning type in which the opening period is 4 seconds. On the other hand, when the opening period is longer than the period required for the game ball to pass through the upper surface of the opening and closing door 65f1 (8 seconds), when the type of small hit occurs, the opening period of the small hit is started. If the beating continues, the game ball shot in the first half of the opening period will pass through the opening/closing door 65f1 before the start of the opening period. Therefore, useless balls are more likely to occur, and the number of held balls is more likely to decrease than in the small winning type with an opening period of 4 seconds. As a result, the degree of advantage of the player is varied depending on the type of the small win, so when the small win is notified (the right-hand hitting notification image is displayed), the player hits to the right while hoping for an advantageous small win. can be done.

In the third embodiment, the right hitting notification image is displayed when the small winning is achieved, but the display of the right hitting notification image is not limited to the small winning. For example, the right-handed notification image may be diverted to the display during execution of the jackpot (for example, the display during the opening period). By configuring in this way, it is not necessary to prepare separate effects during the big win and during the small win, so the number of data in the display data table can be reduced.

In the third embodiment, there is a possibility of winning a small prize in the second special symbol lottery, but the configuration is not limited to this. Instead of or in addition to the lottery for the second special symbol, it may be configured to win a small prize with a predetermined probability (for example, probability of 1/50) when the lottery for the first special symbol is executed. By constructing in this way, in the low probability state of the special symbols which is the most disadvantageous for the player and in the normal state of the normal symbols, it is possible to obtain a certain amount of balls in the event of a small hit. , it is possible to suppress the game from becoming monotonous. Therefore, even if the most unfavorable state lasts for a long time (so-called addiction occurs), it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored with the game. In this case, the ratio of displaying the right-handed informing image when a small win is won (incidence of right-handed navigation) may be varied depending on the number of times of consecutive failures. In other words, until the lottery of the first special symbol does not win a big hit but loses a specified number of times, even if a small win occurs, right-handed navigation hardly occurs, and when the specified number of times is exceeded, right-handed navigation is performed. A configuration in which the occurrence rate is high (for example, 50%) may be employed. As a result, it becomes difficult for the number of held balls to decrease when the specified number of times is exceeded, so that the player can continue playing the game for a longer period of time. Therefore, the operating rate of the pachinko machine 10 can be improved.

In the third embodiment, as in the first embodiment, when a game ball enters the operating winning hole 660, the big win is started. It may be configured such that an over-winning can occur only when it becomes.

In the third embodiment, the jackpot is started when the special symbol lottery results in a jackpot, but the present invention is not limited to this. Instead of or in addition to this, a configuration may be adopted in which a big hit is started when a game ball enters a specific area inside the right variable winning device 65 . That is, during the opening period of the right specific prize winning port 65a based on winning a small win, a game ball is entered into the right specific prize winning port 65a, and a game ball enters a specific area to win a big hit. may be started. By configuring in this way, it is possible to further increase the advantage of entering the ball into the right specific winning hole 65a in the case of a small hit, so that the game can be played with more attention paid to whether or not right-handed navigation will occur. . In this case, it may be configured such that a small win is won even in the lottery of the first special symbols, and the rate of occurrence of right-handed navigation in the case of a small win may be varied for each game state. That is, in the low-probability state of normal symbols, the navigation occurrence rate may be lowered, and in the time-saving state of normal symbols, the navigation occurrence rate may be increased. By configuring in this way, it is possible to further enhance the degree of advantage in the time-saving state of normal symbols. Also, conversely, the navigation occurrence rate may be higher in the low probability state of the normal symbol. As a result, in addition to the case of a big win in the special pattern lottery, even if it is a small win, it will be given a chance to enter a specific area and win a big win, so there will be a situation where the big win will not be won for a long time. can be made difficult. Therefore, the player can continue playing the game for a longer period of time. Furthermore, in the low probability state of normal symbols, when the number of times of losing in the lottery of special symbols exceeds a specific number of times, it may be configured to increase the occurrence rate of right-handed navigation in the case of a small win. . By configuring in this way, when the specific number of times is exceeded, it is possible to form a situation in which it is easier to win a big hit than before exceeding (easy to enter the game ball in the specific area), so that the special symbol can be used for a long time. It is possible to configure such that a situation in which continuous deviation of the Therefore, the operating rate of the pachinko machine 10 can be improved.

<Fourth Embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 69 to 74. FIG. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment described above, a game ball is entered into the operation winning opening 660 while the game ball is passing over the upper surface of the opening/closing door 65f1, thereby starting a jackpot and opening/closing the door 65f1. A game ball passing through the upper surface of the is entered into the right specific winning hole 65a. In other words, when the jackpot standby state is entered, the degree of advantage in the first round (the right specific prize winning port 65a in the first round) depends on the timing to start the jackpot (enter the ball into the operation winning port 660) The number of game balls to be entered) was configured to be a variable game.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 of the fourth embodiment, the degree of advantage in the first round (the number of prize balls that can be obtained) is variable according to the timing of starting the big win, and the timing of starting the big win and one round. The configuration allows the player to select the playability that is irrelevant to the degree of advantage of the eye (the number of prize balls that can be obtained). More specifically, in the fourth embodiment, the player selects in the jackpot standby state to open the right specific prize winning port 65a of the right variable prize winning device 65 or open the left variable prize winning device in the first round of the jackpot. It is configured to vary whether the left specific winning opening 650a of 650 is opened. As a result, it is possible to allow the player to select his or her favorite game, so that it is possible to provide the game according to the taste of each player.

The pachinko machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment is structurally different from the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment in that the board structure of the game board 13 is partially changed, The condition for determining that the specific winning port 650a is closed is "when 30 seconds have passed or 4 or more game balls have won", and the configuration of the RAM 203 in the main controller 110 has been partially changed. part of the control process executed by the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110 is changed, part of the control process executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control unit 113 is changed, Also, the configuration of the ROM 202 in the main controller 110 is partially changed. Other configurations, other processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, other processing executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113, and various processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 are described in It is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in one embodiment. Hereinafter, elements that are the same as those of the first embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals, and illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

First, referring to FIG. 69, the board configuration of the game board 13 in the fourth embodiment will be described. As shown in FIG. 69, in the fourth embodiment, a sorting device 680 is arranged on the upper right side of the game board 13 when viewed from the front, instead of the operation winning opening 660 in the first embodiment. Inside the distribution device 680, there are provided two operation winning openings (right operation winning opening 681, left operation winning opening 682) into which game balls can enter. Both of these two operation winning openings are determined to be valid for entry of a game ball only during the jackpot standby state, similarly to the operation winning opening 660 in the first embodiment. In the jackpot standby state, when the game ball enters the right-operating winning port 681, a jackpot is started in which the right specific winning port 65a is opened in one round of the jackpot, and the game ball enters the left-operating winning port 682. is entered, a jackpot is started in which the left specific prize winning opening 650a is opened in one round of the jackpot.

In addition, above the two operation winning openings (right operation winning opening 681, left operation winning opening 682), a distribution member for distributing game balls entered into the distribution device 680 to one of the operation winning openings 683 are provided. The distributing member 683 is configured to be rotatable about a shaft 683a as a rotation axis. The arrangement (see the dashed line in FIG. 69) is changed alternately. When the distribution member 683 is arranged to tilt to the right, the upper side of the right operation winning opening 681 is blocked by the distribution member 683 and the upper side of the left operation winning opening 682 is opened. Therefore, the game ball entering the distribution device 680 while the distribution member 683 is tilted to the right side is inclined from the upper right direction in the front view to the lower left direction in the front view, which is formed by the distribution member 683. It flows downward along the left direction and enters the left operation winning opening 682.

When a game ball enters the left operation winning port 682 in the jackpot standby state, a jackpot is started in which the left specific winning port 650a is opened in all rounds of the jackpot. Unlike the right variable winning device 65, the left variable winning device 650 keeps the game ball at a position where the game ball can enter the left specific winning port 650a while the left specific winning port 650a is closed. is configured in such a way that it is impossible to Therefore, in the first round of the jackpot, the number of game balls entering the game is less likely to vary, and substantially the same number of prize balls can be stably paid out each time. Therefore, a player or the like who is not confident in the game of hitting the game ball at the right timing can be made to select a big win in which the left specific winning hole 650a is opened.

In addition, as described above, the jackpot that is started when a game ball enters the left operation winning hole 682 is 30 seconds after the start of each round, or the game ball enters the left specific winning hole 650a four times. The round ends when more than one ball is entered. Therefore, in the first round of the jackpot (left trigger jackpot) started with the game ball entering the left operation winning port 682, almost four game balls enter the left specific winning port 650a and the jackpot ends. do.

On the other hand, when the distribution member 683 is tilted to the left, the upper side of the right operation winning opening 681 is opened and the upper side of the left operation winning opening 682 is closed by the distribution member 683 . Therefore, a game ball entering the distribution device 680 while the distribution member 683 is tilted to the left is tilted from the upper left direction in the front view to the lower right direction in the front view, which is formed by the distribution member 683. , and enters the right-acting winning hole 681 . When the game ball enters the right operation winning opening 681, the right specific winning opening 65a is opened in the first round of the jackpot, and the left specific winning opening 650a is opened in the second and subsequent rounds (right trigger Jackpot) is started. The first round of the right trigger jackpot ends when 30 seconds elapse after the right specific winning hole 65a is opened, or when two or more game balls enter the right specific winning hole 65a. However, as described above, the number of winning prizes to the right specific prize winning port 65a is approximately 2 to 6 depending on the number of game balls passing through the upper surface of the opening/closing door 65f1 at the time of opening the right specific prize winning port 65a. range up and down. Therefore, when a game ball enters the right operation winning hole 681 in the jackpot standby state, the number of prize balls that can be obtained varies depending on the timing of the entering.

As described above, in the fourth embodiment, when the jackpot standby state is entered, the disposition of the distributing member 683 is switched every two seconds. By entering the game ball at the timing when the game ball can be entered into the operation winning hole corresponding to , it is possible to provide the game property that matches the taste of each player.

Between the right-operating winning opening 681 and the left-operating winning opening 682, when the game ball entered the distribution device 680 does not enter any of the operating winning openings, the game ball is distributed to the distribution device. An out port is provided for discharging to the outside of 680 . By providing this outlet, it is possible to prevent (suppress) problems such as clogged balls inside the sorting device 680 .

Next, with reference to FIG. 70, display effects in the fourth embodiment will be described. FIGS. 70(a) and 70(b) are diagrams showing an example of a display mode during the standby state production executed in the jackpot standby state in the fourth embodiment. FIG. 70(a) shows a display mode while the sorting member 683 is tilted to the right in the jackpot standby state.

As shown in FIG. 70(a), in the jackpot standby state in the fourth embodiment, similarly to the first embodiment, a display area in which the characters "jackpot confirmed!" HR1 and the combination (final stop symbol) of the third symbol finally stopped and displayed (determined display) in the variable display performance executed before the big win standby state are displayed. Further, as shown in FIG. 70(a), while the sorting member 683 is tilted to the right, the display area HR2 formed on the display screen is displayed with the message "If you hit it now, it's safe mode!?" and the characters "You can stably win prize balls!" The image shown is displayed. Also, unlike the first embodiment, the chance meter CM is not displayed and the right side of the display screen is left blank. With these display contents, the player can be made to recognize that there is a high possibility that the game ball will enter the left actuation winning hole 682 when the game ball is shot toward the sorting device 680 . That is, regardless of the timing of entering the game balls into the left operation winning hole 682, the big hit of the game property that can stably enter five game balls in the first round in the left specific winning hole 650a. is started.

As shown in FIG. 70(b), while the sorting member 683 is tilted to the left, the text "Big Win Confirmed!" The displayed display area HR1 and the combination (final stop pattern) of the third pattern finally stopped and displayed (determined display) in the variable display performance executed before the big winning standby state are displayed. In addition, a chance meter CM is displayed on the right side of the display screen as in the first embodiment. Then, for the display area HR2 formed on the display screen, the characters "If you hit it now, it's in an unstable mode!?" , and an image showing the direction in which the game balls entering the sorting device 680 flow down (the direction in which the right actuation winning opening 681 is arranged) is displayed. With these display contents, it is possible to make the game ball recognize that there is a high possibility that the game ball will enter the right operation winning hole 681 when the game ball is shot toward the sorting device 680 . That is, the number of game balls reaching the opening/closing door 65f1 is discriminated from the gauge number of the chance meter CM, and the game balls are entered into the right operation winning opening 681 with good timing (when the gauge number is larger). By doing so, it is possible to make the player recognize that a game-like jackpot in which a larger number of prize balls can be obtained is started.

Thus, in the fourth embodiment, in the jackpot standby state, when a game ball is shot aiming at the sorting device 680, the type of the operating winning hole into which the ball enters, and the outline of the jackpot started by entering the ball (game ) are displayed on the third symbol display device 81. As shown in FIG. By constructing in this way, the player can select a jackpot with game characteristics that suit his or her taste. Therefore, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of switching game characteristics according to the preferences of each player.

<Electrical configuration in the fourth embodiment>
Next, referring to FIG. 71, the configuration of the RAM 203 provided in the main controller 110 in the fourth embodiment will be described. FIG. 71 is a block diagram showing the configuration of RAM 203. As shown in FIG. Unlike the configuration of the RAM 203 in the first embodiment (see FIG. 13), the RAM 203 in the fourth embodiment has a specific winning hole type storage area 203q, a distribution state storage area 203r, and a distribution state timer 203s. and are added. Since other configurations are the same as those of the RAM 203 in the first embodiment, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The specific winning hole type storage area 203q is a storage area for storing data indicating the type of the specific winning hole opened in the first round of the jackpot. Specifically, when "01H" is stored in the specific winning hole type storage area 203q, the right specific winning hole 65a is opened in the first round of the jackpot, and the left specific winning hole 650a is opened in the second and subsequent rounds. It means that it is a jackpot type to be opened. On the other hand, when "02H" is stored, it means that it is a jackpot type in which the left specific winning opening 650a is opened in each round of jackpot. The initial value of the specific winning hole type storage area 203q is set to "00H". "02H" is stored when the game ball enters the left actuation winning hole 682 (see S1131 and S1133 in FIG. 72). When the conditions for starting the first round of the jackpot are met, the type of the specific winning opening to be opened is determined based on the data in the specific winning opening type storage area 203q (S1232 in FIG. 73).

The distribution state storage area 203r is a storage area in which data indicating the orientation of the distribution member 683 is stored. Specifically, when "00H" is stored in the distribution state storage area 203r, the state in which the distribution member 683 is tilted to the left (the state in which the game ball can enter the right operation winning opening 681) and the When "01H" is stored, it means that the distribution member 683 is in a state of being tilted to the right side (a state in which a game ball can enter the left operation winning port 682). means The data in the distribution state storage area 203r is updated to data corresponding to the layout after the switching each time the layout of the distribution members 683 is switched in the jackpot standby state (see S1125 and S1127 in FIG. 72). Note that the initial arrangement of the distribution member 683 is in a state of being tilted to the left. In accordance with this, the initial value of the distribution state storage area 203r also becomes "00H". In the jackpot standby state, every time the data in the distribution state storage area 203r is updated, a command (distribution state command ) is set. By this distribution state command, it is determined that the arrangement of the distribution members 683 has been switched, and the display form of the standby state effect is updated to the display form corresponding to the arrangement after the switching.

The distribution state timer 203s is a timer for counting the remaining time until the state of the distribution member 683 is switched. The timer value of the distribution state timer 203s is reset to "0" each time the state of the distribution member 683 is switched in the jackpot standby state, and is set to 1 each time jackpot start processing 4 (see FIG. 72) described later is executed. are added one by one (S1121 in FIG. 72). That is, it is updated at intervals of 2 milliseconds, which is the execution interval of the main processing. Then, when the timer value reaches 500 or more, the state of the sorting member 683 is switched (see SS1124 and S1126 in FIG. 72).

<Regarding the control process of the main controller in the fourth embodiment>
Next, control processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 72 and 73. FIG. First, with reference to FIG. 72, the jackpot start process 4 (S1041) in the fourth embodiment will be described. This jackpot start process 4 (S1041) is a process that is executed instead of the jackpot start process (see FIG. 31) in the first embodiment, and is an operation winning opening (right operation winning opening 681 and left operation winning opening 682). It is a process for monitoring the entry of a ball into the operation winning opening and starting a jackpot corresponding to the type of the operation winning opening when the entry of a ball into the operation winning opening is detected.

In each of S1101, S1103, and S1104 of the jackpot start process 4 (see FIG. 72) in the fourth embodiment, S1101, S1103, and S1104 of the jackpot start process (see FIG. 31) in the first embodiment, respectively are executed.

In addition, in the jackpot start process 4 (see FIG. 72) in the fourth embodiment, when it is determined that the incoming ball waiting flag 203j is ON (that is, in the jackpot waiting state) in the process of S1101 (S1101: Yes), then 1 is added to the value of the distribution state timer 203s (S1121), and it is determined whether the timer value after the addition is 500 or more (S1122). In the processing of S1122, if it is determined that the timer value of the distribution state timer 203s after addition is 500 or more (S1122: Yes), it means that the timing for switching the state of the distribution member 683 has come, so that the distribution is performed. Each process of S1123 to S1129 for switching the state of the member 683 is executed.

Specifically, it is determined whether or not the data stored in the distribution state storage area 203r is "00H" (whether the distribution member 683 is tilted to the left) (S1123). In the process of S1123, when it is determined that "00H" is stored (S1123: Yes), the sorting member 683 tilted leftward is changed to the rightward tilted state (S1124), and the sorting state is changed. "01H" is stored in the storage area 203r (S1125), and the process proceeds to S1128.

On the other hand, in the processing of S1123, when it is determined that the data stored in the distribution state storage area 203r is "01H" (S1123: No), the distribution member 683 tilted to the right is tilted to the left. state (S1126), "00H" is stored in the distribution state storage area 203r (S1127), and the process proceeds to S1128.

In the process of S1128 executed after the process of S1125 or S1127, a distribution state command indicating the arrangement of the distribution members 683 after switching is set (S1128), and the value of the distribution state timer 203s is reset to 0 ( S1129), and the process proceeds to S1130.

On the other hand, in the processing of S1122, if it is determined that the value of the distribution state timer 203s after updating is less than 500 (S1122: No), it means that it is not the timing to switch the state of the distribution member 683. Therefore, each process of S1123 to S1129 is skipped and the process proceeds to S1130. In the processing of S1130, it is determined whether or not a ball has been detected in the right-acting winning hole 681 (S1130). data "01H" indicating the right specific winning hole 650a is stored (S1131), and the process proceeds to S1103. Thus, it is possible to set the start of the big win in which the right specific winning opening 65a is opened in the first round of the big win.

On the other hand, in the processing of S1130, if it is determined that the ball into the right-acting winning hole 681 is not detected (S1130: No), then it is determined whether the ball into the left-acting winning hole 682 is detected. (S1132). In the process of S1132, if it is determined that the ball has entered the left-acting winning hole 682 (S1132: Yes), the data "02H" indicating the left specific winning hole 650a is stored in the specific winning hole type storage area 203q. ” is stored (S1133), and the process proceeds to S1103. On the other hand, in the process of S1132, if it is determined that the ball into the left operation winning opening 682 is not detected (S1132: No), it means that it is not the end timing of the jackpot standby state, so this End the process.

Also, in the jackpot start process 4 (S1041) in the fourth embodiment, when the process of S1104 is completed, the distribution state timer 203s is reset to 0 (S1134), and this process is completed. In the process of S1134, by resetting the distribution state timer 203s at the end of the jackpot standby state, updating of the timer value can be started from the reset state of the distribution state timer 203s in the next jackpot standby state. .

Next, with reference to FIG. 73, the jackpot control process 4 (S1042) in the fourth embodiment will be described. FIG. 73 is a flow chart showing jackpot control processing 4 (S1042). This jackpot control process 4 (S1042) is a process that is executed in the main process (see FIG. 30) instead of the jackpot control process (see FIG. 32) in the first embodiment. ), this is a process for controlling the opening and closing operations of the right specific winning opening 65a and the left specific winning opening 650a.

Among the jackpot control processing 4 (see FIG. 73) in the fourth embodiment, S1201 to S1205 and S1207 to S1217, respectively, in the jackpot control processing in the first embodiment (see FIG. 32) S1201 to S1205, , and the same processes as those of S1207 to S1217 are executed. Also, in the jackpot control process 4 (see FIG. 73) in the fourth embodiment, when it is determined that it is time to start a new round in the process of S1205 (S1205: Yes), the round to be started this time is one round. (S1231).

In the processing of S1231, when it is determined that it is one round (S1231: Yes), the opening of the specific winning opening corresponding to the data stored in the specific winning opening type storage area 203q is set (S1232), and the process is performed. to S1207. More specifically, if the data stored in the specific winning opening type storage area 203q is "01H", the opening of the right specific winning opening 65a is set, while the stored data is "02H". If there is, the opening of the left specific winning opening 650a is set.

On the other hand, in the process of S1231, if it is determined that the round to be started this time is not the first round (S1232: No), the left specific winning opening 650a is set to open (S1233), and the process proceeds to S1207. do.

By executing this jackpot control processing 4 (see FIG. 73), in the first round of the jackpot, a specific prize winning port corresponding to the type of the operating winning port passed (selected) by the player in the jackpot standby state is opened. can be made Therefore, in the first round of the jackpot, it is possible to provide game characteristics corresponding to the type of the activated winning hole selected by the player.

<Regarding control processing of the sound ramp control device in the fourth embodiment>
Next, referring to FIG. 74, control processing executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 in the fourth embodiment will be described. FIG. 74 is a flowchart showing win-related processing 4 (S4341) in the fourth embodiment. This win-related process 4 (S4341) is a process executed instead of the win-related process (see FIG. 37) in the first embodiment. It is a process for executing control corresponding to the type of.

Of the hit-related process 4 (see FIG. 74) in the fourth embodiment, each process of S4401 to S4410 is the same as each process of S4401 to S4410 of the hit-related process (see FIG. 37) in the first embodiment. Processing is performed. Further, in the winning-related process 4 (see FIG. 74) in the fourth embodiment, when it is determined in the process of S4409 that the ending command is not included in the command received from the main controller 110 (S4409: No), then it is determined whether or not a distribution state command is included (S4441).

In the process of S4441, if it is determined that the command received from the main controller 110 includes the distribution state command (S4441: Yes), the distribution state indicated by the received distribution state command is determined. A display command for updating to the mode of waiting state rendering is set (S4442), and this processing is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of S4441, if it is determined that the command received from the main controller 110 does not include the distribution state command (S4441: No), this process ends.

By the hit-related processing 4 (see FIG. 74), every time the state of the sorting member 683 is switched, the display mode (see FIGS. 70(a) and (b)) can be set according to the state after the switching. Therefore, when the player enters the jackpot standby state, the player only needs to confirm the display contents of the third symbol display device 81, and the current state of the sorting device 680 is the state of his/her own when the game ball is entered. It is possible to easily determine whether or not it is a state in which a jackpot with a game property suitable for taste is started.

As described above, the pachinko machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment has two types of specific winning holes (the right specific winning hole 65a and the left specific winning hole 650a) into which game balls can be entered in the event of a big win. It is configured to be provided. More specifically, while the right specific winning opening 65a is closed, if the right specific winning opening 65a is opened, a game ball can be entered (upper surface of the opening/closing door 65f1). While the left specific winning port 650a is closed, the game ball is stopped at a position where the game ball can enter the left specific winning port 650a. It is configured in such a way that it is impossible to leave In addition, in the fourth embodiment, two types of operation winning openings (right operation winning opening 681, left operation winning opening 682) are provided to trigger the start of the jackpot, and the operation winning opening for entering the ball in the jackpot waiting state is played. It is configured so that the person can choose. When a game ball enters the right-operating winning hole 681, the right specific winning hole 65a is opened in each round of the big win. , The left trigger jackpot is started in which the left specific winning opening 650a is opened in each round of the jackpot. As a result, the number of game balls passing through the upper surface of the opening/closing door 65f1 at the timing of entering the game balls into the right-operating winning hole 681 greatly affects the number of prize balls that can be obtained in the first round. , and a game feature in which the situation during the jackpot waiting state does not affect the number of winning balls, can be selected by the player. Therefore, it is possible to provide game characteristics that meet the tastes of each player.

In addition, in the fourth embodiment, when the left trigger jackpot hits, the game ball cannot stay in a position where it can enter the left specific winning hole 650a in the jackpot standby state. However, it is not limited to this. For example, a predetermined number (for example, one) of game balls may be allowed to enter the left specific winning hole 650a within a range less than the upper surface of the opening/closing door 65f1. By configuring in this way, even when the player selects the left-actuated winning hole 682, it is possible to provide a game property in which the degree of advantage is variable according to the timing of entering the game ball.

In the fourth embodiment, when the right trigger big win is achieved, the right specific winning opening 65a is opened in all rounds of the jackpot, while when the left trigger jackpot is achieved, the left specific winning opening 650a is opened in all rounds. Although it was set as the structure which opens, it is not restricted to this. For example, a configuration may be adopted in which the specific winning opening corresponding to the operating winning opening is opened only in the first round, and the common specific winning opening is opened in the second and subsequent rounds. Even with such a configuration, the playability in the first round can be switched according to the type of the activated winning hole into which the game ball enters.

In the fourth embodiment, which of the right trigger jackpot and the left trigger jackpot is to be started is differentiated according to the type of the activated winning hole into which the ball is entered. That is, the type of the specific winning hole to be opened in the big win is made different according to the type of the operating winning hole, but the difference according to the type of the operating winning hole is not limited to this. For example, it may be configured such that the number of rounds for the jackpot is varied according to the type of the operating winning hole. More specifically, for example, when a game ball enters the right-acting winning port 681, the jackpot of 16 rounds or 4 rounds is drawn in half, whereas the left-acting winning port 682 When a game ball enters into the game ball, a configuration may be adopted in which a jackpot of 10 rounds is always selected. In addition, in a game machine (so-called V probability machine) in which a variable probability state is given after a big hit when a game ball enters a specific area during a big hit, depending on the type of the operation winning opening, the entry into the specific area It is good also as a structure which makes a ball rate different. More specifically, for example, when a game ball enters the right-acting winning hole 681, a 20% jackpot and a 100% jackpot with a ball-entering rate to the specific area are drawn half and half. On the other hand, when a game ball enters the left-operating winning hole 682, a configuration may be adopted in which a jackpot with a ball-entering rate of 60% into the specific area is always selected.

<Fifth Embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 75 to 79. FIG. In the above-described first embodiment, the degree of advantage (the number of prize balls that can be obtained in the first round) when the jackpot is started according to the number of game balls shot toward the upper surface of the opening and closing door 65f1 in the jackpot waiting state. was configured to be variable.

On the other hand, in the fifth embodiment, when the variation display corresponding to the big win ends, the big win starts without going through the big win standby state. By varying the opening period and the interval period of the jackpot according to the type of the jackpot, the number of game balls that can reach the upper surface of the opening/closing door 65f1 during the opening period and the interval period is varied, and the number of game balls can be varied according to the type of the jackpot. It is configured to vary the degree of advantage.

The pachinko machine 10 according to the fifth embodiment is structurally different from the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment in that the board surface structure of the game board 13 is partially changed, and the end of each round of the jackpot is changed. The point that the conditions are unified to "when 30 seconds have passed or two or more game balls have won", the point that the configuration of the ROM 202 in the main controller 110 is partially changed, and the main controller 110 is that the control processing executed by the MPU 201 of 110 is partially changed. Other configurations, other processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, various processing executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113, and various processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 are described in the first It is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in the embodiment. Hereinafter, elements that are the same as those of the first embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals, and illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

First, referring to FIG. 75, the board configuration of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 according to the fifth embodiment will be described. As shown in FIG. 75, the game board 13 according to the fifth embodiment does not have the operation winning opening 660 provided on the upper right side in front view of the game board 13 (see FIG. 2) according to the first embodiment. . Therefore, in the fifth embodiment, when the variable display corresponding to the big win ends, the opening period of the big win starts immediately (without going through the waiting state for the big win).

Further, as shown in FIG. 75, the left variable winning device 650a is eliminated in the fifth embodiment. For this reason, in the fifth embodiment, in all rounds of the jackpot, the right specific winning hole is closed when 30 seconds have passed since the start of the round, or when two or more game balls enter. 65a is opened.

<Electrical configuration of the fifth embodiment>
Next, the ROM 202 of the main controller 110 in the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 76(a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM 202. As shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 76(a), the ROM 202 in the fifth embodiment has a period length selection table 202e added to the configuration of the RM 202 in the first embodiment, and the first winning type selection table 202b is partially changed. Since other configurations are the same as those of the ROM 202 in the first embodiment, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The period length selection table 202e is a data table that defines a jackpot opening period and an interval period for each jackpot type. When the start timing of the jackpot opening period and the start timing of the interval period come, the period amount selection table 202e is referred to and the opening period and the interval period corresponding to the jackpot type are set. Details will be described later with reference to FIG. 70(c), but this period length selection table 202e has two types of opening periods: a relatively long period (5 seconds) and a relatively short period (1 second). is stipulated. Similarly, two types of interval periods are defined: a relatively long period (3 seconds) and a relatively short period (0.5 seconds). As a result, a long closing period (opening period) from the start of the jackpot to the start of the first round and a closing period (interval period) between the rounds after the second round and a short jackpot are provided. be able to.

Next, with reference to FIG.76(b), the 1st hit classification|category selection table 202b in the 5th Embodiment is demonstrated. FIG. 76(b) is a diagram showing the defined contents of the first win type selection table 202b. As shown in FIG. 76(b), in the first hit type selection table 202b in the fifth embodiment, there are 5 types of jackpot types of "jackpot A5" to "jackpot E5" as the jackpot types of the first special symbol. Three types of jackpot types, "jackpot F5" to "jackpot H5", are defined as the jackpot types of the second special symbols.

As shown in FIG. 76(b), as the jackpot of the first special symbol, "jackpot A5" is defined in association with the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the range of "0 to 4". (See 202b1 in FIG. 76). Among the 100 counter values that can be taken by the first winning type counter C2, the counter value that becomes "jackpot A5" is five, so when the first special symbol lottery results in a jackpot, "jackpot A5" is determined. ratio is 5% (5/100). This "jackpot A2" has 8 rounds in the same manner as the "jackpot A" in the first embodiment. It is a jackpot type. Also, this "jackpot A5" is one type of jackpot type in which relatively long periods are set as the opening period and the ending period. As described above, in the fifth embodiment, in all rounds of the jackpot, 30 seconds have passed, or two or more game balls enter the right specific winning hole 65a. is closed and the round ends. Therefore, if the opening period and the interval period are long, more game balls can reach the upper surface of the opening/closing door 65f1 during the closing period, so more game balls can be opened and closed at the start of the next round. It can be in a state of being on the door 65f1. That is, when a new round is started and the opening/closing door 65f1 is opened, more game balls can be dropped from the opening/closing door 65f1 to enter the right specific winning hole 65a. As a result, the number of game balls exceeding the upper limit of the number of entering balls (two) stipulated in each round is likely to enter the right specific winning hole 65a (over winning). It becomes easier to be advantageous in terms of the number of prize balls. On the other hand, if the opening period and the interval period are short, it becomes difficult for the game ball to reach the upper surface of the opening/closing door 65f1 during these closing periods. , 2) are more likely to enter and the round ends (possibility of over-winning is reduced). In other words, it tends to be disadvantageous in terms of the number of prize balls. In the following explanation, a jackpot with a long opening period and interval period (a jackpot that tends to win more prize balls in each round) is called a "long interval jackpot", and a jackpot with a short opening period and interval period (each A jackpot in which it is difficult to obtain a large number of prize balls in a round) is called a “short-interval jackpot”.

As the jackpot of the first special symbol, "jackpot B5" is defined in association with the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the range of "5 to 14" (see 202b2 in FIG. 76). Of the 100 counter values that can be taken by the first winning type counter C2, 10 counter values are "jackpot B2", so when the first special symbol lottery results in a jackpot, "jackpot B5" is determined. ratio is 10% (10/100). This "jackpot B5" has five rounds in the same manner as the "jackpot B" in the first embodiment, and after the jackpot ends, "variable state of special symbols" and "time saving state of normal symbols" are given. It is a jackpot type. Also, this "jackpot B5" is a kind of long-interval jackpot, like the "jackpot A5". Therefore, the number of winning balls to be won in each round tends to be larger than in the short-interval jackpot.

As the jackpot of the first special symbol, "jackpot C5" is defined in association with the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the range of "15 to 64" (see 202b3 in FIG. 76). Of the 100 possible counter values of the first winning type counter C2, 50 counter values are the "jackpot C2", so when the first special pattern lottery results in a jackpot, the "jackpot C5" is determined. ratio is 50% (50/100). This "jackpot C5" has 5 rounds like the "jackpot B" in the first embodiment, and after the jackpot ends, "variable state of special symbols" and "time-saving state of normal symbols" are given. It is a jackpot type. Also, this "jackpot C5" is a kind of short interval jackpot. Therefore, it is difficult to increase the number of prize balls obtained in each round compared to the long-interval jackpot.

As the jackpot of the first special symbol, "jackpot D5" is defined in association with the value of the first win type counter C2 in the range of "65 to 74" (see 202b4 in FIG. 76). Of the 100 possible counter values of the first winning type counter C2, 10 counter values are "jackpot D5", so when the first special symbol lottery results in a jackpot, "jackpot D5" is determined. ratio is 10% (10/100). This "jackpot D5" has 5 rounds like the "jackpot C" in the first embodiment, and after the jackpot ends, "special pattern low probability state" and "ordinary pattern time saving state" are given. It is a jackpot type that is played. Also, this "jackpot D5" is a kind of long interval jackpot. Therefore, the number of winning balls to be won in each round tends to be larger than in the short-interval jackpot.

As the jackpot of the first special symbol, "jackpot E5" is defined in association with the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the range of "75 to 99" (see 202b5 in FIG. 76). Among 100 counter values that can be taken by the first winning type counter C2, 25 counter values become "jackpot E5", so "jackpot E5" is determined when the first special symbol lottery results in a jackpot. ratio is 25% (25/100). This "jackpot E5" has 5 rounds like the "jackpot C" in the first embodiment, and after the jackpot ends, "special pattern low probability state" and "ordinary pattern time saving state" are given. It is a jackpot type that is played. Also, this "jackpot E5" is a kind of short interval jackpot. Therefore, it is difficult to increase the number of prize balls obtained in each round compared to the long-interval jackpot.

In addition, as the jackpot of the second special symbol, "jackpot F5" is defined in association with the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the range of "0 to 4" (see 202b6 in FIG. 76). . Among the 100 possible counter values of the first winning type counter C2, the number of counter values that become the "jackpot F5" is five, so when the first special symbol lottery results in a jackpot, the "jackpot F5" is determined. ratio is 5% (5/100). This "jackpot F5" has 16 rounds in the same manner as the "jackpot D" in the first embodiment, and after the jackpot ends, the "variable state of special symbols" and the "time-saving state of normal symbols" are given. It is a jackpot type. Also, this "jackpot F5" is a kind of long interval jackpot. Therefore, the number of prize balls to be obtained in each round tends to be larger than in the short-interval jackpot.

As the second special symbol jackpot, "jackpot G5" is defined in association with the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the range of "5 to 64" (see 202b7 in FIG. 76). Of the 100 counter values that can be taken by the first winning type counter C2, 60 counter values are the "jackpot G5", so when the first special symbol lottery results in a jackpot, the "jackpot G5" is determined. ratio is 60% (60/100). This "jackpot G5" has 10 rounds in the same manner as the "jackpot E" in the first embodiment, and after the jackpot ends, the "variable state of special symbols" and the "time-saving state of normal symbols" are given. It is a jackpot type. Also, this "jackpot G5" is a kind of long interval jackpot. Therefore, the number of winning balls to be won in each round tends to be larger than in the short-interval jackpot.

As the second special symbol jackpot, "jackpot H5" is defined in association with the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the range of "65 to 99" (see 202b8 in FIG. 76). Of the 100 counter values that can be taken by the first winning type counter C2, 35 counter values are "jackpot H5", so when the first special pattern lottery results in a jackpot, "jackpot H5" is determined. ratio is 35% (35/100). This "jackpot H5" has 10 rounds in the same manner as the "jackpot D" in the first embodiment, and after the jackpot ends, "special pattern low probability state" and "ordinary pattern time saving state" are given. It is a jackpot type that is played. Also, this "jackpot H5" is a kind of long interval jackpot. Therefore, the number of winning balls to be won in each round tends to be larger than in the short-interval jackpot.

Thus, in the fifth embodiment, the configuration is such that the long-interval jackpot and the short-interval jackpot are provided. In the long-interval jackpot, since the closing period of the right specific prize winning opening 65a between rounds is long, more game balls can reach the upper surface of the opening/closing door 65f1 by striking to the right during the long closing period. Therefore, when the closing period ends and a new round starts, the game ball passing through the upper surface of the opening/closing door 65f1 can enter the right specific winning hole 65a, so that more prize balls can be obtained. can be obtained. On the other hand, in the short-interval jackpot, the period from the closing of the right specific winning hole 65a to the next opening is short, and most of the game balls are allowed to reach the upper surface of the opening/closing door 65f1 during the closing period. Since it is not possible, the possibility of over-winning in the next round is also reduced. Therefore, the number of prize balls that can be obtained in each round is likely to be less than in the long interval jackpot. Therefore, in the fifth embodiment, it is possible to vary the degree of advantage for each jackpot by making the possibility of over-winning different for each jackpot type, aside from the number of rounds and the gaming state after the jackpot. A game can be played while paying attention to the type.

Next, details of the period length selection table 202e will be described with reference to FIG. 76(c). FIG. 76(c) is a diagram showing the defined contents of the period length selection table 202e. As shown in FIG. 76(c), this period length selection table 202e defines the length of the period to be set as the opening period and the interval period for each type of jackpot.

Specifically, for the jackpot types "jackpot A5", "jackpot B5", "jackpot D5", "jackpot F5" to "jackpot H5" (long interval jackpot), the opening period is "5 seconds". 76(c) 202e1). In addition, for the types of jackpots "jackpot C5" and "jackpot E5" (short-interval jackpot), an opening period of "1 second" is associated and defined, and an interval period of "0.5 seconds". are defined in association with each other (see 202e2 in FIG. 76(c)). By selecting the opening period and the interval period with reference to these stipulations, each closing period (opening period, interval period) is relatively long in the long-interval jackpot, so that the game ball can be played during the closing period. It is possible to reach the upper surface of the opening/closing door 65f1 relatively often. On the other hand, in the short-interval jackpot, each closing period is set to such a short length that one game ball can reach the upper surface of the opening/closing door 65f1 even if the closing period is started and then hit to the right. , it becomes difficult for over-winning to occur in each round of the jackpot. Therefore, by setting the closing period with reference to the period length selection table 202e, it is possible to vary the possibility of over winning according to the jackpot type. Therefore, it is possible to play the game while paying more attention to the jackpot type.

<Regarding the control process of the main controller in the fifth embodiment>
Next, control processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 77 to 79. FIG. First, with reference to FIG. 77, special symbol variation processing 5 (S121) in the fifth embodiment will be described. This special symbol variation process 5 (S121) is a process executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 21) instead of the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 22) in the first embodiment, and is a special symbol variation process. Similar to (see FIG. 22), this is a process for setting the display in the first pattern display device 37, setting the variation pattern of the third pattern by the third pattern display device 81, and the like.

Of the special symbol variation processing 5 (see FIG. 77) in the fifth embodiment, in each of the processing of S202 to S219 and S222 to S224, S202 to S202 of the special symbol variation processing (see FIG. 22) in the first embodiment respectively The same processes as those of S219 and S222 to S224 are executed.

Further, when the special symbol variation process 5 (see FIG. 77) in the fifth embodiment is started, it is determined whether or not the jackpot is in progress (S241), and if the jackpot is in progress (S241: Yes), Terminate the process as it is. On the other hand, in the process of S241, when it is determined that the jackpot is not in progress (S241: No), the process proceeds to S202.

Also, in the special symbol variation process 5 (see FIG. 77) in the fifth embodiment, when the process of S219 is completed, the jackpot start flag 203k is set to ON (S242), and the process proceeds to S224.

Next, the jackpot control process 5 (S1052) in the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. This jackpot control process 5 (S1052) is a process that is executed in the main process (see FIG. 30) in place of the jackpot control process (see FIG. 32) in the first embodiment. This is processing for controlling the operation.

Of the jackpot control processing 5 (see FIG. 78), S1201, S1203 to S1209, and S1210 to S1217, respectively, in the jackpot control processing (see FIG. 32) S1201, S1203 to S1209, and The same processing as each processing of S1210 to S1217 is executed.

Also, in the jackpot control process 5 (see FIG. 78) in the fifth embodiment, when it is determined that the jackpot start flag 203k is turned on in the process of S1201 (S1201: Yes), the period length selection table 202e (FIG. 76 (c)) is read (S1241), the opening period of the length corresponding to the jackpot type is specified from the read period length selection table 202e, and an opening command indicating the specified period is set (S1242). . In the processing of S1242, an opening command indicating an opening period of 5 seconds is set in the case of a long-interval jackpot, and an opening command indicating an opening period of 1 second is set in the case of a short-interval jackpot. After the process of S1242 is completed, the process proceeds to S1203.

In addition, in the jackpot control process 5 (see FIG. 78) in the fifth embodiment, when it is determined that the closing condition of the right specific winning opening 65a is satisfied in the process of S1208 (S1208: Yes), Interval setting processing for setting the interval period is executed (S1243), and this processing ends. Details of this interval setting process (S1243) will be described with reference to FIG.

FIG. 79 is a flow chart showing the interval setting process (S1243). In this interval setting process (S1243), first, it is determined whether or not the closing condition satisfied this time is the closing due to the end of the final round (S1401). : Yes), there is no need to set the interval period, so this processing ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S1401, if it is determined that the closing condition is satisfied due to the end of the round other than the final round (S1401: No), the period length selection table 202e is read out (S1402), corresponding to the jackpot type of this time The length of the interval period to be set is selected (identified) from the read period length selection table 202e (S1403). Then, the start of the interval period of the length specified in the processing of S1403 is set (S1404), and this processing ends.

By executing this interval setting process (see FIG. 79), the length of the interval period can be varied depending on whether the long-interval jackpot or the short-interval jackpot. As a result, in the long-interval jackpot, a large amount of game balls can reach the upper surface of the opening/closing door 65f1 that is being closed every interval period, so that a large amount of game balls are delivered to the right specific winning opening 65a at the start of the next round. can be over-prized. On the other hand, in the case of a short-interval jackpot, an extremely short period (0.5 seconds) is set as the interval period, so that the game ball can reach the upper surface of the opening/closing door 65f1 during the interval period. becomes difficult. Therefore, it becomes difficult for over-winning to occur in each round, and the number of prize balls that can be obtained in each round is reduced. Therefore, the game can be played in anticipation that the long-interval jackpot will be selected as the jackpot type.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the fifth embodiment, long-interval jackpots with relatively long jackpot opening periods and interval periods and short-interval jackpots with relatively short jackpot opening periods and interval periods are provided. It is configured. In the event of a long-interval jackpot, the closure period (opening period) from the announcement of the jackpot to the start of the first round, and the start of the next round after one round ends. During the closing period (interval period) until, a large amount of prize balls can reach the upper surface of the opening/closing door 65f1 by hitting to the right. Therefore, when the closing period elapses and the right specific prize winning port 65a is opened, the game balls on the upper surface of the opening/closing door 65f1 can enter the right specific prize winning port 65a at once. It is possible to increase the rate of occurrence of over-winning. On the other hand, in the case of a short-interval jackpot, even if a player hits right during the closing period, the closing period is too short and the game ball hardly reaches the upper surface of the opening/closing door 65f1 before the next round is started. . As a result, over-winning is less likely to occur, which is disadvantageous in terms of the number of prize balls compared to long-distance jackpots. As a result, the number of rounds of the big win, the game state after the end of the big win, and the likelihood of over-winning can be varied according to the kind of the big win, so that the difference in the degree of advantage for each kind of the big win can be increased. be able to. Therefore, when a jackpot is won, the game can be played while paying more attention to the type of the jackpot.

In the fifth embodiment, only two types of long-interval jackpots with a long closing period and short-interval jackpots with a short closing period are provided, but the present invention is not limited to this. It is good also as composition which provides more kinds. Specifically, for example, in addition to the long-interval jackpot and the short-interval jackpot, a long interval (for example, 3 seconds) is set as the closing period until a predetermined round (for example, the third round) of the jackpot, and subsequent rounds In the jackpot type in which a short interval (eg, 0.5 seconds) is set, conversely, a short interval (eg, 0.5 seconds) is set as the closing period until a predetermined round (eg, the third round) , In subsequent rounds, it may be configured to provide a jackpot type in which a long interval (for example, 3 seconds) is set. Moreover, for example, it is good also as a structure which provides the jackpot classification which repeats a short space|interval and a long space|interval by turns. By constructing in this way, even if the opening period is short, after a predetermined round has passed, the player will be notified that the long interval will be a big win or the short interval and the long interval will be alternately repeated. can be expected. Also, if the opening period is a long interval, it is possible to expect a big win in which the long interval is set for all the closing periods. As a result, the player can be given the pleasure of predicting the type of big win.

In the fifth embodiment, both the opening period and the interval period are set to be long when the long-interval jackpot is won, and both the opening period and the interval period are set to be short when the short-interval jackpot is won. Although it is assumed that the interval is used, it is not limited to this. For example, one period may have a common length, and only the length of the other period may differ according to the type of jackpot. As a result, the control can be simplified, so the processing load on the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 can be reduced.

In the fifth embodiment, the lengths of the opening period and the interval period are varied according to the type of jackpot, but the present invention is not limited to this. Alternatively or additionally, at least one of the opening period and the interval period may be changed according to the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot. Specifically, for example, in a low probability state of special symbols that are disadvantageous to the player, and in a normal state of normal symbols, a short opening period (eg, 1 second) and an interval period (eg, 0.5 seconds) While it is set, in the game state (probability variable state, time saving state) in which the time saving state of normal symbols is set, a long opening period (for example, 5 seconds) and an interval period (for example, 3 seconds) are set. It is good also as a structure which provides a jackpot classification. Thereby, it is possible to further improve the advantageous degree of the variable probability state and the time saving state which are advantageous to the player. Conversely, a long closing period may be set in a game state disadvantageous to the player, and a short closing period may be set in an advantageous game state. As a result, when the player wins a big win in a disadvantageous state, more prize balls can be obtained, so that quitting the game when the player is in a disadvantageous state can be suppressed. Therefore, the operating rate of the pachinko machine 10 can be improved. Further, the control for varying the length of the closing period according to the game state or the jackpot type does not necessarily need to be combined with the right variable winning device 65 in this embodiment. It may be applied to the pachinko machine 10 provided with only the variable winning device (for example, the left variable winning device 650 in each of the above-described embodiments) that cannot intentionally generate over winning. As a result, the closing period can be varied according to the situation (the type of jackpot won, the game state at the time of winning, etc.), so that the effects to be executed during the closing period can be varied. Therefore, it is possible to diversify the mode of presentation.

<Modified example of the fifth embodiment>
Next, referring to FIG. 80, a modified example of the fifth embodiment described above will be described. A technique for providing a jackpot type that is difficult to win has been described. On the other hand, in this modified example, two types of variable winning devices (lower variable winning device 65, upper variable winning device 650) are used to vary the possibility of over winning without changing the closing period. explain.

FIG. 80 is a diagram showing the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in the modified example of the fifth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 80, in this modification, a lower variable winning device 65 having the same structure as the right variable winning device 65 in each of the above embodiments is arranged at the same position as the right variable winning device 65 in each of the above embodiments. It is Above the lower variable winning device 65, an upper variable winning device 650 having the same structure as the left variable winning device 650 in the first to fourth embodiments is arranged. In this modification, according to the jackpot type, the upper specific winning opening 650a of the upper variable winning device 650 and the lower specific winning opening 65a of the variable winning device 65 are alternately opened for each round. ) and a jackpot type (one jackpot) in which the lower specific prize winning opening 65a is opened in each round of the jackpot. Each closing period (opening period, interval period) is set to the same period as the short interval jackpot in the fifth embodiment described above. In this configuration, the one-sided jackpot operates in the same manner as the short-interval jackpot in the fifth embodiment described above, so there is almost no over-winning, which is disadvantageous in terms of the number of prize balls.

On the other hand, in the case of an alternate jackpot, if you hit right in the round where the upper specific winning opening 650a is open, some game balls will pass through the right side of the upper specific winning opening 650a (upper specific winning opening There is a case where it flows downward without winning the opening 650a and reaches the upper surface of the opening/closing door 65f1. That is, at the start of the next round (the round in which the lower specific winning hole 65a is opened), there is a possibility that one or more game balls are arranged on the upper surface of the opening/closing door 65f1. As a result, the more game balls that reach the upper surface of the opening/closing door 65f1, the higher the probability of over winning in the next round (the round in which the lower specific winning opening 65a is opened). Therefore, when an alternate jackpot is won, the player is made to play a game by devising a shooting intensity that makes it easier for the player to reach the upper surface of the opening/closing door 65f1 by passing through the right side of the upper specific winning port 650a. can be done. That is, during a maximum of 30 seconds when the upper specific winning opening 650a is open, more game balls are allowed to reach the upper surface of the opening and closing door 65f1, and then the upper specific winning opening 650a is played with more than the upper limit number (2 pieces) A game can be played with the aim of hitting a ball. As a result, when the alternating jackpot hits, the prize balls that can be obtained differ according to the game method of the player, so that players who are confident in their skills are actively encouraged to play the game with the pachinko machine 10.例文帳に追加can be done. Therefore, the operating rate of the pachinko machine 10 can be improved.

<Sixth Embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 81 to 90. FIG. In the fifth embodiment described above, by varying the length of the opening period and the ending period (the length of the closing period) according to the jackpot type, the opening and closing door 65f1 of the right variable winning device 65 is reached in each closing period. The number of game balls that can be played is made different. As a result, when the game ball passing through the upper surface of the opening/closing door 65f1 at the start of each round (that is, when the right specific winning opening 65a is opened, the game ball is placed in a position guided into the right specific winning opening 65a). It is configured so that the number of game balls) can be varied. In the long-interval jackpot, in which a closing period of a length that allows more than two game balls to reach the upper surface of the opening/closing door 65f1 is set, game balls are continuously shot toward the opening/closing door 65f1 during the closing period. By just continuing to do so, all the game balls passing over the opening/closing door 65f1 at the start of the next round can be made to enter the opened right specific winning hole 65a. Therefore, in each round of the jackpot that ends when two or more game balls win, the number of game balls exceeding the prescribed number (two) is entered only by continuously hitting the right during the closing period. be able to. On the other hand, in the short-interval jackpot, in which the closing period is set to a length that allows only two or less game balls to reach the upper surface of the opening/closing door 65f1, the ball passes through the upper surface of the opening/closing door 65f1 at the start of each round of the jackpot. The number of game balls inside becomes almost two or less. As a result, in each round of the big win, almost only the game balls of the prescribed number (two) enter and the round ends. As a result, the number of prize balls that can be obtained in each round of the jackpot can be varied according to the jackpot type, so that the difference in the degree of advantage for each jackpot type can be increased.

On the other hand, in the sixth embodiment, the length of the opening period is fixed at 0.5 seconds regardless of the type of jackpot. In other words, even if the player hits right after the opening period starts, the opening period ends before the game ball reaches the opening/closing door 65f1, and the right specific winning hole 65a is opened. Then, depending on the suggested content during execution of the variable display effect, whether or not it is better to shoot the game ball during the variable display How?) is configured to let the player decide. That is, during execution of the variable display, an effect can be executed to notify the player of the possibility of being advantageous when hitting to the right. As a result, the player is made to predict whether or not it is better to hit the right side from the content of the effect, and if it is determined that it is better to hit the right side, the player can predict whether the player should hit the right side before the end of the variation. You can start hitting. Therefore, when the opening/closing door 65f1 is opened as predicted, it is possible to make the player feel happy that he/she has generated an over-winning by himself/herself.

The pachinko machine 10 according to the sixth embodiment differs in configuration from the pachinko machine 10 according to the fifth embodiment in that the placement and number of passage detection sensors 228 provided in the right variable winning device 65 are changed. , the configuration of the ROM 202 and the RAM 203 in the main controller 110 is partially changed, the configuration of the ROM 222 and the RAM 223 in the sound lamp control device 113 is partially changed, and the sound lamp control device 113 The only difference is that the control processing executed by the MPU 221 is partially changed. Other configurations, various processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, other processes executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113, and various processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 are described in the fifth It is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in the embodiment. Hereinafter, elements that are the same as those of the first embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals, and illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 81, the arrangement of the passage detection sensor 228 provided in the right variable winning device 65 in the sixth embodiment will be described. FIG. 81 is a top view of the right variable winning device 65 in the sixth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 81, the right variable winning device 65 in the sixth embodiment is provided on the upper surface of the opening/closing door 65f1 on the inlet side (front view right side) and the outlet side (front view left side). , passage detection sensors 228g1 and 228g2 capable of detecting the passage of game balls are provided. The passage detection sensor 228g1 can detect a game ball flowing into the channel provided on the upper surface of the opening/closing door 65f1. In addition, the passage detection sensor 228g2 can detect a game ball discharged to the left side of the opening/closing door 65f1 after passing through the channel provided on the upper surface of the opening/closing door 65f1. In the sixth embodiment, the number of game balls flowing into the flow path provided on the upper surface of the opening/closing door 65f1 (the number of game balls detected by the passage detection sensor 228g1) and the number of game balls provided on the upper surface of the opening/closing door 65f1. By calculating the difference between the number of game balls discharged from the passage (the number of game balls detected by the passage detection sensor 228g2) and the number of game balls passing over the upper surface of the opening/closing door 65f1, the number of game balls , is configured so that it can be grasped more accurately.

Further, as shown in FIG. 81, the right variable winning device 65 in the sixth embodiment prevents the game ball from flowing down (the period required for the game ball to decelerate and pass through the upper surface of the open/close door 65f1). In addition to the convex portions 65f1a to 65f1c on the upper surface of the opening/closing door 65f1, convex portions 65f1d and 65f1e are provided on the left and right sides of the opening/closing door 65f1 to prevent game balls from flowing down. ing. The game ball flowing down from the right side of the right variable winning device 65 can be caused to flow from the front side of the top surface of the right variable winning device 65 into the flow path on the top surface of the opening/closing door 65f1 by the convex portion 65f1d. In addition, due to the convex portion 65f1e, the discharge position can be limited to the front side of the right variable winning device 65 when discharged from the channel provided on the upper surface of the opening/closing door 65f1. The inlet side (right side in front view) and the outlet side (left side in front view) of the flow path on the upper surface of these opening/closing doors 65f1 through which game balls can pass (range not blocked by convex portions 65f1d and 65f1e) are , a width that allows only one game ball to pass (a width corresponding to 1.5 game balls), and passage detection sensors 228g1 and 228g2 are arranged at the centers thereof. Passage detection provided on one entrance side and exit side by making the passages on the entrance side and the exit side narrower than in each of the above embodiments (to the width of 1.5 game balls) By the sensors 228g1 and 228g2, game balls flowing into the channel on the upper surface of the opening/closing door 65f1 and game balls flowing out from the channel can be detected more reliably. Therefore, it is possible to more accurately grasp the number of game balls passing over the upper surface of the opening/closing door 65f1.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 82 to 84, description will be given of the right-handed expectation suggesting effects that may be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 during execution of the variable display effects in the sixth embodiment. conduct. This right-handed expectation indication effect is an effect that may be executed as part of the variable display effect that develops into super reach or special reach, and when a game ball is shot toward the upper surface of the opening/closing door 65f1. This is an effect for suggesting the player's degree of expectation as to whether or not it will be advantageous to the player. That is, when more game balls reach the flow path on the upper surface of the opening/closing door 65f1 during the variable display, the right specific winning port 65a is opened to indicate the degree of expectation of over winning. It is a performance.

FIG. 82(a) is a diagram showing a display mode during super reach in which a right-handed expected degree suggestion effect is set. As described above, in the sixth embodiment, the right-handed expectation degree suggesting effect is executed in a part of the super reach or the special reach effect. 82(a), an image of an adventurer character holding a sword and a shield and an enemy monster glaring at each other is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. displayed on the display screen. In addition, a display area HR4 is formed on the upper side of the display screen to display the characters "Defeat the enemy!" be done. With these display contents, the player can understand that if the adventurer can defeat the enemy monster, he will win a big prize.

Incidentally, as shown in FIG. 82(a), the body of the monster has cross-shaped wounds. Furthermore, the front side of the right variable prize winning device 65 in the sixth embodiment is decorated with a scar on the body of a monster. As a result, the player can have the impression that the wound of the monster and the right variable winning device 65 are related. Although the details will be described later, in the sixth embodiment, an effect is executed in which the adventurer attacks the monster aiming at its wound. At the same time, as a player-participation type effect, a game ball is shot aiming at the right variable winning device 65, which is decorated like a monster's wound, is executed.

As shown in FIG. 82(b), in the right-handed expectation suggesting effect, after an image of the adventurer and the monster glaring at each other is displayed, the upper part of the abdomen of the monster is zoomed up and displayed, and the image of the monster is displayed. On the right side of , a display area HR5 is formed in which a physical strength gauge LG indicating the remaining physical strength of the monster is displayed. These display contents allow the player to visually understand the remaining physical strength of the monster in an easy-to-understand manner.

Also, on the left side of the monster, an image of an arrow pointing to the wound of the monster is displayed. Is displayed. Furthermore, the vicinity of the part of the right variable prize winning device 65 that is decorated like a scratch emits light in a color corresponding to the degree of expectation of the current performance. By these performance contents, it is suggested to the player that there is a possibility of over-winning by aiming at the right variable prize-winning device 65 decorated like a scratch and shooting the game ball. can be done.

The right variable winning device 65 in the sixth embodiment incorporates light-emitting diodes (LEDs) of a plurality of kinds of emission colors in order to emit light in the vicinity of the decoration that imitates a scratch. That is, it contains a white LED, a blue LED, a green LED, and a red LED. Although the details will be described later, in the sixth embodiment, white is least expected, blue is more expected than white, green is more expected than blue, and red is the most expected. is configured to be high. As a result, using the light emission color of the right variable winning device 65 as a clue, is it advantageous when the game ball is shot to the upper surface of the opening/closing door 65f1 (whether the right specific winning port 65a is opened and over winning occurs). You can guess what. Therefore, it is possible to make the player pay more attention to the content of the right-handed expected degree suggesting performance.

FIG. 83(a) shows a display mode when the player shoots a game ball aiming at the upper surface of the opening/closing door 65f1 by hitting to the right in the right-handed expectation suggesting effect. As shown in FIG. 83(a), in the right-handed expectation suggesting effect, after the display contents suggesting that the monster should be attacked aiming at the wound (see FIG. 82(b)), the game ball Each time the character passes through the passage detection sensor 228g1, the adventurer attacks the wound of the monster, thereby reducing the physical strength gauge LG of the monster by one gauge. By executing the effect of decreasing the gauge, the player can be made to think that hitting the game ball to the right makes it easier to defeat the monster, so that the game ball can be positively hit to the right. . Therefore, it is possible to improve the willingness of the player to participate in the right-handed expectation degree suggesting effect.

In addition, in the right-handed expectation indication effect in the sixth embodiment, when the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit, the gauge number of the physical strength gauge LG can be reduced to 0, while the lottery result of the special symbol is lost. In this case, the remaining gauge is reduced to only one gauge (the number of gauges never becomes 0). As a result, the player who wants to know the lottery result of the special pattern before the third pattern is stopped and displayed is more actively shot with the game ball toward the upper surface of the opening/closing door 65f1. can be done. As a result, the player's willingness to participate in the right-handed expectation degree suggesting effect can be further improved.

FIG. 83(b) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode at the time of stop of variation when a special symbol lottery results in a big win and a variation display with right-handed expectation suggesting effect is executed. As shown in FIG. 83(b), when a big win is notified, the third symbols are stopped and displayed in the display area HR3 with the same numbers. In addition to this, an effect is executed in which the adventurer's attack causes the monster to fall and the gauge number of the physical strength gauge to decrease to 0. Also, the characters "Victory" are displayed in the display area HR4. These display contents make it possible for the player to easily understand that the jackpot has been won.

In addition, these display contents continue to be displayed during the opening period. As described above, the sixth embodiment is configured so that the opening period is as short as 0.5 seconds. Therefore, by executing the right-handed expectation degree suggesting effect until the opening period, it is configured to prevent the effect from becoming unnatural by performing the effect for only 0.5 seconds. At the end of the opening period, the right specific prize winning port 65a is opened, so if the player hits right during execution of the right-handed expectation degree suggesting effect and the game ball reaches the upper surface of the open/close door 65f1. enters the right specific winning hole 65a where the game ball is opened.

Next, with reference to FIG. 84, the temporal change of the display mode before and after the variable display effect in which the right-handed expected degree suggesting effect is set in the sixth embodiment will be described. FIG. 84(a) is a diagram showing the change over time of the display mode in the case where the right-handed expectation degree suggestion effect is executed in the variable display effect in the case of a big win in the special symbol lottery. In FIG. 84(a), an example will be described in which Super Reach with a variation time of 60 seconds is selected as the variation type. As shown in FIG. 84(a), when the variable display corresponding to the big win is started, first, the normal variable display is started, and then the variable display of the third symbols forming each symbol row is started. Then, when 10 seconds have passed since the variable display of the third symbol was started, a ready-to-win state occurs. That is, the left symbol row Z1 and the right symbol row Z3 are stop-displayed with the third symbols having the same numbers, and only the middle symbol row Z2 is variably displayed.

When 20 seconds have passed since the ready-to-win state was generated, it develops into super-ready-to-win, and the right-handed expectation degree suggesting effect (see FIG. 82(a)) is started. Then, when 26 seconds have passed since this right-handed hitting expectation suggesting effect was started (that is, when 4 seconds remain until the fluctuation ends), the characters "Aim for the scratch!" are displayed in the display area HR4. The effect (see FIG. 82(b)) is executed. In this effect, as described above, the color of light emitted from the right variable winning device 65 is used to suggest the degree of expectation of whether or not there will be an advantage when hitting to the right. About 7 game balls are shot by right-handed hitting for 4.5 seconds, which is the remaining 4 seconds until the end of the fluctuation time and 0.5 seconds for the opening period of the jackpot. Therefore, at the start of one round, about seven game balls can be entered almost simultaneously. In the following description, an effect that informs the degree of expectation of whether or not there will be an advantage if the player hits to the right depending on the color of light emitted from the right variable prize winning device 65 (the text "Aim for scratches!" is displayed) is referred to as "expectation notification effect".

Actually, in most cases, firing is started after checking the emitted light color and determining whether or not the opening/closing door 65f1 is opened. fewer in number. If the game ball is shot in the case of a misalignment, all the game balls shot are wasted (almost all the game balls are discharged from the out port 66), so immediately right-handed hits are made every time the effect occurs. This is because if a game is played with the game method that is used, it will actually result in a loss. Therefore, every time an effect (expectation notification effect) in which the characters "Aim for the wound!" When it is determined that the ball will be released, the game can be played by trying to quickly start hitting to the right. Therefore, it is possible to improve the desire of the player to participate in the performance indicating the degree of expectation of right-handed hitting, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

When 0.5 second of the opening period of the jackpot has passed, the first round of the jackpot is started, the right specific prize winning port 65a is opened, and a performance indicating the start of the jackpot (a performance corresponding to the opening performance). is performed for the round period of one round and for the interval period after one round ends. Then, when the second round of big wins is started, a normal mode of big win performance is executed. Compared to executing the opening performance during 0.5 seconds of the actual opening period by executing the performance corresponding to the opening performance over the period until the second round of the jackpot is started. As a result, it is possible to notify the fact that the jackpot has started over a sufficiently long period of time. Therefore, it is possible to make the player recognize more reliably that the big win has started.

FIG. 84(b) is a diagram showing the change over time of the display mode in the case where the variation type of super reach out with a variation time of 60.5 seconds is determined as the variation pattern, and the right-handed expectation indication effect is set. be. As shown in FIG. 84(b), the change over time of the effect mode in the case of loss is exactly the same as in the case of a big win at least until the expectation level notification effect occurs. On the other hand, as described above, the selectivity of the luminescent color of the decorative portion of the right variable winning device 65 is different from that in the case of the big win. Therefore, when the expectation level notification effect occurs, whether or not to start hitting to the right depends on whether the luminescent color has a high percentage of selection in the big win or the luminescence color with a high percentage of selection in the loss. You can let the player decide.

As shown in FIG. 84(b), when 60 seconds have passed since the start of the fluctuation, it is reported that the monster was not defeated by the adventurer's attack, and the combination of the third symbols corresponding to the failure is stopped. is displayed to notify that it is out. This makes it possible for the player to easily understand that the lottery result of the special symbol of this time has been lost. This notification of the loss (stopped display of the combination of the third symbols corresponding to the loss) continues for 0.5 second. The reason why the variation time is longer by 0.5 seconds is that, as described above, the opening period of the jackpot, 0.5 seconds, is also used to suggest the right-handed expectation. This is for performing the performance. In other words, even in the case of losing, by setting the same performance time as in the case of a big win, it is possible to standardize the performance mode until 60 seconds when the final result is announced. Therefore, since the effect can be executed using the common data, the amount of data for executing the right-handed expectation degree suggesting effect can be reduced.

As described above, in the sixth embodiment, when the right-handed expectation suggesting effect is set, the effect that has a common mode except for the selectivity of the luminous color of the decorative portion of the right variable winning device 65 is the same as the effect at the end of the effect. It continues until 0.5 seconds ago. As a result, the player can determine whether or not it is better to hit to the right by using the color of light emitted from the right variable winning device 65 as a clue.

As described above, in the sixth embodiment, every time the game ball passes through the passage detection sensor 228g1 after the expectation notification effect has occurred, the number of gauges of the physical strength gauge LG indicating the physical strength of the monster is increased by one. appear to decrease. In the case of a big win (the right specific prize winning opening 65a is opened), the physical strength gauge LG is reduced to 0, while in the case of a loss, the physical strength gauge LG is reduced only to 1. Therefore, if the player continues to hit right, it may be possible to sense a little earlier whether or not a big win will occur. Since the physical strength gauge LG has an initial gauge number of 5, it is possible to sense whether or not a big hit has occurred by allowing five game balls to reach the passage detection sensor 228g1. That is, if the gauge number decreases to 0, it can be determined that a big win has occurred, while if the gauge number does not decrease from 1, it can be determined that the game has failed. However, it takes at least 3 seconds to shoot 5 game balls. It takes about one second for the shot game ball to reach the passage detection sensor 228g1. Therefore, even if the game balls are shot after confirming the emission color of the right variable winning device 65, it is difficult to let the five game balls pass through the passage detection sensor 228g1. For this reason, a game ball can be shot before the expectation notification effect is generated for a player who wants to detect a big win as soon as possible. In other words, depending on the taste of each player, it is possible to determine whether or not the player will hit the jackpot as early as possible, and whether or not the player will hit the right hand by guessing whether or not the jackpot will be won from the light emission color of the right variable prize winning device 65. It is possible to allow the player to select the playability to be judged. As a result, it is possible to provide game features that match the tastes of each player, thereby further enhancing the player's interest in the game.

In addition, in the sixth embodiment, when the right-handed expectation degree suggesting effect is set in the variable display effect corresponding to the big win, when five or more game balls pass the passage detection sensor 228g1, the physical strength gauge LG Although the number of gauges is always reduced to 0, it is not limited to this. For example, when a big win is achieved, the gauge number of the physical strength gauge LG can be reduced to 0 at a predetermined rate (for example, 50%), and in other cases, the gauge number is reduced only to 1. can be configured to By configuring in this way, even if the number of gauges is reduced to only 1, it is possible to maintain the feeling of anticipation for the big win.

<Electrical configuration in the sixth embodiment>
Next, the ROM 222 and RAM 223 provided in the sound lamp control device 113 according to the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 85 and 86. FIG. FIG. 85(a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM 222. As shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 85(a), the ROM 222 in the sixth embodiment has an effect mode selection table for the configuration of the ROM 222 in the fifth embodiment (and the first embodiment) (see FIG. 14(a)). 222b is added. Other configurations are the same as those of the above-described fifth embodiment, so details thereof will be omitted.

The effect mode selection table 222b is a data table referred to when selecting the effect mode to be executed in the variable display effect. In this effect mode selection table 222b, a plurality of effect modes including the above-mentioned right-handed expectation suggesting effect are defined, and at the start of the variable display effect, a mode corresponding to the value of the effect lottery counter 223j, which will be described later, is determined. be done. Details of the presentation mode selection table 222b will be described with reference to FIG.

FIG. 86 is a diagram showing the specified contents of the presentation mode selection table 222b. As shown in FIG. 86, the effect mode selection table 222b defines, for each variation type, a selectable effect mode and a value range of the effect lottery counter 223j in association with each other. Specifically, with respect to the variation type "hit special reach", the normal effect is defined as the effect type in association with the value range "0 to 39" of the effect lottery counter 223j (222b1 in FIG. 86). reference). This normal effect is a generic term for the effect mode in which it is difficult to know whether or not right-handed hitting is advantageous until just before the fluctuation stops. More specifically, in the case of a big win and in the case of a loss, it is possible to distinguish whether or not a big win will occur from the presentation mode, except for whether or not the third symbols with the same number are aligned at the end of the variation. It is a production of a mode that makes it difficult to When this normal effect is executed, it cannot be determined whether or not the game is a big win until the third symbol is stopped. Therefore, even if the player perceives a big win and starts hitting to the right, the first round is started before more than two game balls reach the upper surface of the opening/closing door 65f1. Therefore, when the normal effect is selected, it becomes difficult to win over in the first round.

Of the 100 values "0 to 99" that the value of the effect lottery counter 223j can take, 40 counter values are associated with the "normal effect". In addition, the rate at which the normal effect is determined as the effect mode is 40% (40/100).

On the other hand, the range of values of the effect lottery counter 223j "40 to 99" is defined in association with a right-handed expectation degree suggesting effect as the effect mode (see 222b2 to 222b5 in FIG. 86). Of these, the range of "40 to 49" is defined in association with a right-handed expectation degree suggesting effect in which an expectation level notification effect in which "white" is set as the emission color of the right variable winning device 65 is generated. (See 222b2 in FIG. 86), the range of "50 to 74" is defined in association with a mode in which "blue" is set as the emission color (see 222b3 in FIG. 86), and the range of "75 to 90" is associated with a mode in which "green" is set as the emission color (see 222b4 in FIG. 86), and in the range of "90 to 99", there is a mode in which "red" is set as the emission color. are defined in association with each other (see 222b5 in FIG. 86).

Of the 100 possible values of the effect lottery counter 223j, the counter values associated with the luminescent colors "white", "blue", "green", and "red" are 10, 25, and 10, respectively. Since there are 15 pieces and 10 pieces, the ratios at which each emission color is determined are 10% (10/100), 25% (25/100), 15% (15/100), and 10% (10/100), respectively. be.

In addition, for the variation type "hit super reach", the normal effect is defined as the effect type in association with the value range "0 to 74" of the effect lottery counter 223j (see 222b6 in FIG. 86). Of the 100 possible values of the effect lottery counter 223j, 75 counter values are associated with the "normal effect". The rate at which the effect is determined is 75% (75/100).

On the other hand, the value range "75 to 99" of the effect lottery counter 223j is defined in association with a right-handed expectation degree suggesting effect as an effect mode (see 222b7 and 222b8 in FIG. 86). Of these, the range of "75 to 94" is defined in association with "white" as the emission color of the right variable winning device 65 in the expectation level notification effect (see 222b7 in FIG. 86), and the range of "95 to 99" is defined. The range is defined in association with a mode in which "red" is set as the emission color (see 222b8 in FIG. 86). Of the 100 possible values of the effect lottery counter 223j, the counter values associated with the luminescent colors "white" and "red" are 20 and 5, respectively, so each luminescent color is determined. The proportions are 20% (20/100) and 5% (5/100), respectively.

In addition, for the variation type "missing special reach", the normal effect is defined as the effect type in association with the value range "0 to 89" of the effect lottery counter 223j (see 222b9 in FIG. 86). Of the 100 possible values of the effect lottery counter 223j, 90 counter values are associated with "normal effect". The rate at which the effects are determined is 90% (90/100).

On the other hand, the value range "90 to 99" of the effect lottery counter 223j is defined in association with a right-handed expectation degree suggesting effect as an effect mode (see 222b10 to 222b12 in FIG. 86). Of these, the range of "90 to 96" is defined in association with "white" as the light emission color of the right variable winning device 65 in the expectation level notification effect (see 222b10 in FIG. 86), and "97, 98". The range is defined in association with a mode in which "blue" is set as the emission color (see 222b11 in FIG. 86), and "99" corresponds to a mode in which "green" is set as the emission color. (see 222b12 in FIG. 86). Of the 100 possible values of the effect lottery counter 223j, the counter values associated with the luminescent colors "white", "blue", and "green" are 7, 2, and 1, respectively. The proportions at which each emission color is determined are 7% (7/100), 2% (2/100), and 1% (1/100), respectively.

That is, when the winning special reach and the losing special reach are compared, the ratio of selecting the right-handed expectation degree suggesting effect is higher in the winning special reach (the ratio of selecting the normal effect is lower). Therefore, at the time when the right-handed expectation degree suggesting effect is executed, it is possible to make the player feel expectation for the big win. Also, in the hit special reach, compared to the off special reach, when the right-handed expectation suggestion effect is determined, the ratio of determining the emission color of "white" and "blue" is lower, while "green" The determination ratio of the emission color is increased. Also, only in the case of winning special reach, there is a possibility that the luminescent color of "red" is determined. Therefore, when the luminescent color becomes "green", the player can be made to think that there is a high possibility that hitting to the right will be more advantageous. In addition, when it becomes "red", it is possible to make the player perceive that the right specific winning opening 65a is opened.

In addition, for the variation type "missing super reach", the normal effect is defined as the effect type in association with the value range "0 to 94" of the effect lottery counter 223j (see 222b13 in FIG. 86). Of the 100 possible values of the effect lottery counter 223j, 95 counter values are associated with "normal effect". The rate at which the effects are determined is 95% (95/100).

On the other hand, for the range of values of the effect lottery counter 223j "95 to 99", an expectation level notification effect corresponding to the luminescent color of "white" is associated and defined as a effect mode (222b14 in FIG. 86). reference). Of the 100 possible values of the effect lottery counter 223j, the counter value associated with the expectation level notification effect with the light emission color of "white" is 5, so the expectation level notification with the light emission color of "white". The rate at which the effect is determined is 5% (5/100).

That is, when comparing the winning super reach and the losing super reach, the ratio of selecting the right-handed expectation degree suggesting effect is higher in the winning super reach (the ratio of selecting the normal effect is lower). Therefore, at the time when the right-handed expectation degree suggesting effect is executed, it is possible to make the player feel the expectation for the big win. Also, in the hit super reach, compared to the losing super reach, the determination ratio of the "white" luminescent color is lower when the right-handed expectation suggesting effect is determined. Also, only in the case of winning special reach, there is a possibility that the luminescent color of "red" is determined. Therefore, when the luminescent color becomes "white", the player can guess whether hitting to the right is advantageous or not. In addition, when it becomes "red", it is possible to make the player perceive that the right specific winning opening 65a is opened.

In addition, fluctuation types other than "hit special reach", "hit super reach", "missing special reach", and "missing super reach" ("hit normal reach", "missing normal reach", "long miss", "short miss ”), a “normal effect” is defined in association with all possible value ranges of the effect lottery counter 223j (see 222b15 in FIG. 86). Therefore, when the variation type is "normal reach for win", "normal reach for loss", "long loss", or "short loss", the right-handed expectation degree suggesting effect is not executed.

As described above, in the sixth embodiment, the ratio of determining the right-handed expectation degree suggesting effect and the ratio of selecting each luminescent color in the expectation degree notification effect in the right-handed expectation degree suggesting effect are changed according to the variation type. It is configured to be different depending on the As a result, the player can judge whether or not it is better to hit to the right from the color of light emitted from the right variable winning device 65 when the expectation level notification effect is executed. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

Next, the configuration of the RAM 223 in the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 85(b). As shown in FIG. 85(b), the RAM 223 in the sixth embodiment has an effect lottery counter 223j and a passage number counter 223k in contrast to the configuration of the RAM 223 in the first embodiment (see FIG. 14(b)). , a notification effecting flag 223m, a physical strength gauge counter 223n, a notification standby flag 223p, and a notification type storage area 223q are added.

The effect lottery counter 223j is a counter used to select a variable display effect mode from the above-described effect mode selection table 222b (see FIG. 86), and the value is updated within the range of "0 to 99". At the start of fluctuation, an effect mode corresponding to the value of the effect lottery counter 223j is selected from the effect mode selection table 222b.

The passing number counter 223k is a counter for counting the number of game balls passing over the upper surface of the opening/closing door 65f1. The value of the passage number counter 223k is changed to 1 each time the passage of the game ball is detected by the passage detection sensor 228g1 provided on the upstream side of the passage detection sensors 228g1 and 228g2 (the output becomes H). are added one by one. That is, each time a game ball flows into the upper surface of the opening/closing door 65f1, the value is incremented by one. Also, the value of the passage number counter 223k is incremented by one each time the passage of the game ball is detected by the passage detection sensor 228g2 provided on the downstream side (the output becomes H). That is, each time a game ball flows out from the channel on the upper surface of the opening/closing door 65f1, the value is subtracted by one.

The informing effect flag 223m indicates whether or not the expectation level informing effect (effect of notifying the degree of expectation as to whether or not there is an advantage if the player hits to the right according to the light emission color of the right variable winning device 65) is being executed. is a flag indicating If the informing effect in-progress flag 223m is on, it indicates that the expectation level informing effect is being executed, and if it is off, it means that the expectation level informing effect is not being executed. This informing effect flag 223m is set to ON when the start of the expectation level informing effect is set (see S4708 in FIG. 88), and is set to OFF when the big win is started.

The physical fitness gauge counter 223n is a counter indicating the gauge number of the physical fitness gauge LG displayed on the third symbol display device 81 during execution of the expectation level notification effect. The counter value of the physical strength gauge counter 223n is set to a value obtained by subtracting the value of the passing number counter 223k from the maximum value of the physical strength gauge number "5" as an initial value at the start of the expectation level notification effect (FIG. 88). (see S4706 of ). As a result, if the game ball is struck to the right before the expectation level notification effect is started, and a plurality of game balls are passing through the upper surface of the opening/closing door 65f1 at the start of the expectation level notification effect, the expectation It is possible to shorten the period required until the gauge number of the physical strength gauge counter LG is completely reduced during execution of the degree notification performance. Therefore, it is possible for a player who wants to know whether or not a big win will occur as soon as possible to hit the game ball to the right before the expectation level notification effect is started. When the value of the passing number counter 223k is 4 or more at the start of the expectation level notification effect, the value of the physical strength gauge counter 223n is uniformly set to 1 regardless of the value of the passing number counter 223k (Fig. 88). (see S4705 of ). That is, even in the case of a big win, the gauge number of the physical strength gauge LG does not become 0 immediately after the start of the expectation level notification effect. Therefore, it is possible for the player to judge whether or not it is better to start hitting to the right using the light emission color of the right variable winning device 65 as a clue. This physical strength gauge counter 223n detects the passage of the game ball by the passage detection sensor 228g1 on the upstream side until it reaches the lower limit value (0 for a big hit, 1 for a miss) set for each special symbol lottery result. The value is updated by subtracting 1 each time (see S4217 in FIG. 87).

The notification standby flag 223p is a flag indicating whether or not the variation display effect in which the right-handed expectation suggestion effect is set is being executed and the start timing of the expectation report effect has not yet been reached. This notification standby flag 223p is set to ON when execution of the right-handed expectation degree suggesting effect is determined (see S4805 in FIG. 90), and is set to OFF when the start of the expectation degree notification effect is set. (See S4708 in FIG. 88).

The notification type storage area 223q is a storage area for storing data indicating the type of expectation level notification effect (light emission color of the right variable winning device 65) executed in the right-handed expectation level suggesting effect. When the type of expectation level notification effect is determined by referring to the effect mode selection table 222b at the start of fluctuation, data corresponding to the determined type is stored in the notification type storage area 223q (see FIG. 90). (see S4804). Note that the notification type storage area 223q is composed of, for example, a 1-byte storage area, and if "01H" is stored, it indicates an expectation level notification effect in which the emission color "white" is set, and "02H" is stored. If it is stored, it indicates the expectation level notification effect in which the light emission color "blue" is set, and if "03H" is stored, it indicates the expectation level notification effect in which the light emission color "green" is set, and "04H" is stored. If it is set, it shows an expectation notification effect in which the emission color "red" is set. On the other hand, when "00H" is stored, it indicates that the right-handed expectation suggestion effect is not set.

<Control Processing of Audio Ramp Control Device in Sixth Embodiment>
Next, various control processes executed by the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 according to the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 87 to 90. FIG. First, the rendering update process 6 (S4121) in the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. This effect update process 6 (S4121) is a process that is executed in the main process (see FIG. 34) in place of the effect update process (see FIG. 35). is the processing of

In this effect update process 6 (see FIG. 87), first, the output of the passage detection sensor 228g1 arranged on the upper surface of the right variable prize winning device 65 on the upstream side (the entrance side of the flow path on the upper surface of the opening/closing door 65f1) is set to H. (High) is determined (S4211), and if it is determined that the output is H (S4211: Yes), 1 is added to the value of the passing number counter 223k and updated (S4212). Next, it is determined whether or not the informing effect flag 223m is on (S4213), and if it is determined that the informing effect flag 223m is on (S4213: Yes), the state of the physical strength gauge LG is updated. After executing the processing (S4214 to S4218) for the setting, the processing shifts to S4219. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4211 that the output of the passage detection sensor 228g1 is L (S4211: No), and if it is determined in the process of S4213 that the informing effect flag 223m is off (S4213: No) , there is no possibility of changing the display mode of the physical fitness gauge LG, so the processes of S4214 to S4218 for updating the physical fitness gauge LG are skipped, and the process proceeds to S4219.

Here, processing for updating the state of the physical fitness gauge LG will be described in detail. In the processing for updating the physical strength gauge LG, first, it is determined whether or not the current special symbol lottery was a big win (S4214). S4214: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the value of the physical fitness gauge counter 223n is 1 or more (S4215). That is, it is determined whether or not the gauge number of the physical strength gauge LG has reached the lower limit (0) for winning, and if the value of the physical strength gauge counter 223n is 1 or more (the gauge number has not reached the lower limit). If so (S4215: Yes), the value of the physical fitness gauge counter 223n is updated by subtracting 1 (S4217), and the display mode of the physical fitness gauge LG is changed to the gauge number corresponding to the updated value of the physical fitness gauge counter 223n. mode (S4218), and the process proceeds to S4219. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4215 that the value of the physical fitness gauge counter 223n is 0 (the number of gauges has reached the lower limit) (S4215: No), there is no need to update the display mode of the physical fitness gauge LG. , S4217 and S4218 are skipped, and the process proceeds to S4219.

On the other hand, in the processing of S4214, when it is determined that the lottery result of this special symbol is a loss (not a big hit) (S4214: No), then the value of the physical strength gauge counter 223n is 2 or more. It is determined whether or not (S4216). That is, it is determined whether or not the gauge number of the physical strength gauge LG has reached the lower limit value (1) in the case of loss (S4216), and the value of the physical strength gauge counter 223n is 2 or more (the gauge number has reached the lower limit value). not) (S4216: Yes), the processing of S4217 and S4218 for updating the value of the physical fitness gauge counter 223n and the display mode of the physical fitness gauge LG is executed, and the process proceeds to S4219. . On the other hand, in the process of S4216, if it is determined that the value of the physical fitness gauge counter 223n is 1 (this is the lower limit of the gauge number in the case of loss) (S4216: No), the display mode of the physical fitness gauge LG is updated. Since there is no need, the processes of S4217 and S4218 are skipped and the process proceeds to S4219.

In the processing of S4219, it is determined whether the output of the passage detection sensor 228g2 provided on the downstream side of the upper surface of the right variable winning device 65 (the exit side of the flow path on the upper surface of the opening/closing door 65f1) is H (high). (S4219), if it is determined that the output is H (the game ball has passed) (S4219: Yes), the value of the passing number counter 223k is updated by subtracting 1 (S4220), and the process proceeds to S4221. Transition. On the other hand, in the processing of S4219, if it is determined that the output of the passage detection sensor 228g2 is L (the passage of the game ball is not detected) (S4219: No), the processing of S4220 is skipped and the processing is returned to S4221. to move to.

In the processing of S4221, it is determined whether or not it is time to start the expectation degree notification effect, and when the start timing has come, notification start determination processing for executing the expectation degree notification effect is executed (S4221), and this processing is performed. exit. Details of this notification start determination process (S4221) will be described with reference to FIG.

FIG. 88 is a flow chart showing the notification start determination process (S4221) described above. In this notification start determination process (S4221), first, it is determined whether or not the notification standby flag 223p is ON (S4701). It is not in the middle, or the right-handed expectation degree suggestion effect is being executed, but it means that the expectation degree notification effect has already started, and there is no possibility of starting the execution of the expectation degree notification effect, so it is left as it is. End this process.

On the other hand, in the processing of S4701, if it is determined that the notification standby flag 223p is ON (S4701: Yes), then it is determined whether it is time to start the expectation level notification effect (S4702), and the expectation level notification effect If it is determined that it is not the start timing (S4702: No), this processing ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4702 that the timing for starting the expectation level notification effect has come (S4702: Yes), the value of the passing number counter 223k is read (S4703), and the read counter value is 4 or more. (S4704).

In the process of S4704, when it is determined that the value of the passing number counter 223k is 4 or more, the value of the physical strength gauge counter 223n is set to 1 (S4705), and the process proceeds to S4707. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4704 that the value of the passing number counter 223k is less than 4, the value obtained by subtracting the value of the passing number counter 223k from 5, which is the maximum gauge number, is changed to the value of the physical strength gauge counter 223n. (S4706), and the process proceeds to S4707. As described above, in the sixth embodiment, the initial value of the gauge number of the physical strength gauge LG at the start of the expectation level notification effect is set to the value of the passing number counter 223k (the number of game balls passing over the upper surface of the opening/closing door 65f1). ), it is configured to be different according to. As a result, for a player who wants to know whether or not a big win will occur as soon as possible, more game balls are placed on the upper surface of the opening/closing door 65f1 by striking to the right before the expectation level notification effect is started. It can make you think you can reach it.

In the process of S4707, the start of the expectation level notification effect is set in accordance with the data stored in the notification type storage area 223q and the value of the physical fitness gauge counter 223n set in the process of S4705 or S4706. (S4707). Specifically, the right variable winning device 65 is caused to emit light in a color corresponding to the data stored in the notification type storage area 223q, and the number of gauges corresponding to the counter value of the physical fitness gauge counter 223n is added to the physical fitness gauge LG. Set as display mode. Next, the notification standby flag 223p is set to OFF, and the notification effecting flag 223m is set to ON (S4708), and this processing ends.

By executing this notification start determination process (see FIG. 88), the expectation level notification effect in the mode selected from the effect mode selection table 222b can be accurately executed.

Next, the variable display setting process 6 (S4122) in the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. This variable display setting process 6 (S4122) is a process executed in place of the variable display setting process (see FIG. 38). Of the variable display setting process 6 (S4122) in the sixth embodiment, the processes of S4501 to S4509 are the same as the processes of S4501 to S4509 in the variable display setting process (see FIG. 38). .

In addition, in the variable display setting process 6 (see FIG. 89) in the sixth embodiment, when the process of S4503 ends, the effect mode of the mode corresponding to the variation pattern (variation type) extracted in the process of S4503 is selected. An effect mode selection process for determining from the table 222b is executed (S4511), and the process proceeds to S4504. Details of the rendering mode selection process (S4511) will be described with reference to FIG.

FIG. 90 is a flow chart showing the effect mode selection process (S4511). In this effect mode selection process (S4511), first, the effect mode selection table 222b and the value of the effect lottery counter 223j are read (S4801), and from the read effect mode selection table 222b, the main controller 110 and the effect form corresponding to the value of the effect lottery counter 223j is specified (S4802).

Next, it is determined whether the specified production mode is a production mode corresponding to the right-handed expectation degree suggesting production (S4803). : No), this processing is terminated as it is. On the other hand, in the process of S4803, if the mode with the right-handed expectation suggesting effect is identified, the data corresponding to the current effect mode (light emission color of the right variable winning device 65) is stored in the notification type storage area 223q. (S4804), the notification standby flag 223p is set to ON (S4805), and this process is terminated.

By executing this effect mode selection process (see FIG. 89), the effect mode of the expectation level notification effect can be selected from the effect mode selection table 222b at a rate corresponding to the variation type. is executed, it is possible for the player to determine whether or not to start right-handed hitting by estimating whether right-handed hitting is advantageous from the light emission color of the right variable winning device 65.例文帳に追加

As described above, the pachinko machine 10 according to the sixth embodiment is configured to set 0.5 second as the jackpot opening period regardless of the jackpot type. That is, unless the game balls are shot toward the right variable winning device 65 before the start of the big win, at the start of the first round of the big win, the number of game balls exceeding the prescribed number (two) is exceeded. It is configured such that the flow path on the upper surface of the opening/closing door 65f1 cannot be put into a state of being passed. Then, in a part of the variable display effect for informing the big win and in a part of the variable display effect for informing the loss, an expectation level informing effect for informing the degree of expectation that the right specific prize winning port 65a will be opened. is configured to be executable. Thus, it is possible for the player to judge whether or not to start hitting to the right during the execution of the variable display performance (before the notification of the lottery result of the special symbol) from the content of the expectation report performance. If a right-handed shot is started during execution of the variable display and the right specific winning opening 65a is opened as intended by the player, an over-winning can be generated and the player can be satisfied. In addition, if the player did not hit the right during execution of the variable display and the right specific winning opening 65a remained closed as intended by the player (lost in the special symbol lottery), the right hand would be wasted. It can give you a sense of relief that you were able to avoid hitting and consuming your ball. On the other hand, if the result is contrary to the player's aim (the right specific winning opening 65a is not opened even though the player hits to the right, or the right specific winning opening 65a is opened even if the player does not hit to the right). In the case of ), in the next expectation degree notification effect, it is possible to make the player have a sense of purpose to predict whether or not it is better to hit to the right. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In addition, in the sixth embodiment, the opening period is common regardless of the jackpot type, and the player is informed whether or not it is better to hit to the right during the execution of the variable display under the control of the sound lamp control device 113 side. By making the determination, the degree of advantage in the first round (the number of game balls entering the right specific winning hole 65a) is made different for each big win. Therefore, unlike the fifth embodiment described above, there is no need to provide the period length selection table 202e (see FIG. 76(c)) that defines the correspondence between the jackpot type and the closing period in the main controller 110. , the capacity of the ROM 202 can be reduced. In addition, since the control process for selecting the opening period is simply the process of setting a common period, the processing load on the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 can be reduced. Since the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110 needs to perform major controls related to the game, such as the big win lottery and the variable display of the first symbol, various major controls can be performed more easily by reducing the processing load. can be executed with certainty.

In addition, in the sixth embodiment, as the expectation level notification effect, the luminous color of the right variable winning device 65 is configured to indicate the expectation level as to whether or not it is advantageous to hit to the right. It is not something that can be done. Instead of or in addition to this, for example, a configuration may be adopted in which the level of expectation is indicated by varying the color or mode of the monster displayed on the third pattern display device 81, or the level of expectation may be determined according to the content of the adventurer's attack. may be configured to notify. Further, instead of or in addition to the emission color of the right variable winning device 65 and the display mode of the third pattern display device 81, the expectation level may be notified by changing music or sound effects.

In the sixth embodiment, the opening period for all jackpot types is unified to 0.5 seconds, but it is not limited to this. For example, as in the fifth embodiment described above, the opening period is configured to be different according to the jackpot type, and some of the cases where the opening period is a short jackpot (and when the special symbol lottery is lost) Then, it is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the expectation level notification effect is executed during execution of the variable display. As a result, in the case of a jackpot type with a long opening period, the player can be made to hit to the right without worrying after the jackpot has been announced. In addition, when the expectation degree notification effect is executed, the player is judged whether or not it is better to start hitting to the right during the execution of the variable display based on the content of the notification (light emission color of the right variable winning device 65). It is possible to provide a playability that makes you want to play.

In the sixth embodiment, the right variable winning device 65 is decorated with a scratch-like decoration in the expectation level notification effect, and then the third symbol display device 81 displays a display prompting the player to aim for the scratch. Although the player is indirectly suggested to hit the right hand, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, in the expectation degree notification effect, it may be configured to clearly notify the player of hitting to the right. With this configuration, it is possible to make the player easily understand that there is a possibility that hitting to the right will be advantageous (over winning will occur).

In the sixth embodiment, the player hits right while the variable display is being performed by executing an expectation degree notification effect for notifying the player of the degree of expectation as to whether or not the player will be advantageous if he hits right. Although it was configured to determine whether it is better or not, the expectation level notification effect is not necessarily the right variable winning device 65 (right specific winning port 65a in the present embodiment). It is not necessary to combine with a variable prize winning device with a structure that can hold the ball). For example, the expectation informing effect is applied to the pachinko machine 10 provided with only the variable winning device capable of winning only the game balls hit after being released, such as the left variable winning device 650. good too. In other words, the expectation degree notification effect may be executed as an effect of simply notifying the expectation degree of whether or not a big win will occur after the end of the variation.

In the sixth embodiment, even when the special symbol lottery is lost, the expectation level notification effect is configured to be executable, but only when the special symbol lottery results in a big win, the expectation level notification effect may be configured to execute In this case, the timing for starting the expectation level notification effect may be varied. That is, in the sixth embodiment, the expectation degree notification effect is generated 4 seconds before the end of the variable time. A configuration in which an expectation degree notification effect is generated may be employed. Furthermore, in this case, for example, it may be configured such that, as the number of consecutive fluctuation displays corresponding to the failure increases, the probability of occurrence of the expectation level notification effect 4 seconds or 2 seconds before is increased. In other words, the greater the number of consecutive failures, the larger the hit, and the right-handed hit may be executed for a longer period during the execution of the variable display when the right-handed hit expectation indication effect is selected. . With this configuration, as the number of executions of the variable display after the previous big win increases, the number of prize balls in the first round in the case of winning the big win tends to increase. In addition, the player can be encouraged to continue the game until a big win is achieved. Therefore, the operating rate of the pachinko machine 10 can be improved. Further, for example, a device capable of measuring time such as RTC (Real-Time-Clock) may be provided, and the timing at which the expectation level notification effect is likely to occur may be changed according to the time zone. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make the player think that he or she wants to play the game in a time zone where the expectation level notification effect is likely to occur 4 seconds or 2 seconds before the end of the fluctuation.

<Seventh embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 91 to 99. FIG. In the above-described second embodiment, operation winning openings (right activation winning opening 661, left activation winning opening 662) are provided on the upper right side and the lower left side of the game board 13 to trigger the start of the jackpot. In addition, it has a configuration in which the operation winning opening that triggers the start of the jackpot is made different. In addition, in the left operation winning hole 662, in the case of waiting for a big hit, a game ball enters almost automatically in a relatively short time (about 0.5 seconds). In other words, when the left-actuated winning opening 662 becomes a left trigger jackpot that triggers the start of jackpot, the first round of jackpot is started before the game ball reaches the upper surface of the opening/closing door 65f1. On the other hand, when the right-operating winning opening 661 becomes a right trigger jackpot that triggers the start of the jackpot, a plurality of game balls are allowed to reach the channel on the upper surface of the open/close door 65f1 during the jackpot standby state, and then the right By entering a game ball into the operation winning hole 661, the player can aim for over winning.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the seventh embodiment, even if the left trigger jackpot is won, the game ball goes to the left operation winning hole 662 unless the player hits left after the jackpot standby state. It is configured so that there is no possibility of entering the ball. Then, in the jackpot standby state, as the effect executed in the third symbol display device 81, the structure is such that the effect as if in a normal game state is performed. That is, even during the jackpot standby state, the variation display effect of the third symbol is executed in a pseudo manner, and the player is made to feel as if the player is not in the jackpot standby state (as if it is in the normal game state). It is configured so that it is possible to misidentify and continue left-handed hitting. In other words, when the left trigger jackpot hits, the player is made to continue the left hit by executing an effect that makes it difficult for the player to recognize that the jackpot waiting state has been reached, and the upper surface of the open/close door 65f1. The configuration is such that the game ball enters the left actuation winning hole 662 before the player realizes that the game ball should reach the game ball. As a result, in the event of a left trigger jackpot, the jackpot can be started after the number of game balls exceeding the specified number (two, which is the upper limit number in the first round) reaches the upper surface of the opening/closing door 65f1. On the other hand, when the right trigger jackpot hits, the game ball is entered into the right operation winning port 661 at the timing when many game balls have reached the upper surface of the opening and closing door 65f1. Over winning can be generated. Therefore, as in the second embodiment described above, the degree of advantage in the first round (the number of prize balls that can be obtained) can be different between the left trigger jackpot and the right trigger jackpot, so the game can be focused on the jackpot type. can be done.

The pachinko machine 10 according to the seventh embodiment differs in configuration from the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment in that the board surface configuration of the game board 13 is partially changed, and the voice lamp control device 113 is changed. The only difference is that the configuration of the RAM 223 is partially changed, and the control processing executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 is partially changed. Other configurations, various processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, other processes executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113, and various processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 are described in the second It is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in the embodiment. Elements that are the same as those of the second embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals, and illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

First, referring to FIG. 91, the board configuration of the game board 13 in the seventh embodiment will be described. As shown in FIG. 91, the board configuration of the game board 13 in the seventh embodiment differs from the game board 13 in the second embodiment (see FIG. 54) in that the storage device 675 is eliminated. ing. By removing the storage device 675, even if the left opportunity jackpot is won and the jackpot waiting state is entered, the game ball enters the left operation winning port 662 immediately as in the second embodiment described above. never do. In other words, even in the case of the left trigger jackpot, the jackpot is not started unless the game ball is entered into the operation winning opening 662 by hitting to the left in the jackpot waiting state. In addition, in the present seventh embodiment, when the left trigger jackpot hits, the third pattern display device 81 stops displaying the third pattern of the combination of the missing combination, and even after shifting to the jackpot standby state, the normal game state is maintained. It is configured to perform variable display in the same manner as . As a result, it is made difficult for the player to recognize that the player is in a state of waiting for a big win, and even after the state of waiting for a big win, the game ball enters the left-actuated winning hole 662 by continuing left-handed hitting. It is configured as follows. Therefore, as in the second embodiment, while it is possible to aim for over-winning in the right-moment jackpot, in the case of left-moment jackpot, the game property that the jackpot is started without aiming for over-winning can be provided. In addition, the proportion of the game balls that enter the left actuation prize opening 662 among the game balls shot by left-handed hitting is higher than the proportion of the balls entering the first ball entry opening 64.例文帳に追加. As a result, when the left trigger jackpot jackpot standby state is reached, the game ball can enter (win) the left operation winning port 662 in a shorter period of time. Although omitted from the drawing, since the storage device 675 is deleted, the control processing for opening and closing the storage valve 675a of the storage device 675 is also deleted.

Next, with reference to FIG. 92, in the case of a left trigger jackpot, the change over time of the effect mode from the start of the variable display to the start of the jackpot will be described. FIG. 92 is a diagram exemplifying a case where a variable display effect corresponding to a left trigger jackpot (super reach with a variable time of 60 seconds) is executed in a state where the number of held balls is two at the start of the variable. . As shown in FIG. 92, when the variation display corresponding to the left trigger jackpot is executed, it is pseudo-notified that the game is out at the end of the variation. That is, in the third symbol display device 81, the third symbols are stop-displayed in combination of the missing symbols. At this time, the first symbol display device 37 stops and displays the stop symbol corresponding to the big win. However, the third symbol display device 81 is larger than the first symbol display device 37 and arranged at a position that is easy to see. Therefore, since most of the players do not notice that the first symbol display device 37 is a winning stop symbol, a special symbol is presented to the player who has confirmed the display contents of the third symbol display device 81. It can be made to think that the lottery result has been lost (it has not shifted to the jackpot waiting state).

As shown in FIG. 92, when the variation display corresponding to the left trigger jackpot ends, the jackpot standby state is started, and the third symbol display device 81 starts pseudo variation display. That is, the variation display corresponding to the two held balls that were held during the execution of the variation display corresponding to the left trigger jackpot is performed in a pseudo manner. This pseudo-variation display is set with a variation time of 2 seconds each, and the stop symbol corresponding to the complete failure is stopped and displayed at the end of the variation. In order to execute this pseudo variable display, the display control device 114 prepares a display data table for pseudo variable display. Further, when the pseudo variable display is executed in the jackpot standby state, the number of pending ball number symbols displayed in the small area Ds1 of the third symbol display device 81 is also reduced in a pseudo manner. As a result, the player can be made to think that the number of reserved balls is decreasing every two seconds, so that the game balls are additionally entered into the first ball entrance 64 and a lottery of special symbols is executed. I can make you want to do it. When the pseudo fluctuation display ends and the pseudo ball held is gone, a pseudo fluctuation stop state is set. This pseudo fluctuation stopped state has exactly the same display mode as when the number of held balls becomes 0 in the normal game state. Therefore, the player can be made to think that the lottery for the special symbol will not be executed unless the game ball is entered into the first ball entrance 64, so that the player can be made to hit left more positively. .

It should be noted that, in the present embodiment, as in the second embodiment described above, only the lottery of the first special symbol is configured to win the left trigger jackpot. That is, the situation in which the left-handed chance jackpot is won is limited to the gaming state (low-probability state of special symbols and normal state of normal symbols) in which the game is played aiming at the first ball entrance 64.例文帳に追加As a result, when a pseudo-fluctuation display effect or a pseudo-fluctuation stop state occurs, the direction in which the player shoots the game ball in order to continue the game (lottery for special symbols) is changed to the game board. 13 can be confined to the left. Therefore, in the pseudo-normal state, the game ball can enter the left actuation winning hole 662 more reliably for the player who wants to continue the game.

When the game ball enters the left-actuated winning hole 662 by the player continuously hitting to the left in the jackpot standby state, a special mode effect (blackout effect) is executed. Although the details will be described later, the execution of this blackout effect that does not occur during the normal game state makes the player immediately understand that it is in the jackpot waiting state and that the jackpot will start. be able to. This blackout effect is executed for 0.1 seconds during the opening period, and after the end of the effect, a normal jackpot effect is started.

In addition, in the pseudo fluctuation stop state, if the winning to the left operation winning opening 662 is not detected even after 3 seconds have passed, the pseudo fluctuation stop state is terminated and the standby state production (Fig. 7 reference). The reason why the pseudo fluctuation stop state is ended in 3 seconds is that when the player decides to quit the game at the timing of the fluctuation stop state, before the player leaves the table. , in order to make the player aware that they are actually waiting for a big win. That is, it is intended to prevent the player from leaving the seat while the big win is confirmed and another player starting the game from the big win waiting state. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling dissatisfied with the game due to quitting the game without noticing that the player has won the jackpot.

Next, with reference to FIG. 93, a description will be given of an effect mode during the left trigger big hit in the seventh embodiment. FIG. 93(a) is a diagram showing a blackout effect executed during the opening period of the left-handed jackpot. As described above, in the seventh embodiment, when the left opportunity jackpot is won and the state shifts to the jackpot standby state, the pseudo fluctuation display and the pseudo fluctuation stop state effect are executed, so that the jackpot standby This makes it difficult for the player to recognize that the state has occurred. During the execution of these pseudo effects, a game ball enters the left-actuated winning port 662, and when the jackpot is started, the opening period is extremely short (0.1 seconds), so the third symbol is a winning combination. There is no period for notifying the big hit by the effect such as stopping display at . Therefore, in the seventh embodiment, the blackout effect shown in FIG. 93(a) is provided so that the player can understand at a glance that the special effect has been executed, and the effect time can be shortened. It is configured to run. That is, when the game ball enters the left operation winning port 662 and the opening period of the left trigger jackpot is reached, the entire display screen of the third symbol display device 81 suddenly turns dark (blacks out). It is configured to be executed. By making the appearance significantly different from the pseudo-variation display or the pseudo-variation stop state production that has been executed so far, the player can instantly understand that the special production has been executed. can.

After the blackout effect ends, an effect indicating that a big win has started is executed as shown in FIG. 93(b). That is, in the main display area Dm, the characters "Big Win Confirmed!" are displayed, and three third symbols with the same number are stopped and displayed. Further, in the small area Ds1, a display indicating the number of rounds (characters "1 round") and a display indicating the number of awarded balls (characters "0000 GET") are displayed. In addition, in the small area Ds3, characters of "Right hit!!" and a figure of an arrow pointing to the right are displayed for shooting a game ball toward the right specific winning hole 65a. These display contents allow the player to immediately understand that the big win has already started.

<Electrical configuration in the seventh embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIG. 94, the RAM 223 provided in the audio lamp control device 113 according to the seventh embodiment will be described. FIG. 94 is a block diagram showing the configuration of RAM 223. Referring to FIG. As shown in FIG. 94, the RAM 223 in the seventh embodiment has a pseudo ball count counter 223r and , a pseudo-normal state flag 223s, a pseudo-fluctuation timer 223t, and a pseudo-fluctuation stop state timer 223u are added.

The pseudo-retained ball number counter 223r is a counter that indicates the number of pseudo-variation display pending after winning the left chance jackpot and being in a jackpot standby state. In the jackpot standby state, while the value of the pseudo-retained ball number counter 223r is 1 or more, the pseudo variable display is repeatedly executed (see S4907 in FIG. 96), and the value of the pseudo-retained ball number counter 223r becomes 0. When the pseudo fluctuation display ends in the state, a pseudo fluctuation stop state is set (see S4906 in FIG. 96). The values of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b and the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c are set for this pseudo reserved ball number counter 223r when the transition to the jackpot standby state corresponding to the left trigger jackpot is made ( See S4614 in FIG. 98). That is, the pseudo reserved ball number counter 223r is composed of at least a counter for counting the number of pseudo first special symbol reserved balls and a counter for counting the number of pseudo second special symbol reserved balls. It is In addition, the value of the pseudo-retained ball number counter 223r is decremented by one each time the start of the pseudo-variation display is set (see S4908 in FIG. 96).

The pseudo-normal state flag 223s is set in the jackpot standby state, whether the production (pseudo-normal state production) is executed in the manner of a pseudo-normal gaming state (when the left-moment jackpot is won). It is a flag indicating whether or not it is in a jackpot waiting state. If this pseudo-normal state flag 223s is on, it indicates that the pseudo-normal state effect is being executed, and if it is off, it indicates that the pseudo-normal state effect is not being executed. This pseudo-normal state flag 223s is set to ON when the left chance jackpot is won and the jackpot waiting state is started (see S4617 in FIG. 98). On the other hand, this pseudo-normal state flag 223s is set when the pseudo-normal state effect ends (when the game ball enters the left operation winning port 662 and shifts to the opening period of the jackpot, or when the pseudo-variation stop state If the standby state effect is started continuously for 3 seconds), it is set to OFF (see S4912 in FIG. 96 and S4617 in FIG. 98).

The pseudo fluctuation timer 223t is a timer that measures the fluctuation time of the pseudo fluctuation display. A timer value corresponding to 2 seconds (that is, 2000) is set in the pseudo-fluctuation timer 223t each time the start of the pseudo-fluctuation display is set (see S4907 in FIG. 96). Depending on whether the value of the pseudo-fluctuation timer 223t is 0 or not, it is determined whether or not the pseudo-fluctuation display is being executed.

The pseudo fluctuation stop state timer 223u is a timer that measures the duration of the pseudo fluctuation stop state. A timer value corresponding to 3 seconds (that is, 3000) is set to the pseudo fluctuation stop state timer 223u at the timing when the pseudo fluctuation stop state is set (see S4906 in FIG. 96). When the pseudo fluctuation stop state timer 223u becomes 0, it means that 3 seconds have passed since the pseudo fluctuation stop state was started, so the start of the standby state effect is set. Even if the player intends to quit the game, the jackpot waiting state is set before the player leaves the table by terminating the pseudo fluctuation stop state in 3 seconds. The player can be made to notice that. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling dissatisfaction with the game due to quitting the game without noticing that the player has won the left-moment jackpot.

<Regarding control processing of the sound ramp control device in the seventh embodiment>
Next, various control processes executed by the MPU 221 of the sound ramp control device 113 according to the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 95 to 99. FIG. First, with reference to FIG. 95, main processing 7 of the sound ramp control device 113 in the seventh embodiment will be described. This main process 7 is a process executed in place of the main process (see FIG. 34) in the second embodiment (and first embodiment).

Of the main processing 7 (see FIG. 95) in the seventh embodiment, the processing of S4101 to S4118 is the same as the processing of S4101 to S4118 of the main processing (see FIG. 34) in the second embodiment. executed. Further, in the main process 7 (see FIG. 95) in the seventh embodiment, after the effect update process (S4111) is completed, a pseudo A normal state rendering process is executed (S4131), and the process proceeds to S4112. Details of this pseudo-normal state effect processing (S4131) will be described with reference to FIG.

FIG. 96 is a flow chart showing the above-described pseudo-normal state effect processing (S4131). In the pseudo-normal state rendering process (S4131), first, it is determined whether or not the pseudo-normal state flag 223s is on (S4901). Since it means that the pseudo-normal gaming state is not set (not the jackpot standby state based on the left trigger jackpot), the processing is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4901 that the pseudo-normal state flag 223s is ON (S4901: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the pseudo-variation display effect is being executed (S4902). . More specifically, it is determined whether the value of the pseudo-fluctuation timer 223t is 1 or more. In the process of S4902, if it is determined that the pseudo fluctuation display effect is being executed (the value of the pseudo fluctuation timer 223t is 1 or more) (S4902: Yes), the value of the pseudo fluctuation timer 223t is set to 1 It is updated by subtraction (S4903), and it is determined whether or not the value of the pseudo-fluctuation timer 223t after the subtraction has become 0 (S4904). That is, it is determined whether or not the variation time of the pseudo variation display has ended.

In the processing of S4904, if it is determined that the value of the pseudo-fluctuation timer 223t is not 0 (S4904: No), this processing is terminated as it is in order to continue the pseudo-fluctuation display. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the pseudo-fluctuation timer 223t has become 0 (S4904: Yes), then the value of the pseudo-reserved ball number counter 223r is 0 (pseudo corresponding to the first special symbol Whether the number of reserved balls and the number of pseudo reserved balls corresponding to the second special symbol are both 0 is determined (S4905), and when it is determined that the value of the pseudo reserved ball number counter 223r is 0 ( S4905: Yes), since the pseudo fluctuation display cannot be started, in order to shift to the pseudo fluctuation stop state, the value of the pseudo fluctuation stop state timer 223u is set to 3000 (S4906), and this processing exit. Since the pseudo-normal state rendering process (see FIG. 96) is a process executed every 1 millisecond in the main process 7 (see FIG. 95), 3000 is set as the timer value of the pseudo-fluctuation stop state timer 223u. By setting, the timer value becomes 0 when 3 seconds (3000 milliseconds) have elapsed. As a result, it is possible to accurately count the three seconds after the pseudo fluctuation stopped state.

On the other hand, in the process of S4905, if it is determined that the value of the pseudo-retained ball counter 223r is not 0 (S4905: No), the start of the pseudo-variation display is newly set, and the timer during pseudo-variation The value of 223t is set to 2000 (timer value corresponding to 2 seconds) (S4907). Next, the value of the pseudo-retained ball number counter 223r is decremented by 1, and the display mode is updated according to the pseudo-retained ball number after the subtraction (S4908), and this process ends.

In addition, in the processing of S4902, if it is determined that the pseudo fluctuation display is not being executed (S4902: No), it means that the present is a pseudo fluctuation stop state, so the pseudo fluctuation stop state timer 223u is subtracted by 1 (S4909), and it is determined whether the value of the pseudo fluctuation stop state timer 223u after the subtraction has become 0 (S4910). In the process of S4910, if it is determined that the value of the pseudo fluctuation stop state timer 223u is not 0 (is a value of 1 or more) (S4910: No), in order to continue the pseudo fluctuation stop state, This process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, in the process of S4910, if it is determined that the value of the pseudo-fluctuation stop state timer 223u after subtraction has become 0 (S4910: Yes), by setting the standby state command for display, the standby state production (Fig. 7 reference) is set (S4911). Next, the standby state effect flag 223g is set to ON, the pseudo-normal state flag 223s is set to OFF (S4912), and this process is terminated.

By executing this quasi-normal state effect processing (see FIG. 96), in the jackpot waiting state shifted based on the winning of the left trigger jackpot, the player feels as if the normal game state continues. It is possible to execute a production in a manner reminiscent of As a result, when the left trigger jackpot hits and the state shifts to the jackpot standby state, the player can continue to hit left, so the left trigger is triggered before the game ball reaches the upper surface of the opening/closing door 65f1. The first round of jackpots can be started.

In addition, in the seventh embodiment, the pseudo fluctuation display is configured to be executed by the number of pending balls held at the start of the jackpot standby state (at the end of the fluctuation), and after the jackpot standby state When a ball entering the first ball entrance 64 is detected in , the pseudo ball number corresponding to the entering ball is not increased. This is because, as described above, the game board 13 is configured so that the game ball is more likely to enter the left actuation winning hole 662 than the first ball entering hole 64 when hitting to the left. , When left-handed hits are continuously performed during the jackpot standby state, the possibility that the game balls will enter the first ball entrance 64 continuously without winning the left-operated winning opening 662 is extremely high. because it is low. Therefore, since the process for increasing the number of pseudo-reserved balls can be omitted, the processing load of the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 can be reduced. Further, if it is configured to also perform processing for increasing the number of held balls, when the main controller 110 detects a ball entering the first ball entrance 64 during the jackpot standby state, the number of held balls has reached the upper limit, the sound lamp controller 113 must be notified that the ball has entered. When the number of pending balls reaches the upper limit, the state shifts to the jackpot standby state, and after one or more pseudo variation display effects are executed, when the ball entering the first ball entrance 64 is detected, a pseudo This is because it is necessary to increase the number of balls on hold. Therefore, the number of commands to be output from main controller 110 increases, and the processing load on main controller 110 also increases. On the other hand, in the seventh embodiment, since it is configured not to increase the number of pseudo balls held, there is no need to newly increase commands in the main controller 110, and the processing load of the main controller 110 can be reduced. be able to. Furthermore, if the player luckily enters the first ball entrance 64 first and recognizes that the number of reserved ball symbols does not increase, the player is informed that he is actually in a state of waiting for a big win. can be understood. Therefore, the player who is lucky enough to perceive the waiting state for a big hit is made to play a game by making the game ball reach the upper surface of the opening/closing door 65f1 and then enter the left operation winning hole 662.例文帳に追加can be done. As a result, the player can be made to hit left more positively in order to determine whether the player is in the normal game state or in the jackpot waiting state.

Next, with reference to FIG. 97, the winning-related process 7 (S4341) in the seventh embodiment will be described. This hit-related process 7 (S4341) is a process that is executed instead of the hit-related process 2 (see FIG. 61) in the second embodiment. This is a process for performing control according to the command when a command to do so is received.

Of the hit-related process 7 (see FIG. 97) in the seventh embodiment, S4401, S4404, and S4407 to S4410 of the hit-related process 2 in the second embodiment (see FIG. 61) S4401, S4404 , and S4407 to S4410 are executed. Further, in the hit-related processing 7 (see FIG. 97) in the seventh embodiment, when it is determined that the standby state command is received from the main controller 110 in the processing of S4401 (S4401: Yes), the standby state command processing (See FIG. 62), the standby state command process 7 is executed (S4441), and this process ends. Details will be described later with reference to FIG. 98, but this standby state command process 7 (S4441) is a process for setting an effect mode according to the jackpot type as a jackpot standby state.

Also, in the winning-related process 7 (see FIG. 97) in the seventh embodiment, when it is determined in the process of S4404 that an opening command has been received from the main controller 110 (S4404: Yes), the jackpot has started. An opening command process for executing an opening effect in a mode corresponding to the situation is executed (S4442), and this process ends. The details of this opening command processing (S4442) will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, with reference to FIG. 98, details of the standby state command process 7 (S4441) described above will be described. FIG. 98 is a flowchart showing standby state command processing 7 (S4441). In the processing of S4601 to S4603 of the standby state command processing 7 (S4441), the same processing as the processing of S4601 to S4603 of the standby state command processing (see FIG. 62) in the second embodiment is executed. .

In addition, in the standby state command processing 7 (see FIG. 98) in the seventh embodiment, in the processing of S4601, when it is determined that the current jackpot is not the right trigger jackpot (it is a left trigger jackpot) (S4601: No ), read the values of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b and the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c (S4611), and determine whether or not the read counter values are both 0 (S4612). .

In the process of S4612, when it is determined that the values of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b and the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c are both 0 (S4612: Yes), the special symbol reserved ball number 0, and if the pseudo-variation display is started, the player will feel uncomfortable, so a pseudo-variation stop state is set. That is, the value of the pseudo fluctuation stop state timer 223u is set to 3000 (timer value corresponding to 3 seconds) (S4613), and the process proceeds to S4617.

On the other hand, in the process of S4612, if it is determined that at least one of the values of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b and the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c is not 0 (S4612: No), read The values of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b and the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c are stored as the value of the pseudo reserved ball number counter 223r (S4614), and the start of pseudo fluctuation display is set. , 2000 (timer value corresponding to 2 seconds) is set to the value of the pseudo-fluctuation timer 223t (S4615). Then, the value of the pseudo-reserved ball number counter 223r is updated by subtracting 1, and the pseudo-reserved ball number pattern is decreased by one and displayed (S4616), and the process proceeds to S4617. In the processing of S4617, the pseudo-normal state flag 223s is set to ON (S4617), and this processing ends.

By executing this standby state command process 7 (see FIG. 98), in the jackpot standby state of the left trigger jackpot, it is possible to pseudo-execute an effect as if the normal game state is continuing. , When the right trigger jackpot hits, the standby state production can be executed. As a result, when a left-handed big win occurs, the player can continue hitting left-handed without noticing that the player is waiting for a big win, so that the game ball reaches the upper surface of the opening/closing door 65f1. Soon, it will be possible to enter the left-actuated winning port 662 and start the big win. On the other hand, when the right timing jackpot hits, the player can easily understand that the jackpot waiting state has occurred. (the number of game balls that can be entered into the right specific winning hole 65a) is variable. Therefore, it is possible to give the player the pleasure of shooting the game ball with good timing.

Next, with reference to FIG. 99, details of the opening command processing (S4442) described above will be described. In the opening command process (S4442), first, it is determined whether the pseudo-normal state flag 223s is ON (S5001). In the processing of S5001, when it is determined that the pseudo-normal state flag 223s is ON (S5001: Yes), the left-actuated winning opening is displayed while the pseudo-variation display effect or the pseudo-variation stop state is displayed. Since it means that the opening period of the jackpot has started by entering the ball into 662, an opening command for display corresponding to the blackout effect (see FIG. 93(a)) is set (S5002).

Next, the value of the pseudo-retained ball number counter 223r, the value of the pseudo-fluctuation timer 223t, and the value of the pseudo-fluctuation stop state timer 223u are all reset to 0 (S5003), and the pseudo-normal state flag 223s is set to off. (S5004), and the process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S5001, if it is determined that the pseudo-normal state flag 223s is off (S5001: No), the display opening command corresponding to the normal opening effect is set (S5005), and the standby state effect flag 223g is set. is set to off (S5006), and the process ends.

By executing this opening command process (see FIG. 99), in the jackpot waiting state that has been shifted to the left timing jackpot winning, when the game ball enters the left operation winning port 662 and the opening period is started. , a blackout effect in which the entire display screen of the third symbol display device 81 suddenly turns black (blacks out) can be executed. That is, it is possible to set a mode that is significantly different from the pseudo-variation display or the pseudo-variation stop state rendering that has been performed up to that point. As a result, the player can instantly understand that the special effect has been executed.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the seventh embodiment, the game balls fired aiming at the first ball entrance 64 are placed at positions where some of the game balls can be entered. It was set as the structure which arrange|positions the operation|movement prize-winning mouth 662. FIG. Then, when the left trigger jackpot hits, as the performance of the third pattern display device 81 during the variable display of the special symbols, the performance of stop-displaying the third symbols of the winning combination is executed. Furthermore, in the jackpot waiting state that shifts after the end of the variation, the production is executed in a manner as if the normal game state continues. That is, even during the jackpot waiting state, a pseudo-normal state performance such as a pseudo-fluctuation display performance is executed, and the player is made to misunderstand as if he/she is in a normal game state to continue hitting left. is configured to be possible. As a result, when the left trigger jackpot is won and the jackpot waiting state is entered, the player can continue to hit left (it is possible to prevent the player from hitting right), so the open/close door 65f1. The game ball can be entered into the left-actuated winning hole 662 before the player is conscious of making the game ball reach the upper surface of the . Therefore, in the case of a left trigger jackpot, it is difficult to start the jackpot after the number of game balls exceeding the specified number (two which is the upper limit number in the first round) reaches the upper surface of the open/close door 65f1. On the other hand, in the case of a right trigger jackpot, by entering the game ball into the right operation winning opening 661 at the timing when many game balls have reached the upper surface of the opening and closing door 65f1, it is easy to over. Winning can be generated. Therefore, since the degree of advantage in the first round (the number of winning balls to be obtained) can be made different between the left trigger jackpot and the right trigger jackpot, the game can be played while paying attention to the jackpot type.

In addition, in the seventh embodiment, the configuration is such that the pseudo-normal state effect is executed without fail when the state of waiting for the left-handed jackpot jackpot is reached, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when the left trigger jackpot hits, it may be determined by lottery whether to execute the pseudo-normal state effect or to execute the standby state effect.

In the seventh embodiment, the pseudo fluctuation display is executed for the number of pending balls at the start of the jackpot standby state (at the end of the fluctuation), and after the jackpot standby state. When a ball entering the 1-ball opening 64 is detected, the number of pseudo balls on hold corresponding to that ball is not increased, but this is not the only option. For example, each time a start winning prize is detected, the number of pending ball symbols may be increased in a pseudo manner. This makes it more difficult for the player to recognize whether or not the pseudo-normal state presentation is being executed.

In the seventh embodiment, the execution start timing of the degree-of-expectation notification effect is fixed for each variation type. That is, in the case of hit or miss special reach, the execution of the expectation degree notification effect is started at the timing when 86 seconds have passed since the start of variation, and in the case of hit or miss super reach, the timing when 56 seconds have passed since the start of variation. Although it was configured to start execution of the expectation level notification effect in , it is not limited to this. For example, even if the variation type is the same, the execution start timing of the expectation level notification effect may be changed by lottery or the like.

In the seventh embodiment, as a pseudo-variable display, a special effect for two seconds, which is different from usual, is executed. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a configuration may be adopted in which a variable display effect of the same variable time and display mode as the normal variable display is executed in a pseudo manner. More specifically, for example, it may be configured to repeat the variable display that was performed immediately before the jackpot standby state. By configuring in this way, the data of the variable display used immediately before can be used as it is, so that the processing load when executing the pseudo variable display can be reduced.

In the seventh embodiment, when the left trigger jackpot hits and the state shifts to the jackpot standby state, the pseudo variable display is performed the number of times according to the number of balls held at that time, and then the pseudo stop display state is performed. Although it is configured to be transferred, it is not limited to this. For example, when shifting to the jackpot waiting state, it may be configured to immediately shift to the stop display state regardless of the number of pending balls. In this case, the number of pending ball symbols may be set to 0 when shifting to the jackpot standby state or during the variable display. By constructing in this way, the player can have an impression as if the number of reserved balls has become zero when shifting to the big win standby state, so that the lottery for the special pattern can be started from the start of the big win standby state. A player may be forced to hit left in an attempt to force a .

In the seventh embodiment, when the pseudo variable display is performed, the variable display is performed using the same large three-pattern image as in the normal variable display, but the present invention is not limited to this. . For example, a pattern different in mode from the normal third pattern may be prepared as a pattern dedicated to the pseudo-variation display.

<First control example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 100 to 117, a first control example that can be applied to the pachinko machine 10 in each of the above embodiments will be described. In this first control example, as part of the entertainment effect, the player selects a song (voice effect) to be output (played) during a predetermined period (for example, a period in which the variable probability state is set) during the normal game. configured as possible. More specifically, during a predetermined period (period in which the variable probability state is set), when an operation on the operation button 230 provided on the front frame 14 is detected, the third symbol display device 81 selects music (selection ) is configured to display a list of available songs (music selection menu screen). Then, while the music selection menu screen is displayed, the player selects an arbitrary music piece (voice effect), and performs a decision operation (pressing operation on the center button CB of the operation buttons 230) to select the selected music piece ( The output (playback) of the audio effect) is started. In addition, in the first control example, at the timing when the predetermined period starts (transition to the variable probability state), first, one song (effect mode) is randomly selected and played. The reproduction of the randomly selected music continues until the reproduction of the music selected by the player is started or the variable probability state (predetermined period) ends. As a result, the music can be reproduced even during the period from the transition to the variable probability state until the music is selected by the player (while the music is not selected), which is advantageous for the player. It is possible to further increase the player's satisfaction with being in the variable probability state.

In addition, in the first control example, as the initial layout of the music selection menu screen, regardless of the type of music (production mode) randomly selected at the start of the variable probability state, the player selected in the game until then. It is configured such that the more frequently (frequently) music is arranged, the easier it is to select. Here, the “easy-to-select menu position” means a menu position where the operation buttons 230 are operated a small number of times (selection is possible within three operations) until a song is selected. do.

First, referring to FIG. 100, the appearance of the pachinko machine 10 in the first control example will be described. FIG. 100 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10 in the first control example. As shown in FIG. 100, in the pachinko machine 10 in the first control example, an operation button 230 is arranged on the left side of the ball rental operation section 40 when viewed from the front. The operation buttons 230 include an upper button UB arranged on the upper side when viewed from the front, a lower button DB arranged on the lower side when viewed from the front, a right button RB arranged on the right side when viewed from the front, and a left button LB arranged on the left side when viewed from the front. , and a central button CB arranged in the central portion of the operation button 230 . Details will be described later with reference to FIGS. 101 and 102, but this operation button 230 is set in advance in the pachinko machine 10 and displayed on the music selection menu screen during the period in which the variable probability state is set as described above. This is provided to allow the player to select an arbitrary piece of music from among a plurality of pieces of music (26 pieces of music A to Z).

Next, with reference to FIGS. 101 and 102, the display mode during the variable probability state in the first control example will be described. FIG. 101(a) is a diagram showing an example of display contents of the third symbol display device 81 during the variable probability state. As shown in FIG. 101(a), in the variable probability state, the music area for displaying the information of the music being played is displayed on the left side of the main display area Dm when viewed from the front (left side of the variably displayed third pattern). MR is formed. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 101(a), the characters "song A" indicating the song currently being reproduced (output) (song A in the example of FIG. 101(a)) and "button operation You can select a song with !" is displayed in the song area MR. These display contents allow the player to easily understand what music is currently being reproduced. Also, the player can easily understand that any music can be selected by operating the operation button 230 .

FIG. 101(b) shows a state in which the image shown in FIG. 101(a) is displayed, and the operation button 230 is operated by the player (pressing any one of the buttons UB, DB, RB, LB, and CB). FIG. 10 is a diagram showing display contents that are switched when FIG. 101(b) exemplifies a case where the display content (display mode) is switched based on (in conjunction with) the player's pressing of the down button DB. As shown in FIG. 101(b), when the operation button 230 is operated (depressed), a plurality of horizontally elongated substantially rectangular display areas with titles of music (music names) are displayed inside the music area MR. Is displayed. In addition, below the plurality of display areas, the characters "select with up/down buttons" and the characters "determine with center button" are displayed. With these display contents (music selection menu screen), the player can easily understand that any music can be selected and reproduced by operating the operation button 230 . Hereinafter, for simplification of explanation, the state in which this music selection menu screen is displayed (the state in which any music can be selected according to the operation of the operation button 230) will be referred to as "music selection mode". A more detailed description will be given with reference to FIG.

FIG. 102(a) is a diagram showing the layout of each item (image indicating the type of music (music name)) on the music selection menu screen that is displayed first when the music selection mode is entered. As shown in FIG. 102(a), the music selection menu screen has at least five display areas (images showing the types of music) arranged with different items (images indicating the types of music) (the number of display areas is less than the total number of music, 26). area) is displayed. When the central button CB is pressed while the music selection menu screen is displayed, reproduction of the item (music) arranged in the central display area among the five display areas is determined.

Of the five display areas displayed on the music selection menu screen, in the upper two display areas, the type of music that the player has selected many times in the variable probability state so far (music with a high frequency of selection by the player). Corresponding items PA1 and PA2 (images representing music Y and music Z) are arranged. It should be noted that the item PA1 (the image showing the song Z) arranged at a position relatively close to the central display area is the item P2 (the image showing the song Y) relatively far from the central display area. image), the player's selection frequency is higher.

In the item RA1 (image showing music A) displayed in the center of the music selection menu screen, an item showing a randomly selected music (music played first after shifting to the variable probability state) is arranged. On the lower side of the center, two items are displayed side by side in a predetermined order (alphabetical order in this first control example) with reference to the first selected song. That is, with item RA1 (music A) displayed in the center as a reference, items RA2 and RA3 of "music B" and "music C" in alphabetical order are displayed side by side under item RA1. In the following description, for simplification of description, two items PA1 and PA2 (which are frequently selected by the player so far) are displayed above the center item RA1 in the initial arrangement on the music selection menu screen. items) is called a “history area”. A display area in which three items are displayed below the history area (a display area in which randomly selected items are arranged) is called a “random selection area”. A display area in which items to be reproduced when the player presses the center button CB is arranged is called a "music selection area".

As shown in FIG. 102(a), the item PA1 arranged in the music selection area (the center of the music selection menu screen) is displayed in a lit state, and the other items PA1, PA2, RA2, and RA3 are displayed in an unlit state. Is displayed. As a result, when the center button CB is pressed, the item displayed in a manner different from other items (image indicating the type of music) (appearance of lighting) is determined as the music to be played this time. This can be made easier for the player to understand. An upper image UG in the shape of a substantially upward triangle is displayed above the music selection area and to the right of the item PA1, and an approximately downward triangle is displayed below the music selection area and to the right of the item RA2. A lower image DG of the shape is displayed. Based on these display contents, when the up button UB is pressed, the display contents (music) displayed in the music selection area are moved one level higher than the current display contents (in the example of FIG. 102(a), image showing song Z), and when the down button DB is pressed, the display content (song) displayed in the song selection area is displayed one step below the current state in conjunction with the depression. It is possible for the player to intuitively understand that it is possible to shift to the contents (in the example of FIG. 102(a), the image showing the song B).

FIG. 102(b) shows an example of a display mode when the player presses (operates) the upper button UB of the operation buttons 230 while the music selection menu screen shown in FIG. 101(a) is displayed. It is a diagram. As shown in FIG. 102(b), when the player presses the up button UB, all the displayed contents appear to move downward by one display area in tandem with the depression. variable. As a result, the item PA1 (song Z), which was placed one level above the music selection area in FIG. be done. The item PA1 moved to the music selection area is set to appear lit, and the other items are set to appear unlit. Also, an item PA3 indicating "song X" is displayed one level above the item PA2. This item PA3 displays the item (“music X” in the example of FIG. 102B) that has the second largest number of times the player has selected so far after the item PA2 (music Y). Further, as each item is shifted downward by one display area, the upper image corresponding to the upper button UB appears to be illuminated. As a result, in conjunction with pressing the up button UB, the layout of the items on the music selection menu screen was changed (the item PA1, which was placed one level above the music selection area, could be moved to the music selection area). ) can be easily understood by the player.

Also, when the up button UB is pressed multiple times, the items are shifted downward according to the number of times the button is pressed. For example, in the layout of the music selection menu screen shown in FIG. An item PA3 (an image representing music X) is arranged in the music selection area. The menu items are arranged in a loop, and by continuing to press the upper button, it is possible to shift all the songs in order to the song selection area. When the up button UB is pressed while the item corresponding to the last song is arranged in the song selection area, the item indicating the first song (song A in the example of FIG. 102(a)) is displayed. is configured to return to the song selection area.

Although illustration is omitted, when the player operates (presses) the down button DB, an operation opposite to that performed when the up button UB is pressed is performed. In other words, by shifting each item display area one by one upward, the item displayed in the display area immediately below the music selection area at the time of the operation is moved to the music selection area. variable. For example, when the down button DB is pressed in the arrangement shown in FIG. 102(a), the item RA2 is moved to the music selection area in conjunction with the pressing, and the display mode is changed. Also, the appearance is set such that the lower image DG corresponding to the lower button DB is illuminated. As a result, even when the player presses the down button DB, the player can easily understand that the item has been shifted in conjunction with the pressing.

In this first control example, three items (items PA1 to PA3) are arranged in the order of the number of times the player has selected them so far on the upper side of the music selection area in the initial layout of the music selection menu screen. there is That is, items (songs) that are frequently selected by the player are arranged at positions where the up button UB can be pressed three times or less (shifted to the music selection area). This is because it is considered that the higher the frequency of items that have been selected so far, the higher the possibility that the player will select even in this variable probability state. For example, in determining the initial layout of the music selection menu screen, items corresponding to randomly selected items (songs) are arranged in the music selection area, and other items are simply arranged based on the items arranged in the music selection area. If the songs are arranged in alphabetical order (predetermined order), it may become difficult for the player to select their favorite songs. That is, when the item (song) that the player wants to select and the randomly selected item (song) are separated in order, the number of times the operation button 230 is operated to shift the item that the player wants to select to the music selection area. is increased, and there is a risk that the player will feel annoyed. In addition, as a method to make it difficult to feel annoyance, it is possible to set the item that is first placed in the music selection area when the variable probability state occurs, to an item that is frequently selected by the player. With this method, the player will be satisfied with the music played (output) first in the variable probability state, and there is a high possibility that the player will not change the music (the music selection menu screen will not be displayed). The fewer chances the player has to display the music selection menu screen, the fewer chances he has to know the types of other music set in the pachinko machine 10.例文帳に追加For this reason, the player is less likely to think of selecting another piece of music. Therefore, even if a large number of songs are set to be selectable for the pachinko machine 10, most of them may be wasted without being selected.

Furthermore, as a method for making it easier for the player to select a favorite song, by collectively displaying all the items on the display screen of the third pattern display device 81 (arranging the items in a matrix), any song ( It is also conceivable to make it possible to understand at a glance where the item) is arranged. However, with this method, the display area for displaying the items (the area of the music selection menu screen) becomes large, and the display area for displaying other display contents (the third symbol, the pending number of balls symbol, etc.). may become too narrow.

On the other hand, in the first control example, items displayed on the music selection menu screen are displayed so that the player can easily select items that are likely to be selected (items that have been selected frequently in previous games). set the initial placement of More specifically, the player selects images showing three items (songs) that are frequently selected (selected many times) in the game so far with a small number of operations (the number of times the operation button 230 is pressed). It is configured to be arranged at a possible position (three display areas above the music selection area). By configuring in this way, regardless of the item (image showing the name of the song) that is first arranged in the song selection area of the song selection menu screen, it can be selected with a small number of operations (within three operations). Items that are frequently selected by the player can be placed in the positions. Therefore, in each probability variation state, the item that the player has repeatedly selected so far (that is, the item that the player is likely to select even in this probability variation state) can be selected with little effort. It is possible to make it difficult for the player to feel annoyed when selecting music (item). If the number of items (played songs) selected once or more is less than three (that is, the number of items frequently selected by the player is less than three), the items selected once or more Only (less than three items) are arranged in the history area, and the other items are arranged in a predetermined order (in alphabetical order of music) based on the items arranged in the music selection area. For this reason, when the player has not selected any song, such as immediately after turning on the power to the pachinko machine 10, the item determined to be placed in the song selection area is simply selected by random lottery. As a standard, all items are arranged in a predetermined order (alphabetical order of songs).

In addition, in the first control example, after shifting to the variable probability state, an image showing the name of one randomly selected piece of music is arranged in the music selection area on the music selection menu screen that is displayed first, and the music selection is performed. The history area is arranged above the area. By configuring in this way, at least immediately after shifting to the variable probability state, the randomly selected music can be reproduced, so that the player can be given an opportunity to listen to music other than the frequently selected music. . Therefore, a plurality of songs set in the pachinko machine 10 can be reproduced without waste. Also, while listening to randomly selected music, the player may like the music and want to play it again in the variable probability state after the next time. Therefore, since it is possible to increase the number of songs that the player likes, it is possible to improve the amusement of the game in the variable probability state. In addition, it is possible to suppress (prevent) the game from becoming monotonous by continuing to select only the same music.

Further, in the first control example, the number of items (images indicating song titles) displayed on the song selection menu screen is limited to 5 (the number is less than 26, which is the total number of songs). All the items set in the pachinko machine 10 can be selected by varying the types of items displayed on the music selection menu screen according to the content. By configuring in this manner, the display area of the music selection menu screen can be reduced compared to the case where all items are displayed collectively. Therefore, display contents other than the music selection menu screen, such as the third pattern and the number of pending pitches pattern, can be displayed in a larger display area.

In the first control example, the display areas corresponding to the songs (items) that the player has selected frequently (number of times) in the game so far are arranged in the upper three display areas of the song selection area. and the remaining display areas are arranged in a predetermined order (alphabetical order) based on one randomly selected display area, but the present invention is not limited to this. The number of items that the player has selected frequently (the number of times) in the game thus far may be set to be less than three, or may be set to be more.

In the first control example, in the initial layout of the music selection menu screen, as items to be laid out in the history area, items frequently selected by the player in previous games are laid out, but this is not the only option. is not. For example, the items selected by the player in the variable probability state set before the current variable probability state may be arranged in the history area in order of newest (closest) timing of selection. With this configuration, images (items) showing songs that are highly likely to be selected by a player who tends to continuously select favorite songs can be arranged in the history area. convenience for users.

In the first control example, the music selection menu screen is not displayed unless the operation button 230 is operated after entering the variable probability state, but the configuration is not limited to this. A configuration in which the screen is displayed may be used. By configuring in this way, it is possible to reduce the trouble of the player who wants to select a song, so that the player's convenience can be improved.

In the first control example, the item to be displayed first in the music selection area is selected by random lottery, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, as an item to be displayed first in the music selection area on the music selection menu screen, the item selected last by the player in the variable probability state set before the current variable probability state may be arranged.

In this first control example, a maximum of three items selected by the player in the game so far in descending order of the number of times are selected (shifted to the music selection area) in the initial layout on the music selection menu screen with a relatively small number of operations. Although it is arranged in a position where it is possible to do so, it is not limited to this. It is only necessary for the player to easily understand where on the song selection menu screen the songs that are likely to be selected by the player (songs that have been selected many times so far) are arranged. As an arrangement, it may be configured to be displayed somewhere in the music area MR. With this configuration, even if the number of items to be displayed in the music area MR is increased beyond 5, the items that are likely to be selected by the player are displayed from the beginning. can be kept Therefore, it becomes easier for the player to select an item, so that convenience for the player can be enhanced.

In this first control example, the items displayed in the music selection area and the items displayed in the other display areas are configured to have different display modes. The display mode may be changed depending on whether or not it is a song with a high probability (an item placed in the history area in the initial layout of the song selection menu screen). By configuring in this way, the player can more easily discover items that the player is likely to select, so that convenience for the player can be enhanced.

<Electrical Configuration in First Control Example>
Next, the electrical configuration in this first control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 103 to 108. FIG. FIG. 103 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10. As shown in FIG. In the pachinko machine 10 in this first control example, the operation button 230 is electrically connected to the input/output port 225 of the sound lamp control device 113, so the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in each of the above embodiments (see FIG. 8). Also, the configurations of the ROM 222 and the RAM 223 provided in the sound lamp control device 113 are partially changed. Since other configurations are the same as those of the above-described embodiments, details thereof will be omitted. Note that in the following description of the first control example, the first embodiment will be used as a comparison target, and differences from the first embodiment will be mainly described.

When any one of the buttons (UB, DB, RB, LB, CB) constituting the operation button 230 is pressed (operated), an ON signal (an output signal of H) is applied to the signal line corresponding to the operated button. ) is output. The audio lamp control device 113 monitors the output from the operation button 230, and when the output of the signal corresponding to any button is H, executes control according to the button type. Specifically, for example, when it is detected that the output of the signal corresponding to one of the buttons has become H while the music selection menu screen is not displayed in the variable probability state, the music selection menu screen is displayed. control. Also, when it is detected that the output of the signal corresponding to the up button UB has become H while the music selection menu screen is displayed, each item on the music selection menu screen is shifted downward by one. control.

Next, referring to FIG. 104(a), the configuration of the ROM 222 of the audio ramp control device 113 in the first control example will be described. FIG. 104(a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM 222 in this first control example. As shown in FIG. 104(a), the ROM 222 in the first control example has an item order storage area 222aa added to the configuration of the ROM 222 in the first embodiment (see FIG. 14(a)). is different. Other configurations are the same as those of the above-described first embodiment, so details thereof will be omitted.

The item order storage area 222aa is a data table that defines the order of items on the music selection menu screen, and is referred to when setting the initial layout of the music selection menu screen. More specifically, the initial layout of the music selection menu screen is determined when shifting to the variable probability state. When determining this initial arrangement, first, three items (songs) to be arranged in the history area are decided, and then one item to be arranged in the music selection area is selected from other items not arranged in the history area. It is determined randomly (for example, by lottery using random numbers). Using the items arranged in the music selection area as a reference, other items (items not arranged in either the music selection area or the history area) are arranged in the order specified in the item order storage area 222aa. set. As described above, in the first control example, the item order storage area 222aa is set so that the items are arranged in alphabetical order of the songs.

Next, with reference to FIG. 104(b), the configuration of the RAM 223 of the audio ramp control device 113 in the first control example will be described. FIG. 104(b) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 223. As shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 104(b), the RAM 223 in the first control example has an item layout storage area 223aa and a menu position pointer 223ab, as opposed to the configuration of the RAM 223 in the first embodiment (see FIG. 14(b)). , in that a music selection count storage area 223ac, a music selection permission flag 223ad, and a menu display flag 223ae are added. Other configurations are the same as those of the above-described first embodiment, so details thereof will be omitted.

The item layout storage area 223aa is a storage area for storing the layout of each item (image indicating the type of each song) on the music selection menu screen. When shifting to the variable probability state, the initial arrangement of each item is set in the item arrangement storage area 223aa (see S5204, S5208, and S5212 in FIG. 113), and when the music selection menu screen is displayed, the item The music selection menu screen is displayed in the layout set in the layout storage area 223aa. Details of the item arrangement storage area 223aa will be described with reference to FIG. 105(a).

FIG. 105(a) is a diagram showing an example of the contents of the item layout storage area 223aa. In FIG. 105(a), "song N", "song O", and "song P" are arranged in the history area, and "song A" is arranged in the selection area. 2 shows an example of the contents of the item arrangement storage area 223aa in . As shown in FIG. 105(a), in this item arrangement storage area 223aa, data indicating menu items are stored corresponding to each value ("00H" to "19H") that the menu position pointer 223ab can take. A storage area is provided for In the example of FIG. 105(a), the data corresponding to the menu item "music A" is stored in the storage area corresponding to the value "00H" of the menu position pointer 223ab, and the value "01H" of the menu position pointer 223ab is stored. data corresponding to the menu item "song B" is stored in the storage area corresponding to . After that, the data is stored in alphabetical order of the songs up to the value "0BH" of the menu position pointer 223ab. In addition, data corresponding to "song Q" is stored in a storage area corresponding to "0CH" next to "0BH". That is, it is avoided that the data corresponding to "song N", "song O", and "song P" already stored in the history area are redundantly stored in the random selection area.

From the storage area corresponding to the value "0CH" of the menu position pointer 223ab to the storage area corresponding to "16H", data is stored in the same alphabetical order as in the range "00H" to "0BH". . Also, the range of the value of the menu position pointer 223ab from "17H" to "19H" corresponds to the history area, and in the example of FIG. P” are stored respectively. The data corresponding to the song with the highest selection frequency is stored in the storage area corresponding to the value "19H" of the menu position pointer 223ab, and the storage area corresponding to "18H" is selected second. Data corresponding to songs with a high frequency is stored, and data corresponding to a song with the third highest selection frequency is stored in the storage area corresponding to "17H".

In the first control example, when the music selection menu screen is displayed, the data stored in the item layout storage area 223aa (correspondence relationship between the value of the menu position pointer 223ab and the menu item) and the menu position pointer 223ab By comparing with the current value, the menu items stored in the storage area corresponding to the current value of the menu position pointer 223ab are arranged in the music selection area. Also, the menu items stored in the storage areas corresponding to the two values before and after the value of the menu position pointer 223ab are arranged above and below the music selection area. For example, in the example of FIG. 105(a), if the value of the menu position pointer 223ab is "19H", an item indicating "song P" is displayed in the music selection area. Also, above the music selection area by one, "music O" stored in the storage area corresponding to the value one higher than the value "19H" of the menu position pointer 223ab (i.e., "18H") is arranged. be done. Similarly, "music N" corresponding to the value "17H" of the menu position pointer 223ab is arranged two above the music selection area. Conversely, an item corresponding to a value one level lower than the value "19H" of the menu position pointer 223ab is arranged one level below the music selection area. Here, in this control example, the value next to the maximum value "19H" of the menu position pointer 223ab is set to be determined to be "00H" (similarly, the minimum value "00H" is The next (one lower) value is determined to be "19H"). "music A" and "music B" stored in .

Returning to FIG. 104(b), the description continues. The menu position pointer 223ab is a pointer used to determine the range of items to be displayed on the music selection menu screen in the item layout storage area 223aa. As described above, when the music selection menu screen is displayed, the data stored in the five storage areas centered on the storage area corresponding to the value of the menu position pointer 223ab is read, and the five items corresponding to each data are read. is arranged on the music selection menu screen. The initial value of the menu position pointer 223ab is set to "00H", and the value is decremented by one each time the up button UB is pressed while the music selection menu screen is displayed. It should be noted that when the pressing of the up button UB is detected in the state of "00H", the value is updated to the maximum value of "19H". Also, the value is incremented by one every time the down button DB is pressed while the music selection menu screen is being displayed. Note that when the down button UB is further pressed while the value is the maximum value "19H", the value is updated to the minimum value "00H" (see S5110 in FIG. 111). Also, the value of the menu position pointer 223ab is reset to the initial value "00H" each time a big win is achieved (see S4452 in FIG. 114). Since the variable probability state always shifts after the end of the jackpot, the value of the menu position pointer 223ab is always set to "00H" at the start of the variable probability state by resetting to the initial value when the jackpot is won. be able to.

The song selection count storage area 223ac is a storage area for storing the number of times each song (item) has been selected. When setting the layout of the menu items in the item layout storage area 223aa, this song selection frequency storage area 223ac is referred to, and the value "19H" of the menu position pointer 223ab is set in order from the song selected most frequently. , "18H" and "17H" are stored in storage areas (that is, history areas). The details of this music selection frequency storage area 223ac will be described with reference to FIG. 105(b).

FIG. 105(b) is a diagram showing an example of the content of the music selection frequency storage area 223ac. As shown in FIG. 105(b), the music selection frequency storage area 223ac is configured to be able to store the type of music and the number of times it has been selected (selected) in association with each other. For example, in the example of FIG. 105(b), "song A" is associated with 0 times as the number of selections, and "song B" is associated with 1 as the number of selections. On the other hand, 0 times is associated and stored as the number of times of selection. Similarly, the number of times of selection is associated with other music types and stored. This music selection frequency storage area 223ac stores the number of times of selection corresponding to the determined music each time the player presses the center button CB while the music selection menu screen is displayed to determine the reproduction of one music piece. 1 is added and updated (see S5108 in FIG. 111). Since the RAM 223 of the sound lamp control device 113 is not backed up, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned off, all the data indicating the number of times each song has been selected is cleared.

Returning to FIG. 104(b), the description continues. The song selection permission flag 223ad is a flag indicating whether or not the player can select a song. When this music selection permission flag 223ad is ON, it indicates that any music can be selected, and when it is OFF, it indicates that music cannot be selected. The music selection permission flag 223ad has an initial value set to OFF, and is set to ON when a state command output from main controller 110 notifies that the state has shifted to the variable probability state (see FIG. 113). (see S5213). Also, every time an opening command indicating the start of a jackpot is received, it is reset to off (see S4451 in FIG. 114). While the music selection permission flag 223ad is on, it is determined that it is a period in which music can be selected, and pressing of the operation button 230 is treated as valid.

The menu display flag 223ae is a flag indicating whether or not the music selection menu screen (see FIG. 102(a)) is displayed. When the menu display flag 223ae is on, it indicates that the music selection menu screen is displayed, and when it is off, it indicates that the music selection menu screen is not displayed. The initial value of the menu display flag 223ae is set to OFF, and is set to ON when display of the music selection menu screen is set (see S5105 in FIG. 111). Further, when pressing of the center button CB is detected while the music selection menu screen is displayed, the music selection menu screen is closed and the menu display flag 223ae is set to off (see S5109 in FIG. 111). It is also reset to off when an opening command indicating the start of the jackpot is received (see S4451 in FIG. 114). While the menu display flag 223ae is on, each item on the music selection menu screen is shifted in the corresponding direction each time the up button UB or the down button DB is pressed. Further, by detecting that the central button CB has been pressed, the items arranged in the music selection area are set to be reproduced, and the music selection menu screen is closed.

Next, the electrical configuration of the audio output device 226 will be described with reference to FIGS. 106 to 108. FIG. FIG. 106 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the audio output device 226. As shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 106, the audio output device 226 is connected so as to be able to receive data output from the audio lamp control device 113 .

As shown in FIG. 106, the audio output device 226 is equipped with an MPU 301 as a one-chip microcomputer that is an arithmetic device. The MPU 301 includes a ROM 302 storing various control programs and fixed value data to be executed by the MPU 301, and a memory for temporarily storing various data when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 302. A RAM 303 is built in.

MPU 301 of audio output device 226 is electrically connected to input port 305 and audio synthesizing section 306 . When a command designating audio data is received from audio lamp control device 113 to audio output device 226 , the command is input to MPU 301 via input port 305 and bus line 304 . Also, the audio data specified by the audio lamp control device 113 is read from the ROM 302 and output to the channel corresponding to the audio type of the audio synthesizing section 306 . For example, audio data corresponding to music is output to CN1, audio data corresponding to sound effects is output to CN2, and audio data corresponding to warning sounds is output to CN3.

The voice synthesizing unit 306 is composed of a known voice synthesizing LSI that synthesizes voice data input to each channel and outputs the synthesized voice data to the amplifier unit 307 . Synthesized speech data is amplified by amplifier section 307 and input to speaker section 308 . As a result, various sounds designated by the sound lamp control device 113 can be output from the speaker unit 308 .

Next, the configuration of the ROM 302 provided in the MPU 301 of the audio output device 226 will be described with reference to FIG. 107(a). As shown in FIG. 107(a), the ROM 302 is provided with at least a voice file storage area 302a.

The audio file storage area 302a is a storage area in which audio files (audio data) used for outputting music, sound effects, and the like are stored. Audio files for reproducing songs (song A to song Z) that can be selected by the player in the variable probability state are also stored in the sound file storage area 302a. When the output of various audio data is instructed by the audio lamp control device 113, the audio file corresponding to the performance is read out from the audio file storage area 302a and output to the corresponding channel of the audio synthesizing section 306.

Details of the voice file storage area 302a will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 108 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the voice file storage area 302a. As shown in FIG. 108, in the audio file storage area 302a, a music data group (music A data group 302a1 to music Z data group 302a26) composed of a plurality of data used to reproduce each music. , data used to output each sound effect (for example, sound effect A data 302a27), and all audio files (audio data) reproducible by the audio output device 226 are stored.

As described above, the audio files (song A data group 302a1 to song Z data group 302a26) corresponding to each song (song A to song Z) that can be played during the variable probability state are each composed of a plurality of data. It is The configuration of these music data groups 302a1 to 302a26 will be described with reference to FIG.

FIG. 109 is a diagram showing an example of the configuration of a music data group. As shown in FIG. 109, the music data group is composed of a plurality of pieces of data for each part (separation) of music. More specifically, as exemplified in FIG. 109, for example, intro data corresponding to the prelude (so-called intro) part of the music and A melody 1 corresponding to the first melody (so-called A melody part) of the music. , data for B melody 1 corresponding to the second melody (the so-called B melody part) of the song (so-called B melody part), and data for chorus 1 corresponding to the most exciting part of the song (so-called chorus part) data, interlude data corresponding to the interlude part of the music, data for A melody 2 corresponding to the second A melody part of the music, and data for B melody 2 corresponding to the second B melody part of the music , chorus 2 data corresponding to the second chorus of the music, and outro data corresponding to the outro of the music. By reproducing (outputting) the audio data for each part in the order determined for each piece of music, one piece of music is reproduced. By configuring in this way, the audio data can be diverted when part of the music is used in other effects (for example, when reproducing the chorus of a predetermined music during the variable display effect). . In other words, since it is not necessary to separately store the audio data for one piece of music and the audio data for a part of the piece of music, the storage capacity of the audio file storage area 302a can be reduced. Further, in each data constituting the music data group, data corresponding to a pointer value of a music pointer 303b (described later) set in the RAM 303 and a reproduction time when each data is reproduced are defined in association with each other. ing. In this first control example, playback is performed in the order of the values of the music pointer 303b. That is, when the reproduction time of the music data being reproduced has elapsed, the value of the music pointer 303b is updated by 1, and the music data corresponding to the updated pointer value is reproduced. As a result, each piece of music data can be reproduced in the same order each time.

Next, the configuration of the RAM 303 provided in the MPU 301 of the audio output device 226 will be described with reference to FIG. 107(b). FIG. 107(b) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 303. As shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 107(b), the RAM 303 is provided with at least a song data group storage area 303a, a song pointer 303b, a maximum value storage area 303c, and a song timer 303d.

The music data group storage area 303a is a storage area for storing voice files (music data group) corresponding to music played during the variable probability state. During the variable probability state, the music data group stored in the music data group storage area 303a is reproduced in the order of the value of the music pointer 303b, thereby reproducing one music piece. . In this music data group storage area 303a, a command (audio lottery music command) output from the audio ramp control device 113 to instruct the reproduction of a music determined by lottery at the start of the variable probability state, or a game When a command (speech selection song command) output for instructing reproduction of a song selected by the user is received, a song data group corresponding to the song instructed by the command is read from the voice file storage area 302a. is output and stored (see S9205 and S9210 in FIG. 116).

In addition, in the first control example, when starting to reproduce music based on the music data group stored in the music data group storage area 303a, the reproduction position is changed depending on how the music was determined. and Specifically, when starting to play the song determined by lottery at the start of the variable probability state, start playing from the chorus part (set the playing of data for chorus 1), while depending on the player's choice When starting the reproduction of the decided music, the reproduction is started from the beginning (intro part) of the music (the reproduction of the intro data is set). As for the music selected by the player, there is a high possibility that the player wants to listen carefully from the beginning of the music. This is because there is a possibility that the music will be changed immediately. Therefore, with regard to the randomly selected music, by starting the reproduction from the chorus, which is the most exciting part of the music, the player can listen to at least the most characteristic part of the music, and then play the music. You can decide whether to change or not. As a result, the goodness (characteristics) of the randomly selected music can be conveyed (understood) to the player as much as possible, so that it is easy to increase the number of songs that the player likes (randomly selected music It is possible to make it easier to discover new favorite songs from among. Therefore, it is possible to improve the amusement of the game in the variable probability state.

The music pointer 303b is a pointer for indicating which data is being reproduced among the music data group stored in the music data group storage area 303a. The value of this music pointer 303b is set to "00H" when the reproduction of the music selected by the player is instructed (the music is notified by the voice selection music command) (see S9206 in FIG. 116). ). Along with this, reproduction of the intro data corresponding to the pointer value "00H" is set. On the other hand, when the reproduction of a randomly selected song is instructed at the start of the variable probability state (the song is notified by the audio lottery song command), a value corresponding to the chorus 1 part is set (Fig. 116 S9211). The value of the music pointer 303b is updated by one each time one piece of music data set in the music data group storage area 303a is completely reproduced. Further, in a state where the value of the music pointer 303b is the maximum value set for each type of music (in the first control example, the pointer value corresponding to the one before the outro part), the pointer When the value is updated, the value is updated to "01H".

Here, when the reproduction is completed up to one part before the outro part, the value of the music pointer 303b is updated to "01H" corresponding to the A melody 1 part without reproducing the outro part and the intro part. The reason for this is to make it difficult for the player to recognize the breaks in the music when the music is played repeatedly. If the music is reproduced from the intro part again after the outro part of the music is reproduced, the player can easily recognize the break of the music. In this case, there is a possibility that the break of the music will be noticed and it will be difficult to concentrate on the game during the variable probability state. On the other hand, in this control example, when a piece of music is played repeatedly, the outro part and the intro part of the piece of music are skipped and the A melody part is returned to. can. As a result, the player is less likely to notice breaks in the music, so that the player can concentrate more on playing the game during the variable probability state.

The maximum value storage area 303c is a storage area for temporarily storing the maximum value of the music pointer 303b. As described above, in the first control example, the first part of the A melody to the part immediately before the outro part is repeatedly reproduced. It may differ depending on the song. Depending on the song, there are cases where the C melody is set after the B melody, multiple types of choruses are set, and interludes are not set, which differs from the data structure shown in FIG. Sometimes. Therefore, when a song data group is stored in the song data group storage area 303a and playback of a song is set, the song pointer 303b corresponding to the song to be played is stored in the maximum value storage area 303c. is set in advance (see S9207 and S9212 in FIG. 116). Each time the reproduction of one song data set in the song data group storage area 303a is completed, the value of the song pointer 303b is compared with the maximum value stored in the maximum value storage area 303c. , and whether or not the reproduction of the part immediately before the outro part has been completed (whether or not the music pointer 303b should be returned to "01H") can be determined. As a result, even if the data structure differs for each song, the intro part and the outro part can be reliably skipped and loop-reproduced.

The music timer 303d is a timer that counts the reproduction time of the music data being reproduced. A timer value corresponding to the reproduction time of the music data is set to the music timer 303d every time the reproduction of new music data is set. It should be noted that the reproduction time of each piece of music data is defined in association with the type of music data in the music data group storage area 303a. During the reproduction of music, whether or not the reproduction time has elapsed is determined based on the value of the music timer 303d. Although not shown, the song timer 303d is updated periodically (for example, every 1 millisecond).

<Regarding control processing of the sound ramp control device in the first control example>
Next, various control processes executed by the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 in the first control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 110 to 114. FIG. First, FIG. 110 is a flowchart showing main processing 8 of the audio ramp control device 113 in the first control example.

S4101 to S4111 and S4113 to S4118 of the main process 8 (see FIG. 110) in the first control example correspond to S4101 to S4111 and S4113 of the main process (see FIG. 34) in the first embodiment, respectively. The same processing as each processing of S4118 is executed. Further, in the main process 8 (see FIG. 110) in the first control example, after the effect update process of S4111 is finished, the operation (pressing) of the operation button 230 is monitored, and if the operation is detected, An operation detection process for executing control is executed (S4141), and the process proceeds to S4142. Details of this operation detection process (S4141) will be described later with reference to FIG.

Further, when the processing of S4141 is completed, or when it is determined in the processing of S4101 that 1 millisecond has not passed since the previous processing (S4101: No), the command determination processing in the first embodiment (Fig. 36), the command determination process 8 is executed (S4142), and the process proceeds to S4113. The details of this command determination process 8 (S4142) will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, with reference to FIG. 111, details of the operation detection process (S4141) described above will be described. FIG. 111 is a flow chart showing this operation detection process (S4141). In the operation detection process (S4141), first, it is determined whether an operation (pressing) on the operation button 230 has been detected (S5101). In the process of S5101, the output of the signal line connected to each button of the operation buttons 230 is detected, and if any output is H, it is determined that the operation of the operation button 230 has been detected.

If it is determined in the process of S5101 that no operation on the operation button 230 has been detected (that is, the output of signals corresponding to all buttons is L) (S5101: No), the process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that an operation on the operation button 230 has been detected (that is, the output of the signal corresponding to any button is H) (S5101: Yes), then the music selection permission flag 223ad is turned on. (S5102), and if the music selection permission flag 223ad is off (S5102: No), it means that it is a period in which music cannot be selected, and the operation of the operation button 230 is disabled. This process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S5102 that the music selection permission flag 223ad is on (S5102: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the menu display flag 223ae is on (S5103). In the processing of S5103, if it is determined that the menu display flag 223ae is off (S5103: No), the display of the music selection menu screen is set (S5104), the menu display flag 223ae is set on (S5105), End this process. By these processes, when the probability changing state is in effect and the music selection menu screen is not displayed, the music selection menu screen can be displayed regardless of the type of button pressed.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S5103 that the menu display flag 223ae is ON (S5103: Yes), different control is executed according to the type of button operated (pressed) by the player. Specifically, first, it is determined whether the operation detected by the processing of S5101 is the operation for the center button CB (S5106), and if it is determined that the operation detected this time is the operation for the center button CB. (S5106: Yes), sets an audio selection music command for notifying the audio output device 226 of reproduction of the music corresponding to the value of the current menu position pointer 223ab (S5107).

When the process of S5107 ends, next, among the storage areas set in the number of times of music selection storage area 223ac, 1 is added to the music selection number of the music set (selected) to be reproduced by the process of S5107 and updated. (S5108), the music selection menu screen is closed, the menu display flag 223ae is set to OFF (S5109), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S5106 that no operation on the center button CB has been detected (S5106: No), the value of the menu position pointer 223ab is updated according to the type of button that detected the operation (S5110). ). In the process of S5110, when the depression of the upper button UB is detected, 1 is subtracted from the value of the menu position pointer 223ab, while when the depression of the lower button DB is detected, the menu position pointer 223ab Add 1 to the value of Note that when the depression of the up button UB is detected in the state where the menu position pointer 223ab is "00H", the pointer value is updated to "19H" which is the maximum value. Further, when the depression of the down button DB is detected while the menu position pointer 223ab is at the maximum value of "19H", the pointer value is updated to "00H".

When the process of S5110 ends, next, the display mode of the music selection menu screen is updated according to the value of the menu position pointer 223ab after being updated by the process of S5110 (S5111), and this process ends. In the process of S5111, an item (image indicating the type of music) corresponding to the value of the menu position pointer 223ab is arranged in the music selection area, and an item (music image showing the type of music) are placed above and below the music selection area.

By executing this operation detection processing (see FIG. 111), it is possible to update the music selection menu screen, determine the music, etc. according to the operation content (the type of button whose depression is detected) on the operation button 230, as desired by the player. can run to

Next, command determination processing 8 (S4142) of the sound lamp control device 113 in the first control example will be described with reference to FIG. This command determination process 8 (S4142) is, as described above, a process executed in place of the command determination process (see FIG. 36) in the first embodiment.

In this command determination process 8 (see FIG. 112), S4301 to S4309, S4311 to S4313, and S4315 each correspond to S4301 to S4309 and S4311 to S4313 of the command determination process (see FIG. 36) in the first embodiment. , and S4315 are executed. Further, in the command determination process 8 (see FIG. 112) in the first control example, if it is determined in the process of S4309 that a state command has been received (S4309: Yes), then the received state command State command processing for executing control according to the game state is executed (S4351), and this processing ends. Details of this state command processing (S4351) will be described later with reference to FIG.

Also, in the command determination process 8 (see FIG. 112) in the first control example, when it is determined that a hit-related command has been received in the process of S4313 (S4313: Yes), the hit-related process in the first embodiment Instead of (see FIG. 37), hit-related processing 8 is executed (S4352), and this processing ends. The details of this win-related process 8 (S4352) will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, with reference to FIG. 113, details of the above-described state command processing (S4351) will be described. FIG. 113 is a flow chart showing this state command processing (S4351). This state command process (S4351) is, as described above, a process for performing control according to the game state notified by the state command.

In this state command process (see FIG. 113), first, the data in the game state storage area 223i is updated according to the game state notified by the state command received from the main controller 110 (S5201). That is, based on the information corresponding to the game state notified by the state command, when the probability variable state of the special design and the time saving state of the normal design are notified, the lower two bits of the game state storage area 223i are set to "11B". , and when the special symbol low probability state and normal symbol time saving state are notified, the lower 2 bits of the game state storage area 223i are set to "01B", and the special symbol low probability state and When the normal state of the normal symbol is notified, the lower two bits of the game state storage area 223i are set to "00B". Thereby, when the game state of the pachinko machine 10 is changed, the voice lamp control device 113 can easily grasp the change.

When the processing of S5201 is completed, then, it is determined whether or not the state command indicates the transition to the variable probability state (the variable probability state of the special symbol and the time saving state of the normal symbol) (S5202), and the transition to the variable probability state is performed. (S5202: No), this processing ends. On the other hand, in the process of S5202, if it is determined that the state command indicating the transition to the variable probability state has been received (S5202: Yes), then the number of times of reproduction is stored in the music selection number storage area 223ac (see FIG. 105(b)). A maximum of three data are read in descending order (S5203). After the power is turned on, if the number of songs selected by the player is less than three, only the selected songs (that is, less than three pieces of data) are read. Also, if no song has been selected after the power is turned on (that is, if the number of song selections corresponding to all song types in the song selection number storage area 223ac is 0), the data is read in the process of S5203. never.

When the process of S5203 ends, then, the maximum three data read out in the process of S5203 are stored in the history area (storage area corresponding to the values "17H" to "19H" of the menu position pointer 223ab) in the item arrangement storage area 223aa. It stores (S5204), and the item (music) to be placed in the music selection area on the music selection menu screen is determined by lottery (S5205). In the process of S5204, if the number of data read by the process of S5203 is less than three, the data cannot be stored in all (three) storage areas of the history area. Among them, one or more storage areas become free areas. When the process of S5205 is finished, it is next determined whether the item (song) already stored in the history area is the item determined by lottery in the process of S5205 (S5206). If there is (S5206: Yes), in order to prevent the same item (music) from being redundantly arranged in the music selection area and the history area, the process returns to S5205 and the lottery is redone.

On the other hand, in the process of S5206, if it is determined that the item (music) determined by the lottery in the process of S5205 is not an item already stored in the history area (S5206: No), the item determined by the lottery in the process of S5205 is used. An audio lottery music command for notifying reproduction of the corresponding music is set (S5207). The audio lottery music command set here is output to the audio output device 226 by the command output process (S4102) of the main process 8 (see FIG. 110). When receiving the audio lottery music command, the audio output device 226 sets the music specified by the command to be reproduced from the chorus 1 part. Here, the reason why the music selected by random lottery is reproduced from the chorus 1 is that the player may immediately change the music if he does not like it even a little. Therefore, with regard to the randomly selected music, by starting the reproduction from the chorus, which is the most exciting part of the music, the player can listen to at least the most characteristic part of the music, and then play the music. You can decide whether to change or not. As a result, the goodness of the randomly selected songs can be conveyed to the player as much as possible, making it easier for the player to increase the number of songs that the player likes. to make it easier to discover). Therefore, it is possible to improve the amusement of the game in the variable probability state.

When the process of S5207 is completed, the item determined by lottery in the process of S5205 is stored in the storage area corresponding to the value "00H" of the menu position pointer 223ab in the item arrangement storage area 223aa (S5208), and stored immediately before. The items in the order to be arranged following the selected item are identified by referring to the order (that is, the alphabetical order of the songs) specified in the item order storage area 222aa (S5209). Then, it is determined whether the item (music) specified in the process of S5209 is the data (item) stored in the storage area corresponding to the value "00H" of the menu position pointer 223ab in the item arrangement storage area 223aa (S5210). If it is determined that an item other than the item stored in the storage area corresponding to the value "00H" of the menu position pointer 223ab in the item arrangement storage area 223aa has been specified (S5210: No), the item already stored in the history area is determined. It is determined whether or not the item has been specified (S5211).

In the process of S5211, if it is determined that the data not stored in the history area is specified in the process of S5209 (S5211: No), the item specified in the process of S5209 is processed in S5208 or the previous process of S5212. (S5212), and the process returns to S5209. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S5211 that the item specified in the process of S5209 is already stored in the history area (S5211: Yes), the specified item is stored in the item layout storage area 223aa. without (skipping the processing of S5212), the processing returns to S5209. In the process of S5210, until the item stored in the storage area corresponding to "00H" is specified, the shift is performed by the process of S5209 of specifying the items in the order specified in the item order storage area 222aa, and the specified item. The processing of S5212 for storing in the item layout storage area 223aa is repeated.

Further, in the process of S5210, if it is determined that the item specified by the process of S5209 is the item stored in the storage area corresponding to the value "00H" of the menu position pointer 223ab in the item arrangement storage area 223aa (S5210: Yes), this means that the items have been stored in the storage area corresponding to all the values "00H" to "19H" of the menu position pointer 223ab in the item layout storage area 223aa, and have returned to "00H" after going around. , S5209 to S5212 ends, and the process proceeds to S5213. In the processing of S5213, the music selection permission flag 223ad is set to ON (S5213), and this processing ends. By repeating the processes of S5209 to S5212, regardless of the number of data stored in the history area in the process of S5204, all storage areas other than the areas where data is stored in the processes of S5204 and S5205 are duplicated. Data can be stored securely.

By executing this state command process (see FIG. 113), the initial layout of the composition of the music selection menu screen can be set. In addition, up to three items (songs) can be arranged in the history area on the music selection menu screen in descending order of the number of times the player has selected them. That is, it is possible to arrange items that have been selected by the player many times in the past games (items that are highly likely to be selected by the player) in the three upper music selection areas. Therefore, in each probability change state, the item that the player has repeatedly selected so far (that is, the item that the player is likely to select even in this probability change state) can be selected with little effort. It is possible to make it difficult for the player to feel annoyed when selecting music (item).

In addition, each time the variable probability state occurs, a song to be reproduced first can be determined by a random lottery. As a result, at least immediately after shifting to the variable probability state, the randomly selected music can be reproduced, so that the player can be given an opportunity to listen to music other than the frequently selected music. Therefore, a plurality of songs set in the pachinko machine 10 can be reproduced without waste. Also, while listening to randomly selected music, the player may like the music and want to play it again in the variable probability state after the next time. Therefore, since it is possible to increase the number of songs that the player likes, it is possible to improve the amusement of the game in the variable probability state. In addition, it is possible to suppress (prevent) the game from becoming monotonous by continuing to select only the same music.

Next, with reference to FIG. 114, details of the above-described win-related process 8 (S4352) will be described. FIG. 114 is a flow chart showing this win-related process 8 (S4352). Of the winning-related process 8 (S4352) in the first control example, the processes of S4401 to S4410 are the same as the winning-related processes (see FIG. 37) in the first embodiment.

In addition, in the hit-related process 8 (see FIG. 114) in the first control example, when the process of S4406 ends, both the music selection permission flag 223ad and the menu display flag 223ae are reset to off (S4451), and the menu position The value of the pointer 223ab is reset to "00H" (S4452), and this processing ends. By executing the processes of S4451 and S4452, the flags and pointers associated with the music selection menu screen can be reset each time an opening command is received (that is, each time a jackpot is won).

In this first control example, the flags and pointers associated with the music selection menu screen are reset each time a jackpot is won, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the configuration may be such that the reset process is executed only when a jackpot is won in the variable probability state. Moreover, it is good also as a structure which performs a reset process at the time of the start of a probability change state.

<Regarding control processing of the audio output device in the first control example>
Next, various control processes executed by the MPU 301 of the audio output device 226 in the first control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 115 to 117. FIG. First, the main processing executed by the MPU 301 of the audio output device 226 will be described with reference to FIG. 115(a). FIG. 115(a) is a flow chart showing the contents of this main process.

When the main processing of the audio output device 226 is executed, first, command determination processing is executed for processing according to the command received from the audio lamp control device 113 (S9001). Details of this command determination processing (S9001) will be described later with reference to FIG. After the processing of S9001, audio setting processing for setting reproduction of audio data and switching of data is executed (S9002). The details of this audio setting process (S9002) will be described later with reference to FIG.

When the process of S9002 is completed, it is determined whether or not the work RAM 303 stores power failure occurrence information (S9003). If power-off occurrence information is stored in the processing of S9003 (S9003: Yes), both the power-off flag and the power-off processing flag are turned on (S9005), and the power-off processing is executed (S9006). After the power-off processing is executed, the power-off processing in progress flag is turned off (S9007), and then the processing is looped infinitely.

On the other hand, if the power-off occurrence information is not stored in the process of S9003 (S9003: No), it is determined whether or not the RAM 303 is destroyed based on the keyword stored in the RAM 303 (S9004), and the RAM 303 is destroyed. If not (S9004: No), the process returns to S9001, and the main process is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the RAM 303 is destroyed (S9004: Yes), the process is looped infinitely to stop execution of subsequent processes.

Next, command interrupt processing executed by the MPU 301 of the audio output device 226 will be described with reference to FIG. 115(b). FIG. 115(b) is a flow chart showing the contents of this command interrupt processing.

This command interrupt processing (see FIG. 115(b)) is processing that is executed each time a command is received from the sound lamp control device 113 .

In this command interrupt process, the received command data is extracted, and the extracted command data is sequentially stored in the command buffer area provided in the RAM 303 (S9101), and the process ends. Various commands stored in the command buffer area by this command interrupt processing are read out by command determination processing, which will be described later, and processing corresponding to the commands is performed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 116, the command determination process (S9001), which is one process in the main process (see FIG. 115(a)) executed by the MPU 301 of the audio output device 226, will be described. In this command determination process (S9001), control according to the type of various commands received from the sound lamp control device 113 is executed. FIG. 116 is a flow chart showing the contents of this command determination process (S9001).

In the command determination process (see FIG. 116), first, it is determined whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area (S9201). and return to main processing. On the other hand, if there is an unprocessed new command (S9201: Yes), the new command flag indicating that the new command has been processed in the ON state is set to ON (S9202). For all commands of processing, the command type is analyzed (S9203).

Then, among the unprocessed commands, first, it is determined whether or not there is an audio selection music command for notifying the music selected by the player by operating the operation button 230 (S9204), and the audio selection is performed. If it is determined that there is a music command (S9204: Yes), the audio file (music data group) corresponding to the music notified by the command is read from the audio file storage area 302a of the ROM 302, and The data group is stored in the song data group storage area 303a (S9205). Next, the value of the music pointer 303b is set to "00H", and the timer value corresponding to the reproduction time of the intro data is set to the music timer 303d (S9206). As a result, the music selected by the player by operating the operation button 230 can be played back from the beginning, so that the music selected by the player can be played back to the player (completely from the beginning of the music). ) can be heard.

When the process of S9206 ends, next, the maximum value of the music pointer 303b corresponding to the music data group stored in the music data group storage area 303a this time is stored in the maximum value storage area 303c (S9207). Data reproduction is set (S9208), and this processing ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S9204, if it is determined that the command received from the audio lamp control device 113 does not include the audio selection music command (S9204: No), then the command received from the audio lamp control device 113 It is determined whether or not there is an audio lottery music command for notifying of a music selected at random based on the fact that the odds are changed (S9209). In the process of S9209, if it is determined that there is a lottery music command for audio (S9209: Yes), the audio file (music data group) corresponding to the music indicated by the received lottery music command for audio is stored in the audio file storage area 302a. , and the read music data group is stored in the music data group storage area 303a (S9210).

When the process of S9210 is finished, next, a pointer value corresponding to the chorus 1 portion is set to the value of the music pointer 303b, and a timer value corresponding to the reproduction time of the chorus 1 data is set to the music timer 303d. Set (S9211). Then, the maximum value of the music pointer 303b corresponding to the music data group stored in the current music data group storage area 303a is stored in the maximum value storage area 303c (S9212), and playback of the chorus 1 data is set. (S9213), and the process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S9209, if it is determined that the audio selection music command has not been received from the audio ramp control device 113 (S9209: No), other commands received from the audio ramp control device 113 are processed. The process is executed (S9214) and the process returns to S9201. In the process of S9214, if the command received from the sound lamp control device 113 is, for example, a command for instructing reproduction of a sound effect, reproduction of the type of sound effect specified by the command is set. Also, if the command is for instructing the reproduction of a warning sound, the reproduction of the warning sound of the type specified by the command is set.

Next, with reference to FIG. 117, the details of the audio setting process (S9002) executed in the main process (see FIG. 115(a)) by the MPU 301 of the audio output device 226 will be described. FIG. 117 is a flow chart showing this audio setting process (S9002).

In this audio setting process (see FIG. 117), first, it is determined whether or not the music in the probability changing state is being played (S9301), and if it is determined that the music in the probability changing state is not being played (S9301 : No), it means that a single sound effect or warning sound is being played, or that no sound is being output. End this process.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S9301 that the music in the variable probability state is being reproduced (S9301: Yes), it is then determined whether it is time to end the music data being reproduced (S9302). That is, it is determined whether or not the value of the music timer 303d has become 0, and if it is determined that it is not time to end the reproduction of music data (that is, the value of the music timer 303d has not become 0) (S9302: No), this process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, in the process of S9302, if it is determined that the end timing of the music data being reproduced has come (that is, the value of the music timer 303d has become 0) (S9302: Yes), In the data group storage area 303a, processing for setting reproduction of music data subsequent to the music data whose reproduction has ended this time is executed. Specifically, first, the data stored in the maximum value storage area 303c (maximum value corresponding to the music data group currently being reproduced) is compared with the current value of the music pointer 303b (S9303). ), it is determined whether or not the value of the song pointer 303b matches the maximum value (data stored in the maximum value storage area 303c) corresponding to the current song data group (S9304).

In the process of S9304, if it is determined that the value of the music pointer 303b does not match the maximum value corresponding to the current music data group (S9304: No), 1 is added to the value of the music pointer 303b. and update (S9305), and the process proceeds to S9307. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S9304 that the value of the music pointer 303b matches the maximum value corresponding to the current music data group (S9304: Yes), the value of the music pointer 303b is changed to " 01H" (S9306), and the process proceeds to S9307. By updating the value of the music pointer 303b to "01H" through the process of S9306, it is possible to return to the A melody 1 portion of the set music and perform loop reproduction. That is, it is possible to perform loop playback by skipping the intro part and the outro part.

Here, if a music piece is to be loop-reproduced, after the music is reproduced up to the outro part, the loop reproduction is performed by reproducing the intro part again, so that the player can easily recognize the break of the music. end up In this case, there is a possibility that the player will be concerned about breaks in the music, making it difficult for the player to concentrate on the game during the variable probability state. On the other hand, in the first control example, when a piece of music is played back repeatedly, the outro part and the intro part of the piece of music are skipped and the A melody part is returned to. be able to. Therefore, the player is less likely to notice breaks in the music, so that the player can be made to concentrate more on the game during the variable probability state.

In the process of S9307, which is executed after the process of S9305 or S9306 ends, one piece of music data corresponding to the value of the updated music pointer 303b is read from the music data group storage area 303a (S9307). , the read music data is set to be reproduced (S9308), and this processing ends.

By executing this audio setting process (see FIG. 117), loop playback can be performed by skipping the intro and outro parts of the set song during the variable probability state.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 in the first control example, the player's operation on the third symbol display device 81 during a predetermined period (for example, the period in which the variable probability state is set) during the normal game A music selection menu screen is displayed in which the display mode (items displayed in a lighting mode in the music selection area) is variable in conjunction with the operation of the button 230, and the player operates the music selection menu screen while the music selection menu screen is displayed. When the center button 230 is pressed, the music (voice effect) corresponding to the display mode (items displayed in the music selection area) of the music selection menu screen is played back (executed). In addition, after a predetermined period of time has passed, the structure of the music selection menu screen that is displayed first can be changed based on the type of music selected so far (at least last time) by the player (type of voice effect). there is

More specifically, when shifting to the variable probability state, first, randomly select one song (1 type of voice effect) from a plurality of songs (songs A to Z) and place it in the song selection area. The item is determined and the reproduction of the selected music is started. Also, during the variable probability state, the player can operate the operation button 230 to select any song (arbitrary effect) of the player. At the time of transition to the variable probability state, one song is randomly selected and played back, so that the song can be played until the song is selected by the player (while no song is selected). Since it can be played back, it is possible to increase the player's satisfaction with the fact that the variable probability state is advantageous to the player. In addition, as the initial layout of the screen (music selection menu screen) for selecting music by operating the operation button 230, regardless of the type of music randomly selected at the start of the variable probability state, the player may select. Music that is considered to be high (music that has been selected many times by the player in the game so far) is arranged at a position that can be selected with a small number of operations (within three operations) on the operation button 230. there is Here, in determining the initial layout of the music selection menu screen, it is assumed that randomly selected items (songs) are arranged in the music selection area, and other items are simply arranged based on the items arranged in the music selection area. Arranging the songs in alphabetical order (predetermined order) may make it difficult for the player to select their favorite songs. That is, when the item (music) that the player wants to select and the item (music) that is randomly selected are separated in order, the item (image indicating the type of music that the player wants to select) is shifted to the music selection area. The number of times the operation button 230 is operated to activate the game is increased, and there is a risk that the player may feel annoyed. In addition, as a method to make it difficult to feel annoyance, it is conceivable to set the item that is first placed in the music selection area when the variable probability state occurs as an item that is frequently selected by the player. With this method, the player will be satisfied with the music played (output) first in the variable probability state, and there is a high possibility that the player will not change the music (the music selection menu screen will not be displayed). As the player has fewer opportunities to display the music selection menu, the chances of knowing the type of music set in the pachinko machine 10 also decrease. For this reason, the player is less likely to think of selecting another piece of music. Therefore, even if a large number of songs are set to be selectable for the pachinko machine 10, most of them may be wasted without being selected. Therefore, the player is less likely to think of selecting another song, so even if a large number of songs are selectable for the pachinko machine 10, most of them will be selected. It may end up being wasted.

On the other hand, in the first control example, the initial layout of the music selection menu screen is set so that the player can easily select items that are likely to be selected (items that have been selected frequently in previous games). is doing. More specifically, the player can select three items (songs) that have been selected frequently (selected many times) in the game so far with a small number of operations (the number of times the operation button 230 is pressed). It is configured to be arranged at a position (three display areas on the upper side of the music selection area). With this configuration, the number of operations (up button Items that are frequently selected by the player can be placed at positions that can be selected by pressing the UB three times or less. Therefore, in each probability change state, the item that the player has repeatedly selected so far (that is, the item that the player is likely to select even in this probability change state) can be selected with little effort. It is possible to make it difficult for the player to feel annoyed when selecting music (item).

Further, in the first control example, the reproduction position (execution start position) of the music (sound effect) is changed according to the circumstances in which the reproduction of the music (sound effect) is set. More specifically, the music selected by the player by operating the operation button 230 is configured to start playing from the beginning of the music (that is, the intro part) (from the second start position). On the other hand, at the start of the variable probability state, the music determined (selected) by random lottery is configured to start playing from the chorus 1 part of the music (from the second start position). As a result, the music selected by the player at his or her own will can be heard in its complete form from the beginning. On the other hand, the reason why the music selected by random lottery is reproduced from the chorus 1 is that the player may immediately change the music if he does not like it even a little. Therefore, with regard to the randomly selected music, by starting the reproduction from the chorus, which is the most exciting part of the music, the player can listen to at least the most characteristic part of the music, and then play the music. You can decide whether to change or not. As a result, the goodness of the randomly selected songs can be conveyed to the player as much as possible, making it easier for the player to increase the number of songs that the player likes. to make it easier to discover). Therefore, it is possible to improve the amusement of the game in the variable probability state.

In the first control example, the number of items to be displayed on the music selection menu screen is limited to five (the number is less than the total number of items), and the items displayed on the music selection menu screen can be changed by operating the operation button 230. All items can be selected in conjunction with the player's operation. Here, in the music selection menu screen, as a method for making it easier for the player to select his/her favorite music, all items are collectively displayed on the display screen of the third pattern display device 81 (items are arranged in a matrix). By doing so, a method of making it possible to understand at a glance which song (item) is arranged at which position is also conceivable. However, in this method, the display area for displaying each item (the area of the music selection menu screen) becomes large, and the display for displaying other display contents (the third pattern, the number of pending pitch patterns, etc.) The area may become too narrow. On the other hand, in the first control example, the number of items to be displayed on the music selection menu screen is limited to five (a number smaller than the total number of items). By configuring in this manner, the display area of the music selection menu screen can be reduced compared to the case where all items are displayed collectively. Therefore, display contents other than the music selection menu screen, such as the third pattern and the number of pending pitches pattern, can be displayed in a larger display area.

In addition, in the first control example, for the music determined by random lottery at the start of the variable probability state, while setting the playback from the chorus 1 part, select by operating the operation button 230 during the variable probability state. Although the song that was played was configured to be played from the intro part, it is not limited to this. Conversely, for songs determined by random lottery, playback from the intro part is set, while for songs voluntarily selected by the player by operating the operation button 230, the song is played from the chorus 1 part. It is good also as a structure which carries out. Most of the players who have voluntarily selected a piece of music want to listen to the chorus of the selected piece of music. can be fulfilled immediately. In addition, the player can calmly select the music by reproducing the music determined by random lottery at the start (transition) of the variable probability state from the intro part. More specifically, the intro part of a piece of music generally has a relatively calm melody, while the chorus part of a piece of music has a relatively intense melody. Therefore, by setting playback from the intro part, it is possible to set so that a relatively calm melody is played first. Therefore, while the relatively calm melody is playing, the player can be made to select music in a calm mood. Also, it is not always necessary to change the playback position according to the circumstances in which the playback is set. For example, regardless of the circumstances, it is possible to start playing from the chorus 1 part (that is, from the most exciting part of the song), or to start playing from the intro part. By configuring in this way, it is possible to omit the control of determining the circumstances and changing the reproduction position, so that the processing load can be reduced.

In the first control example, the history area is arranged above the music selection area on the music selection menu screen, but the arrangement is not limited to this, and may be set to any arrangement. For example, the history area may be arranged below the music selection area. In other words, three items (songs) frequently selected by the player in previous games may be arranged below the music selection area.

In the first control example, an area in which items frequently selected by the player are arranged is provided as the history area, but the structure of the history area is not limited to this. For example, instead of or in addition to the configuration of the first control example, an area in which items unlikely to be selected by the player based on the player's past tendencies are arranged as the second history area. It may be arranged in a range where it is difficult for the user to select (the operation buttons 230 for selecting songs are operated a relatively large number of times). More specifically, for example, while a randomly selected song is being played, if the song is changed to another song before the predetermined period elapses (for example, within 5 seconds), The song is placed in a range where it is relatively difficult for the player to select it (for example, a range in which the player cannot select it without performing at least 10 operations) as an item that is unlikely to be selected by the player from the next time onwards. It may be configured to allow If the music is changed within a predetermined period, there is a possibility that the player changed the music in a hurry because the music that the player did not want to listen to was played. The possibility of not wanting to listen to it (the possibility that the song will be changed immediately if played) increases. That is, the reproduction may cause the player to feel uncomfortable. Therefore, by arranging a song changed at a relatively early stage (within a predetermined period) during playback in the second history area, it is possible to eliminate the possibility of being selected at a random lottery in the probability changing state after the next time. At the same time, other items (items that are more likely to be selected by the player than the items arranged in the second history area) are relatively easy to select (selectable with a relatively small number of operations). ) position. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the music reproduced at the start of the variable probability state will make the player feel uncomfortable.

In this first control example, the number of selections of each song after the pachinko machine 10 is turned on is counted for each song, and three items (songs) are arranged in the history area in descending order of the number of times. However, the method of estimating songs that are likely to be selected by the player is not limited to this. For example, an external server owned by the manufacturer that developed the pachinko machine 10 may be configured so that the music selection tendencies of each player can be accumulated. More specifically, in the third symbol display device 81 of the pachinko machine 10, the information of the URL for connecting to the external server can be displayed in a format (for example, a two-dimensional barcode format) readable by the mobile terminal. Configure. By reading the URL information with a mobile terminal, accessing the external server from the mobile terminal, and entering the ID and password registered in advance or newly registered this time, the player's personal data (pachinko The number of times the machine 10 wins the jackpot, the number of times special symbols are drawn, etc.) can be confirmed. In this item, the history of the selected music and the number of times are also set. When a game is started by the pachinko machine 10 while logged in to the server, the selection history stored in the server is reflected in the pachinko machine 10, and items to be stored in the selection area are changed based on the selection history. It is good also as a structure which determines. As a method of reflecting the server data on the pachinko machine 10, for example, the data set in the server is password-coded (encoded) and displayed on the mobile terminal of the player, and the password is used to operate the mobile terminal. A method of inputting to the pachinko machine 10 side by a person can be mentioned. That is, on the pachinko machine 10 side, the correspondence relationship between the password and the history is defined in advance, and when the password is input, the history corresponding to the password (the number of selections for each piece of music) is stored in the music selection frequency storage area 223ac. may be set to . To provide a pachinko machine 10 which enables a player to more easily select his or her favorite music by constructing in this manner to display a music selection menu screen adapted to the tendency of each player. be able to.

In this first control example, the initial arrangement of the items on the music selection menu screen was configured to vary according to the type of music selected by the player, the number of times, etc. (player's selection history). It is not limited. In the case of executing a player-participation-type effect, such as an effect that prompts the user to operate a predetermined operation button, the initial mode of the effect may be varied according to the player's participation status. For example, for a player who tends to participate actively, control is performed so that an effect mode prompting a greater number of operations is likely to be selected, while for a player who participates in the effect less frequently, Alternatively, a configuration may be adopted in which control is performed so as to facilitate the selection of an effect mode that encourages operations performed a relatively small number of times. Further, for example, in the case of a player who does not participate in the performance frequently, pressing the button may facilitate the execution of a highly anticipated performance in which an advantageous result for the player is reported. By configuring in this way, since the possibility that a player with a low participation frequency intends to participate in the pressing effect increases, an appropriate mode can be set according to the tendency of the player. Also, in this case, instead of determining the effect mode according to the player's participation status (history), the effect mode such as the number of operations may be randomly determined by lottery. By configuring in this way, it is not necessary to store the player's participation status, so the control can be simplified.

In the first control example, when the player selects one song from the song selection menu screen, the playback is started from the beginning of the song regardless of the situation, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when the remaining time until the variable probability state ends is short (for example, when the variable display being executed ends and the jackpot starts), the playback may be started from the chorus.

In this first control example, the music selected at random at the start of the variable probability state is played from the chorus of the music, while the music selected by the player from the music selection menu screen is played from the beginning of the music. However, the control for changing the music reproduction position (the type of music data used first) according to the circumstances in which the music reproduction is determined is not limited to this. For example, as a song to be played back during the jackpot, when setting the playback of the song based on the start of the first round of the jackpot, the playback is started from the beginning (intro part) of the song, while the ending of the jackpot is set. When the reproduction of music is set based on the start of the period, the reproduction may be started from the outro portion of the music.

In this first control example, the playback position (audio Execution start position of the production) was configured to be variable, but this control is not limited to the production by sound. For example, the present control may be applied to the display effects executed in the third symbol display device 81 . Also, the process of determining the type of effect is not limited to the one exemplified in the first control example (whether it was selected by random lottery or voluntarily selected by the player). For example, when it is decided to execute a specific performance under the condition that the variable display corresponding to the loss is being executed, the specific performance is configured to be executed from the beginning, while the variable display corresponding to the big win is executed. When execution of a specific effect is determined under the situation that is being executed, the execution may be started from the middle of the specific effect. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make the player pay more attention to the details of the presentation.

In this first control example, the initial layout of the music selection menu screen is changed according to the history of selection of music by the player (the number of selections of each music). Although it has been configured to be arranged in positions that can be selected by the number of times, this control is not limited to the case of selecting music. For example, an item corresponding to the volume of the sound output from the audio output device 226, an item corresponding to the brightness of the image displayed on the third pattern display device 81, an item corresponding to the game history, etc. The menu screen is configured to be displayed by operating the operation button 230 . Then, according to the history of the items selected by the player in the past, items that are more likely to be selected by the player may be arranged at positions that can be selected with a smaller number of operations.

In the first control example, the music selection menu screen is not displayed unless the operation button 230 is operated after entering the variable probability state, but the configuration is not limited to this. A configuration in which the screen is displayed may be used. By configuring in this way, it is possible to reduce the trouble of the player who wants to select a song, so that the player's convenience can be improved.

In the first control example, the item to be displayed first in the music selection area is selected by random lottery, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, as an item to be displayed first in the music selection area on the music selection menu screen, the item selected last by the player in the variable probability state set before the current variable probability state may be arranged.

In this first control example, a maximum of three items selected by the player in the game so far in descending order of the number of times are selected (shifted to the music selection area) in the initial layout on the music selection menu screen with a relatively small number of operations. Although it is arranged in a position where it is possible to do so, it is not limited to this. It is only necessary for the player to easily understand where on the song selection menu screen the songs that are likely to be selected by the player (songs that have been selected many times so far) are arranged. As an arrangement, it may be configured to be displayed somewhere in the music area MR. With this configuration, even if the number of items to be displayed in the music area MR is increased beyond 5, the items that are likely to be selected by the player are displayed from the beginning. can be kept Therefore, it becomes easier for the player to select an item, so that convenience for the player can be enhanced.

In this first control example, the items displayed in the music selection area and the items displayed in the other display areas are configured to have different display modes. The display mode may be varied depending on whether or not it is a highly likely song (items placed in the history area in the initial layout of the song selection menu screen). By configuring in this way, the player can more easily discover items that the player is likely to select, so that convenience for the player can be enhanced.

In the first control example, when playing back a song determined by a random lottery at the start of the variable probability state, the playback is started from the chorus part, which is the most characteristic part of the song. The playback position is not limited, and may be a playback position where the player's attention is easily directed (the player is likely to listen to a randomly selected piece of music). For example, a piece of music that is partly used in another effect (for example, a variable display effect, etc.) (for example, at the start of the Super Reach Reach effect, a song that starts playing from the A melody as the background music of the effect, etc.) , the music may be played back from the same playback start position as the playback start position set in the presentation. By configuring in this way, it is possible to start playback from the playback position that was played during the normal game (that is, the playback position that is relatively familiar to the player). Therefore, by playing back a melody that can be played back during a normal game (a melody that the player is likely to have already heard), it is possible to attract the player's attention, so that the player can listen to the song more carefully. can let

In the first control example, the music selection menu screen can be displayed in the variable probability state, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the music selection menu screen may be configured to be displayed during the jackpot, or may be configured to be displayed during the time saving state. Further, for example, when a specific effect mode (for example, super ready-to-win effect) is selected as the effect mode during execution of the variable display, the music selection menu screen is displayed during execution of the specific effect mode, and the variable display is performed. It may be configured such that the player can freely select the music during display.

<Second control example>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 in the second control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 118 to 139. FIG. The pachinko machine 10 in the first control example described above is configured to start playing a randomly selected song (voice effect) at the start of the variable probability state, and by operating the operation button 230, any song ( It was configured to be changeable to voice production). In addition, for randomly selected songs, playback is started from the chorus (the most exciting part of the song), whereas for songs voluntarily selected by the player, the beginning (intro) of the song is played. It was configured to start playback from.

On the other hand, in the second control example, the player can select the song (type of sound effect) that is winning the jackpot. Then, the reproduction order of the music data is dynamically rearranged in accordance with the progress of the jackpot so that the chorus is reproduced as much as possible before the final round ends. That is, at a predetermined timing during execution of the jackpot (for example, at the start of the interval period immediately before the final round or at the start of the final round), the type of music data currently set to be reproduced (A melody 1, B melody 1, chorus 1, etc.) is discriminated, and when a part far from the chorus is being reproduced, the reproduction order of each music data constituting the music data group is rearranged and then reproduced. The composition is changed so that the part is closer to the chorus part. As a result, the player can more reliably hear the chorus, which is the most exciting (most characteristic) part of the song, before the end of the big win.

Further, in the second control example, when the chorus portion (specific range) is being reproduced at the end of the final round of the jackpot, the start timing of the ending effect is delayed so that the chorus portion can be reproduced longer. It is configured to continue. By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent, as much as possible, the most exciting (most characteristic) chorus part of the music from being forcibly terminated due to the end of the jackpot. As a result, the player can enjoy the chorus part more, so that the player's interest in the game during the big win can be improved.

The pachinko machine 10 in the second control example differs in configuration from the pachinko machine 10 in the first control example in that the configuration of the audio output device 226 is partially changed, and the audio lamp control device 113 The configuration of the ROM 222 and the RAM 223 is partially changed, the configuration of the RAM 303 of the audio output device 226 is partially changed, and the control processing executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 is partially changed. The only difference is that the control processing executed by the MPU 301 of the audio output device 226 is partially changed. Other configurations, various processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, other processes executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113, various processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, and the audio output device 226 Other processes executed by are the same as those of the pachinko machine 10 in the first control example. Hereinafter, the same reference numerals are given to the same elements as in the first control example, and illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 118, the jackpot configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the second control example will be described. As shown in FIG. 118, when the opening period for the jackpot starts, music dedicated to the opening period (opening music) is played. When the opening period ends and the first round starts, a period during which music can be selected (music selection period) is set. During this music selection period, a music area MR (see FIGS. 101(a) and 101(b)) is formed on the left side of the third symbol display device 81 in the same manner as in the variable probability state in the first control example. Since the display contents for this music area MR are the same as those in the first control example described above, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In this second control example, even if the player displays the music selection menu screen (see FIG. 101(b)) and selects a song during the music selection period, playback is not started immediately (playback is delayed). ), and the music is set to play at the timing when the first round ends. Also, during the first round in which the music selection period is set, the music dedicated to the music selection period (music for music selection) is reproduced. By constructing in this way, during the round period of one round, the playback start timing of the music can be adjusted regardless of whether the player selects the music immediately or when the player selects the music just before the end of one round. Since it can be the same, it is possible to carefully select a favorite song during the song selection period. Note that the initial arrangement of items on the music selection menu screen is set by the same control as in the first control example described above. That is, in the music selection area, songs (items) selected by random lottery are arranged, and songs (items) that have been selected many times by the player in the game so far are displayed in the upper three display areas of the music selection area. ) is placed.

As shown in FIG. 118, when one round ends and the interval period starts, the song selected by the player (if the player did not select a song on the song selection menu screen, the lottery at the start of the jackpot) ) is started to be played back. Playback of this song continues at least until the final round of the jackpot ends. Then, when the final round ends and the timing for starting the ending period comes, the ending effect is basically started, and the music for the ending effect is reproduced. As described above, when the chorus portion is being reproduced at the end timing of the final round, the reproduction of the chorus portion of the music is continued for a longer time by delaying the start timing of the ending effect. Since the player can listen to the chorus part, which is the most exciting part of the music, for a longer period of time, it is possible to improve the interest in the game during the big win.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 118, in the jackpot in the second control example, there are two rearrangement determination timings for determining whether or not to rearrange the playback order of the music data group (the interval period immediately before the final round of the jackpot). and at the start of the final round of the jackpot). At the recombination determination timing, it is determined whether or not the music data to be reproduced next is to be recombined (changed from the normal reproduction order) based on the reproduction position of the music (the type of the music data currently being reproduced). determine. In this determination, if it is determined that the song is to be recombined, the number of parts (number of song data to be played) until the next chorus is played is reduced (for the song currently set to be played). The playback order of the music data is rearranged so that the playback of the chorus is set next to the data group. As a result, the time until the next chorus is reproduced can be shortened, so that the chorus can be reproduced more reliably until the big win is finished. Whether or not the music data is of a type that can be determined by rearranging the playback order of the music is preset (regulated) in a rearrangement determination table 222bb (see FIG. 123), which will be described later.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 119 and 120, a specific example of rearranging the playback order of music will be described. FIG. 119 shows the transition of the state of the jackpot and the number of parts of the song when it is determined that the order of playback is to be rearranged at the rearrangement determination timing 1 (at the start of the interval period immediately before the final round) during the playback of the song A. An example of a correspondence relationship with transition is shown.

As shown in FIG. 119, during one round of the jackpot, a song for song selection dedicated to the song selection period is reproduced as a song. When the player selects the song A during this time, the playback of the song A (that is, the intro part of the song A) is started at the end of the first round of the jackpot. After that, in the order of arrangement of the music data group corresponding to music A (the order of the values of the music pointer 303b associated with each data), from the first part of the A melody to the part immediately before the outro part. is played in a loop.

While the loop reproduction continues, at the rearrangement determination timing 1, it is judged whether or not the reproduction order of the music data is rearranged. FIG. 119 exemplifies a case where the A melody 1 portion is being reproduced at the time when the recombination determination timing 1 comes. As shown in the middle of FIG. 119 (transition of music before recombination), when the A melody 1 part is being played at the recombination determination timing 1, the B melody 1 part is played by the end of the final round of the jackpot. The final round is likely to end during playback. That is, there is a high possibility that the reproduction of the song A ends before reaching the chorus 1, which is the part (part) that the player most likely wants to listen to. Therefore, in this case, when the recombination determination timing 1 comes, the reproduction order of the music data group is rearranged, and the reproduction order is set so that the chorus 1 part is likely to be reproduced by the end of the final round.

More specifically, as shown in the lower part of FIG. 119 (transition of the music after recombination), when the reproduction of the A melody 1 part that was being played at the time when the recombination was decided, the original (Fig. 119 The transition before recombination shown in the middle row) is skipped, and the chorus 1 is played back. More specifically, the pointer value of the song pointer 303b is updated to a value corresponding to the chorus 1 portion (chorus 1 data) of the song A, and the chorus 1 data is set to be reproduced. As a result, in the final round, the player can listen to the chorus part, which is the most exciting part of the music, so that the player's mood is lifted and the player feels a greater sense of satisfaction with the big win. can be done.

After rearranging the playback order and setting the playback of chorus 1, the playback continues in the order of the value of the music pointer 303b. That is, as shown in the lower part of FIG. 119, if the jackpot end timing does not come during the reproduction of the chorus 1 portion, the interlude portion (interlude data) is reproduced as usual.

Next, with reference to FIG. 120, a specific example of the case where it is determined that the order of reproduction of the music is to be rearranged at the rearrangement judgment timing 2 (that is, the start timing of the final round of the jackpot) will be described. In the example of FIG. 120, the B melody 1 is being reproduced at the timing 1 of recombination determination, and the reproduction of the melody 1 is completed before the recombination determination timing 2 is reached, and the chorus 1 is played. A case of shifting to playback is illustrated.

In the example of FIG. 120, at the rearrangement determination timing 1, the B melody part 1 is being reproduced, and the next part to be reproduced is the chorus 1 part. There is a high possibility that one part will be played. Therefore, at the rearrangement determination timing 1, the rearrangement of the playback order is avoided. Also, in the example of FIG. 120, at the recombination determination timing 2, the chorus 1 portion is being reproduced. In this case, as shown in the middle part of FIG. 120, if the reproduction is continued without rearranging the reproduction order, the reproduction of the chorus 1 part ends in the middle of the final round, and the next part of the chorus 1 part is played for a relatively long period of time. is played back. Since the interlude part has a relatively gentle melody, there is a possibility that the long reproduction of the interlude part in the final round may spoil the player's interest in the jackpot game. Therefore, if the chorus 1 part is already being played at the recombination determination timing 2, the playback order of the music is rearranged, and as shown in the lower part of FIG. ) is set to play. With this configuration, the chorus, which is the most exciting part of the song, can be played back for a longer period of time in the final round of the jackpot. Therefore, it is possible to improve the player's interest in the game in the final round of the jackpot.

Thus, in the second control example, at a predetermined timing in the jackpot (at the start of the interval period immediately before the final round and at the start of the final round), the progress of the music (current playback position in the music) Accordingly, it is configured to determine whether or not to rearrange the playback order of the music pieces. In the final round of the jackpot, if there is a possibility that the chorus part will not be played at all or the playback time will be shortened, the chorus part (chorus 1 part, chorus part 2, etc.) will be played longer during the final round. , the reproduction order of the music data is rearranged (at least the music data to be reproduced next is changed from a predetermined order (the order of the value of the music pointer 303b)). In other words, based on the progress of the jackpot and the playback position of the music, the playback order of the music data is dynamically changed so that the chorus is played longer during the predetermined period (final round) of the jackpot. It is configured to allow By configuring in this way, it is possible to let the player listen to the most exciting chorus of the song for a longer period of time in the final round of the big win. Therefore, it is possible to make the player feel a greater sense of exhilaration just before the end of the big win, so that the player's motivation for the game can be enhanced.

Also, in the case of a jackpot with a relatively small number of rounds (for example, jackpot B with 5 rounds), there is a possibility that all the rounds will end without reaching the chorus. In particular, if the player cannot listen to the chorus part (chorus 1 part, chorus part 2, etc.) and the jackpot ends even though the player displays the music selection menu screen and plays back the music that he/she voluntarily selects, There is a possibility that the player will be greatly disappointed. This is because when the player voluntarily selects a song, there is a high possibility that the player is looking forward to listening to the chorus of the selected song. On the other hand, in the second control example, it is possible to more reliably reproduce the chorus part at least once until the final round of the jackpot ends. Therefore, the player who selected the music can be satisfied.

Here, as a method for reproducing the chorus part in the final round of the jackpot, it is possible to set the reproduction of the music data corresponding to the chorus part at the start of the final round regardless of the progress of the music. . However, with this method, there is a risk that the connection of the songs will become unnatural before and after the start of the final round (that is, before and after switching to the reproduction of the chorus). That is, there is a high possibility that the reproduction of the chorus portion will suddenly start in the middle of another part. Therefore, in this method, there is a possibility that the player will feel uncomfortable with the music that is being played back, and suspect that the pachinko machine 10 is broken or the like. That is, it becomes doubtful whether the pachinko machine 10 is operating normally, and there is a possibility that the player may feel uneasy about the game. On the other hand, in the second control example, since the reproduction order of the music data is rearranged (changed) for each part (separation unit of melody (musical tone)), when the reproduction order is rearranged, a sense of incongruity may occur. A piece of music can be reproduced in a mode with few sounds. Therefore, it is possible to allow the player to play the game during the big win with peace of mind.

In the second control example, it is determined whether or not to rearrange the playback order of the music data at the start of the interval period immediately before the final round of the jackpot and at the start of the final round. It is not limited to this. The number and timing of determining whether or not to rearrange the playback order can be determined arbitrarily.

In addition, in the second control example, the playback order of the music data is rearranged so that the chorus is played longer during the final round. The round can be set arbitrarily.

Next, with reference to FIG. 121, description will be given of the relationship between the transition of the jackpot state and the transition of the music part when the start timing of the ending effect is delayed. FIG. 121 is a diagram exemplifying a case where, as a result of rearrangement of the reproduction order of music data, the chorus 2 part is being reproduced at the end of the final round.

The top row of FIG. 121 shows the transition of the state of the jackpot, the second row from the top shows the transition of the music assuming that the start of the ending effect was not delayed, and the second row from the bottom shows the chorus part. Shows the transition of the music when the start timing of the ending effect is delayed in order to reproduce longer, and the bottom shows the transition of the effect mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81 during the big win. there is

As shown in the second row from the top of FIG. 121, if the delay control of the ending effect is not performed, the music reproduction is interrupted during the reproduction of the chorus 2 portion, and the ending music is reproduced. In this case, the player may be dissatisfied with the impression that a different melody has suddenly started while listening to the most exciting part. Therefore, in this second control example, when the chorus part (chorus 1 part, chorus 2 part, etc.) is being played at the end timing of the final round of the jackpot, the second diagram from the bottom in FIG. , the timing at which the ending song is reproduced is delayed so that the chorus portion is continued to be reproduced for a longer period of time. Along with this, as for the presentation mode, the presentation mode displayed during the big win is continued as it is. That is, even though the ending period has actually started, the effect is such that the jackpot continues until a predetermined period (for example, 4 seconds maximum) elapses after the end of the final round. It is configured to be set to a mode (display mode, voice mode).

By configuring in this way, the possibility of ending the music during the reproduction of the chorus is reduced, and the chorus, which is the most exciting part of the music, can be played for a longer period of time before the start of the ending effect of the big win. A portion can be played by the player. Therefore, it is possible to make the player who has selected the music feel more satisfied.

<Electrical Configuration in Second Control Example>
Next, the electrical configuration in this second control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 122 to 126. FIG. First, referring to FIG. 122(a), the configuration of the ROM 222 provided in the audio lamp control device 113 in the second control example will be described. FIG. 122(a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM 222 in the second embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 122(a), the configuration of the ROM 222 in the second control example is different from the configuration of the ROM 222 in the above-described first control example (see FIG. 104(a)). 222ba, a rearrangement determination table 222bb, and an ending effect selection table 222bc are added.

The music data group type storage area 222ba is a data table that stores the configuration of the music data group corresponding to each music. In the music data group type storage area 222ba, at least information indicating the reproduction order and reproduction time of each music data constituting the music data group is defined for each music classification. In the first control example described above, in the sound lamp control device 113, the type of music to be played back and the process of determining the music (whether the music is selected by random lottery or selected by the player) ) is notified to the audio output device 226, after that, the audio output device 226 performs loop reproduction of the music data in a predetermined order. In other words, the audio lamp control device 113 need not grasp the progress of the music being reproduced. On the other hand, in the second control example, the playback order of the music data is rearranged according to the progress of the jackpot and the playback position of the music (the type of music data being played), and the ending timing is changed. delay control must be performed. For this reason, the audio lamp control device 113 also needs to know the reproduction position of the music (the type of music data currently being reproduced) and the like. Therefore, in the second control example, the music data group storage area 222ba is defined, and the composition of the music data group set in the audio output device 226 and the data for the music being used (played) are stored. The type of data, the type of music data to be reproduced next, and the like can be grasped.

The rearrangement determination table 222bb is a data table that is referred to for determining whether or not to rearrange the reproduction order of music data when either of the rearrangement determination timings 1 and 2 for a big win has come. In this recombination determination table 222bb, there are determined results of whether or not to recombine according to the type of music data set to be reproduced at present, and the determination result of whether or not to recombine data for music to be set to be reproduced next when it is determined to be recombined. type is specified. Details of the rearrangement determination table 222bb will be described with reference to FIG.

FIG. 123 is a diagram showing the defined contents of the rearrangement determination table 222bb. As shown in FIG. 123, the recombination determination table 222bb contains, for each type of music, the type of music data that is being reproduced at the time of recombination determination timing, and the determination result (playback order). (whether or not to determine that it is rearranged) are defined in association with each other.

More specifically, for example, the first part of the A melody in the song A is defined as being associated with "acceptable" as the determination result, and the type of the song data to be played next is "chorus". 1” are defined in association with each other. Therefore, when it is time to determine the recombination during playback of melody 1, chorus 1 is played back after playback of melody 1 is completed (playback of melody 1 is skipped). Thus, the reproduction order of the music data is rearranged. In addition, "impossible" is defined as a determination result in association with the B melody 1 portion. Therefore, even if the recombination determination timing comes while the B melody is being reproduced, the reproduction order of the music data cannot be changed. Therefore, after the reproduction of the B melody 1 portion is completed, the chorus 1 portion is reproduced as usual.

Similarly, as shown in FIG. 123, the chorus 1 part, the interlude part, and the A melody 2 part of the song A are defined as being associated with "acceptable" as the determination result. As the type of music data to be reproduced, "chorus 2" is associated and defined. Therefore, if the recombination determination timing comes while the chorus 1, interlude, or verse 2 is being reproduced, chorus 2 will be played after the chorus 1, interlude, or verse 2 has been reproduced. The playback order of the music data is rearranged so that the part is played back. In addition, for the B melody 2 portion of the song A, "impossible" is defined as a determination result in association with it. Therefore, after the reproduction of the B melody 2 portion is completed, the chorus 2 portion is reproduced as usual. Furthermore, for the chorus 2 part of the song A, "acceptable" is defined in correspondence as the determination result, and "chorus 1" is defined in correspondence as the type of music data to be reproduced next. It is Therefore, when the recombination determination timing comes during reproduction of the chorus 2 part, the reproduction order of the music data is rearranged so that the chorus 2 part is reproduced after the reproduction of the chorus 2 part is completed.

Similarly, for the song B and subsequent songs, recombination determination is performed while a playback position relatively far from the chorus part set multiple times in the song (a playback position where one part or more is away) is being played. The data in the recombination determination table 222bb is defined so that when the timing comes, the most recent chorus is played after the part currently being played ends. By configuring in this way, the chorus part can be reproduced more reliably in the final round, so that the big win can be finished after the most exciting part of the music is reproduced. Therefore, the player's interest in the jackpot game can be improved.

Returning to FIG. 122(a), the description continues. The ending effect selection table 222bc is a data table that defines the mode of the ending effect for each timing when the ending effect is started. As described above, in the second control example, when the end timing of the final round comes while the chorus part (chorus 1 part, chorus part 2, etc.) is being reproduced, the chorus part is continued to be reproduced, and the ending effect is performed. It is configured to delay the start. Here, even if the start timing of the ending effect is delayed, the ending period of the jackpot is constant, so the execution period of the ending effect is shortened by the amount of delay. In the second control example, the ending effect selection table 222bc defines a plurality of ending effects that can be selected according to the execution period of the ending effect. Details of the ending effect selection table 222bc will be described with reference to FIG.

FIG. 124 is a diagram showing the specified contents of the ending effect selection table 222bc. As shown in FIG. 124, in the ending effect selection table 222bc, selections are made for each range of the remaining time (value of the remaining playback time timer 223bb) until playback of the chorus portion ends at the end of the final round of the jackpot. The type of ending effect to be performed is defined in association with each other. Note that the remaining reproduction time timer 223bb is set with a timer value corresponding to the reproduction time of the music data at the timing when the reproduction of the music data is set, and the value is decremented by 1 periodically (every millisecond). It is configured to be

As shown in FIG. 124, in the range where the value (T) of the remaining playback time timer 223bb is 1000 or less (that is, the remaining playback time of the hook part at the end of the final round is 1 second or less), normal An ending effect (normal ending) of the mode is associated and defined. This normal ending effect is composed of a effect time of 4 seconds. That is, the period from the start of the ending period to the end of the ending effect (the sum of the remaining reproduction time of the chorus part and the normal ending effect period) is longer than 4 seconds and 5 seconds or less. is set to be On the other hand, the ending period of the jackpot is set to 5 seconds. That is, there is a gap of about one second at the maximum between the end of the normal ending effect and the end of the ending period. In this control example, an image (result image) that informs the number of prize balls won by the player during the jackpot is displayed during the ending effect. During this period, the result image is continuously displayed as a still image. As a result, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the player from having the impression that the performance is interrupted during the period from the end of the ending performance to the actual end of the ending period. .

If the value (T) of the remaining playback time timer 223bb is greater than 1000 and 2000 or less (i.e., the remaining playback time of the hook portion at the end of the final round is longer than 1 second and is 2 seconds or less). On the other hand, as a type of ending effect, a shortened ending 1 with a effect time of 3 seconds is associated and defined. That is, the sum of the remaining reproduction time of the chorus part and the presentation time of the ending presentation is set to be longer than 4 seconds and 5 seconds or less. Therefore, also in this case, the period from the end of the ending effect to the actual end of the ending period can be reduced to one second or less. Therefore, the period in which the result image continues to be displayed as a still image can be shortened, so that it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable with the display contents of the third symbol display device 81.例文帳に追加

Also, the value (T) of the remaining playback time timer 223bb is greater than 2000 and 3000 or less (that is, the remaining playback time of the chorus at the end of the final round is longer than 2 seconds and is 3 seconds or less). A shortened ending 2 with an effect time of 2 seconds is associated with the range and defined as the type of ending effect. That is, in the same way as when the normal ending or the shortened ending 1 is set, the sum of the remaining reproduction time of the chorus part and the effect time of the ending effect is longer than 4 seconds and less than or equal to 5 seconds. set. In addition, a shortened ending 3 with a rendering time of 1 second is defined as a type of ending rendering in association with a range in which the value (T) of the remaining reproduction time timer 223bb is greater than 3000. Here, in the second control example, in order to secure the effect time of the ending effect, the start timing of the ending effect is not delayed by 4 seconds or more. That is, when the chorus part continues to be reproduced even after 4 seconds have passed since the ending period started, the reproduction of the music (jackpot performance) is stopped and the ending performance is executed. Therefore, when the shortened ending 3 is set, the playback time of the chorus portion can be limited to between 3 and 4 seconds. Therefore, as in the case where the normal ending or the shortened endings 1 and 2 are set, the sum of the reproduction time of the chorus part and the production time of the ending production is longer than 4 seconds and is 5 seconds or less. set.

As described above, in the second control example, when the ending timing of the final round is reached, the start timing of the ending effect is delayed when the chorus portion is being reproduced. Then, according to the length of the period from the start of the ending period to the end of the reproduction of the chorus part (or the reproduction of the chorus part is stopped), the mode of the ending effect is changed, and the remaining time of the chorus part. Regardless, the ending effect can be finished before the ending period ends. With this configuration, it is possible to allow the player to listen to the chorus, which is the most exciting part of the music, for a longer period of time, and to perform an ending effect that does not cause a sense of incompatibility.

Next, with reference to FIG. 122(b), the configuration of the RAM 223 of the audio ramp control device 113 in the second control example will be described. FIG. 122(b) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 223. As shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 122(b), the configuration of the RAM 223 in the second control example differs from the configuration of the RAM 223 in the first control example (see FIG. 104(b)) in that a reproduction data type storage area 223ba and a The difference is that a reproduction time timer 223bb, an ending delay flag 223bc, a music type storage area 223bd, an ending type storage area 223be, and a delay period timer 223bf are added. Since other configurations are the same as those of the RAM 223 in the first control example described above, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The reproduction data type storage area 223ba is a storage area for storing data indicating the type of music data being reproduced by the audio output device 226. FIG. During the music reproduction period of the jackpot, the reproduction position of the music is specified based on the data stored in the reproduction data type storage area 223ba, and when the recombination determination timing comes, the reproduction order of the music data is determined. You can decide whether to replace or not. This reproduction data type storage area 223ba is updated to a value corresponding to the type of music data indicated by the command each time a music command is received from the audio output device 226 (see S5701 in FIG. 135). Here, when the playback time of one piece of music data ends in the audio output device 226 and the playback of the next piece of music data is set, the music command specifies the type of music data to be set by the audio lamp control device. This is a command for notifying to 113. With this command for music, the type of music data being reproduced by the audio output device 113 can be accurately grasped on the audio lamp control device 113 side.

The remaining reproduction time timer 223bb is a timer for measuring the remaining reproduction time of the music data. This remaining playback time timer 223bb is updated periodically (for example, every 1 millisecond). At the end timing of the final round of the jackpot, if the chorus portion is being reproduced, the remaining reproduction time of the chorus portion is specified by referring to the timer value of the remaining reproduction time timer 223bb. The effect type of the ending effect is determined according to the remaining reproduction time and the specified contents of the ending effect selection table 222bc (see S5603 in FIG. 134).

The ending delay flag 223bc is a flag indicating whether or not it is a period during which the execution start of the ending effect is delayed. If this ending delay flag 223bc is ON, it indicates that it is a period (ending delay period) from when the delay of the start of the ending effect is determined until the ending effect is started. On the other hand, if the ending delay flag 223bc is off, it indicates that it is not the ending delay period. This ending delay flag 223bc is set to ON when the chorus portion is being reproduced when the ending command is received (S5605 in FIG. 134). Also, when the ending delay period has elapsed and the start of the ending effect is set, it is set to OFF (see S5306 in FIG. 129).

The music type storage area 223bd is a storage area for storing data according to the type of music selected by the player during the music selection period set in the first round of the jackpot. This music type storage area 223bd stores data corresponding to one music piece (item) determined by random lottery at the start of the music selection period (that is, the first round of the jackpot) (S5221 in FIG. 132). reference). Also, when a song is selected by the player during the song selection period, data corresponding to the selected song is overwritten (see S5121 in FIG. 128). At the end of the song selection period (the first round of the jackpot), a selected song command for voice is set to notify playback of a song corresponding to the data stored in the song type storage area 223bd (S5507 in FIG. 133). reference).

The ending type storage area 223be stores the effect type of the ending effect determined according to the ending effect selection table 222bc and the timer value of the remaining reproduction time timer 223bb as the ending delay when the start timing of the ending effect is delayed. This is a storage area for storing during the period. In the ending type storage area 223be, when the ending command is received, the chorus part is being reproduced, the delay of the start of the ending effect is determined, and when the effect type of the ending effect is determined, the determination is performed. Data corresponding to the produced effect type is stored (see S5604 in FIG. 134). When the ending delay period has elapsed, the start of the ending effect corresponding to the data stored in the ending type storage area 223be is set (see S5305 in FIG. 129).

The delay period timer 223bf is a timer for measuring the elapsed time (the length of the ending delay period) after the delay of the start of the ending effect is determined. This delay period timer 223bf is updated periodically (eg, every 1 millisecond) during the ending delay period. Based on the value of the delay period timer 223bf, if it is determined that the length of the ending delay period has reached 4 seconds before the end of the reproduction of the hook part, the ending delay period is terminated. An ending effect is started (see S5303 in FIG. 129).

Next, the configuration of the audio output device 226 in this second control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 125 and 126. FIG. First, FIG. 125 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the audio output device 226 in this second control example. As shown in FIG. 125, the configuration of the audio output device 226 in the second control example is different from the configuration of the audio output device 226 in the first control example (see FIG. 106), instead of the input port 305, the input/output port 311 is provided, the bus line 312 is provided instead of the bus line 304, and the configuration of the RAM 303 is partially changed.

The reason why the input/output port 311 and the bus line 312 are changed is to enable the command to be output from the MPU 301 of the audio output device 226 to the audio lamp control device 113 . That is, the input/output port 311 and the bus line 312 are configured to be able to communicate bi-directionally from the audio lamp controller 113 to the MPU 301 and from the MPU 301 to the audio lamp controller 113 .

Next, the configuration of the RAM 303 of the audio output device 226 in this second control example will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 126 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 303. As shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 126, the RAM 303 in the second control example has a rearrangement standby flag 303e and a rearrangement type storage area 303f added to the configuration of the RAM 303 in the first control example (see FIG. 107(b)). It is different in that Since other configurations are the same as those of the first control example described above, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The rearrangement standby flag 303e is a flag indicating a period from when rearrangement of the reproduction order of the music data is notified by the sound lamp control device 113 to when the rearrangement of the order is actually set. The type storage area 303f is a storage area for storing data corresponding to the type notified from the sound lamp control device 113 as the type of music data to be set to be reproduced first after rearranging the reproduction order. . When an audio rearrangement command for notifying rearrangement of the reproduction order of music data is received from the sound lamp control device 113, data corresponding to the type of music data notified by the command is stored in the rearrangement type storage area 303f. , and the rearrangement standby flag 303e is set to ON (see S9402 and S9403 in FIG. 138). When the playback time of the song data being played has passed while the recombination standby flag 303e is on, the song data corresponding to the data stored in the recombination type storage area 303f is selected as the next song data to be played back. It is set (see S9313 in FIG. 139).

<Regarding control processing of the sound ramp control device in the second control example>
Next, various control processes executed by the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 in the second control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 127 to 135. FIG. First, with reference to FIG. 127, main processing 9 executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the second control example will be described. This main process 9 is a process executed in place of the main process 8 (see FIG. 110) in the first control example.

S4101 to S4111 and S4113 to S4118 of the main process 9 (see FIG. 127) in the second control example correspond to S4101 to S4111 and S4101 to S4111 of the main process 8 (see FIG. 110) in the first control example, respectively. The same processing as each processing of S4113 to S4118 is executed.

In addition, in the main process 9 (see FIG. 127) in the second control example, when the rendering update process of S4111 ends, the operation detection process 9 is executed instead of the operation detection process (see FIG. 111) in the first control example. (S4151). This operation detection process 9 (S4151) monitors the operation (pressing) of the operation button 230, similarly to the operation detection process (see FIG. 111) in the first control example, and performs control corresponding to the detection of the operation. It is a process for execution. This operation detection process 9 (S4151) will be described later with reference to FIG.

When the operation detection process 9 (S4151) ends, next, in the period during which the delay of the start of the ending effect is set (ending delay period), the ending effect for determining whether or not to start the ending effect. Start determination processing is executed (S4152). Details of the ending effect start determination process (S4152) will be described later with reference to FIG.

When the ending effect start determination process (S4152) ends, command determination process 9 is executed (S4153) instead of command determination process 8 (see FIG. 112) in the first control example, and the process proceeds to S4113. In this command determination process 9 (S4153), the hit-related process 9 (S4361) is executed instead of the hit-related process 8 (see FIG. 114) in the command determination process 8 (see FIG. 112) in the first control example. Since they are the same except for the point that they are the same, illustration thereof is omitted.

Next, with reference to FIG. 128, details of the operation detection process 9 (S4151) described above will be described. FIG. 128 is a flowchart showing operation detection processing 9 (S4151) in the second control example. This operation detection process 9 (S4151) is, as described above, a process executed in place of the operation detection process (see FIG. 111) in the first control example. This is a process for monitoring the operation (pressing) on the button 230 and executing the corresponding control when the operation is detected.

S5101 to S5106 and S5109 to S5111 of the operation detection process 9 (see FIG. 128) in the second control example correspond to S5101 to S5106 and S5106 of the operation detection process (see FIG. 111) in the first control example. And the same processing as each of the processing of S5109 to S5111 is executed. Further, in the operation detection process 9 in the second control example, if it is determined in the process of S5106 that an operation on the center button CB has been detected (S5106: Yes), the music piece corresponding to the current value of the menu position pointer 223ab is detected. (Items currently arranged in the music selection area of the music selection menu screen) are stored in the music type storage area 223bd (S5121), and the process proceeds to S5109.

With this operation detection process 9 (see FIG. 128), the arrangement of items on the music selection menu screen can be changed according to the details of the player's operation of the operation buttons 230, and the determination operation by the player during the music selection period. When (the operation of pressing the center button CB while the music selection menu screen is displayed) is performed, the music (music) arranged in the music selection area is set to be loop-reproduced during the music reproduction period. be able to.

Next, details of the ending effect start determination process (S4152) described above will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. This ending effect start determination process (S4152) is, as described above, a process for determining whether or not to start the ending effect in the ending delay period.

In the ending effect start determination process (see FIG. 129), first, it is determined whether or not the ending delay flag 223bc is on (S5301). This means that it is not the delay period, and since there is no possibility of setting the start of the ending effect, the processing is terminated as it is. On the other hand, in the process of S5301, if it is determined that the ending delay flag 223bc is ON (S5301: Yes), it means that it is the ending delay period. A process for determining whether or not is executed.

Specifically, first, it is determined whether the value of the remaining reproduction time timer 223bb is 0 (S5302). In the process of S5302, if it is determined that the value of the remaining playback time timer 223bb is not 0 (that is, is 1 or more) (S5302: No), it means that the playback of the chorus of the music has not ended. Therefore, next, it is determined whether the value of the delay period timer 223bf is 4000 or more (S5303). That is, it is determined whether four seconds or more have passed since the start of the ending effect was delayed. In the process of S5303, if it is determined that the value of the delay period timer 223bf is not 4000 or more (less than 4000) (S5303: No), the ending delay period is continued (reproduction of the hook part of the music is continued). Therefore, this process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, in the processing of S5303, when it is determined that the value of the delay period timer 223bf is 4000 or more (S5303: Yes), the processing of S5304 to S5306 for setting the start of the ending effect is executed. Also, in the process of S5302, if it is determined that the value of the remaining playback time timer 223bb is 0 (that is, the playback time of the chorus part has ended) (S5302: Yes), the process proceeds to S5304 to produce an ending effect. set the start of

In the process of S5304, the effect type of the ending effect corresponding to the data stored in the ending type storage area 223be (either normal ending or shortened ending 1 to 3) is specified (S5304), and the specified effect type is specified. A display ending command and an audio ending command are set for executing the ending effect (S5305). Then, the end of the ending delay period is set by setting the ending delay flag 223bc to OFF (S5306), and this processing ends.

Through this ending effect start determination processing (see FIG. 129), while the ending delay period is set, the music playback status (whether or not the chorus portion has been played back) and the length of the ending delay period are determined. You can set the start of the ending production at an appropriate timing.

Next, with reference to FIG. 130, the details of the win-related process 9 (S4361) will be described. This hit-related process 9 (S4361) is a process that is executed instead of the hit-related process 8 (see FIG. 114) in the first control example. This is processing for executing control corresponding to the type of the command related to the win received from 110 .

Of this hit-related process 9 (S4361), S4401-S4407 and S4409 processes are the same as S4401-S4407 and S4409 of hit-related process 8 (see FIG. 114) in the first control example, respectively. Processing is performed. In addition, in the winning-related process 9 (S4361) in the second control example, if it is determined in the process of S4407 that the command received from the main controller 110 includes the number-of-rounds command (S4407: Yes ), a round number command process for performing control according to the number of rounds indicated by the round number command is executed (S4461), and this process ends. The details of this round number command process (S4461) will be described later with reference to FIG.

Also, in the hit-related process 9 (see FIG. 130) in the second control example, if it is determined in the process of S4407 that the command received from the main controller 110 does not include a round number command ( S4407: No), then it is determined whether or not an interval command indicating the start of the interval period has been received from main controller 110 (S4462). In the processing of S4462, if it is determined that an interval command has been received (S4462: Yes), interval command processing for performing control according to the type of interval (what round interval it is) is executed ( S4463), the process ends. Details of this interval command processing (S4463) will be described later with reference to FIG. On the other hand, in the process of S4462, if it is determined that the command received from the main controller 110 does not include an interval command (S4462: No), the process proceeds to S4409.

Further, in the winning-related process 9 (see FIG. 130) in the second control example, when it is determined in the process of S4409 that the ending command is included in the command received from the main controller 110 (S4409: If Yes), an ending command process for determining whether or not to delay the start of the ending effect is executed (S4464) according to the music playback status, and this process ends. The details of this ending command process (S4464) will be described later with reference to FIG.

On the other hand, in the process of S4409, if it is determined that the command received from the main controller 110 does not include an ending command (S4409: No), then the music command output from the audio controller 226 is received. (S4465), and if it is determined that a music command has been received (S4465: Yes), the reproduction data type storage area 223ba and the reproduction time are stored according to the type of music data indicated by the music command. Music command processing for updating the timer 223bb is executed (S4466), and this processing ends. Details of this music command processing (S4466) will be described later with reference to FIG. If it is determined in the process of S4465 that the music command has not been received (S4465: No), this process ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 131, details of the above-described round number command processing (S4461) will be described. In the round number command processing (S4461), first, a display round number command for notifying the display control device 114 of the round number indicated by the round number command is set (S5401), and then the round indicated by the round number command is set. It is determined whether the number is the number of rounds corresponding to the final round in the current jackpot (S5402).

In the processing of S5402, if it is determined that the round to be started this time is the final round (S5402: Yes), it is determined that the rearrangement determination timing 2 (timing for determining whether or not the order of music playback is to be rearranged) has come. Therefore, each process of S5403 to S5405 for determining whether or not to rearrange the reproduction order is executed. Specifically, the specified contents of the recombination determination table 222bb and the data stored in the reproduction data type storage area 223ba are compared (S5403), and the type of the music data currently being reproduced (the part being reproduced) is determined. , it is determined whether or not it is a type for which the reproduction order should be rearranged (S5404).

In the processing of S5404, if it is determined that the type of the music data being played is the type for which the playback order should be rearranged (S5404: Yes), the result of rearranging the playback order (for the song currently being played) A sound rearrangement command for notifying the type of music data to be set for reproduction next to the data is set (S5405), and this processing is terminated. The speech recombination command set here is output to the speech output device 226 in the command output processing of main processing 9 (see S4102 in FIG. 127). When the MPU 301 of the audio output device 226 receives the audio recombination command, it stores in the recombination type storage area 303f data indicating the recombination result notified by the command (the type of audio data to be reproduced next). Then, when the reproduction period of the music data currently being reproduced has passed, the reproduction of the rearranged music data is started. As a result, it is possible to more reliably reproduce the most exciting chorus part of the music until the end of the final round.

On the other hand, in the process of S5404, if it is determined that the data reproduction order should not be rearranged (S5404: No), the chorus is reproduced by the end of the final round even if the reproduction order is not rearranged. Since the possibility is high, the process of S5405 is skipped and the process ends.

Also, in the process of S5402, if it is determined that the number of rounds notified by the round number command is not the final round (S5402: No), then it is determined whether the number of rounds notified is the first round. It is determined (S5406). In the processing of S5406, if it is determined that the notified number of rounds is the first round (S5406: Yes), music selection period setting processing for setting the start of the music selection period is executed (S5407), and this processing is performed. exit. Details of this music selection period setting process (S5407) will be described later with reference to FIG. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S5406 that the notification is not the first round (S5406: No), the process of S5407 is skipped and the process ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 132, details of the music selection period setting process (S5407) described above will be described. This music selection period setting process determines the initial layout of the music selection menu screen in order to set the music selection period during which the player can select music (the music selection menu screen can be displayed). is the processing of That is, it is a process corresponding to the state command process (see FIG. 113) in the first control example. Since the music selection period setting process (S5407) and the state command process (see FIG. 113) in the first control example have much in common, the state command process (see FIG. 113) in the first control example is similar to the state command process (see FIG. 113). The explanation will focus on the points of difference.

S5203 to S5206 and S5208 to S5213 in the music selection period setting process (see FIG. 132) correspond to S5203 to S5206 and S5208 to S5213 in the state command process (see FIG. 113) in the first control example. The same processing as is performed.

Further, in the music selection period setting process (see FIG. 132) in the second control example, when the process of S5208 ends, data corresponding to the item (music) determined by random lottery in the process of S5205 is added to the music classification. The data is stored in the storage area 223bd (S5221), and the process proceeds to S5209. As described above, in the second control example, at the start of the music selection period (that is, the first round of the jackpot), the music determined by random lottery is not played, and the dedicated music for the music selection period is played. Because of this configuration, unlike the state command process in the first control example, the process of immediately playing back the music determined by lottery (the process of S5207) is not performed.

Also, in the music selection period setting process (see FIG. 132) in the second control example, in the process of S5210, the item layout storage area 223aa has already been stored in the storage area corresponding to the value "00H" of the menu position pointer 223ab. item has been specified again (S5210: Yes), set a voice command for instructing (notifying) the voice output device 226 to reproduce the song for the song selection period (S5222), The process proceeds to S5213.

Next, with reference to FIG. 133, details of the interval command processing (S4463) described above will be described. FIG. 133 is a flow chart showing this interval command processing (S4463). In the interval command process (S4463), first, a display interval command is set for setting an interval production in a mode corresponding to the finished round (S5501), and then the interval command received from the main controller 110 is the final It is determined whether or not the command indicates the interval immediately before the round (S5502).

In the processing of S5502, if it is determined that the command indicates the interval immediately before the final round (S5502: Yes), it means that the rearrangement determination timing 1 (timing for determining whether or not to rearrange the playback order of the songs) has come. Therefore, each process of S5503 to S5505 for determining whether or not to rearrange the reproduction order of the music data is executed. Specifically, the defined contents of the recombination determination table 222bb and the data stored in the reproduction data type storage area 223ba are compared (S5503), and the type of the music data currently being reproduced (the part being reproduced) is determined. , it is determined whether or not it is a type for which the playback order should be rearranged (S5504).

In the processing of S5504, if it is determined that the type of the music data being played is the type for which the playback order should be rearranged (S5504: Yes), the result of rearranging the playback order (for the song currently being played) A sound recombination command for notifying the type of music data to be set for reproduction next to the data is set (S5505), and this processing is terminated. The speech recombination command set here is output to the speech output device 226 in the command output processing of main processing 9 (see S4102 in FIG. 127). When the MPU 301 of the audio output device 226 receives the audio recombination command, it stores in the recombination type storage area 303f data indicating the recombination result notified by the command (the type of audio data to be reproduced next). Then, when the reproduction period of the music data currently being reproduced has passed, the reproduction of the rearranged music data is started. As a result, it is possible to more reliably reproduce the most exciting chorus part of the music until the end of the final round.

On the other hand, in the processing of S5504, if it is determined that the data reproduction order should not be rearranged (S5504: No), the chorus portion is reproduced by the end of the final round even if the reproduction order is not rearranged. Since the possibility is high, the processing of S5505 is skipped and the present processing ends.

Also, in the processing of S5502, if it is determined that the current interval command is not a command indicating the interval immediately before the final round (S5502: No), then the command indicating the interval set after the end of the first round is executed. It is determined whether there is (S5506). In the processing of S5506, if it is determined that the command indicates the interval after the end of one round (S5506: Yes), an instruction (notification) to reproduce the music corresponding to the data stored in the music type storage area 223bd is given. A music selection command for audio is set (S5507), and 1 is added to the data corresponding to the music selection frequency of the music set to be reproduced this time among the data in the music selection frequency storage area 223ac (S5508). Then, the music selection menu screen is set not to be displayed, and both the menu display flag 223ae and the music selection permission flag 223ad are set to off (S5509), and this processing ends. On the other hand, in the process of S5506, if it is determined that the current interval command is not a command indicating the interval after the end of the first round (S5506: No), each process of S5507 to S5509 is skipped, This process is terminated as it is.

Next, with reference to FIG. 134, details of the ending command process (S4464) described above will be described. This ending command process (S4464) is, as described above, a process for determining whether or not to delay the start of the ending effect according to the music reproduction status.

In the ending command process (see FIG. 134), first, data stored in the reproduction data type storage area 223ba (that is, data corresponding to the type of music data currently being reproduced) is read (S5601), and the read data is read. It is determined whether or not the data corresponds to the chorus portion (that is, whether the chorus portion is being reproduced) (S5602). In the processing of S5602, if it is determined that the data corresponding to the chorus portion has been read (S5602: Yes), each processing of S5603 to S5605 for delaying the start of the ending effect to make the reproduction time of the chorus portion longer. to run. Specifically, from the ending effect selection table 222bc (see FIG. 124), the effect type of the ending effect corresponding to the range to which the value of the remaining reproduction time timer 223bb belongs is selected (S5603).

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 124, when the value of the remaining playback time timer 223bb is in the range of 1000 or less (that is, the remaining playback time of the hook portion at the end of the final round is 1 second or less), , As the type of ending effect, a normal ending with a effect time of 4 seconds is selected, and the value of the remaining reproduction time timer 223bb is greater than 1000 and 2000 or less (that is, the remaining reproduction of the chorus part at the end of the final round) time is longer than 1 second and less than or equal to 2 seconds), the shortened ending 1 with the effect time of 3 seconds is selected as the type of ending effect, and the value of the remaining playback time timer 223bb is greater than 2000. and 3000 or less (that is, the remaining playback time of the chorus portion at the end of the final round is longer than 2 seconds and is 3 seconds or less), the ending effect type is 2 effects. If the second shortened ending 2 is selected and the value of the remaining playback time timer 223bb is greater than 3000 (that is, the remaining playback time of the chorus portion at the end of the final round is longer than 3 seconds), the ending effect As the type of , a shortened ending 3 with a rendering time of 1 second is selected (see FIG. 124).

When the processing of S5603 ends, then, the data corresponding to the ending effect selected in the processing of S5603 is stored in the ending type storage area 223be (S5604), the ending delay flag 223bc is set to ON (S5605), and this End the process.

By executing the processing of these S5603 to S5605, the start timing of the ending effect can be delayed, and the type of the ending effect to be executed after the ending delay period is set in advance in the ending type storage area 223be. can be done. As a result, an ending effect with an appropriate effect time (mode of effect) is set according to the length of the period from the start of the ending period to the end of the reproduction of the chorus (or the termination of the reproduction). be able to. Also, it is possible to let the player listen to the chorus part, which is the most exciting part of the music, for a longer period of time.

In the processing of S5602, if it is determined that the data read out from the reproduction data type storage area 223ba is data corresponding to a part other than the chorus (S5602: No), there is no need to delay the start timing of the ending effect. Then, the display ending command corresponding to the normal ending effect is set (S5606), and the voice ending command indicating the music corresponding to the normal ending effect is set (S5607), and this processing is terminated. Thus, when a part other than the chorus part is being reproduced at the start of the ending period (at the end of the final round), the normal ending performance can be executed simultaneously with the start of the ending period.

Next, with reference to FIG. 135, details of the music command processing (S4466) described above will be described. In this music command processing (S4466), first, data indicating the type of music data indicated by the music command output from the audio output device 226 (music data for which reproduction is set in the audio output device 226) is set to the reproduction data type. It stores in the storage area 223ba (S5701). Then, the timer value corresponding to the notified music data type is set in the remaining reproduction time timer 223bb (S5702), and this processing ends.

By executing this music command processing (S4466), the type of music data (the part being reproduced) being reproduced by the audio output device 226 and the reproduction time can be easily grasped on the audio lamp control device 113 side. be able to.

<Regarding control processing of the audio output device in the second control example>
Next, various control processes executed by the MPU 301 of the audio output device 226 in the second control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 136 to 139. FIG. First, with reference to FIG. 136, main processing 9 executed in the second control example in place of the main processing (see FIG. 115(a)) in the first control example will be described. FIG. 136 is a flow chart showing this main process 9. As shown in FIG.

In the main process 9 (see FIG. 136) in the second control example, each process of S9003 to S9007 is the same as each process of S9003 to S9007 in the main process (see FIG. 115(a)) in the first control example. Processing is performed. Further, in the main process 9 (see FIG. 136) in the second control example, when the process is started, first, various commands for the audio lamp control device 113 set by the processes of S9012 and S9013 are output by voice. A command output process for transmission to the lamp control device 113 is executed (S9011).

Next, instead of the command determination process (see FIG. 116) in the first control example, command determination process 9 is executed (S9012). This command determination process 9 (S9012) is a process for executing control according to the type of various commands received from the sound lamp control device 113, similar to the command determination process (see FIG. 116) in the first control example. be. The details of this command determination process 9 (S9012) will be described later with reference to FIG.

When the processing of S9012 ends, instead of the audio setting processing (see FIG. 117) in the first control example, audio setting processing 9 is executed (S9013), and the processing proceeds to S9003. Although the details will be described later with reference to FIG. 139, this audio setting process 9 (S9013) is similar to the audio setting process (see FIG. 117) in the first control example. and processing for setting switching of music data.

Next, with reference to FIG. 137, the details of the command determination process 9 (S9012) described above will be described. This command determination process 9 (S9012) is, as described above, a process executed in place of the command determination process (see FIG. 116) in the first control example.

Of the command determination process 9 (see FIG. 137) in the second control example, each process of S9201 to SS9214 is the same as each process of S9201 to SS9214 of the command determination process (see FIG. 116) in the first control example. Processing is performed. Further, in the command determination process 9 (see FIG. 137) in the second control example, it is determined in the process of S9209 that the command received from the audio lamp control device 113 does not include the audio lottery music command. If so (S9209: No), then it is determined whether or not the command received from the sound lamp control device 113 includes a command related to the winning song (S9221).

In the process of S9221, if it is determined that a command related to the song in the jackpot is included (S9221: Yes), the jackpot song-related process for executing control according to the command type is executed ( S9222), this process is terminated. The details of this jackpot music related process (S9222) will be described later with reference to FIG. Also, in the process of S9221, if it is determined that the command received from the sound lamp control device 113 does not include a command related to the song that is winning the jackpot (S9221: No), the process proceeds to S9214. .

Next, with reference to FIG. 138, details of the above-described jackpot music-related processing (S9222) will be described. In this jackpot music-related processing (S9222), first, it is determined whether or not the command received from the sound lamp control device 113 includes an audio recombination command (S9401). If so (S9401: Yes), the data in the recombination type storage area 303f is updated according to the recombination content notified by the command (the type of music data to be set to be reproduced next) (S9402). Next, by setting the recombination standby flag 303e to ON, it is indicated that the tune data to be played next to the tune data currently being played is to be recombinated (changed from the playback order according to the value of the tune pointer 303b). (S9403), this processing ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S9401, if it is determined that the command received from the sound lamp control device 113 does not include the sound recombination command (S9401: No), then the command received from the sound lamp control device 113 It is determined whether or not the command includes an audio ending command (S9404).

In the processing of S9404, if it is determined that an audio ending command is included (S9404: Yes), the reproduction of the song currently being played is terminated (S9405), and the type of ending notified by the audio ending command is played. 9406), and terminates this process. On the other hand, in the process of S9404, if it is determined that the command received from the audio lamp control device 113 does not include an audio ending command (S9404: No), this process ends.

Next, details of the above-described audio setting process 9 (S9013) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 139 is a flow chart showing the sound setting process 9 (S9013). This sound setting process 9 (S9013) is, as described above, a process executed in place of the sound setting process (see FIG. 117) in the first control example.

Of the sound setting process 9 (see FIG. 139) in the second control example, each process of S9302 to S9308 is the same as each process of S9302 to S9308 of the sound setting process (see FIG. 117) in the first control example. Processing is performed. In addition, when the sound setting process 9 (see FIG. 139) in the second control example is started, first, it is determined whether or not the song (any of songs A to Z) that is a big hit is being played. (S9311), if the song that is winning the jackpot is being played back (S9311: Yes), the process proceeds to S9302. On the other hand, in the process of S9311, if it is determined that the song that is winning the jackpot is not being played (S9311: No), the process ends.

In addition, in the sound setting process 9 (see FIG. 139) in the second control example, when it is determined in the process of S9302 that it is time to end the reproduction of the music data being reproduced (S9302: Yes), It is determined whether or not the standby flag 303e is on (S9312). In the process of S9312, if it is determined that the recombination standby flag 303e is ON (S9312: Yes), the playback order different from the playback order predetermined for each song (the order specified by the sound lamp control device 113) is selected. ), the value corresponding to the data stored in the recombination type storage area 303f is updated by overwriting the value of the music pointer 303b (S9313). to S9307. Thereby, it is possible to set the reproduction of the rearranged music data.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S9312 that the recombination standby flag 303e is off (S9312: No), the process proceeds to S9303 to set playback in order of the value of the music pointer 303b.

As described above, the pachinko machine 10 according to the second control example is configured so that the player can select the song that is winning the jackpot. Then, the playback order of the music data is dynamically rearranged according to the progress of the jackpot so that the chorus is played as much as possible before the end of the final round. That is, at a predetermined timing during execution of the jackpot (for example, at the start of the interval period immediately before the final round or at the start of the final round), the type of music data currently set to be reproduced (A melody 1, B melody 1, chorus 1, etc.) is discriminated, and when a part far from the chorus is being reproduced, the reproduction order of each music data constituting the music data group is rearranged and then reproduced. The composition is changed so that the part is closer to the chorus part. As a result, the player can more reliably hear the chorus, which is the most exciting part of the music, before the end of the big win.

Here, as a method for reproducing the chorus part in the final round of the jackpot, it is possible to set the reproduction of the music data corresponding to the chorus part at the start of the final round regardless of the progress of the music. . However, with this method, there is a risk that the connection of the songs will become unnatural before and after the start of the final round (that is, before and after switching to the reproduction of the chorus). That is, there is a high possibility that the reproduction of the chorus portion will suddenly start in the middle of another part. Therefore, in this method, there is a possibility that the player will feel uncomfortable with the music that is being played back, and suspect that the pachinko machine 10 is broken or the like. That is, it becomes doubtful whether the pachinko machine 10 is operating normally, and there is a possibility that the player may feel uneasy about the game. On the other hand, in the second control example, since the reproduction order of the music data is rearranged (changed) for each part (separation unit of melody (musical tone)), when the reproduction order is rearranged, a sense of incongruity may occur. A piece of music can be reproduced in a mode with few sounds. Therefore, it is possible to allow the player to play the game during the big win with peace of mind.

In addition, in the second control example, when the chorus part (chorus 1, chorus 2, etc.) is being reproduced at the end of the final round of the jackpot, the start timing of the ending effect is delayed to make the chorus part longer. It is configured to continue playback of By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent, as much as possible, the climax of the song from being forcibly terminated due to the end of the big win. As a result, the player can enjoy the chorus part more, so that the player's interest in the game during the big win can be improved.

In the second control example, when the chorus part ends in the middle of the final round of the jackpot, the music is reproduced in the order of the music data without rearranging the reproduction order. It is not something that can be done. For example, when the reproduction of the chorus portion ends in the final round, the reproduction order of the music data may be rearranged so that the chorus portion is repeatedly reproduced. In this case, the music data for which reproduction has been completed may be reproduced again, or a chorus portion different from the chorus portion for which reproduction has been completed may be reproduced (for example, when the reproduction of the chorus 1 portion is completed, Then, the reproduction of the chorus 2 part is set, and when the reproduction of the chorus 2 part is completed, the reproduction of the chorus 1 part is set). By configuring in this way, it is possible to play back the climax part of the song, which is the most exciting, for a longer time in the final round, so that the player's interest in the final round can be further improved. In addition, instead of simply playing back the chorus repeatedly, the end timing of the chorus when the chorus is repeated is predicted in advance from the progress of the final round, etc., and is kept within the round period of the final round. The chorus may be repeated only when the prediction result indicates that the probability is high. By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent the ending period from being started immediately after setting the repetition of the chorus part, and the reproduction of the chorus part being interrupted due to the inability to listen to the chorus part sufficiently.

In the second control example, at the start of the interval period immediately before the final round of the jackpot and at the start of the final round, it is determined whether or not to rearrange the reproduction order of the music data. It is not limited. The number and timing of determining whether or not to rearrange the playback order can be determined arbitrarily.

In this second control example, the playback order of the music data is rearranged so that the chorus is played back longer during the final round, but the present invention is not limited to this. Can be set arbitrarily.

In the second control example, the playback order of music data is rearranged on a part-by-part basis. By performing the recombination in units smaller than the part unit, the recombination can be set more finely. In addition, by adopting a configuration in which the data are rearranged in units that are coarser than in units of parts, it is possible to simplify the configuration of the music data group.

In this second control example, when it is decided to rearrange the music data, after the reproduction time of the part being reproduced (music data) has elapsed, the parts in an order different from the original reproduction order are reproduced. However, it is not limited to this. For example, when the rearrangement is determined, the music data after the rearrangement may be reproduced immediately. By configuring in this way, in the audio output device 226, there is no need to provide a configuration (that is, the recombination type storage area 303f) for holding the type of music data after recombination until the timing of recombination. Therefore, the storage capacity can be reduced. Further, more simply, at the start of the final round of the jackpot, the reproduction of the chorus part may be started regardless of the reproduction position of the music. By configuring in this way, the processing can be simplified, so that the processing load on the audio lamp control device 113 and the audio output device 226 can be reduced.

In the second control example, the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 decides whether or not the music data can be recombined. In this case, the audio lamp control device 113 may be configured to notify the audio output device 226 only that the rearrangement determination timing has come. Then, the rearrangement discrimination table 222bb provided in the ROM 222 of the sound lamp control device 113 is transferred to the sound output device 226, and the sound lamp control device 113 notifies the sound output device 226 that the rearrangement judgment timing has come. Based on this, the MPU 301 of the audio output device 226 may be configured to determine whether or not to rearrange the reproduction order of the music data.

In this second control example, it is possible to rearrange the playback order of the music data according to the progress of the jackpot game and the playback position of the music, but the chorus is played back during the final round. The method for increasing the possibility of being targeted is not limited to this. For example, the music playback speed may be changed according to the progress of the game and the playback position of the music. That is, for example, at recombination determination timing 1, if the current playback position is far from the chorus (two or more parts apart), the song is played at a faster speed than usual (for example, 1.5 times speed), and if it is close (one part or less), play the music at a slower speed than usual (for example, 0.5 times speed) until the chorus is played. good.

In the second control example, both the progress of the jackpot and the progress of the music are determined, and it is determined whether or not to change (rearrange) the playback order of the music data. (whether or not it is time to start the final round) to determine whether or not to start playing music data corresponding to a specific part (chorus). Also, this control is not limited to the final round. For example, in a pachinko machine 10 configured to loop-reproduce one piece of music during the jackpot and reproduce the outro part of the piece of music as a sound for ending effect during the ending period, it is determined whether or not it is the start timing of the first round of the jackpot. However, if it is the start timing of the first round, the data corresponding to the intro part may be reproduced (reproduced from the beginning of the music) regardless of the situation of the music. It is also possible to determine whether or not it is time to start the ending period, and if it is the time to start the ending period, change the data to be reproduced to music data corresponding to the outro part regardless of the situation of the music. By configuring in this way, the music during the ending production can be set to the music of the outro part corresponding to the music played during the big win, so that the music played during the big win and during the ending production is unified. can make you feel. Also, this control can be applied to a case where an ending music piece is provided. That is, in the jackpot, it is determined whether or not it is the start timing of the ending period, and if it is the start timing of the ending period, regardless of the situation of the music, the music data corresponding to the dedicated music for the ending production is reproduced. It is good also as a structure which makes it start.

In this second control example, at the start timing of the ending period, the progress of the music (reproduction position) is determined, and if a specific reproduction range (chorus) is being reproduced, the start of the ending effect is delayed. However, the applicable control is not limited to the beginning of the ending period. It can be applied if the condition for playing another song is satisfied while playing the song. In this case, if the chorus portion is being reproduced, the start of the effect indicating that the variable probability state has ended may be delayed so that the chorus portion is reproduced for a longer period of time. In addition, a well-known clock device such as RTC (Real Time Clock) is included in the configuration, and when the time clocked by the clock device reaches a predetermined time, a specific performance different from usual (so-called island interlocking performance) can be executed. In a game machine with such specifications, the control in the second control example may be applied at the start of the island-linked effect. Specifically, when the chorus part (specific playback range) of the song is being played at the start timing of the specific effect, the chorus part (specific playback range) is played back by delaying the start timing of the specific effect. It may be configured to reproduce for a longer time. In addition, the object to which this control can be applied is not limited to an effect involving sound (an effect of reproducing music). It can also be applied to the display effects displayed on the third pattern display device 81 . Specifically, for example, when the time clocked by the timing device reaches a predetermined time during execution of the variable display, the island-linked effect is started according to the progress status (performance mode) of the variable effect being executed. may be configured to determine whether or not to delay the . Specifically, for example, during execution of a super ready-to-win effect with a relatively high expectation of a big win, the execution of the island-linked effect may be suppressed (delayed) until the end of the super ready-to-win effect. good. By configuring in this way, it is possible to appropriately notify the player of the result of the variable display effect. In addition, for example, a variable display effect or an effect during a big win is executed to prompt the user to operate a predetermined operation button, and when the operation is detected or the operation valid period elapses, the effect switches to a different effect mode. You may apply to the game machine which can perform production|presentation. That is, during the operation valid period, even if an operation on the operation button is detected, the switching of the presentation mode is delayed until the presentation during the operation valid period ends (the presentation mode is delayed until the operation valid period ends). may be configured to suppress the variation of ).

In the second control example, if the chorus part is being reproduced at the start of the ending period, the starting timing of the ending performance is delayed so that the chorus part is reproduced longer, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when the chorus portion is being played back at the start timing of the ending period, the playback of the chorus portion may be continued while the display mode for the ending effect is started as the display mode. By configuring in this way, it is not necessary to prepare a plurality of display modes corresponding to the remaining ending period as the ending effect, so that the number of display data tables for executing the ending effect can be reduced. can be done. Therefore, the storage capacity of the display control device 114 can be reduced.

In this second control example, when the chorus portion is being reproduced at the start of the ending period, the start of the ending effect is delayed for a maximum of 4 seconds, and after the delay period has passed, it ends within the range of the remaining ending period. Although it has been configured to execute the ending effect of the length to be performed, it is not limited to this. For example, the ending effect to be started after the delay period has elapsed may have the same content as the ending effect to be started without delay (normal ending effect). That is, the length until the ending period ends may be extended according to the delay period. By configuring in this way, it is not necessary to provide a plurality of types with different performance periods as the performance mode of the ending performance, so the number of display data tables for executing the ending performance can be reduced. Therefore, the storage capacity of the display control device 114 can be reduced. Also, instead of extending the ending period, only the ending effect may be continued even after the ending period ends. In this case, the variable display based on the held ball held at the end of the big win is executed in a less conspicuous manner compared to the ending effect (for example, reduced to the lower right of the third symbol display device 81). may be Even when configured in this manner, the number of display data tables for executing the ending effect can be reduced, so the storage capacity of the display control device 114 can be reduced.

<Third control example>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 in the third control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 140 to 150. FIG. The pachinko machine 10 in the above-described second control example is configured so that the player can select an arbitrary song (sound mode) as a song (sound effect type) to be reproduced (executed) during the jackpot. Then, in the final round of the jackpot, it is determined whether or not to switch the playback position of the music (rearrange the playback order of the music data) at a predetermined timing in the jackpot so that the chorus part is likely to be played back. was configured to run

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 in the third control example, a menu item called "random music selection" is added to the music selection menu screen, and the "random music selection" is selected by the player. , the music to be reproduced after the end of the first round (music selection period) is determined by a predetermined lottery. Also, in the "random music selection", a composition (audio effect) that is not displayed as an item on the music selection menu screen can be determined. More specifically, when "random song selection" is determined in the probability variable jackpot, a lottery is selected from among "song A" to "song Z" displayed on the song selection menu screen plus "song a". It is configured to determine the music to be reproduced during the jackpot. As a result, it is possible to select "random music selection" in anticipation that "music a", which cannot normally be listened to, will be determined.

In addition, in the third control example, as a kind of effect executed during the big win, during a predetermined period after the start of the big win (for example, until the end of the 5th round or the 10th round), the number of rounds of the big win is reported less than the original number of rounds, and when a predetermined period of time has elapsed, an effect of notifying the original number of rounds can be selected. By constructing the effect (pseudo small round effect) in which the number of rounds is pseudo-reported less than the original number of rounds, when a relatively small number of rounds is reported at the start of the jackpot (that is, the second When 5 rounds are reported with a jackpot of one special symbol, or when 10 rounds are reported with a jackpot of a second special symbol, more rounds are displayed after a predetermined period of time (see FIG. 10(a)). Expecting that the number (8 rounds or 16 rounds) will be announced, the game can be played until a predetermined period elapses. Further, in accordance with this, in the third control example, even in the pseudo final round during execution of the pseudo short round effect, the chorus part is played back by rearranging the playback order of the songs, as in the original final round. It is configured as follows. This makes it difficult to distinguish between the pseudo final round and the original final round from the parts of the music played during the pseudo final round. Therefore, until the simulated small-round effect ends (until the predetermined period elapses), it is possible to keep the player's expectations for the announcement of a larger number of rounds.

The pachinko machine 10 in the third control example differs in configuration from the pachinko machine 10 in the second control example in that the configurations of the ROM 222 and the RAM 223 in the sound lamp control device 113 are partially changed. Also, the control processing executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 is partially changed. Other configurations, various processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, other processes executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113, various processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, and the audio output device 226 The various processes executed by are the same as those of the pachinko machine 10 in the second control example. Hereinafter, the same elements as in the second control example are denoted by the same reference numerals, and illustration and description thereof are omitted.

First, with reference to FIGS. 140(a) and 140(b), the configuration of the music selection menu screen in the third control example will be described. FIG. 140(a) is a diagram showing an example of the display mode of the music area MR when the music selection menu screen is displayed for the first time after the start of the music selection period for the jackpot. As shown in FIG. 140(a), on the music selection menu screen in the third control example, a plurality of display areas (items RA1 to RA3, PA1, PA2 are arranged) in which music titles that can be selected by the player are displayed. In addition to the display area), a display area in which the item OA of "random music selection" is displayed is displayed on the right side of the plurality of images in which the music titles are displayed in the front view. The item OA of "random song selection" is an item in which one song is randomly selected by lottery from the songs (songs A to Z and song a) set in the pachinko machine 10. FIG.

When the music selection menu screen is first displayed, the item OA of ``random music selection'' is set to have a turned off appearance (similar to the items arranged in the display area other than the music selection area). A right image RG having a substantially triangular shape facing right is displayed between the plurality of images displaying the music titles and the item OA. With these display contents, the player can easily understand that "random music selection" can be selected by pressing (operating) the right button RB of the operation buttons 230. FIG.

FIG. 140(b) is a diagram showing a display mode of the music area MR when the player operates (presses) the right button RB while the music selection menu screen is displayed. As shown in FIG. 140(b), when the player presses the right button RB (when detecting that the output of the signal corresponding to the right button RB has become H), the item RA1 ( The image in which the characters “music A” are displayed) is switched to the appearance mode in which the item OA is lit up. That is, the appearance of the item PA1 arranged in the music selection area and the appearance of the item OA are switched. In addition, the right image RG becomes a luminous appearance. With these display contents, the player can easily understand that "random music selection" is determined when the center button CB is pressed.

When "random music selection" is determined, the most significant bit of the menu position pointer 223ab, which is composed of 1 byte (8 bits), is set to ON (1). As described above, in the first control example and the second control example, when determining the initial layout of the menu, for the value range "00H" (00000000B) to "19H" (00011001B) of the menu position pointer 223ab, "Music A" to "music Z" are associated one by one, and the corresponding relationship is stored in the item layout storage area 223aa. In other words, the lower 5 bits of the menu position pointer 223ab can specify the item arranged in the music selection area, and the upper 3 bits are empty bits. In this third control example, one bit (for example, the most significant bit) of the empty bits is defined as a bit corresponding to "random song selection". With this configuration, even if "random music selection" is selected, the item (music) arranged in the music selection area immediately before "random music selection" is selected can be displayed by the menu position pointer 223ab. can be easily determined from the lower 5 bits of . That is, even if the player presses the right button RB to select "random music selection" and then presses the left button LB again, the state immediately before selecting "random music selection" (the display mode of the music selection menu screen) ) can be easily reverted to In addition, when the player presses the center button CB while the music selection menu screen is displayed (the menu display flag 223ae is ON), the player can easily perform a "random selection" simply by checking the state of the most significant bit. It can be identified whether or not "music selection" has been determined.

Although the details will be described later, in the third control example, the player selected "random music selection" (the operation of the center button CB was detected while the item OA was lit up). In this case, if a specific condition is satisfied (for example, if the jackpot being executed is a variable probability jackpot), a special song that is not displayed as an item in the song selection menu screen (that is, cannot be selected by the player). (That is, one song is determined by lottery from a plurality of songs (songs A to Z and song a) including song a). As a result, a player who wants to listen to a special song can be made to actively select "random song selection".

Next, referring to FIGS. 141(a) and 141(b), a jackpot set with the above-described pseudo-small-round effect (a effect that makes it appear as if the number of rounds is smaller than the actual number of rounds corresponding to the type of jackpot). An example of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 in . In Figure 141 (a) and (b), when the number of rounds is 8 rounds jackpot A is won, and the number of rounds (5 rounds) less than the actual number is announced due to the setting of the pseudo small round effect. will be described as an example.

FIG. 141(a) is a diagram showing a pseudo final round display mode (fifth round) during execution of the pseudo small round effect. As shown in FIG. 141(a), in this third control example, during the jackpot, the progress of the jackpot (the current number of rounds, the maximum number of rounds, and the characters (characters "5/5 rounds") indicating the comparison of In addition, below the characters indicating the progress of the jackpot, there is a character indicating the winning status of the prize balls (the number of prize balls that have been paid out so far and the maximum number of prize balls that will be paid out in the current jackpot). (that is, the characters "500/500 GET") are displayed. Figure 141 (a), in the pseudo final round (fifth round), when it is detected that the game ball of the specified number (that is, 10) has entered the left specific winning hole 650 (that is, When the number of awarded balls reaches 500), the display of the number of awarded balls in the small area Ds1 is updated from "490/500 GET" to "500/500 GET". It shows the moment when

Further, as shown in FIG. 141(a), an image simulating a treasure chest is displayed in the main display area Dm. This suggests that the player can obtain a large amount of prize balls (profit). Also, in the music area MR, an image indicating the name of the music selected by the player during the music selection period and currently being reproduced is displayed. FIG. 141(a) exemplifies the case where the player selects "music Z" during the music selection period. is displayed.

FIG. 141(b) is a diagram showing a display mode immediately after the pseudo final round ends (that is, immediately after the display mode shown in FIG. 141(a)) in the jackpot where the pseudo small round effect is set. is. When the pseudo final round in the pseudo small round effect is completed, the effect of notifying the original number of rounds is executed. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 141(b), the characters displayed in the small area Ds1 are updated to characters indicating the original maximum number of rounds and the original maximum number of winning balls. That is, the characters "5/5 round" displayed on the upper side of the small area Ds1 are updated to the characters "5/8 round", and the characters "500/500" displayed on the lower side of the small area Ds1 are updated. "500 GET" is updated to "500/800 GET". In addition, an effect is executed in which the boy character 710 displayed in the small area Ds2 utters the line "still more!!". By these performance modes, the player can easily recognize that the jackpot will not end in 5 rounds but will continue until 8 rounds (pseudo small round performance has been executed). Therefore, it is possible to make the player recognize that more prize balls can be obtained, so that the player's interest can be improved. Hereinafter, for the sake of simplification of the description, an effect to notify that the jackpot will continue without ending, which is executed based on the end of the pseudo final round in the pseudo small rounds (see FIG. 141 (b)) This is referred to as "continuous production".

Although details will be described later, in the third control example, as in the second control example, in the final round of the jackpot, a predetermined At the timing (at the start of the interval immediately before the final round and at the start of the final round), it is determined whether or not to rearrange the reproduction order of the music data. In addition, in the third control example, even in the pseudo final round during execution of the pseudo short round effect, there is a possibility that the chorus part will be played by rearranging the playback order of the songs, as in the original final round. It is configured to be controlled to be higher. This makes it difficult to distinguish between the pseudo final round and the original final round from the parts of the music played during the pseudo final round. Therefore, until the simulated small-round effect ends (until the predetermined period elapses), it is possible to keep the player's expectations for the announcement of a larger number of rounds.

<Electrical configuration in the third control example>
Next, referring to FIG. 142(a), the configuration of the ROM 222 of the sound ramp control device 113 in the third control example will be described. FIG. 142(a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM 222. As shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 142(a), the ROM 222 in the third embodiment has a random music selection table 222ca and a pseudo-small round lottery table 222ca in contrast to the configuration of the ROM 222 in the second control example (see FIG. 122(a)). 222cb is added. Since other configurations are the same as those of the second control example described above, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The random music selection table 222ca is a data table referred to for determining one music when the player selects "random music selection". Details of the random music selection table 222ca will be described with reference to FIG.

FIG. 143 is a diagram showing the specified contents of the random music selection table 222ca. As shown in FIG. 143, the random music selection table 222ca indicates that the corresponding relationship between the music type and the value of the music lottery counter 223ca indicates the situation when the lottery is executed (the type of jackpot that was won and the jackpot that was announced). Type of pattern) is defined for each. Here, the music lottery counter 223ca is provided for selecting one music from the random music selection table 222ca, and is a random number counter whose value is updated within the range of "0 to 259".

As shown in FIG. 143, in the variation pattern production, the production mode in which the third symbols with odd numbers are aligned (that is, only in the case of the probability variable jackpot, the production mode selected at a rate of 40%). In the case of a probability variable jackpot (probability variable jackpot with odd number pattern notification), the value of the music lottery counter 223ca is in the range of “0 to 8” (range of 9 values of the music lottery counter 223ca) “Music A”. are defined in association with each other (see 222ca1 in FIG. 143). In addition, the value of the music lottery counter 223ca is defined to correspond to the range of "9 to 17" with "music B" (see 222ca2 in FIG. 143), and the value of the music lottery counter 223ca is defined to be in the range of "18 to 26". "Song C" is defined in association with the range (see 222ca3 in FIG. 143). Although omitted from the drawing, each song type of "song D" to "song Z" is defined in association with a range corresponding to nine values of the song lottery counter 223ca. Of the 260 values that the music lottery counter 223ca can take, nine music lottery counter 223ca values are defined in association with each of the music types "music A" to "music Z". , odd-numbered pattern announcement becomes a probability variable jackpot, and when "random song selection" is selected during the song selection period, the ratio of "song A" to "song Z" is about 3.5% (9/260 ).

In addition, as shown in FIG. 143, in the situation where the probability variation jackpot of the probability variation pattern notification is reached, the value of the music lottery counter 223ca is in the range of "234 to 259", a special music not displayed on the music selection menu screen is defined in association with "song a". Of the 260 values that can be taken by the music lottery counter 223ca, 26 values of "234 to 259" are associated with "music a". When the user selects "random music selection", the rate (probability) of determining "music a" is 10% (26/260) (see 222ca27 in FIG. 143).

On the other hand, in the variable pattern production, the production mode in which the third pattern with even numbers is aligned (that is, it is selected at a rate of 60% in the case of a probability variable jackpot, while the normal jackpot is 100% In the case of the probability variable jackpot (probability variable jackpot of even number design notification) notified by the production mode selected by the ratio), as shown in FIG. "Song A" is defined in association with the range of seven values of the lottery counter 223ca (see 222ca1 in FIG. 143). In addition, the value of the music lottery counter 223ca is defined to correspond to the range of "7 to 13" with "music B" (see 222ca2 in FIG. 143), and the value of the music lottery counter 223ca is defined to be in the range of "14 to 20". "Song C" is defined in association with the range (see 222ca3 in FIG. 143). Although omitted from the drawing, each song type of "song D" to "song Z" is defined in association with a range corresponding to seven values of the song lottery counter 223ca. Of the 260 values that the music lottery counter 223ca can take, seven music lottery counter 223ca values are defined in association with each of the music types "music A" to "music Z". , Even-numbered pattern announcement becomes a probability variable jackpot, and when "random song selection" is selected during the song selection period, the ratio of "song A" to "song Z" is about 2.7% (7/260 ).

In addition, as shown in FIG. 143, in the situation where the probability variable jackpot of the even number symbol notification has occurred, the value of the music lottery counter 223ca is in the range of "182 to 259", a special music that is not displayed on the music selection menu screen. is defined in association with "song a". Of the 260 values that the music lottery counter 223ca can take, the values associated with "music a" are 78 values "182 to 259". When the user selects "random music selection", the rate (probability) of determining "music a" is 30% (78/260) (see 222ca27 in FIG. 143). That is, the ratio of selecting "music a" when "random music selection" is selected is higher in the probability variable jackpot of the even number symbol notification than in the probability variable jackpot of the odd number symbol notification. Therefore, when a player who wants to listen to (reproduce) "song a" is notified of a big win by executing a variable display in which the third symbols with even numbers are displayed, the player will be more positive. It is possible to select "random song selection".

As shown in FIG. 143, for the normal jackpot, "music A" corresponds to the range of the value of the music lottery counter 223ca from "0 to 9" (the range of 10 values of the music lottery counter 223ca). (see 222ca1 in FIG. 143). In addition, the value of the music lottery counter 223ca is defined to correspond to the range of "10 to 19" with "music B" (see 222ca2 in FIG. 143), and the value of the music lottery counter 223ca is defined to be in the range of "20 to 29". "Song C" is defined in association with the range (see 222ca3 in FIG. 143). Although omitted from the drawing, each song type of "song D" to "song Z" is defined in association with a range of 10 values of the song lottery counter 223ca. Of the 260 values that the music lottery counter 223ca can take, 10 music lottery counter 223ca values are defined in association with each of the music types "music A" to "music Z". , usually a jackpot, and when "random music selection" is selected during the music selection period, the rate at which "song A" to "song Z" are determined is approximately 3.8% (10/260). On the other hand, in the case of the normal jackpot, the value of the song lottery counter 223ca is not associated with the special song "song a" (see 222ca27 in FIG. 143). In other words, when a normal jackpot is won, there is no possibility that "music a" will be determined (played) even if "random music selection" is selected. In other words, when "random music selection" is selected and "music a" is reproduced, the variable probability jackpot is decided. Therefore, in particular, when a big hit is caused by a variable display (variable effect) in which the third symbols with even numbers are aligned (when it is unknown whether it is a probability variable jackpot or a normal jackpot), even a little Actively "random music selection" for players who want to know whether to shift to the variable probability state early (that is, before confirming the result of the effect that informs whether to shift to the variable probability state) ” can be selected. In addition, the player can be pleased when "song a" is reproduced as expected by the player. Furthermore, even if the ``music a'' is not reproduced, it is possible to continue to have expectations for the variable probability state until the performance of notifying whether or not the variable probability state is shifted to during the big win is executed. can.

Returning to FIG. 142(a), the description continues. The pseudo small round lottery table 222cb is a data table referred to for determining (lottery) whether or not to execute the pseudo small round effect. The lottery for whether or not to execute the pseudo-small round effect using the pseudo-small round lottery table 222cb is executed when an opening command corresponding to the big win A or the big win D is received (see S5833 in FIG. 147). . Although not shown, this pseudo-small round lottery table 222cb is set so that the execution of the pseudo-small round effect is determined at a rate of 50% when the jackpot A or jackpot D is won.

Next, with reference to FIG. 142(b), the configuration of the RAM 223 of the audio ramp control device 113 in the third control example will be described. FIG. 142(b) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 223. As shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 142(b), the RAM 223 in the third control example has a music lottery counter 223ca and a jackpot status storage, which is different from the configuration of the RAM 223 in the second control example (see FIG. 122(b)). The difference is that an area 223cb and a pseudo final R storage area 223cc are added.

The song lottery counter 223ca is a counter used to select (determine) one song from the random song selection table 222ca described above, and its value is updated within the range of "0 to 259". When the player determines "random music selection" during the music selection period, music corresponding to the value of the music lottery counter 223ca is selected from the random music selection table 222ca.

The jackpot status storage area 223cb is a storage area for storing the type of jackpot and the data corresponding to the symbols arranged in the variable performance executed when the jackpot is won. The jackpot situation storage area 223cb is composed of, for example, a 1-byte storage area, and if "01H" is stored as data, it indicates that it is a probability variable jackpot with odd symbol notification. Also, if "02H" is stored, it indicates that it is a probability variable jackpot with even-numbered symbol notification, and if "03H" is stored, it indicates that it is a normal jackpot with even-numbered symbol notification. On the other hand, if "00H" is stored, it indicates that the jackpot has not been won. In this jackpot situation storage area 223cb, when the execution of the variable effect to notify the jackpot is set, the type of the jackpot won and the type of pattern to notify the jackpot (the third pattern with an odd number are aligned) or whether the third symbols with even numbers are aligned), the corresponding data is stored (see S4522 in FIG. 150). In the music selection period, when the player selects (determines) "random music selection", of the random music selection table 222ca, the prescribed contents corresponding to the data stored in the jackpot situation storage area 223cb and the music lottery counter 223ca. are compared to determine one song to be played during the jackpot.

The pseudo final R storage area 223cc is a storage area for storing data indicating a pseudo final round when the pseudo small round effect is determined. In this pseudo final R storage area 223cc, when the 8 rounds jackpot (jackpot A) is determined and the pseudo small round effect is decided, 5 rounds (that is, the first special symbol jackpot has a relatively large number of rounds). While the data corresponding to the small number of rounds of jackpots B and C) is set (see S5836 in FIG. 147), when the 16-round jackpot (jackpot D) is determined and the pseudo-small-round production is determined, 10 rounds (That is, the data corresponding to the number of rounds of the jackpots E and F, which have a relatively small number of rounds, among the jackpots of the second special symbol) is set (see S5837 in FIG. 147). In the big win, at the start of a new interval period or at the start of a new round, it is the start timing of the interval period immediately before the pseudo final round according to the data stored in the pseudo final R storage area 223cc. and whether it is the start timing of the pseudo final round. That is, it is determined whether or not it is time to determine the recombination of music.

<Regarding control processing of the audio ramp control device in the third control example>
Next, various control processes executed by the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 in the third control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 144 to 150. FIG. Although not shown, in the third control example, main processing 10 is executed instead of main processing 9 (see FIG. 127) in the second control example. In this main process 10, the operation detection process 10 (S4161) is executed instead of the operation detection process 9 (S4151, see FIG. 128) in the main process 9 (see FIG. 127) in the second control example. The only difference is that the command determination process 10 (S4165) is executed instead of the command determination process 9 (S4153), and the variable display setting process 10 (S4162) is executed instead of the variable display setting process (see FIG. 38). are different.

First, with reference to FIG. 144, the details of the operation detection process 10 (S4161) in the third control example will be described. This operation detection process 10 (S4161) is a process that is executed instead of the operation detection process 9 (see FIG. 128) in the second control example. This is a process for monitoring the operation (pressing) on the button 230 and executing control according to the operation content when the operation is detected.

S5101 to S5106, S5109, and S5110 of the operation detection process 10 (see FIG. 144) in the third control example correspond to S5101 to S5106 of the operation detection process 9 (see FIG. 128) in the second control example. , S5109, and S5110 are executed. Further, in the operation detection process 10 (see FIG. 144) in the third control example, if it is determined in the process of S5106 that an operation (pressing) on the center button CB has been detected (S5106: Yes), the selected item A music determination process is executed to determine the music to be reproduced after the music selection period ends according to the type (S5121), and this process ends. The details of this song determination process (S5121) will be described with reference to FIG.

FIG. 145 is a flow chart showing the details of the music piece determination process (S5121) described above. In this song determination process (S5121), first, it is determined whether or not the player has determined random song selection (whether the most significant bit of the menu position pointer 223ab is ON (1)) (S5801). If it is determined in the process of S5801 that an item other than random music selection has been determined (the most significant bit of the menu position pointer 223ab is off (0) at the time when the pressing of the center button CB is detected) (S5801: No ), the data indicating the music corresponding to the value of the lower 5 bits of the menu position pointer 223ab is specified from the item layout storage area 223aa and stored in the music type storage area 223bd (S5802), and the process proceeds to S5806.

On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S5801 that random music selection has been determined (the most significant bit of the menu position pointer 223ab is ON (1)) (S5801: Yes), the random music selection table 222ca (see FIG. 143) (S5803), and by comparing the specified content corresponding to the data stored in the jackpot situation storage area 223cb in the read table with the value of the song lottery counter 223ca, the value of the song lottery counter 223ca is determined. is determined (S5804). Then, data corresponding to the music determined in the process of S5804 is stored in the music type storage area 223bd (S5805), and the process proceeds to S5806.

In the process of S5806 executed after the process of S5802 or S5805, the music selection menu screen is closed and the menu display flag 223ae is set to OFF (S5806), and this process ends. By executing this song determination process (see FIG. 145), when random song selection is determined, one song can be randomly selected from a plurality of songs.

As described above, when random song selection is determined, there is a possibility that a song that is not displayed as an item on the song selection menu screen (that is, "song a") is selected. This "music a" may be determined only in the case of a variable jackpot, and in the case of a variable jackpot with an even pattern notification (if it is unknown whether it is a variable jackpot or a normal jackpot) ) is determined at a higher rate than when it becomes a probability variable jackpot of odd number design notification (when it is determined that it is a probability variable jackpot). By configuring in this way, when it becomes a jackpot of the even number design notification, as soon as possible (that is, before confirming the result of the effect to notify whether to shift to the probability variation state) to the probability variation state A player who wants to know whether or not to transfer can be made to positively select "random music selection". In addition, the player can be pleased when "song a" is reproduced as expected by the player. Furthermore, even if the ``music a'' is not reproduced, it is possible to continue to have expectations for the variable probability state until the performance of notifying whether or not the variable probability state is shifted to during the big win is executed. can.

Next, with reference to FIG. 146, the details of the win-related process 10 (S4371) in the third control example will be described. This win-related process 10 (S4371) is a process executed instead of the win-related process 9 (see FIG. 130) in the second control example. Of the winning-related processing 10 (S4371) in the third control example, in each of the processing of S4401 to S4404, S4406, S4407, S4409, S4462, and S4464 to S4466, the winning-related processing 9 in the second control example (Fig. 130 ), S4401 to S4404, S4406, S4407, S4409, S4462, and S4464 to S4466 are executed.

Further, in the hit-related process 10 (see FIG. 146) in the third control example, when it is determined in the process of S4404 that the command received from the main controller 110 includes an opening command (S4404: Yes), then, a pseudo-small-round lottery process is executed for lottery (judgment) as to whether or not to execute a pseudo-small-round effect, which is an effect that makes it appear as if the number of rounds is less than the original number of rounds (S4471). ), and the process proceeds to S4406. The details of this pseudo small round lottery process (S4471) will be described later with reference to FIG.

Further, in the winning-related process 10 (see FIG. 146) in the third control example, when it is determined in the process of S4407 that the command received from the main controller 110 includes a round number command (S4407 : Yes), then, instead of the round number command process (see FIG. 131) in the second control example, the round number command process 10 is executed (S4472), and this process ends. The details of this round number command process 10 (S4472) will be described later with reference to FIG.

Further, in the hit-related process 10 (see FIG. 146) in the third control example, when it is determined in the process of S4462 that the interval command is included in the command received from the main controller 110 (S4462: Yes), then instead of the interval command processing (see FIG. 133) in the second control example, interval command processing 10 is executed (S4473), and this processing ends. Details of this interval command process 10 (S4473) will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, with reference to FIG. 147, details of the above-described pseudo small round lottery process (S4471), which is one of the winning-related processes 10 (see FIG. 146) in the third control example, will be described. This pseudo small round lottery process (S4471) is, as described above, a process for drawing lots to determine whether or not to set the execution of the pseudo small round effect.

In the pseudo-small round lottery process (see FIG. 147), first, the type of the jackpot notified of the start of the opening period by this opening command is the jackpot A (8 of the jackpots of the first special symbol, which has a relatively large number of rounds). Round jackpot) or jackpot D (16-round jackpot with a relatively large number of rounds among jackpots of the second special symbol) is determined (S5831). In the processing of S5831, if it is determined that the current jackpot is neither the jackpot A nor the jackpot D (S5831: No), the jackpot this time is the jackpots B and C (of the first special symbol jackpots, relatively 5-round jackpot with a small number of rounds), and E, F (10-round jackpot with a relatively small number of rounds among jackpots of the second special symbol). Therefore, in this case, since the original number of rounds is small and there is no possibility of executing the pseudo small round effect, each process of S5832 to S5837 for lottery (judgment) for execution of the pseudo small round effect is skipped. Then, the process proceeds to S5838.

On the other hand, in the processing of S5831, if it is determined that the current jackpot is either jackpot A or jackpot D (S5831: Yes), lottery (determine) whether or not the pseudo small round effect can be executed , S5832 to S5837 are executed. Specifically, the pseudo small round lottery table 222cb is read (S5832), and lottery (judgment) is made as to whether or not the pseudo small round effect can be executed (S5833). In addition, as described above, the pseudo small round lottery table 222cb is set so that the lottery result corresponding to the execution of the pseudo small round effect is obtained at a rate of 50%.

When the processing of S5833 is completed, it is then determined whether or not the lottery (judgment) result by the processing of S5833 is a lottery result corresponding to the execution of the pseudo small round effect (S5834), and the execution of the pseudo small round effect is determined. When it is determined that it is not the corresponding lottery result (S5834: No), each process of S5835 to S5837 for setting the execution of the pseudo small round effect is skipped, and the process proceeds to S5838.

On the other hand, in the process of S5834, if it is determined that the lottery result corresponds to the execution of the pseudo small round effect (S5834: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the current big win is the big win A (S5835). . In the processing of S5835, if it is determined that the current jackpot is jackpot A (first special symbol 8-round jackpot) (S5835: Yes), this jackpot is the first special symbol jackpot, the number of rounds In order to make it look like a relatively small jackpot (5 round jackpot), a value (data) corresponding to 5 rounds is stored in the pseudo final R storage area 223cc (S5836), and the process proceeds to S5838. do.

On the other hand, in the processing of S5835, if it is determined that the current jackpot is not the jackpot A (that is, the jackpot D) (S5835: No), the jackpot this time is the second special symbol jackpot, A value (data) corresponding to 10 rounds is stored in the pseudo final R storage area 223cc (S5837), and the process proceeds to S5838 in order to make it look like a jackpot with a relatively small number of rounds (10 rounds jackpot). Transition.

In the process of S5838, an opening command for display corresponding to the opening effect to be executed is set, and this process ends. By executing this pseudo small round lottery process, when a relatively small number of rounds is reported at the start of the jackpot (that is, when 5 rounds are reported with the first special symbol jackpot, or when the second special symbol is announced) Even if 10 rounds are reported in the big win), it is possible to play the game during the big win in anticipation that a larger number of rounds will be reported (pseudo small round effect is executed). can. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

Next, referring to FIG. 148, it is one process in the hit-related process 10 (see FIG. 146) in the third control example, instead of the round number command process (see FIG. 131) in the second control example. Details of the round number command process 10 (S4472) to be executed will be described. FIG. 148 is a flow chart showing this round number command process 10 (S4472).

Of the round number command process 10 (see FIG. 148) in the third control example, each process of S5401 to S5407 corresponds to each process of S5401 to S5407 of the round number command process (see FIG. 131) in the second control example. The same processing is performed. In the round number command process 10 in the third control example, when the process of S5401 ends, the round notified by the round number command this time is set in the pseudo final R storage area 223cc. It is determined whether it matches the final round (S5411), and if it is determined that the current round is the pseudo final round (S5411: Yes), the process proceeds to S5403, and the playback order of the music data type It is determined whether or not to rearrange the On the other hand, in the process of S5411, if it is determined that the current round is not the pseudo final round (S5411: No), the process proceeds to S5402.

By executing this round number command process 10 (see FIG. 148), at the start of the pseudo final round when the pseudo small round effect is being executed (at the start of 5 rounds in jackpot A and 10 in jackpot D) At the start of the round), just like in the original final round, the recombination of the playback order of the music data is determined, and the possibility that the chorus part of the song will be played during the pseudo final round is increased. can be configured to That is, since the voice mode in the pseudo final round and the voice pair usage in the original final round can be made equivalent, it is the pseudo final round or the original final round from the voice mode of the song. It is possible to prevent (suppress) the player from detecting whether or not the continuous effect (see FIG. 141(b)) is executed. Therefore, when the pseudo small round effect is set, is the continuous effect executed until the start timing of the continuous effect (see FIG. 141(b)) (that is, the end timing of the pseudo final round)? Since it is possible to make it difficult to identify whether the jackpot will end as it is, it is possible to increase the player's sense of expectation during the pseudo final round.

Next, referring to FIG. 149, it is one of the winning-related processes 10 (see FIG. 146) in the third control example, and is executed instead of the interval command process (see FIG. 133) in the second control example. Details of the interval number command processing 10 (S4473) will be described. FIG. 149 is a flow chart showing this interval number command process 10 (S4473).

Of the interval command processing 10 (see FIG. 149) in this third control example, each processing of S5501 to S5509 is the same as each processing of S5501 to S5509 of the interval command processing (see FIG. 133) in the second control example. Processing is performed. In the interval command process 10 (see FIG. 149) in the third control example, when the process of S5501 ends, the interval period notified by the current interval command is set to the pseudo final round (pseudo final R storage area). (S5511), and if it is determined that the current interval period is the interval period immediately before the pseudo final round (S5511 : Yes), the process proceeds to S5503 to determine whether or not to rearrange the reproduction order of the music data types. On the other hand, in the process of S5511, if it is determined that the current round is not the pseudo final round (S5511: No), the process proceeds to S5502.

By executing the processing of S5511, at the start of the interval period immediately before the pseudo final round in the case where the pseudo small round effect is being executed, the interval period immediately before the original final round is started. , the rearrangement of the reproduction order of the music data can be discriminated, and the possibility that the chorus of the music will be reproduced during the pseudo final round can be increased. That is, since the voice mode in the pseudo final round and the voice pair usage in the original final round can be made equivalent, it is the pseudo final round or the original final round from the voice mode of the song. It is possible to prevent (suppress) the player from detecting whether or not the continuous effect (see FIG. 141(b)) is executed. Therefore, when the pseudo small round effect is set, is the continuous effect executed until the start timing of the continuous effect (see FIG. 141(b)) (that is, the end timing of the pseudo final round)? Since it is possible to make it difficult to identify whether the jackpot will end as it is, it is possible to increase the player's sense of expectation during the pseudo final round.

Also, in the interval command processing 10 (see FIG. 149) in the third control example, in the processing of S5506, the interval period notified by the interval command this time is not the interval period after the end of the first round of the jackpot. If it is determined (S5506: No), then it is determined whether the current interval is the interval period after the end of the pseudo final round (the round set in the pseudo final R storage area 223cc) ( S5512). Then, in the process of S5512, when it is determined that it is the interval period after the end of the pseudo final round (S5512: Yes), the execution of the continuous effect (see FIG. 141(b)) is set (S5513). , the data stored in the pseudo final R storage area 223cc is reset (S5514), and this process is terminated.

Next, with reference to FIG. 150, details of the variable display setting process 10 (S4162) in the third control example will be described. FIG. 150 is a flow chart showing this variable display setting process 10 (S4162). The variable display setting process 10 (S4162) in the third control example is similar to the variable display setting process (see FIG. 38) in the second control example (and the first embodiment). is a process for generating and setting a display variation pattern command based on the variation pattern command received from the main controller 110 in order to execute .

In each of S4501 to S4509 of the variable display setting process 10 (see FIG. 150) in the third control example, S4501 of the variable display setting process (see FIG. 38) in the second control example (first embodiment) The same processing as each processing of S4509 is executed. In addition, in the variation display setting process 10 (see FIG. 150) in the third control example, when the process of S4504 is completed, next, it is determined whether or not the current variation pattern is a variation pattern for notifying a big hit. (S4521), if it is determined that it is a variation pattern for notifying a jackpot (S4521: Yes), the type of the jackpot and the type of the third pattern that matches the variation pattern set this time (odd pattern or even number Is it a pattern?) is stored in the jackpot situation storage area 223cb (S4522), and the process proceeds to S4505. In the process of S4522, if the probability variable jackpot with odd number symbol notification is received, "01H" is stored in the jackpot status storage area 223cb, and if the probability variable jackpot with even number symbol notification is determined, "02H" is stored. In the case of a normal jackpot with an even symbol notification, "03H" is stored.

The data stored in the jackpot situation storage area 223cb by the process of S4522 is referred to when the player selects (determines) "random song selection" during the song selection period, and is stored in the jackpot situation storage area 223cb of the random song selection table 222ca. and the song lottery counter 223ca are compared to determine one song to be reproduced during the big win.

On the other hand, in the processing of S4521, if it is determined that the variation pattern set this time is not the variation pattern corresponding to the big hit (that is, the variation pattern corresponding to the loss) (S4521: No), the processing of S4522 is skipped. Then, the process moves to S4505.

As described above, in the third control example, when the player selects "random music selection" on the music selection menu screen, the music to be played after the first round (music selection period) ends is determined by a random lottery. It is configured to be determined. Also, when a "random song selection" is determined, if a specific condition is satisfied (i.e., if the current jackpot is a variable hit), a special song that is not displayed as an item on the music selection menu screen (i.e. , “song a”) can be selected. As a result, it is possible to select "random music selection" in the expectation that "music a", which cannot normally be listened to, will be determined. In particular, when a big hit is caused by a variable display (variable effect) in which the third pattern with an even number is aligned (if it is unknown whether it is a probability variable jackpot or a normal jackpot), as soon as possible ( That is, before confirming the result of the effect that informs whether or not to shift to the variable probability state, positively "random music selection" for the player who wants to know whether to shift to the variable probability state. can be selected. Furthermore, the rate at which "music a" is determined by lottery is configured to be higher for the even-numbered pattern notification variable probability jackpot than for the odd-numbered symbol notification probability variable jackpot. As a result, when winning a jackpot with even-numbered symbol notification, "random music selection" can be selected more positively. It should be noted that by increasing the possibility of "random music selection" being determined by the player, a plurality of music pieces (music A to music Z) set in the pachinko machine 10 can be evenly reproduced. This allows the user to listen to a plurality of songs without waste.

In addition, in the third control example, as a kind of effect executed during the big win, during a predetermined period after the start of the big win (for example, until the end of the 5th round or the 10th round), the number of rounds of the big win is reported less than the original number of rounds, and when a predetermined period of time elapses, a pseudo-small-rounds presentation in which the original number of rounds is notified can be selected. By enabling execution of this pseudo-small-round performance, when a relatively small number of rounds is reported at the start of the jackpot, a larger number of rounds (8 rounds or 16 rounds) after a predetermined period elapses. In anticipation of being notified, the game can be played until the predetermined period elapses. Further, in accordance with this, in the third control example, even in the pseudo final round during execution of the pseudo short round effect, the chorus part is played back by rearranging the playback order of the songs, as in the original final round. It is configured as follows. This makes it difficult to distinguish between the pseudo final round and the original final round from the parts of the music played during the pseudo final round. Therefore, until the simulated small round effect ends (until the predetermined period elapses), it is possible to keep the player's expectation for the announcement of a larger number of rounds.

In addition, in the third control example, only in the case of the probability variable jackpot, if the player decides "random music selection", there is a possibility that "music a" will be played, and the probability variable jackpot with odd number symbol notification is set. It was configured so that the percentage of “song a” selected was higher for the probability variable jackpot of the even number pattern notification, but when “random song selection” was decided, the rate at which each song was decided , can be arbitrarily determined. Specifically, for example, even when a normal jackpot is won, "song a" may be determined with a low probability (for example, 0.1%). That is, when "random music selection" is selected during the execution of the variable probability jackpot, the ratio of selecting "music a" is higher than when "random music selection" is selected during the execution of the normal jackpot. may be configured. With this configuration, even if the ``music a'' is reproduced, the probability variable jackpot is not determined, so that the game can be played with a sense of tension until the probability variable state is notified. . Also, the rate at which "song a" is determined may be configured to be higher for odd-numbered symbol notification odd-numbered jackpots than for even-numbered symbol notification odd-numbered jackpots.

In the third control example, among the entertainment effects executed during the jackpot (predetermined period), the effect mode (type of music to be played) of the audio entertainment effect is set to the operation content ( Although the selection result on the music selection menu screen) is determined, the configuration is not limited to this. For example, in the third symbol display device 81 during a predetermined period, the effect mode of the display effect displayed may be varied according to the player's selection result (operation details for the operation button 230). More specifically, when a specific effect execution condition is satisfied, a plurality of items corresponding to a plurality of effect modes (corresponding to items corresponding to "song A" to "song Z" in the third control example). ) and an item for which the mode of presentation is randomly selected (corresponding to the item corresponding to “random music selection” in the third control example) can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 . Then, depending on the item selected by the player operating the operation button 230, the effect mode of the effect to be executed is determined. That is, when an item corresponding to the effect mode is selected, the effect is executed in the effect mode corresponding to the selected item, and when a randomly selected item is selected, the selection is made at a predetermined timing. A configuration may be adopted in which one effect mode is determined from among a plurality of possible effect modes. With such a configuration, the player can select between the playability of selecting the player's favorite presentation mode and the playability of having the player select the presentation mode at random and paying attention to which presentation mode is selected. can be made Also, in this case, as in the third control example, a special effect that can be determined only when the player selects an item in which the effect mode is randomly selected (a special song in the third control example). A display effect corresponding to a certain "music a" may be set. By configuring in this way, it is possible to visually determine whether or not a special effect has been executed, so whether or not it is a special effect (that is, whether or not to shift to a probability variable state after a big hit) can be understood more easily.

In the third control example, only when the player selects "random music selection" on the music selection menu screen, the special music "music a" can be selected, but the present invention is not limited to this. . For example, when the probability variable jackpot is confirmed (that is, when the probability variable jackpot of the odd number symbol notification occurs, and the player is already convinced that the probability variable jackpot is already won), "music a" is displayed on the music selection menu screen. The item may be configured to be displayed. By configuring in this way, in a situation where the variable probability state is determined, the player who wants to listen to "song a" is more likely to select another song. ”, the item “song a” can be selected. Therefore, convenience for the player can be improved. Also, in this case, "music a" is added at a predetermined ratio to the music selection menu screen displayed in the probability variable jackpot of the even number symbol notification (a situation in which the player cannot know whether or not the probability variable state will occur). The item may be configured to be displayed. By configuring in this way, variations (whether or not "song a" is included in the item, and " (whether or not the song a" is reproduced), it is possible to further improve the interest of the player during the song selection period of the even-numbered symbol notification jackpot.

In the third control example, the special song "song a" can be selected only when the player selects "random song selection" on the song selection menu screen. It does not have to be configured to be able to For example, the operation button 230 may be eliminated, and a piece of music played during the execution of the jackpot may be randomly selected each time with reference to the random music selection table 222ca. That is, it is configured so that "music a" can be played when the odds change after the big win is over, but there is no possibility of playing "music a" when the probability is low after the big win is over. may Even in the case of such a configuration, it is possible to perform a game during the big win by paying attention to whether or not the "music a" is reproduced when the big win of the even-numbered symbol notification is achieved. Moreover, it is not limited to the case of using "music a" to suggest whether or not it is in the variable probability state. During a predetermined period of time during a game, whether the state after the predetermined period of time is advantageous to the player (for example, a big win, a time-saving state, a small win RUSH, a slot BIG BONUS, ART, AT, etc.) or its advantage It is determined whether the state is more disadvantageous than the unfavorable state, and if the state is advantageous, a special song can be played, and if the state is unfavorable, the special song is played. It should be configured so that there is no possibility that it will be

In the third control example, the song that can be selected when "random song selection" is selected is made different depending on whether or not it is a variable probability jackpot, but it is not limited to this. For example, a configuration may be adopted in which songs that can be selected when "random song selection" is selected differ depending on whether or not the pseudo small round effect is being executed. Specifically, when "random music selection" is determined during execution of the pseudo-small round effect, one song is selected from a plurality of songs including "song a", and the pseudo-small-round effect is executed. If there is none, it may be configured to select one of the plurality of songs excluding "song a".

In the third control example, the control for setting the music during the big win has been described as an example, but this control is not limited to during the big win. After the end of a predetermined music reproduction period, when the player is in a relatively advantageous state, a special music (that is, "music a") can be selected when "random music selection" is selected. On the other hand, if the player is in a relatively disadvantageous state after the end of the playback period, at least the special song (that is, "song a") is excluded (that is, among "song A" to "song Z"). Any situation is possible as long as it is possible to select one song from the list. For example, as in the first control example, a configuration may be used for control for selecting songs in the variable probability state. In this case, if the "random song selection" is selected while the reserved balls include the jackpot, a special song may be selected, while the reserved balls include the jackpot. If not, one song may be selected from among the special songs excluded. In addition, it is possible to display the music selection menu screen during the execution of the variable display effect, and when "random music selection" is selected (determined) during the execution of the variable display corresponding to the big win, a special While the configuration is such that music can be selected, when "random music selection" is selected (determined) during the execution of the variable display corresponding to the omission, one music is selected from among the special music excluded. may be configured.

In the third control example, when "random music selection" is selected, if "music a" is selected, the variable probability state is determined. Also in the case of selecting, it is possible to provide a case where the probability variation state is determined at a predetermined rate. Specifically, for example, when the player selects one song during the execution of the variable probability jackpot, with a predetermined probability, the playback position of the song is played from a playback position different from the normal one (for example, the chorus part playback from the beginning of the song, playback from the 2nd number of the song, etc.). Alternatively or in addition, with a predetermined probability, a song different from the selected song (for example, "song a") is played, the tune is changed from usual, or the version is changed from usual. It is good also as a structure which makes it different. By constructing in this way, it is possible to meet the desires of players who want to select their favorite music and want to quickly perceive whether or not the variable state will occur. In this case, the music selected by the player may be reproduced in a voice mode different from usual only when the same music is continuously selected over a predetermined number of jackpots.

In the third control example, regardless of the number of rounds of the jackpot, when the first round of the jackpot ends, the song selected during the song selection period is played back from the beginning (intro part). It is not limited. For example, for jackpots with a large number of rounds (e.g., 8-round jackpot or 16-round jackpot), playback starts from the beginning of the song, while jackpots with a small number of rounds (e.g., 5 rounds) and pseudo-small-round production is set, the configuration may be such that playback is started from the chorus of the song. By configuring in this way, even in a jackpot type with a small number of rounds, it is possible to make the player listen to the chorus part of the music more reliably in one jackpot. Also, in this case, if a pseudo-short-round effect is set, it may be determined by lottery whether to start the reproduction from the chorus of the music or from the intro of the music. Specifically, for example, when the quasi-small round effect is set, playback is started from the chorus part of the song at a rate of 90%, and playback is started from the beginning part of the song at a rate of 10%. good too. By configuring in this way, even though a small number of rounds (for example, 5 rounds) has been notified, if the reproduction is started from the beginning of the music piece, the pseudo-small number of rounds effect is executed at that point. Since the player can be made to understand that, it is possible to make the player feel satisfied with the big win with a large number of rounds before confirming the continuous effect.

<Fourth control example>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 in the fourth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 151 to 169. FIG. In the pachinko machine 10 in the above-described first to third control examples, when determining the initial arrangement of items on the music selection menu screen, the game A maximum of three items that are frequently selected by users are arranged. If the number of items selected once or more is less than 3, the less than 3 items are placed in the history area, and items determined by random lottery are placed in the remaining area (in the music selection area). One item determined by lottery is arranged, and other items are arranged in alphabetical order based on the one item. By configuring in this way, even when the number of times music is selected is small, such as immediately after power-on, all music can be arranged on the music selection menu screen without duplication.

On the other hand, in the fourth control example, when the number of items to be set in the history area is small (less than 3 items), an empty area in the history area (an area in which frequently selected items are not arranged) The order of priority of the items to be arranged is defined in advance. This priority is given to songs that are more likely to be known by more players (for example, theme songs of works that are the motif of the pachinko machine 10, songs that are played during normal games such as ready-to-win effects, etc.). set to be higher. By configuring in this way, even if the number of selections of songs is small, songs that are likely to be selected by the player can be arranged in the history area, so that convenience for the player can be improved. can.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10 in the above-described second and third control examples, in the final round during the jackpot, the music piece is played at a predetermined timing during the jackpot so that the chorus portion is likely to be in a state of being played back. It was configured so that the data reproduction order could be rearranged. As a result, the chorus part, which is the most exciting part (characteristic part) of the music, can be more reliably heard by the player in the final round.

In addition to this, in the fourth control example, when the reproduction of the chorus portion ends during the final round, it is determined whether or not the chorus portion is to be reproduced repeatedly according to the progress of the final round. More specifically, it is possible to end the chorus between the end of the chorus playback and the end of the final round (or the end of the period during which the ending effect can be delayed). If there is a high possibility that the chorus part will be played repeatedly, if there is a high possibility that the chorus part will end in the middle (the ending effect will start in the middle of the chorus part being played), the chorus part will not be repeated. Playback is set according to the playback order of music data. By configuring in this way, it is possible to increase the possibility that the chorus portion will not be cut off in the final round and can be reproduced in a complete form.

Further, in the above-described third control example, the first round of the jackpot is set as the song selection period, and the player is made to select a song. During this music selection period, regardless of whether or not the music to be reproduced is determined (the central button CB is pressed), the dedicated music is continuously reproduced during the music selection period, and the music selection period elapses (one round It was configured to start playback from the beginning (intro part) of the song at the timing of the end of the second.

On the other hand, in the fourth control example, every time a different item is arranged in the music selection area by the player operating the operation button 230 during the music selection period, the chorus of the music corresponding to the arranged item is reproduced. It is configured. As a result, it is possible to select a song by considering not only the name of the song displayed on the song selection menu screen, but also the melody of the most characteristic chorus part of the song. Further, in the fourth control example, when a song is determined during the song selection period, the playback start position and playback start timing of the song are varied according to the number of rounds of the jackpot. Specifically, in the case of a jackpot with a large number of rounds (16 rounds), at the end of the music selection period, playback is started from the beginning of the song (intro part), and the 10th round and 8th round jackpots are played. In the case of (2), when the song selection period ends, playback is started from the A melody part of the song (that is, skipping the intro part). On the other hand, in the case of a jackpot with a small number of rounds (five rounds), when the player decides on a song, the song continues to play from the chorus part that is already being played (the song selection period ends). The music is played back from the front). By configuring in this way, even in the case of a small number of rounds, the player can listen to the chorus part for a longer time.

The pachinko machine 10 in the fourth control example differs in configuration from the pachinko machine 10 in the third control example in that the configurations of the ROM 222 and the RAM 223 in the sound lamp control device 113 are partially changed. The configuration of the RAM 303 in the audio output device 226 is partially changed, the control processing executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 is partially changed, and the processing executed by the MPU 301 of the audio output device 226 is changed. The only difference is that the control processing that Other configurations, various processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, other processes executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113, various processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, and the audio output device 226 Other processes executed by are the same as those of the pachinko machine 10 in the third control example. Hereinafter, the same elements as in the third control example are denoted by the same reference numerals, and illustration and description thereof are omitted.

First, referring to FIG. 151(a), the configuration of the ROM 222 of the audio ramp control device 113 in the fourth control example will be described. FIG. 151(a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM 222. As shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 151(a), the ROM 222 in the fourth control example has the same defined contents of the pseudo small round lottery table 222cb as the configuration of the ROM 222 in the third control example (see FIG. 142(a)). The difference is that the part is changed and that a priority definition table 222da and a chorus loop determination table 222db are added.

The priority definition table 222da is a table that defines the priority of items to be arranged in the history area. When determining the initial arrangement of items on the music selection menu screen, if the number of songs that have been selected one or more times is less than three, the empty area of the history area is filled with the priority defined in the priority definition table 222da. The items are laid out in descending order of priority (see S5275 in FIG. 163). Details of the priority definition table 222da will be described later with reference to FIG. 152(b).

The chorus loop determination table 222db is referred to in order to determine whether or not the chorus portion is to be repeatedly played (looped) when the playback end timing of the music data corresponding to the chorus portion comes in the final round. It is a data table (see S5905 in FIG. 158). Details of the chorus loop determination table 222db will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, with reference to FIG. 152(a), details of the pseudo small round lottery table 222cb in the fourth control example will be described. This pseudo small round lottery table 222cb is a data table referred to for determining (lottery) whether or not to execute the pseudo small round effect, as in the third control example described above.

As shown in FIG. 152(a), the pseudo small round lottery table 222cb in the fourth control example associates the range of values of the effect lottery counter for lottery of the effect mode, and whether or not the pseudo small round effect can be executed. (Whether to execute a normal effect or to execute a pseudo small round effect) is defined in correspondence. In addition, the pseudo-small round lottery table 222cb in the fourth control example adjusts the sound mode (playback mode) when reproducing the music to match the number of rounds pseudo-notified by the pseudo-small round effect, or the original round Whether to match the number is also defined in association with the value of the effect lottery counter. That is, in the fourth control example, whether or not to match the display mode of the pseudo-small round effect and the reproduction mode of the music is also determined by the pseudo-small round lottery table 222cb. When the player recognizes that the reproduction mode of the music does not match the number of rounds notified by the pseudo few rounds presentation, the player can be made to understand that the pseudo few rounds presentation is being executed. Therefore, it is possible to give satisfaction to the player who understands that the pseudo small round effect has been executed before the continuous effect (see FIG. 141(b)) is executed.

As shown in FIG. 152(a), in the jackpot A, the value of the effect lottery counter in the range of "0 to 49" is defined in association with the "normal effect" as the display mode, and the reproduction mode of the music. "for 8R/10R" is defined in association with the above. Therefore, when the jackpot A is won and the value of the performance lottery counter is in the range of '0 to 49', the quasi-small round performance is not executed, and it is reported that the jackpot is 8 rounds from the beginning of the jackpot. (Normal production is executed). Further, as the music reproduction mode, a reproduction mode (reproduction mode for 8R/10R) is set in which the music is reproduced from the first melody at the end of the music selection period. Therefore, the player can be made aware from the start of the big win that the big win of 8 rounds, which has a relatively large number of rounds, among the big wins of the first special symbols. Therefore, the player can play the game during the big win from the start of the big win without any worries. Of the 100 counter values (random numbers) from '0 to 99' that the effect lottery counter can take, the counter associated with the display mode 'normal effect' and the reproduction mode 'for 8R/10R'. Since there are 50 values (random numbers) "0 to 49", the ratio of determining the display mode "normal effect" and the reproduction mode "for 8R/10R" is 50% (50/100). .

As shown in FIG. 152(a), in the jackpot A, the value of the production lottery counter in the range of "50 to 94" is defined in association with "pseudo small round production" as a display mode. "For 5R" is associated and defined as a reproduction mode. Therefore, when the jackpot A is won and the value of the performance lottery counter is in the range of ``50 to 94'', a pseudo small round performance is executed, and despite the fact that the jackpot is 8 rounds, it is held for a predetermined period of time. (Until the end of the 5th round), a display effect (pseudo small round effect) as if it were a 5th round big win is executed. In addition, as the music reproduction mode, a reproduction mode (reproduction mode for 5R) is set in which the music continues to be reproduced from the reproduction position where the music was reproduced when the player decided the music. As a result, until the continuous effect is executed, both the display mode and the sound reproduction mode are the same as the 5-round jackpot (jackpot B and jackpot C). It can be difficult to identify whether the pseudo small-round effect is being executed or the 5-round jackpot is being executed. Therefore, when the continuous effect is executed, the player can be given greater pleasure. Of the 100 counter values (random numbers) from '0 to 99' that the effect lottery counter can take, the counter associated with the display mode 'pseudo small round effect' and the reproduction mode 'for 5R'. Since there are 45 values (random numbers) ranging from "50 to 94", the ratio of determining the display mode "pseudo small round effect" and the reproduction mode "for 5R" is 45% (45/100).

As shown in FIG. 152 (a), in the jackpot A, the value of the production lottery counter is defined in the range of "95 to 99" in association with "pseudo small round production" as a display mode. "For 8R/10R" is associated and defined as a reproduction mode. Therefore, when the big win A is won and the value of the performance lottery counter is in the range of ``95 to 99'', the pseudo small round performance is executed, and even though the big win is 8 rounds, it is held for a predetermined period of time. (Until the end of the 5th round), a display effect (pseudo small round effect) as if it were a 5th round big win is executed. In addition, as the music reproduction mode, a reproduction mode (reproduction mode for 8R/10R) is set in which the music is reproduced from the A melody 1 at the end of the music selection period. As a result, at least until the player decides the music during the music selection period, the display mode and the sound reproduction mode are the same as the 5-round jackpot (jackpot B and jackpot C), but the music is selected. The audio reproduction mode after the determination is set to a mode different from the 5-round jackpot. Therefore, it is possible to make the player feel uncomfortable that the reproduction mode and the display mode of the voice do not match, so that the player can easily understand that the quasi-small round effect is being executed. can. As a result, it is possible to make the player who can see through the fact that the pseudo small round effect has been executed before the continuous effect is executed have a sense of superiority. Of the 100 counter values (random numbers) from "0 to 99" that the value of the effect lottery counter can take, it is associated with the display mode "pseudo small round effect" and the playback mode "for 8R/10R". Since there are five counter values (random numbers) "95 to 99", the ratio of determining the display mode "pseudo small round effect" and the playback mode "for 8R/10R" is 5% (5/100). is.

Further, as shown in FIG. 152(a), in the jackpot D, the value of the effect lottery counter is defined in the range of "0 to 49" in association with "normal effect" as a display mode. As a reproduction mode, "for 16R" is associated and defined. Therefore, when the jackpot D is won and the value of the performance lottery counter is in the range of '0 to 49', the quasi-small round performance is not executed, and it is notified that the jackpot is 16 rounds from the beginning of the jackpot. (Normal production is executed). Also, as the music reproduction mode, a reproduction mode (reproduction mode for 16R) in which the music is reproduced from the intro part at the end of the music selection period is set. Therefore, the player can be made to recognize from the start of the big win that the big win of 16 rounds, which has a relatively large number of rounds, among the big wins of the second special symbols. Of the 100 counter values (random numbers) "0 to 99" that the value of the effect lottery counter can take, the counter value ( Since there are 50 random numbers "0 to 49", the ratio of determining the display mode "normal effect" and the reproduction mode "for 16R" is 50% (50/100).

As shown in FIG. 152(a), in the jackpot D, the value of the effect lottery counter is defined in the range of "50 to 94" in association with "pseudo small round effect" as a display mode. "For 8R/10" is associated and defined as a reproduction mode. Therefore, when the big win D is won and the value of the performance lottery counter is in the range of ``50 to 94'', a pseudo small round performance is executed, and despite the 16 rounds of the big win, it is held for a predetermined period of time. (Until the end of the 5th round), a display effect (pseudo small round effect) as if it were a 10th round jackpot is executed. In addition, as a music reproduction mode, a reproduction mode (reproduction mode for 8R and 10R) is set in which the music is reproduced from A melody 1 at the end of the music selection period. As a result, until the continuous effect is executed, both the display mode and the sound reproduction mode are the same as the 10-round jackpot (jackpot E and jackpot F). It can be difficult to identify whether a pseudo small round effect is being executed or a 10 rounds jackpot is being executed. Therefore, when the continuous effect is executed, the player can be given greater pleasure. Of the 100 counter values (random numbers) from '0 to 99' that the effect lottery counter can take, the counter associated with the display mode 'pseudo small round effect' and the reproduction mode 'for 5R'. Since there are 45 values (random numbers) ranging from 50 to 94, the ratio of determining the display mode "pseudo small round effect" and the playback mode "for 8R/10R" is 45% (45/100). .

As shown in FIG. 152(a), in the jackpot D, the value of the effect lottery counter is defined in the range of "95 to 99" in association with "pseudo small round effect" as a display mode. As a reproduction mode, "for 16R" is associated and defined. Therefore, when the big win D is won and the value of the performance lottery counter is in the range of "95 to 99", the pseudo small round performance is executed, and despite the 16 rounds of the big win, it is held for a predetermined period of time. (Until the end of the 5th round), a display effect (pseudo small round effect) as if it were a 10th round big win is executed. In addition, as a music reproduction mode, a reproduction mode (reproduction mode for 16R) is set in which the music is reproduced from the intro at the end of the music selection period. As a result, at least until the music selection period ends, the display mode and sound reproduction mode are the same as the 10-round jackpot (jackpot E and jackpot F), but after the music selection period ends The audio reproduction mode is set to a mode different from the 10-round jackpot. Therefore, it is possible to make the player feel uncomfortable that the reproduction mode and the display mode of the voice do not match, so that the player can easily understand that the quasi-small round effect is being executed. can. As a result, the player who can see through the fact that the pseudo small round effect has been executed before the continuous effect is executed can have a sense of superiority. Of the 100 counter values (random numbers) from 0 to 99 that the effect lottery counter can take, the counter associated with the display mode "pseudo small round effect" and the reproduction mode "for 16R" Since there are five values (random numbers) "95 to 99", the ratio of determining the display mode "pseudo small round effect" and the reproduction mode "for 16R" is 5% (5/100).

As described above, in the fourth control example, the music reproduction mode (the timing at which the music reproduction is started and the music reproduction position) is changed according to the number of rounds of the jackpot. Then, in a part (predetermined ratio) when the pseudo-small-round production (a production that looks like a (disadvantageous) jackpot with a number of rounds that is smaller than the actual number of rounds) is executed, only the voice mode is actually It is configured to be set to a reproduction mode corresponding to the number of rounds of the jackpot. By configuring in this way, it is possible for the player to perceive from the voice mode that the pseudo small round effect has been executed before the continuous effect is executed. Therefore, it is possible to make the player who can sense early that the pseudo small round effect is being executed have a sense of superiority.

Next, with reference to FIG. 152(b), the defined contents of the priority level definition table 222da will be described. As described above, the priority definition table 222da is a data table that defines the priority (priority order) of items to be arranged in the history area. When determining the initial arrangement of items on the music selection menu screen, if the number of songs that have been selected one or more times is less than three, the empty area of the history area is filled with the priority defined in the priority definition table 222da. Items are arranged in order from the item with the highest priority.

As shown in FIG. 152(b), in the priority definition table 222da, priorities to be arranged in the history area and menu items are defined in association with each other. More specifically, in the priority definition table 222da, the priority "high" is defined in association with "song A" as a menu item, and the priority "medium" is defined as a menu item. "Music J" is defined in association with "low" priority, and "music E" is defined in association as a menu item. These items are set so that the higher the priority of a song that is likely to be known by more players, the higher the priority. Specifically, for example, the opening song (theme song) of the work that is the motif of the pachinko machine 10 is specified as the "song A" corresponding to the priority "high", and the "song A" corresponding to the priority "medium" is specified. As "song J", the ending song of the work used as the motif is defined, and as "song E" corresponding to the priority "low", the insert song of the work used as the motif is defined.

By referring to the priority definition table 222da to determine the items to be arranged in the history area, for example, when the number of songs selected one or more times is 2 and the state changes to the probability variable state, the song selection menu screen is displayed. As an initial arrangement, first, two songs (items) that have been selected once or more by the player are arranged in the history area. Then, "song A", which is an item corresponding to the priority "high", is arranged in an empty area for one item. In addition, when the number of pieces of music selected once or more is one and the state shifts to the variable probability state, one item selected once or more by the player is arranged in the history area, and two items are placed. "music A" corresponding to "high" priority and "music J" corresponding to "medium" priority are stored in the empty area of . Furthermore, when a song has not been selected even once, all three items defined in the priority definition table 222da are stored in the history area.

As described above, in the fourth control example, when the number of songs selected is small (the number of songs selected one or more times is less than three), the priority of the items to be arranged in the empty area of the history area is set to the priority It is configured to be defined in advance by the regulation table 222da. This priority stipulation table 222da is configured such that a song that is more likely to be known by more players has a higher priority. By configuring in this way, even if the number of selections of songs is small, songs that are highly likely to be selected by the player can be arranged in the history area. Therefore, it is possible to enhance convenience for the player when selecting music.

Next, with reference to FIG. 153, details of the chorus loop determination table 222db will be described. FIG. 153 is a diagram showing the specified contents of the chorus loop determination table 222db. As described above, the chorus loop determination table 222db is used to determine whether or not to loop-play the chorus portion that has been played back when the reproduction of the music data corresponding to the chorus portion ends during the final round. is a data table referenced by

As shown in FIG. 153, the chorus loop discrimination table 222db contains the range of the playback time of the chorus portion of the song currently being played, and the number of prizes determined to be loop-playable The number of game balls hit) are defined in association with each other. Here, as described above, the game ball shooting interval in the pachinko machine 10 (the interval from when one game ball is shot until when the next game ball is shot) is configured to be 0.6 seconds at the shortest. is doing. During the jackpot, in many cases, it is considered normal for the player to shoot the game ball at the shortest shooting interval, so in the final round the game ball is shot at intervals of about 0.6 seconds. to win a ball (winning a prize). Thereby, it is possible to roughly predict the time until the ending effect is started based on the number of prizes won in the final round. A chorus loop determination table 222db permits loop reproduction of the chorus part and reproduces the chorus part when the remaining time until the ending effect starts, which is predicted from the number of prizes won in the final round, is equal to or longer than the reproduction time of the chorus part. The correspondence relationship is defined so that loop reproduction of the chorus is restricted when the duration is less than the time. The length of the chorus portion of the song with the shortest chorus portion among the songs A to Z and the song a is 7 seconds. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 153, the chorus loop determination table 222db defines only the range in which the reproduction time (L) of the chorus portion is 7 seconds or longer.

More specifically, as shown in FIG. 153, the number of winning prizes that allow loop playback of the chorus portion is within the range where the playback time (L) of the chorus portion is 7 seconds or more and less than 7.6 seconds. , "0 to 3" are defined in association with each other. If the number of prizes won is 3 or less, even if the 4th prize is detected immediately after the chorus is played, the 6th prize from the 5th to the 10th will be played before the end of the final round. About 3.6 seconds (interval of 0.6 seconds x 6 pieces), which is the time until the winning of the minute is detected, can be ensured. In addition, as described above, the start timing of the ending effect can be delayed by up to 4 seconds after the final round of the jackpot ends. Therefore, there is a high possibility that 7.6 seconds or more will pass before the ending effect starts, so if the chorus part has a playback time of less than 7.6 seconds, it can be played in a loop. There is a high possibility that the reproduction of the chorus part will end before the ending effect starts. Therefore, when the reproduction time (L) of the chorus portion is within a range of less than 7.6 seconds, the chorus loop determination table 222db is set so as to allow the loop reproduction of the chorus portion in the range where the number of winning prizes is 3 or less. stipulated.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 153, for the range where the playback time (L) of the chorus portion is 7.6 seconds or more and less than 8.2 seconds, the number of winning prizes that allow loop playback of the chorus portion is: "0 to 2" are associated and defined. If the number of prizes won is 2 or less, even if the 3rd prize is detected immediately after the chorus part has finished playing, the 7th to 10th prizes will be played before the end of the final round. About 4.2 seconds (0.6 second interval x 7 pieces) until the minute winning is detected, plus 4 seconds that can delay the start of the ending production, for 8.2 seconds This can be reserved as time for loop playback. Therefore, if the chorus portion has a playback time of less than 8.2 seconds, there is a high possibility that the playback of the chorus portion will end before the ending effect starts even if loop playback is performed. is 7.6 seconds or more and less than 8.2 seconds, the chorus loop determination table 222db is defined so as to allow the loop reproduction of the chorus portion in the range where the number of winning prizes is 2 or less. ing.

Also, as shown in FIG. 153, for the range where the playback time (L) of the chorus portion is 8.2 seconds or more and less than 8.8 seconds, the number of prizes that allow loop playback of the chorus portion is: "0, 1" are associated and defined. If the number of prizes won is 1 or less, even if the second prize is detected immediately after the chorus is played, the 8th prize from the 3rd to the 10th will be completed before the end of the final round. About 4.8 seconds (0.6 second interval x 8 pieces) until the minute winning is detected, plus 4 seconds that can delay the start of the ending production, for 8.8 seconds This can be reserved as time for loop playback. Therefore, if the chorus portion has a playback time of less than 8.8 seconds, there is a high possibility that the playback of the chorus portion will end before the ending effect starts even if loop playback is performed. is in the range of 8.2 seconds or more and less than 8.8 seconds, the hook loop determination table 222db is defined so as to allow loop playback of the hook portion for the range in which the number of winning prizes is 1 or less. ing.

Also, as shown in FIG. 153, for the range where the playback time (L) of the chorus portion is 8.8 seconds or more and less than 9.4 seconds, the number of prizes allowed for loop playback of the chorus portion is: Only "0" is associated and defined. If the number of prizes won is 0, even if the first prize is detected immediately after the chorus part is played, the 2nd to 10th nine prizes will be played before the end of the final round. Approximately 5.4 seconds (0.6 second interval x 9 pieces) until the winning is detected, and 9.4 seconds, which is the sum of 4 seconds that can delay the start of the ending effect, is looped in the chorus part. It can be secured as time for playing. Therefore, if the chorus portion has a playback time of less than 9.4 seconds, there is a high possibility that the playback of the chorus portion will end before the ending effect starts even if loop playback is performed. is 8.8 seconds or more and less than 9.4 seconds, the chorus loop determination table 222db is defined so as to allow the loop reproduction of the chorus part in the range where the number of winning prizes is 0 or less. ing.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 153, when the playback time (L) of the chorus portion is in the range of 9.4 seconds or longer, loop playback is not allowed. This is because, regardless of the number of prizes won, there is a high possibility that the timing for starting the ending effect will come during the playback of the chorus.

As described above, in the fourth control example, when the reproduction of the chorus portion is completed in the final round, the chorus loop determination table 222db determines whether or not the chorus portion is to be loop-reproduced. By configuring in this way, whether the chorus part can be loop-played before the ending effect is started (whether the ending effect is likely to start during the playback of the chorus part is low) can be accurately determined. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the ending effect is started during the reproduction of the chorus part, so that the chorus part can be completely reproduced during the final round of the jackpot (and the ending delay period). .

Next, with reference to FIG. 151(b), the configuration of the RAM 223 of the audio ramp control device 113 in the fourth control example will be described. FIG. 151(b) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 223. As shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 151(b), the RAM 223 in the fourth control example has a loop discrimination flag 223da and a reproduction mode storage area 223db in contrast to the configuration of the RAM 223 in the third control example (see FIG. 142(b)). , and a winning number counter 223dc is added.

The loop determination flag 223da is a flag indicating whether or not it is a period for determining whether loop reproduction of the chorus portion is possible. If this loop discrimination flag 223da is ON, it indicates that it is a period for determining whether or not loop reproduction is possible (that is, the final round of the jackpot), and if it is OFF, it indicates that it is not a period for determining whether or not loop reproduction is possible. . This loop discrimination flag 223da is set to ON at the start of the final round of the jackpot (see S5421 in FIG. 161), and set to OFF at the start of the ending period of the jackpot (see S4484 in FIG. 159).

The reproduction mode storage area 223db is a storage area for storing data indicating a music reproduction mode (for 5R, 8R/10R, or 16R). The reproduction mode storage area 223db stores data indicating a reproduction mode corresponding to the number of rounds of the jackpot and the lottery result as to whether or not the pseudo small round effect can be executed (see S5841 and S5842 in FIG. 160). Based on the data stored in the reproduction mode storage area 223db, the reproduction mode when a piece of music is determined is set.

The winning number counter 223dc is a counter for counting the number of game balls that have won the right specific winning opening 65a or the left specific winning opening 650a in each round of the jackpot. The winning number counter 223dc has an initial value of 0, and each time the main controller 110 receives a winning command output when a winning to the right specific winning port 65a or the left specific winning port 650a is detected. is incremented by 1 (see S4486 in FIG. 159). Also, the value is reset to 0 when each round ends (see S4484 in FIG. 159 and S5521 in FIG. 164). In the final round of the jackpot (while the loop discrimination flag 223da is on), when the reproduction of the chorus is completed, the value of the winning number counter 223dc and the chorus loop discrimination table 222db are referred to, and the chorus is reproduced. It is determined whether or not to perform loop playback (see S5905 in FIG. 158).

Next, with reference to FIG. 154, the configuration of the RAM 303 of the audio output device 226 in this fourth control example will be described. FIG. 154 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 303 in this fourth control example. As shown in FIG. 154, the RAM 303 in the fourth control example has a temporary music selection flag 303g added to the configuration of the RAM 303 in the third control example (and the second control example) (see FIG. 126). is different. Since other configurations are the same as those of the third control example described above, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The provisional music selection flag 303g is a flag indicating whether or not the chorus portion of the music arranged (temporarily selected) in the music selection area by the player's operation of the operation button 230 during the music selection period should be loop-played. be. If this provisional music selection flag 303g is ON, it indicates that the loop reproduction of the chorus portion should be performed, and if it is OFF, it indicates that the loop reproduction of the chorus portion should not be performed. This provisional music selection flag 303g is set to ON each time a new item is arranged in the music selection area by operating the operation button 230 by the player while the music selection menu screen is displayed (see FIG. 168). S9507). In addition, when the player decides the song during the song selection period in the 5th round jackpot (the player presses the center button CB), or when the song selection period ends in a jackpot other than the 5th round, it is set to OFF ( See S9233 and S9239 in FIG. 167). While this provisional song selection flag 303g is on, control is performed to loop-play back the chorus (see S9603 in FIG. 169).

<Regarding control processing of the sound ramp control device in the fourth control example>
Next, various control processes executed by the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 in the fourth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 155 to 165. FIG. First, with reference to FIG. 155, the main processing 11 of the sound ramp control device 113 in the fourth control example will be described. 155 is a flowchart showing main processing 11. FIG.

S4101 to S4111, S4114 to S4118, and S4152 of the main process 11 (see FIG. 155) correspond to S4101 to S4111, S4113 to S4118, S4113 to S4118, S4113 to S4118 of the main process 10 (not shown) in the third control example, respectively. and S4152 are executed. Further, in the main process 11 (see FIG. 155) in the fourth control example, when the process of S4111 ends, the operation detection process 11 is executed instead of the operation detection process 10 (see FIG. 144) in the third control example. (S4171). Although the details will be described later with reference to FIG. 156, this operation detection process 11 (S4171) monitors the operation (pressing) on the operation button 230 and detects the operation, as in the operation detection process 10 (see FIG. 144). is detected, it is a process for executing control according to the operation content.

When the operation detection process 11 (S4171) is completed, next, in the last round of the jackpot, when the reproduction of the chorus part is completed, the chorus part loop process is executed for determining whether or not to loop-play the chorus part. (S4172). Details of the chorus portion loop processing (S4172) will be described later with reference to FIG. Also, when the chorus portion loop processing (S4172) ends, the command determination processing 11 for performing control according to the type of command received from the main controller 110 is executed (S4173), and the processing proceeds to S4162. .

Next, details of the operation detection process 11 (S4171) described above will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. This operation detection process 11 (S4171) is, as described above, a process executed in place of the operation detection process 10 (see FIG. 144) in the third control example. Of this operation detection process 11 (S4171), S5101 to S5106, S5109, and S5110 each correspond to S5101 to S5106, S5109, and S5110 of operation detection process 10 (see FIG. 144) in the third control example. The same processing as the processing is executed.

Further, in the operation detection process 11 (see FIG. 156) in the fourth control example, if it is determined in the process of S5106 that an operation on the center button CB has been detected (S5106: Yes), music determination in the third control example is performed. Instead of the process (see FIG. 145), the song determination process 11 is executed (S5131), and this process ends. This music determination process 11 (S5131) is a process for determining the music to be reproduced after the music selection period ends or immediately after the selection according to the type of the selected item and the number of rounds of the jackpot. The details of this song determination process 11 (S5131) will be described later with reference to FIG.

Further, in the operation detection process 11 (see FIG. 156) in the fourth control example, when the process of S5110 ends, the chorus part of the music corresponding to the value of the menu position pointer 223ab updated by the process of S5109 is played in a loop. A temporary music selection command for audio is set (S5132), and this process ends. The audio provisional music selection command set here is output to the audio output device 226 in the command output process (S4102) of the main process 11 (see FIG. 155). When the audio output device 226 receives the audio provisional music selection command, it sets the start of reproduction from the chorus of the music indicated by the received command. Thus, every time a player operates the operation button 230 to place a new item in the music selection area, the chorus portion corresponding to the placed item can be reproduced. Therefore, not only the title of the song but also the melody of the chorus can be taken into consideration when selecting the song, so that the user can select the desired song more accurately. Therefore, convenience for the player can be further enhanced.

Next, with reference to FIG. 157, the details of the above-described song determination processing 11 (S5131) will be described. This song determination process 11 (S5131) is, as described above, a process executed instead of the song determination process (see FIG. 145) in the third control example.

In the music determination process 11 (see FIG. 157) in the fourth control example, the processes of S5801 to S5806 are the same as the processes of S5801 to S5806 in the music determination process (see FIG. 145) in the third control example. Processing is performed. In addition, in the song determination process 11 (see FIG. 157) in the fourth control example, if the random song selection has not been determined by the player in the process of S5801 (the most significant bit of the menu position pointer 223ab is not ON (1)). If it is determined (S5801: No), then the data stored in the reproduction mode storage area 223db is read (S5811), and it is determined whether the read data corresponds to the reproduction mode for 5R ( S5812).

In the process of S5812, if the data corresponding to the reproduction mode for 5R is not stored in the reproduction mode storage area 223db (that is, the data corresponding to the reproduction mode for 8R/10R or 16R is stored). If so (S5812: No), the process proceeds to S5802. On the other hand, in the processing of S5812, if it is determined that the data corresponding to the reproduction mode for 5R is stored in the reproduction mode storage area 223db (S5812: Yes), the voice for notifying the cancellation of the loop playback of the hook part A command for canceling the loop for use is set (S5813), and this processing ends. The audio loop release command set here is output to the audio output device 226 in the command output process (S4102) of the main process 11 (see FIG. 155). When the audio loop release command is received, the audio output device 226 releases the loop reproduction of the chorus (that is, sets the provisional music selection flag 303g to off). As a result, when the reproduction time of the chorus part currently being reproduced ends, the parts (music data) specified in the order of reproduction next to the chorus part are set to be reproduced without the loop reproduction of the chorus part. After that, each piece of music data is reproduced in order according to the reproduction order of the music data. As a result, the number of rounds is small and the period until the jackpot ends (that is, the period in which the song can be played) tends to be short. (b) to play music. Therefore, in the 5-round jackpot with a small number of rounds, it is possible to effectively utilize a relatively short period until the jackpot ends to reproduce music.

In addition, in the song determination process 11 (see FIG. 157) in the fourth control example, when the process of S5805 ends, the playback of the song for the song selection period is set (S5814), and the process proceeds to S5806. When the random music selection is determined (S5801: Yes), setting the reproduction of the music for the music selection period without reproducing the chorus of the music determined by lottery using the random music selection table 222ca is the music selection. By determining random music selection many times during the period, an irregular selection method of repeatedly determining whether or not the chorus part of ``music a'' is reproduced is prevented, ” is reproduced only once.

Next, with reference to FIG. 158, the chorus portion loop processing (S4172) described above will be described. FIG. 158 is a flow chart showing the chorus portion loop processing (S4172). As described above, the chorus part loop processing (S4172) is a process for determining whether or not the chorus part is to be loop-reproduced when the reproduction of the chorus part is completed in the final round of the jackpot.

In the chorus portion loop processing (see FIG. 158), first, it is determined whether or not the loop determination flag 223da is on (S5901). Since there is no possibility of loop-reproducing the chorus part, this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S5901 that the loop determination flag 223da is ON (S5901: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the part currently being reproduced is the chorus (S5902). is not being reproduced (S5902: No), there is no possibility of loop-reproducing the chorus part, so this processing ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S5902 that the part being reproduced is the chorus portion (S5902: Yes), then the remaining reproduction time of the chorus portion (the value of the remaining reproduction time timer 223bb) is 0. (S5903), and if it is determined that the remaining playback time of the chorus portion (the value of the remaining playback time timer 223bb) is not 0 (S5903: No), the chorus portion is reproduced as it is. End the process. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S5903 that the remaining playback time of the chorus portion (the value of the remaining playback time timer 223bb) has become 0 (S5903: Yes), it is determined whether loop playback of the chorus portion can be executed. The processing of S5904 to S5907 is executed to

More specifically, first, the chorus loop determination table 222db (see FIG. 153) is read (S5904), and the defined contents of the read chorus loop determination table 222db, the playback time (L) of the chorus portion of the currently-played song, and the , and the value of the prize number counter 223dc, it is determined whether or not loop reproduction of the chorus can be executed (S5905). As described above, the chorus loop determination table 222db (see FIG. 153) is set so as to allow loop reproduction of the chorus when there is a high possibility that the chorus will end before the ending effect starts. It is

Next, it is determined whether the determination result by the processing of S5905 corresponds to execution of loop reproduction (S5906). ), and the process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S5906 that the determination result corresponds to execution of loop playback (S5906: Yes), a loop playback command for audio indicating loop playback of the chorus is set (S5907). , the process ends. The audio loop reproduction command set here is output to the audio output device 226 in the command output process (S4102) of the main process 11 (see FIG. 155). Upon receiving the audio loop reproduction command, the audio output device 226 reproduces the chorus portion that has been reproduced from the beginning again. This allows the player to listen to the chorus, which is the most exciting part of the music, more times before the ending effect is started. Therefore, it is possible to make the player feel a greater sense of satisfaction.

Next, with reference to FIG. 159, the win-related process 11 (S4381) in the fourth control example will be described. This win-related process 11 (S4381) is a process executed instead of the win-related process 10 (see FIG. 146) in the third control example. Of the winning-related processing 11 (S4381) in the fourth control example, in each of the processing of S4401 to S4404, S4406, S4407, S4409, S4462, and S4464 to S4466, the winning-related processing 10 in the third control example (FIG. 146 ), S4401 to S4404, S4406, S4407, S4409, S4462, and S4464 to S4466 are executed.

Further, in the hit-related process 11 (see FIG. 159) in the fourth control example, when it is determined in the process of S4404 that the command received from the main controller 110 includes an opening command (S4404: Yes), instead of the pseudo small round lottery process (see FIG. 147) in the third control example, the pseudo small round lottery process 11 is executed (S4481), and the process proceeds to S4406. Although the details will be described later with reference to FIG. 160, this pseudo small round lottery process 11 (S4481) is similar to the pseudo small round lottery process (see FIG. 147) in the third control example, and the pseudo small round effect is executed. This is a process for determining whether or not the application is possible.

Further, in the hit-related process 11 (see FIG. 159) in the fourth control example, when it is determined in the process of S4407 that the command received from the main controller 110 includes a round number command (S4407 : Yes), instead of the round number command process 10 (see FIG. 148) in the third control example, the round number command process 11 is executed (S4482), and this process ends. Although details will be described later with reference to FIG. 161, this round number command process 11 (S4482) is a process for performing control according to the number of rounds indicated by the round number command.

Further, in the hit-related process 11 (see FIG. 159) in the fourth control example, when it is determined in the process of S4462 that the interval command is included in the command received from the main controller 110 (S4462: Yes), instead of interval command processing 10 (see FIG. 149) in the third control example, interval command 11 is executed (S4483), and this processing ends. Details will be described later with reference to FIG. 164, but this interval command process 11 (S4483) is a process for performing control according to the type of interval (what round the interval is).

Further, in the winning-related process 11 (see FIG. 159) in the fourth control example, when it is determined in the process of S4409 that the ending command is included in the command received from the main controller 110 (S4409: Yes), the loop determination flag 223da is set to OFF, the winning number counter 223dc is reset to 0 (S4484), and the process proceeds to S4464. Through the processing of S4484, the period for judging the loop reproduction of the chorus portion can be ended.

Also, in the hit-related process 11 (see FIG. 159) in the fourth control example, when it is determined in the process of S4465 that the command received from the main controller 110 does not include a music command (S4465: No), then it is determined whether or not the winning command is included in the command received from the main controller 110 (S4485), and if it is determined that the winning command is included (S4485: Yes), The value of the winning number counter 223dc is incremented by 1 (S4486), and this process is terminated. By updating the value of the winning number counter 223dc according to the winning command, it is possible to grasp the progress of each round of the big win (approximate remaining time until the round ends). Therefore, in the final round, it is possible to accurately determine whether or not there is a period of time left to reproduce the chorus part to the end, taking into consideration the counter value of the winning number counter 223dc. On the other hand, in the process of S4485, if it is determined that the command received from the main controller 110 does not include the winning command (S4485: No), the process ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 160, details of the pseudo small round lottery process 11 (S4481) described above will be described. FIG. 160 is a flowchart showing the pseudo small round lottery process 11 (S4481). This pseudo small round lottery process 11 (S4481) is, as described above, a process executed in place of the pseudo small round lottery process (see FIG. 147) in the third control example. Of the pseudo small round lottery process 11 (S4481) in the fourth control example, in each process of S5831 to S5838, each process of S5831 to S5838 of the pseudo small round lottery process in the third control example (see FIG. 147) The same processing is performed.

In addition, in the pseudo small round lottery process 11 (see FIG. 160) in the fourth control example, when it is determined in the process of S5834 that the pseudo small round effect is to be executed (S5834: Yes), whether or not the pseudo small round effect can be executed At the same time as the lottery, data indicating the reproduction mode of the song determined by lottery using the pseudo-small round lottery table 222cb (see FIG. 152(a)) is stored in the reproduction mode storage area 223db (S5841), and the process is performed. Move to S5835. Based on the data stored by the process of S5841, when the music is determined during the music selection period, the reproduction mode of the determined music can be appropriately set. As a result, in a part (predetermined ratio) when the pseudo-small round production (production as if it were a (disadvantageous) jackpot with a number of rounds smaller than the actual number of rounds) is executed, only the voice mode It is possible to set the reproduction mode corresponding to the number of rounds of the actual jackpot. By configuring in this way, it is possible for the player to perceive from the voice mode that the pseudo small round effect has been executed before the continuous effect is executed. Therefore, it is possible to make the player who can sense early that the pseudo small round effect is being executed have a sense of superiority.

In addition, in the pseudo small round lottery process 11 (see FIG. 160) in the fourth control example, in the process of S5831, the jackpot won this time is neither jackpot A nor jackpot D (that is, jackpots B, C, E, F). Either) (S5831: No), and in the process of S5834, if it is determined that the pseudo small round effect is not executed (S5834: No), the number of songs corresponding to the number of rounds of the jackpot The data indicating the reproduction mode is stored in the reproduction mode storage area 223db (S5842), and this processing ends. Specifically, if the current jackpot is either jackpot B or C (5-round jackpot), data corresponding to the playback mode for "5R" is stored, while either jackpot E or F ( If it is a 10-round jackpot), data corresponding to the reproduction mode of "for 8R/10R" is stored. In addition, when the current jackpot is jackpot A (8 round jackpot) and the simulated small round effect is not executed, data corresponding to the reproduction mode "for 8R/10R" is stored in the reproduction mode storage area 223db. On the other hand, when the jackpot is D (16 round jackpot) and the simulated small round effect is not executed, data corresponding to the reproduction mode of "for 16R" is stored.

By executing this pseudo-small-round lottery process 11 (see FIG. 160), the music reproduction mode (the timing at which music reproduction is started and the music reproduction position) can be varied according to the number of rounds of the jackpot. can be done. Then, it is possible to set a reproduction mode in which only the voice mode corresponds to the actual number of rounds of the jackpot in a part (predetermined ratio) when the pseudo small round effect is executed. As a result, it is possible to make the player perceive that the pseudo small round effect has been executed before the continuous effect is executed, from the voice mode. Therefore, it is possible to give a sense of superiority to the player who can perceive early that the pseudo small round effect is being executed.

Next, details of the above-described round number command process 11 (S4482) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. This round number command process 11 (S4482) is, as described above, a process executed in place of the round number command process 10 (see FIG. 148) in the third control example.

In the processes of S5401 to S5406 and S5411 of the round number command process 11 (see FIG. 161) in the fourth control example, S5401 to S5406 of the round number command process 10 (see FIG. 148) in the third control example , and S5411 are executed. In the round number command process 11 (see FIG. 161) in the fourth control example, when it is determined in the process of S5402 that the number of rounds notified by the current round number command is the final round (S5402: Yes ), the loop determination flag 223da is set to ON (S5421), and the process proceeds to S5403. By setting the loop determination flag 223da to ON in the process of S5421, it is possible to determine whether or not to loop-reproduce the chorus part at the timing when the chorus part reproduction time has elapsed during the final round. As a result, it is possible to increase the chances of the chorus portion being reproduced during execution of one jackpot.

In the round number command process 11 (see FIG. 161) in the fourth control example, when it is determined in the process of S5406 that the number of rounds notified by the current round number command is the first round (S5406: Yes), instead of the music selection period setting process (see FIG. 132) in the third control example (and the second control example), the music selection period setting process 11 is executed (S5422), and this process ends. Details of this music selection period setting process 11 (S5422) will be described with reference to FIG.

FIG. 162 is a flow chart showing the music selection period setting process 11 (S5422). Of this music selection period setting process 11 (S5422), in each process of S5205, S5206, S5208 to S5213, S5221, and S5222, the music selection period setting process (see FIG. 132) in the third control example (and second control example) ) are executed in steps S5205, S5206, S5208 to S5213, S5221, and S5222.

Also, in the music selection period setting process 11 (see FIG. 162) in the fourth control example, first, history area setting process for setting items to be arranged in the history area is executed (S5231), and the process proceeds to S5205. do. Details of this history area setting process (S5231) will be described with reference to FIG.

FIG. 163 is a flowchart showing history area setting processing (S5231). This history area setting process (S5231) is, as described above, a process for setting items to be arranged in the history area. In this history area setting process (S5231), first, the data stored in the song selection count storage area 223ac (see FIG. 105(b)) is read out (S5271), and there are three or more songs with a playback count of 1 or more. It is determined whether or not (S5272). In the processing of S5272, if it is determined that there are less than three songs with the number of times of reproduction of 1 or more (S5272: No), the data of the number of times of reproduction of 1 or more among the data defined in the number of times of selection storage area 223ac is selected. (S5273), and stores the read data in the history area (storage area corresponding to the value range "17H" to "19H" of the menu position pointer 223ab) of the item layout storage area 223aa (see FIG. 105(a)). are stored in descending order of the number of times of reproduction (S5274). Next, among the history areas, the remaining area (empty area) in which data was not stored in the process of S5274 has a higher priority defined in the priority definition table 222da (see FIG. 152(b)). The data are stored in order from the item (S5275), and this processing is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S5272, if it is determined that the number of songs whose number of times of reproduction is 1 or more is 3 or more (S5272: Yes), three pieces of data are read from the music selection number storage area 223ac in descending order of the number of times of reproduction. (S5276), the three pieces of data read out are stored in the history area of the item layout storage area 223aa in descending order of the number of times of reproduction (S5277), and this process ends.

By executing this history area setting process (see FIG. 163), even if the number of songs selected is small (the number of songs selected once or more is less than 3), Items that are highly likely to be selected by the player (high priority items defined in the priority level definition table 222da) can be arranged. More specifically, most players who have seen works that have served as motifs in the past, such as opening songs (theme songs), ending songs, insert songs, etc. Music that has definitely been heard before is defined as an item with a high priority. By configuring in this way, even if the number of songs selected is small, items that are highly likely to be known by a larger number of players can be arranged in the history area. That is, regardless of the number of songs selected, songs that are highly likely to be selected by the player can be placed in the history area, so convenience for the player when selecting songs can be enhanced.

Next, details of the interval command process 11 (S4483) described above will be described with reference to FIG. S5501 to S5506 and S5511 to S5514 of the interval command process 11 (S4483) in the fourth control example correspond to S5501 to S5506 and S5501 to S5506 of the interval command process 10 (see FIG. 149) in the third control example, respectively. The same processing as each processing of S5511 to S5514 is executed.

Also, in the interval command process 11 (see FIG. 164) in the fourth control example, after the process of S5501 is completed, the prize number counter 223dc is reset to 0 (S5521), and the process proceeds to S5511. By resetting the winning number counter 223dc every time an interval command is received, the number of game balls winning a specific winning hole (the right specific winning hole 65a or the left specific winning hole 650a) in each round of the jackpot. can be accurately grasped on the audio lamp control device 113 side.

Further, in the interval command processing 11 (see FIG. 164) in the fourth control example, it is determined in S5506 that the interval period whose start is notified by the current interval command is the interval period after the end of the first round. If it is determined (S5506: Yes), the selected music setting process is executed to set the reproduction of the music selected (determined) by the player during the music selection period (that is, the first round) (S5522), End this process. Details of this selected music setting process (S5522) will be described with reference to FIG.

FIG. 165 is a flow chart showing the selected music setting process (S5522). In this selected music setting process (S5522), first, the music corresponding to the data stored in the music type storage area 223bd is specified (S5551). A reproduction mode is specified (S5552). Then, it is determined whether or not the reproduction mode specified in the processing of S5552 is the reproduction mode for 5R (S5553), and if it is determined to be the reproduction mode for 5R (S5553: Yes), then It is determined whether or not the music during the music selection period is being reproduced (S5554). In the process of S5554, if it is determined that the music during the music selection period is being played (S5554: Yes), the player determines whether the music selection menu screen has been displayed even once during the music selection period or the player randomly selects music. This means that the music corresponding to the data stored in the music type storage area 223bd is not set to be played back. A music selection command for use is set (S5555), and the process proceeds to S5559.

On the other hand, in the process of S5554, if it is determined that the music for the music selection period is not being played (S5554: No), the player displays the music selection menu screen during the music selection period, , any of the songs A to Z) is selected. As described above, when a song is selected while the playback mode for 5R is set, the loop playback of the chorus of the song is canceled at that point, and the song data is replayed from the playback position that was being played at the time of determination. The music is set to start playing according to the playing order. That is, since there is no need to newly set the reproduction of music at the end of the music selection period, the process of S5555 is skipped and the process proceeds to S5559.

Further, in the processing of S5553, if it is determined that the reproduction mode specified in the processing of S5552 is not the reproduction mode for 5R (S5553: No), then It is determined whether it is in the mode (S5556). In the process of S5556, if it is determined that the playback mode for 16R is not specified (the playback mode for 8R/10R is specified) (S5556: No), the song specified by the process of S5551 is the A melody part. A music selection command for audio to be played back from is set (S5557), and the process proceeds to S5559. On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S5556 that the specified playback mode is the playback mode for 16R (S5556: Yes), a selected audio music command for playing back the music specified in the process of S5551 from the intro part is set (S5558), and the process proceeds to S5559.

In the processing of S5559, 1 is added to the data corresponding to the number of song selections of the currently reproduced song in the song selection count storage area 223ac (S5559), the song selection menu screen is closed, and the menu display flag 223ae and song selection permission flag 223ad are displayed. is set to off (S5560), and the process ends.

By executing this selected music setting process (see FIG. 165), at the end of the music selection period, the reproduction of the music selected by the player is set in a reproduction mode corresponding to the data stored in the reproduction mode storage area 223db. can do.

<Regarding control processing of the audio output device in the fourth control example>
Next, various control processes executed by the MPU 301 of the audio output device 226 in the fourth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 166 to 169. FIG. First, with reference to FIG. 166, main processing 11 executed by the MPU 301 of the audio output device 226 in this fourth control example will be described. This main process 11 is a process executed in place of the main process 9 (see FIG. 136) in the third control example (and second control example).

In main processing 11 (see FIG. 166), S9003 to S9007, S9011, and S9013 each correspond to steps S9003 to S9007 and S9007 of main processing 9 (see FIG. 136) in the third control example (and second control example). The same processing as each processing of S9011 and S9013 is executed. Further, in the main processing 11 (see FIG. 166) in the fourth control example, when the processing of S9011 ends, instead of the command determination processing 9 (see FIG. 137) in the third control example (and the second control example) Then, command determination processing 11 is executed (S9021), and the processing proceeds to S9013. Although details will be described later with reference to FIG. 167, this command determination process 11 (S9021) is similar to the command determination process 9 (see FIG. 137) in the third control example. It is a process for executing control according to the type of

In addition, in the main processing 11 (see FIG. 166) in the fourth control example, when the processing of S9013 is completed, the chorus portion of the item (music) placed (temporarily selected) by the player in the music selection area during the music selection period is displayed. (S9022), and the process proceeds to S9003. The details of this provisional music selection period processing (S9022) will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, with reference to FIG. 167, details of the command determination process 11 (S9021) described above will be described. FIG. 167 is a flowchart showing command determination processing 11 (S9021). This command determination process 11 (S9021) is, as described above, a process executed in place of the command determination process 9 (see FIG. 137) in the third control example. In each of S9201 to S9205, S9207, S9214, S9221, and S9222 of command determination processing 11 (see FIG. 167), S9201 to S9205 and S9205 of command determination processing 9 (see FIG. 137) in the third control example, respectively. The same processing as each of S9207, S9214, S9221, and S9222 is executed.

In the command determination process 11 (see FIG. 167) in the fourth control example, when the process of S9205 is finished, next, the pointer value corresponding to the part indicated by the audio selection music command received from the audio lamp control device 113 is set. The music pointer 303b is set, and the timer value corresponding to the reproduction time of the part for which reproduction is set is set in the music timer 303d (S9231), and the process proceeds to S9207. When the process of S9207 is finished, it sets reproduction from the music data corresponding to the part indicated by the selected audio music command received from the audio lamp control device 113 (S9232), and sets the provisional music selection flag 303g to OFF. (S9233), and the process ends.

In addition, in the command determination process 11 (see FIG. 167) in the fourth control example, if it is determined in the process of S9204 that the unprocessed command does not include the audio selection music command (S9204: No ), and then it is determined whether or not the unprocessed commands include an audio loop playback command (that is, a command for instructing loop playback of the chorus portion in the final round) (S9234). In the process of S9234, if it is determined that the unprocessed commands include the voice loop playback command (S9234: Yes), the timer value corresponding to the playback time of the chorus portion where the playback ends is set to the music timer 303d. , and the playback of the chorus portion where playback ends is set again (S9235), and this processing ends. By executing the process of S9235, the chorus can be played back in a loop in the final round of the jackpot. Therefore, the chorus portion can be reproduced more times during one big win, so that the player's interest can be improved.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S9234 that the unprocessed commands do not include the audio loop playback command, then the unprocessed commands include the temporary audio music selection command (newly added to the music selection area). command for instructing loop reproduction of the chorus of the music arranged in the .) is included (S9236). In the process of S9236, if it is determined that the unprocessed commands include the provisional music selection command for audio (S9236: Yes), the item (temporarily selected music) newly placed in the music selection area (music ) is executed (S9237), and the process ends. The details of this provisional music selection command process (S9237) will be described later with reference to FIG.

If it is determined in the process of S9236 that the unprocessed commands do not include the audio temporary music selection command (S9236: No), then the unprocessed commands include the audio loop release command. It is determined whether or not it is included (S9238). In the processing of S9238, when it is determined that an unprocessed command includes an audio loop release command (a command for instructing release of the loop playback of the chorus of the temporarily selected song in the 5th round jackpot) (S9238: Yes), by turning off the provisional music selection flag 303g, the loop reproduction of the chorus portion of the provisionally selected music is set to be canceled (S9239), and this processing ends. By canceling the loop reproduction of the chorus part in the process of S9239, after the reproduction time of the chorus part has elapsed, the music data can be reproduced in order according to the reproduction order of the music data. As a result, the number of rounds is small and the period until the jackpot ends (that is, the period in which the song can be played) tends to be short. (b) to play music. Therefore, in the 5-round jackpot with a small number of rounds, it is possible to effectively utilize a relatively short period until the jackpot ends to reproduce music.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S9238 that the unprocessed commands do not include the audio loop playback command, the process proceeds to S9221.

Next, with reference to FIG. 168, details of the provisional music selection command process (S9237) described above will be described. This provisional music selection command process (S9237) is, as described above, a process for loop-playing the chorus of the item (music) newly placed (temporarily selected) in the music selection area.

In the provisional music selection command process (see FIG. 168), first, it is determined whether or not the command is a provisional music selection command indicating random music selection (S9501). ), the reproduction of the music for the music selection period is set (S9502), and this processing ends. On the other hand, in the processing of S9501, if it is determined that the received provisional music selection command is not a provisional music selection command indicating random music selection (S9501: No), the audio file (music data group) corresponding to the music indicated by the command is retrieved. It reads from the voice file storage area 302a and stores the read voice file in the music data group storage area 303a (S9503).

When the process of S9503 is finished, next, a pointer value corresponding to the chorus 1 portion of the music notified by the command is set to the music pointer 303b, and a timer value corresponding to the reproduction time of the chorus 1 portion is set to the music pointer 303b. is set in the timer 303d (S9504). Next, the maximum value of the music pointer 303b is stored in the maximum value storage area 303c (S9505), and reproduction of the music data corresponding to the chorus 1 is set (S9506). Then, the provisional music selection flag 303g is set to ON (S9507), and this processing is terminated.

By executing this provisional music selection command process (see FIG. 168), it is possible to start the loop reproduction of the chorus 1 portion of the provisionally selected music piece. As a result, the player can select his or her favorite song by taking into consideration not only the name of the song displayed on the song selection menu screen, but also the melody of the chorus of the song. Therefore, it is possible to enhance convenience for the player when selecting music.

Next, with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 169, the details of the temporary music selection period process (S9022) executed in the main process 11 (see FIG. 166) will be described. This provisional music selection period process (S9022) is, as described above, a process for loop-playing the chorus of the music when the music is provisionally selected (arranged in the music selection area).

In this provisional music selection period processing (see FIG. 169), first, it is determined whether or not the provisional music selection flag 303g is on (S9601). No), which means that the song has not been provisionally selected, so this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S9601 that the temporary music selection flag 303g is ON (S9601: Yes), it is determined whether or not it is time to end the reproduction of the music data being reproduced (S9602), and the reproduction ends. If it is determined that it is not the timing (S9602: No), this processing ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S9602, if it is determined that it is time to end the reproduction of the music data being reproduced (the value of the music timer 303d is 0) (S9602: Yes), the reproduction of the chorus 1 portion is started. It resets (S9603), resets the reproduction time corresponding to the chorus 1 portion to the music timer 303d (S9604), and terminates this processing.

By executing this provisional music selection period process (see FIG. 169), the chorus 1 portion of the provisionally selected music (arranged in the music selection area) can be repeatedly reproduced. Therefore, it is possible to allow the player to more easily select his or her favorite music, thereby enhancing the convenience of the player.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 in the fourth control example, when the number of items to be set in the history area is small (less than three items), the empty area of the history area (items with high selection frequency are not arranged) The order of priority (priority) of items to be placed in each area is defined. This priority is higher for songs that are more likely to be known by more players (for example, the theme song (opening song) of the work that is the motif of the pachinko machine 10, the ending song, the insert song, etc.). is set to By configuring in this way, even if the number of selections of songs is small, songs that are likely to be selected by the player can be arranged in the history area, so that convenience for the player can be improved. can.

Further, in the fourth control example, when the reproduction of the chorus portion ends during the final round, it is determined whether or not the chorus portion is to be reproduced repeatedly according to the progress of the final round. More specifically, it is possible to end the chorus between the end of the chorus playback and the end of the final round (or the end of the period during which the ending effect can be delayed). If there is a high possibility that the chorus part will be played repeatedly, if there is a high possibility that the chorus part will end in the middle (the ending effect will start in the middle of the chorus part being played), the chorus part will not be repeated. Playback is set according to the playback order of music data. By configuring in this way, it is possible to increase the possibility that the chorus portion will not be cut off in the final round and can be reproduced in a complete form.

Furthermore, in the fourth control example, each time a different item is arranged (temporarily selected) in the music selection area by the player operating the operation button 230 during the music selection period, the chorus portion of the music corresponding to the arranged item is displayed. is configured to play back. As a result, it is possible to select a song by considering not only the name of the song displayed on the song selection menu screen, but also the melody of the most characteristic chorus part of the song. Further, in the fourth control example, when a song is determined during the song selection period, the playback start position and playback start timing of the song are varied according to the number of rounds of the jackpot. Specifically, in the case of a jackpot with a large number of rounds (16 rounds), at the end of the music selection period, playback is started from the beginning of the song (intro part), and the jackpots of 10 rounds and 8 rounds are played. In the case of (2), when the song selection period ends, playback is started from the A melody part of the song (that is, skipping the intro part). On the other hand, in the case of a jackpot with a small number of rounds (five rounds), when the player decides on a song, the song continues to play from the chorus part that is already being played (the song selection period ends). The music is played back from the front). By configuring in this way, even in the case of a small number of rounds, the player can listen to the chorus part for a longer time.

In the fourth control example, when the number of items to be placed in the history area is small (when the number of songs selected by the player at least once is less than three), the priority definition table 222da, the data is stored in descending order of priority, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, regardless of the number of empty areas in the history area, the items arranged in the history area may be stored in the item arrangement storage area 223aa in descending order of priority. With this configuration, even if the player has selected many songs, the songs that are relatively likely to be selected by the player (high priority) can be selected by a relatively small number of operations. It can be set to an arrangement that can be moved to the music selection area with .

In this fourth control example, when the initial layout of the music selection menu screen is determined, a range (history area in the item layout storage area 223aa) that can be selected with a small number of operations among the storage areas of the item layout storage area 223aa. On the other hand, among items with one or more selection counts, a maximum of three items are stored in descending order of selection counts. If the number of items arranged in the history area is less than 3, an item to be arranged in the empty area of the history area is added and set from among the items with 0 selection counts. The control is not limited to determining the initial layout of the music selection menu screen. Any control that sets a predetermined number of data in a specific range of storage areas in storage means such as a RAM can be used. In other words, it is a case where a predetermined number of data are set in the first storage area and the second storage area of the storage means, and the specific condition is set in the first storage area. is stored, and other data is placed in the second storage area. Specifically, for example, a player selects one item from a plurality of items on a predetermined menu screen (for example, a game menu screen or a menu screen for selecting an effect mode in a ready-to-win effect). When a plurality of items including selectable items and unselectable items are displayed at the same time (for example, selectable items increase each time the player completes a predetermined mission (task)). It may be diverted to the case of displaying a menu with a specification that goes up). In other words, in a specific display range, items that can be selected by the player are preferentially arranged, and the remaining items can be arranged in other display ranges. good. In this case, first, data corresponding to items to be displayed in a specific display range is set. Then, when a sufficient number of items to be displayed in a specific display range can be set, the remaining data are subsequently set as items to be displayed in another display range. On the other hand, if the number of items less than the number of items that can be displayed in the specific display range is selectable by the player, the items that the player cannot select as the items to be displayed in the specific display range. Data may be set so that items are displayed in a specific display range in order of priority among the items. As a method of setting the priority in this case, for example, items that are easily switched to a selectable state (items that are switched to a selectable state by completing a mission with a relatively easy difficulty) have a higher priority. can be set as

In this fourth control example, when the number of items (items selected once or more) to be placed in the history area is less than 3, the priority of the items to be additionally placed in the history area is as follows. The composition is such that the more frequently used songs (opening song (theme song), ending song, insert song, etc.) are used in the work that is the motif of the pachinko machine 10, the higher the priority, but it is not limited to this. . The priority may be set arbitrarily, and for example, the higher the frequency of music used in the game on the pachinko machine 10 (for example, the music played during the ready-to-win effect), the higher the priority. may Also, for example, it may be configured such that the player can set the priority during the normal game.

In the fourth control example, when the number of songs selected one or more times is small (less than three), the songs with high priority specified in the priority specification table 222da are preferentially arranged in the history area. However, it is not limited to this. For example, in addition to counting the number of times the player selects a song during the jackpot song selection period in the song selection number storage area 223ac, the song played during the normal game (for example, played by developing into a super ready-to-win effect) It is also possible to count the number of playback times of the music played. While the number of selections by the player is small, the songs that have been played many times during the normal game are stored in the empty area of the history area (remaining storage area after storing the songs that the number of selections by the player is 1 or more). It is good also as a structure stored with respect to. By configuring in this way, it is possible to arrange in the history area the songs that the player has listened to while playing the game. In most cases when a player voluntarily selects a song, he or she selects a song that he or she has heard before, so the songs that the player has definitely heard (music that has already been played during a normal game) are stored in the history area. By arranging them, it is possible to arrange songs (menu items) that are highly likely to be selected by the player in a selectable range with a small number of operations (up to three times) on the operation buttons 230 . Therefore, convenience for the player can be further enhanced. This modification will be described in more detail with reference to FIGS. 170 to 172. FIG.

<Modification of the fourth control example>
FIG. 170 is a diagram showing a reproduction count storage area 223dd added to the RAM 223 of the sound ramp control device 113 in the modified example of the fourth control example. The number-of-plays-in-effects storage area 223dd is a storage area for storing, for each type of music, the number of times a song has been played back (used) in the variable display effect executed during the normal game. As shown in FIG. 170, the number-of-plays-in-effects storage area 223dd stores data indicating the number of times played (used) during the normal game in association with each type of song (song A to song Z). is configured as That is, it has the same configuration as the music selection count storage area 223ac (see FIG. 105(b)). The example of FIG. 170 illustrates a case where music C and music Z are played once each during the normal game, and other songs are not played.

The number of reproductions of each song stored in the number-of-reproductions-in-effects storage area 223dd is determined in the variation display setting process 12 (see FIG. 172) in this modified example, and the detailed mode of the variation pattern effect is determined and displayed. After setting the variation pattern command for use, if there is a song to be played back in the determined variation pattern effect, 1 is added to the number of playbacks of the song (see S4532 in FIG. 172). Further, the number of times of reproduction (number of times of use) of each song stored in the number-of-reproductions-in-effect storage area 223dd is referred to when setting items to be arranged in the history area in the initial layout of the music selection menu screen (Fig. 171 S5281).

<Regarding control processing of the sound ramp control device in the modification of the fourth control example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 171 and 172, various control processes executed by the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 in this modification will be described. First, with reference to FIG. 171, the details of the history area setting process 12 (S5241) in this modified example will be described. FIG. 171 is a flowchart showing history area setting processing 12 (S5241). This history area setting process 12 (S5241) is executed instead of the history area setting process (see FIG. 163) in the fourth control example. This is a process for determining items (songs) to be placed in the .

In the history area setting process 12 (see FIG. 171) in the modified example of the fourth control example, the processes in S5271 to S5277 correspond to the processes in S5271 to S5277 in the history area setting process (see FIG. 163) in the fourth control example. The same processing as each processing is executed. In addition, in the history area setting process 12 (see FIG. 171) in this modified example, when the process of S5274 is completed, the data in the number-of-plays-in-effects storage area 223dd (corresponding to the number of times each song was played during the normal game) data) is read out (S5281), and whether or not the number of songs that have been played back once or more during the normal game is equal to or greater than the number of empty areas in which data was not stored in the history area in the process of S5274. It discriminates (S5282).

In the process of S5282, if it is determined that the number of songs played once or more during the normal game is equal to or greater than the number of empty areas in the history area (S5282: Yes), the number of times played during production is stored in the area 223dd. Data corresponding to the number of music pieces in the empty area of the history area are read out in descending order of the number of times of reproduction stored (S5283), and the read data is stored in the empty area of the history area in descending order of the number of times of reproduction. (S5284), and the process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S5282, if it is determined that the number of songs played once or more during the normal game is less than the number of empty areas in the history area (S5282: No), the number of times played during the normal game is 1 or more (S5285), all the read songs are stored in the empty area of the history area (S5286), and the process proceeds to S5275.

By executing this history area setting process 12 (see FIG. 171), when the number of times the player selects a song is small, the song that the player has listened to during the normal game is arranged in the history area. be able to. Therefore, songs (items) that are highly likely to be selected by the player can be preferentially arranged in the history area, thereby enhancing convenience for the player.

Next, with reference to FIG. 172, details of the variable display setting process 12 (S4182) in the modification of the fourth control example will be described. FIG. 172 is a flowchart showing variable display setting processing 12 (S4182). This variable display setting process 12 (S4182) is a process executed instead of the variable display setting process 10 (see FIG. 150) in the fourth control example (and the third control example). 150), a variation pattern command for display is generated and set based on the variation pattern command received from the main controller 110 in order to execute a variation effect (variation display effect) in the third pattern display device 81. This process is for

In each process of S4501 to S4509, S4521, and S4522 of the variable display setting process 12 (see FIG. 172) in the modification of the fourth control example, the variable display in the fourth control example (and the third control example) is performed. The same processing as each of S4501 to S4509, S4521, and S4522 of setting processing 10 (see FIG. 150) is executed. Further, in the variable display setting process 12 (see FIG. 172) in the modification of the fourth control example, after the process of S4504 is completed, the variable display effect executed by the display variable pattern command set in the process of S4504 is executed. determines whether or not it is an effect content that accompanies the reproduction of music (S4531). In addition, in this modified example, when the super ready-to-win effect or the special ready-to-win effect is executed, a part of the music corresponding to the type of ready-to-win is reproduced.

In the processing of S4531, if it is determined that the current variable display effect is the effect content that accompanies the reproduction of music (S4531: Yes), the 1 is added to the number of times of playback corresponding to the music played during execution (S4532), and the process proceeds to S4521. On the other hand, in the processing of S4531, if it is determined that the current variable display effect is the effect content that does not accompany the reproduction of music (for example, the variable display effect corresponding to the variation pattern that is completely out of line) (S4531: No), The process of S4532 is skipped and the process proceeds to S4521.

As described above, in the modified example of the fourth control example, when the number of songs that have been selected by the player is small (less than three), during the normal game, during the execution of the variable display effect, the playback (execution) is performed. The image corresponding to the selected song (voice effect) is preferentially arranged in the history area (menu position that can be selected with a small number of operations). With this configuration, even if the number of songs that the player has ever selected is small (less than 3), the songs that the player has listened to can be arranged in the history area. Therefore, songs (menu items) that are likely to be selected by the player can be arranged in a selectable range with a small number of operations (up to three times) on the operation buttons 230, regardless of the number of times the songs are selected. , the convenience of the player can be further enhanced.

In addition, in this modification, when the number of songs selected is small (the number of songs selected once or more is less than 3), the songs that have been played during the normal game in the empty area of the history area Although the corresponding image (item) is preferentially arranged, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, as items to be placed in the history area, first, songs that have been played many times during the normal game are preferentially placed. may be configured such that an image corresponding to a song selected (determined) many times is arranged in an empty area. Also, for example, after arranging songs that have been selected many times by the player in the history area, regardless of whether or not there is an empty area in the history area, an image corresponding to the song that has been selected many times may be displayed. Subsequently, images corresponding to up to three (predetermined upper limit number) songs may be arranged in descending order of the number of times played during the normal game.

In the above fourth control example and its modification, when the player temporarily selects random music and when the player decides on random music selection, the music for the music selection period is played back, and a random lottery is performed. Although it is configured such that it is impossible to identify what the music determined by is until the music selection period elapses, it is not limited to this. For example, at the point when the player decides on the random selection of music, the configuration may be such that the reproduction of the chorus of the music determined by random lottery is started. Further, for example, when the player temporarily selects a random song, the song to be played may be determined by lottery, and loop playback of the chorus portion may be started in the same manner as other items. With this configuration, the player can identify the music determined by lottery during the music selection period, so if the player does not like the music determined by lottery, he or she will have the opportunity to reselect another item. can give. Therefore, convenience for the player can be further enhanced. In these cases, each time the player tentatively selects or determines a random song selection during one song selection period, the song selection may be re-determined by a random lottery. The music to be reproduced may be fixed to the music first determined by lottery in one music selection period. Each time the random music selection is tentatively selected or determined, the random selection of music is re-determined by a random lottery. A player may be given the option to repeat. Therefore, whether or not the desired music can be reproduced by random music selection can be one of the pleasures during the music selection period, and the game can be played during the jackpot, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved. . On the other hand, if the music played when the random music selection is determined is fixed to the music first determined by lottery in one music selection period, the probability variable jackpot will be generated at the time of playback. The chance of whether or not the determined "music a" is determined by lottery can be limited to once per jackpot. Therefore, even if the ``music a'' is not reproduced when the random music selection is tentatively selected or determined, the player can be made to think that he just happened to lose the lottery, so that the player's expectation for the definite variable jackpot is maintained. can be made

In the above-described fourth control example and its modification, the chorus part of the song provisionally selected during the song selection period is loop-played, but the present invention is not limited to this. It can be set arbitrarily. In addition, a configuration may be adopted in which the volume of the music played based on the provisional music selection is different from the volume of the music played after the music selection period has elapsed. For example, by reducing the volume of the temporarily selected music and increasing the volume of the music reproduced after the music selection period has passed, the player can listen to the music selected by the player at a higher volume. Therefore, it is possible to make the player who listens to the music feel a greater sense of satisfaction. Also, by increasing the volume of the temporarily selected music, the player can more clearly recognize the melody of the chorus of the music temporarily selected during the music selection period. Therefore, it is possible to more easily determine whether or not the song is a favorite song, so that the player's convenience when selecting a song can be improved.

In the fourth control example and its modification example, in a part of the case where the pseudo small round effect is determined, the music is played in a playback mode different from the playback mode of the song corresponding to the number of rounds notified by the pseudo small round effect. By reproducing, it is possible to detect in advance whether or not the pseudo small round effect is being executed, but it is not limited to this. For example, instead of the reproduction mode, part of the display mode is set to a mode corresponding to the number of rounds different from the number of rounds notified by the pseudo few rounds presentation, thereby determining whether the pseudo few rounds presentation is being executed. A configuration may be provided in which the player can perceive whether or not before the pseudo small round effect ends (before the continuous effect is executed). Specifically, for example, the character displayed in the small area Ds2 in the third pattern display device 81 is configured to be different according to the number of rounds, and when the pseudo small round effect is decided, basically the pseudo small round effect is performed. A character corresponding to the number of rounds notified by is displayed, but at a predetermined rate (for example, a rate of 10%), the character displayed in the small area Ds2 is displayed as a character corresponding to the actual number of rounds. may be By constructing in this way, the third symbol display device 81 can be used to pay attention to the game during the big win.

In the fourth control example and its modified example, when the pseudo small round effect is executed, the reproduction mode of the music corresponding to the number of rounds notified by the pseudo small round effect is set, or the actual number of rounds is set. Although it is determined by lottery whether to set the reproduction mode of the corresponding music, this control is not limited to the case where the pseudo small round effect is executed. In the case of shifting to an advantageous state (or it is decided to shift in the future), the production that is executed when temporarily shifting to a disadvantageous state (or it is decided to shift in the future) It can be applied as long as it executes an effect that is difficult to distinguish. Specifically, for example, in the probability variable jackpot of the even-numbered pattern notification and the normal jackpot of the even-numbered pattern notification, the opening performance of the jackpot and the opening music are set to be basically the same display mode and sound mode. . On the other hand, in the case of odd-numbered pattern notification of the probability variable jackpot, as the jackpot opening performance or opening music, a mode different from the opening display mode and sound mode in the even-numbered pattern notification of the normal jackpot or the like is set. In this case, in a part (for example, at a rate of 10%) of the probability variable jackpot of the even number pattern notification, the same music as the probability variable jackpot of the odd number pattern notification is reproduced as the opening music. may be configured. By constructing in this way, it is possible to make the player perceive that the even-numbered symbols have been reported as a big win, but in reality, the big win was a probability variable big win. Therefore, since the voice mode during the opening period can be listened to more intensively, the player's interest in the game can be improved. Also, instead of or in addition to varying the music for the opening, the display mode of the opening production is changed to a part (for example, at a rate of 10%) in the case of a probability variable jackpot of the even number symbol notification, and the odd number symbol. The configuration may be such that the display mode is set to be the same as in the case of a variable probability jackpot of the notification. By configuring in this way, the game can be played while paying more attention to the display mode during the opening period. Further, these modifications are not limited to the display mode and sound mode during the opening period. This control may be applied to the display mode or sound mode in a predetermined round during the jackpot, or this control may be applied to the display mode or sound mode in a predetermined interval period, This control may be applied to the display mode or audio mode in the ending period.

In the above-described fourth control example and its modification, the pseudo-small-round lottery table 222cb is used to simultaneously determine whether the pseudo-small-round effect can be executed and the lottery mode of the music reproduction mode. However, it is not limited to this. For example, when the pseudo small round effect is determined, the playback mode corresponding to the number of rounds notified by the pseudo small round effect is set as the playback mode of the music, or the playback mode corresponding to the original number of rounds is set. Alternatively, a dedicated data table may be separately provided for the lottery.

In the fourth control example and its modification, when the pseudo small round effect is executed, the reproduction mode corresponding to the number of rounds notified in the pseudo small round effect is set, or the original number of rounds is set. Although it is configured to select by lottery whether to set the reproduction mode, it is not limited to this. For example, when the pseudo-small-round effect is executed, the configuration may be such that the reproduction mode corresponding to the original number of rounds is always set. By configuring in this way, it is possible to allow the user to more carefully check the playback mode of the music.

In the above-described third, fourth control examples, and modified examples of the fourth control example, even when a song determined by a random lottery executed when the player decides to randomly select a song is reproduced, the number of times of song selection Although the number of reproductions stored in the storage area 223ac is incremented by 1, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a piece of music reproduced by randomly selecting a piece of music may be excluded from counting the number of times of reproduction. With this configuration, it is possible to count only the number of selections of songs voluntarily selected by the player, so that items that are more likely to be selected by the player are placed as items to be placed in the history area. can be made

In the above second and third control examples, during the music selection period (first round), the music dedicated to the music selection period is reproduced, and from the end of the first round, the music selected by the player is reproduced. , but not limited to these. For example, every time the player operates (presses) the up button UB or the down button DB on the music selection menu screen (every time the lit-up display mode of the item changes), the chorus of the item newly arranged in the music selection area is displayed. A configuration may be adopted in which a portion is reproduced. By configuring in this way, not only the title of the song (song name), but also the voice mode of the most characteristic chorus part of the song can be taken into consideration, so that the song to be played during the big win can be determined. Music can be made easier to select. In this case, if the current jackpot is a jackpot with a small number of rounds (for example, a jackpot of 5 rounds), the music is reproduced as it is from the continuation of the reproduction position when the player selects by pressing the center button CB. may be configured to continue. By configuring in this way, it is possible to more effectively reproduce the music by using the remaining period of the jackpot in which the number of rounds is small.

In each of the above control examples, the player can select the production mode (type of music to be played) of the audio production from among the entertainment productions executed during the predetermined period (during the variable probability state or during the jackpot). However, it is not limited to this. For example, it may be configured such that the effect mode of the display effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be selected.

In each of the above control examples, a music data group is provided for each type of music to be reproduced, and one music is reproduced by reproducing each data constituting the music data group in a predetermined order. , but not limited to these. Only one piece of data that can reproduce one piece of music from start to finish may be provided for the number of pieces of music. In this case, the data structure may be configured so that the reproduction position can be identified, and the reproduction position can be changed at least on a part-by-part basis. By configuring in this way, as in the first control example described above, it is possible to start the reproduction of the music from different reproduction positions depending on how the music was selected. Further, as in the above-described second control example, the reproduction position can be varied so that the possibility that the chorus portion is reproduced during the round period of the final round of the big win increases.

In each of the above control examples, only items to be placed in the music selection area are determined by random lottery, and other items (items to be placed in menu positions other than the history area) are predetermined based on the items to be placed in the music selection area. Although it has been configured to arrange them in the order (alphabetical order) specified, it is not limited to this. For example, other items may also be determined by random lottery.

In each of the above control examples, in the initial arrangement of the music selection menu screen, items that are frequently selected by the player are arranged in a range that can be selected with a small number of operations, and one item selected by random lottery is placed in the music selection area. The items other than these are arranged in a predetermined order based on the items arranged in the music selection area, but this is not the only option. For example, the player may freely customize the arrangement of items on the music selection menu screen by operating the operation buttons 230 or the like. By configuring in this manner, the music that the player wants to select can be arranged in advance in positions where the player can select within a range where the number of operations is small, so convenience for the player can be enhanced.

As described above, the present invention has been described based on the above embodiments, but the present invention is not limited to the above embodiments, and it is easily conjectured that various modifications and improvements are possible without departing from the scope of the present invention. It is possible.

For example, in the above-described first to fourth embodiments and the seventh embodiment, one or a plurality of actuated winning openings that trigger the start of a jackpot are provided when a game ball enters, but the trigger to start the jackpot is It is not limited to this. For example, an operation means such as a switch is provided within reach of the player's hand, and a big win is started when a specific operation is performed on the operation means after a special pattern lottery results in a big win. may be With such a configuration, a big win can be easily started, so that the player is discouraged if the game ball is not entered into the operating winning hole even though the game ball is shot aiming at the operating winning hole. You can prevent it from being lost.

<Eighth embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 in the eighth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 173 to 185. FIG. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment described above, when a special symbol lottery results in a big win, the state shifts to a big win standby state, and a game ball is entered into the operation winning hole 660 during the big win standby state. It was configured to start a jackpot when Also, the operation winning opening 660 is configured to be provided only at one place on the upper right side of the game board 13 . That is, in the case of the jackpot waiting state, regardless of the jackpot type, the jackpot starts unless the game ball is shot toward the upper right side of the game board 13 and entered into the operation winning hole 660. It was configured to not be

On the other hand, the pachinko machine 10 in the eighth embodiment is configured to provide a plurality of operation winning holes, and the type (advantage degree) of the jackpot started according to the type of the operation winning hole won in the jackpot standby state It was configured to be different. More specifically, it is configured to provide four operating winning ports, ie, MAX operating winning port 6710a, normal operating winning ports 6710b and 6710c, and special MAX operating winning port 6720, and in the jackpot standby state, MAX operating winning port 6710a , and special MAX operation winning opening 6720, while the number of rounds is 16 rounds jackpot is started, normal operation winning opening 6710b, 6710c When a game ball enters the game ball, a big hit of four rounds is started. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the eighth embodiment, if a game ball enters the MAX operation winning hole 6710a to start a big hit, the game ball enters the special MAX operation winning hole 6720. Since it is possible to form an easy state, it is possible to make it easier for the game ball to enter the special MAX operation winning opening 6720 in the next big hit waiting state. Therefore, two big wins in succession result in a 16-round big win with a large number of rounds (that is, advantageous to the player), so that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

The pachinko machine 10 according to the eighth embodiment is structurally different from the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment in that the board structure of the game board 13 is partially changed, and the ROM 202 of the main controller 110 , the configuration of the RAM 223 of the sound lamp control device 113 is partially changed, and the control processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 is partially changed. and that the control processing executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 is partially changed. Other configurations, other processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, other processing executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113, and various processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 are described in It is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in one embodiment. Hereinafter, elements that are the same as those of the first embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals, and illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

First, referring to FIG. 173, the board configuration of the game board 13 in the eighth embodiment will be described. FIG. 173 is a front view of the game board 13 in the eighth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 173, in the game board 13 in the eighth embodiment, below the variable display device unit 80, game balls are distributed to either the MAX operation winning opening 6710a or the normal operation winning openings 6710b and 6710c. A sorting device 6700 is provided. This sorting device 6700 is provided with an opening on the right side in a front view into which game balls can enter, and an operation gate 6700a for opening and closing the opening. This operation gate 6700a is normally in a closed state (closed position) in which game balls cannot enter the distribution device 6700, and enters the distribution device 6700 only during the jackpot standby state. It becomes an open state (open position) in which the ball is possible.

As shown in FIG. 173, inside the sorting device 6700, there are a guide channel 6700b into which a game ball entered from the opening can flow down, and a game ball that has flowed down the guide channel 6700b into three operating prizes. A 3-hole crown 6710 is provided for randomly distributing to one of the openings (MAX operation winning opening 6710a, normal operation winning opening 6710b, 6710c). When the ball enters the MAX operation winning opening 6710a in the jackpot standby state, a jackpot of 16 rounds starts, while when the ball enters one of the normal operation winning openings 6710b, 6710c in the jackpot waiting state, A jackpot with 4 rounds is started.

The 3-hole croon 6710 is made up of known croon means, and has three actuating winning holes on the bottom portion of the mortar-shaped inner wall. The game ball which flowed down the guidance channel 6700b and flowed into the 3-hole croon 6710 rolls on the mortar-shaped inner wall for a predetermined period, and then enters one of the operation winning openings. In addition, the rate at which the game ball that has flowed into the 3-hole croon 6710 enters each operation winning hole is equal. That is, the probability (percentage) of a game ball entering the sorting device 6700 entering the MAX operation winning opening 6710a and the normal operation winning openings 6710b and 6710c is 1/3. In other words, the probability of a 16-round big win (probability of being distributed to the MAX operation winning port 6710a) in the case of a big win in the special symbol lottery is 1/3, and the probability of a 4-round big win (normal operation winning The probability of being assigned to either of the mouths 6710b and 6710c) is 2/3.

As shown in FIG. 173, in the game board 13 of the eighth embodiment, a special MAX operation winning opening 6720 is provided in the lower left direction with respect to the sorting device 6700 when viewed from the front. This special MAX operation winning opening 6720 is a kind of operation winning opening in which the start of the 16-round jackpot is set by entering a game ball in the jackpot standby state. That is, the special MAX operation winning opening 6720 is an operation winning opening having the same function as the MAX operation winning opening 6710a. As shown in FIG. 173, this special MAX operation winning opening 6720 is provided with a non-electric accessory 6720a capable of opening and closing the special MAX operation winning opening 6720.

The non-electric accessory 6720a is connected to an opening mechanism (not shown) provided inside the MAX operation winning port 6710a, and while the non-electric accessory 6720a is closed, the MAX operation winning port 6710a is opened. It is configured such that the non-electric accessory 6720a is opened mechanically (without using electrical control) when the game ball enters (the game ball passes through the opening mechanism). In addition, the opening mechanism has only the function of opening the non-electrical accessory 6720a, and in the state where the non-electrical accessory 6720a is opened, the game ball enters the MAX operation winning opening 6710a. Even if (the game ball has passed through the opening mechanism), the state of the non-electric accessory 6720a does not change (the non-electric accessory 6720a is closed).

In addition, the non-electric accessory 6720a is mechanically opened by the game ball passing through a closing mechanism (not shown) provided inside the special MAX operation winning port 6720 while the non-electric accessory 6720a is open. closed (without electrical control). Note that the special MAX operation winning opening 6720 is different from the other operation winning openings, and is provided at a position where a game ball that has flowed down the flow path on the left side of the variable display unit 80 when viewed from the front can enter. there is That is, in order to enter the game ball with respect to other operation winning openings (MAX operation winning opening 6710a, normal operation winning openings 6710b, 6710c), hit right while the operation gate 6700a is open. On the other hand, in order to enter the game ball into the special MAX operation winning hole 6720, it is sufficient to hit left while the non-electric accessory 6720a is open.

In addition, as described above, the non-electric accessory 6720a is normally closed, and is opened only when a game ball enters the MAX operation winning opening 6710a. In other words, when the non-electric accessory 6720a is closed, the jackpot hits, and when the game ball enters the MAX operation winning port 6710a in the jackpot standby state, the jackpot game (player A type of jackpot that is advantageous to the player) is executed, and the special MAX operation winning port 6720 can be opened. Therefore, if the game ball does not enter the special MAX operation winning port 6720 until the next big hit (if the game ball does not pass through the closing mechanism), left-handed in the next big hit waiting state. Just by doing so, it is possible to easily enter a game ball into the special MAX operation winning opening 6720 and start a 16-round jackpot (jackpot of a type advantageous to the player). In addition, in the eighth embodiment, as the gaming state after the end of the jackpot, either the jackpot type (probability variable jackpot It is set according to whether it is a normal jackpot). That is, even if the lottery of the special pattern continues to be lost, the time-saving state of the normal pattern continues until the lottery of the special pattern is completed 100 times at least, so the electric accessory associated with the second ball entrance 640. 640a becomes easier to open. For this reason, at least until the lottery of special symbols is completed 100 times, the game is played aiming at the second ball entrance 640 by hitting to the right (the player does not hit to the left), so the jackpot ends. After that, it is possible to suppress (prevent) the game ball from immediately entering the special MAX operation winning opening 6720 and closing the non-electric accessory 6720a. As a result, when a game ball enters the MAX operation winning hole 6710a and a big win is started, it is possible to form a state in which it is easy for the player to continuously win the big win of 16 rounds, which is the most advantageous for the player. Therefore, it is possible to enhance the player's interest in the game.

Further, as shown in FIG. 173, above the operating gate 6700a, a rectifying device 6800 for lengthening the interval between game balls reaching the sorting device 6700 is provided. Although the details will be described later, the rectifying device 6800 periodically shifts between a stationary state in which the game balls that have arrived are stationary in the device and a flowing down state in which the stationary game balls flow down toward the sorting device 6700. switch. This switching cycle is set to be a period during which one game ball can flow down in 5 seconds. After a game ball enters the sorting device 6700 through the opening, an interval of 5 seconds can be provided between when the next game ball reaches the sorting device 6700 . On the other hand, the sorting device 6700 is controlled such that the operating gate 6700a is closed when a game ball enters one of the operating winning holes. In addition, the internal structure of the sorting device 6700 is configured so that the period until the game ball entering the sorting device 6700 enters one of the operation winning holes is about 4 seconds. ing. In other words, since the period from when one game ball enters the distribution device 6700 to when the operation gate 6700a is closed is less than 5 seconds, the rectification device 6800 causes the distribution device 6700 to By setting the shortest arrival interval of the game ball to 5 seconds, it is possible to prevent two or more game balls from entering the sorting device 6700 during the waiting state for one big win.

Here, if a configuration is adopted in which a plurality of game balls can enter the sorting device 6700 without providing the straightening device 6800, it is possible for game balls to enter a plurality of different operating winning holes in one jackpot waiting state. have a nature. That is, after one game ball enters either of the normal operation winning openings 6710b and 6710c, there is a possibility that another game ball enters the MAX operating winning opening 6710a. In this case, although the 4-round jackpot corresponding to the normal operation winning opening is executed, the non-electric accessory 6720a is opened (becomes a state where it is possible to enter the special MAX operation winning opening 6720 ), the number of cases in which a ball can be entered into the special MAX operation winning opening 6720 increases, and there is a possibility that it will be excessively advantageous to the player.

On the other hand, in the eighth embodiment, by providing a straightening device 6800 on the upstream side of the opening of the distribution device 6700, game balls that can enter the distribution device 6700 in the standby state for one big win Limited to 1 (1 game ball enters the distribution device 6700, enters one of the operation winning openings, and the operation gate 6700a is closed) For the distribution device 6700 the next game ball is prevented from reaching). When starting), the non-electric accessory 6720a can be opened with a probability (ratio) of 1/3 each time. Therefore, the frequency of opening the non-electric accessory 6720a increases, and it is possible to prevent the player from becoming excessively advantageous, thereby preventing an unexpected disadvantage in the hall. .

Next, with reference to FIG. 174, details of the operation of rectifier 6800 will be described. FIG. 174(a) is a diagram showing a case where a game ball reaches the stagnant straightening device 6800 in a state where the operation gate 6700a of the sorting device 6700 is open. As shown in FIG. 174(a), the rectifying device 6800 has a vertical flow path that allows game balls to flow down to the distribution device 6700, and is provided in the middle of the flow path to close the flow path. and a gate guide valve 6800a that can be opened. In the stationary state of the straightening device 6800, since the gate induction valve 6800a is closed, it becomes impossible (difficult) for the game ball to pass through the straightening device 6800. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 174(a), the game ball that has reached the straightening device 6800 is stopped above the gate guide valve 6800a because it is prevented from flowing down by the gate guide valve 6800a. In addition, since the upper part of the gate guide valve 6800a is configured to have a width that allows only one game ball to be parked, even if another game ball reaches the rectifier 6800 while one game ball is parked, Also, it does not stay above the gate guide valve 6800a, but flows down below the game board 13 through the flow path on the right side of the straightening device 6800. FIG. As a result, when the gate induction valve 6800a is opened, two or more game balls can be prevented from flowing down toward the distribution device 6700 at the same time. It is possible to more reliably prevent the ball from entering the device 6700 .

FIG. 174(b) is a diagram showing a case where the gate guide valve 6800a is opened while the game ball is parked above the gate guide valve 6800a. As shown in FIG. 174(b), when the gate guide valve 6800a is opened, the game ball stopped above the gate guide valve 6800a falls downward. As a result, the game ball enters the distribution device 6700 when the operation gate 6700a is open. As shown in FIG. 174(c), the opening/closing period of the gate valve 6800a is set so that the gate valve 6800a closes immediately after the game ball passes through the gate valve 6800a. More specifically, gate guide valve 6800a is configured to cycle between a closed state for 4.9 seconds and an open state for 0.1 seconds. As a result, only a maximum of one game ball can flow down toward the sorting device 6700 per 5 seconds. It is possible to more reliably prevent other game balls from entering the sorting device 6700 for about 4 seconds until the operation gate 6700a is closed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 175, details of each operation winning opening will be described. FIG. 175(a) is a diagram showing a state in which the game ball is rolling on the inner wall of the 3-hole croon 6710. FIG. As shown in FIG. 175(a), the 3-hole crew 6710 provided inside the sorting device 6700 has, at its approximate center, a MAX operation winning opening 6710a, normal operation winning openings 6710b and 6710c. There are two operative winning ports. When the game ball enters the MAX operation winning opening 6710a, the number of rounds of the jackpot is set to 16 rounds, while when the ball enters either the normal operation winning opening 6710b, 6710c, the round of the jackpot The number is set to 4 rounds. Therefore, when a game ball enters the sorting device 6700 in the jackpot standby state, among the three operating winning ports provided in the 3-hole croon 6710, the MAX It is possible to realize a playability that makes the player expect the ball to enter the operation winning hole 6710a.

Further, as shown in FIG. 175(a), the MAX operation winning opening 6710a and the special MAX operation winning opening 6720 are mechanically connected. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 175(b), the game ball enters the MAX operation winning opening 6710a, and the opening mechanism (not shown) provided inside the MAX operation winning opening 6710a is opened. When it passes, the non-electric accessory 6720a associated with the special MAX operation winning opening 6720 opens in conjunction with the passage of the game ball. As a result, the special MAX operation winning opening 6720 is kept open until the game ball enters the special MAX operation winning opening 6720 . Therefore, if the jackpot is won before the game ball enters the special MAX operation winning opening 6720, and the state shifts to the jackpot waiting state, it is easy to aim at the special MAX operation winning opening 6720 by hitting left. A 16-round jackpot with a large number of rounds (ie, an advantage to the player) can be initiated. Therefore, it is possible to form an extremely advantageous state in which there is a high possibility of successively winning the advantageous jackpot types, so that the player's interest in the game can be further improved.

In addition, in the eighth embodiment, only the number of rounds for the big win is determined according to the type of the activated winning hole into which the game ball entered during the waiting state for the big win, and the game state after the end of the big win is determined according to the type. It has a configuration that is predetermined according to the type (whether it will be a probability variable jackpot or a normal jackpot is determined when the special symbol lottery is executed). Therefore, the game state after the 16-round jackpot executed by entering the MAX operation winning port 6710a (that is, with the non-electric accessory 6720a opened) is a variable probability state and a time saving state. There are both possibilities. In other words, even if a relatively disadvantageous normal jackpot is won, if the game ball can be entered into the MAX operation winning opening 6710a, the number of rounds will be increased when the jackpot is won until the time-saving state elapses. is set to 16 rounds continues, so when the time-saving jackpot is entered into either of the normal operation winning openings 6710b and 6710c (when the non-electric accessory 6720a is not opened) In comparison, the game can be played with a stronger expectation that the lottery result in the time-saving state will result in a big win. That is, even in the same time-saving state, it is possible to vary the expectation of winning the big prize according to the state of the non-electric accessory 6720a, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In addition, in the present eighth embodiment, a mechanism is adopted in which the special MAX operation winning opening 6720 is opened by one game ball entering the MAX operation winning opening 6710a. The number of winnings to the MAX operation winning opening 6710a required until the special MAX operation winning opening 6720 is opened can be arbitrarily determined. Similarly, the number of winnings for the special MAX operation winning opening 6720 required until the special MAX operation winning opening 6720 in the open state is closed can be arbitrarily determined.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 176 and 177, a characteristic display effect displayed on the third pattern display device 81 in the eighth embodiment will be described. FIG. 176(a) is a diagram showing an example of the display mode of the ending effect of the big win when the big win ends with the special MAX operation winning opening 6720 opened. It should be noted that the case where the jackpot ends with the special MAX operation winning opening 6720 opened basically means that the game ball entered the MAX operation winning opening 6710a in the jackpot standby state. This is the case when the 16-round jackpot has ended. It should be noted that, even though the jackpot was achieved in the state where the special MAX operation winning port 6720 was opened, the player made a mistake in the shooting direction, etc., and in the jackpot waiting state, he hit to the right and went to the sorting device 6700. Even when the ball is entered and the ball is entered into one of the operation winning openings provided in the 3-hole croon 6710, the special MAX operation winning opening 6720 is opened at the end of the big hit. Also in this case, a similar ending effect is executed.

In the ending effect when the special MAX operation winning port 6720 is opened, the characters "Enter the MAX zone!" !” is displayed. According to these display contents, by winning a jackpot while the player is hitting to the right, the game ball is entered into the special MAX operation winning port 6720 to hit a 16-round jackpot (MAX jackpot). can be easily understood. Hereinafter, for convenience of explanation, the state in which the special MAX operation winning opening 6720 is opened will be referred to as "MAX zone".

Next, with reference to FIG. 176(b), a display mode (standby state effect) during the jackpot standby state when the jackpot is won during the MAX zone will be described. As shown in FIG. 176(b), when a jackpot is won in the MAX zone, a display area HR5 in which characters "Aim for MAX with a left-hand shot!" is displayed above the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. is formed, and below the display region HR5, a display region HR6 is formed in which display content is displayed in which an arrow image is directed to an image simulating a special MAX operation winning opening 6720. With these display contents, it is easy for the player to aim at the special MAX operation winning opening 6720 by hitting to the left instead of aiming at the sorting device 6700 by hitting to the right in this jackpot standby state. can be understood.

Next, with reference to FIG. 177(a), the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 in the case where the number of times of time saving ends in the MAX zone (short time period has passed) will be described. As shown in FIG. 177 (a), when the number of times of time saving has passed in the MAX zone, the characters "MAX zone fall pinch!" A display area HR7 is formed in which characters such as "If you win, MAX is confirmed!?" are displayed. This display content allows the player to easily understand that the MAX zone may end. Conversely, even if a short period of time has passed and the game has shifted to a relatively disadvantageous game state (normal game state) in which it is necessary to play the game by hitting left, the game ball enters the special MAX operation winning opening 6720. If a game ball can be entered into the first ball entry hole 64 before the ball is played and a big win can be won, an advantageous 16-round big win is executed simply by entering the ball into the special MAX operation winning hole 6720. - 特許庁Since the benefit of the MAX zone of being able to play is received as it is, it is possible to prevent the player from immediately quitting the game when the time saving state ends. That is, since it is possible to make the player think to continue the game at least until the game ball enters the special MAX operation winning hole 6720 and the MAX zone ends, the operation rate of the pachinko machine 10 is improved. can be improved. In addition, in the present eighth embodiment, when left-handed hitting is performed in a state where the non-electric accessory 6720a is open, the game ball is sent to the non-electric accessory 6720a at a rate of about 1 out of 5 game balls. It is configured to be able to enter the ball. On the other hand, since only 1 out of 10 game balls enter the first ball entrance 64, when the non-electric accessory 6720a is open and the ball is hit to the left, , The number of times the lottery of the first special symbol is executed is almost one or less. Therefore, it is very unlikely that the ball enters the first ball entrance 64 first while the non-electric accessory 6720a is open, and that the lottery based on the ball entered wins a big prize. occurs, the player can have a greater sense of accomplishment and satisfaction. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

FIG. 177(b) is a diagram showing a case where the MAX zone ends (when the non-electric accessory 6720a closes) by entering the special MAX operation winning opening 6720 in the MAX zone. As shown in FIG. 177 (b), a short period of time has passed in the MAX zone, and the game ball enters the special MAX operation winning opening 6720 by hitting left to execute the special symbol lottery. Then, the display content of the display area HR7 is changed to the characters "Tumble!!", and the non-electric accessory 6720a is closed. This display content allows the player to easily understand that the MAX zone has ended.

In addition, in the eighth embodiment, when the non-electric accessory 6720a is opened and left-handed, the shot game balls enter at a rate of about 1 out of 5. However, the rate at which game balls enter may be determined arbitrarily. By increasing the ratio of game balls entering (for example, the ratio of 1/3), when the non-electric accessory 6720a is open and the jackpot is achieved, the special MAX operation winning with a smaller number of shots Since the ball can be entered into the mouth 6720, the game can be played efficiently. On the other hand, by lowering the ratio of game balls entering (for example, the ratio of 1/20), when the number of times of working hours has passed with the non-electric accessory 6720 opened, special MAX operation The state in which the non-electric accessory 6720a is opened because the possibility that the ball enters the first ball entrance 64 before the ball enters the winning opening 6720 and the special symbol lottery can be executed increases. You can increase your chances of hitting the jackpot. Furthermore, it may be configured such that a hall clerk or the like can vary the ratio of the ball entering the special MAX operation winning opening 6720 when the ball is hit left-handed. That is, it may be configured such that it is possible to select whether to set so that the game can be played efficiently or to increase the possibility of winning a big win with the special MAX operation winning opening 6720a opened. . By configuring in this way, it is possible to realize specifications that match the management policy of each hall.

<Electrical configuration in the eighth embodiment>
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 according to the eighth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 178 and 179. FIG. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the eighth embodiment, the configuration of the ROM 202 provided in the main controller 110 and the configuration of the RAM 223 provided in the sound lamp control device 113 are partially changed from the first embodiment. ing. First, with reference to FIG. 178, the first winning type selection table 202b provided in the ROM 202 in the eighth embodiment will be described. In addition, since it is the same as that of ROM202 in 1st Embodiment except the defined content of the 1st hit classification selection table 202b, it abbreviate|omits about the detailed description here.

As shown in FIG. 178, the first hit type selection table 202b in the eighth embodiment defines two types of jackpots, "jackpot A12" and "jackpot B12", as jackpot types. In addition, in the eighth embodiment, a common jackpot type is selected regardless of whether the lottery is for the first special symbol or the lottery for the second special symbol. More specifically, when the first special pattern or the second special pattern lottery results in a big hit, if the value of the first hit type counter C2 is within the range of "0 to 64", the jackpot type A “jackpot A12” is determined (see 202b1 in FIG. 178). This "jackpot A12" is a jackpot type in which the game state after the jackpot ends is set to a probability variable state. As described above, the number of rounds varies according to the type of the winning opening that has won in the jackpot standby state. More specifically, when the ball enters the normal operation winning openings 6710b and 6710c, it becomes a jackpot of 4 rounds, while the ball enters the MAX operating winning opening 6710a or the special MAX operating winning opening 6720. 16 rounds of jackpot.

Of the 100 counter values (random values) that can be taken by the first winning type counter C2, 65 counter values of "0 to 64" are associated with "jackpot A12", so a special symbol lottery , the ratio of determining "jackpot A12" is 65% (65/100).

On the other hand, when the first special symbol or the second special symbol lottery results in a big hit, if the value of the first hit type counter C2 is within the range of "65 to 99", the jackpot type is " A jackpot B12” is determined (see 202b2 in FIG. 178). This "jackpot B12" is a jackpot type that is set to a time-saving state in which the number of times of time-saving is 100 times as a gaming state after the end of the jackpot. Therefore, since the game state is more disadvantageous than the variable probability state, the "jackpot B12" is more disadvantageous to the player than the "jackpot A12". It should be noted that the number of rounds varies according to the type of the winning operation winning hole, as in the case of "jackpot A12".

Of the 100 counter values (random values) that can be taken by the first winning type counter C2, 35 counter values of "65 to 99" are associated with the "jackpot B12", so a special symbol lottery , the ratio of determining "jackpot B12" is 35% (35/100).

Thus, in the eighth embodiment, according to the type of jackpot, only the game state to be set after the end of the jackpot is predetermined, and regarding the number of rounds, the game ball enters (first) in the jackpot waiting state. It is configured to be determined according to the type of the operated winning hole that has been played. That is, the degree of advantage of the jackpot game is configured to vary according to the type of the operating winning hole into which the game ball entered in the jackpot standby state. As a result, in the case of a big win waiting state, the game can be played while paying attention to the type of the operation winning hole into which the game ball enters, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

Next, with reference to FIG. 179, the configuration of the RAM 223 provided within the audio lamp control device 113 in the eighth embodiment will be described. FIG. 179 is a block diagram showing the structure of RAM 223. As shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 179, the configuration of the RAM 223 in the eighth embodiment is different from the configuration of the RAM 223 in the first embodiment (see FIG. 14(b)) in that a flag 223da in the MAX zone is added, and The difference is that the level counter 223h is deleted.

The MAX zone flag 223da is a flag for indicating whether or not it is in the MAX zone (that is, whether the non-electric accessory 6720a is open). If this MAX zone flag 223da is on, it indicates that it is in the MAX zone (non-electric accessory 6720a is open), and if it is off, it is not in the MAX zone (non-electric accessory 6720a is closed). This MAX zone flag 223da is set to ON when winning to the MAX operating winning port 6710a is detected in the jackpot standby state (see S40003 in FIG. 185), and detecting winning to the special MAX operating winning port 6720 is set to off (see S40005 and 40009 in FIG. 185). When an ending command is received from the main controller 110 during the ending period of the jackpot, the state of the MAX zone flag 223da is referred to, and a normal ending effect is executed or an ending effect indicating the MAX zone is executed. (See S4493-S4495 in FIG. 184).

<Regarding the control process of the main controller in the eighth embodiment>
Next, various control processes executed by MPU 201 of main controller 110 will be described with reference to FIGS. 180 to 183. FIG. First, with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 180, the special symbol variation process 12 (S131) in the eighth embodiment will be described. This special symbol variation process 12 (S131) is a process executed instead of the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 22) in the first embodiment, and is the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 22) in the first embodiment. Similarly, it is a process for setting the display mode in the first design display device 37 and setting the variation pattern of the third design by the third design display device 81, and the like.

Among the special symbol variation processing 12 (see FIG. 180) in the eighth embodiment, in each processing of S201 to S223, each processing of S201 to S223 of the special symbol variation processing in the first embodiment (see FIG. 22) The same processing is performed. In addition, in the special symbol variation process 12 (see FIG. 180) in the eighth embodiment, when the process of S220 is completed, then the operation gate 6700a is set to open (S251), and the process proceeds to S223. By setting the opening of the operation gate 6700a, it is possible to easily enter the game ball into the sorting device 6700 by hitting to the right in the jackpot waiting state.

Next, with reference to FIG. 181, startup processing 12 in the eighth embodiment will be described. This start-up process 12 is a process executed in place of the start-up process (see FIG. 29) in the first embodiment, and like the start-up process (see FIG. 29) in the first embodiment, It is a process that is started along with S901 to S912 and S914 to S917 of the startup process 12 (see FIG. 181) in the eighth embodiment correspond to S901 to S912 and S912 of the startup process (see FIG. 29) in the first embodiment, respectively. , and the same processes as those of S914 to S917 are executed. In the start-up process 12 (see FIG. 181) in the eighth embodiment, when the process of S912 is completed, the start of driving of the gate guide valve 6800a is set (S931), and the process proceeds to S914. When the gate guide valve 6800a starts to be driven, the gate guide valve 6800a cyclically repeats a closed state for 4.9 seconds and an open state for 0.1 seconds until the power is cut off. As a result, the interval at which the game ball that has reached the rectifying device 6800 reaches the sorting device 6700 can be set to an interval of 5 seconds or more, so that one game ball is sent to the sorting device 6700 in one jackpot waiting state. During about 4 seconds until the game ball enters one of the operation gates (the operation gate 6700a is closed) after entering, another game ball enters the sorting device 6700 You can prevent it from hitting the ball. Therefore, when the non-electric role 6720a is closed and the jackpot is reached, the rate of shifting to the MAX zone based on the ball entering the MAX operation winning port 6710a (non-electric role 6720a is opened) can be maintained at 1/3. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the hole from being excessively shifted to the MAX zone and giving an unexpected disadvantage to the hole.

Next, with reference to FIG. 182, main processing 12 in the eighth embodiment will be described. This main process 12 is a process that is executed in place of the main process (see FIG. 30) in the first embodiment, and performs main control of the game in the same manner as the main process (see FIG. 30) in the first embodiment. It is a process for execution.

S1001 to S1003 and S1005 to S1016 of the main process 12 (see FIG. 182) in the eighth embodiment correspond to S1001 to S1003 and S1005 of the main process (see FIG. 30) in the first embodiment, respectively. The same processing as each processing of S1016 is executed. In addition, in the main processing 12 (see FIG. 182) in the eighth embodiment, when the processing of S1003 is completed, the jackpot start processing 12 is executed instead of the jackpot start processing (see FIG. 31, S1004) in the first embodiment. (S1061), and the process proceeds to S1005. The details of this jackpot start process 12 (S1061) will be described with reference to FIG.

FIG. 183 is a flow chart showing jackpot start processing 12 (S1061). This jackpot start process 12 (S1061) is a process that is executed in place of the jackpot start process (see FIG. 31) in the first embodiment, and is a process for starting a jackpot based on the ball entering the operating winning hole. is. Of the jackpot start processing 12 (S1061) in the eighth embodiment, in each of S1101, S1102, and S1104, each of S1101, S1102, and S1104 of the jackpot start processing (see FIG. 31) in the first embodiment The same processing as the processing is executed.

Also, in the jackpot start process 12 (see FIG. 183) in the eighth embodiment, when the process of S1102 ends (S1102: Yes), next, the operation gate 6700a is set to close (S1121), and the operation that detects the winning A winning hole type command for notifying the sound lamp control device 113 of the winning hole type is set (S1122). The winning hole type command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in the external output process (S1001) of the main process 12 (see FIG. 182) executed by the MPU 201, It is sent to the audio lamp controller 113 . When the audio lamp control device 113 receives the winning hole type command, it updates the flag 223da in the MAX zone according to the type of the operating winning hole notified by the command. As a result, the mode of the ending effect executed at the end of the jackpot can be set according to the state of the special MAX operation winning opening 6720 (whether or not it is in the MAX zone).

Also, when the processing of S1122 is completed, next, the start of the jackpot of the number of rounds corresponding to the type of the operation winning opening that detected the winning is set (S1123). More specifically, when the winning to either of the normal operation winning openings 6710b and 6710c is detected, while executing the start of the 4 round jackpot, the MAX operating winning opening 6710a or the special MAX operating winning opening When winning either of 6720 is detected, the start of the 16-round jackpot is set. When the process of S1123 is completed, the jackpot start flag 203k is set to ON (S1124), and the process proceeds to S1104.

<Regarding control processing of the sound lamp control device in the eighth embodiment>
Next, various control processes executed by the MPU 221 of the sound ramp control device 113 according to the eighth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 184 and 185. FIG. First, with reference to FIG. 184, the winning-related process 12 (S4391) in the eighth embodiment will be described. This hit-related process 12 (S4391) is a process executed instead of the hit-related process (see FIG. 37) in the first embodiment in the command determination process (see FIG. 36). Similar to the process (see FIG. 37), this is a process for executing control corresponding to the type of win-related command.

Of the hit-related processing 12 (see FIG. 184) in the eighth embodiment, each processing of S4401 to S4409 is the same as each processing of S4401 to S4409 of the hit-related processing (see FIG. 37) in the first embodiment. Processing is performed. Also, in the hit-related process 12 (see FIG. 184) in the eighth embodiment, when it is determined in the process of S4407 that the round number command is not included in the unprocessed command received from the main controller 110 (S4407: No), then, it is determined whether or not the unprocessed commands include a winning mouth type command (S4491). : Yes), a winning hole type command process for executing control according to the type of the activated winning hole notified by the command is executed (S4492), and this process ends. The details of this winning hole type command process (S4492) will be described later with reference to FIG.

On the other hand, in the process of S4491, if it is determined that the command received from the main controller 110 does not include the win type command (S4491: No), the process proceeds to S4409. In the process of S4409, if it is determined that an ending command is included in the unprocessed commands received from main controller 110 (S4409: Yes), then whether or not the MAX zone flag 223da is ON. (S4493), if it is determined that the flag 223da in the MAX zone is ON (S4493: Yes), it means that the non-electric accessory 6720a is open, probability variable set after the end of the jackpot By winning the jackpot again during the state or the time saving state, it means that it is possible to enter the special MAX operation winning port 6720 and start the advantageous 16 round jackpot, so the MAX zone Execution of the ending effect (see FIG. 176(a)) is set (S4494), and the process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S4493, when it is determined that the MAX zone flag 223da is off (S4493: No), a normal ending effect is set (S4495), and this process ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 185, details of the winning hole type command process (S4492) will be described. This winning hole type command process (S4492) is, as described above, a process for executing control according to the type of the operating winning hole notified by the winning hole type command received from main controller 110. FIG.

In this winning hole type command process (see FIG. 185), first, it is determined whether or not the standby state effect flag 223g is on (S40001). : Yes), then, it is determined whether or not the command for winning prize type received this time is a command indicating the MAX operation winning prize opening 6710a (S40002). In the process of S40002, if it is determined that the command indicates the MAX operation winning opening 6710a (S40002: Yes), it means that the game ball entered the MAX operation winning opening 6710a in the jackpot standby state, Since it means that the game ball has passed through the opening mechanism for opening the non-electric role 6720a (the non-electric role 6720a has been released), the flag 223da in the MAX zone is set to ON (S40003), End this process.

On the other hand, in the processing of S40002, if it is determined that the winning hole type command received this time is not a command indicating the MAX operating winning hole 6710a (S40002: No), then the special MAX operating winning hole 6720 is indicated. It is determined whether it is a command (S40004), and if it is determined that it is a winning opening type command indicating the special MAX operating winning opening 6720 (S40004: Yes), the ball enters the special MAX operating winning opening 6720 Since it means that the game ball passes through the closing mechanism (the non-electric accessory 6720a is closed), the MAX zone flag 223da is set to OFF (S40005), and the process is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of S40004, if it is determined that it is not a winning opening type command indicating the special MAX operation winning opening 6720 (S40004: No), the state of the non-electric accessory 6720a is not switched, so it is left as it is. End this process.

On the other hand, in the processing of S40001, if it is determined that the standby state effect flag 223g is turned off (S40001: No), then it is determined whether or not a winning opening type command indicating the special MAX operating winning opening 6720 has been received. It is determined (S40006), and if it is determined that it is a winning opening type command indicating the special MAX operation winning opening 6720 (S40006: Yes), it is determined whether or not the MAX zone flag 223da is ON (S40007). . In the processing of S40007, when it is determined that the MAX zone flag 223da is ON (S40007: Yes), in a state other than the jackpot standby state, the ball enters the open special MAX operation winning opening 6720. Since it means that the non-electric accessory 6720a has been closed, the execution of the fall effect (see FIG. 177(b)) is set (S40008). Next, the in-MAX zone flag 223da is set to OFF (S40009), and this processing ends. This allows the player to easily understand that the MAX zone has ended.

On the other hand, in the processing of S40006, it is determined that the command is not the winning hole type command indicating the special MAX operation winning hole 6720 (the winning hole type command indicates either the MAX operation winning hole 6710a or the normal operation winning hole 6710b or 6710c). If it is determined (S40006: No), the distribution device 6700 is not in the jackpot standby state (the operation gate 6700a is closed and the game ball cannot enter the distribution device 6700). This means that a game ball has entered the inside, and there is a possibility that the operation gate 6700a has failed or some kind of fraud has occurred. End this process. In addition, in the process of S40007, when it is determined that the MAX zone flag 223da is off (S40007: No), the game ball is special even though the non-electric accessory 6720a should be closed. It means that the ball has entered the MAX operation winning port 6720, and there is a possibility that a malfunction such as a failure of the non-electric accessory 6720a has occurred, so the process is shifted to S40010 and an error notification is set. and terminate this process.

By executing this winning hole type command process (see FIG. 185), it is possible to appropriately update the MAX zone flag 223da in accordance with the type of the operating winning hole in which winning is detected.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the eighth embodiment, the degree of advantage (jackpot type) of the jackpot game to be executed (determined) varies depending on the type of the activated winning hole into which the ball is entered in the jackpot standby state. It is configured. That is, when a game ball enters the MAX operation winning opening 6710a or the special MAX operation winning opening 6720 in the jackpot standby state, a relatively advantageous 16-round jackpot is executed, while the normal operation winning opening 6710b, Entering 6710c executes a relatively unfavorable 4-round jackpot. Of the four operation winning openings, three operating winning openings for MAX operation winning opening 6710a, normal operation winning openings 6710b and 6710c are provided inside distribution device 6700, and enter inside distribution device 6700. It is configured such that the hit game balls are evenly distributed with a probability (proportion) of 1/3. That is, when a game ball enters the sorting device 6700 in the jackpot standby state, the 16-round jackpot hits at a rate of 1/3 (that is, the ball enters the MAX operation winning port 6710a), and the rate is 2/3. 4 rounds will be a big hit (that is, the ball will enter either of the normal operation winning openings 6710b and 6710c). As a result, it is possible to realize a game property that makes players expect to be allocated to the MAX operation winning port 6710a, so that the player's interest in the game in the jackpot standby state can be improved.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the eighth embodiment, the special MAX operation winning opening 6720, which is normally closed, is opened by the game ball entering the MAX operation winning opening 6710a. Configure. The open state of this special MAX operation winning opening 6720 is maintained until a game ball enters the special MAX operation winning opening 6720 next time. Here, since the special MAX operation winning port 6720 is arranged in the left channel in the game board 13, between the variable state in which the time saving state of the normal pattern is set, and the time saving state (that is, the game by right hitting ), the game ball will not enter the special MAX operation winning port 6720 and the non-electric accessory 6720a will not be closed. Therefore, if you win the probability variable jackpot (jackpot A12) and enter the MAX operation winning port 6710a in the jackpot standby state, a 16-round jackpot will be executed, and if the next jackpot hits, a special Since the ball can be entered into the MAX operation winning hole 6720, it is possible to provide the game property that it is confirmed that the big wins of the type advantageous to the player are executed in succession with two big wins. . On the other hand, when the normal jackpot (jackpot B12) is won and the ball enters the MAX operation winning port 6710a, the next jackpot is also a 16-round jackpot due to the jackpot while the time saving state continues. Therefore, it is possible to realize the game property of playing the game while strongly hoping for a big win again during the time saving state. In this way, the game characteristics after the end of the jackpot are differentiated according to whether the ball entered the MAX operation winning port 6710a is in the jackpot waiting state for the variable probability jackpot or in the jackpot waiting state for the normal jackpot. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In addition, in the eighth embodiment, by providing a 3-hole crown 6710 inside the distribution device 6700, the game balls are randomly distributed to the three operating winning holes, but the game balls are randomly distributed. The configuration for is not limited to this. Any configuration can be adopted as long as the configuration can randomly distribute game balls to a plurality of operation winning holes.

In the eighth embodiment, control is performed so that only one game ball can enter the sorting device 6700 in one jackpot standby state, but conditions (for example, jackpot type and jackpot standby state The number of game balls that can be entered into the sorting device 6700 may be varied according to the game state at the time of transition to , the number of special symbol lotteries at the time of winning the jackpot, etc.). When more game balls can enter, the possibility of entering the MAX operation winning opening 6710a and opening the special MAX operation winning opening 6720 increases, so for the player Since the player can be expected to move to the MAX zone more strongly, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In the eighth embodiment, game balls that enter the sorting device 6700 are randomly sorted to one of the three operating winning holes, but it is not always necessary to randomly sort them. For example, it may be configured such that the operation winning openings to which the game balls are distributed are switched in a predetermined order each time the jackpot standby state is entered. By configuring in this way, when the operation winning opening to be distributed next time is the MAX operation winning opening 6710a, it is possible to make the player think to continue the game until a big win is achieved. Therefore, the operating rate of the pachinko machine 10 can be improved.

In the eighth embodiment, the MAX operation winning opening 6710a has a role as an operation winning opening that triggers the start of the jackpot, and a role of opening the special MAX operation winning opening 6720. It is not limited. For example, an opening mechanism for opening the special MAX operation winning opening 6720 with respect to the normal operation winning opening 6710b may be provided. By configuring in this way, when a relatively unfavorable jackpot (4-round jackpot) is executed, the special MAX operation winning port 6720 opens and becomes an advantageous state, so even if it is a disadvantageous jackpot Also, it is possible to maintain the player's motivation for the game. Furthermore, when the jackpot is a normal jackpot, it is strongly desired that the special MAX operation winning port 6720 is kept open and the number of times of time reduction is 100 times, and the jackpot is again a jackpot and the 16th round jackpot is won. You can ask them to play games. Therefore, it is possible to improve the player's motivation for the game. Also, apart from the operation winning opening, a dedicated ball entrance for opening the special MAX operation winning opening 6720 may be provided. In this case, the dedicated ball entrance for opening the special MAX operation winning opening 6720 does not necessarily have to be provided inside the sorting device 6700, for example, it may be provided inside the specific winning opening 65a. .

In the eighth embodiment, when a game ball enters the MAX operation winning port 6710a in the jackpot standby state, it always becomes a jackpot of 16 rounds, while when a game ball enters the normal operation winning ports 6710b and 6710c, it always makes 4 rounds. Although it was set as the structure which becomes a big hit, it is not restricted to this. For example, according to the type of jackpot, the distribution may be made different between the operation winning opening in which the number of rounds is set to 16 rounds and the operation winning opening in which the number of rounds is set to 4 rounds. That is, in addition to the case of entering the MAX operation winning opening 6710a, even when the ball enters the normal operation winning opening 6710b, the jackpot type in which a 16-round jackpot is set, and any inside of the distribution device 6700 A jackpot type in which the number of rounds is set to 16 rounds even if it is distributed to the operating winning port, and a number of rounds is set to 4 rounds regardless of which operating winning port in the distribution device 6700 is distributed. It may be configured to provide a jackpot type.

In the eighth embodiment, the game state after the end of the jackpot is predetermined according to the jackpot type, and only the number of rounds of the jackpot is set according to the type of the activated winning hole into which the game ball enters. However, it is not limited to the number of rounds of the jackpot that can be varied depending on the type of the operating prize opening. It may be configured to be set accordingly. Specifically, for example, when the ball enters the MAX operation winning port 6710a or the special MAX operation winning port 6720, instead of or in addition to setting the number of rounds of the jackpot to 16 rounds , It may be configured such that the game state after the end of the jackpot is set to the variable probability state. In addition, when the ball enters the normal operation winning hole 6710b, instead of setting the number of rounds of the jackpot to 4 rounds, or in addition, the game state after the jackpot ends is set to a probability variable state. can be configured to In addition, when the ball enters the normal operation winning hole 6710b, instead of setting the number of rounds of the jackpot to 4 rounds, or in addition, the game state after the jackpot ends is set to the time saving state. can be configured to By configuring in this way, the difference in the degree of advantage set according to the type of the operating winning hole for the game ball can be increased, so the type of the operating winning hole into which the game ball enters can be paid more attention to. You can play games. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In the eighth embodiment, when the non-electrical accessory 6720a is opened, the non-electrical accessory 6720a is closed when one game ball enters the special MAX operation winning port 6720. However, the condition (the number of game balls entered) for switching the open state special MAX operation winning port 6720 to the closed state is not limited to this. For example, the special MAX operation winning opening 6720 may be kept open until two gaming balls enter. In the case of such a configuration, if the game ball can be entered into the MAX operation winning port 6710a, an advantageous state (MAX zone) in which the 16-round jackpot is confirmed when the jackpot is won during the right-handed game is established. It can be continued over a maximum of two jackpots. Therefore, since it is possible to further increase the benefit when a game ball enters the MAX operation winning hole 6710a, attention is paid to the type of the operation winning hole to which the game ball entering the distribution device 6700 is distributed. You can play a game with it.

In the eighth embodiment, even if a game ball enters the MAX operation winning opening 6710a while the non-electric accessory 6720a is open, there is no effect on the state of the non-electric accessory 6720a. Although it was configured (it was only to open the non-electric accessory 6720a in the closed state), it is not limited to this, and the non-electric accessory 6720a is open to the MAX operation winning port 6710a , the state of the non-electric accessory 6720a may be further advantageous to the player. Specifically, for example, each time a game ball enters the MAX operation winning opening 6710a while the non-electric accessory 6720a is open, the special MAX until the non-electric accessory 6720a is closed It may be configured such that the number of balls entering the operation winning hole 6720 is increased by one. By configuring in this way, even if a big win occurs in the state where the non-electric accessory 6720a is open, the option of shooting a game ball aiming at the sorting device 6700 in the big win standby state can be played. can give to anyone. That is, it is possible to make the player think to add the number of entering balls until the non-electric accessory 6720a is closed by entering the game balls into the MAX operation winning opening 6710a. Therefore, in the state in which the non-electric accessory 6720a is open, it is possible to realize the playability of selecting the shooting direction, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In the eighth embodiment, when the probability variable jackpot is reached, the probability variable state and the time saving state continue until the next jackpot hit, and when the normal jackpot hits, the time saving state continues until the special symbol lottery is executed 100 times. However, it is not limited to this, and the number of times of time reduction may be diversified. Specifically, for example, a probability variable jackpot (jackpot a) in which the time saving state continues until the next jackpot, a probability variable jackpot (jackpot b) in which the number of times of time saving is set to 10 times, and the number of time saving times is set to 100 times and a normal jackpot (jackpot d) in which the number of times of time saving is set to 10 times may be provided at least. By configuring in this way, when a jackpot occurs in a state in which the special MAX operation winning opening 6720 is opened, the game ball to the special MAX operation winning opening 6720 in the jackpot standby state in consideration of the jackpot type. or enter the game ball into the sorting device 6700. That is, in the case of a jackpot a or jackpot c (a jackpot type with a relatively high possibility of winning a jackpot again during the time saving state), the state in which the special MAX operation winning port 6720 is opened is the next jackpot A player may be given the option of shooting a game ball at a sorting device 6700 to carry over to. On the other hand, if the jackpot b or jackpot d (there is only 10 times of the time saving state and the possibility of winning the jackpot within the number of time saving times is relatively low), the game goes to the special MAX operation winning port 6720 If the ball is not entered, the time saving state will pass and the game will return to the left-handed game, and the possibility that the game ball will enter the special MAX operation winning opening 6720 will increase (the special MAX operation winning opening 6720 The possibility of losing the right to win the 16-round jackpot due to the closing is high), so the player is given the option of entering the game ball into the special MAX operation winning port 6720 to execute the 16-round jackpot. can be done. In addition, in this case, if a specification is combined in which 1 is added to the number of entering balls, which is a condition for closing the special MAX operation winning opening 6720, each time a game ball enters the MAX operation winning opening 6710a, the Effective. That is, when a game ball is entered into the sorting device 6700 with the special MAX operation winning opening 6720 opened, and the ball enters the MAX operation winning opening 6710a, 16 rounds will not only be a jackpot. , Since 1 is added to the closing condition of the special MAX operation winning opening 6720, regardless of whether the special MAX operation winning opening 6720 is closed or open, the game ball goes to the MAX operation winning opening 6710a. By entering the ball, it is possible to give merit to the player. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

<Ninth Embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the ninth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 186 to 208. FIG. In the pachinko machine 10 in the eighth embodiment described above, when a ball enters the MAX operation winning opening 6710a in the jackpot standby state, the advantageous 16-round jackpot is started, and the special MAX operation winning opening 6720 By adopting a configuration in which a MAX zone that allows a ball to be entered is provided, a configuration is adopted in which advantageous types of jackpots are easily executed in succession, thereby improving the player's interest in the game.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the ninth embodiment, in addition to the case where the special symbol lottery results in a big win, the special symbol lottery results in a small win, which is a kind of loss, during the small winning game. It adopts a specification that a jackpot is won even when a game ball enters a V winning hole (specific area) provided in the game area. In addition, in the ninth embodiment, small hits are won with a high probability (for example, 9/10) only in the second special symbol lottery (special symbol lottery based on the ball entering the second ball entrance 640). (the lottery of the second special pattern is easier to win a small prize than the lottery of the first special pattern) and the ease of entering the second ball entrance 640 according to the game state is improved. It is configured to be variable. That is, in the ninth embodiment, the probability of winning a big win in the special symbol lottery is fixed regardless of the gaming state, and the opening probability of the electric accessory 640a associated with the second ball entrance 640 (normal symbol winning and (probability of winning), normal pattern fluctuation time, opening time, etc. are changed according to the game state, so that the possibility of winning a small win is changed according to the game state, resulting in a possibility of winning a big win. are different (so-called specifications of a 1-type 2-type mixer).

In addition, in the ninth embodiment, as the types of the V winning opening that wins the jackpot when winning a small win, the V winning opening for MAX that triggers the execution of the 16-round jackpot and the small winning type There are two types of openings, ie, a normal V winning opening that triggers the execution of a big win of the number of rounds corresponding to . In addition, as in the eighth embodiment described above, a non-electric accessory 6752a is provided in association with one MAX V winning opening (special MAX V winning opening 6752) to which a 16-round jackpot is awarded. , The non-electric accessory 6752a is opened in conjunction with the entry of the game ball into the 1st V winning port (MAX V winning port 6750f1) to which the 16 round jackpot is awarded. As a result, when a small hit occurs while the time saving state of the normal pattern continues, the game ball is entered into the special MAX V winning opening 6752 by hitting to the left before the small hit ends. You can easily secure a 16-round jackpot just by playing.

The pachinko machine 10 according to the ninth embodiment differs in configuration from the pachinko machine 10 according to the eighth embodiment in that the board surface configuration of the game board 13 is partially changed, and the ROM 202 of the main controller 110 , the configuration of the RAM 203 is partially changed, the configuration of the ROM 222 and the RAM 223 of the sound lamp control device 113 is partially changed, and the control processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 is partially changed. The only difference is that the control processing executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 is partially changed. Other configurations, other processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, other processing executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113, and various processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 are described in It is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in the eighth embodiment. Hereinafter, the same elements as in the eighth embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals, and illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

First, referring to FIG. 186, the board configuration of the game board 13 in the ninth embodiment will be described. FIG. 186 is a front view of the game board 13 in the ninth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 186, the game board 13 in the ninth embodiment is provided with a lottery device 6750 instead of the sorting device 6700 in the board configuration of the game board 13 in the eighth embodiment (see FIG. 173). , and in place of the special MAX operation winning opening 6720, a special MAX V winning opening 6752 is provided.

The lottery device 6750 is provided inside the lottery device 6750 when a game ball can be entered for a predetermined period (that is, the small hit attacker 6750a is opened) when a small win is obtained in a special symbol lottery. A jackpot is won when a game ball enters one of the three V winning openings (MAX V winning opening 6750f1, normal V winning opening 6750f3, 6750f5). Inside the lottery device 6750, the same number of out-ports (out-ports 6750f2, 6750f4, 6750f6) as the number (three) of the V prize-winning ports are provided. A game ball that enters the lottery device 6750 always enters one of the V winning openings or one of the out openings, so that a game ball that enters the lottery device 6750 will enter one of the V winning openings. The ratio (probability) of hitting the ball into the mouth (V winning occurs) is 1/2 (3/6).

When a game ball enters one of the normal V winning openings 6750f3 and 6750f5 during execution of the small winning game (during the valid period of the small winning), a jackpot of the number of rounds corresponding to the type of the executed small winning is executed. On the other hand, when a game ball enters the MAX V winning opening 6750f1, 16 rounds of big wins are executed regardless of the small win type. Further, inside the MAX V winning opening 6750f1, an opening mechanism for opening the non-electric accessory 6752a provided in association with the special MAX V winning opening 6752 is provided. Therefore, when a game ball enters the MAX V winning opening 6750f1 during the small hit valid period, a jackpot of 16 rounds with the largest number of rounds (advantageous to the player) is executed, and a left-handed hit is performed. Only by performing, it becomes possible to easily enter the game ball into the V winning opening 6752 for special MAX. Even if the game ball enters the special MAX V winning opening 6752 during the small winning validity period, the number of rounds will be the same as when entering the MAX V winning opening 6750f1, regardless of the small winning type. Since the jackpot of 16 rounds, which is the largest number, is won, a chance of winning consecutive advantageous jackpots is provided. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In the ninth embodiment, when the first special symbol lottery is executed, the possibility of winning a small hit is 0, but when the second special symbol lottery is executed, a high probability (for example , 9/10) to win a small prize. Therefore, in the time-saving state of the normal pattern in which the game ball easily enters the second ball entrance 640, by continuing to hit to the right, it becomes a small hit with a high probability, and the small winning attacker 6750a is opened. Therefore, the ball is easily entered into the V winning hole. On the other hand, in the normal state of the normal symbol, it is difficult to enter the game ball into the second ball entrance 640 even if the player hits to the right, so it is necessary to proceed with the game by hitting to the left. A left-handed game ball can enter the first ball entrance 64, but cannot enter the second ball entrance 640, so that a small win can be won in the normal state of the normal pattern. There is no Therefore, the gaming state after the jackpot executed based on the game ball entering the MAX V winning port 6750f1 (the special MAX V winning port 6752 is opened) is the normal state of the normal symbol. In that case, the left-handed game ball enters the special MAX V winning opening 6752 before the small hit, and the non-electric accessory 6752a is closed. On the other hand, the gaming state after the jackpot executed based on the fact that the game ball entered the V winning opening 6750f1 for MAX (the V winning opening 6752 for special MAX was opened) is the time saving of normal symbols. If it is in the state, it is possible to win a small hit with a high probability. You can enter the ball. Therefore, it is possible to execute the advantageous big win type of the big win continuously in the two big wins.

Next, with reference to FIG. 187, details of the lottery device 6750 in the ninth embodiment will be described. FIG. 187 is a diagram showing the internal structure of the lottery device 6750. As shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 187, inside the lottery device 6750, there are three V winning openings (MAX V winning opening 6750f1, normal V winning openings 6750f3, 6750f5) and three out openings (out openings 6750f2, 6750f4, 6750f6). ) are provided, and a distribution rotating body 6750f that always rotates at a constant speed is provided. A game ball that has reached the distribution rotator 6750f enters either one of the three V winning openings and the three out openings. Since the distribution rotating body 6750f always rotates at a constant speed from when the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 10 until the power is turned off, the timing of winning a small win and the inside of the lottery device 6750 are determined. Depending on the rolling speed of the game ball in , it is variable whether it is distributed to which ball entrance (three V winning openings and three out openings) provided in the distribution rotor 6750f. That is, each time a game ball enters the lottery device 6750 as a small hit, the game ball can be randomly distributed to any of the ball entrances.

Further, as shown in FIG. 187, a small winning attacker 6750a for opening and closing the entrance portion of the lottery device 6750 is provided on the right side of the lottery device 6750 when viewed from the front. This small winning attacker 6750a is opened for a predetermined period (for example, 0.5 seconds) when winning a small winning. The gaming ball that reaches the small winning attacker 6750 a from above during this open period flows into the lottery device 6750 . Inside the lottery device 6750, as shown in FIG. 187, there is provided a guide channel 6750b for causing game balls to flow down toward the sorting rotor 6750f. A ball discharge door 6750c for opening and closing the floor is provided in the part. When the ball discharge door 6750c is closed, the floor surface of the guide flow path 6750b and the upper surface of the ball discharge door 6750c form one flow path, so the game ball is pushed downstream from the ball discharge door 6750c. and can flow down. On the other hand, when the ball discharge door 6750c is open, the game ball falls to the discharge area 6750d formed below the ball discharge door 6750c and is discharged to the outside of the pachinko machine 10.例文帳に追加That is, it is discharged to the outside without reaching the sorting rotor 6750f. Further, as shown in FIG. 187, the game ball that has flowed down is temporarily stopped in the guide channel 6750b downstream by about one game ball from the lower end of the ball discharge door 6750c (the guide channel A ball stop 6750e is provided that can close a specific location of 6750b).

The ball discharge door 6750c, the discharge area 6750d, and the ball stopper 6750e are provided to limit the maximum number of game balls that reach the distribution rotor 6750f in one small win. A control method for limiting the number of game balls reaching the distribution rotator 6750f to one will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 188(a) is a diagram showing a case where a plurality of game balls enter the lottery device 6750 while both the ball ejection door 6750c and the ball stopper 6750e are closed. As shown in FIG. 188(a), when the ball discharge door 6750c and the ball stopper 6750e are closed, the game ball that has flowed into the lottery device 6750 passes over the upper surface of the ball discharge door 6750c. As a result, the ball stopper 6750e prevents the ball from flowing down, and the ball is stopped to the right of the ball stopper 6750e. In addition, when the game ball further flows down the guide flow path 6750b while one game ball is stationary, the already stationary game ball prevents the flow down, and the stationary game ball be stopped. In addition, as described above, the ball stop portion 6750e is disposed with a distance of about one game ball from the lower end of the ball discharge door 6750c, so that the second and subsequent balls enter the lottery device 6750. The played game ball is stopped on the upper surface of the ball ejection door 6750c.

FIG. 188(b) is a diagram showing a state in which the ball ejection door 6750c is opened while game balls are stationary. As shown in FIG. 188(b), when the ball discharge door 6750c is opened, the game balls other than the game balls stopped on the right side of the ball stop portion 6750e fall into the discharge area 6750d, thereby pachinko It falls outside the machine 10 . Thereby, a state in which only one game ball is parked inside the lottery device 6750 can be formed. After 0.5 seconds have elapsed since the ball discharge door 6750c was opened, the ball stop portion 6750e is tilted leftward in a front view so that it can pass through the guide channel 6750b. As a result, one game ball remaining in the lottery device 6750 can be caused to flow down toward the sorting rotor 6750f. By controlling in this way, the number of game balls that can reach the distribution rotor 6750f in one small hit can be limited to a maximum of one, so the probability of a big hit lottery using the lottery device 6750 (distribution It is possible to make constant the ratio of distribution to the V winning openings by the rotating body 6750f.

Next, with reference to FIG. 189, the details of the distribution rotor 6750f will be described. FIG. 189(a) is a top view of the distribution rotor 6750f. As shown in FIG. 189(a), the distribution rotator 6750f has a substantially circular shape when viewed from the top, and six ball entrances are arranged on the outer edge thereof. Since the distribution rotator 6750f is provided with an inclination downward from its center toward the outer edge direction, a game ball that reaches the vicinity of the center of the distribution rotator 6750f from above is inclined toward the outer edge direction. , to one of the entrances provided on the outer edge.

As shown in FIG. 189(a), the distribution rotator 6750f is alternately arranged with three V winning openings having a trapezoidal shape when viewed from above and three out openings having a substantially trapezoidal shape when viewed from above. That is, the MAX V winning opening 6750f1, the OUT opening 6750f2, the normal V winning opening 6750f3, the OUT opening 6750f4, the normal V winning opening 6750f5, and the OUT opening 6750f6 are arranged in this order. In addition, as shown in FIG. 189(a), while the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, the distribution rotator 6750f always rotates at a constant speed in the clockwise direction (for example, , a rotation speed of one rotation in 5 seconds).

As shown in FIG. 189(b), when the game ball that reaches the distribution rotator 6750f enters the MAX V winning opening 6750f1, the game ball is opened inside the MAX V winning opening 6750f1. Since it passes through the mechanism, the non-electric accessory 6752a is opened in conjunction with the passage of this opening mechanism. As a result, an open state is formed in which the game ball can enter the special MAX V winning opening 6752 . This open state continues until the game ball enters the special MAX V winning opening 6752 and passes through the closing mechanism provided inside. In addition, since the special MAX V winning opening 6752 will not enter as long as the game ball is hit to the right, the special MAX V winning opening 6752 will be switched to the open state. If the jackpot won based on the ball entering the mouth 6750f1 is a time-saving jackpot, the game can be progressed by executing the lottery of the second special symbol by hitting the time-saving state after the jackpot is over. You can win a small hit without hitting. Therefore, when a small win is won, simply by hitting left during the small win validity period, the game ball can be easily entered into the special MAX V winning port 6752 and an advantageous type of jackpot (16 round jackpot) ) can be executed. On the other hand, if the jackpot won by entering the MAX V winning port 6750f1 is a normal jackpot, after the jackpot ends, the normal state of the normal pattern will occur, and even if you hit the right, the second special pattern Therefore, it is necessary to advance the game by entering the game ball into the first ball entrance 64 by hitting left. Therefore, since the game ball is likely to enter the special MAX V winning opening 6752, the non-electric accessory 6752a is closed at a relatively early stage. Therefore, in most cases, it is not possible to benefit from the opening of the special MAX V winning opening 6752 .

Thus, in the ninth embodiment, the special MAX V winning opening 6752 is determined depending on whether the big winning distributed to the MAX V winning opening 6750f1 in the small winning is the time-saving jackpot or the normal big winning. It is configured to be variable whether or not to receive the benefit due to the opening of (the ability to easily win the 16-round big win when the next small win occurs). Therefore, when a game ball enters the MAX V winning opening 6750f1 and a big win is executed, the player expects that the game state after the big win will be a time-saving state with normal symbols. It is possible to make a game play. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

Next, with reference to FIG. 190, each part of the lottery device 6750 (a small winning attacker 6750a, a ball stopping part 6750e, and a ball The operation pattern (opening pattern) of the discharge door 6750c) will be described. FIG. 190 is a diagram showing changes over time in the state of each part when a small hit is won.

As shown in FIG. 190, when the small winning is won in the second special symbol lottery, the small winning attacker 6750a is opened along with the start of the small winning (the start of the small winning effective period). As shown in FIG. 190, the open state of this small hit attacker 6750a continues for 0.5 seconds, and is closed after 0.5 seconds. Thereafter, the small winning attacker 6750a is maintained in a closed state until the small winning ends. If the game ball can enter the small hit attacker 6750a during the open period of 0.5 seconds, the game ball can reach the distribution rotor 6750f during the small hit effective period, A game ball can be entered into the entrance.

Further, as shown in FIG. 190, the ball stop portion 6750e is maintained in the closed state (see FIG. 188(a)) until 2 seconds have passed since the start of the small win, and at the time when 2 seconds have passed (small win 1.5 seconds after the closing of the attacker 6750a) to the end of the small hit, it is switched to an open state (a state in which the guide channel 6750b can flow down), and is switched to the closed state again at the end of the small hit. . On the other hand, the ball discharge door 6750c is maintained in the closed state (see FIG. 188 (a)) until 1.5 seconds have passed since the start of the small win, and at the time of 1.5 seconds (for the small win) It is switched to the open state (see FIG. 188(b)) from the time when 1 second has elapsed after closing of the attacker 6750a to the end of the small hit, and is switched to the closed state again at the end of the small hit. That is, for 1.5 seconds after the start of the small hit, the ball stopping portion 6750e and the ball discharge door 6750c are closed, so all the game balls entering the lottery device 6750 are It is retained in the guiding channel 6750b by the ball stopper 6750e.

In addition, when 1.5 seconds have passed since the start of the small hit, the ball discharge door 6750c is opened with the ball stop portion 6750e closed, so the player is stopped by directly contacting the right side of the ball stop portion 6750e. All game balls other than the one game ball that is present fall from the opening of the ball discharge door 6750c to the discharge area 6750d and are discharged to the outside. That is, only one game ball is parked inside the lottery device 6750 . Then, 0.5 seconds after the ball ejection door 6750c is opened, the ball stop portion 6750e is opened, so that one game ball remaining inside the lottery device 6750 is directed toward the distribution rotor 6750f. flow down In this way, by first opening the ball discharge door 6750c and then opening the ball stop portion 6750e, two or more game balls are placed inside the lottery device 6750 during the opening period of the small winning attacker 6750a. Even if the ball enters, the second and subsequent game balls can be discharged to the outside from the discharge area 6750d until the ball stopper 6750e is opened. Therefore, the number of game balls that reach the distribution rotator 6750f in one small win can be limited to one each time, so the probability of winning the big win in the small win (the probability that the game ball enters the V winning hole ) can be made constant (50%) at all times.

Next, with reference to FIG. 191, a characteristic display effect executed by the third symbol display device 81 in the ninth embodiment will be described. In the ninth embodiment, the inside of the lottery device 6750 that allows the game ball hit to the right to enter as a V winning opening to which the big win is given by the game ball entering during the small winning valid period. In addition to the three V winning openings (MAX V winning opening 6750f1, normal V winning opening 6750f3, 6750f5), a special MAX V winning opening is located at a position where a game ball fired left-handed can enter. A port 6752 is provided. In the ninth embodiment, when a small win occurs while the special MAX V winning opening 6752 is open, the special MAX V winning opening 6752 is opened instead of the lottery device 6750 within the small winning valid period. An effect (special small hit effect) is executed to urge you to aim. The display mode of this special small winning effect is provided with three types of display modes that can suggest the degree of expectation of a time-saving big win when a game ball is entered into the special MAX V winning opening 6752 .

FIG. 191(a) is an example of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 when a special small winning effect (special small winning effect for low expectation) is executed to suggest that the expectation of the time saving jackpot is low. It is a figure showing. As shown in FIG. 191 (a), when the special small hit effect for the low expectation is executed, the remaining time until the small hit effective period ends ( When a game ball enters the special MAX V winning hole 6752, the entry is treated as valid, and a display area HR8 is formed for displaying the period during which the jackpot of 16 rounds is won. Inside the display area HR8, as shown in FIG. 191(a), the character "MAX effective timer" is displayed, and the effective period of the small win is displayed below the character "MAX effective timer". The number of seconds corresponding to the remaining time until is displayed. By confirming the display contents of the display area HR8, the player can easily understand the remaining time until the ball entering the special MAX V winning hole 6752 becomes invalid.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 191(a), in the approximate center of the display screen, there are characters such as "If you enter MAX before the timer reaches 0, the MAX jackpot will be confirmed!" A display area HR9 is formed in which characters such as "maybe...?" are displayed. Furthermore, below the display area HR9, an image simulating the special MAX V prize opening 6752 and the characters "Left shot" facing the direction of the image simulating the special MAX V prize opening 6752 were displayed. A display area HR10 is formed in which an image resembling an arrow is displayed. The display contents of these display areas HR9 and HR10 make it easy for the player to win a jackpot of at least 16 rounds by shooting the game ball aiming at the special MAX V prize opening 6752 by hitting to the left. can be understood. In addition, by displaying a character with a relatively bearish expression "Maybe it will also enter the time saving mode ...?" It is possible to make the player recognize that the possibility of shifting to the time saving state) is low. Therefore, during the small winning period, the game is played to win the 16 round big win by hitting left, or to stop launching the game ball and wait for the next small win (avoid the V prize in this small win). Since it is possible to realize the playability of allowing the player to make a selection, the player's interest in the game can be improved. In addition, the special small winning performance for low expectations is configured to be difficult to be selected during the small winning effective period corresponding to the time-saving big winning and to be easily selected during the small winning effective period corresponding to the normal big winning. there is

FIG. 191(b) is an example of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 when a special small-hit effect (special small-hit effect for a high degree of expectation) suggesting that the expectation of the time-saving jackpot is high is executed. It is a figure showing. As shown in FIG. 191 (b), the display mode of the special small hit effect for high expectations is different from the display mode of the special small hit effect for low expectations only in the display mode of the display area HR9. It is configured. Specifically, the characters displayed in the lower part of the display area HR9 are the characters "High expectations for the time saving mode!". With this display mode, it is possible for the player to enter the game ball into the special MAX V prize opening 6752 during the validity period of the small win, and the possibility of winning the time-saving jackpot is extremely high. can be easily understood. Details will be described later with reference to FIG. 195(b), but this special small winning production for high expectation is likely to be selected during the small winning effective period corresponding to the short time jackpot, and corresponds to the normal jackpot It is configured to be difficult to be selected during the small winning effective period.

Although illustration is omitted, the special small winning effect in the ninth embodiment is provided for medium expectation in addition to low expectation and high expectation. When a small win is won with the special MAX V winning opening 6752 open, a special small win effect for 1 expectation is determined according to the type of small win among these three expectations. be done. As a result, the player is made to select whether to aim to win a special MAX V prize opening 6752 by hitting to the left or to avoid the V prize in consideration of the degree of expectation suggested by the special small winning performance. Since it is possible to realize sexuality, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

<Electrical configuration in the ninth embodiment>
Next, the configuration of the ROM 202 provided in the main controller 110 in the ninth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 192(a). FIG. 192(a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM 202 in the ninth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 192(a), the configuration of the ROM 202 in the ninth embodiment is the configuration of the ROM 202 in the eighth embodiment (and the first embodiment) (see FIG. 9(a)). The difference is that a type selection table 202ea is added, and the defined contents of the first winning random number table 202a and the first winning type selection table 202b are partially changed.

The small hit type selection table 202ea is a data table that is referred to for determining the small hit type when the special symbol lottery results in a small hit. Details will be described later with reference to FIG. 193(b), but when a small hit is obtained in a special symbol lottery, this small hit type selection table 202ea is referred to, and the value of the small hit type counter C5 A corresponding small hit type is determined.

Next, referring to FIG. 192(b), the first winning random number table 202a in the ninth embodiment will be described. FIG. 192(b) is a diagram showing the defined contents of the first winning random number table 202a in the ninth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 192(b), in the first winning random number table 202a in the ninth embodiment, two random numbers (counter values) of "0, 1" are defined as judgment values for judging a big hit. (See 202a1 in FIG. 192(b)). It should be noted that the determination value for the big hit is common between the lottery for the first special symbol and the lottery for the second special symbol. Of the 400 possible random numbers (counter values) of the first winning random number counter C1, the number of determination values (counter values) determined as a big win is two, so the probability of being determined as a big win in the lottery of special symbols. is 1/200 (2/400).

In addition, "2 to 399" is defined as the range of the determination value determined to be out of the lottery of the first special symbol (see 202a2 in FIG. 192 (b)), and determination to be determined as a small hit of the first special symbol No value is specified (see 202a3 in FIG. 192(b)). In addition, "2 to 39" is defined as the range of the determination value determined to be out of the second special symbol (see 202a2 in FIG. 192 (b)), and the determination value determined to be a small hit of the second special symbol "40 to 399" is defined as the range (see 202a3 in FIG. 192(b)). Of the 400 possible random numbers (counter values) of the first winning random number counter C1, the number of judgment values (counter values) judged to be small hits is 360, so it is judged to be a big hit in the lottery of special symbols. The probability is 9/10 (360/400).

As described above, in the ninth embodiment, it is possible to win a small prize only in the second special symbol lottery. As a result, the game ball is easily entered into the V winning opening in the time-saving state of the normal pattern in which the lottery of the second special pattern is easily executed, so that the big win is likely to occur again in a short period of time. As a result, the degree of advantage in the time-saving state can be increased, so that great joy can be given to the player when the time-saving state occurs.

Next, with reference to FIG. 193(a), the first winning type selection table 202b in the ninth embodiment will be described. FIG. 193(a) is a diagram showing the defined contents of the first win type selection table 202b in the ninth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 193(a), the first winning type selection table 202b in the ninth embodiment is provided with two types of jackpots A13 and B13 as the first special symbol jackpot types. Two types of jackpots C13 and D13 are provided as jackpot types of special symbols.

As shown in FIG. 193(a), for the first special symbol, the value of the first winning type counter C2 is defined in the range of "0 to 49" in association with "jackpot A13". (See 202b1 in FIG. 193(a)). This "jackpot A13" is a jackpot type (4-round time-saving jackpot) in which the number of rounds is 4, and the gaming state after the jackpot is set to a time-saving state with normal symbols. Of the 100 counter values that can be taken by the first winning type counter C2, 50 counter values are "jackpot A13", so when the first special symbol lottery results in a jackpot, "jackpot A13" is determined. ratio is 50% (50/100).

As shown in FIG. 193(a), for the first special symbol, the value of the first winning type counter C2 is defined in the range of "50 to 99" in association with "jackpot B13". (See 202b2 in FIG. 193(a)). This "jackpot B13" is a jackpot type (4-round normal jackpot) in which the number of rounds is 4 and the game state after the jackpot is set to the normal state of normal symbols. Of the 100 counter values that can be taken by the first winning type counter C2, 50 counter values are "jackpot B13". ratio is 50% (50/100).

Further, as shown in FIG. 193(a), for the second special symbol, the value of the first hit type counter C2 is defined in association with the range of "0 to 79" with "jackpot C13". (See 202b3 in FIG. 193(a)). This "jackpot C13" is a jackpot type (16-round time-saving jackpot) in which the number of rounds is 16 rounds and the game state after the jackpot ends is set to a time-saving state with normal symbols. Of the 100 counter values that can be taken by the first winning type counter C2, 80 counter values are "jackpot C13", so when the second special symbol lottery results in a jackpot, "jackpot C13" is determined. ratio is 80% (80/100).

In addition, as shown in FIG. 193(a), for the second special symbol, the value of the first hit type counter C2 is defined in association with the range of "80 to 99" with "jackpot D13". (See 202b4 in FIG. 193(a)). This "jackpot D13" is a jackpot type (4-round normal jackpot) in which the number of rounds is 4 and the game state after the jackpot ends is set to a normal state with normal symbols. Of the 100 possible counter values of the first winning type counter C2, 20 counter values are "jackpot D13", so when the second special symbol lottery results in a jackpot, "jackpot D13" is determined. ratio is 20% (20/100).

Thus, in the ninth embodiment, when the first special symbol lottery results in a big win, the 4th round jackpot with a small number of rounds is always executed, while the second special symbol lottery wins a big win. In such a case, 80% of the time, a jackpot of 16 rounds with the largest number of rounds is executed, and 20% of the time, a jackpot of 4 rounds with the smallest number of rounds is executed. In addition, when the lottery of the first special pattern is a big hit, the ratio of setting an advantageous time-saving state after the big win is 50%, whereas the lottery of the second special pattern is a big hit. In this case, the rate of setting the time saving state is 80%. Therefore, it is configured to be more advantageous for the player to win a big win in the second special symbol lottery than to win a big win in the first special symbol lottery.

Next, with reference to Drawing 193 (b), the details of small hit classification selection table 202ea are explained. FIG. 193(b) is a diagram showing the defined contents of the small hit type selection table 202ea. This small hit type selection table 202ea is a data table that defines a determination value for determining a small hit type when a small hit is obtained in a special symbol lottery, and is a determination value of the small hit type counter C5. Is defined in association with each small hit type.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 193 (b), the value of the small hit type counter C5 is defined in the range of "0 to 4", "small hit A13" is associated with the small hit type. (See 202ea1 in FIG. 193(b)). This "small win A13" is a small win type that wins a "jackpot E13" (16 round short time big win) when a game ball enters one of the V winning openings during the small win validity period. . That is, even when a game ball enters the normal V winning openings 6750f3 and 6750f5, a round is performed in the same manner as when a gaming ball enters the MAX V winning opening 6750f1 and the special MAX V winning opening 6752. This is the most advantageous jackpot type in which the 16-round jackpot with the largest number (advantageous to the player) is executed, and a time-saving state is set as the game state after the jackpot ends. Of the 100 counter values that the value of the small hit type counter C5 can take, the counter value that becomes "small hit A13" is 5, so when it becomes a small hit in the special symbol lottery, "small hit A13" The percentage determined is 5% (5/100).

In addition, as shown in FIG. 193 (b), the value of the small hit type counter C5 is defined in association with the "small hit B13" as the small hit type for the range of "5 to 54" ( See 202ea2 in FIG. 193(b)). This "small win B13" is a small win type that wins a "big win F13" (special short-time big win) when a game ball enters one of the V winning openings during the small win validity period. In this "jackpot F13", the number of rounds of the jackpot is set to 4 rounds when a game ball enters either of the normal V winning openings 6750f3 and 6750f5 during the small win validity period, while MAX When the game ball enters the V winning opening 6750f1 for special MAX or the V winning opening 6752 for special MAX, the number of rounds for the jackpot is set to 16 rounds. In other words, the "small win B13" varies according to the type of the V winning opening where the number of rounds of the big winning (degree of advantage) is won, so when the game ball enters the normal V winning opening, the player disadvantageous for In addition, since the game state after the big win is set to the time-saving state, it is a big win type that is advantageous to the player in terms of the game state after the big win. Of the 100 counter values that the value of the small hit type counter C5 can take, 50 counter values are "small hit B13", so when a special symbol lottery results in a small hit, "small hit B13" The ratio determined is 50% (50/100).

Further, as shown in FIG. 193 (b), the value of the small hit type counter C5 is defined in association with the "small hit C13" as the small hit type for the range of "55 to 99" ( See 202ea3 in FIG. 193(b)). This "small win C13" is a small win type that wins a "big win G13" (special normal big win) when a game ball enters one of the V winning openings during the small win validity period. In this "jackpot G13", the number of rounds of the jackpot is set to 4 rounds when a game ball enters either of the normal V winning openings 6750f3 and 6750f5 during the validity period of the small jackpot, while MAX When the game ball enters the V winning opening 6750f1 for special or the V winning opening 6752 for special MAX, the number of rounds for the jackpot is set to 16 rounds. That is, the "small win C13" varies according to the type of the V winning opening where the number of rounds (advantage) of the big winning is won, so when the game ball enters the normal V winning opening, the player disadvantageous for In addition, since the game state after the big win is set to the normal state of normal symbols, it is a big win type that is disadvantageous to the player in terms of the game state after the big win. Of the 100 counter values that the value of the small hit type counter C5 can take, the counter value that becomes the "small hit C13" is 45, so when a special symbol lottery results in a small hit, the "small hit C13" The ratio determined is 45% (45/100).

In this way, when the second special symbol lottery results in a small hit, the ratio of determining the small hit type (small hit A13, B13) corresponding to the time-saving jackpot is set to 55% (5% + 50%). On the other hand, the rate at which the small hit type (small hit C13) corresponding to the normal jackpot is determined is set to 45%. As described above, in the time-saving state of the normal design, the probability of winning a small hit in the lottery of the second special design is 9/10, so winning the jackpot in the time-saving state of the normal design is almost a small hit. This is a case where V winning occurs. Therefore, when the jackpot is achieved in the time-saving state of the normal symbols, the ratio of the time-saving state of the advantageous normal symbols again after the big hit is 45%. In addition, the number of rounds of the big win to be won when the second special symbol lottery is a small win and the V prize is generated is configured to be variable according to the state of the V prize opening 6752 for special MAX. That is, if the special MAX V winning opening 6752 is closed, it is necessary to enter the game ball into the lottery device 6750 in order to generate the V winning during the small winning valid period, so the V winning occurs. 1/3 of the cases are V prizes for the MAX V prize opening 6750f1, whereas 2/3 of the cases where V prizes occur are V prizes for either the normal V prize openings 6750f3 or 6750f5. . And, as described above, the small hit B13 determined at a rate of 50% of the small hit and the small hit C13 determined at a rate of 45% are usually in either of the V winning openings 6750f3 and 6750f5. When the game ball enters, the number of rounds for the big win is set to 4 rounds. That is, when a V prize is won for the MAX V prize opening 6750f1, a 16 round jackpot is set at a rate of 100%, while when a V prize is generated for either the normal V prize openings 6750f3 or 6750f5. , a 16-round jackpot is set at a rate of 5% (small hit A13), while a 4-round jackpot is set at a rate of 95% (either small hit B13 or C13). For this reason, in the state where the special MAX V winning opening 6752 is closed, the 16 round jackpot will be achieved at a rate of about 36.7% (1/3 + 2/3 x 5%) when the V winning occurs. , with a rate of about 63.3% (2/3 x 95%) being a 4-round jackpot. On the other hand, as described above, if the second special symbol lottery results in a big win, the 16 rounds will be a big win at a rate of 80%. As for the ratio of the advantageous 16-round jackpot, if it becomes a small win in the second special symbol lottery, and if a V prize occurs during the execution of the small win game (during the small win valid period) and a big win (approximately 36.7%), it is higher in the case of a big hit in the lottery of the second special symbol (80%).

On the other hand, in the time saving state and in the state where the special MAX V winning opening 6752 is open, regardless of the small hit type, left hitting is performed and the special MAX in the open state Just by entering the game ball into the V winning opening 6752, the 16 rounds jackpot with the largest number of rounds is always set, so in terms of the number of rounds, compared to the case of a jackpot in the lottery of the second special symbol. be advantageous. In other words, in the ninth embodiment, even in the same gaming state (ordinary symbol time saving state), the second special symbol lottery is drawn depending on whether the special MAX V winning opening 6752 is open. , and the degree of advantage is switched between the case where a V prize is generated during execution of the small winning game and the big winning and the case where the big winning is achieved by lottery of the second special pattern. By constructing in this way, it is possible for the player to wish for different opportunities as a chance to win the jackpot (V win and lottery for the second special symbol) according to the state of the special MAX V win opening 6752. . Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

Next, with reference to FIG. 194, the configuration of the RAM 203 provided inside the main controller 110 in the ninth embodiment will be described. FIG. 194 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 203 in the ninth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 194, the configuration of the RAM 203 in the ninth embodiment is different from the configuration of the RAM 203 in the eighth embodiment (and the first embodiment) (see FIG. 13). , The difference is that the jackpot type storage area 203eb and the V passage flag 203ec are added, and the probability variation flag 203h and the ball waiting flag 203j are deleted. Other configurations are the same as those of the RAM 203 in the eighth embodiment (and the first embodiment) described above, so detailed description thereof will be omitted here.

The small hit flag 203ea is a flag indicating whether or not the small hit is in progress. If the small hit flag 203ea is on, it means that the small win is in progress, and if it is off, it means that the small win is not in progress. The small hit medium flag 203ea is set to ON when the special symbol lottery results in a small hit and the small hit starts. Also, it is set to OFF at the end of the small hit (see S1311 in FIG. 203). In the special symbol variation process 13 (see FIG. 197), this small hitting medium flag 203ea is referred to, and it is determined whether or not the small hitting is in progress (see S261 in FIG. 197).

The jackpot type storage area 203eb is a storage area for temporarily storing data indicating the jackpot type when a jackpot is won. In the jackpot type storage area 203eb, data corresponding to the jackpot type is stored when the special symbol lottery results in a jackpot (see S321 in FIG. 198). In addition, when a special symbol lottery results in a small hit, and the game ball enters the V winning opening in the small win, data indicating the big win type corresponding to the small win type is stored (see S1502 in FIG. 199). ). The data stored in the jackpot type storage area 203eb is held until the end timing of the winning jackpot, and is used to set the game state after the jackpot ends according to the jackpot type.

The V passing flag 203ec is for indicating whether or not the game ball has entered the V winning opening during the execution of the small winning game (whether or not it is confirmed that the big winning will occur after the small winning is completed). flag. If the V passing flag 203ec is turned on at the end of the small win, the start of the big win is set at the end of the small win, whereas if the V passing flag 203ec is off, the small win is made without starting the big win. is terminated. The initial value of the V passage flag 203ec is set to OFF, and is set to ON when the game ball enters the V winning opening during execution of the small winning game (see S1608 in FIG. 204). In addition, it is set to off after setting the start of the big hit based on the entry of the game ball into the V winning hole (see S1325 in FIG. 203).

Next, referring to FIG. 195(a), the configuration of the ROM 222 provided in the audio lamp control device 113 in the ninth embodiment will be described. FIG. 195(a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM 222 in the ninth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 195(a), the configuration of the ROM 222 in the ninth embodiment is different from the configuration of the ROM 222 in the eighth embodiment (and the first embodiment) (see FIG. 14(a)). The only difference is that a selection table 222ea is added. This expectation degree selection table 222ea determines the effect mode (expectation degree suggested by the effect) of the special small win effect to be executed when the small win is won while the special MAX V winning opening 6752 is open. This is a data table that is referenced to Here, as described above, in the ninth embodiment, the jackpot is won by entering any one of the V winning openings during the small prize validity period. Also, the type of jackpot (jackpot pattern) to be won when the ball enters the V winning hole is predetermined for each small hit type (see FIG. 193(b)). That is, when a game ball is entered into the V winning opening and a jackpot is won, whether or not a time saving state is granted after the jackpot ends is determined at the time when the small hit type is determined (variation of special symbols determined at the start). In the ninth embodiment, if a small win is won while the special MAX V winning mouth 6752 is open, the expectation that a time saving state is given by making a V win during the small win valid period is selected from the expectation degree selection table 222ea and executed. By configuring in this way, when a small hit occurs while the special MAX V winning opening 6752 is open, the game ball is allowed to enter the special MAX V winning opening 6752 within the small winning effective period. Whether or not to start the big win can be determined according to the degree of expectation indicated by the special small win performance. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved. Details of the degree of expectation selection table 222ea will be described with reference to FIG. 195(b).

FIG. 195(b) is a diagram showing the defined contents of the expectation level selection table 222ea. As shown in FIG. 195(b), this expectation level selection table 222ea includes, for each small hit type, the expectation level type (expectation level suggested by the special small hit effect) and the value range of the effect lottery counter 223ea. and are defined in association with each other. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 195(b), the value of the production lottery counter 223ea for the small hit A13 and the small hit B13 (the small hit type that wins the time-saving jackpot when V winning occurs) The production mode for high expectations (see FIG. 191 (b)) is defined in association with the range of "0 to 19", and the production mode for medium expectations is defined in the range of "20 to 89" (not shown) are defined in association with each other, and the range of "90 to 99" is defined in association with the effect mode for low expectations (see FIG. 191(a)).

Since the production lottery counter 223ea can take 100 values of "0 to 99", when the small winning A13 or B13 is achieved, the production mode for high expectation, middle expectation and low expectation. are determined at 20% (20/100), 70% (70/100) and 10% (10/100) respectively.

Further, as shown in FIG. 195(b), the value of the effect lottery counter 223ea is within the range of "0 to 4" for the small hit C13 (a small hit type that usually wins a big hit when a V win occurs). Production mode for high expectations (see FIG. 191 (b)) is defined in association, production mode for medium expectations in the range of "5 to 49" (not shown) is defined in association, " The range of 50 to 99” is defined in association with the low-expectation performance mode (see FIG. 191(a)).

Since the production lottery counter 223eka can take 100 values from "0 to 99", when the small win C13 is reached, the production modes for high expectations, medium expectations, and low expectations are determined. are 5% (5/100), 45% (45/100), and 50% (50/100), respectively. From these stipulations, it can be said that the high-expectation performance modes are more likely to be selected when the small win A13 and the small win B13 are won, but are less likely to be selected when the small win C13 is won. In addition, the performance mode for the medium expectation degree is selected at a relatively high rate both when the small winning A13 and the small winning B13 are won, and when the small winning C13 is won, and the performance mode for the low expectation degree is selected. is difficult to be selected when the small winning A13 and the small winning B13 are won, and is easy to be selected when the small winning C13 is won. Therefore, when the performance mode for high expectations is executed, it is possible to suggest that the small win being executed is likely to be the small win A13 or the small win B13, When the performance mode for the low degree of expectation is executed, it is possible to suggest that the small win being executed is highly likely to be the small win C13. Further, when the performance mode for medium expectation degree is executed, it is possible to suggest that there is a possibility of a small win A13 and a small win B13 as well as a possibility of a small win C13. As a result, it is possible to provide the player with the playability that allows the player to select whether or not to enter the game ball into the special MAX V winning opening 6752 according to the degree of expectation suggested by the effect mode. , the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In addition, in the ninth embodiment, when a small win is won in a state where the special MAX V winning opening 6752 is open, a special small win effect is executed, but the present invention is not limited to this. . For example, even if a small win occurs while the special MAX V winning opening 6752 is closed, the special small win effect may be executed. In this case, for example, every time a small win is won, a special small win production is executed, or a normal small win production (a production in which the expectation of a short-time jackpot is not suggested when a V win is made). It may be determined by lottery whether or not it is executed. Also, the lottery probability may be changed according to the situation. More specifically, the probability of executing the special small winning performance when winning the time saving jackpot and moving to the time saving state increases as the normal jackpot is won continuously. good too. By constructing in this way, it is possible to seek relief in the event of a relatively disadvantageous situation for the player, that is, to win consecutive jackpots normally. It is possible to keep the motivation for the game. Therefore, the operating rate of the pachinko machine 10 can be improved.

Next, with reference to FIG. 196, the configuration of the RAM 223 provided within the sound lamp control device 113 in the ninth embodiment will be described. FIG. 196 is a block diagram showing the configuration of RAM 223. As shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 196, the RAM 223 in the ninth embodiment has a production lottery counter 223ea added to the configuration of the RAM 223 in the eighth embodiment (see FIG. 179), and a standby state production flag 223g. The difference is that the is deleted.

The effect lottery counter 223ea is a counter used to select one effect mode (expectation level type) from the expectation level selection table 222ea described above. The value of the effect lottery counter 223ea is updated within the range of "0 to 99". When selecting the effect mode (expectation level type) of the special small hit effect, the random number (counter value) defined in the expectation level selection table 222ea is compared with the value of the effect lottery counter 223ea, and the corresponding 1 is obtained. is selected. This effect lottery counter 223ea is updated, for example, every 1 ms during the main process 13 (see FIG. 201).

<Regarding the control process of the main controller in the ninth embodiment>
Next, various control processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in the ninth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 197 to 204. FIG. First, with reference to FIG. 197, special symbol variation processing 13 (S141) in the ninth embodiment will be described. This special symbol variation process 13 (S141) is a process executed instead of the special symbol variation process 12 (see FIG. 180) in the eighth embodiment, and the special symbol variation process 12 (see FIG. 180) in the eighth embodiment. ), this is a process for setting the display mode in the first symbol display device 37 and setting the variation pattern of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 and the like.

Of the special symbol variation processing 13 (see FIG. 197) in the ninth embodiment, in each of S202 to S212, S214 to S218, and S221 to S223, the special symbol variation processing 13 in the eighth embodiment (see FIG. 197 See), the same processes as the processes of S202 to S212, S214 to S218, and S221 to S223 of ) are executed. In addition, when the special symbol variation processing 13 (see FIG. 197) in the ninth embodiment is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the big winning game or the small winning game is being executed (S261), and the big winning game Or, when it is determined that the small winning game is being executed (S261: Yes), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, in the process of S261, when it is determined that neither the big winning game nor the small winning game is being executed (S261: No), the process proceeds to S202. In the process of S261, if the flag 203m during the big hit is ON, it is determined that the big win game is being executed, and if the flag 203ea during the small hit is ON, it is determined that the small win game is being executed, and the big win is performed. When it is determined that both the medium flag 203m and the small hit medium flag 203ea are off, it is determined that the win is neither a big hit nor a small hit.

Further, in the special symbol variation processing 13 (see FIG. 197) in the ninth embodiment, when the processing of S207 or S212 is completed, the special symbol variation processing (S213, FIG. 23), the special symbol variation process 13 is executed (S262), and the process ends. The details of this special symbol variation process 13 (S262) will be described later with reference to FIG. Also, in the special symbol variation process 13 (see FIG. 197) in the ninth embodiment, in the process of S218, when it is determined that the lottery result of the special symbol this time is a big hit (S218: Yes), the counter during time saving 203i is reset to 0 (S263), the start of the big win is set, the big win start flag 203k is set to ON (S264), and the process proceeds to S223.

Further, in the special symbol variation process 13 (see FIG. 197) in the ninth embodiment, when the process of S222 is completed, it is then determined whether or not the current special symbol lottery result is a small hit (S265). , When it is determined that the lottery result is a small win (S265: Yes), a small win start process for setting the start of a small win is executed (S266), and this process ends. The details of this small winning start process (S266) will be described later with reference to FIG. On the other hand, in the process of S265, when it is determined that the lottery result of the special symbol this time is not a small hit (that is, it is a loss) (S265: No), the small win start process (S266) is skipped and left as it is. End this process.

Next, with reference to FIG. 198, the details of the special symbol variation start process 13 (S262) in the ninth embodiment will be described. This special symbol variation start process 13 (S262) is a process executed instead of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 23) in the eighth embodiment (and first embodiment), and is executed in the eighth embodiment (and Similar to the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 23) in the first embodiment), the values of various counters stored in the execution areas of the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a and the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b. Based on, "special design jackpot", "special design off", or "special design small hit" lottery (determination of success or failure) is performed, and the first design display device 37 and the third design display device 81 It is a process for determining the effect pattern (fluctuation pattern) of the variable effect to be performed.

Of the special symbol variation start processing 13 (see FIG. 198) in the ninth embodiment, in each processing of S301 to S312, the special symbol variation start processing (see FIG. 23) in the eighth embodiment (and the first embodiment) ) are executed in steps S301 to S312. Also, in the special symbol variation start process 13 (see FIG. 198) in the ninth embodiment, in the process of S305, when it is determined that the lottery result of the special symbol this time is a big hit (S305: Yes), the big hit type Data indicating the type of jackpot won in this lottery is stored in the storage area 203eb (S321), and the process proceeds to S306.

On the other hand, in the process of S305, if it is determined that the current special symbol lottery is not a big win (S305: No), then it is determined whether or not the current special symbol lottery is a small win (S322). ), when it is determined that the lottery result is a small hit (S322: Yes), based on the value of the small hit type counter C5 acquired in the process of S301, the display mode at the time of the small hit is set (S323). More specifically, the value of the small hit type counter C5 obtained in the process of S301 and the small hit type selection table 202ea (see FIG. 193 (b)) are compared to determine what the small hit type is. . As described above, if the value of the small hit type counter C5 is in the range of "0 to 4", it is determined that it is a small hit A13, and if it is in the range of "5 to 54", it is a small hit B13 If it is in the range of "55 to 99", it is determined to be a small hit C13 (see FIG. 193(b)).

When the process of S323 is completed, the variation pattern at the time of the small winning is determined (S324). When the variation pattern is set in the process of S324, the variation time (display time) of the variation effect in the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the third symbol display device 81 stops at a combination of symbols indicating a small hit. The variation time of the third symbol is determined. At this time, the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203 is compared with the variation pattern selection table 202d (see FIG. 11A), and the variation pattern corresponding to the value of the variation type counter CS1 (variation time) is determined. When the process of S324 ends, this process ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 199, details of the above-described small winning start process (S266) will be described. This small winning start process (S266) is, as described above, a process for setting the start of the small winning when the special symbol lottery results in a small winning. When this small winning start process is executed, first, the operation scenario of the lottery device 6750 corresponding to the small winning type is read (S1501). This operation scenario defines data for setting the operations shown in FIG. 190 for the small hit attacker 6750a, the ball stopper 6750e, and the ball discharge door 6750c.

When the processing of S1501 is finished, next, data indicating the big hit type corresponding to the small hit type of this time is stored in the big hit type storage area 203eb (S1502). In the process of S1502, if the small hit type of this time is a small hit A13, the data indicating the big hit E13 (16 rounds short time big hit) is stored in the big hit type storage area 203eb, and the small hit type of this time is a small hit B13. If there is, data indicating the jackpot F13 (special short-time jackpot) is stored in the jackpot type storage area 203eb, and if the small hit type this time is the small hit C13, data indicating the jackpot G13 (special normal jackpot) is stored in the jackpot type. Store in area 203eb. When the process of S1502 ends, the start of the small hit is set (S1503), and this process ends.

Next, startup processing 13 in the ninth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. This start-up process 13 is a process executed instead of the start-up process 12 (see FIG. 181) in the eighth embodiment. This is a process that is started along with the input. In the start-up process 13 (see FIG. 200) in the ninth embodiment, S901-S910, S912, and S914-917 of the start-up process (see FIG. 29) in the first embodiment are performed. The same processes as those of S910 and S914 to S917 are executed.

In addition, in the start-up process 13 (see FIG. 200) in the ninth embodiment, when the process of S910 is completed, the time saving counter 203i, the big hit medium flag 203m, and the small hit medium flag 203ea are read (S941), and the process to S912.

Further, in the start-up process 13 (see FIG. 200) in the ninth embodiment, the start of the rotation operation of the sorting rotor 6750f provided inside the lottery device 6750 is set (S942), and the process proceeds to S914. to move to. By executing the processing of S942, the distribution rotor 6750f rotates at a constant rotation speed (for example, a rotation speed of one rotation in 5 seconds) until the pachinko machine 10 is powered off. continue. Therefore, it is possible to randomly change the ball entrance through which the game balls entering the lottery device 6750 are distributed according to the timing of winning the small prize.

Next, with reference to FIG. 201, details of the main processing 13 in the ninth embodiment will be described. This main process 13 is a process that is executed instead of the main process 12 (see FIG. 182) in the eighth embodiment, and similar to the main process 12 (see FIG. 182) in the eighth embodiment. This is a process for executing control.

S1001 to S1003 and S1006 to S1016 of the main process 13 (see FIG. 201) in the ninth embodiment correspond to S1001 to S1003 and S1006 of the main process (see FIG. 30) in the first embodiment, respectively. The same processing as each processing of S1016 is executed. Further, in the main process 13 (see FIG. 201) in the ninth embodiment, when the process of S1003 is completed, instead of the jackpot control process (S1005, see FIG. 30) in the eighth embodiment (and the first embodiment) , Big hit control processing 13 is executed (S1071), then small winning control processing 13 for executing various controls during the small winning game is executed (S1072), and the process proceeds to S1006. Details of these jackpot control processing 13 (S1071) and small hit control processing 13 (S1072) will be described later with reference to FIGS. 202 and 203, respectively.

First, with reference to FIG. 202, details of the jackpot control process 13 (S1071) described above will be described. As described above, this jackpot control process 13 is a process executed instead of the jackpot control process (see FIG. 32) in the eighth embodiment (and the first embodiment), and performs opening/closing control of the specific winning opening 65a. This process is for

Of the jackpot control process 13 (S1071) in the ninth embodiment, in each process of S1201 to S1212, S1214, S1216, and S1217, the jackpot control process (FIG. 32 See), the same processes as the processes of S1201 to S1212, S1214, S1216, and S1217 are executed.

In addition, in the jackpot control processing 13 (see FIG. 202) in the ninth embodiment, when it is determined that the end timing of the ending effect has come in the processing of S1212 (S1212: Yes), the jackpot this time is a time-saving jackpot. It is determined whether or not (S1251), and if it is determined that it is a time-saving jackpot, the process proceeds to S1214. On the other hand, in the processing of S1251, when it is determined that it is not a time-saving jackpot (S1251: No), the processing proceeds to S1216.

Next, with reference to FIG. 203, the details of the above-described small winning control process 13 (S1072) will be described. This small hit control process 13 (S1072) is, as described above, a process for executing various controls during the small hit game. In other words, it is a process for performing the same control as the small winning control process (see FIG. 67) in the third embodiment described above.

Of the small hit control processing 13 (see FIG. 203), in each process of S1301 to S1304, S1310, and S1311, respectively S1301 to S1304, S1310 of the small hit control processing (see FIG. 67) in the third embodiment, and The same processing as each processing of S1311 is executed. In addition, in the small winning control processing 13 (see FIG. 203) in the ninth embodiment, when the processing of S1303 ends, then the start of the operation scenario for small winning is set (S1321), and this processing ends .

In addition, in the small hit control processing 13 (see FIG. 203) in the ninth embodiment, when the processing of S1311 is completed, it is determined whether or not the V passage flag 203ec is on (S1322), and the V passage When it is determined that the flag 203ec is on (S1322: Yes), the value of the time saving counter 203i is reset to 0 (S1323), and the jackpot of the type corresponding to the data stored in the jackpot type storage area 203eb The start is set (S1324), the V passage flag 203ec is set to off (S1325), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1322 that the V passage flag 203ec is off (S1322: No), the processes of S1323 to S1325 are skipped and the process ends.

Further, in the small winning control process 13 (see FIG. 203) in the ninth embodiment, when it is determined that it is not the end timing of the small winning in the process of S1310 (S1310: No), the ball enters the V winning opening. is monitored, and if a ball entry is detected, a V passing detection process for performing control corresponding to the type of the V winning hole is executed (S1326), and this process ends. Details of this V passage detection process (S1326) will be described with reference to FIG.

FIG. 204 is a flow chart showing the V passage detection process (S1625). As described above, this V passing detection process (S1625) is a process for monitoring the entry of a ball into the V winning opening and performing control corresponding to the type of the V winning opening when the entry of a ball is detected. . When the V passage detection process (S1625) is executed, it is first determined whether or not the V passage flag 203ec is on (S1601). Yes), it means that the entry (passing) of the ball into one of the V winning holes has already been detected and there is no need for new setting, so this process is finished as it is.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the V passage flag 203ec is off (S1601: No), it is determined whether or not the ball has entered (passed through) any of the V winning openings (S1602), If it is determined that the ball entering (passing through) the V winning hole has not been detected (S1602: No), this processing ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1602 that a ball has been entered into the V winning hole (S1602: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the V winning is valid (S1603). If it is (S1603: No), there is a possibility that the game ball entered (passed through) the V winning hole due to fraud, etc., so an error command is set (S1604), and this process ends. .

On the other hand, in the process of S1603, if it is determined that it is within the V valid period (S1603: Yes), then the type of the V winning hole in which the ball is detected in the process of S1602 is normal V winning hole 6750f3. , 6750f5 (S1605), and the current entry (passing) is neither normal V winning opening 6750f3 nor 6750f5 (MAX V winning opening 6750f1 or special MAX V winning opening 6752) (S1605: No), the data stored in the jackpot type storage area 203eb is rewritten to data corresponding to the 16-round jackpot (S1606), and the process proceeds to S1607. and migrate.

On the other hand, in the process of S1605, if it is determined that the ball entered into either of the normal V winning openings 6750f3 and 6750f5 is detected (S1605: Yes), the process of S1606 is skipped and the process proceeds to S1607. Transition. In the process of S1607, the V pass command is set (S1607), and then the V pass flag 203ec is set to ON (S1608). Next, a V winning opening command for notifying the sound lamp control device 113 of the type of the V winning opening for which passage has been detected is set (S1609), and this processing ends.

Through this V passing detection process, when a ball is detected to enter the MAX V winning opening 6750f1 and the special MAX V winning opening 6752 during the small winning effective period, 16 rounds of big winning are executed regardless of the small winning type. can do. As a result, the game can be played while paying attention to the type of the V winning hole into which the ball is entered during the small winning effective period, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

<Regarding control processing of the sound ramp control device in the ninth embodiment>
Next, various control processes executed by the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 according to the ninth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 205 to 207. FIG. First, with reference to FIG. 205, the winning-related process 13 (S43001) in the ninth embodiment will be described. This hit-related process 13 (S43001) is a process executed instead of the hit-related process 12 (see FIG. 184) in the eighth embodiment in the command determination process (see FIG. 36). Similar to related process 12 (see FIG. 184), this is a process for executing control corresponding to the type of command related to winning.

Of the winning-related processing 13 (see FIG. 205) in the ninth embodiment, S4404, S4405, S4407, and S4408 each process S4404, S4405 of the winning-related processing 12 (see FIG. 184) in the eighth embodiment. , S4407, and S4408 are executed. Also, in the hit-related process 13 (see FIG. 205) in the ninth embodiment, in the process of S4407, it is determined that the round number command is not included in the unprocessed command received from the main controller 110. In the case (S4407: No), next, it is determined whether or not the small winning opening command is included in the unprocessed command received from the main control device 110 (S44001), and the small winning opening command is When it is determined that it is included (S44001: Yes), an expectation degree suggestion setting process for setting the effect mode during the small hit is executed (S44002), and this process is finished. The details of this expectation level suggestion setting process (S44002) will be described later with reference to FIG.

In addition, in the hit related process 13 (see FIG. 205) in the ninth embodiment, in the process of S44001, when it is determined that the opening command for the small hit is not received (S44001: No), then the main control device 110 is included in the unprocessed commands (S44003), and if it is determined that the V winning opening command is included (S44003: Yes), V winning opening command processing for executing control according to the type and state of the V winning opening from which the ball is detected is executed (S44004), and this processing ends. On the other hand, in the process of S44003, when it is determined that the V winning mouth command is not included (S44003: No), the process proceeds to S4409. Details of the V winning hole command process (S44004) will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, with reference to FIG. 206, details of the above-described expectation level suggestion setting process (S44002) will be described. This expectation level suggestion setting process (S44002) is, as described above, a process for setting an effect mode during a small hit. In the expectation suggestion setting process (S44002), first, it is determined whether or not the MAX zone flag 223da is ON (S40101), and if it is determined that the MAX zone flag 223da is ON (S40101: Yes ), it means that a small hit is executed in a state where the special MAX V winning opening 6752 is open, so each process of S40103 to S40105 for determining the effect mode of the special small win effect is executed. More specifically, the expectation degree selection table 222ea is read (S40103), and from the read expectation degree selection table 222ea, the small hit type of this time and the expectation degree type corresponding to the counter value of the effect lottery counter 223ea are specified. (S40104), the execution of the special small hit effect of the specified expectation type is set (S40105), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S40101, if it is determined that the flag 223da in the MAX zone is off (S40101: No), it means that the special MAX V winning opening 6752 is closed. Execution of a small hit effect is set (S40102), and this process is terminated. By this expectation suggestion setting process (see FIG. 206), when the special MAX V winning opening 6752 is open, the expectation that the time saving jackpot is executed when the V winning is made by the special small winning production production mode can be suggested to the player. Therefore, it is possible to realize the playability of allowing the player to select whether or not to enter the game ball into the special MAX V winning opening 6752 in consideration of the content of suggestion of the special small winning effect. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be enhanced.

Next, with reference to FIG. 207, the details of the above-described V winning opening command processing (S44004) will be described. This V winning hole command process (S44004) is, as described above, a process for executing control according to the type and state of the V winning hole in which the ball is detected. In this V winning opening command processing (S44004), first, it is determined whether or not the V winning opening command received this time is a command indicating entry into the V winning opening 6750f1 for MAX (S40201). When it is determined that the command indicates the winning opening 6750f1 (S40201: Yes), the MAX zone flag 223da is set to ON (S40202), and V indicates that the V winning opening has been won during the small winning valid period. A winning effect is set (S40203), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S40201, if it is determined that the command is not a command indicating entry into the V winning opening 6750f1 for MAX (S40201: No), then V indicating entry into the V winning opening 6752 for special MAX It is determined whether or not it is a prize winning command (S40204). In the processing of S40204, if it is determined that the current V winning opening command is a command indicating the special MAX V winning opening 6752 (S40204: Yes), then the MAX zone flag 223da is set to OFF (S40205 ), and then it is determined whether or not a small winning game is currently being executed (S40206). In the process of S40206, if it is determined that the small hit game is currently being executed (S40206: Yes), during the small hit valid period, the game ball enters the open state special MAX V winning opening 6752 Since this means that the player has done so, the execution of the V winning effect is set (S40207), and this processing ends. On the other hand, in the process of S40206, when it is determined that the small hit game is not being executed (normal game is being played) (S40206: No), it is opened by performing a left hit outside the small hit valid period Since it means that the game ball enters the special MAX V winning opening 6752 and the special MAX V winning opening 6752 is closed, the execution of the falling effect is set (S40208), and this processing is finished. do.

On the other hand, in the processing of S40204, if it is determined that the command received this time is not a command indicating winning to the special MAX V winning opening 6752 (S40204: No), the normal V winning opening 6750f3, Since it means that the command indicates one of 6750f5, the execution of the V winning effect is set (S40209), and this processing ends. By executing this V winning opening command process (see FIG. 207), suitable control can be executed according to the type of the V winning opening from which the winning is detected, the state of the special MAX V winning opening 6752, and the like. can.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the ninth embodiment, the type of V winning opening that wins a big win when a ball is entered when winning a small win is the V for MAX that triggers the execution of a 16-round big win. It is configured to provide two types of winning openings and normal V winning openings that trigger the execution of a big winning of the number of rounds corresponding to the type of small winning. In addition, as the V winning opening for MAX to which the 16 round jackpot is awarded, two of the V winning opening for MAX 6750f1 and the V winning opening for special MAX 6752 are provided. is configured to be accompanied by a non-electric accessory 6752a. This non-electric accessory 6752a is configured to be opened in conjunction with the entry of the game ball into the MAX V winning opening 6750f1. This open state continues until the next game ball enters the special MAX V winning opening 6752. , when a small win is achieved, the big win of 16 rounds can be easily fixed by just hitting the game ball to the special MAX V winning opening 6752 by hitting it to the left before the small win is finished. A very favorable situation can be created. In other words, it is possible to form an extremely advantageous state in which there is a high possibility of winning the jackpot of the most advantageous type in succession, so that the player can have a greater sense of satisfaction.

In addition, in the ninth embodiment, when the second special symbol lottery is a big hit in the time saving state, regardless of the state of the special MAX V winning opening 6752, the 16 round big hit will be at a rate of 80%. is configured as On the other hand, if a V winning occurs in a state where the special MAX V winning opening 6752 is closed, the rate is about 36.7% (when the ball enters the MAX V winning opening 6750f1 and 16 round jackpot is won only in A13 when V winning occurs during the small winning valid period), while the special MAX V winning opening 6752 is open, special MAX during the small winning valid period A 16-round jackpot is always won simply by shooting a game ball aiming at the V winning port 6752.例文帳に追加In other words, when the special MAX V winning opening 6752 is closed in the time saving state of the normal symbol, the second special symbol lottery becomes a big hit than when the V winning occurs during the small winning valid period. On the other hand, if the special MAX V winning opening 6752 is open, it is better if the V winning occurs during the small winning effective period. The ratio of 16-round big wins is higher than the case of big wins in the lottery of 2 special symbols. Therefore, in spite of the same game state, depending on whether or not the special MAX V winning opening 6752 is open, the second special symbol lottery becomes a small hit, and during the execution of the small win game It is possible to switch the degree of advantage between the case of a big win due to the occurrence of a V prize and the case of a big win in the lottery of the second special symbols. Therefore, in the time-saving state of normal symbols, depending on the state of the V winning opening 6752 for special MAX, as a chance of winning a jackpot (V winning and lottery of the second special symbol), it is possible to make the player wish for different opportunities. Therefore, it is possible to enhance the player's interest in the game.

<Modified example of the ninth embodiment>
Next, a modification of the ninth embodiment described above will be described with reference to FIG. In the above-described ninth embodiment, by making the game ball enter (pass through) one of the V winning openings during the execution of the small winning game (during the small winning valid period), it corresponds to the type of V winning opening It was configured to start the jackpot of the number of rounds to be played. That is, according to the type of small win, it is determined in advance whether it will be a short-time jackpot or a normal jackpot when a V prize is won, and the number of rounds of the jackpot is indeterminate until a V prize is generated. board.

On the other hand, in the modified example of the ninth embodiment, in addition to the number of rounds of the big win, the game state after the end of the big win is also changed according to the type of the V winning hole into which the ball is entered during the valid period of the small win. It is configured to obtain More specifically, even if a small win C13 corresponding to the big win G13 (special normal big win) is won, the ball enters the MAX V winning port 6750f1 or the special MAX V winning port 6752 during the small winning effective period. Then, a 16-round short-time jackpot is awarded (jackpot G13 is rewritten to a 16-round short-time jackpot). By configuring in this way, it is possible to further increase the benefit when the game ball enters the MAX V winning opening 6750f1 and the special MAX V winning opening 6752. When a ball is entered, the game can be played with more attention paid to the type of the V winning hole into which the ball is entered. In addition, when the special MAX V winning opening 6752 is opened and the state shifts to the time saving state, 16 rounds can be easily made just by hitting left within the small winning effective period of the small winning winning on 9/10. Since it is possible to form an extremely advantageous state in which the time-saving jackpot can be won, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

The pachinko machine 10 according to the modified example of the ninth embodiment differs in configuration from the pachinko machine 10 according to the above-described ninth embodiment in that the control processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 is partially changed. This is the point. Other configurations, other processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, various processing executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113, and various processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 are described in the ninth It is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in the embodiment. Hereinafter, the same reference numerals are given to the same elements as in the ninth embodiment, and illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

<Regarding the control process of the main controller in the modified example of the ninth embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIG. 208, the V passage detection process (S1625) executed by MPU 201 of main controller 110 in this modification will be described. This V passing detection process (S1625) monitors the ball entering the V winning hole, similarly to the V passing detection process (see FIG. 204) in the ninth embodiment described above, and when the ball is detected, This is a process for performing control corresponding to the type of the V winning opening.

Of the V passage detection processing (see FIG. 208) in the modified example of the ninth embodiment, the processing of S1601 to S1605 and S1607 to S1609 is the same as that of the V passage detection processing (see FIG. 204) in the ninth embodiment. The same processes as those of S1601 to S1605 and S1607 to S1609 are executed.

In addition, in the V passage detection process (see FIG. 208) in this modification, in the process of S1605, the V winning opening for which the passage was detected this time is neither the normal V winning opening 6750f3 nor the 6750f5 (that is, the V winning opening for MAX 6750f1 or special MAX V winning opening 6752) (S1605: No), the data stored in the jackpot type storage area 203eb is rewritten to data indicating a 16-round short-time jackpot. (S1611), the process proceeds to S1607.

Thus, in the V passing detection process (see FIG. 208) in the present modification, when detecting a ball entering the MAX V winning opening 6750f1 or the special MAX V winning opening 6752 during the small hit valid period, , Regardless of the type of small hit (that is, regardless of the type of jackpot corresponding to the type of small hit), it is configured to set a 16-round short-time jackpot. By configuring in this way, it is possible to further increase the degree of advantage of the player when the game ball enters the V winning opening 6750f1 for MAX or the V winning opening 6752 for special MAX. can improve interest in

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the modification of the ninth embodiment, when a game ball enters the MAX V winning opening 6750f1 during the small winning effective period, the special MAX V winning opening 6752 In addition to being open, it is configured to win a 16-round short-time jackpot. With this configuration, when the ball is entered into the V winning opening 6750f1 for MAX, the game state is always shifted to a game state in which the game is played by hitting to the right, so the special V winning opening 6752 for MAX is opened. After that, it is possible to suppress the fact that the special MAX V winning opening 6752 is closed without winning even one small win. In addition, even if the game ball enters the special MAX V winning opening 6752 during the small winning effective period, it is configured to win the 16 round short time jackpot, so the game ball is sent to the MAX V winning opening 6750f1. , it is possible to form an extremely advantageous state in which it is almost certain to win the 16-round short-time jackpot at least twice at short intervals. Therefore, when a game ball enters the lottery device 6750 during the small winning valid period, it is possible to strongly expect that the game ball enters the MAX V winning opening 6750f1. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In addition, in this modification, when the game ball enters the V winning opening 6750f1 for MAX and the V winning opening 6752 for special MAX, the game state after the jackpot is completed is set to the time saving state. , The easiness to shift to the time saving state can be varied according to the state of the game state and the V winning opening 6752 for special MAX. More specifically, in the normal state of the normal design, when it becomes a jackpot in the lottery of the first special design, it becomes a time saving jackpot at a rate of 50%, while the second special design is normally in the time saving state of the design. 193(a)). On the other hand, in the time saving state, the ratio of the time saving state when winning the jackpot by the V winning in the small hit varies depending on whether or not the special MAX V winning opening 6752 is opened. That is, when V winning occurs in a state where the special MAX V winning opening 6752 is closed, during the small winning valid period in either small winning A13, B13 (small winning corresponding to time saving jack) Winning a time-saving jackpot when a V prize occurs (55%) and when a ball enters the MAX V prize mouth 6750f1 during the small hit C13 valid period (45% x 1/3) do. In other words, it becomes a time-saving jackpot at a rate of 70%. On the other hand, in the state where the V winning opening 6752 for special MAX is open, the ball is entered into the V winning opening 6752 for special MAX only by hitting left during the small hit valid period, and the time saving jackpot is executed. can be made Therefore, when the special MAX V winning opening 6752 is closed in the time saving state, if the second special symbol lottery wins the jackpot, the V winning occurs during the small winning valid period. While it becomes easier to shift to the time-saving state than, when the special MAX V winning opening 6752 is open, V winning during the small winning effective period rather than becoming a jackpot in the lottery of the second special symbol It is easier to shift to the time saving state when the occurs. Therefore, in the time-saving state of normal symbols, depending on the state of the V winning opening 6752 for special MAX, as a chance of winning a jackpot (V winning and lottery of the second special symbol), it is possible to make the player wish for different opportunities. Therefore, it is possible to enhance the player's interest in the game.

In addition, in the ninth embodiment and its modification, the type of jackpot to be won when V winning occurs during the validity period of the small winning is defined in association with each small winning type, and the V winning for MAX When the game ball enters the opening 6750f1 or the special MAX V winning opening 6752, the jackpot type is rewritten to the 16 round big hit or the 16 round short time jackpot. need not be defined in advance. The jackpot type may be determined by lottery when the V prize is generated. More specifically, for example, when a game ball enters the normal V winning openings 6750f3 and 6750f5 during the small winning validity period, 16 rounds short time jackpot at a rate of 5%, 4 at a rate of 50% A lottery may be performed so that the 4-round normal jackpot is determined at a rate of 45% for the short-time round jackpot. In addition, when detecting the ball entering the V winning opening 6750f1 for MAX and the V winning opening 6752 for special MAX, a lottery may be performed so that the 16 round short time jackpot is always determined. By configuring in this way, since it is not necessary to define the small hit type and the big hit type in association with each other, the small hit type selection table 202ea can be omitted.

<Tenth Embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the tenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 209 to 220. FIG. In the pachinko machine 10 in the ninth embodiment described above, in the lottery of the second special symbol that is likely to be executed during the time saving state, while winning a small hit with a high probability, in the lottery of the first special symbol, a small hit It was a composition that could not be elected. A game ball is entered into the V winning opening during the effective period of the small winning to win the big winning.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 in the tenth embodiment, even when the lottery for the first special symbol is executed, a small win is won with a predetermined probability (for example, 1/100). It is configured to set an open pattern that can win a V prize with a part of the small hit of one special symbol. That is, even in the normal state in which the game should be progressed by shooting the game ball aiming at the first ball entrance 64 by hitting to the left, it is possible to generate a big hit by the V prize. In addition, a plurality of small winning types with different V winning rates (V winning rates of 50%, 75%, and 100%) are provided as small winnings of the first special symbols in which V winnings can occur. As a result, when a small win is obtained in the lottery of the first special symbol, it is possible to expect a small win of an open pattern that enables V winning, and a small win with a higher V winning rate can be expected. Since the player can play the game in anticipation of what will happen, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

The pachinko machine 10 according to the tenth embodiment differs in configuration from the pachinko machine 10 according to the ninth embodiment in that the board configuration of the game board 13 is partially changed, and the ROM 202 of the main controller 110 The only difference is that the configuration of the Other configurations, various processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, various processes executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113, and various processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 are described in the ninth embodiment. It is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in form. Hereinafter, the same reference numerals are given to the same elements as in the ninth embodiment, and illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

First, referring to FIG. 209, the board configuration of the game board 13 in the tenth embodiment will be described. FIG. 209 is a front view of the game board 13 in the tenth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 209, in the tenth embodiment, a lottery device 6755 is provided below the variable display device unit 80 instead of the lottery device 6750 in the ninth embodiment. The difference is that the special MAX V winning opening 6752 is deleted. Details of the lottery device 6755 will be described with reference to FIGS. 210 to 212. FIG.

FIG. 210 is an enlarged front view around the lottery device 6755 on the game board 13 of the tenth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 210, inside the lottery device 6755 in the tenth embodiment, a sorting rotator 6755f is provided instead of the sorting rotator 6750f in the ninth embodiment. The distribution rotator 6755f is provided with three V winning openings (central V winning openings 6755fv1 to 6755fv3) and three out openings (central out openings 6755fo1 to 6755fo3). Like the minute rotator 6750f, it is configured to always rotate at a constant speed. A game ball that reaches the distribution rotor 6755f is randomly distributed to one of the six ball entrances according to the timing of winning a small win, etc., so that the game ball that reaches the distribution rotor 6755f enters the V prize opening. The distribution probability (proportion) is 1/2 (3/6).

Further, as shown in FIG. 210, the lottery device 6755 has a small winning attacker 6755a capable of opening and closing the lottery device 6755, a discharge area 6755d for discharging game balls to the outside, and a discharge area 6755 that opens and closes. A ball ejection door 6755c for this purpose and a ball stopping portion 6755e for temporarily stopping a game ball that has passed through the upper surface of the ball ejection door 6755c in the guide passage 6755b are provided. These small winning attacker 6755a, ejection area 6755d, ball ejection door 6755c, and ball stopper 6755e are the small winning attacker 6750a, ejection area 6750d, and ball ejection provided in the lottery device 6750 in the ninth embodiment, respectively. Since it is configured to have the same functions as the door 6750c and the ball stopper 6750e, detailed description thereof will be omitted here.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 210, at a predetermined position between the small hit attacker 6755a inside the lottery device 6755 and the ejection area 6755d, a game ball is placed in a different direction (downward) from the distribution rotor 6755f. and a guidance channel 6755b2 that can flow down, and two ball entrances (right V winning mouth 6755bV, and right out mouth 6755bO), an upper opening/closing door 6755bU capable of opening and closing the upper end of the guide channel 6755b2, and a lower opening/closing door 6755bD capable of opening and closing the upper side of the right V winning opening 6755bV. The peripheral structure of this guiding channel 6755b2 will be described in detail with reference to FIG.

FIG. 211(a) is an enlarged front view of the guide channel 6755b2 and its surroundings when both the upper opening/closing door 6755bU and the lower opening/closing door 6755bD are closed, and FIG. FIG. 211(c) is an enlarged front view of the guide channel 6755b2 and its surroundings in a state in which the lower opening/closing door 6755bD is opened and the lower opening/closing door 6755bD is closed, and FIG. is an enlarged front view of the periphery of the guide channel 6755b2 in FIG.

As shown in FIG. 211(a), when both the upper opening/closing door 6755bU and the lower opening/closing door 6755bD are closed, the game ball rolls on the upper surface of the upper opening/closing door 6755bU so that it can pass through. . As a result, the game ball entered into the lottery device 6755 passes over the upper opening/closing door 6755bU and flows down toward the distribution rotor 6755f. In addition, as shown in FIG. 211 (b), when the upper opening/closing door 6755bU is opened and the lower opening/closing door 6755bD is closed, the game ball can flow into the guidance flow path 6755b2, and the game that has flowed in It becomes impossible (difficult) for the ball to enter the right V winning hole 6755bV. Further, as shown in FIG. 210(b), the lower opening/closing door 6755bD slopes downward toward the right outlet 6755bO in the closed state. As a result, the upper opening/closing door 6755bU is opened, and the game ball that has flowed into the lottery device 6755 with the lower opening/closing door 6755bD closed flows into the guide passage 6755b2 whose upper end is open, and is closed. As a result of being guided in the direction of the right out port 6755bO by the inclination formed by the upper surface of the lower opening/closing door 6755bD, the ball enters the right out port 6755bO.

Further, as shown in FIG. 210(c), the right V winning port 6755bV is arranged directly below the guide channel 6755b2, while the right out port 6755bO is located on the left side of the guide channel 6755b2 in the flow direction. is provided at a branched position. Therefore, the game ball entering the lottery device 6755 in a state in which both the upper opening/closing door 6755bU and the lower opening/closing door 6755bD are opened flows down along the flow direction of the guide flow path 6755b2, and the right V Enter the winning hole 6755bV.

In this way, the lottery device 6755 of the tenth embodiment distributes the game balls that have flowed into the lottery device 6755 according to the combination of opening and closing of the upper opening/closing door 6755bU and the lower opening/closing door 6755bD. It is possible to switch between a state of flowing down to the side (see FIG. 211(a)), a state of flowing down to the right out port 6755bO (see FIG. 211(b)), and a state of flowing down to the right V winning port 6755bV. can. That is, the downstream direction in which V winning occurs at a rate of 1/2 (the direction in which the distribution rotator 6755f is provided), the downstream direction in which V winning is impossible (difficult) (the direction of the right outlet 6755bO), It is possible to switch between the flowing direction (the direction of the right V winning opening 6755bV) in which the V winning is confirmed (easily). Therefore, since the game can be played while paying more attention to the flowing direction of the game ball that has entered the lottery device 6755, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

Although details will be described later, in the tenth embodiment, when a small hit is obtained in the lottery of the second special symbol, V winning by entering the ball into any of the central V winning openings 6755fv1 to 6755fv3 When is generated, the possibility of a time-saving jackpot is higher than when V winning is generated by entering the ball into the right V winning opening 6755bV. More specifically, when the game ball enters the central V winning opening 6755fv1 to 6755fv3 during the small winning game of the second special pattern, the right V winning while winning the 16 round short time jackpot at a rate of 100% When the ball enters the mouth 6755bV, it is configured so that only a little less than 40% will be a time-saving jackpot. By configuring in this way, when the second special pattern is a small hit, the ball is entered into any one of the center V winning openings 6755fv1 to 6755fv3 rather than entering the right V winning opening 6755bV. can be played with a stronger expectation of Therefore, in particular, when the game ball flows down toward the distribution rotor 6755f during the execution of the second special symbol small winning game (that is, the central V winning opening 6755fv1 to 6755fv3, or the central out opening 6755fo1 to 6755fo3 When it is determined that the game balls are distributed to any of the above), it is possible to strongly desire to win the V prize. Therefore, it is possible to further enhance the player's interest in the game.

Next, with reference to FIG. 212, the configuration of the distribution rotor 6755f in the tenth embodiment will be described. FIG. 212 is a top view of the distribution rotor 6755f in the tenth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 212, the distribution rotator 6755f in the tenth embodiment has six along the outer peripheral portion, similar to the distribution rotator 6750 in the ninth embodiment (see FIG. 189(a)). An entrance is provided. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 212, the central V winning openings 6755fv1 to 6755fv3 and the central out openings 6755fo1 to 6755fo3 are arranged so that the V winning openings and the out openings are alternately adjacent to each other. Since the distribution rotator 6755f continues to rotate at a constant speed in a certain direction with the axis 6755fz as the rotation axis, the game ball that reaches the distribution rotator 6755f is sent to each ball entrance at an equal rate. distributed. That is, the ratio (probability) of the game ball entering the V winning hole is 1/2 (3/6).

Next, with reference to FIG. 213, the operation patterns of the upper opening/closing door 6755bU, the lower opening/closing door 6755bD, the ball stop portion 6755e, and the ball ejection door 6755c when the special symbol lottery results in a small win will be described. Here, in the tenth embodiment, when a small hit is won, only the opening and closing operation mode (opening pattern) of the small hit attacker 6755a is changed according to the type of the small hit, and other operation modes (upper opening and closing The operation patterns of the door 6755bU, the lower opening/closing door 6755bD, the ball stop portion 6755e, and the ball discharge door 6755c) are configured to be common regardless of the small hit type. In Figure 213, it becomes common regardless of the type of small hit, will be described the operation mode of the part other than the small hit attacker 6755a. In addition, the release pattern of the small hit attacker 6755a for each small hit type will be described later with reference to FIGS.

FIG. 213 is a diagram showing temporal changes (operation patterns) of the opening/closing states of the upper opening/closing door 6755bU, the lower opening/closing door 6755bD, the ball stop portion 6755e, and the ball ejection door 6755c during execution of the small winning game. As shown in FIG. 213, the upper open/close door 6755bU is set to the open state as the initial state, and switches to the closed state when 0.2 seconds have passed since the start of the small win. That is, it switches to a state in which it is possible to make the game ball flow down in the direction of the distribution rotor 6755f. This closed state continues for 0.2 seconds (that is, continues until 0.4 seconds have passed since the start of the small win), and switches to the open state when 0.2 seconds have passed since switching to the closed state. After that, the upper opening/closing door 6755bU is maintained in an open state from the start of the small win until 2 seconds have elapsed, and is switched to a closed state again from the time of 2 seconds to the time of 3 seconds. Then, when 3 seconds have passed since the start of the small winning, the state is switched to the open state again, and thereafter the open state is maintained until the end of the small winning. That is, the gaming ball that entered the lottery device 6755 between the time of 0.2 seconds and 0.4 seconds after the start of the small win and the time of 2 seconds and 3 seconds, The game ball that rolls on the upper surface of the closed upper opening and closing door 6755bU and flows down to the distribution rotating body 6755f side (see FIG. 211 (a)), and enters the lottery device 6755 during other periods It flows into the guide channel 6755b2 and is guided to the right V winning port 6755bV or the right out port 6755bO (see FIGS. 211(b) and (c)).

Further, as shown in FIG. 213, the lower opening/closing door 6755bD is set to the closed state as the initial state, and the closed state is maintained for 0.6 seconds from the start of the small win. Then, when 0.6 seconds have elapsed from the start of the small win, the state is switched to the open state. As a result, the game ball that has flowed into the guide channel 6755b2 can enter the right V winning port 6755bV. The open state of the lower opening/closing door 6755bD continues for 0.2 seconds, and switches to the closed state when 0.8 seconds have passed since the start of the small win. After that, the lower opening/closing door 6755bD is kept closed until 3 seconds have passed since the start of the small win, and is switched to the open state again at the time when 3 seconds have passed. This open state continues for one second. That is, the open state continues until 4 seconds have passed since the start of the small win, and the state is switched to the closed state at the time of 4 seconds from the start of the small win. After that, the closed state is maintained until the small winning ends.

By combining the operation patterns of the upper opening/closing door 6755bU and the lower opening/closing door 6755bD, a state in which the game ball is guided to the right out port 6755bO for 0.2 seconds from the start of the jackpot (see FIG. 211 (b)) becomes. That is, for 0.2 seconds from the start of the small hit, even if the game ball enters the lottery device 6755, it is impossible (difficult) to enter the V winning opening (V impossible period ). Then, when 0.2 seconds have passed since the start of the small hit and the upper open door 6755bU is switched to the closed state, the game ball is guided to the distribution rotor 6755f (see FIG. 211(a)). As described above, the game ball that reaches the distribution rotator 6755f is distributed to one of the V winning openings at a rate of 1/2, so that 0.2 seconds have passed since the start of the small hit, and the lottery device It is a period during which game balls entering 6755 are V-winning at a rate of 1/2 (V-winning rate 50% period). This V winning rate 50% period continues until 0.4 seconds have passed since the start of the small win, and when 0.4 seconds have passed, it switches to a V disabled period.

The V disabled period continues until 0.6 seconds have passed since the start of the small hit, and when 0.6 seconds have passed since the start of the small hit, the lower door 6755bD is opened while the upper door 6755bU is kept open. is released. As a result, the game ball entering the lottery device 6755 is guided to the right V winning opening 6755bV (see FIG. 211(c)). In other words, the game balls entering the lottery device 6755 are V winning at a rate of almost 100% (V winning rate 100% period). This V winning rate 100% period continues for 0.2 seconds, and when 0.8 seconds have elapsed from the start of the small win, the lower opening/closing door 6755bD is closed, thereby switching to the V disabled period again. This V disabled period continues until 2 seconds have passed since the start of the small win, and the upper opening/closing door 6755bU is closed at the time of 2 seconds from the start of the small win, so that 1 second lasts until 3 seconds after the start of the small win. During , it switches to the V winning rate 50% period. Then, when 3 seconds have passed after the start of the small win, the upper opening/closing door 6755bU is opened and the lower opening/closing door 6755bD is opened, thereby switching to the V winning rate 100% period. This V winning rate 100% period continues until 4 seconds after the start of the small hit (that is, 1 second), and when 1 second elapses, the lower opening and closing door 6755bD is closed to enter the V disabled period. switch. After that, the V disabled period is maintained until the small win is finished.

In this way, during execution of the small winning game, the V disabled period, the V winning rate 50% period, and the V winning rate 100% period are switched. The V winning rate can be varied. Therefore, since the game can be played by paying attention to the timing when the game ball enters the lottery device 6755, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 213, the ball stopping portion 6755e is maintained in a closed state until 5 seconds have passed since the start of the small hit, and at the time of 5 seconds (the second V winning rate 50% period is After that, it is switched to an open state (a state in which the guide channel 6755b can flow down) from the time when 2 seconds have passed) to the end of the small hit, and is switched to the closed state again at the end of the small hit. On the other hand, the ball discharge door 6755c is kept closed until 4.5 seconds have passed since the start of the small win, and when 4.5 seconds have passed (the second V winning rate 50% period has passed) After that, it is switched to the open state from the time point of 1.5 seconds) to the end of the small win, and is switched to the closed state again at the end of the small win. That is, for 4.5 seconds after the start of the small win, both the ball stopping portion 6755e and the ball discharge door 6755c are closed. All game balls that enter the ball and pass through the upper surface of the closed upper opening/closing door 6755bU are stopped in the guiding flow path 6755b by the ball stopper 6755e.

In addition, when 4.5 seconds have passed since the start of the small hit, the ball discharge door 6755c is opened with the ball stopper 6755e closed, so the player is stopped by directly contacting the right side of the ball stopper 6755e. All game balls other than the one game ball that is present fall from the opening of the ball discharge door 6755c to the discharge area 6755d and are discharged to the outside. That is, even if a plurality of game balls flowed into the lottery device 6755 during the 50% V winning rate period, after the ball discharge door 6755e was opened, the game stopped inside the lottery device 6755. It is possible to have only one sphere at most. Then, 0.5 seconds after the ball discharge door 6755c is opened, the ball stop portion 6755e is opened, so that one game ball remaining inside the lottery device 6755 is directed toward the distribution rotor 6755f. flow down By opening the ball discharge door 6755c first and then opening the ball stop part 6755e, even if two or more game balls enter the lottery device 6755 during the V winning rate 50% period, Also, the second and subsequent game balls can be ejected to the outside from the ejection area 6755d until the ball stop portion 6755e is opened. Therefore, since the number of game balls reaching the distribution rotor 6755f in one small win can be limited to one at most, the game balls entered the lottery device 6755 during the V winning rate 50% period. The V winning rate in each case can be fixed (50%) each time.

Thus, in the tenth embodiment, the operation of the upper opening/closing door 6755bU, the lower opening/closing door 6755bD, the ball stopper 6755e, and the ball discharge door 6755c when winning a small win is performed regardless of the type of the small win. It is common. Thereby, only the operation of the small hit attacker 6755a should be changed according to the small hit type, so that the processing load at the time of winning the small hit can be reduced.

Next, with reference to FIG. 214, the release pattern set for the small winning attacker 6755a when the first special symbol lottery results in a small winning in the tenth embodiment will be described. In the tenth embodiment, four types of different opening patterns are provided as opening patterns of the small winning attacker 6755a in the small winning of the first special symbol. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 214, the V winning rate pattern (see FIG. 214(a)), the V winning rate 50% pattern (see FIG. 214(b)), and the V winning rate 75% pattern (see FIG. 214(c)) and a normal small winning pattern (see FIG. 214(d)).

As shown in FIG. 214 (a), when the V winning confirmation pattern is set as the opening pattern of the small hit attacker 6755a, the small hit attacker 6755a is activated for 1 second from the start of the small hit. kept closed. During this time, the game ball launched by hitting to the right is blocked by the closed small hit attacker 6755a and cannot enter the lottery device 6755. - 特許庁Then, when 1 second has elapsed from the start of the small hit, the small hit attacker 6755a is opened for 0.1 second. After 0.1 second has passed, the small hit attacker 6755a is closed. Since this 0.1 second period corresponds to the V disabled period, even if the game ball can be entered into the lottery device 6755, the prize ball for the entered ball (for example, 10 prize balls) can only be obtained, and the ball cannot be entered into the V winning opening.

The closed state after the opening period of 0.1 seconds has elapsed continues until 3 seconds have elapsed after the start of the small win. Then, when 3 seconds have passed after the start of the small hit, the small hit attacker 6755a is set to the open state for 1 second (that is, until 4 seconds have passed after the start of the small hit). As described above with reference to FIG. 213, the V winning rate is 100% for 3 seconds to 4 seconds after the start of the small winning. That is, both the upper opening/closing door 6755bU and the lower opening/closing door 6755bD are opened (see FIG. 211(c)). , the game ball is almost certainly entered into the right V prize opening 6755bV, and the jackpot is won. If the player continues hitting to the right during the small hit, the game ball can be easily entered into the lottery device 6755 during the opening period of 1 second, so the V winning confirmation pattern is set as the opening pattern. Then, the V prize is almost decided.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 214(b), when the V winning rate 50% pattern is set as the opening pattern of the small winning attacker 6755a, the opening and closing operation until 2 seconds has passed is the same as the V winning fixed pattern. Become. That is, the attacker 6755a for small hits is opened only for 0.1 seconds from the time when 1 second has elapsed after the start of the small hits. Then, in the V winning rate 50% pattern, when 2 seconds have passed after the start of the small winning, the small winning attacker 6755a is opened, and this open state continues for 1 second. That is, the open state is maintained from 2 seconds after the start of the small hit to the time of 3 seconds, and the small hit attacker 6755a is closed at the time of 3 seconds. During this one second period, one or more game balls can be easily entered into the lottery device 6755 by continuing to hit the game ball to the right at the shortest shooting interval (that is, 0.6 second interval). set as a period. After the small hit attacker 6755a is closed, the small hit attacker 6755a is maintained in a closed state until the end of the small hit. As described above with reference to FIG. 213, the period of 2 to 3 seconds after the start of the small win is the 50% V winning rate period. That is, both the upper opening/closing door 6755bU and the lower opening/closing door 6755bD are closed (see FIG. 211(a)). , 1 can be made to flow down to the distribution rotor 6755f. As described above, when the game ball reaches the distribution rotator 6755f, it is distributed to the V winning opening at a rate of 1/2. The rate of occurrence is 50%.

Also, as shown in FIG. 214(c), when the V winning rate 75% pattern is set as the opening pattern of the small hit attacker 6755a, the opening and closing operation until 2 seconds has passed is the V winning confirmation pattern or the V It is the same as the winning rate 50% pattern. That is, the attacker 6755a for small hits is opened only for 0.1 seconds from the time when 1 second has elapsed after the start of the small hits. Then, in the V winning rate 75% pattern, when 2.5 seconds have passed after the start of the small winning, the small winning attacker 6755a is opened, and this open state continues for 1 second. That is, the open state is maintained from 2.5 seconds to 3.5 seconds after the start of the small hit, and the small hit attacker 6755a is closed at the time of 3.5 seconds. Thereafter, the small winning attacker 6755a is maintained in a closed state until the small winning ends. As described above with reference to FIG. 213, the period from 2 seconds to 3 seconds after the start of the small win is the period of 50% V winning rate, and the period from 3 seconds to 4 seconds is the period of 100% V winning rate. That is, when the V winning rate 75% pattern is set, the first 0.5 seconds of the open period becomes the V winning rate 50% period, and the latter half 0.5 seconds of the open period becomes the V winning rate 100% period. Become. Therefore, if a game ball enters the lottery device 6755 in the first half of the 1-second open period, the V winning rate is 50%, while if the game ball enters the lottery device 6755 in the latter half, the V winning rate is 100%. becomes. Therefore, when the 75% V winning rate pattern is set, the average V winning rate is 75% (50%*1/2+100%*1/2).

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 214(c), when the normal small winning pattern is set, the opening and closing operation until 2 seconds has passed is the V winning confirmation pattern, the V winning rate 50% pattern, Although it is the same as the V winning rate 75% pattern, after the opening period of 0.1 seconds is over, the small winning attacker 6755a is not opened until the small winning ends. Therefore, when the normal small winning pattern is set, the small winning attacker 6755a is opened only for a very short period of 0.1 seconds during the small winning effective period, and the game ball is lucky during the opening period. Even if the ball can enter the lottery device 6755, the ball enters the right outlet 6755bO. That is, no V prize is generated. Therefore, the normal small winning pattern is the opening pattern that is the most disadvantageous (less beneficial) for the player.

Thus, in the tenth embodiment, when the first special symbol lottery results in a small hit, one of the four types of open patterns with different V winning rates is used as the open pattern for the small hit attacker 6755a. It is configured to be set. In addition, at least until 2 seconds have passed since the start of the small hit, regardless of the opening pattern set for the small hit attacker 6755a, the common opening and closing operation (open only for 0.1 seconds after 1 second operation) is executed. With this configuration, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to recognize which release pattern is set until at least two seconds have passed since the start of the small win. V prize can be expected in the small hit type. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In addition, in the tenth embodiment, the upper limit number of game balls in one small hit is set to one, and the small hit ends based on the detection of one game ball entering. was configured to be set. That is, the closing of the small winning attacker 6755a is set, and all the game balls entered into the lottery device 6755 until the small winning attacker 6755a is completely closed are placed in any of the lottery devices 6755. By entering and ejecting the ball into one of the ball entrances, the small winning is finished regardless of the elapsed time from the start of the small winning. Therefore, for example, when a right-handed game ball enters the lottery device 6755 during the open period of 0.1 seconds, the small hit attacker 6755a is closed and entered. It is configured such that the small hit is finished when the game ball hit enters the right out port 6755bO. In other words, even if the open pattern (see FIGS. 214 (a) to (c)) that can win a V prize is set, during the open period of 0.1 seconds set at the time when 1 second has elapsed after the start of the small hit If you let the game ball enter the ball, it is extremely disadvantageous that the small hit will end before reaching the V winning period (V winning rate 50% period and V winning rate 100% period) Situations can arise. On the other hand, when the normal small hit pattern (see FIG. 214 (d)) is set, if the game ball is not entered during the open period of 0.1 seconds, then the small hit attacker 6755a is not released, and there is no chance of winning a prize ball. Therefore, if the player does not hit to the right in accordance with the 0.1 second release period, there is a possibility that the player will lose money. Therefore, when an opening pattern capable of winning a V prize is set, there is a high possibility that it is more advantageous for the player not to enter the game ball during the opening period of 0.1 seconds. When a normal small winning pattern is set in which V winning is impossible, it is more advantageous for the player to enter the game ball during the open period of 0.1 seconds, so the small winning type ( A set opening pattern) can be predicted, and a playability can be realized in which the user selects whether or not to enter the ball into the lottery device 6755 during the opening period of 0.1 second. That is, the player who is predicted to have an opening pattern capable of winning a V win is made to select waiting or hitting left so that the game ball does not enter the lottery device 6755 during the opening period of 0.1 second. On the other hand, it is possible to make the player, who is predicted to have the pattern for normal small winning, hit to the right, aiming at the opening period of 0.1 seconds. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In addition, in the tenth embodiment, in all the small hit types, the operation for 2 seconds from the start of the small hit is common, but it is not limited to this. In some small wins that can win V prizes, it may be configured such that an opening pattern of the small winning attacker 6755a that does not include the same operation mode as the normal small winning pattern is set. By configuring in this way, it is possible to provide a case in which a small win that can win a V prize can be detected quickly, so that the game can be played while paying attention to the release pattern of the small win attacker 6755a.

Next, with reference to FIG. 215, the release pattern set for the small winning attacker 6755a when the second special symbol lottery results in a small winning in the tenth embodiment will be described. In the tenth embodiment, three different open patterns (open patterns A to C) are provided as the open pattern of the small hit attacker 6755a in the second special symbol small hit.

In the tenth embodiment, when one or more game balls enter during the small hit, the small hit ends when the entered game ball is discharged, while the game ball In the case where the ball is not entered, the small winning is not finished until 8 seconds have elapsed, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when the opening period of the small hit attacker 6755a in one small hit is completed, if the game ball entering the game ball is not detected, the small hit may be terminated at that time. By configuring in this way, even though the game ball did not enter the lottery device 6755 (that is, there is no possibility of V winning), the small hit is continued until 8 seconds have passed since the start of the small hit. Since it is possible to suppress the occurrence of an event in which the game is not terminated, the efficiency of the game can be improved.

Conversely, it may be configured to set the end of the small hit according to the elapsed time from the time when the opening period of the attacker 6755a for the small hit ends. More specifically, for example, when a predetermined period of time (for example, 5 seconds) has passed after the opening period of the small hit attacker 6755a ends, the small hit is forced (the game ball remains in the lottery device 6755 It is also possible to configure the configuration to end. In this case, during the period until the small winning is finished, the game ball that entered the lottery device 6755 during the V winning rate 50% period is sorted to one of the ball entrances by the sorting rotator 6755f. A period of time that is at least longer than the period in which the game ball is detected (detection of an incoming ball), and a period of time during which it is difficult to forcibly guide the game ball to the flow path (central route) on the distribution rotor 6755f side by a magnet or the like. should be set to By configuring in this way, it is possible to suppress cheating of forcibly guiding the game ball to the sorting rotor 6755f using a magnet or the like. Here, since the game ball is usually made of a magnetic material (metal), the flowing direction of the game ball can be changed by bringing a magnet or the like close to the game ball flowing down the game area. It is possible to By utilizing this property, for example, a game ball that enters the lottery device 6755 is attracted by a magnet, and regardless of whether the upper opening/closing door 6755bU is closed or open, the magnetic force of the magnet guides the game ball. As a result, there is a possibility that a fraudulent act of guiding the ball through the upper opening/closing door 6755bU and the ball discharge door 6755c to the sorting rotor 6755f is performed. In particular, in the time-saving state of the normal pattern, the game ball that has reached the distribution rotor 6755f enters the V winning opening, resulting in the most advantageous 16-round time-saving jackpot. In other words, if a magnet or the like is used to guide the game ball to the distribution rotating body 6755f at each small hit, the probability of winning the small hit is high (9/10) and the time saving state is the most advantageous. The 16-round time-saving jackpot is repeated endlessly, creating an extremely advantageous situation for the cheater. In other words, there is a possibility that the hole will suffer an unexpected disadvantage. On the other hand, in this modification, even if a game ball is forcibly guided to the distribution rotor 6755f by a magnet or the like, the small hit is finished before the game ball enters any ball entrance. It is configured so that it can be stored away. That is, in a state in which the upper opening/closing door 6755bU is open, by attracting the game ball from the front side of the game board 13 with a magnet, the game ball is floated with respect to the guide flow path 6755b, and the upper opening/closing door 6755bU in the open state. If a series of fraudulent acts such as forcibly passing above the ball discharge door 6755c is performed, normally (V winning rate 50% period, the game ball enters the lottery device 6755 and enters the distribution rotor 6755f When the game ball flows down), the period until it flows down to the distribution rotor 6755f is longer than that, so the game ball that reaches the distribution rotor 6755f due to cheating A small hit can be terminated before being distributed. Therefore, it is possible to suppress fraudulent acts.

In addition, instead of ending the small hit after a predetermined period (for example, 5 seconds) has elapsed from the closing timing of the attacker 6755a for the small hit, after the lapse of the last V winning rate 50% period in the small hit After configuring to end the small hit (that is, after sharing the period from the start of the small hit to the end of the small hit regardless of the type of the small hit), the V winning rate 50% period and the V By changing the order of the 100% winning rate period, it may be possible to prevent cheating by guiding the player to the sorting rotor 6755f by using a magnet or the like. By configuring in this way, it is possible to simplify the end condition of the small winning, so that the processing load can be reduced.

As shown in FIG. 215(a), when the opening pattern A is set, the small winning attacker 6755a is opened along with the start of the small winning. This open state continues for 0.6 seconds, and the small winning attacker 6755a is closed when 0.6 seconds have passed after the start of the small winning. Thereafter, the small winning attacker 6755a is maintained in a closed state until the small winning ends. Since the opening time is relatively short at 0.6 seconds, even if the shortest firing interval (that is, 0.6 seconds interval) is executed to the right, the percentage of game balls entering is about 70%. . Also, it is extremely difficult to enter two or more game balls during the open period.

As described above with reference to FIG. 213, the period from the start of the small win until 0.2 seconds has passed, and from the time when 0.4 seconds have passed until the time when 0.6 seconds have passed, is set to the V disabled period. On the other hand, the period from the time when 0.2 seconds have passed to the time when 0.4 seconds have passed is set to the period of 50% V winning rate. Therefore, ⅓ (0.2 s/0.6 s) of the ball entering the lottery device 6755 with the open pattern A set is during the V winning rate period of 50%. That is, the game balls entering the lottery device 6755 are distributed to the distribution rotator 6755f at a rate of 1/3, and a V prize is generated at a rate of 1/2.

Further, as shown in FIG. 215(b), when the open pattern B is set, the small hit attacker 6755a is maintained in a closed state for 0.4 seconds after the start of the small hit, and 0.4 seconds. It switches to an open state for 0.6 seconds from the elapsed time to the elapsed time of 1 second, and after the lapse of 1 second, it is maintained in the closed state until the end of the small winning. As described above, from the time of 0.4 seconds to 0.6 seconds after the start of the small hit, and from the time of 0.8 seconds to 1 second, while it is set to the V impossible period, 0 From the point of time when 0.6 seconds have elapsed to the time of 0.8 seconds, the V winning rate is set to 100% period. Therefore, ⅓ (0.2 s/0.6 s) of the ball entering the lottery device 6755 with the open pattern B set is during the V winning rate 100% period. That is, at a rate of 1/3, the game balls entering the lottery device 6755 enter the right V winning hole 6755bV, thereby generating V winning. In addition, as described above, if the ball enters the right V winning opening 6755bV in the case of a small hit of the second special symbol, the possibility of a time saving state is relatively low (less than 40%). It is On the other hand, as described above, when the ball is entered into the central V winning openings 6755fv1 to 6755fv3, the most advantageous 16-round short-time jackpot for the player is determined. Therefore, it can be said that the open pattern B, in which the ball can only be entered into the right V winning hole 6755bV, is a more disadvantageous open pattern than the open pattern A.

Further, as shown in FIG. 215(c), when the open pattern C is set, the small hit attacker 6755a is maintained in a closed state for 0.2 seconds after the start of the small hit, and 0.2 seconds. During 0.6 seconds from the elapsed time to the 0.8 second elapsed time, it switches to the open state, and after the lapse of 0.8 seconds, it is maintained in the closed state until the end of the small winning. As described above, from 0.2 seconds to 0.4 seconds after the start of the small hit, the V winning rate is set to 50% period, and from 0.4 seconds to 0.6 seconds , is set to the V-disabled period, and from the point in time when 0.6 seconds have elapsed to the point in time when 0.8 seconds have elapsed, the period is set to the V winning rate 100% period. Therefore, 1/3 (0.2 s/0.6 s) of the ball entering the lottery device 6755 with the open pattern C set is during the V winning rate period of 50%. (0.2 s/0.6 s) is a ball entry during the V winning rate 100% period. That is, since the opening pattern C is an opening pattern in which a V winning occurs in 2/3 of the cases where the ball enters the lottery device 6755, it is an advantageous opening pattern with a higher V winning rate than the other opening patterns.

Thus, in the tenth embodiment, when a small hit is obtained in the lottery of the second special symbol, one of the three types of opening patterns is set, and the V winning rate is determined according to the opening pattern. Also, the types of V winning openings into which balls can enter are made different. By configuring in this way, it is possible to pay attention to the opening pattern (the operation of the upper opening and closing door 6755bU and the lower opening and closing door 6755bD during the opening period) set in the small winning attacker 6755a at the time of the small winning. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

Next, with reference to FIG. 216, a characteristic effect performed by the third symbol display device 81 in the tenth embodiment will be described. FIG. 216 is a diagram showing an example of the display mode of the selection effect that is executed when the first special symbol lottery results in a small hit in the tenth embodiment. As described above, in the 10th embodiment, as the small win of the first special symbol, a small win in which an open pattern that can win a V prize (see FIGS. 214 (a) to (c)) is set and a small win that cannot win a V prize (Difficult) open pattern (see FIG. 214 (d)) is set with a small hit, but until at least 2 seconds have passed, the open pattern of the small hit attacker 6755a (small hit attacker 6755a) are common, it becomes difficult to visually distinguish whether or not an opening pattern that allows a V prize is set. Therefore, it is unclear whether it would be particularly beneficial or detrimental to the player if a game ball is entered during the 0.1-second open period that is set while operating in the common open pattern. In other words, when an open pattern that allows V winning is set, if a game ball is entered during the open period of 0.1 seconds set in the V disabled period, the prize ball is given, Although it is a loss because the small winning is terminated, when the normal small winning pattern is set, if the game ball is entered during the open period of 0.1 second, the prize ball is awarded. Therefore, it is profitable for the player. The selection effect is a effect for allowing the player to select whether or not the game ball should be shot aiming at the release period of 0.1 seconds set while the common release pattern (operation mode) is being executed. .

As shown in FIG. 216, when the selection effect is executed, a display area HR8 in which characters "CHOOSE!!" In addition, on the left side of the center of the display screen, there is formed a display area HR9 having a substantially oblong rectangular shape in which the characters "low expectation for winning prize ball" and "medium expectation for V challenge" are displayed. In addition, an arrow image YG1 having a shape resembling a left-pointing arrow and displaying the characters “left shot” is displayed below the display area HR9. On the other hand, on the right side of the center of the display screen, there is formed a display area HR10 having a horizontally elongated substantially rectangular shape in which the characters "Medium expectations for winning a prize ball" and the characters "Low expectations for V challenge" are displayed. Further, an arrow image YG2 having a shape resembling a right-pointing arrow and displaying the characters "Right shot" is displayed below the display area HR10. These display contents allow the player to grasp the merits and demerits of left-handed batting and the merits and demerits of right-handed batting. That is, when hitting left, a game ball cannot enter during the open period of 0.1 seconds to obtain a prize ball, but the small hit attacker 6755a is released during the period during which V winning is possible. The player can be made to understand that there is a possibility (of executing the V-Challenge). Also, if you hit right, there is a possibility that you can win a prize ball by entering the game ball during the open period of 0.1 seconds. can make the player understand that there is a possibility that the small winning will end without executing the V challenge (opening of the small winning attacker 6755a during the V winning period).

It should be noted that there are provided a plurality of types of selection effects with different expectations in which opening patterns that allow V prizes are set. That is, a plurality of types are provided in which the ratio selected when an open pattern that can win a V prize is set and the ratio selected when an open pattern for a normal small win is set (not shown) figure). As a result, the player can decide whether to hit the ball to the right or the ball to the left, taking into consideration the degree of expectation of the opening pattern that can win a V prize suggested by the selection effect. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

Next, with reference to FIG. 217, the change over time of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 in the case where the first special symbol lottery results in a small win will be described. FIG. 217(a) is a diagram showing the change over time of the display mode when winning a small win (V challenge small win) in which an opening pattern that allows V winning is set. In FIG. 217(a), an example will be described in which a small win in which a V winning rate of 50% pattern is set as the V challenge small win is won.

As shown in FIG. 217(a), when winning a small win in which the V win rate 50% pattern is set, first, a variable display corresponding to the small win is started. After this variable display continues for 60 seconds, winning of a small win is reported, and a selection effect (see FIG. 216) is started. In other words, the selection effect is started at the time when the symbol corresponding to the small win is fixedly displayed. This selection effect continues for a maximum of 3 seconds. That is, it continues until 2 seconds have passed since the start of the small win (until the common operation mode ends).

If the game ball does not enter the lottery device 6755 during the open period of 0.1 seconds set when 1 second has elapsed after the start of the small hit (that is, if the conditions for ending the small win are not satisfied), During the V winning period, the small winning attacker 6755a is released, and the V challenge effect indicating that the V challenge effect has been executed is executed. Although illustration is omitted, in this V challenge effect, the game ball is entered into the lottery device 6755 by hitting to the right, so that the game is played to either the distribution rotator 6755f or the right V winning opening 6755bV. This is an effect that notifies that the ball can be reached. In other words, it is an effect for notifying that V winning occurs at a rate of at least 50%. When a game ball is entered into the lottery device 6755 in this V challenge effect and a V prize is generated, a big win is executed.

It should be noted that if a game ball enters the lottery device 6755 during the opening period of 0.1 seconds by hitting to the right during execution of the selection effect, there is an effect to congratulate the winning of the prize ball. It is executed and the selection effect is terminated. That is, in the V challenge small hit, even if the execution of the V challenge is canceled by entering the game ball during the open period of 0.1 seconds, the normal small hit pattern is set. It can be configured such that it is impossible (difficult) to distinguish from the case where the game ball enters. Therefore, even if the execution of the V-challenge was canceled, it is believed that the player was able to predict that the pattern for the normal small win was set, hit to the right, and enter the game ball as intended. can let Therefore, even if the V-challenge is cancelled, it is possible to prevent the player's motivation to play from declining.

FIG. 217(b) is a diagram showing the change over time of the effect mode in the case of winning the normal small win in which the normal small win pattern is set. As shown in FIG. 217(b), when the normal small win is won, the variation display corresponding to the normal small win is started until 2 seconds pass after the start of the small win. is the same as the case of winning the V challenge small hit. That is, the selection effect is executed after execution of the variable display effect for 60 seconds. The selection effect continues for 4 seconds on the condition that the entry of the game ball is not detected during the open period of 0.1 seconds (that is, the conditions for ending the small win are not satisfied). . That is, it is the same as the start timing of the V challenge for the small hit in which the V winning confirmation pattern (see FIG. 214 (a)) with the longest period until the attacker 6755a for the small win is released is set among the small hits for the V challenge. The selection effect continues to be executed until the timing of (4 seconds after the start of the small hit). Then, when 4 seconds have passed since the start of the small win, an effect for informing that the V challenge is not executed (that the V challenge was not won) is executed. As a result, the player who predicts that the V challenge is a small win and selects to hit to the left during the selection performance can continue to have expectations for the V challenge for a longer period of time. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In the tenth embodiment, the selection effect is started at the end of the small hit variation, and the opening period of 0.1 seconds is set when 2 seconds have passed since the start of the selection effect. It is not limited. The timing of the selection effect and the open period may be set at earlier timing. Specifically, the selection performance is executed during fluctuation (before the first symbol is stopped and displayed on the first symbol display device 37), and the release period is set immediately after the start of the small win. may By configuring in this way, the small winning type is specified by identifying the first pattern displayed on the first pattern display device 37, and the game ball is shot so that the game ball enters during the opening period. Even if it is decided whether or not to hit, it is possible not to make it in time for the opening period. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

<Electrical configuration in the tenth embodiment>
Next, the ROM 202 of the main controller 110 in the tenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 218 to 220. FIG. Here, in the tenth embodiment, for the configuration of the ROM202 in the ninth embodiment described above (see FIG. 192 (a)), the first per random number table 202a, and the defined content of the small per type selection table 202ea The only difference is that there are some changes. Since other configurations are the same as those of the ROM 202 in the ninth embodiment, detailed description thereof will be omitted here.

First, referring to FIG. 218, the first winning random number table 202a in the tenth embodiment will be described. FIG. 218(a) is a diagram showing the defined contents of the first winning random number table 202a in the tenth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 218(a), in the first winning random number table 202a in the tenth embodiment, two random numbers (counter values) of "0, 1" are defined as judgment values for judging a big hit. (See 202a1 in FIG. 218(a)). It should be noted that, similarly to the ninth embodiment, the determination value for the big hit is common between the lottery for the first special symbol and the lottery for the second special symbol. Of the 400 possible random numbers of the first winning random number counter C1, the number of random numbers (counter values) determined to be a big win is 2. /400). In addition, "2 to 395" is defined as the range of determination values determined to be out of the lottery of the first special symbol (see 202a2 in FIG. 218 (a)), and determination to be determined as a small hit of the first special symbol "396 to 399" is defined as the value range (see 202a3 in FIG. 218(a)).

Of the 400 random numbers that can be taken by the first random number counter C1, the number of random numbers (counter values) determined to be small hits is 4, so the probability of a small hit in the lottery of the first special symbol is 1. /100 (4/400). Although the details will be described later, 60% of the small hits of the first special symbol are open patterns and are usually patterns for small hits (that is, even if a game ball is entered into the lottery device 6755, V winning can occur. open pattern) is set. That is, the V challenge small hit is 40% of the small hit of the first special symbol. That is, at a rate of 1/100, the opening operation for 0.1 second of the small winning attacker 6755a that enables the player to expect the V challenge small winning is executed, and the V challenge is executed in 40% of them. (That is, the small hit attacker 6755a is released at the timing when the V prize can be won). Therefore, the probability of the V challenge small hit in the lottery of the first special symbol is 1/250 (1/100×4/10).

Further, as shown in FIG. 218(a), "2 to 39" is defined as the range of determination values determined to be out of the second special symbol (see 202a2 in FIG. 218(a)), and the second special symbol "40 to 399" is stipulated as the range of the judgment value judged to be a small hit (see 202a3 in FIG. 218(a)). Therefore, the probability of winning a small prize in the second special symbol lottery is 9/10 (360/400) as in the ninth embodiment. In addition, regarding the small hit of the second special symbol, in all the small hit types, it is configured so that the V winning period is included during the opening period of the attacker 6755a for the small hit.

In this way, in the tenth embodiment, similarly to the ninth embodiment, in addition to the configuration of winning a small hit with a high probability (9/10) when the second special symbol lottery is executed , Even when the lottery for the first special symbol is executed, it is configured to win a small hit with a low probability (1/100). That is, even in the lottery for the first special symbol that is mainly executed in the normal state at a disadvantage, it is possible to expect the winning of a big win based on the V win. In addition, in the tenth embodiment, as a small hit of the first special symbol, during the period in which V winning is possible (one or both of the V winning rate 50% period and the V winning rate 100% period) It is configured to provide a V challenge small win in which 6755a is opened and a normal small win in which the attacker for small win 6755a is opened only during a period in which V winning is impossible (difficult) (V impossible period). As a result, when a small win is won, the player can expect to win a V-challenge small win, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved. In addition, as described above, in the tenth embodiment, the normal small hit and the V challenge small hit have a common operation mode of the opening and closing operation of the small hit attacker 6755a in 2 seconds after the start of the small hit. That is, after 1 second has elapsed after the start of the small hit, an operation mode is executed in which the small hit attacker 6755a is opened only for 0.1 second. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to recognize whether it is a normal small win or a V-challenge small win for at least 2 seconds after the notification of the winning of the small win. Therefore, even if the player usually wins the small prize, it is possible to continue to have expectations for the V challenge small prize for a predetermined period (two seconds) from the start of the small prize. Therefore, every time a small win is won, the player's interest in the game can be enhanced.

Next, with reference to Drawing 218 (b), the details of small hit classification selection table 202ea in the 10th embodiment are explained. FIG.218(b) is the figure which showed the structure of small hit classification selection table 202ea in the 10th Embodiment. As shown in FIG. 218(b), the small hit type selection table 202ea in the tenth embodiment is referred to determine the small hit type when it becomes a small hit in the lottery of the first special symbol. A special figure 1 small winning table 202ea1 and a special figure 2 small winning table 202ea2 referred to for determining a small winning type when a small winning is obtained in the lottery of the second special symbol are provided. First, with reference to FIG. 219, details of the special figure 1 small per table 202ea1 will be described.

FIG. 219 is a diagram showing the defined contents of the special figure 1 small per table 202ea1 described above. As shown in FIG. 219, the special figure 1 small per table 202ea1, in association with the value range of the small per type counter C5, the determined small per type is defined. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 219, the value of the small hit type counter C5 is defined in association with "small hit A14" as the small hit type for the range of "0, 1". (See 202ea1a in FIG. 219). This "small hit A14" is a small hit type in which a V winning prize confirmation pattern (see FIG. 214(a)) is set as the opening pattern of the small hit attacker 6755a. Also, when a V winning occurs in this "small win A14", the "big win E14" is won. "Jack E14" is a jackpot type in which the number of rounds is 5 and the gaming state after the jackpot ends is set to the time-saving state. Therefore, the "small win A14" can almost certainly generate a V prize by simply hitting the game ball to the right during the opening period of the attacker 6755a for the small win and entering the game ball into the lottery device 6755. , V winning is a small hit type in which an advantageous time-saving state is given after a big hit.

Of the 100 random numbers (counter values) that can be taken by the small hit type counter C5, there are two random numbers (counter values) associated with the "small hit A14", so the first special symbol lottery The ratio of determining "small winning A14" when winning is 2% (2/100).

Further, as shown in FIG. 219, the value of the small hit type counter C5 is defined in association with the "small hit B14" as the small hit type for the range of "2, 3" (of FIG. 219 202ea1b). This "small hit B14" is a small hit type in which a V winning confirmation pattern (see FIG. 214(a)) is set as the opening pattern of the small hit attacker 6755a, similarly to the "small hit A14". Also, when a V winning occurs in this "small win B14", the "big win F14" is won. "Big win F14" is a big win type in which the number of rounds is 5 and the game state after the big win is set to a normal state of disadvantageous normal symbols. Therefore, the "small hit B14" can almost certainly generate a V prize just by hitting the game ball to the right during the opening period of the attacker 6755a for the small win and entering the game ball into the lottery device 6755. This is a small win type in which a disadvantageous normal state is given after a big win when a V winning occurs. Therefore, "small hit B14" is a small hit type more disadvantageous than "small hit A14".

Of the 100 random numbers (counter values) that can be taken by the small hit type counter C5, there are two random numbers (counter values) associated with the "small hit B14", so the first special symbol lottery The ratio of determining "small winning B14" when winning is 2% (2/100).

Further, as shown in FIG. 219, the value of the small hit type counter C5 is defined in association with the "small hit C14" as the small hit type for the range of "4 to 9" (of FIG. 219 202ea1c). This "small win C14" is a small win type in which a V winning rate 75% pattern (see FIG. 214(c)) is set as an opening pattern of the small win attacker 6755a. In addition, when a V winning occurs in this "small win C14", a "big win E14" (5 round short time big win) is won. Therefore, "small win C14" is set to "small win A14" in which a V winning confirmation pattern is set, and an open pattern in which V winning is less likely to occur than "small win B14", but V winning occurs. In the case, it is a small hit type that gives an advantageous time saving state after the big hit. Therefore, "small hit C14" is more disadvantageous than "small hit A14" or "small hit B14" as an opening pattern for the small hit attacker 6755a (V prize becomes difficult). In addition, it is more advantageous than "small win B14" in terms of the game state that is set after the big win when a V win occurs.

Of the 100 random numbers (counter values) that can be taken by the small hit type counter C5, there are 6 random numbers (counter values) associated with the "small hit C14", so the first special symbol lottery The ratio of determining the "minor winning C14" when winning is 6% (6/100).

Further, as shown in FIG. 219, the value of the small hit type counter C5 is defined in association with the "small hit D14" as the small hit type for the range of "10 to 15" (of FIG. 219 202ea1d). This "small win D14" is a small win type in which a V prize rate of 75% pattern (see FIG. 214(c)) is set as the opening pattern of the small win attacker 6755a. Also, when a V win occurs in this "small win D14", a "big win F14" (5-round normal big win) is won. Therefore, the "small win D14" is set to an open pattern in which the V winning is less likely to occur than the "small win A14" in which the V winning confirmation pattern is set, and the "small winning B14", and in addition, the V winning occurs. If you do, it is a small hit type in which a disadvantageous normal state is given after the big hit. Therefore, "small hit D14" is more disadvantageous than "small hit A14" or "small hit B14" as an opening pattern for the small hit attacker 6755a (it becomes difficult to win a V prize). In addition, the aspect of the game state that is set after the big win when the V winning occurs is also the most disadvantageous.

Of the 100 random numbers (counter values) that can be taken by the small hit type counter C5, there are 6 random numbers (counter values) associated with the "small hit D14", so the first special symbol lottery The ratio of determining the "minor winning D14" when winning is 6% (6/100).

In addition, as shown in FIG. 219, the value of the small hit type counter C5 is defined in association with the "small hit E14" as the small hit type for the range of "16 to 27" (of FIG. 219 202ea1e). This "small hit E14" is a small hit type in which a V prize rate of 50% pattern (see FIG. 214(b)) is set as an opening pattern of the small hit attacker 6755a. Also, when a V winning occurs in this "small win E14", a "big win E14" (5 round short time big win) is won. Therefore, the "small hit E14" includes "small hit A14" and "small hit B14" in which the V winning pattern is set, and "small hit C14" and "small hit C14" in which the V winning rate 75% pattern is set. Although an open pattern is set in which V winning is less likely to occur than "Hit D14", when V winning occurs, it is a small winning type in which an advantageous time-saving state is given after a big win. Therefore, "small hit E14" is more disadvantageous than "small hit A14" to "small hit D14" as an opening pattern for the small hit attacker 6755a (V prize becomes difficult). On the other hand, it is the most advantageous in terms of the game state that is set after the big win when the V winning occurs.

Of the 100 random numbers (counter values) that can be taken by the small hit type counter C5, 12 random numbers (counter values) are associated with the "small hit E14", so the first special symbol lottery The ratio of determining "small winning E14" when winning is 12% (12/100).

Further, as shown in FIG. 219, the value of the small hit type counter C5 is defined in association with the "small hit F14" as the small hit type for the range of "28 to 39" (of FIG. 219 202ea1f). This "small win F14" is a small win type in which a V winning rate 50% pattern (see FIG. 214(b)) is set as the release pattern of the small win attacker 6755a. Also, when a V winning occurs in this "small win F14", a "big win F14" (5-round normal big win) is won. Therefore, the "small hit F14" includes "small hit A14" and "small hit B14" in which the V winning confirmation pattern is set, and "small hit C14" and "small hit C14" in which the V winning rate 75% pattern is set. This is a small winning type in which an opening pattern is set in which V winning is less likely to occur than "Hit D14", and a disadvantageous time-saving state is given after a big winning when V winning occurs. Therefore, "small hit F14" is more disadvantageous than "small hit A14" to "small hit D14" as the opening pattern of the small hit attacker 6755a (V prize becomes difficult). In addition, it is the most disadvantageous in terms of the game state that is set after the big win when a V winning occurs. In other words, "small win F14" is the most disadvantageous in terms of the opening pattern set in the small win attacker 6755a among the V challenge small wins, and also in terms of the game state after the big win when the V winning occurs. It is a small hit type.

Of the 100 random numbers (counter values) that can be taken by the small hit type counter C5, there are 12 random numbers (counter values) associated with the "small hit F14". The ratio of determining the "small winning F14" when winning is 12% (12/100).

Further, as shown in FIG. 219, the value of the small hit type counter C5 is defined in association with the "small hit G14" as the small hit type for the range of "40 to 99" (of FIG. 219 202ea1g). This "small hit G14" is a small hit type in which a normal small hit pattern (see FIG. 214(d)) is set as the opening pattern of the small hit attacker 6755a. Therefore, it is almost impossible to win a V prize during the small prize validity period. Although it is extremely difficult for a V winning to occur, if a V winning occurs during the validity period of the "small win G14", it becomes a "big win E14" (5 round short time big win).

Of the 100 random numbers (counter values) that can be taken by the small hit type counter C5, there are 60 random numbers (counter values) associated with the "small hit G14". The ratio of determining "small winning G14" when winning is 60% (60/100).

Thus, in the tenth embodiment, as the V challenge small hit of the first special symbol, a plurality of types of small win types with different V winning rates are provided. That is, "small win A14" and "small win B14" where the V winning rate is 100%, "small win C14" and "small win D14" where the V winning rate is 75%, and the V winning rate is 50%. "Small win E14" and "Small win F14" are provided. With this configuration, the player can expect to win a small prize with a higher V winning rate, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved. In addition, in the tenth embodiment, in addition to the V challenge small win, "small win G14" (normal It is configured to provide a small hit). As a result, when a small win is won, the player can expect to win a V-challenge small win, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved. In addition, in the tenth embodiment, the normal small hit and the V challenge small hit have a common operation mode of the opening and closing operation of the small hit attacker 6755a in 2 seconds after the start of the small hit. That is, after 1 second has elapsed after the start of the small hit, an operation mode is executed in which the small hit attacker 6755a is opened only for 0.1 second. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to recognize whether it is a normal small win or a V-challenge small win for at least 2 seconds after the notification of the winning of the small win. Therefore, even if the player usually wins the small prize, it is possible to continue to have expectations for the V challenge small prize for a predetermined period (two seconds) from the start of the small prize. Therefore, every time a small win is won, the player's interest in the game can be enhanced.

Next, with reference to FIG. 220, the details of the table 202ea2 for the special figure 2 small hit described above will be described. FIG. 220 is a diagram showing the defined contents of this special figure 2 small per table 202ea2. As shown in FIG. 220, this special figure 2 small hit table 202ea2 defines 6 kinds of small hit types of "small hit H14" to "small hit M14".

As shown in FIG. 220, the value of the small hit type counter C5 is defined in association with the range of "0 to 12", "small hit H14" (see 202ea2a in FIG. 220). This "small hit H14" is a small hit type in which the open pattern A (see FIG. 215(a)) is set as the open pattern of the small hit attacker 6755a. That is, when the game ball enters the lottery device 6755 during the opening period of the small hit attacker 6755a, there is a possibility that the ball enters the right out port 6755bO or reaches the distribution rotor 6755f. An opening pattern is set. When a V winning occurs in the "small win H14", a different big winning type is won according to the type of the V winning hole into which the ball is entered. More specifically, when a ball enters the right V winning hole 6755bV and a V winning occurs, a "jackpot G14" is won. This "jackpot G14" is a jackpot type in which the number of rounds is 10 and the game state after the jackpot ends is set to a time-saving state that is advantageous to the player. On the other hand, when a game ball enters one of the central V winning holes 6755fv1 to 6755fv3 (that is, enters the V winning hole provided in the distribution rotator 6755f), V winning occurs. wins the "jackpot I14". This "jackpot I14" is a jackpot type in which the number of rounds is 16 and the gaming state after the jackpot is completed is set to an advantageous time-saving state. That is, since the number of rounds is the largest and the game state after the end of the big win is also advantageous, this is the most advantageous jackpot type. In addition, as shown in FIG. 220, when the second special symbol is a small hit and the game ball enters any of the central V winning openings 6755fv1 to 6755fv3 during the valid period of the small win, It is configured to win the "big win I14" regardless of the small win type. Therefore, when a game ball flows down to the distribution rotator 6755f, the player wins the most advantageous jackpot at a rate of 50%, so the player's expectation can be enhanced. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved. In addition, in the opening pattern A, since the small winning attacker 6755a is not opened at the timing when the game ball can enter the right V winning opening 6755bV, basically "small winning H14" V winning If it occurs, it is a V prize for one of the central V prize openings 6755fv1 to 6755fv3. That is, when a V winning occurs during the validity period of the "small win H14", basically the most advantageous "jackpot I14" is won.

Of the 100 random numbers (counter values) that can be taken by the small hit type counter C5, the number of counter values associated with the "small hit H14" is 13, so the second special symbol lottery is small. The percentage of winning the "small winning H14" when winning is 13% (13/100).

Further, as shown in FIG. 220, the value of the small hit type counter C5 is defined in association with the "small hit I14" for the range of "13 to 25" (see 202ea2b in FIG. 220). This "small hit I14" is a small hit type in which the open pattern B (see FIG. 215(b)) is set as the open pattern of the small hit attacker 6755a. That is, when the game ball enters the lottery device 6755 during the opening period of the small hit attacker 6755a, the ball may enter the right out port 6755bO or the right V winning port 6755bV. An open pattern with is set. When a V prize is generated for the right V winning port 6755bV in "small win I14", "big win G14" (10 round short time big win) is won in the same way as "small win H14". In addition, in the open pattern B, since the small hit attacker 6755a is not opened at the timing when the game ball can reach the distribution rotator 6755f, basically "small hit I14" V winning occurs If it does, it is a V prize for the right V prize opening 6755bV. That is, when a V winning occurs during the validity period of the "small win I14", basically "big win G14" (10 round short time big win) is won.

Of the 100 random numbers (counter values) that can be taken by the small hit type counter C5, the number of counter values associated with "small hit I14" is 13, so the second special symbol lottery is small. The percentage of winning the "small winning I14" when winning is 13% (13/100).

Further, as shown in FIG. 220, the value of the small hit type counter C5 is defined in association with the "small hit J14" for the range of "26 to 38" (see 202ea2c in FIG. 220). This "small hit J14" is a small hit type in which the open pattern C (see FIG. 215(c)) is set as the open pattern of the small hit attacker 6755a. That is, when the game ball enters the lottery device 6755 during the opening period of the small hit attacker 6755a, it enters the right out port 6755bO, the right V winning port 6755bV, or An open pattern is set that has the possibility of reaching the distribution rotator 6755f. When the V winning to the right V winning port 6755bV occurs in the "small winning J14", similarly to the "small winning H14" and the "small winning I14", the "big winning G14" (10 round short time big winning) is won. In addition, in the opening pattern C, even at the timing when the game ball can reach the distribution rotator 6755f, the small hit attacker 6755a is opened at the timing when the game ball can enter the right V winning opening 6755bV. . In other words, when a V winning occurs during the validity period of the "small win J14", there is a possibility of a "big win G14" or a "big win I14".

Of the 100 random values (counter values) that can be taken by the small hit type counter C5, the number of counter values associated with the "small hit J14" is 13, so the second special symbol lottery The percentage of winning the "small winning J14" when winning is 13% (13/100).

Further, as shown in FIG. 220, the value of the small hit type counter C5 is defined in association with the "small hit K14" for the range of "39 to 58" (see 202ea2d in FIG. 220). This "small hit K14" is a small hit type in which the open pattern A (see FIG. 215(a)) is set as the open pattern of the small hit attacker 6755a. That is, when the game ball enters the lottery device 6755 during the opening period of the small hit attacker 6755a, there is a possibility that the ball enters the right out port 6755bO or reaches the distribution rotor 6755f. An opening pattern is set. When a V prize is generated for the right V prize opening 6755bV in the "small hit K14", the "big hit H14" is won. This "jackpot H14" is a jackpot type in which the number of rounds is 10 and a normal state of a disadvantageous normal symbol is set after the jackpot is finished. In addition, in the opening pattern A, since the small hit attacker 6755a is not opened at the timing when the ball can be entered into the right V prize opening 6755bV, basically when the V prize occurs with "small hit K14" is a V prize for one of the central V prize openings 6755fv1 to 6755fv3. That is, when a V winning occurs during the validity period of the "small win K14", basically the "jackpot I14" (16 round short time big win) is won.

Of the 100 random numbers (counter values) that can be taken by the small hit type counter C5, the number of counter values associated with the "small hit K14" is 20, so the second special symbol lottery The percentage of winning the "small winning K14" when winning is 20% (20/100).

Further, as shown in FIG. 220, the value of the small hit type counter C5 is defined in association with the "small hit L14" for the range of "59 to 79" (see 202ea2e in FIG. 220). This "small hit L14" is a small hit type in which the open pattern B (see FIG. 215(b)) is set as the open pattern of the small hit attacker 6755a. That is, when the game ball enters the lottery device 6755 during the opening period of the small hit attacker 6755a, the ball may enter the right out port 6755bO or the right V winning port 6755bV. An open pattern with is set. When a V prize is generated for the right V prize opening 6755bV in the "small win L14", a "big win H14" (10 round normal big win) is won in the same way as the "small win K14". In addition, in the open pattern B, since the small hit attacker 6755a is not opened at the timing when the game ball can reach the distribution rotator 6755f, basically "small hit L14" V winning occurs If it does, it is a V prize for the right V prize opening 6755bV. That is, when a V winning occurs during the validity period of the "small win L14", the "big win H14" (10-round normal big win) is basically won. Therefore, the "small win L14" is a small win type that is disadvantageous to the player when the V winning occurs (the time saving state ends).

Of the 100 random values (counter values) that can be taken by the small hit type counter C5, the number of counter values associated with the "small hit L14" is 21, so the second special symbol lottery is small. The percentage of winning the "small win L14" when winning is 21% (21/100).

Further, as shown in FIG. 220, the value of the small hit type counter C5 is defined in association with the "small hit M14" for the range of "80 to 99" (see 202ea2f in FIG. 220). This "small hit M14" is a small hit type in which the open pattern C (see FIG. 215(c)) is set as the open pattern of the small hit attacker 6755a. That is, when the game ball enters the lottery device 6755 during the opening period of the small hit attacker 6755a, it enters the right out port 6755bO, the right V winning port 6755bV, or An open pattern is set that has the possibility of reaching the distribution rotator 6755f. When a V prize is generated for the right V winning port 6755bV in the "small win M14", a "big win H14" (10 round normal big win) is won in the same way as the "small win K14" and "small win L14". In addition, in the opening pattern C, even at the timing when the game ball can reach the distribution rotator 6755f, the small hit attacker 6755a is opened at the timing when the game ball can enter the right V winning opening 6755bV. . In other words, when a V win occurs during the validity period of the "small win M14", there is a possibility of a "big win H14" or a "big win I14".

Of the 100 random values (counter values) that can be taken by the small hit type counter C5, the number of counter values associated with the "small hit M14" is 20, so the second special symbol lottery is small. The ratio of winning the "small win M14" when winning is 20% (20/100).

As described above, in the tenth embodiment, when a small hit is obtained in the lottery of the second special symbol, a different big hit type is won according to the type of the V winning hole into which the game ball enters. That is, when the game ball enters one of the central V winning openings 6755fv1 to 6755fv3, the most advantageous "jackpot I14" is determined, while when the ball enters the right V winning opening 6755bV , a relatively advantageous "jackpot G14" or a disadvantageous "jackpot H14". In addition, the ratio of "jackpot H14" (that is, "small hit K14" ~ It is configured so that the ratio of winning any of the "small hits M14") is higher. As a result, when a small win is obtained in the lottery of the second special symbol, the player receives a V prize only at a rate of 50% compared to entering the right V prize opening 6755bV. It is possible to provide novel playability in which the player expects the game ball to reach the rotator 6755f. Therefore, every time a game ball enters the lottery device 6755, the game can be played while paying attention to the flowing direction of the game ball, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

As described above, the pachinko machine 10 according to the tenth embodiment is configured to win a small prize with a predetermined probability (for example, 1/100) when the lottery for the first special symbol is executed. As a result, even in the normal state of normal symbols in which it is necessary to proceed with the game by hitting to the left, the game can be played in anticipation of a small win in the lottery of the special symbols. In addition, in the tenth embodiment, a plurality of types with different V winning percentages are provided as small hits of the first special symbols. That is, there are provided V challenge small wins with V winning rates of 100%, 75%, and 50%, and normal small wins in which V winning is impossible (difficult). As a result, when a player wins a small prize, the player can play the game expecting that a small prize type corresponding to a higher V winning rate will be determined, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved. can be done. Furthermore, in the tenth embodiment, when the first special symbol is a small hit, regardless of the small hit type, the opening and closing operation of the small hit attacker 6755a during 2 seconds from the start of the small hit is common. is becoming With this configuration, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to recognize which type of small win is being executed until at least two seconds have passed since the start of the small win. Even when the winning is executed, the expectation for the V-challenge small winning can be maintained for a longer period of time.

In addition, in the tenth embodiment, when a small win is won in the first special symbol lottery, it is predicted whether or not it is a V challenge small win, and the shooting direction of the game ball is changed according to the prediction result. It is configured to execute a selection effect to be varied by the player. That is, when the current small win is a normal small win, the game ball is sent to the lottery device 6755 by hitting right while the common operation mode is being executed for 2 seconds after the start of the small win. While it is possible to win a prize ball by hitting the ball with the left hand, it is not possible to win a prize ball. On the other hand, if the small hit of this time is the V challenge small hit, if the game ball enters the lottery device 6755 by hitting to the right while the common operation mode is being executed, that At this point, the condition for ending the small win (that one or more game balls enter the game) is established, and the small win ends without the V challenge being executed. On the other hand, while the common operation mode is being executed in the V challenge small win (that is, during the execution of the selection effect), if the left hand is hit, the small win is terminated until the V challenge starts. never. Therefore, in the normal small hit, there is an advantage that it becomes possible to win the prize ball by hitting the right during the selection effect, whereas in the V challenge small hit, by hitting the left during the selection effect , there is an advantage that the V-challenge can be reliably executed. Therefore, it is possible to provide the player with novel game characteristics such as predicting the type of small hit and shooting the game ball in the direction corresponding to the prediction.

It should be noted that, in the tenth embodiment, between the small hit and the V challenge small hit, the opening operation of the small hit attacker 6755a is common for 0.1 seconds only for 0.1 seconds during the two seconds after the start of the small hit. Although it was configured to open the attacker 6755a, it is not limited to this, and if the small winning attacker 6755a is opened during the period when V winning is impossible (difficult), it is optional as a common operation mode may be set. For example, as a common operation mode, it may be configured to set the opening operation for 0.5 seconds from the time point of 0.8 seconds after the start of the small winning. By configuring in this way, it becomes easier to enter the game ball into the lottery device 6755 during execution of the common operation mode. can win prize balls.

In the tenth embodiment, in the lottery device 6755, the operation pattern of each part other than the small hit attacker 6755a is common regardless of the small hit type, but is not limited to this, depending on the small hit type. Therefore, the operation pattern of each part may be different. As a result, it is possible to diversify the operation for each small hit type, so that the degree of freedom of the operation at the time of winning the small hit can be improved.

In the tenth embodiment, when one or more game balls enter during the small hit, the small hit ends when the entered game ball is discharged, while the game ball In the case where the ball is not entered, the small winning is not finished until 8 seconds have elapsed, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when the opening period of the attacker 6755a for a small hit in one small hit has not been detected, the small hit may be terminated at that time. By configuring in this way, even though the game ball did not enter the lottery device 6755 (that is, there is no possibility of V winning), the small hit is continued until 8 seconds have passed since the start of the small hit. Since it is possible to suppress the occurrence of an event in which the game is not terminated, the efficiency of the game can be improved.

<First Modification of Tenth Embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 in the first modification of the tenth embodiment described above will be described with reference to FIGS. 221 to 223. FIG. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the tenth embodiment described above, when a special symbol lottery results in a small win, the game ball enters one of the V winning openings provided inside the lottery device 6755. It was configured to win the jackpot. In addition, in the second special pattern small win, the degree of expectation for a time-saving state after the big win is different depending on the type of the V winning hole into which the game ball enters. That is, when the second special pattern becomes a small hit and the game ball enters one of the central V winning openings 6755fv1 to 6755fv3 and wins the big hit, regardless of the small hit type, it is always time saving after the end of the big hit. While the state is set, if the ball enters the right V winning port 6755bV and wins the jackpot, the time saving state is set only at a rate of 39% (that is, when the small hit is H14 to J14). It was configured. That is, in the small hit of the second special symbol, the game ball reaching the distribution rotator 6755f is more pleasing to the player than entering the right V winning opening 6755bV. In addition, since the opening period of the small hit of the second special symbol is as short as 0.6 seconds, it is configured so that one game ball is entered at most.

On the other hand, in this modification, in a part of the small hit of the second special symbol, after the small hit attacker 6755a is released during the period in which the game balls are distributed to the right V winning opening 6755bV, Also during the period in which the game ball is guided to the minute rotator 6755f, a special release pattern is set in which the small hit attacker 6755a is released again. In addition, a delay device 6755b3 for delaying the flow speed of the game ball is provided in the middle of the flow path leading to the right V winning opening 6755bV, and the game ball is guided to the right V winning opening 6755bV in the special opening pattern. and the period during which the game ball is guided to the distribution rotor 6755f, the game ball is distributed to any of the ball entrances by the distribution rotor 6755f. The delay period by the delay device 6755b3 is set so that the game ball flows down to the right V winning opening 6755bV after being caught. As a result, if the player is not distributed to any of the central V winning openings 6755fv1 to 6755fv3 by the distribution rotator 6755f (that is, if the player is distributed to any of the central out openings 6755fo1 to 6755fo3) ), it is possible to recognize that the game ball will enter the right V winning hole 6755bV, which has a low expectation in the time saving state, so pay attention to the type of the ball entering hole distributed by the distribution rotator 6755f. You can play games. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

First, the configuration of the lottery device 6755 of the pachinko machine 10 in the first modification of the tenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 221 is an enlarged front view of the lottery device 6755 in the first modification around the guiding flow path 6755b2. As shown in FIG. 221, the guide flow path 6755b2 in the first modified example is between the lower opening/closing door 6755bD and the right V winning opening 6755bV. A delay device 6755b3 is provided for lengthening (delaying) the period until the gaming ball entering the lottery device 6755 during the % period reaches the right V winning opening 6755bV. This delay device 6755b3 is composed of known Kroon means. That is, after passing through the lower opening/closing door 6755bD and entering from the left side of the delay device 6755b3, the game ball continues to circle the inner wall portion for about 8 seconds, and then enters the right V through the passage opening provided in the center. It is configured to drop towards mouth 6755bV. Note that, as shown in FIG. 221, the upper right side of the guide channel 6755b2 forms a downward slope toward the left side of the delay device 6755b3. As a result, the game ball that has entered the lottery device 6755 and passed through the lower opening/closing door 6755bD during the V winning rate 100% period can be reliably dropped to the left of the delay device 6755b3. That is, it is possible to prevent the game ball that has passed through the lower opening/closing door 6755bD from directly passing through the opening of the delay device 6755b3 (it is impossible to delay the flow of the game ball). As a result, a small win is executed in which a special opening pattern (a release pattern in which the small winning attacker 6755a is opened during the V winning rate 100% period and the V winning rate 50% period) is set, and the V winning rate is 100. When the player enters the game ball into the lottery device 6755 in both the % period and the V winning rate 50% period, the game ball is surely distributed by the distribution rotator 6755f. , the game ball can enter the right V winning port 6755bV. Therefore, when the special opening pattern is set, it is possible to provide a game property that makes the player expect more strongly that the game ball is distributed to one of the V winning openings by the distribution rotor 6755f. That is, before entering the right V winning opening 6755bV, which has a low expectation of winning the time saving jackpot, the center V winning opening 6755fv1 ~ where the winning of the 16 round time saving jackpot (jackpot I14) is confirmed at the time of entering the ball. It is possible to realize a playability that makes the player strongly desire to enter the game ball into any one of 6755fv3. Therefore, it is possible to further improve the player's interest in the game when the special release pattern is set.

It should be noted that the board surface configuration other than the guiding flow path 6755b2 is the same as the board surface configuration of the game board 13 in the tenth embodiment described above, and thus detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Next, with reference to FIG. 222, details of the special open pattern in the first modification of the tenth embodiment will be described. This special open pattern is for a small hit when it becomes a special small hit selected at a predetermined ratio (for example, a ratio of 1% of the small hit of the second special pattern) among the small hits of the second special pattern. It is set as an open pattern for the attacker 6755a. As shown in FIG. 222, when the special opening pattern is set, the small hit attacker 6755a is maintained in a closed state for 0.4 seconds from the start of the small hit, and 0 from the start of the small hit. When 4 seconds have passed, the small winning attacker 6755a is released. This open state continues for 0.6 seconds, and the small hit attacker 6755a is closed when 1 second has passed after the start of the small hit. This closed state continues until 2 seconds after the start of the small win. That is, the special open pattern operates exactly the same as the above-described open pattern B (see FIG. 215(b)) for 2 seconds after the start of the small win. In other words, the game ball entering the lottery device 6755 between 0.4 seconds and 1 second after the start of the small hit flows down to the right V winning opening 6755bV at a rate of 1/3.

Further, as shown in FIG. 222, in the special opening pattern, when 2 seconds have passed after the start of the small hit, the attacker 6755a for the small hit is opened for 0.5 seconds, and 2.5 seconds have passed after the start of the small hit. At that time, the small hit attacker 6755a is closed again. Thereafter, the small winning attacker 6755a is maintained in a closed state until the small winning ends. As described above with reference to FIG. 213, 2 seconds to 2.5 seconds after the start of the small winning is set to the V winning rate 50% period, so during this 0.5 second open period, the lottery device A game ball entering 6755 passes through the upper surface of the closed upper opening/closing door 6755bU and is guided to the distribution rotor 6755f. That is, at a rate of 50%, it is distributed to one of the center V winning openings, and the most advantageous 16-round short-time jackpot is won. In addition, as described above, when the game ball enters the lottery device 6755 during the V winning rate 100% period, the arrival at the right V winning opening 6755bV is delayed by the delay device 6755b3. Therefore, even if game balls enter the lottery device 6755 during both the V winning rate period of 100% and the V winning rate period of 50%, the distribution of the game balls by the distribution rotor 6755f is completed first. After that, the game ball enters the right V winning hole 6755bV. Therefore, when the game ball is distributed to the center V winning opening by the distribution rotator 6755f, while winning the most advantageous 16-round short-time jackpot, it is distributed to the central out opening by the distribution rotator 6755f. In this case, a big hit is won based on the entry of the ball into the right V winning port 6755bV, which has a low expectation that the time saving state is given. Therefore, it is possible to make the player pay more attention to the type of ball entrance sorted by the sorting rotator 6755f, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

Thus, in the first modified example, in a part of the second special symbol small winning, the small winning attacker 6755a is opened during the V winning rate 100% period and the V winning rate 50% period. An open pattern is set, and the V winning rate is 50% before the game ball entering the lottery device 6755 during the V winning rate 100% period reaches the right V winning port 6755bV. A game ball entered during the period is distributed to one of the entry holes. In other words, when a game ball enters both the V winning rate period of 100% and the V winning rate of 50% period, first, after the game ball is sorted by the sorting rotator 6755f, the right V winning rate is completed. It is configured such that the game ball enters the opening 6755bV. In other words, after the result of whether or not to win the most advantageous 16-round short-time jackpot (distributed to the central V winning opening by the distribution rotating body 6755f) is obtained, the ball is entered into the right V winning opening 6755bV. It consists of The big hit based on the ball entering the right V winning opening 6755bV has a low expectation that the time saving state will be given (for example, the rate of 39%), so the player is given a center V winning opening by the distribution rotator 6755f. It is possible to provide a novel game property that makes players play with a strong desire to be distributed to. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In addition, in the first modification, when the game ball enters the lottery device 6755 during the V winning rate 100% period and the V winning rate 50% period in one small hit, the distribution rotation is performed first. After the game balls have been distributed by the body 6755f, the flow speed of the game balls heading for the right V winning opening 6755bV is delayed so that the game balls reach the right V winning opening 6755bV. It doesn't have to be a small hit. While the game ball is delayed by the delay device 6755b3, the small win is terminated and the next variation and small win can be started, so that the right V winning opening 6755bV is reached across a plurality of small wins. An operation may be realized in which the sorting by the sorting rotor 6755f is completed before it is done. By configuring in this way, there is no need to provide a small win for which a special opening pattern is set (by winning a small win for which opening pattern A is set after a small winning for which opening pattern B is set can be realized), the storage capacity of the ROM 202 can be reduced.

In the first modified example, the jackpot type is determined based on the type of the V winning hole into which the game ball first entered during the small hit effective period, but the configuration is not limited to this. For example, the jackpot type may be determined based on the type of the V winning hole into which the game ball entered last in one small hit valid period. By configuring in this way, even if the game ball is guided to the distribution rotor 6755f after entering the right V winning opening 6755bV earlier during the effective period of one small hit, the distribution rotor 6755f distributes to the center V prize opening, so that the most advantageous 16-round short-time jackpot can be won. In other words, it is possible to realize the same gameplay as in the above-described first modification without providing the delay device 6755b3. As a result, the board configuration of the game board 13 can be simplified, so that the cost rate of the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced.

<Second Modification of Tenth Embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIG. 223, the pachinko machine 10 in the second modification of the tenth embodiment will be described. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the tenth embodiment described above, when a game ball entering the lottery device 6755 during the V winning rate period of 50% is distributed to the central out port by the distribution rotator 6755f, There was no chance of winning the jackpot.

On the other hand, in the second modification, even when the game ball is distributed to the central out port by the distribution rotor 6755f, the jackpot can be won.

A second modification of the tenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 223(a) is a top view showing a portion of the guide channel 6755b of the lottery device 6755 on the right side of the ball discharge door 6755c. As shown in FIG. 223(a), the guiding flow path 6755b in the second modification branches into a front side and a back side in a front view at a portion between the ball discharge door 6755c and the upper opening/closing door 6755bU. ing. Also, at the branch point, a distribution member 6755g is provided for distributing game balls to either the front side flow path or the back side flow path in a front view. This distribution member 6755g is normally placed in a state that guides the game ball to the front side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 223(b)). For example, for 0.1 second), it is configured to be variable to an arrangement (see FIG. 223(a)) that allows game balls to be distributed to the back channel.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 223(a), a V passage port 6755h through which a game ball can pass is provided in the flow path on the back side in the front view of the guide flow path 6755b. This V passing port 6755h is configured to have the same functions as various V prize winning ports provided in the lottery device 6755 . Namely, when the game ball passes through the V passing port 6755h during the small winning effective period, the winning is won.

In this way, for a predetermined period of time during the V winning rate period of 50%, by configuring the game ball to pass through the channel on the side where the V passing port 6755h is provided, the V passing port 6755h can be passed. Even if the ball reaches the distribution rotator 6755f later and is distributed to the central out port, after the small prize is finished, the jackpot that has already been won by passing through the V passage port 6755h is started. can be done. That is, when the jackpot is distributed to the central outlet, the player can be made to think that he/she has not won the jackpot, and then the jackpot can be started. can hold Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

It should be noted that it is configured such that it is difficult to visually recognize which of the branched flow paths the game ball has passed through, by decoration or the like. With this configuration, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to recognize whether or not the jackpot has already been won by passing through the V passing port 6755h. Regardless, the player can be more surely surprised when the winning of the jackpot is announced. Therefore, it is possible to further enhance the player's interest in the game.

Although not shown in the figure, if the game ball was distributed to the center out port after passing through the V passage port 6755h, it was once distributed to the out port, so it was said that the jackpot was not won. An effect to notify that is executed. After that, the winning of the big win is notified by a so-called resurrection effect, and the big win is started. Thereby, it is possible to make the player expect that the resurrection performance will occur every time it is reported that the game ball is distributed to the central out port and the big win is not won. Therefore, the player can continue to have a sense of expectation for the big win for a longer period of time, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In addition, in the tenth embodiment and its various modifications, a plurality of V winning openings are provided separately, and a jackpot is won when a game ball enters each V winning opening. is not limited to For example, there is a configuration in which only one specific area is provided to win a jackpot when a game ball enters, and a game ball that enters each V winning port is finally flowed down to one specific area. may be By configuring in this way, it is not necessary to provide detection means such as a sensor for detecting an incoming ball for each V winning hole, so the cost rate of the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced.

In the tenth embodiment and its various modifications, by varying the ease of entering a ball in the V winning rate 100% period according to the small winning type, the degree of expectation that V winning occurs according to the small winning type Although it was set as the structure which makes it different, it is not restricted to this. Instead of or in addition to this, by varying the number of game balls that can reach the distribution rotator 6755f according to the small hit type, it may be configured to vary the degree of expectation for the occurrence of V winning. Specifically, for example, by hitting to the right during the opening period of the small hit attacker 6755a, a small hit type in which a maximum of one game ball can reach the distribution rotator 6755f It is good also as a structure which provides the small hit classification which can reach|attain two game balls at maximum to the rotating body 6755f. If two game balls can reach the distribution rotator 6755f, the percentage of V winning is 75% (the probability that both two game balls cannot win V is 50% x 50% = 25 %), the more game balls reach the distribution rotator 6755, the more the player's expectation for the V prize can be heightened. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

<Eleventh Embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the eleventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 224 to 256. FIG. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the tenth embodiment described above, in addition to the case where the special symbol lottery results in a big win, the special symbol lottery results in a small win, and any V prize is won during the validity period of the small win. A jackpot game is executed even when a game ball enters the mouth. The lottery for the first special pattern and the lottery for the second special pattern are configured to vary the probability of winning a small prize, and the lottery for the second special pattern has a high probability (9/10) of winning a small prize. On the other hand, in the lottery for the first special symbol, a configuration is adopted in which a small hit is won only at a relatively low probability (1/100). As a result, in the time-saving state of normal patterns, the lottery for the second special pattern is likely to be executed (probability of winning the normal pattern is high), it is relatively easy to win a small win (V prize is likely to occur). ), while it is advantageous to the player, it is relatively difficult to win a small win in the normal state of normal symbols in which it is necessary to proceed with the game by lottery of the first special symbols (V winning is less likely to occur). ), which is disadvantageous to the player.

In addition to this, the pachinko machine 10 in the eleventh embodiment adds various entertainment effects that can further improve the player's interest by executing it in the pachinko machine 10 with the specifications of the tenth embodiment. is doing. More specifically, during the execution of the variable display of the special symbols, an entertainment effect that is executed to suggest the degree of expectation for a big win or a small win, and during the execution of a small win game in a time-saving state, a distribution rotator Interesting effects and the like are added to suggest the ball entry timing at which game balls are likely to be distributed to 6755f.

The pachinko machine 10 according to the eleventh embodiment differs in configuration from the pachinko machine 10 according to the tenth embodiment in that the operation buttons 230 (Fig. 100) is provided, the configuration of the ROM 222 and RAM 223 of the sound lamp control device 113 is partially changed, and the control processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 is partially changed. 1, the control processing executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 is partially changed, and the control processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 is partially changed. . Other configurations, other processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, other processing executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113, and other processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 are as follows: It is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in the tenth embodiment. Hereinafter, the same reference numerals are given to the same elements as in the tenth embodiment, and illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

First, the configuration of the operation button 230 in the eleventh embodiment will be described. Note that the shape of the operation button 230 in the eleventh embodiment is the same as the shape of the operation button 230 in the above-described first control example, so here, refer again to FIG. and explain. As shown in FIG. 100, the operation button 230 is arranged on the left side of the ball rental operation unit 40 when viewed from the front. The operation buttons 230 include an upper button UB arranged on the upper side when viewed from the front, a lower button DB arranged on the lower side when viewed from the front, a right button RB arranged on the right side when viewed from the front, and a left button LB arranged on the left side when viewed from the front. , and a central button CB arranged in the central portion of the operation button 230 . In the eleventh embodiment, the upper button UB and the lower button DB correspond to the brightness of various light-emitting members in the pachinko machine 10 (light emission brightness of the illumination parts 29 to 33, brightness of the display screen of the third pattern display device 81, etc.). , and the right button RB and left button LB are used as buttons for adjusting the volume of various sounds in the pachinko machine 10 . More specifically, by operating the operation button 230, the brightness and volume can each be set to one of five levels. That is, each time the upper button UB is operated (depressed), the brightness of various light-emitting members can be set to increase by one step, while each time the lower button DB is operated (depressed), various types of light emission are set. It is possible to set the brightness of the member to decrease by one step. Also, each time the right button RB is operated (pressed), the volume can be set to increase by one step, while the volume can be set to decrease by one step each time the left button LB is pressed. It becomes possible to Further, operation of the center button CB is prompted in a predetermined effect (for example, a button operation effect such as an operation support effect to be described later) that can be set during execution of the variable display effect. Details will be described later with reference to FIG. 224 and the like, but in the operation support effect, every time the center button CB is pressed during execution of the effect, a display mode indicating the degree of expectation of a big win or the like is displayed. This allows the player to positively press the center button CB, thereby enhancing the player's interest in the game.

In addition, in the eleventh embodiment, the brightness setting change and the volume setting change are basically always possible. That is, by pressing the operation button 230, the setting can be changed to the player's preference even during execution of the variable display effect or during execution of the jackpot game. Therefore, convenience for the player can be further improved. In the eleventh embodiment, an upper button UB and a lower button DB for changing the brightness setting, and a right button RB and a left button LB for changing the volume setting are provided around the center button CB. It is That is, while an effect prompting the operation of the center button CB (for example, a button operation effect such as an operation support effect to be described later) is being executed, the player who tries to press the center button CB accidentally presses a different button. It has a relatively high button layout that is likely to happen. In other words, there is a possibility that the brightness setting is changed or the volume setting is changed even though the player who wants to participate in the button operation effect tries to press the center button CB. be.

Therefore, in the eleventh embodiment, of the execution period of the variable display effect in which the button operation effect is set, at least during the operation valid period in which the operation of the center button CB is treated as valid, the setting change of the brightness or volume is performed. is configured to limit More specifically, various settings (brightness setting, volume setting, ) is configured to increase the number of operations of various buttons (non-effect buttons) required to change the above. More specifically, during normal operation, the setting is changed by one step each time the various buttons (non-effect buttons) are operated (for example, the volume is changed by one each time the right button RB is pressed). On the other hand, during the period from 1 second before the start of the valid operation period to 1 second after the end, the settings will not be changed unless the various buttons are operated twice. ing. With this configuration, when a player who tries to operate the central button CB during execution of the button operation effect accidentally presses the non-effect button, various settings can be made against the player's will. It is possible to suppress the change of the operation and make the player recognize the operation error (the type of button to be pressed is wrong) by not displaying the performance mode corresponding to the operation. be able to. Therefore, it is possible to more preferably execute the button operation effect. Here, the reason why the setting change based on the operation of the non-effect button is restricted not only during the operation effective period but also for one second before and after the operation effective period is that the button operation effect is started. To cope with the case where a player who perceives and starts button operation before the effective period of operation starts, or a player who continues to operate without noticing that the effective period of operation has ended, performs an erroneous operation. is. As a result, it is possible to further reduce the possibility that the settings are changed against the player's will. Hereinafter, for the sake of simplification of explanation, the period from one second before the start of the valid operation period to one second after the end of the valid operation period will be referred to as a non-effect button restriction period.

In the eleventh embodiment, by pressing the non-effect button twice during the non-effect button restriction period, it is possible to change various settings by one step. is not limited to two times, and can be set to an arbitrary number. Further, for example, the setting may not be changed unless the same non-rendering button is operated continuously for a prescribed number of operations. That is, each time a different button is operated, the prescribed number of operations may be reset. By configuring in this way, except when the non-effect button is operated with the intention of changing the setting during the non-effect button restriction period (for example, by roughly operating the center button CB, Since it is possible to suppress the setting from being changed when another button is operated about once, etc., it is possible to more reliably suppress the setting from being changed against the player's will. can do.

In the eleventh embodiment, the operation effective period of the center button CB and one second before and after the operation effective period are set as the non-effect button limit period, but the non-effect button limit period can be set arbitrarily. can. For example, during the variable period of the variable display effect in which the button operation effect is set, the non-effect button limit period may be set. By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent the settings from being changed against the player's will when the player performs an erroneous operation. Further, for example, only the operation effective period may be set as the non-effect button restriction period. By constructing in this way, a player who intends to change the settings immediately before or after the valid period of operation can be made to change the settings without imposing any restrictions, thereby improving the convenience of the player. can be improved. In addition, in the eleventh embodiment, the non-effect button limit period is set only for the operation support effect, but the present invention is not limited to this. It is good also as a structure which sets. By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent the setting from being changed against the player's will even in other button operation effects. In addition, by setting a non-effect button restriction period in other button operation effects, for example, it is possible to operate the non-effect button to determine whether or not a button operation effect that greatly increases the expectation of a big win when it appears will be executed. By doing so, it is possible to realize game characteristics that can be known in advance. More specifically, for example, in a part of the case of a big win, after stopping and displaying the missing symbol once, a button operation effect is generated, and the operation of the center button CB is performed during the effect period of the button operation effect. is performed (or a predetermined performance period has elapsed), a non-performance button limit period is set for the performance to be changed to a jackpot symbol. Then, for example, one second before the valid period (for example, when the winning symbol stops), the non-effect button restriction period is started. By configuring in this way, by operating the non-performance button when the lost symbol stops, the player can be made to perceive the execution of the button operation performance before the button operation performance is executed. can. Therefore, the player can be made to understand that a big win will occur before the start of the button operation effect, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved. Also, a non-rendering button is arranged adjacent to other operating means different from the center button CB, and even in the variable display performance in which a performance to prompt the operation of the operating means is executed, the non-rendering effect is performed. It is also possible to set a button restriction period for use. In particular, by arranging a non-effect button in the vicinity of the operation means that prompts the operation only in the effect with a high expectation, the execution of the effect that prompts the operation of the operation means with a high expectation can be performed for the non-effect. By operating the button for non-performance during the button restriction period, it is possible to perceive it at an early stage, so when there is a possibility that the button for non-performance is restricted, the button for non-performance is pushed positively. Playability can be realized. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

Next, with reference to FIG. 224 to FIG. 226, an operation assisting effect, which is one type of button operation effect in the eleventh embodiment, will be described. In this operation support effect, every time the player operates the center button CB during the effect period, the degree of expectation for the notification of the big win in the variable display being executed, or the degree of expectation higher than that in the variable display being executed. This is an effect for suggesting to the player the degree of expectation for the development to a high variable display mode (the degree of expectation for development to reach, the degree of expectation for development from normal reach to super reach, etc.). In the following description, as the Super Reach effect, a case where the operation support effect is executed while the character 811 imitating an adventurer and the character 812 imitating a monster are being executed is being executed. conduct.

As shown in FIG. 224(a), when the operation support effect is executed, a horizontally elongated substantially rectangular display area HR11 is formed in the upper left portion of the main display area Dm of the third pattern display device 81. As shown in FIG. Also, in areas other than the display area HR11, a super reach effect is performed in which a character 811 imitating an adventurer and a character 812 imitating a monster face each other. As shown in FIG. 224(a), a character 813 resembling a bird is displayed in the display area HR11, and below the character 813, the text "Push the button for support!" With these display contents, the player can easily understand that the operation of the operation button 230 will cause the character 813 to support the player.

As shown in FIG. 224(b), when the central button CB of the operation buttons 230 is operated (pressed) during execution of the operation support effect, a character image 814 imitating the characters "Ganbarre" appears in the display area HR11. Is displayed. As shown in FIG. 225(a), the display area HR11 is configured so that a plurality of character images can be displayed. That is, every time the player presses the central button CB while the display area HR11 is being displayed (during the operation effective period of the central button CB), the character image is displayed. FIG. 225(a) is a diagram illustrating a case where two character images 814a and 814b are displayed in a normal (default) display mode (white character display mode).

FIG. 225(b) shows a high-expectation display mode (character mode) in which one of the two character images displayed in the display area HR11 develops into a highly anticipated ready-to-win effect. is set to . As shown in FIG. 225(b), in the eleventh embodiment, a striped character mode (character image 814c) is provided as a character mode that is highly expected to develop. By displaying the stripe-pattern character mode, the player can expect that the highly anticipated ready-to-win effect will develop, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

Note that in the eleventh embodiment, six types of character modes are provided for the character image 814 . Specifically, in addition to the above-described striped character mode, for example, it is easier to display during the execution of the variation display of the big win than during the execution of the variation display of the loss (that is, the expectation of the big win increases). A red character display mode (character mode) or the like is provided. During execution of the operation support presentation, one character mode is determined by lottery from six types of character modes each time the center button CB is pressed, and a character image of the determined character mode is displayed. . Therefore, the central button CB is positively operated during execution of the operation cheering performance in anticipation of display of a character mode with a high expectation of a big win or a character mode with a high expectation of development. Therefore, it is possible to improve the willingness of the player to participate in the operation support presentation. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be enhanced.

In the eleventh embodiment, the selection rate of each character mode is varied according to the player's operation status (operation tendency). That is, it is possible to discriminate whether or not the player tends to actively operate the center button CB during execution of the operation support effect, and to vary the selection rate of each character mode according to the discrimination result. Configure. More specifically, when it is determined that a player who tends to actively press the center button CB during execution of the operation support effect is playing a game, a character mode with a high degree of expectation (a While the ratio of deciding the high red character mode and the striped character mode with high expectations for development) is relatively low, the frequency of pressing the center button CB during the execution of the operation support effect tends to be low. When it is determined that the player is playing a game, the determination ratio of the character mode with a high degree of expectation is relatively high.

Here, in the operation support effect, when the determination ratio of each character mode is set based only on the propriety of the variable display effect being executed and the development status, regardless of the tendency of the player to press down, positively press down. Players who do (that is, the number of times of pressing in the operation support effect of 1) are likely to increase the number of times that the character mode is drawn by lottery, so the display ratio of the character mode with a relatively high degree of expectation increases. . In other words, there is a problem that the degree of expectation indicated by the operation support effect changes according to the player's tendency.

On the other hand, in the eleventh embodiment, the determination ratio of each character mode is varied according to the pressing tendency of each player during execution of the operation support effect, and the player who positively presses down is compared. It is configured so that the difference in the reliability of the expectation suggested during the execution of the operation support presentation is small between the player who has pressed the target less times and the player. As a result, it is possible to more appropriately provide the degree of expectation of the character mode regardless of the player's pressing tendency.

Next, with reference to FIG. 226, the execution period of the operation support effect when the variable display effect in which the operation support effect is set is executed will be described. Note that FIG. 226 will be described by taking as an example the case where the operation support effect is set for the variation pattern of super reach (that is, the variation pattern of the variation time of 60 seconds, see FIGS. 11(b) to 11(d)). conduct. As shown in FIG. 226, when the execution of the operation support effect is determined for the variation pattern of super reach, the operation support effect is set three times during one variation period. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 226, 4 seconds (first effect period) from 5 seconds to 9 seconds after the start of the fluctuation, and from 25 seconds to 29 seconds after the start of the fluctuation. The operation support effect is executed for 4 seconds (second effect period) and for 4 seconds (third effect period) from the time when 55 seconds have passed since the start of the fluctuation to the time when 59 seconds have passed. That is, 4 seconds (first effect period) between 5 seconds and 1 second before the timing (when 10 seconds have passed since the start of fluctuation) that develops into a reach effect (a reach occurs), and develops into a super reach. 4 seconds (second effect period) between 5 seconds and 1 second before the timing (30 seconds after the start of the fluctuation), and 1 from 5 seconds before the fluctuation stop timing (60 seconds after the start of the fluctuation) The operation support effect is executed for 4 seconds (third effect period) until seconds before. That is, the operation support effect is executed every 5 seconds before the ready-to-win effect develops into a more expected ready-to-win effect and every 5 seconds before the fluctuation stops.

Also, as shown in FIG. 226, during a period of 6 seconds from 1 second before the start of each effect period to 1 second after the end of each effect period, the non-effect buttons (up button UB for changing the brightness setting and A non-effect button restriction period is set in which setting changes based on operations on the down button DB, and the right button RB and left button LB for changing volume settings are restricted. That is, the number of operations (presses) of various buttons (non-effect buttons) required to change various settings (brightness settings and volume settings) is increased (changed from 1 to 2 times). It is configured. With this configuration, when a player who tries to operate the central button CB during execution of the button operation effect accidentally presses the non-effect button, various settings can be made against the player's will. It is possible to suppress the change of the operation and make the player recognize the operation error (the type of button to be pressed is wrong) by not displaying the performance mode corresponding to the operation. be able to. Therefore, it is possible to more preferably execute the button operation effect. In addition, by setting the non-effect button restriction period for one second before and after the operation effective period as the non-effect button restriction period, a player who perceives that the button operation effect will start and starts the button operation before the operation effective period starts, or a player who starts the button operation before the operation effective period starts. It is possible to prevent the setting change against the player's will even when the player who continues the operation without noticing the expiration of the effective period makes an erroneous operation.

In this embodiment, before or after all the development is completed (in the case of the variation pattern of super reach, before and after development to super reach effect), the selection ratio of each character mode is configured to be variable. ing. That is, in the example shown in FIG. 226, before developing into super ready-to-win (the operation cheering effect executed in the first effect period and the second effect period), the character mode with a high degree of expectation for development (for example, a striped pattern) character mode) is relatively high, while the selection rate of the character mode (blue characters, green characters, red characters, etc.) suggesting the propriety of the big win is relatively low. On the other hand, after developing into super ready-to-win (operation support effect executed in the third effect period), while the selection ratio of the character mode indicating the degree of expectation for the development is low, the character mode suggesting the propriety of the big win. is relatively high. As a result, it is possible to differentiate the type of character mode that the player expects to be displayed for each stage of development in the variable display. That is, basically, the higher the expected reach performance, the higher the expectation of the jackpot. ), the player can be expected to display a character mode with a high expectation of development. On the other hand, after progressing to a stage where the expectation of a big win is high (for example, super ready-to-win), the player can be expected to display a character mode in which the expectation of a big win is high. Therefore, it is possible to change the type of character mode expected to be displayed according to the stage of development of the ready-to-win effect, even though the same display mode effect of the operation support effect is being executed. It is possible to realize a novel performance.

In addition, in FIG. 226, the case where the operation support effect is set for the variation pattern of super reach has been described as an example. In the variation pattern of , the operation support effect is executed only 5 seconds before the variation stops. That is, the operation support effect is executed only during a period in which the player pays attention to whether or not the ready-to-win effect develops. Further, when the operation cheering effect is set for the normal reach variation pattern, the operation cheering effect is executed 5 seconds before developing to the ready reach effect and 5 seconds before the fluctuation stop. That is, the operation support effect is executed in a period during which the player pays attention to whether or not the game will develop into a ready-to-win effect and a period in which the player pays attention to whether or not to develop into a super ready-to-win effect. Furthermore, when the operation support effect is set for the variation pattern of the special reach, 5 seconds before developing into the ready reach effect, 5 seconds before developing into the super reach effect, 5 seconds before developing into the special reach effect, And 5 seconds before the fluctuation stop, the operation support effect is executed respectively.

As described above, in the eleventh embodiment, when the operation support effect is set, the timing at which the third symbol may be stopped and displayed (the timing at which the ready-to-win effect with a higher degree of expectation may develop). It is configured such that the operation support effect for 4 seconds is executed every 5 seconds before . In this operation support effect, every time the player presses the center button CB during the effect period of 4 seconds, the degree of expectation for the notification of the big win at the end of the variable display, and the degree of expectation after the end of the operation support effect. The character mode of the character image 814 suggests the degree of expectation for developing into a highly anticipated ready-to-win effect. For this reason, players who want to more accurately predict whether or not they will win a big win by confirming as many suggestions as possible, and whether or not they will develop, will be actively encouraged during the 4-second presentation period. can be made to operate the center button CB. Therefore, the player's willingness to participate in the operation support presentation can be improved, and thus the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In the eleventh embodiment, the selection rate of each character mode is varied according to the player's operation status (operation tendency). That is, it is possible to discriminate whether or not the player tends to actively operate the center button CB during execution of the operation support effect, and to vary the selection rate of each character mode according to the discrimination result. Configure. As a result, it is possible to reduce the difference in the degree of expectation suggested during the execution of the operation support effect between the player who actively presses and the player who presses relatively few times. It is possible to more appropriately provide the degree of expectation of the character mode regardless of the tendency of .

In addition, in the eleventh embodiment, 5 seconds of the timing (10 seconds after the start of fluctuation, 30 seconds, 60 seconds, and 90 seconds) at which the third symbol may be stopped and displayed Although the operation support effect is executed for four seconds, the execution timing of the operation support effect is not limited to this. For example, in a pachinko machine 10 of a type capable of executing an effect (so-called pseudo-continuous effect) in which a variable display is simulated a plurality of times during the effect period of one variable display effect, the following A configuration may be adopted in which the operation support effect is executed from a predetermined period (for example, 5 seconds) before the timing at which the pseudo variation can be executed. By configuring in this way, the player can expect different types of character modes to be displayed for each number of pseudo-runs. That is, as long as the number of pseudo-runs is small (one or two times), it is possible to expect that a character mode will be displayed in which the likelihood of developing the next pseudo-run is high. After the game progresses to the stage where the player can be notified of whether or not a big win has occurred, it is possible to expect that a character mode will be displayed that will increase the expectation of a big win. Therefore, since the player can play the game while paying more attention to the character mode of the character image 814 displayed during execution of the operation support effect, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In the eleventh embodiment, when the operation support effect is set, there is a possibility that the third symbol will be stopped and displayed (10 seconds after the start of fluctuation, 30 seconds, 60 seconds, and 90 seconds). Seconds elapsed), the operation support effect is executed every five seconds, but it is not necessary to execute the operation support effect at each timing. It is good also as composition which determines whether to perform support production. In this case, the lottery probability may be varied depending on whether or not a big win will occur, or whether or not the game will develop. By configuring in this way, it is possible to perform a game while paying attention to whether or not the operation support effect is executed, so that the player's interest in the game can be further improved.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 227 to 232, the mini-character advance notice effect that can be executed during the variation period of the variable display effect in the eleventh embodiment will be described. This mini character preview effect is a effect in which the character (mini character) displayed on the third symbol display device 81 performs a predetermined action (action). (see (c))). In other words, an effect is executed in which the mini-character performs actions of up to three stages during the variation period, and an effect is executed in which the V-challenge small prize is determined by executing actions up to the third stage.

First, with reference to FIGS. 227(a) and 227(b), the action of the first stage (first action) in the mini-character announcement effect will be described. When the action of the first stage in the mini-character advance notice effect is started during execution of the variable display, first, as shown in FIG. Appears in the lower center of the display screen. After that, the mini character MC appearing at the bottom of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 moves rightward in front view and fades out of the display screen as it is, as shown in FIG. 227(b).

Also, in the second stage action (second action) executed after a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the first stage action ended and the mini character MC faded out of the screen, the action shown in FIG. , an action is executed in which the mini character MC fades in from the right side of the display screen and jumps up from the right side of the screen to the upper left side. In this second-stage action, the mini character jumps up to the upper left and fades out to the top of the display screen.

Furthermore, in the third stage action (third action) that is executed after a predetermined period of time has passed since the second stage action is completed, as shown in FIG. An effect is executed in which the faded-out mini-character MC fades in from above into the display screen together with an image (V-challenge symbol) simulating a signboard on which the characters "V-challenge" are displayed. By executing the action of the third stage and displaying the V-challenge symbol, the player can easily understand that the V-challenge small win has been won. It should be noted that this third stage action (third action) is executed, and the third symbol is a combination of symbols indicating a V challenge small hit (in the example of FIG. 228(b), "3", "V", combination of "3").

Next, with reference to FIG. 229, the change over time of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 when the mini character announcement effect is executed will be described. FIG. 229 is a diagram showing changes over time in the display mode of the mini-character MC starting from the start of the mini-character advance notice effect when the mini-character MC executes up to the third action in the mini-character advance notice effect. As shown in FIG. 229, when the mini-character preview effect is started, first, the mini-character MC appears at the bottom center of the display screen and moves to the right as the first action (see FIGS. 227(a) and (b)). )I do. This first action continues for 5 seconds, and when 5 seconds have passed, the mini character MC fades out of the screen. The period during which the mini-character MC fades out of the screen (mini-character absent period) continues for 5 to 10 seconds. The length of the absence period is determined by lottery according to the variation type (lottery result of special symbols, length of variation period, etc.).

Also, as shown in FIG. 229, when the set mini-character absence period has elapsed, the second action is executed in which the mini-character MC jumps up from the right side of the display screen to the upper left direction. This second action continues for 3 seconds, and when 3 seconds have passed, the mini-character MC fades out of the screen. After the mini-character fades out, the mini-character absence period lasts for 4 to 9 seconds, and after the set mini-character absence period has passed, the mini-character MC falls into the display screen along with the V-challenge symbol, and the third action is executed. . By executing the third action, winning of the V challenge small prize is confirmed, so that every time the mini character notice performance is started, the player can expect that the notice performance will continue until the third action. . Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In the eleventh embodiment, by varying the length of the mini-character absent period, the execution timings of various actions (first to third actions) performed by the mini-character MC are made different. Also, in the variable display in which the mini-character advance notice performance is set, when the variable display ends without progressing to the third action, the timing of stopping the variation is always set to be the mini-character absent period. As a result, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the end of the variable display while the mini character MC is performing an action on the display screen. Therefore, it is possible to provide a more suitable display effect. In addition, by adopting a configuration that suppresses the end of the variable display while the mini-character MC is performing an action, depending on the timing of the start of the action of the mini-character MC, it is possible to develop a reach effect with a higher degree of expectation. , it is possible to provide a game property that can be known in advance before the performance related to the development is executed. That is, if the action of the mini-character MC starts immediately before 10 seconds (for example, 2 seconds) after the start of the variation that may develop into a ready-to-win effect, the action of the mini-character MC will be 10 seconds after the start of the variation. It is possible to make the player recognize that it is likely to be executed over time. Crossing over 10 seconds means that the pattern will not stop and the variable display will not end when 10 seconds have passed, so when the action of the mini character MC occurs, it will develop into a ready-to-win effect. can be indirectly understood by the player. Therefore, not only the content of the action of the mini-character MC itself, but also the state of the variable display of the third pattern when the mini-character MC starts the action can be paid attention to during the game, so that the player's interest in the game can be enhanced. can be further improved.

Next, referring to FIGS. 230 to 231, the relationship between the status of variable display of the third symbol and the status of action of the mini character MC will be described. In the eleventh embodiment, three types of execution periods of low expectation, medium expectation, and high expectation are set as the execution period of each action in the mini-character preview effect. That is, the actions of the mini-characters MC are the same, and only the period during which the mini-characters MC perform the actions is changed to indicate the degree of expectation for the V-challenge small win. By configuring in this manner, the image data required for the mini-character preview effect can be minimized, so that the storage capacity of the display control device 114 can be reduced.

First, with reference to FIG. 230(a), when the mini-character advance notice effect is set for the variation pattern that is not long, the action period of the mini-character MC and the variation time (variation period) of the third symbol. Correspondence will be explained. As shown in FIG. 230(a), when the mini-character announcement effect is set for the long-lost variation pattern, the first action is always started 5 seconds after the start of the variation, and when the missing pattern stops. The first action is terminated. By adopting a configuration in which the first action can be executed in a variation pattern that is not long enough, it is possible to make the player feel a sense of expectation for the V challenge small win even in a variation pattern that is not long.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 230(b) to 231, the correspondence relationship between the variation time and the action period of the mini character MC when the mini character advance notice effect is set for the variation pattern of the normal reach will be described. FIG. 230(b) is a diagram showing a case where a mini-character advance notice effect with low-expectation action timing is set for a variation pattern of out of normal reach (including normal small hits). As shown in FIG. 230(b), when the low-expectation mini-character announcement effect is set, the first action is executed when 5 seconds have passed since the start of the fluctuation. That is, as the execution period of the first action, the same execution period as the fluctuation pattern that is not long is set. Therefore, at the stage when the first action is executed, the player's sense of expectation is not greatly improved. Also, as shown in FIG. 230(b), the second action is executed when 20 seconds have passed since the start of the fluctuation. This second action lasts for 3 seconds, as described above. When the second action ends, the mini-character absence period is set until the lost symbols stop (the variation period ends). This action timing with a low expectation is selected at a higher rate than the action timings with other expectations (middle expectation and high expectation) when a lottery result different from the V challenge small win is obtained. Therefore, the player who has confirmed the timing of the action can be made to recognize that the degree of expectation for the V challenge is not so high, so that the degree of expectation can be appropriately recognized.

Also, FIG. 230(c) is a diagram showing a case where a mini-character advance notice effect with low-expectation action timing is set for the variation pattern of the normal reach small win (V challenge small win). As shown in FIG. 230(c), when the mini-character announcement effect with low-expectation action timing is set for the variation pattern of the normal reach corresponding to the lottery result of the V challenge small prize, the first action and the second action are set. The action is executed in the same period as in the normal out of reach case (see FIG. 230(b)). That is, the first action is executed when 5 seconds have passed since the start of the fluctuation, and the second action is executed when 20 seconds have passed. Then, as shown in FIG. 230(c), when 27 seconds have elapsed from the start of the variation pattern of the normal reach small hit, the third action is executed to announce the winning of the V challenge small hit. That is, until 27 seconds have elapsed after the start of the fluctuation, at least the action timings of the mini-characters MC are exactly the same. Therefore, it is difficult (impossible) to distinguish from the content of the action of the mini character MC whether it is a variation pattern that is out of normal reach with a low expectation mini character announcement effect set, or a variation pattern that is a small hit of normal reach. Therefore, when the V challenge small win is reported by the third action, it is possible to give greater joy and surprise to the player.

FIG. 231(a) is a diagram showing a case where a mini-character advance notice effect with action timing of medium expectation is set for a variation pattern of out of normal reach (including normal small hits). As shown in FIG. 231(a), when a mini-character announcement effect with medium expectation level is set, the first action is executed 10 seconds after the start of the fluctuation. That is, the first action is executed immediately after developing into the ready-to-win effect. This first action continues until 15 seconds have elapsed since the start of the variation, and after 15 seconds has elapsed, the mini-character absence period begins. Then, as shown in FIG. 231(a), the second action is executed when 20 seconds have passed since the start of the fluctuation. The second action is executed until 23 seconds have elapsed after the start of the variation, after which the mini-character absent period is set until the end of the variation.

FIG. 231(b) is a diagram showing a case where the action timing of medium expectation is set for the fluctuation pattern of the normal reach small win (limited to the V challenge small win). As shown in FIG. 231 (b), when the action timing of the middle expectation degree is set for the variation pattern of the normal reach small hit, the first action and the second action are out of the normal reach (Fig. 231 (a)) is executed in the same period. That is, the first action is executed when 10 seconds have passed since the start of the fluctuation, and the second action is executed when 20 seconds have passed. Then, as shown in FIG. 231(b), when 27 seconds have passed since the start of the variation pattern of the normal reach small hit, the third action is executed and the winning of the V challenge small hit is notified. That is, like the low-expectation action timings, at least the action timings of the mini-characters MC are exactly the same until 27 seconds have passed since the start of the fluctuation. Therefore, it is difficult (impossible) to distinguish from the content of the action of the mini character MC whether it is a fluctuation pattern that is out of normal reach with a medium-expectation mini character announcement effect set, or a fluctuation pattern that is a small hit of normal reach. Therefore, when the V challenge small win is reported by the third action, it is possible to give greater joy and surprise to the player.

Also, when the action timing of medium expectation is set, the timing (after developing into the ready-to-win effect) is obviously different from the case where the mini-character announcement effect is set in an overly long variation pattern (see FIG. 230(a)). Since the first action is executed at , it is possible to make the player expect a highly expected variable display effect. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

FIG. 231(c) is a diagram showing a case where the action timing for high expectations is set for the variation pattern of normal reach off (including normal small hits). As shown in FIG. 231(c), when the action timing for high expectations is set, the first action is started when 8 seconds have passed since the start of fluctuation. That is, the first action is started at a timing later than the timing of the low-expectation first action before developing into the ready-to-win effect. As a result, the player can be made to feel that an action timing different from the first action for low expectation, which is relatively likely to occur in normal times, has been set. Therefore, it is possible to raise expectations for the V-challenge small win. Also, as described above, the first action lasts for 5 seconds, so the first action is executed across the timing at which the ready-to-win effect develops. Therefore, for the player who confirmed by comparing the progress of the first action and the variable display mode of the third symbol, the end of the first action is earlier than the timing at which it is determined whether or not the ready-to-win effect will occur. It can make you feel that the timing is likely to be later. Here, as described above, in the eleventh embodiment, the variable display does not end during the action of the mini character MC. Therefore, it is possible for a player who is playing a game with an understanding of this specification to perceive that the ready-to-win effect will occur before the time to generate the ready-to-win effect. Therefore, it is possible to provide the player with a novel way of enjoying playing the game while comparing the progress of the variable display and the progress of the action of the mini character MC.

Also, as shown in FIG. 231(c), the 7 seconds from the time when the first action ends 13 seconds after the start of the variation to the time when 20 seconds have passed after the start of the variation is set as the mini-character absent period. Then, when 20 seconds have passed since the start of the variation, the second action is executed for 3 seconds, and after that, the mini-character absence period is set until the end of the variation.

Further, as shown in FIG. 231(d), when the mini character announcement effect of the action timing for high expectation is set for the variation pattern of the normal reach small win (V challenge small win), the first action and the first action are set. 2 actions are performed in the same period as in the normal out of reach case. That is, until 27 seconds have elapsed after the start of the fluctuation, at least the action timings of the mini-characters MC are exactly the same. Therefore, it is difficult (impossible) to distinguish from the content of the action of the mini character MC whether it is a variation pattern that is out of normal reach with a low expectation mini character announcement effect set, or a variation pattern that is a small hit of normal reach. Therefore, when the V challenge small win is reported by the third action, it is possible to give greater joy and surprise to the player.

The action timing for high expectations has a relatively high percentage set when it becomes a small V challenge in the special symbol lottery, and the percentage set when it is out is extremely low, so the mini character MC It is possible to make the player, who determines that the action is for high expectation from the timing of the action of (1), have a great expectation for the V challenge small win. Therefore, it is possible to play a game while paying attention not only to the content of the action of the mini-character MC but also to the timing at which the action is started, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

Although not shown, the variation pattern of super reach with a variation time of 60 seconds and the variation pattern of special reach with a variation time of 90 seconds are also for low expectations, medium expectations, and high expectations. Action timing for is specified. In the case of Super Reach and Special Reach, it is basically the same as in the case of Normal Reach, and in the action timing of low expectations, the first action will end just before the last development timing in Reach production. It is configured. That is, if it is a super reach variation pattern, the first action is executed so that the first action ends just before it develops into super reach (that is, when 30 seconds have passed after the start of the variation), and in the special reach variation pattern. If so, the first action is executed so that the first action ends just before the special reach develops (that is, when 60 seconds have passed since the start of the fluctuation). In addition, in the action timing for medium expectation, the first action is configured to start immediately after the last development timing in the ready-to-win production, and in the action timing for high expectation, the last development in the ready-to-win production It is configured such that the first action is executed across timings.

As described above, the eleventh embodiment is configured to be able to execute the mini-character advance notice effect as a kind of effect suggesting execution of the V challenge. In this mini-character advance notice effect, the player is notified that the V-challenge will be executed when the mini-character MC completes all the first to third actions. In addition, the mini character preview effect has multiple types (low expectation, medium expectation, and high expectation) with different expectations for the execution of the V challenge, and the contents of the action itself of the mini character MC are the same. However, the timing at which the action is executed is configured differently for each degree of expectation. As a result, the image data itself used for displaying the action of the mini character MC can be shared, so that the storage capacity of the character ROM 234 of the display control device 114 can be reduced. Furthermore, in the variable display in which the mini-character advance notice performance is set, when the action timing for the high expectation is set, the first action is executed across the timing of development to the ready-to-win performance with the higher expectation. Therefore, for the player who confirmed by comparing the progress of the first action and the variable display mode of the third symbol, it is decided whether or not it will develop into a ready-to-win effect with a higher degree of expectation. It can be made to feel that the end timing of the first action is likely to be later. Here, as described above, in the eleventh embodiment, the variable display does not end during the action of the mini character MC. Therefore, it is possible for a player who understands this specification and is playing a game to perceive that the performance will develop before the actual development timing comes. Therefore, it is possible to provide the player with a novel way of enjoying playing the game while comparing the progress of the variable display and the progress of the action of the mini character MC.

Next, with reference to FIG. 232, the central route suggesting effect executed in the time saving state of the normal symbols in the eleventh embodiment will be described. In this central route suggesting effect, basically, when a game ball enters the lottery device 6755, there is a high possibility that it will be distributed to the distribution rotator 6755f (the game ball will flow down the central route) (distribution This is an effect suggesting a period (see FIG. 215) during which it is easier to be distributed to the rotating body 6755f. As described above, the game ball that reaches the distribution rotator 6755f is provided in the distribution rotator 6755f 6 ball entrances (central V winning openings 6755fv1 to 6755fv3, central out openings 6755fo1 to 6755fo3 ) (see Figure 212). When a game ball enters one of the central V winning holes 6755fv1 to 6755fv3 among these six ball-entering holes, the most advantageous "jackpot I14" is won. That is, since the number of rounds is large and the time-saving state of normal symbols is set again after the end of the big win, when the game ball enters the central V winning opening 6755fv1 to 6755fv3, the player feels great satisfaction. can hold On the other hand, as described above, when the ball is entered into the central out ports 6755fo1 to 6755fo3, the player is not given any benefits. Therefore, the period from when the game ball is distributed to the distribution rotator 6755f to when it is distributed to one of the ball entrances is one of the periods in which the player's sense of expectation is most heightened. Therefore, by adopting a configuration that suggests the timing at which the game ball is easily distributed to the distribution rotator 6755 (easy to flow down the central route) by the central route suggesting effect, the game can be played while the central route suggesting effect is being executed. It is possible to realize a playability that makes the player wish to enter the ball into the lottery device 6755 . Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

FIGS. 232(a) and (b) are diagrams showing an example of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 when a small hit is executed in the time saving state. FIG. 232(a) shows an example of a display mode while the upper opening/closing door 6755bU is open (V disabled period or V winning rate 100% period), and FIG. 232(b) shows the upper opening/closing door 6755bU. is closed (V winning 50% period). As shown in FIG. 232(a), during execution of the small winning game in the time saving state, a boy character 710 is displayed in the small area Ds2, and the characters "Right shot!" , and an image resembling an arrow pointing to the right are displayed. By these display contents, it is possible to easily inform the player that he/she can aim for the V prize by making the game ball enter the small winning attacker 6755a by hitting right during execution of the small winning game. can be understood. Also, in the main display area Dm, a stop symbol indicating a small win continues to be displayed. This makes it possible for the player to easily understand that the small winning game is being executed. It should be noted that the display contents of the small area Ds1 are the same as in the normal case. That is, since only reserved symbols are displayed, a detailed description thereof will be omitted here.

FIG. 232(b) shows an example of a display mode while the upper opening door 6755bU is closed (V win rate 50% period). As shown in FIG. 232(b), the surroundings of the boy character 710 displayed in the small area Ds2 are changed to appear to emit light (wearing an aura). By changing the display mode of the small area Ds2, game balls enter the lottery device 6755 and are distributed to the central route (the situation is such that the most advantageous jackpot I14 is won at a rate of 1/2). can be easily recognized. Therefore, in the case of a small hit in the time saving state, whether or not the game ball enters the lottery device 6755 while the boy character 710 is in the display mode with the aura (light emission) , the player can pay more attention to the game, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

Note that, in the eleventh embodiment, there is a possibility that the central route suggestive effect will be executed even during a period in which the game is not distributed to the central route. Specifically, in the case of any of the small hits H14 to J14 (that is, the small hit type that becomes a 10-round short-time jackpot when a V prize occurs), even in the V winning rate 100% period, a predetermined percentage (For example, at a rate of 40%), the central route suggestion effect is executed. As a result, although the game ball is entered into the lottery device 6755 while the central route suggestion effect is occurring, the game ball is guided to the right V winning opening 6755bV, and the time is reduced after the big win. It is possible to realize an unusual behavior (behavior distributed to the distribution rotator 6755f) of continuing the state. Therefore, it is possible to provide the player with a great surprise and joy, thereby enhancing the player's interest in the game.

Here, as described above, the central route suggestion effect is a effect that is executed in synchronization with the V winning rate 50% period or the V winning rate 100% period set within 1 second after the start of the small win, The rendering time is 0.2 seconds (see FIG. 215). Therefore, even if the game ball is shot after visually confirming that the central route suggestion effect has occurred, it is impossible (difficult) for the game ball to reach the lottery device 6755 before the effect ends. . As a result, in the time-saving state of normal symbols, it is possible to make the irregular game method that aims to enter the game ball into the lottery device 6755 while the central route suggestion effect is occurring impossible. It is possible to suppress giving unforeseen disadvantages to In addition, even if the game ball is shot after visually recognizing the central route suggesting effect, the game ball cannot enter the lottery device 6755 during the execution period of the effect, so that the game ball has already been shot. At the timing when the game ball enters the lottery device 6755, it is possible to realize the playability that makes one expect that the central route suggesting effect will occur. In other words, not only the downflow route of the game ball entering the lottery device 6755 but also the performance situation at the time of entering the lottery device 6755 can be noticed in the game. In other words, by comparing the state of occurrence of the central route suggestion effect and the ball entry timing of the game ball to the lottery device 6755, it is possible to realize a novel game property that allows the player to grasp the flow path of the game ball in advance. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

Thus, in the eleventh embodiment, when a small hit is won in the time-saving state of normal symbols, the V winning rate is 50% period (a period in which the game ball is easily guided to the distribution rotator 6755f). is configured to execute a central route suggestion effect for suggesting to the player. By configuring in this way, not only the flow path until the game ball entering the lottery device 6755 enters one of the ball entrances, but also the game ball is placed in the lottery device The game can be played by paying attention to the presentation situation when the ball is entered into the 6755. That is, the timing at which the game ball enters the lottery device 6755 is compared with the state of the central route suggestion effect executed in the small area Ds2, and the central route is flowed down (the game ball enters the distribution rotator 6755f. It is possible to realize a novel game property in which the player predicts the degree of expectation to be distributed. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved. From this behavior, the central route suggesting effect establishes a time-saving state after the end of the jackpot when a V prize is generated by a game ball that enters the lottery device 6755 while the effect is occurring (a situation where the effect is not occurring) It can be said that it is easier to set a time saving state than when a V winning occurs due to a game ball entered in ).

In the eleventh embodiment, the configuration is such that the ball-entering timing at which there is a high possibility of being assigned to the central route is notified by the central route suggesting effect, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a configuration may be adopted in which a plurality of types are provided in the display mode of the central route suggestive effect, and the degree of expectation to be assigned to the central route may be varied according to the display mode. By constructing in this manner, not only the period during which the central route suggestive effect is being executed, but also the display mode of the central route suggestive effect can be noticed during the game, so that the player's interest in the game can be enhanced. can be improved.

In the eleventh embodiment, the central route suggesting effect is executed in synchronization with the V winning rate period of 50% or the V winning rate period of 100%, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the execution timing of the central route suggestion effect is set in consideration of the time lag between when the ball enters the lottery device 6755 and when the game ball reaches the upper opening/closing door 6755bU (lower opening/closing door 6755bD) (for example, , the execution period is set from 0.1 seconds before the period starts to 0.1 seconds before the period ends). By configuring in this way, even though the game ball enters the lottery device 6755 while the central route suggestion effect is being executed, the game ball enters the distribution rotator 6755f (or the right V winning opening 6755bV). It is possible to prevent (suppress) the occurrence of a situation in which the game ball does not flow down, making the player feel dissatisfied, or making it difficult to understand the meaning of the central route suggesting performance.

<Electrical Configuration of Eleventh Embodiment>
Next, referring to FIG. 233(a), the configuration of the ROM 222 provided in the audio lamp control device 113 in the eleventh embodiment will be described. FIG. 233(a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM 222 in the eleventh embodiment. As shown in FIG. 233(a), the configuration of the ROM 222 in the eleventh embodiment is different from the configuration of the ROM 222 in the tenth embodiment (and the eighth embodiment) (see FIG. 195(a)). The difference is that a selection table 222fa, a mini character effect selection table 222fb, and a small win effect selection table 222fc are added.

The character mode selection table 222fa is used to determine the character mode of the character image 814 displayed when the player presses (operates) the center button CB during execution of the operation support effect (see FIG. 224(b)). data is defined in the data table. The details will be described later with reference to FIGS. 234 and 235, but this character mode selection table 222fa shows that when the center button CB is operated during execution of the operation support effect, the special symbol lottery result and the player's 245).

The mini character effect selection table 222fb is a data table that defines data for determining the timing of actions to be executed by the mini character MC in the mini character preview effect (see FIGS. 227 and 228). Details will be described later with reference to FIGS. 236 and 237, but this mini character effect selection table 222fb is referred to when setting the execution of the variable display based on the variable pattern command received from main controller 110. Reference is made to determine the presence or absence of effects and the degree of expectation suggested by the advance notice effects (timing of action of mini-character MC) (see S41307 in FIG. 254).

The effect selection table 222fc at the time of a small hit defines data for determining whether or not to execute a central route suggestion effect (see FIG. 232(b)) and the execution timing when a small win occurs in the time-saving state of normal symbols. It is a data table that is Details will be described later with reference to FIG. 238, but this small hit time effect selection table 222fc is, at the start of the small hit (when receiving a small hit type command indicating the small hit type from the main controller 110) By referring to it, the presence or absence of execution of the central route suggestion effect and the execution timing are determined according to the small hit type (see S41004 and S41005 in FIG. 250).

Next, details of the character mode selection table 222fa will be described with reference to FIGS. 234 and 235. FIG. As described above, this character mode selection table 222fa includes characters of the character image 814 displayed when the player presses (operates) the center button CB during execution of the operation support effect (see FIG. 224(b)). It is a data table referenced to determine aspects.

FIG. 234(a) is a block diagram showing the defined contents of the character mode selection table 222fa. As shown in FIG. 234(a), the character mode selection table 222fa indicates that the variation display (variation effect) corresponding to the big win is being executed, and the operation executed before the last development timing in the ready-to-win effect. A win (before completion of development) table 222fa1 that is referred to for selecting a character mode in the cheering effect, and a variable display (variable effect) corresponding to the big win is being executed, and from the last development timing in the ready-to-win effect. A win (after completion of development) table 222fa2 that is referred to for selecting a character mode in an operation support effect executed later, and a variable display (variable effect) corresponding to a loss are being executed, and a ready-to-win effect is being executed. A table 222fa3 for failure (before completion of development), which is referred to for selecting a character mode in the operation support effect executed before the last development timing in , and a variable display (variation effect) corresponding to the failure are being executed. and a table 222fa4 for failure (after completion of development) referred to for selecting the character mode in the operation support performance executed after the last development timing in the ready-to-win performance.

First, with reference to FIG. 234(b), the details of the win (before completion of development) table 222fa1 will be described. FIG. 234(b) is a diagram showing the defined contents of the win (before completion of development) table 222fa1. As shown in FIG. 234(b), for each range of values of the effect lottery counter 223ea, the win (before completion of development) table 222fa1 has six types of character modes that can be set in the character image 814 in the operation support effect. They are defined in association with each other. Further, the value of the effect lottery counter 223ea is defined in different ranges according to the player's operation status (participation status for the operation support effect). When a player with a low operation frequency is playing a game (when the average number of operations of each operation support effect in the previous variable display in which the operation support effect was set is 5 times or less), FIG. 234 (b ) refers to the stipulated content corresponding to "low operation frequency", and a player with a medium operation frequency is playing a game When the average number of times is 6 times or more and 9 times or less), the defined content corresponding to "moderate operation frequency" in FIG. (when the average number of times of operation of each operation support effect in the previous variable display in which the operation support effect was set is 10 times or more), the defined content corresponding to "high frequency of operation" in Fig. 234(b) is referenced.

As shown in FIG. 234(b), as the specified content corresponding to the player who operates less frequently, the value of the effect lottery counter 223ea in the range of "0 to 199" is associated with "white" as the character mode. (222fa1a in FIG. 234(b)). Since the effect lottery counter 223ea can take 1000 values "0 to 999", in the operation support effect executed before the end of the last development in the variable effect corresponding to the big win, the central button CB is pressed. When operated by the player, a white character image 814 is displayed at a rate of 20% (200/1000).

Further, as shown in FIG. 234(b), the value of the effect lottery counter 223ea is defined in the range of "200 to 449" in association with "blue" as the character mode (FIG. 234(b)). 222fa1b). Therefore, when the player operates the center button CB in the operation support effect executed before the end of the last development in the variable effect corresponding to the big win, blue characters are displayed at a rate of 25% (250/1000). is displayed. In addition, the value of the effect lottery counter 223ea is defined to correspond to the range of "450 to 479" with "green" as the character mode (222fa1c in FIG. 234(b)). Therefore, when the player operates the center button CB in the operation support effect executed before the end of the last development in the variable effect corresponding to the big win, green characters are displayed at a rate of 3% (30/1000). is displayed. In addition, the value of the effect lottery counter 223ea is defined in the range of "480 to 499" in association with "red" as the character mode (222fa1d in FIG. 234(b)). Therefore, when the player operates the center button CB in the operation support effect executed before the end of the last development in the variable effect corresponding to the big win, red characters are displayed at a rate of 2% (20/1000). is displayed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 234(b), the value of the effect lottery counter 223ea in the range of "500 to 949" is defined in association with "stripe (black)" as the character mode (see FIG. 234). 222fale in (b)). Therefore, when the player operates the center button CB in the operation support effect executed before the end of the last development in the variable effect corresponding to the big win, the black color is displayed at a rate of 45% (450/1000). A striped character image 814 is displayed. In addition, the value of the effect lottery counter 223ea is defined in the range of "950 to 999" in association with "stripe (red)" as the character mode (222fa1f in FIG. 234(b)). Therefore, when the player operates the center button CB in the operation support effect executed before the end of the last development in the variable effect corresponding to the big win, the red color is displayed at a rate of 5% (50/1000). A striped character image 814 is displayed.

In this way, in the operation support effect executed before the end of the last development in the variable effect corresponding to the big win, the operation frequency is low (the average number of operations in one operation support effect is 5 times or less). When the user operates the center button CB, a black or red striped character mode is set at a ratio of 1/2, which increases the expectation of development. In addition, although the details will be described later, the type of character mode (green characters and red characters) with a high degree of expectation for winning is set at a higher rate than in the case of losing. Therefore, when a character mode (black striped pattern or red striped pattern) with a high expectation of development is selected, the player can be expected to develop a ready-to-win effect with a higher expectation. . In addition, when a type of character mode (green characters or red characters) with a high expectation of winning is selected, it is possible to increase the expectation of a big win. It should be noted that the red stripe pattern is configured so as not to be displayed in the operation support effect executed after the final development in the ready-to-win effect is completed. In other words, when the character image 814 with the red stripe pattern is displayed, it is determined that the stage of the current ready-to-win stage will develop into an effect with a higher degree of expectation.

On the other hand, as a stipulated content corresponding to a player whose operation frequency is medium (the average number of operations in the operation support effect of 1 is 6 times or more and 9 times or less), the value of the effect lottery counter 223ea is "0 to 579". The range is defined in association with "white" as the character mode (222fa1a in FIG. 234(b)). Therefore, in the operation support effect executed before the end of the last development in the variable effect corresponding to the big win, when the player operates the center button CB, white characters are displayed at a rate of 58% (580/1000). A character image 814 is displayed. In addition, the value of the effect lottery counter 223ea is defined in the range of "580 to 779" in association with "blue" as the character mode (222fa1b in FIG. 234(b)). Therefore, when the player operates the center button CB in the operation support effect executed before the end of the last development in the variable effect corresponding to the big win, blue characters are displayed at a rate of 20% (200/1000). is displayed. In addition, the value of the effect lottery counter 223ea is defined in the range of "780 to 791" in association with "green" as the character mode (222fa1c in FIG. 234(b)). Therefore, when the player operates the center button CB in the operation support effect executed before the end of the last development in the variable effect corresponding to the big win, the rate is 1.2% (12/1000). A character image 814 of green characters is displayed. In addition, the value of the effect lottery counter 223ea is defined in the range of "792 to 799" in association with "red" as the character mode (222fa1d in FIG. 234(b)). Therefore, when the player operates the central button CB in the operation support effect executed before the end of the last development in the variable effect corresponding to the big win, at a rate of 0.8% (8/1000) A character image 814 of red characters is displayed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 234(b), the value of the effect lottery counter 223ea in the range of "800 to 979" is defined in association with "stripe (black)" as the character mode (FIG. 234). 222fale in (b)). Therefore, when the player operates the central button CB in the operation support effect executed before the end of the last development in the variable effect corresponding to the big win, black is displayed at a rate of 18% (180/1000). A striped character image 814 is displayed. In addition, the value of the effect lottery counter 223ea is defined in the range of "980 to 999" in association with "stripe (red)" as the character mode (222fa1f in FIG. 234(b)). Therefore, when the player operates the center button CB in the operation support effect executed before the end of the last development in the variable effect corresponding to the big win, the red color is displayed at a rate of 2% (20/1000). A striped character image 814 is displayed.

In this way, when the operation frequency is moderate (the average number of operations is 6 or more and 9 or less), the expectation of a big win is higher than when the operation frequency is low (the average number of operations is 5 or less). The selection ratios of high-quality character styles (green characters, red characters) and character styles with high expectations for development (black stripe pattern and red stripe pattern) are low. By constructing in this way, compared to the case where the selection ratio of each character mode is made common regardless of the operation tendency, even when a player who has a different tendency of the number of operations plays a game, one operation support effect is produced. It is possible to reduce the difference in the number of times a character mode with a high expectation of a big win and development is displayed in . Therefore, it is possible to suitably set the effect regardless of the tendency of the operation.

On the other hand, as a regulation content corresponding to a player who operates frequently (the average number of operations in one operation support effect is 10 times or more), the value of the effect lottery counter 223ea is in the range “0 to 799” "White" is associated and defined as a mode (222fa1a in FIG. 234(b)). Therefore, in the operation support effect executed before the end of the last development in the variable effect corresponding to the big win, when the player operates the center button CB, white characters are displayed at a rate of 80% (800/1000). A character image 814 is displayed. In addition, the value of the effect lottery counter 223ea is defined in the range of "800 to 889" in association with "blue" as the character mode (222fa1b in FIG. 234(b)). Therefore, when the player operates the center button CB in the operation support effect executed before the end of the last development in the variable effect corresponding to the big win, blue characters are displayed at a rate of 9% (90/1000). is displayed. In addition, the value of the effect lottery counter 223ea is defined in the range of "890 to 895" in association with "green" as the character mode (222fa1c in FIG. 234(b)). Therefore, when the player operates the center button CB in the operation support effect executed before the end of the last development in the variable effect corresponding to the big win, the rate is 0.6% (6/1000). A character image 814 of green characters is displayed. In addition, the value of the effect lottery counter 223ea is defined in a range of "896 to 899" in association with "red" as the character mode (222fa1d in FIG. 234(b)). Therefore, when the player operates the center button CB in the operation support effect executed before the end of the last development in the variable effect corresponding to the big win, the rate is 0.4% (4/1000). A character image 814 of red characters is displayed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 234(b), the value of the effect lottery counter 223ea in the range of "900 to 989" is defined in association with "stripe (black)" as the character mode (FIG. 234). 222fale in (b)). Therefore, when the player operates the center button CB in the operation support effect executed before the end of the last development in the variable effect corresponding to the big win, the black color is displayed at a rate of 9% (90/1000). A striped character image 814 is displayed. In addition, the value of the effect lottery counter 223ea is defined in the range of "990 to 999" in association with "stripe (red)" as the character mode (222fa1f in FIG. 234(b)). Therefore, when the player operates the center button CB in the operation support effect executed before the end of the last development in the variable effect corresponding to the big win, the red color is displayed at a rate of 1% (10/1000). A striped character image 814 is displayed.

In this way, when the operation frequency is high (average number of operations is 10 times or more), when the operation frequency is low (average number of operations is 5 times or less), when the operation frequency is medium (average number of operations is 6 times or more, 9 times) times or less), there is a higher selection rate for character patterns with high expectations for big wins (green letters, red letters) and character patterns with high expectations for development (black stripes and red stripes). is even lower. By constructing in this way, compared to the case where the selection ratio of each character mode is made common regardless of the operation tendency, even when a player who has a different tendency of the number of operations plays a game, one operation support effect is produced. It is possible to reduce the difference in the number of times a character mode with a high expectation of a big win and development is displayed in . Therefore, it is possible to suitably set the effect regardless of the tendency of the operation.

Next, with reference to FIG. 234(c), details of the above-described win (after completion of development) table 222fa2 will be described. As described above, the winning (after completion of development) table 222fa2 is in the process of executing the variable display (variation effect) corresponding to the big win, and the operation support effect executed after the last development timing in the ready-to-win effect. 2 is a data table referred to when selecting a character mode in .

As shown in FIG. 234(c), as a prescribed content corresponding to a player who operates infrequently, "white" is associated with the range of "0 to 99" of the effect lottery counter 223ea as the character mode. defined (see 222fa2a in FIG. 234(c)), and the range of "100 to 199" is defined in association with "blue" as a character mode (see 222fa2b in FIG. 234(c)), and "200 to 699 ” is defined in association with “green” as the character mode (see 222fa2c in FIG. 234(c)), and “red” is defined in association with the range of “700 to 949” as the character mode. (see 222fa2d in FIG. 234(c)), and the range of "950 to 999" is defined in association with "stripe (black)" as a character mode (see 222fa2e in FIG. 234(c) ). Also, "stripe (red)" is not associated with the value of the effect lottery counter 223ea (see 222fa2f in FIG. 234(c)). Therefore, even if the center button CB is pressed, the red stripe pattern is not set.

Thus, in the operation cheering performance executed after the last development in the ready-to-win performance is completed, the expectation of a big win is higher than in the operation cheering performance executed before the final development is completed. (The selection ratio of green characters increases from 3% to 50%, and the selection ratio of red characters increases from 2% to 25%). Therefore, by displaying a character mode indicating that the degree of expectation for a big win is high, it is possible to make the player strongly expect to be notified of a big win at the current stage of development. On the other hand, after the final development in reach production is completed, the selection ratio of character styles that indicate high expectations for development drops significantly (selection ratio of black stripes from 45% to 5%, red The selection ratio of striped patterns will decrease from 5% to 0%), so the more likely the lottery result will be announced at the current stage of development, the more the text format that indicates the high degree of expectation for development is not displayed. It is possible to make the player recognize that. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

Further, as shown in FIG. 234(c), as a prescribed content corresponding to a player whose operation frequency is medium, the value of the effect lottery counter 223ea is in the range of "0 to 399", and the character mode is "white". is defined in association (see 222fa2a in FIG. 234(c)), and "blue" is defined in association with the range of "400 to 679" as a character mode (see 222fa2b in FIG. 234(c)), "Green" is defined as the character mode in association with the range of "680 to 879" (see 222fa2c in FIG. 234(c)), and "Red" is defined as the character mode in the range of "880 to 979". "Stripe (black)" is defined as a character mode in association with the range of "980 to 999" (see 222fa2d in FIG. 234(c)). Further, "stripe (red)" is not associated with the value of the effect lottery counter 223ea (pressing the center button CB does not set the red stripe pattern).

That is, even when a player whose operation frequency is medium is playing a game, the operation support effect executed after the final development in the ready-to-win effect is completed is executed before the final development is completed. Compared to the operation support presentation, the selection ratio of character modes indicating high expectations for a big win increases (the selection ratio of green characters is 1.2% → 20%, and the selection ratio of red characters is 0.8%). % → 10%), and the selection ratio of character styles indicating high expectations for development decreased significantly (selection ratio of black stripes from 18% to 2%, selection of red stripes). ratio decreases from 2% to 0%). A player can be made to recognize that there is a high possibility that the lottery result of the special symbol will be reported at the current stage of development by making it difficult for the character mode indicating the high expectation of development to appear. In addition, since the character mode indicating that the expectation of a big win is high is likely to appear, it is possible to improve the expectation of a big win at the current stage of development.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 234(c), as the specified contents corresponding to the player who frequently operates, the value of the effect lottery counter 223ea is in the range of "0 to 699", and the character mode corresponds to "white". (see 222fa2a in FIG. 234(c)), and the range of "700 to 839" is defined in association with "blue" as a character mode (see 222fa2b in FIG. 234(c)), "840 ~ 939” is defined in association with “green” as the character mode (see 222fa2c in FIG. 234(c)), and “red” is associated as the character mode in the range of “940 to 989”. (see 222fa2d in FIG. 234(c)), "stripe (black)" is defined as a character mode in association with the range of "990 to 999". Further, "stripe (red)" is not associated with the value of the effect lottery counter 223ea (pressing the center button CB does not set the red stripe pattern).

That is, even when a player with a high frequency of operations is playing a game, in the operation support effect executed after the final development in the ready-to-win effect is completed, the operation executed before the final development is completed. Compared to the cheering effect, the selection ratio of the character mode that indicates the high expectation of the jackpot increases (the selection ratio of green characters is 0.6% → 20%, the selection ratio of red characters is 0.4% → 5%), and the selection ratio of character styles that indicate high expectations for development drops significantly (selection ratio of black stripe pattern decreased from 9% to 1%, and red stripe pattern selection ratio decreased from 9% to 1%). from 1% to 0%). A player can be made to recognize that there is a high possibility that the lottery result of the special symbol will be reported at the current stage of development by making it difficult for the character mode indicating the high expectation of development to appear. In addition, since the character mode indicating that the expectation of a big win is high is likely to appear, it is possible to improve the expectation of a big win at the current stage of development.

Next, with reference to FIG. 235(a), details of the above-described deviation (before completion of development) table 222fa3 will be described. As described above, the table 222fa3 for loss (before completion of development) is in the process of executing the variable display (variation effect) corresponding to the loss, and the operation support executed before the last development timing in the ready-to-win effect. It is a data table referred to when selecting a character mode in rendering.

As shown in FIG. 235(a), as the specified content corresponding to the player who operates less frequently, the value of the effect lottery counter 223ea in the range of "0 to 99" is associated with "white" as the character mode. defined (see 222fa3a in FIG. 235(a)), and the range of "100 to 479" is defined in association with "blue" as a character mode (see 222fa3b in FIG. 235(a)), and "480 to 494 ” is defined in association with “green” as the character mode (see 222fa3c in FIG. 235(a)), and “red” is defined in association with the range of “495 to 499” as the character mode. (see 222fa3d in FIG. 235(a)), and the range of "500 to 949" is defined in association with "stripe (black)" as a character mode (see 222fa3e in FIG. 235(a)), and "950 "Stripe (red)" is defined as a character mode in association with the range of ".about.999" (see 222fa3f in FIG. 235(a)).

In this way, in the variable effect corresponding to the loss, if the operation support effect is executed before the last development is completed, the winning (before development is completed) table 222fa1 (see FIG. 234(b)) is referred to. The selection ratio of the character mode that indicates the high expectation of the jackpot is lower than in the case of ). On the other hand, the selection ratio of the character modes indicating that the degree of expectation for development is high is the same as when the win (before completion of development) table 222fa1 (see FIG. 234(b)) is referred to. To make the selection ratio of each character mode substantially common by making the selection ratio of the character modes indicating that the degree of expectation for development is high both in the case of a big win and in the case of a loss before the final development is completed. can be done. Therefore, regardless of whether it is a win or a win, until the final development is completed, it is difficult to select a character mode that indicates that the probability of winning is high. You can continue to have a sense of expectation for.

Further, as shown in FIG. 235(a), as a prescribed content corresponding to a player whose operation frequency is medium, the value of the effect lottery counter 223ea is in the range of "0 to 599", and the character mode is "white". is defined in association (see 222fa3a in FIG. 235(a)), and "blue" is defined in association with the range of "600 to 791" as a character mode (see 222fa3b in FIG. 235(a)), "Green" is defined as the character mode for the range "792 to 797" (see 222fa3c in FIG. 235(a)), and "Red" is defined as the character mode for the range "798,799". are defined in association (see 222fa3d in FIG. 235(a)), and "stripe (black)" is defined in association with the range of "800 to 979" as the character mode (see 222fa3e in FIG. 235(a) ), and the range of “980 to 999” is defined in association with “stripe (red)” as a character mode (see 222fa3f in FIG. 235(a)).

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 235(a), as a prescribed content corresponding to a player who frequently operates, "white" corresponds to the value of the effect lottery counter 223ea in the range of "0 to 799". (see 222fa3a in FIG. 235(a)), and the range of "800 to 895" is defined in association with "blue" as a character mode (see 222fa3b in FIG. 235(a)), "896 ~ 898" is defined in association with "green" as a character mode (see 222fa3c in Fig. 235(a)), and "red" is defined in association with "899" as a character mode ( 222fa3d in FIG. 235(a)), "stripe (black)" is defined as a character mode in association with the range of "900 to 989" (see 222fa3e in FIG. 235(a)), and "990 to 999 " is defined in association with "stripe (red)" as a character mode (see 222fa3f in FIG. 235(a)).

In this way, even in the losing (before completion of development) table 222fa3, the character mode indicating that the degree of expectation for a big win is higher and the degree of expectation for development is higher as the player who operates the game more frequently plays the game. The selection ratio of the character mode indicating . As a result, it is possible to prevent the degree of expectation from varying depending on the game method due to a large difference in the number of appearances of each character mode in one operation support effect. Therefore, it is possible to realize a more suitable presentation mode.

Next, with reference to FIG. 235(b), the details of the aforementioned deviation (after completion of development) table 222fa4 will be described. As described above, the deviation (after completion of development) table 222fa4 is in the process of executing the variable display (variation effect) corresponding to the deviation, and the operation support effect executed after the last development timing in the ready-to-win effect. 2 is a data table referred to when selecting a character mode in .

As shown in FIG. 235(b), as the prescribed content corresponding to the player who operates less frequently, the value of the effect lottery counter 223ea in the range of "0 to 254" is associated with "white" as the character mode. is defined (see 222fa4a in FIG. 235(b)), and the range of "255 to 754" is defined in association with "blue" as a character mode (see 222fa4b in FIG. 235(b)), and "755 to 944 ” is defined in association with “green” as the character mode (see 222fa4c in FIG. 235(b)), and “red” is defined in association with the range of “945 to 949” as the character mode. (see 222fa4d in FIG. 235(b)), and the range of "950 to 999" is defined in association with "stripe (black)" as the character mode (see 222fa4e in FIG. 235(b)). On the other hand, the value of the effect lottery counter 223ea is not associated with the character mode of "stripe (red)" (see 222f4f in FIG. 235(b)).

In this way, in the variable effect corresponding to the loss, when the operation support effect is executed after the last development is completed, the win (after development is completed) table 222fa2 (see FIG. 234(c)) is referred to. The selection ratio of the character mode, which indicates that the expectation of the jackpot is high, is lower than in the case (the selection ratio of green characters is reduced from 50% to 19%, and the selection ratio of red characters is reduced from 25% to 0.5%. ). On the other hand, the selection ratio of character modes indicating that the degree of expectation for development is high is the same as when the win (after completion of development) table 222fa2 (see FIG. 234(c)) is referred to, and the black stripe The pattern character mode is selected at a rate of 5%, and the red stripe pattern character mode is not selected. In other words, character modes with high expectations for development are rarely selected. After the final development is completed, the effect is achieved by setting the selection ratio of the character mode, which indicates that the expectation of development is high in both the case of a big hit and the case of a failure, to a common low probability (rate of 5%). It is possible to make the player recognize that the game will not develop further (that is, that the lottery result of the special symbol will be notified at the current stage of development). Therefore, it is possible to make the player pay more attention to the combination of the third symbols that are stopped and displayed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 235(b), as a prescribed content corresponding to a player whose operation frequency is medium, the value of the effect lottery counter 223ea is in the range of "0 to 699", and the character mode is "white". is defined in association (see 222fa4a in FIG. 235(b)), and "blue" is defined in association with the range of "700 to 899" as a character mode (see 222fa4b in FIG. 235(b)), The range of "900 to 977" is defined in association with "green" as the character mode (see 222fa4c in FIG. 235(b)), and the range of "978, 979" is defined as "red" as the character mode. are defined in correspondence (see 222fa4d in FIG. 235(b)), and "stripe (black)" is defined in association with the range of "980 to 999" as the character mode (in FIG. 235(b) 222fa4e). On the other hand, the value of the effect lottery counter 223ea is not associated with the character mode of "stripe (red)" (see 222fa4f in FIG. 235(b)).

Further, as shown in FIG. 235(b), as a prescribed content corresponding to a player who frequently operates, "white" corresponds to the value of the effect lottery counter 223ea in the range of "0 to 849" as the character mode. (see 222fa4a in FIG. 235(b)), and the range of "850 to 949" is defined in association with "blue" as a character mode (see 222fa4b in FIG. 235(b)), "950 ~ 988” is defined in association with “green” as the character mode (see 222fa4c in FIG. 235(b)), and “red” is defined in association with “989” as the character mode ( 222fa4d in FIG. 235(b)), and the range of "990 to 999" is defined in association with "stripe (black)" as a character mode (see 222fa4e in FIG. 235(b)). On the other hand, the value of the effect lottery counter 223ea is not associated with the character mode of "stripe (red)" (see 222fa4f in FIG. 235(b)).

Therefore, even in the losing (after completion of development) table 222fa4, the more frequently the player who operates the game is playing the game, the higher the expectation of the big win, and the higher the expectation of development. The selection rate of character modes is low. As a result, it is possible to prevent the degree of expectation from varying depending on the game method due to a large difference in the number of appearances of each character mode in one operation support effect. Therefore, it is possible to realize a more suitable presentation mode.

As described above, in the eleventh embodiment, the operation support effect is executed a plurality of times for the same variable effect (variable display). The selection ratio of the character mode to be displayed when the player presses the center button CB is variable depending on whether it is before or after. More specifically, in the operation support effect executed before all developments are completed, the character mode (black stripe pattern, red stripe pattern, While the proportion set to the pattern) is high, the proportion set to the character mode, which increases the expectation of a big win, is extremely low. As a result, in the operation cheering performance executed before the final development is completed, there is almost no difference in the character mode displayed in the case of a big win or in the case of a loss, so at least the final development is completed. Until then, the player can play the game without spoiling the expectation for the big win. In addition, although the selection rate of a character mode that increases the expectation of a big win is low, the expectation of a big win increases when it is selected. is displayed, the center button CB can be pressed. Therefore, it is possible to improve the willingness of the player to participate in the operation support presentation. Further, in the eleventh embodiment, the number of times the player presses the center button CB in the operation support effect is counted, and the average number of operations in one operation support effect is calculated. And, according to the average number of times of operation, the selection ratio of each character mode per depression of the central button CB is made different. That is, when a player who does not press frequently is playing a game, the selection ratio of the character mode indicating that the expectation of a big win is high and the character mode indicating that the expectation of development is high is increased. When a player who frequently presses down is playing a game, the selection ratio of the character mode indicating that the degree of expectation for a big win is high and the character mode indicating that the degree of expectation for development is high is reduced. . By configuring in this way, it is possible to equalize the number of display times of the character mode indicating that the degree of expectation is high in the operation support performance regardless of the tendency of the player's operation, so that a more suitable performance is realized. be able to.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 236 and 237, details of the above-described mini character effect selection table 222fb will be described. FIG. 236(a) is a diagram showing the specified contents of the mini character effect selection table 222fb. As shown in FIG. 236(a), the mini character effect selection table 222fb is for the V challenge small win, which is referred to for determining whether or not the mini character announcement effect can be executed and the action timing in the variable display corresponding to the V challenge small win. A table 222fb1, a normal small win table 222fb2 referred to for determining whether or not to execute a mini character announcement performance and action timing in the variable display corresponding to the normal small win, and a variable display corresponding to the lottery results other than the small win. is composed of at least three data tables, ie, whether or not to execute the mini character announcement effect, and a non-small win table 222fb3 that is referred to for determining the action timing.

First, with reference to FIG. 236(b), details of the V challenge small winning table 222fb1 will be described. As described above, the V-challenge small win table 222fb1 is a data table that defines data for determining whether or not to execute the mini-character advance notice effect and the action timing in the variable display corresponding to the V-challenge small win. As shown in FIG. 236(b), the V challenge small winning table 222fb1 defines, for each variation type, the value range of the effect lottery counter 223ea and the effect mode of the mini character preview effect in association with each other.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 236(b), for the variation type (variation pattern) of the normal reach, the value of the effect lottery counter 223ea is in the range of "0 to 99", and there is no mini character announcement effect. (See 222fb1a in FIG. 236(b)), and the range of "100 to 399" is defined in association with a low-expectation mini-character announcement effect (see FIG. 230(c)) (see FIG. 236). (see 222fb1b in (b)), and the range of "400 to 699" is defined in association with a medium-expected mini-character announcement effect (see Fig. 231(b)) (see 222fb1c in Fig. 236(b)), A highly anticipated mini character announcement effect (see FIG. 231(d)) is defined in association with the range of "700 to 999" (see 222fb1d in FIG. 236(b)).

In addition, as shown in FIG. 236(b), with respect to the variation type (variation pattern) of Super Reach and Special Reach, the value of the effect lottery counter 223ea is in the range of "0 to 99". None is defined in correspondence (see 222fb1e in FIG. 236(b)), and a low-expectation mini-character preview effect (see FIG. 230(c)) is defined in association with the range of "100 to 149" (see FIG. 230(c)). 222fb1f in FIG. 236(b)), and the range of "150 to 649" is stipulated in association with a medium-expected mini-character announcement effect (see FIG. 231(b)) (see 222fb1g in FIG. 236(b)). ), and a high-expectation mini-character announcement effect (see FIG. 231(d)) is defined in association with the range of “650 to 999” (see 222fb1h in FIG. 236(b)).

That is, it is configured such that the mini-character advance notice effect with high expectation is more likely to be selected for the variation type that develops reach with higher expectation. In particular, by increasing the selection ratio of the high-anticipation mini character announcement effect in the high-expectation reach effect, it is possible to set the high-expectation action timing in the development stage with high expectations. can be raised. As described above, when the high-expectation first action is set, the mini-character MC performs the first action across the timing of development to a higher-expectation ready-to-win effect. Each action of the mini character MC is configured so as not to be interrupted in the middle (that is, the action is set so that the variable time does not elapse in the middle of the action of the mini character MC). Therefore, the player who understands the specification and plays the game can be made aware of the development before the highly anticipated ready-to-win effect develops. However, even if the first action with high expectations is executed in the development stage with relatively low expectations and the development can be detected, it is possible that the lottery result of the special symbol will be announced at the development stage with low expectations. Therefore, expectations for the V-challenge small win cannot be raised so much. Therefore, in the eleventh embodiment, a variation type with a high degree of expectation is configured to increase the ratio of execution of actions with a high degree of expectation. This allows the player to perceive in advance that the ready-to-win effect develops to a development stage with a high degree of expectation and that it will develop into a more highly anticipated direction. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

Next, with reference to FIG. 237(a), details of the normal small winning table 222fb2 described above will be described. FIG. 237(a) is a diagram showing the defined contents of the normal small winning table 222fb2. As described above, the normal small win table 222fb2 is a data table that defines data for determining whether or not to execute the mini character advance notice effect and the action timing in the variable display corresponding to the normal small win.

As shown in FIG. 237(a), for the variation type (variation pattern) of the normal reach, the value of the effect lottery counter 223ea is defined in the range of "0 to 499" with no mini character notice effect. (Refer to 222fb2a in FIG. 237(a)), and the range of "500 to 899" is stipulated in association with a low-expectation mini-character announcement effect (see FIG. 230(b)) (222fb2b in FIG. 237(a)). ), and the range of "900 to 989" is defined in association with a medium-expected mini-character announcement effect (see Fig. 231(a)) (see 222fb2c in Fig. 237(a)), "990 to 999". A high-expectation mini-character announcement effect (see FIG. 231(c)) is defined in association with the range of (see 222fb2d in FIG. 237(a)).

In addition, as shown in FIG. 237(a), with respect to the variation type (variation pattern) of Super Reach and Special Reach, the value of the effect lottery counter 223ea is in the range of "0 to 99". None is defined in correspondence (see 222fb2e in FIG. 237(a)), and a low-expectation mini-character preview effect (see FIG. 230(b)) is defined in association with the range of "100 to 799" (see FIG. 230(b)). (See 222fb2f in Fig. 237(a)), and the range of "800 to 949" is defined in association with a medium-expected mini-character announcement effect (See Fig. 231(a)) (See 222fb2g in Fig. 237(a). ), and the range of "950 to 999" is defined in association with a high-expectation mini-character announcement effect (see FIG. 231(c)) (see 222fb2h in FIG. 237(a)).

Therefore, when the variation type of normal reach is selected as a normal small win, the execution ratio of the mini character notice effect is lower than in the case of the V challenge small win (90% → 50%), and furthermore, it is executed. Even if it is, almost, a low-expectation mini-character announcement effect is decided. Therefore, when a mini-character announcement effect with medium or high expectations is executed in the variation pattern of the normal reach, the player's sense of expectation for the V challenge small win can be improved. In addition, when the fluctuation type of super reach or special reach is selected as a normal small hit, the execution ratio of the mini character notice effect itself is the same, but the selection ratio of medium and high expectation mini character notice effects becomes lower. Therefore, when the mini-character announcement effect with medium or high expectation is executed, the player's sense of anticipation for the V challenge small win can be improved.

Next, with reference to FIG.237(b), the detail of table 222fb3 for non-small hits mentioned above is demonstrated. FIG. 237(b) is a diagram showing the defined contents of this non-small winning table 222fb3. As described above, the non-small win table 222fb3 is a data table that defines data for determining whether or not to execute the mini character announcement effect and action timing in the variable display corresponding to the lottery result other than the small win. .

As shown in FIG. 237(b), with respect to the variation type (variation pattern) that is not long, the value of the effect lottery counter 223ea is defined to be in the range of "0 to 949" with no mini character notice effect. (see 222fb3a in FIG. 237(b)), and a low-expectation mini-character announcement effect (see FIG. 230(b)) is defined in association with the range of "950 to 999" (see FIG. 237(b) ) at 222fb3b).

In addition, as shown in FIG. 237(b), with respect to the variation type (variation pattern) of normal reach, the value of the effect lottery counter 223ea is in the range of "0 to 599", and no mini character notice effect is associated. (see 222fb3c in FIG. 237(b)), and a low-expectation mini-character announcement effect (see FIG. 230(b)) is defined in association with the range of "600 to 949" (see FIG. 237(b) (See 222fb3d of ), and the range of "950 to 998" is defined in association with a medium-expected mini-character announcement effect (see Fig. 231(a)) (see 222fb3e of Fig. 237(b)), and "999". 237(b), a highly anticipated mini-character announcement effect (see FIG. 231(c)) is defined in association with (see 222fb3f in FIG. 237(b)).

In addition, as shown in FIG. 237(b), for the variation type (variation pattern) of Super Reach and Special Reach, the value of the effect lottery counter 223ea is in the range of "0 to 399". None is defined in correspondence (see 222fb3g in FIG. 237(b)), and a low-expectation mini-character preview effect (see FIG. 230(b)) is defined in association with the range of "400 to 899" ( 222fb3h in FIG. 237(b)), and the range of "900 to 979" is stipulated in association with a medium-expected mini-character announcement effect (see FIG. 231(a)) (see 222fb3i in FIG. 237(b)). ), and a high-expectation mini-character announcement effect (see FIG. 231(c)) is defined in association with the range of "980 to 999" (see 222fb3j in FIG. 237(b)).

Therefore, when the lottery result is other than the small win, the execution ratio of the mini character notice effect is lower than in the case of the normal small win, and the ratio of selecting the mini character notice effect for medium and high expectations is also high. lower. As a result, when the mini-character advance notice effect is executed, there is a high possibility that the result of the lottery is at least a small win (V challenge small win or normal small win), so the mini-character notice effect is executed. Thus, it is possible to improve the expectation of the player for the small winning game.

In addition, in the eleventh embodiment, only in the case of the V challenge small win, the mini-character announcement effect is executed up to the third action (see FIG. 228(b)), but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the third action is configured to be executed even with a normal small win, and as the display content of the third symbol display device 81, a display mode in which only a small win is confirmed (for example, the characters "small win" are displayed An action in which the mini character MC falls together with the symbol) may be set. With this configuration, when the mini-character MC performs up to the third action, it is possible to realize a playability of predicting whether it is a V challenge small win or a normal small win from the contents of the action. That is, similar to the selection effect (see FIG. 216) in the tenth embodiment described above, it is possible to predict the type of small win and realize a novel game property in which the shooting direction is switched according to the prediction result. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

Next, with reference to FIG. 238, details of the above-described small winning effect selection table 222fc will be described. FIG. 238(a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the small winning effect selection table 222fc. As shown in FIG. 238, the small hit time production selection table 222fc is whether or not the central route suggestion production (see FIG. 232 (b)) can be executed when any of the small hits H14 to J14 occurs in the time saving state of the normal symbol. , and a small hit H14 to J14 table 222fc1 for selecting the execution timing, and a central route suggestion production (see FIG. 232 (b)) when one of the small hits K14 to M14 occurs in the time saving state of the normal symbol. , and a table 222fc2 for small hits K14 to M14 for selecting execution timing.

First, with reference to FIG. 238(b), details of the table 222fc1 for small hits H14 to J14 will be described. FIG. 238(b) is a diagram showing the defined contents of the table 222fc1 for small hits H14 to J14. As shown in FIG. 238(b), the small hit table 222fc1 for H14 to J14 defines the range of the value of the effect lottery counter 223ea corresponding to each execution timing of the central route suggesting effect.

As shown in FIG. 238(b), the value of the effect lottery counter 223ea in the range of "0 to 599" is associated with the "V win rate 50% period" as the execution timing of the central route suggestion effect. (see 222fc1a in FIG. 238(b)). Since the effect lottery counter 223ea can take 1000 values of "0 to 999", when it becomes one of the small hits H14 to J14, during the V winning rate 50% period (that is, to the lottery device 6755 The ratio (probability) of executing the central route suggesting effect only during the period in which the entered game ball is easily distributed to the distribution rotator 6755f is 60% (600/1000).

Also, as shown in FIG. 238(b), the value of the effect lottery counter 223ea in the range of "600 to 749" is associated with "V win rate 100% period" as the execution timing of the central route suggestion effect. (see 222fc1b in FIG. 238(b)). Therefore, when it becomes one of the small hits H14 to J14, during the V winning rate 100% period (that is, the game ball entered into the lottery device 6755 is easily distributed to the right V winning opening 6755bV during the period) The ratio (probability) of executing only the center route suggesting effect is 15% (150/1000). That is, when the small hits H14 to J14 are won, the center route suggestion effect that suggests the timing at which the game ball basically flows down to the distribution rotator 6755f (the center route becomes easier to flow down) is displayed at the center. It is configured so that it can be executed even when the route cannot flow down. This is because when the small hits H14 to J14 are reached, both when the ball enters the center V prize openings 6755fv1 to 6755fv3 and when the ball enters the right V prize opening 6755bV, the time-saving jackpot is achieved. In other words, even though the ball entered the lottery device 6755 during execution of the central route suggesting effect, the degree of expectation that the game ball will be distributed to the distribution rotator 6755f, deviating from the basic production rule and becoming a time saving state. When a game ball enters the right V winning port 6755bV with a low (only 39% rate of time saving state), conversely, the time saving state after the end of the big win is established. can be done. Therefore, when a game ball entering the lottery device 6755 enters the right V winning opening 6755bV during execution of the central route suggesting effect (that is, the behavior deviates from the basic effect law of the central route suggesting effect) If it occurs), the player can be convinced that the time saving state will be provided, so the player's interest in the game can be further improved.

Further, as shown in FIG. 238(b), when the value of the effect lottery counter 223ea is in the range of "750 to 799", the execution timing of the central route suggestion effect is "both periods" (V winning rate 50% period). , and V win rate 100% period) are defined in association with each other (see 222fc1c in FIG. 238(b)). Therefore, when any of the small hits H14 to J14 occurs, the ratio (probability) of execution of the central route suggestion effect during both the V winning rate 50% period and the V winning rate 100% period is 5%. (50/1000). By executing the central route suggesting effect in both periods, the player can be made to think that the chances of being in a time-saving state are increasing more than usual. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 238(b), the value of the effect lottery counter 223ea is defined in association with "non-execution" with respect to the range of "800 to 999". Therefore, when any of the small wins H14 to J14 is achieved, the ratio (probability) of not executing the central route suggesting effect is 20% (200/1000). Even if a small win is won, even if a game ball enters the lottery device 6755 while the central route suggesting performance is not being executed by providing a case where the central route suggesting performance is not executed, the ball is shaken. A game ball may flow down to the minute rotating body 6755f, or an event may occur in which a ball enters the right V winning opening 6755bV and a time saving state is given. Therefore, even when a game ball enters the lottery device 6755 in a state in which the central route suggestion performance is not executed, it is possible to expect a time-saving state, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved. .

Next, with reference to FIG. 238(c), the details of the table 222fc2 for small wins K14 to M14 will be described. FIG. 238(c) is a diagram showing the defined contents of the table 222fc2 for small wins K14 to M14. As shown in FIG. 238(c), in the table 222fc2 for the small hits K14 to M14, the value of the effect lottery counter 223ea is in the range of "0 to 949", the execution timing of the central route suggestion effect is set to "V 50% win rate period” is defined in correspondence (see 222fc2a in FIG. 238(c)). Since the effect lottery counter 223ea can take 1000 values of "0 to 999", when it becomes one of the small hits K14 to M14, during the V winning rate 50% period (that is, to the lottery device 6755 The ratio (probability) of executing the center route suggesting effect only during the period in which the entered game ball is easily distributed to the distribution rotator 6755f is 95% (950/1000).

As shown in FIG. 238(c), the value of the effect lottery counter 223ea in the range of "950 to 999" is defined in association with "non-execution". Therefore, when any one of the small wins K14 to M14 is achieved, the ratio (probability) of not executing the central route suggestion effect is 5% (50/1000). Even if a small win is won, even if a game ball enters the lottery device 6755 while the central route suggesting performance is not being executed by providing a case where the central route suggesting performance is not executed, the ball is shaken. A game ball may flow down to the minute rotating body 6755f, or an event may occur in which a ball enters the right V winning opening 6755bV and a time saving state is given. Therefore, even when a game ball enters the lottery device 6755 in a state in which the central route suggestion performance is not executed, it is possible to expect a time-saving state, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved. .

Thus, in the eleventh embodiment, in synchronization with the V winning rate of 50% period or the V winning rate of 100% period in the small hit of the type that becomes a time-saving jackpot due to the occurrence of V winning, the central route suggestion production was configured to execute By configuring in this way, if a game ball enters the lottery device 6755 during execution of the central route suggestion performance, it is distributed to the distribution rotor 6755f and becomes a 16 round short time jackpot at a rate of 1/2. Or, since the ball enters the right V winning hole 6755bV and becomes a time-saving jackpot, the game can be played with a strong expectation that the game ball will enter the lottery device 6755 during execution of the central route suggestion performance. . Therefore, by comparing the entry timing of the game ball to the lottery device 6755 and the execution status of the central route suggestion effect (display mode of the third symbol display device 81), it is possible to predict whether or not the time saving state will occur. Since it can be realized, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

Next, with reference to FIG. 233(b), details of the RAM 223 provided in the sound lamp control device 113 in the eleventh embodiment will be described. FIG. 233(b) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 223 in the eleventh embodiment. As shown in FIG. 233(b), the configuration of the RAM 223 in the eleventh embodiment differs from the configuration of the RAM 223 in the tenth embodiment (see FIG. 196) in that an effect timing storage area 223fa and an operation valid period flag 223fb, a cheering effect flag 223fc, a development completion flag 223fd, a press count counter 223fe, an operation frequency flag 223ff, a mini character flag 223fg, an action timing storage area 223fh, an action counter 223fi, and a limited period flag 223fj. , and a limited period counter 223fk are added.

The performance timing storage area 223fa temporarily stores data indicating the execution timing of the central route suggestive performance determined at the start of the small win in the time-saving state of the normal symbol at least until the central route suggestive performance is actually started. This is a storage area for storing This effect timing storage area 223fa is allocated with a storage area of, for example, 1 byte, and indicates that the central route suggestion effect is not executed when "00H" is stored as data, and "01H" is stored. indicates that the central route suggestive effect is to be executed only during the V winning rate period of 50% when "02H" is stored, and that the central route suggestive effect is executed only during the V winning rate period of 100%. It shows that when "03H" is stored, the central route suggestion effect is executed in both the V winning rate 50% period and the V winning rate 100% period. The initial value of the production timing storage area 223fa is set to "00H", and when the small winning starts (when the small winning type command is received), the production timing corresponding to the small winning type is selected for the small winning production. Based on the determination from the table 222fc, data corresponding to the determined rendering timing is stored (see S41006 in FIG. 250). Also, it is reset to "00H" at the end of the small winning.

The operation valid period flag 223fb is a flag indicating whether or not the operation valid period of the center button CB is in progress. If the operation valid period flag 223fb is ON, it means that the operation valid period is in effect. That is, when the player depresses the center button CB, a character mode is drawn using the character mode selection table 222fa, and the character image 814 of the character mode determined by lottery is displayed. The operation valid period flag 223fb has an initial value set to OFF, and is set to ON at the start of the execution period of each operation support effect in the variable effect (variable display) in which the operation support effect is set (Fig. 243, S40405). Also, it is set to OFF at the end timing of the operation support effect (see S40408 in FIG. 243).

The support effect flag 223fc is a flag indicating whether or not a variable effect (variable display) in which the operation support effect is set is being executed. If it is on, the variable effect in which the operation support effect is set is being executed. indicates that This support effect flag 223fc is set to ON when the variable display effect accompanied by the operation support effect is determined (see S41201 in FIG. 253). Also, it is set to OFF when fluctuation stops.

The development completion flag 223fd is a flag indicating whether or not the development up to the final stage in the variable display has been completed. That is, if it is a variation pattern of normal reach, it indicates whether it has developed to normal reach, if it is a variation pattern of super reach, it indicates whether it has developed to super reach, and if it is a variation pattern of special reach , indicates whether it has developed to special reach or not. If this development completion flag 223fd is on, it means that the development to the final stage in the variable display has been completed, and if it is off, it means that the development to the final stage in the variable display has not been completed. do. The development completion flag 223fd has an initial value set to OFF, and is set to ON at the timing when the final stage of each variable performance is developed (see S40504 and S40508 in FIG. 244). Also, it is set to OFF when fluctuation stops. When the central button CB is pressed during execution of the operation support effect, the development completion flag 223fd is referenced to determine whether or not the development has been completed. Any one of the four data tables is determined as the table for selecting the character mode (see S40604, S40605, S40607 and S40608 in FIG. 245).

The number-of-presses counter 223fe is a counter that counts the number of times the center button CB is pressed in one variable display effect in which the operation support effect is set. The number-of-presses counter 223fe has an initial value of 0, and each time the center button CB is pressed (pressing is detected) during the operation valid period of the operation support presentation, the value is incremented by one. It is updated (see S40601 in FIG. 245). The value of the number-of-presses counter 223fe is held until the execution of the variable display effect in which the operation support effect is set is next set, and based on the held counter value, the tendency of the previous player's operation (1 253), the value is reset to 0 (see S41209 in FIG. 253). The tendency of the player's operation determined based on the number-of-presses counter 223fe is set as the state (one of "00H" to "02H") of an operation frequency flag 223ff, which will be described later. When determining the character mode based on the player's operation of the center button CB in the operation support effect, the data table corresponding to the player's operation frequency indicated by the state of the operation frequency flag 223ff is selected from the character mode selection table 222fa. Then, the selected table is used to determine the character mode (see S40609 in FIG. 245).

The operation frequency flag 223ff is a flag to which data indicating the player's operation tendency (operation frequency) is set. This operation frequency flag 223ff consists of 1 byte. If it is "00H", it indicates that a player with high operation frequency is playing a game. "02H" indicates that a player with a low operation frequency is playing a game. The initial setting of the operation frequency flag 223ff is set to "00H", and the player's pressing tendency (average number of times of operation), the state is set (see S41205, S41207, and S41208 in FIG. 253).

The mini character flag 223fg is a flag that indicates whether or not the variable display effect with the mini character advance notice effect set is being executed. If it is on, it indicates that the variable display effect with the mini character advance notice effect is being executed. On the other hand, if it is off, it indicates that the mini character preview effect is not set. This mini character flag 223fg is set to ON when execution of the mini character announcement effect is determined by lottery using the mini character effect selection table 222fb (see FIG. 236(a)) at the start of the variable display effect (see FIG. 254). S41309). In addition, it is set to OFF at the end of the variable display in which the mini character announcement effect is set.

The action timing storage area 223fh is a storage area for storing data indicating the execution timing of each action in the mini character announcement effect. In the action timing storage area 223fh, when execution of the mini character announcement effect is determined based on the mini character effect selection table 222fb (see FIG. 236(a)), the type (expectation level) of the determined mini character preview effect is stored. Data indicating the corresponding execution timing is stored (see S41310 in FIG. 254). During execution of the variable display effect in which the mini character advance notice effect is set, the execution timing of each action is determined based on the data stored in the action timing storage area 223fh, and the execution of each action is set (Fig. 246 S40705).

The action counter 223fi is a counter in which a value indicating the action stage of the mini-character announcement effect is set. The value of this action counter 223fi is incremented by 1 each time the action stage advances by one stage in the mini character announcement effect (see S40704 in FIG. 246). When it is time to start a new action in the mini-character preview effect, an action is set according to the counter value of the action counter 223fi (see S40705 in FIG. 246).

The restricted period flag 223fj is a flag indicating whether or not it is a non-effect button restricted period (a period from one second before the start of the valid operation period to one second after the end of the valid operation period). While indicating that it is a non-effect button limit period, if it is off, it indicates that it is not a non-effect button limit period. This restricted period flag 223fj is set to ON at a timing one second before each operation support effect (operation effective period) starts in the variable display in which the operation support effect is set (see S40905 in FIG. 248). ), and is set to OFF when one second has elapsed after the end of the operation support effect (see S40903 in FIG. 248). While the restricted period flag 223fj is on, even if a non-rendering button is operated, the setting change corresponding to the operated button is restricted. As a result, when a player who tries to operate the center button CB during the execution of the operation support performance erroneously presses the non-performance button, various settings are changed against the player's will. In addition, since the effect mode corresponding to the operation is not displayed, it is possible to make the player recognize an operation error (wrong type of button to be pressed). Therefore, it is possible to more preferably execute the operation support effect. Here, the reason why the setting change based on the operation of the non-effect button is restricted not only during the operation effective period but also for one second before and after the operation effective period is that the operation effective period starts. A player who perceives and starts button operation before the effective period of operation starts, or a player who continues to operate without noticing the expiration of the effective period of operation performs an erroneous operation. This is to deal with As a result, it is possible to further reduce the possibility that the settings are changed against the player's will.

The restricted period counter 223fk is a counter for counting the number of times the non-effect button is pressed (operated) during one non-effect button restricted period. In the eleventh embodiment, unless the non-effect button is operated twice or more during the non-effect button restriction period, the setting corresponding to the pressed button type is not changed. In other words, when the value of the counter 223fk is 1 or less during the restricted period, the change in the light amount or volume setting of the pachinko machine 10 is avoided (restricted). By configuring in this way, a player who tries to participate in the operation support effect by pressing the center button CB during the operation effective period and the one-second period before and after the operation valid period can be placed in the vicinity of the center button CB (predetermined distance). It is possible to prevent the setting of the pachinko machine 10 from being changed against the player's will when the non-rendering button arranged within the range) is erroneously pressed. Therefore, it is possible to make the player concentrate more on the operation support effect, so that a suitable effect mode can be realized.

<Regarding the control process of the main controller in the eleventh embodiment>
Next, various control processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in the eleventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 239 and 240. FIG. First, with reference to FIG. 239, small winning start processing 14 (S271) in the eleventh embodiment will be described. This small hitting start process 14 (S271) is a process executed instead of the small hitting start process (see FIG. 199) in the tenth embodiment, and the small hitting start process (see FIG. 199) in the tenth embodiment. Similarly, it is a process for setting the start of the small hit when the special symbol lottery results in a small hit.

Among the small hitting start processing 14 (see FIG. 239) in the eleventh embodiment, in each processing of S1501 to S1503, each processing of S1501 to S1503 of the small hitting start processing in the tenth embodiment (see FIG. 199) The same processing is performed. In addition, in the small hit start processing 14 (see FIG. 239) in the eleventh embodiment, when the processing of S1503 is completed, set a small hit type command indicating the type of the small hit to be started this time (S1511), and perform this processing. finish. The small hit type command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is executed by the MPU 201. In the external output process (S1001) of the main process 13 (see FIG. 201), It is sent to the audio lamp controller 113 . When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the small hit type command in the time saving state of the normal symbol, it determines whether or not the central route suggestion performance can be executed and the execution timing according to the small hit type notified by the command.

Next, with reference to FIG. 240, the small winning control process 14 (S1081) in the eleventh embodiment will be described. This small hit control process 14 (S1081) is a process executed instead of the small hit control process 13 (see FIG. 203) in the tenth embodiment, and the small hit control process 13 in the tenth embodiment (see FIG. 203 ), is a process for executing various controls during the small winning game.

Of the small hit control process 14 (see FIG. 240) in the eleventh embodiment, in each process of S1301 to S1304, S1310, S1311, and S1321 to S1326, the small hit control process 13 in the tenth embodiment (FIG. 203 See), the same processes as those of S1301 to S1304, S1310, S1311, and S1321 to S1326 are executed.

Further, in the small hit control process 14 (see FIG. 240) in the eleventh embodiment, in the process of S1304, when it is determined that the small hit medium flag 203ea is ON (S1304: Yes), then the lottery device 6755 It is determined whether it is the operation timing of each operating member (small hitting attacker 6755a, upper opening and closing door 6755bU, lower opening and closing door 6755bD) (S1331), and when it is determined that it is the operation timing of one of the operating members (S1331: Yes), sets an operation content command indicating the type and movable position (operation content) of the operating member to be operated (S1332), and terminates this process. The operation content command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in the external output processing (S1001) of the main processing 13 (see FIG. 201) executed by the MPU 201, voice It is sent to the lamp control device 113 . When the operation content command is received in a state in which execution of the central route suggesting effect is determined, the audio lamp control device 113 compares the operation content with the determined execution timing of the central route suggesting effect, and performs the central route suggesting effect. determines whether to start

By executing this small hit control process 14 (see FIG. 240), it is possible to accurately grasp the operation timing of each operation member, so the closing timing of the upper opening and closing door 6755bU (V winning rate 50% period start timing ) or the opening timing of the lower opening/closing door 6755bD (the start timing of the V winning rate 100% period), and the middle route suggesting effect can be executed.

<Regarding control processing of the sound lamp control device in the eleventh embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 241 to 254, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the sound ramp control device 113 in the eleventh embodiment will be described. First, with reference to FIG. 241, main processing 14 in the eleventh embodiment will be described. This main process 14 is a process executed in place of the main process (see FIG. 34) in the tenth embodiment (and first embodiment).

Of the main processing 14 (see FIG. 241) in the eleventh embodiment, the processing of S4101 to S4110 and S4114 to S4118 respectively correspond to the main processing (see FIG. 34) in the tenth embodiment (and first embodiment). The same processes as those of S4101 to S4110 and S4114 to S4118 are executed. In addition, in the main processing 14 (see FIG. 241) in the eleventh embodiment, when the processing of S4110 ends, the effect Update processing 14 is executed (S4191). Details will be described later with reference to FIG. 242, but this effect update process 14 is a process for updating the effect mode of various effects executed by the pachinko machine 10 in the eleventh embodiment.

In addition, in the main processing 14 (see FIG. 241) in the eleventh embodiment, when the rendering update processing 14 (S4191) is completed, then the operation ( Pressing) is monitored, and when an operation is detected, various setting button input monitoring processing for changing settings according to the type of button operated is executed (S4192). Details of the various setting button input monitoring processing (S4192) will be described later with reference to FIG.

Further, when the various setting button input monitoring processing (S4192) is completed, command determination processing 14 is then executed (S4193) in place of the command determination processing (see FIG. 36) in the tenth embodiment (and the first embodiment). ), thereafter, instead of the variable display setting process (see FIG. 38) in the tenth embodiment (and the first embodiment), the variable display setting process 14 is executed (S4194), and the process proceeds to S4114. Details of the variable display setting process 14 will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, with reference to FIG. 242, details of the effect update process 14 (S4191) described above will be described. FIG. 242 is a flowchart showing effect update processing 14 (S4191). This effect update process 14 is, as described above, a process for updating the effect mode of various effects. As shown in FIG. 242, when the effect update process 14 (S4191) is executed, the operation support effect process is executed for updating the effect mode in the variable display in which the operation support effect is set (S40301), and then, A mini-character setting process is executed to update the effect mode in the variable display in which the mini-character advance notice effect is set (S40302), and this process ends. The details of these operation support effect processing (S40301) and mini character setting processing (S40302) will be described later with reference to FIGS. 243 to 245 and 246, respectively.

Next, with reference to FIG. 243, details of the above-described operation support effect processing (S40301) will be described. FIG. 243 is a flow chart showing operation support effect processing. This operation support effect processing (S40301) is, as described above, a process for updating the effect mode in the variable display in which the operation support effect is set.

When the operation support effect process (see FIG. 243) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the support effect flag 223fc is on (S40401). Since the variable display for which the cheering effect is set is not being executed, the present processing is terminated as it is. On the other hand, in the process of S40401, if it is determined that the cheering effect flag 223fc is ON (S40401: Yes), then the development determination process for determining the development status of the variable effect being executed is executed (S40402). . The details of this development determination process (S40402) will be described later with reference to FIG. After the processing of S40402 ends, it is next determined whether or not the operation valid period flag 223fb is on (S40403). (S40403: No), it is determined whether it is time to start the valid period of operation (S40404). In the process of S40404, when it is determined that it is the start timing of the operation effective period (that is, the start timing of the operation support effect) (S40404: Yes), the during operation effective period flag 223fb is set to ON (S40405), and the operation The start of the cheering effect (see FIG. 224) is set (S40406), and this process ends. On the other hand, in the processing of S40404, if it is determined that it is not the start timing of the operation effective period (the start timing of the operation support effect) (S40404: No), the processing of S40405 and S40406 is skipped, and the present processing ends as it is. do.

On the other hand, in the process of S40403, if it is determined that the operation valid period flag 223fb is ON (that is, the operation support effect is being executed) (S40403: Yes), the operation valid period end timing ( That is, it is determined whether or not it is the end timing of the operation support effect (S40407). In the process of S40407, if it is determined that it is time to end the operation valid period (S40407: Yes), the operation valid period flag 223fb is set to OFF (S40408), and the end of the operation support effect is set (S40409). ), the process ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S40407 that it is not the end timing of the effective period of operation (S40407: No), it is determined whether or not pressing (operation) on the center button CB has been detected (S40410), and the center button CB is detected (S40410: Yes), depending on whether the special symbol is appropriate and the operation status of the player, the character mode of the character image 814 to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined. Character mode setting processing is executed (S40411), and this processing ends. The details of this character mode setting process (S40411) will be described later with reference to FIG. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S40410 that the depression of the center button CB has not been detected (S40410: No), this process ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 244, the details of the development determination process (S40402) described above will be described. This development determination process (S40402) is, as described above, a process for determining the development status of the variable effect being executed. When this development determination process (S40402) is executed, it is first determined whether or not the development completion flag 223fd is on (S40501). ), and since the stage of the ready-to-win effect will not develop any further in the variable effect that is currently being executed, this processing is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, in the processing of S40501, if it is determined that the development completion flag 223fd is turned off (S40501: No), then the timing at which reach occurs (develops into normal reach effect) (that is, 10 seconds after the start of fluctuation) timing) is determined (S40502), and if it is determined that it is the timing of reach generation (S40502: Yes), then the variation type being executed is the variation type (variation pattern) of normal reach (S40503). In the process of S40503, if it is determined that the variation type (variation pattern) is normal reach (S40503: Yes), it means that the development to normal reach is the last development in the variation display, so the development completion flag 223fd is set. It is set to ON (S40504), and this processing ends. On the other hand, in the processing of S40503, if it is determined that it is not the normal reach variation type (S40503: No), the development to normal reach is not the last development (development to super reach or special reach remains) Therefore, this processing is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, in the process of S40502, if it is determined that it is not the timing at which the reach occurs (develops to the normal reach effect) (S40502: No), then the timing to develop to the super reach effect (that is, the fluctuation start 30 seconds later) (S40505), and if it is determined that it is time to develop a super ready-to-win effect (S40505: Yes), the variation type currently being executed is a super ready-to-win variation. It is determined whether or not it is a type (S40506). In the process of S40506, if it is determined that the variation type is super reach (S40506: Yes), it means that the development to super reach is the last development in the variation display, so the development completion flag 223fd is turned on. After setting (S40508), this processing ends. On the other hand, in the processing of S40506, if it is determined that it is not the variation type of super reach (S40506: No), it means that the development to super reach is not the last development (development to special reach remains). Therefore, this processing is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, in the process of S40505, if it is determined that it is not the development timing to the super reach production (S40505: No), then the development timing to the special reach production (that is, the timing after 60 seconds have passed after the start of the fluctuation) (S40507), and if it is determined that it is time to develop into a special ready-to-win effect (S40507: Yes), the development completion flag 223fd is set to ON (S40508), and this process ends. do. On the other hand, in the processing of S40507, if it is determined that it is not the timing to develop into a special reach (S40507: No), this processing ends.

By executing this development determination process, the development completion flag 223fd can be suitably updated according to the development status of the ready-to-win effect. Therefore, in the operation support presentation, the character mode can be preferably set using the development status indicated by the development completion flag 223fd.

Next, with reference to FIG. 245, the details of the character mode setting process (S40411) described above will be described. As described above, this character mode setting process (S40411) is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 according to whether the special symbol is appropriate and the player's operation status when the central button CB is pressed in the operation support effect. This is processing for determining the character mode of the character image 814 to be displayed.

When the character mode setting process (S40411) is executed, first, the value of the number-of-presses counter 223fe is updated by adding 1 (S40601), and then it is determined whether or not the development completion flag 223fd is on. (S40602). In the process of S40602, if it is determined that the development completion flag 223fd is off (S40602: No), then it is determined whether or not the variation display corresponding to the big win is being executed (S40603), If it is determined that the variable display is being executed (S40603: Yes), the character mode is determined (lottery) from the winning (before completion of development) table 222fa1 (see FIG. 234(b)) of the character mode selection table 222fa. (S40604), and the process proceeds to S40609. On the other hand, in the processing of S40603, if it is determined that the variable display corresponding to the big win is not being executed (that is, the variable display corresponding to the loss is being executed) (S40603: No), the character mode selection table 222fa The deviation (before completion of development) table 222fa3 (see FIG. 235(a)) is read as a data table for determining (lottery) the character mode (S40605), and the process proceeds to S40609.

On the other hand, in the process of S40602, if it is determined that the development completion flag 223fd is ON (S40602: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the variation display corresponding to the big win is being executed (S40606), If it is determined that the variable display corresponding to the big win is being executed (S40606: Yes), the character mode selection table 222fa (after completion of development) table 222fa2 (see FIG. 234(c)) is changed to the character mode. Read as a data table for determination (lottery) (S40607, the process moves to S40609. On the other hand, in S40606 processing, the variation display corresponding to the big hit is not being executed (that is, the variation display corresponding to the loss is being executed) (S40606: No), the table 222fa4 (see FIG. 235(b)) for deviation (after completion of development) of the character mode selection table 222fa is used to determine (lottery) the character mode. data table (S40608), and the process proceeds to S40609.

In the process of S40609 executed after the processes of S40604, S40605, S40607, and S40608 are completed, the value of the effect lottery counter 223ea and the state of the operation frequency flag 223ff are changed from the data table read out in the immediately preceding process. The character mode is specified according to the corresponding operation frequency (S40609), the display of the dialogue (character image 814) of the specified character mode is set (S40610), and this processing is terminated.

By executing this character mode setting process (see FIG. 245) every time the center button CB is pressed while the operation support effect is being executed, the lottery result of the special symbol, the development status of the variable display, and the game An appropriate character mode can be set according to the frequency of operation by the user.

Next, with reference to FIG. 246, details of the above-described mini character setting process (S40302) will be described. This mini character setting process (S40302) is, as described above, a process for updating the effect mode in the variable display in which the mini character announcement effect is set. When this mini character setting process (S40302) is executed, it is first determined whether or not the mini character flag 223fg is on (S40701). S40701: No) This means that the variable display for which the mini character advance notice effect is set is not being executed, and there is no possibility of updating the effect mode related to the mini character advance notice effect.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S40701 that the mini character flag 223fg is ON (S40701: Yes), the data in the action timing storage area 223fh is read (S40702), and the action timing specified based on the read data It is determined whether or not (S40703). More specifically, it is determined whether or not the elapsed time from the start of fluctuation (the value of the fluctuation time counter 223f) matches the action timing corresponding to the data read in the process of S40702.

In the process of S40703, if it is determined that it is not time to start the action of the mini-character MC (S40703: No), this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S40703, if it is determined that it is time to start a new action for the mini character MC (S40703: Yes), the value of the action counter 223fi is updated by adding 1 (S40704), and the action after the addition is made. A display action command indicating an action corresponding to the value of the counter 223fi is set (S40705), and this process is terminated.

The display action command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and in the command output processing (S4102) of the main processing 14 (see FIG. 241) executed by the MPU 221, It is transmitted toward the display control device 114 . When the display control device 114 receives this display action command, it performs display control so that the mini character MC executes the action corresponding to the command.

By executing this mini-character setting process (see FIG. 246), each action can be started accurately at each action timing of the mini-character advance notice effect determined at the start of the variable display. Therefore, it is possible to accurately suggest the degree of expectation for the V challenge small win in each mini-character advance notice effect.

Next, with reference to FIG. 247, details of the various setting button input monitoring processing (S4192) described above will be described. As described above, this various setting button input monitoring process (S4192) is one process in the main process 14 (see FIG. 241), and is for non-effect buttons (buttons for changing volume and light intensity settings). This is a process for monitoring an operation (pressing) and, when an operation is detected, changing settings according to the type of button operated.

In the various setting button input monitoring processing (see FIG. 247), first, pressing (operation) of any of the non-rendering buttons (up button UB, down button DB, right button RB, left button LB) is detected. (S40801), and if it is determined that the pressing (operation) of the non-effect button has not been detected (S40801: No), then it is determined whether or not the cheering effect flag 223fc is on. It discriminates (S40802). In the process of S40802, if it is determined that the cheering effect flag 223fc is on (S40802: Yes), it means that the variable display in which the operation cheering effect is set is being executed. A limited period setting process for setting a non-effect button limited period according to time is executed (S40803), and this process ends. Details of this limited period setting process (S40803) will be described later with reference to FIG. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S40802 that the cheering effect flag 223fc is not on (it is off) (S40802: No), it means that the variable display in which the operation cheering effect is set is not being executed. , since there is no possibility of setting and ending the non-effect button restriction period, this processing is terminated as it is.

If it is determined in the process of S40801 that any non-rendering button has been pressed (S40801: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the restricted period flag 223fj is ON (S40804). ), if it is determined that the restricted period flag 223fj is off (S40804: No), the process proceeds to S40808. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S40804 that the during-restriction period flag 223fj is ON (S40804: Yes), the value of the during-restriction period counter 223fk is updated by adding 1 (S40805). Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the counter 223fk during the restricted period after the update has become 2 (that is, whether the player has pressed the non-effect button twice or more during the non-effect button restricted period). (S40806) If it is determined that the post-update counter value is not 2 (that is, it is 1) (S40806: No), this processing ends.

On the other hand, in the processing of S40806, if it is determined that the value of the counter 223fk during the restricted period after updating is 2 (that is, the non-effect button has been pressed twice or more during the non-effect button restricted period). (S40806: Yes), the value of the limited period counter 223fk is reset to 0 (S40807), and the process proceeds to S40808. In the process of S40808, the setting of the pachinko machine 10 is updated according to the type of non-effect button whose operation is detected (S40808), and this process ends. Specifically, when the upper button UB is pressed, the setting of the light amount (luminance) is increased by one step, and when the lower button DB is pressed, the setting of the light amount is decreased by one step. Further, when the right button RB is pressed, the volume setting is increased by one step, and when the left button LB is pressed, the volume setting is decreased by one step.

Thus, in the eleventh embodiment, the various settings (volume and light amount settings) of the pachinko machine 10 are not changed unless the non-effect button is pressed twice or more during the non-effect button restriction period. It consists of As a result, even if a player who tries to operate the central button CB during the execution of the operation support operation effect accidentally presses the non-effect button, various settings are changed against the player's will. In addition, since the effect mode corresponding to the operation is not displayed, it is possible to make the player recognize an operation error (wrong type of button to be pressed). Therefore, it is possible to more preferably execute the operation support effect. In addition, during the non-performance button restriction period, the setting can be changed by pressing the non-performance button twice, so that the player who wants to change the setting of the pachinko machine 10 during the execution of the operation support performance. can meet the demands of Therefore, since it is possible to meet the needs of various players, it is possible to further improve the convenience of the players.

Next, with reference to FIG. 248, details of the above-described limited period setting process (S40803) will be described. This restriction period setting process (S40803) is, as described above, a process for setting the non-effect button restriction period according to the elapsed time after the start of variation. In the restricted period setting process (S40803), first, it is determined whether or not the restricted period flag 223fj is ON (S40901), and if it is determined that the restricted period flag 223fj is ON (S40901: Yes) Next, it is determined whether or not it is the end timing of the non-effect button limitation period (that is, the timing when one second has elapsed after the end of the operation support effect) (S40902).

In the process of S40902, if it is determined that it is time to end the non-effect button limit period (S40902: Yes), the value of the limit period counter 223fk is reset to 0 (S40903), and the limit period flag 223fj is turned off. (S40904), and the process ends. On the other hand, in the processing of S40902, if it is determined that the end timing of the non-effect button restriction period (the timing of one second after the end of the operation support effect) is not reached (S40902: No), the processes of S40903 and S40904 are executed. Skip and end this process.

On the other hand, in the process of S40901, if it is determined that the restricted period flag 223fj is not ON (that is, it is OFF) (S40901: No), the start timing of the non-effect button restriction period (that is, operation support (S40905), it is determined whether it is the start timing of the non-production button restriction period (that is, the timing one second before the operation support production is started). If so (S40905: Yes), the restricted period flag 223fj is set to ON (S40906), and this process ends. On the other hand, in the processing of S40905, if it is determined that the start timing of the non-effect button restriction period (that is, the timing one second before the operation support effect is started) is not reached (S40905), the processing of S40906 is skipped. , the processing ends.

By executing this restriction period setting process (see FIG. 248), the non-effect button restriction can be accurately performed from 1 second before the start of the operation support effect to 1 second after the end of the operation support effect. Can be set for a period of time. Therefore, even if the player who tries to operate the central button CB during the execution of the operation supporting operation performance accidentally presses the non-performance button, various settings are changed against the player's will. can be suppressed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 249, details of the winning-related process 14 (S43011) in the eleventh embodiment will be described. This hit-related process 14 (S43011) is executed in place of the hit-related process 13 (see FIG. 205) in the tenth embodiment in the command determination process 14 (S4193) in the eleventh embodiment. , similar to the win-related process 13 (see FIG. 205) in the tenth embodiment, this is a process for executing control corresponding to the type of win-related command. Note that the command determination process 14 in the eleventh embodiment is unchanged except that the hit-related process 14 (S43011) is executed instead of the hit-related process 13 (see FIG. 205) in the tenth embodiment. A detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Of the hit-related process 14 (see FIG. 249) in the eleventh embodiment, in each process of S4404, S4405, S4407-S4410, and S44001-S44004, the hit-related process 13 in the tenth embodiment (see FIG. 205) , S4404, S4405, S4407 to S4410, and S44001 to S44004 are executed.

In addition, in the winning related process 14 (see FIG. 249) in the eleventh embodiment, in the process of S44001, it is determined that the opening command for small winning is not included in the unprocessed command received from the main controller 110 When it does (S44001: No), it is then determined whether or not a small hit type command is included in the unprocessed command received from the main controller 110 (S44011). In the process of S44011, if it is determined that the small per type command is included in the unprocessed command (S44011: Yes), the small for executing the control according to the small per type notified by the command Hit type command processing is executed (S44012), and this processing ends. The details of this small hit type command process (S44012) will be described later with reference to FIG.

On the other hand, in the process of S44011, if it is determined that the small hit type command is not included in the unprocessed command (S44011: No), then in the unprocessed command received from the main controller 110 It is determined whether or not an operation content command is included (S44013), and if it is determined that an operation content command is included (S44013: Yes), control is executed according to the operation content indicated by the received command. (S44014), and the process ends. The details of this operation content command process (S44014) will be described later with reference to FIG. On the other hand, in the process of S44013, if it is determined that the unprocessed commands do not include an operation content command (S44013: No), the process proceeds to S44003.

Next, with reference to FIG. 250, details of the small hit type command processing (S44012) described above will be described. Figure 250 is the flowchart which shows this small hit classification command processing (S44012). This small hit type command process (S44012) is one process in the hit related process 14 (see FIG. 249), and as described above, the process for executing the control according to the small hit type notified by the command is.

In the small hit type command process (see FIG. 250), first, the data stored in the game state storage area 223i is read (S41001), and whether or not the read data is the data indicating the time saving state of the normal symbol It is determined (S41002). In the processing of S41002, if it is determined that data indicating a gaming state different from the time saving state (that is, the normal state of the normal symbol) is read (S41002: No), a central route suggestion effect (see FIG. 232 (b)) is executed. Since there is no possibility of execution, this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, in the process of S41002, if it is determined that the data indicating the time saving state is read (S41002: Yes), then the small hit type notified by the small hit type command is any of the small hit H14-J14 It is determined whether or not (S41003), and if it is determined that it is one of the small hits H14 to J14 (S41003: Yes), the central route suggestion production with reference to the table 222fc1 for the small hits H14 to J14 (See FIG. 232(b)) is determined (S41004), and the process proceeds to S41006.

On the other hand, in the process of S41003, if it is determined that the small per type notified by the command is not a small per H14 ~ J14 (one of the small per K14 ~ M14) (S41003: No), the small per K14 ~ The table 222fc2 for M14 is referred to determine whether or not to execute the central route suggestion effect (see FIG. 232(b)) and the execution timing (S41005), and the process proceeds to S41006.

In the process of S41006 executed after the process of either S41004 or S41005, data indicating the effect timing determined by the process of S41004 or S41005 is stored in the effect timing storage area 223fa (S41006), and this process is executed. finish.

Next, with reference to FIG. 251, details of the operation content command processing (S44014) described above will be described. This operation content command process (S44014) is one process in the win-related process 14 (see FIG. 249), and as described above, is a process for executing control according to the operation content indicated by the received command. . In the operation content command process (S44014), first, the data in the effect timing storage area 223fa is read (S41101), and the start timing of the suggestive effect corresponding to the read data is the operating member notified by the current operation content command. (S41102). In the process of S41102, when an operation content command indicating closing of the upper opening/closing door 6755bU is received in a state in which the V winning rate period of 50% is set as the effect timing, and when the V winning rate period of 100% is received as the effect timing. In the set state, when an operation content command indicating opening of the lower opening/closing door 6755bD is received, it is determined that the production timing is matched.

In the processing of S41102, if it is determined that the operation timing of the operation content notified by the command and the start timing of the suggestive effect match (S41102: Yes), the execution of the suggestive effect is set (S41103), and this End the process. On the other hand, in the processing of S41102, if it is determined that the operation timing of the operation content notified by the command and the start timing of the suggestive effect do not match (S41102: No), this processing ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 252, details of the variable display setting process 14 (S4194) in the eleventh embodiment will be described. This variable display setting process 14 (S4194) is one process in the main process 14 (see FIG. 241). (see reference). Of the variable display setting process 14 (S4194) in the eleventh embodiment, each process of S4501 to S4509 corresponds to S4501 to S4501 of the variable display setting process (see FIG. 38) in the tenth embodiment (and the first embodiment). The same processing as each processing of S4509 is executed.

In addition, in the variable display setting process 14 (see FIG. 252) in the eleventh embodiment, after the process of S4504 is completed, the variable pattern (variable display effect) set in the process of S4504 is changed to include the operation support effect. It is determined whether or not it is a variation pattern (S4541), and if it is determined that it is a variation pattern accompanied by an operation support effect (S4541: Yes), a support effect setting process for setting the operation support effect is executed. (S4542), the process proceeds to S4543. Details of the support effect setting process (S4542) will be described later with reference to FIG. On the other hand, in the process of S4541, when it is determined that the variation pattern does not involve the operation support effect (S4541: No), the process of S4542 is skipped and the process proceeds to S4543.

In the process of S4543, an action timing determination process is executed to determine whether or not the mini character announcement effect can be executed and the execution timing by lottery (S4543), and the process proceeds to S4505. The details of this action timing determination process (S4543) will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, with reference to FIG. 253, the details of the support effect setting process (S4542) described above will be described. This support effect setting process (S4542) is, as described above, a process for setting the operation support effect. In this cheering effect setting process (S4542), first, the cheering effect flag 223fc is set to ON (S41201), and then the value of the pressing frequency counter 223fe is read out (S41202). Then, from the read value of the pressing number counter 223fe, the average pressing number (A) of one operation support effect in the variable display for which the previous operation support effect was set is calculated (S41203). Here, the operation support effect is executed two to four times during one variation period according to the variation type. Specifically, in the normal reach fluctuation pattern, it is executed twice before developing into normal reach and after developing into normal reach, and in the super reach fluctuation pattern, before developing into normal reach, after developing into normal reach, and super It is executed 3 times after developing into Reach, and in the variation pattern of Special Reach, it is executed 4 times before developing into Normal Reach, after developing into Normal Reach, after developing into Super Reach, and after developing into Special Reach. . In the process of S41203, if the variation type of the variable display accompanied by the operation cheering effect executed last time is the normal reach, the value obtained by dividing the value of the number-of-presses counter 223fe by 2 is calculated as the average number of operations (A). If it is reach, the value divided by 3 is calculated as the average number of operations (A), and if it is special reach, the value of the press number counter 223fe divided by 4 is calculated as the average number of operations (A). do.

When the processing of S41203 ends, next, the average number of operations (A) calculated in the processing of S41203 is a value of 5 or less (that is, the average number of operations of the player in the previous operation support effect is 5 or less). (S41204), and if it is determined to be 5 or less (S41204: Yes), the operation frequency flag 223ff is set to "02H" indicating "low operation frequency" (S41205). , the process proceeds to S41209. On the other hand, in the process of S41204, if it is determined that the average number of operations (A) is a value greater than 5 (S41204: No), then the average number of operations (A) is a value of 9 or less. It is determined whether or not (S41206).

In the process of S41206, if it is determined that the average number of operations (A) is a value of 9 or less (S41206: Yes), the operation frequency flag 223ff is set to "01H" indicating "moderate operation frequency" ( S41207), and the process proceeds to S41209. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S41206 that the average number of operations (A) is a value of 10 or more (S41206: No), the operation frequency flag 223ff is set to "00H" indicating "frequent operations". (S41208), the process proceeds to S41209. In the process of S41209, the value of the number-of-presses counter 223fe is reset to 0 (S41209), and the process ends.

By executing this cheering effect setting process (see FIG. 253), the operation frequency flag 223ff can be updated based on the player's pressing tendency in the variable display accompanied by the previous operation cheering effect. Therefore, when the operation support effect is actually started and the center button CB is pressed, the character mode can be appropriately set according to the tendency of the operation.

In the eleventh embodiment, the value of the press count counter 223fe is held until the start timing of the variable display at which the operation support effect is executed next, and the held value of the press count counter 223fe is held. , the state of the operation frequency flag 223ff is set at the start of the variable display in which the operation support effect is set, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, at the end of the variable display in which the operation support effect is set, the state of the operation frequency flag 223ff is set based on the value of the pressing number counter 223fe, and only the state of the operation frequency flag 223ff is changed to the next operation support effect. may be held until the variable display for which is set is executed. By configuring in this way, the processing load at the start of fluctuation can be reduced. In addition, in the eleventh embodiment, the number of times the center button CB is pressed during the valid period of operation is simply counted to discriminate the tendency of the player's number of times of operation. is not limited to this. Instead of or in addition to this, for example, it is determined whether there is a high tendency to press the center button CB in the first half of the operation effective period, a high tendency to press the center button CB in the latter half, or a tendency to press the center button CB evenly. Alternatively, the determination ratio of the character mode with a high expectation of development or a big win may be switched between a period during which it is determined that the player tends to press the key and a period during which this is not the case. By increasing the decision ratio of the character mode with high expectation during the period when the pressing tendency is high, it is possible to set an appropriate display mode according to the tendency of each player. Conversely, by increasing the determination ratio of the character mode with high expectation during a period when the player has a low tendency to press, the player can be encouraged to try an unusual pressing method. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

Next, with reference to FIG. 254, the action timing determination process (S4543) described above will be described. As described above, this action timing determination process is a process for determining whether or not the mini character announcement effect can be executed and the execution timing by lottery. In this action timing determination process (S4543), first, it is determined whether or not the current variation pattern is a small per variation pattern (S41301), and if it is determined that it is not a small per variation pattern (S41301: No ), and then it is determined whether or not the fluctuation pattern is out of short (S41302). In the process of S41302, if it is determined that the variation pattern is short or short (S41302: Yes), the variation pattern has no possibility of executing the mini-character announcement effect, and the process ends as it is.

On the other hand, in the process of S41302, if it is determined that the variation pattern is not short or short (S41302: No), the non-small win table 222fb3 is used as a data table for determining the effect mode (action timing) of the mini character preview effect. (See FIG. 237(b)) is read out (S41303), and the process proceeds to S41307.

On the other hand, in the process of S41301, if it is determined that the variation pattern to be executed this time is a variation pattern for a small hit (S41301: Yes), it is determined whether it is a variation pattern corresponding to a small V challenge. (S41304), if it is determined that the variation pattern corresponds to the V challenge small win (S41304: Yes), a data table for determining the effect mode (action timing) of the mini character preview effect is used for the V challenge small win. The table 222fb1 (see FIG. 236(b)) is read out (S41305), and this processing ends.

On the other hand, in the processing of S41304, if it is determined that the current variation pattern is not a variation pattern corresponding to the V challenge small win (S41304: No), data for determining the effect mode (action timing) of the mini character preview effect As a table, the normal small winning table 222fb2 (see FIG. 237(a)) is read (S41306), and the process proceeds to S41307.

In the process of S41307, from the table read out by the process of any of S41303, S41305, or S41306, the effect mode corresponding to the value of the effect lottery counter 223ea (whether or not the mini character announcement effect can be executed, and the action timing when it is executed) is determined. ) is specified (S41307), and then it is determined whether execution of the mini-character announcement effect is specified in the process of S41307 (S41308). In the process of S41308, if it is determined that execution of the mini character preview effect is specified (S41308: Yes), the mini character flag 223fg is set to ON (S41309), and the action timing corresponding to the effect mode specified in the process of S41307 is set. The indicated data is stored in the action timing storage area 223fh (S41310), and this processing ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S41308 that execution of the mini character preview effect is not specified (no mini character preview effect is executed) (S41308: No), the processes of S41309 and S41310 are skipped. End this process. By executing this action timing determination process (see FIG. 254), it is possible to set an appropriate effect mode according to the lottery result of the special symbol.

<Regarding control processing of the display control device in the eleventh embodiment>
Next, various control processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 according to the eleventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 255 and 256. FIG. First, the command determination process 14 (S6311) of the display control device 114 in the eleventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. This command determination process 14 (S6311) is a process executed instead of the command determination process (see FIG. 42) in the tenth embodiment (and first embodiment). ) is for executing control according to the type of the command received from the sound lamp control device 113, similar to the command determination processing (see FIG. 42).

Of the command determination process 14 (S6311) in the eleventh embodiment, each process of S6401 to S6420 corresponds to each of S6401 to S6420 of the command determination process (see FIG. 42) in the tenth embodiment (and the first embodiment). The same processing as each processing is executed. Further, in the command determination process 14 (S6311) in the eleventh embodiment, when it is determined in the process of S6418 that an error command is not included in the unprocessed command received from the sound lamp control device 113, (S6418: No), then it is determined whether or not the unprocessed commands include a display action command (S6431). In the processing of S6431, if it is determined that the action command for display is included in the unprocessed commands (S6431: Yes), action command processing for displaying the action of the mini character MC indicated by the action command for display. is executed (S6432), and the process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S6431 that the unprocessed commands do not include a display action command (S6431: No), the process proceeds to S6420. Details of this action command processing (S6432) will be described with reference to FIG.

FIG. 256 is a flowchart showing action command processing (S6432). In this action command processing (S6432), first, the action data corresponding to the action notified by the action command for display received from the sound lamp control device 113 is read from the action data table (S8001), and the read action data is read. , to the data already stored in the display data table buffer 233d, starting from the value of the current pointer 233f (S8002).

When the process of S8002 ends, the transfer action data table corresponding to the set action data (display data table) is determined, and the contents defined in the determined transfer action data table are stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e. On the other hand, the value of the current pointer 233f is added as the starting point (S8003), and this processing ends.

By executing this action command process (see FIG. 256). The display data for displaying the action notified by the display action command can be accurately added to the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table buffer 233e. A mini-character announcement effect can be preferably executed without affecting the display mode of the effect.

As described above, the pachinko machine 10 according to the eleventh embodiment is configured to be capable of executing various entertainment effects such as an operation support effect, a mini character advance notice effect, and a central route suggestion effect. The operation support effect is a effect in which a character image indicating various expectations is displayed in a display mode each time a specific condition is satisfied (the player presses the center button CB) during the effect period. By executing this operation support effect, the player who wants to know various expectations in the variable effect being executed is made to play the game so that the specific conditions are likely to be established (positive center button CB can be pressed (operated), it is possible to increase the willingness of the player to participate in the game. In addition, the operation support effect is configured to be executed multiple times for the same variable effect (variable display), and the timing at which the operation support effect is executed (before all developments are completed or after The selection ratio of the character mode to be displayed when the player presses the center button CB is varied depending on whether or not there is any. More specifically, in the operation support effect executed before all the developments are completed, the character mode (black stripe pattern, red stripe pattern, While the proportion set to the pattern) is high, the proportion set to the character mode, which increases the expectation of a big win, is extremely low. As a result, in the operation cheering performance executed before the final development is completed, there is almost no difference in the character mode displayed in the case of a big win or in the case of a loss, so at least the final development is completed. Until then, the player can play the game without spoiling the expectation for the big win. In addition, although the selection rate of a character mode that increases the expectation of a big win is low, the expectation of a big win increases when it is selected. is displayed, the center button CB can be pressed. Therefore, it is possible to improve the willingness of the player to participate in the operation support presentation. Further, in the eleventh embodiment, the number of times the player presses the center button CB in the operation support effect is counted, and the average number of operations in one operation support effect is calculated. And, according to the average number of times of operation, the selection ratio of each character mode per depression of the central button CB is made different. That is, when a player who presses less frequently is playing a game, the selection ratio of the character mode indicating that the expectation of a big win is high and the character mode indicating that the expectation of development is high is increased. When a player who frequently presses down is playing a game, the selection ratio of the character mode indicating that the degree of expectation for a big win is high and the character mode indicating that the degree of expectation for development is high is reduced. . By configuring in this way, it is possible to equalize the number of times of display of the character mode indicating that the degree of expectation is high in the operation support performance regardless of the tendency of the player's operation, so that a more suitable performance is realized. be able to. Furthermore, by playing a game method in which the player intentionally changes the tendency of the operation for each variable display, unique game characteristics can be realized. That is, when it is determined that the degree of expectation for a big win is low from the aspect of the variable display effect until the operation support effect is executed, the game method of not participating in the operation support effect is selected, while the expectation for the big win is selected. By selecting the game method of participating in the operation support effect only when it is determined that the degree of operation support effect is likely to be high, when the player participates in the operation support effect, it is determined that the player has a low operation frequency. The possibility that the character mode will be drawn by lottery increases. In other words, when the player participates in the operation support presentation, it is possible to form a state in which the player is likely to select a highly anticipated character mode in the case of a big win with a high probability, so that the player evenly participates in the operation support presentation. It is possible to increase the display probability of a character mode with a high degree of expectation. Therefore, it is possible to provide game characteristics that allow more accurate prediction of whether or not a big win will occur.

Also, the mini-character preview effect is a kind of effect suggesting execution of the V-challenge. In this mini-character advance notice effect, the player is notified that the V-challenge will be executed when the mini-character MC completes all the first to third actions. In addition, the mini character preview effect has multiple types (low expectation, medium expectation, and high expectation) with different expectations for the execution of the V challenge, and the contents of the action itself of the mini character MC are the same. However, the timing at which the action is executed is configured differently for each degree of expectation. As a result, the image data itself used for displaying the action of the mini character MC can be shared, so that the storage capacity of the character ROM 234 of the display control device 114 can be reduced. Furthermore, in the variable display in which the mini-character advance notice performance is set, when the action timing for the high expectation is set, the first action is executed across the timing of development to the ready-to-win performance with the higher expectation. Therefore, for the player who confirmed by comparing the progress of the first action and the variable display mode of the third symbol, it is decided whether or not it will develop into a ready-to-win effect with a higher degree of expectation. It can be made to feel that the end timing of the first action is likely to be later. Here, in the eleventh embodiment, the action timing is set so that the variable display does not end during the action of the mini character MC. Therefore, it is possible for a player who is playing a game with an understanding of this specification to perceive that the performance will develop before the actual development timing comes. Therefore, it is possible to provide the player with a novel way of enjoying playing the game while comparing the progress of the variable display and the progress of the action of the mini character MC. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

Furthermore, the central route suggesting performance is performed in synchronization with the V winning rate of 50% period or the V winning rate of 100% period in the small winning type that becomes a time-saving jackpot when the V winning occurs. In other words, the game ball entering the lottery device 6755, the period during which it becomes easier to flow down to the distribution rotor 6755f, or the period during which it is distributed to the right V winning opening 6755bV, and the time saving state is easily given It is a production that suggests By executing this central route suggesting effect, the game can be played with a strong expectation that the game ball will enter the lottery device 6755 during execution of the central route suggesting effect. Therefore, by comparing the entry timing of the game ball to the lottery device 6755 and the execution status of the central route suggestion effect (display mode of the third symbol display device 81), it is possible to predict whether or not the time saving state will occur. Since it can be realized, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In the eleventh embodiment, the frequency of operations on the center button CB is determined in units of variable display and the state of the operation frequency flag 223ff is updated, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a configuration may be adopted in which the frequency of operations is determined for each operation support presentation and the state of the operation frequency flag 223ff is updated. As a result, the player's pressing tendency can be determined more accurately, so that the selection ratio of each character mode can be set more favorably.

In the eleventh embodiment, the same data table is read every time from the character mode selection table 222fa if the special symbol lottery result (whether or not it is a big hit) and the state of the development completion flag 223fd are the same. However, it is not limited to this. For example, a plurality of tables may be defined for each combination of the special symbol lottery result and the state of the development completion flag 223fd, and one table may be selected by lottery. That is, a table in which green characters and red characters are less likely to be selected as a character mode is selected in spite of being a hit, and a table in which green characters and red characters are relatively likely to be selected in spite of being a loser is selected. It is good also as a structure which can be carried out. By configuring in this way, it is possible to further diversify the mode of presentation. In addition, instead of changing the table only according to the combination of the special pattern lottery result and the state of the development completion flag 223fd, for example, a different table is referred to according to the variation pattern or the mode of the selected variation display effect. It is also possible to use a configuration in which the character mode is determined by Furthermore, in the eleventh embodiment, as the state of the development completion flag 223fd, only two states, that is, whether or not all development has been completed, are possible. It is good also as a structure which switches.

In the eleventh embodiment, the table selected from the character mode selection table 222fa is different depending on whether it is a hit or a miss. A configuration in which different tables are selected may be used. In this case, it is also possible to provide a character mode (for example, yellow characters) that is easier to set in the case of a V challenge small win than in the case of a hit or a miss. By constructing in this way, it is possible to realize a game property that allows the player to predict whether the lottery result of the special symbol is a big win, a small win, or a loss. Interest can be improved. Further, it is also possible to change the selection ratio of the character mode in accordance with the V winning rate in the case of a small V challenge win.

In the eleventh embodiment, in the case of the V challenge small win, the action timing of the mini-character announcement effect is determined by referring to a common table regardless of the small win type, but this is not the only option. is not. For example, the action timing may be selected in consideration of not only whether or not the V challenge small win is won, but also the small win type (V winning rate) of the V challenge small win. By configuring in this way, it is possible to realize predictable playability from the timing of the action of the mini character MC to the type of V challenge small win, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In the eleventh embodiment, the execution period of the operation support effect (remaining time until the operation support effect ends) is not suggested (notified) to the player, but the execution period of the operation support effect is set by a timer. The configuration may be such that the player is suggested (notified) by display, indicator display, or the like. By configuring in this way, the player can easily grasp the execution period of the operation support effect, so that the player's convenience can be improved. In this case, the execution period of the operation support effect may be displayed by the character image 814 . Specifically, for example, the remaining effect period of the operation support effect at the time when the depression of the center button CB is detected is determined, and a character image 814 simulating characters corresponding to the remaining effect period is displayed. good too. That is, when the center button CB is pressed with 1.2 seconds remaining, a character image simulating the characters "1.2" may be displayed in a character mode determined by lottery when the button is pressed. good. Further, for example, as the remaining time decreases, the appearance of the character 813 resembling a bird becomes transparent. can be configured to By configuring in this way, the player can easily understand the remaining time of the operation support effect. Therefore, convenience for the player can be further improved.

<Twelfth Embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the twelfth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 257 to 267. FIG. In the pachinko machine 10 of the eleventh embodiment described above, every time the player presses the center button CB, the character mode of the character image 814 indicating the degree of expectation for a big win or the degree of expectation for development is displayed in the operation support presentation. was configured to display During the period from 1 second before the start of the execution period of the operation support effect to 1 second after the end, the operation of the non-effect buttons arranged around the center button CB is restricted (twice (The settings corresponding to the button whose pressing is detected are not changed unless the button is pressed.)

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the twelfth embodiment, during the execution period of the operation support effect, the player is instructed by operating the operation button 230 whether to participate in the operation support effect or change the setting of the pachinko machine 10. It is configured so that it can be selected. As a result, it is possible to more reliably prevent (suppress) the setting of the pachinko machine 10 from being changed against the player's will due to an erroneous operation by a player who intends to participate in the operation support presentation.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the ninth to eleventh embodiments described above, after one or more game balls enter the lottery device 6755 in the small win, all the entered game balls are discharged. Alternatively, when 8 seconds have passed since the start of the small winning, the condition for ending the small winning game is satisfied, and the small winning is ended. However, with this configuration, for example, there is a possibility that a game ball that has entered the lottery device 6755 may be fraudulently guided to an advantageous flow path (central route) using a magnet or the like. be. That is, by attracting the game ball that entered the lottery device 6755 from the front side of the game board 13 (the front side of the glass unit 16) by the attractive force of the magnet, the game ball is floated with respect to the guide flow path 6755b, and opened and closed upward. Regardless of the open/closed state of the door 6755bU and the ball discharge door 6755c, there is a possibility that a fraudulent act of passing over these and guiding them to the sorting rotor 6755f may be performed.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the twelfth embodiment, the upper opening/closing door 6755bU and the ball discharge door 6755c are installed in order to suppress fraudulent acts of attracting game balls from the front side of the game board 13 using magnets or the like. The arrangement is such that it is less likely to be affected by the attractive force due to the magnetic force emitted from the front side of the glass unit 16. - 特許庁In addition, a game ball that has entered the lottery device 6755 is forcibly guided to the flow path on the side of the distribution rotor 6755f using a magnet or the like. A configuration is adopted in which the small winning effective period is set so that the small winning is finished before the ball enters the mouth. In other words, even if all the game balls that entered the lottery device 6755 did not reach any ball entrance (remained in the lottery device 6755), a specific period from the start of the small hit (for example, 6.5 seconds) has passed, the small winning is terminated. In other words, the game ball that has flowed down in the lottery device 6755 without the intervention of an external force such as magnetic force (only by gravity or the inclination of the guide channel 6755b) can easily enter any of the ball entrances. , a configuration for setting an effective period during which it is difficult for a game ball guided in a direction different from the original by forcibly (forcibly) changing the flowing direction by a magnet or the like to reach any of the ball entrances. did.

The pachinko machine 10 according to the twelfth embodiment differs in configuration from the pachinko machine 10 according to the eleventh embodiment in that the internal structure of the lottery device 6755 is partially changed, and the sound lamp control device 113 The only difference is that the configurations of the ROM 222 and the RAM 223 are partially changed, and the control processing executed by the MPU 231 of the sound lamp control device 114 is partially changed. Other configurations, various processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, other processes executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113, and various processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 are described in 11th It is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in the embodiment. Hereinafter, the same elements as in the eleventh embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals, and illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

First, referring to FIG. 257, the internal structure of the lottery device 6755 of the pachinko machine 10 in the twelfth embodiment will be described. 257 is a top view of the guiding channel 6755b of the lottery device 6755. FIG. As shown in FIG. 257, of the guiding flow path 6755b in the twelfth embodiment, the opening/closing door 6755bU, the ball discharge door 6755c (and the discharge area 6755d provided below it), and the ball stopper 6755e are It is provided on the back side in the front view compared to other portions of the guide channel 6755b. Therefore, when trying to guide a game ball to the distribution rotor 6755f by a magnet or the like from the front side of the glass unit 16 on the game board 13, the game ball reaches the upper opening/closing door 6755bU or the ball discharge door 6755c. The distance to the glass unit 16 can be lengthened before and after the operation. That is, in a state in which the upper opening/closing door 6755bU and the ball discharge door 6755c are opened by a magnet or the like (a state in which the distribution rotor 6755f cannot be reached in a regular game method), the game ball is guided to the distribution rotor 6755f. When trying to do so, the distance between the magnet and the game ball can be set to the maximum when the upper opening/closing door 6755bU or the ball ejection door 6755c in the open state is reached. That is, when the game ball reaches the upper opening/closing door 6755bU or the ball ejection door 6755c in the open state, the magnetic force acting on the game ball can be weakened most, so the upper opening/closing door 6755bU or the ball ejection door 6755c in the open state can be weakened to the maximum. It can be configured so that the game ball can be easily dropped to the right out port 6755bO or the discharge area 6755d via the. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult to succeed in fraudulent acts of illegally reaching the game ball to the distribution rotating body 6755f using a magnet or the like, so that fraudulent acts can be suppressed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent unforeseen disadvantages from being given to the hole due to fraud. In addition, since the guide flow path 6755b is not straight but has a meandering shape, when a game ball is to be guided by a magnet or the like, the period required to guide it to the distribution rotor 6755f is lengthened. be able to. Therefore, before the game ball guided to the sorting rotor 6755f by fraud is guided to one of the ball entrances, the small winning game can be terminated. Therefore, the effect of deterring fraud can be further enhanced.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 258 and 259, the display mode of the operation support effect in the twelfth embodiment will be described. First, FIG. 258(a) is a diagram showing an example of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 at the start of the operation support effect in the twelfth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 258(a), when the operation cheering presentation in the twelfth embodiment is executed, a cheering button image 815a displaying the characters "cheering" below a bird-shaped character 813, A volume setting button image 815b displayed below the cheering button image 815a and displaying the characters “volume setting”, and a volume setting button image 815b displayed between the cheering button image 815a and the volume setting button image 815b and having an upward substantially equilateral triangular shape. An upper button image 815c is displayed below the upper button image 815c, and a lower button image 815d having a substantially equilateral triangular shape facing downward is displayed. In addition, the cheering button image 815a is set to look like it emits light. From these display contents, it is possible to select the item "support" by pressing the upper button UB (that is, to select to participate in the operation support presentation), and to press the lower button DB. This allows the player to intuitively understand that the item "volume setting" can be selected (that is, the volume setting can be changed). Also, by setting the cheering button image 815a to a glowing display mode, the player can intuitively understand that the item "cheering" is selected.

In the twelfth embodiment, not only the character mode of the character image 814 displayed in the display area HR11, but also the display mode (luminescent color) of the cheering button image 815a can suggest the degree of expectation for a big win. configured as possible. Although the details will be described later, the indication of the degree of expectation for a big win by the display mode of the cheering button image 815a is more likely to occur when a player who does not perform any operation is playing a game (expectation in the case of a big win). The ratio of setting to a high-intensity luminescent color is increased). As a result, it is possible to suggest the degree of expectation for a big win even to a player who does not participate in the operation support presentation, so that it is possible to prevent the game from becoming monotonous. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

FIG. 258(b) shows the third symbol display when the player further presses the up button UB while the item "cheering" is selected (the cheering button image 815a is set to have a glowing appearance). 8 is a diagram showing a display mode of the device 81; FIG. As shown in FIG. 258(b), when the player presses the up button UB with the item "cheering" selected, the character mode is determined by lottery using the character mode selection table 222fa. A character image 814 in the selected character mode is displayed. That is, each time the player presses the upper button UB with the item "cheering" selected, the degree of expectation for a big win or development is suggested, similar to the case where the center button CB is pressed in the eleventh embodiment. You can display a character image that By setting the setting at the start of the operation support effect to a state in which the item "support" is selected, the same operability as in the above-described eleventh embodiment (a specific button ( It is possible to realize the operability that a character image can be displayed each time the upper button UB) is pressed. Therefore, convenience for the player can be improved.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 259(a), when the player presses the down button DB in the state where the item "cheering" is selected, the cheering button image 815a is changed from a glowing appearance to an unlit appearance. , the appearance of the volume setting button image 815b is changed from being extinguished to being illuminated. That is, the item "volume setting" is changed to the selected state. Further, a horizontally elongated substantially rectangular display area 816 is formed on the right side of the display area HR11 when viewed from the front. This display area 816 displays an image showing the current volume setting, as shown in FIG. 259(a). That is, an image simulating a speaker is displayed, and a volume bar SB displaying the current volume setting in five levels according to the length of the bar is displayed below the image simulating the speaker. In the volume bar SB, the number of hatched bars increases as the volume is set higher, and the number of hatched bars decreases as the volume is set lower. In FIG. 259(a), of the five bars that make up the volume bar SB, the three bars from the left are set in a shaded display mode, so the volume setting is three out of five. is set to . The volume setting indicated by the volume bar SB (the number of hatched bars) is left-aligned, so that the number of hatched bars can be decreased by pressing the left button LB; This allows the player to easily understand that the number of hatched bars can be increased by pressing the right button RB. Therefore, the player can easily understand how to change the volume setting.

FIG. 259(b) is a diagram showing a display mode when the player presses the right button RB while the item "volume setting" is selected. As shown in FIG. 259(b), when the player presses the right button RB with the item "volume setting" selected, the number of hatched bars increases by one. That is, one additional hatched bar is displayed on the right side of the three hatched bars that were displayed immediately before the button was pressed. This change in display mode allows the player to easily understand that the volume setting has been changed normally.

As described above, in the operation support effect in the eleventh embodiment, the player selects the item "support" and the item "volume setting" according to the operation (pressing) of the up button UB and the down button DB. It is configured to allow When the item "support" is selected, each time the upper button UB corresponding to "support" is pressed, the character image 814 is displayed, while the right button corresponding to "volume setting" is set. Even if RB or left button LB is pressed, no setting change is made. On the other hand, when the item "volume setting" is selected, the volume setting can be changed by pressing the right button RB or the left button LB. It is configured so that the image 814 is not displayed. By configuring in this way, even if a player who tries to participate in the operation support performance accidentally presses the right button RB or the left button LB, setting changes contrary to the player's will are executed. can be suppressed. In addition, even if the player who tries to set the volume accidentally presses the up button UB or the down button DB, it is possible to prevent the character image 814 from being displayed against the player's will. can. Therefore, convenience for the player can be further improved.

In the twelfth embodiment, even if the down button DB is pressed while the item "volume setting" is selected, the display mode and settings are not changed. It is not limited to this. For example, under a specific condition, it may be configured such that the character mode of the character image 814 is drawn and displayed even when the down button DB is pressed down. More specifically, for example, when the down button DB is pressed a predetermined number of times (for example, 5 times) or more in a state where the item "volume setting" is selected, the player selects a participation method for the operation support effect. It may be determined that the character image 814 is erroneously recognized (the user misunderstands that the character image 814 is displayed by pressing the down button DB), and the character mode of the character image 814 is selected by lottery and displayed. . By configuring in this way, even a player who has continuously pressed down the down button DB due to misunderstanding or the like can be made to participate in the operation support performance, so that the player's convenience is further improved. be able to. In this case, after detecting that the lower button DB has been pressed a predetermined number of times or more, the display mode of the volume setting button image 815b may be changed to have the same appearance as the cheering button image 815a. By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the unnatural appearance of the character image 814 being displayed even though the "volume setting" is selected, so that the display mode can be made more suitable. Can be set.

Next, referring to FIG. 260, when a small prize is awarded in the special symbol lottery in the twelfth embodiment, upper opening/closing door 6755bU, lower opening/closing door 6755bD, ball stopper 6755e, and ball discharge door 6755c Operation patterns will be described. Here, in the twelfth embodiment, as in the eleventh embodiment described above, when winning a small hit, only the opening and closing operation mode (open pattern) of the small hit attacker 6755a is changed according to the small hit type. Other operating modes (upper opening/closing door 6755bU, lower opening/closing door 6755bD, ball stopper 6755e, and ball discharge door 6755c operating pattern) are configured to be common regardless of the small hit type. In FIG. 260, the operation mode of parts other than the small hit attacker 6755a, which is common regardless of the small hit type, will be described.

FIG. 260 shows the temporal change (operation pattern) of the opening/closing state of the upper opening/closing door 6755bU, the lower opening/closing door 6755bD, the ball stopper 6755e, and the ball discharge door 6755c during execution of the small winning game of the twelfth embodiment. It is a diagram. As shown in FIG. 260, the upper opening/closing door 6755bU is set to an open state as an initial state, and switches to a closed state simultaneously with the start of the small hit. This closed state (50% V winning rate period) continues for one second (that is, continues until one second elapses from the start of the small win), and switches to the open state when one second elapses after switching to the closed state. After that, the upper opening/closing door 6755bU is maintained in an open state until 1.2 seconds have elapsed since the start of the small hit, and is closed again from the time of 1.2 seconds to the time of 1.4 seconds (V winning rate 50 % period). Then, when 1.4 seconds have elapsed from the start of the small win, the state is switched to the open state again, and the open state is maintained until the end of the small win. In other words, game balls that enter the lottery device 6755 during the period from immediately after the start of the small winning to the time when 1 second has passed and from the time when 1.2 seconds have passed until the time when 1.4 seconds have passed are closed. The game ball that rolls on the upper surface of the upper opening/closing door 6755bU and flows down to the distribution rotor 6755f side (see FIG. 211 (a)), and enters the lottery device 6755 during the other period is the guidance flow path 6755b2. 211(b) and (c)). That is, in the twelfth embodiment, the 50% V winning rate period is terminated earlier than in the eleventh embodiment. In the twelfth embodiment, even if game balls remain in the lottery device 6755 when 6.5 seconds have passed since the start of the small winning, the small winning is forcibly terminated. . As a result, in the event of a fraudulent act that takes a relatively long time, such as forcibly changing the course of the game ball with a magnet or the like to guide the game ball to the distribution rotor 6755f, the distribution rotor With 6755f, it is possible to forcibly terminate the small hit before the game ball is distributed to any of the entrances. Therefore, it is possible to suppress fraudulent acts.

Further, as shown in FIG. 260, the lower opening/closing door 6755bD is set to a closed state as an initial state, and the closed state is maintained for 1.6 seconds after the start of the small win. Then, when 1.6 seconds have elapsed from the start of the small win, the state is switched to the open state (V win rate 100% period). As a result, the game ball that has flowed into the guide channel 6755b2 can enter the right V winning port 6755bV. The open state of the lower opening/closing door 6755bD continues for 0.2 seconds, and switches to the closed state after 1.8 seconds from the start of the small win. After that, the lower opening/closing door 6755bD is kept closed until 2 seconds have elapsed since the start of the small win, and is switched to the open state (V win rate 100% period) at the time of 2 seconds. This open state continues for one second. That is, the open state continues until 3 seconds have passed since the start of the small win, and the state is switched to the closed state at the time when 3 seconds have passed since the start of the small win. After that, the closed state is maintained until the small winning ends.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 260, the ball stopping portion 6755e is maintained in a closed state until 2.9 seconds have passed since the start of the small hit, and when 2.9 seconds have passed (second V winning rate After the 50% period has elapsed, it is switched to an open state (a state in which the guidance channel 6755b can flow down) from the time when 1.5 seconds have elapsed) to the end of the small hit, and again at the end of the small hit, to the closed state. can be switched. On the other hand, the ball discharge door 6755c is kept closed until 2.4 seconds have passed since the start of the small win, and when 2.4 seconds have passed (the second V winning rate 50% period has passed) After that, it is switched to the open state from the time point of 1 second) to the end of the small win, and is switched to the closed state again at the end of the small win. That is, for 2.4 seconds after the start of the small win, both the ball stopper 6755e and the ball discharge door 6755c are closed. All game balls that enter and pass through the upper surface of the closed upper opening/closing door 6755bU are stopped in the guiding flow path 6755b by the ball stopper 6755e.

In addition, when 2.4 seconds have passed since the start of the small hit, the ball discharge door 6755c is opened with the ball stopper 6755e closed, so the ball is stopped by directly contacting the right side of the ball stopper 6755e. All game balls other than the one game ball that is present fall from the opening of the ball discharge door 6755c to the discharge area 6755d and are discharged to the outside. That is, even if a plurality of game balls flowed into the lottery device 6755 during the 50% V winning rate period, after the ball discharge door 6755e was opened, the game stopped inside the lottery device 6755. It is possible to have only one sphere at most. Then, 0.5 seconds after the ball discharge door 6755c is opened, the ball stop portion 6755e is opened, so that one game ball remaining inside the lottery device 6755 is directed toward the distribution rotor 6755f. flow down By opening the ball discharge door 6755c first and then opening the ball stop part 6755e, even if two or more game balls enter the lottery device 6755 during the V winning rate 50% period, Also, the second and subsequent game balls can be ejected to the outside from the ejection area 6755d until the ball stop portion 6755e is opened. Therefore, since the number of game balls reaching the distribution rotor 6755f in one small win can be limited to one at most, the game balls entered the lottery device 6755 during the V winning rate 50% period. The V winning rate in each case can be fixed (50%) each time.

Thus, in the twelfth embodiment, the setting timing of the 50% V winning rate period is set earlier than in the tenth and eleventh embodiments. As a result, the operation timing of the ball discharge door 6755c and the ball stop portion 6755e can be made earlier than in the tenth and eleventh embodiments, so that the end timing of the small win can be made earlier. Therefore, the game balls entered into the lottery device 6755 during the V non-performing period set after the V winning rate period of 50% and the V winning rate of 100% period are illegally distributed to the rotating body 6755f by a magnet or the like. Even if it tries to induce, the small hit can be finished before the induced game ball is sorted to one of the entrances by the sorting rotor 6755f. In other words, even if a game ball is illegally entered into the V winning hole, it is difficult to execute a big win. Therefore, it is possible to enhance the effect of deterring fraud. Furthermore, in the twelfth embodiment, the timing when 6.5 seconds have passed since the start of the small hit (V winning rate 50% period) The ball entered the lottery device 6755 and flowed down to the distribution rotator 6755f It is configured to forcibly complete the small winning game in a period of sufficient length that the game ball can be distributed to one of the ball entrances. By configuring in this way, it is possible to suppress cheating using magnets or the like without affecting players who play games according to the regular game method. That is, when trying to reach the distribution rotating body 6755f by forcibly changing the flow path by attracting the game ball with a magnet or the like, the game ball will perform the normal operation (the operation of flowing down only by the action of inclination and gravity) ) to reach the distribution rotor 6755f, the period until the distribution rotor 6755f is reached becomes longer. During the period of 6.5 seconds after the start of the small hit, game balls that have reached the distribution rotor 6755f in normal operation can be distributed to any of the ball entrances without problems. It consists of a period in which it is difficult (impossible) for the game ball guided to the distribution rotor 6755f by the action to be distributed to any of the entrances. As a result, even if a magnet or the like is used to forcibly guide the game balls flowing into the lottery device 6755 to the distribution rotor 6755f, the game balls are distributed to any of the ball entrances. Since the small winning can be ended before the winning is done, the fraudulent act can be prevented from being established. Therefore, it is possible to prevent unforeseen disadvantages from being given to the hole due to fraud.

<Electrical Configuration in the Twelfth Embodiment>
Next, referring to FIG. 261(a), the configuration of the ROM 222 provided in the audio lamp control device 113 in the twelfth embodiment will be described. FIG. 261(a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM 222 in the twelfth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 261(a), the configuration of the ROM 222 in the twelfth embodiment differs from the configuration of the ROM 222 in the eleventh embodiment (see FIG. 233) in that a button mode selection table 222ga is added. are different. Other configurations are the same as those of the ROM 222 (see FIG. 233) in the eleventh embodiment described above, so detailed description thereof will be omitted here.

The button mode selection table 222ga is a data table referred to when selecting the display mode (light emission color) of the cheering button image 815a (see FIG. 258(a)) displayed in the operation cheering effect. At the start of the operation support effect, this button mode selection table 222ga is referred to, and one display mode is determined according to the lottery result of the special symbol, the player's operation status, and the like. The details of this button mode selection table 222ga will be described with reference to FIGS. 262 and 263. FIG.

FIG. 262(a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the button mode selection table 222ga. As shown in FIG. 262(a), the button mode selection table 222ga in the twelfth embodiment has a variation corresponding to a big win in a situation where a player who tends not to perform any operation in the operation support presentation is playing a game. A winning (non-operation) table 222ga1 for selecting the emission color (button color) of the cheering button image 815a in the operation support effect to be set for display, and a player who tends to operate in the operation support effect plays the game. In this situation, a win (operation) table 222ga2 for selecting the emission color (button color) of the cheering button image 815a in the operation cheering effect set for the variable display corresponding to the big win, and the operation cheering effect In a situation where a player who tends not to operate at all is playing a game, an error for selecting the emission color (button color) of the support button image 815a in the operation support effect set for the variable display corresponding to the error. In the situation where the table 222ga3 for (non-operation) and the player who tends to operate in the operation support effect are playing the game, the light emission of the support button image 815a in the operation support effect set for the variable display corresponding to the loss. and a detachment (operation) table 222ga4 for selecting a color (button color).

First, the details of the win (non-operation) table 222ga1 will be described with reference to FIG. 262(b). FIG. 262(b) is a diagram showing the defined contents of the win (non-operation) table 222ga1. As shown in FIG. 262(b), in the win (non-operation) table 222ga1, button colors are defined in association with each value range of the effect lottery counter 223ea. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 262(b), when the value of the effect lottery counter 223ea is in the range of "0 to 199", "white" is selected as the button color (display mode of the cheering button image 815a). are defined in association with each other (see 222ga1a in FIG. 262(b)). Of the 1000 possible random numbers (counter values) of the effect lottery counter 223ea, the number of random numbers (counter values) associated with the button color "white" is 200, so no operation is performed in the operation support effect. In a state in which a player with a tendency is playing a game, the ratio (probability) of setting "white" as the button color when a special symbol lottery wins a big win and an operation support effect is executed is 20% (200/1000). ).

Further, as shown in FIG. 262(b), the value of the effect lottery counter 223ea in the range of "200 to 599" is associated with "blue" as the button color (display mode of the cheering button image 815a). (see 222ga1b in FIG. 262(b)). Of the 1000 possible random numbers (counter values) of the effect lottery counter 223ea, the number of random numbers (counter values) associated with the button color "blue" is 400, so no operation is performed in the operation support effect. In a state in which a player with a tendency is playing a game, the ratio (probability) of setting "blue" as the button color when a special pattern lottery wins big and the operation support effect is executed is 40% (400/1000). ).

Further, as shown in FIG. 262(b), the value of the effect lottery counter 223ea in the range of "600 to 899" is associated with "green" as the button color (display mode of the cheering button image 815a). (see 222ga1c in FIG. 262(b)). Of the 1000 possible random numbers (counter values) of the effect lottery counter 223ea, the number of random numbers (counter values) associated with the button color "green" is 300, so no operation is performed in the operation support effect. In a state where a player with a tendency is playing a game, the ratio (probability) of setting "green" as the button color when a special pattern lottery is a big win and the operation support effect is executed is 30% (300/1000). ).

Further, as shown in FIG. 262(b), the value of the effect lottery counter 223ea in the range of "900 to 999" is associated with "red" as the button color (display mode of the cheering button image 815a). (see 222ga1d in FIG. 262(b)). Of the 1000 possible random values (counter values) of the effect lottery counter 223ea, the number of random values (counter values) associated with the button color "red" is 100, so no operation is performed in the operation support effect. In a state where a player with a tendency is playing a game, the ratio (probability) of setting "red" as the button color when a special pattern lottery results in a big win and an operation support effect is executed is 10% (100/1000). ).

In this way, under a situation where a player who tends not to perform any operation at all is playing a game, when the operation support effect is executed during the variation of the big win, the degree of expectation for the big win is low at a rate of 80%. is set to a button color other than ', and 'green' and 'red' button colors with high expectations for big wins are set at a rate of 40%. That is, when a player who tends not to perform any operation at all is playing a game, the ratio of selecting a button color with a high degree of expectation for a big win in the event of a big win is relatively high. By configuring in this way, even a player who does not participate in the operation support effect can be appropriately suggested the degree of expectation for a big win, so that the player tends not to perform the operation (not to participate in the operation support effect). The player can also be entertained with the operation support presentation. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

Next, with reference to FIG. 262(c), the details of the hit (operation) table 222ga2, which is a kind of data table constituting the button mode selection table 222ga, will be described. FIG. 262(c) is a diagram showing the defined contents of the win (operation) table 222ga2. As shown in FIG. 262(c), the value of the effect lottery counter 223ea in the range of "0 to 499" is defined in association with "white" as the button color (display mode of the cheering button image 815a). (See 222ga2a in FIG. 262(c)). Of the 1,000 possible random numbers (counter values) of the effect lottery counter 223ea, 500 random numbers (counter values) are associated with the button color "white". In the state where the player is playing the game, the ratio (probability) that "white" is set as the button color when a special symbol lottery is won and the operation support effect is executed is 50% (500/1000). be.

Further, as shown in FIG. 262(c), the value of the effect lottery counter 223ea in the range of "500 to 899" is associated with "blue" as the button color (display mode of the cheering button image 815a). (see 222ga2b in FIG. 262(c)). Of the 1000 possible random numbers (counter values) of the effect lottery counter 223ea, 400 random numbers (counter values) are associated with the button color "blue", so there is a tendency to operate in the operation support effect. In the state where the player is playing the game, the ratio (probability) of setting "blue" as the button color when the player wins big in the lottery of the special symbols and the operation support effect is executed is 40% (400/1000). be.

Further, as shown in FIG. 262(c), the value of the effect lottery counter 223ea in the range of "900 to 979" is associated with "green" as the button color (display mode of the cheering button image 815a). (see 222ga2c in FIG. 262(c)). Of the 1,000 possible random numbers (counter values) of the effect lottery counter 223ea, 80 random numbers (counter values) are associated with the button color "green". In the state where the player is playing the game, the ratio (probability) of setting "green" as the button color when a special pattern lottery is a big win and the operation support effect is executed is 8% (80/1000). be.

Further, as shown in FIG. 262(c), the value of the effect lottery counter 223ea in the range of "980 to 999" is associated with "red" as the button color (display mode of the cheering button image 815a). (see 222ga2d in FIG. 262(c)). Of the 1000 possible random numbers (counter values) of the effect lottery counter 223ea, the number of random numbers (counter values) associated with the button color "red" is 20, so there is a tendency to operate in the operation support effect. In the state where the player is playing the game, the ratio (probability) that "red" is set as the button color when a special pattern lottery is won and the operation support effect is executed is 2% (20/1000). be.

In this way, when a player who tends to perform operations during the execution of the operation support effect is playing a game, the variation of the big win is greater than when a player who does not perform any operations is playing a game. Even during execution, the ratio of selecting "white", which has the lowest degree of expectation, is high, and the selection ratio of the button color with the highest degree of expectation is greatly reduced to 10%. Therefore, it becomes difficult to predict the degree of expectation for a big win from the button color. can make you think. Therefore, it is possible to increase the willingness of the player to participate in the operation support presentation.

Next, with reference to FIG. 263(a), the details of the release (non-operation) table 222ga3 will be described. FIG. 263(a) is a diagram showing the defined contents of the disengagement (non-operation) table 222ga3. As shown in FIG. 263(a), the value of the effect lottery counter 223ea in the range of "0 to 799" is defined in association with "white" as the button color (display mode of the cheering button image 815a). (See 222ga3a in FIG. 263(a)). Of the 1000 possible random numbers (counter values) of the effect lottery counter 223ea, the number of random numbers (counter values) associated with the button color "white" is 800, so no operation is performed in the operation support effect. In the state where the tending player is playing the game, the rate (probability) that "white" is set as the button color when the special symbol lottery is lost and the operation support effect is executed is 80% (800/1000). ).

Further, as shown in FIG. 263(a), the value of the effect lottery counter 223ea in the range of "800 to 949" is associated with "blue" as the button color (display mode of the cheering button image 815a). (see 222ga3b in FIG. 263(a)). Of the 1000 possible random numbers (counter values) of the effect lottery counter 223ea, the number of random numbers (counter values) associated with the button color "blue" is 150, so no operation is performed in the operation support effect. In a state in which a player with a tendency is playing a game, the ratio (probability) that "blue" is set as the button color when the special symbol lottery is lost and the operation support effect is executed is 15% (150/1000). ).

Further, as shown in FIG. 263(a), the value of the effect lottery counter 223ea in the range of "950 to 998" is associated with "green" as the button color (display mode of the cheering button image 815a). (see 222ga3c in FIG. 263(a)). Of the 1000 possible random numbers (counter values) of the effect lottery counter 223ea, the number of random numbers (counter values) associated with the button color "green" is 49, so no operation is performed in the operation support effect. In a state in which a player with a tendency is playing a game, the rate (probability) that "green" is set as the button color when the special symbol lottery is lost and the operation support effect is executed is 4.9% (49%). /1000).

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 263(a), the value of the effect lottery counter 223ea of "999" is defined in association with "red" as the button color (display mode of the cheering button image 815a). (See 222ga3d in FIG. 263(a)). Of the 1000 possible random values (counter values) of the effect lottery counter 223ea, the random value (counter value) associated with the button color "red" is 1, so no operation is performed in the operation support effect. In a state in which a player with a tendency is playing a game, the rate (probability) that "red" is set as the button color when the special symbol lottery is lost and the operation support effect is executed is 0.1% (1 /1000).

In this way, when a player who does not participate in the operation support effect (does not operate the buttons) is playing a game and loses the special symbol lottery, the button color "white" is selected at a high rate. On the other hand, the selection ratio of “green” and “red”, which have high expectations, will drop significantly. Therefore, it is possible to provide the playability of predicting the degree of expectation for a big win from the button color.

Next, with reference to FIG. 263(b), the details of the disengagement (operation) table 222ga4 will be described. FIG. 263(b) is a diagram showing the defined contents of the disengagement (operation) table 222ga4. As shown in FIG. 263(b), the value of the effect lottery counter 223ea in the range of "0 to 599" is defined in association with "white" as the button color (display mode of the cheering button image 815a). (See 222ga4a in FIG. 263(b)). Of the 1,000 possible random numbers (counter values) of the effect lottery counter 223ea, 600 random numbers (counter values) are associated with the button color "white". In the state where the player is playing the game, the ratio (probability) that "white" is set as the button color when the special symbol lottery is lost and the operation support effect is executed is 60% (600/1000). be.

Further, as shown in FIG. 263(b), the value of the effect lottery counter 223ea in the range of "600 to 949" is associated with "blue" as the button color (display mode of the cheering button image 815a). (see 222ga4b in FIG. 263(b)). Of the 1000 possible random numbers (counter values) of the effect lottery counter 223ea, the number of random numbers (counter values) associated with the button color "blue" is 350, so there is a tendency to operate in the operation support effect. In the state where the player is playing the game, the rate (probability) of setting "blue" as the button color when the special symbol lottery is lost and the operation support effect is executed is 35% (350/1000). be.

Further, as shown in FIG. 263(b), the value of the effect lottery counter 223ea in the range of "950 to 997" is associated with "green" as the button color (display mode of the cheering button image 815a). (see 222ga4c in FIG. 263(b)). Of the 1000 possible random numbers (counter values) of the effect lottery counter 223ea, 48 random numbers (counter values) are associated with the button color "green", so there is a tendency to operate in the operation support effect. While the player is playing the game, the ratio (probability) of setting "green" as the button color when the special symbol lottery is lost and the operation support effect is executed is 4.8% (48/1000). ).

Further, as shown in FIG. 263(b), the value of the effect lottery counter 223ea is in the range of "998, 999", and "red" is associated as the button color (display mode of the cheering button image 815a). (see 222ga4d in FIG. 263(b)). Of the 1000 possible random numbers (counter values) of the effect lottery counter 223ea, the number of random numbers (counter values) associated with the button color "red" is 2, so there is a tendency to operate in the operation support effect. In the state where the player is playing the game, the ratio (probability) of setting "red" as the button color when a special pattern lottery is won and the operation support effect is executed is 0.2% (2/1000). ).

In this way, even under a situation where a player who participates in the operation support effect (operates a button) is playing a game, it is better to select the button color "white" when the special symbol lottery is lost. While the ratio increases, the selection ratio of “green” and “red”, which have high expectations, decreases. Therefore, it is possible to provide the game property of predicting the degree of expectation of a big win from the button color, although the difference between a big win and a big win is smaller than when a player who does not operate at all plays the game.

Next, with reference to FIG. 261(b), the configuration of the RAM 223 provided in the sound lamp control device 113 according to the twelfth embodiment will be described. FIG. 261(b) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 223 in the twelfth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 261(b), the configuration of the RAM 223 in the twelfth embodiment has a cursor position storage area 223ga added to the configuration of the RAM 223 in the eleventh embodiment (see FIG. 233(b)). There is a difference. Other configurations are the same as those of the RAM 223 in the eleventh embodiment described above, so detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The cursor position storage area 223ga is a storage area for storing information indicating an item (cursor position) selected by the player during execution of the operation support effect. When "00H" is stored in this cursor position storage area 223ga, it indicates that the item "support" is selected, and when "01H" is stored, the item "volume setting" is selected. Indicates the selected state. This cursor position storage area 223ga is updated with data corresponding to the item each time the player selects a different item during execution of the operation support effect.

<Regarding control processing of the sound lamp control device in the twelfth embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 264 to 267, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the sound ramp control device 113 in the twelfth embodiment will be described. First, with reference to FIG. 264, operation support effect processing 15 (S40301) in the twelfth embodiment will be described. This operation support effect process 15 (S40301) is a process executed instead of the operation support effect process (see FIG. 243) in the eleventh embodiment, and is similar to the operation support effect process (see FIG. 243) in the eleventh embodiment. Similarly, this is a process for updating the effect mode in the variable display in which the operation support effect is set.

Of the operation support effect processing 15 (see FIG. 264) in the twelfth embodiment, each process of S40401 to S40409 corresponds to each process of S40401 to S40409 of the operation support effect process (see FIG. 243) in the eleventh embodiment. The same processing is performed. In addition, in the operation support effect processing 15 (see FIG. 264) in the twelfth embodiment, when the processing of S40405 is completed, the lottery result of this special symbol and the operation of the player are selected from the button mode selection table 222ga. A table corresponding to the situation (state of the operation frequency flag 223ff) is read (S40421), and the button color corresponding to the value of the effect lottery counter 223ea is specified from the read table (S40422). When the processing of S40422 ends, the processing moves to S40406. In the twelfth embodiment, a state (“03H”) indicating that no operation is performed is added as the state of the operation frequency flag 223ff. In the process of S40421, depending on whether or not the state of the operation frequency flag 223ff is "03H", it is determined whether to select a non-operation table (hit (non-operation) table 222ga1 or loss (non-operation) table 222ga3). Whether or not is variable.

Next, with reference to FIG. 265, details of various setting button input monitoring processing 15 (S4195) in the twelfth embodiment will be described. The various setting button input monitoring process 15 (S4195) in the twelfth embodiment is a process executed in place of the various setting button input monitoring process (see FIG. 247) in the eleventh embodiment. Similar to the setting button input monitoring process (see FIG. 247), the operation (pressing) of the non-rendering button (the button for changing the settings of volume and light intensity) is monitored, and if the operation is detected, the operation is detected. This is a process for changing settings according to the type of button that has been performed.

In the processing of S40801 and S40808 of the various setting button input monitoring processing 15 (see FIG. 265) in the twelfth embodiment, S40801 and S40808 of the various setting button input monitoring processing (see FIG. 247) in the eleventh embodiment, respectively. and S40808 are executed. Further, in the various setting button input monitoring process 15 (see FIG. 265) in the twelfth embodiment, when it is determined in the process of S40801 that any non-effect button has been pressed (S40801: Yes), Next, it is determined whether or not the operation valid period flag 223fb is ON (S40811). If it is determined in the process of S40811 that the operation valid period flag 223fb is off (S40811: No), the process proceeds to S40808. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S40811 that the valid period flag 223fb is ON, then it is determined whether or not pressing of the up button UB or the down button DB was detected in the process of S40801. (S40812).

In the processing of S40812, if it is determined that pressing of the up button UB or down button DB has been detected (S40812: Yes), the cursor position (selected item) at the time of button pressing and the type of button whose pressing was detected Up/down button press processing for executing control according to the above is executed (S40813), and this processing ends. The details of this up/down button pressing process (S40813) will be described later with reference to FIG. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S40812 that neither the up button UB nor the down button DB has been pressed this time (S40812: No), then it is determined whether the pressing of the right button RB or the left button LB has been detected. Determine (S40814).

In the processing of S40814, if it is determined that the pressing of the right button RB or the left button LB is detected (S40814: Yes), the cursor position (selected item) at the time of button pressing and the type of button whose pressing is detected. The left and right button pressing processing for executing the control corresponding to is executed (S40815), and the present processing ends. The details of the left/right button pressing process (S40815) will be described later with reference to FIG. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S40814 that neither the right button RB nor the left button LB has been pressed this time (S40814: No), this process ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 266, the details of the process when the up/down button is pressed (S40813) will be described. FIG. 266 is a flow chart showing the process when the up/down button is pressed (S40813). As described above, this up/down button pressing process (S40813) is performed when either the up button UB or the down button DB is pressed in the operation support effect, and the cursor position (selected item) at the time of button pressing is displayed. , and the type of button whose depression is detected.

In the up/down button pressing process (see FIG. 266), first, the data in the cursor position storage area 223ga is read (S41401), and the read data indicates the upper cursor position (the "support" item is selected). (that is, "00H") (S41402). In the process of S41402, if it is determined that the data stored in the cursor position storage area 223ga is the data indicating the upper cursor position (S41402: Yes), then whether or not the up button UB has been pressed is detected. is determined (S41403).

If it is determined in the process of S41403 that the up button UB has been pressed (S41403: Yes), then character mode setting processing (see FIG. 245) is executed to draw a lottery for the character mode corresponding to the pressing. At the same time, the display of the character image 814 in the character mode determined by lottery is set (S41404), and this processing is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S41403 that the up button UB was not pressed (that is, the down button DB was pressed) (S41403: No), the volume setting button image 815b is set to the light emission mode (S41405). , the data in the cursor position storage area 223ga is updated to "01H" (S41406), and this processing ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S41402 that the data stored in the cursor position storage area 223ga is not the data indicating the upper cursor position (the data indicates the lower cursor position) (S41402: No), and then it is determined whether or not pressing of the up button UB has been detected (S41407). In the process of S41407, if it is determined that the up button UB has been pressed (S41407: Yes), then the support button image 815a is set to the light emitting mode (S41408), and the data in the cursor position storage area 223ga is set to " 00H" (S41409), and this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S41407 that the up button UB has not been pressed (that is, the down button DB has been pressed) (S41407: No), this process ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 267, the details of the processing when the left and right buttons are pressed (S40815) will be described. As described above, this left/right button pressing process (S40815) is performed when either the left button LB or the right button RB is pressed in the operation support effect, and the cursor position (selected item) when the button is pressed is displayed. , and the type of button whose depression is detected.

In this left/right button pressing process (see FIG. 267), first, the data stored in the cursor position storage area 223ga is read (S41501), and the read data is displayed at the lower cursor position ("volume setting" item). It is determined whether or not the data (that is, "01H") indicates the selected state (S41502). In the processing of S41502, if it is determined that the data (“01H”) indicating the lower cursor position has been read (S41502: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the pressing of the right button RB has been detected ( S41503).

In the process of S41503, when it is determined that the pressing of the right button RB is detected (S41503: Yes), the volume setting of the pachinko machine 10 is increased by one level, and the volume bar displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed. The number (the number of hatched bars) is incremented by 1 (S41504), and the process ends. Note that if the volume setting is at the maximum value (five steps) at the time the right button RB is pressed, the processing of S41504 is skipped because the volume setting cannot be increased any more. On the other hand, in the process of S41503, when it is determined that the pressing of the left button LB is detected (S41503: No), the volume setting of the pachinko machine 10 is decreased by one level, and the volume displayed on the third symbol display device 81 The number of bars is decremented by 1 (S41505), and this processing ends. If the volume setting is at the minimum value (one step) at the time the left button LB is pressed, the processing of S41505 is skipped because the volume setting cannot be decreased any further.

On the other hand, in the processing of S41502, if it is determined that the data (“00H”) indicating the upper cursor position has been read (S41502: No), the “support” item is selected. This means that the right button RB or the left button LB has been pressed (an operation corresponding to changing the volume setting has been performed in a state in which the volume setting cannot be changed). This process is terminated as it is.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the twelfth embodiment, whether to participate in the operation support effect or change the settings of the pachinko machine 10 is determined by operating the operation button 230 during the execution period of the operation support effect. It is configured so that the person can choose. Specifically, during execution of the operation support effect, the item "support" (support button image 815a) and the item "volume setting" (volume setting button image 815b) are displayed on the third pattern display device 81. is displayed, and the player can select any item by operating the up button UB and the down button DB. More specifically, each time the upper button UB is pressed with the item "cheering" selected, a character image 814 suggesting the degree of expectation for a big win or development is displayed, while the "volume setting is selected, the volume setting of the pachinko machine 10 can be changed by pressing the right button RB or the left button LB. Further, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the twelfth embodiment, even if an operation corresponding to another item is performed in a state where item 1 is selected, control corresponding to the other item is avoided. Configure. That is, even if the right button RB or the left button LB is pressed while the item "support" is selected, control to change the volume setting is avoided (restricted). Further, even if the up button UB is pressed while the item "volume setting" is selected, the item "support" is simply selected. That is, control to display the character image 814 is avoided (restricted). As a result, it is possible to more reliably prevent (suppress) the setting of the pachinko machine 10 from being changed against the player's will due to an erroneous operation by a player who is going to participate in the operation support presentation.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the twelfth embodiment, in addition to the character mode of the character image 814 displayed in the display area HR11 during execution of the operation support effect, the display mode (luminescent color) of the support button image 815a , is configured to be able to suggest the degree of expectation for a big hit. In addition, the display mode of the cheering button image 815a is more likely to suggest the degree of expectation for a big win when a player who does not perform any operation is playing a game (in the case of a big win, the luminescent color with a high degree of expectation is used). set ratio is higher). As a result, it is possible to suggest the degree of expectation for a big win even to a player who does not participate in the operation support presentation, so that it is possible to prevent the game from becoming monotonous. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the twelfth embodiment, the upper opening/closing door 6755bU and the ball discharge door 6755c are replaced with a glass unit in order to suppress fraudulent acts of attracting game balls from the front side of the game board 13 using magnets or the like. 16 (arrangement on the far side in front view relative to the other part of the guide flow path 6755b) so as not to be affected by the attractive force caused by the magnetic force emitted from the front side of the guide channel 6755b. As a result, even if a fraudulent act is performed to guide the game ball to the sorting rotor 6755f with a magnet or the like, the effect of the magnetic force can be weakened directly above the upper opening/closing door 6755bU and the ball discharge door 6755c. , It becomes easy for the game ball to flow down to the guide passage 6755b2 directly under the upper opening/closing door 6755bU and the discharge area 6755d directly under the ball discharge door 6755c. That is, since it becomes difficult to guide the game ball toward the distribution rotator 6755f side, it is possible to suppress cheating using a magnet or the like. In addition, in the twelfth embodiment, a game ball that has entered the lottery device 6755 is forcibly guided to the flow path of the distribution rotor 6755f using a magnet or the like, and the game ball is distributed and rotated. It is configured to set the small winning valid period so that the small winning is completed before the ball enters any entrance by the body 6755f. In other words, even if all the game balls that entered the lottery device 6755 did not reach any ball entrance (remained in the lottery device 6755), a specific period from the start of the small hit (for example, 6.5 seconds) has passed, the small winning is terminated. In other words, the game ball that has flowed down in the lottery device 6755 without the intervention of an external force such as magnetic force (only by gravity or the inclination of the guide channel 6755b) can easily enter any of the ball entrances. , a configuration for setting an effective period during which it is difficult for a game ball guided in a direction different from the original by forcibly (forcibly) changing the flowing direction by a magnet or the like to reach any of the ball entrances. did. By configuring in this way, even if a cheater tries to guide the game ball that has flowed into the lottery device 6755 to the distribution rotor 6755f using a magnet or the like, the game ball is pushed by the distribution rotor 6755f. To eliminate the advantage of cheating because the validity period of a small win can be terminated before the ball is distributed to any entrance (even if the ball enters the V winning entrance, the big win is not started). can be done. Therefore, the effect of deterring fraud can be further enhanced.

In the twelfth embodiment, the emission color of the cheering button image 815a displayed during execution of the operation support effect is used to suggest the degree of expectation for a big win. Expectations are not limited. Instead of or in addition to the degree of expectation for the big win, it may be configured to suggest the degree of expectation for development or the degree of expectation for the small V-challenge win. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make the player pay more attention to the luminescent color (display mode) of the cheering button image 815a, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In the twelfth embodiment, the emission color of the cheering button image 815a is set independently of the data table selected from the character mode selection table 222fa, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the luminescent color of the cheering button image 815a may be configured to indicate which of the character mode selection tables 222fa is used for lottery of character modes. In other words, when a table is set in which a highly anticipated character mode is selected at a high rate, a highly anticipated emission color may be set for the support button image 815a. By configuring in this way, when a highly anticipated light emission color is set, it is possible to have the player more actively participate in the operation support presentation.

In the twelfth embodiment, by forcibly ending the small winning when 6.5 seconds have passed since the start of the small winning game, cheating using a magnet or the like is made impossible (difficult). However, the method of deterring fraudulent acts using a magnet or the like is not limited to this. For example, it is possible to detect whether or not the game ball is in contact with the ceiling portion in a predetermined range (for example, the range where the upper opening and closing door 6755bU and the ball discharge door 6755c are provided) of the guidance flow path 6755b. A configuration may be adopted in which sensor means is provided, and an error is notified when the period of contact with the sensor means exceeds a predetermined period (for example, 1 second). When trying to guide the game ball to the distribution rotor 6755f using a magnet or the like, it is necessary to float the game ball with respect to the guidance flow path 6755b when passing at least the upper opening and closing door 6755bU and the ball discharge door 6755c. . In other words, game balls are likely to come into contact with the ceiling portion in the range where these are arranged. Therefore, when it is detected that the user is in contact with the ceiling portion for a predetermined period of time (for example, one second) or more, it almost means that a fraudulent act using a magnet or the like is being performed. By setting it as the structure which alert|reports, suppression with respect to the fraudulent act using a magnet etc. can be aimed at.

<Modified Example of the Twelfth Embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIG. 268, a modification of the twelfth embodiment described above will be described. In the twelfth embodiment described above, during execution of the operation support effect, the support button image 815a indicating the item "support" and the volume setting button image indicating the item "volume setting" are displayed on the third pattern display device 81. 815b is displayed, and an item (whether to participate in the operation support effect or change the volume setting) can be selected by the player's operation. However, in the twelfth embodiment, the setting of the light amount cannot be changed during execution of the operation support effect.

On the other hand, in this modified example, the third pattern display device 81 is configured to display the item "light amount setting" (light amount setting button 815g). That is, according to the operation of the operation button 230 by the player, the item "support", the item "volume setting", and the item "light amount setting" can be selected. As a result, not only the player's desire to change the volume setting during execution of the operation support effect but also the player's desire to change the light amount setting can be fulfilled. Therefore, convenience for the player can be further improved.

FIG. 268 is a diagram showing an example of a display mode during execution of the operation support effect in the modified example of the twelfth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 268, in this modified example, in addition to the support button image 815a, the volume setting button image 815b, the up button image 815c, and the down button image 815d, they are displayed on the right side of the volume setting button image 815b. A left button image 815e in the shape of a left-pointing substantially equilateral triangle, a right button image 815f in the shape of a right-pointing substantially equilateral triangle displayed on the right side of the left button image 815e, and a substantially horizontally long button image 815f displayed on the right side of the right button image 815f. A rectangular light amount setting button image 815g is displayed. This light amount setting button 815g is used when the right button RB is pressed in a state where the item "volume setting" is selected (in a display mode in which the volume setting image 815b emits light). can be selected. That is, the volume setting image 815b appears to be turned off, and the light amount setting image 815g appears to emit light (see FIG. 268). Further, when the left button LB is pressed while the item "light amount setting" is selected, the item "volume setting" is selected. On the other hand, when the left button LB or the right button RB is pressed while the "support" item is selected, the "support" item remains selected (the "light amount setting" item remains selected). not be done).

In this way, not only the sound volume setting but also the light amount setting can be changed during execution of the operation support performance, thereby fulfilling the desire of the player who wants to change the settings during the execution of the operation support performance. can be done. Therefore, convenience for the player can be further improved.

It should be noted that, in this modified example, by pressing the right button RB while the item "volume setting" is selected, the item "light amount setting" can be selected. The correspondence with the items to be displayed can be determined arbitrarily. Specifically, for example, when the right button RB is pressed with the item "support" selected, the item "light amount setting" is selected, while the item "light amount setting" is selected. It may be configured such that when the left button LB is pressed, the item "Support" is selected. By configuring in this way, both when the item "volume setting" is selected and when the item "light amount setting" is selected, the state where the item "support" is selected (that is, the initial state in the operation support effect) Since the selection can be made only by pressing one button in the state), the player's convenience can be further improved.

In the twelfth embodiment and its modified example, by performing an operation corresponding to the selected item while one of the items is selected during execution of the operation support effect, control corresponding to the selected item is performed. However, it is not limited to this. For example, the selection of the corresponding item may be confirmed by performing a predetermined decision operation (for example, an operation of pressing the center button CB) while one of the items is selected. In this case, it may be configured such that it becomes impossible (difficult) to select other items after the decision operation. With this configuration, the player can concentrate on the item selected by the player.

In the eleventh embodiment and the twelfth embodiment, the character mode is determined by lottery each time the display condition of the character image 814 is satisfied during execution of the operation support effect, but the present invention is limited to this. is not. For example, a configuration in which the character mode steps up (progresses from white to blue to green to red) according to the number of operations performed by the player may be employed. In this case, for example, it is possible to step up to red in the case of a big win, but it may be impossible (difficult) to step up to red in the case of a loss. Then, the prescribed number of operations for step-up occurrence in each color may be configured to vary according to the lottery result of the special symbol and the tendency of the player's operation (participation status in the operation support effect). By adopting this configuration, the character mode with the lowest expectation is always displayed unless the operation is performed more than a certain number of times (for example, twice). can be operated more positively. In addition, the condition for stepping up is not limited to the number of operations. For example, it is possible to draw a lottery whether to step up or not with a probability according to the lottery result of the special symbol and the tendency of the player's operation. good. Even when configured in this manner, the player can be made to actively participate in the operation support presentation. Furthermore, in this case, the configuration may be such that the likelihood of step-up occurrence is indicated in advance. Specifically, for example, the color of the character 813 that imitates a bird may be used as a suggestion. By configuring in this way, even a player who tends not to perform operations will be encouraged to participate in the operation support presentation when the character 813 is displayed in a state in which the degree of expectation for occurrence of a step-up is high. Since it is possible to make the player think, it is possible to further improve the willingness of the player to participate in the operation support presentation.

In each of the above-described embodiments, the right variable winning device 65 is provided as a configuration for awarding a prize ball by entering a game ball when a big win or a small win is achieved, but it is limited to this. not a thing For example, it may be configured to be used in a type of gaming machine (so-called two types and one type and two types) in which a jackpot starts when a game ball enters a specific area inside the right variable winning device 65 . With this configuration, the more game balls passing through the upper surface of the opening/closing door 65f1, the more game balls enter the right specific winning port 65a, so that the game balls enter the specific area. I can make you think it's easy. Therefore, it is possible for the player to judge the degree of expectation of a big win from the number of game balls on the upper surface of the opening/closing door 65f1.

In the above-described first to fourth embodiments and the seventh embodiment, two types of specific winning openings (right specific winning opening 65a, left specific winning opening 650a) with different closing conditions are provided, and according to the number of rounds, etc. Although it is configured to switch the type of the specific winning opening to be opened, it is not limited to this. Only the right specific winning port 65a may be provided, and the closing condition (maximum number of winnings) may be switched by determining the number of rounds. By configuring in this way, the left variable winning device 650 can be omitted, so the cost rate of the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced by reducing the number of parts.

In the above-described first to fourth embodiments and the seventh embodiment, by firing the game ball at the maximum firing intensity (firing speed), the operating winning opening (the operating winning opening 660 in the first to third embodiments, It is configured so that a game ball can always enter the right operation winning opening 661 and the left operation winning opening 662) in the fourth embodiment, and it is determined that the ball entering the operation winning opening is valid only during the jackpot standby state. However, the configuration is not limited to this. For example, in a state other than the jackpot standby state, it may be configured such that it is physically impossible to enter the ball into the operation winning hole. Specifically, for example, it is configured to provide an electric role that can close the flow path for the operation winning opening, and the electric role is provided only during the time from the big hit standby state until the game ball enters the operation winning opening. It is good also as a structure which opens an object. Also in the case of such a configuration, the big win can be started based on the detection of the ball entering the operation winning hole in the big win standby state.

In each of the above-described embodiments, the start timing of the presentation mode such as the waiting state presentation and the right-handed expectation suggestion presentation and the updating process of the mode are controlled by the sound lamp control device 113 side, but this is not the only option. do not have. For example, the main control device 110 or the display control device 114 may be configured to control the mode of presentation. As a result, the processing load of the audio ramp control device 113 can be reduced. In this case, passage detection sensor 228 may be electrically connected to main controller 110 or display controller 114 . As a result, even if the control related to the mode of presentation is transplanted to another control device, it is possible to accurately update the mode of the chance meter CM, update the mode of the physical fitness gauge LG, and the like.

In the first to fourth embodiments and the seventh embodiment, the passing detection sensor 228 for detecting the number of game balls passing over the upper surface of the opening/closing door 65f1 during execution of the standby state effect is provided. By changing the mode of the chance meter CM according to the detection result, the player can grasp the number of game balls on the upper surface of the opening/closing door 65f1, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a known photographing means (for example, a video camera, etc.) for photographing the upper surface of the opening and closing door 65f1 is provided, and during the jackpot standby state, at least a part of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is photographed. It may be configured to display an image or video taken by means. This allows the player to more accurately grasp the situation on the upper surface of the opening/closing door 65f1.

In each of the above-described embodiments, a zigzag-shaped flow path is formed on the upper surface of the opening/closing door 65f1 so that the traveling direction of the game ball can be varied multiple times, so that when the game ball is continuously hit to the right, a jackpot of 1 can be obtained. Although the number of game balls exceeding the upper limit winning number in the round is configured to be able to flow down the upper surface of the opening/closing door 65f1 at the same time, it is not limited to this. For example, instead of forming a serpentine flow path on the upper surface of the opening/closing door 65f1, the width of the opening/closing door 65f1 (and the right specific winning opening 65a) is simply widened to allow the game ball to pass over the opening/closing door 65f1. By lengthening the distance, a configuration may be adopted in which a number of game balls exceeding the upper limit number of winning prizes in the first round can flow down at the same time. Also, in this case, the number of game balls flowing down the upper surface of the opening/closing door 65f1 at the same time when the player continues to hit to the right does not have to exceed the upper limit winning number in the first round. For example, the width (path length) of the upper surface of the opening/closing door 65f1 may be configured to exceed the length obtained by multiplying the diameter of the game ball by the upper limit number of wins in the first round. With this configuration, for example, when a ball jam or the like occurs and the game ball on the upper surface of the opening/closing door 65f1 cannot flow down to the lower side of the game board 13, the first round is performed on the upper surface of the opening/closing door 65f1 by striking to the right. Only by allowing game balls equal to or more than the upper limit number to reach in advance, game balls equal to or more than the upper limit number can be simultaneously entered in the first round when the next big win occurs. A shielding member or the like may be provided to prevent the game ball that has reached the upper surface of the opening/closing door 65f1 from flowing down to the lower side of the game board 13 during normal times. That is, the game ball that has reached the upper surface of the opening/closing door 65f1 may be configured to remain on the upper surface of the opening/closing door 65f1 until a big hit is achieved. In the case of such a configuration, just by hitting the game ball to the right before the big win occurs, it is possible to easily over-win the game when the next big win occurs.

<Thirteenth Embodiment>
In the pachinko machine 10 according to the ninth embodiment described above, in addition to the case where the special symbol lottery results in a big win, the special symbol lottery results in a small win, which is a kind of loss, and the game area during the small winning game. A specification was adopted in which a jackpot is won even when a game ball enters a V winning hole (specific area) provided in the . In addition, in the above-described ninth embodiment, a small hit is obtained with a high probability only in the second special symbol lottery (special symbol lottery based on the ball entering the second ball entrance 640) (for example, 9/10). To make it possible to win (the lottery of the second special pattern is easier to win a small prize than the lottery of the first special pattern), and to make it easy to enter the second ball entrance 640 according to the game state. is configured to be variable. That is, in the above-described ninth embodiment, the probability of winning a big win in the special symbol lottery is set constant regardless of the game state, and the opening probability of the electric accessory 640a associated with the second ball entrance 640 (normal symbol winning (probability of winning), normal pattern fluctuation time, opening time, etc. are changed according to the game state, so that the possibility of winning a small win can be changed according to the game state, resulting in a big win. It was configured to have different properties (so-called 1-kind 2-kind mixer specifications).

On the other hand, in the thirteenth embodiment, it is possible to win a small hit even in the lottery of the first special symbol (although the lottery of the second special symbol is easier to win a small hit than the lottery of the first special symbol) , a small win can be won with a probability higher than that of a big win in the lottery of the first special symbol.

That is, in the thirteenth embodiment, even when the normal state (low probability state of special symbols, low probability state of normal symbols) is set as the game state, it is possible to enter (enter according to the set game state). A lottery (lottery of the first special symbol) in which the execution condition is established based on the ball entering the first ball entrance 64 where the ease of hitting the ball is not variable) is made to win a small prize, A big hit is also caused by a game ball entering a V prize opening (specific area) provided in a game area (within a variable winning device in which a game ball can enter during a small win game) during a small win game. It adopts a specification that wins (the conditions for executing the jackpot game are established). That is, in the thirteenth embodiment, in contrast to the above-described ninth embodiment, even in a situation where a normal state, which is a gaming state in which the lottery for the first special symbol is mainly executed, is set, a large hit is made at a plurality of opportunities. The difference is that it is possible to execute a game. As a result, the player can always play the game in anticipation of winning a big win or a small win of the special symbol, so that the amusement of the game can be improved.

Furthermore, in the thirteenth embodiment, a plurality of V winning openings (specific areas) are provided in the internal area of the variable winning device that is variably operated during the small winning game, and the ball is placed in the V winning opening (specific area) during the small winning game period. As a game content for passing the ball to the V winning opening (specific area), a flow path in which the ball can easily reach the V prize opening (specific area) and a flow path in which the ball cannot reach the V prize opening (specific area) are provided. And, according to the set game state and the type of the winning small win, the easiness of the ball reaching the V prize opening (specific area) during the small winning game is made different. .

In addition, in the thirteenth embodiment, the number of balls that can reach the V winning opening (specific area) during one small winning game is always one. As a result, it is possible to suppress the frequency in which the ball passes through the V winning opening (specific area) during the small winning game and the big winning game is executed. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the player performs the jackpot game excessively. In addition, since it is configured so that multiple balls are not guided to the route that can reach the V winning opening (specific area) during one small winning game, the route that can reach the V winning opening (specific area) It is possible to increase the winning rate to the V winning opening (specific area) per ball flowing down.

Furthermore, in the thirteenth embodiment, a big win game executed when a big win is won in the first special symbol lottery, and a big win game executed based on the fact that a small win is won in the first special symbol lottery. , the amount of privilege given to the player is made different based on the jackpot game. Specifically, in the present embodiment, the privilege given to the player based on the executed jackpot game (jackpot game It is configured so that the number of prize balls to be given inside, the game state set after the end of the jackpot game) increases (which is advantageous to the player).

As a result, it is possible to make the player more interested in whether or not the ball passes through the V winning opening (specific area) during the small winning game. In addition, in this embodiment, a plurality of (two) V winning openings (specific areas) are arranged in the variable winning device in which a ball can win a prize during a small winning game, and the winning ball is placed in the variable winning device. It has a distributing means capable of distributing to a plurality of flow paths. The balls are guided to different V prize openings (specific areas) according to the flow paths distributed by the distribution means.

Furthermore, the variable winning device Each flow path guided to each V winning opening (specific area) so that the time (flowing time) required for the winning ball to reach each V winning opening (specific area) is different forming As a result, it is possible to cause the balls that have won the variable winning device during the small winning game to reach the V winning opening (specific area) at various timings. Therefore, the player can continue to have expectations for the V prize until the end of the small winning game.

Further, in the thirteenth embodiment, as one of the plurality of flow paths through which winning balls flow down in the variable prize winning device, a delay flow path is provided for making the flow time of the ball indefinite (delaying). Then, it is configured so that the player can visually recognize the ball flowing down the delay channel. In addition, the delay channel is provided with a plurality of outflow openings, and a part of the plurality of outflow openings is provided with a V winning opening (specific area).

This allows the player to watch whether or not the ball flowing down the delay channel passes through the V winning opening (specific area). Also, by providing the delay channel, it is possible to secure a period until the sphere flows out from any of the plurality of outlets.

In the thirteenth embodiment, when the time saving state is set as the gaming state, the lottery of the second special symbol that wins a small hit with a high probability (probability of about 1/2) is easily executed (executed more than the normal state) And if you win a small prize in the lottery of the second special pattern during the time saving state, the ball that wins the variable prize device has a high probability (almost 100%) of the V prize opening (specific area). configured to pass through. Then, after the jackpot game executed during the time saving state is finished, the normal state is set. Furthermore, the lottery right of the second special symbol can be stored (reserved storage).

In other words, the pachinko machine 10 of the thirteenth embodiment is configured so that when a jackpot game in which the time saving state is set is executed, another jackpot game is likely to be executed thereafter. By configuring in this way, despite the execution of the jackpot game advantageous to the player (the jackpot game in which the time saving state is set after the jackpot game ends), the game is played without the jackpot game being executed thereafter. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the state shifts from the time saving state to the normal state. In addition, if the jackpot condition (a special pattern lottery wins a jackpot, or a ball passes through the V winning opening (specific area) during a small hit game) is established during the time saving state, the normal state after the jackpot game ends is configured to be set. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game state (time saving state) advantageous to the player from being continuously set across the jackpot game and the game excessively advantageous to the player. In addition, since the game state (time saving state) advantageous to the player is not set continuously, the benefits given to the player in one big win game (the number of prize balls that can be given during the big win game ) can be increased.

In addition, in the thirteenth embodiment, since the lottery right of the second special symbol can be retained and stored, the jackpot condition is satisfied during the time saving state, and in the normal state after the jackpot game is executed. , the second special symbol lottery can be executed as many as the number held and stored. Therefore, even after the normal state is set, a big win or a small win is won in the lottery of the second special symbols, and the game can be played while expecting that the big win game will be executed again. Furthermore, when a small win is won in the second special symbol, a small win game is executed in which the ball can easily pass through the V winning opening (specific area), and the ball has passed through the V winning opening (specific area). After the jackpot game executed based on, the time saving state is set (becomes easier to set).

As a result, a game property that can be provided to the player as a set of the jackpot in the normal state and the jackpot in the time saving state can be configured, and a predetermined condition (time saving state is set for the player When a jackpot condition) is satisfied, it is possible to easily provide a jackpot game a plurality of times.

<Regarding the Board Configuration of the Pachinko Machine 10 in the Thirteenth Embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 269 to 277, the board configuration of the pachinko machine 10 according to the thirteenth embodiment will be described. The board configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the thirteenth embodiment is formed on the right side of the variable display device unit 80 in the game area on the game board 13 in contrast to the board configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the ninth embodiment. It is greatly different in that the device provided in the right side area is changed. Other configurations (devices provided in the left region formed on the left side of the variable display device unit 80, etc.) are the same, and the same configurations are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In the thirteenth embodiment, the game area on the game board 13 is a right area formed on the right side of the variable display unit 80 (a ball that is shot so as to pass over the game area above the variable display unit 80). can flow down), a left side area formed on the left side of the variable display unit 80 (an area where a ball shot so as not to exceed the upper game area of the variable display unit 80 can flow down), and a right side A description will be given by dividing the area into a lower area (an area near the upper portion of the out port 66) in which both the ball that has flowed down the area and the ball that has flowed down the left side area can flow down. Also, a game aimed at the right side area is referred to as a right-handed game, and a game aimed at the left side area is referred to as a left-handed game.

First, referring to FIG. 269, the overall configuration of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 according to the thirteenth embodiment will be described. FIG. 269 is a front view showing the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in the thirteenth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 269, the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in the thirteenth embodiment has a lottery device 6750 instead of the board configuration of the game board 13 in the ninth embodiment (see FIG. 186). The point that the small winning prize device (variable prize winning device) 10650 is provided, the second ball entrance accompanied by the gate type electric accessory 10640a instead of the configuration of the second ball entrance 640 accompanied by the electric accessory 640a The difference is that 10640 is provided and the special MAX V winning opening 6752 is deleted.

Like the lottery device 6750 of the ninth embodiment described above, the small winning prize device 10650 is in a state where a game ball can enter (that is, the opening and closing door 10650b is opened) is configured as a variable winning device. Although detailed description will be given later, in this embodiment, it is configured so that one round game is executed in one small winning game, and the opening and closing door 10650b opens and closes multiple times in one round game. It is configured to In addition, unlike the configuration of the present embodiment, the open/close door 10650b may be opened only once in one round game.

Furthermore, the small winning prize device 10650 has a plurality of V winning openings (specific areas) therein so that the ball that wins during the small winning game described above can pass through. In other words, the small winning prize device 10650 is a device having the function of establishing a big winning condition in addition to the function of the variable winning device. A detailed description will be given later with reference to FIG. Alternatively, it is constructed such that the ball enters one of the three out ports (out ports 10654, 10680a, 10680b) and is discharged to the outside of the game board 13. FIG.

In addition, in the thirteenth embodiment, when the ball wins the small winning prize device 10650 during the small winning game, the winning ball enters any V winning port (specific area) or out port. It is constructed so as to award prize balls (three) of the same value even if they are thrown. Therefore, when a small winning game is executed, the number of prize balls given to the player during the small winning game can be made constant regardless of the result of the small winning game. A game can be played by paying attention to whether or not a winning ball passes through a V winning hole (specific area) without caring about the number of prize balls to be won during a small winning game.

Different from the configuration of the thirteenth embodiment described above, for example, given to the player according to the type of ball entrance (V winning opening, out opening) into which the winning ball enters the small winning prize device 10650 The number of prize balls to be awarded may be different, for example, when entering the V winning hole, more prize balls are awarded to the player than those entering the out hole. can be configured to By configuring in this way, when the ball is entered into the V winning opening (specific area) during the small winning game, the ball cannot be entered into the V winning opening (specific area). In addition to whether or not the big winning game is executed, even the number of prize balls given during the small winning game can be made to be in an advantageous state for the player. In this way, by configuring so that the difference between the benefits given to the player according to the game result of the small winning game (the big winning game, the prize balls during the small winning game) increases, more benefits can be obtained. Thus, the player can be motivated to play the game.

Also, unlike the configuration described above, the configuration may be such that more prize balls are given to the player when the ball enters the out hole than when the ball enters the V winning hole. By configuring in this way, even if the ball does not enter the V winning opening (specific area) during the small winning game, the predetermined number of winning balls (more than the case of entering the V winning opening) Since it is possible to give the player a prize ball), even if the small winning game in which the ball could not be entered into the V winning opening (specific area) continues, the player's game It is possible to suppress a significant decrease in motivation.

Inside the small winning prize device 10650 in the thirteenth embodiment, a rotating body 10652 is provided, and the ball that wins the small winning prize device 10650 and flows down the first flow path 10651a is accepted. Configure. This rotating body 10652 is used to limit the number of balls that have won a prize in the small prize winning device 10650 and flow down the flow path (second flow path 10652) that can enter the V prize opening (specific area). , and is configured to rotate according to a predetermined rule when a small winning game is started. A detailed description of the rotator 10652 will be given later with reference to FIG. 270 onwards.

The ball flowing down the second flow path 10651b can enter the direct V winning opening 10657 or the role item route V winning opening 10677 according to the opening/closing state of the movable piece 10653. distributed to one of the roads. Here, in the channel that allows a ball to enter the direct V winning hole 10657, there is no ball entering hole other than the direct V winning hole 10657 that allows a ball to enter. In other words, it is determined that the ball will enter the V winning opening (specific area) when the ball is distributed to the direct V winning opening 10657. In the thirteenth embodiment, it takes about 1 second for the ball that has reached the second flow path 10651b to enter the straight V winning hole 10657 due to the operation of the rotating body 10652 described above. is doing.

On the other hand, the ball distributed to the path that can be entered in the role item route V winning port 10677 flows down the role item route 10670 and is guided to the role item device 10675 provided below the variable display device unit 80. be done. A specific configuration of this accessory device 10675 will be described later with reference to FIG. There is provided one V winning port (accessory route V winning port 10677) into which a ball discharged from the device can enter, and two out ports (10680a, 10680b).

The rolling device is composed of a mortar-shaped rolling element and a constantly rotating body 10675a having blade members formed so as to be capable of colliding with balls rolling on the rolling surface provided on the rolling element. The ball rolling on the rolling surface always collides with the rotating body 10675a, and irregular force is applied to the ball, so that the ball rolls on the rolling surface while changing the behavior of the ball. A ball in motion is configured to enter either one V winning hole (accessory route V winning hole 10677) or two out holes (10680a, 10680b). In the thirteenth embodiment, the ball-entering ratio is such that 1/4 of the ball that reaches the accessory device 10675 enters the V winning hole, and the remaining 3/4 enters the out-hole (10680a, 10680b). is set. In the thirteenth embodiment, the period required for the ball reaching the second flow path 10651b to reach the accessory device 10675 due to the operation of the rotating body 10652 is set to about 2 seconds. there is The period from rolling on the rolling surface of the rolling element in the accessory device 10675 until the ball enters the accessory route V winning opening 10677 is indefinite (about 1 second to about 100 seconds). is doing.

In other words, in the thirteenth embodiment, two V winning openings (direct V winning opening 10657, role item route V winning opening 10677) are formed in the small winning winning device 10650, and flow paths are provided for each winning. The ball that has flowed down the flow path that can win the V prize mouth 10657 surely enters the V prize mouth (specific area), and the ball that has flowed down the flow path that can win the prize route V prize mouth 10677 is about 1/ It is configured so that the ball enters the V winning hole (specific area) at a rate of 4. The period until the ball enters the role item route V prize opening 10677 is longer than the period until the ball enters the direct V prize opening 10657 .

By configuring in this way, when the ball surely enters the V winning hole (specific area), the result can be notified to the player in a short time, and the V with a probability of about 1/4. When the ball enters the winning opening (specific area), it is possible to spend time entertaining the player as to whether or not the ball enters the V winning opening (specific area). Furthermore, in the accessory device 10675, the rolling device is configured so that the behavior of the ball becomes irregular, and the period until the ball is discharged from the rolling device is configured to be indefinite. . Whether or not the ball enters the accessory route V prize opening 10677 is determined by the behavior of the ball rolling on the rolling surface of the rolling device.

Therefore, the player can play the game while watching how the ball rolls and for how long, and it is possible to prevent the player from quickly becoming bored with the game.

In addition, although the detailed configuration will be described later, in the thirteenth embodiment, the type of special symbol that has been won with a small hit (first special symbol, second special symbol), and the game state at the time of winning a small hit ( Normal state, time saving state), during the small winning game, whether the ball is distributed to the flow path that can win the direct V prize opening 10657 or the flow path that can win the prize route V prize opening 10677. is configured to be variably set. Specifically, when a small hit is won in the lottery of the second special symbol executed during the time saving state, the ball that wins the small prize winning device 10650 in the small winning game wins the direct V winning opening 10657. It is configured to be easily distributed to possible flow paths (easier to be distributed than when small wins are won under other conditions).

That is, as described above, the present embodiment is configured so that the second special symbol lottery can be easily executed during the time saving state, and the second special symbol lottery has a smaller hit than the first special symbol lottery. It is constructed so that the probability of winning is high (a small prize is won with a probability of about 1/2). Then, the time saving state is configured to continue until the lottery (fluctuation) of the special symbol is executed 100 times. Therefore, in most cases when the time saving state is set, the next jackpot game is executed before the time saving state ends. In this way, in the time-saving state in which the next big winning game is promised, in order to efficiently execute the big winning game, during the small winning game, the ball is distributed to the path that can win the prize route V winning opening 10677. Since it is structured so that it is difficult to get caught, the game can be played smoothly.

A ball shot to the right side area of the game board 13 flows down the right side channel 10600 and then flows down the meandering channel 10600a formed in an S shape. The opening and closing door 10650b of the small winning prize device 10650 is arranged at the most upstream part of this meandering flow path 10600a, and when the opening and closing door 10650b is in the open state by the small winning game, it is fired to the right side area by the right hitting game The ball wins a prize in the prize winning device 10650 for small prizes. On the other hand, when the door 10650b is closed, the upper surface of the door 10650b becomes part of the meandering flow path 10600a, and the ball rolls on the upper surface of the door 10650b and flows down the meandering flow path 10600a.

Approximately 1/2 of the balls flowing out from the outlet 10600b of the meandering flow path 10600a enter the normal figure winning opening 10067 due to the nails planted in the game board 13, and the remaining 1/2 of the balls It is configured to flow down to the area where the gate type electric accessory 10640a is arranged. The normal pattern winning opening 10067 is a winning opening that triggers a normal symbol lottery. It consists of In this way, the configuration that triggers the lottery of the normal symbols is not the shape of the gate through which the ball can pass, but the shape that the ball enters, so that the ball that establishes the opportunity of the lottery of the normal symbols can be used for other benefits. can be suppressed from being given.

The gate-type electric accessory 10640a is an electric accessory which is activated when a win is won in a normal pattern lottery, and is normally located in a standby state embedded in the game board 13, and is hit in a normal pattern lottery. (Winning per normal figure), it operates to the induction state projected from the game board 13. - 特許庁The gate-type electric accessory 10640a activated to the guiding state can catch the ball flowing down the game area, and guides the ball received by the upper surface of the gate-type electric accessory 10640a toward the second ball entrance 10640. In order to flow down, the upper surface is configured to slope downward toward one end on the side of the second ball entrance 10640 side.

A detailed configuration will be described later with reference to FIG. It is configured to operate the gate-type electric accessory 10640a for a long time (2 seconds) as a time-saving general figure winning game when winning a normal figure in the time saving state, and the gate type electric accessory 10640a is constructed so that it takes about 0.8 seconds for a sphere to pass over its top surface. Therefore, even if the normal game is won in the normal state, the ball will not enter the second winning hole 10640. - 特許庁

The ball that has passed through the gate-type electric accessory 10640a in the standby state, or the upper surface of the gate-type electric accessory 10640a in the guiding state flows down, and the gate-type electric accessory 10640a waits before reaching the second prize winning opening 10640. It is configured such that the balls falling downward in this state flow down toward the variable prize winning device 10065 for big hits. Balls that do not win the jackpot variable winning device 10065 flow into the out port 66 and are discharged to the outside of the pachinko machine 10 from a discharge port (not shown).

Next, the detailed configuration of the right area of the game board 13 in this embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 270 to 277. FIG. First, the configuration near the small winning prize device 10650 will be described with reference to FIGS. 270 to 274. FIG. Figure 270 is an enlarged view of the vicinity of the small winning prize winning device 10650 in the right area of the game board 13, and Figure 271 shows the state in which the balls are stored in the storage portion of the rotating body 10652 during the small winning game. FIG. 272 is a diagram showing the behavior of the ball, and FIG. 272 is a diagram showing the behavior of the ball in a state in which the rotating body 10652 is operated and the ball is distributed to the winning channel of the role item route V prize opening 10677. FIG. 273 is a diagram showing the behavior of the ball in a state where the rotating body 10652 is operated and the ball is distributed to the direct V winning opening 10657 to the winning channel. 274 is a partial cross-sectional view for showing the structure of the rotating body 10652 in detail.

As shown in FIG. 270, below the opening/closing door 10650b, a first flow path 10651a is formed between the opening/closing door 10650b and the rolling wall 10650f. The rolling wall 10650f is inclined downward in the direction of the rotating body 10652 (lower left direction from the viewpoint of FIG. 270) so that the ball flowing in from the opening/closing door 10650b in the open state flows down toward the rotating body 10652. is configured to The downstream end of the rolling wall 10650f is positioned above the rotor 10652, and the ball ejected from the downstream end of the rolling wall 11650f has a radius of 5.5 mm. ) to flow down toward the rotating body 10652, and the ball flowing in from the opening/closing door 10650b in the open state flows down the first flow path 10651a to the rotating body 10652. It is configured so that the period until it reaches is 0.5 seconds.

The first flow path 10651a is formed substantially parallel to the opening/closing door 10650b while having a space (approximately 15 mm in the depth direction and approximately 15 mm in the height direction from the viewpoint of FIG. 270) for allowing one ball to flow down. It is configured so that the balls flowing in from the opening/closing door 10650b are arranged in a row and flow down the first flow path 10651a.

The downstream end position of the rolling wall 10650f extends further in the direction of the rotor 10652 than the downstream end position of the open/close door 10650b, and a rib 10650c is provided above the downstream end of the rolling wall 10650f (upper side in the vertical direction). It is By configuring in this way, it becomes a small winning game, and the ball that wins the opening and closing door 10650b in the open state is suppressed from directly reaching the rotating body 10652 without rolling on the rolling wall 10650f. . Therefore, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the rotating body 10652 is damaged due to the vigorous collision of the ball against the rotating body 10652 . In addition, although detailed description will be described later, in the present embodiment, the opening and closing door 10650b is configured to repeatedly perform the opening operation for a short period (for example, 0.2 seconds) during the small winning game. It is configured so that it is difficult for a plurality of balls (three or more balls) to win a small prize winning device 10650 during the opening operation. As a result, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of ball clogging in the first flow path 10651a due to a large number of balls winning at once.

In addition, although not shown, a flow delay member is provided on the upper surface of the opening and closing door 10650b, and the time required for the ball to pass through the upper surface of the opening and closing door 10650b can be opened and closed multiple times during the small winning game. It is configured to be longer than one closed state period (for example, 0.3 seconds) of the opened/closed door 10650b. As a result, it is possible to win the small winning prize device 10650 with a high probability for the ball shot by the right-handed game during the small winning game. Therefore, even if a small winning game that opens and closes the opening and closing door 10650b at short intervals is set, a state disadvantageous to the player (a state in which the ball does not win during the small winning game) is unlikely to occur, and the winning ball It can be processed smoothly.

The rotating body 10652 is arranged at a position where the sphere that has flowed down the first flow path 10651a can reach, and is driven by an electric driving source (motor or the like) (not shown) according to a predetermined rule. It is configured to be rotatable between two positions. In FIG. 270, the rotating body 10652 is shown positioned at the initial position, and when predetermined operating conditions are met, it is rotated 90 degrees counterclockwise to the operating position as shown with reference to FIG. It is configured to rotate. In this embodiment, the operating time is set to 0.1 second when the rotor 10652 is changed from one position (eg, initial position) to the other position (eg, operating position). , so as to rotate at the same speed in any rotating direction.

Regarding the variable content (rotation content) of the rotating body 10652, a configuration other than that used in the present embodiment may be used. For example, a variable period ( operating period) and the variable period when changing from the operating position to the initial position may be different. In this case, the variable period (operation time) is longer when the rotating body 10652 is varied from the operating position to the initial position than when the rotating body 10652 is varied from the initial position to the operating position. can be

When the ball is not stored in the storage portion 10652a of the rotor 10652 (it is unlikely that the ball is stored), the variable period (operating time) is shortened, and the ball is stored in the storage portion 10652a of the rotor 10652. If there is (high possibility of being stored), the variable period (operation time) may be lengthened so that the ball stored in the storage portion 10652a does not fly out.

A storage portion 10652a capable of storing one ball is formed in the rotating body 10652, and when the rotating body 10652 is positioned at the operating position, one ball flowing out from the first flow path 10651a is stored. configured as possible. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 270, when the rotating body 10652 is located at the initial position, the spheres flowing out from the first flow path 10651a are not stored in the storing portion 10652a, and are formed above the rotating body 10652. It flows into the first inflow port 10651b, flows down the out channel 10651ba (flowing time is 0.5 seconds), and enters the out port 10654.

When a ball enters the out hole 10654, the same prize balls (three pieces) as other prize holes provided in the small prize winning device 10650 are paid out, and the entered balls are ejected outside the pachinko machine 10. It is configured to be discharged to In addition, an out sensor SZa for detecting balls that have passed through the out flow path 10651ba is provided in the out flow path 10651ba, and a winning sensor capable of measuring the number of all balls that have won the small prize winning device 10650 It is referred to when determining whether or not the number of balls corresponding to the winning number of balls measured by SZ0 is discharged from the small winning prize device 10650 . In addition, the out sensor SZa is configured with the same specifications as the proximity sensor used in each of the above-described embodiments, and it is sufficient for the ball to pass through the detection range of the proximity sensor for a predetermined period (for example, 1 second) or more. By determining whether or not balls are continuously detected, it is possible to monitor ball clogging in the ball-out flow path 10651ba.

As shown in FIG. 270, when the rotating body 10652 is located at the initial position, all the winning balls of the small prize winning device 10650 flow into the first inflow port and enter the out port 10654. Therefore, for example, even if a game is played to illegally open the opening/closing door 10650b to win a ball, the winning ball flows down a flow path that can win a prize to the V winning opening (specific area). there is nothing Therefore, it is possible to suppress the execution of fraudulent acts on the pachinko machine 10 .

A second flow path 10651c (flowing period of 1 second) is formed in the lower right direction of the rotating body 10652, and a movable piece 10653 is arranged at the downstream end thereof. This movable piece 10653 is configured to be variable between a closed position and an open position according to a predetermined rule triggered by the start of a small winning game by the drive force of an electric drive source (solenoid, etc.) not shown. The movable piece 10653 is configured to be positioned at a closed position projecting from the game board 13 in a state (initial state) in which it does not receive the driving force of the electric drive source (solenoid, etc.), and the electric drive source ( Solenoid, etc.) is configured to be variable to a release position where it is buried in the game board 13 by receiving a driving force.

Then, as shown in FIG. 270, when the movable piece 10653 is positioned at the closed position, the ball flowing down the second flow path 10651c collides with the movable piece 10653 positioned at the closed position, and the second inlet 10651d It is configured to flow into The ball that has flowed into the second inlet 10651d flows down the role product route channel 10651da and is guided toward the role product device 10675 (see FIG. 269). A role object route sensor SZ2 for detecting a ball that has passed through the role object route channel 10651da is provided in the role object route channel 10651da. is used to determine the number of , and the ball clogging situation in the flow path. This role object route sensor SZ2 is disposed at a position where a ball entering the second inlet 10651d passes through the role object route flow path 10651da for 0.7 seconds.

Although detailed description is omitted, the balls flowing down the second flow path 10651c are distributed to different flow paths (direct V flow path 10651e, accessory route flow path 10651da) according to the movable state of the movable piece 10653. It takes 0.5 seconds for the ball to pass through the open movable piece 10653 and enter the direct V winning opening 10657. After 0.5 seconds, it collides with the closed movable piece 10653. It is configured so that the period required to pass the sensor SZ2 is 0.7 seconds. Then, when the ball wins the direct V prize opening 10657 or when the ball passes through the role object route sensor SZ2, a dedicated screen is displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. (See Figure 283).

In other words, when the winning ball of the small winning prize device 10650 flows down the second flow path 10651c due to the operation of the rotating body 10675a, the display screen for notifying that it has won the direct V prize winning port 10657 (Fig. 283 (a)) is displayed later than the timing at which the display screen (see FIG. 283(b)) for notifying that the role object root sensor SZ2 has detected the passage of the ball is displayed. It is configured as follows. By configuring in this way, it is possible to determine which channel the ball that has won the small prize winning device 10650 has flowed down. By the time the player watching the display mode displayed on the display screen of the symbol display device 81 can see the display screen for notifying that the ball has won the direct V winning opening 10657. It is possible to suppress the display of the display screen for notifying that the ball has passed through the accessory route sensor SZ2, that is, that the ball has not won the direct V prize opening 10657. Therefore, until the timing at which the ball can enter the direct V winning port 10657 arrives, the player is expected to be interested in the display mode of the third symbol display device 81.例文帳に追加can be done.

As described above, the small winning prize device 10650 of the thirteenth embodiment is variable according to a predetermined rule triggered by the start of the small winning game (the start of the opening period of the small winning game). A plurality of variable means (rotating body 10652, movable piece 10653) are provided, and according to the timing when the ball wins in the small winning prize winning device 10650, the winning ball 10651da, direct V flow path).

During the period in which the small winning game is not executed, a plurality of variable means in the small winning prize winning device 10650 are positioned so that the balls are distributed to the flow path that is disadvantageous to the player. , It is possible to suppress the fraudulent act of winning a ball to the small winning prize device 10650 even though the small winning game is not in progress.

In this embodiment, each of the plurality of variable means described above is configured to be variable between two positions. Also good. For example, the movable piece 10653 is set to the first position to distribute the ball to the role item route flow path 10651da, the second position to distribute the ball to the direct V flow path 10651e, and the out for discharging the ball to the outside of the pachinko machine 10. When the movable piece 10653 is not applied with a driving force by an electric driving source (such as a solenoid), it flows down the second flow path 10651c. It is preferable to configure so that the ball is positioned at the third position to be distributed to the out port. In this case, when a ball enters the outlet, it is preferable that no prize ball is awarded. As a result, it is possible to further suppress the fraudulent act of winning the ball into the small winning prize device 10650 except during the small winning game. In addition, in the case where a flow path is provided in which the ball can flow down only when the ball wins the prize winning device 10650 for the small prize other than during the small winning game, a detection for detecting the ball is provided in the flow path. Means (proximity sensor) may be provided, and anomaly notifying means for notifying an anomaly when the detecting means detects a ball may be provided.

Next, the ball flow in the small winning prize device 10650 during the small winning game will be described with reference to FIGS. 271 to 273. FIG. First, when the small winning game is started, after a predetermined opening period (0.5 seconds or 5 seconds) has passed, the opening and closing door 10650b is variably controlled to the open state (dotted line state in FIG. 271) Round game A period is set. During the round game period, the open/close door 10650b is configured to be variable between the open state and the closed state according to a predetermined rule, and during the round game period, the ball fired to the right side area in the right-handed game is The winning device 10650 for a small prize wins from the opening/closing door 10650b in the open state.

As shown in FIG. 271, the ball ta1 that has flowed down the first flow path 10651a in the small prize winning device 10650 (flowing time 0.5 seconds) is in the storage portion 10652a of the rotating body 10652 located at the operating position. It is received and stored until the rotor 10652 is pivoted to its initial position (see FIG. 272). In this state, the next winning ball ta2 collides with the ball ta1 stored in the storage portion 10652a, then flows into the first inlet 10651b and flows down the out flow path 10651ba (falling time is 0.5 seconds). The ball is entered into the out port 10654.

Here, with reference to FIG. 274, the relationship between rotating body 10652 and first inlet 10651b will be described. FIG. 274(a) is a cross-sectional view of the rotator 10652 in the operating position, and FIG. 274(b) is a cross-sectional view of the rotator 10652 in the initial position. As shown in FIG. 274(a), the rotating body 10652 is provided so as to protrude from the surface of the game board 13, and has a rear surface portion 10652c on the side of the game board 13 (back side in the viewpoint of FIG. 271) and a glass unit 16. Storing portion 10652a is formed so as to cut away from front portion 10652d on the side (the front side in the view of FIG. 271).

The storage portion 10652a has a space large enough to store one ball. Also, the bottom surface 10652b is formed in a rectangular parallelepiped shape so that the bottom surface 10652b is located on the side of the glass unit 16 (the front side when viewed from the viewpoint of FIG. 271 and the left side when viewed from the viewpoint of FIG. 274).

By configuring in this way, the ball that has flowed in from the first flow path 10651a can be smoothly stored in the storage portion 10652a. In addition, the stored sphere ta1 is maintained at a position in contact with the rear surface portion 10652c of the storage portion 10652a along the slope of the bottom surface 10652a, and a gap SK1 is formed between the sphere ta1 and the inner surface of the front surface portion 10652d. state.

When the ball ta4 flowing out from the first flow path 10651a collides with the ball ta1 maintained in this state, the center position of the ball ta1 maintained at a position separated from the game board 13 by the thickness of the rear surface portion 10652c , the ball ta1 and the ball ta2 collide with each other in a state in which the center position of the ball ta2 is shifted toward the game board 13 (a state in which an interval SK2 is created). Then, the ball ta1 moves toward the front portion 10652d (moves in the direction of the arrow Y1) by the force received from the ball ta2 that collides with the game board 13 side (right side in the viewpoint of FIG. 274) from the center position. In this way, by configuring the storage portion 10652a to a size that allows the gap SK1 to be formed, when the ball ta2 collides with the ball ta1, it is possible to move the ball ta1 toward the front portion 10652d. Therefore, the force generated when the sphere ta1 and the sphere ta2 collide can be dispersed, and the force applied to the sphere ta2 after the collision can be weakened. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the sphere ta2 rebounds greatly and clogging occurs in the vicinity of the first flow path 10651a.

Further, when the sphere ta1 moves toward the front surface portion 10652d (in the direction of the arrow Y1), the distance between the center position of the sphere ta1 and the center position of the sphere ta2 becomes wider than the interval SK2. The inlet 10651b makes it possible to facilitate the inflow. In addition, in the thirteenth embodiment, the upper end position of the front surface portion 10652d forming the storage portion 10652a of the rotor 10652 is higher than the upper end position of the rear surface portion 10652c. This prevents the sphere ta1 from overflowing the reservoir 10652a even if the sphere ta1 collides with the sphere ta2 and moves in the direction of the arrow Y1. Further, the upper end position of the rear surface portion 10652c is configured to be lower than the upper end position of the ball ta1 stored in the storage portion 10652a. It is constructed so as not to come into contact with the upper end of the surface portion 10652c. This allows the ball to flow smoothly into the first inlet 10651b.

Next, with reference to FIG. 274(b), the configuration when the rotating body 10652 is located at the initial position will be described. As shown in FIG. 274(b), the rotating body 10652 is formed in a trapezoidal shape that is narrower on the game board 13 side (rear surface portion 10652c) than on the glass unit 16 side (front surface portion 10652d) in a cross-sectional view. When the sphere flowing out of the first flow path 10651a collides with the rotating body 10652 positioned at the initial position, the sphere moves along the slope formed on the outer wall surface of the rotating body 10652 to the first inlet 10651b. It is configured to flow down toward As described above, the rotating body 10652 in the thirteenth embodiment smoothly moves the next reaching ball whether it is positioned at the operating position and the ball is stored in the reservoir 10652a or when it is positioned at the initial position. Since it is possible to guide the ball directly to the first inlet 10651b, the ball flow in the small winning prize device 10650 can be made smooth. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable due to the clogging of the balls during the small winning game.

Returning to FIG. 271, the description continues. Rotating body 10652 is located at the initial position (see FIG. 270) except during the small winning game, and after 0.5 seconds from the start of the small winning game (the opening period of the small winning game starts), the operating position ( 271) and maintain the operating position for 3 seconds (first operation). After the end of the first action, it waits at the initial position for 2 seconds, then maintains the action position for 5 seconds (second action), and moves to the initial position after the second action. Then, when the period for maintaining the operating position elapses, the state shown in FIG. 271 (operating position) shifts to the state shown in FIG. 272 (initial position).

As shown in FIG. 272, when the rotating body 10652 is changed from the operating position to the initial position, one ball ta1 stored in the storage portion 10652a flows down the second flow path 10651c (falling time is 1 second). and reaches the movable piece 10653 disposed on the downstream end side of the second flow path 10651c. In FIG. 272, when the ball ta1 reaches the movable piece 10653, the movable piece 10653 is in the closed position (closed state), so the ball flows into the second inlet 10651d provided above the movable piece 10653, The flow path 10651da for role product route flows down toward the role product device 10675 . Although detailed description is omitted, the configuration of the movable piece 10653 also uses a configuration in which the balls are easily distributed to the second inlet 10651d in the same manner as the rotating body 10652 described above, and the balls are clogged above the movable piece 10653. It is configured so that there is no such thing as

On the other hand, when the ball flowing down the second flow path 10651c reaches the movable piece 10653 and the movable piece 10653 is positioned at the release position, as shown in FIG. 10653, it flows down the direct V channel 10651e (flowing time of 0.5 seconds), and enters the direct V winning port 10657.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 275 and 276, the detailed configuration of the accessory device 10675 that is guided when the winning ball of the small prize winning device 10650 flows down the accessory route channel 10651da will be described. do. FIG. 275(a) is an enlarged view of the accessory device 10675 viewed from the front, and FIG. 275(b) is an enlarged view of the accessory device 10675 viewed from above. 276(a) and 276(b) are schematic diagrams schematically showing the behavior of a ball when the ball rolls on the rolling surface inside the accessory device 10675. FIG.

As shown in FIG. 275(a), the ball that has flowed down the role product route channel 10651da of the small prize winning device 10650 flows down the role product route 10670 and is discharged to the rolling surface 10675d of the rolling device 10675c. be. This rolling device 10675c is formed in the shape of a mortar, and a rotating body 10675a is always provided in the central portion (the most recessed portion).

The downstream side of the accessory route 10670 is bent in order to discharge the balls from the outlet 10670a along the rolling surface 10675d, and as shown in FIG. An outflow port 10670a is formed facing upward (in the view of FIG. 275(b)). As a result, the ball vigorously ejected from the accessory route 10670 rolls in a counterclockwise arc on the rolling surface 10675d, and gradually spirals toward the center of the rolling surface 10675d. move.

Then, the ball that has reached the vicinity of the central portion constantly collides with the blade member 10675b of the rotating body 10675a and is repelled toward the outer peripheral wall of the rolling device 10675c. In this embodiment, the rotating body 10675a is always rotated clockwise, and the ball ejected from the accessory route 10670 rolls counterclockwise. As a result, when the ball collides with the vane member 10675b of the rotating body 10675a, a large force is applied to the ball, so that the ball after the collision can be bounced vigorously toward the outer peripheral wall of the rolling device 10675c. The blade member of the constantly rotating body 10675a is made of highly durable resin (for example, ABS), and has the strength to withstand the impact caused by collision with a ball.

In addition, a plurality of arc-shaped grooves are formed on the rolling surface 10675d so that it is difficult for the balls present on the rolling surface 10675d to flow straight down from the outer peripheral wall toward the center. there is This makes the behavior of the ball more irregular, and makes it easier to maintain the momentum of the ball rolling in an arc on the rolling surface 10675d. Furthermore, on the front side of the rolling surface 10675d (lower side from the viewpoint of FIG. 275(b)), there are out-holes 10680a and 10680b and a role item route V prize-winning opening 10677 as entrances into which balls can enter. are provided, and in order to make it difficult for the ball rolling on the rolling surface 10675d to enter each ball entrance, the first control wall 10670b, the second control wall 10670c, the third control wall 10675e, the fourth control wall 10675f is provided.

The first restricting wall 10670b and the second restricting wall 10670c restrict the behavior of the ball rolling on the upstream side (peripheral wall side) of the rolling surface 10675d. The rolled ball is restricted in its rolling direction toward the center of the rolling surface 10675d, and rolls toward the first restriction wall 10670b. In this way, the rolling device 10675c itself has a substantially perfect circular shape in plan view (see FIG. 275(b)), and has a mortar shape (see FIG. 275(a)) with a constantly rotating body 10675a at its center position. ), the range in which the ball can roll is restricted by the first restricting wall 10670b and the second restricting wall 10670c, and is eccentrically elliptical with respect to the center position of the rolling device 10675c. It consists of By configuring in this way, the ball is always placed on the rotating body 10675a compared to the case where the rolling surface 10675d is provided so that the ball can roll in a regular arc around the center position of the rolling device 10675c. Since it is possible to vary the timing of contact with the blade member 10675b and the momentum of the sphere at the time of contact, it is possible to easily vary the behavior of the sphere rolling on the rolling surface 10675d. Therefore, it is possible to provide the player who is watching the behavior of the ball on the rolling surface 10675d with a behavior of the ball that is difficult to predict, making it difficult to understand which opening the ball will enter. be able to.

The third restricting wall 10675e and the fourth restricting wall 10675f are restricting walls for making it difficult for the ball bounced by the vane member 10675b of the rotating body 10675a to enter any of the entrances. It is provided between the mouth and the accessory route V winning mouth 10677 . In this embodiment, about 1/4 of the balls rolling on the rolling surface 10675d enter the role item route V winning hole 10677, and the remaining 3/4 are left and right out holes (out holes 10680a, out holes). The ball is configured to enter the mouth 10680b).

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the rotating body 10675a is always provided at the lowest position (the most recessed position) of the rolling surface 10675d, and each incoming ball is provided at the highest position (peripheral wall side) of the rolling surface 10675d. It is configured to provide a mouth. Therefore, a ball that finally enters one of the ball entrances rolls up the rolling surface 10675d. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the rolling speed when the ball enters, compared to the structure in which the ball entrance is provided at the same height position as the position where the rotating body 10675a is always provided. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game from being difficult for the player to understand due to the ball entering the ball entrance at a speed unrecognizable to the player, and to prevent damage to each ball entrance. can be suppressed.

In addition, the rotating body 10675a is always provided at the lowest position (the most recessed position) of the rolling surface 10675d, and each ball inlet is provided at the highest position (peripheral wall side) of the rolling surface 10675d. Therefore, when the rotating body 10675a stops rotating at all times due to a failure, the ball stays at the center position of the rolling device 10675c and is configured so as not to enter each ball entrance. ing.

By configuring in this way, for example, while the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, the constantly rotating body 10675a, which is always rotating, is in an abnormal state such as when it is stopped due to a failure. It is possible to prevent the ball discharged from the route 10670 from being discharged from the rolling device 10675c (entering any ball entrance). In addition, when a power failure occurs while the ball is rolling in the rolling device 10675c and the drive of the rotating body 10675a is stopped, the ball will enter the winning opening during the power failure. can be suppressed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 276, the behavior of the ball rolling on the rolling surface 10675d of the rolling device 10675c will be described. FIG. 276(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the behavior of the ball when the ball rolling on the rolling surface 10675d enters the role item route V winning hole 10677, and FIG. ) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the behavior of a ball when it rolls on the rolling surface 10675d and enters the out port 10680a.

As shown in FIG. 276(a), the ball ejected from the outlet 10670a of the accessory route 10670 toward the rolling surface 10675d rolls (horizontally rolls) in an arc on the rolling surface 10675d, It collides with the second regulation wall 10670c and rolls (rolls down) toward the center of the rolling surface 10675d. Then, it collides with the blade member 10675b of the constantly rotating body 10675a that is rotating, rolls (rolls upward) toward the fourth regulation wall 10675f due to the impact, and after colliding with the fourth regulation wall 10675f, again. It rolls (rolls down) toward the center of the rolling surface 10675d. Then, it collides with the blade member 10675b of the constant rotating body 10675a again at a point different from the point where it collided with the blade member 10675b for the first time, and the impact forms between the third regulation wall 10675e and the fourth regulation wall 10675f. It rolls (rolls upward) toward the opening of the V winning opening 10677 and wins the V winning opening 10657 .

As described above, in the present embodiment, when the balls are ejected onto the rolling surface 10675d of the rolling device 10675c, the ejected balls are always placed on the mortar-shaped rolling surface 10675d. The discharge port 10670a is formed so as to roll horizontally at a height position where there is no contact. As a result, it is possible to lengthen the period until the ball ejected onto the rolling surface 10675d first collides with the constant rotating body 10675a. Further, in this embodiment, grooves are provided in the horizontal direction on the rolling surface 10700a, and the balls roll on the grooves so that the balls can easily roll in the horizontal direction. In addition, when the ball collides with the vane member 10675b of the rotating body 10675a and rolls upward, the groove also provides irregular frictional force to the rolling ball. In other words, it is easier to maintain the current rolling motion for the ball that is rolling horizontally, and it is difficult to maintain the current rolling motion for the ball that is rolling upward (reduce the rolling speed, It has a function capable of changing the rolling direction).

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, a plurality of regulation walls 10675b to 10675f projecting toward the center from the inner wall of the rolling surface 10700a formed in a perfect circular shape are formed, and always collide with the blade member 10675b of the rotating body 10675a. The distance to the next colliding wall (the inner wall of the rolling device 10675c, the regulation walls 10675b to 10675f) varies depending on the rolling direction (upward rolling direction) of the ball. By configuring in this way, it is possible to easily vary the behavior of the ball according to the rolling direction (the position at which it collides with the blade member 10675b) after colliding with the blade member 10675b.

In addition, in this embodiment, of the rolling surface 10700a, the ball rolling upward on the slope on the side where each ball entrance is provided (lower half side from the viewpoint of FIG. 276) is restricted to collide. The ball collision surfaces of the walls 10675b to 10675f are shaped so that the ball rolls after colliding toward the side where each ball entrance is not provided (the upper half side in the viewpoint of FIG. 276). This makes it difficult for the ball rolling on the rolling surface 10700a to enter each ball entrance, so that the ball rolling time in the rolling device 10675c can be lengthened. In addition, without being limited to the configuration of this embodiment, the shape of the regulation wall provided in the rolling device 10675c has a guiding function so that the ball after colliding can roll toward each prize winning opening. It is good also as a shape which carried out. With this configuration, the rolling history of the ball that can be entered into each ball entrance is always the rising rolling after colliding with the blade member 10675b of the rotating body 10675a, and the rising rolling after colliding with the regulation wall. Since it is possible to add induced rolling, it is possible to improve the amusement of the game by increasing the rolling process.

Next, as shown in FIG. 276(b), the ball ejected from the outlet 10670a of the accessory route 10670 toward the rolling surface 10675d rolls in an arc (horizontal rolling) on the rolling surface 10675d. ), collide with the second regulation wall 10670c, and roll (roll down) toward the center of the rolling surface 10675d. Then, it collides with the blade member 10675b of the constantly rotating body 10675a that is rotating, and rolls (rolls upward) toward the fourth regulation wall 10675f due to the impact, and is slightly shallower than the above-described FIG. 276(a). When the ball collides with the fourth regulation wall 10675f at an angle (about 30°), the ball after the collision rolls upward toward the inner wall of the rolling device 10675c, and the ball collides with the inner wall of the rolling device 10675c and rolls downward in an arc. The ball enters the out port 10680a while moving.

As described above, in the rolling device 10675c of the present embodiment, the rolling direction after collision varies depending on the angle and speed at which the ball rolling on the rolling surface 10700a collides with each regulation wall 10675. Therefore, it is possible to provide a behavior of the ball that is difficult for the player to predict. In this embodiment, the height positions where the openings of the respective ball entrances are formed are the same. The height position may be changed. For example, only the out port 10680a may be configured such that the height position of the opening is lowered so that the ball can enter the ball even when it rolls due to its own weight. Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the openings of the respective ball inlets are formed on the end surface of the rolling surface 10700a in one direction (the downward side from the viewpoint of FIG. 276(a)), but the present invention is not limited to this. , openings may be provided in all directions of the end surface of the rolling surface 10700a. In addition, in the present embodiment, the rolling surface 10700a on which balls can roll uses a one-layer structure. A configuration may also be adopted in which a ball that has passed through a passage hole provided in a part of 10700a enters the rolling surface 10700a in the lower layer and rolls again toward each ball inlet.

In this case, a ball can enter the prize route V winning port 10677 from both the upper layer rolling surface 10700a and the lower layer rolling surface. It is preferable that the rolling ball is more likely to enter the role item route V prize opening 10677. 1/4 passes through a passage hole (a hole communicating with the lower layer rolling surface) and 1/2 is configured to enter an out port, and the lower layer rolling surface is 1/2 for a role V It is preferable to make a configuration in which a prize is won in the winning slot 10677 and a prize is awarded in the out slot at 1/2. By configuring in this way, it is possible to gradually increase the degree of expectation that the ball will win a prize in the accessory route V prize opening 10677 .

Next, with reference to FIG. 277, the second ball entrance 10640 provided in the lower right area of the game board 13 and the configuration near the electric accessory 10640a will be described. FIG. 277 is an enlarged view schematically showing part of the right side area of the game board 13. FIG. This embodiment is configured to win a small hit with a high probability (about 1/2) in the lottery of the second special symbol, and the lottery using the reserved memory of the second special symbol acquired during the time saving state is performed. By being executed during the normal state, it is configured to facilitate the setting of the time saving state again.

In the pachinko machine 10 configured as described above, a right-handed game is performed in a state where the normal state is set, and a ball enters the second ball entrance 10640 which triggers a lottery for the second special symbol. Then, the jackpot game is executed more easily than the proper game in the normal state (the game aiming at the jackpot game by performing the left-handed game and executing the first special symbol lottery), so the normal state A configuration is used in which a ball does not enter the second ball inlet 10640 (hardly).

Specifically, the ball that has flowed down the right side area and flowed down the flow path formed below the partition wall 10700a is discharged to a position facing the gate type electric accessory 10640a. Here, when the gate type electric accessory 10640a is in the guided state (protruding state), the upper surface of the gate type electric accessory 10640a flows down toward the second ball entrance 10640 direction. On the other hand, when the gate type electric accessory 10640a is in the open state (buried state), it flows down toward the jackpot variable winning device 10065 through the gate type electric accessory 10640a.

Next, the case where the ball flows down on the gate type electric accessory 10640a will be described in detail. As described above, the gate-type electric accessory 10640a can receive the ball discharged from the flow path formed below the partition wall 10700a at one end side (upstream side) and flow down toward the other end side (downstream side). It consists of A nail K1 is planted above the gate-type electric accessory 10640a, and the nail is pushed so that the ball ejected from the flow path formed below the partition wall 10700a falls upstream of the gate-type electric accessory 10640a. The position of K1 is configured to be adjustable.

The gate-type electric accessory 10640a is a variable means for executing a variable operation to change from an open state (buried state) to an induced state (protruding state) for a predetermined period when winning a lottery for normal symbols. It is configured such that the operation time of the variable action is varied according to the game state at the start of the action. Specifically, when the game state at the start of the variable operation is the normal state, the variable operation is executed to maintain the induced state (protruding state) for 0.2 seconds, and in the case of the time saving state, the induced It is configured to execute a variable operation that maintains the state (protruding state) for 2 seconds.

The gate-type electric accessory 10640a is configured such that the ball flowing-down period tz1 is 0.8 seconds. Therefore, even if a normal pattern lottery is executed by performing a right-handed game in the normal state and entering a ball into the normal pattern winning opening 10067, and winning the normal pattern lottery, the winning is won. Any position of tz2 indicating the range of the falling time of 0.3 without the ball flowing down to the position where the ball can be entered into the second ball entrance 10640 by the variable operation of the gate type electric accessory 10640a executed based on After flowing down to the nail group K3, it falls in the area on the left side of the nail group K3.

On the other hand, when the variable operation timing of the gate-type electric accessory 10640a is in the time-saving state, the variable operation is executed for 2 seconds, so the gate-type electric accessory 10640a in the guiding state (protruding state) flows down. Since the ball reaches the downstream end of the gate-type electric accessory 10640a, it becomes possible to enter the ball into the second ball entrance 10640. In this embodiment, since the pachinko machine 10 is configured to be able to shoot 100 balls per minute, the interval between balls falling is 0.6 seconds. And, as described above with reference to FIG. 269, about 1/2 of the ball fired by the right-handed game is configured to reach the gate type electric accessory 10640a. Therefore, the ball reaches the gate type electric accessory 10640a at least once every 1.2 seconds.

In the present embodiment, the variable operation period of the gate-type electric accessory 10640a during the time saving state (the period for maintaining the gate-type electric accessory 10640a in the guided state (protruding state)) is set to 2 seconds. By playing a right-handed game, even if the ball falls on the gate-type electric accessory 10640a at any timing when the gate-type electric accessory 10640a is variably operated, it will fall on the gate-type electric accessory 10640a. The ball can be surely entered into the second ball entrance 10640. - 特許庁In addition, a nail group K2 is planted above the second ball entrance 10640, and the ball flowing down the gate-type electric accessory 10640a falls from the gate-type electric accessory 10640a in a state exceeding the range of tz2. In this case, the ball is prevented from entering the second ball entrance 10640 due to the inertial force of the ball.

As described above, in the present embodiment, a variable means is provided so that the sphere can be changed between a flowing state in which the ball can flow down and a non-flowing state in which it is difficult to flow. When it does, it constitutes so that the lottery condition of the 2nd special design may be established. When the variable means is in the falling state, it is possible to set a state in which it is easy to cause the ball to flow down to a predetermined area and a state in which it is difficult to cause the ball to flow down according to the game state. By configuring in this way, it is possible to set a state in which the lottery condition for the second special symbol is likely to be established and a state in which it is difficult to be established, and the lottery condition for the second special symbol is likely to be established for the player. The game can be played while expecting the game state to be set.

<Regarding the game flow in the thirteenth embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 278 to 280, a characteristic game flow in the pachinko machine 10 of the thirteenth embodiment will be described. As described above, in the thirteenth embodiment, the small winning prize device 10650 is provided in the right area of the game area formed on the game board 13, and the balls won during the small winning game can be distributed to a plurality of flow paths. Configure. Then, the easiness of passage of the ball to the V prize opening (specific area) can be changed according to the allocated flow path.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, according to the game state at the time of winning the small win and the type of special symbol that has won the small win, the ball is likely to pass through the V winning opening (specific area) during the small winning game, It is configured so that it is possible to set a state in which it is difficult to By configuring in this way, the execution probability of the big winning game executed via the small winning game can be kept within a predetermined specified range, so that the game that is excessively advantageous to the player or the game that is excessively disadvantageous It is possible to suppress the game from being played.

As described above, depending on the game state at the time of winning the small win and the type of special symbol in which the small win was won, the ball is likely to pass through the V winning opening (specific area) during the small winning game, and it is difficult to do so. When the state can be set, for example, for each of the plurality of devices (opening/closing door 10650b, rotating body 10652, movable piece 10653) that operates during the small winning game, the winning device 10650 for small winning Advantageous operation patterns (operation scenarios) in which the balls that have been drawn are distributed to an advantageous flow path (direct V flow path 10651e) that can enter the V winning opening (specific area) with a high probability (about 100%), and flow down the advantageous flow path It is possible to set a disadvantageous operation pattern (operation scenario) that is distributed to a disadvantageous flow path (accessory route flow path 10651da) that can win a V prize mouth (specific area) with a lower probability (about 25%) than However, when using the above-described configuration, it is necessary to execute operation control based on different operation patterns (operation scenarios) for a plurality of devices, and operation control for various devices is required. There is a problem that the program amount increases.

In addition, if a malfunction occurs in the plurality of devices described above, it will greatly affect the game results. Therefore, when the configuration is such that it is possible to execute motion control based on different motion patterns (motion scenarios), it is necessary to perform highly accurate monitoring processing for each motion pattern (motion scenario). There is also a problem that the processing load of processing increases.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, the operation start timing of various devices is changed without changing the operation contents of the plurality of devices (opening/closing door 10650b, rotating body 10652, movable piece 10653) that operate during the small winning state. Only by executing the process, a ball can easily pass through a V prize opening (specific area) during a small winning game according to the game state at the time of winning the small winning and the type of the special symbol winning the small winning, and It is configured so that a state in which it is difficult to set can be set. By configuring in this way, it is possible to suppress an increase in the amount of operation control programs for various devices and an increase in the processing load of monitoring processing for various devices.

Here, with reference to FIGS. 278 and 279, the operation flow of various devices during the small winning game will be described. Figure 278 is a timing chart showing the operation pattern of various devices in a small winning game in which the ball is likely to be distributed to the advantageous flow path (direct V flow path 10651e). It is a timing chart showing operation patterns of various devices in a small winning game that is likely to be distributed to the route flow path 10651da).

As shown in FIGS. 278 and 279, in the present embodiment, when the small winning game is started (the opening period is set), the rotating body 10652 and the movable piece 10653 are predetermined. It is configured to operate according to a fixed rule, and when the round game of the small winning game is started, the open/close door 10650b is configured to operate according to a predetermined fixed rule. And the length of the opening period of the small winning game is configured to be variable. As a result, the relationship between the operation status of the rotating body 10652 and the movable piece 10653 that operate when the opening period starts and the operation status of the open/close door 10650b that operates when the round game starts can be varied according to the length of the opening period.

In this embodiment, by varying the length of the opening period and changing the relationship between the operating conditions of the rotating body 10652 and the movable piece 10653 and the operating condition of the open/close door 10650b, the ball won during the round game is swung. It is configured so that the minute tip can be changed. In this embodiment, the rotating body 10652 and the movable piece 10653 are configured to operate according to a predetermined rule based on the same actuation trigger (start of the opening period). and the operating status of the movable piece 10653 can always be constant. Therefore, the device (rotating body 10652, movable piece 10653) for distributing winning balls to a plurality of channels of the small prize winning device 10650 is always operated in a state of having a certain relationship. Therefore, it is possible to simplify the contents of the monitoring process for monitoring the control abnormality of each device.

Next, with reference to FIG. 278, the operation contents (small winning open pattern A) of each configuration in the small winning game in which the balls are likely to be distributed to the advantageous flow path (direct V flow path 10651e) will be specifically described. The small winning game in this embodiment is a winning game in which three periods of an opening period, a round period, and an ending period are set, and one round game is executed during the round game. there is

When the opening period is started (set), a certain action scenario is set for each of the rotating body 10652 and the movable piece 10653 that start operating at the start of the opening period. First, the rotating body 10652 maintains the initial position (a position where it is difficult to receive the winning ball of the small winning prize device 10650 in the storage portion 10652a) for 0.5 seconds after the opening period starts, and then the operating position ( A first operation is performed to maintain the small winning prize device 10650 at a position where the winning ball can be received in the storage portion 10652a for 3 seconds.

Then, after the first operation (3 seconds) has passed, it waits for 2 seconds at the initial position, and then performs the second operation to maintain the operation position for 5 seconds. After the second operation (5 seconds) has passed, the initial position is set and the operation scenario of the rotating body executed based on the start of one small winning game is completed. That is, in this embodiment, during one small winning game (between the opening period and the ending period), the rotating body 10652 is operated twice to the operating position where the ball can be stored in the storage portion 10652a of the rotating body 10652 , and the ball stored in the storage part 10652a can be discharged to the second flow path 10651c that can reach the V winning opening (specific area) (operation for moving from the operating position to the initial position ) is executed twice.

Next, the details of the operation of the movable piece 10653 will be described. Movable piece 10653, similar to rotating body 10652 described above, a certain action scenario is set with the opening period of the small winning game started (set). The movable piece 10653 is configured to always be in a closed state (see FIG. 272) except for the period during which the small winning game is executed, and the ball wins the small winning prize device 10650 ( In the case of abnormal winning, the winning ball is configured not to flow down an advantageous flow path that is advantageous to the player.

When the action scenario is set in the movable piece 10653, the open state (see FIG. 273) is set for 4 seconds after maintaining the closed state (see FIG. 272) for 1 second after the start of the opening period. Then, when the open state for 4 seconds has passed, the operation scenario of the movable piece 10653 executed based on the start of one small winning game is completed, and the closed state, which is the initial state, is set.

In a small winning game advantageous to the player (a small winning game in which the ball is easily distributed to the advantageous flow path (direct V flow path 10651e)), the length of the opening period is set to 0.5 seconds, and the big winning game The round period is set (the round game is started) 0.5 seconds after the start of the game. Then, the operation scenario of the open/close door 10650b is set with the setting of the round period (the start of the round game) as a trigger. When the operation scenario of the open/close door 10650b is set, the open state (a state in which a ball can be entered) is set as the first action for 0.2 seconds, and then the closed state (a state in which it is difficult for a ball to enter) is set to 0. .The operation set for 3 seconds is repeated 5 times, then as the second operation, the open state is set for 0.5 seconds, then the closed state is set for 1.9 seconds, and then the open state is set again for 0.1 seconds. Open/close door 10650b operates as set.

Although detailed description will be given later, the operation scenario set in each of the above-described devices (opening/closing door 10650b, rotating body 10652, movable piece 10653) is based on the small winning scenario table 202mf (FIG. 288).

As described above, when the small winning opening pattern A (opening pattern corresponding to the small winning game advantageous to the player) is set as the small winning game, the small winning prize winning device 10650 is won during the round game. The ball will be stored in reservoir 10652a of rotor 10652 during the first actuation period. Then, as shown in FIG. 273, when the rotating body 10652 rotates to the initial position after the first operation period has elapsed, the balls stored in the storage portion 10652a flow down to the second flow path 10651c. , Since it passes through the movable piece 10653 in the open state and passes through the direct V flow path 10651e, a small winning game that makes it easy to enter the ball into the V winning opening (specific area) is executed. Here, the rotating body 10652 is changed from the operating position to the initial position, the ball flows down the second flow path 10651c, and the period until it reaches the movable piece 10653 is designed to be one second, and the movable piece 10653 is , the open state is continued until 0.5 seconds later than the ball flow down time. Therefore, even if the flow speed of the ball decreases in the second flow path 10651c, it is possible to sufficiently maintain the state in which the ball can enter the direct V winning opening 10657. In addition, since the period during which the movable piece 10653 maintains the open state is set to be a period before the end of the second operation of the rotating body 10652, another operation of the rotating body 10652 causes the second It is possible to prohibit the ball flowing down the flow path 10651c from entering the direct V winning opening 10657.

Furthermore, in the small winning opening pattern A, the ending period of the small winning game is configured to be 0.6 seconds. This 0.6 second is the time to ensure the shortest period until the ball that wins the prize in the prize winning device 10650 for the prize during the round period of the small prize game wins the V prize. That is, in the present embodiment, 100 balls can be shot per minute, and as a round end condition of the small winning game, 5 seconds have passed or 10 balls have been won. And it is configured so that the minimum period required for the winning ball of the small winning prize device 10650 to win a V prize is 5 seconds.

Therefore, by setting the ending period to 0.6 seconds, it is possible to make the ball win V during the ending period when the ball wins V at the shortest time. On the other hand, if a period shorter than this is set as the ending period, the timing of winning the V will always be the timing beyond the ending period. In this embodiment, similarly to the above-described embodiments, the ball that wins the small winning prize device 10650 at the end timing of the small winning game period preset as the small winning game (end timing of the ending period) It is determined whether or not the ball remains in the small winning prize device 10650, and when it is determined that the ball remains, the end timing of the small winning game is postponed until there are no remaining balls. .

If a period shorter than the ending period shown in FIG. 278 is set as the ending period, even if the game is played normally, it is always necessary to execute the process of postponing the end timing of the small winning game. There is a problem that the processing load increases.

On the other hand, in the small winning release pattern A of the present embodiment, the game period of the small winning game is shortened, and the ending period for reducing the processing load during the small winning game is set. can solve the problem. In addition, the length of the ending period is not limited to this, in order to shorten the execution period of the small winning game, a shorter ending period may be set, or in order to reduce the processing load during the small winning game It may be configured to set a long ending period.

In addition, in the present embodiment, until the end timing of the predetermined small winning game period (end timing of the ending period) passes, it is configured so that the small winning game does not end, but it is not limited to this. For example, a forced termination condition is set such that a ball enters a V winning hole (specific area) during a small winning game, and when the forced termination condition is established, a predetermined small winning game is performed. It may be constituted so as to execute forced termination processing for terminating the small winning game even if the end timing of the period (the end timing of the ending period) does not pass.

On the other hand, as a small winning game, when a small winning open pattern B (a small winning game in which the ball is easily distributed to the disadvantageous flow path (accessory route flow path 10651da)) is set, as shown in FIG. 279, A small winning game is executed that differs from the above-described small winning opening pattern A only in that the length of the opening period of the small winning game is changed to 5 seconds and the length of the ending period is changed to 5 seconds. be done. By increasing the length of the opening period in this way, the first operation period of the rotating body 10652 capable of allocating the ball to the straight V flow path 10651e is set during the opening period (the period before the start of the round game). middle) can be passed. Then, since the round period is set during the second operation period of the rotating body 10652 (the round game is executed), the ball is made to win the small winning prize device 10650 during the round game, and the storage portion 10652a of the rotating body 10652 Even if the balls are stored, the stored balls are distributed to the role item route flow path 10651da.

In the present embodiment, by setting the opening period to 5 seconds, the opening/closing door 10650b is opened after the movable piece 10653 is closed. Although it is configured to reliably prevent the winning ball from entering the direct V winning opening 10657, it is not limited to this. The opening period may be set to 3.5 seconds so that the door 10650b is opened after 3.5 seconds from the start of the winning game. In the case of such a configuration, the small winning prize device 10650 wins the ball at the timing when the movable piece 10653 is in the open state. Since the ball won in the device 10650 does not flow down to the second flow path and enters the out port 10654, the ball won in the small winning device 10650 wins the direct V winning port 10657. can be suppressed. In addition, in the present embodiment, a small winning game in which the winning ball of the small winning device 10650 is guided to the direct V winning opening 10657 (a small winning game in which the opening operation is executed in the small winning opening pattern A), A small winning game in which the winning ball of the small winning prize device 10650 is guided to the accessory route V winning opening 10677 (a small winning game in which the opening operation is executed in the small winning opening pattern B) is configured to be executable. However, without being limited to this, the open/close door 10650b is opened at a timing that allows the winning ball of the small prize winning device 10650 to be guided to either the direct V winning mouth 10657 or the accessory route V winning mouth 10677. It may be constituted so as to be able to execute a small winning game.

Further, by setting the ending period to 5 seconds, for example, the small winning game can be ended without extending the small winning game period unless the ball flows down the accessory route channel 10651da during the small winning game. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the processing load during the small winning game.

In addition, in this embodiment, as described above with reference to FIG. 278, the period until the operation scenario set in various devices during the small winning game is completed is configured to be the small winning game period. , Without being limited to this, for example, when it is determined that a predetermined end condition is established during the small winning game period and there is no ball in the small winning prize device 10650, various devices are set It may be configured to forcibly terminate the operation scenario to be executed. By configuring in this way, for example, in the small winning game in which the small winning opening pattern shown in FIG. 278 is set, the small winning You can end the game. By configuring in this way, since the period of the small winning game can be shortened, the game efficiency can be enhanced.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, as described above, by shortening the opening period of the small winning game, it is possible to execute the small winning game (small winning opening pattern A) that is advantageous to the player. That is, as operation patterns of various devices during the small winning game, the operation pattern capable of winning the direct V winning opening 10657 is configured to be executed prior to the operation pattern capable of winning the prize route V winning opening 10677. ing.

By configuring in this way, for example, during the execution of a small winning game (small winning opening pattern B) that is disadvantageous to the player, the ball won by the small winning prize device 10650 can be used for a small winning using a magnet or the like. Even if the player illegally stays in the prize winning device 10650, the direct V prize winning opening 10657 will not be set to a winning state (state in which the movable piece 10653 is opened). It is possible to make it difficult to perform the act of entering the ball into the prize winning opening 10657 . In addition, since the operation pattern of various devices for the small winning game (small winning opening pattern A) with a high probability of executing the big winning game is executed first, the small winning game during the time saving state in which the next big winning game is likely to be executed is easily performed. Play time can be shortened.

In addition, in this embodiment, as an operation scenario of the small winning game, the small winning opening pattern A in which the ball winning the small winning device 10650 can win the direct V winning opening 10657 and the role item route V winning opening 10677 The small winning opening pattern B that can win a prize is configured to be settable by variably setting the opening period of the small winning game. A small winning opening pattern that is impossible or a small winning opening pattern that allows balls to enter both V winning openings may be set by variably setting the opening period of the small winning game. As a result, the size of a privilege (possibility of executing a big winning game) that can be given to a player can be varied according to the type of the small winning game to be executed, so that the amusement of the game is further improved. be able to.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, by varying only the length of the opening period of the small winning game, the game content during the small winning game (ease of V winning opening, type of V winning that can be won) can be changed. However, without being limited to this, by varying the operation pattern of other devices (rotating body 10652, movable piece 10653) or changing the operation start timing, the game during the small winning game The contents (ease of winning V prizes, types of V prizes that can be won) may be configured to be variable.

In addition, in the present embodiment, it is configured to operate various devices in an operation pattern corresponding to the winning small hit type, but in an abnormal state (for example, a power failure during a small hit game and the power supply is cut off or In a state in which it is determined that a fraudulent act is being carried out, various devices may be configured to operate according to a predetermined abnormal operation pattern regardless of the type of small winning won. In this case, it is preferable to set an operation pattern that is more disadvantageous to the player than the operation pattern set corresponding to each small win type as the operation pattern for abnormal conditions. As a result, it is possible to suppress the act of illegally generating an abnormal state.

Next, the game state transition in the thirteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 280 is a game flow diagrammatically showing the game state transitions of the thirteenth embodiment. As shown in Figure 280, in the present embodiment, the normal state as the game state (low probability state of special symbols, low probability state of normal symbols), time-saving state (low probability state of special symbols, high probability state of normal symbols ) and are configurable.

During the normal state, as described with reference to FIG. 277, the ball does not enter the second ball entrance 10640 (it is difficult), so the ball enters the first ball entrance 64 in a left-handed game. A game (special 1 game) is performed to enter the ball. In the lottery for the first special symbol executed in this special 1 game, a special symbol lottery is executed in which a big win is won with a probability of 1/300 and a small win is won with a probability of 1/70. When a jackpot is won in the special 1 game, a jackpot B is executed at a rate of 95%. This jackpot B is a jackpot game in which a round game for two rounds is executed as a jackpot game, and a normal state (disadvantageous state) is set after the jackpot game ends (see FIG. 287(a)). The jackpot A is executed at the remaining 5%. This jackpot A is a jackpot game in which a round game for 10 rounds is executed as a jackpot game, and a time-saving state (advantageous state) is set after the jackpot game ends (see FIG. 287(a)).

Further, when a small hit is won in the special 1 game, a small hit game in which the ball can enter the V prize opening (specific area) with a probability of 1/4 is executed. When the ball enters the V winning hole (specific area) during this small winning game, a big winning game corresponding to the winning small winning type is executed, and the winning small winning type is small winning A, B (small winning) If the win is 50% of winning), a time saving state is set after the end of the big win game, and if the small win is C (50% of the winning of the small win), the normal state is set after the end of the big win. In addition, when the ball does not enter the V winning opening (specific area) during the small winning game (in the case of non-V winning), the end of the small winning game becomes the normal state as it is.

Next, the flow of the game during the time saving state will be explained. This time saving state is a game state in which special symbols are set to a low probability state and normal symbols are set to a high probability state, and compared to the normal state (low probability state of special symbols, low probability state of normal symbols), normal It is a game state in which the game ball is likely to enter the second ball entrance 10640 by the normal figure winning game executed when winning in the symbol lottery. In addition, in this embodiment, when the time saving state is set, in order to make it easier for the game ball to enter the second ball entrance 10640 by the normal figure per game than when the normal state is set, time saving When the state is set, the variation time of the normal symbols is set to be shorter than when the normal state is set, thereby increasing the number of execution times of the normal symbol lottery per unit time and increasing the normal symbol lottery. The probability of winning in the pattern lottery is higher in the time-saving state than in the normal state, and the opening pattern of the game per normal pattern executed when winning per normal pattern (of the gate type electric accessory 10640a) As an operation pattern), the general pattern per game executed during the time saving state (normal high probability state) is more than the general pattern per game executed during the normal state (normal pattern low probability state). It is configured to make it easier to guide the ball to the second ball entrance 10640, but it is easier for the game ball to enter the second ball entrance 10640 by the normal game in the time saving state than in the normal state. In addition, during the time-saving state, it is easier to execute the lottery of special symbols by performing a right-handed game aiming at the second ball entrance 10640 rather than performing a left-handed game aimed at the first ball entrance 64.例文帳に追加Any configuration may be used, and configurations other than those used in the present embodiment may be used. For example, only one of the above configurations used in the present embodiment in order to make it easier to enter the game ball into the second ball entrance 10640 in the time saving state than in the normal state, or each A configuration in which a configuration is appropriately selected and used may be used. When the time-saving state is set, the gate-type electric accessory 10640a is long variable (2 seconds), so that the second ball entrance 10640 is in a state where the ball can easily enter. The ball entrance ratio to the first ball entrance 64 does not change between the normal state and the time saving state, but in the normal state, the first ball entrance 64, which is the lottery trigger for the first special symbol, is the second special. While it is configured to make it easier to enter the ball than the second ball entrance 10640 that triggers the lottery of the pattern, in the time saving state, the second ball entrance that triggers the lottery of the second special symbol. Since 10640 is configured to make it easier to enter the ball than the first ball entrance 64 that triggers the lottery of the first special symbol, the second ball entrance is set while the time saving state is set. A special 2 game (right-handed game) for entering a ball at 10640 is performed.

In this embodiment, a maximum of four lottery rights of the first special symbol can be stored (reserved storage), and a maximum of one lottery right of the second special symbol can be stored (reserved storage). ing. Therefore, when a jackpot is won (a jackpot game is executed) while a predetermined number (for example, three) of the lottery right for the first special symbol is reserved and stored, and a time saving state is set after the jackpot game is completed. is constructed so that a lottery for the first special symbol that is reserved and stored can be executed. In this embodiment, when both the reserved memory of the first special symbol and the reserved memory of the second special symbol are provided, a lottery based on the reserved memory of the second special symbol (lottery advantageous to the player ) is executed first, but for example, if a big win is won in the first special symbol lottery in the normal state and the time saving state is set after the jackpot game ends, then at that point Since there is no reserved memory for the second special symbol in , the lottery for the first special symbol is executed during the time saving state.

When the first special symbol lottery is executed during the time saving state, the jackpot lottery (1/300) and the small lottery (1/70) are executed with the same probability as the normal state, and if the jackpot is won, the small lottery When the ball enters the V winning hole during the small win game after winning the win and the big win game is executed, the normal state is set after the big win game is finished.

On the other hand, in the second special symbol lottery executed in the special 2 game during the time saving state, a special symbol lottery that wins a big win with a probability of 1/300 and wins a small win with a probability of 1/2 is executed. be. When the jackpot is won in the special 2 game, the jackpot C is executed at a rate of 100%. This jackpot C is a jackpot game in which a round game for 15 rounds is executed as a jackpot game, and a normal state (disadvantageous state) is set after the jackpot game ends (see FIG. 287(a)).

Further, when a small win is won in the special 2 game, a small win game in which the ball can enter the V winning hole (specific area) is executed with a probability of almost 100%. When the ball enters the V winning hole (specific area) during the small winning game, the big winning game corresponding to the kind of the winning small winning is executed, and the normal state is set after the big winning game is finished. Further, when the ball does not enter the V winning hole (specific area) during the small winning game, the end of the small winning game becomes a time saving state as it is.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, a transition condition (time saving end condition) for shifting the game state from the time saving state to the normal state without going through the jackpot game is set. Specifically, the first time-saving end condition that is established when the number of executions of the special symbol lottery (variation) reaches 99 times during the time-saving state, and the number of small winning games executed during the time-saving state is two times. A second time-saving end condition, which is established when the time is reached, is set. In this way, it is possible to end a game state that is advantageous to the player without going through the jackpot game, thereby suppressing the awarding of excessive benefits to the player. be able to. Further, in the present embodiment, the second special symbol lottery executed during the time saving state is configured to win a small hit with a high probability (1/2). Therefore, for example, a game in which the type of the small win won during the time saving state is determined, and the ball is not entered into the V winning opening (specific area) during the small win game until the small win advantageous to the player is won. can be executed.

In order to suppress the execution of such a game, in the present embodiment, the above-described second time saving end condition (condition for ending the time saving state based on the number of times the small winning game is executed) is set. . As a result, during the time saving state, it is possible to provide an appropriate game by suppressing the game of repeatedly executing the small winning game until winning the small winning for which the desired small winning type is set. It should be noted that, when providing the second time-saving end condition described above, for example, in the control processing of the main control device 110, a counting means for counting the number of executions of the small winning game executed during the time-saving state is provided, and the counting It is preferable to determine whether or not the condition for ending the time saving state is established based on the count result of the means. In this case, the timing for determining whether or not the time saving end condition is established may be appropriately set, for example, the timing when the lottery result of the special symbol is determined to be a small hit, and the special symbol variation that has won the small hit is started. The determination may be made at any of the timing, the timing at which the special symbol indicating the winning of the small prize is stopped and displayed, the timing during the execution of the small prize game, and the timing during the execution of the big prize game. Moreover, what is necessary is just to set suitably based on the timing mentioned above also about the timing which terminates a time saving state based on having satisfied the time saving end conditions. As a result, the time saving state can be ended at various timings, so that the player can be interested in the game during the time saving state.

Next, the special 2 game in the normal state will be explained. As described above, in the present embodiment, one lottery right of the second special symbol is configured to be able to be reserved and stored, and when the time saving state shifts to the normal state, the number of times corresponding to the number that is reserved and stored, It is configured so that the second special symbol lottery is executed. Then, when the second special symbol lottery is executed in the state where the normal state is set, a big prize is won with a probability of 1/300 and a small prize is won with a probability of 1/2 as in the time saving state. Here, when a big win is won, a time-saving state is set at a rate of 100% after the big win game ends, and even when a small win is won, the ball is put into the V prize opening (specific area) during the small win game. It is configured so that the time saving state is set at a rate of 100% by rolling. In other words, winning a big win or a small win with the second special symbol is more advantageous to the player after the big win game than winning a big win or a small win in the first special symbol lottery in the normal state. It is configured so that the state (time saving state) can be easily set.

As described above, in the present embodiment, during the special 1 game in which the normal state is set, even if the jackpot is won in the first special symbol lottery, the time saving state is set after the jackpot game ends. (5% of jackpot winnings) and the number of rounds is small. is executed. Then, the small winning game executed when the small winning (1/70) is won in the first special symbol lottery is a small winning game that aims at the role item route V winning opening 10677 using the rolling device 10675c (see FIG. 275). It's a hit game. In the small winning game aiming at the role item route V winning opening 10677, the ball is designed to win the role item route V winning opening 10677 with a probability of about 1/4, so in the special 1 game in the normal state, A game aiming at a big win game (about 1/280) is performed by causing a ball to enter (about 1/4) into the accessory route V winning port 10677 after winning a small win (1/70). Hereinafter, among the small winning games, the small winning game aiming at the accessory route V winning opening 10677 will be referred to as the accessory challenge and will be described.

In this way, in the state where the normal state is set, it is executed based on the special symbol lottery result (small hit winning) and the rolling result of the ball (the ball enters the role item route V winning opening 10677). By making it possible to execute a game aiming at a possible big winning game, the player can play a novel game and can be prevented from becoming bored with the game early.

Further, in the present embodiment, when a jackpot game is executed in a state in which the time saving state is set, the normal state is always set after the jackpot game ends. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it difficult to continuously set a game state that is advantageous to the player across the jackpot game (prevent it from being set), so that the game that is excessively advantageous to the player You can prevent what is happening. Furthermore, by making it difficult (not to be) to continuously set a game state advantageous to the player, it is possible to easily increase the privilege (the number of prize balls) given to the player by one big winning game. can.

In addition, in the present embodiment, when the jackpot game is executed in a state in which the time saving state is set, the normal state is always set after the jackpot game ends, but this is not the case. For example, the end of the jackpot game is triggered by the end of the jackpot game rather than the ratio (probability) of shifting from the normal state (game state before the jackpot game) to the time-saving state (game state after the jackpot game). You may comprise so that the ratio (probability) which transfers from a time saving state (game state before a big-hit game) to a time-saving state (game state after a big-hit game) becomes low.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, one lottery right of the second special symbol is configured to be able to be reserved and stored, but without being limited to this, two or more lottery rights may be configured to be able to be reserved and stored. In addition, in the present embodiment, the normal state and the time-saving state are configured to be settable as the game state. state) and potential state (high-probability state of special symbols, low-probability state of normal symbols) may be configured to be settable.

<Regarding production content in the thirteenth embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 281 to 285, the content of the characteristic effects executed by the pachinko machine 10 in the thirteenth embodiment will be described. In this embodiment, when the normal state is set as the gaming state, the left-handed game (game for causing the ball to flow down to the left region) is performed, and when the time-saving state is set, during the small winning game And, during the jackpot game, it is configured to perform a right hitting game (a game for causing the ball to flow down to the right area).

Then, when the game method is changed for the player, for example, when the small winning is won in the state where the normal state is set and the small winning game is executed, the round period of the small winning game is set. By (by the time the round game is executed), the preparation effect for prompting the right-handed game is executed for a predetermined period (for example, 5 seconds). By urging the player to play the right-handed game before the round game is actually executed in this way, it becomes easier for the player to play the right-handed game at the time the round game is started, and a game that is disadvantageous to the player ( It is possible to suppress the game where the left-handed game is continuously executed even during the small winning game and the ball cannot be won by the winning device 10650 for small winning.

Further, in the present embodiment, as described above, the length of the opening period set during the small winning game is configured to vary according to the opening pattern of the small winning game.

In the pachinko machine 10 configured as described above, when the opening pattern B with the long opening period (the length of the opening period is 5 seconds) is set, the opening period is used to execute the preparation effect. Good, but when the opening pattern A (opening period is 0.5 seconds) with a short opening period is set, it is not possible to execute the preparation performance for 5 seconds only in the opening period, and a small win is won. It was necessary to execute the preparation effect from the timing before the special symbol variation was stopped and displayed.

By configuring in this way, when a small winning game with a different length of the opening period is executed, it is possible to secure a certain preparation performance period, but a special symbol at the time when the preparation performance is executed. By determining the fluctuation situation (during special design fluctuation or during special design fluctuation stop), this preparation production is during the fluctuation period of the special design (during the fluctuation period of the special design that won the small hit). The player identifies whether it is a thing or is executed during the opening period of the small winning game, and before the small winning game is started, the type of the small winning won this time is determined. I had a problem.

In order to solve the above-described problem, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 281, the length of the fixed period for confirming and displaying the special symbol variation is varied according to the type of the winning small hit, and the special symbol The fixed period and the opening period of the small winning game are configured so that the total period is the same. Specifically, for the special symbol variation indicating that the small winning in which the opening pattern A is set as the opening pattern of the small winning game is won, as shown in FIG. is set to 5 seconds. As a result, it is possible to set a period of 5.5 seconds (the total period of the fixed period and the opening period) from when the special symbol variation is stopped and displayed until the round period of the small winning game is set. It is possible to secure a period for executing the preparation effect for a certain period of time (5 seconds).

On the other hand, for the special symbol variation indicating that the small winning is won in which the opening pattern B is set as the opening pattern of the small winning game, as shown in FIG. 5 seconds is set. As a result, it is possible to set a period of 5.5 seconds (the total period of the fixed period and the opening period) from when the special symbol variation is stopped and displayed until the round period of the small winning game is set. It is possible to secure a period for executing the preparation effect for a certain period of time (5 seconds).

As described above, in the present embodiment, it is configured so that the fixed period of different length is set according to the length of the opening period set as the small winning game, and which small winning game is executed. Even when the special symbol variation is stopped and displayed, it is possible to execute the preparation effect for a certain period of time. It is possible to suppress that it is grasped by In addition, in the present embodiment, even if any small winning game is executed (even if a small winning game in which a different opening period is set is executed), the special symbol that won the small winning is Configured so that the preparation period (the sum of the fixed display period of special symbols and the opening period of the small winning game) from the stop display to the start of the round game in the small winning game is the same. , By executing a preparation effect for a certain period of time (5 seconds) during the preparation period, it is difficult to understand the contents (small hit type) of the small winning game to be executed this time from the execution timing of the preparation effect, but it is executed. Any other configuration may be used as long as it can prevent the player from discriminating the contents of the small winning game (small winning type) to be executed later based on the preparation effect, for example, the preparation A first preparation period (for example, 5.5 seconds) and its first preparation period (for example, 10 seconds) can be set as a period, and different preparation periods according to the type of the small winning game to be executed. may be configured to set In this case, by providing at least two or more each of the small winning type in which the first preparation period is set and the small winning type in which the second preparation period is set, the first preparation period and the second preparation period Even if it is set, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to predict the content of the small winning game (small winning type) to be executed later. In addition, in the present embodiment, it is configured to execute the preparation effect within the preparation period (the period until the final display period of the special symbol and the period until the round period is set in the winning game (opening period)). However, without being limited to this, for example, before the preparation period is set, that is, the preparation effect may be executed using the special symbol fluctuation period. In this case, regardless of the contents of the small hit game to be set (small hit type), before a predetermined period of time (predetermined number of seconds before the fluctuation stop timing) always set the preparation period will be the execution timing of the preparation production should be configured to By configuring in this way, even if any small winning game is won, since the preparation performance can be executed from a predetermined time before the special symbol is stopped to fluctuate, regardless of the winning small winning type. First, it is possible to lengthen the production period of the preparation production only by executing the processing for making the length of the preparation period the same.

Next, with reference to FIG. 282, the effect mode of the preparation effect executed during the preparation effect period will be described. FIG. 282(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the display contents displayed when the special symbols for which the small hit is won are stopped and displayed, and FIG. FIG. 10 is a schematic diagram schematically showing display contents displayed when three seconds have elapsed from the time point of FIG.

As shown in FIG. 282(a), when the special symbol variation in which the small hit is won is stopped and displayed, the third symbol for indicating the lottery result of the special symbol in the display area HR21 is displayed in a display mode indicating the small win. 341", and "Right-handed" is displayed in the display area HR22 as a guidance display mode for guiding the player to the right-handed game. Then, in the main display area Dm, a card 1800a to which characters of "V game" are attached is displayed as an informing mode in which the character 1800 informs that a small winning game will be executed. It should be noted that the display screen of FIG. 282(a) is displayed in the first two seconds of the fixed period (5 seconds) when winning a small win in which the opening pattern A is set as the opening pattern of the small winning game. , When the small hit for which the open pattern B is set is won, it is displayed for 2 seconds from when the fixed period (0.5 seconds) is set until the opening period of the small hit game passes 1.5 seconds. .

In this way, even if any of the open patterns is set to win a small prize, the same display mode is displayed in the display area HR21 because the special symbol variation has already stopped. . Therefore, based on the display contents of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to discriminate the small winning type of this time.

Next, when 3 seconds have passed since the preparation effect was executed, as shown in FIG. A screen is displayed to prompt the right-handed game by emphasizing the right-handed game, and an image showing the location actually aimed by the player in the right-handed game is displayed in the display area HR23. Further, in the sub-display area Ds, a comment "Aim for the right attacker!!" is displayed, which indicates the target position in the right-handed game.

In this embodiment, it is configured so that the period required for the ball fired by the right-handed game to reach the small winning prize device 10650 is about 1.5 seconds, as shown in FIG. 282 (b) By starting the right-handed game after the display screen is displayed, the ball can be won in the small winning prize device 10650 during the round game of the small winning game.

Next, an example of display contents displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 during the small winning game will be described with reference to FIGS. 283 to 285(a). First, the case where the ball wins the direct V winning opening 10657 during the small winning game will be described. FIG. 283(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of display contents displayed when the ball enters the direct V winning opening 10657 during the small winning game.

As shown in FIG. 283(a), when the ball enters the direct V winning opening 10657, the ball passes through the V winning opening (specific area) during the small winning game in the main display area Dm (entering the ball ) is displayed as a notification mode 1801 for notifying that the player has done so, and a comment "Congratulations on getting V!" is displayed in the sub-display area Ds. In this embodiment, an opening pattern (opening pattern A) is set in which the ball is likely to enter the direct V winning opening 10657 during the small winning game only when the small winning is won by the special figure 2 fluctuation in the time saving state. It is configured as follows.

The state in which the time saving state is set is configured to be a state in which the probability that the next big winning game will be executed is high (almost 100%) if the game is played normally.

Therefore, when the ball wins the direct V winning opening 10657 during the small winning game, without executing the effect of inciting whether or not the ball passes through the V winning opening (specific area) during the small winning game, The display screen shown in FIG. 283(a) is displayed.

On the other hand, when an opening pattern (opening pattern B) in which balls are easily distributed to the accessory route flow path 10651da during the small winning game is set, the display screen shown in FIG. 283(b) is displayed. FIG. 283(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the character product challenge effect displayed when the ball passes through the character product route flow path 10651da during the small winning game. When the winning ball of the small prize winning device 10650 is distributed to the role product route flow path 10651da and the role product route sensor SZ2 detects the passage of the ball, the display screen shown in FIG. 283(b) is displayed. In this display screen, a small winning game using the rolling device 10675c (a game using a winning ball of the small winning prize device 10650) is executed in the main display area Dm. Characters are displayed, a character object image 1802 imitating the rolling device 10675c is displayed, and the characters "Pray for passing V" are displayed in the sub-display area Ds.

Furthermore, in the HR 24 of the main display area Dm, as an elapsed period display mode for indicating the elapsed period of the current role challenge presentation, the state where the role challenge presentation has started (0 seconds have passed since the start of the role challenge presentation) "0:00" is displayed to indicate that the The elapsed period of this accessory challenge is configured to be calculated using the value of the elapsed counter 203mg that measures the elapsed time from the start of the small winning game. The value of the elapsed period counter 223ma at the time of passing through the route sensor SZ2 (the start time of the role object challenge production) is stored, and the value of the elapsed period counter 223ma updated according to the passage of time and the stored role object route. The number of seconds corresponding to the difference from the value of the elapsed period counter 223ma at the time when the sensor SZ2 is passed is calculated, and the calculated result is displayed as the elapsed time. As a result, the value of the elapsed period counter 223ma, which is used for various purposes, can be used to calculate the elapsed period of the role object challenge effect, so that the counter for measuring the elapsed period can be shared. can.

Although detailed description is omitted, in the present embodiment, the display mode of the display area HR24 is configured to be variably displayed when a predetermined unit of time elapses after the role object challenge presentation is started. Specifically, it is constructed so that it can be displayed in units of 1/100 second. Then, when the role object challenge effect is started, the display screen shown in FIG. 284 is displayed. FIG. 284(a) is a schematic diagram showing an example of the display screen when 15 seconds have passed since the role object challenge effect was started. As shown in FIG. 284(a), during the performance of the character challenge, an image simulating a bomb is displayed in the main display area Dm. This bomb is fired when the ball is ejected from the rolling device 10675c (the ball enters the out ports 10680a and 1060b or the role item route V winning port 10677), and the display mode showing the game result is displayed. The effect to be performed is executed.

At the time shown in FIG. 284(a), the ball is flowing down the rolling surface 10675d of the rolling device 10675c (see the dotted line enclosure in FIG. 284(a)), so the fuse of the bomb gradually A shortened production is executed. It should be noted that the display mode of this bomb may be varied according to, for example, the lapsed period of the accessory challenge effect, the number of balls rolling in the rolling device 10675c, or the rolling position. You may make it variable according to the big-hit classification corresponding to a small-hit game. In addition, in the present embodiment, only the display effect displayed on the display screen of the third pattern display device 81 is described as the role object challenge effect, but the structure other than the third pattern display device 81 is used to perform the role object challenge effect. may be executed, for example, a plurality of light emitting means (full-color LEDs, etc.) may be provided in the vicinity of the accessory device 10675, and the light emission of the light emitting means may be controlled according to the rolling condition of the ball.

An example of the display contents displayed when the small winning game has passed from the state shown in FIG. do. FIG. 284(b) is a schematic diagram showing an example of the display contents displayed when 41 seconds have passed since the role object challenge effect was executed and the ball enters the V winning hole 10677. FIG. As shown in FIG. 284(b), when the ball enters the V winning opening 10677, the main display area Dm is notified that the ball has passed through the V winning opening (specific area) (entered the ball) during the small winning game. An image simulating a "V" is displayed as a notification mode 1801 to indicate that the Then, the characters "Congratulations on getting V!!" are displayed in the sub-display area Ds. In addition, in the display area HR25, characters of "Geki Atsushi" are displayed as a suggestive comment for suggesting the type of the jackpot game to be executed to the player, and in the display area HR24, the progress of the current character challenge effect is displayed. "41:00" is displayed to indicate that the period (the time during which the ball was rolling in the rolling device 10675c) was 41 seconds.

Here, in the display area HR25, with reference to a display comment selection table 222ma (see FIG. 291(b)), which will be described later, an elapsed period at the end of the character challenge effect (when the ball is discharged from the rolling device 10675c) is displayed. , and a comment corresponding to the type of the jackpot this time and the type of the ball entrance into which the ball entered (Out ports 10680a and 10680b, Accessory route V winning port 10677) is displayed.

On the other hand, when the ball rolling in the rolling device 10675c enters the out port 10680a, the display screen shown in FIG. 285(a) is displayed. FIG. 285(a) is a schematic diagram showing an example of the display screen when 51 seconds have passed since the role object challenge effect was started. As shown in FIG. 285(a), when the ball rolling in the rolling device 10675c enters the out port 10680a, the ball enters the main display area Dm in the small winning game this time. A character "Unfortunately" is displayed as the effect result mode 1802 indicating that the ball did not land in the mouth, and a comment "Unfortunately, it was normal even if the ball was hit" is displayed in the display area HR25. Also, in the display area HR24, "51:00" is displayed, indicating that the current challenge effect has elapsed for 51 seconds. Then, in the sub-display area Ds, the characters "Do your best next time" are displayed.

A detailed description will be given later with reference to FIG. , even if the type of jackpot that can actually be set is a jackpot type that is advantageous to the player (time-saving jackpot), a display comment that suggests that it was a jackpot type that is disadvantageous to the player (normal jackpot) is displayed. It is configured so that As a result, when the big winning game is not executed as a result of the long-time small winning game, it is possible to suppress the player's willingness to play from further decreasing.

Next, with reference to FIG. 285(b), the characteristic display contents of the display screen displayed when the pachinko machine 10 is turned on will be described. In this embodiment, when the power is cut off in a partial state during the small winning game (state in which the ball can remain in the rolling device 10675c), after the power is turned on again, a power return process different from the usual configured to run. Specifically, normally, a process of not driving the rotating body 10675a, which normally starts to be driven in the power restoration process (startup process) executed when the power is turned on, is executed (always driving the rotating body 10675a). It is configured to skip the processing for FIG. 285(b) is a schematic diagram showing an example of a display screen displayed during execution of the power restoration process (startup process) for skipping the drive process of the rotating body 10675a. As shown in FIG. 285(b), the main display area Dm displays the common comment "Please wait while the power is turned on", and below it, "Small winning The power has been cut off during the game and will return in an error state. Please call a member of staff." is displayed.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to inform the player that the power supply has not been turned on normally. In this state, the pachinko machine 10 whose power has been restored is set to the game state before the power interruption based on the information stored in the backup RAM of the main controller 110 . In other words, the small winning game is in progress and the ball is present in the small winning prize device 10650. In this embodiment, even if the predetermined small winning game period has passed, while the ball remains in the small winning prize device 10650, the small winning game period (V winning can be effectively determined period) is extended. Therefore, when the power is restored in the error state, the small winning game period (the period during which V winning can be effectively determined) continues until the balls in the rolling device 10675c are discharged.

As a result, the small winning game will not end while the player who sees the display screen is calling the attendant. In addition, since the rotating body 10675a is always in a stopped state, the balls are not ejected from the rolling device 10675c while the store clerk is being called.

<Regarding the electrical configuration in the thirteenth embodiment>
Next, the ROM 202 of the main controller 110 in the thirteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 286 to 289. FIG. FIG. 286(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 202 of the main controller 110 in the thirteenth embodiment. In the thirteenth embodiment, instead of the first winning random number table 202a in the ROM 202 (see FIG. 192(a)) of the ninth embodiment described above, the first winning random number table 202ma is replaced with the first winning random number table 202ma. A first hit type selection 14 table 202mb is provided instead of the table 202b, a variation pattern selection 14 table 202md is provided instead of the fluctuation pattern selection table 202d, and a small hit type selection 14 table 202me is provided instead of the small hit type selection table 202ea. , and in that a small winning scenario table 202mf is newly added. Other configurations are the same as those of the ninth embodiment described above. Therefore, only the changes mentioned above will be explained as the explanation of the ROM 202 in the thirteenth embodiment, and the explanation of the same elements as in the ninth embodiment will be omitted.

The first winning random number 14 table 202ma is configured so that a small winning can be won even in the lottery of the first special symbol, compared to the first winning random number table 202a (see FIG. 192(b)) of the ninth embodiment described above. The difference is that the probability of winning a small hit in the lottery of the second special symbol is changed, and the rest is the same.

Here, the contents of the first winning random number 14 table 202ma will be described with reference to FIG. 286(b). FIG. 286(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the first winning random number 14 table 202ma. As shown in FIG. 286(b), in the first winning random number 14 table 202ma, the range of the judgment value (the value of the first winning random number counter C1) determined to be out of the first special symbol lottery is "2 to 590 ”, “591 to 599” is defined as the range of judgment values that are judged to be small hits in the first special symbol lottery, and judgment values that are judged to be off in the second special symbol lottery (first random number counter The value of C1) is defined as "2 to 300", and the range of determination value determined as a small hit in the lottery of the second special symbol is defined as "301 to 599".

That is, in the thirteenth embodiment, in the lottery of the first special symbol, the ratio is 1/300 (2/600), the ratio is 589/600, and the ratio is 3/200 (9/600). It is configured to be a small hit. In addition, in the lottery of the second special pattern, it will be a big hit at a ratio of 1/300 (2/600), will be out at a ratio of 299/600, and will be a small hit at a ratio of 299/600 (about 1/2). It consists of

As a result, it is possible to execute the small winning game even in the normal state in which the lottery for the first special symbol is executed, and to execute the big winning game via the small winning game.

The first per type selection 14 table 202mb is for determining the type of the jackpot game and the jackpot type with respect to the first hit type selection table 202b (see FIG. 193 (a)) of the ninth embodiment described above. The difference is that the specified range of the determination value (first winning type counter C2) is changed.

The contents of the first winning type selection 14 table 202mb will be described with reference to FIG. 287(a). FIG. 287(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the first win type selection 14 table 202mb. As shown in FIG. 287(a), the first hit type selection 14 table 202mb contains, as the type of the jackpot game, "jackpot A14" and "jackpot A14" selected when the jackpot is won in the first special symbol lottery. B14", ``Big Win C14'' selected when a big win is won in the lottery of the second special symbols, and ``Big Win C14'' selected based on the ball passing through the V prize opening (specific area) during the small winning game. "Jackpot D14" is defined respectively.

"Jackpot A14" is a jackpot game in which a round game of 10 rounds (R) is executed, and when the game state at the time of winning is a normal state, after the jackpot game is completed, a time-saving state (special symbol low probability state , high-probability state of normal symbols) is set 100 times (time-saving state that continues until special symbol lottery is executed 100 times), and when the game state at the time of winning is the time-saving state, the jackpot game ends. It is a jackpot type that is defined so that the normal state (low probability state of special symbols, high probability state of normal symbols) is set later.

"Jackpot B14" is a jackpot game in which two rounds (R) of round games are executed, and regardless of the game state at the time of winning, the normal state (low probability state of special symbols, high probability of normal symbols) It is a jackpot type that is defined so that the probability state) is set.

"Jack C14" is a jackpot game in which a round game of 15 rounds (R) is executed, and when the game state at the time of winning is a normal state, after the jackpot game is completed, a time saving state (special symbol low probability state , high-probability state of normal symbols) is set 100 times (time-saving state that continues until special symbol lottery is executed 100 times), and when the game state at the time of winning is the time-saving state, the jackpot game ends. It is a jackpot type that is defined so that the normal state (low probability state of special symbols, high probability state of normal symbols) is set later.

"Jackpot D14" is a jackpot game in which a round game of 10 rounds (R) is executed, and regardless of the game state at the time of winning, the normal state (low probability state of special symbols, high probability of normal symbols) It is a jackpot type that is defined so that the probability state) is set. This "jackpot D14" is a jackpot type that can be selected when a small win is won in the first special symbol lottery and the ball passes through the V prize opening (specific area) during the small win game.

The variation pattern selection 14 table 202md is different from the variation pattern selection table 202d (see FIG. 11 (a)) of the ninth embodiment described above, in addition to the special symbol variation time, the special symbol stop time (determined time) That is, in the thirteenth embodiment, the variation pattern selection 14 table 202md is configured to be able to select the variation time and the fixed time of the special symbol. This differs from the ninth embodiment in that a different data table is referred to according to the set gaming state, and a variation pattern (variation time) is selected based on the value of the acquired variation type counter CS1. , is the same as the above-described ninth embodiment, so detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Here, the contents of the variation pattern selection 14 table 202md will be described with reference to FIG. Figure 289 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the variation pattern selection 14 table 202md, Figure 289 (b) is normal specified in the variation pattern selection 14 table 202md 289(c) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the variation pattern 14 table 202md1 for the time saving variation pattern 14 table 202md2 defined in the variation pattern selection 14 table 202md. be.

As shown in Figure 289 (a), in the variation pattern selection 14 table 202md, the normal variation pattern 14 table 202md1 and the time saving state are set when the normal state is set as the gaming state. In this case, a time saving variation pattern 14 table 202md2 is defined.

In the normal variation pattern 14 table 202md1, as shown in FIG. 289(b), there are various variation patterns (30 seconds to 90 seconds) according to the special symbol lottery result and the value of the acquired variation type counter CS1. stipulated. Note that the description is omitted in FIG. 289(b). And, according to the lottery result of the special design, different fixed time (time to stop and display the special design) is configured to be set.

Specifically, regardless of the value of the acquired variation type counter CS1, when the lottery result of the special symbol is a win, 1 second is set as the fixed time, and when it is a small win A, 5 as the fixed time. Seconds are set, and 0.5 seconds is set as the fixed time in the case of the small hits B and C, and 0.5 seconds is set in the case of misalignment.

Then, in the time saving variation pattern 14 table 202md2, as shown in FIG. 289 (c), various variation patterns (5 seconds to 10 seconds ) are stipulated. Note that the description is omitted in FIG. 289(c). And, regardless of the lottery result of the special symbol, it is stipulated that 0.5 second is set as the fixed time.

Thereby, according to the game state and the lottery result of the special design, it is possible to vary the fixed time of the special design, as described above with reference to Figure 281, to vary the length of the opening period of the small winning game Thus, in the case of using a configuration in which the behavior of the winning ball during the small winning game is different, the period from the stop of the fluctuation of the special symbol that won the small winning game to the start of the round period of the small winning game. It is possible to secure a certain period of time (a period of time during which the special symbols are fixed and the opening period of the small winning game is added).

Therefore, based on the execution timing of the preparation effect described with reference to Figure 282, the type of the small winning game to be executed this time for the player (small winning game advantageous to the player, disadvantageous small winning game) can be suppressed from being determined in advance (before the small winning game is executed).

The small hit type selection 14 table 202me is a data table that is referred to when setting the small hit type for the small hit that is won. It should be noted that the contents of the control processing from executing the lottery of special symbols until the small hit type is set are the same as in the ninth embodiment described above, and in this embodiment, the content of the small hit type to be selected. is different from the ninth embodiment described above. Therefore, only the contents defined in the small hit type selection 14 table 202me will be described, and the rest will be omitted.

Here, with reference to FIG.287(b), the content of small hit classification selection 14 table 202me is demonstrated. Figure 287 (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the small hit type selection 14 table 202me. As shown in FIG. 287(b), the small hit type selection 14 table 202me contains the small hit type selected when the small hit is won with the first special design, and the small hit with the second special design. The small hit type selected in the case is defined respectively.

Specifically, when the special symbol won in the small hit is the first special symbol, the value of the acquired small hit type counter C5 is set to "0", "small hit A14", and "1 to 49" in the range of " "small hit B14", "small hit C14" is defined in the range of "50 to 99", and when the special pattern won in the small hit is the second special pattern, the value of the acquired small hit type counter C5 "Small hit A15" is defined in the range of "0-49", and "Small hit B15" is defined in the range of "50-99".

A different operation scenario is selected as an operation scenario during the small winning game according to the selected small winning type, and the big winning is executed when the ball passes through the V prize opening (specific area) during the small winning game. It is configured so that different jackpot types are set as games.

Specifically, when "small win A14, small win A15" is selected as the small win type, "small win A14, small win A15" is selected as the type of the big win game to be executed when passing through the V (when the ball enters the V winning opening). "Hit A14" is set to "jackpot A14 (10R short-time jackpot)", and "small hit A15" is set to "jackpot C14 (15R short-time jackpot)". An action scenario is set in which the ball that has been hit is likely to win a direct V winning hole 10657 (probability of winning a V winning hole during a small winning game is high (almost 100%)).

When "small win B14, small win B15" is selected, "small win B14" is "big win A14 (10R Short-time jackpot)” is set, and “jackpot C14 (15R short-time jackpot)” is set in “small hit B15”, and when the game state is the normal state as the operation scenario of the small hit game, the winning device 10650 for the small hit wins An operation scenario is set in which the ball that is played is easy to win the role item route V winning opening 10677 (probability of V winning opening during small winning game is low (approximately 25%)), and in the case of a time saving state, a winning device for small winning An action scenario is set in which the ball winning 10650 is likely to enter the direct V winning opening 10657 (probability of V winning opening during small winning game is high (almost 100%)). In other words, it is configured such that different action scenarios are set according to the game state. As a result, even if the same small winning type is won, the game content of the small winning game (ease of V winning) can be changed according to the winning game state. On the other hand, in addition to the lottery result of the special pattern lottery, it is possible to make the player interested in the game state at the time of winning the small prize.

When the "small win C14" is selected, "big win D14 (10R short time big win)" is set as the type of the big win game to be executed when the V is passed (when the ball enters the V prize opening), and the small win is performed. As an operation scenario of the game, the ball that has won the small prize winning device 10650 is likely to enter the role item route V winning opening 10677 (probability of V winning opening during the small winning game is low (approximately 25%)). set.

The small winning scenario table 202mf defines the operation contents for various devices (opening/closing door 10650b, rotating body 10652, movable piece 10653) executed during the small winning game in correspondence with the set small winning type. It is a data table which is read when a small winning game is executed. Then, the read scenario is set at the start of the small winning game, the scenario information is updated based on the elapsed time and the elapsed conditions, and operation control corresponding to the updated scenario information is executed for each device. be done.

Here, with reference to FIG. 288, the contents defined in the small winning scenario table 202mf will be described. FIG. 288 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the small winning scenario table 202mf. In addition, in FIG. 288, in order to easily explain the contents defined in the small hit scenario table 202mf (the operation contents of various devices), the flow of operation is shown according to the passage of time, but in fact, the main control The contents of operations of various devices are defined in correspondence with the counter values updated by the counter update processing periodically executed in the main processing of the device 110 .

Next, referring to FIG. 290, the contents of the RAM 203 of the main controller 110 in the thirteenth embodiment will be described. FIG. 290 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the RAM 203 of the main controller 110 in this embodiment. As shown in FIG. 290, in this embodiment, the RAM 203 (see FIG. 194) of the main control device 110 in the above-described ninth embodiment is replaced with the second special symbol holding ball storage area 203b. The second special symbol reserved ball counter 203mb is provided instead of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203f in the reserved ball storage area 203ma; The difference is that a role item route passage flag 203mf, an elapsed counter 203mg, and a game situation storage area 203mi are provided, and the other points are the same. Identical contents are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed descriptions thereof are omitted.

The thirteenth embodiment differs from the above-described ninth embodiment in that the number of reserved second special symbols (the number of reserved memories) that can be stored is reduced from four to one. , so as to correspond to this difference, the configurations of the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203ma and the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203mb are changed to the second special symbol reserved ball storage area of the ninth embodiment described above. 203b and the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203f.

That is, the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b consisting of four reserved areas (first to fourth reserved areas) is replaced with the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203ma consisting of only one reserved area (first reserved area). are changing to In addition, the variable display of the special symbol (first symbol) performed by the first symbol display device 37 based on the ball entering the second ball entrance 10640 (start winning) (variable display performed by the third symbol display device 81) ) is replaced with a second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203mb capable of counting up to 1 time against the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203f capable of counting the number of reserved balls (number of standby times) up to 4 times at maximum. . Since other contents are the same, detailed description and contents of control processing using this element are omitted.

The ball entry flag 203mc is a flag for indicating that a ball has won the small prize winning device 10650 described above with reference to FIG. is set to on when the Then, it is referred to when determining the game situation during the small winning game. Then, it is set to OFF at the end of the small winning game.

The storage flag 203md is a flag for indicating that the winning ball in the prize winning device 10650 has been stored in the storage portion 10652a of the rotating body 10652 (see FIG. 271), and the ball has been stored in the storage portion 10652a. It is set to ON when This storage flag 203md determines that the storage sensor SZ1 provided in the storage unit 10652a detects the ball in the game situation determination process (see S3201 in FIG. 300), and the timing is the storage possible period. When it is determined, it is set to ON (see S3208), and in the game situation setting process (see S1394 in FIG. 299), it is referred to when determining the current game situation in the small hit game (see S3202 in FIG. 299). . In addition, it is referred to when determining an abnormal state during a small hit game in the small hit middle monitoring process (see S1395 in FIG. 301) (see S3303 in FIG. 301). Then, in the game situation setting process (see S1394 in FIG. 299), it is set to OFF when the current game situation in the small winning game progresses.

The V route passage flag 203me is a flag for indicating that the ball that has won the small winning prize device 10650 has passed through the straight V flow path 10651e, and is turned on when the ball has passed through the straight V flow path 10651e. is set.

This V route passage flag 203me indicates that the state in which the ball is detected by the direct V route sensor SZ3 in the game situation determination process (see S3201 in FIG. 300) is the period during which the ball can pass through the direct V flow path 10651e. is set to ON (see S3212 in FIG. 300). Then, in the game situation setting process (see S1394 in FIG. 299), the setting situation of the V route passage flag 203me is referred to in order to set the game situation during the small winning game (S3210 in FIG. 299).

The V route passage flag 203me is a flag for indicating that the ball that has won the small winning prize device 10650 has passed through the straight V flow path 10651e, and is turned on when the ball has passed through the straight V flow path 10651e. is set. This V route passage flag 203me indicates that the state in which the ball is detected by the direct V route sensor SZ3 in the game situation determination process (see S3201 in FIG. 300) is the period during which the ball can pass through the direct V flow path 10651e. is set to ON (see S3212 in FIG. 300). Then, in the game situation setting process (see S1394 in FIG. 299), the setting situation of the V route passage flag 203me is referred to in order to set the game situation during the small winning game (S3210 in FIG. 299). Then, it is set to OFF when the small winning game ends.

The accessory route passage flag 203mf is a flag for indicating that the ball that has won the small winning prize device 10650 has passed through the accessory route channel 10651da, and the ball has passed through the accessory route channel 10651da. It is set to ON when This accessory route passage flag 203mf indicates that the ball can pass through the accessory route flow path 10651da when the accessory route sensor SZ2 detects the ball in the game situation determination process (see S3201 in FIG. 300). If it is determined that it is the period, it is set to ON (see S3216 in FIG. 300). Then, in the game situation setting process (see S1394 in FIG. 299), the setting situation of the accessory route passage flag 203mf is referred to in order to set the game situation during the small winning game (S3207 in FIG. 299). Then, it is set to OFF when the small winning game ends.

Elapsed counter 203mg is a counter for measuring the elapsed time from the start of the small winning game, in the small winning control process 15 (see S1092 in FIG. 297), when the small winning game is started, the counter is set to 1 (see S1391 in FIG. 297), and the value is updated while the small hit medium flag 203ea is set to ON (see S1392 in FIG. 297). Then, when it is determined that it is time to end the small winning (S1310 in FIG. 297: Yes), the value of the counter is reset (see S1396 in FIG. 297).

The value of this elapsed counter 203mg is referred to when determining whether or not the ball has entered a plurality of V winning openings (specific areas) with different flow periods (see FIG. 298). . In addition, in the monitoring process during the small hit (see S1395 in FIG. 301), it is referred to when determining whether an abnormality has occurred during the small hit game (S3305 in FIG. 301). That is, when a plurality of V winning openings (specific areas) in which different flowing periods are set are provided in a variable ball entry device (small winning prize winning device 10650) that allows a ball to enter during a small winning game , the timing at which the ball enters the V winning hole on one side and the V winning hole on the other side are different. Therefore, if a common period is set for all V winning openings as a period during which it can be determined that the timing of the ball entering the V winning opening is normal (V winning valid period), each Since the V winning period is set to be longer than the actual V winning period for the V winning opening, it becomes difficult to monitor the abnormal (illegal) entry of the ball into the V winning opening. did.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, a V winning validity period is set for each V winning opening, and based on the value of the elapsed counter 203mg and the type of the V winning opening in which the ball has won, the winning of this time is determined. It is configured to determine whether it is valid or not. This makes it easier to monitor illegal V winnings.

The game situation storage area 203mi is a storage area for temporarily storing the game situation during the small winning game, and stores various game situations set in the game situation setting process (see S1394 in FIG. 299). This is a storage area for The game situation storage area 203mi has a current storage area for storing currently set game situations and a past storage area capable of storing up to four game situations set in the past. .

In this control example, as the game situation during the small winning game, according to the progress of the small winning game, the storage waiting situation (situation where the ball is not stored even once in the storage portion 10652a of the rotating body 10652), the standby situation ( Circumstances in which the ball is stored in the storage portion 10652a of the rotating body 10652), the situation of the ball passing through the channel 10651da for the role object route), the situation of the straight V passing (the ball passes through the straight V channel 10651e It is configured to be able to set the status of passing), and depending on the currently set game situation, it is possible to determine whether there is an abnormality during the small winning game, and the power failure state that occurred during the small winning game (power outage, etc.) ) to be executed in the return process (see S992 in FIG. 296) executed in the case of returning from the return process is configured to be different.

Next, referring to FIG. 291, the contents of the ROM 222 of the audio lamp control device 113 according to the thirteenth embodiment will be described. FIG. 291(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 222 of the audio ramp control device 113 in the thirteenth embodiment. This embodiment differs from the ROM 222 of the ninth embodiment in that a display comment selection table 222ma is added. Although detailed description is omitted, the contents of the variation pattern selection table 222a are displayed on the contents of the variation pattern selection 14 table 202md of the ROM 202 of the main control device 110 and the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. It is changed according to the display contents.

In the display comment selection table 222ma, during the small winning game, the ball that has won the small winning prize device 10650 flows down the accessory route flow path 10651da, rolls on the rolling device 10675c, and then exits the out ports 10680a, 10680b or , Refer to when selecting the type of comment (see FIGS. 284(b) and 285(a)) displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 at the timing when the ball enters the role item route V winning opening 10677. data table.

Here, the contents of the display comment selection table 222ma will be described with reference to FIG. 291(b). FIG. 291(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the display comment selection table 222ma. As shown in FIG. 291(b), in the display comment selection table 222ma, the value of the elapsed period counter 223ma for measuring the elapsed period from the start of the big hit, and the big hit set in the small hit game this time Different display comments are selected according to the type (jackpot type to be executed in the case of V winning) and the type of ball entry opening (out opening, V winning opening) into which the ball enters. there is

Specifically, the value of the elapsed period counter 223ma is a value indicating "0 to 2 seconds" as the elapsed time after the ball has flowed into the rolling device 10675c, and is set in the small hit game this time. If the type of jackpot (lottery result) is "time-saving hit" and the entrance to the ball (winning result) is "V prize", "Super hot" is selected as the display comment, If the entrance into which the ball entered (winning result) is "missing (out)", the display comment "Unfortunately, it was hot" is selected. In addition, if the jackpot type (lottery result) set in this small winning game is "normal win" and the ball entrance (winning result) is "V prize", "Congratulations" is selected as the display comment, and "Unfortunate" is selected as the display comment when the entrance into which the ball entered (the winning result) is "Out".

In other words, if the elapsed time after the balls flowed into the rolling device 10675c is short (if it is within the first period), regardless of the winning result, it is set for the small win that was won this time. The jackpot type (lottery result) is configured so that the display comment with the contents that the player can easily distinguish is easily displayed. By configuring in this way, when a V prize is won in a small winning game, the type of the big winning game (big winning type) can be predicted before the big winning game is actually executed, Even if V is not won in the small winning game, it is possible to predict the type of the big winning game to be awarded when V is won in the current small winning game.

If the value of the elapsed period counter 223ma is "2 to 20 seconds" as the elapsed time after the ball has entered the rolling device 10675c, regardless of the lottery result, the ball entrance ( If the winning result) is "V winning", "Congratulations" is selected as the display comment, and if the entrance into which the ball entered (winning result) is "Out", "Sorry" is selected as the display comment. In this way, within a specific range of the time elapsed since the balls flowed into the rolling device 10675c (in the case of the second period), from the comment displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, It is configured so that the player cannot predict the lottery result of this time. Therefore, when the player wins V in the small winning game, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the actually executed big winning game, and the player predicts the result of the current lottery when V winning does not occur in the small winning game. Therefore, the game can be played toward winning the next small prize without worrying about the game result of the current small prize game.

Next, the value of the elapsed period counter 223ma is a value indicating "20 to 40 seconds" as the elapsed time after the ball has flowed into the rolling device 10675c, and is set in the small winning game of this time. If the jackpot type (lottery result) is “time-saving win” and the ball entrance (winning result) is “V prize”, “Congratulations” is selected as the display comment, and the ball enters. In the case where the ball entered (winning result) is "missing (out)", "Unfortunately, it was hot" is selected as the display comment. In addition, if the jackpot type (lottery result) set in this small winning game is "normal win" and the ball entrance (winning result) is "V prize", "Congratulations" is selected as the display comment, and "Unfortunate" is selected as the display comment when the entrance into which the ball entered (the winning result) is "Out".

In other words, if the elapsed time after the ball has flowed into the rolling device 10675c is within the range of the specific period (third period), only when the winning result is "V winning" The jackpot type (lottery result) set for the game is configured so that a display comment with content that is easy for the player to distinguish can be easily displayed. In this way, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to distinguish all the lottery results by making it easy for the player to distinguish the current lottery result only when the winning result is one of them. In this embodiment, when the winning result is "V winning", a comment is displayed so that the player can easily distinguish the current lottery result. For example, if the winning result is "out", it may be configured to display a comment with content that makes it easy for the player to determine the current lottery result, or a predetermined lottery can be executed. If the result of the lottery is a predetermined result of the lottery, it may be configured to display a comment with content that allows the player to easily distinguish the result of the current lottery.

Finally, the value of the elapsed period counter 223ma is a value indicating "40 seconds or more" as the elapsed time after the ball has flowed into the rolling device 10675c, and is the jackpot type set in the small hit game this time. If the (lottery result) is "time-saving hit" and the ball entrance (prize result) to which the ball enters is "V prize", then "extra hot" is selected as the display comment, and the ball enters the ball. If the entered ball (winning result) is "missing (out)", the display comment "Unfortunately, it was normal even if it hit" is selected. In addition, if the jackpot type (lottery result) set in this small winning game is "normal win" and the ball entrance (winning result) is "V prize", If "Congratulations" is selected as the display comment and the entrance into which the ball entered (winning result) is "missing (out)", the display comment is "Unfortunately, it was normal even if it hit." selected.

That is, if the elapsed time is long after the ball has flowed into the rolling device 10675c, if the winning result is "V winning", the big win type (lottery result) set for the small win won this time is configured so that a display comment with content that is easy for the player to distinguish is easily displayed, and if the winning result is "out", regardless of the lottery result, it is disadvantageous to the player. A display comment indicating that the result of the lottery (normal win) is displayed is displayed. By configuring in this way, when a V prize is won in a small winning game, the type of the big winning game can be predicted before the big winning game is actually executed, and the small winning game can be performed. When the player does not win the V prize, a display comment indicating a content different from the actual lottery result is displayed, thereby suppressing the player's desire to play.

In this embodiment, the display comment is selected based on the content described above, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the relationship between the elapsed time and the display content may be changed. In addition, in the present embodiment, two types of display contents, that is, the display contents that can distinguish the lottery result and the display contents that are difficult to distinguish, are configured to be selectable. One display content may be selectable from three or more types of display content with different degrees.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, at the timing when the ball is actually discharged from the rolling device 10675c (the timing when the ball enters either the out hole or the V winning hole), the player receives the lottery result. Although it is configured to display a predictable display comment, it may be configured to display a display comment that predicts the lottery result at another timing. When the period during which the ball is rolling has reached a predetermined period, it may be configured to display a display comment that allows the player to predict the current lottery result. By configuring in this way, based on the content of the display comment, it is possible to make the player pay more attention to the game result of the small winning game this time, and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

In addition, the content of the display comment selected according to the number of balls won by the small winning prize device 10650 may be varied. It may be configured such that the more the number of the display contents, the more advantageous the display content is selected for the player. By configuring in this way, it is possible to motivate the player to play a game in order to win many balls in the small winning prize device 10650 during the small winning game.

In addition, in this embodiment, the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is configured to display a display comment that can predict the result of this lottery. For example, the lottery result may be configured to be predictable by varying the color of light emitted by the light emitting means provided in the pachinko machine 10, or the type of sound output from the pachinko machine 10 may be used to determine the lottery. The results may be configured to be predictable.

Next, referring to FIG. 292, the contents of the RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the thirteenth embodiment will be described. FIG. 292 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the RAM 223 of the audio ramp control device 113 in the thirteenth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 292, this embodiment differs from the RAM 223 of the ninth embodiment in that an elapsed period counter 223ma is added, and the rest is the same. The same elements are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed descriptions thereof are omitted.

Elapsed period counter 223ma is a counter for measuring the elapsed time from the start of the small winning game, and in the winning related processing 15 (see S43071 in FIG. 303), when the opening command for small winning is received , 1 is set as the counter value (S44051 in FIG. 303). Then, in effect update processing 15 (see S4191 in FIG. 302), the value is updated by one. This effect update process 15 is executed in the main process (see FIG. 34) of the sound lamp control device 113 which is executed every 1 millisecond. 1 millisecond has passed. Therefore, for example, when determining "elapse of one second", it is determined whether the value of the elapsed period counter 223ma is "1000" corresponding to one second. In this embodiment, for convenience of explanation, the number of seconds is used instead of the value of the elapsed period counter 223ma when explaining the contents of determination of the elapsed time. It is determined based on.

<Regarding the control process of the main controller in the thirteenth embodiment>
Next, the control processing contents of main controller 110 will be described with reference to FIGS. 293 to 301. FIG. In this embodiment, in place of the special symbol variation processing 13 (see S141 in FIG. 197), the special symbol variation processing 15 (see FIG. 293) is replaced with the small hit start processing (see FIG. S266) instead of small hit start processing 15 (see FIG. 294), start-up processing 13 (see FIG. 200) instead of start-up processing 15 (see FIG. 295), small hit control processing 13 (see FIG. 203 S1072 reference) is replaced with small winning control processing 15 (see FIG. 297), and V passage detection processing 15 (see FIG. 298) is provided instead of V passage detection processing (see S1625 of FIG. 204). , are otherwise identical. A detailed description of the same control contents will be omitted.

First, the contents of the special symbol variation process 15 (S141) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 293 is a flow chart showing the contents of the special symbol variation process 15 (S141). As shown in FIG. 293, the special symbol variation processing 15 (S141) is different from the above-described special symbol variation processing 13 (see S141 in FIG. 197), and the value of the time saving counter 203i is not greater than 0 in the processing of S221. (It is 0) (S221: No), the process proceeds to S265, and in the process of S265, when it is determined that the result of the lottery is a small hit (S265: Yes), The difference is that the process to be executed is changed to small winning start process 15 (S266), and the rest is the same.

Next, with reference to FIG. 294, the contents of the small winning start process 15 (S266) will be described. FIG. 294 is a flow chart showing the contents of the small winning start process 15 (S266). As shown in Figure 294, when the small hit start process 15 (S266) is executed, first, the small hit scenario corresponding to the small hit type elected this time is read from the small hit scenario table 202mf (S1591), and then the above The processing of S1502 and S1503, which are the same as the small winning start processing (see S266 in FIG. 199), are executed, and this processing ends.

Next, referring to FIG. 295, the contents of start-up processing 15 will be described. FIG. 295 is a flowchart showing the contents of start-up processing 15. FIG. In this embodiment, the ball is rolled using the rolling device 10675c as part of the small winning game, and the type of the ball entrance into which the ball discharged from the rolling device 10675c enters (outlet, V winning opening ), the game result of the small winning game is configured to be different. A constantly rotating body 10675a is provided in the rolling device 10675c, and the collision between the constantly rotating body 10675a and the ball rolling on the rolling surface 10675d of the rolling device 10675c causes the behavior of the ball to become unstable. By making a rule and rolling the ball in a behavior that is difficult to predict for the player, it is possible to provide a small winning game that does not get bored of the player early.

Furthermore, as described above with reference to FIG. 275, the rolling device 10675c is formed in a mortar shape so that the balls are always discharged out of the rolling device 10675c using the force received by colliding with the rotating body 10675a. It consists of With this configuration, the balls rolling on the rolling device 10675c are always ejected out of the rolling device 10675c without colliding with the rotating body 10675a (without making the behavior of the balls irregular). It keeps it from getting dirty.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment using such a device, in the state where the ball is rolling on the rolling device 10675c in the small winning game, when a power failure such as a power failure occurs, A ball remains in the rolling device 10675c.

In this case, when the power is restored and the driving of the rotating body 10675a is started all the time, the balls are stopped in the rolling device 10675c (stopped on the bottom surface of the mortar-shaped rolling device 10675c). state), there is a risk that the ball will always collide with the rotating body 10675a and roll in a regular manner. In addition, when the regularity is a regularity that easily rolls toward the role item route V winning opening 10677, it is during the small winning game and the ball is present in the rolling device 10675c. There is a risk that the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 will be cut off in a fraudulent manner.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, when a power failure such as a power failure occurs and the power is restored with the ball remaining in the rolling device 10675c, the rotating body 10675a is not always driven. It is configured to execute start-up processing 15 so as to restore power as an error state. As a result, it is possible to suppress the fraudulent act of intentionally shutting off the power of the pachinko machine 10 while the balls are present in the rolling device 10675c. In addition, since the power supply can be restored as an error state while maintaining the power-off state, it is possible to entrust the response after the power supply restoration to the store clerk.

When the start-up process 15 is executed, first, the same S901 to S910 processes as the above-described start-up process 13 (see FIG. 200) are executed, and then the time saving medium counter 203i stored in the RAM 203, the jackpot medium The setting status of the flag 203m, the small hit middle flag 203ea, and the accessory route passage flag 203me is read (S991). In this embodiment, as in the above-described embodiments, the information stored in the RAM 203 can be retained even when the power supply to the pachinko machine 10 is shut off. Since the specific configuration is the same as that of each embodiment described above, the description thereof will be omitted.

When the processing of S991 is finished, the processing of S912 is executed, then the return processing during the small hit is executed (S992), the processing of S914 is executed, and the process proceeds to the main processing 15. In addition, the main processing 15 executes the small winning control processing 15 (see S1092 in FIG. 297) instead of the small winning control processing 13 (see S1072 in FIG. 203) for the above-described main processing 13 (see FIG. 201). The difference is that the Therefore, illustration and description of the content of the main processing 15 are omitted.

Next, with reference to FIG. 296, the contents of the small winning middle return process (S992) executed in the start-up process 15 (see FIG. 295) will be described. Figure 296 is the flowchart which shows the contents of return processing (S992) inside the small hitting. This small hit middle return process (S992) is for executing different power supply return processes according to the game situation of the small hit game when the state in which the power is turned on is during the small hit game.

When the small hit middle return process (S992) is executed, first, it is determined whether the small hit medium flag 203ea is set to ON (S3001), and it is not set to ON, that is, the small hit game is currently in progress. If it is not determined (S3001: No), the rotation start of the accelerating rotating body (always rotating body) 10675a is set (S3009), and this processing ends. On the other hand, in the process of S3001, if it is determined that the small hit medium flag 203ea is set to ON (S3001: Yes), then it is determined whether the V flag (V passage flag) 203ec is set to ON Then (S3002), when it is determined that the V flag (V passage flag) 203ec is set to ON (S3002: Yes), since the game result of the small winning game is already determined, the execution The contents of the progress of the middle small winning scenario are read out from the storage area (backup area) temporarily saved in the power failure processing (S3007), and the information corresponding to the read contents of progress is set in the RAM 203. (S3008), the process proceeds to S3009, and then the process ends.

In the processing of S3002, if it is determined that the V flag (V passage flag) 203ec is not set to ON (S3002: No), that is, the small winning game is currently in progress, and the ball is in the V winning opening. If the ball is not entered, the current game status stored in the game status storage area 203mi is read out (S3003), and it is determined whether the current game status is the accumulation waiting status or the standby status. (S3004). Here, when it is determined that the current game situation is the waiting state for accumulation or the waiting state (S3004: Yes), the ball reaches the downstream side of the rotating body 10652 in the small winning prize device 10650. Since it is not in a state where power is restored normally and there is no problem even if the power is normally restored, the process proceeds to S3007.

On the other hand, in the process of S3004, if it is determined that the current game situation is not the waiting state or the standby situation, that is, the current game situation is the accessory passing situation or the direct V passing situation ( S3004: No), set an error command indicating an error during the small winning game (S3005). As the error command set in the processing of S3005, when the current game situation is the straight V passage situation, the V flag (V passage flag ) 203ec is not set to ON, that is, during the period from when the direct V route sensor SZ3 provided in the direct V flow path 10651e detects the ball until the ball enters the direct V winning hole 10657. , in a state where power is cut off, an error command is set to indicate that the ball has entered the direct V winning opening 10657 during the power cut state, and if the current game situation is the accessory passing situation, An error command is set to indicate that there is a high probability that a ball is present in the rolling device 10675c.

The error command set in the process of S3005 is output to an external device such as the sound lamp controller 113 in the main process of the main controller 110, like other commands. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the above-described error command, the content of the received error command is determined, and an error display based on the determination result is displayed on the display screen of the third pattern display device 81. command is set and output to the display control device 114, and an error display is displayed on the display screen of the third pattern display device 81 by the display control device 114 (see FIG. 285(b)).

When the processing of S3005 is finished, it is next determined whether the current game situation is a role-passing situation (S3006). : No), and since there is no ball in the rolling device 10675c, the process proceeds to S3009. In the process of S3006, if it is determined that the role object is passing (S3006: Yes), the process of S3009 for setting the start of rotation of the accelerating rotating body (constant rotating body) 10675a is skipped and this process is performed. finish.

With this configuration, when a ball exists in the rolling device 10675c (there is a high possibility that the ball exists), an error command indicating this is set, and an accelerating rotating body (always rotating body) is set. ) Since the start-up process 15 can be completed without rotating the 10675a, an illegal act of intentionally turning off the power of the pachinko machine 10 while the balls are present in the rolling device 10675c is performed. can be suppressed. In addition, since the power supply can be restored as an error state while maintaining the power-off state, it is possible to entrust the response after the power supply restoration to the store clerk.

In this process, if the power supply is restored in an error state without starting the rotation of the acceleration rotator (constant rotator) 10675a, the error state is canceled by the clerk operating an error release button (not shown). After that, the acceleration rotator (constant rotator) 10675a is configured to start rotating, but it is not limited to this. The power may be turned on again while the button (RAM erase switch) is being operated.

Next, with reference to FIG. 297, the contents of the small hit control process 15 (S1092) will be described. FIG. 297 is a flow chart showing the contents of the small hit control process 15 (S1092). As shown in FIG. 297, the small hit control process 15 (S1092) is an elapsed counter 203mg for measuring the elapsed time during the small hit game with respect to the small hit control process 13 (see S1072 in FIG. 203). The difference is that a process for updating the value of and a process to be executed during a small winning game are added, and the rest is the same. The same control contents are assigned the same reference numerals, and detailed descriptions thereof are omitted.

When the small hit control process 15 is executed, first, the same S1301 to S1321 processes as the small hit control process 13 (see S1072 in FIG. 203) are executed, and then 1 is set to the value of the elapsed counter 203mg (S1391), and the process ends. In addition, the processing is executed in the order of S1301 and S1304, and when it is determined that the small hitting medium flag 203ea is set to ON in the processing of S1304 (S1304: Yes), then the content of the small hitting operation scenario, and , the value of the elapsed counter 203mg is updated (S1392), and the process proceeds to S1310. In the processing of S1310, when it is determined that it is not the small winning end timing, that is, when it is determined that the current small winning game is being played (S1310: No), the V passing detection processing 15 is executed (S1393), and the game is played. The status setting process is executed (S1394), the small hit middle monitoring process is executed (S1395), and then the process is terminated.

The V passage detection process 15 (S1393) executed in the process of S1393 is executed in place of the V passage detection process 13 (S1625 in FIG. 204) of the ninth embodiment described above. , as described below with reference to FIG. Also, the detailed contents of the game situation setting process (S1394) executed in the process of S1394 will be described with reference to FIG. The contents will be explained with reference to FIG.

Returning to FIG. 297, the description continues. In the process of S1310, if it is determined that it is time to end the small hit (S1310: Yes), the process of S1311 is executed, the value of the elapsed counter 203mg is reset (S1396), and then the small hit control process 13 ( The same processing of S1322 to S1325 as in S1072 in FIG. 203) is executed, and this processing ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 298, the contents of the V passage detection process 15 (S1393) executed in the small winning control process 15 (see S1092 in FIG. 297) will be described. FIG. 298 is a flowchart schematically showing the contents of the V passage detection process 15 (S1393). This V passage detection process 15 (S1393) differs from the above-described V passage detection process (see S1625 in FIG. 204) by changing the processing contents when passing through the V according to the type of the V winning opening through which the ball has passed. There is a difference. For convenience of explanation, the V passage detection process 15 (S1393) is denoted by a different code from the V passage detection process 13 (S1625 in FIG. 204) of the ninth embodiment described above, but substantially the same processing content is be. In that case, only the corresponding relationship will be described, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

When the V passage detection process 15 (S1393) is executed, first, the same processes of S3101 and S3102 as S1601 and S1602 of the V passage detection process 13 (S1625 in FIG. 204) are executed. Then, if it is determined in the processing of S3102 that there is a V passage (the ball has entered the V winning hole) (S3102: Yes), then the V winning hole into which the ball entered this time is the direct V winning hole 10657. (S3103), and if it is determined to be the direct V winning opening 10657 (S3103: Yes), the value of the elapsed counter 203mg is read (S3104), and the read value is within the effective period of the direct V winning It is determined whether there is (S3105).

Here, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 288, operation contents of various devices (rotating body 10652, movable piece 10653, open/close door 10650b) whose operation is controlled during the small winning game are defined in the small winning scenario table 202mf. Therefore, it is configured so that various devices always operate regularly. As a result, the period (V winning effective period) during which the ball can enter each V winning opening (direct V winning opening 10657, role item route V winning opening 10677) in the small winning game this time is preset in the storage area of the RAM 202. is doing. Therefore, the elapsed time from the start of the small winning game is determined by the value of the elapsed counter 203mg, and the determination of S3105 is executed based on the determination result and the preset V winning valid period.

In the process of S3105, if it is determined that the current time is not within the direct V winning valid period (S3105: No), an error command is set (S3109), this process is terminated, and the current time is within the direct V winning valid period. If it is determined that there is (S3105: Yes), the processing of S3106, S3107, and S3108, which are the same processing as S1607, S1608, and S1609 of the above-described V passage detection processing 13 (S1625 in FIG. 204), is executed. exit.

On the other hand, in the processing of S3103, if it is determined that the V winning opening into which the ball entered this time is not the direct V winning opening 10657 (it is the role item route V winning opening 10677) (S3103: No), the elapsed counter 203 mg A value is read out (S3110), and it is determined whether the read value is within the V winning validity period of the role product route V winning opening 10677 (S3111). In the present embodiment, since the rolling motion of the ball is executed by the rolling device 10675c before the ball enters the role item route V prize opening 10677, the V winning validity period of the role item route V prize opening 10677 is the shortest period, that is, only the shortest time (10 seconds) in which the ball can flow into the rolling device 10675c after the small winning game is started is set.

If it is determined in the process of S3111 that it is not the V winning valid period (S3111: No), an error command is set (S3112), and this process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that it is the V winning valid period (S3111: Yes), the process proceeds to S3106. Note that when an error command is set in the processes of S3109 and S3112, the same process as the process of S1604 of the above-described V passage detection process 13 (S1625 in FIG. 204) is executed.

As described above, in the present embodiment, a V winning validity period is set for each of a plurality of V winning openings (direct V winning opening 10657, role item route V winning opening 10677), and a small winning game starts. It is configured to determine whether or not the V winning is normal according to the elapsed time since the ball was entered and the type of the V winning opening into which the ball entered. As a result, in the pachinko machine 10 configured so that the ball reaches the V prize opening via a route with a different period of time required for the ball to arrive (a period from the start of the small winning game), the current V prize is achieved. Whether or not is normal can be determined with high accuracy.

In this embodiment, a plurality of V winning holes are provided, and the period until the ball reaches each V winning hole is different. If there are multiple paths (channels) that the ball can reach, set the V prize valid period in advance for each channel that the ball has flowed down, and determine the path (channel) through which the ball passed. It may be configured to determine whether or not the current V prize is normal based on the determining means for determining and the period required for the ball to reach the V winning opening.

Further, in the present embodiment, in order to reduce the data capacity of the main controller 110, the determination of the V winning valid period is executed based on the value (the value of the elapsed counter 203mg) that is also used for other purposes. However, without being limited to this, a dedicated counter (measurement means) may be provided for determining the V winning valid period. A counter (measuring means) may be provided to determine the V winning valid period based on the measurement result of the measuring means. When configured in this way, the measurement range of the measurement means can be shortened compared to the case of measuring the elapsed period from the start of the small winning game, and the error range to be considered can be narrowed. It is possible to perform determination with higher accuracy. In addition, since the rotating body 10652 is a device through which both a ball that can enter the direct V winning opening 10657 and a ball that can enter the role item route V winning opening 10677 pass, it is possible to use the measuring means described above. Even if there is, it is possible to share the measuring means used when determining the V winning validity period for each V winning opening. In addition, for example, when a ball passes through the accessory route channel 10651da or when a ball flows into the rolling device 10675c, a measurement means is provided to start measurement, and based on the measurement result of the measurement means It may be configured such that the V winning valid period can be determined by using the

Next, referring to FIG. 299, the contents of the game situation setting process (S1394) will be described. FIG. 299 is a flow chart showing the contents of the game situation setting process (S1394). In this game situation setting process (S1394), the game situation during the small winning game is set, and the process for storing it in the game situation storage area 203mi is executed.

When the game situation setting process (S1394) is executed, first, the game situation determination process is executed (S3201). In this game situation determination processing (S3201), detection results (ball detection results) of a plurality of detection means (sensors) provided in the small winning prize winning device 10650 for various flags used to set the game situation ) is executed.

Here, the contents of the gaming situation determination process (S3201) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 300 is a flow chart showing the contents of the gaming situation determination process (S3201). When the game situation determination process (S3201) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the ball entry flag 203mc is on (S3202). When it is determined that the ball entering flag 203mc is not on (S3202: No), it is determined whether the ball entering sensor SZ0 is on (S3203). When it is determined that the ball entering sensor SZ0 is on (S3203: Yes), the ball entering flag 203mc is set to ON (S3204), and the process proceeds to S3205. On the other hand, if it is determined that the ball entering flag 203mc is ON in the process of S3202 (S3202: Yes), or if it is determined that the ball entering sensor SZ0 is not ON (that is, is OFF) in the process of S3203 skips the processing of S3204 and shifts to the processing of S3205.

Next, it is determined whether the storage flag 203md is on (S3205). When it is determined that the storage flag 203md is not ON (S3205: No), it is determined whether the storage sensor SZ1 has detected a game ball (S3206). When it is determined that the storage sensor SZ1 has detected the game ball (S3206: Yes), it is determined whether the game ball can be stored (S3207). When it is determined that the game ball can be stored (S3207: Yes), the storage flag 203md is set to ON (S3208), and the process proceeds to S3209. On the other hand, in the processing of S3207, when it is determined that the game ball is not in the storage period (S3207: No), an error command is set (S3217), and the processing is finished as it is.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the storage flag 203md is ON in the process of S3205 (S3205: Yes), or if it is determined that the storage sensor SZ1 has not detected the game ball in the process of S3206 (S3206: No ), the process of S3207 and S3208 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S3209.

In the process of S3209, it is determined whether the V route passage flag 203me is on (S3209). When it is determined that the V route passage flag 203me is not ON (S3209: No), it is determined whether the direct V route sensor SZ3 is ON (S3210). If it is determined that the direct V route sensor SZ3 is on (S3210: Yes), then it is determined whether it is a passable period (S3211). If it is determined that the passage is possible (S3211: Yes), the V route passage flag 203me is set to ON (S3212), and the process proceeds to S3213. On the other hand, in the process of S3211, if it is determined that it is not the passable period (S3211: No), an error command is set (S3217), and this process ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S3209 that the V route passage flag 203me is ON (S3209: Yes), or if it is determined in the process of S3210 that the direct V route sensor SZ3 is not ON (S3210: No), the processing of S3211 to S3212 is skipped, and the processing proceeds to S3213.

In the processing of S3213, it is determined whether or not the accessory route passage flag 203mf is ON (S3213). When it is determined that the accessory route passage flag 203mf is not on (S3213: No), it is determined whether the accessory route sensor SZ2 is on (S3214). When it is determined that the role object route sensor SZ2 is on (S3214: Yes), it is determined whether it is a passable period (S3215). If it is determined that it is not a passable period (S3215: No), an error command is set (S3217), and this process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that it is the passable period (S3215: Yes), the role product route passage flag 203mf is set to ON (S3216), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of S3213, if it is determined that the role object route passage flag 203mf is on (S3213: Yes), or if it is determined that the role object route sensor SZ2 is not on in the process of S3214 ( S3214: No), the processing of S3215 and S3216 is skipped, and this processing ends.

Returning to FIG. 299, the description of the game situation setting process (S1394) is continued. After finishing the game situation determination process (S3201) described with reference to FIG. If it is determined (S3202: No), the ball is not stored in the storage section 10652a of the rotating body 10652, so the storage waiting status is set as the current game status (S3203), and the process proceeds to S3213. .

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S3202 that the storage flag 203md is set to ON (S3202: Yes), then it is determined whether the ball entry flag 203mc is set to ON (S3204). When it is determined that the flag 203mc is not set to ON (S3204: No), that is, the storage flag 203md is set to ON even though the entering ball sensor SZ0 has not detected a ball. If it is determined that the ball is stored in the storage unit 10652a using a route other than the normal route, or if the sensor is out of order, an error command is set (S3205), and this processing ends.

In the process of S3204, if it is determined that the ball entry flag 203mc is set to ON (S3204: Yes), the current gaming situation is a state in which the ball is normally stored in the storage section 10652a of the rotating body 10652. A standby state is set to indicate that (S3206). Next, it is determined whether the accessory route passage flag 203mf is set to ON (S3207), and if it is set to ON (S3207: Yes), the storage flag 203md is set to OFF (S3208), is set to the accessory passing situation (S3209), and the process proceeds to S3210. On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S3207 that the accessory route passage flag 203mf is not set to ON (S3207: No), the processes of S3208 and S3209 are skipped and the process proceeds to S3210.

In the process of S3210, it is determined whether the V route passage flag 203me is set to ON (S3210), and if it is determined that it is set to ON (S3210: Yes), the storage flag 203md is set to OFF ( S3211), the current game situation is set to the direct V passage situation (S3212), and the process proceeds to S3213. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S3210 that the V route passage flag 203me is not set to ON (S3210: No), the processes of S3211 and S3212 are skipped and the process proceeds to S3213.

After executing the processing of S3203, after executing the processing of S3212, or after determining that the V route passage flag 203me is not set to ON in the processing of S3210, in the processing of S3213 executed, the current game situation The game status stored in the storage area 203mi is read (S3213). Then, the read game situation is compared with the game situation set in the current processing (S3214), and it is determined whether or not the transition of the game situation is normal (S3215). Here, the type of game situation stored in the game situation storage area 203mi is set according to the progress of the small winning game, and after the accumulation waiting situation is set, the waiting situation is set, and then In accordance with the path through which the winning ball of the small prize winning device 10650 flows down, the condition of the passage of the accessory or the condition of the direct V passage is set.

In the processing of S3215, it is determined whether or not the game status is set in the order corresponding to the progress status of the small winning game described above. As a result, an act of illegally intruding the ball into the small winning prize device 10650 during the small winning game, for example, without storing the ball in the storage part 10652a of the rotating body 10652, making a hole in the glass unit 16 It is possible to determine that the action of putting the ball directly into the second flow path 10651c (see FIG. 270) has been performed. In the process of S3215, if it is determined that the content of the transition (transition) of the game situation is normal (S3215: Yes), the game situation set in this process is stored in the game situation storage area 203mi (S3216). End the process. In this embodiment, a storage area (current storage area) for storing the current game situation and a storage area (past storage area) for storing the past game situation are provided in the game situation storage area 203mi. , when a new game situation is set, the information indicating the previously set game situation is shifted to the past storage area. The oldest game situation is deleted from the past storage area.

In the process of S3215, if it is determined that the content of the transition of the game status (transition) is not normal (S3215: No), an error command is set (S3205), and this process ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 301, the contents of the monitoring process (S1395) during the small hit will be described. FIG. 301 is a flow chart showing the contents of the small hit middle monitoring process (S1395). This small hit middle monitoring process (S1395) is a process for monitoring an abnormal state that can occur during a small hit game.

When the small hit middle monitoring process (S1395) is executed, first, it is determined whether the overflow sensor (out sensor) SZa (see FIG. 270) is on. This overflow sensor (out sensor) SZa is a sensor for detecting a ball that has entered the small winning prize device 10650 from the first inlet into the out flow path 10651ba.

Next, it is determined whether the rotating body 10675a is positioned at the operating position (S3302), and then it is determined whether the storage sensor SZ1 is detecting the ball (whether the storage sensor SZ1 is ON) (S3303). In the process of S3303, if it is determined that the storage sensor SZ1 is in the ON state (S3303: Yes), then the process proceeds to S3304. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S3303 that the storage sensor SZ1 is not set to ON (S3303: No), an error command is set (S3309), and this processing ends.

<Regarding control processing of the audio ramp control device 113 in the thirteenth embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 302 to 304, the control contents of the audio ramp control device 113 in the thirteenth embodiment will be described. In the thirteenth embodiment, the effect update processing 15 (see FIG. 302) and the hit-related processing 15 (see FIG. ) and are different. Since the rest is the same, the detailed description of the same control contents will be omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 302, the content of effect update processing 15 (S4191) will be described. FIG. 302 is a flow chart showing the contents of effect update processing 15 (S4191). When the effect update process 15 (S4191) is executed, first, it is determined whether the value of the elapsed period counter 223ma is 1 or more (S45001). 1 is added to the value of the period counter 223ma (S45002). Then, S45003 determines whether the value of the elapsed period counter 223ma is a value corresponding to 40 seconds.

In the process of S45003, if it is determined that the current is the timing corresponding to the lapse of 40 seconds based on the value of the elapsed period counter 223ma (S45003: Yes), the jackpot type stored in the jackpot type storage area, namely , Set a command for display indicating a suggestive effect for suggesting the big win type set at the time of this small win winning (S45004), and execute processing for updating the contents of the effect being executed ( S45005), the process ends.

By configuring in this way, when the elapsed period from the start of the small winning game reaches the predetermined period, the big winning type corresponding to the big winning game executed when the V prize is won in the small winning game this time. can be suggested during a jackpot game. In this embodiment, the suggestive effect is executed at the timing 40 seconds after the start of the small winning game, but the timing at which the suggestive effect is executed is not limited to this. The value may be appropriately set as long as it is a length of time that can elapse only when the ball rolls on the rolling device 10675c.

For example, in the hit related process 15 (see S43071 in FIG. 303) to be described later, when a small winning game situation command indicating the status of passing the role is received, a flag (a flag during passing of the role) is set to ON. , when the flag of the passage of the character object is set to ON and the value of the elapsed period counter 223ma is equal to or longer than a predetermined period (for example, 40 seconds), the suggestive effect may be executed. good.

In addition, in the present embodiment, regardless of the set jackpot type, it is configured to execute a suggestive effect when a specific elapsed period (40 seconds) has passed. The execution condition (elapsed period) for executing the suggestive effect may be different depending on the type, and in this case, the set jackpot type is an advantageous jackpot type for the player (for example, the time saving state after the jackpot game ends is set, and the jackpot type with a large number of round games executed as a jackpot game), the execution conditions set corresponding to the jackpot type that is disadvantageous to the player (for example, the normal state after the jackpot game ends It is preferable to make it easier to establish than the execution condition set corresponding to the set jackpot type or the jackpot type with a small number of round games executed as the jackpot game. As a result, the suggesting effect suggesting that the jackpot type is advantageous to the player can be made easier to execute than the suggesting effect suggesting that the jackpot type is disadvantageous to the player. The player can be interested in the performance.

On the other hand, the set jackpot type corresponds to the jackpot type that is advantageous to the player (for example, the jackpot type in which the time saving state is set after the jackpot game ends, and the jackpot type in which the number of round games executed as the jackpot game is large). The execution condition set by is set in accordance with the jackpot type disadvantageous to the player (for example, the jackpot type in which the normal state is set after the jackpot game ends, or the jackpot type in which the number of round games executed as the jackpot game is small). It may be configured to make it more difficult to satisfy than the set execution condition. As a result, since it is possible to make it difficult to execute the suggesting effect suggesting that the jackpot type is advantageous to the player, the game is played when the suggesting effect suggesting that the jackpot type is advantageous to the player is executed. It can give people a special feeling of satisfaction.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the jackpot type stored in the jackpot type storage area is read out to set the effect mode of the suggestive effect. For example, in the case of the pachinko machine 10 in which the small winning type and the big winning type are set in association with each other, a suggestive performance is provided according to the small winning type of the small winning winning this time. It may be configured to set the effect mode of.

Next, with reference to FIG. 303, the contents of the win-related process 15 (S43071) will be described. FIG. 303 is a flow chart showing the contents of the win-related process 15 (S43071). In this win-related process 15 (S43071), the contents of the process when a command related to a small win set on the main controller 110 side is received is performed in the above-described ninth embodiment. 205 S43001)), but the rest is the same. The same reference numerals are assigned to the same contents, and detailed description thereof is omitted.

When the hit related process 15 (S43071) is executed, first, the same processes of S4404 to S4408 and S44001 as the hit related process 13 (see S43001 in FIG. 205) are executed. Then, in the processing of S44001, if it is determined that the opening command for the small hit is received (S44001: Yes), 1 is set to the value of the elapsed period counter 223ma (S44051), and then, to indicate the start of the small hit game is set (S44052), and this processing is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the small winning opening command has not been received (S44001: No), then it is determined whether or not the small winning gaming situation command has been received (S44053). This game situation command for a small hit is a command set when a new game situation is stored in the game situation storage area 203mi in the above-described game situation setting process (see S1394 in FIG. 299). It is a command having information for indicating the stored game status.

In the processing of S44053, when it is determined that the game status command for small winning is received (S44053: Yes), the command for display corresponding to the received command is set (S44054), and this processing ends. The process of S44054 is a process for setting a display command for displaying a display mode for showing the progress of the small winning game on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, for example, see FIG. Then, a display command indicating a display mode corresponding to each game situation is set.

If it is determined that the game status command for a small hit has not been received (S44053: No), then it is determined whether a small hit winning command has been received (S44055), and if it is determined that it has been received (S44055: Yes), small hit prize command processing is executed (S44056), and this processing ends. The contents of this small winning prize command process (S44056) will be described later with reference to FIG. In the processing of S44055, if it is determined that the small winning prize command has not been received (S44055: No), then it is determined whether the ending command has been received (S4409).

In the process of S4409, if it is determined that the ending command has been received (S4409: Yes), the ending command for display is set (S4410), and then it is determined whether the value of the elapsed period counter 223ma is 1 or more ( S44057), if it is determined to be 1 or more (S44057: Yes), the value of the elapsed period counter 223ma is reset (S44058), and this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S44057, if it is determined that it is not 1 or more, that is, if it is determined that the current ending command is a command indicating the end of the jackpot game (S44057: No), the process of S44058 is skipped. to terminate this process.

If it is determined in the process of S4409 that the ending command has not been received (S4409: No), it is determined whether an error command has been received (S44059). A display command corresponding to the received information is set (S44060), and this process ends. If it is determined that an error command has not been received (S44059: No), this process ends.

Next, the contents of the small winning prize command process (S44055) executed in the winning related process 15 (see S43071 in FIG. 303) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 304 is a flow chart showing the contents of the small winning prize command process (S44055). In this small hit winning command process (S44055), a process for selecting a display comment of a different display mode according to the type of the entrance into which the game ball entered during the small hit game is executed.

First, when the small winning prize command process (S44055) is executed, it is determined whether the command received this time is a command indicating a prize to the prize route V winning port 10677 (S44101), and the prize route V winning If it is determined that the command indicates winning to the mouth 10677 (S44101: Yes), a display command indicating winning to the role item route V winning mouth 10677 is set (S44102), and the process proceeds to S44107.

In the processing of S44101, if it is determined that the command received this time is not a command indicating winning to the role item route V winning port 10677 (S44101: No), then the command received this time is the direct V route V If it is determined whether the command indicates winning to the winning opening (direct V winning opening) 10657 (S44103), and if it is determined that the command indicates winning to the direct V route V winning opening (direct V winning opening) 10657 (S44103: Yes), sets a display command indicating the winning to the direct V route V winning opening (direct V winning opening) 10657 (S44104), and shifts to the processing of S44107.

In the processing of S44103, if it is determined that the command received this time is not a command indicating winning to the direct V route V winning mouth (direct V winning mouth) 10657 (S44103: No), next, the command received this time is a command indicating winning to the outlets 10680a and 10680b for the accessory route (S44105), and is determined to be a command indicating winning to the outlets 10680a and 10680b for the accessory route. (S44105: Yes), it sets a display command indicating winning to the outlets 10680a and 10680b for the accessory route (S44106), and shifts to the processing of S44107.

If it is determined in the processing of S44105 that the command received this time is not a command indicating winning to the out-ports 10680a and 10680b for the accessory route (S44105: No), the processing proceeds directly to S44107. In the process of S44107, the jackpot type stored in the jackpot type storage area is read (S44107), and based on the read jackpot type and the winning result, the display comment selection table 222ma is referenced to determine the display comment. (S44108), a display command indicating the determined display comment is set (S44109), and this processing ends.

Note that the display comment set in the process of S44108 of the above-described small winning prize command process (S44055) is also the technical concept of setting the suggested effect executed in the above-described effect update process 15 (see S4191 in FIG. 302). You may set based on the same technical thought.

<14th Embodiment>
Next, a fourteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 305 to 308. FIG. In the thirteenth embodiment described above, according to the type of the small winning game and the game state, the ball winning the small winning device 10650 can win the direct V winning opening 10657 Small winning game and role product route A small winning game that can win a prize in the V winning port 10677 is configured to be executable, and a gaming state (time-saving state) is set in which there is a high possibility that the next big winning game will be executed (the next big winning is almost decided). If it is, in order to finish the small winning game in a short time, the small winning game that can win the direct V winning opening 10657 is made easy to be executed, and in the normal state which is a more disadvantageous gaming state than the time saving state , In order to enjoy the small winning game for a long time, it is configured to make it easy to execute the small winning game that can win in the role item route V winning opening 10677.

Then, in the small winning game that can win the role item route V winning opening 10677, the ball rolls in the rolling device 10675c to make the behavior of the ball irregular, so that the ball can win the role item route V prize. By making it difficult for the player to predict whether or not the ball will enter the opening 10677 and at what timing the ball will enter the role item route V winning opening 10677, the player can easily understand the game contents of the small winning game. It could keep you interested for a long time.

However, in the pachinko machine 10 of the thirteenth embodiment described above, by making the behavior of the ball irregular, it is possible to determine whether or not the ball enters the role item route V winning opening 10677 and at what timing. Although it is possible to make it difficult for the player to predict whether the ball will enter the V winning hole 10677, the ball enters the accessory route V winning hole 10677 regardless of the period during which the ball rolls in the rolling device 10675c. Since the rate of play is always a constant rate (1/4), there is a problem that a player who has been playing for a long time gradually becomes bored with the game.

In addition, since the behavior of the ball rolling in the rolling device 10675c becomes irregular, the ball is discharged outside the rolling device 10675c in a short time (out ports 10680a, 10680b, or the role item route V winning port 10677). 283(b) to 284), which is executed based on the ball entering the rolling device 10675c, is shortened. However, there is a problem that the performance effect is lowered and a game that is difficult for the player to understand is provided.

On the other hand, in the fourteenth embodiment, the ball rolling in the rolling device 10675c is in a state where it is easy to enter the out ports 10680a and 10680b (at the same rate as in the above-described thirteenth embodiment). It is possible to set a state in which it is possible to hit the ball) and a state in which it is difficult to hit the ball (a state in which it is difficult to hit the ball compared to the thirteenth embodiment described above). Furthermore, the state is configured to vary according to the elapsed period of the small winning game.

By configuring in this way, the ball rolling in the rolling device 10675c is easily entered into the out ports 10680a and 10680b based on the elapsed period of the small winning game (the thirteenth embodiment described above). (a state in which the ball can be entered at the same rate as ) and a state in which it is difficult to enter the ball (a state in which the ball is difficult to enter compared to the thirteenth embodiment described above) are set. That is, it is possible to set a state in which a ball can be entered into the accessory route V prize-winning hole 10677 and a state in which it is easier to enter a ball than in that state (a state in which it is difficult to enter other ball holes). Therefore, it is possible to keep the player interested in the game contents of the small winning game for a long time.

Furthermore, in the fourteenth embodiment, the balls rolling in the rolling device 10675c are kept out of the outlet for a predetermined period (two seconds) after the period in which the balls can flow into the rolling device 10675c is set. It is configured to set a state in which it is difficult to enter the ball at 10680a and 10680b. As a result, it is possible to prevent the ball that has flowed into the rolling device 10675c from entering the out ports 10680a and 10680b in a short period of time.

In addition, in the fourteenth embodiment, even if a certain period of time (40 seconds) has passed after the period in which the ball can flow into the rolling device 10675c is set, the ball is unlikely to enter the out ports 10680a and 10680b. is configured to set As a result, the ball rolls for a long period of time (40 seconds or longer) in the rolling device 10675c, thereby increasing the percentage of balls entering the role item route V winning opening 10677. Therefore, since the player can play the game while expecting the execution period of the small winning game to be longer, it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored with the game during the small winning game.

Further, in the fourteenth embodiment, the player is notified of the period (remaining time) until a state in which it is difficult for the ball rolling in the rolling device 10675c to enter the out ports 10680a and 10680b is set. configured as possible. This makes it possible to determine in advance how long the ball will roll in the rolling device 10675c to set favorable conditions.

First, referring to FIG. 305, the configuration of the accessory device 10675 in the fourteenth embodiment will be described. The accessory device 10675 of the present embodiment is different from the accessory device 10675 of the thirteenth embodiment described above in that regulating pieces 10678a and 10678b for regulating the entry of balls into the out ports 10680a and 10680b are added. are different, and otherwise identical. The same configurations are denoted by the same reference numerals, and descriptions thereof are omitted.

Fig. 305(a) is a front view schematically showing the accessory device 10675 showing a state in which the regulation pieces 10678a and 10678b protrude, and Fig. 305(b) is a state in which the regulation pieces 10678a and 10678b protrude. is a plan view schematically showing the accessory device 10675. FIG. As shown in FIG. 305(a), in this embodiment, restricting pieces 10678a and 10678b are provided for restricting balls from entering the out ports 10680a and 10680b. Specifically, a left restricting piece 10678a for restricting the ball from entering the left out port 10680a and a right restricting piece 10678b for restricting the ball from entering the right out port 10680b are provided. Each regulating piece 10678 has a regulating position (see FIG. 306(a)) where the opening of the out port 10680 is blocked according to a predetermined rule, and an open position where the opening of the out port 10680 is not blocked more than the regulating position. The position (see FIG. 306(b)) is configured to be variable.

Next, with reference to FIG. 306, the behavior of the balls inside the rolling device 10675c in this embodiment will be described. FIG. 306(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the behavior of the ball when the regulating pieces 10678a and 10678b are positioned at the regulating positions, and FIG. FIG. 4 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the behavior of a ball when positioned at the open position;

In the state where the regulation pieces 10678a and 10678b regulate the entry of balls into the out ports 10680a and 10680b, as shown in FIG. By colliding with 10678b, it becomes difficult for a ball to enter the out holes 10680a and 10680b.

On the other hand, when the regulation pieces 10678a and 10678b are positioned at the open position, as shown in FIG. can. By varying the regulation pieces 10678a and 10678b in this way, it is possible to vary the ease with which the ball enters the out ports 10680a and 10680b. It is possible to change the ease of entering the ball.

In the fourteenth embodiment, when the ball collides with the regulation pieces 10678a and 10678b while the regulation pieces 10678a and 10678b are positioned at the regulation position (see FIG. 306), the central portion of the rolling device 10675c Although the regulating pieces 10678a and 10678b are configured so that the ball rebounds toward the sphere, the regulating pieces 10678a and 10678b are not limited to this. The regulating pieces 10678a and 10678b may be configured to have a shape such that when the ball collides with the regulating pieces 10678a and 10678b, part or all of the colliding ball rebounds toward the role item route V winning opening 10677. By configuring in this way, the regulation pieces 10678a and 10678b serve as restricting means for restricting the entry of balls into the out-ports 10680a and 10680b, and as guiding means for guiding the ball to the role item route V winning port 10677. , and it is possible to set a state in which the ball is more likely to enter the Accessory Route V prize opening 10677 more positively.

Further, in the fourteenth embodiment, both the restricting pieces 10678a and 10678b are interlocked and varied, but only one of them (for example, the restricting piece 10678a) is positioned at the restricting position. It may be configured to be executable. By configuring in this way, it is possible to gradually set a state in which it is difficult for the ball to enter the out ports 10680a and 10680b, and it is possible to make the game during the small winning game more interesting. Become.

Next, with reference to FIG. 307, the relationship between the flow of the small winning game in this embodiment and the operation contents of the regulation pieces 10678a and 10678b will be described. FIG. 307 is a timing chart schematically showing the flow of the small winning game in this embodiment. As shown in FIG. 307, this embodiment differs from the above-described thirteenth embodiment in that the operation of restricting pieces 10678a and 10678b is added, and the rest is the same. A detailed description of the same contents will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 307, the regulating pieces 10678a and 10678b are devices whose operation is controlled according to a predetermined rule triggered by the start of the small winning game (the start of the opening period). Although illustration is omitted, the operation patterns (scenarios) of the regulating pieces 10678a and 10678b are the same as those of the other devices (rotating body 10652, movable piece 10653, open/close door 10650b). ).

Specifically, the initial position (regulation position) is maintained until 9 seconds (first period) elapses after the start of the small hit game, and then the initial position (regulation position) to the operating position (open position) for 3 seconds (second period). After maintaining the operating position (open position) for 38 seconds (third period), the operating position (open position) is moved to the initial position (regulating position) over 2 seconds (fourth period), and the operation scenario is configured to complete.

According to FIG. 307, the timing at which the winning ball of the small prize winning device 10650 flows into the rolling device 10675c of the accessory device 10675 is the shortest and the regulation pieces 10678a and 10678b are in the second period, so the shortest rolling When the ball enters the moving device 10675c, it becomes difficult for the ball to enter the out ports 10680a and 10680b at that time. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a situation in which a ball flows into the rolling device 10675c and immediately enters the out ports 10680a and 10680b.

Further, in this embodiment, based on the value of the elapsed period counter 223ma at the time when the accessory root sensor SZ2 detects the passage of the ball, the rolling device 10675c measures the period during which the ball is rolling, It is configured to be displayed on the display screen of the pattern display device 81 . In addition to displaying the elapsed time, the player can be notified of the remaining period until the regulation pieces 10678a and 10678b reach the fourth period.

According to the example shown in FIG. 307, the rotator 10652 is moved to the initial position, and "00:00" indicating 0 seconds, which is the reference as the progress display, is displayed at the timing when the role object root sensor SZ2 detects the passage of the ball. After that, according to the addition status of the value of the elapsed period counter 223ma, when the third period is reached, "02:00" indicates that 2 seconds have passed. It is configured to display "42:00" indicating that 42 seconds have elapsed when the 5th period is reached.

Here, with reference to FIG. 308, the characteristic display contents displayed in this embodiment will be described. FIG. 308(a) is a diagram showing an example of the display contents at the time when the ball reaches the role object route (after the ball has passed through sensor SZ2) and 35 seconds have passed. (b) is a diagram showing an example of display contents when 40 seconds have elapsed since the ball reached the role product route (after the role product route sensor SZ2 detected the passage of the ball).

As described above with reference to FIG. 307, when the operation scenario for the regulating pieces 10678a and 10678b reaches the fourth period, the regulating pieces 10678a and 10678b change from the operating position (open position) to the initial position (regulating position), It is configured such that a ball gradually rolling in the rolling device 10675c is less likely to enter the out ports 10680a and 10680b. Then, when the remaining period until the operation scenario for the regulating pieces 10678a and 10678b reaches the fourth period becomes 5 seconds (when 33 seconds have passed since the third period was set), FIG. As shown in a), in the display area HR25 of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, the comment "5 seconds remaining" is displayed as a display mode indicating the remaining period until reaching the fourth period. In addition, a door 1804 is displayed, and an effect is executed that makes the player predict that something will come out of the door 1804, thereby varying the effect mode of the character challenge effect being executed on the display screen. Executes a suggestive production that suggests Furthermore, the characters "Do your best!!" are displayed in the sub-display area Ds. Note that the display mode indicating the remaining period until reaching the fourth period displayed in the display area HR25 is configured so as to be displayed in units of one second as the value of the elapsed period counter 223ma is updated. It is configured to display a countdown of "5 seconds" and "4 seconds".

When five seconds have passed since the display screen shown in FIG. 308(a) was displayed, as shown in FIG. "40:00" is displayed, characters 1805a and 1805b imitating angels appear from the door 1804, and an effect is executed in which the display mode of the bomb 1803 used in the character challenge effect is changed to a star pattern display mode. be done. As a result, a game state advantageous to the player, that is, a game state in which it is difficult for the ball to enter the out ports 10680a and 10680b (a state in which the regulation pieces 10678a and 10678b block the out ports 10680a and 10680b (see FIG. 306(a)). )))) is reported. Then, in the sub-display area Ds, a comment "Good job!!" is displayed to congratulate the player.

As described above, in the present embodiment, it is possible to provide an easy-to-understand game for the player by varying the production mode of the character challenge production based on the operation contents of the regulation pieces 10678a and 10678b. By notifying the player of the remaining period until a game state advantageous to the player is set in the display area HR25, the player can be made to pay more attention to the behavior of the ball rolling in the rolling device 10675c. can.

Further, in the present embodiment, the elapsed period is not displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 based on the elapsed time from the start of the small winning game, but the accessory route sensor SZ2 detects the ball. Based on the timing, the elapsed period (the elapsed period displayed in the display area HR24) is displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, and the regulation pieces 10678a and 10678b are displayed based on the elapsed time after the small winning game is started. is configured to display the remaining period until reaching the fourth period (the remaining period displayed in the display area HR25). Even if the timing at which the SZ2 detects the passage of the ball is slightly different, the elapsed time period displayed in the display area HR24 can be displayed in correspondence with the actual behavior of the ball, thereby making the player feel uncomfortable. It can be difficult to give.

Furthermore, since the timing at which the role object root sensor SZ2 detects the passage of the ball differs depending on the behavior of the ball flowing down the small prize winning device 10650, the display mode of the elapsed period displayed in the display area HR24 and the display area HR25 It is possible to change the relationship with the display mode of the remaining period displayed in . Specifically, according to the example shown in FIG. 307, the fourth period of the regulation pieces 10678a and 10678b is set at the timing when "00:00" indicating the elapsed period of 0 seconds is displayed in the display area HR24. Since the remaining period is 40 seconds, as shown in FIG. A display mode indicating that it is seconds is displayed. If it is delayed, the remaining period until the fourth period of the regulation pieces 10678a and 10678b is set is 38 seconds at the timing when "00:00" indicating the elapsed period of 0 seconds is displayed in the display area HR24. Therefore, when "33:00" indicating the elapsed time period of 33 seconds is displayed in the display area HR24, the display mode indicating that the remaining time period is 5 seconds is displayed in the display area HR25.

In this way, the correspondence between the elapsed period and the remaining period is achieved by differentiating the trigger for calculating the elapsed period (detection of the ball by the accessory root sensor SZ2) and the trigger for calculating the remaining period (start of the small winning game). The relationship can be made random, and it is suppressed that the remaining period until the fourth period reaches the player is easily discriminated based on the elapsed period displayed from the time before the remaining period is displayed. can do.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 307, an operation scenario is set for the regulating pieces 10678a and 10678b for a longer period than the other devices. By the time the action scenario that is set is completed, the end condition of the small winning game (the predetermined small winning game period has ended and the ball does not remain in the small winning prize device 10650 ) is established, it is preferable to forcibly end the action scenario in the middle and move to the initial position. By configuring in this way, it is possible to suppress the game period of the small winning game from becoming unnecessarily long.

In the fourteenth embodiment described above, the variable means (regulation However, the same technical concept may be applied. For example, when using a three-hole croon 6710 as described above in FIG. , V winning opening) and a winning opening unfavorable to the player (for example, an out winning opening) are provided, and the winning of balls into the winning opening unfavorable to the player is regulated based on the passage of time. Means may be configured, and by variably operating the variable means, the ball rolling in the 3-hole croon 6710 is more likely to win a winning opening that is advantageous to the player than a winning opening that is disadvantageous to the player. It is good also as a structure which guide|induces to.

Furthermore, when the distribution rotor 6750f as shown in FIG. 189 is provided instead of the rolling device 10675c, the player can The variable means may be configured to be variably controllable so that the ball can easily enter an advantageous winning hole.

<First Modification of Fourteenth Embodiment>
Next, a first modification of the fourteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 309 to 311. FIG. In the fourteenth embodiment described above, the longer the game period of the small winning game, that is, the rolling period of the ball in the rolling device 10675c, the easier it is for the ball to enter the V winning opening. On the other hand, in the first modification, the longer the game period of the small winning game, that is, the longer the rolling period of the balls in the rolling device 10675c, the easier it is for a plurality of balls to exist in the rolling device 10675c. The difference is that the state in which a plurality of balls are present in the moving device 10675c makes it easier for the ball to enter the V winning hole than the state in which one ball is present in the rolling device 10675c. ing.

That is, the first modified example has the same technical idea as the fourteenth embodiment described above, that is, the technology that the longer the rolling period of the ball in the rolling device 10675c, the easier it is for the ball to enter the V winning hole. It is an embodiment of the idea in another concrete example.

First, with reference to FIGS. 309 and 310, the configuration of the accessory device 10675 of the first modified example will be described. Note that the same reference numerals are given to the same configurations as those of the fourteenth embodiment described above, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 309(a) is a front view schematically showing the configuration of the accessory device 10675 in this modification, and FIG. 309(b) is a schematic illustration of the configuration of the accessory device 10675 in this modification. 1 is a plan view showing FIG. This modification differs from the structure of the accessory device 10675 of the fourteenth embodiment described above (see FIG. 305) in that the structure of the regulating pieces 10678a and 10678b is deleted and the structure of the constant rotating body 10675a is changed. are otherwise identical.

As shown in FIGS. 309(a) and 309(b), in this modified example, a second accessory route V winning opening 10677a is provided at the center of the constant rotating body 10675a. This second role item route V winning opening 10677a has an opening always above the rotating body 10675a so that a ball cannot enter as long as one ball is rolling in the rolling device 10675c. is provided.

Next, with reference to FIG. 310, the behavior of balls when a plurality of (two) balls roll in the rolling device 10675c in this modified example will be described. FIG. 310(a) is a schematic diagram showing a state in which a plurality of balls are rolling in the rolling device 10675c, and FIG. 310(b) shows the behavior of the balls when they collide. It is a schematic diagram.

As shown in FIG. 310(a), when a plurality of balls are rolling in the rolling device 10675c, each ball constantly collides with the rotating body 10675a at different timings. behavior. In addition, since the balls collide with the rotating body 10675a regularly, even if a plurality of balls flow into the rolling device 10675c at different timings, the momentum (rolling speed) of each ball is substantially constant. Become. In this state, if the collision between the ball and the constantly rotating body 10675a is repeated many times, there will be opportunities for the balls to collide with each other.

When the balls rolling in the rolling device 10675c collide with each other, the behavior of the balls after the collision is irregular depending on the angle and location of the collision. 310(b), one ball (ball Ta2) floats and enters the second role item route V prize opening 10677a.

In this way, by providing a V winning hole that cannot (is difficult to win) with only one ball, when a plurality of balls flow into the rolling device 10675c, the balls easily enter the V winning hole. can do. In addition, in this embodiment, the V winning opening is arranged at a position where balls that have collided with each other and floated up can win. V winning openings may be added to places where the ball is likely to enter the V winning opening. A V winning opening may be added to the area so that balls can enter when they collide with each other.

Next, with reference to FIG. 311, the details of the operation for causing a plurality of balls to flow into the rolling device 10675c in this modification will be described. FIG. 311 is a timing chart showing the operation contents of various devices (opening/closing door 10650b, rotating body 10652, movable piece 10653) during a small winning game in this modified example. As shown in FIG. 311, in this modified example, the operation details of the regulating pieces 10678a and 10678b are deleted and the operation details of the rotating body 10652 are varied in comparison with the fourteenth embodiment (see FIG. 307). are different.

Specifically, during one small winning game, the rotating body 10652 is operated three times, and the ball is moved to the rotating body 10652 in both the second operation (2 seconds) and the third operation (3 seconds). is configured to be stored in the storage portion 10652a. With this configuration, the balls stored in the storage portion 10652a during the second operation of the rotating body 10652 first flow into the rolling device 10675c, and then are stored in the storage portion 10652a during the third operation. Balls are allowed to flow into rolling device 10675c.

That is, in a state where the ball that has flowed into the rolling device 10675c based on the second operation of the rotating body 10652 continues to roll, when the ball flows into the rolling device 10675c based on the third operation, the rolling It is configured to allow multiple spheres to exist within device 10675c. By configuring in this way, it is possible to perform a small winning game while hoping that the ball that first flows into the rolling device 10675c rolls for a long period of time.

In addition, during the round period, a state where the rotating body 10652 is located at the operating position and a state where it is located at the initial position are set. Otherwise, two balls cannot flow into the rolling device 10675c. As a result, the player can be provided with the enjoyment of winning a ball in the small prize winning device 10650 at the right timing, and the player can be motivated to play the game.

It should be noted that, in this modification, as described above, depending on the timing at which the ball is awarded to the small prize winning device 10650, there are cases where it is advantageous to the player and cases where it is disadvantageous for the player. There is a problem that it becomes easy to provide disadvantageous games to beginners who have never played.

In order to solve this problem, it is preferable to provide a delay means for varying (irregularly delaying) the period until the winning ball of the small prize winning device 10650 reaches the rotor 10652 . By providing the delay means in this way, even if the timing for winning the ball to the small winning prize device 10650 is measured, the timing for the ball to reach the rotating body 10652 can be randomized by the delay means. can solve the problem. Here, a configuration example of the delay means will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 312(a) is a front view schematically showing the configuration of a delay device 11700, which is delay means provided between the opening/closing door 10650b of the small prize winning device 10650 and the rotating body 10652. FIG. 312(b) is a plan view schematically showing the configuration of delay device 11700, which is delay means provided between opening/closing door 10650b of small winning prize device 10650 and rotating body 10652. FIG.

As shown in FIG. 312(a), a delay device 11700 is provided so as to receive a ball that has entered the small prize winning device 10650 from the open/close door 10650b in an open state and has flowed down the rolling wall 11650f. The delay device 11700 has a mortar shape, and a discharge port 10700b for guiding the balls to the rotating body 10652 is formed at the bottom of the ball rolling surface 10700a. As shown in FIG. 312(b), the rolling wall 11650f and the delay device 11700 are arranged so that the ball flowing down the rolling wall 11650f rolls on the ball rolling surface 10700a of the delay device 11700 in an arc. It is configured such that as the momentum of the balls rolling on the ball rolling surface 10700a weakens, the balls flow down toward the outlet 10700b. Here, as shown in FIG. 312(b), a prevention wall is formed on the upstream side of the rolling wall 11650f (on the right side from the viewpoint of FIG. 312(b)) to prevent the balls from falling from the rolling wall 11650f. On the other hand, no prevention wall is formed on the downstream side (the left side from the viewpoint of FIG. 312(b)), and balls are randomly thrown from the downstream side of the rolling wall 11650f to the delay device 11700. configured to fall. With this configuration, the momentum and drop position of the ball falling to the delay device 11700 can be made indeterminate. can do. Therefore, regardless of the player's skill, it is possible to generate a state in which a plurality of balls can be entered into the rolling device 10675c and a state in which a plurality of balls cannot be entered.

Note that the delay device 11700 shown in FIG. 312(a) is an example of delay means, and the configuration of the delay means used in each of the above-described embodiments may of course be applied.

Also, the configuration of the delay device 11700 shown in FIG. 312(a) may be used to configure the pachinko machine 10 based on the following technical concept. For example, for the operation contents of various devices during the small winning game shown in FIG. 2 seconds after the fourth operation is completed, the fifth operation (2 seconds) is executed, and 17 seconds after the start of the small winning game for the movable piece 10653. An operation pattern (operation scenario) of various devices may be set so as to be in an open state for the next four seconds. With this configuration, when the ball delayed by the delay device 11700 is stored in the storage portion 10652a of the rotating body 10652 during the fourth operation, the game ball that has flowed down with the end of the fourth operation opens. It will pass through the movable piece 10653 in the state and enter the direct V winning opening 10657 . In this way, during one small winning game, it is possible to distribute the ball to each of the flow path that can enter the role item route V winning opening 10677 and the flow path that can enter the direct V winning opening 10657. By doing so, it is possible to provide a plurality of opportunities for the ball to enter the V winning opening during one small winning game, so that the interest in the game can be improved.

Further, a plurality of discharge ports are provided for guiding the balls from the delay device 11700 to the rotating body 10652, one of which is connected to the ball outlet as in the above-described second modification of the tenth embodiment (see FIG. 223). may be configured as a V winning opening (V gate) through which the . As a result, the delay device 11700, which is the delay means, has the function of a sorting means for sorting whether or not the ball is allowed to enter (pass through) the V winning hole. Therefore, it is possible to provide a plurality of V winning chances for one ball that has won a small prize winning device 10650 . In this case, as in the second modification of the tenth embodiment described above, the player is not notified to that effect at the time of passing through the V winning opening (V gate), and the condition for ending the small winning game (predetermined When the small winning game period ends and no ball remains in the small winning prize device 10650) is established, the presence or absence of the V winning may be notified. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to notice whether or not the V prize has been won until the end of the small prize game, so that a plurality of V prizes are executed during one small prize game. Players can be made to look at each of the opportunities.

In addition, as in the pachinko machine 10 shown in FIG. 312, when it has a delay device 11700 that delays (indefinitely) the time until the ball that wins the small prize winning device 10650 reaches the rotating body 10652 As shown in FIG. 313, in the operation pattern of the rotor 10652 and the movable piece 10653 which are executed after the round period of the small winning game has passed, an operation pattern that is advantageous to the player is set. When the delay device 11700 delays the flow of the ball so that the winning ball 10650 reaches the rotating body 10652 at a predetermined timing, it is advantageous for the player (the ball enters the V winning opening). It may be configured so that it is easy to ball).

Here, with reference to FIG. 313, a modification of the operation pattern (operation scenario) for various devices during the small winning game will be described. Figure 313 is a timing chart schematically showing the flow during a small winning game when using a modification (small winning opening pattern D) of a small winning scenario (small winning opening pattern) defined in the small winning scenario table 202mf is. In addition, although detailed description is omitted, the small winning open pattern D used in this modification also has a corresponding small winning scenario defined in the small winning scenario table 202mf, and is selected according to a specific small winning type. It is configured so that

As shown in FIG. 313, the small winning opening pattern D changes the operating scenario of the rotating body 10652 and the operating scenario of the movable piece 10653 with respect to the small winning opening pattern B described above. The delay device 11700 shown is different in that the timing when the ball wins the small prize winning device 10650 and the timing when the ball reaches the rotating body 10652 are not constant but indefinite, and are otherwise the same. is. A detailed description of the same contents will be omitted.

In this modification, in one small winning game, the operation scenario is set so that the state in which the rotating body 10652 can receive the ball (the state in which it is changed to the operating position) is set four times. It is set so that the third operation (1 second) is executed when 4 seconds have passed after the end of the operation, and the fourth operation (1 second) is executed 1 second after the completion of the third operation. there is In addition, the operation scenario is set so that the number of times the movable piece 10653 is in the open state (the state in which the ball can enter the direct V prize opening 10657) is two times, and the first open state ends. After 9 seconds, the second open state is set for 2.5 seconds.

Here, the period in which the third operation of the rotating body 10652 and the fourth operation are performed, and the period in which the second open state of the movable piece 10653 is set are predetermined as the round period of the small winning game. It is set later than 5 seconds. That is, the period is set so that only the balls that have won the small winning prize device 10650 during the round period can reach the balls that have been delayed by the delay device 11700 for a predetermined period or more.

Then, as shown in FIG. 313, when the ball is stored in the storage portion 10652a of the rotating body 10652 during the third operation period of the rotating body 10652, when the ball reaches the movable piece 10653, the moving piece 10653 is in the closed state, the ball is distributed to the accessory device 10675, and when the ball is stored in the storage portion 10652a of the rotor 10652 during the fourth operation period, the ball reaches the movable piece 10653. Then, since the movable piece 10653 is in the open state (second open state), the ball is distributed to the flow path (second flow path 10651c) that can win the direct V winning opening 10657. In addition, even if the ball enters the direct V winning hole 10657 while the rotating body is in the operating position, the delay device 11700 delays the falling of the ball. It is configured so that the ball cannot be stored in the storage portion 10652a of the rotating body 10652 according to .

By configuring in this way, the delay device 11700 can provide a state in which it is advantageous for the player to delay the ball and a state in which it is advantageous to the player not to delay the ball. It is possible to make the player interested in the behavior of the ball inside, and to improve the amusement of the game. Furthermore, after the period (round period) in which the balls can be won by the small winning prize device 10650 has passed, the player can be set in an advantageous state. It is possible to completely prevent the act of allowing the ball to win the small winning prize device 10650 aiming at the state, and it is possible to easily provide a proper game.

As described above, in each of the above-described embodiments, by providing a plurality of paths for causing the ball that has won the small winning prize device 10650 to enter the V winning opening, the game content during the small winning game (for small winning) The content of the game using the prize-winning ball in the prize-winning device 10650 was configured to diversify. Specifically, a plurality of V winning openings are provided (direct V winning opening 10657, role item route V winning opening 10677), a path for entering a ball is provided for each V winning opening, and a small prize winning device is provided. It is configured to play a game in which the player is entertained as to which path the winning ball of 10650 will be distributed to. It should be noted that, as in the above-described embodiments, as a way to diversify the game content during the small winning game, for example, a path (channel ) may be provided, and the rate and time at which the ball enters the V winning opening (specific area) may be varied depending on the flowing flow path.

For example, when explaining with reference to FIG. It is configured so that it can be changed depending on the state. When the distributing means is in the first state, the ball can flow down toward the movable piece 10653, and when in the second state, the ball is distributed to a special route. The special route is configured to communicate with the role item route V winning opening 10677 without passing through the accessory device 10675 .

By configuring in this way, it is possible to provide a plurality of paths through which a ball can enter one V winning opening (accessory route V winning opening 10677), and furthermore, it is possible for a ball flowing down each path to enter the V winning opening. Ball probabilities can be different. In the example described above, the ball flowing down the special route is configured to enter the role item route V prize opening 10677 without fail. A V winning probability higher than the V winning probability (1/4) of the ball flowing down toward the mouth 10677 may be set, and the V winning probability may be set to 1/2. Also, the same V winning probability may be set, or the V winning probability is lower than the V winning probability (1/4) of the ball flowing down toward the role product route V winning port 10677 via the role product device 10675. It may be configured to be

In addition, the ball that has flowed down the special route may enter the direct V prize opening 10657 without passing through the movable piece 10653. It may be provided in the channel 10651a or the accessory route channel 10651da. Furthermore, when the delay device 11700 shown in FIG. 312 is provided, a plurality of passage holes may be provided in the delay device 11700, and some of them may be used as distribution means for special routes.

Further, in the thirteenth embodiment and the fourteenth embodiment described above, as shown in FIG. Although a configuration that can be guided is used, it is not limited to this, and may be configured so that only a part of the ball that has won the small winning prize device 10650 flows down toward the rotating body 10652 . As a result, it is possible to make the player interested in whether or not the ball is stored in the storage portion 10652a of the rotating body 10652 as well.

<Fifteenth embodiment>
Next, the fifteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 314 to 341. FIG. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the ninth embodiment to the fourteenth embodiment described above, in addition to the case where the special symbol lottery results in a big win, the special symbol lottery results in a small win, which is a kind of loss, and the small winning game is played. A specification was adopted in which a jackpot is won (execution of a jackpot game) also by entering a game ball into a V prize opening (specific area) provided in the game area. In addition, in the above-described ninth embodiment, a small hit is obtained with a high probability only in the second special symbol lottery (special symbol lottery based on the ball entering the second ball entrance 640) (for example, 9/10). To make it possible to win (the lottery of the second special pattern is easier to win a small prize than the lottery of the first special pattern), and to make it easy to enter the second ball entrance 640 according to the game state. was configured to be variable. That is, in the above-described ninth embodiment, the probability of winning a big win in the special symbol lottery is set constant regardless of the game state, and the opening probability of the electric accessory 640a associated with the second ball entrance 640 (normal symbol winning (probability of winning), normal pattern fluctuation time, opening time, etc. are changed according to the game state, so that the possibility of winning a small win can be changed according to the game state, resulting in a big win. It was configured to have different properties (so-called 1-kind 2-kind mixer specifications).

In addition, in the thirteenth embodiment described above, it is possible to win a small hit even in the lottery of the first special symbol (the lottery of the second special symbol is easier to win a small hit than the lottery of the first special symbol, but the A normal state (low-probability state of special symbols, normal state) which is a game state in which the lottery of the first special symbols is executed. Even in a state in which a low-probability state of symbols is set, a big winning game based on winning a small winning can be executed.

Furthermore, in the above-described thirteenth embodiment, the game contents to be executed during the small winning game are different according to the type of the special symbol won in the small winning. In the case of winning (winning probability 1/70), as the small winning game, the ball to the role item route V winning opening 10677 (see FIG. 269) in the rolling device 10675 provided in the center part of the pachinko machine 10 When a small winning game (character challenge, V winning probability: about 1/4) expected to win a prize is won in the lottery of the second special pattern, the small winning game is the right side area of the pachinko machine 10. A small win game (direct V challenge, V winning probability: about 1/1) that expects the ball to win a prize in a direct V prize opening 10657 (see FIG. 269) provided in the , is configured to be easily executed. was

In this way, it is possible to provide a pachinko machine 10 which prevents a player from getting bored early by constructing it so as to be able to execute a small winning game with different game characteristics according to the type of special symbols won by winning a small winning. It had the effect of being able to

However, in the pachinko machine 10 of the thirteenth embodiment described above, by setting the time saving state, the type of special symbol that makes it easier to execute the lottery than the normal state is fixed (when the time saving state is set (because it was configured so that only the lottery of the second special symbol could be easily executed), a small winning game (character challenge) that expects the ball to win a prize to the character item route V winning opening 10677 (see FIG. 269) is executed. There is a problem that the player's willingness to play is lowered because a game state that is likely to be played cannot be set.

On the other hand, in the fifteenth embodiment, the game state (time-saving B state) in which the lottery for the first special symbol is more likely to be executed than the normal state as the game state in which the lottery for the special symbol is more likely to be executed than the normal state. , and a game state (time-saving A state) in which the lottery for the second special symbol is more likely to be executed than in the normal state can be set. By configuring in this way, during the advantageous game state in which the special symbol lottery is more likely to be executed than in the normal state, the game state (time saving B state) in which the role object challenge is easily executed and the direct V challenge is easily executed. A game state (time-saving A state) can be provided to the player, and the player can be interested in the game during the advantageous game state.

Further, in the thirteenth embodiment described above, when the upper limit of the number of reserved memories of the second special symbol is set to 1, and the jackpot game is executed with the second special symbol lottery during the time saving state as a trigger, A normal state is always set after the jackpot game is finished. Then, a lottery for the second special pattern based on the reserved memory (one) of the second special pattern acquired during the time saving state is executed during the normal state, and a small win is won in the lottery for the second special pattern (small win). probability 1/2), and when a jackpot game is executed, the time saving state is set again.

That is, in the thirteenth embodiment described above, once the time saving state is set, instead of almost determining the next big hit game, the time saving state is configured not to be set continuously, so that the game Although the advantageous game state (time saving state) advantageous to the player is set, the advantageous game state ends without winning the jackpot (the jackpot game is not executed), and the willingness to play decreases. It is possible to suppress the awarding of excessive benefits (prize balls) to the player while suppressing the loss of the player.

However, in the pachinko machine 10 of the thirteenth embodiment described above, the advantageous game state (time saving state) that is advantageous to the player is not continuously set, and the jackpot game ends every time the jackpot game is executed. Since it is necessary to pay attention to whether or not a small prize is won in the first special symbol lottery executed later (the second special symbol lottery retained and stored during the time saving state), the player can play the game with peace of mind. There was a problem that it could not be done.

On the other hand, in the fifteenth embodiment, the time saving A state in which the same game as the time saving state of the thirteenth embodiment described above is executed (the game state in which the lottery of the second special symbol is easily executed during the time saving state ), it is possible to set an advantageous gaming state (time saving B state) in which the lottery of the first special symbol is easily executed, and when a small winning is won in the first special symbol lottery in the time saving B state, After the end of the big winning game executed based on the winning small winning game, the time saving B state is set again. That is, in the fifteenth embodiment, a jackpot game is easily executed during the time saving state, and an advantageous game state (time saving A state) in which the time saving state is difficult to be continuously set, and a jackpot game is executed during the time saving state. It is configured to be able to provide the player with an advantageous game state (time saving B state) in which the time saving state is likely to be continuously set.

Furthermore, in the fifteenth embodiment, the first condition for setting the time saving A state described above and the second condition for setting the time saving B state are different, and when the normal state is set makes it easier to satisfy the first condition, and makes it easier to satisfy the second condition when the time-saving A state is set than when the normal state is set. In addition, it is configured such that the second condition is more likely to be established when the time saving B state is set than when the time saving A state is set.

That is, in the fifteenth embodiment, the game state is configured to be set in stages in the order of the normal state, the time saving A state, and the time saving B state, and once the time saving B state is set, the time saving B state is set. It is configured to be set repeatedly with a high probability. In the state where the time-saving B state is set, the normal state is not set after the big winning game is finished even if the big winning game is executed at any opportunity.

That is, among the advantageous game states which are advantageous game states for the player, while the time saving A state is set, the normal state which is a game state which is disadvantageous to the player is likely to be set after the jackpot game is executed. , While the time-saving B state is set, it is difficult to set the normal state, which is a game state disadvantageous to the player, after the big winning game is executed. As a result, while the time-saving B state is set as the advantageous game state, the big winning game can be executed with peace of mind, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

Next, referring to FIG. 314, the configuration of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 according to the fifteenth embodiment will be described. FIG. 314 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10 according to the fifteenth embodiment. This embodiment is different from the pachinko machine 10 of the thirteenth embodiment described above in that the configuration of the right side area of the game board 13 is changed, and the rest is the same. In addition, the same reference numerals are given to the same configurations, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 314, the pachinko machine 10 of the fifteenth embodiment is different from the pachinko machine 10 of the thirteenth embodiment described above in that the ball flowing down the meandering flow path 10600a can enter the first operating input. On the downstream end side (lower right side from the viewpoint of FIG. 314) of the gate type electric accessory 20640a, the above-described first operation input is provided. The difference is that a distribution winning device 20070 (see FIG. 315) is provided for activating the ball opening 20064b and the second operation ball entrance 20064a so that the ball can enter.

Then, the ball launched into the game area by the right-handed game flows down the right side area of the game board 13, flows down on the open/close door 10650b in the closed state, and then flows into the meandering flow path 10600a. The balls ejected from the outlet 10600b of the meandering flow path 10600a collide with the nails planted in the game board 13 to be distributed in various directions, and about 1/3 of the balls ejected from the outlet 10600b. enters the normal figure winning opening 10067 (1 prize ball), and the other balls (2/3) roll on the rolling surface 20700b (see FIG. 315) and face the gate type electric accessory 20640a It is discharged toward the jackpot winning device 10065 from the opening formed as above.

Here, the configuration of the distribution winning device 20070 will be described with reference to FIGS. 315 and 316. FIG. FIG. 315 is a partially enlarged view of the lower right region of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 of the fifteenth embodiment, and FIG. 316 shows the operation flow of the distribution winning device 20070 of the fifteenth embodiment. 1 is a partial enlarged view; FIG.

As shown in FIG. 315, a gate type electric accessory 20640a is provided on the upstream side of the distribution winning device 20070. As shown in FIG. This gate-type electric accessory 20640a has the same configuration as the gate-type electric accessory 10640a of the thirteenth embodiment described above, and is an electric accessory that operates when a win is won in the normal symbol lottery. Normally, it is positioned in a standby state buried in the game board 13, and when it wins a lottery with a normal pattern (wins with a normal pattern), it is guided to a protruding state from the game board 13 according to a predetermined operation pattern. configured to work. The gate-type electric accessory 20640a activated to the guiding state can receive the ball flowing down the flow path 20700b formed on the game board 13 by the partition wall 20700a, and the ball received by the upper surface of the gate-type electric accessory 20640a is shaken. In order to guide the flow down toward the divided prize winning device 20070, the upper surface thereof is configured to be inclined downward toward one end side of the distributed prize winning device 20070.例文帳に追加

Incidentally, in the fifteenth embodiment, as in the above-described thirteenth embodiment, when the normal state is set, the normal pattern lottery is won, and the normal pattern winning game is executed. The opening pattern of the gate type electric accessory 20640a and the flowing length of the gate type electric accessory 20640a (the length from the upstream end to the downstream end of the gate type electric accessory 20640a) so that the ball cannot flow into the device 20070 is set, but since the specific configuration is the same as that of the thirteenth embodiment described above, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Two flow paths, a first flow path 20075a and a second flow path 20075b, are formed inside the distribution winning device 20070, and the ball flowing down the first flow path 20075a enters the first operation port 20073a. It is configured such that the ball that has flowed down the second flow path 20075b enters the second operating port 20073b. Furthermore, a switching valve (variable flow path) 20072 is provided at a position where the first flow path 20075a and the second flow path 20075b branch off.

This switching valve (variable flow path) 20072 has a first switching state (shown by a solid line in FIG. It is configured to be switchable (sliding displaceable) between the second switching state (the state indicated by the dotted line in FIG. 315) in which it flows down to the path 20075b, and winning is won in the normal symbol lottery, and the winning game is executed. Based on that, it is configured to operate in a predetermined operation pattern. When the switching valve 20072 is positioned in the first switching state, the upstream side of the second flow path 20075b is closed and only the first flow path 20075a is opened. Then, the ball that has flowed into the distribution winning device 20070 flows down the inclined surface of the switching valve 20072 and advances to the first flow path 20075a.

On the other hand, when the switching valve 20072 is positioned in the second switching state, the upstream side of the first flow path 20075a is blocked and only the second flow path 20075b is opened. Then, the ball that has flowed into the distribution winning device 20070 flows down the area formed between the partition wall 20070a and the vertical surface of the switching valve 20072, and advances to the second flow path 20075b.

Here, the switching valve 20072 is normally configured to maintain the first switching state (when the winning game is not executed). In this embodiment, as described above, the gate type electric accessory 20640a is configured to operate so that the ball cannot flow into the distribution winning device 20070 by the normal game in the normal state. , During the normal state per game, the ball is vigorously discharged from the flow path 20700b, collides with the gate-type electric accessory 20640a that is momentarily guided, and the ball bounces to the distribution winning device 20070. There is also a risk of influx.

However, in this embodiment, the switching valve 20072 switches to the first switching state during the period (0.5 seconds) during which the normal game (opening and closing operation of the gate type electric accessory 20640a) is executed during the normal state. Since it is configured to maintain, even if a right-handed game is executed during the normal state and the ball flows into the distribution winning device 20070, the ball will enter the first operation opening 20073a. Then, when the ball enters the first operating port 20073a, the first operating accessory 20064b1 operates, and the ball enters the state where the ball can enter the first operating ball port 20064b.

Furthermore, by continuing to execute the right-handed game, by entering the ball into the first operation ball entrance 20064b, the first ball is entered in the same manner as when the ball is entered into the first ball entrance 64. A process for executing a lottery for special symbols is performed. In this way, even if a right-handed game is performed in the normal state and a game is performed in which the ball is flowed into the sorting prize winning device 20070 by rebounding of the ball, a left-handed game is performed in the normal state and the first ball entrance 64 is performed. Further, by executing a left-handed game, the ball flowing down the left side area of the game board 13 enters the first ball entrance 64. At a rate (ratio of about 1 ball out of 15 balls), the ball that flows down the right side area of the game board 13 by executing the right-handed game collides with the gate-type electric accessory 20640a that is opened for a short time, Since the rate of flow into the distribution winning device 20070 is much lower, there is no advantage in playing the right-handed game during the normal state, so the player will play the left-handed game during the normal state.

In addition, in this embodiment, the switching valve 20072 is configured to be switchable between two states (first switching state and second switching state). It is configured so that the ball enters either the first operating port 20073a or the second operating port 20073b without restricting the inflow of the ball. The switching valve 20072 is configured to be switchable to three or more states, and the state in which the ball that has flowed into the distribution winning device 20070 flows down toward the first operation port 20073a and the state in which it flows down toward the second operation port 20073b , and a state in which the liquid flows down toward the out port.

In addition, in addition to the switching valve 20072, a shielding member is provided to prevent the ball from flowing into the distribution winning device 20070, and the shielding member is also operated in accordance with the switching valve 20072 based on the execution of the game per normal figure. As the operation pattern, when a normal game is executed during the time saving state, the shielding member is changed from the shielding state in which it is difficult for the ball to flow into the distribution winning device 20070 than the shielding state. It operates to an allowable state in which it is easy to flow in, and when a game per normal pattern is executed during the normal state, the shielding member may be configured to maintain the shielding state during the per normal pattern game.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to reliably prevent the balls from flowing into the distribution winning device 20070 when the normal game is executed during the normal state.

Next, with reference to FIG. 316, the details of operation when a ball enters each operation port (first operation port 20073a, second operation port 20073b) will be described. The first operating mechanism 20074a is provided inside the first operating port 20073a, and when the ball wins the first operating port 20073a, the first operating mechanism 20074a operates, and the first operating role 20064b1 It is composed of a known non-electric accessory so as to be in an open state.

That is, one end side of the first operating mechanism 20074a is configured to contact the winning ball of the first operating port 20073a, the other end side of the first operating mechanism 20074a is configured to be connected to the first operating accessory 20064b1 It is Then, the weight of the ball entering the first operating port 20073a operates the first operating mechanism 20074a, and the first operating accessory 20064b1 is configured to switch to the open state. In addition, when the first operating accessory 20064b1 is in the open state, the first operating accessory 20064b1 is configured to switch to the closed state when a predetermined number (two) of balls enter the first operating ball entrance 20064b. ing. The first actuation ball entrance 20064b is a start opening that triggers the lottery of the first special symbol. Control processing is executed.

Similarly, a second operating mechanism 20074b is provided inside the second operating port 20073b. The object 20064a1 is composed of a known non-electric accessory so that it is in an open state.

That is, one end side of the second operating mechanism 20074b is configured to come into contact with the winning ball of the second operating port 20073b, the other end side of the second operating mechanism 20074b is configured to be connected to the second operating accessory 20064a1 It is The weight of the ball entering the second operating port 20073b activates the second operating mechanism 20074b to switch the second operating accessory 20064a1 to the open state. In addition, when the second operating accessory 20064a1 is in the open state, the second operating accessory 20064a1 is configured to switch to the closed state when a predetermined number (two) of balls enter the second operating ball entrance 20064a. ing. The second actuation ball entrance 20064a is a starting hole that triggers the lottery for the second special symbol. Control processing is executed.

Thus, in this embodiment, in the game state (time saving state (high probability state of normal symbols)) in which the ball flowing down on the gate type electric accessory 20640a can flow into the distribution winning device 20070, the switching valve 20072 According to the state of (1), the working opening (first working opening 20073a, second working opening 20073b) into which the ball enters is made different.

Then, the working role (first working role 20064b1, second working role 20064a1) corresponding to the working opening (first working opening 20073a, second working opening 20073b) into which the ball enters is opened, and the open state Actuating entrance (first actuation entrance 20064b, second actuation entrance 20064a) to which the working role (first actuation role 20064b1, second actuation role 20064a1) is attached can provide a state in which the ball can enter the ball. Therefore, the lottery of special symbols is more likely to be executed than when the normal state is set (a game per normal pattern that is advantageous to the player is likely to be executed) During the time saving state, the special symbols in which the lottery is executed are selected. The type can be changed as appropriate, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, when a jackpot game is executed based on the lottery of special symbols, different types of time-saving states (time-saving A state, time-saving B state) can be set according to the type of the jackpot. Depending on the type of the set time saving state, the balls that flowed into the distribution winning device 20070 are easy to win the first operation port 20073a Time saving state (time saving B state) and the second working port 20073b easy time saving state to win (Time saving A state) and are configured to be configurable. Specifically, the balls are distributed by varying the opening operation pattern of the gate-type electric accessory 20640a in the normal pattern winning game that is executed with the winning of the normal symbol according to the set time reduction type. It is configured to change the state of the switching valve 20072 when it flows into the winning device 20070 .

Here, with reference to FIG. 317, the corresponding relationship between the operation (opening pattern) of the gate-type electric accessary product 20640a and the switching operation of the switching valve (variable flow path) 20072, which is executed during the normal game. do. FIG. 317 is a timing chart showing the correspondence between the operation of the gate type electric accessory 20640a and the switching operation of the switching valve 20072 when the time saving state is set. As shown in FIG. 317, the gate-type electric accessory 20640a is configured to be operable with two types of opening patterns (opening pattern A and opening pattern B) corresponding to the set time-saving type. It is defined in advance so that the open pattern B is set when the time saving A state is set as the type, and the open pattern A is set when the time saving B state is set. In addition, this open pattern is defined in the normal electric operation scenario 16 table 202ng of the ROM 202 of the main control device 110, and when it is won in the normal symbol lottery, the currently set game state and time saving type It is configured so that the corresponding common electric operation scenario (opening pattern) is read out.

The switching valve 20072 in the distribution winning device 20070 is in a first switching state (a state in which the ball can flow down to the first flow path 20075a) in a predetermined operation pattern triggered by the start timing of the game per normal pattern. and the second switching state (the state in which the ball can flow down to the second flow path 20075b). , After the first switching state is maintained for 1.5 seconds from the start of the normal pattern winning game, it slides to the second switching state and maintains the second switching state for 3 seconds. An operation pattern is stipulated in which the second switching state is maintained for 3 seconds and then slides to the first switching state, which is the initial state.

It should be noted that, in the present embodiment, regardless of the game state when the game per normal pattern is executed, the switching valve 20072 is configured to operate in a predetermined constant pattern, and the above-described normal pattern per game By varying the opening pattern, it is possible to change the operating opening into which the ball can enter. By configuring in this way, control that can be used in addition to varying the open pattern of the game per normal figure according to the game state (for example, control to vary the open pattern of the game per normal figure between the normal state and the time saving state ) can be used to change the operating opening into which the ball can enter, the control processing for varying the operating opening into which the ball that has flowed into the sorting prize winning device 20070 can be replaced by a dedicated control processing. can be simplified from the case of using

When the open pattern A is set, the gate-type electric accessory 20640a is in a guided state (a ball is distributed toward the winning device 20070 for a relatively long time (that is, for 1 second) immediately after the normal symbol winning game is started. A protruding state that can be flowed down), and then an open state for 1.4 seconds (a buried state where it is difficult to make the ball flow down toward the prize winning device 20070), and then an induced state for 0.1 seconds. A normal figure hit game to be set is executed. In addition, in the present embodiment, the operation period of the gate-type electric accessory 20640a necessary for causing the ball to flow into the distribution winning device 20070 (the period in which the induction state is continuously set) is set to 0.5 seconds. In addition, since the downstream length tz1 (see FIG. 315) of the gate type electric accessory 20640a is set, in the second half period of the game per normal figure in which the induction state for 0.1 seconds is set, the ball is distributed and won It is configured so that it cannot flow into the device 20070 .

That is, in the normal pattern per game in which the open pattern A is set, the ball flows into the distribution winning device 20070 by the guidance state (1 second guidance state) set immediately after the normal pattern per game is started. Further, in this embodiment, the period required for the ball ejected from the downstream end of the gate-type electric accessory 20640a to reach the first flow path 20075a or the second flow path 20075b is about 0.3 seconds. is designed to

Then, as described above, the switching valve 20072 is configured to be positioned in the first switching state in which the ball can flow down to the first flow path 20075a for 1.5 seconds after the start of the normal per game. Therefore, the ball that has flowed into the distribution winning device 20070 in the normal game in which the open pattern A is set flows down the first flow path 20075a and wins the first operation port 20073a.

On the other hand, when the opening pattern B is set, the gate-type electric accessory 20640a is guided for a very short time (0.1 seconds) immediately after the normal symbol winning game is started (the ball is distributed and directed to the winning device 20070). After that, after 1.4 seconds of open state (buried state in which it is difficult to make the ball flow down toward the distribution winning device 20070), 1 second of induction state is set. A normal figure per game is executed. In addition, in the present embodiment, the operation period of the gate-type electric accessory 20640a necessary for causing the ball to flow into the distribution winning device 20070 (the period in which the induction state is continuously set) is set to 0.5 seconds. In addition, since the downstream length tz1 (see FIG. 315) of the gate type electric accessory 20640a is set, in the second half period of the game per normal figure in which the induction state for 0.1 seconds is set, the ball is distributed and won It is configured so that it cannot flow into the device 20070 .

In other words, in the normal pattern per game in which the open pattern B is set, the ball flows into the distribution winning device 20070 by the guidance state (0.1 second guidance state) set immediately after the normal pattern per game is started. There is no such thing, and the ball is configured to flow into the distribution winning device 20070 by the induction normal state (induction state for 1 second) set in the second half period of the game per normal pattern.

Then, as described above, the switching valve 20072 sets the second switching state for 3 seconds after 1.5 seconds have passed since the normal game is started, in which the ball can flow down to the second flow path 20075b. Since it is configured as such, the ball that has flowed into the distribution winning device 20070 in the normal game in which the open pattern B is set flows down the second flow path 20075b and wins the second operation port 20073b. Become.

By configuring in this way, by operating the gate type electric accessory 20640a with a different opening pattern according to the set time saving type, the type of special symbol for which the lottery is executed can be changed. It is possible to diversify the special pattern lottery game executed during the game, and improve the interest of the game executed during the time saving state.

Further, for example, if the second special symbol lottery is more advantageous to the player than the first special symbol lottery executed during the time saving state, the special symbol lottery is executed. The player can be interested in which special symbol lottery is executed during the state.

In the present embodiment, as described above, it is configured so that the game per normal pattern is executed in different open patterns depending on the time saving type, and when the time saving A state is set as the time saving type, the open pattern B is used for the general pattern. When the winning game is executed, the second special symbol lottery is executed, and when the time reduction B state is set as the time reduction type, the first special symbol is selected by executing the normal pattern winning game in the open pattern A. Although it is configured so that the lottery is executed, it is not limited to this, for example, even if any time saving type is set, the normal figure per game of the open pattern A and the normal of the open pattern B It may be configured so that a per-figure game can be executed, and the selection ratio of each open pattern may be varied according to the set time-saving type. By constructing in this way, even if the player grasps the set time-saving type, it is difficult for the player to understand in which opening pattern the next general pattern winning game will be executed. be able to.

In addition, scenario data that defines the opening pattern of the game per normal pattern corresponding to the number of fluctuations (number of lotteries) of special symbols executed during the time saving state and the number of fluctuations (number of lotteries) of normal symbols is provided, and the scenario is provided. It may be configured so that the game per normal pattern is executed in the open pattern specified in the data. As a result, it is possible to vary the release pattern of the normal pattern per game according to the progress of the game (special symbol lottery, normal symbol lottery) executed during the time saving state.

In this case, for the time saving state (100 special figure fluctuations) set after the end of the jackpot game, the first predetermined period (for example, 10 special figure fluctuations) is the open pattern B. It is good to set the scenario data so that the normal pattern per game is executed with the open pattern A for the remaining period (for example, 90 times of the special pattern fluctuation), and furthermore, the normal pattern per game with the open pattern B is better. , It is preferable to configure so as to become a normal pattern per game that is more advantageous to the player than the normal pattern per game of the open pattern A. By constructing in this way, even in the advantageous game state (time saving state) set after the end of the jackpot game, the advantageous time saving state advantageous to the player and the disadvantageous time saving state more disadvantageous to the player than the advantageous time saving state. , can in turn be provided to the player. In addition, the scenario data may specify contents other than the above-mentioned specified contents, and it is specified that the normal pattern winning game of the opening pattern A and the normal pattern winning game of the opening pattern B are alternately executed. Alternatively, it may be configured such that the disadvantageous time-saving state that is disadvantageous to the player is first provided to the player.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the switching valve 20072 is configured to always operate in a constant operation pattern regardless of the game state, and the opening pattern of the gate type electric accessory 20640a is varied according to the game state (time saving type). By doing so, in the normal figure winning game in the time saving state, it is configured to vary the type of the operation opening where the ball can enter, but not limited to this, for example, the gate type electric accessory 20640a is used in the game Regardless of the state, it is always operated with a constant opening pattern, and the operation pattern of the switching valve 20072 may be configured to vary according to the game state (time saving type). Even when configured in this way, in the normal figure per game during the time saving state, it is possible to vary the type of the operation opening in which the ball can enter. Moreover, both the operation pattern of the switching valve 20072 and the opening pattern of the gate-type electric accessory 20640a may be configured to differ according to the game state (type of time saving). By configuring in this way, by combining the operation contents of a plurality of devices (switching valve 20072, gate type electric accessory 20640a), it is possible to change the type of the operation port into which the ball can enter. It is possible to set more complicated types of operating openings into which balls can be entered.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, one first working port 20073a and one second working port 20073b are provided, but the number of working ports is not limited to this, and two or more working ports may be provided. Also, the number of operation ports may be varied. By providing a plurality of operation ports in this manner, it is possible to make it difficult to understand which operation port the ball that has flowed into the sorting prize winning device 20070 will enter, so that a game that is difficult for the player to predict is provided. be able to.

Next, referring to FIG. 318, the flow of game state transition in the pachinko machine 10 according to the fifteenth embodiment will be described. FIG. 318 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the game flow of the pachinko machine 10 in the fifteenth embodiment. In the fifteenth embodiment, the time saving state is divided into two time saving states (time saving A state, time saving B state) with respect to the game flow (see FIG. 280) of the pachinko machine 10 of the thirteenth embodiment described above. , The difference is that the content of the transition of the game state during the time saving state is changed, and that a part of the transition ratio at each transition opportunity is changed, and the rest is the same. A detailed description of the same contents will be omitted.

In the fifteenth embodiment, as shown in FIG. 314, while the normal state is set, the ball enters the starting port (second actuation ball entrance 20064a1) that triggers the lottery of the second special symbol. Since it is not possible (difficult to do), a game (special 1 game) aiming at executing the lottery of the first special symbol by entering the ball into the first ball entrance 64 by the left-handed game is performed. In the first special symbol lottery executed during the special 1 game, a special symbol lottery is executed in which a big win is won with a probability of 1/300 and a small win is won with a probability of 1/20. When a jackpot is won in the special 1 game, a jackpot B is executed at a rate of 95%. This jackpot B is a jackpot game in which 10 rounds worth of round games are executed as a jackpot game, and a normal state (disadvantageous state) is set after the jackpot game ends (see FIG. 325(a)). On the other hand, the jackpot A is executed in the remaining 5%. This jackpot A is a jackpot game in which a round game for 10 rounds is executed as a jackpot game, and a time-saving state (time-saving A state) is set after the jackpot game ends (see FIG. 325(a)).

In addition, when winning a small win (winning probability 1/20) in the special 1 game, the small winning prize winning device 10650 is won as a small winning game in which the small winning prize winning device 10650 is opened at a rate of 70%. A small win C is selected in which a small win game is executed in which it is difficult for the ball to enter the V winning port (direct V winning port 10657, role item route V winning port 10677) provided in the small winning prize device 10650. (See FIG. 325(b)). Although detailed explanation will be given later, when the small winning game corresponding to this small winning C is executed, the ball wins the small winning prize device 10650 only during the period when the rotating body 10652 is positioned at the initial position (sideways). Since the small winning game is executed as described above, all the balls that have won the small winning prize device 10650 enter the out port 10654 . Therefore, the small winning game corresponding to the small winning C executed during the normal state becomes the most disadvantageous small winning game for the player.

In the small winning games (small winnings A, B) executed at the remaining 30% rate, the balls that have won the winning device 10650 for the small winnings are guided to the flow path that can win the winning opening 10677 of the role item route V. A small winning game (accessory challenge) is executed. As in the thirteenth embodiment described above, this accessory challenge is a small winning game in which a ball is dropped into the rolling device 10675, and the accessory route V winning opening 10677 (specific area) has a probability of 1/4. It becomes a small winning game in which the ball can enter. The detailed contents of this role object challenge are the same as those of the thirteenth embodiment described above, so detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Then, when a small win is won in the lottery of the first special pattern during the normal state, and the ball enters the role item route V prize opening 10677 (specific area) during the small win game, the big win game is executed and the big win game is played. A time saving state (time saving A state) is set after the end. That is, in the pachinko machine 10 of the fifteenth embodiment, the small winning probability is 1/20, of which 70% of the small winning games that cannot win V are executed, and 30% of the V winning rate Since 25% of the small winning game is executed, the probability of executing the big winning game triggered by the winning of the small winning is about 1/280 in the first special symbol lottery in the normal state. Therefore, in the lottery of the first special pattern, the probability that the jackpot is won (1/300) and the time saving state is set after the jackpot game ends (5% of the jackpot winning (1/300)) Since the probability of setting the time saving state after the end of the jackpot game based on the winning (1/20) is higher (approximately 8% of the small winning (1/20)), the lottery of the first special symbol is mainly executed. In the normal state, a game aiming at setting the time saving state with the opportunity of winning a small hit is performed.

Next, the flow of the game during the time saving state will be explained. In this embodiment, as the type of the time saving state, it is possible to set a time saving A state in which the second special symbol lottery is easily executed and a time saving B state in which the first special symbol lottery is easy to be executed. After the end of the jackpot game executed based on the first special symbol lottery in the normal state, the time saving A state is set. That is, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment has a time saving type (time saving A state) that is easy to set and a time saving type (time saving B state) that is difficult to set in the game in the normal state. By providing the time-saving type that is easy to set and the time-saving type that is difficult to set in this way, the player can play the game while enjoying which time-saving type is set.

First, the flow of the game during the time saving A state, which is the time saving type that is easy to shift from the normal state (easily set), will be described. In addition, the flow of the game during the time saving A state in this embodiment is the transition of the game state in the case of winning a jackpot in the lottery of the second special symbol with respect to the flow of the game in the time saving state in the thirteenth embodiment described above. They are the same except that they are different from each other and that the contents of the time-saving end conditions for shifting the game state from the time-saving state to the normal state are different. A detailed description of the same contents will be omitted.

When the time-saving A state is set, the gate-type electric accessory 20640a is long variable (1 second), so that the ball easily flows into the distribution winning device 20070, and in the general figure per game, the opening pattern B is executed (because it is easier to execute), the ball is more likely to enter the second operating opening 20073b. When the ball enters the second operating port 20073b, the second operating accessory 20064a1 provided in the meandering flow path 10600a becomes an open state (open state), and the ball easily enters the second operating ball port 20064a1. state. Therefore, during the period in which the time-saving A state is set, it becomes a period in which the lottery for the second special symbol can be easily performed only by continuing the right-handed game.

In addition, when the time saving A state is set, the ball to the second operation ball entrance 20064a1 by the right-handed game has a higher probability than entering the ball into the first ball entrance 64 by the left-handed game. Since it is configured so that a ball is entered, the player will play a right-handed game while the time-saving A state is set. In addition, in this embodiment, while the time saving A state is set, since it is configured so that the ball does not enter the first operation opening 20073a in the normal game per game, during the time saving A state A ball does not enter the first actuation ball entrance 20064b due to the right-handed game that is performed.

In addition, as in the present embodiment, when a specific time saving type (time saving A state) is set, without limiting to the configuration in which only one special symbol lottery is performed, one special symbol lottery is the other It may be constructed so that it is easier to execute (execute preferentially) than the special symbol lottery.

When the second special symbol lottery is executed during the time-saving A state, a winning lottery is executed in which a big prize is won with a probability of 1/300 and a small prize is won with a probability of 1/2. In addition, each winning lottery probability of the second special symbol executed during the time saving state, and the flow of the game at the time of winning the small winning are the same as the above-described thirteenth embodiment, so detailed description thereof will be omitted. .

On the other hand, when a big win is won in the second special symbol lottery during the time saving A state, the time saving B state is set after the big win is completed. That is, during the time saving A state, the time saving B state is set only when the big win (1/300) is won before the big win is executed based on the small winning game with a probability of 1/2. It is configured as follows. In this embodiment, as in the thirteenth embodiment described above, one lottery right for the second special symbol can be reserved and stored. Therefore, even if the jackpot is won in the second special symbol lottery and the time saving B state is set, the second special symbol lottery held and stored in the state where the time saving B state is set may be executed. be.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, as described above with reference to FIG. 314, a meandering flow of balls launched by a right-handed game for winning a ball in the jackpot winning device 10065 that is opened during the jackpot game Since the path 10600a is provided with the second operating accessory 20064a1 and the second operating ball opening 20064a, the second special symbol lottery in the open state is not executed after the time saving B state is set. It is configured so as to make it difficult to execute a jackpot game without entering a ball into the operation ball entrance 20064a.

By configuring in this way, the probability of executing a time-saving game (character rush) for executing the first special symbol lottery in the time-saving B state is the probability of winning a big hit in the second special symbol lottery in the time-saving A state. Since it can be lower than (1/300), specifically, in the time saving A state, the second special symbol lottery wins the jackpot (1/300), and the time saving B is set after the jackpot game ends. A jackpot game is not executed based on the lottery of the second special symbols executed in the state (the second special symbols retained and stored) (no big win (299/300), no small win (1/2)). In this case, it is possible to execute a time-saving game (character product rush) in which the lottery for the first special symbol is executed in the time-saving B state, so that the character product rush can be made more difficult to be executed. Therefore, it is possible to motivate the player to play a game that is difficult to execute.

In addition, without being limited to the configuration of the present embodiment, for example, a configuration in which the function for holding and storing the lottery right of the second special symbol is eliminated may be used. In this case, after the time saving B state is set, the lottery for the second special symbol can be made difficult to be executed, so that added value can be increased when a big win is won in the time saving A state.

Also, as described above, even if the big winning game is executed in the open state where the second operation ball entrance 20064a is easy to enter the ball, the ball enters the second operation ball entrance 20064a during the big winning game. Since the ball is entered and the second operating accessory 20064a1 is closed, after the jackpot game ends, that is, when the time saving B state is set, the second operation ball entrance 20064a is suppressed from being opened. can be done. Therefore, it is possible to further suppress the execution of the lottery for the second special symbol while the time saving B state is set.

In the above-described thirteenth embodiment, the small winning (1/2) is won in the state where the time saving state is set, and the big winning (1/300) is won even when the big winning game based on the small winning is executed. Thus, even when a big winning game is executed, the normal state is set after the big winning game is finished. In other words, as the execution opportunity of the big hit game, the execution opportunity (V prize during the small winning game) that is easy to be established and the execution opportunity that is difficult to be established (big hit winning in the special symbol lottery), the game that is set after the end of the big hit game Since the states are the same, there is a problem that the player's willingness to play is reduced when the execution opportunity on the side that is difficult to be established is established and the jackpot game is executed.

On the other hand, in the fifteenth embodiment, when the execution condition (small hit winning) of the jackpot game, which is likely to be established when the time saving A state is set, is established, the same as the above-described thirteenth embodiment In addition, when the normal state is set after the end of the jackpot game and the execution condition (jackpot winning) of the jackpot game, which is difficult to be established when the time saving A state is set, is established, the time saving B is performed after the jackpot game is finished. It is configured so that the state is set.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to vary the game state set after the end of the jackpot game based on a plurality of jackpot conditions that can be established during the time saving A state, so that the time saving state (time saving A state ) to keep the player interested in the games that take place during the game.

Next, the flow of the game in the time-saving B state, which is set based on winning the jackpot of the second special symbol in the time-saving A state, will be described. This time-saving B state, like the time-saving A state described above, is configured to continue until the lottery for special symbols is executed 99 times without executing a big winning game. When the time saving B state is set, the gate type electric accessory 10640a is long variable (1 second), so that the ball easily flows into the distribution winning device 20070. is performed (because it is easier to perform), the ball is more likely to enter the first operating opening 20073a. When the ball enters the first operating port 20073a, the first operating accessory 20064b1 provided in the meandering flow path 10600a is opened, and the ball easily enters the first operating ball entering port 20064b. Therefore, during the period in which the time-saving B state is set, the lottery for the first special symbol can be easily performed only by continuing the right-handed game. In addition, when the time saving B state is set, the ball to the first operation ball entrance 20064b by the right-handed game has a higher probability than entering the ball into the first ball entrance 64 by the left-handed game. Since it is configured so that the ball is entered, the player will play a right-handed game while the time-saving B state is set. In addition, in this embodiment, while the time saving B state is set, since it is configured so that the ball does not enter the second operation opening 20073b in the normal game per game, during the time saving B state A ball does not enter the second actuation ball entrance 20064a by a right-handed game to be played.

In addition, as in the present embodiment, when a specific time saving type (time saving A state) is set, without limiting to the configuration in which only one special symbol lottery is performed, one special symbol lottery is the other It may be constructed so that it is easier to execute (execute preferentially) than the special symbol lottery.

When the lottery for the first special pattern is executed during the time saving B state, it is determined whether the big win (1/300) or the small win (1/20) is won with the same winning probability as the lottery for the first special pattern in the normal state. be done. Then, when a small hit is won, a small hit game (accessory challenge) is executed in which the ball is flowed down to the rolling device 10675c at a rate of 100%. As described above, in the fifteenth embodiment, when a small winning is won by lottery of the first special symbols, the probability of execution of the character challenge is changed according to the game state. The character challenge is executed with a probability of winning a prize of 30%, while the challenge of a character is executed with a probability of winning a small prize of 100% during the time saving B state.

By configuring in this way, only the easiness of execution of the first special symbol lottery in the normal state and the time saving state (the easiness of winning the ball to the starting port that triggers the lottery of the first special symbol). Instead, the easiness of execution of the big winning game based on the first special symbol lottery can be varied, and the time saving state (time saving B state) can be made a more advantageous game state. Further, by setting a game state in which the player can enjoy the behavior of the ball and easily execute the accessory challenge, it is possible to set a game state in which the player does not quickly become bored.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the time saving B state is a game state in which the lottery of the first special symbol is easily performed and the role challenge is easily performed in the time saving B state compared to the normal state. It is sufficient that the game state is more advantageous to the player than the state, for example, the game state is such that the lottery for the first special symbol is easily performed and the execution probability of the character object challenge does not change. Alternatively, the game state may be such that the character object challenge is easily executed without changing the ease of lottery of the first special symbols.

Then, when the ball enters the role item route V winning port 10677 in the role item challenge and the jackpot game is executed, the time saving B state is set again after the jackpot game ends. In other words, by the time the time-saving end condition is satisfied (by the time the lottery of special symbols is performed 99 times), you will win a small hit (probability 1/20), and in the small win game, the V winning mouth (accessory route V winning By winning the ball in the mouth 10677) (probability 1/4), the time saving B state can be looped (loop rate about 70%).

By configuring in this way, a time-saving A state in which it is difficult to continuously set the time-saving state (low-probability state of special symbols, high-probability state of normal symbols) and a time-saving B state in which it is easy to set continuously are set. Therefore, it is possible to provide a variety of games during the time-saving state.

On the other hand, when a jackpot win (1/300) is won in the lottery of the first special symbol executed during the time saving B state, the game state set after the jackpot game ends is configured to be different according to the jackpot type to be set. If the jackpot type is jackpot A (at a rate of 5%), after the jackpot game ends, the time saving B state is set again, and if the jackpot type is jackpot B (at a rate of 95%), the jackpot After the end of the game, the time saving A state is set.

In this way, once the time-saving B state is set, when a jackpot game is executed during the time-saving B state, the normal state is not set after the jackpot game ends. , the jackpot game executed during the time saving state can be executed without anxiety.

As described above, in the fifteenth embodiment, the time saving A state and the time saving B state can be set as the time saving type of the time saving state, and the special symbol lottery that is easier to execute according to the time saving type to be set. It is configured so that the types of are different. As a result, various playability can be provided during the time saving state, and the interest in the game can be improved. In addition, depending on the type of time saving to be set, the execution probability of the jackpot game during the time saving state and the time saving state continuation rate in which the time saving state is continuously set are configured to be different.

As a result, depending on the type of time saving that has been set, the game property of expecting the jackpot game to be executed and the game property of expecting the time saving state to be set again after the jackpot game ends are played during the time saving state. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from becoming bored with the game early.

Furthermore, since the probability that the character challenge is performed in the time saving B state and the probability that the character challenge is performed in the normal state are different, the normal state and the time saving B state are different. Even when the same first special symbol lottery is executed, the time saving B state can be made a more advantageous game state than the normal state. In addition, in the present embodiment, the execution probability of the role challenge is configured to be different between the normal state and the time saving B state, but the time saving B state is more advantageous to the player than the normal state. For example, without changing the execution probability of the role challenge, the winning rate of the ball to the V winning opening (the role item route V winning opening 10677) when the role challenge is executed can be changed. It may be configured to allow

In addition, in the present embodiment, the same time-saving end condition (special figure fluctuation 99 times) is set in the time-saving A state and the time-saving B state, but not limited to this, the time-saving end condition of the time-saving A state, The time saving end condition of the time saving B state may be set differently. Also, when setting a common time saving end condition in the time saving A state and the time saving B state, as the time saving end condition to be set, the time saving end condition that can be established by the lottery of the first special symbol and the second special symbol It is preferable to configure so as to set a time-saving end condition that can be established by lottery. By configuring in this way, it is not necessary to variably set the time saving end condition according to the type of the time saving state to be set, so the processing load of the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced.

Next, with reference to FIG. 319, operation contents of various devices during the small winning game in this embodiment will be described. FIG. 319 is a timing chart showing operation contents of various devices during a small winning game. As shown in FIG. 319, in the fifteenth embodiment, for the pachinko machine 10 of the thirteenth embodiment described above, the content of the opening operation of the opening and closing door 10650b of the small winning prize device 10650 executed as a small winning game are different, and otherwise the same. A detailed description of the same operation contents will be omitted.

In the fifteenth embodiment, as the types of small winning games to be executed, a small winning game (role item challenge) aiming to win a ball in the role item route V winning opening 10677 and a ball in the direct V winning opening 10657 A small winning game (direct V challenge) aiming to win a prize, and a small ball that cannot win a prize (hard to win a prize) in any V winning mouth (accessory route V winning mouth 10677, direct V winning mouth 10657) It is configured to be able to set a winning game (gase small winning), and when a small winning is won in the lottery of the first special symbol during the normal state, and a small winning C is set as a small winning type (70 for winning a small winning) %) is configured so that the small winning game to be executed is the above-described fake small winning.

In addition, the game content of the small winning game executed when the small winning C is set as the small winning type is configured to be variable according to the game state at the time of winning the small winning, and the normal state is set. If it is, the above-described fake small hit is executed, and if the time saving state (time saving B state) is set, the character challenge is executed. In this way, by varying the contents of the small winning game to be executed corresponding to the same small winning type according to the game state, the V winning opening (specific area) during the small winning game according to the game state It is possible to easily variably set the ease with which the ball wins a prize.

As shown in FIG. 319, in the fifteenth embodiment, the operation patterns of the rotating body 10652 and the movable piece 10653 that are executed when the small winning game is started are different from those of the above-described thirteenth embodiment. there is Specifically, the period from when the small winning game is started until the rotating body 10652 operates is changed from 0.5 seconds of the thirteenth embodiment (see FIG. 278) to 5.5 seconds, and the small winning game is changed from 1 second in the thirteenth embodiment (see FIG. 278) to 6 seconds.

That is, in the fifteenth embodiment, the period (non-operating period) from when the small winning game is executed to when the rotating body 10652 and the movable piece 10653 operate is longer by 5 seconds than in the above-described thirteenth embodiment. It is configured as follows. And, using this non-operating period, it is configured to execute a small winning game corresponding to the above-described guess small winning.

Specifically, when the small hit is won in the lottery of the first special symbol in the normal state, and the small hit game of the small hit C (special 1 small hit C) is executed, the opening period (1 second), the round period ( 1.5 seconds) and an ending period (2.5 seconds). By executing the small winning game in this way, the ball that wins the small winning prize device 10650 during the small winning wins the V winning mouth (accessory route V winning mouth 10677, direct V winning mouth 10657). is reliably suppressed. In addition, in the fifteenth embodiment, the round period of the small winning game is set to 1.5 seconds, and when the round period elapses or 10 balls are won in the small winning prize device 10650, the small winning game (round period) is configured to end.

As in each of the above-described embodiments, in the fifteenth embodiment, the number of balls fired is set to 100 per minute, so during the round period (1.5 seconds) of the small winning game 10 balls rarely win the small winning prize device 10650, and the round period ends when 1.5 seconds have passed. Then, just before the end of the round period, the ball that won the small winning prize device 10650 flows into the first inlet 10651b and the ending period (0.5 seconds) longer than the period required to reach the out port 10654 ( 2.5 seconds), the small winning game is completed.

By configuring in this way, the end timing of the special 1 small win C can be fixed 5 seconds after the start of the small win game. As shown in FIG. 319, the timing after 5 seconds from the start of the small winning game is the timing when the rotating body 10652 and the movable piece 10653 are not operating, so the ball that has won the small winning prize device 10650 wins the V prize. It is possible to suppress the operation of the rotating body 10652 and the movable piece 10653 when performing a fake small win that does not win the opening (accessory route V winning opening 10677, direct V winning opening 10657). Therefore, it is possible to prevent the rotating body 10652 and the movable piece 10653 from being unnecessarily operated and deteriorating the rotating body 10652 and the movable piece 10653 .

In addition, the timing after 5 seconds from the start of the small winning game is normal, and the balls that have won the small winning device 10650 are all discharged to the outside of the small winning winning device 10650. In the fifteenth embodiment, at this timing, it is determined whether or not the ball remains in the winning device 10650 (first determination), and it is determined whether or not an abnormal state has occurred during the small winning game. It is configured as follows. Specifically, the number of balls that have won the small winning prize device 10650 is calculated based on the detection result of the entering ball sensor SZ0 (see FIG. 270), and the number of balls discharged from the small winning prize device 10650 is calculated based on the detection result of the overflow sensor (out sensor) SZa (see FIG. 270), and based on the difference value, it is determined whether the ball currently remains in the small winning prize device 10650, It is configured to determine that the game is abnormal when it is determined that the ball remains.

When it is determined that there is a game abnormality here, an error command indicating that an abnormality (error) has occurred during the small winning game is set, and a process of outputting the set error command to the outside is executed. As a result, for example, the ball that has won the small winning prize device 10650 during the small winning is left in the small winning prize device 10650 using a magnet or the like, and the rotating body 10652 and the movable piece 10653 are operated. It is possible to suppress the execution of a fraudulent act of causing the remaining balls to flow down in accordance with the timing of the ball.

Furthermore, in the fifteenth embodiment, when an abnormality (error) occurs during the small winning game, the small winning game is configured not to end, so an abnormality (error) occurs during the small winning game. It is possible to suppress the progress of the game while the error occurs. In addition, as in the fifteenth embodiment, when an abnormality (error) occurs during the small winning game, if the small winning game is configured not to end, the small winning game is extended while it is in an abnormal state. In this abnormal extension state, the rotating body 10652 and the movable piece 10653 are not operated in a normal operation pattern (the most disadvantageous operation for the player). It is preferable to configure so as to set an abnormal operation pattern. With this configuration, a magnet or the like is used to make the ball remain in the small winning prize device 10650, and a fraudulent act of causing the remaining ball to flow down in accordance with the timing when the rotating body 10652 and the movable piece 10653 operate is executed. can be suppressed more reliably.

On the other hand, in a state where the normal state is set, a small winning game (special 1 small winning A) in which a small winning is won in the lottery of the first special symbol and a small winning A is set as a small winning type, or a small winning When the small per game (special 1 small per B) in which the small per B is set as the type is executed, or in the state where the time saving state (time saving B state) is set, the above-mentioned special 1 small per A ~ When the special 1 small win C is executed, in the thirteenth embodiment described above, similarly to the case where the small win is won with the first special symbol, the winning ball of the small win prize device 10650 is sent to the role product route. The operation of the opening/closing door 10650b is controlled so that the accessory challenge to flow down toward the V prize opening 10677 is executed.

In addition, in this embodiment, as described above, the period from the start of the small winning game to the start of operation of the rotating body 10652 and the movable piece 10653 is delayed by 5 seconds with respect to the above-described thirteenth embodiment. Therefore, the operation pattern of the opening/closing door 10650b, which is set so as to execute the character challenge, is also different from the above-described thirteenth embodiment in that it is delayed by 5 seconds, and the rest is the same. The same contents are referred to the thirteenth embodiment described above, and the detailed description thereof is omitted.

As shown in FIG. 319, in the small winning game in which the accessory challenge is executed, 12 seconds are set as a period (opening) from when the small winning game is started until the opening and closing door 10650b is opened, and then the round period (1.5 seconds) and ending period (3.5 seconds) are set. Balls won during this round period are stored in the storage portion of the rotating body 10652 located at the upward position (operating position), and then, according to the operation of the rotating body 10652 and the movable piece 10653, the role object route It is configured to pass sensor SZ2 and flow down toward rolling device 10675 .

The ending period of 3.5 seconds is set as a time sufficient for the rotation body 10652 to complete its operation and for the ball to pass through the role object route sensor SZ2. That is, the timing when the ending period has passed is the timing when the rotating body 10652 and the movable piece 10653 are not in operation. It becomes unnecessary to forcibly terminate the body 10652 and the movable piece 10653 . Therefore, as a process for ending the small winning game, there is no need to provide an operation pattern in which the operation of the rotating body 10652 and the movable piece 10653 are different, and the control process can be simplified.

In addition, since the timing at which the ending period elapses is set to a time sufficient for the ball that has won the small winning prize device 10650 to pass through the accessory route sensor SZ2, at the timing at which the ending period elapses, this small In the winning game, it is configured to be able to reliably determine whether or not the accessory challenge has been executed. Then, when it is determined that the ball has not passed through the accessory route sensor SZ2 at the timing of the passage of the ending period, the ball that has won the small prize winning device 10650 is executed as processing for ending the small prize game. A process for determining a remaining game abnormality is executed, and when it is determined that the ball has passed through the role product route sensor SZ2, an extension process for extending the period of the small winning game is executed. ing.

By configuring in this way, when a small winning game capable of executing the accessory challenge is executed, if the ball cannot be won in the small winning prize device 10650 (the ending period of the small winning game has elapsed Sometimes, when the ball does not pass through the accessory root sensor SZ2), and when the ball can be won in the small winning prize winning device 10650 (when the ending period of the small winning game has passed, the accessory root sensor SZ2 is turned on). When the ball passes), it is possible to make the end timing of the small winning game different. Therefore, in the small winning game in which the accessory challenge is not executed, the small winning game can be efficiently digested compared to the configuration in which the small winning game is finished after waiting for the period until the accessory challenge can be completed. It has the effect of being able to

Also, as in the thirteenth embodiment described above, when the character challenge is executed as a small winning game and the extension process is executed, the period (for example, 120 seconds) in which the character challenge can be sufficiently completed After the lapse, it is configured to execute a process for ending the small winning game. Thereby, in the small winning game (for example, special 1 small winning A) in which the same small winning type is set, the end timing of the small winning game and the small winning prize according to the game content in the small winning game It is possible to vary the timing of determining the abnormal game state, which is the state in which the winning ball of the device 10650 remains.

In addition, a small winning game in which the accessory challenge is executed, that is, even when a normal game is performed, a small winning game in which the end timing of the small winning game is indefinite depending on the behavior of the ball is executed. In this case, it is preferable to set a plurality of timings with different timings as the end timing of the small winning game, and execute the corresponding end processing when each timing has passed. Specifically, for example, the timing after 120 seconds have passed since the performance of the character challenge is set as the first timing, and the timing after 180 seconds have passed as the second timing, and the ball rolls when the first timing has passed. If it is determined that it remains in the running device 10675, it sets a long-term execution command indicating that the role object challenge is being executed for a long time, and responds to the set command. Along with executing the corresponding effect display (for example, displaying the characters "long challenge in progress" on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81), a long-term execution command is also output to the outside to the game parlor clerk. To notify that the role object challenge has been executed for a long time. Then, when the second timing (180 seconds), which is set as a period longer than the first timing, has passed, it is preferable to determine whether or not the game is in an abnormal state.

With this configuration, at the time when the first timing has elapsed, the character object challenge is being executed for a long time due to the behavior of the ball during the character object challenge, or the game abnormality has occurred during the small winning game. Since it is possible to inform the clerk that it is unclear whether the player is playing the pachinko machine 10 directly (advance notification) so that the clerk can directly check the pachinko machine 10, the role challenge continues for a long time depending on the behavior of the ball during the role challenge. It is possible to prevent the player who is executing the game from being given an unpleasant feeling by setting an abnormal game state. In addition, even if an abnormal game state actually occurs, the state can be visually recognized by the staff at the game hall based on the lapse of the first timing. (time until the second timing elapses), it is possible to prevent the game from being kept on standby with the abnormal game state occurring.

Returning to FIG. 319, the description continues. In the case of winning the small hit of the second special symbol, similarly to the case of winning the small win of the second special symbol in the above-described thirteenth embodiment, the winning ball of the small winning prize device 10650 is directly V-winning. The operation of the open/close door 10650b is controlled so that the direct V challenge to flow down toward the mouth 10657 is executed.

In addition, in this embodiment, as described above, the period from the start of the small winning game to the start of operation of the rotating body 10652 and the movable piece 10653 is delayed by 5 seconds with respect to the above-described thirteenth embodiment. Therefore, the operation pattern of the opening/closing door 10650b, which is set so that the direct V challenge is performed, is also different in that it is delayed by 5 seconds from the thirteenth embodiment described above, and the rest is the same. The same contents are referred to the thirteenth embodiment described above, and the detailed description thereof is omitted.

As shown in FIG. 319, in the small winning game in which the direct V challenge is executed, 5.5 seconds are set as a period (opening) from when the small winning game is started until the opening and closing door 10650b is opened, and then, A round period (1.5 seconds) and an ending period (3.5 seconds) are set. Balls won during this round period are stored in the storage part of the rotating body 10652 located in the upward position (operating position), and then, according to the operation of the rotating body 10652 and the movable piece 10653, the straight V route It is configured to pass through the sensor SZ3 and flow down toward the direct V winning opening 10657.

The ending period of 3.5 seconds is set as a sufficient time for the ball to enter the direct V winning opening 10657 after the operation of the rotating body 10652 and the operation of the movable piece 10653 are completed. That is, the timing when the ending period has passed is the timing when the rotating body 10652 and the movable piece 10653 are not in operation. It becomes unnecessary to forcibly terminate the body 10652 and the movable piece 10653 . Therefore, as a process for ending the small winning game, there is no need to provide an operation pattern in which the operation of the rotating body 10652 and the movable piece 10653 are different, and the control process can be simplified.

In addition, if the game is normally played, it is the timing when all the balls that have won the small winning prize device 10650 are discharged to the outside of the small winning prize winning device 10650, so the small winning prize device The timing is such that no ball remains within 10650. Therefore, in the fifteenth embodiment, at this timing, it is determined whether or not the ball remains in the winning device 10650 (second determination), and it is determined whether or not an abnormal state has occurred during the small winning game. It is configured to perform (judgment as to whether the game is in an abnormal state). Then, when it is determined that the game is in an abnormal state, a process corresponding to the game abnormal state is executed, and when it is determined that the game is not in an abnormal state, a process for ending the small winning game is executed.

<Regarding production content in the fifteenth embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 320 to 323, characteristic contents among various effects executed in the pachinko machine 10 of the fifteenth embodiment will be described. In the fifteenth embodiment, in contrast to the above-described thirteenth embodiment, when the time saving state (time saving A state) that makes it easier to execute the second special symbol lottery is set, the second special symbol lottery jackpot (When a jackpot game is executed based on the establishment of a specific condition), after the end of the jackpot game, a time-saving state (time-saving B state) that makes it easier to execute the lottery of the first special symbol is set. There is a big difference in terms of gender.

Therefore, in the fifteenth embodiment, various effects corresponding to the above-described game characteristics are configured to be executed as characteristic effects. Therefore, with reference to FIGS. 320 to 322, description will be given of the effect contents corresponding to the characteristic gameplay of the fifteenth embodiment. Among the contents of effects shown below, the contents of effects that are the same as those in the thirteenth embodiment described above are given the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 320, the content of the production during the time saving A state will be described. Figure 320 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the content of the effect to be executed during the time saving A state, Figure 320 (b) is the second special symbol during the time saving A state when the jackpot is won It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the production|presentation at the time of the jackpot game completion. As shown in FIG. 320(a), when the lottery for the second special symbol is executed in the time saving A state, the character 1800 runs in the main display area Dm of the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 and the icon 1810a. An effect is executed to obtain any of ˜1810d.

Icons 1810a to 1810d are display modes for suggesting the lottery result of the second special symbol being executed, and when the character 1800 acquires the icon 1810a imitating "?", the second special symbol variation stops. Until (until a predetermined period elapses after execution of the performance), the performance is executed in which the lottery result of the second special symbol of this time is not known. Although illustration of detailed effects is omitted, the display mode of this icon 1810a is changed after the character 1800 acquires the icon 1810a. It is configured to be variable to the display mode of "V, 7, x". As a result, when the character 1800 obtains the icon 1810a by executing the acquisition effect, the effect is executed in order to grasp the lottery result of the second special symbol in advance even after the acquisition effect is executed. The player can be made to pay attention to. Further, in this way, by varying the timing of suggesting and notifying the lottery result of the second special symbol in accordance with the content of the acquisition effect, the effect executed during the variation period of the second special symbol can be continued. can be interesting.

Next, the icon 1810b imitating "V" is a suggestion aspect suggesting that the lottery result of the second special symbol is a "small win". When the character 1800 executes the acquisition effect of acquiring the icon 1810b, it is indicated that the current lottery result of the second special symbol is a small win. And the icon 1810c imitating "x" is a suggestion mode suggesting that the lottery result of the second special symbol is "lost". When the character 1800 executes the acquisition effect of acquiring the icon 1810c, it is suggested that the result of the lottery for the second special symbol of this time is lost. Finally, an icon 1810d imitating "7" is a suggestive aspect suggesting that the lottery result of the second special symbol is a "jackpot". When the character 1800 executes the acquisition effect of acquiring the icon 1810d, it is indicated that the lottery result of the second special symbol of this time is a big win.

In the fifteenth embodiment, unlike the above-described thirteenth embodiment, the game state set after the end of the big winning game is changed by the execution trigger of the big winning game executed based on the lottery of the second special symbol. Configure. Therefore, the player pays attention to the performance to be executed in order to grasp the lottery result of the second special symbol (the execution opportunity of the big winning game that can be established) when the time saving A state is set. Therefore, the production effect can be enhanced.

Then, when the jackpot game is executed based on the fact that the jackpot is won in the second special symbol lottery executed during the time saving A state, as shown in FIG. As a display mode for indicating that the state is set, a character display of "Rush rush" is displayed, and an effect display is displayed with a guide board 1800b for suggesting the game state to be set after the character 1800 finishes the jackpot game, is executed, and in the sub-display area Ds, a comment "It will be easier for the ball to enter the role item route" for explaining the game contents during the "character item rush" is displayed.

Further, in the lower left side of the main display area Dm, the display area HR30 displays acquisition information "600P" for indicating the number of balls acquired during the jackpot game, and the display area HR31 displays the number of balls executed within a predetermined period. “V×2” indicating that two big winning games have been executed is displayed as the number of times information for indicating the number of times of the big winning games. Here, in this embodiment, as in the thirteenth embodiment described above, the upper limit of the number of reserved memories of the second special symbol is one, and the second special symbol lottery during the time saving state (time saving A state) A normal state is set after the jackpot game (jackpot game executed based on the ball entering the specific area (direct V winning port 10657) during the small win game) executed based on the winning of the hit. It is configured so that

Then, the game state shifts from the time-saving A state to the normal state, and after that, a small win is won in the second special symbol lottery (lottery number of times) held and stored, and the big win game is executed. It is configured such that the time saving state (time saving A state) is set again after the jackpot game ends. In the fifteenth embodiment, once the time saving state is set, the period until the first special symbol lottery is executed in the normal state is set as a predetermined period, and the number of jackpot games executed during the predetermined period , information on the number of balls obtained during the predetermined period is displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 . As a result, it is possible to inform the player of the past game content in an easy-to-understand manner. In addition, in this embodiment, since one lottery right of the second special symbol can be reserved, it is assumed that the second special symbol lottery is won in the time saving A state and the shift to the time saving B state is performed. Also, the second special symbol lottery is executed at most once. In the present embodiment, when a jackpot is won in the lottery of the second special pattern, winning information corresponding to the second special pattern held and stored during the jackpot game is read in advance, and when the small prize is not won. The display screen shown in FIG. 320(b) is displayed only when Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the ball enters the second operation ball entrance 20064a in the open state by the right-handed game in which the ball is entered into the jackpot variable winning device 10065 that is opened during the jackpot game. Since it is configured, it is configured so that the second special symbol is likely to be stored after the jackpot game ends. As a result, the probability of being able to execute the accessory rush game executed in the state where the time saving B state is set can be substantially reduced to about 1/600.

In addition, without using such a configuration, for example, it may be configured so as not to have the second special symbol pending storage function. As a result, when a big win is won in the lottery for the second special symbol during the time saving A state, the role rush game can be executed without fail. In addition, as described above, the configuration is such that a ball enters the second actuation ball entrance 20064a in the open state by a right-handed game in which a ball enters the jackpot variable winning device 10065 that is opened during the jackpot game. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the second actuation ball entrance 20064a to be in an open state after the end of the jackpot game. Furthermore, when the configuration of the present embodiment is used, the fluctuation time of the second special symbol variation executed during the time saving B state, and the small winning game executed when the small winning is won in the second special symbol lottery A notification means may be provided to prevent a right-handed game from being executed during the period. As a result, it is possible to suppress the execution of the big win game based on the small win game executed when the small win is won in the second special symbol lottery executed during the time saving B state.

When the jackpot is won with the second special symbol in the time saving A state and the time saving B state is set after the jackpot game ends, the effect shown in FIG. 321(a) is executed. Next, with reference to FIG. 321, the content of the effect executed while the time saving B state (character rush) is set will be described. FIG. 321(a) is a schematic diagram for showing the contents of the effect immediately after the character rush is started, and FIG. 321(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the character object rush end screen. .

As described above, in the fifteenth embodiment, when the time saving B state is set, the lottery of the first special symbol is likely to be executed (the ball is easy to enter the first operation entrance 20064b) time saving state is set. Then, when a small win is won in the lottery of the first special symbol executed during the time saving B state, a small win game that can execute the role challenge is executed regardless of the set small win type. It consists of Then, when the time saving B state is set, as shown in FIG. 321(a), the number of special symbol variations until the time saving B state ends is displayed in the display area HR31 (in the example of FIG. 321(a), " Remaining 90 times"), the display area HR32 displays the number of character challenges performed while the time saving B state is set, and the number of times the ball wins the character route V winning opening 10677 due to the character challenge. is displayed, and the display area HR33 displays the accumulated number of seconds of the elapsed time during the role object challenge executed while the time saving B state is set.

In the fifteenth embodiment, when a jackpot game is executed while the time saving B state is set, the time saving B state is set again with a high probability after the jackpot game ends. Specifically, when the jackpot game is executed triggered by the small winning of the first special symbol (winning probability 1/20), the time saving B state is set at a rate of 100%, and the first special symbol When a jackpot game is executed with a jackpot winning (winning probability of 1/300) as a trigger, the time saving B state is set at a rate of 5%.

The number of times displayed in the display area HR32 and the display area HR33 and the number of seconds are cumulative values for the period from when the time saving B state is once set until a game state other than the time saving B state is set. configured to be displayed. Therefore, as the number of times the time saving B state is repeatedly set increases, the number of times displayed in the display regions HR32 and HR33 and the number of seconds tend to increase.

In the present embodiment, as described above, the display contents of the display area HR32 and the display area HR33 are targeted for the period from when the time saving B state is once set until the game state other than the time saving B state is set. However, without being limited to this, from the time the time saving B state is set until the big winning game is executed, or until the time saving B state ends without the big winning game being executed The display contents of the display regions HR32 and HR33 may be determined for each unit period.

Next, the display contents displayed in the display area HR32 will be described. In the fifteenth embodiment, while the time saving B state is set, when a small winning is won in the lottery of the first special symbol, a small winning game capable of executing the role challenge is executed. is doing. Then, when the winning ball of the small winning prize device 10650 passes through the accessory route sensor SZ2 during the small winning game, that is, when it is determined that the accessory challenge is executed during the small winning game. , the number of times of the role object challenge is incremented by 1. That is, the number of accessory challenges displayed in the display area HR32 (the number of times on the denominator side of the display in the display area HR32) is the number of small winning games during the time saving B state (the number of small winning games that can execute the accessory challenge). It is configured so that the actual number of times the accessory challenge is executed is displayed instead of the number of executions).

By configuring in this way, even though the small winning game is executed, when the ball cannot be won in the small winning prize device 10650, the number of accessory challenges is not added and displayed. It is possible to allow the player to accurately grasp the ratio (1/4 in the design value) of the number of ball winnings to the role item route V winning opening 10677 (the number of times on the numerator side of the display area HR32) to the number of item challenges. can. Therefore, based on the display content displayed in the display area HR32, the player can enjoy the game while predicting whether or not the ball will win the specific area (the role item route V winning opening 10677) in the role item challenge to be executed this time. can let

In addition, the display contents displayed in the display area HR32 may be determined by a method other than the above-described method, for example, the small winning game based on the small winning of the first special symbol is being executed. is determined, and the number of times the small winning game is executed based on the winning of the first special symbol may be displayed as the number of accessory challenges. In addition, the number of times the accessory challenge was not executed despite the execution of the small winning game capable of executing the accessory challenge (the number of times the ball could not be won in the small winning prize device 10650) The display content may be displayed so that the player can grasp it, or the display content can be displayed so that the player can grasp the number of times the ball has won a winning opening other than the winning opening 10677 of the winning opening of the winning entrance route V in the role challenge. may be displayed.

In addition, in order to determine the number of times the role challenge is actually executed, in the fifteenth embodiment, it is determined that the ball has flowed into the role object route 10670 for causing the ball to flow into the rolling device 10675. The root sensor SZ2 is used for detection, and the number of executions of the accessory challenge is determined based on the detection result. A detecting means may be provided for detecting, and the number of executions of the role object challenge may be counted based on the detection result of the detecting means.

In addition, in this embodiment, when a plurality of balls flow into the rolling device 10675 during one small winning game, the number of accessory challenges is updated according to the number of balls flowed into the rolling device 10675. However, without being limited to this, the upper limit of the number of times of the accessory challenge to be executed during one small winning game is set to one, and the number of accessory challenges is updated. can be By configuring in this way, for example, in the pachinko machine 10 in which a small winning game is executed in which a plurality of balls can be flowed into the rolling device 10675 during one small winning game, one time A person who performs a role challenge using a plurality of balls during a small winning game displays display contents in a display area HR32 in which the winning ratio to the role product route V winning port 10677 with respect to the number of times of the role challenge is increased. can improve the player's satisfaction. Therefore, in order to flow many balls into the rolling device 10675 during one small winning game, it is possible to motivate the player to play during the small winning game.

Next, when the time saving B state ends, that is, when the time saving end condition (99 times of special figure fluctuations) is established without the jackpot game being executed during the time saving B state, or when the time saving B after the jackpot game ends When the jackpot game in which the game state other than the state is set ends, as shown in FIG. In this end display, the number of times (5 times) of the character challenge executed during the time saving B state and the number of winnings (0 times) to the character item route V winning opening 10677 are displayed in the display area HR32. An area HR33 displays the accumulated value (120 seconds) of the duration of the character product challenge executed this time (5 times).

Furthermore, in the central part of the main display area Dm, a title corresponding to the content of the small winning game executed in the current time saving B state is displayed. The details of the content of this title will be described later, but based on the number of small winning games (number of character challenges) performed during the time saving B state and the elapsed period of the character challenge performed during the time saving B state The corresponding title is selected from among the titles that are set step by step and displayed on the display screen. In this way, at the timing when the time saving B state ends, by informing the player of the title based on the content of the time saving B state, the game content of the game executed this time (the game during the time saving B state) is excellent. It is possible to inform the player of whether or not there is an easy-to-understand explanation.

Next, with reference to FIG. 322, when the time saving B state is set, the effect contents during the jackpot game when the jackpot is won in the first special symbol lottery will be described. In the present embodiment, as described above, while the time saving B state is set, if the first special symbol lottery wins the jackpot, the jackpot game based on the jackpot winning is executed. It is constructed such that a game other than the time saving B state (for example, time saving A state) is executed with probability after the end of the jackpot game. Therefore, in the state where the time-saving B state is set, winning a small win in the lottery of the first special symbol can provide a game result more advantageous to the player than winning a big win.

FIG. 322(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a display screen showing that a jackpot has been won in the lottery for the first special symbol during the role rush (during time saving B state setting), FIG. (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing display contents displayed during a jackpot game. As shown in FIG. 322(a), when a big win is won in the lottery of the first special symbol during the role rush, a "V" icon 1811 indicating that the special symbol has been won is added with a treasure box 2801. It is displayed in the display mode. As a result, the player can be informed in advance that an effect for opening the treasure box 2801 will be executed during the jackpot game.

Then, when a predetermined period of time elapses during the jackpot game, as shown in FIG. 322(b), the treasure box 2801 is opened, and a suggestion mode 2801a for suggesting a game state to be set after the jackpot game ends. is executed. According to the example shown in FIG. 322(b), the characters "unfortunately" are displayed to indicate that the normal state is set after the jackpot game ends.

Next, a display screen for notifying an error state during a small winning game will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 323 is a schematic diagram schematically showing error information generated during a small winning game. This error information indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in a game abnormal state (ball clogging) in a game abnormal state determination process executed at different timings according to the type (game content) of the small winning game being executed during the small winning game. ) has occurred.

<Regarding the electrical configuration in the fifteenth embodiment>
Next, the ROM 202 of the main controller 110 in the fifteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 324 to 327. FIG. FIG. 324(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 202 of the main controller 110 in the fifteenth embodiment. In the fifteenth embodiment, instead of the first winning random number table 202a in the ROM 202 of the ninth embodiment (see FIG. 192(a)), the first winning random number table 202na of 16 is selected as the first winning type. A first hit type selection 16 table 202nb is provided instead of the table 202b, a fluctuation pattern selection 14 table 202md is provided instead of the fluctuation pattern selection table 202d, and a small hit type selection 16 table 202ne is provided instead of the small hit type selection table 202ea. And, it is different in that a small hit scenario 16 table 202nf and a normal electric operation scenario 16 table 202ng are newly added. Other configurations are the same as those of the ninth embodiment described above. Therefore, the description of the ROM 202 in the fifteenth embodiment will be limited to the above-described changes, and the description of the same elements as in the ninth embodiment will be omitted. Further, since the contents of the variation pattern selection 14 table 202md are the same as those of the fourteenth embodiment described above, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The first winning random number 16 table 202na is configured so that a small winning can be won even in the lottery of the first special symbol against the first winning random number table 202a (see FIG. 192(b)) of the ninth embodiment described above. The difference is that the probability of winning a small hit in the lottery of the second special symbol is changed, and the rest is the same.

Here, the contents of the first winning random number 16 table 202na will be described with reference to FIG. 324(b). FIG. 324(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the first winning random number 16 table 202na. This first winning random number 16 table na is a table used for executing the special symbol jackpot determination in the fifteenth embodiment, and includes the first ball entrance 64, the first actuation entrance 20064b, the second actuation The value of the first winning random number counter acquired based on the game ball entering one of the ball entrances 20064a is collated with the determination value defined in the first winning random number 16 table 202na. By doing so, it is configured to be able to judge big hits, misses, and small hits.

As shown in FIG. 324(b), in the first winning random number 16 table 202na, in the lottery of the first special symbol, the determination value (the value of the first winning random number counter C1) determined as a big hit (hit) is " 0, 1" is the range of the judgment value (the value of the first random number counter C1) that is determined to be out of the first special symbol lottery. "570 to 599" is defined as the range of determination values to be determined, and "0, 1" is the range of the determination value (the value of the first hit random number counter C1) determined to be out of the second special symbol lottery, and "2 to 300" is determined to be a small hit in the first special symbol lottery. "301 to 599" are defined as the range of judgment values for each.

That is, in the fifteenth embodiment, in the first special symbol lottery, the ratio (probability) of 1/300 (2/600) is a big hit, the ratio of 568/600 is a loss, and 1/20 (30/600). ) is configured to be a small hit. In addition, in the lottery of the second special pattern, it will be a big hit at a ratio of 1/300 (2/600), will be out at a ratio of 299/600, and will be a small hit at a ratio of 299/600 (about 1/2). It consists of

As a result, it is possible to execute the small winning game even in the normal state in which the lottery for the first special symbol is executed, and to execute the big winning game by winning V via the small winning game.

The first per type selection 16 table 202nb is for determining the type of the jackpot game and the jackpot type with respect to the first hit type selection table 202b (see FIG. 193 (a)) of the ninth embodiment described above. The difference is that the specified range of the determination value (first hit type counter C2) is changed.

The contents of the first winning type selection 16 table 202nb will be described with reference to FIG. 325(a). FIG. 325(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the first win type selection 16 table 202nb. As shown in FIG. 325(a), the first win type selection 16 table 202nb contains, as the type of jackpot game, "jackpot A16", "jackpot A16", "jackpot B16", "Big Win C16" selected when a big win is won in the second special pattern lottery, and "Big Win C16" selected based on the ball passing through the V prize opening (specific area) during the small win game. "Big win D16" and "Big win E16" are defined respectively.

"Jackpot A16" is executed (determined) when the value of the first hit type counter value C2 that has been obtained is "0 to 4", and "jackpot B16" is the first hit type counter that has been obtained Executed (determined) when the value of the value C2 is “5 to 99”, and “jackpot C16” is executed when the value of the acquired first hit type counter value C2 is “0 to 99” (determined), "jackpot D16" is executed (determined) when the value of the acquired first winning type counter value C2 is "0 to 49", and "jackpot E16" is acquired A determination value is set in the first hit type selection 16 table 202nb so that it is executed (determined) when the value of the first hit type counter value C2 is "50 to 99".

"Jackpot A16" is a jackpot game in which a round game of 10 rounds (R) is executed, and when the game state at the time of winning is a normal state, after the jackpot game ends Time saving state A (low probability of special symbol state, high probability state of normal symbols) is set to 100 times (time saving state that continues until special symbol lottery is executed 100 times), and if the game state at the time of winning is time saving state A or B, After the end of the jackpot game, the time saving state B (low probability state of special symbols, high probability state of normal symbols) is set 100 times (time saving state continued until special symbol lottery is executed 100 times).

"Jackpot B16" is a jackpot game in which a round game of 10 rounds (R) is executed, and when the game state at the time of winning is the normal state, the normal game state is set even after execution of the jackpot game, and the winning is performed. When the game state is time saving state A or time saving state B, time saving state A (low probability state of special symbols, high probability state of normal symbols) after the end of the jackpot game 100 times (lottery of special symbols Time saving state that continues until it is executed 100 times) is set.

"Jack C16" is a jackpot game in which a round game of 15 rounds (R) is executed, and when the game state at the time of winning is a normal state, after the jackpot game is completed, time saving state B (low probability of special symbol state, high probability state of normal symbols) is set to 100 times (time saving state that continues until special symbol lottery is executed 100 times), and if the game state at the time of winning is time saving state A or B, After the end of the jackpot game, the time saving state B (low probability state of special symbols, high probability state of normal symbols) is set 100 times (time saving state continued until special symbol lottery is executed 100 times).

"Jackpot D16" is a jackpot game in which a round game of 10 rounds (R) is executed, and when the game state at the time of winning is a normal state, after the jackpot game ends Time saving state A (low probability of special symbol state, high probability state of normal symbols) is set to 100 times (time saving state that continues until special symbol lottery is executed 100 times), and when the game state at the time of winning is time saving state A, normal game The state is set even after the execution of the jackpot game, and when the game state at the time of winning is the time saving state B, the time saving state B (low probability state of special symbols, high probability state of normal symbols) is set after the end of the jackpot game. 100 times (a time saving state that continues until the special symbol lottery is executed 100 times) is set.

"Jackpot E16" is a jackpot game in which a round game of 10 rounds (R) is executed, and when the game state at the time of winning is the normal state, the normal game state is set even after execution of the jackpot game, and the winning is performed. If the game state at the time is the time saving state A, the normal game state is set after the execution of the jackpot game, and if the game state at the time of winning is the time saving state B, the time saving state B ( A low probability state of special symbols and a high probability state of normal symbols) is set 100 times (time saving state continued until special symbol lottery is executed 100 times).

Thus, in the first winning type selection 16 table nb in the fifteenth embodiment, even if the time saving game state is set, the type of the time saving game state that is set (time saving state A or time saving state B ), the game state to be set in the case of a small hit is set to be different. By configuring in this way, when the player plays the game, even if it is the time saving state A or the time saving state B, the fluctuation time of the special symbol, the probability of winning the normal symbol, the normal electric accessory Since the appearance of the game state such as the operation time (open time) and the number of times it is opened does not change, it is not possible to determine whether the currently set game state is time saving state A or time saving state B. is configured as Even in such a game configuration, if the game state at the time of winning the jackpot game is the time saving state A, after the jackpot game, the normal game state is set, and if the time saving state B, the time saving state B is set. Since it is set, if it is the time saving state B, even after the jackpot game is executed, the time saving state B will continue to be set to be advantageous to the player, and the fact that the time saving state B is set It is configured to set a game state more advantageous to the player than the time saving state A is set.

In addition, in the present embodiment, when it is the time saving state A, it is configured so that the normal game state is set after the jackpot game, but in the time saving state A, the number of times of time saving is set to a small number (for example, 10 times, etc.) It may be configured as By configuring in this way, the time saving state is continuously set even after the jackpot game, and the game can be made to be interested in how many times the time saving is.

Next, with reference to FIG.325(b), small hit classification selection 16 table 202ne is demonstrated. FIG. 325(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of this small hit type selection 16 table 202ne. The small hit type selection 16 table 202ne is a selection table for determining based on the value of the small hit type counter value C5 that acquires the type of the small hit game to be executed when the small hit is won.

In the small winning type selection 16 table 202ne, "small winning A16", "small winning B16", and "small winning C16" are determined as the small winning types determined when the first special symbol is determined to be a small winning by lottery. "Small hit A17" and "Small hit B17" are set as the small hit types determined when it is determined as a small hit by the lottery of the second special symbols.

"Small hit A16" is a small hit type determined when "0" is obtained as the value of the small hit type selection counter value C5 when winning the small hit, and is a small hit in the small hit A16. If a V prize is won during execution of the game, a "jackpot C16" is executed.

"Small hit B16" is a small hit type determined when "1 to 29" is acquired as the value of the small hit type selection counter value C5 when winning a small hit, and in the small hit B16 When a V prize is won during execution of a small winning game, "big winning A16" is executed.

"Small hit C16" is a small hit type determined when "30 to 99" is acquired as the value of the small hit type selection counter value C5 when winning a small hit, and in the small hit C16 When a V prize is won during execution of the small winning game, "big winning E16" is executed.

"Small hit A17" is a small hit type determined when "0 to 49" is acquired as the value of the small hit type selection counter value C5 when winning a small hit, and in the small hit A17 When a V prize is won during execution of the small winning game, "big winning D16" is executed.

"Small hit B17" is a small hit type determined when "50 to 99" is acquired as the value of the small hit type selection counter value C5 when winning a small hit, and in the small hit B17 When a V prize is won during execution of the small winning game, "big winning E16" is executed.

Thus, in the small winning type selection 16 table 202ne, the small winning type to be executed is different between the first special symbol and the second special symbol, and in the small winning game, the big winning type corresponding to the small winning type Since the game is constructed so as to be executed at the time of V winning, the degree of the advantageous state given to the player in the case of a small win with the first special symbol and the case of a small win with the second special symbol. can be different. In addition, in the fifteenth embodiment, in the time saving state, in the time saving state A and the time saving state B, the first operation opening 20073a (the first special symbol lottery can be executed by entering the game ball) and the second Since it is configured to switch the entry to the operation port 20073b (the second special symbol lottery can be executed by the game ball entering), the operation port that enters the ball according to the type of the time saving state that is set. can be controlled, and a game can be played in anticipation of setting a time-saving state (time-saving state B in this embodiment) in which the player is assigned to a more advantageous operation port.

Further, in the present embodiment, the time-saving state A, which is disadvantageous to the player in the time-saving state, is set, the game ball is switched to enter the second operation opening 20073b, and the lottery for the second special symbol is executed. Even if there is, when the reserved memory of the first special symbol is acquired in the normal state, the lottery of the first special symbol is executed based on the reserved memory of the acquired first special symbol. will be If a small win is won by the variation, and if a V prize is won by executing a small win A16 or a small win B16, a time saving state B is set after the big win game executed by winning the V. (Because the jackpot A16 or jackpot C16 is executed), it is possible to rank up and shift to a time-saving state advantageous to the player. The probability, as shown in the small hit type selection 16 table 202ne, is set at a probability of 3/10 when a small hit is made with the first special symbol. Therefore, the game can be played while expecting the shift to the time-saving A state in a state in which more reserved memories of the first special symbols are acquired in the normal state, so that the operation of the game can be enhanced.

Next, with reference to FIG. 326, the small winning scenario table 202nf will be described. FIG. 326 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of this small winning scenario table 202nf. This small winning scenario table 202nf is a table in which scenario data for setting the operation contents (including operation timing) of the small winning prize device 10650 when a small winning game is executed is set.

In the small winning scenario table 202nf, an operation scenario is set corresponding to each small winning type. The small hit A16 and the small hit B16 are when the game state set when the small hit game is executed is the normal game state, and when it is the time saving game state (time saving state A or time saving state B). Each has its own operating scenario. In the small win C16, the small win A17, and the small win B17, the corresponding action scenario is set (selected) regardless of the set game state.

When the small hit A16 or the small hit B16 is executed, if it is a normal game state, 1s (seconds) as the opening period, 1.5s as the round period (open period) of the opening and closing door 10650b, and 3s as the ending period. configured to be set. Here, the opening period is the period from the end (elapsed) of the variable display period (dynamic display period) of the special symbol determined as the small hit A16 or the small hit B16 until the opening and closing door 10650b is opened. It is a period and is a part of the period during which the small winning game is executed. After that, the operation data for the open period is set, and the opening/closing door 10650b is moved to the open state (the opening/closing door 10650b is moved (moved) toward the rear side of the game machine 10) for 1.5 seconds. When 1.5 seconds of the opening period has passed or when a predetermined number (10 balls in this embodiment) of game balls enter the small winning prize device 10650, the opening and closing door 10650b is moved to the closed state, ending After the period of 3 seconds has elapsed, when a new special pattern variation is started or when a V prize is won, a jackpot game is started.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the game ball that has won the small winning prize device 10650 in the small winning game is discharged to the outside of the small winning prize winning device 10650 without being stored in the storage portion 10652a of the rotating body 10652. It is configured to be guided to a rolling device 10675 in which an opening 10654 (see FIG. 270), a direct V winning opening 10657 or an accessory route V winning opening 10677 is arranged. When guided to the direct V winning opening 10657, the game ball enters the direct V winning opening 10657, so that the execution of the big winning game corresponding to the small winning type being executed is executed after the ending period has elapsed. be done. When guided to the rolling device 10675, it is always sorted by the rotating operation of the rotating body 10675a, and when the ball enters the role item route V winning opening 10677, after execution of the small winning game (elapse of the ending period Later), the jackpot game is executed.

Also, when the small hit A16 or the small hit B16 is executed in the time saving game state (time saving state A or B), 12s (seconds) as the opening period, as the round period (open period) of the opening and closing door 10650b It is configured to set 1.5 s and 3.5 s as the ending period. In this case, as described above with reference to FIG. 319, a small winning game (accessory challenge) is executed in which the winning ball of the small winning prize device 10650 flows down toward the award route V winning opening 10677 .

Similarly, when the small winning C16 is executed, 12s (seconds) are set as the opening period, 1.5s as the round period (opening period) of the open/close door 10650b, and 3.5s as the ending period. It is In this case, as described above with reference to FIG. 319, a small winning game (accessory challenge) is executed in which the winning ball of the small winning prize device 10650 flows down toward the award route V winning opening 10677 .

When the small hit A17 or the small hit B17 is executed, 5.5 s (seconds) as the opening period, 1.5 s as the round period (open period) of the opening and closing door 10650b, and 3.5 s as the ending period are set. is configured as In this case, as described above with reference to FIG. 319, a small winning game (direct V challenge) is executed in which the winning ball of the small winning device 10650 flows down toward the direct V winning opening 11657 .

As described above, in the fifteenth embodiment, when the small hit A16 and the small hit B16 are set, that is, when the small hit is won in the first special symbol lottery, it is selected at a rate of 70%. When a small prize is set, in the normal state, the opening period is set to 1 second and the fake small prize game is executed, whereas in the time saving state, the opening period is set to 12 seconds and the character challenge is performed. It is constructed so that a small winning game is executed.

In this way, even when the same small winning type is set, it is possible to execute a small winning game in which the degree of expectation of the ball entering the specific area is changed according to the game state. The degree of expectation for a big win at the time of winning a small win can be varied according to the state. Therefore, it is possible to provide the player with a complex game, and prevent the player from quickly becoming bored with the game.

Next, with reference to FIG. 327, the RAM 203 of main controller 110 in the fifteenth embodiment will be described. FIG. 327 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the RAM 203 of the main controller 110 in the fifteenth embodiment. The RAM203 of the main control device 110 in the fifteenth embodiment is different from the RAM203 of the main control device 110 in the ninth embodiment in the time saving type storage area 203na, the emergency stop flag 203nb, the small hit type storage area 203nc, the winning abnormality flag 203nd and an extension flag 203ne are added. Other configurations are the same as those described in the ninth embodiment, so description thereof will be omitted.

The time saving type storage area 203na is a storage area in which data corresponding to the type of time saving state set in the time saving gaming state is stored. In this embodiment, two types of time-saving state A and time-saving state B are set as the time-saving gaming state, and data corresponding to the time-saving state type corresponding to the jackpot type executed after the jackpot game is set. be done. In addition, when it is other than the time-saving game state, data indicating that it is in the normal game state is set. As a result, based on the fact that the normal game state is set after the number of times of time saving (for example, 100 times) has passed, the data indicating the normal game state is overwritten and set. The data in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 is configured so that the data contents are retained by the backup power source even when power is cut off and power is not supplied to the gaming machine from the outside. Also, when the power is turned on again in the state in which the backup has been made, by turning on the power switch while the RAM clear switch is turned on, the contents of the RAM 203 are initialized and the game machine starts up. there is In addition, the time saving type storage area 203na is configured to start up in a state in which data indicating a normal game state is saved when the power is turned on after being initialized (RAM clearing, etc.).

The emergency stop flag 203nb indicates that power supply interruption occurs during the small winning game (power supplied to the gaming machine 10 (power supplied to the power board (20A))) is less than a predetermined value (for example, 12.4V or less) ) is a flag indicating that the rotator 10675a is always stopped. When a power failure occurs during a small winning game, the rotating body 10675a is always stopped, so that the rotation speed of the rotating body 10675a always decreases even though it is the timing when the V prize should not be won by design. Or, if you stop in the middle of the game or take a different action than normal, you will win a V prize, or conversely, you will not win a V prize at the timing when you should win a V prize. In order to suppress this, a process of stopping the rotating body 10675a is always executed. In addition, this emergency stop flag 203nb is set to ON by the processing of S1804 in the power failure processing (S1002) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, The flag is set to off by the processing of S3052 executed after the flag of is determined to be on. After the process of S3052 is executed, an error command is set to notify the player of the error, and even if the rotating body 10675a stops during the small winning game, the player is notified that the player has stopped due to an abnormality. It is configured so that it can be identified and a game can be played with peace of mind.

The small hit type storage area 203nc is an area for storing data indicating the type of small hit game to be executed when a small hit is won. In the small hit type storage area 203nc, when the main controller 110 executes the big hit determination and determines that it is a small hit, the small hit type is stored based on the value of the acquired small hit type selection counter C5. is determined, and data corresponding to the determined small winning type is stored. Then, at the timing when the small winning game is executed, the small winning operation scenario corresponding to the data stored in the small winning type storage area 203nc is set from the small winning scenario table 202nf, and the small winning game is executed.

The winning abnormality flag 203nd is a flag for indicating that the small winning prize device 10650 has remaining balls even after a predetermined elapsed time after the small winning game is executed. The elapsed period is set corresponding to the type of the executed small hit, and is set to 5 seconds in the case of the small hit A16 or the small hit B16 executed in the normal game state. By setting the winning abnormality flag 203nd to ON, the main control device 110 can easily determine ball clogging determination during the small winning game.

Extension flag 203ne, in the time-saving gaming state, when the small winning A16 or small winning B16 is executed, or when the small winning C16 is executed regardless of the gaming state, when 17 seconds have passed since the start of the small winning game This is a flag indicating that there are balls remaining in spite of this. By setting this extension flag 203ne to ON, within the role item route V winning valid period (when a game ball enters the role item route V winning opening 10677, the entering ball is processed as valid and the corresponding jackpot game is executed), the end of the small hit is set.

This extension flag 203ne is set to ON by the process of S1721 in the small winning end timing determination process (S1381) executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110. On the other hand, in the processing of S3131 in the V passing detection processing 16 (S1382) shown in FIG. 335, it is determined whether the extension flag 203ne is ON, and if it is ON, the end of the small hit is set, and the processing of S3133 , the extension flag 203ne is set off.

Next, referring to FIG. 328, the ROM 222 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the fifteenth embodiment will be described. FIG. 328(a) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the ROM 222 in the fifteenth embodiment. The fifteenth embodiment differs from the ninth embodiment in that a title selection table 222na is added. Since other configurations are the same as those of the ninth embodiment, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Next, the title selection table 222na will be described with reference to FIG. 328(b). FIG. 328(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of this title selection table 222na. The title selection table 222na is a table for selecting the content of the title performance (performance mode) executed in the title performance executed when the time saving state B ends.

In this title selection table 222na, contents of title effects to be selected are set for respective values of a time accumulation counter 223nb and a challenge number counter 223na, which will be described later. The time accumulation counter 223nb and challenge number counter 223na will be described.

FIG. 329 is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the RAM 223 of the audio ramp control device 113 in the fifteenth embodiment. The RAM 223 in the fifteenth embodiment differs from the ninth embodiment in that a challenge number counter 223na and a time accumulation counter 223nb are added to the RAM 223 in the ninth embodiment. Since other configurations are the same as those of the ninth embodiment, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The challenge number counter 223na is for counting the number of times a small winning game (accessory challenge small winning) that can win a small winning prize device 10650 when it is in the time saving state B (time saving B state) is executed. is a counter. The challenge number counter 223na is set to 0 as an initial value in the initial state when the power is turned on. Further, when the time saving state B is set, the initial value 0 is set in the processing of S41603 in the state command processing 16 (S4350: FIG. 338) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110 . In addition, in the process of S44072 in the win-related process 16 shown in FIG. 339, the value of the challenge number counter 223na is incremented by 1 and updated based on the fact that it is determined as a small win for the role object challenge.

The time accumulation counter 223nb is a counter for accumulating the execution period of the accessory challenge small hit executed during the time saving state. The elapsed period of this accessory challenge small hit is configured to be calculated using the value of the elapsed counter 203mg that measures the elapsed time from the start of the small hit game. The value of the elapsed period counter 223ma (character object challenge production start time) at the time of passing through the role object route sensor SZ2 (see FIG. 270) is stored, and the value of the elapsed period counter 223ma is updated according to the passage of time; The number of seconds corresponding to the difference from the value of the elapsed period counter 223ma at the time of passing through the stored role object route sensor SZ2 is calculated, and the calculated result is displayed as the elapsed time. This time accumulation counter 223nb is set to 0, which is the initial value, in the initial state when the power is turned on, and furthermore, in the processing of S41603 in the state command processing 16 (S4350: FIG. 338), the transition to the time saving B state is set to 0, which is the initial value, when a command indicating is received. Also, in the process of S44073 in the winning related process 16 shown in FIG. Based on the fact that it is determined as a small hit A16, B16, C16), it corresponds to the small hit challenge period (rolling period of the ball using the rolling device 10675) executed in this role challenge small hit It is updated by adding the value indicating the number of seconds to the time accumulation counter 223nb.

Returning to FIG. 328(b), the title selection table 222na will be described. This title selection table 222na is referred to in the process of S4552 in the final variation effect setting process (S4552: FIG. 341) executed by the MPU 222 of the sound ramp control device 113 with the values of the challenge number counter 223na and the time accumulation counter 223nb. and used to determine the content of the corresponding title effect. The final variation effect setting process (S4552) is a process executed in the final 1 variation (the final 1 variation of the special symbol) when the time saving state B ends, so the accessory challenge small hit performed in the time saving state B Title content is determined based on the number of executions and the accumulated time, and notified to the player. As a result, the player can evaluate the game when the time saving state B is set, the game can be played in comparison with the game in which the same time saving state B is set, and the time saving state B is executed. In particular, it is possible to suppress the problem that the player gets bored.

Specifically, when the value of the challenge number counter 223na is "0 to 2" and the value of the time accumulation counter 223nb is a value indicating the range of "0 to 140 seconds", the rank 1 is "mediocre ” is selected and the value indicates a range exceeding “140 seconds”, rank 3 “Reverse God” is selected. In addition, when the value of the challenge number counter 223na is "3 to 7" and the value of the time accumulation counter 223nb is a value indicating the range of "0 to 140 seconds", rank 2 "general" is selected. If the value indicates a range exceeding "140 seconds", rank 4 "advanced" is selected. Finally, when the value of the challenge number counter 223na is "8~" and the value of the time accumulation counter 223nb is a value indicating the range of "0 to 40 seconds", the rank 3 "reverse god" is If it is selected and the value indicates the range of "40 seconds to 140 seconds", then "advanced" is selected, which is rank 4, and if the value indicates the range over "140 seconds", it is rank 5 "Master" is selected.

Then, the title selected with reference to the title selection table 222na is displayed during the final change of the time saving B state. In addition, the period during which this title is displayed may be configured to be displayed until a predetermined period (for example, 1 second) elapses after the time saving B state ends and transitions to the normal state. As a result, the game result of the previous time saving B state can be notified to the player in an easy-to-understand manner.

<Regarding the control process of the main controller in the fifteenth embodiment>
Next, various control processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in the fifteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 330 to 336. FIG. First, referring to FIG. 330, the normal symbol variation process 16 (S136) in the fifteenth embodiment will be described. This normal design variation processing 16 (S136) is a process executed instead of the normal design variation processing (S106) in the thirteenth embodiment (and the first embodiment), the thirteenth embodiment (and the first embodiment ), similar to the normal symbol variation process (S106), the process for setting the lottery for the normal symbol and the opening/closing control process of the electric accessory are executed according to the lottery result.

In each process of S601 to S621 and S623 of the normal symbol variation process 16 (S136) in the fifteenth embodiment, S601 to S601 of the normal symbol variation process (S106) in the thirteenth embodiment (and the first embodiment) respectively The same processes as the processes of S621 and S623 are executed, but in the normal symbol variation process 16 (S136) in the fifteenth embodiment, the opening control and variable The difference is in setting the start of flow path operation control. Since other processing is the same, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In the normal symbol variation process 16 (S136), if it is determined that the current normal symbol lottery result is winning (S619: Yes) and the game state at the time of winning is in the time saving mode (S620: Yes), setting An open pattern corresponding to the type of time saving is set (S631). Specifically, with reference to FIG. 317, as described above, the opening pattern A or the opening pattern B is set according to the time saving type set at the time of winning the lottery of the normal symbols. Then, according to the opening pattern set in the process of S631, the opening/closing control of the electric accessory is set (S623), next, the start of the operation control of the variable flow path is set (S632), and this process ends.

In addition, in the present embodiment, two types of release patterns for the electric accessory during time saving are set, but the present invention is not limited to this, and two or more types may be used. By configuring in this way, the player can wait for which release pattern will be set this time with greater expectation, and the interest in the game is improved. Moreover, you may set so that the content of the operation control of the switching valve 20072 may be switched according to a time-saving classification. By configuring in this way, it is possible to set a plurality of game states even in the same time saving state, and it is possible to further improve the interest of the game.

Next, with reference to Drawing 331, return processing 16 (S995) in the small hitting in the 15th embodiment is explained. During the small hit return process 16 (S995) in the fifteenth embodiment, during the small hit game, the rolling device 10675 The difference is that a process of setting an error command is added when the power is turned off while the game ball remains in the . Since other points are the same, detailed description thereof is omitted.

In the small hitting middle return process 16 (S995), first, it is determined whether the small hitting medium flag 203ea is on (S3001). When it is determined that the flag 203ea during the small hit is on (S3001: Yes), the power supply is cut off during the small hit game, so the game ball does not pass through the role item route V winning opening 10677 It is determined whether or not the emergency stop flag 203nb, which indicates that the power has been cut off, is on (S3051). The emergency stop flag 203nb is ON (S3051: Yes), ie, when it is determined that there is a power failure without passing through the accessory route V winning opening 10677 during the small winning game, the emergency stop flag 203nb is turned OFF. (S3052), set an error command indicating an error during the small winning game (S3005), and terminate this process.

Here, when an error command is set, an error screen as shown in FIG. By configuring in this way, it is possible to notify the player that the power supply has been cut off before the end of the small winning game in an easy-to-understand manner, so that the game can be restarted quickly. In addition, when the power supply is restored, the rotation of the acceleration rotating body 10675a is set, and the game ball is suddenly flipped, and the small winning game ends without winning the role item route V winning opening 10677. Provide an opaque game. You can eliminate the fear of On the other hand, in the process of S3051, the emergency stop flag 203nb is not on, that is, when it is determined that it is off (S3051: No), the small hit middle return process in the fourteenth embodiment described above (S992 of FIG. 296 ) are executed, and the process ends.

In addition, in this embodiment, as described above, there is a power interruption during the small winning game, and when the power is restored while the game ball remains in the rolling device 10675, the start of rotation of the acceleration rotating body 10675a is set. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, an effect (countdown, etc.) may be executed to notify that the acceleration rotor 10675a will start moving after the power is restored. By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent the possibility of providing an opaque game such as the acceleration rotor 10675a suddenly starting to move. A player can easily understand that the acceleration rotor 10675a starts to move, and can carefully check how the acceleration rotor 10675a starts to move, so that a transparent game can be provided.

In addition, when the power supply is cut off during the small winning game and the game ball remains in the rolling device 10675, the acceleration rotating body 10675a is moved to the third symbol display device 81 when the power is restored, or an error , an effect for selecting whether or not to call a staff member may be displayed, and the player himself/herself may be allowed to make a selection with an operation means that the player can operate. By constructing in this way, even if the power is cut off during the small winning game, the player himself/herself can select the subsequent response, so that the player can be provided with a satisfying game. be able to. Alternatively, one of them may be set at random.

In addition, in the case of such a configuration, a malicious player intentionally turns off the power of the pachinko machine 10 during a small winning game, and furthermore, the power is restored at a position where it is easy to win a prize in the role item route V prize opening 10677. There is a risk of cheating to do so. In order to prevent such fraud, the number of power interruptions is counted, and if there are suspicious power interruptions such as multiple times in an hour, an error command is forcibly set and a staff member is notified. You can By configuring in this way, fraud can be prevented.

Alternatively, the accelerating rotor 10675a may be rotated last after the start-up process is completed. When configured in this manner, the above-described countdown effect may be executed. With this configuration, the player can easily understand that the accelerating rotor 10675a rotates, and it is possible to prevent the game ball from rotating and winning while the player is not looking. It is possible to provide games with transparency.

Next, with reference to FIG. 332, main processing 16 (see FIG. 332) in the fifteenth embodiment will be described. The main process 16 (see FIG. 332) in the fifteenth embodiment is a process executed instead of the main process 13 (see FIG. 201) in the thirteenth embodiment, and the small hit control process 13 (see S1072 in FIG. 203) ) in that small hit control processing 16 (S10001) is executed instead of ), and in that power-off processing (S10002) is added. Since other processing is the same, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In the main process 16 (see FIG. 332), first, the processes of S1001 to S1003 and S1071, which are the same processes as the main process of the thirteenth embodiment (see FIG. 201), are executed, and then the small winning control process 16 (S10001) is executed. In this small hit control process 16 (S10001), the process of setting the start and end timing of the small hit is executed. A detailed description of this small winning control process 16 (S10001) will be given later with reference to FIG.

Then, after executing the small hit control processing 16 (S10001), next, the above-described processing of S1006 to S1009 is executed, and in the processing of S1009, when it is determined that there is information on the occurrence of power interruption (S1009 : Yes), the process of S1013 described above is executed, the power-off process (S10002) is executed, and the process proceeds to S1014.

Here, with reference to FIG. 333, small hit control processing 16 (S10001), which is one processing of main processing 16 (see FIG. 332) in the fifteenth embodiment, will be described. FIG. 333 is a flow chart showing the contents of the small hit control process 16 (S10001). The small hit control process 16 (S10001) in the fifteenth embodiment is a process executed in place of the small hit control process 15 (S1092 in FIG. 297) in the thirteenth embodiment, and V passing detection process 15 (S1393) It is different in that the V passing detection process 16 (S1382) is executed instead and the small hit end timing determination process (S1381) is added. Since other processing is the same, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In the small hit control process 16 (S10001), it is first determined whether it is the timing of the start of the small hit (S1301), and if it is determined that it is the timing of the start of the small hit (S1301: Yes), The same processing as the processing of S1302 to S1303, S1321, and S1391 of the hit control processing 15 (S1092 in FIG. 297) is executed, and this processing ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is not the time to start the small hit (S1301: No), it is determined whether the flag 203ea during the small hit is on (S1304). If the small hitting medium flag 203ea is not ON, that is, if it is OFF (S1304: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, the small hit medium flag 203ea is ON, that is, when it is determined that the small hit is in progress (S1304: Yes), the value of the small hit operation scenario progress counter is updated (S1392), and the small hit end timing A determination process is executed (S1381), and the process proceeds to S1310.

Here, with reference to Drawing 334, small hit end timing distinction processing (S1381) which is one process of small hit control processing 16 (S10001) in the 15th embodiment is explained. FIG. 334 is a flow chart showing the contents of the small hit end timing determination process (S1381). In this small winning end timing determination process (S1381), the small winning end timing is determined according to the value of the counter whether it is measured from the winning small winning type and the small winning start time, and the small winning ending timing is determined. When game balls remain in the rolling device 10675 at the end timing of the game, a process of setting an error command is executed.

In the small hit end timing determination process (S1381), first, reading of the value of the elapsed counter 203mg is executed (S1701). Next, it is determined whether the value indicated by the elapsed counter 203mg read in the process of S1701 is 5 seconds (S1702). This 5 seconds is the end timing of the small hit A and the small hit B when the game state is the normal state (see determination 1 in FIG. 319). When it is determined that the elapsed time is 5 seconds (S1702: Yes), information reading from the small hit type storage area 203nc is executed (S1703).

Then, it is determined whether the small hit type read in the process of S1703 is the small hit A16 of the normal state or the small hit B16 (S1704). If it is determined that it is not the small hit A16 or the small hit B16 (S1704: No), it is not the end timing of the small hit, so the process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined that the read small hit type is the normal state small hit A or small hit B (S1704: Yes), it is determined whether the game ball remains in the rolling device 10675 ( S1705). Determination of whether or not this game ball remains is performed by a sensor or the like provided in the rolling device 10675 .

When it is determined that the game ball does not remain in the rolling device 10675 in the process of S1705 (S1705: Yes), the small hit end timing is set (S1706), and this process is ended. On the other hand, in the process of S1705, when it is determined that the game ball remains in the rolling device 10675 (S1705), the remaining error command is set (S1707), and the winning abnormality flag 203nd is set to ON ( S1708), and the process ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1702 that the elapsed time is not 5 seconds (S1702: No), it is determined whether the elapsed time is 10.5 seconds. When it is determined that the elapsed time is 10.5 seconds (S1709: Yes), the information of the small hit type storage area 203nc is read (S1710). If it is determined that the small hit type read out in the process of S1710 is not the small hit A17 or the small hit B17 (S1711: No), this process is terminated as it is because it is not the timing of the end of the small hit. On the other hand, in the processing of S1711, when it is determined that the small hit type is the small hit A17 or the small hit B17 (S1711: Yes), it is determined whether there is a ball remaining in the rolling device 10675 (S1712). When it is determined that there is no remaining ball (S1712: No), the small winning end timing is set (S1713), and this process is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined that there is a ball remaining in the rolling device 10675 (S1712: Yes), the remaining error command is set (S1714), the prize-winning abnormality flag 203nd is set to ON (S1715), and this process is executed. finish.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1709 that the elapsed time is not 10.5 seconds (S1709: No), it is determined whether the elapsed time is 17 seconds (S1716). If it is determined that the elapsed time is not 17 seconds (S1716: No), the process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the elapsed time is 17 seconds (S1716: Yes), the information of the small hit type storage area 203nc is read (S1717), and the read small hit type is the time saving state small hit It is determined whether it is A16, small hit B16, or small hit C16 (S1718). If it is determined that the read-out small hit type is not the small hit A16, the small hit B16, or the small hit C16 in the time saving state (S1718: No), it is not the timing of the end of the small hit, so this process is performed as it is. finish. On the other hand, when it is determined that the read-out small hit type is a small hit A16 in a time saving state, a small hit B16, or a small hit C16 (S1718: Yes), is there a ball remaining in the rolling device 10675? It discriminates (S1719).

In the process of S1719, when it is determined that there is no remaining ball in the rolling device 10675 (S1719: No), the timing of finishing the small hit is set (S1720), and this process is finished. On the other hand, if there is a ball remaining in the rolling device 10675 (S1719: Yes), the extension flag 203ne is set to ON (S1721), and this process ends.

Returning to FIG. 333, the description continues. After executing the small winning end timing determination process (S1381), it is determined whether it is the next small winning end timing (S1310). If it is determined that it is not the timing of the end of the small hit in the process of S1310 (S1310: No), the V passage detection process 16 is executed (S1382), and S1394 of the small hit control process 15 of the thirteenth embodiment described above. The process of S1395 is executed, and this process ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 335, the V passage detection process 16 (S1382), which is one process in the small hit control process 16 (see S10001 in FIG. 333) in the fifteenth embodiment, will be described. FIG. 335 is a flow chart showing the contents of the V passage detection process 16 (S1382). V passage detection processing 16 (S1382) in the fifteenth embodiment is different from the V passage detection processing 15 (S1393) in the thirteenth embodiment described above. In the case of a win B16 or a small win C16, the winning is detected in the role item route V winning slot, and the end timing of the small win when the extension flag 203ne indicating that the small win period is extended is on. The difference is that processing for setting is added. Since the other points are the same, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In the V passage detection process 16 (S1382), first, the same processes as S3101 to S3103 of the V passage detection process 15 (S1393) in the thirteenth embodiment described above are executed. If it is determined that the ball has not passed through (S3103: No), then the value of the elapsed counter 203mg is read out (S3110), and the read out value of the elapsed counter 203mg is the winning validity period of the role item route V. (S3111). When it is determined that it is within the award validity period of the accessory route V (S3111: Yes), it is determined whether the extension flag 203ne is on (S3131).

When it is determined that the extension flag 203ne is ON in the process of S3131 (S3131: Yes), the small hit end timing is set (S3132), the extension flag 203ne is set to OFF (S3133), and the above S3106 Go to processing. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S3131 that the extension flag 203ne is not ON (S3131: No), the processes of S3132 and S3133 are skipped, and the process proceeds to the process of S3106 described above.

Next, with reference to FIG. 336, power-off processing (S10002), which is one of the main processing (see FIG. 332) in the fifteenth embodiment, will be described. FIG. 336 is a flow chart showing the contents of the power-off process (S10002). This power-off process (S10002) is a process for stopping the acceleration rotor 10675a when there is a power-off during the small winning game and no ball is entered in the accessory route V winning opening 10677.

In the power-off processing (S10002), first, it is determined whether the flag 203ea during the small hit is on (S1801). If it is determined that the small hit medium flag 203ea is not ON, that is, if it is determined that it is not during the small hit (S1801: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined that the small hit medium flag 203ea is ON (S1801: Yes), then it is determined whether the V passage flag 203ec is ON (S1802). That is, it is determined that a ball was entered in the accessory route V prize-winning opening 10677 before the occurrence of this power cutoff. If it is determined that the V passage flag 203ec is ON (S1802: Yes), the power is turned off after the V prize is won, so this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined that the V passage flag 203ea is not ON, that is, is OFF (S1802: No), the rotation of the acceleration rotor 10675a is stopped (S1803), and the emergency stop flag 203nb is set to ON. (S1804), and the process ends.

As described above, in the present embodiment, when there is a power cut during the small winning game, the acceleration rotor 10675a is stopped from driving and then the power cut processing is executed. Thus, by first stopping the rotation of the acceleration rotor 10675a only when the V passage flag 203ec is not set to ON during the small winning game, it is possible to reduce the processing load when the power is turned off. In addition, by first stopping the rotation of the acceleration rotor 10675a, the power is cut off while the game ball remains in the rolling device 10675, and the acceleration rotor 10675a is bounced after the valid period of V winning has passed. It is possible to prevent the player from feeling that the game ball that has been dropped enters the role item route V winning hole 10677 and the player loses.

In addition, without being limited to this, a sensor or the like is provided to detect that the accessory route V winning opening 10677 has been won by a backup power supply even when the power is turned off, and when the sensor detects a game ball, the start-up process is started. After being executed, it may be configured to execute a jackpot game. By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent the problem that a ball enters the role item route V winning opening 10677 and a big win is not awarded during sudden power interruption. In addition, in the present embodiment, when there is a power cut during the small winning game, it is configured to first stop the rotating accessory 10675a, but without being limited to this, when a power cut occurs, the game state Regardless, it may be configured to stop the rotating accessory 10675a first. By configuring in this way, it becomes possible to control the stop of the rotary accessory 10675a in the power-off process, and the processing load can be reduced.

Furthermore, by supplying power from a backup power supply used when power is cut off, the entry of a ball into the role item route V prize opening 10677 can be detected during the power cut, and the detection result is temporarily displayed. , and when the power-off state is restored, the small winning game may be continued based on the detection result stored in the storage means. Even when configured in this manner, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the big winning game is not executed even though the ball enters the accessory route V winning opening 10677 .

In addition, when the power is turned off, a holding means may be provided for holding a ball entering the role item route V winning opening 10677 immediately before the detecting means for detecting the ball entering the role item route V winning opening 10677 . As a result, it is possible to reliably prevent the ball from entering the accessory route V prize opening 10677 while the power is off. In this case, the release of the holding means should be executed after the power is turned on and the control process of the pachinko machine 10 is completely restored. For example, it may be configured such that the release process is executed after executing a notification effect to the effect that the holding member is released on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 .

<Regarding control processing of the sound lamp control device in the fifteenth embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 337 to 341, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio ramp control device 113 in the fifteenth embodiment will be described. First, the command determination processing 16 (S41012) in the fifteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. This command determination process 16 (S41012) is a process that is executed instead of the command determination process (S4112) in the thirteenth embodiment (and the first embodiment). On the other hand, the difference is that the state command process 16 (S4350) is executed instead of the state command process (S4310), and the hit related process 16 (S4354) is executed instead of the hit related process 15 (S43071). . Since the other processes are the same, the detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In the command determination process 16 (S41012), first, the processes of S4301 to S4308 described above are executed, and then it is determined whether or not a state command has been received from the main controller 110 (S4309). If it is determined that a state command has been received (S4309: Yes), state command processing 16 (S4350) is executed, and this processing ends. This state command process 16 (S4350) will be described later with reference to FIG. On the other hand, if it is determined that the status command has not been received (S4309: No), the above-described processing of S4311 to S4312 is executed, and then it is determined whether or not a hit-related command has been received (S4313). When it is determined that the hit-related command has been received (S4313: Yes), the hit-related process 16 (S4354) is executed, and this process ends. A detailed description of this win-related process 16 (S4354) will be given later with reference to FIG. On the other hand, if it is determined that the win-related command has not been received (S4313: No), the process of S4315 described above is executed, and this process ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 338, state command processing 16 (S4350), which is one processing in the command determination processing (see S41012 in FIG. 337) in the fifteenth embodiment, will be described. FIG. 338 is a flowchart showing the contents of state command processing 16 (S4350). In the state command process 16 (S4350) in the fifteenth embodiment, when the game state shifts to the time saving B state, a process of resetting the challenge number counter 223na and the time accumulation counter 223nb is executed.

In the state command process 16 (S4350), first, data in the game state storage area is updated according to the command received this time (S41601). Next, it is determined whether the command received this time is a command indicating transition to the time saving B state (S41602). When it is determined that the received state command is not a command indicating transition to the time saving B state (S41602: No), this processing is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that the command indicates the transition to the time saving B state, the values of the challenge number counter 223na and the time saving cumulative counter 223nb are set to initial values (S41603), and this processing is terminated.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the process of setting the values of the challenge number counter 203na and the time accumulation counter 223nb to the initial values is configured to be executed when the game state shifts to the time saving B state. Without being limited to this, when the game state shifts from the time saving B state to another game state, a process of setting the values of the challenge number counter 203na and the time accumulation counter 223nb to initial values may be executed. By comprising in this way, it becomes unnecessary to hold|maintain the value of a counter until time saving B state is set again, and a processing load can be reduced.

Next, with reference to FIG. 339, the hit-related process 16 (S4354), which is one process in the command determination process (see S41012 in FIG. 337) in the fifteenth embodiment, will be described. FIG. 339 is a flow chart showing the details of the win-related process 16 (S4354). The winning related process 16 (S4354) in the fifteenth embodiment is different from the winning related process 15 (see S43071 in FIG. 303) in the thirteenth embodiment. When it does, it differs in that the process which updates the value of challenge frequency counter 223na and time saving accumulation counter 223nb is added. Since other processing is the same, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In the hit-related process 16 (S4354), first, the processes of S4404 to S4408, S44401, S44051 to S44056 are executed, and it is determined whether or not the ending command is received (S4409). When it is determined that an ending command has been received (S4409: Yes), an ending command for display is set (S4410), and then it is determined whether or not the current win-related command is a small prize for the role challenge (S44071). . When it is determined that the accessory challenge is a small hit (S44071: Yes), the value of the challenge number counter 223na is incremented by 1 (S44072), and then the value of the time accumulation counter 223nb is updated (S44073). Then, the process of S44058 is executed, and this process ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 340, the variable display setting process 16 (S44194) in the fifteenth embodiment will be described. FIG. 340 is a flow chart showing the contents of the variable display setting process 16 (S44194). The variable display setting process 16 (S44194) in the fifteenth embodiment is a process of setting the final variable effect of the time saving B state in contrast to the variable display setting process (S4113) in the thirteenth embodiment (and the first embodiment). is added. Since the other points are the same, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In the variable display setting process 16 (S44194), first, the processes of S4501 to S4504 described above are executed, and then it is determined whether or not the current change is the final change in the time saving B state (S4551). When it is determined that the current variation is the final variation of the time saving B state (S4551: Yes), the final variation effect setting process (S4552) is executed, and other effect setting processes are executed (S4553). Then, the processing of S4505 to S4509 described above is executed, and this processing ends. The details of this final variation effect setting process (S4552) will be described later with reference to FIG. On the other hand, in the processing of S4551, when it is determined that the current variation is not the final variation of the time saving B state (S4551: No), the final variation effect setting processing (S4552) is skipped, and the process proceeds to S4553.

Next, with reference to FIG. 341, the final variation effect setting process (S4552), which is one process in the variation display setting process 16 (S44194) in the fifteenth embodiment, will be described. FIG. 341 is a flow chart showing the contents of this final variation effect setting process (S4552). In the final variation effect setting process (S4552), in the final variation when the game state is the time saving B state, the effect of giving a title to the player is set based on the values of the challenge number counter 223na and the time accumulation counter 223nb. Processing is performed.

In the final fluctuation effect setting process (S4552), based on the values of the challenge counter 223na and the time accumulation counter 223nb, the title selection table 222na is referred to and the title to be given to the player is selected (S4571). Next, it is determined whether or not the jackpot has been won in this variation (S4572). If it is determined that the jackpot has not been won in this variation (S4572: No), the selected title is set as it is (S4573), and the process proceeds to S4575. On the other hand, in the process of S4572, if it is determined that the jackpot was won (S4572: Yes), a title two ranks higher than the title selected in the process of S4571 is set (S4574), and the process proceeds to S4575. . In the processing of S4575, a display command for indicating the set title is set (S4575), and this processing ends. The display command set here is sent to the display control device 113, and based on this display command, a screen giving a title as shown in FIG. do.

By configuring in this way, when the rank of the displayed title is high with respect to the actual game result (the number of character challenges performed during the time saving B state and the cumulative game period of the character challenge) can make the player think that he has won a big win in the final variation of the time saving B state.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the final variation of the time saving B is set, it is configured to execute the effect of giving the title to the player, but not limited to this, the number of times the time saving game is changed is predetermined. It may also be configured such that the title at that time is notified to the player each time the specified number of times is reached. By configuring in this way, the player can enjoy the change of the title of the player himself/herself, and the interest in the game is improved. Also, it may be configured so that the player can confirm the current title by operating means that the player can operate. An easy-to-understand game can be provided by configuring the game so that the player himself/herself can confirm the title at the timing he/she wants to confirm.

<Modification 1 of the fifteenth embodiment>
Next, Modification 1 of the fifteenth embodiment described above will be described with reference to FIGS. 342 to 344. FIG. In the fifteenth embodiment described above, as the game state, the normal state (low probability state of special symbols, low probability state of normal symbols), time-saving state (low probability state of special symbols, high probability state of normal symbols), can be set, and further, as the time saving state, a time saving A state in which the lottery of the second special symbol is easily executed and a time saving B state in which the lottery of the second special symbol is easy to be executed can be set. rice field. A plurality of time-saving states are set in a stepwise manner by setting the time-saving state B when a big win is won in the lottery of the second special pattern when the time-saving state A is set. It was configured to be Furthermore, by setting the game state in which the time saving B state is more advantageous to the player than the time saving state A, the player can be motivated to play the game so as to set a more advantageous game state. It was configured to do so.

In addition, in the fifteenth embodiment described above, when the time-saving A state is set, a small hit is won in the second special symbol lottery, and a big hit game is executed based on the small hit, The amusement of the game is improved by structuring that the normal state is set after the end of the jackpot game, and by configuring so as to greatly change the subsequent game content depending on the timing of execution of the jackpot game executed during the time-saving A state. I was letting

On the other hand, in the first modification of the fifteenth embodiment, when the time saving A state is set, when the jackpot game is executed, the time saving B state is set after the jackpot game ends. Then, when a jackpot game is executed during the time-saving B state, the time-saving A state is set after the jackpot game ends. Then, by making the condition for ending the time saving B state easier to establish than the fifteenth embodiment described above, the time saving A state is a more advantageous game state than the time saving B state The fifteenth embodiment described above. different from the form.

On the other hand, as in the fifteenth embodiment described above, the time saving B state makes it easier to execute the first special symbol lottery than the normal state, so the time saving B state is more advantageous to the player than the normal state. It is in a game state. That is, the pachinko machine 10 of this modification uses the same configuration as the fifteenth embodiment described above, and is configured to be able to set the time saving A state and the time saving B state, and the jackpot game is performed during the time saving A state. When it is executed, it is configured to be able to set the time saving B state as a withdrawal zone for a predetermined period.

By configuring in this way, when a jackpot game is executed in a state in which the time saving A state is set, the most disadvantageous game state (normal state) for the player is set after the jackpot game ends. It is possible to set the time saving B state, which is more advantageous than the normal state, although it is more disadvantageous than the time saving A state. Therefore, while the time saving B state is set, the jackpot game is executed, and the game can be played continuously while expecting the time saving A state to be set again. It should be noted that, in this modification, with respect to the fifteenth embodiment described above, the content of the game state set after the end of the jackpot game is changed, the end condition of the time saving B state is changed, and the effect according to the change are the same except that they execute For the same contents, refer to the contents of the fifteenth embodiment described above, and the detailed description thereof will be omitted.

<Regarding the production content of Modification 1 of the fifteenth embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIG. 342, the characteristic effect contents among the various effect contents executed by the pachinko machine 10 of this modified example will be described. Figure 342 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the display screen at the end of the jackpot game executed during the time saving A state (normal rush), Figure 342 (b) is a time saving B state (revival chance ) is a schematic diagram showing a display screen in the middle.

As shown in FIG. 342(a), when a jackpot game is executed during a normal rush, a comment for notifying that a time-saving B state (revival chance) is set after the jackpot game ends is displayed in the main display area. Displayed in the center of Dm. Then, when the special symbol variation (first special symbol variation) of the time saving B state (resurrection chance) is started, the special symbol until the time saving B state (resurrection chance) ends as shown in FIG. "Remaining 19 times" is displayed in the display area HR31 as the number of fluctuations, characters "Character challenge high probability" are displayed in the display area HR35, and "During the remaining number of times, character Get the challenge" comment is displayed.

When the time saving B state is set, the same game as the time saving B state in the pachinko machine 10 of the fifteenth embodiment described above is executed. While the execution probability of the role challenge is 30%, if a small hit is won in the lottery of the first special symbol in the time saving B state, the execution probability of the role challenge is 100%, so the normal state. On the other hand, the execution probability of the character challenge is high. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 342(b), when the time saving B state is set, an effect for informing the player that the execution probability of the role challenge is increasing is executed. .

In addition, in this modification, as in the fifteenth embodiment described above, when the time saving B state is set, the lottery for the first special symbol is more likely to be executed than in the normal state, and the role challenge is performed. Although it is configured to be easily executed, it is not limited to this, for example, without changing the ease of execution of the first special symbol lottery from the normal state (configured to be about the same), the role It may be configured to increase only the execution probability of the object challenge.

Next, with reference to FIG. 343, the transition state of the game state in this modified example will be described. FIG. 343 is a game flow diagrammatically showing the transition of the game status of the pachinko machine 10 in this modified example. In the pachinko machine 10 of this modified example, when the jackpot game is executed in the normal state with respect to the game flow (see FIG. 318) of the pachinko machine 10 of the fifteenth embodiment described above, after the jackpot game ends, It is configured so that the time saving A state is always set, and when a big win game is executed in the time saving A state, the time saving B state is always set after the big win game is finished, and the time saving B state is set. This differs from the fifteenth embodiment described above in that when a jackpot game is executed, the time-saving A state is always set after the jackpot game ends.

Furthermore, the condition for ending the time saving B state (time saving end condition) is set as the time saving end condition when the special symbol variation (lottery) fluctuates (executes) 99 times in the fifteenth embodiment described above. On the other hand, in this modification, the case where the special symbol variation (lottery) fluctuates (executes) 20 times is set as the time saving end condition, and the end condition of the time saving B state is easily established. ing. Other contents are the same as those of the fifteenth embodiment described above, and detailed description of the same contents will be omitted.

By configuring in this way, in this modification, it becomes possible to transition the game state with regularity every time the big win game is executed, and to provide the player with an easy-to-understand game property. be able to. In addition, since the time saving B state in which the lottery of the first special symbol is likely to be executed is used as a pullback zone (revival chance) in which the time saving A state is more likely to be set than in the normal state, the jackpot game ends in the time saving A state. It is possible to prevent the player from stopping the game immediately after the time-saving A state ends, compared with the game property in which the normal state is set later.

<Electrical Configuration of Modification 1 of Fifteenth Embodiment>
Next, referring to FIG. 344, the electrical configuration of this modified example will be described. In this modification, instead of the first winning type selection 16 table 202nb that the ROM 202 of the main control unit 110 has, the first winning type selection 17 table 202pb is provided, and the rest is the same. The same elements are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed descriptions thereof are omitted. It should be noted that a new electrical configuration is used when the effects based on the above-described differences are displayed on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81. The electrical configuration for determining the presence/absence of information to be displayed and setting the effect contents based on the determination result of the presence/absence determination is the same as the technical concept described in any of the above-described embodiments. , even if the specific display contents are different, the explanation thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 344(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110 of the pachinko machine 10 in this modification. As shown in FIG. 344(a), in this modification, by providing the first hit type selection 17 table 202pb instead of the first hit type selection 16 table 202nb, the game state type set after the jackpot game ends is different from the fifteenth embodiment described above.

Here, the contents of the first winning type selection 17 table 202pb will be described with reference to FIG. 344(b). FIG. 344(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the first win type selection 17 table 202pb. As shown in FIG. 344(a), with respect to the first hit type selection 16 table 202nb of the fifteenth embodiment described above, the game state type and end condition set after the end of the jackpot game are different. different, otherwise identical. A detailed description of the same contents will be omitted.

Specifically, when the jackpot type is set when the first special symbol jackpot is won, and the jackpot type is jackpot A16 (10R (round) jackpot), regardless of the game state at the time of winning, the jackpot "Time saving A state" is set after the end of the game, and in the case of a jackpot B16 (10R (round) jackpot), if the game state at the time of winning is the normal state, the "normal state" is set after the end of the jackpot game, If it is the time saving A state and the time saving B state, the “time saving A state” is set.

In addition, when the jackpot type is set when the jackpot of the second special symbol is won, and the jackpot type is the jackpot C16 (15R (round) jackpot), the gaming state at the time of winning is the normal state or the time saving B If it is a state, "time saving A state" is set, and if it is a time saving A state, "time saving B state" is set.

Furthermore, if the jackpot type is a jackpot type that can be set when a small win is won, and the jackpot type is a jackpot D16 (10R (round) jackpot), the gaming state at the time of winning is the normal state or the time saving B state. If there is, "time saving A state" is set, and if it is working time saving A state, "time saving B state" is set. Also, if the jackpot type is jackpot E16 (10R (round) jackpot), if the game state at the time of winning is normal state, "normal state" is set, and if it is time saving A state, "time saving B state" is set, and if it is in the time saving B state, the "time saving A state" is set.

In addition, in this modification, when the time saving A state is set, as the time saving end condition, the time saving end condition ( Special symbol variation 100 times) is set, and when the time saving B state is set, the time saving end condition is established when the special symbol variation is executed 20 times without executing the jackpot game as the time saving end condition. End conditions (special figure fluctuation 20 times) is set.

When the time-saving A state is set, it becomes easier to execute the lottery of the second special symbol that wins a small hit with a probability of 1/2, and if the second special symbol wins a small win in the lottery of the second special symbol, it is high. Since a small winning game (direct V challenge) is executed in which the ball that wins the small winning prize device 10650 with a probability (almost 100%) wins the direct V winning opening 10657, when performing a normal game, A jackpot game is executed without satisfying a time-saving end condition. On the other hand, in the time saving B state, it is a game state in which the lottery of the first special symbol that wins a small hit with a probability of 1/20 is likely to be executed. During the time-saving B state, a small winning game in which the accessory challenge can be executed without fail by winning the small winning of the first special symbol is executed, but the ball enters the accessory route V winning opening 10677 in the accessory challenge. Since the probability is 1/4, the time saving B state becomes a time saving state in which the time saving end condition is more likely to be established than the time saving A state. However, since the time-saving B state is a state in which a jackpot game is more likely to be executed than in the normal state, the game state is more advantageous to the player than in the normal state.

<Modification 2 of the fifteenth embodiment>
Next, modification 2 of the fifteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In the fifteenth embodiment described above, the jackpot type is set based on the special symbol lottery result. Specifically, when a big win is won in a lottery of special symbols, or when a small win is won, the first win type selection 16 table 202nb is referred to select a big win type, and a big win game is executed. , a jackpot game corresponding to the selected jackpot type is executed, and after the jackpot game ends, a game state corresponding to the selected jackpot type is set.

However, when the special symbol lottery result is displayed on the first symbol display device 37, in addition to the current special symbol lottery result, the selected jackpot type is also identifiably displayed. When the time saving state is set, by identifying the contents displayed on the first pattern display device 37 when the small winning is won, the ball is placed in the V winning opening (specific area) during the small winning game this time. There is a problem that it is grasped in advance whether the jackpot game executed by making the ball enter is a jackpot game advantageous to the player or a jackpot game unfavorable to the player.

In order to solve this problem, for example, when the ball is shot after the lottery result of the special symbol is stopped and displayed on the first symbol display device 37, the ball is sent to the V winning opening (specific area) during the small winning game. It is conceivable to configure the structure of the game board 13 so that the ball cannot be entered. There arises a problem that the degree of freedom for providing the configuration of is restricted.

Therefore, in this modification 2, a plurality of specific areas (V winning openings) in which the ball can enter during the small winning game are provided, and the big winning game is finished in correspondence with the specific area (V winning opening) where the ball enters. It is configured so that the game state to be set later is made different.

Furthermore, a plurality of specific areas (V winning openings) for setting the game state described above are arranged in areas where game balls that have flowed into the rolling device 10675 can enter. By configuring in this way, when using the configuration for setting the game state corresponding to the specific area where the ball enters during the small winning game, the player intentionally sets the specific game state. It is possible to suppress the player from playing a game with the aim of doing so.

Here, with reference to FIG. 345, the configuration of the rolling device 10675 used in Modification 2 will be described. FIG. 345(a) is an enlarged front view of the rolling device 10675 in Modification 2, and FIG. 345(b) is an enlarged plan view of the rolling device 10675 in Modification 2. FIG. As shown in FIG. 345, in the second modified example, the positions of the out-ports 10680a and 10680b and the position of the role item route V prize-winning port 10677 are changed with respect to the rolling device 10675 of the fifteenth embodiment described above. 10677, and the number of role item route V winning openings 10677, which are specific areas, is increased. The same reference numerals are assigned to the same configurations, and detailed descriptions thereof are omitted.

As shown in FIGS. 345(a) and 345(b), in Modification 2, the specific area where the ball discharged from the rolling device 10675 can enter is the first accessory route V winning opening 10677a. , and a second accessory route V winning opening 10677b are provided, and a big winning game is executed by entering a ball into one of the winning openings during the effective period of the small winning game. there is That is, compared to the fifteenth embodiment described above, the number of specific areas into which the ball that has flowed into the rolling device 10675 can enter is increased. Then, when the ball enters the first role item route V winning opening 10677a and when the ball enters the second role item route V winning opening 10677b, the game content of the jackpot game to be executed is the same, but the jackpot. It is configured so that the game state to be set after the end of the game is made different.

Specifically, when the ball enters the first role route V winning port 10677a, the time saving A state is set after the jackpot game ends, and the ball enters the second role route V winning port 10677b. is configured such that the time saving B state is set after the end of the jackpot game. In other words, when a small win is won in the lottery of special symbols, only the contents of the big win game are selected as the big win type, and the game state set after the big win game ends is the specific area (V It is configured to be set according to the type of prize winning opening.

By configuring in this way, when a small win is won in the special symbol lottery, the display content displayed on the first symbol display device 37 determines the special symbol lottery result (small win) and the big win type (big win). Even if the game content) is identified, the game state to be set after the end of the jackpot game is not identified in advance. It is possible to reliably prevent a player from playing a game aiming at a game.

In addition, in this modification 2, an example in which the type of the time saving state is changed according to the specific area (V winning opening) to enter has been described. ), a specific area in which the normal state is set after the jackpot game ends may be provided. In addition, in the second modification, a plurality of specific regions are provided in the rolling device 10675 in order to make it possible to visually recognize which specific region the ball enters. A plurality of specific areas may be provided in a part that is difficult for a person to visually recognize. For example, one role item route V winning opening 10677 ( A pseudo-V winning hole is provided, a distribution means is provided for distributing a ball that enters the virtual V-winning hole into the first flow path and the second flow path, and the ball is distributed to the first flow path by the distribution means. However, it may be configured such that the ball that enters the specific region where the time saving A state is set and the ball distributed to the second flow path enters the specific region where the time saving B state is set. As a result, it is determined that a big win game is executed by entering the ball into the pseudo V winning hole, and the game state of ending the big win game is set according to the specific area where the ball finally entered. will be In this case, a detection means is provided to detect that a ball has entered the pseudo-V winning hole, and when the detection means detects the ball, the effect indicating that the conditions for executing the jackpot game have been established is provided. The pachinko machine 10 of the fifteenth embodiment may preferably be configured to execute an effect indicating that a ball has entered the role item route V winning opening 10677 .

With this configuration, the player can be made to think that the jackpot game has been executed based on the fact that the ball has entered the pseudo V winning hole, so at what timing the game after the jackpot game ends. It can obscure whether the state has been determined. Therefore, it is possible to provide the enjoyment of predicting which game state will be set after the end of the jackpot game. In addition, when using a configuration in which the player cannot easily identify the game state set after the end of the big win game until the end of the big win game, after the game state set after the end of the big win game is set, the big win It is preferable to configure so as to execute a suggestion effect suggesting a set game state until the game is over (for example, during a jackpot game). As a result, the player who tries to quickly grasp the game state set after the end of the jackpot game eagerly sees the suggestion performance executed, so that the performance effect can be enhanced.

In addition, in the present modification 2, as shown in FIG. 345, each specific area is provided so that the ratio of different game states to be set is even. The number of specific areas and the arrangement positions may be set so that the ratio of the game state is higher (or lower) than the ratio of other game states. As a result, it is possible to easily set a game state that is easily set after the end of the jackpot game and a game state that is difficult to be set.

Further, as in the above-described fourteenth control example, a configuration may be used in which the winning opening (out opening) into which the ball is likely to enter is varied according to the elapsed time after the performance of the character challenge. . By configuring in this way, a period in which a specific game state is likely to be set as a game state to be set after the jackpot game ends and a period in which it is difficult to be set, according to the elapsed time after the role challenge is executed. , can be provided. Therefore, it is possible to make the player more interested in the behavior of the ball during the accessory challenge.

<Regarding modification 3 of the fifteenth embodiment>
Next, modification 3 of the fifteenth embodiment described above will be described with reference to FIGS. 346 and 347. FIG. In the fifteenth embodiment described above, in the fifteenth embodiment described above, the game state includes a normal state (low probability state of special symbols, low probability state of normal symbols) and a time saving state (low probability state of special symbols, normal Further, as time saving states, a time saving A state in which the second special pattern lottery is likely to be executed and a time saving B state in which the second special pattern lottery is likely to be executed. , was configured to be configurable. A plurality of time-saving states are set in a stepwise manner by setting the time-saving state B when a big win is won in the lottery of the second special pattern when the time-saving state A is set. It was configured to be Furthermore, by setting the game state in which the time saving B state is more advantageous to the player than the time saving state A, the player can be motivated to play the game so as to set a more advantageous game state. It was configured to do so.

In addition, in the fifteenth embodiment described above, when the time-saving A state is set, a small hit is won in the second special symbol lottery, and a big hit game is executed based on the small hit, The amusement of the game is improved by structuring that the normal state is set after the end of the jackpot game, and by configuring so as to greatly change the subsequent game content depending on the timing of execution of the jackpot game executed during the time-saving A state. I was letting

However, in the fifteenth embodiment described above, in the gaming state in which the time saving A state is set, if a small hit is won in the lottery of the second special symbol, regardless of the small hit type, the small hit winning device 10650 Since the winning ball is configured to enter the direct V winning opening 10657, even if the game state set after the end of the big winning game is different according to the set small winning type, To arbitrarily select a game state to be set after the jackpot game ends.

On the other hand, in this modification 3, only when winning a small hit in which a specific small hit type is set by the game method during the small hit game, the ball is placed in a specific area (V winning opening) during the small hit game It is different from the fifteenth embodiment described above in that it is configured so that the ball can be entered into the ball. With this configuration, the player can arbitrarily select the game state after the end of the jackpot game, so that the player's desired game can be played to improve the interest in the game.

Here, with reference to FIG. 346, the configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the third modification will be described. 346 is a front view schematically showing the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 according to Modification 3. FIG. The game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 of Modification 3 is different from the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 of the fifteenth embodiment described above in that a second small win winning device 11650 is provided in the left area of the game board 13. are different, and otherwise identical. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same structure, and the detailed description is abbreviate|omitted.

The second small winning prize winning device 11650 has an open state in which a ball can enter when a small winning game is executed, and a closed state in which a ball is less likely to enter than in the open state. It is a prize-winning device that shifts in a pattern, and is configured to be in an open state when the second opening/closing door 11650b is buried in the game board 13 side, and to be in a closed state by protruding from the game board 13 side.

The second small winning prize device 11650 is closed when the small winning game is not executed, and is configured so that the ball cannot win a prize. The second opening/closing door 11650b is a member that is variably controlled at the same timing by the same driving source as the opening/closing door 10650b provided in the small winning prize device 10650, and operates according to the driving force from the driving source. It is a connection member that is connected to the open/close door 10650b by an operating member (not shown) that operates. That is, when the small winning game is executed, the opening and closing door 10650b and the second opening and closing door 11650b are opened and closed at the same timing based on the operation scenario of the small winning game. The winning device 11650 for two small wins is a winning device that can be changed between an open state and a closed state at the same timing.

Inside the second small winning prize winning device 11650, there are a second direct V winning opening 11657 that triggers the execution of a big winning game by entering a ball, and a ball to the outside of the second small winning prize winning device 11650. A second out port 11654 for discharging is provided, and an open state in which the winning ball of the second small winning prize device 11650 can enter the second direct V winning port 11657, and a second direct V A second movable piece 11653 is variably operated between a closed state in which a ball can be entered into the second out hole 11654 without entering the winning hole 11657, and the second movable piece 11653 is a small win. It is configured to operate according to a predetermined operation pattern when a game is started.

Detailed operation patterns will be described later with reference to FIG. In the small winning game executed when the winning ball does not enter the second direct V winning opening 11657 and the small winning type is the small winning B, the winning device 11650 for the second small winning wins. The operation patterns of the opening/closing door 10650b and the second opening/closing door 11650b and the operation pattern of the second movable piece 11653 are defined so that the ball can enter the second direct V winning hole 11657. Also, as in the fifteenth embodiment described above, the winning ball in the small winning prize device 10650 is configured to enter the direct V winning opening 10657 regardless of the small winning type.

By configuring in this way, after the big win game, the player who wants to set the time saving B state, when the small win is won in the state where the time saving A state is set (the lottery of the second special symbol ), the game method is switched from the right-handed game to the left-handed game, and the second small-hit prize winning device 11650 only executes the small-hit game for winning the ball. Only the small winning game ball corresponding to the small winning B in which the time saving B state is set after the end of the game can be made to enter the second direct V winning opening 11657 which is the specific area.

As a result, since the big win game can be executed only when the small winning game in which the game state desired by the player is set is executed, the player can arbitrarily select the game state desired by the player. can be set. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest in the game by actively participating in the game by the player.

In addition, the opening and closing door 10650b of the small winning prize device 10650 and the second opening and closing door 10650b of the second small prize winning device 11650 are configured to be varied at the same timing using the same drive source. Even if a new prize-winning device is provided, there is no need to provide a new drive source for the pachinko machine 10, and cost reduction can be achieved. In addition, since the period in which the small winning prize device 10650 and the second small prize winning device 11650 are in the open state is the same, even if a game aiming at any winning device is performed during the small winning game Since the number of balls that can be awarded during the small winning game can be made the same, there is no advantage or disadvantage for the player in terms of the number of payout balls.

Although detailed description is omitted, in the present modified example 3, when one small winning game is executed, both the small winning winning device 10650 and the second small winning winning device 11650 are in the open state. Since it is configured to be, it is possible to win a ball in any winning device, so using the cumulative value of accumulating the number of winning balls in each winning device, the end condition of the small winning game is configured to determine whether or not Therefore, for example, as the end condition of the small winning game, when the ending condition is established when the number of winning prizes during the small winning game reaches 10 pieces, immediately after the small winning game is started, by the right-handed game When the ball is won in the small winning prize device 10650, and the number of winning balls reaches a predetermined number (for example, 8), the game method is switched to the left-handed game, and the second small prize winning device 11650 Even if a game for winning a ball is played, it is possible to suppress a situation in which the ball wins a prize excessively in a prize winning device during one small winning game.

Although detailed illustration is omitted, a plurality of detection sensors as detection means for detecting the passage of the ball are provided inside the second small winning prize device 11650 as well as the small prize winning device 10650. For example, a second ball entry sensor for detecting that the ball has entered the second small prize winning device 11650, and a ball sensor for detecting that the ball has passed through the closed second movable piece 11653. A second passage sensor and a second discharge sensor are provided to detect that the ball has flowed down toward the outlet 11654 by means of the second movable piece 11653 in the closed state. In this way, the behavior of the ball in the second small winning prize device 11650 is configured to be discriminable in the same manner as the small winning prize device 10650 of the fifteenth embodiment described above, so that the second small winning prize device Abnormal game states occurring within 11650 can be reliably determined.

Next, referring to FIG. 347, rotating body 10652, movable piece 10653, third 2 The operation contents of the movable piece 11653 and the opening/closing doors 10650b and 11650b will be described. FIG. 347 is a timing chart schematically showing the operation contents of various devices during a special 2nd small winning game. As shown in FIG. 347, when the small per A (special 2 small per A) is set as a special 2 small per game, and when the small per B (special 2 small per B) is set, the opening and closing door 10651a and 10651b are opened at different timings, and in the small winning game in which special 2 small winning A is set, opening period (5.5 seconds), round period (1 second), ending period (4.5 seconds). 5 seconds) is defined as a small winning scenario, and in a small winning game in which special 2 small winning B is set, the opening period (6.5 seconds), the round period (1 second), the ending period (3.5 seconds) ) is defined as a small hit scenario.

Then, regardless of the small winning type, the rotating body 10652 operates from the initial state (sideways state) after 5.5 seconds from the start of the small winning game, and the operating state (upward state) for 3.5 seconds. Maintain (first actuation), then act to maintain the initial state (sideways state) for 2.5 seconds, and control the operation to maintain the actuation state (upward state) for 5 seconds (second actuation) again be done. In addition, the movable piece 10653 operates from the closed state to the open state after 6 seconds have passed since the start of the small winning game, maintains the open state for 4.5 seconds, and then operates to be in the closed state. The second movable piece 11653 is controlled to operate from the closed state to the open state for 1 second after 6.7 seconds from the start of the small winning game, and then to be in the closed state.

In this modification 3 in which the operation patterns of various devices during the small winning game are set in this way, for example, when a right-handed game aiming at the small winning prize device 10650 during the special 2 small winning game is performed, special Even when the small winning game of 2 small winning A is executed and the small winning game of special 2 small winning B is executed, the winning ball in the small winning prize winning device 10650 is in an upward state (during the first operation) is stored in the storage portion 10652a of the rotating body 10652, is discharged to the second flow path 10651b (see FIG. 346) at the timing when the first operation is completed, passes through the open movable piece 10653, and enters the direct V winning opening 11657 enter the ball. Note that the specific passage of time is the same as in the thirteenth embodiment described above, so detailed description thereof will be omitted.

That is, in the third modification, when a right-handed game aiming at the small winning device 10650 is performed during the special 2 small winning game, regardless of the set small winning type, the small winning device 10650 Since the winning ball enters the direct V winning opening 10657, it is constructed so that the big winning game can be surely executed when the small winning is won. Therefore, regardless of the game state set after the end of the big winning game, a player who wants to execute the big winning game as soon as possible will play the right-handed game during the special 2nd small winning game.

On the other hand, when a left-handed game aiming at the second small winning prize device 11650 is performed during the special 2 small winning game, the small winning game of the special 2 small winning A, that is, by entering the ball into the specific area, When the small winning game that triggers the execution of the big winning game in which the time saving A state is set after the big winning game is completed, the ball that entered the winning device 11650 for the second small winning is the second in the closed state. It is guided to the second out port 11654 by the second movable piece 11653 . In other words, the small winning game of the special 2 small winning A can win the ball in the second small winning winning device 11650 by the left-handed game aiming at the second small winning winning device 11650, but the small winning game It is configured so that the ball cannot enter the second direct V winning opening 11657, which is a specific area.

On the other hand, the small winning game of special 2 small winning B, that is, the small winning game that triggers the execution of the big winning game in which the time saving B state is set after the big winning game is completed by entering the ball into the specific area. When executed, the ball entering the second small winning prize device 11650 passes through the second movable piece 11653 in the open state and enters the second direct V prize opening 11657. ing. That is, the small winning game of the special 2 small winning B can win the ball in the second small winning winning device 11650 by the left-handed game aiming at the second small winning winning device 11650, and furthermore, the small winning It is configured so that the ball can enter the second direct V winning opening 11657, which is a specific area, during the game.

By constructing in this way, the player who desires to set the time saving B state can reliably perform the time saving B by playing the small winning game in the left-handed game when the small win is won during the time saving A state. state can be set. In addition, in this modification 3, in any of the special 2 small hit A in which the jackpot game in which the time saving A state is set can be executed, and the special 2 small hit B in which the jackpot game in which the time saving B state is set can be executed, Only the small winning device 10650 that can enter the ball into a specific area during the small winning game and the special 2 small winning B that can execute the big winning game in which the time saving B state is set are used during the small winning game. A second small winning prize winning device 11650 capable of entering a ball into a specific area is provided so that the player can select a game state to be set after finishing the big winning game. Other configurations may be used as long as the game state can be selected. A third small prize winning device may be provided that allows a ball to enter a specific area.

Furthermore, in the present modification 3, by changing the game method from right-handed to left-handed, the player can select the game state to be set after the jackpot game ends. is not limited to this, for example, two game areas are formed in the right area of the game board 13, a strong right hitting area and a weak right hitting area, and a ball flowing down one area flows down the other area It is also possible to configure such that there is no such a case, and that a different winning device is provided in each area. With this configuration, it is possible to dispose the winning devices close to each other, so that the opening/closing doors of the winning devices driven by the same drive source can be easily connected.

In addition, in this modification 3, a configuration is used in which an arbitrary game state is set after the end of the big win game by changing the winning device for winning the ball during the small win game. Only the winning device may be configured so that the player can arbitrarily select the game state to be set after the jackpot game ends. In this case, for example, one small winning game is divided into a first half period and a second half period, and the open/close door is controlled to open and close so that the ball can win the winning device in each period. Then, by setting the opening timing of the opening and closing door corresponding to each small winning type in correspondence with the operation timing of the movable piece provided in the winning device, a big winning game in which the time saving A state is set is executed. When the winning special 2 small win A is executed, the big win game is executed in which the winning ball in the first half period of the small win game is configured to enter the specific area and the time saving B state is set. When the possible special 2nd small win B is executed, it is preferable to configure so that the winning ball in the latter half of the small win game can enter the specific area.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to set the game state desired by the player after the jackpot game is completed only by changing the timing of winning the ball for one prize winning device. Therefore, the desired game state can be selected only by changing the ball shooting timing without requiring the player to select the game method, thereby eliminating the inconvenience of changing the game method to the player. be able to.

Next, with reference to FIG. 348, the effect contents of the present modified example 3 will be described. FIG. 348 schematically shows an example of the display contents displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 when a small hit is won during the time saving A state and a small hit game is executed in the present modified example 3. It is a schematic diagram shown.

As shown in FIG. 348, when a small win is won during the time saving A state, a selection screen for allowing the player to select the game method of the small win game is displayed. Specifically, the main display area Dm is partitioned into left and right in the central portion, an arrow image YG2 indicating a right-handed game is displayed on the right side of the main display area Dm, and a left-handed game is displayed on the left side of the main display area Dm. An arrow image YG1 is displayed.

Then, in the display area HR9 as the game content when the left-handed game is performed, there is a comment indicating that the degree of expectation for the big win is lower than that of the right-handed game and the degree of expectation for continuation of the time-saving state when the big-hit game is executed is high. Is displayed.

By displaying the selection screen in this way, the player can grasp in advance what kind of game result will be provided according to the game method to be executed during the small winning game. Easy game can be provided.

In addition, on the right side of the main display area Dm, a time gauge 2811 corresponding to the opening period in which the ball can win V by right-handed game, that is, the period obtained by adding the opening period of the small win A and the opening period of the small win B. is displayed in the display area HR40, and the remaining period display mode 2811a is displayed so as to decrease as time passes.

On the other hand, on the left side of the main display area Dm, a time gauge 2811Z corresponding to the opening period in which the ball can win V by the left-handed game, that is, the opening period of the small hit B is displayed in the display area HR40Z. is displayed so that the remaining period display mode 2811za decreases.

In this way, by informing the player of the open period in which the V prize can be won, it is possible to execute a game that is easier for the player to understand.

<Sixteenth Embodiment>
Next, the sixteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 349 to 354. FIG. In the thirteenth to fifteenth embodiments described above, when a small win is won in a normal state and a small win game is executed, a ball is won in the small win winning device 10650 provided in the right area of the game board 13. By performing a right-handed game guide display (see FIG. 282(b)) for making a game to play, a game that is easy for the player to understand is provided.

However, the above-described right-handed game guide display allows the player to grasp that the small winning game is executed, but at what timing the small winning prize winning device 10650 becomes an open state where it is easy to enter the ball. There is a problem that the player cannot grasp whether the In addition, since the player cannot grasp the remaining period of the period in which the ball can be won by the small winning prize device 10650, in order to ensure that the ball wins the small prize winning device 10650, the player There is a problem that the right-handed game is played unnecessarily.

On the other hand, in the 16th embodiment, when a small winning game is executed, the player can be notified of the period in which the small winning prize device 10650 is in the open state. By configuring in this way, the balls can be efficiently won by the small winning prize winning device 10650 .

Further, as in the thirteenth embodiment described above, as one small winning game, the small winning prize device 10650 is once opened (continuously opened), and then closed for a predetermined period. After that, when executing a small winning game in which the opening state (continuously opened state) is set, that is, a small winning game in which an opening first half period and an opening second half period are set during one small winning game. , during the small winning game, the small winning prize device 10650 will be in a closed state in which it is difficult for the ball to win. had the problem of causing the ball to fire more unnecessarily.

On the other hand, in the 16th embodiment, based on the type of small winning game to be executed, the remaining period of the open state in the first half period and the remaining period of the open state in the second half period are divided and given to the player. configured to notify. By configuring in this way, when the small winning game is executed, first, the open state period (remaining period) set in the first half period is notified, and during the first half period, the ball is placed in the small winning prize winning device 10650 If the player does not win a prize, the open state period (remaining period) set in the second half period is notified based on the start of the second half period. As a result, even if an operation pattern in which a closed state for a predetermined period is set during a small winning game is set as the operation pattern of the small winning winning device 10650, the player can easily operate the small winning winning device 10650. can be reliably notified of the period (remaining period) in which the is in the open state.

Furthermore, in the above-described thirteenth to fifteenth embodiments, the balls that have won the small winning prize device 10650 are configured to be stored in the storage portion 10652a of the rotating body 10652, and after the small winning game is started After a predetermined period of time has passed (for example, after 3.5 seconds), an operation of discharging the balls stored in the storage section 10652a to the downstream side is executed. In this way, in the pachinko machine 10 using the configuration in which the winning ball of the small winning prize device 10650 is stored for a predetermined period, it is sufficient if the ball can be stored in the storage part 10652a of the rotating body 10652, and at what timing it is stored. Even if the ball is stored in the portion 10652a, there is no effect on the player.

On the other hand, in the 16th embodiment, the effect mode is changed based on the remaining period of the open state of the small winning prize device 10650 at the timing when it is determined that the ball is stored in the storage section 10652a. It is configured so that it is easy to set an effect mode in which it is advantageous for the player to store the balls in the storage section 10652a as soon as possible. As a result, the player can be motivated to play the game so as to quickly store the balls in the storage section 10652a.

In addition, in the 16th embodiment, after the ball is stored in the storage section 10652a, the remaining period until the stored ball is discharged to the downstream side after a predetermined period of time (after one second) is determined by the player. It is configured to execute a second remaining period notification for notification to. As a result, the process of discharging the ball stored in the storage section 10652a to the downstream side can be notified to the player in an easy-to-understand manner. Furthermore, the notification mode of the second remaining period notification described above is configured to be variably set according to the timing at which the ball is stored in storage unit 10652a. , a notification mode indicating information that is advantageous to the player is set. As a result, the player can be motivated to play the game so as to quickly store the balls in the storage section 10652a.

In addition, in the sixteenth embodiment, according to the type of small hit, the operation pattern of the small hit winning device 10650 (operation scenario of the opening and closing door 10650b) is configured to be able to execute a small hit game. As in the thirteenth embodiment, after the open state period of the first half period ends, after the closed state period of a predetermined period (for example, 1.9 seconds), the open state period of the second half period is set small hit type and a small winning type in which a closed state period shorter than a predetermined period (for example, 1.9 seconds) is set during a small winning game.

In the case where the small winning game is executed in a plurality of operation patterns in this way, for the small winning game in which a closed state period of a predetermined period (for example, 1.9 seconds) or more is set during the small winning game, Divided into an open state period (first open period) before the closed state period is set and an open state period (second open period) after the closed state period is set, Guidance display for notifying the opening period is executed, and before and after the closed state period for the small winning game in which the closed state period of less than a predetermined period (for example, 1.9 seconds) is set during the small winning game is configured to execute a guidance display for notifying the open state period (full open period) set to .

With this configuration, when a small winning game in which the open state is set a plurality of times at short intervals is executed, the guide display indicates the end of the period each time the open state ends, and the game is played. It is possible to suppress the execution of display that is difficult for the user to understand. In addition, when executing the guidance display for informing the above-mentioned full open period, a time gauge indicating the entire period of the small winning game period is displayed, and according to the update status of the time gauge, the small winning prize It is configured so that the player can visually recognize the period during which the device 10650 is in the open state. As a result, even if a small winning game in which the open state is set a plurality of times at short intervals is executed, the player can determine how long the opening period is set during the current small winning game period. can be notified in an easy-to-understand manner.

<Regarding production content in the 16th embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 349 to 351, the characteristic presentation contents executed by the pachinko machine 10 of the sixteenth embodiment will be described. Figure 349 (a) is a schematic diagram showing an example of the display content displayed when the small winning game is being executed in the normal state, Figure 349 (b) is the first in the small winning game FIG. 350(a) is a schematic diagram showing an example of display contents displayed when the open period ends, and FIG. 350(a) shows display contents displayed when the second open period in the small winning game is started. It is a schematic diagram showing an example. Also, FIG. 350(b) is a schematic diagram showing an example of display contents displayed when the second small winning game in which the open state is set at short intervals is being executed.

As shown in FIG. 349(a), when a small winning game is executed, an arrow icon 2810 for guiding a right-handed game is displayed in the main display area Dm of the display surface of the third symbol display device 81, and In the display area HR40, a time gauge 2811 indicating a first open period (a period in which a state in which the balls set in the first half of the small winning game are likely to win a prize is set) and a remaining period indicating the remaining period of the first open period are displayed. A period display mode 2811a is displayed.

The remaining period display mode 2811a is configured so that the display on the time gauge 2811 decreases from the right end to the left end side. (Filled out in FIG. 349(a)), and when the first open period ends, the remaining period display mode 2811a moved to the left end of the time gauge 2811 is configured to be hidden. That is, the period indicated by the remaining period display mode 2811a on the time gauge 2811 becomes the display mode for indicating the remaining period of the first open period, and is not indicated by the remaining period display mode 2811a on the time gauge 2811. The period is a display mode for indicating the elapsed period of the first open period.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to inform the player in an easy-to-understand manner of the period during which the small winning prize device 10650 is in the open state in which the ball can be won during the small winning game.

Next, when the ball is not won in the small prize winning device 10650 during the first open period, as shown in FIG. is displayed, and the arrow icon 2810 is erased. Then, a caution display is displayed in the display area HR41 to notify the player that the game method during the small win game is not normal.

It should be noted that the period during which the display of FIG. 349(b) is executed is the closed state period during the small winning game, and the second open period is set later, so the display area HR22 displays the small Guidance display of hitting to the right indicating that the winning game is in progress is continuously executed, and the comment "Beat to the right and aim at the attacker" for guiding the small winning game is continuously displayed in the secondary display area Ds. . Also, the display mode of the guidance display displayed in the display area HR22 is highlighted and executed.

Next, when the second open period is set during the small winning game, as shown in FIG. 350 (a), in the small winning game, the open state that allows the ball to win the small winning prize device 10650 is set again (the second open period is set). Since this second open period is the last open state set during the small winning game, the comment "last chance" is displayed in the main display area Dm, and the arrow icon 2810 is emphasized more than the first open period. 350(a), it is displayed in a solid display mode. A time gauge 2811 indicating the second open period and its remaining period display mode 2811a are displayed in the display area HR40.

In this way, as the opening operation of the small winning prize device 10650 executed during the small winning game, a small amount is set so that the opening state is set a plurality of times at intervals of a predetermined period (for example, 1.9 seconds). When a small winning game is executed in which the opening operation of the prize winning device 10650 for winning is set, the opening period and the remaining period of the opening period are displayed corresponding to each opening state (opening period). Thus, the player can be easily notified of the timing at which the ball shot in the right-handed game wins the small winning prize device 10650.例文帳に追加

Further, by informing the player that the currently set open period is the last open period in the current small winning game, the ball is made to win the small winning prize device 10650 during the small winning game. It is possible to make the player willingly play the game. In addition, the notification mode (see FIG. 350(a)) for reporting the second (last) open period is emphasized rather than the reporting mode for reporting the first open period (see FIG. 349(a)). , it is possible to make the player play a right-handed game with a sense of danger.

Next, as the opening operation of the small winning prize device 10650 executed during the small winning game, a small winning is performed so that the interval at which the opening state is set for a plurality of times is less than a predetermined period (for example, 1.9 seconds). When the small winning game (second small winning game) in which the opening action of the winning device 10650 is set is executed, the notification mode shown in FIG. 350(b) is displayed. As shown in Figure 350 (b), when the second small winning game is executed, all the open periods set during the second small winning game as the open period display mode for notifying the open period is displayed in the display area HR40.

Specifically, a time gauge 2811 corresponding to the length of the entire period of the small winning game is displayed, and the remaining period display mode 2811a is displayed decreasingly from the right end to the left end side according to the progress of the small winning game. Below the time gauge 2811, a first open period display 2812a and a second open period display 2812b are displayed together with the characters "chance" as a display mode indicating the open period in which the open state is set.

In this way, when the small winning game (second small winning game) in which the first open period and the second open period are set at short intervals is executed, the above-described FIG. 349 (a) to FIG. When the period display shown in a), that is, the period display corresponding to each open period is executed, the period end display (see FIG. 349(b)) and the period start display (see FIG. 350(a)) are displayed. 350(b) is used in the present embodiment. As described above, the period display indicating the entire period of the small winning game is executed, and the period display is used to inform the player of the period in which the opening period is set. As a result, it is possible to inform the player of the period in which the open period is set in an easy-to-understand manner.

Next, with reference to FIG. 351, the contents of the display performed when the winning ball of the small winning prize device 10650 is stored in the storage portion 10652a of the rotating body 10652 will be described. FIG. 351(a) is a schematic diagram showing an example of display contents indicating that a ball is stored in the storage portion 10652a during a small winning game, and FIG. FIG. 10 is a schematic diagram showing an example of a second remaining period display for indicating the remaining period until the balls stored in the storage section 10652a are discharged to the second channel 10651b after being stored.

As shown in FIG. 351(a), during the open period of the small winning game, the ball is made to win the small winning prize device 10650, and when the winning ball is stored in the storage portion 10652a of the rotating body 10652, the third In the main display area Dm of the pattern display device 81, characters "Standby OK" indicating that the ball is stored are displayed, and in the sub-display area Ds, a comment "Complete storage" is displayed. Then, in the display area HR40, the update of the remaining period display mode 2811a of the time gauge 2811 is stopped, and an advance notice display mode using an area corresponding to the size (length) of the area of the remaining period display mode 2811a is displayed below the display area HR40. As 2815, the characters "Chance" are displayed.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the display mode (display area and display content) of the advance notice display mode 2815 is determined according to the remaining period of the open period at the time when it is determined that the ball is stored in the storage portion 10652a of the rotating body 10652. are configured to be different. By configuring in this way, it is possible to change the display mode of the notice display mode 2815 according to the timing of winning the ball in the small winning prize winning device 10650 during the small winning game. It is possible to provide the player with the pleasure of varying the winning timing of the ball to the winning device 10650 .

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, it is better to store the balls in the storage portion 10652a of the rotating body 10652 as soon as possible after the small winning game is started, so that the remaining period of the open period at the time when the balls are stored in the storage portion 10652a As the display area of the notice display mode 2815 becomes larger, the larger the display area of the notice display mode 2815 becomes, the easier it is to display information advantageous to the player as the display contents of the notice display mode. Configure. As a result, the player can be motivated to play the game so that the ball wins the small prize winning device 10650 as soon as possible during the small prize game.

When a predetermined period of time (1 second) has elapsed since the display of FIG. The display is switched to the second remaining period display indicating the remaining period until discharge to the path 10651b. Specifically, in the display area HR41 of the main display area Dm of the third pattern display device 81, the remaining period until the ball stored in the storage portion 10652a of the rotating body 10652 is discharged to the second flow path 10651b is displayed. A time gauge 2821 is displayed, and the remaining period display mode 2821a is updated and displayed according to the passage of time. Then, in the sub-display area Ds, a comment of "Waiting for discharge" is displayed as the current status of the small winning game, waiting for the ball stored in the storage unit 10652a to be discharged.

Then, a second notice display mode 2825 corresponding to the size of the display area of the time gauge 2821 is displayed. The second notice display mode 2825 is set with notice content suggesting the content of the big win game to be executed in the current small win game, and corresponds to the size (length) of the display area of the time gauge 2821. According to the example shown in FIG. 351(b), the characters "great chance" are displayed as the second notice display mode 2825. FIG. As described above, the size (length) of the display area of the time gauge 2821 is such that the ball is stored in the storage portion 10652a of the rotating body 10652 as soon as possible during the small winning game, and the ball is stored in the storage portion 10652a. It is configured so that the period (waiting period) until it is discharged becomes longer, and the size (length) of the display area of the time gauge 2821 also becomes longer. Therefore, it is possible to motivate the player to play the game so that the ball wins the small winning prize device 10650 as soon as possible during the small winning game.

<Regarding control processing of the sound lamp control device in the sixteenth embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 352 to 354, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio ramp control device 113 in the sixteenth embodiment will be described. First, with reference to FIG. 352, the rendering update process 17 (S20091) in the sixteenth embodiment will be described. FIG. 352 is a flow chart showing the contents of effect update processing 17 (S20091). Effect update process 17 (S20091) is a process executed instead of effect update process 15 (see S4191 in FIG. 302) in the thirteenth embodiment described above. However, the difference is that processing for setting an update command for the guidance period display is added. Since other processing is the same, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In effect update process 17 (S20091), first, the same processes as S45001 to S45004 of effect update process 15 (see S4191 in FIG. 302) in the thirteenth embodiment described above are executed. is set (S45101). Then, the processing of effect update processing 15 (see S4191 in FIG. 302) S45005 in the thirteenth embodiment described above is executed, and this processing ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 353, the win-related process 17 (S43171) in the sixteenth embodiment will be described. FIG. 353 is a flow chart showing the contents of win-related processing 17 (S43171). Win-related processing 17 (S43171) is a process executed in place of the hit-related processing 15 (see S43071 in FIG. 303) in the thirteenth embodiment described above. , in that a process for setting a guidance period display command and a situation command process (S44152) are added. Since other processing is the same, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In the winning related process 17 (S43171), first, the same processes as S4404 to S4408 in the thirteenth embodiment described above are executed, and then it is determined whether or not the opening command for the small winning is received (S44001). When it is determined that the small winning opening command is received (S44001: Yes), the value of the elapsed period counter 223ma is set to 1, and the display opening command for indicating the small winning game start is set (S44052). Next, a guidance period display command corresponding to the winning small hit type is set (S44151), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S44001, when it is determined that the opening command for small winning has not been received (S44001: No), it is determined whether or not the game situation command for small winning has been received (S44053). When it is determined that the game status command for a small hit has been received (S44053: Yes), status command processing is executed (S44152), and this processing ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 354, the situation command process (S44152), which is one process of the win-related process 17 (see FIG. 353 S43171) in the sixteenth embodiment, will be described. FIG. 354 is a flow chart showing the contents of the status command process (S44152).

In the status command process (44152), first, it is determined whether or not a command indicating storage has been received (S20101). If it is determined that a command indicating storage has been received (S20101: Yes), a display command indicating completion of storage is set (S20102), and the remaining period of the guide period display is calculated (S20103). Next, the notice display mode based on the remaining period and the small hit type calculated in the process of S20103 is set (S20104). Then, a display command indicating the advance notice display mode set in the process of S20104 is set (S20105), and the value of the elapsed period counter 223ma is read (S20106).

Next, based on the value of the elapsed period counter 223ma read in the process of S20106, the remaining period until the ball ejection period is calculated (S20107). Then, a second guidance period display mode corresponding to the calculated remaining period is set (S20108), a display command is set to show the second guidance period display mode set in the process of S20108 one second later (S20109), and so on. A display command is set according to the received command (S20110), and this processing ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S20101 that the command indicating storage has not been received (S20101: No), the processing of S20102 to S20109 is skipped, the processing of S20110 described above is executed, and this processing is continued. finish.

As described above, in the 16th embodiment, the determination result (lottery result) of the determination means (special symbol lottery) is a specific determination result (small hit winning). The small prize winning device 10650) is changed to a closed state in which it is difficult for the ball to win (a state in which the opening and closing door 10650b is closed) and an open state in which it is easy to win (a state in which the opening and closing door 10650b is open). Guidance display for guiding the game method (right-handed game) for entering the ball into the variable ball entry means (right-handed game) when the privilege game (small winning game) variably controlled by the pattern is executed ), the period during which the variable ball entry means is in an open state (open period) can be notified to the player. As a result, during the small winning game, it is possible for the player to grasp the timing of performing the right hitting game, so that the efficient right hitting game can be executed during the small winning game.

It should be noted that the above-described open period during which the variable ball-entering means is in the open state may actually be set to correspond to the period during which the variable ball-entering means is in the open state, or a short period (for example, 0.2 seconds), in the case where the open state of the variable ball entry means is set multiple times, one open period may be set corresponding to the multiple open states that are set continuously. . That is, during the small winning game, the ball shot by the player in the right-handed game distinguishes between a state in which it is difficult to win the small winning prize device 10650 and a state in which it is easy to win, and corresponds to the state in which it is easy to win. The period may be set as an open period.

In addition, it is configured to set an open period considering the time until the ball fired by the right-handed game reaches the small winning prize device 10650 for the period in which the variable ball entry means is actually in the open state. For example, if the period required for the ball fired by the right-handed game to reach the small winning prize device 10650 is 1 second, than the period in which the variable ball entry means is in the open state It is preferable to set the opening period to be one second earlier. As a result, when the right-handed game is executed based on the open period display displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the ball fired by the right-handed game is transferred to the small winning prize device 10650 in the open state. can be made easier to reach.

In this embodiment, an open period is set for all periods in which the variable ball entry means is open, and the player is notified of the set open period and the remaining period of the open period. However, without being limited to this, for example, the open period is set to a short time (for example, 0.3 seconds) that makes it difficult for the ball to win the small winning prize device 10650 as the open period. It may be configured so as not to notify the person. As a result, it is possible to suppress the right-handed game during the open period in which the ball is difficult to win the winning device 10650 for small hits (open state setting for a short time). Therefore, when the right-handed game is executed based on the open period display displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the ball fired by the right-handed game can be easily won by the small winning prize device 10650. can.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the variable ball entry means is in the open state, the open period display is executed. It may also be configured such that the open period display corresponding to the open state to be executed later is executed before the opening period display. As a result, the open period display can be executed before the variable ball entry means is actually opened, so that the player can play the right-handed game with a margin.

Furthermore, in the sixteenth embodiment, when the player is notified of the period during which the variable ball entry means is open (open period), the player is also notified of the remaining period for which the open period is set. Configure. As a result, the player can play the game while determining whether or not the right-handed game can be executed in accordance with the remaining period of the notified open period. Therefore, it is possible to allow the player to play the game according to his/her ability, and to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, in the 16th embodiment, during one small winning game, at least a small winning game in which the variable ball entering means is likely to be in an open state comes two times is configured to be executable. A period (first open period) in which the variable ball entry means that arrives first after the execution of the small winning game is likely to be in an open state, and a period in which the next variable ball entry means is likely to be in an open state (second period), and the open period display is executed in correspondence with each of them.

With this configuration, when a period in which it is easy for the ball to enter the variable ball-entering means and a period in which it is difficult for the ball to enter the variable ball-entering means are repeatedly set during one small winning game, the ball is variablely entered. It is possible to reliably notify only the period during which it is easy for the means to enter a ball, and to efficiently execute a right-handed game for winning a small prize winning device 10650.例文帳に追加In the present embodiment, the operation pattern of the small winning game is used in which the period during which the variable ball entering means is likely to be in the open state arrives twice during one small winning game, but the variable ball entering means is in the open state. It is also possible to set an operation pattern of a small winning game in which the easy period comes three times or more.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the display mode of the open period display is changed according to the length of the closed state period during which the ball is difficult to enter into the variable ball-entering means set during a plurality of open periods. If the period of the closed state is shorter than a predetermined period (for example, 1.9 seconds), the open period set before the closed state and the open period set after the closed state are included. A period is set as an open period, and the open period display is executed. By configuring in this way, it is possible to suppress the execution of an effect that is difficult for the player to understand because the end and start of the open period display are complicated.

In the 16th embodiment, it has a storage means (rotating body 10652) that can store the balls that have won the variable ball entry means (small winning prize device 10650) during the small winning game for a predetermined period (maximum 3 seconds) In the state where the storage means can store (state in which the rotating body 10652 is actuated and directed upward), the winning ball can be stored in the small winning prize device 10650 . Then, when the ball is stored in the storage means, the storage period elapses and the remaining period until the storage state is released can be notified to the player.

By configuring in this way, it becomes possible for the player to easily grasp the progress of the game during the small winning game. Therefore, when the storage period of the small winning game is set, the small winning game can be executed without worrying even if the game does not progress.

<Structure Modification of 15th Embodiment>
Next, a structural modification of the fifteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 355 to 357. FIG. As described above with reference to FIGS. 314 to 317, in the fifteenth embodiment, in the time saving state (low probability state of special symbols, high probability state of normal symbols), the state where the first special symbol lottery is likely to be executed ( In order to set the time saving B state) and the state (time saving A state) in which the lottery of the second special symbol is easily executed, the distribution winning device 20070 (first operation opening 20073a, second operation opening 20073b), and , The working role (first working role 20064b1, second working role 20064a1) was provided.

As described above with reference to FIG. 316, in the configuration of the distribution winning device 20070 used in the pachinko machine 10 of the fifteenth embodiment, the switching valve 20072 is in any state (first switching state, second switching state). Even if it is, the ball can enter any of the working openings (first working opening 20073a, second working opening 20073b), so when the normal state is set, the right There is a risk that a game will be played in which a ball is flowed into the distribution winning device 20070 by performing a beating game.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the fifteenth embodiment described above, even if a right-handed game is played during the normal state, that is, while the normal symbol low probability state is set, the balls flow into the distribution winning device 20070. The gate type electric accessory 20640a (see FIG. 316) is configured so that it is difficult to play, and even if the ball flows into the distribution winning device 20070 during the normal state, a left-handed game is normally performed. Benefits that are more advantageous to the player than in the case (for example, execution of the second special symbol lottery that is more advantageous to the player than the first special symbol lottery executed by the left-handed game in the normal state) Since it is configured so as not to have it, even if the switching valve 20072 described above is used, the left-handed game can be played in the normal state.

However, in the fifteenth embodiment described above, even if a right-handed game is performed during the normal state, if the ball is not allowed to flow into the distribution winning device 20070, or if the ball flows into the distribution winning device 20070 It is necessary to use a special structure in order to prevent advantageous benefits from being given to the player in the limited space of the game board 13. There is a problem that the degree of freedom for arranging other structures for increasing the

Further, as shown in FIG. 316, in the configuration of the switching valve 20072 used in the fifteenth embodiment described above, when the switching valve 20072 is slidably displaced, specifically, the second switching state blocking the first flow path 20075a When the switching valve 20072 is slidably displaced from the switching valve 20072 to the first switching state that closes the second flow path 20075b, a space ( Since the ball flow path) becomes narrow while maintaining the parallel state between the partition wall 20070a and the opposing surface of the switching valve 20072, depending on the flow situation of the balls flowing down in the sorting prize winning device 20070 and the slide displacement situation of the switching valve 20072 , there is a possibility that the balls may be clogged in the above-mentioned space.

On the other hand, in this structural modification, instead of the switching valve 20072 described above, a member (shielding member 20173 (see FIG. 356)) and a switching valve 20172 (see FIG. 356) formed with a structure different from the switching valve 20072 are provided, and a winning game (per normal symbol) executed based on the winning of the normal symbol The shielding member and the switching valve 20172 are configured to solve the problems that may occur in the pachinko machine 10 of the fifteenth embodiment described above. Since other configurations are the same as those of the fifteenth embodiment described above, the same reference numerals are given and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Next, with reference to FIG. 356, specific contents of this structural modification will be described. FIG. 356 is an enlarged schematic view of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 according to this structural modification, in the vicinity of the distribution winning device 20070. FIG.

As shown in FIG. 356, this structural modification differs from the fifteenth embodiment described above in that a shielding member 20173 is added and a switching valve 20172 is provided instead of the switching valve 20072. Other than that, they are identical. The shielding member 20173 is normal, that is, in a state where the operation control by the game per normal game is not executed, it will be in a state (restricted state) that protrudes into the inflow path formed toward the distribution winning device 20070, and the ball is configured so that it cannot flow into the distribution winning device 20070. Also, the shielding member 20173 is provided at a position where the ball blocked from flowing down can flow down the region between the nail K3 and the partition wall 20070a.

Then, when the game per normal figure is started, based on a predetermined operation pattern, it becomes a state (retracted state) that is retreated from the inflow path formed toward the distribution winning device 20070, the ball is distributed winning device 20070 It is configured to be variable so that it can flow into. In addition, although detailed description will be given later with reference to FIG. During the period (0.1 seconds from the start of the game per normal figure) in which the upper surface of the accessory 20640a can be rolled, the operation is controlled so as to be in the regulated state.

By constructing in this way, it is possible to reliably prevent the balls from flowing into the distribution winning device 20070 in a normal state, that is, in a state in which the operation control by the normal game is not executed. Furthermore, even if the normal game is executed in the normal state, the ball collides with the gate-type electric accessory 20640a located in the guidance state, and the ball that moves toward the distribution winning device 20070 by rebounding wins distribution. Flowing into the device 20070 can be reliably prevented.

Next, the switching valve 20172 is a variable member configured to be rotatable about the apex of the partition wall separating the first flow path 20075a and the second flow path 20075b as a central axis, and is used to start the game per normal figure. Based on this, a first state in which the ball can flow down the first flow path 20075a (the state indicated by the solid line in FIG. 356) and a second state in which the ball can flow down the second flow path 20075b (indicated by the dashed line in FIG. 356) The state shown in FIG.

Since the switching valve 20172 is configured to rotate about the vertex of the partition separating the first flow path 20075a and the second flow path 20075b as a central axis, the switching valve 20172 switches between the first state and the second state. When operated, the space (falling area) between the partition wall 20072a and the switching valve 20172 narrows without maintaining a parallel state. Therefore, it is possible to make ball clogging less likely to occur in the distribution winning device 20070 with respect to the slide displacement operation of the switching valve 20072 used in the fifteenth embodiment described above.

Next, with reference to FIG. 357, the operation contents of various devices executed in the normal figure per game during the time saving state in this structural modification will be described. FIG. 357 is a timing chart schematically showing the operation contents of various devices executed in a game per normal figure during the time saving state. This structural modification differs from the above-described fifteenth embodiment in that the switching valve 200172 is operated in place of the switching valve 20072 and that the operation control for the shielding plate 20173 is added. are otherwise identical. A detailed description of the same contents will be omitted.

The switching valve 20172 is controlled in the same manner as the switching valve 20072 of the fifteenth embodiment, and the ball flows down to the first flow path 20075a for 1.5 seconds after the normal game is started. Operation control to maintain the possible first state, then switch to the second state in which the ball can flow down to the second flow path 20075b, continue the second state for 3 seconds, and then switch to the first state. is executed.

The shielding plate 20173 maintains the closed state (regulation state) for 0.1 seconds after the normal game is started, and then changes to the open state (retreat state). After maintaining for .5 seconds, the operation control is executed to change to the closed state (restricted state).

Although illustration is omitted, in this structural modification, when the game per normal pattern is executed in the normal state, the open pattern is set for 0.1 seconds after the game per normal pattern is started , the operation of the gate-type electric accessory 20640a is controlled. Therefore, in the normal state, the normal game is executed, and the ball can flow into the distribution winning device 20070 during 0.1 seconds when the gate type electric accessory 20640a is in the induction state. Even if there is, since the shielding plate 20173 maintains the closed state (restricted state), it is possible to reliably prevent the balls from flowing into the distribution winning device 20070 .

In addition, in this structural modification, as the operation pattern of the shielding plate 20173, 0.1 seconds after the game per normal pattern is started, that is, the gate type electric accessory 20640a is in the induction state in the normal pattern per game in the normal state While it is, the operation pattern that maintains the regulated state is used, but the ball that collides with the gate-type electric accessory 20640a that is induced by the normal game that is executed during the normal state is a distribution winning device. 20070 (for example, until 0.3 seconds have passed since the normal game was started), the regulation state may be maintained. As a result, it is possible to more reliably prevent the balls from flowing into the distribution winning device 20070 during the normal state.

In this case, if you set the period from the start of the normal pattern per game until the shielding plate 20173 becomes an open state (retreat state) longer than necessary, in the normal pattern per game executed during the time saving state Since the inflow of the ball into the distribution winning device 20070 is blocked, the ball rolling on the upper surface of the gate-type electric accessory 20640a enters the distribution winning device 20070 during the period when the shielding plate 20173 maintains the restricted state. It is preferable to set the time shorter than the period required for the inflow (corresponding to tz1 in FIG. 315). By configuring in this way, while preventing the ball from flowing into the distribution winning device 20070 during the normal state, it is possible to efficiently flow the ball into the distribution winning device 20070 during the time saving state.

In addition, in the above-described fifteenth embodiment and this structural modification, there is a mechanism for switching the operation openings (first operation opening 20073a, second operation opening 20073b) through which the ball that has flowed into the distribution winning device 20070 can enter. Although an example of operating the switching valves 20072 and 200172 with a constant operation pattern was shown, the switching valves 20072 and 200172 are not limited to this, for example, with different operation patterns according to the set game state (time saving type). may be configured so as to be able to set an operation pattern for operating the . By configuring in this way, the operation pattern of the game per normal figure (opening pattern of the gate type electric accessory 20640a) is not changed according to the time reduction type, and the ball can be entered according to the time reduction type. It is possible to easily switch between (the first operating port 20073a and the second operating port 20073b). In addition, it is possible to prevent the player from grasping the currently set time-saving type by the opening pattern of the gate-type electric accessory 20640a.

Furthermore, in the fifteenth embodiment and this structural modification described above, even if different time-saving types are set, the total period in which the gate-type electric accessory 20640a is in the induced state in the game per normal figure Although each opening pattern is set to be 1.5 seconds, the length of the total period in which the gate type electric accessory 20640a is in the induced state may be changed according to the time saving type, or the induced state and the number of times to be varied may be changed.

<Regarding Effect Modification of 16th Embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIG. 358, an effect modification of the sixteenth embodiment described above will be described. In the sixteenth embodiment described above, as the guide information executed when the small winning game is executed, the right hitting information for guiding the player to the game area where the player should shoot the ball during the small winning game In addition, the variable ball entry means (small prize winning device 10650) that is variably controlled from the closed state in which the ball is difficult to enter to the open state in which the ball is easy to enter by executing the small winning game is in the open state. It is configured to execute an open period notification that suggests the period (remaining period) to the player.

Furthermore, when the small winning game is executed in an open pattern in which the small winning prize device 10650 is opened multiple times during one small winning game, the interval at which the multiple open states are set (interval period), the target of the open period notification is configured to be different. Specifically, when the length of the interval period described above is longer than 1.9 seconds, the period of the first open state (first open period) set before the interval period and the period set after the interval period has elapsed The period of the second open state (second open period) is configured to perform separate open period notification, and when the length of the interval period is 1.9 seconds or less, the above-described first The period of the open state and the period of the second open state are set as one open period, and the open period notification is executed.

In the sixteenth embodiment described above, since the second open period is set as a relief measure when the player does not play the right-handed game during the small winning game, the open period notification corresponding to the first open period If it has been executed (see FIG. 349(a)), then the player is not notified in advance that the second open period will be set.

On the other hand, for example, as described above with reference to FIG. 311 and FIG. The game content in the small winning game is made different between the case where the ball wins the small winning prize device 10650 during the first opening period and the case where the ball wins the small winning prize device 10650 during the second opening period. In the pachinko machine 10, even if the open period notification used in the sixteenth embodiment described above is used, the player can determine how many times the small winning prize device 10650 will be in the open state in the small winning game this time. However, it is not possible to inform the player of the small winning game in advance, and the player cannot sufficiently enjoy the small winning game.

On the other hand, in this modified example of effect, it is possible to notify the player in advance of the existence of the second open period set after the first open period during the execution of the open period notification corresponding to the first open period. It is configured to execute a preliminary notification effect. By configuring in this way, it is possible to quickly recognize the game contents of the small winning game being executed this time.

Further, for example, a small prize with different content is obtained when the ball is awarded to the small prize winning device 10650 during the first opening period and when the ball is awarded to the small prize winning device 10650 during the second opening period. If the pachinko machine 10 is configured to execute a game (for example, direct V challenge and accessory challenge), the second opening in the small winning game of this time is performed before the first opening period ends. Since it is possible to grasp that the period is set, it is possible to make it easier for the player to select the content of the small winning game.

Here, in this production modification, when the ball is won during the first opening period of the small winning prize device 10650 executed during the small winning game, the first small winning game (direct V challenge) is executed. A description will be given of the production contents when a small winning game (specific small winning game) is executed in which a second small winning game (character object challenge) is executed when a ball is won during the second open period. In addition, in this production modification, only the production contents executed in the specific small winning game will be described, and other contents (the configuration of the game board 13, the control contents of each main control device) are described above. Since the contents used in the embodiment are appropriately selected and used, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 358, the characteristic display contents of the effect display executed in this modified example of effect will be described. FIG. 358(a) is a schematic diagram showing an example of display contents displayed during the first open period during the small winning game in which the first open period and the second open period are set. Among the display contents displayed on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81, the same elements as those of the fifteenth embodiment described above are given the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 358(a), in this production modification, an arrow icon 2810 for guiding a right-handed game is displayed during the first opening period of the small winning game. In this production modification, when the ball is won during the first open period, the direct V challenge is executed as the first small winning game, so the arrow icon 2810 indicates the type of small winning game that is executed at the time of winning. It is marked with a "straight" mark. As a result, it is possible to inform the player in an easy-to-understand manner that the direct V challenge will be executed when the ball wins during the first open period.

Furthermore, when the remaining period display mode 2811a indicates a predetermined remaining period, the display area HR45 is displayed so as to gradually expand its range from the lower side of the main display area Dm. This display area HR45 displays information about the second open period to be executed next, and in the state shown in FIG. Only part of the arrow icon is displayed as information indicating that In addition, the characters "waiting" are displayed in the display area HR45 to notify the player that the second release period will be set later.

In addition, in the state shown in FIG. 358(a), when the ball is made to win the small prize winning device 10650, the ball is stored in the storage portion 10652a (see FIG. 270) of the rotating body 10652, and shown in FIG. The display screen shown is displayed. In this case, since it is confirmed that the first small winning game (direct V challenge) will be executed by winning the ball in the first open period, the display content of the display area HR45 displayed for the second open period is erased. be done.

On the other hand, when a predetermined period of time elapses without winning the ball from the state shown in FIG. 358(a), the display contents shown in FIG. 358(b) are displayed. FIG. 358(b) is a schematic diagram showing an example of display content displayed immediately before the end of the first open period. As shown in FIG. 358(b), when the remaining period of the first open period indicated by the remaining period display mode 2811a decreases, the arrow icon 2810 and time gauge 2811 displayed corresponding to the first open period gradually shrink. A display area HR45 in which information corresponding to the second open period to be displayed and set next is displayed is gradually enlarged and displayed.

In the state shown in FIG. 358(b), the entire arrow icon 2815 is displayed, indicating that the second small winning game (accessory challenge) will be executed when the ball is won during the second open period. The mark of "role" for is displayed. Furthermore, a time gauge 2815a corresponding to the second open period is also displayed.

In this way, by displaying the information of the second open period to be set next before the end of the first open period, is it possible for the player to win the ball during the first open period? Since it is possible to make it easy for the player to select whether or not to win the ball during the second open period, it is possible to make the player play an easy-to-understand game.

Also, as the remaining period of the first open period decreases, the amount of information for the second open period to be set next is increased, so that the player can determine at what timing during the first open period the ball should win. Since the player can make the player think, the amusement of the game can be improved. It should be noted that, when such effect display is used, for example, after the first period (for example, 2 seconds) has elapsed after the small winning game is started, the first open period (for example, 3 seconds) is set, and then, A first small winning operation pattern in which a second opening period is set, and a first opening period (for example, 3 seconds) is set after the first period (for example, 2 seconds) has passed since the small winning game is started, and then , and a second small winning operation pattern in which the second opening period is not set can be executed, and even when the small winning game based on the above-described first small winning operation pattern is executed, the second small winning operation pattern 358(a) is preferably executed as the effect display during the first open period, even when the small winning game based on is executed.

That is, the content displayed in the display area HR45 as the display effect during the first open period does not notify that the second open period will be set next, and includes the case where the second open period is not set. It should be configured as follows. In this case, it is preferable to notify the player that the second open period is not set when the remaining period of the first open period is less than a predetermined period (for example, less than 2 seconds).

Further, in this production modification, when the ball is won during the second opening period, the second small winning game (character challenge) is executed, that is, the small winning that can be executed for each opening period Although the case where the game content is fixed is shown, it is not limited to this, and when the ball is won during the second open period, the first small winning game (direct V challenge) is executed. , a small win in which the second small winning game (accessory challenge) is executed and a small winning in which no game is executed may be provided.

In the sixteenth embodiment and the modification of effect described above, the case where two opening periods, the first opening period and the second opening period, are set as the opening period set during the small winning game has been described. The number of open periods set during a winning game may be set to 3 or more. In addition, in the above-described 16th embodiment and the effect modification, the effect display for notifying the player of the opening period in which the small winning prize device 10650 is in the open state during the small winning game was described, but it is limited to this. Instead, each of the contents described above may be used as an effect display for notifying the player of the closing period in which the small winning prize device 10650 is in the closed state.

In addition, in the sixteenth embodiment and the effect modification described above, the period corresponding to the open state of the small winning prize device 10650 is set as the open period, and the open period notification corresponding to the set open period is executed. However, it is sufficient if the player can predict the open period based on the notification mode of the open period notification that is being executed. may be set long or short. In addition, the execution timing of the opening period notification may be the timing when the small winning prize device 10650 is in the open state, or the timing when the small winning game is started. Also, it may be configured to be executed after a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the small winning game was started.

Furthermore, in the above-described 16th embodiment and the modification of the effect, the effect based on the opening period set during the small winning game was explained, but without being limited to this, for example, a special symbol lottery The above-described guidance notification may be executed for the open period set during the jackpot game executed when winning, or the normal pattern winning game executed when winning in the normal pattern lottery. The guidance information described above may be executed for the open period set inside.

<Control modification of the fifteenth embodiment>
Next, a control modification of the fifteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 359 to 363. FIG. This modification of control differs from the above-described fifteenth embodiment in that the contents of the control processing executed at the time of power failure and at the time of start-up are changed, and the rest is the same. The same reference numerals are assigned to the same contents, and detailed description thereof is omitted.

In the fifteenth embodiment described above, when a power failure occurs during the small winning game and the control processing of the main control device 110 cannot be continued normally, the situation of the ball that has won the small winning prize device 10650 (small According to the game situation of the winning game), by changing the control contents of the power-off processing (see FIG. 336) and the return processing 16 during the small hit (see FIG. 331), the game malfunction, that is, during the small hitting game It is configured to prevent a ball that has won a prize in the small prize winning device 10650 from entering a specific area (V prize opening) while the power is off.

On the other hand, this modification of control is different in that more detailed control is executed as the above-described control content. Specifically, the state of the ball that entered the small prize winning device 10650 at the time of power failure (power outage) and the state of the ball at the time of power restoration (at the time of start-up) are compared, and the result of the comparison is It is configured to determine whether it is in a normal state or an error state, and to execute processing based on the determination result. This makes it possible to execute more detailed processing.

In addition, the pachinko machine 10 of this control modification, in order to execute the control processing of the content described above, when it is determined that the power supply from the external device has been cut off due to a power failure etc. , an internal power supply (backup power supply) for temporarily allowing execution of only some of the various control processes of the pachinko machine 10 even during a power outage is provided by the power supply device 115 (see FIG. 8). , and when it is determined that a predetermined condition is met in the power-off processing, the power-off control using the internal power supply can be executed. Then, as control during power interruption, the detection operation of various detection means that is provided in the small winning prize device 10650 and is capable of detecting the passage of the ball, and the storage processing that stores the detection result of the detection means. It is configured to be executable as medium control.

In this way, by making it possible to detect the falling state (passing state) of the ball even during power outage, it becomes possible to easily compare the state at the time of power outage and the state at the time of power restoration. In addition, in this control modification, the situation at the time of power restoration can be determined by detecting the movement (flowing down) of the ball during the power failure using the above-described configuration, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, after the power is restored, the state of the balls in the small prize winning device 10650 may be configured to be detectable, and the state at the time of power recovery may be determined based on the detection result. In this case, the ball does not move when the power is cut off and when the power is restored (the ball positioned at the predetermined position in the small prize winning device 10650 does not move when the power is cut off and when the power is restored. ), it is necessary to determine the state of the ball when power is restored. Therefore, in addition to detecting means for detecting the passage of the ball (for example, a proximity sensor), detection means for detecting the presence of the ball ( For example, it is preferable to provide a weight detection means so that the weight of the ball can be detected.

Next, with reference to FIG. 359, display contents displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 in this modified example of control will be described. FIG. 359(a) is a display screen for showing an error state when the power is turned on after the power is turned off during the small winning game, and FIG. 359(b) is during the small winning game. It is a display screen for showing a normal state when the power is turned on after being in a power failure state. Note that the detailed display control content for displaying the display screen shown in FIG. 359 is the same as the control for displaying the display screen shown in FIG. .

As shown in FIG. 359(a), when it is determined that an error state exists when the power is turned on (when the power is restored), the comment "An error has occurred. It is displayed in the main display area Dm of the power-on screen, and a comment of "error occurred during recovery" indicating the current situation is displayed in the sub-display area Ds. As a result, the occurrence of an error can be notified to the player in an easy-to-understand manner.

Also, as shown in FIG. 359(b), when it is determined that the power is turned on (at the time of power recovery) is in a normal state, the display mode to that effect is "please note that the small winning game will be restarted". is displayed in the main display area Dm of the power-on screen, and a comment "returning to normal" indicating the current situation is displayed in the sub-display area Ds. As a result, it is possible to inform the player in an easy-to-understand manner that the small winning game interrupted in the middle will return to normal.

In the display example shown in FIG. 359, the power-on screen is configured to display display modes indicating error recovery and normal recovery. It may be configured to be displayed after it has passed. In addition, in order to set the display period longer, even if it returns in a normal state, the delay processing for delaying the restart timing of the small winning game is executed, and the player is notified that the small winning game will return. It may be configured such that the small winning game is restarted after recognition.

<Regarding the electrical configuration of the control modification of the fifteenth embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 360 and 361, the electrical configuration in this control modification will be described. This control modification differs from the fifteenth embodiment described above in that a partial configuration of the ROM 202 of the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110 and a partial configuration of the RAM 203 are different. be. The same elements are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed descriptions thereof are omitted.

FIG. 360(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 202 of the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in this control modification. As shown in FIG. 360(a), this control modification differs from the fifteenth embodiment in that a power recovery state selection table 202nn is provided, and the rest is the same. A detailed description of the same contents will be omitted.

Here, the contents of the power recovery situation selection table 202nn will be described with reference to FIG. 360(b). FIG. 360(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the power recovery situation selection table 202nn. This power recovery state selection table 202nn compares the state of the ball at the time of power failure with the state of the ball at the time of power restoration, and compares the current state (situation at the time of power restoration) to determine whether the current state is normal or an error state. It is a data table for selecting (determining) whether it is, and is referred to when a small hit middle return process A (see S19051 in FIG. 363) described later is executed.

In this power recovery situation selection table 202nn, other memory areas of the RAM 203 are stored according to power failure situations stored in a power failure situation storage area 203nn, which will be described later, and power failure control executed using the internal power supply. A power recovery state determined based on the information stored in the storage means (power failure storage area) is referred to.

By configuring in this way, the situation at the time of power recovery is normal or abnormal depending on the combination of various situations in the case where power interruption occurs during the small winning game and various situations at the time of power recovery. can be selected, it is possible to perform abnormality determination with higher accuracy.

Specifically, the content defined in the power recovery state selection table 202nn will be described in detail. First, when the power failure state occurs, the game state (ball status) is read out from the game status storage area 203mi, and based on the read information, it is determined that the ball has won a prize in the small prize winning device 10650, and the ball has won a prize in the rolling device 10675 (see FIG. 314). It is discriminated into three states: a non-entering state in which the rolling device 10675 (see FIG. 314) does not enter, an entering state in which the rolling device 10675 (see FIG. 314) exists (can exist), and other states. Stored in area 203nn.

During the power outage, control during power outage using the internal power supply is executed, and each detection means (detection sensor) provided in the small winning prize device 10650 during the power outage detects the passage of the ball. The detection result is stored in the power interruption storage area. When the power is restored, the current situation (not entered, Entry, V passage, Out passage) is judged (determined).

When the state at the time of power failure is "not entered" and the state at the time of power restoration is "not entered" or "entered", "normal" is selected, and "V pass" or "out pass" is selected. In this case, "error (abnormal)" is selected. Further, when the state at the time of power failure is "approaching", "normal" is selected regardless of the state at the time of power restoration. In addition, when the status at the time of power failure is "other" and the status at the time of power recovery is "not entered" or "entered", "error" is selected, and when it is "passed through V" or "passed out". no status determination is performed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 361, the electrical configuration of the RAM 203 included in the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 of this control modification will be described. FIG. 361 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of the RAM 203 included in the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 of this modification of control. As shown in FIG. 361, this control modification differs from the above-described fifteenth embodiment in that a power failure situation storage area 203nn is added, and the rest is the same. A detailed description of the same contents will be omitted.

The power failure state storage area 203nn is a storage area for storing the state (flowing state) of the ball winning the small prize winning device 10650 when the power failure state occurs during the small prize game. , the status at the time of power failure set in the power failure time processing A (S19002), which will be described later, is stored.

<Regarding the control process of the main controller in the control modification of the fifteenth embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 362 and 363, the contents of control processing of main controller 110 will be described. In this control modification, with respect to the above-described fifteenth embodiment, the contents of the process (power-off process) executed at the time of power failure, and the content of the small hit medium return process 16 (see FIG. 331) are changed. are different, and otherwise identical. A detailed description of the same contents will be omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 362, the contents of the power-off process A (S19002) will be described. This power-off processing A (S19002) is different from the power-off processing (see S10002 in FIG. 336) executed in the fifteenth embodiment described above. The difference is that a process for storing the status of is executed.

When the power-off process A (S19002) is executed, first, the same S1801 to S1803 processes as the above-described power-off process (see S10002 in FIG. 336) are executed. (S19011). Then, it is determined whether the read small winning game situation is "waiting situation" or "storage waiting situation" (S19012), and if it is judged that it is "waiting situation" or "storage waiting situation" (S19012 : Yes), the rotating body 10652 is stopped facing upward (a state in which the ball cannot be stored in the storing portion 10652a of the rotating body 10652) (S19013), the status at power failure is set to "not entered", and Stored in the status storage area 203nn (S19014).

That is, the timing at which the power-off processing A (S19002) is executed is during the small-hit game, and the ball has not won the small-hit prize winning device 10650, and the ball has won the small-hit prize winning device 10650. has not reached the storage portion 10652a of the rotor 10652 and is stored in the storage portion 10652a of the rotor 10652, the operation of the rotor 10652 is stopped. After stopping the ball being discharged to the downstream side of the small prize winning device 10650, the situation at the time of power failure is set as a "non-entering" state in which the ball cannot flow into the rolling device 10675. do.

Next, when the process of S19014 is finished, or when it is determined that the read small winning game situation is not the "waiting situation" or the "storage waiting situation" in the process of S19012 (S19012: No), the following , the process proceeds to S19015.

In the processing of S19015, it is determined whether or not the read small winning game situation is the "accessory passing situation", that is, the ball has flowed into the rolling device 10675 (S19015). If it is determined (S19015: Yes), the status at power failure is set to "entering" and stored in the status at power failure storage area 203nn (S19016). Then, even when the power is cut off, each detection sensor in the small prize winning device 10650 detects the passing of the ball, and the processing for storing the result of the passing detection in the power cut storage area is executed. Therefore, the start of internal power supply is set (S19017), and this processing ends.

On the other hand, in the processing of S19015, if it is determined that it is not the "passing situation", for example, if it is the "straight V passing situation" in which the ball is flowing down toward the direct V winning opening 11657 (S19015: No), the status at power failure is set to "Other", stored in the status at power failure storage area 203nn (S19018), and the process proceeds to S19017. In the process of S19018, if the power failure situation is already stored in the power failure situation storage area 203nn in the process of S19014, the process is terminated without setting a new power failure situation. Configure.

In addition, in the processing of S1801, the flag 203ea during the small hit is not ON (S1801: No), that is, the present is not in the small hit game. Alternatively, in the process of S1802, the V passage flag 203ec is on (S1802: Yes), that is, if it is determined that the ball has entered the specific area (V winning opening) in the small hit game, the electric Since there is no need to monitor the passage of the ball during the interruption, the process of S19017 is skipped and the present process ends.

As described above, in the power-off processing A (S19002), in accordance with the situation that can occur during the power failure, the small winning game situation, which has been subdivided into four or more stages, is divided into three stages. configured to remember. As a result, it is possible to accurately perform abnormality determination while suppressing the processing load and the amount of information stored in the power failure situation storage area 203nn.

Next, with reference to FIG. 363, the contents of the small winning middle return process A (S19051) will be described. FIG. 363 is a flow chart schematically showing the contents of the small hit middle return process A (S19051). In this small hit middle return process A (S19051), when a power failure state occurs during a small winning game, the ball status at the time of power failure stored in the power failure situation storage area 203nn and the power on (return A process for determining whether or not the situation at the time of power-on (at the time of return) is normal is executed based on the ball situation at the time of the game.

When the small hit middle return process A (S19051) is executed, first, it is determined whether the small hit medium flag 203ea is ON, that is, whether the small hit game is currently in progress (S3001). Then, if it is determined that the small hit medium flag 203ea is not set to ON (S3001: No), the rotation start of the acceleration rotor 10675a is set to perform a normal return operation (S3009), and this processing exit.

On the other hand, in the process of S3001, if it is determined that the small hit medium flag 203ea is set to ON (S3001: Yes), then read the small hit game situation stored in the game situation storage area 203mi ( S19071). Here, in this control modification, it is configured to be able to execute power interruption control using the internal power supply even during power interruption. It is configured to be able to detect and memorize the movement of the sphere within the 10650. In the process of S19071, the current small winning game situation reflecting the contents updated by the power interruption control is read.

Next, based on the information (current status) read out in the process of S19071 and the information (situation at the time of power failure) stored in the storage area 203nn for the situation at power failure, the power failure status selection table 202nn is referred to. to select (determine) the presence or absence of an error state (the presence or absence of a normal state) (S19072), and set a display command based on the selection result (S19073).

In the process of S19073, if the display command indicating the error state is set, the display screen shown in FIG. 359(a) is displayed, and if the display command indicating the normal state is set, The display screen shown in FIG. 359(b) is displayed. Then, it is determined whether the return process of this time is normal (S19074), and if normal (S19074: Yes), the same as the small hit medium return process 16 of the fifteenth embodiment described above (see FIG. 331) The processing of S3007 to S3009 is executed, and this processing ends. If it is determined in the processing of S19074 that it is not normal (S19074: No), this processing ends without executing the normal recovery operation (processing of S3007 to S3009).

In addition, in each of the above-described embodiments, using the ball that has won the small winning prize device 10650 during the small winning game, V winning game that determines whether the ball enters the V winning opening (specific area) can be executed in a plurality of types, the timing of informing the player of the type of the V winning game may be appropriately set. For example, based on the start of the small winning game, the V winning game that can be executed The player may be previously notified of the type of , or the player may not be notified even if the V winning game is executed. Furthermore, in the case where the V winning game can be executed a plurality of times at different timings within one small winning game, a predetermined effect is given to the player only to the effect that there are a plurality of V winning games that can be executed. It may be configured to be executed at the timing (starting timing of the small winning game, during fluctuation of the special symbol won by the small winning, etc.).

Further, in each of the above-described embodiments, various mechanisms (distribution means) are used to distribute balls to a plurality of flow paths, and are configured to vary the rate at which the balls enter a specific area. However, it is of course possible to divert to each embodiment a sorting means that is an appropriate combination of various sorting means used in each embodiment, and the arrangement of the sorting means used in one embodiment The position and number may be determined as appropriate within a range not departing from the technical ideas of the various inventions described in the above-described embodiments.

Furthermore, the sorting means for sorting the balls in each of the above-described embodiments sorts the balls that have reached the sorting means into a plurality of paths. It is sufficient if there is any, and the sorting means may be replaced with guiding means capable of guiding the ball to a predetermined path. In this case, for example, a configuration is also included in which a sphere is retained within a predetermined path, and the subsequent sphere is guided to a different flow path by the influence of the retained sphere.

In addition, in each of the above-described embodiments, the content of the invention is explained using the phrase "flowing down" which indicates that the ball advances under its own weight. For example, there are technical ideas such as moving the ball by attracting it to a movable magnet, or providing a movable means that can move the ball while it is placed, and moving the ball by moving the movable means. Of course it is included. In this case, words such as the movement of the sphere, the guidance of the sphere, and the passage of the sphere may be used as words that include all concepts.

The small winning game executed in each of the above-described embodiments is configured to predetermine the opening period, the round period, and the ending period. may be configured to set only In addition, as a condition for ending the small winning game, when a predetermined number (10) of balls enter, or when the elapsed time from the start of the small winning game reaches a predetermined period (for example, 5 seconds) , the round period end condition is established, and then, when it is determined that all the balls that have won the winning device (small winning prize device 10650) variably controlled in the small winning game are discharged, the small winning game ending condition is However, it is not limited to this, and for example, it may be configured so that the round period end condition is established based on the ball entering the V winning hole. In this case, when the ball that entered the V winning hole is ejected from the winning device (small winning prize winning device 10650) variably controlled in the small winning game, regardless of the remaining state of the other balls, the small winning It may be constructed such that a game end condition is satisfied.

In other words, when the conditions for executing the big winning game that are established during the small winning game are satisfied, the big winning game is started based on the normal processing of the balls that satisfy the conditions for executing the big winning game. can be configured to By constructing in this way, the execution timing of the big win game is delayed according to the flow condition of the ball which is not related to the establishment of the condition for executing the big win game, and the relationship between the small win game and the big win game is weakened. can be suppressed.

In this case, for example, the balls that can enter the V winning hole during the small winning game are finally discharged from the small winning winning device 10650, so that the player does not feel uncomfortable. It is possible to shift from a small winning game to a big winning game. In addition, by making the winning device variably controlled during the small winning game and the winning device variably controlled during the big winning game different, the balls winning the small winning winning device 10650 remain during the small winning game. Even if the jackpot game is executed after the jackpot game is played, the game contents of the jackpot game can be prevented from being hindered.

As described above, in each of the above-described embodiments, in a special symbol lottery in which one lottery result is selected from a plurality of lottery results including at least a big win, a small win, and a loss, when a small win is won Then, a small winning game is executed, and during the small winning game, a state (open state) in which it is difficult for a ball to enter and a state (closed state) in which it is easy to enter a ball are variably controlled in a predetermined variable pattern. A means is provided, and a jackpot game is executed based on the fact that a ball entering the variable ball entering means passes through (enters) a specific area (V prize opening) provided in the variable ball entering means. It consists of

In this way, the relation of each element in the configuration in which a small hit is won in the special symbol lottery and the big hit game is executed with the small hit as a trigger will be defined below.

<Pattern 1>
When a small prize is won in a lottery of special symbols, one small prize type is determined by a small prize type determination means from a plurality of previously stored small prize types. Information (jackpot type information) for indicating the type of the jackpot game that can be executed later is associated with each small hit type. Then, as a part of the big win game (first round), a small win game is executed, and when the ball enters the specific area (V winning hole) during the small win game, it corresponds to the determined small win type. A pattern 1 configured to execute a jackpot game (from the second round onward) based on attached jackpot type information.

According to the configuration of pattern 1 described above, when the small winning is won, the big winning type information is determined, so the big winning game type that can be executed after the small winning game according to the game state at the time of winning the small winning (during the big winning game (the number of rounds, the game state set after the end of the jackpot game) can be set in advance. In this way, by making it possible to determine the big winning type information for indicating the big winning game that can be executed later when the small winning is won, the time from the timing when the small winning special symbol starts to change until the big winning game is executed. A long period of time can be used to execute an effect for suggesting to the player a jackpot game type corresponding to a jackpot game that can be executed, and the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

In addition, by making it possible to determine the jackpot type information for indicating the jackpot game that can be executed later when the jackpot is won, when the ball does not pass through (enter) the specific area during the jackpot game, It is possible to execute an effect of notifying the jackpot type corresponding to the jackpot game executed when passing through the specific area.

On the other hand, in the configuration of this pattern 1, since it is defined to execute the small winning game as part of the big winning game, even if the ball enters the specific area during the small winning game, the small winning After the game period (opening period, round period, ending period of the small winning game) of the game (first round of the big winning game) is completed, the big winning game (second round of the big winning game and after) is executed. In other words, when a ball enters a specific area during a small winning game, the right to execute a big winning game (from the second round onwards) is acquired.

Therefore, when the game period of the small winning game remains when the ball enters the specific area during the small winning game, the big winning game (second round) is executed immediately after the ball enters the specific area. I can't let you. In addition, since the apparent jackpot game actually starts from the second round, the maximum number of rounds of the jackpot game is reduced by one.

In addition, according to the configuration of this pattern 1, if you win the jackpot in the special pattern lottery, the right to win the jackpot (first right) and the right to determine the contents of the jackpot (second right) rights), the right to play all the jackpot games based on the contents of the jackpot (third right). , In addition to the first right and second right, the small winning right including the right (fourth right) to execute only a part of the big winning game (for one round) based on the contents of the big winning has been acquired.

Next, when a small hit is won in a lottery of special symbols, one small hit type is determined by a small hit type determination means from a plurality of pre-stored small hit types. Then, a small winning game is executed, and when a ball enters a specific area (V winning hole) during the small winning game, a big winning game type corresponding to the V winning hole into which the ball enters is determined, and a big winning game is executed. Pattern 2 that satisfies the execution condition.

According to the configuration of pattern 2, when a jackpot is won in the special pattern lottery, the right to win the jackpot (first right), the right to determine the details of the jackpot (second right), The right to play all the jackpot games based on the content of the jackpot (third right) has been acquired, and if a small win is won in a special pattern lottery, all jackpot rights will be established. None of the above-mentioned first to third rights are established when the ball enters the specific area (V prize opening) during the small winning game.

According to the configuration of pattern 2 described above, when the small win is won, the information about the big win is not determined, and when the ball enters the specific area (V winning opening) during the small win game, the big win type information is determined, the type of jackpot game that can be executed after the jackpot game according to the game state at the time of winning the jackpot (the number of rounds during the jackpot game, the game state set after the jackpot game ends) is set at the time of V winning can be set. By configuring in this way, for example, by providing a plurality of V winning openings and defining different jackpot game types for each V winning opening, different jackpot games are played according to the V winning opening in which the ball has won. can be executed. Therefore, it is possible to make the player more interested in which V winning hole the ball will enter.

Next, when a small hit is won in a lottery of special symbols, one small hit type is determined by a small hit type determination means from a plurality of pre-stored small hit types. Each small hit type is associated with a part of the information (jackpot type information) for indicating the type of the jackpot game that can be executed later (information indicating the game state at the time of winning the small hit). Then, a small winning game is executed, and when a ball enters a specific area (V winning opening) during the small winning game, a big winning game type corresponding to the entered V winning opening is determined, and a winning small winning game is determined. A pattern 3 in which execution conditions for a jackpot game are established based on part of the jackpot type information corresponding to the jackpot type and the jackpot game type corresponding to the V winning hole into which the ball is entered.

According to the configuration of pattern 3, when a jackpot is won in the special pattern lottery, the right to win the jackpot (first right), the right to determine the content of the jackpot (second right), If you have won the jackpot right including all the rights (third right) to execute all the jackpot games based on the jackpot content, and if you win a small win in a special symbol lottery, the game state at the time of winning the small win Information (jackpot type selection condition information) for specifying the selection range of the jackpot type selected at the time of V winning is set, and when the ball enters the specific area (V winning opening) during the small winning game Of the big winning game information defined corresponding to the V winning hole into which the ball is entered, the big winning game information corresponding to the big winning type selection condition information set based on the winning of the small winning is set.

That is, according to the configuration of pattern 3, the type of jackpot to be executed is determined based on both the first information set based on the special symbol lottery and the second information acquired at the time of V winning. Therefore, it is possible to set more complicated types of jackpot games to be provided to the player, and to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, among the above-described patterns, pattern 2 and pattern 3 do not execute the small winning game as part of the big winning game. is entered), it is possible to forcibly terminate the small winning game being executed and execute the big winning game.

The relationship between the small winning game and the big winning game used in each of the above-described embodiments may be configured so that any one of the definitions of patterns 1 to 3 described above holds.

All or part of the above-described embodiments and control examples may be combined. For example, the configuration of the passage detection sensor 228 of the right variable winning device 65 in the sixth embodiment may be applied to other embodiments. For example, by applying it to the first embodiment, the gauge number of the chance meter CM during execution of the standby state effect can be accurately linked to the number of game balls flowing down the upper surface of the opening/closing door 65f1. More specifically, the passage number counter 223k in the sixth embodiment is also provided in the RAM 223 in the first embodiment, and the value of the passage number counter 223k is updated by the same method as in the fourth embodiment (see FIG. 87). S4211, S4212, S4219, S4220). Then, during execution of the standby state presentation, every time the value of the passage number counter 223k is updated, the mode of the chance meter CM is updated so that the gauge number corresponds to the updated counter value. Thereby, the mode of the chance meter CM can be adapted to the actual state of the upper surface of the opening/closing door 65f1. The configuration of the sixth embodiment can also be applied to other embodiments in a similar manner.

<Seventeenth Embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 in the seventeenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 364 to 379. FIG. 364 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10 in the seventeenth embodiment, FIG. 365 is a front view of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG.

In the following description, with respect to the pachinko machine 10 in the state shown in FIG. 364, the front side of the paper surface is the front (front) side, and the back side of the paper surface is the rear (rear) side. Also, with respect to the pachinko machine 10 in the state shown in FIG. ) side. Furthermore, arrows UD, LR, and FB in the drawing (see, for example, FIG. 365) indicate the up-down direction, left-right direction, and front-back direction of the pachinko machine 10, respectively.

As shown in FIG. 364, the pachinko machine 10 has an outer frame 11 whose outer shell is formed by wooden frames combined in a substantially rectangular shape, and a and an inner frame 12 supported so as to be openable and closable. In order to support the inner frame 12, the outer frame 11 is provided with metal hinges 18 at two upper and lower positions on the left side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 364). A frame 12 is supported toward the front side so that it can be opened and closed.

A game board 13 (see FIG. 365) having a large number of nails, winning slots 63, 64, etc. is detachably attached to the inner frame 12 from the back side. A ball (game ball) flows down the front of the game board 13 to play a pinball game. In addition, the inner frame 12 includes a ball shooting unit 112a (see FIG. 367) that shoots a ball to the front area of the game board 13 and a shooting unit that guides the ball shot from the ball shooting unit 112a to the front area of the game board 13. A rail (not shown) or the like is attached.

On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 covering the front upper side and a lower tray unit 15 covering the lower side are provided. In order to support the front frame 14 and the lower tray unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached at two upper and lower positions on the left side of the front view (see FIG. 364). 14 and a lower tray unit 15 are supported toward the front side so that they can be opened and closed. The locking of the inner frame 12 and the locking of the front frame 14 are unlocked by inserting a dedicated key into the keyhole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

The front frame 14 is assembled with decorative resin parts, electric parts, and the like, and has a window portion 14c having a substantially elliptical opening at its substantially central portion. A glass unit 16 having two sheet glasses is arranged on the back side of the front frame 14, and the front side of the game board 13 can be visually recognized on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 16.例文帳に追加

The front frame 14 has an upper tray 17 for storing balls projected to the front side and formed in a substantially box-like shape with an open upper surface, and the upper tray 17 discharges prize balls, rental balls, and the like. The bottom surface of the upper tray 17 is inclined downward to the right when viewed from the front (see FIG. 364), and the inclination guides the ball thrown into the upper tray 17 to the ball shooting unit 112a (see FIG. 367). A frame button 22 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17 . The frame button 22 is operated by the player when, for example, the stage of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 365) is changed, or the content of the super ready-to-win effect is changed. be.

The front frame 14 is provided with light-emitting means such as various lamps around its periphery (for example, corner portions). These light emitting means are controlled to change the light emitting mode by lighting or blinking in response to changes in the game state such as when a big win or when a predetermined reach is reached, and play a role of enhancing the performance effect during the game. Illumination parts 29 to 33 containing light-emitting means such as LEDs are provided on the periphery of the window part 14c. In the pachinko machine 10, these electric decoration parts 29 to 33 function as production lamps such as big win lamps, and the respective electric decoration parts 29 to 33 are lit by lighting or blinking of built-in LEDs at the time of a big win or a ready-to-win production. Alternatively, it flashes to notify that the jackpot is in progress or that the player is in the process of reaching the jackpot just before the jackpot. In addition, a display lamp 34 having a built-in light emitting means such as an LED and capable of displaying when a prize ball is being paid out and when an error occurs is provided at the upper left portion of the front frame 14 when viewed from the front (see FIG. 364).

In addition, a small window 35 is formed by attaching a transparent resin from the back side so that the back side of the front frame 14 can be visually recognized on the lower side of the right electrical decoration part 32, and a pasting space K1 (Fig. 365) can be visually recognized from the front of the pachinko machine 10. In addition, in the pachinko machine 10, in order to bring out more splendor, a plated member 36 made of ABS resin, which is plated with chrome, is attached to the area around the electric decorations 29-33.

A ball rental operation unit 40 is arranged below the window portion 14c. The ball rental operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41 , a ball rental button 42 and a return button 43 . When the ball lending operation unit 40 is operated with banknotes, cards, etc. inserted into a card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, the ball is released according to the operation. Lending is done. Specifically, the frequency display section 41 is an area in which the remaining amount information of the card or the like is displayed, and the built-in LED lights up to display the remaining amount in numbers as the remaining amount information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain lending balls based on information recorded on a card or the like (recording medium), and lending balls are supplied to the top tray 17 as long as there is a balance in the card or the like. be done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of the card or the like inserted in the card unit. A pachinko machine in which balls are directly lent to the upper tray 17 from a ball lending device or the like without going through the card unit, that is, a so-called cash machine, does not require the ball lending operation unit 40. A decorative seal or the like may be added to the installation portion to make the parts configuration common. It is possible to achieve commonality between a pachinko machine using a card unit and a cash machine.

In the lower tray unit 15 positioned below the upper tray 17, a lower tray 50 for storing balls that could not be stored in the upper tray 17 is formed in a substantially box-like shape with an open upper surface. there is On the right side of the lower tray 50, an operation handle 51 is provided which is operated by the player to hit the ball in front of the game board 13. As shown in FIG.

Inside the operating handle 51, there are a touch sensor 51a for permitting the driving of the ball shooting unit 112a, a shooting stop switch 51b for stopping the shooting of the ball during the pressing operation, and a rotation of the operating handle 51. A variable resistor (not shown) for detecting a dynamic operation amount (rotational position) based on a change in electric resistance is incorporated. When the operating handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes corresponding to the amount of rotation operation. A ball is shot with a strength (shooting intensity) corresponding to , and is hit in front of the game board 13 with a flying distance corresponding to the player's operation. Further, when the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the firing stop switch 51b are turned off.

A ball extraction lever 52 is provided at the lower front portion of the lower tray 50 for operation when discharging the balls stored in the lower tray 50 downward. The ball extracting lever 52 is always biased to the right, and when it is slid to the left against the bias, the bottom opening formed in the bottom of the lower tray 50 is opened. The ball naturally falls from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball extracting lever 52 is normally performed with a box (generally called a "senryo box") placed below the lower tray 50 to receive the balls ejected from the lower tray 50 . The operation handle 51 is arranged on the right side of the lower tray 50 as described above, and an ashtray (not shown) is attached to the left side of the lower tray 50 .

As shown in FIG. 365, the game board 13 has a base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape in a front view, and a large number of nails for guiding balls (shown below the center frame 86, and in the upper half of the game area). ) and windmills (not shown), rails 61, 62, general winning opening 63, first winning opening 64, second winning opening 140, variable winning device 65, through gate 67, variable display unit 80 and the like are assembled, and the peripheral portion thereof is attached to the back side of the inner frame 12 (see FIG. 364).

The base plate 60 is made of a light-transmitting resin material, and allows the player to visually recognize various structures arranged on the back side of the base plate 60 from the front side thereof. The general winning opening 63, the first winning opening 64, the second winning opening 140, and the variable winning device 65 are arranged in through holes formed in the base plate 60 by router processing, and tapping screws or the like are installed from the front side of the game board 13. is fixed by

Note that the base plate 60 may be formed from a wooden plate member. In this case, on the outside of the center frame 86, various structures arranged on the back side of the base plate 60 from the front side can be shielded so as to be invisible to the player.

The front central portion of the game board 13 can be visually recognized from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14c (see FIG. 364) of the front frame 14. FIG. Mainly referring to FIG. 365, the configuration of the game board 13 will be described below.

In front of the game board 13, an outer rail 62 formed by bending a strip-shaped metal plate into a substantially circular arc is planted, and a strip-shaped metal plate is placed inside the outer rail 62 in the same manner as the outer rail 62. An arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed by is erected. The front outer periphery of the game board 13 is surrounded by the inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62, and the front and rear sides are surrounded by the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 364). A game area is formed in which a game is played by the behavior of . The game area is the front surface of the game board 13 and is defined by two rails 61 and 62 and a resin outer edge member 73 connecting the rails (a winning opening is provided and a shot is fired). area where the ball flows down).

The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball shot from the ball shooting unit 112a (see FIG. 367) to the upper part of the game board 13. As shown in FIG. A return ball prevention member 68 is attached to the tip of the inner rail 61 (upper left part in FIG. 365) to prevent the ball once guided to the upper part of the game board 13 from returning into the ball guide passage again. be done. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right in FIG. 365) at a position corresponding to the maximum flying portion of the ball. is attenuated and rebounded toward the center.

First pattern display devices 37A and 37B having a plurality of LEDs as light emitting means and a 7-segment display are arranged in the lower left side of the game area when viewed from the front (lower left side in FIG. 365). The first symbol display devices 37A and 37B are for displaying according to each control performed by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 367), and mainly display the game state of the pachinko machine 10. FIG. In this embodiment, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B are configured to be used properly according to whether the ball has won the first prize winning port 64 or the second prize winning port 140.例文帳に追加Specifically, when the ball enters the first winning hole 64, the first symbol display device 37A operates, while when the ball enters the second winning hole 140, the first The pattern display device 37B is configured to operate.

In addition, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B use LEDs to indicate whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the variable probability, the time saving mode, or the normal state by the lighting state, or indicate whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the changing state by the lighting state. Whether the stop pattern is a pattern corresponding to the probability variable jackpot, a pattern corresponding to the normal jackpot, or a missing pattern is indicated by the lighting state, the number of pending balls is indicated by the lighting state, and a 7-segment display device indicates the round during the jackpot. Display numbers and errors. The plurality of LEDs are configured so that each LED has a different emission color (for example, red, green, and blue), and depending on the combination of the emission colors, it is possible to suggest various game states of the pachinko machine 10 with a small number of LEDs. can.

Incidentally, in the pachinko machine 10, a lottery is performed when a prize is won in the first prize winning port 64 and the second prize winning port 140.例文帳に追加In the lottery, the pachinko machine 10 determines whether or not it is a big win (big win lottery), and also determines the kind of big win when it is determined as a big win. As the jackpot type determined here, a 15R probability variable jackpot, a 4R probability variable jackpot, and a 4R normal jackpot are prepared. The first pattern display devices 37A and 37B not only indicate whether or not the result of the lottery is a jackpot as a stop pattern after the end of variation, but also indicate a pattern corresponding to the jackpot type when the jackpot is won. .

Here, the “15R probability variable jackpot” is a probability variable jackpot that shifts to a high probability state after the maximum number of rounds is 15 rounds, and the “4R probability variable jackpot” is a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 4 rounds. It is a variable jackpot that shifts to a high probability state after . In addition, "4R normal jackpot" is a jackpot that shifts to a low probability state after a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 4 rounds, and a time-saving state during a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, 100 fluctuations). be.

In addition, the "high probability state" refers to a state in which the probability of a subsequent jackpot is increased as an added value after the end of the jackpot, a time during so-called probability fluctuation (probability change), in other words, a game that is easy to shift to a special game state It is the state of In the high-probability state (during variable probability) in this embodiment, the probability of a big hit increases during a predetermined number of variations (100 variations in this embodiment), and the probability of a second symbol to be described later increases. It includes a game state in which the ball is likely to enter the prize winning opening 140.例文帳に追加"Low probability state" refers to a state in which the odds are not variable and the jackpot probability is normal, that is, a state in which the jackpot probability is lower than when the odds are variable. In addition, the time-saving state (during time-saving) of the "low-probability state" is a state in which the jackpot probability is normal, and the jackpot probability remains as it is, only the winning probability of the second symbol is increased, and the second winning port 140 It refers to the state of the game in which the ball is likely to win a prize. On the other hand, when the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state, it means that the game is in a state of neither variable probability nor time reduction (state in which neither the jackpot probability nor the second pattern winning probability is increased).

In this embodiment, when it is determined that the game ball has passed through the through hole of the probability variation detection sensor SE11 of the distribution device 300 described later, in the first round of the jackpot game, the game state after the jackpot game ends varies by 100 During the number of times, it will be in a high probability state. In addition, if it is not determined that the game ball has passed through the through hole of the probability variation detection sensor SE11, the game state after the end of the jackpot game becomes a time saving state for 100 variations.

During the probability change or the time reduction, not only the probability of winning the second symbol is increased, but also the time when the electric accessory 140a (electric accessory) attached to the second winning opening 140 is opened is changed, compared to the normal time. and a long time is set. When the electric role product 140a is in the open state (open state), the balls enter the second winning port 140 more than when the electric role product 140a is in the closed state (closed state). becomes easy. Therefore, during the probability change or the time reduction, the ball is likely to enter the second winning hole 140, and the number of times the big winning lottery is performed can be increased.

In addition, instead of changing the opening time of the electric accessory 140a associated with the second winning opening 140 during the probability change or the time saving, or in addition to changing the opening time, A change may be made to increase the number of times the accessory 140a is released more than during normal times. In addition, the winning probability of the second symbol is not changed during the probability change or the time reduction, and the electric accessory 140a is opened at the time when the electric accessory 140a associated with the second winning opening 140 is opened and when it hits once. At least one of the number of times may be changed. In addition, during the probability change or the time reduction, the time when the electric accessory 140a attached to the second winning opening 140 is opened and the number of times the electric accessory 140a is opened per hit are not set. Only the probability may be changed to be higher than normal.

The game area is provided with a plurality of general winning holes 63 through which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls win. A variable display device unit 80 is arranged in the central portion of the game area. In the variable display device unit 80, the winning (starting winning) to the first winning port 64 and the second winning port 140 is used as a trigger, and while synchronizing with the variable display on the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the third symbol is displayed. It is composed of a third pattern display device 81 composed of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply referred to as a "display device") that performs variable display, and an LED that variably displays the second pattern triggered by the passage of the ball through the through gate 67. A second pattern display device (not shown) is provided. A center frame 86 is arranged so as to surround the outer periphery of the third pattern display device 81 of the variable display device unit 80 when viewed from the front.

In this embodiment, the third pattern display device 81 is fastened and fixed to a rear case fixed to the rear surface of the game board 13, and the center frame 86 is arranged so as to border the window portion (central opening 60b) of the base plate 60. are arranged. That is, when viewed from the front, it appears that the center frame 86 is arranged so as to surround the outer periphery of the third pattern display device 81, but in reality, the third pattern display device 81 and the center frame 86 are spaced apart in the front-rear direction. It is

The third pattern display device 81 is composed of, for example, a 9-inch large liquid crystal display. are displayed. Each pattern row is composed of a plurality of patterns (third patterns), and these third patterns are horizontally scrolled for each pattern row to variably display the third pattern on the display screen of the third pattern display device 81.例文帳に追加It's like In the third symbol display device 81 of the present embodiment, the display of the game state under the control of the main control device 110 (see FIG. 367) is performed by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B. Decorative display according to the display of the pattern display devices 37A and 37B is performed. Incidentally, instead of the display device, for example, the third symbol display device 81 may be configured using a reel or the like.

The second pattern display device alternately lights up a symbol "O" and a symbol "X" as a display symbol (second symbol (not shown)) for a predetermined time each time the ball passes through the through gate 67. This is for variable display. In the pachinko machine 10, when it is detected that the ball has passed through the through gate 67, a winning lottery is performed. As a result of the winning lottery, if the winning lottery is won, the second symbol display device stops and displays the symbol "○" after the second symbol is variably displayed. Further, if the result of the winning lottery is a loss, the symbol "x" is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device after the variable display of the third symbol.

In the pachinko machine 10, when the variable display on the second symbol display device stops at a predetermined symbol ("○" symbol in this embodiment), the electric accessory 140a attached to the second winning hole 140 is displayed for a predetermined period of time. is configured to be activated (open) only.

The time required for the variable display of the second symbol is set so as to be shorter during the variable probability or during the time saving than during the normal gaming state. As a result, the variable display of the second symbol is performed in a short time during the probability change and the time reduction, so that more winning lotteries can be performed than during normal times. Therefore, the chance of winning in the winning lottery increases, so that the player can be given more opportunities to open the electric accessary 140a of the second winning opening 140.例文帳に追加Therefore, it is possible to create a state in which the ball is likely to enter the second winning hole 140 during the probability variation and the time saving.

In addition, during the probability change or the time reduction, other methods such as increasing the winning probability, increasing the opening time or the number of times of opening the electric accessory 140a for one hit, etc. When the ball is in a state where it is easy to win a prize, the time required for the variable display of the second symbol may be fixed regardless of the game state. On the other hand, if the time required for the variable display of the second symbol is set shorter than normal during the variable probability or during the time saving, the winning probability may be constant regardless of the game state, and one winning The opening time and the number of openings of the electric accessory 140a may be fixed regardless of the game state.

The through gate 67 is assembled to the game board 13 in the left and right regions of the variable display device unit 80, and is configured so that a part of the ball shot to the game board 13 can pass through. When the ball passes through the through gate 67, a winning lottery for the second symbol is performed. After the winning lottery, the variable display is performed on the second symbol display device, and if the result of the winning lottery is a win, the symbol "○" is displayed as a stop symbol of the variable display, and if the result of the winning lottery is a loss. For example, an "x" symbol is displayed as a variable display stop symbol.

The number of times the ball passes through the through gate 67 is suspended up to a total of four times, and the number of suspended balls is displayed by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B described above, and is displayed on the second symbol suspension lamp (not shown). is also displayed. Four second pattern holding lamps are provided for the maximum number of holdings, and are arranged symmetrically below the third pattern display device 81 .

In addition, the variable display of the second pattern is performed by switching lighting and non-lighting of a plurality of lamps in the second pattern display device as in the present embodiment. A part of the pattern display device 81 may be used. Similarly, the lighting of the second symbol reservation lamp may be performed by a part of the third symbol display device 81 . Also, the maximum number of held balls for passage of the ball through the through gate 67 is not limited to 4, and may be set to 3 or less, or 5 or more (for example, 8). Also, the number of through gates 67 to be assembled is not limited to two, and may be, for example, one. Also, the mounting position of the through gate 67 is not limited to the right and left sides of the variable display unit 80, and may be below the variable display unit 80, for example. In addition, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the lighting display may not be performed by the second symbol reservation lamp.

Below the variable display device unit 80, a first winning hole 64 through which balls can win is arranged. When a ball enters the first winning hole 64, a first winning hole switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main controller 110 is caused to turn on the first winning hole switch. (Refer to FIG. 367), a jackpot lottery is made, and a display corresponding to the lottery result is shown on the first symbol display device 37A.

On the other hand, below the first prize winning port 64 in a front view, a second prize winning port 140 through which a ball can win a prize is arranged. When the ball enters the second winning hole 140, a second winning hole switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main controller 110 is caused to turn on the second winning hole switch. (Refer to FIG. 367), a jackpot lottery is made, and a display corresponding to the lottery result is shown on the first symbol display device 37B.

Also, the first prize winning port 64 and the second prize winning port 140 are also one of the prize winning ports from which five balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls win. In this embodiment, the number of prize balls paid out when the balls enter the first prize winning port 64 and the number of prize balls paid out when the balls enter the second prize winning port 140 are configured to be the same. , the number of prize balls paid out when the balls enter the first prize winning port 64 and the number of prize balls paid out when the balls enter the second prize winning port 140 are different numbers, for example, the number of balls to the first prize winning port 64 The number of prize balls to be paid out when the ball wins may be set to three, and the number of prize balls to be paid out when the ball enters the second prize winning port 140 may be set to five.

An electric accessory 140a is attached to the second prize winning port 140. - 特許庁This electric accessory 140a is configured to be openable and closable, and normally the electric accessory 140a is in a closed state (reduced state), which makes it difficult for the ball to enter the second winning opening 140. On the other hand, as a result of the variable display of the second symbol triggered by the passage of the ball through the through gate 67, when the symbol "○" is displayed on the second symbol display device, the electric accessory 140a is in the open state (enlarged state), and the ball is likely to enter the second winning hole 140.例文帳に追加

As described above, during the variable probability and during the time saving, the probability of hitting the second symbol is higher than during normal, and the time required for the variable display of the second symbol is short, so in the variable display of the second symbol "○ ' is more likely to be displayed, and the number of times the electric accessory 140a is in the open state (enlarged state) increases. Furthermore, the time during which the electric accessory 140a is opened is also longer during the variable probability and during the time saving than during the normal time. Therefore, it is possible to create a state in which the ball is more likely to enter the second winning hole 140 during the variable probability and the shorter working hours compared to the normal time.

Here, when the ball enters the first prize winning port 64 and when the ball enters the second prize winning port 140, the probability of winning the jackpot is the same in both the low probability state and the high probability state. However, the probability of the 15R probability variable jackpot as the type of jackpot selected in the event of a jackpot is higher when the ball enters the second winning port 140 than when the ball enters the first winning port 64. is set. On the other hand, the first prize winning port 64 does not have an electric accessory like the second prize winning port 140, and is in a state where balls can always win prizes.

Therefore, during normal operation, the electric accessory attached to the second prize winning port 140 is often closed, and it is difficult to win the second prize winning port 140. Then, a ball is shot so that the ball passes through the left side of the variable display unit 80 (so-called "left-handed hitting"), and by winning the first prize-winning port 64, many chances of a big winning lottery are obtained, and a big win is achieved. It is advantageous for the player to aim at that.

On the other hand, during the probability change or the time reduction, by passing the ball through the through gate 67, the electric accessory 140a attached to the second winning port 140 is likely to be in an open state, and the second winning port 140 is in a state where it is easy to win. Therefore, the ball is shot toward the second winning hole 140 so that the ball passes the right side of the variable display device 80 (so-called "right hitting"), passes through the through gate 67, and the electric accessory is opened. In addition, it is more advantageous for the player to aim for a 15R probability variable jackpot by winning the second prize winning port 140.例文帳に追加

In the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, since the configuration of the game board 13 is bilaterally symmetrical, it is possible to aim for the first winning hole 64 by "right-handed hitting" or to aim for the second winning hole 140 by "left-handed hitting". You can also aim. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment provides the player with information on how to shoot balls according to the game state of the pachinko machine 10 (whether the game is in variable probability, short time, or normal). It is possible to eliminate the need to change the to "left-handed" and "right-handed". Therefore, it is possible to eliminate the annoyance of changing the way the ball is hit.

A variable prize winning device 65 (see FIG. 365) is arranged below the first prize winning port 64, and a specific prize winning port 65a is provided substantially in the center thereof. In the pachinko machine 10, when the jackpot lottery performed due to the winning in the first prize winning port 64 or the second prize winning port 140 results in a jackpot, after a predetermined time (fluctuation time) elapses, the jackpot stop symbol is displayed. The first symbol display device 37A or the first symbol display device 37B is turned on so as to cause the first symbol display device 37A or the first symbol display device 37B to be lit, and the third symbol display device 81 is caused to display the stop symbol corresponding to the big win, thereby indicating the occurrence of the big win. After that, the game state transitions to a special game state (jackpot) in which the ball is likely to win. As this special game state, the specific winning opening 65a which is normally closed is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds have passed or until 10 balls have been won).

The specific winning opening 65a is closed after a predetermined period of time has passed, and after the closing, the specific winning opening 65a is opened again for a predetermined period of time. The opening and closing operation of the specific winning opening 65a can be repeated up to 15 times (15 rounds), for example. The state in which this opening and closing operation is performed is one form of a special game state that is advantageous to the player, and the player is given a game value (game value) by paying out a larger amount of prize balls than usual. is done.

Incidentally, the special game state is not limited to the form described above. A large opening that is opened and closed separately from the specific winning opening 65a is provided in the game area, and when the LED corresponding to the big win is lit in the first pattern display devices 37A and 37B, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time, and the A special game is a game state in which a large opening provided separately from the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time and a predetermined number of times when a ball enters the specific winning opening 65a while the specific winning opening 65a is open. You may make it form as a state. In addition, the number of the specific winning openings 65a is not limited to one, and one or more than two (for example, three) may be arranged. The left side of the variable display device unit 80 is not limited to the lower left side of the prize winning opening 64, for example.

An affixing space K1 for affixing a certificate stamp, an identification label, or the like is provided at the right corner of the lower side of the game board 13. 35 (see FIG. 364).

The game board 13 is provided with an out port 71 . Balls that flow down the game area and do not win in any of the winning holes 63, 64, 65a, 140 are guided through the out hole 71 to a ball discharge path (not shown).

The game board 13 is provided with a large number of nails for appropriately distributing and adjusting the direction in which the balls fall, and various members (accessories) such as windmills (see FIG. 365). not shown).

As shown in FIG. 366, the back side of the pachinko machine 10 is mainly provided with control board units 90 and 91 and a back pack unit 94 . The control board unit 90 is unitized by mounting a main board (main controller 110), an audio lamp control board (audio lamp control device 113), and a display control board (display control device 114). The control board unit 91 is unitized by mounting a payout control board (payout control device 111), a launch control board (launch control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116.

The back pack unit 94 is formed by unitizing a back pack 92 forming a protective cover portion and a dispensing unit 93 . In addition, each control board has an MPU as a 1-chip microcomputer that manages each control, a port that communicates with various devices, a random number generator that is used for various lotteries, and is used for time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generation circuit or the like is mounted as required.

The main control device 110, the sound lamp control device 113, the display control device 114, the payout control device 111, the firing control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in the board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. . Each of the board boxes 100 to 104 has a box base and a box cover that covers the opening of the box base. The box base and the box cover are connected to each other to accommodate each controller and each board.

In addition, the board box 100 (main controller 110) and the board box 102 (dispensing control device 111 and firing control device 112) connect the box base and the box cover in an unopenable manner (caulking structure) by a sealing unit (not shown). consolidation). A sealing seal (not shown) is attached to the connecting portion between the box base and the box cover over the box base and the box cover. The sealing seal is made of a brittle material, and if the sealing seal is peeled off in order to open the circuit board boxes 100, 102, or if the circuit board boxes 100, 102 are forcibly opened, the box base and the box cover may be damaged. cut to the side. Therefore, by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal, it is possible to know whether the substrate boxes 100, 102 have been opened.

The dispensing unit 93 includes a tank 130 located at the top of the back pack unit 94 and open upward, a tank rail 131 connected to the lower side of the tank 130 and gently inclined toward the downstream side, and a tank rail 131 downstream of the tank rail 131. and a payout device 133 which is provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 and which pays out balls by a predetermined electrical configuration of a payout motor 216 (see FIG. 367). ing. The tank 130 is successively replenished with balls supplied from the island facilities of the game hall, and a payout device 133 pays out the required number of balls as appropriate. A vibrator 134 for applying vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131 .

The payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the firing control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor control knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erasure switch 122. The state recovery switch 120 is operated to eliminate ball clogging (return to normal state) when a dispensing error such as a ball clogging in the dispensing motor 216 (see FIG. 367) occurs. The operating knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on when the pachinko machine 10 is to be returned to its initial state.

Next, referring to FIG. 367, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described. FIG. 367 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10. As shown in FIG.

The main control unit 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer that is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 includes a ROM 202 storing various control programs and fixed value data to be executed by the MPU 201, and a memory for temporarily storing various data when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 202. A RAM 203 and other various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission/reception circuit are incorporated. In the main control unit 110, the MPU 201 performs main processing of the pachinko machine 10, such as the setting of the jackpot lottery, the display settings of the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B and the third symbol display device 81, and the lottery of the display results of the second symbol display device. to run.

In addition, various commands are transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sub-controllers by the data transmission/reception circuit in order to instruct the sub-controllers such as the payout controller 111 and the sound lamp controller 113 to operate. Such commands are sent in only one direction from the main controller 110 to the sub-controllers.

The RAM 203 stores various areas, counters, flags, contents of internal registers of the MPU 201, return addresses of control programs executed by the MPU 201, etc., and a stack area for storing various flags, counters, I/O, and the like. and a work area (work area) in which values are stored. The RAM 203 is configured to retain (back up) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply 115 even after the pachinko machine 10 is powered off, and all the data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. .

When power is interrupted due to power failure or the like, the RAM 203 stores the stack pointer and the values of each register at the time of power interruption (including power failure; the same applies hereinafter). On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including when the power is turned on due to the cancellation of the power failure; the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power was cut off based on the information stored in the RAM 203 . Writing to the RAM 203 is executed by the main process (not shown) when the power is turned off, and restoration of each value written in the RAM 203 is executed by the start-up process (not shown) when the power is turned on. The NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 is configured to receive a power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when power is shut off due to a power failure or the like. , NMI interrupt processing (not shown) is immediately executed as power failure processing.

An input/output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 via a bus line 204 comprising an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 205 includes the payout control device 111, the sound lamp control device 113, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the second symbol display device, the second symbol reservation lamp, the opening/closing plate 65b of the specific winning opening 65a (Fig. 365 ) is connected to a solenoid 209 consisting of a large opening solenoid for opening and closing the front side and a solenoid for driving an electric accessory. Sends various commands and control signals to

The input/output port 205 also includes various switches 208 including a group of switches (not shown) and a group of sensors including a slide position detection sensor S and a rotation position detection sensor R, and a RAM erasure switch circuit 253 provided in the power supply 115, which will be described later. , and the MPU 201 executes various processes based on the signals output from the various switches 208 and the RAM erasing signal SG2 output from the RAM erasing switch circuit 253 .

The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of prize balls and rental balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic unit, has a ROM 212 storing control programs executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 213 used as a work memory and the like.

The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, has a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211 are stored, and various flags and counters. , and a work area (work area) in which values such as I/O are stored. The RAM 213 is configured to retain (back up) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply 115 even after the pachinko machine 10 is powered off, and all the data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. As with the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is also configured to receive a power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when power is shut off due to a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, NMI interrupt processing (not shown) is immediately executed as power failure processing.

An input/output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 215 is connected to the main controller 110, the dispensing motor 216, the launch controller 112, and the like. Although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected with a prize ball detection switch for detecting paid prize balls. The winning ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111 but not to the main control device 110 .

The shooting control device 112 controls the ball shooting unit 112a so that the shooting strength of the ball corresponds to the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51 when the main controller 110 issues an instruction to shoot the ball. . The ball shooting unit 112a has a shooting solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the operation is performed on the condition that the shooting stop switch 51b for stopping the shooting of the ball is turned off (not operated). A shooting solenoid is energized corresponding to the amount of rotation operation (rotation position) of the handle 51 , and the ball is shot with strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operation handle 51 .

The audio lamp control device 113 outputs audio from an audio output device (such as a speaker (not shown)) 226, outputs lighting and extinguishing from a lamp display device (electrical parts 29 to 33, an indicator lamp 34, etc.) 227, and changes production (variation It controls the setting of the display mode of the third pattern display device 81 performed by the display control device 114 such as display) and advance notice effects. The MPU 221, which is an arithmetic device, has a ROM 222 storing control programs executed by the MPU 221, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 223 used as a work memory and the like.

An input/output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 comprising an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 225 is connected to the main control device 110, the display control device 114, the audio output device 226, the lamp display device 227, the other device 228, the frame button 22, and the like. Other devices 228 include drive motors 648 and 820, solenoid 651, and the like.

Sound lamp control device 113, based on various commands (fluctuation pattern command, stop type command, etc.) received from main control device 110, determines the display mode of third symbol display device 81, and sends the determined display mode to the command The display control device 114 is notified by (display variation pattern command, display stop type command, etc.). In addition, the sound lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, changes the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81 or super reach. The display control device 114 is instructed to change the effect contents of the hour. When the stage is changed, a rear image change command including information about the stage after the change is transmitted to the display control device 114 in order to display the rear image corresponding to the stage after the change on the third pattern display device 81. . Here, the back image is an image displayed on the back side of the third design, which is the main image to be displayed on the third design display device 81 . The display control device 114 displays various images on the third pattern display device 81 in accordance with commands transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 .

Also, the sound lamp control device 113 receives a command (display command) representing the display content of the third pattern display device 81 from the display control device 114 . In the audio lamp control device 113, based on the display command received from the display control device 114, in accordance with the display content of the third pattern display device 81, output the audio corresponding to the display content from the audio output device 226, Lighting and extinguishing of the lamp display device 227 are controlled in accordance with the display contents.

The display control device 114 is connected to the sound lamp control device 113 and the third pattern display device 81, and based on the command received from the sound lamp control device 113, the third pattern display device 81 changes the third pattern, etc. It controls the display. Further, the display control device 114 appropriately transmits a display command for notifying the display contents of the third pattern display device 81 to the sound lamp control device 113 . The sound lamp control device 113 outputs sound from the sound output device 226 in accordance with the display contents indicated by this display command, so that the display of the third pattern display device 81 and the sound output from the sound output device 226 are matched. be able to.

The power supply device 115 includes a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each part of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to power failure, etc., and a RAM provided with a RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 366). and an erase switch circuit 253 . The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies necessary operating voltages to the control devices 110 to 114 and the like through a power supply path (not shown). As an overview, the power supply unit 251 takes in a voltage of 24 volts supplied from the outside, various switches such as the various switches 208, solenoids such as the solenoid 209, a voltage of 12 volts for driving a motor, etc. A voltage of 5 volts for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, etc. are generated, and these 12 volts, 5 volts and backup voltages are supplied to the controllers 110 to 114 and the like as necessary voltages.

The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 at the time of power failure due to power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the voltage of stable DC 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and determines that a power failure (power shutdown, power shutdown) has occurred when this voltage is less than 22 volts. Then, a power failure signal SG1 is output to the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111. By the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute NMI interrupt processing. Even after the stable DC voltage of 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts, the power supply unit 251 outputs a voltage of 5 volts, which is the driving voltage of the control system, for a time sufficient to execute the NMI interrupt processing. is configured to maintain a normal value. Therefore, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (not shown).

The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing the backup data to the main controller 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 366) is pressed. When the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, the main controller 110 clears the backup data when the RAM erase signal SG2 is input, and controls the payout initialization command for clearing the backup data in the payout control device 111. Send to device 111 .

The winning hole unit 930 and the ball throwing unit 970 arranged on the base plate of the game board 13 in the seventeenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 368 and 369. FIG. Note that FIG. 365 will be referred to as necessary in the description of FIGS.

368 is an exploded perspective front view of the game board 13. FIG. Note that in FIG. 368, the illustration of units (for example, the center frame 86 (see FIG. 365), etc.) other than the winning hole unit 930 and the ball throwing unit 970 arranged on the base plate 60 is omitted.

As shown in FIG. 368, the base plate 60 has a through hole 60a penetrating in the thickness direction of the base plate 60 below the central opening in the direction of gravity (lower side in FIG. 368) to which the center frame 86 (see FIG. 365) is attached. is formed by router processing.

The through-hole 60a is formed slightly smaller than the outer shape of the front unit 940 described later when viewed from the front, and the drive unit 960 and the specific winning opening unit 950 provided in the front unit 940 are inserted inside the through-hole 60a.

On the base plate 60, a prize winning unit 930 is arranged from the game area (front) side, and a ball throwing unit 970 is arranged from the opposite side (rear side) to the game area, which are fastened and fixed by tapping screws or the like. The detailed configurations of the winning hole unit 930 and the ball throwing unit 970 will be described later.

FIG. 369 is a sectional view of the game board 13 along line VI-VI in FIG. FIG. 369 shows the arrangement of the winning opening unit 930 and the ball throwing unit 970 in the assembled state.

As shown in FIG. 369, the passages of the front unit 940 and the ball-throwing unit 970 are connected to each other in the front-rear direction (horizontal direction in FIG. 369). It is inserted into a protrusion formed on the front unit 940 .

More specifically, the first ball feeding portion 942g and the inlet 982d have a second projection 982d1 formed in the inlet 982d inside the first recessed portion 942g1 formed in the first ball feeding portion 942g. Further, the second ball feeding portion 942c and the side wall portion 981b have a projection 981b1 formed on the side wall portion 981b inside the second recessed portion 942c1 formed on the second ball feeding portion 942c. This facilitates alignment of the front unit 940 and the ball throwing unit 970 when assembled to the base plate 60 .

Next, the overall configuration of the ball throwing unit 970 will be described with reference to FIGS. 370 and 371. FIG. 370(a) is a front view of the ball throwing unit 970, and FIG. 370(b) is a side view of the ball throwing unit 970. FIG. 371(a) is an exploded perspective front view of the ball throwing unit 970, and FIG. 371(b) is an exploded perspective rear view of the ball throwing unit 970. FIG.

As shown in FIGS. 370 and 371, the ball-throwing unit 970 includes a distribution unit 980 provided on the player side (game area side) and having a space in which game balls can be inserted, and a game area of the distribution unit 980. and a passage unit 990 arranged on the opposite side.

The sorting unit 980 includes openings (inflow port 982d and side wall portion 981b) connected to the first winning port 64 and the second winning port 140 of the winning port unit 930 described above. ) through the first winning port 64 and the second winning port 140 to the opposite side of the game area. A detailed description of the sorting unit 980 will be given later.

The passage unit 990 is arranged on one side of the sorting unit 980 in the direction of gravity (lower side in the direction of gravity). The passage unit 990 has a plurality of openings (first insertion hole 991a to second insertion hole 991d) on the surface facing the distribution unit 980, and the game balls thrown inside the distribution unit 980 are received through the openings. A detailed description of the passage unit 990 will be given later.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 372 to 375, the configuration of the sorting unit 980 will be described in detail. 372(a) is a front view of the sorting unit 980, and FIG. 372(b) is a side view of the sorting unit 980. FIG. 373 is an exploded perspective front view of the sorting unit 980, and FIG. 374 is an exploded perspective rear view of the sorting unit 980. FIG. 375(a) is a cross-sectional view of the sorting unit 980 along line XIIa-XIIa of FIG. 372(a), and FIG. 375(b) is a cross-sectional view of the sorting unit 980 along line XIIb-XIIb of FIG. 375(a). is.

As shown in FIGS. 372 to 375, the sorting unit 980 rotates between a rear base 985, a front base 981 arranged on the player side of the rear base 985, and the front base 981 and the rear base. It mainly includes a distribution part 983 arranged in a possible state, and a cover member 987 arranged at a position corresponding to the distribution part 983 on the rear side of the rear base 985 .

The rear base 985 is made of a colored translucent (blue in this embodiment) resin material, and includes a plate-shaped base portion 985a and a plurality of openings (openings) passing through the base portion 985a in the thickness direction. 985b to 985g), a recessed portion 985h recessed on the other side of the plurality of openings in the direction of gravity (upper side in the direction of gravity), and a housing portion 986b and a projecting portion 986e projecting from the opposite surface of the recessed portion 985h. formed with.

The base portion 985a is formed in a vertically elongated rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and has a plurality of fastening holes 986c and 986d circularly penetrating the outer edge thereof, and an inclined surface inclined toward one side in the direction of gravity opposite to the front base 981 side. 986a. The fastening hole 986c is a hole into which a screw inserted through the front base 981, which will be described later, is screwed. Thereby, the front base 981 and the rear base 985 can be fastened and fixed. Further, the fastening hole 986d is a hole into which a screw for inserting a passage unit 990, which will be described later, is screwed. Thereby, the rear base 985 (distribution unit 980) and the passage unit 990 can be fastened and fixed.

The inclined surface 986a is formed at a position overlapping part of the openings 985b to 985f, which will be described later, on the other side in the gravitational direction. Also, the inclined surface 986a is formed at a position facing the inclined portion 982b of the front base 981 when the front base 981 and the rear base 985 are combined. As a result, the game ball flowing down in the direction of gravity can be guided toward the openings 985b to 985f. As a result, the game balls can be easily made to flow into the openings 985b to 985f.

The recessed portion 985h is recessed toward the opposite side of the front base 981 (the front side of the paper in FIG. 372(b)) and is formed substantially in the center of the base portion 985a in the lateral direction (horizontal direction in FIG. 372(b)). be done. Further, the recessed portion 985h is formed to have a size capable of accommodating a part of the distributing portion 983, which will be described later, inside, and has a bearing portion 985j projecting annularly from the bottom surface. The bearing portion 985j is a hole into which one end of the shaft member 988a that supports the distribution portion 983 is inserted, and is formed with an inner diameter larger than the outer diameter of the shaft member 988a.

The openings 985b and 985c are formed at both ends of the base portion 985a in the short direction, and the inner edge dimension is set larger than the diameter of the game ball. In addition, the openings 985b and 985c are formed such that the inner surface on one side in the direction of gravity (lower side in the direction of gravity) slopes downward toward the side opposite to the front base 981 side. Thereby, the game ball flowing in from the front base 981 side can be rolled to the side opposite to the front base 981 side.

The opening 985d is formed at substantially the center of the base portion 985a in the lateral direction (horizontal direction in FIG. 372(b)), and its position in the direction of gravity (vertical direction in FIG. 372(b)) is substantially the same as that of the openings 985b and 985c. position. Similarly to the openings 985b and 985c, the opening 985d is formed so that the inner surface on one side in the direction of gravity (lower side in the direction of gravity) slopes downward toward the side opposite to the front base 981 side. Thereby, the game ball flowing in from the front base 981 side can be rolled to the side opposite to the front base 981 side.

An opening 985e is formed between the openings 985b and 985d, and an opening 985f is formed between the openings 985c and 985d. In addition, the openings 985e and 985f are formed into space inflow passages 985e1 and 985f1 that open on the front base 981 side, and space discharge passages 985e3 and 985f3 that open on the side opposite to the front base 981 side. Intermediate passages 985e2 and 985f2 communicating with the passages 985e1 and 985f1 and the discharge passages 985e3 and 985f3 are mainly formed.

The inflow passages 985e1 and 985f1 are connected to a first passage TR1 and a second passage TR2 formed between a front base 981 and a rear base 985, which will be described later, and are sized to allow passage of game balls. be. Thereby, the game balls flowing down the first passage TR1 and the second passage can be made to flow into the inflow passages 985e1 and 985f1.

The intermediate passages 985e2 and 985f2 are formed to extend in the direction of gravity, and the other side in the direction of gravity (the upper side in the direction of gravity) communicates with the inflow passages 985e1 and 985f1, and are formed to have a size through which game balls can pass. . Thereby, game balls passing through the inflow passages 985e1 and 985f1 can be caused to flow into the intermediate passages 985e2 and 985f2.

Further, the intermediate passages 985e2 and 985f2 are formed with recessed portions 985f4 that are recessed in a direction substantially orthogonal to the throwing direction of the game ball (gravitational direction). The recessed portion 985f4 is a notch for arranging a detection device SE3, which will be described later, inside the recessed portion 985f4, and is set to have substantially the same external shape as the detection device SE3 when viewed from the rear. As a result, the detection device SE3 can be installed by inserting it from the rear side of the base portion 985a (the side opposite to the front base 981).

The detection device SE3 is a device for detecting passage of a game ball, and a detection hole SE1a having an inner diameter slightly larger than that of the game ball is formed through the detection device SE3 in its thickness direction. The detection hole SE1a is formed in either one or the other of the longitudinal directions of the detection device SE3, which is arranged in a horizontally long rectangular state when viewed from the rear. Alternatively, a detection substrate SE1b for controlling the detection device SE3 is disposed on one side.

In this embodiment, when the detection device SE3 detects the passage of the game ball, five prize balls are paid out and the lottery for the first symbol is executed. Corresponding to this lottery, the variable display of the third symbol is executed by the third symbol display device 81 .

Further, in the detection device SE3, the axial direction of the detection hole SE1a is set parallel to the extension direction of the intermediate passages 985e2 and 985f2, and the internal space of the detection hole SE1a and the space of the intermediate passages 985e2 and 985f2 substantially coincide. placed in position. As a result, when the game ball flows down from the other side (upper side in the direction of gravity) of the intermediate passages 985e2 and 985f2 to the one side (lower side in the direction of gravity), it can pass through the detection hole SE1a of the detection device SE3. can. Thereby, game balls passing through the first path TR1 and the second path TR2 can be detected.

In addition, since the detecting device SE3 is formed such that the axial direction of the detection hole SE1a is parallel to the direction of gravity, the dead weight of the game ball can be easily used when throwing the game ball to the detection hole SE1a. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game ball from being caught in the connecting portion between the intermediate passages 985e2 and 985f2 and the detection hole SE1a.

The recessed portions 985e4 and 985f4 are formed so as to be continuous with the spaces of the inflow passages 985e1 and 985f1 and the discharge passages 985e3 and 985f3. That is, the intermediate passages 985e2 and 985f2 are formed using the detection device SE3. As a result, it is possible to prevent the length dimension of the intermediate passages 985e2 and 985f2 from increasing in the gravitational direction. As a result, it is possible to suppress the rear base 985 from increasing in size in the direction of gravity.

The discharge passages 985e3 and 985f3 are connected to one side of the intermediate passages 985e2 and 985f2 in the gravitational direction (lower side in the gravitational direction) and are formed to have a size through which game balls can pass. Further, the discharge passages 985e3 and 985f3 are connected to a third insertion hole 991c and a fourth insertion hole 991d of the passage unit 990, which will be described later, when the distribution unit 980 and the passage unit 990 are combined. As a result, game balls passing through the intermediate passages 985e2 and 985f2 can flow into the discharge passages 985e3 and 985f3 and can be passed through the space to be thrown to the passage unit 990.

The opening 985g is formed on one side of the opening 985d in the gravitational direction (lower side in the gravitational direction). Similarly to the opening 985d, the opening 985g is formed such that the inner surface on one side in the direction of gravity (lower side in the direction of gravity) slopes downward toward the side opposite to the front base 981 side. As a result, the game ball flowing in from the front base 981 side can roll to the side opposite to the front base 981 .

The inflow passages 985e1 and 985f1 are connected to a first passage TR1 and a second passage TR2 formed between a front base 981 and a rear base 985, which will be described later, and are sized to allow passage of game balls. be. Thereby, the game balls flowing down the first passage TR1 and the second passage TR2 can be made to flow into the inflow passages 985e1 and 985f1.

The housing portion 986b is formed from a pair of semi-annular rings. Further, the accommodation portion 986b is a portion that accommodates a magnetic body 988b, which will be described later, inside, and its inner diameter is set to be substantially the same as the outer diameter of the magnetic body 988b that is formed in the cylindrical body. In addition, the projecting dimension of the accommodation portion 986b is set larger than the axial dimension of the magnetic body 988b. Thereby, the magnetic body 988b can be accommodated inside the accommodating portion 986b. In addition, since the accommodating portion 986b is formed of a pair of semi-annular bodies, even if the outer diameter of the magnetic body 988b is slightly increased due to a manufacturing error, the pair of semi-annular bodies can be elastically deformed. A magnetic material 988b can be provided.

The protruding portion 986e protrudes in a cylindrical shape from a position on the opposite side of the bearing portion 985j and the base portion 985a. In addition, the projecting portion 986e has a fastening hole recessed in a circular shape in its axis. The fastening hole is a hole into which the tip of a screw that passes through the cover member 987 described later is screwed. By screwing the screw while the cover member 987 is in contact, the cover member 987 is fastened to the rear base 985. can be fixed.

The magnetic body 988b is formed of a magnet, and can generate a magnetic field toward the front base 981 via the base portion 985a by being disposed in the housing portion 986b. As a result, a magnetic body 988c arranged in the distributing portion 983, which will be described later, is repelled, and the distributing portion 983 can be easily displaced.

The front base 981 is made of a colored translucent (blue in this embodiment) resin material. In addition, the front base 981 is formed in a substantially rectangular shape larger than the rear base 985 when viewed from the front, and includes a base plate 981a and a bulge bulging from the base plate 981a toward the player (opposite side to the rear base 986). It is mainly formed with an exit portion 982 .

The base plate 981a is formed as a plate member having a substantially rectangular shape when viewed from the front. 981f and a second guide wall 981d, a second insertion hole 981e penetrating near the first guide wall 981f and the second guide wall 981d, and a plate It mainly includes a through hole 981c penetrating in the thickness direction.

The insertion hole 981g is a hole for inserting a screw (not shown) that fastens the assembled ball feeding unit 970 to the base plate 60 (see FIG. 368), and is set to have an inner diameter larger than the outer diameter of the tip of the screw. .

The first guide walls 981f are formed in a semicircular annular shape, and are formed in a pair in the lateral direction with a bulging portion 982 (to be described later) sandwiched therebetween. In addition, the first guide wall 981f is formed with a semicircular open portion directed toward the approximate center in the width direction of the base plate 981a.

The second guide wall 981d is formed in an annular shape and is formed at two locations in the lateral direction of the base plate 981a. Further, the second guide wall 981d is formed below the bulging portion 982, which will be described later, in the gravitational direction, and a through hole 981c is formed between the two portions.

The first guide wall 981f and the second guide wall 981d are formed so that the inner edge shape thereof is substantially the same as the outer shape around the fastening hole 986c of the rear base 985 described above. As a result, when the front base 981 and the rear base 985 are combined, the walls around the fastening holes 986c can be inserted inside the first guide wall 981f and the second guide wall 981d. A guide wall 981d can be positioned.

The second insertion hole 981e is formed at the center of the semicircle of the first guide wall 981f and the center of the second guide wall 981d. The second insertion hole 981e is formed coaxially with the fastening hole 986c when the front base 981 and the rear base 985 are assembled. Thus, the front base 981 and the rear base 985 can be fastened.

The through hole 981c is formed in a square having one side larger than the diameter of the game ball. In addition, the through hole 981c is formed with a side wall portion 981b erected on the side opposite to the rear base 985 side (the front side of the paper in FIG. 372(a)) along the edge thereof. Also, the through hole 981c is a portion that communicates with the second winning opening 140 of the winning opening unit 930 described above. It is formed at a position overlapping the rolling direction of the game ball that has flowed into.

The side wall portion 981b is sized so that the upright front end surface contacts the second ball throwing portion 942c of the winning hole unit 930 when the winning hole unit 930 and the ball throwing unit 970 are attached to the base plate 60 . In addition, the side wall portion 981b has a rolling surface 981c1 on one side in the direction of gravity (lower side in the direction of gravity) located on the one side in the direction of gravity relative to the end surface 943a1 of the rolling portion 943a, and on the rear base 985 side. It is formed with a downward slope toward it (see FIG. 369).

Further, the side wall portion 981b has a projection 981b1 projecting from the upright tip surface. The protrusion 981b1 is formed at a position radially separated from the game ball in the gravity direction from the rolling surface 981c1. As a result, when a game ball is thrown from the end surface 943a1 of the rolling portion 943a to the rolling surface 981c1 of the through hole 981c, the game ball is less likely to be caught between the rolling portion 943a and the through hole 981c. A detailed description of the case where the game ball is thrown from the end surface 943a1 of the rolling portion 943a to the rolling surface 981c1 of the through hole 981c will be given later.

The bulging portion 982 is formed in a dome shape that bulges from the base plate 981a, and is set to a size that allows game balls to pass through the inside thereof, and game balls flowing in from the inflow port 982d pass through the inside thereof. and a first passage TR1 and a second passage TR2 branching from the ball throwing passage TR0. The bulging portion 982 is formed in a vertically elongated rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and is bent and erected toward the back base 985 at a position approximately in the middle of an inlet 982d formed by notching the upper end in the direction of gravity. and recessed portions 982e to 982j provided at a plurality of locations on the other side in the gravitational direction.

The inflow port 982d is cut out in a substantially U-shape when viewed from the front. In addition, the inlet 982d has an inner edge portion aligned with the rolling direction of the game ball that has flowed into the first winning port 64 of the winning port unit 930 when the winning port unit 930 and the ball throwing unit 970 are attached to the base plate 60. formed at overlapping positions.

In addition, the inlet 982d has a second protrusion 982d1 that protrudes in the opposite direction to the rear base 985 at the edge on the other side in the direction of gravity (upper side in the direction of gravity). The second protrusion 982d1 is formed in the shape of the inner edge of the first recessed portion 942g1 of the winning hole unit 930 described above. The second protrusion 982d1 abuts against the inner edge of the recessed portion 942g1.

Also, the distance dimension L14 (see FIG. 372(a)) from the second protrusion 982d1 to the end surface of the inlet 982d on one side in the direction of gravity (lower side in the direction of gravity) is It is set larger than the distance L35 (see FIG. 450(b)) to the inner edge of the portion 942g on one side in the direction of gravity. As a result, when the game ball thrown to the first ball-throwing portion 942g through the first winning port 64 flows into the inflow port 982d, the inflow port 982d (bulging portion 982) and the first ball-throwing portion 942g It can be difficult to get caught in between.

The standing wall 982a is formed in a rectangular shape separated from the outer edge shape of the bulging portion 982 by a predetermined distance when viewed from the front. The standing wall 982a is formed on the lower side of the inlet 982d in the gravitational direction and includes a contact portion 982a1 formed in a triangular shape when viewed in the standing direction on the upper side in the gravitational direction.

The standing wall 982a is set so that the inner edge of the outer peripheral portion of the bulging portion 982 and the horizontal distance L16 (see FIG. 375(b)) are set to be larger than the diameter of the game ball. A first passage TR1 and a second passage TR2 are formed which are spaces through which the .

The first path TR1 and the second path TR2 are formed on the downstream side of a sorting section 983, which will be described later, and a game ball passing through the sorting section 983 is thrown to one of them. The sorting unit 983 is set to alternately throw game balls flowing into the inflow port 982d to the first passage TR1 and the second passage TR2. As a result, it is possible to prevent the throwing of game balls flowing into the first winning hole 64 from becoming monotonous. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from losing interest.

A bearing portion 982c that annularly protrudes from the inner surface of the bulging portion 982 toward the rear base 985 is formed on the other side (upper side in the gravity direction) of the standing wall 982a. The bearing portion 982c is a portion that supports the other end side of a shaft member 988a that pivotally supports the distributing portion 983, which will be described later, and has an inner diameter set substantially equal to the outer diameter of the shaft member 988a. Therefore, by inserting the shaft member 988a into the bearing portion 982c, the other end side of the shaft member 988a can be supported.

Further, as described above, one end of the shaft member 988a is inserted into the bearing portion 985j of the rear base 985. Therefore, when combining the front base 981 and the rear base 985, one end of the shaft member 988a is inserted into the bearing portion 985j. The shaft member 988a can be supported between the front base 981 and the rear base 985 by inserting the shaft member 988a and inserting the other end side of the shaft member 988a into the bearing portion 982c.

The abutting portion 982a1 is formed on the rotational locus of the distributing portion 983, which will be described later, and the amount of rotational displacement of the distributing portion 983 is regulated by the action portion 983a of the distributing portion 983 coming into contact with the contact portion 982a1. A detailed description of the contact state between the contact portion 982a1 and the distribution portion 983 will be given later.

The recessed portion 982e and the recessed portion 982f are recessed in a direction substantially orthogonal to the extending direction of the first passage TR1 and the second passage TR2 from the inner surface of the bulging portion 982 on one side in the gravitational direction (lower side in the gravitational direction).
A first branch passage BK1 or a second branch passage BK2, which is a space communicating with the first passage TR1 or the second passage TR2, is formed inside the recess 982e and the recess 982f.

The first branch passage BK1 communicates with the opening 985b of the rear base 985 when the front base 981 and the rear base 985 are combined. Therefore, the first branch path BK1 is formed to be able to receive game balls flowing down the first path TR1, and allows the received game balls to flow into the opening 985b of the rear base 985.

The second branch passage BK2 communicates with the opening 985c of the rear base 985 when the front base 981 and the rear base 985 are combined. Therefore, the second branch path BK2 is formed to be able to receive game balls flowing down the second path TR2, and allows the received game balls to flow into the opening 985c of the rear base 985.

The recessed portion 982h and the recessed portion 982j are recessed from the inner surface of the bulging portion 982 on one side in the gravitational direction (lower side in the gravitational direction) in the extending direction of the first passage TR1 and the second passage TR2. That is, the first passage TR1 and the second passage TR2 extend to one side in the gravity direction by the amount of the recess 982h and the recess 982j.

The first passage TR1 communicates with the opening 985e of the rear base 985 when the front base 981 and the rear base 985 are combined. Therefore, the first passage TR1 allows the game balls that have flowed into the inflow port 982d to flow into the opening 985e of the rear base 985. As shown in FIG.

The second passage TR2 communicates with the opening 985f of the rear base 985 when the front base 981 and the rear base 985 are combined. Therefore, the second passage TR2 allows the game balls that have flowed into the inflow port 982d to flow in, and allows the flowed game balls to flow into the opening 985f of the rear base 985. As shown in FIG.

The recessed portion 982g is formed between the recessed portion 982h and the recessed portion 982j, and the recessed direction is set parallel to the extending direction of the first passage TR1 and the second passage TR2. A third branch passage BK3, which is a space communicating with the first passage TR1 and the second passage TR2, is formed inside the recess 982g. Therefore, since the third branch passage BK3 communicating with the first passage TR1 and the second passage TR2 is formed between the first passage TR1 and the second passage TR2, the size reduction of the sorting unit 980 can be achieved. .

The third branch passage BK3 communicates with the opening 985d of the rear base 985 when the front base 981 and the rear base 985 are combined. Therefore, the third branch path BK3 is formed to be able to receive game balls flowing down the first path TR1 or the second path TR2, and allows the received game balls to flow into the opening 985d of the rear base 985. .

The inclined portion 982b is formed on one side of the bulging portion 982 in the direction of gravity (lower side in the direction of gravity) and extends toward the one side in the direction of gravity while being inclined toward the rear base 985 side. Also, the inclined portion 982b is formed at a position facing the opening 985f from the opening 985b in a state in which the front base 981 and the rear base 985 are combined. As a result, the game ball flowing down the first path TR1, the second path TR2, the first branch path BK1, the second branch path BK2 and the third branch path BK3 is brought into contact with the inclined portion 982b, thereby causing the game ball to flow down. can be guided to the side of the openings 985b to 985f to facilitate the flow into the openings 985b to 985f.

The guide portions 982h1 and 982j1 are connected to the recessed portions 982h and 982j and the inclined portion 982b, and the upright tip surfaces are inclined downward toward the rear base 985 side (FIG. 372(b) front side of the paper surface). As a result, the game ball flowing down the first passage TR1 and the second passage TR2 is brought into contact with the standing tip end surfaces of the guide portions 982h1 and 982j1, guided toward the opening 985e and the opening 985f, and guided toward the opening 985e and the opening. It is easy to flow into 985f.

Further, the guide portions 982h1 and 982j1 are formed in connection with the inclined portion 982b. As a result, the game ball flowing down the first path TR1 and the second path TR2 is brought into contact with the inclined portion 982b and guided toward the rear base 985, and collides with the guide portions 982h1 and 982j1, thereby causing the game ball to collide with the opening 985e. and the opening 985f. Furthermore, since the standing distance of the guide portions 982h1 and 982j1 can be reduced by the inclination of the inclined portion 982b, the rigidity of the guide portions 982h1 and 982j1 can be increased to improve durability.

Here, as described above, the sorting unit 980 (ball throwing unit 970) is made visible to the player through the front unit 940 (winning unit 930) arranged on the player side. Therefore, the game balls flowing down the first passage TR1 and the second passage TR2 are difficult to be visually recognized from the player's side because they pass through the front unit 940 . Further, when the guide portions 982h1 and 982j1 are erected on the front side of the opening 985e and the opening 985f, the thickness of the guide portions 982h1 and 982j1 causes game balls flowing down the first passage TR1 and the second passage TR2 to play. There is a problem that it becomes difficult for a person to visually recognize.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the guiding portions 982h1 and 982j1 are formed so as to be connected to the inclined portion 982b, so that the standing dimension of the inclined portion 982b can be reduced. Therefore, it is possible to make the game balls thrown to the openings 985e and 985f (the game balls flowing down the first passage TR1 and the second passage TR2) easier to see even when the front unit 940 is interposed. That is, in the present embodiment, the inclined portion 982b is inclined so as to be positioned closer to the back base 985 as the game ball flows down, thereby ensuring rigidity and guiding the game ball. Since the thickness in the front-rear direction of the portions 982h1 and 982j1 can be reduced, the visibility of the game ball can be ensured.

The distribution part 983 is set to have a thickness slightly smaller than the dimension between the front base 981 and the rear base 985 facing each other, and is formed in a substantially T shape when viewed from the front. In addition, the sorting portion 983 penetrates through an acting portion 983a on one side of the T-shape, an intermediate plate 983b projecting from approximately the center position of the extending direction of the acting portion 983a, and a connection portion between the acting portion 983a and the intermediate plate 983b. a contact portion 983d that bulges out in a circular shape about the axis of the through hole 983c; and are formed mainly.

The through hole 983c is a hole into which a shaft member 988a supported between the front base 981 and the rear base 985 is inserted, and is formed to have a slightly larger outer diameter than the shaft member 988a. As a result, when the front base 981 and the rear base 985 are assembled, by inserting the shaft member 988a into the through hole 983c of the distribution section 983, the front base 981 and the rear base 985 can be assembled while the distribution section 983 is rotatable. 985.

The intermediate plate 983b extends outward in the radial direction of the through-hole 983c, and in a state in which the displacement of the distributing portion 983 is regulated by rotating in one direction or the other, the intermediate plate 983b extends from the distal end of the intermediate plate 983b. The spaced distance L17 (see FIG. 375(b)) to the inside is set to a dimension smaller than the diameter of the game ball. As a result, the throwing of the game ball is restricted to one or the other of the first passage TR1 and the second passage TR2. Further, the intermediate plate 983b rotates the distributing portion 983 about the through hole 983c, thereby restricting the throwing of game balls to one side of the first passage TR1 to the other side of the second passage TR2. can be switched to a regulated state.

The acting portion 983a is formed to extend in a direction substantially orthogonal to the extending direction of the intermediate plate 983b when viewed from the front. In addition, the connecting position of the action portion 983a with the contact portion 983d is set on one side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction) than the connecting position with the contact portion 983d of the intermediate plate 983b. As a result, the game ball sent to the distribution section 983 through the inflow port 982d is put in a state where the load is applied to the action section 983a. As a result, the distribution part 983 is rotationally displaced around the through hole 983c.

The wall portion 983e is connected to the action portion 983a and the intermediate plate 983b, and is formed in a substantially semicircular plate shape when viewed in the axial direction of the through hole 983c. The wall portion 983e is formed so as to protrude outward from the action portion 983a and the intermediate plate 983b in a direction perpendicular to the axis of the through hole 983c, and has a thickness larger than that of the concave portion 985h of the rear base 985 described above. set small. Therefore, in a state where the distribution part 983 is arranged between the rear base 985 and the front base 981 facing each other, the wall part 983e can be arranged inside the recess 985h. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game ball thrown into the sorting unit 980 from the inflow port 982d from being caught in the concave portion 985h, thereby preventing the game ball from flowing down.

In addition, the wall portion 983e includes a housing portion 983e1 recessed toward the intermediate plate 983b on the rear side of the intermediate plate 983b and at the radially outer end portion from the through hole 983c. The accommodation portion 983e1 is a portion that accommodates the magnetic body 988c formed in a columnar body inside, and is recessed in a circular shape with an inner diameter that is approximately the same as the outer diameter of the magnetic body 988c. Further, the accommodating portion 983e1 is recessed from the rear base 985 side toward the front base 981 side, and the magnetic body 988c is accommodated inside from the rear base 985 side.

The magnetic body 988c is made of a magnet and arranged in a state of repulsion with the magnetic body 988b arranged on the rear base 985 . As a result, the distributing portion 983 receives a magnetic force from the magnetic body 988b arranged on the rear base 985, rotates about the through hole 983c, and rotates the extending direction of the acting portion 983a to one side or the other side. can be tilted to

Further, since the magnetic body 988c and the magnetic body 988b are disposed in a repulsive state and the housing portion 983e1 is recessed toward the front side, the magnetic body 988c inserted into the housing portion 983e1 can be prevented from escaping from That is, since a portion for locking the magnetic body 988c inserted into the housing portion 983e1 is not required, the structure of the distributing portion 983 can be simplified, and the arrangement of the magnetic body 988c to the distributing portion 983 can be simplified.

The magnetic forces of the magnetic bodies 988b and 988c are set to magnetic attraction forces smaller than the load of the game ball. As a result, it is possible to prevent game balls thrown inside the distribution unit 980 from being magnetically attached to the magnetic bodies 988b and 988c and stagnating inside the distribution unit 980 .

The cover member 987 is formed in a vertically long rectangular shape when viewed from above, and is arranged on the opposite side of the recess 985h of the rear base 985 from the front base 981 side. In addition, the cover member 987 is formed with two first recessed portions 987a and a second recessed portion 987b that are recessed in the direction of gravity in a circular shape when viewed from the front.

The first recessed portion 987a is a portion that accommodates the accommodation portion 986b of the rear base 985 described above inside, and is set to have an inner diameter that is approximately the same as the outer diameter of the accommodation portion 986b. Therefore, by accommodating the tip of the accommodation portion 986b in the first concave portion 987a while the magnetic body 988b is accommodated inside the accommodation portion 986b as described above, the magnetic substance 988b accommodated inside the accommodation portion 986b can be accommodated. It is possible to prevent it from slipping out of the portion 986b.

The second recessed portion 987b has a through hole 987b1 for fastening and fixing to the rear base 985 on the bottom surface of the recessed portion. Further, the inner shape of the recessed portion of the second recessed portion 987b is formed to have substantially the same inner diameter as the outer diameter of the projecting portion 986e of the rear base 985 described above. As a result, the cover member 987 can be positioned by accommodating the second concave portion 987b in the projecting portion 986e of the rear base 985, and in the positioned state, the screw can be inserted into the fastening hole of the projecting portion 986e through the through hole 987b1. can be concluded.

Next, referring to FIG. 376, the operation of the sorting section 983 when game balls flow into the sorting unit 980 from the inflow port 982d will be described. Figures 376(a) and 376(b) are partially enlarged cross-sectional views of the sorting unit 980 in the range XIIIa of Figure 375(b). In the following description, the acting portion 983a of the distribution portion 983 is displaced from the state of restricting the throwing of the game ball to one side of the first path TR1 to the state of restricting the throwing of the game ball to the other side of the second path TR2. Only the case will be described, and the description of the case of restricting the throwing of a game ball to one side of the first path TR1 from the state of restricting the throwing of a game ball to the other side of the second path TR2 will be omitted.

As shown in FIGS. 376(a) and 376(b), before the game ball is thrown to the distribution section 983 (before the game ball comes into contact with the action section 983a), as described above, it is distributed to the distribution section 983. The provided magnetic body 988c repels the magnetic body 988b (see FIG. 373), so that the intermediate plate 983b radially outward from the through hole 983c is inclined toward the second passage TR2. The amount of rotation is regulated by the action portion 983a on the second passage TR2 side coming into contact with the contact portion 982a1 of the front base 981 (see FIG. 376(a)).

When the game ball is thrown to the sorting section 983 in this state, the game ball is thrown between the intermediate plate 983b and the action section 983a on the side of the first passage TR1. As described above, the connecting position of the action portion 983a with the contact portion 983d is set to one side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction) than the connecting position of the intermediate plate 983b with the contact portion 983d. The load of the game ball can be applied to the acting portion 983a on the side of the first passage TR1.

As a result, as shown in FIG. 376(b), the sorting portion 983 is rotationally displaced about the through hole 983c, and the intermediate plate 983b radially outward from the through hole 983c is tilted toward the first passage TR1. It is said that The amount of rotation is regulated by the action portion 983a on the side of the first passage TR1 coming into contact with the contact portion 982a1 of the front base 981. As shown in FIG. Also, in this case, the repelling direction of the magnetic body 988c is switched from a state in which the intermediate plate 983b on the radially outer side of the through hole 983c acts toward the second passage TR2 to a state in which it acts toward the first passage TR1.

Therefore, the distribution part 983 can be rotationally displaced around the through hole 983c using the load of the game ball and the repulsive force of the magnetic body 988c. Moreover, since the direction of the repulsive force of the magnetic body 988c is switched, the rotating state of the distribution part 983 can be maintained. Therefore, each time a game ball is thrown, the sorting section 983 displaces the inclination direction of the intermediate plate 983b to throw the game ball one by one to the first passage TR1 and the second passage TR2.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 377 to 379, the configuration of passage unit 990 will be described. 377(a) is a front view of the passage unit 990, and FIG. 377(b) is a side view of the passage unit 990. FIG. 378 is an exploded perspective front view of the passageway unit 990, and FIG. 379 is an exploded perspective rear view of the passageway unit 990. FIG.

As shown in FIGS. 377 to 379, the passage unit 990 includes a first passage member 991 having a plurality of openings opened on the sorting unit 980 side, and a first passage member 991 arranged in the first passage member 991. A second passage member 992 that throws a game ball that passes through, a third passage member 993 that is disposed in the second passage member 992 and throws a game ball that has passed through the second passage member 992, Detecting device SE4 arranged between three passage members 993 is mainly provided.

The first passage member 991 is formed in a horizontally long rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and is formed with a predetermined width on the second passage member 992 side. In addition, the first passage member 991 includes a first insertion hole 991a formed through the sorting unit 980 on the other side in the direction of gravity (upper side in the direction of gravity), and one side of the first insertion hole 991a in the direction of gravity (lower side in the direction of gravity). side), a third through hole 991c and a fourth through hole 991d formed on both sides of the second through hole 991b in the horizontal direction, and an outer periphery in a front view. A plurality of circular through-holes 991f are formed through the through-holes 991f.

The first insertion hole 991a is formed in a square having one side larger than the diameter of the game ball when viewed from the front. In addition, the first insertion hole 991a is formed at a position where the opening 985d of the distribution unit 980 and the internal space are connected when the distribution unit 980 and the passage unit 990 are combined. Thereby, the game ball flowing down inside the distribution unit 980 and passing through the opening 985d can be received in the first insertion hole 991a.

The first insertion hole 991a is formed such that the inner surface on one side in the direction of gravity (lower side in the direction of gravity) is inclined downward toward the second passage member 992 side. Thereby, the game ball sent to the first insertion hole 991a can be rolled toward the second passage member 992 side.

Furthermore, an annular protrusion 991g having a fastening hole 991g1 into which a screw for inserting the second passage member 992 is screwed is formed in the first insertion hole 991a so as to be connected to the outer peripheral portion. Thereby, the first passage member 991 and the second passage member 992 can be fastened and fixed.

The second insertion hole 991b is formed in a vertically long rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and the width dimension in the lateral direction is set larger than the diameter of the game ball. In addition, the second insertion hole 991b is formed at a position where the opening 985g of the distribution unit 980 and the internal space are connected when the distribution unit 980 and the passage unit 990 are combined. Thereby, the game ball flowing down the inside of the distribution unit 980 and passing through the opening 985g can be received in the second insertion hole 991b.

In addition, the second insertion hole 991b is formed such that the inner surface on one side in the direction of gravity (lower side in the direction of gravity) is inclined downward toward the second passage member 992 side. Thereby, the game ball sent to the second insertion hole 991b can be rolled toward the second passage member 992 side.

The third insertion hole 991c is formed in a vertically long rectangle when viewed from the front, and the width dimension in the lateral direction is set larger than the diameter of the game ball. In addition, the third insertion hole 991c is formed at a position where the internal space of the opening 985e of the distribution unit 980 continues when the distribution unit 980 and the passage unit 990 are combined. Thereby, the game ball flowing down the inside (first passage TR1) of the distribution unit 980 and passing through the opening 985e can be received in the third insertion hole 991c.

Further, the third insertion hole 991c is provided with recessed portions 991c1 recessed on both sides in the horizontal direction on the other side in the direction of gravity (upper side in the direction of gravity). The recessed portion 991c1 is a portion that accommodates the detection substrate SE1b of the detection device SE3 arranged in the sorting unit 980, and is formed to have approximately the same dimensions as the outer shape of the detection device SE3. As a result, the detection substrate SE1b side of the detection device SE3 can be protected by the concave portion 991c1, and the detection device SE3 can be prevented from being illegally operated from the outside while the sorting unit 980 and the passage unit 990 are combined. can.

Furthermore, when the distribution unit 980 and the passage unit 990 are combined, the detection substrate SE1b of the detection device SE3 arranged in the distribution unit 980 can be received inside the concave portion 991c1 of the passage unit 990. and the passage unit 990 can be positioned. As a result, it is possible to prevent a part of the detection device SE3 from protruding outside, and to reduce the size of the ball throwing unit 970 as a whole.

The third insertion hole 991c has a projecting portion 991c2 projecting from the second insertion hole 991b side on the inner edge on the second passage member 992 side, and the inner surface on one side in the direction of gravity (lower side in the direction of gravity) is horizontally adjacent. It is inclined downward in a direction away from the matching second insertion hole 991b. As a result, the game ball that has flowed into the third insertion hole 991c can collide with the projecting portion 991c2 and roll in the direction away from the second insertion hole 991b (leftward in FIG. 377(a)).

The fourth insertion hole 991d is formed in a vertically long rectangle when viewed from the front, and the width dimension in the lateral direction is set larger than the diameter of the game ball. In addition, the fourth insertion hole 991d is formed at a position where the internal space of the opening 985f of the distribution unit 980 continues when the distribution unit 980 and the passage unit 990 are combined. Thereby, the game ball flowing down the inside (second passage TR2) of the distribution unit 980 and passing through the opening 985f can be received in the fourth insertion hole 991d.

Further, the fourth insertion hole 991d is provided with recessed portions 991d1 recessed on both sides in the horizontal direction on the other side in the direction of gravity (upper side in the direction of gravity). The recessed portion 991d1 is a portion that accommodates the detection board SE1b of the detection device SE3 arranged in the sorting unit 980, and is formed to have approximately the same dimensions as the outer shape of the detection device SE3. As a result, the detection substrate SE1b side of the detection device SE3 can be protected by the concave portion 991d1, and the detection device SE3 can be prevented from being illegally operated from the outside while the sorting unit 980 and the passage unit 990 are combined. can.

Further, the fourth insertion hole 991d has a projecting portion 991d2 projecting from the second insertion hole 991b side on the inner edge on the second passage member 992 side, and the inner surface on one side in the direction of gravity (lower side in the direction of gravity) is horizontal. is inclined downward in a direction away from the adjacent second insertion hole 991b. As a result, the game ball that has flowed into the fourth insertion hole 991d can collide with the projecting portion 991d2 and roll in the direction away from the second insertion hole 991b (rightward in FIG. 377(a)).

The second passage member 992 is formed in a substantially T-shaped plate shape that is upside down when viewed from the front, and has a fifth insertion hole 992b penetrating to the other side in the direction of gravity (upper side in the direction of gravity) and the fifth insertion hole. It mainly includes a sixth insertion hole 992c penetrating to one side (lower side in the gravity direction) of 992b in the direction of gravity, and a standing wall 992a erected on the inner peripheral edge of the fifth insertion hole 992b.

The fifth insertion hole 992b is formed in a vertically long rectangle when viewed from the front, and the width dimension in the lateral direction is set larger than the diameter of the game ball. In addition, the fifth insertion hole 992b is formed at a position where the internal space of the first insertion hole 991a of the first passage member 991 continues when the first passage member 991 and the second passage member 992 are combined. Thereby, the game ball passing through the first insertion hole 991a of the first passage member 991 can be received in the fifth insertion hole 992b.

The erected wall 992a is erected from the entire edge portion of the fifth insertion hole 992b toward the third passage member 993 side. The standing wall 992a is formed such that the inner surface on one side in the direction of gravity (lower side in the direction of gravity) is inclined downward toward the third passage member 993 side. As a result, the game ball sent to the fifth insertion hole 992b can roll toward the third passage member 993 (the right side in FIG. 377(b)).

An engaging portion 992d that protrudes horizontally and a protruding wall 992e that protrudes horizontally from the end on the first passage member 991 side are formed on the outer peripheral surface of the standing wall 992a. The engaging portion 992d is formed in an L shape that protrudes in the horizontal direction and whose tip is bent toward the third passage member 993 side. In the engagement portion 992d, wirings of the detection device SE4 and the detection device SE3 arranged in the sorting unit 980 are inserted between the engagement portion 992d and the standing wall 992a. As a result, the wires of the detection device SE3 and the detection device SE4 can be locked, so that the detection device SE3 and the detection device SE4 can be prevented from slipping out of the sorting unit 980 and the passage unit 990 .

The protruding wall 992e is formed to protrude in a semicircular shape in a front view from both sides of the standing wall 992a in the horizontal direction, and has a through hole 992e1 passing through the axis of the semicircle. Further, the projecting wall 992e is formed at a position facing the annular projection 991g of the first passage member 991 when the first passage member 991 and the second passage member 992 are combined, and the through hole 992e1 It is positioned coaxially with the fastening hole 991g1. Accordingly, by inserting a screw through the through hole 992e1 from the second passage member 992 side and screwing the screw into the fastening hole 991g1, the first passage member 991 and the second passage member 992 can be fastened and fixed.

The sixth insertion hole 992c is formed in a square having one side larger than the diameter of the game ball when viewed from the front. Further, the sixth insertion hole 992c is formed at a position where the internal space thereof communicates with the internal space of the second insertion hole 991b of the first passage member 991 when the first passage member 991 and the second passage member 992 are combined. be. Thereby, the game ball passing through the second insertion hole 991b of the first passage member 991 can be received in the sixth insertion hole 992c.

A guide wall 992c1 standing toward the third passage member 993 is formed around the sixth insertion hole 992c. The guide wall 992c1 is connected to a first wall portion 992c2 erected on one side of the sixth insertion hole 992c in the direction of gravity (lower side in the direction of gravity) and an end portion of the first wall portion 992c2 in the extending direction. and a second wall portion 992c3 extending in the direction.

The first wall portion 992c2 and the second wall portion 992c3 are wall surfaces for positioning the detection device SE4. The dimensions are set to be substantially the same as the dimensions on the opposite side of the detection device SE4.

Further, the detection device SE4 is arranged at a position where the internal space of the detection hole SE1a is connected to the internal space of the sixth insertion hole 992c. As a result, the game ball passing through the sixth insertion hole 992c passes through the detection hole SE1a, is detected by the detection device SE4, and is sent to the third passage member 993 side.

In addition, the second passage member 992 has an annular projection 992f projecting toward the third passage member 993 at a position separated from the sixth insertion hole 992c in the horizontal direction (horizontal direction in FIG. 377(a)). The annular protrusion 992f has a circular fastening hole 992f1 on its axis. The fastening hole 992f1 is a hole into which a screw inserted through the third passage member 993 is screwed, whereby the second passage member 992 and the third passage member 993 can be fastened and fixed.

The first insertion hole 991a is formed in a square having one side larger than the diameter of the game ball when viewed from the front. In addition, the first insertion hole 991a is formed at a position where the opening 985d of the distribution unit 980 and the internal space are connected when the distribution unit 980 and the passage unit 990 are combined. Thereby, the game ball flowing down inside the distribution unit 980 and passing through the opening 985d can be received in the first insertion hole 991a.

The first insertion hole 991a is formed such that the inner surface on one side in the direction of gravity (lower side in the direction of gravity) is inclined downward toward the second passage member 992 side. Thereby, the game ball sent to the first insertion hole 991a can be rolled toward the second passage member 992 side.

Furthermore, an annular protrusion 991g having a fastening hole 991g1 into which a screw for inserting the second passage member 992 is screwed is formed in the first insertion hole 991a so as to be connected to the outer peripheral portion. Thereby, the first passage member 991 and the second passage member 992 can be fastened and fixed.

The second insertion hole 991b is formed in a vertically long rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and the width dimension in the lateral direction is set larger than the diameter of the game ball. In addition, the second insertion hole 991b is formed at a position where the opening 985g of the distribution unit 980 and the internal space are connected when the distribution unit 980 and the passage unit 990 are combined. Thereby, the game ball flowing down the inside of the distribution unit 980 and passing through the opening 985g can be received in the second insertion hole 991b.

In addition, the second insertion hole 991b is formed such that the inner surface on one side in the direction of gravity (lower side in the direction of gravity) is inclined downward toward the second passage member 992 side. Thereby, the game ball sent to the second insertion hole 991b can be rolled toward the second passage member 992 side.

The third passage member 993 is formed in the shape of a horizontally long rectangular plate when viewed from the front. The third passage member 993 includes a seventh insertion hole 993a penetrating substantially in the middle position in the longitudinal direction, a guide wall 993b erected from the edge of the seventh insertion hole 993a, and an edge on the other side in the direction of gravity. Mainly comprising an upright wall 993e erected from the second passage member 992 side, an engaging portion 993d projecting in the longitudinal direction, and a recessed portion 993c recessed in the side surface of the second passage member 992 side. It is formed.

The seventh insertion hole 993a is formed in a square having one side larger than the diameter of the game ball when viewed from the front. Also, the seventh insertion hole 993a is formed at a position that communicates with the internal space of the detection device SE4 disposed in the second passage member 992 when the second passage member 992 and the third passage member 993 are combined. Thereby, the game ball passing through the seventh insertion hole 993a of the second passage member 992 and the detection hole SE1a of the detection device SE4 can be received in the seventh insertion hole 993a.

The guide wall 993b is erected from the edges of the seventh insertion hole 993a in three directions except for the gravity direction other side (gravitational direction upper side) toward the side opposite to the second passage member 992 side. In addition, the guide wall 993b is formed such that the inner surface on one side in the direction of gravity (lower side in the direction of gravity) is inclined upward toward the second passage member 992 (inclined downward toward the side opposite to the second passage member 992). be done. As a result, the game ball sent to the seventh insertion hole 993a can roll to the side opposite to the second passage member 992 (the right side in FIG. 377(b)).

Also, as shown in FIG. 377(b), the third passage member 993 is disposed on one side of the wall 992a of the second passage member 992 in the direction of gravity (lower side in FIG. 377(b)). As described above, the third passage member 993 is open on the other side in the gravitational direction (the upper side in FIG. 377(b)), so that the third passage member 993 can be disposed closer to the standing wall 992a. As a result, the opening 985d and the opening 985g of the sorting unit 980 can be brought close to each other, and the sizes of the sorting unit 980 and the passage unit 990 in the direction of gravity can be reduced.

When the second passage member 992 and the third passage member 993 are combined, the upright wall 993e has a distance dimension between the opposing first wall portion 992c2 of the second passage member 992 and the detection hole of the detection device SE4. It is set to be substantially the same as the short side distance dimension in the direction perpendicular to the axis of the SE1a. Accordingly, the detection device SE4 can be positioned in the gravitational direction.

In addition, a first wall portion 992c2 for positioning the lower side of the detection device SE4 in the direction of gravity is formed on the upstream side (the side of the second passage member 992) where game balls are thrown. As a result, the game ball passing through the sixth insertion hole 992c can be easily inserted into the detection hole SE1a of the detection device SE4.

That is, the detection hole SE1a is formed to have a dimension slightly larger than the diameter of the game ball for the purpose of preventing fraud by the player. In this embodiment, the first wall portion 992c2 for positioning the lower side of the detection device SE4 in the direction of gravity is located on the upstream side (second passage member 992 side) where the game ball is thrown. Since it is formed, it is possible to suppress positional deviation of the height of the sixth insertion hole 992c, the detection hole SE1a, and the rolling surface. As a result, it is possible to easily insert the game ball that is inserted through the sixth insertion hole 992c through the detection hole SE1a.

The engaging portion 993d is formed to protrude in the longitudinal direction of the third passage member 993, and has a bent portion 993d1 bent toward the second passage member 992 at the projecting tip. In the state where the second passage member 992 and the third passage member 993 are combined, the bent portion 993d1 has a distance dimension between the opposing second wall portion 992c3 of the second passage member 992 and the detection hole SE1a of the detection device SE4. It is set to be substantially the same as the distance dimension on the long side in the direction orthogonal to the axis of . This makes it possible to position the detection device SE4 in the horizontal direction.

The recessed portion 993c is formed at a position facing the annular projection 992f of the second passage member 992 when the second passage member 992 and the third passage member 993 are combined, and has an outer diameter of the annular projection 992f. It is formed with an inner edge shape that is larger than the Further, the recessed portion 993c has a through hole 993c1 which is formed through the bottom surface of the recessed portion coaxially with the fastening hole 992f1 of the annular projection 992f. As a result, the annular protrusion 992f of the second passage member 992 is inserted into the concave portion 993c, and a screw is inserted through the through hole 993c1 from the third passage member 993 side and screwed into the fastening hole 992f1, whereby the second passage is closed. The member 992 and the third passage member 993 can be fastened and fixed.

According to the ball-throwing unit 970 configured as described above, the ball-throwing unit 970 is formed from a unit different from the first prize-winning port 64 and the second prize-winning port 140, and the first prize-winning port 64 and the second prize-winning port 140 Since it is arranged on the back side of the front unit 940 (opposite side of the game area), by replacing the ball throwing unit 970 (distribution unit 980) and arranging another unit, Another game form is possible without affecting the flow of the ball.

<Eighteenth Embodiment>
Next, the eighteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 380 to 432. FIG. In the seventeenth embodiment, the case where the first passage TR1 and the second passage TR2 of the sorting unit 980 are formed as passages that guide the ball backward without causing it to move forward has been described. Unit 300 is configured to allow forward movement of the ball. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

First, the details of the configuration of the game board 13 will be described with reference to FIGS. 380 to 398, and then the details of the configuration of the operation unit 500 will be described with reference to FIGS. 399 to 432. FIG.

FIG. 380 is a front exploded perspective view of the game board 13 and the action unit 500 in the eighteenth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 380, the center frame 86 arranged inside the game board 13 has an internal opening, and the player can visually recognize the operation unit 500 through the internal opening of the center frame 86. .

In addition to this, in the present embodiment, the base plate 60 of the game board 13 is made of a light-transmissive resin material, so the view through the inner opening of the center frame 86 is not limited. The operation unit 500 can be visually recognized through the base plate 60 located outside the .

381 is a front view of the game board 13, FIG. 382 is a rear view of the game board 13, FIG. 383 is a front perspective view of the game board 13, and FIG. It is a diagram. FIG. 381 also shows the windmill FS1 and nail KG1, which are not shown in FIG.

In this embodiment, as will be described later, an upper connecting member 270 is provided that substitutes for the function of the nail to distribute the downflow path of the balls, and the nail KG1 is arranged in the range where the upper connecting member 270 is arranged. do not have.

This avoids the impermeability of nail KG1 acting as a drawback.
In other words, by removing the nail KG1 from the position above the center frame 86 where the upper connecting member 270 is arranged (the position above the center frame 86 and below the outer rail 62), the position above the center frame 86 Since the light passing through the center frame 86 can be prevented from being reflected in various directions by the nail KG1 or blocked, the visibility of the light performance at the upper position of the center frame 86 can be improved. In addition, the aspect of the light production at the upper position of the center frame 86 will be described later.

In FIG. 382, the shape of the central opening 60b of the base plate 60 is formed so as to be recessed upward at the center position in the left and right direction, and the electric circuit board 251 connected to the decorative electrical board 251 arranged in the recessed portion is shown in FIG. A sensor cover 254 is shown that is also utilized to hold wire DH1.

As shown in FIG. 382, at the lower position of the center frame 86, on the back side of the base plate 60, there is a collecting gutter 480 that constitutes a flow-down path of the balls that enter the general prize winning opening 63, and an upper part of the collecting gutter 480. and a wide decorative member 490 formed in a shape that straddles the rear side of the first prize winning port 64 and is fastened and fixed.

The collecting gutter 480 is made of a colorless and transparent resin material. Accordingly, it is possible to prevent the gathering gutter 480 from blocking the incidence of light from the rear side. In addition, it is possible to improve the visibility of the ball entering the general prize winning opening 63 and flowing down the collecting gutter 480 when viewed from the front.

The wide decorative member 490 is made of a colored and transparent (blue in this embodiment) resin material.
As a result, the wide decorative member 490 can be conspicuous to the player who views the game area from the front.

The wide decorative member 490 has insertion holes 491 for fastening screws at its left and right ends. A fastening screw to be screwed into the collecting gutter 480 is inserted through the insertion hole 491 , and the wide decorative member 490 is fastened and fixed to the collecting gutter 480 by the fastening screw. As a result, attention to the wide decorative member 490 can be connected to attention to the ball flowing down the collecting gutter 480 .

The wide decorative member 490 has a pair of left and right inclined portions formed at the same angle of inclination as the plate-shaped portion (ceiling plate portion 455) behind the plate-shaped portion (ceiling plate portion 455) on which the ball rolls above the general winning opening 63. 492 , and a central forming portion 493 extending in the left-right direction on the left and right inner sides of the inclined forming portion 492 .

The slope forming portion 492 is arranged so that the upper surface of the member is along the plate-like portion (ceiling plate portion 455 ) on which the ball rolls above the general prize winning opening 63 when viewed from the front. Therefore, even if the plate-like portion for rolling the ball is formed of a colorless and transparent resin material, it can be seen as if the ball is rolling on the inclined forming portion 492 when viewed from the front. It is possible to facilitate grasping of the flow path.

The central forming portion 493 constitutes a ceiling portion of a flow-down path (an inclined extension portion 315 described later) of a ball entered into the first winning hole 64 . As a result, it is possible to prevent the ball from falling out of the flow-down path, and even if the flow-down path of the ball that has entered the first prize winning port 64 is made of a colorless and transparent resin material, the colored transparent The central forming portion 493 made of the resin material of (1) makes it easy to grasp the flow-down path of the ball in a front view.

In FIG. 383, resin members such as an upper connecting member 270 formed of a light-transmissive resin material having a portion projecting into the game area and a winning opening forming member 400 above and below the center frame 86 are illustrated. ing. These resin members have the effect of stably maintaining the flow-down state of the ball, which will be described later in detail. In FIG. 383, illustration of the nail KG1 and the windmill FS1 is omitted.

To explain the outline first, a common effect of the resin members such as the upper connecting member 270 and the prize winning opening forming member 400 is that they can be easily repaired when cracked or chipped. This effect is an effect that cannot be obtained when using a metal nail that is commonly used.

In the case of nails that are embedded in the base plate 60, the nails can bend or break, such as when a ball hits them or an operator accidentally overloads the nail. If it is bent, it may be possible to restore it by bending it in the opposite direction, but if it is broken, it is difficult to restore it to its original state.

In the first place, the driving of nails into the base plate 60 is performed by an automatic machine, and it is common to drive the nails into the entire game board collectively rather than driving them individually one by one. Therefore, even if only one nail is damaged, it is difficult to re-strike the single damaged nail while other nails are implanted, and the entire base plate 60 must be replaced. there is a possibility.

At this time, since the rails 61 and 62, the outer edge member 73, and the like are assembled to the base plate 60, these assembled members may be reassembled to the replacement base plate 60, or these members may be replaced. In any case, repair costs tend to increase.

On the other hand, when a part of the resin members such as the upper connecting member 270 and the prize winning opening forming member 400 is cracked or chipped, the repair can be completed by replacing it with a new member, and the base plate 60 is replaced. you don't have to. In addition, since the resin members are independent of the rails 61, 62, the outer edge member 73, and the like, there is no cost associated with the rails 61, 62, the outer edge member 73, etc. when replacing the resin members. can be suppressed.

In FIG. 384, regarding the electrical board 251 and the board holding plate 252 arranged on the upper part of the center frame 86, the board holding plate 252 is arranged so as to enter the plate thickness dimension of the base plate 60, and the board holding plate 252 Although the illustration shows that the electrical board 251 arranged on the front side is arranged so as to be accommodated within the thickness dimension of the base plate 60, the details will be described later.

As shown in FIG. 384, a plurality of fitting portions 60c are provided so as to protrude from the back side of the base plate 60 and tapered toward the back side. The fitting portion 60 c has a female thread formed on the inner diameter side, and functions as a portion into which a fastening screw is screwed when fastening and fixing the operation unit 500 to the base plate 60 .

385 is an exploded front perspective view of the game board 13, and FIG. 386 is an exploded rear perspective view of the game board 13. FIG. As shown in FIGS. 385 and 386, the game board 13 includes a base plate 60, a central structural unit 240 disposed inside the base plate 60 and having a center frame 86, and an upper portion of the central structural unit 240. An upper connecting member 270 that connects with the base plate 60 and restricts the flowing direction of the balls flowing down the game area, and a thin plate member 290 arranged between the upper connecting member 270 and the central structural unit 240. .

Details of the central structural unit 240 will be described later, but as shown in the enlarged view of FIG.

387 is an exploded front perspective view of central configuration unit 240, and FIG. 388 is an exploded rear perspective view of central configuration unit 240. FIG. The central structural unit 240 is a unit that is assembled in an annular shape when it is arranged in the central opening 60b of the base plate 60, has a center frame 86, and guides the downflow of the ball.

The central structural unit 240 includes an upper structural member 241 forming the upper portion of the center frame 86 and a lower forming member 261 forming the lower portion of the center frame 86 . The upper component member 241 and the lower component member 261 respectively form upper and lower halves of a ring shape from a light-transmitting resin material, so that in the assembled state (see FIG. 381), the third pattern display device is surrounded in front view. A center frame 86 is constructed.

In this manner, by forming the center frame 86 in an annular shape by combining a plurality of members instead of forming the center frame 86 in an annular shape by itself, it is possible to reduce the size of the resin mold required for molding the resin member. . Thereby, the manufacturing cost of the resin mold can be suppressed.

For example, the shape of the upper edge portion of the central opening 60b of the base plate 60 is substantially arcuate, instead of the upwardly recessed shape corresponding to the shape of the thin plate portion 242 at the left-right central portion as in the present embodiment. When the design of the base plate 60 is changed so that the lower half (lower side As for the component 261), a member designed according to this embodiment can be used.

As a result, it is necessary to newly manufacture a large mold that encompasses the entire center frame 86 in order to change the design of the base plate 60 or to make a minor change by changing the shape of the center frame 86 to change its appearance. Since there is no mold, the mold cost can be reduced.

The upper component member 241 includes a thin plate portion 242 that is flush with the front surface of the base plate 60 in the assembled state (see FIG. 381), and a belt-like extension extending from the front side of the thin plate portion 242. A band-shaped frame portion 245 is formed between the unit 16 (see FIG. 364) so as to prevent the ball from passing therethrough and is formed so as to be able to guide the flow of the ball. and a decorative portion 247 that is provided and forms a substantially arc shape.

The thin plate portion 242 is used for positioning and fixing the extension portion 243 extending to the back side for reinforcement at the left, right, and upper edge portions and the upper connecting member 270 (see FIGS. 385 and 386). and a fixing portion 244 .

The extending portion 243 is designed such that its front-to-rear width is approximately the same as the thickness of the base plate 60 . That is, the front-rear thickness of the thin plate portion 242 whose front-rear width is shorter than that of the extension portion 243 is designed to be thinner than the plate thickness of the base plate 60 . This makes it easier to secure a space on the back side of the thin plate portion 242 .

The fixing part 244 includes a recessed part 244a that is recessed for positioning with the upper connecting member 270 (see FIGS. 385 and 386), and a recessed part 244a that is arranged close to the recessed part 244a and protrudes toward the front side. A projecting portion 244b and a fastening portion 244c into which a fastening screw inserted from the front side of the upper connecting member 271 is screwed are provided at symmetrical positions.

The thin plate portion 242 is arranged flush with the base plate 60, and the projecting portion 244b can be formed from any position on the front side. Therefore, it is possible to improve the degree of freedom in designing positioning with the upper connecting member 270 (see FIGS. 385 and 386). The assembly of the upper connecting member 270 using the fixing portion 244 will be described later.

The decorative portion 247 is formed with a plurality of three-dimensional patterns and figures, and is formed so as to have lower light transmittance than the thin plate portion 242 . As a result, the decorative portion 247 can be used as a portion that divides the field of view while leaving some light transmittance.

So far, the configuration of the front side of the upper component member 241 has been mainly described. Next, the configuration arranged on the back side of the upper component member 241 will be described. The upper component member 241 includes an electrical board 251 that is fastened and fixed to a fastening portion formed on the back side of the thin plate portion 242, and a board holding plate 252 that is fastened together with a fastening screw that fastens and fixes the electrical decorative board 251. , a dish-shaped member 253 sandwiched between the decorative substrate 251 and the thin plate portion 242 and formed in a dish shape that widens toward the front side, and a decorative portion on one of the left and right sides (the right side in this embodiment) of the upper component member 241. and a sensor cover 254 fastened and fixed at a position on the back side of 247 .

The substrate holding plate 252 does not have a symmetrical shape, and the lower right portion is omitted compared to the left side. This facilitates the connection of the electrical wiring DH1 (see FIG. 382) passed from the sensor cover 254 side. That is, the connection terminal 251a of the electrical board 251 is arranged on the back surface of the lower right side of the board, and the shape of the board holding plate 252 is designed so that the electrical wiring DH1 can be easily connected to this position. It is

Further, the substrate holding plate 252 is provided with a recessed portion 252a that is recessed in a curved shape that protrudes upward at the left-right central position. The recessed portion 252a is a portion formed for the purpose of improving the degree of freedom of arrangement of the operation unit 500, and the details thereof will be described later.

The sensor cover 254 has a capacitive sensor (for example, a sensor capable of detecting that the player has put his/her hand over the front side of the glass unit 16) inside, and a fixing device for fixing the capacitive sensor. It is a member. In this embodiment, it is also used not only for fixing the capacitance sensor, but also as a relay portion of the electrical wiring DH1 connected to the electrical board 251 .

That is, by fixing the electrical wiring DH1 to the hook-shaped portion formed on the electrical decoration substrate 251 with a binding band or the like, the electrical wiring DH1 can be held at the back position of the decorative portion 247 . As a result, the electric wiring DH1 can be hidden so that it is difficult for the player to see it. By holding the arrangement of the electric wiring DH1 using the sensor cover 254 in this way, compared to the case of preparing a dedicated member for holding the arrangement of the electric wiring DH1, the number of assembly man-hours can be reduced. Material cost can be reduced.

The lower component member 261 includes a thin plate portion 262 fastened and fixed to the front surface of the base plate 60 in the assembled state (see FIG. 381), and a belt-like extension portion 263 extending from the thin plate portion 262 to the rear side in a belt shape. and a rear covering portion 264 which is fastened and fixed to a fastening portion formed at the extending end portion of the belt-shaped extension portion 263 and which covers the rear side of the belt-shaped extension portion 263 so as to block it, and the left and right of the thin plate portion 262. A pair of left and right flow path front forming parts 265 that are fastened and fixed to the front side of the lower end and form a flow-down path for flowing the ball to the back side between the thin plate part 262 and the back side of the left and right lower ends of the thin plate part 262. A pair of left and right flow paths that are fastened and fixed to the flow path front structure part 265 and are combined with the semi-structure parts protruding left and right inside from the thin plate part 262 to guide the ball to the upper surface of the belt-shaped extension part 263. and a rear component 266 .

The belt-shaped extension 263 has an upper surface portion that slopes down toward the center of the left and right sides, and functions to return the rolling ball to the front side of the base plate 60 . At the left-right central part of the belt-shaped extension part 263, there is a central rear inclined part 263a which is inclined downward to the back side so that the ball whose velocity in the left and right direction has stopped flowing to the back side, and both left and right sides of the central rear inclined part 263a A pair of left and right front inclined portions 263b, which are arranged slightly below the center rear inclined portion 263a and are inclined downward to the front side so that the ball whose velocity in the left and right direction has settled down can be easily flowed to the front side, and the central rear inclined portion 263a. A ball discharge hole 263c is formed through the base plate 60 so that the ball guided to the front side of the back surface covering part 264 after flowing down to the side can be discharged to the front side of the base plate 60. - 特許庁

In relation to the belt-like extension 263, the back surface covering part 264 basically blocks the ball so as to prevent it from falling off from the back-side end of the belt-like extension 263, but is behind the central rear inclined part 263a. , a gap is formed between the belt-like extension 263 and the ball to allow the ball to flow downward. The ball guided to the front side through this gap is discharged from the ball discharge hole 263c.

The ball discharge hole 263c is arranged at the center position in the left and right direction, and the first winning hole 64 is provided below it (see FIG. 381). The ball enters the first winning hole 64 with a higher probability than the ball approaching the first winning hole 64 while being repelled by KG1. Therefore, when a ball is guided by the strip-shaped extension part 263, the attention to the ball can be improved.

The flow path front forming part 265 forms a guide path that guides the ball flowing down the front side of the thin plate part 262 to the back side, and the flow path rear forming part 266 forms the rear end surface of the guide path to guide the ball. is guided to the upper surface of the strip-shaped extension portion 263 . In other words, the front channel forming portion 265 and the rear channel forming portion 266 form a tunnel-shaped portion through which the balls that have flowed in from the front side of the base plate 60 are discharged to the upper surface of the strip-shaped extension portion 263 .

Returning to FIGS. 385 and 386, description will be made. The upper connecting member 270 is a member made of a light-transmitting resin material, and has a thin plate-like portion 271 and a base end of the plate-like portion 271 that protrudes from the back side to the front side. Projecting portions 272 to 277, a thin portion 278 formed partially thin on the back side of the plate-like portion 271, and a protruding portion 279 formed so as to protrude on the back side of the thin portion 278. , provided.

The plate-like portion 271 is formed in a symmetrical arcuate shape that is long in the left-right direction when viewed from the front, and the shape of the lower edge portion follows the shape of the upper edge portion of the center frame 86 . In addition, the plate-like portion 271 has a curved upper edge. It is shaped to be parallel to the tangents of 62 corresponding points.

The outer rail 62 and the plate-like portion 271 are spaced apart by a diameter of a ball (game ball) (see FIG. 381). As a result, it is possible to easily avoid a situation in which the ball rolling along the outer rail 62 collides with the plate-like portion 271 and loses momentum.

That is, the ball introduced into the game area is configured to leave the outer rail 62 before it collides with the plate-like portion 271 . In other words, as long as the ball is in contact with the outer rail 62 , the ball will not collide with the plate-shaped portion 271 . It is possible to avoid that the ball that contacts and rolls collides with the plate-like portion 271 and that the momentum is attenuated.

As a result, unnecessary attenuation of the ball can be avoided, and the plate-like part 271 can be prevented from cracking or chipping due to collision of the ball with the maximum firing intensity with the plate-like part 271 .

Note that the interval between the outer rail 62 and the plate-like portion 271 is not limited to the interval about the diameter of the sphere, and various modes are exemplified. For example, considering the shape of the sphere, the distance between the sphere and the plate-like portion 271 may be varied in the front-rear direction (the distance increases as the distance from the base plate 60 increases) so as to avoid collision between the sphere and the plate-like portion 271 . In this case, the space between the plate-like portion 271 and the outer rail 62 on the side closer to the base plate 60 can be narrowed, so that when decorating the plate-like portion 271, the area for forming the decoration can be increased. .

The protruding portions 272 to 277 are bilaterally symmetrical with respect to the lateral center of the plate-like portion 271 from a laterally symmetrical position with respect to the lateral center of the plate-like portion 271, and extend from the back side of the plate-like portion 271 to the front. Sidewardly projecting parts, each of which replaces the function of a nail.

From the left-right center side, they are referred to as a first projecting portion 272, a second projecting portion 273, a third projecting portion 274, a fourth projecting portion 275, a fifth projecting portion 276, and a sixth projecting portion 277. do.

The first projecting portion 272 and the second projecting portion 273 are arranged in front of the central structural unit 240 via the thin plate member 290 . The third protruding portion 274 is arranged to straddle the central structural unit 240 and the base plate 60 . The fourth projecting portion 275 , the fifth projecting portion 276 and the sixth projecting portion 277 are arranged in front of the base plate 60 .

As described above, since each of the projecting portions 272 to 277 is arranged on the front side of which member differs, the function and design concept may differ, but the details will be described later.

The thin portion 278 is a portion formed thin by displacing the back surface of the thin plate member 290 toward the front side by the thickness of the thin plate member 290 or by a dimension slightly exceeding the thickness dimension. In this embodiment, instead of holding the thin plate member 290 by applying a pressing force from the thin portion 278 to the thin plate member 290, a fixing portion 244 (see FIG. 385) holds the thin plate member 290. is doing.

It should be noted that the amount of displacement of the back surface of the plate in the thin portion 278 toward the front side is not limited to the case where the thickness is equal to or larger than the thickness of the thin plate member 290, and various aspects are exemplified. For example, the deviation of the plate back surface to the front side may be designed to be less than the thickness dimension of the thin plate member 290 . In this case, by forming the thin plate member 290 to be expandable (compressible) in the thickness direction, it is possible to easily fix the arrangement of the thin plate member 290 while avoiding applying excessive pressure to the thin plate member 290. can be done.

Further, for example, only the portion corresponding to the edge of the thin plate member 290 may be configured to reduce the deviation of the plate back surface of the thin portion 278 toward the front side. In this case, the range where pressure is applied to the thin plate member 290 can be limited to the edge portion of the thin plate member 290 .

The projecting portion 279 is a portion inserted into a positioning hole 291 drilled in the thin plate member 290 and is a projecting portion for positioning the thin plate member 290 . Since recesses (hollows) corresponding to the shapes of the overhanging portions 272 and 273 are formed on the back side of the arrangement position of the first overhanging portion 272 or the second overhanging portion 273 in the thin portion 278, from this position Projecting portion 279 cannot be projected. That is, the projecting portion 279 is projected from a position of the thin portion 278 that avoids the arrangement of the first projecting portion 272 and the second projecting portion 273 .

The thin plate member 290 is a member formed in a thin plate shape (sheet shape) from a light-transmitting resin material. and a plurality of insertion holes 292 drilled as holes for inserting fastening screws to be fastened and fixed to the component unit 240 .

The positioning holes 291 include holes 291a formed on the left and right outer sides through which the projecting portions 244b of the central structural unit 240 are inserted, and holes 291b formed on the left and right inner sides through which the projecting portions 279 of the upper connecting member 270 are inserted. , provided. That is, the thin plate member 290 is used for positioning with both the central structural unit 240 and the upper connecting member 270 .

In this embodiment, the left and right outside means the left and right edge sides of the game board 13 or the action unit 500 when viewed from the front, and the left and right inside means the left and right center sides of the game board 13 or the action unit 500 when viewed from the front. means.

As shown in FIGS. 385 and 386, the projecting portion 244b is formed at a position facing the recessed portion on the back side of the second projecting portion 273. As shown in FIGS. Therefore, the projecting portion 244b is hidden behind the second overhanging portion 273 when viewed from the front. As a result, while the visibility of the projecting portion 244b is reduced, the projecting portion 244b can position the thin plate member 290 (positionally stabilize).

As shown in FIGS. 385 and 386, by forming projections 279 instead of holes in the upper connecting member 270, positioning can be performed without problems even in the narrow range of the boundary position between the projecting portions 272 and 273. can constitute a part of In other words, when a through hole or recess is formed in a narrow range, there is a possibility that the thickness of the member will be excessively thin and the strength will be insufficient, but this situation can be avoided.

In other words, it is possible to easily avoid restrictions on the arrangement of the projecting portions 272 and 273 and reduction in strength due to the positioning portion of the thin plate member 290 . That is, when a positioning hole is formed at the boundary position between the protrusions 272 and 273, the width of the boundary position between the protrusions 272 and 273 must be equal to or greater than the width of the hole (the hole is circular). If the shape is larger than the diameter), and there is a possibility that the strength of the overhanging portions 272 and 273 will be reduced by the amount of material scraped by the hole, according to this embodiment, these problems are solved. Points can be easily resolved.

On the other hand, as described above, since the back surfaces of the projecting portions 272 and 273 are recessed, the protruding portion 279 cannot be formed. Since this can be dealt with by protruding the projecting portion 244b, the positioning portions (projecting portions 244b, 279) of the thin plate member 290 can be arranged without being restricted by the arrangement of the overhanging portions 272, 273. .

As described above, according to the present embodiment, by forming the projecting portions 244b and 279 for positioning the thin plate member 290 on both the central unit 240 and the upper connecting member 270, the upper connecting member 270 can be freely designed. Since it is possible to avoid restricting the arrangement of the positioning portion of the thin plate member 290 while maintaining high strength and strength, the position of the thin plate member 290 can be stabilized.

Further, by designing the projecting portion 279 inserted through the thin plate member 290 to be able to be inserted into the recessed portion 244 a of the central component unit 240 , the thin plate member 290 can be attached to the central component unit 240 and the upper connecting member 270 . , the upper connecting member 270 can be positioned with respect to the central unit 240 at the same time.

The thin plate member 290 is a member that can be visually recognized by the player through the upper connecting member 270 . Although not shown on purpose, in this embodiment, patterns, figures, letters or characters are drawn in rich colors on the front surface of the thin plate member 290, and the LEDs arranged on the illumination board 251 of the central structural unit 240 emit light. Depending on the difference in the light emission mode (differences in color and brightness mode) of the light emitted, the color and brightness mode viewed through the thin plate member 290 change variously.

Unlike the case where patterns, figures, characters or characters are directly drawn on the base plate 60, according to this embodiment, the patterns, figures, characters or characters drawn on the thin plate member 290 can be drawn from the game board 13 by removing the thin plate member 290. Since it can be removed, the appearance of the game board 13 can be easily changed.

For example, when the shape of the game board 13 is the same, but the playability is changed (so-called specification difference), patterns, figures, letters or characters drawn on the game board 13, colors, etc. are changed, In some cases, it is possible for the player to easily grasp the playability.

When a pattern, figure, character or character is directly drawn on the base plate 60, it is necessary to replace the whole base plate 60, so it is easy to replace the entire game board 13 substantially, and the cost for changing the game characteristics is increased. Easy to bulk.

On the other hand, according to this embodiment, it is sufficient to replace the thin plate member 290 with another thin plate member 290 having a different drawn pattern, figure, character or character, or a different color. None. Therefore, it is possible to easily suppress the cost for changing game characteristics.

389 is an enlarged front view of the game board 13 in the range XXVI of FIG. 381, FIG. 390 is a partial cross-sectional view of the game board 13 taken along line XXVII-XXVII of FIG. 389, and FIG. 391 is XXVIII of FIG. - It is a partial cross-sectional view of the game board 13 along the XXVIII line.

As shown in FIG. 389, the protruding parts 272 to 277 are formed with individual shapes, and when a ball introduced into the game area collides, the momentum of the ball is reduced and They have a common purpose of causing the ball to flow down to the left and right sides of the center frame 86 .

Projections 272 to 277 are formed as substitutes for nails that have conventionally been implanted in a similar arrangement. That is, each projecting portion 272 to 277 is designed so as to surround a plurality of nails to be implanted when viewed from the front.

As can be seen in common with the first projecting portion 272, the second projecting portion 273, and the third projecting portion 274, the upper side surface is formed wider than the other side surfaces. Thereby, regardless of the position on the upper surface, the ball on which the ball is placed can flow in the same direction along the slope of the upper surface. As a result, even if the adjustment of the shooting force is somewhat deviated, the ball can be easily made to flow down along a similar flow path, so that the stress during the game of the player who wants the ball to flow down along the same path can be alleviated.

Since the third protruding portion 274 and the fourth protruding portion 275 are arranged adjacent to each other, a slight shift in the adjustment of the shooting force of the ball changes which direction the ball reaches. The slope of the upper side is very different. That is, the upper surface of the third overhanging portion 274 is a descending surface that gently inclines inward in the left and right direction, whereas the upper surface of the fourth overhanging portion 275 inclines sharply inward in the left and right direction. It is formed as a descending slope.

Therefore, the ball that reaches the upper surface of the fourth overhanging portion 275 and flows down bounces upward greatly when colliding with the center frame 86, and tends to lose momentum. Therefore, it is easy to flow down toward the out port 71 or toward the general winning port 63 without reaching the first winning port 64 on the downstream side of the game area.

On the other hand, the ball that reaches the upper surface of the third protruding portion 274 and flows down collides with the center frame 86 in the left and right direction, and the load in the rebounding direction can also be used as the momentum of the flow down. It is easy to reach the first winning opening 64. - 特許庁

That is, the shapes of the overhanging portions 272 to 276 are designed so that the flow of the ball on the downstream side of the game area changes depending on which overhanging portion 272 to 276 the ball reaches. As a result, the player can be motivated to adjust the shooting force of the ball.

As shown in FIGS. 390 and 391, the base plate 60 and the extended portion 243 of the central unit 240 are separated from each other by gaps CL1 and CL2 approximately equal to the plate thickness of the thin plate portion 242 of the central unit 240. designed to be placed

That is, the design idea is not to position the central structural unit 240 in the central opening 60b of the base plate 60, but to leave a gap between the central opening 60b of the base plate 60 and the central structural unit 240, and the upper connecting member 270 is provided. The design is based on the design concept that the central structural unit 240 is aligned with the base plate 60 at the same time as the fastening and fixing (connection) by the base plate 60 are performed.

As shown in FIGS. 390 and 391, the thin plate member 290 and the central structural unit 240 are arranged on the rear surface of the first projecting portion 272, while the base plate 60 is arranged on the rear surface of the third projecting portion 274. As shown in FIGS. is placed. Thus, the members arranged on the rear surface of the overhangs 272-277 are not all the same and may be different.

As shown in FIG. 390, since the thin plate portion 242 of the central structural unit 240 is formed to be thin, for example, when a load is applied to the first projecting portion 272, bending deformation occurs in the first projecting portion 272. In this case, the thin plate portion 242 of the central structural unit 240 can also bend and deform, so that the load applied to the first projecting portion 272 can be absorbed. This can reduce the possibility that the first projecting portion 272 will be cracked or chipped.

Therefore, for example, when a ball collides with the first protruding portion 272, even if the force of the ball is very large, the bending deformation of the first protruding portion 272 and the thin plate portion caused by the bending deformation may occur. The flexural deformation of 242 can sufficiently reduce the momentum of the ball, so that the falling of the ball after colliding with the first projecting portion 272 can be calmed down.

The flexural deformation of the thin plate portion 242 is likely to occur due to the adoption of the structure in which the gaps CL1 and CL2 are provided between the thin plate portion 242 and the base plate 60 instead of the structure in which the thin plate portion 242 and the base plate 60 are fitted as described above. . That is, in this embodiment, by providing the gaps CL1 and CL2 between the thin plate portion 242 and the base plate 60, the central structural unit 240 is flexurally deformed, thereby relieving the load applied to the first projecting portion 272. be able to.

A similar action can be expected for the second projecting portion 273 as well. The load applied to the first protruding portion 272 includes the load due to the collision of the game balls, the load applied by the game machine store clerk when resolving the ball clogging in the game area, and the worker who performs the maintenance work. It is assumed that the load is applied from

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 391, the base plate 60 is formed thick enough not to bend. Although the deformation cannot be expected to relieve the load, the height position of the third overhanging portion 274 is lower than the overhanging portions 272 and 273, so the momentum of the colliding ball is relatively small. Therefore, even with the configuration in which the third projecting portion 274 is arranged in front of the base plate 60, the possibility of the third projecting portion 274 being cracked or chipped can be reduced.

Furthermore, considering that if the momentum of the ball colliding with the third protruding portion 274 is excessively reduced at a point where the momentum of the colliding ball is relatively small, the downward flow of the ball may be stopped. The embodiment employs a configuration in which the third projecting portion 274 is arranged in front of the base plate 60 .

In addition, since the bending of the third overhanging portion 274 is suppressed and the state is stable, the center frame 86 is distributed to the left and right sides of the center frame 86 as a game area in which nails are implanted. Since ball guidance can be stabilized in an arrangement close to the left and right regions and the lower region, it is possible to stabilize the correspondence between the launch intensity of the ball and the manner in which the ball flows down.

In addition, in order to reliably avoid cracking or chipping of the third projecting portion 274, the third projecting portion 274 may be given the angle of collision with the ball, the shape of the third projecting portion 274, and the like. It is preferable to design so that the load becomes small (so that the load can easily escape). A similar design concept is preferably adopted for the fourth protruding portion 275 to the sixth protruding portion 277 as well.

Advantages of using the projecting portions 272 to 277 as substitutes for the nails KG1 implanted in the base plate 60 will be described. In particular, the performance effect can be improved. That is, in the case of the protruding portions 272 to 277 formed of a light-transmissive resin material, there are fewer portions that blind the player compared to the metal nail KG1.

For example, as in the present embodiment, even if the decorative board 251 and the thin plate member 290 are arranged on the rear side of the overhanging portions 272 and 273 (see FIG. 390), the overhanging portions 272 and 273 do not emit light. Since the light is transmitted, the player should be able to easily see the light emitted from the light-emitting means such as the LED arranged on the decorative board 251 and the pattern, figure, character or character drawn on the thin plate member 290. can be done.

The illumination board 251 includes a central light emitting means 251b composed of four LEDs arranged at the center of the lower side, and seven LEDs arranged to surround the left, right and upper sides of the central light emitting means 251b. Ambient light emitting means 251c composed of LEDs and distant light emitting means 251d composed of two LEDs arranged near both left and right ends are provided. illustrated. The light irradiation directions of the light emitting means 251b, 251c, and 251d are not necessarily unified, and the targets to be illuminated are different.

The central light emitting means 251b emits light in the forward direction (the optical axis is in the front-rear direction), and illuminates the symbol mark (illustrated in white in FIG. 389) at the left-right central portion of the decorative portion 247 of the central structural unit 240. In order to illuminate the entire symbol mark faintly, it is designed so that the width angle of the irradiation direction with respect to the optical axis of the light emitted from the central light emitting means 251b is large.

The ambient light emitting means 251c emits light in the front direction (the optical axis is in the front-rear direction), and emits light to portions having a width in the front-rear direction, such as the band-shaped frame portion 245 and the edges of the projecting portions 272 and 273. arranged for introduction. The optical axis of the light emitted from the surrounding light emitting means 251c is used as a reference in order to concentrate the energy of the light on the optical axis so that the light visually recognized by the player does not become weak after passing through the part with a long width in the front-rear direction. The width angle of the irradiation direction is designed to be small.

As a result, the path of light (the path of light passing through the band-shaped frame portion 245 and the protruding portions 272 and 273) is directly conspicuous by the way of adding brightness and darkness to the light and the change in color, and there is a difference in how it is made conspicuous. You can perform a production that puts on. For example, by making a difference in brightness between the left and right sides, it is possible to perform a lighting effect that implicitly indicates the direction in which the ball is to be shot.

For example, the LEDs of the surrounding light emitting means 251c arranged behind the lower edge 272a of the first projecting portion 272 guide light from the lower edge 272a of the first projecting portion 272 to the left and right outer edges 272b. positioned to illuminate. As a result, the player can easily reach the left and right outer edges 272 b of the first projecting portion 272 by shooting the ball using the light of the first projecting portion 272 as a mark. The optical axis of the light passes through the position where the front-rear width of the first projecting portion 272 is long, and the light can be easily totally reflected inside the first projecting portion 272 .

In addition, since the inner shape of the first projecting portion 272 is curved so that the rear portion protrudes inward, the light traveling inside the first projecting portion 272 is reflected by the first projecting portion 272. The light can be repeatedly reflected inside, and the light can be easily collected inside the first protruding portion 272 . This allows the first protruding portion 272 to emit light brighter than its surroundings when viewed from the front.

As shown in FIG. 390, the electrical board 251 is arranged on the back side of the thin plate portion 242 of the central structural unit 240 . In this embodiment, at the rear surface of the upper connecting member 270 in the range where the ball is guided on the front side, the thick portion of the base plate 60 (thickness portion required for driving the nail KG1) is within the thickness dimension (front-back direction). (within the dimensions). That is, the front and rear positions of the electrical board 251 are set closer to the front side than the front and rear positions of the back side surface of the thick portion of the base plate 60 .

This is an impossible substrate arrangement in the range where the nail KG1 as a component for guiding the ball is driven into the base plate 60. FIG. In other words, in the range where the nail KG1 is driven, the base plate 60 must be formed to be sufficiently thick. A space for arranging the electrical board 251 cannot be secured on the front side of the position.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, a thin upper connecting member 270 is adopted as a part for guiding the ball instead of the nail KG1, and the central opening 60b of the base plate 60 is arranged on the back surface of the upper connecting member 270. Instead, by arranging the thin plate portion 242 of the central structural unit 240, a space for arranging the electrical board 251 is secured on the back side of the range in which the ball is guided.

As a result, compared to the case where the electrical board 251 has to be arranged on the back side of the base plate 60, the degree of freedom in designing the arrangement of the electrical board 251 can be improved, and the electrical board 251 can be arranged. You can move the placement forward.

By moving the arrangement of the electric decoration board 251 to the front side, it is possible to easily move the arrangement of the rotation effect device 800 (see FIG. 380) of the operation unit 500 arranged on the back side of the game board 13 to the front side, Since the central light-emitting means 251b and the peripheral light-emitting means 251c arranged on the decoration board 251 and the light sources arranged in the rotating effect device 800 are arranged on the front side, the light to be visually recognized by the player is made brighter. can do.

The distant light emitting means 251d has a direction in which light is emitted (optical axis direction) intersecting the front-rear direction (the direction indicated by the arrow in FIG. , the band-shaped frame portion 245, the outer rail 62, and the like are arranged so as to irradiate the light.

As a result, even in the configuration of the present embodiment in which a thick portion of the base plate 60 is formed to ensure strength and the projecting portions 274 to 276 are arranged in front of the thick portion, distant light emission can be achieved. The projecting portions 274 to 276 can be sufficiently illuminated using the light irradiation from the means 251d.

In particular, in this embodiment, since the electrical board 251 is closer to the front end side than the rear end of the plate thickness of the base plate 60 (arranged within the plate thickness dimension), it is possible to It is possible to make it easier for the light emitted in the direction intersecting the direction to reach the fifth protruding portion 276 away from the left and right outer sides.

The shape of the protrusions 274 to 276 that receive the light from the distant light emitting means 251d is devised so as to easily ensure the amount of light. That is, for example, in the third protruding portion 274, the side surface 274a on the side of the distant light emitting means 251d (left and right inner and upper side surfaces) is formed broadly so as to receive the light from the distant light emitting means 251d. .

In addition, on the opposite side (right-left outer side and lower side) of the distant light emitting means 251d, a corner portion 274b is formed at the connection position between the surfaces, and the cut formed in the protruding portion 274 is cut into the corner portion 274b. It is formed from a shape that concentrates As a result, it is possible to secure the light emission intensity even at the corner 274b away from the distant light emitting means 251d.

It should be noted that the irradiation of light to the sixth overhanging portion 277 is not the light irradiation from the electrical board 251, but the thin plate portions 242 arranged on the left and right inner sides of the sixth overhanging portion 277 when viewed from the front (left and right instead of left and right center). This is performed by light passing through the outer thin plate portion 242) toward the front side.

In addition, the light emitting effect of the sixth overhanging portion 277 is also performed by light emitted from the rotating member 810 of the rotating effect device 800 described later. The configuration and setting of strength will be described later.

Returning to FIG. 383, description will be made. As shown in FIG. 383, the winning openings 63, 64, etc. arranged below the center frame 86 are formed as part of a winning opening forming member 400 made of a light-transmissive resin material.

392 is an exploded front perspective view of the game board 13, and FIG. 393 is an exploded rear perspective view of the game board 13. FIG. Figures 392 and 393 show the disassembled state of the prize winning opening forming member 400. As shown in Figs.

The prize winning opening constituent member 400 includes a central constituent member 410 fastened and fixed to the base plate 60 at the left and right central portion of the game board 13, and a covering member 430 configured to cover the lower portion of the central constituent member 410 from the front side. a left component member 450 arranged on the left side of the central component member 410 and fastened and fixed to the base plate 60, and a right component member 470 arranged on the right side of the central component member 410 and fastened and fixed to the base plate 60; Prepare. The right component member 470 and the left component member 450 are formed in a substantially bilaterally symmetrical shape.

The central structural member 410 includes a flat plate-like main body plate portion 411 fastened and fixed in a state of surface contact with the base plate 60, a horizontally long opening 412 formed as an opening constituting the specific winning opening 65a, and the horizontally long opening. A pair of right and left distributing portions 413 are formed on the left and right side portions of 412 so as to be able to disperse the flow-down path of the balls. A pair of left and right curved projecting portions 414 protruding on the front side so as to distribute the flow-down path of the ball, and a size that allows the ball to be discharged to a position away from the left and right ends of the horizontally long opening 412 to the left and right outside. A pair of left and right out ports 415 are provided.

The body plate portion 411 is provided with sheet disposing recesses 411a which are recessed so as to reduce the plate thickness from the back side on both the left and right sides. The sheet arrangement recess 411a is recessed in a shape corresponding to the outer shape of the performance sheet member (thin plate member 380), and is formed with a recess depth substantially equal to the thickness of the sheet member.

A gap between the distribution portion 413 and the curved projecting portion 414 is formed to be larger than the diameter of the sphere. As a result, the ball can flow down through the gap between the distribution part 413 and the curved projecting part 414, so that the randomness of the downflow of the ball can be enhanced, and the attention to the ball can be improved. can be done.

The allocating portion 413 includes a plurality of ridges 413a projecting from the left and right inner side surfaces (second winning opening 140 side). The ridge portion 413a is a shape portion provided to reduce the flow speed of the ball by coming into contact with the falling ball. The applied impact force can be reduced. As a result, damage to the opening/closing plate 65b can be prevented.

A tangent line HL1 (see FIG. 394) to the curved surface passing through the lower end of the curved surface of the curved projecting portion 414 is designed to pass through the left and right inner side surfaces of the distribution portion 413 (the side surface on the side of the first winning opening 64). ing. Therefore, the ball that has rolled on the curved surface of the curved protruding portion 414 to the lower end is likely to reach the left and right inner side surfaces of the distribution portion 413 .

The covering member 430 is made of a light-transmitting resin material, and includes a main body plate portion 431 formed in a thin plate shape, and a strip-shaped back surface extending from the left and right side ends of the main body plate portion 431 toward the left and right inner portions. A pair of left and right belt-shaped portions 432 extending to the side, and a pair of left and right vertical plate portions connected to the left and right inner end portions of the belt-shaped portions 432 and extending to the back side in a plate shape elongated in the vertical direction. 433, a pair of left and right inclined plate portions 434 extending to the back side in a long plate shape with a posture inclined upward from the upper end portion of the vertical plate portion 433 toward the left and right inner sides, and the rotation of the electric accessory 140a. An upright portion 435 is provided upright from the main body plate portion 431 on the lower side of the electric accessory 140a so as to regulate the angle.

The band-shaped portion 432 , the vertical plate portion 433 , the inclined plate portion 434 and the standing portion 435 are arranged so that their distal ends are attached to the main body plate portion 411 of the central structural member 410 when the cover member 430 is fastened and fixed to the central structural member 410 . It is formed with a length that can come into contact with the That is, the belt-shaped portion 432, the vertical plate portion 433, the inclined plate portion 434, and the erected portion 435 change the flow-down path of the ball and distribute the flow-down path of the ball.

The band-shaped portion 432 is arranged along the left, right, outer and lower sides of the out port 415, and the ball that rolls down the band-shaped portion 432 is guided to the out port 415 and discharged from the game area.

The inclined plate portion 434 is arranged closer to the specific winning opening 65a than the out port 415, but since the upper side surface is inclined downward toward the out port 415, it rolls to the inclined plate portion 434 and flows down. The ball is also guided to the out port 415 and discharged from the game area.

When the central component 410 and the covering member 430 are assembled (see FIG. 380), the standing portions 435 are arranged inside the distribution portion 413 of the central component 410 with a gap equal to or larger than the diameter of the sphere. be. This allows the ball to flow down between the allocating portion 413 and the standing portion 435 .

The left component member 450 is formed of a colorless and transparent resin material, and includes a flat plate-like body plate portion 451 that is fastened and fixed while in surface contact with the base plate 60 , and a wide left portion of the body plate portion 451 that It is a plate-like portion in which the left end portion is arranged with a gap large enough for a ball to pass between the projecting portion 453 that is formed to project to the side and the projecting portion 453. A ceiling plate portion 455 formed in a downwardly inclined shape, and a plurality of ball guide portions 457 and 459 formed in a shape capable of guiding the ball to the general winning opening 63 below the ceiling plate portion 455. Prepare.

The ceiling plate portion 455 is not divided in the middle so that only the ball that has passed through the gap between the projecting portion 453 and the ceiling plate portion 455 can flow down the ball guide portions 457 and 459. It is formed in a plate shape.

On the back side of the left component member 450 and the back side of the right component member 470, sheet placement recesses 451b and 471b are formed so as to reduce the plate thickness from the back side. The seat arranging recesses 451b and 471b are recessed in a shape corresponding to the outer shape of a sheet member (not shown) for presentation, and are formed to a recess depth substantially equal to the thickness of the sheet member. It should be noted that this example of the decoration of the sheet member will be substituted for the description of the thin plate member 380 .

394 is an enlarged front view of the game board 13 in the area XXXI of FIG. 381. FIG. A ball that does not pass through the gap between the projecting portion 453 and the ceiling plate portion 455 and rolls on the upper surface of the ceiling plate portion 455 and flows down is not guided to the guide portions 457 and 459, and the ball is not guided to the central structure. It flows down so that it may be guided to the member 410 side. A flow path of the ball from the upstream side of the left component member 450 and the central component member 410 will be described.

As shown in FIG. 394, the plurality of nails KG1 implanted in the base plate 60 are arranged along a straight line that slopes down toward the inner side in the left-right direction with a gap less than the diameter of the sphere. While the path (main path FL1) of the spheres flowing down toward the center is formed, gaps exceeding the diameter of the spheres are provided here and there, so that the spheres that pass through the gaps and deviate from the main path fall off. FL2 and FL3 are formed.

Ceiling plate portion 455 is formed so that a ball can roll on its upper surface, but the rolling speed of the ball rolling on ceiling plate portion 455 varies depending on the timing at which it falls downward from main path FL1. More specifically, when the path of the ball changes from the main path FL1 to the drop-off path FL2, the flow speed of the ball is switched from a state in which it mainly faces left and right to a state in which it mainly faces up and down.

Then, after reaching the ceiling plate portion 455, the speed is switched again to the state in which the speed is directed in the left and right direction. The rolling speed (momentum) of the ball when flowing down the part 455 increases, and it is easy to reach the left and right inner sides of the game area (specific winning opening 65a side).

In addition, since the left and right inner ends (lower ends) of the upper surface of the ceiling plate portion 455 are arranged above the upper end portions of the adjacent curved projecting portions 414, the ceiling plate portion 455 rolls left and right. It is easy to avoid that the ball that is too far inside is blocked by the left and right outer side surfaces of the curved projecting portion 414 .

If the rolling speed of the ball when flowing down the ceiling plate portion 455 is increased and the ball reaches the specific winning opening 65a at that speed, the opening/closing plate 65b is damaged due to a large impact force transmitted from the ball to the opening/closing plate 65b. Although it is feared, in the present embodiment, the projecting portion 413a is arranged in the flow-down path of the ball to the opening/closing plate 65b to reduce the flow-down speed of the ball.

In addition, standing portions 435 are arranged opposite to each other on the left and right inner sides of the ridge portion 413a to prevent a plurality of balls from flowing side by side. As a result, it is possible to avoid ball clogging between the protruding portion 413a and the erected portion 435 (rectification effect), and to easily avoid the situation where the balls land on the opening/closing plate 65b at the same time. Therefore, it is possible to easily prevent breakage of the opening/closing plate 65b (improved durability).

In this way, the flow-down path of the ball is restricted while the flow-down speed of the ball is reduced. As a result, it is possible to reduce the collision force generated when the ball collides with the opening/closing plate 65b, so that it is possible to prevent the opening/closing plate 65b from being damaged.

In the present embodiment, the ridges 413a are arranged in symmetrical positions with respect to the standing portion 435. Therefore, in a pair of flowing paths formed by the pair of left and right ridges 413a and the standing portion 435, , when the balls flow down at the same time, a plurality of balls may land on the opening/closing plate 65b at the same time.

Therefore, in the special game state, it is possible to make it easier for a plurality of balls to enter the specific winning hole 65a at the same time by hitting the balls to the left and right. As a result, it is possible to easily avoid a situation in which the progress of the special game state becomes too slow.

Since the upper surface of the ceiling plate portion 455 is formed as a wide inclined surface in the left and right direction, the ceiling plate portion 455 can receive a plurality of spheres at the same time. It can flow to the winning opening 65a side).

Then, the balls flowed to the left and right inner sides sequentially pass through the right and left inner sides of the distributing portion 413 (the side on which the ridge portion 413a is formed) and reach the opening/closing plate 65b in the open state in order. As described above, according to the present embodiment, the paths of the balls reaching the opening/closing plate 65b are combined into paths passing through the left and right inner sides of the distribution portion 413, so that the balls collide with each other on the upstream side of the opening/closing plate 65b. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the ball deviates from the specific winning hole 65a.

Furthermore, by designing the left and right ends of the specific winning opening 65a and the opening/closing plate 65b to be positioned on the left and right outer sides of the position where the opening/closing plate 65b is reached by flowing down while abutting on the ridge portion 413a of the distribution portion 413. Even if the balls collide with each other on the opening/closing plate 65b and bounce left and right, the balls can still be kept on the upper surface of the opening/closing plate 65b. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the ball from falling out of the opening/closing plate 65b.

Even if a plurality of balls are densely accumulated from the left and right ends of the opening/closing plate 65b, in the present embodiment, a space is formed below the inclined plate portion 434 so that the balls can be placed on the left and right outsides of the opening/closing plate 65b. Since the ball can be flowed in both directions, it is possible to avoid clogging the path of the ball passing through the left and right inner sides of the distribution portion 413 .

In this embodiment, a gap larger than the diameter of the ball is provided between the ceiling plate portion 455 and the curved protruding portion 414 to allow the ball to flow down through this gap. For example, when the ball rolling down the ceiling plate portion 455 collides with the ball flowing down along the inner drop path FL3, the ball rolling down the ceiling plate portion 455 is reduced in left-right speed, and the ceiling plate portion 455 and the curved projecting portion 414.

The frequency at which the balls flowing down the main path FL1 flow down the outer falling path FL2 and the frequency at which the balls flow down the inner falling path FL3 may vary depending on the state of the nail KG1 (dirt adhesion, production lot). Therefore, without countermeasures, the state of the nail KG1 affects the game efficiency and game profit, and the game cannot be provided under equal conditions.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, when the ball rolling on the ceiling plate portion 455 through the outer drop path FL2 occurs more frequently than the ball flowing down the inner drop path FL3, the first winning hole 64 Since the number of balls to reach is less, it is disadvantageous in the case of a game state (normal state, time saving state, high probability state, etc.) aiming for a big win by receiving a lottery, but in the jackpot game state in which the specific winning opening 65a opens and closes, the ceiling plate It is possible to reduce the possibility of balls entering the gap between the portion 455 and the curved projecting portion 414, and since most of the balls that reach the ceiling plate portion 455 can be guided to the specific winning opening 65a, the game efficiency is improved. (For example, the time required for a jackpot game can be shortened).

On the other hand, when the balls flowing down the inner dropping path FL3 occur more frequently than the balls passing through the outer dropping path FL2 and rolling on the ceiling plate portion 455, more balls reach the first winning hole 64. , It is advantageous in the case of a game state (normal state, time saving state, high probability state, etc.) in which a lottery is received and a jackpot is aimed, but in the jackpot game state in which the specific winning port 65a opens and closes, the ceiling plate portion 455 rolls. The ball falling downward from the inner drop path FL3 collides with the path of the falling ball, and the ball falling into the gap between the ceiling plate portion 455 and the curved projecting portion 414, or the dividing portion 413 and the curved projecting portion. Balls passing through the gap between the setting portion 414 and flowing toward the out port 415 frequently occur. As a result, the number of balls deviating from the specific winning hole 65a increases, so that the game efficiency of the jackpot game is lowered.

Thus, in the present embodiment, when the magnitude relationship between the frequency of occurrence of balls rolling on the ceiling plate portion 455 along the outer dropping path FL2 and the frequency of occurrence of balls flowing down the inner dropping path FL3 is switched, the game state is set. It is designed so that the advantageous state and the disadvantageous state are switched, and the player is neither unilaterally advantageous nor unilaterally disadvantageous.

In other words, while allowing the nail KG1 to be in a different state, it maintains a relationship that is advantageous to the player in a certain state and disadvantageous to the player in another state, regardless of the state of the nail KG1. By doing so, we aim to provide games on equal terms.

At the left and right inner sides of the extended plate portion 455a that flows down along the outer falling path FL2 and extends upward from the left end portion of the ceiling plate portion 455, and the projecting portion 453 that is arranged to face the extended plate portion 455a. A flow-down path of the ball flowing down between the side wall portions 453a that are curved downward in the left and right outer sides will be described.

The rate at which the ball is guided to this flow-down path fluctuates depending on the state of the adjacent nails KG2 (interval at the position where the ball flows down). The state of the nail KG2 may change due to collision with a ball, touch by a game machine store clerk, or the like.

Also, the rate at which the ball reaches just before the nail KG2 varies depending on whether the ball rolls on the upper surface of the side wall portion 453 or not. Whether or not the ball reaches the upper surface of the side wall portion 453 depends on the state of the wind turbine FS1 arranged above the side wall portion 453 . Since the rotation shaft of the windmill FS1 is driven into the base plate 60 in the same manner as the nail KG2, the state of the windmill FS1 may fluctuate due to the collision of a ball, the touch of a game machine store clerk, or the like.

Since the first ball guide portion 457 is arranged right under the flow-down path between the extension plate portion 455a and the side wall portion 453a, the ball that has flowed down normally passes through the first ball guide portion 457 and reaches the game area. discharged from The first ball guide portion 457 constitutes the general winning hole 63, and when the ball is guided to the first ball guide portion 457, the prize balls are paid out to the player.

In this embodiment, when a ball flows straight down between the extended plate portion 455a and the side wall portion 453a, the ball enters the first ball guide portion 457 with a probability of 80%, and It is configured to deviate to the left at , and to deviate to the right with a probability of 10%. Note that this ratio can be designed differently depending on the shape (inclination, interval, etc.) of the extension plate portion 455a and the side wall portion 453a and the arrangement of the first ball guide portion 457. FIG.

On the other hand, for example, when the next ball reaches the first ball guide portion 457 while the ball that has reached the first ball guide portion 457 is still staying in the first ball guide portion 457, the following The ball deviates to the left and right of the first ball guide portion 457 and easily flows down. Also, for example, if a plurality of balls flow toward the first ball guide portion 457 in a state where they are collected, some of the plurality of balls tend to deviate to the left and right of the first ball guide portion 457 and flow down.

When the first ball guide portion 457 deviates to the left and right outside, there is no prize winning opening provided on the downstream side, and the ball is discharged from the out opening 415 . On the other hand, when it deviates left and right inside from the first ball guide portion 457 , it rolls on the inclined guide portion 458 projecting left and right inside from the first ball guide portion 457 and can reach the second ball guide portion 459 . The second ball guiding portion 459 constitutes the general winning hole 63, and when the ball is guided to the second ball guiding portion 459, the prize balls are paid out to the player.

The number of prize balls paid out as the balls are guided to the first ball guide portion 457 and the number of prize balls paid out as the balls are guided to the second ball guide portion 459 are set arbitrarily. It is possible, but in this embodiment, it is set so that the number of prize balls paid out increases when the balls are guided to the downstream side.

That is, the number of prize balls paid out as the balls are guided to the second ball guide portion 459 is larger than the number of prize balls paid out as the balls are guided to the first ball guide portion 457. set to increase.

As a result, when the ball falls to the left of the left end of the ceiling slope portion 455, the ball does not enter the first ball guide portion 457 and deviates to the right side (the second ball guide portion 459 side). It is possible to create the playability desired by the player, and to improve the attention to the left component member 450. - 特許庁

For example, when a ball is guided to the first ball guide portion 457 and one prize ball is set to be dispensed, the ball heading for the first guide portion 457 is positioned outside the left and right sides (left side in FIG. 394). When the ball deviates to the right side, the number of balls in the player's hand decreases, and when guided by the first guide part 457, the number of balls remains the same (one prize ball for one shot) and deviates to the left and right inside (right side in FIG. 394). And the ball is guided to the second ball guide part 459 and prize balls (more than 1, generally 2 to 15) are paid out, which may increase the number of balls in hand. Amusement can be configured.

As a result, the flow of balls near the first guide part 457 and the size of the profit obtained by the player can be associated in an easy-to-understand manner, so that attention to the flow of balls near the first guide part 457 can be improved. can be done.

Since the inclined guide portion 458 extending to the right of the first guide portion 457 is made of a resin material, it is easily broken when bent. Therefore, unlike the nail KG1, it is easy to grasp the change in the state. If the broken state can be grasped, the operation of the pachinko machine 10 is stopped until the members are replaced, thereby avoiding unexpected disadvantages for the player.

In this embodiment, various shapes are devised so that the ball rolling on the inclined guide portion 458 is guided to the second ball guide portion 459 with high probability. First, a bulging portion 456 that bulges toward the bottom surface of the ceiling plate portion 455 is formed at the upper left position of the second ball guide portion 459 .

A ball that starts rolling on the upper surface of the slanted guide portion 458 and has not bounced up and down sufficiently contacts the swollen portion 456 in the left-right direction, and the speed direction of the ball is changed downward. As a result, the ball rolling on the upper surface of the inclined guide portion 458 can be prevented from deviating to the right side of the second ball guide portion 459 with momentum.

Secondly, the inclined guide portion 458 has a lateral distance from the second ball guide portion 459 that is shorter than the radius of the sphere, and a vertical distance from the second ball guide portion 459 that is the radius of the ball. (The slanted guide portion 458 and the second ball guide portion 459 are formed in a dimensional relationship that does not allow passage of the ball. ), the inclined guide portion 458 can easily prevent the ball from deviating to the left side of the second ball guide portion 459 .

The winning opening forming member 400 is a resin molded member, and is assembled to the base plate 60 by tightening and fixing with fastening screws, so replacement when a defect occurs is easier than replacing (re-driving) the nail KG1. is.

For example, when the nail KG1 is broken, there is a high possibility that the operation of the game machine will be stopped for a long period of time. is driven by an automatic machine, it is not easy to drive in the nails KG1 again even if some of the nails KG1 are broken.

Therefore, in many cases, it is necessary to replace the entire game board in order to repair it. It may be stored in a warehouse without restarting. That is, there is room for improvement from the viewpoint of maintainability and improvement of the operating period of the game machine.

In this embodiment, in order to prevent defects of the nail KG1 from occurring as much as possible, a ball falling vertically is received by the projecting portion 453 of the left component member 450, and the received ball is received by the projecting portion. After reducing the momentum in the vertical direction by rolling left and right on the upper surface of 453, it is brought into contact with the nail KG1 on the downstream side. As a result, the load applied from the ball to the nail KG1 can be reduced, and the occurrence of defects in the nail KG1 can be suppressed.

Further, focusing on the nails KG1 arranged on the left and right outer sides of the outer falling path FL2, since the left and right outer sides are covered with the overhanging portions 453, the balls do not collide with the nails KG1 from the left and right outer sides. Therefore, compared to the case where the nail KG1 receives loads from random directions, it is possible to lengthen the period until the nail KG1 breaks.

The ball that has flowed down the front side of the left component member 450 passes through the out port 415 and is discharged to the back side of the base plate 60 . At this time, since the vertical plate portion 433 restricts the passage of the ball to the left and right inner sides (the side close to the opening/closing plate 65b), it prevents the ball from flowing toward the opening/closing plate 65b without passing through the out port 415. can be prevented.

Therefore, since the rotation shaft of the opening/closing plate 65b can prevent the ball from flowing in from the left component member 450 side, the ball can always pass between the opening/closing plate 65b and the inner rail 61 as a countermeasure against ball clogging. It is possible to set the vertical distance between the inner rail 61 and the rotating shaft (lower edge) of the opening/closing plate 65b to be less than the diameter of the sphere.

Further, even with such a configuration, if the ball on the opening/closing plate 65b falls to the left or right, it can be temporarily placed between the vertical plate portion 433 and the opening/closing plate 65b, and the opening/closing plate 65b can be In the closed state, the opening/closing plate 65b blocking the downflow path of the ball retreats from the downflow path of the ball, so that the temporarily placed ball flows down toward the out port 71. - 特許庁Therefore, the possibility of ball clogging can be reduced.

395 is a partial cross-sectional view of the game board 13 taken along line XXXII-XXXII in FIG. 394. FIG. The main body plate portion 451 of the left component member 450 has an extension portion 451a extending from the left and right inner edges along the front surface of the base plate 60 in a thin plate shape (a plate shape thinner than the thickness of the main body plate portion 451). The body plate portion 411 of the central component member 410 includes covering extension portions 411b extending from the left and right outer edges along the front side surface.

In this embodiment, the extending portion 451a is sandwiched between the covering extending portion 411b and the base plate 60. As shown in FIG. As a result, the fastening screws for fixing can be removed from the left and right inner end portions of the left component member 450, which is the sandwiched side. It is possible to easily prevent the problem of lowering the performance effect due to the conspicuousness of the image. In addition, since the number of fastening screws for fastening and fixing the members can be reduced, man-hours for assembly and material costs can be reduced.

The front-rear position of the front end portion of the covering extension portion 411b in a state where the extension portion 451a is sandwiched between the base plate 60 is located on the rear side of the front-rear position of the front end portion of the main body plate portion 451. there is As a result, when the ball flowing down the front side of the main body plate portion 451 flows toward the front side of the main body plate portion 411, the front end portion of the covering extension portion 411b and the ball collide with each other, causing the ball to travel to the left and right outer sides. It is possible to prevent the occurrence of a situation that is bounced back.

396 is an exploded front perspective view of the sorting unit 300, and FIG. 397 is an exploded rear perspective view of the sorting unit 300. FIG. As shown in FIGS. 396 and 397, inside the distribution unit 300, the above-described distribution section 983 is arranged in a rotatable state. It is configured so that the balls guided to are alternately distributed to the left and right.

The distribution unit 300 is a member arranged in a rotatable state with the distribution part 983 from the back side, and constitutes a flow-down path that distributes the balls that have passed through the first winning opening 64 to the left and right and flows down. A member 310, a ceiling component member 330 that constitutes the ceiling of the path along which the ball that has passed through the first winning port 64 flows backward, and the shaft member 988a of the distribution section 983 are supported by both sides together with the first component member 310. A first auxiliary member 340 that restricts the falling of the balls flowing in contact with the sorting portion 983 to the rear side, and a second structural member that constitutes a discharge path for the balls discharged rearward from the downstream side of the first structural member 310. 350 and the second component 350 are fastened and fixed to the first component 310 so as to cover the rear and upper parts of the discharge path formed by the second component 350 . A pair of left and right second auxiliary members 370 , and a pair of left and right thin plate members 380 arranged on the front side of the first component 310 and arranged between the first component 310 and the main body plate portion 411 of the central component 410 . And prepare.

The first component member 310 is made of a colorless and translucent resin material, and includes a plate-like central plate portion 311 formed along a plane orthogonal to the front-rear direction, and an upper end of the central plate portion 311 extending toward the front side. an extension plate portion 313 provided, a pair of inclined extension portions 315 extending in a belt-like manner in a direction downwardly inclined toward the left and right outside and extending on the back side of the central plate portion 311, and the inclined extension portions 315. A pair of direction switching portions 317 connected to the left and right outer ends to switch the flowing direction of the ball (in this embodiment, it switches from the left and right direction to the front and back direction by 90 degrees), A pair of left and right opening forming portions 320 in which a plurality of narrow openings are arranged side by side.

The center plate portion 311 includes a substantially cylindrical bearing portion 312 into which one end of a shaft member 988 a that supports the distribution portion 983 is inserted just below the rear end portion of the extended plate portion 313 . The bearing portion 312 is formed with an inner diameter larger than the outer diameter of the shaft member 988a.

The extension plate portion 313 has a protrusion 313a formed as a protrusion whose upper end surface slopes downward toward the rear along the left-right central portion and forms a rolling path for the ball, and a protrusion 313a which is erected from the left and right edges. and a pair of left and right wall-like portions 314 that guide the rearward.

The ball flowing down the inclined extension part 315 flows down left and right while being restricted by the front plate part 371 of the second auxiliary member 370 from dropping to the back side. The second auxiliary member 370 is also used as a member for retaining the detection device SE3.

The direction switching portion 317 is formed as a plate surface on which a ball can roll at a position one step lower than the inclined extension portion 315 on the left and right outer sides of the left and right ends of the inclined extension portion 315, and is inclined downward toward the front side. An inclined surface portion 318, and standing curved portions 319 erected from the rear side edge and left and right outer edges of the inclined surface portion 318 and curved toward the front side in a shape capable of guiding a ball to the front side. Prepare.

The opening forming part 320 has a sensor arrangement opening 321 through which the detection device SE3 is inserted from the rear side, and extends to the front side along the left and right side surfaces of the sensor arrangement opening 321 to support the left and right ends of the detection sensor SE3. a pair of left and right support extensions 322, a prize winning opening 323 formed between the support extensions 322 so that the ball can pass through, and a prize winning opening 323 based on the support extensions 322. A pair of discharge openings 325 formed on the left and right opposite sides of the sphere so that the ball can pass through, and a bottom surface with a shape that can receive the ball that has passed through the winning opening 323 and the discharge opening 325 and guide it to the back side. A bottom surface forming portion 327 having a curved portion toward the rear, and a pair of support extension portions 322 extending from the lower edge of the bottom surface forming portion 327 toward the bottom surface forming portion 327 so as to partition the upper surface side of the bottom surface forming portion 327. and a partition wall portion 328 .

It is designed so that the detection hole SE1a is arranged inside the prize winning opening 323 when the detection device SE3 is inserted through the sensor arrangement opening 321 . The positioning protrusion 322a protruding from the front edge of the support extension 322 abuts against the front end of the detection device SE3, so that the front and rear positions of the detection device SE3 can be easily positioned.

The ball passing through the direction switching portion 317 and reaching the opening forming portion 320 passes through either the winning opening 323 or the ejection opening 325, rolls on the upper surface of the bottom forming portion 327, and moves to the back side. be guided. Since each rolling path is divided by the partition wall portion 328, the possibility of the spheres intersecting or colliding on the upper surface of the bottom surface forming portion 327 can be reduced. As a result, it is possible to rectify the flow of the balls, so it is possible to prevent clogging of the balls and stagnation of the balls.

Among the balls rolling on the upper surface of the bottom surface forming part 327, the passing of the balls passing through the winning opening 323 is detected by the detecting device SE3. On the other hand, the ball that has passed through the discharge opening 325 is not detected by the detection device SE3. In any case, the ball that rolls on the upper surface of the bottom forming part 327 is detected by a detection device (not shown) for detecting ball discharge, and then guided to a ball discharge path (not shown).

The ball rolls on the rolling surface 351 of the second component member 350 toward the left and right inwards while being restricted by the second auxiliary member 370 from falling off to the back side, and is distributed to the left and right respectively to the ball discharge path (not shown). It is guided through a common drop channel 352 provided.

The second auxiliary member 370 includes a front plate portion 371 that covers the space opened on the rear side of the inclined extension portion 315 to prevent the ball from falling off, a rolling surface 351 of the second component member 350 and a common falling surface. A rear plate portion 372 that closes the upper surface side and the rear surface side of the flow-down path of the ball flowing down along the flow path 352 to prevent the ball from falling off, and a fastening screw that is screwed into the fastening portion 329 of the first component member 310 . An insertion hole 373 drilled in the front plate portion 371 so as to be able to pass therethrough, and an insertion hole 374 drilled in the rear plate portion 372 so that a fastening screw to be screwed into the fastening portion 353 of the second component member 350 can be passed through. , provided.

The materials for forming the second component member 350 and the second auxiliary member 370 can be set arbitrarily. 370 is formed from a colorless and transparent resin material.

As a result, the visibility of the balls flowing through the common drop channel 352 can be reduced, and the attention to the discharged balls can be reduced, and light can be taken in from the back side of the second auxiliary member 370, so that the light that is taken in can be reduced. Therefore, the first component member 310 arranged on the near side can be illuminated brightly, and the visibility of the ball flowing down the first component member 310 can be improved.

The thin plate member 380 is positioned by being housed in the sheet disposition recess 411a (see FIG. 393) of the main body plate portion 411. As shown in FIG. The game board 13 is assembled in such a positioned state, and the thin plate member 380 is sandwiched between the main body plate portion 411 and the first component member 310 in the front-rear direction.

The forward, backward, leftward, and rightward displacements (positional changes) in the process of the ball entering the first winning hole 64 flowing down will be described. First, the ball entering the first winning hole 64 is displaced rearward along the extended plate portion 313 . After that, it is distributed left and right by the rotational displacement of the distribution section 983 described in the seventeenth embodiment, and is displaced left and right outward along the inclined extension section 315 .

After that, the flow direction is switched to the front side by the direction switching part 317 and displaced forward. If the guide section, which has a curved surface for switching the direction of flow of the ball, is placed in front of the flowing ball, the guide section tends to block the line of sight to the ball, which may reduce visibility. However, in this embodiment, the upright curved portion 319 as a guide portion is arranged on the back side of the sphere, so the possibility that the upright curved portion 319 blocks the line of sight to the sphere is low. This makes it easier to ensure the visibility of the ball.

After that, the ball flowing down the winning opening 323 is displaced rearward along the bottom forming part 327 after being detected by the detection device SE3. In addition, the ball displaced left or right above the winning opening 323 and reaching right above the discharge opening 325 passes through the discharge opening 325 and is displaced backward along the bottom forming part 327. do.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the ball entering the first winning hole 64 is arranged to move to the rear side at the beginning of the ball entry, flow to the left and right, and move to the front side immediately before passing the detection device SE3. ing. As a result, compared to the configuration of the seventeenth embodiment, the distributing portion 983 can be arranged rearward, and a space can be provided below the extended plate portion 313 .

This empty space can be used as a space for arranging a drive mechanism for operating the electric accessory 140a of the second prize winning port 140. FIG. As a result, in this embodiment, the arrangement of the second winning opening 140 can be brought closer to the first winning opening 64 than in the seventeenth embodiment.

In addition, when the flow paths are arranged consistently in the vertical direction by configuring the paths along which the balls flow after being distributed are switched in the front-rear direction (for example, in the distribution unit 980, the above-mentioned The vertical width of the flow path in a front view can be shortened compared to the case of the configuration having the above structure. As a result, the degree of freedom in designing the relative vertical arrangement of the detection device SE3 with respect to the first winning hole 64 can be improved.

398 is a partially enlarged front view of the game board 13 in the range XXXV of FIG. 381. FIG. In FIG. 398, the central component 410 and the thin plate member 380 are shown translucent so that the sorting unit 300 is visible. Also, in FIG. 398, for convenience of explanation, the outlines of the electric accessory 140a in both the closed state and the open state are illustrated. In the description of FIG. 398, FIGS. 396 and 397 are referred to as appropriate.

The thin plate member 380 is a member formed in a thin plate shape (sheet shape) from a light-transmitting resin material, and is a member that can be visually recognized by the player through the central component member 410 . Although not shown on purpose, in the present embodiment, patterns, figures, characters, or characters are drawn in rich colors on the plate front surface of the thin plate member 380, and the difference in the aspect of the irradiated light (the aspect of color and brightness). (differences), the color and brightness seen through the thin plate member 380 change in various ways.

Unlike the case where patterns, figures, characters or characters are drawn directly on the base plate 60, according to this embodiment, the patterns, figures, characters or characters drawn on the thin plate member 380 can be drawn from the game board 13 by removing the thin plate member 380. Since it can be removed, the appearance of the game board 13 can be easily changed.

For example, when the shape of the game board 13 is the same, but the playability is changed (so-called specification difference), patterns, figures, letters or characters drawn on the game board 13, colors, etc. are changed, In some cases, it is possible for the player to easily grasp the playability.

When a pattern, figure, character or character is directly drawn on the base plate 60, it is necessary to replace the whole base plate 60, so it is easy to replace the entire game board 13 substantially, and the cost for changing the game characteristics is increased. Easy to bulk.

On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, it is sufficient to replace the thin plate member 380 with another thin plate member 380 having a different pattern, figure, letter or character, color, or the like. Therefore, it is not necessary to replace the entire game board 13. None. Therefore, it is possible to easily suppress the cost for changing game characteristics.

The mode of decoration applied to the thin plate member 380 is not limited at all, and various modes are exemplified. For example, by forming a colorless and transparent range above the detection device SE3, the visibility of the ball rolling on the inclined surface portion 318 is improved, and in other parts, figures and patterns are drawn densely to improve decorativeness. You can let them do it. In addition, for example, marks are drawn with numbers or the like at locations corresponding to the prize winning opening 323 and the discharge opening 325 in a front view, and the profit that the player obtains depending on which mark the ball falls close to. may be made easy to grasp.

The thin plate member 380 is designed to have a large shape so as to protrude outward from the through hole 60a on the left and right sides, and is arranged so as to be sandwiched between the base plate 60 and the main body plate portion 411 of the central component member 410. be.

In this embodiment, the rear end surface of the thin plate member 380 and the front end portion of the first component member 310 (for example, the front end portion of the extended support portion 322) are arranged to contact each other. That is, since the detection device SE3 is arranged close to the thin plate member 380, the detection hole SE1a of the detection device SE3 can be moved toward the player. As a result, the visibility of the ball passing through the detecting device SE3 can be improved, and the situation where the ball passing through the detecting device SE3 is overlooked can be easily avoided.

In addition, the detection device SE3 is arranged outside the electric accessory 140a in the front view, and is not hidden by the electric accessory 140a. As a result, compared to the case where the flow path of the ball is hidden by the electric accessory 140a (see FIG. 368), regardless of the state (open state, closed state) of the electric accessory 140a, the ball passing through the detection device SE3 visibility can be improved.

Further, since the detection device SE3 is arranged behind the main body plate portion 411 of the central component 410, it does not affect the flow-down manner of the ball on the front side of the main body plate portion 411. FIG. That is, compared to the case where the detection device SE3 is arranged to protrude forward from the main body plate portion 411 (forward from the front end face of the base plate 60), the degree of freedom in designing the game area can be improved.

Although a nail is not arranged on the main body plate portion 411 due to its strength, in the present embodiment, a distribution portion 413 and a curved protruding portion 414 are used as substitutes for the nail, so as to distribute the paths of the spheres. ing. As a result, it is possible to avoid monotony in the flow-down path of the ball on the front side of the main body plate portion 411 .

Both the ball that passes through the detection hole SE1a of the detection device SE3 and is detected by the detection device SE3 (the ball that passes through the winning opening 323) and the ball that passes through the ejection opening 325 have the inclined surface portion 318. Pass through the path that rolls and displaces to the front side. Therefore, there may be a difference between the number of balls reaching the inclined surface portion 318 and the number of balls detected by the detection device SE3.

Although the visibility of the ball can be improved by displacing the ball to the front side by the inclined surface portion 318, it is difficult to distinguish whether the ball has passed through the prize opening 323 or the discharge opening 325. In this case, it is impossible to determine whether the ball is really not passing through the detecting device SE3 or whether the ball is passing through the detecting device SE3 but the detection failure occurs.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the ball passing through the winning opening 323 from the inclined surface portion 318 is visually recognized as flowing downward in a front view along the winning flow-down path FL31. The ball passing through the discharge opening 325 from the face portion 318 is switched from downward to left and right by 90 degrees along the non-winning flowing-down path FL32 in a front view.

That is, it is possible to determine whether or not the ball passes the detection device SE3 based on whether or not there is a left-right component in the flowing direction of the ball. can do. This makes it easy to determine whether or not the ball has passed through the detection hole SE1a of the detection device SE3.

Both the game ball flowing down along the flow-down path FL31 at the time of winning and the game ball flowing down along the flow-down path FL32 at the time of non-winning flow down in the vicinity of the distribution part 413 and the curved protruding part 414 in a front view. , the flowing path is visually recognized so as to overlap with the flowing path of the game ball flowing down toward the specific winning opening 65a.

Therefore, the game ball flowing down through the inclined surface portion 318 can appear to the player as if it were flowing down toward the specific winning hole 65a. The player counts out the number of game balls that have reached above the opening/closing plate 65b but have not entered the specific winning opening 65a (game balls that have passed when the opening/closing plate 65b is closed). The game ball rolling on the inner rail 61 toward the mouth 71 is often visually confirmed and grasped. However, after the game ball flowing down through the inclined surface portion 318 flows down the flow-down path FL31 at the time of winning or the flow-down path FL32 at the time of non-winning, it is flowed backward along the bottom structure portion 327 (see FIG. 397). It does not appear in front of the out port 71 .

As a result, the game balls entering the first prize winning port 64 during execution of the jackpot game can be added to the number of game balls appearing to flow toward the specific prize winning port 65a, so that the first prize winning is achieved. Regardless of the number of game balls that have entered the opening 64, it is possible to create the illusion that most of the game balls that have been shot have entered the specific winning opening 65a.

Furthermore, since the game ball flowing down through the inclined surface portion 318 and the game ball actually flowing down toward the specific prize winning port 65a are separated in the front and rear by the thin plate member 380, they do not collide with each other. None. As a result, the illusion described above can be produced without hindering the game balls flowing down toward the specific winning hole 65a.

In the present embodiment, the non-win flow-down path FL32 is formed as a flow path that flows in the left-right direction, but it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, an opening is formed in the main body plate portion 411 and the thin plate member 380 in the front-rear direction in the path along which the ball flowing down the inclined surface portion 318 toward the detection device SE3. The winning flow-down path FL32 may be formed as a flow path through which the balls flow toward the front side.

In other words, the ball flowing through the non-winning flow-down path FL32 may return to the front side of the main body plate portion 411 and flow down toward the out port 71 . In this case, if the opening/closing plate 65b is in an open state, the ball that has flowed down the non-winning flow path FL32 can be picked up by the opening/closing plate 65b and enter the specific winning hole 65a.

That is, it is possible to configure the game property that the ball entering the first winning hole 64 can enter the specific winning hole 65a after returning to the front side of the main body plate portion 411 again. It is possible to improve attention to the ball that hits 64 (particularly, attention during the big win game in which the opening/closing plate 65b opens and closes).

Next, the structure of the action unit 500 (see FIG. 380) fastened and fixed to the back side of the game board 13 will be described. The operation unit 500 is fastened and fixed to the base plate 60 (see FIG. 365) of the game board 13 from the rear side.

399, 400, 401 and 402 are front views of the operating unit 500. FIG. In FIG. 399, the retracted state of the internal operation unit 600 of the operation unit 500 is illustrated, in FIG. 400 the intermediate state of the internal operation unit 600 is illustrated, in FIG. 401 the extended state of the internal operation unit 600 is illustrated, In diagram 402, one operating error limit state of internal operating unit 600 is illustrated.

In this embodiment, the retracted state is a state in which the light emitting operation effect unit 700 of the internal operation unit 600 is arranged at the upper end position of the vertical motion range, and the intermediate state is the light emitting operation effect unit 700 tilted back and forth from the retracted state. In the extended state, the light emitting operation production unit 700 is arranged at the lower end position of the vertical operation range, and the rotation production is performed. The rotation axis RJ1 of the device 800 is oriented in the front-rear direction.

In the state change from the intermediate state to the extended state, the posture change (tilting motion) of the light emitting operation effect unit 700 in the front-rear direction occurs. This attitude change is executed as a rotational motion about a predetermined rotation axis (a central axis J1, which will be described later).

In the present embodiment, one operation error limit state is one of the states in which the tilt in the left-right direction that is allowed in the design of the light emitting operation unit 700 reaches its limit. In FIG. 402, for the sake of convenience, the right side of the light emitting operation unit 700 is shown in the same position as in the retracted state, and the left side is shifted downward. In this embodiment, the operation unit 500 is configured so that the light emission operation unit 700 can be operated vertically while maintaining the tilt angle of one operation error limit state, details of which will be described later. do.

As shown in FIG. 399, in the retracted state of the internal operation unit 600, the rotating member 810 of the rotating effect device 800 is in a posture in which the decorative plate 811 on which decorative figures and patterns are formed faces the front side.

The figures and patterns formed on the decorative plate 811 are formed in a manner related to the figures and patterns formed on the bottom wall portion 511 of the rear case 510, as shown in FIG. It is visually recognized integrally (out of the radially extending linear shape and the wave patterns formed on the left and right outer sides, the linear shape is also visually recognized as being formed on the rotary member 810).

That is, since the figure or pattern formed on the decorative plate 811 can be designed as a part of the figure that is visually recognized integrally with the bottom wall portion 511, the size of the rotating member 810 can be adjusted to the size of the rotating member 810. It is possible to avoid limiting the shapes and patterns to be used.

Further, as shown in FIG. 401, in the extended state of the internal operation unit 600, the luminous operation production unit 700 tilts forward, and the figures and patterns formed on the main body member 710 of the luminous operation production unit 700 change. Visible when viewed from the front.

These figures and patterns are also formed in a manner related to the figures and patterns formed on the bottom wall portion 511 of the rear case 510, and are integrally visible (radially extending straight lines) when the internal operation unit 600 is extended. Of the shapes and wave patterns formed on the left and right outer sides, the linear shape is formed only on the bottom wall portion 511, and the wave pattern is formed on the main body member 710 and is visually recognized).

That is, since the figure or pattern formed on the main body member 710 can be designed as a part of the figure that can be visually recognized integrally with the bottom wall portion 511, the size of the main body member 710 can be changed to that formed on the main body member 710. It is possible to avoid limiting the shapes and patterns to be used.

Since the light emitting operation effect unit 700 is displaced in the vertical direction from the retracted state to the extended state, in relation to the fixed bottom wall portion 511, the figure and pattern are integrally visible in the retracted state. The figures and patterns formed on the wall portion 511 and the figures and patterns formed on the rotating member 810 start to deviate.

This deviation becomes more conspicuous as the amount of displacement in the vertical direction increases. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, by tilting and displacing the light emitting operation effect unit 700 in the overhanging state, the surface to be visually recognized by the player is switched, and the figures and patterns visually recognized integrally with the bottom wall portion 511 are newly changed. It can be visually recognized by the player. Therefore, the figures and patterns formed on the bottom wall portion 511 and the figures and patterns formed on the vertically displaced light emitting operation effect unit 700 (main body member 710, rotating member 810) are arranged in the retracted state and the extended state. It can be configured to be integrally visible in the.

During the vertical displacement of the light emitting operation production unit 700 described here, the external shape of the light emitting operation production unit 700 changes when viewed from the front. As a result, a single effect unit can be made to appear as if it were a plurality of different effect units, and the degree of freedom in designing action effects can be improved.

403 is an exploded front perspective view of operation unit 500, and FIG. 404 is an exploded rear perspective view of operation unit 500. FIG. 403 and 404, the liquid crystal display device (third pattern display device 81) disposed in the opening 511a of the rear case 510 is omitted, and the back side is shown through the opening 511a.

The operation unit 500 includes a box-shaped rear case 510 whose front side is opened from a bottom wall portion 511 and an outer wall portion 512 erected from the outer edge of the bottom wall portion 511 . A rectangular opening 511 a is formed in the center of the bottom wall portion 511 of the rear case 510 , so that the rear case 510 is formed in a rectangular frame shape when viewed from the front. The opening 511a is formed in a size corresponding to the outer shape (outer edge) of the display area of the third pattern display device 81 (that is, the display area of the third pattern display device 81 can be divided when viewed from the front).

The back case 510 extends as a plane plate along the back of the game board 13 (for example, arranged parallel to it) at the front end of the outer wall 512, and faces the game board 13 in the assembled state (see FIG. 365). A support plate portion 513 for supporting is provided.

The support plate portion 513 has a plurality of positioning protrusions 513a which are annularly projected toward the front side in a shape that can be fitted into a fitting recess (not shown) formed in the base plate 60 of the game board 13. and a plurality of insertion holes 513b through which a fastening screw fastened to the base plate 60 can be inserted at the central portion of the positioning protrusion 513a.

The rear case 510 is positioned with respect to the base plate 60 by fitting the positioning protrusions 513a into the fitting portions 60c (see FIG. 384) of the base plate 60, and the fastening screws are inserted through the insertion holes 513b, and the fitting portions are closed. By screwing into the female screw 60c, the game board 13 and the action unit 500 can be integrally fixed, so that the rigidity of the game board 13 and the action unit 500 as a whole can be improved.

The shape of the positioning convex portion 513a is not limited at all, and various aspects are exemplified. For example, an annular convex portion having an outer shape slightly smaller than the outer shape (circular in this embodiment) of the fitting portion 60c of the base plate 60 may be used. The protrusion may have such a shape (annular shape with a large diameter). Further, when the outer shape of the fitting portion 60c is formed in a rectangular shape, it is naturally assumed that the shape of the positioning convex portion 513a is also formed in a rectangular shape correspondingly.

The action unit 500 is arranged on the back side of the game board 13, and light-emitting means and action units are arranged inside. That is, the operation unit 500 includes a rear case 510, a decorative fixing member 520 inserted into the rear case 510 from the front side and fastened and fixed, an internal operation unit 600 disposed in the inner upper part of the rear case 510, and a light emitting effect unit 518 arranged at the inner lower part of the back case 510. - 特許庁

The light emission effect unit 518 is a unit that irradiates light forward from behind the sorting unit 300 and the prize winning opening constituent member 400 (see FIG. 392), and is formed by the sorting unit 300 and the prize winning opening constituent member 400. It functions to brightly illuminate the passage path of the sphere.

The decorative fixing member 520 is made of a light-transmitting resin material, and is composed of a plurality of thin plate-like members that are arranged symmetrically on both the left and right sides and that can be divided into upper and lower parts. a first fixing member 530 arranged on the lower left side, a second fixing member 540 arranged on the lower left side, a third fixing member 550 arranged on the upper right side, a fourth fixing member 560 arranged on the lower right side, a first A left decorative board 570 arranged on the rear side of the fixing member 530 and the second fixing member 540, a right decorative board 580 arranged on the rear side of the third fixing member 550 and the fourth fixing member 560, Prepare. The configuration and role of each part will be described with reference to FIGS. 405 and 406. FIG.

405 is an exploded front perspective view of operation unit 500, and FIG. 406 is an exploded rear perspective view of operation unit 500. FIG. 405 and 406, the decoration fixing member 520 is disassembled from the rear case 510 and arranged in front, and the internal operation unit 600 is disassembled from the rear case 510 and arranged between the rear case 510 and the decoration fixing member 520. In FIGS. state is illustrated.

The first fixing member 530 includes a thin plate-shaped insertion plate portion 531 extending in the front-rear direction, a front plate portion 534 extending rightward from the front side portion of the insertion plate portion 531 , and a front plate portion 534 extending from the front side portion of the insertion plate portion 531 . and an outer plate portion 537 extending leftward.

The inserting plate portion 531 has a plurality of inserting projections 532 protruding from the extended distal end to the back side in a shape and arrangement that can be inserted into the receiving hole 623 of the internal operation unit 600 . It serves to prevent outward tilting displacement of 610 . A description of the relative functions of the insertion plate portion 531 and the outer member 610 will be given later.

The front plate portion 534 is a plate-shaped portion arranged in front of the left decorative board 570 and formed in a shape corresponding to the outer shape of the left decorative board 570 (formed so as to cover the left decorative board 570). Then, light diffusion processing is formed on the back side in order to diffuse the light from the light emitting means such as the LED arranged on the front side of the left decorative board 570 . In addition, an insertion hole 535 is provided through which a fastening screw to be fastened and fixed to the outer member 610 of the internal operation unit 600 can be inserted.

The outer plate portion 537 is a portion that can come into contact with the front portion of the outer wall portion 512 of the rear case 510, and is perforated so that a fastening screw that is screwed into a fastening portion 512a formed on the outer wall portion 512 can be inserted. It has an insertion hole 538 that

That is, the first fixing member 530 connects and fixes the outer wall portion 512 of the rear case 510 and the outer member 610 of the internal operation unit 600 in the assembled state of the operation unit 500 (see FIG. 399).

The second fixing member 540 is a plate-like portion arranged in the same front and rear position as the front plate portion 534 of the first fixing member 530, and is arranged with a slight gap from the lower end of the front plate portion 534. 541, a fastening extension portion 544 extending rightward from the lower right side portion of the front plate portion 541, and an outer plate portion 547 extending leftward from the left end portion of the front plate portion 541. Prepare.

The front plate portion 541 is a plate-like portion arranged in front of the left decorative board 570 and formed in a shape corresponding to the outer shape of the left decorative board 570 (formed so as to cover the left decorative board 570). Then, light diffusion processing is formed on the back side in order to diffuse the light from the light emitting means such as the LED arranged on the front side of the left decorative board 570 .

In addition, the insertion hole 542 through which the fastening screw fastened and fixed to the outer member 610 of the internal operation unit 600 can be inserted, and the fastening screw fastened and fixed to the inner member 670 of the internal operation unit 600 can be inserted. and an insertion hole 543 that is drilled. That is, the outer member 610 and the inner member 670 of the internal operation unit 600 can be connected and fixed by fastening and fixing via the front plate portion 541 .

The connecting extension part 544 includes an insertion hole 545 through which a fastening screw to be screwed into the fastening part 518a of the light emission effect unit 518 can be inserted. The outer plate portion 547 is a portion that can come into contact with the front portion of the outer wall portion 512 of the rear case 510, and is drilled so that a fastening screw that is screwed into the fastening portion 512b formed on the outer wall portion 512 can be inserted. It has an insertion hole 548 that

That is, in the assembled state of the operation unit 500 (see FIG. 399), the second fixing member 540 is connected to the outer wall portion 512 of the rear case 510, the outer member 610 and the inner member 670 of the internal operation unit 600, and the light emitting unit 518. , are connected and fixed.

The third fixing member 550, the fourth fixing member 560, and the right decorative substrate 580 are arranged on the back side and are covered by the inner member 670 of the internal operation unit 600, which is different in shape, so that the first fixing member 530, the second fixing member 540, and the left decorative board 570, but basically formed symmetrically with the first fixing member 530 and the second fixing member 540. are the same, the description of overlapping parts is omitted, and the reference numerals mentioned above in the description of the first fixing member 530 and the second fixing member 540 are illustrated for convenience.

The order of assembling the internal operation unit 600 and the decoration fixing member 520 to the rear case 510 will be described. For assembly to the rear case 510 , the internal operation unit 600 is first assembled to the rear case 510 (see FIG. 403 ), and then the decoration fixing member 520 is assembled to the rear case 510 .

As an overview, the process of assembling the internal operation unit 600 to the back case 510 is as follows. The unit 700 is inserted and placed between the left and right outer members 610 and inner members 670, the light emitting operation production unit 700 is placed at the assembly position with the displacement member 680, and members (screws, collars, etc.) for preventing falling off are attached. The work is performed in the order of assembling to the fastening portion 682 from the front side.

In this embodiment, since it is not necessary to assemble the decoration fixing member 520 to the back case 510 when assembling the light emitting operation production unit 700, the front side of the back case 510 can be opened widely, and the decoration fixing member 520 can be attached to the decoration fixing member 520. It is possible to avoid obstruction of the worker's hand flow line. Thereby, working efficiency can be improved.

In addition, since the operation of inserting fastening screws into the insertion holes 535, 538, 542, 543, 545, and 548 of the decorative fixing member 520 and fastening and fixing them can be performed from the front side of the rear case 510, it is possible to produce light emitting operation. After the work of assembling the unit 700 to the displacement member 680 is completed, the work of fastening and fixing the decorative fixing member 520 can be performed continuously without changing the posture of the rear case 510 . Thereby, working efficiency can be further improved. Next, the details of the assembly work will be described.

407 is a cross-sectional view of operation unit 500 taken along line XLIV-XLIV of FIG. 399, FIG. 408 is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of operation unit 500 taken along range XLV of FIG. 407, and FIG. 5 is a cross-sectional view of the operating unit 500 along line -XLIV; FIG.

407 and 408, the light emitting operation effect unit 700 is disassembled from the rear case 510, and the illustration of the decoration fixing member 520 is omitted as a state before the decoration fixing member 520 is assembled. On the other hand, FIG. 409 shows a state in which the light emitting operation rendering unit 700 and the decoration fixing member 520 are assembled to the rear case 510 (see FIG. 399).

In this embodiment, the fastening positions are designed so that sufficient rigidity cannot be exhibited only by fixing the internal operation unit 600 and the rear case 510 (for example, the fastening positions are arranged only at one of the upper and lower ends). cage), and the internal operation unit 600 is configured to be flexibly deformable (position changeable) to the left and right outwards with respect to the rear case 510 (see the imaginary line in FIG. 408).

Using this flexural deformation, it is possible to quickly assemble the light emitting operation production unit 700 . That is, the luminous operation production unit 700 is assembled by inserting the fastening portion 682 into the connection hole 764 of the luminous operation production unit 700 and screwing the fastening screw into the fastening portion 682 . 600 flexurally deforms to the left and right outside, the dimension of the path for the light emitting operation effect unit 700 to enter toward the fastening portion 682 can be laterally widened from the fixed width dimension W1 to the flexed width dimension W2. Workability can be improved.

At this time, the internal operation unit 600 is flexurally deformed outward to the left and right, so that the direction of entry of the fastening screw into the fastening portion 682 is inclined in such a direction that the direction toward the back side is directed inward to the left and right (the front side expands outward to the left and right). direction of inclination).

In this case, compared to the case where the fastening screw is inserted in the front-rear direction, the driver for screwing in the fastening screw is separated (avoided) from the decorative member 750 of the light emitting operation production unit 700 (with respect to the front-rear direction). The fastening screw can enter the rear case 510 in an inclined direction).

Therefore, the fastening work can be facilitated, and the degree of freedom in designing the decorative member 750 of the light emitting operation production unit 700 whose shape is designed to avoid contact with the driver can be improved. . That is, it is possible to improve the working efficiency of the work of assembling the light emitting operation production unit 700 and improve the degree of freedom in designing the decorative member 750 .

In order to make this effect possible, in the present embodiment, the horizontal dimension of the elongated hole 764a of the connecting hole 764 through which the fastening screw is inserted is adjusted according to the misalignment of the fastening portion 682 due to the bending deformation of the internal operation unit 600. Designed with compatible dimensions (sufficient left and right length).

It should be noted that bending deformation of the internal operation unit 600 to the left and right inside is less likely to occur than bending deformation to the left and right outside because the tubular member 695 abuts against the bottom wall portion 511 of the rear case 510 and generates resistance. is configured to

In this embodiment, by assembling the decoration fixing member 520, the bending deformation of the internal operation unit 600 to the left and right outside is suppressed. This is because the internal operation unit 600, the decoration, and the internal operation unit 600 are positioned closer to the rear side than the fastening position between the internal operation unit 600 and the rear case 510 (the fastening position arranged on the bottom wall portion 511 of the rear case 510, the fastening position arranged near the back side). There are more fastening positions of the fixing member 520 and the rear case 510 (fastening positions arranged on the front side of the outer wall portion 512 of the rear case 510 and the internal operation unit 600, and fastening positions arranged near the front side); The effect can be obtained by devising the shape of the decoration fixing member 520 .

First, the decorative fixing member 520 includes an outer plate portion 547 that is fastened and fixed to the outer wall portion 512 or the support plate portion 513 , and the support plate portion 513 integrally formed with the outer wall portion 512 is attached to the base plate 60 . It is fastened and fixed (see Fig. 405). In other words, the displacement of the decoration fixing member 520 is restricted by the base plate 60 via the support plate portion 513 . As a result, the rigidity of the base plate 60 can be used to improve the rigidity of the decoration fixing member 520 and the internal operation unit 600, so that the internal operation unit 600 can be restrained from being deformed by bending to the left and right.

Secondly, the insertion plate portions 531 of the decoration fixing member 520 are arranged to abut on the left and right outer sides of the internal operation unit 600 . That is, the insertion plate portion 531 can suppress the bending deformation of the internal operation unit 600 to the left and right outside.

With these first and second configurations, it is possible to prevent the internal operation unit 600 from bending outwardly to the left and right when the decorative fixing member 520 is assembled.

In addition, the decoration fixing member 520 is configured to be attached to the back case 510 from the front side, and the light emitting operation effect unit 700 is configured to be attached to the back case 510 from the front side. The assembling work can be performed in a series of steps such as assembling the decoration fixing member 520 following the assembling of the lighting operation production unit 700 without changing the . Therefore, it is possible to improve the efficiency of the assembly work.

On the other hand, if the operation of removing the light emitting operation effect unit 700 from the fastening portion 682 for maintenance or the like can be performed without removing the decoration fixing member 520, the number of man-hours for maintenance work can be reduced and efficiency is improved.

Illumination substrates 570 and 580 are arranged on the rear side of the decoration fixing member 520 (see FIG. 405). The production range of production can be widened, and the production effect can be improved.

On the other hand, if the decorative boards 570 and 580 are arranged to protrude left and right inwards as in the present embodiment, when the maintenance worker moves the light emitting operation effect unit 700 to the front side, the light emitting operation effect unit Connecting plate portions 765 formed at the left and right ends of 700 may collide with the electrical boards 570 and 580, and the electrical boards 570 and 580 may be damaged.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, protective extensions of a shape sufficient to cover the back surfaces of the electrical boards 570 and 580 extend from the front side edge of the extended wall portion 677 of the inner member 670 (to be described later) toward the left and right inner sides. A setting portion 677b is extended (see FIG. 405).

The protective extending portion 677b has left and right inner ends formed in the same shape as the shape line S51 (see FIG. 405) corresponding to the shape of the left and right inner edge portions of the upper portions of the electrical boards 570 and 580. It extends to a position corresponding to S51.

As a result, the area for supporting the electrical boards 570 and 580 from the rear side can be increased, and the rear surfaces of the upper parts of the electrical boards 570 and 580 can be protected by the protective extended portions 677b. It is possible to avoid contact between the illumination boards 570 and 580 and the light emitting operation effect unit 700 at times.

On the other hand, below the lower end of the shape line S51, regardless of the shape of the electrical boards 570 and 580, the formation of the extending portions extending inward to the left and right is omitted. Therefore, when performing the work of removing the light emitting operation production unit 700 at this position, the possibility of contact between the light emitting operation production unit 700 and the electric decoration boards 570 and 580 remains.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the light emitting operation effect unit 700 is configured to be displaced downward and change its posture (see FIGS. 400 and 401). , and a screwdriver cannot be inserted into the fastening screw. Therefore, the work of removing the light emitting operation effect unit 700 is configured to be executed before the posture of the light emitting operation effect unit 700 changes. Therefore, it is sufficient to form the protective extension part 677b at a position where it is arranged before the attitude of the light emitting operation production unit 700 changes, and this embodiment is designed in such a way (see FIG. 400). .

In this way, the protection extension part 677b is not formed over the entire upper and lower range, but is limited to the minimum necessary range for avoiding contact between the light emitting operation effect unit 700 and the decorative boards 570, 580. Therefore, the formation range of the protective extension portion 677b can be narrowed.

In other words, in the present embodiment, the arrangement of the light emitting operation effect unit 700 that allows the operation of removing the light emitting operation effect unit 700 is limited to the position between the retracted state and the intermediate state of the internal operation unit 600. By configuring, the formation range of the protection extension portion 677b is reduced.

In addition, in this embodiment, it is of course possible to remove the lighting operation production unit 700 after removing the decorative fixing member 520 from the rear case 510 . In this case, similarly to the assembly work, by bending and deforming the internal operation unit 600 to the left and right outside, it is possible to widen the lateral width of the path from which the light emitting operation effect unit 700 is taken out, so that the light emitting operation effect unit 700 can be avoided from contacting the protective extension 677b.

410 is an exploded front perspective view of operation unit 500, and FIG. 411 is an exploded rear perspective view of operation unit 500. FIG. 410 and 411 mainly show the disassembled state of the internal operation unit 600, and illustration of the decoration fixing member 520 is omitted.

As shown in FIGS. 410 and 411, the internal operation unit 600 includes an outer member 610 fastened and fixed to the bottom plate portion 511 of the rear case 510, and supported by the outer member 610 so as to be vertically displaceable and laterally movable. A lift plate member 630 disposed inside, a drive motor 648 which is a device for generating a driving force for lifting the lift plate member 630 and is fastened and fixed to the outer member 610, and a drive shaft of the drive motor 648 and a transmission gear 649 that is fixed to the lifting plate member 630 to transmit driving force to the lifting plate member 630 , and a coil spring SP<b>1 that applies an upward biasing force (load in the pulling direction) to the lifting plate member 630 .

In addition, the internal operation unit 600 is arranged inside in the left-right direction so that the elevator plate member 630 is arranged between the resistance generator 650 configured to generate a resistance force to the movement of the elevator plate member 630 and the outer member 610 . An inner member 670 is fastened and fixed to the outer member 610 by a fastening screw inserted through the outer member 610 in the left-right direction, and a displacement member 680 is displaceably supported by the inner member 670 and arranged inside in the left-right direction. , a rotational attitude assisting member 690 fastened and fixed from the left and right inside on the back side of the upper end of the inner member 670, and a light emitting operation effect unit 700 connected to the displacement member 680 at both ends.

The internal operation unit 600 is a unit that is substantially bilaterally symmetrical, and the light emitting operation effect unit 700 is arranged in the center of the left and right, and both the left and right sides of the light emitting operation effect unit 700 are fixedly arranged on the back case 510 side. The light emitting operation effect unit 700 is operably supported by the configuration of .

Details of each configuration of the internal operation unit 600 will be described below with reference to FIGS. 410 and 411 will be referred to in the description of FIGS. 412 and 413 as appropriate.

412(a) is an exploded front perspective view of the outer member 610, the elevator plate member 630 and the resistance generator 650 in area XLIXa of FIG. 410, and FIG. 412(b) is the outer member 610 in area XLIXb of FIG. FIG. 413(a) is an exploded front perspective view of the lifting plate member 630, the inner member 670, the displacement member 680, and the rotational posture assisting member 690 in the range La of FIG. 410, and FIG. 413(b ) is an exploded front perspective view of the displacement member 680 and the rotational posture assisting member 690 in the range Lb of FIG.

As shown in FIGS. 412(a) and 412(b), the outer member 610 includes a plate-like portion 611 formed in a plate-like shape elongated in the vertical direction, and left and right outer sides of the plate-like portion 611 (rear case). an extended wall portion 621 extending like a wall from the outer wall portion 512 of 510 (on the side of the outer wall portion 512 that is adjacent in the assembled state) and formed so as to partition the left and right outer regions of the plate-like portion 611; , provided.

The plate-like portion 611 includes a pair of vertically elongated oblong holes 612 , and a vertically elongated and wide (wider than the elongated hole 612 ) behind the upper elongated hole 612 . and a pair of upper and lower guide projecting portions 614 projecting in a cylindrical shape to the left and right outside behind the elongated hole 612 on the lower side.

The elongated holes 612 are elongated holes for limiting the displacement direction of the lift plate member 630, and a pair of the elongated holes 612 are arranged on the upper side and the lower side. Since the longitudinal width of the long hole 612 is slightly wider than the diameter of the upper fastening portion 632 and the lower fastening portion 633 of the elevator plate member 630 inserted therein, the displacement of the elevator plate member 630 in the front-rear direction is small. . The pair of elongated holes 612 are intentionally formed with their front and rear positions shifted. In other words, the lower elongated hole 612 is arranged on the front side compared to the upper elongated hole 612 .

As a result, the supporting position of the upper side of the lifting plate member 630 is located behind the supporting position of the lower side of the lifting plate member 630, so that the lifting plate is hung from the upper side of the lifting plate member 630. The lower portion of member 630 is urged rearward by gravity.

As a result, the rack gear portion 634 of the lifting plate member 630 can be brought closer to the transmission gear 649 side, so that the rack gear portion 634 can be prevented from falling off from the transmission gear 649, and the meshing relationship can be optimized. can be done.

The wiring through hole 613 is an electric wiring connected inside the light emitting operation effect unit 700. The electric wiring located on the left and right outer sides of the inner member 670 passes through the deformed opening 685a of the drop-off prevention collar member 685, and passes through the electric wiring. It is an opening for discharging to the left and right outside of the member 610 .

The guide projecting portion 614 functions as a portion that guides the displacement of the longitudinally displacing member 653 of the resistance generating device 650 . That is, it functions to guide the front-rear displacement member 653 so that it can be displaced in the front-rear direction and to prevent the front-rear displacement member 653 from tilting back and forth and changing its posture, which will be described later in detail.

The extended wall portion 621 has a plurality of fastening portions 622 which are arranged at the end on the front side and configured so that a fastening screw inserted through the decoration fixing member 520 can be screwed in, and a plurality of fastening portions 622 which are arranged on the rear side and into which the decoration fixing member 520 is inserted. A pair of upper and lower receiving holes 623 formed so that the insertion protrusion 532 (see FIG. 406) of the plate portion 531 can be inserted is provided. Fastening portions other than the fastening portion 622 arranged at the front end portion are fastening portions mainly for fastening and fixing the decorative boards 570 and 580 (see FIG. 403).

The elevating plate member 630 includes a long main body portion 631 whose long direction is oriented in the vertical direction, and a long hole 612 formed so as to protrude from the long main body portion 631 to the left and right and to the upper side of the outer member 610 and fastened. A pair of upper fastening portions 632 formed so that a screw can be screwed thereinto, and a pair of upper fastening portions 632 formed projecting outward from the long main body portion 631 to the left and right, are inserted into the elongated holes 612 on the lower side of the outer member 610, and fastening screws are screwed therein. A pair of lower fastening portions 633 can be formed, and a rack gear portion 634 formed in a gear tooth shape on the rear side of the long main body portion 631 and meshing with the transmission gear 649 is provided.

The lift plate member 630 extends from the lower end of the long main body 631 toward the back side and is arranged in a detection groove of a position detection device (not shown), thereby enabling detection of the position of the long main body 631 . front and rear elongated holes 636 drilled in the long body portion 631 as long holes elongated in the front-rear direction at intermediate positions between the pair of upper fastening portions 632; A fall-off prevention plate 637 is fastened and fixed to the upper fastening portion 632 by fastening screws arranged and inserted through the plate-shaped portion 611, and a lower fastening portion 633 is fastened and fixed to the lower fastening portion 633 by fastening screws arranged and inserted through the plate-like portion 611. and a ring member C1 assembled to the upper fastening portion 632 and the lower fastening portion 633 to reduce frictional resistance during operation.

The upper fastening portion 632 and the lower fastening portion 633 are arranged corresponding to the front-rear arrangement of the long hole 612 of the outer member 610 . Therefore, the lower fastening portion 633 is arranged on the front side of the upper fastening portion 632 .

The longitudinally elongated hole 636 is an elongated hole that guides the longitudinal movement of the metal rod-shaped member 686 inserted through the second elongated hole 673 and the curved elongated hole 674 of the inner member 670. The second elongated hole 673 and the curved elongated hole 674 It is formed with a front-to-rear length greater than or equal to the front-to-rear width of the range to be formed.

With the upper fastening portion 632 of the lifting plate member 630 inserted into the upper long hole 612, the drop prevention plate 637 is fastened and fixed to the tip side of the upper fastening portion 632, and the lower fastening portion 633 is inserted into the lower long hole. By fastening and fixing the abutted plate 638 to the tip side of the lower fastening portion 633 in a state where it is inserted through the lower fastening portion 612 , the lifting plate member 630 supported by the outer member 610 so as to be able to move up and down falls off from the outer member 610 . can be easily prevented.

The abutted plate 638 has engaging portions for engaging the lower ends of the coil springs SP1 on the left and right outer sides. The upper end portion of the coil spring SP1 is locked by locking portions 638a formed on the left and right outer sides of the plate-like portion 611 of the outer member 610. As shown in FIG. That is, the coil spring SP1 generates a biasing force (pulling force) that biases the abutted plate 638 upward.

The coming-off prevention plate 637 is formed in an oval shape, whereas the abutted plate 638 is formed in a rectangular shape. As a result, the contact area with the resistance generator 650 can be increased, and the magnitude of the load per unit area generated at the time of collision can be reduced, the details of which will be described later.

The resistance generating device 650 includes a solenoid 651 having a plunger extending and retracting direction in the front-rear direction, a fixed cover 652 for housing the solenoid 651 and fixing it to the left and right outer sides of the outer member 610, and the plunger of the solenoid 651. and a front-rear displacement member 653 configured to be displaceable in the front-rear direction by being guided by the guide projecting portion 614 of the outer member 610 .

The fixed cover 652 has a plurality of insertion holes 652a drilled in both upper and lower positions of the solenoid 651 as insertion holes through which fastening screws to be screwed into the outer member 610 can be inserted, and a guide projecting portion 614 of the outer member 610. A pair of upper and lower fitting portions 652b that are recessed with arrangement dimensions that allow the tip portion to be fitted are provided.

The front-rear displacement member 653 has a pair of guided elongated holes 653a drilled longitudinally as elongated holes through which the guide protrusions 614 are inserted on both upper and lower sides. By fitting the fitting portion 652b of the fixed cover 652 to the distal end portion of the guide projecting portion 614 while the guide elongated hole 653a is inserted through the guide projecting portion 614, the guide projection of the front-rear displacement member 653 is formed. It is possible to prevent falling off from the setting portion 614 .

As shown in FIGS. 413( a ) and 413 ( b ), the inner member 670 includes a plate-like portion 671 arranged to face the plate-like portion 611 of the outer member 610 in the left-right direction, and left and right sides of the plate-like portion 671 . It includes an extended wall portion 677 that extends outward in a wall shape, and a rectangular projecting portion 678 that projects in a rectangular shape from the rear portion of the upper end side of the plate-like portion 671 to the left and right inner sides.

The plate-like portion 671 includes a first elongated hole 672 that is elongated in the vertical direction on the back side of the elevation plate member 630 and a first elongated hole 672 on the front side of the first elongated hole 672 . A second elongated hole 673 is formed as an elongated hole extending parallel to the first elongated hole 672 from the upper end shifted upward from the upper end of the first elongated hole 672, and the lower end of the second elongated hole 673 and a curved long hole 674 drilled as a connected curved long hole.

As a connecting portion of the plate-like portion 671 with the rear case 510, FIG. There is no As can be seen from this, the positional fixation of the plate-like portion 671 is mainly not directly fixed to the rear case 510, but rather to the outer member 610 and the decoration fixing member 520 (Fig. 403). In other words, the plate-like portion 671 is indirectly fastened and fixed to the rear case 510 to generate a fixing force with the rear case 510 .

The plate-like portion 671 includes a plurality of fastening portions 671a into which fastening screws inserted in the left-right direction from the left-right outer side of the plate-like portion 611 of the outer member 610 are screwed. It is fastened to the outer member 610 .

The first long hole 672 is wider than the second long hole 673 and the curved long hole 674 . As a result, in the present embodiment, the first elongated hole 672 can be used as a through hole for electrical wiring, and the electrical wiring connected to the light emitting operation effect unit 700 is exposed to the left and right inner regions of the pair of left and right inner members 670. can be prevented, the details of which will be described later.

The second elongated hole 673 and the curved elongated hole 674 are formed with the same width. The curved shape of the curved elongated hole 674 is an arc whose axis is the center of the tubular portion 684 in a state where the tubular portion 684 of the displacement member 680 guided by the first elongated hole 672 is positioned at the lower end of the first elongated hole 672 . Formed as a shape.

The extended wall portion 677 includes a partition wall portion 677a formed to surround the first elongated hole 672 from the plate-like portion 671 to the left and right outside, and the decorative substrates 570 and 580 extending from the front side edge to the left and right inside. and a protective extension 677b extending in a shape sufficient to cover the back surface.

The displacement member 680 includes a box-shaped main body portion 681 formed in a substantially rectangular box shape with left and right inner sides open, and a pair of fastening members protruding outward from the lateral side wall portions of the box-shaped main body portion 681 . a portion 682, an extension portion 683 extending along the left and right outer side surfaces of the box-shaped main body portion 681, a cylindrical portion 684 projecting from the corner of the box-shaped main body portion 681 in the left and right outer direction in a cylindrical shape, A drop-off prevention collar member 685 is fastened and fixed to the distal end side of the tubular portion 684, and a metal rod-like member 686 is fitted and fixed to a fitting recess portion 683a formed as a circular recess portion on the proximal end side of the extension portion 683. , a plurality of ring members 687 arranged in the gaps between the members that are relatively displaced and through which the metal rod members 686 are inserted; and front and rear ring members 689 inserted through the fastening portion 682 in a sandwiched state (see FIG. 409).

The fastening portion 682 has a female screw portion into which a fastening screw that is inserted through the connected hole 764 of the light emitting operation effect unit 700 is screwed. concatenated.

The extension part 683 functions as a part that protects the light emitting operation effect unit 700 from contacting the inner member 670 when the light emitting operation effect unit 700 is assembled to the displacement member 680 (the extension part 683 and the light emitting operation effect unit 700 (see FIGS. 408 and 409).

The tubular portion 684 has a deformed opening 684b formed so as to penetrate the box-shaped unitary portion 681 in the left-right direction on the inner peripheral side, and drop-off prevention collars at both positions sandwiching a central axis passing through the deformed opening 684a. A fastening portion 684a is provided into which a fastening screw inserted through the member 685 can be screwed.

The cylindrical portion 684 is inserted into the first elongated hole 672 of the inner member 670, and the drop-off prevention collar member 685 is fastened and fixed. A deformed opening 685 a is formed in the central portion of the drop-off prevention collar member 685 as an opening having approximately the same size as the deformed opening 684 b of the cylindrical portion 684 .

That is, in a state in which the fall-off prevention collar member 685 is fastened and fixed to the cylindrical portion 684 , an opening penetrating in the left-right direction is formed in the inner circumferential side of the cylindrical portion 684 and the fall-off prevention collar member 685 . This opening has a function as a through-hole for electrical wiring connected to the light emitting operation effect unit 700 . This is explained here.

The other end of the electrical wiring, one end of which is connected to the light emitting operation production unit 700, is brought out from the wire through hole 762 (see FIG. 411) of the light emitting operation production unit 700, and the cylindrical portion 684 of the displacement member 680 Through the deformed opening 684b and the deformed opening 685a of the disengagement prevention collar member 685, the wire passes through the first elongated hole 672 of the inner member 670 to the left and right outside, and further passes through the wiring through hole 613 of the outer member 610 to form a plate-like shape. Left and right outside the portion 611 .

The deformed opening 685a is not a simple circular opening, but has a protruding portion (a portion through which a fastening screw is inserted) that protrudes inward from the diameter position of the circular shape. The electrical wiring is displaced in the circumferential direction by hooking the electrical wiring on the projecting portion when rotated.
As a result, it is possible to suppress the friction between the odd-shaped opening 685a and the electric wiring, so that it is possible to easily prevent disconnection of the electric wiring.

The other end of the electric wiring is laid from the left and right outsides of the plate-shaped portion 611 to the rear side of the rear case 510 and connected to individual relay boards. Regions outside the plate-like portion 611 on the left and right are at least hidden by the decorative fixing members 520 (see FIG. 403).

At one end of the electrical wiring, it is conceivable that the electrical wiring may be exposed at a position between the light emitting operation effect unit 700 and the displacement member 680, but in the present embodiment, the box-shaped main body 681 covers the electrical wiring. In addition, the extended plate portion 763 of the light emitting operation effect unit 700 extends so as to cover the electric wiring in a front view from the wiring through hole 762 (see FIG. 411). ). This makes it easier to prevent the electric wiring from being exposed at the position between the light emitting operation effect unit 700 and the displacement member 680 .

By passing the electrical wiring in this way, it is possible to avoid the situation in which the electrical wiring is exposed in the left and right inner regions of the pair of left and right inner members 670 . Therefore, problems that tend to occur when the electric wiring is visually recognized by the player include the problem that the electric wiring is arranged on the front side of the third pattern display device 81 and hides the display, thereby reducing the visibility, It is possible to solve the problem that the electric wiring is arranged indiscriminately so that it looks untidy and lowers the performance effect. That is, the visibility of the third pattern display device 81 can be improved, and the electrical wiring can be hidden from the player.

At this time, the partition wall portion 677a can limit the arrangement of the electrical wiring in the gap between the outer member 610 and the inner member 670, so that the lift plate member 630 arranged on the front side of the partition wall portion 677a contact with the electrical wiring can be avoided.

The metal rod-shaped member 686 is formed into a rod shape with flanges by fitting E-rings to the left and right outer ends, thereby preventing the member from falling off from the left and right outer ends. As for the insertion order of the metal rod-shaped member 686, the left and right inner ends are the ring member 687, the longitudinal long hole 636 of the lifting plate member 630, the ring member 687, and the second long hole 673 (curved long hole 674) of the inner member 670. , the ring member 687, and the fitting recess 683a of the displacement member 680, and are fitted and fixed to the fitting recess 683a of the extension portion 683. As shown in FIG.

In this way, the metal rod-shaped member 686 is a member that is inserted through the elevating plate member 630 and the inner member 670. The vertical arrangement depends on the change in arrangement due to the elevating operation of the elevating plate member 630, and the front-rear arrangement is the first. It depends on the arrangement of the two slots 673 and the curved slots 674 . By changing the arrangement of the metal rod-shaped member 686, the arrangement and attitude of the displacement member 680 to which the metal rod-shaped member 686 is fitted and fixed and the light emitting operation effect unit 700 are changed. The placement and attitude change of the effect unit 700 will be described later.

The front and rear ring member 689 includes a plate-shaped ring member 689a arranged on the box-shaped main body 681 side, and a flanged ring member 689b formed with an outwardly widening flange at the end of the cylinder.

The plate-shaped ring member 689a and the flanged ring member 689b are configured to sandwich the light emitting operation production unit 700 between the respective plate-shaped portions arranged in the front-rear direction. It is arranged on the inner peripheral side of the connected hole 764 of the member 760 .

The rotational posture assisting member 690 is arranged on the left and right inner sides of the rectangular overhanging portion 678 of the inner member 670 , and the rectangular overhanging portion is formed by screwing fastening screws inserted from the left and right inner sides into the fastening portions of the rectangular overhanging portion 678 . It is fastened and secured to portion 678 .

The rotational posture assisting member 690 includes a box-shaped main body portion 691 that is formed in a box shape with left and right inner sides open and is fastened and fixed to the rectangular overhanging portion 678 , and a box-shaped main body portion 691 that is arranged on the left and right inner sides of the box-shaped main body portion 691 . and a tubular member 695 rotatably supported on the portion 691 .

The box-shaped main body 691 has extensions 692 extending downward from the left and right inner ends of the rear surface side, and a cylindrical member 695 is supported by a rotating shaft extending in the left and right direction on the left and right inner sides of the extensions 692 . It is In other words, the cylindrical member 695 is arranged at the back side end and the lower position of the box-shaped main body 691, and is arranged away from the player, so that the cylindrical member 695 is prevented from being excessively conspicuous. be able to.

The light emitting operation effect unit 700 is a unit that is connected to the fastening portions 682 of the displacement members 680 arranged on both the left and right sides, and its arrangement and posture change as the arrangement and posture of the displacement members 680 on both left and right sides change.

414 is an exploded front perspective view of the light emitting operation production unit 700, FIG. 415 is an exploded rear perspective view of the light emitting operation production unit 700, and FIG. 416 is an exploded front perspective view of the light emitting operation production unit 700. . Note that FIG. 416 shows an exploded view when looking up at the light emitting operation effect unit 700 . Also, in FIG. 416, in addition to the light emitting operation rendering unit 700, the displacement member 680 is illustrated in a corresponding arrangement.

The light emitting operation production unit 700 includes a main body member 710 in which the rotating production device 800 is arranged, a lower plate member 730 arranged below the main body member 710 and fastened and fixed to the main body member 710, and a main body member 710 and the lower plate member 730. An intermediate plate member 740 that is arranged between the plate member 730 and closes the front side of the space, a plurality of decorative members 750 that are fixed to the front side of the intermediate plate member 740, and a main body member 710 that is arranged on the left and right sides of the body member 710. A pair of left and right intermediate connecting members 760 are provided, which are fastened and fixed to the main body member 710 by fastening screws inserted from the outside.

The main body member 710 is formed in a box shape with an open bottom side and a front side, a plurality of fastening portions 711 formed so that fastening screws inserted from below into the lower plate member 730 can be screwed, and a front surface of the top plate. a front edge portion 712 extending downward from a side edge; a plurality of clamping portions 713 arranged opposite to the front edge portion 712 with a dimension capable of clamping the intermediate plate member 740 between the front edge portion 712; A pair of left and right fixed plate portions 720 formed so as to connect the top plate and the rear side wall portion on both left and right sides are provided.

The fixed plate portion 720 is formed in a flat plate shape along a plane intersecting the left-right direction axis so as to be able to support the intermediate connecting member 760 on its surface. It includes a plurality of fastening portions 721 which are formed so as to be able to be inserted and which are used for fastening and fixing the intermediate member 760, and recessed portions 722 which are recessed in a substantially semicircular shape at the lower end portion on the back side.

The concave portion 722 is formed so that the central axis of the semicircular shape is aligned with the central axis of the wiring through hole 762 drilled in the intermediate connecting member 760 . As a result, the opening formed by the recessed portion 722 and the lower plate member 730 and the wiring through-hole 762 can be arranged in a horizontal straight line, so that the electric wiring can be easily passed through the wiring through-hole 762. .

The lower plate member 730 has a plurality of insertion holes 731 for inserting fastening screws to be screwed into the fastening portion 711 of the main body member 710, and a plurality of ridges 732 arranged facing each other in the front-rear direction near the front edge. And prepare.

The lower plate member 730 has light diffusion processing applied to the left and right outer portions of the lower surface, and is formed so as to reduce the visibility when viewing the inner side through the member. This makes it difficult to visually recognize the electric wiring, the driving device, etc. arranged inside even when the light emitting operation effect unit 700 is viewed from the side of the lower plate member 730 when looking up (see FIG. 416). be able to.

In addition, a pattern, figure, or the like may be drawn on the left and right inner portions of the lower surface of the lower plate member 730 (in FIG. 416, the substantially circular white portions). As a result, even in a situation where the lower surface is visible to the player by arranging the light emitting operation effect unit 700 in the front upper side of the third symbol display device 81 in the retracted state of the internal operation unit 600 (see FIG. 399), By making the player visually recognize the patterns and figures of the light emitting operation production unit 700, the production effect can be maintained.

The ridge portion 732 is formed to have the same function as the front edge portion 712 and the holding portion 713 of the main body member 710 . That is, they are arranged side by side in the front-rear direction with dimensions that allow the intermediate plate member 740 to be sandwiched therebetween.

The intermediate plate member 740 is formed in a thin plate shape curved so that the left and right central portions protrude toward the front side along the shape of the front edge portion of the lower plate member 730, and a plurality of decorative substrates 741 are fastened and fixed on the rear side. be done.

Intermediate plate member 740 is held by being sandwiched between main body member 710 and lower plate member 730 . That is, the upper edge portion of the intermediate plate member 740 is sandwiched between the front edge portion 712 of the main body member 710 and the sandwiching portion 713, and the lower edge portion of the intermediate plate member 740 is sandwiched between the ridges 732 of the lower plate member 730. retained by Therefore, compared to the case where the intermediate plate member 740 is fastened and fixed to the main body member 710 or the lower plate member 730, the number of fastening screws for assembly can be reduced.

The electric decoration board 741 is arranged in the left-right center and on both the left and right sides, and is configured so that light can be emitted to the front side from light emitting means such as LEDs arranged on the front side. As a result, it is possible to execute a lighting effect in which the decorative member 750 emits light.

Light is emitted only to the front side from the light emitting means arranged on the electrical board 741, and no light emitting means for emitting light is arranged downward (lower plate member 730 side), but the lower plate member When the player visually recognizes 730, the light emitting operation effect unit 700 is arranged diagonally in front of the third pattern display device 81 (see FIG. 399), so that the light emitted from the third pattern display device 81 is emitted from the lower plate. Member 730 will be illuminated. That is, since the brightness of the lower plate member 730 can be ensured by the light emitted from the third pattern display device 81, the possibility that the presentation effect of the lower plate member 730 is lowered can be reduced.

The decorative member 750 is arranged at the left-right central position of the intermediate plate member 740. The central decorative member 751 has a three-dimensional shape made of thin-walled resin material, and the central decorative member 751 is arranged on both left and right sides of the central decorative member 751. A pair of left and right fastened members 755 that are fastened and fixed to the intermediate plate member 740 by screwing fastening screws that are inserted through the intermediate plate member 740 from the back side.

The member to be fastened 755 has a plurality of fastening portions 756 into which fastening screws are screwed. A plurality of position holding holes 752 are provided.

The central decorative member 751 is fixed to the intermediate plate member 740 by inserting a fastening portion 756 for fastening and fixing the member to be fastened 755 to the intermediate plate member 740, not by a fixing means dedicated to the central decorative member 751. It is done. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the man-hours for assembling the central decorative member 751 to the intermediate plate member 740 and reduce the number of fastening screws.

Further, in this embodiment, the plurality of fastening portions 756 are formed to be connected by a plate-like portion 757 having a curved cross section. The plate-like portion 757 has a shape corresponding to the base end side contact surface portion 753 which is the edge portion of the central decorative member 751 and contacts the front surface of the intermediate plate member 740 .

As a result, in a state in which the member to be fastened 755 is fastened and fixed to the intermediate plate member 740 by screwing the fastening screw into the fastening portion 756, the base end side contact surface portion 753 is connected to the plate-like portion 757 and the intermediate plate member. 740 and the central decorative member 751 can be supported so as to be sandwiched between them, so that the arrangement of the central decorative member 751 can be stabilized.

The intermediate connecting member 760 will be described with reference to FIGS. 417(a) to 417(d). 414 to 416 will be referred to in the description of FIGS. 417(a) to 417(d).

417(a) is a front view of the right intermediate connecting member 760, and FIG. 417(b) is a side view of the intermediate connecting member 760 as viewed in the direction of arrow LIVb in FIG. 417(a). 417(a) is a side view of the intermediate connecting member 760 as viewed in the direction of arrow LIVc in FIG. 417(a), and FIG. 417(d) is a cross-sectional view of the intermediate connecting member 760 taken along line LIVd-LIVd in FIG. 417(a). is.

The intermediate connecting member 760 is a portion of the main body member 710 that faces the fixed plate portion 720 and has a plurality of insertion holes 761a through which fastening screws that are screwed into the fastening portion 721 are inserted. , a wiring through hole 762 drilled in the left-right direction at the lower back side of the plate-like portion 761; A connected hole 764 drilled in the widthwise outer portion of the plate portion 763, and a pair of connecting plate portions 765 extending so as to be connected to the plate-like portion 761 in the widthwise central portion of the extended plate portion 763. , and a shield extension plate 766 extending from the width direction one side end (lower plate member 730 side end) of the extension plate portion 763 to the front side (intermediate plate member 740 side).

The angle between the straight line connecting the two insertion holes 761a arranged in the front and rear at the substantially central portion of the intermediate connecting member 760 in the vertical direction and the horizontal straight line HL71 is designed as an inclination angle θ71. Although the angle of the inclination angle θ71 is not limited at all, the inclination angle θ71 is set to about 5 degrees in this embodiment.

The plane on which the extended plate portion 763 is formed is arranged on the vertical straight line VL71 facing the direction of gravity (directing the direction perpendicular to the horizontal straight line HL71) (the angle is assumed to be 0). By arranging the extension plate portion 763 on the vertical straight line VL71, it is possible to facilitate the work of assembling the light emitting operation effect unit 700 to the displacement member 680 from the front side as described above.

The inclination angle θ71 of the insertion hole 761 a corresponds to the inclination angle of the rotation member 810 of the rotation effect device 800 in the state where the light emitting operation effect unit 700 is assembled to the displacement member 680 . Therefore, while maintaining the workability of the work of assembling the intermediate connecting member 760 to the displacement member 680, it is possible to realize a design (see FIG. 418) in which the initial posture of the rotation effect device 800 of the light emitting operation effect unit 700 is inclined. .

In this case, even in the retracted state or the intermediate state of the internal operation unit 600, the optical axis of the light emitted from the rotating member 810 of the rotating effect device 800 can be directed obliquely forward. As a result, the light emitted from the rotating member 810 can illuminate the vicinity of the peripheral portion of the game board 13 (for example, a place where the light from the third symbol display device 81 is difficult to reach), so that the entire game board 13 can be illuminated. It can be made bright and easy to see.

Two connecting holes 764 are formed in each of the extended plate portions 763, and are formed to have different shapes on the left and right sides. That is, in the left intermediate connecting member 760, elongated long holes 764a are formed in the left and right on both sides of the extension plate portion 763 in the width direction. On the other hand, in the right intermediate connecting member 760, a long hole 764a is formed on one side in the width direction of the extension plate portion 763 (upper side in FIG. 399), and a substantially circular hole is formed on the opposite side in the width direction (lower side in FIG. 399). A support hole 764b is formed (see FIG. 399).

The connecting plate portion 765 is a portion for reinforcing so as to maintain the angular relationship (positional relationship) between the plate-like portion 761 and the extended plate portion 763 . In the posture shown in FIG. 416, the width direction of the extension plate portion 763 supporting the plate-like portion 761 is along the vertical direction (the direction of gravity), so that the extension plate portion 761 is positioned relative to the plate-like portion 761 by the weight of the light emitting operation production unit 700 itself. The portion 763 is hard to break.

On the other hand, as will be described later, the intermediate connecting member 760 is configured to be tiltable, and when tilted forward about 90 degrees, the width direction of the extension plate portion 763 is the front-rear direction (the direction perpendicular to the direction of gravity). , the extended plate portion 763 is likely to break with respect to the plate-like portion 761 due to the weight of the light emission effect unit 700 .

On the other hand, in this embodiment, since the connecting plate portion 765 is reinforced, it is possible to easily prevent the extension plate portion 763 from breaking with respect to the plate-like portion 761 . That is, it is possible to easily avoid a problem (occurrence of breakage) caused by a change in posture of the intermediate connecting member 760 .

The extended shielding plate 766 has a function of blocking the view to the connected hole 764 when viewed upward (see Fig. 416), and a decorative pattern is formed on the outer surface (lower surface of Fig. 416), so that the decorative effect area is increased. and a function to spread.

As shown in FIG. 416, similar to the decorative pattern formed on the lower surface of the shield extension plate 766 of the intermediate connecting member 760, the lower surface of the box-shaped main body 681 of the displacement member 680 also has a striped pattern. formed. Therefore, the lower surface of the shield extension plate 766 and the lower surface of the box-shaped main body 681 can be easily visually recognized integrally, so that the area where the decorative pattern (decorative pattern, striped pattern) is formed can be expanded and viewed.

As a result, in the assembled state of the action unit 500 (see FIG. 399), the presentation effect of the intermediate connecting member 760 and the displacement member 680 can be improved when looking up at the light emission action presentation unit 700 .

Therefore, not only when the left and right central portions of the light emitting operation rendering unit 700 are visually recognized but also when the left and right end portions are visually recognized when viewed from the upward direction, the rendering effect using the light emitting operation rendering unit 700 is improved. can be done.

The rotation effect device 800 includes a rotating member 810, a drive motor 820 that generates a driving force for rotating and displacing the rotating member 810, and an attitude detection means 830 that rotates synchronously with the rotating member 810 and detects the attitude of the rotating member 810. And prepare.

The rotary member 810 is rotatably supported by the main body member 710 of the light emitting operation production unit 700, and uses a low-friction bearing for its support. As a result, even when the rotating member 810 is rotationally driven, it is possible to reduce the extent of the load that accompanies the rotation of the rotating member 810 that is transmitted to the light emitting operation effect unit 700 .

The rotary member 810 includes a decoration plate 811 on which a decoration is formed, a radiator plate 812 having an external shape corresponding to the decoration plate 811 and facing the decoration plate 811, and the decoration plate 811 and the radiator plate 812 are fastened and fixed. A rotation base member 813 formed with a circular cross section and supported by the main body member 710 so as to be rotatable in the circumferential direction at the center position of the circular cross section, and arranged between the decoration plate 811 and the radiator plate 812 and an arc-shaped transmissive member 814 .

The decorative plate 811 and the radiator plate 812 are similar-shaped members made of a colored (black in this embodiment) resin material. The radiator plate 812 is provided with air intake openings 812a extending from the rotation base member 813 side as the rotation base end side toward the rotation tip side (longitudinal direction end side of the rotation member 810).

The arch-shaped transmitting member 814 is made of a colorless and transparent resin material and has an arch shape along the curved surfaces of the decorative plate 811 and the heat radiating plate 812 . Fixed. Light emitted from light-emitting means such as LEDs arranged on an electrical board (not shown) arranged between the decorative plate 811 and the radiator plate 812 passes through the arch-shaped transmitting member 814 and passes through the rotating member 810 . Move in a direction parallel to the axis of rotation.

Light-emitting means such as LEDs arranged on the electrical board are arranged along the curved shape of the rotating member 810 in the same manner as the air intake opening 812a, and the interval between the rows is set narrower than the air intake opening 812a. be. By turning on and off the plurality of LEDs in accordance with the rotation of the rotating member 810 (rotational light emission effect), it is possible to perform afterimage display (afterimage display by afterimage effect) in which a specific display is visually recognized by the afterimage of light. Become.

Light emitted from each LED is partitioned so as to be adjacent to each other in the rotation radial direction inside the rotating member 810 and configured to travel through each passage extending in a direction parallel to the rotation axis, and enters the other passage. formed so that there is no As a result, it is possible to clarify the traveling path of the light emitted from each LED (the diameter of the displacement locus of the LED light in the rotating light emission effect), so that the afterimage display can be visually recognized as a clear display.

The concave side surface of the arch-shaped transparent member 814 is roughened (diffused). As a result, the LED light can be diffusely reflected and diffused, so that the glare can be suppressed as compared with the case where the LED light is directly visually recognized.

The intake opening 812a of the radiator plate 812 will be described. The intake opening 812a is formed tangentially to the rotational circumferential direction of the rotating member 810, and acts to take in air between the decoration plate 811 and the heat sink 812 when the rotating member 810 is rotationally displaced.

In the configuration between the decorative plate 811 and the radiator plate 812, the opposite side of the arch-shaped transparent member 814 (lower side in FIG. 414) is open to allow air to be discharged. Between the decorative plate 811 and the radiator plate 812, a recessed portion continuously extending along the arch shape extending in the radial direction of rotation is formed as an air passage.

That is, when the rotation of the rotating member 810 is executed, the air sucked from the intake opening 812a passes through the concave portion along the arch shape of the arch-shaped transmitting member 814, flows outward in the rotational radial direction, and is discharged to the back side. , the air can be vented to the atmosphere. Due to this air flow, the heat inside the rotating member 810 can be dissipated (radiated) to the outside, so that it is possible to easily avoid problems caused by the high temperature of the electrical board.

Due to the arch shape of the arch-shaped transmission member 814, the air can be sent smoothly to the back side, and the occurrence of vortices can be avoided. As a result, it is possible to smoothly take in air from the rear side of the rotating base member 813, so that the vicinity of the rotating shaft can be cooled.

In other words, when the air is caused to flow radially outward, the air pressure in the radially inner side decreases, so air can be taken in from the rear side, and the air flow can be circulated during rotation. Thereby, a heat radiation effect can be continuously produced.

The cooling action by the air flow is expected not only when the rotation lightening effect is executed, but various aspects are exemplified. For example, even when the rotating member 810 is swung and reciprocated in the retracted state or the intermediate state of the internal operation unit 600, air circulation is generated through the intake opening 812a, and the electrical board can be cooled. can.

In this embodiment, the decoration plate 811 is not formed with the intake opening 812a in consideration of decorativeness (see FIG. 400). The intake of air through the air intake opening 812a acts to take in air in the advancing direction of the air intake opening 812a. 810 will be biased to one side in the longitudinal direction, and there is a possibility that the cooling effect of the electrical board will be halved.

Therefore, in this embodiment, instead of fixing the rotation direction of the rotating member 810 in one direction, it rotates in one rotation direction in the first rendering mode, and rotates in another rotation direction in the different second rendering mode. controlled to do so. As a result, it is possible to prevent the air intake side from being biased toward one side in the longitudinal direction of the rotary member 810, and a sufficient cooling effect for the electrical board can be expected.

The posture detection means 830 includes a detection gear 831 that meshes with a gear portion that is supported by the rotation shaft of the rotation member 810 and rotates synchronously with the rotation member 810 , and a detection gear 831 that rotates in synchronism with the rotation member 810 . A detection groove is arranged at a position where the extending portion extending in parallel can enter, and a detection sensor 832 capable of detecting the phase of the detection gear 831 by detecting that the extending portion has entered the detection groove. , provided.

The attitude detecting means 830 can be arbitrarily designed to detect which attitude the rotating member 810 has. At least detecting that the longitudinal direction of the rotating member 810 is aligned with the left-right direction in the arranged state and that the decorative plate 811 is arranged on the front side (appropriate posture, see FIG. 414). The formation position of the extended portion of the detection gear 831 is designed so that

418 to 420 are cross-sectional views of the game board 13 and the action unit 500 along line LV-LV in FIG. The game board 13 is not shown in FIG. 399, but cross-sectional views of the game board 13 in the assembled state are shown in FIGS. FIGS. 418 to 420 show how the internal operation unit 600 changes from the retracted state to the extended state in chronological order.

418 shows the internal operating unit 600 in the retracted state, FIG. 419 shows the internal operating unit 600 in the intermediate state, and FIG. 420 shows the internal operating unit 600 in the extended state.

As shown in FIGS. 418 to 420, the internal operation unit 600 is configured such that the light emitting operation effect unit 700 and the rotating effect device 800 are displaced in the process of changing the state from the retracted state to the extended state. The displacement of the light emitting operation effect unit 700 and the rotation effect device 800 is configured such that the displacement in the vertical direction and the displacement in the forward rotation direction occur in stages, the details of which will be described later.

In the configuration according to the present embodiment, the arrangement of the rotating effect device 800, which has a particularly high degree of attention, will be described. Since the postures of the light emitting operation effect unit 700 and the rotating effect device 800 change in the forward rotation direction, the rotation effect device 800 in the extended state is arranged in the forward and backward direction compared to the rotating effect device 800 in the retracted state and the intermediate state. The directional arrangement is located on the front side.

As a result, in the retracted state, by positioning the rotating effect device 800 on the back side, a space can be secured on the front side of the rotating effect device 800, and the decoration part 247 and the electric decoration board 251 are arranged on the front side for the effect. While it is possible to improve the effect, the position of the rotating effect device 800 can be brought closer to the player side when executing the rotating light emitting effect of rotating the rotating effect device 800 in the extended state, so the rotating light emitting effect. can increase the intensity of Therefore, both the presentation effect in the retracted state and the presentation effect in the extended state can be improved.

In this embodiment, the irradiation direction LD81 of the light from the rotating effect device 800 is set to the front side in the overhanging state. On the other hand, considering that the intermediate state and the retracted state are also used for light production, the light irradiation direction LD81 is set not directly upward but obliquely forward. As a result, it is possible to prevent the utility value of the rotating effect device 800 as light effect means from being extremely lowered in the intermediate state and the retracted state. Details of the light effect will be described later.

As the light irradiation direction LD81 of the rotation effect device 800 in the retracted state of the internal operation unit 600 is set diagonally forward, the posture of the light emitting operation effect unit 700 changes from the intermediate state of the internal operation unit 600 to the extended state. The posture change angle in the forward roll direction required for is smaller than 90 degrees. As a result, the time and space required for posture change can be reduced compared to the case where the posture change angle is 90 degrees.

In the retracted state of the internal operation unit 600, the light emitting operation effect unit 700 supporting the rotating effect device 800 is inclined in the forward rolling direction, so that the front-to-rear width is slightly increased. Therefore, normally, the light emitting operation production unit 700 is arranged near the back side, or the displacement of the light emitting operation production unit 700 is designed to be restrained inside the central opening 60b of the base plate 60 when viewed from the front. , the collision between the light emitting operation effect unit 700 and the base plate 60 is avoided.

However, when the light emitting operation effect unit 700 is arranged near the back side, the light emitting effect effect unit 700 is far from the player, so there is a possibility that the impact of the effect is reduced by half. Further, when the displacement of the light emitting operation effect unit 700 is suppressed inside the central opening 60b, the movement tends to be small, and there is a possibility that the impact of the effect is halved.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the space on the back side is secured by using the central structural unit 240 that is thinner than the base plate 60 . Furthermore, the arrangement of the electric board 251 in the front-rear direction for improving the performance effect is kept within the thickness dimension of the base plate 60, and the recessed portion 252a is formed in the board holding plate 252 so that it can be placed between the lighting operation performance unit 700 and the board holding plate 252. We are trying to form a gap. As a result, the luminous action effect unit 700 is prevented from colliding with the configuration of the game board 13 while improving the degree of freedom in the attitude and arrangement of the luminous action effect unit 700.例文帳に追加

The posture change in the forward rolling direction of the light emitting operation effect unit 700 and the rotation effect device 800 is not started in the retracted state, but descends with the same posture until the intermediate state, and the posture change is started from the intermediate state. The starting position of this posture change is defined by the shapes of the first elongated hole 672, the second elongated hole 673, and the curved elongated hole 674, as will be described later. It is configured not to be changed depending on the control mode.

In the intermediate state, as can be seen from the fact that the rotating effect device 800 is positioned below the vertical position H1 (see FIG. 419) of the lower edge of the decorative portion 247 in the left-right central cross section, the light emitting operation effect unit 700 And since the central opening 60b is positioned in front of the rotating effect device 800 and the base plate 60 of the game board 13 is not arranged, there is no possibility of collision.

By starting the posture change in the forward rolling direction of the luminous operation production unit 700 from the state where there is no possibility of collision, the possibility of the luminous operation production unit 700 and the rotation production device 800 colliding with the game board 13 is reduced. be able to.

As a result, it is possible to prevent the space for arranging the electrical decoration board 251 and the decoration part 247 from being restricted by overlapping with the displacement trajectory of the forward rotation direction displacement of the light emitting operation production unit 700 and the rotation production device 800 . Therefore, it is possible to improve the degree of freedom in designing the arrangement positions of the electrical decoration substrate 251 and the decorative portion 247 .

Next, a configuration for dividing the displacement mode of the light emitting operation effect unit 700 and the rotating effect device 800 in stages will be described. In this embodiment, the displacement of the light emitting operation production unit 700 is guided by two elongated holes having different shapes.

FIGS. 421(a) to 421(c) schematically show a first long hole 672, a second long hole 673 and a curved long hole 674. is a schematic side view of the.

FIG. 421(a) illustrates the configuration arrangement in the retracted state of the internal operation unit 600, FIG. 421(b) illustrates the configuration configuration in the intermediate state of the internal operation unit 600, and FIG. , the configuration arrangement in the extended state of the internal operating unit 600 is illustrated.

In FIGS. 421(a) to 421(c), for ease of understanding, the outer shapes of the front-rear elongated hole 636 of the lifting plate member 630, the box-shaped main body portion 681 of the displacement member 680, and the extension portion 683 are drawn in imaginary lines. , and the outlines of the cylindrical portion 684 of the displacement member 680 and the metal rod-shaped member 686 (the outlines of the portions surrounded by the first elongated hole 672, the second elongated hole 673, and the curved elongated hole 674) are indicated by solid lines. illustrated.

As shown in FIGS. 421(a) to 421(c), in this embodiment, the first elongated hole 672, the second elongated hole 673, and the curved elongated hole 674 are formed with different shapes to produce a light emitting operation. The light emitting effect unit 700 is configured to be displaced step by step by changing the way of guiding the cylindrical part 684 and the metal bar member 686 corresponding to the vertical position and attitude of the unit 700 depending on the arrangement. Details will be described below.

Transmission of the driving force to the displacement member 680 holding the light emitting effect unit 700 is performed via the lift plate member 630 . That is, in FIGS. 421(a) to 421(c), the longitudinally elongated hole 636 is on the most upstream side of the transmission path of the drive force generated by the drive motor 648 (see FIG. 410).

That is, as the elevating plate member 630 is vertically displaced, the metal rod-shaped member 686 disposed inside the front-rear elongated hole 636 is displaced in a permissible direction. follows and displaces.

First, the first elongated hole 672 and the second elongated hole 673 are arranged such that their longitudinal directions coincide with the vertical direction and are parallel to each other. Therefore, while the metal rod-shaped member 686 is guided by the second long hole 673 and the cylindrical portion 684 is guided by the first long hole 672 (between the retracted state and the intermediate state), the displacement member 680 is connected. Displacement of the light emission effect unit 700 in the forward direction is suppressed, and parallel displacement is performed in the vertical direction.

Next, the metal rod-shaped member 686 is guided to the curved elongated hole 674, and the curved elongated hole 674 is in the intermediate state of the internal operation unit 600 (the state in which the tubular portion 684 is in contact with the lower end of the first elongated hole 672). is formed along an arc with the center of the tubular portion 684 at , and is connected to the lower end of the second elongated hole 673 .

Therefore, while the metal rod-shaped member 686 is guided by the curved elongated hole 674 (between the intermediate state and the overhanging state), the vertical position of the cylindrical portion 684 is maintained, and the metal rod-shaped member 686 is centered on the central axis J1. , the light emitting effect unit 700 is displaced forward about the central axis J1.

When the lift plate member 630 is moved upward from the state of FIG. No direct drive transmission from 630 occurs.

Therefore, until the internal operation unit 600 reaches the intermediate state (see FIG. 421(b)), the cylindrical portion 684 is kept in contact with the lower end of the first elongated hole 672 . When the internal operation unit 600 moves from the intermediate state to the retracted state (see FIG. 421(a)), the cylindrical portion 684 is moved through the box-shaped main body portion 681 to which the metal rod member 686 is fixed. The tubular portion 684 moves upward while being lifted by the lifting plate member 630 .

That is, the displacement of the displacement member 680 accompanying the descent of the lift plate member 630 is designed as a displacement from the state of FIG. 421(a) to the state of FIG. 421(c) via the state of FIG. 421(b). 421(c), through the state of FIG. 421(b), and to the state of FIG. 421(a). be done.

It is the longitudinal long hole 636 that transmits the driving force for these displacements, and the displacement direction is defined as the vertical direction (linear direction). is set to be long enough to allow That is, since it is not necessary to switch the displacement direction of the longitudinal long hole 636 according to the change of the displacement mode of the light emitting effect unit 700, the design of the lift plate member 630 can be simplified.

It should be noted that while the light irradiation direction LD81 of the rotating effect device 800 in the retracted state is set diagonally forward, the light irradiation direction LD81 of the rotating effect device 800 in the overhanging state is set forward, so that the light emission effect unit The displacement angle in the forward roll direction of 700 is designed as an angle slightly smaller than 90 degrees.

As shown in FIGS. 421(a) to 421(c), the reason why the first long hole 672 is formed to be wide is the deformed opening 684b of the cylindrical portion 684 (see FIG. 413(a)). One purpose is to provide a gap large enough to allow the electrical wiring to pass through, since the holes act as wiring holes for the electrical wiring to pass through.

For another purpose, the supporting area (surrounding surface area) can be increased by increasing the diameter of the shaft that is supported when the light emitting effect unit 700 is displaced in the forward rotation direction. As a result, the load (frictional force) generated per unit area of the support portion (first elongated hole 672) can be reduced when displaced due to a change in posture. The durability of the shaped portion 684 and the first long hole 672 can be improved. As a result, it is possible to improve the degree of freedom in designing the material of the member. For example, even if the cylindrical portion 684 is made of a resin material, sufficient durability can be provided.

The second elongated hole 673 and the curved elongated hole 674 are elongated holes for guiding the displacement of the metal rod member 686 and are narrower than the first elongated hole 672 . A driving force generated by the drive motor 648 is transmitted to the metal rod-shaped member 686 via the elevating plate member 630 . Although the metal rod-like member 686 is small in diameter, it is made of metal, does not require electrical wiring to pass through the inside, and is filled inside, so it can exhibit sufficient strength.

Since the widths of the second long hole 673 and the curved long hole 674 are formed to be narrow, the clearance between them and the metal rod-shaped member 686 can be reduced, so that the displacement of the light emitting operation production unit 700 can be stabilized. can.

Therefore, it is possible to reduce misalignment of the metal rod member 686 in the intermediate state of the internal operation unit 600 (the state in which the displacement in the vertical direction and the displacement in the forward rolling direction are switched). Thereby, stepwise switching of the displacement of the light emitting operation production unit 700 can be executed smoothly.

The direction in which the self-weight of the light emitting operation effect unit 700 acts in the process of displacement will be described. In FIGS. 421(a) to 421(c), the center-of-gravity position G1 of the light emitting operation effect unit 700 is illustrated.

Although it is the elevating plate member 630 that regulates the vertical displacement of the displacement member 680 , the tubular portion 684 is not directly supported by the elevating plate member 630 . Therefore, the tubular portion 684 is suspended from the lifting plate member 630 via the box-shaped main body portion 681, the extension portion 683, and the metal rod-shaped member 686, and the displacement is restricted by the first long hole 672. placement is maintained.

Therefore, from the retracted state to the intermediate state of the internal operation unit 600, the dead weight of the light-emitting operation effect unit 700 displaces the cylindrical portion 684 downward along the direction with the metal rod-shaped member 686 as the rotation axis. Since a load in the backward rolling direction centering on the member 686 is generated, the tubular portion 684 is biased forward and obliquely downward by the weight of the light emitting operation effect unit 700 itself.

As a result, the cylindrical portion 684 can be brought into contact with the front side surface of the first elongated hole 672, and the large-diameter ring member 688 (see FIG. 413(a)) can be configured to roll in one direction. Wear of the cylindrical portion 684, the large-diameter ring member 688, and the first elongated hole 672 can be suppressed as compared with the case where the rotation direction is not determined and slides.

On the other hand, from the intermediate state to the extended state of the internal operation unit 600, the cylindrical portion 684 is supported by the first elongated hole 672 (downward displacement is restricted). Therefore, the cylindrical portion 684 is maintained at the lower end of the first long hole 672 by the weight of the light emitting operation effect unit 700, and the metal rod member 686 is directed downward along the direction with the cylindrical portion 684 as the rotation axis. (the load in the forward rotation direction centered on the cylindrical portion 684) is generated, the weight of the light emitting operation effect unit 700 urges the metal rod-shaped member 686 in the direction along the arc centered on the central axis J1. be done.

Therefore, the load when the internal operation unit 600 starts to change state from the intermediate state to the extended state is caused by its own weight, so that the displacement can be caused smoothly. In this embodiment, since the center of gravity position G1 is arranged between the metal rod-shaped member 686 and the cylindrical portion 684 in the front-rear direction, the distance from the metal rod-shaped member 686 and the cylindrical portion 684 serving as the axis to the center of gravity position G1 is can be avoided from becoming excessively long.

As a result, both the load in the direction of rotation about the metal rod-like member 686 and the load in the direction of rotation about the cylindrical portion 684 can be prevented from being excessively large, and can be generated at appropriate sizes.

During vertical displacement of the displacement member 680 , the metal rod member 686 is configured to overtake the cylindrical portion 684 . With this configuration, the cylindrical portion 684 can be stopped and only the metal bar member 686 can be vertically displaced.

Driving force required to start the upward displacement of the displacement member 680 compared to the case where the cylindrical portion 684 is also upwardly displaced when the metal rod member 686 starts to be upwardly displaced from the protruding state of the internal operation unit 600 can be reduced. As a result, the size of the drive motor 648 can be reduced.

In addition, by shortening the vertical displacement width of the tubular portion 684, the vertical displacement width of the electrical wiring inserted through the tubular portion 684 can be shortened. Therefore, it is possible to easily prevent disconnection of the electric wiring.

How the light emitting operation effect unit 700 and the rotation effect device 800 look when viewed from the front will be described. In the present embodiment, by displacing the light emitting operation effect unit 700 in the forward rolling direction, different modes of light emitting effects are executed.

422-424 are front views of the motion unit 500. FIG. 422 to 424, for convenience of explanation, the outlines of the outer rail 62, the decorative portion 247 of the central structural unit 240, and the electrical board 251 are schematically illustrated, and the inside of the decorative portion 247 and the electrical board 251 are shown. It is shown whited out.

In FIGS. 422 to 424, by white-painting the inner side of the decorative portion 247 and the electric decoration board 251, it is expressed that the light transmittance is lowered. In practice, the electrical decoration board 251 is made of an impermeable material and obstructs the player's field of view, but the decoration part 247 is made of a light-transmitting material, so although the light-transmitting property is low, , the player's field of vision passes (through the decorative portion 247, the configuration on the back side can be visually recognized).

In FIG. 422, the retracted state of the internal operation unit 600 is illustrated, in FIG. 423 the intermediate state of the internal operation unit 600 is illustrated, and in FIG. 424 the extended state of the internal operation unit 600 is illustrated.

As shown in FIG. 422, in the retracted state of the internal operation unit 600, the rotation effect device 800 is arranged behind the decoration part 247 and the electric decoration board 251, and most of them are hidden in the front view. Therefore, the visibility of the rotating effect device 800 itself is lowered. In this state, the detected portion 635 enters a detection groove of a detection device (not shown) and is detected by the detection device, thereby confirming that the lift plate member 630 is arranged at the upper end of the vertical displacement. This is determined by the audio ramp controller 113 (see FIG. 4).

Also, in the retracted state of the internal operation unit 600 , the light emitting operation effect unit 700 and the rotation effect device 800 are visually recognized in a state where they are separated by the decoration part 247 . Therefore, the light-emitting operation unit 700 performs a front-facing light effect by irradiating the decorative member 750 with light emitted from the electrical decoration board 741 (see FIG. 414), and the rotating effect device 800 rotates the outer rail 62. Since each light effect can be visually recognized separately when executing an upward light effect by irradiating light toward the user, each light effect can be made conspicuous.

In the present embodiment, the curved surface (surface facing the outer rail 62 in the vertical direction when viewed from the front) and the outer rail 62 are convex upward as the portion to which the light is emitted from the rotating effect device 800. Designed in a similar shape as curved shape.

Therefore, when the rotating effect device 800 is in a posture different from the posture for executing the rotating light emitting effect described later, the rotating effect device 800 is visually recognized as if it were a member for illuminating the outer rail 62. be able to. As a result, the utility value of the rotation effect device 800 in the retracted state of the internal operation unit 600 can be increased, and the appearance of the game board 13 and the operation unit 500 in the retracted state of the internal operation unit 600 can be improved.

As an effective effect performed by the light emitted from the rotating effect device 800 to the outer rail 62, a right-handed suggestive effect is assumed in which the light is visually recognized as if it were moving along the path of the ball. For example, the order of irradiating the light from the rotating effect device 800 is set, starting from the time when the leftmost LED irradiates the range E1 of the outer rail 62 arranged above, to the range E2 of the outer rail 62 with the adjacent LED on the right. , and sequentially changes to the ranges E3 and E4, and the LED that has emitted light is turned off after a certain time (for example, 1 second) from the irradiation timing. , as if the light were moving to the right along the outer rail 62, thereby informing the player that it is time to hit to the right.

In this case, the game board 13 (see FIG. 381) is dotted with decorative boards, or the third pattern display device 81 displays a figure or picture for suggesting a right-handed hit, in order to perform a right-handed suggestion effect. You can save the effort of

Note that the right-handed suggestion effect is not limited to the case of executing only the light emitting effect by the rotation effect device 800, and various modes are exemplified. For example, in addition to the light emitting effect by the rotating effect device 800, the light emitting means arranged on the decorative boards scattered on the game board 13 may be caused to emit light, or in addition to the light emitting effect by the rotating effect device 800. , the third symbol display device 81 may display a figure or a picture for suggesting hitting to the right.

Since the arrangement position of the rotation effect device 800 in the retracted state of the internal operation unit 600 is set on the back side of the upper connecting member 270 made of transparent resin, no nail is arranged in front of the rotation effect device 800.例文帳に追加As a result, there is no influence of the reflection by the nails, so that the light emitted from the rotating effect device 800 can be easily recognized by the player.

In addition, as will be described later, the rotating effect device 800 can execute a rotating light emitting effect in the extended state of the internal operation unit 600. It is used as a device capable of executing a right-handed suggestion effect by shining light on the outer rail 62 in the state. That is, the rotating effect device 800 can be used for different purpose effects.

Note that the light effect executed by the rotating effect device 800 is not limited to the right-handed suggestion effect. For example, as a notice effect that the central light-emitting means 251b of the illumination board 251 as the effect device executes the light-emitting effect, a light effect such as making the player visually recognize an upward arrow may be executed.

As shown in FIG. 423 , in the intermediate state of the internal operation unit 600 , the rotating effect device 800 is arranged below the decoration section 247 . As a result, the visibility of the light emitting operation effect unit 700 and the rotating effect device 800 is increased by the amount not blocked by the decorative portion 247 compared to the retracted state.

Furthermore, compared to the retracted state, it becomes easier to grasp that the light emitting operation effect unit 700 and the rotation effect device 800 are integrally formed, and the vertical interval between the outer rail 62 and the rotation effect device 800 is widened.

Therefore, as a role of the rotating effect device 800, it can be easily recognized as a member that performs light effect integrally with the decorative member 750 of the light emitting operation effect unit 700, instead of a member for illuminating the outer rail 62.例文帳に追加

As a result, in the retracted state of the internal operation unit 600, the central decorative member 751 is a small effect that can be visually recognized, but in the intermediate state, it becomes a large effect including not only the central decorative member 751 but also the rotating effect device 800. It is possible to give the player the illusion of being changed.

As shown in FIG. 424, the rotating effect device 800 is in a posture in which the light irradiation direction LD81 faces the front side when the internal operation unit 600 is in the overhanging state. In this state, when light is emitted from the rotating effect device 800 in the above-described first light emission control mode, the light can be visually recognized as moving rightward along the horizontal direction. This technique also allows the player to grasp the effect of hitting to the right as a suggestive effect.

In addition, unlike the arrangement of the specific winning opening 65a in the game area in this embodiment (see FIG. 394), when the specific winning opening 65a is arranged on the lower right side of the game area, the longitudinal direction of the rotation effect device 800 The orientation of the rotating effect device 800 may be changed so that the position is tilted downward to the right, and light may be emitted in the above-described first light emission control mode in that orientation. In this case, since the specific winning opening 65a is arranged at the destination of the light, the player can easily understand that the ball should be shot toward the specific winning opening 65a.

The rotation effect device 800 is arranged so as to be able to execute a rotation motion of one or more rotations in the extended state of the internal motion unit 600 . The operation speed of the rotating motion is not particularly limited. can be visually recognized (so-called Versalite device may be configured).

In FIG. 424, the detected portion 635 enters a detection groove of a detection device (not shown) to detect that the elevator plate member 630 is positioned at the lower end of the vertical displacement. It can be determined by the audio lamp control device 113 (see FIG. 367) that the rotation axis RJ1 of the member 810 is oriented in the front-rear direction.

By using this detection as a flag, control may be performed so that the rotating light emitting effect of the rotating member 810 can be executed. That is, the detection device for detecting the end of movement of the lifting plate member 630 can also be used as a detection device for detecting the timing at which the rotation light emitting effect of the rotating member 810 can be started.

425 is a front view of operation unit 500. FIG. In FIG. 425, for convenience of explanation, the outlines of the outer rail 62, the decorative portion 247 of the central structural unit 240, and the electrical board 251 are schematically illustrated, and the insides of the decorative portion 247 and the electrical board 251 are painted white. shown as In FIG. 425, the outline of the afterimage in the state in which the rotating member 810 of the rotation effect device 800 is rotating at high speed is illustrated by imaginary lines in the extended state of the internal operation unit 600 .

The high-speed rotation speed of rotating member 810 is not limited at all, and various aspects are exemplified. For example, the rotation speed may be such that the configuration on the back side becomes difficult to visually recognize due to an afterimage, or the rotation speed may be such that the configuration on the back side can be visually recognized through a position where the rotating member 810 is not arranged, although an afterimage occurs.

In FIG. 425, as the light effect (rotating light emitting effect) of the rotating effect device 800, the rotating member 810 is rotated at a rotational speed that makes it difficult to visually recognize the structure on the back side due to the afterimage, and is controlled to be visible during rotation. A state in which an example of a figure (a large arrow pointing to the right) is illustrated is illustrated.

In FIG. 425, for the sake of easy understanding, possible arrangements of the rotating member 810 are illustrated with an angular shift of 45 degrees. It rotates at a speed that makes it difficult to see. By making the graphic visible as shown in FIG. 425, the player can be notified (the player can be made aware that it is time to hit to the right).

A specific implementation method of the rotating light emitting effect will be described. Inside the rotating member 810 , a plurality of LEDs arranged along the longitudinal direction of the rotating member 810 are arranged so that the light travels toward the front side through the arch-shaped transmitting member 814 . Therefore, the diameter of the trajectory (circular path) along which the LED moves when rotating the rotating member 810 around the rotation axis RJ1 varies depending on the distance from the rotation axis RJ1.

In FIG. 425, depending on whether the placement of each LED during movement accompanying the high-speed rotation of the rotating member 810 is inside or outside the figure to be displayed (rightward arrow in FIG. 425), each When the LEDs are switched on and off, the afterimage of the light visually recognized through the arch-shaped transparent member 814 is integrally recognized, so that the player can be made to visually recognize a specific figure (rightward arrow in FIG. 425). .

Since the displayed figure can be changed in various ways by switching the on/off control timing of each LED corresponding to the rotation of the rotating member 810, the degree of freedom of the lighting performance using the rotating member 810 is improved. be able to.

As described above, according to the present embodiment, the rotating effect device 800 can be used to execute a notification effect for the same purpose (right-handed suggesting effect) in various modes. That is, in the retracted state of the internal operation unit 600, it can be executed by irradiating the outer rail 62 with light, and in the extended state of the internal operation unit 600, it can be executed in both a mode in which the rotating effect device 800 is not rotated and a mode in which it is rotated. can do.

Therefore, as compared with the case where there are few variations of the notification effect (for example, there is only one), it is possible to make it difficult to predict the effect. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the player.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the notification effect of suggesting hitting to the right has been described as an example, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and various effects can be exemplified. For example, the direction of the light and the direction of the arrow can be switched alternately left and right, and a notification effect that suggests switching the firing of the ball to the left and right alternately can be used. A notification effect that suggests returning may be performed.

Further, for example, by performing a light emission effect so as to display an arc shape concentric with the outer rail 62 during high-speed rotation in the rotating light effect effect in the extended state, the outer rail 62 is similar to the rotating effect device 800 in the retracted state. It is possible to continue the light emitting effect in accordance with the shape of the body even in the extended state. As a result, it is possible to provide consistency in the light emission effect.

As shown in FIG. 425, the rotating effect device 800 can be rotated at high speed in the extended state of the internal operation unit 600, but the rotating light emitting effect is based on the premise that the rotation axis of the rotating effect device 800 is maintained. Since it is designed, this embodiment employs a structure that supports the rotation effect device 800 so that it is not displaced by a load generated in a direction perpendicular to the rotation axis due to high-speed rotation.

First, the regulation of the lateral displacement of the rotation effect device 800 will be described. The light emitting operation effect unit 700 is held by connecting the connecting holes 764 of the intermediate connecting member 760 to the fastening portion 682 of the displacement member 680. Only one is formed as a substantially circular support hole 764b instead of an elongated hole, and the others are formed as elongated holes 764a.

Here, by making the connecting hole 764 to which the fastening portion 682 is connected to be an elongated hole 764a, it is possible to allow vertical displacement of the displacement members 680 on both left and right sides when displacing the light emitting operation production unit 700 in the vertical direction. (See Fig. 402). On the other hand, if only the elongated holes 764a are used, there is a possibility that the rotation effect device 800 is displaced in the horizontal direction when the rotation effect device 800 rotates at high speed.

On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, by using at least one hole as the support hole 764b, the movement of the fastening portion 682 in the left-right direction can be restricted by the support hole 764b. Even if the device 800 rotates at high speed, it is possible to suppress the positional deviation of the rotating effect device 800 in the left-right direction.

FIGS. 426(a) to 426(c) are schematic front views of the fastening portion 682 of the displacement member 680 and the long hole 764a and support hole 764b of the connected hole 764. FIG. 426(a) to 426(c), the longitudinal direction (horizontal width direction) of the light emitting operation effect unit 700 is schematically illustrated as a schematic straight line 700L.

That is, FIG. 426(a) illustrates a state in which the light emitting operation production unit 700 is maintained in a horizontal posture because the schematic straight line 700L is arranged along the horizontal direction, and FIG. 426(b) illustrates a schematic Since the straight line 700L inclines upward to the left, the state of the tilted posture of the light emitting operation production unit 700 is illustrated at the maximum allowable tilt angle, and in FIG. Therefore, the state in which the light emitting operation effect unit 700 is tilted is illustrated at the maximum allowable tilt angle. 426(a) corresponds to the states shown in FIGS. 399 and 400, and the state shown in FIG. 426(c) corresponds to the state shown in FIG.

As shown in FIGS. 426(a) to 426(c), the inclination of the schematic straight line 700L is caused by rotational displacement with the support hole 764b as the fulcrum. FIG. 426(b) shows the position where the cylindrical portion 689b1 of the front and rear ring member 689 abuts against the left end of the elongated hole 764a located on the upper left of the drawing. 700) (rotation in the clockwise direction when viewed from the front) is allowed.

FIG. 426(c) shows the position where the cylindrical portion 689b1 of the front and rear ring member 689 abuts against the right end of the elongated hole 764a located in the upper right of the drawing. 700) (rotation in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front) is allowed.

Thus, in this embodiment, unlike the case where the support holes 764b are employed at a plurality of positions, it is possible to allow positional deviation of the fastening portions 682 arranged on the left and right sides in the direction of the straight line UD71 along the vertical direction. Therefore, in a configuration in which the vertical movement of the light emitting operation production unit 700 is executed by simultaneously driving the drive motors 648 arranged on the left and right sides, the operation timings of the drive motors 648 are shifted, and the rotation speed varies. can be tolerated.

The rotation of the schematic straight line 700L starting from the support hole 764b is such that when the opening direction of the support hole 764b is the front-rear direction as shown in FIG. Displacement in the movement direction of the plate member 630 (the direction along the straight line UD71, the vertical direction) is allowed.

On the other hand, when the light emitting operation rendering unit 700 is tilted and displaced so that the opening direction of the support hole 764b is substantially vertical (in this embodiment, when the angle is 5 degrees with respect to the vertical direction, that is, when the internal operation When the unit 600 is in the overhanging state, see FIG. 425), the rotational direction of the schematic straight line 700L starting from the support hole 764b is along a plane substantially orthogonal to the straight line UD71 (in this embodiment, the angle with respect to the front-rear direction is 5 degrees) and intersects the straight line UD71 at a substantially right angle.

Elevator plate member 630 is guided by elongated hole 612 (see FIG. 412) so as to be displaced in the direction of straight line UD71, while front-rear displacement is restricted, so front-rear displacement of light emitting operation effect unit 700 is suppressed. It is Therefore, when the rotation direction of the schematic straight line 700L starting from the support hole 764b is along a plane substantially orthogonal to the straight line UD71, the allowable range of rotation of the schematic straight line 700L is suppressed.

That is, even under the condition that the long hole 764a is formed, it is possible to suppress the positional deviation of the light emitting operation effect unit 700 with respect to the elevator plate member 630 in the overhanging state of the internal operation unit 600.

In this case, as described above, by controlling the rotating light emitting effect in which the rotating member 810 rotates at high speed to be executed in the extended state of the internal operation unit 600, the rotation axis RJ1 of the rotating member 810 is arranged to rotate and emit light. It is possible to prevent deviation during production. This makes it possible to omit the arrangement of a separate member for fixing the arrangement of the rotation axis RJ1 of the rotation member 810 .

In addition, in this embodiment, since the support hole 764b is arranged on the opposite side of the rotating member 810 (the rear side in the state of FIG. As a result, it is possible to easily limit misalignment caused by the rotation of the rotating member 810 (displacement caused on the front side of the light emitting operation effect unit 700).

When the light emitting operation effect unit 700 tilts and displaces, the load in the rotational direction causes a load on the intermediate connecting member 760 in the direction away from the displacement member 680 (the direction in which the fastening portion 682 (see FIG. 413) protrudes) (see FIG. 413). 416). Therefore, without countermeasures, the fastening portion 682 may be overloaded and damaged.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, by setting the attitude in which the light emitting operation effect unit 700 is slightly tilted (see FIG. 418) as the initial attitude, the intermediate connecting member 760 moves toward the lower edge of the displacement member 680 before the tilting displacement. It is urged in the approaching direction. That is, since the intermediate coupling member 760 is arranged close to the displacement member 680 on the side close to the cylindrical portion 684 (see FIG. 413(a)) as the rotation shaft of the displacement member 680, the displacement member The load in the direction away from 680 can be easily generated as the load in the rotational direction of displacement member 680, and the load applied to fastening portion 682 can be reduced.

Next, regulation of vertical displacement of the rotation effect device 800 will be described. In this embodiment, the vertical displacement of the contact plate 638 of the elevating plate member 630 can be regulated by the resistance generator 650, and the regulation can be executed in the extended state of the internal operation unit 600. be done.

427-429 are cross-sectional views of operating unit 500 taken along line LXIV-LXIV in FIG. The LXIV-LXIV line is set as a line passing through the center of the plate thickness of the abutted plate 638 (see FIG. 412) of the lifting plate member 630 . The game board 13 is not shown in FIG. 399, but cross-sectional views of the game board 13 in the assembled state are shown in FIGS.

In FIG. 427 the retracted state of the internal operational unit 600 is illustrated, in FIG. 428 the intermediate state of the internal operational unit 600 is illustrated, and in FIG. 429 the extended state of the internal operational unit 600 is illustrated.

FIGS. 427 to 429 illustrate states in which the solenoid 651 is not energized and the solenoid 651 is de-energized. In addition, in FIG. 428, for reference, the state in which the solenoid 651 is energized and the solenoid 651 is energized is shown partially cut away.

As shown in FIGS. 427 and 429, when the solenoid 651 is not energized, the longitudinal displacement member 653 of the resistance generating device 650 is positioned on the front side and enters the moving path of the abutted plate 638 of the elevating plate member 630. .

Both the upper and lower side surfaces of the abutted plate 638 and the upper and lower side surfaces of the front-rear displacement member 653 are formed in a planar shape perpendicular to the vertical direction. As a result, the moving direction (vertical direction) of the abutted plate 638 can be matched with the direction of the load that the abutted plate 638 receives from the upper and lower side surfaces of the front-rear displacement member 653 in the moving direction.

Therefore, since the load applied from the abutted plate 638 to the front-rear displacement member 653 does not have a rearward component, the front-rear displacement member 653 can be prevented from being pushed out to the rear side. Therefore, the state in which the front-rear displacement member 653 is located on the front side is maintained.

In the state shown in FIG. 427, the front-rear displacement member 653 abuts against the abutted plate 638 in the vertical direction and functions to prevent the abutted plate 638 from being displaced downward. That is, even if the driving motor 648 is not energized, the forward/backward displacement member 653 can prevent the elevating plate member 630 from being displaced downward by its own weight, so the internal operation unit 600 can be maintained in the retracted state.

In this embodiment, since the coil spring SP1 (see FIG. 410) exerts an upward biasing force on the lift plate member 630, the biasing force of the coil spring SP1 is applied to the lift plate member 630 when the internal operation unit 600 is in the retracted state. By designing the size to be large enough for maintenance, it is possible to maintain the internal operation unit 600 in the retracted state without causing the forward/backward displacement member 653 to function.

On the other hand, in this case, the biasing force of the coil spring SP1 increases, and the driving force generated in the driving motor 648 to displace the elevating plate member 630 downward increases. may be needed. On the other hand, by adopting the configuration in which the internal operation unit 600 is maintained in the retracted state by the front-rear displacement member 653 as in the present embodiment, the biasing force of the coil spring SP1 can be reduced as an auxiliary force. Therefore, the size of the drive motor 648 can be reduced.

In the state shown in FIG. 429, the front-rear displacement member 653 abuts against the abutted plate 638 in the vertical direction and functions to prevent the abutted plate 638 from being displaced upward. That is, even if the drive motor 648 is not energized, the vertical displacement member 653 can prevent the elevation plate member 630 from being displaced upward, so the internal operation unit 600 can be maintained in the extended state.

As the load that causes the lifting plate member 630 to be displaced upward, load due to inertia during the rotating light emitting effect of the rotating effect device 800 (see FIG. 425) is assumed. That is, when the rotary effect device 800 rotates at high speed, the rotary effect device 800 may be displaced in a direction perpendicular to the rotation axis, but vertical displacement can be prevented by the front-back displacement member 653 .

As described above, in the present embodiment, the longitudinal displacement member 653 not only displaces the elevator plate member 630 downward when the internal operation unit 600 is retracted, but also displaces the elevator plate member 630 upward when the internal operation unit 600 is extended. can also be prevented.

The state shown in FIG. 428 is a state in which the solenoid 651 is energized and energized (see the cut-out range in FIG. 428), the lift plate member 630 is displaced downward, and then the solenoid 651 is de-energized. corresponds to the state of

That is, in the present embodiment, when the solenoid 651 is energized, the longitudinally displacing member 653 retreats from the displacement trajectory of the abutted plate 638, thereby permitting vertical displacement of the elevating plate member 630. Even if the solenoid 651 is de-energized during the vertical displacement of the plate member 630 , the vertical displacement of the elevating plate member 630 is not immediately restricted. The vertical displacement can be continued while sliding on the side surface.

In other words, as modes of the load that the elevating plate member 630 receives during vertical displacement, there are a mode in which the longitudinally displacing member 653 does not contact the abutted plate 638 and therefore no load is received from the longitudinally displacing member 653 , and a mode in which the longitudinally displacing member 653 does not receive the load from the longitudinally displacing member 653 . It is possible to configure a mode in which frictional force is received by contact with 653 , and these can be switched depending on whether or not the solenoid 651 is energized.

Although the shape of the front side surface of the front-rear displacing member 653 that abuts against the abutted plate 638 is not limited at all, in the present embodiment, it is a planar shape extending perpendicularly to the front-rear direction across the pair of upper and lower guide protrusions 614. , and has a curved surface shape that curves away from the abutted plate 638 on the upper and lower outer sides of the guide projecting portion 614 .

As a result, the vertical width of the contact surface with the abutted plate 638, which has a planar shape on which the rear side surface is orthogonal to the front-rear direction, can be widened, and the contact area can be secured. The frictional force applied to the elevator plate member 630 can be increased, and the extent to which the elevator plate member 630 is braked can be increased in both the vertical direction.

As described above, in this embodiment, the front-rear displacement member 653 can brake (or stop) the elevator plate member 630 that is being vertically displaced. That is, the front-rear displacement member 653 is a member for maintaining the arrangement of the elevator plate member 630 at the upper and lower ends (the retracted state and the extended state of the internal operation unit 600), and a member for braking the elevator plate member 630 during displacement. It can also be used as a member.

When the driving force is transmitted to the rack gear portion 634 of the lifting plate member 630 via the meshing transmission gear 649, the rack gear portion 634 of the lifting plate member 630 is urged rearward by its own weight as described above. As a result, the meshing state between the rack gear 634 and the transmission gear 649 is optimized, and the driving force transmission efficiency is improved.

On the other hand, when the lift plate member 630 is braked, the load applied from the front-rear displacement member 653 to the abutted plate 638 is a load directed toward the front side, and acts to move the rack gear 634 away from the transmission gear 649 .

Therefore, when the front-rear displacement member 653 abuts against the abutted plate 638, not only the deceleration effect due to braking by the frictional force generated at the abutting position but also the meshing state between the rack gear 634 and the transmission gear 649 can be improved. It is possible to produce a deceleration effect by making it worse (lowering the degree of meshing to make the driving force transmission efficiency worse). As a result, the lifting plate member 630 can be efficiently braked (decelerated).

An example of switching control of energization of the solenoid 651 will be described. The retracted state of the internal operation unit 600 will be described as a reference. First, before the drive motor 648 starts to be driven, the solenoid 651 is energized to retract the front-rear displacement member 653 from the displacement trajectory of the abutted plate 638 .

As a result, the elevating plate member 630 can be vertically displaced, so that the drive motor 648 is started to move the internal operation unit 600 downward toward the extended state. By de-energizing the solenoid 651 in the state before the extended state (for example, the intermediate state of the internal operation unit 600), the front-rear displacement member 653 is pressed against the abutted plate 638 (see FIG. 428). ), the lift plate member 630 can be braked by the frictional force.

When the internal operation unit 600 reaches the extended state in this state, the abutted plate 638 is arranged below the displacement trajectory of the longitudinally displacing member 653 . side position (see FIG. 429).

Therefore, the action given to the abutted plate 638 by the front-rear displacement member 653 can be smoothly changed from braking to position regulation without switching between energization and non-energization of the solenoid 651 .

On the other hand, when the internal operation unit 600 is displaced upward from the protruding state, the energization of the solenoid 651 is maintained while the elevating plate member 630 is displaced in the vertical direction, so that the front-rear displacement member 653 moves to the abutment plate. 638 can be kept out of contact. As a result, it is possible to prevent the generation of frictional resistance between the front-rear displacement member 653 and the abutted plate 638, so that the driving force required for upward displacement of the elevating plate member 630 can be reduced. The size of the motor 648 can be reduced.

It will be described that the mode of the rotation operation of the rotation effect device 800 changes in response to the state change of the internal operation unit 600. FIG. In the present embodiment, the attitude of the rotation effect device 800 changes as the attitude of the light emitting operation effect unit 700 changes in the forward or backward direction. Change.

430 to 432 are cross-sectional views of the game board 13 and the action unit 500 along line LXVII-LXVII in FIG. The LXVII-LXVII line corresponds to the line passing through the center of the width dimension of the tubular member 695 (see FIG. 400) of the rotational posture assisting member 690. FIG. Although the game board 13 is not shown in FIG. 399, cross-sectional views of the game board 13 in the arrangement in the assembled state are shown in FIGS.

In FIG. 430, the extended state of the internal operation unit 600 is illustrated, in FIGS. 431(a) and 431(b), the intermediate state of the internal operation unit 600 is illustrated, and in FIGS. 432(a) and 432(b). ), the retracted state of the internal operating unit 600 is illustrated. That is, FIGS. 430 to 432 show how the internal operation unit 600 changes from the extended state to the retracted state via the intermediate state in chronological order.

Note that FIGS. 431(a) and 432(a) show the rotating member 810 in a proper posture in which the longitudinal direction of the rotating member 810 is along the horizontal direction, and FIGS. The front end of the member 810 is shown reaching the end of the allowed rearward travel.

That is, FIG. 431(b) shows a state in which the end of the rotating member 810 is in contact with the bottom wall portion 511 of the rear case 510 (FIG. 431(b) shows a non-contact state, 432(b), the end portion of the rotating member 810 is in contact with the cylindrical member 695 of the rotational posture assisting member 690. The contacting state is illustrated (in FIG. 432(b), it is illustrated as non-contacting, but it is contacting on the right side of the illustrated cross section (FIG. 432(b) on the front side of the paper surface)) .

In the extended state of the internal operation unit 600 shown in FIG. 430, the rotating member 810 of the rotating effect device 800 makes one turn or more (360 degrees or more) in the rotational direction RD1 about the rotation axis RJ1, for example, rotating light emitting effect. is configured to allow rotational movement of the That is, the decorative portion 247 and the like arranged on the center frame 86 are arranged at positions that do not enter the motion locus of the rotating member 810 of the rotating effect device 800 .

In FIG. 431, since the bottom wall portion 511 of the back case 510 is disposed on the back side of the rotating member 810 of the rotating effect device 800, the rotatable angle of the rotating member 810 of the rotating effect device 800 is It is limited to an angle until it displaces in the rotational direction RD1 and comes into contact with the rear case 510 (see FIG. 431(b)).

Basically, the posture of the rotating member 810 of the rotating effect device 800 is controlled so that the longitudinal direction of the rotating member 810 of the rotating effect device 800 is along the left-right direction before the state of the internal operation unit 600 changes from the extended state to the intermediate state. (controlled to a proper posture) and then controlled to change the state toward the intermediate state, the possibility of collision between the rotating member 810 and the bottom wall portion 511 is low.

In the present embodiment, even if the rotating member 810 of the rotating effect device 800 collides with the bottom wall portion 511 due to erroneous control, the rotating member 810 is positioned above the upper edge of the opening 511a of the bottom wall portion 511. Since it is arranged so as to collide with the wall portion 511 , it is possible to avoid a situation in which the rotating member 810 collides with the third pattern display device 81 .

In FIG. 432, since the cylindrical member 695 of the rotational attitude assisting member 690 is arranged on the back side of the rotating member 810 of the rotating effect device 800, the rotatable angle of the rotating member 810 of the rotating effect device 800 is 810 is displaced in the rotational direction RD1 and is limited to an angle until it comes into contact with the tubular member 695. FIG. That is, the rotatable angle of the rotating member 810 of the rotation effect device 800 is smaller in the retracted state (see FIG. 432(b)) than in the intermediate state (see FIG. 431(b)).

In the present embodiment, when the rotating member 810 is rotationally displaced until it abuts against the bottom wall portion 511 in the intermediate state of the internal operation unit 600, the state change continues until the internal operation unit 600 is in the retracted state. However, in the process of the state change (upward displacement of the light emitting operation effect unit 700), the rotation member 810 contacts the tubular member 695 and is pushed forward, so that the posture difference from the proper posture of the rotation member 810 is increased. The orientation of the rotating member 810 is configured to be modified so that it becomes smaller.

Since the rotating member 810 has a symmetrical shape in its proper posture (see FIG. 424) and the cylindrical member 695 is arranged at a laterally symmetrical position, if a difference in posture of the rotating member 810 occurs between the left and right, Also, the posture of the rotating member 810 is corrected so that the posture difference from the appropriate posture of the rotating member 810 is reduced (regardless of the direction of rotation about the rotation axis RJ1).

Since the rotating member 810 rotates about the rotation axis RJ1, the rotating member 810 is displaced toward the back side and contacts the tubular member 695 (one left and right side, see FIG. 432). side), the rotary member 810 comes close to the base plate 60 . If the posture deviates significantly from the proper posture, the rotating member 810 may rub against the base plate 60 and the rotating member 810 may be worn or damaged by collision.

On the other hand, due to the function of the cylindrical member 695 as described above, the posture of the rotating member 810 changes toward returning to the proper posture in the process of changing the state of the internal operation unit 600 toward the retracted state. The rotating members 810 on the other left and right sides can be displaced in a direction away from the base plate 60 . Thereby, contact between rotating member 810 and base plate 60 can be avoided.

As described above, the cylindrical member 695 is a member that contacts the rotating member 810 and functions to push the rotating member 810 forward. It is formed in a cylindrical shape. That is, the cylindrical member 695 rotates when it comes into contact with the rotating member 810 so that the rotating member 810 is not left with scratches.

In order to maintain this function, it is preferable to omit the decorative shape as much as possible. there is a possibility.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the cylindrical member 695 is arranged on the retracted position side (upper side and rear side) from the arrangement of the rotating member 810 in the extended state of the internal operation unit 600, so that the cylindrical member 695 attention to can be reduced.

Furthermore, in the retracted state of the internal operation unit 600, the cylindrical member 695 is designed to be arranged on the back side of the rotating member 810 (see FIG. 399), so the visibility of the cylindrical member 695 is increased by the rotating member 810. can be lowered.

Therefore, the shape of the cylindrical member 695 is designed to be an optimum shape for avoiding wear of the rotating member 810, and the visibility of the cylindrical member 695 is lowered so that the cylindrical member 695 can be seen by the player. Therefore, the game can be continued without discomfort.

A description will be given of the light effect that can be achieved by changing the attitude of the rotating member 810 when the internal operation unit 600 is retracted. As described above, in the retracted state of the internal operation unit 600, the outer rail 62 is irradiated with the light emitted from the rotation effect device 800, and the effect of causing the outer rail 62 to emit light is possible.

In addition, by changing the attitude of the rotating member 810 around the rotation axis RJ1, one of the rotating tip portions of the rotating member 810 can be displaced forward. For example, in FIG. 432(b), since the tip of the rotation on the back side (left side) of the paper can be brought closer to the front side, the left side of the outer rail 62 can emit brighter light, and the right side can emit slightly darker light. Further, by reversing the direction of change in posture of the rotating member 810, the difference in brightness between left and right can be reversed.

As a result, an effect can be executed in which the light emission intensity of the outer rail 62 is changed for each part. For example, without changing the emission intensity of light irradiation from the rotating member 810, the posture of the rotating member 810 is repeatedly changed so as to reciprocate in the rotation direction about the rotation axis RJ1. The apparent brightness of the light can be alternately switched between left and right.

A description will be given of the light effect that can be achieved by changing the attitude of the rotating member 810 in the intermediate state of the internal operation unit 600 . As described above, in the intermediate state of the internal operation unit 600, the attitude of the rotating member 810 can be changed by an angle larger than that in the retracted state. Therefore, the light emitted from the rotating effect device 800 is applied to the outer rail 62, and the arrival position of the light in the effect of causing the outer rail 62 to emit light can be positioned further to the front side.

As a result, even if the rotating member 810 equipped with a light emitting means such as an LED moves away from the outer rail 62, the light is reflected on the outer rail 62 by changing the position where light is reflected on the front side (player side). It is possible to make the change in the intensity of the emitted and reflected light inconspicuous from the player's point of view.

In addition, the reach of the light is not limited to the outer rail 62, and the light is also directed to the portions located away from the outer rail 62, such as the sixth projecting portion 277 of the upper connecting member 270 (see FIG. 389). can be reached.

The rotation member 810 swings about the rotation axis RJ1 arranged at the center position in the left and right direction. From the viewpoint of strength, it is possible to assist the light production in the range (left and right outer positions) that is difficult to cover with the illumination board 251 that is designed to be arranged at the center position in the left and right.

As a result, even when the arrangement of the electrical board 251 is limited, the performance of the light performance at the place where the electrical board 251 is not arranged can be achieved by the rotating performance device 800 arranged in the operation unit 500. It can be improved by lighting effect.

<Nineteenth Embodiment>
Next, the nineteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In the seventeenth embodiment, the recesses 982e, 982f, and 982g for discharging game balls from the first passage TR1 or the second passage TR2 are arranged on the left and right sides of the first passage TR1 or the second passage TR2. However, in the sorting unit 3980 of the nineteenth embodiment, the ball discharge path is formed in front of the bulging portion 3982 forming the first passage TR1 and the second passage TR2. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

433(a) is a front view of the sorting unit 3980 in the nineteenth embodiment, and FIG. 433(b) is a rear view of the sorting unit 3980. FIG. As shown in FIGS. 433(a) and 433(b), the sorting unit 3980 is configured such that balls can be discharged to the front side upstream of the openings 985e and 985f.

That is, the front base 3981 of the sorting unit 3980 has a pair of openings 3982k penetrating through the bulging portion 982, and the balls discharged to the front side of the bulging portion 982 through the openings 3982k to the left. and a discharge gutter 3982l for flowing down and discharging to the back side.

The opening 3982k is arranged on the front side of the first passage TR1 or the second passage TR2, and is formed in a rectangular shape through which the ball flowing down the first passage TR1 or the second passage TR2 can pass. .

The discharge gutter 3982l has a laterally long portion inclined downward to the left, and a longitudinally long portion formed at the left end thereof inclined downward to the rear. Therefore, the ball passing through the opening 3982k from the first passage TR1 or the second passage TR2 and riding on the discharge gutter 3982l flows leftward along the discharge gutter 3982l, and at the left end position, the flowing direction switches to the rear side, pushed backwards.

In this embodiment, the discharge gutter 3982l is configured to receive balls on both sides of the pair of openings 3982k, thereby reducing the number of parts and reducing the parts cost. A gutter 3982l may be provided. In this case, the discharge gutter 3982l arranged on the front side of the left opening 3982k is inclined downward to the left, and the discharge gutter 3982l arranged on the front side of the right opening 3982k is inclined downward to the right. By slanting, the length of the discharge gutter 3982l alone can be shortened.

The appearance of the sphere that has passed through the inflow port 982d will be described. The front base 3981 is made of a colored translucent (blue in this embodiment) resin material, and the ball passing through the inflow port 982d and flowing down the rear side of the bulging portion 982 can be visually recognized through the bulging portion 982. can do.

On the other hand, since the first passage TR1 and the second passage TR2 through which the balls flow down are formed to extend to the rear of the electric role object 140a, the electric role object 140a serves as a shield in the range behind the electric role object 140a. It works and the visibility of the ball becomes worse.

If the difference between whether or not the ball is detected by the detection device SE3 occurs in the downstream direction of the ball in the range behind the electric accessory 140a, it is necessary to pay attention to the ball in the range with poor visibility. can make you feel tired.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, the ball that deviates from the path toward the detection device SE3 flows toward the front side through the opening 3982k. Since it occurs above the range hidden by the accessory 140a, it is possible to ensure the visibility of the ball that has passed through the inflow port 982d and that flows in the direction away from the detection device SE3.

As a result, when the ball passes through the inflow port 982d and the special symbol lottery does not occur, it can be easily understood that the result is due to the ball deviating from the detection device SE3.

Other contrivances regarding the shape of the sorting unit 3980 will be described. In the present embodiment, instead of forming an opening 3982k to secure a discharge path for balls, in the rear base 3985, the formation of openings 985b and 985c (see FIG. 371) is omitted from the rear base 985 in the seventeenth embodiment. , and the lateral width near the lower end of the bulging portion 982 is correspondingly shortened.

As a result, the horizontal width of the sorting unit 3980 can be shortened, so that the shape of the through hole 60a (see FIG. 368) of the base plate 60 can be reduced, thereby reducing the thickness of the base plate 60. The area for the implantable part) can be secured. As a result, the degree of freedom in arranging the nails can be improved.

In addition, since the nail can be arranged in the vicinity of the electric accessory 140a, it is possible to improve the degree of freedom in arranging the nail for guiding the ball to the electric accessory 140a.

<Twentieth Embodiment>
Next, a twentieth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In the seventeenth embodiment, the recesses 982e, 982f, and 982g for discharging game balls from the first passage TR1 or the second passage TR2 are arranged on the left and right sides of the first passage TR1 or the second passage TR2. However, in the sorting unit 4980 of the twentieth embodiment, the ball discharge path is formed on the rear side of the rear base 4985 that forms the rear side of the first passage TR1 and the second passage TR2. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

FIG. 434(a) is a front view of the sorting unit 4980 in the twentieth embodiment, and FIG. 434(b) is a rear view of the sorting unit 4980. FIG. As shown in FIGS. 434(a) and 434(b), the sorting unit 4980 is configured such that balls can be discharged to the rear side upstream of the openings 985e and 985f.

That is, the rear base 4985 of the sorting unit 4980 has a pair of left and right openings 4985k penetrating therethrough. and a discharge gutter 4985l for discharging.

The opening 4985k is arranged on the back side of the first passage TR1 or the second passage TR2, and is formed in a rectangular shape through which the ball flowing down the first passage TR1 or the second passage TR2 can pass. .

The discharge gutter 4985l has a laterally long portion inclined downward to the left, and a longitudinally long portion formed at the left end thereof inclined downward to the rear. Therefore, the ball passing through the opening 4985k from the first passage TR1 or the second passage TR2 and riding on the discharge gutter 4985l is flowed leftward along the discharge gutter 4985l, and the flowing direction switches to the rear side at the left end position, pushed backwards.

The discharge gutter 4985l is arranged on the rear side of the rear base 4985, and is arranged away from the player, but the front base 981 and the rear base 4985 arranged on the front side are made of translucent resin material. Therefore, the player can visually recognize the discharge gutter 4985l and the ball rolling on the discharge gutter 4985l through the front base 981 and the rear base 4985. FIG.

In this embodiment, the discharge gutter 4985l is configured to receive balls on both sides of the pair of openings 4985k, thereby reducing the number of parts and reducing the parts cost. A gutter 4985l may be provided. In this case, the ball can be discharged by flowing it at least rearward from each opening 4985l, so it is not necessary to form the discharge gutter 4985l long in the left and right direction. Thereby, the shape of the discharge gutter 4985l can be simplified.

According to the configuration of this embodiment in which the discharge gutter 4985l is formed on the back side, the discharge gutter 4985l can be prevented from being conspicuous. can be avoided from being affected by the discharge gutter 4985l. Therefore, the degree of freedom in designing the decorative pattern of the base plate 60 can be improved.

Other contrivances regarding the shape of the sorting unit 4980 will be described. In the present embodiment, instead of forming the opening 4985k to secure the ball discharge path, the rear base 4985 does not have the openings 985b and 985c (see FIG. 371) formed in the rear base 985 of the seventeenth embodiment. , and the lateral width near the lower end of the bulging portion 982 is correspondingly shortened.

As a result, the horizontal width of the sorting unit 4980 can be shortened, so that the shape of the through hole 60a (see FIG. 368) of the base plate 60 can be reduced, thereby reducing the thickness of the thick portion of the base plate 60. The area for the implantable part) can be secured. As a result, the degree of freedom in arranging the nails can be improved.

In addition, since the nail can be arranged in the vicinity of the electric accessory 140a, it is possible to improve the degree of freedom in arranging the nail for guiding the ball to the electric accessory 140a.

According to the configuration in which the opening 4985k is formed on the back side, compared to the configuration in which the opening is formed on the front side (see FIG. 433), the vertical arrangement of the opening 4985k is designed arbitrarily regardless of the arrangement of the electric accessory 140a. It becomes possible. Therefore, the probability that the ball flowing down the first path TR1 or the second path TR2 is detected by the detection device SE3 without deviating (passes through the detection hole SE1a) can be adjusted from the shape.

For example, when the vertical width of the opening 4985k is designed to be equal to the diameter of the sphere, most of the spheres flowing down the first passage TR1 or the second passage TR2 do not pass through the opening 4985k and are detected by the detection device SE3. It passes through the hole SE1a.

On the other hand, when the vertical width of the opening 4985k is designed to be 1.5 times the diameter of the sphere, about 20% of the spheres flowing down the first passage TR1 or the second passage TR2 pass through the opening 4985k, and the remainder passes through the opening 4985k. 80% pass through the detection hole SE1a of the detection device SE3. That is, by arbitrarily designing the length of the vertical width of the opening 4985k, the probability of detection by the detection device SE3 can be adjusted.

<21st Embodiment>
Next, a twenty-first embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 435 and 436. FIG. In the eighteenth embodiment, the ball reaching the upper connecting member 270 is smoothly guided left and right. However, in the upper connecting member 5270 of the twenty-first embodiment, smooth guidance of the ball in the left and right direction is suppressed. Various ingenuity is applied. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

435 is a partially enlarged front view of the game board 13 in the twenty-first embodiment, and FIG. 436 is a partial cross-sectional view of the game board 13 along line LXXIII-LXXIII in FIG.

As shown in FIG. 435 , the upper component member 5241 forming the center frame 86 has left and right projecting portions 5246 projecting from the belt-shaped frame portion 245 toward the second projecting portion 5273 . The second protruding portion 5273 has a reduction projection portion 5273a projecting from the lower end toward the left and right positions of the reduction projection portion 5246 .

According to the present embodiment, the ball flowing down between the pair of left and right first projecting portions 272 or between the first projecting portion 272 and the second projecting portion 5273 reaches the belt-shaped frame portion 245, When it rolls to the left and right, it flows down so as to be ejected from the left and right projections 5246 to the left and right outer sides, collides with the deceleration projections 5273a, and is decelerated.

That is, the ball has a great momentum and a large kinetic energy so that it reaches between the pair of left and right first projecting portions 272 or between the first projecting portion 272 and the second projecting portion 5273. The speed can be reduced by collision with the deceleration projection 5273a.

The overlapping width (vertical dimension) of the contact of the ball with the deceleration projecting portion 5273 a differs depending on the velocity of the ball when passing through the left and right projecting portions 5246 . That is, a ball passing through the left and right projections 5246 at a high speed comes into contact with the deceleration projections 5273a at a higher position in a wide range, while a ball passing the left and right projections 5246 at a low speed contacts the deceleration projections 5273a. It is displaced to a lower position before coming into contact with the portion 5273a, and is kept in contact with the deceleration projecting portion 5273a to such an extent that it rubs against it.

Therefore, when the speed when passing through the left and right protrusions 5246 is high, a large deceleration effect can be expected. You can avoid the ball coming to rest.

According to this embodiment, the ball that is launched along the launch path HL51 with a strong launch force and reaches the belt-shaped frame portion 245 on the upstream side (left and right inner side) of the left and right projecting portions 5246 has a While a decelerating action is generated by abutting the decelerating projecting portion 5273a, the ball is launched along the projectile path HL52 with a weaker projectile force and reaches the belt-shaped frame portion 245 on the downstream side (left and right outside) of the left and right projecting portions 5246. , the decelerating projection 5273a does not produce a decelerating action.

That is, the ball fired with a strong firing force reaching the left and right center of the game area is decelerated by the deceleration projecting portion 5273a, and is shot with a weak firing force reaching the left and right outside (left side) of the game area. The decelerating projecting portion 5273a does not produce a decelerating effect on the ball. As a result, it is possible to reduce the difference in velocity of the ball flowing down (flowing down when passing the lower end side of the belt-shaped frame portion 245) depending on the magnitude of the launch force (magnitude of kinetic energy).

As shown in FIG. 436, the upper surface of the third projecting portion 5274 is formed with an opening 5274a having a size through which the ball can pass. The opening 5274a is formed with a lateral width approximately equal to the diameter of the sphere, and forms a sphere passage jointly with the concave portion 5271a formed by cutting out the plate-like portion 271 . The concave portion 5271a can facilitate guiding the ball toward the opening 5274a.

A through passage 5060d is formed through the base plate 60 in the front-rear direction as a passage for a ball entering the opening 5274a. On the back side of the base plate 60, a passage forming member 5295 is fastened and fixed, which has a guide passage 5295a that receives the ball that has passed through the through passage 5060d and guides the ball outward to the left, right, and downward.

The guide flow path 5295a is connected to the flow path rear configuration part 266 (see FIG. 388) as a member for sending balls to the upper surface of the strip-shaped extension part 263 so as to communicate the internal path. As a result, the path of the ball can be configured so that the ball that has flowed to the back side of the base plate 60 appears again on the upper surface of the strip-shaped extension portion 263 .

A ball rolling on the belt-shaped extension 263 (see FIG. 387) passes through the central rear inclined portion 263a and is discharged from the ball discharge hole 263c, then falls toward the first winning port 64 (see FIG. 381). Due to such a positional relationship, the ball rolling on the belt-shaped extension 263 is highly likely to enter the first winning hole 64 .

Therefore, it is possible to improve attention to the sphere that has flowed to the back side of the base plate 60 through the opening 5274a. In addition, the player's motivation to adjust the launch force so that the ball passes through the opening 5274a can be enhanced.

In addition, the downstream path of the ball that has flowed to the back side is not limited at all, and various modes are exemplified. For example, through holes may be formed in the base plate 60 so as to return to the front side of the base plate 60 at the left and right outside positions of the flow path front component 265 (see FIG. 381), or the left component 450 and the right component 450 may be formed. A flow-down path may be extended downward so as to flow down behind the component component 470 .

When the flow path extends downward so as to flow down behind the left component member 450 and the right component member 470, the flow path is at least partially aligned with the outer drop path FL2 (see FIG. 394) in front view. By arranging them so as to overlap each other, it is possible to make it look as if the ball flowing down the back side of the base plate 60 flows down toward the first ball guide portion 457 . As a result, attention to the ball flowing down the back side of the base plate 60 can be improved.

<22nd Embodiment>
Next, a twenty-second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 437 and 438. FIG. In the eighteenth embodiment, the light emitting operation effect unit 700 is arranged on the back side of the game board 13, but in the twenty-second embodiment, the light emitting action effect unit 6700 is arranged on the front side of the game board 13. . In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

437 and 438 are partial cross-sectional views of the pachinko machine 6010 in the twenty-second embodiment along the line corresponding to line LV-LV in FIG. 399. FIG. FIG. 437 illustrates a state in which the light emitting operation effect unit 6700 is arranged at the upper end position, and FIG. 438 illustrates a state in which the light emitting operation effect unit 6700 is arranged at the lower end position.

As shown in FIGS. 437 and 438, the pachinko machine 6010 has a front frame 6014 on the front side of the game board 13. With the front frame 6014 locked to the outer frame 11, the first glass unit 6016a is opened. It is configured to block the front side of the game area.

The front frame 6014 includes the above-described first glass unit 6016a, and a second glass unit 6016b arranged closer to the front side in a tilted posture that tilts upward toward the front side.

The first glass unit 6016a has a plate-like glass portion formed on the game area side with respect to the center frame 86, and an opening portion 6016c is formed on the opposite side thereof. That is, since the front of the center frame 86 is open in the first glass unit 6016a, the glass unit 6016a does not block the field of vision when viewed from the front. The visibility of the display of 81 can be improved.

The second glass unit 6016b is fixed by being fitted inside a supporting portion 6014a forming the periphery of the front frame 6014. As shown in FIG. Since the second glass unit 6016b separates the player from the action unit 500, even if the opening 6016c is formed in the first glass unit 6016a, the situation in which the player touches the action unit 500 is avoided. be able to.

The support portion 6014a is made of an impermeable resin material and a metal material, and functions to hide the structure arranged on the rear side thereof.

The light emitting operation effect unit 6700 is the same as the light emitting operation effect unit 700 described in the eighteenth embodiment, except that the arrangement is different. That is, the rotating effect device 800 is rotatably arranged in the light emitting operation effect unit 6700 .

Inside the front frame 6014, there are a first long hole 6672, a second long hole 6673 and a curved long hole having the same shape as the first long hole 672, the second long hole 673 and the curved long hole 674 described in the eighteenth embodiment. 6674 is formed in a state inclined about 25 degrees in the forward roll direction with respect to the posture in the eighteenth embodiment.

A change in appearance of the light emitting operation effect unit 6700 due to a change in arrangement will be described. As shown in FIG. 437, when the light emitting operation effect unit 6700 is arranged at the upper end position, the central decorative member 751 is barely visible, and the whole view of the rotating member 810 is hidden by the support portion 6014a of the front frame 6014. That is, when the light emitting operation effect unit 6700 is arranged at the upper end position, the visibility of the light emitting operation effect unit 6700 is lowered.

On the other hand, when the light emitting operation effect unit 6700 is displaced obliquely backward, the part hidden by the support part 6014a is arranged behind the second glass unit 6016b, and the whole view of the rotating member 810 becomes visible. Further, even when the rotating member 810 rotates at high speed around the rotating shaft RJ1 to perform the rotating light emitting effect, the player can visually recognize the rotating tip side of the rotating member 810. - 特許庁That is, when the light emitting operation effect unit 6700 is arranged at the lower end position, the visibility of the light emitting operation effect unit 6700 is improved.

438, the locus of rotation of the rotating member 810 enters the thickness dimension of the first glass unit 6014a, and an opening 6016c is formed at the position where it entered. , to avoid contact between the first glass unit 6014a and the rotating member 810. As shown in FIG. That is, the opening 6016c functions to improve the freedom of arrangement of the rotating member 810 by avoiding contact with the rotating member 810 .

In this embodiment, a light emitting operation effect unit 6700 is arranged on the front side of the game board 13, while a light emitting action effect unit 700 is arranged on the back side of the game board 13. The operation mode of the light emitting operation rendering unit 700 is as described above in the eighteenth embodiment.

Therefore, according to the present embodiment, the light emitting operation effect unit 6700 may be moved toward the lower end position as the effect operation of projecting the movable unit to the front side of the display area of the third pattern display device 81, or the light emission may be performed. The action rendering unit 700 may be in the extended state of the internal action unit 600. - 特許庁

Moreover, the rotating light emitting effect of the rotating effect device 800 may be executed by the rotating member 810 of the light emitting operation effect unit 700 or by the rotating member 810 of the light emitting operation effect unit 6700 . As a result, it is possible to improve the degree of freedom in setting the execution position of the rotating light-emitting effect, and to perform variations (either the light-emitting operation effect unit 700 or the light-emitting operation effect unit 6700 performs the rotating light-emitting effect, or rotates alternately). It is possible to improve the degree of freedom in design (variations such as whether to execute the light emission effect or simultaneously execute the rotating light emission effect).

In addition, although the case where the light emitting operation production unit 700 is arranged also in the back case 510 has been described, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the light emitting operation effect unit 700 may not be arranged inside the rear case 510 .

In this case, since the visual field is not blocked by the light-emitting operation effect unit 700 when the internal operation unit 600 is retracted, the upper edge of the third symbol display device 81 is pulled upward to display the third symbol display device 81. The area of the regions can be increased. In addition, since the front-rear width of the back case 510 required for housing the light emitting operation production unit 700 can be shortened, the front-rear interval between the center frame 86 and the third pattern display device 81 can be shortened. The visibility of the display by the third pattern display device 81 can be improved.

<Twenty-third embodiment>
Next, the twenty-third embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In the eighteenth embodiment, the metal rod-shaped member 686 is guided by the linear second elongated hole 673 and the curved elongated hole 674, so that the light emitting operation production unit 700 moves in parallel. A case has been described in which the light emitting operation effect unit 700 rotates about the central axis J1 of the tubular portion 684, and the state in which the light emitting operation effect unit 700 rotates is switched. It is formed in a ridge shape. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

439(a) to 439(c) are schematic side views of the guide portion 7673 and the L-shaped elongated hole 7674, which schematically show the guide portion 7673 and the L-shaped elongated hole 7674 in the twenty-third embodiment. FIG. 439(a) illustrates the arrangement of features at the height of the retracted state of the internal operating unit 600, and FIG. 439(b) illustrates the arrangement of the features at the height of the intermediate state of the internal operating unit 600, In FIG. 439(c), the placement of the configuration at height in the extended state of the internal operating unit 600 is illustrated.

As can be seen from the fact that the cylindrical portion 684 is displaced rearward, the arrangement of the light emitting operation effect unit 700 in the extended state is the same as that of the internal operation unit 600 described in the eighteenth embodiment. It shifts backward from the arrangement of the light emitting operation effect unit 700 in the state.

The guide portions 7673 are formed along the extending direction of the second elongated holes 673 described in the eighteenth embodiment, and are formed on the left and right inner surfaces of the outer member 610 as plate-like portions extending downward. , are arranged to restrict the longitudinal displacement of the metal rod-shaped member 686 . The L-shaped elongated hole 7674 is formed with a concave portion 7674a having a width capable of receiving the tubular portion 684 toward the rear from the lower end portion of the curved elongated hole 674 described in the eighteenth embodiment.

The downward displacement of the displacement member 680 will be described. The displacement from FIG. 439( a ) to FIG. 439( b ) is parallel movement that is performed while the posture of the displacement member 680 is maintained. In the displacement from FIG. 439(b) to FIG. 439(c), the metal rod member 686 is rotationally displaced about the cylindrical portion 684, and the displacement member 680 tilts forward.

At this time, the tubular portion 684 is displaced in the front-rear direction in such a manner as to enter and retreat from the concave portion 7674a because the distance from the metal rod-shaped member 686 is maintained. That is, while the displacement member 680 is changing its posture, the position of the tubular portion 684 is not maintained. be able to.

<24th Embodiment>
Next, the twenty-fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In the eighteenth embodiment, the case where the second elongated hole 673 for guiding the metal rod member 686 extends along the vertical direction has been described. extending along the direction of the slope. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

Figures 440(a) to 440(c) schematically show the second long hole 8673, the curved long hole 8674, the third long hole 8675, the first long hole upper part 8672a and the first long hole lower part 8672b in the twenty-fourth embodiment. Fig. 10 is a schematic side view of a second elongated hole 8673, a curved elongated hole 8674, a third elongated hole 8675, a first elongated hole upper portion 8672a and a first elongated hole lower portion 8672b.

FIG. 440(a) shows a state in which the metal rod-shaped member 686 and the cylindrical portion 684 are arranged at the upper end position of the displacement range, and FIG. FIG. 440(c) shows a state in which the metal rod-like member 686 is arranged in a position to connect the curved long hole 8674 and the third long hole 8675. be.

The first elongated hole upper portion 8672a and the second elongated hole 8673 extend rearward in a downwardly inclined direction at an inclination angle of about 70 degrees with respect to the front-rear direction. A curved long hole 8674 is connected to the lower end of the second long hole 8673 .

The curved elongated hole 8674 is curved along an arc centered on the central axis J81 of the tubular portion 684 in a state where the tubular portion 684 is arranged at the connecting position between the first elongated hole upper portion 8672a and the first elongated hole lower portion 8672b. It is extended in shape.

The upper end of the third elongated hole 8675 is connected to the lower end of the curved elongated hole 8674 . The first long hole lower part 8672b and the third long hole 8675 connected to the lower end of the first long hole upper part 8672a extend forward in a downwardly inclined direction at an inclination angle of about 70 degrees with respect to the front-rear direction. be done.

The metal rod-like member 686 is inserted through the longitudinally elongated hole 636 of the elevating plate member 630, and changes its vertical position as the elevating plate member 630 moves in the vertical direction. Displacement of the displacement member 680 accompanying a change in the arrangement of the metal rod-shaped member 686 will be described.

The displacement from FIG. 440(a) to FIG. 440(b) is parallel movement performed while the posture of the displacement member 680 is maintained. At this time, the displacement direction of the displacement member 680 is not a vertical direction but a direction having a component in the front-rear direction. From the player's point of view, the displacement member 680 looks like it is retreating backward while descending, so the size of the light emitting operation effect unit 700 becomes smaller as the light emitting operation effect unit 700 descends and appears. (walking away) can be shown.

In the displacement from FIG. 440(b) to FIG. 440(c), the metal rod member 686 is rotationally displaced around the cylindrical portion 684, so that the displacement member 680 tilts forward. Along with this, it is possible to switch the visible surface of the light emitting operation effect unit 700 . In this embodiment, the tilt angle is larger than in the eighteenth embodiment, so that the player can visually recognize the back side of the rotating member 810 (see FIG. 414).

At this time, the tubular portion 684 is displaced in the front-rear direction in such a manner as to enter and retreat from the concave portion 7674a because the distance from the metal rod-shaped member 686 is maintained. That is, while the displacement member 680 is changing its posture, the position of the tubular portion 684 is not maintained. be able to.

When the metal rod member 686 is displaced further downward from the state shown in FIG. 440(c), the displacement member 680 is displaced forward along the third long hole 8675. Therefore, it is possible to make it appear to the player that the displacement member 680 is protruding forward while being lowered. At this time, the forward protrusion can be emphasized by the amount of the temporary backward displacement along the second elongated hole 8673 .

In the present embodiment, the displacement resistance of the cylindrical portion 684 is increased in a state where the cylindrical portion 684 is arranged at the connecting position between the first long hole upper portion 8672a and the first long hole lower portion 8672b. . That is, in FIG. 440(b), the inner surface of the first elongated hole lower portion 8672b, which contacts the rear side portion of the cylindrical portion 684, is subjected to friction with other portions of the first elongated hole lower portion 8672b and the inner surface of the first elongated hole upper portion 8672a. It is formed from a material with a large coefficient of friction compared to the coefficient.

Thus, until the metal rod member 686 reaches the end position of the curved elongated hole 8674, the cylindrical portion 684 can be easily maintained at the connecting position between the first elongated hole upper portion 8672a and the first elongated hole lower portion 8672b. .

The method of maintaining the cylindrical portion 684 at the connecting position between the first elongated hole upper portion 8672a and the first elongated hole lower portion 8672b is not limited to adopting a material with a large friction coefficient, and various modes are possible. exemplified. For example, the shape of the inner surface of the first long hole upper portion 8672a or the first long hole lower portion 8672b may be formed from a shape having a large coefficient of friction (for example, a texturing shape).

<25th Embodiment>
Next, the twenty-fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In the eighteenth embodiment, the long hole 764a through which the fastening portion 682 is inserted is long in the horizontal direction and short in the vertical direction. It is a circular hole with an inner diameter sufficiently larger than the outer diameter of the portion 689b1. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

FIGS. 441(a) and 441(b) are partial cross-sectional views of the displacement member 9680 and the light emitting operation rendering unit 9700 in the twenty-fifth embodiment along the line corresponding to line LXXVIIIa-LXXVIIIa in FIG.

In FIG. 441(a), the fastening portion 682 is oriented substantially in the front-rear direction (a direction that is inclined upward by 3 degrees toward the front), and the upper edge portion of the large-diameter hole 9764a is in contact with and supported by the cylindrical portion 689b1. The states are illustrated. In FIG. 441(b), the posture of the displacement member 9680 is switched to a posture in which the fastening portion 682 faces downward, and the ring member 9689b with a flange and the light emitting operation production unit 9700 are attached to the head of the fastening screw B91 fastened to the fastening portion 682. is supported.

In this embodiment, the plate-shaped ring member 689a sandwiching the large-diameter hole 9764a from both sides and the flanged ring member 9689b are different in contact with the light emitting operation effect unit 9700. FIG.
That is, the plate-shaped ring member 689a abuts on the light emitting operation production unit 9700 at the plate plane portion. On the other hand, in the flanged ring member 9689b, an inclined surface portion 9689b2 formed over 360 degrees from the tip of the flange toward the cylindrical portion 689b1 is formed over 360 degrees at the end of the large diameter hole 9764a. The surface abuts against the chamfered inclined portion 9764a1.

In the state shown in FIG. 441(a) (the state corresponding to the retracted state or the intermediate state of the internal operation unit 600), the fastening portion 682 is tilted in the backward tilting direction, so the light emitting operation effect unit 9700 moves backward. and comes into contact with the plate-shaped ring member 989a.

Since this abutment is abutment on a plane, the sliding frictional force against the rotational displacement of the light emitting operation effect unit 9700 about the fastening portion 682 is small, and at least between the large diameter hole 9764a and the cylindrical portion 689b1. The light emitting operation effect unit 9700 can be displaced by a gap of . Therefore, the rotational displacement of the light emitting operation rendering unit 9700 can be allowed.

On the other hand, in the state shown in FIG. 441(b) (the state corresponding to the overhanging state of the internal operation unit 600), the tip of the fastening portion 682 faces downward, so that the light-emitting operation effect unit 9700 sinks downward and has a flange. It contacts the ring member 9689b.

This abutment is between the inclined surface portion 9689b2 formed over 360 degrees and the chamfered inclined portion 9764a1 formed over 360 degrees. The light emitting operation effect unit 9700 is arranged in such a manner that the gap in the direction orthogonal to the central axis of the fastening portion 682 between the chamfered inclined portion 9764a1 of the large diameter hole 9764a and the inclined surface portion 9689b2 of the flanged ring member 9689b is By burying, the displacement of the light emitting operation effect unit 9700 can be restricted (regulated).

The weight of the light emitting operation effect unit 9700 acts in the direction in which the chamfered inclined portion 9764a1 is pressed against the inclined surface portion 9689b2.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the degree of permission (restriction) of the displacement of the light emitting operation production unit 9700 can be switched according to the change in the attitude of the displacement member 9680 . Therefore, even when the large-diameter hole 9764a, which is a through hole with a simple circular cross section, is employed, the light emitting operation effect unit 9700 moves forward and backward when the displacement member 9680 is tilted and displaced (see FIG. 441(b)). It is possible to prevent misalignment in the direction and the left-right direction.

As a result, it is possible to prevent the light emitting operation rendering unit 9700 from being displaced when the rotating member 810 (see FIG. 425) rotates at a high speed.

<26th Embodiment>
Next, the twenty-sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In the eighteenth embodiment, the detection sensor 832 detects that the rotating member 810 is in the proper posture, thereby facilitating the tilting displacement of the rotation effect device 800 in the front-back direction. However, the twenty-sixth embodiment has been described. is urged to the proper posture by the posture detection means 10830 . It should be noted that the same reference numerals are assigned to the same parts as those of the above-described embodiments, and the description thereof will be omitted.

Figures 442(a) and 442(b) are front views of the rotating member 810 and the attitude detection means 10830 in the twenty-sixth embodiment. In Figures 442(a) and 442(b), the internal operating unit 600 is shown arranged in an extended state, the outer diameter of the rotating member 810 is shown in phantom lines, and the fixing member fixed to the rotating member 810 is shown in phantom. Gear 10815 is shown in solid lines. Also, FIG. 442(b) shows the proper posture of the rotating member 810, and FIG. 442(a) shows that the rotating member 810 is angularly displaced from the proper posture (displaced about 15 degrees in the rotational direction about the rotation axis RJ1). 442(b), and the directions of rotation of the gears 10815, 10821, 10831 toward the state shown in FIG. 442(b) are indicated by arrows.

As shown in FIGS. 442(a) and 442(b), the rotating member 810 is configured such that the driving force of the drive gear 10821 fixed to the drive shaft of the drive motor 820 is transmitted to the fixed gear 10815 by gear meshing. The fixed gear 10815 meshes with the detection gear 10831 of the attitude detection means 10830 .

The detection gear 10831 includes a weight portion 10831a that is thickened over an angular range of 180 degrees around the rotation axis. In this embodiment, the weight portion 10831a is a metal member fitted to the detection gear 10831, but may be integrally formed from a resin material.

According to this configuration, since the center of gravity of the detection gear 10831 is arranged on the center side of the weight portion 10831a (on the line connecting the rotation axis and the center of the arc), the rotation of the rotating member 810 is different from the proper posture ( 442(a)), the detection gear 10831 is urged by gravity, so that the rotation member 810 can rotate until it assumes the proper posture and return to the proper posture.

Therefore, even if the rotation member 810 cannot be accurately stopped in the proper posture as the stop posture of the drive motor 820 after executing the rotating light emitting effect in the extended state of the internal operation unit 600 (see FIG. 424), Since the rotating member 810 can be returned to the proper posture after that, the accuracy of detecting the posture of the rotating member 810 can be relaxed. As a result, product costs can be reduced.

In this embodiment, the rotation axis RJ1 in the intermediate state and the extended state of the internal operation unit 600 does not face the vertical direction but faces the forward tilting direction (see FIGS. 431 and 432). Therefore, it is possible to generate the urging due to gravity using the weight portion 10831a regardless of the posture of the rotating member 810 in the forward tilting direction.

As a result, it is possible not only to change the attitude of the rotating effect device 800 in the rising direction after the rotating member 810 is in the proper posture in the extended state of the internal operation unit 600, but also to move the rotating effect device 800 during the rising motion and the vertical direction displacement. It is possible to implement a movement mode in which the rotating member 810 is moved while being returned to the proper posture.

442(a), when the rotating effect device 800 moves up (see the time series of FIGS. 430 to 432), the rotating member 810 receives air resistance on the back side and returns to the proper posture. can be That is, in the present embodiment, the rotating member 810 has a shape that easily receives air resistance from the side surfaces in the short direction, so that the rotating member 810 can be easily returned to the proper posture when the user performs the standing up motion.

Note that the lateral side surface of the rotating member 810 may be formed in a narrow width shape that is less susceptible to air resistance. In this case, it is possible to reduce the operational resistance of the rotating member 810 for the rotating light emitting effect.
The action of returning the rotating member 810 to the proper posture can be produced by the weight portion 10831a.

Although the present invention has been described based on the above embodiments, the present invention is by no means limited to the above embodiments, and it will be easily understood that various modifications and improvements are possible without departing from the scope of the present invention. It can be inferred.

In each of the above embodiments, part or all of the configuration in one embodiment may be combined with or replaced with part or all of the configuration in another embodiment to form another embodiment.

In the eighteenth embodiment, the upper connecting member 270 connecting the center frame 86 and the base plate 60 is provided with the projecting portions 272 to 277 for allocating the flow-down paths of the balls. It is not limited to this.

For example, the portion that distributes the flow-down path of the spheres may be formed as a concave portion instead of projecting. Also, a flow path for guiding the ball may be formed through the recess so that the ball can be guided to another part of the game area.

For example, a member that connects the center frame 86 and the base plate 60 is disposed below the center frame 86 to guide the ball to one of the winning openings 63, 64, 65a, 140. may be configured to include Further, for example, a member that connects the center frame 86 and the base plate 60 may be configured such that the through gate 67 is provided.

Moreover, although the upper connecting member 270 extends along the surface side of the base plate 60 and constitutes the game area between itself and the glass unit 16, it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it may extend along the back side of the glass unit 16 when the front frame 14 is closed, and a game area may be configured between the base plate 60 and the glass unit 16 . In this case, an overhanging portion may be formed on the side of the base plate 60 to distribute the flow-down paths of the balls.

In this case, the fastening position with the base plate 60 is important. , the size of the game area can be sufficiently secured.

In the eighteenth embodiment, the upper connecting member 270 is formed in a bilaterally symmetrical shape, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the shape of the center frame 86 forms a large space between the inner rail 61 and the inner rail 61 on the left side in order to secure the flow-down path of the ball, while the right side forms a large space between the inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62. If it is designed to leave a space slightly longer than the diameter of the (typical right-handed machine), it is fully conceivable that the upper connecting member 270 would form only on the left side of the playing area. In addition, it is possible to design with the left and right reversed.

Further, the structure is not limited to the structure in which at least one of the base plate 60 and the center frame 86 is disposed on the back surface of the upper connecting member 270. If the upper connecting member 270 is provided with sufficient rigidity, the upper connecting member It is fully assumed that 270 has a portion on the back side where neither base plate 60 nor center frame 86 is arranged.

Further, the position where the center frame 86 constructs the thin plate portion 242 and protrudes does not need to be in the center of the left and right. For example, the thin plate portions 242 may be formed on both the left and right sides, or the thin plate portions 242 may protrude at a plurality of positions to mesh with the base plate 60 (enter alternately with a gap).

Also, the thin plate portion 242 may be formed in a size that occupies most of the lateral width of the upper connecting member 270 . In this case, the lateral width in which the electrical board 251 can be arranged can be expanded.

In addition, regarding the configuration in which the electrical board 251 is arranged on the back side of the thin plate portion 242 and fits within the thickness dimension of the base plate 60 , the arrangement of the electrical board 251 is not limited to the upper side of the center frame 86 . For example, if a thin plate member, such as the upper connecting member 270, which constitutes one surface of the game area connected to the front surface of the base plate 60 is formed on the left and right sides of the center frame 86, the illumination board is formed on the left and right sides of the center frame 86. 251 can be arranged, and the electrical board 251 is incorporated into the sorting unit 300 and the winning opening component member 400 arranged below the base plate 60 so as to fit within the thickness dimension of the base plate 60. can be configured to

In the eighteenth embodiment, the case where the electrical board 251 is fixed to the base plate 60 on the rear side of the upper connecting member 270 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the same configuration as the light emitting unit 518 arranged in the rear case 510 (a logo corresponding to the model is formed, and the LED of the illumination board arranged inside performs light emitting) is the upper part. It may be disposed behind the connecting member 270 to illuminate the upper connecting member 270 side, or the illumination board 251 may be intentionally omitted so that the light from the rotating effect device 800 passes through the upper connecting member 270. It may be made easy for the player to pass through.

In the eighteenth embodiment, the case where the light from the LED of the ambient light emitting means 251c is irradiated onto the lower edge portion 272a of the first projecting portion 272 has been described, but this is not necessarily the case. For example, the LED may be arranged inside the first projecting portion 272 when viewed from the front. In this case, by providing light diffusion processing on the concave side of the first overhanging portion 272, or by providing a concave shape that tapers as it becomes deeper in the concave direction, the inside of the first overhanging portion 272 is irradiated with light. The light can be diffused, the visibility of the outer shape of the LED can be reduced, and the visibility of the light emitted from the LED can be improved.

In the eighteenth embodiment, the thin plate member 290 has a colorful pattern, figure, character, or character on the front surface of the plate, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, at least a part of the thin plate member 290 may be subjected to light diffusion processing or texture processing, or may have a shape (for example, a convex lens shape, a , a three-dimensional shape).

In the eighteenth embodiment, the holes 291a and 291b formed in the thin plate member 290 separate the protruding portion 244b protruding from the center frame 86 side and the protruding portion 279 protruding from the upper connecting member 270. Although a case has been described in which misalignment of the thin plate member 290 is suppressed by receiving, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this.

For example, the protrusions inserted through the holes 291 a and 291 b of the thin plate member 290 may be configured to protrude from either the center frame 86 or the upper connecting member 270 . Further, the protruding portion 244b and the protruding portion 279 may be inserted through a single hole formed in the thin plate member 290 in common instead of being inserted through the different holes 291a and 291b. As a result, the thin plate member 290 can be positioned, and the center frame 86 and the upper connecting member 270 can be connected.

In the eighteenth embodiment, the projecting portion 244b projecting from the center frame 86 side is formed inside the recess on the back side of the second overhanging portion 273, but it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the projecting portion 244b may be arranged on the rear side of the plate-like portion 271 (so as to face the plate-like portion 271 in the front-rear direction). Note that when the projecting portion 244b is formed inside the concave portion on the back side of the second projecting portion 273, the second projecting portion 273 functions as a blindfold for the projecting portion 244b.

In the eighteenth embodiment, a case has been described in which the ball flowing down between the side wall portion 453a and the extended plate portion 455a has a probability of flowing into the first ball guide portion 457, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a space is provided between the side wall portion 453a and the extended plate portion 455a, and the ball guide portion 457, and the distributing portion 983 is disposed between the ball guide portions 457, so that one of the two ball guide portions can be reliably You may make it flow into the part 457. FIG. In other words, the ratio of hitting the ball into the ball guiding portion 457 may be changed depending on which of the two postures of the distribution portion 983 the ball is guided.

In the eighteenth embodiment, the inclined guide portion 458 is inclined in one direction (lower right direction) to directly guide the ball to the second ball guide portion 459. However, this is not necessarily the case. is not. For example, the inclined guide portion 458 may extend in the left and right opposite directions from both the left and right sides of the ball guide portion 457. , the ball may be deflected from the second ball guide portion 459 at a certain probability.

Further, for example, the inclined guide portion 458 may be configured to change the probability of the ball reaching the second ball guide portion 459 depending on whether a single ball is guided or when a plurality of balls are guided simultaneously. good. For example, by displacing the position of the second ball guide portion 459 in a direction closer to the inclined guide portion 458 in the left-right direction than the current position, the ball that has reached the second ball guide portion 459 earlier can be chased before it completely flows down. When the ball reaches the second ball guide portion 459 , it is blocked by the previous ball and easily deviates from the second ball guide portion 459 .

Conversely, for example, by displacing the second ball guide portion 459 in a direction that is slightly separated from the inclined guide portion 458 in the horizontal direction from the current position, the ball that is likely to reach the second ball guide portion 459 first is displaced. If the trailing ball reaches the second ball guide portion 459 before the ball about to fall from the gap with the inclined guide portion 458 completely falls, it rolls on the preceding ball and easily reaches the second ball guide portion 459. can be realized.

If the probability of the ball reaching the second ball guiding portion 459 is lower when a single ball is guided, the number of prize balls paid out at one time due to multiple balls entering the second ball guiding portion 459 is excessive. situation can be avoided. On the other hand, if the probability of the ball reaching the second ball guide portion 459 is higher when guiding a plurality of balls, the attention force around the inclined guide portion 458 when the plurality of balls reach the inclined guide portion 458 can be improved.

In the eighteenth embodiment, the case where the inclined guide portion 458 is fixed has been described, but it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the inclined guide portion 458 may be configured to be retractable forward and backward. In this case, in the projecting state, the ball can flow into the second ball guide portion 459 as in the eighteenth embodiment. The rate of reaching the second ball guide portion 459 is reduced. Further, the inclination guide portion 458 is not limited to the case where it is protruded and displaced, and may be configured so as to be capable of tilting at regular intervals around a rotating shaft extending in the front-rear direction so as to change the inclination angle.

In the eighteenth embodiment, the number of prize balls entering the second ball guide portion 459 is larger than the number of prize balls entering the first ball guide portion 457. It is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the number of prize balls may be the same, or the quality of profits that the player can obtain by entering balls may be different.

For example, as a profit, it is possible to obtain the profit of drawing lots of patterns instead of the payout of prize balls, or the number of rounds of the jackpot game can be selected (variable) by entering the ball before the start of the jackpot game. However, it is also possible to obtain the benefit of changing (increasing) the winning probability of the symbol after the big winning game by entering the ball during the big winning game. These benefits can be arbitrarily set in the first ball guide portion 457 and the second ball guide portion 459 .

In the eighteenth embodiment, the case where the inclination of the ceiling plate portion 455 is substantially constant has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the inclination angle of the ceiling plate portion 455 may be a large angle with respect to the horizontal on the upstream side from the midway position, and a small angle with respect to the horizontal on the downstream side from the same midway position. In this case, the rolling speed of the ball is likely to change depending on whether the ball lands on the ceiling plate portion 455 at the upstream side of the midway position or the downstream side of the midway position. It is easy to predict the flowing path of the ball. That is, it is possible to improve attention to the middle position of the ceiling plate portion 455 .

Also, a plurality of ridges may be formed on the upper surface of the ceiling plate portion 455 to reduce the rolling speed of the ball. In this case, the ridges do not have to be formed over the entire lateral width of the ceiling plate portion 455, and may be formed in a partial range in the same manner as the change in inclination.

Also, the plurality of deceleration ridges are not limited to the upper surface of the ceiling plate portion 455 . For example, it may protrude from the resin wall that constitutes the guide channel that guides the ball downward toward the first ball guide portion 457 toward the guide channel side. may protrude from the upper surface side of the ball to the flow-down path side of the ball.

Also, the direction in which the ridges are formed is not limited to the direction crossing the front-rear direction. For example, a ridge may protrude from the main body plate portion 451 toward the front side, or a front plate member formed of a flat plate shape along a plane parallel to the main body plate portion 451 may be arranged on the front side of the main body plate portion 451 . When forming a flow-down path of the ball between the main body plate portion 451 and the main body plate portion 451, a protrusion may be provided to protrude from the front plate member toward the back side.

In the eighteenth embodiment, a case has been described in which the ball dropped into the first ball guide portion 457 is smoothly guided to the general prize winning opening 63, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, when the inner shape of the first ball guide part 457 is formed in a mortar shape and the opening at the lower end is formed to have a size slightly larger than the diameter of the ball, the ball passes through the first ball guide part 457. You can extend the time until

In this case, if the ball following the ball reaches the first ball guide portion 457 while the ball is staying in the first ball guide portion 457, the ball is easily guided to the inclined guide portion 458 side, and the second guide portion 459 It is possible to increase the ball entry probability of the ball to. Therefore, it is possible to create a situation in which the balls are guided toward the second guide portion 459 without waiting for a rare situation where a plurality of balls reach the first ball guide portion 457 in a row.

As a method other than devising the shape of the first ball guide portion 457, a movable member that is displaced by the weight of the ball may be arranged. The movable member is configured to block the ball from entering the first ball guide portion 457 for a predetermined period of time after the ball enters the first ball guide portion 457, and the ball that has reached the movable member is moved to the inclined guide portion 458 side. configured to guide the As a result, it is possible to improve the probability that the ball will reach the second ball guide portion 459 in a predetermined period after the preceding ball passes through the first ball guide portion 457 .

In the eighteenth embodiment, the case where the left component member 450 is made of a fixed resin member has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the flow path of the ball may be changed by an electric movable accessory. In this case, the inclined guide portion 458 may be configured to be movable back and forth. That is, while the ball is guided toward the second ball guide portion 459 when it is protruding forward, the ball may be dropped without being guided toward the second ball guide portion 459 when it is retracted backward. .

Further, for example, a plate-shaped member arranged to block the first ball guide portion 457 may be arranged so as to be able to appear and retract in the front and rear directions. That is, when the plate-like member protrudes forward, the ball that reaches the plate-like member is guided toward the inclined guide portion 458 and easily enters the second ball guide portion 459, but the plate-like member moves backward. In the retracted state, the ball can easily fall into the first ball guide portion 457 .

Further, for example, the inclined plate portion 434 may be configured to operate such that the inclined direction is horizontally reversed in synchronization with the opening and closing of the opening/closing plate 65b. When the opening/closing plate 65b is in the open state, the inclination direction of the inclined plate portion 434 is set to a downward inclination toward the left and right inner sides, so that the second ball guide portion 459 deviates to the left and right inner sides, and the ceiling plate portion 455 and the curved protruding portion 414 can be configured to flow toward the opening/closing plate 65b. Thereby, it is possible to configure such that the ball is guided from a wide range toward the opening/closing plate 65b.

It should be noted that the inclination of the inclined plate portion 434 may be configured such that it is downwardly inclined inwards to the left and right regardless of whether or not it is electrically powered. Even in this case, when the opening/closing plate 65b is in the closed state, the ball that rolls on the upper surface of the inclined plate portion 434 still reaches the out port 71, so the playability can be maintained.

In the eighteenth embodiment, the ball can be discharged from the game area through the out port 415, but the configuration is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the formation of the vertical plate portion 433 may be omitted, and the formation of the out port 415 may be omitted so that the ball passing through the left component member 450 flows down toward the opening/closing plate 65b. As a result, it is possible to increase the variation of the flow path of the ball toward the opening/closing plate 65b.

In the eighteenth embodiment, the case where the opening/closing plate 65b is formed of a plate member having a rectangular shape in a front view that is rotationally displaced by a rotating shaft that extends left and right along the lower edge has been described, but it is not necessarily limited to this. . For example, it may be configured in a pentagonal shape (a shape similar to a home plate) in a front view by forming an upper edge upwardly sloping toward the left-right central portion in a front view. As a result, when the ball comes into contact with the upper edge, the ball can easily flow outwards to the left and right along the shape of the upper edge.

In addition, an adjusting means may be provided for adjusting the flowing state of the ball that is flowed to the left and right outside at the upper edge of the opening/closing plate 65b. For example, an extension plate extending downward from the left and right inner tip portions of the inclined plate portion 434 in parallel with the vertical plate portion 433, and a ball passage hole formed through the extension plate in the left-right direction and having a size that allows the ball to pass through. and may be provided.

For example, the arrangement of the ball passage holes is shifted from the arrangement of the balls that flow left and right to the upper edge 65b of the opening and closing plate 65b when the opening and closing plate 65b is open (the position is shifted upward). It may be designed as a position that allows passage of a ball that is swept left and right to the upper edge portion 65b of the opening/closing plate 65b while the 65b is in a state between the open state and the closed state.

In this case, the extension plate and the ball passage hole prevent the ball from leaking to the left and right by keeping the ball on the upper side of the opening and closing plate 65b when the opening and closing plate 65b is open, while the opening and closing plate 65b allows the ball to flow left and right during closing. (spilling).

In order to maintain the posture of the opening/closing plate 65b in the open state, the projecting portion of the covering member 430 projecting from the back side of the body plate portion 431 of the covering member 430 toward the back side at a position where it can be supported under the cover member 430. may be formed to Further, the projecting portions may contact the opening/closing plate 65b in the tilting direction at both lateral width direction end portions of the opening/closing plate 65b. In this case, it becomes easier to maintain the posture of the opening/closing plate 65b in the open state.

In the eighteenth embodiment, the sorting unit 300 switches the flow direction of the ball guided forward by the direction switching unit 317 to the left and right above the detection device SE3, and then passes through the discharge opening 325. has been described, but it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the winning opening 323 may be used as a discharge opening to discharge the ball. In this case, a through hole large enough to allow the ball to fall may be formed in the lower surface of the direction switching portion 317, and the ball falling into the through hole may be detected by the detection device SE3. Moreover, as a similar configuration, the arrangement of the discharge opening and the detection device SE3 may be reversed.

Further, a similar configuration may be adopted in which the direction of flow path switching by the direction switching portion 317 is set to the rear side instead of the front side, and the ball passes forward from the upper side of the winning opening 323 to the base plate. It may be configured to be discharged to the front side of 60 .

In this case, since it is not necessary to dispose the discharge openings 325 on the left and right sides of the detection device SE3, the left and right space between the pair of left and right detection devices SE3 can be narrowed, and the space on the left and right of the detection device SE3 can be used for the nail. It can be effectively used as a planting space or the like.

Also, these configurations need not be the same around the left and right detection devices SE3, and separate left and right configurations may be employed. For example, during a jackpot game, a configuration may be adopted on one side of the winning opening 323 in which a ball passing forward from above the winning opening 323 can be picked up by the opening/closing plate 65b. Depending on whether the ball is guided to the side where the ball passes forward from above or vice versa, the ball entering the first prize winning port 64 returns to the front side of the base plate 60 and hits the opening/closing plate 65b. Changed chances of being picked up. Therefore, it is possible to improve attention to the ball entering the first winning hole 64 .

In the eighteenth embodiment, the light emitting operation effect unit 700 is retracted above the center frame 86, and the light emitting operation effect unit 700 is arranged in front of the third pattern display device 81 in the overhanging state. , but not necessarily limited to this. For example, the light emitting operation rendering unit 700 may be configured vertically and retracted to the left and right sides of the center frame 86 .

In addition, following the configuration of projecting forward from the upper edge of the front frame 14, a configuration projecting forward from the left and right edges of the front frame 14 is adopted, and the projecting portion is used to produce a light emitting operation. It may be configured so that the unit 700 is retracted. In this case, it can be constructed such that it is retracted to the front side of both left and right edges, and the light emitting operation effect unit 700 is arranged while retreating to the front side of the third pattern display device 81 in the overhanging state.

In the eighteenth embodiment, the cylindrical member 695 has been described as a member that contacts the rotating member 810, but the material of the cylindrical member 695 is not limited at all. For example, it may be made of a hard resin material that does not deform under a load applied from the rotating member 810 . In this case, excessive displacement of rotating member 810 can be suppressed.

Further, it may be made of a soft resin material that can be deformed (deformed to be crushed in the radial direction) even under a load applied from the rotating member 810 . In this case, the cylindrical member 695 functions as a cushioning material, making it easier to avoid damage to the rotary member 810 .

In the eighteenth embodiment, the figures and patterns formed on the decorative plate 811 are designed so that they can be seen integrally with the figures and patterns formed on the bottom wall portion 511 in the intermediate state of the internal operation unit 600. It is not necessarily limited to this. For example, when the light emitting operation effect unit 700 is in a specific vertical arrangement and is inclined to the left or right, the decoration plate 811 is arranged so as to be visually recognized integrally with the figure or pattern formed on the bottom wall portion 511. You may design the figure and pattern formed. In this case, the effect of the bottom wall portion 511 and the decorative plate 811 can be improved by designing the content visually recognized integrally differently depending on whether the light emitting operation effect unit 700 is tilted to the left or right. can be improved.

In the eighteenth embodiment, the luminous operation production unit 700 is tilted while vertically displaced, thereby changing the external shape of the luminous operation production unit 700 in a front view and changing the vertical position of the luminous operation production unit 700. occur at the same time, but it is not necessarily limited to this.

For example, while maintaining the vertical arrangement of the light emitting operation production unit 700, the outer shape of the light emitting operation production unit 700 in the front view may be changed. Also in the eighteenth embodiment, for example, when the light emitting operation effect unit 700 is in the intermediate state of the internal operation unit 600, the rotation member 810 is rotated by a predetermined angle about the rotation axis RJ1, thereby changing the projection direction of the rotation member 810. Therefore, it is possible to change the outer shape of the rotating member 810 when viewed from the front.

In the eighteenth embodiment, the front-rear displacement member 653 that generates resistance to the up-and-down displacement of the elevating plate member 630 is configured as a member that is displaced in the front-rear direction by the solenoid 651, but it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a rotating arm that is displaced by the driving force of a drive motor can be displaced in a direction toward or away from the abutted plate 638 , thereby generating a frictional force with the abutted plate 638 or moving the arm. Displacement resistance of the lift plate member 630 may be generated by obstructing the direction.

In the eighteenth embodiment, the case where the displacement direction of the front-rear displacement member 653 is designed in the direction perpendicular to the displacement direction of the elevating plate member 630 (the direction on the plane perpendicular to the moving direction of the elevating plate member 630) has been described. However, it is not necessarily limited to this. That is, the angle formed by the displacement direction of the front-rear displacement member 653 and the displacement direction (vertical direction) of the elevating plate member 630 does not have to be a right angle.

For example, in the case where the displacement direction of the front-rear displacement member 653 is designed to be inclined upward toward the front, when the front-rear displacement member 653 is displaced forward, if the lift plate member 630 is displaced downward, In addition to the sliding friction, applying an upward load can shorten the time until the elevator plate member 630 stops. On the other hand, if the lift plate member 630 is displaced upward, the kinetic energy of the lift plate member 630 can be reduced while avoiding sudden deceleration of the lift plate member 630 by applying an upward load in addition to sliding friction. can be done.

Further, in the case where the displacement direction of the front-rear displacement member 653 is designed to be inclined downward toward the front, when the front-rear displacement member 653 is displaced forward, if the elevating plate member 630 is displaced upward, the sliding motion is prevented. In addition to dynamic friction, applying a downward load can shorten the time until the lift plate member 630 stops. On the other hand, if the lift plate member 630 is displaced downward, the kinetic energy of the lift plate member 630 can be reduced while avoiding sudden deceleration of the lift plate member 630 by applying a downward load in addition to sliding friction. can be done.

In the eighteenth embodiment described above, both in the retracted state and in the extended state of the internal operation unit 600, the overlapping front-to-rear widths of the abutted plate 638 and the front-rear displacing member 653 are substantially the same when viewed in the vertical direction. However, it is not necessarily limited to this.

For example, the shape of the front end surface of the front-rear displacement member 653 may be formed as a sloped surface that slopes backward as it goes upward. In this case, if the front-rear displacement member 653 is displaced forward when the abutted plate 638 is displaced downward, a load is generated in the abutment plate 638 in such a direction that the front end face of the front-rear displacement member 653 is picked up. Therefore, the action of braking the lifting plate member 630 can be enhanced.

Further, for example, the shape of the front end surface of the front-rear displacement member 653 may be formed as an inclined surface that is inclined rearward as it goes downward. In this case, if the front-rear displacement member 653 is displaced forward when the abutted plate 638 is displaced upward, a load in a direction that presses the abutted plate 638 downward from the front end surface of the front-rear displacement member 653 is applied. can be generated, the action of braking the lifting plate member 630 can be strengthened.

Further, for example, the shape of the front end surface of the front-rear displacement member 653 is such that a sloped surface that slopes rearward as it goes upward from the lower end position and a sloped surface that slopes rearward as it goes downward from the upper end position are positioned at predetermined intermediate positions. In correspondence with this, a protruding portion protruding rearward may be formed at an intermediate position of the rear end face of the abutted plate 638 .

In this case, when the fore-and-aft displacement member 653 is displaced forward in a state where the abutted plate 638 is arranged on the front side of the fore-and-aft displacement member 653 , the front end face of the fore-and-aft displacement member 653 is contacted at a predetermined intermediate position. The vertical position of the elevating plate member 630 can be stabilized in such a manner that the projecting portion of the plate 638 is accommodated.

In this case, the number of portions where the downwardly rearwardly inclined surface and the upwardly rearwardly inclined surface are combined is not limited to the front end surface of the front-rear displacement member 653 . For example, a shape (for example, a sawtooth shape or a jagged shape) may be employed in which a plurality of parts are combined. In this case, the vertical position of the lift plate member 630 can be stabilized at a plurality of positions.

In the eighteenth embodiment, the pair of left and right elevator plate members 630 are configured to be vertically displaceable, but this is not necessarily the case. For example, the left and right elevating plate members 630 may be fastened and fixed to the light emitting operation production unit 700, and a configuration may be adopted in which vertical positional deviation of the pair of left and right elevating plate members 630 is not allowed. In this case, the resistance generator 650 for generating the displacement resistance of the lifting plate member 630 is sufficient to be configured only on the left and right sides.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the pair of left and right elevator plate members 630 are allowed to be vertically misaligned, so it is preferable to arrange the resistance generators 650 on both the left and right sides. Using this configuration, control may be performed to shift the excitation timing of the left and right solenoids 651 .

For example, when the internal operation unit 600 is displaced downward from the retracted state to the intermediate state, drive control of the drive motor 648 is executed in a state in which the pair of left and right solenoids 651 are energized and the front-rear displacement member 653 is arranged rearward. When the same drive control is executed with the left solenoid 651 energized and the right solenoid 651 de-energized, the light emitting operation effect unit 700 is placed in a tilted posture in which the left side is arranged downward with respect to the right side. It is possible to execute a production operation such as

This performance operation can be executed without imposing a load on the internal operation unit 600 until the operation error limit state of the internal operation unit 600 is reached. In addition, instead of increasing the drive pattern of the drive motor 648 for this performance operation, the drive pattern of the drive motor 648 used for the downward displacement of the internal operation unit 600 is diverted, and the solenoid 651 is excited in a different excitation pattern. By executing with, the production operation is executed. Therefore, the drive pattern required for the drive motor 648 can be reduced.

Also, the timing for de-energizing the right solenoid 651 is not limited to the retracted state of the internal operation unit 600 . For example, the left and right solenoids 651 may be energized when the internal operation unit 600 is retracted, and the right solenoid 651 may be de-energized while the internal operation unit 600 is changing from the retracted state to the intermediate state. In this case, the downward displacement of the right elevating plate member 630 can be delayed by the frictional force, and the lighting action effecting unit 700 can perform the effecting action in which the left side is arranged downward with respect to the right side. can be done.

Although an example from the retracted state of the internal operation unit 600 has been described as an effect operation, it is naturally assumed that the vertical direction is reversed. That is, the excitation pattern of the pair of left and right solenoids 651 described above may be executed according to the displacement of the internal operation unit 600 from the extended state.

In the eighteenth embodiment, in the overhanging state of the internal operation unit 600, the upward displacement of the abutted plate 638 of the elevating plate member 630 is restricted by the front-rear displacement member 653, and the rotation of the rotary effect device 800 is performed. Although the case where the lighting effect is executed has been described, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this.

For example, as a type of rotating light emitting effect executed in the extended state of the internal operation unit 600, a lottery loss effect different from the effect for informing a big win executed in a state where the rotation axis RJ1 is fixed can be used on both left and right sides. Or you may make it perform the rotation light emission production|presentation of the rotation production|presentation apparatus 800 in the state which energized the solenoid 651 of right-and-left one side.

In this case, on the side where the solenoid 651 is energized, the forward/backward displacement member 653 is retracted from the moving path of the abutted plate 638, so that the centrifugal force of the rotation of the rotating member 810 causes the light emitting operation effect unit 700 and the elevator plate member 630 to move. Even if is displaced upward, the longitudinal displacement member 653 does not act to suppress the upward displacement.

Therefore, the rotation axis RJ1 of the rotation member 810 is easily displaced. As a result, it is possible to perform an action effect in which the rotating light emitting effect of the rotating member 810 is executed in a state where the rotating shaft RJ1 is not fixed. While the light emission pattern is the same, the figure visually recognized by the afterimage display of the rotating member 810 can be made different.

In order to create a state in which the rotating shaft RJ1 is not fixed, the solenoids 651 on both the left and right sides may be energized, or the solenoids 651 on one of the left and right sides may be energized. Then, by de-energizing the solenoid 651 on the other side, it is possible to regulate the vertical displacement of the lift plate member 630 on the de-energized side, so that the light emitting operation production unit 700 and the lift plate member 630 are not excessively moved. Upward displacement can be suppressed, and damage to the light emitting operation effect unit 700 and the elevator plate member 630 can be avoided.

In the eighteenth embodiment, a case has been described in which the transmission efficiency changes as the rack gear portion 634 moves toward and away from the transmission gear 649, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the drive motor 648 and the drive shaft may be configured to be displaceable forward and backward, and the transmission gear 649 may be displaceable forward and backward with respect to the rack gear portion 634 .

Also, the transmission gear 649 may be formed so that the diameter length of the transmission gear 649 varies in the axial direction. In this case, the transmission efficiency can be changed by displacing the transmission gear 649 or the lifting plate member 630 in the drive shaft direction.

Although the displacement of rack gear portion 634 in a state in which meshing between rack gear portion 634 and transmission gear 649 is maintained has been described, the displacement is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the rack gear portion 634 may be configured to be separated from the transmission gear 649 to such an extent that it is disengaged. In this case, even if the drive motor 648 runs out of control, the rack gear portion 634 is separated from the transmission gear 649 before an overload occurs in the rack gear portion 634, thereby preventing damage to the rack gear portion 634 and the transmission gear 649. can be avoided.

In the eighteenth embodiment described above, the rack gear portion 634 is pressed against the transmission gear 649 by the weight of the elevating plate member 630, and the meshing state of the gears is optimized. Although the case of being pushed away from 649 has been described, it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, regardless of the direction of displacement of the rack gear portion 634, it may be configured to be displaced by the driving force of the solenoid 651 in both directions. Also, the direction in which the driving force of the solenoid 651 is generated may be reversed. Further, the transmission gear 649 or the drive motor 648 may be configured to be displaceable in the direction perpendicular to the drive shaft.

In the eighteenth embodiment, the thickness of the cylindrical portion 684 and the metal rod member 686 guided by the long holes 672 to 674 is reduced because the electrical wiring is inserted into the cylindrical portion 684. Although the case where 684 is thicker than the metal bar member 686 has been described, it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, even if the interior is closed rather than hollow, the cylindrical portion 684 may be formed thicker than the metal rod-shaped member 686 , or the metal rod-shaped member 686 may be thicker than the cylindrical portion 684 . It may be formed thick.

By forming the metal rod-shaped member 686 (the member on the front side) to be thick, a large area can withstand the load generated at a position far from the central axis J1 when the light emitting operation production unit 700 is tilted and displaced. As a result, the durability of the metal rod-shaped member 686 can be improved, so that, for example, the durability can be improved when the same member is formed from a resin material.

Also, the tubular portion 684 and the metal rod-shaped member 686 may be formed with the same thickness. In this case, the clearances set for the long holes 672 to 674 can be designed with similar numerical values, and the degree of wear of the long holes 672 to 674 can be made uniform.

In the eighteenth embodiment, the pair of upper and lower elongated holes 612 are designed to have the same clearance in the longitudinal direction with the fastening portions 632 and 633 of the lifting plate member 630. However, this is not necessarily the case. do not have. For example, the clearance between the lower elongated hole 612 and the lower fastening portion 633 of the elevator plate member 630 is formed to be larger than the clearance between the upper elongated hole 612 and the upper fastening portion 632 of the elevator plate member 630. can be In this case, it is possible to increase the allowable width for the lower portion of the lift plate member 630 to be displaced in the front-rear direction. can be made easier.

In the eighteenth embodiment, the case where the second elongated hole 673 is formed as an elongated hole extending vertically has been described, but it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the second elongated hole 673 connected to the curved elongated hole 674 may be configured so as to be inclined downward and extended forward so that the side closer to the curved elongated hole 674 is located forward. good. In this case, the metal rod-shaped member 686 can be displaced in the front-rear direction while the metal rod-shaped member 686 is guided by the second long hole 673 .

That is, in the state before the internal operation unit 600 reaches the intermediate state from the retracted state, it is possible to realize the operation of gradually changing the attitude of the light emitting operation effect unit 700 in the tilting direction.

The second long hole 673 does not have to be inclined from the upper end. may be configured. In this case, since the attitude of the light emitting operation effect unit 700 can be maintained when the elevating plate member 630 is started from the retracted state of the internal operation unit 600, the base plate 60 and the light emitting operation effect unit 700 do not collide. can be avoided.

In the eighteenth embodiment, the case where the center of gravity position G1 of the light emitting operation effect unit 700 is arranged between the tubular portion 684 and the metal bar member 686 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the center-of-gravity position G1 may be arranged on the opposite side of the tubular portion 684 with respect to the metal rod-shaped member 686, or may be arranged on the opposite side of the metallic rod-shaped member 686 with the tubular portion 684 as a reference.

In the eighteenth embodiment, the case where the shaped portion that supports the cylindrical portion 684 is formed of an elongated hole has been described, but the configuration is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the tubular portion 684 may be configured to be axially rotatable about a fixed shaft.

In the eighteenth embodiment, the case where the displacement members 680 supporting the light emitting operation production unit 700 are arranged on both the left and right sides of the light emitting operation production unit 700 and are displaced in the vertical direction has been described, but it is not necessarily limited to this. do not have. For example, the light emitting operation effect unit 700 may be configured to be displaced in the front-rear direction or in a combined direction of the front-rear direction and the up-down direction, and a displacement member 680 is provided on one of the left and right sides of the light emitting operation effect unit 700. Alternatively, the displacement member 680 may be arranged above and below the light emitting operation production unit 700 and may be configured to be displaced in the left-right direction or the front-rear direction.

In the eighteenth embodiment described above, the case where the rotating effect device 800 that rotates is employed as the movable member arranged in the light emitting operation effect unit 700 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a movable member that reciprocates in a linear direction may be employed, or a movable member that vibrates may be employed.

In the eighteenth embodiment, the case where the support hole 764b of the two upper and lower connected holes 764 is arranged on the lower side has been described, but it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the support hole 764b may be provided on the upper side, or the support hole 764b may be provided on both the upper and lower sides.

When both the top and bottom of the right connecting hole 764 are support holes 764b and the top and bottom of the left connecting hole 764 are long holes 764a, only the displacement of the light emitting operation effect unit 700 in the horizontal direction with respect to the displacement member 680 is caused. This is allowed, and the posture change in the rotation direction about the fastening portion 682 of the light emitting operation production unit 700 can be suppressed.

Further, the shape of the through hole is not limited to the elongated hole 764a, and a through hole having a larger clearance than the support hole 764b can be arbitrarily designed. For example, it may be formed as a perfect circular through hole with an inner diameter sufficiently larger than the outer diameter of the fastening portion 684 . Further, for example, an elongated hole having a length in the longitudinal direction shorter than that of the elongated hole 764a may be employed as the support hole 764b. In this case, it is possible for the light emitting operation rendering unit 700 to move horizontally in the horizontal direction.

In addition, when the connecting holes 764 on the diagonal line are both the support holes 764b in setting the shapes of the left and right connecting holes 764, the misalignment of the light emitting operation production unit 700 in the left and right direction also occurs with the fastening portion 682 as the axis. Posture change in the rotation direction is also suppressed. For this reason, it is good if the light emitting unit 700 is formed with a sufficient strength so as not to cause misalignment, and if the operation is controlled precisely. , caution is required.

In the nineteenth embodiment, the opening 3982k is formed on the front side of the first passage TR1 and the second passage TR2. In the twentieth embodiment, the opening 4985k is formed on the rear side of the first passage TR1 and the second passage TR2. Although the case where is formed was described, it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, both openings 3982k and 4985k may be formed. In this case, resistance to ball clogging can be improved.

Further, for example, an opening may be formed on the front side of the first passage TR1 and an opening may be formed on the rear side of the second passage TR2. Furthermore, a confluence channel may be formed for merging the spheres discharged from these openings on the downstream side. In this case, it is possible to change the appearance of the ball flowing down to the left and right, so it is possible to improve the performance effect of the performance using the ball.

Further, for example, an opening is formed on at least one of the front side and the rear side from the first passage TR1, and an opening is formed on at least one of the left side and the right side from the second passage TR2. It may be configured such that balls are discharged from TR1 or the second passage TR2.

In the nineteenth embodiment and the twentieth embodiment, the case where the opening 985d is provided has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, by omitting the formation of the opening 985d, the interval between the first passage TR1 and the second passage TR2 directly above the detection device SE3 is narrowed, and the horizontal interval of the detection device SE3 is narrowed accordingly, and the opening 985e, You may make it narrow the right-and-left space|interval of 985f. In this case, the lateral width of the lower end portion of the bulging portion 982 can be further reduced.

In the nineteenth embodiment and the twentieth embodiment, a case where a space is formed between the erected wall 982a arranged between the first passage TR1 and the second passage TR2 has been described, but this is not necessarily the case. is not limited to For example, a 7-segment display device may be arranged and used as a 7-segment rendering range, or a small liquid crystal display device may be arranged.

In the twenty-first embodiment, the passage for guiding the game ball to the back side of the game area is formed in the base plate 60 and the upper connecting member 5270, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a passage for guiding game balls may be formed in the upper connecting member 270 and the center frame 86, may be formed in the center frame 86 and the base plate 60, or may be formed in the base plate 60. , the center frame 86 and the upper connecting member 5270 , or may be formed in any one of the base plate 60 , the center frame 86 and the upper connecting member 5270 .

In the twenty-first embodiment, the case where the opening 5274a is formed in the third projecting portion 5274 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it may be formed in any of the other projecting portions 272, 5273, 275-277. Also, the destination of the ball after flowing down may be changed for each opening.

For example, the ball that has passed through the first opening reaches the upper surface of the belt-shaped extension 263, and the ball that has passed through the second opening returns from directly above the nail KG2 to the front side of the base plate 60, and reaches the third opening. The ball that has passed through may return to the front side of the base plate 60 from right above the curved projecting portion 414 . In this case, if the ball is aimed at the first opening, it is easy for the ball to enter the first prize winning opening 64, while if the ball is aimed at the second opening or the third opening, it is difficult for the ball to go to the first prize winning opening 64. , the ball can be easily guided to the ball guide portions 457, 459 and the specific winning opening 65a.

In the twenty-second embodiment, the case where the light emitting operation effect unit 6700 reciprocates on the front side of the game board 13 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the light emitting operation effect unit 6700 may be configured to be movable to the retracted position of the internal operation unit 600 described in the eighteenth embodiment (position on the back side of the game board 13).

In this case, the state that is difficult for the player to see can be composed of two positions: the retracted position arranged on the back side of the game board 13 and the upper end position of the light emitting operation effect unit 6700 . Therefore, the second glass unit 6016b is provided with a shutter, a light guide plate, or the like for blocking the player's field of view, and the light emitting operation production unit 6700 is moved while the player's field of view is blocked to make it difficult to see. By doing so, it is possible to make it impossible to know in which position of the two positions the light emitting operation effect unit 6700 is arranged. Thereby, it is possible to make it difficult to anticipate the action effect by the light emitting action effect unit 6700 .

In the twenty-third embodiment, the case where the L-shaped elongated hole 7674 is formed as an elongated hole extending vertically halfway has been described, but it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it may be configured so that it is inclined or curved in a direction toward the rear as it approaches the concave portion 7674a instead of in the vertical direction. In this case, while the cylindrical portion 684 is downwardly displaced, it is also displaced rearward at the same time.

In the twenty-third embodiment, the case where the L-shaped elongated hole 7674 extends rearward at the lower end and is formed in an L-shape has been described, but it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it may be formed so as to extend further downward from the upper and lower positions of the recessed portion 7674a. In this case, by entering the concave portion 7674a, the vertical displacement of the cylindrical portion 684 can be restricted in the middle of the vertical displacement range of the cylindrical portion 684. FIG. Even if a load due to regulation occurs, since the cylindrical portion 684 is formed thick, damage can be easily avoided.

In the twenty-fourth embodiment, with the metal rod member 686 disposed in the middle of the curved elongated hole 8674, the rotation axis RJ1 of the rotation member 810 is aligned with the front-rear direction. In this state, the rotary member 810 may be rotated at high speed to execute the rotating light emitting effect. Even if the metal rod-shaped member 686 is arranged in the middle of the curved elongated hole 8674, the posture of the light emitting operation production unit 700 can be maintained by regulating the vertical displacement of the elevator plate member 630 with the resistance generator 650. , the displacement of the rotation axis RJ1 can be suppressed.

In the twenty-fourth embodiment, since the displacement member 680 is tilted in the forward direction before tilting, the rear surface side (radiating plate 812 side) of the rotating member 810 faces the player after the tilting displacement. Posture. Even in this case, the rear surface side of the rotating member 810 is covered with a heat sink 812, and the electrical board is also accommodated inside and is not exposed.

In the twenty-fourth embodiment, the case where the displacement member 680 is displaced in the front-rear direction while being displaced downward has been described. You may design so that it may become the same position after having carried out. As a result, for example, it is possible to reduce the design difficulty when a plurality of sets of the displacement member 680, the light emitting operation effect unit 700, and the rotating effect device 800 are stacked in the front-rear direction.

The shapes of the long holes 8672a, 8672b, 8673, 8674, 8675 are not limited at all. For example, a corrugated shape may be used, or a combination of linear holes and corrugated (curved) holes may be used.

In the twenty-fifth embodiment, the load between the inclined surface portion 9689b2 and the chamfered inclined portion 9764a1 is changed according to the attitude of the displacement member 9680, so that the susceptibility to displacement of the light emitting operation effect unit 9700 is changed. Although the case where it does is explained, it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, regardless of the design of the inclined surface portion 9689b2 and the chamfered inclined portion 9764a1, a high-friction resin material may be placed at the pressing portion, or a high-viscosity sheet member may be placed at the pressing portion. However, a single or a plurality of recesses and protrusions to be fitted to each other may be formed at the locations where they are pressed against each other.

The shape of the concave portion and the convex portion may be one that is unevenly formed around a point, or may be a ridge or concave groove formed around a straight line or a curved line. In the case of ridges and grooves, it is easy to allow the positional deviation of the light emitting operation effect unit 9700 in the direction along the extending direction, but the positional deviation of the light emitting effect effect unit 9700 in the direction intersecting with the extending direction is restricted. can be made easier.

In the twenty-sixth embodiment, a case has been described in which the action of setting the rotating member 810 to the proper posture is caused by the force exerted by the weight of the detection gear 10831. However, this is not necessarily the case. For example, the attitude of the rotating member 810 may be strictly controlled.

Further, the rotating member 810 may not be raised in the backward rolling direction until the rotating member 810 assumes an appropriate posture. For example, when the rotating member 810 is in the proper posture, it retreats to the left and right inner sides, and when the rotating member 810 is out of the proper posture, an engaging portion that protrudes left and right outward is provided in the rotation effect device 800, and when it protrudes, the engaging portion is provided. can be fitted (inserted) into the inner member 670, and the movement of the rotating member 810 in the rising direction may be restricted during fitting. In this case, it is possible to mechanically prevent the rotating member 810 from rising without being in the proper posture, so that unexpected damage to the rotating member 810 can be avoided.

In each of the above-described embodiments, the detection device SE3 arranged downstream of the first prize winning port 64 has been described so that the front and rear positions thereof are the same, and the detection device SE3 is arranged on the left and right sides. do not have. For example, the placement of the detection device SE3 may be shifted back and forth.

<27th Embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 in the twenty-seventh embodiment will be described. 443 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10 in the twenty-seventh embodiment, FIG. 444 is a front view of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 445 is a front view of the sorting device 700 provided on the game board 13. 446 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10. FIG.

The pachinko machine 10, as shown in FIG. and an inner frame 12 supported so as to be openable and closable. In order to support the inner frame 12, the outer frame 11 is provided with metal hinges 18 at two upper and lower positions on the left side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 443). A frame 12 is supported toward the front side so that it can be opened and closed.

A game board 13 (see FIG. 444) having a large number of nails, winning openings 63, 64, etc. is detachably attached to the inner frame 12 from the back side. A pinball game is performed by the balls flowing down the front surface of the game board 13 . In addition, the inner frame 12 includes a ball shooting unit 112a (see FIG. 462) that shoots a ball to the front area of the game board 13 and a shooting unit that guides the ball shot from the ball shooting unit 112a to the front area of the game board 13. A rail (not shown) or the like is attached.

On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 covering the front upper side and a lower tray unit 15 covering the lower side are provided. In order to support the front frame 14 and the lower tray unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached at two upper and lower positions on the left side of the front view (see FIG. 443). 14 and a lower tray unit 15 are supported toward the front side so that they can be opened and closed. The locking of the inner frame 12 and the locking of the front frame 14 are unlocked by inserting a dedicated key into the keyhole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

The front frame 14 is assembled with decorative resin parts, electrical parts, and the like, and has a window portion 14c having a substantially elliptical opening at its substantially central portion. A glass unit 16 having two sheet glasses is arranged on the back side of the front frame 14, and the front side of the game board 13 can be visually recognized on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 16.例文帳に追加

An upper tray 17 for storing balls projects forward from the front frame 14 and is formed in a substantially box-like shape with an open upper surface. The bottom surface of the upper tray 17 is inclined downward to the right when viewed from the front (see FIG. 443), and the inclination guides the ball thrown into the upper tray 17 to the ball shooting unit 112a. A frame button 22 is provided above the upper plate 17 . This frame button 22 is used, for example, to change the stage (background image) of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 444) described later, or to change the content of the super ready-to-win effect. , operated by the player.

A stage is a performance mode in which various performances displayed on the third pattern display device 81 are unified. The pachinko machine 10 is provided with two stages, a "sand beach stage" and a "deep sea stage." ing. Various effects such as variable effects and ready-to-reach effects that are performed when a ball enters the first ball hole 64 (starting winning), which will be described later, are designed to be performed in accordance with the themes given to each stage. It is The stage is changed when the frame button 22 is operated by the player during a period in which the variable effect is not performed or during high-speed variation. ”→“Beach stage”→…. Immediately after the power is turned on, the "sand beach stage" is set as the initial stage.

Although detailed description will be given later, the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment is configured to be able to display various stages (background images) in addition to the stages (background images) described above, depending on the game situation. . For example, when the clocked time reaches a predetermined time, a dedicated effect (SP effect) can be executed for a predetermined period (3 minutes), and the SP effect is executed. During the period, a stage (background image) dedicated to SP production is displayed. In addition, a pre-performance (read-ahead performance) for informing the player in advance that the result of the special symbol lottery executed based on the starting prize will result in a big win can be executed, and the read-ahead performance is executed. During the period, a stage (background image) dedicated to the look-ahead effect is displayed.

Thus, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the stage (background image) of the effect is changed based on the operation of the frame button 22 by the player, and the game is played according to the situation of the game to be executed. and a function to change regardless of the operation of the frame button 22 by the player. (performance) can be prevented from becoming monotonous, and the player can be prevented from becoming bored with the game early. A certain performance can be executed.

In the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, as change conditions for changing the stage (background image) of the effect, a change condition that can be established based on the operation of the player and a change condition that can be established based on the clocked time. Conditions and change conditions that can be established based on the results of the special symbol lottery are provided, but are not limited to these, for example, are established when the number of times the special symbol lottery is executed reaches a predetermined number of times. A change condition that can be obtained, a change condition that can be established when the number of times of winning a jackpot by a special symbol lottery reaches a predetermined number of times, and a change lottery for deciding whether to change the stage can be executed. A change condition may be established based on the result of the change lottery.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the type of stage that can be changed by the player operating the frame button 22 is different from the type of stage that can be changed according to the game situation. is changed, the player can easily grasp what the change condition is, but it is not limited to this, and can be changed by the player operating the frame button 22. All or part of the types of stages that are changed according to the game situation may be of a common type. By configuring in this way, when the stage is changed, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand what triggered the stage change. It is possible to make the player interested in the content of variable presentation for showing the result of the lottery.

On the other hand, the third pattern display device 81 is configured to display a selection screen of the super ready-to-win effect mode during the normal ready-to-win when the normal ready-to-win effect is started and the normal ready-to-win is to be developed into the super ready-to-win. When the frame button 22 is operated by the player while the selection screen is being displayed, the content of the effect at the time of super ready-to-win is changed.

Light-emitting means such as various lamps are provided around the front frame 14 (for example, corner portions). These light emitting means are controlled to change the light emitting mode by lighting or blinking in response to changes in the game state such as when a big win is made or when a predetermined ready-to-win state is reached, and play a role of enhancing the effect during the game. Illuminated portions 29 to 33 containing light emitting means such as LEDs are provided on the periphery of the window portion 14c. In the pachinko machine 10, these electric decoration parts 29 to 33 function as production lamps such as big win lamps, and the respective electric decoration parts 29 to 33 are lit by lighting or blinking of built-in LEDs at the time of a big win or a ready-to-win production. Alternatively, it flashes to indicate that the jackpot is in progress or that the player is in the process of reaching one step before the jackpot. In addition, a display lamp 34 having a built-in light-emitting means such as an LED and capable of displaying when a prize ball is being paid out and when an error has occurred is provided at the upper left portion of the front frame 14 when viewed from the front (see FIG. 443).

In addition, a small window 35 is formed by attaching a transparent resin from the back side so that the back side of the front frame 14 can be visually recognized on the lower side of the right electrical decoration part 32, and a pasting space K1 on the front side of the game board 13 (Fig. 444) can be visually recognized from the front of the pachinko machine 10. In addition, in the pachinko machine 10, in order to bring out more splendor, a plated member 36 made of ABS resin, which is plated with chrome, is attached to the area around the electric decorations 29-33.

A ball rental operation unit 40 is arranged below the window portion 14c. A ball rental operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41 , a ball rental button 42 and a return button 43 . When the ball lending operation unit 40 is operated with banknotes, cards, etc. inserted into a card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, the balls are released according to the operation. Lending is done. Specifically, the frequency display section 41 is an area in which the balance information of the card or the like is displayed, and the built-in LED is turned on to display the remaining amount in numbers as the balance information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain lending balls based on information recorded on a card or the like (recording medium), and lending balls are supplied to the top tray 17 as long as the card or the like has a balance. be done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of the card or the like inserted in the card unit. A pachinko machine in which balls are directly lent to the upper tray 17 from a ball leasing device or the like without going through the card unit, that is, a so-called cash machine, does not require the ball leasing operation unit 40. A decorative seal or the like may be added to the installation portion to make the parts configuration common. It is possible to achieve commonality between a pachinko machine using a card unit and a cash machine.

In the lower tray unit 15 positioned below the upper tray 17, a lower tray 50 for storing balls that could not be stored in the upper tray 17 is formed in a substantially box-like shape with an open upper surface. there is On the right side of the lower tray 50, an operation handle 51 operated by the player to hit the ball to the front surface of the game board 13 is arranged, and inside the operation handle 51, the ball shooting unit 112a is permitted to be driven. a touch sensor 51a for the purpose, a push-button stop switch 51b for stopping the shooting of the ball during the pressing operation, and a variable resistor for detecting the amount of rotation operation of the operation handle 51 from changes in electrical resistance. (not shown) are built-in. When the operating handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes according to the amount of operation. A ball is shot with a strength corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor that changes with the movement of the ball, and is thereby hit to the front surface of the game board 13 with a flight amount corresponding to the player's operation. Further, when the operating handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the stop switch 51b are turned off.

A ball extraction lever 52 is provided at the lower portion of the lower tray 50 when viewed from the front and is operated when the balls stored in the lower tray 50 are ejected downward. The ball extracting lever 52 is always biased to the right, and when it is slid to the left against the bias, the bottom opening formed in the bottom of the lower tray 50 is opened. The ball naturally falls from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball extracting lever 52 is normally performed with a box (generally called a "senryo box") placed below the lower tray 50 to receive the balls ejected from the lower tray 50 . The operation handle 51 is arranged on the right side of the lower tray 50 as described above, and the ashtray 53 is attached on the left side of the lower tray 50 .

FIG. 444 is a front view of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in the twenty-seventh embodiment. As shown in FIG. 444, the game board 13 according to the twenty-seventh embodiment has a base plate 60 which is cut into a substantially square shape in front view, and a number of nails (not shown) for guiding balls, windmills, and rails 76. , 77, general ball entrance 63, second ball entrance 640, variable winning device 65, through gate 67, variable display device unit 80, sorting device 700, etc. (See Fig. 443). The base plate 60 is made of wood by pasting together thin plate materials, and is formed so that various structures arranged on the back side of the base plate 60 cannot be seen from the front side of the base plate 60 by the player. The general ball entrance 63, the second ball entrance 640, the variable prize winning device 65, the variable display device unit 80, and the sorting device 700 are arranged in through holes formed in the base plate 60 by router processing. It is fixed by a tapping screw or the like from the front side of the . Further, although the details will be described later, inside the sorting device 700, a first ball entrance 64 and a right second ball entrance 640r through which a ball can enter are provided. Details will be described later with reference to FIG. 445, but the ball entering the opening 710a of the sorting device 700 is sorted by the sorting device 700 to either the first ball entrance 64 or the right second ball entrance 640r. It is distributed as follows (see Fig. 445).

The central portion of the front surface of the game board 13 can be seen from the front side of the inner frame 4 through the window portion 5c of the front door 5 (see FIG. 443). Mainly referring to FIG. 444, the configuration of the game board 13 will be described below.

An outer rail 77 formed by bending a strip-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is planted on the front surface of the game board 13, and a strip-shaped metal plate similar to the outer rail 77 is placed inside the outer rail 77. An arc-shaped inner rail 76 formed by is erected. The outer periphery of the front surface of the game board 13 is surrounded by the inner rail 76 and the outer rail 77, and the front and rear sides are surrounded by the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 443). A game area is formed in which a game is played by the behavior of . The game area is the front surface of the game board 13 and is defined by two rails 76 and 77 and a resin-made outer edge member 73 connecting the rails (a prize-winning opening, etc. area where the ball flows down).

The two rails 76 and 77 are provided to guide the ball shot from the ball shooting unit 112a (see FIG. 462) to the upper part of the game board 13. As shown in FIG. A return ball prevention member 68 is attached to the tip of the inner rail 76 (upper left part in FIG. 444) to prevent the ball once guided to the upper part of the game board 13 from returning into the ball guide passage again. be done. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 77 (upper right in FIG. 444) at a position corresponding to the maximum flying portion of the ball. is attenuated and rebounded toward the center.

First pattern display devices 37a and 37b having a plurality of LEDs as light emitting means and a 7-segment display are arranged in the lower left part of the game area when viewed from the front (lower left part in FIG. 444). The first symbol display devices 37a and 37b are for displaying according to each control performed by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 462), and mainly display the game state of the pachinko machine 10. FIG. In the twenty-seventh embodiment, the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b determine whether the ball has entered the first ball entrance 64, the second ball entrance 640, or the right second ball entrance 640r. It is configured so that it can be used properly according to the situation. Specifically, when the ball enters the first ball entrance 64, the first symbol display device 37a operates, while the ball enters the second ball entrance 640 or the right second ball entrance. When winning 640r, the first symbol display device 37b is configured to operate.

In addition, the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b use the LEDs to indicate whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the variable probability, the time saving mode, or the normal state by the lighting state, or whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the changing state by the lighting state. , The lighting state indicates whether the stopped pattern is a pattern corresponding to the probability variable jackpot (jackpots A1 to D1), the pattern corresponding to the normal jackpot (jackpot E1), or the missing pattern, or the number of pending balls is indicated by the lighting state. A 7-segment display device displays the number of rounds during the jackpot and an error. The plurality of LEDs are configured so that each LED has a different emission color (for example, red, green, and blue), and depending on the combination of the emission colors, it is possible to suggest various game states of the pachinko machine 10 with a small number of LEDs. can.

In the pachinko machine 10, a lottery is conducted when any one of the first ball entrance 64, the second ball entrance 640, and the right second ball entrance 640r wins. In the lottery, the pachinko machine 10 determines whether or not it is a big win (big win lottery), and also determines the kind of big win when it is determined as a big win. The types of jackpots determined here include: 10R variable jackpot (jackpot A1), 10R variable jackpot (jackpot B1), 5R variable jackpot (jackpot C1), 2R variable jackpot (jackpot D1), 10R time-saving 100 times jackpot (jackpot E1) ) are provided. The first pattern display devices 37a and 37b not only indicate whether or not the result of the lottery is a jackpot as a stop pattern after the end of variation, but also indicate a pattern corresponding to the jackpot type when the jackpot is won. .

"10R probability variable jackpot" (jackpot A1) means that after being notified that the third pattern is a jackpot by stopping and displaying the same pattern, after the jackpot game with a maximum number of rounds of 10 rounds, It is a jackpot in which a variable state is set. Here, the probability variable state is a state (high probability state of special symbols) in which the probability of winning a jackpot by special symbol lottery is higher than the normal state (low probability state), and the special symbol lottery is more likely to be executed than the normal state. It is a game state that becomes a state (high probability state of normal symbols). In other words, the variable probability state is a gaming state in which the special symbol lottery is likely to be executed, and the special symbol lottery is likely to win a jackpot, and is the most advantageous gaming state for the player. The “10R probability variable jackpot” (jackpot B1) is the same jackpot as the above-mentioned (jackpot A1), and the “5R probability variable jackpot” (jackpot C1) is the above-mentioned (jackpot A1). It is a jackpot that differs only in that the maximum number of rounds is stipulated as 5 rounds. Jackpots that differ only in the points specified in the round. And "10R time saving 100 times jackpot" (jackpot E1) is a jackpot in which a time saving state is set after a jackpot game with a maximum number of rounds of 10 rounds. Here, the time-saving state is a game in which the probability of winning a jackpot by a special symbol lottery is a normal state (low probability state), but the special symbol lottery is easier to execute than the normal state (high probability state of normal symbols). It's about the state. That is, the time-saving state is a game state in which the special symbol lottery is more likely to be executed than in the normal state, and is a game state in which the player is more advantageous than the normal state and more disadvantageous than the variable probability state.

In the twenty-seventh embodiment, when the variable probability state is set after the end of the jackpot game, the variable probability state continues until the next big win is won in the special symbol lottery, and the time saving state is set. In this case, it is configured to continue until the number of special symbol lotteries executed during the time saving state reaches 100 times (predetermined number of times). In addition, the period during which each game state continues is not limited to this, for example, when the variable probability state is set, until the number of special symbol lottery executed during the variable probability state reaches 100 times (predetermined number of times) It may be constructed so that the variable probability state continues, or it may be constructed so that the time saving state continues until a big win is won in the next special symbol lottery. In addition, when the probability variable state is set, the condition for ending the high probability state of the special symbol and the condition for ending the high probability state of the normal symbol may be different, for example, the high probability state of the special symbol As a condition for ending the special symbol lottery, the number of times of execution of the special symbol lottery may be defined as 50 times, and as a condition for ending the high probability state of the normal symbol, the number of times of execution of the special symbol lottery may be defined as 100 times.

By configuring in this way, the game in the probability changing state is executed until the special symbol lottery is executed 50 times after the variable probability state is set, and after that, until the special symbol lottery is executed 50 times, A game during the time saving state is executed, and then a game during the normal state is executed. As a result, the player can play the game in a plurality of game states so that the degree of advantage decreases step by step, so that when the variable probability state is set, the player can expect to win the jackpot as soon as possible. A player can play a game.

Also, the game state may be changed step by step so that the degree of advantage to the player increases as the number of special symbol lotteries executed after the end of the jackpot game increases. As a result, it is possible to prevent a period in which the jackpot is not won from continuing for a long period of time and the player's desire to play the game to decrease.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 in the present embodiment, each of the above-described jackpot types (jackpot A1 to jackpot E1) is executed as an effect (during jackpot effect) executed using the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 during the jackpot game. It is configured to execute different productions depending on the situation. Specifically, when the jackpot type is one of the jackpots B1, C1, and D1, after informing in advance that the probability variable state is set after the jackpot game ends, the jackpot game is started as an effect during the jackpot. An effect during the jackpot (rank-up effect) is executed to entertain the player as to how many rounds the game will continue. Further, when the jackpot types are jackpots A1 and E1, the fact that the jackpot game will continue for 10 rounds can be notified in advance, and the game state set after the jackpot game ends can be notified to the player during the jackpot game. A big hit production (variable promotion production) is executed.

By configuring in this way, the player can have various expectations for the performance during the jackpot executed during the jackpot game according to the type of the set jackpot, so that the performance during the jackpot can be achieved. You can increase the effect.

Here, the game state types set in the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment will be described. In this embodiment, the normal state as the game state (low probability state of special symbols, low probability state of normal symbols), time-saving state (low probability state of special symbols, high probability state of normal symbols), variable state (special The high probability state of the design, the high probability state of the normal design), it is configured to be settable.

"Special symbol high probability state" refers to a state in which the subsequent jackpot probability is increased as an added value after the jackpot game ends. In other words, it is a state in which it is easy for the player to shift to a jackpot game state (special game state) that is advantageous to the player. In addition, "normal symbol high probability state" refers to a state in which the winning probability of winning the second symbol lottery is set high and the variation time of the second symbol is also set short. When the second pattern lottery is won, the ball is easily entered into the second ball entrance 640 (the electric accessory 640a attached to the second ball entrance 640 is opened). A per-figure game is executed. In other words, the “normal symbol high probability state” is a state in which a ball is likely to enter the second ball entrance 640, thereby facilitating execution of the special symbol lottery.

On the other hand, the "special symbol low probability state" means a state in which the jackpot probability is normal, that is, a state in which the jackpot probability is lower than the "special symbol high probability state". In addition, the ``normal symbol low probability state'' means a state in which the winning probability of the second symbol lottery (normal symbol lottery) is normal, that is, a state in which the winning probability is lower than that of the ``normal symbol high probability state''.

In the "normal pattern high probability state", not only the winning probability of the second symbol lottery is increased, but also the opening time of the electric accessory 640a attached to the second ball entrance 640 is changed. A longer time is set compared to the "low probability state". When the electric accessory 640a is in the open state (open state), the ball enters the second ball entrance 640 more than when the electric accessory 640a is in the closed state (closed state). It becomes easy. Therefore, during the variable probability state or the time-saving state in which the ``normal pattern high probability state'' is set, the ball is likely to enter the second ball entrance 640, and the number of times the special pattern lottery is performed can be increased. .

In addition, as the control content for the electric accessory 640a in the normal pattern winning game in the "normal symbol high probability state", the second ball entrance 640 It is sufficient if it is controlled so that the ball can easily enter the ball. , the number of times the electric accessory 640a is released may be increased more than the "normal symbol low probability state", or the timing at which the electric accessory 640a is released during the normal pattern per game may be changed. Thus, it may be configured such that the ball enters the second ball entrance 640 more easily than in the normal pattern winning game in the "normal pattern low probability state". In addition, without changing the winning probability of the second symbol lottery, at least one of the time during which the electric accessory 640a attached to the second ball entrance 640 is opened and the number of times the electric accessory 640a is opened in one win. may be changed. In addition, the time when the electric accessory 640a attached to the second ball entrance 640 is opened and the number of times the electric accessory 640a is opened in one hit are not set, and the winning probability of the second symbol lottery is set to "normal symbol". The variation time of the second symbol lottery may be changed to be shortened compared to the "normal symbol low probability state".

The game area is provided with a plurality of general ball entrances 63 through which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as winning balls. A variable display device unit 80 is arranged in the central portion of the game area. In the variable display device unit 80, the first pattern display devices 37a and 37b are triggered by the winning of any one of the first ball entrance 64, the second ball entrance 640, and the right second ball entrance 640r (start winning). A third pattern display device 81 composed of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply referred to as "display device") that performs variable display of the third pattern while synchronizing with the variable display in , and the passage of the ball through the through gate 67 as a trigger A second pattern display device (not shown) composed of LEDs for variably displaying the second pattern is provided.

A center frame 86 is arranged in the variable display device unit 80 so as to surround the outer circumference of the third pattern display device 81 . The third pattern display device 81 can be visually recognized through an opening formed in the center of the center frame 86 . The center frame 86 protrudes toward the front side of the game board 13 and surrounds the third symbol display device 81 to prevent the game ball from contacting the third symbol display device 81 .

The third pattern display device 81 is composed of a large liquid crystal display of 15 inches size, and the display contents are controlled by the display control device 114 (see FIG. 462) so that, for example, upper, middle and lower three patterns are displayed. A column of symbols is displayed. Each pattern row is composed of a plurality of patterns (third patterns), and these third patterns are vertically scrolled for each pattern row to variably display the third pattern on the display screen of the third pattern display device 81. It's like In the third symbol display device 81 of the present embodiment, the display of the game state accompanying the control of the main control device 110 (see FIG. 462) is performed by the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b. Decorative display according to the display of the pattern display devices 37a and 37b is performed. Incidentally, instead of the display device, for example, the third symbol display device 81 may be configured using a reel or the like.

The second pattern display device 83 performs a variable display by alternately lighting up a “○” pattern and an “X” pattern as display patterns (second patterns) for a predetermined time each time the ball passes through the through gate 67. It is. In the pachinko machine 10, when it is detected that the ball has passed through the through gate 67, a winning lottery is performed. As a result of the winning lottery, if the winning lottery is won, the second symbol display device stops and displays the symbol "○" after the second symbol is variably displayed. Further, if the result of the winning lottery is a loss, the symbol "x" is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device after the variable display of the third symbol.

In the pachinko machine 10, when the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 stops at a predetermined symbol (symbol of "○" in this embodiment), the electric role object 640a attached to the second ball entrance 640 is It is configured to be activated (opened) for a predetermined period of time.

The time required for the variable display of the second pattern is set to be shorter in the probability variable state or the time saving state (high probability state of normal patterns) than in the case of the normal state (low probability state of normal patterns). be done. As a result, the variable display of the second symbol is performed in a short time in the probability variable state and the time saving state, so that the lottery per normal pattern can be performed more often than in the normal state. Therefore, since the chances of winning in the normal drawing winning lottery increase, the electric accessory 640a of the second ball entrance 640 can be given to the player more chances to be in the open state. Therefore, the variable probability state and the time saving state are advantageous game states for the player from the viewpoint of executing the special symbol lottery.

In addition, in the probability change state and the time reduction state, by other methods such as increasing the probability of hitting the normal pattern, increasing the opening time and the number of times of opening the electric accessory 640a for the normal pattern per time, during the probability change state and the time saving state When the ball is in a state where it is easy for the ball to enter the second ball entrance 640, the time required for the variable display of the second symbol may be fixed regardless of the game state. On the other hand, if the time required for the variable display of the second symbol is set shorter than the normal state in the probability variable state or the time saving state, the normal pattern per probability may be made constant regardless of the game state, or once The opening time and number of openings of the electric accessary 640a with respect to the hit may be fixed regardless of the game state.

The through gates 67 are attached to the game board on both sides of the variable display unit 80 . The through gate 67 is configured so that part of the balls flowing down the game board 13 among the balls launched to the game board can pass through. When the ball passes through the through gate 67, a winning lottery for the second symbol is performed. After the winning lottery, the variable display is performed on the second symbol display device, and if the result of the winning lottery is a win, the symbol "○" is displayed as a stop symbol of the variable display, and if the result of the winning lottery is a loss. For example, an "x" symbol is displayed as a variable display stop symbol.

The number of times the ball passes through the through gate 67 is reserved up to four times in total, and the number of reserved balls is displayed by the above-described first symbol display devices 37a and 37b, and the second symbol reservation lamp 84 is also lit and displayed. be. Four second symbol holding lamps 84 corresponding to the maximum number of holding lamps are provided, and arranged symmetrically below the third symbol display device 81 .

In addition, the variable display of the second pattern is performed by switching lighting and non-lighting of a plurality of lamps in the second pattern display device as in the present embodiment. A part of the pattern display device 81 may be used. Similarly, the lighting of the second symbol reservation lamp may be performed by a part of the third symbol display device 81 . Also, the maximum number of held balls for passage of the ball through the through gate 67 is not limited to 4, and may be set to 3 or less, or 5 or more (for example, 8). Also, the number of through gates to be assembled is not limited to two, and may be three or more. Also, the mounting position of the through gate is not limited to the right and left sides of the variable display device unit 80, and may be below the variable display device unit 80, for example. Also, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b, the lighting display may not be performed by the second symbol reservation lamp.

Below the variable display device unit 80, a sorting device 700 is arranged in which balls can win. When a ball enters a prize through the opening 710a of the sorting device 700, the entered ball is alternately sorted to the first ball entrance 64 or the right second ball entrance 640r. be done. When the ball enters (enters) the first ball entrance 64, a first ball entrance switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the first ball entrance switch is turned on. As a result, the main controller 110 (see FIG. 462) draws a jackpot lottery, and the first symbol display device 37a displays the result of the lottery. Also, when the ball enters the second ball entrance 640r, a second ball entrance switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, as in the case of the second ball entrance 640r. Due to the turn-on of the second ball entrance switch, the main controller 110 (see FIG. 462) draws a jackpot lottery, and the display corresponding to the lottery result is shown on the first symbol display device 37b.

On the other hand, a second ball entrance 640 through which a ball can enter is provided below the sorting device 700 when viewed from the front. When the ball enters the second ball entrance 640, a second ball entrance switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main control is caused by turning on the second ball entrance switch. A jackpot lottery is performed by the device 110 (see FIG. 462), and a display corresponding to the lottery result is shown by the first symbol display device 37b. Normally, the second ball entrance 640 prevents (difficult to enter) the game ball by regulating the entry of the game ball in a state in which the left and right electric accessories 640a configured in the shape of wings stand upright. ), and when a normal pattern to be described later is hit, the electric accessory 640a rotates about 45 degrees in the outward direction as an opening operation in a certain operation pattern and becomes an inverted eight. A game ball is guided to the second ball entrance 640 and is configured to easily enter the second ball entrance 640 .

In addition, the first ball entrance 64 and the right second ball entrance 640r each pay out five balls as prize balls when a ball wins, and the second ball entrance 640 receives two balls as prize balls. It is also one of the prize-winning openings that are paid out as balls. In this embodiment, the number of prize balls paid out when the ball enters the first ball entrance 64, the number of prize balls paid out when the ball enters the second ball entrance 640, and the number of prize balls paid out when the ball enters the second ball entrance 640 The number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the second ball entrance 640r is set to a different number, but the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the first ball entrance 64 and the second ball entrance The number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters 640 and the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the second right ball entrance 640r may be the same number.

In addition, in the present embodiment, prize balls are dispensed when the balls flowing into the opening 710a of the sorting device 700 enter the first ball entrance 64 and the right second ball entrance 640r. However, without being limited to this, for example, the same number of prize balls are paid out when a ball enters the first ball entrance 64 and when a ball enters the right second ball entrance 640r. When configured as above, a detection switch for detecting that the ball has flowed into the opening 710a is provided near the opening 710a, and the prize ball is paid when the detection switch detects the ball. It may be configured to output By configuring in this way, it is possible to reduce the time lag from when the balls flow into the opening 710a of the sorting device 700 until when the prize balls are actually paid out. Furthermore, by measuring the flow-down period from when the detection switch described above detects the ball to when the ball enters the first ball entrance 64 or the right second ball entrance 640r, the balls in the sorting device 700 It may be configured such that the condition of the flow path can be determined.

Furthermore, it may be configured to execute an effect using the flowing period. In this case, the ball that has flowed into the sorting device 700 is distributed to the sorting device 700 rather than alternately sorting to the first ball entrance 64 and the right second ball entrance 640r as in the present embodiment. A configuration is adopted in which it is difficult for the player to grasp which ball entrance the inflowing ball enters, or a ball that has flowed into the opening 710 a of the sorting device 700 is pushed into the first ball entrance 64 . The period required for winning a prize (first ball flow period) and the period required for the ball flowing into the opening 710a of the sorting device 700 to enter the right second ball entrance 640r (second ball flow period) ) and may be configured differently. As a result, it is possible to provide the player with the enjoyment of predicting the type of the ball entrance into which the ball will enter next, by means of an effect using the flow-down period of the ball that has flowed into the sorting device 700.例文帳に追加Also, in this case, the sorting device 700 should be configured so that the longer the falling period, the easier it is for the ball to enter the ball entrance, which is more advantageous to the player.

In addition, in the present embodiment, a ball that has flowed into the sorting device 700 always enters either the first ball entrance 64 or the right second ball entrance 640r. By the inflow of balls, prize balls are paid out and special symbol lottery is executed. Depending on the situation, a privilege other than the privilege of paying out prize balls (for example, execution of a special symbol lottery) may be granted or not granted. By configuring in this way, it is possible to greatly differ the degree of advantage of the privilege given to the player when the ball flows into the sorting device 700. It can make the player more interested in the situation.

The second entrance 640 is accompanied by an electric accessory 640a. This electric accessory 640a is configured to be openable and closable, and normally the electric accessory 640a is in a closed state (reduced state), making it difficult for the ball to enter the second ball entrance 640. On the other hand, as a result of the variable display of the second symbol triggered by the passage of the ball through the through gate 67, when the symbol "○" is displayed on the second symbol display device, the electric accessory 640a is in the open state (enlarged state), and the ball is likely to enter the second ball entrance 640.例文帳に追加

As described above, the variable probability state and the time saving state have a higher probability of hitting the second symbol than the normal state, and the time required for the variable display of the second symbol is short, so in the variable display of the second symbol "○ ” is more likely to be displayed, and the number of times the electric accessory 640a is in the open state (enlarged state) increases. Furthermore, in the variable probability state and the time saving state, the time during which the electric accessory 640a is opened is longer than in the normal state. Therefore, the probability variable state and the time saving state can create a state in which the ball is more likely to enter the second ball entrance 640 than in the normal state.

Therefore, in a normal state, the electric accessory attached to the second ball entrance 640 is often closed, and it is difficult to win the second ball entrance 640. A jackpot lottery (special symbol lottery) is executed by entering a ball and distributing the entered ball to the first ball entrance 64 or the right second ball entrance 640r.

On the other hand, in the variable probability state and the time saving state, by passing the ball through either the left or right through gate 67, the electric accessory 640a attached to the second ball entrance 640 is likely to be in an open state, and the second ball entrance 640 Since it is in a state where it is easy to win a prize, the ball that enters the opening 710a is distributed to the first ball entrance 64 or the right second ball entrance 640r, and also to the second ball entrance 640. It becomes easier to execute a jackpot lottery associated with the entry of a ball. Therefore, there are more chances to execute the big win lottery (special symbol lottery) than in the normal state, which is more advantageous to the player than in the normal state.

In this way, the sorting device 700, the second ball entrance 640, and the variable winning device 65 are arranged below the variable display device unit 80 in the game area provided on the game board 13. Even when a game (left-handed game) is played in which balls are shot toward the game area (the game area formed on the left side of the variable display unit 80), the right side game area (the game area formed on the right side of the variable display unit 80) Even when a game (right-handed game) is performed in which balls are shot toward the game area where the ball is played, the ratio of balls reaching the sorting device 700, the second ball entrance 640, and the variable winning device 65 is the same. It is configured to be Therefore, since the same degree of advantage can be given to the player regardless of how the game is played, the player can play the game with peace of mind.

Note that, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 444, among the game areas provided on the game board 13, the sorting device 700, the second ball entrance 640, and the variable winning device are positioned below the variable display unit 80. 65 is provided, and even when a game (left-handed game) in which balls are shot toward the left game area (game area formed on the left side of the variable display unit 80) is performed, the right game area Even when a game (right-handed game) in which balls are shot toward (the game area formed on the right side of the variable display unit 80) is performed, the sorting device 700, the second ball entrance 640, and the variable winning device 65 Although it is configured so that the ratio of the balls reaching the same is the same, it is not limited to this. In addition, it is easier for the ball to reach the second ball entrance 640 and the variable winning device 65 when the right-handed game is performed than when the left-handed game is performed. may be configured. In other words, it may be configured such that the game method (left-handed game, right-handed game) advantageous to the player is switched according to the set game state. With such a configuration, it is possible to change the way the player hits the ball, so that the player can enjoy the game.

A variable prize winning device 65 is arranged below the sorting device 700, and a horizontally long rectangular specific prize winning port (large open port) 65a is provided in a substantially central portion thereof. In the pachinko machine 10, when a jackpot lottery (special pattern lottery) is won in a jackpot lottery (special pattern lottery) caused by winning any one of the first ball entrance 64, the second ball entrance 640, and the right second ball entrance 640r. , After a predetermined time (fluctuation time) has elapsed, the first symbol display device 37a or the first symbol display device 37b is lit so as to become a jackpot stop symbol, and the stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot is displayed on the third symbol display device. Displayed at 81, the occurrence of a jackpot is indicated. After that, the game state transitions to a special game state (jackpot) in which the ball is likely to win. As this special game state, the specific winning opening 65a which is normally closed is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds have passed or until 10 balls have been won).

The specific winning opening 65a is closed after a predetermined period of time has passed, and after the closing, the specific winning opening 65a is opened again for a predetermined period of time. The opening and closing operation of the specific winning opening 65a can be repeated up to 16 times (16 rounds), for example. The state in which this opening and closing operation is performed is one form of a special game state that is advantageous to the player, and the player is given a game value (game value) by paying out a larger amount of prize balls than usual. is done.

Specifically, the variable prize winning device 65 includes a horizontally long rectangular opening/closing plate that covers the specific prize winning opening 65a, and a large opening solenoid (not shown) for opening and closing forward with the lower side of the opening/closing plate as an axis. and The specific prize winning opening 65a is normally in a closed state in which the ball cannot or hardly wins a prize. In the event of a big win, the large opening solenoid is driven to tilt the opening/closing plate to the lower front side to temporarily form an open state in which the ball is likely to enter the specific prize winning port 65a, and the open state and the normal closed state are formed. It operates to alternate between states.

Incidentally, the special game state is not limited to the form described above. A large opening that is opened and closed separately from the specific winning opening 65a is provided in the game area, and when the LED corresponding to the big win is lit in the first pattern display devices 37a and 37b, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time, and the A special game is a game state in which a large opening provided separately from the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time and a predetermined number of times when a ball enters the specific winning opening 65a while the specific winning opening 65a is open. You may make it form as a state. In addition, the number of the specific prize winning openings 65a is not limited to one, and one or more than two (for example, three) may be arranged. For example, the left side of the variable display unit 80 may be used.

An affixing space K1 for affixing a certificate stamp, an identification label, etc. is provided at the right corner of the lower side of the game board 13. 35 (see FIG. 443).

The game board 13 is provided with an out port 66 . Balls that flow down the game area and do not enter any of the entrances 63, 64, 65a, 640, 640r are guided through the exit 66 to a ball discharge path (not shown). The out port 66 is arranged below the sorting device 700 .

The game board 13 is provided with a large number of nails for properly dispersing and adjusting the falling direction of the balls, and various members (accessories) such as windmills.

Next, with reference to FIG. 445, the sorting device 700 will be described. 445 is a partially enlarged front view of the sorting device 700. FIG. As shown in FIG. 444 , the sorting device 700 is arranged below the variable display device unit 80 of the game board 13 . A through hole formed in the game board 13 accommodates a flow passage portion through which a game ball entering the opening portion 710a flows down, and a flow passage portion through which a game ball that enters the second ball inlet 640 flows down. The base member of the sorting device 700 is configured to be screwed to the game board 13 from the front side.

The prize winning member 730 is formed in a horizontally long rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and includes the above-described opening 710a positioned at the upper center in the left-right direction, the electric accessory 640a positioned below the opening 710a, and the electric accessory 640a. Through-holes (not shown) located on both sides in the left-right direction and penetrating in the front-rear direction, and lower insertion holes (not shown) located below the through-holes and penetrating in the front-rear direction are formed. Formed by the Lord.

The distribution member 760 is formed in a horizontally long rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and is formed in a box-like body with an open front side. In addition, the distribution member 760 is bent at a substantially center position in the left-right direction when viewed from the front, and is inclined downward from the substantially center position in the left-right direction toward the outer side in the left-right direction. Both ends of the sorting member 760 in the left-right direction are set at positions facing the through-holes of the winning member 730 described above.

The distributing member 760 includes a pair of inclined surfaces 761 that incline downward from the central position in the left-right direction in a front view toward both left and right sides, and a distributing member 762 that is arranged at the center of each of the inclined surfaces 761 and the distributing member 762 . and a ball feed port formed above.

The distribution member 762 is formed in an annular shape, and has three protrusions 762a projecting outward from the outer edge thereof at intervals of 90 degrees around the axis, and is inserted through the inside of the annular shape. and a shaft portion 762b.

The shaft portion 762b is a shaft support portion for rotating the distribution member 762 around an axis, is formed in a cylindrical shape, and is inserted through the inner side of the circular ring of the distribution member 762 . In this state, the shaft portion 762b is sandwiched between the intervening member and the distribution member 760, so that the distribution member 762 is arranged rotatably around the shaft portion 762b.

The projection 762a is a projection for alternately distributing the ball one by one to the left and right inclined surfaces 761 when the ball that has passed through the opening 710a is thrown. A ball is thrown to the opposite side in the left and right direction. That is, the ball thrown from the opening 710a can be thrown in the left-right direction by the projection 762a in the central portion. The projections 762a protruding from both ends restrict the displacement of the distribution member 762, and the weight applied when the ball passes through displaces the direction in which the tip of the central projection 762a is positioned (distribution member 762 ), and the rotation of the distribution member 762 is restricted by the contact between the tip surface of the projection 762a and the inclined surface. On the other hand, when the projection 762a that is not in contact with the inclined surface is guided by the central projection 762a, the guided ball collides with the projection 762a and is pushed downward. As a result, the projection 762a on the opposite side is displaced upward, and the distal end of the downwardly displaced projection 762a comes into contact with the inclined surface to restrict its displacement.

The inclined surface is the rolling surface of the path along which the balls distributed to the left and right by the distribution member 762 roll and are thrown (hereinafter referred to as “third ball throw route KR3”). It is formed so as to slope downward from the center position in the left-right direction toward the outside. As a result, the balls distributed to the left and right by the distribution member 762 of the distribution member 760 are rolled on the inclined surface 761 and sent (rolled) to the end of the inclined surface 761 on the downward side.

At the end on the lower side of the inclined surface 761, the side surface on the back side is formed to be inclined in the direction of approaching the interposition member so that the thickness increases forward toward the end. As a result, the ball that rolls on the inclined surface 761 and is thrown to the end of the inclined surface 761 passes through the first ball entrance 64 or the right second ball entrance 640r of the intervening member disposed in front of the sorting member 760. can be thrown to More specifically, the ball distributed to the left side in front view by the distribution member 762 and rolled on the inclined surface 761 is thrown (entered) to the first ball entrance 64 . On the other hand, the ball distributed to the right side in front view by the distribution member 762 and rolled on the inclined surface 761 is thrown (entered) to the right second ball entrance 640r.

The first ball entrance 64 and the right second ball entrance 640r are formed on the front sides of the left and right ends of the sorting member 760, respectively, and on the rear side of the through holes of the winning member 730. As shown in FIG. Therefore, the spaces at the left and right end portions of the sorting member 760 and the internal space of the through hole of the winning member 730 are connected via the first ball entrance 64 and the right second ball entrance 640r. Therefore, the ball rolling on the upper part of the inclined surface 761 of the distribution member 760 described above passes through the first ball entrance 64 and is thrown to the through hole of the prize winning member 730, and the right second ball entrance 640r. , and a path for throwing the ball to the through-hole of the winning member 730 can be formed.

Further, in the present embodiment, the ball that has flowed into the opening 710a of the distribution device 700 is distributed in the horizontal direction by the distribution member 462a, rolls on either the left or right third throwing path KR3, It is configured so that the player can visually recognize the rolling state of the ball until it enters the ball entrance 64 or the right second ball entrance 640r. Specifically, a part of the sorting device 700 is made of a highly transparent material (for example, polycarbonate) so that the inside of the sorting device 700 can be visually recognized. Thereby, it is possible to make it easier for the player to grasp the situation of the balls rolling inside the sorting device 700 . In addition, by destroying the internal structure of the sorting device 700, cheating is performed so that the ball that has flowed into the opening 710a of the sorting device 700 rolls only toward an area that is advantageous to the player. In such a case, for example, if a fraudulent act is performed such that the distribution member 762a is destroyed and the ball rolls only on one of the third ball throwing paths KR3, the game parlor clerk can easily confirm the state of destruction. Since it is possible to do so, it is possible to easily minimize the damage that may be caused by fraudulent acts.

The sorting device 700 configured as described above is thrown as follows. A ball entering through the opening 710a is thrown to a distribution member 760, and is thrown to a third ball path KR3 in either the left or right direction by the distribution member 762 of the distribution member 760. FIG. A ball thrown along the leftward third throwing path KR3 is thrown to the first ball entrance 64 when it reaches the end of the third throwing path KR3. Here, the game ball that has entered the first ball entrance 64 is detected by a detection switch (sensor), and the entry of the game ball into the first ball entrance 64 is detected.

On the other hand, a ball thrown through the leftward third throwing path KR3 is thrown to the right second ball entrance 640r when it reaches the end of the third throwing path KR3. Here, the game ball that has entered the second ball entrance 640 is detected by a detection switch (sensor), and it is detected that the game ball has entered the right second ball entrance 640r.

In this way, the game balls entering the opening 710a are alternately distributed to the first ball entrance 64 and the right second ball entrance 640 by the distribution member 762, so that the first ball entrance 64 is evenly distributed. , and the right second ball entrance 640r, thereby making it possible to uniformly generate reserved balls. Thereby, the reserved balls of the first special pattern and the reserved balls of the second special pattern can be generated evenly, the number of reserved balls on one side becomes the upper limit, and the overflow that is not stored as the reserved balls can be suppressed.

In addition, in the present embodiment, a ball that has flowed down a specific flow path (from the opening 710a of the distribution device 700 to the distribution member 762a) is divided into two flow paths (left side) by the distribution means (distribution member 762a) and the third throwing route KR3 on the right), but the structure for distributing the ball that has flowed down a specific flow path is not limited to this, for example, A configuration that can be distributed to three or more channels may be used. Furthermore, a configuration that does not distribute the spheres evenly to each flow path may be used. The distribution destination may be switched depending on the timing of arrival.

As shown in FIG. 446, the back side of the pachinko machine 10 is mainly provided with control board units 90 and 91 and a back pack unit 94 . The control board unit 90 is unitized by mounting a main board (main controller 110), an audio lamp control board (audio lamp control device 113), and a display control board (display control device 114). The control board unit 91 is unitized by mounting a payout control board (payout control device 111), a launch control board (launch control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116.

The back pack unit 94 is formed by unitizing a back pack 92 forming a protective cover portion and a dispensing unit 93 . In addition, each control board has an MPU as a 1-chip microcomputer that manages each control, a port that communicates with various devices, a random number generator that is used for various lotteries, and is used for time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generation circuit or the like is mounted as required.

Main controller 110, sound lamp controller 113 and display controller 114, payout controller 111 and launch controller 112, power supply 115, and card unit connection board 116 are housed in board boxes 100-104, respectively. . Each of the board boxes 100 to 104 has a box base and a box cover that covers the opening of the box base. The box base and the box cover are connected to each other to accommodate each controller and each board.

In addition, the board box 100 (main controller 110) and the board box 102 (dispensing control device 111 and firing control device 112) connect the box base and the box cover in an unopenable manner (caulking structure) by a sealing unit (not shown). consolidation). A sealing seal (not shown) is attached to the connecting portion between the box base and the box cover over the box base and the box cover. The sealing seal is made of a brittle material, and if the sealing seal is peeled off in order to open the circuit board boxes 100, 102, or if the circuit board boxes 100, 102 are forcibly opened, the box base and the box cover may be damaged. cut to the side. Therefore, by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal, it is possible to know whether the substrate boxes 100, 102 have been opened.

The dispensing unit 93 includes a tank 130 located at the top of the back pack unit 94 and open upward, a tank rail 131 connected to the lower side of the tank 130 and gently inclined toward the downstream side, and a tank rail 131 downstream of the tank rail 131. and a payout device 133 which is provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 and which pays out balls by a predetermined electrical configuration of a payout motor 216 (see FIG. 462). ing. The tank 130 is successively replenished with balls supplied from the island facilities of the game hall, and a payout device 133 pays out the required number of balls as appropriate. A vibrator 134 for applying vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131 .

The payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the firing control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor control knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erasure switch 122. The state recovery switch 120 is operated to eliminate ball clogging (return to normal state) when a dispensing error such as a ball clogging in the dispensing motor 216 (see FIG. 462) occurs. The operating knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on when the pachinko machine 10 is to be returned to its initial state.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the main controller 110 is provided with a set value display device 110a capable of displaying set values, a state in which the setting change operation (and setting confirmation operation) is accepted, and a state in which it is not accepted (normal A setting key 110b capable of switching between a game state) and a state of accepting a setting change operation (setting change state) according to the operation of an operator (for example, a store clerk in a hall where the pachinko machine 10 is installed). A setting change mechanism is provided which includes at least a setting switch 110c capable of changing the setting value of the machine 10. FIG. A setting change method and a setting confirmation method using this setting change mechanism will be described in detail with reference to FIG.

First, with reference to FIGS. 447(a) to (d), the setting change procedure of the pachinko machine 10 using the setting change mechanism will be described. As shown in FIGS. 447(a) to (d), in order to change the settings of the pachinko machine 10, first, the setting key 110b is rotated clockwise while the power of the pachinko machine 10 is shut off. This causes it to rotate to the ON position (see FIG. 447(a)). In other words, in order to change the settings, it is first necessary to turn off the power of the pachinko machine 10 . Next, while turning the setting key 110b to the ON side, the RAM clear switch 122 is turned on to turn on the pachinko machine 10 (see FIG. 447(b)). As a result, the state of the pachinko machine 10 after the power is turned on is set to the setting change state indicating that the setting is being changed. In the setting change state, "-" is displayed for each digit of the setting value display device 110a composed of a 4-digit 7-segment display. This display content allows the operator (for example, a store clerk in a hall) to easily understand that the setting change state has been normally entered.

When the setting change state is entered, the setting value is switched by 1 each time the setting switch 110c is pressed (see FIG. 447(c)). In addition, in the twenty-seventh embodiment, three types of setting values, setting 1 to 3, are provided, and the larger the numerical value, the higher the probability of a big hit. That is, setting 1 has the lowest jackpot probability (for example, 1/262 in a low probability state, 1/65 in a high probability (variable) state), and setting 3 has the highest jackpot probability (for example, 1 in a low probability state /218, 1/55 in the high-probability state). In the setting change state, the setting is changed in the order of 1→2→3→1 . . . every time the setting switch 110c is pressed. In addition, when the setting switch 110c is pressed while the setting value is 3, the setting value is returned to 1 by a rotary type. Also, each time the setting switch 110c is pressed, a number indicating the current set value is displayed on the set value display device 110a. FIG. 447(c) is a diagram showing a display mode when the set value is set to "3". As shown in FIG. 447(c), when the setting value is switched to 3 by pressing the setting switch 110c, the number "3" indicating setting 3 is displayed for the lower digit of the setting value display device 110a. be done.

After the operator has completed the switching operation to the desired setting value, the setting change state is completed by rotating the setting key 110b counterclockwise to place the setting key 110b at the OFF position (FIG. 447). (d)). The setting key 110b is composed of a key-shaped key portion and a keyhole-shaped keyhole portion that matches the key portion, and the key portion can be removed. As a result, the key portion can be inserted into the keyhole portion only when an operator (for example, a hall clerk) performs a setting change operation, and the key portion can be removed and stored when the setting change operation is completed. can. As a result, it is possible to prevent unauthorized players from illegally changing the settings of the pachinko machine 10 during business hours, so that the hall can be prevented from suffering unexpected disadvantages. can.

When the setting change operation ends, the initial setting process of main controller 110 is resumed. In the initial setting process after restart, there is a process for transmitting to the sound lamp control device 113 a setting change completion command indicating that the setting change operation has been completed and a setting value command indicating the setting value determined by the setting change operation. executed. Further, a process for transmitting a command (initialization command) for resuming the initial setting process of the sound lamp control device 113, which is on standby until the setting change operation is completed, is executed.

As described above, in this embodiment, when changing the setting value of the pachinko machine 10, it is necessary to turn on the power while the RAM clear switch 122 is turned on. That is, when changing the setting value, various control devices (main control device 110, sound lamp control device 113, etc.) provided in the pachinko machine 10 execute initialization processing. Since the setting change operation is performed by the operator manually pressing the setting switch 110c, the period required for the setting change operation varies greatly depending on the operating skill level of the operator and the set value to be changed.

In such a situation, if the various control devices execute the initial setting process when the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, depending on the presence or absence of the setting change operation and the length of the period required for the setting change operation, the various control devices , an event may occur in which the end order of the initial setting process is different. For example, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on without executing the setting change operation, the initial setting process of the main control device 110 is completed before the initial setting process of the sound lamp control device 113, and the setting change operation When the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on to execute , an event may occur in which the initial setting process of the sound lamp control device 113 ends before the initial setting process of the main controller 110 .

The pachinko machine 10 in recent years is configured to perform various monitoring processes in order to prevent an act (fraudulent act) of trying to obtain prize balls from the pachinko machine 10 by an inappropriate method. In particular, the action of turning off the power or turning on the power is strictly monitored. In other words, when a special control means (unauthorized board) is attached to the pachinko machine 10 as a fraudulent act, it is necessary to turn off the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 once. Since it is necessary to turn on the power of the pachinko machine 10, a strict monitoring process is executed for turning off and turning on the power of the pachinko machine 10.例文帳に追加

In the pachinko machine 10 configured as described above, by fixing the contents (processing flow) of the initialization process executed when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is appropriately turned off and on, the pachinko machine 10 It is possible to easily determine whether or not the contents (process flow) of the initialization process executed when the power is turned off and turned on in 10 are appropriate. However, as described above, depending on the presence or absence of the setting change operation and the length of the period required for the setting change operation, if an event occurs in which the end order of the initial setting process in each control device is different, the pachinko machine 10 can be properly operated. A plurality of patterns occur in the contents (flow of processing) of the initialization processing executed when the power is cut off and the power is turned on, and it is executed when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off and the power is turned on. There is a problem that it becomes difficult to determine whether or not the contents of the initialization process (process flow) to be performed are appropriate.

Conventionally, in the pachinko machine 10, main control processing that affects the game result (deciding whether or not to award the prize ball to the player, whether or not to set the game state in which the award ball is likely to be awarded, etc.) etc.) is executed by the main control device 110 as the main control means, and various commands for indicating the results of the various control processes executed by the main control means are voice commands as the slave control means. By executing effects based on various commands transmitted to the ramp control device 113 and received by the audio ramp control device 113, the player can easily understand the results of various control processes executed by the main control means. configured to notify.

In order to prevent the contents of various control processes executed by the main control means (main controller 110), that is, the contents of the main control processes from being tampered with, the transmission direction of the command is set to follow from the main control means. It is configured unidirectionally to the control means. Therefore, the main control means side cannot grasp the progress of the initial setting processing on the slave control means side. In the pachinko machine 10 configured in this way, if an event occurs in which the end order of the initial setting process in each control device differs depending on the presence or absence of the setting change operation and the length of the period required for the setting change operation, the main Even if a command indicating the result of the main control process is sent to the sound lamp control device 113 in the state where the initial setting process of the control means (main control device 110) is completed, the slave control means (sound lamp control device 113 ) is not completed, proper processing cannot be executed in response to the transmitted command, and an effect different from the processing content of the main control processing is executed, which confuses the player. There was a problem of stowage.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, whether the setting change operation is executed or not, the timing at which the initial setting process of the main controller 110 is completed and the initial setting process of the audio lamp control device 113 are performed. It is configured so that the relationship with the timing at which the setting process is completed is constant. Specifically, the initial setting process of main controller 110 is a process that is executed regardless of whether or not there is a setting change operation. At the stage of executing the specific processing, a specific command indicating that the specific processing has been executed is transmitted to the sound ramp control device 113, and the sound ramp control device 113 side performs the initial setting processing based on the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 A part of the initialization process is executed, and then execution of the rest of the initial setting process is put on hold until a specific command transmitted from the main controller 110 is received.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to fix the processing contents (processing completion order) of the initialization processing of the various control devices executed when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is properly turned on. In addition, even when one-way communication is used from the main control means (main control device 110) to the slave control means (sound lamp control device 113), appropriate processing can be executed by various control devices. can be done.

In this embodiment, the display control device 114 (see FIG. 462) is configured to perform display control of the third symbol display device 81 formed of a liquid crystal display, and the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on. In this case, when the power is turned on, a boot process for activating the liquid crystal display is executed. The third pattern display device 81 is configured so that the display control device 114 receives a display command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 and displays an image based on the received display command. there is As an image displayed on the third symbol display device 81, for example, the sound lamp control device 113 determines that the player has operated the frame button 22 (see FIG. 462), and based on the determination result, the stage ( A display command for changing the display mode of the background image) is sent to the display control device 114, and the display control device 114 changes and displays the stage (background image) based on the received display command. .

Here, as described above, the pachinko machine 10 in the present embodiment has a function (setting function) that can change the setting value (jackpot probability), whether or not there is a setting change operation, and the period required for the setting change operation The length of the processing period of the initial setting processing of main controller 110 is configured to differ depending on the length of . Since the timing at which the initial setting process of main controller 110 is completed and the timing at which the initial setting process of sound lamp control device 113 is completed have the same relationship, Depending on the length of the processing period of the initial setting process, the length of the period from when the pachinko machine 10 is turned on until the initial setting process of the sound lamp control device 113 is completed can be determined by the presence or absence of the setting change operation. It will vary depending on the length of time required for the change operation.

In the pachinko machine 10 configured as described above, it is possible to provide a certain relationship between the timing at which the initial setting processing of the sound ramp control device 113 is completed and the timing at which the boot processing of the third symbol display device 81 is completed. For example, if the initial setting process of the audio ramp control device 113 is completed earlier than the boot process of the third symbol display device 81, or the initial setting process of the audio ramp control device 113 is completed before the initialization process of the third symbol display device 81 A case may occur in which the boot process is completed earlier.

Therefore, even when the display command for changing the display mode of the stage (background image) is transmitted to the display control device 114 by the audio lamp control device 113, the boot processing of the third symbol display device 81 is not completed, it is not possible to display the stage (background image) according to the transmitted display command. stage information and the stage actually displayed on the third pattern display device 81 are different from each other.

In addition, in order to solve the above-described problem, when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, the prohibition period for prohibiting the transmission of the display command from the sound lamp control device 113 to the display control device 114 is set to the second A state in which the third pattern display device 81 is not activated (a state in which the boot processing is not completed) is configured to be executed for a specific period longer than the period until the boot processing of the three pattern display device 81 is completed. Although it is possible to prevent the display command from being transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 to the display control device 114, in the case of such a configuration, for example, the initial setting processing of the audio lamp control device 113 is completed. When it takes a long time to change the setting, that is, when the setting change operation is executed, the display from the sound lamp control device 113 to the display control device 114 despite the fact that the third pattern display device 81 is being started Since the prohibition period during which the transmission of the command for use is prohibited continues, there is a problem that the production effect cannot be enhanced by using the third pattern display device 81.例文帳に追加

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, based on the completion timing of the initial setting processing of the sound lamp control device 113 and the completion timing of the boot processing for starting the third symbol display device 81, , whether or not to set a prohibited section for prohibiting the transmission of a display command from the audio lamp control device 113 to the display control device 114, and the length of the prohibited section can be determined.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to increase the accuracy of the effect executed by the third symbol display device 81, and the effect corresponding to the content of the main control process executed by the main control means (main control means) can be executed by the third symbol display device 81 .

Next, referring to FIGS. 447(e) to 447(g), a procedure for confirming settings (setting confirmation operation) will be described. In order to confirm the setting, first, the setting key 110b is rotated to the ON position while the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned off, as in the setting change operation (see FIG. 447(e)). Then, by turning on the power of the pachinko machine 10 without turning on the RAM clear switch 122 (that is, while it is in the off state), the setting confirmation state is set (see FIG. 447(f)). When the setting confirmation state is entered, the currently set values are displayed on the setting value display device 110a. The example in FIG. 447(f) shows a state in which "3" is set as the set value. When the confirmation of the setting by the operator is completed, the setting confirmation state is terminated by turning the setting key 110b to the ON side, and the state is shifted to the state in which the normal game can be played (see FIG. 445(g)).

In the twenty-seventh embodiment, the setting key 110b and the setting switch 110c are provided separately, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the setting switch 110c may be removed and the setting may be changed according to the amount of rotation of the setting key 110b. More specifically, every time the setting key 110b is rotated by 60 degrees, the setting changes from 1→2→3→1 . It may be configured to return. By configuring in this way, the configuration of the setting change mechanism can be simplified, so that the number of parts can be reduced. Therefore, the cost rate of the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced.

In the twenty-seventh embodiment, as shown in FIG. 446, the setting change mechanism is provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 10, that is, at a position that cannot be visually recognized by the player during the game. Therefore, it is possible to reliably prevent the setting change mechanism from being operated during the game. Also, when actually changing the settings, it is necessary to open the inner frame 12 and the front frame 14 in order to operate the setting keys 110b and setting switches 110c provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 10. , and when these are opened, the inner frame 12 and the outer frame 14 are supported only by the opening/closing shafts, resulting in a relatively unstable state. In such a situation, if the pachinko machine 10 is powered on and the return action of the ornamental accessory provided in the pachinko machine 10 is executed, an excessive load is applied to the opening/closing shaft and the like, causing damage. You may be invited.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, after the standby process of waiting for the initial setting process of the sound lamp control device 113 is completed, the return operation of the character is performed. In other words, the configuration is such that the return operation of the role object is not executed during the setting change operation. By configuring in this way, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the pachinko machine 10 is damaged due to execution of the return operation of the role during the setting change operation. In addition, since the pachinko machine 10 can be made less likely to vibrate during the setting change operation compared to the case where the return operation of the character is executed while the operator is operating the setting switch 110c, the setting switch 110c can be set. It is possible to make it difficult for the erroneous operation of 110c to occur.

In the present embodiment, when the setting change operation is executed, the RAM clear switch 122 is always set to ON. Unable to change settings. That is, the game state set after the setting change operation is executed becomes the initial state (normal state). Therefore, since the game conditions other than the difference in the big win probability based on the set value can be unified for the game executed after the setting change operation is performed, it is easy to provide the player with a fair game. can do.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 448 to 461, an effect display mode displayed by the third symbol display device 81 in the twenty-seventh embodiment will be described. As shown in FIG. 448(a), the display screen of the third pattern display device 81 is roughly divided into two upper and lower parts. The lower 1/3 of the other area is a sub-display area Ds for displaying a notice effect, a character, the number of pending balls, and the like.

The main display area Dm is divided into three left, middle and right display areas Dm1 to Dm3, and three pattern rows Z1, Z2 and Z3 are displayed in the three display areas Dm1 to Dm3, respectively. The above-described third symbols are displayed in a prescribed order in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. That is, main symbols are arranged in ascending numerical order in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, and each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 is periodically scrolled from top to bottom to perform variable display. Approximately the center of the main display area Dm is set as the active line L1, and the third symbols stop on the active line L1 in the order of the left symbol row Z1→right symbol row Z3→middle symbol row Z2 during each game. Is displayed. When the third symbol is stopped, if a combination of big winning symbols (combination of the same main symbols in this embodiment) is aligned on the activated line L1, a big winning moving image is displayed as a big winning.

In the present embodiment, as described above, the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are scrolled from top to bottom and variably displayed, and then stop-displayed in a predetermined combination of symbols (display mode). In a period (variable display period) from the execution of the special symbol lottery to the display of the result of the special symbol lottery, the enjoyment of making the player predict in which display mode the third symbol will be stop-displayed is provided. However, it suffices to dynamically display the third symbol (identification information) until the third symbol (identification information) for indicating the result of the special symbol lottery is stopped and displayed, for example, on the activated line L1. A dynamic display mode may be used in which a plurality of pieces of identification information are switched and displayed, or a dynamic display mode may be used in which a plurality of (four or more) pieces of identification information move so as to float within the display area. .

In addition, according to the example shown using FIG. 448, a pattern imitating a number as the third pattern is variably displayed (dynamically displayed). Any other mode may be used as long as it is possible to display the main display area Dm. , a moving image with a story may be displayed, and the result of the special symbol lottery may be notified to the player according to the result of the story. In other words, what kind of mode can provide the player with the pleasure of predicting the result of the special symbol lottery using the period from when the special symbol lottery is executed until the result of the lottery is displayed? Aspects may be used.

On the other hand, the sub-display area Ds is provided horizontally below the main display area Dm, and is divided into two sub-areas Ds1 to Ds2 in the horizontal direction. Among these, the small area Ds1 is an execution display area in which, when the ball held in the main display area Dm is variably displayed (dynamically displayed), the variably held symbols are moved and displayed. be. The pending symbols moved to the execution display area are displayed as symbols larger than the pending symbols so that it can be identified that the variation of the corresponding special symbols is being executed. In addition, when the variation is executed, by varying the color of the symbol or varying the pattern of the symbol, it is configured to indicate the lottery result of the varying special symbol.

The small area Ds2 is the number of balls (holding balls) for which variation has not been performed among the balls that have entered the first ball entrance 64, the right second ball entrance 640r, or the second ball entrance 640. This is an area for displaying the number of balls and a preview effect image. Further, in the small area Ds2, a character display area C is set in which a character image is displayed to guide the contents of the game. In this character display area, as a guidance display mode for guiding the player in an easy-to-understand manner about the contents of the game to be executed in the future and the contents of the effects to be executed in the future, comments of the character, expressions and gestures of the character are displayed. is configured to be displayed variably. Thus, by using the specific area of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 as a guidance area for the game (performance), a game that is easy to understand even when a plurality of pieces of information are displayed with overlapping periods can be realized. can provide. A detailed guidance display mode using the character display area C will be described later with reference to FIGS. 449 to 461. FIG.

On the actual display screen, as shown in FIG. 448(b), a total of three main patterns of the third pattern are stop-displayed in the main display area Dm. In addition, when the variable display is performed, in addition to the main symbols displayed in the center, the main symbols arranged before and after the main symbols are also displayed so that a maximum of 9 main symbols are displayed. In some cases. In the sub-display area Ds, the small area Ds1 displays an active symbol pedestal m0 indicating that it is an area where the held ball corresponding to the special symbol being executed is moved and displayed, as shown in FIG. As shown in (a), when the special symbol (first special symbol or second special symbol) is varied, a round symbol is displayed. Among the reserved patterns (circular patterns) displayed in the small area Ds2, the leftmost circular pattern indicating that the reserved order is first is hidden, and then the small area A circle design having a larger diameter than the reserved design is displayed on Ds1. In this case, the reserved symbols displayed in the small area Ds2 are displayed after the reserved symbols displayed side by side are moved to the position where the hidden leftmost reserved pattern was displayed. be done. When the reserved pattern moves to the small area Ds1 and is displayed as the pattern being executed, a predetermined effect lottery is executed based on the lottery result of the special pattern that starts to fluctuate, the selected fluctuation pattern, and the like. Then, the color and pattern of the pattern being executed are determined and displayed. With this configuration, the player can quickly determine the lottery result of the special symbols to start varying and the selected variation pattern from the symbols being executed displayed in the small area Ds1. can improve the interest of In addition, the pattern being executed displayed in the small area Ds1 is not limited to the effect of changing the color, pattern, etc. at the start of the fluctuation, but the effect of changing the special pattern within the period when the special pattern is fluctuating is also executed. For example, the timing when the third symbol switches from high-speed variation to low-speed variation, or the ready-to-win display mode (the display mode in which the left and right symbols are temporarily stopped with the same symbol and the middle symbol is scrolled). It is executed at the timing or the timing at which a specific effect (for example, when a predetermined movie effect is executed) is executed.

As shown in FIG. 448(b), in the small area Ds2, there is a first reserved symbol pedestal m1 indicating that it is an area where a reserved symbol indicating that it is the reserved order with the highest change order is displayed. displayed on the left side. On the right side of the first reserved symbol pedestal m1, there are a second reserved symbol pedestal m2 indicating that the reserved order is second, a third reserved symbol pedestal m3 that indicates that the reserved order is third, and a reserved order. 4th reserved symbol pedestal m4 indicating that is the 4th, 5th reserved symbol pedestal m5 indicating that the reserved order is 5th, 6th reserved symbol pedestal indicating that the reserved order is 6th m6, the seventh reserved symbol pedestal m7 indicating that the reserved order is seventh, and the eighth reserved symbol pedestal m8 indicating that the reserved order is eighth are in a state where no reserved symbols are displayed. is also displayed.

Above the fifth reserved symbol pedestal m5 to the eighth reserved symbol pedestal m8, when a predetermined number or more of reserved symbols are not displayed, a reserved number suggesting pattern P is displayed respectively. The reserved number suggesting pattern P is formed in a variable lid shape on which the character "5" indicating that the reserved order is the fifth is displayed on the upper part of the fifth reserved pattern pedestal m5. Similarly, the upper part of the sixth reserved symbol pedestal m6 displays the character "6" indicating that the reserved order is 6th, and the upper part of the 7th reserved symbol pedestal m7 displays the reserved order of 7. The character "7" indicating that it is the 8th reserved order is displayed, and the character "8" indicating that the reserved order is the 8th is displayed on the upper part of the 8th reserved symbol pedestal m8. It is composed of the pattern of

As shown in FIG. 448(b), when the reserved number is 0, the reserved number suggesting pattern P extends over the area from the fifth reserved symbol pedestal m5 to the eighth reserved symbol pedestal m8. It is displayed, and is constructed so that the player can recognize that the maximum reserved number is eight in total of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. In addition, in this embodiment, a maximum of four is set for the first special design, and a maximum of four is set for the second special design. Also, in the present embodiment, the maximum number is set for each of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, but not limited to this, the maximum number is set by combining the number of reservations of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. It may be configured to suppress the occurrence of overflow by doing so.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 448(b), the reserved symbol pedestals m1 to m8 are displayed in order to inform the player that the maximum number of reserved symbols that can be displayed is eight. However, it is not limited to this, and the reserved symbol pedestals m1 to m8 may be configured not to be displayed.

On the right side of the eighth reserved symbol pedestal m8, there is displayed a character display pedestal C1 indicating that it is an area where a notice character is displayed. With this configuration, the player can confirm in advance the area where the character is displayed even when the character for announcement is not displayed, and the game can be played in an easy-to-understand manner.

Next, with reference to FIG. 449, a pending look-ahead effect, which is one of the effects executed in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, will be described. This reserved look-ahead effect is a state in which a new special symbol variation cannot be started, for example, a state in which a special symbol variation is being executed or a jackpot game is being executed. Alternatively, the contents of the reserved balls (winning information) obtained based on the game balls entering the right second ball entrance 640r and the second ball entrance 640 are displayed before the special symbol lottery is actually executed. It is an effect for preliminarily suggesting to the player the result of the special symbol lottery to be executed in the future by using the determination result (prefetching result).

By executing this reserved look-ahead performance, the result of the special pattern lottery can be suggested to the player from the time point before the special pattern lottery is actually executed, so that the look-ahead result is, for example, a jackpot winning. In this case, it is possible to suggest to the player for a longer period of time that there is a high possibility of winning the jackpot. As a result, it is possible to increase the player's expectation of winning the jackpot for a long period of time, and the period (fluctuation period) from the actual execution of the special pattern lottery to the stop display of the lottery result is longer than the period (fluctuation period). Since the look-ahead effect can be executed using the look-ahead effect period, the variations of the effect to be executed can be easily increased.

When it is determined to execute the pending prefetch effect based on the result of the prefetch, the pending pattern displayed in the small area Ds2 of the secondary display area Ds to notify the player of the pending symbol to be the object of the pending prefetch effect. Among them, the display mode of a specific reserved design is variable. On the display screen shown in FIG. 449(a), the display mode of the reserved symbol (the reserved symbol with the number 4) displayed on the fourth reserved symbol pedestal m4 is variably displayed.

Then, the display mode of the reserved pattern targeted for the reserved look-ahead effect is varied at various timings, and the reserved pattern targeted for the reserved look-ahead effect (the reserved pattern with the number 4) is executed. When it moves to the middle symbol pedestal m0, as shown in FIG. 449(b), a variable effect corresponding to the pending symbol to be the object of the pending prefetch effect is executed. That is, in the example using FIG. 449, since the reserved design targeted for the reserved look-ahead effect is displayed on the fourth reserved design pedestal m4, it is a period until the special design lottery is actually executed. From the execution of the special symbol lottery to the stop display, the suspension look-ahead performance can be executed using a period longer than the period.

In addition, although detailed explanation is omitted, the effect mode for changing the display mode of the reserved design that is the target of the pending prefetch effect is determined based on the result of the prefetch process (preliminary appropriateness determination result) and the number of pending balls. For example, the timing at which the reserved design that is the target of the reserved look-ahead effect is displayed, the timing at which the display position of the reserved design is shifted (shifted), and other operations performed during the reserved look-ahead effect Which display mode is to be variably displayed is determined with respect to the timing when the specific performance is executed in the variable performance for showing the result of the special pattern lottery and the timing when the player operates the frame button 22.例文帳に追加In this way, in the pending look-ahead effect that is executed over a long period of time, by determining the effect mode that defines which display mode to change to at what timing during the effect period, the player will feel a sense of incompatibility. It is possible to make it easier to execute a series of performances that are not given.

Next, with reference to FIG. 450, the contents of the effect executed when the number of retained balls obtained reaches the upper limit number (8) will be described. Figure 450 (a) is a diagram showing an example of the display screen displayed when the number of pending balls reaches the upper limit (8), and Figure 450 (b) shows that the effect at the time of the holding upper limit was executed. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of a display screen displayed in a case;

In this embodiment, when the number of reserved balls reaches the upper limit, it is determined whether or not winning information indicating a jackpot winning is included in the reserved balls that have already been acquired, and based on the result of the determination, an effect is executed at the time of the reserved upper limit. It is configured to Then, there is a production mode (fish school festival) that notifies that prize information indicating that the jackpot is won is included (notifies that the jackpot will be won), and a production mode (chance announcement) that reports that the expectation of winning the jackpot is high. ), and are configured to be able to execute the production at the upper limit of the hold.

More specifically, a reserved ball number command indicating that a reserved ball has been acquired is output from the main controller 110, and the reserved ball number command is executed when the voice lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball number command. In the reception process (see S2208 in FIG. 508), based on the number of pending balls command received this time, it is determined whether the number of pending balls has reached the upper limit (S2304), and when the upper limit is reached, selection of the effect at the time of holding upper limit By referring to the table 222e (see FIG. 473(b)), the effect mode (effect pattern) to be executed is determined. Then, it is determined whether or not the performance at the upper limit of suspension can be executed in the determined performance mode, and if it is in an executable state, the performance at the upper limit of suspension is executed.

Here, in the present embodiment, in addition to various effects that are executed based on the special symbol lottery being performed, the elapsed time since the power was turned on is determined based on the time information, and different based on the elapsed time Mode production (period production) is configured to be executable. By configuring in this way, it is possible to execute the period production at the same timing for the plurality of pachinko machines 10, so that by executing the integrated production using the plurality of pachinko machines 10, The performance effect can be enhanced more than when the performance is executed only by one pachinko machine 10.例文帳に追加

However, if the period during which this period effect is executed overlaps with the period during which the above-described pending upper limit effect is executed, the display modes of each effect are mixed, and an effect that is difficult for the player to understand is executed. There was a problem that it would be done. In addition, as described above, the period effect is to execute the same effect at the same timing for a plurality of pachinko machines 10, so whether or not to execute the period effect is determined according to the game status of each pachinko machine 10. If the execution timing of the period effect is delayed, there is a problem that the effect of the period effect is remarkably reduced.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the conditions for executing the prefetch effect (holding prefetch effect, pending upper limit effect) are satisfied, the effect mode of the prefetch effect that can be executed is determined, and then the prefetch effect can be executed. It is configured to discriminate based on the time information whether or not the situation exists, and to prohibit the execution of the look-ahead effect when the situation is such that it cannot be executed. By configuring in this way, it is possible to suppress the execution of an effect that is difficult for the player to understand due to the overlapping of the execution period of the period effect and the execution period of the look-ahead effect.

Furthermore, based on the number of pending balls to be the target of the look-ahead effect and the result of the special symbol lottery executed until the look-ahead effect ends, the upper limit period of the look-ahead effect that can be executed is calculated. It is configured to determine whether or not the upper limit period and the period during which the period performance is executed overlap or not. This makes it easier to execute the look-ahead effect than when the prohibition period for prohibiting the execution of the look-ahead effect is uniquely defined based on the execution timing of the period effect.

In other words, the look-ahead effect is to perform a look-ahead process on the acquired reserved ball, and notify (suggest) the effect based on the result of the look-ahead to the player before the special symbol lottery is actually executed. ), and the execution period varies greatly depending on the number of pending balls that are the target of the look-ahead effect. Therefore, if the prohibition period for prohibiting the execution of the prefetch effect is specified without specifying the content of the prefetch effect that is actually executed (effect period), the prefetch effect that has the longest effect period, that is, the reserved ball A look-ahead effect that is executed across the period in which the special symbol lottery for the upper limit number (8 in this embodiment) is executed, and the period until the result of each special symbol lottery is displayed (special Even if the longest period (e.g., 60 seconds) is set as the symbol fluctuation display period), it is prohibited so that the period during which the look-ahead effect is executed and the period during which the period effect is executed do not overlap. A period had to be specified.

By defining the prohibition period in this way, it is possible to reliably prevent the execution of the look-ahead effect and the period effect from being duplicated. There is a problem that the execution frequency is remarkably lowered.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the effect period of the prefetch effect that can actually be executed is specified, it is determined whether or not the specified effect period overlaps with the period effect, and the prefetch effect is performed only when it is determined to overlap. It is configured to prohibit execution of the performance. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it easier to execute a look-ahead effect in which a short effect period is set, compared to the case of defining a specific prohibition period.

Here, with reference to FIG. 452(b), the relationship between the type of look-ahead effect and the look-ahead prohibited period will be described. FIG. 452(b) is a diagram showing the relationship between the type of look-ahead effect and the look-ahead prohibited period. As shown in FIG. 452(b), it is determined that the prohibition period for prohibiting the execution of the prefetching effect can be set for the period during which the period effect (SP time effect) is executed, and the prefetching effect is executed. When the timing corresponds to the prohibition period described above, the execution of the look-ahead effect is prohibited. Then, as types of look-ahead performance, there are normal look-ahead (read-ahead with a relatively short look-ahead performance period) that does not go through the jackpot game period, and pre-reading at the time of the jackpot (read-ahead with a relatively long look-ahead performance period) that goes through the jackpot game period. , and the length of the prefetching inhibition period is varied according to the type of prefetching effect that can be set as the prefetching effect to be executed. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it easier to execute a look-ahead effect in which a short effect period is set, compared to the case of defining a specific prohibition period.

In addition, three or more types of look-ahead performance may be provided, and in this case, as an element for roughly specifying the performance period of the look-ahead performance, in addition to the presence or absence of a jackpot game, a special symbol variation executed during the look-ahead performance The number of times and the special symbol fluctuation time may be used as elements.

Returning to FIG. 450(b), the description is continued. When "fish school festival" is determined as the production at the upper limit of the reservation, 8 reserved patterns (8 reserved patterns with numbers 1 to 8 displayed in the small area Ds2 of Fig. 450 (a) ) is executed as a series of effects using the period during which the fish school festival effect is executed. As shown in FIG. 450(b), when the Fish School Festival effect is executed, a display area HR1 is formed above the main display area Dm, and the characters "Enter the School of Fish Festival" are telop-displayed. Then, a display mode in which a school of fish is waiting is displayed on the right side of the main display area Dm. Further, in the central part of the main display area Dm, a pseudo symbol variation that is continuously variably displayed is executed until the school of fish festival effect is completed (until the special symbol that wins the jackpot is stopped and displayed).

Further, during the period when the fish school performance is being performed, the reserved pattern is not displayed in the small area Ds2, and is continuously displayed on the active symbol pedestal m0 in the small area Ds1 until the fish school festival presentation is finished. A pseudo reserved pattern tm0 is displayed. In other words, during the performance of the school of fish festival, it is configured to make it difficult for the player to grasp how many times the special symbol lottery has been executed. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it difficult to understand how long the performance of the school of fish festival will continue. In addition, it is possible to make it difficult to understand which reserved symbol has won the jackpot.

In the diagram shown in FIG. 450(b), the display area HR2 and the display area HR3 are formed in the main display area Dm, and the third symbol that is variably displayed in synchronization with the actual special symbol variation is actually displayed in the display area HR3. is displayed in the display area HR2. As a result, the actual game situation can be notified even during the performance of the school of fish festival in which the pseudo variable display and the pseudo in-execution symbol display are performed. In addition, when the display area HR2 and the display area HR3 are formed, the information displayed in each display area (the actual number of reserved symbols and the fluctuation state of the third symbol) is displayed in a manner that makes it difficult for the player to visually recognize. good to show. By configuring in this way, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the presentation effect of the fish school presentation in which the pseudo variable display and the pseudo in-execution symbol display are performed.

Also, when the actual number of reserved symbols and the fluctuation situation of the third symbol can be notified during the fish school production, an area different from the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, for example, the game board 13 It may be configured to notify the actual number of reserved symbols and the fluctuation state of the third symbol by the lighting mode of the provided LED. This reliably prevents a player watching the display screen of the third pattern display device 81 during the performance of the school of fish festival from recognizing the change in the actual number of reserved patterns and the fluctuation situation of the third pattern. can do. Furthermore, during the period when the school of fish festival effect is being executed, the actual number of reserved symbols and the fluctuation state of the third symbol may not be notified.

As shown in FIG. 450(b), during the fish school production, the pseudo pending symbol tm0 displayed on the active symbol pedestal m0 in the small area Ds1 is displayed in a display mode with a plurality of star marks. there is Although a detailed description is omitted, the display mode of this pseudo-holding pattern tm0 is determined based on the information (the number of jackpots included in the hold) referred to when determining the presentation mode of the presentation at the upper limit of suspension. Therefore, the larger the number of asterisks, the higher the possibility that many jackpots are included in the hold. The display mode of the pseudo-holding pattern tm0 may be configured to be variably displayed during the production period of the fish school production production. In this case, the number of stars is increased during the production period of the fish school production production. It is good to display variable. Thus, even after the performance of the school of fish festival is executed, that is, even after the fact that the jackpot will be won soon is announced, the player can be interested in the performance of the school of fish festival to be executed. Also, a variable display pattern in which the number of star marks is reduced may be provided as the display mode of the pseudo-reserved symbol tm0 during the production period of the fish school production. In this case, it is possible to provide a new game feature that makes the player expect that the fish school presentation will end when the number of stars is large. Furthermore, as in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when a variable pattern in which the number of stars increases or decreases is provided as a display mode of the pseudo-holding pattern tm0 in a configuration that makes it difficult to understand the end timing of the fish festival effect Since it is difficult to predict the end timing of the fish school performance and the transition of the number of stars, it is necessary to keep the player interested in the transition of the number of stars until the end of the fish school performance. can be done.

The display mode of the pseudo-reserved pattern tm0 displayed during the Fish School Festival production may be determined based on information other than the number of big wins in the reservation. It may be determined based on the number of pending symbols consumed until the pachinko machine 10 is played, or may be determined based on the set values (“1” to “3”) set in the pachinko machine 10 . Moreover, you may determine by combining each requirement mentioned above. Here, when determining the display mode of the pseudo-reserved pattern tm0 by combining a plurality of requirements, one requirement is advantageous to the player and the other requirement is disadvantageous to the player. It is preferable to make it easier to determine the same display mode when one requirement is disadvantageous to the player and another requirement is advantageous to the player.

Specifically, as the display mode of the pseudo pending symbol tm0, the number of asterisks "3" is likely to be determined. If the set value is 3, that is, if the condition indicating the number of jackpots in the hold is disadvantageous to the player, and if the condition indicating the set value is advantageous to the player; If the number of jackpots is 3 and the setting value set in the pachinko machine 10 is 1, that is, the condition indicating the number of jackpots in the reserve is advantageous to the player, and the setting value is It is preferable to define when the indicated requirements are in a disadvantageous situation for the player. By configuring in this way, when a display mode with three asterisks is displayed as the display mode of the pseudo-reserved pattern tm0 during the fish school production, the player can win many jackpots with a low set value. While assuming that the number of jackpots in the reserve is small but the set value is high, the fish school performance will be watched closely until the jackpot is actually won.

Therefore, the longer the period from the execution of the fish school performance to the winning of the jackpot, the lesser the number of jackpots in the reserve is predicted, and the higher set value is expected. As a result, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the progress of the performance while predicting the degree of advantage of the plurality of requirements in combination, thereby enhancing the performance effect.

In addition, the display mode of the pseudo-holding pattern tm0 displayed during the fish school production may be determined by other conditions, for example, a specific display mode (for example, , the number of asterisks is 7). By configuring in this way, it is possible to allow the player, who is displayed in the specific display mode, to enjoy the performance of the school of fish festival with peace of mind.

Although detailed illustration is omitted, after the display screen shown in FIG. A shoal of fish that has been waiting for the game moves to the left so as to cover the entire surface of the main display area Dm. An effect is executed to notify the player of the winning.

It should be noted that, in the present embodiment, the pseudo symbol variation display is executed until the symbol is stopped and displayed in a display mode indicating that the jackpot has been won during the fish festival production, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the target to be variably displayed in the main display area Dm may be switched from the pseudo symbol to the third symbol in accordance with the timing at which the special symbol big hit variation is executed. By configuring in this way, it is not necessary to provide the performance data corresponding to the mode of displaying the symbols in a stationary manner as the performance data for variably displaying the pseudo symbols, and the data amount of the performance data can be reduced. can.

That is, when the fish school effect is executed, the performance data corresponding to the variable display of the pseudo symbols executed in the main display area Dm is set at a speed that makes it difficult for the player to identify each symbol being variably displayed. Only performance data corresponding to a mode of variable display at (high speed) is prepared, and the pseudo symbols are varied at high speed until the special symbol jackpot variation is executed. Then, when the big hit variation of the special symbol is executed, instead of the pseudo symbol during high speed variation, the variable display of the third symbol during high speed variation is performed. In this case, even in the normal state, the variable display of the third symbol uses a variable effect that starts high-speed variation in accordance with the start of the special symbol variation, so the variable effect of the third symbol in the normal state (jackpot variable effect ) is applied. As a result, it is possible to stop and display the symbols indicating the winning of the jackpot in the performance of the school of fish festival without using dedicated performance data. Furthermore, since the timing for switching from the pseudo symbols to the third symbols is during high-speed fluctuation of the symbols, even if the types of symbols displayed in the main display area Dm change at the moment of switching, the player will not notice the situation. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the execution of an effect that gives the player a sense of discomfort.

In the above-described example, an example is shown in which the player is not made to feel uncomfortable when switching between the variable display of the pseudo symbols and the variable display of the third symbols, but this is not the only option. Instead, it may be configured to switch between the variable display of the pseudo symbols and the variable display of the third symbols so as to intentionally give a sense of discomfort. In a situation where symbols are variably displayed at such a low speed that the player can identify each symbol being variably displayed, or in a situation where at least one symbol is displayed in a stopped state, the pseudo symbol variability display is changed to the first. It may be configured to switch to a variable display of three symbols. With this configuration, it is possible for the player to grasp that the variation display of the third symbol has been executed (that the special symbol big hit variation has started), so that the special symbol can be displayed. A player who wants to quickly know the winning timing of a big win can pay attention to the variable display contents of patterns executed during the performance of the school of fish festival in order to find the switching timing of the patterns.

In the present embodiment, the fish school festival effect is executed only in a situation where at least one reserved pattern for winning a jackpot is included in the reservation, but this is not the only option. It may be configured to be executable only when there are two or more reserved symbols to be executed. By configuring in this way, it is possible to further increase the added value of the performance of the school of fish festival. In addition, it may be constructed such that the fish school performance is executed even in a portion (for example, 1%) of cases where no jackpot reserve exists in the reserve. As a result, when the performance of the school of fish festival is executed, the possibility of not winning the jackpot can be slightly left, so that the player can play the game with a sense of tension until the jackpot is won.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 451 and 452, the effect contents of the period effect to be executed when the elapsed time after the pachinko machine 10 is turned on will be described. The pachinko machine 10 in this embodiment has an RTC (real time clock) for measuring the current time. When a predetermined period of time (approximately 2 hours) elapses, a period performance (SP time) of approximately 3 minutes is executed. Normally, in a pachinko hall, the work of turning on the power to a plurality of pachinko machines 10 all at once is executed. A period effect (SP time) is executed all at once. By constructing a plurality of pachinko machines 10 to perform the same period performance at the same timing in this manner, the performance effect in the pachinko hall can be remarkably improved.

In this embodiment, the period effect is executed based on the elapsed time after the power is turned on. However, the present invention is not limited to this. In addition, it may be configured to execute the period production. By configuring in this way, even if the timing of turning on the power to the pachinko machine 10 is different, or if the power supply has to be cut off once due to a problem occurring in the pachinko machine 10, the plurality of pachinko machines can be operated. 10 can remarkably improve the performance effect in the pachinko hall by constructing the same period performance at the same timing.

Details will be described later with reference to FIG. 471, but in this embodiment, based on the time information clocked by the RTC, the effect period in the pachinko machine 10 is divided into a normal effect period, an SP time period, and an SP time period. It is configured to be switchable with the SP time preparation period indicating that it will arrive soon. When the normal effect period is set as the effect period, the normal effect is executed regardless of the time information clocked by the RTC. In addition, when the SP time preparation period is set, the same mode of production as the normal production period is executed, and the display mode indicating that the SP time period is coming soon is displayed as "SP time will start soon. is displayed in the display area HR1 of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, and when the remaining time until the SP time period arrives is 30 seconds, the SP time period arrives. A countdown display is performed to indicate the number of seconds until

Then, when the SP time period is set, a dedicated stage (background image) is displayed and a dedicated song is output from the audio output device 226 . In this embodiment, the switching timing of the normal production period, the SP time preparation period, and the SP time period is defined in advance, and after the normal production period of 90 to 120 minutes, the SP time preparation period of about 2 minutes is set. , then a SP time period of about 3 minutes is set. That is, the SP time period is defined to be shorter than the normal effect period. By configuring in this way, it is possible to give added value to various effects executed during the SP time period, so that the player who is playing the pachinko machine 10 can receive the next SP time. It is possible to make the player think to continue the game until the period is set.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the variable performance executed during the SP time period is the corresponding special symbol rather than the variable performance executed during the normal performance period (the performance executed based on the special symbol lottery). Regardless of the result of the lottery, it is configured so that advantageous benefits can be given to the player. Specifically, when the variable performance is executed during the SP time period, the setting suggestion performance for suggesting the current set value is executed more than when the variable performance is executed during the normal performance period. It is designed to be easy. By configuring in this way, it is possible to further increase the player's desire to play during the SP time period.

Further, as described above, in the present embodiment, it is configured such that the setting suggestion effect is easily executed in the variable effect executed during the SP time period. Therefore, in a state where the SP time period is set, a player who has not shot a ball (a player who has not executed the special symbol lottery) cannot execute the setting suggestion performance. By configuring in this way, it is possible to further increase the player's desire to play during the SP time period.

In the gaming machine configured in this way, many special symbol lotteries are executed during the SP time period, so that many setting suggesting performances can be executed, so that the player can be motivated to play the game. However, for example, if a jackpot is won immediately after the SP time period is set, many special symbol lotteries cannot be executed during the SP time period, and the current set value is given to the player. There is a problem that it becomes difficult to provide information for estimating In other words, the occurrence of a situation advantageous to the player for winning the jackpot in the special symbol lottery creates a situation disadvantageous to the player (a situation in which it is difficult to collect information for estimating the set value), and the player wins the jackpot. There is a problem that the player's desire to play is lowered depending on the timing of playing.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the performance period (normal performance period, SP time preparation period, SP time period) set in the pachinko machine 10 at the execution timing (start timing) of the jackpot game, and the end of the jackpot game Based on the performance period (normal performance period, SP time preparation period, SP time period) set in the pachinko machine 10 at timing, the performance mode of the big win game performance executed during the big win game and the end screen of the big win game. It is configured to determine the display mode displayed on.

Specifically, in a situation where it is difficult to execute the setting suggestion performance using the variable performance by executing the jackpot game, the setting suggestion performance is configured to be easily executed as the jackpot game performance. there is By configuring in this way, it is possible to suppress the player's desire to play from decreasing even when the jackpot game is executed in a period including at least the SP time period.

Here, with reference to FIG. 451(a), the effect contents of the effect (period effect) executed during the SP time period (during the SP time) will be described. FIG. 451(a) is a diagram showing an example of the display screen when about 50 seconds have passed since the SP time was set. As shown in FIG. 451(a), when the SP time is set, a background image (stage) that is more gorgeous than the normal effect period is displayed as the background image (stage) of the main display area Dm as the period effect. In the region HR1, a telop display of the comment "SP time is in progress" is displayed as a notification mode for notifying the player that the SP time period is currently in progress. Furthermore, in the display area HR4 formed in the upper left part of the main display area Dm, a remaining time display mode for indicating the remaining time of the SP time period is displayed. A display mode indicating that it is minutes and ten seconds is displayed.

Display areas HR5 and HR6 are formed on the upper right side of the main display area Dm, and display the command contents (mission contents) to be executed during the SP time period and the current achievement level for the mission contents. be. Here, in the present embodiment, as an added value that can be imparted to the player during the SP time period, a setting suggesting effect capable of suggesting the current set value is configured to be executable. Then, when the mission contents displayed in the display areas HR5 and HR6 are cleared, the setting suggestion effect can be executed.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, as the mission contents set during the SP time period, there are mission contents (first mission contents) that are easy to achieve and mission contents (second mission contents) that are more difficult to achieve than the first mission contents. One mission content can be selected from a plurality of mission content including . The selection ratio of each mission content is made different according to the setting value of the pachinko machine 10.例文帳に追加

In other words, the mission content itself set during the SP time period also includes an element for estimating the setting value, and by achieving the set mission, new information for estimating the setting value is configured to obtain By configuring in this way, it is possible to give an added value (prediction element) during the SP time period even to the player who could not complete the mission, so that the game can be played during the SP time period. It is possible to motivate the player to play the game. In addition, by achieving the mission, it is possible to provide additional value (setting speculation element), so that the player can be motivated to play the game.

In the display screen shown in FIG. 451 (a), as the mission content, when the number of times of special symbol variation executed during the SP time period reaches 30 times, or the number of reach effects executed during the SP time period indicates that a mission to be achieved when reaches 5 times is set, and the display area HR5 displays the characters "variation number" indicating that the number of special symbol variations is the target, and the mission "30" is displayed in the number of achievements Pb indicating the number of times for achieving , and "5" is displayed in the current number of times Pa indicating the number of times executed at present (the number of special symbol variations). Then, in the display area HR6, characters of "reach number" indicating that the number of times of the reach effect is targeted are displayed, and "5" is displayed in the achievement number Pd indicating the number of times to achieve the mission. "0" is displayed in the current count Pc indicating the number of times executed (the number of ready-to-win effects).

That is, the display screen shown in FIG. 451(a) is in a state where the fifth special symbol variation is executed after the SP time period is set, and the ready-to-win effect is executed even once during the SP time period. It is a display screen showing that it is not in a state.

An example of a state in which one minute and five seconds have passed since the display screen shown in FIG. 451(a) was displayed will be described with reference to FIG. 451(b). FIG. 451(b) is a diagram showing an example of the display screen displayed when 2 minutes and 55 seconds have passed since the SP time period was set. The state shown in FIG. 451(b), as shown in the display area HR5, is a state in which the number of special symbol variations executed during the SP time period is 30 and the mission has been accomplished. In the center of the main display area Dm, a treasure box 801 and a button icon 802 for guiding the player to press the frame button 22 are displayed as an added value effect given when the mission is accomplished. is displayed. When the player presses the frame button 22 in this state, an effect of opening the treasure box 801 is executed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 452, description will be given of the content of effect when the frame button 22 is pressed while the display screen shown in FIG. 451(b) is displayed. FIG. 452(a) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen displayed when a privilege (setting speculation element) is granted based on achievement of a mission during the SP time period. FIG. 452(a) shows a state in which two seconds have passed since the frame button 22 was pressed while the display screen of FIG. 451(b) was displayed. A remaining time display mode indicating that the remaining time is two seconds is displayed.

Then, the treasure box 801 is opened and "A" is displayed as the setting guess element 801a. Also, the character "clear" is displayed to indicate that the mission for the number of special symbol variations shown in the display area HR5 has been achieved.

When the mission is accomplished during the SP time period and the setting guessing element 801a is given (displayed), a display area HR7 is formed, and the setting guessing element 801a already acquired is displayed as a history. is doing. By configuring in this way, when a plurality of set speculation elements 801a are acquired during one SP time period, by looking at the history display displayed in the display area HR7, the actually set set values can be determined. can be easily predicted.

Here, the contents of the setting guessing element given to the player when the setting suggesting effect is executed will be described. In the present embodiment, as modes of setting speculation elements that can be given to the player, a mode "A" with a low setting speculation effect, which is selected at substantially the same rate regardless of the setting value, and a mode "A", which is currently set Mode "B" indicates that the current setting value is not the most disadvantageous setting value (setting 1) for the player, and the possibility that the currently set setting value is the high setting (setting 3) is slightly high. A mode "C" indicating that the currently set value is likely to be the high setting (setting 3), a mode "D" indicating that the currently set value is likely to be the high setting (setting 3) is configured to be determinable.

In addition, display modes corresponding to the setting guessing elements "A" to "E" are defined for each of the various rendering modes executed as the setting suggestion rendering. Therefore, when the setting-suggestion effect is executed, first, the setting-suggestion element given by the setting-suggestion effect of this time is determined, and then the effect mode of the setting-suggestion effect corresponding to the determined setting-suggestion element is determined. It is configured so that When a plurality of setting guessing elements can be provided in one setting suggesting effect, it is preferable to predefine the effect mode of the setting suggesting effect in correspondence with the combination of the plurality of setting guessing elements. . By configuring in this way, for example, when two modes "D" are determined as a plurality of setting inference elements, the , it is possible to execute the setting suggesting effect in a combined effect mode indicating that there is a high possibility that the high setting is set. Therefore, when a plurality of setting guessing elements are added to one setting suggesting effect, the setting value which is set to the player can be grasped more easily than when a single setting guessing element is added. can be executed.

Note that the mode types of setting inference elements are not limited to the modes "A" to "E" described above. A storage means capable of storing a mode type indicating that a setting change operation has been executed, a setting value set last time is provided, and the current setting value is higher than the setting value set last time. or a mode type indicating that the current set value is lower than the previously set value. In addition, although three types of setting values are provided in this embodiment as setting values for the pachinko machine 10, the present invention is not limited to this, and four or more types of setting values may be set. In this way, by configuring four or more types of set values to be settable and increasing the mode types of the setting guessing elements, it is possible to provide variations in the performance mode of the setting suggestion performance, and the obtained setting guessing. Based on the aspect type of the element, it is possible to provide the enjoyment of estimating the current set value from various viewpoints.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 452(a), it is configured to be able to display the history of setting guessing elements acquired within a predetermined period (within the SP time period). When the elements are acquired, each setting guessing element may be canceled based on a predetermined rule, and only the remaining setting guessing elements may be displayed. It may be configured to display the analyzed set value prediction information. By constructing in this way, it is possible to prevent the player from being confused by acquiring too many setting guessing elements, and the more the setting guessing elements are acquired, the higher the accuracy of the setting guessing. can be easily executed, the game can be motivated to acquire the setting speculation element.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10 having a function capable of displaying a history of setting guess elements acquired in the past, erasing means capable of erasing the history information of the setting guess elements acquired in the past is provided when the player ends the game. It is good to set. By configuring in this way, it is possible to reliably prevent other players from knowing the setting guessing element that has been acquired.

Next, with reference to FIG. 453, the contents of the effect executed when the SP time period, which is the period effect, ends will be described. As described above, the SP time period is set based on the time information clocked by the RTC. Therefore, depending on the fluctuation situation of the special symbol variation, if the SP time period ends with the remaining variation time of the special symbol variation being executed is short, the SP time period ends with the remaining variation time of the special symbol variation being executed being long. If it ends, it occurs when the SP time period ends in a state where special symbol variation is not executed.

Here, as described above, during the SP time period, an effect (period effect) different from other periods is executed. ), the same performance is executed synchronously for a plurality of pachinko machines 10, thereby enhancing the performance effect.

Therefore, for example, when the period production is continued until the special symbol variation being executed ends at the end timing of the SP time period, the end timing of the period production in each pachinko machine 10 is different, resulting in the production effect. There was a problem that the Therefore, regardless of the remaining variation time of the special symbol variation being executed at the end timing of the SP time period, at the timing when the SP time period ends, the period effect is executed in the end mode indicating that the SP time period has ended. , the technique of continuing the end mode until the special symbol variation being executed is completed.

By using the above-described technology, it is possible to synchronize the timing of execution of the period performance of the end mode in each pachinko machine 10, and it is possible to execute the performance with a sense of unity in the plurality of pachinko machines 10. However, for example, if the remaining variation time of the special symbol variation being executed at the end timing of the SP time period is long, the time during which the period effect of the end mode continues is simply lengthened. There is a problem that the monotonous presentation deteriorates and the player gets tired of the game early.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, when the remaining variation time of the special symbol variation being executed at the end timing of the SP time period is longer than the predetermined time (20 seconds), a special effect (special residual variation effect) is performed. configured to be executable. In this way, when a predetermined condition is satisfied at the end timing of the period production, the special production can be executed. The production effect can be enhanced also for the game.

Further, in this embodiment, the special residual variation effect is executed depending on the length of the residual variation time of the special symbol variation being executed at the end timing of the SP time period. In other words, if the player, who perceives the end of the SP time period, stops the game just before the end of the SP time period, it becomes difficult for the special symbol variation to straddle the end timing of the SP time period. Therefore, it is configured to make it difficult for the special variation effect to be executed.

By configuring in this way, the player can be motivated to continue the game until the SP time period in which the period effect is executed ends.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, as the special residual variation effect, a setting suggestion effect for suggesting the set value currently set, that is, an effect including information advantageous to the player is configured to be executable. Therefore, when the SP time period ends, a willing player who wants to acquire advantageous information is interested in the fluctuation time of the special pattern fluctuation executed across the end timing of the SP time period. It is possible to improve the player's interest in the game.

Here, with reference to FIG. 453(a), the display screen when the special residual variation effect is executed will be described. FIG. 453(a) is a diagram showing an example of the display contents displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 at the time when the period effect (SP time) ends. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of display contents when a residual variation effect is executed;

As shown in FIG. 453(a), in the display area HR1, characters of "SP time end" are displayed as a telop to indicate that the SP time period has ended. A remaining time display mode indicating that the time is 0 seconds (end) is displayed. Then, the period until the special symbol fluctuation currently being executed ends (until the remaining fluctuation time reaches 0 seconds) is a suggestive effect in which the set suggestive effect is executed with a high probability (higher probability than other periods). A comment of ``suggestive effect large amount GET chance'' is displayed as a guide notification mode for indicating that it is a guaranteed period in such a manner that the character J0 displayed in the small area Ds2 of the sub-display area Ds speaks.

A display area HR7 is formed on the right side of the main display area Dm as a history display area for displaying the history of the effect results (effect mode) executed as the setting suggestion effect. Since the display screen shown in FIG. 453(a) is a display screen that is displayed immediately after the suggestive effect high certainty period is reached, the history of effect results is not displayed in the display area HR7, but the suggestive effect high certainty period is not displayed. It is possible to display the history of a plurality of setting suggestion effects executed during the certain period.

By configuring in this way, when a plurality of setting suggestion effects are executed in a short period of time, in particular, at least the execution period of one setting suggestion effect and another setting suggestion effect different from the one setting suggestion effect Even if the player is unable to grasp all of the multiple set-suggestion effects being executed in the event that some of them are executed in duplicate, the player can grasp the contents (results of effects) displayed in the history display area. It is possible to easily grasp the content of the setting suggestion effect that has already been executed.

The display mode displayed in the history display area may be a display mode for indicating the effect mode of the setting suggestion effect actually executed, or the setting suggestion content included in the setting suggestion effect actually executed. may be displayed. Here, as an effect mode of the actually executed setting suggestion effect, for example, it is possible to display one character out of a plurality of characters as the setting suggestion effect, and the setting suggestion contents ( For example, suggesting that the set value is an even number, suggesting that it is an odd number, or suggesting that it is not a specific setting value). It is preferable that a display form (for example, an icon form simulating a character image) that allows the player to identify the type of character displayed as the setting suggestion effect is displayed in the history display area.

When executing such a setting suggestion effect, since there are a plurality of types of effect modes for showing the same setting suggestion content, the setting is made to the player based on the plurality of display modes displayed in the history display area. It can provide the fun of predicting the value.

In the present embodiment, the display mode displayed in the display area HR7 (history display area) is configured to be displayed until a predetermined period elapses (until the high-probability suggestion effect period ends). All or part of the display mode displayed in the display area HR7 (history display mode) can be arbitrarily deleted (hidden) by the player operating the operation means (operation button 22). You can By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent the history display corresponding to the setting suggestion effect that the player has already comprehended from being continuously displayed in the display area HR7. When the setting-suggesting effect is executed in the effect mode most advantageous to the player (the effect mode informing that the setting is the highest), the display mode indicating the effect mode is continuously displayed in the history display area. By storing the setting value, it is possible to prevent the set value from being easily grasped by a player who is not playing the game.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the display area HR7 is formed at a specific location in the main display area Dm. can be By configuring in this way, the player can easily grasp the display mode, and the history display area can be formed in a place where it is difficult for other players to grasp the display mode.

In this embodiment, the history display area is configured to display a display mode based on the effect mode of the setting suggestion effect that has been executed. When a plurality of display modes satisfy a predetermined condition, a new display mode based on the satisfaction of the predetermined condition may be displayed. For example, the display mode displayed in the history display area may be When a predetermined number (for example, 3) of display modes (weakly suggestive mode) in which it is difficult to grasp the actual setting value are displayed, a display mode (strongly suggestive mode) in which the actual set value is easier to grasp than the weakly suggestive mode is displayed. mode) may be displayed. By configuring in this way, it is possible to easily grasp the set value when many setting suggestion effects are executed during the high probability of suggestion effect, so that the player can understand the high probability of suggestion effect. The game can be played while expecting that many setting suggestion effects will be executed during the game.

In addition, an upper limit (for example, 5) is set for the number of display modes that can be displayed in the history display area, and the display modes are displayed up to the upper limit in correspondence with the execution order of the set suggestion effects during the high probability of suggestion effect period. When a strongly suggestive mode is displayed based on the display of a plurality of weakly suggestive modes, the plurality of weakly suggestive modes are erased and a new display mode is displayed in the history display area. It may be configured so that it can be displayed.

Further, in this case, it may be possible to set a clearing condition different from the display condition of the strongly suggestive mode so that the weakly suggestive mode is deleted when the clearing condition is satisfied. It is preferable that the deletion condition is established when a specific effect is executed during the guaranteed period or when the player performs a specific operation on the frame button 22.例文帳に追加As a result, more display modes can be displayed in the history display area based on the fulfillment of the erasing condition, making it easier for the player to predict the set value.

The display modes to be deleted from the history display area based on the fulfillment of the deletion condition are arranged in order of the display period displayed in the history display area from the longest, i.e., the display mode that was displayed earlier is deleted. Good to configure. As a result, the display mode displayed in the long-time history display area, that is, the display mode that is likely to be understood by the player is erased in order, and a new display mode can be displayed. It is possible to suppress the situation where the display mode is erased immediately after being displayed in the area, and the player cannot grasp the setting suggestion content of the setting suggestion effect.

Alternatively, the types of display modes displayed in the history display area may be determined, and the types of display modes (for example, weakly suggestive modes) in which the actual set values are difficult to grasp may be deleted in order. By configuring in this way, it becomes easier to display a display mode in which the set value can be easily predicted as the suggestive effect high probability period progresses. Therefore, the suggestive effect high probability period continues for a long time, and the player can play the game while expecting that the setting suggestive effect will be executed frequently during the period.

Next, with reference to FIG. 453(b), the contents of the effect displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 during the highly probable suggestive effect period will be described. FIG. 453(b) is a diagram showing an example of the display screen displayed during the high-probability suggestive effect period.

As shown in FIG. 453(b), during the suggestive effect high probability period, the setting suggestive effect is executed using various effects. Specifically, setting suggestion effects 801a and 801b corresponding to the variable effects executed in the main display area Dm, and displayed on the running symbol pedestal m0 displayed in the small area Ds1 of the sub display area Ds. A setting suggesting effect 801c corresponding to the reserved symbol and a setting suggesting effect 801d corresponding to the character J0 are executed.

Then, setting suggestion contents (A to D) included in various setting suggestion effects executed during the suggestion effect high probability period are displayed in the history display area of the display area HR7. In addition, in the upper center of the main display area Dm, as a remaining period display mode for indicating the remaining period of the suggestive effect high probability period, characters "5 seconds left until the end of the specialized zone" are displayed. That is, FIG. 453(b) is a display screen in a state where the remaining variation time of the special symbol variation being executed is 5 seconds.

Here, setting suggestion content included in each effect mode of the setting suggestion effect in the present embodiment will be described. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, as described above, the setting values that differ in the probability of winning a jackpot in the special symbol lottery can be set in three stages (settings 1 to 3). By turning on the power in a state where the power is not turned on and a specific operating condition is established, the setting value can be changed to a setting change state. Then, by performing a determination operation for determining an arbitrary set value in the setting change state to determine the set value, the game can be played with the game specifications (special pattern jackpot probability) corresponding to the determined set value. executed.

As described above, since the special symbol jackpot probability is varied according to the set value, the operation to change the set value executed in the setting change state is the game degree for varying the degree of advantage for the player. It becomes a variable operation. In this embodiment, the special symbol jackpot probability is configured to vary according to the set value. Elements other than the above may be used, for example, the ratio of setting an advantageous game state (for example, variable probability state) that is advantageous to the player as the game state set after the end of the jackpot game may be set as the setting difference element. The result of the pattern lottery is other than a big win, and the probability of a small win (small win probability) in which a winning game different from the big win game is executed may be set as a difference element, or an advantageous game state ( For example, the winning probability of the end lottery (dropping lottery) for ending the probability variable state) (the probability of ending the probability variable state and moving to another game state) may be set as a difference element. In addition, the ease of execution of the special symbol lottery may be set as a set difference element, for example, a set difference may be provided in the probability of winning in the normal symbol lottery, or the opening operation pattern of the electric accessory 640a during the normal symbol lottery game. may be changed for each setting to make it easier for the ball to enter the second ball entrance 640 associated with the electric accessory 640a.

In addition, in this embodiment, based on the technical idea of making the player's advantage different depending on the set value, the set value is changeable, but the player's advantage is not limited to this. A setting difference element may be provided so that the type of privilege that is likely to be given to the player can be varied, although to a certain extent. When the first value is set, and the rate at which the variable probability state is set after the end of the jackpot game (variable probability transition rate) is the first rate, and the second set value different from the first set value is set. , the special symbol lottery jackpot probability is a second value lower (difficult to hit) than the first value, and the ratio of setting the probability variable state after the jackpot game ends (variable probability transition ratio) is higher than the first ratio. It is good to configure so as to be the second ratio (probability change state is likely to be set).

By configuring in this way, it is possible to provide different game characteristics as game specifications that can give the same degree of advantage to the player, so that the player is prevented from becoming bored with the game early. be able to.

Returning to FIG. 454, the description is continued. In this embodiment, it is possible to execute a setting suggestion effect including a suggestion mode for suggesting a set value using part or all of various effects. ), the setting suggestion effects 801a and 801b corresponding to the variable effects executed in the main display area Dm, and the running symbol pedestal m0 displayed in the small area Ds1 of the sub display area Ds. A setting suggesting effect 801c corresponding to the reserved symbol and a setting suggesting effect 801d corresponding to the character J0 are executed.

Each of the setting suggesting effects has a predetermined effect mode according to the mode of the underlying effect. A suggestion icon for suggesting a set value pops out from the 3rd pattern which is still displayed, and different types of suggestion icons (indicated by alphabetic types in the figure) are displayed according to the content of setting suggestion.

The setting suggestion effect 801c corresponding to the active symbol pedestal m0 is that the suggestive icon is changed in the process of changing the display mode of the active symbol (indicated by a round symbol in the figure) displayed on the active symbol pedestal m0. In the effect to be displayed, suggestion icons of different types (indicated by alphabetic types in the figure) are displayed according to setting suggestions. Also, the setting suggestion effect 801d associated with the character J0 is an effect in which the character J0 issues a comment, and different comments (indicated by alphabetic type in the figure) are displayed according to the content of the setting suggestion.

In other words, the effect mode of the setting suggestion effect to be executed is defined in advance according to the setting suggestion content and the corresponding effect type. By configuring in this way, setting suggestion production corresponding to each production (production for showing the result of the special symbol lottery) than the case where the setting suggestion production of the same mode is executed regardless of the type of the corresponding production It is possible to make it easier to have a relationship with , and it is possible to enhance the production effect.

In addition, in the case where the effect for indicating the result of the special symbol lottery and the effect mode of the corresponding setting suggesting effect are related in this way, when the effect corresponding to the effect being executed is executed In addition, it is preferable to make it difficult for the player to understand whether the performance is a setting suggestion performance or a part of the performance for showing the result of the special symbol lottery. By constructing in this way, when the additional performance is executed to the performance being executed, the enjoyment of predicting the set value of the pachinko machine 10 based on the performance mode of the additional performance and the special pattern being executed. Since the enjoyment of predicting the result of the lottery and the enjoyment of predicting the result of the lottery can be provided to the player in duplicate, the amusement of the game can be improved.

Furthermore, in this case, as the effect mode of the additional effect, it is likely to be selected (execution It is preferable to configure so that a special effect mode can be set. By configuring in this way, when the additional performance is executed in the special performance mode, there is a possibility that the special symbol lottery that is being executed has won a jackpot, or the setting value set in the pachinko machine 10 is changed. There is a high possibility that the set value (high setting) is advantageous to the player.

Therefore, when the additional effect of the special effect mode is executed in a state (for example, a low probability state of the special symbol) in which the next big hit game is difficult to be executed (there is a high possibility of winning in the special symbol lottery), the game Players are expected to win the jackpot, and the next big win game is likely to be executed (the possibility of winning the jackpot in the special symbol lottery is high) (for example, a variable probability state) until the next big win game is executed (jackpot Until the conditions for executing the game are met), the jackpot game ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 454, the content of the setting suggestion effect will be described. FIG. 454 is a diagram showing types of suggestion modes included in the setting suggestion effect. As shown in FIG. 454, in the present embodiment, five types (A to D) of production patterns (suggestion modes) can be set as production patterns (suggestion modes) of setting suggestion effects. An effect pattern (suggestion mode) is determined by referring to a setting suggestion effect selection table 222c, which will be described later, based on the set value.

The setting suggestion effect selection table 222c is defined so that the selection ratio of each effect pattern (suggestion mode) differs according to the set value. As a result, a production pattern (suggestion mode) in which only a specific set value has a high selection rate, a production pattern (suggestion mode) in which a plurality of set values that satisfy a predetermined condition have a higher selection rate than other set values, or It is possible to create an effect pattern such as a effect pattern (suggestion mode) with a high selection ratio even with the set value of .

As shown in FIG. 454, production pattern A (suggestion mode A) is a production pattern (suggestion mode) that has a high selection rate regardless of the setting value, in other words, the setting value is difficult to predict. When the setting suggestion effect including the mode of this effect pattern A is executed, it is difficult for the player to predict the set value, so this suggestion mode is a suggestion mode (weak suggestion mode) that is disadvantageous to the player. ). It should be noted that this weakly suggesting mode is not only a suggesting mode defined so that the selection ratio is the same for each set value, but also defined with a certain amount of error that makes it difficult for the player to discern the difference. The suggestion mode shown in FIG. 2 also falls under the weak suggestion mode because it is more difficult for the player to predict the set value when the suggestion mode is displayed than when other suggestion modes are displayed.

Effect pattern B (suggestion mode B) is a performance pattern (suggestion mode) in which the selection ratio is defined so that only a specific set value (setting 1) is not selected. When the setting-suggesting effect including the aspect of the effect pattern B is executed, it can be grasped that the setting value is not the setting 1, that is, the setting value that is most disadvantageous to the player. In this way, even when indicating to the player that the set value is not a specific set value, by eliminating one candidate from a plurality of candidates (set value), the set value can be changed by the player. can be made easier to predict.

In this embodiment, by executing the setting suggestion effect of the suggestion mode B, the set value (setting 1) that is most disadvantageous to the player is denied. You can figure out what you don't have. Therefore, when the suggesting mode B is first displayed as the setting suggesting effect, the set value can be predicted while the player continues to play the game. Further, when the suggestion mode B is displayed after the setting suggestion effect of another suggestion mode (for example, a suggestion mode informing that the set value is an odd number) is executed, the contents of the displayed suggestion mode By combining , the prediction accuracy of the set value can be improved.

In this embodiment, the production pattern (suggestion mode) B is configured to deny the set value (setting 1) that is most disadvantageous to the player. setting, etc.), or a specific range (for example, setting 1 to 2) may be denied, and a plurality of types of suggestion mode B (for example, suggestion mode B1 for denying setting 1 and setting 2 Suggestion mode B2 etc. to deny) may be provided. quickly move to another pachinko machine 10. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from playing the game for a long time unnecessarily.

Production pattern C (suggestion mode C) and production pattern D (suggestion mode D) are production patterns (suggestion mode) whose selection ratio is defined such that the higher the set value is, the more patterns are selected. The suggested mode D is defined so that the setting difference in the selection ratio is larger than the suggested mode D. In other words, a higher set value (setting 3) is defined such that both the setting suggesting effect of the suggesting mode C and the setting suggesting effect of the suggesting mode D are more likely to be executed than the lower set value (setting 1).

Further, since the setting difference in the selection ratio is larger in the suggestive mode D than in the suggestive mode C, the set suggestive effect of the suggestive mode D is executed for the number of executions of the set suggestive effect of the suggestive mode C. As the number of times increases, the possibility that a higher set value is set increases.

In this way, as a plurality of suggestion modes that can be selected regardless of which set value is set, by varying the selection ratio in each setting, the number of executions of setting suggestion effects for each suggestion mode is compounded. It is possible to allow the player to predict the set value by making a realistic determination.

Note that when a plurality of suggestion modes are provided such that the higher the set value is set, the higher the selection rate is, such as the suggestion mode C and the suggestion mode D described above, the selection rate of the suggestion mode C for each set value and the It is preferable to define each selection ratio so that the higher the difference between the selection ratio of the suggested mode D and the higher the set value, the larger the selection ratio. As a result, the higher the set value is set, the more likely it is that the number of executions between suggested mode C and suggested mode D will differ, so that the player can easily predict the set value.

On the other hand, each selection ratio may be defined so that the difference between the selection ratio of suggested mode C and the selection ratio of suggested mode D for each setting value is equal. By configuring in this manner, the total number of executions of the set suggestive effect of the suggestive mode C and the set suggestive effect of the suggestive mode D is greater when the set value is high than when the set value is low. Therefore, for the player, the set value is predicted by referring only to the number of executions of the set suggestion effect of the suggestion mode D, or the total number of executions of the set suggestion effect of the suggestion mode C and the set suggestion effect of the suggestion mode D is predicted. The player can choose whether to predict the set value by referring to or to predict the set value by judging both times in combination, so that the variation for predicting the set value can be increased. It is possible to prevent the player from getting bored with the game early.

Effect pattern E (suggestion mode E) can be selected only when setting 3, which is the setting value most advantageous to the player, is set in this pachinko machine 10 (it is selected very rarely in cases other than setting 3). Concept including case) production pattern (suggestion mode). That is, when the setting suggestion effect of the suggestion mode E is executed, it is possible to inform the player in an easy-to-understand manner that the most advantageous set value (setting 3) is set.

Although the detailed explanation will be given later, this suggestion mode E is defined so that the selection rate is extremely low compared to the other suggestion modes. However, the selection ratio is defined so that the probability that the setting suggestion effect of the suggestion mode E is executed is about 50%. By setting the selection ratio low in this way, the player who has executed the setting suggestive effect of the suggestive mode E is notified that the set value (setting 3) that is most advantageous to the player is set ( In addition, it is possible to provide a sense of superiority by executing a performance with a low execution probability.

In addition, by reducing the ratio of execution of the setting suggestion performance of the suggestion mode E, it is possible to leave the possibility that the setting 3 is set even in the pachinko machine 10 in which the setting suggestion performance of the suggestion mode E is not executed. Therefore, the player can be motivated to play the game.

Next, with reference to FIG. 455, the passage of time from turning on the power of the pachinko machine 10 in the present embodiment and the flow of the period effect to be executed will be described. Fig. 455 is a diagram showing the passage of time after turning on the power and the flow of the variable effect, Fig. 455(a) is a transition diagram showing the passage of time after turning on the power, Fig. 455(b) FIG. 455(c) is a diagram showing the effect period at each time, and FIG. 455(c) is a diagram showing a variation pattern A as an example showing the relationship between the effect period and the period during which the special symbol variation is executed. There is, and FIG. 455(d) is a diagram showing a variation pattern B as an example showing the relationship between the period during which the special symbol variation is executed and the performance period.

The pachinko machine 10 in this embodiment is configured to set different performance periods based on the elapsed time from power-on. The performance period (SP time period) during which the performance is executed can be set. Since this period performance (SP time performance) is a performance executed based on the elapsed time from power-on irrespective of the presence or absence of special pattern variations, a plurality of pachinko machines 10 simultaneously execute the period performance. Become. In this way, a plurality of pachinko machines 10 execute an effect with a sense of unity, so that an effect with an impact on the player can be executed, and the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

In the present embodiment, since the effect mode executed as the period effect is a effect mode that is completed by the single pachinko machine 10, when the period effect is simultaneously executed in a plurality of pachinko machines 10, each pachinko machine 10, the same effect mode is executed, but without being limited to this, for example, as the effect mode of the period effect, a plurality (three types) of effect mode types can be set, and three adjacent pachinko machines 10 are arranged. It may be configured such that one period performance is executed using a stand. In this case, as the effect mode types of the period effect, the first effect mode type corresponding to the pachinko machine 10 on the left side of the three machines, the second effect mode type corresponding to the pachinko machine 10 in the center of the three machines, and three A third performance mode type corresponding to the pachinko machine 10 on the right side of the table is prepared in advance, and the performance mode type can be individually determined according to the installation status of the pachinko machine 10 to be installed.

As a result, it is possible to set the performance mode types for the installed pachinko machines 10, and when the three pachinko machines 10 are used to execute the performance for one period, the performance mode types are set in order. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the performance effect of the period performance is lowered because the period performance is not performed.

In this case, as the effect mode types of the period effect, the effect mode type corresponding to the period effect completed by one machine, the effect mode type corresponding to the period effect completed by a small number of machines (for example, three machines), and the effect mode type corresponding to the period production completed by a small number of machines (for example, three machines) It is preferable to configure so that an effect mode type corresponding to a period effect completed by a machine (for example, 20 machines) can be selected. By configuring in this way, it is possible to set the effect mode of the period effect according to the installation conditions of the plurality of pachinko machines 10, and to enhance the effect of the effect according to the installation conditions.

Further, in this embodiment, the SP time preparation period is set as an effect period for notifying the player in advance of the arrival of the above-described SP time period. Specifically, the SP time preparation period is set during the period from when the elapsed time from power-on reaches two minutes before the start timing of the SP time period until the SP time period is set. This SP time preparation period notifies the player in advance that the SP time period will be set soon in an easy-to-understand manner.

During this SP time preparation period, in the main display area Dm of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, an effect similar to the normal effect executed in the normal effect period is executed. The remaining period (remaining time) until the SP time period is set is displayed on the performance execution screen. By configuring in this way, it becomes possible for the player to grasp the remaining time until the period effect is executed in an easy-to-understand manner. Since it can be taken, it is possible to provide the player with a friendly game.

As shown in FIG. 455( a ), when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, the elapsed time is measured based on the timer (RTC) 292 . Then, when the elapsed time has passed 88 minutes, the SP time preparation period for indicating to the player that the performance period (SP time period) set between 90 minutes and 93 minutes has elapsed. It is set within the range of 88 minutes to 90 minutes of elapsed time. Then, when the first performance period (SP time period) ends, the performance period for executing the normal performance is set again. Thereafter, an SP preparation period, an SP time period, and a normal period are set in order based on the elapsed time.

Each main effect period set based on the elapsed time is configured to be set based on the effect switching table 222b (see FIG. 471) described later. In other words, the effect switching table 222b defines a plurality of effect modes corresponding to the information clocked by the clock device 292, and the effect based on the selected effect mode is executed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 455(b), various performance periods set based on the elapsed time from power-on and the contents of the performances executed during the performance periods will be described. As described above with reference to FIG. 455(a), in the present embodiment, the normal period, the SP time preparation period, and the SP time period are repeatedly set in order based on the elapsed time from power-on. When the normal period is set as the performance period, the normal performance (see FIGS. 449 and 450) for showing the result of the special symbol lottery executed in each pachinko machine 10 is executed. be.

During the SP time preparation period, the same normal performance as during the normal period is executed, but a part of the display screen is used to inform the player that the SP time period will soon come. A comment "Soon SP time will be entered" is displayed as a guidance mode for this. In addition, when the remaining time of the SP time preparation period becomes 30 seconds, in addition to the guidance mode described above, the remaining time information that specifically indicates the remaining time until the SP time period arrives than the guidance mode A countdown display is executed.

This countdown display is a display for showing the remaining time in seconds until the SP time period is actually set. A countdown display for 30 seconds is executed so that the countdown display becomes 0 seconds at the timing when the

By executing the countdown display in this manner, the timing of starting the period performance (SP time performance) during the SP time period is overlooked, and the performance with a sense of unity using a plurality of pachinko machines 10 can be preferably experienced. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of situations that cannot be done.

Also, during the SP time preparation period, a telop is displayed on a portion (for example, upper part) of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, indicating that the current SP time preparation period is in progress. be. This telop display is constructed so as to be displayed both on the screen during special symbol variation in which the special symbol variation is performed and in the demonstration standby screen in which the special symbol variation is not performed. As a result, even the pachinko machine 10 in which the player is not playing a game can be notified that the SP time period will soon be set (the period performance will be executed), so that the player who wants to play the game during the period performance. However, it is possible to easily find out the pachinko machine 10 on which the period performance is executed.

Then, when the SP time period is set, a period effect (SP time effect) is executed. In this embodiment, as the SP time effect, a special background (see FIG. 451) is displayed, and a setting suggestion effect for suggesting a setting value is executed more easily than other effect periods. Configure. During this SP time period, a telop is displayed on a portion (for example, upper part) of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, indicating that the present is during the SP time period (Fig. 451). (see display area HR1 in (a)).

Next, with regard to the relationship between the end timing of the SP time period, the end timing of the variable effect for indicating the result of the special symbol lottery, and the content of the effect to be executed, see FIGS. to explain. As described above, the SP time period is set based on the elapsed time after the power is turned on, and the period is not variable depending on whether the special symbol variation is executed or the remaining time. Therefore, there is a possibility that the SP time period will end during execution of the special symbol variation. In this case, when the normal performance is started at the timing when the SP time period ends (the timing when the normal period is set), the player says that the variable performance corresponding to the special symbol variation being executed suddenly switches. There was a problem that it confuses In addition, it is conceivable to continue (extend) the period effect (SP time effect) until the special symbol variation being executed ends at the time when the SP time period ends. In 10, there is a problem that the end timing of the period performance executed as a performance with a sense of unity differs according to the situation of the special pattern variation of each pachinko machine 10, resulting in a decrease in the performance effect.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, in the state where the special symbol variation is executed at the end timing of the SP time period, the remaining time (remaining variation time) of the special symbol variation is determined, and the length of the remaining variation time is determined. It is configured to determine a different presentation mode depending on the situation. Specifically, when the remaining variation time at the end timing of the SP time period is less than a predetermined time (for example, less than 5 seconds), the display mode indicating the end of the SP time period is continuously displayed, and the remaining variation is displayed. When the time is longer than a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds or longer), the period until the remaining fluctuation time elapses becomes a specialized zone (see FIG. 453(b)), and the setting suggestion effect is likely to be executed. It is configured as follows. By configuring in this way, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the variation performance corresponding to the special symbol variation being executed is suddenly switched. In addition, it is suppressed that the period performance (SP time performance) is continued (extended) for a long time and the performance effect of the period performance executed as a performance with a sense of unity in a plurality of pachinko machines 10 is lowered. be able to.

Furthermore, when the remaining variation time of the special symbol variation being executed at the end timing of the SP time period is a predetermined time (for example, 20 seconds) or more, the setting suggestion effect is made more than other periods using the remaining variation time. Since it is possible to set a special mode that is easy to execute, the timing at which the SP time period in which the period effect (SP time effect) is executed ends, that is, the specific period in which benefits that are advantageous to the player are given There is a special mode in which benefits that are advantageous to the player are given depending on the remaining fluctuation time of the special symbol fluctuation, even at the timing when the player's willingness to play may decrease in the past. Since it is set, it is possible to suppress the player's desire to play.

In this case, it is preferable to notify the player of the end information for indicating the timing when the SP time period ends and the remaining variation time information for indicating the remaining variation time of the special symbol variation being executed. . By configuring in this way, the remaining variation time of the special symbol variation at the end of the SP time period can be easily predicted during the SP time period, so the content of the effect to be executed later for the player. can be easily predicted, and an easy-to-understand game can be provided. In addition, when the player grasps that the special symbol variation being executed is stopped and displayed immediately before the end timing of the SP time period, the SP time period ends during the period of the special symbol variation to be executed next. Since the player can recognize in advance that there is a high possibility of doing so, it is possible to provide the enjoyment of expecting a long variation time to be set as the variation time of the special symbol variation to be executed next.

Furthermore, in order to facilitate the setting of the special mode, the game is interrupted during the SP time period, and the player is made to play a game adjusted so that the special pattern variation is started just before the end of the SP time period. becomes possible. Therefore, a game that executes many setting suggestion effects by executing many special symbol lotteries during the SP time period, and a special symbol variation number that is executed during the SP time period to make it easier to set the special mode. It is possible for the player to select a game in which the setting suggestion performance is reduced (difficult to execute the setting suggestion performance during the SP time period) and a game in which many setting suggestion performances are executed during the special mode period, thereby improving the interest of the game. be able to.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 456 to 458, description will be given of the effect contents during the high-speed variation mode in which a short variation time (for example, 1.5 seconds) is likely to be selected as the variation time of the special symbol variation. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, a shorter variation time is selected as the variation time of the special symbol variation in the normal symbol high probability state (time saving state, probability variable state) than in the normal symbol low probability state (normal state). It is designed to be easy.

More specifically, in the game state in which the normal symbol high probability state is set, the electric accessory 640 is opened more than the game state in which the normal symbol low probability state is set, and the second ball is entered. It is configured so that the ball can easily enter the mouth 640 . That is, the normal symbol high probability state is configured to make it easier to obtain the execution right of the special symbol lottery than the normal symbol low probability state. The right to execute the special symbol lottery is configured so that it can be stored (retained storage is possible) with a predetermined number as the upper limit.

Therefore, while the normal symbol high probability state is set, the ball enters the second ball entrance 640 with the number of reserved memories reaching the upper limit, that is, the execution of the special symbol lottery. In order to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable due to the occurrence of a state in which a new execution right cannot be memorized even though the opportunity to acquire the right has been established, a short period of time is set. By facilitating the selection of special symbol variations, the number of special symbol lotteries that can be executed per unit time is increased.

It should be noted that even in a state in which the normal symbol low probability state is set, that is, in a state in which it is difficult to enter the ball into the second ball entrance 640, it is easy to select a short variation time as the variation time of the special symbol variation. If it is stored, the special symbol variation is likely to end in a state in which the right to execute the special symbol lottery has not been obtained (not stored), and the player's motivation to play is reduced. In this embodiment, the state in which the high-probability state of the normal design is set makes it easier to execute the special design variation with a shorter variation time than the state in which the low-probability state of the normal design is set. By constructing in this way, it is possible to easily increase the number of special symbol lotteries that can be executed per unit time, and the period in which special symbol variations are not executed becomes unnecessarily long, thereby increasing the willingness of the player to play. It is possible to suppress the decrease.

In addition, in the present embodiment, in the state where the high probability state of normal symbols is set, when a predetermined period (a period in which the special symbol variation is executed 80 times) has passed after the jackpot game ends, the predetermined It is configured such that a shorter variation time is more likely to be selected than when the period has not elapsed. By configuring in this way, when the high probability state (time reduction state, variable probability state) of normal symbols is set after the end of the jackpot game, the special symbol variation for a short time is executed immediately after the end of the jackpot game. It is possible to prevent a player from being given an excessive privilege (prize ball) due to execution of a jackpot game a plurality of times in a short period of time.

Further, in this embodiment, when a game state (probability variable state) advantageous to the player is set, the pachinko machine 10 is configured with a game specification in which the probability variable state continues until the next jackpot game is executed. Therefore, when the variable probability state is set, it is determined that the high probability state of the special symbol continues until the jackpot is won. In this state, if the period during which the special symbol lottery does not win the jackpot becomes longer, the player is forced to waste his or her time playing the game, and the player's motivation to play decreases. .

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, when the special symbol lottery is executed 80 times after the variable probability state is set, that is, without winning the jackpot in the special symbol lottery executed during the variable probability state, the predetermined period is When it has passed, it is shorter as the fluctuation time of the special symbol variation than the period before the predetermined period has passed (the period from when the probability variation state is set until the special symbol lottery is executed 80 times). It is configured so that the variable time can be easily selected. By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent the variable probability state, which is a game state advantageous to the player, from unnecessarily continuing for a long time.

Figure 456 (a) shows an example of a display screen displayed during a high-speed fluctuation period set when a predetermined period (a period in which a special symbol lottery is executed 80 times) has passed since the variable probability state is set. It is a diagram. As shown in FIG. 456(a), in the display area HR1, "high speed fluctuation" is displayed as a guidance mode for indicating that it is during the high speed fluctuation period in which a short fluctuation time is likely to be selected as the fluctuation time of the special symbol fluctuation. Characters are displayed as telops. Then, in the small area Ds2 of the sub-display area Ds, a display mode is displayed in which the character J0 is uttering the phrase "speed up" as a mode for indicating that the special symbol variation will be a short variation. By informing the player of the setting of the high-speed fluctuation period in this manner, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the fluctuation time of the special symbol fluctuation suddenly shortens and the player is puzzled.

In the diagram shown in FIG. 456 (a), the game that the high-speed fluctuation period is set in the state in which the high-speed fluctuation period is set (state in which the 81st special symbol fluctuation is started after setting the probability variation state) Although the display screen for notifying the player is shown, the timing of notifying the player of the information regarding the transition to the high-speed fluctuation period is not limited to this, for example, the 75th special symbol fluctuation after setting the probability variation state When it is started, that is, at a timing a predetermined period before the transition to the high-speed fluctuation period (the high-speed fluctuation period is set), the player is notified in advance that the high-speed fluctuation period will soon begin. It can be configured as follows. By configuring in this way, the player can grasp in advance that the high-speed fluctuation period will be entered, so that the fluctuation time of the special symbol fluctuation is suddenly shortened and the player is puzzled. can be suppressed.

In addition, when using a prior notification configuration that can notify the player in advance that the transition to the high-speed fluctuation period is possible, for example, prefetching the special figure hold and transitioning to the high-speed fluctuation period based on the prefetch result It is preferable to configure so that advance notification is executed when it is decided that Specifically, it determines that the condition for transition to the high-speed fluctuation period (execution of 80 times special symbol lottery) is established based on the prefetch result of the special figure reservation, and when the condition for transition to the high-speed fluctuation period is established In the case of preliminary determination (when it is determined in advance that all the results of the special symbol lottery executed until the transition condition is established are out), the transition to the high-speed fluctuation period may be notified.

By configuring in this way, the occurrence of a situation in which the high-speed fluctuation period is not set (a situation in which a jackpot is won) occurs although the player is notified (advance notification) that the transition to the high-speed fluctuation period is possible. can be suppressed.

In addition, in this embodiment, during the high-speed fluctuation period, it is configured to be able to set a shorter fluctuation time (for example, 1.5 seconds to 12 seconds) than the other periods, and the result of the corresponding special symbol lottery and the acquired It is configured such that different fluctuation times are selected according to the type of fluctuation pattern. By constructing in this way, it is possible to execute a variation performance (variation performance corresponding to the variation time) with different hit expectations even for the special symbol variation executed during the high-speed variation period.

Here, for example, the first special symbol variation executed after a high-speed variation period is set in which a short-time (for example, variation time 1.5 seconds) variation pattern is likely to be selected as a special symbol variation Other than a short time When a fluctuation pattern (for example, a fluctuation time of 6 seconds) is selected, the state in which the display screen shown in FIG. , a situation occurs in which the high-speed variation (1.5 second variation) is not executed.

In other words, in the present embodiment, even during the high-speed fluctuation period, in order to execute a fluctuation effect that makes the player expect a big win according to the selected fluctuation pattern, fluctuation times of different lengths (for example, , 6 seconds or 12 seconds) is selectable, the situation described above (a situation in which the high-speed fluctuation (1.5-second fluctuation) is not executed in the state in which the player is notified that the transition to the high-speed fluctuation period has occurred) ) can occur. In this case, the pachinko machine 10 may be out of order because the special symbol high-speed variation is not performed despite the notification that the special symbol high-speed variation will be performed. Therefore, there is a problem that the player is distrusted and loses the desire to play the game.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, when the first special symbol variation is executed after the high-speed variation period is set, the variation pattern of the special symbol variation can be discriminated, and based on the discrimination result. The timing of notifying that the high-speed fluctuation period has been set (shifted to the high-speed fluctuation period) is made different. Specifically, when the first special symbol variation after setting the high-speed variation period is not a high-speed variation (1.5 second variation), the setting of the high-speed variation period is not notified. ing.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to suppress the problem caused by not executing the high-speed fluctuation of the special symbols despite the notification that the high-speed fluctuation period has been set.

In addition, in the present embodiment, when a big win is won in the first special symbol lottery after the high-speed change period is set, that is, when the first special symbol change is a big win change, the change of the big win change. Using time (for example, 12 seconds), it is configured to execute a plurality of special symbol variations (variation effect) in a pseudo manner. Specifically, it is constructed such that after executing a pseudo high-speed variation (1.5 seconds) four times with respect to a special symbol variation for 12 seconds, a jackpot variation for 6 seconds is performed.

By configuring in this way, even when a jackpot is won in the first special symbol lottery after the high-speed fluctuation period is set, multiple times (four times) on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. After the pseudo fast variation is performed, the pseudo jackpot variation (6 seconds) will be performed. Therefore, it is possible to inform the player in an easy-to-understand manner that the high-speed fluctuation period has been set, and to make the player think that the high-speed fluctuation of the special symbol is executed during the high-speed fluctuation period.

Here, with reference to FIG. 456(b), the display contents displayed when the first special symbol fluctuation after the high speed fluctuation period is set is other than the high speed fluctuation (1.5 seconds) will be explained. do. Figure 456 (b), in the 81st special symbol variation (high-speed variation period is set special symbol variation) in the probability variation state, high-speed variation (1.5 seconds) other than the variation time (6 seconds) is selected FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of a display screen displayed when

As shown in FIG. 456(b), when the special symbol variation executed first after the high-speed variation period is set is not high-speed variation (1.5 second variation), the high-speed variation period is set. Instead of the display mode (see FIG. 456(a)) for notifying the player of the high-speed fluctuation period, "Preparing for high-speed fluctuation" is displayed in the display area HR1 as a guidance mode for guiding the player that the high-speed fluctuation period will be set soon. is displayed as a telop.

In this way, even when the transition to the high-speed fluctuation period has actually started, the high-speed fluctuation period is set by displaying "preparing for the high-speed fluctuation" until the high-speed fluctuation is executed for the first time. It is possible to suppress the problem caused by the high-speed variation of the special symbol not being executed in spite of the notification. Note that the guidance mode shown in FIG. 456(b) may be configured to be displayed from a time point before the high-speed fluctuation period is actually set.

Furthermore, the situation shown in FIG. 456(b) is a situation that occurs only when a variation pattern other than high-speed variation is set in the first special symbol variation after the high-speed variation period is set. When a situation occurs (when a telop display of "preparing for high speed fluctuation" is being executed), the setting suggesting effect may be executed more easily than during other high speed fluctuation periods. In this way, when a variation pattern other than a specific variation pattern is selected in a specific period in which a specific variation pattern is likely to be selected, a benefit that is more likely to be given to the player than when the specific variation pattern is selected. By providing , it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable regardless of which variation pattern is selected.

Next, with reference to FIG. 457, the contents of the effect executed when the first special symbol lottery wins the jackpot after the high-speed fluctuation period is set will be described. Figure 457 (a) is the 81st special symbol variation (high-speed variation period is set special symbol variation) in the probability variation state, pseudo high-speed variation that is executed when the jackpot variation (12 seconds) is selected It is a diagram showing an example of the display screen of the effect (1.5 seconds), FIG. 457 (b) shows an example of the display screen of the pseudo hit fluctuation effect (6 seconds) executed after the end of the pseudo high speed fluctuation It is a diagram.

As shown in FIG. 457(a), when the first special symbol variation after the high-speed variation period is set is a jackpot variation with a variation time of 12 seconds, the pseudo high-speed variation effect of 1.5 seconds is 4. After being executed twice, a pseudo-performing variation effect of 6 seconds is executed. In other words, the pseudo variation is made to make the player think that the pseudo variation of 1.5 seconds is performed four times and the pseudo variation of 6 seconds is performed once during the period in which the special symbol variation of 12 seconds is performed once. It is configured so that the production is executed.

Therefore, as shown in FIG. 457(a), the characters "high-speed fluctuation" are telop-displayed in the display area HR1 of the main display area Dm in the same manner as in FIG. 456(a). Then, after 1.5 seconds have elapsed, the third symbol variation is pseudo-stop displayed (in the figure, the third symbol is displayed with wavy lines on the left and right sides). In other words, it is the same as the case where the high-speed fluctuation of 1.5 seconds is actually executed, except that the stop display mode of the third symbol is slightly different (to the extent that it is difficult for the player to easily distinguish). is executed.

In this embodiment, if the third symbol is completely stopped and displayed while the actual special symbol variation is not stopped and displayed, the player may be confused. However, it is not limited to this, and may be configured to display a stop display mode in which the third symbol is completely stopped at the stop timing of the pseudo high-speed fluctuation effect, and in this case, the main display area. Instead of the third pattern (the pattern that is displayed in a variable manner in response to the fluctuation of the special pattern) as the pattern that is fluctuating near the center of Dm, a production pattern for production is used, and the actual third pattern is used. The symbols may be variably displayed in different areas (for example, areas other than the display surface of the third symbol display device 81).

Then, when the pseudo high-speed fluctuation effect (four times) ends, next, as shown in FIG. 457(b), the pseudo winning fluctuation effect for 6 seconds is executed. Therefore, a high-speed fluctuation period is set for the player because it is possible to execute five pseudo-variation productions in a period in which only one special symbol fluctuation is actually executed. In this case, it is possible to reliably execute a high-speed fluctuation effect (pseudo high-speed fluctuation effect). In addition, since the pseudo high-speed fluctuation is executed four times over 6 seconds, it is possible to secure time for the player to recognize the characters "high-speed fluctuation" displayed in the display area HR1.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 457, in this embodiment, the pseudo high-speed fluctuation effect is configured to be executed four times, but the number of times the pseudo high-speed fluctuation effect is executed is not limited to this. The pseudo high-speed variation effect may be executed three times or less or more than four times. In addition, when a plurality of fluctuation times (for example, 15 seconds, 20 seconds) are configured to be selectable as fluctuation patterns other than high-speed fluctuation, according to the length of the fluctuation time corresponding to the selected fluctuation pattern It is preferable to configure so as to determine the number of executions of the pseudo high-speed fluctuation performance and the content of the performance.

Next, with reference to FIG. 458, the flow of effects executed when the high-speed fluctuation period is set in this embodiment will be described. Figure 458 (a-1) is a diagram showing the relationship between the number of special symbol fluctuations (the number of times of special symbol lottery) and the selected fluctuation time when the variable probability state is set after the end of the jackpot game, FIG. 458(a-2) is a diagram showing a case where high-speed fluctuation (1.5 seconds) is executed during the high-speed fluctuation period, and FIG. FIG. 4 is a diagram showing mode transitions; Figure 458 (b-1) is a diagram showing the relationship between the number of special symbol fluctuations (the number of times of special symbol lottery) and the selected fluctuation time when the variable probability state is set after the end of the jackpot game, FIG. 458(b-2) is set in the situation shown in FIG. 458(b-1). It is the figure which showed transition of production|presentation mode. Figure 458 (c-1) is a diagram showing the relationship between the number of special symbol fluctuations (the number of times of special symbol lottery) and the selected fluctuation time when the variable probability state is set after the end of the jackpot game, FIG. 458(c-2) shows the effect set in the situation shown in FIG. 458(c-1). FIG. 4 is a diagram showing mode transitions;

As shown in FIG. 458 (a-1), in this embodiment, the period from when the probability variation state is set until the special symbol variation is executed 80 times (probability variation first period), and the special symbol variation after 81 times is executed (probability variation 2nd period), and the variation pattern table referred to when selecting the variation pattern of the special symbol variation is configured to be different, and in the probability variation 1st period, the normal state is set, but the variation pattern table that is likely to be selected for a relatively longer variation time than during the probability variation second period described later is referred to, and in the probability variation second period, the probability variation first It is configured so that a variation pattern table in which a variation time shorter than the period is likely to be selected is referred to. Details of the fluctuation pattern table referred to in each period will be described later with reference to FIG.

That is, the probability variation first period until the predetermined period has elapsed after the probability variation state is set, so that the special symbol variation is executed in a relatively longer variation time than the probability variation second period after the predetermined period has elapsed Configure. By constructing in this way, the period between big winning games can be lengthened compared to the case where the same variation time as the variable probability second period is selected immediately after the variable probability state is set after the end of the big winning game. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from receiving an excessive amount of benefits (prize balls) in a short period of time by executing the jackpot game a plurality of times in a short period of time. In other words, it is possible to prevent the game situation (probability variable state) advantageous to the player from ending in a short period of time.

As shown in Figure 458 (a-2), when the high-speed variation (1.5 seconds) is executed in the probability variation second period (special symbol variation period after the 81st time), the 81st special symbol variation A guidance mode (see FIG. 456(a)) for informing the player that the high-speed fluctuation period is set is displayed at the start timing of . Since this high-speed variation period is set until the special symbol variation is executed 1000 times, the special symbol variation is substantially changed at high speed until the next big win is won. Therefore, in spite of the fact that the variable probability state, which is a state of high probability of special symbols, is set, per unit time the player who has executed the special symbol lottery 80 times or more without winning the jackpot in the special symbol lottery. Since the number of special symbol lotteries can be increased, it is possible to suppress the player's desire to play.

In addition, FIG. 458 (b-1) shows the first special symbol variation in the probability variation second period (the first special symbol variation in the high-speed variation period), that is, the variation pattern of the 81st rotation special symbol variation is the variation time 6 It shows a pattern in which a high-speed variation (1.5 seconds) is executed at the 82nd rotation.

In this case, as shown in FIG. 458 (b-2), a guidance mode for informing the player that the high speed fluctuation period is set at the special symbol fluctuation start timing of the 81st rotation (see FIG. 456 (a) ) is displayed, the high-speed fluctuation period is set and the high-speed fluctuation period is actually set. is executed (period until the 82nd special symbol fluctuation is executed), preparation for guiding the player that a high-speed fluctuation period will soon be set (shift to a high-speed fluctuation period) A pre-guidance mode (see FIG. 456(b)) is displayed as notification. Then, the guidance mode for informing the player that the high-speed fluctuation period is set at the 82nd special symbol fluctuation start timing, that is, the timing at which the high-speed fluctuation is first executed after the high-speed fluctuation period is set. (See FIG. 456(a)) is displayed.

As a result, the notification of entry into the high-speed fluctuation period is executed in accordance with the timing at which the high-speed fluctuation is actually executed, so that the player can be notified in an easy-to-understand manner. In this embodiment, the period from when the high-speed fluctuation period is set to when the high-speed fluctuation is actually executed is used to notify the preparation, so that the high-speed fluctuation is suddenly executed for the player. However, without being limited to this, the period from when the high-speed fluctuation period is set until the high-speed fluctuation is actually executed is , It may be configured to execute the same variable performance as the probability variable first period. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand from which timing the rush notification is executed to the high-speed fluctuation period.

Next, FIG. 458 (C-1) is the first special symbol variation in the probability variation second period (the first special symbol variation in the high-speed variation period), that is, the variation pattern of the 81st rotation special symbol variation is the variation time It shows a pattern that is a 12 second jackpot variation.

In this case, as shown in FIG. 458 (c-2), a guidance mode for informing the player that the high-speed fluctuation period is set at the special symbol fluctuation start timing of the 81st rotation (see FIG. 456 (a) ) is displayed, and a pseudo-variation effect is executed using the special symbol variation period (12 seconds) of the 81st rotation. Specifically, the first six seconds are used to simulate a high-speed variation effect (see FIG. 457 (a)) four times, and the second half is used to simulate a jackpot variation effect (see FIG. 457 (b )). In other words, a pseudo-variation effect is executed as if four high-speed fluctuations (1.5 seconds) and one big hit fluctuation (6 seconds) were executed during the fluctuation period of one special symbol fluctuation of 12 seconds. , when the 12-second special symbol variation (jackpot variation) is stopped and displayed, the jackpot game is executed.

By configuring in this way, even if the first special symbol variation in the probability variation second period is a big hit variation, the player can experience the variation performance (high-speed variation performance) in the probability variation second period. You can increase the effect.

In addition, in this embodiment, as described above based on the variation pattern of the first special symbol variation of the probability variation second period, it is configured to vary the rush notification timing of the high-speed variation period, but other configurations May be used, for example, in addition to the first special symbol variation (81st special symbol variation) of the probability variation second period, as a result of pre-discrimination, the 82nd special symbol variation is also a deviation variation with a variation time of 6 seconds When it is determined that the 81st special symbol variation and the 82nd special symbol variation are added together for 12 seconds, the pseudo high-speed variation effect is executed 8 times, and the 81st special symbol It may be configured to execute a guidance notification (see FIG. 456(a)) for guiding the player that the high-speed fluctuation period has entered at the start timing of the symbol fluctuation.

Also, it may be configured to execute guidance notification at a specific timing during the fluctuation period of the first special symbol variation (81st special symbol variation) of the probability variation second period, for example, the 81st special symbol variation When the fluctuation time is long (for example, 30 seconds), the same fluctuation performance as the probability variable first period is executed for the first 24 seconds, and the pseudo high-speed fluctuation performance is executed 4 times in the remaining 6 seconds. It may be constructed so as to execute guidance notification 24 seconds after the 81st special symbol variation is started. Since the number of times of the pseudo high-speed fluctuation production can be arbitrarily set by configuring the guidance notification to be executable at a specific timing during the special symbol fluctuation in this way, the pseudo high-speed fluctuation production will be executed unnecessarily. It can be suppressed.

In this embodiment, a configuration is used in which guidance notification is performed to guide the player that the high-speed fluctuation period has started when the variable probability second period is set. Guidance for notifying that a high-speed fluctuation period has entered at the start timing of the special pattern fluctuation when a short fluctuation time is selected at the end of the probability variation 1st period (79th or 80th special pattern fluctuation) It may be configured to execute notification.

In this way, it is not the timing when the variation pattern table referred to when actually selecting the variation pattern is switched, but the first variation time is likely to be selected as the variation time of the special symbol variation. The second variable time or the variable time that is closer to the second variable time than the first variable time is selected in a state where the condition that facilitates the selection of the second variable time is likely to be established or is established. By informing the player that the second fluctuation time has entered into a period in which the second fluctuation time is likely to be selected based on the above, the content of the notice matches the actual special symbol fluctuation time, and the performance can be executed without causing the player to feel uncomfortable. can.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, when the timing of executing the guidance notification for guiding the player that the high-speed fluctuation mode has been set in the high-speed fluctuation mode is delayed, the high-speed fluctuation mode will soon be set. However, it is not limited to this, and guidance is provided to inform the player that the high-speed fluctuation mode has entered at the timing when the high-speed fluctuation mode is set. In the case where the notification is executed, the preparatory notification may be executed before the high-speed fluctuation mode is set.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 459 to 461, the contents of the effect during the jackpot game executed by the pachinko machine 10 in this embodiment will be described. In this embodiment, as the jackpot game effect executed during the jackpot game, a basic effect for showing the progress of the jackpot game to the player is executed. The contents of this basic effect will be described later with reference to FIG. 459(a). Furthermore, when the number of prize balls paid out reaches a predetermined number (in units of 200) during the advantageous period in which the state advantageous to the player (time saving state, variable probability state, jackpot game) continues. , a predetermined number of acquisition performance is executed as a performance for congratulating the player. The content of this predetermined number acquisition effect will be described later with reference to FIG. 459(b). Furthermore, when the predetermined number acquisition performance is executed, an additional privilege performance is executed for giving an additional privilege under a prescribed condition (when the relationship between the number of rounds and the number of prize balls satisfies a specific condition). The contents of this additional privilege effect will be described later with reference to FIG. In addition, on the end screen (ending screen) of the jackpot game, the game state set after the jackpot game ends and the end screen effect suggesting the set values are executed. This end screen effect is configured to vary the effect mode according to the timing (whether or not it overlaps with the period effect) at which the jackpot game is executed, and for details, see FIG. will be described later.

First, with reference to FIG. 459(a), the contents of the basic performance during the jackpot game will be described. FIG. 459(a) is a diagram showing an example of the display screen displayed during the jackpot game. As shown in FIG. 459(a), during the jackpot game, a display area HR11 and a display area HR12 are formed on the upper left side of the main display area Dm. The display area HR11 is a display area for indicating the current number of rounds, and displays the current number of rounds ("2" is displayed in the figure) as a mode of informing the number of rounds. That is, the display screen shown in FIG. 459(a) is a display screen in a state where the second round of the jackpot game is being executed. In this embodiment, only the current number of rounds is displayed as the number of rounds notification mode.

Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand how many rounds the current jackpot game will continue. The number of rounds played (the number of round games) may also be configured to be able to be notified. As a result, it is possible to inform the player of how long the big winning game will continue in an easy-to-understand manner, so that the player can play the big winning game with peace of mind. In this case, a part (for example, 5 rounds) of the maximum number of rounds (for example, 10 rounds) executed in this jackpot game is displayed as the maximum number of rounds, and the update condition ( For example, the maximum number of rounds may be updated and displayed to 10 rounds based on the fact that the update condition that is satisfied when the fourth round ends. By configuring in this way, it is possible to execute an unexpected production for the player.

The display area HR12 is a display area for indicating the number of prize balls obtained during the current jackpot game, and is used as the mode for notifying the number of prize balls obtained during the jackpot game. "255 GET") is displayed. That is, the display screen shown in FIG. 459(a) is in the middle of the second round, and is a display screen in a state in which 255 prize balls have been paid out during the current jackpot game. Also in this display area HR12, the estimated total number of prize balls assumed in the current jackpot game, that is, the maximum number of rounds executed in the current jackpot game, and the maximum number of rounds that can be obtained in one round game The total number of prize balls calculated based on the number of prize balls may be displayed on the display screen in advance. By configuring in this way, it is possible to grasp in advance the number of prize balls that can be obtained in this jackpot game, and that the number of prize balls actually obtained is larger or smaller than the assumed number of prize balls. It becomes possible for the player to analyze whether. Therefore, when the number of prize balls actually obtained is larger than the number of prize balls assumed, the pachinko machine 10 is considered to be more advantageous to the player, and the player can be motivated to play the game. . Also, when the expected number of prize balls is larger than the number of actually won prize balls, the player can consider future games while considering moving to another pachinko machine 10.例文帳に追加

A display area HR13 is formed on the upper right side of the main display area Dm, and displays the combination of the third symbols stopped when the jackpot is won. That is, the display area HR13 displays the history of the jackpot symbols ("666" is displayed in the figure). A display area HR14 and a display area HR15 are formed below the display area HR13, and "960" is displayed in the display area HR14 as a total winning ball notification mode indicating the total amount of winning balls paid out during the advantageous period. is displayed. The total number of won prize balls indicates the total number of prize balls paid out from the payout control device 111 during an advantageous period in which a state advantageous to the player (time saving state, variable probability state, during jackpot game) continues. For example, when a variable probability state is set after the end of the jackpot game (first time), a jackpot is won during the variable probability state, and the jackpot game (second time) is executed again, the second jackpot game As the total won prize ball notification mode displayed inside, the number of prize balls paid out in the first jackpot game, the number of prize balls paid out during the variable probability state, and the number of prize balls paid out during the second jackpot game Information indicating the total value with the number of awarded balls is displayed.

By configuring in this way, when the jackpot game is executed a plurality of times during the advantageous period, the number of prize balls paid out in the jackpot game for the plurality of times is summed up and displayed. It is possible to display the number of prize balls that cannot be acquired in the big winning game. Therefore, by displaying a large number of winning balls, it is possible to provide the player who has continued the advantageous period for a long time with a sense of superiority.

In this embodiment, all the number of prize balls paid out during the advantageous period, that is, the ball to the general ball entrance 63, the first ball entrance 64, the second ball entrance 640, etc. during the variable probability state or the time saving state Since the total number of winning balls is displayed by adding the number of winning balls paid out based on the entry of the ball, if the variable state has passed for a long time without winning the jackpot Since the total number of winning prize balls can be increased at the same time, it is possible to suppress the decrease in the willingness to play of a player who continues for a long period of time without winning a jackpot in a special pattern lottery executed during the variable probability state.例文帳に追加be able to.

The number of prize balls to be added to the total number of won prize balls may be the number of prize balls paid out during the jackpot game executed during the advantageous period. As a result, the player can easily grasp the total value of the number of prize balls paid out during the jackpot game.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the number of prize balls actually paid out by the payout control device 111 is configured to be displayable. The number of prize balls, that is, the number of prize balls may be added based on the output of a payout instruction (payout command) for paying out the prize balls from the main control device 110 to the payout control device 111. good. In this case, compared to the case where the number of prize balls is added and displayed after the prize balls are actually paid out, after the payout condition of the prize balls is satisfied (detection that the ball has entered the ball entrance) Since it is possible to reduce the time lag until the number of prize balls is added and displayed, it is possible to pay close attention to the flow of balls on the game board 13 (the state of balls entering (winning) each ball entrance (winning)). The total number of won prize balls can be added and displayed without giving a sense of incongruity to the player who is playing.

In addition, in this embodiment, the display based on the number of prize balls can be executed, but the present invention is not limited to this. The number of balls corresponding to the increment may be configured to be displayed. With this configuration, it is possible to inform the player of the amount of balls actually increased in an easy-to-understand manner.

Further, in the display area HR15, "2nd time" is displayed as the display mode of the number of consecutive wins for indicating the number of times the jackpot game is executed (the number of consecutive wins) during the advantageous period. In other words, FIG. 459(a) shows the display screen during the second (second consecutive chance) jackpot game during the advantage period.

In addition, in the present embodiment, all the number of jackpot games executed during the advantageous period are configured to be added and displayed as the number of consecutive wins. In a possible pachinko machine 10, only the number of executions of jackpot games (jackpot games of 5 or more rounds) in which the amount of privilege that can be given to the player is equal to or greater than a predetermined amount may be added and displayed. Moreover, it may be constructed such that information indicating the content of the executed jackpot game is added to the number of consecutive wins display mode and displayed.

As described above, the content of the basic effect (basic display) displayed on the display screen during the jackpot game has been described with reference to FIG. 459(a). During a period other than during the jackpot game, for example, during the advantageous period and during the period when the jackpot game is not executed (period in which the special symbol variation can be executed), among the elements of the basic performance described above, the total winning ball It may be configured to display a display mode related to information indicating a number.

Next, with reference to FIG. 459(b), the effect contents of the predetermined number win effect executed during the jackpot game will be described. In this embodiment, as the jackpot game effects executed during the jackpot game, the opening effects executed corresponding to the opening period of the jackpot game, the round effects executed corresponding to the round game period of the jackpot game, and the jackpot. and an ending effect executed corresponding to the ending period of the game.

The round game period, which is the period during which the round effect is executed, is the period during which the ball can be made to enter the specific winning port 65a of the variable winning device 65 during the jackpot game. In this embodiment, as part of the round effect executed during the round game period, a predetermined number of win effect is executed to congratulate the total number of prize balls acquired during the advantageous period reaching a predetermined number. configured as possible. Specifically, at the timing when the round game is started, the total number of won prize balls that have already been obtained is read, and it is determined whether the total number of won prize balls can reach a predetermined number during the round game to be executed this time. . Then, when it is determined that the predetermined number can be reached, the performance mode of the round performance corresponding to the predetermined number acquisition performance is determined. In this way, by determining the timing at which the total number of acquired prize balls reaches the predetermined number before the total number of acquired prize balls actually reaches the predetermined number, It becomes possible to specify whether or not it is necessary to execute the predetermined number of acquisition effects.

Therefore, when determining the effect mode of the round effect, it is possible to easily determine the effect mode corresponding to the presence or absence of the predetermined number of winning effects.

As shown in FIG. 459(b), when the predetermined number of acquisition effects are executed, an effect mode is displayed in which a character 810 resembling a rabbit appears holding a placard 811 in approximately the center of the main display area Dm. . Then, when the total number of won prize balls reaches a predetermined number (1000 in the drawing), a display screen is displayed on which the placard 811 is raised and "1000" is displayed.

In other words, in the round effect corresponding to the round game in which the predetermined number of acquisition effects can be executed, the effect in which the character 810 appears is executed in advance, so that the predetermined number of acquisition effects ("1000") can be obtained without making the player feel uncomfortable. ) can be executed. In addition, since it is possible to specify a round game in which the predetermined number of win effect cannot be executed, for example, the character 810 appears as a round effect effect mode corresponding to the round game in which the predetermined number of win effect cannot be executed. Since it is possible to determine the mode of presentation not to be performed, the presentation effect can be enhanced by increasing the variations of the round presentation.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, an additional benefit effect is executed in which an additional benefit is given according to the combination of the total number of won prize balls displayed in the predetermined number win effect and the number of rounds in which the predetermined number win effect is executed. According to the example shown in FIG. 459(b), the combination of the number of rounds of "3" and the total number of won prize balls of "1000" satisfies the conditions for executing the additional privilege effect. , a treasure bag 811a is displayed in conjunction with the placard 811 to suggest that the additional privilege effect will be executed.

After that, as shown in FIG. 460(a), an additional privilege effect is executed in which a ball 812 marked with the character "Tak" appears as an additional privilege mode for indicating an additional privilege as the contents of the treasure bag 811a. The additional privilege mode indicated by the ball 812 to which the character "definite" is added indicates that the probability variable state, which is an advantageous game state advantageous to the player, is set after the end of the big winning game this time. It should be noted that, in this embodiment, various types of benefits can be given to the player as additional benefit aspects, and the details thereof will be described later with reference to FIG. 460(b).

In this way, by determining whether or not to give an additional privilege to the player according to the combination of the number of rounds of the jackpot game and the total number of won prize balls, the additional privilege game is executed for the player. Since it is possible to make it difficult to understand the timing of winning, it is possible to make the player expect that the additional bonus effect will be executed for each round effect during the jackpot game.

In addition, in this embodiment, since it is configured to be able to execute the additional privilege effect during the round effect in which at least the predetermined number of acquisition effects are executed, it is possible to make the player win many balls during the jackpot game. It is possible to play the game voluntarily. Furthermore, in this embodiment, the number of prize balls paid out when the ball is entered into each ball entrance in a state where the variable probability state or the time saving state is set as the total number of prize balls is also added. Therefore, for example, until the jackpot game is executed (until the jackpot is won in the special symbol lottery), it is possible to adjust the total number of winning prize balls.

Therefore, conventionally, the player can play the game (ball Even in a period during which it is easy to temporarily suspend the shooting of the ball, the game can be easily continued for the purpose of adjusting the total number of winning balls, and the operation of the game can be improved.

Also, in this case, it is preferable to construct a guidance effect capable of guiding the player to the situation in which the additional privilege effect is likely to be executed during the jackpot game before the jackpot game is executed. The total number of acquired prize balls is displayed during the special pattern variation period in the time saving state, and when the total number of acquired prize balls at the timing of starting the jackpot game is within a specific range, the additional privilege performance is easily executed. It is preferable to configure so as to inform the player of what will happen. More specifically, when the timing at which the total number of winning prize balls reaches 1000 is the first round of the jackpot game, the jackpot game is executed in the case where it is specified that the additional privilege effect is executed. During the special symbol fluctuation period, which is before the event, the jackpot game is executed in the range of "910 to 990" in the total number of winning balls, so that the additional privilege effect is easily executed. should be configured to By configuring in this manner, the player can be made to play a game for increasing the total number of won winning balls using the period until the start of the jackpot game.

It should be noted that guidance notification for facilitating the execution of the above-described additional privilege effect may be executed during the jackpot game. By configuring in this way, the ball is fed into the specific winning opening 65a of the variable winning device 65 during the round game so as to create a combination of the number of rounds in which the additional privilege effect is executed and the total number of won winning balls. It is possible to provide a novel game property in which a game is played so as not to win a prize (no more prize balls are paid out). In addition, the operation of the game can be improved by performing the game for increasing the number of prize balls during the interval period set between the round games.

Here, the types of benefits given to the player during the additional benefit presentation will be described with reference to FIG. 460(b). In the display screen shown in FIG. 460 (a) described above, a ball 812 with the character "positive" is displayed as an additional privilege mode, and a mode ( In addition, when the ball 812 with the character "10" is displayed, the number of round games to be executed during the current jackpot game is displayed. A mode indicating that the number of rounds is "10 rounds", which is the most advantageous number of rounds (round promotion mode), or when a ball 812 with the characters "high" is displayed, set to the pachinko machine 10 When a mode (high setting notification mode) indicating that the currently set value is a set value (high setting) advantageous to the player, or when the ball 812 with the character "Ren" is displayed, A mode (reservation series mode) indicating that information indicating that the lottery result is a big hit is included in the reservation memory (special symbol reservation) of the acquired special pattern can be set.

In this way, a plurality of types can be set as the additional privilege mode, thereby suppressing the occurrence of a situation in which there is no privilege to be given to the player even though the conditions for executing the additional privilege performance are established. can do. In addition, in the present embodiment, as an additional privilege given to the player when the additional privilege effect is executed, only a privilege for indicating a game situation advantageous to the player is targeted, but it is not limited to this. For example, a privilege image that can be provided to the player can be given only when an additional privilege effect is executed, or a right for switching the effect mode of the pachinko machine 10 can be given. may be configured. Further, it may be configured such that information indicating a game situation that is disadvantageous to the player can be provided as an additional privilege.

Next, with reference to FIG. 461, the contents of the end screen effect displayed on the end screen (ending screen) of the jackpot game will be described. FIG. 461(a) is a diagram showing an example of the end screen effect when the end screen of the jackpot game is displayed during the SP time (during the SP time period), and FIG. 461(b) is during the jackpot game. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of an end screen effect when the SP time (SP time period) ends at 10:00.

In the present embodiment, as described above, the more the special symbol lottery (special symbol fluctuation) is executed during the SP time period, the easier it is to execute the setting suggestion effect. That is, when the jackpot game is executed during the SP time period, the special symbol lottery (special symbol variation) is difficult to execute than when the jackpot game is not executed during the SP time period, so the SP time It becomes difficult to execute the setting suggestion effect during the period.

In this case, even if a jackpot game is executed in a game situation that is advantageous to the player, if the execution period of the jackpot game overlaps with the SP time period, a situation disadvantageous to the player (setting suggestion effect is difficult to execute), there is a problem that the player's desire to play is reduced. In particular, when a jackpot game with a large number of rounds, which is usually advantageous to the player, is executed, the SP time period and the jackpot game period are likely to overlap because the jackpot game period is longer. Therefore, since the above-mentioned problems are likely to occur, among the jackpot games, when the jackpot game (jackpot game with a large number of rounds) that is more advantageous to the player is executed, the other jackpot games (the number of rounds are compared) There is a risk that a new problem that has not existed in the past will occur in which the player's motivation to play is lowered more than when a jackpot game with a small number of targets is executed.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the setting suggesting effect is configured to be executable as the end screen effect executed at the end of the jackpot game, and furthermore, the end screen is configured according to the overlap situation between the jackpot game period and the SP time period. It is configured such that the mode of effect of setting suggestion effect executed as effect can be varied.

Specifically, when the situation is such that the setting suggestion effect is difficult to be executed during the SP time period due to the execution of the jackpot game (the number of executions of the special symbol variation is reduced), it is another situation. The effect mode of the setting suggesting effect (end screen setting suggesting effect) executed as the end screen effect is more likely to be an effect mode advantageous to the player than in the case. More specifically, as an effect mode of the end screen setting suggesting effect, a plurality of setting suggesting effects are overlapped and easily executed.

By constructing in this way, even when the big winning game is executed at the timing when the setting suggesting performance is difficult to be executed during the SP time period, the setting suggesting performance is complemented by the end screen performance of the big winning game. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of the problem that the player's desire to play is reduced due to the execution of the big winning game.

When the end screen presentation of the jackpot game is executed, the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 suggests a game state notification mode for notifying the player of the game state set after the winning game is completed, and a set value. In the diagram shown in FIG. 461(a), the game state notification mode indicates that the probability variable state is set after the jackpot game ends. A comment of "one more time" is displayed as a mode for notifying the user. That is, the game state notification mode is displayed for informing the player that the high probability state of the special symbol is set until the big winning game is executed again.

In addition, as the game state notification mode, when indicating that the time saving state (time saving 100 times) is set after the end of the jackpot game, a comment of "chance 100 times" is displayed. In other words, in order to inform the player that the game state (time saving state) is more advantageous to the player than the normal state, and that the period during which the game state continues is 100 times (100 special figure fluctuations). mode is displayed. In this way, the game state set after the end of the jackpot game is compared with the most disadvantageous game state (normal state) for the player, and the degree of advantage is reported to the player, so that the game state set after the end of the jackpot game can be changed. It is possible to allow the player to predict in an easy-to-understand manner.

Here, even if "100 chances" is displayed as the game state notification mode displayed in the end screen effect, that is, even if the notification mode corresponding to the case where the time saving state is set is displayed, the notification target is It is preferable to leave the possibility of setting a game state (probability variable state) that is more advantageous to the player than the other game state. By configuring in this way, for the player who is displayed "chance 100 times" as the game state notification mode, until the end (end condition of the time saving state (when the special symbol fluctuation reaches 100 times Until the end condition) is satisfied, the game can be played with expectations that the variable probability state is set. In this case, it is preferable to notify the player that the actually set game state is not the time saving state but the variable probability state at the stage where the end condition of the time saving state can be satisfied. As a result, the game can be played while expecting that the variable probability state is set until the time saving state ends. It should be noted that when the variable probability state is set after the end of the jackpot game, if the notification mode corresponding to the time saving state is displayed as the game state notification mode, the actual game state is the variable probability state. It is preferable to construct the suggestive effect so that it can be executed within a period until the end condition of the time saving state is satisfied. As a result, the player playing the game expecting that the variable probability state is set will pay attention to the effect that is executed, so that the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

It should be noted that the frequency of displaying the notification mode corresponding to the game state different from the actually set game state may be configured to vary according to the setting value set in the pachinko machine 10. For example, When a setting value advantageous to the player (for example, setting 3) is set, the game state actually set is more different than when a setting value disadvantageous to the player (for example, setting 1) is set. is preferably configured so that the frequency of displaying notification modes corresponding to different game states is low. By configuring in this way, when the notification mode corresponding to the time saving state is displayed as the game state notification mode, the possibility that the time saving state is actually set is a set value (for example, setting 3) that is advantageous to the player. ) is set.

Therefore, after the notification mode corresponding to the time-saving state is displayed as the game state notification mode, the time-saving end condition is satisfied, and the game state shifts to the normal state. It is possible to increase the possibility that (for example, setting 3) is set. In this way, as a game executed in the pachinko machine 10, when a condition disadvantageous to the player (for example, the end of the time saving state) is established, information advantageous to the player (for example, high setting notification (suggestion)) can be easily provided, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of redundant situations disadvantageous to the player and a significant decrease in the player's willingness to play.

It should be noted that, without being limited to this, when a setting value disadvantageous to the player (for example, setting 1) is set rather than when a setting value advantageous to the player (for example, setting 3) is set In this case, it is preferable to reduce the frequency of displaying the notification mode corresponding to the game state different from the actually set game state. By configuring in this way, conditions advantageous to the player (for example, conditions for notifying that the variable probability state is set, conditions for executing high setting notification (suggestion)) can be executed in duplicate Therefore, for example, a more advantageous privilege can be given to a player for whom a high set value is set. Therefore, the player can be motivated to play the game while anticipating that many advantageous benefits will be given.

Returning to FIG. 461(b), the description is continued. When it is determined that the end period of the jackpot game has passed the SP time period, that is, during the jackpot game or before the jackpot game, the SP time period is set, and the timing of ending the SP period is during the jackpot game. In some cases, it is not possible (difficult) to execute the special symbol variation during the SP time period after the end of the jackpot game, so a plurality of setting suggestion effects are set during the end screen effect (Fig. 461 ( b) see).

<Regarding the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the twenty-seventh embodiment>
Next, referring to FIG. 462, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described. 462 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10. As shown in FIG.

The main controller 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer that is an arithmetic device. The MPU 201 includes a ROM 202 storing various control programs and fixed value data to be executed by the MPU 201, and a memory for temporarily storing various data when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 202. A RAM 203 and other various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission/reception circuit are incorporated. In the main controller 110, the MPU 201 performs main processing of the pachinko machine 10, such as the setting of the jackpot lottery, the display settings of the first symbol display devices 37a, 37b and the third symbol display device 81, and the lottery of the display results of the second symbol display device. to run.

In addition, various commands are transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sub-controller by the data transmission/reception circuit in order to instruct the sub-controller such as the payout controller 111 and the sound lamp controller 113 to operate. Such commands are sent in only one direction from the main controller 110 to the sub-controllers.

The RAM 203 stores various areas, counters, flags, contents of internal registers of the MPU 201, return destination addresses of control programs executed by the MPU 201, etc., and a stack area for storing various flags, counters, I/O, and the like. and a work area (work area) in which values are stored. The RAM 203 is configured to retain (back up) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply 115 even after the pachinko machine 10 is powered off, and all the data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. .

When the power is cut off due to power failure or the like, the RAM 203 stores the stack pointer and the values of each register at the time of the power cut (including the time of power failure; the same applies hereinafter). On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including when the power is turned on due to the cancellation of the power failure; the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power was turned off based on the information stored in the RAM 203 . Writing to the RAM 203 is executed by the main processing (see FIG. 501) when the power is turned off, and restoration of each value written in the RAM 203 is executed during the start-up processing (see FIG. 498) when the power is turned on. The NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 is configured to receive a power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when power is shut off due to a power failure or the like. , NMI interrupt processing (see FIG. 497) is immediately executed as power failure processing.

Here, with reference to FIG. 463, counters and the like provided in RAM 203 of main controller 110 will be described. These counters, etc. are the special symbol lottery, the normal symbol lottery, the setting of the display on the first symbol display device 37, the setting of the display on the second symbol display device 83, and the setting of the display on the third symbol display device 81. etc., it is used in the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 .

In order to select the special symbol lottery and the setting of the display of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, the special winning random number counter C1 used for the special symbol lottery and the special symbol jackpot type are selected. A special hit type counter C2 to be used, a stop type selection counter C3 for determining the stop type of special symbols (reach hit type, off other than reach (off length A, off short A), reach off type), variation pattern selection and an initial value random number counter CINI1 used for setting the initial value of the special winning random number counter C1. Also, a normal winning random number counter C4 is used for the lottery of normal symbols, and a normal initial value random number counter CINI2 is used for setting the initial value of the normal winning random number counter C4. Each of these counters is a loop counter that adds 1 to the previous value each time it is updated and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value.

Each counter is updated, for example, at intervals of 2 milliseconds, which is the execution interval of timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 487), and some counters are updated irregularly during the main processing (see FIG. 501). Then, the updated value is appropriately stored in a counter buffer set in a predetermined area of the RAM 203 . The RAM 203 stores a special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a consisting of four reserved areas (reserved first to fourth areas) for storing the reserved ball of the first special symbol and the reserved ball of the second special symbol. A special pattern 2 holding ball storage area 203b consisting of four holding areas (holding first to fourth areas) for holding is provided, and a special pattern holding common to the first special pattern and the second special pattern is provided. A ball execution area is provided. In each area of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a, a special winning random number counter C1, a special winning type counter C2, a stop type selection counter C3, and a variation type counter are provided in accordance with the timing of the ball entering the first ball entrance 64. Each value of CS1 is stored. Similarly, for each area of the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b, similar values are stored in accordance with the ball entry timing to the right second ball entrance 640r.

In addition, the RAM 203 is provided with a normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c consisting of one execution area and four reserved areas (first to fourth reserved areas). The value of the normal winning random number counter C4 is stored in accordance with the timing of passing through any of the second entrances (through gates) 67. FIG.

Each counter will be described in detail. The special hit random number counter C1 is incremented by 1 in order within a predetermined range (eg, 0 to 65535), and reaches 0 after reaching the maximum value (eg, 65535 in the case of a counter that can take a value of 0 to 65535). It is configured to return. In particular, when the special winning random number counter C1 makes one cycle, the value of the initial value random number counter CINI1 at that time is read as the initial value of the special winning random number counter C1.

The initial value random number counter CINI1 is configured as a loop counter that is updated within the same range as the special winning random number counter C1. That is, for example, if the special winning random number counter C1 is a loop counter that can take a value of 0-65535, the initial value random number counter CINI1 is also a loop counter that ranges from 0-65535. This initial value random number counter CINI1 is updated once each time the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 487) is executed, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main processing (see FIG. 501).

The value of the special winning random number counter C1 is, for example, periodically updated (once per timer interrupt processing in this embodiment), and is the timing at which the ball enters the first ball entrance 64 or the right second ball entrance 640r. is stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203. The value of the random number for the special symbol jackpot is set by the special symbol jackpot random number table 202a (see FIG. 465(a)) stored in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110, and the value of the special symbol jackpot random number counter C1. is equal to the value of the random number set by the special symbol jackpot random number table 202a, it is determined as a special symbol jackpot. In addition, this special symbol jackpot random number table 202a is for when the probability of special symbols is low (a period in which the probability of special symbols is low), and when the probability of winning a special symbol is high (special The number of random numbers that will be the big hits included in each type is set differently. In this way, by varying the number of random numbers that result in a big win, the probability of a big win is changed between when the probability of special symbols is low and when the probability of special symbols is high. The special symbol jackpot random number table 202a (see FIG. 465(a)) for special symbol high probability and the special symbol jackpot random number table 202a (see FIG. 465(a)) for special symbol low probability , are provided in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110 .

The special winning type counter C2 determines the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 when a special symbol jackpot is won, and is incremented one by one within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 99). , and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (for example, 99 in the case of a counter that can take values from 0 to 99). The value of the special winning type counter C2 is, for example, periodically updated (once per timer interrupt processing in this embodiment), and the ball enters the first ball entrance 64 or the right second ball entrance 640r. It is stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203 at the timing.

Here, if the value of the special winning random number counter C1 stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b is not a random number that becomes a special symbol jackpot, that is, the special symbol is out. If it is a random number, the display mode corresponding to the stop symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 37 will be the one when the special symbol is out.

On the other hand, if the value of the special winning random number counter C1 stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b is a random number for a special symbol jackpot, the first symbol display device 37 The display mode corresponding to the stop symbol displayed in , is the one at the time of the special symbol jackpot. In this case, the specific display mode at the time of the big hit is the display mode indicated by the value of the special winning type counter C2 stored in the same special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b. . In this embodiment, five types of jackpot types are set: "jackpot A1", "jackpot B1", "jackpot C1", "jackpot D1", and "jackpot E1". One of "jackpot A1", "jackpot B1", "jackpot C1", "jackpot D1" and "jackpot E1" is determined. Then, the display mode indicating the jackpot type is displayed on the first symbol display device 37 as a jackpot symbol. Details of the jackpot winning probability in the special symbol lottery of this embodiment will be described later with reference to the special symbol jackpot random number table 202a (Fig. 465(a)).

Further, the value of the special winning type counter C2 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured as a loop counter within the range of 0-99. Then, as shown in FIG. 466, in the jackpot type selection table 202d for determining the jackpot type, the same (common) contents are defined for the lottery for the first special symbol and the lottery for the second special symbol. there is That is, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, a special symbol lottery with the same degree of advantage to the player is executed when the first special symbol lottery is executed and when the second special symbol lottery is executed. It is configured so that By constructing in this way, even if any special symbol lottery is executed, there is no difference in the privilege (providing a big winning game) given to the player, so that the player can play the game with peace of mind. be able to.

In addition, without being limited to this, as the jackpot type selection table 202d, it is referred to corresponding to the special figure 1 jackpot type selection table 202d1 corresponding to the lottery of the first special symbol and the lottery of the second special symbol. A special figure 2 jackpot type selection table 202d2 is defined, and the jackpot types that can be selected in the first special pattern lottery and the second special pattern lottery are different, or the selection ratio is different, so that the first special pattern The lottery and the second special symbol lottery may be configured to have different degrees of advantage. In this case, when the normal state (low probability state of special symbols, low probability state of normal symbols) which is the initial state is set as the game state, the second special symbol lottery in which the execution opportunity is relatively difficult to be established is better. , the degree of advantage is preferably higher than that of the first special symbol lottery. As a result, for the player who is playing the game in the initial state, while aiming to set a different game state (a game state in which the execution opportunity of the second special symbol lottery is more likely to be established than the normal state) is set. can be made to play.

The fluctuation type counter CS1 is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 198 and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 198). Rough display modes such as so-called short time out, long time out, normal reach, and super reach are determined by the stop type selection counter C3 and the fluctuation type counter CS1 described above. Determination of the display mode is, specifically, determination of the variation time of the symbol variation. Based on the variation time determined by the stop type selection counter C3 and the variation type counter CS1, the reach type of the third symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 A pattern variation mode is determined. The value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is updated once each time the main process (see FIG. 501), which will be described later, is executed, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process. In addition, the variation pattern selection table 202b (see FIG. It is provided in the ROM 202 .

The normal hit random number counter C4 is configured as a loop counter that is incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 239, for example, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 239). Further, when the normal winning random number counter C4 completes one cycle, the value of the normal initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is read as the initial value of the normal winning random number counter C4. In this embodiment, the value of the normal hit random number counter C4 is updated, for example, periodically for each timer interrupt process, and it is detected that the ball has passed through either the left or right second ball entrance (through gate) 67. It is acquired at the same time and stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c of the RAM203.

Then, the value of the random number that is the normal winning pattern is set by the normal winning random number table 202c (see FIG. 465(b)) stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device, and the value of the normal winning random number counter C4 is If the value of the random number set by the normal winning random number table 202c matches, it is determined as a normal symbol winning. In addition, this normal winning random number table 202c (see FIG. 465(b)) is for when the probability of the normal design is low (the period when the normal design is in a normal state) and when the probability of winning the normal design is higher than that when the probability is low. It is divided into two types, one for high probability (a period in which normal symbols are in a time-saving state), and the number of random numbers that will be a big hit included in each is set differently. Further, as for the types of normal symbol wins, normal wins and long-time wins are set, and the values of the normal win random number counter C4 are set respectively.

Here, the normal winning of the normal symbol is in the normal game state (low probability game state), and in the jackpot game state, the operation of operating the electric accessory 640a to the open state with the opening time of 0.2 seconds is executed once. It is a hit. In addition, during the time saving period, during the probability variable period, the operation of opening the electric accessory 640a in the open state for 2 seconds is repeated twice. On the other hand, the long-time win is a win in which the action of opening the electric accessory 640a to the open state for 2 seconds is repeated twice regardless of the game state.

In the present embodiment, the opening operation of the electric accessory 640a that is executed in the probability variable period during the time saving in the normal winning and the opening operation in the long winning are set to be the same. may be opened. Specifically, for example, the open state operation may be performed once for three seconds. By constructing in this way, it is possible to enter the ball more into the first ball entrance 64 or the right second ball entrance 640r when winning for a long time, and during the normal game, the variation in the second special symbol is possible. The display can be easily executed, and the player can enjoy the change of the game performance by the variable display of the second special pattern in which a fresh notice display or the like is displayed.

In addition, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 465(b), when the probability of the normal design is low, if the value of the obtained normal winning random number counter C4 is any one of 5 to 6, the normal design hit determined to be. On the other hand, when the probability of the normal design is high, if the acquired value of the normal winning random number counter C4 is any one of 5 to 204, it is determined that the normal design is winning. It should be noted that, in the present embodiment, when winning in the normal symbol lottery, it is configured so that a different normal pattern per game is executed according to the game state that is set, but not limited to this, for example, When the normal pattern low probability state is set, the normal pattern per game (short hit) in which it is difficult to enter the ball into the second ball entrance 640 and the short hit are more than the short hit. It may be configured to be able to execute a normal game (long hit) that makes it easy to enter the ball into the second ball entrance 640. - 特許庁

When the pachinko machine 10 has a low probability of normal patterns, when the ball passes through the through gate 67, the value of the normal winning random number counter C4 is obtained, and the second pattern display device 83 displays the variable normal patterns. Runs for 30 seconds. Then, if the value of the acquired normal winning random number counter C4 is in the range of "5, 6", it is determined that the winning is done, and after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is completed, the stop symbol (second symbol) is displayed. , the symbol "○" is illuminated. Then, if the value of the normal winning random number counter C4 is "5, 6", the electric accessory 640a is opened (opening operation) for "0.2 seconds x 1 time" as a winning. In the present embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 has a low probability of normal symbols, the electric accessory 640a is opened only for "0.2 seconds x 1 time" when the normal symbols are won. The time and number of times can be set arbitrarily. For example, it may be opened "0.5 sec x 2 times".

On the other hand, there are 200 random numbers for the normal symbol jackpot when the probability of the normal symbol is high, and the range is "5 to 204". These random numbers are stored in the normal winning random number table 202c for high probability (see FIG. 465(b)). In this way, when the probability of special symbols is low, the total number of random numbers that will be a big hit is 200 out of the total number of random numbers of 240, so the probability of a big win of special symbols is "1/1.2".

When the pachinko machine 10 has a high probability of normal symbols, when the ball passes through the through gate 67, the value of the normal winning random number counter C4 is obtained, and the second symbol display device 83 displays the variable normal symbols. Runs for 3 seconds. Then, if the value of the obtained normal winning random number counter C4 is in the range of "5 to 204", it is determined that the winning is done, and after the fluctuation display on the second symbol display device 83 is completed, the stop symbol (second symbol) , and the electric accessory 640a is opened "2 seconds x 2 times". In this way, when the normal pattern has a high probability, the variable display time is very short, from 30 seconds to 3 seconds, compared to when the normal pattern has a low probability, and furthermore, the second entrance 640 is opened. Since the period becomes very long as “0.2 seconds×1 time→2 seconds×2 times”, the ball can easily enter the right second ball entrance 640 . In the present embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 has a high probability of normal symbols, the second ball entrance 640 is opened only for "2 seconds x 2 times" when normal symbols are won. The time and number of times can be set arbitrarily. For example, it may be opened "3 seconds x 3 times".

The normal initial value random number counter CINI2 is configured as a loop counter that is updated within the same range as the normal random number counter C4 (value = 0 to 239), and is updated once per timer interrupt processing (see Fig. 487). , is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main processing (see FIG. 501).

In this way, the RAM 203 is provided with various counters and the like, and the main controller 110 controls the big winning lottery and the display on the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 according to the values of the counters and the like. Main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as setting and lottery of the display result in the second pattern display device 83 can be executed.

Returning to FIG. 462, the description continues. An input/output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 via a bus line 204 comprising an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 205 includes the payout control device 111, the sound lamp control device 113, the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b, the second symbol display device, the second symbol reservation lamp, and the lower side of the opening/closing plate of the specific winning opening 65a. A solenoid 209 consisting of a large opening solenoid for driving opening and closing to the front side and a solenoid for driving an electric accessory is connected, and the MPU 201 sends various commands and control signals to these through the input/output port 205. to send.

The input/output port 205 also includes various switches 208 including a group of switches (not shown) and a group of sensors including a slide position detection sensor S and a rotation position detection sensor R. , and the MPU 201 executes various processes based on the signals output from the various switches 208 and the RAM erasing signal SG2 output from the RAM erasing switch circuit 253 .

Further, a setting switch 110c and a setting key 110b are connected to the input/output port 205, and the MPU 201 performs processing for changing setting values based on signals output in response to operations on the setting key 110b and the setting switch 110c, Execute the process to display the setting value. The contents of various operations using the setting key 110b and the setting switch 110c have been described above with reference to FIG. 447, so description thereof will be omitted.

The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of prize balls and rental balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic unit, has a ROM 212 storing control programs executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 213 used as a work memory and the like.

The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, has a stack area for storing the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211, and various flags and counters. , and a work area (work area) in which values such as I/O are stored. The RAM 213 is configured to retain (back up) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply 115 even after the pachinko machine 10 is powered off, and all the data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. As with the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is also configured to receive a power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when power is shut off due to a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, NMI interrupt processing (not shown) is immediately executed as power failure processing.

An input/output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 215 is connected to the main controller 110, the dispensing motor 216, the launch controller 112, and the like. Although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected with a prize ball detection switch for detecting paid prize balls. The winning ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111 but not to the main control device 110 .

The shooting control device 112 controls the ball shooting unit 112a so that the shooting strength of the ball corresponds to the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51 when the main controller 110 issues an instruction to shoot the ball. . The ball shooting unit 112a has a shooting solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the touch sensor 290 detects that the player is touching the operating handle 51, and the operating handle 51b is turned off (not operated) to stop the shooting of the ball. A shooting solenoid is energized corresponding to the amount of rotation operation (rotation position) of 51, and the ball is shot with strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operation handle 51.

The audio lamp control device 113 outputs audio from an audio output device (such as a speaker (not shown)) 226, outputs lighting and extinguishing from a lamp display device (electrical parts 29 to 33, an indicator lamp 34, etc.) 227, and changes production (variation It controls the setting of the display mode of the third pattern display device 81 performed by the display control device 114 such as display) and advance notice effects. The MPU 221, which is an arithmetic device, has a ROM 222 storing control programs executed by the MPU 221, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 223 used as a work memory and the like.

An input/output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 comprising an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 225 is connected to the main controller 110, the display controller 114, the audio output device 226, the lamp display device 227, the touch sensor 290, the firing sensor 293, the frame button 22, and the like.

Sound lamp control device 113, based on various commands (fluctuation pattern command, stop type command, etc.) received from main control device 110, determines the display mode of third symbol display device 81, and sends the determined display mode to the command The display control device 114 is notified by (display variation pattern command, display stop type command, etc.). In addition, the sound lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, changes the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81 or super reach. The display control device 114 is instructed to change the effect contents of the hour. When the stage is changed, a rear image change command including information about the stage after the change is transmitted to the display control device 114 in order to display the rear image corresponding to the stage after the change on the third pattern display device 81. . Here, the back image is an image displayed on the back side of the third design, which is the main image to be displayed on the third design display device 81 . The display control device 114 displays various images on the third pattern display device 81 in accordance with commands transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 .

Also, the sound lamp control device 113 receives a command (display command) representing the display content of the third pattern display device 81 from the display control device 114 . In the audio lamp control device 113, based on the display command received from the display control device 114, in accordance with the display content of the third pattern display device 81, output the audio corresponding to the display content from the audio output device 226, Lighting and extinguishing of the lamp display device 227 are controlled in accordance with the display contents.

The display control device 114 is connected to the sound lamp control device 113 and the third pattern display device 81, and based on the command received from the sound lamp control device 113, changes the third pattern in the third pattern display device 81, etc. It controls the display. Further, the display control device 114 appropriately transmits a display command for notifying the display contents of the third pattern display device 81 to the sound lamp control device 113 . The sound lamp control device 113 outputs sound from the sound output device 226 in accordance with the display contents indicated by this display command, so that the display of the third pattern display device 81 and the sound output from the sound output device 226 are matched. be able to.

The power supply device 115 includes a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each part of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to power failure, etc., and a RAM provided with a RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 446). and an erase switch circuit 253 . The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies necessary operating voltages to the control devices 110 to 114 and the like through a power supply path (not shown). As an overview, the power supply unit 251 takes in a voltage of 24 volts supplied from the outside, various switches such as the various switches 208, solenoids such as the solenoid 209, a voltage of 12 volts for driving a motor, etc. A voltage of 5 volts for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, etc. are generated, and these 12 volts, 5 volts and backup voltages are supplied to the controllers 110 to 114 and the like as necessary voltages.

The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 at the time of power failure due to power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the voltage of stable DC 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and determines that a power failure (power shutdown, power shutdown) has occurred when this voltage is less than 22 volts. Then, a power failure signal SG1 is output to the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111. By the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute NMI interrupt processing. Even after the stable DC voltage of 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts, the power supply unit 251 outputs a voltage of 5 volts, which is the driving voltage of the control system, for a time sufficient to execute the NMI interrupt processing. is configured to maintain a normal value. Therefore, the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (not shown).

The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing the backup data to the main controller 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 446) is pressed. When the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, the main controller 110 clears the backup data when the RAM erase signal SG2 is input, and controls the payout initialization command for clearing the backup data in the payout control device 111. Send to device 111 .

<Regarding the electrical configuration of the main controller 110 in the twenty-seventh embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIG. 464(a), details of the ROM 202 provided in the main controller 110 in the twenty-seventh embodiment will be described. FIG. 464(a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM 202 in the twenty-seventh embodiment. As shown in FIG. 464(a), the ROM 202 in the twenty-seventh embodiment includes a special symbol jackpot random number table 202a, a variation pattern selection table 202b, a normal symbol per random number table 202c, a jackpot type selection table 202d, and a variation and a pattern scenario table 202e.

First, with reference to FIG. 465(a), details of the special symbol jackpot random number table 202a will be described. This special symbol jackpot random number table 202a is a data table that is referred to when a special symbol lottery is executed. Defined for each value. FIG. 465(a) is a diagram showing the specified contents of the special symbol jackpot random number table 202a.

As shown in FIG. 465(a), as a random number (counter value) determined as a special symbol jackpot in the special symbol low probability state, 250 of "0 to 249" are set for the set value "1". 275 items of "0 to 274" are set for the set value "2", and 300 items of "0 to 299" are set for the set value "3". On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 465 (a), as a random number (counter value) determined to be a special symbol jackpot in the variable probability game state (special game state), the set value "1" is "0 to 999 ” is set, 1100 items “0 to 1099” are set for the set value “2”, and 1200 items “0 to 1199” are set for the set value “3”.

In this embodiment, since the value that the first hit random number counter can take is 65536 kinds of "0 to 65535", when the setting "1" is set, in the low probability state of the special symbol, the jackpot The probability of winning (probability of big win) is about 1/262, and the probability of big win is about 1/65 in the state of high probability of special symbols. In addition, when setting "2" is set, the probability of big win is about 1/238 in the low probability state of special symbols, and the probability of big win is about 1/60 in the high probability state of special symbols. Further, when the setting "3" is set, the probability of big win is about 1/218 in the low probability state of the special pattern, and the probability of big win is about 1/55 in the high probability state of the special pattern.

Therefore, setting "1" is a setting value (disadvantageous setting value) that makes it most difficult to win a big win, and setting "3" is a setting value (advantageous setting value) that makes it most likely to win a big win. And, as described above, in the present embodiment, regardless of which setting value is set, the jackpot probability in the special symbol high probability state is four times the jackpot probability in the special symbol low probability state. It is configured to be That is, regardless of which setting value is set, when the transition from the low probability state of the special design to the high probability state of the special design, the same privilege (privilege for making it easier to win the jackpot) is configured to provide to the player. By constructing in this way, in the pachinko machine 10 configured to be able to set the set values in a plurality of stages, the benefits given when the probability state of the special symbols is switched can be made uniform regardless of the set values. , it is possible to prevent the game content from being excessively different depending on the set value.

In addition, depending on the setting value, it is possible to change the content of the privilege to be given when the special symbol low probability state transitions to the special symbol high probability state. ” may be configured to increase the degree of variation of the probability of a big win in the case of shifting from a low-probability state of special symbols to a high-probability state of special symbols. The jackpot probability in the high probability state of the special pattern is quadrupled against the jackpot probability in the low probability state, and in the case of setting "3", in the high probability state of the special pattern against the jackpot probability in the low probability state of the special pattern It may be configured such that the probability of a big win is six times. With this configuration, the degree of advantage of the setting "3", which is the advantageous setting, relative to the setting "1", which is the disadvantageous setting, can be increased. It is possible to motivate the player to play the game with the pachinko machine 10 that is already in use.

In the present embodiment, the setting values provided in the pachinko machine 10 are set in three stages, but the setting values may be set in two stages or in four stages or more (for example, six stages) without being limited to this. good. Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the setting difference is provided in the special symbol jackpot probability, but not limited to this, for example, the period during which the jackpot probability, the small hit probability, the probability variable state setting probability, and the probability state continue, It may be configured to provide a setting difference for various elements capable of varying the degree of advantage of the game, such as the game contents of the jackpot game. Even in such a case, it is possible to provide different degrees of advantage to the player according to the setting values that are set. It is possible to motivate the player to play the game.

Next, with reference to FIG. 465(b), the details of the normal per symbol random number table 202c described above will be described. FIG. 465(b) is a diagram showing the specified contents of the random number table 202c per normal symbol. As shown in FIG. 465(b), in the case of the low probability state of the normal design, the value of the normal random number counter C4 "5, 6" is defined as the random number (counter value) corresponding to the normal design hit. It is On the other hand, in the case of the high probability state of the normal design, the value of the normal winning random number counter C4 is defined as the random number value (counter value) corresponding to the normal design winning in the range of "5 to 204".

That is, in the present embodiment, when the low probability state of normal symbols is set, the probability of winning in the lottery of normal symbols is set to a low probability (1/120). On the other hand, when the high-probability state of normal symbols is set, the probability of winning in the lottery of normal symbols is set to a high probability (1/1.2). As a result, it is possible to facilitate execution of the normal pattern winning game based on the normal pattern winning during the time saving state.

Next, with reference to FIG. 466, details of the jackpot type selection table 202d will be described. FIG. 466 is a diagram showing the defined contents of this jackpot type selection table 202d. As shown in FIG. 466, the value of the special hit type counter C2 is defined in association with the range of "0 to 39", the jackpot A1 (10R probability variable jackpot) is defined in association with the range of "40, 41" , The jackpot B1 (10R probability variable jackpot) is defined in association with the range of "42 to 47", the jackpot C1 (5R probability variable jackpot) is defined in association with the range of "48 to 59" , Jackpot D1 (2R probability variable jackpot) is defined in correspondence, and jackpot E1 (10R normal jackpot, time reduction 100 times) is defined in correspondence with the range of “60 to 99”. Therefore, the probability variable jackpot is set at a rate of 60% and the game state after the jackpot is ended is set to the most advantageous probability variable game state for the player, and the probability variable game state after the jackpot is ended is set at a rate of 40%. A time-saving game state having a lower advantage than the game state is set.

Here, as shown in FIG. 466 and described above, the jackpot A1 and the jackpot B1 are defined as the jackpot types in which the jackpot game (10R probability variable jackpot) of the same content is executed. In other words, the same jackpot game is executed both when jackpot A1 is selected as the jackpot type and when jackpot B1 is selected. By defining different jackpot types for the same jackpot game in this way, when a command (winning command, hit-related command, etc.) for indicating the jackpot type is received by the voice lamp control device 113, the jackpot type It is possible to execute a different jackpot game effect according to.

Although detailed description is omitted, in this embodiment, when the jackpot A1 is selected as the jackpot type and when the jackpot E1 is selected, the jackpot game effect is notified that the jackpot game is 10 rounds. After that, a jackpot game effect capable of executing an effect (probability variable promotion effect) for suggesting a game state set after the jackpot game ends is executed.

On the other hand, when the jackpot B1, the jackpot C1, or the jackpot D1 is selected as the jackpot type, after informing that the probability variable state is set after the jackpot game ends, it suggests how many rounds the jackpot game will continue this time. It is configured to execute a jackpot game effect capable of executing an effect for the purpose (round promotion effect).

In this way, when configured to execute a plurality of types of jackpot game effects (probability variable promotion effect, round promotion effect) with different meanings as jackpot game effects, any jackpot game effect can be executed ( 10R probability variable jackpot) is defined by 1 jackpot type, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives a command (winning command, hit-related command, etc.) for indicating the jackpot type corresponding to the 10R probability variable jackpot, Which jackpot game effect is to be executed is determined at random, and there is a problem that it is difficult to fix the proportion of the 10R probability variable jackpot in each jackpot game effect.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, two types of jackpot types (jackpot A1, jackpot B1) indicating a 10R probability variable jackpot are provided, and when the jackpot A1 is selected, a jackpot game effect in which a probability variable promotion effect is executed, A processing rule on the side of the sound lamp control device 113 is defined so that a round promotion effect is executed when the big win B1 is selected.

By configuring in this way, the ratio of each jackpot game in each jackpot game effect can be matched with the selection ratio of each jackpot type defined in the jackpot type selection table 202d. Specifically, when the variable probability promotion effect is executed (when the jackpot A1 or the jackpot E1 is selected), the ratio of setting the variable probability state after the jackpot game ends is 50%. Also, when the round promotion effect is executed (when the jackpot B1, jackpot C1, jackpot D1 is selected), the 10R jackpot is executed at a rate of 10%, and the 5R jackpot is executed at a rate of 30%. 2R jackpot will be executed at a rate of 60%.

Next, with reference to FIG. 467(a), details of the variation pattern selection table 202b in the twenty-seventh embodiment will be described. FIG. 467(a) is a block diagram showing the structure of the variation pattern table 202b in the twenty-seventh embodiment. As shown in FIG. 467(a), the variation pattern selection table 202b in the twenty-seventh embodiment selects a variation pattern according to the lottery result when a special symbol lottery is executed in the normal state. Normal variation pattern selection table 202b1 to be referred to, and when a special symbol lottery is executed in the probability variation state and the time reduction state, the time saving / probability variation variation referred to select the variation pattern according to the lottery result The pattern table 202b2 is referred to when a special pattern lottery is executed in the probability variable state, and is for high-speed variation that is defined to facilitate selection of a shorter variation time than the time-saving/probability variation variation pattern table 202b2. It is configured at least with a variation pattern table 202b3.

First, the details of the normal variation pattern table 202b1 described above will be described with reference to FIG. 467(b). FIG. 467(b) is a data table schematically showing the contents of this normal variation pattern selection table 202b1. In the normal variation pattern selection table 202b1, various variation patterns are set corresponding to the lottery results of the special symbols, and the range of values of the variation type counter CS1 is associated with each of the variation patterns. stipulated.

More specifically, as shown in FIG. 467(b), when the winning/failure determination result is a hit, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is in the range of "0 to 49", and the variation time is 20 seconds. A hit variation A is defined in association with the range of "50 to 99", and a hit variation B with a variation time of 60 seconds is defined in association with the range of "100 to 198". A hit variation C for a time of 90 seconds is associated and defined. Therefore, when the jackpot is won in the normal game state, the variation time is set to 20 seconds at a rate of about 25% (50/199), and the variation time is set to 60 seconds at a rate of about 25% (50/199). and the variation time is set to 90 seconds at a rate of about 50% (99/199).

On the other hand, if the result of the judgment is out of range, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is defined in the range of "0 to 149" in association with the outlier variation A with a variation time of 5 seconds, and "150 to 194” is defined in association with deviation B with a variation time of 20 seconds, and with respect to the range of “195 to 198”, deviation C with a variation time of 60 seconds is defined in association. ing. Therefore, in the normal game state, if the special symbol lottery is lost, the fluctuation time is set to 5 seconds at a rate of about 75% (150/199), and at a rate of about 23% (45/199). The variation time is set to 20 seconds, and at a rate of about 2% (4/199) the variation time is set to 60 seconds.

In this way, when the success/failure determination result is a hit, the variation pattern with a longer variation time is more likely to be selected than when the result is a loss. The longer the variable display is performed, the higher the expectation for the big win. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

Next, with reference to FIG. 467(c), the details of the time saving/probability variation variation pattern table 202b2 described above will be described. FIG. 467(c) is a data table schematically showing the contents of this time saving/probability variation variation pattern table 202b2. As shown in FIG. 467(c), when the winning/failure determination result is a hit, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is in the range of "0 to 49", and the variation time is 20 seconds. A per hit variation B with a variation time of 60 seconds is defined in association with the range of "50 to 198". Therefore, when the jackpot is won in the normal game state, the variation time is set to 20 seconds at a rate of about 25% (50/199), and the variation time is set to 60 seconds at a rate of about 75% (149/199). is set to

On the other hand, if the result of the right/fail judgment is out, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is defined in the range of "0 to 179" in association with the outlier fluctuation D with a fluctuation time of 3 seconds, "180 to The range of 197" is associated with an outlier variation B with a variation time of 20 seconds, and the range of "198" is associated with an outlier variation C with a variation time of 60 seconds. For this reason, if the special symbol lottery is lost in the normal game state, the fluctuation time is set to 3 seconds at a rate of about 90% (150/199), and at a rate of about 9% (18/199) The variation time is set to 20 seconds, and at a rate of about 0.5% (1/199) the variation time is set to 60 seconds.

In this way, when the time reduction/probability variation variation pattern table 202b2 is referred to, a shorter variation time is more likely to be selected than when the normal variation pattern table 202b1 is referred to. Therefore, it is possible to improve the game efficiency in the high-probability game state and the time-saving game state set to the time-saving state of normal symbols. Therefore, it is possible to add sharpness to the game.

Next, with reference to FIG. 468, details of the above-described high-speed fluctuation fluctuation pattern table 202b3 will be described. FIG. 468 is a diagram showing the defined contents of the high-speed fluctuation fluctuation pattern table 202b3 in the twenty-seventh embodiment. As shown in FIG. 468, if the success/failure determination result is a hit, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is in the range of "0 to 99", and a short hit variation A with a variation time of 6 seconds is associated. A short hit variation B with a variation time of 12 seconds is defined in association with the range of "100 to 198". For this reason, in the probability variation state, when the special symbol lottery wins (jackpot) in the state where the high-speed variation variation pattern table 202b3 is referred to, the variation time is about 50% (100/199). is set to 6 seconds and about 50% (99/199) the variation time is set to 12 seconds.

On the other hand, if the result of the determination is out of range, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is defined in the range of "0 to 189" in association with a short deviation variation A with a variation time of 1.5 seconds, The range of "190 to 198" is defined in association with a short-range fluctuation B with a fluctuation time of 6 seconds. Therefore, in the probability variation state, if the special symbol lottery is lost in the state in which the high-speed variation variation pattern table 202b3 is referred to, the variation time is 6 seconds at a rate of about 50% (100/199). and about 50% of the time (99/199) the variation time is set to 12 seconds.

In this embodiment, in the state where the probability variation state is set, the variation pattern of the special symbol variation is selected according to the jackpot type that triggers the probability variation state to be set, and the number of times the special symbol lottery (variation) is executed. The fluctuation pattern table referred to at the time is configured to switch between the time-saving/probability fluctuation pattern table 202b2 or the high-speed fluctuation fluctuation pattern table 202b3, and the fluctuation pattern scenario table 202f (see FIG. 469) described later ) is configured to switch the variation pattern table in accordance with the specified contents.

As a result, the period in which the variable probability state is set is easily selected as the variable probability first period in which the variation pattern with a relatively long variation time is likely to be selected, and the variation pattern with a relatively shorter variation time than the variable probability first period. It is possible to set the variable probability second period. Therefore, the variation pattern table is designed so as to suppress the excessive increase in the number of times the jackpot game is executed per unit time due to the continuous selection of variation patterns with short variation times after the end of the jackpot game. It is possible to switch the variation pattern so as to increase the number of special symbol lotteries per unit time when the variable probability state continues for a long time without winning the jackpot.

In addition, in the present embodiment, when the variable probability state is set, the two types of variation pattern tables described above are configured to be able to be referred to, but without being limited to this, three or more variation pattern tables can be referred to. It may be configured as possible. Also, the game state in which a plurality of types of variation pattern tables can be referred to is not limited to the probability variation state, and a plurality of types of variation pattern tables may be configured to be referable in other game states.

Next, with reference to FIG. 469, the details of the variation pattern scenario table 202f will be described. The variation pattern scenario table 202f defines a variation pattern table referred to according to the number of executions of the special symbol lottery executed after the end of the jackpot game, and corresponds to the jackpot game executed last time. Different scenarios are stipulated according to the type of jackpot and the gaming state set at the time of winning the previous jackpot.

Specifically, when the probability variable state is set based on the jackpot A1, regardless of the game state at the time of winning the jackpot, the number of times of special symbol lottery executed after the jackpot game ends "1 time to 80 times" range. , the time-saving/probable variable variation pattern table 202b2 is referred to, the range of "81 times to 999 times" refers to the high-speed variation variation pattern table 202b3, and the range of "1000 times-" is the time-saving/probable variable variation A variation pattern scenario is defined in which the pattern table 202b2 is referred to.

Further, when the variable probability state is set based on the big wins B1, C1, D1 and the game state at the time of winning the big win is the normal state, the number of times of special symbol lottery executed after the big win game is "1". times to 80 times”, the time-saving/probable variation variation pattern table 202b2 is referred to, and the range of “81 times to 999 times” refers to the high-speed variation variation pattern table 202b3, and the range of “1000 times to”. , a variation pattern scenario that refers to the time saving/probability variation variation pattern table 202b2 is defined, and when the game state at the time of winning the jackpot is a time saving state or a probability variation state, a special symbol that is executed after the end of the jackpot game. A variation pattern scenario is defined in which the high-speed variation variation pattern table 202b3 is referenced in the range of the number of lotteries “1 time to 999 times”, and the time-saving/probability variation pattern table 202b2 is referenced in the range of “1000 times”. It is

Furthermore, when the time saving state is set based on the jackpot E1, regardless of the game state at the time of winning the jackpot, the number of times of special symbol lottery executed after the jackpot game is "1 time to 100 times". The probability variation variation pattern table 202b2 is referenced, and variation pattern scenarios are defined in which the normal variation pattern table 202b1 is referenced in the range of "101 times or more".

Although not shown, if the RAM clear switch 122 is operated when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, that is, if the initialization process of the pachinko machine 10 is executed, a dedicated variation pattern scenario ( Reset time variation pattern table) is configured to be referred to, and the normal variation pattern table 202b1 is referred to in the range of the special symbol lottery number of times “1 time to 100 times” executed after the initialization process, A fluctuation pattern scenario is defined in which the high-speed fluctuation fluctuation pattern table 202b3 is referred to in the range of "101 times to 110 times", and the normal fluctuation pattern table 202b1 is referred to in the range of "111 times or more". In other words, when the RAM clear switch 122 is operated such as when the setting change operation is executed, the normal state which is the initial state is set as the game state, and the number of times of the special symbol lottery executed in the normal state is 100. When the number of times is exceeded, the fluctuation pattern table 202b3 for high-speed fluctuation is referred to, and a transition is made to a specific period in which a fluctuation pattern with a short fluctuation time is selected.

By constructing in this manner, the pachinko machine 10 after the setting change executes the high-speed fluctuation when the number of times of the special symbol lottery executed without winning the jackpot exceeds 100 times. . Therefore, when a variation pattern in which high-speed variation is executed is set as the variation pattern of the special symbol variation in the pachinko machine 10 in which the normal state is set, the set value may have been changed for the player. can be predicted.

In addition, a plurality of fluctuation pattern scenarios (initial fluctuation pattern scenarios) that can be selected after the initialization process are provided. For example, when the set value "1" is set and when the set value "3" is set , different initial time fluctuation pattern scenarios may be selected (facilitated to be selected). By configuring in this way, it is possible to predict that the setting has been changed by grasping that the initial time fluctuation pattern scenario is set, and based on the set initial time fluctuation pattern scenario type It becomes possible to predict the setting value.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, when the RAM clear switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on (when the initialization process is executed), the initial fluctuation pattern scenario is set, but this is not the only option. Instead, the initial fluctuation pattern scenario may be set when the setting change operation is performed. As a result, when the RAM clear switch 122 is operated without performing the setting change operation, a variation pattern scenario different from that when the setting change operation is performed is set. Presence or absence of a setting change can be more easily predicted by grasping the variation pattern of the special symbol variation.

Next, with reference to FIG. 464(b), details of the RAM 203 provided in the main controller 110 in the twenty-seventh embodiment will be described. FIG. 464(b) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 203. As shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 464(b), the RAM 203 in the twenty-seventh embodiment includes a special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a, a special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b, a normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c, and a special symbol. 1 reserved ball number counter 203d, special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e, normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f, setting value storage area 203g, winning state storage area 203h, variation counter 203i, and time saving medium It has a counter 203j, a variation execution flag 203k, a probability variation flag 203m, a big hit flag 203n, a variation order storage area 203p, and other memory areas 203z.

The special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a has one execution area for the first special symbol and four reserved areas (first reserved area to fourth reserved area). Each value of the special hit random number counter C1, the special hit type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 is stored.

More specifically, at the timing when the ball enters the first ball entrance 64 (start winning), each value of each counter C1 to C3 is acquired, and the acquired data is stored in four holding areas (holding number Area 1 to reserved area 4) are stored in ascending order of area numbers (first to fourth). That is, the smaller the area number, the data corresponding to the oldest winning is stored, and the first reserved area stores the data corresponding to the oldest winning. If data is stored in all four holding areas, nothing is newly stored.

After that, in the main control device 110, when a special symbol lottery is performed, each value of each counter C1 to C3 stored in the first reserved area of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a is transferred to the execution area. Based on the values of the respective counters C1 to C3 which are shifted (moved) and stored in the execution area, determination such as lottery for special symbols is performed.

When data is shifted from the first reservation area to the execution area, the first reservation area becomes empty. Therefore, there is a shift process that packs the winning data stored in other reservation areas (second reservation area to fourth reservation area) to reservation areas (first reservation area to third reservation area) with an area number smaller by 1. done. In this embodiment, in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a, data shift is performed only for the reserved areas (second reserved area to fourth reserved area) in which winning data is stored. Also, the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b differs from the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a only in that it is a storage area corresponding to the second special symbol.

Like the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a, the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c has one execution area and four reserved areas (first reserved area to fourth reserved area). Each of these areas stores a normal random number counter C4.

More specifically, at the timing when the ball passes through either the left or right through gate 67, the value of the counter C4 is acquired, and the acquired data is stored in the four reservation areas (reservation first area to reservation fourth area ) are stored in ascending order of area number (first to fourth). That is, similarly to the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a, the data corresponding to the winning is stored while the winning order is maintained. If data is stored in all four holding areas, nothing is newly stored.

After that, in the main controller 110, when the normal symbol winning lottery is performed, the value of the counter C4 stored in the first reserved area of the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c is shifted to the execution area ( ), and based on the value of the counter C4 stored in the execution area, a determination such as a lottery for winning a normal symbol is performed.

In addition, when the data is shifted from the first reserved area to the execution area, the first reserved area becomes vacant. is shifted to a reserved area with an area number smaller by one. Also, the data shift is performed only for the reserved areas in which the winning data are stored.

The special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is a variable display (third symbol It is a counter that counts the number of held balls (waiting number of times) of the variable display performed on the display device 81 up to four times. The initial value of this special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is set to zero, and each time a ball enters the first ball entrance 64 and the number of reserved balls in the variable display increases, the maximum value is 4. 1 is added. On the other hand, the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is decremented by 1 each time a special symbol variable display is newly executed.

The value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d (the number of times N of holding the variable display in the special symbol) is notified to the sound lamp control device 113 by the reserved ball number command. The reserved ball number command is a command transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sound lamp controller 113 every time the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is changed.

The special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is a counter that counts the reserved balls based on winning in the right second ball entrance 640r, and other configurations are the same as the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d. Therefore, detailed description thereof is omitted.

The voice lamp control device 113, every time the values of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e are changed, the main controller 113 according to the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main controller 110. It is possible to acquire the value of the number of pending balls in the variable display that is held in 110 . As a result, the number of holding balls in the variable display managed by the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 223a and the special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 223b of the sound lamp control device 113 is held by the main controller 110 due to the influence of noise and the like. Even if there is a deviation from the actual number of held balls in the displayed variable display, the deviation can be corrected by the next received number of held balls command.

In addition, the voice lamp control device 113 manages the number of held balls based on the number of held balls command, and every time the number of held balls changes, the display control device 114 is notified of the number of held balls. Send a pitch command. The display control device 114 displays the reserved ball number pattern in the small area Ds1 of the third pattern display device 81 based on the reserved ball number notified by the display reserved ball number command.

The normal design reserved ball number counter 203f counts the number of reserved balls (number of standby times) of the variable display of the normal design (second design) performed by the second design display device 83 based on the passage of the ball through the through gate 67 up to 4 times. A counter that counts up to The initial value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is set to zero. On the other hand, the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is decremented by 1 each time the variable display of the normal symbol (second symbol) is newly executed.

When the ball passes through either the left or right through gate 67, if the value of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f (the number M of holding variable display in normal symbols) is less than 4, the value of the normal winning random number counter C4 is acquired, and the acquired data is stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c. On the other hand, if the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is 4 when the ball passes through either the left or right through gate 67, nothing is newly stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c.

The setting value storage area 203g is a storage area for storing data corresponding to the setting values of the pachinko machine 10. FIG. More specifically, if "00H" is stored as data in the setting value storage area 203g, it indicates that the setting value "1" is set, and if "01H" is stored as data, This indicates that the set value "2" is set, and if "02H" is stored as data, it indicates that the set value "3" is set. When the special pattern lottery is executed, the data in the set value storage area 203g is read out, and the special pattern lottery (jackpot lottery) is executed with the lottery probability corresponding to the set value indicated by the read data. That is, among the special symbol big hit random number table 202a (see FIG. 465(a)), the range of random numbers corresponding to the setting value indicated by the data in the setting value storage area 203g and the first hit random number stored in the execution area A special symbol lottery is executed by comparing the value of the counter C1. The initial value of the setting value storage area 203g is set to "00H". , and when the setting switch 110c is further pressed while the data is "02H", the data is updated to "01H". When the RAM clear switch 122 is pressed and the power is turned on, all data in the RAM 203 are reset (cleared) to initial values. Therefore, when only the RAM clear operation is performed, the value of the set value storage area 203g is also reset to the initial value "00H". That is, even if only the RAM clear operation is performed without executing the setting change operation, the setting can be changed to 1. Thereby, the convenience of the hall can be improved.

The winning state storage area 203h is a storage area for storing information indicating the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot. Specifically, if the game state at the time of winning the jackpot is a normal state (if the value of the time saving counter 203j is 0 and the probability variation flag 203m is off), the winning state storage area 203h normally "00H" is stored as information indicating the state. On the other hand, if the game state at the time of winning the jackpot is a time saving state (if the value of the time saving medium counter 203j is 1 or more and the probability variation flag 203m is off), the time saving state is stored in the winning state storage area 203h. "01H" is stored as the indicating information. Also, if the game state at the time of winning the jackpot is a probability variable state (if the value of the time saving counter 203j is 1 or more and the probability variable flag 203m is on), the probability variable state is stored in the winning state storage area 203h. "02H" is stored as the information to indicate. The information stored in the winning state storage area 203h is retained until the end of the big win, and is referred to when setting the game state after the end of the big win.

The variation number counter 203i is a counter for measuring the number of variations of the special symbol variation, and its counter value is updated based on the execution of the special symbol variation.

The time saving medium counter 203j is a counter indicating whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal pattern time saving state, and if the value of the time saving medium counter 203j is 1 or more, the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal pattern time saving state. If the value of the time-saving medium counter 203j is 0, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of normal symbols. The initial value of the counter 203j during time saving is set to zero, and a special symbol lottery is performed in the main control device 110, and each time a special symbol jackpot is determined, a value corresponding to the jackpot type is set. be done. That is, when a special symbol jackpot is won, a new value corresponding to the jackpot type is set regardless of the value of the time saving medium counter 203j.

The variation execution flag 203k is a flag for identifying whether the variation of the first special symbol is to be performed or the variation of the second special symbol is to be performed. In this embodiment, the variation is started according to the order of entering the first ball entrance 64 and the right second ball entrance 640r (order stored in reserve). Here, when the variation of the special symbol stops and the variation of the next special symbol corresponding to the reserved ball is started, the variation execution determination process executed by the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110 stores the variation order described later. Based on the pending storage order data stored in the area 203p, it is discriminated whether the next stored variation is the pending data corresponding to the first special symbol or the second special symbol, and the determination result is obtained. , the corresponding change execution flag 203k is set to ON.

The variable probability flag 203m is a flag for determining whether the current gaming state is a variable probability state. This variable probability flag 203m is set to ON when the variable probability state is set. This variable probability flag 203m is set in the process of S1113 in the jackpot control process (see FIG. 502) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 when it is determined that the jackpot game being executed is other than the jackpot E (S1113 : No), it is set to ON. Also, in the process of S220 in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 488) executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, it is set to OFF when stopping the variation display of the special symbol that becomes a big hit.

The jackpot middle flag 203n is a flag indicating that the game state is a jackpot game. This jackpot flag 203n is set to ON when the start of the jackpot game is set in the processing of S221 of the special symbol variation processing (see FIG. 488) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110. Also, in the jackpot control processing (see FIG. 502) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110, when the jackpot end timing comes (S1110: Yes), it is set to off in the processing of S1117. .

Fluctuation order storage area 203p, when a game ball enters the first ball entrance 64 or the right second ball entrance 640r or the second ball entrance 640 and is stored as a suspended ball (suspended storage), This is an area in which the reserved order is stored. In this embodiment, the variation of the special symbols is configured to be executed in the order in which they are reserved and stored, and one of the special symbols is not preferentially executed. In addition, in this embodiment, since the distribution device 700 is configured to alternately distribute to the first ball entrance 64 and the right second ball entrance 640r, variation is started in the order that is reserved and stored. As a result, even in the variation of the special symbols, the first special symbol and the second special symbol are alternately executed, and only one of the reserved balls is digested, so that the reserved ball of the special symbol is It is possible to suppress the problem of overflow.

In the other memory area 203z, necessary flags, counters, storage data, etc. in other control processes executed by the MPU of the main control unit 110 are set, but details thereof are omitted.

An input/output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 via a bus line 204 comprising an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 205 includes the payout control device 111, the sound lamp control device 113, the first symbol display device 37, the second symbol display device 83, the second symbol reservation lamp 84, and the lower side of the opening/closing plate of the specific winning opening 65a. A solenoid 209 consisting of a large opening solenoid for driving opening and closing to the front side and a solenoid for driving an electric accessory is connected. to send.

The input/output port 205 is connected to various switches 208 including a switch group and a sensor group (not shown), and a RAM erasure switch circuit 253 provided in the power supply 115, which will be described later. and the RAM erasing signal SG2 output from the RAM erasing switch circuit 253, various processes are executed.

The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of prize balls and rental balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic unit, has a ROM 212 storing control programs executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 213 used as a work memory and the like.

The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, has a stack area for storing the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211, and various flags and counters. , and a work area (work area) in which values such as I/O are stored. The RAM 213 is configured to retain (back up) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply 115 even after the pachinko machine 10 is powered off, and all the data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. As with the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is also configured to receive a power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when power is shut off due to a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, NMI interrupt processing (see FIG. 497) is immediately executed as power failure processing.

An input/output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 215 is connected to the main controller 110, the dispensing motor 216, the launch controller 112, and the like. Although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected with a prize ball detection switch for detecting paid prize balls. The winning ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111 but not to the main control device 110 .

The shooting control device 112 controls the ball shooting unit 112a so that the shooting strength of the ball corresponds to the amount of rotation of the operating handle 51 when the main controller 110 issues a ball shooting instruction. The ball shooting unit 112a has a shooting solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the touch sensor 290 detects that the player is touching the operating handle 51, and the operating handle 51b is turned off (not operated) to stop the shooting of the ball. A shooting solenoid is energized corresponding to the amount of rotation of the operating handle 51, and the ball is shot with strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operating handle 51.

The audio lamp control device 113 outputs audio from an audio output device (such as a speaker (not shown)) 226, outputs lighting and extinguishing from a lamp display device (electrical parts 29 to 33, an indicator lamp 34, etc.) 227, and changes production (variation It controls the setting of the display mode of the third pattern display device 81 performed by the display control device 114 such as display) and continuous advance notice effect. The MPU 221, which is an arithmetic device, has a ROM 222 storing control programs executed by the MPU 221, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 223 used as a work memory and the like.

An input/output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 comprising an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 225 is connected to the main controller 110, the display controller 114, the audio output device 226, the lamp display device 227, the frame button 22, and the like.

The sound lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, changes the background mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81, or changes the background mode displayed at the time of super reach. The voice output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 are controlled, and the display control device 114 is instructed so as to change the content of the presentation.

The audio lamp control device 113 determines an error according to the command from the main control device 110 and the status of various devices connected to the audio lamp control device 113, and displays and controls the error command including the error type. Send to device 114 . The display control device 114 controls the third pattern display device 81 to display an error message image corresponding to the error type (for example, vibration error) indicated by the received error command without delay.

As shown in FIG. 464(a), the ROM 222 of the voice lamp control device 113 contains a variation pattern selection table 222a, an effect switching table 222b, a setting suggestion effect selection table 222c, a look-ahead prohibition period selection table 222d, and a hold upper limit effect selection table 222d. At least a table 222e, an effect execution number selection table 222f, a mission selection table 222g, a promotion point selection table 222h, and a promotion effect selection table 222i are stored.

The variation pattern selection table 222a is a selection table for determining variation patterns based on variation pattern commands output from the main controller 110. FIG. A plurality of variation patterns are set corresponding to the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern command and the variation pattern type, and one variation pattern is determined by acquiring a counter value for selection (not shown).

The variation pattern command output from the main controller 110 includes, for example, information for indicating the result of the special symbol lottery, the variation pattern of the special symbol (variation time, stop symbol, presence or absence of reach effect, based on the lottery result Information for indicating the winning game type) to be executed is included. Then, in the voice ramp control device 113, in order to execute the variation effect of the third symbol in the variation pattern corresponding to the corresponding special symbol variation, when the variation pattern command is received, the variation pattern selection table 222a is referred to. A variation pattern (variation pattern for effect) is determined.

The effect switching table 222b is a data table referred to when switching the effect period based on the time information (timekeeping information) of the clock device 292. FIG. In the present embodiment, different effects can be executed according to the set effect period. The effect switching table 222b is used to select the effect period for executing the effect (effect mode) performed by the third symbol display device 81, the sound output device 226, and the lamp display device 227.

The determination of this effect mode is performed in the elapsed time confirmation process (see S2111 in FIG. 521) of the main process executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113, and the determination value of the effect switching table 222b shown in FIG. , and the elapsed time T (see S3602 in FIG. 521) determined based on the time information (clocking information) of the clock device 292 (see S3603 in FIG. 521).

FIG. 471 is a diagram schematically showing an example of the effect switching table 222b stored in the ROM222. As shown in FIG. 471, in the effect switching table 222b, the type of effect period is defined in association with the value of the elapsed time T after power-on of the gaming machine.

In the present embodiment, the normal effect period, the SP time preparation period, and the SP time period can be set as the effect period. The SP time period is a performance period in which a dedicated performance mode is determined based on the clocked time, and is a period during which a performance (period performance) with a sense of unity is executed in a plurality of pachinko machines 10.例文帳に追加The normal performance period is a period during which an independent performance is executed in each pachinko machine 10 according to the result of the special symbol lottery. Also, the SP time preparation period is a period during which an effect similar to the normal effect period is executed, and is a preparation period for informing the player that the SP time period will soon be set. Therefore, during the SP time preparation period, there is a guidance mode for guiding that the SP time period is approaching in a part of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 in which the same production as in the normal production period is executed. Is displayed.

If the value of the elapsed time T in the elapsed time confirmation process (see S2111) of FIG. It is turned off, and the information indicating that it is during the SP time period stored in the storage area provided in the work RAM 233 of the display control device 114 is cleared. Then, based on these processing results, the effect performed by the third symbol display device 81, the sound output device 226, and the lamp display device 227 is in the normal effect mode (the effect mode of the effect executed during the normal effect period). done. On the other hand, when the value of the elapsed time T indicates the SP time period, the period rendering flag 223p provided in the RAM 223 of the sound lamp control device 113 is set to ON, and furthermore, the display control device 114 Information indicating that it is during the SP time period is stored in a storage area provided in the work RAM 233 . Based on these processing results, the effects performed by the third pattern display device 81, the sound output device 226, and the lamp display device 227 are performed in a special effect mode.

As shown in FIG. 471, in this embodiment, the normal effect period is set for most of the time clocked by the clock device 292, and the period for which the SP time period is set is shortened. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to experience the period production (SP time production) executed during the SP time period, so that the player is motivated to play the game during the SP time period. can be done. Further, although a detailed description will be given later, in this embodiment, it is configured to execute different effects during the SP time period according to the number of times the SP time period is set after the timing device 292 starts timing. In the first SP time period after the timing device 292 starts timing, the music A is reproduced, and the period production (SP time production) is executed in the production mode according to the music A. Then, during the second SP time period after the timing device 292 starts measuring time, a piece of music B different from the piece of music A is reproduced, and a period presentation (SP time presentation) is executed in a presentation mode corresponding to the song B. be.

Therefore, it is possible to motivate the player to play the game so as to execute the SP time presentation at various timings.

To explain in detail the contents stipulated in the effect switching table 222b, the effect switching table 222b contains an elapsed time T (elapsed time after the power is turned on) calculated based on the timing contents of the clock device 292. The production period is defined according to, and the normal production period is defined in the range where the elapsed time T is within 88 minutes, and the SP time preparation period is defined in the range of 88 minutes to 90 minutes, 90 minutes to 93 minutes. The SP time period (for song A) is defined in the range of minutes. Then, in the range of 93 minutes to 213 minutes, the normal performance period is defined again, the SP time preparation period is defined in the range of 213 minutes to 215 minutes, and the SP time period is defined in the range of 215 minutes to 219 minutes. (for music B) is specified.

Thereafter, a normal performance period, an SP time preparation period, and an SP time period are defined for the elapsed time.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the length of the SP time period is defined to be different depending on the mode of effect to be executed. In other words, when the SP time period for music A is set, the SP time period is 3 minutes, and when the SP time period for music B is set, the SP time period is 4 minutes. there is By configuring in this way, it is possible to easily set the SP time period corresponding to the length of the music to be reproduced.

On the other hand, the length of the SP time preparation period is the same length (2 minutes) regardless of which SP time period is set. By configuring in this way, it is possible to share the effect data for setting the effect mode dedicated to the SP time preparation period (for example, the telop display of "Soon to enter the SP period", etc.).

In addition, during the SP time preparation period, in addition to the guidance mode for guiding the player that the period in which the SP time period is set is approaching, the SP to be executed during the next SP time period is set. A prediction mode for notifying the player of the presentation mode of the time presentation may also be set. In this case, as the notice mode, for example, a mode is used in which the player can grasp a part of the effect (song to be played) to be executed during the next SP time period, such as "next song B starts". be done.

In addition, in this embodiment, the SP time preparation period is configured to be settable for a predetermined period (two minutes) before the SP time period is set, but the SP time preparation period is not limited to this. may be configured to always display a notification mode for notifying the player of the remaining time until the SP time period is set without setting the SP time period. In this case, since it is possible for the player to understand that the remaining time until the next SP time period is set is long, the player who wishes to play the game during the SP time period is given the SP time period. A long preparation period for playing a game can be ensured during the period. Therefore, it is possible to easily suppress a decrease in motivation to play due to being unable to play a game during the SP time period.

On the other hand, as in this embodiment, the remaining time until the SP time period is set is displayed during the SP time preparation period without displaying the remaining time until the SP time period is set during the normal production period. By configuring so as to make it difficult for the player to grasp at what timing the SP time period is set. Therefore, the player who is playing the game during the normal effect period can continue to play the game while expecting the SP time period to be set.

In addition, in the present embodiment, a period during which an effect (period effect) with a sense of unity is executed in a plurality of pachinko machines 10 and a period during which an independent effect (normal effect) is executed in each pachinko machine 10 are divided. It is configured to be settable, and furthermore, it is configured to be able to set a plurality of types of performance modes as the performance mode of the period performance, but it is not limited to this, and it is also possible to set a plurality of types of performance modes for the normal performance. may be configured.

In this case, a predetermined lottery of effects may be executed when the normal effect period is set, and the content of the effect may be determined based on the result of the effect. By configuring in this way, it is possible to execute a different effect based on the information clocked by the clock device 292 even for the normal effect, so that the player's willingness to play can be increased.

In addition, in this embodiment, in order to execute a period performance with a sense of unity in a plurality of pachinko machines 10, the same performance period is set for each pachinko machine 10 according to the elapsed time T from power-on. Although the contents of the effect switching table 222b are defined as shown in FIG. It is also possible to configure such that the timing to be set is different.

More specifically, when the setting value that is set is high setting, the timing at which the guidance mode (telop display) is displayed during the SP time preparation period, and the notification voice In order that the output timing of is easily delayed, the content of the effect switching table 222b may be changed according to the set value.

By constructing in this way, it is assumed that a period performance with a sense of unity is executed in a plurality of pachinko machines 10, and by intentionally executing a performance without a sense of unity (delayed performance), a player can It is possible to give some sense of incongruity. In the above example, when the setting is high, the delay effect is more likely to be executed than when the setting is low. It is possible to make the user pay attention to the performance that is executed.

Further, although it is difficult to grasp that the period effect is executed with a delay with only one pachinko machine 10, it is possible to compare the period effect with the period effects executed by a plurality of adjacent pachinko machines 10. It is possible to easily grasp that the execution timing of is delayed. Therefore, it is possible to make the player interested in the period performance executed by the plurality of pachinko machines 10.例文帳に追加

It should be noted that, when executing the above-mentioned delayed effect, instead of delaying all the effects to be executed, normal effect timing is set as the execution timing of the effect, and some effects (for example, voice) Only the execution timing may be shifted (delayed), or the execution timing of a part of the effects may be accelerated.

In addition, in FIG. 471, the correspondence between the elapsed time T and the performance period after the elapsed time T is 339 minutes is omitted, but in fact, even after 339 minutes, the special performance period of 2 minutes and 50 minutes are shown. It is set so that the normal performance period of 10 minutes is alternately repeated. The range of the elapsed time T in the effect switching table 222b may be set at least for the opening hours of the hall in one day. A correspondence relationship with a period may be set, or a correspondence relationship for several days may be set. Also, the types of production periods are not necessarily limited to the three types of the normal production period, the SP time preparation period, and the SP time period. good.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, a table defining the type of presentation period for each value of elapsed time T is defined, but it is not necessary to prepare a table corresponding to all T values. For example, one type of value range of the elapsed time T to be the normal performance period and one type of range of the value of the elapsed time T to be the SP time period are defined, and the value of the elapsed time T is set to the specified value. When it is out of the range, it may be configured such that a predetermined value is added to the range of values of the elapsed time T defined. As a specific example, for example, the value range of the elapsed time T for the normal effect period is 0 minutes 00 seconds to 50 minutes 00 seconds, and the value range for the elapsed time T for the SP time period is 50 minutes 00 seconds to 60 minutes 00 seconds, and when the value of the elapsed time T reaches 60 minutes and 00 seconds, the value range of the elapsed time T becomes the normal performance period and the value range of the elapsed time T becomes the SP time period. 60 minutes and 00 seconds to each, and control may be performed to reset the type of presentation period within the value range of the elapsed time T from 60 minutes and 00 seconds to 120 minutes and 00 seconds.

More specifically, in the effect switching table 222b, the value range of the elapsed time T for the normal effect period is 0 minutes 00 seconds to 50 minutes 00 seconds, and the value range for the elapsed time T for the SP time period is Only the information that it is from 50 minutes 00 seconds to 60 minutes 00 seconds is specified. Then, based on power-on, the information defined in the effect switching table 222b is duplicated in a predetermined area of the RAM 223, and the type of effect period is discriminated based on the duplicated information. When the elapsed time T reaches 60 minutes and 00 seconds, which is the maximum value of the elapsed time T specified in the duplicated information, 60 minutes and 00 seconds are added to the duplicated information to create a new Update to information. That is, the value range of the elapsed time T for the normal presentation period is 60 minutes 00 seconds to 110 minutes 00 seconds, and the value range for the special presentation period is 110 minutes 00 seconds to 120 minutes 00 seconds. It will be updated with information that there is. After that, every time 60 minutes and 00 seconds pass, control is performed so that 60 minutes and 00 seconds are added to the duplicated information to update it to new information, and the performance period is based on the updated information and the elapsed time T. determine the type of

In this case, since the amount of data in the effect switching table 222b is reduced, the capacity of the ROM 222 can be reduced. Therefore, the price of the ROM 222 can be reduced.

The setting-suggestion effect selection table 222c is a data table referred to for selecting the effect mode (effect pattern) when executing the setting-suggestion effect. 223g and different effect patterns (effect modes) are defined.

In this setting suggestion effect selection table 222c, only effect patterns are defined, and the effect mode of the setting suggestion effect that is actually executed based on the type of setting suggestion effect and the selected effect pattern is determined. It is determined. In this embodiment, the setting suggesting effect is executed by various effects (see FIG. 453(b)), and the setting suggesting effect can be executed in a manner corresponding to each effect. Therefore, if a specific effect mode is defined in the setting suggesting effect selection table 222c, the amount of effect to be defined increases, causing a problem that the amount of data in the RAM 222 increases. In addition, when the setting suggestion effect selection table 222c determines the specific effect mode, that is, which effect is used to execute the setting suggestion effect in which mode, the setting suggestion effect is switched to another effect. There is a problem that it is difficult to execute and it is difficult to increase the variation of effects.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, it is configured such that only the setting suggestion effect effect pattern (setting suggestion content) is selected. By configuring in this way, it is possible to set an effect mode according to the effect pattern of the determined setting suggestion effect for the effect in which the setting suggestion effect is executed. can be acquired in advance, and the player can use the acquired execution right for any performance. Therefore, the processing load can be reduced when increasing variations of effects.

In this embodiment, the setting suggestion effect is executed using the effect pattern selected in the setting suggestion effect selection table 222c. A storage means capable of storing a plurality of performance patterns selected by the method and a generating means capable of generating a new performance pattern by adding up the plurality of performance patterns stored in the storage means are provided, and the generation thereof. A setting suggestion effect based on the effect pattern generated by the means may be configured to be executable.

In this case, the effect pattern generated by the generating means may be configured to be a effect pattern that can concretely suggest the set value rather than the effect patterns defined in the setting suggestion effect selection table 222c. In the case where six levels of setting values can be set as the setting values of the machine 10, the setting suggestion effect selection table 222c contains effect patterns (for example, A production pattern indicating setting 1 or 6, a production pattern indicating setting 2 or 6, etc.) is defined, and as a production pattern to be generated, a production pattern (for example, setting 6, etc.) that can specifically notify the setting value is generated. It is better to configure it so that By configuring in this way, a new effect pattern is generated by the generating means, and thus the player can easily grasp the set values. A game (a game for acquiring the right to execute the setting suggesting effect) can be played willingly.

Further, in this case, the execution right stored in the storage means is used to allow the player to select whether or not to execute the setting suggestion effect in the effect pattern selected in the setting suggestion effect selection table 222c. can be With this configuration, by executing many setting suggestion effects (setting suggestion effects that are difficult to understand) in which the setting value cannot be specifically notified, the current setting value can be determined in a composite manner. By reducing the number of executions of the suggestion performance, the player can select whether or not to aim for execution of the setting suggestion performance (easy-to-understand setting suggestion performance) capable of specifically notifying the set value.

Furthermore, it is preferable to set an upper limit on the period during which the execution right of the setting suggestion effect can be stored in the storage means. In this case, the execution right is erased by the erasing means, and a determination means is provided that can determine the elapsed time since it was stored. The execution right may be erased by the erasing means when it is determined that the number of times reaches 100 times. By configuring in this way, it is possible to give a game effect to the selection of whether or not to generate a new effect pattern by the generating means. In other words, by giving a possibility that the execution right is deleted by the erasing means, it is possible to make it difficult to execute the setting suggestion effect (easy-to-understand setting suggestion effect) that can specifically inform the setting value. It is possible to give great significance to the result of selection by the player as to which setting suggestion effect is to be executed.

As shown in FIG. 472, the setting suggestion effect selection table 222c defines five types of effect patterns, effect pattern A to effect pattern E, and when setting 1 is set, the acquired effect counter If the value of 223g is in the range of "35 to 79", "effect pattern A" is selected, in the range of "80 to 94", "selected pattern C" is selected, and in the range of "95 to 99", "effect pattern D" is selected. is defined as It should be noted that, when the obtained value of the effect counter 223g is within the range of "0 to 34", it is stipulated that the setting suggesting effect is not executed.

Further, when setting 2 is set, "effect pattern A" is set when the value of the obtained effect counter 223g is in the range of "5 to 49", and "effect pattern B" is set in the range of "50 to 74". , "effect pattern C" is selected in the range of "75 to 89", and "effect pattern D" is selected in the range of "90 to 99". It should be noted that, when the obtained value of the effect counter 223g is "0 to 4", it is stipulated that the setting suggesting effect is not executed.

Furthermore, when setting 3 is set, "effect pattern A" is set when the value of the obtained effect counter 223g is in the range of "0 to 44", and "effect pattern B" is in the range of "45 to 64". , "effect pattern C" is selected in the range of "65 to 84", "effect pattern D" is selected in the range of "85 to 96", and "effect pattern E" is selected in the range of "99 to 99". stipulated.

That is, the effect pattern A becomes a effect pattern (default effect pattern) selected at the same selection ratio (45%) regardless of which setting value is set. When the effect based on the default effect pattern is executed, the setting cannot be suggested from the effect mode, but it is possible to grasp that the setting suggesting effect has been executed. Therefore, by determining the number of times the setting suggestion effect is executed, for example, the set value can be predicted based on the number of times the setting suggestion effect is executed within a predetermined period, or the total number of times the setting suggestion effect is executed This provides reference information when predicting a set value by analyzing the number of times of setting suggesting effects executed in a specific effect pattern.

Also, effect pattern B is a effect pattern that cannot be selected in setting 1, that is, a effect pattern in which setting 1 is denied when executed. This production pattern B is a production pattern for notifying the player of a set value that has not been set. In other words, the effect pattern B does not directly notify the set value, but it becomes a effect pattern that can progress the setting estimation by combining with the information of the setting suggesting effect that has been executed.

The effect pattern C is more likely to be selected with the high setting than with the low setting, but since the difference in the selection ratio is small, the set value is difficult to predict. Effect pattern D, like effect pattern C described above, is a effect pattern that is more likely to be selected at high settings than at low settings, and is defined so as to produce a greater difference in the selection ratio than effect pattern C described above. there is In other words, the setting pattern C and the effect pattern D provide a effect that the higher the setting is, the more the effect can be expected.

Finally, effect pattern E is a effect pattern that can be selected only when the high setting (setting 3) is set. When an effect based on this effect pattern is executed, the highest setting (setting "3") is determined, so the appearance rate is lower than other effect patterns. It is possible to solve the problem that the setting value is grasped immediately.

The look-ahead prohibition period selection table 222d is a data table that is referred to when selecting a period during which execution of the look-ahead effect is prohibited. It is referred to when it is determined that it has been established. When it is determined that the selected look-ahead prohibition period overlaps with the SP time period, execution of the look-ahead effect is prohibited.

In this look-ahead prohibition period selection table 222d, there are different prohibition periods based on the holding position of the reserved pattern (performance target hold) to be executed for the look-ahead performance, the presence or absence of the jackpot winning within the look-ahead performance period, and the number of jackpot winnings. is stipulated. By configuring in this way, there are a first look-ahead performance including a big win win in which the look-ahead performance period tends to be long, and a second look-ahead performance in which a look-ahead performance period tends to be shorter than the first look-ahead performance because the jackpot win is not included. , the read-ahead prohibition period can be made different.

Here, conventionally, there is a pachinko machine 10 which increases the variations of the performances to be executed and enhances the performance effects by executing various performances based on different execution opportunities. In such a pachinko machine 10, since a plurality of effects are executed by establishment of different triggers, a plurality of effects are executed in duplicate depending on the execution timing of each effect, and effects that are difficult for the player to understand are executed. I had a problem with it. Therefore, in the conventional pachinko machine 10, when an execution opportunity for executing a specific performance is established, the execution status of other performances is determined, and whether or not to execute the specific performance is determined based on the determination result. By doing so, it is possible to suppress the execution of an effect that is difficult for the player to understand.

However, in the above-described conventional pachinko machine 10, in order to suppress the execution of an effect that is difficult for the player to understand, the execution of a specific effect is prohibited more than necessary, and the effect of the effect is preferably enhanced. There was a problem that it was not possible to On the other hand, in the present embodiment, when the execution trigger of a specific effect is established, the execution period of the specific effect is calculated, and based on the calculation result, the overlapping period with other effects is predicted, It is configured to determine whether or not to execute a specific effect based on the prediction result. Furthermore, when calculating the execution period of the specific effect, the presence or absence of the jackpot winning and the suspension of the effect object are included as elements that create a large difference in the effect period of the specific effect (prefetch effect). It consists of

Therefore, it is possible to increase the accuracy when calculating the execution period of a specific effect (prefetch effect), and execute a specific effect (prefetch effect) even at the timing when execution of a specific effect is prohibited in the past. It becomes possible to make it possible, and the performance effect of the pachinko machine 10 can be suitably enhanced.

Referring to FIG. 473(a), the details defined in the look-ahead prohibition period selection table 222d will be specifically described. When the number of jackpots is ``1'', the prohibition period is ``460 seconds'', and when the performance object suspension is ``1'' and the jackpot during the look-ahead performance period is ``none'', the prohibition period is ``110 seconds''. is stipulated. In addition, if the performance object hold is "2", the jackpot during the look-ahead performance period is "yes", and the number of jackpots is "1", the prohibition period is "480 seconds", and the number of jackpots is "2". , "830 seconds" is defined as the prohibition period, and "130 seconds" is defined as the prohibition period when the effect object hold is "2" and the jackpot during the prefetch effect period is "none". there is

Furthermore, if the performance object hold is "3", the jackpot during the look-ahead performance period is "yes", and the number of jackpots is "1", the prohibition period is "500 seconds" and the number of jackpots is "2 or more". In the case of , the execution of the look-ahead effect is unconditionally prohibited, and if the effect object suspension is '3' and the jackpot during the look-ahead effect period is 'none', the prohibition period is '150 seconds'. . Then, if the performance object suspension is "4", the jackpot during the look-ahead performance period is "yes", and the number of jackpots is "1", the prohibition period is "520 seconds" and the number of jackpots is "2 or more". In the case of , the execution of the look-ahead effect is unconditionally prohibited, and if the effect target hold is '4' and the jackpot during the look-ahead effect period is 'none', the prohibition period is defined as '170 seconds'. .

That is, when the execution opportunity of the look-ahead effect is established based on the information included in the received winning command, the larger the holding position of the special figure reservation where the execution opportunity is established, that is, the look-ahead effect that the look-ahead effect is executed As the number of times of special symbol lottery executed during the period increases, the look-ahead performance period tends to become longer inevitably, so the prohibition period is defined longer. More specifically, the prohibition period is defined so that there is no problem even if the maximum fluctuation time (20 seconds) of the special symbol fluctuation that can be executed during the look-ahead effect period is set.

Furthermore, when the big win game can be executed during the look-ahead performance period, that is, when the look-ahead performance is executed with the big win game interposed therebetween, in addition to the special symbol variation period, the prohibition period is also considered in consideration of the big win game period. is stipulated, and a longer prohibition period is stipulated when the jackpot game is executed than when the jackpot game is not executed. In this manner, the length of the prohibition period of the look-ahead effect can be greatly varied depending on whether or not the big winning game is executed. In addition, when a plurality of jackpot winnings are included in the look-ahead performance period, execution of the look-ahead performance is prohibited without judging the degree of overlap between the look-ahead performance prohibition period and the SP time period. ing. As a result, when a situation arises in which the look-ahead prohibition period can be lengthened, it is possible to prohibit execution of the look-ahead effect without determining the degree of overlap with the SP time period. It is possible to reduce the processing load of the control processing executed in .

In this embodiment, as described above, when the execution trigger of the look-ahead effect is established, the maximum time of the look-ahead effect that can be executed is calculated, and the SP time period is set until the maximum time elapses. In this case, by prohibiting the execution of the look-ahead effect, the SP time period is set during the look-ahead effect, and the execution of the effect that is difficult for the player to understand is used. , without being limited to this, a correction process for correcting the calculated maximum time of the look-ahead effect may be configured to be executable. In other words, based on information indicating the effect period of the actually executed pre-reading effect (partial period of the pre-reading effect), the maximum time of the pre-reading effect is calculated based on the maximum time. It may be configured to correct gradually. As a result, it is possible to improve the calculation accuracy of the maximum time of the look-ahead effect that can actually be executed, so that it is possible to easily specify the period in which the look-ahead effect can be executed without duplication with other effects. .

The reserved upper limit effect selection table 222e is a data table referred to when determining the effect mode of the reserved upper limit effect executed when the number of stored reserved symbols reaches the upper limit number (8), Different performance patterns are determined based on whether or not there is a pending pattern (hitting pending) for winning a jackpot in pending-stored pending patterns, and based on the number of existing winning pending and the value of the acquired performance counter 223g. (Direction mode) is defined.

Specifically, when there is a winning reserve and the number of winning pending is 1, the value of the acquired production counter 223g is in the range of “0 to 44”, and the production pattern of “upper limit notification” is set. , in the range of "45 to 69", the effect pattern of "chance announcement" is defined, and in the range of "70 to 99", the effect pattern of "fish school festival" is defined. In addition, when there is a winning suspension, and the number of winning suspensions is 2, the value of the acquired production counter 223g is in the range of "0 to 39", and the production pattern of "chance announcement" is "40". ~ 99", the effect patterns of the "fish school festival" are defined respectively. Furthermore, when there is a hit reserve, and the number of hit reserves is 3 or more, the production pattern of "fish school festival" is set in the range of "0 to 99" for the value of the acquired production counter 223g. stipulated.

On the other hand, when there is no winning hold, the value of the obtained effect counter 223g is in the range of "0 to 64", and the effect pattern of "upper limit notification" is in the range of "65 to 99", "chance announcement". , are defined respectively.

The effect execution number selection table 222f is a data table that is referred to when the special mode is entered and the number of setting suggestion effects (the number of effect executions) to be executed during the special mode period is determined. , Various numbers are defined based on the length of the special mode remaining period (special figure remaining fluctuation time) at the time of entering the special mode, the set value, and the value of the obtained effect counter 223g.

Here, with reference to FIG. 474, a detailed description will be given of the contents defined in the effect execution number selection table 222f. FIG. 474 is a diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the effect execution number selection table 222f. As shown in FIG. 474, the effect execution number selection table 222f defines different numbers as the effect execution number based on the set value, the remaining period of the special mode, and the acquired value of the effect counter 223g. there is

The mission selection table 222g is a data table referred to when determining the contents of the mission to be executed during the SP time period, and is a mission (effect pattern) that differs according to the set value and the value of the obtained effect counter 223g. is stipulated. In other words, it is possible for the player to predict the set value depending on the contents of the mission executed during the SP time period. Furthermore, in this embodiment, even when the content of the selected mission is achieved, a setting suggestion effect for suggesting the setting value is executed.

Therefore, in a series of effects (mission effects), setting suggesting effects can be executed at a plurality of timings, that is, when the mission content is displayed and when the mission is accomplished.

Here, with reference to FIG. 475, the contents of the mission selection table 222g will be described in detail. FIG. 475 is a diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the mission selection table 222g. As shown in FIG. 475, the mission selection table 222g defines four types of effect patterns (mission contents) according to the set value and the acquired value of the effect counter 223g. The stipulated four types of mission content are stipulated to have different selection rates according to set values, and to have different levels of mission achievement difficulty.

The promotion point selection table 222h is a data table referred to when selecting the effect mode of the round effect in the effect during the jackpot game, and as shown in FIG. A different number of points (number of points to be given) is defined in correspondence with the above. Based on the number of points given here, the effect mode of the round effect during the round effect is determined by referring to a later-described promotion effect selection table 222i (see FIG. 477).

The promotion effect selection table 222i is a data table referred to when determining the effect contents of the promotion effect to be executed, based on the number of granted points obtained by referring to the promotion point selection table 222h and the value of the effect counter 223g. The higher the total value of the number of awarded points (total points), the greater the amount of privilege granted to the player.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 470(b), the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 stores a special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223a, a special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223b, a fluctuation start flag 223d, and a stop type selection flag 223e. , Winning information storage area 223f, effect counter 223g, effect state storage area 223h, setting value storage area 223i, setting changing flag 223j, executed setting suggestive effect storage area 223k, acquired ball number storage area 223n, period effect in progress flag 223p , mission information storage area 223q, time information storage area 223r, operation disable timer 223s, continuous announcement execution flag 223t, continuous announcement counter 223u, background mode storage area 223v, specialized mode flag 223w, round number counter 223x, character display flag 223y, and at least a memory area 223z.

The special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223a is a variable display of the first special symbol performed by the first symbol display device 37 (and the third symbol display device 81), and is the first symbol reserved by the main controller 110. A counter that counts the number of pending balls (waiting times) for variable effects of special patterns up to 4 times for each type of special pattern. Update according to the timing of increase or decrease.

The special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223b, like the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223a, is a variable display of the second special symbol performed by the first symbol display device 37 (and the third symbol display device 81). , A counter that counts the number of pending balls (number of standby times) of the second special symbol variable effect suspended in the main control device 110 up to 4 times for each type of special symbol, and when a winning information command is received, It is updated according to the timing when the number of held balls increases or decreases, such as when a variation pattern command is received.

As described above, the voice ramp control device 113 directly accesses the main control device 110, and the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e stored in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 Cannot get value. Therefore, the voice lamp control device 113 counts the number of reserved balls based on the number of reserved balls command transmitted from the main controller 110, and the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223a and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223b Then, the number of reserved balls is managed for each type of special symbol.

Specifically, in the main controller 110, when the start winning is detected and the number of pending balls of the variable display is added, or the variable display in the special symbol is executed in the main controller 110 and the number of the pending balls is subtracted. If so, it transmits to the sound lamp control device 113 a reserved ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d after addition or subtraction or the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e.

When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main controller 110, the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d of the main controller 110 or the special symbol 2 reserved ball from the reserved ball number command The value of the number counter 203e is acquired and stored in the counter corresponding to the command, out of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223a or the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223b. In this way, the voice lamp control device 113 updates the values of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223a and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223b according to the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main controller 110. While synchronizing with the values of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e of the main controller 110, the values can be updated.

The values of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223 a and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223 b are used to display the reserved ball number symbols on the third symbol display device 81 . That is, the voice lamp control device 113, in response to receiving the reserved ball number command, stores the reserved ball number indicated by the command in the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223a or the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223b. , In order to notify the display control device 114 of the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223a or the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223b after storage, a display reserved ball number command is transmitted to the display control device 114. .

When the display control device 114 receives this display pending ball number command, the value of the pending ball number indicated by the command, that is, the special symbol 1 pending ball number counter 223a of the sound lamp control device 113, or the special symbol 2 pending ball number counter 223a The drawing of the image is controlled so that the number of reserved ball symbols corresponding to the value of the ball counter 223b is displayed in the sub-display area Ds of the third symbol display device 81. FIG. As described above, the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223a changes its value while synchronizing with the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d of the main control device 110, and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223b is mainly While synchronizing with the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e of the control device 110, the value is changed. Therefore, the number of reserved ball number symbols displayed in the sub display area Ds of the third pattern display device 81 is also the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e of the main control device 110. It can be changed while synchronizing. Therefore, the third symbol display device 81 can accurately display the number of held balls whose variable display is held.

The fluctuation start flag 223d is turned on when the first special symbol fluctuation pattern command or the second special symbol fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110 is received, and the fluctuation display on the third symbol display device 81 is changed. Turned off when set. When the fluctuation start flag 223d is turned on, a fluctuation pattern command for display is set based on the fluctuation pattern extracted from the received fluctuation pattern command.

The display variation pattern command set here is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is transmitted to the display control device 114 during the command output processing of the main processing executed by the MPU 221. be done. In the display control device 114, by receiving this display variation pattern command, the variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command is used to perform the variation display of the third symbol on the third symbol display device 81. Display control of the variable effect is started.

The stop type selection flag 223e is turned on when a special symbol stop type command transmitted from the main controller 110 is received, and is turned off when the stop type is set in the third symbol display device 81. When the stop type selection flag 223e is turned on, the stop type is determined based on the stop type (jackpot type in the case of a jackpot) extracted from the received stop type command.

The winning information storage area 223f includes one execution area, four areas (first area to fourth area) corresponding to the first special symbol, and four areas (first area to fourth area) corresponding to the second special symbol. 4 areas), and winning information is stored in each of these areas. In the pachinko machine 10, when the main controller 110 detects the start winning for the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640, a special winning random number counter C1 obtained in response to the start winning, From each value of the special hit type counter C2 and the variation type counter CS1, various information (win or not, jackpot type in the case of a jackpot, fluctuation pattern) obtained when a special symbol lottery corresponding to the start winning is performed. The main controller 110 predicts (estimates), and the predicted various information is notified from the main controller 110 to the audio lamp controller 113 by means of winning information commands.

When the winning information command is received, the audio lamp control device 113 extracts various information (win or fail, jackpot type in the case of a jackpot, variation pattern) notified by the winning information command as winning information, and extracts the winning information. is stored in the winning information storage area 223f. More specifically, the extracted winning information is divided into four areas (first area to Among the vacant areas of the fourth area), the area numbers (first to fourth) are stored in ascending order. That is, the smaller the area number, the data corresponding to the oldest winning is stored, and the first area stores the data corresponding to the oldest winning.

In addition, in the twenty-seventh embodiment, in the main controller 110, based on various information obtained when the special symbol lottery corresponding to the start winning is performed (win or not, jackpot type in the case of jackpot, variation pattern) Although the winning information command is set and notified to the audio lamp control device 113, other configurations may be used.

For example, when a starting prize is generated, various information already stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b in various information predicted corresponding to the start prize. a setting means for setting a winning information command by adding , various information (winning information) already stored in the winning information storage area 223f when the winning information command is received, and information included in the received winning information command A determination means for determining whether or not the various information (winning information) matches may be provided. This makes it possible to determine whether the various information (winning information) stored in the winning information storage area 223f is properly stored.

In addition, in the twenty-seventh embodiment, when a new starting prize is generated, a winning information command is set and notified to the sound lamp control device 113. However, the winning information command is sent to the sound lamp control device 113. The timing of notification is not limited to the timing described above (the timing at which the winning information command is set). (For example, 5-second intervals), when the game conditions are variable (for example, when the game state changes from the time-saving state to the normal state, when the jackpot game starts or ends, etc.), or when the special symbol starts to fluctuate (or A configuration may be used in which the winning information command stored in the storage means is notified to the audio lamp control device 113 when the game is stopped. With this configuration, it is possible to appropriately execute an effect (so-called prefetch effect) using the winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223f.

In this embodiment, based on each piece of prize winning information stored in the winning prize information storage area 223f, setting of the effect mode such as change of the display color of the pending symbol is executed as the prefetch effect. In this way, by executing various effects (read-ahead effects) based on the winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223f, the player can be notified of each reserved ball before the start of the variable display. It can give you a sense of anticipation for a big hit. Also, it is possible to execute a long-term effect using a plurality of variable display periods.

The effect counter 223g is a counter used for selection of variation patterns, selection of various effects, etc., and is repeatedly updated within a range of 0 to 98. It should be noted that each time the main process executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 is executed, the value is incremented by 1 and updated.

In this embodiment, counters used for selection of variation patterns, selection of various effects, etc. are collectively referred to as the effect counter 223g, but the effect counter 223g is composed of a plurality of counters , each counter is configured so that its value is periodically updated by the main processing executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113, but each counter is updated so that the updated values do not overlap. It is configured so that the content is not synchronized. In other words, it is composed of a plurality of counters whose values are updated under the same conditions but whose updated values are not related. Then, it is configured to refer to different counter values when selecting various modes of presentation. With this configuration, when a plurality of performance modes are determined in the same process, the plurality of performance modes are determined based on the same counter value, and variations in performance are reduced. can be suppressed.

In the present embodiment, the effect counter 223g has a configuration in which a plurality of counters are provided. Based on this, it may be configured to select various types of effects, and in this case, it may be configured to execute predetermined arithmetic processing when reading the value of the effect counter 223g. By configuring in this way, it is possible to suppress reduction in variations of effects even when a plurality of effects modes of effects are selected based on the same counter value of the effect counter 223g.

The effect state storage area 223h is a storage area for temporarily storing the effect state (details of effect) determined by various control processes executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113, and is determined by the various control processes. The content (information) is stored. Then, by reading the information stored in the effect state storage area 223h, the effect mode corresponding to the determined effect state is set.

By storing the performance state (performance content) in the performance state storage area 223h, even if the timing of determining the performance state (performance content) and the timing of setting the performance mode are different, the determined performance can be obtained. A performance mode corresponding to a state (contents of performance) can be surely set.

The setting value storage area 223i is a storage area for storing the setting value based on the information when the information about the setting value output from the main controller 110 is received. Specifically, when the state command including information on the set value is set (see S913 in FIG. 498) in the start-up process of main controller 110 (see FIG. 498), and the received state command is received, A setting value is specified based on the information included in the status command, and information indicating the specified setting value is stored in the setting value storage area 223i.

The information stored in the setting value storage area 223i is referred to when determining the effect mode of the setting suggestion effect. Although detailed description will be given later, in this embodiment, when executing a setting change operation for changing the setting value, it is configured to always require an operation of turning on the power of the pachinko machine 10, and A status command containing information about the setting value is configured to be set after the setting change operation is completed. Furthermore, every time the pachinko machine 10 is powered on (every time the start-up process of the main controller 110 (see FIG. 498) is executed), a state command including information about the setting value is voiced from the main controller 110. It is configured to be output to the lamp control device 113 . With this configuration, even if the information about the set value is output from the main controller 110 to the audio lamp controller 113 only at a limited timing such as when the power is turned on, the audio lamp controller 113 side The current set value can be reliably grasped by .

In addition, by minimizing the chances of outputting information about the setting value, it is possible to prevent the illegal acquisition of the information about the setting value. Furthermore, in this embodiment, the signal indicating the setting value set in the pachinko machine 10 is not directly output to the outside, but the information about the setting value is output. Even if it is, it becomes difficult to specify the setting value indicated by the information, so that it is possible to suppress the act of illegally obtaining the information regarding the setting value. In addition, in this embodiment, a part of the state command for indicating the gaming state (for example, the upper bits that are likely to be empty bits among the 8 bits for generating the state command) are used to set information about the setting value. Therefore, it is more difficult to identify the setting value indicated by the output information than when the information about the setting value is output alone. can be suppressed.

Furthermore, since the setting value storage area 223i is configured to store the information indicating the setting value instead of the setting value, the information stored in the setting value storage area 223i can be illegally acquired. Even if the setting value is specified, it becomes difficult to specify the setting value indicated by the output information.

In this embodiment, a dedicated storage area called the setting value storage area 223i is provided as a storage area for storing information about setting values (information indicating setting values). A part of another storage area (empty area) is configured to store information for indicating the setting value, and the storage area in which the information on the setting value (information for indicating the setting value) is stored It may be configured to store the address to be indicated in a specific area. In this case, it is configured to periodically or irregularly change the area for storing the information on the set value (information for indicating the set value). good to do

Further, it is preferable that the information about the setting value (information for indicating the setting value) is processed according to a predetermined rule corresponding to the specification of the storage area for storing the information about the setting value. By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent the setting value from being illegally obtained based on the information stored in the RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113 .

The setting changing flag 223j is a flag for indicating that the setting is currently being changed, and is set to ON when a changing command indicating that the setting is being changed is output from the main controller 110. (see S2073 in FIG. 505). Then, it is referred to in the standby process (see S2012 in FIG. 505) (see S2071 in FIG. 505), and is set to OFF when it is determined that a change completion command indicating that the setting change is completed has been received (see S2012 in FIG. 505). (see S2077).

By providing this setting changing flag 223j, it becomes possible for the sound lamp control device 113 to grasp the operation status of the setting changing operation executed by the main control device 110. The process of the standby process (see S2012 in FIG. 505) that is executed during the period can be switched according to the operation status of the setting change operation. Therefore, the processing load of the control processing executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 can be reduced.

The executed setting suggesting effect storage area 223k is a storage area for temporarily storing the contents of the setting suggesting effect executed during the jackpot game, and when the setting suggesting effect is set as part of the round effect. , information indicating the mode of presentation (contents of presentation) is stored. Then, the stored information is referred to when selecting the effect mode of the end screen effect executed in the ending period of the jackpot game. In this embodiment, in order to equalize the information given to the player by the setting suggestion effect executed during the jackpot game, the end screen effect is displayed based on the contents of the setting suggestion effect executed during the jackpot game. It is configured to determine the content of the setting suggestion effect executed by By configuring in this way, it is possible to adjust the performance amount (information amount for predicting the set value) of the setting suggestion performance provided to the player in one jackpot game, and one jackpot game. It is possible to suppress the fact that the player's willingness to play is lowered because the setting suggesting performance is not executed at all, or that the setting suggesting performance is excessively executed in one big winning game.

Then, after the effect mode of the end screen effect is determined, the information stored in the executed setting suggestion effect storage area 223k is cleared.

Winning ball number storage area 223n is a storage area for cumulatively storing the number of awarded balls. The number of prize balls is cumulatively stored based on the information included in the command. In the obtained ball number storage area 223n, the number of prize balls put out during an advantageous period advantageous to the player such as the time saving state, the variable probability state, and the jackpot game is accumulated. Then, when the advantageous period ends, that is, when the game state shifts to the normal state, the stored information is cleared.

The information stored in the acquired ball number storage area 223n is referred to when updating the acquired ball number display mode for informing the player of the number of balls paid out during the advantageous period. In the present embodiment, the information stored in the winning ball number storage area 223n is cleared when the advantageous period ends. After that, the information may be cleared based on the establishment of a predetermined condition (the condition that is established when the special symbol lottery is executed 10 times). By constructing in this way, when another advantageous period is set immediately after the end of one advantageous period, the number of obtained balls is displayed with the contents of the number of prize balls obtained during the previous advantageous period taken over. (pull-back display) becomes possible. Therefore, it is possible to motivate a player who wants to display a large number of balls as the display of the number of winnings aiming at the next big winning game even after the advantageous period ends.

The period effect in-progress flag 223p is a flag for indicating that the SP time effect is being executed, and the elapsed time T calculated based on the time information clocked by the timer 292 is the SP time period. is set to on. Then, when the elapsed time has passed the SP time period and the end condition of the SP time presentation is satisfied, the setting is turned off.

When the period production flag 223p is set to ON, when setting the production mode of the variable production, the production mode dedicated to the period production (SP time production) is set, or the third symbol display device 81 The background image displayed on the display surface of is a dedicated background image.

The mission information storage area 223q is a recording area for storing an effect mode (mission contents) of the mission effect executed as the SP time effect and the achievement degree of the mission. The effect content determined by referring to the selection table 222g is stored. Then, every time the special symbol lottery is executed during the SP time period (every time the variable performance is executed), information indicating the degree of achievement of the mission is updated and stored.

The time information storage area 223r is an area in which time information (clock information) of the clock device 292 is stored when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on. During the time acquisition process (see S2011 in FIG. 504) of the start-up process executed by the MPU 221, the current time information (clock information) acquired from the clock device 292 is stored. The stored timing information calculates the elapsed time T from power-on in the elapsed time confirmation process (see S2111 in FIG. 521) of the main process executed by the MPU 221, and determines whether it is a normal effect period or an SP period ( SP time period) (see S3604 in FIG. 521). In addition, since the contents stored in the RAM 223 are not backed up, when the power supply to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, the clock information stored in the time information storage area 223f is cleared.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the type of presentation period is determined based on the time information acquired from the clock device 292 during startup processing and stored in the time information storage area 223r. By synchronizing the start-up timings of the pachinko machines 10, the timings of storing the time information in the time information storage areas 223r of the pachinko machines 10 can also be synchronised. If the timing at which the time information is stored in the time information storage area 223r matches, the elapsed time T calculated in the elapsed time confirmation process (S2111) in each pachinko machine 10 can also be matched. The timing for switching from the normal performance period to the SP time period based on T and the timing for switching from the special performance period to the SP time period based on the elapsed time T can be matched. As a result, the parties involved in the hall can align the presentation periods of the pachinko machines 10 only by simultaneously turning on the power to the plurality of pachinko machines 10.例文帳に追加Therefore, some of the pachinko machines 10 are in the normal performance period, and the other pachinko machines 10 are in the SP time period, so that the player who is playing the game can perform the performance in a different performance mode from the other pachinko machines 10. It is possible to suppress feeling uncomfortable with the fact that In addition, as a method of simultaneously turning on the power to a plurality of pachinko machines 10, for example, an island consisting of a plurality of pachinko machines 10 is provided, and an external power source capable of turning on the power for each island is provided. It should be set.

In addition, in this embodiment, instead of determining the time from the time information of the clock device 292 and switching the type of the effect period according to the time zone, the time information acquired during the startup process and the elapsed time confirmation process ( The elapsed time T is calculated from the time information acquired in S2111), and based on the elapsed time T, the type of effect period is determined. As a result, even if the time information of the timing device 292 of each pachinko machine 10 is deviated from each other due to deterioration over time, etc., the time information that has deviated from each other is not directly used to determine the type of the presentation period, Since it can be converted into a relative value of time T and used to determine the type of presentation period, the influence of deviation can be reduced. Therefore, in a plurality of pachinko machines 10, the timing for switching from the normal performance period to the SP time period based on the elapsed time T and the timing for switching from the SP time period to the normal performance period based on the elapsed time T can be matched. Therefore, since the performance period of each pachinko machine 10 can be aligned, some of the pachinko machines 10 are in the normal performance period, and the other pachinko machines 10 are in the SP time period, so that the players who are playing the game It is possible to prevent the player from having a sense of incongruity with the performance being executed in a performance mode different from that of other pachinko machines 10.例文帳に追加

The operation disable timer 223s is a counter for setting a period during which the operation of the frame button 22 is not determined to be valid. Not determined (disabled). This operation disable timer 223s is set to a value indicating a predetermined period (5 seconds) when the end timing of the start-up processing of the sound lamp control device 113 is earlier than the end timing of the boot processing of the third pattern display device 81. .

By configuring in this manner, the operation of the frame button 22 can be effectively discriminated in a state in which the boot processing is not completed, that is, in a state in which the necessary information cannot be displayed on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81. As a result, the operation result of the frame button 22 specified by the sound lamp control device 113 side and the operation result of the frame button 22 specified by the display control device 114 side (third pattern display device 81 side) are different. can be suppressed.

The continuous announcement execution flag 223t is a flag for indicating that the look-ahead effect is being executed, and is set to ON when the look-ahead effect is executed. And it is set to OFF by executing the special symbol variation to be the target of the look-ahead effect.

The other memory area 223z is an area for setting or storing various data, flags, counters, etc. in the control process executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113. FIG.

The RAM 223 also has a command storage area (not shown) for temporarily storing commands received from the main controller 110 until processing corresponding to the commands is performed. The command storage area is composed of a ring buffer, and data is read and written by a FIFO (First In First Out) method. When the command determination processing (see FIG. 507) of the sound lamp control device 113 is executed, the first stored command among the unprocessed commands stored in the command storage area is read, and the command determination processing The command is parsed and processing is performed according to the command.

The display control device 114 is connected to the sound lamp control device 113 and the third pattern display device 81, and based on the command received from the sound lamp control device 113, the third pattern display device 81 performs variable display (variation production) is controlled. Details of the display control device 114 will be described later with reference to FIG.

The power supply device 115 includes a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each part of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to power failure, etc., and a RAM provided with a RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 446). and an erase switch circuit 253 . The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies necessary operating voltages to the control devices 110 to 114 and the like through a power supply path (not shown). As an overview, the power supply unit 251 takes in a voltage of 24 volts supplied from the outside, various switches such as the various switches 208, solenoids such as the solenoid 209, a voltage of 12 volts for driving a motor, etc. A voltage of 5 volts for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, etc. are generated, and these 12 volts, 5 volts and backup voltages are supplied to the controllers 110 to 114 and the like as necessary voltages.

The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 at the time of power failure due to power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the voltage of stable DC 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and determines that a power failure (power shutdown, power shutdown) has occurred when this voltage is less than 22 volts. Then, a power failure signal SG1 is output to the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111. By the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute NMI interrupt processing. Even after the stable DC voltage of 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts, the power supply unit 251 outputs a voltage of 5 volts, which is the driving voltage of the control system, for a time sufficient to execute the NMI interrupt processing. is configured to maintain a normal value. Therefore, the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 497).

The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing the backup data to the main controller 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 446) is pressed. When the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, the main controller 110 clears the backup data when the RAM erase signal SG2 is input, and controls the payout initialization command for clearing the backup data in the payout control device 111. Send to device 111 .

The clock device 292 is connected to the main controller 110 and includes a real-time clock (RTC) capable of keeping current time. Here, the configuration of the clock device 292 will be described with reference to FIGS. 478 and 479. FIG. FIG. 478 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the clock device 292. As shown in FIG. The clock device 292 has an input/output port 350 , a device control section 351 and a register 352 . In addition, a power source 293 for a timepiece is connected to the timepiece 292 . The power source 293 for the timing device is a power source dedicated to the timing device 292 which is different from the power source of the pachinko machine 10, and can supply power to the timing device 292 even when the pachinko machine 10 is powered off. A button-type battery is used for the power source 293 for the clock device.

An input/output port 350 and a register 352 are connected to the device control section 351 of the clock device 292 . Input/output port 350 is interconnected with audio lamp controller 113 . The device control unit 351 uses (controls) the register 352 to perform various controls such as clocking of the current time and execution of an alarm at a set time. Here, the register 352 has a register table consisting of a plurality of registers, as shown in FIG. This register table includes a clock register 352a and an input time storage area 352b. That is, as shown in FIG. 478, the register 352 of the timer 292 is provided with at least a clock register 352a and an input time storage area 352b.

The clock register 352a is a register for clocking the current time, and the register value is updated every second. The input time storage area 352b is a storage area in which various information such as clock information can be written and the stored information can be overwritten. The turn-on time storage area 352b is an area in which the clock information stored in the time information storage area 223ba of the RAM 203 is written when there is power failure occurrence information during the main processing executed by the MPU 221.

Here, referring to FIG. 479, the register table of register 352 will be described in detail. FIG. 479 is a diagram schematically showing part of the register table of the register 352. As shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 479, the register 352 can hold maximum 8-bit data at each of 15 addresses from 0H to EH in the register table. Among these addresses, addresses 0H to 6H correspond to the clock register 352a, and each address represents the second, minute, hour, day of the week, date, month, and year, respectively.

The details of the clock register 352b will be described by taking the address 0H representing seconds as an example. Bit7 of address 0H is a non-rewritable bit fixed at L, and the current number of seconds is expressed using bit0 to bit6. The symbol "o" attached to bit7 in FIG. 479 is a symbol indicating that it is a non-rewritable bit, and has the same meaning in other addresses. Also, bit0 to bit6 correspond to 1 second, 2 seconds, 4 seconds, 8 seconds, 10 seconds, 20 seconds and 40 seconds, respectively. is indicated.

For example, if the number of seconds in the current time is 5 seconds, bit0 representing 1 second and bit2 representing 4 seconds are both H, and bits 1, 3, 4, 5 and 6 are all L. As a result, 5 seconds, which is the sum of the number of seconds represented by the bits of H, can be expressed as the number of seconds at the current time. Also, if the number of seconds in the current time is 29 seconds, bit 0 representing 1 second, bit 3 representing 8 seconds, and bit 5 representing 20 seconds are H, and bits 1, 2, 4, and 6 are all L. Become. As a result, 29 seconds, which is the sum of the number of seconds represented by the bits of H, can be expressed as the number of seconds at the current time.

The address 1H representing the minute, the address 2H representing the hour, the address 4H representing the day, the address 5H representing the month, and the address 6H representing the year correspond to the H bit in the same manner as the address 0H representing the second. The current time is represented by the sum of the numerical values. The address 6H representing the year represents the lower two digits of the Christian era, and the upper two digits of the Christian calendar are fixed at 20. In other words, the address 6H representing the year can express only the year 2000-2099.

As for the address 3H representing the day of the week, bits 0 to 6 correspond to Sunday, Monday, Tuesday, Wednesday, Thursday, Friday, and Saturday, respectively, one bit being H and the other bits being L. A specific day of the week can be represented by becoming For example, if the current day is Wednesday, bit3 is H and bits0, 1, 2, 4, 5, 6 are L.

Addresses 7H to 9H correspond to the input time storage area 352b, and can store data of up to 3 bytes. A register for storing seconds (corresponding to address 7H), a register for storing minutes (corresponding to address 8H), and a register for storing hours (corresponding to address 9H) are assigned to the input time storage area 352b by 1 byte each. ing. Correspondence between each bit and seconds, minutes, and hours is the same as that of addresses 0H to 2H.

That is, bit0 to bit6 of the register for storing seconds correspond to 1 second, 2 seconds, 4 seconds, 8 seconds, 10 seconds, 20 seconds and 40 seconds, respectively, and bit0 to bit6 of the register for storing minutes are , 1 minute, 2 minutes, 4 minutes, 8 minutes, 10 minutes, 20 minutes, and 40 minutes, respectively. It corresponds to hours, 10 hours, and 20 hours. In FIG. 479, all the bits are marked with "●", which is a symbol indicating that the information can be rewritten and read. also have the same meaning.

The correspondence between each bit of the clock register 352a and the input time storage area 352b and the number of seconds or minutes is not limited to that of this embodiment. For example, a power of 2 may be associated with the numerical value of each bit. Also, in the present embodiment, the input time storage area 352b is composed of 3 bytes, but the number of bytes may be reduced by storing only the hour and minute values as the time information to be stored, for example. Also, the number of bytes may be increased by adding a register capable of storing milliseconds in addition to seconds, minutes, and hours. Furthermore, instead of storing the clock information in the input time storage area 352b, a storage means such as a RAM may be provided outside the clock device 292. FIG. In this case, power supply to the storage means may be performed by the timepiece power supply 293, or a separate power supply dedicated to the storage means may be provided.

Addresses AH to CH are registers used to output alarm signals at set times, and addresses DH and EH are registers capable of outputting interrupt signals at set intervals. If the alarm function and interrupt function are not used, addresses AH to EH can be used as the input time storage area 352b instead of addresses 7H to 9H. In this case, 3 bytes of addresses 7H to 9H can be reduced, so the number of registers can be reduced, and the cost of the clock device 262 can be reduced.

Although only registers assigned to addresses 0H to EH are shown in FIG. 479, there are registers assigned addresses other than 0H to EH. Registers and the like are provided for changing the settings of the interrupt function and the like.

<Regarding the electrical configuration of the display control device 114 in the twenty-seventh embodiment>
Next, referring to FIG. 480, the electrical configuration of display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 480 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the display control device 114. As shown in FIG. The display control device 114 includes an MPU 231, a work RAM 233, a character ROM 234, a resident video RAM 235, a normal video RAM 236, an image controller 237, an input port 238, an output port 262, and bus lines 240 and 241. have.

The output side of the sound lamp control device 113 is connected to the input side of the input port 238 , and the MPU 231 , work RAM 233 , character ROM 234 and image controller 237 are connected to the output side of the input port 238 via the bus line 240 . . A resident video RAM 235 and a normal video RAM 236 are connected to the image controller 237 , and an output port 262 is connected via a bus line 241 . A third symbol display device 81 is connected to the output side of the output port 262 .

Even if the pachinko machine 10 is a different model with a different lottery probability of a special symbol jackpot or a different number of prize balls paid out for one special symbol jackpot, the symbols displayed on the third symbol display device 81 are different. Since there are models with exactly the same specifications, the display control device 114 is made a common component to reduce costs.

The MPU 231, character ROM 234, image controller 237, resident video RAM 235, and normal video RAM 236 will be described first, and then the work RAM 233 will be described below.

First, the MPU 231 controls the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 based on the display variation pattern command output from the audio ramp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command of the main control device 110 . The MPU 231 incorporates an instruction pointer 231a, reads and fetches the instruction code stored at the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a, and executes various processes according to the instruction code. The MPU 231 is designed so that a system reset is applied from the power supply 115 immediately after power is turned on (including recovery from a power failure; the same shall apply hereinafter). is automatically set to “0000H” by the hardware of the MPU 231 . Each time an instruction code is fetched, the value of the instruction pointer 231a is incremented by one. Further, when the MPU 231 executes an instruction pointer setting instruction, the value of the pointer indicated by the setting instruction is set in the instruction pointer 231a.

Although the details will be described later, in this embodiment, the control program executed by the MPU 231 and various fixed value data used in the control program are stored in a dedicated program ROM as in a conventional game machine. The image data to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 is stored in the character ROM 234 provided for storing the data.

Although the details will be described later, the character ROM 234 is composed of a NAND flash memory 234a capable of increasing the capacity with a small area. As a result, not only image data but also control programs and the like can be sufficiently stored. If the control program and the like are stored in the character ROM 234, there is no need to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing the control program and the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and an increase in failure rate due to an increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

On the other hand, the NAND flash memory has a problem that the read speed becomes slow especially when performing random access. For example, when reading data continuously arranged in a plurality of pages, the data of the second and subsequent pages can be read at high speed. It takes a long time before the data is output. Also, when reading discontinuous data, a long time is required each time the data is read. In this way, since the NAND flash memory has a slow read speed, if the MPU 231 is configured to read the control program directly from the character ROM 234 and execute various processes, it takes time to read the instructions that make up the control program. However, even if a high-performance processor is used as the MPU 231, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may deteriorate.

Therefore, in this embodiment, when the system reset of the MPU 231 is released, first, the control program stored in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234 is transferred to the work RAM 233 provided for temporary storage of various data. store. The MPU 231 then executes various processes according to the control program stored in the work RAM 233 . The work RAM 233 is composed of a DRAM (Dynamic RAM), as will be described later, and reads and writes data at high speed. Therefore, the MPU 231 can read instructions constituting the control program without delay. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and the third pattern display device 81 can be used to easily execute diversified and complicated effects.

The character ROM 234 is a memory that stores control programs executed by the MPU 231 and image data displayed on the third pattern display device 81 , and is connected to the MPU 231 via a bus line 240 . The MPU 231 directly accesses the character ROM 234 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, and transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the character ROM 234 to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. An image controller 237 is also connected to the bus line 240, and the image controller 237 transfers image data stored in a character storage area 234a2 of the character ROM 234 to a resident video RAM 235 connected to the image controller 237, or the like. Transfer to the normal video RAM 236 .

The character ROM 234 is constructed by modularizing a NAND flash memory 234a, a ROM controller 234b, a buffer RAM 234c, and a NOR ROM 234d.

The NAND type flash memory 234a is a non-volatile memory provided as a main storage unit in the character ROM 234, and stores most of the control program executed by the MPU 231 and fixed value data for driving the third symbol display device 81. It has at least a second program storage area 234a1 for storage and a character storage area 234a2 for storing data of an image (such as a character) to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. FIG.

Here, the NAND type flash memory has a feature that a large storage capacity can be obtained in a small area, and the capacity of the character ROM 234 can be easily increased. Thus, in this pachinko machine, by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a capacity of, for example, 2 gigabytes, many images can be stored in the character storage area 234a2 as images to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. can. Therefore, the images displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be diversified and complicated in order to increase the interest of the player.

In addition, the NAND flash memory 234a can store control programs and fixed value data in the second program storage area 234a1 while storing a large amount of image data in the character storage area 234a2. In this way, the control program and fixed value data are provided for storing the data of the image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 without providing and storing a dedicated program ROM as in the conventional game machine. Since the characters can be stored in the character ROM 234, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and an increase in the failure rate due to an increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

The ROM controller 234b is a controller for controlling the operation of the character ROM 234. For example, based on the address transmitted from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, the corresponding data is retrieved from the NAND flash memory 234a or the like. is read out and output to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240 .

Here, the NAND type flash memory 234a, due to its nature, generates a relatively large number of error bits (bits in which erroneous data is written) when writing data, and generates defective data blocks into which data cannot be written. or Therefore, the ROM controller 234b applies known error correction to the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a, and avoids bad data blocks when reading and writing data to the NAND flash memory 234a. data address translation.

The ROM controller 234b corrects errors in the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a that contains error bits. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the MPU 231 from performing processing and the image controller 237 from generating various images.

In addition, the ROM controller 234b analyzes the defective data blocks of the NAND flash memory 234a and avoids access to the defective data blocks. Access to the character ROM 234 can be easily performed without considering the address position of the block. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, it is possible to prevent the access control to the character ROM 234 from becoming complicated.

The buffer RAM 234c is a memory used as a buffer for temporarily storing data read from the NAND flash memory 234a. When an address allocated to the character ROM 234 is designated from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, the ROM controller 234b reads one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) of data corresponding to the designated address. is set in the buffer RAM 234c. If not set, one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) of data including data corresponding to the specified address is read from the NAND flash memory 234a (or NOR ROM 234d) and temporarily set in the buffer RAM 234c. do. Then, the ROM controller 234 b outputs the data corresponding to the designated address to the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 via the bus line 240 after performing known error correction processing.

The buffer RAM 234c is composed of two banks, and one page of data of the NAND flash memory 234a can be set in each bank. As a result, the ROM controller 234b, for example, outputs the data of the NAND flash memory 234a to the outside by using the other bank while data is set in one bank, or outputs the data specified by the MPU 231 or the image controller 237. One page of data including the data corresponding to the specified address is transferred from the NAND flash memory 234a to one bank and set, and the data corresponding to the address specified by the MPU 231 or image controller 237 is transferred to the other bank. The processing of reading from the bank and outputting to the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 can be processed in parallel. Therefore, the responsiveness in reading the character ROM 234 can be improved.

The NOR type ROM 234d is a non-volatile memory provided as a sub-storage unit in the character ROM 234, and is intended to complement the NAND type flash memory 234a. ). Of the control programs stored in the character ROM 234, the NOR-type ROM 234d stores programs that are not stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND-type flash memory 234a. At least a first program storage area 234d1 is provided for storing a portion of the boot program to be executed.

The boot program is a control program for activating the display control device 114 so that various controls on the third pattern display device 81 can be executed, and the MPU 231 first executes this boot program after releasing the system reset. As a result, the display control device 114 can be put into a state in which various controls can be executed. The first program storage area 234d1 stores the boot program within the capacity of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c (that is, one page of the NAND flash memory 234a), which should be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. A predetermined number of instructions (for example, if the capacity of one page is 2 kilobytes, instructions for 1024 words (1 word=2 bytes)) are stored. The number of instructions of the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 only needs to be within the capacity of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c, and is appropriately set according to the specifications of the display control device 114. It can be.

When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the value of the instruction pointer 231a to "0000H" by hardware and instructs the bus line 240 to specify the address "0000H" indicated by the instruction pointer 231a. It is configured. On the other hand, when the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address "0000H" is specified on the bus line 240, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d is transferred to one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. , and outputs the corresponding data (instruction code) to the MPU 231 .

When the MPU 231 fetches the instruction code received from the character ROM 234, it executes various processes according to the fetched instruction code, adds 1 to the instruction pointer 231a, and transfers the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. to specify. Then, the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234, while the address specified by the bus line 240 is the address indicating the program stored in the NOR ROM 234d, selects the program previously set in the buffer RAM 234c from the NOR ROM 234d. , the instruction code of the corresponding address is read from the buffer RAM 234 c and output to the MPU 231 .

Here, in this embodiment, instead of storing all the control programs in the NAND flash memory 234a, a predetermined number of instructions from the boot program to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NOR ROM 234d. The reason for storing in is as follows. That is, as described above, the NAND flash memory 234a is unique to the NAND flash memory in that it takes a long time to read the data of the first page after the address is specified until the data is output. There's a problem.

When all the control programs are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 in order to fetch the instruction code that the MPU 231 should execute first after the system reset is released. If so, the character ROM 234 must read one page of data including the data (instruction code) corresponding to the address "0000H" from the NAND flash memory 234a and set it in the buffer RAM 234c. Due to the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a long time to read out and set the data in the buffer RAM 234c. You spend a lot of time waiting to receive your code. Therefore, the time taken to start the MPU 231 becomes longer, and as a result, there arises a problem that the control of the third pattern display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

On the other hand, since the NOR type ROM is a memory from which data can be read at high speed, a predetermined number of instructions from the boot program to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NOR type ROM 234d. Thus, when the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 immediately stores the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d into the buffer RAM 234c. , and the corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231 . Therefore, the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" in a short time after specifying the address "0000H", and the MPU 231 can be activated in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the control of the third pattern display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately.

The boot program is a control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, that is, a control program other than the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d. , fixed value data (for example, a display data table, a transfer data table, etc., which will be described later) used in the control program are stored in the program storage area of the work RAM 233 by a predetermined amount (for example, the capacity of one page of the NAND flash memory 234a). 233a and the data table storage area 233b. The MPU 231 first sets the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 according to the boot program read from the first program storage area 234d1 after the system reset is released. While using a bank different from the bank of the buffer RAM 234c that is stored, a predetermined amount is transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a.

Here, since the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 has a capacity corresponding to one bank of the buffer RAM 234c, as described above, the address of the internal bus is designated as "0000H". When the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 is set in the buffer RAM 234c in response to this, the boot program is set only in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. Therefore, when transferring the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a according to the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1, the first program set in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c is transferred to the program storage area 233a. The transfer process can be performed using the other bank while leaving the boot program in storage area 234d1. Therefore, after the transfer process, it is unnecessary to set the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 again in the buffer RAM 234c, so that the time required for the boot process can be shortened.

When the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 transfers a predetermined amount of the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a, the command pointer 231a is transferred to the program storage area 233a. It is programmed to be set to a first predetermined address. As a result, when the MPU 231 transfers a predetermined amount of the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a after the system reset is released, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the first predetermined number in the program storage area 233a. Set to a street address.

Therefore, when a predetermined amount of the control programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 are stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 reads out the control programs stored in the program storage area 233a, Various processing can be executed. That is, the MPU 231 does not read the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 and fetch the instruction, but rather reads the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a and fetches the instruction. and execute various processes. As will be described later, since the work RAM 233 is composed of a DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even if most of the control program is stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, which has a slow read speed, the MPU 231 can fetch instructions at high speed and process the instructions.

Here, the control programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 include remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. On the other hand, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 is transferred to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 by a predetermined amount from the second program storage area 234a1. The instruction pointer 231a is programmed so as to include the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a as a first predetermined address.

As a result, the MPU 231 transfers a predetermined amount of the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a by the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1. Execute the rest of the boot program contained in the control program.

In this remaining boot program, the remaining control programs that have not been transferred to the program storage area 233a and fixed value data (for example, a display data table, a transfer data table, etc., which will be described later) used in the control programs are all stored in the second program. A process of transferring a predetermined amount from the area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b is executed. Also, at the end of the boot program, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address in the program storage area 233a. Specifically, the initialization process (see S6002 in FIG. 523) executed after the boot process (see S6001 in FIG. 524) by the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a as the second predetermined address. Set the start address of the program corresponding to .

By executing the remaining boot program, the MPU 231 transfers all the control programs and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b. When the boot program is executed to the end by the MPU 231, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address, and thereafter the MPU 231 is transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. Various processes are executed using the control program.

Therefore, even if most of the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the control program is transferred to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 after the system reset is released. Thus, the MPU 231 can read the control program from the work RAM configured by the DRAM with high read speed and perform various controls. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and the third pattern display device 81 can be used to easily execute diversified and complicated effects.

Further, as described above, instead of storing all the boot programs in the NOR type ROM 234d, a predetermined number of instructions are stored from the first instruction to be processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. Even if it is stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start up the MPU 231 in a short time simply by adding the NOR type ROM 234d with a very small capacity. can be done.

The image controller 237 is a digital signal processor (DSP) that draws an image and causes the third pattern display device 81 to display the drawn image at a predetermined timing. The image controller 237 draws an image for one frame based on a drawing list (see FIG. 486) transmitted from the MPU 231 to be described later, and draws one frame of a first frame buffer 236b or a second frame buffer 236c to be described later. The image drawn in the buffer is developed, and the image information for one frame previously developed in the other frame buffer is output to the third pattern display device 81 to display the image on the third pattern display device 81.例文帳に追加. The image controller 237 performs this one-frame image drawing process and one-frame image display process within the image display time of one frame on the third pattern display device 81 (20 milliseconds in this embodiment). parallel processing in

The image controller 237 transmits a vertical synchronization interrupt signal (hereinafter referred to as a “V interrupt signal”) to the MPU 231 every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing processing for one frame is completed. Each time the MPU 231 detects this V interrupt signal, the MPU 231 executes V interrupt processing (see FIG. 525(b)) and instructs the image controller 237 to draw the image for the next one frame. In response to this instruction, the image controller 237 executes the drawing process of the image for the next one frame, and also executes the process of causing the third pattern display device 81 to display the image developed by the previous drawing.

In this manner, the MPU 231 executes the V interrupt process in response to the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 and issues a drawing instruction to the image controller 237. Therefore, the image controller 237 performs image drawing processing and display. An image drawing instruction can be received from the MPU 231 at each processing interval (20 milliseconds). Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive an instruction to draw the next image before the image drawing processing or display processing is completed. It is possible to prevent an image from being developed in accordance with a new drawing instruction in a frame buffer storing image information being displayed.

The image controller 237 also executes processing for transferring image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 and normal video RAM 236 based on transfer instructions from the MPU 231 and transfer data information included in the drawing list.

Image drawing is performed using image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 and normal video RAM 236 . That is, the image data required for drawing is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236 based on instructions from the MPU 231 before the drawing is performed.

Here, the NAND type flash memory makes it easy to increase the capacity of the ROM, but its read speed is slower than other ROMs (mask ROM, EEPROM, etc.). On the other hand, in the display control device 114, the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to transfer part of the image data stored in the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on. is configured to As will be described later, the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 is controlled so as to be resident without being overwritten.

As a result, after the transfer of the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is completed after the power is turned on, the image is drawn by the image controller 237 while using the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235. can be processed. Therefore, if the image data used for drawing processing is resident in the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a, which has a slow read speed, when drawing the image. , the time required for reading the image can be omitted, and the image can be drawn immediately and the drawn image can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 .

In particular, image data of frequently displayed images and image data of images to be displayed immediately after display is determined by main controller 110 or display controller 114 are permanently resident in resident video RAM 235. Even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a, it is possible to maintain high responsiveness until some image is displayed on the third pattern display device 81. FIG.

Further, when the display control device 114 draws an image using non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235, before the drawing is performed, the display controller 114 stores necessary data for drawing from the character ROM 234 in the normal video RAM 236. The MPU 231 is configured to instruct the image controller 237 to transfer the image data. As will be described later, the image data transferred to the normal-use video RAM 236 may be deleted by overwriting after being used for image drawing. Since it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 composed of , and the time required for reading the data can be saved, the image can be drawn immediately and the drawn image can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. can.

Further, by storing the image data in the normal video RAM 236 as well, there is no need to keep all the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235, so there is no need to prepare a large-capacity resident video RAM 235. FIG. Therefore, an increase in cost due to the provision of the resident video RAM 235 can be suppressed.

The image controller 237 has a buffer RAM 237a composed of an SRAM of 132 kilobytes, which is the capacity of one block of the NAND flash memory 234a.

The image data transfer instruction given to the image controller 237 by the MPU 231 based on the transfer instruction or the transfer data information of the drawing list includes the head address (storage source head address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data to be transferred is stored. Final address (storage source final address), transfer destination information (information indicating whether to transfer to resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236), and top of transfer destination (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) Contains an address. Note that the data size of the image data to be transferred may be included instead of the storage source final address.

The image controller 237 reads one block of data from a predetermined address in the character ROM 234 according to various information of this transfer instruction, temporarily stores it in the buffer RAM 237a, and stores it in the buffer RAM 237a when the resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236 is not in use. , is transferred to the resident RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 . Then, the processing is repeatedly executed until all the image data stored in the storage source start address to the storage source end address indicated by the transfer instruction is transferred.

As a result, the image data read out from the character ROM 234 over time is temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a, and then the image data is transferred from the buffer RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236 in a short time. can be done. Therefore, while the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236, the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is prevented from being occupied for a long time by transferring the image data. be able to. Therefore, since the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are occupied by the transfer of image data, these video RAMs 235 and 236 cannot be used for image drawing processing. , it is possible to prevent the display on the third pattern display device 81 from being too late.

In addition, since image data is transferred from the buffer RAM 234c to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 by the image controller 237, the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are used for image drawing processing and third symbol display. It is possible to easily determine the period during which the display processing on the device 81 is not used, and to simplify the processing.

The resident video RAM 235 is used so that the image data transferred from the character ROM 234 can be retained while the power is turned on without being overwritten. 235e and an error message image area 235f are provided, and at least a power-on variation image area 235b and a third pattern area 235d are provided.

The power-on main image area 235a is a power-on main image to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 after the power is turned on until all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is stored. This is an area for storing corresponding data. In the power-on variation image area 235b, the game is started by the player while the main image at power-on is being displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the entry of a ball into the first ball entrance 64 is detected. This is an area for storing image data corresponding to a power-on varying image for displaying the results of the lottery performed by the main controller 110 in a varying effect when the power is turned on.

The MPU 231 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on changing image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a when power supply from the power supply unit 251 is started. A transfer instruction is sent to the controller 237 (see FIG. 523).

Here, the power-on variation image will be described. Immediately after the power is turned on, the display control device 114 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on varying image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on varying image area 235b. Subsequently, the remaining image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 . While the remaining image data is being transferred, the display control device 114 displays the power-on main image (see FIG. 481) using the image data previously stored in the power-on main image area 235a. It is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 .

At this time, when receiving a display variation pattern command transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a variation pattern command from the main controller 110, which is an instruction command to start variation, the display control device 114 displays the main image at power-on. On the display screen of , a variation image at the time of power-on with an "○" symbol at the lower right position of the screen, and a variation image at the time of power-on with an "X" symbol at the same position as the "○" symbol are displayed during the variation period. Medium, alternately displayed repeatedly. Then, based on the variation pattern command and the stop type command from the main controller 110, the lottery performed by the main controller 110 is selected from the display variation pattern command and the display stop type command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113. The result is judged, and if it is ``a big hit with a special pattern'', an image showing it is displayed for a certain period after stopping the variable performance, and if it is ``no special pattern'', the image showing it is stopped from the variable performance. Display for a certain period of time.

The MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to use the image data stored in the power-on main image area 235a until all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235. Instructs to draw the main image when the power is turned on. As a result, while the rest of the image data to be resident is being transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player or the person involved in the hall can confirm the power-on main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. can. Therefore, the display control device 114 takes time to transfer the remaining image data to be resident from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 while displaying the main image on the third pattern display device 81 when the power is turned on. be able to. Also, since the player or the like can recognize that some processing is being performed while the main image is being displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, the remaining image to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is displayed. To wait until the transfer of image data to the resident video RAM 235 is completed without worrying whether the operation is stopped until the data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235.例文帳に追加can be done.

Also, in an operation check at a factory or the like during manufacturing, the main image is immediately displayed on the third pattern display device 81 when the power is turned on. Furthermore, by using the NAND type flash memory 234a with a slow read speed for the character ROM 234, it is possible to suppress deterioration in the efficiency of the operation check.

Further, when the player starts the game while the power-on main image is being displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the entry of the ball into the first ball entrance 64 is detected, the power-on fluctuation image is displayed. The power-on variation image is drawn using the image data corresponding to the power-on variation image resident in the area 235b, and the images showing "O" and "X" are alternately displayed on the third pattern display device 81. The MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 as follows. As a result, a simple variation effect can be performed using the power-on variation image. Therefore, even while the main image is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 when the power is turned on, the player can confirm that the lottery has been surely performed by the simple variation performance.

Further, when the power-on main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation effect image is already resident in the power-on fluctuation image area 235b. When a ball entering the first ball entrance 64 is detected while the time main image is displayed on the third pattern display device 81, the corresponding variation performance is immediately displayed on the third pattern display device 81.例文帳に追加can be done.

Returning to FIG. 480, the description continues. The back image area 235c is an area for storing image data corresponding to the back image displayed on the third pattern display device 81. FIG. Here, with reference to FIG. 483, the rear image and the range of the rear image stored in the rear image area 235c among the rear images will be described. FIG. 483 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the four types of back images and the range of the back images stored in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 for each back image. FIG. 483(b) shows the back surface A corresponding to the "sand beach stage" and the back surface B corresponding to the "deep sea stage".

As shown in FIG. 483, the character ROM 234 prepares back images corresponding to the back images A and B, which are longer in the horizontal direction than the display area displayed on the third pattern display device 81 . The image controller 237 draws the image so that the back image is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 while scrolling the image horizontally from left to right.

The images prepared for the back surfaces A and B (hereinafter referred to as "scrolling images") are configured such that the back images are continuous at positions a and c. The image between position c and position d and the image between position a and position a' are composed of images corresponding to the horizontal width of the display area, and the image between position c and position d is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 as the display area, and then the third pattern display device 81 displays an image between position a and position a' as the display area. The background image is scrolled in a continuous manner.

When it is determined to change the back face type and the stage is changed to the "sand beach stage" or "deep sea stage", the MPU 231 first sets the position between position a and position a' of the corresponding back face image as the initial position of the display area. Then, the image controller 237 is controlled so that the image at the initial position is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 . Then, as time elapses, the display area is moved from left to right with respect to the scroll image, and the image controller 237 is controlled so that the display area is sequentially displayed on the third pattern display device 81. When the area reaches the image between position c and position d, the image controller 237 is controlled so that the display area is again displayed on the third pattern display device 81 as an image from position a to position a'. Therefore, the third pattern display device 81 can display the images between the position a to the position c by scrolling repeatedly in a smooth manner so as to flow leftward.

Next, for each rear image, the range of the rear image stored in the rear image area 235c will be described. As shown in FIG. 483(a), the rear surface A corresponding to the sandy beach stage, which is the initial stage, has all the image data corresponding to the entire range of the rear surface A, that is, from position a to position d. It is stored in the image area 235c. Usually, the game is often played without changing the stage while the initial stage "Beach Stage" is displayed. By keeping all of them resident in the back image area 235c, the number of data accesses to the character ROM 234 can be reduced. Therefore, the processing load on the display control device 114 can be reduced.

On the other hand, as for the back surface B corresponding to the "deep sea stage", as shown in FIG. It is stored in the rear image area 235 c of the video RAM 235 .

Here, in order to immediately change the back image, it is ideal to keep the entire range of image data for all back images resident in the resident video RAM 235 . As such, a very large capacity RAM must be used, which may lead to an increase in cost.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10, the initial position of the rear image displayed first when the stage is changed is set to the range from position a to position a' (or the range shown in FIGS. 483(a) to (b)). ), and the image data corresponding to the image between position a and position b including the initial position (or the image between FIGS. Therefore, even if the character ROM 234 is composed of a NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, if a lottery at the start of fluctuation decides to change the stage, the resident video RAM 235 can store the characters on the back of the resident video RAM 235. By using the image data resident in the image area 235c, the initial position of the back surface B can be immediately displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and the scroll display or the color tone can be changed with the passage of time. can be displayed. In addition, since only image data corresponding to a partial range of images is stored for the back surface B, an increase in storage capacity of the resident video RAM 235 can be suppressed, and an increase in cost can be suppressed.

After the image of the initial position is displayed on the rear face B, the image data resident in the rear face image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 is used to scroll the range from position a to position b from left to right. The range from the position a to the position b is set so that the image data corresponding to the image from the position b' to the position d can be completely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal RAM 236 during this period. As a result, the image data from position b' to position d can be transferred to the normal video RAM 236 while the range from position a to position b is being scrolled. After scrolling the range from position a to position b by using the image data corresponding to the rear image stored in the normal video RAM 236 without delay, the range from position b' to position d is scrolled to the third position. It can be displayed on the pattern display device 81 .

Image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 for the rear B is stored in a rear image exclusive sub-area provided in the image storage area 236a (see FIG. 480) of the normal video RAM 236. FIG. As a result, the rear image data stored in the sub-area dedicated to the rear image is not overwritten by other image data, so that the rear image can be reliably displayed.

Further, in the back surface B, the image data stored in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 and the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 are images corresponding to images between positions b′ and b. Data is stored redundantly. Under the control of the image controller 237 by the MPU 231, the image up to the position b is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 using the image data stored in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, and then the normal video image is displayed. By displaying the image from the position b' on the third pattern display device 81 using the image data stored in the RAM 236, the back image is scrolled and displayed in a smooth connection on the third pattern display device 81. ing.

Further, the MPU 231 uses the image data in the normal video RAM 236 to control the image controller 237 so that the image between position c and position d is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 as a display area. The MPU 231 uses the image data in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 to control the image controller 237 so that the image between position a and position a' is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 as the display area. do. As a result, the third pattern display device 81 can repeatedly scroll and display the images between the positions a to c in a smooth manner so as to flow toward the left.

Returning to FIG. 480, the description continues. The third symbol area 235d is an area for permanently storing the third symbol used in the variable effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81. FIG. That is, in the third pattern area 235d, image data corresponding to the above-mentioned 10 types of main patterns (see FIG. 448) with numerals "0" to "9" as the third pattern are resident. As a result, when the third pattern display device 81 performs a variable effect, it is not necessary to read image data from the character ROM 234 one by one. It is possible to quickly start a variable production. Therefore, after the ball enters the first ball entrance 64, the right second ball entrance 640r, or the second ball entrance 640, the first symbol display device 37 starts the variable effect. First, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a state in which the variable effect is not immediately started in the third symbol display device 81.例文帳に追加

The character design area 235e is an area for storing image data corresponding to character designs used in various effects displayed on the third design display device 81. FIG. In this pachinko machine 10, various characters such as "boys" and "girls" are displayed according to various effects, and data corresponding to these are resident in the character design area 235e. Therefore, when the display control device 114 changes the character design based on the content of the command received from the sound lamp control device 113, the corresponding image data is not newly read out from the character ROM 234, but the character data in the resident video RAM 235 is changed. The image controller 237 can draw a predetermined image by reading the image data pre-resident in the pattern area 235e. This eliminates the need to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, so even if the character ROM 234 uses the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the character design can be changed immediately.

The error message image area 235f is an area for storing image data corresponding to an error message displayed when an error occurs in the pachinko machine 10. FIG. In the pachinko machine 10, for example, when vibration is detected by the sound ramp control device 113 from the output of a vibration sensor (not shown) attached to the back surface of the game board 13, the sound ramp control device 113 detects the occurrence of a vibration error. Notify the display controller 114 with an error command. Also, when the audio lamp control device 113 detects the occurrence of another error, the audio lamp control device 113 notifies the display control device 114 of the error occurrence and the error type by an error command. The display control device 114 is configured to display an error message corresponding to the received error on the third symbol display device 81 when an error command is received.

Here, the error message is required to be displayed almost simultaneously with the occurrence of the error from the standpoint of preventing fraud by the player and protecting the player against errors. In the pachinko machine 10, image data corresponding to various error messages are preliminarily resident in the error message image area 235f. By reading the image data previously resident in the image area 235f, the image controller 237 can immediately draw each error message image. As a result, it is not necessary to sequentially read the image data corresponding to the error message from the character ROM 234. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed is used as the character ROM 234, the corresponding error message is read after receiving the error command. It can be displayed immediately.

The normal video RAM 236 is used so that data is overwritten and updated as needed, and is provided with at least an image storage area 236a, a first frame buffer 236b and a second frame buffer 236c.

The image storage area 236a is an area for storing image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235, among the image data necessary for drawing an image to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. FIG. The image storage area 236a is divided into a plurality of sub-areas, and the type of image data to be stored in each sub-area is determined in advance.

The MPU 231 extracts image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 and that is required for subsequent image drawing from the character ROM 234 in a sub area provided in the image storage area 236 a of the normal video RAM 236 . , instructs the image controller 237 to transfer the type of the image data to a predetermined sub-area for storing. As a result, the image controller 237 reads the image data instructed by the MPU 231 from the character ROM 234 and transfers the read image data to the designated predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a via the buffer RAM 237a.

The transfer instruction of the image data is performed by including transfer data information in a later-described drawing list in which the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to draw an image. As a result, the MPU 231 can issue an image drawing instruction and an image data transfer instruction simply by transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, thereby reducing the processing load.

The first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c are buffers for developing an image to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. FIG. The image controller 237 writes the one-frame image drawn according to the instruction from the MPU 231 to either one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c, thereby rendering the one-frame image to the frame buffer. While the image is developed and the image is developed in one of the frame buffers, the image information for one frame previously developed is read out from the other frame buffer, and sent to the third pattern display device 81 together with the drive signal. By transmitting the image information with the third pattern display device 81, a process for displaying the image for one frame is executed.

By providing two frame buffers, the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c, as described above, the image controller 237 can expand the one-frame image drawn in one of the frame buffers and simultaneously , the image for one frame developed earlier can be read out from the other frame buffer, and the read image for one frame can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 .

A frame buffer for developing an image for one frame and a frame buffer for reading image information for one frame for displaying an image on the third pattern display device 81 are used for drawing processing of an image for one frame. The MPU 231 alternately designates either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c every 20 milliseconds.

That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for developing the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for developing the image of one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing process of the image of one frame is completed. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information of is read. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read out and displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. be.

After the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. be done. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read out and displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. be. After that, the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame are set to either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c every 20 milliseconds. By alternating designations, it is possible to continuously perform display processing of an image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while performing drawing processing for an image for one frame.

The work RAM 233 is a memory for storing the control programs and fixed value data stored in the character ROM 234, and for temporarily storing work data and flags used when various control programs are executed by the MPU 231. Configured. The work RAM 233 includes a program storage area 233a, a data table storage area 233b, a simple image display flag 233c, a display data table buffer 233d, a transfer data table buffer 233e, a pointer 233f, a drawing list area 233g, a clock counter 233h, and a stored image data discrimination. It has at least a flag 233i, a drawing target buffer flag 233j, a background mode storage area 233k, an execution effect storage area 233l, a set value storage area 233m, a display update flag 233n, a back image change flag 233w, and a back image discrimination flag 233x.

The program storage area 233a is an area for storing control programs executed by the MPU 231 . When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 reads the control program from the character ROM 234, transfers it to the work RAM 233, and stores it in the program storage area 233a. After storing all the control programs in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 thereafter executes various controls using the control programs stored in the program storage area 233a. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of a DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the display control device 114 can maintain high processing performance, and the third symbol display device 81 can be used to easily execute diversified and complicated effects.

The data table storage area 233b includes a display data table describing display contents to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 with the passage of time for one effect to be displayed based on a command from the main control device 110, and a display data table. This is an area for storing transfer data information of image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 among the image data used in one effect displayed by the table and a transfer data table defining transfer timing.

These data tables are normally stored as a type of fixed value data in the second program storage area 234a1 provided in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234, and according to the boot program executed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. , these data tables are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the work RAM 233 and stored in the data table storage area 233b. After all the data tables are stored in the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 controls the display of the third symbol display device 81 using the data tables stored in the data table storage area 233b. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of a DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when various data tables are stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and the third symbol display device 81 can be used to easily implement diversified and complicated effects.

Here, details of various data tables will be described. First, the display data table is prepared one by one for each effect mode of each effect displayed on the third pattern display device 81 based on a command from the main control device 110. For example, a variable effect, a round effect, etc. , an ending effect, and a display data table corresponding to the demo effect are prepared.

The variation effect is an effect that is started in the third symbol display device 81 when a display variation pattern command from the sound lamp control device 113 is received. In addition, when the display variation pattern command is received, the display stop type command indicating the stop type of the variation effect is also received. For example, when the variable performance is started, if the stop type of the variable performance is off, the stop symbol indicating the failure is finally stopped and displayed, and the stop type of the variable performance is the jackpot A or the jackpot B. If it is either, the stop symbol indicating each jackpot is finally stopped and displayed. The player can recognize the jackpot type by visually recognizing the stop symbols in this variable effect, and can easily determine the game value to be given according to the jackpot type.

In addition, since the first ball entrance 64 is a prize winning opening in which five balls are paid out as prize balls when a ball enters, a jackpot of normal symbols is produced, and the electric accessory is released, and the ball enters the second ball. If it becomes easier to enter the ball opening 640, the number of prize balls increases. As a result, the pachinko machine 10 is in a state in which it is difficult to reduce the number of balls in hand or in a state in which the number of balls in hand does not decrease even if a game is played, so that the player is in a state in which the number of balls in hand is difficult to decrease or the number of balls in hand does not decrease. You can get the expectation that you can get a special symbol jackpot without it. Therefore, since the player's desire to participate in the game can be enhanced, the player can continue to have the desire to participate in the game.

In addition, as described above, the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the next variable effect associated with the start winning does not start even after a predetermined time has elapsed since one variable effect stopped. The third pattern consisting of the main patterns with numbers '0' to '9' is stopped and displayed, and only the rear image changes. If the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the player and the persons involved in the hall can recognize that the pachinko machine 10 is not playing a game.

The data table storage area 233b stores one display data table each corresponding to the round effect, the ending effect, and the demonstration effect. In addition, if there are 32 variable performance patterns to be set, the variable display data table, which is a display data table for variable performance, is prepared with one table for one variable performance pattern, and a total of 32 tables.

Details of the display data table will now be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 484 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the variable display data table among the display data tables. The display data table should be displayed at that time in association with an address that represents the time (in this embodiment, 20 milliseconds) during which one frame of image is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 as one unit. It defines in detail the content (drawing content) of an image for one frame.

The drawing contents specify the type of sprite for each sprite that is a display object that constitutes an image for one frame, and display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, and translucency according to the type of sprite. Rendering information for causing the third pattern display device 81 to render sprites, such as values, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information, is defined.

The sprite type is information for specifying the sprite to be displayed. The display position coordinates are information for specifying the coordinates on the third pattern display device 81 where the sprite should be displayed. The enlargement ratio is information for designating an enlargement ratio with respect to a standard display size preset for the sprite, and the size of the sprite to be displayed is specified according to the enlargement ratio. If the magnification is greater than 100%, the sprite will be displayed larger than the standard size, and if the magnification is less than 100%, the sprite will be displayed smaller than the standard size. Is displayed.

The rotation angle is information for specifying the rotation angle when rotating and displaying the sprite. The translucency value is for specifying the transparency of the entire sprite, and the higher the translucency value, the more the image displayed behind the sprite can be seen through. The α-blending information is information for specifying known α-blending coefficients used when performing superimposition processing with other sprites. Color information is information for designating the color tone of the sprite to be displayed. The filter designation information is information for designating an image filter to be applied to the sprite when rendering the designated sprite.

In the variable display data table, the drawing contents for one frame defined corresponding to each address are one rear image, nine third patterns (design 1, design 2, . Rendering information for each sprite, such as an effect expressing an insertion of a character, a boy image, a character used for various effects such as characters, etc., is defined for each address. One or a plurality of information regarding effects and characters are defined according to the content to be displayed in the frame.

Here, the display position of the rear image is fixed to the entire screen of the third pattern display device 81, and the magnification ratio, rotation angle, translucency value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information are changed over time. Since it is fixed, the variable display data table defines only the back face type, which is information for specifying the back face image type.

The MPU 231 selects one of the backgrounds corresponding to the background mode (sea, beach, preparation period background, time production background) according to the background type. A rear image corresponding to the specified stage is specified as a drawing target, and the range of the rear image to be displayed for that frame is specified according to the lapse of time.

In the present embodiment, a description will be given of a case in which only the back surface type is specified as the drawing content of the back surface image in the display data table. may be defined as position information indicating whether the should be displayed. This position information may be, for example, information indicating the elapsed time since the rear image in the range corresponding to the initial position was displayed. In this case, the MPU 231 identifies the range of the back image to be displayed for that frame based on the elapsed time since the back image in the range corresponding to the initial position indicated by the position information was displayed.

Further, the position information may be information indicating the elapsed time since the drawing of the image based on this display data table (or the display of the third pattern display device 81) was started. In this case, the MPU 231 displays the range of the rear image to be displayed for that frame at the stage when the drawing of the image (or the display of the third pattern display device 81) is started based on the display database. It is specified based on the position of the back image and the elapsed time since the drawing of the image indicated by the position information (or the display of the third pattern display device 81) was started.

Furthermore, the position information is information indicating the elapsed time since the back image in the range corresponding to the initial position was displayed according to the back surface type, and the drawing of the image based on the display data table (or the third pattern display device 81 display) may indicate any of the information indicating the elapsed time since the start of the display, or along with the back surface type and position information, the type information of the position information (for example, the range corresponding to the initial position It is information indicating the elapsed time since the back image was displayed, or information indicating the elapsed time since the drawing of the image based on the display database (or the display of the third pattern display device 81) was started. (information indicating whether or not the back surface image is drawn) may be defined as the drawing content of the back image. Alternatively, the position information may be information indicating an address in which the range of the rear image to be displayed is stored, instead of information indicating the elapsed time.

The third symbols (symbol 1, symbol 2, . . . ) describe symbol type offset information as symbol type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed. This offset information is information representing the difference between the numbers attached to the respective third symbols. Instead of directly specifying the type of the third symbol, the offset information is specified because the display of the third symbol in the variable effect is the stop symbol of the variable effect performed one before and the variable effect performed this time. This is because it changes according to the stop pattern, and in the pattern offset information from the start of the variation until the predetermined time elapses, the offset information from the stop pattern of the previous variation performance is described. As a result, the variable performance is started from the stop symbol in the previous variable performance.

On the other hand, after a predetermined time has passed since the start of the fluctuation, the offset from the stop pattern set according to the stop type command (stop type command for display) received from the main control device 110 via the sound lamp control device 113 Include information. As a result, the variable effect can be stopped with a stop symbol corresponding to the stop type specified by the main controller 110. - 特許庁

In addition, since each third symbol is assigned a unique number, the variable symbol in the previous variable performance or the stop symbol corresponding to the stop type specified by the main controller 110 can be selected as the third symbol. , and the offset information is represented by the difference between the numbers attached to the respective third symbols, the third symbols to be displayed can be easily identified from the offset information.

In addition, in the pattern offset information, the third pattern fluctuates at high speed during the predetermined time when the offset information of the stop pattern of the variable performance performed immediately before is switched to the offset information of the stop pattern of the variable performance performed this time. It is set to be the displayed time. While the third pattern is being variably displayed at high speed, the third pattern is invisible to the player. By switching from the offset information to the offset information of the stop pattern of the variable performance being performed this time, even if the continuity of the numbers of the third pattern is interrupted, the player does not recognize the interruption of the continuity of the numbers. be able to.

"0000H", which is the top address of the display data table, describes "Start" information indicating the start of the data table, and the last address of the display data table ("02F0H" in the example of FIG. 484) describes the data table. "End" information indicating the end of is described. Then, for each address between the address "0000H" in which the "Start" information is described and the address in which the "End" information is described, the drawing contents corresponding to the presentation mode to be defined in the display data table are displayed. is described.

The MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) or the like transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110, and displays the selected display data table. The data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and the pointer 233f is initialized. Each time drawing processing for one frame is completed, the pointer 233f is incremented by 1, and in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, based on the drawing content defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f, the next A drawing list (see FIG. 486), which will be described later, is created by specifying the image contents to be drawn. By transmitting this drawing list to the image controller 237, a drawing instruction for the image is given. As a result, as the pointer 233f is updated, the drawing contents are specified in the order specified in the display data table, so the image specified in the display data table is displayed on the third pattern display device 81.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, the display control device 114 responds to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) or the like transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. Instead of changing the program to be executed by the MPU 231, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d. .

Here, as in a conventional pachinko machine, if a program to be executed by the MPU 231 is started each time the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed, the effect image becomes more diverse. Therefore, the processing capacity of the display control device 114 is limited, and there is a risk that the diversification of controllable effect images will be limited. there were. On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed only by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d. Regardless of the processing capability of the control device 114, the third symbol display device 81 can be caused to display various modes of effect images.

In this way, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each effect mode, a display data table buffer is set according to the effect mode to be displayed, and a drawing list is created frame by frame according to the set data table. The reason why it can be created is that the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined in advance in the pachinko machine 10 based on the result of the lottery performed based on the starting prize. On the other hand, in game machines other than pachinko machines, the display contents change on the spot based on the user's operation, so the display contents cannot be predicted. It is not possible to have a display data table corresponding to the mode of presentation. Thus, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each presentation mode, a display data table buffer is set according to the presentation mode to be displayed, and a drawing list is created for each frame according to the set data table. This configuration can be realized only when the pachinko machine 10 is configured to determine the performance mode to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 in advance based on the result of the lottery performed based on the starting prize.

Next, with reference to FIG. 485, details of the transfer data table will be described. FIG. 485 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a transfer data table. The transfer data table is prepared corresponding to the display data table prepared for each effect. Transfer data information for transferring image data not resident in resident video RAM 235 from character ROM 234 to image storage area 236a of normal video RAM 236 and its transfer timing are defined.

If all the image data of the sprites used in the effects specified in the display data table are stored in the resident video RAM 235, no transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is prepared. As a result, an increase in capacity of the data table storage area 233b can be suppressed.

The transfer data table contains transfer data information of sprite image data (hereinafter referred to as "transfer target image data") to be transferred at the time indicated by the address specified in the display data table in correspondence with the address. (corresponding to addresses "0001H" and "0097H" in FIG. 485). Here, the transfer start timing of the transfer target image data is set so that the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a before the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. In the transfer data table, the transfer data information of the transfer target image data is defined in association with the address corresponding to the transfer start timing.

On the other hand, if there is no transfer target image data to start transferring at the time indicated by the address specified in the display data table, there is no transfer target image data to start transferring corresponding to that address. (corresponding to address "0002H" in FIG. 485).

The transfer data information includes the head address (storage source head address) and the end address (storage source end address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data to be transferred is stored, and the head address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236). is included.

It should be noted that, similarly to the display data table, "Start" information indicating the start of the data table is described in "0000H", which is the top address of the transfer data table, and the end address of the transfer data table (in the example of FIG. "02F0H") describes "End" information indicating the end of the data table. Then, for each address between the address "0000H" in which the "Start" information is described and the address in which the "End" information is described, the transfer data information of the transfer target image data to be defined in the transfer data table is described.

When the MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) or the like transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110, the display data table exists, the transfer data table is read from the data table storage area 233b and stored in a transfer data table buffer 233e of the work RAM 233, which will be described later. Then, every time the pointer 233f is updated, the drawing contents defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f are identified from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and a drawing list (see FIG. 486) to be described later is created. At the same time, from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the transfer data information of the image data of the predetermined sprite whose transfer is to be started at that time is acquired, and the transfer data information is added to the created drawing list. to add.

For example, in the example of FIG. 486, when the pointer 233f is "0001H" or "0097H", the MPU 231 creates the transfer data information specified at the address in the transfer data table based on the display data table. The drawing list is added, and the drawing list after the addition is transmitted to the image controller 237 . On the other hand, when the pointer 233f is "0002H", Null data is defined at the address "0002H" of the transfer data table. The drawing list is sent to the image controller 237 without adding transfer data information to the drawing list.

When transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 transfers the transfer target image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the processing to be performed.

Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a before the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred is specified for a predetermined address, by transferring the image data from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table, When drawing a predetermined sprite according to the display data table, image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 required for drawing the sprite can be stored in the image storage area 236a without fail. Using the image data stored in the image storage area 236a, a predetermined sprite can be drawn based on the display data table.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the image required for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance and transferred to the normal video RAM 236 without delay, so that the image can be displayed. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. - 特許庁Also, only the image data temporarily resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 by the description of the transfer data table.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 10, the display control device 114 responds to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) or the like transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110, and displays the display data. As the table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. It is possible to reliably transfer from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at the desired timing.

The transfer data table defines transfer data information so that image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to a sprite. As a result, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the processing related to the transfer can be easily performed. By controlling the transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 on a sprite-by-sprite basis, the transfer of image data can be controlled in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in the load applied to the transfer.

The transfer data table has a data structure similar to that of the display data table, and corresponds to the address defined in the display data table. Since the data information is defined, the image data is reliably stored in the normal video RAM 236 before the image data of the predetermined sprite is used based on the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d. Thus, since the timing of the start of transfer can be instructed, even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND-type flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the third pattern display device 81 can easily display a wide variety of effect images. be able to.

The simple image display flag 233c is a flag indicating whether or not to display the power-on image (power-on main image and power-on fluctuation image) shown in FIG. This simple image display flag 233c is set after the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and power-on varying image is transferred to the power-on main image area 235a or power-on varying image area 235b of the resident video RAM. , is set to ON in the main process (see FIG. 523) executed by the MPU 231 (see S6005 in FIG. 523). Then, at the stage when all the resident target image data are stored in the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer processing of the image transfer processing, in order to display an image other than the power-on image on the third symbol display device 81, It is set to OFF (see S7605 in FIG. 535(b)).

The simple image display flag 233c is referenced in the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 each time the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 is detected (see S6301 in FIG. 525(b)). When the image display flag 233c is on, the simple command determination process (see S6308 in FIG. 525(b)) and the simple display setting process (see S6308 in FIG. 525(b) S6309) is executed. On the other hand, when the simple image display flag 233c is off, command determination is performed so that various images are displayed according to commands transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on commands from the main control device 110 or the like. Processing (see FIGS. 526 to 531) and display setting processing (see FIGS. 532 to 534) are executed.

Further, the simple image display flag 233c is referred to in the transfer setting process executed by the MPU 231 in the V interrupt process (see S6305 in FIG. 535(a)), and when the simple image display flag 233c is on. Since there is resident target image data not stored in the resident video RAM 235, resident image transfer setting processing (see FIG. 535(b)) is executed to transfer the resident target image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. If the simple image display flag 233c is off, the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 536) is executed to transfer the image data required for the drawing process from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. FIG.

The display data table buffer 233d stores a display data table corresponding to an effect mode to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 in response to a command or the like transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. It is a buffer for The MPU 231 determines the effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the command or the like transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113, and stores the display data table corresponding to the effect mode from the data table storage area 233b. It selects and stores the selected display data table in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, the MPU 231 increments the pointer 233f by 1, and based on the rendering content defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the image controller 237 A later-described drawing list (see FIG. 486) in which the content of the image drawing instruction for is described is generated. As a result, the third symbol display device 81 displays an effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d.

While incrementing the pointer 233f one by one, the MPU 231 draws an image for the image controller 237 for each frame based on the drawing contents defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. A drawing list (see FIG. 486), which will be described later, is generated in which the content of the drawing instruction is described. As a result, an effect corresponding to the display data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 .

The transfer data table buffer 233e transfers a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d according to a command or the like transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. is a buffer for storing When the display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 selects the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table from the data table storage area 233b, and transfers the selected transfer data table. Store in the data table buffer 233e. If all the sprite image data used in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is stored in the resident video RAM 235, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is not prepared. Therefore, the MPU 231 clears the contents of the transfer data table buffer 233e by writing Null data indicating that there is no transfer target image data.

While incrementing the pointer 233f by one, the MPU 231 defines the transfer data information of the transfer target image data specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e. (that is, if Null data is not described), the transfer data information is added to a later-described rendering list (see FIG. 486) describing the image rendering instruction contents for the image controller 237 generated for each frame. to add.

As a result, when the transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 transfers the transfer target image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the transfer process. Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a before the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Transfer data information of transfer target image data is defined for a predetermined address. Therefore, by transferring the image data from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information specified in this transfer data table, when drawing a predetermined sprite according to the display data table, the data necessary for drawing the sprite can be obtained. Image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can always be stored in the image storage area 236a.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the image required for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance and transferred to the normal video RAM 236 without delay, so that the image can be displayed. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. - 特許庁Also, only the image data temporarily resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 by the description of the transfer data table.

The pointer 233f is an address at which transfer data information of corresponding drawing contents or transfer target image data should be obtained from the display data table and the transfer data table stored in the respective buffers of the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table buffer 233e. is for specifying The MPU 231 once initializes the pointer 233f to 0 when the display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, display setting processing for V interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 based on a V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when rendering processing for one frame of image is completed (S6303 in FIG. 532). reference), pointer update processing (see S7205 in FIG. 534) is executed, and the value of the pointer 233f is incremented by one.

Every time the pointer 233f is updated, the MPU 231 identifies the drawing content defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and stores the drawing content in the drawing list described later. (see FIG. 486), acquires the transfer data information of the image data of the predetermined sprite whose transfer is to be started at that time from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, and obtains the transfer data Add information to the created drawing list.

As a result, an effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. FIG. Therefore, the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be easily changed only by changing the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Therefore, regardless of the processing capability of the display control device 114, various effects can be displayed.

In addition, when the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e is stored, the sprite is displayed based on the transfer data table before the corresponding display data table starts drawing a predetermined sprite. Image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 used for drawing can be stored in the image storage area 236a without fail. As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the image necessary for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance and transferred to the normal video RAM 236 without delay, so that the image can be displayed. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. - 特許庁Also, only the image data temporarily resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 by the description of the transfer data table.

The drawing list area 233g is used by the image controller to draw an image for one frame generated based on the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e. This is an area for storing a draw list instructing 237.

Details of the draw list will now be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 486 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the drawing list. The drawing list is an instruction table for instructing the image controller 237 to draw an image for one frame, and as shown in FIG. Symbol 2, ...), effect (effect 1, effect 2, ...), character (character 1, character 2, ..., reserved ball pattern 1, reserved ball pattern 2, ..., error (symbol) describes detailed drawing information (detailed information) of the sprite for each sprite. The drawing list also describes transfer data information for causing the image controller 237 to transfer predetermined image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 .

The detailed drawing information (detailed information) of each sprite includes information indicating the type of RAM (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) in which the image data of the corresponding sprite (display object) is stored, and its type. The image controller 237 acquires the image data of the sprite from the memory area specified by the RAM type and address. The detailed drawing information (detailed information) includes display position coordinates, magnification, rotation angle, translucent value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information. A standard image generated from the image data of the sprite read from the video RAM is scaled according to the enlargement ratio, rotated according to the rotation angle, and translucent according to the translucency value. alpha blending information, compositing with other sprites according to the color information, color tone correction according to the color information, and filtering according to the filter specification information. After that, an image obtained by performing various processes at the display position indicated by the display position coordinates is drawn. The drawn image is developed by the image controller 237 in either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233j.

In the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 stores the drawing content defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f and the content of other images to be drawn (for example, the pending number of balls to be displayed). Image, warning image that notifies the occurrence of an error, etc.), generates detailed drawing information (detailed information) for all sprites used to draw the image for one frame, and provides the detailed information for each sprite. Create a draw list by sorting.

Here, among the detailed information of each sprite, the RAM type and address for storing the data of the sprite (display object) are the sprite type defined in the display data table and the sprite type specified from the contents of other images. Generated accordingly. That is, since the area of the resident video RAM 235 in which the image data of the sprite is stored or the sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed for each sprite, the MPU 231 can store the image data according to the sprite type. , the storage RAM type and address where the image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately identified, and such information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

In addition, the MPU 231 sets other information (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucency value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information) among the detailed information of each sprite as defined in the display data table. copy the information as is.

Further, in generating the drawing list, the MPU 231 rearranges the sprites to be arranged in the order of the sprites to be arranged in the front side from the sprites to be arranged in the rearmost side in the image for one frame, and provides detailed drawing information for each sprite. Describe (detailed information). That is, in the drawing list, detailed information corresponding to the back image is first described, followed by the third pattern (pattern 1, pattern 2, . . . ), effect (effect 1, effect 2, . Detailed information corresponding to each sprite is described in the order of (character 1, character 2, . . . , reserved ball pattern 1, reserved ball pattern 2, .

The image controller 237 executes the drawing process of each sprite according to the order described in the drawing list, and develops the drawn sprites in the frame buffer by overwriting. Therefore, in the one-frame image generated by the drawing list, the first-drawn sprite can be arranged on the rearmost side, and the last-drawn sprite can be arranged on the frontmost side.

In the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, if the transfer data information is written at the address indicated by the pointer 233f, the MPU 231 stores the transfer data information (character in which the transfer target image data is stored). The storage source start address and storage source end address in the ROM 234, and the storage destination start address of the sub-area provided in the image storage area 236a where the image data to be transferred is to be stored are added to the end of the drawing list. If the transfer data information is included in the drawing list, the image controller 237 draws an image from a predetermined area of the character ROM 234 (the area indicated by the storage source start address and the storage source end address) based on the transfer data information. The data is read, and the image data to be transferred is transferred to a predetermined sub-area (storage destination address) provided in the image storage area 236 a of the normal video RAM 236 .

The clock counter 233h is a counter that counts the effect time of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. When one display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 sets time data indicating the effect time of the effect to be displayed based on the display data table. This time data is a value obtained by dividing the performance time by the image display time for one frame on the third pattern display device 81 (20 milliseconds in this embodiment).

Then, based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when drawing processing and display processing for one frame of image are completed, the MPU 231 executes V interrupt processing (FIG. 525(b)). )) is executed, the clock counter 233h is decremented by one (see S7207 in FIG. 532). As a result, when the value of the clock counter 233h becomes 0 or less, the MPU 231 determines that the presentation displayed by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d has ended, and performs the presentation in accordance with the completion of the presentation. perform various operations to

The storage image data discrimination flag 233i is set to indicate whether image data corresponding to all sprites whose corresponding image data are not resident in the resident video RAM 235 are stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. It is a flag indicating a storage state indicating whether or not there is.

This stored image data determination flag 233i is generated by initial setting processing (see S6002 in FIG. 523) executed by the MPU 231 in the main processing when the power is turned on. The storage image data determination flag 233i generated here is set to "OFF" indicating that the storage status for all sprites is not stored in the image storage area 236a.

The storage image data determination flag 233i is updated when an instruction to transfer image data to be transferred corresponding to one sprite is set during normal image transfer setting processing (see FIG. 536) executed by the MPU 231. will be In this update, the storage state corresponding to one sprite for which the transfer instruction is set is set to "on" indicating that the corresponding image data is stored in the image storage area 236a. Also, image data of other sprites to be stored in the same sub-area of the image storage area 236a as the one sprite is always unstored by storing the image data of the one sprite. Therefore, the stored state corresponding to the other sprites is set to "off".

Also, when transferring the image data of a sprite whose image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, the MPU 231 refers to the stored image data determination flag 233i and determines the sprite to be transferred. It is determined whether image data has already been stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 235 (see S7713 in FIG. 536). Then, if the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is "OFF" and the corresponding image data is not stored in the image storage area 236a, an instruction to transfer the image data is set (see S7714 in FIG. 536). , causes the image controller 237 to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a. On the other hand, if the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is "on", the corresponding image data is already stored in the image storage area 236a, so the transfer processing of that image data is stopped. As a result, unnecessary transfer from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 can be suppressed, and the processing load on each unit of the display control device 114 and the traffic on the bus line 240 can be reduced. can.

The drawing target buffer flag 233j selects a frame buffer for developing an image drawn by the image controller 237 (hereinafter referred to as a "drawing target buffer") from among the two frame buffers (the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c). ), and when the drawing buffer flag 233j is 0, it designates the first frame buffer 236b as the drawing buffer, and when it is 1, it designates the second frame buffer 236c. The information of the specified drawing target buffer is sent to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list (see S7802 in FIG. 537).

As a result, the image controller 237 executes the drawing process of drawing the image drawn based on the drawing list on the specified drawing target buffer. In parallel with the drawing process, the image controller 237 reads the drawn image information that has already been developed from the frame buffer different from the drawing object buffer, and transmits the image to the third pattern display device 81 together with the drive signal. By transferring the information, display processing for displaying an image on the third pattern display device 81 is executed.

The drawing target buffer flag 233j is updated as the drawing target buffer information is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list. This update is done by inverting the value of the drawing target buffer flag 233j, that is, by setting the value to "1" if it was "0" and to "0" if it was "1". done by As a result, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c each time the drawing list is transmitted. Also, the transmission of the drawing list is executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing processing and display processing of the image for one frame are completed. This is performed each time the drawing process of the process (see FIG. 525(b)) is executed (see S7802 in FIG. 537).

That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for developing the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for developing the image of one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing process of the image of one frame is completed. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information of is read. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read out and displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. be.

After the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. be done. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read out and displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. be. After that, the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame are set to either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c every 20 milliseconds. By alternating designations, it is possible to continuously perform display processing of an image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while performing drawing processing for an image for one frame.

The back image change flag 233w is a flag for determining whether or not the type of the back image displayed on the third pattern display device 81 is to be changed. If the back image change flag 233w is ON, it means that the type of the back image is changed, and if it is OFF, it means that no change is made. The back image change flag 233w is set to ON when a back image change command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 is received (see S7001 in FIG. 531(a)). The back image change flag 233w is referenced in the normal image transfer setting process (see S7709 in FIG. 536), and is set to OFF when the back image change process is executed (see S7710 in FIG. 536). As a result, the rear image corresponding to the rear image change command and the presentation mode change command received from the sound lamp control device 113 can be displayed.

The back image discrimination flag 233x is a flag indicating the set back image type. This flag consists of, for example, 1 byte, and each bit is associated with each rear face type. If any bit of the back image determination flag 233x is on, it means that the back surface type corresponding to the bit that is on is set as the current back surface type. For example, if the 0th bit of the rear image determination flag 233x is ON, it means that the rear surface A is set. In the rear image determination flag 233x, when a rear image change command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 is received, the bit corresponding to the rear image notified by the command is set to ON (FIG. 531 (a)). ) of S7002). At this time, all other bits are set to off. With this back image discrimination flag 233x, the currently set back surface type can be easily identified.

Next, with reference to FIG. 482, the display contents of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 when executing the setting change operation for changing the setting value of the pachinko machine 10 will be described. In this embodiment, as described above, one set value can be set from a plurality of set values that differ in the probability of winning a jackpot by special symbol lottery, and a specific operation ( By turning on the power while the setting key 110b is being rotated, the setting change operation for changing the setting value can be executed during the start-up process of the main controller 110. FIG.

When power is supplied to the pachinko machine 10, power is supplied from the power supply device 115 (see FIG. 462) to various control devices, and each control device is configured to execute start-up processing. there is Here, in the conventional pachinko machine 10, that is, in the pachinko machine 10 in which the setting change operation is not executed when the power is turned on, the processing based on the operator's operation (the setting change operation is performed during the startup processing of each control device) process to be executed) is not executed, the required time is substantially constant when the start-up process of each control device is normally executed. Therefore, since it is possible to define the start-up order of each control device (the order in which the start-up process ends), it is sufficient to execute the processing in accordance with the defined order. Since the setting change operation can be executed during the start-up process, the start-up process of the main control device 110 is more effective than the start-up process of the display control device 114 (the third symbol display device) depending on the period required for the setting change operation. 81 boot processing) or after the boot processing).

Therefore, in the present embodiment, different display screens can be displayed according to the processing status of other control devices when the boot processing by the display control device 114 ends. By configuring in this way, by visually recognizing the display screen of the third pattern display device 81, the current processing status can be notified in an easy-to-understand manner.

FIG. 482(a) is a diagram showing an example of the display screen displayed when the boot processing of the display control device 114 is being executed, and FIG. 482(c) is a diagram showing an example of the display screen displayed when the setting change operation is being executed after the boot process of the display control device 114 has been completed. 482(d) is a diagram showing an example of the display screen displayed when the setting change operation is finished but the start-up process of the main controller 110 is being executed. FIG. FIG. 7 is a diagram showing an example of a display screen displayed when the boot processing of the controller 114 is completed and the start-up processing of the main controller 110 and the sound lamp controller 113 is completed.

As shown in FIG. 482(a), when the boot process by the display control device 114 is executed, a display image in which color bars are displayed is displayed on the entire display area of the third pattern display device 81. , the color bar is displayed in order to correctly adjust the color tone displayed on the liquid crystal display, for example, in order of white, yellow, cyan, magenta, red, blue, black, that is, in order of brightness. In addition, an SMPTE color bar or the like composed of RGB three primary colors and their complementary colors is displayed.

The display contents displayed on the display screen are used to check the linearity of the transmission system and the amplitude and phase characteristics of the color signal frequency band. Thereby, the boot processing of the display control device 114 can be executed properly. In the example shown in FIG. 482(a), the test color bar is displayed as a still image. may be configured. With this configuration, the operator can easily grasp whether or not the regularly switched image information is displayed normally (whether or not it is frozen) by visually recognizing the display screen of the third pattern display device 81. be able to.

Then, when the display control device 114 finishes the boot processing, it outputs a command (boot completion command) indicating that the boot processing has finished to the sound lamp control device 113 . The sound lamp control device 113 receives a command indicating that the setting is being changed or a command indicating the completion of the setting change output from the main control device 110, thereby determining the current setting change status, Information for showing a display image to be displayed on the display screen of the third pattern display device 81 is determined based on the reception of the boot completion command output from the display control device 114 .

It should be noted that information (display command) for showing a display image cannot be output from the audio lamp control device 113 to the display control device 114 when the start-up processing of the audio lamp control device 113 is not completed. Therefore, if no display command is received from the audio lamp control device 113 after the boot processing of the display control device 114 is completed, the image shown in FIG. 482(b) is displayed. In other words, the display control device 114 stores initial display image data with the characters "setting being changed" added as an initial display image to be displayed on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81 after the completion of boot processing. After determining that the boot process is completed, it is determined whether a display command has been received from the sound lamp controller 113 . If it is determined that the display command has not been received, it means that the start-up processing of the audio lamp control device 113 has not been completed, so as shown in FIG. is displayed.

Here, for example, when the setting change operation is not executed when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, the main controller 110 and the sound lamp controller 113 initialize each RAM by each MPU, and Start-up processing is executed to execute initial control processing based on the information on the display. The time is much shorter than the time spent on processing for activating the configured third pattern display device 81 .

Therefore, when the boot processing is completed in the display control device 114, a display command (a display command indicating that initialization is being performed (startup processing) or an initial setting completion (startup processing completion) command is issued from the sound lamp control device 113. display command) is not output, it means that the setting change operation is being executed. Therefore, in this embodiment, the display image shown in FIG. 482(b) is configured to be the initial display image.

With this configuration, when the display command is not output from the audio lamp control device 113 when the boot process is completed in the display control device 114, the notification mode for indicating the current situation is displayed. be able to.

When the display control device 114 completes the boot process and the audio lamp control device 113 outputs a display command indicating that the setting change has been completed, the display image shown in FIG. 482(c) is displayed. When the display command is output from the audio lamp control device 113 when the boot processing is completed in the display control device 114, the normal setting shown in FIG. 482(d) is output. A standby screen (demo screen) is displayed.

<Regarding control processing of main controller 110>
Next, each control process executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 will be described with reference to flowcharts of FIGS. 487 to 502. FIG. The processing of the MPU 201 can be broadly classified into startup processing that is started when the power is turned on, main processing that is executed after the startup processing, and a timer that is started periodically (in this embodiment, at intervals of 2 milliseconds). There are interrupt processing and NMI interrupt processing activated by the input of the power failure signal SG1 to the NMI terminal. and main processing.

487 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110. FIG. Timer interrupt processing is periodic processing that is executed, for example, every 2 milliseconds. In the timer interrupt process, first, various prize-winning switches are read (S101). That is, it reads the states of various switches connected to the main controller 110, determines the states of the switches, and saves detection information (winning detection information).

Next, the initial value random number counter CINI1 and the normal initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S102). Specifically, the initial value random number counter CINI1 is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (299 in this embodiment). Then, the updated value of the initial value random number counter CINI1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM203. Similarly, the normal initial value random number counter CINI2 is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (239 in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0, and the updated value of the normal initial value random number counter CINI2 is stored in the RAM 203. stored in the corresponding buffer area.

Further, the special winning random number counter C1, the special winning type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the normal winning random number counter C4 are updated (S103). Specifically, 1 is added to each of the special hit random number counter C1, the special hit type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the normal hit random number counter C4, and their counter values are the maximum values (in this embodiment, each is 299 , 99, 239) are cleared to 0 respectively. Then, the updated values of the counters C1 to C4 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203. FIG.

Next, a special symbol variation process for setting the variation pattern of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 is executed (S104), and then, A starting winning process associated with winning (starting winning) to the first ball entrance 64 is executed (S105). The details of the special symbol variation processing and the start winning processing will be described later with reference to FIGS. 488 to 493.

After the start winning process is executed, the normal symbol variation process, which is the process for displaying on the second symbol display device 83, is executed (S106), and the through gate passage process accompanying the passage of the ball through the through gate 67 is executed. (S107). The details of the normal symbol variation processing and the through gate passage processing will be described later with reference to FIGS. 494 and 496. FIG. After executing the through-gate passage processing, the firing control processing is executed (S108), and further, other processing that should be periodically executed is executed (S109), and the timer interrupt processing ends. Note that the shooting control process is performed on the condition that the touch sensor 290 detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51 and the stop switch 51b for stopping shooting is not operated. This is a process of determining on/off of the . Main controller 110 gives a ball launch instruction to launch controller 112 when ball launch is on.

Next, with reference to FIG. 488, the special symbol variation process (S104) executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 488 is a flow chart showing this special symbol variation process (S104). This special symbol variation process (S104) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 487), and the variable display of the special symbol (first symbol) performed in the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device This is a process for controlling the variable display of the third pattern performed in 81.

In this special symbol variation process, first, it is determined whether or not the special symbol is currently hitting the jackpot (S201). Here, it is determined whether or not the big-hit flag 203n is on, and if it is on, it is determined that the big-hit is in progress. During the special symbol jackpot, the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are displaying the special symbol jackpot (including during the special symbol jackpot game), and during the special symbol jackpot. During the predetermined time after the end of the jackpot game. As a result of the determination, if the jackpot of the special symbol is in progress (S201: Yes), this process is finished as it is.

If the special symbol jackpot is not in progress (S201: No), it is determined whether or not the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is fluctuating (S202), and the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is fluctuating. If not (S202: No), the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d (the number of times N1 of holding the variable display in the special symbol) and the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e are acquired (S203). . After obtaining the value of each counter, a change execution determination process is executed (S204). The details of the variation execution determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. 489, but in this variation execution determination process (S204), a process of determining the special symbol that will be the next variation order is executed.

Next, it is determined whether the next variation order determined in the variation execution determination process (S204) is special figure 1 (first special symbol) (S205), and variation execution in special figure 1 (first special symbol) If so, 1 is subtracted from the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d (S206), and a reserved ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d changed by calculation is set ( S207). The reserved ball number command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is executed by the MPU 201 during the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 501), which will be described later. , is sent to the audio ramp controller 113 . When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball number command, it extracts the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d from the reserved ball number command, and stores the extracted value in the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223a of the RAM 223. Store.

After setting the reserved ball number command by the processing of S207, the data stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a is shifted (S208). In the process of S208, the data stored in the reservation areas 1 to 4 of the special symbol 1 reservation ball storage area 203a are sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, the data in each area is shifted in the order of reservation area 1→execution area, reservation area 2→reservation area 1, reservation area 3→reservation area 2, reservation area 4→reservation area 3, and so on. After shifting the data, a special symbol 1 variation start process is executed to start the variation display on the first symbol display device (S209). The special symbol 1 fluctuation start process (S209) will be described later with reference to FIG. In the special symbol 1 variation start process (S209), processes such as selection of a variation pattern (variation period) necessary for starting the variation of the first special symbol are executed.

In the process of S205, if it is determined that the next variation order determined in the variation execution determination process (S204) is not variation execution in special figure 1 (S205: No), special figure 2 (second special (S210). In addition, if it is not the variation execution of the special figure 2 (S210: No), that is, since the reserved balls are not stored in both the first special symbol and the second special symbol, this process ends. On the other hand, if it is a variable execution in the special figure 2 (S210: Yes), the same processing as the above-described processing for the special symbol 1 reserved ball is performed for the special symbol 2 reserved ball.

Specifically, 1 is subtracted from the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e (S211), and the reserved ball indicating the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e changed by calculation A number command is set (S212). According to the pending ball number command set here, it is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 223, and executed by the MPU 201 in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 501), which will be described later. , is sent to the audio ramp controller 113 . When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball number command, it extracts the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e from the reserved ball number command, and stores the extracted value in the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223b of the RAM 223. Store.

After setting the reserved ball number command by the processing of S212, the data stored in the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b is shifted (S213). In the process of S213, the data stored in the reservation areas 1 to 4 of the special symbol 2 reservation ball storage area 203b are sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, the data in each area is shifted in the order of reservation area 1→execution area, reservation area 2→reservation area 1, reservation area 3→reservation area 2, reservation area 4→reservation area 3, and so on. After shifting the data, a special symbol 2 variation start process is executed for starting the variation display on the first symbol display device (S214). Incidentally, the special symbol 2 fluctuation start processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

In the process of S202, if the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S202: Yes), it is determined whether or not the variation time of the variation display being executed in the first symbol display device 37 has elapsed. (S215). The variation time of the variation display executed in the first pattern display device 37 is determined according to the variation pattern selected by the variation type counter CS1 (determined according to the variation pattern command), and this variation time has not elapsed (S215: No), the display of the first symbol display device is updated (S216), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the processing of S215, if the variation time of the variable display being executed has passed (S215: Yes), the display mode corresponding to the stop symbol of the first symbol display device 37 is set (S217). The setting of the stop symbol is performed in advance by the special symbol 1 variation start process (S209) described later with reference to FIG. 490 or the special symbol 2 variation start process (S214) described later with reference to FIG. When this special symbol variation start process is executed, based on the values of various counters stored in the execution area provided in common to the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a and the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b. , A lottery for special designs will be held. More specifically, according to the value of the special winning random number counter C1, it is determined whether or not the special symbol is a big hit, and when the first special symbol and the second special symbol are the big hits, the special winning type counter Whether the jackpot A1, the jackpot B1, the jackpot C1, the jackpot D1, or the jackpot E1 is determined according to the value of C2.

In this embodiment, the colors of the LEDs to be lit in the first symbol display device 37 are changed based on the lottery result. For example, in the case of a big win A, the first symbol display device 37 lights up the blue LED, and in the case of a big win B, the red LED lights up. When the jackpot C is reached, the red LED and the blue LED are turned on. If it is out, the red LED and the green LED are turned on. The display of each LED is turned off when the next variable display is started, but it may be turned on only for several seconds after the variable display is stopped.

After the processing of S217 is completed, when the variation display being executed in the first design display device 37 is started, the special symbol lottery result (this lottery result) performed by the special symbol variation start process is It is determined whether it is a special symbol jackpot (S218). If the lottery result of this time is a special symbol jackpot (S218: Yes), the start of the jackpot is set (S219), the variable probability flag 203m is turned off, and the values of the counter 203j and the number of times of variation counter 203i are set to 0. (S220). After that, the jackpot middle flag 203n is set to ON (S221), a stop command is set (S225), and this process is terminated. That is, during the jackpot game, a low-probability game state is set, the electric support game state (time-saving game state) is also canceled, and the non-electric support game state is set.

On the other hand, in the process of S218, if the lottery result of this time is out of the special symbol (S218: No), it is determined whether the value of the time saving counter 203j is 1 or more (S222), and the value of the time saving counter 203j is equal to or greater than 1 (S222: Yes), the value of the time saving counter 203j is subtracted by 1 (S223), and the value of the variation counter 203i is incremented by 1 (S224). Next, the process of S225 mentioned above is performed, and this process is complete|finished. On the other hand, if the value of the time saving counter 203j is 0 (S222: No), the process of S223 is skipped, the process of S225 is executed, and this process ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 489, the variation execution determination process (S204) executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 489 is a flow chart showing the change execution determination process (S204). This variation execution determination process (S204) is a process executed in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 488) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 487), and the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display The effect pattern (variable effect pattern) of the variable effect performed by the device 81 is based on the values of various counters stored in which execution area, the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b. This is a process for determining whether to execute

In the variation execution determination process (S204), first, the variation execution flag 203k is set to OFF (“0” as a value) to initialize (S241), and the variation order storage area 203p stored in the RAM 203 is initialized (S241). Data is acquired (S242). Next, the data in the change order storage area 203p is shifted (S243). Next, it is determined whether or not the data in the execution area is special figure 1 (S244). If the data in the execution area is the special figure 1 (S244: Yes), the variation execution flag 203k is set to the variation execution with the special figure 1 (S245), and this process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S244, if it is determined that the data in the execution area is not the variation execution in the special figure 1 (S244: No), it is determined whether the data in the execution area is the variation execution in the special figure 2 (S246), when it is determined that it is the variation execution in the special figure 2 (S246: Yes), the variation execution flag 203k is set to the variation execution in the special figure 2 (S247), and this process is finished. In addition, in the process of S246, when it is determined that the data in the execution area is not the variable execution in the special figure 2 (S246: No), this process is terminated as it is.

Next, with reference to FIG. 490, the special symbol 1 fluctuation start process (S209) executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 490 is a flow chart showing the special symbol 1 fluctuation start process (S209). This special symbol 1 fluctuation start process (S209) is a process executed in the special symbol fluctuation process (see FIG. 488) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 487), and the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a. Based on the values of various counters stored in the execution area, a lottery (win/fail judgment) of "special symbol big win" or "special symbol loss" is performed, and the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81. It is a process for determining the effect pattern (variable effect pattern) of the variable effect performed in .

In the special symbol 1 variation start process (S209), first, each value of the special winning random number counter C1, the special winning type counter C2, and the variation type counter CS1 stored in the execution area of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a is acquired. (S251). Next, it is determined whether the game state is currently in the variable probability period (high probability game state) (S252). It should be noted that the determination of whether or not it is the variable probability period is executed by determining whether the variable probability flag 203m is on. This variable probability flag 203m is set to ON based on the end of the jackpot game based on jackpot A1, jackpot B1, jackpot C1, and jackpot D1 (S1113: see FIG. 502). On the other hand, it is set to OFF based on the start of the jackpot game (S220: see FIG. 488).

In the process of S252, when it is determined that the current game state is in the variable probability state (S252: Yes), since the pachinko machine 10 is in the variable probability state of the special symbol, the process proceeds to S253. In the process of S253, based on the value of the special winning random number counter C1 acquired in the process of S251 and the special symbol big winning random number table 202a (see FIG. 465(a)), the lottery result of whether or not the special symbol big winning is determined. Acquire (S253). Specifically, the value of the special winning random number counter C1 is compared one by one with 65536 random numbers stored in the special symbol big winning random number table 202a. As described above, when the current set value is set to "1", 1000 numbers of "0 to 999" are used as the random number value for the special symbol jackpot in the variable probability game state (special game state). is set, and when the current set value is set to "2", 1100 of "0 to 1099" are set. When the current set value is set to "3", 1200 numbers from "0 to 1199" are set as random numbers for the special symbol jackpot. When the value of the special winning random number counter C1 and the random number value of these winnings match, it is determined that the special symbol is a big winning. When the lottery result of the special symbol is obtained, the process proceeds to S255.

On the other hand, in the process of S252, when it is determined that the pachinko machine 10 is in the special symbol normal game state (low probability game state) (S252: No), the process of S254 is executed. In the process of S254, based on the value of the special winning random number counter C1 acquired in the process of S251 and the special symbol big winning random number table 202a, the lottery result of whether or not the special symbol big winning is obtained (S254). Specifically, the value of the special winning random number counter C1 is compared one by one with 65535 random numbers stored in the special symbol big winning random number table 202a. If the current set value is set to "1", 250 numbers from "0 to 249" are set as the random number value that will be a special symbol jackpot in the normal game state (low probability game state). When the current set value is set to "2", 275 items from "0 to 274" are set. Then, when the current set value is set to "3", 300 numbers of "0 to 299" are set as random numbers that will be the jackpot of special symbols. When the value of the special winning random number counter C1 and the random number value of these winnings match, it is determined that the special symbol is a big winning. When the lottery result of the special symbol is obtained, the process proceeds to S255.

In the process of S255, whether the special symbol lottery result obtained by the process of S253 or S254 is a special symbol jackpot (that is, the value of the special winning random number counter C1 that has been acquired and the special symbol jackpot random number table 202a match the set determination value) is determined (S255), and when it is determined that the special symbol jackpot is determined (S255: Yes), the value of the special winning type counter C2 acquired in the process of S251 , the display mode at the time of the big win is set (S256). More specifically, the value of the special hit type counter C2 acquired in the process of S251 is compared with the random number value stored in the jackpot type selection table 202d, and five types of special symbol jackpots (jackpot A1, jackpot B1, jackpot C1, jackpot D1, jackpot E1), the type of jackpot is determined. As described above, if the value of the special hit type counter C2 is in the range of "0 to 39", it is determined to be a jackpot A (10R probability variable jackpot), and if it is "40, 41", a jackpot B1 (10R If it is in the range of "42 to 47", it is determined to be a jackpot C1 (5R probability variable jackpot), and if it is in the range of "48 to 59", the jackpot D1 (2R probability variable jackpot) ), and if it is in the range of “60 to 99”, it is determined to be a jackpot E1 (10R normal jackpot, time saving 100 times) (see FIG. 466).

In the process of S256, the display mode (the lighting state of the LED 37a) of the first symbol display device 37 is set according to the determined jackpot type (jackpot A1, jackpot B1, jackpot C1, jackpot D1, jackpot E1). . In addition, the jackpot types (jackpot A1, jackpot B1, jackpot C1, jackpot D1, jackpot E1) are set as the stop types so as to stop and display the stop symbols corresponding to the jackpot types on the third pattern display device 81.例文帳に追加

On the other hand, in the process of S255, when it is determined that the special symbol is out (S255: No), the display mode at the time of being out is set (S257). In the process of S257, the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is set to the display mode corresponding to the off symbol, and the value of the stop type selection counter C3 stored in the execution area of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a. Based on, the fluctuation time (variation pattern) to be displayed in the third symbol display device 81 is set.

After executing the processing of S256 or S257, next, the value of the fluctuation number counter 203i is acquired (S258), and the obtained value of the fluctuation number counter 203i and the fluctuation pattern scenario table 202e are referenced. A variation pattern table is determined (S259). In this embodiment, as described above, the variation pattern table to be referenced in the variation pattern selection table 202b is determined based on the value of the variation counter 203i and the variation pattern scenario table 202e. When the variation pattern is set in the process of S259, the variation time (display time) of the variation effect in the first pattern display device 37 is set, and in the process of S253 or S254 in the third pattern display device 81 A variation time is determined until the third symbol stops in a display mode for showing the obtained lottery result.

For example, the previous jackpot type is either jackpot B1 (10R probability variable jackpot), jackpot C1 (5R probability variable jackpot), or jackpot D1 (2R probability variable jackpot), and the game state at the time of the jackpot is the normal game state. , If the value of the variation number counter 203i acquired in the process of S258 is a range value of 1 to 80 times, the variation pattern (variation time) is determined by referring to the time saving/probability variation table 202b2. Then, the variation time (variation pattern) is determined based on the result of the determination of whether or not the game is correct and the variation type counter CS1 acquired in the process of S253. For example, in the process of S259, when it is determined as a variation pattern table that refers to the time-saving/probability variation variation pattern table 202b2, the success/failure determination result obtained in the process of S253 is a hit, and the value of the variation type counter CS1 is " If the value is in the range of 0 to 49”, “hit variation A” is set as the variation pattern, and “20 seconds” is set as the variation time. (See FIG. 467(c)).

In addition, in the variation pattern, the main controller 110 determines the variation time of the third symbol for informing the success/failure determination result, and notifies the sound lamp control device 113 of the variation time. The sound ramp control device 113 determines the content (variation pattern) of the variable display mode to be actually displayed on the third pattern display device 81 according to the variation time and the success/failure determination result. Even if the main controller 110 is in the out-of-reach display mode, the sound lamp control device 113 is configured to be able to switch to the out-of-reach display mode and the out-of-reach display mode if the fluctuation time is the same. As a result, various display modes can be displayed, and effects can be diversified.

Next, a variation pattern is determined based on the variation pattern table determined in the process of S259 (S260). Next, a variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 of the variation pattern determined in the process of S260 is set (S261). Next, a stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type set in the process of S261 is set (S262). When the processing of S262 ends, the process returns to the special symbol variation processing (S104).

Next, with reference to FIG. 491, the special symbol 2 fluctuation start process (S214) executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 491 is a flowchart showing the special symbol 2 fluctuation start process (S214). This special symbol 2 variation start process (S214) is a process executed in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 488) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 487), and the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b. Based on the values of various counters stored in the execution area, a lottery (win/fail judgment) of "special symbol big win" or "special symbol loss" is performed, and the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81. It is a process for determining the effect pattern (variable effect pattern) of the variable effect performed in .

In this special symbol 2 variation start process (S214), similarly to the special symbol 1 variation start process (S209), first, the special symbols stored in the execution area of the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b acquired by the process of S271. Each value of the hit random number counter C1 and the special hit type counter C2 is acquired (S271).

Next, it is determined whether the game state is currently in the variable probability period (high probability game state) (S272). Since it is in the variable probability state, the process proceeds to S273. In the process of S273, based on the value of the special winning random number counter C1 acquired in the process of S271 and the special symbol big winning random number table 202a, the lottery result of whether or not the special symbol big winning is obtained (S273). Specifically, the value of the special winning random number counter C1 is compared one by one with 65536 random numbers stored in the special symbol big winning random number table 202a. As described above, when the game state is during the variable probability period (high probability game state), as the random number value for the special symbol jackpot, if "1" is set as the current setting value , 1000 from "0 to 999" are set, and if "2" is set, 1100 from "0 to 1099" are set. Then, when "3" is set as the current set value, 1200 numbers of "0 to 1199" are set as random numbers that will be the jackpot of special symbols. When the value of the special winning random number counter C1 and the random number value to be a winning coincide with each other, it is determined that the special symbol is a big winning. When the lottery result of the special symbol is obtained, the process proceeds to S275.

On the other hand, in the process of S272, when it is determined that the pachinko machine 10 is not in the variable probability state (S272: No), the process of S274 is executed. In the process of S274, based on the value of the special winning random number counter C1 acquired in the process of S271 and the special symbol big winning random number table 202a for low probability, the lottery result of whether or not the special symbol big winning is acquired ( S274). Specifically, the value of the special winning random number counter C1 is compared one by one with 65536 random numbers stored in the special symbol big winning random number table 202a. When the game state is during the normal period (low-probability game state), the random number for the special symbol jackpot is "0 to 249" if "1" is set as the current set value. 250 are set, and when "2" is set, 275 of "0 to 274" are set. Then, when the current set value is "3", 300 numbers from "0 to 299" are set as the random numbers for the special symbol jackpot. When the value of the special winning random number counter C1 and the random number value to be the winning match, it is determined that the special symbol is a big winning. When the lottery result of the special symbol is obtained, the process proceeds to S275.

In the process of S275, it is determined whether or not the special symbol lottery result obtained by the process of S273 or S274 is a special symbol jackpot (S275). Yes), based on the value of the special hit type counter C2 acquired in the process of S271, the display mode at the time of the big hit is set (S276). More specifically, the value of the special hit type counter C2 acquired in the process of S271 is compared with the random number value stored in the jackpot type selection table 202d, and five types of special symbol jackpots (jackpot A1, jackpot B1, jackpot C1, jackpot D1, jackpot E1), it is determined what the jackpot type is. As described above, if the value of the special hit type counter C2 is in the range of "0 to 39", it is determined to be a jackpot A1 (10R probability variable jackpot), and if it is in the range of "40, 41", the jackpot B1 (10R probability variable jackpot), if it is in the range of "42 to 47", it is determined to be a jackpot C1 (5R probability variable jackpot), and if it is in the range of "48 to 59", the jackpot D1 (2R If it is in the range of "60 to 99", it is determined to be a jackpot E1 (10R normal jackpot, short time 100 times) (see FIG. 466).

On the other hand, in the process of S275, when it is determined that the special symbol is out (S275: No), the display mode at the time of being out is set (S277). In the processing of S277, the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is set to the display mode corresponding to the off symbol, and the value of the stop type selection counter C3 stored in the execution area of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a is set. Based on, the fluctuation time (variation pattern) to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is set.

After executing the process of S276 or S277, next, the value of the fluctuation number counter 203i is acquired (S278), and based on the value of the fluctuation number counter 203i acquired in the process of S278 and the fluctuation pattern scenario table 202e to determine the variation pattern table to be referred to (S279). In this embodiment, as described above, the variation pattern table to be referenced in the variation pattern selection table 202b is determined based on the value of the variation counter 203i and the variation pattern scenario table 202e. In the processing of S279, when the variation pattern is set, the variation time (display time) of the variation effect in the first design display device 37 is set, and in the processing of S273 or S274 in the third design display device 81 A variation time is determined until the third symbol stops in a display mode for showing the obtained lottery result.

For example, the previous jackpot type is either a jackpot B1 (10R probability variable jackpot), a jackpot C1 (5R probability variable jackpot), or a jackpot D1 (2R probability variable jackpot), and the game state at the time of the jackpot is a normal game state, If the value of the variation number counter 203i obtained in the process of S258 is a range value of 1 to 80 times, the variation pattern (variation time) is determined by referring to the time saving/probability variation table 202b2. Then, the variation time (variation pattern) is determined based on the result of the determination of suitability acquired in the process of S253 and the variation type counter CS1. For example, in the process of S259, when it is determined as a variation pattern table that refers to the time-saving/probability variation variation pattern table 202b2, the success/failure determination result obtained in the process of S253 is a hit, and the value of the variation type counter CS1 is " If the value is in the range of 0 to 49”, “hit variation A” is set as the variation pattern, and “20 seconds” is set as the variation time.

In addition, in the variation pattern, the main controller 110 determines the variation time of the third symbol for informing the success/failure determination result, and notifies the sound lamp control device 113 of the variation time. The sound ramp control device 113 determines the content (variation pattern) of the variable display mode to be actually displayed on the third pattern display device 81 according to the variation time and the success/failure determination result. Even if the main controller 110 is in the out-of-reach display mode, the sound lamp control device 113 is configured to be able to switch to the out-of-reach display mode and the out-of-reach display mode if the fluctuation time is the same. As a result, various display modes can be displayed, and effects can be diversified.

Next, in the processing of S279, the variation pattern is determined based on the determined variation pattern table (S280), and the variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 of the variation pattern determined in the processing of S280 is set ( S281). Next, a stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type set in the process of S281 is set (S282). When the processing of S282 ends, the process returns to the special symbol variation processing (S104).

Next, with reference to FIG. 492, the start winning process (S105) executed by MPU 201 of main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 492 is a flow chart showing this starting winning process (S105). This start winning process (S105) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 487) to determine whether or not there is a win to the first ball entrance 64 (start winning). , Reservation processing of values indicated by various random number counters, and processing for executing prefetching of lottery results in special symbols from the values indicated by the reserved various random number counters.

When the starting winning process (S105: see FIG. 492) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the ball has won the first ball entrance 64 (starting winning) (S301). Here, the ball entering the first ball entrance 64 is detected over three times of timer interrupt processing. Then, when it is determined that the ball has won the first ball entrance 64 (S301: Yes), the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d (the number of times N1 of holding variable display in the special symbol) is acquired (S302). ). Then, it is determined whether or not the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is less than the upper limit (4 in this embodiment) (S303). On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S301 that the ball has not entered the first ball entrance 64 (S301: No), the processes of S302 to S308 and S320 are skipped, and the process proceeds to S309. do.

Then, in the process of S303, if the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is not less than 4 (S303: No), an over winning information command is set (S304), and the process proceeds to S309. On the other hand, in the process of S303, if the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is less than 4 (S303: Yes), 1 is added to the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d ( S305). Then, a first special symbol reserved ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d changed by the calculation is set (S306).

The reserved ball number command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is executed by the MPU 201 during the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 501), which will be described later. , is sent to the audio ramp controller 113 . When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball number command, it extracts the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d from the reserved ball number command, and stores the extracted value in the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223a of the RAM 223. Store.

After setting the pending ball number command by the process of S306, the special hit random number counter C1, the special hit type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the variation type updated in S103 of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 487) Each value of the counter CS1 is stored in the first area among the empty reservation areas (reservation area 1 to reservation area 4) of the special symbol 1 reservation ball storage area 203a of the RAM 203 (S307). In the process of S307, the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is referred to, and if the value is 0, the reserved area 1 is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the reserved area 2 is the first area, if the value is 2, the reserved area 3 is the first area, and if the value is 3, the reserved area 4 is the first area. Next, the special figure 1 is set to the bottom of the fluctuation order storage area 203p (S308), and the prefetching process (S320) is executed. The prefetching process (S320) will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, regarding S309 to S316, for each of the processes of S301 to S308 and S320 described above, the process for winning the first ball entrance 64 is performed by the right second ball entrance 640r or the second ball entrance 640. Since the same processing is executed only by changing to processing for winning a prize, detailed description thereof will be omitted. It should be noted that when a game ball enters the right second ball entrance 640r or the second ball entrance 640 and is stored as a reserved ball, each value of the special winning random number counter C1 and the special winning type counter C2 It is acquired and stored in the empty reservation area of the corresponding special symbol 2 reservation ball storage area 203b.

Thus, for the second special symbol based on the ball entering the right second ball entrance 640r or the second ball entrance 640, the same special winning random number counter C1 and special winning type counter as for the first special symbol By acquiring the values of C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the variation type selection counter CS1, the lottery can be executed using a random number common to the first special symbol and the second special symbol, so the first special symbol and The winning probability can be made constant even with the second special symbol.

After executing the process of S308 or the process of S316, the prefetching process (S320) is executed. Details of the look-ahead processing (S320) will be described with reference to FIG. 493 as described above. Based on the values of various counters acquired for the incoming ball, a process of determining in advance each lottery result to be executed at the start of fluctuation is executed.

In the present embodiment, the value of each counter is selected based on the incoming ball, but it may be configured to be selected at the start of variation. By configuring in this way, it is possible to suppress the use of the storage area of the RAM 203 without requiring a storage area for storing the values of each counter until the start of fluctuation. Further, among the counters, some counters (for example, only the fluctuation type counter CS1) may be configured to be acquired at the start of fluctuation. By configuring in this way, the counter related to winning/failure determination can be acquired at the time of entering the ball, and the counter not related to winning/failure determination can be acquired later, and the amount of data to be stored can be reduced while maintaining the fairness of the game. can be suppressed.

Next, referring to FIG. 493, the look-ahead process (S320), which is one process in the starting winning process (S105) executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, will be described. FIG. 493 is a flow chart showing this prefetching process (S320).

In the look-ahead process (S320), first, based on the value of the obtained special hit random number counter C1, it is determined whether or not it is determined at the start of fluctuation (S351). In this propriety determination, the processing of S255 in the above-described special symbol 1 variation start processing (S209: see FIG. 490) and the processing of S275 in the special symbol 2 variation start processing (S214: see FIG. 491) are executed. . It should be noted that this propriety determination is the propriety determination (discrimination) at the start of variation (S255 processing in special symbol 1 variation start processing (S209: see FIG. 490), S275 in special symbol 2 variation start processing (S214: see FIG. 491) processing)). Next, it is determined whether or not the determination result executed in the process of S351 is a hit (also referred to as a specific determination result) (S352). If it is determined that the determination result is a win (S352: Yes), the variation pattern type is acquired (determined) from the variation pattern selection table 202b based on the acquired stop type counter C3 and variation type counter CS1 ( S353). Next, based on the obtained variation pattern type, a winning prize information command is set (selected or generated) from the winning command table 202e (S354), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of S352, if it is determined that the result of the judgment is out (S352: No), the variation pattern type is selected from the variation pattern selection table 202b based on the acquired stop type counter C3 and variation type counter CS1. Acquire (S355). Next, based on the acquired variation pattern type, a winning prize information command is set out of the winning command table 202e (S356), and this process is terminated.

In this way, before the start of the variation, the result of the winning judgment in advance is output as a winning command to the audio ramp control device 113 every time the ball is held, so the audio ramp control device 113 It is possible to recognize in advance the result of the judgment of success or failure and the type of hit. Therefore, by the voice lamp control device 113, based on the winning command, the advance notice effect that notifies the player of the success judgment result of the reserved ball in advance (for example, the color of the reserved symbol is changed to the color that informs the success judgment result, Production such as outputting a notification sound for notifying the success/failure determination result in the held ball) can be executed. In addition, since one winning command is output for each reserved ball each time the reserved ball is established, the voice lamp control device 113 can also recognize establishment of the reserved ball.

Next, referring to FIG. 494, the normal symbol variation process (S106) executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 494 is a flow chart showing this normal symbol variation process (S106). This normal symbol variation process (S106) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 487), and the variation display of the second symbol performed in the second symbol display device 83 and the second symbol entrance 640 are accompanied by This is a process for controlling the opening time of the electric accessory 640a.

In the normal symbol variation process (S106), first, it is determined whether or not the normal symbol (second symbol) is currently hitting (S401). During the winning of the normal symbol (second symbol), the second symbol display device 83 is displaying the winning, and the opening and closing control of the electric accessory 640a attached to the second ball entrance 640 is performed. including while As a result of determination, if the normal symbol (second symbol) is in the process of hitting (S401: Yes), this process is finished as it is.

On the other hand, if the normal symbol (second symbol) is not hit (S401: No), it is determined whether or not the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is fluctuating (S402), and the second symbol display device is determined. If the display mode of 83 is not fluctuating (S402: No), the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f (the number of times of suspension of variable display in normal symbols M) is acquired (S404). Next, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is greater than 0 (S405), and if the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is 0 (S405: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if the value (M) of the normal design reserved ball number counter 203f is not 0 (S405: Yes), the value (M) of the normal design reserved ball number counter 203f is subtracted by 1 (S406).

Next, the data stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c is shifted (S407). In the process of S407, the data stored in the first reservation area to the fourth reservation area of the normal symbol reservation ball storage area 203c are sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, the first holding area → execution area, the second holding area → the first holding area, the third holding area → the second holding area, the fourth holding area → the third holding area, etc. Shift data. After shifting the data, the value of the normal winning random number counter C4 stored in the execution area of the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c is obtained (S408).

Next, normal design fluctuation start processing is executed (S409), and this processing ends. In addition, although the normal symbol variation start processing will be described later with reference to FIG. Dynamic display time) is determined, and if the result of the win/fail determination is a hit, the process of setting the opening operation of the electric accessary 640a (movement pattern of the normal figure winning game) corresponding to the hit type, etc. Run.

In the process of S402, if the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is changing (S402: Yes), it is determined whether or not the variation time of the variation display being executed in the second symbol display device 83 has elapsed. (S410). Incidentally, the variable time here is the time set in advance by the processing of S432 or S433 of FIG.

In the processing of S410, if the variation time has not elapsed (S410: No), this processing is terminated. On the other hand, in the processing of S410, if the variation time of the variation display being executed has passed (S410: Yes), the stop display of the second symbol display device 83 is set (S411). In the process of S411, if the lottery of normal symbols is won and the display mode is set by the process of S426 in FIG. It is set to be displayed (lit display). On the other hand, if the lottery for the normal symbol is lost and the display mode is set by the processing of S434 in FIG. displayed). When the stop display is set by the process of S411, when the second symbol display update process (see S1007) of the main process (see FIG. 501) is executed next, the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is changed. 495, the stop symbol (second symbol) is stop-displayed (lit display) on the second symbol display device 83 in the display mode set in the process of S426 or S434 of FIG. In addition, in the present embodiment, one type is set as the winning type of the normal symbol, but one or more winning types such as long-time winning and short-time winning may be set. In the case of such a configuration, the "○" symbol indicating the hit displayed on the second symbol display device 83 is lit up and the symbol corresponding to the hit type of the normal symbol is lit up (for example, if it is a long time hit "◎", "○" for normal hits, and "△" for short-time hits). By configuring in this way, the player can distinguish the winning type of the normal symbol from the display mode, and an easy-to-understand game can be provided.

Next, when the variation display being executed in the second symbol display device 83 is started, whether the result of the normal symbol lottery (this lottery result) performed by the normal symbol variation process is a hit of the normal symbol. is determined (S412). If the lottery result of this time is a normal symbol hit (S412: Yes), the start of opening/closing control of the electric accessory 640a associated with the second ball entrance 640 is set (S413), and this process is terminated. When the opening/closing control start of the electric accessory 640a is set by the process of S412, when the electric accessory opening/closing process (see S1005) of the main process (see FIG. 501) is executed next, the electric accessory 640a The opening/closing control is started, and the opening/closing control of the electric accessory 640a is continued until the opening time and the number of times of opening set in the processing of S429 or S430 of FIG. 495 are completed. On the other hand, in the process of S412, if the lottery result of this time is out of the normal symbol (S412: No), the process of S413 is skipped and this process is finished.

Next, referring to the flowchart of FIG. 495, the normal symbol variation start process (S408) executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 495 is a flow chart showing this normal symbol variation start process (S408). This normal design fluctuation start processing (S408) is the setting at the time of normal design fluctuation start executed in the normal design fluctuation processing (see FIG. 495) executed in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 487) It is a process for execution.

At present, it is determined whether or not the special symbol jackpot is in progress (S421). During the special symbol jackpot, the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are displaying the special symbol jackpot (including during the special symbol jackpot game), and during the special symbol jackpot. During the predetermined time after the end of the jackpot game. As a result of the determination, if the jackpot of the special symbol is in progress (S421: Yes), the process proceeds to S424. In the process of S421, if it is not during the special symbol jackpot (S421: No), it is determined whether it is during probability variation or during time reduction (S422). If it is neither probability variation nor time reduction (S422: No), the process proceeds to S424.

If it is during the probability change or during the time saving (S422: Yes), the pachinko machine 10 is not in the special symbol jackpot, and the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal symbol time saving state. Based on the value of the winning random number counter C4 and the normal winning symbol random number table 202c (see FIG. 465(b)), the lottery result as to whether or not the winning of the normal symbol is obtained (S423). Specifically, the value of the normal per random number counter C4 is compared with the random value stored in the normal per symbol random number table 202c (see FIG. 465(b)). As described above, if the value of the second hit type counter C4 is in the range of "5 to 204", it is determined that it is a hit of the normal symbol, and if it is in the range of "0 to 4,205 to 239", It is determined that it is out of the normal pattern (see FIG. 465(b)).

In the processing of S424, since the pachinko machine 10 is in a special pattern jackpot or the pachinko machine 10 is in a normal state with normal patterns, the value of the normal winning random number counter C4 obtained in the processing of S408 in FIG. , based on the normal symbol random number table 202c (see FIG. 465(b)), the lottery result as to whether or not the normal symbol wins is acquired (S424). Specifically, the value of the normal random number counter C4 is compared with the random value stored in the normal per symbol random number table 202c for low probability (see FIG. 465(b)). As described above, if the value of the second hit type counter C4 is in the range of "5 to 6", it is determined that it is a normal hit of normal symbols, and if it is in the range of "0 to 4, 7 to 239" , It is determined that it is out of the normal symbol (see FIG. 465(b)).

In the present embodiment, during the jackpot of special symbols, it is difficult to win the lottery of normal symbols. This is because during the special symbol jackpot (that is, during the special game state), the player hits the ball to win the specific winning hole 65a, so the electric accessory 640a attached to the second ball entry hole 640 is opened. This is to prevent the ball, which is to be entered into the specific winning hole 65a from entering the second ball entering hole 640, as much as possible. In addition, since the specific winning hole 65a is provided immediately below the second ball-entering hole 640, even if the ball is prevented from entering the second ball-entering hole 640 during the special symbol jackpot, the second ball-entering hole 65a A large number of balls enter the ball entrance 640 . As a result, in most cases, the number of held balls for the second ball entrance 640 becomes maximum (4 times) while the pachinko machine 10 is in the special game state.

Next, it is determined whether or not the lottery result of the normal symbol obtained by the process of S423 or S424 is a normal symbol hit (S425), and when it is determined that the normal symbol is a hit (S425: Yes) , set the display mode at the time of winning (S426). In the process of S425, after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is completed, the symbol "o" is set to be illuminated as the stop symbol (second symbol). Next, it is determined whether the current game state is during probability change or during time saving (S427). When it is determined that the current game state is during probability variation or during time saving (S427: Yes), it is determined whether or not the special symbol jackpot is in progress (S428). As a result of the determination, if the special symbol jackpot is in progress (S428: Yes), the opening time of the electric accessory 640a associated with the second ball entrance 640 is set to 0.2 seconds, and the number of openings is set to 1. (S429), and the process proceeds to S431. In this embodiment, during the special symbol jackpot, in order to suppress the ball from entering the second ball entrance 640 as much as possible, even if the normal symbol wins, it is the same as when the normal symbol comes off. , the number of times of opening and the opening time of the electric accessory 640a are set. Also, in the processing of S427, even if it is determined that the current game state is not in the variable probability or the time saving (S427: No), the opening time of the electric accessory 640a attached to the second ball entrance 640 is 0.2. Seconds are set, and the number of opening times is set to 1 (S429), and the process proceeds to S431.

On the other hand, in the processing of S428, if the special symbol jackpot is not in progress (S428: No), the opening period of the electric accessory 640a associated with the second ball entrance 640 is set to 2 seconds, and the number of openings is set to 2. times (S430), and the process proceeds to S431.

On the other hand, in the process of S425, when it is determined that the symbol is out of the normal pattern (S425: No), the display mode at the time of out is set (S434). In the process of S434, after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is completed, the symbol "x" is set to be lit and displayed as the stop symbol (second symbol). After the setting of the display mode at the time of detachment is completed, the process proceeds to S431.

In the process of S431, it is determined whether or not the probability variation is in progress (S431), and if the probability variation is in progress (S431: Yes), the variation time of the variation display in the second symbol display device 83 is set to 3 seconds (S432). , the process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S431 that it is not in the process of probability variation (S431: No), the variation time of the variation display in the second symbol display device 83 is set to 30 seconds (S433), and this process ends. do. In this way, except during the jackpot of special symbols, when the probability of normal symbols is high, the time of fluctuation display is very short from "30 seconds to 3 seconds" compared to when the probability of normal symbols is low, and further, Since the opening period of the second ball entrance 640 becomes very long as “0.2 seconds×1 time→2 seconds×2 times”, the ball easily enters the second ball entrance 640 .

Next, the through gate passing process (S107) executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 496 is a flow chart showing this through gate passage processing (S107). This thru gate passage processing (S107) is executed in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 487). This is a process for acquiring and holding the value indicated by the counter C4.

In the through gate passage processing, first, it is determined whether or not the ball has passed through the through gate 67 (S501). Here, passage of the ball through the through gate 67 is detected over three times of timer interrupt processing. Then, when it is determined that the ball has passed through the through gate 67 (S501: Yes), the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f (the number of times of suspension of variable display in normal symbols M) is obtained (S502). Then, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is less than the upper limit (4 in this embodiment) (S503).

The ball has not passed through the through gate 67 (S501: No), or even if the ball has passed through the through gate 67, if the value (M) of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f is less than 4 (S503 : No), this process ends. On the other hand, if the ball passes through the through gate 67 (S501: Yes) and the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is less than 4 (S503: Yes), the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f 1 is added to the value (M) (S504). Then, the value of the normal hit random number counter C4 updated in S103 of the timer interrupt process described above is set to the first of the free reservation areas (reservation first area to reservation fourth area) of the normal symbol reservation ball storage area 203c of the RAM 203. The data is stored in the area (S505), and the process ends. In addition, in the process of S505, the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is referred to, and if the value is 0, the first reserved area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the second reserved area is the first area, if the value is 2, the third reserved area is the first area, and if the value is 3, the fourth reserved area is the first area.

497 is a flow chart showing NMI interrupt processing executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110. FIG. The NMI interrupt process is a process executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 when the pachinko machine 10 is powered off due to power failure or the like. By this NMI interrupt processing, information on occurrence of power failure is stored in the RAM 203 . That is, when the pachinko machine 10 is powered off due to a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 . Then, the MPU 201 interrupts the control being executed, starts the NMI interrupt processing, stores the power-off occurrence information in the RAM 203 as power-off occurrence information setting (S801), and ends the NMI interrupt processing. do.

Incidentally, the above NMI interrupt processing is also executed in the payout control device 111 in the same manner, and information on occurrence of power failure is stored in the RAM 213 by such NMI interrupt processing. That is, when the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to a power failure or the like, a power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 in the payout control device 111, and the MPU 211 interrupts the control being executed. Then, NMI interrupt processing is started.

Next, referring to FIG. 498, startup processing executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 when main controller 110 is powered on will be described. FIG. 498 is a flow chart showing this startup process. This start-up process is started by a reset when the power is turned on. In the start-up process, first, an initial setting process is executed upon power-on (S901). The initialization process (S901) will be described later with reference to FIG. 499. For example, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. Next, in order to wait for the sub-side control devices (peripheral control devices such as the sound lamp control device 113 and the payout control device 111) to become operable, a wait process (one second in this embodiment) is executed. (S902). Then, access to the RAM 203 is permitted (S903).

Next, it is determined whether or not the setting key 110b is placed at the ON position (S904). In the process of S904, if it is determined that the setting key 110b is located at the ON position (S904: Yes), it means that the setting change state or the setting confirmation state is set. A set value control process for performing corresponding control is executed (S905), and the process proceeds to S912, which will be described later. Details of this set value control process (S905) will be described later with reference to FIG. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S904 that the setting key 110b is not at the ON position (S904: No), the process proceeds to S906.

In the process of S906, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 446) provided in the power supply 115 is turned on (S906), and if it is turned on (S906: Yes), the process proceeds to S915. do. On the other hand, if the RAM erasing switch 122 is not turned on (S906: No), it is further determined whether or not power interruption occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S907). If so (S907: No), there is a possibility that the process at the time of the previous power shutdown did not end normally.

If power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S907: Yes), the RAM determination value is calculated (S908). If the determination value does not match the RAM determination value saved at the time of power shutdown, the backed up data is destroyed. Note that the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in the work area address of the RAM 203, as will be described later in the processing of S1014 in FIG. Instead of the RAM judgment value, the effectiveness of the backup may be judged based on whether or not the keyword written in the predetermined area of the RAM 203 is correctly saved.

In the process of S915, a payout initialization command is transmitted in order to initialize the payout control device 111, which is a sub-side control device (peripheral control device) (S915). When the payout control device 111 receives this payout initialization command, it clears the area (work area) other than the stack area of the RAM 213, sets the initial value, and becomes ready to start the game ball payout control. After transmitting the payout initialization command, main controller 110 executes the initialization processing of RAM 203 (S916, S917).

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, the power is turned on while the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed when the RAM data is initialized when the power is turned on, such as when the hall starts operating. Therefore, if the RAM erasing switch 122 is pressed during the start-up process, the RAM initialization process (S916, S917) is executed. Also, if power failure occurrence information is not set, or if a backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM judgment value (checksum value, etc.), the RAM 203 initialization process (S916, S917) is similarly executed. . In the RAM initialization process (S916, S917), the used area of the RAM 203 is cleared to 0 (S916), and then the initial value of the RAM 203 is set (S917). After executing the initialization process of the RAM 203, the process proceeds to S912.

On the other hand, if the RAM erasing switch 122 is not turned on (S906: No), power failure occurrence information is stored (S907: Yes), and the RAM determination value (checksum value, etc.) is normal ( S909: Yes), while retaining the data backed up in the RAM 203, clear the power failure occurrence information (S910). Next, a payout return command at the time of power recovery for returning the sub-side control device (peripheral control device) to the game state at the time of drive power shutdown is transmitted (S911), and the process proceeds to S912. When the payout control device 111 receives this payout return command, the game ball payout control can be started while retaining the data stored in the RAM 213 .

In the processing of S912, an initialization command indicating permission of effect is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113, and the execution of various effects is permitted to the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114. Next, a state command indicating the current gaming state is set (S913), interrupt permission is set (S914), and the process proceeds to main processing.

Next, with reference to FIG. 499, the initial setting process (S901), which is one process in the start-up process (see FIG. 498) executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110, will be described. FIG. 499 is a flow chart showing the contents of this initial setting process (S901).

In the initial setting process (S901), first, a start-up command for indicating that the power is turned on is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 (S951). The audio lamp control device 113 does not execute start-up processing until it determines that it has received the start-up command set here. Next, other initial setting processing is executed (S952), and this processing ends.

Next, referring to FIG. 500, the contents of the set value control process (S905), which is one process in the start-up process (see FIG. 498) executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110, will be described. FIG. 500 is a flowchart showing detailed contents of the set value control process (S905).

As shown in FIG. 500, in the set value control process (S905), first, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 446) is turned on (S971). ), a payout initialization command is transmitted to initialize the payout control device 111, which is a sub-side control device (peripheral control device) (S972). When the payout control device 111 receives this payout initialization command, it clears the area (work area) other than the stack area of the RAM 213, sets the initial value, and becomes ready to start the game ball payout control. After transmitting the payout initialization command, main controller 110 executes initialization processing of RAM 203 (S973, S974). In the RAM initialization process (S973, S974), the used area of the RAM 203 is cleared (S973), and then the initial value of the RAM 203 is set (S974). After executing the initialization process of the RAM 203, a changing command indicating that the setting is being changed is transmitted (S975), and the process proceeds to S976.

In the process of S976, it is determined whether or not the setting switch 110c is turned on (depressed) (S976). In the process of S976, if it is determined that the setting switch 110c is turned on (depressed) (S976: Yes), the data in the setting value storage area 203g is updated by adding 1 (S977), and the process of S978 is performed. to On the other hand, in the process of S976, when it is determined that the setting switch is off (S976: No), the process of S977 is skipped and the process proceeds to the process of S978.

In the processing of S978, it is determined whether or not the setting key 110b is arranged at the OFF position (S978). If it is determined that the setting key 110b is at the OFF position (S978: Yes), a change completion command indicating completion of setting change is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 (S979), and this processing ends. That is, the setting change state is terminated, and the process returns to the start-up process (see FIG. 498). As a result, it is possible to shift to a playable state in which a normal game can be played.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S978 that the setting key 110b is not placed at the OFF position (S978: No), the process returns to S976. That is, the processes of S976 to S978 are repeated until it is determined in the process of S978 that the setting key 110b is placed at the OFF position.

Also, in the processing of S971, if it is determined that the RAM erase switch 122 is not turned on (S971: No), first, the payout return command is transmitted to the payout control device 111 (S980), then the set value storage area 203g data is read (S981). When the processing of S981 is completed, next, the setting value corresponding to the read data is displayed on the setting value display device 110a (S982), the state command indicating the setting confirmation state is set (S983), and the setting key 110b is pressed. It is determined whether or not it is arranged at the OFF position (S984). In the processing of S984, if it is determined that the setting key 110b is arranged at the OFF position (S984: Yes), this processing ends. That is, the game is shifted to a playable state. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S984 that the setting key 110b is not placed at the OFF position (S984: No), the process of S984 is repeatedly executed. That is, the setting confirmation state is continued until the setting key 110b is placed at the OFF position.

By executing this set value control process (S905: see FIG. 500), it is possible to change the set value according to the operation of the setting switch 110c in the setting change state. In addition, in the setting confirmation state, the setting value can be continuously displayed on the setting value display device 110a until the setting switch 110b is placed at the OFF position.

Next, with reference to FIG. 501, main processing executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 after the start-up processing described above will be described. FIG. 501 is a flowchart showing this main processing. Main processing of the game is executed in this main processing. As an overview, each process of S1001 to S1007 and S1021 is executed as a periodical process with a period of 4 ms, and the counter update process of S1010 and S1011 is executed in the remaining time.

In the main process, first, during execution of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 487), output data such as commands stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203 is transferred to each sub-side control device (peripheral (S1001). Specifically, it determines whether or not there is winning detection information detected in the switch reading process of S101 in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 487). Send a prize ball command to In addition, it transmits to the voice lamp control device 113 the reserved ball number command set in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 488) and the start winning process (see FIG. 492). In addition, it transmits to the sound lamp control device 113 the winning command set in the startup winning process and the look-ahead process (see FIG. 493). Further, by this external output processing, the variation pattern command, the stop type command, etc. necessary for the variation display of the third pattern by the third pattern display device 81 are transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 .

Next, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is updated (S1002). Specifically, the variation type counter CS1 is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (198 in this embodiment). Then, the updated value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM203.

When the fluctuation type counter CS1 is updated, the ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (S1003), and the winning ball command indicating the read ball count is set (S1021). Next, in the case of a special symbol jackpot state, a jackpot performance is executed, and a jackpot control process for opening or closing the specific prize winning opening (large open opening) 65a of the variable winning device 65 is executed (S1004). Details of the jackpot control process (S1004) will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, the electric accessary product opening/closing process for controlling the opening/closing of the electric accessary product 640a associated with the second entrance 640 is executed (S1005). In the electric accessary product opening/closing process (S1005), when the opening/closing control start of the electric accessary product 640a is set by the processing of S413 of the normal symbol variation processing (S106: see FIG. 494), the opening/closing control of the electric accessary product 640a is started. do.

Next, a first symbol display update process for updating the display of the first symbol display device 37 is executed (S1006). In the first symbol display update process, the variation pattern is set by the process of S260 of the special symbol 1 fluctuation start process (S209: see Fig. 490) or the process of S280 of the special symbol 2 fluctuation start process (S214: see Fig. 491). In this case, the first symbol display device 37 starts the variable display corresponding to the variable pattern. In this embodiment, among the LEDs 37a of the first pattern display device 37, from the start of the variation until the variation time elapses, for example, if the currently lit LED is red, the red LED is extinguished. At the same time, the green LED is lit, and if the green LED is lit, the green LED is extinguished and the blue LED is lit, and if the blue LED is lit, the blue LED is extinguished. At the same time, the red LED is lit.

Note that the main process is executed every 4 milliseconds, but if the lighting color of the LED is changed each time the main process is executed, the player cannot confirm the change in the lighting color of the LED. Therefore, a counter (not shown) is counted by 1 each time the main process is executed so that the player can confirm the change in the lighting color of the LED, and when the counter reaches 100, the LED change the lighting color of That is, the lighting color of the LED is changed every 0.4 seconds. Note that the value of the counter is reset to 0 when the lighting color of the LED is changed.

Also, in the first symbol display update process (S1006), by the process of S260 of the special symbol 1 fluctuation start process (S209: see FIG. 490) or the process of S280 of the special symbol 2 fluctuation start process (S214: see FIG. 491) When the variation time corresponding to the set variation pattern ends, the variation display being executed in the first symbol display device 37 is terminated, and the processing of S256 of the special symbol 1 variation start processing (S209: see FIG. 490) Or the process of S257, or the display mode set by the process of S276 or the process of S277 of the special symbol 2 fluctuation start process (S214: see FIG. 491), the stop symbol (first symbol) to the first symbol display device 37 Stop display (lighting display).

Next, a second symbol display update process for updating the display of the second symbol display device 83 is executed (S1007). In the second symbol display update process (S1007), when the variation time of the second symbol is set by the process of S432 or the process of S433 of the normal symbol variation start process (S408: see FIG. 495), the second symbol display device At 83 the variable display is started. As a result, the second symbol display device 83 performs a variable display in which the symbol "O" and the symbol "x" as the second symbol are alternately lit. Also, in the second symbol display update process, when the stop display of the second symbol display device 83 is set by the process of S411 of the normal symbol variation process (S106: see FIG. 494), it is executed in the second symbol display device 83. The variation display being performed is ended, and the stop symbol (second symbol) is displayed on the second symbol display device in the display mode set by the process of S426 or the process of S434 of the normal symbol variation start process (S408: see FIG. 495). 83 is stopped (lighted up).

After that, it is determined whether power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1008). SG1 is not output and the power is not cut off. Therefore, in such a case, it is determined whether or not it is time to execute the next main processing, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 ms in this embodiment) has elapsed since the start of the main processing this time (S1009). If the predetermined time has already passed (S1009: Yes), the process proceeds to S1001, and the above-described processes after S1001 are repeatedly executed.

On the other hand, if the predetermined time has not passed since the start of the main processing this time (S1009: No), during the time until the predetermined time, that is, within the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main processing, The initial value random number counter CINI1, the normal initial value random number counter CINI2, and the fluctuation type counter CS1 are repeatedly updated (S1010, S1011).

First, the initial value random number counter CINI1 and the normal initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S1010). Specifically, the initial value random number counter CINI1 and the normal initial value random number counter CINI2 are incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (299, 239 in this embodiment). Then, the updated values of the initial value random number counter CINI1 and the normal initial value random number counter CINI2 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203, respectively. Next, the change type counter CS1 is updated by the same method as the process of S1002 (S1011).

Here, since the execution time of each process of S1001 to S1007 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main process is not constant and fluctuates. Therefore, by repeatedly updating the initial value random number counter CINI1 and the normal initial value random number counter CINI2 using the remaining time, the initial value random number counter CINI1 and the normal initial value random number counter CINI2 (that is, the special winning random number counter C1 , the initial value of the normal winning random number counter C4) can be randomly updated, and similarly, the fluctuation type counter CS1 can also be randomly updated.

In addition, in the process of S1008, if information on occurrence of power failure is stored in the RAM 203 (S1008: Yes), the power is shut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the power is turned off, and the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252. As a result, the NMI interrupt processing in FIG. 497 has been executed, so the processing at power-off from S1012 onward is executed. First, to prohibit the occurrence of each interrupt processing (S1012), to other control devices (peripheral control devices such as payout control device 111 and sound lamp control device 113) a power-off command indicating that the power has been cut off and transmit (S1013). Then, a RAM determination value is calculated and stored (S1014), access to the RAM 203 is prohibited (S1015), and the infinite loop continues until the power supply is completely cut off and processing cannot be executed. Here, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in the stack area and work area backed up in the RAM 203 .

The processing of S1008 is performed at the end of a series of processing corresponding to the game state change performed in S1001 to S1007, or at the timing of the end of one cycle of the processing of S1010 and S1011 performed within the remaining time. It is running. Therefore, in the main processing of the main controller 110, information on the occurrence of power failure is confirmed at the timing when each setting is completed. It can start from the processing of S1001. That is, the process can be started from the process of S1001, as in the case of initialization in the start-up process. Therefore, even if the contents of each register used by the MPU 201 are not saved to the stack area or the value of the stack pointer is not saved in the process at power-off, the stack pointer is By setting to a predetermined value (initial value), the processing can be started from S1001. Therefore, the control load on the main controller 110 can be reduced, and accurate control can be performed without the main controller 110 malfunctioning or running out of control.

Next, the jackpot control process (S1004) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 502 is a flow chart showing this jackpot control process (S1004). This jackpot control process (S1004) is executed in the main process (Fig. 501), and when the pachinko machine 10 is in a jackpot state with special symbols, execution of various effects according to the jackpot This is a process for opening or closing the opening 65a.

In the jackpot control process (S1104: see FIG. 502), first, it is determined whether or not the jackpot of the special symbol is started (S1101). The process of S219 of the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 488) is executed, the start of the special symbol jackpot is set, and when the special symbol jackpot is started (S1101: Yes), the opening command is set. (S1116), this processing ends.

The opening command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is sent to the sound lamp control device 113 during the external output processing of the main processing (see FIG. 501) executed by the MPU 201. sent to. Upon receiving the opening command, the audio lamp control device 113 transmits a display opening command to the display control device 114 . When the display opening command is received by the display control device 114, the third pattern display device 81 starts the opening effect.

On the other hand, in the processing of S1101, if the special symbol jackpot is not started (S1101: No), it is determined whether the special symbol jackpot is in progress (S1102). During the special symbol jackpot, the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are displaying the special symbol jackpot (including during the special symbol jackpot game), and during the special symbol jackpot. During the predetermined time after the end of the jackpot game. In the process of S1102, if the special symbol jackpot is not in progress (S1102: No), this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S1102, if the special symbol jackpot is in progress (S1102: Yes), it is determined whether it is time to start a new round (S1103). If it is time to start a new round (S1103: Yes), the specific winning opening (large open opening) 65a is released (S1104), and a round number command indicating the number of rounds to be newly started is set (S1105). After setting the round number command, this process is terminated. The round number command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is output during the external output processing (S1001) of the main processing (see FIG. 501) executed by the MPU 201. It is sent to the lamp control device 113 . When the audio ramp controller 113 receives the round number command, it extracts the round number from the round number command. Then, a display round number command corresponding to the extracted number of rounds is transmitted to the display control device 114 . When the display round number command is received by the display control device 114, the third pattern display device 81 starts a new round effect.

On the other hand, in the processing of S1103, if it is not the time to start a new number of rounds (S1103: No), it is determined whether or not the condition for closing the specific winning opening (large open opening) 65a is met (S1106). Specifically, when a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) has passed after opening the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a, or after opening the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a, a predetermined number of balls When (for example, 10) wins, it is determined that the closing condition is established.

In the process of S1106, if the condition for closing the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is satisfied (S1106: Yes), the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is closed (S1107), and this process ends. do. On the other hand, if the conditions for closing the specific prize winning opening (large open opening) 65a are not met (S1106: No), it is determined whether it is time to start the ending effect (S1108). Specifically, when a special game state (10 rounds, 5 rounds or all 2 rounds) in which a larger amount of prize balls are paid out than in normal times is completed, it is determined that it is time to start the ending effect.

In the processing of S1108, if it is time to start the ending effect (S1108: Yes), an ending command is set (S1109), and this processing ends. The ending command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is executed by the MPU 201 during the external output processing (S1001) of the main processing (see FIG. 501). It is sent towards device 113 . Upon receiving the ending command, the sound lamp control device 113 selects the display mode of the ending effect based on the winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223f of the RAM 223. FIG. Then, an ending command for display corresponding to the display mode of the selected ending effect is transmitted to the display control device 114 . When the display control device 114 receives the display ending command, the third symbol display device 81 starts the ending effect.

On the other hand, in the processing of S1108, if it is not the ending start timing (S1108: No), it is determined whether or not it is the jackpot end timing (S1110). The jackpot end timing is the timing after a predetermined ending period (for example, 10 seconds) has passed. If it is determined that it is not the time to end the jackpot (S1110: No), the process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S1110, when it is determined that it is time to end the jackpot (S1110: Yes), in the process of S1111, it is determined whether the current jackpot type is the jackpot E1 (S1111). If the jackpot type this time is the jackpot E1 (10R time saving 100 times jackpot) (S1111: Yes), the value of the counter 203j during time saving is set to 100 (S1112). Next, the jackpot medium flag 203n is set to OFF (S1115), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, when the jackpot type this time is not the jackpot E1 (S1111: No), the variable probability flag 203m is set to ON (S1113), and 65536 is set to the value of the time saving medium counter 203j (S1114). Next, the jackpot medium flag 203n is set to OFF (S1115), and the process is terminated.

<Control Processing Executed by Audio Ramp Control Device 113>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIGS. 503 to 522. FIG. The processing of the MPU 221 is roughly classified into startup processing that is activated upon power-on and main processing that is executed after the startup processing.

First, referring to FIG. 503, start-up processing executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 503 is a flowchart showing this startup processing. This start-up process is started when the power is turned on.

When the start-up process is executed, first, it is determined whether or not a start-up command has been received from the main controller 110 (S2001). If it is determined that the startup command has not been received (S2001: No), the process of S2001 is repeated. That is, the start-up process is not executed until the start-up command is received from the main controller 110 . On the other hand, if it is determined that the start-up command has been received (S2001: Yes), the initial setting process is executed upon power-on (S2002). Specifically, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. After that, depending on whether or not the power-off processing flag is ON, the power-off processing in S2118 (see FIG. ) is started during execution (S2003). As will be described later with reference to FIG. 506, when the audio lamp control device 113 receives a power-off command from the main controller 110 (see S2115 in FIG. 506), it executes power-off processing in S2118. Before the power-off processing is executed, the power-off processing flag is turned on, and after the power-off processing is completed, the power-off processing flag is turned off. Therefore, whether or not the power-off processing of S2118 is being executed can be determined by the state of the power-off processing in-progress flag.

If the power-off processing flag is off (S2003: No), the startup process this time was started after the power was completely shut off, or after a momentary power failure occurred and the power was shut off in S2118. Either it was started after the execution of the process was completed, or it was started when only the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 was reset due to noise (without receiving a power off command from the main controller 110). be. Therefore, in these cases, it is checked whether the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (S2004).

Destruction of data in the RAM 223 is confirmed as follows. That is, data as a keyword of "55AAh" is written in a specific area of the RAM 223 by the process of S2005. Therefore, the data stored in the specific area is checked, and if the data is "55AAh", there is no data destruction in the RAM 223. Conversely, if it is not "55AAh", it can be confirmed that the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed. If data destruction of RAM223 is confirmed (S2004: Yes), it will transfer to S2005 and will start initialization of RAM223. On the other hand, if destruction of data in the RAM 223 is not confirmed (S2004: No), the process proceeds to S2009.

It should be noted that if the startup process this time is started after the power is completely cut off, the keyword "55AAh" is not stored in the specific area of the RAM 223 (the memory of the RAM 223 is lost due to the power cut). ), it is determined that the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (S2004: Yes), and the process proceeds to S2005. On the other hand, whether the current start-up processing was started after a momentary power failure occurred and after the execution of the power-off processing in S2118 was completed, or only the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 was reset due to noise or the like. If the processing is started with the above, the keyword "55AAh" is stored in the specific area of the RAM 223, so the data in the RAM 223 is determined to be normal (S2004: No), and the process proceeds to S2209.

If the power-off processing flag is on (S2003: Yes), the startup processing this time is after a momentary power failure occurs, and during execution of the power-off processing in S2118, the sound lamp control device 113 It is started by resetting the MPU 221 of . In such a case, the memory state of the RAM 223 is not necessarily correct because the power-off process is in progress. Therefore, in such a case, the control cannot be continued, so the process moves to S2004 and the initialization of the RAM 223 is started.

In the processing of S2004, the storage area of the entire range of RAM 223 is checked (S2004). As a checking method, first, "0FFh" is written for each byte, read for each byte to check whether it is "0FFh", and if it is "0FFh", it is determined as normal. Such writing and confirmation for each byte is performed in the order of "0FFh", "55h", "0AAh", and "00h". All storage areas of the RAM 223 are cleared to 0 by this read/write check of the RAM 223 .

If the read/write check is normal for all storage areas of the RAM 223 (S2006: Yes), the keyword "55AAh" is written in the specific area of the RAM 223 to set RAM destruction check data (S2007). By confirming the keyword "55AAh" written in this specific area, it is checked whether or not the RAM 223 has data destruction. On the other hand, if an abnormality in the read/write check is detected in any storage area of the RAM 223 (S2006: No), the abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified (S2008), and an infinite loop is performed until the power is cut off. An abnormality in the RAM 223 is notified by the display lamp 34 . In addition, it is possible to output a sound by the sound output device 226 to notify the abnormality of the RAM 223, or to transmit an error command to the display control device 114 and display an error message on the third symbol display device 81. can be

In the process of S2008, it is determined whether or not the power-off flag is turned on (S2009). The power-off flag is turned on when the power-off process of S2118 is executed (see S2117 in FIG. 506). In other words, the power-off flag is turned on before the power-off processing of S2118 is executed. This is the case where the process is started after the power failure has occurred and the execution of the power-off process in S2118 has been completed. Therefore, in such a case (S2009: Yes), the work area of the RAM is cleared to initialize each process of the sound lamp control device 113 (S2010), and the process proceeds to S2011.

In the process of S2011, the time acquisition process (S2011) is executed. A detailed description of this time acquisition processing (S2011) will be given later with reference to FIG. Based on the elapsed period, a period effect such as an SP time period is set. Next, standby processing is executed (S2012). A detailed description of the standby process (S2012) will be given later with reference to FIG. Permission is set (S2011), and the process proceeds to the main process. The work area of the RAM 223 refers to an area other than the area for storing commands and the like received from the main controller 110 .

On the other hand, the reason why the process of S2009 is reached with the power-off flag turned off is that the current start-up process was started after, for example, the power supply was completely shut off, and the process of S2009 is performed via the processes from S2005 to S2007. This is the case where the processing has been reached, or only the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 has been reset due to noise or the like (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110). Therefore, in such a case (S2009: No), S2010, which is the processing for clearing the work area of the RAM 223, is skipped, and the above-described processing of S2011 and S2012 is executed to set the initial value of the RAM 223 (S2013). Interrupt permission is set (S2014), and the process proceeds to main processing.

The reason why the clearing process of S2010 is skipped is that when the process from S2005 to S2007 is passed through to the process of S2009, all the storage areas of the RAM 223 have already been cleared by the process of S2005. When only the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 is reset due to noise or the like and start-up processing is started, the data in the work area of the RAM 223 is saved without being cleared, so that the audio lamp control device 113 This is because the control of can be continued.

Next, with reference to FIG. 504, the time acquisition process (S2011) executed by the MPU 221 during the start-up process of the sound lamp control device 113 will be described. This time acquisition process (S2011) is a process for storing the time when the power was turned on. The time information acquired by this process is used to determine the elapsed time since power-on in the elapsed time confirmation process (see S2111 in FIG. 521) performed in the main process of the sound lamp control device 113, which will be described later. be done.

FIG. 504 is a flow chart showing this time acquisition process (S1011). When the time acquisition process (S1011) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 446) is turned on (S2051). The current time information is obtained from the H.262 clock register 352a (S2054), and the process proceeds to S2055.

On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 122 is turned on (S2051: Yes), the time information stored in the input time storage area 352b provided in the register 352 of the timer 262 is read (S2052), and the input time storage area 352b is read. (S2053). As a result, when it is determined that the time information is not stored (S2053: No), the current time information is acquired from the clock register 352a of the clock device 262 (S2054), and the process proceeds to S2055. On the other hand, if it is determined that time information is stored in the input time storage area 352b of the clock device 262 (S2053: Yes), the process of S2054 is skipped and the process proceeds to S2055.

In the process of S2055, the time information read in the process of S2052 or the process of S2054 is stored in the time information storage area 223r of the RAM 223 (S2055), and the process ends.

In this way, the time information for judging the type of effect period is stored in the time information storage area 223r of the RAM 223 by this process, so that the start-up process can be performed at the plurality of pachinko machines 10 in the hall. By matching, the timing at which the time information is stored in the time information storage area 223r of each pachinko machine 10 can also be matched. If the timing at which the time information is stored in the time information storage area 223r matches, the elapsed time T calculated in the elapsed time confirmation process (see S2111 in FIG. 521) in each pachinko machine 10 can also be matched. Based on the elapsed time T, the timing for switching from the normal performance period to the special performance period and based on the elapsed time T, the timing for switching from the special performance period to the normal performance period can be matched. As a result, the people involved in the hall can align the presentation periods of the pachinko machines 10 only by simultaneously turning on the power to the plurality of pachinko machines 10 in the hall. Therefore, some of the pachinko machines 10 are in the normal performance period, and the other pachinko machines 10 are in the special performance period, so that the player who is playing the game can perform the performance in a different performance mode from the other pachinko machines 10. It is possible to suppress feeling uncomfortable with the fact that

In addition, in this embodiment, instead of determining the time from the time information of the clock device 262 and switching the type of presentation period according to the time zone, the time information acquired during the startup process and the elapsed time confirmation process are used. Elapsed time T is calculated from the time information acquired in the process, and based on the elapsed time T, the type of presentation period is determined. As a result, even if the time information of the timing device 262 of each pachinko machine 10 is different from each other due to deterioration over time, the time information that is different from each other is not directly used to determine the type of the performance period, Since it can be converted into a relative value of time T and used to determine the type of presentation period, the influence of deviation can be reduced. Therefore, in a plurality of Pachinko machines 10, the timing for switching from the normal performance period to the special performance period based on the elapsed time T and the timing for switching from the special performance period to the normal performance period based on the elapsed time T can be matched. Therefore, since the performance period of each pachinko machine 10 can be aligned, some of the pachinko machines 10 are in the normal performance period, and the other pachinko machines 10 are in the special performance period, so that the players who are playing the game It is possible to prevent the player from having a sense of incongruity with the performance being executed in a performance mode different from that of other pachinko machines 10.例文帳に追加

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on in a state where the RAM erase switch 122 is not turned on (that is, in an off state), the time information when the power is turned on is The time information stored in the time information storage area 223r of the RAM is stored in the time information storage area 223r. It is stored in the input time storage area 352 b of the clock device 262 . Since the clock device 262 operates based on the power supply from the clock device power supply 263 even when the pachinko machine 10 is in a power-off state, the time information stored in the input time storage area 352b is It is held even during power failure. When the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 10 with the RAM erase switch 122 turned on when the power is turned on, instead of the current time information, it is stored in the turn-on time storage area 352b of the clock device 262, The time information held even during the power failure state is read out and stored in the time information storage area 223 r of the RAM 223 .

As a result, even if it is necessary to turn off one pachinko machine 10 during business for reasons such as board replacement due to a failure of the pachinko machine 10 or an on-site inspection, etc. Also, when the power is turned on again with the RAM erasing switch 122 turned on, the time is stored in the time information storage area 223r of the RAM 223 by the time acquisition process when the power was turned on with the RAM erasing switch 122 turned off last time. The time information stored in the turn-on time storage area 352b of the timer 262 when the power is turned off can be stored again in the time information storage area 223r of the RAM 223. FIG. Therefore, if power is turned on to a plurality of pachinko machines 10 in the hall all at once with the RAM erase switch 122 turned off, even if one of the pachinko machines 10 is turned off after that, However, when power is turned on again to the pachinko machine 10, only by turning on the RAM erase switch 122, the time information when the power is turned on all at once can be stored in the time information storage area 223r. The elapsed time T can be determined based on the same time information before and after the power is turned on. Therefore, the timing for switching from the normal performance period to the special performance period and the timing for switching from the special performance period to the normal performance period can be matched based on the same elapsed time T as that of other game machines, so that the electric power is cut off. It is possible to suppress the timing of switching the performance mode only for the pachinko machine 10 from being shifted, and the player who is playing the game feels uncomfortable with the performance being executed in the performance mode different from that of the other pachinko machines 10.例文帳に追加can be suppressed.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, in the time acquisition process (see S1011 in FIG. 504), when it is detected that the RAM erase switch 122 is turned on, The time information is read out (see S2052) and stored in the time information storage area 223r of the RAM 223 (see S2055), but it is not limited to this form. For example, a switch means exclusively used for the time acquisition process different from the RAM erase switch 122 is provided, and when the switch means is turned on in the time acquisition process (S1011), the input time storage area of the clock device 262 The time information stored in 352b may be read out.

As a result, the time information stored in the turning-on time storage area 352b of the timer 262 can be stored in the time information storage area 223r of the RAM 223 while the information stored in the RAM 203 before the power failure state is maintained. can be done. Therefore, even if the power is cut off while the ball is still on hold, or if the power is cut off during the high probability state of the special symbol, the power will be turned on again. Since it is possible to suppress the disappearance of the reserved balls and the transition from the high probability state of the special symbol to the low probability state, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of disadvantages for the player.

Also, instead of using a switch means such as the RAM erase switch 122, when the time measured by the clock device 262 is in a predetermined time zone, the time information stored in the input time storage area 352b of the clock device 262 is deleted. It may be configured to read out. In this case, as the predetermined time period, the business hours of the hall may be set, for example, from 10:00 to 22:45.

As a result, the pachinko machine 10, which has been turned off during business hours, is turned on again without turning on the RAM erase switch 122 by mistake. It is possible to prevent the time when the game is inserted from being stored in the time information storage area 223r of the RAM 233 and the elapsed time T from being deviated from that of other pachinko machines 10 that were not in the power-off state. Therefore, it is possible to surely match the timing of switching performance periods between the Pachinko machine 10 which is in the power-off state during business hours and the Pachinko machine 10 which is not in the power-off state. In addition, since the time information stored in the time information storage area 233f is selected according to the time information (timekeeping information) measured by the timekeeping device 262, hall employees can perform a special operation when turning on the power. There is no need to do this, and the work of hall employees can be reduced.

Furthermore, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured to store the time information read in the process of S2052 or the process of S2054 in the time information storage area 223r. It may be configured to store in unused bits of the register table (see FIG. 479). The unused bits referred to here refer to, for example, bit 6 of address BH and bits 4 to 7 of address EH. indicates the bit of As described above, these bits are rewritable and readable bits, and even if the data are rewritten, they do not affect the operation of the timer 262 at all. As a result, since the register table provided in the register 352 can be used efficiently, the number of addresses assigned to the entry time storage area 352b can be reduced.

Specifically, for example, information representing seconds is stored in bits 0 to 6 of address 7H, information representing minutes is stored in bit 7 of address 7H and bit 0 to bit 5 of address 8H, and bits 6, 7 and 7 of address 8H are stored. And information representing time may be stored in bits 4 to 7 of address EH. As a result, the addresses 9H that are not used for data storage can be reduced, and the capacity of the register 352 can be reduced, so that the price of the timer 262 can be reduced.

In the register table provided in the register 352 of this embodiment, the bits marked with "○" in FIG. The bits marked with may be configured to be rewritable, and the time information read out in the process of S2052 or S2054 may also be stored in the bits marked with "○". As a result, the register table can be used more efficiently than storing the time information only in the bits marked with "●", so the capacity of the register 352 can be further reduced. H.262 can be further reduced in price.

Next, with reference to FIG. 505, the standby process (S2012) executed by the MPU 221 during the start-up process of the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 505 is a flowchart showing detailed contents of the standby process (S2012). This standby process (S2012) is activated until a change completion command indicating that the setting change is completed is received when a change in-progress command indicating that the setting is being changed is received from the main controller 110. This is a process for waiting the completion of the process.

In the standby process (S2012), first, it is determined whether or not the setting changing flag 223j is ON (S2071). If it is determined that the setting changing flag 223j is not ON (S2071: No), it is determined whether or not a changing command has been received (S2072). This changing command is a command sent from main controller 110 after the RAM is initialized when setting key 110b is in the ON position, and is a command for indicating that the setting is being changed. (S975: see FIG. 500). In the process of S2072, if it is determined that the changing command is received (S2072: Yes), the setting changing flag 223j is set to ON (S2073), and the process proceeds to S2074.

By setting the setting changing flag 223j to ON, the standby process (S2012) can be continued until it is determined that a change completion command has been received in the process of S2076, which will be described later. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2071 that the setting changing flag 223j is not ON (S2071: No), or if it is determined in the process of S2072 that the changing command has not been received from the main controller 110 (S2072: No), the process proceeds to S2074.

In the process of S2074, it is determined whether an initialization command has been received from main controller 110 (S2074). This initialization command is a command that is transmitted in the start-up process of main controller 110 (see FIG. 498) and indicates permission to effect. If it is determined in the process of S2074 that the initialization command has not been received (S2074: No), the start-up process of the main controller 110 has not been completed, so the process returns to the process of S2071 described above. On the other hand, in the process of S2074, when it is determined that the initialization command has been received from the main controller 110 (S2074: Yes), the process proceeds to S2075.

In the process of S2075, it is determined whether the setting changing flag 223j is ON (S2075). If it is determined that the setting change flag 223j is ON (S2075: Yes), it is determined whether or not a change completion command has been received (S2076). This change completion command is a command that is transmitted when it is determined that the setting key 110b is in the off position in the setting value control process (S508: see FIG. 500) of the main controller 110, and is used to indicate the setting change. It is a command (S979: see Fig. 500).

In the process of S2076, if it is determined that the change completion command has been received (S2076: Yes), the setting change flag 223j is set to OFF (S2077), and the process proceeds to S2078. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2076 that the change completion command has not been received (S2076: No), the process of S2076 is repeatedly executed until it is determined that the change completion command has been received. By controlling in this way, the main process is not executed until the setting control process is completed and the setting key 110b is detected at the OFF position. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2075 that the setting changing flag 223j is off (S2075: No), the processes of S2076 and S2077 are skipped and the process proceeds to S2078. In the process of S2078, a value corresponding to 5 seconds is set in the operation invalidation timer 223s (S2078), and the process ends.

Next, referring to FIG. 506, main processing executed by the MPU 221 in the audio ramp control device 113 after startup processing of the audio ramp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 506 is a flowchart showing this main processing. When the main process is executed, first, it is determined whether or not 1 ms or more has passed since the main process was started or after the current process of S2101 was executed (S2101). If not (S2101: No), the process proceeds to S2113 without performing the processes of S2102 to S2112. In the process of S2101, it is determined whether or not 1 msec has elapsed because S2102 to S2112 are mainly processes related to display (effect), and there is no need to edit in a short cycle (within 1 msec). , the command determination processing in S2113, the variable display setting processing in S2114, and the processing for updating various counter values (not shown) are preferably executed in short cycles. By executing the process of S2111 in a short period, it is possible to prevent the command transmitted from the main controller 110 from being missed, and by executing the process of S2112 in a short period, the command received by the command determination process Based on this, it is possible to make settings related to variable production without delay.

If 1 millisecond or more has elapsed in the processing of S2101 (S2101: Yes), first, various commands for the display control device 114 set by the processing of S2103 to S2114 are transmitted to the display control device 114 (S2102 ). Next, the output of each lamp is set so as to set the lighting mode of the display lamp 34 and the lighting mode of the lamp edited in the process of S2108 described later (S2103), and then the power-on notification process is executed (S2104). In the power-on notification process, when the power is turned on, it is notified that the power has been turned on for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds). will be Also, a command may be sent to the display control device 114 to inform that the power is supplied on the screen of the third pattern display device 81 . Note that if the power is not turned on, the process proceeds to S2105 without notifying by the power-on notification process.

In the process of S2105, the customer waiting effect process is executed, and then the pending number display update process is executed (S2106). In the customer waiting effect process, when the pachinko machine 10 is not played by a player for a predetermined period of time, a setting such as switching the display of the third symbol display device 81 to a title screen is performed, and the setting is used as a command for display control. It is sent to device 114 . In the reserved number display update process, a process of lighting a reserved lamp (not shown) according to the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223b is performed.

After that, frame button input monitoring/effect processing is executed (S2107). In this frame button input monitoring and effect processing, input as to whether or not the frame button 22 operated by the player has been pressed is monitored in order to enhance the effect of the effect, and the input of the frame button 22 is confirmed. This is the process of setting to perform production. Details of the frame button input monitoring/effect processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

When the frame button input monitoring/effect processing is completed, the lamp editing processing is executed (S2108), and then the sound editing/output processing is executed (S2109). In the lamp editing process, the lighting patterns of the illumination parts 29 to 33 are set so as to correspond to the display performed by the third pattern display device 81 . In the sound editing/output process, the output pattern of the voice output device 226 is set so as to correspond to the display performed by the third pattern display device 81, and the sound is output from the voice output device 226 according to the setting.

After the process of S2109, the liquid crystal effect execution management process is executed (S2110), and the process proceeds to S2111. In the liquid crystal effect execution management process, based on the variation pattern command transmitted from the main controller 110, the time required for the variation display performed by the third symbol display device 81 and the time synchronized therewith are set. The lamp editing process of S2108 is executed based on the time set in this liquid crystal effect execution monitoring process. It should be noted that the sound editing/output processing of S2109 is also executed at a time synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed by the third pattern display device 81. FIG.

When the process of S2110 ends, the elapsed time confirmation process is executed (S2111). Details of this elapsed time confirmation process (S2111) will be described later with reference to FIG. After the processing of S2111 is completed, command determination processing is executed (S2113). Details of this command determination processing (S2113) will be described later with reference to FIG. After executing the command determination process (S2113), the variable display setting process is executed (S2114). In the variable display setting process, a variable pattern command for display is generated and set based on the variable pattern command received from the main controller 110 in order to cause the third symbol display device 81 to perform a variable effect. As a result, the command is sent to display controller 114 . Details of this variable display setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

When the process of S2114 is completed, it is determined whether or not power-off occurrence information is stored in the work RAM 233 (S2115). The power-off occurrence information is stored when a power-off command is received from main controller 110 . If power-off occurrence information is stored in the processing of S2115 (S2115: Yes), both the power-off flag and the power-off processing flag are turned on (S2117), and the power-off processing is executed (S2118). After the power-off processing is executed, the power-off processing in progress flag is turned off (S2119), and then the processing is looped infinitely. In the power-off processing, interrupt processing is prohibited, each output port is turned off, and outputs from the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 are turned off. In addition, the memory of information on occurrence of power failure is also erased.

On the other hand, if the power-off occurrence information is not stored in the processing of S2115 (S2115: No), it is determined whether or not the RAM 223 is destroyed based on the keyword stored in the RAM 223 (S2116), and the RAM 223 is destroyed. If not (S2116: No), the process returns to S2101, and the main process is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the RAM 223 is destroyed (S2116: Yes), the process is looped infinitely to stop execution of subsequent processes. Here, since the main processing is not executed when it is determined that the RAM is destroyed and the loop is infinitely looped, the display by the third symbol display device 81 does not change after that. Therefore, since the player can know that an abnormality has occurred, the player can call the hall clerk or the like and ask them to repair the pachinko machine 10 or the like. Further, when it is confirmed that the RAM 223 is destroyed, the RAM destruction may be notified by the voice output device 226 or the lamp display device 227 .

Next, the command determination processing (S2113) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 507 is a flowchart showing this command determination processing (S2113). This command determination process (S2113) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 506) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp controller 113, and as described above, determines the command received from the main controller 110. .

In the command determination process (S2113: FIG. 507), first, among the unprocessed commands, the first command received from the main controller 110 is read from the command storage area provided in the RAM 223, analyzed, and It is determined whether or not a variation pattern command has been received (S2201). When a variation pattern command is received (S2201: Yes), the variation start flag 223d is set to ON (S2202), a variation pattern is extracted from the received command (S2203), and this process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S2201, when the variation pattern command is not received (S2201: No), it is determined whether or not the stop type command is received (S2204). When the stop type command is received (S2204: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223e provided in the RAM 223 is turned on (S2205), the stop type is extracted from the received command (S2206), and this process is finished. .

In the processing of S2204, if the stop type command is not received (S2204: No), it is determined whether or not the pending ball count command is received (S2207). When the pending ball number command is received (S2207: Yes), the pending ball number command process is executed (S2208), and this process ends. A detailed description of the pending ball number command process (S2208) will be given later with reference to FIG.

On the other hand, in the process of S2207, if the pending ball count command is not received (S2207: No), it is determined whether or not the special symbol winning command is received (S2209). When the special symbol winning command is received (S2209: Yes), the winning command receiving process is started (S2210), and this process ends. Details of the winning command reception process (S2210) will be described later with reference to FIG. is executed, and a setting process is executed for executing each pending effect determined to be executed based on the result of the preliminary determination. On the other hand, in the processing of S2208, if the special symbol winning command is not received (S2208: No), it is determined whether or not the jackpot related command is received (S2211). When it is determined that a jackpot related command has been received (S2211: Yes), a jackpot related process is executed (S2212), and this process ends. A detailed description of the jackpot related process (S2212) will be given later with reference to FIG.

On the other hand, in the process of S2211, when it is determined that the jackpot-related command has not been received (S2211: No), it is determined whether or not the stop command has been received (S2213). If it is determined that a stop command has been received (S2213: Yes), stop processing is executed (S2214), and this processing ends. A detailed description of the stop processing (S2214) will be given later with reference to FIG.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2213 that the stop command has not been received (S2213: No), it is determined whether or not the boot completion command has been received (S2215). If it is determined that the boot completion command has been received (S2215: Yes), boot completion processing (S2216) is executed, and this processing ends. A detailed description of the boot completion process (S2216) will be given later with reference to FIG. On the other hand, if it is determined that the boot completion command has not been received (S2215: No), processing according to other commands is executed (S2261), and this processing ends.

Here, with reference to FIG. 508, the details of the pending ball number command process (S2208), which is one process in the command determination process (S2113: FIG. 507) executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113, will be described. FIG. 508 is a flow chart showing the content of the pending ball count command process (S2208). In this reserved ball number command processing (S2208), based on the received reserved ball number command, the number of reserved balls is extracted and stored in the special symbol reserved ball number counter, and the setting of the effect of continuous notice executed at the upper limit of the reservation. etc.

In the reserved ball number command process (S2208), first, the reserved ball number is extracted from the received command and stored in the corresponding special symbol reserved ball number counter (S2301). Next, it is determined whether or not the continuous announcement execution flag 223t is ON, that is, whether or not the continuous announcement effect is currently being executed (S2302). If it is determined that the continuous advance notice execution flag 223t is ON (S2302: Yes), this processing ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the continuous notice execution flag 223j is not ON (S2302: No), the period effect in progress flag 223p is ON, that is, the period during which the period effect is being executed as the current gaming situation. (S2303). When it is determined that the period effecting flag 223p is ON (S2303: Yes), it is not the period in which the continuous announcement can be executed, so this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, in the process of S2302, when it is determined that the period effecting flag 223p is not ON (S2303: No), it is determined whether the value of the special symbol reserved ball number storage counter stored in the process of S2301 is the upper limit. (S2304).

In the processing of S2304, when it is determined that the value of the stored special symbol reserved ball number counter is not the upper limit (S2304: No), this processing is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when the value of the stored special symbol holding ball number counter is the upper limit value (S2304: Yes), the holding upper limit time production is performed by referring to the holding upper limit time production selection table 222e (see FIG. 473(b)). Determine (S2305). As described above, the reservation upper limit effect selection table 222e defines the effect contents to be selected based on the number of jackpots in the reservation and the effect counter 223g. Next, a look-ahead effect execution determination process (S2306) is executed, and the process proceeds to S2307.

Here, with reference to FIG. 509, the details of the look-ahead effect execution determination process (S2306), which is one process in the pending ball number command process (S2208: FIG. 508) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113, will be described. . FIG. 509 is a flow chart showing the content of the look-ahead effect execution determination process (S2306). This look-ahead effect execution determination process (S2306) is a process for discriminating between the period during which the SP time effect is executed and the period during which the continuous effect is executed, and forbidding the execution of the effect of the continuous notice when they overlap.

In the look-ahead effect execution determination process (S2306), first, information stored in the winning information storage area 223f is read out (S2401). Next, based on the information read out in the process of S2401, the contents of the winning information to be digested prior to the winning information targeted for the look-ahead effect are extracted (S2402), and the extracted contents and the look-ahead prohibition period selection table 222d (see FIG. 473(a)), the read-ahead prohibition period is determined (S2403).

Next, the SP time period during which the SP time effect is executed is specified based on the time information stored in the time information storage area 223r (S2404). Next, it is determined whether the look-ahead prohibition period determined in the process of S2403 overlaps with the SP time period specified in the process of S2404 (S2405). When it is determined that the look-ahead prohibition period and the SP time period do not overlap (S2405: No), execution of the look-ahead effect is determined (S2406), and the content of the hold upper limit time effect to be executed is stored in the effect state storage area 223h. (S2407), and the process ends. On the other hand, in the processing of S2405, if it is determined that the prefetching prohibition period and the SP time period overlap (S2405), since the prefetching effect cannot be executed, the processing of S2406 and S2407 is skipped, and this processing ends. do.

Returning to FIG. 508, the description continues. After executing the look-ahead effect execution determination process (S2306), next, it is determined whether or not to execute the reservation upper limit effect (S2307). The suspension upper limit effect is determined to be executed when it is determined in the above-described look-ahead effect execution determination process (S2306) that the look-ahead prohibition period and the SP time period do not overlap. In the process of S2307, when it is determined that the suspension upper limit effect is executed (S2307: Yes), the content of the suspension upper limit effect to be executed is stored in the effect state storage area 223h (S2308).

After executing the process of S2308, next, the continuous notice execution flag 223t is set to ON (S2309), the number of times until the special figure fluctuation corresponding to the target winning prize information is set to the continuous notice counter 223u (S2310), End this process. On the other hand, in the processing of S2307, when it is determined that the reservation upper limit effect is not executed (S2307: No), the processing of S2308 to S2310 is skipped, and this processing ends.

In the present embodiment, when the start period of the SP time effect overlaps with the effect period of the continuous notice, the execution of the effect of the continuous notice is prohibited. It is also possible to calculate the time until the start period of and the performance period of the continuous notice overlap, and to execute the performance of the continuous notice that does not overlap. By configuring in this way, the period up to the start period of the SP time presentation can be effectively utilized, and the player can be prevented from becoming bored with the game.

Also, even if the look-ahead effect period and the SP time period overlap, each effect can be executed in a display mode that is easy for the player to understand, such as dividing the display area displayed on the third pattern display device 81. good.

Next, with reference to FIG. 510, the details of the winning command reception process (S2210), which is one process in the command determination process (S2113: FIG. 507) executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113, will be described. FIG. 510 is a flow chart showing the details of the winning command reception process (S2210).

In the winning command reception process (S2210), first, it is determined whether the current game state is during a big win, during probability variation, or during time saving (S2501). If it is determined that the current game state is during the jackpot, during the probability change, or during the time saving (S2501: Yes), next, it is determined whether or not the winning prize ball command has been received. (S2502). If it is determined that the winning ball command has been received (S2502: Yes), the winning ball information indicated by the received command is stored in the acquired ball number storage area 223n (S2503), and the process proceeds to S2504.

On the other hand, in the process of S2501, when the current game state is not a game state of either the jackpot, the probability variation, or the time saving (that is, the normal state) (S2501: No), Alternatively, in the process of S2502, if it is determined that the prize ball command has not been received from the main controller 110 (S2502: No), the process of S2503 is skipped and the process proceeds to S2504.

In addition, in this embodiment, as described above, when the game state is one of the game state of the jackpot, the probability change, or the time reduction, the prize ball information is stored in the winning balls provided in the RAM 223. Although it is configured to store in the number storage area 223n, it is not limited to this, and may be configured to store the winning ball information in the winning ball number storage area 223n based on the winning prize ball command received only during the big win. good. By configuring in this way, the processing load can be reduced.

Also, in this embodiment, only the number of prize balls is stored in the winning ball number storage area 223n. The number may be calculated and stored in the acquired ball number storage area 223n. By configuring in this manner, the value of the winning ball number storage area 223n to be referred to when executing the promotion performance can be changed according to the game method of the player, so that the interest in the game can be improved.

In the process of S2504, the prize information indicated by the received command is set in the prize information storage area 223f (S2504). Next, it is determined whether or not the period effecting flag 223p is ON (S2505). If it is determined that the period effecting flag 223p is ON (S2505: Yes), the effect of the SP time period is being executed, and this processing is terminated as it is. On the other hand, in the process of S2505, when it is determined that the period effecting flag 223p is not ON (S2505: No), it is determined whether the continuous announcement effect execution flag 223t is ON (S2506). If it is determined that the continuous advance notice execution flag 223t is ON (S2506: Yes), this processing ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2506 that the continuous announcement execution flag 223t is not ON (S2506: No), the winning information set in the winning information storage area 223f in the process of S2504 is extracted (S2507). Next, it is determined whether or not the winning information extracted in the process of S2507 includes information indicating a prefetch effect (S2508). If it is determined that there is no information indicating the prefetch effect in the extracted winning information (S2508: No), this processing is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S2508, when it is determined that the extracted winning information includes information indicating the prefetch effect (S2508: Yes), the prefetch effect execution determination process (S2306: see FIG. 509) is executed (S2509). (S2306)), and the process proceeds to S2510. In the process of S2510, it is determined whether or not to execute a prefetch effect (S2510). If it is determined that the look-ahead effect is not to be executed (S2510: No), this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the processing of S2510, when it is determined to execute the look-ahead effect (S2510: Yes), it is determined whether to execute the look-ahead effect in the variation effect to be executed this time (S2511). When it is determined that the prefetch effect is executed in the variable effect to be executed this time (S2511: Yes), the continuous notice execution flag 223t is set to ON (S2512), and the process proceeds to S2514. On the other hand, if it is determined that the look-ahead effect is not executed in the variable effect to be executed this time (S2511: No), a display command for changing the display mode of the target reserved symbol is set (S2513), and S2514. to process.

After executing the processing of S2512 or S2513, the content of the determined look-ahead effect is stored in the effect state storage area 223h (S2514), and the number of times up to the special figure variation corresponding to the target winning information is continuously displayed. The value of the advance notice counter 223u is set (S2515), and this processing ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 511, the details of the jackpot related process (S2212), which is one process in the command determination process (S2113: FIG. 507) executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113, will be described. FIG. 511 is a flow chart showing the contents of the jackpot related process (S2212). This jackpot-related process (S2212) is a process executed when a win-related command is received from main controller 110. FIG.

In the jackpot-related process (S2212), first, it is determined whether or not an opening command has been received from the main controller 110 (S2601). If it is determined that an opening command has been received (S2601: Yes), an opening command for display is set (S2602). End the process.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2601 that the opening command has not been received (S2601: No), it is determined whether or not the round number command has been received (S2604). When it is determined that the round number command has been received (S2604: Yes), 1 is added to the round number counter 223x (S2605), and then round effect setting processing is executed (S2606). A detailed description of this round effect setting process (S2606) will be given later with reference to FIG. After executing the round effect setting process (S2606), next, based on the round number counter 223x, a round number command for display is set (S2607), and this process ends.

Here, with reference to FIG. 512, the details of the round effect setting process (S2606), which is one process in the jackpot related process (S2212) executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device, will be described. FIG. 512 is a flow chart showing the contents of the round effect setting process (S2606).

In the round effect setting process (S2606), first, reading of acquired information stored in the acquired ball number storage area 223n is executed (S2701). Next, an expected value is calculated by adding the number of balls that can be acquired during the current round to the obtained acquired information (S2702). Based on the calculated expected value, the promotion point selection table 222h (see FIG. 476) is referenced to determine the number of points to be given for the round to be executed this time (S2703). Next, based on the number of assigned points determined in the process of S2703 and the promotion effect selection table 222i (see FIG. 477), the effect mode during the round is determined (S2704).

Next, it is determined whether or not the setting suggestion effect is executed in the effect mode determined in the processing of S2704 (S2705). When it is determined that the setting suggestion effect is to be executed (S2705: Yes), the effect content to be executed is stored in the executed setting suggestion effect storage area 223k (S2706), and then information indicating the determined effect content. is stored in the effect state storage area 223h (S2707), and the process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S2705, when it is determined that the setting suggestion effect is not executed (S2705: No), the process of S2706 is skipped, the above-described process of S2707 is executed, and this process ends.

Returning to FIG. 511, the description continues. In the processing of S2604, if it is determined that the round number command has not been received (S2604: No), it is determined whether or not the ending command has been received (S2608). When it is determined that the ending command has been received (S2608: Yes), the effect information executed during the jackpot stored in the effect state storage area 223h is read (S2609), and then the executed setting suggestion is performed. Information stored in the effect storage area 223k is read out (S2610). Then, the period production situation at the start of the jackpot is read from the production state storage area 223h (S2611), and then the current period production situation and the ending command for display corresponding to the information read in the processing of S2609 to S2611 are set. (S2612), the information in the executed setting suggestion effect storage area 223k is cleared (S2614), the value of the round number counter 223x is set to 0 (S2615), and this processing ends. On the other hand, in the processing of S2608, if it is determined that the ending command has not been received (S2608: No), this processing ends.

In the present embodiment, as described above, the content of the setting suggestion effect to be executed at the ending of the big win is determined based on the start timing of the big win game and the progress of the period effect at the start of the big win. By configuring in this way, when the player grasps that a jackpot game will be executed by the look-ahead effect or the like, the player does not just wait for the time until the jackpot is won, but also performs the period effect. Since the player can be interested in the timing of when the jackpot game is started, it is possible to concentrate on the game during the time until the jackpot is won.

In addition, in this embodiment, it is configured to determine the contents of the setting suggestive effect based on the time of the start of the jackpot game and the progress of the period effect at the time of the start of the jackpot. The contents of the setting suggestion production may be determined in a complex manner, including the start timing of the special figure fluctuation.

Also, instead of the start of the jackpot game, the content of the setting suggestion effect may be determined based on the start of a specific round and the progress of the period effect. By configuring in this way, the player can be interested in the setting suggestion effect for a longer period of time.

Next, with reference to FIG. 513, the details of the stop process (S2214), which is one process in the command determination process (S2113: FIG. 507) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113, will be described. FIG. 513 is a flow chart showing the contents of the stop processing (S2214). This stop process (S2214) is a process executed when a stop command is received from main controller 110. FIG.

In the stop processing (S2214), first, it is determined whether or not the value of the continuous notice counter 223u is greater than 0 (S2801). If it is determined that the value of the continuation notice counter 223u is greater than 0 (S2801: Yes), 1 is subtracted from the value of the continuation notice counter 223u (S2802). Next, it is determined whether the subtracted value of the consecutive notice counter 223u is 0 (S2803). When it is determined that the value of the continuous announcement counter 223u is 0 (S2803: Yes), the continuous announcement execution flag 223t is set to OFF (S2804), and the process proceeds to S2805. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2801 that the value of the continuous notice counter 223u is not greater than 0 (S2801: No), or if it is determined that the value of the continuous notice counter 223u is not 0 in the process of S2803 (S2803 : No), the process proceeds to S2805.

In the process of S2805, it is determined whether or not the specialized mode flag 223w is ON (S2805). If it is determined that the special mode flag 223w is ON (S2805: Yes), the special mode flag 223w is set to OFF (S2806), and the process proceeds to S2807. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2805 that the specialized mode flag 223w is not ON (S2805: No), the process of S2806 is skipped and the process proceeds to S2807.

In the process of S2807, it is determined whether the stop command received this time is a stop command indicating the stop of the final variation of the time saving state (S2807). When it is determined that the stop command received this time is the stop command indicating the final change in the time saving state (S2807: Yes), the display end command for indicating the time saving end is set (S2808). Next, the information in the acquired ball number storage area 223n is cleared (S2809), and the process proceeds to S2810. On the other hand, in the processing of S2807, when it is determined that the current special symbol variation is not the final variation of time saving (S2807: No), the processing of S2808 and S2809 is skipped, and the processing of S2810 is performed.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the stop command of the time-saving final variation is received, the value of the acquired ball number storage area 223n is configured to be cleared, but this is not the only option, and a specific condition is established. In this case, the value of the acquired ball number storage area 223n may not be cleared, and the acquired information stored this time may be referred to at the time of the next jackpot game. In this way, by increasing the number of values that can be referred to, it is possible to give a wider range to the setting of the promotion effect, and it is possible to prevent the player from becoming bored with the game.

In the processing of S2810, it is determined whether or not the character display flag 223y is ON (S2810). If it is determined that the character display flag 223y is set to ON (S2810: Yes), the setting suggestion effect selection table 222c (see FIG. 472) defined in the ROM 222 of the sound lamp control device is referred to, A presentation mode is determined (S2811). Next, a display command for indicating the character corresponding to the effect mode determined in the processing of S2811 is set (S2812), and the character display flag 223y is set to OFF (S2813). Then, the stop display of the third symbol corresponding to the stop command received this time is set (S2814), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2810 that the character display flag 223y is not ON (S2810: No), the processes of S2811 to S2813 are skipped, the above-described process of S2814 is executed, and this process ends. .

Next, referring to FIG. 514, details of the boot completion process (S2216), which is one process in the command determination process (S2113: FIG. 507) executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113, will be described. FIG. 514 is a flow chart showing the contents of boot completion processing (S2216). This boot completion process (S2216) is a process of canceling the button operation invalid period when a boot completion command is received from the display control device 114. FIG.

In the boot completion process (S2216), first, it is determined whether or not the value of the operation invalidation timer 223s is greater than 0 (S2901). When it is determined that the operation disable timer 223s is greater than 0 (S2901: Yes), the value of the operation disable timer 223s is reset to 0 (S2902) to indicate that the button operation is enabled. A display command is set (S2903), and this processing ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2901 that the value of the operation invalidation timer 223s is not greater than 0 (S2901: No), the processes of S2902 and S2903 are skipped, and this process ends.

The timing at which the button operation invalid period is cleared is not limited to this. The button operation invalid period may be canceled when the operation process and the boot process of the third pattern display device 81 are completed. In addition, the button operation invalid period is not limited to being set by a timer, but is set using a flag or the like, and is configured to be canceled when the boot processing of the third pattern display device 81 is completed and a boot completion command is received. You may

Next, the variable display setting process (S2114) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 515 is a flow chart showing this variable display setting process (S2114). This variable display setting process (S2114) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 506) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113. In order to execute the variable effect in the third symbol display device 81, A variation pattern command for display is generated and set based on the variation pattern command received from the main controller 110 .

In the variable display setting process (S2114: FIG. 515), first, it is determined whether or not the variable start flag 223d provided in the RAM 223 is ON (S3001). Then, if it is determined that the fluctuation start flag 223d is not on (that is, is off) (S3001: No), since the fluctuation pattern command has not been received from the main controller 110, S3008 Go to processing. On the other hand, if it is determined that the fluctuation start flag 223d is ON (S3001: Yes), the fluctuation start flag 223d is set to OFF (S3002), and the fluctuation pattern type in the fluctuation effect extracted from the display fluctuation pattern command is , from the RAM 223 (S3003).

Next, it is determined whether or not the continuous announcement execution flag 223t is ON (S3004). When it is determined that the continuous announcement execution flag 223t is not ON (S3004: No), the effect mode setting process is executed (S3005), and the process proceeds to S3007. A detailed description of the rendering mode setting process (S3005) will be given later with reference to FIG. When it is determined that the continuous announcement execution flag 223t is ON (S3004: Yes), the effect mode is determined based on the variation pattern and the continuous announcement effect acquired in the process of S3003 (S3006).

Then, based on the obtained variation pattern type, a display variation pattern command for notification to the display control device 114 is generated, and the command is set for transmission to the display control device 114 (S3007). In the display control device 114, by receiving this display variation pattern command, the third pattern display device 81 performs the variation display of the third pattern in the variation pattern indicated by this display variation pattern command, Display control of the variable effect is started.

Next, although not shown, the data stored in the winning information storage area 223f is shifted. In this process, the data stored in the first to fourth areas of the winning information storage area 223f are sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, the data in each area is shifted in the order of 1st area→execution area, 2nd area→1st area, 3rd area→2nd area, 4th area→3rd area. After shifting the data, the process proceeds to S3008.

In the processing of S3008, it is determined whether or not the stop type selection flag 223e provided in the RAM 223 is ON (S3008). Then, if it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223e is not ON (that is, it is OFF) (S3008: No), this processing ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223e is on (S3008: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223e is turned off (S3009), and the stop type in the variable effect extracted from the stop type command is changed to Acquired from the RAM 223 (S3010). Next, the stop type instructed by the stop type command from the main control device 110 is set as it is as the stop type of the variable effect in the third symbol display device 81 (S3011), and the stop type effect setting process is executed (S3012). ), the process proceeds to S3013. Details of the stop type effect setting process (S3012) will be described later with reference to FIG.

In the process of S3013, based on the set stop type, a display stop type command for notification to the display control device 114 is generated, and the command is set for transmission to the display control device 114 (S3013). . In the display control device 114, by receiving this stop type command for display, the stop pattern corresponding to the stop type indicated by this stop type command for display is stopped and displayed on the third pattern display device 81. The stop display of the variable production is controlled. After the process of S3013 is executed, this process ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 516, the effect mode setting process (S3005) executed in the variable display setting process (S2114: see FIG. 515) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 516 is a flow chart showing the contents of the rendering mode setting process. This production mode setting process (S3005) is a process for setting a high-speed fluctuation production during time reduction or probability variation and a process for setting an production for the SP time period.

In the effect mode setting process (S3005), first, it is determined whether or not the current game state is the normal state (S3101). When it is determined that the current game state is not the normal state (S3101: No), the effect setting process during time reduction/probability variation is executed (S3102), and this process ends.

Here, with reference to FIG. 517, the production mode setting process (S3005: see FIG. 516) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 is one process within the production setting process (S3102). do. Figure 517 is the flowchart which shows the details of production setting processing for time saving and probability variation (S3102).

In the time saving/probability variation production setting process (S3102), first, this special figure fluctuation determines whether the game state is the 81st rotation after shifting to the time saving state or the probability variation state (S3201). When it is determined that the special figure variation of this time is not the 81st rotation (S3201: No), the corresponding effect mode is determined (S3202), and the process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S3201, if it is determined that the game state is the 81st rotation after moving to the time saving state or the probability variation state (S3201: Yes), the number of seconds of variation of the special figure variation to start this time It is determined whether it is 1.5 seconds (S3203). If it is determined that the number of seconds of variation of the special figure variation to be started this time is 1.5 seconds (S3203: Yes), the corresponding production mode is determined (S3204), and a display command indicating high-speed variation mode entry It sets (S3205) and terminates this processing. When the display command indicating entry into the high-speed variation mode is set for the display control device 113, the display screen shown in FIG.

On the other hand, in the process of S3203, if it is determined that the number of seconds of variation of the special figure variation to be started this time is not 1.5 seconds (S3203: No), it is determined whether the number of seconds of variation is 12 seconds (S3206) . If it is determined that the variable number of seconds is not 12 seconds (S3206: No), the process of S3202 described above is executed, and this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S3206, if it is determined that the number of seconds of variation of this special figure variation is 12 seconds (S3206: Yes), 4 times of 1.5 second variation and 1 time of 6 second variation (12 seconds in total) is determined (S3207), the processing of S3205 described above is executed, and this processing ends.

In this embodiment, as described above, the game state shifts to the probability variable state or the time saving state, and when the fluctuation in the shifted game state reaches 81 rotations, the high speed fluctuation mode is entered. However, there is a problem that if a long variation such as a big win variation is executed immediately after the effect of entering the high-speed variation mode is executed, the player feels uncomfortable.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the variation of 12 seconds is executed in the 81st rotation, a short variation of 1.5 seconds x 4 times of variation of 12 seconds and a jackpot variation effect of 6 seconds are performed at high speed Executes the variable mode entry effect. By configuring in this way, it is possible to provide an effect that does not make the player feel uncomfortable.

In addition, if the 81st rotation is a long variation, it is not limited to executing the variation effect by dividing it into short variations as described above. It may be configured to be given to a person. By configuring in this way, it is possible to diversify the presentation, and the player can also be pleased by obtaining an unexpected privilege, and can increase the willingness to continue playing the game.

Also, if the 81st point is long variation, the high-speed variation mode entry effect may not be executed. By configuring in this way, it is possible to provide the player with a game that does not cause discomfort.

Returning to FIG. 516, the description continues. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S3101 that the current gaming state is the normal state, it is determined whether or not the continuous notice execution flag 223t provided in the RAM 223 of the sound lamp control device 113 is ON ( S3103). If it is determined that the continuous advance notice execution flag 223t is ON (S3103: Yes), this processing ends. On the other hand, in the process of S3103, when it is determined that the continuous announcement execution flag 223t is not ON (S3103: No), it is determined whether or not the period effecting flag 223p is ON (S3104). When it is determined that the period effecting flag 223p is ON (S3104: Yes), the period effect setting process is executed (S3105), the corresponding effect mode is determined (S3106), and this process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the period effecting flag 223p is not ON (S3104: No), the process of S3106 described above is executed, and this process ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 518, the period effect setting process (S3105), which is one process in the effect mode setting process (S3005: see FIG. 516) executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113, will be described. FIG. 518 is a flow chart showing the contents of the period effect setting process (S3105). In this period effect setting process (S3105), a process for setting the execution of the setting suggestion effect is executed based on the number of ready-to-win times executed during the SP time period and the number of variations of the special symbols.

In the period effect setting process (S3105), first, it is determined whether or not the variation to be executed this time is the big hit variation (S3301). When it is determined that the special figure variation to be executed this time is the big hit variation (S3301: Yes), the effect mode for showing the big hit is determined (S3312), and this processing is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of S3301, if it is determined that the variation to be executed this time is not the big hit variation (S3301: No), it is determined whether the current variation pattern is reach based on the acquired variation pattern (S3302). . Next, it is determined whether the variation pattern specified in the process of S3302 is reach variation (S3303). If it is determined that the reach is fluctuating (S3303: Yes), the value indicating the reach count in the mission information storage area 223q is updated (S3304).

Next, it is determined whether or not the updated reach count is the same value as the count set in the mission information storage area 223q (S3305). When it is determined that the updated reach count is the same value as the set count (S3305: Yes), the setting suggestion effect selection table 222c is referenced to determine the effect mode (S3306). Next, a display command for indicating the determined rendering mode is set (S3307), and the process proceeds to S3308. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S3305 that the reach count and the set count are not the same value (S3305: No), the processes of S3306 and S3307 are skipped and the process proceeds to S3308.

Next, the value indicating the number of changes in the mission information storage area 223q is updated (S3308). Then, it is determined whether or not the updated number of fluctuations and the set number of times are the same value (S3309). When it is determined that the updated number of fluctuations and the set number of times are the same value (S3309: Yes), the effect mode is determined by referring to the setting suggestion effect selection table 222c (S3310), and the determined effect mode is indicated. A display command for the display is set (S3311), and the process ends. On the other hand, in the processing of S3309, if it is determined that the number of times of change and the number of times of setting are not the same value (S3309: No), this processing ends.

As described above, in the present embodiment, it is configured such that the setting suggesting effect can be executed based on the number of variations of the special symbols executed during the SP time period and the number of reach times. With this configuration, the player can play the game while wishing for more variation during the SP time period, so that the player's willingness to play can be improved.

As an execution condition for the setting suggestion effect executed during the SP time effect period, it may be executed based on the sum of the variable times executed during the SP time effect period. By configuring in this way, even when a special figure lottery with a long fluctuation time is executed and the lottery result is a loss, expectations can be given to future games.

In addition, the result of the executed performance is stored as points, the player himself/herself decides whether or not to use the stored points, and based on the points, highly reliable setting suggestion performance is executed. may be configured as follows. In this way, the degree of freedom of the game can be improved by allowing the player to determine the timing of viewing the setting suggestion effect.

Next, with reference to FIG. 519, the stop type effect setting process (S3012), which is one process in the variable display setting process (S2114: see FIG. 515) executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113, will be described. FIG. 519 is a flow chart showing the contents of the stop type effect setting process (S3012). This stop type effect setting process (S3012) is a process for executing a specific setting suggestion effect when the stop type of the special figure fluctuation is out of reach during the period effect.

When the stop type effect setting process (S3012) is executed, first, whether the period effecting flag 223p provided in the RAM 223 of the sound lamp control device 113 is set to ON, that is, the period effect is currently being performed. (S3401). If it is determined that the period effecting flag 223p is not ON (S3401: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the period effecting flag 223p is ON in the process of S3401 (S3401: Yes), the process proceeds to S3402.

In the processing of S3402, it is determined whether or not the stop type of the special figure fluctuation being executed this time is out of reach (S3402). If it is determined that the stop type of the special figure fluctuation is not reach out (S3402: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that the stop type of the special figure fluctuation is out of reach (S3402: Yes), the character display flag 223y is set to ON (S3403), and this processing is terminated.

Next, with reference to FIG. 520, the details of the frame button input monitoring/effect processing (S2107), which is one of the main processing (see FIG. 506) executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113, will be described. FIG. 520 is a flow chart showing the detailed contents of the frame button input monitoring/effect processing (S2107). In the frame button input monitoring/effect processing (S2107), it is determined whether or not the frame button 22 has been pressed, and execution of a notice effect or the like is set based on the depression.

In the frame button input monitoring/effect processing (S2107), first, it is determined whether the value of the operation invalidation timer 223s is greater than 0, that is, whether the button operation invalid period is set (S3501). If it is determined that the value of the operation invalidation timer 223s is greater than 0 (S3501: Yes), it is the operation invalidation period of the frame button 22, and this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the operation invalid timer is not greater than 0, that is, the operation invalid period of the frame button 22 is not reached (S3501: No), it is determined whether the depression of the frame button 22 has been detected ( S3502). If it is determined that the pressing of the frame button 22 has not been detected (S3502: No), this processing ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S3502, when it is determined that the frame button 22 has been pressed (S3502: No), it is determined whether or not the announcement effect is being executed (S3503). When it is determined that the advance notice effect is being performed (S3503: Yes), the advance notice display command for display indicating the notice effect decided by lottery is set to the display control device 114 (S3504), and the processing is terminated as it is. .

On the other hand, in the process of S3503, if it is determined that the announcement effect is not being executed (S3503: No), the background mode is incremented by 1 and set in the background mode storage area 223v (S3505). A command for switching the display to the variation pattern corresponding to the set background mode is set for the display control device 114 (S3506), and this process is terminated.

Note that the number of times the frame button 22 has been pressed may be stored by providing a counter or the like, and the setting suggestion effect may be executed based on the total number of times. In addition, when the long-pressing effect of the frame button 22 is executed, the time during which the player long-presses the frame button 22 is measured, and based on the total time, the setting suggesting effect is executed. may By configuring in this way, the player can participate in the effect of pressing the frame button 22 willingly, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

Next, with reference to FIG. 521, the details of the elapsed time confirmation process (S2111), which is one process in the main process (see FIG. 506) executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113, will be described. FIG. 521 is a flowchart showing detailed contents of the elapsed time confirmation process (S2111). In this elapsed time confirmation process (S2111), a process for setting the current presentation period is executed based on the current time information and the elapsed time since power-on.

In the elapsed time confirmation process (S2111), first, the current time information measured by the clock device 292 (see FIG. 462) is read out (S3601), and then the elapsed time T from power-on is calculated (S3602). ). Then, based on the elapsed time T calculated in the process of S3602, the current effect period is identified from the effect switching table 222b (see FIG. 471) (S3603).

Next, in the processing of S3603, it is determined whether or not the effect period specified from the effect switching table 222b is the SP time period (S3604). When it is determined that the specified effect period is the SP time period (S3604: Yes), it is determined whether the period effecting flag 223p is ON, that is, whether the SP time period has already been set (S3605). . If it is determined that the period effecting flag 223p is ON (S3605: Yes), there is no need to set the SP time period, so this process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S3605, if it is determined that the during period production flag 223p is not ON (S3605: No), the during period production flag 223p is set to ON (S3606), indicating that the transition to the SP time period A back image change command for displaying the background image is set for the display control device 114 (S3607), and the process ends. On the other hand, in the processing of S3604, when it is determined that the specified effect period is not the SP time period (S3604: No), it is determined whether or not the specialized mode flag 223w is ON (S3608).

In the process of S3608, if it is determined that the specialized mode flag 223w is ON (S3608: Yes), this process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the special mode flag 223w is not ON in the process of S3608 (S3608: No), the period effect flag 223p is ON, that is, the end of the SP time period is now set. Determine if (S3609). If it is determined that the period effecting flag 223p is ON, that is, the end of the SP time period is not set (S3609: Yes), it is determined whether the special symbol is fluctuating (S3610). When it is determined that the special symbols are changing (S3610: Yes), a special mode setting process (S3611) is executed, and this process ends. A detailed description of this specialized mode setting process (S3611) will be given later with reference to FIG.

On the other hand, in the process of S3610, when it is determined that the special symbol is not fluctuating (S3610: No), the period effecting flag 223p is set to OFF (S3612), and then the current game state is changing probability. (S3613). When it is determined that the current game state is changing probability (S3613: Yes), the effect mode (see FIG. 454) suggesting the set value is determined by lottery (S3616), and the process proceeds to S3615. On the other hand, in the processing of S3613, when it is determined that the current game state is not in the probability change (S3614), the setting suggestion effect selection table 222c provided in the ROM 222 of the voice lamp control device 113 is referred to, and the effect The mode is determined (S3614), and the process proceeds to S3615. In the process of S3615, the display command corresponding to the effect mode determined in the process of S3614 or S3616 is set (S3615), the back image display command is set (S3617), and the process proceeds to S3618. .

In this embodiment, at the end of the SP time period, if the special figure is not changing and the game state is changing probability, as a setting suggestion effect, if the game state is changing probability at the end of the SP time period It is configured to execute a setting suggestion effect with a higher degree of reliability than when there is no such setting. By constructing in this way, it is possible to provide a new game property such that the SP time period ends in a variable probability state and the game is executed while the player desires to see a highly reliable setting suggestive performance, thereby increasing the amusement of the game. can be improved.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the setting suggestion effect is displayed at the end of the SP time period. may By constructing in this way, the game is continued until the start of the SP time period for the player who is thinking about stopping the game before the start of the SP time period, and the game is continued until the setting suggestion performance is seen. It is possible to give the desire to continue playing the game.

Further, as described above, based on the game state at the end of the SP time period, it is configured to execute a setting suggestion effect with high reliability, but the game during the SP time period executed this time is not limited to this. Based on the result, it may be configured to execute a highly reliable setting suggestion effect at the end of the SP time period.

In such a configuration, it is preferable to determine whether the game state has changed a plurality of times during the current SP time period, and to execute a highly reliable setting suggestion effect based on the result. . For example, during the SP time period of this time, if the game state moves twice (for example, from the normal state to the time saving state, and then to the variable probability state), if the game state moves once, or if the game state is To execute suggestion performance with high reliability compared with the case of no transition. With this configuration, the player can win as many jackpots as possible during the SP time period and execute the game while desiring that the game state shifts more frequently. can participate in the game.

On the other hand, in the processing of S3609, when it is determined that the period effecting flag 223p is not ON (S3609: No), or after executing the processing of S3617 described above, next, the remaining time until the SP time period is calculated (S3618). Then, information indicating the remaining time until the SP time period calculated in the process of S3618 is stored in the time information storage area 223r (S3619), and this process ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 522, the special mode setting process (S3610), which is one process in the elapsed time confirmation process (S2111: see FIG. 521) executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113, will be described. FIG. 522 is a flow chart showing the contents of the specialized mode setting process (S3610). This special mode setting process (S3610) is a process that is executed when the special symbol fluctuates at the end timing of the SP time period, and the setting suggestion effect is performed during the special symbol fluctuation period after the end of the SP time period. This is a process for setting a mode that is likely to be executed.

In the special mode setting process (S3610), it is determined whether or not the remaining variation time of the special symbol being executed is longer than 5 seconds (S3701). If it is determined that the remaining variation time of the special symbol being executed is shorter than 5 seconds (S3701: No), the special mode effect cannot be set in the remaining variation time, so this process ends as it is. do. On the other hand, when it is determined that the remaining variation time of the special symbol being executed is longer than 5 seconds (S3701: Yes), a display command for indicating entering the special mode is set (S3702). , the special mode flag 223w is set to ON (S3703), and the process proceeds to S3704.

In the process of S3704, the effect execution number selection table 222f (see FIG. 474) provided in the ROM 222 of the sound lamp control device 113 is referred to, and the execution number of the suggested effect during the special mode is determined (S3704). Next, for the special figure fluctuation effect being executed, a display command for adding the execution of the suggestive effect is set (S3705), and the executed set effect storage area 223k is executed during this special mode The type of suggested effect to be provided is stored (S3506), and this process is terminated.

As described above, in the present embodiment, when the special symbol variation effect is executed so as to straddle the end timing of the SP time period, it is possible to switch the effect to be executed based on the length of the remaining variation period. configured to do so. By configuring in this way, it is possible to provide an effect that does not cause a sense of incongruity such as sudden switching of the end effect of the SP time period.

In this embodiment, it is determined whether or not the special symbol is fluctuating at the end timing of the SP time period, and whether or not to execute the special mode effect is determined according to the remaining period. However, without being limited to this, at the start of the fluctuation of the special symbol, it is determined whether it is executed across the end timing of the SP time period, and based on the determination result, the special mode is set at the start of the fluctuation. good too. By configuring in this way, it is possible to set more time as the specialized mode, so that it is possible to provide the player with more diverse presentation modes.

<Regarding control processing of the display control device in the twenty-seventh embodiment>
Next, each control executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIGS. 523 to 537. FIG. The processing of the MPU 231 can be broadly classified into main processing that is repeatedly executed after power is turned on, command interrupt processing that is executed when a command is received from the audio lamp control device 113, and processing for one frame from the image controller 237. There is V interrupt processing that is executed when the MPU 231 detects a V interrupt signal that is transmitted every 20 milliseconds when image drawing processing is completed. The MPU 231 normally executes main processing, and executes command interrupt processing and V interrupt processing in accordance with reception of a command and detection of a V interrupt signal. If command reception and V interrupt signal detection are performed at the same time, command reception processing is preferentially executed. As a result, it is possible to quickly reflect the content of the command received from the sound lamp control device 113 and execute the V interrupt process.

First, the main processing executed by the MPU 231 in the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 523 is a flow chart showing this main process. The main processing is to execute initialization processing when the power is turned on.

Activation of this main process is specifically performed according to the following flow. When power is turned on from the power supply device 115 to the display control device 114 and the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the command pointer 231a provided in the MPU 231 to "0000H" according to its hardware configuration. , the address "0000H" indicated by the instruction pointer 231a is specified for the bus line 240. FIG. When the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address specified on the bus line 240 is "0000H", it sets the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d in the buffer RAM 234c. , and outputs the corresponding data (instruction code) to the MPU 231 . Then, the MPU 231 fetches the received instruction code from the character ROM 234, and starts the main process by starting the execution of the process according to the fetched instruction.

Here, if all the boot programs to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, the character ROM 234 indicates that the address designated to the bus line 240 is "0000H". When detected, one page of data including the data (instruction code) corresponding to the address "0000H" must be read from the NAND flash memory 234a and set in the buffer RAM 234c. Due to the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a long time to read out and set it in the buffer RAM 234c. It will consume a lot of waiting time. Therefore, the time taken to start the MPU 231 becomes longer, and as a result, there arises a problem that the control of the third pattern display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, the NOR ROM 234d stores a predetermined number of instructions from the boot program to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. Since it is a memory from which data can be read, when the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 is immediately stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d. The stored boot program can be set in the buffer RAM 234 c and the corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231 . Therefore, since the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" in a short time after specifying the address "0000H", the MPU 231 can start the main process in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the control of the third pattern display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately.

When the main process is executed as described above, first, the boot process executed by the boot program is executed (S6001), and the display control device 114 is set so that various controls for the third symbol display device 81 can be executed. to start.

Here, referring to FIG. 524, the boot processing (S6001) will be described. FIG. 524 is a flowchart showing boot processing (S6001) executed in the main processing in the MPU 231 of the display control device 114. FIG.

As described above, in this embodiment, the control program and fixed value data to be executed by the MPU 231 are stored in the third symbol display device 81 instead of being stored in a dedicated program ROM as in conventional game machines. The character ROM 234 provided for storing the data of the image to be displayed is stored. The character ROM 234 is composed of a NAND-type flash memory 234a capable of increasing the capacity with a small area. There is no need to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing programs and the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and an increase in failure rate due to an increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

On the other hand, the NAND flash memory has a slow read speed, especially when performing random access. Even if a high-performance processor is used, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may deteriorate. Therefore, in this boot process, the control program and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are stored in the program storage area 233a provided in the work RAM 233 constituted by DRAM and the data table. A process of transferring and storing in the storage area 233b is executed.

Specifically, first, based on the hardware operations of the MPU 231 and the character ROM 234 described above, the boot program read out from the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR-type ROM 234d and set in the buffer RAM 234c after the system reset is released is executed. Of the control programs stored in the 2-program storage area 234a1, a predetermined amount is transferred to the program storage area 233a (S6101). The predetermined amount of control programs transferred here includes the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1.

Then, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the first predetermined address of the program storage area 233a, that is, the head address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a (S6102). As a result, the MPU 231 starts executing the rest of the boot program included in the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a by the process of S6101.

By setting the command pointer 231a to a predetermined address in the program storage area 233a by the processing of S6102, the MPU 231 can execute various processes while reading the control program stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. become. That is, the MPU 231 does not read the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 and fetch the instruction, but rather reads the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a and fetches the instruction. and execute various processing. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of a DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the MPU 231 can fetch the instruction at high speed and execute the process for the instruction.

After the command pointer 231a is set by the process of S6102, the remaining boot program whose execution is started by the set command pointer 231a is stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a. Of the control programs stored, the remaining control programs and fixed value data that have not been transferred to the program storage area 233a are transferred by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b (S6103). Specifically, the control program and some fixed data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233, and the above-mentioned various data tables (display data table, transfer data table) of the fixed value data are stored in the data table. Transfer to the storage area 233b.

After executing other processes necessary for the boot process (S6104), the instruction pointer 231a is moved to the second predetermined address of the program storage area 233a, that is, after the boot process (see S6001 in FIG. 523) is completed. The start address of the program corresponding to the initializing process (see S6002 in FIG. 523) is set (S6105), the completion command for indicating the completion of the boot process is transmitted to the sound lamp controller 113 (S6106), and the boot program is finished, and this boot process ends.

By executing the boot process (S6001) in this way, the control program and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are stored in the work RAM 233, which is composed entirely of DRAM. It is transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a and the data table storage area 233b. At the end of the boot process, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address, and thereafter the MPU 231 reads the control program transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. Various processing is executed using

Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a whose read speed is slow, the control program and fixed value data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 and the fixed value data after the system reset is released. By transferring to the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 can read the control program and fixed value data from the work RAM configured by the DRAM with a high read speed and perform various controls. High processing performance can be maintained, and diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed using the auxiliary effect part.

On the other hand, without storing the entire boot program in the NOR type ROM 234d, a predetermined number of instructions are stored from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released, and the rest of the boot program is stored in the NAND type flash memory 234a. , the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start up the MPU 231 in a short time simply by adding the NOR type ROM 234d with a very small capacity. can be done.

Note that in the boot process shown in FIG. 524, the predetermined amount of control programs transferred to the program storage area 233a by the process of S6101 includes all remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. However, it is not necessarily limited to this. may be part of As for the boot program transferred here, a predetermined amount of the control program including all remaining boot programs is transferred to the program storage area 233a. 231a may be executed. Then, the processes of S6103 to S6106 may be executed by all remaining boot programs stored in the program storage area 233a.

In addition, the boot program transferred by the process of S6101 transfers a part of the remaining boot program by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a, and then the beginning of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a. A process of setting an address to the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. In addition, part of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a by this processing is further transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount of part of the remaining boot program, and subsequently stored in the program storage area 233a. A process of setting the start address of the stored boot program to the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. Then, a predetermined amount of a part of the remaining boot program is transferred to the program storage area 233a, and then the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a is set in the instruction pointer 231a in step S6101. and the processing of S6102 may be repeated a plurality of times, and then the processing of S6103 to S6106 may be executed.

As a result, even if the program size of the boot program is large and the rest of the boot program not stored in the first program storage area 234d1 cannot be transferred to the program storage area 233a at once, the MPU 231 is already stored in the program storage area 233a. Using the boot program, a predetermined amount can be transferred to the program storage area 233a.

Further, in the present embodiment, the first program storage area 234d1 has been described as having a part of the boot program that is first executed by the MPU 231 when the system reset is released. It may be stored in the 1-program storage area 234d1. In this case, the MPU 231 may perform the processes of S6103 to S6106 without performing the processes of S6101 and S6102 after starting the boot process. This eliminates the need to transfer the boot program to the program storage area 233a, reducing the number of times the program is transferred to the character ROM 234 or the program storage area 233a, thereby reducing the boot processing time. Therefore, it is possible to start the control of the auxiliary effect section in the MPU 231, which becomes possible after the boot process, more quickly.

Now, return to the description of FIG. After the boot process is completed, the initial setting process is executed according to the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 (S6002). Specifically, the value of the stack pointer is set in the MPU 231, and various settings are made for the registers in the MPU 231 and the I/O device. In addition, processing for clearing the memory of the work RAM 233, the resident video RAM 235, and the normal video RAM 236 is performed. Further, various flags are provided in the work RAM 233, and initial values are set to the respective flags. As the initial value of each flag, "off" or "0" is set unless otherwise specified.

Further, in the initial setting process, after the image controller 237 is initialized, the image controller 237 is instructed to draw an image so that an image of a specific color is displayed on the entire screen of the third pattern display device 81. and instructs execution of display processing. As a result, immediately after the power is turned on, an image of a specific color is first displayed on the entire screen of the third pattern display device 81 . Here, the color of the image displayed on the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81 immediately after the power is turned on is set to be a different color according to the model of the pachinko machine. As a result, in the operation check at the factory or the like at the time of manufacture, immediately after turning on the power, it is inspected whether or not the image of the color corresponding to the model is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the pachinko machine 10 It is possible to easily and immediately judge whether or not the activation can be started normally.

Next, a transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller 237 to transfer the image data corresponding to the power-on main image to the power-on main image area 235a of the resident video RAM 235 (S6003). This transfer instruction contains the leading and trailing addresses of the character ROM 234 storing the image data corresponding to the main image when the power is turned on, the transfer destination information (here, the resident video RAM 235), and the transfer destination. The image controller 237 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 according to this transfer instruction. It is transferred to the image area 235a.

Then, when the transfer of all the image data indicated by the transfer instruction is completed, the image controller 237 transmits a transfer end signal indicating transfer end to the MPU 231 . By receiving this transfer end signal, the MPU 231 can grasp that the transfer of the image data designated by the transfer instruction has ended. When the transfer of all the image data indicated by the transfer instruction is completed, the image controller 237 stores transfer end information indicating transfer end in a register provided inside the image controller 237 or in a partial area of the built-in memory. It may be written. The MPU 231 reads information from this register or a partial area of the built-in memory at any time, and detects the writing of transfer end information by the image controller 237, thereby ascertaining that the transfer of the image data designated by the transfer instruction has ended. You may do so.

The image data transferred to the main image area 235a when the power is turned on is held so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off. When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on main image to the power-on main image area 235a is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 by the processing in S6003, the power-on variation image is transferred to the power-on main image area 235a. A transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller so as to transfer the image data corresponding to . This transfer instruction contains the head address of the character ROM 234 storing the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image, the data size of the image data, and information on the transfer destination (here, the resident video RAM 235). , and the head address of the power-on fluctuation image area 235b, which is the transfer destination. It is transferred to the change image area 235b when the power is turned on. The image data transferred to the power-on variation image area 235b is held so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off.

When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on variation image to the power-on variation image area 235b is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 by the process of S6004, then the simple image display flag 233c is set. is turned on (S6005). As a result, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 in transfer setting processing (see FIG. 535(a)), which will be described later. Resident image transfer setting processing for instructing the image controller 237 to transfer is executed (see S7502 in FIG. 535(a)).

Further, the simple image display flag 233c indicates that all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 based on the transfer instruction to the image controller 237 by the resident image transfer setting process. Remains on until terminated. As a result, during this period, in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 525(b)), the power-on image (power-on main image and power-on variation image) (not shown) is drawn in a simple manner. Command determination processing (see S6308 in FIG. 525(b)) and simple display setting processing (see S6309 in FIG. 525(b)) are executed.

As described above, the pachinko machine 10 uses the NAND flash memory 234a for the character ROM 234. Due to its slow read speed, all the image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is It takes a long time to transfer from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 . Therefore, as in this main processing, after the power is turned on, the power-on main image and the power-on varying image are first transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, and the main image at power-on is transferred to the third image. By displaying it on the symbol display device 81, while the remaining image data to be resident is being transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player and the people involved in the hall can see the image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on. You can check the main image. Therefore, the display control device 114 takes time to transfer the remaining image data to be resident from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 while displaying the main image on the third pattern display device 81 when the power is turned on. be able to. On the other hand, while the main image is being displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, the player or the like can recognize that some initialization processing is being performed, so that the rest of the resident video RAM 235 can be resident. It is possible to wait until the initialization is completed without worrying whether the operation is stopped while the image data to be processed is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 .

Also, in an operation check at a factory or the like during manufacturing, since the main image is immediately displayed on the third pattern display device 81 when the power is turned on, the operation of the third pattern display device 81 is started without any problem when the power is turned on. Therefore, it is possible to prevent deterioration of the operation check efficiency by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed for the character ROM 234. FIG.

In the display control device 114 of the pachinko machine 10, after the power is turned on, the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, so that the power-on main image is the third symbol. When the player starts the game while the display is displayed on the display device 81, there is a ball entering the special figure entrance 64 (start winning), and the command to start the variable effect is voice lamp control from the main control device 110 When received via a device 113, that is, when a display variation pattern command is received, a power-on variation image can be immediately displayed during the variation performance period, and a simple variation performance can be performed. Therefore, even while the main image is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 when the power is turned on, the player can confirm that the lottery has been surely performed by the simple variation performance.

Further, as described above, while the remaining image data to be resident is being transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, the third symbol display device 81 continues to display the main image when the power is turned on. is composed of a NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, and it takes a long time to transfer the data. However, in this pachinko machine 10, since it is possible to perform a simple variation effect using the power-on fluctuation image transferred to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on, immediately after the power is turned on, for example, after the power is restored, Immediately after the power is turned on, even while the main image is being displayed, the player can play the game with peace of mind.

After the processing of S6005, interrupt permission is set (S6006), and thereafter the main processing executes infinite loop processing until the power is turned off. Accordingly, after the interrupt permission is set by the process of S6006, the command interrupt process and the V interrupt process are executed according to the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal.

Next, command interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. 525(a). FIG. 525(a) is a flow chart showing the command interrupt processing. As described above, when a command is received from the audio lamp control device 113, the MPU 231 executes command interrupt processing.

In this command interrupt process, the received command data is extracted, and the extracted command data is sequentially stored in the command buffer area provided in the work RAM 233 (S6201), and the process ends. Various commands stored in the command buffer area by this command interrupt processing are read out by command determination processing or simple command determination processing of V interrupt processing to be described later, and processing corresponding to the command is performed.

Next, V interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. 525(b). FIG. 525(b) is a flow chart showing the V interrupt processing. In this V interrupt process, various processes corresponding to the command stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt process are executed, and after specifying the image to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81, the image is drawn. By creating a list and transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, the image controller 237 is instructed to execute drawing processing and display processing of the image.

As described above, this V interrupt process is started when the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 is detected. This V interrupt signal is a signal that is generated in the image controller 237 and sent to the MPU 231 every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing processing for one frame is completed. Therefore, by executing the V interrupt process in synchronization with this V interrupt signal, a drawing instruction is issued to the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of the image for one frame is completed. become. Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive an instruction to draw the next image before the image drawing processing or display processing is completed. It is possible to prevent an image from being developed in accordance with a new drawing instruction in a frame buffer storing image information being displayed.

Here, first, an outline of the flow of V interrupt processing will be described, and then details of each processing will be described with reference to other drawings. In this V interrupt process, as shown in FIG. 525(b), first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is on (S6301), and the simple image display flag 233c is not on. If it is off (S6301: No), it means that the transfer of all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been completed. In order to display on the display device 81, command determination processing (S6302) is executed, and then display setting processing (S6303) is executed.

In the command determination process (S6302), the content of the command from the sound lamp control device 113 stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt process is analyzed, and the process corresponding to the command is executed. When the display variation pattern command is stored, the demonstration display data table or the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern type is set in the display data table buffer 233d, and the transfer corresponding to the set display data table is performed. The data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

In this command determination process, all commands stored in the command buffer area at that time are analyzed and processed. This is because command determination processing is performed at intervals of 20 milliseconds when V interrupt processing is executed, and there is a high possibility that multiple commands are stored in the command buffer area during those 20 milliseconds. be. In particular, when main controller 110 decides to start a variable effect, there is a high possibility that a display variation pattern command, a display stop type command, and the like are stored in the command buffer area at the same time. Therefore, by analyzing and executing these commands all at once, it is possible to quickly comprehend the mode and stop type of the variable performance selected by the main control device 110 and the sound lamp control device 113, and generate a performance image corresponding to the mode. Drawing of an image can be controlled so as to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 . The details of this command determination process will be described later with reference to FIGS.

In the display setting process (S6303), based on the contents of the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the command determination process (S6302), etc., an image for one frame to be displayed next on the third pattern display device 81 is displayed. specifically identify the content of In addition, depending on the status of processing, etc., the effect mode to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 is determined, and the display data table corresponding to the determined effect mode is set in the display data table buffer 233d. The details of this display setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS.

After the display setting process is executed, task processing is executed (S6304). In this task processing, the image is configured based on the content of the image for the next one frame to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 specified by the display setting processing (S6303) or the simple display setting processing (S6309). The type of sprite (display object) to be displayed is specified, and various parameters required for drawing such as display coordinate position, enlargement ratio, and rotation angle are determined for each sprite.

Next, transfer setting processing is executed (S6305). In this transfer setting process, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, the image controller 237 is caused to transfer image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined area of the resident video RAM 235. Set instructions. While the simple image display flag 233c is off, predetermined image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image controller 237 based on the transfer data information of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. In addition to setting a transfer instruction to transfer to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236 a of the video RAM 236 , even when a continuous notice command or a back image change command is received from the sound lamp control device 113 , the image controller 237 is continuously instructed to A transfer instruction is set to transfer the image data of the continuous notice images used in the notice effect and the image data of the rear image after change from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236.例文帳に追加Details of the transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 535 and 536. FIG.

Next, drawing processing is executed (S6306). In this drawing process, based on the types of sprites that make up one frame determined in the task process (S6304) and the parameters necessary for drawing each sprite, and the transfer instruction set in the transfer setting process (S6305), 486, and transmits the drawing list to the image controller 237 together with the drawing object buffer information. As a result, the image controller 237 executes image drawing processing according to the drawing list (S6306). Note that the details of the rendering process will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, update processing of various counters provided in the display control device 114 is executed (S6307). Then, the V interrupt processing ends. As a counter updated by the process of S6307, for example, there is a stop symbol counter (not shown) for determining a stop symbol. The value of the stop symbol counter is stored in the work RAM 233, and is updated each time the V interrupt process is executed. Then, in the command determination process, when the reception of the stop type command for display is detected, the stop type indicated by the stop type command for display (jackpot A, jackpot B, jackpot C, jackpot D, jackpot E, front and back reach, A stop type table and a stop type counter corresponding to "reach" and "completely out" (other than front and rear out) are compared with each other, and the stop design after the variable effect displayed on the third design display device 81 is finally set.

On the other hand, in the process of S6301, if it is determined that the simple image display flag 233c is ON (S6301: Yes), it means that the transfer of all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been completed. Therefore, in order to display the power-on image on the third pattern display device 81, simple command determination processing (S6308) is executed, then simple display setting processing (S6309) is executed, and the process proceeds to S6304.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 526 to 531, the details of the command determination process (S6302), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. First, FIG. 526 is a flow chart showing this command determination processing.

In this command determination process, as shown in FIG. 526, first, it is determined whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area (S6401). After completing the command determination process, the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, if there is an unprocessed new command (S6401: Yes), the new command flag for notifying the display setting process (S6303) that the new command has been processed in the ON state is set to ON (S6402). All unprocessed commands stored in the buffer area are analyzed for their command types (S6403).

Then, it is determined whether or not there is a display variation pattern command among the unprocessed commands (S6404). Then, if there is a variation pattern command for display (S6404: Yes), the variation pattern command process is executed (S6405), and the process returns to S6401.

Here, with reference to FIG. 527(a), the details of the variation pattern command process (S6405) will be described. FIG. 527(a) is a flow chart showing the variation pattern command process (S6405). This variation pattern command processing (S6405) executes processing corresponding to the display variation pattern command received from the sound lamp control device 113. FIG.

In the variation pattern command process, first, the variation display data table corresponding to the variation effect pattern indicated by the variation pattern command for display is determined, and the determined variation display data table is read out from the data table storage area 233b to display the display data table. It is set in the buffer 233d (S6501).

Here, since the main controller 110 always determines the start of variation at a time interval of several seconds or more, it does not receive two or more display variation pattern commands within 20 milliseconds. When executing, it is impossible that two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, but part of the command changes due to the influence of noise, etc., and another command is mistakenly used for display. There is a possibility that it will be interpreted as a variation pattern command. In the process of S6501, in preparation for such a case, if it is determined that two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern with the shortest variation time is set in the display data table buffer 233d.

If a variation display data table corresponding to a variation pattern with a long variation time is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the main control device will actually produce a variation effect with a shorter variation time than the set display data table. 110, the next display variation pattern command is received from the main control device 110 while the variation performance according to the set variation display data table is being displayed on the third pattern display device 81. As a result, another variable display is suddenly started, which may make the player feel uncomfortable.

On the other hand, by setting the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern with the shortest variation time in the display data table buffer 233d as in the present embodiment, the variation display data table actually has a longer variation than the set display data table. Even if the variable effect with time is instructed by main controller 110, after the variable effect according to display data table buffer 233d is completed, main controller 110 will send the next display for display, as will be described later. Since the display of the third pattern display device 81 is controlled by the display setting process so that the demonstration effect is displayed until the pattern command is received, the player can feel the third pattern display on the third pattern display device 81 without any discomfort. 3 You can continue to see the variation of the pattern.

Next, a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table set in S6501 is determined, read from the data table storage area 233b, and set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S6502). Then, based on the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the fluctuation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S6501, time data representing the fluctuation time is set in the clock counter 233h (S6503), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S6504). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the fixed display flag are set to OFF (S6505), the variation pattern command is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

By executing this variation pattern command process, in the display setting process, while updating the pointer 233f initialized by the process of S6505, the variable display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the process of S6501 , extracts the drawing contents defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f, and specifies the contents of the image for one frame to be displayed next on the third pattern display device 81. At the same time, the transfer data table buffer 233e The transfer data information specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted from the transfer data table set to 1, and the sprite image data required in the set variable display data table is stored in advance from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. image storage area 236a.

Further, in the display setting process, the time counter 233h to which the time data is set by the process of S6503 is used to measure the time of the variable presentation specified in the variable display data table, and when the variable presentation in the variable display data table ends. When it is determined, the setting of the stop display is controlled so that the stop pattern corresponding to the stop type command for display from the main control device 110 is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 .

Now, return to the description of FIG. In the processing of S6404, if it is determined that there is no display variation pattern command (S6404: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display stop type command in the unprocessed commands (S6406), If there is a stop type command for display (S6406: Yes), the stop type command process is executed (S6407), and the process returns to S6401.

Details of the stop type command process (S6407) will now be described with reference to FIG. 527(b). FIG. 527(b) is a flow chart showing stop type command processing. This stop type command processing is for executing processing corresponding to the display variation type command received from the sound lamp control device 113 .

In the stop type command processing (S6407), first, the stop type table corresponding to the stop type information (jackpot A to E, out of reach, or out of reach) indicated by the stop type command for display is determined (S6601). , The stop type table is compared with the value of the stop type counter updated each time the V interrupt process (see FIG. 525(b)) is executed, and the fluctuation displayed on the third symbol display device 81 A stop symbol after the effect is finally set (S6602).

Then, among the stop symbol discrimination flags provided for each of the stop symbols, the stop symbol discrimination flag corresponding to the stop symbol set by the processing of S6602 is turned on, and the stop symbol discrimination flag corresponding to the other stop symbols is turned on. It is set to ON (S6603) and returns to the command determination processing.

Here, as described above, in the variation display data table, the type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 after a predetermined time has passed since the variation based on the data table is started. , offset information (design offset information) from the stop design set by the processing of S6602. In the above-described task processing (S6304), after a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the variation, the stop design set by the process of S6602 is specified from the stop design determination flag set by S6603, and the specified stop By adding the design offset information acquired by the display setting process to the design, the third design to be actually displayed is specified. Then, the address where the image data corresponding to the specified third pattern is stored is specified. Image data corresponding to the third design is stored in the third design area 235d of the resident video RAM 235, as described above.

It should be noted that since the main controller 110 always determines the start of fluctuation at a time interval of several seconds or more, two or more stop type commands for display are not received within 20 milliseconds, and therefore command determination processing is executed. In this case, it is impossible that two or more display stop type commands are stored in the command buffer area. It may be interpreted as a type command. In the processing of S6601, in preparation for such a case, if it is determined that two or more stop type commands for display are stored in the command buffer area, it is assumed that the stop type is completely out, and the stop type Decide on a table. As a result, the stop symbol corresponding to the complete loss is set by the processing of S6602.

If a stop symbol corresponding to the "special symbol jackpot" is set, the third symbol display device 81 displays the "special symbol" even if the "special symbol is out". A stop pattern corresponding to the "big win" is displayed, and the player is misled into thinking that the pachinko machine 10 has "a special pattern big win", and there is a risk of degrading the reliability of the pachinko machine 10.例文帳に追加On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, by setting the stop symbol corresponding to the complete loss, in fact, if it is a "special symbol jackpot", the third symbol display device 81 stops the complete loss. Even if the symbols are displayed, the pachinko machine 10 becomes a "jackpot of special symbols", so that the player can be pleased.

Returning to FIG. 526, the description continues. In the processing of S6406, if it is determined that there is no stop type command for display (S6406: No), then it is determined whether or not there is an opening command for display among the unprocessed commands (S6408). If there is an opening command (S6408: Yes), the opening command process is executed (S6409), and the process returns to S6401.

Details of the opening command process (S6409) will now be described with reference to FIG. 528(a). FIG. 528(a) is a flowchart showing opening command processing. This opening command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the opening command received from the sound lamp control device 113 .

In the opening command process, first, the opening display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d (S6701). Thereafter, a transfer data table corresponding to the opening display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S6702), and based on the set opening display data table, time data is set in the clock counter 233h (S6703). After that, the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S6704). Then, both the demonstration display flag 233y and the fixed display flag 233z are set to OFF (S6705), the opening command is terminated, and the process returns to command determination processing.

Returning to FIG. 526, the description continues. In the processing of S6408, if it is determined that there is no display opening command (S6408: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display round number command in the unprocessed commands (S6410), and display If there is a round number command for use (S6410: Yes), the round number command process is executed (S6411), and the process returns to S6401.

Here, with reference to FIG. 528(b), details of the round number command processing (S6411) will be described. FIG. 528(b) is a flowchart showing round number command processing. The number-of-rounds command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the number-of-rounds command for display received from the sound lamp control device 113 .

In the round number command processing, first, the round number display data table corresponding to the number of rounds indicated by the display round number command is determined, and the determined round number display data table is read out from the data table storage area 233b to display the display data. It is set in the table buffer 233d (S6801). Next, by writing Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e, the contents are cleared (S6802).

Then, based on the round number display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S6801, time data representing the performance time is set in the clock counter 233h (S6803), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0. (S6804). Then, both the demonstration display flag 233y and the fixed display flag 233z are set to OFF (S6805), the round number command process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

Returning to FIG. 526, the description continues. In the processing of S6410, if it is determined that there is no command for the number of rounds for display (S6410: No), then it is determined whether or not there is an ending command for display among the unprocessed commands (S6412). If there is an ending command for (S6412: Yes), the ending command process is executed (S6413), and the process returns to S6401.

Details of the ending command process (S6413) will now be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 529 is a flowchart showing ending command processing. This ending command process is to execute the process corresponding to the display ending command received from the sound lamp control device 113 .

In the ending command process, first, the ending display data table corresponding to the display mode of the ending effect indicated by the display ending command is determined, the determined ending display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, and the display data table is displayed. It is set in the buffer 233d (S6901). Next, by writing Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e, the contents are cleared (S6902).

Next, based on the ending display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S6901, time data representing the performance time is set in the clock counter 233h (S6903), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 ( S6904). Then, both the demonstration display flag 233y and the fixed display flag 233z are set to OFF (S6905), the ending command process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

Returning to FIG. 526, the description continues. In the processing of S6412, if it is determined that there is no display ending command (S6412: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display fluctuation stop command among the unprocessed commands (S6414), and display If there is a fluctuation stop command (S6414: Yes), the fluctuation stop command process is executed (S6415), and the process returns to S6401.

Here, with reference to FIG. 530(a), the details of the fluctuation stop command process (S6415) will be described. FIG. 530(a) is a flow chart showing the fluctuation stop command process. This fluctuation stop command process is for executing a process corresponding to the display fluctuation stop command received from the sound lamp control device 113 .

This display fluctuation stop command is the end timing of the display fluctuation pattern command set in the fluctuation display setting process (see S2114 in FIG. 515) of the audio lamp control device 113, that is, each special symbol in the main control device 110 At the end timing of the variation pattern (variation time) set in the variation pattern setting process (the timing at which the main controller 110 sets the stop command), the stop command for display output from the audio lamp control device 113 ( normal stop command) and various display commands set in the stop processing of the audio lamp control device 113 (see S2214 in FIG. 513).

In the fluctuation stop command process, first, the fluctuation stop data table indicated by the display fluctuation stop command is determined, and the decided fluctuation stop data table is read from the data table storage area 233b and set in the display data table buffer 233d ( S6931). Next, by writing Null data into the transfer data table buffer 233e, the contents thereof are cleared (S6932).

Next, based on the fluctuation stop data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S6931, time data representing the presentation time is set in the clock counter 233h (S6933), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 ( S6934). Then, both the demonstration display flag 233y and the fixed display flag 233z are set to OFF (S6935), the fluctuation stop command process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

Returning to FIG. 526, the description continues. In the processing of S6412, if it is determined that there is no fluctuation stop command (S6414: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display notification command among the unprocessed commands (S6416), and the display notification If there is a command (S6416: Yes), the notification command process is executed (S6417), and the process returns to S6401.

Details of the notification command process (S6415) will now be described with reference to FIG. 530(b). FIG. 530(b) is a flow chart showing notification command processing. In this notification command processing, processing corresponding to the notification command (for display) received from the sound lamp control device 113 is executed.

This notification command is output to the display control device 114 among various notification commands set when the sound lamp control device 113 receives a command for indicating various abnormal states set by the main controller 110. This process is executed when the display control device 114 receives the display notification command.

In the notification command process, first, the display (notification) data table corresponding to the notification mode indicated by the notification command is determined, the determined display (notification) data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, and stored in the display data table buffer. 233d (S6951). Next, by writing Null data into the transfer data table buffer 233e, the contents thereof are cleared (S6952).

Next, based on the display (notification) data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S6951, time data representing the performance time is set in the clock counter 233h (S6953), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0. (S6954). Then, both the demonstration display flag 233y and the fixed display flag 233z are set to OFF (S6955), the notification command process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

In the present embodiment, the display control device 114 discriminates only the display command indicating that the notification target is the third symbol display device 81 (display device) among the various notification commands set by the sound lamp control device 113. However, it is not limited to this, and related commands other than the display command, such as a light emission command, a voice output command, and a character object driving command, are once received and processed by the display control device 114. It may be configured such that the related command is output to the corresponding control device in a state in which information for indicating the data content (display mode) set in 1 is added.

Returning to FIG. 526, the description continues. In the process of S6416, if it is determined that there is no display notification command (S6416: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a back image change command among the unprocessed commands (S6418). If there is a change command (S6418: Yes), back image change command processing is executed (S6419), and the process returns to S6401.

Here, with reference to FIG. 531, the details of the back image change command process (S6419) will be described. FIG. 531 is a flowchart showing back image change command processing. The back image change command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the back image change command received from the sound lamp control device 113 .

In the back image change command processing, first, the back image change flag 233w for notifying the normal image transfer setting processing (S7503) of the change in the back image accompanying the reception of the back image change command in the ON state is set to ON (S7001). ). Then, among the bits of the back image determination flag 233x provided for each back image type (back surface A, B), the bit corresponding to the back image type indicated by the back image change command is set to ON, and the other bits are set to ON. The bit corresponding to the back image type is set to OFF (S7002), the back image change command process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

In the normal image transfer setting process, when it is detected that the back image change flag 233w set by the process of S7001 is turned on, the back image type after change is selected from the back image discrimination flag 233x set by the process of S7002. Identify.

Further, in the task processing, if it is specified to display one of the back faces A and B according to the back face type of the back face image defined in the display data table, from the back face image determination flag 233x set in S7002, The type of background image to be displayed at that time is specified, the range of the background image to be displayed is specified according to the passage of time, and the RAM type ( Resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) and the address of that RAM are specified.

Since the player does not continuously operate the frame button 22 for 20 milliseconds or less, two or more background image change commands are not received within 20 milliseconds, so the command determination process is executed. In this case, there should be no cases where two or more background image change commands are stored in the command buffer area. It could be interpreted as a command. In the process of S7002, if it is determined that two or more back image commands are stored in the command buffer area, the back image determination flag 233x corresponding to the back image type indicated by the previously received back image command is turned on. Alternatively, the back image determination flag 233x corresponding to the back image type indicated by the back image command received later may be turned on. Alternatively, any one back image change command may be extracted and the back image determination flag 233x corresponding to the back image type indicated by the command may be turned on. Since the change of the back image does not directly affect the game value of the pachinko machine 10, it is preferable to appropriately set it according to the characteristics and operability of the pachinko machine 10. FIG.

Now, return to the description of FIG. In the process of S6418, if it is determined that there is no back image change command (S6418: No), then it is determined whether or not there is an error command among the unprocessed commands (S6420). Otherwise (S6420: Yes), the error command process is executed (S6421), and the process returns to S6401.

Details of the error command processing (S6421) will now be described with reference to FIG. 531(b). FIG. 531(b) is a flowchart showing error command processing. In this error command processing, processing corresponding to the error command received from the sound lamp control device 113 is executed.

In the error command process, first, an error occurrence flag indicating that an error has occurred in the ON state is set to ON (S7101). Then, among the error determination flags provided for each error type, the error determination flag corresponding to the error type indicated by the error command is turned on, and the other error determination flags are set to off (S7102). Terminate the process and return to the command determination process.

In the display setting process, when the occurrence of an error is detected based on the error occurrence flag set by the process of S7101, the type of error that has occurred is determined from the error determination flag set by the process of S7102, and the error type is handled. A process is executed to cause the third symbol display device 81 to display a warning image to be displayed.

If it is determined that two or more error commands are stored in the command buffer area, in the process of S7102, error determination flags corresponding to all error types indicated by the respective error commands are set to ON. As a result, the warning images corresponding to all the error types are displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the player and the people involved in the hall can correctly grasp the occurrence of the error.

Now, return to the description of FIG. If it is determined in the process of S6416 that there is no error command (S6420: No), then the process corresponding to other unprocessed commands is executed (S6422), and the process returns to the process of S6401.

In the process of S6401, which is executed again after each command has been processed, it is again determined whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area, and if there is an unprocessed new command (S6401: Yes ), and the processing of S6402 to S6422 is executed again. Then, the processing of S6401 to S6422 is repeatedly executed until there is no unprocessed new command in the command buffer area. End the process.

Note that the simple command determination process (S6308) executed when the simple image display flag 233c is ON in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 525(b)) is also performed in the same manner as the command determination process. However, in the simple command determination process, only the commands necessary to display the power-on image, that is, the display fluctuation pattern command and the display stop type command, are extracted from the unprocessed commands stored in the command buffer area. It extracts and executes fluctuation pattern command processing (see FIG. 527 (a)) and stop type command processing (see FIG. 527 (b)), which are processing corresponding to each command, and for other commands, A process to discard the command without executing the process corresponding to the command is performed.

Here, in the variation pattern command process (see FIG. 527(a)) executed in this case, in the process of S6501, the display data table buffer corresponding to the display of the power-on variation image is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. The image data of the power-on main image and the power-on varying image which are set and required in that case are stored in the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on varying image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, in the process of S6502, the process of writing Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e and clearing the contents thereof is performed.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 532 to 534, the details of the display setting process (S6303), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. FIG. 532 is a flowchart showing this display setting process.

In this display setting process, as shown in FIG. 532, first, it is determined whether or not the new command flag is on (S7201). ), it is determined that the new command has not been processed in the command determination processing to be executed first, the processing of S7202 to S7204 is skipped, and the processing proceeds to S7205. On the other hand, if the new command flag is ON (S7201: Yes), it is determined that the new command has been processed in the previously executed command determination processing, and after setting the new command flag to OFF (S7202), S7203-S7204 , the process corresponding to the new command is executed.

In the process of S7203, it is determined whether or not the error occurrence flag is ON (S7203). Then, if the error occurrence flag is on (S7203: Yes), warning image setting processing is executed (S7204).

Here, with reference to FIG. 533, details of the warning image setting process will be described. FIG. 533 is a flowchart showing warning image setting processing. This process is a process for developing image data for displaying a warning image corresponding to an error that has occurred on the third pattern display device 81. First, the error determination flag is referred to, and all error determination flags set to ON are displayed. Warning image data for displaying an error warning image corresponding to the flag on the third pattern display device 81 is developed (S7301).

In task processing (S6304), based on the expanded warning image data, the types of sprites (display objects) that make up the warning image are specified, and the display coordinate position, magnification, and rotation angle are determined for each sprite. Determine various parameters necessary for drawing such as

Then, in the warning image setting process, after the process of S7301, the error occurrence flag is set to OFF (S7302), and the process returns to the display setting process.

Now, return to the description of FIG. After the warning image setting process (S7204), or if it is determined in the process of S7203 that the error occurrence flag is not ON, that is, it is OFF (S7203: No), then the process proceeds to S7205.

In S7205, pointer update processing is executed (S7205). Here, with reference to FIG. 534, the details of pointer update processing will be described. FIG. 534 is a flowchart showing pointer update processing. This pointer updating process acquires the transfer data information of the corresponding drawing contents or transfer target image data from the display data table and the transfer data table stored in the respective buffers of the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table buffer 233e. This is the process of updating the pointer 233f that specifies the address to which it should be applied.

In this pointer update process, first, 1 is added to the pointer 233f (S7401). That is, the pointer 233f is basically updated so that it is incremented by 1 each time the V interrupt process is executed. Further, as described above, in the various data tables, the Start information is described at the address "0000H", and the substance of each data is specified after the address "0001H". When the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 in accordance with the storage in the data table buffer 233d, the value is updated to 1 by this pointer update processing. Substantial data can be read from the data table.

After the value of the pointer 233f is updated by the processing of S7401, it is then checked whether the data at the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d is End information. is determined (S7402). As a result, if it is End information (S7402: Yes), it means that the pointer 233f has been updated past the address where the substance data is described in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d.

Therefore, it is determined whether or not the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is a demonstration display data table (S7403). The time data corresponding to the performance time of the display data table for demonstration set in the table buffer 233d is set in the clock counter 233h (S7404), the pointer 233f is initialized by setting it to 1 (S7405), and this processing ends. and return to the display setting process. As a result, in the display setting process, the drawing contents can be developed sequentially from the top of the demonstration display data table, so that the third symbol display device 81 can repeatedly display the demonstration effects.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S7403 that the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is not the demonstration display data table (S7403: No), the value of the pointer 233f is decremented by 1 ( S7406), this process is terminated, and the process returns to the display setting process. As a result, in the display setting process, when a display data table other than the demonstration display data table, for example, a variable display data table, is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the previous address in which the End information is described is displayed. is always expanded, the third pattern display device 81 can display the last image defined by the display data table in a stopped state. On the other hand, in the process of S7402, if the data at the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f is not the End information (S7402: No), this process ends and returns to the display setting process.

Here, return to FIG. 532 to continue the description. After the pointer update process, the drawing contents of the address indicated by the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update process are obtained from the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d (S7206). In the task processing (S6304), the type of the sprite (display object) constituting the image is specified based on the rendering content developed in the processing of S7206 together with the previously developed warning image, etc., and each sprite , determine various parameters necessary for drawing, such as the display coordinate position, magnification ratio, and rotation angle.

Next, the value of the clock counter 233h is decremented by 1 (S7207), and it is determined whether or not the value of the clock counter 233h after the subtraction is 0 or less (S7208). Then, if the value of the clock counter 233h is 1 or more (S7208: No), the display setting process is terminated and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, if the value of the clock counter 233h is 0 or less (S7208: Yes), it means that the effect time corresponding to the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d has elapsed. At this time, if the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, it is time to end the variable display and perform the stop display, so it is checked whether the fixed display flag is on. (S7209).

As a result, if the confirmed display flag is off (S7209: No), the confirmed display effect has not yet been performed, and it is time to perform the confirmed display effect. setting (S7210), and then, by writing Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e, the content is cleared (S7211). Then, the time data corresponding to the performance time of the fixed display data table is set in the clock counter 233h (S7212), and the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S7213). Then, after setting the confirmation display flag indicating that the confirmation display effect is being performed in the ON state to ON (S7214), the contents of the stop symbol discrimination flag are copied as they are to the previous stop symbol discrimination flag provided in the work RAM 233. (S7215), returns to V interrupt processing.

Thus, when the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, etc., the fixed display effect of the stop symbol in the variable effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in accordance with the end of the effect. You can set the drawing contents like this. In addition, only by changing the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d to the fixed display data table, the effect displayed on the third pattern display device 81 can be easily changed to the fixed display effect. In addition, compared to the conventional case of changing the display contents by activating another program, the program does not become complicated and bloated, and therefore the MPU 231 is not overloaded. A wide variety of effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 regardless of the processing capability of the display control device 114 .

It should be noted that the last stop symbol determination flag set by the process of S7215 is used to specify the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the next variation effect. That is, as described above, the display of the third symbol in the variable effect changes according to the stop symbol of the variable effect performed immediately before, and in the variable display data table, the variation based on the data table Until a predetermined time elapses after the start, the symbol offset information from the stop symbol of the variable effect performed one before is described. In the task processing (S6304), until a predetermined time has passed since the start of the variation, from the last stop design determination flag set by S7215, the stop design of the fluctuation production performed one before is specified, and the The third symbol to be actually displayed is specified by adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the specified stop symbol. As a result, the variable performance is started from the stop symbol in the previous variable performance.

On the other hand, in the processing of S7209, if the fixed display flag is on (S7209: Yes), it is determined whether or not the demonstration display flag is on (S7216). Then, if the demonstration display flag is off (S7216: No), it means that the value of the clock counter 233h has become 0 or less with the end of the fixed display effect. After that, a process for displaying a demonstration effect on the third symbol display device 81 is performed.

First, the demonstration display data table is obtained and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S7217), and the contents thereof are cleared by writing Null data in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S7218). Then, the time data corresponding to the rendering time of the demonstration display data table is set in the clock counter 233h (S7219). Then, the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S7220), the demonstration display flag indicating that the demonstration is being performed in the ON state is set to ON (S7221), this process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process.

As a result, when the display variation pattern command indicating the start of the next variation effect is not received after the fixed display effect is completed, the demonstration effect is automatically displayed on the third pattern display device 81.例文帳に追加, you can set its drawing contents.

In the process of S7216, if the demonstration display flag is ON (S7216: Yes), it means that the demonstration effect is performed after the fixed display effect is finished, and that demonstration effect is finished, so the display setting process is finished as it is. and return to V interrupt processing. In this case, various settings are made so that the demonstration effect is started again by the pointer updating process executed in the next V interrupt process. The demonstration effect can be repeatedly displayed on the third symbol display device 81 until a new display variation pattern command is received.

The simple display setting process (S6309) executed when the simple image display flag 233c is ON in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 525(b)) also performs the same process as the display setting process. However, in the simple display setting process, one of the power-on variable images corresponding to the stop pattern set based on the stop type command for display is displayed for a predetermined time after the effect time of the power-on variable image ends. A process of setting a display data table specifying that the image is to be displayed still in the display data table buffer 233d is performed.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 535 and 536, the details of the transfer setting process (S6305), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. First, FIG. 535(a) is a flow chart showing this transfer setting process.

In this transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is ON (S7501). If the simple image display flag 233c is on (S7501: Yes), all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, so the resident image transfer setting is made. Processing is executed (S7502), the transfer setting processing is terminated, and the processing returns to the V interrupt processing. As a result, a transfer instruction is set for the image controller 237 to transfer the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 . Details of the resident image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 535(b).

On the other hand, if the simple image display flag 233c is not turned on as a result of the processing of S7501, that is, if it is turned off (S7501: No), all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video data. It has been transferred to the RAM 235 . In this case, the normal image transfer setting process is executed (S7503), the transfer setting process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. As a result, the transfer instruction is set so that subsequent transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236 . Details of the normal image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, resident image transfer setting processing (S7502), which is part of the transfer setting processing (S6305) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described with reference to FIG. 535(b). FIG. 535(b) is a flow chart showing this resident image transfer setting process (S7502).

In this resident image transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not an instruction to transfer untransferred image data has been given to the image controller 237 (S7601). ), and further determines whether or not the image data transfer processing performed by the image controller 237 based on the transfer instruction has ended (S7602). In the processing of S7602, after instructing the image controller 237 to transfer the image data, if a transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer processing is received from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer processing has ended. . If it is determined by the processing in S7602 that the transfer processing has not ended (S7602: No), the image transfer processing is continuously performed in the image controller 237, so this resident image transfer setting processing is executed. finish. On the other hand, if it is determined that the transfer process has ended (S7602: Yes), the process proceeds to S7603. Also, as a result of the processing of S7601, even if a transfer instruction for untransferred image data has not been transmitted to the image controller 237 (S7601: No), the process proceeds to S7603.

In the process of S7603, it is determined whether or not all resident target image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 have been transferred (S7603). A transfer instruction is set for the image controller 237 so as to transfer the resident target image data to be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 (S7604), and this processing ends.

As a result, the transfer data information about the untransferred resident target image data is included in the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing process, and the image controller 237 transfers the transfer data described in the drawing list. Based on the data information, the resident target image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 . The transfer data information includes the head address and the end address of the character ROM 234 in which the resident target image data is stored, the transfer destination information (in this case, the resident video RAM 235), and the transfer destination (where the data is transferred). The first address of the area provided in the resident video RAM 235 where the resident target image data is to be stored is included. The image controller 237 executes image transfer processing based on this transfer data information, reads the image data specified in the transfer processing from the character ROM 234, temporarily stores it in the buffer RAM 237a, and then stores it in the buffer RAM 237a while the resident video RAM 235 is not in use. , it is transferred to the specified address of the resident video RAM 235 . Then, when the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231 .

As a result of the process of S7603, if all the resident target image data have been transferred (S7603: Yes), the simple image display flag 233c is set to OFF (S7605), and this process ends. As a result, in the V interrupt processing (see FIG. 525(b)), the command is executed instead of the simple command determination processing (see S6308 in FIG. Since the judgment processing (see FIGS. 526 to 531) and the display setting processing (see FIGS. 532 to 534) are executed, normal image drawing is set, and the third symbol display device 81 displays A normal image is displayed. Further, subsequent transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236 by the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 536) (see S7501: No in FIG. 535(a)).

By executing this resident image transfer setting process, the MPU 231 transfers all resident images to be resident in the resident video RAM 235, excluding the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image that have already been transferred in the main process. The target image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 . Then, the MPU 231 controls the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 to be held without overwriting while the power is turned on. As a result, the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer setting process will be resident in the resident video RAM 235 while the power is turned on.

Therefore, after all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the display controller 114 uses the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235 while the image controller 237 , the image drawing process can be performed. As a result, if the image data used for drawing processing is resident in the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessary to read out the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a whose read speed is slow when drawing the image. Therefore, the time required for reading the data can be omitted, and the image can be drawn immediately and displayed on the third pattern display device 81 .

In particular, the resident video RAM 235 stores image data of frequently displayed images such as rear images, third designs, character designs, and error messages, as well as main controller 110, sound lamp controller 113, and display controller 114. Since the image data of the image to be displayed is immediately resident after the display is determined by such as, even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND type flash memory 234a, various operations performed by the player at any timing can be prevented. , high responsiveness can be maintained until the third pattern display device 81 displays some kind of image.

Next, with reference to FIG. 536, the normal image transfer setting process (S7503), which is one process of the transfer setting process (S6305) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. FIG. 536 is a flow chart showing this normal image transfer setting process (S7503).

In this normal image transfer setting process, first, from the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update process (S7205) of the previously executed display setting process (S6303) is used. Information described in the indicated address is acquired (S7701). Then, it is determined whether or not the acquired information is transfer data information (S7702). , and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are extracted and stored in the transfer data buffer provided in the work RAM 233 ( S7703), furthermore, a transfer start flag, which is provided in the work RAM 233 and indicates that there is image data whose transfer is to be started in the ON state, is set to ON (S7704), and the process proceeds to S7705.

In addition, in the process of S7702, if the acquired information is not the transfer data information but Null data (S7702: No), the process of S7703 and S7704 is skipped and the process proceeds to S7705. In the process of S7705, it is determined whether or not a new image data transfer instruction has been set for the image controller 237 after the previous image data transfer is completed (S7705), and the transfer instruction is set. If so (S7705: Yes), it is further determined whether or not the image data transfer performed by the image controller 237 based on the transfer instruction has ended (S7706).

In the process of S7706, after setting an image data transfer instruction to the image controller 237, if a transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process has ended. . If it is determined by the process of S7706 that the transfer process has not ended (S7706: No), the image transfer process continues in the image controller 237, so this normal image transfer setting process is executed. finish. On the other hand, if it is determined that the transfer process has ended (S7706: Yes), the process proceeds to S7707. Also, as a result of the process of S7705, even if the image data transfer instruction is not set for the image controller 237 after the previous transfer process is completed (S7705: No), the process proceeds to S7707.

In the process of S7707, it is determined whether or not the transfer start flag is on (S7707). If the transfer start flag is on (S7707: Yes), image data to be transferred exists, so is turned off (S7708), the image data of the sprite indicated by the various information stored in the transfer data buffer by the processing of S7703 is set as the image data to be transferred, and then the processing proceeds to S7713. On the other hand, if the transfer start flag is not on, but off (S7707: No), then it is determined whether or not the back image change flag 233w is on (S7709). Then, if the back image change flag 233w is not on but off (S7709: No), there is no image data to start transferring, so the normal image transfer setting process ends.

On the other hand, if the back image change flag 233w is on (S7709: Yes), it means that the back image has been changed. Of the back image determination flags 233x, the image data of the back image corresponding to the back image determination flag 233x in the ON state is specified, and the image data is set as the transfer target image data (S7711). Furthermore, the head address (storage source head address) and the end address (storage source end address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data of the back image corresponding to the back image determination flag 233x in the ON state is stored, and the transfer destination ( The start address of the normal video RAM 236) is acquired (S7712), and the process proceeds to S7713.

In the process of S7713, it is determined whether or not the image data to be transferred has already been stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S7713). The determination in the process of S7713 is performed by referring to the stored image data determination flag 233i. That is, the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is read from the stored image data discrimination flag 233i, and if the storage state is "on", the image data of the sprite to be transferred is normal video If it is determined that the data is stored in the RAM 236 and the storage state is "OFF", it is determined that the image data of the sprite to be transferred is not stored in the normal video RAM 236. FIG.

If the image data to be transferred is stored in the normal video RAM 236 as a result of the processing of S7713 (S7713: Yes), there is no need to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. , the normal image transfer setting process ends. As a result, it is possible to prevent unnecessary transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, thereby reducing the processing load on each unit of the display control device 114 and the traffic on the bus line 240. can be planned.

On the other hand, if the image data to be transferred is not stored in the normal video RAM 236 as a result of the process of S7713 (S7713: No), a transfer instruction for the image data to be transferred is set (S7714). As a result, the transfer data information of the transfer target image data is included in the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing process, and the image controller 237 receives the transfer data information described in the drawing list. Based on this, the image data of the image to be transferred can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 . The transfer data information includes the head address and the end address of the character ROM 234 storing the image data of the image to be transferred, the transfer destination information (in this case, the normal video RAM 236), and the transfer destination (here, the transfer destination). The start address of the sub-area provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 in which the image data of the image to be transferred is to be stored. The image controller 237 executes image transfer processing based on this transfer data information, reads the image data specified in the transfer processing from the character ROM 234, and specifies the specified video RAM (here, the normal video RAM 236). forward to the specified address. Then, when the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231 .

After the process of S7714, the stored image data determination flag 233i is updated (S7715), and this normal transfer setting process is terminated. The stored image data determination flag 233i is updated by, as described above, setting the storage state corresponding to the sprite that has become the image data to be transferred to "ON", and by substituting the same image storage area 236a as the one sprite. This is done by setting the storage state corresponding to other sprites that are to be stored in the area to "off".

By executing the normal image transfer processing in this way, the processing corresponding to the display stop type command is executed in the previously executed command determination processing. When the displayed stop type information is determined to be a jackpot stop type, the image data used in the fanfare effect can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. Further, when the back image is changed based on the reception of the back image change command in the previously executed command determination processing, the image data used for the back image is stored in the back image of the resident video RAM 235 . Image data not stored in the image area 235c can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 without delay.

In addition, in this embodiment, the display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d in response to a command (for example, display variation pattern command) or the like transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. , a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. By executing the normal image transfer setting process, the MPU 231 sends data to the image controller 237 in accordance with the transfer data information described in the area indicated by the pointer 233f of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Since the transfer instruction of the image data to be transferred is set, the sprite image data used in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d can be reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing. can be done.

Here, the transfer data table stores the image data to be transferred so that the image data corresponding to the given sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a before the drawing of the given sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information is specified for a predetermined address, the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a in accordance with the transfer data information specified in this transfer data table, whereby the predetermined address is obtained according to the display data table. image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 required for drawing the sprite can be stored in the image storage area 236a without fail.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the image necessary for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance and transferred to the normal video RAM 236 without delay, so that the image can be displayed. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. - 特許庁Also, only the image data temporarily resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 by the description of the transfer data table.

The transfer data table defines transfer data information so that image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to a sprite. As a result, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the processing related to the transfer can be easily performed. By controlling the transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 on a sprite-by-sprite basis, the transfer of image data can be controlled in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in the load on transfer.

Next, with reference to FIG. 537, details of the drawing process (S6306), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. FIG. 537 is a flow chart showing this rendering process.

In the drawing process, the types of various sprites that make up one frame determined in task processing (S6304) and the parameters necessary for drawing each sprite (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucency value, α blending information , color information, filter designation information) and the transfer instruction set by the transfer setting process (S6305), a drawing list (FIG. 486) is generated (S7801). That is, in the processing of S7801, the type and address of the storage RAM in which the image data of the sprite is stored are specified for each sprite from the types of various sprites forming one frame determined in the task processing (S6304). Then, parameters necessary for the sprite determined by task processing are associated with the specified storage RAM type and address. Then, each sprite is rearranged in order from the sprite that should be placed on the backmost side to the sprite that should be placed on the front side in the image for one frame. As drawing information (detailed information), a drawing list is generated by describing the storage RAM type and address in which sprite image data is stored and the parameters necessary for drawing the sprite. If a transfer instruction is set by the transfer setting process (S6305), the top address (storage source top address) of the character ROM 234 where the image data to be transferred is stored as the transfer data information is displayed at the end of the drawing list. , the final address (storage source final address), and the top address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236).

As described above, the area of the resident video RAM 235 in which the image data of the sprite is stored or the subarea of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed for each sprite. , according to the sprite type, the storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately specified, and such information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

When the drawing list is generated, the generated drawing list and the drawing target buffer information specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233j are transmitted to the image controller (S7802). Here, when the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 0, the drawing target buffer flag 233j includes information instructing to expand the image drawn in the first frame buffer 236b as the drawing target buffer information. includes information instructing to develop the image drawn in the second frame buffer 236c as drawing target buffer information.

Based on the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 draws the image in order from the sprite described at the head of the drawing list, and develops it by overwriting in the frame buffer indicated by the drawing object buffer information. As a result, in the one-frame image generated by the drawing list, the first-drawn sprite can be arranged on the rearmost side, and the last-drawn sprite can be arranged on the frontmost side.

When transfer data information is included in the drawing list, the transfer data information is used to determine the start address (storage source start address) and end address (storage source end address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data to be transferred is stored. ), and the head address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236), and the image data stored from the head address of the storage source to the end address of the storage source are sequentially read from the character ROM 234 and temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a. After that, the image data stored in the buffer RAM 237a are sequentially transferred to the area indicated by the transfer destination start address of the normal video RAM 236, when the normal video RAM 236 is in an unused state. The image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 is used based on the drawing list transmitted from the MPU 231 after that, and the image is drawn according to the drawing list.

The image controller 237 reads the image information of the previously developed image from a frame buffer different from the frame buffer designated by the drawing object buffer information, and sends the image information along with the drive signal to the third pattern display device 81. Send to As a result, the image developed in the frame buffer can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 . Further, while expanding the image drawn in one of the frame buffers, the image drawn from one of the frame buffers can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and drawing processing and display processing are simultaneously processed in parallel. be able to.

In the rendering process, after the process of S7802, the rendering target buffer flag 233j is updated (S7803). Then, the drawing process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. The rendering target buffer flag 233j is updated by inverting its value, that is, by setting the value to "1" if it was "0" and to "0" if it was "1". done. As a result, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c each time the drawing list is transmitted.

Here, the transmission of the drawing list is executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing processing and display processing of one frame of image are completed. This is performed each time the drawing process of the load process (see FIG. 525(b)) is performed. As a result, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. is executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for developing the image for one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing processing for the image for one frame is completed. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information for the first half is read. Therefore, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read out and displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. .

After the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for developing the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. be done. Therefore, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read out and displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. . After that, the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame are set to either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c every 20 milliseconds. By specifying these alternately, it is possible to perform display processing of an image for one frame continuously in units of 20 milliseconds while drawing processing for an image for one frame is being performed.

<28th Embodiment>
Next, the twenty-eighth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 538 to 547. FIG. The pachinko machine 10 according to the present twenty-eighth embodiment differs from the above-described twenty-seventh embodiment in that when the prefetching effect is executed as the effect during the jackpot game that is executed during the jackpot game, the prefetching effect period and the SP time The difference is that the content of the effect that is executed is different based on the degree of overlap with the period, and the rest is the same. Note that detailed descriptions of the same contents as those of the twenty-seventh embodiment described above will be omitted.

Here, in the twenty-seventh embodiment described above, when setting the prohibition period of the look-ahead effect that is executed as part of the special figure fluctuation effect, the execution period of the look-ahead effect that can be executed is calculated, and the calculation result and SP When the time period overlaps, execution of the look-ahead effect is prohibited. On the other hand, in the twenty-eighth embodiment, the prohibition period is also set for the look-ahead effect executed during the jackpot game. As a result, it is possible to prevent the look-ahead effect executed during the jackpot game from overlapping with the SP time period and the execution of the effect difficult for the player to understand.

Furthermore, in the twenty-eighth embodiment, when the look-ahead performance period and the SP time period overlap, by varying the performance mode of the look-ahead performance, it is possible to suppress the execution of performances that are difficult for the player to understand. It is configured as follows.

<Regarding production content in the 28th embodiment>
First, with reference to FIGS. 538 to 540, the content of characteristic effects among various effects executed by the pachinko machine 10 in the twenty-eighth embodiment will be described. FIG. 538(a) is a diagram showing an example of the display screen when a lucky effect, which is one of the privilege effects executed during the jackpot game, is started. As shown in FIG. 538(a), in this embodiment, when the first round game (round game of the first round) of the jackpot game is started, the characters "start of lucky effect lottery" are displayed. This lucky effect is a privilege effect executed during the jackpot game, and is a effect for informing the player that there is a special-pending reservation (hit-holding) for winning the jackpot among the acquired special-pending reserves. This is an effect for informing the player whether or not the (holding consecutive effect) will be executed.

Further, although the detailed explanation will be given later, even if the player wins the lucky effect lottery, depending on the game situation (set situation of the SP time period) after the jackpot game ends, the holding continuous effect may not be executed. In such a case, an effect mode indicating that an effect (alternative effect) other than the holding consecutive effect is executed is set as the effect mode of the lucky effect.

FIG. 538(b) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen displayed when an effect mode for notifying a player that a holding consecutive effect will be executed is set as the effect mode of the lucky effect. . As shown in FIG. 538(b), when the holding consecutive effect is executed, an effect is executed in which the character 810 raises a placard 1811 with the characters "holding continuous". As a result, it is possible to inform the player in an easy-to-understand manner that the big win will be won again after the big win game is over.

In the diagram shown in FIG. 538(b), the lucky effect is started during the round game period of the first round, and the effect result of the lucky effect is displayed during the round game period. , without being limited to this, the lucky performance may be started at any timing during the jackpot game, or the result of the lucky performance may be displayed in a round different from the round in which the lucky performance is started. good. Furthermore, in this case, the round in which the lucky effect is likely to start may be configured to vary depending on the set value, or may be configured to vary based on the effect result of the lucky effect.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to make the player play the game while anticipating at what timing the lucky effect will be executed. In addition, it may be constructed so as to be able to execute an effect during a jackpot game in which the lucky effect is not executed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 539(a), the effect contents of the holding continuous effect will be described. In this embodiment, the holding consecutive production is started from the ending period of the big winning game, and the holding consecutive production is executed after the big winning game ends until the special symbol lottery wins the big winning. Then, as an effect mode of the holding consecutive effect, an effect mode is set in which many fish (school of fish) move from right to left on the display screen of the third pattern display device 81 .

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 539(a), the text "Push into the school of fish festival" is displayed on the end screen of the jackpot game to indicate that the holding continuous effect is to be executed, and on the right side of the display screen. An image of a school of fish waiting is displayed.

Then, on the special symbol variation screen during the school of fish festival, as shown in FIG. 777) is stopped.

In this way, by executing the holding consecutive effect during the jackpot game, it is possible to inform the player that the big winning game will be executed (holding consecutive) during the previous jackpot game period. , the player can play the game with peace of mind.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, when it is determined that the look-ahead effect period during which the pending continuous effect is executed overlaps with the SP time period, the overlapping period is less than a predetermined period (2 seconds). is configured to switch the effect mode of the holding continuous effect from the normal effect mode (see FIG. 539(b)) to the shortened effect mode.

FIG. 540 is a display screen for showing a shortened effect mode of the holding consecutive effect. As shown in FIG. 540, when the shortened effect mode is set, before the special symbol is stopped and displayed, after executing the effect that the fish school moves from right to left on the display screen, An effect is executed in which the third symbol is temporarily stopped in a stop display mode indicating that the jackpot is won. In other words, if the timing at which the SP time period is set and the holding continuous production period overlap slightly, the timing that shows the production result of the holding continuous production is before the timing at which the SP time period is set (2 seconds before). Thereby, it is possible to easily execute the holding consecutive effect without overlapping with the SP time period.

<Regarding the electrical configuration in the twenty-eighth embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 541 to 543, the electrical configuration of the MPU 221 of the sound ramp control device 113 according to the twenty-eighth embodiment will be described. First, the contents of the ROM 222 of the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 541(a). FIG. 541(a) is a diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the ROM 222 of the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113. FIG.

As shown in FIG. 541(a), the twenty-eighth embodiment differs from the twenty-seventh embodiment in that a look-ahead regulation period table 222aa and an alternative effect selection table 222ab are added. , are otherwise identical. Identical contents are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed descriptions thereof are omitted.

The look-ahead regulation period table 222aa is a data table referred to when calculating the effect period of the holding continuous effect executed during the jackpot game, and a chance for execution of the holding continuous effect is established in the lottery of the lucky effect. It is referred to when calculating the performance period when it is determined that the effect has been made.

In this embodiment, as the game period of the jackpot game, the number of round games executed during the jackpot game and the maximum time (30 seconds) that can be spent in one round game are used for one jackpot game. It is configured to calculate the maximum time that can be held, and to calculate the holding continuous effect period in consideration of the maximum time. Then, it is determined whether or not the SP time period is set within the maximum time, and when it is determined that the SP time period is not set, the holding continuous effect is executed. By configuring in this way, the SP time period and the holding continuous performance period do not overlap, regardless of how the game is played during the jackpot game, making it difficult for the player to understand. It is possible to suppress the performance from being executed.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the configuration for comparing the maximum time of the jackpot game and the SP time period is used. You may comprise so that a process may be performed. In this case, when a new round game is executed in the jackpot game, the performance period of the pending continuous performance is corrected based on the number of remaining round games and the maximum time (30 seconds) that can be spent in each round game. do it. By configuring in this way, when one round game ends in less than 30 seconds, that is, before 30 seconds elapse, the round game is played by winning nine balls into the specific winning opening 65a. Since the maximum time of the jackpot game can be variably calculated corresponding to the case where the end condition of (1) is established, it is possible to facilitate the execution of the holding continuous performance.

Furthermore, in this case, at the start timing of the jackpot game, the SP time period and the suspension continuous performance period overlap, and the SP time period and the suspension continuous performance period do not overlap according to the progress of the jackpot game. may transition to In the event of such a situation, it is better to be configured to be able to execute the holding continuous performance with a privilege more advantageous to the player than when it is determined that the holding continuous performance can be executed at the start timing of the jackpot game. For example, in addition to the holding continuous effect, it is preferable to add a setting suggestion effect for suggesting a set value as a privilege. Further, it is preferable to provide a condition notification means for notifying a player playing a jackpot game of a game condition for making a transition from a state in which the SP time period and the holding continuous effect period overlap to a state in which they do not overlap. As a result, it is possible to motivate the player to play the game in order to acquire various benefits and satisfy the game conditions notified by the condition notification means.

In the present embodiment, the pachinko machine 10 is configured with the technical idea of eliminating the overlapping relationship with the SP time period by accelerating the holding continuous effect period. By delaying the period, it may be configured based on the technical idea of executing the holding continuous performance after the SP time period ends, for example, when the holding continuous performance is executed from the specific timing (ending period) of the jackpot game. In the second game, when the first game for advancing the jackpot game being executed earlier is executed, the execution timing of the holding continuous performance overlaps with the SP time period, and the jackpot game is advanced later than the first game. is executed, when it is determined that the execution timing of the holding continuous effect does not overlap with the SP time period, a guidance mode is displayed to prompt the player to play the second game (for example, a game in which balls are not fired). It may be configured to

Here, with reference to FIG. 542, the contents of the prefetch regulation period table 222aa will be described. FIG. 542 is a diagram showing the contents defined in the prefetch regulation period table 222aa. As shown in FIG. 542, the look-ahead regulation period table 222aa contains the regulation target period (seconds ) are stipulated.

Specifically, when the performance target reservation is "1", that is, when the prefetching performance (holding continuous performance) indicating that the jackpot is won in the first special symbol lottery executed after the jackpot game ends is executed. , "440 seconds", which is the sum of the maximum period in one jackpot game and the maximum period in one special symbol variation, is defined as the regulated period. If the SP time period is not set within the regulated period, even if the look-ahead performance is executed, the SP time period is not set during the look-ahead performance period, which makes it easy for the player to understand. performance can be provided.

Below, if the performance target suspension is "2" and the number of jackpots within the period is "1", the regulation target period is "880 seconds", the performance target suspension is "3" and the number of jackpots within the period is "1". , the regulated period is ``900 seconds'', and if the number of jackpots within the period is ``2'', the regulated period is ``1250 seconds'', and the performance target suspension is ``4'' and the jackpot within the period When the number is "1", "920 seconds" is defined as the regulated period, and when the number of jackpots within the period is "2", "1270 seconds" is defined as the regulated period and the number of jackpots within the period is In the case of "3", "1620 seconds" is defined as the regulated period.

In addition, when the performance object suspension is "5" and the number of jackpots within the period is "1", the period subject to regulation is "940 seconds", and when the number of jackpots within the period is "2", the period subject to regulation is "1290 seconds" is defined, and if the number of jackpots within the period is "3", "1640 seconds" is defined as the regulated period, and if the number of jackpots within the period is "4", the regulated period is "1990 seconds" is defined. When the performance object suspension is "6" and the number of jackpots within the period is "1", the period subject to regulation is "960 seconds", and when the number of jackpots within the period is "2", the period subject to regulation is "1310". second” is defined, and when the number of jackpots within the period is “3”, “1660 seconds” is defined as the regulated period, and when the number of jackpots within the period is “4”, the regulated period is “2010” Seconds” is defined, and when the number of jackpots within the period is “5”, “2360 seconds” is defined as the regulated period.

When the pending effect is "7" and the number of jackpots within the period is "1", the period subject to regulation is "980 seconds", and when the number of jackpots within the period is "2", the period subject to regulation is "1330 seconds". second” is defined, and when the number of jackpots within the period is “3”, “1680 seconds” is defined as the regulated period, and when the number of jackpots within the period is “4”, the regulated period is “2030” second” is defined, and when the number of jackpots within the period is “5”, “2380 seconds” is defined as the regulated period, and when the number of jackpots within the period is “6”, the regulated period is “2730” second” is defined. Then, when the performance object suspension is "8" and the number of jackpots within the period is "1", the period subject to regulation is "1000 seconds", and when the number of jackpots within the period is "2", the period subject to regulation is "1350 seconds" is defined, and if the number of jackpots within the period is "3", "1700 seconds" is defined as the regulated period, and if the number of jackpots within the period is "4", the regulated period is "2050 seconds" is defined, if the number of jackpots within the period is "5", "2400 seconds" is defined as the regulated period, and if the number of jackpots within the period is "6", the regulated period "2750 seconds" is defined, and when the number of jackpots within the period is "7", "3000 seconds" is defined as the regulated period.

By configuring in this way, in the case where it is configured to be able to execute the holding consecutive production for a plurality of big winning games as a look-ahead production (holding consecutive production) executed during the jackpot game, until the end of the holding consecutive production. By determining in advance whether or not the SP time period is set, it is possible to provide the player with the holding continuous effect in an easy-to-understand manner.

The alternative performance selection table 222ab shows the performance mode of the lucky performance and the suspension continuous performance when it is determined that the execution opportunity of the holding continuous performance has been established in the lucky performance and the execution of the holding continuous performance is prohibited. It is a data table that is referred to when selecting a mode of alternative performance to be executed instead of .

Here, with reference to FIG. 543, detailed description of the alternative effect selection table 222ab will be given. FIG. 543 is a diagram showing the contents defined in the alternative effect selection table 222ab. As shown in FIG. 543, in the alternative effect selection table 222ab, the number of jackpot winnings (the number of jackpots within the period) that can occur within the target period of the look-ahead effect (lucky effect), the look-ahead effect period, and the SP time period. Different rendering modes are defined in correspondence with the length of the overlapping period and the acquired value of the rendering counter 223g. It should be noted that the various effect modes defined in the alternative effect selection table 222ab are executable effect modes, and the effect mode determined when the conditions for executing the determined effect mode are satisfied is used as the alternate effect. configured to run.

More specifically, when the number of jackpots (the number of jackpots within a period) is "1 to 3" and the overlap period is "2 to 10 seconds", the range of the obtained effect counter 223g is "0 to 69". "Overlapping mode" is specified in the range of "70 to 89", "Suggestion of setting" is specified in the range of "90 to 99", "No production" is specified in the range of "90 to 99", and the overlap period is "10 to 30 seconds" , the range of the obtained effect counter 223g is "suggestion of setting" in the range of "0 to 69", "no effect" in the range of "70 to 89", and "overlapping mode" in the range of "90 to 99". is defined, and the overlap period is "30 seconds or more", the range of the obtained effect counter 223g is "no effect" in the range of "0 to 89", and "forced hold continuous" in the range of "90 to 99". ” is stipulated.

In addition, when the number of jackpots (the number of jackpots within the period) is “4~” and the overlap period is “2 to 10 seconds”, the range of the acquired effect counter 223g is “0 to 69”. Mode" defines "suggestion of setting" in the range of "70 to 89", "forced holding group" in the range of "90 to 99", and the overlap period is "10 ~", the acquired production counter In the range of 223g, the range of "0 to 89" is defined as "forced hold group", and the range of "90 to 99" is defined as "no effect".

It should be noted that, as described above, when the overlap period is within 2 seconds, the shortened hold continuous effect described with reference to FIG. 540 is executed, so it is not specified in the alternative effect selection table 222ab.

Here, when "suggest setting" is selected as the effect mode of the alternative effect, the set value is set using the period until the SP time period is set instead of executing the holding continuous effect. is determined, and when the "overlapping mode" is selected, a lucky effect (prefetch effect) and , and SP time effects (period effects) are divided, and an effect mode is determined in which both effects are performed in an overlapping manner.

Further, when the "forced holding series" is selected, even if the SP time period is set, there is a production mode for forcibly executing the holding series production as a lucky production without executing the SP time production. It is determined. That is, when the "forced holding series" is selected, the SP time production is not executed in the state where the SP time production is being executed in the surrounding pachinko machines 10, and the holding series production is continuously executed. Therefore, it is possible to execute an effect that gives the player a great sense of discomfort. It should be noted that when "no effect" is selected, the alternative effect is not executed.

As described above, the alternative effect selection table 222ab shows the number of jackpot wins (the number of jackpots within the period) that can occur during the target period of the look-ahead effect (lucky effect), the look-ahead effect period, and the overlap of the SP time period. A plurality of performance modes can be selected in correspondence with the length of the period and the acquired value of the performance counter 223g. It is configured so that the effect mode of "continuation" is easily selected. Therefore, when the "forced holding series" is selected and the SP time production is not executed in the state where the SP time production is being executed in the surrounding pachinko machines 10, and the holding series production is continuously executed, It is possible to inform the player that he/she can win many jackpots.

In addition, the selection ratio of other presentation modes is varied according to the length of the overlap period between the look-ahead presentation period and the SP time period. Therefore, it is possible to change the effect mode to be selected (easily selected) as the alternative effect according to the timing at which the look-ahead effect is executed, so that the effect of the effect can be enhanced. In addition, the shorter the overlapping period between the look-ahead production period and the SP time period, the easier it is to select the "overlapping mode" as an alternative production, so by executing each production in the overlapping mode, the production effect is enhanced. Also, since it is possible to make it difficult for each performance to be executed in an overlapping mode for a long time, it is possible to provide a player with an easily understandable performance.

<Regarding control processing of the audio ramp control device 113 in the twenty-eighth embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 544 to 547, the contents of control processing executed by the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 in the twenty-eighth embodiment will be described. In this embodiment, in place of the jackpot-related processing (see S2212 in FIG. 511), the jackpot-related processing 2 (see S2252 in FIG. 544) is replaced with the round effect setting processing (S2606 in FIG. (see S2651 in FIG. 545) instead of executing the round effect setting process 2 (see S2651 in FIG. 545), and the rest is the same. Identical contents are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed descriptions thereof are omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 544, the processing contents of the jackpot related processing 2 (S2252) will be described. FIG. 544 is a flowchart for showing the processing content of the jackpot related processing 2 (S2252). This jackpot-related process 2 (S2252) is different from the jackpot-related process (see S2212 in FIG. 511) of the twenty-seventh embodiment described above. The difference is that a part of is changed from the content of the processing executed in the case of The same processing contents are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed descriptions thereof are omitted.

When the jackpot related process 2 (S2252) is executed, the same S2603 to S2605 processes as the jackpot related process (see S2212 in FIG. 511) are executed. S2651) is executed, and after that, the process of S2607, which is the same as the above-described jackpot related process (see S2212 in FIG. 511), is executed, and then this process ends. Details of the round effect setting process 2 executed in the process of S2651 will be described later with reference to FIG.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S2604 that the round number command has not been received (S2604: No), then it is determined whether an ending command has been received (S2608), and if it is determined that an ending command has been received (S2608: Yes), it is determined whether the holding continuous effect execution flag 223aa is set to ON, that is, whether the holding continuous effect is executed as the end screen effect executed during the ending period (S2652), When it is determined that the continuous effect execution flag 223aa is set to ON (S2652: Yes), the background mode for the continuous effect (background mode for the school of fish festival) is stored in the background mode storage area 223v (S2653). , the ending command for display is set (S2654), the value of the round number counter 223x is set to 0 (S2655), and this processing is terminated.

Next, with reference to FIG. 545, the processing contents of the round effect setting process 2 (S2651) will be described. FIG. 545 is a flowchart for showing the processing contents of the round effect setting process 2 (S2651). In this round effect setting process 2 (S2651), in contrast to the above-described round effect setting process (see S2606 in FIG. 512), when the round game of the first round is started, the execution condition for the holding continuous effect is met. The difference is that a process for determining whether or not is added, and the rest is the same. The same reference numerals are assigned to the same contents, and detailed description thereof is omitted.

When the round effect setting process 2 (S2651) is executed, first, based on the value of the round number counter 223x, it is determined whether or not the round to be executed this time is the first round (S2751). If so (S2751: No), the same processing of S2701 to S2707 as the round effect setting processing of the twenty-seventh embodiment (see S2606 in FIG. 512) is executed, and this processing ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S2751, if it is determined that the current round is the first round (S2751: Yes), the holding continuous effect setting process is executed (S2752). is determined (S2753). In the process of S2753, when it is determined that the execution of the holding continuous effect is determined (S2753: Yes), the holding continuous effect execution flag 223aa is set to ON (S2754), and the process of S2701 described above is performed.

Also, in the process of S2753, when it is determined that execution of the holding continuous effect is not determined (S2753: No), the process of S2754 is skipped and the process proceeds to the process of S2701.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the process for determining the execution of the holding continuous effect (holding continuous effect setting process) is configured to be executable in the first round, but it is not limited to this, and any arbitrary It may be configured to be executed in the number of rounds, for example, the holding continuous effect is performed at the execution timing of the number of rounds (8th round) in which only the jackpot game in which a specific jackpot type (jackpot A1, B1) is set is executed. It may be configured to execute setting processing. By configuring in this way, it is possible to determine whether or not to execute the holding continuous effect setting process according to the jackpot type, so when the jackpot game with a short number of rounds is executed, the holding continuous effect is executed. Even if the game is not played, the game can be played after the end of the jackpot game while making the reserved group expect.

In addition, during one jackpot game, the holding continuous effect setting process can be executed a plurality of times (for example, the 1st round and the 8th round), and the last executed holding continuous effect setting process is determined. It may be configured such that the mode of presentation is finally determined based on the content. In this case, even when the special figure reservation newly obtained during the jackpot game contains information indicating the winning of the jackpot, the reservation continuous performance can be executed and the performance effect can be enhanced.

Next, with reference to FIG. 546, the contents of the holding continuous effect setting process (S2752) will be described. FIG. 546 is a flowchart for showing the processing contents of the holding continuous effect setting process (S2752). In this holding continuous effect setting process (S2752), a process for determining whether or not the execution condition of the holding continuous effect is satisfied, and when the execution condition of the holding continuous effect is satisfied, A process for calculating the effect period and determining the effect mode of the effect to be actually executed based on the degree of overlap with the SP time period is executed.

When the pending continuous effect setting process (S2752) is executed, first, the information stored in the winning information storage area 223f is read (S3801), and the jackpot winning information included in the read information information) is associated with the storage position stored in the winning information storage area 223f (S3802). That is, in the process of S3802, whether or not the acquired special figure reservation is a winning reservation is specified in correspondence with the reservation storage order (execution order of the special symbol lottery).

When the processing of S3802 is finished, the look-ahead regulation period selection table 222aa is referred to, the execution period of the holding continuous effect is calculated (S3803), and then the timing stored in the timing information storage area (time information storage area) 223r. Based on the information, the SP period (SP time period) during which the SP time effect is executed is specified (S3804).

Next, it is determined whether the effect period of the holding continuous effect calculated in the process of S3803 and the SP period specified in the process of S3804 overlap (S3805), and if it is determined not to overlap (S3805: No), Execution of the holding consecutive effect is determined (S3806), and this process is terminated. That is, even if the suspension continuous effect is executed using the calculated effect period of the continuous continuous effect, if it is determined that the SP time effect is not executed during the effect period of the continuous continuous effect, the holding continuous effect is determined. Execute the performance as it is.

On the other hand, in the process of S3805, if it is determined that there is an overlap (S3805: Yes), an alternative effect setting process for setting an alternative effect to be executed instead of the holding continuous effect is executed (S3807), and this process ends. .

Here, with reference to FIG. 547, the contents of the alternative effect setting process (S3807) will be described. FIG. 547 is a flow chart for showing the contents of the alternative effect setting process (S3807). In this alternative effect setting process (S3807), the number of jackpot winnings (the number of jackpots within the period) that can occur within the target period of the look-ahead effect (lucky effect), the length of the overlap period between the look-ahead effect period and the SP time period, and , a process for determining an alternative effect of a different effect mode is executed in correspondence with the value of the effect counter 223g that has been acquired.

When the alternative effect setting process (S3807) is executed, first, the overlap situation (overlapping period) between the effect period of the pending continuous effect and the SP period (SP time period) is determined (S3901), and based on the determination result of S3901 to determine whether the overlapping period is within 2 seconds (S3902). In the process of S3902, if it is determined that the time is within 2 seconds (S3902: Yes), it is determined whether the holding continuous effect is executed before the SP time effect (S3903), When it is determined that the effect will be executed first (S3903: Yes), execution of the shortened hold continuous effect is determined (S3904), and this processing is terminated.

Here, when the shortened holding continuous effect is executed, as shown in FIG. 540, the shortened effect mode in which the effect result of the holding continuous effect is displayed is determined before the SP time period is set. In this way, when the overlapping period is short, by executing the process of shortening one of the effects periods, a plurality of effects are executed in an overlapping manner, and effects that are difficult for the player to understand are executed. can be suppressed.

On the other hand, in the process of S3902, when it is determined that the overlapping period is two seconds or more (S3902: No), the alternative effect selection table 222ab is referred to, and the effect mode of the alternative effect is determined (S3905). Execution of various effects corresponding to the selected effect mode is determined (S3907, S3908), and this processing is terminated.

<Regarding Modified Example of the 28th Embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIG. 548, a modification using the technical concept of the twenty-eighth embodiment will be described. In the twenty-eighth embodiment described above, in the case where the look-ahead effect period and the SP time period overlap, even if each effect is executed in duplicate, the player is not confused (duplicate effect mode). The technical idea that can execute each production was described.

This technical idea may be used for the look-ahead effect in the twenty-seventh embodiment described above, that is, the look-ahead effect executed corresponding to the special symbol variation.

Specifically, when the game enters the SP time preparation period during the execution period of the "fish school festival" which is the look-ahead effect, the display screen shown in FIG. 548(a) is displayed. Then, after that, when the SP time period is set, as shown in FIG. 548(b), the effect mode of the fish school festival (fish school image) moves to the display area HR1, and the anticipation effect is executed in the display area HR1. A duplicate effect mode is set. That is, in the main display area Dm of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, by executing a period production (SP time production) that is executed in synchronization with the plurality of pachinko machines 10, the plurality of pachinko machines 10 While executing the performance with a sense of unity, the pre-reading performance is continuously executed using a partial region (display region HR1) of the main display region Dm.

In this way, by partitioning the area in which each effect is executed, even when a plurality of effects are overlapped and executed for the player, the contents of the effect are confused and the effect is difficult for the player to understand. can be suppressed from being executed.

In this modified example, the display area for the SP time effect is shown to be larger than the display area for the look-ahead effect. Alternatively, the size of the effect area (display area HR1) of the look-ahead effect may be changed according to the effect result of the look-ahead effect (whether or not the jackpot is won). It is preferable to make the performance area larger in the case of a result advantageous to the player (won an advantageous jackpot) than in the case of a disadvantageous result to the player (won an unfavorable jackpot). With this configuration, only when the SP time period and the look-ahead performance period overlap, the player can predict the performance result of the look-ahead performance based on the size of the performance area. It is possible to make the player interested in the execution timing of .

In addition, in this modification, both the SP time effect and the look-ahead effect are displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, but this is not the only option. , any effect may be configured to be displayed on the display screen of a display device (for example, a sub liquid crystal display device) other than the third symbol display device 81, or a decoration provided in the pachinko machine 10 It may be configured to execute any of the effects using the role item. In this case, since an effect can be executed in a dedicated effect mode that is set only when the SP time effect period and the look-ahead effect period overlap, each effect can be executed for the player who wants to experience various effects. A player can be interested in timing.

<29th Embodiment>
Next, the twenty-ninth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 549 to 557. FIG. In the twenty-seventh embodiment and the twenty-eighth embodiment described above, the setting suggesting effect can be executed using various effects, thereby making it difficult for the player to understand at what timing the setting suggesting effect is to be executed. It is possible to make the player interested in the various effects that are provided, and to prevent the player from quickly becoming bored with the game.

On the other hand, in the twenty-ninth embodiment, the execution condition under which the setting suggestion effect can be executed can be notified in advance to the player, and the player plays the game so that the execution condition is satisfied. This differs from the twenty-seventh and twenty-eighth embodiments described above in that a configuration is added to make it easier to execute the setting suggestion effect. Other contents are the same, and detailed description of the same contents will be omitted.

<Regarding production content in the twenty-ninth embodiment>
First, with reference to FIG. 549, the contents of characteristic effects among various effects executed by the pachinko machine 10 of the twenty-ninth embodiment will be described. In this embodiment, as in the twenty-seventh embodiment described above, in the state where the normal state is set, the first special symbol reserved memory (special figure 1 reserved) and the second special symbol reserved memory (special figure 2 reserved) and can be stored in the order of acquisition, and a maximum of 8 reserved symbols for indicating the number of reserved memories can be displayed.

Then, when a pending change effect, which is an effect for changing the display mode of the pending symbol, is executed, and the display mode of one pending symbol becomes the specific display mode, during the period during which the specific display mode is displayed, By acquiring a predetermined number (for example, 6 or more) of pending memories, it is possible to execute the setting suggesting effect using the display mode of the pending symbols.

By configuring in this way, the player can be motivated to play the game so as to execute many setting suggestion effects and acquire many reserved memories.

Furthermore, in the twenty-ninth embodiment, a variable scenario of the pending change effect can be set so as to change the pending pattern displayed in the above-described specific display mode to a different display mode. The period until the special symbol variation corresponding to the reserved symbol displayed in is executed, or the period until the specific display mode is switched to a different display mode can be set as a period in which the setting suggestion effect is likely to be executed. Configure. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand how long the period during which the setting suggesting effect is likely to be executed will continue, so that the player will be motivated to play the game immediately after the reserved pattern in the specific display mode is displayed. can be done.

In addition, as a variable scenario of pending change effect, a variable scenario can be set in which the display mode of the pending symbols displayed in the specific display mode is changed to a special display mode that is more advantageous to the player than the specific display mode. When the display mode of the reserved design is changed to the special display mode, the range of the reserved design in which the setting suggestion effect is executed is larger than when the reserved design in the specific display mode is displayed. configured to expand. By configuring in this way, when a variable effect for changing the display mode is executed with respect to the reserved symbols in the specific display mode, the special display mode is changed to a more advantageous state for the player (setting suggestion effect to draw attention to whether a state disadvantageous to the player (a state in which the setting suggesting effect is difficult to execute) is created by changing the specific display mode to a normal display mode. can be done.

Also, although detailed description is omitted, in the 29th embodiment, as in the 27th embodiment described above, the result of the special symbol lottery corresponding to the hold is advantageous to the player by using the hold change effect. It is configured to be able to suggest that it is a good result (jackpot winning). In other words, when the pending change effect is executed, it is possible to display either a display mode suggesting the result of the pending special symbol lottery or a display mode for varying the execution frequency of the setting suggestion effect. is doing. Therefore, various benefits can be given to the player depending on the performance result of the pending change performance, so that the performance effect can be enhanced.

Here, with reference to FIG. 549, the effect content of the pending change effect will be described. Figure 549 (a) is a diagram showing an example of the display screen displayed when the display mode of the pending design changes to the specific display mode by the pending change effect, and Figure 549 (b) is a specific display mode 549(c) is a diagram showing an example of the display screen displayed when eight reserved memories are acquired in a state in which the reserved symbols are displayed, and FIG. FIG. 549(d) is a diagram showing an example of the display screen displayed when the mode changes, and FIG. 549(d) is a case where the display mode of the pending design changes from the specific display mode to the special display mode due to the pending change effect. 1 is a diagram showing an example of a display screen displayed on .

As shown in FIG. 549 (a), when a reserved design in a specific display mode (displayed in a display mode with "?" in the figure) is displayed on the reserved design pedestal m4, the area of the reserved pedestal m6 to m8 That is, the area corresponding to the special figure pending number of 6 to 8 is displayed as a "special symbol display zone" as a guidance mode for guiding the player that the setting suggestion effect is executed. . Then, as a guidance mode for prompting the character J0 to play a game in which the player acquires the special figure reservation, a comment of 'accumulate the reservation while there is a question' is displayed.

During the period when this special pattern display zone is displayed, if the number of reserved special symbols becomes 6 or more, a setting suggestion effect using the display mode of the reserved pattern displayed in the area of the holding pedestal m6 to m8 is executed. be done. Specifically, by changing the color and shape of the reserved design, the reserved design is displayed in a display mode for suggesting the set value currently set. Also in this case, similarly to the twenty-seventh embodiment described above, an effect pattern (setting suggestion contents) is determined by referring to the setting suggestion effect selection table 222c, and the pending symbol is displayed in a display mode corresponding to the effect pattern. be.

As a result, when a specific display mode (display mode with ?) is displayed as the display mode of the reserved pattern, the player acquires a large amount of reserved memory and suggests setting using the display mode of the reserved pattern. It is possible to motivate the player to play the game in order to execute the performance.

Here, if you acquire a predetermined number (6 pieces) or more of the special figure reservation during the period when the specific display mode is displayed, as shown in FIG. is executed. In the diagram shown in FIG. 549(b), the display mode of production pattern A (displayed in the figure with "A" attached) with respect to the reserved pattern of the sixth reserved pedestal m6 is the seventh reserved pedestal. The display mode of production pattern B (displayed in the display mode with "B" in the figure) is displayed for m7 and the reserved pattern of the eighth reserved base.

Then, a mode in which the character J0 issues a comment "Ax1, Bx2 GET!" history display is executed. As a result, the display position of the reserved design in the specific display mode is moved (shifted) based on the execution of the special design variation, so that even when the reserved design is newly displayed in the special design display zone, the special design display zone It is possible to inform the player of the whole picture of the display mode of the reserved pattern displayed on the .

Incidentally, in the present embodiment, when the reserved symbol for which the display mode of the setting suggestion effect is set in the area of the special symbol display zone moves (shifts) outside the special symbol display zone, the display mode of the setting suggestion effect is configured to be cleared. Therefore, it is possible to display up to three display modes of reserved symbols on the display screen corresponding to the setting suggestion effect. In this way, by constructing the display mode of the reserved symbols out of the special symbol display zone so as not to correspond to the setting suggestion effect, the display mode of the setting suggestion effect displayed in the special symbol display zone can be changed. need to be remembered. Therefore, it is possible for the player who has been playing the game for a long time to easily comprehend the effect modes of many setting suggestion effects.

Also, in the state shown in FIG. 549(b), the pending change effect is executed, and the reserved pattern displayed in the specific display mode changes to the normal display mode (indicated by a black circle in the figure). Since the execution condition of the used setting suggestion effect is not established (state in which the specific display mode is not displayed), the display of the special symbol display zone is erased as shown in FIG. A mode is displayed in which the character J0 issues a comment of "end" as a comment for indicating that the period during which the suggestive effect is likely to be executed has ended.

On the other hand, when the pending change effect is executed in the state shown in FIG. As shown in d), the range of pending symbols (special symbol display zone) in which the setting suggestion effect is executed is enlarged and displayed as compared with the case where the pending symbols in the specific display mode are displayed. By configuring in this way, when a variable effect for changing the display mode is executed with respect to the reserved symbols in the specific display mode, the special display mode is changed to a more advantageous state for the player (setting suggestion effect to draw attention to whether a state disadvantageous to the player (a state in which the setting suggesting effect is difficult to execute) is created by changing the specific display mode to a normal display mode. can be done.

<Regarding the electrical configuration of the twenty-ninth embodiment>
Next, referring to FIGS. 550 and 551, the electrical configuration of the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the twenty-ninth embodiment will be described. First, the contents of the ROM 222 of the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 550(a). FIG. 550(a) is a diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the ROM 222 of the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113. FIG.

As shown in FIG. 550(a), the twenty-ninth embodiment differs from the twenty-seventh embodiment described above in that a pending change effect selection table 222ba is added, and the rest is the same. Identical contents are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed descriptions thereof are omitted.

The pending change effect selection table 222ba is a data table referred to when selecting the effect scenario of the pending change effect to be executed as one of the look-ahead effects, and is a pending change that varies the display mode of the pending pattern as the look-ahead effect. When it is determined that the effect is executed (see S2508 in FIG. 554), it is referred to in the pending change effect setting process (see S2560 in FIG. 555) that is executed.

The change pattern of the pending change effect selected with reference to this pending change effect selection table 222ba is stored in the pending change pattern storage area 112bb, and it is determined that it is the change timing of the pending pattern based on the stored pending change pattern. When it does, the display mode of the pending symbol is changed to the display mode defined in the pending change pattern.

Here, with reference to FIG. 551, the contents of the pending change effect selection table 222ba will be described in detail. FIG. 551 is a diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the pending change effect selection table 222ba. As shown in Figure 551, in the hold change effect selection table 222ba, four types of hold are made to correspond to the propriety determination result indicated by the special figure hold to be the target of the hold change effect and the value of the acquired production counter 223g. A change pattern is defined.

Specifically, if the result of determination of whether or not the object hold is a win, and the value of the acquired effect counter 223g is in the range of "0 to 59", "pattern 1" is set as the hold change pattern, and the acquired effect counter 223g In the range of "60 to 89", "pattern 2" is used as the pending change pattern, and in the range of "90 to 98" of the obtained effect counter 223g, "pattern 3" is used as the pending change pattern. , is specified.

On the other hand, in the range of "0 to 69", the value of the acquired production counter 223g is "pattern 4" as the holding change pattern, and the value of the acquired production counter 223g is In the range of "70 to 89", "Pattern 1" is defined as the pending change pattern, and in the range of the acquired effect counter 223g value of "90 to 98", "Pattern 2" is defined as the pending change pattern. ing.

Here, the contents of each hold change pattern will be explained. In "Pattern 1", the display mode changes to the first mode (specific display mode) after 2 seconds from the display of the pending pattern indicating that the target pending has been acquired, and the special symbol variation corresponding to the target pending A pending change pattern in which the first aspect is displayed continuously until executed.

"Pattern 2", after the reserved design indicating that the target reservation has been acquired is displayed, the display mode changes to the first mode (specific display mode) at the timing when the next special symbol variation is started, and the It is a pending change pattern in which the first mode is continuously displayed until the special symbol variation corresponding to the target pending is executed.

In "Pattern 3", after a reserved pattern indicating that the target reservation has been acquired is displayed, the display mode changes to the first mode (specific display mode) at the timing when the next special symbol variation is started, and 2 The display mode changes to the second mode (special display mode) at the timing when the second special symbol variation (the next special symbol variation) is started, and continues until the special symbol variation corresponding to the target hold is executed. is a pending change pattern in which the second aspect is indicated by .

In "Pattern 4", the display mode changes to the first mode (specific display mode) at the timing when the next special symbol variation is started, and the second special symbol variation (one after another special symbol variation) is started. This is a pending change pattern in which the display mode changes from the first mode (specific display mode) to the third mode (normal display mode) with timing.

In this way, by configuring the period during which the special symbol display zone is displayed to be different according to the selected pending change pattern, the player is informed about the period during which the special symbol display zone is displayed. It is possible to make it difficult to understand whether the degree continues. Therefore, immediately after the special symbol display zone is displayed, the game can be made to actively try to acquire the special symbol reservation.

<Regarding control processing in the twenty-ninth embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 552 to 557, the contents of control processing executed by the MPU 221 of the sound ramp control device 113 in the twenty-ninth embodiment will be described. In this embodiment, instead of the pending ball number command receiving process (see S2208 in FIG. 508), the pending ball number command process (see S2258 in FIG. 552) is replaced with the winning command receiving process ( 510) instead of winning command reception processing 3 (see S2260 in FIG. 554), and in place of variable display setting processing (see S2114 in FIG. 515), variable display setting processing 3 (see S2164 in FIG. 556). , The liquid crystal effect execution management process (S2110 in FIG. 506) is replaced with the liquid crystal effect execution management process 3 (see S2160 in FIG. 557). Identical contents are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed descriptions thereof are omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 552, the content of the control processing of the number-of-holds-balls command processing 3 (S2258) will be described. FIG. 552 is a flow chart showing the contents of the pending ball count command process 3 (S2258). As shown in FIG. 552, in the pending ball number command process 3 (S2258), the pending mode setting process (S2351) is added to the above-described pending ball number command receiving process (see S2208 in FIG. 508). are different, and otherwise identical. The same processing contents are assigned the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof is omitted.

Next, with reference to FIG. 553, the content of the hold mode setting process (S2351) will be described. FIG. 553 is a flowchart for showing the contents of the hold mode setting process (S2351). In this reserved mode setting process (S2351), when displaying a new reserved pattern, it is determined whether the reserved pattern to be displayed this time is within a special pattern display zone (special display zone), and display based on the determination result. A process for determining a mode (rendering mode) is executed.

When the suspension mode setting process (S2351) is executed, first, it is determined whether the special suspension effect execution flag 223ba is set to ON (S4001), and if it is determined that it is set to ON (S4001: Yes), next, the stored value, that is, the value (number of (Information indicating whether or not special symbol reservation is to be made) determines whether it corresponds to the currently set special display zone (special symbol display zone) (S4002).

In the process of S4002, when it is determined that the character is within the special display zone (S4002: Yes), the setting suggestion effect selection table 222b is referred to determine the display mode of the pending symbol as the setting suggestion effect, and the current suspension is performed. An effect pattern (effect mode) used for symbol display is determined (S4003), a display command for indicating the display mode of the reserved symbol corresponding to the determined effect mode is set (S4004), and this processing is terminated.

Next, with reference to FIG. 554, the process contents of the winning command reception process 3 (S2260) will be described. FIG. 554 is a flowchart for showing the processing contents of the winning command reception process 3 (S2260). In this winning command reception process 3 (S2260), when it is determined to execute a prefetch effect other than a variable effect (S2508: No) with respect to the above-described winning command reception process (see S2210 in FIG. 510), The difference is that the setting process (S2560 in FIG. 555) is configured to be executed, and the rest is the same. The same processing contents are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed descriptions thereof are omitted.

Next, with reference to FIG. 555, the content of the pending change effect setting process (S2560) will be described. FIG. 555 is a flowchart for showing the processing contents of the pending change effect setting process (S2560). In this pending change effect setting process (S2560), when the pending change effect is executed, a process for determining the pending change pattern (change scenario) is executed.

When the pending change effect setting process (S2560) is executed, first, a pending change pattern is determined by referring to the pending change effect selection table 222ba (S4101), and the determined pending change pattern is stored in the pending change pattern storage area 223bb. Then (S4102), it is determined whether the stored pending change pattern includes a special pending effect (a special symbol display zone is displayed) (S4103).

Then, when it is determined that the special holding effect is included (S4103: Yes), the special holding effect executing flag 223ba is set to ON (S4104), and the process is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of S4103, when it is determined that the special holding effect is not included (S4103: No), the process of S4104 is skipped and the process ends.

Next, referring to FIG. 556, the contents of the variable display setting process 3 (S2164) will be described. FIG. 556 is a flowchart for showing the processing contents of the variable display setting process 3 (S2164). This variable display setting process 3 (S2164) differs from the above-described variable display setting process (see S2114 in FIG. 515) in that a process related to a special hold effect (see FIG. 549) is added. are identical. The same processing contents are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed descriptions thereof are omitted.

When the variable display setting process 3 (S2164) is executed, first, the same processes of S3001 to S3003 as the variable display setting process (see S2114 in FIG. 515) are executed. Then, when the processing of S3003 is finished, next, it is determined whether the special holding effect execution flag 223ba is set to ON (S4201), and if it is determined that it is set to ON (S4201: Yes), It is determined whether this change is a change related to the target hold of the special hold effect (S4202), and if it is determined that it is a change related to the target hold (S4202: Yes), the special hold effect execution flag 223ba It is set to OFF (S4203), after that, the same processing of S3004 to S3013 as the variable display setting processing described above (see S2114 in FIG. 515) is executed, and this processing ends.

On the other hand, in the processing of S4201, if it is determined that the special suspension effect execution flag 223ba is not set to ON, that is, the special suspension effect is not executed (S4201: No), or in the processing of S4202, special When it is determined that the special symbol variation other than the special symbol variation corresponding to the reserved symbol to be the target of the special suspension effect is executed (S4202: No), the process of S4203 is skipped, and the same processing of S3004 to S3013 as the variable display setting processing (see S2114 in FIG. 515) is executed, and this processing ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 557, the contents of the liquid crystal effect execution management process 3 (S2160) will be described. FIG. 557 is a flowchart for showing the contents of the liquid crystal effect execution management process 3 (S2160). This liquid crystal effect execution management process 3 (S2160) is a process executed every 1 millisecond in the main process (see FIG. 506) of the sound lamp control device 113. Processing for updating is executed. For example, if a production scenario is determined for varying the progress of the production based on the elapsed time, and the production mode is varied based on the production scenario, the liquid crystal production execution management process 3 (S2160) is performed. The elapsed time is specified, and when it is determined that the specified elapsed time matches the variable timing of the performance mode defined in the performance scenario, a display command for varying the performance mode is set.

<Thirtieth Embodiment>
Next, a thirtieth embodiment will be described. In the twenty-seventh embodiment described above, the variation pattern selection table 222a is defined so as to select different variation patterns according to the set game state, and the rate at which the out-of-reach effect is executed is different according to the game state. It was configured to allow Then, when the unreachable performance is executed during the SP time period, the setting suggestion performance is executed as a benefit. In a game state in which out-of-reach performance is difficult to execute, it is difficult to execute setting suggesting performance as variable performance, so that other performance is used to execute setting suggesting performance. In other words, regardless of which game state is set, the number of setting suggestion effects executed during the SP time period is uniform.

On the other hand, in the thirtieth embodiment, even in a state in which the same game state (for example, normal state) is set, it is possible to change the rate at which the out-of-reach effect is selected. . Specifically, the player can change the background mode by operating the frame button 22, and even if the same variation pattern is selected according to the selected background mode, the reach It is configured to vary the execution frequency of the production (out-of-reach production).

In this way, by configuring the execution frequency of the out-of-reach performance to be different depending on the background mode selected by the player, it is possible to vary the degree of expectation for winning a big win when the ready-to-win performance is executed. Therefore, players who want to see the ready-to-win effect regardless of whether or not they win the jackpot should select a background mode with a high execution frequency of the ready-to-win effect (out-of-reach effect). By selecting the background mode in which the execution frequency of the performance (out-of-reach performance) is low, the game can be played with the desired performance.

Further, as in the twenty-seventh embodiment described above, when the out-of-reach effect is executed during the SP time period, the setting suggestion effect is executed. can also be selected by the player. Therefore, a player who has already grasped the setting values that have already been set will not be able to make it difficult for other players (players playing next to him) to grasp the setting values. A player who selects a low background mode and wants to grasp the set values quickly can select a background mode with a high execution frequency of the setting suggestion effect.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, when the ready-to-reach effect is executed less frequently (a state in which the out-of-reach effect is difficult to execute), the setting suggestion effect is set so that the player can easily predict the currently set value (strongly suggesting effect). mode) is easily selected, and in a state in which the ready-to-win effect is executed frequently (a state in which the out-of-reach effect is likely to be executed), the player predicts the set value currently set as the setting suggesting effect. It is configured such that a difficult presentation mode (weakly suggestive mode) is easily selected. By constructing in this way, the player is made to select a game in which the setting suggestion performance is likely to be executed but the weak suggestion mode is likely to be selected and a game in which the setting suggestion performance is difficult to be executed but the strong suggestion mode is likely to be selected. becomes possible.

In other words, in the present embodiment, the technical idea is to equalize the amount of information for predicting the set values that the player will obtain from the setting suggestion effects to be executed, rather than to equalize the number of executions of the setting suggestion effects. It is an invention that has been made.

Furthermore, as an invention based on the present technical idea, it is preferable that the stronger suggestion mode is more likely to be selected as the occurrence of a game situation with a lower frequency of occurrence, for example, when a jackpot game is executed multiple times during one SP time period In some cases, the strong suggestion mode may be configured to be easily selected. With this configuration, it is possible to give information that makes it easy to predict the set value by creating a rarer game situation for the player, so that the player can play various games. A game can be played while devising to create a situation.

<Regarding the electrical configuration in the thirtieth embodiment>
First, with reference to FIGS. 558 and 559, the electrical configuration of this embodiment will be described. The pachinko machine 10 according to the thirtieth embodiment differs from the pachinko machine 10 according to the twenty-seventh embodiment described above in that part of the configuration of the ROM 222 of the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 and part of the configuration of the RAM 223 are changed. However, other configurations, that is, the configuration of the ROM 202 and RAM 203 of the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110 and the contents of each electrical configuration of the display control device 113 are the same. Identical contents are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed descriptions thereof are omitted.

FIG. 558(a) is a diagram schematically showing the configuration of the ROM 222 of the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 according to the thirtieth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 558(a), the ROM 222 of the present embodiment provides a variation pattern selection 4 table 222ca instead of the variation pattern selection table 222a in place of the ROM 222 of the twenty-seventh embodiment described above. The difference is that a mode selection table 222cb is added, and the rest is the same. The same reference numerals are given to the same contents, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The variation pattern selection 4 table 222ca, like the variation pattern selection table 222a described above, is a data table referred to when selecting the effect pattern of the variation effect to be executed based on the variation pattern command received from the main controller 110. is. In the twenty-seventh embodiment described above, the detailed description is omitted, but the information indicating the received variation pattern, the current game state, and the effect pattern of various variable effects in correspondence with the value of the obtained effect counter 223g is stipulated.

Here, with reference to FIG. 559, detailed contents of the variation pattern selection 4 table 222ca will be described. FIG. 559 is a diagram schematically showing characteristic defined contents among the contents defined in the variation pattern selection 4 table 222ca. Although detailed description is omitted, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured to be able to execute a plurality of types of ready-to-win effects. Then, the types of various reach effects are defined.

As shown in Figure 559, in the variation pattern selection 4 table 222ca, the current game state (in addition to the probability state of special symbols and normal symbols, the game state according to the selected background mode) and the main controller Various variable effect patterns are defined in correspondence with the variable pattern type received from 110 and the value of the acquired effect counter 223g.

Specifically, the game state is "normal 1", that is, the game state is the normal state, the background mode is "sand beach stage", and the received variation pattern is "various hits", that is, the main controller If the variation pattern selected with reference to the variation pattern selection table 202b of 110 is the winning variation A to the winning variation C, regardless of the acquired value of the production counter 223g (the entire range of the production counter 223g that can be acquired Against), "various hits" are defined as a variable effect.

Although detailed illustration is omitted in FIG. 559, in fact, a plurality of types of variation effects (reach effects ), any variable effect (reach effect) is defined. When the variation pattern corresponding to the winning of the special symbol is received, the result of the variation performance indicates the winning of the big win, so the out-of-reach performance is not executed.

Next, the game state is "normal 1", that is, the game state is the normal state, the background mode is "sand beach stage", and the received variation pattern is "off variation A", that is, the main controller 110 If the variation pattern selected with reference to the normal variation pattern table 202b1 is the deviation variation A (variation time 5 seconds), regardless of the value of the acquired effect counter 223g (the value of the effect counter 223g that can be acquired for the entire range), "short out" is defined as a variable effect. When this "short loss" is selected, there is a variation effect in which the third symbol is stopped and displayed in a display mode to indicate that the result of the special symbol lottery is out without the ready-to-win effect being executed. executed.

The game state is "normal 1", that is, the game state is the normal state, the background mode is "sand beach stage", and the received fluctuation pattern is "outlier fluctuation B", that is, the main controller 110 is in normal mode. When the variation pattern selected with reference to the variation pattern table 202b1 is the deviation variation B (variation time 20 seconds), the value of the acquired effect counter 223g is in the range of "0 to 49", the variation effect "Medium out" is defined as a range of "50 to 98", and "reach out" is defined as a variable effect. When "outside" is selected, the result of the special symbol lottery is out without executing the ready-to-win effect after the effect to incite whether the ready-to-win effect is executed as the variable effect is executed. A variable effect is executed in which the third symbol is stopped and displayed in a display mode for indicating that there is.

Here, as a specific example of the variation effect corresponding to "outside", the third symbol is changed again after temporarily stopping in the display mode (other than the display mode indicating the winning of the jackpot) in which the third symbol is out. By executing the pseudo-variation production, the player expects that the ready-to-win production will be executed, and by temporarily slowing down the fluctuation speed of the third symbol during the variable display, the above-mentioned short out. There is a variable performance with a higher degree of expectation that the ready-to-win performance is executed (a part of the third pattern is stopped and displayed in a combination in which the ready-to-win performance is executed) rather than the corresponding variable performance.

The effect modes corresponding to such "outside the middle" variable effect are configured such that the same effect mode is set halfway in both the out of reach effect and the hit hit effect. By configuring in this way, in the case where the middle-out variation performance is being executed, the variation performance being executed for the player is any of "middle-out", "reach out", and "reach-hit". It is possible to make it difficult to understand whether it is a variable performance executed based on.

In addition, as a specific example of a variable effect corresponding to "out of reach", after temporarily stopping in a display mode indicating that the third symbol is out (other than a display mode indicating that the jackpot is won), the third symbol is again simulated to vary. After making the player expect that the ready-to-win performance is executed by executing the variable performance, the variable performance for executing the ready-to-win performance and the variable speed of the third pattern during variable display are temporarily reduced. By doing so, after increasing the expectation that the reach effect is executed (part of the third symbol is stopped and displayed in the combination that the reach effect is executed) rather than the variable effect corresponding to the short deviation described above There is a variable production that executes a reach production.

Then, the game state is "normal 1", that is, the game state is the normal state, the background mode is "sand beach stage", and the received variation pattern is "off variation C", that is, the main controller 110 When the variation pattern selected with reference to the normal variation pattern table 202b1 is the deviation variation C (variation time 60 seconds), regardless of the value of the acquired performance counter 223g, "reach out" is set as the variation performance. stipulated. That is, when the loss variation C is selected, it is configured such that the reach loss variation effect is always executed.

On the other hand, if the game state is "normal 2", that is, the game state is the normal state, the background mode is the "deep sea stage", and the received variation pattern is "various hits", that is, the main controller If the variation pattern selected with reference to the variation pattern selection table 202b of 110 is the winning variation A to the winning variation C, regardless of the acquired value of the production counter 223g (the entire range of the production counter 223g that can be acquired Against), "various hits" are defined as a variable effect. It should be noted that the content of the variable effect executed when "various hits" is selected as the variable effect is the same as in the above-described normal 1 case, so detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The game state is "normal 2", that is, the game state is the normal state, the background mode is "deep sea stage", and the received fluctuation pattern is "outlier fluctuation A", that is, the normal state of the main controller 110 If the variation pattern selected with reference to the variation pattern table 202b1 is the deviation variation A (variation time 5 seconds), the value of the acquired effect counter 223g is in the range of "0 to 49", the variation effect "Short deviation" is defined as "50 to 98", and "reach deviation" is defined as a variable effect.

The ready-to-reach performance executed for this out-of-reach variation A is performed immediately after the third symbol variation is executed (after 2 seconds), and after 2 seconds, the ready-to-reach performance is displayed in the third A variable effect is executed in which the symbols are stopped and displayed. In other words, the variable performance is executed for the purpose of increasing the execution frequency of the out-of-reach performance, not for the purpose of enhancing the performance effect by encouraging the player to determine whether or not the player will win the jackpot. In addition, in the case of executing the ready-to-win effect (out-of-reach effect) in such a short time, for example, when the variable effect is executed, one third pattern out of the three third patterns is stopped and displayed. It is preferable to immediately stop and display another third pattern in the same display mode as the third pattern that is still stopped, so that the ready-to-win state is reached in a short period of time. In this way, the ready-to-win state can be created in a short time in a performance mode that is easy for the player to understand by constructing the ready-to-win state without variably displaying all the third symbols. In this case, for example, the characters "LOCK" are attached to the third symbols that are not variably displayed as a notification mode for informing the player that they are not variably displayed (that they remain stopped). It would be nice to add an icon. As a result, it is possible to inform the player in an easy-to-understand manner that there is a third symbol that will not be variably displayed.

The game state is "normal 2", that is, the game state is the normal state, the background mode is "deep sea stage", and the received fluctuation pattern is "outlier fluctuation B", that is, the normal state of the main controller 110 When the variation pattern selected with reference to the variation pattern table 202b1 is the deviation variation B (variation time 20 seconds), the value of the acquired effect counter 223g is in the range of "0 to 9", the variation effect "Medium out" is defined as "10 to 98", and "reach out" is defined as a variable effect. Then, when the received variation pattern is "loss variation C", that is, when the variation time is 60 seconds, "reach out" is defined as the variation effect regardless of the value of the effect counter 223g obtained. That is, when the loss variation C is selected, it is configured such that the reach loss variation effect is always executed.

As described above, in the present embodiment, when the normal state is set, the frequency of execution of the out-of-reach effect is varied according to the selected background mode. Specifically, when "Deep Sea Stage" is selected (normally 2) than when "Sand Beach Stage" is selected as the background mode (normally 1), the out-of-reach effect is more pronounced. It is designed to be easy to execute. Therefore, even when the same game state (normal state) is set, the execution frequency of the out-of-ready performance and the ready-to-reach performance can be made different, so that the player can enjoy the game without getting bored. can be done.

In this embodiment, the background mode can be changed by the player operating the frame button 22, and the execution frequency of the ready-to-win effect (out-of-reach effect) is changed according to the set background mode. However, the configuration for varying the execution frequency of the ready-to-win effect (out-of-reach effect) is not limited to this, for example, the number of special symbol lotteries executed without changing the game state is a predetermined number of times ( For example, the background mode may be switched when the number of times reaches 50 times), or the background mode may be switched when the time measured by the timer 292 reaches a predetermined time (for example, 1:00 pm). Alternatively, if there are a plurality of jackpot types in which a specific game state (for example, a variable probability state) is set after the jackpot game ends, a plurality of jackpot types in which the specific game state is set after the jackpot game ends Different background modes are set when a specific game state is set when the first jackpot type is set and when the second jackpot type is set among the jackpot types. Also good.

As described above, even if the player cannot arbitrarily select the background mode, the player can be made to execute the game with different execution frequencies of the ready-to-win effect. It is possible to provide a game that does not come.

Next, when the game state is a time-saving state or a probability variable state, the variable performance is defined so that the same variable performance is executed regardless of the background mode, and the game state is "time-saving/variable probability". That is, if the gaming state is a time saving state or a probability variable state and the received variation pattern is "various hits", that is, the time saving / probability variation variation pattern table 202b2 of the main controller 110 is referred to and selected. If the variation patterns are hit variation A and hit variation B, regardless of the acquired value of the effect counter 223g (with respect to the entire range of the effect counter 223g that can be acquired), "various wins" will be used as the variable effect. stipulated. It should be noted that the content of the variable effect executed when "various hits" is selected as the variable effect is the same as in the above-described normal 1 case, so detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Also, if the received variation pattern is "outlier variation D", that is, the variation pattern selected by referring to the time saving/probability variation variation pattern table 202b2 of the main controller 110 is out variation D (variation time 3 seconds) , regardless of the acquired value of the effect counter 223g (with respect to the entire range of the effect counter 223g that can be acquired), "short deviation" is defined as the variable effect. That is, in the variation pattern with a short variation time of 3 seconds, the variation performance is executed in which the third symbol indicating the failure is stopped and displayed without executing the ready-to-win performance.

If the received variation pattern is "outlier variation B, C", that is, the variation pattern selected by referring to the time saving/probable variation variation pattern table 202b2 of the main controller 110 is out variation B (variation time 20 seconds) Alternatively, in the case of deviation variation C (fluctuation time 60 seconds), regardless of the value of the acquired effect counter 223g (for the entire range of the effect counter 223g that can be acquired), "reach out" as the variable effect is stipulated.

Furthermore, when the game state is the probability variable state and the high-speed fluctuation mode, the variable effect is defined so that the same variable effect is executed regardless of the background mode, and the game state is the "probability variable high-speed Fluctuation period", that is, if the gaming state is a variable probability state and a high-speed fluctuation mode, and the received fluctuation pattern is "various hits", that is, the high-speed fluctuation fluctuation pattern table 202b3 of the main controller 110 If the selected variation pattern is a short hit variation A or a short hit variation B, regardless of the value of the acquired performance counter 223g (with respect to the entire range of the performance counter 223g that can be acquired), the variation performance "Various hits" are defined as. It should be noted that the content of the variable effect executed when "various hits" is selected as the variable effect is the same as in the above-described normal 1 case, so detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In addition, when the received variation pattern is "various types of deviation", that is, the variation pattern selected by referring to the high-speed variation variation pattern table 202b3 of the main controller 110 is a short deviation variation A (variation time 1.5 seconds ), in the case of short deviation fluctuation B (fluctuation time 6 seconds), regardless of the value of the acquired performance counter 223g (with respect to the entire range of the performance counter 223g that can be acquired), "short deviation" as the variable performance is stipulated. In other words, during the high-speed variation mode, the out-of-reach performance is not executed, and the fact that the jackpot has been won is notified when the ready-to-win performance is executed.

As described above, in the present embodiment, when executing the variation effect corresponding to the variation pattern selected in the control processing of the main control device 110, the game state (currently set game state and background mode) , and the execution frequency of the ready-to-win effect (out-of-reach effect) is changed according to the game state.

And, as the game state, the normal state is the highest execution frequency of the ready-to-win effect (out-of-reach effect), that is, when the special symbol lottery of a predetermined number of times is executed, the ready-to-win is the effect mode of the variable effect for indicating the lottery result. The production frequency is the highest, and the execution frequency of the ready-to-win production is made lower in the order of the time saving state and the variable probability state. Furthermore, among the cases where the variable probability state is set, during the high-speed variation mode, the out-of-reach effect is not executed. By configuring in this way, it is possible to clearly define the execution frequency of the out-of-reach effect in each game state.

Returning to FIG. 558(a), the description is continued. The end mode selection table 222cb is a data table referred to when determining the effect content (suggestion mode) of the setting suggestion effect executed at the end of the period effect (SP time effect), and is the start timing of the period effect. , and the game state at the end timing of the period effect, different suggestion modes are defined.

In this embodiment, as in the twenty-seventh embodiment described above, when the period effect is being executed, the setting suggesting effect is more likely to be executed based on the variable effect than when the period effect is not being executed. It is configured as follows. More specifically, the setting suggestion effect is executed based on the number of executions of the special symbol lottery executed during the period production and the number of times the reach effect is executed, and the setting suggestion effect is executed when the reach out production is executed. It is configured to

In other words, during the SP time period in which the period effect (SP time effect) is executed, a lot of information for predicting the set value is provided to the player, so that a privilege (setting suggestion information) advantageous to the player is provided. It will be a privilege period that will be easier to grant. However, this SP time period is a period that is set based on the timing result of the timing device 292, and is set regardless of the actual game content. Alternatively, the SP time period may be set during a game state (high-speed fluctuation mode) in which the out-of-reach effect is difficult to execute.

As described above, even when the SP time period is set, the execution frequency of the setting suggesting effect differs depending on the game situation during the SP time period, and thus the player's desire to play is reduced. was there.

On the other hand, in the thirtieth embodiment, the effect (effect at the end of the period effect) can be executed in the effect mode that suggests the set value at the end timing of the SP time period, and the effect mode of the effect at the end of the period effect is configured to be executable. , The game state at the time when the SP time period is set (the probability state of special symbols, the probability state of normal symbols, the background mode, the state of the game specified by whether it is during the jackpot game), and the SP time period has ended It is configured to be determined based on the game state at the time.

Specifically, during the SP time period, when the game state is such that the setting suggesting effect based on the variable effect is difficult to be executed, the period effect ends rather than when the game state is such that the setting suggesting effect based on the variable effect is more likely to be executed. It is configured so that the setting suggesting effect is easily executed in a mode (strongly suggesting mode) in which the set value is easily predicted during the hour effect. In other words, when the game is executed during the SP time period in a situation where the setting suggestion performance is difficult to be executed, the setting suggestion performance in the strong suggestion mode is likely to be executed at the end timing of the SP time period. By configuring in this way, regardless of the game state, it is possible to evenly give the information (setting estimation element) for predicting the setting value to the players who have played the game during the SP time period. Therefore, even if the SP time period is set in any game state, it is possible to prevent the player's desire to play from declining.

Here, with reference to FIG. 560, the contents of the termination mode selection table 222cb will be described. FIG. 560 is a diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the termination mode selection table 222cb. The ending mode selection table 222cb is a data table that is referred to when selecting a suggesting mode of the setting suggesting effect executed on the end screen of the SP time period (SP time effect), and is a data table that predicts the setting value. Five stages of suggestion mode (minimum suggestion mode, low suggestion mode, middle suggestion mode, high suggestion mode, highest suggestion mode) according to the ease are the game state at the start of the SP period and the game state at the end of the SP time period. It is defined to be selected in correspondence with the combination of

Specifically, if the game state at the start of the SP time period is "Normal 1" and the game state at the end is "Normal 1", the setting suggestion effect to be executed at the end of the SP time period is suggested. When the mode (setting suggestion mode) is "low suggestion mode", the game state at the start of the SP time period is "normal 1", and the game state at the end is "normal 2", the SP time period ends. "Low suggestion mode" as a suggestion mode (setting suggestion mode) of the setting suggestion effect that is executed at the time, the game state at the start of the SP time period is "normal 1", and the game state at the end is "short time / variable probability" In some cases, the suggestion mode (setting suggestion mode) of the setting suggestion performance executed at the end of the SP time period is "medium suggestion mode", the game state at the start of the SP time period is "normal 1", and the game state is "normal 1" at the end of the SP time period. If the game state is "high-speed fluctuation", the "high suggestion mode" is set as the suggestion mode (setting suggestion mode) of the setting suggestion effect executed at the end of the SP time period, and the game state at the start of the SP time period is "Normal 1" and the game state at the end is "Jackpot", the "high suggestion mode" is set as the suggestion mode (setting suggestion mode) of the setting suggestion effect executed at the end of the SP time period. It is specified to be selected respectively.

When the game state at the start of the SP time period is "Normal 2" and the game state at the end is "Normal 1", a suggestion mode of the setting suggestion effect executed at the end of the SP time period (setting suggestion mode ), if the game state at the start of the SP time period is "Normal 2" and the game state at the end is "Normal 2", the setting to be executed at the end of the SP time period If the "minimum suggestion mode" as the suggestion mode (setting suggestion mode) of the suggestion production is "normal 2" at the start of the SP time period and the game state at the end is "short time / variable probability", As the suggestion mode (setting suggestion mode) of the setting suggestion effect executed at the end of the SP time period, the "medium suggestion mode" is set, the game state at the start of the SP time period is "normal 2", and the game state at the end is " In the case of "high speed fluctuation", the suggestion mode (setting suggestion mode) of the setting suggestion effect executed at the end of the SP time period is the "high suggestion mode", and the game state at the start of the SP time period is "normal 2". Then, when the game state at the time of the end is "big hit", the "high suggestion mode" is selected as the suggestion mode (setting suggestion mode) of the setting suggestion performance executed at the end of the SP time period. stipulated in

In addition, if the game state at the start of the SP time period is "short time / variable probability" and the game state at the end is "normal 1, normal 2", the setting suggestion effect executed at the end of the SP time period "Medium suggestion mode" as a suggestion mode (setting suggestion mode), when the game state at the start of the SP time period is "shorter time / variable probability", and when the game state at the end is "shorter time / variable probability", SP time As the suggestion mode (setting suggestion mode) of the setting suggestion effect executed at the end of the period, the "high suggestion mode" is the game state at the start of the SP time period, and the game state at the end is "high speed." In the case of "fluctuation", the suggestion mode (setting suggestion mode) of the setting suggestion performance executed at the end of the SP time period is "maximum suggestion mode", and the game state at the start of the SP time period is "time reduction/probability variation". Then, when the game state at the time of the end is "jackpot", the "maximum suggestion mode" is selected as the suggestion mode (set suggestion mode) of the setting suggestion performance to be executed at the end of the SP time period. stipulated in

When the game state at the start of the SP time period is "high speed fluctuation" and the game state at the end is "high speed fluctuation", a suggestion mode of the setting suggestion effect executed at the end of the SP time period (setting suggestion mode ), if the game state at the start of the SP time period is "high speed fluctuation" and the game state at the end is "jackpot", the setting is executed at the end of the SP time period. When the "highest suggestion mode" as the suggestion mode (set suggestion mode) of the suggestion effect is "high speed fluctuation" at the start of the SP time period, and the game state at the end is "high speed fluctuation, other than jackpot" , the suggestion mode (setting suggestion mode) of the setting suggestion effect executed at the end of the SP time period is "high suggestion mode", the game state at the start of the SP time period is "jackpot", and the game at the end When the state is "during the jackpot", the suggestion mode (setting suggestion mode) of the setting suggestion effect executed at the end of the SP time period is "fixed notification", and the game state at the start of the SP time period is "jackpot". When the game state at the end is "other than jackpot", the "high suggestion mode" is selected as the suggestion mode (set suggestion mode) of the setting suggestion performance executed at the end of the SP time period. It stipulates that

<Regarding control processing in the thirtieth embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 561 and 562, the contents of control processing executed by the MPU 221 of the sound ramp control device 113 in the thirtieth embodiment will be described. The thirtieth embodiment differs from the above-described twenty-seventh embodiment in that elapsed time confirmation processing 4 (see S2171 in FIG. 561) is executed instead of the elapsed time confirmation processing (see S2111 in FIG. 521). are otherwise identical. The same processing contents are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 561, the content of the elapsed time confirmation process 4 (S2171) will be described. FIG. 561 is a flowchart for showing the details of the elapsed time confirmation process 4 (S2171). This elapsed time confirmation process 4 (S2171) sets the display mode of the end screen displayed at the end of the period effect (SP time effect) in contrast to the above-described elapsed time confirmation process (see S2111 in FIG. 521). are different in that the contents of the processing are different, and are otherwise the same. The same processing contents are assigned the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof is omitted.

As shown in FIG. 561, when the elapsed time confirmation process 4 (S2171) is executed, the same processes of S3601 to S3607 as the above-described elapsed time confirmation process (see S2111 in FIG. 521) are executed, and the process of S3607 is executed. When finished, next, the current game state is stored in the game state storage area 223ca (S3671), and this processing ends. In the processing of this S3671, the current game state, that is, the game state set at the start timing of the SP period (SP time period) in which the period production is executed, the probability state of the special symbol, the probability state of the normal symbol In addition, information indicating the type of background mode being selected (sand beach stage, deep sea stage), information indicating whether the high-speed fluctuation mode is in progress, and information indicating that the jackpot game is in progress. State information is stored in the game state storage area 223ca. Here, the game state information stored in the game state storage area 223ca is referred to when determining the display mode of the end screen displayed at the end of the period effect.

Also, in the process of S3604, if it is determined that the current effect period is not the SP period (SP time period) (S3604: No), then it is determined whether the specialized mode flag 223w is set to ON. Then (S3608), if it is determined that the special mode flag 223w is not set to ON (S3608: No), it is determined whether the period effect flag 223p is set to ON (S3609).

In the process of S3609, the period effect in progress flag 223p is set to ON, that is, the current time is the timing when the SP period (SP time period) ends, and the period effect indicating that the SP time effect is being executed. If it is determined that the medium flag 223p remains on (timing to set the end of the period effect) (S3609: Yes), then it is determined whether the special symbol variation is being executed. (S3610), when it is determined that the special symbol is fluctuating (S3610: Yes), the same S3611 processing as the above-described elapsed time confirmation processing (see S2111 in FIG. 521) is executed, and this processing ends. . Although detailed description is omitted, in the processing of S3611, the remaining variation time of the special symbol variation being executed at the end timing of the SP time period (SP period) (the special symbol variation being executed from the end of the SP time period A process for determining an effect mode to be executed during the remaining variation time is executed according to the period until the display is stopped.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the special figure is not fluctuating in the process of S3610 (S3610: No), then the end screen setting process is executed (S3672), and the period production flag 223p is set to OFF (S3612). , Set the background image change command for switching the background image type of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 from the background image showing the SP time period to the background image showing the normal effect period (S3613), then The processing of S3614 and S3615, which is the same as the elapsed time confirmation processing (see S2111 in FIG. 521), is executed, and this processing ends.

Next, referring to FIG. 562, the contents of the end screen setting process (S3672) will be described. FIG. 562 is a flow chart showing the details of the end screen setting process (S3672). This end screen setting process (S3672) is the condition for ending the period effect (SP time effect) in the above-described elapsed time confirmation process 4 (see S2171 in FIG. 561) (SP time period ends, special figure fluctuation The effect is stopped and displayed) is established, and the display mode displayed on the end screen of the SP time effect varies depending on the game state (game situation) during the SP time period. A process for determining the display mode is executed.

When the end screen setting process (S3672) is executed, first, the game state at the start of the period production from the game state storage area 223ca, that is, the S3671 executed in the elapsed time confirmation process 4 (see S2171 in FIG. 561). The game state stored in the process and the current game state are read out (S4401), and each game state read out in the process of S4401 (the game state at the start of the period production and the game state at the end of the period production) Based on this, the end mode selection table 222cb is referenced to determine the suggested setting mode to be displayed on the period effect end screen (S4402).

Then, a display command for showing a display mode corresponding to the determined suggested setting mode and the current gaming state is set (S4403), and this process is terminated.

In each of the above-described embodiments, by varying the execution frequency of the out-of-reach effect, the execution frequency of the setting-suggestion effect is configured to be different, but the execution frequency of the out-of-reach effect is not limited thereto. Without changing , the frequency of executing the setting suggestion effect may be made variable when the out-of-reach effect is selected.

In this case, a suggestive notice effect is executed to prompt the player whether or not the setting suggestive effect is executed during the out-of-reach effect, and whether the set suggestive effect is executed based on the effect result of the suggestive notice effect. It is preferable to configure so as to inform the player of whether. As a result, even if the out-of-reach effect in which the setting suggestion effect is not executed is executed, the suggestion advance notice effect is executed so that the user can expect that the setting suggestion effect will be executed to the end. It is possible to make people interested in the performance to be done.

Furthermore, when the suggestive notice effect is executed, it is preferable to configure so that a resurrection mode in which the out-of-reach effect is switched to the hit-in-reach effect can also be executed as a result of the effect. After the three symbols are stopped and displayed in a combination different from that of winning the jackpot, the suggestion notice performance is executed, and when the first performance is executed as the suggestion notice performance, the set suggestion performance is executed and the second performance is executed. When it is done, the setting suggesting performance is not executed and the variable performance is finished as it is, and when the third performance is executed, the third pattern which has come off and is stopped is changed again to show the winning of the jackpot. It is preferable to configure so that the third symbol is stopped and displayed.

By constructing in this way, when the suggestive advance notice performance is executed, not only the presence or absence of the set suggestive performance but also the winning of the jackpot can be expected, and the performance effect can be enhanced.

<31st embodiment>
Next, the thirty-first embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 563 to 565. FIG. The thirty-first embodiment differs from the twenty-seventh embodiment described above in that the contents of various processes (various start-up processes) executed when the pachinko machine 10 is turned on are different. are otherwise identical. A detailed description of the same contents will be omitted.

In the twenty-seventh embodiment described above, when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, various control devices such as the main control device 110, the sound lamp control device 113, and the display control device 114 are activated and executed by the main control device 110. The startup command set in the startup process (see FIG. 498) is output to the audio lamp controller 113, and when the audio lamp controller 113 receives the startup command, the audio lamp controller 113 It was configured so that the startup process would start when

In other words, the start-up process executed by the sound lamp control device 113 is executed at the timing when the start-up command is received from the main controller 110 instead of when the power is turned on. As a result, it is possible to establish a certain relationship between the execution period of the start-up processing of main controller 110 and the execution period of the start-up processing of sound lamp control device 113. It is possible to suppress the execution of only the start-up process of the sound lamp control device 113 when a situation occurs in which the start-up process is not executed.

Further, unless a start-up command output from the main controller 110 is received, the start-up processing of the sound lamp control device 113 cannot proceed. By increasing the number of information (commands) necessary for operating the pachinko machine 10, it is possible to make it difficult for illegal games to be played when an illegal main control device is attached to the pachinko machine 10. there were.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, predetermined power is supplied from the power supply 115 to various control devices all at once. The start-up process is executed when the various control devices receive the predetermined power. That is, based on the timing of power supply from the power supply device 115 to the various control devices, the execution timing of the start-up process executed by the various control devices can be given a certain degree of relevance.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to omit the processing for outputting the start-up command from the main controller 110 to the sound lamp controller 113, and the control processing in the main controller 110 can be simplified. .

It should be noted that after the power is turned on until the power supply device 115 supplies the predetermined power, the voltage rises to a predetermined voltage (for example, 5V in series) after the power is turned on, and a start-up period is required until it stabilizes. There is Then, when a predetermined power is supplied, a reset signal is also output (the contents of processing are reset when a predetermined power is supplied for the first time after startup). As a result, even if a small amount of power is output to various control devices during the start-up period until the predetermined power is supplied, and control processing such as start-up processing is executed, You can definitely fix the problem.

Furthermore, in the 31st embodiment, it is determined whether or not a boot completion command for indicating that the boot processing of the third pattern display device 81 has been completed is received from the display control device 114 in the start-up processing of the sound lamp control device 113. When the boot completion command is received during the start-up process, that is, before the start-up process of the sound lamp control device 113 is completed, the boot of the third symbol display device 81 If the processing has been completed, the processing for setting an operation invalidation period for invalidating the operation of the frame button 22 (processing for setting the operation invalidation timer 223s) is skipped.

By configuring in this way, for example, due to the time spent on the setting change operation, the time from turning on the power of the pachinko machine 10 to finishing the start-up processing of the sound lamp control device 113 becomes longer. It is possible to reduce the load of the control processing of the sound lamp control device 113 in the case (when the period becomes longer than the period until the boot processing of the third pattern display device 81 ends).

<Regarding control processing of main controller 110 in the 31st embodiment>
Here, with reference to FIG. 563, the details of the processing executed by the MPU 211 of the main controller 110 in the thirty-first embodiment will be described. In the thirty-first embodiment, a part of the start-up process is changed from that of the twenty-seventh embodiment described above, and the rest is the same. The same processing contents are the same, and the same contents are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 563 is a flow chart showing the details of the start-up process of main controller 110 in the thirty-first embodiment. As shown in FIG. 563, when the start-up process is executed, the initial setting process (S951) is executed, and otherwise the same processes (S902 to S917) as those of the twenty-seventh embodiment described above are executed.

Here, the process of S951 is different from the initial setting process (S901) described above in that the process of setting the startup command for output to the audio lamp control device 113 is not executed. Therefore, in the thirty-first embodiment, information indicating that the start-up process of the main controller 110 has been executed is not output to the sound lamp controller 113 . Therefore, the processing load of control processing executed by main controller 110 can be reduced.

<Regarding control processing of the audio ramp control device 113 in the 31st embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 564 and 565, the details of the processing executed by the MPU 221 of the sound ramp control device 113 in the thirty-first embodiment will be described. Unlike the twenty-seventh embodiment described above, the thirty-first embodiment executes a start-up process (see FIG. 564) instead of the start-up process (see FIG. 503); 565) in that the standby process 5 (see S2051 in FIG. 565) is executed instead of the standby process (see S2012 in FIG. 505). Other processing contents are the same, and the same contents are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 564, when the start-up process is executed, the standby process 5 is first executed (S2051), and then the same processes of S2002 to S2014 as the above-described start-up process (see FIG. 503) are executed. , terminates this process.

Next, the processing contents of the standby process 5 (S2051) will be described with reference to FIG. 565. FIG. 565 is a flowchart for showing the processing contents of the standby process 5 (S2051). This standby process 5 (S2051) is different from the standby process of the twenty-seventh embodiment (see S2012 in FIG. 505) in that a process related to reception of the boot completion command is added, and the rest is the same. . The same processing contents are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

When the standby process 5 (S2051) is executed, first, the same processes of S2071 to S2077 as the standby process of the twenty-seventh embodiment (see S2012 in FIG. 505) are executed, and then output from the display control device 114 It is determined whether a boot completion command to be issued has been received (S2091). In the process of S2091, if it is determined that the boot completion command has been received (S2091: Yes), a display command is set to indicate that the button operation is valid (S2092), and the process proceeds to the main process. On the other hand, in the process of S2091, if it is determined that the boot completion command has not been received (S2091: No), the same process of S2078 as the standby process of the twenty-seventh embodiment (see S2012 in FIG. 505) is executed. and move to main processing.

As described above, in the thirty-first embodiment, in the start-up process (see FIG. 564) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113, a process capable of determining that the boot completion command has been received is executed. Therefore, if the boot process of the third pattern display device 81 is completed before the start-up process of the sound lamp control device 113 is completed, the operation disable timer 223s is set. Processing can be eliminated. Therefore, the processing for starting up the pachinko machine 10 can be simplified. Further, when the start-up processing of the sound lamp control device 113 is completed earlier than the boot processing of the third pattern display device 81, the operation disable timer 223s is set as in the twenty-seventh embodiment described above. , it is possible to prohibit valid determination of the operation to the operation means (frame button 22) before the boot process of the third pattern display device 81 is completed.

In this embodiment, by setting a value indicating a predetermined period (5 seconds) to the operation disable timer 223s, it is prohibited that the operation of the operation means (the frame button 22) is determined to be valid. It is configured to set the period to be used. As a value to be set in the operation disable timer 223s, a period longer than the period required for the boot processing of the third pattern display device 81 to be completed is set.

With this configuration, until the value set in the operation invalidation timer 223s is updated to 0, control is performed so that the operation of the operation means (frame button 22) is unconditionally invalidated. , the processing for starting up the pachinko machine 10 can be simplified.

In addition, without being limited to this configuration, for example, when it is determined that the boot processing of the third symbol display device 81 is not completed at the time when the start-up processing of the sound lamp control device 113 is completed, the state is indicated. The standby flag is set to ON, and the standby flag is set to OFF when it is determined that the boot processing of the third pattern display device 81 is completed, and while the standby flag is set to ON, the frame It may be configured such that the operation to the button 22 is disabled. By configuring in this way, it is necessary to add processing for periodically determining the setting state of the standby flag. The operation to the frame button 22 is surely invalidated until the end of the operation of the frame button 22, and the operation to the frame button 22 is surely disabled at the timing when both the start-up processing of the sound lamp control device 113 and the boot processing of the third pattern display device 81 are completed. Operation can be effectively discriminated.

In this embodiment, the audio lamp control device 113 determines (identifies) whether or not the operation means (frame button 22) is operated and the details of the operation. The display control device 114 may be configured to be able to determine whether or not the operation means (the frame button 22) has been operated, and the details of the operation. In this case, in the state where the boot processing of the third symbol display device 81 is completed, when the start-up processing of the sound lamp control device 113 is completed and when it is not completed, that is, the pachinko machine 10 is powered on After that, the operation to the frame button 22 can be effectively determined, but the first state in which the start-up processing of all the control devices is not completed, and the start-up processing of all the control devices possessed by the pachinko machine 10 is completed and the game can be played normally.

Specifically, during the first state (during the setting change operation), when the frame button 22 is operated, the processing for executing the volume adjustment of the pachinko machine 10 is executed, and during the second state (during the game state) , When the frame button 22 is operated, in addition to the process of adjusting the volume of the pachinko machine 10, it is preferable to perform the process of selecting the background mode and the process related to the variable effect. In this manner, by switching the processing contents to be executed when the frame button 22 is operated according to the activation status of the pachinko machine 10, it is possible to perform only operations suitable for the activation status.

<Thirty-Second Embodiment>
Next, the thirty-second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 566 to 570. FIG. In the twenty-seventh and twenty-eighth embodiments described above, when determining whether or not to execute the look-ahead effect, the effect period of the look-ahead effect that can be executed this time is calculated, and the calculated effect period and the SP time period are calculated. It is configured to determine the overlapping relationship, and determine whether or not to execute the look-ahead effect and the mode of effect based on the result of the determination. In the case of such a configuration, when the execution trigger of the prefetching effect is established, the effect period of the prefetching effect is calculated in detail, and the overlapping relationship with the SP time period is determined, so that the prefetching effect is obtained as much as possible. was able to be executed, but it was necessary to execute processing to determine the overlapping relationship with the SP time period, regardless of the timing at which the timing of the execution of the look-ahead effect was established. There is a problem that the processing load of the control processing executed by the lamp control device 113 increases.

On the other hand, in the thirty-second embodiment, the clock period after the power is turned on can be specified based on the time information clocked by the clock device 292, and the SP time period and the look-ahead It is configured to define a prohibition period for prohibiting the execution of the look-ahead effect so that the effect period of the effect does not overlap (difficult to do so).

In other words, when entering into a period in which the read-ahead performance is prohibited as a time counting period, the execution of the read-ahead performance is prohibited without discriminating whether or not the opportunity to execute the look-ahead performance has been established. In this way, by prescribing a period during which execution of the look-ahead effect is prohibited (a look-ahead prohibited period) with respect to the timing period, the look-ahead effect and the SP time effect are executed in duplicate, which the player cannot understand. It is possible to simplify processing for prohibiting (suppressing) execution of a difficult effect.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, a different look-ahead prohibition period is defined based on the number of special figure reservations and the presence or absence of jackpot winnings in the reservations. In other words, prefetching is prohibited until the prefetching effect is executed, or when the big winning game is executed during the prefetching effect, and until the prefetching effect is executed, or when the big winning game is not executed during the prefetching effect. It is configured to vary the length of the period.

In this way, as a look-ahead effect that will be executed (or can be done) in the future, if the period until the look-ahead effect is executed is long, or the effect pattern that has a long look-ahead effect period itself and the period until the look-ahead effect is executed is short, or a performance pattern with a short look-ahead performance period itself is classified, and the look-ahead prohibition period is defined corresponding to each pattern, thereby preventing the look-ahead prohibition period from being unnecessarily long. Therefore, the execution frequency of the look-ahead effect can be increased, and the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

In addition, in the thirty-second embodiment, the look-ahead effect period is set to the first pattern (when the period until the look-ahead effect is executed is long, or the look-ahead effect period itself is a long effect pattern) depending on whether or not the jackpot is won. It is configured to be classified into a second pattern (when the period until the look-ahead effect is executed is short, or an effect pattern in which the look-ahead effect period itself is short).

As a result, in a situation where the look-ahead performance period is likely to be lengthened (the period until the look-ahead performance is executed is lengthened) due to the relationship with the jackpot game period, the long look-ahead prohibition period is referred to, and the jackpot game is played. In situations where duration is not relevant, a short anti-lookahead period is referred to. By using the long period of the jackpot game period as a criterion for identifying the look-ahead effect period in this way, it is possible to prevent the look-ahead prohibition period from becoming unnecessarily long. Therefore, the execution frequency of the look-ahead effect can be increased, and the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

In addition, in the thirty-second embodiment, unlike the twenty-seventh embodiment and the twenty-eighth embodiment described above, before executing the determination of whether or not the look-ahead effect is to be executed, the winning special Based on the position of the figure reservation (the number of special figure reservations) and the presence or absence of the jackpot winning in the special figure reservation that has already been acquired, it is configured to determine whether or not to execute the look-ahead effect. there is By configuring in this way, it is possible to suppress the execution of the processing for determining whether or not the prefetching effect is to be executed during the prefetching prohibited period. The processing load of control processing can be reduced.

In this embodiment, as described above, the presence or absence of a jackpot winning (whether or not there is a jackpot game period) is used as an element for specifying the look-ahead prohibition period. The type of game (number of rounds) may be used as an element, and information indicating a variation pattern in which a variation time of a predetermined time (eg, 60 seconds) or more is set as a variation pattern of special symbol variation corresponding to each special figure reservation A predetermined number (for example, one piece) or more of the stored special figure reservation may be determined as an element. In other words, if the pre-reading effect is executed based on the special figure hold acquired this time, it is possible to identify the corresponding pre-reading prohibited period using information that can roughly identify at what timing the pre-reading effect period is set. should be configured.

<Electrical Configuration in the 32nd Embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 566 to 568, the electrical configuration of the thirty-second embodiment will be described. The thirty-second embodiment differs from the twenty-seventh embodiment described above in that the configuration of a part of the ROM 202 of the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 is changed, and the rest is the same. A detailed description of the same configuration will be omitted. First, referring to FIG. 566, the configuration of the ROM 202 of the main controller 110 of the pachinko machine 10 in the thirty-second embodiment will be described. FIG. 566 is a diagram schematically showing the configuration of ROM 202 of main controller 110. As shown in FIG.

As shown in FIG. 566, the ROM 202 of the main controller 110 of the pachinko machine 10 in the thirty-second embodiment replaces the effect switching table 222b with the effect switching table 222fa in place of the effect switching table 222b in the twenty-seventh embodiment. The difference is that a prefetching prohibited period selection 6 table 222fb is provided instead of the prefetching prohibited period selection table 222d, and the rest is the same. The same components are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed descriptions thereof are omitted.

Effect switching 6 table 222fa, like the effect switching table 222b (see FIG. 471) of the twenty-seventh embodiment described above, is referred to when switching the effect period based on the time information (clock information) of the clock device 292. Data table. In the present embodiment, different effects can be executed according to the set effect period. The effect switching 6 table 222fa is used to select the effect period for executing the effect (effect mode) performed by the third symbol display device 81, the sound output device 226, and the lamp display device 227. Furthermore, in addition to the effect period, the data table defines a prefetch prohibition period for prohibiting the execution of the process for determining whether or not the prefetch effect is executed (prefetch effect execution determination process (see S2509 in FIG. 570)) be.

This effect switching 6 table 222fa is referred to when a command for indicating acquisition of new prize information (special figure reservation) is received, and when it is determined that it corresponds to the prefetching prohibition period, the prefetching effect is executed. The decision processing (see S2509 in FIG. 570) is skipped. As a result, it is possible to suppress the execution of the prefetch effect execution determination process (see S2509 in FIG. 570) during the prefetch prohibition period, thereby simplifying the control process executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113. can do.

Here, with reference to FIG. 567, detailed contents of the effect switching 6 table 222fa will be described. FIG. 567 is a diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the effect switching 6 table 222fa. As shown in FIG. 567, effect switching 6 table 222fa defines, in addition to the effect period, prefetch prohibition period with multiple types (prohibition level) for effect switching table 222b (see FIG. 471). is different. This prohibition level is determined by referring to a look-ahead prohibition period selection 6 table 222fb, which will be described later. It is configured such that different types are determined in accordance with the status of drawing suspension.

More specifically, as the special figure reservation status, the number of acquired special figure reservation balls (1 to 8 pieces) and the jackpot game in the period until the special symbol fluctuation corresponding to the target special figure reservation is executed can be executed (whether or not information indicating jackpot winning is included in the special reservation other than the special reservation acquired this time), and the prohibition level is determined based on is doing. Then, based on the determined prohibition level and the current elapsed time T (elapsed time since the power was turned on), it is determined whether or not the pre-reading prohibited period applies. Effect execution determination processing (see S2509 in FIG. 570) is skipped.

Here, referring to FIG. 567, the contents defined in the effect switching 6 table 222fa will be specifically described. (elapsed time)), and the normal effect period is defined in the range where the elapsed time T is within 88 minutes.

Then, in the range of the elapsed time T within 83 minutes, that is, in the range where the grace period until the SP time period is set is 7 minutes or more, the jackpot game is performed. Even if execution of a look-ahead performance including a period or execution of a look-ahead performance to be executed after the end of a jackpot game is determined (even if a long look-ahead performance period is set), the SP time period and the look-ahead performance period cannot overlap. Since it is a range, "no prohibition" is stipulated.

In addition, of the elapsed time T for which the normal effect period is defined, in the range of the elapsed time T from 83 minutes to 85 minutes 10 seconds, the "prohibition level 5" is set, and the elapsed time T is 85 minutes 10 seconds to 85 minutes "Prohibition level 4" for the range of 30 seconds, "Prohibition level 3" for the elapsed time T range of 85 minutes 30 seconds to 85 minutes 50 seconds, and "Prohibition level 3" for the elapsed time T of 85 minutes 50 seconds to 86 minutes "Prohibition level 2" is defined in the range of 10 seconds, and "prohibition level 1" is defined in the range of elapsed time T of 86 minutes 10 seconds to 88 minutes.

Then, when the elapsed time T is in the range of 88 minutes to 90 minutes, the SP time preparation period is defined. , the SP time period (for music A) is defined. Thereafter, as in the effect switching table 222b (see FIG. 471) of the twenty-seventh embodiment described above, the normal effect period, the SP time preparation period, and the SP time period are defined for the elapsed time. Different types of prohibition levels are defined according to the length of the grace period before the period is set.

Prefetching prohibition period selection 6 table 222fb is a data table referred to when determining the type (prohibition level) of the corresponding prefetching prohibition period, and the number of special figure reservations to be determined (storage position of target reservation) And information indicating whether or not there is a jackpot during the period (whether or not there is a jackpot in the special reservation other than the target reservation). That is, in this look-ahead prohibition period selection 6 table 222fb, the period (until the look-ahead effect is completed) until the special symbol variation corresponding to the target hold is executed (the period during which the look-ahead effect can be executed) is the special figure hold number and whether or not there is a jackpot game, and it is determined whether or not the look-ahead effect can be executed in the specified period.

Therefore, the larger the value of the target hold, the longer the period in which the look-ahead effect can be executed by executing many special design holds until the special design variation corresponding to the target hold is executed. As a prohibition level, a type with a long look-ahead prohibition period (high-level prohibition type) is likely to be determined. Similarly, when the jackpot game is executed before the special symbol variation corresponding to the target reservation is executed, the period until the special symbol variation corresponding to the target reservation is executed becomes longer (jackpot Since the period in which the look-ahead effect can be executed becomes longer, a type with a long look-ahead prohibition period (a high-level prohibition type) is easily determined as the prohibition level.

On the other hand, the smaller the value of the target hold, or if there is no information indicating the jackpot winning in the special hold, the shorter the period until the special symbol variation corresponding to the target hold is executed, the prohibition level , the type with a short look-ahead prohibition period (low-level prohibition type) is likely to be determined.

Specifically, if the target hold is "1" and the jackpot winning during the period is "yes", the prohibition level is "level 5", and the jackpot winning during the period is "none". In the case of , the prohibition level "level 1" is defined. Also, if the target reservation is "2" and the jackpot winning during the period is "yes", the prohibition level is "level 5", and if the jackpot winning during the period is "none" , the prohibition level "level 2" is stipulated. If the target reservation is "3" and the jackpot winning during the period is "yes", "level 5" is stipulated as the prohibition level, and if the jackpot winning during the period is "none", the prohibition A level "Level 3" is defined. Also, if the target reservation is "4" and the jackpot winning during the period is "yes", the prohibition level is "level 5", and if the jackpot winning during the period is "none" , the prohibition level "level 4" is stipulated.

<Regarding the control process of the audio ramp control device 113 in the 32nd embodiment>
Next, the contents of control processing executed by the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 in the thirty-second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 569 and 570. FIG. In the thirty-second embodiment, in place of the prefetching effect execution determining process (see S2306 in FIG. 509), the prefetching effect execution determining process 6 (see S2376 in FIG. The difference is that the winning command reception process 6 (see S2280 in FIG. 570) is executed instead of the process (see S2210 in FIG. 510), and the rest is the same. The same processing contents are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed descriptions thereof are omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 569, the content of the look-ahead effect execution determination process 6 (S2376) will be described. FIG. 569 is a flowchart for showing the processing contents of the look-ahead effect execution determination process 6 (S2376). In this look-ahead effect execution determination process 6 (S2376), the information stored (stored pending) in the winning information storage area 223f is read, and the number of stored information (special figure pending ball number) and the jackpot It is configured to execute a process of identifying the presence or absence of information indicating winning, and execute a process of determining whether the current period is the prefetching prohibition period based on the result of the process.

That is, as in the twenty-seventh and twenty-eighth embodiments described above, the effect mode (effect period) of the prefetch effect that can actually be executed is determined, and the determined effect period of the prefetch effect overlaps the SP time period. Instead of discriminating whether or not to play, the period in which the look-ahead effect can be executed is roughly specified based on the information stored in the winning information storage area 223f, and the prohibition level corresponding to the specified period is determined and determined. Based on the elapsed time T, it is determined whether or not the specified prohibition level is defined. Then, if the determined prohibition level is specified at the timing, the process of determining whether or not to execute the prefetch effect and the process of determining the effect mode of the prefetch effect are skipped, and the determined prohibition level is specified. If it is the timing when it is not executed, the process of determining whether or not to execute the look-ahead effect and the process of determining the effect mode of the look-ahead effect can be executed.

By configuring in this way, the process of determining the effect mode of the look-ahead effect, which may not be executed, is not executed in advance. ) can be reduced.

When this look-ahead effect execution determination process 6 (S2376) is executed, first, information stored in the winning information storage area 223f (information for indicating the result of the special symbol lottery, information for indicating the variation pattern, special Information corresponding to the counter value of the symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223a or the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223b (information for indicating the number of reserved balls)) is read out (S2401), and then, based on the processing of S2401 The information corresponding to the winning information command received before the winning information command received this time, that is, the information corresponding to the winning information command in which the special symbol variation is executed before the winning information command received this time is a big hit. It extracts whether information indicating winning is included (S2402).

That is, in the process of S2402, there is a possibility that the big winning game will be executed before the special symbol variation corresponding to the winning information command that is the target of this look-ahead effect execution determination process 6 (S2376) is executed. Information (read-ahead jackpot information) referred to when determining whether or not is extracted.

After the processing of S2402 is completed, the current prohibition level (no prohibition, prohibition levels 1 to 5, prefetching prohibited) is determined (S2471), the current prohibition level is specified by referring to the effect switching 6 table 223fa (S2472), and the prohibition level determined in the process of S2471 is the current prohibition level. It is determined whether it is defined as a prohibition level (S2473), and if it is determined that it is defined (S2473), it is possible to execute a prefetch effect for the special figure hold corresponding to the winning information command received this time. Since it is impossible (difficult), the process of determining whether or not to execute the look-ahead effect (S2475) and the process of determining the effect mode of the look-ahead effect (S2476 to S2479) are skipped, and the process is performed as it is. finish.

On the other hand, in the process of S2473, if it is determined that the prohibition level determined in the process of S2471 is not defined as the current prohibition level (S2473: No), the special figure corresponding to the winning information command received this time is determined. It is determined whether or not to execute the look-ahead effect for the suspension (S2474), and when it is determined not to perform the look-ahead effect (S2474: No), this processing is terminated as it is. Also, if it is determined to execute the prefetch effect, that is, if it is determined that the received prize information command contains information for executing the prefetch effect (S2474: Yes), the prefetch effect to be executed this time is determined. , It is determined whether it is a look-ahead performance (a look-ahead performance using a plurality of variation performances) using a variable performance (variation performance executed in correspondence with the special symbol variation) (S2475), and a look-ahead performance using the variation performance (S2475: Yes), the continuous notice 223t is set to ON (S2476), the content of the determined prefetch effect is stored in the effect state storage area 223h (S2478), and the target of the prefetch effect is stored. The number of times (variation times) up to the special symbol variation (special symbol variation) corresponding to the winning information is set to the continuous notice counter 223u (S2479), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S2475, if it is determined that the prefetch effect is not executed in the variable effect (the pending prefetch effect is executed) (S2475; No), the display command for changing the display mode of the target pending symbol is set, and this processing ends.

Here, an effect mode of the above-described look-ahead effect will be described. Specifically, as a look-ahead performance using the performance period of the variation performance corresponding to the three consecutive special symbol variations, the look-ahead performance was executed in the first variation performance (first variation performance). A look-ahead display mode for indicating (for example, a display mode that displays numbers that are counted down each time a new variation effect (special symbol variation) is executed, and a new variation effect (special symbol variation) is executed. A display mode that displays a variable display mode in which the color is variable, and a display mode that indicates to the player that the look-ahead effect is in progress (a display mode that stops and displays the third symbol in a so-called chance eye). Then, the player is notified in an easy-to-understand manner that the look-ahead performance has been executed. Then, in the variable performance to be executed next (second variable performance), the look-ahead performance is continued by variably displaying or continuously displaying the look-ahead display mode for indicating that the look-ahead performance is executed. is notified to the player in an easy-to-understand manner. Finally, in the final variable performance (third variable performance), this time the variable performance is the variable performance that is the target of the look-ahead performance (special pattern variation that is the element that determines the performance of the look-ahead performance) A look-ahead effect for displaying a look-ahead result display mode for showing is executed.

In this way, by executing the look-ahead performance using the variable performance, it is difficult for the player to understand how long the look-ahead performance will continue, and the performance results for each variable performance executed during the look-ahead performance. is displayed, when the effect result of the variable effect is displayed, the player expects that the current variable effect is a variable effect indicating the result of the prefetching and that the lottery result of the corresponding special pattern is a big hit. In addition, the continuation of the look-ahead effect can be expected, and the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

It should be noted that the timing of displaying the display mode for notifying the player of the variable performance during the look-ahead performance in an easy-to-understand manner may be the start timing or the end timing of the target variable performance. In other words, any timing is acceptable as long as it is possible for the player to grasp that the variable performance is being read-ahead performance during the period from the start of the variable performance to the start of the next variable performance. .

In addition, as the period for displaying the display mode for informing the player in an easy-to-understand manner that the variable effect is being performed during the look-ahead effect, the entire period in which the look-ahead effect is executed may be set, or a specific timing may be set. (For example, only the timing at which the third symbol starts to change or the timing at which it stops changing) may be displayed. Furthermore, it may be configured to be displayed so as to straddle a plurality of variable effects.

In this way, by varying the timing and the display period of displaying the display mode for informing the player that the variable effect is being executed during the pre-reading effect in an easy-to-understand manner, the variation that the pre-reading effect has started for the player is performed. It is possible to make it difficult to grasp a performance or a variable performance in which the look-ahead performance is finished, and to provide an unexpected performance, for example, a look-ahead performance that actually continues while making the user think that the look-ahead performance is finished. It becomes possible. Therefore, the performance effect can be enhanced. Also, although detailed explanation is omitted, in the look-ahead effect using the variable effect, the larger the number of variable effects (the number of special symbol fluctuations) that is the target of the look-ahead effect, the higher the expectation of winning the jackpot. ing. By configuring in this way, since the player will pay attention to the number of fluctuation effects (the number of special symbol fluctuations) executed during the look-ahead effect, the fluctuation effect in which the look-ahead effect is started for the player Also, by making it difficult for the player to grasp the variable performance that the look-ahead performance has ended, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

On the other hand, as the look-ahead effect executed without using the variable effect, the reserved look-ahead effect (see FIG. 449) using the reserved design displayed on the display screen of the third design display device 81 is executed. As shown in FIG. 449, this pending look-ahead effect is a state in which the player is notified in an easy-to-understand manner of the pending symbol (special symbol variation) to be targeted for the look-ahead effect (the effect result of the look-ahead effect is displayed). By varying the display mode of the symbols, an effect is executed to increase the degree of expectation that the result of the look-ahead effect is a big win. In other words, in the look-ahead effect using the variable effect described above, by making it difficult for the player to understand which reserved pattern (special symbol change) is the target of the look-ahead effect, the look-ahead effect continues each time the variable effect ends. While it was intended to enhance the production effect, the pending look-ahead effect is that the display mode of the reserved design is a big hit before the special design variation corresponding to the reserved design targeted for the look-ahead effect is executed. The presentation effect is heightened by making the user expect that the winning expectation is high.

In this way, by constructing so that the performance effect can be enhanced by different factors depending on the aspect of the look-ahead performance to be executed, the performance to be executed becomes monotonous and the player quickly becomes bored with the game. can be suppressed. Further, as described above, if the pachinko machine 10 is configured to be able to execute different aspects of the look-ahead effect, information on the aspect of the look-ahead effect executed in the past (the number of times of execution, the execution content, the result of the effect (response judgment result)) may be provided to temporarily store the information, and based on the information stored in the storage means, the aspect of the look-ahead effect to be newly executed may be determined. As a result, it is possible to prevent the mode of the look-ahead effect from being biased and the content of the effect to be executed from becoming monotonous.

Next, with reference to FIG. 570, the contents of the winning command reception process 6 (S2280) will be described. FIG. 570 is a flow chart showing the details of the winning command reception process 6 (S2280). As shown in FIG. 570, the winning command receiving process 6 (S2280) in this embodiment is different from the winning command receiving process (see S2210 in FIG. 510) in the twenty-seventh embodiment. (see S2276 in FIG. 569) is configured to be executable.

When the winning command receiving process 6 (S2280) is executed, first, the processes of S2501 to S2506 which are the same as the winning command receiving process of the twenty-seventh embodiment (see S2210 in FIG. 510) are executed, and then the look-ahead effect is executed. Execution decision processing 6 (S2509 (S2376)) is executed, and this processing ends.

In the thirty-second embodiment, the process related to S2510 to S2515 executed in the winning command reception process (see S2210 in FIG. 510) of the twenty-seventh embodiment described above is the look-ahead effect execution determination process 6 (see FIG. 569). (see S2376 of )), so it is omitted in this figure. Further, in the twenty-seventh embodiment described above, the look-ahead effect execution determination process (S2306 in FIG. 509) is configured to be executable based on the determination results at two timings, and the thirty-second embodiment is also configured to perform the same two timings. 6 (S2376 in FIG. 569) is configured to be executable based on the determination result in , but the timing of execution (opportunity required for execution) is the same Processing content on the side (Details of processing described in FIG. 508) are omitted from detailed description.

<Thirty-third Embodiment>
Next, the thirty-third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 571 to 579. FIG. The thirty-third embodiment differs from the twenty-seventh embodiment described above in that the content of the pseudo-fluctuation effect executed during the high-speed fluctuation mode (see FIG. 378(a)) is different. are identical. A detailed description of the same contents will be omitted.

In the twenty-seventh embodiment described above, when the high-speed variation mode is set, that is, by switching the type of the variation pattern table referred to when determining the variation pattern of the special symbol variation, the variation of the relatively short variation time When a high-speed fluctuation pattern table in which a pattern is likely to be selected is referred to, and the player is notified that the high-speed fluctuation mode has been set, the player is notified that the high-speed fluctuation mode has been set. In order to solve the problem that a special pattern variation may be executed in a variation pattern other than the high-speed variation despite the fact that the game is changed, and a performance that makes the player feel uncomfortable is performed, the high-speed variation mode is supported. In addition to setting the high-speed fluctuation pattern table to be used, the player is informed that the high-speed fluctuation mode is set on the condition that the actually determined fluctuation pattern is high-speed fluctuation.

That is, when the special symbol fluctuation actually fluctuates at high speed, it is configured to inform the player that the high speed fluctuation mode has been set, and the content notified to the player matches the actual game content, It was constructed so as to be able to provide a game that is easy for the player to understand.

Furthermore, in a state in which the variation pattern of the special symbol variation is determined by referring to the high-speed variation pattern table, a deviation variation pattern with a variation time of 6 seconds is determined as a variation pattern other than the high-speed variation (variation time of 1.5 seconds). In such a case, the text "preparing for high-speed fluctuation" is displayed in order to inform the player that the high-speed fluctuation mode is coming soon, without notifying that the high-speed fluctuation mode has been set. (See FIG. 457(b)). In other words, it is configured to delay the timing of informing the player that the high-speed fluctuation mode has been set, even though the game state has shifted to the game state in which the high-speed fluctuation pattern table is referred to. . Then, until the fluctuation pattern of the high-speed fluctuation (fluctuation time of 1.5 seconds) is determined, the notification timing for informing the player that the high-speed fluctuation mode has been set is delayed.

In addition, when a variation pattern with a variation time of 12 seconds is determined as a variation pattern other than the high-speed variation (variation time of 1.5 seconds), a notification that the high-speed variation mode has been set as described above If the process of delaying the timing is executed, the jackpot game will be started without letting the player know that the high-speed fluctuation mode has been set, even though the high-speed fluctuation mode has been set. , As a notification mode for notifying the player that the high-speed fluctuation mode has been set, a notification mode that can give benefits to the player (setting suggestion mode, value-added production animation that cannot be seen elsewhere, etc. ) can be set, the player loses the opportunity to acquire the privilege by winning the jackpot despite being in a state in which the privilege can be acquired, and the player's motivation to play is reduced. There was a problem.

Therefore, in the twenty-seventh embodiment described above, the result of the special symbol lottery executed immediately after the high-speed variation mode is set is a jackpot winning, and a variation pattern other than high-speed variation (for example, a variation pattern with a variation time of 12 seconds ) is determined, a notification mode is set to indicate that the high-speed variation mode has been set at the timing when the jackpot variation (12-second variation) is started, and during the 12-second variation period, It was configured to execute a pseudo-fluctuation effect (see FIG. 457). In other words, during one special symbol variation period, it is configured to be able to execute the variation performance as if the special symbol variation were executed a plurality of times.

Here, in the pseudo-fluctuation effect (12 seconds) executed in the twenty-seventh embodiment described above, as shown in FIG. A pseudo-variation production is executed once, and after the special figure fluctuation (loss fluctuation) of 1.5 seconds is executed four times for the player, 6 It was possible to make it seem that the second special symbol variation (hit variation) was executed once, but in fact, it was changed multiple times (total of 5 times) during one special symbol variation period. Since the production is only executed, as shown in FIG. 378 (a), the number of reserved symbols displayed for indicating the number of special figures reserved does not change, and the player understands that the pseudo-fluctuation production is executed. There was a problem that it would be done.

On the other hand, in the 33rd embodiment, when the pseudo-fluctuation effect is executed as the variable effect, the display area of the reserved pattern for indicating the special figure reserved number is switched, and the reserved pattern before switching is displayed. It is configured to display a pseudo reserved pattern for production in the display area that was used. The number of pseudo reserved symbols to be displayed varies (decreases) every time the pseudo variable effect is executed. By configuring in this way, it is possible to execute an effect in which one pseudo-reserved symbol is decreased each time the pseudo-variable effect is executed, and the variable effect being executed is the pseudo-variable effect for the player. It can be difficult to tell if there is or not.

In addition, since the actual number of reserved special figures is displayed in a separate display area, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the actual number of reserved special figures is suddenly not displayed and the player is confused. can.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the number of displayed pseudo-pending symbols is reduced by executing the pseudo-variation effect, and when there is an empty space in the display area for displaying the pseudo-pending symbols, the empty display area is set. The suggestion production is configured to be executable. Details will be described later, but when a winning information command containing winning information of a new special symbol is received in a state where an empty display area is generated, a new pseudo-pending symbol is displayed in the empty display area, The setting suggesting effect is executed using the display mode of the new pseudo-holding pattern.

In other words, when the ball enters the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640 during the period during which the effect of varying the number of displayed pseudo reserved symbols according to the number of times of execution of the pseudo variable effect is executed. , it is configured to execute an effect in which the number of displayed pseudo reserved symbols is increased. By configuring in this way, the variable state of the pseudo performance executed using the pseudo variable performance and the pseudo reserved pattern is changed to the variable state of the performance performed using the actual variable performance and the reserved pattern. The approximation can be facilitated, and it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand whether or not the variable performance being executed is the pseudo-variable performance.

In addition, the pseudo-fluctuation production is executed with the number of special figures pending reaching the upper limit, and the winning information command containing the winning information of the new special symbols with the empty display area generated during the pseudo-fluctuation production is received, that is, if the winning information command received this time is winning information (overflow winning information) that cannot be stored as a new special figure pending, winning information that can be stored as a new special figure pending ( It is configured such that the display mode corresponding to the mode (strongly suggestive mode) that makes it easier for the player to predict the set value is more likely to be displayed than in the case of normal winning information.

By configuring in this way, even when the actual number of reserved special symbols reaches the upper limit, the player is motivated to enter the first ball entrance 64 and the second ball entrance 640. A game in which a ball is entered can be played, and the operation of the game can be improved.

<Regarding the contents of the effect executed by the pachinko machine 10 of the thirty-third embodiment>
Next, referring to FIGS. 571 and 572, as a characteristic effect content among the various effects executed by the pachinko machine 10 of the thirty-third embodiment, a pseudo-fluctuation effect executed during the high-speed fluctuation mode is shown. Explain the contents of the performance. In addition, the notification mode for notifying that the high-speed fluctuation mode has been set, the conditions for executing the pseudo-variation production during the high-speed fluctuation mode, and the basic production contents in the pseudo-variation production are described in the above-mentioned 27th embodiment. Since it is the same as the form, its detailed description is omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 571(a), the display contents during the first pseudo-fluctuation effect (1.5 seconds off pseudo-fluctuation) among the pseudo-fluctuation effects executed during the high-speed fluctuation mode will be described. FIG. 571(a) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen displayed during the first pseudo-fluctuation effect among the pseudo-fluctuation effects executed during the high-speed fluctuation mode. As shown in FIG. 571(a), the display screen displayed during the main effect is different from the display screen (see FIG. 457(a)) displayed during the pseudo-fluctuation effect in the twenty-seventh embodiment described above. The display content of the sub display region Ds is changed, and the display content of a partial region of the main display region Dm is changed. The same display contents are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 571 (a), when the pseudo-fluctuation effect is executed, instead of the reserved design display for indicating the number of special figures reserved displayed in the sub-display area Ds, the pseudo reserved design gm0 for production ~gm4 is displayed. Then, as a guidance mode indicating that the high-speed variation mode has been set, the comment "speed up" is displayed in such a mode that the character J0 is issuing a comment.

In addition, a display area HR2 is formed on the upper right side of the main display area Dm, and a value of "4" is displayed as a reservation number display mode for indicating the actual special figure reservation number. That is, the diagram shown in FIG. 571(a) shows a state in which the number of special figure reservations is four.

Then, from the state shown in FIG. 571(a) (the state where the first pseudo-fluctuation effect is completed), when the second pseudo-fluctuation effect (1.5 seconds off fluctuation) is executed, FIG. 571(b) The display screen shown in is displayed. FIG. 571(b) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen displayed during the second pseudo-fluctuation effect out of the pseudo-fluctuation effects executed during the high-speed fluctuation mode.

As shown in FIG. 571(b), when a new (second) pseudo-fluctuation effect is executed, the pseudo-suspended symbol displayed in the sub-display area Ds is slide-displayed. As a result, while the first pseudo-suspended symbol gm0 was displayed on the running symbol pedestal m0 during execution of the first pseudo-fluctuation effect, it corresponds to the pseudo-fluctuation effect newly (second time) executed. A second pseudo reserved symbol gm1 is displayed on the active symbol pedestal m0. Then, the third pseudo reserved pattern gm2 to the fifth pseudo reserved pattern gm4 are also slide-displayed in order, and an empty display area is generated in the fourth reserved pattern pedestal m4.

Then, a flag icon with the characters "special symbol display zone" is displayed as a notification mode for indicating that the empty display area generated on the fourth reserved symbol pedestal m4 becomes the execution area of the setting suggestion effect, A display mode is displayed in which the character J0 issues a comment of "zone appearance". Further, since the detailed effect content regarding the special symbol display zone is the same as that of the twenty-ninth embodiment (see FIG. 549), detailed description thereof will be omitted. In addition, the state shown in FIG. 571(b) is a state in which the special symbol variation being executed continues to fluctuate in the state shown in FIG. 571(a). The number of special figures pending displayed in the display area HR2 remains "4".

In the state shown in FIG. 571(b), when the player enters the ball into the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640, a new pseudo-holding symbol appears in the special symbol display zone, suggesting setting. It is displayed in a display mode including a mode.

Next, with reference to FIG. 572, the display contents of reserved symbols in the high-speed variation mode will be described. FIG. 572(a) is a diagram showing the transition state of the game mode (game situation) of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 572(b) is a diagram showing the transition state of the number of special symbol fluctuations. (c) is a diagram showing an outline of the effect executed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, and FIG. FIG. 572(e) is a diagram showing the transition of the display mode of the small display area (holding display area) Ds1 of the sub display area Ds on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81. FIG. 572(f) is a diagram showing the display mode of the display area (switching display area) HR2 of the main display area Dm of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. FIG.

In addition, since it is the same as that of the twenty-seventh embodiment described above (see FIG. 458), the detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Until the high-speed fluctuation mode is set, as shown in FIG. 572(e), the number of reserved symbols corresponding to the special figure reserved number is displayed in the reserved display area Ds1. Then, even if the high-speed fluctuation mode is set, if the determined special figure fluctuation time is 1.5 seconds (high speed fluctuation), the number corresponding to the number of special figure reservations in the reservation display area Ds1 The symbol is continuously displayed (a special figure pending display period is set).

On the other hand, in the state where the high-speed variation mode is set, when the non-high-speed variation (12-second jackpot variation in the figure) is set, the pseudo-variation effect is executed, and the pseudo-suspended pattern is displayed in the suspension display area Ds1. is displayed, and the number of special figures pending is displayed in the switching display area HR2.

As shown in FIG. 572(e), when the pseudo reserved symbols are displayed, the displayed number is subtracted each time the pseudo fluctuation effect is executed. It should be noted that, during the fluctuation period of the 82nd special symbol fluctuation (12-second jackpot fluctuation), five pseudo-fluctuation effects are executed, so as shown in FIG. is not displayed as a subtraction.

In this state, when a new winning (starting winning of a special figure) occurs, the special figure pending number is added and displayed, and the pseudo pending symbols are also added and displayed. Then, when the pseudo reserved symbols are added and displayed, a new pseudo suspended symbol is displayed in the special symbol display zone shown in FIG.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 572, in the present embodiment, the design of special figure suspension or pseudo suspension is always displayed in the suspension display area Ds1. Therefore, the player does not feel uncomfortable when displaying the pseudo reserved pattern. In addition, in order to make it difficult for the player to understand that the pseudo-fluctuation effect is being executed, when the pseudo-fluctuation effect is executed, the reservation display area Ds1 is hidden (whether or not the special figure reservation number is subtracted The player does not feel uncomfortable even compared to the case of not displaying the special figure reserved pattern in order to make it difficult to discriminate.

In addition, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 572 (e), as the initial display mode when the pseudo-reserved design is displayed, corresponding to the special figure reservation number that was displayed in the previous reservation display area Ds1 It is configured to set the display mode. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to feel uncomfortable when the symbols to be displayed are switched.

<Electrical Configuration in the 33rd Embodiment>
Next, an electrical configuration in the thirty-third embodiment will be described. The thirty-third embodiment differs from the twenty-ninth embodiment in that a part of the configuration of the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 is changed, but the rest is the same. . A detailed description of the same contents will be omitted.

FIG. 573 is a diagram schematically showing the configuration of the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 according to the thirty-third embodiment. As shown in FIG. 573, the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 in the thirty-third embodiment is similar to the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 in the twenty-ninth embodiment (see FIG. 550(b)). ) in that a pseudo pending display flag 223ga and a pseudo free space storage area 223gb are newly provided, and the rest is the same. The same reference numerals are assigned to the same contents, and detailed description thereof is omitted.

The pseudo pending display flag 223ga is a flag for indicating that the pseudo pending symbol gm is being displayed in accordance with the execution of the pseudo variable effect, and is set to ON when the pseudo pending symbol gm is displayed. Then, it is referred to when determining whether or not a pseudo performance using the pseudo pending symbol gm is being executed, and indicates that the special symbol variation has been stopped and displayed while the pseudo pending display flag 223ga is set to ON. It is set to off when a stop command is received.

The pseudo empty area storage area 223gb stores information indicating that the pseudo reserved design gm slides (shifts) and an empty display area is generated in a state where the pseudo production using the pseudo reserved design gm is being executed. It is a storage area that stores the number of empty display areas, that is, the number that can additionally display a new pseudo-holding pattern gm.

The information stored in this pseudo empty area storage area 223gb is, when a new empty display area is generated, that is, when the pseudo pending design gm slides (shifts) corresponding to the execution of the pseudo variation effect, a new It is updated corresponding to the number of free display areas generated in , and is updated when a new pseudo-holding pattern is displayed.

<Contents of control processing in the 33rd embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 574 to 579, the contents of control processing in the thirty-third embodiment will be described. The thirty-third embodiment differs from the above-described twenty-ninth embodiment in a part of the control processing executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113, but the rest of the control processing content is the same. . The contents of the control processing executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 in the thirty-third embodiment are the winning command reception processing 3 (see S2260 in FIG. 554) instead of the winning command reception processing 3 (see S2260 in FIG. Receiving process 7 (see S22690 in FIG. 574), stop process (see S2214 in FIG. 513) instead of stop process 7 (see S2294 in FIG. 575), time-saving/positive variable effect setting process (see S3102 in FIG. 517) Instead of the time saving and probability variable effect setting process 7 (see S3192 in FIG. 577), instead of the liquid crystal effect execution management process 3 (see S2160 in FIG. 557) liquid crystal effect execution management process 7 (see S2190 in FIG. 578) , differ in their implementation, but are otherwise identical. The same processing contents are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof is omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 574, the contents of the winning command receiving process 7 (S2290) will be described. FIG. 574 is a flowchart for showing the processing contents of winning command reception processing 7 (S2290). This winning command receiving process 7 (S2290) differs from the winning command receiving process 3 (see S2260 in FIG. 554) of the twenty-ninth embodiment described above when it is determined that the period effecting flag 223p is set to ON. (S2502: Yes) is different in that the contents of the process to be executed are different, but other than that, they are the same. The same processing contents are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

When the winning command receiving process 7 (S2290) is executed, first, the winning information indicated by the received command is stored (set) in the winning information storage area 223f (S2501). That is, it is determined whether the SP time presentation is currently being performed (S2502). Then, when it is determined that the period effecting flag 223p is not set to ON (is set to OFF) (S2502: No), winning command reception processing 3 of the above-described twenty-ninth embodiment (S2260 in FIG. 554 ) are executed, and the process ends.

On the other hand, in the processing of S2502, if it is determined that the period effecting flag 223p is ON (S2502: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the present is in high speed fluctuation (S2591), and high speed fluctuation is in progress. If so (S2591: Yes), high-speed display winning effect setting processing for setting the effect mode when a winning command is received during high-speed fluctuation is executed (S2592), and this processing ends. In the process of S2591, if it is determined that the current is not in high speed fluctuation (S2591: No), the process of S2592 is skipped and the process ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 575, the contents of the high-speed display winning effect setting process (S2592) will be described. FIG. 575 is a flowchart for showing the processing contents of the high-speed display winning effect setting process (S2592). This high-speed display winning effect setting process (S2592) is performed during high-speed fluctuation (during special symbol fluctuation in the state where the high-speed fluctuation mode is set) in the winning command reception process 7 (see S2290 in FIG. 574). This process is executed when it is determined that the data has been received.

In this high-speed display winning effect setting process (S2592), a process for setting an effect of displaying a pseudo reserved symbol in a pseudo empty area is executed. Here, when displaying a normal reserved pattern, in the reserved ball number command process (see S2208 in FIG. 508) executed when the reserved ball number command output from the main controller 110 is received, The number of reserved balls included in the number of balls command is extracted, and the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter (special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223a or special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223b) is updated to the extracted reserved ball number. (S2301 in FIG. 508), the process of displaying the reserved design in the small display area Ds1 of the sub-display area Ds so as to correspond to the updated value is executed, but the number of special reserved balls of the pseudo reserved design is increased. In addition to the case where the ball enters the first ball entrance 64 and the second ball entrance 640, the number of displayed balls does not increase (when the overflow wins) can be increased, it is executed when a winning information command output from the main controller 110 is received.

In addition, without being limited to the configuration of the present embodiment, it may be configured so that the number of displayed pseudo-reserved symbols increases only when a command for the number of retained balls is received, in the same manner as in the normal display of reserved symbols. It may be configured such that the number of displayed pseudo reserved symbols increases when a person performs a specific operation on the frame button 22 . In other words, the pseudo-reserved design is not a display mode for indicating the number of reserved balls in the special design, but a display mode that is subtracted according to the number of times the pseudo-variation effect is executed, so every time a new pseudo-variation effect is executed It is sufficient that the number of displays is variable (subtracted), and the number of displays may be variable (added) according to other requirements.

When the high-speed display winning effect setting process (S2592) is executed, first, it is determined whether the pseudo pending display flag 223ga is set to ON (S4501), and if it is determined that it is set to ON ( S4501: Yes), next, the winning information command received this time is a special symbol winning, that is, an entrance that can trigger the execution of a special symbol lottery (first entrance 64, second entrance 640, right second It is determined whether it is a winning information command set based on the ball entering the ball entrance 640r) (S4502), and if it is determined that it is a special figure winning (S4502: Yes), pseudo empty area storage Based on the information stored in the area 223gb, it is determined whether there is a pseudo empty area (S4503).

In the processing of S4503, if it is determined that there is a pseudo free space (S4503: Yes), it is determined whether the special figure winning received this time is an overflow winning (S4504), and if it is determined to be an overflow winning ( S4504: Yes), the display mode corresponding to the suggestion mode (high suggestion mode) in which the player can easily predict the setting value is determined as the setting suggestion effect to be executed for the pseudo empty area (S4505), and then the process of S4505 is performed. update the pseudo-empty area information stored in the pseudo-empty area storage area 223gb (S4507) in correspondence with the pseudo-empty area for which the setting suggestion effect is executed (S4507), and terminate this processing.

On the other hand, in the processing of S4504, if it is determined that there is no overflow winning (S4504: No), the setting suggestion effect to be executed for the pseudo empty area is a suggestion mode (low suggestion mode) in which the set value is difficult for the player to predict. (S4506), and after that, in the processing of S4505, the pseudo-empty area information stored in the pseudo-empty area storage area 223gb is associated with the pseudo-empty area for which the setting suggestion effect is executed. is updated (S4507), and the process ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 576, the processing contents of stop processing 7 (S2294) will be described. FIG. 576 is a flowchart for showing the processing contents of stop processing 7 (S2294). This stop process 7 (S2294) is different from the above-described stop process (see S2214 in FIG. 513) in that a process when the pseudo pending display flag 223ga is set to ON is added. are identical. Identical contents are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed descriptions thereof are omitted. In FIG. 576, for convenience of explanation, the processing of S2801 to S2804 executed in the stop processing (see S2214 in FIG. 513) is replaced with the processing of S2894. Since they are the same, the description thereof is omitted.

When stop processing 7 (S2294) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the flag 223ga during pseudo hold display is set to ON (S2891), and if it is determined that it is set to ON (S2891: Yes) , the pseudo pending display flag 223ga is set to off (S2892), and the information stored in the pseudo free space storage area 223gb is cleared (erased) (S2893). After that, the same SP time period 2805 to S2813 processing as the above-described stop processing (see S2214 in FIG. 513) is executed, other processing is executed (S2894), and the stop display of the corresponding third symbol is set (S2814 ), the process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S2891, if it is determined that the pseudo pending display flag 223ga is not set to ON (S2891: No), the processes of S2892 and S2893 are skipped and the process proceeds to S2805.

Next, with reference to FIG. 577, the processing contents of the effect setting processing 7 (S3192) for time saving and probability variation will be described. FIG. 577 is a flow chart for showing the processing contents of the effect setting process 7 (S3192) for time saving/probability variation. This time-saving/probability-variable effect setting process 7 (S3192) is the time-saving/probability-variable effect setting process (see S3102 in FIG. 517) of the twenty-seventh embodiment described above. The difference is that the processing for determining the effect mode for displaying the pseudo-reserved pattern is added when the pseudo-reserved pattern is displayed, and the other points are the same. The same reference numerals are assigned to the same contents, and detailed description thereof is omitted.

When the time saving/probable variable effect setting process 7 (S3192) is executed, the same S3201 to S3206 processing as the time saving/probable variable effect setting process (see S3102 in FIG. 517) of the twenty-seventh embodiment described above is executed. Then, when the processing of S3206 is completed, that is, processing for determining a performance mode that is a pseudo-variation performance for a variation pattern (non-high-speed variation pattern) with a variation time of 12 seconds in the high-speed variation mode (S3206). , next determines the effect mode for displaying the pseudo-suspended pattern (S3291), sets the pseudo-suspended display flag 223ga to ON (S3292), and proceeds to the processing of S3205.

In the process of S3291, the display area of the reserved design for indicating the number of reserved balls of the special design is switched to the display area dedicated to the pseudo-fluctuation effect (see the display area HR2 in FIG. 571 (a)), and the display mode of the reserved design is changed to The display mode for switching to the pseudo-variation production dedicated display mode (the display mode indicated by the numbers displayed in the display area HR2 in FIG. 571 (a)) and the display area where the pending design before switching was displayed ( An effect mode for displaying a pseudo-reserved design on the sub-display area Ds) of FIG. 571(a) is determined. In this way, by configuring so as to determine the performance mode of the pseudo-reserved design display in accordance with the process of determining the performance mode of the pseudo-variation performance, the execution timing of the pseudo-variation performance and the execution timing of the pseudo-reservation design display. , can be synchronized with each other, it is possible to execute an effect that does not make the player feel uncomfortable.

Incidentally, when the pseudo-fluctuation effect and the effect using the pseudo-reserved pattern are executed, the background image displayed on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81 is switched to a dedicated background image, and the pseudo-reserved pattern is different from the display mode of the normal reserved pattern, and is preferably configured to be displayed in a display mode corresponding to the dedicated background image.

Next, with reference to FIG. 578, the contents of the liquid crystal effect execution management process 7 (S2190) will be described. FIG. 578 is a flowchart for showing the contents of the liquid crystal effect execution management process 7 (S2190). This liquid crystal effect execution management process 7 (S2190) is different from the liquid crystal effect execution management process 3 (see S2160 in FIG. 557) of the above-described twenty-ninth embodiment. The difference is that the processing executed in is added, and the rest is the same. The same reference numerals are given to the same contents, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

When the liquid crystal effect execution management process 7 (S2190) is executed, first, the processes of S4301 to S4312 which are the same as the liquid crystal effect execution management process 3 of the twenty-ninth embodiment (see S2160 in FIG. 557) are executed, and then , Determining whether the pseudo pending display flag 223ga is set to ON (S4391), and if it is determined that it is set to ON (S4391; Yes), the effect content in the state where the pseudo pending symbol is displayed is executed (S4392), and the process is terminated. On the other hand, in the processing of S4391, if it is determined that the pseudo pending display flag 223ga is not set to ON (S4391: No), the processing of S4392 is skipped and this processing ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 579, the processing contents of the pseudo holding effect setting process (S4392) executed in the liquid crystal effect execution management process 7 (S2190 in FIG. 578) will be described. FIG. 579 is a flowchart for showing the processing contents of the pseudo-suspension effect setting processing (S4392). In this pseudo pending effect setting process (S4392), a process for switching the effect mode of various effects being executed in correspondence with the elapsed time is executed.

When the pseudo pending effect setting process (S4392) is executed, it is determined whether it is the start timing of the pseudo variation (pseudo variation effect) (S4601), and if it is determined that it is the start timing (S4602), a new pseudo Since it is the timing at which the variation effect is executed, the slide display mode for sliding (shifting) the display position of the pseudo reserved design is determined in accordance with the execution of the pseudo variation (pseudo variation effect) (S4602), and the pseudo Determining whether there is a pseudo-empty display area in the reserved symbol display area (S4603), and if it is determined that there is a pseudo-empty display area (S4603: Yes), simulate corresponding to the contents of the pseudo-empty area after the slide movement The information stored in the free space storage area 223gb is updated (S4604), and this processing ends. Also, in the process of S4601, if it is determined that it is not the start timing of the pseudo-variation (pseudo-variation effect) (S4601: No), or if it is determined in the process of S4603 that there is no pseudo empty area (S4603: No) terminates this process as it is.

As described above, in the 33rd embodiment, the pseudo reserved symbols whose display number is subtracted corresponding to the execution of the pseudo fluctuation effect are switched and displayed with the reserved symbols for indicating the number of reserved balls of the special symbols. Since it is configured to do so, in the case where a pseudo-variation production in which the pseudo-variation production is executed multiple times during one special symbol fluctuation period, one pseudo-variation is performed for one special symbol fluctuation It is possible to easily make the player think that the variable performance is being executed.

In addition, in the thirty-third embodiment, the display area in which the reserved symbols for indicating the number of reserved balls of the special symbols are displayed is used to display the pseudo-held symbols, and the pseudo-fluctuation effect is executed. During the period, reserved symbols for indicating the number of reserved balls of special symbols are displayed in another display area. As a result, it is possible to display the pseudo-reserved pattern to the player without any sense of incongruity.

Further, during the pseudo-fluctuation performance, the pseudo-reserved symbols are displayed in a display mode that is easier for the player to understand than the reserved symbols for indicating the number of reserved balls of the special symbols. As a result, it is possible to make it easier to attract the player's attention to the increase or decrease in the number of displayed pseudo reserved symbols rather than to the reserved symbols for indicating the number of reserved balls of the special symbols.

Further, in the 33rd embodiment, when a specific condition is satisfied for the pseudo empty display area generated when the number of displayed pseudo reserved symbols decreases (when the slide moves) due to the execution of the pseudo fluctuation effect ( It is configured to display a new pseudo-reserved pattern when the ball enters the ball entrance that triggers the execution of the special pattern lottery). Therefore, it is possible to make the player easily think that the pseudo reserved symbol is a reserved symbol for indicating the reserved number of special symbols.

Furthermore, when the pseudo-variation production is executed in a state where the number of reserved balls of special symbols has reached the upper limit, that is, in the state where the number of reserved balls of special symbols has reached the upper limit, a pseudo empty area is displayed. In this case, a new pseudo-reserved design can be displayed based on the entry of the ball (overflow winning) into the entrance which triggers the execution of the special design lottery. Therefore, it is possible to make the player easily think that the pseudo reserved symbol is a reserved symbol for indicating the reserved number of special symbols.

In addition, it is configured to be able to execute the setting suggestion effect using the display mode of the pseudo reserved pattern displayed in the pseudo empty area. As a result, the player can be motivated to play the game.

As described above, in the 33rd embodiment, the number of displayed pending symbols (pseudo pending symbols) is reduced each time a pseudo variable effect is executed, so that the pseudo variable effect is a special symbol variable effect. Although it has been configured to make the player feel as if there is, in order to prevent the player from easily grasping that the pseudo-fluctuation effect is being executed, a configuration other than this may be used. Well, for example, by varying the display mode of the reserved symbols for indicating the number of reserved balls of special symbols, when the pseudo-fluctuation effect is executed, the number of displayed reserved symbols for indicating the number of reserved balls of special symbols In this case, for example, when a pseudo-fluctuation effect is executed in a state in which four reserved symbols for indicating the number of reserved balls of special symbols are displayed, four By changing the display mode of the reserved symbols of the eye to a display mode that is more difficult for the player to grasp than usual, the performance is executed to make the player think that the number of reserved balls of the special symbols has become three. Also good.

Here, as a display mode that is difficult for the player to comprehend, for example, a display mode that is difficult for the player to comprehend can be obtained by setting the display enlargement rate of the fourth reserved symbol to be smaller than the display enlargement rate of the other reserved symbols. Or, by making the transparency of the fourth reserved symbol higher than the transparency of the other reserved symbols, the display mode is made difficult for the player to grasp, or the display color of the fourth reserved symbol is changed to that of the other reserved symbols. By making the color of the background image closer to the color of the background image than the display color of , it is conceivable to make the display mode difficult for the player to grasp. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make the player easily think that the pseudo fluctuation production is a special symbol fluctuation production without using the pseudo reserved pattern, so that the player can receive the pseudo fluctuation production. It is possible to reduce the processing load and effect data capacity for executing without discomfort.

In addition, in the present embodiment, as a display object whose display number is variable according to the execution of the pseudo-fluctuation production, reserved patterns (pseudo reserved patterns) are used, but not limited to this, other display modes can be used. Also good. Further, in the 33rd embodiment, while the pseudo-fluctuation effect is being executed, the pseudo-suspended pattern is continuously displayed, but it is not limited to this, and at least the pseudo-fluctuation effect is executed. In accordance with the timing, the display number of the target display mode (pseudo hold pattern) should be executed to reduce the display number, so that the target display mode is temporarily hidden after the display number is reduced can be configured to

Further, in the present embodiment, the display number of the pseudo-reserved patterns displayed when the pseudo-fluctuation effect is executed is configured to display the number of displays corresponding to the number of reserved balls of the special symbols. It is configured to switch from the reserved pattern indicating the number of reserved balls to the pseudo reserved pattern without giving the player a sense of discomfort, but not limited to this, for example, based on the number of times the pseudo fluctuation effect is executed. The initial number of symbols to be displayed may be determined.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, when a pseudo-empty display area is formed, only within the range of the pseudo-empty display area is a special symbol display zone in which the setting suggestion effect can be executed. Without limitation, a predetermined range or the entire range of the display area behind the display area in which the pseudo empty area is formed may be used as the special symbol display zone.

In addition, in the 33rd embodiment, the effect content of the pseudo-reserved design (variable content of the number of displays) in the case of executing the pseudo-variation effect a plurality of times using the entire period of one special symbol variation. The technical idea used in the 33rd embodiment may be used for other techniques, for example, when executing three or more pseudo-variation productions using two or more continuous special symbol variation fluctuation periods Various technical ideas described in the thirty-third embodiment may be applied.

Furthermore, in the case of executing a pseudo-variation production once for a plurality of special symbol fluctuations, the display number of the reserved symbols indicating the number of reserved balls of the special symbols during the pseudo-variation production is reduced. As a technical idea for preventing the player from easily grasping that the effect is a pseudo-fluctuation effect, the technical idea of the above-described 33rd embodiment, that is, the reserved symbol indicating the number of reserved balls of the special symbol Alternatively, a technique may be used in which pseudo reserved symbols are displayed and the number of displayed pseudo reserved symbols is varied (decreased) based on the number of times the pseudo fluctuation effect is executed. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from easily recognizing that the variable performance being executed is the pseudo-variable performance.

<34th Embodiment>
Next, referring to FIG. 580, the thirty-fourth embodiment will be described. The thirty-fourth embodiment is different from the twenty-seventh embodiment described above in that the content of the restriction during setting change is different and the content of display is also different, but the rest is the same. The same reference numerals are given to the same contents, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In the twenty-seventh embodiment described above, the boot processing of the display control device 114 is performed while the processing for changing the setting values of the gaming machine is being executed, that is, in the state where the start-up processing of the main control device 110 is not completed. Since the start-up processing of the sound lamp control device 113 is not completed regardless of the progress of the above, the operation of the operation means such as the frame button 22 is disabled. On the other hand, in the thirty-fourth embodiment, the first frame button 22a and the second frame button 22b are provided as operation means, and one of the operation means (the second frame button 22b) can be operated even during the setting change operation. The difference is that they are configured to enable effective discrimination.

Specifically, in the start-up processing of the sound lamp control device 113 (see FIG. 503), it waits for a command (initialization command) to be output from the main control device 110 to indicate that the setting change operation has been completed. 505), a first operation enable setting process for enabling the operation of the second frame button 22b is executed. In this first operation validity setting process, a setting process for validly determining the operation of only some of the operation means of the pachinko machine 10 is executed.

Then, in the process executed after the standby process (see S2012 in FIG. 505), the second operation validation setting process for validating the operations for all the operation means can be executed.

Here, the operation means for which the operation is determined to be valid in the first operation validity setting process is an operation means capable of executing an operation other than the operation in which information is written in the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113, that is, some kind of operation means. It is not an operation means for determining change information (for example, information indicating the result of volume adjustment or brightness adjustment), but for performing an operation (change operation) for changing some information (for example, changing volume or brightness) (frame button 22b).

In other words, even during the setting change operation, the operation for changing the volume and brightness is effectively determined, but the operation for determining (writing to the storage area of the RAM 223) the volume and brightness after the change (determination). The operation means (the frame button 22a) for performing the operation) is configured to become effective after the setting change operation is completed. With this configuration, it is possible to perform a change operation for changing information even during a setting change operation. Efficiency can be improved.

Here, while the setting change operation is being executed, there are cases where the boot processing of the display control device 114 is completed and where it is not completed. Since the display screen of the 3-pattern display device 81 does not display information related to the change operation, there is a problem that when the change operation is executed, it is difficult for the operator to grasp how much the change operation has been executed. Also, even in the state where the boot process is completed, the operator is facing the back side of the pachinko machine 10 while the setting change operation is being executed, and the third symbol is displayed. Since it is difficult to see the display surface of the display device 81 , it is difficult to grasp the content of the change operation by visually checking the display screen of the third pattern display device 81 .

Therefore, in the thirty-fourth embodiment, the volume output from the audio output device 226 during setting change is changed according to the change operation, thereby making it easier for the operator to grasp the degree of change operation. there is By configuring in this way, it is possible for the operator facing the back side of the pachinko machine 10 to grasp the content of the change operation by voice, so that it is possible to perform a plurality of operations in duplicate. , work efficiency can be improved.

In addition, in the thirty-fourth embodiment, the environmental condition is switched between the default environmental condition (initial volume level) set in the initialization state and the environmental condition changed by the change operation (changed volume level). (audio output) is configured to be executable. This makes it possible to relatively grasp the environmental conditions after the change, compared to the case where only the environmental conditions changed by the change operation (volume level after change) are reported, so that the details of the change operation can be visualized. It is possible to make it easier for the worker to grasp the content of the change operation in a situation where it is difficult to grasp.

Here, with reference to FIG. 580, display contents displayed during the setting change operation in the thirty-fourth embodiment will be described. Fig. 580(a) is a diagram schematically showing the display screen during setting change, and Fig. 580(b) is a diagram schematically showing the display screen when the volume level is changed during setting change. It is a diagram.

As shown in FIG. 580(a), when the setting change operation is executed in the state where the boot process of the display control device 114 is completed, the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 shows "setting change in progress". Along with the characters being displayed, in the display area HR31, information indicating the operating means that can be operated by the worker and the operating means that cannot be operated in the current situation is displayed. In the diagram shown in FIG. 580(a), information is displayed indicating that the frame button 22b (indicated by a triangle in the figure) is valid and the frame button 22a (indicated by a circle in the figure) is invalid. ing. As a result, it is possible to notify the operating means that can be operated at the present time in an easy-to-understand manner.

In the display area HR30, a display mode indicating a volume level is displayed as default environment information set in the initial state. A display mode indicating that the environment information is set is displayed. This volume level indicates that the magnitude of the volume output from the audio output device 226 can be varied by varying the level. growing. In FIG. 580(a), numbers filled in black indicate volume levels, and the state in which all three are filled in black indicates volume level 3 at which the maximum volume is output.

During the setting change, the voice output device 226 outputs the message "setting being changed" at the default volume level as a notification mode for notifying the current situation that the setting is being changed by voice. It is configured as follows. As a result, the current status can be reported in an easy-to-understand manner. In addition, even if a setting change operation is performed illegally, the situation can be quickly detected.

In the present embodiment, it is determined that the operation of the frame button 22b is valid while the setting is being changed. Therefore, the volume level can be changed even during the setting change. A display mode for notifying that the volume level can be changed by operating the button 22b is displayed.

Note that the display contents shown in FIG. 580(a) are all commands indicating the state output from the audio lamp control device 113 in the state where the boot processing of the display control device 114 is completed (for example, start-up processing is completed). Image data is stored as a default image (initial image) that is displayed when a command indicating that the setting change process has been completed or a command indicating that the setting change process has been completed has not been received. Since the description of this initial image is the same as that of the twenty-seventh embodiment, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

When the frame button 22b is operated in the state shown in FIG. 580(a), as shown in FIG. A display mode indicating the volume level 3) is displayed in the display area HR30. Then, the voice output device 226 switches between the default volume level (volume level 2) and the changed volume level (volume level 3), and alternately outputs the message "setting being changed". As a result, the current status can be reported in an easy-to-understand manner. In addition, even if a setting change operation is performed illegally, the situation can be quickly detected.

As described above, in the thirty-fourth embodiment, even if the settings are being changed, that is, even if the initialization processing (start-up processing) of the pachinko machine 10 is not completed, By configuring a part of the operation means to be able to be effectively distinguished, it becomes possible to perform a plurality of tasks in duplicate, and work efficiency can be improved.

In the thirty-fourth embodiment, while the settings of the pachinko machine 10 are being changed, the operation invalid period is set to be different for a plurality of types of operation means. , It is not limited to during the setting change of the pachinko machine 10. It may be during the initialization process, or when the operator performs a specific operation in the state where the initialization process of the pachinko machine 10 is completed. It may be a period of switching to a setting state different from the playable state of (1), or a period of time when an abnormality occurs in the pachinko machine 10 and the game is temporarily disabled. Further, in the normal game-enabled state, an operation invalid period may be set for a period during which an effect (freeze effect) is executed to make the effect appear to have stopped halfway. , a period in which the time measured by the clock device 292 exceeds a specific time (for example, the closing time of the game arcade).

<About another example of setting suggestion>
In each of the above-described embodiments, the execution frequency of the setting suggestion effect is varied according to the set period, and the setting suggestion effect is executed within each period. That is, it is configured such that execution of setting suggestion performance is determined at an execution frequency corresponding to a set period, and the determined setting suggestion performance is executed within the period.

On the other hand, in this example, the period for determining the execution of the setting suggestion effect and the period for actually executing the setting suggestion effect are configured to be different.

Specifically, in a specific period (for example, during the SP time period or during the probability variable state), a specific condition (for example, a condition that is established when a jackpot is won, or a condition that is established when the reach reaches a predetermined number of times (3 times) When the condition for setting suggestion) is satisfied, a display mode (for example, a display mode showing a puzzle with missing pieces) that can be an element indicating the setting suggestion effect is displayed as the right to execute the setting suggestion effect.

Next, in a state in which the right to execute the setting suggestion effect is established, additional information (for example, puzzle pieces) is configured to be obtainable. More specifically, the determination means for determining whether or not to acquire additional information based on the operation of the operation means, and the number of prize balls acquired during the period after the execution right is established are determined in units of a predetermined number (for example, 1000 Acquisition means is provided for acquiring additional information when the number of pieces reaches the number of pieces.

Then, in a state where the right to execute the setting suggestion effect is established, every time additional information is acquired, it is added to a display mode that can be an element indicating the setting suggestion effect (for example, a display mode showing a puzzle with missing pieces). An effect is executed in which a display mode (element) corresponding to the information is added. Then, when a sufficient amount of additional information is added, a display mode for suggesting the setting value is formed (a setting suggesting effect is executed).

By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it easier for a player who has acquired the right to execute a setting-suggestion performance to continue playing until the setting-suggestion performance is executed within a specific period. can improve the operation of

When using the configuration of another example described above, it is preferable to set an upper limit for the period during which the right to execute the setting suggestion effect is held. As a result, the player can be motivated to play the game to execute the setting-suggestion performance within the period in which the right to execute the setting-suggestion performance is held.

In addition, if an upper limit is set for the period during which the right to execute the setting suggestion effect is held, an extension condition for extending the upper limit period (for example, a condition that is satisfied when a specific form of ready-to-win effect is executed, Conditions that are established when a specific operation is performed on the operating means, conditions that are established when a specific jackpot type jackpot is won) can be set, and when it is determined that the extension condition is established , the processing for extending the upper limit period may be executed. By configuring in this way, the player is motivated to play the game to execute the setting suggestion performance within the period in which the right to execute the setting suggestion performance is held, and the upper limit period is set by extending the upper limit period. A game aimed at facilitating execution of the suggestive performance can also be played, and the player can be motivated to participate in the game.

In addition, if a special condition different from the extension condition (for example, a reserved series) is established, the upper limit period may be abolished.

Furthermore, when the upper limit period is configured to be settable, it is preferable to configure so that the remaining period up to the upper limit period can be notified. As a result, it is possible to provide a game that is easy for the player to understand.

In addition, as a display mode (for example, a display mode showing a puzzle with missing pieces) that can be an element indicating a certain suggestive effect, it is preferable to set a display mode that gradually becomes possible to set and guess each time additional information is given. . This allows the player to predict the setting value even in a state in which all the additional information cannot be obtained.

<About the definition of setting suggestion>
Next, another example of the effect mode of the setting suggestion effect used in each of the above-described embodiments will be described. Here, the setting suggesting effect is not only the effect intended to provide information for indicating the set value to the player, but also all of the effect modes selected based on the information regarding the set value. This corresponds to suggestive production.

In addition, the execution of the effect means not only displaying the display mode visible to the player as described in each of the above embodiments, but also rendering the mode not displaying the display mode visible to the player. is included in the concept of execution of

Further, in each of the above-described embodiments, an example in which a specific display mode is displayed as a setting suggestive effect is shown, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a plurality of individually set display modes may be displayed in an overlapping manner. Therefore, the concept of the setting suggestion effect also includes a mode in which the player guesses the set value.

<First modification>
Next, a first modification will be described regarding the processing related to the operation of the operating means during the start-up processing described in the twenty-seventh and thirty-fourth embodiments. In each of the above-described embodiments, the operating means (frame button 22, etc.) provided on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 (see FIG. 444) is configured to set the operation invalid period. The operating means may be provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 10 (see FIG. 446). In this case, the operating means (operating means for management) provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 10 is provided at a position where the player cannot (difficultly) operate the pachinko machine 10. It is good to use it as an operating means for management that can set the environment.

Specifically, the adjustment range of the volume level and brightness that can be set by the player operating the operation means such as the frame button 22 is restricted by operating the management operation means operation means, or the player operates the operation means. It is preferable to restrict the types of performance modes that can be selected by custom selection for changing the performance modes executed in the pachinko machine 10 by operating the operating means for management.

The above operation means and the management operation means are configured to be able to set different operation invalid periods during the startup processing of the pachinko machine 10, and the management operation means is more invalid than the operation means. It is better to configure so that the period is short (the invalid period is not set).

<Second modification>
Next, a modification of the example described with reference to FIG. 459(b) of the twenty-seventh embodiment described above will be described with regard to the content of the effect during the round game executed during the jackpot game.

In the twenty-seventh embodiment described above, the number of rounds in which the number of acquired balls can reach a predetermined number unit (200 units) is specified as the effect mode of the round effect executed during the round game, and the effect mode of the round effect is specified. , based on the correspondence relationship between the number of rounds to be executed and the number of winning balls displayed, the performance mode of the round performance is determined.

On the other hand, in the second modified example, there is provided a determination means for determining in which round of the jackpot game the promotion performance is to be executed, and a storage means capable of storing the determined number of rounds is provided. Then, among the number of rounds specified by the specifying means for specifying the number of rounds in which the number of acquired balls can reach a predetermined number unit (200 units), the number of rounds after the number of rounds stored in the storage means is performed. Provide an execution means to execute.

By configuring in this way, the promotion effect can be executed in synchronization with the number of rounds in which the predetermined number of acquisition effect for congratulating the number of acquired balls reaching the predetermined number unit is executed.

Here, in the second modification, as the predetermined number acquisition effect, a different effect mode (for example, a mode in which the character type is changed, or a comment type (dialect, etc.) issued by the character is changed according to the number of acquired balls). mode) can be determined, and when it is specified that the round game of the number of rounds in which the predetermined number of winning effects are executed is executed, the performance mode is determined, and the determined performance mode is supported. Moving image data or still image data is generated, executed as an effect during a round game, and when the number of obtained balls actually reaches a predetermined number, an image for indicating the predetermined number is additionally displayed. is doing.

In the pachinko machine 10 configured as described above, if the setting of the performance mode of the predetermined number of acquisition performance and the determination of the promotion performance are executed independently, the promotion performance is executed during the execution of the predetermined number of acquisition performance. As a result, there is a risk that an effect that is difficult for the player to understand is executed.

More specifically, the effect mode used for the predetermined number of acquisition effects is executed based on moving image data or still image data corresponding to the effect mode determined by the determining means, and is executed based on the effect mode to be executed. Corresponding audio data (such as dialogue) is also set, so if the promotion effect is executed during a round game in which the predetermined number of acquisition effects are executed, the effect of the predetermined number of acquisition effects will be significantly reduced. I had a problem.

On the other hand, in the second modified example, the process for setting the effect mode of the predetermined number of acquisition effects and the process for determining the promotion effect can be executed in combination. An easy-to-understand presentation can be executed.

In each embodiment described above, based on the number of executions of the special symbol lottery, it was configured to be able to set a high-speed variation mode in which a variation pattern with a short variation time is likely to be selected, but as a transition condition to this high-speed variation mode A number other than the number of executions of the special symbol lottery may be provided, and when the result of the special symbol lottery is a specific lottery result other than the jackpot winning, for example, the variable winning device 65a is temporarily opened although the jackpot has not been won. A high-speed fluctuation mode can be set based on winning a small win in which a small win game is executed, or a high-speed fluctuation mode can be set across a big win game with a short jackpot game period. A specific mode transition lottery may be configured to be executable separately from the lottery of the pattern and the normal pattern, and the high-speed fluctuation mode may be set when the mode transition lottery is won.

Also, the same elements as the various conditions used when setting the high-speed fluctuation mode may be used to set the end condition for ending the high-speed fluctuation mode. It is preferable to set the termination condition by varying the numerical values (parameters) of various conditions. As a result, the setting condition and end condition of the high-speed variation mode can be set by simply changing the values, so that the data capacity for storing information regarding the setting of the high-speed variation mode can be reduced.

Furthermore, in each of the above-described embodiments, it is configured to determine whether or not to set the high-speed fluctuation mode based on the contents of the special symbol lottery (special symbol fluctuation), but not limited to this, the normal symbol lottery ( It may be configured to determine whether or not to set the high-speed variation mode based on the contents of normal symbol variation). In this case, for example, during the normal pattern fluctuation in which the electric accessory 640a is elected per long normal pattern in which the electric accessory 640a is opened for a long period of time as a normal pattern fluctuation, or during the game per long normal pattern, the normal pattern is not provided to the player. It is determined whether or not it is in a situation to make the player pay attention to the result of the lottery (normal pattern fluctuation), and the period during which the effect for making the player pay attention to the result of the normal pattern lottery (normal pattern fluctuation) is executed or executed Even if the high-speed variation of the special symbol is executed in the high-speed variation mode, the performance mode for notifying that effect may not be set for the period determined to be performed.

In this way, the period during which the production of the content that the player should pay more attention to than the special symbol lottery (special symbol variation) is executed, or the player should pay more attention than the special symbol lottery (special symbol variation). Even if the high-speed variation of the special symbols is executed in the high-speed variation mode during the period in which the execution of the performance of the content is determined, the performance mode for notifying the fact is not set, It is possible to clearly inform the player of the performance to which the player should pay the most attention.

In the above embodiment, the image controller 236 transmits the V interrupt signal to the MPU 231 at each display interval of the image for one frame (every 20 milliseconds in the above embodiment) at which drawing processing ends. However, the image controller 236 may transmit this V interrupt signal to the MPU 231 each time the third pattern display device 81 is driven to display an image for one frame. The third pattern display device 81 is driven so that one frame of image is always displayed at equal time intervals (20 millisecond intervals). By sending a , the time interval can be kept accurate without timing.

In the above-described embodiment, the demonstration effect may stop and display the third symbols consisting of the main symbols with no numerals "0" to "9". Further, the third pattern consisting of main patterns with numbers or main patterns with no numbers may be stopped and displayed in a translucent state. Alternatively, only the rear image may be changed without displaying the third pattern. Also, a character or back image completely different from the third pattern or back image used in the variable display may be displayed.

In the above-described embodiment, the third symbol display device 81 in which the variable effect is performed may execute the continuous advance notice effect, or a fourth symbol display device separate from the third symbol display device 81 may be provided to display the third symbol. By displaying the fourth pattern on the fourth pattern display device together with the variable effect executed by the display device 81, the continuous advance notice effect may be executed. In this case, the control of the fourth pattern display device may be performed by the display control device 114 or may be performed by the sound lamp control device 113 . Further, a continuous advance notice performance may be executed by providing the pachinko machine 10 with a role that operates according to various performances and activating the performance in a predetermined mode together with the variable performance. Further, by controlling the sound lamp control device 113, by outputting the sound for the continuous notice effect from the sound output device 226 of the pachinko machine 10, the continuous notice effect may be executed, or the illumination part of the pachinko machine 10. A continuous advance notice effect may be executed by lighting or blinking 29 to 33 together with the variable effect.

As a result, every time the variation effect is performed in the third pattern display device 81 (and the first pattern display device 37), the pattern is continuously displayed in the fourth pattern display device, or the character is operated in a predetermined manner. Or, by outputting a sound from the sound output device 226, or by lighting or blinking the illumination parts 29 to 33, the player can be given a feeling of anticipation of a big win. In addition, the player normally continues the game while watching the third pattern display device 81 where the variable effect is performed, but the pattern is displayed by the fourth pattern display device different from the third pattern display device 81. , the operation of the character, the sound output from the sound output device 226, or the lighting and blinking of the illumination parts 29 to 33, the continuous announcement effect is performed, and the effect different from the usual effect is performed to the player. can be easily recognized. In addition, the continuous announcement effect can be easily continued by simple control such as display of the pattern by the fourth pattern display device, operation of the character, sound output from the sound output device 226, or lighting / blinking of the illumination parts 29 to 33. It is possible to perform a preview performance.

Further, if the continuous notice effect is performed by outputting sound from the sound output device 226 or by lighting or blinking the illumination parts 29 to 33, the control of the continuous notice effect is performed by the sound lamp control device 113. The main control device 110 is made to perform the winning judgment and the lottery process at the start of the fluctuation, the voice lamp control device 113 is made to perform the continuous notice effect, and the display control device 114 is made to perform the change effect, so that the pachinko machine 10 continues When the advance notice effect is performed, each control device can be made to take charge of each process. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the load from concentrating on one control device, so that the performance required for the MPU of each control device can be kept low.

In addition, display of symbols for continuous advance notice effect on the third pattern display device 81, display of symbols for continuous notice effect on the fourth pattern display device, operation in a predetermined mode of the role, sound from the sound output device 226 At least two or more of the output and lighting or blinking of the illumination units 29 to 33 may be combined and controlled in conjunction with each other to execute a continuous advance notice effect. As a result, it is possible to execute more diverse continuous announcement effects. In addition, the execution method of the continuous notice effect (display by the third pattern display device 81, display by the fourth pattern display device, operation of the role, sound output from the sound output device 226, lighting or blinking of the illumination parts 29 to 33 , or a combination of them), by changing the game state after the end of the continuous notice effect (15R probability variable jackpot, 2R probability variable jackpot, 15R normal jackpot, off) Prepare multiple continuous notice effect modes selected according to good too.

Further, when the continuous advance notice effect is performed, an image for the continuous notice effect different from the variable effect may be displayed on the third pattern display device 81, or the continuous notice effect is performed when the variable effect is completed. As the displayed stop symbols, a so-called "chance eye", which is a combination of predetermined symbols, may be displayed. In this case, when the command determination process (S1602 in FIG. 395 (c)) executed by the MPU 221 of the display control device 114 determines the reception of the continuous notice command, the stop symbol determination flag corresponding to the chance eye is turned on. , and other stop symbol determination flags may be set to OFF. In the command determination process, after the stop identification command process, the process corresponding to the continuous notice command is executed in the other command process. It is set as a pattern. Therefore, it is possible to confirm and display the chance eye when the variation is stopped. Then, if the third symbol display device 81 continuously displays chance numbers as stop symbols for each variable performance, the player can be given an expectation that a big win will finally be obtained.

In the above-described embodiment, the main controller 110, when there is a winning (starting winning) to the first starting port 64a and the second starting port 64b, the number of pending balls incremented by "1" The case where each counter C1 to C3, CS1 acquired from the counter buffer along with the start winning is included as it is and is transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113 in response to the pending ball number command to be notified has been described. The types of counters included in the number-of-balls command may be part of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1, or may include values of other counters. Also, when the main controller 110 notifies the audio lamp controller 113 of the values of the counters acquired in conjunction with the start winning, the information indicating the values of the counters is included in the pending ball number command and notified. Instead, information indicating the value of each counter may be included in a command separate from the number-of-holds-balls command, and these values may be notified to the audio lamp control device 113 . As another command, it may be a dedicated command for notifying the voice lamp control device 113 of the value of each counter acquired with the start winning, or a variation pattern command, a stop pattern command, or other information may be voiced. The command for notifying the lamp control device 113 may be added with the value of each counter acquired with the start winning. As another command, when notifying the voice lamp control device 113 of the value of each counter acquired with the start winning, the command indicates that the value of each counter to be notified is a variable effect corresponding to the number of times of suspension It may include information indicating whether it is related. As a result, the sound lamp control device 113, based on the information about the number of times of suspension included in the command, stores each of A counter value can be stored.

In the above embodiment, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives the pending ball number command, the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 indicated by the pending ball number command may be stored in the RAM 223. , When a command for the number of pending balls (or a command indicating the value of each counter) is received, based on the value of each counter indicated by the command, whether it is a jackpot, the type of jackpot in the case of a jackpot, and the loss In this case, some or all of the outlier types, etc. are determined, and these determination results are used instead of the values of each counter indicated by the command, or combined with some or all of the values of the counters, You may store in RAM223.

In each of the above embodiments, regardless of which of the first starting port 64a and the second starting port 64b the ball has won, the number of retained balls is counted by the main controller 110 using one retained ball number counter 203a. I explained how to count. On the other hand, in the RAM 203 of the main controller 110, the number of reserved balls counter for the first starting opening corresponding to the first starting opening 64a, the number of reserved balls counter for the second starting opening corresponding to the second starting opening 64b, and the RAM 203 of the main controller 110 It is also possible to separately count the number of pending balls associated with starting winnings to the first starting port 64a and the number of pending balls associated with starting winnings to the second starting port 64b.

Further, in each of the above-described embodiments, regardless of which of the first starting port 64a and the second starting port 64b the ball has won, the case where the maximum number of balls that can be held is set to "4" has been described. The maximum number of reserved balls that can be reserved with the starting prize to the first starting port 64a and the maximum number of reserved balls that can be reserved with the starting prize to the second starting port 64b are separately determined and managed. good too. For example, the maximum number of reserved balls that can be reserved with the start winning to the first starting port 64a is set to "4", and the maximum number of reserved balls that can be reserved with the starting winning to the second starting port 64b is "4". As, at a certain point in time, the number of reserved balls with the start winning to the first starting port 64a is "4", and the number of reserved balls with the starting winning to the second starting port 64b is "2", even if there are more starting prizes in the first starting port 64a, the starting prizes will not be reserved, but if there are starting prizes in the second starting port 64b, they will be reserved. may As a result, the player can be made to recognize that the first starting port 64a and the second starting port 64b are separate, and the interest in the game can be enhanced.

Further, for example, the variable effect based on the starting winning to the second starting port 64b may be given priority over the variable effect based on the starting winning to the first starting port 64a. Alternatively, the variable effect based on the start winning to the first starting port 64a may be given priority over the variable effect based on the starting winning to the second starting port 64b. As a result, it is possible to make the player pay more attention to the starting opening where the variable effect is preferentially performed.

In the above-described embodiment, the game board 13 is provided with two starting holes, the first starting hole 64a and the second starting hole 64b, as starting holes for starting the jackpot lottery when a ball is entered. However, the number of starting ports is not necessarily limited to this, and the number of starting ports may be one or a plurality of three or more. When there are two or more starting ports, the RAM 203 has a corresponding reserved ball number counter for each starting port, and for each starting port, the reserved balls that are reserved according to the winning of the corresponding starting port are stored. You may make it count the number. Also, for each starting port, the maximum number of reserved balls that can be reserved with the start winning to the corresponding starting port may be set.

In addition, when there are two or more starting ports, the command for the number of pending balls sent by the main controller 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 to notify that the suspension has been performed with the winning of the starting port It may also include information indicating whether a hold has been made by winning a prize in the starter. Further, the variation pattern command that the main controller 110 transmits to the sound lamp control device 113 when starting variation may also include information indicating which starting port the variation effect is suspended. As a result, in the voice lamp control device 113, a holding ball number counter is prepared for each starting port, and when a holding ball number command is received, a holding ball number counter for the starting port indicated by the holding ball number command When the number of held balls is set to , and a variation pattern command is received, the number of held balls can be counted for each starting port by decrementing by 1 a counter of the number of retained balls for the starting port indicated by the variation pattern command.

Further, when a plurality of starting holes are arranged on the game board 13, the counter value acquired with the winning of each starting hole (starting winning) may be notified to the sound lamp control device 113. In this case, the command for notifying the voice lamp control device 113 of the counter value acquired by the main control device 110 in association with the start winning to any starting opening is may include information indicating whether Further, the variation pattern command that the main controller 110 transmits to the sound lamp control device 113 when the variation is started may also include information indicating whether the variation effect is associated with the start winning to which starting port. . Furthermore, in the RAM 223 of the sound lamp control device 113, a look-ahead information storage area is prepared for each starting opening, and each counter value transmitted from the main controller 110 in association with the starting winning to the corresponding starting opening is stored. It may be stored in the prefetch information storage area. As a result, every time a variation pattern command is received, shift processing can be performed on the look-ahead information storage area corresponding to the start opening that detected the start winning that triggered the execution of the variation effect indicated by the variation pattern command. can. Therefore, the value of each counter corresponding to the pending variable effect can be held in the sound lamp control device 113 for each starting port. Therefore, if the probability of winning a jackpot, the distribution probability of the jackpot type, the distribution probability of the losing type, etc. differ depending on the starting opening that won the start prize, in the look-ahead process, whether or not it will be a jackpot for each variation effect, It is possible to correctly determine a jackpot type in the case of a jackpot, a loss type in the case of a loss, etc., based on which start opening the winning prize is. In addition, when the variable performance based on the start winning to one starting port is given priority to the variable performance based on the starting winning to the other starting port, the variation based on the starting winning to the one starting port Pre-reading processing can be performed in order from the value of the counter corresponding to the performance, and the number of suspension times of the fluctuation performance that will be the most recent big win can be correctly determined.

Further, when a plurality of starting ports are provided, the sound lamp control device 113 receives a command from the main control device 110 for the value of each counter obtained based on the starting winning to the starting port. When the start of the performance is determined, the continuous notice performance may be executed over all the variable performances (suspended balls) suspended at that time regardless of the start opening where the start prize was awarded. In addition, in a pachinko machine provided with a plurality of starting openings, and in which a variable performance for winning a prize at one starting opening is executed preferentially over a variable rendering for winning a prize at another starting opening, The start of the continuous advance notice effect may be determined only from the result of the prefetching of the counter value obtained for the prize winning at the start opening where the variable effect is executed. Thus, it is not determined whether or not the execution of the continuous announcement performance is set for the variable performance corresponding to the winning to the starting port with the low priority, and the continuous announcement performance is not started for this variable performance. If a continuous announcement effect is started for the variable effect corresponding to the winning at the starting point with a low priority, and the variable effect is continuously suspended at the starting point with a high priority, the continuous warning effect will end soon. It is possible that there will be a situation where you do not. On the other hand, in this modification, the presence or absence of the setting of the execution of the continuous notice effect is not determined for the variable effect corresponding to the winning to the starting port with a low priority, and the continuous notice effect is not determined for this variable effect. is not started, so you can suppress the occurrence of such a situation.

<35th embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 in the thirty-fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 581 to 691. FIG. 581 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10 in the thirty-fifth embodiment, FIG. 582 is a front view of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIGS. FIG. 585 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10 for explaining the contents of various mechanisms provided in the area.

As shown in FIG. 581, the pachinko machine 10 has an outer frame 11 whose outer shell is formed by wooden frames combined in a substantially rectangular shape, and a and an inner frame 12 supported so as to be openable and closable. In order to support the inner frame 12 in the outer frame 11, metal hinges 18 are attached at two upper and lower positions on the left side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 581). A frame 12 is supported toward the front side so that it can be opened and closed.

A game board 13 (see FIG. 582) having ball entrances 63, 64b1, 64b2, 640, 65a, 650a, etc. into which a large number of nails and balls can enter is detachably attached to the inner frame 12 from the back side. be. A ball (game ball) flows down the front of the game board 13 to play a pinball game. In addition, the inner frame 12 includes a ball shooting unit 112a (see FIG. 586) that shoots a ball to the front area (game area) of the game board 13, and a ball shooting unit 112a that shoots a ball to the front area of the game board 13. A launch rail (not shown) or the like is attached to guide the vehicle to the target. Details of the numerous ball entrances provided on the game board 13 will be described later with reference to FIG.

On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 covering the front upper side and a lower tray unit 15 covering the lower side are provided. In order to support the front frame 14 and the lower tray unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached at two upper and lower positions on the left side of the front view (see FIG. 581). 14 and a lower tray unit 15 are supported toward the front side so that they can be opened and closed. The locking of the inner frame 12 and the locking of the front frame 14 are unlocked by inserting a dedicated key into the keyhole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

The front frame 14 is assembled with decorative resin parts, electric parts, and the like, and has a window portion 14c having a substantially elliptical opening at its substantially central portion. A glass unit 16 having two sheet glasses is arranged on the back side of the front frame 14, and the front side of the game board 13 can be visually recognized on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 16.例文帳に追加

The front frame 14 has an upper tray 17 for storing balls projected to the front side and formed in a substantially box-like shape with an open upper surface, and the upper tray 17 discharges prize balls, rental balls, and the like. The bottom surface of the upper tray 17 is inclined downward to the right when viewed from the front (see FIG. 581), and the inclination guides the ball thrown into the upper tray 17 to the ball shooting unit 112a (see FIG. 589). A frame button 22 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17 . The frame button 22 is operated by the player when, for example, the stage of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 582) is changed, or the content of the super ready-to-win effect is changed. be.

The front frame 14 is provided with light-emitting means such as various lamps around its periphery (for example, corner portions). These light emitting means are controlled to change the light emitting mode by lighting or blinking in response to changes in the game state such as when a big win is made or when a predetermined ready-to-win state is reached, and play a role of enhancing the effect during the game. Illuminated portions 29 to 33 containing light emitting means such as LEDs are provided on the periphery of the window portion 14c. In the pachinko machine 10, these electric decoration parts 29 to 33 function as production lamps such as big win lamps, and the respective electric decoration parts 29 to 33 are lit by lighting or blinking of built-in LEDs at the time of a big win or a ready-to-win production. Alternatively, it flashes to indicate that the jackpot is in progress or that the player is in the process of reaching one step before the jackpot. In addition, a display lamp 34 having a built-in light-emitting means such as an LED and capable of displaying when a prize ball is being paid out and when an error occurs is provided at the upper left portion of the front frame 14 when viewed from the front (see FIG. 581).

In addition, a small window 35 is formed by attaching a transparent resin from the back side so that the back side of the front frame 14 can be visually recognized on the lower side of the right electrical decoration part 32, and a pasting space K1 (Fig. 582) can be visually recognized from the front of the pachinko machine 10. In addition, in the pachinko machine 10, in order to bring out more splendor, a plated member 36 made of ABS resin, which is plated with chrome, is attached to the area around the electric decorations 29-33.

A ball rental operation unit 40 is arranged below the window portion 14c. The ball rental operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41 , a ball rental button 42 and a return button 43 . When the ball lending operation unit 40 is operated with banknotes, cards, etc. inserted into a card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, the balls are released according to the operation. Lending is done. Specifically, the frequency display section 41 is an area in which the balance information of the card or the like is displayed, and the built-in LED is turned on to display the remaining amount in numbers as the balance information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain lending balls based on information recorded on a card or the like (recording medium), and lending balls are supplied to the top tray 17 as long as the card or the like has a balance. be done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of the card or the like inserted in the card unit. A pachinko machine in which balls are directly lent to the upper tray 17 from a ball leasing device or the like without going through the card unit, that is, a so-called cash machine, does not require the ball leasing operation unit 40. A decorative seal or the like may be added to the installation portion to make the parts configuration common. It is possible to achieve commonality between a pachinko machine using a card unit and a cash machine.

In the lower tray unit 15 positioned below the upper tray 17, a lower tray 50 for storing balls that could not be stored in the upper tray 17 is formed in a substantially box-like shape with an open upper surface. there is On the right side of the lower tray 50, an operation handle 51 is provided which is operated by the player to hit the ball in front of the game board 13. As shown in FIG.

Inside the operating handle 51, there are a touch sensor 51a for permitting the driving of the ball shooting unit 112a, a shooting stop switch 51b for stopping the shooting of the ball during the pressing operation, and a rotation of the operating handle 51. A variable resistor (not shown) for detecting a dynamic operation amount (rotational position) based on a change in electric resistance is incorporated. When the operating handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes corresponding to the amount of rotation operation. A ball is shot with a strength (shooting intensity) corresponding to , and is hit in front of the game board 13 with a flying distance corresponding to the player's operation. Further, when the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the firing stop switch 51b are turned off.

A ball extraction lever 52 is provided at the lower front portion of the lower tray 50 for operation when discharging the balls stored in the lower tray 50 downward. The ball extracting lever 52 is always biased to the right, and when it is slid to the left against the bias, the bottom opening formed in the bottom of the lower tray 50 is opened. The ball naturally falls from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball extracting lever 52 is normally performed with a box (generally called a "senryo box") placed below the lower tray 50 to receive the balls ejected from the lower tray 50 . The operation handle 51 is arranged on the right side of the lower tray 50 as described above, and the ashtray 53 is attached on the left side of the lower tray 50 .

As shown in FIG. 582, the game board 13 includes a base plate 60 which is cut into a substantially square shape when viewed from the front. Sphere mouth 63, first ball entrance 64b1, right first ball entrance 64b2, second ball entrance 640, first variable winning device 65, second variable winning device 650, normal pattern starting port (through gate) 67, It is configured by assembling the variable display device unit 80, the sorting device 175, etc., and its peripheral portion is attached to the back side of the inner frame 12 (see FIG. 581). The base plate 60 is made of a light-transmissive resin material, and is formed so that the player can visually recognize various structures arranged on the rear side of the base plate 60 from the front side thereof. General ball entrance 63, first ball entrance 64b1, right first ball entrance 64b2, second ball entrance 640, first variable winning device 65, second variable winning device 650, normal design start gate (through gate) 67, the variable display device unit 80 and the sorting device 175 are arranged in through holes formed in the base plate 60 by router processing, and fixed from the front side of the game board 13 by tapping screws or the like.

The front central portion of the game board 13 can be viewed from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14c of the front frame 14 (see FIG. 581). Mainly referring to FIG. 582, the configuration of the game board 13 will be described below.

In front of the game board 13, an outer rail 62 formed by bending a strip-shaped metal plate into a substantially circular arc is planted, and a strip-shaped metal plate is placed inside the outer rail 62 in the same manner as the outer rail 62. An arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed by is erected. The outer periphery of the front surface of the game board 13 is surrounded by the inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62, and the front and rear sides are surrounded by the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 581). A game area is formed in which a game is played by the behavior of . The game area is the front surface of the game board 13 and is defined by two rails 61 and 62 and a resin outer edge member 73 connecting the rails (a winning opening is provided and a shot is fired). area where the ball flows down).

The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball shot from the ball shooting unit 112a (see FIG. 586) to the upper part of the game board 13. As shown in FIG. A return ball prevention member 68 is attached to the tip of the inner rail 61 (upper left part in FIG. 582) to prevent the ball once guided to the upper part of the game board 13 from returning into the ball guide passage again. be done. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right in FIG. 582) at a position corresponding to the maximum flying portion of the ball. is attenuated and rebounded toward the center.

A first pattern display device 37 is provided on the upper left side of the return rubber 69 . The first pattern display device 37 is arranged so as to be covered with the back surface of the game board 13 (the surface opposite to the surface forming the game area) made of a transparent resin (for example, ABS). It is configured so that the shot ball does not collide with the first pattern display device 37 .

The first pattern display device 37 is provided with first pattern display devices 37A and 37B having a plurality of LEDs as light emitting means and a 7-segment display. The first symbol display devices 37A and 37B display according to each control performed by the main controller 110 (see FIG. 586), and mainly display the game state of the pachinko machine 10. FIG. In this embodiment, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B indicate whether the ball has entered (won) the first ball entrance 64b1 or the right first ball entrance 64b2, or entered the second ball entrance 640. It is configured so that it can be used properly according to whether it has entered the ball (won a prize). Specifically, when the ball enters (wins) the first ball entrance 64b1 or the right first ball entrance 64b2, the first symbol display device 37A operates, while the ball , the first symbol display device 37B is activated when the ball enters (wins) the second ball entrance 640. As shown in FIG. That is, the first symbol display device 37A is for showing the lottery result of the lottery (special figure 1 lottery) executed when the ball enters the first ball entrance 64b1 or the right first ball entrance 64b2. The first symbol display device 37B is a display means for showing the lottery result of the lottery (special figure 2 lottery) executed when the ball enters the second ball entrance 640.

In addition, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B display the game state of the pachinko machine 10 (first variable state (high probability state of special symbols, high probability state of normal symbols), second variable state (high probability state of special symbols), High probability state, low probability state of normal design), normal state (low probability state of special design, low probability state of normal design), time saving state (low probability state of special design, high probability state of normal design)) The lighting state indicates whether or not the first symbol is changing (during dynamic display for stopping and displaying the combination of symbols to indicate the lottery result) by the lighting state, or whether it is stopped. Whether the pattern is a pattern corresponding to the big win advantageous to the player, a pattern corresponding to the big win disadvantageous to the player, or a winning pattern is indicated by the lighting state, the number of reserved balls is indicated by the lighting state, and a 7-segment display device displays the big win. Displays the number of rounds in progress and errors. A plurality of LEDs are configured so that each LED has a different emission color (for example, red, green, blue), and the combinations of the emission colors can suggest various game states of the pachinko machine 10 with a small number of LEDs. In this embodiment, various game states are notified by a combination of light emitting colors of the light emitting means (7-segment display device). For example, various game states may be notified by varying the length (blinking mode) of the period in which the light emitting means is lit and the period in which it is extinguished.

In the pachinko machine 10, a lottery (lottery for special symbols) is held when a ball enters (wins a prize) into the first ball entrance 64b1, the right first ball entrance 64b2, or the second ball entrance 640. done. Then, in the lottery of the special symbols, the success or failure determination (big hit lottery) of whether or not it is a big hit is performed. Here, based on the fact that it is determined that the jackpot has been won, a jackpot game is executed in which a privilege game state is advantageous to the player.

When the jackpot game is executed, it becomes an open state in which the ball can be easily won in the first specific winning port 65a of the first variable winning device 65 or the V winning port 650a of the second variable winning device 650, A game is executed in which a large number of prize balls can be obtained in a short period of time by allowing the balls to enter the respective prize openings. During this jackpot game, it is executed after the lottery result of the special symbol is stopped and displayed (confirmed display), and an opening period of a predetermined time (for example, 1 second) A period in which a closed state in which it is difficult for a ball to enter the opening 65a or the V winning opening 650a of the second variable winning device 650 is set, a round game period in which the open state is set, and one round game period. After the end, a predetermined period (for example, 0.5 seconds) until the next round game is started, an interval period in which the closed state is set, and a predetermined period (for example, 2 seconds) and an ending period in which a closed state is set, and a jackpot game period is set.

In this way, by setting the opening period after the lottery result of the special symbols indicating the winning of the jackpot is stopped and displayed (confirmed display), the balls are released in accordance with the timing when each prize opening is opened during the jackpot game. Since it is possible to make preparations for firing in an arbitrary direction, it is possible to smoothly perform a big winning game. In addition, since this opening period can be used as a period for informing the player of the game content of the current jackpot game, it is possible to provide an easy-to-understand game.

In addition, by setting the ending period as the final period of the jackpot game, it is possible to suppress the execution of a lottery of new special symbols immediately after the end of the last round game. Since it is possible to make preparations for shooting the ball in an arbitrary direction toward the game to be executed, it is possible to smoothly switch the game.

Furthermore, when it is determined as a big win in the big win lottery, the kind of the big win is also determined. Details will be described later, but as the jackpot type to be determined, the number of rounds of the jackpot game is 10 rounds, and after the jackpot game ends, a high probability state of special symbols and a high probability state of normal symbols are given 10R 1st probability variation A high-probability state of special patterns and a low-probability state of normal patterns are given after the jackpot, the number of rounds of the jackpot game is two, and the number of rounds of the jackpot game is two rounds, and after the jackpot game is finished. A 2R 1st probability variable jackpot is provided in which a high probability state of special symbols and a high probability state of normal symbols are provided.

Furthermore, each of the above-described jackpot types is designed so that the game state set after the jackpot game ends can be changed according to the game state at the time when the jackpot is won in the special symbol lottery. When the game state at the time point is a specific game state (for example, the second variable probability state), the second variable probability state is set after the end of the big win game, and when it is other than the specific game state, after the end of the big win game It is designed to set the first probability variable state. In this way, the game state set after the end of the big win game is determined according to not only the kind of big win but also the game state set at the time of winning the big win. Not only the type but also the game state set when the jackpot is won can be made interesting.

In addition, in the 35th embodiment, the game state to be set after the end of the jackpot game can be determined based on the jackpot type set (specified) when the jackpot is won and the game state when the jackpot is won. However, without being limited to this, for example, the content of the game executed during the jackpot game, or the game state set after the jackpot game ends according to the past game results (game history) may be determined. . Further, in the present embodiment, when the special symbol for indicating the winning of the jackpot is stopped and displayed, the game state to be set after the end of the jackpot game is determined. The game state set after the end of the big win game may be determined at the end timing of the game, or may be determined at the timing of starting the special symbol variation indicating the winning of the big win.

In addition, in the thirty-fifth embodiment, the type of game state to be set after the end of the jackpot game is determined according to the jackpot type and the game state when the jackpot is won. It suffices if it is possible to determine a privilege with different content as the privilege (game state) to be played.

In addition, in some cases where it is determined that the lottery result of the jackpot lottery is not the above-mentioned jackpot, but that it is lost, there is a benefit that is less than the above-mentioned jackpot (for example, the second variable winning device 650 is opened only for one round, and the opening is performed). It is configured so that the player wins a small prize given to the player (the privilege of giving prize balls corresponding to the number of winning balls). The first symbol display devices 37A and 37B not only indicate whether or not the result of the lottery is a big win (whether or not it is a small win) as a stop symbol after the end of the variation, but also indicate that it is a big win. A pattern corresponding to the jackpot type is displayed.

In this embodiment, the game state, "normal state", "time saving state", "first probability variable state", "second probability variable state" is configured to be set (see Figure 609) . The normal state is a game state in which the special symbol jackpot probability is set to a low probability (3/1000) and the normal symbol hit probability is set to a low probability (236/240) (hereinafter, special symbols: low probability state, Normal pattern: called low probability state), and in the time saving state, the special pattern jackpot probability is set to a low probability (about 3/1000), and the normal pattern hit probability is set to a high probability (239/240). A gaming state (hereinafter, special symbol: low probability state, normal symbol: high probability state), and the first probability variation state is a special symbol jackpot probability is set to a high probability (30/1000), normal symbol A game state in which the probability of hitting is set to a high probability (239/240) (hereinafter referred to as special symbol: high probability state, normal symbol: high probability state), and the second variable state is the special symbol jackpot probability is set to a high probability (30/1000), and the probability of winning a normal symbol is set to a low probability (236/240) (hereinafter, special symbol: high probability state, normal symbol: low probability state) is.

It should be noted that the above-mentioned "first probability variable state" and "second probability variable state" are both states that the probability state of the special symbol has shifted from normal probability (low probability) to high probability, so "special It may be expressed as "high accuracy state".

Although detailed description will be given later, in the present embodiment, even if the special symbol jackpot is won and the same jackpot type is set, the gaming state that is set when the jackpot is won , the game state to be set after the end of the jackpot game is made different. As a result, the player can play the game while being conscious of the set game state in addition to the result of the lottery of the special symbols.

Further, although the detailed description will be given later, in the present embodiment, in order to prevent the player from being provided with an excessively advantageous game, an advantageous game state (for example, the first probability variable state) that is advantageous to the player ) sets an upper limit on the number of consecutive settings that are set in succession, and when the number of consecutive settings reaches the upper limit, the setting conditions for setting an advantageous gaming state after the end of the jackpot game are established. Even if there is, it is configured to forcibly set another game state (eg, time saving state). More specifically, an advantageous probability state (for example, a high probability state ) or a disadvantageous probability state (for example, a low probability state) that is more disadvantageous to the player than the advantageous probability state can be set. A total of 4 types of game states can be set by combining with the probability states (2 types).

Then, when the number of consecutive settings reaches the upper limit, if a game state including any "high probability state" is determined as the game state to be set next, the "high probability state" is set. It is configured such that the game state changed to the "low probability state" is forcibly set. By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent the advantageous probability state from being continuously set for the player.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the upper limit for the number of times "special symbol high probability state" is set continuously (special symbol continuous setting number), and the number of times "normal symbol high probability state" is set continuously It is configured to be able to update and manage by dividing the upper limit for (normal pattern continuous setting number), for example, "first probability variable state (high probability state of special design, high probability state of normal design)" is set In the state where it is decided, if the number of times of continuous special patterns reaches the upper limit, the "high probability state of special patterns" is changed to "low probability state of special patterns". Low probability state, high probability state of normal pattern)” is set, and when the number of times of normal pattern continuous setting reaches the upper limit, “normal pattern high probability state” is changed to “normal pattern low probability state” "Second probability state (high probability state of special design, low probability state of normal design)" is set, and when the number of continuous special patterns and the number of continuous normal patterns reach the upper limit at the same time, "high special pattern Changed "probability state" and "high probability state of normal design" to "low probability state of special design" and "low probability state of normal design" "Normal state (low probability state of special design, low probability of normal design state)" is configured to be set.

As described above, in the thirty-fifth embodiment, in order to prevent the advantageous game state that is advantageous to the player from being excessively continuously set and the player from being excessively awarded the privilege, An upper limit is set for the number of times the advantageous game state is set continuously, and furthermore, as an element for determining that the advantageous game state is set continuously, there is a "probability state of special symbols". "Probability state of normal design" is classified and configured to be manageable. Then, the probability state of the symbol type determined that the number of times the advantageous game state is set in succession reaches the upper limit is forcibly switched to the disadvantage probability state.

With this configuration, when the game state is forcibly changed, various kinds of game states can be set as the changed game state, so that the player can enjoy the game without getting bored. can be provided.

In addition, in the thirty-fifth embodiment, since the degree of advantage of each game state is made different, when the advantageous game state is forcibly changed, depending on the symbol type that is forcibly changed to the low probability state , the degree of advantage of the player after the game state after the change is set can be made different. With this configuration, the player is interested in grasping the factors for the forced termination of the advantageous gaming state, in addition to grasping whether or not the advantageous gaming state will be forcibly terminated. can let

Furthermore, in the thirty-fifth embodiment, the upper limit number that can be continuously set for the high probability state of the special symbol and the upper limit number that can be continuously set for the high probability state of the normal symbol are configured to be different. there is By constructing in this manner, the factors for forcibly ending the advantageous game state can be changed according to the results of winning the jackpot multiple times, thereby keeping the player interested for a long period of time. be able to.

Here, when the jackpot types of the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment are described in detail, the "10R first probability variable jackpot" is a jackpot game with a maximum number of rounds of 10 rounds (first variable winning device (first attacker) It is a jackpot type in which the first probability variable state (high probability state of special symbols, high probability state of normal symbols) is set after a jackpot game that opens 65 for 10 rounds.

"2R 1st probability variable jackpot" means that the maximum number of rounds is 2 rounds of the jackpot game (a jackpot game that opens the second variable winning device (second attacker) 650 for 2 rounds), and then the second probability variable state (special symbol It is a jackpot type in which high probability state, low probability state of normal symbols) is set.

"2R second probability variable jackpot" refers to a jackpot game with a maximum number of rounds of 2 rounds (the second variable winning device (second attacker) 650 is opened for two rounds, and after the jackpot game ends, the game state at the time when the jackpot is won) Depending on the second probability state (high probability state of special design, low probability state of normal design) or the first probability state (high probability state of special design, high probability state of normal design) is set jackpot type is.

In the pachinko machine 10 configured as described above, when a jackpot game corresponding to the "10R first probability variable jackpot" is executed, the first variable winning device (first attacker) 65 is activated for a predetermined period (elapsed 8 seconds, or A game (a round game) that is released until 8 balls are won is executed a predetermined number of times (10 times). Therefore, by performing a right-handed game (a game in which a ball is shot aiming at the first variable winning device 65) during the jackpot game, the first variable winning device 65 can easily win the ball. The first variable prize winning device 65 is configured to pay out 15 prize balls for one winning ball, and the player can receive more prize balls than the second variable prize winning device 650 described later. It is configured so that it can be granted to

On the other hand, in the jackpot game corresponding to the "2R first probability variable jackpot" or "2R second probability variable jackpot", as the opening operation of the second variable winning device (second attacker) 650, the above-mentioned "10R first probability variable jackpot" An opening action that is more restricted than the jackpot game corresponding to is executed. Specifically, a game (round game) in which the second variable winning device (second attacker) 650 is opened for a short period of time (0.5 seconds) during one jackpot game is executed twice. executed. This second variable winning device 650 is configured to pay out one prize ball for one winning ball. will be granted. That is, in the present embodiment, the jackpot game corresponding to the "10R first probability variable jackpot" (the jackpot game that opens the first variable winning device 65) is the "2R first probability variable jackpot" or the "2R second probability variable jackpot". The open period of the attacker during the jackpot game is longer than that of the jackpot game corresponding to "jackpot" (the jackpot game in which the second variable prize winning device 650 is opened), so that many prize balls can be easily obtained. Therefore, it becomes a jackpot game type that is advantageous to the player.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to vary the privilege (prize balls) that can be given during the jackpot game according to the type of the jackpot game to be executed, so that the player is asked whether he will win the jackpot or not. It is possible to make the player interested in not only whether or not the game is set, but also the type of the jackpot game to be set. In addition, in this embodiment, since the type of the jackpot game is defined according to the jackpot type, it is possible to make the player interested in the jackpot type set when the jackpot is won.

In addition, in this embodiment, the jackpot game that is advantageous to the player (jackpot game corresponding to the "10R first probability variable jackpot") is executed more times than the other jackpot games, and further , The number of prize balls for each winning ball is increased, but it is sufficient if the number of prize balls given during the jackpot game is different, for example, during the jackpot game. The number of rounds to be executed may be the same and only the number of prize balls for one ball may be different, or the number of prize balls to one ball may be the same and the number of round games to be executed during the jackpot game. may be configured to differ only. In addition, according to the type of the variable winning opening that is opened during the jackpot game, the game state to be set after the jackpot game ends may be configured to be different.

Returning to FIG. 582, the description continues. At the lower left side of the game area formed on the surface of the game board 13, a general ball entry hole 63 is provided through which 10 balls are paid out as prize balls. A variable display device unit 80 is arranged in the central portion of the game area. In the variable display device unit 80, the first pattern display devices 37A and 37B are triggered by entering the first ball entrance 64b1, the right first ball entrance 64b2, and the second ball entrance 640 (start winning). A third symbol display device 81 composed of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply referred to as "display device") that performs variable display of the third symbol while synchronizing with the variable display, and a normal symbol start port (through gate) 67 A second pattern display device (not shown) is provided which is composed of an LED that variably displays the second pattern with the passage of the ball as a trigger. A center frame 86 is arranged in the variable display device unit 80 so as to surround the outer circumference of the third pattern display device 81 .

The third pattern display device 81 is composed of a 15-inch large liquid crystal display, and the display contents are controlled by the display control device 114 (see FIG. 586), for example, upper, middle and lower. Three symbol columns are displayed. Each pattern row is composed of a plurality of patterns (third patterns), and these third patterns are horizontally scrolled for each pattern row to variably display the third pattern on the display screen of the third pattern display device 81.例文帳に追加It's like In the third symbol display device 81 of the present embodiment, the game state is displayed by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B under the control of the main control device 110 (see FIG. 586). Decorative display according to the display of the pattern display devices 37A and 37B is performed. Incidentally, instead of the display device, for example, the third symbol display device 81 may be configured using a reel or the like.

The second symbol display device displays a symbol "○" and a symbol "x" as display symbols (second symbol (not shown)) each time the ball passes through the normal symbol starting port (through gate) 67. A variable display is performed by alternately lighting for a predetermined period of time. In the pachinko machine 10, when it is detected that a ball has passed through a normal symbol start opening (through gate) 67, a win lottery (normal symbol lottery) is performed. If the result of the win lottery (normal symbol lottery) is a win, the second symbol display device stops and displays the symbol "O" after the second symbol is variably displayed. Further, if the result of the winning lottery is a loss, the symbol "x" is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device after the variable display of the third symbol.

The pachinko machine 10 according to the thirty-fifth embodiment is accompanied by the right first ball entrance 64b2 when the variable display on the second symbol display device stops at a predetermined symbol ("○" symbol in this embodiment). It is configured to execute a winning game (normal figure winning game) in which the electric accessory 64a is in an operating state (open state) for a predetermined time.

In other words, the normal pattern lottery determines whether or not to execute a game per normal pattern that creates a situation where it is easy to enter the ball into the ball entrance (right first ball entrance 64b2) that triggers the execution of the special symbol lottery. It is for Then, the winning probability of the normal symbol lottery is determined according to the set game state.

Furthermore, in the 35th embodiment, when the high probability state of the normal design is set, the winning probability in the normal design lottery is higher than when the low probability state of the normal design is set. Furthermore, in the normal pattern high probability state, a short fluctuation time is more likely to be set as the normal pattern fluctuation pattern for indicating the result of the normal pattern lottery than in the normal pattern low probability state. As a result, the number of execution times of the normal pattern lottery per unit time can be increased more than the low probability state of the normal pattern, so that the winning number of the normal pattern lottery per unit time can be easily increased.

In addition, in the high probability state of the normal pattern (normal pattern high probability), using a method such as increasing the probability of winning, increasing the opening time and the number of times of opening the electric accessory 64a for one hit, etc. When the state is such that the ball easily enters the right first ball entrance 64b2, the time required for the variable display of the second symbol may be constant regardless of the game state. On the other hand, if the time required for the variable display of the second symbol is set shorter than the normal state during normal pattern high probability, the winning probability may be constant regardless of the game state, and one winning The opening time and the number of opening times of the electric accessory 64a may be fixed regardless of the game state.

In addition, as a variation pattern of the special symbol variation for indicating the result of the special symbol lottery, it is configured to facilitate setting of a variation time shorter than when the low probability state of the normal symbol is set. can be Specifically, in the first probability variation state in which the high probability state of the normal symbol is set, the variation time is shorter as the variation pattern of the first special symbol variation than the normal state in which the low probability state of the normal symbol is set. It is preferable to configure so that the pattern can be easily set.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to increase the number of executions of the first special symbol lottery per unit time in the first variable probability state more than in the normal state. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently execute the first special symbol lottery when the ball enters the right first ball entrance 64b2 where the ball can easily enter in the high probability state of the normal symbol. As a result, it is possible to increase the expectation of winning the jackpot in the special symbol lottery per unit time.

The normal symbol starting port (through gate) 67 is assembled in the left area (left area) of the variable display device unit 80, and of the balls launched to the game board 13, a part of the balls flowing down the left area (approximately 50%) can pass through. When the ball passes through the normal symbol starting opening (through gate) 67, a winning lottery for the second symbol is performed. After the winning lottery, the variable display is performed on the second symbol display device, and if the result of the winning lottery is a win, the symbol "○" is displayed as a stop symbol of the variable display, and if the result of the winning lottery is a loss. For example, an "x" symbol is displayed as a variable display stop symbol.

The number of times the ball passes through the normal symbol starting port (through gate) 67 is suspended up to four times in total, and the number of suspended balls is displayed on the second symbol suspension lamp (not shown). Four second pattern holding lamps are provided for the maximum number of holdings, and are arranged symmetrically below the third pattern display device 81 .

In addition, the variable display of the second pattern is performed by switching lighting and non-lighting of a plurality of lamps in the second pattern display device as in the present embodiment. A part of the pattern display device 81 may be used. Similarly, the lighting of the second symbol reservation lamp may be performed by a part of the third symbol display device 81 . In addition, the maximum number of held balls for passing the ball through the normal symbol starting port (through gate) 67 is not limited to 4 times, but is set to 3 times or less or 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). You can In addition, the number of normal symbol starting openings (through gates) 67 to be assembled is not limited to one, and may be plural (for example, two). Further, the mounting position of the normal symbol start opening (through gate) 67 is not limited to the left side of the variable display device unit 80, but may be the right side of the variable display device unit 80, for example. Also, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the second symbol reservation lamp may not be used for lighting display.

Below the variable display device unit 80, a first ball entrance 64b1 through which a ball can enter is arranged. When the ball enters the first ball entrance 64b1, the first ball entrance switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the first ball entrance switch is turned on. Main controller 110 (see FIG. 586) draws a jackpot lottery, and a display corresponding to the lottery result is displayed on first symbol display device 37A.

Next, of the areas formed on the game board 13, the configuration of the right area formed on the right side of the variable display device unit 80 will be described. As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the thirty-fifth embodiment, as shown in FIG. It is divided into a (game area formed on the left side of the variable display unit 80) and a right area (a game area formed on the right side of the variable display unit 80). The left area is shot when the player plays a left-handed game, that is, shoots a ball by the shooting solenoid of the ball shooting unit 112a while suppressing the rotation amount of the operation handle 51 (see FIG. 581). The right area is a game area where the ball can reach, and the right area is the area where the player is playing a right-handed game, i.e., in a state where the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51 (see FIG. 581) is strengthened, by the shooting solenoid of the ball shooting unit 112a. This is a game area where a shot ball can reach when playing a ball shooting game.

As shown in FIG. 582, the right area has a plurality of nails implanted in the same manner as the left area, and is configured to reduce the momentum of the ball flowing down the right area and cause the ball to flow down with various behaviors. is doing. In the right area, the distribution device 175, the right first ball entrance 64b2 to which the electric accessory 64a is attached, the first variable winning device 65, the second ball entrance 640, and the second variable winning device 650 are located on the right side. A ball that has flowed down the area is provided so that it can enter (win a prize).

As shown in FIG. 582, a sorting device 175 is arranged above the right side area, and configured so that balls flowing down the right side area flow in from an opening 175a. Here, the player operates the operation handle 51 (see FIG. 581), and as a right-handed game, a strong right-handed game is performed in which the ball is shot with a shooting intensity that makes the ball collide with the return rubber 69 (see FIG. 582). When executed, most of the balls that collided with the return rubber 69 flowed into the opening 175a, and a weak right-handed game was executed in which the ball was shot with a launching strength that would not allow the ball to collide with the return rubber 69. In some cases, a nail is implanted in the upper portion of the right region so that about half of the fired ball flows into opening 175a.

That is, according to the content of the operation of the operation handle 51 by the player during the right-handed game, the inflow rate of the balls to the distribution device 175 can be varied. Since it is possible to change the game result by finely adjusting the operation contents of the operation handle 51 according to the situation, the operation handle 51 can be motivated to obtain a more advantageous game result.

Specifically, the ball that has flowed into the sorting device 175 passes through the through gate 67, and after flowing down a path that allows the ball to enter the right first ball entrance 64b2, the first variable winning device 65, It is configured such that a path that allows a ball to enter (a prize) to the second ball entrance 640 and the second variable prize winning device 650 flows down toward the out port 66 . On the other hand, among the balls fired in the right-handed game, the balls that did not flow into the opening 175a of the sorting device 175, that is, the balls that flowed down the passage area formed on the right side of the sorting device 175 are thrown through. The ball enters the first variable prize winning device 65, the second ball inlet 640, and the second variable prize winning device 650 ( Winning) is configured to flow down a possible route toward the out port 66 .

By configuring in this way, among the game states in which the right-handed game is advantageous to the player, the game state (second probability variable state) aiming at entering the ball into the right first ball entrance 64b2 is a weak right A game state (during a jackpot game or a small hit game) in which a hitting game is executed and aims to win a ball to the first variable winning device 65 or the second variable winning device 650 is performed by executing a strong right hitting game. It is possible to provide more advantageous game results.

Furthermore, in the thirty-fifth embodiment, the balls that have flowed into the opening 175a of the sorting device 175 reach the first variable winning device 65 more than the balls that have not flowed into the opening 175a of the sorting device 175. The spheres flowing into the opening 175a of the sorting device 175 pass through the opening 175a and after about 2.5 seconds to 3 seconds, the first variable It is configured to reach the winning device 65, and the balls that have not flowed into the opening 175a of the sorting device 175 reach the first variable winning device 65 after about 1.5 seconds to 2 seconds. It consists of

Therefore, for example, in a state in which a jackpot game (10R jackpot) in which the first variable winning device 65 is opened is being executed, a right-handed game is executed while switching between a weak right-handed game and a strong right-handed game with good timing. Thus, it becomes possible to cause a plurality of balls to reach the first variable winning device 65 at the same timing during the round game. In addition, in order to suppress the ball from reaching the first variable prize winning device 65 during the interval period (the period during which it is difficult for the ball to win the first variable prize winning device 65) during the jackpot game, By executing the game and executing the right-handed game so that the ball shot by the weak right-handed game reaches the first variable winning device 65 during the round game, the ball shot by the right-handed game is efficiently shot. It is possible to cause the first variable winning device 65 to win.

Balls flowing down in the sorting device 175 are sorted by the sorting member 175b into the left guide channel 175c or the right guide channel 175d, and flow down toward the electric accessory 64a. The electric accessory 64a is normally stored inside the game board 13, and is configured in a horizontally elongated substantially rectangular shape that can project forward in front view for a predetermined period of time when a normal pattern is won. The game ball is configured to roll on the upper surface of the game board 13 in a state of protruding to the front side of the game board 13 in a front view. A ball that rolls on the upper surface of the normal electric accessory 1640a is guided to the entrance surface of the right first ball entrance 64b2. On the other hand, when the normal electric accessory 1640a is housed inside the game board 13 (buried state), the ball is not guided to the right first ball entrance 64b2. 64b2 forms a difficult state to enter.

Here, with reference to FIG. 583, details of the sorting device 175 in the thirty-fifth embodiment will be described. Fig. 583(a) shows the distribution when the electric accessory 64a is buried (stored) in the game board 13 (a state in which it is difficult for the ball to enter the right first ball entrance 64b2). FIG. 583(b) is an enlarged front view of the vicinity of the device 175, and FIG. 583(b) shows a state in which the electric accessory 64a protrudes to the front side of the game board 13 (the game ball is guided to the right first ball entrance 64b2). It is an enlarged front view of the vicinity of the sorting device 175 in the case of being in a state of being placed.

The sorting device 175 has an opening 175a having a width that allows game balls to pass through on its upper surface, and a game ball entering the sorting device 175 through the opening 175a. A distribution member 175b for distributing to either the right side or the left side, a left guide flow path 175c in which the game balls distributed to the left side in the front view by the distribution member 175b can flow down, and the right side in the front view by the distribution member 175b A right guide channel 175d where the game balls distributed to can flow down, a right first ball entrance 64b2 provided at a position where the game ball that has flowed down the right guide channel 175d can enter, and its right Provided accompanying the first ball entrance 64b2, a projecting state that guides the game ball to the right first ball entrance 64b2 and a buried state that makes it difficult for the game ball to enter the right first ball entrance 64b2 ( and a variable (displaceable) electric accessory 64a.

As shown in FIG. 583(a), the distribution member 175b includes a right receiving portion 175br which is provided on the right side in the front view and can receive the game ball, and a left receiving portion 175br which is provided on the left side in the front view and can receive the game ball. It is composed of at least a portion 175bl and a rotating shaft 175bc that is a rotating shaft of the rotating operation of the distribution member 175b. The distributing member 175b is configured to be variable (displaceable) between a state of being tilted to the right in front view (arrangement) and a state of being tilted to the left in front view (arrangement) about a rotation shaft 175bc as a rotation axis. there is FIG. 583(a) exemplifies a state of being displaced to a state (arrangement) tilted to the right in front view. When the distribution member 175b is tilted to the right in front view, the left receiving portion 175bl is arranged directly below the opening 175a (the game ball passing through the opening 175a is received by the left receiving portion 175bl). A right receiving portion 175br is arranged directly below the opening 175a in a state of being tilted to the left in front view (a game ball passing through the opening 175a is received by the right receiving portion 175br).

When the game ball is received by the left receiving portion 175bl in a state in which the distribution member 175b is tilted to the right in front view, the weight of the game ball causes the distribution member 175b to rotate counterclockwise about the rotation shaft 175bc. The distribution member 175b is changed (displaced) to a state tilted to the left side in front view, and the game ball received by the left receiving portion 175bl falls to the left guide flow path 175c. On the other hand, when the game ball is received by the right receiving portion 175br in a state in which the distribution member 175b is tilted to the left side in front view, the weight of the game ball causes the distribution member 175b to rotate clockwise about the rotation shaft 175bc. , the distribution member 175b is changed (displaced) to a state tilted to the right in front view, and the game ball received by the right receiving portion 175br falls to the right guide flow path 175d. In other words, the distribution member 175b alternately receives the game ball by the right receiving portion 175br and the left receiving portion 175bl, and alternately guides it to the right guide channel 175d and the left guide channel 175c. That is, every time a game ball enters the sorting device 175, it is alternately sorted to the left guide channel 175c and the right guide channel 175d.

In addition, the game ball flowing down the right guide channel 175d in the normal state reaches the electric accessory 64a in the buried state, passes through the electric accessory 64a as it is, and flows down to the lower right area (Fig. 583 ( a) see). More specifically, as shown in FIG. 584(a), when the ball that has flowed into the opening 175a of the sorting device 175 wins in the normal symbol lottery based on passing through the through gate 67, the through gate 0.4 seconds after the passage of 67 is detected, the electric accessory 64a changes (displaces) from the buried state to the projected state. On the other hand, the ball that has passed through the through gate 67 reaches the electric accessory 64a in about 0.2 seconds. Therefore, the game ball that has passed through the through gate 67 completely passes through the electric accessory 64a before the electric accessory 64a is changed to the projecting position, and flows out of the sorting device 175 (Fig. 583(a) , and FIG. 584(a)).

Since the normal pattern winning game (normal pattern winning game) in the normal state ends in a relatively short time (about 0.9 seconds after passing through the through gate 67), the game balls are continuously distributed at short intervals. Even if the ball enters , the normal game is finished while the ball next to the ball that has passed through the through gate 67 is distributed to the left guide flow path 175c. Therefore, even if game balls continuously enter the sorting device 175 at short intervals, subsequent game balls do not reach the electric accessory 64a during the projection period of the electric accessory 64a. Therefore, in the normal state, even if a ball flows into the sorting device 175, it is possible to make it difficult for the ball to enter the right first ball entrance 64b2.

In addition, the game ball flowing down the right guide flow path 175d in the second variable probability state reaches the protruding electric accessory 64a, is guided by the inclination formed by the protruding electric accessory 64a, and is guided to the right side. The ball is entered into the 1-ball entrance 64b2 (see FIG. 583(b)). More specifically, in the second probability variable state, when the ball passes through the through gate 67, when the normal symbol lottery wins, the passage through the through gate 67 is detected as shown in FIG. After 0.12 seconds, the electric accessory 64a changes (displaces) from the buried state to the projected state. This projecting state is maintained for 0.5 seconds. On the other hand, as described above, since the game ball that has passed through the through gate 67c reaches the electric accessory 64a in about 0.2 seconds, it almost collides with the upper surface of the protruding electric accessory 64a, and the protruding state is reached. is guided to the ball entrance surface of the right first ball entrance 64b2 along the downward slope from the upper right to the lower left in the front view formed by the electric accessory 64a. Therefore, in the second variable probability state, every time a game ball enters the sorting device 175, the ball can enter the right first ball entrance 64b2.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 583(b), the ball flowing down the left guide flow path 175c of the sorting device 175 is also in the second probability variable state while the electric accessory 64a is set to the protruding state. It is configured to be able to reach the upper surface of the object 64a. However, in the gaming state in which the normal state of the normal symbols such as the second probability variable state and the normal state is set, the period in which the electric accessory 64a is set to the protruding state (right first The period during which the ball can be entered into the ball entrance 64b2 is relatively short (for example, 0.5 seconds), and the game ball that has fallen to the left side (upstream side) of the electric accessory 64a is the right first ball entrance 64b2. The electric accessory 64a returns to the buried state before the period (for example, 1 second) required to reach . Therefore, even if a right-handed game is performed in the second probability variable state, all the balls fired by the right-handed game will enter the right first ball entrance 64b2, and will fall below the distribution device 175. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the ball cannot flow down. In this embodiment, the minimum interval between the distribution member 175b and the distribution member 175b is 0.5 seconds (when the ball passes through the opening 175a of the distribution device 175). The period until the ball distributed to the left guide flow path 175c by the distribution member 175b reaches the electric accessory 64a. It is configured such that the (flowing period of the left guide channel 175c) is 0.7 seconds, and the flowing period of the right guide channel 175d is 0.2 seconds.

That is, the balls that continuously flowed into the sorting device 175 (the balls that were first sorted to the left guide channel 175c and the balls that were sorted to the right guide channel 175d later) are all buried. When passing through the electric accessory 64a, it is configured to be discharged from the sorting device 175 (outflow to the lower side of the sorting device 175) at substantially the same timing. By configuring in this way, the first variable prize winning device 65 and the second variable prize winning device 650 provided below the sorting device 175 have a prize winning opening formed with an opening width corresponding to several balls. Multiple spheres can be facilitated to reach the device in succession. Therefore, for example, during a jackpot game, during a round game in which the first variable prize winning device 65 is opened, and immediately before or immediately after the end condition of the round game is satisfied, the surplus balls are placed in the first specific prize. It is possible to make it easier for the player to win the prize and win the prize balls in the surplus portion.

Returning to FIG. 582, the description continues. Below the sorting device 175, a first variable winning device 65 is arranged which is opened when a 10-round jackpot game is executed. The first variable prize winning device 65 has an open state in which a ball can enter the first specific prize winning port 65a, and a state in which it is more difficult for a ball to enter the first specific prize winning port 65a than in the open state. It is configured to be switchable between the closed state and the open state in the round game during the jackpot game period. When the ball enters the first specific winning hole 65a, 10 prize balls are paid out.

Each round game includes, as an end condition, a time elapsing end condition established when the elapsed time from the start of the round game (after the first variable winning device 65 is switched to the open state) reaches a predetermined time. , and a winning number end condition that is established when a predetermined number of balls enter the first specific winning hole 65a during the round game. Specifically, 8 has passed since the round game was started. Each termination condition is defined so that the time elapse termination condition is satisfied when the game is played, and the winning number termination condition is satisfied when the number of winnings during the round game reaches eight.

When the first variable prize winning device 65 is in the closed state, the opening/closing door 65f is positioned at the closed position so as to block the opening of the first specific prize winning port 65a. When the opening/closing door 65f is positioned at the closed position, a flow-down path is formed on the upper surface thereof through which the ball can flow down. As shown in FIG. 582, the opening/closing door 65f is configured to have a downward slope toward the left side, so the ball that reaches the upper surface of the opening/closing door 65f positioned at the closed position will flow down the flow path to the left side. , and discharged from the first variable winning device 65 .

A second ball entrance 640 and a second variable winning device 650 are arranged on the lower left side of the first variable winning device 65 . When the ball enters the second ball entrance 640, a second ball entrance switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the second ball entrance switch is turned on. A jackpot lottery (special symbol lottery) is executed by the main controller 110 (see FIG. 586), and a display corresponding to the lottery result is shown on the first symbol display device 37B.

In the pachinko machine 10 according to the thirty-fifth embodiment, as shown in FIG. The ball that flows down the passage area formed on the right side of the splitting device 175 flows down the right side area toward the first variable winning device 65, and the open/close door 65f of the first variable winning device 65 is opened. In the state (jackpot game state), two out of three balls flowed out from the distribution device 175 enter the first specific prize winning port 65a formed in the first variable prize winning device 65, and the distribution device 175 Most of the balls that flow down through the passage area formed on the right side of the box enter the first specific winning hole 65a. Among the balls that flow out from the sorting device 175, the balls that cannot reach the first variable winning device 65 (one out of three balls) It is constructed so that it flows down toward the second ball entrance port 640 by a cushioning member such as a nail implanted, that is, a member that directly cushions the falling ball in order to make the flowing direction of the ball irregular. there is

On the other hand, in the state where the opening/closing door 65f of the first variable winning device 65 is closed (non-jackpot game state), all the balls flowing down the ball flow path formed on the opening/closing door 65f enter the second ball entrance. 640 , and about every two balls that flow down toward the second ball inlet 640 , one ball enters the second ball inlet 640 .

The second variable winning device 650 is opened when the result of the special symbol lottery is a big win and when a big win type in which a two-round big win is executed is set as the big win type, or when a small win is won. The variable ball entry means is configured to pay out one prize ball when the ball wins. As shown in FIG. 582, the second variable winning device 650 is located on the most downstream side of the right side area and below the variable display device unit 80. On the other side, a nail member is planted to prevent the balls shot by the left-handed game from reaching the second variable winning device 650. - 特許庁

By configuring in this way, it is possible to suppress the flow of the ball fired by the left-handed game into the right-hand region, so that it is possible to facilitate the execution of different games between the left-handed game and the right-handed game. can.

Also, in this way, by configuring so that the ball fired by the left-handed game cannot (hardly) reach the second variable winning device 650, in the normal state where the left-handed game is executed, the execution Even if a small win is won in the first special symbol lottery, the ball fired by the left-handed game can enter the V winning opening 650a of the second variable winning device 650 that is opened during the small winning game. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a situation in which excessive prize balls are awarded in the normal state.

When a ball enters the first ball entrance 64b1 or the right first ball entrance 64b2, four balls are paid out as prize balls, and when a ball enters the second ball entrance 640, one prize is awarded. It is configured to be paid out as a ball. In addition, when a ball enters the general ball entrance 63, six balls are paid out as prize balls. By configuring in this way, even if a right-handed game is played in the normal state, the number of balls increases because the ball only enters the second ball entrance 640 in which the number of prize balls is set to one. nothing to do Therefore, it is possible to suppress that a right-handed game is performed during the normal state.

Also, when the ball enters the second ball entrance 640, the lottery for the second special symbol (special figure 2) is executed. As a variation pattern (variation time) set for the lottery of 2 special symbols (special figure 2), a long-time (for example, 10 minutes) variation pattern (variation time) is set. Therefore, even if the lottery for the second special symbol (special figure 2) is executed in the normal state, it is possible to efficiently suppress the lottery for the special figure 2 from being executed.

As described above, in the present embodiment, in order to execute the second special symbol (special figure 2) lottery by letting the ball flow down to the right side area of the game board 13 in the state where the normal state is set, Even if the game for entering the ball into the second ball entrance 640) is executed, it takes a long time to determine the result of one lottery, and the number of prize balls that can be obtained by the left-handed game is longer. It is configured so that only a small number of prize balls can be obtained. In other words, when the normal state is set as the game state, the first input is used to execute the first special symbol (special symbol 1) lottery by causing the ball to flow down to the left area of the game board 13. A game for making a ball enter the ball opening 64b1) is a game advantageous to the player.

In this embodiment, the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the first ball entrance 64b1 or the right first ball entrance 64b2 and the number of winning balls when the ball enters the second ball entrance 640 Although the number of prize balls to be paid out is configured to be different, the number of prize balls to be paid out when the ball enters the first ball inlet 64b1 or the right first ball inlet 64b2 and the second ball inlet 640 The number of prize balls paid out when the ball enters the prize is the same number, for example, the number of prize balls paid out when the ball enters the first ball entrance 64b1 or the right first ball entrance 64b2 is also 1. It can be configured as an individual.

As shown in FIG. 585, the rear side of the pachinko machine 10 is mainly provided with control board units 90 and 91 and a back pack unit 94 . The control board unit 90 is unitized by mounting a main board (main controller 110), an audio lamp control board (audio lamp control device 113), and a display control board (display control device 114). The control board unit 91 is unitized by mounting a payout control board (payout control device 111), a launch control board (launch control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116.

The back pack unit 94 is formed by unitizing a back pack 92 forming a protective cover portion and a dispensing unit 93 . In addition, each control board has an MPU as a 1-chip microcomputer that manages each control, a port that communicates with various devices, a random number generator that is used for various lotteries, and is used for time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generation circuit or the like is mounted as required.

The main control device 110, the sound lamp control device 113, the display control device 114, the payout control device 111, the firing control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in the board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. . Each of the board boxes 100 to 104 has a box base and a box cover that covers the opening of the box base. The box base and the box cover are connected to each other to accommodate each controller and each board.

In addition, the board box 100 (main controller 110) and the board box 102 (dispensing control device 111 and firing control device 112) connect the box base and the box cover in an unopenable manner (caulking structure) by a sealing unit (not shown). consolidation). A sealing seal (not shown) is attached to the connecting portion between the box base and the box cover over the box base and the box cover. The sealing seal is made of a brittle material, and if the sealing seal is peeled off in order to open the circuit board boxes 100, 102, or if the circuit board boxes 100, 102 are forcibly opened, the box base and the box cover may be damaged. cut to the side. Therefore, by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal, it is possible to know whether the substrate boxes 100, 102 have been opened.

The dispensing unit 93 includes a tank 130 located at the top of the back pack unit 94 and open upward, a tank rail 131 connected to the lower side of the tank 130 and gently inclined toward the downstream side, and a tank rail 131 downstream of the tank rail 131. and a payout device 133 which is provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 and which pays out balls by a predetermined electrical configuration of a payout motor 216 (see FIG. 586). ing. The tank 130 is successively replenished with balls supplied from the island facilities of the game hall, and a payout device 133 pays out the required number of balls as appropriate. A vibrator 134 for applying vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131 .

The payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the firing control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor control knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erasure switch 122. The state recovery switch 120 is operated to eliminate ball clogging (return to normal state) when a dispensing error such as a ball clogging in the dispensing motor 216 (see FIG. 586) occurs. The operating knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on when the pachinko machine 10 is to be returned to its initial state.

Next, referring to FIG. 586, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described. FIG. 586 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10. As shown in FIG.

The main control unit 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer that is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 includes a ROM 202 storing various control programs and fixed value data to be executed by the MPU 201, and a memory for temporarily storing various data when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 202. A RAM 203 and other various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission/reception circuit are incorporated. In the main control unit 110, the MPU 201 performs main processing of the pachinko machine 10, such as the setting of the jackpot lottery, the display settings of the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B and the third symbol display device 81, and the lottery of the display results of the second symbol display device. to run.

In addition, various commands are transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sub-controllers by the data transmission/reception circuit in order to instruct the sub-controllers such as the payout controller 111 and the sound lamp controller 113 to operate. Such commands are sent in only one direction from the main controller 110 to the sub-controllers.

The RAM 203 stores various areas, counters, flags, contents of internal registers of the MPU 201, return addresses of control programs executed by the MPU 201, etc., and a stack area for storing various flags, counters, I/O, and the like. and a work area (work area) in which values are stored. The RAM 203 is configured to retain (back up) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply 115 even after the pachinko machine 10 is powered off, and all the data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. .

When power is interrupted due to power failure or the like, the RAM 203 stores the stack pointer and the values of each register at the time of power interruption (including power failure; the same applies hereinafter). On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including when the power is turned on due to the cancellation of the power failure; the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power was cut off based on the information stored in the RAM 203 . Writing to the RAM 203 is executed by the main process (not shown) when the power is turned off, and restoration of each value written in the RAM 203 is executed by the start-up process (not shown) when the power is turned on. The NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 is configured to receive a power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when power is shut off due to a power failure or the like. , NMI interrupt processing (not shown) is immediately executed as power failure processing.

An input/output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 via a bus line 204 comprising an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 205 includes the payout control device 111, the sound lamp control device 113, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the second symbol display device, the second symbol reservation lamp, and the lower side of the opening/closing plate of the first specific winning port 65a. is connected to a solenoid 209 consisting of a large opening solenoid for driving opening and closing on the front side, a solenoid for driving an electric accessory, etc., and the MPU 201 receives various commands and Send control signals.

The input/output port 205 also includes various switches 208 including a group of switches (not shown) and a group of sensors including a slide position detection sensor S and a rotation position detection sensor R, and a RAM erasure switch circuit 253 provided in the power supply 115, which will be described later. , and the MPU 201 executes various processes based on the signals output from the various switches 208 and the RAM erasing signal SG2 output from the RAM erasing switch circuit 253 .

The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of prize balls and rental balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic unit, has a ROM 212 storing control programs executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 213 used as a work memory and the like.

The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, has a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211 are stored, and various flags and counters. , and a work area (work area) in which values such as I/O are stored. The RAM 213 is configured to retain (back up) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply 115 even after the pachinko machine 10 is powered off, and all the data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. As with the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is also configured to receive a power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when power is shut off due to a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, NMI interrupt processing (not shown) is immediately executed as power failure processing.

An input/output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 215 is connected to the main controller 110, the dispensing motor 216, the launch controller 112, and the like. Although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected with a prize ball detection switch for detecting paid prize balls. The winning ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111 but not to the main control device 110 .

The shooting control device 112 controls the ball shooting unit 112a so that the shooting strength of the ball corresponds to the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51 when the main controller 110 issues an instruction to shoot the ball. . The ball shooting unit 112a has a shooting solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the operation is performed on the condition that the shooting stop switch 51b for stopping the shooting of the ball is turned off (not operated). A shooting solenoid is energized corresponding to the amount of rotation operation (rotation position) of the handle 51 , and the ball is shot with strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operation handle 51 .

The audio lamp control device 113 outputs audio from an audio output device (such as a speaker (not shown)) 226, outputs lighting and extinguishing from a lamp display device (electrical parts 29 to 33, an indicator lamp 34, etc.) 227, and changes production (variation It controls the setting of the display mode of the third pattern display device 81 performed by the display control device 114 such as display) and advance notice effects. The MPU 221, which is an arithmetic device, has a ROM 222 storing control programs executed by the MPU 221, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 223 used as a work memory and the like.

An input/output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 comprising an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 225 is connected to the main control device 110, the display control device 114, the audio output device 226, the lamp display device 227, the other device 228, the frame button 22, and the like. The other devices 228 include various drive motors for operating drive accessories for presentation provided in the pachinko machine 10 .

Sound lamp control device 113, based on various commands (fluctuation pattern command, stop type command, etc.) received from main control device 110, determines the display mode of third symbol display device 81, and sends the determined display mode to the command The display control device 114 is notified by (display variation pattern command, display stop type command, etc.). In addition, the sound lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, changes the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81 or super reach. The display control device 114 is instructed to change the effect contents of the hour. When the stage is changed, a rear image change command including information about the stage after the change is transmitted to the display control device 114 in order to display the rear image corresponding to the stage after the change on the third pattern display device 81. . Here, the rear image is an image displayed on the rear side of the third design, which is the main image to be displayed on the third design display device 81 . The display control device 114 displays various images on the third pattern display device 81 in accordance with commands transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 .

When the frame button 22 is operated by the player, an accessory drive command is transmitted to the other device 228 in order to drive an accessory for performance (not shown), or a command corresponding to the operation content of the frame button 22 is sent. A sound output command for outputting sound to the sound output device 226 is set, and a lamp output command for causing the lamp display device 227 to emit light in a light emission mode corresponding to the operation content of the frame button 22 is set. can be configured to

Also, the sound lamp control device 113 receives a command (display command) representing the display content of the third pattern display device 81 from the display control device 114 . In the audio lamp control device 113, based on the display command received from the display control device 114, in accordance with the display content of the third pattern display device 81, output the audio corresponding to the display content from the audio output device 226, Lighting and extinguishing of the lamp display device 227 are controlled in accordance with the display contents.

The display control device 114 is connected to the sound lamp control device 113 and the third pattern display device 81, and based on the command received from the sound lamp control device 113, the third pattern display device 81 changes the third pattern, etc. It controls the display. Further, the display control device 114 appropriately transmits a display command for notifying the display contents of the third pattern display device 81 to the sound lamp control device 113 . The sound lamp control device 113 outputs sound from the sound output device 226 in accordance with the display contents indicated by this display command, so that the display of the third pattern display device 81 and the sound output from the sound output device 226 are matched. be able to.

The power supply device 115 includes a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each part of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to power failure, etc., and a RAM provided with a RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 586). and an erase switch circuit 253 . The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies necessary operating voltages to the control devices 110 to 114 and the like through a power supply path (not shown). As an overview, the power supply unit 251 takes in a voltage of 24 volts supplied from the outside, various switches such as the various switches 208, solenoids such as the solenoid 209, a voltage of 12 volts for driving a motor, etc. A voltage of 5 volts for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, etc. are generated, and these 12 volts, 5 volts and backup voltages are supplied to the controllers 110 to 114 and the like as necessary voltages.

The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 at the time of power failure due to power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the voltage of stable DC 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and determines that a power failure (power shutdown, power shutdown) has occurred when this voltage is less than 22 volts. Then, a power failure signal SG1 is output to the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111. By the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute NMI interrupt processing. Even after the stable DC voltage of 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts, the power supply unit 251 outputs a voltage of 5 volts, which is the driving voltage of the control system, for a time sufficient to execute the NMI interrupt processing. is configured to maintain a normal value. Therefore, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (not shown).

The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing the backup data to the main controller 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 586) is pressed. When the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, the main controller 110 clears the backup data when the RAM erase signal SG2 is input, and controls the payout initialization command for clearing the backup data in the payout control device 111. Send to device 111 .

Next, the display contents of the third pattern display device 81 in this embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 587 to 608. FIG. FIGS. 587(a) and 587(b) are schematic diagrams schematically showing display contents of the third pattern display device 81 in this embodiment. The third pattern display device 81 is composed of a 15-inch liquid crystal display, and the display contents are controlled by the display control device 114, which will be described later, so that, for example, three pattern rows (upper, middle, and lower) ( L1 to L3) are displayed (see FIG. 587(a)). The third design displayed on the display screen of the third design display device 81 (decorative design that fluctuates corresponding to the fluctuation display of the first special design (special design 1) or the second special design (special design 2)) is They are composed of 10 types of main symbols to which identification information imitating numbers "0" to "9" are attached.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the main symbols are formed using different types of characters (animals, etc.) for each piece of identification information imitating numerals. In this way, by using characters corresponding to each piece of identification information, it is possible to visually inform the player of the lottery result of the special symbol, so that the player can play an easy-to-understand game. Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the result of the lottery by the main controller 110, which will be described later, is a big hit, the same main symbols (for example, "777") are displayed in a variable display, and the variable display is performed. It is configured so that a jackpot occurs after the is over. That is, the third symbol is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as a symbol for indicating the lottery result of the special symbol by the main control device 110 .

In the main display area Dm, three pattern rows L1, L2 and L3 are displayed, respectively, upper, middle and lower. The above-described third symbols are displayed in a prescribed order in each of the symbol rows L1 to L3. That is, the main symbols are arranged in ascending or descending numerical order in each of the symbol rows L1 to L3, and each of the symbol rows L1 to L3 is periodically scrolled in the left-right direction for variable display.

More specifically, the upper symbol row L1 and the middle symbol row L2 are arranged so that the numbers are arranged in ascending order from right to left, and are scrolled from right to left to be variably displayed. In the lower pattern row L3, the numbers are arranged in ascending order from left to right, and are scrolled from right to left to be variably displayed. Further, in each symbol row, sub-symbols (blank symbols) which do not indicate the special symbol lottery results are formed between the main symbols.

As shown in FIG. 587(a), the main display area Dm has three effective lines V1 to V3 formed vertically and two effective lines V4 and V5 formed obliquely. In a state where each symbol row L1 to L3 is stopped and displayed, the third symbols are stopped in a combination of big winning symbols (combination of the same main symbols in the 35th embodiment) on the activated line. , a jackpot video is displayed as a jackpot.

As shown in FIG. 587(a), in the thirty-fifth embodiment, each activated line (V1 to V5) is formed so as to include the symbol display positions of each of the symbol rows L1 to L3. Until all of the symbol rows L1 to L3 displayed in the main display area Dm of the display device 81 are stopped and displayed, it is possible to make it difficult to understand the lottery results of the corresponding special symbols. Therefore, until the last symbol row (in this embodiment, the middle symbol row L2) is stop-displayed, the variable display of the third symbol executed in the main display area Dm can be made interesting.

In addition, the mode of the variable display of the third symbols in the third symbol display device 81 is not limited to the one described above, and is arbitrary. The number of symbols in the row can be changed as appropriate. Also, the patterns displayed in a variable manner on the third pattern display device 81 are not limited to the above. Further, the area where the third symbol is variably displayed may be configured to be variable. For example, when a specific effect is executed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, the variable display area of the third symbol or moving the variable display area to a position that is difficult for the player to visually recognize (for example, a corner of the display screen), making it difficult for the player to understand whether the third symbol is changing. You may make it Also, during the period when the special symbol is fluctuating, the fluctuation of the third symbol may be temporarily stopped (temporarily stopped) and then changed again.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the display mode of the third symbol corresponding to the variation of the first special symbol and the display mode of the third symbol corresponding to the variation of the second special symbol are the same (to the extent that the player has difficulty distinguishing ), but the display mode and display area of the third symbol may be changed so as to correspond to the type of special symbol that is fluctuating.

Next, the contents actually displayed on the third pattern display device 81 will be described with reference to FIG. 587(b). As shown in FIG. 587(b), small display areas Dm2 and Dm3 are formed on the upper right side of the main display area Dm when viewed from the front. The small display areas Dm2 and Dm3 are areas where identification information (fourth pattern) for indicating the lottery status of special symbols (whether or not the lottery is in progress (fluctuating) and the result of the lottery) is displayed. Then, the fourth symbol (special figure 1 fourth symbol) for indicating the lottery situation of the first special symbol (special figure 1) is displayed in the small display area Dm2, and the lottery situation of the second special symbol (special figure 2) The fourth pattern (special figure 2 fourth pattern) for indicating is configured to be displayed in the small display area Dm3.

By providing the small display areas Dm2 and Dm3 in this manner, the player can be notified of the lottery status of the special symbols in the pachinko machine 10 in which the special symbols 1 and 2 can be varied simultaneously. Although the details will be described later, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the fourth symbol is displayed in a display mode using numbers, and by variably displaying the fourth symbol in the small display areas Dm2 and Dm3, (See FIG. 590 (a)), showing a situation in which the special symbols are fluctuating, and by stopping and displaying the fourth symbol in the small display areas Dm2 and Dm3 (see FIG. 590 (b)), a special symbol lottery Although it is configured to show the results, it is not limited to this, for example, a display mode imitating a figure as the fourth pattern, a display mode in which a figure is deformed using a display mode showing a plurality of colors, It is also possible to show that the special patterns are changing by a display mode in which the colors are variable, and to display the lottery results of the special patterns by stopping and displaying the display modes showing the specific patterns and colors.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the fourth symbol is used to indicate the special symbol lottery situation (whether or not the lottery is in progress (during fluctuation), and the lottery result), but this is not the only option. Instead, it may be configured to notify only whether or not the special symbol is in the process of lottery (during fluctuation). In addition, in FIG. 587(b), the fourth symbol display area (small display areas Dm2, Dm3) in which the fourth symbol for indicating the lottery status of the special symbol is displayed is formed on the upper right side of the main display area Dm. Although an example is shown, the position where the fourth pattern display area is formed and the size may be changed according to the effect mode of the variable effect executed in the central portion of the main display area Dm.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent the fourth symbol display area from restricting the area in which the variable effect is executed and lowering the effect of the effect. In this case, the fourth pattern display area is deleted from the main display area Dm of the third pattern display device 81, and the variable display of the fourth pattern is performed using light emitting means (such as LEDs) provided in the variable display device unit 80. should be configured to run

A small display area Dm1 is formed on the upper left side of the main display area Dm when viewed from the front. This small display area Dm1 displays a guidance display mode for guiding the player in the direction in which the ball is to be shot (game direction) (see FIG. 588(a)).

In this embodiment, the small display area Dm1 is used as the guidance display area. With this configuration, the player can easily grasp which area of the game board the ball should be shot to by simply looking at the guide display mode displayed in the guide display area. Therefore, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that is easy for players to understand.

In this guide display area (small display area Dm1), a display mode of "right-handed" for guiding the player to play a right-handed game and a display mode of "right-handed" to guide the player to play a left-handed game. and a display mode of ``left-handed'' for guiding the player. It is displayed during the first variable probability state, during the second variable probability state, during the time saving state, and during a specific jackpot game (during the jackpot game in which the second variable winning device 650 is opened), and the display mode of “left hitting” is It is configured to be displayed for a predetermined period (for example, 10 seconds) after the right-handed game ends. In addition, even when it is detected that a right-handed game is being executed during a game state in which a left-handed game is advantageous to the player, that is, in a normal state, "left-handed" is performed for a predetermined period (for example, 10 seconds). is configured so that the display mode of is displayed.

Returning to FIG. 587(b), the description is continued. A sub-display area Ds is formed below the main display area Dm. As shown in FIG. 588(a), this sub-display area Ds is configured to display comments on the content of the game being played. By configuring in this way, it is possible to provide a game that is easy for the player to understand. The sub-display area Ds may be used for another purpose. For example, information for indicating the number of reserved balls of each special symbol may be displayed in the sub-display area Ds.

In this case, for example, it is preferable to display a reserved display mode (for example, a circular reserved symbol display mode) for individually indicating the number of reserved balls of each special symbol in the sub-display area Ds. Then, it is preferable that the player can grasp the current number of reserved balls of the special symbol according to the number of display of the reserved display mode. Further, it is preferable to determine in advance the winning information corresponding to each reserved special symbol, and to vary the corresponding reserved display mode based on the determination result.

By constructing in this way, the game is played while expecting to win a big prize in the lottery of the special symbols corresponding to the reserved symbols whose display mode is changed among the possible plurality of reserved symbols. can let Furthermore, unlike the present embodiment, since it is configured to display reserved symbols corresponding to the number of individual reserved memories, a display mode for showing a game result that can be advantageous to the player among a plurality of reserved symbols. It is possible to set a result display that easily displays the variable reserved symbol display.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, in addition to this, the game result suggesting mode for suggesting the game result (lottery result of each symbol) to the player, and the content of the effect display executed in the main display area Dm. The effect explanation mode for explanation, the frame button related display mode for indicating the timing of operating the frame button 22 and the result of the operation, and the win related information display mode for displaying information about the big win game are displayed in the sub display area Ds. The ratio of the display area between the main display area Dm and the sub-display area Ds is set to differ depending on the content to be displayed in the sub-display area Ds.

In addition, when the combination of the third symbols stopped and displayed is a combination corresponding to a loss and there is a held ball, a variable display corresponding to a lottery based on the held ball is started after the stop display for 1 second. . In addition, when there are a plurality of reserved balls, a lottery is executed based on the reserved ball corresponding to the oldest incoming ball in terms of time.

On the other hand, when the third pattern of the combination corresponding to the missing of the special pattern is stop-displayed for one second in the absence of the reserved ball, the stop-display of the third pattern continues thereafter. This state is when a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) elapses or when a new ball enters the first ball entrance 64b1, the right first ball entrance 64b2, or the second ball entrance 640. continue until Then, when a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) has passed since the third symbol was stop-displayed, a demonstration effect indicating that the game is not being executed is displayed. Although the player continuously shoots the ball for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds), the first ball entrance 64b1, the right first ball entrance 64b2, and the second ball entrance 640 A situation in which there is no entry is rare, and in many cases where the state where the third symbol is stopped and displayed continues for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds), the player quits the game and the pachinko machine 10 is stopped. This is due to the fact that no games have been played.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) has passed after the third symbol is stopped and displayed, it is determined that the player is not playing a game, and the demonstration effect is started. do. Thereby, the player who is going to select the pachinko machine 10 to start the game can easily judge whether the game is being played based on the presence or absence of display of the demonstration effect. On the other hand, when a new ball enters any one of the first ball entrance 64b1, the right first ball entrance 64b2, and the second ball entrance 640 before a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) elapses. , the variable display of the third symbol corresponding to the new incoming ball is executed.

<Regarding production content in the 35th embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 588 to 603, effects executed in the thirty-fifth embodiment will be described.

First, an overview of the gameplay of the thirty-fifth embodiment will be described. In the 35th embodiment, when a jackpot is won in a low-probability short-time state (normal) (hereinafter referred to as "first hit"), a high-probability state (high-probability state) of special symbols is always set after the jackpot game ends. , probability variation limit number of times (40 times) is set. Then, when reaching the variable probability limit, a special symbol low probability state (low probability state) is set.

Here, the probability variable limit is a threshold value for executing processing for setting a low probability state after the jackpot game ends, even if the jackpot type jackpot that can be set to a high probability state after the jackpot game ends. Point.

In addition, the variable probability limit number of times is a value set when a jackpot is won in a low probability state and a high probability state is set after the jackpot game executed based on the jackpot is finished. In the high-probability state, after the jackpot game ends, the jackpot for which the high-probability state is set is won, the value is updated at the end of the jackpot game executed based on the jackpot winning, and the probability variable limit is set using the updated value. A determination is made whether it has been reached.

In the thirty-fifth embodiment, depending on the jackpot type, after the jackpot game ends, there is a case where a normal pattern high probability state (time saving state) is set. When the time saving state is set, the time saving limit number of times (10 times) is set. Then, when the time-saving limit is reached, a low-probability state (non-time-saving state) of normal symbols is set.

Here, the time-saving limit refers to a threshold for executing processing for setting a non-time-saving state after the jackpot game ends, even if the jackpot of the jackpot type in which the time-saving state can be set after the jackpot game ends. .

Also, the time saving limit number of times is a value set when a big win is won in the non-time saving state and the time saving state is set after the jackpot game executed based on the big win is finished. In the time-saving state, after the jackpot game ends, the jackpot for which the time-saving state is set is won, the value is updated at the end of the jackpot game executed based on the jackpot winning, and the time-saving limit is reached using the updated value. A determination is made as to whether or not

Thus, in the 35th embodiment, by differentiating the time saving limit number of times and the probability variable limit number of times, even in the same game state (for example, high probability non-time saving state (second probability variable state)), high probability time saving Depending on the timing of winning the jackpot C (FIG. 613(b)) in which the state (first variable state) is set, there is an advantageous state in which the player can acquire a large amount of prize balls, and a prize ball that can be obtained more than in the advantageous state. Fewer disadvantageous states can be created, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

In the thirty-fifth embodiment, as shown in FIG. 613 (c), when the jackpot is won in the second special symbol, a 100% high probability time saving state (first probability variable state) is set after the jackpot game ends. As shown in 613(b), when the jackpot is won in the first special symbol, the time saving state is not set after the jackpot game ends with a high probability.

Although the details will be described later, in the thirty-fifth embodiment, the first special symbol and the second special symbol can be variably displayed at the same time, and the first special symbol and the second special symbol are variably displayed at the same time. In the case where the first special symbol is a symbol indicating that the jackpot or small win has been won and the second special symbol is stopped before the second special symbol, the second special symbol is forced to be a symbol indicating a loss. stop. In addition, when the second special pattern is a pattern indicating that the jackpot has been won and is stopped earlier than the first special pattern, the first special pattern is forcibly stopped with a pattern indicating a failure.

In the thirty-fifth embodiment, the variation time of the first special symbol and the variation time of the second special symbol are different between the case of the non-time saving state and the case of the time saving state, and in the case of the time saving state, the non-time saving state Since the fluctuation time of the second special symbol is set shorter than that of the first special symbol, the second special symbol tends to stop earlier. Therefore, it can be said that the time-saving state is a state in which it is easy to win the jackpot of the second special symbol.

As described above, since the 100% first probability variable state is set after the second special symbol jackpot game ends, the first probability variable state continues until the probability variable limit or the time reduction limit is reached. And, since the jackpot of the second special symbol is always given a 10R jackpot game, when the first variable probability state is set, a maximum of 10 times of 10R jackpot games can be obtained until the variable probability limit or the short time limit is reached. becomes. Here, the "10R jackpot game" means that the opening/closing door 65f of the first variable winning device 65 shown in FIG. It is a jackpot game that is executed 10 times. The player can win a prize ball by entering the game ball into the first specific winning hole 65a.

In addition, the jackpot of the first special symbol is given a 2R jackpot game regardless of the jackpot type, and a high probability state of the special symbol is set. However, as described above, the time saving state is not set with a high probability for the jackpot in the first special symbol. Here, the "2R jackpot game" is a jackpot game in which the opening/closing plate 650b of the second variable winning device 650 shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 619, since the opening/closing plate 650b is opened for a very short period of time, game balls cannot enter the V winning opening 650a, and the player cannot win prize balls.

For example, during normal, when the first special symbol jackpot (jackpot A shown in FIG. 613 (b)) in which the high probability non-time saving state (second probability variable state) is set is elected, 40 times after the jackpot game ends Although the probability variation limit number of times is set, the second probability variation state in which the variation display of the first special symbol is mainly executed is set, and if the jackpot A or B continues 40 times during the second probability variation, the probability variation You've reached your limit and you're back to normal.

Also, for example, even if you win the first special symbol jackpot (jackpot C) in which the first probability variable state is set during the second probability variable state, the remaining number of probability limit times (remaining number of probability limit limits) If it is less than the remaining number of times of the time saving limit (remaining number of times of the time saving limit) (for example, if the remaining number of times of the time saving limit is 5 times and the remaining number of times of the time saving limit is 10 times), the probability change limit before reaching the time saving limit In order to reach , a special symbol low probability state is set when the probability variation limit is reached, and it becomes a time saving state (special symbol low probability state, normal symbol high probability state). In the time saving state, when the total number of fluctuations of the first special design and the second special design reaches 100 times, the time saving end condition is established, and the normal state (low probability state of special design, low probability state of normal design) Therefore, depending on the probability variation limit remaining number at the time of winning the jackpot where the first probability variation state is set, there may be cases where the 10R jackpot is not won and the state is shifted to the normal state.

That is, in the thirty-fifth embodiment, the more high-probability states of normal symbols are set, the easier it is for the player to obtain more prize balls before reaching the variable probability limit.

Here, the probability variation limit remaining number of times is the remaining number of times after the value of the probability variation limit number of times is updated, and indicates the number of jackpots required to reach the probability variation limit. In addition, the remaining number of times of the time saving limit is the remaining number of times after the value of the number of times of the time saving limit is updated, and indicates the number of big hits in which the time saving state required to reach the time saving limit is set.

Based on the above, the outline of the effect executed in the thirty-fifth embodiment will be described. As described above, the jackpot winning (first hit) in the normal state is the jackpot with the first special symbol except for the later-described "SPECIAL mode" (see Fig. 603). Therefore, depending on the type of jackpot, a game state with a different degree of advantage is set after the end of the jackpot game. to notify

When the jackpot (jackpot B, jackpot C) in which the first probability variable state is set in the first hit is won, one of the production modes set when the first probability variable state is set after the jackpot game is over. RUSH mode” (see FIGS. 590 and 591). Details will be described later, but in "super RUSH mode" (see Fig. 590, Fig. 591), before reaching the set probability limit number of times (40 times), it reaches the set time saving limit number of times (10 times) Therefore, it is configured to be informed that 10 times worth of 10R jackpot games can be obtained at the time of shifting to the "super RUSH mode".

In this way, by notifying that ten 10R jackpot games can be obtained, the player can be made to recognize that a large number of balls can be obtained by shifting to the "super RUSH mode". can.

On the other hand, when winning a jackpot (jackpot A) in which the first probability variable state is not set in the first hit, "revenge mode" which is one of the production modes set when the second probability variable state is set after the jackpot game ends. (See FIGS. 592 and 593). Although the details will be described later, the "revenge mode" informs the player that the jackpot has been won in an easy-to-understand manner only when the jackpot in which the first variable state is set is won, and the jackpot in which the second variable state is set is won. In this case, in order to execute an effect that makes it difficult for the player to notice that the jackpot has been won, the player is notified that the probability variable limit number of times has been updated by winning the jackpot in which the second probability variable state is set. It is designed to make it difficult to understand.

More specifically, during the "revenge mode", if you win a jackpot in which the second probability variation state is set in the first special symbol lottery (if the remaining number of probability variation limit times is updated), a small hit When winning (when the remaining number of probability variation limit times is not updated), it is configured so that the same effect mode effect is executed, and in the 35th embodiment, the first special symbol lottery The game contents of the jackpot game (2R jackpot game) executed when the jackpot is won and the small prize game are similar (similar in that the second variable winning device 650 is opened). As a result, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to grasp that the variable probability limit number of times has been updated.

In addition, during the "revenge mode" (see Figure 592, Figure 593), the first probability variation state is set to win the jackpot, and the remaining number of probability variation limits is less than the number of time reduction limits to be set. Configure. In other words, the "revenge mode" is set only when the probability variation limit remaining number of times is greater than the upper limit number (10) that can be set as the time saving limit number of times.

Therefore, when winning the jackpot in which the first variable probability state is set during the "revenge mode", it is notified that the game always shifts to the "super RUSH mode" (see FIGS. 590 and 591). By constructing in this way, the player who could not shift to the "super RUSH mode" at the first hit is expected to continue the game with the aim of shifting to the "super RUSH mode" during the "revenge mode". can let

Next, the second probability variable state is set "revenge mode" (see Figure 592, Figure 593), if the transition condition described later is satisfied, in a state in which the same second probability variable state is set It is configured to shift to a "challenge mode" (see FIGS. 594 to 596), which is a different production mode.

In this "challenge mode", as in the "revenge mode", since it is configured to notify the player only when the jackpot where the first probability variable state is set is won, the jackpot where the first probability variable state is not set (the It is configured so that even if the variable probability limit number is updated by winning the jackpot where the variable probability state is set, it is difficult for the player to grasp it.

In the "challenge mode" (see Figures 594 to 596), unlike the "revenge mode" (see Figures 592 and 593), if you win the jackpot where the first probability variable state is set, than the remaining number of times of the short time limit There may be cases where the number of times the probability limit remains is small, and the probability limit may be reached before reaching the time saving limit. Furthermore, in the "challenge mode", when the probability variable limit remaining number of times is 1, when the jackpot where the first probability variable state is set is won, the probability variable limit is reached after the jackpot game ends, and the time saving state (Low probability state of special design, high probability state of normal design).

Therefore, if you win the jackpot in which the first probability variable state is set during the "challenge mode", the first probability variable state "RUSH mode" (see FIGS. 597 to 600), or the time saving state "EXTRA mode" (Figs. 601 and 602).

In the "RUSH mode" (see FIGS. 597 to 600), unlike the "super RUSH mode" (FIGS. 590 and 591), the number of times the 10R jackpot game can be obtained is not reported at the time of shifting to the "RUSH mode" , It is configured to execute an effect (stock notification effect (see FIG. 597)) for informing the set number of times of the first variable probability state that can be set until the variable probability limit is reached.

By configuring in this way, it is difficult for a player who has set the "RUSH mode" to understand the set number of times of the first variable probability state that can be set until the variable probability limit is reached, and gradually by the stock notification effect. Since the set number of times of the first variable probability state that can be set until reaching the variable probability limit is notified, the content of the performance (stock notification performance) executed during the ``RUSH mode'' can be made interesting.

Also, during the first variable probability state, if you win a jackpot that reaches the variable probability limit and the short time limit at the same time, the normal state (low probability state of special symbols, low probability state of normal symbols) is set after the jackpot game ends. Even if the second special symbol is mainly fluctuating "SPECIAL mode" (see Figure 603) is configured to shift. "SPECIAL mode" continues until the end condition (for example, 1000 times of special symbol fluctuation) is established, and as described above, when the jackpot is won in the second special symbol lottery, the first probability variable state is always set. (FIG. 613(c)), it can be said that this mode is advantageous to the player.

In addition, when reaching the variable probability limit before reaching the time saving limit, it shifts to the time saving state "EXTRA mode" (Figs. 601 and 602). In "EXTRA mode", until the total number of fluctuations of the first special design and the second special design reaches 100 times, the second special design mainly fluctuates, so during the "EXTRA mode" the second special design lottery When a jackpot is won, a 10R jackpot game is executed, and if the short time limit is not reached, the state shifts to the first probability variable state.

Thus, "Challenge mode" (see Figure 594 ~ Figure 596) even if you win the jackpot in which the first probability variation state is set, it is not determined to acquire 10 rounds of 10R jackpot game, probability variation Although it may be disadvantageous for a player who cannot obtain 10 times of 10R jackpot games depending on the number of remaining limit, "SPECIAL mode" (see FIG. 603) after "RUSH mode" (see FIGS. 597 to 600). Since there is a possibility that the mode will shift to the "SPECIAL mode", the game can be continued by making the player expect the shift to the "SPECIAL mode".

As described above, in the 35th embodiment, in the second variable probability state, by notifying only the specific jackpot winning (jackpot winning in which the first variable probability state is set), the player can understand the remaining number of probability variable limits. While making it difficult, in the second probability variation state, depending on the probability variation limit remaining number of times "revenge mode" (see Figure 592, Figure 593) and "challenge mode" (see Figures 594 to 596) two modes are used properly, In the "revenge mode", the transition to the "super RUSH mode" (see FIGS. 590 and 591) is expected, and in the "challenge mode", the transition to the "SPECIAL mode" (see FIG. 603) is expected. It is possible to improve the player's interest in the game in the variable probability state.

Next, the details of the presentation in the thirty-fifth embodiment will be described. First, with reference to FIGS. 588 and 589, the “RUSH acquisition challenge” executed during the jackpot game after the first win will be described.

FIG. 588(a) is the effect screen of "RUSH Acquisition Challenge". In the guide display area Dm1, "right shot" is displayed to guide the player to shoot the game ball to the right area of the game board. "555" is displayed in the special figure 1 fluctuation display area Dm2, indicating that the first special symbol has been won in the jackpot. In addition, in the special figure 2 fluctuation display area Dm3, there is a display indicating that the second special symbol has not fluctuated.

A hero 801 and a treasure chest 802 are displayed in the main display area Dm, and in the first display area HR1, "If a RUSH ball comes out of the treasure chest, rush into RUSH!" It suggests that whether or not to shift to RUSH is notified.

Figure 588 (b) is executed when winning the jackpot (jackets B, C shown in Figure 613 (b)) in which the high probability time saving state (first probability variable state) is set in the normal state "RUSH acquisition It is an example of the production screen of "Challenge". An effect is displayed in which the first ball 803a described as "Super RUSH" comes out of the treasure box 802, "Congratulations!" is displayed in the first display area HR1, and "You did it!" Acquisition of super RUSH!" is displayed, and it is notified that the game will shift to "super RUSH mode" (see FIGS. 590 and 591) after the jackpot game ends. In addition, "0/12500" is displayed in the first game information display area Dm4, and the number of prize balls that can be won and the number of prize balls that have already been obtained by winning a jackpot in the "super RUSH mode" are displayed. In FIG. 588(b), "0" is displayed because the 2R jackpot was won in the first win and no prize ball can be obtained as described above.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to notify the player in advance of the total amount of benefits (information indicating the number of 10R jackpot games played and expected winning balls) to be given when the "super RUSH mode" is set. , the player can play a game while being immersed in a sense of superiority at ease.

Figure 589 is an example of the effect screen of "RUSH acquisition challenge" executed when winning the jackpot (jackpot A shown in Figure 613 (b)) in which the high probability non-time saving state (second probability variable state) is set is. An effect is displayed in which the second ball 803b described as "Revenge" comes out of the treasure box 802, "Unfortunate" is displayed in the first display area HR1, and "Starting the next revenge mode!" is displayed in the sub display area Ds! ” is displayed, and it is notified that the game will shift to the “revenge mode” after the jackpot game ends.

In this way, by informing the player of the game state set after the end of the big winning game during the big winning game, the player can play the game in an easy-to-understand manner.

In the thirty-fifth embodiment, the configuration is such that the game state set after the end of the jackpot game is notified according to the content of the treasure box 802, but the present invention is not limited to this. The game state may be notified by another character, or the game state may be notified by sound or light emission of an LED provided on the board instead of the third symbol display device 81 .

Next, with reference to FIGS. 590 and 591, the effect in the “super RUSH mode” will be described. FIG. 590(a) is an example of an effect screen displayed when the special symbol is displayed in a variable manner in the "super RUSH mode". In the thirty-fifth embodiment, as described above, since the first special symbol and the second special symbol are configured to be variable and displayable at the same time, in the special figure 1 variation display area Dm2 and the special figure 2 variation display area Dm3, There is a display showing that both special symbols are displayed in a variable manner. In the first game information display area Dm4, "10R bonus 0/10" is displayed, and the number of 10R jackpot games that can be obtained until the "super RUSH mode" ends (jackpot D ( 613(c))) and the number of jackpots D that have already been obtained are displayed, suggesting that the "super RUSH mode" will end when the number becomes "10/10". In the main display area Dm, an effect is displayed in which the brave man 801 chases the first balloon 804a with the words "Congratulations" written on it.

FIG. 590(b) is an effect screen when winning a jackpot D (FIG. 613(c)) that does not reach the time-saving limit during the “super RUSH mode”. In the special figure 2 variation display area Dm3, "777" indicating that the jackpot D has been won is displayed, and in the special figure 1 variation display area Dm2, it is indicated that the first special symbol is forcibly stopped. "123" is displayed. In addition, "10R jackpot" is displayed in the first display area HR1, indicating that the hero 801 has won the jackpot D by taking the first balloon 804a, and in the first game information display area Dm4 is displayed as "10R bonus 1/10", and the number of times the jackpot D has been obtained up to now is updated and displayed.

FIG. 591(a) is an example of an effect screen in the "super RUSH mode" when the remaining number of times of the time saving limit is one. Since the remaining number of times of the time saving limit is 1 time, even if the next winning jackpot is the jackpot for which the first variable probability state is set, the second variable probability state is set after the jackpot game is finished. Therefore, in order to indicate that the "super RUSH mode" will end when the next jackpot D (FIG. 613(c)) is won, an effect is performed in which the hero 801 chases the second balloon 804b labeled "END". be. In this way, in the "super RUSH mode", different balloons are displayed according to the remaining number of times of the time saving limit, so that the player can easily understand whether the first probability variation will continue after the jackpot game ends. It is configured to be

In addition, in the case of FIG. 590(a), when the variation display of the second special symbol is not performed and the variation display of the first special symbol is performed to show that the result of the lottery is a jackpot. , the second balloon 804b appears from the right side of the main display area Dm, and when the first special symbol stops, the hero 801 takes the second balloon 804b. In that case, when the jackpot type is jackpot C (Fig. 613(b)), the characters written on the second balloon 804b change to "continue", and the "super RUSH mode" continues. to be notified.

By adopting the configuration in which the second balloon 804b appears in this way, it is suggested to the player that there is a possibility of winning the jackpot with the first special symbol, and before the first special symbol ends the variable display. The player can be urged to start the variable display of the second special symbol.

FIG. 591(b) is an example of an effect screen when winning the jackpot D (FIG. 613(c)) reaching the time-saving limit during the “super RUSH mode”. The main display area Dm shows that the hero 801 has won the jackpot D by taking the second balloon 804b. Also, in the second display area HR2, "30 times left until the probability limit is reached" is displayed to notify that the probability limit remaining number of times is 30 times.

In this way, when the probability variation limit remaining number is reported at the end of the "super RUSH mode", when the probability variation limit remaining number is large, the player is prompted to win the jackpot to shift to the "super RUSH mode" again. Even if it becomes easier to aim and continue the game, and the probability variable limit remaining number of times is small, for example, if the probability variable limit remaining number of times is 12 times, a jackpot that can be shifted to "SPECIAL mode" (see Fig. 603) is won. It is possible to continue the game with the aim of doing so.

With reference to FIGS. 592 and 593, the effects in the “revenge mode” will be described. In addition, "revenge mode" is a mode that shifts when the high probability non-time saving state (second probability variation state) is set when the probability variation limit remaining number of times is 40 times to 14 times. In other words, if you win the jackpot A (Fig. 613 (b)) in the first hit, or if the time limit is reached in the first probability variation state, the remaining number of probability variation limits is 40 to 14 times. Transition.

FIG. 592(a) is an example of an effect screen when the special symbols are variably displayed during the "revenge mode". In the "revenge mode", an effect in which the hero 801 chases the rabbit 805 is displayed in the main display area Dm. Also, in the sub-display area Ds, "In revenge mode! Chance to get super RUSH!"

Figure 592 (b) is an example of the production screen in the case of winning the jackpot C (Figure 613 (b)) in which the high probability time saving state (first probability variable state) is set. In the main display area Dm, an effect is displayed in which the hero 801 retrieves the treasure box 802 from the rabbit 805 and the first ball 803a comes out of the treasure box 802 . As a result, the player can recognize that the jackpot C is won and the game shifts to the "super RUSH mode" after the jackpot game ends.

In the first game information display area Dm4, "10R bonus total 10 times" is displayed, indicating the number of jackpots D (10R jackpot) won from the first win to the present, and displayed when the jackpot D is won. is added. This value is not updated when jackpots A, B, and C (Fig. 613(b)) are won. making it difficult to predict.

Figure 593 (a) is an example of the effect screen when winning a jackpot A, B (see FIG. 613 (b)) or a small hit in which a high probability non-time saving state (second probability variable state) is set. "111" indicating that the first special symbol has won the jackpot A (or B) is displayed in the special figure 1 variation display area Dm2, and the second special symbol is forced to be displayed in the special figure 2 variation display area Dm3. "123" is displayed to indicate that it has been stopped as a failure. However, in the main display area Dm, an effect in which the hero 801 chases the rabbit 805 is displayed, which is the same as when the special symbols are displayed in a variable manner.

In this way, when the player wins the big wins A, B or the small wins, the effect in the main display area Dm is the same as the effect during the variable display of the special symbols, so that the player wins the big wins A, B. This makes it difficult for the player to count the number of winning jackpots to specify the remaining number of probability variable limits.

In the thirty-fifth embodiment, the special figure 1 variation display area Dm2 and the special figure 2 variation display area Dm3 are configured so that the player can visually recognize them, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the special figure 1 variable display area Dm2 and the special figure 2 variable display area Dm3 may be displayed in a smaller size so that the player may not be able to visually recognize them, or the display contents may be displayed with some symbols (“○”, “×”, etc.) instead of numbers. ”, etc.) may be used to notify the result of the lottery. By configuring in this way, it becomes more difficult for the player to notice that the jackpots A and B have been won in the high probability non-time-saving state (second probability variable state), and it is possible to make it difficult to predict the probability variable limit remaining number of times. Therefore, the amusement of the game can be improved.

In addition, in the 35th embodiment, the probability variation limit remaining number is not notified and the player is configured to make it difficult to predict the probability variation limit remaining number, but the probability variation limit remaining number may be notified. By configuring in this way, it becomes easier for players who have other plans to predict how long the special symbol high probability state (high probability state of special symbols) can continue, and whether to continue the game based on it. can determine

FIG. 593(b) is an example of an effect screen when the transition condition to the "challenge mode" is satisfied during the "revenge mode". When the transition condition is met, an effect is executed in which the hero 801 recovers the treasure box 802 from the rabbit 805 in the main display area Dm, as in the case of winning the jackpot C (FIG. 613(b)). However, unlike the jackpot C (Fig. 613(b)), an effect is displayed in which the third ball 803c labeled "Challenge" appears from the treasure box 802, and "Revenge mode ends..." is displayed in the secondary display area Ds. Entering challenge mode next time!" is displayed to inform you that you will be transitioning to "challenge mode".

With this configuration, when the rabbit 805 drops the treasure box 802, the player can be interested in which of the "super RUSH" or "challenge" comes out of the treasure box 802. It becomes possible and the interest of the game can be improved.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 594 to 596, the effects executed in the “challenge mode” will be described. "Challenge mode" is based on the number of times a small hit is won in "Revenge mode" when a high probability non-time saving state (second probability variable state) is set when the probability limit remaining number is 13 to 2 times This is the transition mode. Therefore, when the jackpot C (Fig. 613 (b)) is won during the "challenge mode", if the probability variation limit remaining number is less than the set time reduction limit number (10 times) (for example, probability variation limit remaining number 5 times), so if the probability variable limit is reached before reaching the time saving limit, a low probability time saving state (time saving state) is set.

Then, if the jackpot is not won before the time saving end condition is satisfied in the low probability time saving state (time saving state), the low probability non-working time saving state (normal state) is set, so if the 10R jackpot game cannot be executed 10 times There is a possibility that the number of prize balls that the player can acquire is reduced, which is disadvantageous to the player compared to the case of winning the jackpot C (Fig. 613(b)) in the "revenge mode".

However, when the probability limit and the short time limit are reached at the same time (for example, when the probability limit is 11 times, after winning the jackpot C (Fig. 613 (b)), when winning the jackpot D 10 times) , Not only can 10R jackpot games be acquired 10 times, but after the end of the jackpot games that reach both limits at the same time, the second special pattern is the main and variable low-probability short-time state (normal state) "SPECIAL mode” (see FIG. 603), it is more advantageous to the player than winning the jackpot C during the “revenge mode”.

In this way, when the jackpot C (Fig. 613 (b)) is won in the "challenge mode", there is a possibility that it will be more advantageous than the jackpot C in the "revenge mode". It is possible to prevent the player's desire to play from decreasing due to the shift to the "challenge mode" which may not be possible.

In addition, by adopting a configuration in which the transition to the "challenge mode" is made even when the number of times the winning small prize exceeds a predetermined number of times, the probability variation limit remaining number of times can be predicted based on the player's transition to the "challenge mode". can be made more difficult.

FIG. 594(a) is an example of an effect screen during variable display of special symbols in the "challenge mode". In the main display area Dm, an effect that the hero 801 is about to open the door 806 is displayed. Then, in the first display area HR1, "If there is RUSH after opening the door, enter RUSH!"

FIG. 594(b) is an example of an effect screen when winning the jackpot C (FIG. 613(b)) during the “challenge mode”. In the main display area Dm, the door 806 is opened, and an effect that the fourth ball 803d described as "RUSH" is found is displayed, and in the first display area HR1, "RUSH acquired!" Ds displays "Rush into next RUSH!"

FIG. 595(a) is an example of an effect screen when winning a big win A, B (FIG. 613(b)) or a small win during the “challenge mode”. "111" indicating that the first special symbol has won the jackpot A (or B) is displayed in the special figure 1 variation display area Dm2, and the second special symbol is forced to be displayed in the special figure 2 variation display area Dm3. "123" is displayed to indicate that it has been stopped as a failure. However, in the main display area Dm, an effect in which the hero 801 attempts to open the door 806 is displayed in the same manner as when the special symbols are displayed in a variable manner.

As in the "revenge mode", when the big wins A, B or small wins are won, the effect in the main display area Dm is the same as the effect during the variable display of the special symbols. It becomes difficult for the player to notice that he/she has won the lottery, and it is difficult for the player to specify the remaining number of times of the probability variable limit by counting the number of times of winning the jackpot.

FIG. 595(b) is an example of an effect screen displayed when the transition condition is established by winning the jackpot C (FIG. 613(b)) during the "challenge mode". Specifically, it is a case where the jackpot C is won when the probability variable limit remaining number of times is one. In this case, since the probability variable limit is reached by winning the jackpot C this time, the first variable probability state is not set after the jackpot game ends, and the time saving state is set. That is, it does not shift to the "RUSH mode" but shifts to the "EXTRA mode". Therefore, in the main display area Dm, the door 806 is opened, and an effect is displayed in which the fifth ball 803e described as "EXTRA" is found, and in the first display area HR1, "EXTRA Acquisition" is displayed as a secondary display. In the area Ds, "Enter EXTRA mode next time" is displayed to inform the transition to the "EXTRA mode".

In this way, according to the degree of reaching each limit after the end of the jackpot game, the game state to be set after the end of the jackpot game is determined in advance, and based on the determination result, the same jackpot type jackpot is won. Even if there is, it is possible to notify the player of the subsequent game content in an easy-to-understand manner by configuring the performance mode to be different at the time of winning the jackpot.

Further, for example, if the pachinko machine 10 has a jackpot type in which a time-saving state (low-probability state for special symbols, high-probability state for normal symbols) is set after the end of the jackpot game, the time-saving state is set for this jackpot winning. To make it difficult to determine whether the player wins the jackpot category set by the selected jackpot category or wins the jackpot category in which the first variable probability state is set, but wins the jackpot category in which the time-saving state is set by reaching the variable probability limit. can. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to notice that a disadvantageous gaming state is set (has been set) by reaching the variable probability limit.

FIG. 596 is an example of the effect screen when the transition condition is established by winning the jackpots A and B (FIG. 613(b)) during the "challenge mode". Specifically, when the probability variation limit remaining number of times is 1, the jackpot A (or B) is won and the probability variation limit is reached. In this case, since the low-probability non-time-saving state (normal state) is set, in the main display area Dm, the door 806 opens, the sixth ball 803f marked with "END" is found, and in the sub-display area Ds "Challenge mode finished...returning to normal..." is displayed to notify that the game will shift to normal.

In this way, in the "challenge mode", since the transition mode (game state to be set) differs depending on the probability variable limit remaining number of times and the jackpot type won, the player can choose the type of ball discovered when the door 806 opens. By notifying the transition destination to , it is made easy for the player to understand.

In addition, since the door 806 is not opened when the jackpots A and B (FIG. 613(b)) are won except when the transition condition is satisfied, when the door 806 opening effect is executed, The player can expect to win the jackpot C (Fig. 613(b)), and can be interested in what kind of ball is behind the door 806, thereby improving the amusement of the game. can be made

In addition, the production|presentation in a 2nd probability change state is not restricted to this. In the embodiment, it is configured to switch between two types of modes, "revenge mode" and "challenge mode", depending on the number of times the probability variation limit remains, but the second probability variation state from the first hit to the normal state is set to 1. You can run it in one mode. In this case, it becomes more difficult to predict the probability variable limit remaining number of times depending on the mode to which the player has switched, so the interest in the game can be further improved. Of course, two or more modes may be switched according to the probability variation limit remaining number of times.

In addition, in the thirty-fifth embodiment, when the jackpots A and B (FIG. 613(b)) are won in the second variable probability state, the player is not notified, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when the jackpots A and B are won, an effect that the door 806 opens is executed, but an effect that there is nothing inside may be executed. By doing so, the second variable probability state is set, and if the jackpot C (Fig. 613(b)) is not won, the effect does not progress in the main display area Dm for a long time, and the player gets bored. You can fix the problem.

In addition, the effect is not limited to the effect using the treasure chest 802 and the door 806, and the effect using other characters may be used. can be

Next, with reference to FIGS. 597 to 600, effects executed during the “RUSH mode” will be described. In the "RUSH mode", as described above, the number of times that the jackpot D (Fig. 613 (c)) can be won changes depending on the combination of the probability variation limit remaining number and the time saving limit remaining number. Specifically, when the probability variation limit remaining number is 12 times, if the time saving limit remaining number is 10 times (2nd probability variation jackpot C (Fig. 613 (b)) is elected, and the time saving limit number is newly set In the state), it is possible to reach the short time limit before reaching the probability variable limit, so it is possible to win 10 times of 10R jackpot games.

However, if the probability variation limit remaining number is 5 times, and the time saving limit remaining number is 10 times, the probability variation limit is reached before the time saving limit is reached, so 10R jackpot games are obtained at most 5 times. After reaching the variable limit, a low-probability short-time state (short-time state) is set. put away.

Therefore, in the "RUSH mode", the "RUSH stock effect" is configured to inform the player how long the first variable probability state continues. In addition, the number of stocks in the RUSH stock changes according to the probability variation limit remaining number and the time saving limit remaining number, for example, when the probability variation limit remaining number is 12 times and the time saving limit remaining number is 10 times, notification The maximum possible number of stocks is "10". On the other hand, when the variable probability limit remaining number is 5 times and the time saving limit remaining number is 10 times, the maximum number of stocks that can be notified is "5".

FIG. 597(a) is an example of an effect screen displayed during the variable display of the special symbols in the "RUSH mode". In the main display area Dm, an effect is performed in which the hero 801 chases three balloons. In the secondary display area Ds, "RUSH in progress! Continue RUSH as long as there is stock!" have been notified.

The RUSH stock is displayed in the second game information display area Dm5 when the hero 801 takes the fourth balloon 804d marked with "stock+?" displayed in the main display area Dm. is updated.

FIG. 597(b) is an example of an effect screen when the stock is successful when the remaining number of times of the time saving limit is 10 times. In the main display area Dm, an effect is executed in which the hero 801 takes the fourth balloon 804d, and the fourth balloon 804d changes to display a fifth balloon 804e with "stock +5". As a result, the value of the second game information display area Dm5 is updated to "5", and it is notified that the first variable probability state continues even if the jackpot D is won.

In addition, for example, when the probability variable limit remaining number is 12 times and the time saving limit remaining number is 10 times, the stock number may be reported as "+10", or divided into multiple times as "+1". You can inform me. By doing so, even if the initial stock number is small, the player can expect the stock to be added, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

In addition, in FIG. 597(b), an effect is displayed in which the stock succeeds when a special symbol is won. may be executed. In this way, when the second balloon 804b is picked up with no stock, by executing the effect that the second balloon 804b changes to the fifth balloon 804e, even when the second balloon 804b is selected, It is possible to make the player expect the change to the fifth balloon 804e, thereby improving the interest of the game.

FIG. 598(a) is an example of an effect screen when winning the jackpot D (FIG. 613(c)) with RUSH stock in the "RUSH mode". In the main display area Dm, an effect is executed in which the hero 801 takes the third balloon 804c labeled with "10R", and in the sub-display area Ds, "Continue RUSH!" is displayed, and the second game information display area Dm5. is updated from "5" to "4". As a result, the player can recognize that the first probability variation is continuously set after the end of the jackpot game.

FIG. 598(b) is an example of an effect screen when winning the jackpot D (FIG. 613(c)) with no RUSH stock in the "RUSH mode". In the main display area Dm, an effect is performed in which the hero 801 takes the second balloon 804b labeled "END", and in the sub-display area Ds, "RUSH end...next challenge mode" is displayed. Since the value of the game information display area Dm5 is "0", it is not updated. This allows the player to recognize that the "RUSH mode" has ended.

In addition, in FIG. 598(b), "RUSH end...next challenge mode" is displayed in the sub-display area Ds. mode” is displayed.

FIG. 599(a) is an example of an effect screen displayed when the probability variation limit remaining number is smaller than the time saving limit remaining number. In this case, to reach the probability variation limit before reaching the time reduction limit, low probability time reduction state (time reduction state) is set when the probability variation limit is reached. Therefore, when the hero 801 takes the fourth balloon 804d, the fourth balloon 804d changes to the sixth balloon 804f labeled "stock + 5 + EXTRA", and after the "RUSH mode" ends, the "EXTRA mode" is entered. You will be notified in advance of the transfer.

In the embodiment, when the fourth balloon 804d is picked up, the fourth balloon 804d changes to the fifth balloon 804f, and the transition to the "EXTRA mode" is notified in advance. When the hero 801 takes the second balloon 804b while the number is "0", an effect may be executed in which the second balloon 804b changes to a balloon labeled "EXTRA".

FIG. 599(b) is an example of an effect screen executed when the probability variation limit remaining number of times is one and the time saving limit remaining number of times is one. In this case, when the jackpot D (FIG. 613(c)) is won next time, the variable probability limit and the short time limit are reached at the same time. Therefore, during the variable display of the special symbols, an effect in which the seventh balloon 804g labeled "SPECIAL" flies is executed in the main display area Dm. As a result, the player can recognize that when the next big win D is won, the game will shift to the "SPECIAL mode".

Figure 599 is an example of an effect screen executed when the variable probability limit and the short time limit are reached at the same time by winning the jackpot D (Figure 613(c)). In the main display area Dm, an effect in which the hero 801 takes the seventh balloon 804g is executed, and in the sub-display area Ds, "Starting the next SPECIAL mode!" You can recognize the transition.

As described above, in the thirty-fifth embodiment, two of the variable probability limit number and the time saving limit number are set, so that the same type of jackpot (for example, jackpot D (Fig. 613 (c))) is won in the same gaming state. Even if you do, if you do not reach both limits, if you reach only the variable limit, if you reach only the short time limit, and if you reach both limits at the same time, the degree of advantage after the jackpot game is different. Multiple game states can be set. Along with this, there is a problem that the game state set after the end of the jackpot game is complicated and difficult for the player to understand. By varying the presentation mode, the player is informed of the game state set after the end of the big win game so that the player can smoothly execute the game suitable for the set game state after the end of the big win game. .

It should be noted that, in the present embodiment, the probability variation limit remaining number of times is 1 time, the time saving limit remaining number of times is configured to appear when the seventh balloon 804g 804g, but not limited to this, the probability variation limit remaining number of times or Even if the remaining number of time saving limits is two or more, the seventh balloon 804g may appear. By doing so, even if the seventh balloon 804g appears, the seventh balloon 804g may not be captured, so it is possible to make the player interested in whether or not the seventh balloon 804g will be captured. It is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, in the embodiment, it is configured to notify that the transition to SPECIAL mode will be performed when the jackpot winning that reaches the probability variable limit and the short time limit at the same time is notified, but when it is predicted that the conditions for transitioning to SPECIAL mode will be satisfied (first (When the probability variable limit remaining number and the time saving limit remaining number are the same when the probability variable jackpot is won), it may be notified by a special performance mode (for example, display of "SPECIAL jackpot!" etc.). By configuring in this manner, the player can recognize in advance that the SPECIAL mode will be set when both limits are reached, and the player's desire to play can be improved.

In addition, if the condition to shift to SPECIAL mode can be satisfied in the situation where the special pattern in the second probability variable state is fluctuating If there is, it may be notified by a special effect mode (for example, a display such as "Chance to switch to SPECIAL mode!?"). With this configuration, it is possible to play the game while making the player anticipate the transition to the SPECIAL mode.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 601 and 602, the effects executed in the "EXTRA mode" will be described. "EXTRA mode" is a mode to shift when a low-probability short working hours state (short working hours state) is set. As described above, when the variable probability limit is reached before the time reduction limit, the game shifts to the "EXTRA mode" after the jackpot game that reaches the variable probability limit is completed.

FIG. 601(a) is an example of an effect screen when shifting to the "EXTRA mode" and displaying the 10th total variation number of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. In the third game information display area Dm6, the number of remaining fluctuations of the first special symbol and the second special symbol until the end condition of the "EXTRA mode" is reached is displayed. The value displayed in the third game information display area Dm6 is updated (subtracted) and displayed when the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol ends (when the symbol stops).

In addition, in the "EXTRA mode", the second special symbol mainly fluctuates, and since it is easy to win the jackpot D (Fig. 613 (c)), the sub-display area Ds displays "In EXTRA mode! A chance to win a 10R jackpot". !” is displayed, the player can expect to win the jackpot D and play the game.

In the main display area Dm, an effect of the hero 801 fighting the dinosaur 807 is executed, and in the first display area HR1, "If you defeat the enemy, you win a big win" is displayed. We are announcing that it will be done.

FIG. 601(b) is an example of an effect screen when winning the jackpot D (FIG. 613(c)) during the "EXTRA mode". "777" indicating that the jackpot D was won is displayed in the special figure 2 variable display area Dm3, "Victory" is displayed in the first display area HR1, and the hero 801 kills the dinosaur 807 in the main display area Dm. The effect of defeating is executed, and the player is notified that the jackpot D has been won. Also, corresponding to the end of the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, the value of the seventh game information display area Dm6 is updated from "91" to "89".

In addition, even if you win the jackpot D (Fig. 613 (c)) in the "EXTRA mode", if the first probability variable state is not set after the jackpot game ends depending on the remaining number of times of the time saving limit (jackpot D winning in the "EXTRA mode" If the time reduction limit is reached by), so that "Next RUSH acquisition challenge!" ). When the time-saving limit has not been reached, a fourth ball 803d (Fig. 594(b)) comes out from the treasure box 802 (Fig. 588(a)), and a transition to the "RUSH mode" is reported, thereby reducing the time. When the limit is reached, a second ball 803b (Fig. 589) will come out of the treasure chest 802, and a shift to the "revenge mode" will be notified.

FIG. 602(a) is an example of an effect screen when the lottery result is lost during the "EXTRA mode" or when a small win is won. In the main display area Dm, an effect in which the hero 801 and the dinosaur 807 fight is displayed, which is the same as during the variable display of the special symbols. The value of the third game information display area Dm6 is updated from "91" to "90" corresponding to the variable display of the second special symbol.

FIG. 602(b) is an example of an effect screen when the condition for ending the "EXTRA mode" is satisfied. In response to the fact that the total number of fluctuations of the first special symbol and the second special symbol has reached 100 times, the value of the game information display area Dm6 is updated to "0", and the sub display area Ds displays "EXTRA mode end/ . Also, in the main display area Dm, an effect in which the hero 801 is defeated by the dinosaur 807 is executed.

By doing so, it is possible to inform the player in an easy-to-understand manner that the conditions for ending the "EXTRA mode" are satisfied and that the normal state is set.

Note that the effects in the "EXTRA mode" are not limited to this. In the thirty-fifth embodiment, the number of remaining fluctuations until the condition for ending the "EXTRA mode" is reached is notified, but it may be configured not to be notified. With this configuration, the player does not know when the "EXTRA mode" will end, so the player can play the game with a sense of tension.

In addition, in the embodiment, it was configured to shift to "EXTRA mode" when reaching the variable probability limit before reaching the time saving limit, but the configuration to shift to "EXTRA mode" even when both limits are not reached It is good as In this case, since the game state is the first probability variable state, for example, when the total number of fluctuations of the first special symbol and the second special symbol reaches 100 times, the effect to shift to "RUSH mode" is executed. Alternatively, an effect of continuing the "EXTRA mode" may be executed by informing that the player is in the first variable probability state. By configuring in this way, the player can expect that the first variable probability state is set even after shifting to the "EXTRA mode", and the interest in the game can be improved.

In the thirty-fifth embodiment, the battle between the hero 801 and the dinosaur 807 is performed in the main display area Dm. However, other characters may be used instead.

Next, with reference to FIG. 603, the effects executed in the "SPECIAL mode" will be described. "SPECIAL mode" is, as described above, a mode that shifts when a low probability non-time-saving state (normal state) is set based on reaching the probability variable limit and time-saving limit at the same time. In "SPECIAL mode", since the second special pattern fluctuates mainly, it can be expected to win the jackpot D (Fig. 613 (c)), and the probability variation limit number and the time reduction limit number are not set. , when the jackpot D is won, the shift to the "super RUSH mode" is confirmed. Therefore, it can be said that this mode is more advantageous to the player than the normal state in which the first special symbol mainly fluctuates.

FIG. 603(a) is an effect screen during variable display of special symbols in the "SPECIAL mode". In the main display area Dm, an effect is performed in which the hero 801 chases the eighth balloon 804h labeled "10R + Super RUSH", and in the sub display area Ds, "SPECIAL mode! Chance to win 10R jackpot + Super RUSH! ' is displayed to inform the player that the 'SPECIAL mode' is in progress. Also, in the third game information display area Dm6, it is suggested that the "SPECIAL mode" will continue until the next big win is won. As a result, a player who is about to end the game after the end of the high-probability state in which it is easy to win a big win recognizes that he has shifted to the "SPECIAL mode", which is more advantageous than usual, and warns the player of the big win D ( It is possible to make the player think to continue playing the game until he/she wins (FIG. 613(c)).

FIG. 603(b) is an example of an effect screen when winning the jackpot D (FIG. 613(c)) in the "SPECIAL mode". An effect is executed in which the hero 801 takes the eighth balloon 804h, and the winning of the jackpot D and the transition to the "super RUSH mode" are reported.

In the embodiment, the effect in the "SPECIAL mode" executed in the main display area Dm is the effect in which the hero 801 chases the eighth balloon 804h. The player may be notified by changing the setting.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 604 to 607, the correspondence between the game state transition contents and the effect contents to be executed will be described. FIG. 604 schematically shows the flow when the jackpot C (jackpot type in which the first variable state is set) is won in the normal state, out of the correspondence relationship between the content of the transition of the game state and the content of the effect to be executed. is a diagram shown in FIG.

As shown in FIG. 604, in the normal state, the first special symbol variation (special 1 variation) is mainly executed, and when the jackpot C (first probability variable jackpot) is won, during the jackpot game (during the 2R jackpot game), RUSH An acquisition challenge (see Figures 588 and 589) is performed. In this case, since the jackpot game corresponding to the jackpot type (jackpot C) in which the first probability variable state is set after the jackpot game ends, the display mode indicating "super RUSH" confirmation is displayed as the production result of the RUSH acquisition challenge production. is displayed (see FIG. 588(b)). At the end of the jackpot game, the first variable probability state is set, and the variable probability limit number of times "40" and the time reduction limit number of times "10" are set.

During "super RUSH", the first probability variable state is set 10 times in a row (10R jackpot is 10 consecutive chans). A display mode for indicating the number of execution times (upper limit number) of 10R jackpot games that can be obtained during "Super RUSH" and the number of 10R jackpot games that have been executed at present are displayed in the first game information display area Dm4.

And, in the state where the first probability variable state is set continuously 10 times, the effect shown in FIG. is displayed, and when the jackpot is won in that state, the display screen shown in FIG. 591(b) is displayed.

When the jackpot is won in a state where the first probability variable state is set to 10 times continuously, the probability variable limit number of times at the end of the jackpot game is ``30'' and the time reduction limit number of times is ``0'', so time reduction limit processing. is executed, and the game state shifts to the second variable probability state (high probability state for special symbols, low probability state for normal symbols). In this state, the probability variation limit number of times is "30", and when the first special symbol lottery executed during this second probability variation state wins the jackpot type (jackpot C) in which the first probability variation state is set, Since it is possible to set the first variable probability state 10 times in succession, "revenge mode" is set as the effect mode during the second variable probability state (see FIG. 592).

During this second probability variable state, a game for executing the first special symbol lottery is executed by the right-handed game, so the ball enters the second ball entrance 640 and the second special symbol lottery is also executed. However, in the thirty-fifth embodiment, when a small hit is won in the first special symbol lottery, the second special symbol variation being executed is forcibly stopped and displayed in a display mode indicating the deviation (special FIG. 2 discarding process) is configured to be executed, so as long as the right-handed game is properly executed in the second variable probability state, the result of the second special symbol lottery will not be stopped and displayed. .

Then, the jackpot is won in the first special symbol lottery executed during the ``revenge mode'', and the jackpot types (jackpots A and B) in which the second probability variable state is set after the jackpot game ends are continuously won, When the probability variable limit number of times becomes "13 or less", the production mode indicating the second probability variable state can shift from "revenge mode" to "challenge mode", and the jackpot winning in the second probability variable state, or Based on the winning of the small prize, it shifts to the "challenge mode".

When shifting to "challenge mode", as shown in Figure 594 and Figure 595, reaching the probability variable limit (continuing the high probability state of the special symbol The special figure high probability period that can be set ends) When the 40th jackpot is won after the special pattern high probability period is set, the variable probability limit is reached, and the low probability state of the special pattern is forcibly set at the end of the jackpot game. A probability variation limit process is executed, and a normal state (low probability state of special symbols, low probability state of normal symbols) is set.

Next, with reference to FIG. 605, in the state where the second variable probability state is set in the flow of FIG. An example of the flow will be explained. FIG. 605 shows the game state transition content and the game state when winning the jackpot in which the first probability variable state is set after the jackpot game ends in the second probability variable state among the correspondence relationships between the content of the effect to be executed. It is the figure which showed typically an example of the flow of execution production|presentation.

As shown in FIG. 605, in the state where the second probability variable state is set, as the 35th jackpot winning, when the jackpot (jackpot C) in which the first probability variable state is set after the jackpot game ends, " In the "challenge mode" effect, the effect indicating the transition to the "RUSH mode" (first variable state) is executed as a big hit variation effect (see Fig. 594(b)).

Then, the probability variation limit number set at the end of the jackpot game is updated, the time reduction limit number of times "10" is newly set, and the production in which "RUSH mode" is set as the production mode indicating the first probability variation state is executed. (See FIG. 597). At this point, the remaining number of probability variable limit times is "5" and the remaining number of time saving limit times is "10", so the maximum number of times that can be set while continuing the first variable probability state is "5". Therefore, during the fifth jackpot change, "0" is displayed as the RUSH stock number in the second game information display area Dm5, and whether the RUSH mode continues in the next jackpot election (the first probability variable state continues or), the normal state (SPECIAL mode) or the effect that suggests whether to move to the time saving state (EXTRA mode) is executed (see FIG. 599 (a)), and as a result of the effect, the time saving state ( A jackpot game is executed after an effect for notifying that the mode is shifted to the EXTRA mode is executed.

At the end of the jackpot game, the variable probability limit is reached, and the variable probability limit processing in which the low probability state of the special symbol is forcibly set is executed, and the time saving state (low probability state of the special symbol, high probability state of the normal symbol). is set, and the effect in the "EXTRA mode" indicating the time saving state is executed (see Fig. 601).

Next, with reference to FIG. 606, an example of the flow of the game state and the execution effect when the jackpot is won in the second special symbol lottery in the state where the time saving state is set in the flow of FIG. 605 described above. explain about FIG. 606 shows the game state transition content and the execution performance when winning the jackpot in which the first probability variable state is set after the jackpot game ends during the time saving state among the correspondence relationships between the content of the game state and the performance content to be executed is a diagram schematically showing an example of the flow of.

If the jackpot is won in the second special symbol lottery during the "EXTRA mode" indicating the time saving state, the effect screen shown in FIG. 601(b) is displayed during the jackpot fluctuation. Then, during the jackpot game, a RUSH acquisition challenge effect (see FIG. 588(a)) is executed. In this case, the jackpot type in which the first probability variable state is set after the jackpot game ends is won, but since the time reduction limit number of times is already set, "Super RUSH" is not set. , As a result of the RUSH acquisition challenge effect, if the remaining number of time reduction limits after the end of the jackpot game is "1 or more", "RUSH mode" is used, and the remaining number of time reduction limits after the end of the jackpot game is "0 In the case of ", it becomes "revenge mode".

In the flow shown in FIG. 606, since the remaining number of time reduction limit times after the jackpot game ends is "5", the effect result indicating that the transition to the "RUSH mode" is displayed, and after the jackpot game ends, the first Probability variation state (probability variation limit number of times "40", remaining number of time saving limit number of times "5") is set. After that, after the jackpot game won after the first variable probability state is set five times in a row, the time-saving limit is reached, and the state is shifted to the second variable probability state (the remaining number of times of the variable probability limit is "35").

Next, referring to FIG. 607, among the corresponding relationship between the game state transition content and the effect content to be executed, during the first probability variable state, the jackpot in which the first probability variable state is set after the jackpot game ends is won. The game state and the flow of execution performance when reaching the variable probability limit and the short time limit at the end of the jackpot game will be described. FIG. 607 shows, of the corresponding relationship between the game state transition content and the effect content to be executed, during the first probability variable state, when winning the jackpot in which the first probability variable state is set after the jackpot game ends, It is a diagram schematically showing an example of the flow of the game state and the execution effect when reaching the variable probability limit and the time reduction limit at the end of the jackpot game.

As shown in FIG. 607, the second probability variable state is continuously set, and the remaining number of probability variable limit times is "11", and the first probability variable state is set after the jackpot game ends (jackpot C) When winning, the remaining number of probability variable limit times becomes "10" and the time saving limit number of times becomes "10" after the end of the jackpot game. In this state, when the jackpot is won in a state in which the first probability variable state is set continuously ten times, the performance screen shown in FIG. will be notified.

After the jackpot game ends, the variable probability limit process and the short time limit process are executed, the game state shifts to the normal state, and a special mode in which the special variation pattern table 202d5 is referred to is set. During this special mode, "SPECIAL mode" is set as the effect mode, and the effect screen shown in FIG. 603 is displayed.

In this case, after the first variable probability state has continued 10 times (10 rounds of jackpot games have been executed 10 times), the game shifts to the special mode. Although the detailed description will be given later, the special mode is a game state in which a low probability state of special symbols is set, but it is a period during which the second special symbol lottery is mainly executed. As shown in FIG. 582, when a right-handed game is executed, one out of three balls fired enters the second ball entrance 640. A special symbol lottery is easier to execute than in a state, and a privilege given to a player when winning a jackpot becomes an advantageous period more advantageous to the player than in a normal state.

And during this special mode, since it is a low probability state of special symbols and a low probability state of normal symbols, if you win a jackpot in the second special symbol lottery, the probability variable limit number of times "40", the time saving limit number of times " 10” is set, and the first variable probability state can be set continuously 10 times. Therefore, the game period is most advantageous to the player.

Next, with reference to FIG. 608, a table listing the transition conditions for each "effect mode" set in the pachinko machine 10 of the thirty-fifth embodiment, the summary of effects, and the corresponding game states is attached. FIG. 608 is a diagram showing a list of transition conditions for the "production mode", an outline of production, and corresponding game states. As shown in FIG. 608, the pachinko machine 10 in the thirty-fifth embodiment, even if the same game state is set, the remaining number of probability variable limit times and the remaining number of time saving limit, and the probability variable limit, Different production modes can be set according to the arrival timing of the time reduction limit.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to suggest to the player the details of the privilege that can be granted to the player when the same game state is set, so that the player can easily understand the game content. can be understood.

<Regarding Transition of Game State of Pachinko Machine 10 in 35th Embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIG. 609, transition of the game state of the pachinko machine 10 in the thirty-fifth embodiment will be described. FIG. 609 is a transition diagram showing the flow of game states set in the pachinko machine 10 in the thirty-fifth embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 609, in the thirty-fifth embodiment, as the game state, normal state (low probability state of special symbols, low probability state of normal symbols), time saving state (low probability state of special symbols, high normal symbols Probability state), 1st probability state (high probability state of special design, high probability state of normal design), 2nd probability state (high probability state of special design, low probability state of normal design), 4 game states It is configured to be settable, and a predetermined game state is set according to the type of jackpot won and the game state at the time of winning the jackpot (see FIG. 613). A plurality of game states set here are configured to have different degrees of advantage for the player, and in the present embodiment, the first probability variable state is configured to be the most advantageous game state for the player. there is

Here, after briefly explaining the basic flow of the game (transition of the game state) executed in the pachinko machine 10 of the thirty-fifth embodiment, details of each transition will be explained. First, when the normal state is set as the game state, a game is performed in which a ball is entered into the first ball entrance 64b1 by a left-handed game, and the first special symbol lottery is executed. Then, when the jackpot is won in the first special symbol lottery, the game basically shifts to the second probability variable state.

During this second variable probability state, it becomes easier to enter the ball into the right first ball entrance 64b2 provided in the right side area of the game board 13 (the ball can be entered into the first ball entrance 64b1 by a left-handed game. Since the ball can be entered more efficiently than the ball is entered), a game is performed in which the first special symbol lottery is executed by the right-handed game.

In addition, during the normal state and the second variable probability state described above, the first special symbol lottery is configured to be the main variation. That is, in the present embodiment, the first special symbol variation and the second special symbol variation are configured to be executable in duplicate, and the normal state and the second probability variation state are different from the variation time of the second special symbol variation. Also, the first special symbol variation is configured so that a shorter variation time can be easily set. Therefore, since the first special symbol variation can be executed a plurality of times during one second special symbol variation period, the main variation is the first special symbol variation.

Here, in the present embodiment, the number of times the high probability state of the special symbol is set continuously (the number of times of continuous setting of special symbols) is provided with an upper limit (limit), so the normal state which is a low probability state of the special symbol If the high probability state of the special symbol (first variable state, second variable state) is set after the jackpot game executed based on the jackpot election is completed, the special symbol continuous setting number of times A value (probability limit number of times) for measuring is set.

This probability variation limit number is subtracted when the high probability state of the special symbol is set continuously, and when the value after the subtraction becomes 0, the number of special figure continuous setting is the upper limit (limit) It is determined that it has reached , and the process (probability variation limit process) for forcibly setting the low probability state of the special symbol is executed. In addition, the probability variable limit number of times, when the low probability state of the special symbol is set after the end of the jackpot game, or based on the special symbol lottery executed in the state in which the high probability state of the special symbol is set, special When the termination condition for ending the high-probability state of the symbol is established and the state shifts to the low-probability state of the special symbol, it is reset to 0. In addition, when a jackpot is won in a special pattern lottery executed during the special pattern high probability state, and the transition from the special pattern high probability state to the special pattern low probability state is performed based on the execution of the jackpot game. is configured so that the probability variable limit number of times is maintained.

In other words, the probability variable limit number of times is a high probability state of special symbols as a gaming state advantageous to the player, or a period of 1 during which the jackpot gaming state continues (high probability period of special symbols). This is for indicating the upper limit of the set number of times.

In the thirty-fifth embodiment, "40" is defined as the variable probability limit number of times. In other words, when a big win is won in a special symbol lottery executed in a special symbol low probability state, and a special symbol high probability state is set after the jackpot game ends, the probability variation limit number of times "40" is set, and thereafter. , it becomes possible to set the high probability state of the special symbol until the high probability state of the special symbol is continuously set 40 times. And, when the high probability state of the special symbol is set continuously 40 times, the probability variation limit is reached, and even if the jackpot type in which the high probability state of the special symbol is set is set, the special A process (probability variation limit process) for forcibly setting the low probability state of the symbol is executed.

In addition, in the present 35th embodiment, the number of times the high probability state of the normal design is continuously set (the number of times of normal design continuous setting) also has an upper limit (limit), so it is normally a low probability state of the design. When the jackpot is won in the normal state and the high probability state of the normal pattern (time saving state, first probability variable state) is set after the jackpot game executed based on the jackpot winning is set, the normal pattern continuous setting number of times A value (time saving limit number of times) for measuring is set.

This time-saving limit number is subtracted when the high probability state of the normal pattern is set continuously, and when the value after subtraction becomes 0, the normal pattern continuous setting number is the upper limit (limit). It is determined that it has reached, and processing (time reduction limit processing) for forcibly setting the low probability state of normal symbols is executed. In addition, the number of time reduction limits is normally based on a special symbol lottery executed when a low probability state of normal symbols is set after the end of the jackpot game, or when a high probability state of normal symbols is set. When the termination condition (time saving termination condition) for terminating the high probability state of the pattern is established and the transition to the low probability state of the normal different pattern is made, the value is reset to 0. In addition, when the jackpot is won in the special symbol lottery executed during the high probability state of the normal symbol, and the transition from the high probability state of the normal symbol to the low probability state of the normal symbol is performed based on the execution of the jackpot game. is configured so that the number of time reduction limits is maintained.

In other words, the number of time reduction limits is a high probability state of normal symbols as a game state advantageous to the player, or a high probability state of normal symbols during a period of 1 in which the jackpot game state continues (normal pattern high probability period) This is for indicating the upper limit of the set number of times.

In the thirty-fifth embodiment, "10" is defined as the time saving limit number of times. In other words, when a jackpot is won in a special pattern lottery executed in a normal pattern low probability state, and a normal pattern high probability state is set after the jackpot game ends, the time reduction limit number of times "40" is set, and thereafter. , It becomes possible to set the high probability state of the normal design until the high probability state of the normal design is continuously set 10 times. Then, when the high probability state of the normal design is set continuously 10 times, the time reduction limit is reached, and even if the jackpot type in which the high probability state of the normal design is set is set, the normal A process (time-saving limit process) for forcibly setting the low-probability state of the symbol is executed.

When a big win is won in the first special pattern lottery, the game states set after the end of the big win game are the first variable probability state and the second variable probability state, and both game states are the high probability state of the special symbols. Then, the ratio of setting the second variable probability state is defined to be higher than the ratio of setting the first variable probability state. Furthermore, even if a big win is won in the first special symbol lottery, it is difficult to execute a big win game capable of awarding a large number of prize balls to the player.

On the other hand, when a jackpot win is won in the second special symbol lottery, a jackpot game (10-round game) that is more advantageous to the player than when a jackpot win is won in the first special symbol lottery is made easier to be executed. ing. This second special symbol lottery is configured to be the main variation when the first variable probability state or the time saving state is set as the game state.

In other words, in the game state in which the first special symbol lottery is the main variation, the game is performed with the aim of setting the game state (the first probability variable state, the time saving state) in which the second special symbol lottery is the main variation. .

The first probability variation state is a gaming state in which an extremely short variation time (1 second) is likely to be set as a variation pattern of the second special symbol variation for indicating the result of the second special symbol lottery, and the first special symbol lottery. This is a game state in which an extremely long variation time (10 minutes) is likely to be set as the variation pattern of the first special symbol variation for indicating the result. Therefore, during the first probability variation state, the second special symbol variation becomes the main variation, and a game in which the ball is entered into the second ball entrance 640 by the right-handed game is executed.

As described above, when a big win is won in the second special symbol lottery, a big win game (10 round game) is executed which is more advantageous to the player than when a big win is won in the first special symbol lottery. Then, after the jackpot game ends, the first variable probability state is set.

Therefore, once the game shifts to the first variable probability state, the jackpot game (10-round game) based on the lottery result of the second special symbol lottery is repeatedly executed until the variable probability limit or the time-saving limit is reached.

Then, when the time-saving limit is reached before the variable probability limit, a second variable probability state (high probability state for special symbols, low probability state for normal symbols) is set after the end of the jackpot game. In the second probability variation state, as described above, the first special symbol variation is the main variation. Here, in the thirty-fifth embodiment, when the second variable probability state is set, the ball fired by the right-handed game enters the right first ball entrance 64b2 more than when the normal state is set. It is configured to make it easier to enter the ball.

Therefore, during the second probability variable state, a right-handed game is executed to enter the ball into the right first ball entrance 64b2. Furthermore, during the second probability variation state, since it is configured to facilitate setting of a variation pattern with a shorter variation time as the variation pattern of the first special symbol variation than during the normal state, there is an opportunity to execute the first special symbol lottery. The game state is more advantageous to the player than the normal state not only in terms of ease of acquisition of the special figure 1 reservation, but also in terms of the number of lottery executions per unit time.

Furthermore, in the thirty-fifth embodiment, most of the time when the first special symbol lottery is executed, it is configured to win a small hit, and the second probability variable that executes the first special symbol lottery by the right-handed game In this state, most of the balls that have flowed down to the downstream side of the right area enter the V winning opening 650 a of the second variable winning device 650 .

Therefore, while the second variable probability state is set, the second variable probability state is likely to loop until the variable probability limit is reached. Further, in the thirty-fifth embodiment, when the small winning is won in the first special symbol lottery, and the special symbol indicating the winning of the small winning is stopped and displayed, the second special symbol variation being executed is displayed as being out. It is configured to be able to execute the process of forcibly stopping display in the mode. Therefore, even when a right-handed game is executed during the second variable probability state, the lottery result of the second special symbol lottery can be made difficult to stop and display.

Here, with reference to FIG. 609, detailed transition contents of the game state will be described. First, the case where the normal state is set as the game state will be described. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the initial state (the state in which the processing when it is determined that the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 585) is operated in the start-up processing (see FIG. 654) of the main controller 110 is executed ), the normal state is set as the game state.

In this normal state, when a jackpot is won in the lottery of the first special pattern (special pattern 1), when jackpot A (66.5% of jackpot wins) is set as the jackpot type, the jackpot game ends. After that, the second probability variable state is set, and when the jackpot B (33.3% of the jackpot winning) or the jackpot C (0.2% of the jackpot winning) is set, the first probability variable state is set after the jackpot game ends. It is configured as On the other hand, when the jackpot is won in the lottery of the second special pattern (special pattern 2) during the normal state, the jackpot D is set as the jackpot type (100% of jackpot wins), and after the jackpot game ends, the jackpot D is set. It is configured so that 1 probability change state is set.

In the normal state, both the probability state of the special symbol and the probability state of the normal symbol are both low probability states, so when the second probability variable state is set after the jackpot game ends, "40" is set as the probability variable limit number of times. When the first variable probability state is set after the jackpot game ends, "40" is set as the variable probability limit number of times, and "10" is set as the time reduction limit number of times.

In other words, if you win a jackpot in the special drawing 1 lottery in the normal state, you will enter the second probability state (revenge mode) with a probability of 66.5%, and the first probability state (super) with a probability of 33.8%. RUSH mode). In addition, when the jackpot is won in the special figure 2 lottery, it enters the first variable state (super RUSH mode) with a probability of 100%.

Since the normal state is a low probability state of the special symbol lottery and a low probability state of the normal symbol, as a game aiming for a big win in the special symbol lottery, the ball is entered into the first ball entrance 64b1. A left-handed game is executed in which the first special symbol lottery is executed.

In this embodiment, when the second special symbol variation (lottery) is executed during the normal state, a long variation time (for example, 10 minutes) is set. Therefore, actually, the game (right-handed game) for executing the second special symbol lottery is not performed during the normal state. Furthermore, in the 35th embodiment, it does not have a function of holding and storing the execution right of the second special symbol lottery, and is configured to win a small prize with a high probability in the first special symbol lottery. , and when the second special symbol variation is being executed at the time when the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in the display mode indicating the winning of the small hit, the second special symbol variation being executed is displayed in the display mode indicating the loss. is configured to forcibly stop display (discard the result of the second special symbol lottery).

Therefore, even if the operation handle 51 is erroneously operated in the normal state and the second special symbol lottery is executed, as long as the left-handed game in the normal state is properly executed, the second special symbol lottery will be executed. The lottery result is not stopped and displayed.

In addition, in this embodiment, as the variation time of the second special symbol variation (special figure 2 variation) in the normal state, it is configured to set a long-time variation regardless of the lottery result of the special figure 2 lottery. However, without being limited to this, for example, it may be configured so that a short variation time is easily set as the variation time of the special figure 2 variation only for a predetermined number of times after the normal state is set, or the jackpot is elected. A short variation time (for example, 5 seconds) may be set only for the variation (jackpot variation) in the case where the game is held.

Thus, by providing a period during which the result of the second special symbol lottery is likely to be stopped and displayed (difficult to be discarded by winning a small prize) in a part of the period in which the normal state is set, the normal state can be played for a long time. Since it is possible to make the player who is playing the game suddenly play a game aiming at winning a big win in the second special symbol lottery, it is possible to prevent the player from getting tired of the game early.

In this case, the display area of the third symbol display device 81 is used to execute a notification effect for notifying that the result of the second special symbol lottery has shifted to a state where the display is likely to be stopped, and the game method is to hit right. It is preferable to configure so as to display a guidance notification mode for executing a game. As a result, it is possible to make it easier for the player to surely play an advantageous game.

Next, in the first special symbol lottery executed during the normal state, the second probability variable state (high probability state of special symbols, normal symbol of low-probability state). In the case of shifting from the normal state to the second variable probability state, since the low probability state of the special symbol shifts to the high probability state of the special symbol, "40" is set as the probability variable limit number of times.

If the jackpot is won in the first special symbol lottery executed during the second variable state, and "jackpot A" or "jackpot B" is set as the jackpot type (99.8% of jackpot wins), 2 rounds After the jackpot game is executed, the second variable probability state is set again. In this way, when a jackpot is won in a state in which the high probability state of the special pattern is set, and after the jackpot game ends, when the high probability state of the special pattern is set again, the probability variable limit number of times which has already been set. is decremented by 1. On the other hand, when "jackpot C" is set as the jackpot type (0.2% of jackpot winnings), the game shifts to the first variable state after two rounds of jackpot games are executed.

In this case, from the second probability variable state in which the special symbol high probability state and the normal symbol low probability state are set, to the first probability variable state in which the special symbol high probability state and the normal symbol high probability state are set Since the game state will shift, the value of the already set probability variable limit number of times is subtracted by 1, and "10" is set as the time reduction limit number of times.

In addition, as described above, during the second probability variable state, the game for executing the first special symbol lottery is performed by the right-handed game, so the small hit executed based on the small hit that is elected with a high probability (969/1000) In the winning game, it is possible to enter the ball into the V winning opening 650 a of the second variable winning device 650 . Therefore, during the second probability variable state, even in the state where the jackpot is not won, the gaming state is such that the increase or decrease in the number of paid balls is the smallest (almost the status quo is maintained).

Next, the first probability variable state is when the jackpot is won in the first special symbol lottery in the normal state, and "jackpot B" or "jackpot C" is set as the jackpot type (33.5% of jackpot wins), or , When a jackpot is won in the first special symbol lottery in the second probability variable state and "jackpot C" is set as the jackpot type (0.2% of jackpot wins), it is configured to be transferred from another game state. ing. That is, in the 35th embodiment, the jackpot probability (3/1000) is low, but the normal state in which the distribution rate (33.5%) is high when the jackpot is won, and the jackpot probability (30/1000) is high, It is configured to be able to shift to the first probability variable state from any of the second probability variable states with a low allocation rate (0.2%) when a big hit is won.

Then, when the state is shifted from the normal state to the first probability variation state, the probability variation limit number of times "40" and the time saving limit number of times "10" are set at that point, so the first time of 10 times which is the time saving limit upper limit To reliably provide a player with a variable probability state. On the other hand, when the transition from the second probability variable state to the first probability variable state, the time saving limit number of times "10" is newly set, but the probability variable limit number of times is already set, that is, at least the second probability variable state Since it is set in the set state, the first probability variable state can be set continuously according to the remaining number of probability limit times (remaining number of probability limit limits) at the time of transition to the first probability variable state will be different.

Specifically, when the probability variable limit remaining number set at the time of transition to the first probability variable state is less than the time saving limit number "10" set when moving to the first probability variable state, Since the probability limit is reached before reaching the time saving limit, it is not possible to provide the player with the first probability changing state for 10 times, which is the upper limit of the time saving limit, and after reaching the probability limit, the time saving state (special symbol low probability state, normal pattern high probability state).

Since the first special symbol variation is a long-time variation during the time saving state, a game in which the second special symbol variation is the main variation is executed, and ``100 times special symbol variation'' is set as the end condition of the time saving state. In other words, a game aiming at winning a big hit in the second special symbol lottery is performed during the period from when the time saving state is set until the special symbol variation is performed 100 times.

In this time-saving state, when a big win is won in the second special symbol lottery, a 10-round big win game is executed, and after the big win game is finished, the state is certainly shifted to the first variable probability state. In other words, the time saving state reaches the probability limit before reaching the time saving limit even though the first probability change state is set, and the first probability change state is the maximum period (10 times to win the jackpot) A second special symbol lottery in which a lottery that is more advantageous to the player than the first special symbol lottery is executed, although the probability of special symbols is low, is executed for a predetermined period ( By giving an opportunity to execute the special symbol lottery 100 times), it becomes a guarantee period for suppressing the excessive decrease in the privilege given to the player due to the reaching of the variable probability limit.

In addition, when the special pattern lottery is executed 100 times without winning a jackpot during the time saving state and the time saving end condition is satisfied, the low probability state of the normal pattern is set and the state is shifted to the normal state.

In addition, in the state where the first variable probability state is set, if the variable probability limit and the short time limit are reached at the same time, the game state shifts to the normal state, but in that case, it is different from the normal normal state. A special mode is set in which the variation pattern table (special variation pattern table 202d5) is referred to for a predetermined period (1000 special symbol variations).

Although detailed description will be given later, when this special mode is set, the second special symbol variation becomes the main variation while the normal state is set. Therefore, the player is caused to execute a game aiming at winning a big win in the second special symbol lottery.

In this way, the special mode can be set when the game state shifts from the first variable probability state, which is the most advantageous game state for the player, to the normal state, which is the most disadvantageous to the player. Part of the case where the conditions for shifting from a state favorable to the player (high probability state) to a state disadvantageous to the player (low probability state), such as reaching the limit or reaching the time saving limit, are met ( In the case of simultaneous establishment), it is possible to provide the player with a game property that can shift to a state (special mode) that is advantageous to the player. can let

Here, the length of the game period from when the high probability state of the special symbol is set to when the variable probability limit is reached in the thirty-fifth embodiment will be described in detail.

In this embodiment, when the second variable probability state is set, a right-handed game is executed in which the ball is entered into the right first ball entrance 64b2 and the first special symbol lottery is executed. Then, the first special symbol variation is executed in a shorter variation time (0.1 seconds) than during the normal state. Here, in the high-probability state of the special symbols, since the jackpot is elected with a probability of about 1/33, the period from when the probability limit number of times "40" is set to reaching the probability limit, that is, the high probability of the special symbols In order to win the jackpot 40 times in the probability state, about 1900 times (about 1900 trials with a probability of winning the jackpot 40 times exceeding 90% by probability calculation using the binomial distribution) special symbol variation. need to run.

That is, the period from when the probability limit number of times "40" is set until the probability limit is reached, if the second probability state is always set, if the second probability state is set, the first special Since the variation time of the symbol variation is 0.1 seconds, the cumulative time of the special symbol variation in the period from when the probability variation limit number of times "40" is set until the probability variation limit is reached is 190 seconds (1900 × 0.1 seconds ). Further, when a big win is won in the first special symbol lottery, the game is constructed so that the 2-round big win game is always executed, and the game period of the 2-round big win game is set to 2 seconds. Therefore, the cumulative time of the jackpot game in the period from when the variable probability limit number of times "40" is set until the variable probability limit is reached is 80 seconds (40×2 seconds). In addition, since the probability of winning a small hit in the first special symbol lottery in the high probability state of the special symbol is set to 969/1000, when the special symbol lottery is executed 1900 times, about 1800 times A small winning game is executed. Since this small winning game is configured so that the game period is 1.5 seconds, the cumulative time of the small winning game in the period from when the probability variable limit number of times "40" is set to reaching the probability variable limit 2700 seconds (1800×1.5 seconds).

That is, when the second probability variable state continues during the period from when the probability variable limit number of times "40" is set until the probability variable limit is reached, it takes 2970 seconds (49 minutes and 30 seconds) as the game period. .

On the other hand, the first probability variable state is set in any period of the period from when the probability variable limit number of times "40" is set until the probability variable limit is reached, and the first probability variable state is the time reduction limit upper limit 10 times in a row , in the period from when the probability limit number of times "40" is set until reaching the probability limit, 10 jackpot winnings will be the gaming period in the first probability state, and 30 jackpot winnings will be the second. 2 It becomes a game period in the probability variable state.

Here, in a state where the special pattern high probability state (jackpot probability 1/33) is set, in order to win the jackpot 10 times, about 500 times (10 times jackpot by probability calculation using binomial distribution It is necessary to execute a special symbol lottery with a trial number of about 500 times with a probability of winning 1 exceeding 90%.

When the first probability variation state is set, the variation time of the second special symbol lottery is 1 second, so the cumulative time of the special symbol variation executed during the first probability variation state is 500 seconds (500 × 1 second ). Furthermore, when the jackpot is won in the second special symbol lottery, the 10-round jackpot game is always executed, and the game period of the 10-round jackpot game is set to 96.5 seconds. there is Therefore, the cumulative time of the jackpot game executed based on the jackpot winning in the second special symbol lottery is 965 seconds (10×96.5 seconds). In addition, since the second special symbol lottery executed during the variable probability state does not win a small hit, the game period of the small hit game is 0 second.

That is, when the first variable probability state is set for 10 times, which is the upper limit of the time saving limit after the first variable probability state is set, the game period in the first variable probability state is 1465 seconds (24 minutes 25 seconds ).

Also, in this case, the remaining 30 times of the game state until reaching the probability variation limit is the second probability variation state, so the cumulative time of the special symbol variation in the period in which the second probability variation state is set is 140 seconds (1400 × 0.1 seconds), the cumulative time of the jackpot game is 60 seconds (30 × 2 seconds), and the cumulative time of the small winning game (about 1300 times) is about 1950 seconds (1300 × 1.5 seconds). It takes 2150 seconds (35 minutes and 50 seconds) as the game period in the second probability variation state (the period during which the second probability variation state for 30 jackpots continues).

Therefore, if the period in which the first probability variable state is set 10 times consecutively is included in the period from when the probability variable limit number of times "40" is set until the probability variable limit is reached (special high probability period) , It will take about 61 minutes 15 seconds (24 minutes 25 seconds + 35 minutes 50 seconds) as a special figure high probability period. Actually, the round game in the jackpot game (10 times) executed based on the winning of the second special symbol lottery is not ended by the passage of time (8 seconds), but by the upper limit winning (8 winnings). Since there is a high possibility of doing so, the length of the special figure high probability period is slightly shortened.

That is, in the thirty-fifth embodiment, the game period (special If the figure high probability period) is all the second probability variable state, it takes about 50 minutes (49 minutes 30 seconds) to finish the special figure high probability period, and the first probability variable state is the short time limit It continues for 10 times, which is the upper limit, and when the remaining period is the second probability variable state, it is configured to take about 60 minutes (61 minutes 15 seconds) to end the special figure high probability period. .

In addition, during the special high probability period, the period during which the first variable state continues for 10 times, which is the upper limit of the time reduction limit, is the period during which the number of balls can be increased by giving the player a lot of prize balls (advantageous period) Then, the period in which the second variable probability state is set is configured to be a period (disadvantage period) in which the increase or decrease in the number of balls released is suppressed.

By configuring in this way, the appropriate number of balls (for example, 12000) that can be given to the player during a specific period (for example, 60 minutes) can be increased for 30 minutes (during the advantageous period). The remaining 30 minutes can be set as a disadvantage period. Therefore, it is possible to easily keep the number of balls to be awarded to the player within a proper range while allowing a large number of prize balls to be awarded to the player in a short period of time.

In addition, in the 35th embodiment, when the jackpot is elected in the normal state, the ratio of shifting to the first variable state is about 33.5%, and the ratio of shifting to the second variable state is about 66.5%. It is configured to be In other words, it is possible to set the advantageous period at the same time as the start of the special figure high probability period at about 1/3 of the time when the jackpot is won (first hit) in the normal state. Therefore, even with the pachinko machine 10 in the initial state in which the normal state is set, the player can actively play the game.

Furthermore, even during the second probability variable state, which is a disadvantageous period in the special high probability period, it is possible to shift to the first probability variable state based on the jackpot winning, although it is a small probability. . Since the game can be played without reducing the number of paid balls, the player who wants to play for a long time with a small number of paid balls is more advantageous than the game in the normal state.

By constructing in this way, a player who intends to play a game is made to select whether to play the game with the pachinko machine 10 in the normal state or with the pachinko machine 10 in the second probability variable state. Amusement can be provided, and the enjoyment of the game can be increased.

Furthermore, in the thirty-fifth embodiment, when the gaming state shifts from the first variable probability state to the normal state, that is, when the normal state is set by reaching the variable probability limit and the short time limit at the same time, normal and is configured to be able to execute the first special symbol variation and the second special symbol variation with different special variation patterns. That is, in the normal state, the first special symbol is the main variation, and the variation pattern of the second special symbol variation is set to be a long-time (for example, 10 minutes) variation pattern, A game aimed at winning a jackpot in the first special symbol lottery was configured to be executed, but in a normal state where the special variation pattern is set, the first special symbol variation is set to be the main variation. A long-time (for example, 10 minutes) variation pattern is set as a symbol variation pattern, and a second special symbol lottery is executed by a right-handed game.

By configuring in this way, the probability variable limit process for forcibly changing the high probability state of the special pattern to the low probability state and setting it, and the high probability state of the normal pattern forcibly changing to the low probability state. It is possible to give a privilege advantageous to the player when the time reduction limit processing set by is executed at the end of one big winning game.

In the 35th embodiment, the value set as the probability variable limit number of times and the value set as the time saving limit number of times are different, so the timing of reaching the probability changing limit, the timing of reaching the time saving limit, In order to match, in the game state (eg, second probability variable state) in which only one symbol (eg, special symbol) is in a high probability state, the other symbol (eg, normal symbol) high probability state It is necessary to win the jackpot so as to shift the game state in the order in which is set. Therefore, the player can be interested in not only which type of jackpot was won, but also which type of jackpot was won in which situation (remaining number of times of each limit). , the player's interest in the game can be improved.

Furthermore, in the 35th embodiment, the variable probability limit number of times is configured to be set to a larger value than the time saving limit number of times. Therefore, in order to shift to the normal state in which the above-described special variation pattern is set, the second probability variation state (high probability state of special symbols, low probability state of normal symbols), the remaining number of probability variation limit times is "11", it is necessary to win the first probability variable jackpot. That is, of the special figure high probability period, only during the second probability variation state, which is a disadvantage period, it is configured to generate a situation in which it is possible to shift to the normal state in which the special variation pattern is set. By configuring in this way, even if a disadvantageous period is set during the special high probability period, the player is motivated to play with the aim of the benefits given after the end of the special high probability period. can let

<Regarding the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the thirty-fifth embodiment>
Next, referring to FIG. 610, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described. FIG. 610 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10. As shown in FIG.

The main control unit 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer that is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 includes a ROM 202 storing various control programs and fixed value data to be executed by the MPU 201, and a memory for temporarily storing various data when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 202. A RAM 203 and other various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission/reception circuit are incorporated. In addition, various commands are transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sub-controller by the data transmission/reception circuit in order to instruct the operation of the sub-controller such as the payout controller 111 and the sound lamp controller 113. Such commands are sent in only one direction from the main controller 110 to the sub-controllers.

In the main control device 110, the special symbol lottery, the normal symbol lottery, the display setting in the first symbol display device 37, the display setting in the second symbol display device 83, and the display setting in the third symbol display device 81 Main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as The RAM 203 is provided with various counters for controlling these processes. Here, with reference to FIG. 610, counters and the like provided in RAM 203 of main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 610 is a schematic diagram schematically showing counters and the like provided in the RAM 203 of the main controller 110. FIG. These counters, etc. are the special symbol lottery, the normal symbol lottery, the setting of the display in the first design display device 37, the setting of the display in the second design display device 83, and the setting of the display in the third design display device 81. etc., it is used in the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 .

In order to select the special symbol lottery and the setting of the display of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, the first winning random number counter C1 used for the special symbol lottery and the special symbol jackpot type. The first hit type counter C2 used for , the stop type selection counter (not shown) used to select the stop type of the special symbol, and the small type used to select the small hit type of the special symbol A winning type counter C5, a first initial value random number counter CINI1 used to set the initial value of the first winning random number counter C1, and a variation type counter CS1 used to select a variation pattern are used.

In addition, for the lottery of normal symbols, the second random number counter C4 is used. A chart fluctuation type counter CS2 is used. Each of these counters is a loop counter that adds 1 to the previous value each time it is updated and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value.

Each counter is updated, for example, at intervals of 2 milliseconds, which is the execution interval of timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 631), and some counters are updated irregularly during the main processing (see FIG. 655). Then, the updated value is appropriately stored in a counter buffer set in a predetermined area of the RAM 203 . In the RAM 203, there are four reservation areas (reservation first to fourth areas) and one execution area. A reserved ball storage area 203a and a second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b corresponding to the ball entering the second ball entrance 640 consisting of one execution area are provided, and the first special symbol reserved ball storage is provided. In the area 203a, a first winning random number counter C1, a first winning type counter C2, a small winning type counter C5, and and each value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is stored.

Then, when the starting condition (fluctuation condition) of the first special symbol is established, the various values stored in the reserved first area of the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a are shifted to the first special symbol execution area. , Special symbol variation based on various values stored is started.

On the other hand, the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b differs from the above-described first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a in that it does not have a reserved area. That is, the above-described first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a has four reserved areas. 64b1 or even when the ball enters the right first ball entrance 64b2, the first winning random number counter C1, the first winning type counter C2, the small winning type counter C5, and the fluctuation While each value of the type counter CS1 is configured to be able to hold and store up to 4 (configured to be able to acquire up to 4 special 1 hold), the second special symbol hold ball storage area Since 203b does not have a reservation area, the state where the starting condition (variation condition) of the second special symbol is not established, for example, the state where the second special symbol variation is being executed, the jackpot game or the small hit game is being executed, even if a ball enters the second ball entrance 640, the values of various counters are not retained and stored based on the ball entry, and the start condition of the second special symbol ( variation condition) is established, for example, a period in which the big winning game or the small winning game is not executed, and the second special symbol variation is not executed to the second ball entrance 640 Only when the ball enters, the values of various counters are stored in the execution area of the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b based on the entered ball.

That is, the pachinko machine 10 in the thirty-fifth embodiment can hold and store up to four pieces of first special symbol winning information (winning information), and reserve the first special symbol winning information (winning information). It is configured so that it cannot be memorized. By constructing in this way, it is possible to prevent a plurality of execution rights of the second special symbol lottery, in which a lottery that is more advantageous to the player than the first special symbol lottery, from being reserved and stored. In contrast, execution of an excessively advantageous game can be suppressed.

In addition, without being limited to the configuration of the thirty-fifth embodiment, for example, the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b can be divided into a plurality of reserved areas in the same manner as the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a of the thirty-fifth embodiment. It may be configured to have

As described above, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured to be capable of simultaneously (parallelly) executing the lottery for the first special symbol and the lottery for the second special symbol. Each reserved ball storage area (first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a, second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b) is configured to have an execution area. Thereby, when the starting condition of each special symbol is satisfied, the next special symbol variation can be quickly executed.

In this embodiment, since only the first special symbol is configured to have a small hit as a lottery result, the value of the small hit type counter C5 should not be stored in the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a. However, for example, it is configured to have a small hit as a lottery result of the second special symbol, and the value of the small hit type counter C5 is stored in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a. may be configured.

In addition, as in the present embodiment, even in the reserved ball storage area (second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b) corresponding to the special symbol type (second special symbol) that does not have a small winning as a lottery result, the small winning is also possible. It may be configured to store the value of the type counter C5. In this way, regardless of the specifications of the special symbol lottery (whether or not there is a small hit), the starting port (first entrance 64b1, right first entrance 64b2, second entrance) that triggers the special symbol lottery 640) are configured to store all the counter values acquired by the ball entering the ball, and when the starting condition (fluctuation condition) of the special symbol is satisfied, the required value among the acquired counter values By configuring to execute the special symbol lottery using only, the same configuration can be used for a plurality of gaming machines with different special symbol lottery specifications (whether or not there is a small win). Parts and technologies can be shared, and costs can be reduced.

Furthermore, in the RAM 203 of the present embodiment, as with the above-described special symbols, normal symbol holding corresponding to entering the ball (passing of the ball) into the through gate 67 consisting of four holding areas (holding first to fourth areas) A ball storage area 203c is provided, and in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c, each value of the second random number counter C4 and the normal pattern variation type counter CS2 is set in accordance with the timing of entering the through gate 67. stored respectively.

Then, when the normal symbol start condition (fluctuation condition) is established, the various values stored in the first reserved area of the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c are shifted to the normal symbol execution area, and the stored various values are shifted to the normal symbol execution area. Normal design variation based on the value is started.

In this embodiment, each counter value acquired based on the ball entering the second ball entrance 640 is reserved and stored, and each counter value acquired based on the ball passing through the through gate 67 is stored. Although it has a configuration to hold and store the value, it is not limited to this, and the function (holding storage function) to store each counter value acquired for each pattern (special pattern, normal pattern) is not provided. It can be configured as follows.

By constructing in this manner, in a game machine in which a lottery advantageous to a player and a lottery disadvantageous to a player are switched as a lottery for one special pattern type according to a set game state, an advantageous lottery is executed. It is possible to suppress a situation in which a different game state is set and a disadvantageous lottery is executed with one special symbol in a state in which many reserved memories of one special symbol are acquired.

Next, with reference to diagram 610, each counter will be described in detail. The first hit random number counter C1 is incremented by 1 in order within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 999). It is configured to return to In particular, when the first winning random number counter C1 completes one cycle, the value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 at that time is read as the initial value of the first winning random number counter C1.

The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is configured as a loop counter updated within the same range as the first random number counter C1. That is, for example, if the first random number counter C1 is a loop counter that can take values from 0 to 999, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is also a loop counter that ranges from 0 to 999. This first initial value random number counter CINI1 is updated once each time the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 631) is executed, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main processing (see FIG. 655).

The value of the first winning random number counter C1 is, for example, periodically updated (in this embodiment, once for each timer interrupt process), and the ball enters the first ball entrance 64b1, the right first winning opening 64b2, or the second winning opening 64b2. It is stored in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a and the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203 at the timing of entering the ball entrance 640. - 特許庁The value of the random number for the special symbol jackpot is set by the first winning random number table 202a stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110, and the value of the first winning random number counter C1 is the first winning random number table. If it matches the value of the random number set by 202a as a big hit, it is determined as a special symbol big hit.

Here, the first winning random number table 202a will be described with reference to FIG. 612(a). FIG. 612(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the first winning random number table 202a. This first hit random number table 202a is a table in which a random number value (determined value) determined to be a big hit is defined in the lottery of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, and the result of the first special symbol lottery is determined. It has a special symbol 1 random number table 202a1 that is referred to when judging, and a special symbol 2 random number table 202a2 that is referred to when judging the result of the second special symbol lottery.

Next, contents of various tables included in the first winning random number table 202a will be described with reference to FIGS. 612(b) and (c). FIG. 612(b) is a diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the special symbol 1 random number table 202a1, and FIG. 612(c) shows the contents defined in the special symbol 2 random number table 202a2. It is a figure shown typically.

As shown in FIG. 612(b), in the special symbol 1 random number table 202a1, the value (determination value) of the first hit random number counter C1 that is determined to be a big hit is the probability state of the special symbol (low probability state, high probability state ). In addition, a fixed value is defined as the value (determination value) of the first winning random number counter C1 determined as a small winning regardless of the probability state of the special symbols.

Specifically, for the low probability state of the special symbol, "0 to 2" among the values of the first random number counter C1 is defined as the big hit determination value, and for the high probability state of the special symbol, the first Among the values of the winning random number counter C1, "0 to 29" are defined as big winning determination values. Further, when the big hit is not determined, the range of "3 to 998" among the values of the first winning random number counter C1 is defined as the small hit determination value.

That is, in the present embodiment, when the low probability state of the special symbol is set, the jackpot is won with a probability of 3/1000 (approximately 1/333), the small prize is won with a probability of 996/1000, It is stipulated to be out with a probability of 1/1000, and if a high probability state of special symbols is set, a jackpot is won with a probability of 30/1000 (about 1/33), and 969/1000 It is stipulated that a small win is won with a probability of 1/1000 and that it is lost. Therefore, the high probability state of the special symbol becomes a game state in which it is easier to win a jackpot than the low probability state of the special symbol, and thus the game state is advantageous to the player.

Also, in any probability state, the probability that the result of the first special symbol lottery is out (other than the big hit and the small hit) is the same. That is, it is configured such that the low probability state of the special symbols makes it easier to win a small hit than the high probability state of the special symbols. Therefore, from the viewpoint of ease of winning a small hit, the low-probability state of the special symbol becomes a game state more advantageous to the player than the high-probability state.

In the thirty-fifth embodiment, the lottery result of the first special symbol lottery having "big win" and "small win" as the lottery result is determined by referring to the special symbol 1 random number table 202a1. However, without being limited to this, a data table to be referred to when judging whether to win a big win and a data table to be referred to when deciding whether to win a small win are separated, and judgment of a big win is made in the process of executing the judging of a big win. If not, it may be configured to execute the process of executing the small hit determination.

In this case, in the data table (jackpot determination table) referred to when executing the jackpot determination process, "0 ~ 2”, “0 to 29” for the high probability state of the special symbol, and the data table (small hit determination table) referred to when executing the small hit determination process contains the small hit determination value ( As the value of the first hit random number counter C1), it is preferable to define "0 to 998" regardless of the probability state of the special symbol.

In this way, the big hit determination is executed in accordance with the probability state of the special symbol, and when the big hit is not won (when the winning is lost), the small hit determination is executed. It is possible to suppress the problem of overlap with the hit determination. In the thirty-fifth embodiment, the value of the same type of random number counter (first per random number counter C1) is used to execute the first special symbol lottery big hit determination and small hit determination. However, it is also possible to provide a random number counter for judging a big win and a random number counter for judging a small win.

Also, as shown in FIG. 612(c), the special symbol 2 random number table 202a2 is different from the above-described special symbol 1 random number table 202a1 in that the small hit determination value is deleted, and the rest is the same. Specifically, for the low probability state of the special symbol, "0 to 2" among the values of the first random number counter C1 is defined as the big hit determination value, and for the high probability state of the special symbol, the first Among the values of the winning random number counter C1, "0 to 29" are defined as big winning determination values. Further, when the big hit is not determined, the range of "3 to 998" among the values of the first winning random number counter C1 is defined as the small hit determination value.

That is, in the present embodiment, when the low probability state of the special symbol is set, the jackpot is won with a probability of 3/1000 (approximately 1/333), the small prize is won with a probability of 996/1000, It is stipulated to be out with a probability of 1/1000, and if a high probability state of special symbols is set, a jackpot is won with a probability of 30/1000 (about 1/33), and 969/1000 It is stipulated that a small win is won with a probability of 1/1000 and that it is lost. Therefore, the high probability state of the special symbol becomes a game state in which it is easier to win a jackpot than the low probability state of the special symbol, and thus the game state is advantageous to the player.

That is, in the thirty-fifth embodiment, it is possible to give the player a bonus of a big hit or a small bonus as the lottery result of the first special symbol lottery, and give the player the bonus of a big hit as the lottery result of the second special symbol lottery. It is configured so that it can be granted. In this way, by configuring the type of privilege that can be given to the player to be different according to the type of the special symbol for which the lottery is executed, which special symbol lottery is executed for the player. can be of interest to In addition, in the thirty-fifth embodiment, the first special symbol lottery (variation) and the second special symbol lottery (variation) are configured to be executable in duplicate, and based on the lottery result stopped and displayed first. Therefore, the player is interested in not only which special symbol lottery will be executed, but also which special symbol lottery result will be stop-displayed first. can have

In the present embodiment, the probability of winning the jackpot is set to be the same between the first special symbol lottery and the second special symbol lottery. The jackpot probability may be different depending on the type of the symbol. For example, the jackpot probability may be lower for the second special symbol than for the first special symbol. Also, in the present embodiment, two types of special symbol jackpot probabilities, ie, a high probability state and a low probability state, are prepared, but one type or three or more types may be used. In this case, for example, the special symbol jackpot probability may be changed for each of up to four game states set by combining the special symbol state and the normal symbol state, Simply, three or more special symbol states, such as a high probability state, a normal probability state, and a low probability state, may be set, and a different jackpot probability may be set for each state.

In addition, it may be configured to be able to set a plurality of stages of set values, and to vary the jackpot probability of the special symbol lottery according to the set set values.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the probability of winning a small hit is defined differently between the lottery for the first special symbol and the lottery for the second special symbol. By configuring in this way, the privilege given to the player can be made different between the lottery for the first special symbol and the lottery for the second special symbol. In addition, it is possible to motivate the player to play the game in order to execute more advantageous special symbol lotteries. As described above, in the present embodiment, unless a specific game state (second probability variable state) is set, since the second special symbol lottery that is advantageous to the player is not frequently executed, the game A player can be motivated to play a game so that a specific game state is set.

As described above, in the present embodiment, according to the value of the acquired first random number counter C1, the type of the special symbol, and the probability state of the special symbol, according to the predetermined determination value Although it is configured to execute judgment of jackpot winning or small win winning, it is not limited to this. The value of the first winning random number counter C1, which is stipulated as winning a big win or winning a small win, may be varied. A data table that does not define a determination value corresponding to a big win or a determination value corresponding to a small win may be provided as a data table for abnormal times referred to in the winning lottery.

In addition, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured to be able to simultaneously (parallelly) execute the lottery (variation) of the first special symbol and the lottery (variation) of the second special symbol. is set so as not to win a jackpot at the same time (in parallel) (so that a jackpot game is not executed). In the pachinko machine 10 having such restrictions, for example, a lottery of one special pattern is won, and during the period until the jackpot game corresponding to the winning of the jackpot is executed, a lottery of the other special pattern is executed. A lottery for a special pattern is executed by referring to a dedicated data table in which only the judgment value corresponding to the small prize is prescribed without defining the judgment value corresponding to the big prize so as not to win the big prize. may be configured.

The first win type counter C2 determines the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 when a big win is won in the special symbol lottery, and is incremented one by one within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 199). and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (for example, 199 in the case of a counter that can take values from 0 to 199). The value of the first hit type counter C2 is, for example, periodically updated (once per timer interrupt processing in this embodiment), and the ball is the first ball entrance 64b1, the right first ball entrance 64b2, or the first It is stored in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a or the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203 at the timing when the ball enters the second ball entrance 640. - 特許庁

The value of the first win type counter C2 in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment is configured as a loop counter within the range of 0-199. In this embodiment, using the value of the acquired first hit type counter C2, the first hit type selection table 202b is referred to to determine the jackpot type when the jackpot is won.

Here, with reference to FIG. 613, details of the first winning type selection table 202b will be described. As described above, this first winning type selection table 202b defines a random value for determining the jackpot type when winning a jackpot using the value of the first winning type counter C2 obtained.

As shown in FIG. 613, the first hit type selection table 202b includes a special figure 1 jackpot type selection table 202b1 that determines the jackpot type when the jackpot is won in the first special symbol lottery, and a jackpot in the second special symbol lottery. At least a special figure 2 jackpot type selection table 202b2 that determines the jackpot type when winning is defined.

In addition, the first hit type selection table 202b also defines a small hit type selection table for determining the small hit type set when the small hit is won in the first special symbol lottery, but this 35th implementation In the form, since there is one type of small hit that is set when a small hit is won, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 613(b), the contents defined in the special figure 1 jackpot type selection table 202b1 will be described. FIG. 613(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the specified contents of the special figure 1 jackpot type selection table 202b1. As shown in FIG. 613(b), in the special figure 1 jackpot type selection table 202b1, a plurality of jackpot types are defined in association with the value of the acquired first hit type counter C2 (0 to 199).

Specifically, the value of the first winning type counter C2 is defined as "jackpot A" in the range of "0 to 132", and "jackpot B" is defined in the range of "133 to 198". A "jackpot C" is defined for a value of "199".

In the thirty-fifth embodiment, according to the jackpot type (jackpot A to jackpot C) set with reference to the special figure 1 jackpot type selection table 202b1, the content of the jackpot game and the game state set after the jackpot game ends , and is configured to determine

Here, in the 35th embodiment, the opening operation contents (jackpot game contents) executed during the jackpot game, that is, the movable members (the opening and closing door 65f of the first variable winning device 65 and the second variable winning The ROM 202 of the main controller 110 preliminarily stores the operation contents (timing, number of times) of the opening/closing door 650f of the device 650 as an opening operation scenario defined in chronological order.

Then, when a special symbol lottery wins a jackpot, an opening operation scenario corresponding to the set jackpot type is read out and stored in an executing scenario storage area (not shown) in the RAM 203 of the main controller 110.例文帳に追加When the opening operation scenario is stored in the executing scenario storage area (not shown), the scenario contents are updated each time the main process (see FIG. 655) of main controller 110 is executed (every 4 milliseconds). , In the jackpot control process (see FIG. 656) that executes the control during the jackpot game, the current scenario contents are determined, and the process based on the determination result is executed.

In this way, an opening operation scenario in which the operation contents of the movable members (the opening/closing door 65f of the first variable prize winning device 65 and the opening/closing door 650f of the second variable prize winning device 650) during the jackpot game are defined in time series. By using , it is possible to centrally manage the operation control for multiple movable members, so if a problem occurs in one opening operation, if the opening operation scenario is not updated properly, in that state It is possible to suppress execution of the next opening operation.

In the thirty-fifth embodiment, a jackpot game is executed in which only one variable winning device (first variable winning device 65 or second variable winning device 650) is opened during one jackpot game. However, without being limited to this, it may be possible to execute a jackpot game in which a plurality of variable winning devices are opened during one jackpot game. In this case, by prescribing which variable winning device (first variable winning device 65 or second variable winning device 650) is to be opened for each round game in the above-described opening operation scenario, for example, Compared to the case where the operation control (opening operation) is executed separately for each movable member (variable prize winning device), the operation timing of each movable member can be set appropriately, and there is no problem with one movable member. It is possible to smoothly execute operation processing for other movable members in the event of occurrence.

As shown in FIG. 613(b), the same jackpot game content (opening operation scenario) is defined for the jackpot types (jackpot A to jackpot C) defined in the special figure 1 jackpot type selection table 202b1. , an opening action scenario in which two rounds of the round game for opening the second variable prize winning device 650 are executed. That is, in the thirty-fifth embodiment, when a big win is won in the first special symbol lottery, the same big win game (2R big win) is always executed. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to specify the jackpot type set this time based on the content of the executed jackpot game.

Also, as shown in FIG. 613(b), the type of game state set after the end of the jackpot game is when the jackpot is won (or when the special symbol for indicating the jackpot is stopped and displayed (confirmed display)). It is defined that a different game state is set based on the game state in and the set jackpot type.

Specifically, when the jackpot type is "jackpot A", the "second probability variable state" is set after the jackpot game ends regardless of the game state (game state at the time of winning) at the time of winning (at the time of winning the jackpot). be done. Also, if the jackpot type is "jackpot B", if the game state (game state at the time of winning) at the time of winning (at the time of winning the jackpot) is "second probability variable state", after the jackpot game ends "second 2 probability variable state” is set, and when winning is “other than the second probability variable state (normal state, first probability variable state, time saving state)”, “first probability variable state” is set. Further, when the jackpot type is ``jackpot C'', the first probability variable state is set after the jackpot game ends regardless of the game state at the time of winning (at the time of jackpot winning).

"Jack A" is a jackpot of a round game in which the number of rounds (the number of times the round game is executed) is two rounds as a jackpot game, and the second variable winning device (second attacker) 650 is opened during the two rounds. It is a jackpot type in which a game is executed. One round game is continued until 8 balls are won or the open period elapses for 0.5 seconds.

In addition, when "jackpot A" is set as the jackpot type, regardless of the game state (game state at the time of winning) at the time of winning (at the time of winning the jackpot), after the jackpot game ends "Second probability variable state ” is set. That is, the high probability state of the special design is set (the variable probability flag 203g is set to ON), and the low probability state of the normal design is set. In addition, when the game state before the execution of the jackpot game is a special symbol low probability state (normal state or time saving state), the second probability variable state is set and the special symbol high probability In order to measure the number of times the state is set continuously (special figure continuous setting number), 40 is set to the value of the probability variation limit number counter 203h. On the other hand, when the game state before the jackpot game is executed is a special symbol high probability state (first probability variable state or second probability variable state) (the value is already set to the probability variable limit number counter 203h In case), the number of Toku-zu continuous settings is updated (the value of the probability variation limit number counter 203h is subtracted by 1). Also, when the game state before the execution of the jackpot game is a high probability state of normal symbols (probability variable state or time saving state) (when a predetermined value is set to the value of the time saving limit number counter 203i). , the value of the time saving limit number counter 203i is reset to zero.

The "jackpot B" is a jackpot of a round game in which the number of rounds (the number of times the round game is executed) is two rounds as a jackpot game, and the second variable winning device (second attacker) 650 is opened during the two rounds. It is a jackpot type in which a game is executed. One round game is continued until 8 balls are won or the open period elapses for 0.5 seconds.

Also, when "jackpot B" is set as the jackpot type, if the game state (game state at the time of winning) at the time of winning (at the time of winning the jackpot) is "second probability variable state", after the jackpot game ends " "Second variable probability state" is set, and when winning is "other than second variable probability state (normal state, first variable probability state, time saving state)", "first variable probability state" is set. That is, the high probability state of special symbols is set (variable probability flag 203g is set to ON), and the probability state of normal symbols is set to a high probability state or a low probability state according to the game state at the time of winning.

In addition, when the game state before the execution of the jackpot game is a low probability state (normal state or time saving state) of the special symbol, the second probability variable state is set and the high probability of the special symbol is set. In order to measure the number of times the state is set continuously (special figure continuous setting number), 40 is set to the value of the probability variation limit number counter 203h. On the other hand, when the game state before the jackpot game is executed is a special symbol high probability state (first probability variable state or second probability variable state) (the value is already set to the probability variable limit number counter 203h In case), the special figure continuous setting number is updated (the value of the probability variation limit number counter 203h is subtracted by 1). In addition, the game state before the execution of the jackpot game is a normal symbol low probability state (normal state, second probability variable state), and after the jackpot game is finished, the normal symbol high probability state (first variable probability state) is set, 10 is set to the time reduction limit number counter 203i in order to measure the number of times the high probability state of the normal pattern is continuously set (the number of times of normal pattern continuous setting). On the other hand, when the game state before the jackpot game is executed is a normal symbol high probability state (first probability variable state or time saving state) (already, a predetermined value is set to the value of the time saving limit number counter 203i In case of), the normal figure continuous setting number is updated (the value of the time saving limit number counter 203i is subtracted by 1). In addition, when the game state before the jackpot game is executed is a high probability state of normal symbols (first probability variable state or time saving state) (a predetermined value is set to the value of the time saving limit number counter 203i case), and when the normal symbol low probability state (second probability variable state) is set after the end of the jackpot game, the value of the time reduction limit number counter 203i is reset to zero.

As described above, when "jackpot B" is set as the jackpot type, the game state set after the jackpot game ends is made different according to the game state when the jackpot is won. Specifically, the probability state of normal symbols set after the end of the jackpot game is configured to vary according to the game state when the jackpot is won. By constructing in this way, it is possible to make the player interested not only in the kind of big win set at the time of big win but also in which game state the big win is won under which game state is set.

In the thirty-fifth embodiment, according to the game state at the time of winning the jackpot, one element (ordinary symbol probability state) out of a plurality of elements (special symbol probability state, normal symbol probability state) constituting the game state ), the game state set after the end of the jackpot game is changed according to the game state when the jackpot is won. In this way, by configuring to change only a specific element among a plurality of elements (probability state of special symbols, probability state of normal symbols) that constitute the game state, it is possible to change according to the game state at the time of winning the jackpot. Since it is possible to reduce the amount of processing to be performed, the processing load can be reduced.

In addition, in this embodiment, according to the game state at the time of winning the jackpot, it is configured so as to vary the probability state of the normal symbol that is set after the jackpot game is over. It may be configured such that the probability state of the set special symbol is variable, or it may be configured such that the probability state of each symbol type is variable.

Furthermore, in the thirty-fifth embodiment, the game state at the time of winning the jackpot is defined as a change condition for changing the game state set after the end of the jackpot game. Well, for example, the type of game state set after the end of the previous jackpot game and the game state set after the end of the current jackpot game are changed based on the content of the jackpot game executed during the jackpot game. Conditions may be set. Further, a change condition may be provided so as to change the game state set after the end of the current jackpot game based on the accumulated result of history information indicating past game results. By providing various change conditions in this way, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to predict the game state that will be set after the end of the jackpot game.

The "jackpot C" is a jackpot of a round game in which the number of rounds (the number of times the round game is executed) is two rounds as a jackpot game, and the second variable winning device (second attacker) 650 is opened during the two rounds. It is a jackpot type in which a game is executed. One round game is continued until 8 balls are won or the open period elapses for 0.5 seconds.

Also, if "jackpot C" is set as the jackpot type, regardless of the game state (game state at the time of winning) at the time of winning (at the time of winning the jackpot), after the jackpot game ends, the "first probability variable state ” is set. That is, the high probability state of the special design is set (probability variation flag 203g is set to ON), and the high probability state of the normal design is set. In addition, when the game state before the execution of the jackpot game is a special symbol low probability state (normal state or time saving state), the first probability variable state is set and the special symbol high probability In order to measure the number of times the state is set continuously (special figure continuous setting number), 40 is set to the value of the probability variation limit number counter 203h. In addition, when the game state before the execution of the jackpot game is a normal symbol low probability state (normal state or second probability variable state), the first probability variable state is set, and the normal symbol is set. In order to measure the number of times the high-probability state is continuously set (the number of times of normal figure continuous setting), 10 is set to the value of the time reduction limit number counter 203i.

On the other hand, when the game state before the jackpot game is executed is a special symbol high probability state (first probability variable state or second probability variable state) (the value is already set to the probability variable limit number counter 203h In case), the special figure continuous setting number is updated (the value of the probability variation limit number counter 203h is subtracted by 1). In addition, when the game state before the jackpot game is executed is a high probability state of normal symbols (first probability variable state or time saving state) (a predetermined value is set to the value of the time saving limit number counter 203i In case), the normal figure continuous setting number is updated (the value of the time saving limit number counter 203i is subtracted by 1).

As described above, in the thirty-fifth embodiment, when the jackpot is won in the first special symbol lottery, the jackpot game (2R jackpot game) with the same contents is executed regardless of which jackpot type is set. After the end of the jackpot game, a game state corresponding to the set jackpot type and the game state when the jackpot is won is set. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to grasp in advance the game state set after the end of the jackpot game depending on the content of the jackpot game to be executed.

In addition, in the 35th embodiment, the contents of the big win game executed when the first special symbol lottery wins the jackpot, and the contents of the small win game executed when the first special symbol lottery wins the small win. , have the same content. As a result, for example, every time the second variable winning device 650 is opened for a player who is playing a game in the second variable probability state, whether the executed opening operation is based on a jackpot game. , or whether it is based on a small winning game can be made difficult to understand. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player who has the second probability variable state to be continuously set to grasp the number of times of continuous special figure setting (probability limit remaining number) at the present time, so until just before reaching the probability limit , a game can be motivated to aim at setting the first variable probability state.

In addition, the content of the jackpot game executed corresponding to the jackpot type is not limited to this. Among the jackpot types in which the content of the jackpot game (for example, 7 rounds jackpot) that is executed only when set after the jackpot game is stipulated, and the game state that can be set after the jackpot game is finished, which are disadvantageous to the player A jackpot type may be provided in which jackpot game contents (for example, 4-round jackpot) to be executed only when the game state (second variable probability state) is set are defined. By constructing in this way, enjoyment of predicting in advance the game state to be set after the end of the big win game based on the content of the big win game to be executed is provided before a new game state is actually set. can do.

Next, with reference to FIG. 613(c), the contents defined in the special figure 2 jackpot type selection table 202b2 will be described. FIG. 613(c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the special figure 2 jackpot type selection table 202b2. This special figure 2 jackpot type selection table 202b2 is a data table that is referred to when determining the jackpot type that is set when the jackpot is won in the second special symbol lottery.

As shown in FIG. 613(c), in the thirty-fifth embodiment, there is one jackpot type (jackpot D) that can be set when the jackpot is won in the second special symbol lottery. That is, when the big win is won in the second special symbol lottery, the first probability variable state is always set after the big win game ends. By configuring in this way, the same game state is set for the game state (first probability variable state, time saving state) in which the second special symbol lottery is executed in the main variation.

As described above, in this embodiment, the game state to be set after the end of the jackpot game is set according to the type of the special symbol that has been won in the jackpot and the game state when the jackpot is won. Therefore, it is possible to make the player not only expect to win the jackpot and play the game, but also to make the player interested in the type of special symbols that win the jackpot and the game state at the time of winning. can.

In this embodiment, the number of types of jackpots is four, but the number of types is not limited to four, and may be three or less, or may be five or more. Moreover, even if the value of the first winning type counter C2 is the same for the first special symbol and the second special symbol, different jackpot types may be selected. By configuring in this way, for example, when a big win is made with the second special symbol, by setting a big win type in which a larger number of rounds are executed, the winning with the second special symbol can be made more appealing to the player. can be expected. Therefore, the win in the high probability game state can be made more advantageous to the player, and the amusement of the game in the high probability state can be improved. Therefore, it is possible to make the player strongly desire to shift to the high probability state, and to play the game for a longer period of time.

In addition, the types of jackpot types selected in the first special pattern and the second special pattern and the selection rate (distribution rate) of each jackpot type are made the same, and the first hit type counter C2 corresponding to each jackpot type is set. It may be configured so that only the range is different. Thereby, it is possible to suppress the fraudulent act of acquiring the value of the first winning type counter C2 aiming at a specific counter value in both the first special symbol and the second special symbol.

The small hit type counter C5 determines the small hit type when a small hit is won in the special symbol lottery, and determines the display mode of the first symbol display device 37. A predetermined range (for example, 0 to 99), it is incremented by 1 in order, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (for example, 99 in the case of a counter that can take values from 0 to 99). The value of the small hit type counter C5, for example, is periodically updated (once per timer interrupt processing in this embodiment), and the ball enters the first ball entrance 64b1 or the right first ball entrance 64b2. It is stored in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a of the RAM 203 at the timing of entering the ball.

The value of the small hit type counter C5 in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment is configured as a loop counter in the range of 0-99. Then, when the result of the lottery for the second special symbol is a small hit, the obtained value of the small hit type counter C5 and the ROM 202 of the main controller 110 are set in order to determine the type of the small hit to be executed. The small hit type (small hit game content) is determined using the small hit type selection table of the first hit random number table 202a.

In addition, in this embodiment, only the first special symbol lottery is configured so that a small hit can be won, and one type of small hit type is defined as a small hit type that is set when a small hit is won. That is, regardless of the range of the obtained small hit type counter C5, the same small hit game is always executed. The content of the small winning game is configured to be substantially the same as the content of the big winning game (2R big winning) executed when the big winning is won in the first special symbol lottery. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to distinguish between the big winning game and the small winning game.

Further, in the thirty-fifth embodiment, one type of small hit type is set when a small hit is won, but two or more types of small hit types may be set. By configuring in this way, for example, it is possible to provide a small winning type in which the fluctuation of the first special symbol does not stop, etc., to give the player a more exciting feeling, and to provide various game characteristics. can.

In addition, it is configured to win a small hit in both the lottery of the first special symbol and the lottery of the second special symbol, and a different small winning type (small winning game content), the small hit type selection table may be set so as to define a different small hit type (small hit game content) for each type of special symbol.

The fluctuation type counter CS1 is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 198, for example, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 198). Rough display modes such as so-called short-time out, long-time out, normal reach, and super reach are determined by the fluctuation type counter CS1. Determination of the display mode is, specifically, determination of the variation time of the symbol variation. Based on the variation time determined by the variation type counter CS1, the reach type of the third symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 and the detailed symbol variation mode are determined. be. The value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is updated once each time the main process (see FIG. 655) described later is executed, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process. A variation pattern table 202d (see FIG. 614) storing a random value for determining one variation time of symbol variation from the value (random value) of the variation type counter CS1 is provided in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110. ing.

Here, the contents of the variation pattern table 202d will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 614 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the variation pattern table 202d. As shown in FIG. 614, the variation pattern table 202d defines a dedicated variation pattern table for each set gaming state. Specifically, the normal variation pattern table 202d1 that is referenced when the normal state is set as the gaming state, the time reduction variation pattern table 202d2 that is referenced when the time reduction state is set, and the first The first probability variation variation pattern table 202d3 referenced when the probability variation state is set, the second probability variation variation pattern table 202d4 referenced when the second probability variation state is set, and the specific end condition is satisfied. It has a special variation pattern table 202d5 that is referenced to the state in which the normal state is set based on that.

And, although the details will be described later, in this embodiment, since the data table used for selecting the variation pattern is different according to the game state, the variation pattern (variation time) selected according to the game state can be different.

Next, detailed contents of each table defined in the variation pattern selection table 202e will be described with reference to FIGS. 614 and 616. FIG. FIG. 614(b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents defined in the normal fluctuation pattern table 202e1. This normal fluctuation pattern table 202e1 is a data table that is referred to when the normal state is set as the gaming state, and the second It is stipulated that the variable time set for the lottery of special symbols is longer.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 614(b), the symbol type is the first special symbol (special figure 1), the success/failure determination result is "jackpot", and the value of the variation type counter CS1 is "0 to 29 ” is defined in association with various normal reach per variation time of 40 seconds, and super reach with a variation time of 80 seconds is defined in the range of “30 to 189”, and is defined in association with “190 ~ 198" is defined in association with a special reach with a variable time of 140 seconds.

In addition, the lottery result is "out (small hit)", the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is defined in the range of "0 to 139", and the deviation of the fluctuation time of 7 seconds is associated with the range of "140 to 149". is defined in association with a variation time of 20 seconds (long deviation), and in the range of "150 to 179" is defined in association with a normal reach with a variation time of 40 seconds, and fluctuates in the range of "180 to 198" A Super Reach with a duration of 80 seconds is associated and defined.

On the other hand, when the symbol type is the second special symbol (special symbol 2), the variation pattern for 10 minutes (600 seconds) regardless of the special symbol lottery result or the value of the acquired variation type counter CS1. (Long hit fluctuation, long small hit fluctuation, long off fluctuation) are set.

Here, in the present embodiment, as described above, the ball is configured to be able to enter the second ball entrance 640 when a right-handed game is executed in a state where the normal state is set as the game state. However, as described above, since a long time (10 minutes) is set as the variation time of the second special symbol during the normal state, the game for executing the first special symbol lottery is performed during the normal state. Also, as described above, in the normal state, it is better to enter the ball into the first ball entrance 64b1 in the left-handed game than in the right-handed game to enter the ball into the right first ball entrance 64b2. , is configured to facilitate the execution of the first special symbol lottery.

In the present embodiment, the same variation pattern table is used regardless of the jackpot type won, but the jackpot type indicates a jackpot (for example, jackpot A) that is advantageous to the player without being limited to this. Different variation pattern tables may be used for the case of the jackpot type and the case of the jackpot type indicating another jackpot (jackpot B). In this case, for example, the variation pattern table used when winning a jackpot type indicating an advantageous jackpot (jackpot A) is shorter than the variation pattern table used when winning a jackpot type indicating other jackpots. It is preferable to configure so that the time variation pattern is easily selected. As a result, the longer the variation time set in the variation pattern to be executed, the more advantageous the player can expect the game result, so that the player is interested in the variation time of the special symbol. be able to.

In addition, a variation pattern with a longer variation time is selected in the variation pattern table used when winning the jackpot type indicating the normal jackpot than in the variation pattern table used when winning the jackpot type indicating the first probability variable jackpot. In this way, when a jackpot is won in a short variation time, the player can be provided with an unexpected game result, even when a short variation time is selected. But you can still have hope until the end.

Next, among various variation pattern tables provided in the variation pattern table 202d, contents defined in the variation pattern table 202d2 for time reduction will be described with reference to FIG. 615(a). FIG. 615(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the time reduction variation pattern table 202d2. As shown in FIG. 615 (a), in the time saving variation pattern table 202d2, the variation pattern is defined in association with the symbol type, the lottery result (whether or not determination result), and the value range of the variation type counter CS1. .

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 615 (a), if the symbol type is the first special symbol (special figure 1), the lottery result (validity determination result), and the acquired variation type counter CS1 A long variation with a variation time of 1 minute (60000 milliseconds) is defined regardless of the range of values (0 to 198). On the other hand, if the symbol type is the second special symbol (special figure 2) and the lottery result of the special symbol (result of judgment) is "out", regardless of the value of the acquired variation type counter CS1, the variation A variation pattern (missing short variation) with a time of 1 second (1000 milliseconds) is defined, and when the lottery result of the special symbol (response judgment result) is "big hit", the value of the acquired variation type counter CS1 Regardless, a variation pattern (hitting short variation) with a variation time of 1 second (1000 milliseconds) is defined.

As described above, during the time-saving state, the variation pattern of the second special symbol is configured to be easier to set a shorter variation time than the variation pattern of the first special symbol. As a result, the game state in which the second special symbol lottery is mainly executed is established during the time saving state. Therefore, once shifting to the time saving state, the second special symbol lottery can be executed a plurality of times in a short period of time.

Next, the contents of the first probability variation variation pattern table 202d3 provided in the variation pattern table 202d will be described with reference to FIG. 615(b). FIG. 615(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the first probability variation variation pattern table 202d3. As shown in FIG. 615(b), in the first probability variation variation pattern table 202d3, various variation patterns are defined in association with the symbol type, the lottery result, and the value range of the variation type counter CS1.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 615 (b), if the symbol type is the first special symbol (special figure 1), the lottery result of the special symbol (result of determination) and the acquired variation type counter CS1 Regardless of the value of , a variation pattern (super long variation) with a variation time of 10 minutes (600000 milliseconds) is defined, the symbol type is the second special symbol (special figure 2), and the lottery result of the special symbol (whether or not If the determination result) is "out", regardless of the value of the acquired variation type counter CS1, a variation pattern (outlier short variation) with a variation time of 1 second (1000 milliseconds) is defined, and the special symbol When the lottery result (win/fail judgment result) is "big hit", a variation pattern (hit short variation) with a variation time of 1 second (1000 milliseconds) is defined regardless of the value of the acquired variation type counter CS1. ing.

As described above, during the first probability variable state, similarly to during the time saving state, the variation pattern of the second special symbol is configured to be easier to set a shorter variation time than the variation pattern of the first special symbol. there is As a result, the game state is such that the second special symbol lottery is mainly executed during the first variable probability state. Therefore, once it shifts to the first variable probability state, it is possible to execute the second special symbol lottery multiple times in a short period of time.

Next, with reference to FIG. 616(a), the contents of the second probability variation variation pattern table 202d4 provided in the variation pattern table 202d will be described. FIG. 616(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the second probability variation variation pattern table 202d4. As shown in FIG. 616(a), the second probability variation variation pattern table 202d4 defines various variation patterns in association with the symbol type, the lottery result, and the value range of the variation type counter CS1.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 616 (a), when the symbol type is the first special symbol (special figure 1), the lottery result of the special symbol (result of determination) and the acquired variation type counter CS1 Regardless of the value, a variation pattern (super short variation) with a variation time of 0.1 seconds (100 milliseconds) is defined, the symbol type is the second special symbol (special figure 2), and the special symbol lottery result A variation pattern (ultra-long variation) with a variation time of 10 minutes (600000 milliseconds) is defined regardless of (response determination result) or the value of the acquired variation type counter CS1.

As described above, during the second probability variation state, the variation pattern of the first special symbol is configured to be easier to set a shorter variation time than the variation pattern of the second special symbol. As a result, the game state is such that the first special symbol lottery is mainly executed during the second variable probability state. Therefore, once it shifts to the second variable probability state, the first special symbol lottery can be executed a plurality of times in a short period of time.

Next, the contents of the special variation pattern table 202d5 provided in the variation pattern table 202d will be described with reference to FIG. 616(b). FIG. 616(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the special variation pattern table 202d5. As shown in FIG. 616(b), the special variation pattern table 202d5 defines various variation patterns in association with the symbol type, the lottery result, and the value range of the variation type counter CS1.

This special fluctuation pattern table 202d5 is a fluctuation pattern table that is referred to when the state shifts to the normal state while the special condition is established. More specifically, the jackpot is won in the state where the first probability variable state is set, and after the jackpot game ends, both the special figure continuous setting number and the normal figure continuous setting number reach the upper limit. It is a fluctuation pattern table referred to when migrating.

Here, an example of the case where the special condition described above is satisfied will be described. In this embodiment, the upper limit of the special figure continuous setting frequency is 40 times, and the upper limit of the normal figure continuous setting frequency is configured to be 10 times. Then, based on the game state set after the end of the jackpot game, the special figure continuous setting number and the normal figure continuous setting number are updated (subtracted) or reset to 0. For example, when the first probability variable jackpot is won in a state where the normal state is set, the first probability variable state is set after the jackpot game ends, and the upper limit value of the special figure continuous setting number "40" A value is set to the value of the variable probability limit number counter 203h, and the value of "10" indicating the upper limit of the normal figure continuous setting number is set to the value of the time reduction limit number counter 203i.

After that, if you continue to win the first probability variable jackpot continuously, after the 10th jackpot game ends, the normal pattern continuous setting number reaches the upper limit value (the value of the time reduction limit number counter 203i becomes 0), and the normal pattern. A low probability state is forcibly set. At this point, the number of continuous special figures has not reached the upper limit (40) (the value of the probability variation limit counter 203h is 30), so after the 10th jackpot game ends, the second probability variation state (special symbol high Probability state, low probability state of normal design) is set.

Then, in the state where the second probability variable state is set, when the second probability variable jackpot is won continuously, and when the value of the probability variable limit number counter 203h is subtracted to 11, when the first probability variable jackpot is won, After the jackpot game ends, the first variable probability state (the value of the variable probability limit number counter 203h is 10 and the value of the time reduction limit number counter 203i is 10) is set. In this way, when the first probability variable state is set so that the value of the probability variable limit number counter 203h and the value of the time saving limit number counter 203i are the same, the first probability variable jackpot is continuously elected Special The condition is established (the value of the variable probability limit number counter 203h and the value of the time saving limit number counter 203i become 0 at the end of the jackpot game of 1).

That is, the presence or absence of the setting of the first probability variable state, not only the number of times that the first probability variable jackpot was successively elected, but also the value of the probability variable limit number counter 203h at the time when the first probability variable state was set, and the time saving limit number counter 203i, a special condition is established. By constructing in this way, it is possible to make the player interested in various game situations when a big win is won in the special symbol lottery, and to improve the amusement of the game.

As shown in FIG. 616(b), the special variation pattern table 202d5 is a variation pattern table that is referred to when the normal state is set, but the normal variation pattern table 202d1 shown in FIG. 614(b) 2, it is greatly different in that each variation pattern is defined so that the second special symbol variation is more likely to be executed than the first special symbol variation.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 616 (b), if the design type is the first special design (special design 1), regardless of the lottery result of the special design (result of judgment), the acquired variation type A variation pattern (ultra-long variation) with a variation time of 10 minutes (600000 milliseconds) is defined for the value of the counter CS1 in the range of "0 to 39", and a variation time of 10 seconds (10000 milliseconds) is defined in the range of "40 to 109". milliseconds), and a variation pattern (short variation) with a variation time of 1 second (1000 milliseconds) in the range of "110 to 198". On the other hand, if the symbol type is the second special symbol (special figure 2) and the lottery result of the special symbol (result of judgment) is "out", regardless of the value of the acquired variation type counter CS1, the variation A variation pattern (missing short variation) with a time of 1 second (1000 milliseconds) is defined, and when the lottery result of the special symbol (response determination result) is a "jackpot", the value of the acquired variation type counter CS1 Regardless, a variation pattern (hitting short variation) with a variation time of 1 second (1000 milliseconds) is defined.

During the period in which the special variation pattern table 202d5 is referred to, it is a period in which it is possible to smoothly execute the second special symbol lottery while in the normal state, so the right-handed game appeals to the player more than the left-handed game. It is an advantageous way of playing. Therefore, in the guide display area Dm1 formed in the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81, "RIGHT HITTING" is displayed to prompt the player to play the right hand game (FIG. 603(a)). reference).

Thus, when the same game state (normal state) is set, by differentiating the variation pattern table referred to when selecting the variation pattern of each special symbol type, one special symbol variation It is possible to set a first period for main fluctuation and a second period for main fluctuation of the other special symbol fluctuation. As a result, it is possible to provide the player with a more complicated game than in the case where the player is made to execute the game by different game methods according to the set game state, so that the player is bored. It is possible to execute a game that does not come.

Although detailed description will be given later, in the thirty-fifth embodiment, when the special condition is satisfied, each of the above-described special variation pattern table 202d5 is referred to from the special symbol variation of the first rotation after the end of the jackpot game. It is configured to set the variation pattern of the special symbol type. By configuring in this way, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which a big win is won without setting a variation pattern by referring to the special variation pattern table 202d5 in spite of the establishment of a special condition. can be done.

Furthermore, in the thirty-fifth embodiment, an upper limit (for 1000 special symbol variations) is provided in the period during which the special variation pattern table 202d5 is referred to. That is, when the special symbol lottery of the upper limit number or more is executed in a state in which the special variation pattern table 202d5 is referred to, the normal variation pattern table 202d1 is referred to. By configuring in this way, the normal fluctuation pattern table 202d1 is basically referred to in the state where the normal state is set, and the special fluctuation pattern table 202d5 is temporarily referred to only when the special condition is satisfied. It can be a specification that the variation pattern of each special symbol is selected. Therefore, it is not necessary to make the processing for selecting the variation pattern of the special symbol variation completely independent in the state where the normal state is set, so that the processing load of the main controller 110 can be reduced.

Note that the period in which the special variation pattern table 202d5 is referred to based on the establishment of the special condition is not limited to the period used in the thirty-fifth embodiment, and basically in the state where the normal state is set A variation pattern that is more advantageous to the player than the content defined in the normal variation pattern table 202d1 used in the above may be easily set.

For example, in the normal state after the special condition is established, when the special symbol lottery does not win the jackpot for a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times), the special symbol variation pattern can be selected by referring to the special variation pattern table 202d5. can be configured to By configuring in this way, in addition to establishment of the special condition, the period in which the special variation pattern table 202d5 is referred to is set based on the special symbol lottery result in the normal state. Therefore, since it is possible to make it difficult to set the period during which the special fluctuation pattern table 202d5 is referred to, it is possible to make the period during which the special fluctuation pattern table 202d5 is referred to be an advantageous period for the player. In addition, immediately after the normal state is set, regardless of whether the special condition is established or not established, the normal fluctuation pattern table 202d1 is referred to and the special symbol fluctuation pattern is selected. On the other hand, it is possible to make it difficult for the user to grasp whether or not the special condition is satisfied. Therefore, even after the game state has shifted from the game state advantageous to the player (first variable probability state, second variable variable state, time saving state) to the game state disadvantageous to the player (normal state), special A player can be motivated to play a game while expecting that a condition is established.

Furthermore, after the normal state is set, when a big win is won in the special symbol lottery before the arrival of the period for referring to the special variation pattern table 202d5, the player grasps whether or not the special condition is satisfied. However, the player is not dissatisfied because the privilege of winning the jackpot in the special symbol lottery is given in the first place.

As described above, in the 35th embodiment, the upper limit of the number of continuous special figures and the upper limit of the number of continuous normal figures are configured to be different, so the same jackpot type (for example , variable jackpot), the time when only one upper limit is reached, the time when only the other upper limit is reached, and the time when both upper limits are reached are different. It is possible to set the game state. Therefore, it is possible to provide the player with a novel game feature of predicting the game state to be set after the end of the big win game according to the history of winning the big win a plurality of times.

Also, in order to establish a special condition, it is expected that a disadvantageous jackpot type (second variable jackpot, short-time jackpot) that is disadvantageous to the player will be set rather than an advantageous jackpot type (variable jackpot) that is advantageous to the player. It is possible to provide a novel game property of making the game. In addition, when the above-described disadvantageous jackpot type is set in a state where the variable probability state is set, by setting the disadvantageous jackpot type, it is possible to leave the possibility that special conditions are likely to be established. Even if the disadvantageous jackpot type is set, it is possible to prevent the player's willingness to play from being remarkably lowered.

In addition, in the present embodiment, when the probability variable limit and the time saving limit are reached at the same time, the special condition is established, and the second special symbol lottery is configured to be able to set the period in which the second special symbol lottery is relatively easily executed in the normal state. , Another condition may be provided as a special condition, and a game state other than the normal state may be provided as a game state in which the special variation pattern table 202d5 is referred to. For example, when the probability variation limit number of times "40" is set and the second probability variation state is set continuously for a predetermined number of times (31 times in a row), the special condition is established, and the special variation pattern table 202d5 is changed with reference to A period of the second probability variation state in which the pattern is set may be provided for a predetermined period (for example, a period of 50 special figure fluctuations). By configuring in this way, it is possible to reduce the possibility of reaching the variable probability limit without setting the first variable probability state for the player who has won the first hit.

In addition, it is preferable to configure so as to minimize the remaining number of probability variation limit times required to establish the special condition. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it easier for the player who is continuously set to the second variable probability state to continue playing until the special condition is satisfied, so that the operation of the game is improved. can be made easier.

Returning to FIG. 610, the description continues. The second hit random number counter C4 is configured as a loop counter that increments by 1 in the range of 0 to 239, for example, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 239). Further, when the second winning random number counter C4 completes one cycle, the value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is read as the initial value of the second winning random number counter C4. In this embodiment, the value of the second hit random number counter C4 is updated, for example, periodically every timer interrupt process (see FIG. 631), and it is detected that the ball has passed through the normal start opening (through gate) 67. It is acquired at the same time and stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203 c of the RAM 203 .

Then, the value of the random number that is the winning of the normal symbol is set by the second winning random number table 202c stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device, and the value of the second winning random number counter C4 is set by the second winning random number table 202c. If it matches the value of the random number set as a win, it is determined that the win is a normal symbol (second symbol). In addition, the second winning random number table 202c is divided into two types, one for a normal symbol low probability state and one for a high probability state where the probability of winning a normal symbol is higher than the low probability state, and included in each. The number of random numbers to be a jackpot is set differently. In this way, by making the number of random numbers to be winning different, the probability of winning is changed between the normal design low probability state and the normal design high probability state.

The contents defined in the second winning random number table 202c will be described with reference to FIG. 612(d). FIG. 612(d) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the second winning random number table 202c. As shown in FIG. 612(d), in the case of the low probability state of the normal design, the second hit random number counter C4 obtained is defined in the range of "0 to 235", and the high probability of the normal design. In the case of the state, the second hit random number counter C4 obtained is defined to be in the range of "0 to 238".

The second initial value random number counter CINI2 is configured as a loop counter that is updated within the same range as the second random number counter C4 (value = 0 to 239), and is updated once per timer interrupt processing (see Fig. 631). In addition, it is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main processing (see FIG. 655).

Normal figure fluctuation type counter CS2 is, for example, incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 198, and is configured to return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 198). The value of this normal figure fluctuation type counter CS2 is updated once each time the main process (see FIG. 632) described later is executed once, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time in the main process. Then, the normal pattern fluctuation time is determined by the value of the normal pattern fluctuation type counter CS2. Specifically, in the normal pattern fluctuation processing (see S106 in FIG. 651), which will be described later, when determining the fluctuation time of the normal pattern fluctuation (see S2114 in FIG. 651), the value of the normal pattern fluctuation type counter CS2 obtained Regardless, a variation time of 0.1 seconds is determined.

In addition, in the present 35th embodiment, regardless of the probability state of the normal design or the result of the normal design lottery (normal pattern lottery), the normal design fluctuation is always performed at a constant fluctuation time (0.1 seconds). Since it is configured, the configuration of the fluctuation pattern table (normal pattern fluctuation pattern table) to be referred to when determining the fluctuation time of the normal pattern fluctuation is omitted, but in fact, the main controller 110 The ROM 202 has a normal pattern fluctuation pattern table that is referred to when setting the fluctuation pattern of the normal pattern fluctuation, and the normal pattern fluctuation pattern table includes the probability state of the normal pattern, the acquired normal pattern fluctuation type A variation pattern is defined corresponding to the range of values of the counter CS2.

Then, in the normal pattern fluctuation process (S106 in FIG. 651), when determining the fluctuation time of the normal pattern fluctuation, the normal pattern fluctuation pattern table is referred to, and the process of determining the normal pattern fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time) is executed. (See S2114 in FIG. 651).

As described above, in the thirty-fifth embodiment, the variation time of the normal symbol variation is always 0.1 seconds. , It may be configured so that the variation pattern of different variation time is determined according to the range of the value of the normal figure variation type counter CS2 acquired. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it easier to make the period from the execution of the normal pattern fluctuation to the stop of the normal pattern fluctuation irregular, so for example, after the normal pattern fluctuation is executed (through gate 67 After passing the ball through), suspend the ball launch (right-handed game) for a certain period of time, and restart the ball launch (restart the right-handed game) at the timing when the normal fluctuation stops. It is possible to make it difficult to execute a game.

In addition, not only the range of the value of the obtained normal pattern fluctuation type counter CS2, but also according to the result of the normal pattern lottery may be configured so that the variation pattern of the different fluctuation time is determined. In such a case, the probability state of the normal pattern, the result of the normal pattern lottery (response or failure determination result), and the range of values of the acquired normal pattern fluctuation type counter CS2 are different for the normal pattern fluctuation pattern table not shown. The contents of the normal pattern fluctuation pattern table may be defined so that the fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time) is selected.

In this way, the RAM 203 is provided with various counters and the like, and the main controller 110 controls the big winning lottery and the display on the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 according to the values of the counters and the like. Main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as setting and lottery of the display result in the second pattern display device 83 can be executed.

The second initial value random number counter CINI2 is updated within the same range as the second winning random number counter C4.

Next, referring to FIG. 611, the contents of the ROM 202 of the main controller 110 provided in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment will be described. FIG. 611 is a diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 202 of the main controller 110 provided in the pachinko machine 10 of the thirty-fifth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 611, the ROM 202 of the main controller 110 contains, as part of the fixed value data, a first winning random number table 202a, a first winning type selection table 202b, a second winning random number table 202c, and a variation pattern table 202d. , Working hours grant table 202e, variation pattern scenario table 202f, hit operation table 202g, and normal figure hit operation table 202h are stored at least.

Of the fixed value data stored in the ROM 202, the first winning random number table 202a, the first winning type selection table 202b, the second winning random number table 202c, and the variation pattern table 202d have already been described in detail. We omit the explanation because we are doing

The time saving grant table 202e is a data table referred to when setting the time saving end conditions for ending the time saving state (to end the high probability state of normal symbols), and includes a jackpot type, a game state at the time of jackpot winning, Different time-saving end conditions are defined according to the setting status of the variable probability limit arrival flag 203u and the time-saving limit arrival flag 203v. This time saving grant table 202e is referred to in the jackpot end processing (see S2611 in FIG. 658) executed when the jackpot game ends (the ending period of the jackpot game ends), and the number of time saving times that differs depending on the jackpot type etc. (time saving end condition) is set.

In addition, detailed description will be described later with reference to FIG. 621, but among the various information specified in the time saving grant table 202e, the probability variation limit reach flag 203u is set continuously with the high probability state of the special symbol A flag to indicate that the number of times (special figure continuous setting number) has reached the upper limit, and the number of special figure consecutive settings reaches the upper limit, forcing the high probability state of the special pattern to the low probability state It is set to ON when it becomes a state to change. In addition, the time saving limit reaching flag 203v is a flag for indicating that the number of times that the high probability state of the normal pattern is continuously set (the number of times of normal pattern continuous setting) has reached the upper limit value, and the normal pattern continuous setting number of times reaches the upper limit value, and is set to ON when the high probability state of the normal design is forcibly changed to the low probability state.

Here, with reference to FIG. 617, the contents defined in the time reduction provision table 202e will be described. FIG. 617 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the time reduction provision table 202e. In this embodiment, a high probability state of normal symbols can be set after the end of the jackpot game (jackets C, D), and a high probability state of normal symbols can be set after the end of the jackpot game (in the game state at the time of winning the jackpot). A jackpot type (jackpot B), which may or may not be set depending on whether or not the high probability state of the normal pattern is set, and a jackpot type (jackpot A) in which the high probability state of the normal pattern is not set after the jackpot game ends. It has, and as shown in FIG. 617, time saving end conditions are defined corresponding to each jackpot type.

Specifically, since the jackpot type "jackpot A" is not a jackpot type in which the high probability state of the normal pattern is set as described above, the game state (whether or not there is time reduction) at the time of winning the jackpot, and the probability limit reaching flag 203u, irrespective of the setting status of the time saving limit reaching flag 203v, the number of times of time saving given "0" is defined.

The jackpot type "jackpot B" is when the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot is no time reduction (normal symbol low probability state), and when both the variable limit reach flag 203u and the time reduction limit reach flag 203v are set to off. , The number of time saving times granted "65535 (substantially until the next time)" is defined, the probability variation limit reaching flag 203u is set to ON, and the time saving limit reaching flag 203v is set to OFF, the number of time saving times granted "100" is defined. In addition, when the time saving limit reaching flag 203v is set to off, since the low probability state of the normal symbol is forcibly set, regardless of the setting status of the probability variation limit reaching flag 203u, the number of time saving times given "0" is defined.

On the other hand, in the jackpot type "jackpot B" and the game state when the jackpot is won is time saving (normal symbol high probability state), the variable limit reach flag 203u is set to ON, and the time saving limit reach flag 203v is set to OFF. Only when there is, the number "100" of time saving frequency is defined, and in other cases, the number "0" of time saving frequency is defined.

The jackpot type "jackpot C" is, regardless of the game state at the time of winning the jackpot, if both the probability limit reach flag 203u and the time reduction limit reach flag 203v are set to off, the number of times of time reduction given "65535 ( Substantially until the next time)” is defined, the variable probability limit reaching flag 203u is set to ON, and the time saving limit reaching flag 203v is set to OFF, the number of time saving times given “100” is defined. In addition, when the time saving limit reaching flag 203v is set to off, since the low probability state of the normal symbol is forcibly set, regardless of the setting status of the probability variation limit reaching flag 203u, the number of time saving times given "0" is defined.

The variation pattern scenario table 202f selects the variation pattern of the special symbol variation to be executed after the end of the jackpot game. A data table having a plurality of variation pattern scenarios defined according to the number of times of special symbol variation executed after the end of the jackpot game, and determines the variation pattern scenario to be used after the end of the jackpot game. It is used for reference.

This variation pattern scenario table 202f is referred to when determining a variation pattern scenario in the jackpot end process (see S2611 in FIG. 658) executed at the end timing of the jackpot game (see S2808 in FIG. 658). The variation pattern scenario determined here is stored in the variation pattern scenario storage area 203w, and the variation pattern scenario stored in the variation pattern scenario storage area 203w is stored in the process of determining the variation pattern of the special symbol variation. A fluctuation pattern table is determined based on the read-out fluctuation pattern scenario and information indicating how many rotations the special symbol fluctuation is after the end of the jackpot game, and the decided fluctuation pattern table is used. A special symbol variation pattern is determined by referring to it (S610 in FIG. 636, S1509 in FIG. 645).

Here, with reference to FIG. 618, the contents defined in the variation pattern scenario table 202f will be described. FIG. 618 is a diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the variation pattern scenario table 202f. As shown in FIG. 618, the variation pattern scenario table 202f has different variation pattern scenarios according to the jackpot type, the game state at the time of winning the jackpot, the setting state of the probability variation limit reach flag 203u, and the setting state of the time reduction limit reach flag 203v is stipulated.

Specifically, when the jackpot type of the jackpot game executed this time is "jackpot A", that is, after the jackpot game ends, the second probability variable state (high probability state of special symbols, low probability state of normal symbols) is set. In the case of a possible jackpot type, regardless of the gaming state at the time of jackpot winning, the variation pattern scenario to be selected is defined according to the setting status of the probability variable limit reach flag 203u and the time reduction limit reach flag 203v. In a state where both the probability variation limit reaching flag 203u and the time saving limit reaching flag 203v are set to OFF, the variation pattern referring to the second probability variation variation pattern table 202d4 until the next jackpot is won after the end of the jackpot game. In a scenario in which the variable probability limit reaching flag 203u is set to ON and the time reduction limit reaching flag 203v is set to OFF, the normal variation pattern table 202d1 is referred to after the jackpot game ends until the next jackpot is won. A variation pattern scenario is specified. In addition, "jackpot A" is a second probability variable state after the jackpot game ends, that is, a jackpot type in which a low probability state of normal symbols is set, so after the jackpot game corresponding to this "jackpot A", time saving The limit reached flag 203v is never set to ON. Therefore, in the variation pattern scenario table 202f, no data is defined in the area corresponding to the situation where the "jackpot A" and the time saving limit reach flag 203v is set to ON (in the figure " -”).

By configuring in this way, a problem occurs in the pachinko machine 10 control processing, and a situation that cannot be set in a normal state, for example, after the second probability variable jackpot game ends, the time reduction limit reaching flag 203v is turned on. When the set situation occurs, since the variation pattern scenario is not determined by referring to the variation pattern scenario table 202f, the special symbol variation may be executed after the jackpot game is finished with a problem occurring. can be suppressed.

The jackpot type of the jackpot game executed this time is "jackpot B", that is, after the jackpot game ends, the first probability variable state (special symbol high probability state, normal symbol high probability state), or the second probability variable state (special symbol high probability state, low probability state of normal symbols) is a jackpot type that can be set, and the game state at the time of winning the jackpot is other than the second probability state (normal state, first probability state, time saving state) , Depending on the setting status of the probability variable limit reach flag 203u and the time saving limit reaching flag 203v, the selected variation pattern scenario is defined, and the probability changing limit reaching flag 203u and the time saving limit reaching flag 203v are both set to off. In this state, after the end of the jackpot game until the next jackpot is won, the variation pattern scenario in which the first probability variation variation pattern table 202d3 is referred to sets the probability variation limit reaching flag 203u to ON, and the time saving limit reaching flag. 203v is set to off, until the special symbol variation reaches 100 times (until the time saving end condition is satisfied), the variation pattern table for time saving 202d2 is changed after the 100th special symbol variation, that is, the time saving After the termination condition is met, a variation pattern scenario is defined in which the normal variation pattern table 202d1 is referred to.

In addition, when the jackpot type of the jackpot game executed this time is "jackpot B" and the game state when the jackpot is won is the second probability variable state, the probability variable limit reach flag 203u and the time reduction limit reach flag 203v are set. A variation pattern scenario to be selected is defined according to the situation, and in a state in which both the probability variation limit reaching flag 203u and the time saving limit reaching flag 203v are set to OFF, the next big win is won after the big win game ends. Until then, the variation pattern scenario in which the second probability variation variation pattern table 202d4 is referred to, the probability variation limit reach flag 203u is set to off, and the time reduction limit reach flag 203v is set to on, after the jackpot game ends A variation pattern scenario is defined in which the second probability variation variation pattern table 202d4 is referred to until the next jackpot is won.

Furthermore, the probability variable limit reach flag 203u is set to ON, the time saving limit reach flag 203v is set to OFF, and the probability variable limit reach flag 203u is set to ON, and the time saving limit reach flag 203v is set to ON In this state, a variation pattern scenario is defined in which the normal variation pattern table 202d1 is referred to after the jackpot game ends until the next jackpot is won.

The jackpot type of the jackpot game executed this time is "jackpot C" or "jackpot D", that is, after the jackpot game ends, the first probability variable state (high probability state of special symbols, high probability state of normal symbols) can be set. In the case of the jackpot type, regardless of the game state at the time of winning the jackpot, the variation pattern scenario to be selected is defined according to the setting status of the probability variable limit reach flag 203u and the time reduction limit reach flag 203v.

Specifically, in the state where the probability variation limit reaching flag 203u is off and the time saving limit reaching flag 203v is set to off, after the jackpot game ends until the next jackpot is won, the first probability variation variation pattern table 202d3 is referred to, the probability variable limit reaching flag 203u is set to off, and the time reduction limit reaching flag 203v is set to on, after the jackpot game ends until the next jackpot is won, the second probability variable A variation pattern scenario is defined for which the variation pattern table 202d4 is referred to.

Furthermore, in the state where the probability variation limit reach flag 203u is set to ON and the time saving limit reach flag 203v is set to OFF, until the special symbol fluctuation reaches 100 times (until the time saving end condition is satisfied), the time saving The fluctuation pattern table 202d2 defines a fluctuation pattern scenario in which the normal fluctuation pattern table 202d1 is referred to after the 100th special symbol fluctuation, that is, after the time saving end condition is met. Then, the probability variable limit reaching flag 203u is set to ON, and the time saving limit reaching flag 203v is set to ON, that is, the probability changing limit and the time saving limit are established at the same time (the probability changing limit and the time saving limit based on one big hit, When the time-saving limit is reached), the special variation pattern table 202d5 is referred to during the period from the end of the jackpot game until the special symbol variation is executed 1000 times, and then the normal variation pattern until the next jackpot is won. A variation pattern scenario is defined in which the table 202d1 is referred to.

The winning operation table 202g includes the first variable winning device 65 or the second variable winning device 650 in a winning game (big winning game, small winning game) executed when a big win or a small win is won by lottery of special symbols. (Pattern for operating various solenoids provided in each prize winning device) is stored in a data table storing an opening scenario that is a scenario of opening operation patterns (patterns for operating various solenoids provided in each prize winning device). The contents of the open scenario (hit operation) are defined in correspondence with the small hit type set for the small hit.

Here, with reference to FIG. 619, the contents of the winning action table 202g will be described. FIG. 605 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the winning action table 202g. Note that the winning action table 202g schematically shown in FIG. 619 describes only the characteristic contents of the winning action (open scenario) defined for each winning type. However, in reality, a measurement counter is provided to measure the elapsed period from the time each winning action (opening scenario) is set, and among the currently set winning actions (opening scenarios), the measured value of the measurement counter It is configured so that the correspondingly defined operation is executed. And, in FIG. 619, the operation of the contents omitted from the illustration, for example, the winning operation that is executed in common even when any winning operation is executed (for example, the number of wins during the round game is a predetermined number (number of times that satisfies the end condition of the round), the operation of updating the release scenario until the end condition is satisfied based on the elapsed time of the round game, etc.) is also executed based on the measured value of the measurement counter. However, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

This winning operation table 202g is a winning device (first variable winning) that allows a ball to enter in a privilege game (big winning game, small winning game) that is executed when the lottery result of the special symbol is a big win or a small win. Operation data (opening scenario) for varying the opening operation of the device 65 and the second variable winning device 650 according to the winning type (big winning type, small winning type) is defined.

In this way, the winning device (first variable winning device 65, second variable winning device 650) and the opening operation that are opened according to the winning result (big hit or small win) and the hit type (big hit type, small hit type) By varying the content (opening scenario), it is possible to set the degree of advantage of the privilege game in multiple stages. can entertain.

In the winning operation table 202g, the opening period during the winning game (the period from the start of the winning game to the opening operation of the winning device for the first time) corresponding to the type of winning (big win type, small win type), and , The opening operation mode of each winning device (type of winning device to be opened, the number of seconds for one opening operation (round game), the total number of opening operations (number of rounds)), and the interval period between rounds (between round games The period during which the winning device set to is closed) and the ending period (period from the end of all round games to the end of the winning game (period to allow the start of new special symbol fluctuations) ) and are specified respectively.

Specifically, corresponding to the winning types "jackpot A", "jackpot B", and "jackpot C", "0.5 second" is set as the opening period, and "second variable prize winning device" is set as the opening operation mode of the prize winning device. 650” is “2 rounds”, and the release operation mode is “continuously 0.5 seconds” as one round game, “0.5 seconds” as the inter-round interval period, and “0.5 seconds” as the ending period. seconds” is specified. Therefore, when the jackpot types are “jackpot A”, “jackpot B”, and “jackpot C”, a jackpot game (2R jackpot game) is executed in which the second variable winning device 650 is opened for two rounds. will be This 2R jackpot game is a jackpot game executed corresponding to the jackpot type (jackpot A to jackpot B) set when the jackpot is won in the first special symbol lottery, and is the second variable during the jackpot game period. The period in which the winning device 650 is opened is 1 second (0.5 seconds x 2 rounds) in total, and the number of prize balls to be paid out when a ball enters the second variable winning device 650 is 1. Therefore, it becomes a jackpot game in which many prize balls are not awarded to the player.

That is, in the thirty-fifth embodiment, when a jackpot is won in the first special symbol lottery, a jackpot game is not executed to obtain a large number of prize balls. A jackpot game is executed as an opportunity to shift to a game state (for example, the first variable probability state).

In the thirty-fifth embodiment, when a big win is won in the first special symbol lottery, the second variable winning device 650 is always opened for two rounds, and a two round big win game is executed. A function of the jackpot game to be executed when the jackpot is won in the first special symbol lottery shifts to a game state (for example, a first variable state) that is advantageous to the player mainly based on the jackpot win. As long as it has it, it is possible to execute a jackpot game (for example, a jackpot game that opens the first variable prize winning device 65 for 10 rounds) that can pay out many prize balls to the player as a part of the jackpot game. can be configured to Furthermore, in this case, when a jackpot game is executed in which a large number of prize balls can be obtained in the event of a jackpot win in the first special symbol lottery, a jackpot game in which it is difficult for the player to obtain a large number of prize balls. (For example, a 2-round game) may be configured such that a game state advantageous to the player is more likely to be set after the jackpot game ends. This makes it easier for the player to grasp in advance that a game state advantageous to the player is set after the end of the big win game based on the contents of the big win game in a part of the case of winning the big win in the first special symbol lottery. can do. Furthermore, in this case, a large number of prize balls are obtained by winning one jackpot, and an advantageous game state is set, so that a plurality of types of benefits (prize balls, first variable state) are given to the player. Therefore, it is possible to motivate the player to play the game while aiming to execute a jackpot game in which a plurality of types of benefits can be obtained at once.

Next, corresponding to the winning type "jackpot D", the opening period is set to "3.5 seconds", and the opening operation mode of the winning device is set to "10 rounds" for the "first variable winning device 65". As a round game, an opening operation mode of "continuously opening for 8 seconds" is defined with an interval period of "1.5 seconds" and an ending period of "4 seconds".

This "jackpot D" is a jackpot type that is always set when a jackpot is won in the second special symbol lottery. That is, in the thirty-fifth embodiment, when the big win is won in the second special symbol lottery, the above-described 10-round big win game is executed.

Here, in the thirty-fifth embodiment, a left-handed game is performed in a normal state, and a game aiming at winning a big hit in the first special symbol lottery is performed. Then, when the jackpot is won in the first special symbol lottery, after the jackpot game ends, the second probability variable state (high probability state of special symbols, low probability state of normal symbols) is set at a rate of about 66.8%. , It is configured so that the first probability variable state (high probability state of special symbols, high probability state of normal symbols) is set at a rate of about 33.2%. In addition, the upper limit of the number of times the high probability state of the special pattern is set continuously (the number of times of continuous special design) is set to "40", and the number of times the high probability state of the normal design is set continuously (normal pattern continuous "10" is defined as the upper limit number of set number of times).

In a game state (first probability variable state, time saving state) in which a high probability state of normal symbols is set, the second special symbol lottery is more likely to be executed than the first special symbol lottery.

In other words, the game state is shifted quickly to the game state in which the second special symbol lottery is likely to be executed, and until the game state in which the second special symbol lottery is likely to be executed is completed, 10 rounds are aimed at winning the jackpot in the second special symbol lottery. A game aiming at winning many prize balls is performed in the jackpot game.

In the 35th embodiment, as described above, when the jackpot is won in the second special symbol lottery, the jackpot game is always executed in 10 rounds, and the jackpot game that can always set the first probability variable state after the jackpot game ends. configured to run. Then, the game state set after the end of the jackpot game based on which of the special figure continuous setting number or the normal figure continuous setting number has reached the upper limit is forcibly changed from the first probability variable state to another game state It is configured so that the second special symbol lottery can be executed with the jackpot probability increased until it is changed.

By configuring in this way, instead of making the player execute the game aiming at the transition to the most advantageous probability change state for the player, until the special figure continuous setting number and the normal figure continuous setting number reach the upper limit It is possible to play a game aiming at transition to the variable probability state with a sufficient period of .

In the 35th embodiment, in a part of the lottery results that did not win the jackpot in the first special symbol lottery, a small prize is won as an opportunity to execute a small prize game in which the second variable prize winning device 650 is opened for one round. It is configured so that This small winning game is different from the above-mentioned big winning game, the round game is executed only in one round, and even during the small winning game, the probability state of the special symbol set before the start of the small winning game, And it is configured so that the probability state of normal symbols is continued.

When this small winning game is executed, the small winning game is executed with the same winning operation contents (open scenario) as the above-described winning types "big winning A", "big winning B", and "big winning C". Configure. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 619, the opening period is "0.5 seconds", the opening operation mode of the winning device is "second variable winning device 650" as "1 round", and one round game is The opening operation mode of opening the second variable prize winning device 650 with the operation content of "open for 0.5 seconds → close for 0.5 seconds → open for 0.5 seconds" is defined as "0.5 seconds" as the ending period. there is

In other words, the winning action (opening scenario) is defined so that the winning game for opening the second variable winning device 650 is executed with the content of the opening action executed in the entire 2-round jackpot game during the 1-round round game. ing. By configuring in this way, when the opening operation of the second variable winning device 650 is executed based on the lottery result of the first special symbol lottery, it is executed based on the contents of the opening operation of the second variable winning device 650 To make it difficult for a player to grasp whether a medium winning game is a big winning game or a small winning game.

Therefore, in the gaming state in which the first special symbol lottery is mainly executed, and in the second variable state in which the high probability state of the special symbol is set, until the special symbol continuous setting number reaches the upper limit Since it is possible to make it difficult for the player to grasp the remaining period (remaining number of times), the remaining period (remaining number of times) until the special figure continuous setting number reaches the upper limit is small, for example, after the jackpot game ends, the first The remaining period (remaining number) until the special figure continuous setting number reaches the upper limit is less than the upper limit (10) of the normal figure continuous setting number set based on the probability change state being set. However, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to notice the state.

In the thirty-fifth embodiment, when the jackpot game is executed, the probability state of the special symbol and the probability state of the normal symbol are both shifted to the low probability state before the jackpot game is executed. In contrast to executing the process, when the small winning game is executed, the transition process described above is not executed. Therefore, when the winning game in which the second variable winning device 650 is opened during the second variable winning state is executed, by grasping the mode of normal symbol fluctuation during the winning game and the mode of the normal pattern winning game , It is configured so that it can be grasped whether the winning game being executed is a jackpot game or a normal pattern winning game. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it easier for a skilled player who has been playing the pachinko machine 10 for a long time to grasp the current numbers of the special figure continuous setting number and the normal figure continuous setting number.

The per normal pattern operation table 202h is a data table referred to when determining the contents of the per normal per pattern game operation performed when the per normal pattern is won, and is a game state at the execution timing of the per normal pattern game. Different hit operation contents are defined corresponding to.

Here, with reference to FIG. 620, the contents defined in the operation table 202h per normal figure will be described. FIG. 620 is a diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the per-universal figure operation table 202h. It should be noted that, in the operation table 202h per normal figure schematically shown in FIG. A measurement counter is provided to measure the elapsed time from the time when each operation content (opening pattern) was set, and among the currently set operation content (opening pattern), it is specified corresponding to the measurement value of the measurement counter. It is configured so that the specified operation is executed.

Specifically, when the "normal state" is set at the execution timing of the game per normal pattern, the opening period "0.3 seconds", the opening period "0.5 seconds", the ending period "0.02 Seconds” operation content (open pattern) is set to “second probability state”, opening period “0.02 seconds”, opening period “0.5 seconds”, ending period “0.02 Seconds” operation content (open pattern) is set to “first variable state” and “time saving state”, opening period “0.3 seconds”, opening period “0.6 seconds”, ending An operation content (opening pattern) with a period of "0.02 seconds" is defined.

In this way, by configuring to be able to execute the normal pattern per game with different open patterns according to the game state when the normal pattern per game is executed, the ball that won the distribution device 175 (see FIG. 582) It is possible to vary the ratio of balls entering the right first ball entrance 64b2 according to the game state.

Returning to FIG. 586, the description continues. The RAM 203 includes various counters shown in FIG. 610, a stack area storing the contents of internal registers of the MPU 201 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 201, various flags and counters, I/O, and the like. and a work area (work area) in which the value of is stored.

The RAM 203 is configured to retain (back up) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply 115 even after the pachinko machine 10 is powered off, and all the data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. .

When the power is cut off due to power failure or the like, the RAM 203 stores the stack pointer and the values of each register at the time of the power cut (including the time of power failure; the same applies hereinafter). On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including when the power is turned on due to the cancellation of the power failure; the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power was turned off based on the information stored in the RAM 203 . Writing to the RAM 203 is executed by the main process (see FIG. 655) when the power is turned off, and restoration of each value written in the RAM 203 is executed by the start-up process (see FIG. 654) when the power is turned on. The NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 is configured to receive a power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when power is shut off due to a power failure or the like. , NMI interrupt processing (see FIG. 653) is immediately executed as power failure processing.

Also, as shown in FIG. 621, the RAM 203 has a first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a, a second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b, a normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c, a first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d, Normal symbol holding ball number counter 203e, time saving flag 203f, probability variation flag 203g, probability variation limit number counter 203h, time saving limit number counter 203i, time saving end waiting flag 203j, game state storage area 203k, time saving medium counter 203m, special figure 1 jackpot flag 203na, special figure 2 big hit flag 203nb, special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203o, small hit flag 203p, special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 203r, special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 203s, winning state storage area 203t, probability variation limit reach flag 203u , time reduction limit reach flag 203v, variation pattern scenario storage area 203w, special state flag 203x, and other memory area 203z.

In the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a, up to the upper limit number (4 in this embodiment), the ball entered the first ball entrance 64b1 or the right first ball entrance 64b2 (start winning). A storage area for storing up to four various counter values (winning information) acquired based on the above, and when executing the first special symbol lottery, among the winning information stored in the storage area, the first 1 A data area having winning information used for a special symbol lottery, that is, an execution area in which the oldest winning information is shifted and stored. In addition, the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b stores various counter values (winning information) obtained based on the game ball entering the second ball entrance 640 (start winning). Data area with execution area. That is, the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b differs from the above-described first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a in that it does not have a storage area.

Here, the execution area (first special symbol reserved ball execution area) of the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a stores various counter values (winning information) for starting variable display of the first special symbol. It is a data area, and when the variable display of the first special symbol is stopped, when various counter values (winning information) are stored in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a, the various counter values are shifted. Stored. The execution area of the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b (second special symbol reserved ball execution area) is a data area in which various counter values (winning information) for starting the variable display of the second special symbol are stored. Yes, the details are the same as the first special symbol reserved ball execution area.

The first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a and the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b are provided with a first winning random number counter C1 and a first winning type obtained from the counter buffer (see FIG. 610) upon detection of the start winning. Each value of the counter C2, the variation type counter CS1, and the small hit type counter C5 is stored. When the MPU 201 detects that the ball has entered the first ball entrance 64b1 or the right first ball entrance 64b2 (start winning) during timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 631), the counter The value of each counter C1-C2, C5, CS1 (winning information) is acquired from the buffer for use, and stored in the storage area of the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a (up to 4 pieces).

When the MPU 201 detects that it is the execution start timing of the first special symbol variation (lottery), it executes processing such as setting of the display of the big hit lottery and the first symbol display device 37 or the third symbol display device 81. Then, out of the data corresponding to each starting winning stored in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a (each value of the counters C1 to C2, C5, CS1), the data corresponding to one starting winning is selected. Shift to execution area. It should be noted that the shift in this embodiment means moving data stored in one area to another area.

On the other hand, unlike the above-described first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a, the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b does not have a storage area capable of temporarily storing winning information. Even if it is detected that the ball has entered the second ball entrance 640 (start winning) at a timing other than the timing at which variation (lottery) can be executed, the values of the counters C1 to C2, C5, and CS1 are retrieved from the counter buffer. A jackpot lottery or In order to execute processing such as display setting of the first symbol display device 37 or the third symbol display device 81, data corresponding to the start winning (the values of the counters C1 to C2, C5 and CS1) are shifted to the execution area. do.

In addition, in the present embodiment, up to four pieces of winning information corresponding to the first special symbol can be stored (retained storage), and the winning information corresponding to the second special symbol cannot be retained. However, the presence or absence of a pending memory function for each special symbol type and the maximum number of pending memories may be changed as appropriate, and the winning information corresponding to the first special symbol is also the winning prize corresponding to the second special symbol. Up to 4 pieces of information may be retained and stored, or the winning information corresponding to the first special symbol and the winning information corresponding to the second special symbol may not be retained and stored. good.

Further, in the present embodiment, the winning information corresponding to the first special symbol and the winning information corresponding to the second special symbol are configured to be stored in separate reserved ball storage areas. The winning information corresponding to the symbol and the winning information corresponding to the second special symbol may be collectively stored in one reserved ball storage area. It may be configured so that the maximum number of pending storage that can be stored is defined in advance, and the upper limit ( For example, it may be configured to provide eight. By constructing in this way, it is possible to hold and store at most eight pieces of winning prize information corresponding to one of the special symbols, but in a state where eight pieces of winning prize information corresponding to one of the special symbols are held and stored. In this case, it is possible to configure such that even one piece of winning information corresponding to the other special symbol cannot be reserved and stored. Therefore, it is possible to provide the player with the pleasure of selecting how many reserved memories of which special symbol type are to be stored in the reserved memory storage area.

The normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c includes a second winning random number counter C4 and a normal symbol variation type counter CS2 obtained from the counter buffer (see FIG. 610) upon detection of the passage of the ball through the through gate 67 (start winning). A storage area in which values are stored. When the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 detects that the ball has passed through the through gate 67 (started winning) in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 631), the value of the second hit random number counter C4 from the counter buffer , Acquire the value of the normal pattern fluctuation type counter CS2, and store it in the normal pattern reserved ball storage area 203c. The normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c has four reserved areas so that data (values of counters C4 and CS2) corresponding to one start winning can be stored (reserved) up to four times. In the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c, the data of the reserved balls are stored in the order of passing through the through gate 67 (start winning), among the reserved areas where the data is vacant, in order from the reserved area with the earliest digested order. .

In addition, when the normal symbol holding ball execution area (not shown) detects that it is the execution start timing of the variable display effect of the normal symbol based on the start winning, each counter value is stored, and the normal symbol winning lottery Also, it is a memory for storing data (values of counters C4 and CS2) to be referred to in processing such as setting of display (variation pattern) of the first pattern display device 37 or the third pattern display device 81.

In addition, when the MPU 201 detects that it is the execution start timing of the variable display effect of the normal symbol, the above-described normal symbol reservation is performed in order to execute the processing such as the winning lottery and the setting of the display of the second symbol display device 83. Of the data corresponding to each starting prize stored in the ball storage area 203c (the value of the second winning random number counter C4, the value of the normal figure fluctuation type counter CS2), the data corresponding to one starting prize is Shift to a symbol holding ball execution area (not shown). It should be noted that the shift in this embodiment means moving data stored in one area to another area.

The first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is the first ball entrance 64b1 detected in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 631) periodically executed every 2 milliseconds, the right first ball entrance Based on the ball entry (winning) to 64b2, the number of pending balls (number of standby times) of the variable display effect performed by the first symbol display device 37 (variable display effect performed by the third symbol display device 81) A counter that counts up to four times. The first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is set to zero as an initial value by the initial setting processing of the RAM 203 after power-on (see S4001 in FIG. 662). Then, each time the starting winning prize is detected and the number of held balls in the variable display increases, 1 is added up to the maximum value of 4. On the other hand, the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is decremented by 1 each time the variable display effect is executed.

In addition, the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d (that is, the number of reserved balls) is based on the ball entering the first ball entrance 64b1 and the right first ball entrance 64b2 (start winning). , When the counter value is stored in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a, the voice lamp control device 113 is notified by the first special symbol reserved ball number command output from the main controller 110. The first special symbol reserved ball number command is a command transmitted from the main controller 110 to the audio lamp controller 113 each time the starting winning is detected and the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is incremented by one. is.

When the values of the counters C1 to C2, C5 and CS1 obtained from the counter buffer are stored in the first special symbol reserved ball execution area (not shown), the MPU 201 reserves the first special symbol. The data stored in the ball execution area (not shown) is referred to in the first special symbol variation start process (see S203 in FIG. 633), and a big hit lottery is performed based on the reference data, and the lottery results are dealt with. Determine the fluctuation pattern and stop type. In the first symbol display device 37, under the control of the main controller 110, variation display is performed based on the determined variation pattern and stop type.

Further, the variation pattern and the stop type determined here are notified to the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 by the variation pattern command and the stop type command of the first special symbol. Then, under the control of the display control device 114, the third symbol display device 81 performs a variable display effect based on the variation pattern and the stop type notified by the variation pattern command and the stop type command.

In addition, in the 35th embodiment, since it does not have the function of holding and storing the winning information of the second special symbol, means for measuring the number of holding balls (number of holding storage) of the second special symbol (second Although it does not have a special symbol holding ball number counter), for example, if it has a function that can hold and store the winning information of the second special symbol in the same way as the first special symbol, the second special symbol A means (second special symbol reserved ball number counter) for measuring the number of reserved balls (number of reserved stored balls) is provided, and the target of measurement is the first special symbol for the above-described first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d. to the second special symbol.

Specifically, the value of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter (that is, the number of reserved balls) is set to the second special symbol reserved ball based on the ball entering the second ball entrance 640 (start winning). When each counter value (winning information) is stored in the storage area of the ball storage area 203b, it is added, and when the second special symbol variation is started, it is subtracted, and updated (addition or subtraction). The voice lamp control device 113 may be notified of a second special symbol reserved ball number command indicating the value of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter.

The normal symbol holding ball number counter 203e detects a ball passing through the through gate 67 (hereinafter referred to as "start winning") during timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 631) which is periodically executed every 2 milliseconds. ), it is a counter that counts up to four times the number of pending balls (number of standby times) of the variable display performed by the second symbol display device 83 . This normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203 e is a counter that stores the total number of reserved balls that is stored based on the passing of the ball through the through gate 67 . Zero is set as the initial value by the initial setting processing of the RAM 203 after power-on (see S4001 in FIG. 662). Then, each time the starting winning prize is detected and the number of held balls displayed in the variable display increases, 1 is added up to the maximum value of 4 (see S2206 in FIG. 652). On the other hand, the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is decremented by 1 each time the variable display of normal symbols is executed (see S2105 in FIG. 651).

The time saving flag 203f is a flag for indicating whether or not the current game state is a normal symbol high probability state (time saving state, first probability variable state), and the normal symbol high probability state is set. It is set to ON when This time-saving flag 203f is, in the time-saving limit update process (see S2802 in FIG. 660) executed at the end of the jackpot game, the jackpot type being executed is a normal pattern high probability jackpot (a jackpot type in which a high probability state of a normal pattern is set ) (S3002 in FIG. 660: Yes), next, the value of the time saving limit number counter 203i is 0, that is, the game state at the time of winning the jackpot during execution is a low probability state of normal symbols. (S3003 in FIG. 660: No), it is set to ON (S3005 in FIG. 660). The time saving flag 203f set to ON here is the processing for determining the variation pattern scenario of the special symbol variation (see S2808 in FIG. 658) and the processing for executing the normal symbol lottery (see S106 in FIG. 651). Referenced by Then, when the special symbol lottery is stopped and displayed in a mode indicating that the result of the special symbol lottery is the jackpot winning, it is set to OFF (see S911 in FIG. 639). In the initialized state, it is set to OFF, and when a normal power failure occurs, the state immediately before the power failure is backed up.

The variable probability flag 203g is a flag indicating whether or not the current gaming state is a high probability state (first variable probability state or second variable probability state) of special symbols. When the variable probability flag 203g is set to ON, it indicates that the game state is in a high probability state of special symbols (first variable probability state or second variable probability state), and when set to OFF, a low probability of special symbols. It shows that it is in a state (normal state or time saving state). This probability variation flag 203g is, in the probability variation limit update process (see S2801 in FIG. 659) executed at the end of the jackpot game, the jackpot type being executed is a special figure high probability jackpot (a special symbol high probability state is set jackpot type ) is determined (S2902 in FIG. 659), and the value of the variable probability limit number counter is 0, that is, when it is determined that the game state at the time of winning the jackpot during execution is a special symbol low probability state ( S2903 of FIG. 659: No), it is set to ON (S2905 of FIG. 659). Also, if the value of the probability variation limit number counter 203h after subtraction is not 0, that is, in the state where the special symbol continuous setting number is updated (the state where the high probability state of the special symbol is set continuously), If it is determined that the probability variation limit has not been reached (S2907 in FIG. 659: No), it is also set to ON.

Then, the process for determining the variation pattern scenario of the special symbol variation (see S2808 in FIG. 658) and the process for executing the normal symbol lottery (see S106 in FIG. 651) refer to the setting status of the probability variation flag 203g. and is set to OFF when the special symbol is stopped and displayed in a mode indicating that the result of the special symbol lottery is a jackpot winning (see S911 in FIG. 639). In the initialized state, it is set to OFF, and when a normal power failure occurs, the state immediately before the power failure is backed up.

The probability variation limit number counter 203h is a counter for measuring the number of times the high probability state of the special symbol is set continuously. Here, the pachinko machine 10 in the thirty-fifth embodiment does not set the low probability state of the special symbol except during the jackpot game, and the number of times the high probability state of the special symbol is continuously set (special Figure continuous setting number) can be measured, and when the special figure continuous setting number reaches a predetermined number (40 times) (when the probability limit is reached), a high probability state of special symbols can be set. Even if such a condition is established, the processing (variable probability limit processing) for forcibly setting the low probability state of the special symbol can be executed, and the game state (first Probability variation state) is suppressed from being set excessively continuously.

In this variable probability limit number counter 203h, when a jackpot is won in a state in which a special symbol low probability state is set, and a special symbol high probability state is set after the jackpot game ends, the initial value is "40." ' is set (see S2904 in FIG. 659). Then, the value of the counter is subtracted each time the special figure continuous setting number of times is updated (see S2907 in FIG. 659), and the counter value after subtraction is referenced in the determination process of whether or not the probability variation limit has been reached ( S2906 in FIG. 659). Then, the value of the variable probability limit number counter 203h is cleared to 0 when the variable probability limit is reached or when the type of jackpot under execution sets a low probability state of special symbols.

Information indicating the value of this variable probability limit number counter 203h is set as a state command for output to the sound lamp control device 113 in the jackpot end process (see S2611 in FIG. 658) (see S2807 in FIG. 658).

In the 35th embodiment, the value of the probability variation limit number counter 203h for measuring the number of special figure continuous settings is set to the number of special figure continuous settings until the probability variation limit is reached, and the number of special figure continuous settings is subtracted. The counter value is decremented each time the That is, the value of the probability variation limit number counter 203h while the high probability state of the special symbol is continuously set is information for indicating the number of remaining special symbol continuous setting times until the probability variation limit is reached. As a result, by receiving the state command set by the processing of S2807 in FIG. 658 by the voice lamp control device 113, it becomes possible to grasp the number of Toku-zu continuous settings until reaching the probability variation limit, until the probability variation limit is reached effect (for example, RUSH stock effect (see FIG. 597(b))) for suggesting the period of .

In addition, in the present 35th embodiment, as described above, the value of the probability variation limit number counter 203h for measuring the number of special figure continuous settings, set the number of special figure continuous settings until reaching the probability variation limit, special figure Each time the number of consecutive settings is subtracted, the counter value is decremented. 1" is set, and after that, every time the special figure continuous setting number is updated, the value of the probability variation limit number counter 203h is incremented by 1, and the value of the probability variation limit number counter 203h after addition becomes the probability variation limit. It is determined whether it is a value (for example, 40) indicating that it has been reached, and if the result of the determination is a determination result indicating that the probability variation limit has been reached, the probability variation limit process may be performed. good.

When configured in this way, for example, when a special condition (for example, winning a jackpot of a specific jackpot type) is established within a period in which the high probability state of the special symbol is set continuously, the establishment of the variable probability limit Even if the condition (arrival condition) is configured to be changed, whether or not the probability limit is reached by simply comparing the condition (arrival condition) after the change with the value of the variable probability limit counter 203h. It is possible to determine whether

In addition, when the special conditions in the above-described example are satisfied, the conditions for establishing the variable probability limit may be changed to make it more difficult to be established than before the change, or changed to be easier to be established than before the change. You can Also, when the conditions for establishing the probability limit (arrival conditions) are changed, it is immediately determined whether the value of the probability limit number counter 203h at the present time satisfies the conditions for establishing the probability limit (arrival conditions). It may be configured, and even if the establishment condition (arrival condition) of the probability variable limit is changed, it is determined whether the value of the probability variable limit number counter 203h satisfies the establishment condition (arrival condition) of the probability variable limit. The determination may be configured to be executed at the end of the jackpot game. In particular, in the latter case, along with suppressing the end of the high probability state of the special symbol immediately when the establishment condition (arrival condition) of the variable probability limit is changed, the high probability state of the special symbol is set. Since the jackpot winning of the special symbol lottery is guaranteed at least (one time) during the period, the player's willingness to play can be suppressed.

The time saving limit number counter 203i is a counter for measuring the number of times the high probability state of the normal symbol is continuously set. Here, the pachinko machine 10 in the thirty-fifth embodiment does not set the low probability state of the normal symbol except during the jackpot game, and the number of times the high probability state of the normal symbol is continuously set (normal Continuous setting number) is configured to be measurable, and when the normal continuous setting number reaches a predetermined number (10 times) (when the time reduction limit is reached), a high probability state of normal symbols can be set. Even if is established, the processing (time reduction limit processing) for forcibly setting the low probability state of the normal symbol can be executed, and the game state (first probability variable state) advantageous to the player ) are prevented from being excessively set continuously.

In this short time limit number counter 203i, when a jackpot is won in a state where a low probability state of normal symbols is set, and a high probability state of normal symbols is set after the jackpot game ends, the initial value is "10". ' is set (see S3004 in FIG. 660). Then, the value of the counter is decremented each time the normal continuous set number of times is updated (see S3007 in FIG. 660), and the counter value after subtraction is referenced in the determination process of whether or not the time reduction limit has been reached (Fig. 660 S3008). Then, the value of the time saving limit number counter 203i is cleared to 0 when the time saving limit is reached or when the jackpot type being executed sets a low probability state of normal symbols.

Information indicating the value of the time-saving limit number counter 203i is set as a state command for output to the sound lamp control device 113 in the jackpot end process (see S2611 in FIG. 658) (see S2807 in FIG. 658).

In the thirty-fifth embodiment, the normal continuous setting number of times until reaching the time saving limit is set to the value of the time saving limit number counter 203i for measuring the normal continuous setting number of times, and each time the normal continuous setting number is subtracted , is configured to decrement the counter value. That is, the value of the time saving limit number counter 203i while the high probability state of the normal symbol is continuously set is information for indicating the number of remaining normal continuous setting times until reaching the time saving limit. As a result, the status command set by the processing of S2807 in FIG. 658 is received by the audio lamp control device 113, so that it becomes possible to grasp the normal figure continuous setting number of times until reaching the time saving limit, until reaching the time saving limit effect (for example, RUSH stock effect (see FIG. 597(b))) for suggesting the period to the player can be executed.

In the thirty-fifth embodiment, as described above, the normal continuous setting number of times until the time reduction limit is reached is set to the value of the time saving limit number counter 203i for measuring the normal continuous setting number of times. is configured to subtract the counter value each time is subtracted. After that, the value of the time saving limit number counter 203i is incremented by 1 each time the normal continuous set number of times is updated, and the value of the time saving limit number counter 203i after addition reaches the time saving limit. It may be configured to determine whether it is a value (for example, 10) and to execute the time saving limit process when the determination result indicates that the time saving limit has been reached.

When configured in this way, for example, when the second special condition (for example, winning a jackpot of a specific jackpot type) is established within a period in which the high probability state of the special symbol is set continuously, the time saving limit Even if the establishment condition (arrival condition) is changed, the time reduction limit is reached by simply comparing the establishment condition (arrival condition) after the change with the value of the time reduction limit number counter 203i. It is possible to determine whether or not

In addition, when the special conditions in the above-mentioned example content are established, the establishment conditions of the time reduction limit may be changed to make it more difficult to be established than before the change, or changed to be easier to be established than before the change. You can In addition, when the establishment conditions (arrival conditions) of the time reduction limit are changed, it is immediately determined whether the value of the time reduction limit number counter 203i at the present time satisfies the establishment conditions (arrival conditions) of the time reduction limit. It may be configured, even if the conditions for establishing the time saving limit (reaching conditions) are changed, the value of the time saving limit counter 203i satisfies the conditions for establishing the time saving limit (reaching conditions) Whether or not The determination may be configured to be executed at the end of the jackpot game. In particular, in the latter case, the high probability state of the normal pattern is set while suppressing the end of the high probability state of the normal pattern immediately when the conditions for establishing the time saving limit (arrival conditions) are changed. Since the jackpot winning of the special symbol lottery is guaranteed at least (one time) during the period, the player's desire to play can be suppressed.

The time saving end standby flag 203j is a flag indicating that the special figure variation in which the end condition of the time saving state is established has started. Specifically, in the present embodiment, when the high probability state of the normal symbol is set after the end of the jackpot game, the first special symbol variation as a time saving end condition for ending the high probability state of the normal symbol It is configured such that at least a time-saving end condition that is established when the total number of times of the number of times and the second special symbol variation number of times reaches 100 times is set. The time saving end standby flag 203j is set to ON when the special symbol variation that can satisfy this time saving end condition is started.

Then, in the state where the time saving end waiting flag 203j is set to ON, when the special symbol variation that can satisfy the time saving end condition is stopped and displayed, it is set to OFF. Also, when a new special symbol variation is started, it is determined whether the time saving end standby flag 203j is set to ON, and if it is determined to be set to ON, that is, the time saving end condition is established. When the 101st special symbol variation is executed at the timing when the special symbol variation to be obtained (for example, the 100th special symbol variation) is being executed, before the 101st special symbol variation is performed (special Before the symbol lottery is executed), a process for establishing the end condition of the time saving state is executed. By configuring in this way, when the time saving end waiting flag 203j is set to ON (that is, the time saving end waiting state), when any time saving end timing arrives, according to each timing It is possible to reliably execute the time-saving end processing.

In the thirty-fifth embodiment, since the second special symbol lottery can be executed during the first special symbol variation period for showing the lottery result of the first special symbol lottery, for example, the time saving end condition is established. There is a possibility that the 101st and subsequent special symbol variations will be executed before the special symbol variation to be obtained (for example, the 100th special symbol variation after the end of the jackpot game) is stopped and displayed. Therefore, as in the conventional pachinko machine 10, if it is configured to determine whether the time saving end condition is established only at the stop display timing of the special symbol variation, the special symbol variation after the 101st time is higher than the normal symbol. It may be executed based on the probabilistic state. In other words, in order to suppress the execution of games that are excessively advantageous to the player, the game ( There was a problem that the time saving game) was executed even outside the range of the execution period specified using the time saving end condition (101st special symbol variation).

In addition, in order to solve the above-described problem, for example, as the time saving end condition, when either the 99th special symbol variation or the 100th special symbol variation executed after the end of the jackpot game is stopped and displayed It is also conceivable to configure so that the time saving end condition is satisfied, but in this case, depending on the variation situation of the first special symbol and the variation situation of the second special symbol, at the stop display timing of the 100th special symbol variation When the time saving state ends at the time and when the time saving state ends at the stop display timing of the 99th special symbol variation, the execution period of the time saving game which is a game advantageous to the player. There is a problem that the player's willingness to play is reduced because the length of time is shortened.

On the other hand, in the thirty-fifth embodiment, as described above, when the number of special symbol fluctuations after the end of the jackpot game is the 100th time, that is, when the stop display is performed, the time saving state ends. When the 100th special symbol variation is stopped and displayed in a state where the symbol variation is stored (the time saving end standby flag 203j is set to ON) and the time saving end standby flag 203j is set to ON, Alternatively, when the condition for executing the 101st special symbol variation is satisfied, the time saving state can be ended at the timing when the condition is satisfied first, so that an excessively advantageous game is performed for the player. can be suppressed.

In addition, when the time saving state is terminated based on the establishment of the condition for executing the 101st special symbol variation, the time saving state is terminated before the 101st special symbol lottery is performed. It is possible to suppress the execution of a game that is excessively advantageous to the player.

The game state storage area 203k is a storage area for temporarily storing the currently set game state, and the game state set after the end of the jackpot game (probability variation flag 203g and time saving flag 203f setting status) The game state corresponding to is stored. Specifically, when the probability variable flag 203g is set to off and the time saving flag 203f is set to off, the normal state is stored, and when the probability changing flag 203g is set to off and the time saving flag 203f is set to on, the time saving state is set. When the variable probability flag 203g is set to ON and the time saving flag 203f is set to ON, the first variable probability state is stored, and when the variable probability flag 203g is set to ON and the time saving flag 203f is set to OFF, the second probability change state is stored.

Furthermore, in the state where the jackpot game or the small hit game is being executed, the winning game state (big hit state, small hit state) indicating that each winning game is being executed, and the jackpot game being executed The type information indicating the jackpot type corresponding to is also stored.

A state command is set based on the information stored (memorized) in the game state storage area 203k, and the state command is output to the sound lamp control device 113. FIG. The voice lamp control device 113 receives the output state command and temporarily stores it in the secondary game state storage area 223j.

The information stored in the game state storage area 203k is configured to be able to hold the information even when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on. In the start-up process (see FIG. 654) executed at the beginning of the game, a state command corresponding to the information stored in the game state storage area 203k is set.

As a result, even if the pachinko machine 10 is powered off due to a power failure or the like, the current game state can be determined by the sound lamp control device 113 side.

In addition, the game state storage area 203k has a recording area capable of holding a predetermined number of histories of game states (past histories) stored in the past. Information indicating the game state (information indicating the game state set before switching) is shifted to the storage area for holding the latest information among the storage areas for holding the past history. be. By this processing, a plurality of pieces of information already stored in the storage area for holding the past history are shifted one by one to the area where the old information is held, and the oldest information is deleted.

Thus, by holding the history of the game state stored in the past for a predetermined period, for example, when the game state set after the end of the jackpot game is set during the jackpot game (at the end of the jackpot game), It is possible to read the game state at the time of winning the jackpot instead of the game state at the time (the game state during the jackpot game). In addition, when determining the game state set after the end of the jackpot game and the variation pattern scenario referred to when determining the variation pattern of the special symbol variation, not only the currently set game state but also the previously set Using the information indicating the game state that has been played, it is possible to determine the transition history of the game state indicating the transition from which game state to which game state, and to execute the determination process based on the determination result. . By configuring in this way, it is possible to determine a greater variety of types as variation pattern scenarios, so that monotonous games are less likely to be executed.

Time saving medium counter 203m is a counter for measuring the number of fluctuations of special symbols until one of the time saving end conditions set during the time saving state is established, and in the jackpot control process (see S2504 in FIG. 656), When it is determined that it is the end timing of the ending period (the end timing of the jackpot) (S2610 of FIG. 656: Yes), the jackpot end process (see S2611 of FIG. 658) is executed. A value is set (S2805 in FIG. 658).

Then, the time saving update process (see S916 in FIG. 642) executed in the first special symbol fluctuation stop process (see S206 in FIG. 639) and the second special symbol fluctuation stop process (see S211 in FIG. 647) The value of the counter is referenced in the second time saving update process (see S1714 in FIG. 648), and the value of the counter is subtracted by 1 when it is determined that the value of the counter is greater than 0.

In addition, in the first special symbol variation start process (see S203 in FIG. 633), the value of the time saving counter 203m is referred to, and it is determined whether the special symbol variation to be executed this time is the final variation in the time saving state (Fig. 633 S309). Similarly, the value of the time saving medium counter 203m is referred to in the second special symbol variation start process (see S208 in FIG. 643), and it is determined whether the special symbol variation to be executed this time is the final variation in the time saving state (Fig. 643, S1307).

The special figure 1 jackpot flag 203na is based on the ball entering the first ball entrance 64b1 and the right first ball entrance 64b2. It is a flag that is set to ON when it is determined that there is (when a jackpot is won in the first special symbol lottery). Also, when the jackpot game ends, it is set to OFF.

Although detailed description is omitted, in the thirty-fifth embodiment, the lottery for the first special symbol and the lottery for the second special symbol are configured to be executable at the same time (in parallel), and both special symbols are In the case of winning the jackpot, the jackpot game is executed based on the lottery results of the special symbols on the side where the special symbol fluctuation is stopped first (the special symbol is confirmed and displayed), and the special symbol fluctuation is stopped first (the special symbol is displayed) Depending on the type of jackpot at the time of confirmation display), the other special symbol variation is forcibly stopped and displayed in a display mode indicating that the lottery result is out.

By constructing in this way, in the pachinko machine 10 capable of simultaneously (parallelly) executing lotteries for a plurality of special symbol types, a jackpot is won in each special symbol lottery, and an excessive amount is given to the player at the same time. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which a privilege (jackpot game) is granted.

Furthermore, even if one special symbol lottery wins a big win that is disadvantageous to the player, the other special symbol lottery wins a big win that is advantageous to the player before the winning result is stopped and displayed (confirmed display). It is possible to elect. In this case, it is preferable to execute a variable performance suggesting that the player has won a disadvantageous win by using the variable time until the special symbol lottery result is stopped and displayed. As a result, the player can be made to think that he/she has won the lottery at a disadvantage, so that the other special symbol lottery can be executed willingly during the fluctuation time.

In addition, it may be configured such that a shorter variation time is more likely to be set when winning a jackpot that is advantageous to the player than when winning a jackpot that is disadvantageous to the player. As a result, it is possible to win an advantageous win in the other special symbol lottery while one of the special symbols won in a disadvantageous win fluctuates, and to stop display (fixed display) the winning result before the winning result in the disadvantageous win. can.

This special figure 1 jackpot flag 203na refers to the setting situation in the first special symbol variation stop processing (see S206 in FIG. 639) which is executed when the first special symbol variation is stopped and displayed. Here, when it is determined that the special figure 1 big hit flag 203na is set to ON, that is, when the first special symbol variation that has won the big hit is stopped and displayed (see S901 in FIG. 639), A process for forcibly stopping and displaying the second special symbol variation being executed in a display mode indicating the deviation is executed (see S903 to S909 in FIG. 639).

In addition, in the second special symbol variation stop processing (see S211 in Figure 647), when the second special symbol variation that has been winning the jackpot is stopped and displayed (see S1701 in Figure 647), the setting of the special figure 1 jackpot flag 203na The situation is determined (S1706 in FIG. 647), and if it is determined that it is set to ON (S1706 in FIG. 647: Yes), the processing for deleting the information indicating the jackpot winning of the first special symbol is performed. is executed (S1707, S1708 in FIG. 647).

The special figure 2 big hit flag 203nb is based on the ball entering the second ball entrance 640, and when the value of the acquired first random number counter C1 is determined to be a big hit at the start of fluctuation (second 2) is a flag that is set to ON when a jackpot is won in a special symbol lottery. Also, when the jackpot game ends, it is set to OFF.

This special figure 2 jackpot flag 203nb is referred to the setting situation in the second special symbol variation stop processing (see S211 in FIG. 647) which is executed when the second special symbol variation is stopped and displayed. Here, if it is determined that the special figure 2 big hit flag 203nb is set to ON, that is, if the second special symbol variation that has won the big hit is stopped and displayed (see S1701 in FIG. 647), A process for forcibly stopping and displaying the first special symbol variation being executed in a display mode indicating the deviation is executed (see S1703 to S1708 in FIG. 647).

Also, in the first special symbol variation stop processing (see S206 in FIG. 639), when stopping and displaying the first special symbol variation in which the jackpot has been won (see S901 in FIG. 639), the setting of the special figure 2 jackpot flag 203nb The situation is determined (S907 in FIG. 639), and if it is determined that it is set to ON (S907 in FIG. 639: Yes), the process for deleting the information indicating the jackpot winning of the second special symbol is performed. is executed (S908, S909 in FIG. 639).

In this way, the first special symbol lottery (variation) and the second special symbol lottery (variation) can be executed at the same time (in parallel), and even if a jackpot is won in one of the special symbol lotteries. Also, until the special symbol variation for indicating the winning of the big win is stopped and displayed, the pachinko machine 10 having a structure capable of winning the big win in the other special symbol lottery indicates that the big win has been won in each special symbol lottery. A flag (special figure 1 jackpot flag 203na, special figure 2 jackpot flag 203nb) is provided for storage, and when the special symbol variation that is winning the jackpot is stopped and displayed, processing to determine the setting status of each jackpot flag is performed. By executing this, when one of the special symbol variations indicating the winning of the big win is stopped and displayed first, the winning information of the other special symbol indicating the winning of the big win can be surely discarded.

In this embodiment, the information indicating that the first special symbol lottery has won the jackpot and the information indicating that the second special symbol lottery has won the jackpot are stored using separate jackpot flags 203n. However, without being limited to this, a common jackpot flag is provided for the first special pattern and the second special pattern, and one of the lottery for the first special pattern and the lottery for the second special pattern is won. In such a case, the big win flag 203n may be set to ON so that the big win is not won in the other special symbol lottery executed with the big win flag 203n set to ON.

The special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203o is a flag indicating that a big hit or a small hit is won in the first special symbol lottery while the second special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner, and the second special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner. In addition, it is set to ON when the first special symbol variation for indicating the winning of a big win or the winning of a small win is stopped and displayed. This special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203o is set to ON in the process of S903 of the first special symbol fluctuation stop process (see S206 in FIG. 639) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110. In addition, in the process of S1301 of the second special symbol variation start process (see S208 in FIG. 643), it is set to OFF.

As a result, in the special symbol variation process (see S104 in FIG. 632) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, the first special symbol lottery wins the big win (or small win), and the big win symbol (or small win) is won. When the hit symbol) is stopped and displayed, the second special symbol (the second special symbol stopped and displayed in the process of S206 in FIG. 632) forced to be stopped and displayed as a lost symbol is the special symbol variation of this time. It is possible to prevent the lottery from being executed again (a new second special symbol variation is executed in the process of S208) before the process ends.

In addition, in the main controller 110 of the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, within one special symbol variation process (see S104 in FIG. 632), after executing the process related to the first special symbol, the process related to the second special symbol By configuring to execute, it is configured to execute the variation process for each special symbol without delay.

Then, in the special symbol variation process (see S104 in FIG. 632), when one of the special symbols is stopped and displayed in a display mode indicating a big win, the main process of the main controller 110 (see FIG. 655) is the big win control process. (see S2504 in FIG. 656) is executed. In addition, the special symbol variation processing (see S104 in FIG. 632) is, when the current state is the jackpot state or the small winning state (S201 in FIG. 632: Yes), the special symbol variation processing (S202 to S211 in FIG. 632) is configured to skip

That is, in the present embodiment, while the big winning game or the small winning game is being executed based on the special symbol lottery result, it is configured so that the new special symbol variation (lottery) is not executed, When the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a display mode for indicating that the lottery result is a big hit by the variation process for the first special symbol executed earlier in the special symbol variation process (see S104 in FIG. 632). In addition, a new variation process for the second special symbol is performed within the special symbol variation process (see S104 in FIG. 632).

In this embodiment configured in this way, by using the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203o, when the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a display mode for indicating that the lottery result is a big hit, that It is possible to suppress the execution of a new variation process for the second special symbol within the special symbol variation process (see S104 in FIG. 632).

The small hit flag 203p is a flag indicating that the result of the judgment of the first special symbol (the result of the first special symbol lottery) is a small hit, and is set to ON when the small hit is won. be. This small hit flag 203p is set to ON when the first special symbol success/failure determination result (first special symbol lottery result) is a small hit (see S502 in FIG. 635), and the winning result is a small hit. When the special symbol variation is stopped and displayed, the setting information is referred to (see S1001 in FIG. 640), and when it is determined that it is set to on (S1001 in FIG. 640: Yes), the second The special symbol variation, the special figure 2 discarding process (see S1003 in FIG. 641) for forcibly stopping display (discarding) in the display mode showing the deviation is executed, and then set to OFF (S1005 in FIG. 640 reference).

The special figure 1 variation time counter 203r is a counter for measuring the variation time of the first special symbol, and corresponds to the variation pattern selected in the first special symbol variation pattern selection process (see S307 in FIG. 636). A value indicating the fluctuation time is set (see S614 in FIG. 636). Then, the value is updated (subtracted) every time the first special symbol variation in-execution process (see S204 in FIG. 638) is executed, and whether the value is 0 in the special symbol variation process (see S104 in FIG. 632) is determined (see S202 in FIG. 632). Here, when it is determined that the value of the special figure 1 variation time counter 203r is 0 (S202 in FIG. 632: Yes), the first special symbol variation stop processing ( S206 in FIG. 639) is executed.

Furthermore, the value of this special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 203r is referred to when the second special symbol is stopped and displayed in a display mode indicating a big hit (see S1702 in FIG. 647), and the value of the counter is greater than 0 When it is determined, that is, when it is determined that the first special symbol variation is in progress (S1702 in FIG. 647: Yes), the value is cleared to 0 (see S1705 in FIG. 647). As a result, when the first special symbol is forcibly stopped and displayed in a display mode indicating a failure at the time of the second special symbol jackpot stop display, the value of the special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 203r remains, and the second special symbol is forcibly stopped. After the stop display, it is possible to suppress the restart of the variation of the first special symbol again based on the value left in the special figure 1 variation time counter 203r.

The special figure 2 variation time counter 203s is a counter for measuring the variation time of the second special symbol, and corresponds to the variation pattern selected in the second special symbol variation pattern selection process (see S1304 in FIG. 645). A value indicating the fluctuation time is set (see S1513 in FIG. 645). Then, the value is updated (subtracted) every time the second special symbol variation in-execution process (see S209 in FIG. 646) is executed, and whether the value is 0 in the special symbol variation process (see S104 in FIG. 632) is determined (see S207 in FIG. 632). Here, when it is determined that the value of the special figure 2 variation time counter 203s is 0 (S207 in FIG. 632: Yes), the second special symbol variation stop processing ( S211 in FIG. 647) is executed.

Furthermore, the value of this special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 203s is cleared to 0 when the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a display mode indicating a big hit (see S906 in FIG. 639). As a result, when the second special symbol is forcibly stopped and displayed in a display mode indicating a failure at the time of the jackpot stop display of the first special symbol, the value of the special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 203s remains, and the second special symbol is forcibly stopped. After the stop display, it is possible to suppress the resumption of the variation of the second special symbol based on the value left in the special figure 2 variation time counter 203s.

The winning state storage area 203t is a storage area for storing the game state set when the jackpot is won. In the winning state storage area 203t, in the first special symbol jackpot determination process (see S306 in FIG. 634), when it is determined that the special symbol lottery of this time has won a jackpot (S411 in FIG. 634: Yes ), the set game state is stored (see S415 in FIG. 634). Similarly, in the second special symbol jackpot determination process (see S1303 in FIG. 644), when it is determined that the special symbol lottery of this time has won a jackpot (S1411 in FIG. 644: Yes), it is set. The current game state is stored (see S1415 in FIG. 644).

Then, in the jackpot end processing (see S2611 in FIG. 658), the processing for determining the number of times of reduction in working hours (see S2804 in FIG. 658), and the processing for determining the variation pattern scenario (see S2808 in FIG. 658), storing the winning state Information stored in the area 203t (information indicating the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot during execution) is referred to.

In the 35th embodiment, regardless of what kind of game state is set at the time of winning the jackpot, a low probability state of special symbols and a low probability state of ordinary symbols are set when conditions for starting the jackpot game are met. It is configured to In other words, it is configured so as not to set an advantageous game state during a jackpot game in which a privilege can be awarded to the player, thereby making it difficult for the player to be granted the privilege excessively. In the thirty-fifth embodiment configured in this way, when executing the process of determining the number of times of time saving or determining the variation pattern scenario at the end of the jackpot game, the game state set at that time is changed. In the case of reference, the normal state (low probability state of special symbols, low probability state of normal symbols) is always referred to.

On the other hand, in the 35th embodiment, in addition to the currently set game state, the game state at the time of winning the jackpot is stored, and the number of times of time reduction is determined at the end of the jackpot game, and the variation pattern scenario When executing the process of determining the jackpot, the game state that was set at the time of winning the jackpot is read, and the read game state is used to determine the number of time reductions and the variation pattern scenario. It is possible to easily increase the number of time reductions set after the end of the game and the variation of the variation pattern scenario, thereby enhancing the player's interest in the game.

Probability variation limit arrival flag 203u is for indicating that the number of times the special symbol continuous setting number, that is, the number of times the high probability state of the special symbol is continuously set reaches the upper limit number (40 times) (reaches the probability variation limit) A flag that is set on when the probability limit is reached.

The time saving limit reaching flag 203v is for indicating that the number of normal pattern continuous setting times, that is, the number of times that the high probability state of the normal pattern is continuously set has reached the upper limit number (10 times) (reaching the time saving limit). A flag that is set to ON when the time saving limit is reached.

The variation pattern scenario storage area 203w is a storage area for storing information for indicating the determined variation pattern scenario, and the variation pattern scenario determined in the jackpot end process (see S2611 in FIG. 658) is stored. (See S2809 in FIG. 658). The variation pattern scenario stored in this variation pattern scenario storage area 203w is read in the first special symbol variation pattern selection process (S307 in FIG. 636) (see 605 in FIG. 636), and the read variation pattern scenario A variation pattern is selected with reference to (see S610 in FIG. 636). In addition, the second special symbol variation pattern selection process (see S1304 in Figure 645) is also read (see S1504 in Figure 645), and the variation pattern is selected with reference to the read variation pattern scenario (Figure 645 of S1509).

In the thirty-fifth embodiment, when selecting the variation pattern (variation time) of the special symbol variation, by referring to a variation pattern table that differs depending on the game state, the first special symbol variation is greater than the second special symbol variation. It is possible to set a game state (normal state, second probability variation state) in which the second special symbol variation is more likely to be executed than the first special symbol variation (time saving state, first probability variation state). Configure.

In addition, in the thirty-fifth embodiment, even in a state where the same game state (normal state) is set, a different variation pattern table is created according to the number of special symbol lotteries (fluctuations) executed after the end of the jackpot game. It is configured so that a variation pattern can be selected by referring to it. By configuring in this way, even if the game state is not switched, the switching condition of the variation pattern selection table is satisfied, and the first special symbol variation is more likely to be executed than the second special symbol variation. , and a second game period in which the second special symbol variation is more likely to be executed than the first special symbol variation, it is possible to provide a game with unexpectedness to the player.

Furthermore, in the thirty-fifth embodiment, the second special symbol lottery is more advantageous to the player than the first special symbol lottery. Specifically, the jackpot probability of the first special symbol lottery and the jackpot probability of the second special symbol lottery are the same, but the content of the jackpot game executed when the jackpot is won is the second special symbol lottery. It is constructed so that the case of winning a jackpot is more advantageous to the player than the case of winning a jackpot in the first special symbol lottery (the number of prize balls that can be obtained during the jackpot game increases). In addition, when the second special symbol lottery wins the jackpot, the game state is more advantageous to the player than when the first special symbol lottery wins the jackpot, as a game state set after the jackpot game ends (first probability variable state ) is configured to be easily set.

By configuring in this way, the player expects that the switching condition of the variation pattern selection table is satisfied and the second game period is set in which the second special symbol variation is more likely to be executed than the first special symbol variation. can be made to play.

In addition, in the 35th embodiment, at the end of the jackpot game, the timing at which the switching condition of the variation pattern selection table is established (the timing at which the number of special symbol fluctuations executed after the jackpot game reaches a predetermined number of times), and the switching condition A variation pattern table referred to before establishment and a variation pattern table referred to after establishment of a switching condition are defined in advance as one scenario (variation pattern scenario), and a plurality of variation pattern scenarios are generated at the end of a jackpot game. It is configured to determine one variation pattern scenario from among them.

Then, the variation pattern scenario determined at the end of the jackpot game is stored (stored) in the variation pattern scenario storage area 203w, and when selecting the variation pattern of the special symbol variation, the stored variation pattern scenario is specified. It is configured to select a variation pattern based on the content of the data. In this way, the switching contents of the variation pattern table are managed by the scenario, and the variation pattern is selected by referring to the variation pattern table corresponding to the updated contents of the scenario, thereby selecting the variation pattern of the special symbol. The processing load can be reduced compared to the case of executing the process of determining the variation pattern table to be referred to each time the process is executed.

In addition, in the 35th embodiment, as a switching condition for switching the variation pattern table to be referred to during the period in which the same game state is set, the number of variations of the special symbol variation executed after the end of the jackpot game is defined. However, other elements may be set as the switching condition, for example, the fact that the small winning is won by the first special symbol lottery, or the number of times the small winning has reached a predetermined number is set as the switching condition. Alternatively, the setting of a specific variation pattern may be set as a switching condition.

The special state flag 203x is a flag for indicating that the variable probability limit and the short time limit are established at the same time. When the limit reach flag 203u is set to ON and the time saving limit reach flag 203v is set to ON, that is, when the variable probability limit is reached and when the time saving limit is reached, it is set to ON.

In the thirty-fifth embodiment, even if the jackpot type in which the first probability variable state (high probability state of special symbols, high probability state of normal symbols) can be set after the end of the jackpot game is set, the jackpot game ends. In the jackpot end processing (see S2611 in FIG. 658) executed at the time, the probability variation limit arrival flag 203u is set to ON (reaches the probability variation limit), so that the probability state of the special symbol set after the jackpot game ends , the high-probability state is forcibly changed to the low-probability state. In addition, by setting the time reduction limit reaching flag 203v to ON (reaching the time reduction limit), the probability state of the normal pattern set after the jackpot game ends is forcibly changed from the high probability state to the low probability state. It is configured to

The other memory area 203z is set (stored) with other data necessary for the game, counters, flags, and the like.

Returning to FIG. 586, the description continues. An input/output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 via a bus line 204 comprising an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 205 includes the payout control device 111, the sound lamp control device 113, the first symbol display device 37, the second symbol display device 83, the second symbol reservation lamp 84, and the lower side of the opening/closing plate 65b of the specific winning opening 65a. A large opening solenoid for opening and closing the front side as a shaft, a V opening solenoid for opening and closing the opening and closing door 650f of the second variable winning device 650, and a switching provided in the second variable winning device 650 A solenoid 209 including a flow path solenoid 650k for driving a member 650h and a solenoid for driving an electric accessory (another solenoid 209z) is connected. and control signals.

The input/output port 205 is connected to various switches 208 including a switch group and a sensor group (not shown), and a RAM erasure switch circuit 253 provided in the power supply 115, which will be described later. and the RAM erasing signal SG2 output from the RAM erasing switch circuit 253, various processes are executed.

The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of prize balls and rental balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic unit, has a ROM 212 storing control programs executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 213 used as a work memory and the like.

The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, has a stack area for storing the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211, and various flags and counters. , and a work area (work area) in which values such as I/O are stored. The RAM 213 is configured to retain (back up) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply 115 even after the pachinko machine 10 is powered off, and all the data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. As with the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is also configured to receive a power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when power is shut off due to a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, NMI interrupt processing (see FIG. 653) is immediately executed as power failure processing.

An input/output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 215 is connected to the main controller 110, the dispensing motor 216, the launch controller 112, and the like. Although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected with a prize ball detection switch for detecting paid prize balls. The winning ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111 but not to the main control device 110 .

The shooting control device 112 controls the ball shooting unit 112a so that the shooting strength of the ball corresponds to the amount of rotation of the operating handle 51 when the main controller 110 issues a ball shooting instruction. The ball shooting unit 112a has a shooting solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operating handle 51, and the operating handle is activated under the condition that the stop switch 51b for stopping the shooting of the ball is turned off (not operated). A shooting solenoid is energized corresponding to the amount of rotation of the operating handle 51, and the ball is shot with strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operating handle 51.

The audio lamp control device 113 outputs audio from an audio output device (such as a speaker (not shown)) 226, outputs lighting and extinguishing from a lamp display device (electrical parts 29 to 33, an indicator lamp 34, etc.) 227, and changes production (variation It controls the setting of the display mode of the third pattern display device 81 performed by the display control device 114 such as display) and advance notice effects. The MPU 221, which is an arithmetic device, has a ROM 222 storing control programs executed by the MPU 221, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 223 used as a work memory and the like.

An input/output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 comprising an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 225 is connected to the main controller 110, the display controller 114, the audio output device 226, the lamp display device 227, the frame button 22, and the like.

The sound lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, changes the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81, It controls the voice output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 and instructs the display control device 114 so as to change the content of the presentation. When the stage is changed, a rear image change command including information about the stage after the change is transmitted to the display control device 114 in order to display the rear image corresponding to the stage after the change on the third pattern display device 81. . Here, the back image is an image displayed on the back side of the third design, which is the main image to be displayed on the third design display device 81 .

The audio lamp control device 113 determines an error according to the command from the main control device 110 and the status of various devices connected to the audio lamp control device 113, and displays and controls the error command including the error type. Send to device 114 . The display control device 114 controls the third pattern display device 81 to display an error message image corresponding to the error type (for example, vibration error) indicated by the received error command without delay.

As shown in FIG. 622(a), the ROM 222 of the sound lamp control device 113 stores at least a variation pattern selection table 222a, an effect mode selection table 222b, a stock notification number selection table 222c, and a challenge mode transition table 222d. ing.

In the variation pattern selection table 222a, a variation pattern of each variation pattern type (out of range, out of reach, various types of reach, etc.) is set to a counter value for selecting a variation pattern (not shown). The sound ramp control device 113 selects a detailed variation pattern based on the variation pattern type indicated by the variation pattern command received from the main controller 110, the result of the suitability determination, and the acquired counter value for selection. This allows the audio ramp control device 113 to select a wide variety of variation modes while strictly observing rough information such as the variation time and the type of variation pattern. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the same variable display mode or the like from being displayed frequently, thereby suppressing the problem of the player getting bored early.

The effect mode selection table 222b is a data table referred to when determining the effect mode corresponding to each game state, and the current game state and the remaining probability variation count for indicating the period until reaching the probability variation limit. A corresponding effect mode is defined based on the value of the counter 223m and the value of the remaining time reduction counter 222n to indicate the period until the time reduction limit is reached.

In the thirty-fifth embodiment, even if the same gaming state is set, different production modes based on the length of the period until reaching the variable probability limit or the length of the period until reaching the time saving limit is configured to set Specifically, when the second probability variable state (high probability state of special symbols, low probability state of normal symbols) is set, when the first probability variable jackpot is elected in the current situation, it is set after the jackpot game ends. Whether the probability variation limit is not reached until the time reduction limit number of times “10” ends (reaches the time reduction limit), that is, when the first probability variation jackpot is won and the first probability variation state is set In addition, it is configured to switch the performance mode according to whether or not it is possible to continue the first variable probability state for 10 times, which is the upper limit of the time saving limit.

By constructing in this way, it is possible for the player to easily understand the game content that may occur in the future in the pachinko machine 10 having a plurality of types of limits (probability variable limit, time saving limit) in which the game state is switched intricately. .

Here, with reference to FIG. 623, the contents of the effect mode selection table 222b will be described. FIG. 623 is a diagram showing the contents of the presentation mode selection table 222b. As shown in Figure 623, in the effect mode selection table 222b, the current game state, the value of the remaining probability variation counter 223m for indicating the period until reaching the probability variation limit, and the period until reaching the time reduction limit In order to show the value of the remaining time short counter 222n, the corresponding effect mode is defined.

When "normal (normal state)" is set as the game state, that is, when the low probability state of the special design and the low probability state of the normal design are set, either the probability variation limit number or the time reduction limit number is not set, regardless of the value of the remaining probability variable number counter 223m and the value of the remaining short time number counter 222n, the "normal mode" is defined as the effect mode. In addition, although detailed description will be described later, in the 35th embodiment, when the special condition (simultaneous establishment of the probability variation limit and the time reduction limit) is established, the second special symbol variation is the main variation during the normal state. The mode is configured to be configurable. This special mode is set as a dedicated production mode, but since it is set only when a limited special condition is established, it is configured to be set without referring to the main production mode selection table 222b. ing.

Therefore, when determining the effect mode with reference to the effect mode selection table 222b, information is defined so that the "normal mode" is always determined when the normal state is set.

When "time reduction (time reduction state)" is set as the game state, that is, when the low probability state of the special design and the high probability state of the normal design are set, the probability variation limit number of times is not set. Therefore, the value of the remaining probability variable number counter 223m is not referred to, and when the value of the remaining short time number counter 222n is "1 or more", the "EXTRA mode" is defined as the effect mode.

When "first probability variation (first probability variation state)" is set as the game state, that is, when the high probability state of special symbols and the high probability state of normal symbols are set, the probability variation limit number of times is also Since the time reduction limit number of times is also set, different production modes are defined based on the value of the remaining probability variation counter 223m and the value of the remaining time reduction number counter 222n, and the value of the remaining probability variation counter 223m is "10 to 40" and the value of the remaining time short counter 223n is "10", that is, in a state where the first probability variable state can be executed 10 times in a row, the "super RUSH mode" as the production mode is If the value of the remaining probability variation number counter 223m is "10 to 40" and the value of the remaining time short counter 223n is "9 or less", or the value of the remaining probability variation number counter 223m is "1 to 9" and the remaining time is short When the value of the number counter 222n is "1 or more", "RUSH mode" is defined as the effect mode.

When "second probability variation (second probability variation state)" is set as the game state, that is, when the high probability state of special symbols and the low probability state of normal symbols are set, only the probability variation limit number of times Since it is in the set state, different production modes are defined based on the value of the remaining probability variation number counter 223m, and if the value of the remaining probability variation number counter 223m is "13 to 40", that is, at the present time When one probability variable jackpot is won, in a state where the first probability variable state can be set 10 times in a row, the production mode is "revenge mode", and the value of the remaining probability variable number counter 223m is "1 to 12". That is, the "challenge mode" is defined as the performance mode in a range including a state in which it is difficult to set the first variable probability state ten times in a row when the first variable probability jackpot is won at the present time.

In the stock notification number selection table 222c, when "RUSH mode" is set as the effect mode (during the first probability change state), the player can set the remaining number (guaranteed number) that can be set continuously in the first probability change state. 10 is a data table that is referred to when determining the effect mode of the stock notification effect to be notified to the stock.

In the thirty-fifth embodiment, as shown in FIG. 597 (b), when "RUSH mode" is set as the production mode of the first variable probability state, the first variable probability state can be set for the player The remaining number, that is, the number of remaining hits until reaching either the probability variable limit or the time saving limit is not notified to the player. That is, in the thirty-fifth embodiment, the probability variation limit number of times is set first (the second probability variation state is set), and then the second probability variation state is repeatedly set, resulting in the remaining number of the probability variation limit number (the probability variation limit If you win the 1st probability variable jackpot with the remaining number of times) less than 10, the probability variable limit is reached before the time limit number "10" set after the jackpot ends (before reaching the time limit). Therefore, the number of times the first variable probability state is set in succession may be reduced.

In such a case, if the player is notified in advance of the number of times that the first variable probability state can be set continuously, the player can easily grasp the future game content. A 10-round jackpot game based on the jackpot winning of the second special symbol lottery for the player who wins the first probability variable jackpot when the remaining number is '2', that is, despite winning the first probability variable jackpot. is notified that is executed only once, and there is a possibility that the player's desire to play the game is remarkably lowered.

On the other hand, in the 35th embodiment, in a part of the situation where the first variable probability state can be set continuously 10 times, and in a situation where the first variable probability state cannot be set continuously 10 times It is configured to set the "RUSH mode" as the production mode, and during the "RUSH mode", the remaining number of times that the first probability variable state can be set (the number of remaining hits until reaching either the probability variable limit or the time-saving limit ) is gradually notified to the player.

By configuring in this way, the player can be motivated to play the game while expecting that the first variable probability state will continue for a longer time until the first variable probability state ends.

Here, with reference to FIG. 624(a), the contents defined in the notified stock number selection table 222c will be described. FIG. 624(a) is a diagram showing the contents defined in the notified stock number selection table 222c. As shown in FIG. 624(a), in the notified stock number selection table 222c, the value of the remaining probability variation counter 223m, the value of the notified stock number counter 223r, and the value of the acquired effect counter 223h are associated with each other. A value used for the stock notification effect is specified.

In other words, in the state where the "RUSH mode" is set, that is, the state where the first variable probability state is set, and the player is not notified how many times the first variable probability state continues. , When executing a stock notification effect that can notify the player of the number of times that the first variable probability state can continue (the number of times that the 10-round jackpot game can be executed), the remaining number of probability variable limit times (until the probability variable limit is reached The difference value is calculated from the value of the remaining probability variable number counter 223m for indicating the number of jackpots) and the value of the notified stock number counter 223r for indicating the already notified value by the stock notification effect, and the calculated Based on the difference value, it is configured to determine the remaining number of probability variable limit times to be notified by the stock notification effect of this time.

Specifically, when the value of the remaining probability variation number counter 223m is "11 to 9" and the value of the notified stock number counter 223r is "7 to", the value of the acquired effect counter 223h is "0 to 59” range is defined as “+1”, “60 to 89” range is defined as “upper limit number”, and “90 to 98” range is defined as “upper limit number −2”. When the value of the notified stock number counter 223r is "0 to 6", the value of the acquired effect counter 223h is "0" for the range "0 to 59", and for the range "60 to 89" A value of "upper limit number" is defined for the range of "+1" and "90 to 98".

In addition, when the value of the remaining probability variation counter 223m is "8 to 3", regardless of the value of the notified stock number counter 223r, the value of the acquired effect counter 223h is in the range of "0 to 59". "+1" for the range of "0" and "60 to 89" and "+2" for the range of "90 to 98" are specified, and the value of the residual probability variation counter 223m is "2 to 1 , the value of "+1" is defined for the range of the obtained effect counter 223h of "0 to 98" regardless of the value of the notified stock number counter 223r.

Here, when "0", "+1", and "+2" are selected (determined) as the stock notification number, the second game information display area Dm5 already formed in the display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81 is displayed. A display command is set to display the value (RUSH stock number) displayed in . Thereby, it is possible to increase the number of notifications for the number of times that the first variable probability state is continuously set. When "0" is set, an effect for adding the stock notification number, specifically, in the effect shown in FIG. After executing, an effect that does not add the number of stocks is executed.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to notify the player only that there is a stock number that can be additionally notified, and to execute an effect that does not indicate a specific number of information. Therefore, it is possible to continue the game while expecting that the stock notification effect will be executed next time during the RUSH mode.

It should be noted that the effect mode of the effect executed when the above-described stock notification number is "0" is changed when there is no stock number that can be added and notified, that is, the stock notification number corresponding to the value of the remaining probability variation counter 223m. are already displayed in the second game information display area Dm5. As a result, even in a state in which there is no stock number that can be additionally notified, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation as if there is a stock number that can be additionally notified, and the RUSH mode. The game can be played continuously while expecting that the stock notification performance will be executed next time.

In addition, when the "upper limit number" or "upper limit number -2" is selected (determined) as the stock notification number, regardless of the value displayed in the second game information display area Dm5, the remaining probability variation counter 223m The difference value between the value and the value of the notified stock number counter 223r is set as the upper limit number, and the second information display area Dm5 is displayed so that the stock notification number corresponds to the value of the calculation result obtained by performing arithmetic processing on the upper limit number. A display command is set to add and display the displayed RUSH stock number.

In this case, the value (RUSH stock number) already displayed in the second game information display area Dm5 formed in the display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81, the value of the remaining probability variation counter 223m, and the notified stock number Since the difference value from the value of the counter 223r and the size of the value to be added and displayed can be made different, it is possible to make it easier for the player to execute various effects.

In addition, the value (RUSH stock number) already displayed in the second game information display area Dm5 formed in the display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81, the value of the remaining probability variation number counter 223m, and the notified stock number counter 223r value is smaller than the value calculated for the upper limit number ("-2" in the case of "upper limit number -2"), the upper limit number Regardless of the calculated value, the RUSH stock number is configured to be added and displayed up to the value corresponding to the upper limit number.

By configuring in this way, the RUSH stock number is prevented from being variably displayed (subtracted display) to a value smaller than the currently displayed RUSH stock number. Therefore, it is possible to increase the expectation of the player when the stock notification effect for adding the RUSH stock number is executed.

In this embodiment, the stock notification number (RUSH stock number) in the stock notification effect is not subtracted. It may be configured so as to determine an effect mode for decreasing the stock notification number that has been set. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make the player interested in the effect result every time the stock notification effect is executed. In addition, since the execution frequency of the stock notification effect can be increased compared to the case where the stock notification effect is executed only when the stock notification number is added or maintained, the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

The challenge mode transition table 222d determines whether or not to shift the production mode to the "challenge mode" in the state where the "revenge mode", which is the production mode set in the situation where the second variable probability state is set, is set. It is a data table referred to when determining whether or not, and a state in which a big win has not been won by a special symbol lottery, that is, a performance mode is shifted without an opportunity to set a new game state after the end of a big win game. It is referred to for By configuring in this way, it is possible to shift the performance mode without winning a big win, so it is possible to make it difficult for the player to predict at what timing the performance mode will be shifted.

Further, in the thirty-fifth embodiment, based on the number of executions of the small winning game executed in the state where the "revenge mode" which is the production mode set in the situation where the second variable probability state is set is set It is configured to execute a lottery (judgment) to transition to the "challenge mode". By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to determine whether the small winning game has been executed or the two rounds of the big winning game has been executed. It is possible to make it difficult for the player to predict the remaining period of the figure probability period).

Here, the contents of the challenge mode transition table 222d will be described with reference to FIG. 624(b). FIG. 624(b) is a diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the challenge mode transition table 222d. As shown in Figure 624 (b), in the challenge mode transition table 222d, the value of the remaining probability variable number counter 223m and the value of the small hit number counter 223t are associated with the determination result of whether or not to shift the production mode is stipulated.

Specifically, if the value of the remaining probability variable number counter 223m is "~ 13 (13 or more)", the value of the small hit number counter 223t is "~ 900" in the range "no (no transition)" "Transition (with transition)" is defined in the range of "901 ~ (901 or more)", and when the value of the remaining probability variable number counter 223m is "12 ~ 9", the value of the small hit number counter 223t is "~ 200” is defined as “no (no transition)”, and “201 to (201 or more)” is defined to be “transition (with transition)”, and the value of the remaining probability variation counter 223m is “8 to ( 13 or less)”, the value of the small hit number counter 223t is “no (no transition)” in the range of “~50”, and “transition (with transition)” in the range of “51 to (51 or more)” is stipulated.

Next, the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 622(b). As shown in FIG. 622(b), the RAM 223 of the audio ramp control device 113 includes a command storage area 223a, a winning information storage area 223b, a first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c, a special figure 1 fluctuation start flag 223e, a special Figure 2 fluctuation start flag 223f, special figure 1 stop type selection flag 223g, production counter 223h, special figure 2 stop type selection flag 223i, secondary game state setting area 223j, production mode storage area 223k, remaining probability variation counter 223m, short remaining time A number counter 223n, a variable probability limit flag 223o, a short time limit flag 223p, a specific variable time counter 223q, a notified stock number counter 223r, a notification upper limit flag 223s, a small hit number counter 223t, a short time counter 223u, and at least a memory area 223z are provided. ing.

The command storage area 223a is an area in which various commands output from the main controller 110 to the sound lamp control device 113 are temporarily stored until the commands are processed. Specifically, it is composed of a ring buffer, and data is read and written by a FIFO (First In First Out) method. When the command determination processing (see FIG. 664) of the sound ramp processing device 113 is executed, the command stored first among the unprocessed commands stored in the command storage area 223a is read out, and is read by the command determination processing. , the command is parsed and an action is taken according to the command.

The winning information storage area 223b has one execution area and four areas (first area to fourth area) for the first special symbol and the second special symbol, respectively. , win-win information is stored. Based on the information stored in the prize winning information storage area 223b, the sound lamp control device 113 can determine the lottery result of the reserved ball and the like before the change starts.

The first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c, like the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d of the main control device 110, is a variable effect performed by the first symbol display device 37 (and the third symbol display device 81) ( It is a variable display), and is a counter that counts the number of pending balls (number of standby times) of the variable effect suspended in the main controller 110 up to four times. That is, the number of reserved balls corresponding to the first special symbol is set based on the reserved ball number command output from main controller 110 .

As described above, the voice lamp control device 113 directly accesses the main control device 110 and cannot acquire the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d stored in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110. Therefore, the voice lamp control device 113 counts the number of reserved balls based on the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main controller 110, and manages the number of reserved balls by the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c. It's like

Specifically, in the main controller 110, when the ball entering the first ball entrance 64b1 or the right first ball entrance 64b2 is added to the number of pending balls in the variable display, or the main controller 110 When the variable display in the special symbol is executed and the number of reserved balls is subtracted, the voice lamp control device 113 issues a reserved ball number command indicating the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d after addition or subtraction. Send to

When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main controller 110, the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d of the main controller 110 is obtained from the reserved ball number command. , is stored in the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c. Thus, in the voice lamp control device 113, according to the reservation ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, since the value of the first special symbol reservation ball number counter 223c is updated, the first special symbol of the main control device 110 The value can be updated while synchronizing with the reserved ball number counter 203d.

The value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c is used to display the reserved ball number symbols in the third symbol display device 81. FIG. That is, the voice lamp control device 113 stores the number of reserved balls indicated by the command in response to the reception of the reserved ball number command in the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c, and stores the first special symbol reserved after storage. In order to notify the display control device 114 of the value of the number of balls counter 223c, a command for the number of reserved balls for display is transmitted to the display control device 114. FIG.

When the display control device 114 receives this display reserved ball number command, the value of the reserved ball number indicated by the command, that is, the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c of the audio lamp control device 113 is reserved. Image drawing is controlled (not shown) so that the number of balls is displayed in a partial area of the sub-display area Ds (see FIG. 587(a)) of the third symbol display device 81 . As described above, the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c is changed while synchronizing with the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d of the main controller 110. Therefore, the number of pending ball number symbols displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can also be changed while synchronizing with the value of the first special symbol pending ball number counter 203 d of the main control device 110 . Therefore, the third symbol display device 81 can accurately display the number of held balls whose variable display is held.

The special figure 1 variation start flag 223e is set to off as an initial value when the power is turned on, and is turned on when a special figure 1 variation pattern command for notifying the variation pattern of the first special symbol output from the main control device 110 is received. is set to On the other hand, it is turned off when the variable display is set in the third symbol display device 81 .

The special figure 2 variation start flag 223f is set to off as an initial value when the power is turned on, and is turned on when the special figure 2 variation pattern command for notifying the variation pattern of the second special symbol output from the main controller 110 is received. is set to On the other hand, it is turned off when the variable display is set in the third symbol display device 81 .

The special figure 1 stop type selection flag 223g is set to ON when the first stop type command for notifying the fluctuation stop type of the first special symbol output from the main control device 110 is received. On the other hand, it is turned off when the variable display is set in the third symbol display device 81 .

The special figure 2 stop type selection flag 223i is set to ON when the second stop type command for notifying the variation stop type of the second special symbol output from the main control device 110 is received. On the other hand, it is turned off when the variable display is set in the third symbol display device 81 .

The effect counter 223h is a loop counter whose value is periodically updated from "0 to 99". It is configured so that the value is updated by 1. The sound lamp control device 113 acquires the value of the effect counter 223h when selecting the effect mode of various effects, and is configured to be able to determine different effect modes corresponding to the acquired value.

Data corresponding to the state command output from the main controller 110 is set in the secondary game state storage area 223j. The current game state can also be determined by the sound lamp control device 113 based on the data set in the sub-game state storage area 223j. The state setting command is also output from the main control unit 110 when the power is turned on, and the game state backed up can be determined by the sound lamp control unit 113 .

The effect mode storage area 223k is a storage area for temporarily storing information indicating the effect mode determined based on the currently set game state, and is used for effect mode setting processing (see S4305 in FIG. 668). ) is stored information indicating the effect mode set in. Then, based on the stored information, the stored information is referred to in the process for executing the effect peculiar to each effect mode.

Remaining probability variable number counter 223m is a counter in which a value corresponding to the value of probability variable limit number counter 203h set in main control device 110 is set, and the period until reaching the probability variable limit (special figure high probability state is for indicating the number of remaining times that can be set in succession).

This remaining probability variation counter 223m is a limit information update process executed when a limit-related command is received in the state command process (see S4212 in FIG. 665) executed in the command determination process (see 4111 in FIG. 664). (See S4304 in FIG. 667) When a command for setting the probability variable count is received, the corresponding value is set, and when the probability variable limit count command is received, the already set value is subtracted by 1.

The value of the remaining probability variation number counter 223m is referred to when determining the number of notifications in the stock notification effect, or when performing determination to shift the effect mode during the second probability variation state. Then, in the state command processing (see S4212 in FIG. 665), in the game state update processing (see S4302 in FIG. 666) executed when the game state command is received Low probability state of special symbols (normal state, time saving state) The value is cleared (set) to 0 when it is determined that a command indicating that the is set has been received.

The remaining time reduction counter 223n is a counter in which a value corresponding to the value of the reduction time limit counter 203i set in the main control device 110 is set, and the period until the reduction time limit is reached (normal pattern high probability state is for indicating the number of remaining times that can be set in succession).

This remaining time short counter 223n is, in the state command processing (see S4212 in FIG. 665) executed in the command determination processing (see 4111 in FIG. 664), limit information update processing executed when a limit-related command is received (See S4304 in FIG. 667) The corresponding value is set when the command for setting the number of times of working hours is received, and when the time saving limit number of times command is received, the already set value is subtracted by 1.

The value of the remaining short time counter 223n is referred to when executing the process of determining the effect mode in each game state. Then, in the state command process (see S4212 in FIG. 665), in the game state update process (see S4302 in FIG. 666) executed when the game state command is received (see S4302 in FIG. 666), the normal symbol low probability state (normal state, second probability variable The value is cleared (set) to 0 when it is determined that a command indicating that the state has been set has been received.

The probability variation limit flag 223o is a flag for indicating that the probability variation limit has been reached, and in the state command processing (see S4212 in FIG. 665) executed in the command determination processing (see 4111 in FIG. 664), the limit-related In the limit information update process (see S4304 in FIG. 667) that is executed when a command is received, it is set to ON when a probability variation limit reach command for indicating that the probability variation limit has been reached is received.

The time saving limit flag 223p is a flag for indicating that the time saving limit has been reached, and in the state command processing (see S4212 in FIG. 665) executed in the command determination processing (see 4111 in FIG. 664), limit related In the limit information update process (see S4304 in FIG. 667) executed when the command is received, it is set to ON when the time saving limit reach command for indicating that the time saving limit has been reached is received.

The specific variation time counter 223q is a counter for measuring the variation time of the big winning variation when the big winning variation is executed as a special symbol variation (secondary special symbol variation) other than the special symbol variation that is mainly executed. , It is referred to when determining the remaining variation time of the secondary special symbol variation.

In this specific variation time counter 223q, the first special symbol variation jackpot variation is executed in the gaming state (first probability variation state, time saving state, special mode normal state) in which the second special symbol variation is mainly performed. If so, the variation time corresponding to the big hit variation of the first special symbol variation is set (see S5204 in FIG. 674). Then, in the liquid crystal effect execution management process (see S4110 in FIG. 676), the counter value is updated (see S5402 in FIG. 676), and the effect mode corresponding to the remaining variation time indicated by the updated counter value is set (see FIG. 676). See S5404 and S5406 of 676).

The notified stock number counter 223r is a counter for measuring the already notified stock notification number in the stock notification effect (see FIG. 597(a)). In the "RUSH mode", which is a performance mode in which the value of the residual probability variation counter 223m is not notified to the player, the performance mode of the stock notification performance set when the variation performance corresponding to the second special symbol variation is executed is determined. It is referred to when doing so (S5308 in FIG. 675).

The notification upper limit flag 223s is a flag for determining the state in which the stock notification number corresponding to the value of the residual probability variation number counter 223m has been notified in the stock notification effect. In the "RUSH mode", which is an effect mode in which the value of the number counter 223m is not notified to the player, it is set to ON when the stock notification number corresponding to the value of the remaining probability variable number counter 223m is notified by the stock notification effect (Fig. 675 S5312). When the notification upper limit flag 223s is set to ON, the stock notification number cannot be added and displayed by the stock notification effect any more, so the process for executing the stock notification effect is skipped. (S5305 in FIG. 675: Yes).

The small winning number counter 223t is a counter for measuring the number of small winning games executed in a state where "revenge mode" is set as the production mode, and determines that the ending command of the small winning game has been received. If (S5003 of FIG. 672: Yes), and if it is determined that the effect mode is "revenge mode" (S5005 of FIG. 672: Yes), the value of the counter is incremented by 1 (S5006 of FIG. 672 ).

Then, the value of the counter is referred to when determining whether or not to shift the production mode from the "revenge mode" to the "challenge mode" (see S5008 in FIG. 672). In addition, the value of the small hit number counter 223t is cleared to 0 when the big hit is won or when the production mode is shifted from the "revenge mode" to another production mode.

The time saving counter 223u is a counter for measuring the number of time saving times when the time saving state is set as the gaming state (the number of special symbol fluctuations until the time saving end condition is satisfied), command determination processing (4111 in FIG. 664 (see S4214 in FIG. 669) in the time saving related process executed in (see S4214 in FIG. 669), when it is determined that the production mode is "EXTRA (EXTRA mode)", the value based on the received information (remaining time saving information) Updated. Then, it is referred to when determining the effect mode of the EXTRA mode (see S4704 in FIG. 669).

The other memory area 223z is provided as an area for storing data other than the above data, and is an area for temporarily storing other counter values and the like used by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113. FIG.

Next, the electrical configuration of the display control device 114 according to the thirty-fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 625 to 630. FIG. FIG. 625 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the display control device 114. As shown in FIG. The display control device 114 includes an MPU 231, a work RAM 233, a character ROM 234, a resident video RAM 235, a normal video RAM 236, an image controller 237, an input port 238, an output port 239, and bus lines 240 and 241. have.

The output side of the sound lamp control device 113 is connected to the input side of the input port 238 , and the MPU 231 , work RAM 233 , character ROM 234 and image controller 237 are connected to the output side of the input port 238 via the bus line 240 . . A resident video RAM 235 and a normal video RAM 236 are connected to the image controller 237 , and an output port 239 is connected via a bus line 241 . A third pattern display device 81 is connected to the output side of the output port 239 .

Even if the pachinko machine 10 is a different model with a different lottery probability of a special symbol jackpot or a different number of prize balls paid out for one special symbol jackpot, the symbols displayed by the third symbol display device 81 are different. Since there are models with exactly the same specifications, the display control device 114 is made a common component to reduce costs.

The MPU 231, character ROM 234, image controller 237, resident video RAM 235, and normal video RAM 236 will be described first, and then the work RAM 233 will be described below.

First, the MPU 231 controls the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 based on the display variation pattern command output from the audio ramp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command of the main control device 110 . The MPU 231 incorporates an instruction pointer 231a, reads and fetches the instruction code stored at the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a, and executes various processes according to the instruction code. The MPU 231 is designed to be reset by the power supply 115 immediately after the power is turned on (including power recovery from a power failure; the same shall apply hereinafter). is automatically set to “0000H” by the hardware of the MPU 231 . Each time an instruction code is fetched, the value of the instruction pointer 231a is incremented by one. When the MPU 231 executes an instruction pointer setting instruction, the value of the pointer indicated by the setting instruction is set in the instruction pointer 231a.

Although details will be described later, in this embodiment, the control program executed by the MPU 231 and various fixed value data used in the control program are stored in a dedicated program ROM as in conventional game machines. The data of the image to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 is stored in the character ROM 234 provided for storing the data.

Although the details will be described later, the character ROM 234 is composed of a NAND flash memory 234a capable of increasing the capacity with a small area. As a result, not only image data but also control programs and the like can be sufficiently stored. If the control program and the like are stored in the character ROM 234, there is no need to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing the control program and the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and an increase in failure rate due to an increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

On the other hand, the NAND flash memory generally has a problem that the read speed becomes slow especially when performing random access. For example, when reading data continuously arranged in a plurality of pages, the data of the second and subsequent pages can be read at high speed. It takes a long time before the data is output. Also, when reading discontinuous data, a long time is required each time the data is read. As described above, since the NAND flash memory has a slow read speed, if the MPU 231 is configured to directly read the control program from the character ROM 234 and execute various processes, it takes time to read the instructions that make up the control program. However, even if a high-performance processor is used as the MPU 231, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may deteriorate.

Therefore, in this embodiment, when the system reset of the MPU 231 is released, first, the control program stored in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234 is transferred to the work RAM 233 provided for temporary storage of various data. to store. The MPU 231 then executes various processes according to the control program stored in the work RAM 233 . The work RAM 233 is composed of a DRAM (Dynamic RAM), as will be described later, and reads and writes data at high speed. Therefore, the MPU 231 can read instructions constituting the control program without delay. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and the third pattern display device 81 can be used to easily execute diversified and complicated effects.

The character ROM 234 is a memory that stores control programs executed by the MPU 231 and image data displayed on the third pattern display device 81 , and is connected to the MPU 231 via a bus line 240 . The MPU 231 directly accesses the character ROM 234 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, and transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the character ROM 234 to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. An image controller 237 is also connected to the bus line 240, and the image controller 237 transfers image data stored in a character storage area 234a2 of the character ROM 234 to a resident video RAM 235, which is connected to the image controller 237. Transfer to the normal video RAM 236 .

The character ROM 234 is constructed by modularizing a NAND flash memory 234a, a ROM controller 234b, a buffer RAM 234c, and a NOR ROM 234d.

The NAND type flash memory 234a is a non-volatile memory provided as a main storage unit in the character ROM 234, and stores most of the control program executed by the MPU 231 and fixed value data for driving the third symbol display device 81. It has at least a second program storage area 234a1 for storage and a character storage area 234a2 for storing data of an image (such as a character) to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. FIG.

Here, the NAND type flash memory has the characteristic that a large storage capacity can be obtained in a small area, and the capacity of the character ROM 234 can be easily increased. Thus, in this pachinko machine, by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a capacity of, for example, 2 gigabytes, many images can be stored in the character storage area 234a2 as images to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. can. Therefore, the images displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be diversified and complicated in order to increase the interest of the player.

In addition, the NAND flash memory 234a can store control programs and fixed value data in the second program storage area 234a1 while storing a large amount of image data in the character storage area 234a2. In this way, the control program and fixed value data are provided for storing the data of the image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 without providing and storing a dedicated program ROM as in the conventional game machine. Since the characters can be stored in the character ROM 234, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and an increase in the failure rate due to an increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

The ROM controller 234b is a controller for controlling the operation of the character ROM 234. For example, based on the address transmitted from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, the corresponding data is retrieved from the NAND flash memory 234a or the like. is read out and output to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240 .

Here, the NAND type flash memory 234a, due to its nature, generates a relatively large number of error bits (bits in which erroneous data is written) when writing data, and generates defective data blocks into which data cannot be written. or Therefore, the ROM controller 234b applies known error correction to the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a, and avoids bad data blocks when reading and writing data to the NAND flash memory 234a. data address translation.

The ROM controller 234b corrects errors in the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a that contains error bits. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the MPU 231 from performing processing and the image controller 237 from generating various images.

In addition, the ROM controller 234b analyzes the defective data blocks of the NAND flash memory 234a and avoids access to the defective data blocks. Access to the character ROM 234 can be easily performed without considering the address position of the block. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, it is possible to prevent the access control to the character ROM 234 from becoming complicated.

The buffer RAM 234c is a memory used as a buffer for temporarily storing data read from the NAND flash memory 234a. When an address allocated to the character ROM 234 is designated from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, the ROM controller 234b reads one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) containing data corresponding to the designated address. is set in the buffer RAM 234c. If not set, one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) of data including the data corresponding to the specified address is read from the NAND flash memory 234a (or NOR ROM 234d) and temporarily set in the buffer RAM 234c. do. Then, the ROM controller 234 b outputs the data corresponding to the designated address to the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 via the bus line 240 after performing known error correction processing.

The buffer RAM 234c is composed of two banks, and one page of data in the NAND flash memory 234a can be set in each bank. As a result, the ROM controller 234b, for example, outputs the data of the NAND flash memory 234a to the outside by using the other bank while data is set in one bank, or outputs the data specified by the MPU 231 or the image controller 237. One page of data including the data corresponding to the specified address is transferred from the NAND flash memory 234a to one bank and set, and the data corresponding to the address specified by the MPU 231 or image controller 237 is transferred to the other bank. The processing of reading from the bank and outputting to the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 can be processed in parallel. Therefore, responsiveness in reading the character ROM 234 can be improved.

The NOR-type ROM 234d is a non-volatile memory provided as a sub-storage unit in the character ROM 234, and is intended to complement the NAND-type flash memory 234a. ). Among the control programs stored in the character ROM 234, the NOR-type ROM 234d stores programs that are not stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND-type flash memory 234a. At least a first program storage area 234d1 is provided for storing a portion of the boot program to be executed.

The boot program is a control program for activating the display control device 114 so that various controls on the third pattern display device 81 can be executed, and the MPU 231 first executes this boot program after releasing the system reset. As a result, the display control device 114 can be put into a state in which various controls can be executed. The first program storage area 234d1 stores the boot program within the capacity of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c (that is, one page of the NAND flash memory 234a), which should be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. A predetermined number of instructions (for example, if the capacity of one page is 2 kilobytes, instructions for 1024 words (1 word=2 bytes)) are stored. The number of instructions of the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 only needs to be within the capacity of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. There may be.

When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the value of the instruction pointer 231a to "0000H" by hardware and instructs the bus line 240 to specify the address "0000H" indicated by the instruction pointer 231a. It is configured. On the other hand, when the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address "0000H" is specified on the bus line 240, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d is transferred to one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. , and outputs the corresponding data (instruction code) to the MPU 231 .

When the MPU 231 fetches the instruction code received from the character ROM 234, it executes various processes according to the fetched instruction code, adds 1 to the instruction pointer 231a, and transfers the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. to specify. Then, the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234, while the address specified by the bus line 240 is the address indicating the program stored in the NOR ROM 234d, selects the program previously set in the buffer RAM 234c from the NOR ROM 234d. , the instruction code of the corresponding address is read from the buffer RAM 234 c and output to the MPU 231 .

Here, in this embodiment, instead of storing all the control programs in the NAND flash memory 234a, a predetermined number of instructions from the boot program to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NOR ROM 234d. The reason for storing in is as follows. That is, as described above, the NAND flash memory 234a is unique to the NAND flash memory in that it takes a long time to read out the data of the first page after the address is specified until the data is output. There's a problem.

When all the control programs are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 in order to fetch the instruction code that the MPU 231 should execute first after the system reset is released. If so, the character ROM 234 must read one page of data including the data (instruction code) corresponding to the address "0000H" from the NAND flash memory 234a and set it in the buffer RAM 234c. Due to the nature of the NAND-type flash memory 234a, it takes a long time to read and set the data in the buffer RAM 234c. You spend a lot of time waiting to receive your code. Therefore, the time taken to start the MPU 231 becomes longer, and as a result, there arises a problem that the control of the third pattern display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

On the other hand, since the NOR type ROM is a memory from which data can be read at high speed, a predetermined number of instructions from the boot program to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NOR type ROM 234d. Thus, when the address "0000H" is designated from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 immediately stores the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d into the buffer RAM 234c. , and the corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231 . Therefore, the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" in a short time after specifying the address "0000H", and the MPU 231 can be activated in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the control of the third pattern display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately.

The boot program is a control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, that is, a control program other than the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d. , fixed value data (for example, a display data table, a transfer data table, etc., which will be described later) used in the control program are stored in the program storage area of the work RAM 233 by a predetermined amount (for example, the capacity of one page of the NAND flash memory 234a). 233a and the data table storage area 233b. The MPU 231 first sets the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 according to the boot program read from the first program storage area 234d1 after the system reset is released. While using a bank different from the bank of the buffer RAM 234c that is stored, a predetermined amount is transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a.

Here, since the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 has a capacity corresponding to one bank of the buffer RAM 234c, as described above, the address of the internal bus is designated as "0000H". When the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 is set in the buffer RAM 234c in response to this, the boot program is set only in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. Therefore, when transferring the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a according to the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1, the first program set in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c is transferred to the program storage area 233a. The transfer process can be performed using the other bank while leaving the boot program in storage area 234d1. Therefore, after the transfer process, it is unnecessary to set the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 again in the buffer RAM 234c, so that the time required for the boot process can be shortened.

When the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 transfers a predetermined amount of the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a, the command pointer 231a is transferred to the program storage area 233a. It is programmed to be set to a first predetermined address. As a result, when the MPU 231 transfers a predetermined amount of the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a after the system reset is released, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the first predetermined number in the program storage area 233a. Set to a street address.

Therefore, when a predetermined amount of the control programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 are stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 reads out the control programs stored in the program storage area 233a, Various processing can be executed. That is, the MPU 231 does not read the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 and fetch the instruction, but rather reads the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a and fetches the instruction. and execute various processes. As will be described later, since the work RAM 233 is composed of a DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even if most of the control program is stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, which has a slow read speed, the MPU 231 can fetch instructions at high speed and execute processing for those instructions.

Here, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 includes the remaining boot program not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. On the other hand, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 is transferred to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 by a predetermined amount from the second program storage area 234a1. The instruction pointer 231a is programmed to be included, and the start address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a is set as the first predetermined address.

As a result, the MPU 231 transfers a predetermined amount of the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a by the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1. Execute the rest of the boot program contained in the control program.

In this remaining boot program, the remaining control programs that have not been transferred to the program storage area 233a and fixed value data (for example, a display data table, a transfer data table, etc., which will be described later) used in the control programs are all stored in the second program. A process of transferring a predetermined amount from the area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b is executed. Also, at the end of the boot program, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address in the program storage area 233a. Specifically, the initialization process (see S6002 in FIG. 677) executed after the boot process (see S6001 in FIG. 677) by the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a as the second predetermined address. Set the start address of the program corresponding to .

By executing the remaining boot program, the MPU 231 transfers all the control programs and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b. Then, when the boot program is executed by the MPU 231 to the end, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address, and thereafter the MPU 231 is transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. Various processes are executed using the control program.

Therefore, even if most of the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the control program is transferred to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 after the system reset is released. Thus, the MPU 231 can read the control program from the work RAM configured by the DRAM with high read speed and perform various controls. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and the third pattern display device 81 can be used to easily execute diversified and complicated effects.

Further, as described above, instead of storing all the boot programs in the NOR type ROM 234d, a predetermined number of instructions are stored from the first instruction to be processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released, and the rest of the boot programs are Even if it is stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start up the MPU 231 in a short time simply by adding a NOR type ROM 234d with a very small capacity, so that an increase in the cost of the character ROM 234 due to the shortening of the time can be suppressed. can be done.

The image controller 237 is a digital signal processor (DSP) that draws an image and causes the third pattern display device 81 to display the drawn image at a predetermined timing. The image controller 237 draws an image for one frame based on a drawing list (see FIG. 630) sent from the MPU 231, which will be described later, and stores the frame in one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c, which will be described later. The image drawn in the buffer is developed, and the image information for one frame previously developed in the other frame buffer is output to the third pattern display device 81 to display the image on the third pattern display device 81.例文帳に追加. The image controller 237 performs this one-frame image drawing process and one-frame image display process within the image display time of one frame on the third pattern display device 81 (20 milliseconds in this embodiment). parallel processing in

The image controller 237 transmits a vertical synchronization interrupt signal (hereinafter referred to as “V interrupt signal”) to the MPU 231 every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing processing for one frame is completed. Each time the MPU 231 detects this V interrupt signal, the MPU 231 executes V interrupt processing (see FIG. 679(b)) and instructs the image controller 237 to draw the image for the next one frame. In response to this instruction, the image controller 237 executes the drawing process of the image for the next one frame, and also executes the process of causing the third pattern display device 81 to display the image developed by the previous drawing.

In this manner, the MPU 231 executes the V interrupt process in response to the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 and issues a drawing instruction to the image controller 237. Therefore, the image controller 237 performs image drawing processing and display. An image drawing instruction can be received from the MPU 231 at each processing interval (20 milliseconds). Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive an instruction to draw the next image before the image drawing processing or display processing is completed. It is possible to prevent an image from being developed in accordance with a new drawing instruction in a frame buffer storing image information being displayed.

The image controller 237 also executes processing for transferring image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 and normal video RAM 236 based on transfer instructions from the MPU 231 and transfer data information included in the drawing list.

Image drawing is performed using the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 . That is, the image data required for drawing is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236 based on instructions from the MPU 231 before the drawing is performed.

Here, in general, a NAND flash memory facilitates increasing the capacity of a ROM, but has a slower read speed than other ROMs (mask ROM, EEPROM, etc.). On the other hand, in the display control device 114, the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to transfer part of the image data stored in the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on. is configured to As will be described later, the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 is controlled so as to be resident without being overwritten.

Thus, after the transfer of the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is completed after the power is turned on, the image is drawn by the image controller 237 while using the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235. can be processed. Therefore, if the image data used for drawing processing is resident in the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a, which has a slow read speed, when drawing the image. , the time required for reading the image can be omitted, and the image can be drawn immediately and the drawn image can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 .

In particular, image data of frequently displayed images and image data of images to be displayed immediately after display is determined by main controller 110 or display controller 114 are permanently resident in resident video RAM 235. Even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a, it is possible to maintain high responsiveness until some image is displayed on the third pattern display device 81. FIG.

Further, when the display control device 114 draws an image using non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235, before the drawing is performed, the display control device 114 stores necessary data for drawing from the character ROM 234 in the normal video RAM 236. The MPU 231 is configured to instruct the image controller 237 to transfer the image data. As will be described later, the image data transferred to the normal-use video RAM 236 may be deleted by overwriting after being used for image drawing. Since it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 composed of , and the time required for reading the data can be saved, the image can be drawn immediately and the drawn image can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. can.

Further, by storing the image data in the normal video RAM 236 as well, there is no need to keep all the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235, so there is no need to prepare a large-capacity resident video RAM 235. FIG. Therefore, an increase in cost due to the provision of the resident video RAM 235 can be suppressed.

The image controller 237 has a buffer RAM 237a composed of an SRAM of 132 kilobytes, which is the capacity of one block of the NAND flash memory 234a.

The image data transfer instruction given to the image controller 237 by the MPU 231 based on the transfer instruction or the transfer data information of the drawing list includes the head address (storage source head address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data to be transferred is stored. Final address (storage source final address), transfer destination information (information indicating whether to transfer to resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236), and top of transfer destination (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) Contains an address. Note that the data size of the image data to be transferred may be included instead of the storage source final address.

The image controller 237 reads out one block of data from a predetermined address in the character ROM 234 according to various information of this transfer instruction, temporarily stores it in the buffer RAM 237a, and stores it in the buffer RAM 237a when the resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236 is not in use. , is transferred to the resident RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 . Then, the processing is repeatedly executed until all the image data stored in the storage source start address to the storage source end address indicated by the transfer instruction are transferred.

As a result, the image data read out from the character ROM 234 over time is temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a, and then the image data is transferred from the buffer RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236 in a short time. can be done. Therefore, while the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236, the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is prevented from being occupied for a long time by transferring the image data. be able to. Therefore, since the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are occupied by the transfer of image data, these video RAMs 235 and 236 cannot be used for image drawing processing. , it is possible to prevent the display on the third pattern display device 81 from being too late.

In addition, since image data is transferred from the buffer RAM 234c to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 by the image controller 237, the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are used for image drawing processing and third symbol display. It is possible to easily determine the period during which the display processing on the device 81 is not used, and to simplify the processing.

The resident video RAM 235 is used so that the image data transferred from the character ROM 234 can be retained while the power is turned on without being overwritten. 235e and an error message image area 235f are provided, and at least a power-on variation image area 235b and a third pattern area 235d are provided.

The power-on main image area 235a is a power-on main image to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 after the power is turned on until all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is stored. This is an area for storing corresponding data. In the power-on variation image area 235b, a game is started by the player while the main image at power-on is being displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the first ball entrance 64b1 and the first right ball entrance 64b1 are displayed. Stores image data corresponding to a power-on varying image for displaying the lottery result performed by the main controller 110 by a varying effect when the ball entering the opening 6 or the second ball entrance 640 is detected. area.

The MPU 231 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on varying image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a from the character ROM 234 when power supply from the power supply unit 251 is started. A transfer instruction is transmitted to the controller 237 (see S6003 and S6004 in FIG. 677).

Here, with reference to FIG. 626, the power-on variation image will be described. FIG. 626 shows a power-on image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while the image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is being transferred from the character ROM 234 immediately after the display control device 114 is powered on. It is an explanatory view explaining a time image.

Immediately after the power is turned on, the display control device 114 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on varying image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on varying image area 235b. Subsequently, the remaining image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 . While the remaining image data is being transferred, the display control device 114 uses the image data previously stored in the power-on main image area 235a to display the power-on main image shown in FIG. 626(a). The image is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 .

At this time, when receiving the display variation pattern command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command from the main controller 110, which is an instruction command to start variation, the display control device 114 executes the command shown in FIG. 626(b). As shown in FIG. 626( c ), on the display screen of the main image at power-on, a variation image at power-on with a “○” pattern at the lower right position of the screen, and a “○” at power-on as shown in FIG. A power-on fluctuation image of an "x" pattern is alternately and repeatedly displayed at the same position as the pattern during the fluctuation period. Then, based on the variation pattern command and the stop type command from the main controller 110, the lottery performed by the main controller 110 is selected from the display variation pattern command and the display stop type command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113. Judging the result, if it is a "special symbol big hit", the image shown in FIG. The image shown is displayed for a certain period of time after the stop of the variable effect.

The MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to use the image data stored in the power-on main image area 235a until all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235. Instructs to draw the main image when the power is turned on. As a result, while the rest of the image data to be resident is being transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player or the person involved in the hall can confirm the power-on main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. can. Therefore, the display control device 114 takes time to transfer the remaining image data to be resident from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 while displaying the main image on the third pattern display device 81 when the power is turned on. be able to. Also, since the player or the like can recognize that some processing is being performed while the main image is being displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, the remaining image to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is displayed. To wait until the transfer of image data to the resident video RAM 235 is completed without worrying whether the operation is stopped until the data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235.例文帳に追加can be done.

Also, in an operation check at a factory or the like during manufacturing, the main image is immediately displayed on the third pattern display device 81 when the power is turned on. Furthermore, by using the NAND type flash memory 234a with a slow read speed for the character ROM 234, it is possible to suppress deterioration in the efficiency of the operation check.

Also, when the power is turned on, while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the player starts the game, and the first ball entrance 64b1, the right first ball entrance 64b2, or the second ball entrance 64b2 is displayed. When the ball hit is detected at 640, the image data corresponding to the power-on variation image resident in the power-on variation image area 235b is used to draw the power-on variation image, as shown in FIGS. The MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to alternately display the images shown in (c) on the third pattern display device 81 . As a result, a simple variation effect can be performed using the power-on variation image. Therefore, even while the main image is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 when the power is turned on, the player can confirm that the lottery has been surely performed by the simple variation performance.

Further, when the power-on main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation effect image is already resident in the power-on fluctuation image area 235b. When a ball is detected at the first ball entrance 64b1, the right first ball entrance 64b2, or the second ball entrance 640 while the main image is being displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the corresponding It is possible to immediately display the variation performance to be performed on the third pattern display device 81.例文帳に追加

Returning to FIG. 625, the description continues. The back image area 235c is an area for storing image data corresponding to the back image displayed on the third pattern display device 81. FIG. Here, with reference to FIG. 627, the rear image and the range of the rear image stored in the rear image area 235c among the rear images will be described. FIG. 627 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the four types of back images and the range of the back images stored in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 for each back image. FIG. 627(b) shows the back faces B to D corresponding to the "forest stage", "river stage" and "empty stage", respectively, for the back face A corresponding to the "town stage". . Although detailed description is omitted, this embodiment also has a rear image (back E) corresponding to the "island stage" in addition to the various stages described above.

As shown in FIG. 627, the character ROM 234 prepares back images corresponding to the respective back images A to D, which are longer in the horizontal direction than the display area displayed on the third pattern display device 81 . The image controller 237 draws the image so that the rear image is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 while scrolling the image horizontally from left to right.

The images prepared for each back surface A to D (hereinafter referred to as "scrolling images") are configured such that the back images are continuous at positions a and c. The image between position c and position d and the image between position a and position a' are composed of images corresponding to the horizontal width of the display area, and the image between position c and position d is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 as the display area, and then the third pattern display device 81 displays an image between position a and position a' as the display area. The background image is scrolled in a continuous manner.

When it is decided to change the back surface type based on the back surface type selection table (not shown) and the stage is changed to "town stage", "forest stage", "river stage" or "sky stage", the MPU 231 , the image controller 237 is controlled so that the initial position of the display area is set between the position a and the position a' of the corresponding rear image, and the image at the initial position is displayed on the third pattern display device 81. . Then, as time elapses, the display area is moved from left to right with respect to the scroll image, and the image controller 237 is controlled so that the display area is sequentially displayed on the third pattern display device 81. When the area reaches the image between position c and position d, the image controller 237 is controlled so that the display area is again displayed on the third pattern display device 81 as an image from position a to position a'. Therefore, the third pattern display device 81 can display the images between the position a to the position c by scrolling repeatedly in a smooth manner so as to flow leftward.

On the other hand, the rear image (island stage) on the rear surface E is displayed in a predetermined order (for example, first display mode→second display mode→third display mode→fourth display mode→ . . . ) as time elapses. , and is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 . Specifically, on the back side E, an image of a mountain towering over an island, an image of a sandy beach at the foot of the mountain, and an image of the sea surrounding the island are displayed as the third pattern in a state where the displayed positions are fixed. It is displayed on the display device 81 . On the other hand, an image of the sky that spreads over the mountains changes its color tone over time.

When the stage is changed to the “island stage”, an orange sky image (first display mode) showing morning glow is displayed as the initial back image of the back surface E. FIG. As time elapses, the color tone of the sky gradually changes from orange to vivid blue, and after a predetermined time has elapsed, a vivid blue sky image (second display mode) indicating daytime is displayed. Next, as time elapses, the color tone of the sky gradually changes from bright blue to black, and after a predetermined time has elapsed, a black sky image (third display mode) indicating night is displayed. After that, an image of the sky (fourth display mode) is displayed in which the color tone of the sky gradually starts to whiten from black with the passage of time. Then, after a predetermined period of time has elapsed, the sky image in the first display mode (the sky image with orange color tone) is restored, and the rear image is displayed again on the third pattern display device 81 in a predetermined order.

Next, for each rear image, the range of the rear image stored in the rear image area 235c will be described. As shown in FIG. 627(a), the rear surface A corresponding to the street stage, which is the initial stage, is stored in the rear surface of the resident video RAM 235 in the entire range of the rear surface A, that is, all the image data corresponding to positions a to d. It is stored in the image area 235c. Usually, the game is often played without changing the stage while the initial stage "town stage" is displayed. By keeping all of them resident in the back image area 235c, the number of data accesses to the character ROM 234 can be reduced. Therefore, the processing load on the display control device 114 can be reduced.

On the other hand, the back surface B corresponding to the "forest stage", the back surface C corresponding to the "river stage", and the back surface D corresponding to the "sky stage" are shown in FIG. That is, only the image data corresponding to the image between position a and position b is stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. FIG. Further, for the back E corresponding to the island stage, the image data corresponding to the back image (the back image whose color tone gradually changes) between the predetermined background images (the first display mode and the second display mode) is It is stored in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 and made resident during the start-up process after the input.

Here, in order to immediately change the rear image, it is ideal to keep the entire range of image data for all rear images resident in the resident video RAM 235 . As such, a very large capacity RAM must be used, which may lead to an increase in cost.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10, the initial position of the rear image displayed first when the stage is changed is set to the range from position a to position a' (or the first display mode to 2nd display mode), and the image between position a and position b including the initial position (or the image in the range between the 1st display mode and the 2nd display mode for the back face E) ) is stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, even if the character ROM 234 is composed of a NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the lottery at the start of fluctuation When it is decided to change the stage, by using the image data resident in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, the initial positions of the back BD are immediately displayed on the third pattern display device 81. In addition, it is possible to scroll display or display while changing the color tone as time elapses. In addition, since only image data corresponding to a partial range of images are stored for the back faces B to D, an increase in storage capacity of the resident video RAM 235 can be suppressed, and an increase in cost can be suppressed.

In addition, after the image of the initial position is displayed on the back faces B to D, the image data resident in the back face image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 is used to turn the range from position a to position b from left to right. The range from position a to position b is set so that the image data corresponding to the image from position b' to position d can be completely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal RAM 236 while scrolling. As a result, the image data from position b' to position d can be transferred to the normal video RAM 236 while the range from position a to position b is being scrolled. After scrolling the range from position a to position b by using the image data corresponding to the rear image stored in the normal video RAM 236 without delay, the range from position b' to position d is scrolled to the third position. It can be displayed on the pattern display device 81 .

Similarly, after the image of the initial position is displayed on the back face E, the image data stored in the back face image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 is used to display images in the first to second display modes. During this period, the image data of the images corresponding to the second display mode to the third display mode and the third display mode to the fourth display mode can be completely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal RAM 236. to the second display mode range is set. As a result, the image data corresponding to the images in the second to third display modes and the third to fourth display modes are normally displayed while the images in the first to second display modes are being displayed. Since the data can be transferred to the video RAM 236, after displaying the images in the first to second display modes using the image data resident in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, the images are stored in the normal video RAM 236 without delay. Using the image data corresponding to the rear image thus obtained, the images of the second display mode to the third display mode and the third display mode to the fourth display mode are sequentially displayed on the third pattern display device 81 as time elapses. be able to.

Image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 for the rear faces B to E is stored in a rear image dedicated sub-area provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 (see FIG. 625). As a result, the rear image data stored in the sub-area dedicated to the rear image is not overwritten by other image data, so that the rear image can be reliably displayed.

In addition, in the rear faces B to D, the image data stored in the rear face image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 and the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 correspond to images between position b' and position b. image data is stored redundantly. Under the control of the image controller 237 by the MPU 231, the image up to the position b is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 using the image data stored in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, and then the normal video image is displayed. By displaying the image from the position b' on the third pattern display device 81 using the image data stored in the RAM 236, the back image is scrolled and displayed in a smooth connection on the third pattern display device 81. ing.

Further, the MPU 231 uses the image data in the normal video RAM 236 to control the image controller 237 so that the image between position c and position d is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 as a display area. The MPU 231 uses the image data in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 to control the image controller 237 so that the image between position a and position a' is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 as the display area. do. As a result, the third pattern display device 81 can repeatedly scroll and display the images between the positions a to c in a smooth manner so as to flow toward the left.

Returning to FIG. 625, the description continues. The third symbol area 235d is an area for permanently storing the third symbol used in the variable effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81. FIG. That is, in the third pattern area 235d, image data corresponding to the above-mentioned 10 types of main patterns with numbers "0" to "9" as the third patterns are resident. As a result, when the third pattern display device 81 performs a variable effect, it is not necessary to read image data from the character ROM 234 one by one. It is possible to quickly start a variable production. Therefore, after the ball enters the first ball entrance 64b1, the first right ball entrance 64b2, or the second ball entrance 640, even if the first symbol display device 37 starts the variable effect, Regardless, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a state in which the variable effect is not immediately started in the third symbol display device 81 .

In addition, in the third design area 235d, as the main designs to which the numbers "0" to "9" are not attached, the main design consisting of the rear design such as a wooden box, and the rear design and characters such as planes, wrapping cloths, helmets, etc. The image data corresponding to the main pattern consisting of the accessory pattern which imitates is also resident. These image data are used for a demonstration effect displayed on the third pattern display device 81 when the next variable effect associated with the starting prize is not started even after a predetermined time has passed since one variable effect was stopped. be done. Thus, when the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the main symbol with no number is displayed as the third symbol in the demonstration effect. Therefore, the player can easily recognize that the pachinko machine 10 is in the demonstration state by visually recognizing the main symbols with no numbers from the display image of the third symbol display device 81.例文帳に追加

The character design area 235e is an area for storing image data corresponding to character designs used in various effects displayed on the third design display device 81. FIG. In this pachinko machine 10, various characters such as "boy", "old man", and "girl" are displayed according to various effects, and data corresponding to these are displayed in the character pattern area 235e. By being resident, when the display control device 114 changes the character design based on the content of the command received from the sound lamp control device 113, it does not newly read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, but stores the resident image data. The image controller 237 can draw a predetermined image by reading the image data preliminarily resident in the character design area 235e of the video RAM 235. FIG. This eliminates the need to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, so even if the character ROM 234 uses the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the character design can be changed immediately.

The error message image area 235f is an area for storing image data corresponding to an error message displayed when an error occurs in the pachinko machine 10. FIG. In the pachinko machine 10, for example, when vibration is detected by the sound ramp control device 113 from the output of a vibration sensor (not shown) attached to the back surface of the game board 13, the sound ramp control device 113 detects the occurrence of a vibration error. Notify the display controller 114 with an error command. Also, when the audio lamp control device 113 detects the occurrence of another error, the audio lamp control device 113 notifies the display control device 114 of the error occurrence and the error type by an error command. The display control device 114 is configured to display an error message corresponding to the received error on the third symbol display device 81 when an error command is received.

Here, the error message is required to be displayed almost simultaneously with the occurrence of the error from the standpoint of preventing fraud by the player and protecting the player against errors. In the pachinko machine 10, image data corresponding to various error messages are preliminarily resident in the error message image area 235f. By reading the image data previously resident in the image area 235f, the image controller 237 can immediately draw each error message image. As a result, it is not necessary to sequentially read the image data corresponding to the error message from the character ROM 234. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed is used as the character ROM 234, the corresponding error message is read after receiving the error command. It can be displayed immediately.

The normal video RAM 236 is used so that data is overwritten and updated as needed, and is provided with at least an image storage area 236a, a first frame buffer 236b and a second frame buffer 236c.

The image storage area 236a is an area for storing image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235, among the image data necessary for drawing the image to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. FIG. The image storage area 236a is divided into a plurality of sub-areas, and the type of image data to be stored in each sub-area is predetermined.

The MPU 231 extracts image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 and that is required for subsequent image drawing from the character ROM 234 in a sub area provided in the image storage area 236 a of the normal video RAM 236 . , instructs the image controller 237 to transfer the type of the image data to a predetermined sub-area for storing. As a result, the image controller 237 reads the image data instructed by the MPU 231 from the character ROM 234 and transfers the read image data to a specified sub-area of the image storage area 236a via the buffer RAM 237a.

The transfer instruction of the image data is performed by including transfer data information in a later-described drawing list in which the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to draw an image. As a result, the MPU 231 can issue an image drawing instruction and an image data transfer instruction simply by transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, thereby reducing the processing load.

The first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c are buffers for developing an image to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. FIG. The image controller 237 writes the one-frame image drawn according to the instruction from the MPU 231 to either one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c, thereby rendering the one-frame image to the frame buffer. While the image is developed and the image is developed in one of the frame buffers, the image information for one frame previously developed is read out from the other frame buffer, and sent to the third pattern display device 81 together with the drive signal. By transmitting the image information with the third pattern display device 81, a process for displaying the image for one frame is executed.

By providing two frame buffers, the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c, as described above, the image controller 237 can expand the one-frame image drawn in one of the frame buffers and simultaneously , the image of one frame developed earlier can be read from the other frame buffer, and the read image of one frame can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 .

A frame buffer for developing an image for one frame and a frame buffer for reading image information for one frame for displaying an image on the third pattern display device 81 are used for drawing processing of an image for one frame. The MPU 231 alternately designates either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c every 20 milliseconds.

That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for developing the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for developing the image of one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing process of the image of one frame is completed. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information of is read. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read out and displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. be.

After the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. be done. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read out and displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. be. After that, the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame are set to either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c every 20 milliseconds. By alternating designations, it is possible to continuously perform display processing of an image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while performing drawing processing for an image for one frame.

The work RAM 233 is a memory for storing control programs and fixed value data stored in the character ROM 234, and for temporarily storing work data and flags used when various control programs are executed by the MPU 231. Configured. The work RAM 233 includes a program storage area 233a, a data table storage area 233b, a simple image display flag 233c, a display data table buffer 233d, a transfer data table buffer 233e, a pointer 233f, a drawing list area 233g, a clock counter 233h, and a stored image data discrimination. It has at least a flag 233i, a drawing target buffer flag 233j, a background image change flag 233w, a background image determination flag 233x, a demonstration display flag 233y, and a fixed display flag 233z.

The program storage area 233a is an area for storing control programs executed by the MPU 231 . When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 reads the control program from the character ROM 234, transfers it to the work RAM 233, and stores it in the program storage area 233a. After storing all the control programs in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 thereafter executes various controls using the control programs stored in the program storage area 233a. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of a DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the display control device 114 can maintain high processing performance, and the third symbol display device 81 can be used to easily execute diversified and complicated effects.

The data table storage area 233b includes a display data table describing display contents to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 with the passage of time for one effect to be displayed based on a command from the main control device 110, and a display data table. This is an area for storing transfer data information of image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 among the image data used in one effect displayed by the table and a transfer data table defining transfer timing.

These data tables are normally stored as a type of fixed value data in the second program storage area 234a1 provided in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234, and according to the boot program executed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. , these data tables are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the work RAM 233 and stored in the data table storage area 233b. After all the data tables are stored in the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 controls the display of the third symbol display device 81 using the data tables stored in the data table storage area 233b. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of a DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when various data tables are stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and the third symbol display device 81 can be used to easily implement diversified and complicated effects.

Here, details of various data tables will be described. First, the display data table is prepared one by one for each effect mode of each effect displayed on the third pattern display device 81 based on a command from the main control device 110. For example, a variable effect, an opening effect, etc. , round effects, ending effects, and demonstration effects are provided.

The variation effect is an effect that is started in the third symbol display device 81 when a display variation pattern command from the sound lamp control device 113 is received. In addition, when the display variation pattern command is received, the display stop type command indicating the stop type of the variation effect is also received. For example, when a variable performance is started, if the stop type of the variable performance is off, the stop symbol indicating the failure is finally stopped and displayed, and the stop type of the variable performance is a jackpot A to a jackpot D. If so, the stop symbols indicating the respective jackpots are finally stopped and displayed. The player can recognize the jackpot type by visually recognizing the stop symbol in this variable effect, and can easily determine the game value to be given according to the jackpot type.

The opening performance is a performance for notifying the player that the pachinko machine 10 will shift to a special game state from now on and the large opening that is normally closed will be repeatedly opened, and the round performance will start from now on. This is an effect for informing the player of the number of rounds to be played. The ending effect is a effect for informing the player of the end of the special game state.

In addition, as described above, the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the next variable effect associated with the start winning does not start even after a predetermined time has elapsed since one variable effect stopped. The third pattern composed of the main patterns with no numerals '0' to '9' is stopped and displayed, and only the rear image changes. If the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the player and the persons involved in the hall can recognize that the pachinko machine 10 is not playing a game.

The data table storage area 233b stores one display data table each corresponding to an opening effect, a round effect, an ending effect, and a demonstration effect. In addition, if there are 32 variable performance patterns to be set, the variable display data table, which is a display data table for variable performance, is prepared with one table for one variable performance pattern, and a total of 32 tables.

Details of the display data table will now be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 628 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the variable display data table among the display data tables. The display data table should be displayed at that time in association with an address that represents the time (in this embodiment, 20 milliseconds) during which an image for one frame is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 as one unit. It defines in detail the content (drawing content) of an image for one frame.

The drawing contents specify the type of sprite for each sprite that is a display object that constitutes an image for one frame, and display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, and translucency according to the type of sprite. Rendering information for causing the third pattern display device 81 to render sprites, such as values, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information, is defined.

The sprite type is information for specifying the sprite to be displayed. The display position coordinates are information for specifying the coordinates on the third pattern display device 81 where the sprite should be displayed. The enlargement ratio is information for designating an enlargement ratio with respect to a standard display size preset for the sprite, and the size of the sprite to be displayed is specified according to the enlargement ratio. If the magnification is greater than 100%, the sprite will be displayed larger than the standard size, and if the magnification is less than 100%, the sprite will be displayed smaller than the standard size. Is displayed.

The rotation angle is information for specifying the rotation angle when rotating and displaying the sprite. The translucency value is for specifying the transparency of the entire sprite, and the higher the translucency value, the more the image displayed behind the sprite can be seen through. The α-blending information is information for specifying known α-blending coefficients used when performing superimposition processing with other sprites. Color information is information for designating the color tone of the sprite to be displayed. The filter designation information is information for designating an image filter to be applied to the sprite when rendering the designated sprite.

In the variable display data table, the drawing contents for one frame defined corresponding to each address are one rear image, nine third patterns (design 1, design 2, . Rendering information for each sprite, such as an effect that expresses the insertion of a character, a character used for various effects such as boy images and characters, is defined for each address. One or a plurality of information regarding effects and characters are defined according to the content to be displayed in the frame.

Here, the display position of the rear image is fixed to the entire screen of the third pattern display device 81, and the magnification ratio, rotation angle, translucency value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information are changed over time. Since it is fixed, the variable display data table defines only the back face type, which is information for specifying the back face image type. The type of back face is the back face A to E corresponding to the stage selected by the player (one of "town stage", "forest stage", "river stage", "sky stage", and "island stage"). Information specifying whether to display one of the back images or to display a back image different from the back images A to E is described. Further, when specifying to display a back image different from back faces A to E, the back face type also includes information specifying which back face image to display.

When the type of back face specifies that one of the back faces A to E is to be displayed, the MPU 231 specifies the back face image corresponding to the stage determined by lottery among the back faces A to E as a drawing target, In addition, the range of the rear image to be displayed for that frame is specified according to the lapse of time. On the other hand, when it is specified to display a rear image different from the rear faces A to E, the rear face image to be displayed is specified from the rear face type.

In the present embodiment, only the back surface type is specified as the drawing content of the back surface image in the display data table. may be defined as position information indicating whether the should be displayed. This position information may be, for example, information indicating the elapsed time since the rear image in the range corresponding to the initial position was displayed. In this case, the MPU 231 identifies the range of the back image to be displayed for that frame based on the elapsed time since the back image in the range corresponding to the initial position indicated by the position information was displayed.

Further, the position information may be information indicating the elapsed time since the drawing of the image based on this display data table (or the display of the third pattern display device 81) was started. In this case, the MPU 231 displays the range of the rear image to be displayed for that frame at the stage when the drawing of the image (or the display of the third pattern display device 81) is started based on the display database. It is specified based on the position of the back image and the elapsed time since the drawing of the image indicated by the position information (or the display of the third pattern display device 81) was started.

Furthermore, the position information is information indicating the elapsed time since the back image in the range corresponding to the initial position was displayed according to the back surface type, and the drawing of the image based on the display data table (or the third pattern display device 81 display) may indicate any of the information indicating the elapsed time since the start of the display, or along with the back surface type and position information, the type information of the position information (for example, the range corresponding to the initial position It is information indicating the elapsed time since the back image was displayed, or information indicating the elapsed time since the drawing of the image based on the display database (or the display of the third pattern display device 81) was started. (information indicating whether or not the back surface image is drawn) may be defined as the drawing content of the back image. Alternatively, the position information may be information indicating an address in which the range of the rear image to be displayed is stored instead of information indicating the elapsed time.

The third symbols (symbol 1, symbol 2, . . . ) describe symbol type offset information as symbol type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed. This offset information is information representing the difference between the numbers attached to the respective third symbols. Instead of directly specifying the type of the third symbol, the offset information is specified because the display of the third symbol in the variable effect is the stop symbol of the variable effect performed one before and the variable effect performed this time. This is because it changes according to the stop pattern, and in the pattern offset information from the start of the variation until the predetermined time elapses, the offset information from the stop pattern of the previous variation performance is described. As a result, the variable performance is started from the stop symbol in the previous variable performance.

On the other hand, after a predetermined time has passed since the start of the fluctuation, the offset from the stop pattern set according to the stop type command (stop type command for display) received from the main control device 110 via the sound lamp control device 113 Include information. As a result, the variable effect can be stopped with a stop pattern corresponding to the stop type specified by the main controller 110. - 特許庁

In addition, since each third symbol is assigned a unique number, the variable symbol in the previous variable performance or the stop symbol corresponding to the stop type specified by the main controller 110 can be selected as the third symbol. , and the offset information is represented by the difference between the numbers attached to the respective third symbols, the third symbols to be displayed can be easily identified from the offset information.

In addition, in the pattern offset information, the third pattern fluctuates at high speed for a predetermined time in which the offset information of the stop pattern of the variable performance performed immediately before is switched to the offset information of the stop pattern of the variable performance performed this time. It is set to be the displayed time. While the third pattern is being variably displayed at high speed, the third pattern is invisible to the player. By switching from the offset information to the offset information of the stop pattern of the variable performance being performed this time, even if the continuity of the numbers of the third pattern is interrupted, the player does not recognize the interruption of the continuity of the numbers. be able to.

"Start" information indicating the start of the data table is described at "0000H", which is the top address of the display data table. "End" information indicating the end of is described. Then, for each address between the address "0000H" in which the "Start" information is described and the address in which the "End" information is described, the drawing contents corresponding to the presentation mode to be defined in the display data table are displayed. is described.

The MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) or the like transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110, and displays the selected display data table. The data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and the pointer 233f is initialized. Each time drawing processing for one frame is completed, the pointer 233f is incremented by 1, and in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, based on the drawing content specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f, the next A drawing list (see FIG. 630), which will be described later, is created by specifying the image contents to be drawn. By transmitting this drawing list to the image controller 237, a drawing instruction for the image is given. As a result, as the pointer 233f is updated, the drawing contents are specified in the order specified in the display data table, so the image specified in the display data table is displayed on the third pattern display device 81.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, the display control device 114 responds to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) or the like transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. Instead of changing the program to be executed by the MPU 231, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d. .

Here, as in a conventional pachinko machine, if a program to be executed by the MPU 231 is started each time the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed, the effect image becomes more diverse. Therefore, the processing capacity of the display control device 114 is limited, and there is a risk that the diversification of controllable effect images will be limited. there were. On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed only by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d. A wide variety of effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 regardless of the processing capability of the control device 114 .

In this way, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each effect mode, a display data table buffer is set according to the effect mode to be displayed, and a drawing list is created frame by frame according to the set data table. The reason why it can be created is that the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined in advance in the pachinko machine 10 based on the result of the lottery performed based on the starting prize. On the other hand, in game machines other than pachinko machines, the display contents change on the spot based on the user's operation, so the display contents cannot be predicted. It is not possible to have a display data table corresponding to the mode of presentation. Thus, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each presentation mode, a display data table buffer is set according to the presentation mode to be displayed, and a drawing list is created for each frame according to the set data table. This configuration can be realized only when the pachinko machine 10 is configured to determine the performance mode to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 in advance based on the result of the lottery performed based on the starting prize.

Next, with reference to FIG. 629, details of the transfer data table will be described. FIG. 629 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a transfer data table. The transfer data table is prepared corresponding to the display data table prepared for each effect. Transfer data information for transferring image data not resident in the video RAM 235 for normal use from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a of the video RAM 236 for normal use and its transfer timing are defined.

If all the image data of the sprites used in the effects specified in the display data table are stored in the resident video RAM 235, no transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is prepared. As a result, an increase in capacity of the data table storage area 233b can be suppressed.

The transfer data table contains transfer data information of sprite image data (hereinafter referred to as "transfer target image data") to be transferred at the time indicated by the address specified in the display data table in correspondence with the address. (corresponding to addresses "0001H" and "0097H" in FIG. 629). Here, the transfer start timing of the transfer target image data is set so that the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a before the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. In the transfer data table, the transfer data information of the transfer target image data is defined in association with the address corresponding to the transfer start timing.

On the other hand, if there is no transfer target image data to start transferring at the time indicated by the address specified in the display data table, there is no transfer target image data to start transferring corresponding to that address. (corresponding to address “0002H” in FIG. 629).

The transfer data information includes the head address (storage source head address) and the end address (storage source end address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data to be transferred is stored, and the head address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236). is included.

Note that, similarly to the display data table, "Start" information indicating the start of the data table is described in "0000H", which is the top address of the transfer data table, and the end address of the transfer data table (in the example of FIG. 629, "02F0H") describes "End" information indicating the end of the data table. Then, for each address between the address "0000H" in which the "Start" information is described and the address in which the "End" information is described, the transfer data information of the transfer target image data to be defined in the transfer data table is described.

When the MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) or the like transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110, the display data table exists, the transfer data table is read from the data table storage area 233b and stored in a transfer data table buffer 233e of the work RAM 233, which will be described later. Then, each time the pointer 233f is updated, the drawing contents specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f are identified from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and a drawing list (see FIG. 630) to be described later is created. At the same time, from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the transfer data information of the image data of the predetermined sprite whose transfer is to be started at that time is acquired, and the transfer data information is added to the created drawing list. to add.

For example, in the example of FIG. 629, when the pointer 233f is "0001H" or "0097H", the MPU 231 creates the transfer data information specified for the address in the transfer data table based on the display data table. The drawing list is added, and the drawing list after the addition is transmitted to the image controller 237 . On the other hand, when the pointer 233f is "0002H", Null data is defined at the address "0002H" of the transfer data table. The drawing list is sent to the image controller 237 without adding transfer data information to the drawing list.

When transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 transfers the transfer target image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the processing to be performed.

Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a before the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred is specified for a predetermined address, by transferring the image data from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table, When drawing a predetermined sprite according to the display data table, image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 required for drawing the sprite can be stored in the image storage area 236a without fail. Using the image data stored in the image storage area 236a, a predetermined sprite can be drawn based on the display data table.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the image necessary for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236, so that the image can be displayed. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. - 特許庁Also, only the image data temporarily resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 by the description of the transfer data table.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10, the display control device 114 responds to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) or the like transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110, and displays the display data. When the table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Data can be reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing.

The transfer data table defines transfer data information so that image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to a sprite. As a result, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the processing related to the transfer can be easily performed. By controlling the transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 on a sprite-by-sprite basis, the transfer of image data can be controlled in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in the load on transfer.

The transfer data table has a data structure similar to that of the display data table, and is associated with an address defined in the display data table. Since the data information is defined, the image data is reliably stored in the normal video RAM 236 before the image data of the predetermined sprite is used based on the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d. As described above, since the timing of starting transfer can be instructed, even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, various effects images can be easily displayed on the third symbol display device 81. be able to.

The simple image display flag 233c indicates whether or not the third symbol display device 81 displays the power-on images (power-on main image and power-on fluctuation image) shown in FIGS. 626(a) to (c). flag to indicate This simple image display flag 233c is set after the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and power-on varying image is transferred to the power-on main image area 235a or power-on varying image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235. , is set to ON in the main process (see FIG. 677) executed by the MPU 231 (see S6005 in FIG. 677). Then, when all the resident object image data are stored in the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer processing of the image transfer processing, in order to display an image other than the power-on image on the third symbol display device 81, It is set to OFF (see S7605 in FIG. 689(b)).

This simple image display flag 233c is referenced in the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 each time the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 is detected (see S6301 in FIG. 679(b)). If the image display flag 233c is ON, the simple command determination process (see S6308 in FIG. 679(b)) and the simple display setting process (see S6308 in FIG. 679(b) S6309) is executed. On the other hand, when the simple image display flag 233c is off, command determination is performed so that various images are displayed according to commands transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on commands from the main control device 110 or the like. Processing (see FIGS. 680 to 685) and display setting processing (see FIGS. 686 to 688) are executed.

Further, the simple image display flag 233c is referenced in the transfer setting process executed by the MPU 231 during the V interrupt process (see S7501 in FIG. 689(a)), and when the simple image display flag 233c is on. Since there is resident object image data that is not stored in the resident video RAM 235, resident image transfer setting processing (see FIG. 689(b)) is executed to transfer the resident object image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. If the simple image display flag 233c is off, the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 690) is executed to transfer the image data required for the drawing process from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. FIG.

The display data table buffer 233d stores a display data table corresponding to an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in response to commands and the like transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on commands and the like from the main control device 110. It is a buffer for The MPU 231 determines the effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the command or the like transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113, and stores the display data table corresponding to the effect mode from the data table storage area 233b. It selects and stores the selected display data table in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, the MPU 231 increments the pointer 233f by 1, and based on the drawing contents defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the image controller 237 A later-described drawing list (see FIG. 630) is generated in which the content of the image drawing instruction for is described. As a result, the third symbol display device 81 displays an effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d.

While incrementing the pointer 233f by one, the MPU 231 adds an image to the image controller 237 for each frame based on the drawing contents specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. A drawing list (see FIG. 630), which will be described later, is generated in which the content of the drawing instruction is described. As a result, an effect corresponding to the display data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 .

The transfer data table buffer 233e transfers a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d according to a command or the like transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. is a buffer for storing When the display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 selects the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table from the data table storage area 233b, and transfers the selected transfer data table. Store in the data table buffer 233e. If all of the sprite image data used in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is stored in the resident video RAM 235, the transfer data table corresponding to that display data table is not prepared. Therefore, the MPU 231 clears the contents of the transfer data table buffer 233e by writing Null data indicating that there is no transfer target image data.

While incrementing the pointer 233f by one, the MPU 231 defines the transfer data information of the transfer target image data specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e. (that is, if Null data is not described), the transfer data information is added to a later-described rendering list (see FIG. 630) describing the contents of image rendering instructions to the image controller 237 generated for each frame. to add.

As a result, when the transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 transfers the transfer target image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the transfer process. Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a before the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Transfer data information of transfer target image data is defined for a predetermined address. Therefore, by transferring the image data from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information specified in this transfer data table, when drawing a predetermined sprite according to the display data table, the image data necessary for drawing the sprite can be obtained. Image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can always be stored in the image storage area 236a.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the image necessary for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236, so that the image can be displayed. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. - 特許庁Also, only the image data temporarily resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 by the description of the transfer data table.

The pointer 233f is an address at which transfer data information of corresponding drawing contents or transfer target image data should be obtained from the display data table and the transfer data table stored in the respective buffers of the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table buffer 233e. is for specifying The MPU 231 once initializes the pointer 233f to 0 when the display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, display setting processing for V interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when drawing processing for one frame of image is completed (see FIG. 679(b)). )), pointer update processing (see S7205 in FIG. 688) is executed, and the value of the pointer 233f is incremented by one.

Every time the pointer 233f is updated, the MPU 231 identifies the drawing content specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and stores the drawing content in the drawing list, which will be described later. (see FIG. 630), acquires the transfer data information of the image data of the predetermined sprite to be transferred at that time from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, and obtains the transfer data Add information to the created drawing list.

As a result, an effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. FIG. Therefore, the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be easily changed only by changing the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Therefore, regardless of the processing capability of the display control device 114, various effects can be displayed.

In addition, when the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e is stored, the sprite is displayed based on the transfer data table before the corresponding display data table starts drawing a predetermined sprite. Image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 used for drawing can be stored in the image storage area 236a without fail. As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the image necessary for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236, so that the image can be displayed. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. - 特許庁Also, only the image data temporarily resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 by the description of the transfer data table.

The drawing list area 233g is used by the image controller to draw an image for one frame generated based on the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e. This is an area for storing a drawing list that instructs 237.

Details of the draw list will now be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 630 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the drawing list. The drawing list is an instruction table for instructing the image controller 237 to draw an image for one frame, and as shown in FIG. Design 2, ...), Effect (Effect 1, Effect 2, ...), Character (Character 1, Character 2, ..., Retained ball pattern 1, Retained ball number pattern 2, ..., Error (pattern) describes detailed drawing information (detailed information) of the sprite for each sprite. The drawing list also describes transfer data information for causing the image controller 237 to transfer predetermined image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 .

The detailed drawing information (detailed information) of each sprite includes information indicating the type of RAM (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) in which the image data of the corresponding sprite (display object) is stored, and its type. The image controller 237 acquires the image data of the sprite from the memory area specified by the RAM type and address. The detailed drawing information (detailed information) includes display position coordinates, magnification, rotation angle, translucent value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information. A standard image generated from the image data of the sprite read from the video RAM is scaled according to the enlargement ratio, rotated according to the rotation angle, and translucent according to the translucency value. alpha blending information, compositing with other sprites, color tone correction according to color information, and filtering according to filter specification information. After that, an image obtained by performing various processes at the display position indicated by the display position coordinates is drawn. Then, the drawn image is developed by the image controller 237 in either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233j.

In the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 stores the drawing content defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f and the content of other images to be drawn (for example, the pending number of balls to be displayed). Image, warning image that notifies the occurrence of an error, etc.), generates detailed drawing information (detailed information) for all sprites used to draw the image for one frame, and provides the detailed information for each sprite. Create a draw list by sorting.

Here, among the detailed information of each sprite, the RAM type and address for storing the data of the sprite (display object) are the sprite type defined in the display data table or the sprite type specified from the contents of other images. Generated accordingly. That is, since the area of the resident video RAM 235 in which the image data of the sprite is stored or the sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed for each sprite, the MPU 231 can store the image data according to the sprite type. , the storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately specified, and such information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

In addition, the MPU 231 sets other information (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucent value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information) among the detailed information of each sprite as defined in the display data table. copy the information as is.

Further, in generating the drawing list, the MPU 231 rearranges the sprites to be arranged in the order of the sprites to be arranged in the front side from the sprites to be arranged in the rearmost side in the image for one frame, and provides detailed drawing information for each sprite. Describe (detailed information). That is, in the drawing list, the detailed information corresponding to the back image is described first, followed by the third pattern (pattern 1, pattern 2, . . . ), effect (effect 1, effect 2, . Detailed information corresponding to each sprite is described in the order of (character 1, character 2, . . . , reserved ball pattern 1, reserved ball pattern 2, .

The image controller 237 executes the drawing process of each sprite according to the order described in the drawing list, and overwrites the drawn sprite in the frame buffer to develop it. Therefore, in the one-frame image generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be arranged on the rearmost side, and the sprite drawn last can be arranged on the frontmost side.

In the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the MPU 231, when the transfer data information is described at the address indicated by the pointer 233f, transfers the transfer data information (character in which the transfer target image data is stored). The storage source start address and storage source end address in the ROM 234, and the storage destination start address of the sub-area provided in the image storage area 236a where the image data to be transferred is to be stored are added to the end of the drawing list. If the transfer data information is included in the drawing list, the image controller 237 draws an image from a predetermined area of the character ROM 234 (the area indicated by the storage source start address and the storage source end address) based on the transfer data information. The data is read out and transferred to a predetermined sub-area (storage destination address) provided in the image storage area 236 a of the normal video RAM 236 .

The clock counter 233h is a counter that counts the effect time of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. When one display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 sets time data indicating the effect time of the effect to be displayed based on the display data table. This time data is a value obtained by dividing the performance time by the image display time for one frame (20 milliseconds in this embodiment) on the third pattern display device 81 .

Then, based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing processing and display processing of one frame of image are completed, the MPU 231 executes V interrupt processing (FIG. 679(b)). )) is executed, the clock counter 233h is decremented by one (see S7207 in FIG. 686). As a result, when the value of the clock counter 233h becomes 0 or less, the MPU 231 judges that the presentation displayed by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d has ended, and performs the presentation at the end of the presentation. perform various operations to

The storage image data determination flag 233i is set to indicate whether image data corresponding to all sprites whose corresponding image data are not resident in the resident video RAM 235 are stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. It is a flag indicating a storage state indicating whether or not there is.

This stored image data determination flag 233i is generated by initial setting processing (see S6002 in FIG. 677) executed by the MPU 231 in the main processing when the power is turned on. The storage image data determination flag 233i generated here is set to "OFF" indicating that the storage status for all sprites is not stored in the image storage area 236a.

The storage image data determination flag 233i is updated when an instruction to transfer image data to be transferred corresponding to one sprite is set during normal image transfer setting processing (see FIG. 690) executed by the MPU 231. will be In this update, the storage state corresponding to one sprite for which the transfer instruction is set is set to "on" indicating that the corresponding image data is stored in the image storage area 236a. Also, image data of other sprites to be stored in the same sub-area of the image storage area 236a as that one sprite will always be in a non-stored state when the image data of one sprite is stored. Therefore, set the containment state corresponding to the other sprites to "off".

Also, when transferring the image data of a sprite whose image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, the MPU 231 refers to the stored image data determination flag 233i and determines the sprite to be transferred. It is determined whether image data has already been stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 (see S7713 in FIG. 690). Then, if the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is "OFF" and the corresponding image data is not stored in the image storage area 236a, an instruction to transfer the image data is set (see S7714 in FIG. 690). , causes the image controller 237 to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a. On the other hand, if the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is "on", the corresponding image data is already stored in the image storage area 236a, so the transfer processing of that image data is stopped. As a result, unnecessary transfer from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 can be suppressed, and the processing load on each unit of the display control device 114 and the traffic on the bus line 240 can be reduced. can.

The drawing target buffer flag 233j selects a frame buffer for developing an image drawn by the image controller 237 (hereinafter referred to as a "drawing target buffer") from among two frame buffers (the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c). ), and when the drawing object buffer flag 233j is 0, it designates the first frame buffer 236b as the drawing object buffer, and when it is 1, it designates the second frame buffer 236c. Then, the information of the specified drawing target buffer is sent to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list (see S7802 in FIG. 691).

As a result, the image controller 237 executes a drawing process of developing an image drawn based on the drawing list on the specified drawing target buffer. In parallel with the drawing process, the image controller 237 reads the drawn image information previously developed from the frame buffer different from the drawing target buffer, and transmits the image to the third pattern display device 81 together with the drive signal. By transferring the information, display processing for displaying an image on the third pattern display device 81 is executed.

The drawing target buffer flag 233j is updated as the drawing target buffer information is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list. This update is done by inverting the value of the drawing target buffer flag 233j, that is, by setting the value to "1" if it was "0" and to "0" if it was "1". done by As a result, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c each time the drawing list is transmitted. Also, the transmission of the drawing list is executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing processing and display processing of the image for one frame are completed. This is performed each time the drawing process (see S6306 in FIG. 679(b)) is executed.

That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for reading image information for one frame. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for developing the image of one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing process of the image of one frame is completed. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information of is read. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read out and displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. be.

After the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for developing the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. be done. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read out and displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. be. After that, the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame are set to either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c every 20 milliseconds. By alternating designations, it is possible to continuously perform display processing of an image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while performing drawing processing for an image for one frame.

The back image change flag 233w is a flag for determining whether or not the type of the back image displayed on the third pattern display device 81 is to be changed. If the back image change flag 233w is ON, it means that the type of the back image is changed, and if it is OFF, it means that no change is made. The back image change flag 233w is set to ON when a back image change command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 is received (see S7001 in FIG. 685(a)). The back image change flag 233w is referred to in the normal image transfer setting process (see S7709 in FIG. 690), and is set to OFF when the back image change process is executed (see S7710 in FIG. 690). As a result, the rear image corresponding to the rear image change command and the presentation mode change command received from the sound lamp control device 113 can be displayed.

The back image discrimination flag 233x is a flag indicating the set back image type. This flag consists of, for example, 1 byte, and each bit is associated with each rear face type. If any bit of the back image determination flag 233x is on, it means that the back surface type corresponding to the bit that is on is set as the current back surface type. For example, if the 0th bit of the rear image discrimination flag 233x is ON, it means that the rear surface A is set. In the rear image determination flag 233x, when a rear image change command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 is received, the bit corresponding to the rear image notified by the command is set to ON (Fig. 685 (a)). ) of S7002). At this time, all other bits are set to off. With this back image discrimination flag 233x, the currently set back surface type can be easily identified.

The demonstration display flag 233y is a flag indicating whether or not the demonstration effect is being performed. If the demonstration display flag 233y is on, it means that the demonstration is being performed, and if it is off, it means that the demonstration is not being performed. The demonstration display flag 233y is set to ON when the demonstration display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d in the display setting process (see FIG. 686) (see S7221 in FIG. 686). is set to off when a display data table other than the display data table buffer 233d is set to the display data table buffer 233d (S6505 in FIG. 681(a), S6705 in FIG. 682(a), S6805 in FIG. 682(b) , S6905 in FIG. 683, S6935 in FIG. 684(a), and S6955 in FIG. 694(b)). With this demonstration display flag 233y, it is possible to easily determine whether or not the demonstration effect is currently being performed.

The fixed display flag 233z is a flag indicating whether or not the fixed display effect is being executed. Here, the fixed display effect means the effect of stopping and displaying (fixed display) the stop symbol for a predetermined period (for example, 1 second) after the variation pattern. If the confirmation display flag 233z is ON, it means that the confirmation display effect is being performed, and if it is OFF, it means that the confirmation display effect is not being performed. The fixed display flag 233z is set to ON when the fixed display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d in the display setting process (see FIG. 686) (S7214 in FIG. 686). It is set to off when another display data table is set for the display data table buffer 233d (S6505 in FIG. 681(a), S6705 in FIG. 682(a), S6805 in FIG. 682(b), FIG. 683, S6935 in FIG. 684(a), and S6955 in FIG. 694(b)). With this confirmation display flag 233z, it is possible to easily determine whether or not the confirmation display effect is currently being performed.

<Regarding the control process executed by the main controller in the thirty-fifth embodiment>
Next, each control process executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 will be described with reference to flowcharts of FIGS. 631 to 661. FIG. The processing of the MPU 201 can be broadly classified into a start-up process that is started when the power is turned on, a main process that is executed after the start-up process, and a timer that is started periodically (at intervals of 2 milliseconds in this embodiment). There are interrupt processing and NMI interrupt processing activated by the input of the power failure signal SG1 to the NMI terminal. and main processing.

631 is a flow chart showing timer interrupt processing executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110. FIG. Timer interrupt processing is periodic processing that is executed, for example, every 2 milliseconds. In the timer interrupt process, first, various winning switch reading processes are executed (S101). That is, it reads the states of various switches connected to the main controller 110, determines the states of the switches, and saves detection information (winning detection information).

Next, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S102). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (479 in this embodiment). Then, the updated value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM203. Similarly, the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (232 in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0, and the updated value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is cleared. is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203 .

Furthermore, the update of the first hit random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, the second hit random number counter C4, and the small hit type counter C5 is executed (S103). Specifically, the first per random number counter C1, the first per type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, the second per random number counter C4 and the small per type counter C5 are each added by 1, and their counter values are maximum When the values (999, 199, 239, 239 and 99 respectively in this embodiment) are reached, they are cleared to 0 respectively. Then, the updated values of the counters C1 to C5 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203. FIG.

Next, a special symbol variation process for setting the variation pattern of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 is executed (S104). After that, the ball enters the first ball entrance 64b1 (start winning), the ball enters the right first ball entrance 64b2 (start winning), and the ball enters the second ball entrance 640 ( (Start winning) is executed (S105). The details of the special symbol variation process and the start winning process will be described later with reference to FIGS.

After executing the start winning process, the normal symbol variation process, which is the process for performing display on the second symbol display device, is executed (S106), and the normal symbol start port (through gate) 67 is followed by the passage of the ball. A gate passage process is executed (S107). The details of the normal symbol variation processing and the through gate passage processing will be described later with reference to FIGS. 651 and 652. FIG. After executing the through gate passing process, the firing control process is executed (S108), and other processes to be periodically executed are executed (S109), and the timer interrupt process ends. Note that the shooting control process is performed on the condition that the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51 and that the shooting stop switch 51b for stopping shooting is not operated. This is the process of deciding on/off of firing. Main controller 110 gives a ball launch instruction to launch controller 112 when ball launch is on.

Next, with reference to FIG. 632, the special symbol variation process (S104), which is one process of the timer interrupt process executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110, will be described. FIG. 632 is a flow chart showing this special symbol variation process (S104). Special design variation processing (S104 in Figure 632), the 1st special design and the 2nd special design, on the basis of each counter value which is acquired, various judgment (appropriateness judgment) it decides, decides with specified control Various commands for controlling the first pattern display device 37 to enable the variable display in the variable display mode, and for executing the variable display effect of the third and fourth symbols in the third pattern display device 81 are issued. Control is executed for setting and stopping display in a display mode showing the determination result (positive/denial determination result). The special symbol variation process (S104 in FIG. 632) will be described below.

In the special symbol variation process (S104 in FIG. 632), first, it is determined whether it is during the big hit game (during the big hit) or during the small hit game (during the small hit) (S201). Here, based on the information stored in the game state storage area 203k, it is determined whether the present is during the big winning game (during the big winning) or during the small winning game (during the small winning).

In the processing of S201, when it is determined that the jackpot or the small hit is in progress (S201: Yes), this processing is finished as it is. On the other hand, in the process of S201, when it is determined that it is not during the big hit or the small hit (S201: No), the value of the special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 203r is greater than 0, that is, the first special symbol It is determined whether or not the variable display is being performed (S202). When it is determined that the first special symbol is being varied and displayed (the value of the special figure 1 variation time counter 203r is greater than 0) (S202: Yes), the first special symbol variation executing process is executed ( S204).

In this first special symbol variation executing process (S204), the variation display mode of the special symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is varied (updated) during the period when the first special symbol is varying. is executed. The details of this first special symbol variation in-execution process (S204) will be described later with reference to FIG. Then, when the processing of S204 is finished, next, it is determined whether the value of the special figure 1 variation time counter 203r updated in the first special symbol variation executing processing (S204) is 0 (S205), When it is determined that the FIG. 1 variation time counter 203r is 0 (S205: Yes), the first special symbol variation stop process is executed (S206), and the process proceeds to S207 which will be described later.

In the first special symbol variation stop process (S206), when the variation time specified for the first special symbol being displayed in variation has passed, the process of stopping the variation display with the symbol indicating the lottery result of the first special symbol. is executed. In addition, in the first special symbol variation stopping process (S206), when the lottery result of the first special symbol is a big hit, the second special symbol being executed is forcibly stopped and displayed in a display mode indicating a loss. is executed. Furthermore, when the second special symbol being executed wins a jackpot, a process for erasing the information about the jackpot is executed. The details of this first special symbol variation stop process (S206) will be described later with reference to FIG. Also, when it is determined that the special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 203r is not 0 in the process of S205 (S205: No), the process of S206 is skipped and the process proceeds to S207.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the special figure 1 variation time counter 203r is not greater than 0 (is 0) in the process of S202 (S202: No), that is, it is determined that the first special symbol is not currently varying. If so, next, a first special symbol variation start process is executed (S203). In this first special symbol variation start process (S203), a process for executing a new lottery (variation) of the first special symbol is performed, and a new lottery (variation) can be executed. If it is determined whether a new lottery (variation) can be executed, a process of performing a new lottery (variation) is executed. This first special symbol variation start process (S203) will be described later in detail with reference to FIGS. 633 to 637. FIG.

After executing the first special symbol variation start process (S203), or in the process of S205, when it is determined that the first special symbol is being varied (S205: No), or the first special symbol variation stop process After executing (S206), next, variation processing (S207 to S211) regarding the second special symbol is executed.

First, it is determined whether the value of the special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 203s is greater than 0 (S207). That is, it is determined whether or not the second special symbol (special figure 2) is currently fluctuating. In the process of S207, the value of the special figure 2 variation time counter 203s is not a value greater than 0, that is, when it is determined that the variation of the second special symbol is not executed (S207: No), the second A special symbol variation start process is executed (S208), and this process ends.

In the second special symbol variation start process (S208), if the reserved data (various counter values) is stored in the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b, the big hit determination and variation pattern selection process based on the reserved data is executed. Also, in the second special symbol variation start process (S208), when the lottery result is a big hit, the special figure 2 big hit flag 203nb is set to ON.

On the other hand, in the process of S207, when the value of the special figure 2 variation time counter 203s is greater than 0, that is, when it is determined that the current second special symbol is varying (S207: Yes), A second special symbol variation in-execution process is executed (S209). The contents of this second special symbol variation in-execution process (S209) will be described later with reference to FIG. is changed from the first special symbol to the second special symbol and executed.

Then, when the second special symbol variation executing process (S209) is finished, it is determined whether the value of the special figure 2 variation time counter 203s is 0 (S210), and the value of the special figure 2 variation time counter 203s is 0. When it is determined that there is, that is, when it is determined that it is not the timing to stop the variation of the second special symbol (S210: Yes), the second special symbol variation stop process is executed (S211), and then this process is finished. do. On the other hand, in the process of S210, when it is determined that the value of the special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 203s is not 0 (S210: No), the process of S211 is skipped and this process ends.

The second special symbol variation stop processing (S211) will be described later with reference to FIG. 647, but as with the first special symbol variation stop processing (S206), it is defined in the second special symbol being displayed in a variable manner. When the fluctuation time has passed, the process of stopping the fluctuation display with the symbol indicating the lottery result of the second special symbol is executed. In addition, in the second special symbol variation stop processing (S211), when the lottery result of the second special symbol is a big win, the first special symbol variation being executed is forcibly stopped and displayed in a display mode indicating a failure. Processing is performed. Furthermore, when the first special symbol being executed wins a jackpot, a process for erasing the information about the jackpot is executed.

As described above with reference to FIG. 632, in the present embodiment, the lottery (variation) of the first special symbol and the lottery (variation) of the second special symbol can be executed at the same time (in parallel). , the variation processing (S202 to S206) relating to the first special symbol and the variation processing relating to the second special symbol (S207 to S211) are executed within one special symbol variation processing. Therefore, when it becomes possible to execute a new lottery (change) for each special symbol, the change process can be executed without delay, and a smooth game can be provided.

Further, in this embodiment, in one special symbol variation process, the variation process regarding the first special symbol is configured to be executed prior to (preferentially) the variation process regarding the second special symbol. Thus, by clearly setting the processing order of each special symbol, even if the variation stop timing of the first special symbol and the variation stop timing of the second special symbol are the same, priority is given to the second special symbol. 1 special symbol fluctuation stop processing will be executed.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the variation processing regarding the first special symbol is configured to be executed with priority over the variation processing regarding the second special symbol, but the variation regarding the second special symbol is not limited to this. The processing may be configured to be executed with priority over the variation processing regarding the first special symbol.

In addition, it may be configured to preferentially execute the variation processing for the special symbol type in which a lottery that is advantageous to the player is executed in the set game state, and the player can choose according to the set game state. If the pachinko machine 10 switches the special symbol types for which the lottery that is advantageous to the game is executed, it is preferable to provide a means for switching the order of the special symbol types for executing the variation processing. By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent the lottery result of the lottery that is advantageous to the player from disappearing (discarding) due to the lottery result that is disadvantageous to the player.

Next, with reference to FIG. 633, the first special symbol variation start process (S203), which is one process of the special symbol variation process (S104 in FIG. 632), will be described. FIG. 633 is a flow chart showing the first special symbol variation start process (S203).

In the first special symbol variation start process (S203 in FIG. 633), first, the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is acquired (S301), and the acquired first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d It is determined whether the value (N1) is greater than 0 (S302). When it is determined that the acquired value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is not a value greater than 0 (S302: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, in the process of S302, when it is determined that the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is greater than 0 (S302: Yes), the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d (N1 ) is subtracted by 1 (S303).

Then, the number of reserved balls command indicating the number of reserved balls after subtraction is set (S304), and the data stored in the reserved areas 1 to 4 of the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a are transferred to the execution area side. , in order (S305). More specifically, the data in each area is shifted in the order of reservation area 1→execution area, reservation area 2→reservation area 1, reservation area 3→reservation area 2, reservation area 4→reservation area 3, and so on.

Next, a first special symbol jackpot determination process is executed (S306). The first special symbol jackpot determination process (S306 in FIG. 634) will be described later in detail. Based on the game state that has been set, a big win determination is executed as to whether or not a big win has occurred.

Next, a first special symbol variation pattern selection process is executed (S307). The first special symbol variation pattern selection process (S307), which will be described later in detail, is based on the result of the success/failure determination based on the value of the variation type counter CS2 stored in the first special symbol reserved ball execution area (not shown). This is a process for selecting a variation pattern based on each counter value.

After executing the processing of S307, next, it is determined whether or not the value of the counter 203m during time saving is a value greater than 0 (S308). When it is determined that the value of the time saving counter 203m is not greater than 0 (S308: No), this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S308, if it is determined that the value of the counter 203m during time saving is greater than 0 (S308: Yes), then it is determined whether the value of the counter 203m during time saving is 1 (S309 ). When it is determined that the value of the time saving counter 203m is 1 (S309: Yes), the time saving end standby flag 203j is set to ON (S310), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the processing of S309, when it is determined that the value of the counter 203m during time saving is not 1 (S309: No), this processing is terminated as it is.

Next, referring to FIG. 634, the first special symbol big hit determination process (S306), which is one process of the first special symbol variation start process (S203 in FIG. 633), will be described. FIG. 634 is a flow chart showing the first special symbol jackpot determination process (S306).

In the first special symbol jackpot determination process (S306 in FIG. 634), first, each counter value stored in the execution area (not shown) of the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a is obtained (S401). Next, it is determined whether or not the time saving end standby flag 203j is set to ON (S402).

In this embodiment, as described above, the variation of the first special symbol and the variation of the second special symbol are configured to be executed at the same time. Then, after the high probability state of the normal design is set, when the variation of the special design is executed a specified number of times, the game state is shifted to the low probability state of the normal design. In the process of S402, when it is determined that the time saving end standby flag 203j is ON, in the variation of the second special symbol, since the final variation of the high probability state of the normal symbol is started, the game state is normally changed to the symbol Execute processing to shift to a low probability state.

In the processing of S402, if it is determined that the time saving end waiting flag 203j is ON (S402: Yes), data indicating the normal state is set in the game state storage area 203k (S403), and the time saving end waiting flag 203j and the time saving flag 203f are set to OFF (S404). Next, the value of the time saving medium counter 203m is set to 0 (S405), and the value of the time saving limit counter 203i is set to 0 (S406). Then, a command indicating that the game state has shifted to the normal state is set (S407), and the process proceeds to S408.

On the other hand, in the process of S402, if it is determined that the time saving end standby flag 203j is not ON, that is, in the variation of the second special symbol, the final variation of the high probability state of the normal symbol is not started (S402: No), the process of S403 to S407 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S408.

In the process of S408, in order to determine whether or not the current game state is the high probability state of the special symbols (first variable probability state, second variable probability state), it is determined whether the variable probability flag 203g is set to ON. (S408). If it is determined that the probability variation flag 203g is ON (that is, the high probability state of the special symbol) (S408: Yes), based on the first per random number table 202a (see FIG. 612 (a)), S401 It is determined whether or not the value of the first winning random number counter C1 acquired in the process of 1) matches the big winning judgment value in the high probability state, and the lottery result (judgment result) is acquired (S409).

On the other hand, when it is determined that the probability variation flag 203g is off (that is, the special symbol is in a low probability state) (S408: No), the first per random number table 202a (see FIG. 612 (a)) Based on , determines whether or not the value of the first winning random number counter C1 matches the low-probability jackpot determination value, and acquires the lottery result (determination result) (S410).

When the process of S409 or S410 is finished, next, based on the value of the first winning random number counter C1 acquired in the process of S409 or S410, it is determined whether or not the current lottery result is a big win (S411). When it is determined that there is (S411: Yes), the special figure 1 jackpot flag 203na indicating the jackpot election of the first special symbol is set to ON (S412).

Then, the lottery result of the first special symbol is set to a big win (S413), and the big winning symbol of the first special symbol to be displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is set based on the acquired value of the first winning type counter C2. (S414), a value indicating the current gaming state is set in the winning state storage area 203t (S415), and the process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the lottery result of this time is not a big hit in the processing of S411 (S411: No), the special figure 1 deviation variation processing is executed (S416), and this processing is finished. Details of special figure 1 deviation fluctuation processing (S416) will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, with reference to FIG. 635, the special figure 1 deviation variation process (S416), which is one process of the first special symbol jackpot determination process (S306 in FIG. 634), will be described. FIG. 635 is a flow chart showing the contents of this special figure 1 deviation variation process (S416).

In the special figure 1 deviation fluctuation process (S416), first, this lottery result (lottery result obtained in the process of S409 or S410 of the first special symbol jackpot determination process (see S306 in FIG. 634)) is a small hit is determined (S501).

When it is determined that the small hit is won in the process of S501 (S501: Yes), the small hit flag 203p is set to ON (S502), and the lottery result of the first special symbol is set to the small hit (S503 ), and then set the small winning symbol of the first special symbol to be displayed on the first symbol display device 37 (S504), and terminate this process.

On the other hand, in the process of S501, if it is determined that the lottery result of this time is not a small hit, that is, that it is out (S501: No), the first special symbol to be displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is displayed. is set (S505), and the process ends.

As described above, the first special symbol jackpot determination process (S306 of Figure 634) executed as one process of the special figure 1 deviation variation process (S416 of Figure 635), the variation of the special symbol (lottery) is started. By setting the small hit flag 203p to ON when it is determined that the small hit is won in the processing executed at the timing to be executed, based on the setting situation of the small hit flag 203p at the fluctuation stop timing of the first special symbol. It is possible to easily execute the processing corresponding to the small winning.

Next, referring to FIG. 636, the first special symbol variation pattern selection process (S307), which is one process of the first special symbol variation start process (S203 in FIG. 633), will be described. FIG. 636 is a flow chart showing this first special symbol variation pattern selection process (S307).

In the first special symbol variation pattern selection process (S307 in FIG. 636), first, the lottery result obtained in the first special symbol jackpot determination process (S306 in FIG. 634) is whether the lottery result of the first special symbol is a jackpot. It is determined whether or not, that is, whether or not the jackpot of the first special symbol is set (S601). Here, the determination of whether or not the jackpot is determined by whether or not the special figure 1 jackpot flag 203na is on. This special figure 1 jackpot flag 203na is the process of S412 in the above-described first special symbol jackpot determination process (see FIG. 634), and is set to ON when the variation executed this time is a jackpot.

When it is determined that the lottery result of the first special symbol is a jackpot (S601: Yes), based on the first hit type counter C2 acquired from the first hit type selection table 202b, the current jackpot type is determined (S602). On the other hand, in the process of S601, when it is determined that the lottery result of the first special symbol is not a big hit (S601: No), the special figure 1 deviation variation pattern selection process (S603) is executed, and the process proceeds to S604. do. A detailed description of this special figure 1 deviation variation pattern selection process (S603) will be given later with reference to FIG.

After executing the processing of S602 or S603, next, the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the execution area of the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a is acquired (S604), and the winning state storage area Based on the information of the game state (normal state, time saving state, first probability variable state, second probability variable state) stored in 203t, and the setting status of the probability variable limit reaching flag 203u and the time saving limit reaching flag 203v, the variation pattern The variation pattern scenario stored in the scenario storage area 203w is read (S605).

Next, based on the variation pattern scenario read in the process of S605, reading of the variation pattern table 202d to be referred to this time is executed (S606). Then, it is determined whether the variation pattern table read in the process of S606 is the normal variation pattern table 202d1 (S607). When it is determined that the read variation pattern table is the normal variation pattern table 202d1 (S607: Yes), it is determined whether the special state flag 203x is on (S608). If it is determined that the special state flag 203x is ON (S608: Yes), the special state flag 203x is set to OFF (S609), and the process proceeds to S610, which will be described later. On the other hand, in the processing of S607, the read variation pattern table is not the normal variation pattern table 202d1 (S607: No), or in the processing of S608, if it is determined that the special state flag 203x is not turned on ( S608: No), the process proceeds to S610, which will be described later.

In the thirty-fifth embodiment, in the state in which the special state flag 203x is set to ON, that is, in the state in which the special mode is set in the normal state, the game is executed by the right-handed game. Even if a right-handed game is played while the normal state is set as the state, the notification command indicating the firing abnormality is not set (see S107 in FIG. 652).

Then, when it is determined that the variation pattern selection process is executed with reference to the normal variation pattern table 202d1, that is, when it is determined that the special mode is finished, the special state flag 203x is set to OFF. Processing is executed (S609). By configuring in this way, when the special mode is completed and the normal state (normal mode) is shifted to the special pattern variation is executed, the notification command indicating the firing abnormality based on the right-handed game is set. can be made possible. As a result, when the game state is not changed and the special mode is shifted to the normal mode, and the player continues to play the right-handed game without noticing the mode shift, a shooting abnormality is indicated. A notification command (for example, display "Please return to left-handed") can be executed.

In this embodiment, when it is detected that the ball has passed through the through gate 67 provided in the right area while the right-handed game is not required, a command indicating a shooting abnormality is set. However, without being limited to this, for example, a determination means capable of determining that the special state flag 203x is set to OFF is provided, and when the determination means determines that the special state flag 203x is set to OFF, the player It is also possible to display a display mode of "Please return to left-handed" as a guidance notification mode for guiding the game method. By configuring in this way, it is possible to inform the player that the game method has been switched before the execution of the abnormality notification, so that the player can easily play a proper game. can be done.

Furthermore, in the thirty-fifth embodiment, as shown in FIG. 636, the special state flag 203x is turned off based on the fact that the first special symbol variation is started after the special mode ends. However, without being limited to this, for example, when the final variation in the special mode is stopped and displayed, the special state flag 203x may be set to OFF.

In this case, in the first special symbol variation pattern selection process (S307 in FIG. 636), the special symbol variation for which the variation pattern is set this time is the final variation of the special mode (the variation pattern is set with reference to the special variation pattern table 202d5 A determination means for determining whether it is the final variation (the 1000th special figure variation) is provided, and the determination means determines that the special symbol variation for which the variation pattern is set this time is the final variation of the special mode. In this case, when the special symbol variation is stopped and displayed, an instruction for processing for setting the special state flag 203x to OFF may be set.

Also, in the control process executed when the special symbol variation is stopped and displayed, not the first special symbol variation pattern selection process (S307 in FIG. 636), the special symbol variation stopped and displayed this time is the final variation of the special mode. If it is determined that the special state flag 203x is set to OFF, the processing may be executed.

Thus, by executing the process of setting the special state flag 203x to OFF at the timing when the final variation of the special mode is stopped and displayed, for example, after the final variation of the special mode is finished, the next special symbol variation When an idle time occurs before the game is executed, it is possible to set a notification command indicating a firing abnormality even for the right-handed game during the idle time.

In the process of S610, from the variation pattern table 202d read out in the process of S606, based on the value of the variation type counter CS1 acquired in the process of S604, the variation pattern of the variation of the first special symbol to be executed this time is selected ( S610), based on the selected variation pattern, to set the special figure 1 variation pattern command (S611).

Next, set a special figure 1 stop type command indicating a stop symbol of the first special symbol (S612), set the start of variation of the first special symbol on the first symbol display device 37 (S613), and select the selected variation pattern. A value indicating the fluctuation time of is set to the value of the special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 203r (S614), and the process ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 637, the special figure 1 deviation variation pattern selection process (S603), which is one process of the first special symbol variation pattern selection process (S307 in FIG. 636), will be described. FIG. 637 is a flowchart showing the special figure 1 deviation pattern selection process (S603). In this special figure 1 deviation variation pattern selection process (S603), when the lottery result of the variation of the first special symbol to be executed is a small hit, a process for selecting a small hit type is executed.

In the special figure 1 deviation variation pattern selection process (S603), first, it is determined whether or not the lottery result of the variation of the first special symbol executed this time is a small hit (S701). If it is determined that the lottery result is not a small win (S701: No), the lottery result is a loss, so this process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, in the process of S701, when it is determined that the lottery result of the first special symbol to be executed this time is a small hit (S701: Yes), it is stored in the execution area of the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a. Acquire the value of the small hit type counter C5 (S702). Then, based on the value of the small hit type counter C5 acquired in the process of S702, the small hit type to be executed this time is selected (S703), and the process ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 632, the first special symbol variation executing process (S204), which is one process of the special symbol variation process (S104 of FIG. 632), will be described. FIG. 632 is a flow chart showing the contents of the first special symbol variation in-execution process (S204). In this first special symbol variation in-execution process (S204), a process for updating the variation time of the special symbol variation being performed is executed.

In the first special symbol variation executing process (S204), the value of the special figure 1 variation time counter 203r is subtracted and updated (S801), and the display of the first special symbol of the first symbol display device 37 is updated (S802 ), the process ends.

In this embodiment, within the special symbol variation process (see S104 in Figure 632) executed in the timer interrupt process (see Figure 631) executed every 2 milliseconds, the first special symbol variation executing process ( (see S204 in Figure 638) is configured to be executed, and configured to update (subtract) the value of the special figure 1 variation time counter 203r in the first special symbol variation executing process (see S204 in Figure 638) is doing. Therefore, for example, when the fluctuation time of 30 seconds is set as the fluctuation time of the first special symbol, "15000" is set as the value of the special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 203r, and the value is 1 every 2 milliseconds. It is configured to be subtracted.

Next, with reference to FIG. 639, the first special symbol variation stop process (S206), which is one process in the special symbol variation process (S104 in FIG. 632), will be described. FIG. 639 is a flow chart showing the contents of this first special symbol variation stop process (S206). This first special symbol variation stop process (S206) updates the process of stopping the variation of the first special symbol (special figure 1), and executes the process for updating the time saving state. Also, when the lottery result of the variation of the first special symbol being executed is a win, a process for forcibly stopping the variation of the second special symbol being executed is performed.

When the first special symbol variation stop process (S206 in FIG. 639) is executed, first, it is determined whether the special figure 1 jackpot flag 203na is set to ON (S901). When it is determined that the special figure 1 jackpot flag 203na is set to ON (S901: Yes), a process for forcibly stopping the variation of the second special symbol is executed. Specifically, it is determined whether the value of the special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 203s is a value greater than 0 (S902). If it is determined that the value of the special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 203s is greater than 0 (S902: Yes), the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203o is set to ON (S903), and the special figure 2 fluctuation stop Set the special figure 2 fluctuation stop command indicating that the flag 203o has been turned on (S904).

Next, the second special symbol of the first symbol display device 37 is stopped and displayed in the off symbol (S905), and the value of the special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 203s is set to 0 (S906). As a result, when the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in the display mode indicating the jackpot, the variable display of the second special symbol (special figure 2) being executed is stopped and displayed in the display mode (outgoing symbol) indicating the loss. (confirmed display).

When the processing of S906 is finished, next, it is determined whether the special figure 2 big hit flag 203nb is set to ON (S907), and when it is determined that the special figure 2 big hit flag 203nb is set to ON (S907 : Yes), in order to adapt the lottery result of the first special symbol to the second special symbol stopped and displayed forcibly in the process of S905 described above, the special figure 2 jackpot flag 203nb is set to OFF. Then (S908), the stored information for the special figure 2 jackpot is deleted (S909), and the process proceeds to S910.

On the other hand, in the process of S907, when the special figure 2 big hit flag 203nb is off, that is, when it is determined that the big hit is not won in the lottery of the second special symbol (S907: No), the processes of S908 and S909 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S910. Also, in the process of S902, if it is determined that the value of the special figure 2 variation time counter 203s is not greater than 0 (S902: No), the variation of the second special symbol is not executed, and the second Since there is no need to forcibly stop the fluctuation result of the special symbol, the process of S903 to S909 is skipped and the process proceeds to S910.

In the process of S910, first, a jackpot scenario is set based on the jackpot type won by the variation of the first special symbol this time (S910), then the special figure 1 jackpot flag 203na, the time saving end waiting flag 203j, the time saving flag 203f, probability variation flag 203g, probability variation limit arrival flag 203u, time saving limit arrival flag 203v, special state flag 203x are set to OFF, and the value of counter 203m is reset during time saving (S911).

Then, information indicating that the current game state is during the jackpot (during jackpot game) is stored in the game state storage area 203k (S912). The game state storage area 203k separately stores the game state (normal state, time saving state, first probability variable state, second probability variable state) regarding the lottery game and the game state (middle hit, small hit) regarding the winning game. By executing the process of S912, the game state (normal state, time saving state, first probability variable state, second probability variable state) related to the lottery game at the timing of winning the jackpot, and during the jackpot A game state indicating that is is stored. By configuring in this way, it is possible to determine the game state set at the timing of winning the big win at the end of the big win game.

When the processing of S912 is finished, next, a special figure 1 confirmation command for instructing the sound lamp control device 113 to decide and stop the first special symbol is set (S913), and the first special symbol display device A process of stopping the variable display of the first special symbol, which is displayed in a variable manner at 37, with a big hit symbol is executed (S914), and the process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the processing of S901, if it is determined that the special figure 1 big hit flag 203na is not set to ON, that is, if it is determined that the variation result of the first special symbol being executed this time is not a big hit ( S901: No), special figure 1 deviating stop processing (S915) is executed. A detailed description of the special figure 1 loss stop processing (S915) will be described later with reference to FIG. Perform processing to execute fluctuation stop. Next, time saving update processing (S916) is executed and this processing ends. A detailed description of the time saving update process (S916) will be given later with reference to FIG.

Thus, in the first special symbol variation stop process (S206), the process (S910 to S914) of stopping the variation display with the symbol indicating the result of the first special symbol lottery (first lottery game) is executed. Also, when the lottery result of this time is a big hit (S901: Yes), the second special symbol that is fluctuating is forcibly stopped and displayed so that the lottery result is lost (S905). In this way, in the process of stopping and displaying (confirmed display) one of the special symbols with a symbol indicating a big win, by executing the process of forcibly stopping the other special symbol during variation, Appropriate processing can be executed for a plurality of special symbol variations that are executed.

That is, like the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, in a configuration in which the variation processing regarding the first special symbol and the variation processing regarding the second special symbol are sequentially performed, the processing is performed based on the lottery result of the first special symbol. By executing the variation processing (forced stop processing) of the second special symbol within the variation processing regarding the first special symbol, the second special symbol is forcibly stopped at the timing when the variation processing regarding the second special symbol is not executed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the processing related to the second special symbol from being duplicated and to execute the processing smoothly.

In addition, in the present embodiment, at the timing when one special symbol is stopped and displayed in a symbol indicating a big hit, the other special symbol is forcibly stopped in a symbol indicating a loss. Without being limited to this, for example, when it is determined that one of the special symbols has won the jackpot, that is, when it is determined that the current lottery result is a jackpot in the first special symbol jackpot determination process (S306 in FIG. 634) (S411 in FIG. 634: Yes), the variation of the other special symbol may be forcibly stopped at the off symbol. In this case, it is preferable to execute a special variation that does not win a jackpot for the period until the big winning variation of one special symbol ends for the other special symbol that is forcibly lost and stopped. By constructing in this way, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to notice that when one special symbol wins a jackpot, the other special symbol variation is forcibly stopped. Therefore, it is possible to discriminate that the other special symbol variation has been forcibly stopped and displayed, and to prevent the player from grasping whether or not the big win has been won.

In addition, when controlling the variation of the other special symbol during execution based on the result of the lottery of one special symbol, the contents of variation control are varied according to the result of the lottery of the other special symbol being executed. For example, at the timing when the first special symbol is stopped and displayed as a jackpot symbol, if the lottery of the second special symbol is fluctuating (losing fluctuation) to indicate that the lottery is lost, the lottery The result is discarded, and a forced stop process is executed to forcibly stop the deviation fluctuation, and the result of the lottery of the second special symbol is a win (big win, small win) during the fluctuation (win fluctuation). In some cases, after the jackpot game of the first special symbol is finished, the interruption process may be executed so that the variation of the second special symbol can be restarted.

In this case, after the jackpot game with the first special symbol is finished, the player is interested in whether the second special symbol variation is newly executed or the interrupted second special symbol variation is resumed. You can play games. Furthermore, when such a configuration is used, it is configured to execute a suggestive effect for suggesting to the player the situation of the second special symbol during the jackpot game of the first special symbol (whether it is interrupted or not). good to do

Next, with reference to FIG. 640, the special figure 1 out stop processing (S915), which is one processing in the first special symbol variation stop processing (see FIG. 639), will be described. FIG. 640 is a flow chart showing the contents of this special figure 1 exclusion stop process (S915). This special figure 1 loss stop process (S915) executes the process for stopping the variation of the special symbol when the lottery result of the variation of the executed first special symbol is a small hit or a loss.

In the special figure 1 deviating stop processing (S915), first, it is determined whether or not the small hit flag 203p is ON (S1001). The small hit flag 203p is ON, that is, when it is determined that the lottery result of the first special symbol this time is a small hit (S1001: Yes), next, the value of the special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 203s It is determined whether or not the value is greater than 0, that is, whether or not the variation of the second special symbol is being executed (S1002).

In the process of S1002, when it is determined that the value of the special figure 2 variation time counter 203s is a value greater than 0, that is, when it is determined that the variation of the second special symbol is being executed (S1002: Yes) , Toku-zu 2 discard processing is executed (S1003), and the process proceeds to S1004. A detailed description of this special figure 2 discarding process (S1003) will be described later with reference to FIG. A process for forcibly stopping is executed. On the other hand, in the process of S1002, when it is determined that the value of the second special symbol variation time counter 203s is not greater than 0 (S1002: No), since the variation of the second special symbol is not executed, S1003 , and proceeds to the processing of S1004.

Here, with reference to FIG. 641, the special figure 2 discarding process (S1003), which is one process in the special figure 1 disconnection stop process (S915), will be described. Figure 641 is a flow chart showing the contents of this special figure 2 discarding process (S1003). This special figure 2 discarding process (S1003) is a process for forcibly stopping the variation of the second special symbol when the small winning variation is stopped when the small winning is won in the lottery of the first special symbol. Run.

In the special figure 2 discarding process (S1003), first, the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203o is set to ON (S1101), then the special figure 2 fluctuation indicating that the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203o is turned on A stop command is set (S1102). Next, the second special symbol of the first symbol display device 37 is stopped and displayed in the off symbol (S1103), and the value of the special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 203s is set to 0 (S1104). As a result, when the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in the display mode indicating the jackpot, the variable display of the second special symbol (special figure 2) being executed is stopped and displayed in the display mode (outgoing symbol) indicating the loss. (confirmed display).

When the processing of S1104 is finished, next, it is determined whether the special figure 2 jackpot flag 203nb is set to ON (S1105), and when it is determined that the special figure 2 jackpot flag 203nb is set to ON (S1105 : Yes), in order to adapt the lottery result of the second special symbol to the second special symbol forcibly stopped and displayed in the process of S1103 described above, the special figure 2 jackpot flag 203nb is set to OFF. Then (S1106), the stored information for the special figure 2 jackpot is deleted (S1107), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the processing of S1105, the special figure 2 big hit flag 203nb is off, that is, if it is determined that the big hit is not won in the lottery of the second special symbol (S1105: No), the processing of S1106 and S1107 is skipped, and this processing ends.

As described above, in the present embodiment, when a big win or a small win is won in the lottery of the first special symbols, the variation of the second special symbols being executed can be forcibly stopped. . In addition, without being limited to forcedly stopping the variation of the second special symbol, if the lottery result of the first special symbol is a small hit, the variation of the second special symbol is temporarily stopped. good too.

Returning to FIG. 640, the description continues. After executing the processing of S1002 or S1003, next, a small winning scenario corresponding to the small winning type to be executed this time is set (S1004), and the small winning flag 203p is set to OFF (S1005). Next, the game state storage area 203k is set with information indicating that a small winning is in progress (a small winning game is in progress) (S1006), and the fluctuation display of the first special symbol on the first symbol display device 37 is performed with a small winning symbol. Fluctuation stops (S1007). Then, the special figure 1 confirmation command indicating that the variation of the first special symbol has stopped is set (S1008), and the process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S1001, when it is determined that the small hit flag 203p is not ON (S1001: No), the variation result of the first special symbol being executed this time is out, so the first symbol display The variable display of the first special symbol of the device 37 is stopped with the deviated symbol (S1009), the process of S1008 described above is executed, and this process ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 642, the time saving update process (S916), which is one process of the first special symbol variation stop process (see S206 in FIG. 639), will be described. FIG. 642 is a flow chart showing the contents of this time saving update process (S916). In this time saving update process (S916), when the game state is the time saving state or the first probability variable state, the value of the time saving medium counter 203m is updated when the special symbol fluctuation stops, and when the end condition is satisfied , the game state is normal state, or the process of shifting to the second probability variable state is executed. In addition, in the explanation to be given later, the processing when the variation of the first special symbol is stopped will be explained, but the same processing is executed when the target is the second special symbol.

When the time saving update process (S916) is executed, first, the value of the time saving counter 203m is a value larger than 0, that is, the fluctuation of the special symbol being executed this time is during the time saving game or the first It is determined whether or not the variation is started during the probability variation state (S1201). The value of the time saving counter 203m is a value greater than 0, that is, during the time saving game, or when it is determined that the fluctuation has started during the first probability variable state (S1201: Yes), the time saving counter 203m is subtracted (S1202). Then, the process proceeds to S1203. On the other hand, in the process of S1201, first, when it is determined that the value of the time saving counter 203m is not greater than 0 (S1201: No), the time saving state or the variation that triggers the update of the first probability variable state Since it is not a stop, this process is terminated as it is.

In the process of S1203, it is determined whether the time saving end standby flag 203j is ON (S1203). When it is determined that the time saving end standby flag 203j is on (S1203: Yes), that is, the fluctuation of the special symbol of this time is the final fluctuation of the time saving, and in the second special symbol (the other special symbol), the time saving If the next variation has not started from the last variation, it is the timing to shift the game state to the normal state, so the time saving end standby flag 203j and the time saving flag 203f are set to OFF (S1204 ), the normal state is set in the game state storage area 203k (S1205). Then, the process proceeds to S1206.

On the other hand, in the process of S1203, if it is determined that the time saving end waiting flag 203j is not ON (S1203: No), the state where the final variation of the time saving game is not executed, that is, the state where the time saving state continues Therefore, a command indicating the value of the time-saving counter 203m and the game state is set (S1206), and this process is terminated. In this way, in the simultaneous variation type gaming machine, when the variation that becomes the final variation of the time saving game is stopped, the variation exceeding the specified number of times of the time saving game state with the other special symbol (from the final variation to the next variation) is executed If not, the game state is shifted. By configuring in this way, it is possible to provide the player with a game that does not cause discomfort.

Next, with reference to FIG. 643, the second special symbol variation start process (S208), which is one process of the special symbol variation process (S104 in FIG. 632), will be described. FIG. 643 is a flow chart showing this second special symbol variation start process (S208).

When the second special symbol variation start process (S208) is executed, first, it is determined whether the special figure 2 variation stop flag 203o is set to ON (S1301). That is, the first special symbol lottery (first special symbol jackpot determination process (see S306 in FIG. 634) executed (within the same special symbol variation process (see S104 in FIG. 632)) immediately before this process is performed )) to determine whether or not the jackpot has been won.

In the process of S1301, if it is determined that the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203o is set to ON (S1301: Yes), various processes for starting the fluctuation of the second special symbol are skipped, special figure 2 The fluctuation stop flag 203o is set to OFF (S1309), and this process is terminated. That is, in the present embodiment, by using the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203o, in the first special symbol jackpot determination process (see S306 in FIG. 634), the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in the jackpot symbol, and the second It is prohibited to execute a new second special symbol variation after forcibly stop-displaying the special symbol with the deviating symbol. As a result, even if the second special symbol is forcibly stopped and displayed within the variation process relating to the first special symbol, the control process can be executed without causing any trouble.

In this embodiment, when it is determined that the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203o is set to ON in the process of S1301 (S1301: Yes), the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203o is configured to be set to OFF Therefore, by setting the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203o, the second special symbol fluctuation start process (S208 in FIG. 643) can be skipped only once.

This is the first special symbol lottery (first special symbol Only when the jackpot is won in the jackpot determination process (see S306 in FIG. 634), if the second special symbol variation start process (S208 in FIG. 643) to be executed immediately after is skipped, then the first special symbol jackpot A jackpot game is started based on the jackpot information (jackpot scenario) set in the determination process (see S306 in FIG. 634), and the jackpot game ends by the process of S201 of the special symbol variation process (see S104 in FIG. 632). This is because the second special symbol variation start process (S208 in FIG. 643) is not executed until it is done.

By configuring in this way, based on the lottery result of one of the special symbols, it is possible to simplify the process of skipping the variation processing of the other special symbol, control processing executed by the main controller 110 processing load can be reduced.

In addition, in the present embodiment, when the lottery result of one special symbol is a predetermined lottery result (big hit winning), the other special symbol is forcibly stopped and displayed (stopped with a missing symbol), and one special symbol is displayed. A special figure 2 variation stop flag 203o is set to prevent the execution of a new variation (lottery) of the other special symbol until the big winning game based on the lottery result of the symbol is executed, and the variation processing of the other special symbol is performed. is skipped once, other configurations may be used.

In other words, when the lottery result of one special symbol is a predetermined lottery result (jackpot winning), the other special symbol lottery (fluctuation) is not won in the other special symbol lottery (fluctuation) until the jackpot game based on the jackpot winning ends. For example, when a jackpot control process (see FIG. 656) for executing a jackpot game is executed in the main process (see FIG. 655) of the main control device 110 to be described later, special figure 2 fluctuation stop It may be configured to set the flag 203o to OFF.

By configuring in this way, even if the timing to turn on the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203o is set before the timing at which the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in the jackpot symbol, until the jackpot game is executed. It is possible to prohibit execution of a new variation (lottery) of the second special symbol.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the second special symbol variation start processing (see S208 in FIG. 643) is executed in a state where the special figure 2 variation stop flag 203o is set to ON, the second special symbol variation Skip the process, that is, it is configured not to start a new variation (the second special symbol is kept stopped), but not limited to this, the special figure 2 variation stop flag 203o is turned on It may be configured to execute the variable display of the second special symbol dedicated to the case where it is set.

In this case, a lottery for the second special pattern is carried out using a special lottery that does not win a big hit, and the variation display of the second special pattern is executed during a period corresponding to the variation pattern determined based on the result of the special lottery. Alternatively, the period until the jackpot game based on the jackpot winning of the first special pattern is executed without executing the lottery of the second special pattern, the period until the specific timing during the jackpot game is reached. Alternatively, the second special symbol may be variably displayed until the jackpot game ends. This makes it difficult for the player to understand that the special symbol variation has been forcibly stopped.

It should be noted that the content of the variation processing for each special symbol described above is configured to be appropriately output to the sound lamp control device 113 side by setting a command indicating the content, and the third symbol display device The variable display of the third and fourth symbols displayed in the main display area Dm of 81 can be synchronized with the display mode of each special symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 37 described above. However, while the second special symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is forcibly stopped, the voice lamp control device 113 side receives a command indicating that the second special symbol is forcibly stopped and displayed. In this case, the third pattern or the fourth pattern corresponding to the second special pattern variably displayed on the third pattern display device 81 is used to execute the variable effect during the forced stop. Also good.

In this way, by using each symbol (third symbol, fourth symbol) which is variably displayed in synchronization with the variable display of the special symbol on the third symbol display device 81 which is easy for the player to visually recognize, the actual second special symbol is displayed. It is possible to make it difficult for a player to understand that the special symbol variation is forcibly stopped even when the variation performance is executed while the symbol is forcibly stopped.

In the process of S1301, when the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203o is not set to ON, that is, when it is determined that the first special symbol is not stopped and displayed in the jackpot symbol (S1301: No), the second special The data of the execution area of the symbol reserved ball storage area 203b is acquired (S1302). Next, it is determined whether there is data in the execution area of the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b (S1303). When it is determined that there is no data in the execution area of the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b (S1303: No), there is no ball entering the second ball entrance 640, and this is not the trigger for the variation of the second special symbol. Therefore, this processing is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, if it is determined that there is data in the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b (S1303: Yes), then the second special symbol jackpot determination process is executed (S1304). The second special symbol jackpot determination process (see FIG. 644) will be described in detail later. Based on the game state that has been set, a big win determination is executed as to whether or not a big win has occurred.

Next, a second special symbol variation pattern selection process is executed (S1305). The second special symbol variation pattern selection process (S1305), which will be described later in detail, is based on the result of the success/failure determination based on the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the second special symbol reserved ball execution area (not shown). This is a process for selecting a variation pattern based on each counter value.

After executing the process of S1305, next, it is determined whether or not the value of the counter 203m during time saving is a value greater than 0 (S1306). When it is determined that the value of the time saving counter 203m is not greater than 0 (S1306: No), this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S1306, if it is determined that the value of the counter 203m during time saving is greater than 0 (S1306: Yes), then it is determined whether the value of the counter 203m during time saving is 1 (S1307 ). When it is determined that the value of the time saving counter 203m is 1 (S1307: Yes), since this is the final change in the time saving state, the time saving end standby flag 203j is set to ON (S1308), and this process ends. . On the other hand, in the process of S1307, when it is determined that the value of the counter 203m during time saving is not 1 (S1307: No), this process is terminated as it is.

Next, with reference to FIG. 644, the second special symbol big hit determination process (S1304), which is one process of the second special symbol variation start process (S208 in FIG. 643), will be described. FIG. 644 is a flow chart showing the second special symbol jackpot determination process (S1304). This second special symbol jackpot determination process (S1304) is different from the above-described first special symbol jackpot determination process (S306 in FIG. 634) in that the target special symbol type is changed from the first special symbol to the second special symbol. , and some other processing changes.

In the second special symbol jackpot determination process (S1303), first, each counter value stored in the execution area (not shown) of the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b is obtained (S1401). Next, it is determined whether or not the time saving end standby flag 203j is set to ON (S1402).

In this embodiment, as described above, the variation of the first special symbol and the variation of the second special symbol are configured to be executed at the same time. Then, after the high probability state of normal symbols is set, the game state shifts to the low probability state of normal symbols when the variation of the special symbols is executed a specified number of times. In the process of S1402, when it is determined that the time saving end waiting flag 203j is ON, in the variation of the first special symbol, the final variation of the high probability state of the normal symbol is started, so the game state is normally changed to the symbol Execute processing to shift to a low probability state.

In the process of S1402, if it is determined that the time saving end waiting flag 203j is ON (S1402: Yes), data indicating the normal state is set in the gaming state storage area 203k (S1403), and the time saving end waiting flag 203j and the time saving flag 203f are set to off (S1404). Next, the value of the time saving counter 203m is set to 0 (S1405), and the value of the time saving limit counter 203i is set to 0 (S1406). Then, a command indicating that the game state has shifted to the normal state is set (S1407), and the process proceeds to S1408.

On the other hand, in the processing of S1402, if it is determined that the time saving end waiting flag 203j is not ON, that is, in the variation of the first special symbol, the final variation of the high probability state of the normal symbol is not started (S1402: No), the processing of S1403 to S1407 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S1408.

In the process of S1408, in order to determine whether or not the current gaming state is a high probability state of special symbols (first variable probability state, second variable probability state), it is determined whether the variable probability flag 203g is set to ON. (S1408). If it is determined that the probability variation flag 203g is ON (that is, the special symbol is in a high probability state) (S1408: Yes), based on the first per random number table 202a (see FIG. 612 (a)), S1401 It is determined whether or not the value of the first winning random number counter C1 acquired in the process of 1 matches the big winning judgment value in the high probability state, and the lottery result (judgment result) is acquired (S1409).

On the other hand, when it is determined that the probability variation flag 203g is off (that is, the special symbol is in a low probability state) (S1408: No), the first per random number table 202a (see FIG. 612 (a)) Based on , determines whether or not the value of the first winning random number counter C1 matches the low probability state jackpot determination value, and acquires the lottery result (determination result) (S1410).

When the processing of S1409 or S1410 is completed, next, based on the value of the first winning random number counter C1 acquired in the processing of S1409 or S1410, it is determined whether or not the current lottery result is a big win (S1411). When it is determined that there is (S1411: Yes), the special figure 2 jackpot flag 203nb indicating the jackpot election of the second special pattern is set to ON (S1412).

Then, the lottery result of the first special symbol is set as a big win (S1413), and the second special symbol big win pattern to be displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is set based on the value of the acquired winning type counter C2 ( S1414), a value indicating the current gaming state is set in the winning state storage area 203t (S1415), and this processing is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1411 that the lottery result of this time is not a big hit (S1411: No), the second special symbol is set in the first symbol display device 37 (S1416), and this process is terminated. do.

Next, with reference to FIG. 645, the second special symbol variation pattern selection process (S1305), which is one process of the second special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 643), will be described. FIG. 645 is a flow chart showing this second special symbol variation pattern selection process (S1305).

In the second special symbol variation pattern selection process (S1305 in FIG. 645), first, the lottery result obtained in the second special symbol jackpot determination process (see FIG. 644) is whether the lottery result of the second special symbol is a jackpot. Or, that is, it is determined whether or not the jackpot of the second special symbol is set (S1501). Here, the determination of whether or not the jackpot is determined by whether or not the special figure 2 jackpot flag 203nb is ON. This special figure 2 jackpot flag 203nb is set to ON in the process of S1412 in the above-described second special symbol jackpot determination process (see FIG. 644).

When it is determined that the lottery result of the second special symbol is a big hit (S1501: Yes), based on the first hit type counter C2 acquired from the first hit type selection table 202b, the current jackpot type is determined (S1502). On the other hand, in the process of S1501, when it is determined that the lottery result of the first special symbol is not a big hit (S1501: No), the process of S1502 is skipped and the process proceeds to S1503.

After executing the processing of S1501 or S1502, next, the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the execution area of the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b is acquired (S1503), and the winning state storage area Based on the information of the game state (normal state, time saving state, first probability variable state, second probability variable state) stored in 203t, and the setting status of the probability variable limit reaching flag 203u and the time saving limit reaching flag 203v, the variation pattern The variation pattern scenario stored in the scenario storage area 203w is read (S1504). Next, based on the variation pattern scenario read in the process of S1504, reading of the variation pattern table 202d to be referred to this time is executed (S1505).

Then, it is determined whether the variation pattern table read in the process of S1505 is the normal variation pattern table 202d1 (S1506). When it is determined that the read variation pattern table is the normal variation pattern table 202d1 (S1506: Yes), it is determined whether the special state flag 203x is on (S1507). If it is determined that the special state flag 203x is ON (S1507: Yes), the special state flag 203x is set to OFF (S1508), and the process proceeds to S1509, which will be described later. On the other hand, in the processing of S1506, the read variation pattern table is not the normal variation pattern table 202d1 (S1506: No), or in the processing of S1507, if it is determined that the special state flag 203x is not turned on ( S1507: No), the process proceeds to S1509, which will be described later.

In the process of S1509, from the variation pattern table 202d read out in the process of S1505, based on the value of the variation type counter CS1 acquired in the process of S1503, the variation pattern of the variation of the second special symbol to be executed this time is selected ( S1509). Based on the variation pattern selected in the process of S1509, to set the special figure 2 variation pattern command (S1510).

Next, set a special figure 2 stop type command indicating the stop symbol of the second special symbol (S1511), set the start of variation of the second special symbol with the first symbol display device 37 (S1512), and select the selected variation pattern. The value indicating the fluctuation time of is set to the value of the special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 203s (S1513), and the process is terminated.

Next, with reference to FIG. 646, the contents of the second special symbol variation executing process (S209), which is one process of the special symbol variation process (S104 of FIG. 632), will be described. FIG. 646 is a flow chart showing the second special symbol variation in-execution process (S209). A process for updating the variation of the second special symbol is executed.

In the second special symbol variation executing process (S209), first, the value of the special figure 2 variation time counter 203s is subtracted and updated (S1601), and the variation display of the second special symbol of the first symbol display device 37 is updated. (S1602), and the process ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 647, the second special symbol variation stop process (S211), which is one process of the special symbol variation process (S104 in FIG. 632), will be described. FIG. 647 is a flow chart showing this second special symbol variation stop process (S211). The second special symbol variation stop process (S211) is a process for stopping the variation of the second special symbol being executed, and when the variation result of the second special symbol being executed is a big hit, the second special symbol being executed 1 Execute the process for forcibly stopping the variation of the special symbol.

When the second special symbol variation stop process (S211) is executed, first, it is determined whether the special figure 2 jackpot flag 203nb is set to ON (S1701). When it is determined that the special figure 2 big hit flag 203nb is set to ON (S1701: Yes), the process for forcibly stopping the variation of the first special symbol is executed. Specifically, it is determined whether the value of the special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 203r is a value greater than 0 (S1702). If it is determined that the value of the special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 203r is greater than 0 (S1702: Yes), a special figure 1 fluctuation stop command indicating the stop of the fluctuation of the first special symbol is set (S1703). .

Next, the first special symbol of the first symbol display device 37 is stopped and displayed in the off symbol (S1704), and the value of the special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 203r is set to 0 (S1705). As a result, when the second special symbol is stopped and displayed in the display mode indicating the jackpot, the variable display of the first special symbol (special symbol 1) being executed is stopped and displayed in the display mode (off symbol) indicating the loss. (confirmed display).

When the processing of S1705 is finished, next, it is determined whether the special figure 1 jackpot flag 203na is set to ON (S1706), and when it is determined that the special figure 1 jackpot flag 203na is set to ON (S1706 : Yes), in order to adapt the lottery result of the first special symbol to the first special symbol forcibly stopped and displayed in the process of S1704 described above, the special figure 1 jackpot flag 203na is set to off. Then (S1707), the stored information for the special figure 1 jackpot is deleted (S1708), and the process proceeds to S1709.

On the other hand, in the process of S1706, the special figure 1 jackpot flag 203na is off, that is, when it is determined that the variation result of the first special symbol being executed is not a jackpot (S1706: No), S1707 and S1708 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S1709. Also, in the process of S1702, if it is determined that the value of the special figure 1 variation time counter 203r is not greater than 0 (S1702: No), the variation of the first special symbol is not executed, and the first Since there is no need to forcibly stop the fluctuation result of the special symbol, the process of S1703 to S1708 is skipped and the process proceeds to S1709.

In the process of S1709, first, a jackpot scenario is set based on the jackpot type won by the variation of the second special symbol this time (S1709), then the special figure 2 jackpot flag 203nb, the time saving end standby flag 203j, the time saving flag 203f, probability variation flag 203g, probability variation limit arrival flag 203u, time saving limit arrival flag 203v, special state flag 203x are set to OFF, and the value of counter 203m is reset during time saving (S1710).

Then, information indicating that the current game state is during the jackpot (during jackpot game) is stored in the game state storage area 203k (S1711). The game state storage area 203k separately stores the game state (normal state, time saving state, first probability variable state, second probability variable state) regarding the lottery game and the game state (middle hit, small hit) regarding the winning game. By executing the process of S1711, the game state (normal state, time saving state, first probability variable state, second probability variable state) related to the lottery game at the timing of winning the jackpot, and during the jackpot A game state indicating that is is stored. By configuring in this way, it is possible to determine the game state set at the timing of winning the big win at the end of the big win game.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the special figure 2 jackpot flag 203nb is not ON in the process of S1701, that is, the fluctuation being executed this time is not the jackpot fluctuation (S1701: No), the second time saving update process is executed. (S1714), and the process proceeds to S1712. Detailed description of the second time saving update process (S1714) will be described later with reference to FIG. In the case of the time saving state or the first probability variable state), a process for updating the game state is executed.

After executing the process of S1711 or S1714, next, set a special figure 2 decision command for instructing the sound lamp control device 113 to decide and stop the second special symbol (S1712), The variation display of the second special symbol, which is being variably displayed on the 1 special symbol display device 37, is stopped with the symbol corresponding to the lottery result (S1713), and this processing is terminated.

Thus, in the second special symbol variation stop process (S211), the process (S1712-S1713) of stopping the variation display with the symbol indicating the result of the second special symbol lottery (second lottery game) is executed. Also, when the lottery result of this time is a big hit (S1701: Yes), the first special symbol that is fluctuating is forcibly stopped and displayed so that the lottery result is lost (S1704). In this way, in the process of stopping and displaying (confirmed display) one of the special symbols with a symbol indicating a big win, by executing the process of forcibly stopping the other special symbol during variation, Appropriate processing can be executed for a plurality of special symbol variations that are executed.

In other words, like the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, in the configuration in which the variation processing regarding the first special symbol and the variation processing regarding the second special symbol are executed in order, it is executed based on the lottery result of the second special symbol. By executing the variation processing (forced stop processing) of the first special symbol within the variation processing regarding the second special symbol, the first special symbol is forcibly stopped at the timing when the variation processing regarding the first special symbol is not executed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the processing related to the first special symbol from being duplicated, and it is possible to execute the processing smoothly.

In addition, in the present embodiment, at the timing when one special symbol is stopped and displayed in a symbol indicating a big hit, the other special symbol is forcibly stopped in a symbol indicating a loss. Without being limited to this, for example, if it is determined that one of the special symbols has won the jackpot, that is, if it is determined that the current lottery result is a jackpot in the second special symbol jackpot determination process (see FIG. 644) ( In S1411 of FIG. 644: Yes), the variation of the other special symbol may be forcibly stopped at the off symbol. In this case, it is preferable to execute a special variation that does not win a jackpot for the period until the big winning variation of one special symbol ends for the other special symbol that is forcibly lost and stopped. By constructing in this way, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to notice that when one special symbol wins a jackpot, the other special symbol variation is forcibly stopped. Therefore, it is possible to discriminate that the other special symbol variation has been forcibly stopped and displayed, and to prevent the player from grasping whether or not the big win has been won.

In addition, when controlling the variation of the other special symbol during execution based on the result of the lottery of one special symbol, the contents of variation control are varied according to the result of the lottery of the other special symbol being executed. For example, at the timing when the second special symbol is stopped and displayed as a jackpot symbol, the lottery (first lottery game) of the first special symbol is fluctuating (losing fluctuation) to indicate that it is out. In that case, the lottery result is discarded, and a forced stop process is executed to forcibly stop the deviation fluctuation, and the lottery result of the first special symbol is a win (big win, small win). In the case of (hit fluctuation), after the jackpot game of the first special symbol is finished, the interruption process may be executed so that the fluctuation of the second special symbol can be restarted.

In this case, after the jackpot game with the second special symbol is finished, the player is interested in whether the first special symbol variation is newly executed or the interrupted first special symbol variation is resumed. You can play games. Furthermore, when such a configuration is used, it is configured to execute a suggestion effect for suggesting to the player the situation of the first special symbol during the jackpot game of the second special symbol (whether it is interrupted or not). good to do

Next, with reference to FIG. 648, the second time saving update process (S1714), which is one process of the second special symbol variation stop process (see S211 in FIG. 647), will be described. FIG. 648 is a flow chart showing the contents of this second time saving update process (S1714). In this second time saving update process (S1714), when the game state is the time saving state or the first probability variable state, the value of the time saving medium counter 203m is updated when the special symbol is stopped to fluctuate, and the end condition is satisfied. , the game state is normal state, or the process of shifting to the second probability variable state is executed.

When the second time saving update process (S1714) is executed, first, the value of the time saving counter 203m is a value greater than 0, that is, the fluctuation of the special symbol being executed this time is during the time saving game, or It is determined whether or not the variation is started during the first probability variation state (S1801). The value of the time saving counter 203m is a value greater than 0, that is, during the time saving game, or when it is determined that the fluctuation is started during the first probability variable state (S1801: Yes), the time saving counter 203m is subtracted (S1802). Then, the process proceeds to S1803. On the other hand, in the process of S1801, if it is determined that the value of the counter 203m during time saving is not a value greater than 0 (S1801: No), the time saving state, or the fluctuation stop that triggers the update of the first probability variable state Since there is no such data, the processing is terminated as it is.

In the processing of S1803, it is determined whether the time saving end standby flag 203j is ON (S1803). If it is determined that the time saving end standby flag 203j is on (S1803: Yes), that is, the fluctuation of the special symbol of this time is the final fluctuation of the time saving, and in the first special symbol (the other special symbol), the time saving If the next fluctuation is not started from the final fluctuation, it is the timing to shift the game state to the normal state, so the time saving end standby flag 203j and the time saving flag 203f are set to OFF (S1804) , the normal state is set in the game state storage area 203k (S1805). Then, the process proceeds to S1806.

On the other hand, in the process of S1803, if it is determined that the time saving end waiting flag 203j is not ON (S1803: No), the state where the final variation of the time saving game is not executed, that is, the state where the time saving state continues Therefore, a command indicating the time-saving counter 203m and the game state is set (S1806), and this process is terminated. In this way, in the simultaneous variation type gaming machine, when the variation that becomes the final variation of the time saving game is stopped, the variation exceeding the specified number of times of the time saving game state with the other special symbol (from the final variation to the next variation) is executed If not, the game state is shifted. By configuring in this way, it is possible to provide the player with a game that does not cause discomfort.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the control of the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol can be executed independently and in parallel. The special pattern and the second special pattern can be variably displayed at the same time. Therefore, lottery games with more special symbols can be executed within a predetermined period of time, and the probability that a player will receive a big win within the predetermined period of time can be increased. Therefore, the player can play the game efficiently.

Further, even in the configuration in which the first special symbol and the second special symbol are variably displayed at the same time and the lottery game is executed, when the jackpot game occurs in one of the first or second special symbols, the other symbol is displayed. Since the variable display of the special symbols is stopped, the player can play the game while concentrating on the big winning game.

In addition, in this embodiment, when either the first special symbol or the second special symbol is a symbol indicating a big win (big winning symbol) or a small winning symbol is stopped and displayed, the other special symbol is forcibly displayed. Although it is constituted so as to be stopped and displayed in the lost pattern, it is not limited to this, and the other special pattern is temporarily stopped or variably displayed in a state where the measurement of the fluctuation time is interrupted according to the type of the big win or the type of the small win. Configure. By configuring in this way, the temporarily stopped special symbols are stopped in a display mode or a notification mode in which the player can understand that the temporary stop is being performed, so that the player can stop the lottery game that was in the middle of the variable display. It can be grasped that it is not extinguished, and the big winning game can be played with peace of mind.

Next, with reference to FIG. 649, the start winning process (S105), which is one process of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 631) executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110, will be described. FIG. 649 is a flow chart showing this starting winning process (S105). In the starting winning process (S105 in FIG. 649), it is determined whether the ball has entered (starting winning) any one of the first ball entrance 64b1, the right first ball entrance 64b2, and the second ball entrance 640. When starting winning, each counter value obtained up to the maximum number of pending (4 in total for the first ball entrance 64b1 and the right first ball entrance 64b2, maximum 1 for the second ball entrance 640) is stored in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a or the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b.

Further, when each counter value acquired based on the reserved ball is stored in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a, based on each counter value stored in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a , a process (so-called look-ahead process) of predicting in advance the result of the suitability determination, the variation pattern to be selected, and the like is executed. The starting winning process (S105 in FIG. 649) will be described below.

In the starting winning process (S105 in FIG. 649), first, it is determined whether or not the ball has entered the first starting opening, that is, the first ball entrance 64b1 or the right first ball entrance 64b2 (starting winning). (S1901). Here, the entry of a ball into a ball detection switch (not shown) provided in the first ball entrance 64b1 or the right first ball entrance 64b2 is detected. When it is determined that the game ball entered the first ball entrance 64b1 or the right first ball entrance 64b2 (there was a start winning) (S1901: Yes), the first special symbol reserved ball number counter The value (N1) of 203d is acquired (S1902), and it is determined whether the acquired value (N1) is less than 4 (S1903).

In other words, is the number of pending balls for the first ball entrance 64b1 or the right first ball hole 64b2 at the present time less than the upper limit of 4 (that is, the number of pending balls is not stored up to the upper limit? or) is determined. When it is determined that the acquired value (N1) is less than 4 (S1903: Yes), 1 is added to the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d (1704), and the voice lamp control device 113 Set a reservation number command for notifying the reservation number of the first start port (lottery right reservation number of the first special symbol) (S1905).

Then, each value of various counter values (first per random number counter C1, first per type counter C2, variation type counter CS1, small per type counter C5) is read (acquired) from the counter buffer, and the first Each is reserved (stored) in the storage area of the number of reserved balls corresponding to the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a (S1906).

Next, a first prefetch process is executed (S1907). This first look-ahead processing (S1907) will be described later with reference to FIG. , a process for discriminating the stop type and the like is executed. In addition, in the present embodiment, it is configured to execute a process for determining the result of determination, the determined variation pattern, the stop type, etc. based on each counter value newly stored, but this is not the only option. Without, for example, when there is a new start winning prize, the result of winning or not determination for all the reserved memories stored (stored) in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a, the determined fluctuation pattern, It may be configured to execute a process of determining the stop type or the like.

Further, in this embodiment, when new information (winning information) is stored in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a, that is, when the lottery right of the first special symbol is newly acquired, the first special symbol Although it is configured to determine the contents of the lottery right (winning information) in advance, without being limited to this, when the lottery right for the first special design is newly acquired, the lottery right for the second special design (winning information ) may be determined in advance.

After the processing of S1907 is executed, the processing of S1908 is executed next. Also, in the processing of S1901, if it is determined that the game ball has not entered the first ball entrance 64b1 or the right first ball entrance 64b2 (S1901: No), or in the processing of S1903, At this time, when it is determined that the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is the upper limit value (S1903: No), the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is added. Skip the process and move to the process of S1908.

As described above, in this embodiment, when the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is added, the first look-ahead processing (S1907) based on the information (winning information) on the added winning is performed. However, without being limited to this, for example, when it is determined that the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is the upper limit number (4) in the process of S1903 (S1903 : No), that is, when the ball is entered into the first ball entrance 64b1 or the right first ball entrance 64b2 in a state where the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol has reached the upper limit, The configuration may be such that 1 prefetch processing (S1907) can be executed. As a result, even in a state where the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol has reached the upper limit, the player can continue to play the game in order to execute the look-ahead process. Further, when the ball is entered into the first ball entrance 64b1 or the right first ball entrance 64b2 in a state where the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol reaches the upper limit, added value is given. Therefore, when the ball enters the first ball entrance 64b1 or the right first ball entrance 64b2 in a state where the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol has reached the upper limit, the motivation to play decreases. You can prevent it from happening.

Next, it is determined whether or not the ball has entered the second ball entrance 640, which is the second start opening (start winning) (S1908). Here, entry of a ball to a ball detection switch (not shown) provided in the second ball entrance 640 is detected. When it is determined that the game ball has entered the second ball entrance 640 (there has been a starting prize) (S1908: Yes), next, it is determined whether or not it is a period during which the special symbol variation can be executed. It discriminates (S1909).

In this embodiment, when the current game state is during the big win or during the small win, the special symbols are not changed. Here, based on the information stored in the game state storage area 203k, it is determined whether the present is during the big winning game (during the big winning) or during the small winning game (during the small winning).

In the processing of S1909, when it is determined that the variable display of the special symbols cannot be executed (S1909: No), this processing is terminated as it is. On the other hand, in the process of S1909, if it is determined that the special symbol can be executed (S1909: Yes), a special figure 2 winning command indicating that the game ball entered the second ball entrance 640 set (S1910), then read (acquire) each value of various counter values (first winning random number counter C1, first winning type counter C2, variation type counter CS1) from the counter buffer, It is stored in the execution area of the 2 special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b (S1911), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1908 that the ball has not entered the second ball entrance 640 (S1908: No), this process ends. In addition, in this embodiment, since it is configured to be able to win a small hit in the lottery of the first special symbol, in the process of S1911, the value of the small hit type counter C5 is stored as the second special symbol reserved ball. It is not stored in the execution area of area 203b.

Next, referring to FIG. 650, the first look-ahead process (S1907), which is one process of the starting winning process (S105 in FIG. 649), will be described. FIG. 650 is a flow chart showing this first look-ahead processing (S1907).

In the first look-ahead process (S1907 in FIG. 650), first, various counter values are obtained from the storage area newly stored in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a, a first hit random number counter C1 and a first hit type counter. C2, read each value of small hit type counter C5 (S2001). Then, the read data is stored in the area with the lowest winning order among the vacant storage areas in the prefetch pending storage area (S2002).

Then, when it is determined that the determination result in the processing of S2003 is a jackpot (jackpot only in low probability state, jackpot only in high probability state, jackpot in both low probability state and high probability state) (S2003: Yes), a jackpot A winning condition (game state set at the time of lottery) and a first winning command indicating a jackpot type in the case of winning are set (S2004), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the determination result in the processing of S2003 is not a big hit (even if the special symbol is in a high probability state or a low probability state, it is out) (S2003: No), then the determination result in the processing of S2003 is It is determined whether or not it is a small hit (S2005). When it is determined that the determination result in the process of S2003 is a small hit (S2005: Yes), a first winning command indicating the type of small hit when winning is set (S2006), and this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S2005, when it is determined that the determined result is not a small hit (S2005: No), a first winning command indicating a failure is set (S2007), and this process ends.

Here, the first winning command set in the processing of S2004, S2006, and S2007 is information for indicating the above-mentioned success/failure determination result (information that has a different meaning based on the success/failure determination result), and as common information , S2001 to include information for indicating the values of various counter values read out. Then, the winning command set in this process is output to the sound lamp control device 113 by the external output process (S2501) executed in the main process of the main controller 110 (see FIG. 655).

On the voice lamp control device 113 side, when the winning command is received, the display mode of the pending ball is varied based on various information included in the winning command (for example, the color of the pending ball is changed to a color different from usual). It is possible to execute an effect (pre-reading effect) in which a notice pattern or the like is displayed before the start of the fluctuation to suggest the result of the determination to the player.

It should be noted that, in the present embodiment, when executing the look-ahead process, the determination result of the case of the high probability state of the special design, the determination result of the case of the low probability state of the special design is determined, the result of each determination However, without being limited to this, for example, even if the special symbol is in a high probability state or a low probability state, the determination value that is determined to be a big hit ( The value of the first winning random number counter C1) may be defined, and a winning command indicating a special symbol jackpot may be set only when the determination value is read.

By configuring in this way, only when it is determined in advance that it is a specific jackpot to the audio lamp control device 113 side, a winning command indicating a jackpot is output, so a special symbol that does not execute a look-ahead effect It is possible to give a feeling of expectation of winning a jackpot against the fluctuation.

Furthermore, the game state when the special symbol lottery is performed based on the reservation memory (winning information) stored (memorized) in the first special symbol reservation ball storage area 203a is accurately determined, and based on the game state. It may be configured to execute the propriety determination. In this case, instead of changing the selection of the variation pattern depending on the number of retained balls, it is possible to determine by selecting a constant variation pattern regardless of the number of retained balls at the start of variation. When the look-ahead is executed, the game state at the time of start of variation can be determined by determining the variation order until the variation of the retained ball starts based on the information retained and stored.

Further, in the present embodiment, when a new reserved storage (winning information) is stored (stored) in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a, the prefetching process is executed based on the winning information, and the prefetching process is performed. Although it uses a configuration that predicts the success or failure determination in advance, it is not limited to this, and in the look-ahead processing of the main control device 110, the winning prize newly stored (stored) in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a Information indicating the content (each counter value) of the information (reserved memory) is set as a prize winning command, and the win/fail determination result is predicted based on the information included in the prize winning command received by the audio lamp control device 113 side. can be

With this configuration, the processing load on main controller 110 can be reduced. In addition, on the audio lamp control device 113 side, a process for determining whether or not to execute the look-ahead effect is executed, and when it is determined to execute the look-ahead effect, the information included in the winning command received from the main control device 110 It is preferable to configure it so as to perform analysis (prediction of acceptance/rejection determination result). As a result, when the look-ahead performance is not performed, the specific look-ahead processing (prediction of the success/failure determination result) is not performed, so that the Pachinko machine 10 can be prevented from performing useless control. In addition, it is possible to prevent the player from illegally obtaining the result of the prefetching process that has been executed in vain.

Next, with reference to FIG. 651, the normal symbol variation process (S106), which is one process in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 631) executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110, will be described. FIG. 651 is a flow chart showing the contents of this normal symbol variation process (S106). The normal symbol variation process (S106) is a process for controlling the variable display of the second symbol (normal symbol), the opening time of the electric accessory 64a, and the like.

In this normal symbol variation process (S106 in FIG. 651), first, it is determined whether or not the normal symbol (second symbol) is currently hitting (S2101). During the winning of the normal symbol (second symbol), the opening and closing control of the electric accessory 64a is performed at the maximum after the second symbol display device 83 displays the winning (after the winning symbol is stopped and displayed). Until the middle (until the winning game is completed) is included. When it is determined that the normal symbol (second symbol) is in the process of winning (S2101: Yes), this process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the normal symbol (second symbol) is not hitting (S2101: No), it is determined whether or not the normal symbol of the second symbol display device 83 is being variably displayed (S2102). When it is determined that the normal symbol variation is not being displayed, that is, it is in a state where a new normal symbol variation (lottery) can be executed (S2102: No), next, the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203e A value (M) is acquired (S2103), and it is determined whether the value is greater than 0 (S2104).

When it is determined that the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is 0 in the processing of S2104 (S2104: No), this processing is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is greater than 0 (S2104: Yes), the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is subtracted by 1 (S2105). In other words, when it is determined that the condition for executing a new normal symbol variation in the process of S2104 (that the winning information for use in the normal symbol variation is retained and stored) is satisfied, the retained memory is stored. 1 is subtracted from the value of the normal design reserved ball number counter 203e in order to execute the normal design variation using the winning information.

Next, the data stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c is shifted (S2106). In the process of S2106, the data stored in the normal design reservation 1 to the normal design reservation 4 of the normal design reservation ball storage area 203c are shifted to the execution area side in order. More specifically, normal design reservation 1 → execution area, normal design reservation 2 → normal design reservation 1, normal design reservation 3 → normal design reservation 2, normal design reservation 4 → normal design reservation 4, etc. Shift data. After shifting the data, the value of the second hit random number counter C4 stored in the normal symbol reserved ball execution area (not shown) is acquired (S2107).

Next, it is determined whether the time saving flag 203f is on, that is, whether the current state is a high probability state of normal symbols (S2108), and when it is determined that the time saving flag 203f is on (S2108: Yes), the win/fail determination result (lottery result) is acquired based on the hit determination value of the second hit random number table 202c for high probability (see FIG. 612(d)) (S2109), and the process proceeds to S2111. On the other hand, if it is determined that the time saving flag 203f is not ON (S2108: No), the second hit random number table 202c for low probability (see FIG. 612 (d)) Based on the hit determination value, the success or failure determination result is obtained (S2110), and the process proceeds to S2111.

In the process of S2111, it is determined whether the current normal pattern variation (lottery) is a win (S2111), and when it is determined that the normal pattern variation (lottery) is a win (S2111: Yes), the display at the time of the hit The display mode of "O", which is the mode, is set (S2112), the variation time of the normal symbol is set to 0.1 second (S2114), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of S2111, if it is determined that the current normal symbol variation (lottery) is not a hit (no) (S2111: No), set the display mode of "x" which is the display mode at the time of loss. (S2113), and proceeds to the processing of S2114 described above.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the variation pattern of the normal symbol is configured to set the same variation time regardless of the game state of the normal symbol and the number of retained balls of the normal symbol, but it is not limited to this. , For example, it may be configured so that different fluctuation time is set based on the value of the normal figure fluctuation type counter CS2 obtained.

On the other hand, in the processing of S2102, when it is determined that the normal symbol (second symbol) is being displayed in a variable manner (S2102: Yes), the variation time of the normal symbol being executed in the second symbol display device 83 has elapsed. (S2115), and if it is determined that the variation time has not elapsed (S2115: No), this process is terminated.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the fluctuation time has passed in the process of S2115 (S2115: Yes), next, stop display of the second symbol display device 83 is set (S2116). In the process of S2116, when the current normal symbol lottery is a win, the second symbol display device 83 is set to stop display (illuminate display) the "O" symbol. On the other hand, when the lottery for the normal symbol is lost, the second symbol display device 83 stops displaying (lights up) the "x" symbol. That is, a setting is made to stop and display the display mode set in the processing of S2112 or S2113 described above.

When the stop display is set by the process of S2116, the variable display in the second symbol display device 83 is completed, and the stop symbol (second symbol) is displayed as the second symbol in the display mode set by the process of S2112 or the process of S2113. The symbol display device 83 stops displaying (lighting display).

Next, it is determined whether or not the lottery result of the current normal symbol is a hit (S2117). When it is determined that the current normal symbol lottery result is a hit (S2117: Yes), a process for setting the opening/closing control mode (opening pattern) of the electric accessory 64a is executed. On the other hand, when it is determined that the lottery result of the current normal symbol is not a win (no) (S2117: No), this process is terminated as it is.

Next, the opening/closing control mode (opening pattern) of the electric accessory 64a in this embodiment will be described. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, based on the probability state (high probability state, low probability state) of the normal symbol set at the timing of determining whether the normal symbol is correct (timing of performing the processing of S2108 to S2111) The game state (normal It is configured to set the opening control mode (open pattern) of the electric accessory 64a based on the state, time saving state, first variable probability state, second variable probability state).

That is, in the present embodiment, the variation processing (lottery processing) for normal symbols and the variation processing (lottery processing) for special symbols are configured to be executed independently, and further, the variation processing for special symbols ( It is configured so that the probability state (high probability state, low probability state) of the normal design is variable based on the result of the lottery process). Therefore, depending on the result of the variation processing (lottery processing) regarding the special symbols that is executed in parallel during the period when the variation processing (lottery processing) regarding the normal symbols is performed, the normal symbols are usually at the timing of judging whether the symbols is set, and at the timing of setting the opening control mode (opening pattern) of the electric accessory 64a, there is a case where the normal symbol low probability state is set.

In such a situation, for example, the opening control mode (open pattern) is set, the electric accessory 64a is long open in a state where the low probability state of normal symbols is set (an open pattern executed when the high probability state of normal symbols is set ) was a problem.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, the electric accessary product 64a is opened based on the game state at the timing to be set by referring to the general figure winning operation table 202h that defines the opening control mode (opening pattern) of the electric accessary product 64a. It is configured to set the control mode (opening pattern). As a result, the electric accessory 64a can be opened in an opening pattern according to the set game state.

In the process of S2117, if it is determined that the lottery result of the current normal symbol is a hit (S2117: Yes), then, with reference to the normal symbol per operation table 202h, the electric role based on the current game state The release pattern of the object 64a is identified (S2118). Then, based on the opening pattern of the electric accessory 64a specified in the processing of S2118, the start of the opening control of the electric accessory 64a is set (S2119), and this processing ends as it is.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the determination of whether the normal symbol is performed based on the game state at the timing of performing the determination of whether the normal symbol is performed, and the opening control mode (opening pattern ) is configured to set the opening pattern of the electric accessory 64a based on the probability state of the normal symbol at the timing of setting the normal When the high probability state of the symbol is set and the high probability state of the normal symbol is set even at the timing of setting the opening control mode (opening pattern) of the electric accessory 64a to be moved in the winning game of the normal symbol. The electric accessory 64a may be configured to open for a long time only, or the opening pattern of the electric accessory 64a may be set based on the game state set at the timing of judging whether the normal symbol is correct or not. can be configured to

Next, with reference to FIG. 652, the through gate passage processing (S107) executed in the thirty-fifth embodiment will be described. FIG. 652 is a flow chart showing the contents of the through gate passing process (S107). This processing is executed in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 631) to determine whether or not the ball has passed through the normal symbol starting port (through gate) 67, and if the ball has passed, the second winning This is a process for acquiring the value indicated by the random number counter C4 and storing it in the execution area.

In the through gate passing process (S107 in FIG. 652), first, it is determined whether or not the ball has passed through the normal symbol start opening (through gate) 67 (S2201). Here, the passage of the ball in the normal symbol starting port (through gate) 67 is detected over three times of timer interrupt processing. Then, when it is determined that the ball has passed through the normal symbol start opening (through gate) 67 (S2201: Yes), next, it is determined whether the currently set game state is the normal state (S2202), If it is determined to be in the normal state (S2202: Yes), it is determined whether or not the special state flag 203x is ON (S2203). When it is determined that the special state flag 203x is not set to ON (S2203: No), since it is a case where a right-handed game is being performed in a state where the normal game state is set, a shooting abnormality is indicated. A notification command for this purpose is set (S2204), and the process proceeds to S2205.

When the notification command set by the processing of S2204 is output (notified) to the sound lamp control device 113, the abnormality notification processing is executed on the sound lamp control device 113 side, and the third symbol display device 81 detects the firing abnormality. (not shown) is displayed.

On the other hand, in the processing of S2202, if it is determined that the game state is not the normal state (S2202: No), or if it is determined that the special state flag 203x is set to ON (S2203: Yes), S2205 to process.

This special state flag 203x is a flag that is set to ON when the special variation pattern table 202d5 is referred to as the referenced variation pattern table 202d, and the special state flag 203x is set to ON. In this case, the right-handed game is executed even if the normal state is set as the game state because it is a game state advantageous to the player to play the game so as to execute the lottery of the special symbols with the second special symbol. is the correct way to play. Therefore, even when the game ball passes through the through gate 67 and it is determined that the game state is the normal state, the process of setting the notification command indicating the ejection abnormality is skipped.

In this way, when it is detected that the ball has passed through the through gate 67, it is determined whether or not the right-handed game is being performed by configuring to determine that the right-handed game is being performed. (For example, a sensor for detecting that the shot ball has reached the game area beyond the variable display unit 80) is no longer required, so the manufacturing cost can be reduced. In addition, by setting the notification command for indicating the firing abnormality differently according to the game state set at the time when the right-handed game is played, it is possible to easily display different abnormality notification modes. can.

In this embodiment, when it is detected that the ball has passed through the through gate 67, it is determined that the right-handed game is being executed. For example, a detection means for detecting that the operation handle 51 has been operated with an intensity (manipulation amount) sufficient to shoot a ball into the right-handed area. may be provided.

Returning to FIG. 652, the description continues. After completing the processes of S2202 to S2204, the process of S2205 is executed next. In S2205, the value (M) of the normal design reservation ball number counter 203e is acquired (S2205), and then the value (M) of the acquired normal design reservation ball number counter 203e is not greater than 4 (normal design Whether the number of held balls has reached the upper limit) is determined (S2206).

In the processing of S2206, when it is determined that the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is larger than 4 (the upper limit is 4) (S2206: No), this processing is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is not greater than 4 (3 or less) (S2206: Yes), the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203e Add 1 (S2207), set the normal pattern reserved ball number command (command for indicating the value (M) of the normal pattern reserved ball number counter 203e) (S2208), set the value of the second per random number counter C4 to normal It is stored in the symbol reserved ball storage area 203c (S2209), and this process is terminated.

Next, referring to FIG. 653, NMI interrupt processing will be described. 653 is a flow chart showing NMI interrupt processing executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110. FIG. The NMI interrupt process is a process executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 when the pachinko machine 10 is powered off due to power failure or the like. By this NMI interrupt processing, information on occurrence of power failure is stored in the RAM 203 . That is, when the pachinko machine 10 is powered off due to a power failure or the like, a power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 . Then, the MPU 201 interrupts the control being executed, starts the NMI interrupt processing, stores the power interruption occurrence information in the RAM 203 as the setting of the power interruption occurrence information (S2301), and ends the NMI interruption processing. do.

The above NMI interrupt processing is also executed in the payout launch control device 111 in the same manner, and information on occurrence of power failure is stored in the RAM 213 by such NMI interrupt processing. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to a power failure or the like, a power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 in the payout control device 111, and the MPU 211 interrupts the control being executed. Then, NMI interrupt processing is started.

Next, with reference to FIG. 654, startup processing executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 when main controller 110 is powered on will be described. FIG. 654 is a flow chart showing this startup process.

This start-up process is started by a reset when the power is turned on. In the start-up process (FIG. 654), first, an initial setting process is executed upon power-on (S2401). For example, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. Next, in order to wait for the sub-side control devices (peripheral control devices such as the sound lamp control device 113 and the payout control device 111) to become operable, a wait process (one second in this embodiment) is executed. (S2402). Then, access to the RAM 203 is permitted (S2403).

Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 585) provided in the power supply 115 is turned on (S2404), and if it is turned on (S2404: Yes), the process proceeds to S2412. On the other hand, if the RAM erasing switch 122 is not turned on (S2404: No), it is further determined whether or not power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S2405), and if not stored (S2405: No). , there is a possibility that the process at the time of the previous power shutdown did not end normally, so in this case also, the process proceeds to S2412.

If power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S2405: Yes), the RAM determination value is calculated (S2406). If the judgment value does not match the RAM judgment value saved at the time of power-off, the backed-up data is destroyed. Note that the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in the work area address of the RAM 203 . Instead of the RAM determination value, the validity of the backup may be determined based on whether or not the keyword written in the predetermined area of the RAM 203 is correctly saved.

In the process of S2412, a payout initialization command is transmitted in order to initialize the payout control device 111 which is a sub-side control device (peripheral control device) (S2412). When the payout control device 111 receives this payout initialization command, it clears the area (work area) other than the stack area of the RAM 213, sets the initial value, and becomes ready to start the game ball payout control. After transmitting the payout initialization command, main controller 110 executes initialization processing of RAM 203 (S2413, S2414).

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, the power is turned on while the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed when the RAM data is initialized when the power is turned on, such as when the hall starts operating. Therefore, if the RAM erasing switch 122 is pressed during execution of startup processing, initialization processing of the RAM 203 (S2413, S2414) is executed.

Similarly, when power failure occurrence information is not set, or when a backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM judgment value (checksum value, etc.), initialization processing of the RAM 203 (S2413, S2414) is executed. . In the RAM initialization process (S2413, S2414), the used area of the RAM 203 is cleared to 0 (S2413), and then the initial value of the RAM 203 is set (S2414). After executing the initialization process of the RAM 203, the process proceeds to S2410.

On the other hand, if the RAM erasing switch 122 is not turned on (S2404: No), power failure occurrence information is stored (S2405: Yes), and the RAM determination value (checksum value, etc.) is normal ( S2407: Yes), while the data backed up in the RAM 203 is held, the power failure occurrence information is cleared (S2408). Next, the sub-side control device (peripheral control device) transmits a payout return command at the time of power recovery for returning to the game state at the time of drive power interruption (S2409), and the process proceeds to S2410. When the payout control device 111 receives this payout return command, the game ball payout control can be started while retaining the data stored in the RAM 213 .

Next, an effect permission command for permitting execution of various effects is output to the sound lamp control device 113 (S2410). After that, the interrupt is permitted (S2411). Then, the process shifts to main processing, which will be described later.

Next, with reference to FIG. 655, main processing executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 after the startup processing described above will be described. FIG. 655 is a flow chart showing this main process. This main process is roughly divided into a counter update process and a power-off process.

In the main process (see FIG. 655), first, in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 631), output data such as commands stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 223 is transmitted to each control on the sub side. External output processing for transmission to the device (peripheral control device) is executed (S2501). Specifically, it determines whether or not there is winning detection information detected in the switch read processing in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 631). Send a sphere command. In addition, it transmits to the sound lamp control device 113 the reserved ball number command set in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 632) and the start winning process (see FIG. 649). Furthermore, by this external output processing (S2501 in FIG. 655), various commands set by various processing of the main control device 110 are sent to the sound lamp control device 113, and various commands displayed on the third symbol display device 81 Information for setting effects (variation effects, decorative effects, etc.). Also, the opening command, round number command, and ending command set in the jackpot control process (see FIG. 656) are transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 . In addition, a ball launch signal is sent to the launch control device 112 when the ball is to be launched.

Next, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is updated (S2502). Specifically, the variation type counter CS1 is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (198 in this embodiment). Then, the updated value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM203.

When the update of the variation type counter CS1 is finished, the prize ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (S2503), and then in the case of a special symbol jackpot state, the sound lamp control device 113 A command setting for executing a jackpot effect and a jackpot control process for opening or closing the first variable prize winning device 65 and the second variable prize winning device 650 are executed (S2504).

Details of the jackpot control process (S2504) will be described later with reference to FIGS. 65a, the V winning opening 650a (hereinafter referred to as winning opening etc.) is opened, and the maximum opening time of the winning opening etc. (first specific winning opening (large opening) 65a, V winning opening 650a) has passed, or It is determined whether or not a specified number of balls have entered the winning openings (first specific winning opening (large open opening) 65a, V winning opening 650a). Then, when any one of these conditions is satisfied, the winning openings (the first specific winning opening (large open opening) 65a and the V winning opening 650a) are closed. Opening and closing of the winning openings (first specific winning opening (large open opening) 65a, V winning opening 650a) are repeated for a predetermined number of rounds. In addition, in this embodiment, although the jackpot control process (S2504) is executed in the main process, it may be executed in the timer interrupt process.

Next, a small winning control process relating to a small winning game that is executed when a small winning is won in a special symbol lottery is executed (S2505). In this small winning control process (S2505), a period for opening the V winning opening 650a and a period for closing the V winning opening 650a for the second variable winning device 650 which is operated to be opened during the small winning game are set in a predetermined scenario. A process for setting based on (small hit scenario) is executed. The detailed contents of the small winning control process (S2505) will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, an electric accessary product opening/closing process for controlling the opening/closing of the electric accessary product 64a associated with the right first entrance 64b2 is executed (S2506). In the electric accessary product opening/closing process, when the opening/closing control start of the electric accessary product is set by the processing of S2119 of the normal symbol variation processing (see FIG. 651), the opening/closing control of the electric accessary product is started. The open/close control of the electric accessary product is continued until the period set by the process of S2118 in the normal symbol variation process ends.

Next, a first symbol display update process for updating the display of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B is executed (S2507). In the first symbol display update process, when the variation pattern is set by the first special symbol variation start process (S203 in FIG. 633) or the second special symbol variation start process (S208 in FIG. 643), according to the variation pattern Then, the variable display is started in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B. In the present embodiment, among the LEDs of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, from the start of the variation until the variation time elapses, for example, if the currently lit LED is red, the red LED is turned off and the green LED is turned on. If the green LED is turned on, the green LED is turned off and the blue LED is turned on. If the blue LED is turned on, the blue LED is turned on. is turned off and the red LED is turned on.

Note that the main process is executed every 4 milliseconds, but if the lighting color of the LED is changed each time the main process is executed, the player cannot confirm the change in the lighting color of the LED. Therefore, a counter (not shown) is counted by 1 each time the main process is executed so that the player can confirm the change in the lighting color of the LED, and when the counter reaches 100, the LED change the lighting color of That is, the lighting color of the LED is changed every 0.4 seconds. The value of the counter is reset to 0 when the lighting color of the LED is changed.

Also, in the first symbol display update process, when the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern set by the first special symbol variation start process (see Figure 633) or the second special symbol variation start process (see Figure 643) has ended , the variation display being executed in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B is terminated, and the first special symbol variation pattern selection processing (S307 in FIG. 636) is performed by the first special symbol variation stop processing (see S206 in FIG. 639). ), the stop symbol (first symbol) is stopped (lighted up) on the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B in the display mode set in S607. As for the second special symbol, the stop symbol (first symbol) is stop-displayed (lighted-up) on the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B by the same processing.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, when one of the special symbols is stopped and displayed in a display mode (jackpot pattern) indicating a big win, the other special pattern is stopped and displayed in a display mode (outgoing pattern) indicating a loss. A stop display for that purpose is also performed.

Next, a second symbol display update process for updating the display of the second symbol display device is executed (S2508). In the second symbol display update process, when the variation time of the second symbol is set by the process of S2114 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 651), the variation display is started on the second symbol display device. As a result, in the second pattern display device, a variable display is performed in which the second pattern "O" pattern and the "X" pattern are alternately lit. Also, in the second symbol display update process (S2508), when the stop display of the second symbol display device is set by the process of S2116 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 651), it is executed in the second symbol display device. 651) in the display mode set by the processing of S2112 or the processing of S2113 of the normal symbol variation processing (see FIG. 651), the stop symbol (second symbol) is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device ( display).

After that, it is determined whether power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S2509). SG1 is not output and the power is not cut off. Therefore, in such a case, it is determined whether or not the execution timing of the next main processing has come, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 ms in this embodiment) has elapsed since the start of the main processing this time (S2510). If the predetermined time has already passed (S2510: Yes), the process proceeds to S2501, and the above-described processes after S2501 are repeatedly executed.

On the other hand, if the predetermined time has not yet passed since the start of the main processing this time (S2510: No), the next main processing is executed until the predetermined time, that is, within the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main processing. The first initial value random number counter CINI1, the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and the variation type counter CS1 are repeatedly updated (S2511, S2512).

First, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S2511). Specifically, 1 is added to the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (479, 232 in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0. . Then, the updated values of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203, respectively. Next, the update of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is executed by the same method as the processing of S2511 (S2512). In addition, in the process of this S2512, the value of the normal figure fluctuation classification counter CS2 is also updated like the value of fluctuation classification counter CS1.

Here, since the execution time of each process of S2501 to S2508 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main process is not constant and fluctuates. Therefore, by repeatedly updating the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 using the remaining time, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 (that is, , the initial value of the first per random number counter C1, the initial value of the second per random number counter C4) can be randomly updated, and the values of the fluctuation type counter CS1 and the general figure fluctuation type counter CS2 are also randomly updated. can do. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult to grasp the processing contents for updating the judgment value related to the lottery of special symbols and normal symbols, and it is possible to prevent the execution of fraudulent games aiming at the timing when the judgment value corresponding to the win is acquired. can be suppressed.

In addition, in the process of S2509, if information on occurrence of power failure is stored in the RAM 203 (S2509: Yes), the power is shut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the power is turned off, and the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252. As a result, the NMI interrupt processing in FIG. 653 has been executed, so the processing at power-off from S2513 is executed. First, to prohibit the occurrence of each interrupt processing (S2513), to other control devices (peripheral control devices such as the payout control device 111 and the sound lamp control device 113) a power-off command indicating that the power has been cut off and transmit (S2514). Then, a RAM determination value is calculated, the value is stored (S2515), access to the RAM 203 is prohibited (S2516), and the infinite loop continues until the power supply is completely cut off and processing cannot be executed. Here, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in the backed up stack area and work area of the RAM 203 .

It should be noted that the processing of S2509 is performed at the end of a series of processing corresponding to the game state change performed in S2501 to S2508, or at the timing of the end of one cycle of the processing of S2511 and S2512 performed within the remaining time. It is running. Therefore, in the main processing of the main controller 110, information on the occurrence of power failure is confirmed at the timing when each setting is completed. It can start from the processing of S2501. That is, the process can be started from the process of S2501, as in the case of initialization in the start-up process. Therefore, even if the contents of each register used by the MPU 201 are not saved in the stack area or the value of the stack pointer is not saved in the process at power-off, the stack pointer is By setting to a predetermined value (initial value), the process can be started from S2501. Therefore, the control load on the main controller 110 can be reduced, and accurate control can be performed without the main controller 110 malfunctioning or running out of control.

Next, the jackpot control process (S2504) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 656 is a flow chart showing this jackpot control process (S2504). This jackpot control process (S2504) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 655), and information (command ), and processing for opening or closing the winning openings (first specific winning opening (large open opening) 65a, V winning opening 650a).

In the jackpot control process (S2504), first, it is determined whether it is time to start the jackpot of the special symbol (S2601). Specifically, the process of S910 of the first special symbol variation stop process (see Figure 639) or S1709 of the second special symbol variation stop process (see Figure 647) is executed, and the start of the special symbol jackpot is set. If so, it is determined that a special symbol jackpot is started. In the processing of S2601, when it is determined that the special symbol jackpot is the start timing (S2601: Yes), an opening command is set (S2602), and this processing ends.

It should be noted that the opening command may be configured to be delayed (variable) and transmitted according to the gaming state and the jackpot type. Specifically, an opening counter that is periodically updated (every 4 ms) is provided. Then, when a special symbol jackpot or a small hit is started, the opening counter is initialized to 0, and then the opening counter reaches a predetermined value (for example, 2500 for jackpot A and 5000 for jackpot B). When it becomes so, an opening command may be transmitted. By doing so, for example, when a big win is achieved in the left-handed game, the time until the start of the big win is lengthened, and when a big win is achieved in the right-handed game, the time until the start of the big win is lengthened. can be shortened. In this embodiment, when the jackpot is hit during the left-handed game, it is necessary to switch to the right-handed game as the jackpot game. According to the above configuration, it is possible to sufficiently secure the time to switch to the right-handed game (jackpot game) when the left-handed game results in a big hit. As a result, the operation burden on the player can be reduced.

On the other hand, in the process of S2601, if it is determined that it is not the special symbol jackpot start timing (S2601: No), then it is determined whether the special symbol jackpot is currently in progress (S2603). In the processing of this S2603, determination is performed by reading the game information relating to the winning game stored in the game state storage area 203k.

During the special symbol jackpot, the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are displaying the special symbol jackpot (including during the special symbol jackpot game), and during the special symbol jackpot. During the predetermined time after the end of the jackpot game. In the process of S2603, if it is determined that the special symbol jackpot is not in progress (S2603: No), this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the special symbol jackpot is in progress (S2603: Yes), then it is determined whether it is time to start a new round (S2604).

When it is determined that it is time to start a new round in the process of S2604 (S2604: Yes), a big hit operation setting process is executed (S2605). Details of this jackpot action setting process (S2605) will be described with reference to FIG. operation processing of the opening/closing plate 650b of the winning device 650) is executed.

Here, with reference to FIG. 657, the jackpot operation setting process (S2605), which is one process in the jackpot control process (S2504 in FIG. 656), will be described. FIG. 657 is a flow chart showing the contents of the jackpot operation setting process (S2605).

When the jackpot action setting process (S2605) is executed, first, among the opening action scenarios set corresponding to the jackpot of this time, the opening action corresponding to the number of rounds of the jackpot to be started this time is set. An operation scenario is read (S2701). Next, the opening operation of the opening/closing door 65f of the first specific winning opening 65 or the opening operation of the opening/closing plate 650b of the V winning opening 650a is set by the data read in the process of S2701 (S2702). Then, a round number command indicating the number of rounds to be newly started is set (S2703), and then this process is terminated.

In this way, each operation of the first variable winning device 65 and the second variable winning device 650 is set at the start of each round. can be suppressed. Also, although detailed description is omitted, a round command is set to indicate that a new round game is to be executed. The round command set here is output to the sound lamp control device 113, and the sound lamp control device 113 side is configured to be able to determine the progress of the jackpot game being executed. Therefore, based on the round command received from the main control device 110, it is possible to display in the main display area Dm of the third pattern display device 81 what round the game is currently in.

In addition, in the present embodiment, as the round command set by the main controller 110, a round command including information indicating the number of rounds of the round game to be executed is set. Instead, it may be configured to set a round command including only information indicating that the round game has been newly started. In this case, means for measuring the number of round commands received during one jackpot game is provided on the side of the voice ramp control device 113, and the number of rounds of the round game to be executed this time is provided on the side of the voice ramp control device 113. may be calculated, and the display mode of the number of rounds displayed on the third symbol display device 81 may be set based on the calculation result. By configuring in this way, the amount of information included in the round command set by main controller 110 can be reduced, so that the load on main controller 110 can be reduced.

Returning to FIG. 656, the description continues. In the process of S2604, if it is determined that it is not time to start a new round (S2604: No), it is determined whether or not the condition for closing the winning opening is satisfied (S2606). If it is determined that the condition for closing the winning opening is established (S2606: Yes), the operation for closing the winning opening is set (S2607), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S2606 that the conditions for closing the winning opening are not established (S2606: No), it is determined whether it is time to start the ending period (S2608). The start timing of the ending period is the final round of the jackpot game (the second round in the case of jackpot A) is completed, the open/close door 65f is closed, and the waiting time (in this embodiment, , 3 seconds) has elapsed, it is determined that it is time to start the ending effect. When it is determined that it is time to start the ending effect (S2608: Yes), an ending command indicating the start of the ending is set (S2609), and this process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S2608, if it is determined that it is not the start timing of the ending effect (S2608: No), then it is determined whether or not it is the end timing of the jackpot (S2610). It should be noted that the end timing of the jackpot is, specifically, the end timing of the set ending effect. In the processing of S2610, when it is determined that it is the end timing of the big win (end timing of the ending effect) (S2610: Yes), the end processing of the big win is executed (S2611), and this processing ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is not the end timing of the ending period (S2610: No), this processing ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 658, the details of the jackpot ending process (S2611), which is one process in the jackpot control process (see S2404 in FIG. 656), will be described. FIG. 658 is a flow chart showing the contents of the jackpot ending process (S2611). In this jackpot end processing (S2611), the probability variation limit number of times and the time saving limit number of times are set, or the already set probability variation limit number of times and the time saving limit number of times are updated (subtracted). A process for setting the game state after the end of the jackpot game is executed according to the jackpot type and the situation of each limit number of times.

When the jackpot end process (S2611) is executed, first, the probability variation limit update process is executed (S2801). In the probability variation limit update process (S2801), based on the winning jackpot type, the processing for setting the high probability state of the special symbol, and the upper limit value that can continuously set the high probability state of the special symbol. A process for setting the counter 203h and updating (subtracting) the set probability variation limit number of times is executed.

Here, with reference to FIG. 659, the details of the probability variation limit update process (S2801), which is one process in the jackpot end process (see S2611 in FIG. 658), will be described. FIG. 659 is a flow chart showing the details of the variable probability limit update process (S2801). In this probability variation limit update process (S2801), first, the type of the big hit being executed this time is read out (S2901). Then, it is determined whether the value of the variable probability limit counter 203h is greater than 0 (S2903). If it is determined that the value of the probability variation limit counter 203h is not a value greater than 0 (S2903: No), the probability variation limit, which is the upper limit value that can continuously set the high probability state of the special symbol, is not set. Therefore, the value of the variable probability limit number counter 203h is set to 40 (S2904), the variable probability flag 203g is set to ON (S2905), and the process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S2903, the value of the probability variation limit counter 203h is a value greater than 0, that is, when it is determined that the jackpot has been elected in the high probability state of the special symbol (S2903: Yes), the probability variation The value of the limit number counter 203h is subtracted (updated) by 1 (S2906), and then it is determined whether the value of the probability variation limit number counter 203h after the subtraction is 0 (S2907). If it is determined that the value of the probability variation limit number counter 203h is not 0 (S2907: No), the high probability state of the special symbol can be continuously set, so the above-described S2905 process is executed, End this process. On the other hand, in the process of S2907, when it is determined that the value of the probability variation limit number counter 203h is 0 (S2907: Yes), since it reaches the upper limit value that can continuously set the high probability state of the special symbol, the probability variation limit The arrival flag 203u is set to ON (S2908). Then, the process ends.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 659, in the thirty-fifth embodiment, a high probability state of special symbols is set after the end of the jackpot game for all of the jackpot types set when winning the jackpot of special symbols. Since the contents are defined, it is configured not to execute the process for setting the low probability state of the special symbol based on the jackpot type, but for example, as a modification of the 35th embodiment, the jackpot type If you have a jackpot type in which a special pattern low probability state (normal state, time saving state) is set after the jackpot game ends, the special pattern low probability state is set based on the jackpot type in progress. Processing for setting (S2902, S2910, S2911) is executed.

In the process of S2902, the jackpot type currently being executed read out in the process of S2901 is a jackpot type in which a high probability state (first variable state or second variable state) of special symbols is set after the end of the jackpot game. (S2902).

In the process of S2902, when it is determined that the jackpot type being executed this time is a jackpot type in which a high probability state (first variable probability state or second variable probability state) of special symbols is set after the end of the jackpot game. (S2902: Yes), the process proceeds to S2903 described above.

On the other hand, in the process of S2902, the jackpot type being executed this time is not the jackpot type in which the high probability state of special symbols is set after the end of the jackpot game (it is the jackpot type in which the low probability state of special symbols is set). When it is determined (S2902: No), it is determined whether the value of the probability variation limit number counter 203h is greater than 0 (S2910). If it is determined that the value of the probability variation limit number counter 203h is not greater than 0 (S2910: No), this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S2910, if it is determined that the value of the variable probability limit number counter 203h is a value greater than 0 (S2910: Yes), the jackpot is elected in the high probability state of the special symbol, and the jackpot is low after the game ends. Since the probability state is set, the value of the probability variation limit number counter 203h for measuring the number of times that the high probability state of the special symbol is continuously set is cleared to 0 (S2911), and the process ends. do.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the number of times until reaching the probability variation limit (the value initially set to the probability variation limit counter 203h) is set to 40 times, but not limited to this, 20 times, 30 times, etc. You can set the type. In the case of such a configuration, it is preferable to determine the number of times (the value initially set to the probability variation limit number counter 203h) until reaching the probability variation limit based on the winning jackpot type and the like. With this configuration, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to predict at what timing the variable probability limit will be reached, so that the interest in the game can be improved.

Returning to FIG. 658, the description continues. After executing the variable probability limit update process (S2801), next, the time saving limit update process (S2802) is executed. The detailed explanation of the time saving limit update process (S2802) will be described later with reference to FIG. A process for updating (subtracting) the value of the set time saving limit counter 203i is executed.

Here, with reference to FIG. 660, details of the time saving limit update process (S2802), which is one process in the jackpot end process (see S2611 in FIG. 658), will be described. FIG. 660 is a flow chart showing the contents of the time saving limit update process (S2802). In this time-saving limit update process (S2802), based on the jackpot type won, the process for setting the high probability state of the normal design and the upper limit value that can continuously set the high probability state of the normal design are set. Also, processing for updating the remaining number of times with respect to the set upper limit value is executed.

In the time saving limit update process (S2802), first, the big hit type of the special symbol being executed is read out (S3001). Next, it is determined whether the executed jackpot type read out in the process of S3001 is a jackpot type in which a normal pattern high probability state (first probability variable state, time saving state) is set after the end of the jackpot (S3002). . After the end of the jackpot, when it is determined that it is the jackpot type in which the high probability state of the normal pattern is set (S3002: Yes), it is determined whether the value of the time reduction limit number counter 203i is greater than 0 (S3003). . When the value of the time saving limit number counter 203i is not a value greater than 0, that is, when it is determined that the probability state of the normal symbol at the time of winning the jackpot is a low probability state (S3003: No), the time saving limit number counter 203i Since the value that can set the high probability state of the normal design continuously is not set to the value, 10 is set to the value of the time saving limit number counter 203i (S3004), and the time saving flag 203f is set to ON (S3005). . Then, the process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S3003, when it is determined that the value of the time saving limit number counter 203i is a value greater than 0 (S3003: Yes), the value of the time saving limit number counter 203i is subtracted by 1 (S3007), and then , it is determined whether or not the value of the time saving limit counter 203i after the subtraction is 0 (S3008). When it is determined that the value of the time saving limit number counter 203i after the subtraction is 0 (S3008: Yes), since the upper limit value for setting the high probability state of the normal symbol is continuously reached, the time saving limit reaching flag 203v is set. It is set to ON (S3009), and this processing ends. On the other hand, in the process of S3008, when it is determined that the value of the reduced time limit counter 203i is not 0 (S3008: No), the process of S3005 described above is executed, and this process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S3002, when it is determined that the jackpot type being executed this time is not a jackpot in which the high probability state of the normal symbol is set after the jackpot game ends (S3002: No), next, It is determined whether the value of the time saving limit counter 203i is a value greater than 0 (a value of 1 or more) (S3011). In the process of S3011, when it is determined that the value of the time saving limit number counter 203i is a value greater than 0 (S3011: Yes), the value of the time saving limit number counter 203i is cleared to 0 (S3012), and this process is executed. finish. On the other hand, in the processing of S3011, when it is determined that the value of the time saving limit number counter 203i is not greater than 0 (is 0) (S3011: No), this processing is terminated as it is.

In the present embodiment, 10 times are set as the time saving limit number of times, but without being limited to this, it may be configured to be determined from a plurality of set numbers such as 20 times and 30 times. .

Returning to FIG. 658, the description continues. After executing the time saving limit update process (S2802), information indicating the game state set after the end of the jackpot is next stored in the game state storage area 203k based on the jackpot type currently being executed (S2803). . Then, from the time saving grant table 202e (see FIG. 617), based on the jackpot type being executed, the data of the winning state storage area 203t, and the state of the probability variation limit reaching flag 203u and the time saving limit reaching flag 203v Readout of the number of working hours is executed (S2804).

Next, in the processing of S2804, the number of times of working hours read from the working hours granting table 202e (see FIG. 617) is set to the counter value of the working hours counter 203m (S2805), and the working hours setting information command corresponding to the setting contents is set (S2806 ). Then, a state command corresponding to the game state after the end of the jackpot game, the value of the variable probability limit number counter 203h and the value of the time reduction limit number counter 203i is set (S2807).

Then, the variation pattern scenario corresponding to the jackpot type being executed, the data of the winning state storage area 203t, the state of the probability variation limit arrival flag 203u and the time reduction limit arrival flag 203v, See the variation pattern scenario table 202f. (S2808), and data indicating the scenario determined in the process of S2808 is stored in the variation pattern scenario storage area 203w (S2809).

Next, in the processing of S2810, it is determined whether or not the stored data is scenario data including the special variation pattern table 202d5 (S2810). If it is determined that the stored data is scenario data including the special variation pattern table 202d5 (S2810: Yes), the special state flag 203x is set to ON (S2811), and the process proceeds to S2812.

On the other hand, in the processing of S2810, if it is determined that the stored data is not the data of the scenario including the special variation pattern table 202d5 (S2810: No), the processing of S2811 is skipped and the processing of S2812 is performed. In the processing of S2812, the end of the jackpot is set (S2812), and this processing is terminated.

Next, with reference to the flow chart of Drawing 661, small hit control processing (S2505) performed by MPU201 in main control unit 110 is explained. FIG. 661 is a flow chart showing this small hit control process (S2505). This small winning control process (S2505) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 655), and when the pachinko machine 10 is in a special symbol small winning state, various effects corresponding to the small winning are executed. It is processing for setting information (command) and opening or closing the second variable winning device 650 .

In the small hit control process (S2505), first, it is determined whether or not it is time to start the small hit (S3101). When it is time to start the small hit (S3101: Yes), the small hit opening command is set (S3102), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that it is not the time to start the small hit (S3101: No), it is determined whether or not it is during the small hit (S3103). If it is determined that it is not during the small hit (S3103: No), the process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the small winning is in progress (S3103: Yes), it is determined whether or not it is time to open the second variable winning device 650 (S3104). If it is determined that it is time for the opening operation (S3104: Yes), the opening solenoid is set to ON (S3105), and the process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is not the timing for the opening operation of the second variable winning device 650 (S3104: No), it is determined whether it is the timing for ending the small winning (S3106). When it is determined that it is time to end the small hit (S3106: Yes), the small hit flag 203p is set to OFF (S3107), and the process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is not the timing of ending the small hit (S3106: No), this process is terminated.

<Regarding control processing executed by the audio ramp control device in the thirty-fifth embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 662 to 676, each control process executed by the MPU 221 within the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. The processing of the MPU 221 can be broadly classified into startup processing that is started upon power-on and main processing that is executed after the startup processing.

First, with reference to FIG. 662, start-up processing executed by MPU 221 in audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 662 is a flow chart showing this startup process. This start-up process is started when the power is turned on.

When the start-up process is executed, first, an initial setting process is executed upon power-on (S4001). Specifically, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. After that, depending on whether or not the power-off processing flag is ON, the power-off processing in S4116 (see FIG. ) is started during execution (S4002). As will be described later with reference to FIG. 663, when the audio lamp control device 113 receives information on the occurrence of power failure from the main controller 110 (see S4113 in FIG. 663), it executes power failure processing in S4116. Before the power-off processing is executed, the power-off processing flag is turned on, and after the power-off processing is completed, the power-off processing flag is turned off. Therefore, whether or not the power-off processing of S4116 is being executed can be determined by the state of the power-off processing in-progress flag.

If the power-off processing flag is off (S4002: No), the startup process this time was started after the power was completely shut off, or after a momentary power failure occurred and the power was shut off in S4116. Either it was started after the execution of the process was completed, or it was started when only the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 was reset due to noise (without receiving a power off command from the main controller 110). be. Therefore, in these cases, it is checked whether the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (S4003).

Destruction of data in the RAM 223 is confirmed as follows. That is, data as a keyword of "55AAh" is written in a specific area of the RAM 223 by the process of S4006. Therefore, the data stored in the specific area is checked, and if the data is "55AAh", there is no data destruction in the RAM 223. Conversely, if it is not "55AAh", it can be confirmed that the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed. If data destruction of RAM223 is confirmed (S4003: Yes), it will transfer to S4004 and will start initialization of RAM223. On the other hand, if destruction of data in the RAM 223 is not confirmed (S4003: No), the process proceeds to S4008.

It should be noted that if the startup process this time is started after the power is completely cut off, the keyword "55AAh" is not stored in the specific area of the RAM 223 (the memory of the RAM 223 is lost due to the power cut). from), it is determined that the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (S4003: Yes), and the process proceeds to S4004. On the other hand, whether the current start-up processing was started after a momentary power failure occurred and after the execution of the power-off processing in S4116 was completed, or only the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 was reset due to noise or the like. If the operation is started with the above, the keyword "55AAh" is stored in the specific area of the RAM 223, so the data in the RAM 223 is determined to be normal (S4003: No), and the process proceeds to S4008.

If the power-off processing flag is on (S4002: Yes), the startup process this time is after a momentary power failure occurs, and during execution of the power-off process in S4116, the sound lamp control device 113 It is started by resetting the MPU 221 of . In such a case, the memory state of the RAM 223 is not necessarily correct because the power-off process is in progress. Therefore, in such a case, the control cannot be continued, so the process moves to S4004 and the initialization of the RAM 223 is started.

In the processing of S4004, the storage area of the entire range of RAM 223 is checked (S4004). As a checking method, first, "0FFh" is written for each byte, read for each byte to confirm whether it is "0FFh", and if it is "0FFh", it is determined that the data is normal. Such writing and confirmation for each byte is performed in the order of "0FFh", "55h", "0AAh", and "00h". All storage areas of the RAM 223 are cleared to 0 by this read/write check of the RAM 223 .

If it is determined that the read/write check is normal for all storage areas of the RAM 223 (S4005: Yes), the keyword "55AAh" is written in the specific area of the RAM 223 to set RAM destruction check data (S4006). By confirming the keyword "55AAh" written in this specific area, it is checked whether or not the RAM 223 has data destruction. On the other hand, if an abnormality in the read/write check is detected in any storage area of the RAM 223 (S4005: No), the abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified (S4007), and an infinite loop is performed until the power is cut off. Abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified by the display lamp 34 . In addition, it is possible to output a sound by the sound output device 226 to notify the abnormality of the RAM 223, or to transmit an error command to the display control device 114 and display an error message on the third symbol display device 81. can be

In the processing of S4008, it is determined whether or not the power-off flag is turned on (S4008). The power-off flag is turned on when the power-off process of S4116 is executed (see S4116 in FIG. 663). That is, since the power-off flag is turned on before the power-off processing of S4116 is executed, the process of S4008 is reached with the power-off flag turned on because the startup processing this time is instantaneous. This is the case where the process is started after the power failure has occurred and the execution of the power-off process in S4116 has been completed. Therefore, in such a case (S4008: Yes), the work area of the RAM is cleared to initialize each process of the sound lamp control device 113 (S4009), the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S4010), and then , interrupt permission is set (S4011), and the process proceeds to the main process. The work area of the RAM 223 refers to an area other than the area for storing commands and the like received from the main controller 110 .

On the other hand, the reason why the process of S4008 is reached with the power-off flag turned off is that the current start-up process was started after the power supply was completely shut off, for example. This is the case where the processing has been reached, or only the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 has been reset due to noise or the like (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110). Therefore, in such a case (S4008: No), S4009, which is processing for clearing the work area of the RAM 223, is skipped, and the process proceeds to S4010 to set the initial value of the RAM 223 (S4010).

The reason why the clearing process of S4009 is skipped is that when the process of S4008 is reached from S4004 via the process of S4006, all the storage areas of the RAM 223 have already been cleared by the process of S4004, When only the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 is reset due to noise or the like and start-up processing is started, the data in the work area of the RAM 223 is saved without being cleared, so that the audio lamp control device 113 This is because the control of can be continued.

Next, referring to FIG. 663, main processing executed by the MPU 221 in the audio ramp control device 113 after startup processing of the audio ramp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 663 is a flowchart showing this main processing. When the main process is executed, first, it is determined whether or not 1 millisecond or more has passed since the main process was started or since the process of S4101 was last executed (S4101). If it has not passed (S4101: No), the process proceeds to S4111 without performing the processes of S4102 to S4110. In the processing of S4101, it is determined whether or not 1 millisecond has passed because S4102 to S4110 are processing related to display (effect), and there is no need to edit in a short cycle (within 1 millisecond). , S4111 and the variable display setting process of S4112 are preferably executed in a short cycle. By executing the process of S4111 in a short cycle, it is possible to prevent the command transmitted from the main controller 110 from being missed, and by executing the process of S4111 in a short cycle, the command received by the command determination process Based on this, the setting regarding the variable display effect can be performed without delay.

If 1 millisecond or more has elapsed in the processing of S4101 (S4101: Yes), first, various commands for the display control device 114 set by the processing of S4103 to S4113 are sent to the display control device 114. Output processing is executed (S4102). Next, the output of each lamp is set so as to set the lighting mode of the display lamp 34 and the lighting mode of the lamp edited in the process of S4108 described later (S4103), and then the power-on notification process is executed (S4104). In the power-on notification process, when the power is turned on, it is notified that the power has been turned on for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds). will be Also, a command may be sent to the display control device 114 to notify that power is supplied on the screen of the third pattern display device 81 . Note that if the power is not turned on, the process proceeds to S4105 without notifying by the power-on notification process.

In the process of S4105, a customer waiting effect is executed, and then the pending number display update process is executed (S4106). In the customer waiting effect, when the pachinko machine 10 is not played by a player for a predetermined period of time, a setting such as switching the display of the third symbol display device 81 to a title screen is performed, and the setting is a command in the display control device. 114.

After that, frame button input monitoring/effect processing is executed (S4107). In this frame button input monitoring and effect processing, input as to whether or not the frame button 22 operated by the player has been pressed is monitored in order to enhance the effect of the effect, and the input of the frame button 22 is confirmed. This is the process of setting to perform production. In this process, when the operation of the frame button 22 by the player is detected, a frame button operation command is set to notify the display control device 114 that the frame button 22 has been operated.

When the frame button input monitoring/effect processing is finished, the lamp editing processing is executed (S4108), and then the sound editing/output processing is executed (S4109). In the lamp editing process, the lighting patterns of the illumination parts 29 to 33 are set so as to correspond to the display performed by the third pattern display device 81 . In the sound editing/output process, the output pattern of the voice output device 226 is set so as to correspond to the display performed by the third pattern display device 81, and the sound is output from the voice output device 226 according to the setting.

After the processing of S4109, liquid crystal effect execution management processing is executed (S4110). After that, the process proceeds to S4111. The liquid crystal effect execution management process (S4110) will be described later with reference to FIG. is set. Lamp edit processing of S4108 is executed based on the time set in this liquid crystal effect execution monitoring processing. It should be noted that the sound editing/output processing of S4109 is also executed at a time synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed by the third pattern display device 81. FIG.

After the processing of S4110, command determination processing (S4111) for performing processing according to the command received from the main controller 110 is executed, and the processing shifts to S4112. The details of this command determination process (S4111) will be described later with reference to FIG.

In the process of S4112, in order to display a variable display effect on the third symbol display device 81, a variable pattern command for display is generated based on the variable pattern command received from the main controller 110, and the command is sent to the display controller 114. Executes a variable display setting process, which is a process for setting to transmit to. Details of this variable display setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

When the process of S4112 is completed, it is determined whether or not the work RAM 233 stores power failure occurrence information (S4113). The power-off occurrence information is stored when a power-off command is received from main controller 110 . If power-off occurrence information is stored in the processing of S4113 (S4113: Yes), both the power-off flag and the power-off processing flag are turned on (S4115), and the power-off processing is executed (S4116). After the power-off processing is executed, the power-off processing in progress flag is turned off (S4117), and then the processing is looped infinitely. In the power-off processing, interrupt processing is prohibited, each output port is turned off, and outputs from the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 are turned off. In addition, the memory of information on occurrence of power failure is also erased.

On the other hand, if the power-off occurrence information is not stored in the process of S4113 (S4113: No), it is determined whether or not the RAM 223 is destroyed based on the keyword stored in the RAM 223 (S4114), and the RAM 223 is destroyed. If not (S4114: No), the process returns to S4101, and the main process is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the RAM 223 is destroyed (S4114: Yes), the process is looped infinitely to stop execution of subsequent processes. Here, since the main processing is not executed when it is determined that the RAM is destroyed and an infinite loop is performed, the display by the third symbol display device 81 does not change after that. Therefore, since the player can know that an abnormality has occurred, the player can call the hall clerk or the like and ask them to repair the pachinko machine 10 or the like. Further, when it is confirmed that the RAM 223 is destroyed, the RAM destruction may be notified by the voice output device 226 or the lamp display device 227 .

Next, the command determination processing (S4111) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 664 is a flow chart showing this command determination processing (S4111). This command determination process (S4111) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 663) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp controller 113, and as described above, determines the command received from the main controller 110. . Details of the command determination process (S4111) will be described below.

In the command determination process (S4111), first, from the command storage area 223a provided in the RAM 223, among the unprocessed commands, the first command received from the main controller 110 is read and analyzed, and the fluctuation pattern from the main controller 110 is read and analyzed. It is determined whether or not a command has been received (S4201). When it is determined that the variation pattern command is received from the main control device 110 (S4201: Yes), the variation start flag (special figure 1 variation start flag 223e, special figure) corresponding to the special figure type read from the received variation pattern command FIG. 2 fluctuation start flag 223f) is set to ON (S4202), a fluctuation pattern is extracted from the received command (S4203), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S4201, if it is determined that the variation pattern command has not been received (S4201: No), then whether the special figure 1 stop type command or the special figure 2 stop type command has been received is determined (S4204). If it is determined that either the special figure 1 stop type command or the special figure 2 stop type command is received (S4204: Yes), the stop type selection flag corresponding to the special figure type read from the received stop type command ( Special Figure 1 stop type selection flag 223g, Special Figure 2 stop type selection flag 223i) is set to ON (S4205), the stop type is extracted from the received command (S4206), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the processing of S4204, if it is determined that the special figure 1 stop type command or the special figure 2 stop type command is not received (S4204: No), the number of pending balls command is received from the main controller 110 (S4207). If it is determined that the command for the number of reserved balls has been received (S4207: Yes), the number of reserved balls is extracted from the received command, stored in the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c (S4208), and this process is terminated. do.

On the other hand, in the process of S4207, if it is determined that the command for the number of reserved balls has not been received (S4207: No), it is determined whether or not the winning command has been received from the main controller 110 (S4209). In the process of S4209, if it is determined that the winning command has been received (S4209: Yes), the information of the winning command received this time is set in the corresponding winning information storage area 223b (S4210), and this process ends.

In the process of S4209, if it is determined that the winning command has not been received (S4209: No), then it is determined whether or not the status command has been received from the main controller 110 (S4211). If it is determined that a status command has been received (S4211: Yes), status command processing is executed (S4212), and this processing ends. Details of this state command processing (S4212) will be described later with reference to FIG. The process of setting the probability variable state, the second probability variable state) and the winning game state (during the jackpot, during the small hit) in the secondary game state storage area 223j, and when receiving the limit related command, setting the update of the limit number of times Execute the process for

Next, in the process of S4211, when it discriminate|determines that the state command was not received (S4211:No), it discriminate|determines whether the time-saving related command was received (S4213). When it is determined that the time saving related command has been received (S4213: Yes), time saving related processing (S4214) is executed, and this processing ends. A detailed description of the time saving related process (S4214) will be given later with reference to FIG.

On the other hand, in the process of S4213, if it is determined that the time-saving related command has not been received (S4213: No), it is determined whether the winning related command has been received (S4215), and if it is determined that the winning related command has been received (S4215: Yes), hit-related processing is executed (S4216), and this processing ends. Details of the hit-related processing (S4216) will be described later with reference to FIG. It performs processing for causing the third symbol display device 81 to perform display.

In the processing of S4215, if it is determined that the win-related command has not been received (S4215: No), processing according to other commands is executed (S4217), and this processing ends. In the processing of S4217, if the other command is a command used by the sound lamp control device 113, the processing corresponding to the command is performed, the processing result is stored in the RAM 223, and if the command is used by the display control device 114, the command is processed. to the display control device 114 .

The command determination processing (S4111 in FIG. 664) executed by the sound lamp control device 113 of the present embodiment has been described above. , An order other than the order shown in the present embodiment may be used, for example, the process of determining whether or not a state command is received, either the special figure 1 variation pattern command or the special figure 2 variation pattern command The determination order may be defined so that it is executed before the process of determining whether or not it has been received.

By configuring in this way, when the variation pattern command and the state command are simultaneously output from the main control device 110, that is, during the first special symbol variation start processing of the main control device 110 (see S203 in FIG. 633) In the case where the first special symbol variation pattern selection process (see S307 in FIG. 636) is executed, the special figure 1 variation pattern command is set, and then the state command indicating that the game state has changed is set. Also, the game state currently set on the voice lamp control device 113 side can be determined earlier than the special figure 1 variation pattern command.

Therefore, for example, in the state where the first probability variable state is set, the special figure 1 jackpot is won, and the second probability variable state is set during the jackpot fluctuation, on the audio ramp control device 113 side, the second It is possible to easily set a variation performance corresponding to a variation pattern command that becomes a big hit variation in a state where it is determined that the probability variation state is set.

In addition, since the sound lamp control device 113 side is configured to define the receiving order of various commands output from the main control device 110, there is a need to define the output order of various commands on the main control device 110 side. can be reduced. Therefore, the control load of main controller 110 can be reduced.

Next, referring to FIG. 665, the state command processing (S4212) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 665 is a flowchart showing state command processing (S4212). This state command processing (S4212) is executed in the command determination processing (see S4111 in FIG. 664) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113, and the received game state command and limit-related command Based on, a process of updating the game state and the limit-related game state, and a process of determining the effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 are executed based on the updated game state.

In the state command process (S4212), first, it is determined whether or not a game state command has been received from the main controller 110 (S4301). In the process of S4301, when it is determined that the game state command has been received (S4301: Yes), the game state update process is executed (S4302), and the process proceeds to the process of S4303 which will be described later. On the other hand, in the process of S4301, when it is determined that the gaming state command has not been received from the main controller 110 (S4301: No), the process proceeds to S4303, which will be described later.

Here, referring to FIG. 666, the game state update process (S4302), which is one process in the state command process (S4212) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113, will be described. FIG. 666 is a flow chart showing the contents of the game state update process (S4302).

In the game state update process (S4302), first, information indicating the current game state is extracted from the received game state command, and information for indicating the current game state is stored in the secondary game state storage area 223j (S4401). ). Next, it is determined whether or not the received game state command is a command indicating that the game state will shift to the normal state (S4402).

In the process of S4402, if the received gaming state command is determined to be a command indicating a transition to the normal state (S4402: Yes), the values of the remaining probability variation number counter 223m and the remaining time short number counter 223n are set to 0 is set (S4403), and the processing ends. On the other hand, in the processing of S4402, if it is determined that the received gaming state command is not a command indicating that the gaming state transitions to the normal state (S4402: No), the gaming state changes to the second probability variable state A determination is made as to whether or not the command indicates transition (S4404).

In the processing of S4404, when the received command is determined to be a command indicating that the gaming state moves to the second probability variable state (S4404: Yes), the value of the remaining short time counter 223n is set to 0 (S4405), and the process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S4404, if it is determined that the received command is not a command indicating that the gaming state moves to the second probability variable state (S4404: No), then the received command is the game It is determined whether the command indicates that the state is to shift to the time saving state (S4406).

In the processing of S4406, if the received command is determined to be a command indicating that the gaming state is to shift to the time saving state (S4406: Yes), the value of the remaining probability variation counter 223m is set to 0 (S4407 ), the process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S4406, when it is determined that the received command is not a command indicating that the game state is to shift to the time saving state (S4406: No), this process is terminated as it is.

Returning to FIG. 665, the description continues. After executing the processing of S4301 or S4302, it is next determined whether or not a limit-related command has been received (S4303). In the process of S4303, if it is determined that the limit-related command has been received (S4303: Yes), the limit information update process (S4304) is executed, and the process proceeds to the process of S4305, which will be described later. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4303 that the limit-related command has not been received (S4303: No), the process proceeds to S4305, which will be described later.

Here, with reference to FIG. 667, the limit information update process (S4304), which is one process in the state command process (S4212) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113, will be described. FIG. 667 is a flow chart showing the details of the limit information update process (S4304). In the limit information update process (S4304), based on the command received from the main controller 110, the information on the variable probability limit and the short time limit is updated, and the command is set for the display control device 114.

In the limit information update process (S4304), first, it is determined whether or not the probability variation number setting command is received (S4501). When it is determined that the probability variation remaining number setting command is received (S4501: Yes), the probability variation remaining number is calculated based on the received command (S4502). Then, in the processing of S4502, the value of the calculated probability variation remaining number of times is set to the value of the remaining probability variation number counter 223m (S4503), and the process proceeds to S4504. On the other hand, in the processing of S4501, if it is determined that the variable probability setting command is not received (S4501: No), the processing of S4502 to S4503 is skipped, and the processing proceeds to S4504.

In the processing of S4504, it is determined whether or not the number of times of working hours setting command has been received (S4504). When it is determined that the time saving frequency setting command is received (S4504: Yes), the remaining time saving frequency is calculated based on the received command (S4505). Next, the value of the remaining number of times of reduced working hours calculated in the process of S4505 is set to the value of the remaining number of reduced working hours counter 223n (S4506), and the process proceeds to S4507. On the other hand, in the processing of S4504, if it is determined that the time saving number setting command has not been received (S4504: No), the processing of S4505 to S4506 is skipped, and the processing of S4507 is performed.

In the processing of S4507, it is determined whether or not the variable probability limit number command has been received (S4507). In the processing of S4507, if it is determined that the probability variation limit number command has been received (S4507: Yes), since it is the timing of updating the probability variation limit number, the value of the remaining probability variation number counter 223m is subtracted by 1 (S4508), S4509 to process. On the other hand, in the process of S4507, when it is determined that the variable probability limit number command has not been received (S4507: No), the process of S4508 is skipped and the process proceeds to S4509.

In the processing of S4509, it is determined whether or not a time saving limit number of times command has been received (S4509). When it is determined that the time saving limit number command has been received (S4509: Yes), 1 is subtracted from the value of the remaining time saving number counter 223n (S4510), and the process proceeds to S4511. On the other hand, in the process of S4509, if it is determined that the time saving limit number of times command has not been received (S4509: No), the process of S4510 is skipped and the process proceeds to S4511.

In the processing of S4511, it is determined whether or not the variable probability limit reach command is received (S4511). In the process of S4511, if it is determined that the probability variation limit reaching command has been received (S4511: Yes), since the probability variation limit number of times has been reached, the probability variation limit flag 223o is set to ON (S4512), and the remaining probability variation The value of the number counter 223m is reset to 0 (S4513), and the process proceeds to S4514. On the other hand, in the processing of S4511, if it is determined that the variable probability limit reaching command is not received (S4511: No), the processing of S4512 to S4513 is skipped, and the processing of S4514 is performed.

In the processing of S4514, it is determined whether or not the time saving limit reaching command has been received (S4514). If it is determined that the time saving limit reaching command has been received (S4514: Yes), the time saving limit number of times has been reached, so the time saving limit flag 223p is set to ON (S4515), and the value of the remaining time saving number counter 223n is reset to 0 (S4516), and the process proceeds to S4517. On the other hand, in the processing of S4514, if it is determined that the time saving limit reaching command is not received (S4514: No), the processing of S4515 to S4516 is skipped and the processing of S4517 is performed. In the process of S4517, a display command corresponding to each piece of update information executed in the processes of S4501 to S4516 is set (S4517), and this process ends.

Returning to FIG. 665, the description continues. In the process of S4303, if it is determined that the limit-related command has not been received (S4303: No), or if the limit information update process (S4304) is executed, then the effect mode setting process (S4305) is executed. do. A detailed description of the effect mode setting process (S4305) will be given later with reference to FIG. Then, other processing corresponding to the received status command information is executed (S4306), and this processing ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 668, the effect mode setting process (S4305), which is one process in the state command process (S4212) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113, will be described. FIG. 668 is a flow chart showing detailed contents of the effect mode setting process (S4305). In the production mode setting process (S4305), the setting status of each remaining number counter (remaining probability variable number counter 223m, remaining time short number counter 223n) and each limit flag (probability variable limit flag 223o, time reduction limit flag 223p), and the current gaming state Based on and, the process of setting different effect modes displayed in the third symbol display device 81 is executed.

In the effect mode setting process (S4305), first, it is determined whether both the probability variation limit flag 223o and the time reduction limit flag 223p are ON (S4601). If it is determined that both the probability variation limit flag 223o and the time reduction limit flag 223p are on (S4601: Yes), the probability variation limit number and the time reduction limit number of times are reached at the same time, so in the production mode storage area 223k Data indicating the SPECIAL mode is stored (S4602), and the process proceeds to S4605.

On the other hand, in the process of S4601, if it is determined that neither the probability variation limit flag 223o nor the time reduction limit flag 223p is turned on (S4601: No), each remaining number counter (remaining probability variation number counter 223m, remaining time short number counter 223n) and each limit flag (probability variable limit flag 223o, time saving limit flag 223p) setting status, based on the current game state, referring to the production mode selection table 222b (see Figure 622), production mode to be executed is determined (S4603). Next, the effect mode determined in the process of S4603 is stored in the effect mode storage area 223k (S4604), and the process proceeds to the process of S4605 which will be described later.

When S4602 or S4604 is executed, next, a display command corresponding to the effect mode stored in the effect mode storage area 223k in the process of S4602 or S4604 is set (S4605), and this process ends.

The display command set here is transmitted to the display control device 114 in the command output processing (S4102) of the main processing (see FIG. 663), and when the display control device 114 receives this command, the third symbol display device In the main display area Dm of 81, various presentation modes are displayed.

Next, with reference to Drawing 669, time saving related processing (S4214) performed by MPU221 in sound lamp control device 113 is explained. FIG. 669 is a flowchart showing the time saving related process (S4214). This time-saving related process (S4214) is executed in the command determination process (see S4111 in FIG. 664) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113, and the time-saving related command from the main controller 110 is received, based on the progress of the time-saving game state, processing for executing the update of the effect (EXTRA mode) of the time-saving game state displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

When the time saving related processing (S4214) is executed, first, reading of the information on the production mode stored in the production mode storage area 223k is executed (S4701). Next, in the process of S4701, it is determined whether the read effect mode is EXTRA mode (S4702). When it is determined that the read effect mode is the EXTRA mode (S4702: Yes), the value of the time saving counter 223u is updated based on the received information (S4703).

Next, it is determined whether the value of the time saving counter 223u updated in the process of S4703 is 10, that is, whether the number of remaining fluctuations in the time saving state is 10 times (S4704). When the updated value of the time saving counter 223u is not 10 (S4704: No), the command for display corresponding to the value of the time saving counter 223u is set (S4705), and this processing ends as it is. The display command set here is transmitted to the display control device 114 in the command output processing (S4102) of the main processing (see FIG. 663). The number of remaining fluctuations in the time saving game state (the number of remaining fluctuations in the EXTRA mode) displayed in the display area Dm6 of the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81 shown in FIG.

On the other hand, in the process of S4704, when it is determined that the value of the time saving counter 223u updated in the process of S4703 is 10 (S4704: Yes), the effect mode to prompt the end of the EXTRA mode is set (S4706), and this process exit. In the process of S4702, if it is determined that the effect mode read out in the process of S4701 is not the EXTRA mode (that is, the effect mode other than the EXTRA mode) (S4702: No), the process of S4703 to S4706 is skipped. , the process ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 670, the hit-related process (S4216), which is one process in the command determination process (see FIG. 664) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113, will be described. FIG. 670 is a flow chart showing the details of the win-related process (S4216). In this winning related process (S4216), as a result of the special symbol lottery, the third symbol display device 81 is caused to execute the effect display corresponding to the big winning game or the small winning game executed when the big winning or the small winning is won. , and processing corresponding to various commands sent from the main controller 110 when a big win or a small win is won is executed.

In addition, when receiving a prize ball number command for indicating the number of prize balls won during a winning game (big win game, small win game), the number of prize balls indicated by the prize ball number command is accumulated and accumulated A process of setting a display number-of-balls command based on the result is executed.

In the winning-related process (S4216), first, it is determined whether the command received from the main controller 110 is a jackpot-related command (S4801). When it is determined that the received command is a jackpot-related command (S4801: Yes), a jackpot-related process is executed (S4802), and then this process ends.

Here, with reference to FIG. 671, the jackpot related process (S4802), which is one process in the winning related process (S4216 in FIG. 670) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113, will be described. FIG. 671 is a flow chart showing the contents of the jackpot related process (S4802). In the jackpot-related processing, processing is performed to cause the third symbol display device 81 to execute an effect display corresponding to the jackpot game to be executed when the jackpot is won. Processing corresponding to various commands sent from 110 is executed.

In the jackpot-related processing (S4802), first, by the hit-related processing (see FIG. 670), it is determined whether or not the received hit-related command is a jackpot start command (S4901). When it is determined that the received command is a jackpot start command (S4901: Yes), a display jackpot start command is set. (S4902). The display jackpot start command set here is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is executed by the MPU 221 in the command output processing (S4102) of the main processing (see FIG. 663). It is transmitted toward the display control device 114 . When the display control device 114 receives the display jackpot start command, the display control device 114 displays an effect suggesting the start of the jackpot on the third symbol display device 81 .

After executing the processing of S4902, next, reading of the current production mode is executed from the production mode storage area 223k (S4903). Then, in the processing of S4903, it is determined whether the read production mode is the normal mode or the time saving mode (S4904). If it is determined that the read production mode is the normal mode or the time saving mode (S4904: Yes), the production mode of the RUSH acquisition challenge corresponding to the jackpot type won this time is determined (S4905). Then, a display command for indicating the effect mode determined in the process of S4905 is set (S4906), and this process ends.

On the other hand, in the processing of S4904, when it is determined that the production mode read in the processing of S4903 is the production mode that is neither the normal mode nor the time saving mode (S4904: No), it corresponds to the jackpot type elected this time. The mode of presentation is determined (S4907), and this processing ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S4901, when it is determined that the jackpot start command has not been received (S4901: No), it is then determined whether or not the round number command has been received (S4908). If it is determined that the round number command has been received (S4908: Yes), the round number command for display is set based on the round number (S4909), and then this process ends. In this embodiment, information indicating the number of rounds is transmitted from the main controller 110 as the number-of-rounds command. In order to reduce the amount of command data to be transmitted from the control device 110, when information for indicating that a new round has started is transmitted from the main control device 110 as a round update command, an audio lamp control device The RAM 223 of 113 is provided with a round number accumulation counter for accumulating the number of received round update commands when a round update command is received. It may be configured to calculate the number and set the number-of-rounds command for display.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4908 that the round number command has not been received (S4908: No), then it is determined whether or not the ending command has been received (S4910). If it is determined that the ending command has not been received (S4910: No), this processing ends. On the other hand, in the process of S4910, if it is determined that the ending command has been received (S4910: Yes), the process proceeds to S4911.

In the process of S4911, based on the information stored in the secondary game state storage area 223j and the jackpot type being executed, the game state to be set after the jackpot game ends is predicted (S4911), and predicted in the process of S4911. The effect mode corresponding to the game state is determined (S4912), the ending command for display including the determined effect mode is set (S4913), and this processing is terminated.

Returning to FIG. 670, the description continues. In the process of S4801, when it is determined that the received command is not a big hit related command (S4801: No), it is determined whether or not the received command is a small hit related command (S4803). When it is determined that the received command is a small hit related command (S4803: Yes), a small hit related process (S4804) is executed, and then this process ends.

Here, with reference to FIG. 672, the small hit related process (S4804) which is one process in the hit related process (S4216 in FIG. 670) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described. Figure 672 is the flowchart which shows the contents of small hit related processing (S4804). In the small winning related processing, processing is performed for causing the third symbol display device 81 to execute an effect display corresponding to the small winning game executed when the small winning is won. , processes corresponding to various commands sent from the main controller 110 are executed.

In the small hit related process (S4804), first, it is determined whether or not the hit related command received by the hit related process (S4216 in FIG. 670) is a small hit start command (S5001). In the processing of S5001, when it is determined that the small winning start command is received (S5001: Yes), the small winning start command for display is set (S5002), and then this processing ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S5001, when it is determined that the received command is not the small winning start command (S5001: No), it is determined whether the ending command is received (S5003). If it is determined that the received command is not the ending command (S5003: No), this processing ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the received command is the ending command (S5003: Yes), the current effect mode is read from the effect mode storage area 223k (S5004).

Next, it is determined whether or not the effect mode read in the process of S5004 is the revenge mode (S5005). When it is determined that the current production mode is the revenge mode (S5005: Yes), 1 is added to the value of the small hit number counter 223t (S5006), and then the value of the remaining probability variation number counter 223m is read. (S5007). Then, based on the value of the small hit number counter 223t added in the process of S5006 and the value of the remaining probability variable number counter 223m read out in the process of S5007, refer to the challenge mode transition table 222d (see FIG. 624 (b)) It is determined whether or not to shift to the challenge mode (S5008).

Next, it is determined whether or not the transition to the challenge mode has been determined (S5009). When it is determined that the transition to the challenge mode is determined (S5009: Yes), the challenge mode is stored in the production mode storage area 223k (S5010), and an ending command for display including the production mode corresponding to the transition to the challenge mode is issued. It sets (S5011), and ends this processing.

On the other hand, in the processing of S5005, if it is determined that the read production mode is not the revenge mode (S5005: No), or in the processing of S5009, if it is determined that it is determined not to shift to the challenge mode (S5009 : No), a display ending command including the corresponding effect mode is set (S5012), and this process is terminated.

Returning to FIG. 670, the description continues. In the process of S4803, when it is determined that the received command is not a small hit related command (S4803: No), it is then determined whether or not a prize command has been received (S4805). If it is determined that the received command is not a prize ball command (S4805: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, if the received command is determined to be a prize ball command (S4805: Yes), the value corresponding to the received command is added to the value of the prize ball number counter (not shown) (S4806), A prize ball number command for display corresponding to the value of the prize ball counter after addition is set (S4807), and then this process is terminated.

Although detailed description is omitted, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, in the state command processing (see S4212 in FIG. 665), the period until the normal state or the first probability variable state is set (advantageous continuation The number of prize balls corresponding to the number of prize balls command received during the period) is accumulated in the number of prize balls counter. The number of prize balls corresponding to the cumulative value of the counter for the number of prize balls is displayed during the winning game (big win game, small win game) or during the second probability variable state.

By configuring in this way, after the second probability variable state is set, the player can count the total number of balls acquired during the period (advantageous continuous period) until the normal state (first probability variable state) is set again. can be notified in an easy-to-understand manner.

In this embodiment, the cumulative value of the number of prize balls obtained during the advantageous continuous period is displayed during the advantageous continuous period. For example, during the advantageous continuation period, the number of prize balls obtained in the big winning game and the number of prize balls obtained in the small winning game may be displayed separately. In this case, the winning game state (middle winning, middle winning) at the time of receiving the prize ball command is determined based on the information set in the secondary game state storage area 223j, and the number of prize balls is accumulated for each determination result. It is good to have a means to do so. As a result, the number of prize balls acquired during the advantageous continuation period can be easily sorted.

In addition, the number of prize balls acquired in one game period (the sum of the jackpot game period and the second probability variable state period until the next jackpot game is executed) within the advantageous continuation period is accumulated and displayed. It may be configured to In this case, it is preferable to provide storage means for storing the cumulative number of prize balls won during one game period as history information, and to display the history of the information stored in the storage means.

In addition, as described above, when the configuration for cumulatively displaying the number of winning balls obtained within the advantageous continuation period is used, the number of times that the lottery result of the special symbol becomes the lottery result (big win, small win) that is advantageous to the player. , or the lottery probability that the lottery result of the special symbol becomes the lottery result (big win, small win) that is advantageous to the player may be displayed.

By constructing in this way, it becomes possible for the player to analyze the lottery result of the special symbols executed during the advantageous continuation period and the number of prize balls obtained during the advantageous continuation period, and to play the game enthusiastically. can be done.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, unless a special pattern jackpot is won in a state in which the second variable probability state is set, the second variable probability state is configured to continue, and a small hit during the second variable probability state. It is configured so that the game is easily played (the special figure 2 lottery is easily executed). Therefore, during the advantageous continuation period, in addition to winning the jackpot for which the advantageous continuation period is set again, the player plays the game with a sense of expectation that the state of not winning the jackpot will continue for a long period of time. will do.

In such a case, the player can grasp how the actual game content (special figure 2 lottery result) is with respect to the jackpot winning probability and the small winning probability preset in the pachinko machine 10. It is preferable to configure so as to display such a display mode. By using such a configuration, for example, since the actual jackpot winning probability is lower than the preset jackpot winning probability, the number of small winning games executed during the second probability variable state increases, and many prizes are awarded. When the ball can be acquired and the actual small winning winning probability is higher than the preset small winning winning probability, the number of small winning games executed during the second probability variable state increases and many prize balls are produced. can be analyzed in such a way that the player can identify it. Therefore, by making the player analyze the number of winning balls obtained during the advantageous continuation period, it is possible to make the player interested in the game content and to make it easier to continue playing the game.

Furthermore, when the game content (lottery result of special symbols) during the advantageous continuation period satisfies a predetermined condition, a notification means may be provided for executing condition achievement notification to indicate that fact, for example, winning a jackpot. The number of times of special symbol lottery executed by (so-called, the number of times of addiction) may be executed to indicate that the condition achievement notification has exceeded a predetermined number of times (100 times), or executed during the small hit winning A condition achievement notification may be executed to indicate that the number of special symbol lotteries (the number of lotteries of the special figure 2) has exceeded a predetermined number of times (10 times). Further, condition achievement notification may be executed to indicate that the number of prize balls obtained in one game pattern exceeds a predetermined number (5000).

Next, the variable display setting process (S4112) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 673 is a flow chart showing this variable display setting process (S4112). This variable display setting process (S4112 in FIG. 673) is one process of the main process (see FIG. 663) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113. FIG. As described above, the variable display setting process (S4112 in FIG. 673) is performed according to the first or special figure 2 variable pattern command received from the main controller 110 in order to display the variable display effect on the third symbol display device 81. Based on this, the process of setting the display variation pattern command of the first special symbol or the second special symbol and transmitting the command to the display control device 114 is executed. In addition, based on the extracted stop type (jackpot A to jackpot D), the process of setting the display special figure 1 or special figure 2 stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type is executed.

In the fluctuation display setting process (S4112), first, it is determined whether the special figure 1 fluctuation start flag 223e provided in the RAM 223 is set to ON (S5101). And, if it is determined that the special figure 1 fluctuation start flag 223e is off (S5101: No), since the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern command is not received from the main controller 110, the process of S5106 Transition. On the other hand, when it is determined that the special figure 1 fluctuation start flag 223e is on (S5101: Yes), the special figure 1 fluctuation start flag 223e is set to off (S5102).

Then, in the process of S4203 of the command determination process (see S4111 in FIG. 664), based on the variation pattern related to the variation effect extracted from the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110, the first special symbol (special figure 1) Set the display variation pattern command (S5103), subtract 1 from the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c (S5104), execute special figure 1 variation effect setting processing (S5105), second special symbol ( Special figure 2) to set the variable display for S5106 processing. A detailed description of the special figure 1 fluctuation effect setting process (S5105) will be given later with reference to FIG.

The display variation pattern command set in the processing of S5103 is output to the display control device 114 in the command output processing (S4102 in FIG. 663) executed in the main processing (see FIG. 663) of the audio lamp control device 113. be. The display control device 114 creates display data to be displayed in the display area (display screen) of the third symbol display device 81 based on the received display variation pattern command and various display commands for indicating the game state.

S5101 processing, or, after executing the processing of S5105, when the processing of S5106 is executed, first, determine whether the special figure 2 fluctuation start flag 223f is ON (S5106), special figure 2 fluctuation start flag If it is determined that 223f is set to ON (S5106: Yes), the special figure 2 fluctuation start flag 223f is set to OFF (S5107), based on the extracted fluctuation pattern command, the display of the second special symbol Set a variation pattern command for use (S5108). And, special figure 2 fluctuation production setting processing is executed (S5109), it moves to the processing of S5110. A detailed description of the special figure 2 fluctuation effect setting process (S5109) will be given later with reference to FIG. On the other hand, in the process of S5106, the special figure 2 fluctuation start flag 223f is not ON, that is, if it is determined that it is not the fluctuation start timing of the second special symbol (S5106: No), the process of S5107 to S5109 is skipped. and the process proceeds to S5110.

S5106 or, when the processing of S5109 is executed, next, it is determined whether the special figure 1 stop type selection flag 223g or the special figure 2 stop type selection flag 223i is set to ON (S5110), and the special figure 1 If it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223g or the special figure 2 stop type selection flag 223i is not set to ON (S5110: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that the special figure 1 stop type selection flag 223g or the special figure 2 stop type selection flag 223i is set to ON (S5110: Yes), the special figure 1 stop type selection flag 223g, or Set the special figure 2 stop type selection flag 223i to off (S5111), set the extracted stop type as it is (S5112), set the display special figure 1 or special figure 2 stop type command (S5113), this processing exit.

As described above, in this embodiment, the lottery of the first special symbol and the lottery of the second special symbol can be executed at the same time (in parallel), and the lottery of the first special symbol The lottery of the second special symbol is configured to make it easier to win a lottery result that is advantageous to the player (for example, transition to a game state that is advantageous to the player).

Then, according to the game state to be set, the type of special symbol that is likely to be drawn is configured to be variable, and when a specific first game state (for example, the first probability variable state) is set, a second special The lottery of symbols is made easy to execute, and when a big win is won in the lottery of the second special symbols during the first game state, the first game state is set again. .

Furthermore, in order to facilitate the lottery of the first special symbol during the second probability variable state, which is the low probability state of the normal symbol, it is the case where the normal state, which is the low probability state of the normal symbol, is set. However, since the lottery of the second special symbol can be executed, in order to suppress the frequent execution of the lottery of the second special symbol in the normal state, a long (10 minutes) fluctuation time is set. configured to be set.

However, in the gaming machine constructed in this way, it is possible to execute the lottery for the second special symbol in the normal state, although the efficiency is low, and if a big win is won in the lottery for the second special symbol, There is a problem that a lottery result that is advantageous to the player is given.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, when a big win is won in the lottery of the first special symbol in a state where the normal state is set, the lottery of the second special symbol is lost and forced to stop. Therefore, in the state where the normal state is set, the second special symbol is set so as to make it difficult to win the jackpot.

In the thirty-fifth embodiment described above, during the jackpot game that is executed based on the winning of the jackpot, the ball passes through the specific area provided in the prize winning device. It may be configured such that a high-probability state of the symbol is set.

Next, with reference to FIG. 674, the special figure 1 fluctuation production setting process (S5105), which is one process in the fluctuation display setting process (S4112) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113, will be described. Figure 674 is the flowchart which shows the contents of this special figure 1 fluctuation production setting processing (S5105).

When the special figure 1 fluctuation effect setting process (S5105) is executed, first, reading of information of the effect mode storage area 223k is executed (S5201). Next, it is determined whether the read effect mode is one of super rush mode, rush mode, EXTRA mode, and SPECIAL mode (S5202). When it is determined that the read effect mode is one of the super rush mode, rush mode, EXTRA mode, and SPECIAL mode (S5202: Yes), the variation of the first special symbol executed this time is a big hit. It is determined whether there is a change (S5203).

In the process of S5203, when it is determined that the variation of the first special symbol to be executed this time is a big hit variation (S5203: Yes), a value corresponding to the current variation time is set in the specific variation time counter 223q ( S5204), set the effect mode of the variation pattern effect according to the game state and the lottery result of the special symbol (S5205), and terminate this process. On the other hand, in the process of S5203, if it is determined that the variation to be executed this time is not a big hit variation (that is, a small hit variation or an off variation) (S5203: No), the process of S5204 is skipped, The processing of S5205 described above is executed, and this processing ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S5202, when it is determined that the read effect mode is not any of the super rush mode, rush mode, EXTRA mode, and SPECIAL mode (S5202: No), the process of S5205 described above is performed. Execute and terminate this process.

Next, with reference to FIG. 675, the special figure 2 fluctuation production setting process (S5109), which is one process in the fluctuation display setting process (S4112) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113, will be described. Figure 675 is the flowchart which shows the contents of this special figure 2 fluctuation production setting processing (S5109).

In the special figure 2 fluctuation effect setting process (S5109), first, from the effect mode storage area 223k, the information of the currently set effect mode is read out (S5301). Next, it is determined whether the read effect mode is one of super rush mode, rush mode, EXTRA mode, and SPECIAL mode (S5302). If it is determined that the read production mode is not one of the super rush mode, rush mode, EXTRA mode, and SPECIAL mode (S5302: No), the current game state and the special symbol lottery result The effect mode of the corresponding variation pattern effect is set (S5314), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S5302, when it is determined that the read production mode is one of the super rush mode, rush mode, EXTRA mode, and SPECIAL mode (S5302: Yes), 2 It is determined whether or not the variation of the special symbol is a big hit variation (S5303). When it is determined that the variation of the special symbol to be executed this time is the big hit variation (S5303: Yes), the processing of S5314 described above is executed, and this processing ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the variation of the special symbol to be executed this time is not the big hit variation (that is, the deviation variation) (S5303: No), the current production mode read in the processing of S5302 is the rush mode. It is determined whether there is any (S5304).

In the processing of S5304, if it is determined that the currently set production mode is not the rush mode (that is, any of the super rush mode, EXTRA mode, and SPECIAL mode) (S5304: No), The process of S5314 described above is executed, and this process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the currently set effect mode is the rush mode (S5304: Yes), it is determined whether the notification upper limit flag 223s is ON (S5305). When it is determined that the notification upper limit flag 223s is ON (S5305: Yes), the process of S5314 described above is executed, and this process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S5305, if it is determined that the notification upper limit flag 223s is not ON (S5305: No), the value of the remaining probability variation counter 223m is read (S5306), and then the notified stock number Reading of the value of the counter 223r is executed (S5307). Then, based on the respective values of the remaining probability variation counter 223m and the notified stock number counter 223r read out in the processing of S5306 and the processing of S5307, the notified stock number selection table 222c (see FIG. 624(a)) is referred to. to determine the stock notification number (S5308).

Next, it is determined whether or not there is a stock notification determined in the process of S5308 (S5309). If it is determined that there is no stock notification (S5309: No), the process of S5314 described above is executed, and this process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that there is a stock notification (S5309: Yes), an effect mode corresponding to the determined stock notification number is set (S5310), and the process proceeds to S5311.

In the processing of S5311, it is determined whether or not the value of the notified stock number counter 223r is the upper limit value (S5311). The notification upper limit flag 223s is set to ON (S5312), the value of the notified stock number counter 223r is cleared to 0 (S5313), the processing of S5314 described above is executed, and this processing ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S5311 that the value of the notified stock number counter 223r is not the upper limit value (S5311: No), the process of S5314 described above is executed, and this process ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 676, the liquid crystal effect execution management process (S4110), which is one process in the main process (see FIG. 663) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113, will be described. FIG. 676 is a flow chart showing the contents of the liquid crystal effect execution management process (S4110).

In the liquid crystal effect execution management process (S4110), first, it is determined whether the value of the specific variable time counter 223q is greater than 0 (S5401). That is, it is determined whether or not the big hit variation is being executed in any one of the super rush mode, rush mode, EXTRA mode, and SPECIAL mode. When it is determined that the value of the specific variable time counter 223q is greater than 0 (S5401: Yes), the value of the specific variable time counter 223q is updated (S5402), and the process proceeds to S5403.

In the processing of S5403, it is determined whether or not the remaining variation time indicated by the post-update value of the specific variation time counter 223q updated in the processing of S5402 is 60 seconds (S5403). When it is determined that the remaining variation time indicated by the updated value of the specific variation time counter 223q is 60 seconds (S5403: Yes), a display command is set to prompt execution of variation of the second special symbol. (S5404), other processes related to effects are executed (S5407), a display command for indicating the effect mode based on the update result is set (S5408), and this process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S5403, if it is determined that the remaining variation time indicated by the updated value of the specific variation time counter 223q is not 60 seconds (S5403: No), the updated value of the specific variation time counter 223q is It is determined whether or not the indicated remaining fluctuation time is 10 seconds (S5405). When it is determined that the remaining variation time indicated by the updated value of the specific variation time counter 223q is 10 seconds (S5405: Yes), the display mode indicating that the lottery result of the first special symbol is a jackpot winning A display command for displaying is set (S5406), the processing of S5407 and S5408 described above is executed, and this processing ends. On the other hand, in the processing of S5405, if it is determined that the remaining variation time indicated by the updated value of the specific variation time counter 223q is not 10 seconds (S5405: No), the processing of S5406 is skipped and The process of S5408 is executed, and this process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S5401, if it is determined that the value of the specific variable time counter 223q is not greater than 0 (S5401: No), the processes of S5407 and S5408 described above are executed, and this process ends. .

<Regarding control processing of the display control device in the thirty-fifth embodiment>
Next, each control executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIGS. 677 to 691. FIG. The processing of the MPU 231 can be broadly classified into main processing that is repeatedly executed after power is turned on, command interrupt processing that is executed when a command is received from the audio lamp control device 113, and processing for one frame from the image controller 237. There is V interrupt processing that is executed when the MPU 231 detects a V interrupt signal that is transmitted every 20 milliseconds when image drawing processing is completed. The MPU 231 normally executes main processing, and executes command interrupt processing and V interrupt processing in accordance with reception of a command and detection of a V interrupt signal. If command reception and V interrupt signal detection are performed at the same time, command reception processing is preferentially executed. As a result, it is possible to quickly reflect the content of the command received from the sound lamp control device 113 and execute the V interrupt process.

First, with reference to FIG. 677, main processing executed by the MPU 231 in the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 677 is a flow chart showing this main process. The main processing is to execute initialization processing when the power is turned on.

Activation of this main process is specifically performed according to the following flow. When power is turned on from the power supply device 115 to the display control device 114 and the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the command pointer 231a provided in the MPU 231 to "0000H" according to its hardware configuration. , the address "0000H" indicated by the instruction pointer 231a is specified for the bus line 240. FIG. When the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address designated on the bus line 240 is "0000H", it sets the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d in the buffer RAM 234c. , and outputs the corresponding data (instruction code) to the MPU 231 . Then, the MPU 231 fetches the received instruction code from the character ROM 234, and starts the main process by starting the execution of the process according to the fetched instruction.

Here, if all the boot programs to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, the character ROM 234 indicates that the address designated to the bus line 240 is "0000H". When detected, one page of data including the data (instruction code) corresponding to the address "0000H" must be read from the NAND flash memory 234a and set in the buffer RAM 234c. Due to the nature of the NAND type flash memory 234a, it takes a long time to read out and set it in the buffer RAM 234c. It will consume a lot of waiting time. Therefore, the time taken to start the MPU 231 becomes longer, and as a result, there arises a problem that the control of the third pattern display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, the NOR ROM 234d stores a predetermined number of instructions from the boot program to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. Since it is a memory from which data can be read, when the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 is immediately stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d. The stored boot program can be set in the buffer RAM 234 c and the corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231 . Therefore, since the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" in a short time after specifying the address "0000H", the MPU 231 can start the main process in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the control of the third pattern display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately.

When the main process is executed as described above, first, the boot process executed by the boot program is executed (S6001), and the display control device 114 is set so that various controls for the third symbol display device 81 can be executed. to start.

Here, referring to FIG. 678, boot processing (S6001) will be described. 678 is a flowchart showing boot processing (S6001) executed in the main processing in the MPU 231 of the display control device 114. FIG.

As described above, in this embodiment, the control program and fixed value data to be executed by the MPU 231 are stored in the third symbol display device 81 instead of being stored in a dedicated program ROM as in conventional game machines. The character ROM 234 provided for storing the data of the image to be displayed is stored. The character ROM 234 is composed of a NAND-type flash memory 234a capable of increasing the capacity with a small area. There is no need to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing programs and the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and an increase in failure rate due to an increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

On the other hand, the NAND flash memory has a slow read speed, especially when performing random access. Even if a high-performance processor is used, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may deteriorate. Therefore, in this boot process, the control program and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are stored in the program storage area 233a provided in the work RAM 233 constituted by DRAM and the data table. A process of transferring and storing in the storage area 233b is executed.

Specifically, first, based on the hardware operations of the MPU 231 and the character ROM 234 described above, the boot program read out from the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR-type ROM 234d and set in the buffer RAM 234c after the system reset is released is executed. Of the control programs stored in the 2-program storage area 234a1, a predetermined amount is transferred to the program storage area 233a (S6101). The predetermined amount of control programs transferred here includes the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1.

Then, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the first predetermined address of the program storage area 233a, that is, the head address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a (S6102). As a result, the MPU 231 starts executing the rest of the boot program included in the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a by the process of S6101.

By setting the command pointer 231a to a predetermined address in the program storage area 233a by the processing of S6102, the MPU 231 can execute various processes while reading the control program stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. become. That is, the MPU 231 does not read the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 and fetch the instruction, but rather reads the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a and fetches the instruction. and execute various processing. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of a DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the MPU 231 can fetch the instruction at high speed and execute the process for the instruction.

After the command pointer 231a is set by the process of S6102, the remaining boot program whose execution is started by the set command pointer 231a is stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a. Of the control programs stored, the remaining control programs and fixed value data that have not been transferred to the program storage area 233a are transferred by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b (S6103). Specifically, the control program and some fixed data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233, and the above-mentioned various data tables (display data table, transfer data table) of the fixed value data are stored in the data table. Transfer to the storage area 233b.

After executing other processes necessary for the boot process (S6104), the command pointer 231a is moved to the second predetermined address of the program storage area 233a, that is, after the boot process (see S6001 in FIG. 678) is completed. By setting the top address of the program corresponding to the initializing process (see S6002 in FIG. 677) (S6105), the execution of the boot program is finished, and this boot process ends.

By executing the boot process (S6001) in this way, the control program and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are stored in the work RAM 233, which is composed entirely of DRAM. It is transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a and the data table storage area 233b. At the end of the boot process, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address, and thereafter the MPU 231 reads the control program transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. Various processing is executed using

Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a whose read speed is slow, the control program and fixed value data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 and the fixed value data after the system reset is released. By transferring to the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 can read the control program and fixed value data from the work RAM configured by the DRAM with a high read speed and perform various controls. High processing performance can be maintained, and diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed using the auxiliary effect part.

On the other hand, without storing the entire boot program in the NOR type ROM 234d, a predetermined number of instructions are stored from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released, and the rest of the boot program is stored in the NAND type flash memory 234a. , the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start up the MPU 231 in a short time simply by adding the NOR type ROM 234d with a very small capacity. can be done.

Note that in the boot process shown in FIG. 678, the predetermined amount of control programs transferred to the program storage area 233a by the process of S6101 includes all remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. However, it is not necessarily limited to this. may be part of As for the boot program transferred here, a predetermined amount of the control program including all remaining boot programs is transferred to the program storage area 233a. 231a may be executed. Then, the processes of S6103 to S6105 may be executed by all the remaining boot programs stored in the program storage area 233a.

In addition, the boot program transferred by the process of S6101 transfers a part of the remaining boot program by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a, and then the beginning of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a. A process of setting an address to the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. In addition, part of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a by this processing is further transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount of part of the remaining boot program, and subsequently stored in the program storage area 233a. A process of setting the start address of the stored boot program to the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. Then, a predetermined amount of a part of the remaining boot program is transferred to the program storage area 233a, and then the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a is set in the instruction pointer 231a in step S6101. and the processing of S6102 may be repeated a plurality of times, and then the processing of S6103 to S6105 may be executed.

As a result, even if the program size of the boot program is large and the rest of the boot program not stored in the first program storage area 234d1 cannot be transferred to the program storage area 233a at once, the MPU 231 is already stored in the program storage area 233a. Using the boot program, a predetermined amount can be transferred to the program storage area 233a.

Further, in the present embodiment, the first program storage area 234d1 has been described as having a part of the boot program that is first executed by the MPU 231 when the system reset is released. It may be stored in the 1-program storage area 234d1. In this case, the MPU 231 may perform the processes of S6103 to S6105 without performing the processes of S6101 and S6102 after starting the boot process. This eliminates the need to transfer the boot program to the program storage area 233a, reducing the number of times the program is transferred to the character ROM 234 or the program storage area 233a, thereby reducing the boot processing time. Therefore, it is possible to start the control of the auxiliary effect section in the MPU 231, which becomes possible after the boot process, more quickly.

Now, return to the description of FIG. After the boot process is completed, the initial setting process is executed according to the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 (S6002). Specifically, the value of the stack pointer is set in the MPU 231, and various settings are made for the registers in the MPU 231 and the I/O device. In addition, processing for clearing the memory of the work RAM 233, the resident video RAM 235, and the normal video RAM 236 is performed. Further, various flags are provided in the work RAM 233, and initial values are set to the respective flags. As the initial value of each flag, "off" or "0" is set unless otherwise specified.

Further, in the initial setting process, after the image controller 237 is initialized, the image controller 237 is instructed to draw an image so that an image of a specific color is displayed on the entire screen of the third pattern display device 81. and instructs execution of display processing. As a result, immediately after the power is turned on, an image of a specific color is first displayed on the entire screen of the third pattern display device 81 . Here, the color of the image displayed on the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81 immediately after the power is turned on is set to be a different color according to the model of the pachinko machine. As a result, in the operation check at the factory or the like at the time of manufacture, immediately after turning on the power, it is inspected whether or not the image of the color corresponding to the model is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the pachinko machine 10 It is possible to easily and immediately judge whether or not the activation can be started normally.

Next, a transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller 237 to transfer the image data corresponding to the power-on main image to the power-on main image area 235a of the resident video RAM 235 (S6003). This transfer instruction contains the leading and trailing addresses of the character ROM 234 storing the image data corresponding to the main image when the power is turned on, the transfer destination information (here, the resident video RAM 235), and the transfer destination. The image controller 237 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 according to this transfer instruction. It is transferred to the image area 235a.

Then, when the transfer of all the image data indicated by the transfer instruction is completed, the image controller 237 transmits a transfer end signal indicating transfer end to the MPU 231 . By receiving this transfer end signal, the MPU 231 can grasp that the transfer of the image data designated by the transfer instruction has ended. When the transfer of all the image data indicated by the transfer instruction is completed, the image controller 237 stores transfer end information indicating transfer end in a register provided inside the image controller 237 or in a partial area of the built-in memory. It may be written. The MPU 231 reads information from this register or a partial area of the built-in memory at any time, and detects the writing of transfer end information by the image controller 237, thereby ascertaining that the transfer of the image data designated by the transfer instruction has ended. You may do so.

The image data transferred to the main image area 235a when the power is turned on is held so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off. When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on main image to the power-on main image area 235a is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 by the processing in S6003, the power-on variation image is transferred to the power-on main image area 235a. A transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller so as to transfer the image data corresponding to . This transfer instruction contains the head address of the character ROM 234 storing the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image, the data size of the image data, and information on the transfer destination (here, the resident video RAM 235). , and the head address of the power-on fluctuation image area 235b, which is the transfer destination. It is transferred to the change image area 235b when the power is turned on. The image data transferred to the power-on variation image area 235b is held so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off.

When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on variation image to the power-on variation image area 235b is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 by the process of S6004, then the simple image display flag 233c is set. is turned on (S6005). As a result, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 in the transfer setting process (see FIG. 689(a)), which will be described later. Resident image transfer setting processing for instructing the image controller 237 to transfer is executed (see S7502 in FIG. 689(a)).

Further, the simple image display flag 233c indicates that all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 based on the transfer instruction to the image controller 237 by the resident image transfer setting process. Remains on until terminated. As a result, during this period, in the V interrupt processing (see FIG. 679(b)), the power-on image (power-on main image and power-on variation image) (not shown) is drawn in a simple manner. Command determination processing (see S6308 in FIG. 679(b)) and simple display setting processing (see S6309 in FIG. 679(b)) are executed.

As described above, the pachinko machine 10 uses the NAND flash memory 234a for the character ROM 234. Due to its slow read speed, all the image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is It takes a long time to transfer from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 . Therefore, as in this main processing, after the power is turned on, the power-on main image and the power-on varying image are first transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, and the main image at power-on is transferred to the third image. By displaying it on the symbol display device 81, while the remaining image data to be resident is being transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player and the people involved in the hall can see the image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on. You can check the main image. Therefore, the display control device 114 takes time to transfer the remaining image data to be resident from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 while displaying the main image on the third pattern display device 81 when the power is turned on. be able to. On the other hand, while the main image is being displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, the player or the like can recognize that some initialization processing is being performed, so that the rest of the resident video RAM 235 can be resident. It is possible to wait until the initialization is completed without worrying whether the operation is stopped while the image data to be processed is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 .

Also, in an operation check at a factory or the like during manufacturing, since the main image is immediately displayed on the third pattern display device 81 when the power is turned on, the operation of the third pattern display device 81 is started without any problem when the power is turned on. Therefore, it is possible to prevent deterioration of the operation check efficiency by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed for the character ROM 234. FIG.

In the display control device 114 of the pachinko machine 10, after the power is turned on, the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, so that the power-on main image is the third symbol. When the player starts the game while the display is displayed on the display device 81, the ball enters the first ball entrance 64b1, the right first ball entrance 64b2, or the second ball entrance 640 (start winning). If there is an instruction to start the variable effect from the main controller 110 via the sound lamp control device 113, that is, if a variable pattern command for display is received, the power-on variable image is displayed during the variable effect period. It can be displayed immediately and a simple variation effect can be performed. Therefore, even while the main image is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 when the power is turned on, the player can confirm that the lottery has been surely performed by the simple variation performance.

Further, as described above, while the remaining image data to be resident is being transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, the third symbol display device 81 continues to display the main image when the power is turned on. is composed of a NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, and it takes a long time to transfer the data. However, in this pachinko machine 10, since it is possible to perform a simple variation effect using the power-on fluctuation image transferred to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on, immediately after the power is turned on, for example, after the power is restored, Immediately after the power is turned on, even while the main image is being displayed, the player can play the game with peace of mind.

After the processing of S6005, interrupt permission is set (S6006), and thereafter the main processing executes infinite loop processing until the power is turned off. Accordingly, after the interrupt permission is set by the process of S6006, the command interrupt process and the V interrupt process are executed according to the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal.

Next, command interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. 679(a). FIG. 679(a) is a flow chart showing the command interrupt processing. As described above, when a command is received from the audio lamp control device 113, the MPU 231 executes command interrupt processing.

In this command interrupt process, the received command data is extracted, and the extracted command data is sequentially stored in the command buffer area provided in the work RAM 233 (S6201), and the process ends. Various commands stored in the command buffer area by this command interrupt processing are read out by command determination processing or simple command determination processing of V interrupt processing to be described later, and processing corresponding to the command is performed.

Next, V interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. 679(b). FIG. 679(b) is a flow chart showing the V interrupt processing. In this V interrupt process, various processes corresponding to the command stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt process are executed, and after specifying the image to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81, the image is drawn. By creating a list and transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, the image controller 237 is instructed to execute drawing processing and display processing of the image.

As described above, this V interrupt process is started when the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 is detected. This V interrupt signal is a signal that is generated in the image controller 237 and sent to the MPU 231 every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing processing for one frame is completed. Therefore, by executing the V interrupt process in synchronization with this V interrupt signal, a drawing instruction is issued to the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of the image for one frame is completed. become. Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive an instruction to draw the next image before the image drawing processing or display processing is completed. It is possible to prevent an image from being developed in accordance with a new drawing instruction in a frame buffer storing image information being displayed.

Here, first, an outline of the flow of V interrupt processing will be described, and then details of each processing will be described with reference to other drawings. In this V interrupt process, as shown in FIG. 679(b), first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is on (S6301). If it is off (S6301: No), it means that the transfer of all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been completed. In order to display on the display device 81, command determination processing (S6302) is executed, and then display setting processing (S6303) is executed.

In the command determination process (S6302), the content of the command from the sound lamp control device 113 stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt process is analyzed, and the process corresponding to the command is executed. When the display variation pattern command is stored, the demonstration display data table or the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern type is set in the display data table buffer 233d, and the transfer corresponding to the set display data table is performed. The data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

In this command determination process, all commands stored in the command buffer area at that time are analyzed and processed. This is because command determination processing is performed at intervals of 20 milliseconds when V interrupt processing is executed, and there is a high possibility that multiple commands are stored in the command buffer area during those 20 milliseconds. be. In particular, when main controller 110 decides to start a variable effect, there is a high possibility that a display variation pattern command, a display stop type command, and the like are stored in the command buffer area at the same time. Therefore, by analyzing and executing these commands all at once, it is possible to quickly comprehend the mode and stop type of the variable performance selected by the main control device 110 and the sound lamp control device 113, and generate a performance image corresponding to the mode. Drawing of an image can be controlled so as to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 . The details of this command determination process will be described later with reference to FIGS.

In the display setting process (S6303), based on the contents of the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the command determination process (S6302), etc., an image for one frame to be displayed next on the third pattern display device 81 is displayed. specifically identify the content of In addition, depending on the status of processing, etc., the effect mode to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 is determined, and the display data table corresponding to the determined effect mode is set in the display data table buffer 233d. The details of this display setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS.

After the display setting process is executed, task processing is executed (S6304). In this task processing, the image is configured based on the content of the image for the next one frame to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 specified by the display setting processing (S6303) or the simple display setting processing (S6309). The type of sprite (display object) to be displayed is specified, and various parameters required for drawing such as display coordinate position, enlargement ratio, and rotation angle are determined for each sprite.

Next, transfer setting processing is executed (S6305). In this transfer setting process, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, the image controller 237 is caused to transfer image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined area of the resident video RAM 235. Set instructions. While the simple image display flag 233c is off, predetermined image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image controller 237 based on the transfer data information of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. In addition to setting a transfer instruction to transfer to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236 a of the video RAM 236 , even when a continuous notice command or a back image change command is received from the sound lamp control device 113 , the image controller 237 is continuously instructed to A transfer instruction is set to transfer the image data of the continuous notice images used in the notice effect and the image data of the rear image after change from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236.例文帳に追加Details of the transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 689 and 690. FIG.

Next, drawing processing is executed (S6306). In this drawing process, based on the types of sprites that make up one frame determined in the task process (S6304) and the parameters necessary for drawing each sprite, and the transfer instruction set in the transfer setting process (S6305), 630, and transmits the drawing list to the image controller 237 together with the drawing object buffer information. As a result, the image controller 237 executes image drawing processing according to the drawing list (S6306). Details of the rendering process will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, update processing of various counters provided in the display control device 114 is executed (S6307). Then, the V interrupt processing ends. As a counter updated by the process of S6307, for example, there is a stop symbol counter (not shown) for determining a stop symbol. The value of the stop symbol counter is stored in the work RAM 233, and is updated each time the V interrupt process is executed. Then, in the command determination process, when the reception of the stop type command for display is detected, the stop type indicated by the stop type command for display (jackpot A, jackpot B, front-rear out reach, reach other than front-rear out, complete out) The corresponding stop type table and the stop type counter are compared, and the stop design after the variable effect displayed on the third design display device 81 is finally set.

On the other hand, in the process of S6301, if it is determined that the simple image display flag 233c is ON (S6301: Yes), it means that the transfer of all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been completed. Therefore, in order to display the power-on image on the third pattern display device 81, simple command determination processing (S6308) is executed, then simple display setting processing (S6309) is executed, and the process proceeds to S6304.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 680 to 685, details of the command determination process (S6302), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. First, FIG. 680 is a flow chart showing this command determination processing.

In this command determination process, as shown in FIG. 680, first, it is determined whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area (S6401). After completing the command determination process, the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, if there is an unprocessed new command (S6401: Yes), the new command flag for notifying the display setting process (S6303) that the new command has been processed in the ON state is set to ON (S6402). All unprocessed commands stored in the buffer area are analyzed for their command types (S6403).

Then, it is determined whether or not there is a display variation pattern command among the unprocessed commands (S6404). Then, if there is a variation pattern command for display (S6404: Yes), the variation pattern command process is executed (S6405), and the process returns to S6401.

Here, the details of the variation pattern command process (S6405) will be described with reference to FIG. 681(a). FIG. 681(a) is a flow chart showing the variation pattern command process (S6405). This variation pattern command processing (S6405) executes processing corresponding to the display variation pattern command received from the sound lamp control device 113. FIG.

In the variation pattern command process, first, the variation display data table corresponding to the variation effect pattern indicated by the variation pattern command for display is determined, and the determined variation display data table is read out from the data table storage area 233b to display the display data table. It is set in the buffer 233d (S6501).

Here, since the main controller 110 always determines the start of variation at a time interval of several seconds or more, it does not receive two or more display variation pattern commands within 20 milliseconds. When executing, it is impossible that two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, but part of the command changes due to the influence of noise, etc., and another command is mistakenly used for display. There is a possibility that it will be interpreted as a variation pattern command. In the process of S6501, in preparation for such a case, if it is determined that two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern with the shortest variation time is set in the display data table buffer 233d.

If a variation display data table corresponding to a variation pattern with a long variation time is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the main control device will actually produce a variation effect with a shorter variation time than the set display data table. 110, the next display variation pattern command is received from the main control device 110 while the variation performance according to the set variation display data table is being displayed on the third pattern display device 81. As a result, another variable display is suddenly started, which may make the player feel uncomfortable.

On the other hand, by setting the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern with the shortest variation time in the display data table buffer 233d as in the present embodiment, the variation display data table actually has a longer variation than the set display data table. Even if the variable effect with time is instructed by main controller 110, after the variable effect according to display data table buffer 233d is completed, main controller 110 will send the next display for display, as will be described later. Since the display of the third pattern display device 81 is controlled by the display setting process so that the demonstration effect is displayed until the pattern command is received, the player can feel the third pattern display on the third pattern display device 81 without any discomfort. 3 You can continue to see the variation of the pattern.

Next, a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table set in S6501 is determined, read from the data table storage area 233b, and set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S6502). Then, based on the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the fluctuation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S6501, time data representing the fluctuation time is set in the clock counter 233h (S6503), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S6504). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the fixed display flag are set to OFF (S6505), the variation pattern command processing (see FIG. 681) is terminated, and the command determination processing (see FIG. 680) is returned to.

By executing this variation pattern command process, in the display setting process, while updating the pointer 233f initialized by the process of S6504, the variable display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the process of S6501 , extracts the drawing contents defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f, and specifies the contents of the image for one frame to be displayed next on the third pattern display device 81. At the same time, the transfer data table buffer 233e The transfer data information specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted from the transfer data table set to 1, and the sprite image data required in the set variable display data table is stored in advance from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. image storage area 236a.

Further, in the display setting process, the time counter 233h to which the time data is set by the process of S6503 is used to measure the time of the variable presentation specified in the variable display data table, and when the variable presentation in the variable display data table ends. When it is determined, the setting of the stop display is controlled so that the stop pattern corresponding to the stop type command for display from the main control device 110 is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 .

Now, returning to the description of FIG. In the processing of S6404, if it is determined that there is no display variation pattern command (S6404: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display stop type command in the unprocessed commands (S6406), If there is a stop type command for display (S6406: Yes), the stop type command process is executed (S6407), and the process returns to S6401.

Details of the stop type command process (S6407) will now be described with reference to FIG. 681(b). FIG. 681(b) is a flow chart showing stop type command processing. This stop type command processing is for executing processing corresponding to the display variation type command received from the sound lamp control device 113 .

In the stop type command processing (S6407), first, the stop type table corresponding to the stop type information (jackpot A to D, small hit A, reach out, complete out) indicated by the stop type command for display is determined. Then (S6601), the stop type table is compared with the value of the stop type counter which is updated each time the V interrupt process (see FIG. 679(b)) is executed, and the third symbol display device 81 displays Finally, the stop pattern after the variable effect to be displayed is set (S6602).

Then, among the stop symbol discrimination flags provided for each of the stop symbols, the stop symbol discrimination flag corresponding to the stop symbol set by the processing of S6602 is turned on, and the stop symbol discrimination flag corresponding to the other stop symbols is turned on. It is set to off (S6603) and returns to the command determination processing.

Here, as described above, in the variation display data table, the type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 after a predetermined time has passed since the variation based on the data table is started. , offset information (design offset information) from the stop design set by the processing of S6602. In the above-described task processing (S6304), after a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the variation, the stop design set by the process of S6602 is specified from the stop design determination flag set by S6603, and the specified stop By adding the design offset information acquired by the display setting process to the design, the third design to be actually displayed is specified. Then, the address where the image data corresponding to the specified third pattern is stored is specified. Image data corresponding to the third design is stored in the third design area 235d of the resident video RAM 235, as described above.

It should be noted that since the main controller 110 always determines the start of fluctuation at a time interval of several seconds or more, two or more stop type commands for display are not received within 20 milliseconds, and therefore command determination processing is executed. In this case, it is impossible that two or more display stop type commands are stored in the command buffer area. It may be interpreted as a type command. In the processing of S6601, in preparation for such a case, if it is determined that two or more stop type commands for display are stored in the command buffer area, it is assumed that the stop type is completely out, and the stop type Decide on a table. As a result, the stop symbol corresponding to the complete loss is set by the processing of S6602.

If a stop symbol corresponding to the "special symbol jackpot" is set, the third symbol display device 81 displays the "special symbol" even if the "special symbol is out". A stop pattern corresponding to the "big win" is displayed, and the player is misled into thinking that the pachinko machine 10 has "a special pattern big win", and there is a risk of degrading the reliability of the pachinko machine 10.例文帳に追加On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, by setting the stop symbol corresponding to the complete loss, in fact, if it is a "special symbol jackpot", the third symbol display device 81 stops the complete loss. Even if the symbols are displayed, the pachinko machine 10 becomes a "jackpot of special symbols", so that the player can be pleased.

Returning to FIG. 680, the description continues. In the processing of S6406, if it is determined that there is no stop type command for display (S6406: No), then it is determined whether or not there is an opening command for display among the unprocessed commands (S6408). If there is an opening command (S6408: Yes), the opening command process is executed (S6409), and the process returns to S6401.

Details of the opening command process (S6409) will now be described with reference to FIG. 682(a). FIG. 682(a) is a flowchart showing opening command processing. This opening command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the opening command received from the sound lamp control device 113 .

In the opening command process, first, the opening display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d (S6701). Thereafter, a transfer data table corresponding to the opening display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S6702), and based on the set opening display data table, time data is set in the clock counter 233h (S6703). After that, the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S6704). Then, both the demonstration display flag 233y and the fixed display flag 233z are set to OFF (S6705), the opening command is terminated, and the process returns to command determination processing.

Returning to FIG. 680, the description continues. In the processing of S6408, if it is determined that there is no display opening command (S6408: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display round number command in the unprocessed commands (S6410), and display If there is a round number command for use (S6410: Yes), the round number command process is executed (S6411), and the process returns to S6401.

Here, with reference to FIG. 682(b), details of the round number command processing (S6411) will be described. FIG. 682(b) is a flowchart showing round number command processing. The number-of-rounds command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the number-of-rounds command for display received from the sound lamp control device 113 .

In the round number command processing, first, the round number display data table corresponding to the number of rounds indicated by the display round number command is determined, and the determined round number display data table is read out from the data table storage area 233b to display the display data. It is set in the table buffer 233d (S6801). Next, by writing Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e, the contents are cleared (S6802).

Then, based on the round number display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S6801, time data representing the performance time is set in the clock counter 233h (S6803), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0. (S6804). Then, both the demonstration display flag 233y and the fixed display flag 233z are set to OFF (S6805), the round number command process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

Returning to FIG. 680, the description continues. In the processing of S6410, if it is determined that there is no command for the number of rounds for display (S6410: No), then it is determined whether or not there is an ending command for display among the unprocessed commands (S6412). If there is an ending command for (S6412: Yes), the ending command process is executed (S6413), and the process returns to S6401.

Details of the ending command process (S6413) will now be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 683 is a flowchart showing ending command processing. This ending command process is to execute the process corresponding to the display ending command received from the sound lamp control device 113 .

In the ending command process, first, the ending display data table corresponding to the display mode of the ending effect indicated by the display ending command is determined, the determined ending display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, and the display data table is displayed. It is set in the buffer 233d (S6901). Next, by writing Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e, the contents are cleared (S6902).

Next, based on the ending display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S6901, time data representing the performance time is set in the clock counter 233h (S6903), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 ( S6904). Then, both the demonstration display flag 233y and the fixed display flag 233z are set to OFF (S6905), the ending command process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

Returning to FIG. 680, the description continues. In the process of S6412, if it is determined that there is no display ending command (S6412: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display effect mode command among the unprocessed commands (S6414), and the command is displayed. If there is a production mode command for (S6414: Yes), the production mode command process is executed (S6415), and the process returns to S6401.

Here, with reference to FIG. 684(a), details of the effect mode command process (S6415) will be described. FIG. 684(a) is a flow chart showing effect mode command processing. This production mode command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the display production mode command received from the sound lamp control device 113 .

In the effect mode command process, first, the effect mode display data table indicated by the display effect mode command is determined, the determined effect mode display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, and set in the display data table buffer 233d. (S6931). Next, by writing Null data into the transfer data table buffer 233e, the contents thereof are cleared (S6932).

Next, based on the effect mode display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S6931, time data representing the effect time is set in the clock counter 233h (S6933), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0. (S6934). Then, both the demonstration display flag 233y and the fixed display flag 233z are set to OFF (S6935), the effect mode command process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

Returning to FIG. 680, the description continues. In the processing of S6414, if it is determined that there is no display effect mode command (S6414: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display notification command in the unprocessed commands (S6416), and display If there is a notification command (S6416: Yes), the notification command process is executed (S6417), and the process returns to S6401.

Details of the notification command process (S6417) will now be described with reference to FIG. 684(b). FIG. 684(b) is a flow chart showing notification command processing. In this notification command processing, processing corresponding to the notification command (for display) received from the sound lamp control device 113 is executed.

This notification command is output to the display control device 114 among various notification commands set when the sound lamp control device 113 receives a command for indicating various abnormal states set by the main controller 110. This process is executed when the display control device 114 receives the display notification command.

In the notification command process, first, the display (notification) data table corresponding to the notification mode indicated by the notification command is determined, the determined display (notification) data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, and stored in the display data table buffer. 233d (S6951). Next, by writing Null data into the transfer data table buffer 233e, the contents thereof are cleared (S6952).

Next, based on the display (notification) data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S6951, time data representing the performance time is set in the clock counter 233h (S6953), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0. (S6954). Then, both the demonstration display flag 233y and the fixed display flag 233z are set to OFF (S6955), the notification command process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

In the present embodiment, the display control device 114 discriminates only the display command indicating that the notification target is the third symbol display device 81 (display device) among the various notification commands set by the sound lamp control device 113. However, it is not limited to this, and related commands other than the display command, such as a light emission command, a voice output command, and a character object driving command, are once received and processed by the display control device 114. It may be configured such that the related command is output to the corresponding control device in a state in which information for indicating the data content (display mode) set in 1 is added.

Returning to FIG. 680, the description continues. In the process of S6416, if it is determined that there is no display notification command (S6416: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a back image change command among the unprocessed commands (S6418). If there is a change command (S6418: Yes), back image change command processing is executed (S6419), and the process returns to S6401.

Here, with reference to FIG. 685(a), details of the back image change command process (S6419) will be described. FIG. 685(a) is a flowchart showing back image change command processing. The back image change command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the back image change command received from the sound lamp control device 113 .

In the back image change command processing, first, the back image change flag 233w for notifying the normal image transfer setting processing (S7503) of the change in the back image accompanying the reception of the back image change command in the ON state is set to ON (S7001). ). Then, among the bits of the back image determination flag 233x provided for each back image type (back surface A, B), the bit corresponding to the back image type indicated by the back image change command is set to ON, and the other bits are set to ON. The bit corresponding to the back image type is set to OFF (S7002), the back image change command process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

In the normal image transfer setting process, when it is detected that the back image change flag 233w set by the process of S7001 is turned on, the back image type after change is selected from the back image discrimination flag 233x set by the process of S7002. Identify.

Further, in the task processing, if it is specified to display one of the back faces A and B according to the back face type of the back face image defined in the display data table, from the back face image determination flag 233x set in S7002, The type of background image to be displayed at that time is specified, the range of the background image to be displayed is specified according to the passage of time, and the RAM type ( Resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) and the address of that RAM are specified.

Since the player does not continuously operate the frame button 22 for 20 milliseconds or less, two or more background image change commands are not received within 20 milliseconds, so the command determination process is executed. In this case, there should be no cases where two or more background image change commands are stored in the command buffer area. It could be interpreted as a command. In the process of S7002, if it is determined that two or more back image commands are stored in the command buffer area, the back image determination flag 233x corresponding to the back image type indicated by the previously received back image command is turned on. Alternatively, the back image determination flag 233x corresponding to the back image type indicated by the back image command received later may be turned on. Alternatively, any one back image change command may be extracted and the back image determination flag 233x corresponding to the back image type indicated by the command may be turned on. Since the change of the back image does not directly affect the game value of the pachinko machine 10, it is preferable to appropriately set it according to the characteristics and operability of the pachinko machine 10. FIG.

Now, returning to the description of FIG. In the process of S6418, if it is determined that there is no back image change command (S6418: No), then it is determined whether or not there is an error command among the unprocessed commands (S6420). Otherwise (S6420: Yes), the error command process is executed (S6421), and the process returns to S6401.

Details of the error command processing (S6421) will now be described with reference to FIG. 685(b). FIG. 685(b) is a flowchart showing error command processing. In this error command processing, processing corresponding to the error command received from the sound lamp control device 113 is executed.

In the error command process, first, an error occurrence flag indicating that an error has occurred in the ON state is set to ON (S7101). Then, among the error determination flags provided for each error type, the error determination flag corresponding to the error type indicated by the error command is turned on, and the other error determination flags are set to off (S7102). Terminate the process and return to the command determination process.

In the display setting process, when the occurrence of an error is detected based on the error occurrence flag set by the process of S7101, the type of error that has occurred is determined from the error determination flag set by the process of S7102, and the error type is handled. A process is executed to cause the third symbol display device 81 to display a warning image to be displayed.

If it is determined that two or more error commands are stored in the command buffer area, in the process of S7102, error determination flags corresponding to all error types indicated by the respective error commands are set to ON. As a result, the warning images corresponding to all the error types are displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the player and the people involved in the hall can correctly grasp the occurrence of the error.

Now, returning to the description of FIG. In the process of S6420, if it is determined that there is no error command (S6420: No), then the process corresponding to other unprocessed commands is executed (S6422), and the process returns to S6401.

In the process of S6401, which is executed again after each command has been processed, it is again determined whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area, and if there is an unprocessed new command (S6401: Yes ), and the processing of S6402 to S6422 is executed again. Then, the processing of S6401 to S6422 is repeatedly executed until there is no unprocessed new command in the command buffer area. End the process.

The simple command determination process (S6308) executed when the simple image display flag 233c is ON in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 679(b)) is also performed in the same manner as the command determination process. However, in the simple command determination process, only the commands necessary to display the power-on image, that is, the display fluctuation pattern command and the display stop type command, are extracted from the unprocessed commands stored in the command buffer area. It extracts and executes fluctuation pattern command processing (see FIG. 681 (a)) and stop type command processing (see FIG. 681 (b)), which are processing corresponding to each command, and for other commands, A process to discard the command without executing the process corresponding to the command is performed.

Here, in the variation pattern command processing (see FIG. 681(a)) executed in this case, in the processing of S6501, the display data table corresponding to the display of the variation image at power-on is set in the display data table buffer 233d. The image data of the power-on main image and the power-on varying image required in this case are stored in the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on varying image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, in the process of S6502, the process of writing Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e and clearing the contents thereof is performed.

Next, details of the display setting process (S6303), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described with reference to FIGS. 686 to 688. FIG. FIG. 686 is a flow chart showing this display setting process.

In this display setting process, as shown in FIG. 686, first, it is determined whether or not the new command flag is on (S7201). ), it is determined that the new command has not been processed in the command determination processing to be executed first, the processing of S7202 to S7204 is skipped, and the processing proceeds to S7205. On the other hand, if the new command flag is ON (S7201: Yes), it is determined that the new command has been processed in the previously executed command determination processing, and after setting the new command flag to OFF (S7202), S7203-S7204 , the process corresponding to the new command is executed.

In the process of S7203, it is determined whether or not the error occurrence flag is ON (S7203). Then, if the error occurrence flag is on (S7203: Yes), warning image setting processing is executed (S7204).

Here, with reference to FIG. 687, details of the warning image setting process will be described. FIG. 687 is a flowchart showing warning image setting processing. This process is a process for developing image data for displaying a warning image corresponding to an error that has occurred on the third pattern display device 81. First, the error determination flag is referred to, and all error determination flags set to ON are displayed. Warning image data for displaying an error warning image corresponding to the flag on the third pattern display device 81 is developed (S7301).

In task processing (S6304), based on the expanded warning image data, the types of sprites (display objects) that make up the warning image are specified, and the display coordinate position, magnification, and rotation angle are determined for each sprite. Determine various parameters necessary for drawing such as

Then, in the warning image setting process, after the process of S7301, the error occurrence flag is set to OFF (S7302), and the process returns to the display setting process.

Now, return to the description of FIG. After the warning image setting process (S7204), or if it is determined in the process of S7203 that the error occurrence flag is not ON, that is, it is OFF (S7203: No), then the process proceeds to S7205.

In S7205, pointer update processing is executed (S7205). Here, with reference to FIG. 688, the details of pointer update processing will be described. FIG. 688 is a flowchart showing pointer update processing. This pointer updating process acquires the transfer data information of the corresponding drawing contents or transfer target image data from the display data table and the transfer data table stored in the respective buffers of the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table buffer 233e. This is the process of updating the pointer 233f that specifies the address to which it should be applied.

In this pointer update process, first, 1 is added to the pointer 233f (S7401). That is, the pointer 233f is basically updated so that it is incremented by 1 each time the V interrupt process is executed. Further, as described above, in the various data tables, the Start information is described at the address "0000H", and the substance of each data is specified after the address "0001H". When the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 in accordance with the storage in the data table buffer 233d, the value is updated to 1 by this pointer update processing. Substantial data can be read from the data table.

After the value of the pointer 233f is updated by the processing of S7401, it is then checked whether the data at the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d is End information. is determined (S7402). As a result, if it is End information (S7402: Yes), it means that the pointer 233f has been updated past the address where the substance data is described in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d.

Therefore, it is determined whether or not the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is a demonstration display data table (S7403). The time data corresponding to the performance time of the display data table for demonstration set in the table buffer 233d is set in the clock counter 233h (S7404), the pointer 233f is initialized by setting it to 1 (S7405), and this processing ends. and return to the display setting process. As a result, in the display setting process, the drawing contents can be developed sequentially from the top of the demonstration display data table, so that the third symbol display device 81 can repeatedly display the demonstration effects.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S7403 that the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is not the demonstration display data table (S7403: No), the value of the pointer 233f is decremented by 1 ( S7406), this process is terminated, and the process returns to the display setting process. As a result, in the display setting process, when a display data table other than the demonstration display data table, for example, a variable display data table, is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the previous address in which the End information is described is displayed. is always expanded, the third pattern display device 81 can display the last image defined by the display data table in a stopped state. On the other hand, in the process of S7402, if the data at the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f is not the End information (S7402: No), this process ends and returns to the display setting process.

Here, return to FIG. 686 to continue the description. After the pointer update process, the drawing contents of the address indicated by the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update process are obtained from the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d (S7206). In the task processing (S6304), the type of the sprite (display object) constituting the image is specified based on the rendering content developed in the processing of S7206 together with the previously developed warning image, etc., and each sprite , determine various parameters necessary for drawing, such as the display coordinate position, magnification ratio, and rotation angle.

Next, the value of the clock counter 233h is decremented by 1 (S7207), and it is determined whether or not the value of the clock counter 233h after the subtraction is 0 or less (S7208). Then, if the value of the clock counter 233h is 1 or more (S7208: No), the display setting process is terminated and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, if the value of the clock counter 233h is 0 or less (S7208: Yes), it means that the effect time corresponding to the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d has elapsed. At this time, if the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, it is time to end the variable display and perform the stop display, so it is checked whether the fixed display flag is on. (S7209).

As a result, if the confirmed display flag is off (S7209: No), the confirmed display effect has not yet been performed, and it is time to perform the confirmed display effect. The transfer data table buffer 233e is set (S7210), and then the content is cleared by writing Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e (S7211). Then, the time data corresponding to the presentation time of the fixed display data table is set in the clock counter 233h (S7212), and the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S7213). Then, after setting the confirmation display flag indicating that the confirmation display effect is being performed in the ON state to ON (S7214), the content of the stop symbol discrimination flag is copied as it is to the previous stop symbol discrimination flag provided in the work RAM 233. (S7215), returns to V interrupt processing.

Thus, when the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, etc., the fixed display effect of the stop symbol in the variable effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in accordance with the end of the effect. You can set the drawing contents like this. In addition, only by changing the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d to the fixed display data table, the effect displayed on the third pattern display device 81 can be easily changed to the fixed display effect. In addition, compared to the conventional case of changing the display contents by activating another program, the program does not become complicated and bloated, and therefore the MPU 231 is not overloaded. A wide variety of effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 regardless of the processing capability of the display control device 114 .

It should be noted that the last stop symbol determination flag set by the process of S7215 is used to specify the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the next variation effect. That is, as described above, the display of the third symbol in the variable effect changes according to the stop symbol of the variable effect performed immediately before, and in the variable display data table, the variation based on the data table Until a predetermined time elapses after the start, the symbol offset information from the stop symbol of the variable effect performed one before is described. In the task processing (S6304), until a predetermined time has passed since the start of the variation, from the last stop design determination flag set by S7215, the stop design of the fluctuation production performed one before is specified, and the The third symbol to be actually displayed is specified by adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the specified stop symbol. As a result, the variable performance is started from the stop symbol in the previous variable performance.

On the other hand, in the processing of S7209, if the fixed display flag is on (S7209: Yes), it is determined whether or not the demonstration display flag is on (S7216). Then, if the demonstration display flag is off (S7216: No), it means that the value of the clock counter 233h has become 0 or less with the end of the fixed display effect. After that, a process for displaying a demonstration effect on the third symbol display device 81 is performed.

First, the demonstration display data table is obtained and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S7217), and the contents thereof are cleared by writing Null data in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S7218). Then, the time data corresponding to the rendering time of the demonstration display data table is set in the clock counter 233h (S7219). Then, the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S7220), the demonstration display flag indicating that the demonstration is being performed in the ON state is set to ON (S7221), this process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process.

As a result, when the display variation pattern command indicating the start of the next variation effect is not received after the fixed display effect is completed, the demonstration effect is automatically displayed on the third pattern display device 81.例文帳に追加, you can set its drawing contents.

In the process of S7216, if the demonstration display flag is ON (S7216: Yes), it means that the demonstration effect is performed after the fixed display effect is finished, and that demonstration effect is finished, so the display setting process is finished as it is. and return to V interrupt processing. In this case, various settings are made so that the demonstration effect is started again by the pointer updating process executed in the next V interrupt process. The demonstration effect can be repeatedly displayed on the third symbol display device 81 until a new display variation pattern command is received.

The simple display setting process (S6309) executed when the simple image display flag 233c is ON in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 679(b)) also performs the same process as the display setting process. However, in the simple display setting process, one of the power-on variable images corresponding to the stop pattern set based on the stop type command for display is displayed for a predetermined time after the effect time of the power-on variable image ends. A process of setting a display data table specifying that the image is to be displayed still in the display data table buffer 233d is performed.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 689 and 690, details of the transfer setting process (S6305), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. First, FIG. 689(a) is a flow chart showing this transfer setting process.

In this transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is ON (S7501). If the simple image display flag 233c is on (S7501: Yes), all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, so the resident image transfer setting is made. Processing is executed (S7502), the transfer setting processing is terminated, and the processing returns to the V interrupt processing. As a result, a transfer instruction is set for the image controller 237 to transfer the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 . Details of the resident image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 689(b).

On the other hand, if the simple image display flag 233c is not turned on as a result of the processing of S7501, that is, if it is turned off (S7501: No), all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video data. It has been transferred to the RAM 235 . In this case, the normal image transfer setting process is executed (S7503), the transfer setting process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. As a result, the transfer instruction is set so that subsequent transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236 . Details of the normal image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, resident image transfer setting processing (S7502), which is part of the transfer setting processing (S6305) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described with reference to FIG. 689(b). FIG. 689(b) is a flow chart showing this resident image transfer setting process (S7502).

In this resident image transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not an instruction to transfer untransferred image data has been given to the image controller 237 (S7601). ), and further determines whether or not the image data transfer processing performed by the image controller 237 based on the transfer instruction has ended (S7602). In the processing of S7602, after instructing the image controller 237 to transfer the image data, if a transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer processing is received from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer processing has ended. . If it is determined by the processing in S7602 that the transfer processing has not ended (S7602: No), the image transfer processing is continuously performed in the image controller 237, so this resident image transfer setting processing is executed. finish. On the other hand, if it is determined that the transfer process has ended (S7602: Yes), the process proceeds to S7603. Also, as a result of the processing of S7601, even if a transfer instruction for untransferred image data has not been transmitted to the image controller 237 (S7601: No), the process proceeds to S7603.

In the process of S7603, it is determined whether or not all resident target image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 have been transferred (S7603). A transfer instruction is set for the image controller 237 so as to transfer the resident target image data to be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 (S7604), and this processing ends.

As a result, the transfer data information about the untransferred resident target image data is included in the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing process, and the image controller 237 transfers the transfer data described in the drawing list. Based on the data information, the resident target image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 . The transfer data information includes the head address and the end address of the character ROM 234 in which the resident target image data is stored, the transfer destination information (in this case, the resident video RAM 235), and the transfer destination (where the data is transferred). The first address of the area provided in the resident video RAM 235 where the resident target image data is to be stored is included. The image controller 237 executes image transfer processing based on this transfer data information, reads the image data specified in the transfer processing from the character ROM 234, temporarily stores it in the buffer RAM 237a, and then stores it in the buffer RAM 237a while the resident video RAM 235 is not in use. , it is transferred to the specified address of the resident video RAM 235 . Then, when the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231 .

As a result of the process of S7603, if all the resident target image data have been transferred (S7603: Yes), the simple image display flag 233c is set to OFF (S7605), and this process ends. As a result, in the V interrupt processing (see FIG. 679(b)), the command is executed instead of the simple command determination processing (see S6308 in FIG. Since the judgment processing (see FIGS. 680 to 685) and the display setting processing (see FIGS. 686 to 688) are executed, normal image drawing is set, and the third symbol display device 81 displays A normal image is displayed. Further, subsequent transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236 by the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 690) (see S7501: No in FIG. 689(a)).

By executing this resident image transfer setting process, the MPU 231 transfers all resident images to be resident in the resident video RAM 235, excluding the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image that have already been transferred in the main process. The target image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 . Then, the MPU 231 controls the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 to be held without overwriting while the power is turned on. As a result, the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer setting process will be resident in the resident video RAM 235 while the power is turned on.

Therefore, after all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the display controller 114 uses the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235 while the image controller 237 , the image drawing process can be performed. As a result, if the image data used for drawing processing is resident in the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessary to read out the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a whose read speed is slow when drawing the image. Therefore, the time required for reading the data can be omitted, and the image can be drawn immediately and displayed on the third pattern display device 81 .

In particular, the resident video RAM 235 stores image data of frequently displayed images such as rear images, third designs, character designs, and error messages, as well as main controller 110, sound lamp controller 113, and display controller 114. Since the image data of the image to be displayed is immediately resident after the display is determined by such as, even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND type flash memory 234a, various operations performed by the player at any timing can be prevented. , high responsiveness can be maintained until the third pattern display device 81 displays some kind of image.

Next, with reference to FIG. 690, the normal image transfer setting process (S7503), which is one process of the transfer setting process (S6305) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. FIG. 690 is a flow chart showing this normal image transfer setting process (S7503).

In this normal image transfer setting process, first, from the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update process (S7205) of the previously executed display setting process (S6303) is used. Information described in the indicated address is obtained (S7701). Then, it is determined whether or not the acquired information is transfer data information (S7702). , and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are extracted and stored in the transfer data buffer provided in the work RAM 233 ( S7703), furthermore, a transfer start flag, which is provided in the work RAM 233 and indicates that there is image data whose transfer is to be started in the ON state, is set to ON (S7704), and the process proceeds to S7705.

In addition, in the process of S7702, if the acquired information is not the transfer data information but Null data (S7702: No), the process of S7703 and S7704 is skipped and the process proceeds to S7705. In the process of S7705, it is determined whether or not a new image data transfer instruction has been set for the image controller 237 after the previous image data transfer is completed (S7705), and the transfer instruction is set. If so (S7705: Yes), it is further determined whether or not the image data transfer performed by the image controller 237 based on the transfer instruction has ended (S7706).

In the process of S7706, after setting an image data transfer instruction to the image controller 237, if a transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process has ended. . If it is determined by the process of S7706 that the transfer process has not ended (S7706: No), the image transfer process continues in the image controller 237, so this normal image transfer setting process is executed. finish. On the other hand, if it is determined that the transfer process has ended (S7706: Yes), the process proceeds to S7707. Also, as a result of the process of S7705, even if the image data transfer instruction is not set for the image controller 237 after the previous transfer process is completed (S7705: No), the process proceeds to S7707.

In the process of S7707, it is determined whether or not the transfer start flag is on (S7707). If the transfer start flag is on (S7707: Yes), image data to be transferred exists, so is turned off (S7708), the image data of the sprite indicated by the various information stored in the transfer data buffer by the processing of S7703 is set as the image data to be transferred, and then the processing proceeds to S7713. On the other hand, if the transfer start flag is not on, but off (S7707: No), then it is determined whether or not the back image change flag 233w is on (S7709). Then, if the back image change flag 233w is not on but off (S7709: No), there is no image data to start transferring, so the normal image transfer setting process ends.

On the other hand, if the back image change flag 233w is on (S7709: Yes), it means that the back image has been changed. Of the back image determination flags 233x, the image data of the back image corresponding to the back image determination flag 233x in the ON state is specified, and the image data is set as the transfer target image data (S7711). Furthermore, the head address (storage source head address) and the end address (storage source end address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data of the back image corresponding to the back image determination flag 233x in the ON state is stored, and the transfer destination ( The start address of the normal video RAM 236) is acquired (S7712), and the process proceeds to S7713.

In the process of S7713, it is determined whether or not the image data to be transferred has already been stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S7713). The determination in the process of S7713 is performed by referring to the stored image data determination flag 233i. That is, the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is read from the stored image data discrimination flag 233i, and if the storage state is "on", the image data of the sprite to be transferred is normal video If it is determined that the data is stored in the RAM 236 and the storage state is "OFF", it is determined that the image data of the sprite to be transferred is not stored in the normal video RAM 236. FIG.

If the image data to be transferred is stored in the normal video RAM 236 as a result of the processing of S7713 (S7713: Yes), there is no need to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. , the normal image transfer setting process ends. As a result, it is possible to prevent unnecessary transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, thereby reducing the processing load on each unit of the display control device 114 and the traffic on the bus line 240. can be planned.

On the other hand, if the image data to be transferred is not stored in the normal video RAM 236 as a result of the process of S7713 (S7713: No), a transfer instruction for the image data to be transferred is set (S7714). As a result, the transfer data information of the transfer target image data is included in the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing process, and the image controller 237 receives the transfer data information described in the drawing list. Based on this, the image data of the image to be transferred can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 . The transfer data information includes the head address and the end address of the character ROM 234 storing the image data of the image to be transferred, the transfer destination information (in this case, the normal video RAM 236), and the transfer destination (here, the transfer destination). The start address of the sub-area provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 in which the image data of the image to be transferred is to be stored. The image controller 237 executes image transfer processing based on this transfer data information, reads the image data specified in the transfer processing from the character ROM 234, and specifies the specified video RAM (here, the normal video RAM 236). forward to the specified address. Then, when the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231 .

After the process of S7714, the stored image data determination flag 233i is updated (S7715), and this normal transfer setting process is terminated. The stored image data determination flag 233i is updated by, as described above, setting the storage state corresponding to the sprite that has become the image data to be transferred to "ON", and by substituting the same image storage area 236a as the one sprite. This is done by setting the storage state corresponding to other sprites that are to be stored in the area to "off".

By executing the normal image transfer processing in this way, the processing corresponding to the display stop type command is executed in the previously executed command determination processing. When the displayed stop type information is determined to be a jackpot stop type, the image data used in the fanfare effect can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. Further, when the back image is changed based on the reception of the back image change command in the previously executed command determination processing, the image data used for the back image is stored in the back image of the resident video RAM 235 . Image data not stored in the image area 235c can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 without delay.

In addition, in this embodiment, the display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d in response to a command (for example, display variation pattern command) or the like transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. , a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. By executing the normal image transfer setting process, the MPU 231 sends data to the image controller 237 in accordance with the transfer data information described in the area indicated by the pointer 233f of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Since the transfer instruction of the image data to be transferred is set, the sprite image data used in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d can be reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing. can be done.

Here, the transfer data table stores the image data to be transferred so that the image data corresponding to the given sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a before the drawing of the given sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information is specified for a predetermined address, the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a in accordance with the transfer data information specified in this transfer data table, whereby the predetermined address is obtained according to the display data table. image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 required for drawing the sprite can be stored in the image storage area 236a without fail.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the image necessary for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236, so that the image can be displayed. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. - 特許庁Also, only the image data temporarily resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 by the description of the transfer data table.

The transfer data table defines transfer data information so that image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to a sprite. As a result, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the processing related to the transfer can be easily performed. By controlling the transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 on a sprite-by-sprite basis, the transfer of image data can be controlled in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in the load on transfer.

Next, with reference to FIG. 691, details of the drawing process (S6306), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. FIG. 691 is a flow chart showing this rendering process.

In the drawing process, the types of various sprites that make up one frame determined in task processing (S6304) and the parameters necessary for drawing each sprite (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucency value, α blending information , color information, filter designation information) and the transfer instruction set by the transfer setting process (S6305), a drawing list (FIG. 630) is generated (S7801). That is, in the processing of S7801, the type and address of the storage RAM in which the image data of the sprite is stored are specified for each sprite from the types of various sprites forming one frame determined in the task processing (S6304). Then, parameters necessary for the sprite determined by task processing are associated with the specified storage RAM type and address. Then, each sprite is rearranged in order from the sprite that should be placed on the backmost side to the sprite that should be placed on the front side in the image for one frame. As drawing information (detailed information), a drawing list is generated by describing the storage RAM type and address in which sprite image data is stored and the parameters necessary for drawing the sprite. If a transfer instruction is set by the transfer setting process (S6305), the top address (storage source top address) of the character ROM 234 where the image data to be transferred is stored as the transfer data information is displayed at the end of the drawing list. , the final address (storage source final address), and the top address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236).

As described above, the area of the resident video RAM 235 in which the image data of the sprite is stored or the subarea of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed for each sprite. , according to the sprite type, the storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately specified, and such information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

When the drawing list is generated, the generated drawing list and the drawing target buffer information specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233j are transmitted to the image controller 237 (S7802). Here, when the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 0, the drawing target buffer flag 233j includes information instructing to expand the image drawn in the first frame buffer 236b as the drawing target buffer information. includes information instructing to develop the image drawn in the second frame buffer 236c as drawing target buffer information.

Based on the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 draws the image in order from the sprite described at the head of the drawing list, and develops it by overwriting in the frame buffer indicated by the drawing object buffer information. As a result, in the one-frame image generated by the drawing list, the first-drawn sprite can be arranged on the rearmost side, and the last-drawn sprite can be arranged on the frontmost side.

When transfer data information is included in the drawing list, the transfer data information is used to determine the start address (storage source start address) and end address (storage source end address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data to be transferred is stored. ), and the head address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236), and the image data stored from the head address of the storage source to the end address of the storage source are sequentially read from the character ROM 234 and temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a. After that, the image data stored in the buffer RAM 237a are sequentially transferred to the area indicated by the transfer destination start address of the normal video RAM 236, when the normal video RAM 236 is in an unused state. The image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 is used based on the drawing list transmitted from the MPU 231 after that, and the image is drawn according to the drawing list.

The image controller 237 reads the image information of the previously developed image from a frame buffer different from the frame buffer designated by the drawing object buffer information, and sends the image information along with the drive signal to the third pattern display device 81. Send to As a result, the image developed in the frame buffer can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 . Further, while expanding the image drawn in one of the frame buffers, the image drawn from one of the frame buffers can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and drawing processing and display processing are simultaneously processed in parallel. be able to.

In the rendering process, after the process of S7802, the rendering target buffer flag 233j is updated (S7803). Then, the drawing process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. The rendering target buffer flag 233j is updated by inverting its value, that is, by setting the value to "1" if it was "0" and to "0" if it was "1". done. As a result, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c each time the drawing list is transmitted.

Here, the transmission of the drawing list is executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing processing and display processing of one frame of image are completed. This is performed every time the rendering process of the load process (see FIG. 679(b)) is performed. As a result, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. is executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for developing the image for one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing processing for the image for one frame is completed. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information for the first half is read. Therefore, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read out and displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. .

After the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. be done. Therefore, the image information of the image developed in the second frame buffer 236c earlier can be read out and displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. . After that, the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame are set to either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c every 20 milliseconds. By specifying these alternately, it is possible to perform display processing of an image for one frame continuously in units of 20 milliseconds while drawing processing for an image for one frame is being performed. In addition, in the thirty-fifth embodiment, the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol can be executed in parallel, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, irrespective of whether it is the first special symbol or the second special symbol, in a state in which one variable display is being performed, other variable displays may be configured to be unexecutable. Then, when there is a reserved ball, it may be configured such that the variable display is executed in order from the reserved ball with the oldest starting prize in terms of time. By configuring in this way, the control can be simplified, so the processing load can be reduced.

As described above, in the thirty-fifth embodiment, the upper limit for the number of times the "special symbol high probability state" is set continuously (special symbol continuous setting number), and the "normal symbol high probability state" The upper limit for the number of times set in succession (the number of times set in a normal pattern) and the update management are configured separately, and the "first variable state (high probability of special symbols)", which is a game state advantageous to the player state, high probability state of normal symbols)" is set, if the number of times of continuous special figure setting reaches the upper limit (if the probability limit is reached), "High probability of special symbols "Probability state" changed to "low probability state of special patterns", "time saving state (low probability state of special patterns, high probability state of normal patterns)", when the number of times of normal pattern continuous setting reaches the upper limit (time saving limit If you reach), change the "normal pattern high probability state" to "normal pattern low probability state" "Second variable state (high probability state of special design, low probability state of normal design)" Configured to be configurable.

In addition, the number of times that the high probability state of the special design can be set continuously (the number of times of special design continuous setting) is more than the number of times that the high probability state of the normal design can be set continuously (the number of times of normal design continuous setting) It is configured as follows. In addition, among the special pattern high probability period in which the special pattern high probability state is set continuously, the first probability variable state (special symbol high probability state, normal symbol high probability state) is set 1st More prize balls can be awarded to a player than in a second period in which a second variable probability state (high probability state for special symbols, low probability state for normal symbols) is set.

By configuring in this way, when the jackpot is elected in a state where the normal state (low probability state of special symbols, low probability state of normal symbols) is set, and the first probability variable state is set, first the first A period will be set until it reaches|attains a time saving limit, and a 2nd period will be set after that.

Therefore, after the first game in which many prize balls can be given to the player is executed for the first period, the second game in which it is difficult to give prize balls can be executed for the second period. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the first game is excessively continuously executed and excessive prize balls are awarded to the player.

Furthermore, in the 35th embodiment, the length of the first period during which the first game can be executed is until the time reduction limit is reached after the first variable probability state is set (until the second variable probability state is set) period (for 10 jackpot wins), and the length of the second period during which the second game can be executed is the period from when the second probability variable state is set until the probability limit is reached (for 30 jackpot wins). It is configured to In this way, the length of the first period and the second period set within the special figure high probability period can be set based on the number of times the jackpot is won, so that the special figure high probability period is set. It becomes possible to manage the length of the period.

More specifically, in the first period in which the first probability variable state is set, the fluctuation time of the second special symbol lottery that is mainly executed is always constant (1 second) regardless of the result of the second special symbol lottery. The content of the jackpot game (the number of round games) to be executed when the jackpot is won in the second special symbol lottery is always constant (10 rounds). In other words, the length of the first period does not vary depending on the variation pattern of the special symbol variation to be executed and the contents of the big winning game to be executed.

By constructing in this manner, the first period is set with a length corresponding to the period (number of times of special symbol fluctuation) until the 10th big win is won in the high probability state of the special symbol (probability of big win 30/1000). can be done.

In addition, in the second period in which the second probability variable state is set, the fluctuation time of the first special symbol lottery that is mainly executed is always constant (0.1 seconds) regardless of the result of the first special symbol lottery, The content of the jackpot game (the number of round games) to be executed when the jackpot is won in the first special symbol lottery is always constant (two rounds). In other words, the length of the second period does not vary depending on the variation pattern of the special symbol variation to be performed and the content of the big winning game to be performed.

By constructing in this way, the second period is set with a length corresponding to the period (number of special symbol variations) until the 30th big win is won in the high probability state of special symbols (jackpot probability 30/1000). can be done.

Furthermore, in the thirty-fifth embodiment, during the first period, which is a partial period of the special high probability period, the number of prize balls can be increased by giving the player a large number of prize balls, and the special high probability period During the second period, which is the other period, the number of prize balls awarded to the player is reduced, thereby suppressing the increase or decrease in the number of paid balls.

By configuring in this way, in the specific period in which the special figure high probability period is set, when the appropriate increase in the number of balls that can be given is configured to be biased during the first period, that is, the first period Even if it is possible to give the player an excessively large number of balls when looking at only As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from being awarded an excessive amount of balls while making it possible to execute a ball-out increasing game with unexpected surprises for the player.

In addition, in the above-described thirty-fifth embodiment, when the jackpot is won in a state where the normal state (low probability state of special symbols, low probability state of normal symbols) is set, the second probability variable state (high probability of special symbols) Probability state, low probability state of normal symbols), the first variable probability state is more likely to be set after the end of the jackpot game than when the jackpot is won. In other words, a game state in which it is difficult to win a jackpot but is easy to shift to the first game state most advantageous to the player when the jackpot is won, and a game state in which it is easy to win a jackpot but is most advantageous to the player when the jackpot is won. A game state in which it is difficult to shift to the 1 game state can be set.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to change the game purpose to be aimed at by the player according to the set game state, so that it is easy to prevent the player from becoming bored with the game early. can.

In the above-described thirty-fifth embodiment, in the state where the first variable probability state (high probability state of special symbols, high probability state of normal symbols) is set, when reaching the variable limit first, first to the short time limit The game state set after the end of the big win game is different depending on whether the variable probability limit and the short time limit are reached at the same time.

By configuring in this way, even if the jackpot of the same type (for example, the first probability variable jackpot where the first probability variable state is set) is won, a different game state can be set according to the reaching status of each limit. Since the settings can be made, it is possible to easily provide various games to the player.

In addition, by using the above-described configuration, in the case where neither limit has been reached, the ratio of setting the same game state (for example, the first probability variable state) after the end of the jackpot game is increased (always set ), the game state with a high setting ratio (for example, the first variable probability state) is set continuously for a long period of time, and the game becomes monotonous and the motivation to play decreases. It is possible to prevent the situation from occurring.

Furthermore, in the thirty-fifth embodiment, a special state (special mode) advantageous to the player can be set when the variable probability limit and the short time limit are reached at the same time. In other words, when the normal state is set based on reaching the probability limit and the short time limit at the same time in the first probability variable state in which the high probability state of the special symbol and the high probability state of the normal symbol are set, usually A normal state (special normal state) more advantageous to the player than the normal state of is set. By configuring in this way, even when the opportunity (each limit) to forcibly shift the probability state of each symbol from the high probability state to the low probability state is established, if the special condition is established, the game It is possible to shift to a game state that is advantageous to the player.

Therefore, the player can play a game that expects that the variable probability limit or the short time limit will not be reached and a game that expects that the limit will be reached at the same time, so that the player's interest in the game is improved. can be made

As described above, in addition to the jackpot type in which the jackpot is won, if there is an element (each limit) for determining the game state (game situation) set after the jackpot game ends, the jackpot of the same jackpot type After a game is executed, there is a problem that it is difficult for a player to grasp in advance which game state is to be set after a jackpot game ends.

On the other hand, in the 35th embodiment, the set gaming state, the remaining number of times to reach the variable probability limit (remaining number of hits), and the remaining number of times to reach the short time limit (remaining number of hits) And, it is configured to vary the performance mode based on.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to predict the future game content based on the content of the effect to be executed, so that it is possible to easily provide a game that is easy for the player to understand.

In addition, in the 35th embodiment, when the second probability variable state (high probability state of special symbols, low probability state of normal symbols) is set, one In the part, after the end of the jackpot game, the first probability variable state (high probability state of special symbols, high probability state of normal symbols) can be set, but not limited to this, the second probability variable state is set. It may be constructed such that when a jackpot is won in a state where the player is present, the second probability variable state is always set after the jackpot game ends.

By configuring in this way, when the second probability variable state is set during the special symbol high probability period in which the high probability state of the special symbol is continuously set, that is, when the jackpot is won in the special symbol lottery When the jackpot type in which the second probability variable state is set after the end of the jackpot game is set, or when the first variable probability state is continuously set, the time reduction limit is reached and the second probability variable state is forced after the end of the jackpot game. (when the second probability variable state is set by the probability variable limit processing), the period until the probability variable limit is reached can be reliably set to the second probability variable state. Therefore, after the advantageous gaming state (first variable probability state) advantageous to the player is set, the unfavorable gaming state (second variable probability state) can be reliably and easily set for a predetermined period.

Furthermore, in this case, according to the timing when the second variable probability state is set, the jackpot type set when the jackpot is won during the second variable probability state may be configured to be different, for example, variable probability limit processing. When the second probability variable state is set by, the jackpot type in which the second probability variable state is set after the jackpot game ends is set more easily than when the second probability variable state is set based on the jackpot type. can be configured to

By constructing in this way, a jackpot is won in a state where a normal state (low probability state of special patterns, low probability state of normal patterns) is set, and a high probability state of special patterns is set after the jackpot game is finished. In the case, until the probability variation limit is reached, the first probability variation state (high probability state of special symbols, high probability state of normal symbols), which is an advantageous gaming state advantageous to the player, is set to the player. It is possible to suppress execution of an excessively disadvantageous game.

Furthermore, in the above-described thirty-fifth embodiment, when a jackpot is won in a special pattern lottery, the special pattern high probability state is always set after the jackpot game ends. It may be configured such that the low probability state of the special symbol is set in part when the jackpot is won. Further, in the thirty-fifth embodiment, a plurality of game states can be set, and games with different degrees of advantage can be executed according to the set game states. Specifically, the degree of advantage to the player is the most advantageous game state for the player in the first probability variable state (high probability state of special symbols, high probability state of normal symbols), and then the special state (special mode ) is set normal state (low probability state of special design, low probability state of normal design), time saving state (low probability state of special design, high probability state of normal design), second variable state (high special design probability state, low probability state of normal symbols), and normal state. It may be configured to vary the degree of advantage of the player in the game state.

<Thirty-sixth embodiment>
Next, the thirty-sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 692 to 696. FIG. In the pachinko machine 10 of the thirty-fifth embodiment described above, when the special symbol continuous setting number of times in which the high probability state of the special symbol is continuously set reaches the upper limit number (40 times) (reaches the probability limit), special Even if the condition that the high probability state of the pattern can be set is satisfied (for example, when winning the jackpot of the jackpot type in which the first probability variable state is set after the jackpot game ends), the special pattern is forced. It was configured to be able to execute processing (variable probability limit processing) in which a low probability state of is set.

In addition, when the normal pattern high probability state is set continuously and the normal pattern continuous setting number reaches the upper limit number (10 times) (reaches the short time limit), the condition that the high probability state of the normal pattern can be set is established (for example, if you win a jackpot of a jackpot type in which the probability variable state is set after the jackpot game ends), the process of forcibly setting the low probability state of the normal pattern (time-saving limit processing) was configured to be executable.

When the big win is won in the first special pattern lottery and the second special pattern lottery, the high probability state of the special pattern is surely set after the big win game is finished, and the big win is made in the first special pattern lottery. In the case of winning, the low probability state of normal patterns is more likely to be set than the high probability state of normal patterns after the end of the jackpot game, and when the jackpot is won in the second special pattern lottery, the jackpot game is finished. It was configured so that the high-probability state of the normal symbol was always set afterward.

In addition, in the normal state and the second variable probability state, the first special symbol lottery is easier to execute than the second special symbol lottery, and in the time saving state and the first variable state, the second special symbol lottery is the first. It is configured to be easier to execute than the special pattern lottery.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the thirty-fifth embodiment configured in this way, once the first variable probability state is set, the first variable probability state continues until reaching either the variable probability limit or the short time limit. is set, and the jackpot game executed based on the jackpot winning of the second special symbol lottery executed during the variable probability state can be executed a plurality of times (maximum 10 times) in a short period of time, and the game Therefore, it is possible to increase the player's desire to play.

That is, the pachinko machine 10 in the above-described thirty-fifth embodiment, after winning a jackpot in the normal state (low probability state of special symbols, low probability state of normal symbols), again, the specific game until it shifts to the normal state In the period, the first game period (period in which the first probability variable state is continuously set) in which it is possible to increase the number of balls by winning a large number of prize balls, and the maintenance game in which the number of balls hardly increases or decreases. is configured to be settable with a second game period (a period in which the second variable probability state is continuously set) in which is executed, and it is possible to suppress the excessive awarding of prize balls to the player within one game period. At the same time, by making it possible to award a large number of prize balls to the player during a first game period shorter than one game period, the player's willingness to play is heightened by temporarily increasing the speed of increase in ball output. It was something that could be done.

However, for example, in the first special symbol lottery in the normal state, winning the probability variable jackpot (jackpot in which the first probability variable state is set after the jackpot game ends), and in the initial stage in the specific game period, the first game period (out If a period in which a variable probability state with a high ball increase speed is likely to be set continuously) is set, after the first game period ends, the second game period (outgoing Since the period during which the second variable probability state in which the ball is maintained is likely to be set continuously tends to continue, there is a problem that the player who is playing the game during the second game period becomes bored with the game.

Furthermore, in the above-described thirty-fifth embodiment, as a maintenance game for maintaining the player's balls in the second game period (the period in which the second variable probability state is set), for the entire period of the second game period Since the game is configured so that the balls in the player's possession are always maintained, there is a problem that the game lacks sharpness and the player becomes more easily bored with the game.

On the other hand, in the thirty-sixth embodiment, the number of balls in possession is set so that there is almost no increase or decrease in the number of balls in possession at the start and end of the second game period, but the number of balls in possession temporarily increases during the second game period. This embodiment is different from the thirty-fifth embodiment in that it is possible to set an increase period in which it is easy to increase the number of balls and a decrease period in which the number of balls in hand is easy to decrease.

By configuring in this way, during the second game period in which it is difficult for the number of balls to increase or decrease, it is possible to perform a game in which the number of balls is less likely to increase or decrease, as in the above-described thirty-fifth embodiment. Since it is possible to increase or decrease the number of balls in hand, it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored with the game.

In the thirty-sixth embodiment, it is possible to set a variation pattern in which a variation time of different length is defined corresponding to the number of executions of the first special symbol lottery after the second probability variation state is set, and per unit time It is different from the above-described thirty-fifth embodiment in that the number of times of small winning games that can be executed is made different.

More specifically, in the thirty-sixth embodiment, as the number of times of the first special symbol lottery executed during the second probability variation state increases, a short variation time is likely to be set as the variation pattern of the first special symbol variation. It is configured to be That is, the longer the game during the second variable probability state is executed, the more times the small winning game can be executed per unit time.

By configuring in this way, when the ``long-time game in the same game state'', which is a factor in which the player gets tired of the game, is established, the number of small winning games per unit time is higher than when it is not established. Since the number of times can be increased, it is possible to increase the player's willingness to play the game to obtain prize balls through small winning games.

Furthermore, the number of prize balls to be paid out when the ball wins the second variable prize winning device 650 (see FIG. 582) that is opened during the small winning game is increased compared to the pachinko machine 10 in the above-described thirty-fifth embodiment. In addition, by increasing the rate of occurrence of balls that cannot win (enter) any winning opening (entrance) among the balls fired in the right-handed game during the second variable probability state, When a right-handed game is continuously played during the 2-probability variable state, the pachinko machine 10 in the above-described 35th embodiment is configured to make it difficult for the number of balls to increase or decrease during the 2nd probability-variable state. In order to make it difficult for the number of balls to increase or decrease during the second probability variable state, a configuration is made based on the design concept that one prize ball is paid out for one ball fired in a right-handed game. On the other hand, the pachinko machine 10 in the thirty-sixth embodiment makes it difficult for the player to increase or decrease the number of balls (outgoing balls) at the time when the second variable probability state is set and at the time when it ends. It is configured as follows. Specifically, in the average duration period in which the second variable probability state can continue, when the player continuously executes the right-handed game, the number of balls fired during the average duration period (number of out balls) and the average It is configured so that the number of prize balls paid out during the continuation period (the number of balls paid out) is almost the same.

More specifically, in the thirty-sixth embodiment, when the duration of the second probability variable state is shorter than the average duration, the number of balls fired during the average duration is paid out during the average duration. The number of prize balls is configured to be slightly less, and when the duration of the second probability variable state is longer than the average duration, the number of balls fired during the average duration is paid out during the average duration. The number of prize balls is configured to be slightly larger.

By configuring in this way, it is easier for the player if the second variable probability state continues for a period longer than the average duration than if the second variable probability state ends in a period shorter than the average duration. Since the advantageous second variable probability state can be provided, it is possible to prevent the player's desire to play from decreasing due to the second variable probability state continuing for a long time.

<Regarding production content in the thirty-sixth embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIG. 692, the effects performed in the thirty-sixth embodiment will be described. In the above-described thirty-fifth embodiment, all the jackpots by the first special symbol are 2R jackpots in which the special symbol high probability state (high probability state) is set after the jackpot game ends, but the normal symbol high probability state (time saving state) ) is set and there is a jackpot type in which the time-saving state is not set, and the jackpot in which the time-saving state is set is won, and the second special symbol in the time-saving state is the jackpot D (Fig. 613 (c)). Secondly, the player can increase the number of balls by obtaining a large number of prize balls.

Here, if the jackpot (hereinafter referred to as "first hit") won in the low-probability non-time-saving state (normal) is the jackpot A, a high-probability non-time-saving state (second probability variable state) is set. However, unless the jackpot C is won in the second probability variable state, the first probability variable state is not set after the jackpot game ends. However, when the jackpot is won with the first special symbol, the probability that the jackpot type will be the jackpot C is 1/200 (0.5%), so the probability of winning the jackpot C in the second variable state is extremely low. .

In other words, in the thirty-fifth embodiment, there is a case where the player is forced to play the game in the second variable probability state, in which the number of balls held is suppressed, for a long time, and the player becomes bored with the game.

On the other hand, in the thirty-sixth embodiment, as the number of executions of the first special symbol lottery after the second probability variation is set increases, a shorter variation time is defined as the variation pattern of the first special symbol variation. It is different from the above-described thirty-fifth embodiment in that the fluctuation pattern can be set and the number of small winning games that can be executed per unit time is made different.

Specifically, in the thirty-sixth embodiment, as the number of executions of the first special symbol lottery executed during the second probability variation increases, a short variation time is likely to be set as the variation pattern of the first special symbol variation. It consists of That is, the longer the game during the second probability variation is executed, the more times the small winning game can be executed per unit time. As a result, the number of small winning games per unit time is increased when ``a long-time game in the same game state'', which is a factor in which the player gets bored with the game, is established than when it is not established. Therefore, it is possible to increase the player's willingness to play the game to obtain prize balls through the small winning game.

Here, the small winning game means that the open/close plate 650b of the second variable winning device 650 is opened, and one small winning round is executed in which the game ball can enter the V winning opening 650a, as shown in FIG. It is.

Although the details will be described later, in the 36th embodiment, when the high probability non-time saving state (second probability variable state) is set after the end of the jackpot game, the high probability non time saving state (second probability variable state) is set The number of executions of the first special symbol lottery from is measured, and when the measured value reaches a predetermined value, a special figure 1 high speed fluctuation zone is set. In the special figure 1 high-speed variation zone, a short variation pattern is set as the variation pattern of the first special symbol variation, and it is possible to obtain a prize ball by a small winning game.

Next, the details of the presentation in the thirty-sixth embodiment will be described. The effect executed in the thirty-sixth embodiment differs from the effect in the thirty-fifth embodiment in that the effect mode changes when the above-described special figure 1 high-speed fluctuation zone is set.

Figure 692 (a) is an example of the effect screen when the probability variation limit remaining number is 12 times and the special figure 1 high speed fluctuation zone is set. It differs from FIG. 594(a) in that "High speed change zone" is displayed in the secondary display area Ds, and "Open the door and find RUSH!" is displayed in the second display area HR2. If the probability variation limit remaining number is 11 times or more, even if the jackpot C (Fig. 613 (b)) is elected and the time saving state is set, it is possible to reach the time saving limit before reaching the probability variation limit, so 10R jackpot Ten games can be obtained, and a large number of prize balls can be awarded to the player. Therefore, in the second display area HR2, a display is displayed suggesting that winning the jackpot C is advantageous to the player.

On the other hand, when the probability variation limit remaining number is 10 times or less (for example, 2 times), even if the jackpot C (Fig. 613 (b)) is elected and the time saving state is set, the probability variation limit before reaching the time saving limit , the 10R jackpot game cannot be obtained ten times, and the number of prize balls that the player can obtain may decrease. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 692(b), an oasis-gushing effect is executed in the main display area Dm, and the display area HR2 displays "Let's take a rest in the oasis! Keep hitting right!" 801 is urged to remain in front of the door 806 and the player is directed to shoot the game ball, so that it is better to aim for an increase in prize balls by the small win game than to win the big win C. It suggests to the player that it is advantageous.

As described above, in the thirty-sixth embodiment, by changing the effect mode according to the probability variable limit remaining number of times, the player is more advantageous to win the big hit C (Fig. 613 (b)) and the small hit It is possible to recognize the case where it is more advantageous to increase the prize balls in the game, and even in the same game state (second probability variable state), the game aiming at winning the big win C and the small winning game without winning the big win. The player can enjoy the game of increasing the number of prize balls, and the interest in the game can be improved.

In the thirty-sixth embodiment, before the condition for setting the high-speed fluctuation zone is established, there is a problem that the player who gets tired of playing the game in the second variable probability state in which the increase and decrease of the number of balls held is suppressed stops the game. be. In order to solve this, it is also possible to notify the number of remaining fluctuations until a high-speed fluctuation zone is set in which prize balls can be expected to be obtained by a small winning game. By constructing in this manner, a player who is set in the second variable probability state in which acquisition of a prize ball cannot be expected and whose desire to play has decreased can continue the game aiming at setting the high-speed fluctuation zone.

In the embodiment, the configuration is such that the presentation mode is changed when the probability variation limit remaining number of times is 10 times or less, but the present invention is not limited to this. Even when the variable probability limit remaining number is 10 or more, when the high speed fluctuation zone is set, a suggestive performance recommending an increase in prize balls by a small winning game may be executed.

In addition, when the second probability variable state is set based on the winning of the jackpot, the number of executions of the first special symbol lottery is started to be measured, the measurement is finished based on the winning of the next jackpot, and after the end of the jackpot game. In the configuration where measurement is newly started, if the high-speed fluctuation zone is set based on the measured number of executions reaching a predetermined number, the number of executions measured by winning the second probability variable jackpot Because the high-speed fluctuation zone is canceled by resetting, the effect that suggests that the second probability variable jackpot winning is disadvantageous (for example, during the fluctuation of the special pattern that wins the second probability variable jackpot The performance of displaying "end pinch" etc.) may be executed, and the performance suggesting that the winning of the second probability variable jackpot is disadvantageous may not be executed when the high-speed fluctuation zone is not set. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it easier for the player to understand that the winning of the second probability variable jackpot is disadvantageous. In addition, the same effect is executed not only when the second probability variable jackpot is won, but also when the special symbol is lost, and by arousing the player's sense of crisis that the high-speed fluctuation zone may end, the second It is possible to improve the amusement of the game during the probability variation. In addition, when the probability variation limit remaining number of times is equal to or less than a predetermined number of times (for example, 10 times or less), the same effect may be executed when winning the first probability variation jackpot.

In the embodiment, when the second probability variable state is set after the end of the jackpot game, the number of executions of the first special symbol lottery after the second probability variable state is set is measured, and based on the measurement result, the second Although it is configured to determine the variation pattern of 1 special symbol variation, it is not limited to this, and the jackpot is won in the state where the second probability variation state is set, and the second probability variation state is again after the jackpot game ends. When set, the number of executions of the first special symbol lottery after the second probability variable state is set continuously from the number of executions of the first special symbol lottery executed during the second probability variable state set last time. It may be configured to measure. That is, the number of executions of the first special symbol lottery after the setting of the second variable probability state is measured across the big win games, and a high-speed fluctuation zone of the first special symbol is set based on the measurement result. It may be configured. In this case, for example, when the high-speed fluctuation zone is set, a large number of doors 806 appear, and when the small prize is won, the hero 801 opens the door 806 to discover balls indicating that the small prize has been won. is executed, and an effect of opening the appearing doors 806 one after another until the jackpot D is won may be executed.

By configuring in this way, when the first hit hits the jackpot A (Fig. 613 (b)) and the second probability variable state is set, and the first probability variable state is not set and the probability variable limit is reached, That is, when the high-probability state of the special symbols ends without the player winning many prize balls, the minimum number of prize balls can be easily provided by the small winning game. In addition, to reduce boredom of the player due to no performance being executed in the main display area Dm for a long time (the door 806 is not opened until the jackpot D (Fig. 613(c)) is won). can be done.

In addition, although it is set as the structure which performs the production|presentation which an oasis wells up in an Example, it does not restrict to this. For example, in response to the winning of prize balls in a small winning game, the number of prize balls obtained by an effect of winning coins or the like may be notified.

<Regarding Transition of Balls Dispensed in Each Game State of the 36th Embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIG. 693, a transition image of the number of balls released for each game state in the thirty-sixth embodiment will be described. FIG. 693(a) is a diagram schematically showing the transition of the average number of paid balls in the thirty-fifth embodiment described above, and FIG. 693(b) shows the average number of paid balls in the thirty-sixth embodiment. It is the figure which showed transition typically.

As shown in FIG. 693(a), in the thirty-fifth embodiment described above, a left-handed game aiming at execution of the first special symbol lottery is executed in a state where the low probability state of the special symbol is set during the normal state. be done. In this normal state, even if a big win is won, a big win game (2-round big win game) with almost no prize balls is executed. Since it is difficult to acquire prize balls, the game state is such that the number of paid balls is most likely to decrease.

On the other hand, during the first variable probability state, a right-handed game aiming at execution of the second special symbol lottery is executed in a state in which the high probability state of the special symbol is set. In this first probability variable state, since a jackpot game (10-round jackpot game) in which a large number of prize balls can be obtained when a jackpot is won is executed, the game state is such that the number of balls to be paid out increases most easily. In addition, since the first special symbol lottery is hardly executed during the first variable probability state, the small winning game is hardly executed.

Then, during the second variable probability state, a right-handed game aiming at execution of the first special symbol lottery is executed in a state in which the high probability state of the special symbol is set. During this second probability variable state, it is a game state in which the ball is most easily entered into the right first ball entrance 64b2, and the ball is won to the second variable prize winning device 650 which is opened during the small winning game. In order to execute a right-handed game that is easy to play, a game capable of maintaining a ball output even in a situation where a jackpot is won in a first special symbol lottery and a jackpot game with almost no prize balls (2-round jackpot game) is executed. state.

That is, in the pachinko machine 10 in the above-described thirty-fifth embodiment, as shown in FIG. 693 (a), during the period in which the high probability state of the special symbol is continuously set, the ball is released rapidly during the first variable probability state. After increasing the number of balls, by maintaining the number of balls in the second probability variable state, it is possible to suppress the number of balls from increasing excessively during the period in which the high probability state of the special symbol is set continuously. Configure.

On the other hand, in the thirty-sixth embodiment, as shown in FIG. 693(b), the difference is that the transition of the ball output during the second variable probability state is different from the above-described thirty-fifth embodiment. . Specifically, immediately after the second probability variable state is set (initial stage), when the right-handed game is continuously executed, the number of balls released is reduced even if the number of prize balls obtained by the small winning game is taken into consideration. The first special symbol variation is easily executed in a variation pattern in which a relatively long variation time is set so as to make it easy to perform, and when a predetermined period elapses after the second probability variation state is set, the right-handed game is continuously performed. In this case, the first special symbol variation is performed in a variation pattern in which a variation time shorter than the initial stage of the second probability variation state is set so that the number of balls won by taking into account the number of prize balls obtained by the small winning game is increased. is configured to facilitate execution.

Then, the average period during which the second probability variable state can continue, that is, the average value of the number of jackpot winnings required from the transition from the first probability variable state to the second probability variable state to the probability variable limit. In the state where the probability state is set, when the right-handed game is continuously executed during the period of multiplying the average value of the number of times of special symbol variation required until the jackpot is won in the first special symbol lottery, the second probability variation is performed. The fluctuation pattern in each period is defined so that the number of balls paid out at the time of transition to the state and the number of balls paid out at the time of the lapse of the average period in which the second probability variable state can continue are substantially the same.

That is, in the thirty-sixth embodiment, if the game period during the second variable probability state is shorter than the average, that is, if the jackpot is elected early during the second variable probability state and the second variable probability state ends, the second When the number of output balls decreases during the variable probability state and a hamari game (a game in which a special symbol lottery that does not win a jackpot is executed more than twice the numerical value indicating the denominator of the probability of a jackpot) is executed during the second variable probability state, the second It is configured so that it is possible to increase the number of balls to be put out during the variable probability state.

By configuring in this way, in the above-described thirty-fifth embodiment, it is possible to make the player aware of the increase or decrease in the number of paid balls, in contrast to the second probability variable state that was used as a period for simply suppressing the increase or decrease in the number of paid balls. is possible, it is possible to suppress early boredom with the game during the second variable probability state.

In addition, in the thirty-sixth embodiment, the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the second variable prize-winning device 650 is increased from "1" to "4" in contrast to the above-described thirty-fifth embodiment. The difference is that the Then, when the small winning game is executed in the normal state, even if the right hitting game is executed after the small winning game is executed, the ball fired by the right hitting game will go to the second variable winning device 650 It is configured so that the small winning game is finished before reaching.

Therefore, even if the number of prize balls to be paid out when the balls enter the second variable prize winning device 650 is increased from "1" to "4", the balls are paid out by the small winning game in the normal state. can be suppressed from increasing.

In addition, without being limited to this, for example, when the normal state is set and when the second probability variable state is set, the opening time (right first input The time to operate to a position where the ball can flow into the ball opening 64b2) is made different, and during the normal state, it is difficult to execute the first special symbol lottery by the right-handed game, and the normal state is. The content of the opening operation of the second variable winning device 650 in the small winning game is different between when it is set and when the second variable probability state is set, and the ball is the second variable in the small winning game in the normal state. It may be configured so that the winning device 650 cannot win.

<Regarding the electrical configuration of the thirty-sixth embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 694 and 695, the electrical configuration of the thirty-sixth embodiment will be described. In the thirty-sixth embodiment, the content of the variation pattern table referred to during the second probability variable state is different from the above-described thirty-fifth embodiment, and the content of the variation pattern scenario is different. are different.

Specifically, for the thirty-fifth embodiment, as a variation pattern table that can be referred to during the second probability variation state defined in the variation pattern table 202d of the ROM 202 of the main controller 110, the second probability variation variation pattern The second probability variation disadvantageous variation pattern table 202ad4 and the second probability variation advantageous variation pattern table 202ad5 are used instead of the table 202d4, and the variation pattern scenario 2 table 202af is used instead of the variation pattern scenario table 202f. are different, otherwise they are the same. A detailed description of the same contents will be omitted.

The thirty-sixth embodiment includes a variation pattern table in which a relatively long variation time is likely to be set as the variation pattern of the first special symbol variation during the second probability variation state, and a relatively short variation time as the variation pattern of the first special symbol variation. It is configured so that it can be referred to by switching between a variation pattern table in which is easily set.

By configuring in this way, the number of small winning games per unit time when the right-handed game is continued during the second variable probability state, and the second variable winning device 650 within the unit time is opened. The cumulative period of time can be varied according to the length of the variation time of the first special symbol variation executed during the second probability variation state.

FIG. 694(a) is a diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the second probability variation disadvantageous variation pattern table 202ad4. As shown in FIG. 694(a), the second probability variation unfavorable variation pattern table 202ad4 is different from the second probability variation variation pattern table 202d4 (see FIG. 616(a)) of the thirty-fifth embodiment described above. Has different types of variation patterns defined for "Special Figure 1 (first special symbol)", and is configured so that a variation pattern with a relatively long variation time can be selected even in the second probability variation state. The difference is that Since the other contents (variation pattern definition contents of the second special symbol variation in the second probability variation state) are the same, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Specifically, the symbol type is "Special Figure 1", and the value of the acquired variation type counter CS1 is in the range of "0 to 49", and the short variation with a variation time of 1 second (1000 milliseconds) is " In the range of "50 to 169", medium fluctuation with a fluctuation time of 20 seconds (20000 milliseconds) is defined, and in the range of "170 to 198", long fluctuation with a fluctuation time of 60 seconds (60000 milliseconds) is defined. ing.

Next, the contents defined in the second probability variation advantageous variation pattern table 202ad5 will be described with reference to FIG. 694(b). FIG. 694(b) is a diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the second probability variation advantageous variation pattern table 202ad5. As shown in FIG. 694(b), the second probability variation advantageous variation pattern table 202ad5 is a variation pattern with a shorter variation time as the variation pattern of the first special symbol variation than the second probability variation disadvantageous variation pattern table 202ad4 described above. are configured to be easily selected.

Specifically, the symbol type is "special figure 1", and the value of the acquired variation type counter CS1 is in the range of "0 to 99", the variation time is 0.5 seconds (500 milliseconds) Ultra short variation However, a short variation with a variation time of 1 second (1000 milliseconds) is defined in the range of "100 to 198".

As described above, in the thirty-sixth embodiment, in the second probability variable state, a plurality of types of variation pattern tables that define variation patterns with different lengths of variation time are configured so that they can be referenced by switching. there is Therefore, if the variation pattern is selected with reference to the variation pattern table (the second probability variation advantageous variation pattern table 202ad5) that defines the variation pattern with a relatively short variation time, the first special per unit time It is possible to increase the number of execution times of symbol lottery. On the other hand, when a variation pattern is selected with reference to a variation pattern table (second probability variation disadvantageous variation pattern table 202ad4) that defines a variation pattern with a relatively long variation time, the first special per unit time The number of execution times of pattern lottery can be reduced. Therefore, when the right-handed game is continuously executed in the state in which the second probability variable state is set, it is possible to easily create a period in which the number of paid balls increases and a period in which the number of paid balls decreases. can.

In addition, as described in FIGS. 694(a) and 694(b), in the thirty-sixth embodiment, the second probability variable disadvantageous variation pattern table 202ad4 and the second probability variation advantageous variation pattern table 202ad5 are It is configured so that a variation pattern with the same length of variation time (1 second) can be selected. With this configuration, it is difficult for the player to grasp which variation pattern table is currently being referred to when variation patterns with the same length of variation time (1 second) are selected. Therefore, the player can play the game while expecting that the currently referenced variation pattern table is an advantageous variation pattern table. In addition, by using a configuration that makes it difficult to understand the variation pattern table that is currently being referred to, it is possible to easily suppress execution of a capture game that specifies the variation pattern table that is being referred to.

Next, with reference to FIG. 695, detailed contents of the variation pattern scenario 2 table 202af will be described. FIG. 695 is a diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the variation pattern scenario 2 table 202af. This variation pattern scenario 2 table 202af is different from the variation pattern scenario table 202f described above in that the scenario contents are changed so that the type of variation pattern table referred to during the second probability variation state is different. , are otherwise identical. A detailed description of the same contents will be omitted.

As described above, in the thirty-sixth embodiment, the second probability variation advantageous variation pattern table 202ad5 that is advantageous to the player is used as the variation pattern to be referred to when selecting the variation pattern of the special symbol variation in the second probability variation state. , and a second probability variation disadvantageous variation pattern table 202ad4 that is disadvantageous to the player, and varies by referring to the second probability variation disadvantageous variation pattern table 202ad4 in accordance with the trigger for setting the second probability variation state. It is configured to set a scenario in which the period for determining the pattern and the period for determining the variation pattern with reference to the second probability variation advantageous variation pattern table 202ad5 are different.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 695, the second probability change state is set based on the jackpot type (jackpot A) in which the second probability change state is set regardless of the game state at the time of winning as the jackpot type. When it is set, the second probability variable disadvantageous variation pattern table 202ad4 is referred to during the period until the number of special symbol variations executed after the end of the jackpot reaches 100 times, and after that (after 101 times), the It is stipulated that a scenario in which the 2 probability variable advantageous variation pattern table 202ad5 is referred to is set.

For the jackpot type (jackpot B) in which the second variable probability state or the first variable probability state is set according to the game state at the time of winning as the jackpot type, the game state at the time of winning is other than the first variable state. , Even if the game state set after the jackpot game ends is the second probability variable state, the game state at the time of winning is other than the first probability variable state, and the game state set after the jackpot game ends is the first probability variable state. However, since the time saving limit has been reached (because the time saving limit reaching flag 203u is set to ON), even if the second probability variable state is forcibly set, the special symbol executed after the jackpot game ends A scenario is set in which the second probability variable disadvantageous variation pattern table 202ad4 is referred to during the period until the number of variations reaches 60 times, and the second probability variation advantageous variation pattern table 202ad5 is referred to thereafter (after 61 times). specified to be

For the jackpot types (jackets C, D) in which the first probability variable state is set regardless of the game state at the time of winning as the jackpot type, the time reduction limit reaching flag 203u is set to ON at the end of the jackpot game. Based on this, when the second probability variation state is forcibly set, a scenario is set in which the second probability variation advantageous variation pattern table 202a5 is referred to from the first rotation after the end of the jackpot game. there is

That is, in the thirty-sixth embodiment, it has a plurality of setting opportunities for setting the second probability variable state, and according to the setting opportunity established among the plurality of setting opportunities, the second probability variable that is disadvantageous to the player The length of the period during which the variation pattern is selected is made different by referring to the disadvantageous variation pattern table 202a4.

Furthermore, among the plurality of setting triggers for which the second probability variable state is set, the setting trigger with a higher frequency of establishment has a period in which the second probability variable disadvantageous variation pattern table 202a4 is referred to than the setting trigger with a low frequency of establishment. configured to be long. By configuring in this way, it is possible to provide the player with a privilege due to establishment of a setting opportunity with a low establishment frequency.

In addition, when the jackpot type in which the second probability variable state is set is set, that is, when the second probability variable state is set based on the result of the special symbol lottery, and based on reaching the time reduction limit The length of the period in which the variation pattern is selected by referring to the second probability variation disadvantageous variation pattern table 202a4, which is disadvantageous to the player, is made different between when the 2 probability variation state is set.

Specifically, the case where the second probability variable state is set based on reaching the time saving limit is more disadvantageous to the player than the case where the second probability variable state is set based on the result of the special symbol lottery. So that the period in which the second probability change disadvantageous variation pattern table 202a4 is referred to becomes shorter, in other words, the period in which the second probability change advantageous variation pattern table 202a5 that is advantageous to the player is referred to becomes longer It is configured so that the scenario is set to

In other words, if it is originally, despite winning the jackpot type in which the first variable state that is more advantageous to the player than the second variable state is set, the second variable state is set by the short time limit, That is, based on reaching the time-saving limit, when the privilege given to the player is reduced by setting the second variable probability state, the game content to be executed during the second variable probability state is changed to another It is configured to be more advantageous to the player than when the second probability variable state is set at the opportunity.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to suppress execution of a game that is excessively disadvantageous to the player when the time reduction limit is reached. In addition, in the 36th embodiment, since the first variable probability state is a game state more advantageous to the player than the second variable probability state, when the jackpot type in which the first variable probability state is set is set, the time reduction limit If it reaches (when the second probability variable state is set), it is more disadvantageous to the player than when the time saving limit is not reached (when the first probability variable state is set), but for example, the second The technical concept described above may be applied to the pachinko machine 10 configured so that the second variable probability state is more advantageous to the player than the first variable probability state.

In addition, in the thirty-sixth embodiment, as in the thirty-fifth embodiment described above, within the special symbol high probability period in which the high probability state of the special symbol is continuously set, the game state becomes advantageous to the player. At least a first period in which the variable probability state is set and a second period in which the variable probability state is set to be a game state more disadvantageous to the player than the variable probability state is set. there is

And it is configured so that the special figure high probability period cannot be terminated unless the second period described above is played for a predetermined period. Therefore, it is necessary to have the player continue playing the game during the second period. Therefore, in the thirty-sixth embodiment, the longer the game period during the second period (the second The second variable state is set so that the game during the second period (the game in the second variable state) is advantageous to the player as the number of special symbol lotteries executed during the second period increases. (For example, when the special symbol lottery is executed 70 times) at the time when a predetermined period has elapsed since the second probability variable state was set than immediately after it was set. By making it easier to set the variation pattern with reference to the second probability variation disadvantageous variation pattern table 202a4), and increasing the number of times the small winning game is executed per unit time Players are prevented from becoming bored with the game by giving them the increased number of prize balls per hit.

In addition, if the game during the second period, which is disadvantageous to the player, becomes extremely long, the game state can be switched to a game state that is advantageous to the player. It is possible to provide the player who has executed the game with a novel game property that the player can execute the game that expects the second period to continue for a long time (the game that expects that the jackpot will not be won). rice field.

In addition, without being limited to this, the direction immediately after the second probability variable state is set is more than the time when a predetermined period has elapsed since the second probability variable state was set (for example, when the special symbol lottery was executed 70 times) It may be configured to facilitate the setting of a variation pattern with a short variation time (to facilitate the setting of a variation pattern with reference to the second probability variation disadvantageous variation pattern table 202a4).

By configuring in this way, in the case of shifting from the first variable probability state to the second variable probability state, the game is continued from the game in the first variable probability state that is advantageous to the player, and it is advantageous to the player in the second variable probability state. A game can be executed. Therefore, since it is possible to aggregate the period that is advantageous to the player during the special high probability period, during the special high probability period, in a specific period (first period + second period initial period) It is possible to make it easy to increase the privilege (balls paid out) given to the player.

<Regarding the control process of the sound lamp control device in the thirty-sixth embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIG. 696, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 in the thirty-sixth embodiment will be described. In the thirty-sixth embodiment, in place of the special figure 1 fluctuation production setting process (see S5105 in FIG. 674), the special figure 1 fluctuation production setting process 2 (see S5155 in FIG. 696) are the same except that they execute The same processing contents are assigned the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof is omitted.

With reference to Drawing 696, special figure 1 fluctuation production setting processing 2 (S5155) performed by MPU221 in sound lamp control device 113 in the 36th embodiment is explained. Figure 696 is the flowchart which shows the detailed contents of special figure 1 fluctuation production setting processing 2 (S5155). Special figure 1 fluctuation production setting process 2 (S5155) is different from special figure 1 fluctuation production setting process (see S5105 in FIG. 674) in the above-described thirty-fifth embodiment, as production mode, revenge mode or challenge mode The difference is that a process is added to change the display mode of the advantageous suggesting effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the remaining number of times of the variable probability limit when it is executed. Since other points are the same, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In the special figure 1 fluctuation production setting process 2 (S5155), first, the processing of S5201 to S5202 of the special figure 1 fluctuation production setting process (see S5105 in FIG. 674) in the 35th embodiment described above is executed. Then, in the process of S5202, if it is determined that the read effect mode is not one of the super rush mode, rush mode, EXTRA mode, and SPECIAL mode (S5202: No), the read current effect It is determined whether the mode type is revenge mode or challenge mode (S5251). If it is determined that the current production mode is the revenge mode or the challenge mode (S5251: Yes), the value of the remaining probability variation counter 223m is read (S5252).

Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the remaining probability variation counter 223m read in the process of S5252 is greater than 20 (S5253). When it is determined that the value of the remaining probability variation counter 223m is a value greater than 20 (S5253: Yes), a display command for showing that the jackpot winning is advantageous is set (S5254), and the above-described S5205 , and terminate this process. The display command set here is transmitted to the display control device 114 in the command output processing (S4102) of the main processing (see FIG. 663). As shown in (1), the third symbol display device 81 displays an effect suggesting that winning the jackpot is more advantageous for the player.

On the other hand, in the processing of S5253, if it is determined that the value of the read remaining probability variation number counter 223m is not greater than 20 (S5253: No), then the value of the read remaining probability variation number counter 223m is greater than 2. It is determined whether the value is small (S5255). When it is determined that the read value of the remaining probability variation counter 223m is a value smaller than 2 (S5255: Yes), a display command is set to indicate that the jackpot non-winning is advantageous (S5256), The process of S5205 is executed, and this process ends. The display command set here is transmitted to the display control device 114 in the command output processing (S4102) of the main processing (see FIG. 663). 3, the third symbol display device 81 displays an effect suggesting that it is advantageous for the player not to win the jackpot.

On the other hand, in the process of S5255, when it is determined that the value of the remaining probability variation counter 223m is greater than 2 (S5255: No), the process of S5256 is skipped, the process of S5205 is executed, and this process ends. On the other hand, in the processing of S5251, if it is determined that the type of the current production mode is neither the revenge mode nor the challenge mode (S5251: No), the case processing of S5252 to S5256 is skipped, and the processing of S5205 is performed. Execute and terminate this process.

As described above, in the thirty-sixth embodiment, as the variation pattern table referred to when selecting the variation pattern of the first special symbol variation in the second probability variation state, a variation pattern with a short variation time is likely to be selected. It has a second probability variation advantageous variation pattern table 202ad5 and a second probability variation disadvantageous variation pattern table 202ad4 in which variation patterns with longer variation times are more likely to be selected than the second probability variation advantageous variation pattern table 202ad5.

In the thirty-sixth embodiment described above, when the second variable probability state is set after the end of the jackpot game, the number of executions of the first special symbol lottery after the second variable probability state is set is measured, and the measurement result However, without being limited to this, the number of executions of the first special symbol lottery after the second probability variation state is set, and the second The variation pattern of the first special symbol variation may be determined based on the sum of the number of executions of the special symbol lottery and the total number of times. In this case, as the variation pattern of the second special symbol variation to be a secondary variation, a short variation pattern corresponding to a short variation time (eg, 1 second) and a medium variation pattern corresponding to a long variation time (eg, 60 seconds) It should be configured to be configurable.

By configuring in this way, the number of execution times of the second special symbol lottery that can be executed while the first special symbol lottery is executed once is made different according to the variation pattern of the set second special symbol variation. be able to. Therefore, the timing at which the variation pattern corresponding to the short variation time is likely to be set as the variation pattern of the first special symbol variation can be varied with respect to the number of executions of the first special symbol lottery, and the unit for the player can be varied. To provide a game that keeps a player from getting bored by making it difficult to predict the timing of setting a period (advantageous period in a second variable probability state) for increasing the number of executions of the small winning game per time.例文帳に追加can be done.

Furthermore, in this case, it is preferable that the variation pattern of the first special symbol variation is also determined from among a plurality of types of variation patterns corresponding to different lengths of variation time. Thus, the combination of the variation pattern of the first special symbol and the variation pattern of the second special symbol greatly changes the total number of special symbol lotteries that can be measured while the first special symbol lottery is executed once. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to predict the contents of the game to be executed during the second variable probability state.

In addition, when the jackpot is won in the state where the second variable probability state is set, and the second variable probability state is set again after the jackpot game ends, the special symbol lottery executed during the previously set second variable probability state. It may be configured to measure the number of executions of the first special symbol lottery after the second variable probability state is set continuously from the number of executions of (first special symbol lottery).

That is, the number of executions of the special symbol lottery (first special symbol lottery) after the second probability variable state is set is configured to be measured across the big win (small win) game, and based on the measurement result. It may be configured to determine the variation pattern of one special symbol variation. By configuring in this way, when the second probability variable state is set in a state with a large number of remaining times to the probability variable limit, and the second probability variable state is set continuously until the probability variable limit is reached, for example, in the normal state When the probability variable limit is reached in the second probability variable state without transitioning to the first probability variable state in spite of winning the jackpot, that is, the player does not win many prize balls, and the special symbol is displayed. When the high-probability state ends, the minimum number of prize balls can be easily provided by the small winning game.

Furthermore, the number of times the second probability variable state is continuously set (the number of times the value of the probability variable limit number counter is continuously updated based on the second probability variable state being set) is measured, and the measurement result is Based on this, a variation pattern corresponding to the special symbol lottery (first special symbol lottery) executed during the second probability variation state may be determined.

In the thirty-sixth embodiment described above, as the variation pattern corresponding to the special symbol lottery executed during the second probability variation state, a first period (disadvantage period) in which a relatively long variation time variation pattern is likely to be set, and a relatively By providing a second period (advantageous period) in which a variation pattern with a short variation time is likely to be set, and by providing the above-mentioned 35th embodiment, the number of balls released for the number of shot balls (number of outs) during the second variable probability state is increased. Although it is configured to be easily displaced, another configuration other than this may be used. A first period (disadvantage period) during which the game is difficult to be executed and a second period (advantageous period) during which the small win game that is advantageous to the player are likely to be executed may be provided.

In addition, in the thirty-sixth embodiment described above, it is possible to set a second period that is advantageous to the player for the ball released during the second variable probability state, and a first period that is more disadvantageous to the player than the second period. Further, the first period is configured to arrive earlier than the second period. By configuring in this way, for the player who is executing the game in the second probability change state, the game aiming to quickly shift to the first probability change state before the probability change limit number of times is greatly reduced. In addition, by continuing the second variable probability state for a long time, it is possible to execute a game aiming at not disadvantageous to the player during the second variable probability state.

<Regarding Modifications of the 36th Embodiment>
Next, a modification of the thirty-sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In the thirty-sixth embodiment described above, as shown in FIG. 693(b), when many special symbol lotteries are executed without winning the jackpot in a state where the second probability variation state is set, the first special symbol By structuring such that the fluctuation time of fluctuation is likely to be shortened, the number of small winning games executed per unit time during the second probability variable state is increased.

In other words, the longer the period until the jackpot is won for the player who continues to play the right-handed game during the second probability variable state, the more the number of prize balls that can be obtained with respect to the number of balls fired. was configured to increase the

On the other hand, it may be configured as shown in FIG. 697(a) for the ball output transition in the case where the right-handed game is continuously executed during the second variable probability state. FIG. 697(a) is a diagram schematically showing a typical ball-out transition in the first modification of the thirty-sixth embodiment described above.

In the first modification, in contrast to the above-described thirty-sixth embodiment, the contents of the variation pattern table defined corresponding to the second probability variation state among the contents defined in the variation pattern scenario 2 table 202af They are different in that they are changed, and are otherwise the same. Description of the same content is omitted.

In the first modification, during the second probability variation state, the period in which the variation pattern is set with reference to the second probability variation disadvantageous variation pattern table 202d4, and the second probability variation advantageous variation pattern table 202d5 Variation with reference to The contents of the fluctuation pattern scenario 2 table 202af are defined so that the period in which the pattern is set and the period are alternately defined.

Specifically, the number of special symbol variation executions after the second probability variation state is set at the end of the jackpot game is "1 to 10", "21 to 30", "41 to 50" . The second probability variation disadvantageous variation pattern table 202d4 is changed to the second probability variation advantageous variation pattern table 202d5 in the range of “11 to 20”, “31 to 40”, “51 to 60” . . . It is stipulated that the variation pattern of the special symbol variation is set by switching the second probability variation disadvantageous variation pattern 202d4 and the second probability variation advantageous variation pattern table 202d5 every 10 times of execution.

By configuring in this way, during the second probability variable state, the period in which the number of balls is difficult to increase and the period in which the number of balls is likely to increase are alternately set. Since it is possible to make it easier to increase or decrease the number of balls, depending on the timing of winning the jackpot, a state is created in which the number of balls is increased, the number of balls is maintained, or the number of balls is reduced during the second probability variable state. becomes possible.

Furthermore, since each variation pattern table is switched according to the scenario predetermined in the variation pattern scenario 2 table 202af, the pachinko machine 10 is played for a long time and the switching timing of the variation pattern table during the second probability variation state is familiar. For the player who is playing, for example, during the period in which the second probability variation advantageous variation pattern table 202d5 is referred to, the right-handed game is continuously executed, and the second probability variation disadvantageous variation pattern table 202d4 is referred to. During the period, the consumption of useless balls (balls that do not enter the right first ball entrance 64b2 or the second variable winning device 650) is reduced by temporarily interrupting the right-handed game during the long special symbol fluctuation period. It is possible to facilitate execution of the suppressed game.

When using the pachinko machine 10 configured as in the first modified example, in order to win the ball to the second variable winning device 650 that is opened during the small winning game, the result of the special symbol lottery Before the special symbol indicating that the is winning a small hit is stopped and displayed, that is, while the special symbol variation that is winning a small hit is being executed, it is necessary to shoot the ball by a right-handed game. It is good to configure it as it is. Specifically, the time required for the ball fired by the right-handed game to reach the second variable winning device 650 is longer than the start of the small winning game (the special symbol indicating the winning of the small winning is stopped and displayed It is preferable that the period from the end of the small winning game to the end of the small winning game (because it becomes difficult to win the ball to the second variable winning device 650) is shortened.

By configuring in this way, regardless of the length of the special symbol variation to be executed, in the game method of executing the right-handed game after the start of the small winning game, it is possible to acquire the ball by the small winning game. Since it becomes difficult, for the player who does not grasp the type of the variation pattern table to be referred to, the right-handed game will be executed continuously during the second probability variation state, shown in FIG. 697 (a) It is possible to make it easier to change the number of balls with the content.

Next, referring to FIG. 697(b), a second modification of the thirty-sixth embodiment described above will be described. FIG. 697(b) is a diagram showing the flow of ball output transition in the second modification of the thirty-sixth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 697(b), in this second modification, immediately after the second probability variation state is set, a period in which the variation pattern with a relatively short variation time is likely to be set (second probability variation advantageous variation pattern table 202d4 is referred to) is set, a period in which a relatively long variation time is likely to be set (a period in which the second probability variable disadvantageous variation pattern table 202d5 is referred to) is set Variation pattern scenario 2 This embodiment differs from the thirty-sixth embodiment in that the contents defined in the table 202af are changed, and the rest is the same. Description of the same content is omitted.

As shown in FIG. 697 (b), in this second modification, in the second probability variable state that is set after the first probability variable state is completed, the period during which the ball is likely to increase is set, so the first probability variable It is configured such that the number of balls paid out changes so as to continuously increase from the number of balls paid out during the state. Then, when reaching the average period in which the second variable probability state ends, the number of paid balls changes so as to become the same amount of paid balls as when the second variable probability state was set.

That is, the second modified example is configured to be advantageous to the player when the period during which the second variable probability state is set is shorter than the average period. By configuring in this way, it is possible to motivate the player to play the game so that the second variable probability state ends early.

As described above, the above-described thirty-sixth embodiment and each modification of the thirty-sixth embodiment are the same as the above-described thirty-fifth embodiment in that the average ball output increase amount in the second probability variable state hardly occurs. However, it is different from the above-described thirty-fifth embodiment in that the more the period in which the second variable probability state continues deviates from the average period, the more the difference in the increase and decrease in the number of output balls occurs. By configuring in this way, among the special pattern high probability period in which the high probability state of the special symbol is set continuously, in the period in which the second probability variable state with a low degree of increase in the number of balls is set, even a little Since the player can play the game while expecting the number of balls to increase, the player's willingness to play can be enhanced.

Furthermore, in the thirty-sixth embodiment described above, the longer the second variable probability state continues, the more advantageous the player can be provided (the state in which the number of balls is likely to increase), so the special figure high probability period Until the end of the game, it is possible to facilitate the game without lowering the player's desire to play the game.

In addition, in the above-described 36th embodiment and each modification of the 36th embodiment, in order to vary the degree of increase in the number of balls released during the second variable probability state, the variation time based on the number of special symbol variations between the jackpot winnings However, without being limited to this, for example, a variation pattern with a different variation time is selected based on the number of times the second probability variable state is set continuously For example, if the number of times the second probability variable state is continuously set exceeds 10 times, the number of times the second probability variable state is continuously set does not exceed 10 times A configuration may be adopted in which a variation pattern with a shorter variation time is more likely to be selected. By configuring in this way, even though the special figure high probability period is set, the period in which the first probability variable state is not set continues for a predetermined period, during the second probability variable state Since it is possible to provide a period in which the number of paid balls is likely to increase, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the number of paid balls does not increase at all during the special figure high probability period.

Furthermore, regardless of the first variable probability state and the second variable probability state, the number of times the high probability state of the special symbol is continuously set after the special high probability period is set is a predetermined number (for example, 20 times) When it exceeds, the variation pattern with a short variation time is more likely to be selected than when the number of consecutively set high-probability states of special symbols does not exceed a predetermined number of times (for example, 20 times). You can By configuring in this way, the special figure high probability period is set, and for the player who has set the first probability variable state at the initial stage, the first probability variable state ends and the second probability variable state is set It is possible to make it easy to continue playing the game even after the game is finished.

In addition, as in the thirty-sixth embodiment described above, referring to the variation pattern scenario 2 table 202af, instead of prescribing the switching timing of the variation pattern table to be referred to, it is referred during the second probability variation state. It may be configured to switch the referenced variation pattern table based on the fact that the switching condition for switching the variation pattern table is satisfied. In this case, as a switching opportunity for switching the referenced variation pattern table, a special The variation pattern table to be referred to may be switched from the currently referred variation pattern table to another variation pattern table when a switching lottery separately executed each time the symbol lottery is executed is won. Alternatively, whenever the number of special symbol lotteries reaches a predetermined number (for example, 50 times), a lottery for switching the variation pattern table may be executed. Further, the variation pattern table to be referred to may be switched based on the number of times the small win is won during the second probability variable state or the winning of the switching lottery executed when the small win is won.

In addition, as a variation pattern table to be switched when the above-described switching opportunity is established, a variation pattern table that is more advantageous to the player than the variation pattern table that was referred to before switching (a variation pattern table in which a short variation time is likely to be selected) ), or a variation pattern table disadvantageous to the player (a variation pattern table in which a long variation time is likely to be selected) may be used.

In addition, in the above-described thirty-sixth embodiment and each modification of the thirty-sixth embodiment, in the period in which the second variable probability state is set, an advantageous period in which the number of balls is likely to increase and a disadvantageous period in which the number of balls is difficult to increase (Decreasing period) and are configured to be created by differentiating the length of the set special symbol fluctuation time, but other configurations may be used, and are executed when a small win is won. Details of the small winning game (for example, the length of the period from when the small winning is won until the second variable winning device 650, which is opened in the small winning game, can win the ball, and the second variable By changing the length of the period (open period) during which the winning device 650 can win the ball, the number of winning balls paid out when the ball enters the second variable winning device 650, etc.) Advantageous period and unfavorable period can be created.

<Thirty-seventh embodiment>
Next, the thirty-seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 698 to 706. FIG. In the thirty-seventh embodiment, the configuration of the game board 13 differs from the thirty-fifth embodiment in that the configuration of the path for the ball to enter the first ball entrance 64b1 is different, and The difference is that the path configuration for entering the ball into the ball opening 64b2 is different, and the game content based on the lottery result of the first special symbol and the lottery result of the second special symbol is different. They are different in that respect.

Specifically, the pachinko machine 10 in the thirty-fifth embodiment described above reaches the upper limit number (40 times) of the special symbol continuous setting number in which the high probability state of the special symbol is continuously set (reaches the variable probability limit ), even if the condition that the high probability state of the special symbol can be set is satisfied (for example, when the jackpot of the jackpot type in which the first probability variable state is set after the jackpot game is won), A process (probability variation limit process) in which a low probability state of a special symbol is forcibly set can be configured to be executable.

In addition, when the normal pattern high probability state is set continuously and the normal pattern continuous setting number reaches the upper limit number (10 times) (reaches the short time limit), the condition that the high probability state of the normal pattern can be set is established (for example, when winning the jackpot of the jackpot type in which the first probability variable state is set after the jackpot game is over), the process of forcibly setting the low probability state of the normal symbol ( Time-saving limit processing) was configured to be executable.

When the big win is won in the first special pattern lottery and the second special pattern lottery, the high probability state of the special pattern is surely set after the big win game is finished, and the big win is made in the first special pattern lottery. In the case of winning, the low probability state of normal patterns is more likely to be set than the high probability state of normal patterns after the end of the jackpot game, and when the jackpot is won in the second special pattern lottery, the jackpot game is finished. It was configured so that the high-probability state of the normal symbol was always set afterward.

In addition, in the normal state and the second variable probability state, the first special symbol lottery is easier to execute than the second special symbol lottery, and in the time saving state and the first variable state, the second special symbol lottery is the first. It is configured to be easier to execute than the special pattern lottery.

In other words, the player is made to play the game while expecting the game state to shift to the first variable probability state by the time the variable probability limit is reached, aiming at winning the jackpot in the first special symbol lottery executed in the normal state. It was something.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the 35th embodiment configured in this way, once the first variable probability state is set, the first variable probability continuously until it reaches either the variable probability limit or the short time limit. A state is set, and the jackpot game executed based on the jackpot winning of the second special symbol lottery executed in the first variable probability state can be executed a plurality of times (maximum 10 times) in a short period of time. It is possible to increase the player's desire to play.

However, in the pachinko machine 10 of the thirty-fifth embodiment described above, when a jackpot is won in a state in which the normal state (low probability state of special symbols, low probability state of normal symbols) is set (when first hit), A second variable probability state (high probability state of special symbols, low probability state of normal symbols) is set after the end of the jackpot game, and then the second variable probability state loops until the variable probability limit is reached, resulting in many prizes for the player. There is a possibility that the game period (advantageous game period) in which the high probability state of the special symbol is set ends without the ball being awarded.

On the other hand, in the thirty-seventh embodiment, the period from winning the jackpot (winning for the first time) in the normal state to reaching the time-saving limit is the period during which many prize balls can be given to the player (continuous chance). It is greatly different from the thirty-fifth embodiment described above in that it can be set as a period).

As described above, in the thirty-seventh embodiment, when the jackpot is won in the special symbol lottery executed during the normal state, the consecutive chance period is set. (many prize balls) can be awarded. Therefore, the player's desire to play can be enhanced.

In addition, as described above, the thirty-seventh embodiment is configured so that the continuous chance period is set when the first win is won, so it is possible to suppress the excessive awarding of benefits to the player. In order to make it difficult for the special symbol lottery to be executed in the normal state, a ball entry path configuration for the first ball entrance 64b1 and a ball entrance path configuration for the ball to the right first ball entrance 64b2 are provided. , are different from the configuration of the thirty-fifth embodiment described above.

In this way, by making it difficult to win the jackpot in the normal state, even in the case of setting the consecutive chance period based on winning the jackpot in the normal state, the player is not given excessive benefits. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation where

In addition, since the continuous winning period is set only by winning the first win, even if the special symbol lottery is configured to be difficult to be executed in the normal state, the player is motivated to play the game. can be done.

<Regarding the Game Board Configuration of the Pachinko Machine of the 37th Embodiment>
First, the configuration of the game board 13 in the pachinko machine 10 of the thirty-seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 698 and 699. FIG. FIG. 698 is a front view schematically showing the configuration of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 of the thirty-seventh embodiment. As shown in FIG. 698, in the thirty-seventh embodiment, in contrast to the thirty-fifth embodiment described above, the lower area of the game area formed on the game board 13 (the area formed below the variable display unit 80) and the distribution device 175 is eliminated from the right side area of the game area (the area formed on the right side of the variable display unit 80), the electric accessory 64a and the electric The difference is that the configuration of the right first ball entrance 64b2 to which the accessory 64a is attached is changed, and the rest is the same. The same reference numerals are assigned to the same configurations, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 698, in the thirty-seventh embodiment, a ball fired by a left-handed game enters the upper opening 960a of the guide channel 960, and the ball ejected from the guide channel 960 flows into the ball distribution component 970, and when the ball that has flowed in is distributed to a specific path in the ball distribution component 970, it can enter the first ball entrance 64b1. ing.

Detailed description will be given later with reference to FIG. It is configured so that an upper opening 960a of 960 is positioned. That is, it is the same as the rate of balls entering the first ball inlet 64b1 in the above-described thirty-fifth embodiment (the rate of about 20 balls entering when 250 balls are shot in a left-handed game). The ball enters the upper opening 960a at a rate of .

Approximately 1/9 of the ball entering the upper opening 960a flows down the specific path of the ball distribution component 970 and enters the first ball entering port 64b1. That is, in the thirty-seventh embodiment, when 250 balls are shot in a left-handed game, two or three balls enter the first ball entrance 64b1.

In addition, in the 37th embodiment, since the probability of winning per normal pattern is set as low as 1/120 in the state where the low probability state of the normal pattern is set, the low probability state of the normal pattern is set. Even if a right-handed game is played during the game state (normal state, second probability variable state), the ball hardly enters the first ball entrance 64b1. Furthermore, as in the thirty-fifth embodiment described above, it is configured so that the ball can be easily entered into the second ball inlet 640 provided in the right side area by a right-handed game, but in the normal state When (low probability state of special symbols, low probability state of normal symbols) is set, a variation pattern with a long variation time (for example, 10 minutes) is set as the variation pattern of the second special symbol variation. It is configured as follows.

Therefore, when the normal state is set, the left-handed game aiming to execute the first special symbol lottery by entering the ball into the first ball entrance 64b1 is a game method advantageous to the player. Become.

Next, with reference to FIG. 699, the details of the ball swinging accessory 970 will be described. FIG. 699 is an enlarged front view of the ball swinging accessory 970. FIG. As shown in FIG. 699, this ball distribution component 970 is mainly composed of a first crown 971 where the ball discharged from the guide channel 960 and flowing down to the ball distribution component 970 reaches first, and its first A part of the ball (about 1/3) reaching the cloon 971 is configured to reach the second cloon 972, and a part of the game ball reaching the second cloon 972 is configured to be able to enter. A first ball entrance 64b1, an out port 973 for discharging balls that have not entered the first ball entrance 64b1 to the outside of the ball distribution accessory 970 (that is, the outside of the pachinko machine 10), consists of The first crown 971 and the second crown 972 are each formed in a circular mortar shape, and the inner wall portion thereof is mainly configured so that the game ball can roll in a direction parallel to the circular outer periphery. Also, in the vicinity of the bottom surface of each croon, there are provided three ball entrances into which game balls rolling on the inner wall portion of each croon can enter. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 699, near the bottom surface of the first crown 971, there are provided three ball entrances, a safe ball entrance 971a and out ball entrances 971b and 971c. In the vicinity of the bottom surface of the second crown 972, there are provided three ball entrances, a safe ball entrance 972a and out ball entrances 972b and 972c. That is, the first cloon 971 and the second cloon 972 are each composed of a known three-hole cloon.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 699, the first crew 971 includes a second crew guiding flow path 971n for flowing down the game ball that has entered the safe ball entrance 971a to the second crew 972, and an out ball entrance. An out guide passage 971o1 for causing a game ball entering 971b to flow down to a left out port 973a which is a part of the out port 973, is connected to the out-guiding flow path 971o2 that flows down to the right out-port 973b. Furthermore, the second crew 972 includes a guide passage 972v for flowing down the game ball that has entered the safe ball entrance 972a toward the first ball entrance 64b1, and a game that has entered the out ball entrance 972b. An out-guiding channel 972o1 for causing the ball to flow down to the left out port 973a and an out-guiding channel 972o2 to cause the game ball entering the out ball entrance 972c to flow down to the right out port 973b are connected. . In addition, the out-guiding channels 971o1 and 972o1 merge on the downstream side with one channel that causes the game ball to flow down toward the left out port 973a. Similarly, the out-guiding channels 6971o2 and 972o2 merge on the downstream side with one channel that causes the game ball to flow down toward the right out port 973a.

In summary, all the game balls that flowed down to the ball distribution accessory 970 once reached the first rune 971, and some of the game balls that reached the first rune 971 (about 1 ball in 3 balls) A game ball that enters the safe ball entrance 971a that enters at a rate) is guided to the second clone 972 by the second clone guidance flow path 971n, and one of the game balls that reaches the second clone 972 A part (game balls that enter the safe ball entrance 972a that enters at a rate of about one ball per three balls) is guided to the first ball entrance 64b1 by the guiding flow path 972v. In other words, the rate at which the ball that reaches the ball distribution function 970 enters (distributes) the first ball entrance 64b1 is about 1/9 (1/3×1/3). Conversely, even if the game balls reach the ball distribution accessory 970, about 8/9 of the game balls are distributed to the out port 973 without entering the first ball entrance 64b1. is discharged to the outside.

With these configurations, the ball distribution accessory 970 can be distributed to either the first ball entrance 64b1, which is relatively advantageous to the player, or the out port 973, which is relatively disadvantageous to the player. It can also be called a sorting means. Furthermore, as a single unit of the first rune 971 in the ball distribution accessory 970, the second rune guide flow path 971n that easily flows down to the advantageous first ball entrance 64b1 (flows down with a probability of about 1/3), It is impossible (difficult) to flow down to the 1 ball entrance 64b1 (that is, flow down to the disadvantageous out port 973). It can also be called a possible sorting means. In addition, as a single unit of the second crew 972, it is impossible (difficult) to flow down to the first entrance 64b1, and it is impossible (that is, disadvantageous It can also be said that it is a distributing means for distributing game balls to either of the out guide flow paths 972o1 and 972o2 that flow down to the out port 973).

In the thirty-seventh embodiment, both the first crown 971 and the second crown 972 have a three-hole structure, one of which has a specific path that allows the ball to enter the first ball entrance 64b1. Although it is configured to be a part, the configuration of the first crown 971 and the second crown 972 is not limited to this, and the ball flowing down (rolling) the first crown 971 and the second crown 972 flows down It is only necessary that a part of the path to be obtained is a specific path that allows the ball to enter the first ball entrance 64b1, for example, the number of holes formed in each crown is different Alternatively, the arrangement of the holes serving as the specific paths may be varied.

In this case, among the plurality of holes provided in the first clone 971, the arrangement position of the specific hole (the hole that allows the ball to flow down to the second clone 972) to be part of the specific route, and the second Among the plurality of holes provided in the croon 972, the arrangement position of the specific hole that is part of the specific path (the hole that allows the ball to flow down to the first ball entrance 64b1) is preferably different. , For example, when the specific hole of the first clone 971 is arranged in the innermost part (back side (game board 13 side in the viewpoint of FIG. 699)), the specific hole of the second clone 972 is placed in the foremost part (FIG. It is better to place it on the front side (player side) from the point of view of . By constructing in this way, even when the pachinko machine 10 is installed in a state slightly inclined in the front-rear direction, it becomes easy to enter one specific hole and difficult to enter the other specific hole. Thus, it is difficult for the ball to enter any of the specific holes and the player feels uncomfortable, or it is easy for the ball to enter any of the specific holes and the player is given an excessive privilege. can be suppressed.

Furthermore, in the thirty-seventh embodiment, the ball that has flowed down both the first and second crowns 971 and 972, which are suppressing means, is configured to be able to enter the first ball entrance 64b1, but it is limited to this. Without flowing down the second crown 972, a part of the plurality of holes formed in the first crown 971 communicates with the SP flow path that can directly enter the first ball entrance 64b1. You may provide the SP hole which carries out. By configuring in this way, it becomes possible to enter the ball that has flowed down various paths into the first ball entrance 64b1, and the game aims to enter the ball into the first ball entrance 64b1. It is possible to provide a player who is playing (a game in a normal state) with a game that is hard to get tired of.

In addition, it is preferable that a plurality of balls flowing down the first crown 971 at once makes it easier to enter a specific hole than a single ball flowing down the first crown 971 . By configuring in this way, it is possible for the player to aim to make a plurality of balls flow down on the first rune 971, so even if the ball flows into the ball distribution accessory 970 , the left-handed game can be continuously performed, and the operation of the game can be enhanced.

In the thirty-seventh embodiment, as a suppressing means for suppressing (reducing) the entry of the ball into the first ball entrance 64b1, a ball distribution function having a first crown 971 and a second crown 972 is provided. 970 is provided, but is not limited to this. A variable means capable of changing between an open state that allows a ball to enter the first ball entrance 64b1 and a closed state that makes it more difficult for a ball to enter the first ball entrance 64b1 than in the open state is provided. A configuration in which the variable means is always driven in a predetermined variable pattern may be used as the suppressing means. Even when such a configuration is used, when the ball fired by the left-handed game reaches the vicinity of the first ball entrance 64b1, if the variable means is open, the first ball entrance 64b1 When the ball is in the closed state, it can be configured so that the ball is not (difficult to enter) the first ball entrance 64b1. It is possible to suppress the entry of the ball.

<Regarding Transition of Game State in the 37th Embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIG. 700, the game state transition (game flow) in the thirty-seventh embodiment will be described. FIG. 700 is a diagram schematically showing transition contents of game states in the thirty-seventh embodiment.

In the thirty-seventh embodiment, unlike the thirty-fifth embodiment described above, the special symbol type in which the lottery is mainly executed during the first variable probability state is the first special symbol instead of the second special symbol. The special symbol type in which the lottery is mainly executed during the 2 probability variable state is replaced with the first special symbol, and the special symbol type in which the lottery is mainly executed during the time saving state is the second special symbol. The difference is that the first special symbol is used instead of , and the other contents are the same. A detailed description of the same contents will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 700, during the normal state, similarly to the above-described thirty-fifth embodiment, the ball is entered into the first ball entrance 64b1 by a left-handed game, aiming to execute the first special symbol lottery. A game is played. In addition, as described above with reference to FIGS. 698 and 699, in the thirty-seventh embodiment, in contrast to the thirty-fifth embodiment described above, the game board is made difficult to execute the first special symbol lottery in the normal state. 13 are different.

When the big win is won in the first special symbol lottery executed in the normal state, "big win A3" is always set as the big win type. "Jackpot A3" is a jackpot game of 10 rounds (same as the jackpot game executed when the jackpot is won in the second special symbol lottery in the thirty-fifth embodiment described above) is executed, and the jackpot game ends. It is a jackpot type in which the first probability variation state (high probability state of special symbols, high probability state of normal symbols) is set later.

That is, in the thirty-seventh embodiment, when a jackpot is won in the first special symbol lottery in the normal state (when the first prize is won), a 10-round jackpot game capable of awarding a large number of prize balls to the player is executed. At the same time, it is possible to set the most advantageous first probability variable state for the player. Therefore, when a big win is won, the player who is playing the game in the normal state can surely be given a privilege, so that the player can be motivated to play the game.

In the thirty-seventh embodiment, similarly to the above-described thirty-fifth embodiment, a jackpot is won in a state in which the low probability state of the special symbol is set, and after the jackpot game executed based on the jackpot is completed. When the high probability state of the special pattern is set, ``40'' is set as the probability variable limit number of times, and the jackpot is won in a state where the low probability state of the normal pattern is set, and the game is executed based on the jackpot winning. When the high-probability state of normal symbols is set after the end of the jackpot game, "10" is set as the time reduction limit number of times.

In other words, in the state where the normal state (low probability state of special symbols, low probability state of normal symbols) is set, if the first special symbol lottery wins the jackpot (first hit), it is based on the first hit The 10-round jackpot game and the 10-round jackpot game to be executed until reaching the time-saving limit are added, and a total of 11 10-round jackpot games are executed (made easier to execute). .

When the first variable probability state is set, it becomes a high probability state of normal symbols, so that it becomes a game state where it is easy to enter the ball into the right first ball entrance 64b2 by a right-handed game. In the thirty-seventh embodiment, when the high probability state of the normal pattern is set, there is a normal pattern winning game in which the winning is won with a high probability (239/240) and the electric accessory 64a is opened for a long time (2 seconds). configured to run. Therefore, while the high probability state of normal symbols is set, about 30% of the balls fired by the right-handed game can be entered into the right first ball entrance 64b2, and the first special symbol lottery. It becomes possible to easily acquire the execution right (special figure 1 pending).

Furthermore, although detailed description will be given later, in the thirty-seventh embodiment, when the first probability variation state is set, the first special symbol variation is more likely to set a shorter variation time than the second special symbol variation. It is configured to be Specifically, the first special symbol variation in the first probability variation state is configured to have a variation time of "1 second" and the second special symbol variation is configured to have a variation time of "10 minutes". Therefore, in the thirty-seventh embodiment, the first special symbol lottery is mainly executed during the first variable probability state.

As described above, in the thirty-seventh embodiment, when the jackpot is won in the first special symbol lottery, the "jackpot A3" is always set as the jackpot type, so once the first probability variable state is set, , Until the first variable probability state ends (until the variable probability limit or the short time limit is reached), the game is continuously executed per 10 rounds.

Then, when the time-saving limit is reached during the first variable probability state, the high-probability state of the normal design is forcibly changed to the low-probability state of the normal design as the game state set after the end of the jackpot game. A limit process is executed, and a second variable probability state (high probability state for special symbols, low probability state for normal symbols) is set.

In the thirty-seventh embodiment, it is configured so that a small hit is won in most cases when the big hit is not won in the second special symbol lottery, and during the second probability variation state, the variation pattern of the second special symbol variation , so that a short variation time (for example, 1 second) can be easily set. Therefore, when the second variable probability state is set, a game is performed in which a ball is entered into the second ball entrance 640 by a right-handed game to execute the second special symbol lottery.

In addition, in the state in which the low probability state of the normal pattern is set, the ratio of the ball fired by the right-handed game entering the second ball entrance 640 is about 50%. It is configured so that the rate at which the ball shot by the hitting game enters the first ball entrance 64b1 is higher than that. Therefore, as a game method to be executed by the player during the second variable probability state, the right-handed game is an advantageous game method.

When the second special symbol lottery is executed during the second variable probability state, most of the small wins are won and a small win game is executed. When the small winning game is executed, the second variable winning device 650 is opened for a predetermined period (0.5 seconds×2 times) as in the thirty-fifth embodiment. Then, one prize ball is paid out by causing the ball to enter the V prize opening 650a of the second variable prize winning device 650. - 特許庁Therefore, by executing the right-handed game during the second variable probability state, it is possible to continue the game without significantly increasing or decreasing the number of balls held.

In addition, when the jackpot is won in the second special symbol lottery executed during the second probability variable state, the second variable winning device 650 is opened in the same manner as the small hit game (35th implementation described above) The same as the 2-round jackpot game in the form) is executed. In the thirty-seventh embodiment, the jackpot is won in the second special symbol lottery, and the distribution of the game state set after the jackpot game ends is the same as when the jackpot is won in the first special symbol lottery in the above-described thirty-fifth embodiment. It is configured to be the same as the distribution, and 99.8% of the jackpot winnings in the second special symbol lottery in the second probability variable state are the jackpots in which the second probability variable state is set again, and 0.8%. 2% becomes a jackpot for which the first variable probability state is set.

Therefore, when the second probability variable state is set, aim for the first probability variable jackpot, which is 0.2% distribution until reaching the probability variable limit, without reducing the number of balls held (without increasing). Then, a right-handed game for executing the second special symbol lottery is performed.

On the other hand, when the probability variable limit is reached before reaching the time saving limit in the state where the first probability variable state is set, the second probability variable state in which only the probability variable limit is updated (subtracted) is set continuously. Then, when the remaining number of times to reach the probability limit is less than the time-saving limit number of times (initial setting number of times), the first probability variation jackpot is won, and the first probability variation state is set continuously. , A game state (time saving state) in which the high probability state of special symbols is forcibly changed to the low probability state of special symbols is set.

Since this time-saving state is set to a high-probability state of normal symbols, a game of entering a ball into the right first ball inlet 64b2 by a right-handed game is executed in the same manner as the above-described first probability variable state. This time-saving state is a game state continued until the special symbol lottery (fluctuation) number of times (for example, 100 times) executed after the end of the jackpot game is executed, and the first special symbol lottery during this time-saving state. When the jackpot is won, 10 rounds of the jackpot game is executed, and after the jackpot game ends, the first probability variable state is set. In addition, when the special symbol lottery is executed 100 times in a state in which the time saving state is set, the time saving end condition is satisfied and the game shifts to the normal state.

<Regarding the electrical configuration in the thirty-seventh embodiment>
Next, the electrical configuration of the thirty-seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 701 to 706. FIG. The thirty-seventh embodiment differs from the thirty-fifth embodiment described above in that a part of the configuration of the ROM 202 of the main controller 110 is changed. Otherwise, they are identical. The same reference numerals are assigned to the same configurations, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The ROM 202 of the main controller 110 in the thirty-seventh embodiment has a first winning random number table 202ba instead of the first winning random number table 202a in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110 in the thirty-fifth embodiment. , Instead of the second per random number table 202c, the second per random number 3 table 202bc is defined in the first per type selection table 202b. Instead of the special figure 1 jackpot type selection 3 table 202bb1 and the special figure 2 jackpot type selection table 202b2, the special figure 2 jackpot type selection 3 table 202bb2 is replaced with the time saving variation pattern table 202d2, and the time saving variation pattern 3 table 202bd2 The first probability variation variation pattern 3 table 202bd3 is used instead of the first probability variation variation pattern table 202d3, and the second probability variation variation pattern 3 table 202bd4 is used instead of the second probability variation variation pattern table 202d4. And, it is different from the point of using the time reduction provision 3 table 202be instead of the time reduction provision table 202e (see FIG. 617), and the rest is the same. The same reference numerals are assigned to the same configurations, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Here, with reference to FIG. 701, the contents defined in the first winning random number 3 table 202ba will be described. FIG. 701(a) is a diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the first winning random number 3 table 202ba. In the thirty-seventh embodiment, as described above with reference to FIG. 700, among the special symbol high probability periods in which the special symbol high probability state is continuously set, the period that is advantageous to the player (first variable probability state is set) in that the first special symbol lottery is mainly executed, which is different from the thirty-fifth embodiment described above.

More specifically, the pachinko machine 10 in the thirty-fifth embodiment described above is configured so that the special symbol lottery mainly executed during the normal state and the second variable probability state is the first special symbol lottery, and the time saving state , and the special symbol lottery mainly executed during the first variable probability state is configured to be the second special symbol lottery. Then, in order to execute a small winning game for suppressing increase/decrease in the number of balls put out during the second probability variable state, it is configured so that a small winning can be won with a high probability in the first special symbol lottery, and the first special symbol. When a big win is won in a lottery, a big win game (2-round big win) in which the number of obtainable balls is suppressed is easily executed. Furthermore, when a jackpot is won in the second special symbol lottery in order to increase the number of balls to be paid out during the first probability variable state, a jackpot game (10-round jackpot game) in which the number of obtainable balls to be paid out is set to be large is easily executed. It was configured to be Furthermore, in order to increase the game efficiency during the first variable probability state (to increase the number of times the jackpot game is won per unit time), the second special symbol lottery is configured so that the small win is not (hardly) won, It is configured to facilitate increasing the number of executions of the second special symbol lottery per unit time.

On the other hand, in the thirty-seventh embodiment, as described above with reference to FIG. A first special symbol lottery is mainly executed in a period (a period in which a first variable probability state is set) that is advantageous to a player and a period in which a time saving state is set in a certain period. However, the second special symbol lottery is only during the period in which the high probability state of the special symbol is set continuously, during which the player is disadvantaged (the period when the second probability variable state is set). It is configured to be mainly executed, and in order to execute a small winning game for suppressing the increase and decrease of the number of balls put out during the second variable probability state, it is possible to win a small winning with a high probability in the second special symbol lottery. In addition, when a big win is won in the second special symbol lottery, a big win game (2-round big win) with a reduced number of obtainable balls is easily executed.

Thus, of the special pattern high probability period in which the high probability state of the special pattern is continuously set, only the period during which the player is disadvantageous (the period in which the second probability variable state is set), the second special symbol By constructing so that the lottery is mainly executed, it is possible to make it impossible to win a small prize with a high probability when the first special symbol lottery is executed in the normal state. Therefore, it is suppressed that a small winning game is executed with a high probability in the special symbol lottery executed in the normal state, and a game of timing the second variable winning device 650 to win the ball is performed. be able to.

Here, the contents of the special symbol 1 random number 3 table 202ba1 will be described with reference to FIG. 701(b). FIG. 701(b) is a diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the special symbol 1 random number 3 table 202ba1. As shown in FIG. 701(b), the special symbol 1 random number 3 table 202ba1 deletes the small hit determination value from the special symbol 1 random number table 202a1 (see FIG. 612(b)) of the 35th embodiment described above. are the same except that A detailed description of the same contents will be omitted. Thereby, when the first special symbol lottery is executed, there is no possibility of winning a small prize.

Next, the contents of the special symbol 2 random number 3 table 202ba2 will be described with reference to FIG. 701(c). FIG. 701(b) is a diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the special symbol 2 random number 3 table 202ba2. As shown in FIG. 701(c), the special symbol 2 random number 3 table 202ba2 adds a small hit determination value to the special symbol 2 random number table 202a2 (see FIG. 612(c)) of the 35th embodiment described above. are the same except that A detailed description of the same contents will be omitted. In addition, the small hit determination value added in the special symbol 2 random number 3 table 202ba2 is defined in the special symbol 1 random number table 202a1 (see FIG. 612 (b)) in the 35th embodiment described above. Since the content is the same, detailed description thereof is omitted. As a result, it is possible to make it possible to win a small hit when the second special symbol lottery is executed.

Next, the contents of the second winning random number 3 table 202bc will be described with reference to FIG. 701(d). FIG. 701(d) is a diagram schematically showing the contents of the second winning random number 3 table 202bc. As shown in FIG. 701, the second winning random number 3 table 202bc is different from the second winning random number table 202c (see FIG. 612(d)) in the thirty-fifth embodiment described above. The difference is that the winning probability is set to a low probability (2/240), and the other points are the same. A detailed description of the same contents will be omitted.

Here, as described above with reference to FIG. 698, in the thirty-seventh embodiment, the first special symbol lottery is mainly executed in both the time saving state in which the high probability state of the normal symbol is set and the first variable state. The electric accessory 64a which is opened when winning the normal symbol lottery is attached to the right first ball entrance 64b2 arranged in the right area of the game board 13. It consists of

In other words, in the state in which the high probability state of the normal design is set, the ball is easily entered into the right first ball entrance 64b2 by the normal design winning game to be executed, and the low probability state of the normal design is set. In this state, it is difficult for a ball to enter the right first ball entrance 64b2 even if a normal game is executed.

By configuring in this way, like the configuration of the game board 13 shown in the thirty-fifth embodiment described above, in each game state (normal state, second probability variable state) in which the low probability state of the normal symbol is set, There is no need to use a special configuration for differentiating the ease with which a ball can enter the right first ball entrance 64b2, and the game design can be simplified.

As shown in FIG. 701(d), in the low-probability state of normal symbols, the value of the second winning random number counter C4 is defined in the range of "0 to 1" in association with winning winning. Other than that, since it is the same as the second winning random number table 202c (see FIG. 612(d)) of the thirty-fifth embodiment described above, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Next, with reference to FIG. 702(a), the contents defined in the special figure 1 jackpot type selection 3 table 202bb1 will be described. FIG. 702(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the special figure 1 jackpot type selection 3 table 202bb1. As shown in FIG. 702(a), the special figure 1 jackpot type selection 3 table 202bb1 is the first The difference is that the type of jackpot set when a jackpot is won in a special symbol lottery is changed.

Specifically, "jackpot A3 (10R jackpot)" is defined for the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the range of "0 to 199". When the jackpot type is ``jackpot A3'', a ``second probability variable state'' is set after the jackpot game is finished regardless of the game state (game state at the time of winning) at the time of winning (at the time of jackpot winning).

Next, with reference to FIG. 702(b), the contents defined in the special figure 2 jackpot type selection 3 table 202bb2 will be described. FIG. 702(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the special figure 2 jackpot type selection 3 table 202bb2. As shown in FIG. 702(b), the special figure 2 jackpot type selection 3 table 202bb2 is the second The difference is that the type of jackpot set when a jackpot is won in a special symbol lottery is changed.

Specifically, "jackpot B3" is defined in the range of "0 to 198" for the value of the first hit type counter C2, and "jackpot C3" is defined for the value of "199". there is

When the jackpot type is ``jackpot B3'', the ``second probability variable state'' is set after the jackpot game is finished regardless of the game state (game state at the time of winning) at the time of winning (at the time of winning the jackpot). In addition, when the jackpot type is ``jackpot C3'', the ``first probability variable state'' is set after the jackpot game ends regardless of the game state at the time of winning (at the time of jackpot winning).

That is, in the thirty-seventh embodiment, the jackpot type corresponding to the jackpot type set when the jackpot is won in the first special symbol lottery in the above-described thirty-fifth embodiment is set when the jackpot is won in the second special symbol lottery. It is configured so that

By configuring in this way, even if the second special symbol lottery is mainly executed during the second variable probability state, it is possible to suppress the increase or decrease in the number of balls released during the second variable probability state. .

Next, with reference to FIG. 703(a), the contents defined in the working hours variation pattern 3 table 202bd2 will be described. FIG. 703(a) is a diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the working hours variation pattern 3 table 202bd2. As shown in FIG. 703(a), the time saving variation pattern 3 table 202bd2 is the first special The variation pattern set for the first special symbol variation is likely to be selected for a shorter variation time than the variation pattern set for the second special symbol variation so that the symbol lottery is mainly executed. It is different in that it is configured to

Specifically, when the symbol type is "Special Figure 1", the result of the hit/fail judgment is hit, regardless of the loss, the value of the acquired variation type counter CS1 is in the range of "0 to 198", and the variation time is 1 second ( 1000 milliseconds) is stipulated, and if the symbol type is "Special Figure 2", the result of the hit/fail judgment is hit, regardless of the deviation, the value of the acquired variation type counter CS1 is "0 to 198”, a long variation with a variation time of 60 seconds (60000 milliseconds) is defined.

Next, the contents defined in the first probability variation variation pattern 3 table 202id3 will be described with reference to FIG. 703(b). FIG. 703(b) is a diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the first probability variation variation pattern 3 table 202bd3. As shown in FIG. 703(b), the first probability variation variation pattern 3 table 202bd3 is the first probability variation variation pattern table 202d3 (see FIG. The variation pattern set for the first special symbol variation is shorter than the variation pattern set for the second special symbol variation so that the first special symbol lottery is mainly executed during the probability variation state. The difference is that the time is configured to be easily selected.

Specifically, when the symbol type is "Special Figure 1", the result of the hit/fail judgment is hit, regardless of the loss, the value of the acquired variation type counter CS1 is in the range of "0 to 198", and the variation time is 1 second ( 1000 milliseconds) is stipulated, and if the symbol type is "Special Figure 2", the result of the hit/fail judgment is hit, regardless of the deviation, the value of the acquired variation type counter CS1 is "0 to 198”, a long variation with a variation time of 600 seconds (600000 milliseconds) is defined.

Next, the contents defined in the second probability variation variation pattern 3 table 202bd4 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 704 is a diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the second probability variant variation pattern 3 table 202bd4. As shown in FIG. 704, the second probability variable variation pattern 3 table 202bd4 is different from the second probability variation variation pattern table 202d4 (see FIG. 616 (a)) in the thirty-fifth embodiment described above. The variation pattern set for the second special symbol variation is selected with a shorter variation time than the variation pattern set for the first special symbol variation so that the second special symbol lottery is mainly executed at . It is different in that it is configured so that it can be easily done.

Specifically, the symbol type is "Special Figure 1", the hit or miss determination result is hit, regardless of the loss, the value of the acquired variation type counter CS1 is in the range of "0 to 198", and the variation time is 600 seconds ( 600000 milliseconds) is specified.

In addition, the pattern type is "Special Figure 2", the result of the hit/fail judgment is hit, regardless of the loss, the value of the acquired variation type counter CS1 is in the range of "0 to 198", the variation time is 1 second (1000 milliseconds ) is specified.

Next, with reference to FIG. 705, the content prescribed|regulated to the time reduction provision 3 table 202be is demonstrated. Drawing 705 is a mimetic diagram showing typically the contents of time saving provision 3 table 202be. As shown in FIG. 705, the time saving 3 table 202be is different from the time saving giving table 202e (see FIG. 617) of the thirty-fifth embodiment described above. The difference is that the content of the number of times is different.

Specifically, the jackpot types "jackpot A3" and "jackpot C3" are set when both the probability variation limit reach flag 203u and the time saving limit reach flag 203v are set to off, the number of time saving times given "65535 ( Substantially until the next time)” is defined, the variable probability limit reaching flag 203u is set to ON, and the time saving limit reaching flag 203v is set to OFF, the number of time saving times given “100” is defined. In addition, when the time saving limit reaching flag 203v is set to ON, since the low probability state of the normal symbol is forcibly set, regardless of the setting status of the probability variation limit reaching flag 203u, the number of time saving times given "0" is defined.

On the other hand, the jackpot type "jackpot B3" is not a jackpot type in which the high probability state of the normal pattern is set as described above, so regardless of the setting status of the probability variable limit reaching flag 203u and the time saving limit reaching flag 203v, the number of times of saving time is defined as "0".

Next, the contents of the variation pattern scenario 3 table 202bf will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 706 is a diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the variation pattern scenario 3 table 202bf. As shown in FIG. 706, the fluctuation pattern scenario 3 table 202bf corresponds to each jackpot type based on the fact that the jackpot types set are different from the above-described fluctuation pattern scenario table 202f (see FIG. 618). The difference is that the contents of the fluctuation pattern scenario defined by Since other contents are the same, the detailed description of the same contents will be omitted.

Specifically, the jackpot type is "jackpot A3", "jackpot C3", that is, the jackpot type that can set the first probability variable state (high probability state of special symbols, high probability state of normal symbols) after the end of the jackpot game. In some cases, the variation pattern scenario to be selected is defined according to the setting status of the probability variation limit arrival flag 203u and the time reduction limit arrival flag 203v, and both the probability variation limit arrival flag 203u and the time reduction limit arrival flag 203v When it is set to OFF, the variation pattern scenario referring to the first probability variation variation pattern table 202d3 is set to OFF until the next jackpot is won after the end of the jackpot game, and the probability variation limit reaching flag 203u is set to OFF. When the time-saving limit reaching flag 203v is set to ON, a variation pattern scenario is defined in which the second probability variation variation pattern table 202d4 is referred to after the jackpot game ends until the next jackpot is won.

In addition, in the state where the probability variation limit arrival flag 203u is set to ON and the time saving limit arrival flag 203v is set to OFF, the special symbol variation is 100 times after the end of the big hit (1 to 100 times of special figure variation) , Refer to the time-saving variation pattern table (time-saving variation pattern 3 table 202bd2), and after that (the number of times of special figure variation 101 times or more), the normal variation pattern table 202d1 is referred to. A variation pattern scenario is defined. ing.

On the other hand, if the jackpot type is "jackpot B3", that is, the jackpot type can set the second variable probability state (high probability state for special symbols, low probability state for normal symbols) after the end of the jackpot game, the variable probability limit is reached. In a state where both the flag 203u and the time-saving limit reaching flag 203v are set to off, the second probability variation variation pattern table (second probability variation variation pattern 3 table 202bd4 ) is set to the probability variable limit reach flag 203u is set to ON, and the time reduction limit reach flag 203v is set to OFF, after the jackpot game ends until the next jackpot is won, normal A variation pattern scenario is defined for which the variation pattern table 202d1 is referred to. In addition, "jackpot B3" is a second probability variable state after the jackpot game ends, that is, a jackpot type in which a low probability state of normal symbols is set, so after the jackpot game corresponding to this "jackpot B3", time saving The limit reached flag 203v is never set to ON. Therefore, in the variation pattern scenario 3 table 202bf, no data is defined in the area corresponding to the situation where the "jackpot B3" and the time reduction limit reach flag 203v is set to ON (in the figure (indicated by "-").

As described above, in the thirty-seventh embodiment, the period from when the jackpot is won (first win) in the normal state until the time limit is reached is the period during which many prize balls can be given to the player ( It is configured so that it can be set as a consecutive chance period). Therefore, in the thirty-seventh embodiment, when the jackpot is won in the special symbol lottery executed during the normal state, the consecutive chance period is set. prize ball) can be granted. Therefore, the player's desire to play can be enhanced.

In addition, as described above, the thirty-seventh embodiment is configured so that the continuous chance period is set when the first win is won, so it is possible to suppress the excessive awarding of benefits to the player. In order to make it difficult for the special symbol lottery to be executed in the normal state, a ball entry path configuration for the first ball entrance 64b1 and a ball entrance path configuration for the ball to the right first ball entrance 64b2 are provided. constitutes

In this way, by making it difficult to win the jackpot in the normal state (difficult to execute the special symbol lottery), even if it is configured to set the consecutive chance period based on winning the jackpot in the normal state, It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which an excessive privilege is given to a player.

In addition, since the continuous winning period is set only by winning the first win, even if the special symbol lottery is configured to be difficult to be executed in the normal state, the player is motivated to play the game. can be done.

In addition, in the thirty-seventh embodiment, of the special pattern high probability period in which the special symbol high probability state is set continuously, only the period during which the player is disadvantaged (the period in which the second probability variable state is set) , the second special symbol lottery is mainly executed, and the small winning game is constructed to be executed. Therefore, it is suppressed that a small winning game is executed with a high probability in the special symbol lottery executed in the normal state, and a game of timing the second variable winning device 650 to win the ball is performed. be able to.

<38th Embodiment>
Next, the thirty-eighth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 707 to 721. FIG. The 38th embodiment differs from the above-described 35th embodiment in the conditions for acquiring the right (special symbol high probability right) for setting the special symbol high probability state after the end of the jackpot game. The difference is that

Specifically, in the thirty-fifth embodiment described above, when information for setting a high probability state of special symbols after the end of the jackpot game is defined in the jackpot type set when the jackpot is won in the special symbol lottery. is configured such that a high probability state of special symbols is set after the end of the jackpot game. In other words, it is configured to acquire a special symbol high probability right when a big winning type in which a high probability state of a special symbol is set after the end of the big winning game is set. On the other hand, in the thirty-eighth embodiment, when a jackpot type is set in which a high probability state of special symbols is set after the jackpot game ends, and the ball is moved to the specific area during the jackpot game. It is configured to acquire special high security rights when it is allowed to pass.

In other words, even when a jackpot type in which a high probability state of special symbols is set after the jackpot game is finished, the balls are allowed to pass through the specific area during execution of the jackpot game corresponding to the jackpot type. is not possible, the low probability state of the special symbol is set after the jackpot game ends.

By configuring in this way, in order to aim to set a high probability state of special symbols, which generally has a high degree of advantage for the player, the game aims to win many prize balls during the jackpot game. and a game aimed at passing the ball through the specific area can be provided to the player, and the player can be motivated to play the game during the big winning game.

<Regarding the game board configuration in the pachinko machine 10 of the thirty-eighth embodiment>
Here, the configuration of the game board 13 in the pachinko machine 10 of the thirty-eighth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 707 to 710. FIG. FIG. 707 is a front view showing the configuration of the game board 13 in the pachinko machine 10 of the thirty-eighth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 707, the thirty-eighth embodiment differs from the thirty-fifth embodiment described above in that a V winning device 1065 is provided in place of the first variable winning device 65, and the rest is the same. is. A detailed description of the same configuration will be omitted.

In the thirty-eighth embodiment, a jackpot game is executed in which the V winning device 1065 is opened when the jackpot is won. The V winning device 1065, which performs the opening operation during the jackpot game, is provided with a variable probability switch 1065e3 (specific area) through which the ball entering the specific winning opening 1065a can pass. Details will be described later with reference to FIGS. It is configured to pass through the variable probability switch 1065e3 (specific area). A ball passes through the variable probability switch 1065e3 during the jackpot game, and a special pattern high-probability state is set as a game state advantageous to the player after the jackpot game ends. It is structured to acquire the right to be granted (specially secured right).

<Regarding the V winning device 1065 in the 38th embodiment>
Here, the configuration of the V winning device 1065 described above will be described with reference to FIGS. 708 to 710. FIG. FIG. 708 is an exploded perspective view of the V winning device 1065. FIG. As shown in FIG. 708, the V winning device 1065 is an opening forming member 1065b arranged to protrude from the front side of the game board 13, and the opening forming member 1065b is combined with the rear side of the opening forming member 1065b. A base member 1065c for screwing to the game board 13, and a plurality of LEDs arranged on the back side of the base member 1065c for lighting the front side of the pachinko machine 10 from the back side of the base member 1065c. It has an arranged LED board 1065d, a back cover body 1065e that sandwiches the LED board 1065d with a base member 1065c, and an opening/closing door 1065f1 for opening and closing the specific prize winning opening 1065a formed in the opening forming member 1065b. The open/close unit 1065f, the flow path cover body 1065g combined with the back side of the back cover body 1065e to form a flow path, and the back cover body 1065e and the flow path cover body 1065g protrude into the flow path to play the game. A switching member 1065h for switching the flow path of the ball, a link member 1065i engaged with the switching member 1065h, a rear surface cover body 1065j arranged on the rear side of the flow path cover body 1065g, and the rear surface of the rear surface cover body 1065j. It is composed of a channel solenoid 1065k fixed to the side to operate the link member 1065i, and a fixing cover body 1065m for covering the channel solenoid 1065k from the back side and fixing it to the back cover body 1065j with screws. there is

FIG. 709 is a sectional view of the V winning device 1065. FIG. FIG. 709(c) is a top view of the V winning device 1065, and FIG. 709(b) is a Lb-Lb sectional view of the V winning device 1065. FIG. As shown in FIG. 709(b), the V winning device 1065 is formed with a specific winning opening 1065a, which is an opening into which a game ball can enter. The specific winning opening 1065a has a substantially rectangular opening above the pachinko machine 10, and is inclined downward to the left so that game balls passing through the opening are guided leftward in FIG. 709(b). A bottom surface is formed. A detection port 1065a1 composed of a magnetic sensor 1065c1 for detecting winning of a game ball is arranged at the left end of the bottom surface. A game ball that has passed through the detection port 1065a1 is guided to a sorting channel formed on the back side of the back cover body 1065e shown in FIG. 710(b).

In addition, as shown in FIG. 709(b), the opening of the specific winning hole 1065a is opened and closed by a door 1065f1 configured by a shutter mechanism that can be retracted from the game board 13 side. Possible (difficult to enter) closed state and variable. In the closed state, the opening is completely covered with the open/close door 1065f1, and the game ball can roll on the top of the open/close door. In the open state, the opening/closing door 1065f1 is retracted inside the base member 1065c (inside the game board 13) to be retracted from the specific winning opening 1065a.

With this configuration, when the opening of the V winning device 1065 is closed, the game ball rolls on the upper surface of the V winning device 1065 and is guided to the second ball entrance 640 side. is configured as Therefore, even during the time-saving game (including during the first probability variable game), it is possible to enter the game ball into the second ball entrance 640 while keeping the right-handed state, and immediately after the jackpot game to the left-handed. It is possible to reduce the trouble of changing the game method. Therefore, the game can be played more easily.

In addition, in the open state, since the surface perpendicular to the direction in which the game balls flow down can be configured as the opening of the V winning device 1065, more game balls can win in the V winning device 1065 efficiently. Therefore, the time required for the jackpot game can be shortened, and the efficiency of the game can be improved.

FIG. 709(a) is a cross-sectional view along La-La shown in FIG. 709(b). As shown in FIG. 709(a), the magnetic sensor 1065c1 having the detection port 1065a1 is fixed to the base member 1065c so that the detection port 1065a1 is inclined toward the distribution channel side of the back cover body 1065e.

With reference to FIG. 710, a description will be given of a configuration in which game balls guided to the sorting channel of the back cover body 1065e are sorted to a normal discharge channel 1065e1 and a special discharge channel 1065e2, which will be described later.

FIG. 710(a) is a rear view of the back cover 1065e showing a state in which the switching member 1065h is actuated so that game balls are distributed to the special discharge channel 1065e2. As shown in FIG. 710(a), the switching member 1065h has a locking hole 1065h1 into which the protrusion of the link member 1065i is inserted and a guiding piece 1065h2 for guiding the game ball. is rotatably supported from the rear side. Here, the channel cover 1065g is provided with an opening through which the guide piece 1065h2 can be inserted, and the guide piece 1065h2 is rotated into the distribution channel from the rear side of the channel cover 1065g. It is configured so that it can be arranged as much as possible.

As shown in FIG. 710(a), the game ball guided into the distribution channel from the detection port 1065a1 is guided to the upper surface of the guiding piece 1065h2 arranged diagonally downward to the left and guided to the special discharge channel 1065e2. be. A game ball passing through the special discharge channel 1065e2 is detected by a variable probability switch 1065e3 composed of a magnetic sensor capable of detecting the passage of the game ball provided in the special discharge channel 1065e2, and is discharged to the outside of the pachinko machine 10 as an out ball. be done.

Here, details will be described later, but in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the game ball passes through the variable probability switch 1065e3 (specific area) described above during the jackpot game, so that the game state after the jackpot game is a special symbol. Earn the right to be set in a high-probability state (special high-probability right). That is, the probability variable switch 1065e3 is formed as a specific area for obtaining a special figure high probability. In addition, the switching member 1065h serves as a sorting means (for sorting) for determining whether or not to allow the ball that has flowed into the V winning device 1065 to pass through the specific area according to the switching mode.

Thus, in the thirty-eighth embodiment, the game state set after the big win game is changed by the flow route of the game ball that has won the specific winning hole 1065a during the big win game. Interest can be improved. The time required to pass from the opening of the V winning device 1065 to the entrance of the special discharge flow path 1065e2 (opening surface closed by the guide piece 1065h2 of the switching member 1065h) is 1 second at the shortest. The switching member 1065h operates for 10 seconds (or until the end of the second round). Therefore, in the thirty-eighth embodiment, regardless of which jackpot type jackpot game is executed, by executing the game of winning the ball to the V winning device 1065 during the second round game, , It is structured so that you can definitely acquire special high-security rights.

In this way, by limiting the timing at which the switching member 1065h is operated to the period during which a specific round game is executed in a jackpot game in which a plurality of round games are executed, the ball is specified only during the round game. It suffices to execute an effect for indicating that the area can be passed through, and for other round games, it is possible to execute an effect to congratulate the winning of the jackpot.

Further, in the thirty-eighth embodiment, the round in which the switching member 1065h is operated is the round (second round) that is executed even if it is a jackpot game based on any jackpot type. By configuring in this way, even if any jackpot game (jackpot game with a different number of round games to be executed) is executed, the processing for operating the switching member 1065h can be unified. , the processing load on the main controller 110 can be reduced.

In this embodiment, the degree of difficulty for passing the ball through the specific area during the jackpot game is the same regardless of which jackpot game is executed. However, the degree of difficulty in passing the ball through the specific area may be varied according to the type of the set jackpot.

In this case, for example, when a jackpot type (advantageous jackpot type) that makes it easy for the ball to pass through the specific area is set, the switching member 1065h is operated for a long time (5 seconds) during the round game in which the switching member 1065h is operated. When an action scenario is set and a jackpot type (disadvantageous jackpot type) in which it is difficult for a ball to pass through a specific area is set, it is a round game in which the switching member 1065h is operated, and the opening action of the V winning device 1065 is executed. An operation scenario may be set to operate the switching member 1065h for a short period of time (0.5 seconds) before or immediately after the switching member 1065h is activated. With this configuration, when the advantageous jackpot type is set, the game (right-handed game) for winning the ball to the V winning device 1065 is continued during the round game in which the switching member 1065h is operated. However, when a disadvantageous jackpot type is set, a game (right Even if the hitting game) is executed, when the ball that has won the V winning device 1065 reaches the switching member 1065h, the operation of the switching member 1065h has already been completed, and the ball cannot pass through the specific area. ), it is possible to make it impossible (difficult) to obtain a special high security right.

With reference to FIG. 710(b), the case where the ball is guided to the normal discharge channel 1065e1 will be described. FIG. 710(b) shows a state in which the channel solenoid 1065k is inactive and the guide piece 1065h2 of the switching member 1065h blocks the opening of the special discharge channel 1065e2.

The game ball guided to the distribution channel from the detection port 1065a1 is guided to the upper surface of the guide piece 1065h2 of the switching member 1065h and guided to the normal discharge channel 1065e1. At the end of the normal discharge channel 1065e1, a discharge confirmation switch 1065e4 composed of a magnetic sensor capable of detecting passage of a game ball is provided. As a result, it is possible to determine whether or not all the balls that have entered the V winning device 1065 have been discharged by the sum of the discharge confirmation switch 1065e4 and the variable probability switch 1065e3.

Therefore, the second round game is executed in a state in which the balls that won before the start of the second round game (the balls that won during the first round game) are not ejected (stayed), and are not held. It is possible to suppress the problem that the ball that was held wins the variable probability switch 1065e3.

In this way, the game ball that has entered the specific winning hole 1065a in the V winning device 1065 is detected by the magnetic sensor 1065c1, and based on this, the player receives a prize ball (in this embodiment, 15 balls for each winning ball). prize balls) can be paid out. In addition, by using the game ball after being detected, it is possible to distribute whether or not it passes through the variable probability switch 1065e3, so that a lottery can be executed as to whether or not to give the variable probability game state. . Therefore, there is no need to provide a dedicated prize winning port for imparting the variable probability game state separately from the variable prize winning device 65, and the space of the game board 13 can be effectively used.

<Regarding production content in the 38th embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 711 and 712, the effects performed in the thirty-eighth embodiment will be described.

In the above-described thirty-fifth embodiment, the high probability state (high probability state) of the special symbol is set for any jackpot type of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. state), if you win a special symbol jackpot, the high probability state continues until the probability variation limit is reached. And during the high-probability short-time state (second probability variable state), it is configured so that the number of balls held by the player does not increase or decrease greatly, and the player can hit the jackpot while maintaining the balls until the probability variable limit is reached. A game can be played in a state where it is easy to win.

However, during the second probability variable state, the probability of winning the jackpot where the jackpot type is set (jackpot C (see FIG. 613 (b))) where the high probability time-saving state (first probability variable state) is set is extremely It is low (0.2% of the jackpot winning), and although it is in a state where it is easier to win a jackpot than when the normal state is set as the gaming state, it is a state in which it is difficult to set the first probability variable state. There is a problem that the player loses motivation to play when the 2-probability variable state is set.

On the other hand, in the 38th embodiment, a game (hereinafter referred to as "V winning game") is executed in which a ball passes through a specific area (V gate) during a jackpot game, and the ball wins the V gate. (Hereinafter referred to as "V winning".) Based on what has been done, unlike the 35th embodiment described above in that it is a configuration to set a high probability state (high probability state of special symbols) after the end of the jackpot game there is

Specifically, during the jackpot game in which the second probability variable state (high probability state of special symbols, low probability state of normal symbols) is set, the player does not execute the V winning game, and the jackpot game is played without causing the V winning. By ending the high probability state (high probability state of special design) is not set after the end of the jackpot game, normal state (low probability state of special design, low probability state of normal design) is set. is doing.

This normal state is a game state in which it is more difficult to win a special symbol jackpot than in the second probability variable state, but when the jackpot is won, the first probability (33.5%) is higher than the second probability variable state. It is configured to set jackpots (jackpots B, C) in which the variable probability state is set.

In this way, by providing the player with the option of quitting the game in which the second probability variable state can continue and restarting the game from the normal state, it is possible to facilitate the execution of the game according to the player's intention. be able to. For example, for a player who has little time to play the pachinko machine 10, the first probability variable state is set by immediately shifting to the normal state without continuing the second probability variable state until the probability variable limit is reached. The player is made to select a game aiming to be won (a game that does not allow V winning (non-V winning game)), and continues the V winning game for the player who desires to play the pachinko machine 10 for a long time with a small number of balls. It is possible to play a game that aims to be executed by

In the thirty-eighth embodiment, a V winning game is executed as an effect to be executed during a jackpot game in which a high probability state (high probability state of special symbols) can be set after the jackpot game ends, and a V prize is won. A V prize challenge performance is executed as a performance for suggesting to the player the game content after the jackpot game is completed and the game content after the jackpot game is completed when the V prize game is not executed. ing.

By executing this V winning challenge effect, it is possible for the player to predict the game content after the end of the big winning game and then select whether or not to perform the V winning game during the big winning game. It is possible to make it easier for the player to play the game with the game contents desired by the player.

Furthermore, in the thirty-eighth embodiment, playing either the V winning game or the non-V winning game during the jackpot game is more obvious to the player than the other game. When the situation is advantageous, the player is not directed to select from a plurality of game methods (V winning game, non-V winning game), but is set to execute a game with one of the game methods. It is configured to execute a V prize challenge effect.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent a player from making a mistake in selecting a game method during a big winning game and being awarded an excessively disadvantageous game result.

Next, among the effects executed by the pachinko machine 10 of the thirty-eighth embodiment, the contents of the V winning challenge effect will be described with reference to the drawings. Fig. 711 (a) shows the effect screen of the V winning challenge effect executed during the jackpot game in which the jackpot type (jackpot D) in which the first probability change state can be set after the jackpot game ends is set in the first probability change state. It is the figure which showed an example.

When the first variable probability state is set after the end of the jackpot game, a jackpot game (10-round jackpot game) that can win many prize balls is executed based on the lottery result of the second special symbol lottery. (See FIG. 613(c)) is a case where the game situation in which winning can be expected is likely to be set after the end of the jackpot game, so as shown in FIG. The V prize challenge performance is executed in the performance mode.

Specifically, in the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81, the hero 801 issues a comment "Right shot and aim for V!" is displayed, and the guidance display mode "V Win and continue RUSH!" is displayed in the first display area HR1, and furthermore, when executing the V winning game, the player is directed to the position (the position where the V winning device 1065 is arranged) to be aimed at by the player. As a display form for visual display, an image display form in which the peripheral portion of the area of the game board 13 where the V winning device 1065 is arranged is displayed in a schematic enlarged manner is displayed in the fourth game information display area Dm7. A presentation mode is executed.

The effect screen shown in FIG. 711(a) does not display the effect mode for allowing the player to select the V winning game or the non-V winning game, but displays the effect mode for prompting the player to play the V winning game. there is In other words, in the current jackpot game, the player is informed that the execution of the V winning game is a jackpot game that is clearly more advantageous to the player than the case of not executing the V winning game (executing the non-V winning game). It can be notified in an easy-to-understand manner. In addition, by displaying the position of the V winning device 1065, it is possible to facilitate the player to execute the V winning game.

In addition, in FIG. 711(a), a game method (V winning game) that is clearly advantageous to the player and a privilege given when the advantageous gaming method (V winning game) is executed are played. To prompt the player to select one of a plurality of game methods (V winning game, non-V winning game) that can be executed during the jackpot game, although a performance screen that can be notified to the player is displayed. is not limited to this. (Game contents disadvantageous to the player) may be configured to be notified to the player during the jackpot game. To enable a player to easily grasp that a game should not be played by a notified game method even in such a case, and to facilitate execution of a game during a jackpot game by an appropriate game method. be able to.

Next, with reference to FIG. 711 (b), it is a jackpot won during the second probability variation state, and the remaining number of probability variation limit times (remaining probability variation limit number) is a predetermined number or more (for example, 15 times) The content of the V winning challenge effect that is executed in certain cases will be described.

Figure 711 (b) is a jackpot won during the second probability variation state, and the remaining number of probability variation limit times (remaining probability variation limit number) is a predetermined number of times or more (for example, 15 times), jackpot game It is a diagram showing an example of the effect screen of the V winning prize challenge effect executed during the big win game in which the big win types (jackpots A, B) that can set the second probability variable state after the end are set.

During the second variable probability state, as in the thirty-fifth embodiment described above, it is a gaming state in which the first special symbol lottery is mainly executed, and 99.8% of the big hits in the first special symbol lottery are the big hits. After the end of the game, the jackpot games (jackets A, B) in which the second variable probability state can be set are executed, and the remaining 0.2% are executed in the jackpot game (jackpot C) in which the first variable probability state can be set after the jackpot game is finished. It is configured so that

In other words, when the second variable probability state is set, the game in which the second variable probability state is continuously set is performed until the probability variable limit is reached, and the game is executed at about 0.2% of the time when the jackpot is won. A game is played to make players expect that a big win game (big win C) will be executed. It should be noted that during the second variable probability state, as in the first game state described above, a game for executing the first special symbol lottery is performed by a right-handed game, and it is configured as a game state in which the number of balls released is small.

Therefore, in the second variable probability state, when the jackpot (jackets A, B) for which the second variable probability state is set after the end of the jackpot game is won, until the variable probability limit is reached by executing the V winning game, By executing a game mainly in the second probability variable state or by executing a non-V winning game, the normal state is quickly set, and a game aiming at setting the first probability variable state with a jackpot in the normal state is performed. It is possible for the player to select whether to execute.

In the first display area HR1, the probability of winning the jackpot C (Fig. 613(b)) is extremely low when V is won, but the jackpot C is won without greatly reducing the number of balls held in a state where it is easy to win the jackpot. If you do not win the V prize, it will be difficult to win the jackpot, but if you win, it will be a "hit-blow high chance mode" where the first probability variation is easy to set. Then, in the main display area Dm, the hero 801 guides the player by saying, "If you hit right, you win V! If you stop the launch, you won't win V!"

FIG. 712 is an example of the effect screen of the V winning prize challenge in the second probability variation state when the probability variation limit remaining number of times is two. The difference from the case where the probability variation limit remaining number of times is 15 is that even if the jackpot C (Fig. 613 (b)) is won in the second probability variation state, the probability variation limit is reached before reaching the time saving limit. , there is a possibility that the number of prize balls that the player can obtain is less than when the probability variable limit remaining number is 15 times. Therefore, in the first display area HR1, if you win a V prize, you can aim for a big win without greatly reducing the number of balls you have, but it is highly likely that the number of prize balls that you can win is small. Low risk low return” is displayed. On the other hand, if the V prize is not won, the probability variation limit is canceled by setting the special symbol low probability state (special symbol low probability state), and the next time the first probability variation state is set. In the first display area HR1, it is difficult to win a jackpot, but if a jackpot is won, the player is allowed to win a V prize. It is displayed as "V non-winning, high risk, high return", which suggests that there is a high possibility of winning a large amount of prize balls compared to .

Thus, in the thirty-eighth embodiment, by varying the production mode of the V winning challenge executed during the jackpot game according to the game state and the probability variable limit remaining number set after the jackpot game ends, the player's It becomes possible to select a favorite game state, and the interest in the game can be improved.

In addition, when the third symbol variation for indicating the result of the special symbol lottery has already been executed (when the condition for executing the new special symbol variation is not satisfied), the ball enters the start winning opening. To store (reserve) the right to execute a special symbol lottery for a predetermined number of times (for example, four times) and to show the result of the special symbol lottery that is being executed when a new ball enters the ball when the ball is hit. A gaming machine having a specification (special figure reservation storage specification) capable of starting a special symbol variation for indicating the result of a special symbol lottery based on the stored execution right when the third symbol variation of is completed , the configuration of the thirty-eighth embodiment may be applied.

In this case, the effect mode of the V prize challenge effect executed based on winning the jackpot in which the second probability variable state is set during the second probability variable state in the situation where the probability variable limit remaining number is small (for example, 3 times) , may be configured to be determined based on the prefetch result for the execution right that is reserved and stored, for example, as the prefetch result of the special symbol lottery result that the execution right that is reserved and stored is When there is an execution right to win a jackpot in which a first probability variable state is set in the rights, a performance is executed to inform the player that it is advantageous not to win a V prize in the V prize challenge performance. By doing so, the reliability of the guidance content in the V prize challenge presentation is increased, and the presentation effect can be enhanced.

In other words, even if the ball wins V during the jackpot game and the second probability variation state is set, the probability variation limit remaining number of times is two, and the first probability variation state continues only two times. On the other hand, without making V prizes, by temporarily shifting to the normal state, the probability variable limit number of times is cleared, and by making V prizes in the V prize challenge production based on the first probability variable jackpot winning of the stored execution right, By newly setting the probability variation limit number of times, it is possible to continue the first probability variation state 10 times. In such a case, the effect mode of the V prize challenge effect may be determined so that a game advantageous to the player is executed.

In the 35th embodiment described above, only when the jackpot where the 1st probability variable state is set in the 2nd probability variable state is won, the jackpot election is notified. However, in the 38th embodiment, the second It is configured to notify the winning of the jackpot even when winning the jackpot in which the variable probability state is set. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 711(a), the V prize challenge effect is executed when the second round of the jackpot game is being executed regardless of the jackpot type.

In this way, the player who wants to continue the second variable probability state does not notice that the jackpot A or B has been won by adopting a configuration for notifying the big win in which the second variable probability state is set, and in the V prize challenge performance. It is possible to prevent a player's desire to play from being lowered due to unintentional setting of normal without being able to win a V prize.

In addition, for the player who has given up on the second variable state, winning the jackpot A or B gives the opportunity to set the normal, so not only the jackpot C winning but also the jackpot A or B winning It is possible to make the player feel happy.

In addition, in the 38th embodiment, in the V prize challenge effect when the second probability variable jackpot is won during the second probability variable state, the player can select whether or not to win the V prize, but in this case Since there is a risk that the player may get lost as to which one is more advantageous, the display mode in the V winning challenge effect is set based on the game state set after the end of the jackpot game, for example, when the first probability variable state is set. , in the V prize challenge effect, "right hitting" is notified, and when the second probability variable state is set, "left hitting" or "starting stop" may be notified. By configuring in this way, the player can play the game without hesitation.

In addition, the enlargement rate of the display mode commonly displayed in the V winning challenge effect (for example, the display mode of "right-handed" displayed in the guide display area Dm1) is set to be more advantageous when V winning than when V winning is not performed. For example, as shown in the effect screen shown in FIG. 711(a), it is clearly more advantageous for the player to win a V prize than to not win a V prize. In this case, the expansion rate is set to 120% to emphasize the right-handed game, and as shown in FIG. In this case, the expansion rate may be set to 50% so that the right-handed game is weakly guided.

By configuring in this way, the guide display area Dm1 serves as a constant index indicating a game method for a game situation that changes intricately based on the remaining number of times of each limit after the end of the jackpot game and the set jackpot type. Since the display mode displayed in .

In the above-described example, an example of changing the magnification of the display mode of "right-handed" displayed in the guide display area Dm1 was shown, but the present invention is not limited to this. You can let

An example of the effect screen displayed in the V winning challenge effect in the thirty-eighth embodiment has been described above with reference to FIGS. The display mode of the V prize challenge effect screen displayed when the first variable probability jackpot is won in the first variable probability state may be varied according to the variable probability limit remaining number of times. For example, the background of the V prize challenge effect screen may be changed depending on whether the variable probability limit remaining number of times is 10 times or more and when it is 10 times or less. By configuring in this way, it is possible to provide the player with the pleasure of predicting the probability variable limit remaining number of times even in the V prize challenge presentation.

Also, in the first variable state, if you win the first variable jackpot that reaches the short time limit, the first variable state will not continue even if you win the V prize (due to reaching the short time limit, the low probability state of normal symbols (non-short time state) is set), display the production screen shown in FIG. may be configured to allow the player to select .

Also, even if the first variable probability jackpot is won during the second variable probability state, when the effect screen shown in FIG. 711 (b) is displayed, the first variable probability state is set after the player finishes the jackpot game. There is a risk of selecting a blow high chance mode (low probability non-time saving state set by V non-winning) that is more disadvantageous to the player than the first variable probability state without noticing. Then, when the player selects a non-V winning game, a low-probability short-time state (short-time state) is set instead of a low-probable non-short-time state (normal state) desired by the player. In other words, the setting of a game state different from the game state expected by the player may reduce the motivation of the player who thinks that he or she has made a wrong selection.

Therefore, when the first variable probability jackpot is won in the second variable probability state, the effect screen shown in FIG. 711(a) may be displayed. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it easier for the player to understand that the first probability variable state is set after the jackpot game ends, and suppress the occurrence of the above-described situation that lowers the player's willingness to play. be able to.

Also, if you win a jackpot that reaches the probability limit during the first variable state or the second variable state, the high probability state of the special symbol is not set even if you win the V (low probability state due to reaching the variable limit) is set), there is a risk that the execution of the V winning challenge effect may lead the player to misunderstand that a high probability state of the special symbol is set due to the V winning.

Therefore, when a jackpot that reaches the variable probability limit is won, the set game state (normal state or time saving state) may be notified without executing the V prize challenge effect. By configuring in this way, correct information can be conveyed to the player.

In addition, when a jackpot is won in a low-probability short-time state (normal state), the performance screen displayed in the V prize challenge performance may be changed according to the game state that can be set after the jackpot game is finished. Specifically, when the first probability variable state can be set after the end of the jackpot game, the player is informed that the first probability variable state is set by winning V as shown in FIG. 711 (a). On the other hand, an effect is executed to encourage the player to win the V prize. On the other hand, when the second variable probability state can be set, by displaying the effect screen of FIG. 711 (b), the player can select whether to set the second variable probability state or set the normal state can. By configuring in this way, it becomes possible for the player to select a desired game state in a state in which the first variable probability state cannot be set, and the interest in the game can be improved.

In addition, when a jackpot is won in a low-probability time-saving state (time-saving state), the performance screen displayed in the V winning challenge performance may be changed according to the remaining number of time-saving limits. For example, if you win a jackpot that does not reach the short time limit, you will be notified that the first probability variable state is set by V winning as shown in FIG. may display the effect screen shown in FIG. 711(b) and allow the player to select whether to set the second probability variable state or set the normal state. By configuring in this way, it becomes possible for the player to select a desired game state in a state in which the first variable probability state cannot be set, and the interest in the game can be improved.

<Regarding the electrical configuration in the thirty-eighth embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIG. 713, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 of the thirty-eighth embodiment will be described. In the thirty-eighth embodiment, unlike the above-described thirty-fifth embodiment, a variable probability setting flag 203ca, a variable probability passage counter 203cb, a prize number counter 203cc, an operation counter 203cd, a notification counter 203ce, a remaining ball timer flag 203cf, and a remaining ball timer 203cg. , a variable probability effective flag 203ch, a variable probability effective timer 203ci, and a discharge number counter 203cj are added. Other than that, they are the same, and the same reference numerals are given to the same contents, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The variable probability setting flag 203ca is a flag indicating whether or not it is possible to shift to a high probability state of a special symbol as a game state after the jackpot game ends. In the pachinko machine 10, as a condition for setting a high-probability state of special symbols as a game state after the end of the jackpot game, a condition that is established when the variable probability switch 1065e3 (specific area) in the V winning device 1065 is passed during the jackpot game. is stipulated. Therefore, when the ball passes through the variable probability switch 1065e3 (specific area) within the valid period (within the specific round game period), the variable probability setting flag 203ca is set to ON (see S3262 in FIG. 718). Then, at the end of the jackpot game (when the ending period has elapsed), in the probability variation limit update process 4 (see S2851 in FIG. 716), the setting status is referred to (S2951 in FIG. 716), and it is determined that it is set to ON. (S2951 in FIG. 716: Yes), it is set to OFF (see S2952 in FIG. 716). The variable probability setting flag 203ca is backed up when the power is turned off, and is set to the state immediately before the power is turned off when the power is restored (when the power is turned on). Also, it is set to off in the initialized state.

It should be noted that, when the probability variation setting flag 203ca is set to ON when the power is turned on, it is determined whether the probability variation switch 1065e3 has passed before the power is turned off, and if it can be determined that the probability variation setting flag 203ca may be formally set to ON for recovery. In this case, whether the variable probability switch 1065e3 is passed before the power is turned off can be determined by whether the variable probability passage counter 203cb, which will be described later, is a value greater than zero. By configuring in this way, in a state where the power is turned off, it is possible to reduce the damage on the amusement center side by determining fraud such as rewriting the probability variable setting flag 203ca to ON and turning on the power again. can.

The variable probability passage counter 203cb is a counter for counting the number of balls that have passed through the variable probability switch 1065e3 (see FIG. 710) in one round (second round in this embodiment) during the jackpot game. It should be noted that it is possible to determine whether or not all game balls that have won the specific winning opening 1065a have been discharged from the sum of the probability variable passage counter 203cb and the discharge number counter 203cj, which will be described later. This probability variation passing counter 203cb is updated by adding one by one when passing the probability variation switch 1065e3 (see S3261 in FIG. 718). In addition, after executing the process of whether or not the number of winning balls in the V winning device 1065 matches the number of ejected balls, the initial value is reset to "0" (see S3281 in FIG. 719). It should be noted that this probability variable passage counter 203cb is backed up when the power is turned off. Also, it is set to 0 in the initialized state.

The winning number counter 203cc is a counter for counting the number of balls that have won in the specific winning opening 1065a of the V winning device 1065 in one round in the jackpot game. Specifically, when it is detected that the ball has passed through the detection switch 1065c1 provided in the V winning device 1065, 1 is added and updated (see S3253 in FIG. 718). On the other hand, when one round ends, the number of winning prizes in the V winning device 1065 (the value of the winning number counter 203cc) and the discharged number (the total value of the discharge number counter 203cj and the probability variable passage counter 203cb) are the same. After it is determined whether they match, the initial value is reset to "0". The value of the winning number counter 203cc is backed up when the power is turned off. Also, it is set to 0 in the initialized state.

The operation counter 203cd is a counter for measuring (counting) the time during which the flow path solenoid (probability variable solenoid) 1065k is set to ON (excitation). In this pachinko machine 10, the channel solenoid 1065k is set to ON for 5 seconds based on the start of the second round for all jackpots. A counter value corresponding to 5 seconds is set in the operation counter 203cd. On the other hand, in the winning process executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, the number is decremented by one and updated. Further, based on the determination that the value of the operation counter 203cd is 0, the flow path solenoid 1065k is turned off. The operation counter 203cd is backed up when the power is turned off, and is set to 0 as an initial value in the initialized state. Thus, by setting the operation counter 203cd and controlling the flow path solenoid 1065k, it becomes possible to control the passage of the ball to the variable probability switch 1065e3 corresponding to the round game.

It should be noted that, unlike the present 38th embodiment, in the case of enabling execution of an advantageous jackpot game in which the ball easily passes through the specific area (probability variation switch 1065e3) during the jackpot game and a disadvantageous jackpot game in which it is difficult to pass, For example, for an advantageous jackpot game, the same value as in the 38th embodiment is set in the action counter 203cd, and for a disadvantageous jackpot game, the action counter 203cd is set to a value of 0.5 seconds. should be configured to

By configuring in this way, when a disadvantageous jackpot game is executed, the flow path solenoid 1064k is turned on only for 0.5 seconds after the target round number of round games (second round round game) is started. It will be set to ON. Therefore, when the ball that has won the V winning device 1065 in the round game of the second round reaches the switching member 1065h, the flow path solenoid 1064k is set to OFF, and the ball is passed through the variable probability switch 1065e3 (specific area). can be made difficult.

The notification counter 203ce is a counter for determining the timing of outputting a notification effect for attracting the player's attention. In this embodiment, the notification counter 203ce corresponding to 1 second is set at the end timing of the first round (8 seconds have passed since 8 balls have been won in the V winning device 1065). This notification counter 203ce is decremented by one and updated by the processing of S3202 of the notification processing of main controller 110 (see FIG. 717). A notification command to be output to the sound lamp control device 113 is set based on the notification counter 203ce reaching 0. FIG. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives this command, it outputs a voice (for example, "Pay attention to the liquid crystal!") to prompt the player to gaze at the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. is executed.

By configuring in this way, before the start of the second round in which the flow path solenoid 1065k is operated, for example, a voice "Look at the liquid crystal" is output (announcement effect is executed), so that the player can gazes at the third pattern display device 81 corresponding to the liquid crystal. Here, as shown in FIGS. 711 and 712, in the second round of the jackpot game, using the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, an effect for guiding the game method of the second round is executed. be. During the round game of the second round, the channel solenoid 1065k is operated, so the game is different from other round games (it is determined whether or not the ball is allowed to pass through the specific area, and the game is based on the determined content). need to run.

Here, if the game method to be executed during the round game is notified after the round game of the second round is started, for example, the game executed during the round game of the second round A ball fired immediately after the start of the second round (until the content of the game guidance is understood) to the player who has selected a game that does not allow the ball to pass through the specific area (probability variable switch 1065e3) based on the content of the guidance. has passed through a specific area.

On the other hand, in the thirty-eighth embodiment, when the first round ends (before the start of the second round), the above-described notification effect can be executed, so the above-described problem can be solved. can be done.

In addition, in this embodiment, by notifying to show the third pattern display device 81, it is notified that the round game of the second round (a round game that allows the ball to pass through the specific area) will be executed. Although it is constructed so as to make the player understand in advance, it is not limited to this, and may be constructed so as to execute the effect of the V prize challenge (see FIG. 711) in accordance with the execution timing of the above-described notification effect. That is, the game method (ball It may be configured so that the player can select whether or not to shoot.

With this configuration, a player who has selected a game method that does not allow the ball to pass through the specific area selects the game method when the round game that allows the ball to pass through the specific area is started. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which a ball shot by then passes through a specific area during a round game in which the ball can be passed through the specific area. Furthermore, the player who selects the game method of passing the ball through the specific area can continue to execute the right-handed game. Therefore, before the start of the round game that allows the ball to pass through the specific area, the notification effect for temporarily stopping the shooting of the ball is executed for all players. A jackpot game with improved time efficiency can be executed.

The remaining ball timer flag 203cf is a flag indicating that the opening/closing door 1065f1 of the V winning device 1065 is closed in the first round, making it possible to execute an abnormality process described later. By setting the remaining ball timer flag 203cf to ON, the remaining ball timer 203cg, which will be described later, is incremented by one and updated. The remaining ball timer 203cg is a counter for determining the time after the opening/closing door 1065f1 is closed, and is for determining whether the time required for the game balls in the V winning device 1065 to be discharged has passed. is a counter of

The remaining ball timer 203cg is the time required for the winning game ball to be discharged to the V winning device 1065 when the opening/closing door 1065f1 of the V winning device 1065 is closed after one preset round is completed. is a counter for determining whether or not has elapsed. In this embodiment, the time required for the winning ball to be discharged from the V winning device 1065 is 2 seconds. is set. When the remaining ball timer 203cg reaches the upper limit value (three seconds in this control example), it is determined whether the number of winning prizes to the V winning device 1065 and the number of discharged prizes match ( See S3277 in FIG. 719). If they do not match, an error command is set to notify you. Therefore, it is possible to notify early that the V winning device 1065 is filled with balls. Therefore, it is possible to suppress fraudulent acts such as illegally leaving the ball in the V winning device 1065, giving an impact or the like at the start timing of the second round, and making the game ball reach the switching member 1065h earlier than it actually is. . Since this remaining ball timer 203cg is set to a time shorter than the interval time until the start of the next round, the next round game is executed and a new game is played before the remaining ball timer 203cg reaches the upper limit value. No winning will occur.

In addition, if the winning number and the discharge number do not match, a dedicated flag is set to ON, and if the flag is ON, the probability variation setting even if the ball passes through the probability variation switch 1065e3 (specific area) The configuration may be such that the flag 203ca is not set to ON. By configuring in this way, it is possible to suppress that the probability variable gaming state is incorrectly given.

Probability variation effective flag 203ch is a flag for determining whether or not to validate the passage when the game ball passes through the probability variation switch 1065e3 after the flow path solenoid 1065k is set to be off. When this variable probability effective flag 203ch is set to ON, based on the fact that the flow path solenoid 1065k is ON, it is necessary for the game ball that finally entered the specific winning opening 1065a to pass through the variable probability switch 1065e3. time has not elapsed. That is, it indicates that it is a period in which it is possible for the game ball to pass through the variable probability switch 1065e3.

The variable probability valid timer 203ci is a counter for counting the time after the variable probability valid flag 203ch described above is set to ON. After the flow path solenoid 1065k is turned off by this variable probability valid timer 203ci, it is possible to determine the period required to normally pass through the variable probability switch 1065e3. In this embodiment, it takes 1 second for the game ball entering the specific winning hole 1065a to pass through the variable probability switch 1065e3. The upper limit of the variable probability valid timer 203ci is set to a counter value corresponding to 1.2 seconds, and even if it passes through the variable probability switch 1065e3 after that, it is determined as illegal and not determined as passing.

As a result, the switching member 1065h is illegally changed to pass the ball through the variable probability switch 1065e3, or the game ball is pushed up with a piano wire or the like from below the variable probability switch 1065e3 to pass the game ball through the variable probability switch 1065e3, or the electric wave It is possible to suppress damage caused by fraud such as misdetection of passing by the magnetic sensor.

The discharge number counter 203cj is a counter for counting the number of game balls that have passed the discharge confirmation switch 1065e4 (see FIG. 710) in one round. This discharge number counter 203cj is reset to 0, which is the initial value, after the number of winning balls and the discharge number of the V winning device 1065 are determined (S3281 in FIG. 719).

<Regarding control processing executed by main controller 110 in the thirty-eighth embodiment>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 in the thirty-eighth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 714 to 719. FIG. In this embodiment, in place of the jackpot control processing (see FIG. 656), the jackpot control processing 4 (see S2454 in FIG. 714) is replaced with the jackpot operation setting processing (see FIG. 657) in place of the 35th embodiment described above. The jackpot operation setting process 4 (see S2651 in Figure 715), the probability variable limit update process (see Figure 659) instead of executing the probability variable limit update process 4 (see S2851 in Figure 716), and as a new process, notification The difference is that a process (see S2656 in FIG. 717), a winning process (see S2657 in FIG. 718), and an abnormality process (see S2658 in FIG. 719) are added, and other points are the same. The same parts are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 714, the jackpot control process 4 (S2454) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 in the thirty-eighth embodiment will be described. FIG. 714 is a flow chart showing the detailed contents of the jackpot control process 4 (S2454).

In the jackpot control process 4 (S2454), first, the processes of S2601 to S2604 described above are executed. Then, in the processing of S2604, when it is determined that it is time to start a new round (S2604: Yes), the jackpot operation setting processing 4 is executed (S2651), and this processing ends.

Here, with reference to FIG. 715, the jackpot operation setting process 4 (S2651), which is one process in the jackpot control process 4 (S2454) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 in the thirty-eighth embodiment, will be described. do. FIG. 715 is a flow chart showing the contents of the jackpot operation setting process 4 (S2651).

In the jackpot operation setting process 4 (S2651), first, the opening scenario corresponding to the number of rounds of the jackpot to be started is read from the set opening scenario (S2701). Next, the opening operation of the flow path solenoid (probability variable solenoid) 1065k is set based on the data read in S2701 (S2751). The opening operation of the opening/closing door 1065f1 of the V winning device 1065 is set by the data read in the process of S2701. In addition, in the process of S2751, the operation of the channel solenoid 1065k and the operation of the open/close door 1065f1 are set for each round. When the process of S2751 is finished, next, the opening operation of the flow path solenoid (probability variable solenoid) 1065k is set based on the data read in S2751 (S2752). The opening operation of the open/close door 1065f1 of the V winning device 1065 is set by the data read in the process of S2752. After that, in the process of S2752, the operation of the channel solenoid 1065k and the operation of the open/close door 1065f1 are set for each round.

Next, the value of the winning number counter 203cc is reset to 0 (S2753), a round number command is set (S2754), and this process is terminated. In this embodiment, a command indicating that a new round has started is set as the number-of-rounds command. Each time a round number command is received on the audio lamp control device 113 side, the current round number can be grasped by adding the round number command. This has the effect of reducing the amount of command data output from main controller 110 . The content set as the round number command is not limited to this, and for example, a command including round number information of a newly started round may be set. By doing so, even if a problem occurs in the data related to the number of rounds on the sound lamp control device 113 side (the stored data is erased due to a power failure or the like), the latest data is updated each time a new round is started. round information can be received, the player does not feel uncomfortable.

In this way, each operation of the V winning device 1065 is set at the start of each round, so that even if an unexpected power failure occurs during the big win game, the big win game ends in the middle. Defects can be suppressed.

Returning to FIG. 714, the description continues. In the processing of S2604, if it is determined that it is not the start timing of a new round (S2604: No), then it is determined whether it is the operation timing of the variable probability solenoid 1065k (S2652). When it is determined that it is time to operate the variable probability solenoid 1065k (S2652: Yes), the variable probability solenoid 1065k is set to ON (S2653), and the process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S2652, if it is determined that it is not the timing of the opening operation of the variable probability solenoid 1065k (S2652: No), it is determined whether it is the timing to start the ending effect (S2608). The start timing of the ending effect is the start timing of the ending effect when the final round is completed, the opening/closing door 1065f1 is closed, and the waiting time (three seconds in this embodiment), which is the time to throw the ball, has elapsed. Determined as When it is determined that it is time to start the ending effect (S2608: Yes), the variable probability solenoid 1065k is set to OFF (S2654), and the process ends. Although not shown, in this embodiment, when one game ball passes through the variable probability switch 1065e3, the variable probability solenoid 1065k is set to OFF. However, in consideration of the case where the jackpot game ends without the game ball passing through the variable probability switch 1065e3, the variable probability solenoid 1065k is set to OFF just in case in the processing of S2654. In the present embodiment, the timing of starting the ending effect is after the waiting time has passed (three seconds in this embodiment) after the game of the final round ends (the open/close door 1065f1 is closed), but the game of the final round ends. You may perform ending production immediately after doing. In this case, the abnormality process for the winning ball in the V winning device 1065 may be executed during the ending period.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S2608 that it is not the start timing of the ending period (S2608: No), it is determined whether it is the end timing of the ending period (S2610). When it is determined that it is the ending timing of the ending period (S2610: Yes), the jackpot ending process 4 (S2655) is executed, and this process ends.

Here, with reference to FIG. 716, probability variation limit update process 4 (S2851), which is one process in jackpot end process 4 (S2655) executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 in the thirty-eighth embodiment, will be described. do. FIG. 716 is a flow chart showing the details of the variable probability limit update process 4 (S2851). The probability variable limit update process 4 (S2851) of the present embodiment is different from the probability variable limit update process (see S2801 in FIG. 659) in the above-described thirty-fifth embodiment. When the setting flag 203ca is set to ON, since the high probability state of the special symbol is set after the end of the jackpot game, from the process of setting the high probability state of the special symbol based on the jackpot type, the variable probability setting flag 203ca It is different in that it determines whether is set to ON and changes the processing to set the high probability state of the special symbol. Since other processing is the same, the same reference numerals are given and detailed description thereof is omitted.

In the probability variation limit update process 4 (S2851), first, it is determined whether the probability variation setting flag 203ca is set to ON (S2951). When it is determined that the variable probability setting flag 203ca is ON (S2951: Yes), the processing of S2903 to S2908 described above is executed. Then, after executing the processing of S2905 or S2908, next, the variable probability setting flag 203ca is set to OFF (S2952), and this processing is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of S2951, when it is determined that the variable probability setting flag 203ca is not ON (S2951: No), the process proceeds to S2910 described above.

Returning to FIG. 714, the description continues. In the process of S2610, if it is determined that it is not the end timing of the ending period (S2610: No), the notification process is executed (S2656). Details of the notification process (S2656) will now be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 717 is a flow chart showing the contents of this notification process (S2656).

In the notification process (S2656), first, it is determined whether or not the value of the notification counter 203ce is greater than 0 (S3201). When it is determined that the value of the notification counter 203ce is 0 (S3201: No), it is determined whether it is the end timing of the first round (the end timing of the round immediately before the V round) (S3205). The end timing of the first round is determined by detecting that 8 balls have been won in the first round or by determining that 8 seconds have passed. When it is determined that it is time to end the first round (S3205: Yes), a counter value corresponding to 2 seconds is set in the notification counter 203ce (S3206), and this process ends. On the other hand, in the processing of S3205, if it is determined that it is not the end timing of the first round (S3205: No), this processing ends. Here, by setting a 2-second counter in S3205, the notification counter 203ce becomes 0 during the interval time of 3 seconds, which is the ball-scoring time after the end of one round, and the voice prompting to look at the liquid crystal is heard. output. Therefore, the channel solenoid 1065k operates in the second round, but the player's attention is drawn to the liquid crystal from the interval time after the end of the first round. It is possible to prevent the player from identifying the jackpot type. Therefore, the player can play the game expecting that the high probability state of the special symbol will be awarded until the end of the jackpot game.

In the present embodiment, by providing the notification counter 203ce, an effect is performed to draw attention to the liquid crystal over the second round from one second before the end of the interval time. May run continuously.

On the other hand, in the process of S3201, when it is determined that the value of the notification counter 203ce is greater than 0 (S3201: Yes), the value of the notification counter 203ce is updated by -1 (S3202). Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the updated notification counter 203ce is 0 (S3203), and if it is determined that the value of the notification counter 203ce is 0 (S3203: Yes), the notification command is set. (S3204). After that, this process ends. By this notification command, the audio lamp control device 113 executes the setting of the audio output of "look at the liquid crystal".

In the process of S3203, when it is determined that the value of the notification counter 203ce is not 0 (S3203: No), the process of S3204 is skipped and the process ends.

Returning to FIG. 714, the description continues. After the notification process (see S2656 in FIG. 717) is executed, next, the winning process is executed (S2657). Here, with reference to FIG. 718, this winning process (S2657) will be described in detail. FIG. 718 is a flow chart showing the contents of this winning process (S2657).

In the winning process (S2657), first, it is determined whether or not it is the round valid period (S3251). The round valid period is the period during which the round game is set, that is, the period from the open state of the opening/closing door 1065f1 to the end of the interval period (3 seconds). If it is determined that it is outside the round valid period (S3251: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that it is within the round valid period (S3251: Yes), it is determined whether the detection switch 1065c1 of the specific winning opening 1065a has been passed (S3252). When it is determined that the detection switch 1065c1 of the specific winning port 1065a has passed (S3252: Yes), the winning number counter 203cc is updated by adding 1 (S3253), and the winning number indicating the updated value of the winning number counter 203cc. Set the count command. After that, the process of S3254 is executed. On the other hand, if it is determined that the detection switch 1065c1 has not been passed (S3252: No), the process of S3254 is executed.

In the processing of S3254, it is determined whether or not the value of the winning number counter 203cc is 10 or more (S3254). When it is determined that the value of the winning number counter 203cc is 10 or more (S3254: Yes), the opening/closing door 1065f1 of the specific winning opening 1065a is set to be closed (S3256). After that, the remaining ball timer flag 203cf is set to ON (S3257). After that, the process of S3258 is executed. By setting the remaining ball timer flag 203cf to ON, it can be determined that the ball is being swept after the opening/closing door 1065f1 is closed.

On the other hand, in the process of S3254, if it is determined that the value of the winning number counter 203cc is less than 10 (S3254: No), it is determined whether the round time (30 seconds in this embodiment) has elapsed (S3255). . When it is determined that the round time has passed (S3255: Yes), the process of S3256 is executed. On the other hand, when it is determined that the round time has not elapsed (S3255: No), the process of S3258 is executed.

In the process of S3258, it is determined whether the value of the operation counter 203cd is greater than 0 (S3258). When it is determined that the value of the operation counter 203cd is greater than 0 (S3258: Yes), the value of the operation counter 203cd is decremented by 1 and updated (S3259). It is determined whether the game ball has passed through the variable probability switch 1065e3 (S3260). When it is determined that the game ball has passed through the variable probability switch 1065e3 (S3260: Yes), the value of the variable probability passage counter 203cb is updated by adding 1 (S3261). The variable probability setting flag 203ca is set to ON (S3262). After that, the process of S3263 is executed. On the other hand, in the process of S3260, when it is determined that the game ball has not passed through the variable probability switch 1065e3 (S3260: No), the process of S3263 is executed. In the process of S3263, it is determined whether the operation counter 203cd is 0 (S3263). When it is determined that the value of the operation counter 203cd is 0 (S3263: Yes), the flow path solenoid 1065k is set to OFF (S3264), the probability variable effective flag 203ch is set to ON (S3265), and this processing exit. Here, when the probability variation effective flag 203ch is set to ON, even after the switching member 1065h is switched, if the game balls remaining in the special discharge flow path 1065e2 pass the probability variation switch 1065e3, special It can be controlled so that the high probability state of the pattern is set. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S3263 that the value of the operation counter 203cd is not 0 (S3263: No), the processing of S3264 and S3265 is skipped and this processing ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S3258, when it is determined that the operation counter 203cd is 0 (S3258: No), it is determined whether the variable probability effective flag 203ch is ON (S3266). When the variable probability effective flag 203ch is off (S3266: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the variable probability effective flag 203ch is ON (S3266: Yes), the variable probability effective timer 203ci is updated by adding 1 (S3267). It is determined whether the value of the variable probability valid timer 203ci is the upper limit (1.2 s in this embodiment) (S3268). When it is determined that the probability variable effective timer 203ci is the upper limit value (S3268: Yes), the probability variable effective flag 203ch is set to OFF (S3269), and the probability variable effective timer 203ci is reset to the initial value 0 (S3270 ), the process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S3268, when it is determined that the variable probability effective timer 203ci is not the upper limit value (S3268: No), the process of S3260 is executed.

Thereby, if the variable probability effective timer 203ci is not the upper limit value, it is determined whether the game ball has passed through the variable probability switch 1065e3, so it is possible to set the high probability state of the special symbol in consideration of the time of the ball stroke. In addition, since there is an upper limit to the time that is determined to be valid, it is possible to prevent the high probability state of the special symbol from being imparted by illegally passing the game ball through the variable probability switch 1065e3.

Returning to FIG. 714, the description continues. When the winning process (S2657) is executed, an abnormality process is executed (S2658). After that, this process ends. Details of this abnormality processing (S2658) will now be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 719 is a flow chart showing the contents of this abnormality processing (S2658). In the abnormality process (S2658), a process of monitoring whether or not the variable probability switch 1065e3 is illegally passed is executed.

In the abnormality process (S2658), first, it is determined whether or not it is the round effective period (S3271). If it is outside the round valid period (S3271: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that it is within the round effective period (S3271: Yes), it is determined whether the game ball has passed through the discharge confirmation switch 1065e4 (S3272). When it is determined that the game ball has passed through the ejection confirmation switch 1065e4 (S3272: Yes), the value of the ejection number counter 203cj is updated by adding 1 (S3273). After that, the process of S3274 is executed. On the other hand, when it is determined that the game ball has not passed through the ejection confirmation switch 1065e4 (S3272: No), the process of S3274 is executed.

In the processing of S3274, it is determined whether or not the remaining ball timer flag 203cf is on (S3274). If it is determined that the remaining ball timer flag 203cf is off (S3274: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the remaining ball timer flag 203cf is ON (S3274: Yes), it is during the ball sweeping time period, so the remaining ball timer 203cg is updated by adding 1 (S3275). The remaining ball timer 203cg determines whether the upper limit (three seconds in this embodiment) has passed (S3276). If it is determined that it is not the upper limit value (S3276: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined to be the upper limit value (S3276: Yes), the number of discharges (the total value of the variable probability passing counter 203cb and the discharge number counter 203cj) and the winning number (the value of the winning number counter 203cc) match. (S3277).

If it is determined that they match (S3277: Yes), the process of S3279 is executed. On the other hand, if it is determined that they do not match (S3277: No), an error command is set (S3278). After that, the process of S3279 is executed. When the error command is received by the audio lamp control device 113, an error is displayed (for example, characters indicating a winning number mismatch error are displayed), and an error signal is output to the hall computer. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the illegality of leaving the game ball illegally in the V winning device 1065 and passing the game ball through the variable probability switch 1065e3 even if it is a jackpot J6.

In the process of S3279, the remaining ball timer flag 203cf is set to OFF (S3279), and the remaining ball timer 203cg is reset to 0, which is the initial value (S3280). After that, the winning number counter 203cc, the discharge number counter 203cj, and the variable probability passage counter 203cb are reset to their initial values (S3281), and then this process ends.

<Regarding control processing of the audio ramp control device 113 in the thirty-eighth embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 720 and 721, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio ramp control device 113 in the thirty-eighth embodiment will be described. In the thirty-eighth embodiment, in place of the big-hit related process (see S4802 in FIG. 671), the big-hit related process 4 (see S4852 in FIG. 720) is executed in place of the above-described thirty-fifth embodiment. The difference is that setting processing (see S4951 in FIG. 721) is added, and the rest is the same. The same processing contents are assigned the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof is omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 720, the jackpot related process 4 (S4852) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 in the thirty-eighth embodiment will be described. FIG. 720 is a flow chart showing the content of jackpot-related processing 4 (S4852). Jackpot-related processing 4 (S4852), for the jackpot-related processing (see S4802 in FIG. 671) in the thirty-fifth embodiment described above, the round effect setting processing (S4951) is executed, and the game ball passes through the probability variation switch 1065e3. However, the difference is that a process for executing an effect suggesting that the high probability state of the special symbol is given is added. Since the other processes are the same, the same reference numerals are given and the detailed description thereof is omitted.

In the jackpot related process 4 (S4852), first, the processes of S4901 to S4908 described above are executed, and in the process of S4908, when it is determined that the round number command is received from the main controller 110 (S4908: Yes), A round effect setting process (S4951) is executed, and this process ends. A detailed description of the round effect setting process (S4951) will be given later with reference to FIG.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4908 that the round number command has not been received (S4908: No), the process of S4910 is executed. In the processing of S4910, it is determined whether or not an ending command has been received (S4910), and if it is determined that an ending command has been received (S4910: Yes), the processing of S4911 to S4913 described above is executed, and this processing ends. do. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4910 that the ending command has not been received (S4910: No), then it is determined whether or not the V passage command has been received (S4952). In the process of S4952, when it is determined that the V passing command is received (S4952: Yes), the game ball passes through the variable probability switch 1065e3, and an effect suggesting that the high probability state of the special symbol is given is executed. Therefore, a V effect command for display is set (S4953), and this processing is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S4952 that the V passage command has not been received, the processing of S4953 is skipped and this processing ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 721, the round effect setting process (S4951), which is one process in the jackpot related process 4 (S4852) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 in the thirty-eighth embodiment, will be described. do. FIG. 721 is a flow chart showing the contents of the round effect setting process (S4951).

In the round effect setting process (S4951), first, it is determined whether or not the number-of-rounds command received this time is a command indicating the second round (S5501). If it is determined that the round number command received this time is not a command indicating the second round (S5501: No), the display round number command is set based on the received round number (S5502), and this process is executed. finish.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the number-of-rounds command received this time is a command indicating the second round (S5501: Yes), the current presentation mode is read from the presentation mode storage area 223k (S5503). Next, it is determined whether the current effect mode read in the process of S5503 is super RUSH mode or RUSH mode (S5504). If it is determined that the current production mode is the super RUSH mode or the RUSH mode (S5504: Yes), the production mode for guiding the V prize is determined (S5505), and the processing of S5502 described above is performed. Execute and terminate this process.

On the other hand, in the process of S5504, the current production mode is the super RUSH mode, or when it is determined that it is not the RUSH mode (S5504::No), the current production mode is the revenge mode or the challenge mode. (S5506). When it is determined that the current effect mode is not the revenge mode or the challenge mode (S5506: No), the process of S5502 described above is executed, and this process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S5506, when it is determined that the current effect mode is the revenge mode or the challenge mode (S5506: Yes), the value of the remaining probability variation counter 223m is read (S5507). Next, it is determined whether the value of the remaining probability variation counter 223m read in the process of S5507 is greater than 15 (S5508). When it is determined that the value of the remaining probability variation counter 223m is greater than 15 (S5508: Yes), the effect mode for guiding the V prize is determined (S5509), and the processing of S5502 described above is executed. and terminate this process.

On the other hand, in the process of S5508, if it is determined that the value of the residual probability variation number counter 223m is not greater than 15 (S5508: No), is the value of the residual probability variation number counter 223m smaller than 2? Determine (S5510). When the value of the remaining probability variable number counter 223m is a value smaller than 2 (S5510: Yes), the effect mode for selecting the presence or absence of the V prize is determined (S5511), the processing of S5502 is executed, and this processing is performed. exit. On the other hand, in the process of S5510, when it is determined that the value of the remaining probability variation counter 223m is not less than 2 (is a value of 2 or more) (S5510: No), the process of S5502 is executed and this process is performed. exit.

As described above, in the thirty-eighth embodiment, when the jackpot type in which the high probability state of the special symbol is set after the jackpot game ends is set, and the ball is moved to the specific area during the jackpot game. It is configured to acquire special high security rights when it passes through.

In other words, even when a jackpot type in which a high probability state of special symbols is set after the jackpot game is finished, the balls are allowed to pass through the specific area during execution of the jackpot game corresponding to the jackpot type. is not possible, the low probability state of the special symbol is set after the jackpot game ends.

By configuring in this way, in order to aim to set a high probability state of special symbols, which generally has a high degree of advantage for the player, the game aims to win many prize balls during the jackpot game. and a game aimed at passing the ball through the specific area can be provided to the player, and the player can be motivated to play the game during the big winning game.

Further, in the thirty-eighth embodiment, as an effect to be executed during a jackpot game in which a high probability state (a high probability state of special symbols) can be set after the jackpot game ends, a V prize game is executed and a V prize is won. A V prize challenge performance is executed as a performance for suggesting to the player the game content after the jackpot game is completed and the game content after the jackpot game is completed when the V prize game is not executed. ing.

By executing this V winning challenge effect, it is possible for the player to predict the game content after the end of the big winning game and then select whether or not to perform the V winning game during the big winning game. It is possible to make it easier for the player to play the game with the game contents desired by the player.

Furthermore, in the thirty-eighth embodiment, playing either the V winning game or the non-V winning game during the jackpot game is more obvious to the player than the other game. When the situation is advantageous, the player is not directed to select from a plurality of game methods (V winning game, non-V winning game), but is set to execute a game with one of the game methods. It is configured to execute a V prize challenge effect.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent a player from making a mistake in selecting a game method during a big winning game and being awarded an excessively disadvantageous game result.

<Thirty-ninth embodiment>
Next, the thirty-ninth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 722 to 734. FIG. The thirty-ninth embodiment differs greatly from the thirty-fifth embodiment described above in that different numerical values can be set as the probability variable limit number of times and the time saving limit number of times set at the end of the jackpot.

In the above-described 35th embodiment, the number of times the high probability state of the special symbol is set continuously (the number of times of special symbol continuous setting) reaches the probability limit (variation limit number of times) and the high probability of normal symbols A specific number of times (variable limit times 40 times, time saving limit times 10 times) is set as the number of times (time saving limit times) until the number of times the state is set continuously (normal figure continuous setting times) reaches the time saving limit. It was configured as In other words, a jackpot is won in the game state (normal state, time saving state) that is a low probability state of special symbols, and after the end of the jackpot game executed based on the jackpot election, a game state that becomes a high probability state of special symbols ( 1st variable probability state, 2nd variable probability state) is set, 40 times is set as the variable probability limit number of times, and the jackpot is won in the game state (normal state, 2nd variable probability state) which is a low probability state of normal symbols. Then, after the end of the jackpot game executed based on the winning of the jackpot, when the game state (time saving state, first probability variable state) where the high probability state of the normal symbol is set, the time saving limit number of times is 10 times. was configured to be set.

Then, in a state in which the probability variable limit number of times or the time saving limit number of times is set, a new jackpot game is executed, and after the jackpot game ends, a special pattern or a high probability state of a normal pattern is set. If the probability variable limit number of times or the time saving limit number of times is updated (subtracted), and the probability variable limit remaining number after subtraction or the time saving limit remaining number becomes 0 (when the probability changing limit or time saving limit is reached) , Regardless of the type of jackpot, the low probability state of special symbols or normal symbols is forcibly set.

In the configuration used in the above-described thirty-fifth embodiment, since it was configured so that a certain number of times is always set when the probability variation limit number of times and the time saving limit number of times are set, the current probability variation limit for the player There is a problem that the remaining number of times and the remaining number of times of the time saving limit are easily grasped, and the player's willingness to play is reduced in a game situation disadvantageous to the player, for example, a situation where the probability variable limit remaining number of times is small.

Further, as in the above-described thirty-fifth embodiment, in the pachinko machine 10 that can set a specific game state (second variable probability state) for suppressing an increase in the number of balls released, a specific By setting only the number, the length of the period during which the specific game state (second probability variable state) can be continued is easily predicted based on the probability variable limit remaining number and the time reduction limit remaining number, and the specific game state There is a problem that the player's willingness to play is remarkably reduced in a game situation in which the period in which the (second probability variable state) can be continued tends to be long.

On the other hand, in the thirty-ninth embodiment, different times can be set as the probability variable limit number of times or the time reduction limit number of times corresponding to the jackpot type set when the jackpot is won in the special symbol lottery. In other words, the 35th embodiment described above is provided with a plurality of jackpot types in which the same game state is set after the jackpot game is finished, and the limit setting contents after the jackpot game is finished are different for each of the plurality of jackpot types. different from the form.

By configuring in this way, when a specific game state (for example, the first variable probability state) is set after the end of the jackpot game, the number of times set to the variable probability limit number of times and the number of times set to the time reduction limit number of times , can be varied according to the jackpot type, it is possible to make it difficult for a player who is playing a game in the variable probability state to predict the number of times the first variable probability state is continuously set, and the game can improve the interest of

Furthermore, the pachinko machine 10 of the thirty-ninth embodiment has a jackpot game content (type of variable winning opening to be opened, the number of round games to be executed, etc.) and a game state type set after the jackpot game ends. It is configured to have a jackpot type that is the same and only the limit setting contents (the number of times set to the probability variable limit number of times, the number of times to set the time saving limit number of times) are different. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to grasp the contents of the limit setting based on the contents of the big win game and the game state set after the end of the big win game.

Therefore, for example, before the first variable probability state is set, the player grasps the limit setting content set for the first variable probability state to be set next, and the first variable probability state To prevent a player who is playing a game from becoming bored with the game.

In addition, in the 39th embodiment, the game state (second probability variable state etc.) in which only one of the probability variable limit number and the time saving limit number of times is set is set. It is configured so that different limit setting contents are set.

By configuring in this way, when the second probability variable state is set after the end of the jackpot game, it is possible to set a different number of times as the probability variable limit number of times. Remaining number of probability limit when the first probability variable state is set after the end of the jackpot game (the number of times after updating the probability variable limit number set when the second probability variable state is set) and the number of times of short time limit (this second The number of times set when the 1 probability variable state is set) can be varied, so the first probability variable state can be set for the player who is playing the first probability variable state. The number of times to be continuously set can be made difficult to predict, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

In addition, in the thirty-ninth embodiment, the effect mode of the variable effect for indicating the result of the special symbol lottery is based on the game situation after the end of the big win game (each limit remaining number of times that can be set after the end of the next big win game) It is configured so that the Specifically, it predicts the number of times the probability limit remains and the number of times the time saving limit remains after the end of the jackpot game, and based on the prediction results, an advantageous game period that can be set (the most advantageous probability condition for the player continues) period that can be set by calculating, and based on the calculation result, it is configured to determine the effect mode of the variable effect.

In other words, when determining the production mode of the variable production to indicate that the same jackpot type jackpot has been won, the probability variable limit number of times, the presence or absence of the time-saving limit number of times, and the probability variable limit remaining number, the time-saving limit remaining number of times It is configured to determine a different presentation mode based on the value of .

By constructing in this way, a player can be made to play a game aiming to win an advantageous jackpot within a specific period, not just a game aimed at winning an advantageous jackpot. can improve the interest of

<Regarding production content in the thirty-ninth embodiment>
The effect in the thirty-ninth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 722 and 723. FIG. In the thirty-fifth embodiment described above, the number of times the special symbol high probability state (high probability state) is continuously set (probability variable limit number of times) and the normal symbol high probability state (time saving state) are continuously set As the number of times (time saving limit number of times), a specific number of times (probability variable limit number of times 40 times, time saving limit number of times 10 times) is set. In other words, in the low probability state (low probability state) of the special pattern, the jackpot is won (hereinafter referred to as "first hit"), and the special pattern high probability state (special pattern high probability state) is set after the jackpot game ends. When it is done, 40 times is set as the probability variable limit number, and the jackpot is won in the low probability state (non-time saving state) of the normal pattern, and after the jackpot game is finished, the high probability state of the normal pattern (high probability state) ) is set, 10 times is set as the time saving limit number of times. Thus, in the thirty-fifth embodiment, when the probability variable limit number of times or the time saving limit number of times is set, a constant number of times is always set.

However, in the 35th embodiment, since the probability variable limit number of times and the time reduction limit number of times to be set are constant, it becomes easier for the player to grasp the current probability variation limit remaining number and time reduction limit remaining number of times, and the game disadvantageous to the player There is a problem that the player's willingness to play is reduced in a situation, for example, in a situation where the probability variable limit remaining number of times is small.

Further, as in the above-described thirty-fifth embodiment, in the pachinko machine 10 that can set a specific game state (second variable probability state) for suppressing an increase in the number of balls released, a specific By setting only the number, the length of the period in which the second probability variable state can continue is easily predicted based on the probability variable limit remaining number and the time reduction limit remaining number of times, and the period in which the second probability variable state can continue There is a problem that the player's motivation to play is remarkably lowered in a game situation in which the duration tends to be long.

On the other hand, in the thirty-ninth embodiment, different times can be set as the probability variable limit times or the time reduction limit times corresponding to the big win types set when the big win is won in the special symbol lottery. In other words, the 35th embodiment is characterized in that a plurality of jackpot types in which the same game state is set after the jackpot game ends are provided, and the limit setting contents after the jackpot game is finished are different for each of the plurality of jackpot types. differ from

As a result, when a specific game state (for example, high probability time saving state (first probability variable state)) is set after the jackpot game ends, the number of times set to the probability variable limit number of times and the number of times set to the time saving limit number of times and can be varied according to the type of jackpot, making it difficult for the player playing the game in the first variable probability state to predict the number of times the first variable probability state is continuously set. It is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In the thirty-ninth embodiment, the effect mode of the variable effect for indicating the result of the special symbol lottery is configured to vary based on the game situation after the big win game is over. Although the details will be described later, it is possible to predict the number of times the probability limit remains and the number of times the short time limit remains after the end of the jackpot game, and based on the prediction results, the advantageous game period that can be set (the first probability condition that is most advantageous to the player is continuous) is calculated, and based on the calculation result, the effect mode of the variable effect is determined.

In other words, when determining the production mode of the variable production to indicate that the same jackpot type jackpot has been won, the probability variable limit remaining number, the presence or absence of the time saving limit remaining number setting, and the probability changing limit remaining number, time saving limit It is configured to determine a different presentation mode based on the value of the remaining number of times.

Based on the above, the details of the effect performed in the thirty-ninth embodiment will be described. FIG. 722(a) is an example of a variation effect screen in the case of winning the jackpot C5 (FIG. 724) in the second probability variation state when the probability variation limit remaining number is 15 times or more. In the special figure 1 fluctuation display area Dm2 and the special figure 2 fluctuation display area Dm3, there is a display indicating that the first special symbol and the second special symbol are fluctuating, respectively, and the character 801 is the character 805 in the main display area Dm is executed. The difference from the thirty-fifth embodiment is that the background of the main display area Dm is a "lucky background" in which the sun 808 is displayed. In the thirty-ninth embodiment, a period (hereinafter referred to as "overlapping period") for the number of overlapping times between the probability variable limit remaining number and the time saving limit remaining number after the end of the jackpot game is calculated, and based on the overlapping period. Determines the background that is displayed during the dynamic effect.

As shown in FIG. 724, when the jackpot C5 is won, the time saving limit count of 15 times is set after the jackpot game ends. Then, when the overlapping period of the probability variation limit remaining number and the time saving limit remaining number is 15 or more, the "lucky background" is easily determined from the background mode selection table 222da shown in FIG. In addition, when the success judgment result is a big hit, the “lucky background” is determined only when the overlapping period is 15 or more and when the probability variation limit remaining number and the time saving limit remaining number are the same. Therefore, the player can predict that there is a high possibility of being advantageous when the "lucky background" is displayed. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make the player interested in the background in the high-probability short-time state (second probability variable state), and to improve the amusement of the game.

On the other hand, FIG. 722(b) is an example of a variation effect screen in the case of winning the jackpot C5 (FIG. 724) in the second probability variation state when the probability variation limit remaining number is 4 to 14 times. When the overlap period is 15 or more, the background of the main display area Dm is the "lucky background", whereas when the overlap period is 4 to 14, the month 809 is displayed as the "normal background". Become. Since the "normal background" is configured to be easily set when the result of the special symbol lottery is lost, the "normal background" is basically displayed in the second variable probability state. That is, even if the jackpot is won in the second probability variable state, if the overlap period is 4 to 14, the background of the main display area Dm is highly likely not to change as the "normal background", and the overlap period Even if is 15 or more, the "normal background" may be determined. As described above, since the background may not change even if the player wins the big win, the player should not be disappointed if the background does not change when the special symbols start to change and there is no possibility of winning the big win. can be prevented.

FIG. 723(a) is an example of a variation effect screen in the case of winning the jackpot C5 (FIG. 724) when the probability variation limit remaining number of times is 1 to 3 in the second probability variation state. In this case, after the jackpot C5 (Fig. 724) jackpot game ends, the overlapping period of the probability variable limit remaining number and the time saving limit remaining number becomes 3 or less, and from the background mode selection table 222da shown in Figure 730, thunder and heavy rain from rain clouds 810 It becomes easier to determine the "hell background" where the raining display is displayed. When the overlapping period is 3 or less, the high probability short time state (first probability variable state), which is the most advantageous gaming period for the player, is set only three times at maximum, and the first probability variable state is not set and is low. In some cases, it may be a short working hours state (short working hours). Also, the "hell background" is determined only when the result of the special symbol lottery is a jackpot and the overlapping period is 4 to 14 or 3 or less. That is, when the "hell background" is displayed, it suggests that the player is in a disadvantageous situation.

FIG. 723(b) is an example of a variation effect screen in the case of winning the jackpot C5 (FIG. 724) in which the probability variable limit remaining number after the jackpot game ends and the time saving limit remaining number are the same in the second variable probability state. After the jackpot C5 (FIG. 724) jackpot game ends, when the probability variable limit remaining number and the time saving limit remaining number become the same, the background mode selection table 222da shown in FIG. It becomes easier to determine the “heavenly background” to be used. When the variable probability limit remaining number and the time saving limit remaining number are the same, a low probability non-working time saving state (normal) in which the second special pattern mainly fluctuates is set after the big winning game reaching both limits is finished. When the jackpot is won with the second special pattern, the ratio of the 10R jackpot is high, and the ratio of setting the first probability variable state after the jackpot game is finished is also high, so it is more likely than the jackpot win with the first special pattern. It can be said that it is advantageous for players. Furthermore, since the first probability variable state is likely to be set continuously, when the "heaven background" is displayed, it is likely to be more advantageous than when the "lucky background" is displayed. Suggest to the player.

Thus, in the thirty-ninth embodiment, the background displayed in the main display area Dm suggests whether the player will be in an advantageous situation or a disadvantageous situation after the end of the jackpot game. Interest in the game can be improved by making the player interested in the change in the background during the variation of the special symbols.

In the embodiment, the background displayed in the main display area Dm is changed, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, after the end of the jackpot game, the remaining number of times of the probability limit and the number of times of the short time limit are predicted, and based on the prediction result, the advantageous game period that can be set (the first probability change that is most advantageous to the player is set continuously) Period) may be calculated, and the sound may be changed based on the calculation result.

<Regarding the electrical configuration in the thirty-ninth embodiment>
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 of the thirty-ninth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 724 to 730. FIG. In the thirty-ninth embodiment, in contrast to the thirty-fifth embodiment described above, a part of the configuration of the ROM 202 of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, a part of the configuration of the ROM 222 of the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113, is different. Other elements are the same, and detailed descriptions of the same contents are omitted.

First, the configuration of the ROM 202 of the main controller 110 will be described with reference to FIGS. 724 to 728. FIG. In the thirty-ninth embodiment, instead of the special figure 1 jackpot type selection table 202b1 (see FIG. 613 (b)), the special figure 1 jackpot type selection 5 table 202db1 is replaced with the special figure 2 The special figure 2 jackpot type selection 5 table 202db2 is provided instead of the jackpot type selection table 202b2, and the time reduction variation pattern 5 table 202dd2 is replaced with the time reduction variation pattern table 202d2 of the variation pattern table 202d. Instead of the variation pattern table 202d3, the first probability variation variation pattern 5 table 202dd3 is replaced with the second probability variation variation pattern table 202d4, and the second probability variation variation pattern 5 table 202dd4 is provided. The difference is that a time saving 5 table 202de is provided instead. Other configurations are the same, and the same reference numerals are given to the same contents, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 724, the contents of the special figure 1 jackpot type selection 5 table 202db1 will be described. FIG. 724 is a diagram schematically showing the contents of the special figure 1 jackpot type selection 5 table 202db1. This special figure 1 jackpot type selection 5 table 202db1 is similar to the special figure 1 jackpot type selection table 202b1 (see FIG. 613(b)) of the 35th embodiment described above. It is a data table referred to when selecting a jackpot type to be set.

As shown in FIG. 724, in the special figure 1 jackpot type selection 5 table 202db1, six types of jackpot types (jackpot A5 to F5) are defined corresponding to the value of the first hit type counter C2 obtained. And, for each jackpot type, the jackpot game content, the game state set after the jackpot game ends, the limit number of times set at the time of the first hit (at the time of the jackpot with the low probability state set) (variable limit number of times, short time limit number of times) is defined in advance.

Specifically, when the value of the acquired first hit type counter C2 is in the range of "0 to 4", "jackpot A5" is in the range of "5 to 54", "jackpot B5" is in the range of "55 to 94". "Jack C5" in the range of "95 to 134", "Jack D5" in the range of "95 to 134", "Jack E5" in the range of "135 to 174", "175 to 199" in the range of A "jackpot F5" is defined.

Here, as the contents of the jackpot game, "jackpot A5" includes a 10-round (R) jackpot game (a jackpot game in which the first variable prize winning device 65 is opened for 10 rounds), "jackpot B5" to "jackpot F5". , stipulates a 5-round (R) jackpot game (jackpot game in which the first variable prize winning device 65 is opened for 5 rounds). In other words, in the thirty-ninth embodiment, 2.5% of the time when the first special symbol lottery wins the jackpot, the 10-round jackpot game is executed, and about 97.5% of the time, the 5-round jackpot game is executed. Therefore, from the viewpoint of the content of the jackpot game (the number of prize balls that can be obtained during the jackpot game), the “jackpot A” is the jackpot type that is most advantageous to the player.

In addition, as a game state set after the end of the jackpot game, the "jackpot A5" has a "first variable state" after the jackpot game ends, regardless of the game state (game state at the time of winning) at the time of winning (at the time of winning the jackpot). The information for setting is "jackpot B5" to "jackpot D5". Set "second probability variable state" after the end of the game, and set "first probability variable state" after the end of the jackpot game when winning is "other than the second probability variable state (normal state, first variable probability state, short-time state)". The information for setting the "second probability variable state" after the end of the jackpot game is stipulated in the "jackpot E5" and "jackpot F5" regardless of the game state at the time of winning (at the time of winning the jackpot). It is

That is, in the 39th embodiment, if the jackpot is won in the first special symbol lottery during the second probability change state, the ratio of setting the second probability change state after the jackpot game is about 97.5% (jackpot B5 ~F5), and the ratio of setting the first probability variable state after the end of the jackpot game is configured to be about 2.5% (jackpot A5).

On the other hand, if the jackpot is won in the first special symbol lottery during the game state (normal state, first probability change state, time saving state) other than the second probability change state, the ratio of setting the first probability change state after the jackpot game ends is about 67.5% (jackpot A5 to jackpot D5), and the ratio of setting the second probability variable state after the jackpot game ends is about 32.5% (jackpot E5, jackpot F5).

Furthermore, in the 39th embodiment, it is stipulated to set different limit times (variable probability limit times, time saving limit times) according to the jackpot type, and for "jackpot A5", the probability variable limit times "10 ”, The time saving limit number of times “10” is for “jackpot B5”, the probability variation limit number of times “40”, the time saving limit number of times “10” is for “jackpot C5”, the probability variation limit number of times “20”, The time saving limit number of times "15" is for "jackpot D5", the probability variation limit number of times "10", the time saving limit number of times "20" is for "jackpot E5", the probability variation limit number of times "15", the time saving limit The number of times "0" is defined for "jackpot F5", the probability variation limit number of times "10", and the time reduction limit number of times "0".

It should be noted that, in the state where the second probability variable state (high probability state of special symbols, low probability state of normal symbols) is set, if "jackpot B5" to "jackpot D5" are elected, after the jackpot game ends, the second A probability variable state is set, that is, after the end of the jackpot game corresponding to the jackpot won in the low probability state of the normal design, the low probability state of the normal design is set, so the time saving limit number of times is not set ("0 ” is set).

Here, in the thirty-ninth embodiment, similarly to the thirty-fifth embodiment described above, the first variable probability state (high probability state of special symbols, high probability state of normal symbols) is set as the most advantageous game state for the player. Therefore, the game situation after the end of the big win game can be greatly changed according to the limit number of times set when the big win (first win) is won in the first special symbol lottery in the normal state.

For example, if the first hit is "jackpot A5", after the jackpot game ends, "10" is set for both the probability variation limit number of times and the time reduction limit number of times (10 is set to the value of the probability variation limit number counter 203h, and the time reduction limit 10 is set to the value of the number counter 203i), when the first variable probability state is set continuously 10 times, the variable probability limit and the short time limit are reached at the same time. Therefore, the game state will shift from the first variable probability state to the normal state, but by reaching the variable probability limit and the short time limit at the same time, the special variation pattern table 202d5 ( (See FIG. 616(b)) to shift to a special mode, so even after shifting from a high probability state to a low probability state of special symbols, it is possible to continue to play games that are advantageous to the player. can. In other words, "jackpot A5" is a jackpot type that is advantageous to the player as the jackpot type of the initial winning.

In addition, when the first hit is "jackpot B5", after the jackpot game ends, the probability variation limit number of times "40" and the time reduction limit number of times "10" are set (40 is set to the value of the probability variation limit number counter 203h, 10 is set to the value of the time saving limit counter 203i), after the first probability changing state is set 10 times in a row, the time saving limit is reached and the second probability changing state is entered. And, even if the jackpot is won in the first special symbol lottery that is mainly executed during the second probability variation state, the second probability variation state is set again at a rate of 97.5%, so in most cases, The second probability variation state is set 30 times in a row until the probability variation limit is reached.

In the thirty-ninth embodiment, as in the thirty-fifth embodiment described above, during the second variable probability state, it is configured so that a game in which the number of paid balls is difficult to increase or decrease is executed, so that the number of paid balls is not reduced for a long time. The game is not disadvantageous to the player who wants to play the game, but the game is disadvantageous to the player who wants to win many balls.

When the first winning is "jackpot C5", after the jackpot game is over, the probability variation limit number of times "20" and the time reduction limit number of times "15" are set (20 is set to the value of the probability variation limit number counter 203h, and the time reduction limit 15 is set to the value of the number counter 203i), after the first variable probability state is set 15 times in a row, the short time limit is reached and the state shifts to the second variable probability state. And, in most cases, the second probability variation state is set five times in a row until the probability variation limit is reached. When the first winning is "jackpot D5", after the jackpot game is over, the probability variation limit number of times "10" and the time reduction limit number of times "20" are set (10 is set to the value of the probability variation limit number counter 203h, and the time reduction limit 20 is set to the value of the number counter 203i), after the first variable probability state is set 10 times in a row, the variable probability limit is reached and the time saving state is entered. When shifting to the time saving state, the second special symbol lottery is mainly executed as in the thirty-fifth embodiment described above. Then, as the time saving end condition, since the number of times of execution of the special symbol lottery (variation) "100" is set, the time saving end condition is established when the special symbol lottery is executed 100 times after the time saving state is set. , to the normal state.

In addition, when the jackpot is won before the time-saving end condition is established, a value corresponding to the probability variable limit number of times specified for the jackpot type of the jackpot win is set to the value of the probability variable limit number counter 203h. In this case, since "5" is set as the value of the time saving limit number counter 203i, the time saving limit number specified for the jackpot type won during the time saving state is not reflected.

In other words, if the first hit is "jackpot D5", after the first probability variable state is completed, the time saving state is set, and if the jackpot is elected during the time saving state (when pulled back), the first probability variable state is again will be set. Furthermore, when the jackpot is not won during the time-saving state, the state shifts to the normal state. Therefore, it is possible for the player to play a game with high time efficiency for the jackpot type (jackpot B5, jackpot C5) in which the second probability variable state is set for a predetermined period after the first probability variable state is completed. It is a jackpot type that is advantageous to people.

Also, if the first hit is a "jackpot E5", after the jackpot game ends, the probability variable limit number of times "15" and the time reduction limit number of times "0" are set (15 is set to the value of the probability variable limit number counter 203h , 0 is set to the value of the time saving limit counter 203i). Then, it shifts to the second definite variable state. When the first hit is "jackpot F5", after the jackpot game is over, the probability variable limit number "10" and the time saving limit number "0" are set (10 is set to the value of the probability variable limit number counter 203h, and the time saving 0 is set to the value of the limit counter 203i). Then, it shifts to the second definite variable state.

In other words, when the first hit is "jackpot E5" or "jackpot F5", the second probability variable state is set after the jackpot game ends, but the value set as the probability variable limit number of times is set differently. there is By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it difficult to predict the value of the current variable probability limit number of times for the player to whom the second variable probability state is set after the first hit.

In addition, in the 39th embodiment, since the jackpot game is executed with the same jackpot game content (5R jackpot) in "jackpot E5" and "jackpot F5", it is difficult to predict the value of the current probability variable limit number. can be done.

Next, with reference to FIG. 725, the contents of the special figure 2 jackpot type selection 5 table 202db2 will be described. FIG. 725 is a diagram schematically showing the contents of the special figure 2 jackpot type selection 5 table 202db2. This special figure 2 jackpot type selection 5 table 202db2 is similar to the special figure 2 jackpot type selection table 202b2 (see FIG. 613 (c)) of the 35th embodiment described above. It is a data table referred to when selecting a jackpot type to be set.

As shown in FIG. 725, in the special figure 2 jackpot type selection 5 table 202db2, six types of jackpot types (jackpot G5 to L5) are defined corresponding to the value of the first hit type counter C2 obtained. And, for each jackpot type, the jackpot game content, the game state set after the jackpot game ends, the limit number of times set at the time of the first hit (at the time of the jackpot with the low probability state set) (variable limit number of times, short time limit number of times) is defined in advance.

Specifically, when the value of the acquired first hit type counter C2 is in the range of ``0 to 49'', ``jackpot G5'' is in the range of ``50 to 119'', ``jackpot H5'' is in the range of ``120 to 139''. "Jack I5" in the range of "140 to 159", "Jack J5" in the range of "160 to 179", "Jack K5" in the range of "180 to 199" A "jackpot L5" is defined.

Here, as the contents of the jackpot game, "jackpot G5" includes a 10-round (R) jackpot game (a jackpot game in which the first variable winning device 65 is opened for 10 rounds), and includes "jackpot H5" to "jackpot L5." , stipulates a 5-round (R) jackpot game (jackpot game in which the first variable prize winning device 65 is opened for 5 rounds). That is, in the thirty-seventh embodiment, 25% of the time when the first special symbol lottery wins the jackpot, the 10-round jackpot game is executed, and about 75% of the time, the 5-round jackpot game is executed. Therefore, from the viewpoint of the content of the jackpot game (the number of prize balls that can be obtained during the jackpot game), the "jackpot G5" is the jackpot type that is most advantageous to the player.

In addition, as a game state set after the end of the jackpot game, "jackpot G5" to "jackpot J5" are set after the jackpot game ends, regardless of the game state (game state at the time of winning) at the time of winning (at the time of winning the jackpot). The information for setting the "first probability change state" is "jackpot K5" and "jackpot L5", regardless of the game state at the time of winning (when the jackpot is won), after the jackpot game ends "second probability change state" Information for setting is specified.

That is, in the 39th embodiment, when the jackpot is won in the first special symbol lottery during the second probability change state, the ratio of setting the first probability change state after the jackpot game ends is about 80% (jackets G5 to J5 ), and the ratio of setting the second variable probability state after the end of the jackpot game is about 20% (jackets K5, L5).

In addition, for each jackpot type, the limit number of times set after the first hit (variable limit number of times, short time limit number of times) is specified, and for "jackpot G5", the number of variable limit times "10", short time limit The number of times "12" is for "jackpot H5", the probability variation limit number "20", the time saving limit number "15" is for "jackpot I5", the probability variation limit number "10", the time saving limit number " 1” is for the “jackpot J5”, the probability variation limit number “7”, the time reduction limit number “0”, and for the “jackpot K5”, the probability variation limit number “10”, the time reduction limit number “0” However, for the "jackpot L5", the variable probability limit number of times "0" and the time saving limit number of times "0" are defined respectively.

Here, the limit number of times defined in the jackpot type "jackpot J5" will be described. This jackpot type "jackpot J5" is a jackpot type in which the first probability variable state is set as the game state after the jackpot game ends. is defined to be set to "0". In the thirty-ninth embodiment, when "0" is set as the time reduction limit number of times at the end of the jackpot game, the normal symbol low probability state is forcibly set without once setting the normal symbol high probability state. configured to set.

Therefore, if the number of time-saving limit times is set based on winning the "jackpot J5" jackpot, that is, if the "jackpot J5" jackpot is won in a state where the low probability state of normal symbols is set , Not the first probability variable state but the second probability variable state is set after the jackpot game ends. On the other hand, if you win the jackpot of "Jack J5" in the state where the number of time-saving limits is set (high probability state of normal symbols), the remaining number of time-saving limits that have already been set is based on this jackpot election. Since it only subtracts the number, it is possible to continuously set the first variable probability state.

Similarly, the jackpot type "jackpot L5" is a jackpot type in which the second probability variable state is set as the game state after the jackpot game ends. It is defined that "0" is set as the limit number of times. In the 39th embodiment, when "0" is set as the probability variable limit number of times at the end of the jackpot game, the low probability state of the special symbol is forced to be set without setting the high probability state of the special symbol. configured to set.

Therefore, when the probability variable limit number of times is set based on winning the "jackpot L5" jackpot, that is, when the "jackpot L5" jackpot is won in a state where the low probability state of the special symbol is set , After the jackpot game ends, the normal state is set instead of the second variable probability state. On the other hand, if the "jackpot L5" jackpot is won in a state where the probability limit number is set (high probability state of special symbols), the remaining number of probability limit numbers that have already been set is based on this jackpot election. Since it only subtracts the number, it is configured to continuously set the second variable probability state.

As described above, in the thirty-ninth embodiment, after the end of the jackpot game, a high probability state is set for a part of the jackpot types that can set the high probability state of the special symbol or the high probability state of the normal symbol. "0" is defined as the limit number of times corresponding to the type. and. When "0" is set to the limit number of times, the low probability state is set without setting the high probability state of the corresponding symbol.

By configuring in this way, for example, when the jackpot is elected in a state in which the low probability state of the special symbol is set, the probability (ratio) of setting the high probability state of the special symbol after the jackpot game ends, and the special When a big win is won in a state where the high probability state of the pattern is set, the probability (ratio) of setting the high probability state of the special pattern after the end of the big win game can be made different.

Therefore, for example, while making it difficult to shift from the special symbol low probability state (eg, normal state) to the special symbol high probability state (eg, the first variable state), the special symbol high probability state continues Since the set probability can be increased (high continuation), the degree of advantage to the player for one jackpot type can be greatly varied according to the game state at the time of winning.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 726 and 727, the contents of various variation pattern tables referred to when selecting the variation pattern of the special symbol variation in the thirty-ninth embodiment will be described. In the thirty-ninth embodiment, in contrast to the thirty-fifth embodiment described above, the variation pattern of the second special symbol variation that is mainly performed during the time saving state, the first special symbol variation that is mainly performed during the first probability variation state The variation pattern differs from the variation pattern of the first special symbol variation mainly executed during the second probability variation state in that the variation time of different length can be determined, and the rest is the same. . A detailed description of the same contents will be omitted.

First, the contents of the working hours variation pattern 5 table 202dd2 will be described with reference to FIG. 726(a). FIG. 726(a) is a diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the working hours variation pattern 5 table 202dd2. As shown in FIG. 726(a), the time saving variation pattern 5 table 202dd2 is the second special symbol (special FIG. 2) is different in that the content of the variation pattern defined corresponding to FIG.

Specifically, the success or failure determination result (lottery result) is out, the value of the acquired variation type counter CS1 is in the range of "0 to 129", and the variation time is 5 seconds (5000 milliseconds) "short variation ” is defined as a variation pattern in the range of “130 to 198”, and “middle variation” with a variation time of 20 seconds (20000 milliseconds) is defined as a variation pattern. The value of the acquired fluctuation type counter CS1 is in the range of "0 to 109", the "middle fluctuation" with a fluctuation time of 20 seconds (20000 milliseconds) is in the range of "110 to 198", and the fluctuation time is 60 seconds ( 60000 milliseconds) is defined as a variation pattern.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to lengthen the time of the special symbol variation in each game state, so during the period when the special symbol variation is executed, the later game content (the jackpot game end when the jackpot is won) A game state (game content) that can be set later can be suggested to the player as part of the variable performance.

Therefore, a player who is playing each game state can determine whether or not to continue the game with the aim of winning the next big win, based on the performance mode of the variable performance being executed. .

Next, the contents of the first probability variation variation pattern 5 table 202dd3 will be described with reference to FIG. 726(b). FIG. 726(b) is a diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the first probability variation variation pattern 5 table 202dd3. As shown in FIG. 726(b), the first probability variant variation pattern 5 table 202dd3 is the first probability variation variation pattern table 202d3 of the thirty-fifth embodiment described above (see FIG. It is different in that the content of the variation pattern defined corresponding to the special symbol (special figure 2) is different, and the others are the same.

Specifically, the success or failure determination result (lottery result) is out, the value of the acquired variation type counter CS1 is in the range of "0 to 194", and the variation time is 2 seconds (2000 milliseconds) "short variation ” is defined as a variation pattern in the range of “195 to 198”, and “middle variation” with a variation time of 20 seconds (20000 milliseconds). The acquired value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is in the range of "0 to 149", the "middle fluctuation" with the fluctuation time of 20 seconds (20000 milliseconds) is in the range of "150 to 198", and the fluctuation time is 60 seconds ( 60000 milliseconds) is defined as a variation pattern.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to lengthen the time of the special symbol variation in each game state, so during the period when the special symbol variation is executed, the later game content (the jackpot game end when the jackpot is won) A game state (game content) that can be set later can be suggested to the player as part of the variable performance.

Therefore, a player who is playing each game state can determine whether or not to continue the game with the aim of winning the next big win, based on the performance mode of the variable performance being executed. .

In addition, it is possible to increase the number of special symbol variations per unit time with respect to the variation pattern table (time-saving variation pattern 5 table 202dd2) referred to during the time-saving state in which the second special symbol variation is the main variation. , the fluctuation time set for the fluctuation pattern that can be selected is defined to be short. By configuring in this way, it is possible to increase the game efficiency in the first probability variable state, which is more advantageous to the player than in the time saving state.

Next, referring to FIG. 727, the contents of the second probability variation variation pattern 5 table 202dd4 will be described. FIG. 727 is a diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the second probability variant variation pattern 5 table 202dd4. As shown in FIG. 727, the second probability variation variation pattern 5 table 202dd4 is the first special symbol ( It is different in that the content of the variation pattern defined corresponding to the special figure 1) is different, and the others are the same.

Specifically, regardless of the success/failure determination result (lottery result), the value of the acquired variation type counter CS1 is in the range of “0 to 148”, and the “short variation” with a variation time of 1 second (1000 milliseconds) , the range of "149 to 194" has a "middle fluctuation" with a fluctuation time of 20 seconds (20000 milliseconds), and the range of "195 to 198" has a "long fluctuation" with a fluctuation time of 60 seconds (60000 milliseconds) ” is defined as a variation pattern.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to lengthen the time of the special symbol variation in each game state, so during the period when the special symbol variation is executed, the later game content (the jackpot game end when the jackpot is won) A game state (game content) that can be set later can be suggested to the player as part of the variable performance.

Therefore, a player who is playing each game state can determine whether or not to continue the game with the aim of winning the next big win, based on the performance mode of the variable performance being executed. .

Next, with reference to FIG. 728, the content of the time reduction provision 5 table 202de will be described. FIG. 728 is a diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the working hours provision 5 table 202de. As shown in FIG. 728, the time saving grant 5 table 202de is different from the time saving grant table 202e (see FIG. 617) of the thirty-fifth embodiment described above. The difference is that the content of the number of times is different.

Specifically, the jackpot types "jackpot A5" and "jackpot G5 to J5" are set when both the probability variation limit reaching flag 203u and the time saving limit reaching flag 203v are set to off, the number of time saving times given " 65535 (substantially until the next time)" is defined, the variable probability limit reaching flag 203u is set to ON, and the time saving limit reaching flag 203v is set to OFF, the number of time saving times granted "100" is defined there is In addition, when the time saving limit reaching flag 203v is set to ON, since the low probability state of the normal symbol is forcibly set, regardless of the setting status of the probability variation limit reaching flag 203u, the number of time saving times given "0" is defined.

On the other hand, the jackpot type "jackpot E5, F5, K5, L5" is not a jackpot type in which the high probability state of normal symbols is set as described above, so the setting status of the probability variation limit reach flag 203u and the time reduction limit reach flag 203v Regardless, the number of time reductions granted is “0”.

The jackpot type "jackpot B5 to D5" is the second probability variable state (normal symbol low probability state) when the jackpot is won, and in some cases, the setting status of the probability variable limit reaching flag 203u and the time saving limit reaching flag 203v. Regardless, the number of time reductions granted is “0”. In addition, when the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot is other than the second probability variable state, if both the probability variable limit reaching flag 203u and the time saving limit reaching flag 203v are set to off, the number of time saving times given "65535 (substantial next time Until) ”is, when the probability variation limit reaching flag 203u is set to ON and the time saving limit reaching flag 203v is set to OFF, the number of time saving times given “100” is defined, otherwise time saving The given number of times "0" is defined.

Next, referring to FIG. 729, the configuration of the ROM 222 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the thirty-ninth embodiment will be described. FIG. 729 is a diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 222 of the audio lamp control device 113. As shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 729, the ROM 222 of the thirty-ninth embodiment differs from the ROM 222 of the thirty-fifth embodiment in that a background mode selection table 222da is provided, and the rest is the same. The same reference numerals are assigned to the same contents, and detailed description thereof is omitted.

The background mode selection table 222da is a data table referred to when determining the background mode during the variable performance for indicating the result of the special symbol lottery, and indicates that the result of the special symbol lottery is a jackpot. It is referred to when determining the production mode of the variable production executed in correspondence with the special symbol fluctuation for. In the thirty-ninth embodiment, as described above with reference to FIGS. 722 and 723, the effect mode (background mode) executed in the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81 during the special symbol jackpot fluctuation is The background mode selection table 222da is referred to and can be selected.

Specifically, the remaining number of the probability variable limit number and the remaining number of the time reduction limit number after the end of the jackpot game executed after the stopped display of the jackpot variation during execution are calculated, and the high probability state of the special symbol The length of a period (overlapping period) in which , and the high probability state of the normal symbol can overlap is specified, and different background modes can be selected according to the length of the specified overlapping period. there is By configuring in this way, by determining the type of the effect mode executed during the jackpot fluctuation, the remaining period (continuous chance period) in which the first probability variable state can be set continuously for the player It is possible to predict.

Here, with reference to FIG. 730, the contents of the background mode selection table 222da will be described. FIG. 730 is a diagram schematically showing the contents of the background mode selection table 222da. As shown in FIG. 730, the background mode selection table 222da corresponds to the result of the special symbol lottery to be the target of the variable effect (result of judgment), the value of the obtained effect counter 223h, and the length of the overlapping period. However, different presentation modes (background modes) are defined.

Here, the overlapping period is the number of times that the number of times of the probability variation limit that is set after the end of the jackpot game (the number of times of the probability variation limit remaining) and the number of times of the time saving limit (the number of times of the time saving limit remaining) overlap. The corresponding period, that is, the period during which neither the probability variation limit nor the time saving limit can be reached (the period during which the first probability variation state does not end) is shown.

That is, in the thirty-ninth embodiment, the background mode selection table 222da is referred to, and the effect mode is set based on the length of the period during which the first probability variable state can continue after the jackpot game ends (the number of remaining probability variable consecutive chances). configured as possible.

Specifically, when the result of the special symbol lottery that is the target of the variable effect (result of determination of success or failure) is "jackpot" and the overlapping period is "15~", the obtained effect counter 223h is used as the effect mode. is defined as "lucky" in the range of "0 to 59", "normal" in the range of "60 to 89", and "heaven" in the range of "90 to 98". In addition, when the overlapping period is "4 to 14", the value of the obtained effect counter 223h is "normal" in the range of "0 to 89", and "hell" in the range of "90 to 98". is stipulated. Then, when the overlapping period is "~3", the value of the obtained effect counter 223h is "Hell" in the range of "0 to 59" and "Normal" in the range of "60 to 98" as the effect mode. stipulated.

In addition, if the result of the special symbol lottery to be the target of the variable effect (result of judgment) is "big win" and the overlap period is "SP", that is, the remaining number of probability variable limits set after the end of the big win game and the remaining number of times of the time saving limit are the same, the value of the obtained effect counter 223h is "heaven" in the range of "0 to 89" and "lucky" in the range of "90 to 98" as the effect mode. is stipulated.

On the other hand, if the result of the special symbol lottery that is the target of the variable effect (result of determination) is "miss", regardless of the length of the overlapping period, the value of the obtained effect counter 223h is set to " "Normal" is defined in the range of "0 to 89", and "Lucky" is defined in the range of "90 to 98".

Here, when "Lucky" is selected as the presentation mode, as shown in FIG. In, as shown in FIG. 722 (b), a variable production is executed in the night background mode (production mode), and when "hell" is selected, as shown in FIG. 723 (a), a thunderstorm 723 (b), as shown in FIG. 723 (b), the variation production is executed in the background mode (production aspect) of the crepuscular rays (production aspect). be.

As described above, the background mode selection table 222da defines each effect mode (background mode) so that a different effect mode (background mode) is selected according to the length of the overlapping period and the situation. is the most likely to be selected when the overlap period is long (the probability variable consecutive chance period is long), and the performance mode "Hell" is most likely to be selected when the overlap period is short (the probability variable consecutive chance period is short). In addition, production mode "heaven" is, regardless of the length of the overlap period (probable variable continuous chan period), when the probability variable limit remaining number and the time saving limit remaining number are the same, that is, from the probability variable state to the normal state Each effect mode is defined so as to be most likely to be selected when the special game mainly composed of the second special symbol lottery can be executed in the normal state after the transition.

In this way, by differentiating the type of effect mode that is likely to be selected according to the length of the overlapping period (probable variable continuous chan period), the game situation (the remaining definite variable continuous chan period after the jackpot game ends) period) can be easily predicted. In addition, in the thirty-ninth embodiment, the background mode selection table 222da is referred to so that the effect mode (background mode) can be selected even when the result of the special symbol lottery is lost.

Then, when the result of the special symbol lottery is a loss, regardless of the length of the overlap period (probability variable consecutive chance period), the effect mode (background mode) is selected in correspondence with the range of the value of the acquired effect counter 223h. Therefore, various presentation modes (background modes) are selected regardless of the length of the overlapping period. Therefore, when the effect of switching the background mode is executed as the variable effect, when the background mode which is likely to be selected when the overlapping period is long is displayed, the special pattern lottery corresponding to the variable effect is won with a jackpot. When the background mode that is likely to be selected when the overlap period is short is displayed, the game expecting that the special symbol lottery corresponding to the variable performance is not won is played. can be performed by a person, and the performance effect can be enhanced.

Furthermore, the production mode (background mode) that does not correspond to the length of the overlapping period (probable variable continuous chan period) is also more than the production mode (background mode) that corresponds to the length of the overlapping period (probable variable continuous chan period) Since the contents of the background mode selection table 222da are defined so that the selection can be made, albeit with a low probability, when the effect of switching the background mode is executed as the variable effect, the overlap period suggested by the displayed background mode. can be made different from the length of the actual overlapping period. As a result, it is possible to provide the player with an unexpected game result (probable variable consecutive chance period).

In the thirty-ninth embodiment, any background mode can be selected in various overlapping periods. A special background mode that is selected only when the length of is "10~" and is "SP" may be provided. By configuring in this way, when the variable performance corresponding to the special background mode is executed, the player can be reliably notified of the current situation regarding the overlapping period, so that the player can easily understand the performance. can be executed.

<Control processing executed by main controller 110 in the thirty-ninth embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 731 to 732, each control process executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 in the thirty-ninth embodiment will be described. In this embodiment, in place of the probability variation limit update process (see S2801 in FIG. 659), the probability variation limit update process 5 (see S2871 in FIG. 731) is changed to the time saving limit update process (see S2871 in FIG. 660) for the thirty-fifth embodiment described above. S2802 reference) it is different in that it executes the time saving limit update process 5 (see S2872 in FIG. 732), and the other points are the same. The same parts are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 731, probability variation limit update processing 5 (S2871) executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 in the thirty-ninth embodiment will be described. FIG. 731 is a flow chart showing the contents of the variable probability limit update process 5 (S2871). Probability variation limit update processing 5 (S2871) in this embodiment is based on the winning jackpot type for the probability variation limit update processing (see S2801 in FIG. 659) in the 35th embodiment described above, determines the probability variation limit number of times to be set The difference is that the processing to do is added. Since other processing is the same, the same reference numerals are given and detailed description thereof is omitted.

When the variable probability limit update process 5 (S2871) is executed, first, the processes of S2901 to S2902 are executed, and in the process of S2902, the jackpot won this time is set to a high probability state of special symbols after the jackpot game ends. When it is determined that it is a big hit (S2902: Yes), next, it is determined whether or not the value of the variable probability limit counter 203h is 0 (S2971).

In the process of S2971, when it is determined that the value of the probability variation limit number counter 203h is 0 (S2971: Yes), the probability variation limit number corresponding to the jackpot type won this time is selected from the first per type selection 5 table 202db It is read out and set to the value of the variable probability limit number counter 203h (S2972). Next, the variable probability flag 203g is set to ON (S2973), and the process is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of S2971, when it is determined that the value of the variable probability limit counter 203h is not 0 (S2971: No), the process proceeds to S2906.

Thus, in the thirty-ninth embodiment, the probability variation limit number of times is determined based on the winning jackpot type. Since the game can be played while playing, it is possible to prevent the game from becoming monotonous.

In addition, this embodiment is configured to determine the number of probability variation limits to be set based on the winning jackpot type, but is not limited to this, and randomly determines the number of probability variation limits at the end of the jackpot game. may be configured. In addition, the determination of the probability variable limit number of times may be configured to be set at the start of the big winning game without being limited to setting after the big winning game ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 732, time saving limit update processing 5 (S2872) executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 in the thirty-ninth embodiment will be described. FIG. 732 is a flowchart showing the contents of the time saving limit update process 5 (S2872). Time saving limit update processing 5 (S2872) in this embodiment determines the number of time saving limits to be set based on the winning jackpot type for the time saving limit update processing (see S2802 in FIG. 660) in the thirty-fifth embodiment described above. The difference is that the processing to do is added. Since other processing is the same, the same reference numerals are given and detailed description thereof is omitted.

In the time saving limit update processing 5 (S2872), first, the processing of S3001 to S3002 is executed, and in the processing of S3002, the jackpot being executed this time is the jackpot type in which the high probability state of the normal symbol is set after the jackpot game ends. If it is determined that it is (S3002: Yes), then it is determined whether the value of the time reduction limit counter 203i is 0 (S3071).

In the process of S3071, when it is determined that the value of the time saving limit number counter 203i is 0 (S3071: Yes), the time saving limit number corresponding to the jackpot type is read from the first per type selection 5 table 202db, and the time saving The limit counter 203i is set (S3072). Next, the time saving flag 203f is set to ON (S3073), and this process is completed. On the other hand, in the process of S3071, when it is determined that the value of the time saving limit counter 203i is not 0 (S3071: No), the process proceeds to S3007.

<Regarding control processing of the audio ramp control device 113 in the thirty-ninth embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 733 and 734, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the sound ramp control device 113 in the thirty-ninth embodiment will be described. In the thirty-ninth embodiment, instead of the special figure 1 fluctuation production setting process (see S5105 in FIG. 674), the special figure 1 fluctuation production setting process 5 (see S5155 in FIG. 733) and the addition of limit remaining count suggestion mode determination processing (see S5251 in FIG. 734). The same processing contents are assigned the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof is omitted.

First, with reference to Drawing 733, special figure 1 fluctuation production setting processing 5 (S5155) performed by MPU221 in sound lamp control device 113 in the 39th embodiment is explained. Figure 733 is the flowchart which shows the contents of special figure 1 fluctuation production setting processing 5 (S5155). Special figure 1 fluctuation effect setting process 5 (S5155) is the special figure 1 fluctuation effect setting process (see S5105 in FIG. 674) in the above-described thirty-fifth embodiment. The difference is that the suggested mode determination process (S5251) is executed, and the other processes are the same.

Next, with reference to FIG. 734, the limit which is one process in the special figure 1 fluctuation effect setting process 5 (see S5155 in FIG. 733) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 in the thirty-ninth embodiment The remaining number of times suggestion mode determination processing (S5251) will be described. FIG. 734 is a flow chart showing the content of the limit remaining count suggestion mode determination process (S5251).

In the limit remaining number suggestion mode determination process (S5251), first, it is determined whether or not the variation of the special symbol executed this time is a big hit variation (S5601). When it is determined that the variation of the special symbol executed this time is the big hit variation (S5601: Yes), the big hit type to be executed this time is extracted (S5602). Then, based on the value of the remaining probability variation counter 223m, the value of the remaining short time counter 223n, the current jackpot type extracted in the processing of S5602, and the current game state, the remaining probability variation number after the jackpot game ends The remaining time reduction number of times is calculated (S5603).

Next, in the process of S5603, the overlapping period of the calculated remaining probability variation count and remaining time reduction count is identified (S5604). Then, with reference to the background mode selection table 222da, the validity determination result of the variation of the special symbol to be executed, the overlapping period of the remaining probability variation number and the remaining time short number specified in the processing of S5604, and the value of the production counter 223h , the background mode type is determined (S5605). Next, a display command for indicating the background mode determined in the process of S5605 is set (S5606), and this process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S5601, when it is determined that the variation of the special symbol executed this time is not the big hit variation (S5601: No), the background mode selection table 222da is referred to, based on the value of the effect counter. , it is determined whether there is a change in the display mode of the background mode (S5607). If it is determined that there is a change in the display mode of the background mode (S5607: Yes), the processes of S5605 and S5606 described above are executed, and this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S5607 that there is no change in the display mode of the background mode (S5607: No), this process ends.

As described above, in the 39th embodiment, it is possible to set a different number of times as the probability variable limit number of times or the time saving limit number of times in correspondence with the jackpot type set when the jackpot is won in the special symbol lottery. there is

By configuring in this way, when a specific game state (for example, the first variable probability state) is set after the end of the jackpot game, the number of times set to the variable probability limit number of times and the number of times set to the time reduction limit number of times , can be varied according to the jackpot type, it is possible to make it difficult for a player who is playing a game in the variable probability state to predict the number of times the first variable probability state is continuously set, and the game can improve the interest of

Furthermore, the pachinko machine 10 of the thirty-ninth embodiment has a jackpot game content (type of variable winning opening to be opened, the number of round games to be executed, etc.) and a game state type set after the jackpot game ends. It is configured to have a jackpot type that is the same and only the limit setting contents (the number of times set to the probability variable limit number of times, the number of times to set the time saving limit number of times) are different. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to grasp the contents of the limit setting based on the contents of the big win game and the game state set after the end of the big win game.

Therefore, for example, before the first variable probability state is set, the player grasps the limit setting content set for the first variable probability state to be set next, and the first variable probability state To prevent a player who is playing a game from becoming bored with the game.

In addition, in the 39th embodiment, the game state (second probability variable state etc.) in which only one of the probability variable limit number and the time saving limit number of times is set is set. It is configured so that different limit setting contents are set.

By configuring in this way, when the second probability variable state is set after the end of the jackpot game, it is possible to set a different number of times as the probability variable limit number of times. Remaining number of probability limit when the first probability variable state is set after the end of the jackpot game (the number of times after updating the probability variable limit number set when the second probability variable state is set) and the number of times of short time limit (this second The number of times set when the 1 probability variable state is set) can be varied, so the first probability variable state can be set for the player who is playing the first probability variable state. The number of times to be continuously set can be made difficult to predict, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

In addition, in the thirty-ninth embodiment, the effect mode of the variable effect for indicating the result of the special symbol lottery is based on the game situation after the end of the big win game (each limit remaining number of times that can be set after the end of the next big win game) It is configured so that the Specifically, it predicts the number of times the probability limit remains and the number of times the time saving limit remains after the end of the jackpot game, and based on the prediction results, an advantageous game period that can be set (the most advantageous probability condition for the player continues) period that can be set by calculating, and based on the calculation result, it is configured to determine the effect mode of the variable effect.

In other words, when determining the production mode of the variable production to indicate that the same jackpot type jackpot has been won, the probability variable limit number of times, the presence or absence of the time-saving limit number of times, and the probability variable limit remaining number, the time-saving limit remaining number of times It is configured to determine a different presentation mode based on the value of .

By constructing in this way, a player can be made to play a game aiming to win an advantageous jackpot within a specific period, not just a game aimed at winning an advantageous jackpot. can improve the interest of

That is, in the thirty-ninth embodiment, the background mode selection table 222da is referred to, and the effect mode is set based on the length of the period during which the first probability variable state can continue after the jackpot game ends (the number of remaining probability variable consecutive chances). configured as possible.

In addition, the remaining number of probability variable limits set after the end of the jackpot game (remaining number of probability variable limits) and the remaining number of time reduction limits (remaining number of time reduction limits) overlap. It is configured to be able to execute a production that can be suggested to.

In this way, by differentiating the type of effect mode that is likely to be selected according to the length of the overlapping period (probable variable continuous chan period), the game situation (the remaining definite variable continuous chan period after the jackpot game ends) period) can be easily predicted. In addition, in the thirty-ninth embodiment, the background mode selection table 222da is referred to so that the effect mode (background mode) can be selected even when the result of the special symbol lottery is lost.

Then, when the result of the special symbol lottery is a loss, regardless of the length of the overlap period (probability variable consecutive chance period), the effect mode (background mode) is selected in correspondence with the range of the value of the acquired effect counter 223h. Therefore, various presentation modes (background modes) are selected regardless of the length of the overlapping period. Therefore, when the effect of switching the background mode is executed as the variable effect, when the background mode which is likely to be selected when the overlapping period is long is displayed, the special pattern lottery corresponding to the variable effect is won with a jackpot. When the background mode that is likely to be selected when the overlap period is short is displayed, the game expecting that the special symbol lottery corresponding to the variable performance is not won is played. can be performed by a person, and the performance effect can be enhanced.

Furthermore, the production mode (background mode) that does not correspond to the length of the overlapping period (probable variable continuous chan period) is also more than the production mode (background mode) that corresponds to the length of the overlapping period (probable variable continuous chan period) Since the contents of the background mode selection table 222da are defined so that the selection can be made, albeit with a low probability, when the effect of switching the background mode is executed as the variable effect, the overlap period suggested by the displayed background mode. can be made different from the length of the actual overlapping period. As a result, it is possible to provide the player with an unexpected game result (probable variable consecutive chance period).

In the thirty-ninth embodiment, any background mode can be selected in various overlapping periods. A special background mode that is selected only when the length of is "10~" and is "SP" may be provided. By configuring in this way, when the variable performance corresponding to the special background mode is executed, the player can be reliably notified of the current situation regarding the overlapping period, so that the player can easily understand the performance. can be executed.

<Fortieth Embodiment>
Next, a 40th embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 735 to 738. FIG. The 40th embodiment is a combination of the configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the 38th embodiment described above and the technical idea of the 39th embodiment described above.

The pachinko machine 10 in the thirty-eighth embodiment described above can acquire a special symbol high probability for setting a high probability state of a special symbol by passing a ball through the variable probability switch 1065e3 (specific area) during a jackpot game. When the special symbol high probability right is acquired during the big winning game, the high probability state of the special symbol can be set after the big winning game ends, and the special symbol high probability right is acquired during the big winning game. A player can select which game to execute, a game (V winning game) or a game (non-V winning game) in which a special figure high guaranteed right is not acquired.

Then, the game situation after the special figure high guaranteed right is acquired (the game situation after the jackpot game is over) and the later game situation when the special figure high guaranteed right is not acquired are discriminated, A situation where the game situation is more advantageous to the player than the other game situation, for example, a situation where the probability variable state can be set multiple times continuously without reaching the probability variable limit or the short time limit after the jackpot game ends. In this case, a game method for creating one of the game situations, for example, a guidance notification (effect) for guiding the player to a V winning game can be executed, thereby making the game disadvantageous to the player. It was possible to provide an easy-to-understand game without executing the game.

Furthermore, when the above-mentioned V winning game is executed and when the non-V winning game is executed, the situation where the game method advantageous to the player is switched according to the later game result (for example, in the second probability variable state When the V winning game is executed, the second probability variable state in which it is difficult to shift to the first variable probability state and the increase or decrease in the number of balls released is difficult to occur can be set continuously many times (for example, 15 times) When a non-V winning game is executed, it is possible to shift to a normal state in which it is easier to shift to the first variable probability state than to the second variable probability state when winning a jackpot, and to aim for the first variable probability state again from the first win. In such a situation, the game method according to the desired game content can be provided to the player by enabling the player to select which game to play. It was possible to make the game easier to play with.

In addition, in the above-described thirty-ninth embodiment, by configuring it so that different times can be set as the probability variation limit number of times or the time saving limit number of times according to the jackpot type, the probability variation limit remaining number of times in the state where the first probability variation state is set and the remaining number of time-saving limit combinations, and by making it difficult for the player to predict the content of the game to be executed later (the state of transition of the game state), the player's interest in the game is improved. It was something that could be done.

The forty-fifth embodiment is the pachinko machine 10 in the thirty-eighth embodiment described above, that is, the pachinko machine 10 having a configuration in which the player can select whether or not to set a high probability state of special symbols after the end of the jackpot game. On the other hand, the technical idea of the 39th embodiment described above, that is, the technical idea of configuring different times as the probability variable limit number of times or the time saving limit number of times according to the jackpot type is applied.

In the 40th embodiment, in some cases, it is possible to create a state in which it is advantageous for the player to execute a non-V winning game during the first variable probability jackpot game that cannot reach the time reduction limit and the variable probability limit. It is different from the thirty-eighth embodiment described above in terms of construction. Specifically, during the first probability variable jackpot game in which the remaining number of times of the time saving limit after the jackpot game is 11 times, the first probability variable state is continued for the remaining number of probability variable limits, and the second special symbol lottery is a big hit. A V prize game is executed to aim at a game, or a time saving state (low probability state of special patterns, high probability state of normal patterns) is set after the end of the big win game, and a big hit is made in the second special pattern lottery during the time saving state. By winning the lottery, the first variable probability state is continued for the number of times set as the variable probability limit number of times, and the player can select whether to execute a non-V winning game aiming at a big win game in the second special symbol lottery. ing.

By configuring in this manner, the later game results (the privilege amount to be granted) can be greatly changed according to the selection result of the game method by the player, in contrast to the above-described thirty-eighth embodiment.

Furthermore, in the 40th embodiment, as in the 38th embodiment (35th embodiment) described above, when the time-saving limit and the probability variation limit are reached by one jackpot winning, the transition to a special state Therefore, if the time saving state is set in a situation where the remaining number of time saving limits is 11 times, the probability variable limit number of times before the conditions for ending the time saving state (time saving end conditions) are satisfied By winning a probability variable jackpot set to 10 times, the first probability variable state is continued until the jackpot is won 10 times in a second special symbol lottery, and then the state is shifted to a special state (special mode). becomes possible.

Therefore, it is possible to greatly vary the later game results (the amount of privilege to be granted) according to the selection result of the game method during the jackpot game by the player.

<Regarding the electrical configuration in the 40th embodiment>
Here, the electrical configuration in the 40th embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 735 to 737. FIG. In the 40th embodiment, in place of the special figure 1 jackpot type selection table 202b1, the special figure 1 jackpot type selection 6 table 202eb1 is replaced with the special figure 2 jackpot type It is different in that a special figure 2 jackpot type selection 6 table 202eb2 is provided instead of the selection table 202b2, and a time reduction provision 6 table 202ee is provided instead of the time reduction provision table 202e, and the rest is the same. A detailed description of the same contents will be omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 735, the contents of the special figure 1 jackpot type selection 6 table 202eb1 will be described. FIG. 735 is a diagram schematically showing the contents of the special figure 1 jackpot type selection 6 table 202eb1. This special figure 1 jackpot type selection 6 table 202eb1 is similar to the special figure 1 jackpot type selection table 202b1 (see FIG. 613(b)) of the 35th embodiment described above. It is a data table referred to when selecting a jackpot type to be set.

As shown in FIG. 735, in the special figure 1 jackpot type selection 6 table 202eb1, six types of jackpot types (jackpot A6 to F6) are defined corresponding to the value of the first hit type counter C2 obtained. And, for each jackpot type, the jackpot game content, the game state set after the jackpot game ends, the limit number of times set at the time of the first hit (at the time of the jackpot with the low probability state set) (variable limit number of times, short time limit number of times) is defined in advance.

Specifically, when the value of the acquired first hit type counter C2 is in the range of "0 to 59", "jackpot A6" is in the range of "60 to 79", "jackpot B6" is in the range of "80 to 99" "Jack C6" in the range of "100 to 134", "Jack D6" in the range of "135 to 174", "Jack E6" in the range of "175 to 199" A "jackpot F6" is defined.

Here, as the contents of the jackpot game, the "jackpot A6" includes a 10-round (R) jackpot game (a jackpot game in which the V winning device 1065 is opened for 10 rounds), and the "jackpot B6" to "jackpot F6". , 5 rounds (R) jackpot game (jackpot game in which the V winning device 1065 is opened for 5 rounds) is defined. That is, in the 40th embodiment, the 10-round jackpot game is executed in 30% of the cases where the jackpot is won in the first special symbol lottery, and the 5-round jackpot game is executed in about 70%. Therefore, from the viewpoint of the content of the jackpot game (the number of prize balls that can be obtained during the jackpot game), the “jackpot A6” is the jackpot type that is most advantageous to the player.

In addition, as the game state set after the end of the jackpot game, information for indicating that the “first probability variable state” can be set for “jackpot A6” to “jackpot C6” is “jackpot D6” to “ The jackpot E6” defines information for indicating that the “second variable probability state” can be set.

In addition, for any of the jackpot types of "jackpot A6" to "jackpot F6", during the round game of the specific round (second round) in the jackpot game, the ball that wins the V prize device 1065. "V win possible" is defined to indicate that a scenario is set in which the switching member 1065h is operated so as to be able to pass through the variable probability switch 1065e3 (specific area).

That is, in the 40th embodiment, when a jackpot is won in the first special symbol lottery, when a proper game (continued right-handed game) is executed during the jackpot game, the ball is in the specific area with a high probability. It passes through and is structured to be able to acquire special highly secured rights.

Further, different values are set as the number of limit times corresponding to each of the jackpot types (jackpots A6 to F6). In the 40th embodiment, as in the 39th embodiment described above, the limit number of times (probability variable limit number of times, time saving limit number of times) defined corresponding to each jackpot type is the limit number of times at the end of the jackpot. is not set, that is, it is set only for the symbol type for which the low probability state is set.

To specifically explain each limit number of times defined for each jackpot type, in the 40th embodiment, different limit numbers (probability variable limit number, time saving limit number of times) are set according to the jackpot type It is stipulated, and for "jackpot A6", the probability variation limit number of times "10", the time saving limit number of times "11", and the "jackpot B6", the probability variation limit number of times "5", the time saving limit number of times "11" ”, For “jackpot C6”, the probability variation limit number “3”, the time reduction limit number “11”, for “jackpot D6”, the probability variation limit number “10”, the time reduction limit number “0” , For "jackpot E6", the probability variation limit number of times "5", the time reduction limit number of times "0", and the "jackpot F6", the probability variation limit number of times "3", the time reduction limit number of times "0" are stipulated It is

Next, with reference to FIG. 736, the contents of the special figure 2 jackpot type selection 6 table 202eb2 will be described. FIG. 736 is a diagram schematically showing the contents of the special figure 2 jackpot type selection 6 table 202eb2. This special figure 2 jackpot type selection 6 table 202eb2 is similar to the special figure 2 jackpot type selection table 202b2 (see FIG. 613(c)) of the 35th embodiment described above. It is a data table referred to when selecting a jackpot type to be set.

As shown in FIG. 736, in the special figure 2 jackpot type selection 6 table 202eb2, four types of jackpot types (jackpot G5 to J6) are defined corresponding to the value of the first hit type counter C2 obtained. And, for each jackpot type, the jackpot game content, the game state set after the jackpot game ends, the limit number of times set at the time of the first hit (at the time of the jackpot with the low probability state set) (variable limit number of times, short time limit number of times) is defined in advance.

Specifically, when the value of the acquired first hit type counter C2 is in the range of "0 to 79", "jackpot G6" is in the range of "80 to 129", "jackpot H6" is in the range of "130 to 159". "jackpot I6" is defined in the range of ", and "jackpot J6" is defined in the range "160 to 199".

Here, as the contents of the jackpot game, the "jackpot G6" includes a 10-round (R) jackpot game (a jackpot game in which the V winning device 1065 is opened for 10 rounds), and the "jackpot H6" to "jackpot J6". , 5 rounds (R) jackpot game (jackpot game in which the V winning device 1065 is opened for 5 rounds) is defined. That is, in the 40th embodiment, 40% of the time when the second special symbol lottery wins the jackpot, the 10-round jackpot game is executed, and about 60% of the time, the 5-round jackpot game is executed. Therefore, from the viewpoint of the content of the jackpot game (the number of prize balls that can be obtained during the jackpot game), the "jackpot G6" is the jackpot type that is most advantageous to the player.

In addition, as the game state set after the end of the jackpot game, information for indicating that the “first variable state” can be set in “jackpot G6” to “jackpot I6” is provided in “jackpot J6”. , information for indicating that the "second probability variable state" can be set.

In addition, for the jackpot types of "jackpot G6" to "jackpot I6", the switching member 1065h operates so that the ball that has won the V prize device 1065 during the jackpot game can pass through the variable probability switch 1065e3 (specific area). "V winning possible" indicating that a scenario (V scenario) is set is defined, and for the jackpot type of "jackpot J6", a ball that wins to the V prize winning device 1065 during the jackpot game "V winning is not possible" is defined to indicate that a scenario (non-V scenario) is set in which the switching member 1065h is operated so that it is impossible (difficult) to pass through the variable probability switch 1065e3 (specific area).

That is, in the 40th embodiment, when a jackpot is won in the second special symbol lottery, when an appropriate game (continued right-handed game) is executed during the jackpot game, the ball enters the specific area with a high probability. When the ratio of execution of a jackpot game capable of obtaining a special high guaranteed right is 80%, and the jackpot is won in the second special pattern lottery, a proper game is played during the jackpot game (continuous right-handed game). Even if is executed, the ratio of execution of a jackpot game in which it is difficult to obtain a ball that cannot pass through a specific area (special high guaranteed right) is set to 20%.

In addition, when the jackpot game ends in a state in which the special symbol high probability right is not acquired, regardless of the set jackpot type, a special symbol low probability state is set as the game state after the jackpot game ends. . Therefore, the jackpot for which "jackpot J6" is set is substantially the jackpot type in which the low probability state of the special symbol is set after the jackpot game ends.

Also, different values are set as the number of limit times corresponding to each of the jackpot types (jackpots G6 to J6). In the 40th embodiment, as in the 39th embodiment described above, the limit number of times (probability variable limit number of times, time saving limit number of times) defined corresponding to each jackpot type is the limit number of times at the end of the jackpot. is not set, that is, it is set only for the symbol type for which the low probability state is set.

To specifically explain each limit number of times defined for each jackpot type, in the 40th embodiment, different limit numbers (probability variable limit number, time saving limit number of times) are set according to the jackpot type It is defined, for "jackpot G6", the probability variation limit number of times "10", time saving limit number of times "11", for "jackpot H6", probability variation limit number of times "5", time saving limit number of times "11" ”, For “jackpot I6”, the probability variation limit number “3”, the time reduction limit number “11”, for “jackpot J6”, the probability variation limit number “10”, the time reduction limit number “0” stipulated.

Next, with reference to FIG. 737, the contents of the time saving provision 6 table 202ee will be described. FIG. 737 is a diagram schematically showing the contents of the time saving provision 6 table 202ee. This time saving 6 table 202ee is similar to the above-described time saving giving table 202e (see FIG. 617), in this embodiment the jackpot type (jackpots A6 to C6, G6 to I6) and a jackpot type (jackets D6 to F6, J6) in which the high probability state of normal symbols is not set after the jackpot game ends, and as shown in FIG. Termination conditions are specified.

Specifically, for the jackpot types "jackpot A6-C6" and "jackpot G6-I6", the variable limit reach flag 203u and the time reduction limit reach flag 203v are both set to off regardless of the gaming state when the jackpot is won. If it is, the number "65535 (substantially until the next time)" of the time saving number of times is defined, the probability variation limit reaching flag 203u is set to ON, and the time saving limit reaching flag 203v is set to OFF , "100" is defined as the number of time reductions given. In addition, when the time saving limit reaching flag 203v is set to ON, since the low probability state of the normal symbol is forcibly set, regardless of the setting status of the probability variation limit reaching flag 203u, the number of time saving times given "0" is defined.

On the other hand, the jackpot types "jackets D6 to F6" and "jackpot J6" are not jackpot types in which a high probability state of normal symbols is set as described above, so the game state (whether or not time reduction) at the time of winning the jackpot , Regardless of the setting status of the variable probability limit reach flag 203u and the time saving limit reach flag 203v, the number of time saving times given "0" is defined.

<Regarding control processing of the audio ramp control device 113 in the fortieth embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIG. 738, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 in the 40th embodiment will be described. The 40th embodiment differs from the above-described 38th embodiment in that the round effect setting process 6 (see S4971 in FIG. 738) is executed instead of the round effect setting process (see S4951 in FIG. 721). are otherwise identical. The same processing contents are assigned the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof is omitted.

With reference to FIG. 738, the round effect setting process 6 (S4971) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 in the 40th embodiment will be described. FIG. 738 is a flow chart showing the contents of the round effect setting process 6 (S4971). Round effect setting process 6 (S4971) is, for the round effect setting process (see S4951 in FIG. 721) in the above-described thirty-eighth embodiment, when winning the first probability variation, the effect mode is changed based on the number of time reduction limits. The difference is that the determination process is executed. Since the other processes are the same, the same reference numerals are used and detailed descriptions thereof are omitted.

In the round effect setting process 6 (S4971), first, the process of S5501 is executed, and when it is determined that the round number command received this time is the second round (S5501: Yes), the jackpot type being executed this time However, it is determined whether the game state after the end of the jackpot game is the jackpot type set to the first variable probability state (S5551). When it is determined that the jackpot being executed this time is not the first variable probability jackpot (S5551: No), the production mode that strongly guides the right-handed game is determined (S5559), and the process proceeds to S5560.

On the other hand, in the processing of S5551, when it is determined that the jackpot being executed this time is the first probability variable jackpot (S5551: Yes), the value of the short remaining time counter 223n is read (S5552). Next, it is determined whether or not the read value of the short time remaining counter 223n is 11 (S5553). When it is determined that the value of the read remaining time reduction counter 223n is 11 (S5553: Yes), the first selection effect mode for selecting the game method is determined (S5554), and the process proceeds to S5560. .

On the other hand, in the processing of S5553, if it is determined that the value of the remaining short time counter 223n is not 11 (S5553: No), then it is determined whether the value of the remaining short time counter 223n is 6 (S5555). . When it is determined that the value of the remaining short time counter 223n is 6 (S5555: Yes), it is determined whether the value of the remaining probability variation counter 223m is greater than the value of the remaining short time counter 223n (S5556 ). If it is determined that the value of the remaining probability variable number counter 223m is greater than the value of the remaining short time number counter 223n (S5556: Yes), the process of S5559 described above is executed, and the process proceeds to S5560. .

On the other hand, in the process of S5556, when it is determined that the value of the remaining probability variable number counter 223m is not greater than the value of the remaining short time number counter 223n (S5556: No), the second A selection effect mode is determined (S5557), and the process proceeds to S5560. On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S5555 that the value of the remaining short time counter 223n is not 6 (S5555: No), it is determined whether the value of the remaining short time counter 223n is 4 (S5558). When it is determined that the value of the short time remaining counter 223n is 4 (S5558: Yes), the process proceeds to S5556. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the remaining time reduction counter 223n is not 4 (S5558: No), the process proceeds to S5559.

In the process of S5560, a display command for indicating the effect mode determined in the processes of S5554, S5557 and S5559 is set (S5560). Then, the process of S5502 described above is executed, and this process ends.

<41st Embodiment>
Next, the forty-first embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 739 to 750. FIG. The forty-first embodiment differs greatly from the thirty-fifth embodiment described above in that the number of time-saving limits indicating the number of times until the time-saving limit is reached can be set in multiple types. In addition, the special symbol type that is mainly varied in each game state is different from the above-described 35th embodiment, and in the normal state, the first special symbol variation is the main variation, and the first probability variation state, the second probability variation state, and the time saving state The difference is that the variation pattern is set so that the second special symbol variation is the main variation.

Other configurations are the same as those of the thirty-fifth embodiment described above, and detailed descriptions of the same contents will be omitted.

In the above-described thirty-fifth embodiment, the value of the time saving limit number counter is always updated (set) when the normal symbol high probability state is set after the end of the jackpot game.

On the other hand, in the 41st embodiment, different time-saving types (time-saving A, time-saving B) can be set in correspondence with the jackpot types, and the value of the time-saving limit number counter corresponding to each time-saving type is updated ( setting).

By configuring in this way, even when the high probability state of the normal pattern is set after the end of the jackpot game, the length of the period in which the time saving state can be continued can be varied depending on the time saving type to be set. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to predict the period when the time saving state ends.

Further, in the forty-first embodiment, depending on whether the normal symbol high probability state set after the end of the jackpot game is set as the first variable probability state or set as the time saving state. It is configured so that different time-saving types can be set. That is, it is configured to be able to set different time-saving types according to the type of game state (first probability variable state, time-saving state) set after the end of the jackpot game. By configuring in this way, for example, the first probability variable state is continuously set until immediately before reaching the short time limit after the high probability state of the normal symbol is set, and then when the short time limit is reached, the first When a jackpot (short-time jackpot) with a short-time state is set instead of a jackpot (first variable-probability jackpot) with a variable probability state, a situation in which a normal state is set after the jackpot game ends is suppressed. be able to.

Furthermore, during the period in which the high probability state of the normal pattern is continuously set, the jackpot is won in the game state (first probability variable state) in which it is easy to win the jackpot (the high probability state of the special pattern is set). Different time-saving types are set depending on whether it is difficult to win the jackpot (low-probability state of special symbols is set) and when the jackpot is won in the game state (time-saving state), so the jackpot is set during the time-saving state When winning and the first variable probability state is set after the jackpot game is over (when the first variable probability state is pulled back), the period until reaching the time reduction limit can be lengthened. Therefore, when the jackpot is won in the time saving state and the first variable state is pulled back, it is possible to give the player an advantageous privilege, so that the player can be motivated to play the game. can.

In addition, in the 41st embodiment, a time-saving limit number counter is provided for measuring the number of jackpots until the time-saving limit is reached for each time-saving type. Based on the value (updated value) of each time-saving limit number counter to calculate the remaining number of time saving limits for each time saving type, and the length of the period (remaining period) in which the high probability state of the normal symbol can be continuously set can be notified to the player. Furthermore, based on the jackpot winning this time, the value of the time saving limit number counter is updated to determine whether the time saving type is the time saving type that is most likely to reach the time saving limit, and based on the determination result, a variable performance is produced. It is configured to determine the aspect.

By constructing in this way, in the case of winning a jackpot in which a high probability state of normal symbols is set, the player is informed whether or not the shortest period in which the short time limit can be reached is shortened by winning the jackpot this time. can be grasped. Therefore, it is possible to provide an easy-to-understand game to the player who is playing the game during the period in which the high probability state of the normal symbol is continuously set.

In addition, after the end of the jackpot game, the performance mode of the variable performance for indicating that the jackpot in which the high probability state of the normal pattern is set is won is determined based on the value of the corresponding time reduction limit number counter. there is In other words, the performance suggesting whether or not the time-saving limit is reached based on the winning of the jackpot this time can be executed as a variable performance. By configuring in this way, it is possible to execute an effect to incite whether or not the period in which the high probability state of the normal symbol is continuously set is over, so that the player can pay attention to the effect being executed. Therefore, the performance effect can be enhanced. In addition, since it is possible to notify the player in advance that the time reduction limit is reached and the low probability state of the normal pattern is forcibly set, a game easy for the player to understand can be provided.

In addition, in any of the plurality of time-saving types, the situation in which the time-saving limit is reached by updating the value of the corresponding time-saving limit counter, that is, the period until reaching the time-saving limit is the longest. , the game player is configured to be able to execute a specific effect mode effect.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to inform the player in an easy-to-understand manner that the content of the game during the period in which the high-probability state of the normal symbol is continuously set was the most advantageous content for the player. Therefore, it is possible to provide the player with a sense of satisfaction.

<Regarding the contents of the effect executed in the 41st embodiment>
The effect executed in the forty-first embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 739 and 740. FIG. First, in the thirty-fifth embodiment described above, the value of the time-saving limit number counter is always updated when the high-probability state (time-saving state) of normal symbols is set after the end of the jackpot game. On the other hand, in the 41st embodiment, different time-saving types can be set in correspondence with the jackpot types, and the value of the time-saving limit number counter corresponding to each time-saving type is updated. is different.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to complicate the length of the period in which the time saving state (high probability time saving state (first probability variable state) or low probability time saving state (time saving)) can continue depending on the time saving type to be set. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to predict the period in which the time saving state (first variable probability state or time saving) ends.

In the forty-first embodiment, as shown in FIG. 741, time saving A (first variable state) or time saving B (time saving state) is set after the jackpot game ends, corresponding to the jackpot type. As shown in FIG. 741 (a), the time saving A and the time saving B are set to a time saving limit number of times of 5 times, respectively. For example, after the first probability variable state is set, the first probability variable state is set. When the jackpot D7 (Fig. 742 (b)) is won five times in a row, the time saving limit of time saving A is reached, and after the jackpot game based on the fifth jackpot D7 winning, the non-time saving state (normal pattern low probability state) is set. In other words, the first probability variable state (high probability state of normal symbols) is set up to five times consecutively.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 741 (b), after the first probability variable state is set, when the jackpot D7 and the jackpot E7 in which the short time is set are alternately elected, the high probability state of the normal pattern is up to 9 times. Set consecutively. In addition, when the time saving B (time saving state) is set, when the time saving end condition (for example, when the number of fluctuations of the special symbol reaches 100 times) is established, the low probability non-working time saving state (normal state) is set. Therefore, in order for the time saving state to continue for the maximum period, it is necessary to win the jackpot four times before the time saving end condition is satisfied in the time saving B (time saving state).

Thus, in the 41st embodiment, since it is possible to change the period in which the time saving state is continuously set depending on the jackpot type at the time of winning the jackpot, it is possible to tell the player which jackpot type has been won. By arousing interest, the amusement of the game can be improved.

Based on the above, the outline of the production in the 41st embodiment will be described. In the forty-first embodiment, when a jackpot with a high probability state of normal symbols is won, in the main display area Dm, as shown in FIG. A production that endures so as not to fall is executed. Turtle 812 corresponds to the first probability variable jackpot where time saving A is set (for example, jackpot D7 (Fig. 742 (b))), rabbit 805 corresponds to time saving jackpot where time saving B is set (for example, jackpot E7 (Fig. 742 ( Corresponding to b))), for example, when the jackpot D7 is won, the corresponding turtle 812 slides on the first rope 814a and an effect is executed in which it approaches the sea. Then, when the time saving A reaches the time saving limit, an effect is executed in which the turtle 812 falls from the first rope 814a into the sea.

Thus, in the forty-first embodiment, when a jackpot in which a high probability state of normal symbols is set is won after the jackpot game ends, the player grasps which jackpot type it is by the movements of the rabbit 805 or the turtle 812. For example, when the remaining number of times of the time saving A limit is 1 time and the remaining number of times of the time saving B limit is 2 times or more, it is possible to make the player want to win the jackpot in which the time saving B is set. Therefore, the amusement of the game can be improved.

Next, the details of the presentation in the 41st embodiment will be described. Fig. 739(a) is an example of a variation effect screen in the case of winning a jackpot in which the time saving A is set when the time saving A limit remaining number of times is 4 times and the time saving B limit remaining number of times is 5 times during the first probability variation. . In the main display area Dm, as described above, an effect in which the rabbit 805 and the turtle 812 hold on to the rope and endure is executed. In addition, the scale of the first gauge 813a is variably displayed corresponding to the value of the first time reduction limit number counter 203fa, and the scale of the second gauge 813b is variably displayed corresponding to the value of the second time reduction limit number counter 203fb. It is configured to be The first gauge 813a and the second gauge 813b display the value of each time saving limit number counter in 5 stages, and in the case of FIG. 739(a), the value of the time saving A limit number counter 203fa is 1 time. Therefore, the scale of the first gauge 813a is variably displayed by one scale white. In addition, since the second gauge 813b has a value of 0 (that is, the time saving B limit number of times is not set) of the second time saving limit number counter 203fb, all scales are displayed in black.

Also, "Pinch" is displayed in the first display area HR1, suggesting that the rabbit 805 or the turtle 812 is about to fall. This display makes it possible for the player to predict that he or she will win a big win, and it is possible to make the player interested in which kind of big win the player will win.

FIG. 739(b) is a special symbol stop to show that the jackpot in which the time saving A is set is won when the time saving A limit remaining number of times is 4 times and the time saving B limit remaining number of times is 5 times during the first probability variable state It is a production screen that is displayed at times. From the state of FIG. 739 (a), in the special figure 2 variable display area Dm3, the second special symbol for indicating that the jackpot in which the time saving A is set is won is stopped and displayed, and in the main display area Dm, the turtle 812 slides on the first rope 814a and approaches the sea. Then, in the first gauge 813a, the time reduction calculated by predicting that the value of the first time reduction limit number counter 203fa after the end of the jackpot game will be incremented by 1 by winning the jackpot in which the time reduction A is set. In order to indicate 2, which is the value of the A-limit number counter, the scale of the first gauge 813a is changed to white by one, and a total of two scales are displayed in white.

When all the scales of one of the gauges become white, that is, when the value of the time saving limit number counter reaches 5, an effect is executed in which the corresponding character falls from the rope into the sea.

In this way, the scale of the gauge is variably displayed corresponding to the value of each time-saving limit number counter after the end of the jackpot game, so that the minimum number of times that the high probability state of the normal symbol can continue for the player. can be predicted, and since each gauge has a maximum of 5 scales, it is possible to recognize the maximum number of times that the high probability state of the normal symbol can continue.

In addition, in this embodiment, it is possible to determine which jackpot type has been selected, the first probability variable jackpot in which the time saving A is set when the jackpot is won, or the time saving jackpot in which the time saving B is set, by the movements of the rabbit 805 and the turtle 812. However, there is a possibility that some players may be disappointed that the first probability variable state, which is more advantageous than the time-saving state, is not set after the end of the jackpot game due to the performance of the rabbit 805 slipping, for example.

Therefore, it may be configured such that an effect in which only the turtle 812 (or the rabbit 805) is caught by the rope is executed, and the period during which the high probability state of the normal symbol can be continued is notified by one gauge. In this case, the scale of the gauge is displayed in 5 stages (all scales are displayed in black). display in white (one white scale and four black scales). In this state, if you win a jackpot with time saving B set, the remaining number of time saving A limit will be 4 times, and the remaining number of time saving B limit will be 4 times, but the scale of the gauge will not be changed, and next time saving B will be If you win the set jackpot and the remaining number of time reduction A limit is 4 times and the remaining number of time reduction B limit is 3 times, two scales on the gauge will be displayed in white (two white scales, black There will be 3 ticks.). That is, it is configured to notify the shortest period in which the high probability state of the normal symbol can end. By configuring in this way, since the player does not know which jackpot type is selected when the jackpot is won, it becomes difficult to predict whether the game state set after the jackpot game is the first variable state or the time saving state, It is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, as another example of the configuration to notify with one gauge, the gauge is not provided with a scale, and the displayed gauge amount (the part displayed in black in the gauge) is the value of the first time reduction limit number counter 203fa and the second It is good also as a structure which changes and displays according to the value of time saving limit frequency counter 203fb. In this case, the disappearance of the portion displayed in black in the gauge indicates to the player that the time reduction limit has been reached. With this configuration, it is possible to provide the player with the pleasure of predicting the shortest period during which the high probability state of the normal symbols will end from the displayed gauge amount.

Figure 740(a) shows that when the remaining number of times of the time saving A limit is 1 time and the remaining number of times of the time saving B limit is 1 time, that is, the period until reaching the time saving limit becomes the longest, and when the next jackpot is won, either It is an example of a special symbol variation effect screen when reaching the time saving limit. In the main display area Dm, the first gauge 813a and the second gauge 813b indicate that the value of the first time reduction limit number counter 203fa is 4, and the value of the second time reduction limit number counter 203fb is 4. is displayed in white. Also, an effect in which a rabbit 805 and a turtle 812 are on a rescue boat 816 is executed. By executing this effect, the player can be made to recognize that the high probability state of normal symbols will be terminated by the next big win winning regardless of the big win type.

In the forty-first embodiment, when the time-saving limit is reached by winning the jackpot, a game state in which the degree of advantage differs after the jackpot game ends is set depending on which type of time-saving type the time-saving limit is reached. Specifically, when the first probability variable jackpot set with time reduction A is won and the time reduction A limit is reached, a high probability non-time reduction state (second probability change state) is set after the jackpot game ends, and time reduction B is set. When the set time-saving jackpot is won and the time-saving B limit is reached, a low-probability non-time-saving state (normal state), which is a state more disadvantageous than the second probability variable state, is set after the jackpot game ends. Therefore, when a jackpot that reaches the time-saving limit is won, an effect suggesting a game state set after the jackpot game ends may be executed. By configuring in this way, the player can recognize in advance the game state set after the end of the big win game, so that the game can be smoothly played in accordance with the game state set after the end of the big win game.

FIG. 740(b) is an example of an effect screen executed when time saving B (time saving state) is set and the end condition of the normal symbol high probability state is established before winning the jackpot. In response to the establishment of the time-saving end condition, an effect is executed in which the shark 815 jumps up and eats the rabbit 805 and the turtle 812 in the main display area Dm. In addition, the scales of the first gauge 813a and the second gauge 813b are all displayed in white when the time saving end condition is satisfied regardless of the scales immediately before the time saving end condition is satisfied. In addition, in the sub-display area Ds, "RUSH finished..." is displayed to inform the player that the high probability state of the normal symbols has ended.

In the forty-first embodiment, the shark 815 is configured to move only when the time-saving end condition is satisfied, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when the high-probability state of normal symbols is set, the shark 815 is drawn every time the total execution count of the first special symbol lottery and the second special symbol lottery is executed a predetermined number of times (for example, every 10 times). An effect of moving around on the surface of the sea may be executed, or when a predetermined number of times is reached (for example, when reaching 90 times), the player may be configured to move violently around. By configuring in this way, the movement of the shark 815 makes it possible for the player to predict that the time-saving end condition is approaching, and the interest in the game can be improved.

In addition, in the case where the player does not know the type of jackpot at the time of winning the jackpot as described above, when the first variable probability state is set, the shark 815 moves slowly, and when the time saving state is set. Alternatively, the shark 815 may be configured to move around violently. By configuring in this way, the player can guess the game state from the motion and stillness of the shark 815, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the time saving end condition is satisfied during the time saving state, the production of FIG. However, it is not limited to this. For example, in the first probability variable state, in the case of a configuration in which the high probability non-time saving state (second probability variable state) is set based on the fact that the time saving end condition is satisfied, the second after FIG. 740 (b) is displayed You may perform the production|presentation which alert|reports that a probability change state is set. In addition, as an internal control, in a state where the first probability variable state is set, the production of FIG. Also good. In this way, by executing an unexpected effect for the player who is disappointed by the effect shown in FIG.

In this embodiment, the configuration is such that an effect using the rabbit 805 and the turtle 812 is executed, but the present invention is not limited to this, and an effect using other characters may be executed.

<Regarding the flow of the game until reaching the time saving limit in the 41st embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIG. 741, the game flow until reaching the time reduction limit in the forty-first embodiment will be described. Figure 741 (a) shows the flow of the game when the shortest working hours limit is reached, and Figure 741 (b) shows the flow of the game with the longest period until reaching the short working hours limit. It is a thing.

As shown in FIG. 741 (a), when the jackpot (first probability variable jackpot) in which the high probability state of the normal pattern is set in the normal state (low probability state of the normal pattern) is set, the jackpot At the end of the game, "5" is set to the value of the first time saving limit number counter 203fa as the time saving limit number of time saving type (time saving A) corresponding to the first probability variable state, and time saving type corresponding to the time saving state (time saving B ), "5" is set to the value of the second time saving limit counter 203fb as the time saving limit number of times.

Then, when the jackpot is won again during the first probability variable state and the jackpot is the first probability variable jackpot, the first time reduction corresponding to the time reduction type (time reduction A) set this time at the end of the second jackpot game. The value of the limit number counter 203fa is subtracted by 1 to become "4". After that, when the first probability variable jackpot is won continuously, the value of the second time saving limit number counter 203fb is never updated (while maintaining "5"), only the value of the first time saving limit number counter 203fa is subtracted, and at the end of the fifth jackpot game after the high probability state of the normal symbol is set, the value of the first time reduction limit number counter 203fa becomes "0" to reach the time reduction limit, and normal Short-time limit processing for forcibly changing the high-probability state of the pattern to the low-probability state of the normal pattern is executed, and a second variable probability state (high-probability state of the special pattern, low-probability state of the normal pattern) is set.

In other words, the pattern shown in FIG. 741 (a), without ever updating the value of the second time saving limit number of times counter 203fb, only the value of the first time saving limit number of times counter 203fa is continuously updated to the time saving limit Since it has reached, the period in which the high probability state of the normal pattern is continuously set (normal pattern high probability period) is the pattern that ends the shortest.

Here, in the forty-first embodiment, the state in which the second variable probability state is set is configured to be an extended period in which the execution efficiency of the special symbol lottery is lower than when other game states are set. ing. Specifically, during the second probability variation state, a variation time of 10 minutes is set as the variation pattern of the first special symbol variation, and a variation time of 1 minute is set as the variation pattern of the second special symbol variation. ing.

Therefore, when the time saving limit of time saving A corresponding to the first probability changing state is reached, the maximum period until the second probability changing state is set four times continuously (the period until reaching the probability changing limit), A delay period will be set.

On the other hand, in the pattern shown in FIG. 741 (b), within the general pattern high probability period in which the high probability state of the normal symbol is continuously set, the time saving state is set after the jackpot game ends, and the time saving state is set. It shows the flow of the game when an event of winning a probability variable jackpot (pull-back winning) occurs while the game is running.

Specifically, when the jackpot (first probability variable jackpot) in which the high probability state of the normal pattern is set in the normal state (low probability state of the normal pattern) is set, when the jackpot game ends, the second As the time saving limit number of time saving type (time saving A) corresponding to 1 probability variable state, "5" is set to the value of the first time saving limit number counter 203fa, and the time saving type corresponding to the time saving state (time saving B) time saving limit number of times , "5" is set to the value of the second time saving limit counter 203fb.

Then, when the jackpot is won again during the first probability variable state and the jackpot is the first probability variable jackpot, the first time reduction corresponding to the time reduction type (time reduction A) set this time at the end of the second jackpot game. The value of the limit number counter 203fa is subtracted by 1 to become "4". After that, when the time saving jackpot is won during the first probability variable state, the value of the second time saving limit number counter 203fb corresponding to the time saving type (time saving B) set this time is subtracted by 1 at the end of the third jackpot game. ”. After the third jackpot game is completed, the time saving state is set. Here, in the forty-first embodiment, when the time saving state is set, "100 special symbol fluctuation times" is set as the time saving end condition for ending the time saving state, and during the time saving state If the time-saving end condition is met without winning the jackpot, the time-saving state (high probability state of normal patterns) ends and the normal state (low probability state of normal patterns) regardless of whether or not the time saving limit is reached. It is configured to clear the value of each time saving limit number counter (first time saving limit number counter 203fa, second time saving limit number counter 203fb) to 0. In that case, in FIG. 740 (b) The indicated ending effect is executed.

The pattern shown in FIG. 741 (b) shows an example of winning the first probability variable jackpot (pulling back winning) during the time saving state set after the end of the third jackpot game, so the normal pattern high probability period continues Then, at the end of the fourth jackpot game, the value of the first time saving limit number counter 203fa corresponding to the time saving type (time saving A) set this time is subtracted by 1 to become "3". After that, the winning of the jackpot (first probability variable jackpot, time-saving jackpot) in the first probability variable state and the winning of the jackpot (first probability variable jackpot, time-saving jackpot) in the time-saving state are repeated, and the value of the first time-shortening limit number counter 203fa is "1", and the value of the second time saving limit number counter 203fb becomes "1" (the time saving state is set after the 9th jackpot game ends). Then, in the example shown in FIG. 741(b), the time saving jackpot is finally won, the time saving limit is reached after the jackpot game ends, and the normal state is set.

At this point, even if you win any jackpot (first probability variable jackpot, time-short jackpot) next time, the state of reaching the short-time limit, that is, the state in which the longest period is set as the normal high-probability period is shown. In this state, the effect of the effect mode shown in FIG. 740(a) described above is executed. By configuring in this way, it is possible to inform the player in an easy-to-understand manner that the normal pattern high probability period is set to be the longest.

In addition, in the state where the value of the first time saving limit number counter 203fa is "1" and the value of the second time saving limit number counter 203fb is "1", which jackpot (first probability variable jackpot, time saving jackpot) Even if you win, the short time limit will be reached, so from the perspective of the length of the normal high probability period, the value will be the same whether you win the first variable jackpot or win the short time jackpot. .

However, the game state set after reaching the time reduction limit differs between when the first probability variable jackpot is won and when the time saving jackpot is won. Specifically, when the time-saving limit is reached at the end of the jackpot game winning the first probability variable jackpot, the high-probability state of the normal design is forcibly changed to the low-probability state of the normal design. If the probability variable state is set and the time-saving limit is reached at the end of the jackpot game that has been elected to the time-saving jackpot, the high-probability state of the normal pattern is forcibly changed to the low-probability state of the normal pattern, so the normal state is set.

In other words, from the viewpoint of the game state set after reaching the time-saving limit, the player is provided with benefits of different values depending on whether the player wins the variable probability jackpot or wins the time-saving jackpot.

Therefore, for example, as shown in FIG. 740 (a), when the jackpot is won in a state in which the effect is being executed to notify that the normal pattern high probability period will always end in the next jackpot win, the time saving limit It is preferable to display a display mode that can suggest the game state to be set after reaching the player.

By configuring in this way, while notifying the player that he/she has received the benefit of continuing the normal pattern high probability period the longest, it is possible to suggest the game state to be set next, To allow a player to shift his/her interest to the contents of a game to be executed after a normal pattern high probability period ends, and to keep the player interested in the game.

In addition, in FIG. 740 (a), the second probability variable state is set when the time saving limit is reached, and in FIG. 741 (b), when the time saving limit is reached, the normal state is set. As described above, in the forty-first embodiment, since the second variable probability state is configured to be the gaming state with the lowest gaming efficiency, for the player who wants to play for a short time, the time saving limit A game in which a period (ordinary pattern high probability period) is set as long as possible and a normal state is set after the end of the normal pattern high probability period can be an advantageous game.

<Regarding the electrical configuration of the 41st embodiment>
Next, the electrical configuration of the forty-first embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 742 to 745. FIG. In the forty-first embodiment, part of the configuration of the ROM 202 of the main controller 110, part of the configuration of the RAM 203, and the configuration of the RAM 223 of the sound lamp control device 113 are different from the above-described thirty-fifth embodiment. They are different in that they are partially changed. Other than that, they are identical. The same reference numerals are assigned to the same configurations, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The ROM 202 possessed by the main controller 110 in the present embodiment is a special figure 1 jackpot category selection table 202b1 ( Figure 613 (b) reference) instead of the special figure 1 jackpot type selection 7 table 202fb1, instead of the special figure 2 jackpot type selection table 202b2, the special figure 2 jackpot type selection 7 table 202fb2 is used, and time saving is given Table 202e (see FIG. 617) is different from the point of using the reduction in working hours provision 7 table 202fe, and other than that is the same. The same reference numerals are assigned to the same configurations, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Here, with reference to FIG. 742(a), the contents defined in the special figure 1 jackpot type selection 7 table 202fb1 will be described. FIG. 742(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the special figure 1 jackpot type selection 7 table 202fb1. As shown in FIG. 742(a), the special figure 1 jackpot type selection 7 table 202fb1 is different from the special figure 1 jackpot type selection table 202b1 (see FIG. 613(b)) in the thirty-fifth embodiment described above. The game state set after the end of the jackpot game specified for the type is different, and the jackpot type in which the high-probability state of normal symbols is set. They are different in that respect.

Specifically, "jackpot A7 (2R jackpot)" is defined in the range of "0 to 132" for the value of the first hit type counter C2, and "jackpot B7 (2R jackpot)” is defined, and “jackpot C7 (2R jackpot)” is defined for values of “180 to 199”.

When the jackpot type is ``jackpot A7'', the ``second probability variable state'' is set after the jackpot game is finished regardless of the game state (game state at the time of winning) at the time of winning (at the time of winning the jackpot). Also, if the jackpot type is "jackpot B7", the "first probability variable state (time reduction A)" after the jackpot game ends regardless of the game state (game state at the time of winning) at the time of winning (at the time of winning the jackpot) set. Furthermore, when the jackpot type is ``jackpot C7'', the ``time saving state (time saving B)'' is set after the jackpot game ends regardless of the game state at the time of winning (at the time of winning the jackpot). there is

Here, in the forty-first embodiment, when the high probability state of the normal symbol is set, different time saving types can be set, and the time saving limit number can be updated for each set time saving type. is doing. Therefore, if the game state is set biased towards one of the time-saving types, and if both time-saving types are set evenly, the period in which the high probability state of the normal pattern is set continuously (normal pattern high probability It is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand the period until the short-time limit processing is executed and the low-probability state of the normal symbol is forcibly set.

Next, with reference to FIG. 742(b), the contents defined in the special figure 2 jackpot type selection 7 table 202fb2 will be described. FIG. 742(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the special figure 2 jackpot type selection 7 table 202fb2. As shown in FIG. 742(b), the special figure 2 jackpot type selection 7 table 202fb2 is each jackpot type for the special figure 2 jackpot type selection table 202b2 (see FIG. 613(c)) in the thirty-fifth embodiment described above. The point that the game state set after the end of the jackpot game specified for is different, and the jackpot type in which the high probability state of the normal pattern is set. is different.

Specifically, "jackpot D7" is defined in the range of "0 to 179" for the value of the first hit type counter C2, and "jackpot E7" is defined for the value of "180 to 199". It is

Then, when the jackpot type is "jackpot D7", regardless of the game state (game state at the time of winning) at the time of winning (at the time of winning the jackpot), the "first variable state (time reduction A)" after the jackpot game ends. set. Further, when the jackpot type is "jackpot E7", regardless of the game state at the time of winning (at the time of jackpot winning), the "time saving state (time saving B)" is set after the jackpot game ends. there is

Here, in the forty-first embodiment, when the high probability state of the normal symbol is set, different time saving types can be set, and the time saving limit number can be updated for each set time saving type. is doing. Therefore, if the game state is set biased towards one of the time-saving types, and if both time-saving types are set evenly, the period in which the high probability state of the normal pattern is set continuously (normal pattern high probability It is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand the period until the short-time limit processing is executed and the low-probability state of the normal symbol is forcibly set.

Furthermore, in the 41st embodiment, the time reduction type set in association with the jackpot type is differentiated between the first probability variable jackpot (time reduction A) and the time reduction jackpot (time reduction B). Therefore, if you win the time-saving jackpot in the state where the first probability variable state is set, and you win the first probability variable jackpot in the situation where the time-saving state is set, that is, from the high probability state of the special symbol to the low probability state After the transition, if you win the jackpot where the high probability state of the special pattern is set again, it is more likely that you will win the jackpot continuously during the period in which the high probability state of the special pattern is continuously set. It is configured so that the figure high probability period can be lengthened.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to provide the player with added value when a big win is won in the low probability state of the special symbol, so that the player's willingness to play can be enhanced.

Next, with reference to FIG. 742(c), the contents of the special figure 2 variation pattern table 202fd1 will be described. Figure 742 (c) is a diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the special figure 2 variation pattern table 202fd1. As shown in FIG. 742(c), the special figure 2 variation pattern table 202fd1 defines the variation pattern of the second special symbol (special figure 2) set according to each game state.

Specifically, when the gaming state is "normal (normal state)", the result of winning or not determination (special drawing lottery result), and regardless of the value of the acquired variation type counter CS1, the variation time is 10 minutes. (600000 milliseconds) "super long fluctuation" is, if the "first probability variation (first probability variation state)", the result of the decision (special figure lottery result), and the value of the acquired variation type counter CS1 Regardless, if the "short variation" with a variation time of 2 seconds (2000 milliseconds) is the "second probability variation (second probability variation state)", the success or failure determination result (special figure lottery result), and Regardless of the value of the acquired variation type counter CS1, if the "long variation" with a variation time of 1 minute (60000 milliseconds) is "time saving (time saving state)", the success or failure determination result (special drawing lottery result ), and “short fluctuation” with a fluctuation time of 2 seconds (2000 milliseconds) are set as fluctuation patterns, respectively, regardless of the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 that is acquired.

By configuring in this way, when the first probability variable state is set and when the time saving state is set, since the variation pattern of the same content is set, FIG. 739, FIG. 740 , it is possible to make it difficult for the player to predict the currently set game state based on the variation pattern of the special symbol variation being executed in the state where the above-described effect is being executed.

The variation time of the variation pattern selected when the second variable probability state is set is longer than when the first variable probability state and the time saving state are set.

By configuring in this way, in the case of shifting from the first variable probability state to the second variable probability state, it is possible to lower the execution efficiency of the special symbol lottery, and the player can acquire excessive balls in a short time. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation where

In addition, as described above with reference to FIG. 741, in the forty-first embodiment, the specific value (9) is set as the number of times that the high probability state of the special symbol can be set continuously, and the normal symbol "5" can be set for each time saving type as the number of times that the high probability state can be set continuously. Then, the first variable probability state is continuously set, and when the time saving limit corresponding to the first variable probability state (time saving limit of time saving A) is reached, the second probability changing state is set. (See FIG. 741(a)). In this case, as described above, since the "long variation" is set as the variation pattern of the second special symbol variation, the execution efficiency of the special symbol lottery is lowered.

On the other hand, as shown in Figure 741 (b), if the time saving limit corresponding to the time saving state is reached, or if the time saving end condition is satisfied during the time saving state, the second probability variable state is not set, It is configured to transition to a normal state.

By configuring in this way, the length of the period in which the second variable probability state is set can be varied according to the type of the time reduction limit that has been reached.

In addition, the variation pattern of the first special symbol variation in the forty-first embodiment is set with the same content as the above-described thirty-fifth embodiment when the normal state, the first probability variation state, and the time saving state are set. When the second probability variable state is set, it is set by referring to the variation pattern table with the same contents as the variation pattern table referred to when the first probability variable state is set in the thirty-fifth embodiment described above. , and detailed illustration thereof is omitted. Therefore, in the forty-first embodiment, even when the second probability variation state is set, a variation time of 10 minutes (600000 milliseconds) is set as the variation pattern of the first special symbol variation.

Next, with reference to FIG. 743, the content prescribed|regulated to the time reduction provision 7 table 202fe is demonstrated. Drawing 743 is a mimetic diagram showing typically the contents of time saving provision 7 table 202fe. As shown in FIG. 743, the time saving 7 table 202fe is the time saving giving number for the jackpot type (jackpot C7, E7) for which the high probability state of the special symbol is not set with respect to the time saving giving table 202e (see FIG. 617). It is different in that it stipulates

Specifically, as described above, the jackpot type "jackpot A7" is not a jackpot type in which the high probability state of the normal symbol is set, so regardless of the setting status of the probability variable limit reach flag 203u and the time reduction limit reach flag 203v , The number of time saving times given is “0”.

The jackpot types "jackpot B7" and "jackpot D7" are when both the probability variable limit reach flag 203u and the time saving limit reach flag 203v are set to off, the number of time saving times granted "65535 (substantially until the next time)" is defined, the variable probability limit reach flag 203u is set to ON, and when the time saving limit reach flag 203v is set to OFF, the number of time saving times given "100" is defined. In addition, when the time saving limit reaching flag 203v is set to off, since the low probability state of the normal symbol is forcibly set, regardless of the setting status of the probability variation limit reaching flag 203u, the number of time saving times given "0" is defined.

On the other hand, the jackpot types "jackpot C7" and "jackpot E7" are when both the probability variation limit reach flag 203u and the time saving limit reach flag 203v are set to off, or the probability variation limit reach flag 203u is set to on, When the time saving limit reach|attainment flag 203v is set to OFF, the number "100" of provision of the time saving frequency is prescribed|regulated. In addition, when the time saving limit reaching flag 203v is set to off, since the low probability state of the normal symbol is forcibly set, regardless of the setting status of the probability variation limit reaching flag 203u, the number of time saving times given "0" is defined.

Next, with reference to FIG. 744, the configuration of the RAM 203 included in the main controller 110 of the pachinko machine 10 in the forty-first embodiment will be described. FIG. 744 is a diagram schematically showing the configuration of the RAM 203 of the main controller 110 in the forty-first embodiment. As shown in FIG. 744, in the forty-first embodiment, the configuration of the RAM203 of the thirty-fifth embodiment described above (see FIG. 621), instead of the time saving limit number counter 203i, the first time saving limit number counter 203fa and It is different in that it is provided with the second time saving limit counter 203fb. Since other configurations are the same, the same reference numerals are given and detailed description thereof is omitted.

1st time-saving limit frequency counter 203fa is a counter in which the time-saving limit frequency|count set with respect to time-saving classification "time-saving A" is set. In this counter, when the high probability state of the normal design is set, the value of "5" is set (see S3083 in FIG. 746), and after that, the high probability state of the normal design continues and the time is reduced. When the jackpot winning type "time saving A" is set, the value is updated (subtracted) at the end of the jackpot game (see S3086 in Fig. 746). Then, it is referred to in the process of determining whether the time saving limit has been reached (S3087 in FIG. 746). The value of the first time saving limit counter 203fa is cleared to 0 when the high probability state of the normal symbol ends (see S3090 in FIG. 746).

2nd time-saving limit frequency|count counter 203fb is a counter by which the time-saving limit frequency|count set with respect to time-saving classification "time-saving B" is set. In this counter, when the high probability state of the normal design is set, the value of "5" is set (see S3083 in FIG. 746), and after that, the high probability state of the normal design continues and the time is reduced. When the jackpot winning type "time saving A" is set, the value is updated (subtracted) at the end of the jackpot game (see S3086 in Fig. 746). Then, it is referred to in the process of determining whether the time saving limit has been reached (S3087 in FIG. 746). The value of the second time saving limit counter 203fb is cleared to 0 when the high probability state of the normal symbol ends (see S3090 in FIG. 746).

In addition, in the forty-first embodiment, when the jackpot is elected in the low probability state of the normal symbol, and the high probability state of the normal symbol is set after the jackpot game ends, the above-described first time reduction limit number counter 203fa, the second Although it is configured to set a value of "5" for any of the time-saving limit number counters 203fb, it is not limited to this, and the time-saving type (time-saving A, time-saving B) may be specified, and a specific value “5” may be set only to the counter corresponding to the specified time saving type.

In addition, in the 41st embodiment, the same value ("5") is set for both the first time saving limit number counter 203fa and the second time saving limit number counter 203fb. Without being limited to, it may be configured to be able to set different values for each, and based on the technical idea of the 39th embodiment described above, a different specific value is defined for each time saving type Jackpot A classification may be provided. With this configuration, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand the period during which the normal pattern high probability period continues.

Next, with reference to FIG. 745, the configuration of the RAM 223 included in the MPU 221 of the sound ramp control device 113 in the pachinko machine 10 of the forty-first embodiment will be described. FIG. 745 is a diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113. As shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 745, the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 in the forty-first embodiment has the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 in the thirty-fifth embodiment described above, and the remaining time reduction count The difference is that a first short remaining time counter 223fa and a second short remaining time counter 223fb are provided instead of the counter 223n, and a first gauge counter 223fc and a second gauge counter 223fd are added. there is Since other configurations are the same, the same reference numerals are given and detailed description thereof is omitted.

When the first remaining time reduction counter 223fa receives a time reduction limit number command indicating the value of the first time reduction limit number counter 203fa updated in the main controller 110, the value is based on the information included in the received command. It is a counter to be updated, and is a counter used for specifying the remaining period until the time saving type "time saving A" reaches the time saving limit on the audio lamp control device 113 side.

When the second remaining time reduction counter 223fb receives a time reduction limit number command indicating the value of the second time reduction limit number counter 203fb updated in the main controller 110, the value is based on the information included in the received command. It is a counter to be updated, and is a counter used for specifying the remaining period until the time saving type "time saving B" reaches the time saving limit on the audio lamp control device 113 side.

The first gauge counter 223fc is a counter referred to when determining the display mode (stage) of the first gauge 813a executed in the display area of the third symbol display device 81, and is a first remaining time reduction counter. The counter value is updated based on the value of H.223fa.

The second gauge counter 223fd is a counter referred to when determining the display mode (stage) of the second gauge 813b executed in the display area of the third symbol display device 81, and is a second remaining short time counter. The counter value is updated based on the value of 223fb.

In the forty-first embodiment, the number of stages that can be displayed by the first gauge 813a and the second gauge 813b is configured to be the same as the value (5) actually set as the time reduction limit number of times, and the first gauge By checking the display mode (updated content) of the 813a and the second gauge 813b, when the jackpot is won, the player can easily grasp which type of time reduction is set, but it is not limited to this. , the update content of the value of the first short remaining time number counter 223fa and the update content of the value of the second short remaining time number counter 223fb are subjected to predetermined arithmetic processing, and based on the processing result, the first gauge 813a , the second gauge 813b may be configured to be variable and displayable in a step number different from the value (5) actually set as the time reduction limit number of times. In this case, the first gauge counter 223fc and the second gauge counter 223fd may be configured so as to set values based on the result of arithmetic processing.

<Control processing executed by main controller 110 in the 41st embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIG. 746, each control process executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 in the forty-first embodiment will be described. In this embodiment, the time saving limit update process 7 (see S2882 in FIG. 746) is performed instead of the time saving limit update process (see S2802 in FIG. 660) with respect to the thirty-fifth embodiment described above. The points are identical. The same parts are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

With reference to FIG. 746, time saving limit update processing 7 (S2882) executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 in the forty-first embodiment will be described. FIG. 746 is a flowchart showing the contents of the time saving limit update process 7 (S2882). The time saving limit update process 7 (S2882) in this embodiment is based on the winning jackpot type for the time saving limit update process (see S2802 in FIG. 660) in the thirty-fifth embodiment described above. Processing to update the time saving limit number of times The difference is that the Since other processing is the same, the same reference numerals are given and detailed description thereof is omitted.

In the time saving limit update process 7 (S2882), first, the processes of S3001 to S3002 are executed, and in the process of S3002, the jackpot type being executed is a jackpot in which a high probability state of normal symbols is set after the jackpot game ends. When it is determined that there is (S3002: Yes), the time saving type corresponding to the jackpot type being executed is specified (S3081). Next, it is determined whether the value of the time saving limit number counter (first time saving limit number counter 203fa, second time saving limit number counter 203fb) corresponding to the specified time saving type is greater than 0 (S3082).

When it is determined that the value of the corresponding time saving limit number counter (first time saving limit number counter 203fa, second time saving limit number counter 203fb) is not a value greater than 0 (S3082: No), each time saving limit number counter ( 5 is set to the value of 1st time saving limit frequency counter 203fa, 2nd time saving limit frequency counter 203fb) (S3083), the time saving flag 203f is set to ON (S3084), and this process is complete|finished.

On the other hand, in the process of S3082, the value of the time saving limit number counter (first time saving limit number counter 203fa, second time saving limit number counter 203fb) corresponding to the time saving type of this big hit type is determined to be a value greater than 0 If so (S3082: Yes), the value of the time saving limit number counter (first time saving limit number counter 203fa, second time saving limit number counter 203fb) corresponding to the time saving type of this jackpot type is subtracted by 1 (S3086) .

Next, it is determined whether the value of the corresponding time saving limit number counter (first time saving limit number counter 203fa, second time saving limit number counter 203fb) after the subtraction is 0 (S3087). When it is determined that the value of the corresponding time-saving limit number counter (first time-saving limit number counter 203fa, second time-saving limit number counter 203fb) after subtraction is not 0 (S3087: No), time-saving state is set after the jackpot game ends Therefore, the process of S3084 described above is executed, and this process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S3087, when it is determined that the value of the corresponding time saving limit number counter after subtraction (first time saving limit number counter 203fa, second time saving limit number counter 203fb) is 0 (S3087: Yes) , the processing of S3009 described above is executed, and this processing ends.

On the other hand, in the processing of S3002, when it is determined that the jackpot type that has been elected this time is not the jackpot type in which the high probability state of the normal symbol is set as the game state after the jackpot game ends (S3002: No), It is determined whether the value of either one of the one time reduction limit number counter 203fa and the second time reduction limit number counter 203fb is a value greater than 0 (S3089). When it is determined that the value of either the first time saving limit number counter 203fa or the second time saving limit number counter 203fb is a value greater than 0 (S3089: Yes), the first time saving limit number counter 203fa and The value of the second time saving limit frequency counter 203fb is cleared to 0 (S3090), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of either the first time saving limit number counter 203fa or the second time saving limit number counter 203fb is not greater than 0 (S3089: No), this process is terminated as it is.

<Regarding control processing of the audio ramp control device 113 in the 41st embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 747 to 750, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio ramp control device 113 in the 41st embodiment will be described. In the forty-first embodiment, in place of the limit information update process (see S4304 in FIG. 667), limit information update process 7 (see S4374 in FIG. (See S4305 in Figure 668) Instead of production mode setting process 7 (see S4375 in Figure 749), instead of special figure 2 fluctuation production setting process (see S5109 in Figure 675), special figure 2 fluctuation production setting process 7 (see S5179 in FIG. 750) and the point of executing the time saving remaining number update process (see S4571 in FIG. 748) is added and executed, and the rest is the same. The same processing contents are assigned the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof is omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 747, the limit information update process 7 (S4374) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio ramp control device 113 in the forty-first embodiment will be described. FIG. 747 is a flowchart showing the contents of limit information update processing 7 (S4374). The limit information update process 7 (S4374) differs from the limit information update process (see S4304 in FIG. 667) in the thirty-fifth embodiment described above in that the time saving remaining number update process (S4571) is executed. Since the other processes are the same, the same reference numerals are used and detailed descriptions thereof are omitted.

In the limit information update process 7 (S4374), first, the processes of S4501 to S4509 described above are executed, and in the process of S4509, if it is determined that the time saving limit number command has been received (S4509: Yes), the remaining number of time saving Update processing (S4571) is executed. A detailed description of the time saving remaining number update process (S4571) will be given later with reference to FIG. Then, the processing of S4511 to S4517 is executed, and this processing ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 748, time saving remaining number update process (S4571) which is one process in limit information update process 7 (S4374) executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 in the forty-first embodiment explain. FIG. 748 is a flowchart showing the content of the time saving remaining number update process (S4571). In this time saving remaining number update process (S4571), based on the received time saving limit number command, the corresponding time saving remaining number counter (first remaining short time number counter 223fa, second remaining short time number counter 223fb) processing to update the value to run.

In the time saving remaining number update process (S4571), first, it is determined whether the time saving limit number command received this time is a command indicating the update of the first time saving limit number (S4581). When it is determined that the time saving limit number command received this time is a command indicating the update of the first time saving limit number of times (S4581: Yes), the value of the first remaining time saving number counter 223fa is subtracted by 1 (S4582), The process proceeds to S4583. On the other hand, in the processing of S4581, when it is determined that it is not the command indicating the update of the received first time saving limit number of times (S4581: No), the processing of S4582 described above is skipped, and this processing ends.

After executing the processing of S4581 or S4582, it is determined whether the time saving limit frequency command received this time is a command indicating update of the second time saving limit frequency (S4583). If it is determined that the time saving limit number command received this time is a command indicating the update of the second time saving limit number of times (S4583: Yes), the value of the second remaining time saving number counter 223fb is subtracted by 1 (S4584), End this process. On the other hand, in the process of S4583, when it is determined that the time saving limit number command received this time is not a command indicating the update of the second time saving limit number of times (S4583: No), the above-described S4584 process is skipped and left as it is. End this process.

Next, with reference to FIG. 749, the production mode setting process 7 (S4375) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 in the forty-first embodiment will be described. FIG. 749 is a flow chart showing the contents of the production mode setting process 7 (S4375). Production mode setting processing 7 (S4375) is, in contrast to the production mode setting processing (see S4305 in FIG. 668) in the thirty-fifth embodiment described above, when the remaining time short limit number of times is 1, the time saving ending mode is set as the production mode. The difference is that processing for setting is executed. Since the other processes are the same, the same reference numerals are used and detailed descriptions thereof are omitted.

In production mode setting processing 7 (S4375), first, the processing of S4601 described above is executed, and in the processing of S4601, it is determined that both the probability variation limit flag 223o and the time reduction limit flag 223p are not set to ON. If so (S4601: No), the above-described processes of S4603 and S4604 are executed. Next, the current game state is specified from the sub-game state storage area 223j (S4671), and it is determined whether the specified current game state is a normal symbol high probability state (S4672). When it is determined that the specified current game state is not the normal symbol high probability state (S4672: No), the processing of S4605 described above is executed, and this processing ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S4672, when it is determined that the specified game state is the normal symbol high probability state (S4672: Yes), the value of the first short remaining time counter 223fa and the second short remaining time counter 223fb (S4673), and then, in the process of S4673, each value of the read first short remaining time counter 223fa and second short remaining time counter 223fb is read out to the corresponding gauge counter (first gauge counter 223fc, second gauge counter 223fd) (S4674).

Next, it is determined whether each value of the first short remaining time counter 223fa and the second short remaining time counter 223fb read in the process of S4673 is 1 (S4675). When it is determined that both the values of the first short remaining time counter 223fa and the second short remaining time counter 223fb are 1 (S4675: Yes), information indicating the short time ending mode in the production mode storage area 223k is stored (S4676), the processing of S4605 described above is executed, and this processing ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that at least one of the values of the first short remaining time counter 223fa and the second short remaining time counter 223fb read in the process of S4673 is a value other than 1 (S4675: No), The process of S4676 is skipped, the above-described process of S4605 is executed, and this process ends.

Next, with reference to Drawing 750, special figure 2 fluctuation production setting processing 7 (S5179) performed by MPU221 in sound lamp control device 113 in the 41st embodiment is explained. Figure 750 is the flowchart which shows the contents of special figure 2 fluctuation production setting processing 7 (S5179).

In the special figure 2 fluctuation effect setting process 7 (S5179), first, the current game state is read out from the secondary game state storage area 223j (S5371). Next, it is determined whether or not the current game state read out in the process of S5371 is a normal symbol high probability state (S5372). When it is determined that the current game state read out is not the high probability state of normal symbols (S5372: No), the effect mode of the variable pattern effect corresponding to each effect mode and lottery result is set (S5382). , the process ends. On the other hand, in the processing of S5372, when it is determined that the current game state is the high probability state of normal symbols (S5372: Yes), it is determined whether the variation of the special symbol to be executed this time is a big hit variation (S5373). ).

In the processing of S5373, when it is determined that the variation executed this time is not the big hit variation (S5373: No), the value of the time saving counter 223u is read (S5374). Next, it is determined whether the value of the time saving counter 223u read in the process of S5374 is 1 (S5375). That is, it determines whether it is the final variation of the time-saving gaming state. When it is determined that the value of the time saving counter 223u is not 1 (S5375: No), the process of S5382 described above is executed, and this process ends.

On the other hand, in the processing of S5375, when it is determined that the read value of the time saving counter 223u is 1 (S5375: Yes), the effect mode for indicating the time saving end is determined (S5376), and the first gauge counter 223fc , and the second gauge counter 223fd are cleared to 0 (S5377), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S5373, if it is determined that the variation to be executed this time is the jackpot variation (S5373: Yes), the time-saving type corresponding to the winning jackpot type is specified (S5378), then specified The value of the gauge counter (either the first gauge counter 223fc or the second gauge counter 223fd) corresponding to the time saving type is subtracted by 1 (S5379), and the process proceeds to S5380.

In the process of S5380, it is determined whether the value of the gauge counter (either the first gauge counter 223fc or the second gauge counter 223fd) subtracted in the process of S5379 is 0 (S5380). If it is determined that the value of the subtracted gauge counter (either the first gauge counter 223fc or the second gauge counter 223fd) is not 0 (S5380: No), an effect mode for indicating each counter value after subtraction. is determined (S5381), and the process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S5380, if it is determined that the value of the subtracted gauge counter (either the first gauge counter 223fc or the second gauge counter 223fd) is 0 (S5380: Yes), S5376 to S5377 described above , and terminate this process.

<42nd embodiment>
Next, the forty-second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 751 to 759. FIG. The 42nd embodiment is different from the above-described 41st embodiment, during the normal pattern high probability period in which the normal pattern high probability state is set continuously, the jackpot type in which the normal pattern high probability state is set is set, it is different in that it uses a configuration that can reset (return to the initial value) the remaining number of times of the time saving limit.

Specifically, in the forty-first embodiment described above, a plurality of time saving types (time saving A, time saving B) are provided, and for each time saving type, a time saving limit number counter (first time saving limit number counter 203fa, second time saving A limit number counter 203fb) was provided, and it was configured to end the normal figure high probability period when the time saving limit was reached in any of the time saving types.

By configuring in this way, the length of the normal pattern high probability period can be varied according to the jackpot winning situation during the normal pattern high probability period, so the time saving limit number of times is uniform for all time saving types To make it difficult for a conventional pachinko machine 10 whose counter value is updated to predict when the short time limit will be reached, and to play the game while expecting the normal pattern high probability period to be set as long as possible. It was something that allowed people to play games.

However, in the pachinko machine 10 in the forty-first embodiment described above, by providing a different time-saving limit number counter for each time-saving type, it is possible to vary the length of the normal pattern high probability period, but winning the time-saving jackpot Even if you win the first probability variable jackpot, you may reach the time saving limit, so for example, if the jackpot type when reaching the time saving limit is a time saving state (low special symbol) after the jackpot game ends probability state, high probability state of normal design) is set, the normal state (low probability state of special design, low probability state of normal design) is set after the end of the jackpot game, There is a problem that the player's desire to play is reduced.

On the other hand, in the 42nd embodiment, among a plurality of time saving types (time saving A, time saving B), only for a specific time saving type (time saving A) time saving limit number counter (specific time saving limit number counter 203ga) is provided, and when a specific time saving type (time saving A) is set continuously, the value of the specific time saving limit number counter 203ga is updated (subtracted), and the value of the specific time saving limit number counter 203ga becomes 0 It is configured to determine that the time reduction limit has been reached.

Then, in a state in which a value is set in the specific time saving limit number counter 203ga, when a time saving type (time saving B) other than the specific time saving type is set, the value of the specific time saving limit number counter 203ga is set to the initial value ( It is configured to be reset (reset) to the value set at the time of the first hit.

By configuring in this way, during the normal pattern high probability period in which the high probability state of the normal pattern is set, the jackpot (first probability variable jackpot, time-saving jackpot) in which the high probability state of the normal pattern is set was elected. In the case, since it is possible to extend the period until the normal pattern high probability period ends, it is possible to make it more difficult for the player to understand how long the normal pattern high probability period will continue.

Furthermore, in the 42nd embodiment, the time saving type (time saving A) set when the first probability variable jackpot is won is a specific time saving type, and the time saving type (time saving B) set when the time saving jackpot is won is a specific time saving It is a time-saving type other than the type.

In other words, it is configured so as not to reach the time reduction limit based on winning the time reduction jackpot during the normal pattern high probability period. By configuring in this way, when the time-saving limit is reached and the low-probability state of the normal symbol is forcibly set, the second probability variable state is always set. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player's willingness to play from being lowered due to the setting of the normal state based on the time-saving limit being reached.

In the forty-second embodiment, as in the forty-first embodiment described above, the first variable probability state becomes the most advantageous gaming state for the player, then the second variable probability state and the time saving state become advantageous gaming states, and the normal state is the most disadvantageous game state for the player. Therefore, by configuring to always shift to the second probability variable state based on reaching the time reduction limit, the most advantageous game state for the player will shift to the most disadvantageous game state, and the player will It is possible to suppress a significant decrease in the desire to play the game.

In addition, as a game property different from the 42nd embodiment, the 42nd embodiment is applied to the pachinko machine 10 configured so that the second variable probability state becomes a game state more advantageous to the player than the first variable probability state. You may apply the technical idea of a form.

In this case, during the normal pattern high probability period, while repeatedly executing the first jackpot and the time-saving jackpot, without establishing the time-saving end condition during the time-saving state, reaching the time-saving limit, the most advantageous second It is good to constitute so that a probability change state may be set. By configuring in this way, it is possible to provide a novel game property that makes the player expect to quickly reach the time reduction limit.

<Regarding production content in the 42nd embodiment>
The effect performed in the forty-second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 751 . First, in the forty-first embodiment described above, when the value of the first time-saving limit counter 203fa is 4, even if the jackpot (jackpot E7 (Fig. 742 (b))) in which the time-saving B is set is elected, the Since the value of the 1 hour-saving limit number counter 203fa is not reset, when the jackpot in which the time-saving A is set in the time-saving B is won, the time-saving A limit is reached, and a non-time-saving state is set after the jackpot game is completed. rice field. On the other hand, in the 42nd embodiment, when one time-saving type (for example, time-saving A) is set, the value of the time-saving limit counter for other time-saving types (for example, time-saving B) is reset. differ in

Therefore, in the 42nd embodiment, when a specific time-saving type (for example, time-saving A) is set in succession to the jackpot (for example, 5 times), the time-saving limit is reached. As a result, before reaching the time saving limit (when the value of the time saving A limit number counter is 4), by winning a jackpot in which a different time saving type (for example, time saving B) is set, the value of the time saving limit number counter increases Since it is reset, if you win a jackpot where time saving A is set when time saving B is set, the time saving A limit will not be reached, and the time saving state will be set until the time saving A jackpot continues 5 times. be. In other words, it is possible to provide a new game property that the time saving A limit is reached and the setting of the low probability non-working time saving state (normal) is prevented by winning the time saving B.

Based on the above, the outline of the effect in the 42nd embodiment will be described. In the forty-second embodiment, when the high-probability short working hours state (first variable probability state) or the low-probable short working hours state (short working hours state) is set, an effect in which the hero 801 and the dinosaur 807 fight is executed in the main display area Dm. . Then, when the value of the specific time reduction limit number counter 203ga is updated and the first probability variable jackpot is won, an effect in which the hero 801 receives the attack of the dinosaur 807 is executed. On the other hand, when winning the short working hours jackpot where the specific short working hours limit number counter 203ga is reset, the hero 801 defeats the dinosaur 807 and an effect is executed to acquire the item.

In this way, when the value of the specific time reduction limit number counter 203ga is updated and when it is reset, by executing corresponding effects respectively, the player can play the game in an easy-to-understand manner.

Next, the details of the presentation in the 42nd embodiment will be described. Drawing 751 (a) is an example of the production screen at the time of being elected to the jackpot where specific time saving limit frequency counter 803ga is updated when specific time saving limit remaining number of times is 3 times. In the special figure 2 variable display area Dm3, the second special symbol is displayed to indicate that the jackpot (first probability variable jackpot) in which the specific time reduction limit counter 803ga is updated is won, and in the main display area Dm, a dinosaur An effect is executed in which 807 attacks the hero 801 . In addition, in the first game information display area Dm4, the number of times of display is displayed by adding 1 corresponding to the jackpot winning, and in the second game information display area Dm5, the specific time reduction limit number counter 203ga is updated. Correspondingly, the remaining number of times of the specific short working hours limit, which is the number of times the specific short working hours limit is reached, is displayed with 1 subtracted. Then, when the display of the second game information display area Dm5 becomes 0, that is, when the value of the specific time reduction limit number counter 203ga reaches 5, the dinosaur 807 attacks and the hero 801 falls down. "Loss" is displayed in the display area HR1.

Figure 751 (b) is an example of the effect screen when winning a jackpot where the specific time saving limit number counter 203ga is reset when the specific time saving limit remaining number of times is two. In the special figure 2 variable display area Dm3, there is a display indicating that the specific time reduction limit number counter 803ga is reset to win the jackpot, and in the main display area Dm, the hero 801 defeats the dinosaur 807 and obtains the medicine 817. A performance is performed. In addition, in the second game information display area Dm5, the display is updated to indicate that the specific time reduction limit remaining number is 5 in response to the reset of the specific time reduction limit number counter 203ga.

In this way, by displaying the specific time reduction limit remaining number in the second game information display area Dm5, the player must reset the value of the specific time reduction limit number counter 203ga before the specific time reduction limit remaining number becomes 0. By making the player feel a sense of danger that the normal state will be set, it is possible to make the player strongly expect that the hero 801 will defeat the dinosaur 807, thereby improving the interest of the game.

In addition, when the time saving B (low probability time saving state) is set and the time saving end condition is satisfied before winning the jackpot, the dinosaur 807 attacks and the hero 801 falls down. "Loss" is displayed, and "0" is displayed in the second game information display area Dm5.

The enemy character such as the dinosaur 807 is determined based on the enemy character selection table 222ga shown in FIG. Although details will be described later, in the enemy character selection table 222ga, the enemy character is determined according to the value of the reset number counter 223ga and the value of the time reduction set number counter 223gb. Therefore, when winning the jackpot in which the value of the specific time-saving limit counter 203ga is reset and the hero 801 defeats the dinosaur 807 is executed, a new enemy character is displayed after the jackpot game ends, and the hero 801 fights. is executed.

Also, for example, if the value of the time saving set number counter 223gb is 10, the enemy character is determined by the value of the time saving set number counter 223gb so that the enemy character 5 is determined. A player can grasp the number of time-saving sets. In addition, since there are rare enemy characters that are displayed only when the value of the time-saving set number counter 223gb reaches a specific value, the player is motivated to play the game to display the rare enemy characters. be able to.

It should be noted that, in the embodiment, the medicine 817 was directed to indicate that the specific time reduction limit number counter 203ga was reset, but it is not limited to this, for example, to the value of the specific time reduction limit number counter 203ga before being reset It is also possible to produce a production in which a different item is obtained correspondingly. For example, when the value of the specific time-saving limit number counter 203ga is 1, if the value is reset by winning the jackpot, blue medicine is obtained, and when the value of the specific time-saving limit number counter 203ga is 4, the jackpot If the value is reset by winning, the effect may be such that a golden medicine is obtained. Moreover, it may be a production to obtain other items instead of medicine.

In the embodiment, the time saving A is set when the first probability variable jackpot is won, and the time saving B is set when the time saving jackpot is won. Therefore, it is displayed in the second game information display area Dm5. When the display indicating the remaining number of times of the time saving limit is reset, that is, when winning the time saving jackpot in which the time saving B is set, the display indicating the remaining number of times of the time saving limit displayed in the second game information display area Dm5 is displayed. Due to the resetting, the player can easily predict that the first variable probability state will not be set, and there is a risk that the player will be disappointed if the first variable probability state is not set. Therefore, even when the specific time saving limit number counter 203ga is reset and the time saving jackpot is won, the remaining time saving limit number displayed in the second game information display area Dm5 may be updated and displayed. In this case, when the jackpot is won with the remaining number of times of the time saving limit displayed in the second game information display area Dm5 being "0", an effect that notifies that the first variable state or the time saving state continues (for example , an effect of displaying “+α” etc.) is displayed in the second game information display area Dm5. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to predict the game state after the end of the jackpot game, and even if the display of the second game information display area Dm5 is "0", the time saving state is The game can be played with the expectation that it will be continued.

<Regarding the electrical configuration of the 42nd embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 752 and 753, the electrical configuration of the forty-second embodiment will be described. In the forty-second embodiment, part of the configuration of the RAM 203 of the main controller 110 and part of the configuration of the RAM 223 of the sound lamp control device 113 are changed from the above-described thirty-fifth embodiment. are different, and otherwise identical. The same reference numerals are assigned to the same configurations, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, referring to FIG. 752, the configuration of the RAM 203 of the main controller 110 of the pachinko machine 10 in the forty-second embodiment will be described. FIG. 753 is a diagram schematically showing the configuration of the RAM 203 of the main controller 110 in the 42nd embodiment. As shown in FIG. 753, in the forty-second embodiment, a specific time-saving limit number counter 203ga is provided instead of the time-saving limit number counter 203i for the configuration of the RAM 203 of the thirty-fifth embodiment described above (see FIG. 621). The difference is that Since other configurations are the same, the same reference numerals are given and detailed description thereof is omitted.

Specific time saving limit frequency counter 203ga is a counter in which the time saving limit frequency set for the time saving type "working time saving A" is set. In this counter, when the high probability state of the normal design is set, the value of "5" is set (see S3095 in FIG. 755), and then the time saving in the state where the high probability state of the normal design continues. When the jackpot winning type "time saving A" is set, the value is updated (decremented) at the end of the jackpot game (see S3097 in FIG. 755). Then, it is referred to in the process of determining whether or not the time saving limit has been reached (S3098 in FIG. 755). The value of this specific short time limit counter 203ga is cleared to 0 when the high probability state of the normal symbol ends (see S3100 in FIG. 755).

Also, when the high probability state of the normal pattern is set continuously, when "time saving B" which is a time saving type other than time saving type "time saving A" is set, the value is reset to "5" (S3095 in FIG. 755).

Next, referring to FIG. 753, the configurations of the ROM 222 and the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the sound ramp control device 113 in the pachinko machine 10 of the forty-second embodiment will be described. FIG. 753(a) is a diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the ROM 222 of the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113. FIG. As shown in FIG. 753(a), the ROM 222 of the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 in the forty-second embodiment has a stock The difference is that the notification number selection table 222c is deleted and the enemy character selection table 222ga is added, and the rest is the same. Identical contents are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed descriptions thereof are omitted.

Enemy character selection table 222ga is a data table referred to when selecting the mode of enemy character 807 in the battle production (see Figure 751) executed in a state in which the time saving state is set, the specific time saving limit number of times The value of the limit number counter 223ga indicating the number of times the value of the counter 203ga is reset, and the value of the time saving set number counter 223gb for indicating the number of times the time saving state (normal symbol high probability state) is continuously set. It is stipulated that different types of enemy characters are selected based on and.

Here, with reference to FIG. 754, detailed contents of the enemy character selection table 222ga will be described. FIG. 754 is a diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the enemy character selection table 222ga. As shown in FIG. 754, the enemy character selection table 222ga includes the types of enemy characters selected regardless of the value of the limit number counter 223ga when the number of time saving sets reaches a specific number, and the number of the limit number counter 223ga. and the type of enemy character to be selected when the value reaches a predetermined value. Then, when the number of time-saving sets becomes a specific number and when the value of the limit number counter 223ga becomes a predetermined value overlap, the enemy selected when the number of time-saving sets becomes a specific number It is configured so that the character is selected with priority.

Specifically, when the value of the limit number counter 223ga is "0" and the value of the time saving set counter 223gb is other than a specific number ("10, 15, 20 ~"), the type of enemy character is " "initial character", the value of the limit number counter 223ga is "1", and the value of the time saving set counter 223gb is other than a specific number ("10, 15, 20 ~"), the type of enemy character is " Character 1" has a value of "2" for the limit number counter 223ga and a value for the time saving set number counter 223gb other than a specific number ("10, 15, 20 ~"), as the type of enemy character " Character 2" has a value of "3" for the limit number counter 223ga and a value for the time saving set number counter 223gb other than a specific number ("10, 15, 20 ~"), as the type of enemy character " Character 3 ”, the value of the limit number counter 223ga is “4 ~”, and the value of the time saving set number counter 223gb is other than a specific number (“10, 15, 20 ~”), as the type of enemy character It defines that "character 4" is selected.

Further, when the value of the time saving set number counter 223gb is a specific number “10”, regardless of the value of the reset number counter 223ga, “character 5” is set as the type of enemy character, and the time saving set number counter 223gb If the value is the specific number "15", regardless of the value of the reset number counter 223ga, the type of enemy character is "character 6" and the value of the time saving set number counter 223gb is the specific number "20". . . .”, it is defined that “character 7” is selected as the enemy character type regardless of the value of the reset number counter 223ga.

In the forty-second embodiment, different benefits are given to the player according to the type of enemy character selected. For example, when "character 5" to "character 7" are selected, A performance mode for congratulating the continuation of the high-probability state of the pattern for a predetermined period and a privilege for executing the battle performance are provided. Further, when "Character 7" is selected, a battle effect including an effect mode indicating an ending effect in the battle effect is executed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 753(b), the contents defined in the RAM 223 of the sound ramp control device 113 of the pachinko machine 10 in the forty-second embodiment will be described. FIG. 753(b) is a diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the RAM 223 of the sound lamp control device 113. As shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 753(b), the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 in the forty-second embodiment notifies the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 in the thirty-fifth embodiment. The difference is that the finished stock number counter 223r and the notification upper limit flag 223s are deleted, and the reset number counter 223ga and the time saving set number counter 223gb are added, and the other points are the same. Identical contents are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed descriptions thereof are omitted.

During the normal pattern high probability period in which the high probability state of the normal pattern is continuously set, the reset number counter 223ga is a jackpot associated with a time reduction type (time reduction B) other than the time reduction type (time reduction A). It is a counter for measuring the number of times (number of resets) that the value of the short time remaining counter 222n has been reset to the initial setting value "5" after being elected.

The time saving set number counter 223gb is a counter for measuring the number of times the high probability state of the normal design is continuously set during the normal design high probability period in which the high probability state of the normal design is continuously set. is.

In the 42nd embodiment, unlike the 41st embodiment described above, the value set as the number of time reduction limits can be reset (reset the initial upper limit value) based on the establishment of the reset condition. . In other words, depending on the time-saving type that is set when the jackpot is won, the normal pattern high probability period is configured to be able to continue for a long time. Therefore, based on the number of times the normal pattern high probability state (number of time reduction sets) set during the normal pattern high probability period and the number of times the value set as the time reduction limit number is reset (reset), It is configured so that different presentation modes can be determined.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to inform the player in an easy-to-understand manner how the normal pattern high probability period continuing this time continues and how long it continues.

<Control processing executed by main controller 110 in the 42nd embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIG. 755, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 in the 42nd embodiment will be described. This embodiment differs from the forty-first embodiment described above in that the time saving limit update process 8 (see S2892 in FIG. 755) is executed instead of the time saving limit update process 7 (see S2882 in FIG. 746). are the same. The same parts are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed descriptions thereof are omitted.

With reference to FIG. 755, the time saving limit update process 8 (S2892) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 in the forty-second embodiment will be described. FIG. 755 is a flowchart showing the content of the time saving limit update process 8 (S2892). The time saving limit update process 8 (S2892) in this embodiment is different from the time saving limit update process 7 (S2882) in the forty-first embodiment described above. When a jackpot of a specific time saving type is won, the time saving limit number of times is reset. The difference is that it executes the processing that Since other processing is the same, the same reference numerals are given and detailed description thereof is omitted.

In the time saving limit update process 8 (S2892), the processes of S3001 to S3002 described above are executed first. In the processing of S3002, when it is determined that the jackpot type being executed this time is a jackpot type that sets a high probability state of normal symbols as the game state after the end of the jackpot game (S3002: Yes), next , Identify the time saving type corresponding to the jackpot type being executed (S3081). Next, it is determined whether the time saving type read in the process of S3081 is the time saving type A (per first probability variation) (S3091). If it is determined that the read time saving type is not the time saving type A (per first probability variation) (S3091: No), then it is determined whether the value of the specific time saving limit number counter 203ga is a value greater than 0 ( S3092).

In the process of S3092, when it is determined that the value of the specific time saving limit number counter 203ga is a value greater than 0 (S3092: Yes), a limit reset command indicating that the set time saving limit number of times has been reset It sets (S3093), sets the time saving flag 203f to ON (S3094), sets 5 to the value of specific time saving limit frequency counter 203ga (S3095), and ends this processing. On the other hand, in the process of S3092, if it is determined that the value of the specific time reduction limit number counter 203ga is not greater than 0 (S3092: No), the process of S3093 is skipped, and the processes of S3094 to S3095 described above are executed. and terminate this process.

On the other hand, in the process of S3091, when it is determined that the time saving type of the jackpot being executed this time is the time saving type A (S3091: Yes), the value of the specific time saving limit number counter 203ga is a value greater than 0 (S3096). When it is determined that the value of the specific time saving limit counter 203ga is not a value greater than 0 (S3096: No), the processing of S3094 to S3095 described above is executed, and this processing ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S3096, when it is determined that the value of the specific time saving limit number counter 203ga is a value greater than 0 (S3096: Yes), the value of the specific time saving limit number counter 203ga is subtracted by 1 (S3097). Next, it is determined whether the value of the specific time saving limit counter 203ga after the subtraction is 0 (S3098). When it is determined that the value of the specific time saving limit counter 203ga after the subtraction is 0 (S3098: Yes), the process of S3009 described above is executed, and this process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the specific time saving limit number counter 203ga after the subtraction is not 0 (S3098: No), the time saving flag 203f is set to ON (S3099), and this processing ends.

On the other hand, in the processing of S3002, when it is determined that the jackpot type being executed this time is not a jackpot type that sets a high probability state of normal symbols as a game state after the end of the jackpot game (S3002: No), It is determined whether the value of the specific time saving limit counter 203ga is greater than 0 (S3089). When it is determined that the value of the specific time saving limit number counter 203ga is a value larger than 0 (S3089: Yes), the value of the specific time saving limit number counter 203ga is cleared to 0 (S3100), and this process ends. On the other hand, in the processing of S3089, when it is determined that the value of the specific time reduction limit number counter 203ga is not a value greater than 0 (S3089: No), this processing is terminated as it is.

Thus, in this embodiment, by winning a specific time-saving type jackpot, the number of time-saving limit times can be reset, so the player can win a specific time-saving type jackpot during the time-saving gaming state. Since the game can be executed while expecting that the time saving limit number of times is reset, it is possible to prevent the time saving game from becoming monotonous.

In addition, the reset condition of the time saving limit number of times is not limited to winning a specific time saving type jackpot. good. In such a configuration, it is preferable that the condition for resetting the number of times of time saving limit is established when a big win is won after the number of variations of the special symbols in the time saving game state is large. By constructing in this way, the player can reduce the working hours if the jackpot is won even when the number of fluctuations of the special symbols, which is the condition for ending the working hours gaming state, is likely to reach the specified number after shifting to the working hours game state. A game can be executed while expecting that the limit number of times will be reset. Further, when a big win is won in a case where the number of variations of the special symbols during the time saving game state is small, the time saving limit number of times may be reset. In this way, the player wins the jackpot in a shorter period of time, and furthermore, the time-saving limit number of times is reset, so that the player can obtain more joy.

<Regarding the control process of the audio ramp control device 113 in the 42nd embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 756 to 759, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio ramp control device 113 in the 42nd embodiment will be described. In the 42nd embodiment, in place of the state command processing (see S4212 in FIG. 665), the state command processing 8 (see S4262 in FIG. 756) is replaced with the time saving remaining number update processing ( Figure 748 S4571 reference) instead of time saving remaining number update process 8 (Figure 757 S4581 reference), production mode setting process 7 (Figure 749 S4375 reference) instead of production mode setting process 8 (Figure 758 S4385 reference), in place of the special figure 2 fluctuation production setting process 7 (see S5179 in Figure 750), the difference is that the special figure 2 fluctuation production setting process 8 (see S5189 in Figure 759) is executed, otherwise are identical. The same processing contents are assigned the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof is omitted.

First, state command processing 8 (S4262) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 in the forty-second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 756 is a flow chart showing the contents of state command processing 8 (S4262). State command processing 8 (S4262), in contrast to the state command processing (see S4212 in FIG. 665) in the forty-first embodiment described above, counts how many times the time-saving limit has been reset when a limit reset command is received. The difference is that the processing for Since the other processes are the same, the same reference numerals are used and detailed descriptions thereof are omitted.

In the state command process 8 (S4262), first, the processes of S4301 to S4304 described above are executed. If it is determined in the process of S4303 that the limit-related command has not been received (S4303: No), it is determined whether a limit reset command has been received from the main controller 110 (S4351). When it is determined that the limit reset command has been received (S4351: Yes), 1 is added to the value of the reset number counter 223ga (S4352), and the processing of S4305 described above is executed. On the other hand, in the process of S4351, when it is determined that the limit reset command has not been received (S4351: No), the process of S4352 is skipped and the process proceeds to the process of S4305.

Next, with reference to FIG. 757, the time saving remaining number update process 8 (S4581) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 in the forty-second embodiment will be described. FIG. 757 is a flowchart showing the content of the time saving remaining number update process 8 (S4581).

In the time saving remaining number update process 8 (S4581), first, it is determined whether the command received from the main controller 110 this time is a command indicating the subtraction of the time saving limit number of times (S4591). If it is determined that the received command is a command indicating the subtraction of the number of time saving limits (S4591: Yes), the value of the remaining time saving number counter 223n is subtracted by 1 (S4592), and the value of the time saving set number counter 223gb 1 is added (S4593), and the process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S4591, if it is determined that the command received from the main control device 110 this time is not a command indicating the subtraction of the number of times of reduction of working hours (S4591: No), the received command is the addition of the number of times of reduction of working hours. It is determined whether or not the command indicates (S4594). If it is determined that the received command is a command indicating addition of the number of time reduction limits (S4594: Yes), the value of the remaining time reduction counter 223n is set to 5 (S4595), and the processing of S4593 described above is executed. and terminate this process. On the other hand, in the processing of S4594, when it is determined that the received command is not a command indicating addition of the number of times of reduction in working hours (S4594: No), this processing ends as it is.

Next, with reference to FIG. 758, the production mode setting process 8 (S4385) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 in the forty-second embodiment will be described. FIG. 758 is a flow chart showing the contents of the production mode setting process 8 (S4385). Effect mode setting processing 8 (S4385) is, in contrast to the effect mode setting processing 7 (see S4375 in FIG. 749) in the forty-first embodiment described above, based on the number of times the time reduction limit number of times was reset, the update status of the time reduction limit number of times, etc. The difference is that a process for determining the effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is executed. Since the other processes are the same, the same reference numerals are used and detailed descriptions thereof are omitted.

In the production mode setting process 8 (S4385), first, the process of S4601 described above is executed, and in the process of S4601, when it is determined that neither the probability variation limit flag 223o nor the time reduction limit flag 223p is ON (S4601 : No), the processing of S4603 to S4604 and the processing of S4671 to S4672 described above are executed. Then, in the process of S4672, when it is determined that the current game state is the normal symbol high probability state (S4672: Yes), the display mode corresponding to the value of the remaining short time number counter 223n is determined (S4681). .

Next, using the value of the reset number counter 223ga and the value of the time saving set number counter 223gb, refer to the enemy character selection table 222ga (see FIG. 754) to select the enemy character to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. (S4682). Then, the process of S4605 described above is executed, and this process ends.

Next, with reference to Drawing 759, special figure 2 fluctuation production setting processing 8 (S5189) performed by MPU221 in sound lamp control device 113 in the 42nd embodiment is explained. Figure 759 is the flowchart which shows the contents of special figure 2 fluctuation production setting processing 8 (S5189). Special figure 2 fluctuation production setting process 8 (S5189) is based on the jackpot type won with respect to special figure 2 fluctuation production setting process 7 (S5179 in FIG. 750) in the forty-second embodiment described above 3rd symbol display device 81 The difference is that a process for determining the mode of presentation to be displayed is executed. Since the other processes are the same, the same reference numerals are used and detailed descriptions thereof are omitted.

In the special figure 2 fluctuation effect setting process 8 (S5189), first, the process of S5371 to S5373 and the process of S5378 described above are executed, and then in the process of S5378, it corresponds to the jackpot type that has been identified and elected. It is determined whether the time saving type is the time saving type A (per 1st probability variation) (S5391). If it is determined that the specified time saving type is the time saving type A (first probability variation) (S5391: Yes), the enemy attack production mode corresponding to the value of the remaining time saving number counter 223n is determined ( S5392), this process ends. On the other hand, in the processing of S5391, when it is determined that the specified time saving type is not time saving type A (S5391: No), the effect mode indicating enemy defeat is determined (S5393), and this processing ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S5373, when it is determined that the variation to be executed this time is not a big hit (S5373: No), the processes of S5374 and S5375 described above are executed. Then, in the process of S5375, when it is determined that the value of the time saving counter 223u is 1 (S5375: Yes), the process of S5376 is executed, and then the reset number counter 223ga and the time saving set number counter 223gb is cleared to 0 (S5394), and this processing ends.

In the above-described 41st embodiment or 42nd embodiment, both the variable probability limit and the short time limit are provided, but the variable probability limit is not provided, and only the short time limit is provided. Also good.

<43rd Embodiment>
Next, the forty-third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 760 to 765. FIG. In the 39th to 42nd embodiments described above, the value set as the probability variation limit number of times and the value set as the time saving limit number of times are changed according to the type of jackpot, so that the probability variation state (special symbol The length of the period in which the high-probability state, the high-probability state of the normal symbol can be continuously set can be varied.

On the other hand, in the 43rd embodiment, the value set as the probability variable limit number of times is fixed to a specific value (11), and only the value set as the time saving limit number of times is configured to vary according to the jackpot type. The difference is that

In this way, in a game machine that can set the probability variable limit number of times and the time saving limit number of times, it is possible to set only one limit number of times differently, and the length of the period in which the probability variable state can be set continuously is made different. , it is possible to reduce the amount of processing for setting (updating) each limit number of times and reduce the storage area for data corresponding to each limit number of times.

Furthermore, in the 43rd embodiment, the value of the time saving limit number of times can be set within a range of values smaller than the specific value (10) set as the probability variable limit number of times, and the first probability variable state is set. After that, it is configured to reach the short time limit before the variable probability limit, and to set the second variable probability state after reaching the short time limit.

In addition, in the forty-third embodiment, the first special symbol lottery is mainly executed in the state where the first variable probability state is set, and the second special symbol lottery is mainly executed in the state where the second variable probability state is set. When a big win is won in the first special symbol lottery, a big win type in which the first probability variable state can be set without fail after the end of the big win game is set, and when a big win is won in the second special symbol lottery. is configured to set a jackpot type in which a normal state is always set after the jackpot game ends.

By constructing in this way, the jackpot game based on the first special symbol lottery is executed a plurality of times during the first variable probability state, and when the time-saving limit is reached, the state is shifted to the second variable probability state, and the second variable probability state is executed. It is possible to shift to the normal state based on the big winning in the second special symbol lottery. In other words, in the 43rd embodiment in which a specific value (10) is always set as the probability variation limit number of times, regardless of the remaining number of probability variation limit times, it is executed after reaching the time saving limit (during the second probability variation state) By the first big winning game, it is possible to shift to the normal state.

Therefore, even if a specific value (10) is always set as the probability variable limit number of times, and a different value (for example, 3 to 10) can be set as the time saving limit number of times, according to the set time saving limit number of times , It is possible to suppress that the length of the period in which the second probability variable state set after reaching the time reduction limit is continuously set differs.

In addition, regardless of the remaining number of probability variable limit times, only the period until the next big winning game is executed after reaching the time reduction limit can be set to the second probability variable state. In other words, regardless of the number of set time-saving limits, the time-saving limit is reached in the first probability state, the state is shifted to the second probability state, and the first jackpot win in the second probability state is transferred to the normal state. Through the same process, it is possible to shift the game state from the first variable probability state to the normal state. Therefore, for example, when the first probability variable state is set as the effect mode of the production (demotion effect) executed in the period (demotion period) from the end of the first probability variable state until the normal state is set The same performance mode can be set regardless of the value of the set time reduction limit number of times.

<Regarding the game flow in the 43rd embodiment>
First, referring to FIG. 760, the game flow in the forty-third embodiment will be described. FIG. 760 is a diagram schematically showing the game flow in the forty-third embodiment. As shown in FIG. 760, in the pachinko machine 10 of the forty-third embodiment, the game state includes the normal state (low probability state of special symbols, low probability state of normal symbols), the first variable state (high probability of special symbols state, high probability state of normal design), second probability variable state (high probability state of special design, low probability state of normal design) can be set.

In the normal state, a left-handed game is mainly executed with the aim of entering the ball into the first ball entrance 64b1 (see FIG. 582) in order to execute the first special symbol lottery. When the jackpot is won in the first special symbol lottery in this normal state, one of the jackpot types (jackpots A9 to C9) with different time-saving limit times is set. In the forty-third embodiment, when a jackpot is won in the first special symbol lottery, the first probability variable state is always set after the jackpot game ends, regardless of which jackpot type is set. is doing.

At the end of the jackpot game in which the first variable probability state is set, a value of "10" is set for the variable probability limit number counter 203h, and a value corresponding to the jackpot type being executed is set for the time reduction limit number counter 203i. is set.

Then, when the jackpot game based on the first special symbol lottery is executed a plurality of times during the special symbol high probability period in which the first variable probability state is continuously set, the time reduction limit is reached. Here, if the variable probability limit and the short time limit are reached at the same time, the high probability state of the special design is forcibly changed to the low probability state of the special design, and the high probability state of the normal design is the low probability state of the normal design. Because it is forcibly changed to , it shifts to the normal state. On the other hand, when only the short time limit is reached, the high probability state of normal symbols is forcibly changed to the low probability state of normal symbols, and shifts to the second probability variable state. During this second probability variable state, the variation pattern of each special symbol is defined so that the second special symbol lottery is easier to execute than the first special symbol lottery, and in fact, the second special symbol lottery is mainly executed. It will be in a game state.

In the forty-third embodiment, when the jackpot is won in the second special symbol lottery, the jackpot type (jackpot D9) in which the normal state is set after the jackpot game ends is set, so the jackpot is won during the second probability variable state. If so, it will return to normal. That is, in the forty-third embodiment, the second special symbol lottery is used to shift the game state to the normal state, and the second variable state is the game state in which the second special symbol lottery is mainly executed. used to create

Thus, in the pachinko machine 10 having a plurality of special symbol types, a specific special symbol lottery (second special symbol lottery) is used to set a specific game state (normal state), and a specific special The game state (second probability variable state) in which symbol lottery is mainly executed can be set to various transition timings (regardless of the number of probability variation limit remaining times) from the game state (first probability variable state) advantageous to the player. Thus, the game state advantageous to the player can be reliably shifted to the normal state.

Furthermore, in the forty-third embodiment, as in the above-described embodiments, the first special symbol lottery (fluctuation) and the second special symbol lottery (fluctuation) can be executed in duplicate (in parallel). By making the length of the variation time set in the variation pattern for each special symbol executed in each game state largely different, a special symbol lottery for only one special symbol type is executed substantially. It is configured as follows.

Therefore, even if the second special symbol lottery is provided to shift to the normal state (when the normal state is always set when the jackpot is elected), the second special except for the second probability variable state By constructing so that the pattern lottery is hardly executed (so that a variation pattern in which a long time (10 minutes) variation time is set in a game state other than the second probability variation state is selected), it is difficult for the player The game can be played without giving

Next, with reference to FIG. 761, the flow of the time reduction limit number of times and the game state transition in the 43rd embodiment will be described. Figure 761 (a) is a diagram showing the flow of the game state transition when "10" is set as the time reduction limit number of times, Figure 761 (b) is set to "5" as the time reduction limit number of times It is a diagram showing the flow of the game state transition in the case.

As shown in FIG. 761(a), in the forty-third embodiment, when the jackpot is won in the first special symbol lottery, the first probability variable jackpot game is executed at a rate of 100%. At the time of the first win (when a big win is made in the first special symbol lottery in a normal state), "10" is set as the probability variable limit number of times after the big win game ends. And it is configured to set any of "3", "5", and "10" as the time reduction limit number of times according to the jackpot type set at the time of the first hit.

Here, when "10" is set as the time saving limit number of times, the jackpot game based on the special symbol lottery executed during the first probability changing state ends (the probability changing limit, the time saving limit is reached). And, in the example shown in FIG. 761 (a), the value set to the probability variable limit number of times at the first hit and the value set as the time saving limit number of times are the same, so from the first probability variable state to the normal state and migrate.

In the pattern shown in FIG. 761 (b), after the first hit, it shows an example in which the probability variation limit number of times "10" and the time saving limit "5" are set, and when the time saving limit is reached earlier than the probability variation limit, the second 2 definite variable state is set. Then, the second probability variable state continues until a big win is won in the second special symbol lottery executed during the second probability variable state, and the normal state is set based on the fact that the second special symbol lottery wins the jackpot. .

In addition, in the 43rd embodiment, a game board configuration having a V winning device 1065 similar to that of the 38th embodiment described above is adopted. ' is set, and when a big win is won in the second special symbol lottery, an operation scenario of 'V winning is not possible' is set. Detailed contents of each operation scenario are the same as those of the thirty-eighth embodiment and the fortieth embodiment described above, so detailed description thereof will be omitted.

<Regarding the electrical configuration of the forty-third embodiment>
Next, the electrical configuration of the forty-third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 762 to 765. FIG. The forty-third embodiment is different from the thirty-fifth embodiment described above in that a part of the configuration of the ROM 202 of the main controller 110 is changed, and the rest is the same. The same reference numerals are assigned to the same configurations, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The ROM 202 possessed by the main control device 110 in this embodiment is different from the ROM 202 possessed by the main control device 110 in the 35th embodiment, the special figure 1 jackpot type selection table 202b1 (Fig. 613 (b)) instead of special figure 1 jackpot type selection 9 table 202hb1, special figure 2 jackpot type selection table 202b2 (see FIG. 613 (c)) instead of special figure 2 jackpot type selection 9 table 202hb2 , and as a variation pattern table that can be referred to during the first probability variation state defined in the variation pattern table 202d, the first probability variation instead of the first probability variation variation pattern table 202d3 (see FIG. 615 (b)) Variation pattern 9 table 202hd3, second probability variation variation pattern 9 table 202hd4 is used instead of second probability variation variation pattern table 202d4 (see FIG. 616(a)) as a variation pattern table that can be referred to during the second probability variation state It is different in that it replaces with the point and the time reduction provision table 202e (refer FIG. 617) and uses the time reduction provision 9 table 202he, and other than that is the same. The same reference numerals are assigned to the same configurations, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Here, with reference to FIG. 762, the contents defined in the special figure 1 jackpot type selection 9 table 202hb1 will be described. FIG. 762 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the special figure 1 jackpot type selection 9 table 202hb1. As shown in FIG. 762, the special figure 1 jackpot type selection 9 table 202hb1 is different from the special figure 1 jackpot type selection table 202b1 (see FIG. 613 (b)) in the thirty-fifth embodiment described above for each jackpot type. The difference is that the probability variable limit number of times and the time saving limit number of times stipulated are different, and the contents of the jackpot games stipulated for each jackpot type are different.

Specifically, "jackpot A9 (10R jackpot)" is defined in the range of "0 to 39" for the value of the first hit type counter C2, and "jackpot B9 (5R jackpot)” is defined, and “jackpot C9 (5R jackpot)” is defined for values of “120 to 199”.

Also, even if you win any of the jackpot types of jackpot A9, jackpot B9, and jackpot C9, regardless of the game state (game state at the time of winning) at the time of winning (at the time of winning the jackpot), after the end of the jackpot game, the "first probability change state is set.

Then, after the first hit (when both the probability variable limit number and the time saving limit number are not set), the set limit number is the probability variable limit at the end of the jackpot game when "jackpot A9" is won. "10" is set as the number of times, and "10" is set as the time reduction limit number of times. Further, when "big win B9" is won, "10" is set as the probability variable limit number of times and "5" is set as the time reduction limit number of times at the end of the big winning game. Then, when "big win C9" is won, "10" is set as the probability variable limit number of times and "3" is set as the time reduction limit number of times at the end of the big winning game.

Next, with reference to FIG. 763, the contents defined in the special figure 2 jackpot type selection 9 table 202hb2 will be described. FIG. 763 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the special figure 2 jackpot type selection 9 table 202hb2. As shown in FIG. 763, the special figure 2 jackpot type selection 9 table 202hb2 is different from the special figure 2 jackpot type selection table 202b2 (see FIG. 613(c)) in the thirty-fifth embodiment described above for each jackpot type. The difference is that the probability variable limit number of times and the time saving limit number of times stipulated are different, and the contents of the jackpot games stipulated for each jackpot type are different.

Specifically, the value of the first winning type counter C2 is defined as "jackpot D9 (10R jackpot)" in the range of "0 to 199". In addition, the "jackpot D9 (10R jackpot)" is set to the "normal state" after the jackpot game ends regardless of the game state (game state at the time of winning) at the time of winning (at the time of winning the jackpot). Therefore, when "jackpot D9 (10R jackpot)" is won, the probability variable limit number of times and the time reduction limit number of times are reset at the end of the jackpot game.

Next, with reference to FIG. 764(a), the contents defined in the first probability variation variation pattern 9 table 202hd3 will be described. FIG. 764(a) is a diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the first probability variation variation pattern 9 table 202hd3. As shown in FIG. 764(a), the first probability variation variation pattern 9 table 202hd3 is the first probability variation variation pattern table 202d3 (see FIG. The difference is that the variation pattern (variation time) corresponding to each symbol type is different so that the special symbol lottery (fluctuation) mainly executed during the probability variation state becomes the first special symbol.

Specifically, when the symbol type is "special figure 1" and the result of the hit/fail judgment is off or it is a small hit, the value of the acquired variation type counter CS1 is in the range of "0 to 194", An off-short variation with a variation time of 2 seconds (2000 milliseconds) is defined, and an off-middle variation with a variation time of 20 seconds (20000 milliseconds) is defined in the range of "195 to 198". In addition, if the winning/failure determination result is a big hit, the value of the acquired variation type counter CS1 is in the range of "0 to 149", the variation time is 2 seconds (2000 milliseconds), and the middle variation is "150 ~ 198", per long variation with a variation time of 60 seconds (60000 milliseconds) is defined.

In addition, the pattern type is "Special Figure 2", the result of the hit/fail judgment is hit, regardless of the loss, the value of the acquired variation type counter CS1 is in the range of "0 to 198", the variation time is 600 seconds (600000 milliseconds ) is stipulated for ultra-long fluctuations.

Next, the contents defined in the second probability variation variation pattern 9 table 202hd4 will be described with reference to FIG. 764(b). FIG. 764(b) is a diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the second probability variation variation pattern 9 table 202hd4. As shown in FIG. 764(b), the second probability variation variation pattern 9 table 202hd4 is the second probability variation state for the second probability variation table 202d4 (see FIG. 616(a)) in the thirty-fifth embodiment described above. The difference is that the variation pattern (variation time) corresponding to each symbol type is made different so that the special symbol lottery (fluctuation) that is mainly executed in the second special symbol.

Specifically, the symbol type is "Special Figure 1", the hit or miss determination result is hit, regardless of the loss, the value of the acquired variation type counter CS1 is in the range of "0 to 198", and the variation time is 600 seconds ( 600000 milliseconds) is specified. In addition, if the pattern type is "Special Figure 2" and the hit/fail judgment result is hit or lost, the value of the acquired fluctuation type counter CS1 is in the range of "0 to 198", the fluctuation time is 1 second (1000 mm seconds) short variation is specified.

Next, with reference to FIG. 765, the content prescribed|regulated to the time reduction provision 9 table 202he is demonstrated. Drawing 765 is a mimetic diagram showing typically the contents of time saving provision 9 table 202he. As shown in Figure 765, the time saving grant 9 table 202he is normal until the next big hit is won in the state where the probability variation limit reach flag 203u is set to off with respect to the time saving grant table 202e (see Figure 617) described above. In the state where the variable probability limit reaching flag 203u is set to ON for the jackpot types (jackpots A9 to C9) in which the high probability state of the pattern can be set, the high probability state of the normal pattern is not set. There is a difference.

Specifically, the jackpot types "jackpot A9", "jackpot B9", and "jackpot C9" are when both the probability variation limit reach flag 203u and the time saving limit reach flag 203v are set to off, the number of times of time saving The number of grants "65535 (substantially until the next time)" is defined, and the number of times of time reduction other than that, "100", is defined. In addition, when the time saving limit reaching flag 203v is set to off, since the low probability state of the normal symbol is forcibly set, regardless of the setting status of the probability variation limit reaching flag 203u, the number of time saving times given "0" is defined.

On the other hand, as described above, the jackpot type "jackpot D9" is not a jackpot type in which the high probability state of the normal pattern is set, so the game state when the jackpot is won, the probability limit reaching flag 203u, and the time limit reaching flag 203v Regardless of the setting situation, the number of time reductions to be given is defined as “0”.

<44th Embodiment>
Next, the forty-fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 766 to 774. FIG. In the forty-fourth embodiment, the first special symbol lottery (variation) and the second special symbol lottery (variation) can be executed simultaneously (in parallel) in place of the above-described thirty-fifth embodiment. , In the state of having the right to execute the first special symbol lottery (special figure 1 reserved) and the right to execute the second special symbol lottery (special figure 2 reserved), the second special symbol lottery is preferentially executed change the game state set after the end of the first probability variable state, which is the most advantageous game state for the player, and change the control processing contents corresponding to the above-mentioned changes. The difference is that the configuration of the right side area of the game board 13 is partially changed.

First, referring to FIG. 766, the configuration of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in the forty-fourth embodiment will be described. FIG. 766 is a front view schematically showing the configuration of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in the 44th embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 766, the game board 13 of the forty-fourth embodiment differs from the game board 13 of the thirty-fifth embodiment (see FIG. An electric accessory 640a is attached to the ball mouth 640, and its arrangement position is changed; The difference is that a general ball entrance 63 is provided in the right area, and the rest is the same. The same reference numerals are given to the same contents, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In the forty-fourth embodiment, when winning the normal symbol lottery executed by passing the ball through the through gate 67, the normal symbol winning game for opening the electric accessory 640a is executed. In this normal pattern per game, when the high probability state of the normal pattern is set than when the low probability state of the normal pattern is set, it is easier to enter the ball into the second ball entrance 640. It is executed with the operation contents to be executed.

Specifically, the normal pattern per game that is executed in the high probability state of the normal symbol is more likely than the normal pattern per game that is executed in the low probability state of the normal symbol. 2 ball entrance 640 can be entered) period is long, and the game per normal pattern is executed with the operation content. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it easier to enter the ball into the second ball entrance 640 in the game state (first variable probability state, time saving state) in which the high probability state of the normal symbol is set.

In the forty-fourth embodiment, in the normal state (low-probability state of normal symbols), rather than executing a game in which a ball is entered into the second ball entrance 640 by a right-handed game, the first entry is made by a left-handed game. Since the special symbol lottery can be executed more efficiently when executing the game in which the ball is entered into the ball opening 64, the left-handed game is an advantageous game method for the player in the normal state.

Then, when the high probability state (first probability variable state, time saving state) of the normal symbol is set, it is better to execute the game of entering the ball into the second ball entrance 640 by the right-handed game. Since the special pattern lottery can be executed more efficiently than when executing the game of entering the ball into the first ball entrance 64 by the game, the normal pattern high probability state (first probability variable state, time saving) state), the right-handed game is a game method that is advantageous to the player.

<Regarding transition of game state in the 44th embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIG. 767, the flow of game state transition based on the game executed in the forty-fourth embodiment will be described. FIG. 767 is a diagram schematically showing transitions between game states.

As shown in FIG. 767, in the forty-fourth embodiment, as in the thirty-fifth embodiment described above, in a state where the normal state (low probability state of special symbols, low probability state of normal symbols) is set, the left A game is performed in which a ball is entered into the first ball entrance 64b1 by a hitting game, and a first special symbol lottery is executed. When the jackpot is won in the first special symbol lottery, the first probability variable state is set without fail after the jackpot game ends, and "10" is set as the probability variable limit number of times.

Then, when the first probability variable state is set, a game for executing a second special symbol lottery is performed by a right-handed game. In the present embodiment, even when a big win is won in the second special symbol lottery, the first variable probability state is always set after the big win game ends. Therefore, when the first variable probability state is set, the second special symbol lottery is continuously executed until the variable probability limit is reached.

When the probability limit is reached in the first probability variation state, the low probability state of the special symbol is forcibly set, so the game state shifts to the time saving state, and "special symbol fluctuation 3 times" is set as the time saving end condition. be. That is, in the present embodiment, when the time saving state is set after the end of the jackpot game, the time saving end condition is established when the third special symbol variation executed during the time saving state is stopped and displayed, and the game state is changed. It is configured to shift from the time-saving state to the normal state. In addition, as described above, in the time saving state in which the high probability state of the normal symbol is set, the same game as the first probability variable state described above, that is, the game for executing the second special symbol lottery by the right-handed game done.

In this embodiment, a long time (for example, 10 minutes) variation time is set as the variation pattern of the special symbol variation executed during the time saving state. In other words, when the time saving state is set, the time saving state is maintained for a period (30 minutes) until a jackpot is won or the special pattern variation of 10 minutes is completed three times.

That is, in the above-described thirty-fifth embodiment, the period in which the second variable probability state is set is set as a game period in which the number of balls output does not increase (hardly increases), whereas this 44th embodiment The embodiment is different in that it is configured to create a game period in which the number of paid balls does not increase (hardly increases) by using the time saving state. And, as a variation pattern of all the special symbol variations executed during the time saving state, a super long variation with a variation time of 10 minutes is set.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to suppress the execution of many special symbol lotteries in a predetermined period after the end of the first probability variable state, so that the game period that suppresses the increase in the number of paid balls is ensured. can be set to

<Regarding the electrical configuration of the forty-fourth embodiment>
Next, the electrical configuration of the forty-fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 768 to 772. FIG. The forty-fourth embodiment differs from the thirty-fifth embodiment described above in that the configurations of the ROM 202 and the RAM 223 of the main controller 110 are partly changed, and the rest is the same. The same reference numerals are assigned to the same configurations, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The ROM 202 possessed by the main control device 110 in this embodiment is different from the ROM 202 possessed by the main control device 110 in the 35th embodiment, the special figure 1 jackpot type selection table 202b1 (Fig. 613 (b)) instead of special figure 1 jackpot type selection 10 table 202ib1, special figure 2 jackpot type selection table 202b2 (see FIG. 613 (c)) instead of special figure 2 jackpot type selection 10 table 202ib2 and, as a variation pattern table that can be referred to during the time saving state defined in the variation pattern table 202d, instead of the time saving variation pattern table 202d3 (see FIG. 615 (a)), the time saving variation pattern 10 table 202id3, As a variation pattern table that can be referred to during the first probability variation state, instead of the first probability variation variation pattern table 202d3 (see FIG. 615 (b)), the first probability variation variation pattern 10 table 202id3 is used, and time saving is given Table 202e (see FIG. 617) is different from the point of using the reduction of working hours provision 10 table 202ie, other than that is the same. The same reference numerals are assigned to the same configurations, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Here, with reference to FIG. 768, the contents defined in the special figure 1 jackpot type selection 10 table 202ib1 will be described. FIG. 768 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the special figure 1 jackpot type selection 10 table 202ib1.

Specifically, "jackpot A10 (10R jackpot)" is defined in the range of "0 to 39" for the value of the first hit type counter C2, and "jackpot B10 (5R jackpot)” is defined.

When the jackpot type is either "jackpot A10" or "jackpot B10", regardless of the game state (game state at the time of winning) at the time of winning (at the time of winning the jackpot), after the jackpot game ends, the "first probability variable state ” is set. In addition, after the first hit (when both the probability variable limit number of times and the time saving limit number of times are not set), the set limit number of times is either "jackpot A10" or "jackpot B10". At the end, "10" is set as the variable probability limit number of times.

Next, with reference to FIG. 769, the contents defined in the special figure 2 jackpot type selection 10 table 202ib2 will be described. FIG. 769 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the special figure 2 jackpot type selection 10 table 202ib2.

Specifically, the value of the first winning type counter C2 is in the range of "0 to 199", and the "jackpot C10" is defined. Then, regardless of the game state (game state at the time of winning) at the time of winning (at the time of winning the big win), the "first probability variable state" is set after the end of the big win game. In addition, after the first hit (when the variable probability limit number of times is not set), "10" is set as the variable probability limit number of times at the end of the jackpot game.

Next, with reference to FIG. 770(a), the contents defined in the working hours variation pattern 10 table 202id2 will be described. FIG. 770(a) is a diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the working hours variation pattern 10 table 202id2.

Specifically, the symbol type is "Special Figure 1", the hit or miss determination result is hit, regardless of the loss, the value of the acquired variation type counter CS1 is in the range of "0 to 198", and the variation time is 600 seconds ( 600000 milliseconds) is specified.

Also, even if the symbol type is "Special Figure 2", the result of the hit/fail judgment is hit, regardless of the loss, the value of the acquired variation type counter CS1 is in the range of "0 to 198", and the variation time is 600 seconds. A very long variation of (600000 ms) is specified.

Next, the contents defined in the first probability variation variation pattern 10 table 202id3 will be described with reference to FIG. 770(b). FIG. 770(b) is a diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the first probability variation variation pattern 10 table 202id3.

Specifically, the symbol type is "Special Figure 1", the hit or miss determination result is hit, regardless of the loss, the value of the acquired variation type counter CS1 is in the range of "0 to 198", and the variation time is 1 second ( 10000 milliseconds) is specified.

Also, if the pattern type is "special figure 2" and the result of the hit/fail judgment is a small hit or a loss, the value of the acquired fluctuation type counter CS1 is within the range of "0 to 194", the fluctuation time An outlier short variation of 2 seconds (2000 milliseconds) is specified, and an outlier middle variation with a variation time of 20 seconds (20000 milliseconds) is specified in the range of "195 to 198". Then, if the winning/failure determination result is a jackpot, the value of the acquired variation type counter CS1 is in the range of "0 to 149", and the variation time is 20 seconds (20000 milliseconds). In the range of "150 to 198", per long variation with a variation time of 60 seconds (60000 milliseconds) is defined.

Next, with reference to FIG. 771, the content prescribed|regulated to the time reduction provision 10 table 202ie is demonstrated. FIG. 771 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the time saving provision 10 table 202ie.

Specifically, in the jackpot types "jackpot A10" and "jackpot B10", regardless of the game state at the time of winning the jackpot, if the probability variable limit reaching flag 203u is set to off, the number of time saving times given "65535 (substantially until the next time)" is defined, and when the probability variation limit reach flag 203u is set to ON, the number of times of reduction in working hours given "0" is defined. And, in the jackpot type "jackpot C10", regardless of the game state at the time of winning the jackpot, if the probability variation limit reaching flag 203u is set to OFF, the number of times of time reduction given "65535 (substantially until the next time)" is defined, and when the probability variation limit reaching flag 203u is set to ON, the number of times of time saving given "3" is defined.

Next, with reference to FIG. 772, the configuration of the RAM 203 included in the main controller 110 of the pachinko machine 10 in the forty-fourth embodiment will be described. FIG. 772 is a diagram schematically showing the configuration of the RAM 203 of the main controller 110 in the forty-fourth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 772, in the forty-fourth embodiment, the time saving limit number counter 203i is deleted from the configuration of the RAM 203 of the thirty-fifth embodiment (see FIG. 621), and the second special symbol holding ball number counter 203ia is added. Since other configurations are the same, the same reference numerals are given and detailed description thereof is omitted.

<Control processing executed by main controller 110 in the forty-fourth embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 773 and 774, each control process executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 in the forty-fourth embodiment will be described. In this embodiment, in place of the special symbol variation processing (see S104 in FIG. 632), the special symbol variation processing 10 (see C104 in FIG. 773) is replaced with the first special symbol variation start processing ( S203 reference in Figure 633) and the second special symbol variation start process (see S208 in Figure 643), the difference is that the special symbol variation start process 10 (C213 in Figure 774) is executed, and the other points are are identical. The same parts are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 773, special symbol variation processing 10 (C104) executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 in the forty-fourth embodiment will be described. FIG. 773 is a flow chart showing the contents of the special symbol variation process 10 (C104).

In this special symbol variation process, first, it is determined whether the present time is any of the special symbol jackpots (C201). Specifically, it is determined whether or not the data indicating the current game state stored in the game state storage area 203k is during the jackpot (during the jackpot game). As a result of the determination, if the jackpot of the special symbol is in progress (C201: Yes), this processing is finished as it is.

In the process of C201, if it is determined that the special symbol jackpot is not in progress (C201: No), it is determined whether or not the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is fluctuating (C202), and the first symbol is determined. If the display mode of the display device 37 is not fluctuating (C202: No), the value of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203ia (number of times of holding variable display N2 based on the second special symbol lottery) is acquired (C203 ). Next, it is determined whether or not the value (N2) of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203ia is greater than 0 (C204). If the value (N2) of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203ia is not 0 (C204: Yes), the value (N2) of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203ia is subtracted by 1 (C205) and changed by calculation. A reserved ball number command indicating the value of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203ia is set (C206). The pending ball number command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in the external output process (S2501) of the main process (see FIG. 655) executed by the MPU 201, voice It is sent to the lamp control device 113 . When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball number command, it extracts the value of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203ia from the reserved ball number command, and stores the extracted value in the second special symbol reserved ball number counter of the RAM 223. 223ia.

After setting the reserved ball number command by the process of C206, the data stored in the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b is shifted (C207). In the process of C207, the data stored in the reservation first area to the reservation fourth area of the second special symbol reservation ball storage area 203b are sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, the first holding area → execution area, the second holding area → the first holding area, the third holding area → the second holding area, the fourth holding area → the third holding area, etc. Shift the data and move to the process of C213.

On the other hand, in the process of C204, when it is determined that the value (N2) of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203ia is 0 (C204: No), the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d (first (C208), and determine whether the acquired value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is greater than 0 (C209). .

In the processing of C209, when it is determined that the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is 0 (C209: No), this processing is terminated as it is. On the other hand, in the process of C209, if it is determined that the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is not 0 (that is, is 1 or more) (C209: Yes), the first special symbol reserved ball number The value (N1) of the counter 203d is subtracted by 1 (C210), and a reserved ball number command indicating the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d changed by calculation is set (C211). The pending ball number command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in the external output process (S2501) of the main process (see FIG. 655) executed by the MPU 201, voice It is sent to the lamp control device 113 . When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball number command, it extracts the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d from the reserved ball number command, and stores the extracted value in the first special symbol reserved ball number counter of the RAM 223. 223d.

After setting the reserved ball number command by the process of C211, the data stored in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a is shifted by the same method as the process of C207 (C212), and the process proceeds to C213. Transition. In the process of C213 executed after the process of C207 or C212, the special symbol variation start process 10 for starting the variation display in the first symbol display device 37 is performed (C213), and this process is finished. The details of this special symbol variation start process 10 will be described later with reference to FIG.

In the process of C202, if the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (C202: Yes), the variable time counter for measuring the variable time is updated (C214), and the updated variable time counter is changed. Based on the value, it is determined whether or not the variation time of the variation display executed in the first symbol display device 37 has elapsed (C215). The variation time of the variation display executed in the first pattern display device 37 is determined according to the variation pattern selected by the variation type counter CS1 (determined according to the variation pattern command), and this variation time has not elapsed (C215: No), the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is updated (C216), and this process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of C215, if the variation time of the variable display being executed has passed (C215: Yes), the display mode corresponding to the stop symbol of the first symbol display device 37 is set (C217). The setting of the stop symbol is performed in advance by special symbol variation start processing 10 (C213), which will be described later with reference to FIG. When this special symbol variation start process 10 (C213) is executed, a special symbol lottery is performed based on the values of various counters stored in the execution area. More specifically, whether or not the special symbol jackpot is determined according to the value of the first winning random number counter C1, and in the case of the special symbol jackpot, depending on the value of the first winning type counter C2. Then, one of the jackpot A10, the jackpot B10, and the jackpot C10 is determined.

In this embodiment, when the jackpot A10 is reached, the first symbol display device 37 turns on the blue LED, when the jackpot B10 hits, the red LED lights up, and when the jackpot hit C10 , turn on the green LED. If it is out, the blue LED and the red LED are turned on. The display of each LED is turned off when the next variable display is started, but it may be turned on only for several seconds after the variable display is stopped.

After the process of C217 is completed, when the variation display being executed in the first symbol display device 37 is started, the special symbol lottery result (this lottery result) performed by the special symbol variation start process is It is determined whether or not it is a special symbol jackpot (C218). If the lottery result of this time is a special symbol jackpot (C218: Yes), the variable probability flag 203g is set to OFF, the value of the counter 203m during time saving is reset to 0 (C219), and the process proceeds to C224.

On the other hand, in the process of C218, if the lottery result of this time is out of the special design (C218: No), whether the value of the time saving medium counter 203m is a value greater than 0 (that is, whether it is a normal working time saving state of the design) ) is determined (C220), and if it is determined that the value of the time saving counter 203m is greater than 0 (C220: Yes), the value of the time saving counter 203m is subtracted by 1 (C221), and the process proceeds to C222 do. On the other hand, in the process of C220, when it is determined that the value of the time saving counter 203m is 0 (C220: No), each process of C221 to C223 is skipped and the process proceeds to C224.

In the process of C222, it is determined whether or not the value of the time saving counter 203m after the subtraction is 0 (C222). When it is determined that the value of the counter 203m during time saving is 0 (C222: Yes), a state command indicating that the game state is changed from the time saving state of the normal design to the normal state of the normal design is set (C223). , and then shifts to the processing of C224. The status command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is executed by the MPU 201 during the external output processing (S2501) of the main processing (see FIG. 655). It is sent towards device 113 . When receiving the state command, the sound lamp control device 113 acquires the game state included in the state command. As a result, the state grasped by the sound lamp control device 113 can be matched with the actual state of the pachinko machine 10 .

On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of C222 that the value of the counter 203m is not 0 (C222: No), the process of C223 is skipped and the process proceeds to C224.

In the process of C224, a stop command indicating the stop type is set, and this process ends. The stop command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and is executed by the MPU 201 during the external output processing (S2501) of the main processing (see FIG. 655). It is sent towards device 113 . When the state command is received, the sound lamp control device 113 sets the stop symbol of the third symbol based on the stop type indicated by the stop command.

Next, with reference to FIG. 774, special symbol variation start processing 10 (C213) executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 774 is a flowchart showing special symbol variation start processing 10 (C213). This special symbol variation start process 10 (C213) is a process executed in the special symbol variation process 10 (see FIG. 773), and includes the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a and the second special symbol reserved ball storage area. Based on the values of the various counters stored in the execution area of 203b, a lottery (win/fail judgment) of "special symbol jackpot" or "special symbol loss" is performed, and the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display. It is a process for determining the effect pattern (variation pattern) of the variable effect performed by the device 81 .

In the special symbol variation start process 10 (see FIG. 774), first, each value of the first per random number counter C1, the first per type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 stored in the execution area is acquired ( C301).

Next, the variable probability flag 203g is read to determine whether the pachinko machine 10 is in a special symbol high probability state (C302). In the process of C302, if the probability variation flag 203g is ON, it is determined that the special symbol is in a high probability state, and if the probability variation flag 203g is OFF, it is determined as a special symbol low probability state (not the first probability variation state). . In the process of C302, if it is determined that the pachinko machine 10 is in a special symbol high probability state (C302: Yes), the value of the first per random number counter C1 obtained in the process of C301 and the special value for high probability Based on the symbol jackpot random number table, the lottery result of whether or not the special symbol jackpot is obtained (C303). Specifically, the value of the first winning random number counter C1 is compared with the first winning random number table for high probability (see FIG. 612). As described above, 30 random numbers from "3 to 32" are set as the random numbers for the special symbol jackpot, and the value of the first winning random number counter C1 and the random numbers for these winnings match. If so, it is determined to be a special symbol jackpot. When the lottery result of the special symbol is obtained, the process proceeds to C305.

On the other hand, in the process of C302, when it is determined that the pachinko machine 10 is not in a special symbol high probability state (a special symbol low probability state) (C302: No), the first hit random number counter acquired in the process of C301 Based on the value of C1 and the first winning random number table for low probability (see FIG. 612), the lottery result as to whether or not the special symbol is a jackpot is acquired (C304). Specifically, the value of the first hit random number counter C1 is compared with the special symbol jackpot random number table for low probability. When the value of the first winning random number counter C1 coincides with the winning random number value (that is, "0"), it is determined that the special symbol is a jackpot. When the lottery result of the special symbol is obtained, the process proceeds to C305.

In the process of C305, based on the fluctuation pattern scenario table 202f, the fluctuation pattern table to be used this time is specified (C305), and the process proceeds to C306.

Then, it is determined whether the lottery result of the special symbol obtained by the process of C303 or C304 is a special symbol jackpot (C306), and when it is determined that it is a special symbol jackpot (C306: Yes), Based on the value of the first hit type counter C2 acquired in the process of C301, the display mode at the time of the big hit is set (C307). More specifically, the value of the first hit type counter C2 acquired in the process of C301 is compared with the jackpot type selection 10 table 202ib to determine what the jackpot type is. As described above, when the first special symbol lottery results in a big hit, the special figure 1 jackpot type selection table 202ib1 (see FIG. 768) is referred to, and the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "0 to 39 ”, it is determined to be a jackpot A10 (10th round 1st probability variable jackpot), and if it is in the range “40 to 199”, it is determined to be a jackpot B10 (5th round 1st probability variable jackpot).

In this embodiment, even when the second special symbol lottery results in a big hit, the same control process as in the above-described case of a first special symbol lottery result in a big hit is executed. More specifically, the value of the first hit type counter C2 obtained in the process of C301 is compared with the special figure 2 jackpot type selection 10 table 202ib2 (see FIG. 769) to determine what the jackpot type is. . As described above, when the jackpot is won in the lottery of the second special symbol, the value of the first hit type counter C2 is all range values of "0 to 199", and the jackpot C10 (10th round 1st probability variable jackpot) It is determined that

In this process of C307, the display mode (lighting state of the LED 37a) of the first symbol display device 37 is set according to the determined jackpot type (jackpot A10, jackpot B10, jackpot C10). In order to stop and display the stop symbols corresponding to the jackpot types on the third symbol display device 81, the jackpot types (jackpot A10, jackpot B10, jackpot C10) are set as stop types.

Next, the variation pattern at the time of the big win is determined (C308). When the variation pattern is set in the process of C308, the variation time (display time) of the variation effect in the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the third symbol display device 81 until it stops with the jackpot symbol. A pattern variation time is determined. At this time, the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203 is compared with the variation pattern selection 10 table 202id to determine the variation pattern (variation time) corresponding to the value of the variation type counter CS1. .

On the other hand, in the process of C306, when it is determined that the special symbol is out (C306: No), the display mode at the time of being out is set (C309). In the process of C309, the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is set to the display mode corresponding to the off symbol, and based on the value of the stop type selection counter C3 stored in the execution area, the third symbol display device As the stop type to be displayed in 81, it is set whether it is front-rear out-of-reach, non-front-rear out-of-reach, or complete out-of-order.

Next, the variation pattern at the time of deviation is determined (C310). Here, the display time of the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the variation time of the third symbol until the third symbol display device 81 stops at the lost symbol is determined. At this time, as in the process of C308, the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203 is compared with the variation pattern selection 10 table 202id, and the variation pattern corresponding to the value of the variation type counter CS1 (variation time) is determined.

When the processing of C308 or C310 is finished, next, a variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 of the variation pattern determined in the processing of C308 or C310 is set (C311). Then, the counter value corresponding to the variation time of the current variation pattern is set to the corresponding special figure type variation time counter (C312). Then, a stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type set in the process of C307 or C309 is set (C313). These variation pattern command and stop type command are stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203 and transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 in the processing of S2501 of the main processing (see FIG. 655). When the process of C313 ends, it returns to the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 773).

<45th Embodiment>
Next, the forty-fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 775 to 778. FIG. The forty-fifth embodiment is different from the thirty-seventh embodiment described above in that the game state transition contents are different.

In the thirty-seventh embodiment described above, the main variation is the special figure 1 variation in the normal state and the first probability variation state, and when the jackpot is won with the special figure 1 variation, 11 consecutive chan is confirmed (first hit + the first probability variation state 10 jackpot wins are executed until the end of the game). Then, after 11 consecutive chans, the second definite variable state is set, and the special figure 2 variation, which is the main variation in the second definite variable state, is a game that suppresses the increase in the number of output balls during the period until the definite variable limit ends. configured to be done.

In other words, if you win the 1st probability variation jackpot with the normal state set, the probability variation limit number of times is set to 40 times, and the time reduction limit number of times is set to 10 times. During the set period), the game is played in which the number of balls is increased, and between reaching the time-saving limit and reaching the variable limit (the period when the second variable state is set), the number of balls It was configured to suppress the increase.

On the other hand, in the 45th embodiment, when the first probability variation jackpot is won in a state where the normal state is set, the probability variation limit 10 times and the time reduction limit 40 times are set, and until the probability variation limit is reached During the period (the period when the first variable state is set), play a game in which the number of output balls increases, and from reaching the variable limit to reaching the time saving limit (period when the time saving state is set ) is different in that it is configured to suppress an increase in the number of balls paid out.

That is, in the 45th embodiment, the game state used to suppress the increase in the number of balls released is changed to the second variable state (high probability state for special symbols, low probability state for normal symbols), as opposed to the 37th embodiment described above. Probability state), it is different in that it is switched to a time saving state (low probability state of special symbols, high probability state of normal symbols).

By configuring in this way, the probability of winning a big win in the special symbol lottery can be reduced during the period (suppression period) in which the increase in the number of paid balls is suppressed, in contrast to the above-described thirty-seventh embodiment. Therefore, even if a jackpot game with a large number of rounds (many prize balls) can be executed as a jackpot game to be executed when a jackpot is won in a special symbol lottery, an increase in the number of balls issued during the suppression period is suppressed. Therefore, it is possible to provide the player with a wide variety of games.

In addition, in the above-described thirty-seventh embodiment, until the probability variation limit is reached, specifically, until the number of times the special symbol lottery jackpot winning reaches 30 times, the suppression period could not be terminated. In the forty-fifth embodiment, the game state can be shifted from the time saving state to the normal state by establishment of the time saving end condition except when the time saving limit is reached.

Therefore, for a player who is playing a game to end the suppression period, the first game aiming for a predetermined number of jackpot winnings and the time saving end condition (for example, after the time saving state is set, the jackpot is not won) , and the second game aiming at establishment of a time-saving end condition which is established when the special symbol lottery is executed 100 times, can be performed in duplicate, so that the amusement of the game can be improved.

In addition, the above-mentioned first game is a game aimed at winning a jackpot, and the second game described above is a game that does not aim at winning a jackpot. Since the game progresses toward the achievement of any game even if the result is poor, it is possible to prevent the game from becoming monotonous during the suppression period and the player to quickly become bored with the game. can.

<About the game state transition of the 45th embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIG. 775, the content of transition of the game state in the forty-fifth embodiment will be described. FIG. 775 is a diagram schematically showing transition contents of game states in the forty-fifth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 775, the transition content of the game state in the 45th embodiment reaches the variable probability limit in the first variable probability state with respect to the transition content of the game state (see FIG. 700) in the 37th embodiment described above The value set in the time saving limit number counter 203i is higher than the value (10) set in the probability variable limit number counter 203h at the time of the first hit (at the time of winning the jackpot in the normal state) so that the time saving state is shifted to the time saving state. It is different in that it is configured to increase the number of (40) and that it is configured so that a game that suppresses the increase and decrease of the number of balls is played in the second special symbol lottery during the time saving state. , are otherwise identical. A detailed description of the same contents will be omitted.

In other words, as described above, in the forty-fifth embodiment, the period for managing the amount of balls that can be awarded to the player is changed to the high-probability state of special symbols, in contrast to the thirty-fifth embodiment or the thirty-seventh embodiment. It is very different in that it is switched from the special pattern high probability period in which the high probability state of the normal pattern is set to the normal pattern high probability period.

By configuring in this way, among the periods for managing the amount of balls to be put out, the first period (period during the first variable probability state) in which a large number of balls can be given is the same as each embodiment described above. game can be executed, and a low probability state of special symbols can be set for the second period (period during the time saving state) for suppressing increase/decrease in the number of paid balls. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult to win the jackpot during the second period in which the increase/decrease in the number of paid balls is suppressed.

In addition, as the end condition for ending the second period, multiple end conditions, that is, the end condition that is established when the time reduction limit is reached, and the time reduction end condition (100 special figure fluctuations) are established during the time reduction state. A termination condition to be established when the second period is completed can be provided, so that a player who tries to end the second period as soon as possible is allowed to play either a game aiming at winning a big win or a game not aiming at winning a big win. can be done.

<Regarding the electrical configuration of the forty-fifth embodiment>
Next, the electrical configuration of the forty-fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 776 to 778. FIG. The forty-fifth embodiment is different from the thirty-fifth embodiment described above in that a part of the configuration of the ROM 202 of the main controller 110 is changed, and the rest is the same. The same reference numerals are assigned to the same configurations, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The ROM 202 possessed by the main controller 110 in the present embodiment is a special figure 1 jackpot category selection table 202b1 ( Figure 613 (b) reference) instead of the special figure 1 jackpot type selection 11 table 202jb1, instead of the special figure 2 jackpot type selection table 202b2, the special figure 2 jackpot type selection 11 table 202jb2 is used, and time saving is given Table 202e (see FIG. 617) is replaced with a difference in that the time saving 11 table 202je is used, and the rest is the same. The same reference numerals are assigned to the same configurations, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Here, with reference to FIG. 776, the contents defined in the special figure 1 jackpot type selection 11 table 202jb1 will be described. FIG. 776 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the special figure 1 jackpot type selection 11 table 202jb1. As shown in FIG. 776, the special figure 1 jackpot type selection 11 table 202jb1 is the first special symbol lottery for the special figure 1 jackpot type selection table 202b1 (see FIG. 613(b)) in the thirty-fifth embodiment described above. The difference is that the jackpot type set when the jackpot is won is changed.

Specifically, "jackpot A11 (10R jackpot)" is defined in the range of "0 to 49" for the value of the first hit type counter C2, and "jackpot B11 (5R jackpot)” is defined.

Also, in the case of the jackpot type being either "jackpot A11" or "jackpot B11", the game state (game state at the time of winning) at the time of winning (at the time of jackpot winning) is "normal state, first variable state". In the case, after the end of the jackpot game, the "first probability change state" is set, and when winning is "normal state, other than the first probability change state (time saving state, second probability change state)", after the end of the jackpot game "second 2 probability change state” is set. In addition, after the first hit (when both the probability variable limit number of times and the time saving limit number of times are not set), the set limit number of times is either "jackpot A11" or "jackpot B11". At the end, "10" is set as the variable probability limit number of times, and "40" is set as the time reduction limit number of times.

Next, with reference to FIG. 777, the contents defined in the special figure 2 jackpot type selection 11 table 202jb2 will be described. FIG. 777 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the special figure 2 jackpot type selection 11 table 202jb2. As shown in FIG. 777, the special figure 2 jackpot type selection 11 table 202jb2 is the second special symbol lottery for the special figure 2 jackpot type selection table 202b2 (see FIG. 613 (c)) in the thirty-fifth embodiment described above. The difference is that the jackpot type set when the jackpot is won is changed.

Specifically, "jackpot C11 (2R jackpot)" is defined in the range of "0 to 197" for the value of the first hit type counter C2, and "jackpot D11 (2R jackpot)” is defined.

Then, the jackpot type "jackpot C11" is set to the "second probability variable state" after the jackpot game ends when the game state (game state at the time of winning) at the time of winning (at the time of winning the jackpot) is "normal state". , When winning is in a state other than the normal state (time saving state, first variable probability state, second variable probability state), the “time saving state” is set after the jackpot game ends. In addition, the jackpot type "jackpot D11" is set to "second probability variable state" after the jackpot game ends when the game state (game state at the time of winning) at the time of winning (at the time of winning the jackpot) is "normal state". , When winning is in a state other than the normal state (time saving state, first variable probability state, second variable probability state), the first variable variable state is set after the end of the jackpot game.

In addition, for both "jackpot C11" and "jackpot D11", after the first hit (when both the probability variable limit number and the time reduction limit number are not set), the limit number of times set is, at the end of the jackpot game, "10" is set as the probability variation limit number of times, and "40" is set as the time saving limit number of times.

Next, with reference to FIG. 778, the contents defined in the time saving provision 11 table 202je will be described. FIG. 778 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the time saving provision 11 table 202je.

Specifically, for the jackpot types "jackpot A11" and "jackpot B11", if the game state at the time of winning is "normal state, first probability variable state", the probability variable limit reach flag 203u, the time reduction limit reach flag When both 203v are set to OFF, the number of time-savings given "65535 (substantially until the next time)" is defined, and in other cases, the number of time-savings given "0" is defined. In addition, when the game state at the time of winning is "time saving state, second variable probability state", the game state after the end of the jackpot game is not a jackpot in which the high probability state of normal symbols is set, so the probability variable limit Irrespective of the setting status of the arrival flag 203u and the time saving limit reaching flag 203v, the number of time saving times to be given "0" is defined.

The jackpot type "jackpot C11" is not a jackpot in which a high probability state of normal symbols is set as the game state after the jackpot game ends when the game state at the time of winning is "normal state", so the probability variable limit Irrespective of the setting status of the arrival flag 203u and the time saving limit reaching flag 203v, the number of time saving times to be given "0" is defined. Also, if the game state at the time of winning is "time saving state, first probability variable state, second probability variable state", both probability variable limit reaching flag 203u and time saving limit reaching flag 203v are set to off , the number of time-savings given "100" is defined, and in other cases, the number of time-savings given "0" is defined.

The jackpot type "jackpot D11" is not a jackpot in which a high probability state of normal symbols is set as the game state after the jackpot game ends when the game state at the time of winning is "normal state", so the probability variable limit Irrespective of the setting status of the arrival flag 203u and the time saving limit reaching flag 203v, the number of time saving times to be given "0" is defined. Also, if the gaming state at the time of winning is "time saving state, first probability variable state, second probability variable state", the probability variable limit reaching flag 203u and the time saving limit reaching flag 203v are both set to off, or , Probability variable limit reach flag 203u is set to on, if the time saving limit reach flag 203v is off, the number of time saving times given "65535 (substantially until the next time)" is defined, otherwise time saving times is defined as "0".

As described above, in the 45th embodiment, when the first probability variable jackpot is won in a state where the normal state is set, the probability variable limit 10 times and the time reduction limit 40 times are set, and the probability variable limit is reached. Until (the period in which the first probability variable state is set), play a game in which the number of output balls increases, and from reaching the probability variable limit to reaching the time saving limit (time saving state is set) period), it is configured to suppress the increase in the number of balls paid out.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to reduce the probability of winning a big hit in the special symbol lottery during the period (suppression period) in which the increase in the number of balls to be released is suppressed. Therefore, even if a jackpot game with a large number of rounds (many prize balls) can be executed as a jackpot game to be executed when a jackpot is won in a special symbol lottery, an increase in the number of balls issued during the suppression period is suppressed. Therefore, it is possible to provide the player with a wide variety of games.

Moreover, in the 45th embodiment, the game state can be shifted from the time saving state to the normal state by establishment of the time saving end condition except when reaching the time saving limit.

Therefore, for a player who is playing a game to end the suppression period, the first game aiming for a predetermined number of jackpot winnings and the time saving end condition (for example, after the time saving state is set, the jackpot is not won) , and the second game aiming at establishment of a time-saving end condition which is established when the special symbol lottery is executed 100 times, can be performed in duplicate, so that the amusement of the game can be improved.

In addition, the above-mentioned first game is a game aimed at winning a jackpot, and the second game described above is a game that does not aim at winning a jackpot. Since the game progresses toward the achievement of any game even if the result is poor, it is possible to prevent the game from becoming monotonous during the suppression period and the player to quickly become bored with the game. can.

Various technical ideas used for the pachinko machine 10 in the thirty-fifth to forty-fifth embodiments described above with reference to FIGS. 581 to 778 may be applied to other techniques. In the pachinko machine 10, after the first probability variable state that relatively easily increases the player's possession balls (outgoing balls) is completed (after reaching the time reduction limit), the player's possession balls are higher than the first probability variation state. In order to continue the second probability variable state in which it is relatively difficult to increase (ball output) for a predetermined period, the second probability variable state continues until the number of jackpot winnings (the number of jackpot game executions) in the second probability variable state reaches a predetermined number. However, after the end of the advantageous game state advantageous to the player, a disadvantageous game state that is more disadvantageous to the player than the advantageous game state is set for a predetermined period of time. For example, during a jackpot game, after an advantageous game state (a round game period in which prize balls can be obtained) that is advantageous to the player ends, a disadvantageous game state that is disadvantageous to the player (ending that makes it difficult to obtain prize balls) period) may be set for a predetermined period.

In this case, the length of the unfavorable gaming state may be varied according to the length of the period in which the advantageous gaming state that is advantageous to the player continues (the number of round games executed as a jackpot game), For example, when an advantageous jackpot game in which a long advantageous game state is set (for example, 10R jackpot) is executed, a disadvantageous jackpot game (for example, 2R jackpot game) that is more disadvantageous to the player than the advantageous game state is executed. It is preferable to set a disadvantageous game state with a different length for each jackpot game so that the disadvantageous game state is longer than when it is executed, for example, when a 10R jackpot game is executed. It is preferable to set a disadvantageous game state (ending period) for 10 seconds and a disadvantageous game state (ending period) for 2 seconds when a 2R jackpot game is executed.

Also, instead of prescribing the length of the ending period according to the type of each jackpot game, the length of the disadvantageous game state (ending period) is varied according to whether or not other conditions are met. may be, for example, the number of jackpot games executed during a period in which a specific game state (high probability state of normal symbols or high probability state of special symbols) is continuously set (number of consecutive chances), The length of the ending period set for the jackpot game to be executed may be varied based on the number of winning balls.

In this case, for example, even if the jackpot game with the same content is executed, by setting a longer ending period than the others for the jackpot game with a specific number of consecutive chances (for example, the 15th consecutive chance). , a special ending effect using a long period can be executed as the effect executed during the ending period.

In the above example, the ending period is shown as a disadvantageous gaming state during the jackpot game, but it is not limited to this, and similarly to the ending period, the period during which it is difficult to acquire prize balls ( A period other than during a round game) may be set as a disadvantageous game state, and the length of the period may be varied.

In addition, the game state that is advantageous to the player may be any state other than the state in which the player is easily awarded prize balls. A state in which it is relatively easy to win a big hit in the normal symbol lottery, or a state in which an effect (animation, etc.) with low execution frequency is likely to be executed may be used.

Further, in the above-described thirty-eighth embodiment and forty-first embodiment, the game state set after the end of the jackpot game is determined according to the game content executed during the jackpot game. By configuring the game contents to be selectable by the player, the player can arbitrarily select the game state to be set after the jackpot game ends. Then, according to the player's selection result (game content), there is a first game in which a privilege is likely to be given when the execution condition is unlikely to be satisfied but is executed, and a privilege is given when the execution condition is likely to be satisfied but is executed. The pachinko machine 10 configured to execute either the second game in which is difficult to be awarded or the pachinko machine 10 has been described.

In this way, the technical idea of enabling the player to select a game to be executed later may be diverted to other techniques. Special symbol high probability state, normal symbol low probability state) When executing one game (V winning game) during the jackpot game executed based on winning the jackpot, the second probability variable state ( A game state in which it is easy to win a jackpot, but it is difficult to set the first probability variable state after the jackpot game ends), but when another game (non-V winning game) different from the first game is executed during the jackpot game, a special It may be configured to set the normal state in which the state (special mode) is set. That is, based on the execution of another game (non-V winning game) during the jackpot game, when the special symbol is in a low probability state and the jackpot is won, the first probability state after the jackpot game ends. may be configured to set a game state in which is likely to be set.

By configuring in this way, by executing the non-V winning game during the jackpot game, the second special symbol lottery in which the first probability variable state is likely to be set after the jackpot game ends is frequently performed (more than the normal normal state). ) Since it is possible to set a normal state in which an executable special state (special mode) is set, it is possible to provide the player with the pleasure of selecting a non-V winning game.

Furthermore, in this case, by executing a non-V winning game during a jackpot game, it is preferable to configure so that a normal normal state and a special normal state can occur. , For example, when a jackpot game in which a specific jackpot type (jackpot type 1) is set is executed, by executing a non-V winning game, the normal state of the special state (special mode) after the jackpot game ends When a jackpot game in which a jackpot type other than the specific jackpot type (jackpot type 2) is set is executed, a normal normal state is set after the jackpot game ends by executing a non-V winning game. It is preferable to configure the first probability variable state to be set by executing the V winning game regardless of the jackpot type.

In other words, according to the set jackpot type, it is preferable to set the case where it is advantageous to execute the V winning game and the case where it is advantageous to execute the non-V winning game. By configuring in this way, during the jackpot game, according to the selection result (game selection result) of whether to execute the V winning game or the non-V winning game, and the set jackpot type Since the selection results that are advantageous to the player can be varied, the player can be interested in the game content selected by himself/herself.

Further, in this case, by configuring the same content of the jackpot game to be executed in the above-described jackpot type 1 and jackpot type 2, even if the content of the jackpot game is grasped, which jackpot type is set. Since it is possible to make it difficult for the player to predict whether or not to play, the player can be made to select the game content more carefully. On the other hand, when a jackpot game with different contents is executed at least in part when the jackpot type 1 is set and when the jackpot type 2 is set, the jackpot game to be executed It is possible to make the player predict the type of jackpot that is set based on the contents of . Therefore, it is possible to make a player who intends to select an advantageous game method during a big winning game pay attention to the content of the big winning game being executed.

It should be noted that the content of the jackpot game here means not only the content of the actual jackpot game (for example, the number of rounds and the type of variable winning device that is opened), but also the content of various effects that are executed during the jackpot game. It is a concept that is included.

It should be noted that, in the above-described thirty-fifth embodiment, the period during which the second period (disadvantageous gaming state (second probability variable state)) is set after the first period (advantageous gaming state (first probability variable state)) ends As the end condition of the second period so as to be the specific period, it is configured to set the end condition that is satisfied when the specific game (jackpot game) is executed a predetermined number of times. The length of the second period may be set in advance, and the game content may be controlled so that the specific game (jackpot game) is executed only a maximum of a predetermined number of times during that period.

In this case, for example, when the upper limit number of jackpot games executed during the second period is set to 3 times and the length of the second period is set to 30 minutes, the remaining time of the second period and the executed The number of jackpot games is discriminated, and the fluctuation time of the special symbol fluctuation can be determined based on the discrimination result. A first period (for example, 5 seconds) is easily set as the fluctuation time of the special symbol fluctuation, and when the first jackpot game is executed within 10 minutes after the setting of the second period. , From the end of the first jackpot game until 10 minutes after the second period is set, the second time (for example, 3 minutes) longer than the first time is the variation time of the special symbol variation , and thereafter, based on the remaining time of the second period and the number of executed jackpot games, the length of the fluctuation time of the special symbol fluctuation can be determined. It may be configured to limit the number of jackpot games in the remaining time of the period.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to set a limit on the number of jackpot games to be executed during the second period with respect to the predetermined length of the second period. In this case, if it is determined that the upper limit number of jackpot games have been executed before the end of the second period, the special symbol fluctuation is performed with a longer fluctuation time than the remaining time until the second period elapses. It may be configured to be executable, or a special lottery (invalid lottery) that cannot win a jackpot in a special symbol lottery may be configured to be executable. As a result, it is possible to prevent the jackpot game from being executed more than the upper limit number of times during the second period.

In addition, when the jackpot game is not executed even though the second period has passed the predetermined period, the third time (for example, 0.1 seconds) shorter than the first time is set as the variation time of the special symbol variation. It is good to configure so that it can be determined as By configuring in this way, it is possible to increase the number of special symbol lotteries executed during the remaining time of the second period more easily than when the first time is set, and as a result, the second It is possible to facilitate execution of a jackpot game during the period. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the execution of a game that is excessively disadvantageous to the player.

In the above example, the period in which the first variable probability state is set is the first period, and the period in which the second variable probability state is set after the first period is the second period. Other periods may be defined as the first period and the second period. For example, the period during which the jackpot game is executed is the first period, and the period during which the special symbol lottery can be executed after the jackpot game is finished is the second period. It may be configured to be set as two periods.

Even in such a case, after the advantageous game state (jackpot game state) that is advantageous to the player ends, a disadvantageous game state (a state where the jackpot game is not executed) is set for a predetermined period (second period). As a result, it is possible to obtain the same effect as the technical idea described in the thirty-fifth embodiment, that it is possible to suppress the occurrence of situations in which the advantageous game state is excessively frequently executed.

Further, the above-described advantageous game state and disadvantageous game state may be applied to various effects executed by the pachinko machine 10. For example, after the first effect advantageous to the player is executed for the upper limit period, the The period during which the first effect is not executed and the second effect different from the first effect is executed may be set to a predetermined period or longer. Even when configured in this manner, the period during which the first effect is not executed for the player can be set for a predetermined period or more, so that the excessively frequent execution of the first effect can be suppressed. .

Specifically, for example, every time the number of times the jackpot is won in a short period of time (the number of consecutive wins) becomes a multiple of 5, a first effect that is advantageous to the player (for example, a premium effect to congratulate the player, , an effect suggesting the set value) can be executed. That is, when a jackpot is won a plurality of times in a short period of time, after the first effect is executed, the second effect different from the first effect is executed until the number of consecutive wins increases by 5 times. good. By configuring in this way, it is possible to suppress frequent execution of the first effect.

In addition, for example, after executing the first effect capable of increasing the effect of the effect, the period (second period) in which the first effect is difficult to be executed can be continued for a predetermined period. can be In this case, as the definition of the predetermined period, the period until the special symbol variation is executed a predetermined number of times, the period until the special symbol lottery jackpot is won, and the variation effect for showing the result of the special symbol lottery. A period until the presentation mode is set, a period until the elapsed time reaches the predetermined time, or the like may be used as the predetermined period. By configuring in this way, it is possible to suppress frequent execution of the first effect.

In the thirty-sixth embodiment described above with reference to Figures 692 to 696, based on the number of special symbol variations executed after the second probability variation state is set, the variation pattern group referred to when determining the variation time By making it possible to determine the variation time of different length by differentiating the type, the execution frequency of the small winning game is varied based on the number of special symbol variations, and the ball output transition in the second probability variation state is changed. Although it was configured to move up and down intentionally, other configurations may be used. For example, based on the number of times the second probability variable state is set continuously, refer to when determining the variable time The variation pattern group may be different, and in the period in which the second probability variation state is continuously set, the number of special symbol variations after the second probability variation state is set for the first time, straddling the jackpot game. A measurable cumulative measurement means may be provided, and the variation pattern group to be referred to when determining the variation time based on the measurement result of the cumulative measurement means may be changed, or the remaining probability variation limit number (remaining probability variation limit number ), the variation pattern group referred to when determining the variation time may be changed.

And, in the period in which the high probability state of the special symbol is set continuously (special high probability period), the longer the period in which the second probability variable state is set, the more out of the plurality of variation pattern groups It is preferable that the variation pattern of the special symbol variation can be determined by referring to the variation pattern group in which the short variation pattern is likely to be selected. By configuring in this way, when the second probability variable state, which is a game state disadvantageous to the player, continues for a long time during the special figure high probability period, the game disadvantageous to the player is excessively executed, It is possible to suppress the player's desire to play from dropping.

Furthermore, in this case, if the number of times that the first probability variable state can be set during the special figure high probability period is determined to be a predetermined number or less (for example, 10 times or less) (when the possibility of becoming ), it is preferable that the variation pattern of the special symbol variation can be determined by referring to the variation pattern group in which the short variation pattern is likely to be selected from among the plurality of variation pattern groups. By configuring in this way, when the second probability variable state, which is a game state disadvantageous to the player, continues for a long time during the special figure high probability period, the game disadvantageous to the player is excessively executed, It is possible to suppress the player's desire to play from dropping.

In addition, in the thirty-sixth embodiment described above, in order to create waves in the increase and decrease (vertical width) of the number of balls released during the second variable probability state, it is possible to determine the variation pattern of different variation times according to the established conditions. However, other configurations may be used to achieve the same purpose. , You may comprise so that the game content of a small hit game may be changed.

Furthermore, the technical idea used in the 36th embodiment described above, that is, the technical idea of varying the execution frequency of the specific game (small winning game) during the specific game period (during the second probability variable state) is used for another purpose For example, it may be configured to vary the execution frequency of the specific game (specific effect) during the specific game period (during the continuous effect period using a plurality of special symbol variation periods).

In the thirty-ninth embodiment described above, when the special symbol lottery is executed, the background mode is selected regardless of the result of the special symbol lottery. nothing. For example, depending on the previous jackpot type, it may be configured to set a period during which the limit remaining number suggestion mode determination process (see S5251 in FIG. 733), which is the process of selecting the background mode, is not executed. In this case, the "normal background" is set regardless of the result of the special symbol lottery or the overlapping period of the probability variation limit remaining number and the time saving limit remaining number. By configuring in this way, for example, even if the overlap period is "SP" when the jackpot is won, the background mode does not change to "heaven background" or "lucky background" and remains "normal background". When a special low-probability short-time state in which the second special symbol mainly fluctuates based on reaching both limits at the same time is set for the player who continues the game by predicting that it is not at least "SP". , the player's desire to play can be improved by bringing about a happy situation that the player did not expect.

In addition, the condition for setting the period during which the limit remaining number suggesting mode determination process (see S5251 in FIG. 733) is not executed is not limited to the previous jackpot type, and by operating the frame button 22, the "mode with background mode change" A configuration may be adopted in which an effect for the player to select one of the "modes without background mode change" is executed during the jackpot game. By configuring in this way, a player who wants to enjoy predicting the result of the special symbol lottery or the set game state from the game information such as the background mode and the game result (for example, the special symbol) without predicting from the game information. Both of the players who want to enjoy the game until the end when the result of the lottery and the duration of the first probability variable state) are notified can enjoy the desired game.

In addition, based on the fact that the number of executions of the special symbol lottery from the end of the previous jackpot game has reached a predetermined number (for example, 100 times), the period during which the limit remaining number suggestion mode determination processing (see S5251 in FIG. 733) is not executed. It may be set, or a period may be set in which the limit remaining number suggesting mode determination process (see S5251 in FIG. 733) is not executed based on the fact that the number of times the small hit has been won reaches a predetermined number.

In the 41st embodiment described above with reference to FIGS. 739 to 750, the 42nd embodiment described above, and the 43rd embodiment, the function of executing the variable probability limit process and the function of executing the time saving limit process are provided. The pachinko machine 10 described above has been exemplified, and the characteristic technical idea of each embodiment has been explained. You may use the pachinko machine 10 which does not have.

For example, for the jackpot type set at the time of winning the jackpot, set a jackpot type (advantageous jackpot type) in which a high probability state of special symbols can be set after the jackpot game ends, and a low probability state of special symbols after the jackpot game ends. A possible jackpot type (disadvantageous jackpot type) is defined, and when a high probability state of special symbols is set after the end of the jackpot game, the high probability state of special symbols continues until the next jackpot election. It is preferable to configure so that no upper limit is set for the number of times the high-probability state of the pattern is continuously set, and to set the low-probability state of the special pattern based on the big win type set when the big win is won.

More specifically, the jackpot probability is defined as 1/200 when the special symbol low probability state is set, and the jackpot probability is defined as 1/199 when the special symbol high probability state is set. do. That is, the difference in the probability of a big win caused by the switching of the probability state of the special symbols is constituted to such an extent that it is difficult for the player to feel it, and when the time reduction limit is reached in the state where the first variable probability state is set, the second time limit is reached. By shifting to the probability variable state, as in the above-described 41st embodiment, as the variation pattern of the special symbol variation, a shorter variation time than when the first probability state is set is configured to be easily determined. .

By configuring in this way, during the special pattern high probability period in which the high probability state of the special symbol is set continuously, when the first probability variable state is set a predetermined number of times in succession (reaching the time saving limit case), it is possible to forcibly set the second probability variation state in which a long variation time is likely to be set as the variation time of the special symbol variation. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of an excessive increase in the number of times the jackpot game is executed per unit time during the special figure high probability period.

Furthermore, in the above-described example, regardless of the type of jackpot, the high probability state of normal symbols may be set after the end of the jackpot game. By configuring in this way, when the jackpot is won again in the state where the second variable probability state is set by reaching the time reduction limit, the first variable probability state is set and the number of times of the time reduction limit is newly set. will be set. Therefore, since it is possible to define the special symbol fluctuation time executed during the special figure high probability period based on the number of jackpot games executed during the special figure high probability period, during the special figure high probability period It is possible to suppress the game from becoming an excessively advantageous game or an excessively disadvantageous game for the player.

In addition, in the 41st embodiment described above with reference to FIGS. 739 to 750, the 42nd embodiment described above, and the 43rd embodiment described above, a pachinko machine having a characteristic technical concept using the function of executing time reduction limit processing Although the machine 10 has been described, the characteristic technical ideas in each embodiment may be used for other purposes. and can be updated, and when any one of the update information is updated to specific information (information indicating that the remaining number of time saving limit is 0), a specific game (low probability of normal symbol The technical idea of executing the game in which the state is set) may be used for the technique of determining the aspect of the effect executed by the pachinko machine 10. For example, during the specific effect period, the first specific timing is First update information indicating the remaining period until the arrival (for example, information indicating the remaining time of the countdown effect), and second update information indicating the remaining period until the second specific timing arrives within the specific effect period (for example, information indicating the remaining time of the timer notice effect) can be updated, and either one of the update information is updated to specific information (for example, information indicating that the remaining time is 0) In some cases, a specific game (a specific effect (cut-in notice, etc.) executed at a specific timing) may be executable.

In addition, when the above-mentioned performance is executed as a continuous performance in which a period straddling a period in which a plurality of special symbol lotteries are executed is configured as a performance period, the remaining number of special symbol lotteries to be executed during the performance period. (Means for measuring the remaining number of special symbol lotteries until the special symbol lottery that displays the effect result of continuous production is executed) is provided, and based on the remaining number of times measured by that means, each It may be configured so that the update contents of the update information are different, for example, when there is a remaining number of times (a state where the special symbol lottery in which the effect result of the continuous effect is executed is not executed), A special symbol lottery that does not notify the player of the update result of the above-mentioned first update information or the second update information (notifies the player in an incomprehensible manner), and when the remaining number of times does not exist (a special symbol lottery in which the effect result of the continuous effect is executed), an effect may be executed to notify the player of the update result of the above-described first update information and second update information.

Furthermore, in the 41st embodiment described above with reference to FIGS. 739 to 750, the 42nd embodiment described above, and the 43rd embodiment, (any) when the time saving limit is reached, or the time saving state is set When the special symbol variation is executed a predetermined number of times (100 times) (when the time saving end condition is satisfied), the time saving state is terminated, but another time saving end is used as the time saving end condition. Conditions may be provided, for example, the probability of winning a small hit in the second special symbol lottery executed during the time saving state is set to 1/20, and the number of small winning games executed during the time saving state is It is good to constitute so that time saving end conditions may be materialized if it reaches predetermined number of times (for example, 5 times). Furthermore, the small winning game content and at least a part of the big winning game content executed when the big winning is won are the same game content (for example, the game content of opening the same variable winning device twice). configured to Furthermore, when a winning game (a small winning game, a part of a big winning game) in which similar game contents are executed is executed, a winning game effect in which the effect mode at the same position is set can be executed.

By configuring in this way, when the above-described winning game effect is executed for the player in the time saving state, while making it difficult to understand whether the big winning game is executed or the small winning game is executed. , It is possible to notify that any winning game has been executed. Therefore, the player grasps whether the remaining number of time-saving limits (number of big wins) has been updated or the element (number of small wins) for establishing the time-saving end condition has been updated by the winning game executed this time. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult to predict at what timing the time saving state will end, and it is possible to keep the player interested in the progress of the subsequent game.

In addition, the elements for establishing the time-saving end condition are reset once the jackpot is won (because a new time-saving end condition is set for the time-saving state set after the end of the jackpot game). Depending on the execution order of the game and the jackpot game, the time saving state can be executed longer than expected by the player.

In this case, as in the production example of the 41st embodiment described above, on the one hand, the gauge display indicating the period until reaching the time saving limit is executed, and on the other hand, the period until the time saving state set this time ends (The remaining number of times until the time saving end condition is satisfied (the number of remaining small hits, the number of remaining special symbol fluctuations, etc.)) may be displayed. As in the example, a gauge is displayed that suggests only the period until the time-saving state set this time ends, and when a jackpot is won, the gauge display is reset to the initial state. You can

In the thirty-fifth embodiment described above, in the first game information display area Dm4 (see FIG. 588) during the jackpot game, the number of balls that can be obtained by the player during the period in which the first variable probability period can be set and the number of balls that have already been obtained are displayed. The number of balls is notified, and the number of 10R jackpots that the player can obtain in the period in which the first variable probability state can be set in the first game information display area Dm4 (Fig. 590) during the first variable probability state and the number of 10R jackpots that have already been obtained is notified, but it is not limited to this. For example, during the jackpot game based on the jackpot winning that reached the time saving limit (in the embodiment, during the jackpot game of the 10th consecutive chan of the 10R jackpot), the player (12,500 balls in the embodiment) that the player displayed in the first game information display area Dm4 has reached. may be displayed. Alternatively, in the final round of the 10th consecutive chance (10th round in the embodiment), an effect mode for congratulating the player may be displayed. By configuring in this way, it is possible to give the player a sense of accomplishment.

Alternatively, in the final round of the 10th consecutive chance, the number of balls that the player has acquired from setting the first variable probability state to reaching the time reduction limit is acquired by the player whose number is displayed in the first game information display area Dm4. When the number of balls put out is greater than the number of balls that can be played, a configuration may be adopted in which a special effect mode (for example, a premium image) is displayed during the ending period of the jackpot game. By configuring in this way, the player can be motivated to play to win more balls.

Also, for example, after reaching the time-saving limit in the first probability variable state, when the first probability variable jackpot is won in the second probability variable state, that is, the first probability variable state is set for the second time until the probability variable limit is reached. In the case, the total number of balls acquired during the period in which the previous first variable state was set and the number of balls acquired in the period in which the first variable state was set this time is a predetermined number of balls (for example, 20000 balls ), the background of the “super RUSH mode” (FIG. 590) may be changed to a special background.

Alternatively, it is displayed in the ending period of the jackpot game that reaches the probability limit according to the number of balls put out by the player and the number of times the 10R jackpot game is executed between the time when the probability limit is set and the probability limit is reached. It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the display mode to be displayed is variable. For example, when 10 rounds of 10R jackpot games are executed until the variable limit is reached and the number of winning balls is 12,500, a comment "end" is displayed, but 20 rounds of 10R is displayed before the variable limit is reached. When the jackpot game is executed and the number of put-out balls obtained is 25000, a configuration may be adopted in which a comment "Well done!" is displayed.

Furthermore, 20 times of 10R jackpot games are executed until the variable probability limit is reached, and when the number of winning balls is more than 25000 balls (for example, 27000 balls), that is, when 20 times of 10R jackpot games are executed When the number of balls won by the player is larger than the number of balls that the player can win, the comment "Sunny weather!" may be displayed.

By configuring in this way, a game in which the first probability variable jackpot is won multiple times during one advantageous period (period from when the high probability state of the special symbol is set until the low probability state of the special symbol is set) It is possible to give the player a sense of accomplishment by winning multiple times in the jackpot type selected with a very low probability, and to make him/her feel a sense of superiority.

In addition, it may be configured to execute an effect of displaying a comment "It's back!" In other words, the "super RUSH mode" (Fig. 590) is a period in which ten 10R jackpot games can be executed, and the fifth round during the fifth jackpot game is just the halfway point, so "turn around! is displayed, the player is informed that it is the halfway point of the "super RUSH mode" (Fig. 590).

By configuring in this way, the player is made to recognize that the "super RUSH mode" (Fig. 590) is half finished, and after shifting to the "super RUSH mode" (Fig. !” is displayed until the end of the “super RUSH mode” (Fig. 590).

It should be noted that, when the probability variable limit remaining number of times is 5 times, when the 35th 10R jackpot game is won, the background of "RUSH mode" (Fig. 597) is variable (eg, golden background) It may be configured. . In order to win the 35th 10R jackpot game when the probability variation limit remaining number is 5 times, the first probability variation jackpot is elected at the first hit (low probability non-short time state jackpot election), and the first probability variation The 2nd probability variable state is set based on reaching the time reduction limit in the state, the 1st probability variable jackpot is won in the next jackpot, the 1st probability variable state is set again, and the time reduction limit is reached in the 1st probability variable state. Based on this, the second probability variable state is set, and the first probability variable jackpot must be won in the next jackpot. In other words, when all the jackpots from the first hit to the 35th hit are the first probability variable jackpot (including the 2R jackpot and the 10R jackpot) and the probability variable limit remaining number of times is five, the 35th 10R jackpot can be won.

In this way, when the probability variation limit remaining number is 5 times than the display mode of "RUSH mode" (Fig. 597) when winning the 10R jackpot when the probability variation limit remaining number is 5 times in the first probability variation state Furthermore, by displaying the background of the "RUSH mode" (Fig. 597) in a special display mode when winning the 35th 10R jackpot game, the player will feel a sense of accomplishment that he or she has achieved an extremely difficult condition. can give.

As a result of the second special symbol lottery of 1 in the first variable state, the 10R jackpot was won, and the result of the second special symbol lottery executed first after the 10R jackpot game was completed was the 10R jackpot win. In other words, when the result of the second special symbol lottery is a 10R jackpot two times in a row, the special performance may be executed in the first round of the second 10R jackpot game.

<46th embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 in the forty-sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 779 to 823. FIG. The pachinko machine 10 in the forty-sixth embodiment, like the above-described ninth embodiment (see FIGS. 186 to 208), is a kind of loser in the lottery of special symbols in addition to the case of winning a jackpot in the lottery of special symbols. A specific provided in a game area (an area within a variable winning device (attacker) 3650 opened during a small winning game) while a small winning game is executed when a certain small winning is won. A specification is adopted in which a jackpot game is also executed when a game ball enters (passes through) an area (V gate). Also, in the forty-sixth embodiment, the small hit is won with a high probability (for example, 1/6) only in the second special symbol lottery (special symbol lottery based on the ball entering the second ball entrance 3065). (The second special symbol lottery is easier to win a small prize than the first special symbol lottery), and the game ball enters the second ball entrance 3065 according to the game state. It is configured to vary the ease of use. Specifically, the probability of winning a jackpot in the special symbol lottery is fixed (1/200) regardless of the gaming state, and the non-electric accessory 3065a (see FIG. 779) 640a attached to the second entrance 3065 By changing the opening probability (probability of winning a normal pattern), the fluctuation time of the normal pattern, the opening time, etc. according to the game state, the possibility of winning a small win is changed according to the game state As a result, the configuration is such that the possibility of executing a jackpot game is different (so-called specification of a one-kind-two-kind mixing machine).

The configuration of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in the forty-sixth embodiment and the configuration of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in the above-described ninth embodiment (Figs. Based on winning a jackpot in a special pattern lottery by deleting the configuration of various operation winning ports (such as the operating winning port for MAX 6710a) used as an execution opportunity for starting a jackpot game after winning a jackpot in a lottery. The inside of the normal electric role product 3071 (when the normal electric role product 3071 is in an open state, the game ball can flow down (easily flows down) game area), the configuration of various non-electrically operated openings and the fact that the types are different, the configuration of non-electrical accessories that operate based on the entry of a game ball into each of the various non-electrically operated openings, and The difference is that the types are different, and the configuration of the game board 13 is different based on the above difference.

Detailed description will be given later with reference to FIG. 1 entrance 3064) and a non-electric accessory (special figure 1 non-electric accessory 3064a) and an entry means (second entrance A non-electrical accessory (non-electrical accessory 3065a) associated with the ball mouth 3065) is provided, and any non-electrical accessory is provided with a corresponding non-electrical accessory (especially It is configured to operate when a game ball enters the non-electric opening 3073a in FIG. 1 and the non-electric opening 3073b in special figure 2).

And, according to the type of game per normal pattern that is likely to be executed when the time saving state (low probability state of special pattern, high probability state of normal pattern) is set as the game state, normal pattern electric role during normal pattern per game The game ball that has flowed into the inside of the object 3071 is easy to enter the special figure 1 non-electric opening 3073a. A per-figure game is configured to be executable.

Furthermore, in the 46th embodiment, when the time saving state is set, the game per normal pattern is easier to execute than when the normal state is set (playing the game ball normally during the game per normal pattern) It is configured to make it easier to enter the ball into the inside of the electric accessory 3071), and as a general pattern per game that is executed when winning in the normal pattern lottery, the first general pattern per game is the second general pattern. A time-saving state (time-saving A) in which the game is easier to execute than the game per figure and a time-saving state (time-saving B) in which the game for the second normal pattern is easier to be performed than the game for the first normal pattern (time reduction B) are won by a special symbol lottery. It is configured to be determined according to the winning type (winning pattern) set when (big hit winning, small winning winning).

By configuring in this way, when the same game state (time saving state) is set, the game (time saving A game) that can mainly execute the lottery of the first special symbol and the lottery of the second special symbol are mainly performed. It is possible to provide the player with executable games (time-saving B games).

In addition, in the forty-sixth embodiment, in the first special symbol lottery, only a big win is won without winning a small win, and in the second special symbol lottery, both a big win and a small win can be won. Configure. Therefore, when time-saving A is set as the time-saving state, in order to execute a jackpot game in which a large number of prize balls (privileges) are given to the player, a special pattern lottery (special 1 lottery) is selected. When a time-saving game (1 type of time-saving game) is performed with the main purpose of aiming, and when time-saving B is set as a time-saving state, aiming to win a small hit in a special pattern lottery (special figure 2 lottery) A player can be made to play a time-saving game (2 types of time-saving game) which is the main purpose.

In other words, the length of the period during which the time saving state continues (for example, the number of times of time saving) is not changed according to the type of time saving state to be set, but the game content to be executed during the time saving state (1 type time saving game, 2 Since it is configured so that the time-saving game can be varied, the player can be made to play various games, and it is possible to suppress early boredom with the game.

Furthermore, in the forty-sixth embodiment, it is configured such that the big winning game is more likely to be executed when the second special symbol lottery is executed than when the first special symbol lottery is executed. In other words, the second special symbol lottery is more advantageous to the player than the first special symbol lottery. By configuring in this way, it is possible to execute a game with a different degree of advantage for the player according to the time saving type set when the time saving state is set as the game state. On the other hand, not only whether or not the time saving state is set, but also the set time saving type can be made interesting.

In addition, in the 46th embodiment, as the end condition of the time saving state (time saving A end condition) when the time saving A is set, the number of special symbol fluctuations (first special symbol fluctuation number + second special symbol fluctuation number ) is set to be satisfied when reaching 99 times, and as the end condition of the time saving state when time saving B is set (time saving B end condition), the number of fluctuations of the second special symbol reaches 5 times It is configured so that a termination condition is set that is satisfied when the

In other words, when the time reduction B in which the second special symbol lottery, which is the lottery advantageous to the player, is mainly executed is set, it is intended to prevent the player from being provided with an excessively advantageous game. In addition, an end condition (time-saving B end condition) that is satisfied only based on the number of executions of the second special symbol lottery (the number of variations of the second special symbol) is set.

On the other hand, even when the time reduction A in which the first special symbol lottery is mainly executed is set, the second special symbol lottery can be executed, although the probability is lower than when the time reduction B is set. , When this time-saving A is set, the end condition (time-saving B end condition) that is satisfied only based on the number of executions of the second special symbol lottery (the number of times of variation of the second special symbol) is not set. ing. Therefore, among the plurality of time-saving types, when the time-saving A that is disadvantageous to the player is set, the probability that the second special symbol lottery is executed for the time-saving B is low, but the second special symbol lottery The upper limit number of times that can be executed can be increased.

By configuring in this way, even if the time saving A is set, it is possible to leave the possibility that more second special symbol lottery will be executed than when the time saving B is set, so the time saving A player who is playing the game of A can be motivated to play the game so as to execute more second special symbol lotteries.

Here, with reference to FIG. 779, the configuration of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in the forty-sixth embodiment will be described. FIG. 779 is a front view schematically showing the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in the 46th embodiment. As shown in FIG. 779, the pachinko machine 10 according to the forty-sixth embodiment differs from the configuration of the game board 13 (see FIG. 186) of the pachinko machine 10 according to the ninth embodiment described above in that the area below the game board 13, And, it is different in that the configuration of the right area is different. Other configurations are the same, and the same configurations are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed descriptions thereof are omitted.

As shown in FIG. 779, the lower area of the game board 13 formed below the variable display unit 80 is provided with a first ball entrance 64 through which the right to execute the first special symbol lottery can be obtained. In the right area of the game board 13 formed on the right side of the variable display unit 80, there are an operating device 3070, a special figure 1 non-electric role 3064a, a special figure 2 non-electric role 3065a, a through gate 67, A variable winning device 3650 is provided.

The actuating device 3070 has a flow path in which a game ball can flow down, and a special figure 1 non-electric opening 3073a into which the game ball that has flowed down the flow path can enter, and a special figure 2 non-electric and an actuation port 3073b. An ordinary electric accessory 3071 is attached to the opening for allowing game balls to flow into the inside of the operating device 3070 .

The normal electric accessary 3071 is opened by the normal pattern winning game which is executed when winning in the normal pattern lottery (lottery executed based on the game ball passing through the through gate 67). be. In addition, the contents of the normal symbol lottery and the opening control process for the normal electric accessory 3071 based on the normal symbol winning game are the same as the contents of the opening control process for the normal electric accessory 640a in the ninth embodiment described above. Therefore, detailed description thereof is omitted.

The special figure 1 non-electric opening 3073a is connected to the special figure 1 non-electric accessory 3064a by an operating mechanism (not shown), and the special figure 1 non-electric accessory 3064a is closed while the special figure When a game ball enters the 1 non-electrically operated opening 3073a, the operating mechanism is operated by the weight of the entered game ball, and the special figure 1 non-electrically operated accessory 3064a is configured to be mechanically opened. ing. That is, the special figure 1 non-electric opening 3073a is a means for opening the special figure 1 non-electric accessory 3064a.

Similarly, the special figure 2 non-electrical opening 3073b is connected to the special figure 2 non-electrical accessory 3065a by an operating mechanism (not shown), and while the special figure 2 non-electrical accessory 3065a is closed When the game ball enters the special figure 1 non-electrically operated opening 3073b, the operating mechanism is operated by the weight of the entered game ball, and the special figure 2 non-electrically operated accessory 3065a is mechanically opened. Configure. That is, the special figure 2 non-electric opening 3073b is a means for opening the special figure 2 non-electric accessory 3065a.

In addition, for a detailed description of the special figure 1 non-electric role 3064a and the special figure 2 non-electric role 3065a that can be operated based on the game ball that has flowed into the operating device 3070, refer to FIGS. 780 to 782 will be described later.

A variable winning device 3650 provided below the game board 13 is opened by a winning game (big winning game, small winning game) executed when winning (big winning, small winning) in a special symbol lottery. In this device, the open/close door 3650f is controlled to open in correspondence with the type of winning game to be executed. The open/close door 3650f is configured to be variable between an open state in which a game ball can enter the specific winning port 3650a and a closed state in which winning is more difficult (impossible) than in the open state. In the non-execution state (non-hit time), that is, in the state in which the winning control for executing the winning game is not executed, it is configured to always be in the closed state.

The opening/closing door 3650f in the closed state has a flow path formed on the upper surface thereof for allowing game balls to flow down. As shown in FIG. 779, the upper surface of the opening/closing door 3650f is configured to have a downward slope toward the lower left direction (lower left direction when viewed from the front side in FIG. 779), that is, toward the out port 66. The game ball that has reached the variable winning device 3650 in the closed state flows down toward the out port 66 through a flow path formed on the upper surface of the opening/closing door 3650f.

By configuring in this way, the game ball that has reached the variable winning device 3650 in a state in which the winning game is not executed can be smoothly flowed down to the out port 66 . In addition, by forming a flow path on the upper surface of the open/close door 3650f (closed open/close door 3650f) positioned so as to close the opening of the variable winning device 3650 (the upper surface of the specific winning opening 3650a), the open/close door 3650f At the timing when is changed from the closed state to the open state, it is possible to enter the game ball flowing down the channel on the upper surface of the opening/closing door 3650f into the specific winning opening 3650a.

Although detailed explanation is omitted, the opening width of the specific winning opening 3650a of the variable winning device 3650 (distance in the width direction when viewing FIG. 779 from the front) is set to 4 game balls (44 mm). Configure. In addition, the flow path formed on the upper surface of the open/close door 3650f is not straight from the upstream side to the downstream side, but is formed in a meandering shape. It is configured so that a plurality of game balls are likely to exist on a certain opening/closing door 3650f.

By configuring in this way, at the timing when the opening/closing door 3650f changes from the closed state to the open state, a plurality of game balls flowing down the flow path on the upper surface of the opening/closing door 3650f enter the specific winning opening 3650a at once. Since it is possible to make it easier to hit the ball, when a winning game is executed, a right-handed game can be executed willingly so that many game balls enter the specific winning hole 3650a in a short period of time.

In addition, even when the control for instantaneously changing the open/close door 3650f to the open state (for example, the control to open the open/close door 3650f for 0.2 seconds) is executed, the flow path on the upper surface of the open/close door 3650f is It is possible to reliably win the flowing game ball to the specific winning hole 3650a. In other words, since the game ball positioned on the upper surface of the opening/closing door 3650f is positioned at the opening of the specific winning opening 3650a across the opening/closing door 3650f, the game ball enters the specific winning opening 3650a. The opening and closing door 3650f that regulates the game is changed to the open state, so that the game ball immediately enters the specific winning hole 3650a.

Therefore, when the winning game is executed, in order to win the game ball to the specific winning opening 3650a even if the opening and closing door 3650f is controlled to open in any manner, the player continues It is possible to execute a right-handed game.

In addition, as described above, the non-electrical accessories (special figure 1 non-electrical accessory 3064a and special figure 2 non-electrical accessory 3065a) are not electrically controlled, but by mechanical action based on the weight of the game ball. It is configured to open and close. Therefore, opening and closing control is executed by the main control device 110 of the pachinko machine 10, etc., like the electric accessory that is electrically controlled to open and close (for example, the normal electric accessory 3071, the opening and closing door 3650f of the variable winning device 3650, etc.). Therefore, the opening/closing status is not managed by the main controller 110 or the like.

Therefore, in the forty-sixth embodiment, a detection sensor (not shown) for detecting the actual operation status of each non-electric accessory (special figure 1 non-electric accessory 3064a, special figure 2 non-electric accessory 3065a) is provided, and the operating status (opening/closing status) of each non-electric accessory (special figure 1 non-electric accessory 3064a, special figure 2 non-electric accessory 3065a) is configured to be detectable.

Then, based on the detection result of the detection sensor, the special figure 1 non-electric accessory 3064a is operating (open), or the special figure 2 non-electric accessory 3065a is operating (open ) is notified to the player by the special figure 1 non-telegram notification lamp 3064b and the special figure 2 non-telegram notification lamp 3065b. As a result, it is possible to inform the player of the operation status of each non-electric accessory in an easy-to-understand manner.

In the forty-sixth embodiment, the special figure 1 non-telegram notification lamp 3064b and the special figure 2 non-telegram notification lamp 3065b are used to determine whether the corresponding non-electric accessory is operating (open) or not. Although it is configured to notify the person, a notification means that can notify other situations may be provided. A notification means capable of informing (suggesting) the player whether the non-electric accessory 3065a is likely to operate may be provided. In this case, for example, based on the normal pattern winning type set when winning in the normal pattern lottery, it is easy to operate any non-electric accessory (which non-electric opening to enter the game ball Easy) It is preferable to provide a notification means for notifying (suggesting) the player whether a game per normal pattern will be executed.

By configuring in this way, the timing before the special non-electric accessory actually operates, for example, the first time from the execution of the normal pattern lottery to the stop display of the result of the normal pattern lottery. Period, the second period from when the result of the lottery per normal pattern is stopped and displayed until the game per normal pattern is executed, the second period until the game ball flows into the operating device 3070 after the game per normal pattern is executed 3 period, the fourth period from the execution of the normal per game to the entry of the game ball into the non-electrically operated opening, the game ball enters the non-electrically operated opening after the game ball flows into the operating device 3070 Select one or a plurality of periods from the fifth period until the game ball enters the non-electrically operated opening and the sixth period from the time the game ball enters the non-electrically operated opening until the non-electrically operated accessory operates It is possible to inform the player of the type of the non-motorized accessory to be operated (released) during the combined period. Therefore, it is possible for the player to grasp (predict) the contents of the game to be executed later based on the contents suggested by the informing means, and the interest in the game can be improved.

In addition, the notification by the notification means in any period (corresponding to the above-described first period, second period, and third period) from when the lottery per normal figure is executed until the game ball flows into the operating device 3070 In the case of execution, it is possible for the player to select whether or not to allow the game ball to flow into the operating device 3070 based on the notification contents of the notification means. That is, when an advantageous game state (for example, time saving state) that makes it easy to open non-electric roles is set, any one non-electric role (for example, special figure 1 non-electric role 3064a) operates When the game ball is entered into the ball entry means (for example, the right first ball entrance 3064) (when the first special symbol lottery is executed), the advantageous game state is finished, but when another non-electric accessory (for example, special figure 2 non-electric accessory 3065a) is operating, it is possible to enter the ball (second entrance 3065) When the game ball is entered (when the second special symbol lottery is executed), in a state where the advantageous game state does not end, the above-described notification means can perform notification, It is possible for the player to select whether or not to continue the advantageous game state. In other words, by allowing the player to select the game method (whether or not game balls are to be shot), the results of games to be executed later can be greatly varied. As a result, it is possible to increase the willingness of the player to play a more advantageous game.

Furthermore, in this case, when a game ball is entered into one ball entering means, a game more advantageous to the player than when a game ball is entered into another ball entering means is executed. , the advantageous game state is easily ended, and the game is more disadvantageous to the player when the game ball is entered into the other ball entering means than when the game ball is entered into the first ball entering means. is executed, but the contents of the privilege (for example, special symbol lottery) given when the game ball enters each ball entry means so that it is difficult to end the advantageous gaming state, and the conditions for ending the advantageous gaming state should be the default.

Here, if the detection sensor for detecting the operation status of each non-electrical accessory is specifically described, the non-electrical opening (special figure 1 non-electrical opening 3073a, special figure 2 non-electrical opening 3073b) The operating mechanism (special figure 1 operating mechanism 3074, special figure 2 operating mechanism 3075) that operates when the game ball that enters the ball comes into contact with the operating position (position to operate (open) non-electric accessories) A detection means (proximity sensor) is provided at a location where the position can be detected, and when the detection means detects that the operating mechanism is positioned at the operating position (the detection signal output from the detection means If the determination means determines based on), it is configured to be able to specify that the non-electric accessory is open.

In addition, as a method for managing the operation status of each non-electric role product, it is possible to use a method other than the method of detecting the operation status of the actual non-electric role product 3065a as described above. A detection means for detecting the game ball that has flowed into the operating device 3070 is provided inside, and based on the detection result by the detection means and the type of normal figure, which non-electrical opening (special figure 1 non-electrical opening 3073a, special figure 2 non-electric working opening 3073b) to determine whether the game ball has entered, based on the determination result may be configured to specify the operation status of each non-electrical accessary. In this case, by determining whether the closing condition of each non-electric role is satisfied based on the operating status of the specified non-electric role and the acquired prize information, the operation of each non-electric role It should be configured to identify the situation. By configuring in this way, it is not necessary to provide a dedicated detection means only for managing the operation status of the non-electric accessory, so the manufacturing cost can be suppressed.

Further, in this case, the entry of the game ball into the ball entry means with different easiness of entry is detected depending on whether the non-electric accessory is activated or not, and the detection result and It is preferable to provide management processing for comparing the contents specified as the operation status of the non-electric accessary product and determining whether the specified contents are normal.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 780 to 782, detailed contents of various configurations formed in the right area of the pachinko machine 10 in the forty-sixth embodiment will be described. FIG. 780(a) is an enlarged view of the right side area of the game board 13 shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 780(a), in the right area of the game board 13, a game ball flow path is formed in the vertical direction, and a game ball shot toward the right area (shot by a right-handed game). A game ball) flows down the game ball downstream path and finally flows into the out port 66. - 特許庁

A plurality of nails are planted in the vertical direction (vertical direction from the viewpoint of FIG. 780) in this game ball flow downstream channel. It is partitioned into a channel (a channel formed between a plurality of nails and the variable display unit 80) and a right channel (a channel formed on the right side of the plurality of nails).

As shown in FIG. 780(a), a plurality of nails for partitioning the downstream flow path into the left flow path and the right flow path are used to prevent game balls flowing down the left flow path from entering the right flow path. It is planted so as to form a passage area through which a game ball can pass so that the inflow and the inflow of a game ball flowing down the right side channel into the left side channel are possible.

The actuating device 3070 is provided on the left side of the game ball downstream flow path, that is, at a position where game balls flowing down the left flow path flow more easily than game balls flowing down the right flow path. The special figure 1 non-electric role 3064a and the special figure 2 non-electric role 3065a are provided at a position where the game ball flowing down the right side flow path is easier to flow in than the game ball flowing down the left side flow path. It is

By forming the left side flow path and the right side flow path in this way, it is possible to provide a plurality of paths for the game balls shot by the right-handed game to flow down, so for example, a plurality of devices ( When the operating device 3070, the special figure 1 non-electric accessory 3064a, the special figure 2 non-electric accessory 3065a, etc.) is in a state where it is possible to enter (open state), the device provided on the upstream side of the right area To suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the progress of a game is delayed due to a game ball entering only a device on the downstream side and making it difficult for the game ball to enter a device provided on the downstream side. can be done.

A detailed configuration of the actuator 3070 will now be described. Actuating device 3070, when winning in the normal pattern lottery (when the normal pattern winning game is executed), the game ball is in a state where it can be entered (that is, the normal electric accessory 3071 is released), and is operated. By entering the game ball into either of the two non-electrical openings (special figure 1 non-electrical opening 3073a, special figure 2 non-electrical opening 3073b) provided inside the device 3070, The corresponding non-electric accessory (special figure 1 non-electric accessory 3064a, special figure 2 non-electric accessory 3065a) is in an open state.

The game ball that has flowed into the operating device 3070 flows down the first flow path 3070 a and reaches the movable piece 3072 . This movable piece 3072 is variably controlled in a predetermined opening/closing pattern when a normal game is executed, and moves the game ball flowing down the first flow path 3070a to the second flow path 3070b. and a closed position where the game ball flowing down the first flow path 300a can be received and flowed down toward the third flow path 3070c. there is In addition, in the state (non-normal game per game state), the movable piece 3072 is configured to be positioned at the closed position.

In other words, the movable piece 3072 serves as means for allowing the inflow of the game ball into the second flow path 3070b when a predetermined condition is established (when a normal game is executed). In the forty-sixth embodiment, the contents of the opening operation of the normal electric accessory 3071 in the normal pattern winning game executed when the normal pattern lottery is won are configured to vary according to the normal pattern winning type. . Specifically, the length of the period (opening period) from when the normal figure per game is executed until the normal electric accessory 3071 is in the open state is varied. On the other hand, the movable piece 3072 is configured to be variably controlled in a predetermined variable pattern after the normal pattern per game is executed regardless of the normal pattern per type.

Then, by varying the length of the opening period according to the type of normal pattern winning, the length of the period required from the execution of the normal pattern winning game until the game ball reaches the movable piece 3072 is varied. By doing so, the game ball that has reached the movable piece 3072 is likely to be guided to the second flow path 3070b, and the normal game that the game ball that has reached the movable piece 3072 is easily guided to the third flow path 3070c. A per-figure game is configured to be executable.

On the downstream side of the second flow path 8070b, a special figure 1 non-electric opening 3073a is provided, and all the game balls that flow down the second flow path 8070b enter the special figure 1 non-electric opening 3073a. It is configured as follows. The special figure 1 non-electric opening 3073a is connected to the special figure 1 non-electric accessory 3064a via the special figure 1 operating mechanism 3074, and the game ball entered the special figure 1 non-electric opening 3073a. In the case, the entered game ball contacts the operation mechanism 3074, the operation mechanism 3074 is operated by the weight of the game ball, and the special figure 1 non-electric accessory 3064a in the closed state is changed to the open state. It is configured as follows.

In addition, when the special figure 1 non-electric accessary 3064a is in the open state, the operation mechanism 3074 is operating in the open state, so the game ball entered into the special figure 1 non-electric opening 3073a is operated It is constructed so as not to come into contact with the use mechanism 3074 . In other words, the special figure 1 non-electric opening 3073a is a means for changing the special figure 1 non-electrical access material 3064a in the closed state to the open state, without using an electric drive source, the special figure 1 It is means for varying the non-electric accessory 3064a.

The special figure 1 non-electric accessory 3064a is a non-electric accessory attached to the right first ball entrance 3064, and is in an open state in which a game ball can be entered into the right first ball entrance 3064. and a closed state in which it is more difficult to enter a game ball than in the open state. This special figure 1 non-electric accessory 3064a is changed from a closed state to an open state by operating the operating mechanism 3074 based on the game ball entering the special figure 1 non-electrical activation opening 3073a. be. Then, after being changed to the open state, it is changed from the open state to the closed state based on two game balls entering the right first ball entrance 3064 .

Specifically, a holding means (not shown) capable of temporarily holding a ball entered into the right first ball entrance 3064 is provided inside the right first ball entrance 3064, and the holding means is provided inside the right first ball entrance 3064. When two game balls are held by the means, the game balls held by their own weight flow out to the discharge path for discharging the game balls to the outside of the game machine. A closing mechanism (not shown) is provided for contact by a playing ball being ejected into.

When the game ball comes into contact with this closing mechanism, the closing mechanism operates, and the special figure 1 non-electric accessory 3064a that was in the open state is configured to be variable to the closed state.

As described above, the special figure 1 non-electric accessory 3064a is electrically controlled in any case, whether it is changed from the closed state to the open state or changed from the open state to the closed state. It is configured to be mechanically variable using the weight of the game ball flowing down without using .

On the downstream side of the third flow path 3070c, a special figure 2 non-electric opening 3073b is provided, and all the game balls that flow down the third flow path 8070c enter the special figure 2 non-electric opening 3073b. It is configured as follows. The special figure 2 non-electric opening 3073b is connected to the special figure 2 non-electric accessory 3065a via the special figure 2 operating mechanism 3075, and the game ball entered the special figure 2 non-electric opening 3073b. In the case, the entered game ball comes into contact with the special figure 2 operating mechanism 3075, and the special figure 2 operating mechanism 3075 is operated by the weight of the game ball, and the special figure 2 non-electric accessory in the closed state 3065a is configured to be variable to the open state.

In addition, when the special figure 2 non-electric accessory 3065a is in the open state, since the special figure 2 operating mechanism 3075 is operating in the open state, the ball entered the special figure 2 non-electric opening 3073b It is configured so that the game ball does not come into contact with the special figure 2 operating mechanism 3075. In other words, the special figure 2 non-electric opening 3073b is a means for varying the special figure 2 non-electric accessory 3065a in the closed state to the open state, without using an electric drive source, the special figure 2 It is means for varying the non-electric accessory 3065a.

The special figure 2 non-electric accessory 3064b is a non-electric accessory attached to the second ball entrance 3065, and is in an open state in which a game ball can be entered into the second ball entrance 3065, It is configured to be variable between the closed state in which it is more difficult to enter a game ball than the open state. This special figure 2 non-electric accessary 3065a is opened from the closed state by operating the special figure 2 operation mechanism 3075 based on the fact that the game ball entered the special figure 2 non-electric opening 3073b is changed to Then, after being changed to the open state, the open state is changed to the closed state based on two game balls entering the second ball entrance 3065 .

Specifically, a holding means (not shown) capable of temporarily holding a ball that has entered the second ball entrance 3065 is provided inside the second ball entrance 3065, and the holding means When two game balls are held, the game balls held by their own weight flow out to the discharge path for discharging the game balls to the outside of the game machine. A closing mechanism (not shown) is provided for contact with the ejected game ball.

When the game ball comes into contact with this closing mechanism, the closing mechanism operates, and the special figure 2 non-electric accessory 3065a that was in the open state is configured to be variable to the closed state.

As described above, the special figure 2 non-electric accessory 3065a is electrically controlled in any case, whether it is changed from the closed state to the open state or changed from the open state to the closed state. It is configured to be mechanically variable using the weight of the game ball flowing down without using .

Next, with reference to FIG. 780(b), the contents of the game ball flowing down during the normal game per game will be described. Figure 780 (b) is a diagram schematically showing the ball flow when the game ball enters the special figure 1 non-electric opening 3073a during the game per normal figure.

As shown in FIG. 780(b), when the game per normal pattern is executed, the normal electric accessory 3071 is opened in a predetermined opening pattern. Then, when the normal electric accessory 3071 is changed to the open state, the game ball guided by the normal electric accessory 3071 (see FIG. 780(b)) in the open state is positioned at the open position. Pass through 3072 and enter the special figure 1 non-electric opening 3073a. When the game ball enters the special figure 1 non-electrically operated opening 3073a, the special figure 1 operating mechanism 3074 operates, and the special figure 1 non-electrically operated accessory 3064a is in an open state (see the solid line in FIG. 780 (b)) .

When the special figure 1 non-electric role 3064a is changed to the open state, the special figure 1 non-electric role 3064a is variable to the position that closes the right channel, so it is fired by the right-handed game, and the right channel 3060 Most of the game balls that flow down the right channel enter the right first ball entrance 3064 .

As shown in FIG. 780(b), in the forty-sixth embodiment, the normal electric accessory 3071 is provided for the left channel, the special figure 1 non-electric accessory 3064a is provided for the right channel, Furthermore, since the normal electric accessory 3071 is provided on the upstream side of the special figure 1 non-electric accessory 3064a, the game ball to the normal electric accessory 3071 depending on the variable state of the special figure 1 non-electric accessory 3064a There is no difference in the inflow ratio of Therefore, by changing the special figure 1 non-electric accessory 3064a to the open state, it is not possible to flow the game ball in the game per normal figure into the operating device 3070, and the game can be smoothly progressed. It is possible to prevent an impossible situation from occurring.

In addition, while the special figure 1 non-electric accessary 3064a is variable to the open state, a normal figure per game that allows the game ball to enter the special figure 2 non-electric opening 3073b was executed. Even so, since the entrance of the game ball to the operating device 3070 is not restricted by the special figure 1 non-electric accessory 3064a, it is possible to surely enter the game ball to the special figure 2 non-electric opening 3073b. .

In addition, in the forty-sixth embodiment, since the game ball flowing down the right area 3060 is configured to flow down two flow paths (left flow path, right flow path), the normal flow path provided on the upstream side Even if the figure electric accessory 3071 is in an open state, the game ball flowing down the right channel can be made easier to reach the special figure 1 non-electric accessory 3064a provided downstream. In other words, when both the normal figure electric accessory 3071 and the special figure 1 non-electric accessory 3064a are in the open state, the game balls flowing down the right side region 3060 flow down one flow path Pachinko machine using the configuration 10, it is possible to make it easier for the game ball to reach any accessory.

Then, when two game balls enter the special figure 1 non-electric role 3064a in the open state, as shown in FIG. Object 3064a is changed from an open state to a closed state.

Here, as described above, in the forty-sixth embodiment, even when the special figure 1 non-electric accessory 3064a is in the open state, it is configured to allow the game ball to enter the operating device 3070. Therefore, for example, a game ball may enter the special figure 1 non-electric opening 3073a while the special figure 1 non-electric accessory 3064a is open. In this case, even if the game ball enters the special figure 1 non-electrically activated opening 3073a, the special figure 1 operation mechanism 3074 is not operated by the entered game ball, so special figure 1 The non-electric accessory 3064a continues to be open. In addition, the value of the number of entering balls, which is the closing condition of the special figure 1 non-electric accessory 3064a in the open state, is also continued as it is. In other words, even if a new game ball enters the special figure 1 non-electric opening 3073a while the special figure 1 non-electric accessory 3064a remains open, the player is not given any benefits.

By configuring in this way, when the special figure 1 non-electric accessory 3064a is changed to the open state, the next game ball is before entering the special figure 1 non-electric opening 3073a, A game can be motivated to enter a predetermined number (two) of game balls into the right first ball entrance 3064 to which the special figure 1 non-electric accessory 3064a is attached.

In addition, in the forty-sixth embodiment, as described above, in the state in which the special figure 1 non-electric accessory 3064a is changed to the open state, the game ball can be entered into the operating device 3070. However, without being limited to this, for example, when the special figure 1 non-electric accessory 3064a is downstream of the special figure 1 non-electric accessory 3064a and the special figure 1 non-electric accessory 3064a is in the open state When it is in the closed state The operating device 3070 (ordinary electric accessory 3071) may be provided at a position that is more difficult to reach. By configuring in this way, during the period in which the special figure 1 non-electric accessory 3064a is in the open state, it is possible to suppress the winning number of game balls to the operating device 3070 than in the period when it is not in the open state.

Next, with reference to FIG. 781(a), the ball flow of the game ball launched by the right-handed game when the special figure 1 non-electric accessory 3064a is in the open state will be described. Figure 781 (a) is a diagram schematically showing the flow when a game ball enters the special figure 1 non-electric accessory 3064a in the open state. As shown in FIG. 781 (a), in the state where the special figure 1 non-electric accessory 3064a is variable (operating) to the open state, the game ball is easy to enter the right first ball entrance 3064 Then, when the game ball enters the right first ball entrance 3064, the closing mechanism (not shown) connected to the special figure 1 non-electric accessory 3064a operates, and the special figure 1 non-electric accessory 3064a changes (actuates) to the closed state.

Next, with reference to FIG. 781(b), operation contents of various mechanisms when a game ball enters the special figure 2 non-electric opening 3073b will be described. Figure 781 (b) is a diagram schematically showing the ball flow when the game ball enters the special figure 2 non-electric opening 3073b during the game per normal figure.

As shown in FIG. 781(b), when the game per normal pattern is executed, the normal electric accessory 3071 is opened in a predetermined opening pattern. Then, when the normal electric accessory 3071 is changed to the open state, the game ball guided by the normal electric accessory 3071 (see FIG. 781(b)) in the open state is positioned at the closed position. It flows down the upper surface of 3072, flows down the third flow path 3070c, and enters the special figure 2 non-electric opening 3073b. When the game ball enters the special figure 2 non-electrically operated opening 3073b, the special figure 2 operating mechanism 3075 operates, and the special figure 2 non-electrically operated accessory 3065a is in an open state (see the solid line in FIG. 781 (b)) .

When the special figure 2 non-electric role 3065a is changed to the open state, the special figure 2 non-electric role 3065a is variable to the position that closes the right channel, so it is fired by the right-handed game, and the right side area 3060 Of the game balls that have flowed down, most of the game balls that flow down the right channel enter the second ball entrance 3065 .

As shown in FIG. 781 (b), in the forty-sixth embodiment, the normal electric accessory 3071 is provided for the left channel, the special figure 2 non-electric accessory 3065a is provided for the right channel, In addition, since the normal electric accessory 3071 is provided upstream of the special figure 2 non-electric accessory 3065a, the game ball to the ordinary electric accessory 3071 depending on the variable state of the special figure 2 non-electric accessory 3065a There is no difference in the inflow ratio of Therefore, by changing the special figure 2 non-electric accessory 3065a to the open state, it is not possible to flow the game ball in the game per normal figure into the operating device 3070, and the game can be smoothly progressed. It is possible to prevent an impossible situation from occurring.

Furthermore, in the forty-sixth embodiment, since the special figure 1 non-electric accessory 3064a is arranged above the special figure 2 non-electric accessory 3065a, for example, the special figure 2 non-electric accessory 3065a is in an open state , when the special figure 1 non-electric accessory 3064a is changed to the open state (operated), the game ball fired by the right-handed game is the first right than the second ball entrance 3065 It is configured so that the ball is preferentially entered into the ball entrance 3064 .

By configuring in this way, the second special symbol lottery in which the lottery that is more advantageous to the player than the first special symbol lottery is executed is excessively executed, that is, the game ball to the second ball entrance 3065. can be suppressed from entering the ball excessively. Furthermore, as long as the right first ball entrance 3064 is in the open state, it is possible to make it difficult for the game ball to enter the second ball entrance 3065, so the open state of the special figure 2 non-electric accessory 3065a is long. Since it is possible to make it easier to continue for a period, for example, when the special figure 2 non-electric accessory 3065a is variable (operated) to the open state just before the time saving state ends, the game ball to the second ball entrance 3065 Before entering the ball, the game is played so that the special figure 1 non-electric role 3064a is in the open state, and the special figure 1 non-electric role 3064a is changed to the open state (actuated) to save time. Even after the state ends, it is possible to maintain the open state of the special figure 2 non-electric accessary product 3065a.

Therefore, the player is motivated to play the game in order to make the game situation (opening/closing situation of the special figure 2 non-electric accessory 3065a) advantageous to the player when the time saving state ends. can be done.

Although detailed description will be given later, in the forty-sixth embodiment, the operating device 3070 is relatively easy to flow game balls into a time-saving state (low-probability state of special symbols, high-probability state of normal symbols). can be set, and as a condition for ending the time saving state, a time saving that is established when the total value of the total number of fluctuations of the first special symbol and the total number of fluctuations of the second special symbol reaches 99 times A termination condition is set. The second special symbol lottery is more advantageous to the player than the first special symbol lottery.

Therefore, even if the special symbol variation (time saving final variation) with the 99th total variation number after the time saving state is set is the first special symbol variation or the second special symbol variation, it will be won. If not, the time saving state will end at the timing of stopping the variation.

That is, when the time saving final variation is executed, by playing the game so that the special figure 2 non-electric accessory 3065a is in the open state, the time saving state ends and the normal state is set When the second entering ball It is possible to make it easier to enter the game ball into the mouth 3065 . In this way, the advantageous game state can be ended while the privilege granting right, which is easier to obtain, is acquired during the advantageous game state than in the non-advantageous game state. On the other hand, when the advantageous game state ends, instead of discouraging the end of the advantageous game state, the advantageous game state ends in a better situation (ends with the right to grant benefits It is possible to motivate the player to play the game until the end with the aim of playing the game.

In addition, in the 46th embodiment, the right to execute the second special symbol lottery (special figure 2 reservation) is configured to be able to be acquired up to a predetermined number (4 pieces), and more than the first special symbol lottery The second special symbol lottery is configured to be preferentially executed. In other words, if you acquire the right to execute the second special symbol lottery (special figure 2 reservation) during the time saving state, it will be digested with priority over the right to execute the first special symbol lottery (special figure 1 reservation) , it is possible to make it difficult to end the time saving state while acquiring the special figure 2 hold acquired during the time saving state.

Next, with reference to FIG.783 and FIG.784, the game content of the normal figure per game in the 46th embodiment is demonstrated. Figure 783 is a diagram showing the flow of the game per normal pattern when the open pattern A per normal pattern is set, and Fig. 784 is for the game per normal pattern when the open pattern B per normal pattern is set. It is the figure which showed the flow.

In the forty-sixth embodiment, by varying the operation content of the game per normal pattern according to the type per normal pattern set when winning in the normal pattern lottery, to the operating device 3070 during the game per normal pattern and the inflow timing of game balls are made different. Then, according to the inflow timing of the game ball into the operating device 3070, the game ball that has flowed into the operating device 3070 enters the special figure 1 non-electric opening 3073a from the special figure 2 non-electric opening 3073b. Easy general pattern per game (per general pattern per normal pattern A is set per general pattern per game) and per general pattern that is easier to enter the special figure 2 non-electric working opening 3073b than the special figure 1 non-electric working opening 3073a A game (a game per normal pattern in which the open pattern B per normal pattern is set) is configured to be executable.

Furthermore, when the time saving state is set as the game state, the time saving type (time saving B) in which the open pattern A per normal pattern is more likely to be set than the open pattern B per normal pattern as the type per normal pattern (shorter time B) and the open per normal pattern It is configured to be able to set a time saving type (time saving A) in which the open pattern B per normal pattern is more likely to be set than the pattern A.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it easier to enter the game ball into the operating device 3070 than in the normal state (the normal electric accessory 3071 is in the open state in the normal game per unit time) When a time saving state (which can be longer than a normal state) is set, a time saving state (disadvantageous time saving state) in which the first special symbol lottery is more likely to be executed than the second special symbol lottery, and the second It is possible to set a time-saving state (advantageous time-saving state) in which the second special symbol lottery is more likely to be executed than the first special symbol lottery.

The game per normal pattern is a period (opening period) from when the game per normal pattern is executed until the normal electric accessory 3071 is changed to the open state (opening period), and the period during which the normal electric accessory 3071 is in the open state (open period), and the period (ending period) from the time when the end condition for ending the open state of the normal electric accessory 3071 is established, and the time from the time when the open state is changed to the closed state until the end of the game per normal figure. A predetermined time (predetermined condition) is defined in advance for each period, and the opening operation of the normal electric accessory 3071 is performed according to the defined content. Furthermore, it is configured to perform movement control to move a movable piece 3072 (see FIG. 780) provided in the actuator 3070 in a predetermined movement pattern.

First, with reference to FIG. 783, the flow of the normal pattern per game executed when the normal pattern per open pattern A is set will be described. Concretely, in the per-universal figure per game that is executed when the per-universal figure open pattern A is set, as shown in FIG. An open period of 2.5 seconds and an ending period (ED period) of 1 second per normal game are executed. After 0.5 seconds of the open period in which the movable piece 3072 is in the open state, the movable piece 3072 is controlled to be in the closed period in which the movable piece 3072 is in the closed state for 1.5 seconds. executed.

That is, in the game per normal pattern per normal pattern A, the state in which the game ball that has flowed into the operating device 3070 can be guided to the special figure 2 non-electric activation port 3073b (the movable piece 3072 is closed) is set. After a period (a period between 0.5 seconds and 2 seconds after the normal figure per game is executed) has passed, the opening period of the normal electric accessory 3071 is set. Therefore, the game per normal pattern per normal pattern A is executed, and the game balls that flowed into the operating device 3070 during the open period in which the normal electric accessory 3071 is in the open state are all (almost) released. It will pass through the movable piece 3072 in the state and enter the special figure 1 non-electric opening 3073a. When the game ball enters the special figure 1 non-electric opening 3073a, the special figure 1 non-electric role 3064a operates to the open state, so the general figure per game of the open pattern A is, It becomes a regular pattern winning game that facilitates the execution of the first special symbol lottery.

In addition, in the forty-sixth embodiment, in addition to the time end condition that is established when a predetermined time (2.5 seconds) elapses as the end condition for ending the open state of the normal electric accessory 3071, A ball-entering end condition that is established when the number of game balls that have flowed into the operating device 3070 (game balls that have passed through the normal electric accessory 3071 in the open state) exceeds two is also set. there is By configuring in this way, it is possible to suppress the flow of many game balls into the operating device 3070 in one game per normal figure, for example, the game ball is clogged in the operating device 3070 , the increase in the number of game balls colliding with the movable piece 3072 can prevent the movable piece 3072 from being easily damaged (broken).

Furthermore, when the game balls are continuously shot, the game balls can be shot up to 100 in 60 seconds, so that the right-handed game can be continuously executed during the normal game. Since it is configured so that the ball entry end condition is more likely to be satisfied than the time end condition, the normal game per game is faster when the right-handed game in which the game ball is continuously shot is executed. It is possible to terminate. Therefore, for example, in the time-saving state in which the time-saving type (time-saving B) that is easier to be executed than the general-pattern per game of the general-pattern opening pattern A per general-pattern A, which will be described later, is set. The player is continuously instructed to execute more normal symbol lotteries and to execute the second special symbol lottery as many times as possible until a time-saving end condition for ending the time-saving state is satisfied. Since it is possible to shoot the game ball, the operation of the game can be improved.

In addition, when the special figure 2 non-electric accessory 3065a is operated to the open state immediately before the time saving end condition is satisfied, after the time saving end condition is satisfied and the game state shifts from the time saving state to the normal state Since it is possible to facilitate the execution of the second special symbol lottery, until immediately before the time saving end condition is satisfied, the second It is possible to play the game in anticipation that the normal pattern per open pattern B that allows the game ball to enter the non-electrically operated opening 3073b will be executed.

Next, the flow of the normal pattern per game executed when the normal pattern per open pattern B is set will be described. Specifically, in the game per normal pattern that is executed when the open pattern B per normal pattern is set, as shown in FIG. 784, as the game per normal pattern, the opening period (OP period) is 0.5 Seconds, the open period is 2.5 seconds, and the ending period (ED period) is 1 second. After 0.5 seconds of the open period in which the movable piece 3072 is in the open state, the movable piece 3072 is controlled to be in the closed period in which the movable piece 3072 is in the closed state for 1.5 seconds. executed.

That is, in the game per normal pattern per normal pattern B, the state in which the game ball that has flowed into the operating device 3070 can be guided to the special figure 2 non-electric activation port 3073b (the movable piece 3072 is closed) is set. During the period (period between 0.5 seconds and 2 seconds after the normal figure per game is executed), the opening period of the normal electric accessory 3071 is set. Therefore, the game per normal pattern per normal pattern B is executed, and the game balls that flowed into the operating device 3070 during the open period in which the normal electric accessory 3071 is in the open state are all (almost) closed. It will flow down the upper surface of the movable piece 3072 in the state and enter the special figure 2 non-electric opening 3073b. When the game ball enters the special figure 2 non-electric opening 3073b, since the special figure 2 non-electric role 3065a operates to the open state, the general figure per game of the general figure per open pattern B, It becomes a regular pattern winning game that facilitates the execution of the second special symbol lottery.

As described above, in the 46th embodiment, according to the type per normal pattern, by varying the length of the opening period in the game per normal pattern, flow into the operating device 3070 during the game per normal pattern It is configured to differentiate the types of special non-electric openings into which the played game ball can enter (easy to enter). In this case, even if the game content per normal pattern other than the length of the opening period of the game per normal pattern is made common to the type per normal pattern, the game ball that flowed into the operating device 3070 during the game per normal pattern Since it is possible to reliably differentiate the types of special symbol non-electric openings that can enter (easy to enter), it is easy to execute different types of special symbol lottery when the time saving state is set. Such a novel game property can be executed while reducing the processing load of the pachinko machine 10.例文帳に追加

In addition, when the time saving state is set, the configuration for realizing the novel game property of making it easier to execute a different type of special symbol lottery is not limited to this, for example, according to the normal pattern per type By differentiating the opening pattern of the normal electric accessory 3071 in the per-picture game, the type of the special non-electric opening into which the game ball that has flowed into the operating device 3070 can enter (it is easy to enter) can be made different. Alternatively, by varying the movable pattern of the movable piece 3072 according to the type of normal figure, the game ball that has flowed into the operating device 3070 can enter (it is easy to enter). It may be configured so that the types of operation ports are differentiated.

In addition, in the forty-sixth embodiment, the game ball that has flowed into the operating device 3070 is configured to enter any special figure non-electrically operated opening, but is not limited to this, for example, A discharge port may be provided for discharging the game balls that have flowed into the operating device 3070 to the game area again, or a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls may enter the operating device 3070. A winning hole for paying out prize balls may be provided, and a part of the game balls flowing into the operating device 3070 may enter the winning hole without entering the special figure non-electric working hole. .

By configuring in this way, even if the game ball flows into the operating device 3070 during the normal game, to create a pattern in which none of the special figure non-electric accessories are operated to the open state. Since it is possible, for the player, when the game per normal figure is executed, it is suppressed that a certain relationship that any special figure non-electric accessory will be in an open state is given. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from becoming bored with the game early.

Also, as described above, due to the nature of the non-electrical accessory, there is no effect even if the game ball enters the special non-electrical opening corresponding to the case where the special non-electrical accessory is in the open state. , When the special figure non-electric accessory is in the open state, there is a possibility that the player's interest in the execution of the normal figure winning game will decrease, but the above-described winning opening is provided inside the operating device 3070 And, by providing a flow path that allows the game ball to win the winning opening, the game ball that has flowed into the operating device 3070 only operates (varies) the special figure non-electric accessory to the open state. Instead, since there is a possibility that a prize ball is given, it is possible to make the player interested in the normal figure winning game when the special figure non-electric accessory is in the open state.

In this case, when the special figure non-electric accessory is in the open state, the game that can enter the corresponding special figure non-electric opening than when the special figure non-electric accessory is in the closed state It is good to configure so that the ball can easily enter the winning opening described above. In the case of the state, the game ball entering the special figure non-electrically operated opening contacts the operating mechanism, operates the operating mechanism, and the game ball is discharged to the outside of the pachinko machine 10. When the special figure non-electric accessory is in the open state, the game ball entering the special figure non-electric activation opening flows down toward the winning opening without coming into contact with the mechanism for operation. It should be configured as follows. By configuring in this way, when the special non-electric accessory is in the open state, more prize balls are won during the normal game than when the special non-electric accessory is in the closed state. can be made easier.

Therefore, when the special figure non-electric accessory is in the open state, the normal figure winning game can be made a game advantageous to the player in terms of winning the prize ball. Regardless, the player can be made to play while expecting that the game per normal pattern will be executed, and the player's willingness to play can be enhanced.

<Regarding production content in the 46th embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 786 to 794, the content of characteristic effects among the various effects executed in the forty-sixth embodiment will be described. Specifically, the contents of the production (time saving production) executed while the time saving state is set will be described. In the forty-sixth embodiment, as described above with reference to FIG. 779, as a time-saving state in which the special symbol lottery is more likely to be executed than in the normal state, the first special symbol lottery is more likely to be executed than the second special symbol lottery. A state (disadvantageous time-saving state) and a time-saving state (advantageous time-saving state) in which the second special symbol lottery is more likely to be executed than the first special symbol lottery can be set. Then, using the display surface of the third symbol display device 81, it is possible to notify the player of which time saving state the time saving state set this time is. As a result, it is possible to provide a game that is easy for the player to understand.

Furthermore, the second special symbol lottery can be executed even in the state where the disadvantageous time reduction state is set, and the first disadvantageous time reduction state in which the probability of executing the second special symbol lottery is low and the first A second disadvantageous time-saving state in which the probability of executing the second special symbol lottery is higher than the unfavorable time-saving state can be set, and the first time-saving performance is performed in common during the disadvantageous time-saving state. A suggestion performance for making a player predict whether the disadvantageous time-saving state is set or the second disadvantageous time-saving state is set can be executed. By configuring in this way, the suggestive effect that is executed in order for the player who is set in the disadvantageous time-saving state to grasp whether or not the slightly advantageous game state (second unfavorable time-saving state) is set. Since the user will pay attention to , the production effect can be enhanced.

In addition, in the 46th embodiment, in order to suppress the execution of games that are excessively advantageous to the player, when the advantageous time-saving state is set, the second special symbol lottery is performed five times. When it is executed, the time saving end condition is established, and the time saving state is ended. That is, in an advantageous time-saving state in which the second special symbol lottery more advantageous to the player than the first special symbol lottery is likely to be executed, by setting an upper limit on the number of executions of the second special symbol lottery, it is excessively advantageous to the player. While it is configured to suppress the execution of the game, in a disadvantageous time-saving state in which the first special symbol lottery disadvantageous to the player is more likely to be executed than the second special symbol lottery, the first special It is configured so that the time-saving end condition is not established until the total number of execution times of the symbol lottery and the second special symbol lottery reaches 99 times. That is, when the disadvantageous time-saving state is set, the probability that the second special symbol lottery is executed is lower than the advantageous time-saving state, but the number of executions of the second special symbol lottery is higher than the advantageous time-saving state. can be increased.

Then, as a time-saving effect that is executed when the disadvantageous time-saving state is set, a notification effect for notifying the player that the execution machine of the second special symbol lottery has been established during the disadvantageous time-saving state, and a disadvantageous Production based on the number of executions of the second special symbol lottery executed during the time saving state (for example, notification that the upper limit execution number of the second special symbol lottery set as the time saving end condition of the advantageous time saving state has been exceeded (blessing) It is configured to be executable.

By configuring in this way, when the unfavorable time-saving state that is more disadvantageous to the player than the advantageous time-saving state is normally set, the game that the game that is more advantageous than the advantageous time-saving state is executed as a game result. Since the information can be notified to the player in an easy-to-understand manner, even when the unfavorable time-saving state is set, the player's willingness to play can be prevented and the player can be motivated to play the game.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 783 and 784, the game content (scenario) of the game per normal figure executed in the 46th embodiment will be described. Figure 783 is a diagram showing the flow of the game per normal pattern when the open pattern A per normal pattern in which the game ball can enter the special figure 1 non-electric opening 3073a is set, and Fig. 784 is It is a diagram showing the flow of the game per normal figure when the normal figure per open pattern B in which the game ball can enter the special figure 2 non-electric opening 3073b is set.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 in the forty-sixth embodiment, according to the normal pattern winning type set when winning in the normal pattern lottery, the contents of the normal pattern winning game to be executed are varied. Configure. Specifically, the length of the period from when the game per normal pattern is executed until the normal electric accessory 3071 is varied to the open state is configured to vary according to the type per normal pattern. .

First, with reference to FIG. 783, the contents of the open pattern A per normal pattern will be described. As shown in FIG. 783, when the game per normal pattern is executed, the measurement of the opening period is started and the scenario for variably controlling the movable piece 3072 is updated.

The variable control of the movable piece 3072 is always defined to be constant regardless of the type of normal pattern, and the movable piece 3072 into a closed position. That is, every time the game per normal pattern is executed, the scenario is defined so that the closing period of 1.5 seconds is set at a predetermined timing (0.5 seconds after the game per normal pattern is executed). there is

And, in the normal pattern per open pattern A, 3 seconds are defined as a period (opening period) from when the normal pattern per game is executed until the normal electric accessory 3071 is changed to the open state, and then normal 2.5 seconds are defined as a period (open period) in which the electric accessory 3071 is changed to the open state, and a period (ending period) from the end of the open period to the end of the game per normal figure. , 1 second. That is, when the open pattern A per normal pattern is set, the scenario of the game per normal pattern is defined so that the game period of the game per normal pattern is 6.5 seconds at the longest.

It should be noted that the open period (2.5 seconds) in the game per normal figure described above is configured to be able to end even by conditions other than the passage of time, specifically, to the operating device 3070 during the open period When the number of game balls that flowed in reaches a predetermined number (two) (when the conditions for ending the winning number are satisfied), the open period is terminated without waiting for the time of the open period to elapse. . In other words, when the game per normal pattern is executed, the number of inflows of game balls into the area (inside the operating device 3070) where the game ball is easier to enter than when the game per normal pattern is not executed ( It is configured so that the normal figure per game can be terminated when the number of entering balls) reaches a predetermined number. By configuring in this way, since it is possible to set an upper limit to the amount of privilege that can be given to the player for one game per normal pattern, it is possible to suppress the excessive awarding of the privilege to the player. be able to.

In addition, by completing the normal pattern per game by establishing the winning number end condition, the game period of the normal pattern per game can be shortened compared to the case where the normal pattern per game is ended based on the passage of time. Therefore, as a result, it is possible to increase the number of normal symbol lotteries per unit time. Therefore, for example, in the time-saving state in which the open pattern A per normal figure that can enter the game ball mainly to the special figure 1 non-electric opening 3073a is likely to be set, even once before the time-saving state ends Aiming to execute a lot of second special symbol lottery (executing a normal figure per game that allows game balls to enter the special figure 2 non-electric opening 3073b), the player continues to play can be performed, it is possible to make it easier to improve the operation of the game.

In particular, in the time-saving state in which the open pattern A per normal figure is likely to be set, the state in which the number of reserved memories (special figure 1 reservation) of the first special symbol has reached the upper limit number (4 pieces), that is, no more, right In a state where even if a game ball is entered into the first ball entrance 3064, a new special figure 1 reservation cannot be acquired (stored), a game ball is fired in order not to shoot useless game balls. Although the act of temporarily interrupting (right-handed game) is generally executed, in the pachinko machine 10 in the 46th embodiment, in order to acquire the second special symbol pending memory (special figure 2 pending) , the player can be made to select an action to continue the game. Therefore, the player is provided with a novel playability of allowing the player to select between a game in which the game balls are not used wastefully and a game in which the game balls are used wastefully with the aim of giving an advantageous privilege. be able to.

As shown in FIG. 783, when the opening pattern A per normal pattern is set, the opening period is set to 3 seconds, so the closing period of the movable piece 3072 ends before the opening period elapses. will do. Therefore, when the game per normal pattern in which the open pattern A per normal pattern is set is executed, the normal electric accessory 3071 is opened, and the game ball flowing into the operating device 3070 is transferred to the first flow path 3070a, It will flow down the second flow path 3070b and enter the special figure 1 non-electric opening 3073a (see FIG. 780 (b)).

Next, with reference to FIG. 784, the flow of the game per normal pattern when the open pattern B per normal pattern is set will be described. In the 46th embodiment, the length of the opening period of the game per normal pattern is only different between the open pattern A per normal pattern and the open pattern B per normal pattern. It is configured so that a per-figure game is executed. A detailed description of the same content will be omitted.

As shown in Figure 784, in the open pattern B per normal pattern, 0.5 seconds is defined as the opening period of the game per normal pattern, so during the period in which the movable piece 3072 is located at the closed position A game ball that has flowed into the actuator 3070 can reach the movable piece 3072 .

As described above, in the forty-sixth embodiment, the second special symbol lottery is more advantageous to the player than the first special symbol lottery. Depending on the type per normal figure set in the case, the non-electric opening (special figure 1 non-electric opening 3073a, special figure 2 non-electric opening 3073b) where the game ball is easy to enter during the game per normal figure configured to be different.

Then, the game ball can be entered into the special figure 2 non-electric opening 3073b, which is the execution machine for the second special symbol lottery that is advantageous to the player. Ordinary figure per game) is configured so that the game period of the general figure per game is shorter.

By configuring in this way, as the type of the time saving state, when the time saving type B, which is a time saving type that makes it easy to enter the game ball into the special figure 2 non-electric opening 3073b, is set, the normal figure per game Since the game can be executed efficiently, the player can smoothly execute the game during the time saving state.

On the other hand, as a type of time saving state, a game ball can be entered into the special figure 1 non-electric opening 3073a, which is an execution machine for the first special symbol lottery that is disadvantageous to the player. When the time saving A that facilitates execution of the game per normal pattern A is set is set, the opening period of the game per normal pattern is longer, and the period required for one game per normal pattern is longer. Therefore, it is possible to suppress an excessive increase in the number of executions of the game per normal pattern (the number of executions of the normal pattern lottery) during the time saving state.

In addition, when the open pattern A per normal pattern is set, the normal pattern electric accessory 3071 is after the period in which the game ball can be entered into the special figure 2 non-electric opening 3073b. Since it is configured to be opened, the game ball that has flowed into the operating device 3070 during the normal game per normal pattern open pattern A will enter the special figure 2 non-electric opening 3073b. occurrence can be suppressed.

That is, according to the set open pattern per normal figure, the period during which the game ball can flow into the operating device 3070 (open period of the normal electric accessory 3071) and the period during which the movable piece 3072 is located at the closed position (movable Closing period of piece 3072) and, by differentiating the degree of overlap, the normal figure per game (advantage per normal figure per game) that allows the game ball to enter the special 2 non-electric opening 3073b, The method used in the 46th embodiment as a method that can be set with a normal game (disadvantage normal game) that makes it difficult to enter the game ball to the special figure 2 non-electric opening 3073b That is, the length of the opening period of the game per normal pattern is varied according to the type per normal pattern, and the game per normal pattern in which a short opening period is set becomes an advantageous per game per normal pattern, and a long opening period is set. As a method other than the method in which the general pattern per game becomes a disadvantageous general pattern per game, the general pattern per game in which a short opening period is set becomes a disadvantageous general pattern per game, and the general pattern per game in which a long opening period is set is advantageous It may be configured to be a game per normal figure.

However, in this case, the movable piece 3072 is positioned at the closed position at a timing later than the timing at which the game ball flows into the actuator 3070 due to a game with a disadvantageous pattern. Since the game ball that has flowed into the operating device 3070 during the game stays in the game area in the operating device 3070, there is a risk that the game ball will reach the movable piece 3072 after the movable piece 3072 is positioned at the closed position. be.

On the other hand, in the method used in the forty-sixth embodiment, the closed period in which the movable piece 3072 is positioned at the closed position is set before the timing at which the game ball flows into the operating device 3070 due to the game with an unfavorable normal game. In order to end, even if the game ball that has flowed into the operating device 3070 due to the game per disadvantageous figure stays in the game area in the operating device 3070, it will enter the special figure 2 non-electric opening 3073b. can be suppressed. Therefore, for example, it is possible to make it difficult to execute a fraudulent act of intentionally staying in the operating device 3070 with a game ball that has flowed into the operating device 3070 due to a game with an unfavorable pattern.

In addition, as described above with reference to FIGS. 783 and 784, in the 46th embodiment, the game ball that has flowed into the operating device 3070 during the normal game is surely transferred to the special figure 2 non-electric opening 3073b. It is configured to be able to set the open pattern A per normal pattern that cannot be entered and the open pattern B per normal pattern that surely enters the special figure 2 non-electric opening 3073b, but it is limited to this. Without, for example, when the same open pattern per normal pattern is set, the timing at which the game ball flows into the operating device 3070, and the required time until the game ball flowing into the operating device 3070 reaches the movable piece 3072 Depending on the period, the case where the ball can enter the special figure 2 non-electric opening 3073b and the case where it cannot be configured may be switched.

In this case, for example, the operating device 3070 during a part of the opening period (2.5 seconds) of the normal electric accessory 3071 during the normal game (first 0.5 seconds or last 0.5 seconds) It is preferable that the game ball is configured to be able to reach the movable piece 3072 positioned at the closed position when the game ball is made to flow into. By configuring in this way, it is determined whether or not the game ball enters the special figure 2 non-electrically operated opening 3073b depending on the timing at which the game ball flows into the operating device 3070, so for the player , the timing at which the game ball enters the actuator 3070 can be made interesting.

In addition, as another configuration, for example, a plurality of flow paths through which game balls that have flowed into the actuator 3070 can flow are formed inside the actuator 3070, and a movable piece is formed according to the flow path through which the game balls flow down. 3072, and when the period required from flowing into the actuator 3070 to reaching the movable piece 3072 is within a predetermined period, it is positioned at the closed position. or can reach the movable piece 3072, or is positioned at the closed position when the period required from flowing into the actuating device 3070 to reaching the movable piece 3072 is a predetermined period or longer. It may be constructed such that it can reach the movable piece 3072 that is in contact with it. With this configuration, the player can be interested in the behavior of the game ball that has flowed into the actuator 3070 until it reaches the movable piece 3072 .

Next, with reference to FIG. 785, transition contents of each game state in the pachinko machine 10 of the 46th embodiment will be described. FIG. 785 is a schematic diagram showing transition contents of each game state in the pachinko machine 10 of the 46th embodiment. As shown in Figure 785, in the forty-sixth embodiment, as the game state, the normal state (low probability state of special symbols, low probability state of normal symbols) and time-saving state (low probability state of special symbols, normal symbols high probability state), and further, as a time saving state, a first time saving state (time saving A mode) in which the first special symbol lottery is more likely to be executed than the second special symbol lottery, and the first A second time-saving state (time-saving B mode) in which the second special symbol lottery is more likely to be executed than the special symbol lottery can be set.

First, the contents of the game in the normal state will be explained. As shown in FIG. 779, the pachinko machine 10 of the forty-sixth embodiment is formed on the left side of the variable display unit 80, that is, a game area (left-handed area) in which game balls shot in a left-handed game can flow down. The first ball entrance 64 is provided at a position where the game ball that has flowed down the game area can enter, and when the game ball enters the first ball entrance 64, the first special symbol lottery executed. On the other hand, even if a right-handed game is played in the normal state, the probability of winning in the normal pattern lottery is low (1/240) in the normal state in which the low probability state of the normal pattern is set, and the operating device Since it is difficult to let the game ball flow into 3070 , it becomes difficult to make the game ball enter the right first ball entrance 3064 or the second ball entrance 3065 . Therefore, during the normal state, the left-handed game becomes an advantageous game for the player.

In the first special symbol lottery, a lottery for winning a jackpot with a probability of 1/200 is executed. It should be noted that, in the first special symbol lottery, it is configured so as not to win a small hit. Here, when a jackpot is won in the first special symbol lottery, jackpot A to jackpot C are set as jackpot types, and when jackpot A (selection rate 20%) is set. , After the jackpot game ends, a second time saving state (time saving B mode) is set. On the other hand, when the jackpots B and C (80% of the total selection ratio) are set, the first time-saving state (time-saving A mode) is set after the jackpot game ends.

During the first time-saving state (time-saving A mode), a high probability state of normal symbols is set, and the probability of winning in the normal symbol lottery is high (239/240), so the operating device by the right-handed game. A game in which a game ball is introduced into a right first ball entry hole 3064 or a second ball entry hole 3065 by entering a game ball into one of the non-electrically operated holes. can be easily executed. Therefore, during the first time-saving state (time-saving A mode), the right-handed game becomes an advantageous game for the player.

During the first time-saving state (time-saving A mode), the game ball that has flowed into the operating device 3070 is configured to be easier to enter the special figure 1 non-electric opening 3073a, so basically the second 1 special symbol lottery is executed. When the jackpot is won in the first special symbol lottery, the jackpot types are set to jackpot A to jackpot C, and when the jackpot A (selection rate 20%) is set, the jackpot game is played. After the end, the second time saving state (time saving B mode) is set. On the other hand, when the jackpots B and C (80% of the total selection ratio) are set, the first time-saving state (time-saving A mode) is set after the jackpot game ends.

On the other hand, when the game ball that has flowed into the operating device 3070 enters the special figure 2 non-electrically operated opening 3073b, and the special figure 2 non-electrical accessory 3065a is operated (opened), to the right-handed game The game ball launched by the second ball enters the second ball entrance 3065, and the second special symbol lottery is executed. When the second special symbol lottery is executed, a part of the case where the jackpot is won with a probability of 1/200, which is the same probability as the above-mentioned first special symbol lottery, and the jackpot is not won (missed) ( 1/6) to win a small hit.

Then, when a small win is won, a small win game is executed, and when the game ball passes through a specific area (V gate) during the small win game (when V wins), the small win A jackpot game is executed after the end of the game. In other words, the second special symbol lottery is a lottery that is more advantageous to the player than the first special symbol lottery in that it is configured to allow a small winning.

When a big win is won in the second special symbol lottery, a big win D is set as a big win type, and a second time saving state (time saving B mode) is set after the big win game is finished. Also, when a small win is won, big wins E and F are set, and when V is won during a small win game, a second time saving state (time saving B mode) is set after the big win game is finished. On the other hand, when the V prize is not won during the small winning game (in the case of non-V winning), the game is restarted in the first time saving state without executing the big winning game.

In the first time-saving state (time-saving A mode), as a time-saving end condition for ending the time-saving state, the number of executions of the first special symbol lottery and the number of times of execution of the second special symbol lottery are summed up. A time-saving end condition is set to be satisfied when 99 times are reached, and when the time-saving end condition is satisfied without executing a big winning game, the game state shifts to a normal state.

In other words, during the first time-saving state (time-saving A mode), the first special symbol lottery executed with a high probability (99/100) wins a jackpot (1/200 probability) before the time-saving end condition is met. Or, aiming to win a big hit (probability of 1/200) or a small hit (probability of 1/6) in the second special symbol lottery executed with a low probability (probability of about 1/100). A game is executed.

In addition, although detailed description will be described later, in the first time saving state (time saving A mode), the probability that the second special symbol lottery will be executed is low probability (1/100) disadvantageous first time saving state (time saving A2 mode ) and an advantageous first time-saving state (time-saving A1 mode) with a higher probability (3/100) that the second special symbol lottery will be executed than the disadvantageous first time-saving state (time-saving A2 mode). , If the jackpot type set when the jackpot is won in the first special symbol lottery is jackpot B, the advantageous first time saving state (time saving A1 mode) is set, and if the jackpot is C, the disadvantageous first time saving state ( It is configured so that the time saving A2 mode) is set. And, even when any time-saving A mode is set, the display screen of the third pattern display device 81 is configured so that the production of basically common contents (the production during the time-saving A mode) is executed. It is configured so that it is difficult for the player to grasp which time-saving A mode is set.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to predict the ease of execution of the second special symbol lottery during the time saving A mode, so that the second special symbol lottery is executed during the time saving A mode. It is possible to make the player enthusiastically play the game until the end while making the player expect that the game will be successful.

During the second time-saving state (time-saving B mode), a high probability state of normal symbols is set, and the probability of winning in the normal symbol lottery is high (239/240), so the operating device by the right-handed game. A game in which a game ball is introduced into a right first ball entry hole 3064 or a second ball entry hole 3065 by entering a game ball into one of the non-electrically operated holes. can be easily executed. Therefore, during the second time-saving state (time-saving B mode), the right-handed game becomes an advantageous game for the player.

During the second time-saving state (time-saving B mode), the game ball that has flowed into the operating device 3070 is configured to be easier to enter the special figure 2 non-electric opening 3073b, so basically the second 2 A special symbol lottery is executed. When the jackpot is won in the second special symbol lottery, the jackpot D is set as the jackpot type, and when the jackpot D (selection ratio 100%) is set, after the jackpot game ends, A second time saving state (time saving B mode) is set. Also, as described above, when the small hit is won, the big hits E and F are set, and when the V prize is won during the small hit game, the second time saving state (time saving B mode) is set after the big hit game ends. be done. On the other hand, when the V prize is not won during the small winning game (in the case of non-V winning), the game is restarted in the second time saving state without executing the big winning game.

In the second time-saving state (time-saving B mode), as a time-saving end condition for ending the time-saving state, the number of executions of the first special symbol lottery and the number of times of execution of the second special symbol lottery are totaled. In addition to the time-saving end condition that is established when 99 times are reached, the time-saving end condition that is established when the second special symbol lottery is executed five times is set, and the time-saving end condition is set without executing the jackpot game. When the condition is established, the game state is configured to shift to the normal state.

In other words, during the second time-saving state (time-saving B mode), until the time-saving end condition is satisfied, the second special symbol lottery executed with a high probability (100/100) wins the jackpot (probability of 1/200), Alternatively, a game aiming at winning a small prize (probability of 1/6) is executed.

<Regarding production content in the 46th embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 786 to 794, the characteristic contents of the various effects executed by the pachinko machine 10 of the forty-sixth embodiment will be described. Concretely, the contents of the production executed during the jackpot game and the contents of the production executed during the time saving state will be explained. Effect elements that are the same as those in the above-described embodiments are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, with reference to FIGS. 786(a) to 787(a), the content of the effect during the big win game executed during the big win game will be described. Fig. 786(a) is a diagram showing an example of the display screen displayed when the jackpot is won in the first special symbol lottery executed during the normal state, and Fig. 786(b) is a notice during the jackpot. FIG. 787(a) is a diagram showing an example of the display screen displayed during the performance, and FIG. 787(a) is a diagram showing an example of the display screen displayed during the ending period of the jackpot game.

As shown in FIG. 786(a), when the jackpot is won, a character 800 in the shape of a rabbit is displayed in the main display area Dm in a mode of congratulating the jackpot win, and "Jackpot" is displayed to indicate that the jackpot has been won. !!” is displayed. In addition, in the display area Dm1 for displaying the third pattern, which is the identification information for indicating the lottery result of the first special pattern, the display mode of "555" indicating that the result of the first special pattern lottery is a big win. In the display area Dm4, which is a guide display area for guiding the game method to the player, it is indicated that the game method to be executed during the jackpot game is the right-handed game. "Right shot" is displayed as a guidance notification mode for playing. A comment "Congratulations" for congratulating the player is displayed in the sub-display area Ds.

In this way, at the time when the jackpot is won, that is, when it is determined that the jackpot game is to be executed and before the jackpot game is executed, the game method to be executed during the jackpot game is instructed to the player. By notifying in advance, it is possible to create a situation in which the player is already executing a right-handed game at the timing when the jackpot game is started. In other words, the time required for the game ball fired by the right-handed game to flow down the right side area of the game area and reach the variable winning device 3650 opened during the jackpot game is about 2 seconds. Therefore, when the guidance notification of "right hitting" is executed at the timing when the jackpot game is executed, two seconds after the player executes the right hitting game, that is, the jackpot game is executed. Since the game ball reaches the variable prize winning device 3650 two seconds after being won, there is a problem that the progress of the jackpot game is delayed. On the other hand, in the forty-sixth embodiment, when it is determined that the winning game is to be executed and before the execution of the big winning game, the game method to be executed during the big winning game is given to the player. is notified in advance, it is possible to make it easy to win the game ball to the variable winning device 3650 immediately after the variable winning device 3650 is opened by the jackpot game.

As shown in FIG. 786(b), during the jackpot game, an effect is executed in which the character 800 imitating a rabbit takes out the contents of the bag 801 . Specifically, a notification mode for informing the player whether the game state set after the end of the jackpot game is the time saving A mode or the time saving B mode, that is, the card corresponding to the time saving A mode (display mode ) and a card (display mode) corresponding to the time-saving B mode are contained in the bag 801, and an effect for taking out one of the cards from the bag 801 (announcement effect during the jackpot) is executed.

Then, in the sub display area Ds, a comment "If you get lucky, it will save time B" is displayed as a display mode for explaining the contents of the effect being executed in an easy-to-understand manner to the player. In this way, by informing only the result of effect that is advantageous to the player, it is possible to inform the game result desired by the player in an easy-to-understand manner.

When it comes to the ending period of the jackpot game, as shown in FIG. 787(a), the effect result of the notification effect during the jackpot is displayed. In the example shown in FIG. 787(a), after the jackpot game is over, the time saving B mode (second time saving state), that is, the time saving state advantageous to the player who mainly executes the second special symbol lottery is set. The effect result (advantageous effect result) shown is shown, and an effect is being executed in which a character 800 imitating a rabbit takes out a card 801a corresponding to the time saving B mode. Then, in the sub-display area Ds, a comment "Congratulations, enter time-saving B mode" is displayed as a display mode for explaining that the effect result of the medium-jackpot notification effect is an effect result that is advantageous to the player. there is

On the other hand, although not shown, when the time saving A mode is set after the jackpot game ends, a display mode (time saving A display mode corresponding to the A mode) is executed to show that the card has been taken out from the bag 801 . Here, in the jackpot middle notification performance, only the performance is executed until the player is notified that the time saving A mode is set, and the player grasps which of the time saving A1 mode or the time saving A2 mode is set. A production that makes it difficult to do so is executed.

By configuring in this way, which of the time saving A1 mode and the time saving A2 mode is set (set) is predicted to the player based on the effect executed during the time saving state and the result of the special symbol lottery. It can provide fun to let you.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 787(b) to 788(b), the contents of various effects executed when the time saving B mode is set after the end of the jackpot game will be described. Figure 787 (b) shows an example of a time saving B mode game explanation screen for explaining to the player the content of the game to be executed during the time saving B mode, and Figure 788 (a) shows a time saving B mode FIG. 788(b) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen showing that a small hit has been won during the time saving B mode. .

Next, with reference to FIGS. 789(a) to 794, contents of various effects executed when the time saving A mode is set after the end of the jackpot game will be described. Figure 789 (a) shows an example of a time saving A mode game explanation screen for explaining to the player the content of the game to be executed during the time saving A mode, and Figure 789 (b) shows a time saving A mode FIG. 790(a) is an effect for showing the result of the first special symbol lottery executed during the time saving A mode. It is a diagram showing an example of a display screen showing a treasure box opening effect. FIG. 790(b) is a diagram showing an example of the display screen showing the effect result of the treasure box opening effect (big hit won in the first special symbol lottery). FIG. 791(a) is a diagram showing an example of the display screen when the result of the normal symbol lottery is notified using the treasure box opening effect. FIG. 791(b) is a diagram showing an example of the display screen of the mode suggestion effect executed during the time saving A mode. Figure 792 (a) is during the time saving A mode, is a diagram showing an example of an emphasis guidance effect screen that is executed in a state in which the special Figure 2 non-electric auditors 3065a is open (operating). Figure 792 (b) is in the time saving A mode, in a diagram showing an example of the display screen during the special effect that is executed when the special figure 2 non-electric accessary 3065a continuously operates (open) be. Figure 793 (a) is a diagram showing an example of the display screen when the number of executions of the second special symbol lottery executed during the time saving A mode exceeds a predetermined number of times (5 times). Figure 793 (b) is in the time saving A mode, long variation (60 seconds variation) is executed as the variation time of the first special symbol variation (special figure 1 variation) for showing the result of the first special symbol lottery FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of a display screen displayed when Figure 794 (a) is a diagram showing an example of the display screen displayed during the first half of the final variation effect executed during the special figure 1 final variation of the time saving A mode, and FIG. 794 (b ) is a diagram showing an example of the display screen of the effect executed in the second half period of the final change effect executed during the special figure 1 final change in the time saving A mode.

In the forty-sixth embodiment, as described above, when the time-saving state (time-saving A) in which the first special symbol lottery is more likely to be executed than the second special symbol lottery after the end of the jackpot game is set, the right-handed game The game ball is made to flow into the operating device 3070, and the special figure 1 non-electric accessory 3064a is operated by entering the game ball into the special figure 1 non-electric activation port 3073a, to the right first ball entrance 3064 A game is executed in which the first special symbol lottery is easier to execute than in a normal state by entering a game ball.

Then, in at least part of the ending period of the jackpot game (partial period including the end timing of the ending period), the game explanation screen shown in FIG. A game explanation screen for showing game contents is displayed. In this game explanation screen, as shown in FIG. 789(a), in the time-saving state set after the end of the jackpot game, the small area Dm4 is displayed as a guidance notification mode for guiding the player to perform the right-handed game. , "99" is displayed in the small area Dm6 as the display mode of the number of remaining time reductions for indicating the number of times of time reduction (set time reduction end condition).

In the center of the main display area Dm, images are displayed in small areas Dm10 and Dm11 for showing a plurality of devices for aiming the game ball during the time saving state. In the example shown in FIG. 789 (a), since the time saving A mode is set after the jackpot game ends, it is possible to enter the game ball to the special figure 1 non-electric opening 3073a in the operating device 3070 An image indicating that the special figure 1 non-electric accessary product 3064a is activated is displayed in the small area Dm10, respectively.

Although detailed description is omitted, in the example shown in FIG. 789(a), the display screen is displayed such that the display areas of the small areas Dm10 and Dm11 are the same size. , In the liquid crystal effect execution management process 17 (see S54101 in FIG. 822), the display mode is configured to vary according to the display continuation period of the game explanation screen, and the game order during the time saving state is notified to the player in an easy-to-understand manner. It is configured to

Specifically, a display screen having a larger display area than the small area Dm11 is displayed first in the small area Dm10. It is notified to the player in a way that is easier to understand than the display mode that guides the special figure 1 non-electric accessary product 3064a displayed in the area Dm11. Thereafter, the size of each display area is changed with the passage of time, and after a predetermined period of time (for example, two seconds), a display screen is displayed in which the display area of the small area Dm11 is larger than that of the small area Dm10. be. By configuring in this way, it is possible to notify the player of the game contents to be executed during the time-saving game in an easy-to-understand manner as well as the game order. The configuration for informing the player of the game content in an easy-to-understand manner by varying the display mode of the game explanation screen based on the passage of time is not limited to this, and for example, each of the small areas Dm10 and Dm11 It may be configured to vary the display position, vary the effect applied to each of the small areas Dm10 and Dm11, or execute voice guidance.

Also, the display screen shown in FIG. 789(a) is displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 from the end of the jackpot game to the start of the next special symbol variation. Therefore, for a player who does not grasp the contents of the game to be executed after the time saving state is set, that is, for a player who has not shot a game ball after the time saving state is set, a long game explanation screen can be displayed, an easy-to-understand game can be provided.

Then, when the special symbol variation in the time saving A mode is started, as shown in FIG. target display effect) is executed. As shown in FIG. 789(b), in the main display area Dm, an effect is executed in which the character 800 continues to run in one direction, and a guidance mode for indicating the content of the effect being executed is "Get a treasure box." Opportunity" comment is displayed. That is, in the main display area Dm, instead of guiding the game content (effect content) for the entire time-saving A mode, a transition condition for shifting the effect being executed to the next process is displayed. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it easier for the player to specifically grasp the progress of the presentation executed during the time saving A mode.

When the character 800 discovers the treasure box 805 in the state shown in FIG. 789(b), the display screen shown in FIG. 790(a) is displayed, and an effect for opening the treasure box 805 (treasure box opening effect) is executed. The effect of opening this treasure box 805 is basically a variation period (dynamic display period), and the timing when the special figure 1 fluctuation stops, that is, the identification information (special symbol, third symbol, etc.) for indicating the result of the first special symbol lottery is stopped and displayed 790(b), the contents pop out from the treasure box 805 shown in FIG. 790(b).

Here, as the contents of the treasure box 805, the contents "777" indicating that the result of the first special symbol lottery being executed is a big win, and the contents indicating that the condition that facilitates execution of the second special symbol lottery has been established. "Bonus" and "Disappointment" (not shown) indicating that the result of the first special symbol lottery is a loss are provided, and any contents are displayed.

The type of result of the treasure chest opening effect (displayed contents) is not limited to this. It may be configured such that when it is displayed, a second treasure box is displayed, and an effect for opening the second treasure box is executed. In this case, if it is pre-determined (determined) that advantageous information that is advantageous to the player is included in the newly acquired information (special figure 1 reservation, normal figure lottery result) during the treasure box opening effect , the second treasure box opening effect may be executed.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to provide a privilege (big win, execution of a second special symbol lottery) that is advantageous to the player at the time when the treasure box opening performance for opening the second treasure box is executed. It is possible to inform people in an easy-to-understand manner.

Although detailed description is omitted, this treasure box opening effect is not executed in all the first special symbol lotteries that are performed during the time saving state, but is executed when a specific execution condition is satisfied. It is configured as follows. By configuring in this way, the treasure box opening effect is frequently executed during the time saving state. It is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's degree of expectation for the treasure box opening effect (the degree of expectation for awarding a privilege).

As the effect result of the treasure box opening effect, when the effect result indicating that the first special symbol lottery has won the jackpot is displayed, as shown in FIG. The content 805a is displayed, and in the main area Dm1, the third symbol is stop-displayed in the display mode of "555" indicating that the result of the first special symbol lottery was a big win. In addition, a comment "Congratulations on your big win" is displayed in the secondary display area Ds as a display mode for congratulating the player.

On the other hand, if the effect result of the treasure box opening effect indicates that the conditions for facilitating execution of the second special symbol lottery have been established, as shown in FIG. Contents 805a imitating "bonus" are displayed, and in the sub-display area Ds, "Special figure 2 lottery execution chance right hit ” comment is displayed.

Here, in the treasure box opening effect, a case where "bonus" is displayed from the treasure box 805 will be described. As mentioned above, this treasure chest opening production is basically executed during the fluctuation period of the first special pattern fluctuation, but apart from this, the lottery result of the normal pattern lottery is a hit (normal pattern hit). And, it is configured to be executed even when a specific per-universal pattern type (A per per-universal pattern) is set. In other words, the normal pattern per game that allows the second special symbol lottery to be executed (normal pattern per game that allows the game ball to enter the special figure 2 non-electric opening 3073b) is executed. Also in this case, the treasure box opening presentation can be executed.

In addition, during the execution period of the treasure box opening effect corresponding to the first special symbol lottery, when the winning of the normal pattern hit A is won, the effect result of the treasure box opening effect being executed is the content 805a of "777". (the effect result indicating that a jackpot is won) is displayed, the effect result of the displayed treasure box opening effect is rewritten, and the content 805a of the "bonus" indicating that the normal game A is won is changed to configured to display.

By configuring in this way, as the production result of the treasure box opening production, the production result showing the result of the first special symbol lottery and the production result showing the lottery result of the normal symbol lottery, that is, the player in the time saving A mode It is possible to notify in an easy-to-understand manner that an advantageous privilege is given.

In addition, in the 46th embodiment, as a condition for determining that it is a gaming situation that can execute the second special symbol lottery, the condition is that the normal pattern per normal pattern A is elected. Without limitation, for example, the game per normal pattern was executed based on the winning per normal pattern A per normal pattern, the game ball entered the special pattern 2 non-electric opening 3073b, the special pattern The fact that the second non-electric accessory 3065a has been activated (released) may be used as a condition for determining that the gaming situation is such that the second special symbol lottery can be executed. In this case, the content 805a of the "bonus" may be displayed from the treasure box 805 in accordance with the timing when each condition is satisfied.

Next, as shown in FIG. 791(b), while the effect (see FIG. 789(b)) of the character 800 continuing to run is being executed during the time saving A mode, a predetermined execution condition is satisfied. Based on the establishment, a mode suggesting performance (mode type suggesting performance) for making the player predict which of the currently set time saving type is 'time saving A1' or 'time saving A2' is executed. In this mode suggestion effect, by displaying a display mode corresponding to the expectation type selected with reference to the expectation level selection table 222pa described later, the currently set time reduction type is "time reduction A1", "time reduction A2". ” is executed to make the player predict which one.

As an example of a display mode corresponding to the expectation level type, in FIG. 791(b), a hat 800b is displayed as an item that the character 800 wears. This hat 800b is a display mode that is most likely to be displayed regardless of the medium expectation level, that is, any of the time-saving types (time-saving A1, time-saving A2) is set. Although detailed illustration is omitted, as a display mode displayed as a mode suggestive effect, high expectations (second special symbol lottery is relatively easy to execute time saving A2 is set) other than the hat 800b High) is an icon that imitates goggles as a display mode, and an icon that imitates a cane is used as a display mode for low expectations (high expectations that are set to short time A1 where the second special symbol lottery is relatively difficult to execute). configured to be displayed.

Thus, in the forty-sixth embodiment, when the time-saving A mode is set, the same production mode (the character 800 keeps running) is executed regardless of the time-saving type, and the mode is suggested in the production. It is configured to execute a production. By constructing in this way, even when the time saving A mode is set for any time saving type, the player is made to play the game while expecting the second special symbol lottery to be executed. can be done.

Next, FIG. 792(a) explains the display screen displayed during the forced guidance effect in the time saving A mode. As described above, in the 46th embodiment, the game ball enters the special figure 2 non-electric opening 3073b, and the special figure 2 non-electric accessory 3065a in the closed state (unoperated state) A mechanism is used to actuate it to an open state (actuated state). That is, when the game ball is entered into the special figure 2 non-electric opening 3073b in the state (open state) in which the special figure 2 non-electric role 3065a is operating, a new special figure 2 non-electric role A situation will occur in which the object 3065a cannot be activated.

In this case, even though you won the normal figure per A that is set to a low probability during the time saving A mode, the benefits given by winning (Special Figure 2 Enter the game ball into the non-electric opening 3073b There is a problem that the player is forced to play a disadvantageous game because the player is not given the privilege of making the ball.

On the other hand, in the forty-sixth embodiment, as shown in FIG. 792 (a), the special figure 2 non-electric accessory 3065a is in the open state (operating state). In the case of winning, the per-universal figure variation, and during a part of the per-universal figure game, the emphasis guidance effect is executed, and then the game ball enters the special figure 2 non-electric opening 3073b. It is configured to execute an effect that guides to establish the closing condition of the special figure 2 non-electric accessory 3065a that is operating before (entering the game ball into the second ball entrance 3065) .

By configuring in this way, it is possible to suppress the execution of a game disadvantageous to the player as much as possible.

When the emphasis guidance effect is executed, as shown in FIG. 792 (a), the special figure 2 non-electric accessary 3065a is closed by the timing when the game ball can enter the special figure 2 non-electric opening 3073b. Therefore, the characters "Close the special figure 2 tulip within 5 seconds" are displayed in the main display area Dm, and an image showing the special figure 2 tulip (special figure 2 non-electric accessory 3065a) is displayed in the small area Dm20. is displayed. Then, in the sub-display area Ds, as a guidance mode for notifying the player of the closing condition for closing the special figure 2 tulip (special figure 2 non-electric accessory 3065a), "There is one special figure 2 tulip. It will close when you win a prize." is displayed.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 792(a), the number of executions of the second special symbol lottery executed during the time saving A mode is counted as the number of bonuses, and the count value is displayed in the small area Dm7. In the diagram shown in FIG. 792(a), "bonus GET number 1 time" is already displayed as a display mode for indicating that the second special symbol lottery has been executed once.

By configuring in this way, the number of executions of the second special symbol lottery executed during the time saving A mode can be notified to the player in an easy-to-understand manner. Although detailed description will be given later, in the 46th embodiment, the number of executions of the first special symbol lottery and the number of executions of the second special symbol lottery are summed up as the condition for ending the time saving state. We have set a time-saving end condition that is satisfied when it reaches . Therefore, even when the second special symbol lottery is executed, the update information (the value of the time-saving medium counter) for establishing the time-saving end condition is updated.

In addition, the time saving end condition to be set is not limited to this. , You may set the time-saving end condition which is satisfied when the number of executions of the second special symbol lottery reaches 10 times. In this case, the upper limit of the number of bonus GETs displayed in the small area Dm7 is 10 times. Therefore, the number of bonus GETs displayed in the small area Dm7 is an effect in which the display mode is changed based on the update of the element for establishing the time-saving end condition that is difficult to be satisfied.

In this way, in the pachinko machine 10 configured to be able to set a plurality of time-saving end conditions, when the time-saving end condition that is easy to be established in terms of design value and the time-saving end condition that is difficult to be established are provided, the time-saving end that is easy to be established The remaining period until the condition is satisfied is notified to the player as the remaining short time (display of the small area Dm6), and the remaining period until the time saving end condition which is difficult to be satisfied is satisfied is not reported as the remaining time short period but separately. To suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the time saving state is abruptly ended and the player is puzzled even if any of the time saving end conditions are satisfied by configuring the device to be used for the purpose of can be done.

Next, with reference to FIG. 792(b), a display screen (special effect screen) that can be displayed after the emphasized guidance effect is executed will be described. When the special figure 2 non-electric role 3065a is closed immediately after the emphasis guidance effect is executed (for example, during variation per normal pattern), the second special symbol lottery is started from the timing when the game per normal pattern is executed. The treasure box opening effect is executed in the effect mode (see FIG. 791(a)) for informing the player that it is likely to be executed. In addition, when the special figure 2 non-electric accessary product 3065a is in the open state at the timing when the normal figure per game is executed, it is configured to end the emphasized guidance effect.

Then, when the special figure 2 non-electric accessory 3065a is closed at the timing when the game ball enters the special figure 2 non-electric opening 3073b, the special effect screen shown in FIG. 792 (b) is displayed. be done. In other words, in the period (about 2 seconds) from when the normal figure per game is executed until the game ball enters the special figure 2 non-electric opening 3073b, the special figure 2 non-electric accessory 3065a is closed from the open state When it is activated to the state, the game situation is such that the special figure 2 non-electric accessory 3065a is continuously activated to the open state, so a special effect screen for providing a special feeling to the player is displayed It is configured so that In this special effect screen, in the main display area Dm, as a guidance mode for indicating that the special figure 2 non-electric accessory 3065a is continuously opened, the characters "Extra !! Continuous opening" are displayed, In the sub-display area Ds, characters of "special figure 2 lottery big chance" are displayed.

That is, in the example shown in FIG. 792 (b), during the execution period of the first special symbol lottery (see Dm1 in FIG. 792 (b)), since it is possible to acquire a plurality of special figures 2 pending, time saving The game situation is such that the second special symbol lottery can be executed continuously during the A mode. Therefore, the characters "special figure 2 lottery big chance" are displayed in the sub-display area Ds. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make the player easily understand that the big winning game is easily executed via the small winning of the second special symbol lottery.

In addition, after the emphasis guidance effect is executed, when the special figure 2 non-electric accessary 3065a is still operating at the time the game ball enters the special figure 2 non-electric opening 3073b, special figure 2 It is configured so that the effect executed based on the entry of the game ball into the non-electrically operated opening 3073b is not executed. By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent players from having excessive expectations.

Next, with reference to FIG. 793(a), description will be given of the content of effect executed when the number of executions of the second special symbol lottery executed during the time saving A mode exceeds a predetermined number of times. As shown in Figure 793 (a), the number of times of the second special symbol lottery executed in the time saving A mode exceeds the number of times (5 times) set as the time saving end condition in the time saving B mode, As an effect mode for congratulating the player, the main display area Dm displays the characters "very lucky" and the characters "break through", and the sub-display area Ds informs the player of the current game situation in an easy-to-understand manner. As a mode for doing so, the characters "You can execute more special figure 2 lotteries than in time saving B mode" are displayed.

In other words, to inform the player in an easy-to-understand manner that the number of executions of the second special symbol lottery during the time saving state has increased compared to the time saving mode "time saving B" that is usually advantageous to the player. A display screen appears. By configuring in this way, when the time saving state (time saving A) on the disadvantageous side is set for the player, it is possible to notify in an easy-to-understand manner that a game advantageous to the player has been played.

Next, with reference to FIG. 793(b), an effect screen for showing that a game period for executing many normal symbol lotteries has been set during the time saving A mode will be described. As will be described later with reference to FIG. 798, in the 46th embodiment, it is possible to select a variation time of 1 second at the shortest and 60 seconds at the longest as the variation time of the first special symbol lottery executed during the time saving state. The selection ratio of each variable time is made different between when the time reduction A1 is set and when the time reduction A2 is set. Specifically, the time reduction A2, which is more advantageous to the player than the time reduction A1, is configured to make it easier for the player to select a longer variable time.

Here, in the 46th embodiment, the time saving state is configured to continue until the time saving end condition, which is established based on the execution of the special symbol lottery, is satisfied, and regardless of whether the special symbol lottery is executed, It is configured so that a normal symbol lottery can be executed. That is, the longer the special symbol variation time during the time saving state, the easier it is to increase the number of normal symbol lotteries to be executed during the time saving state.

Therefore, when the variation time of the special symbol variation is long (60 seconds), it becomes a period in which it is easy to execute the normal symbol lottery multiple times during one special symbol variation period, so the special symbol variation During the long fluctuation period, the effect shown in FIG. 793(b) is configured to be executable.

Specifically, in order to inform the player in an easy-to-understand manner that the special symbol variation is in the long variation, an effect mode is displayed in which the character 800 progresses along a long path 804. A chance to get" is displayed. Then, in the sub-display area Ds, characters of ``Keep right-handed hitting'' are displayed as a display mode for suppressing the player from interrupting the right-handed hitting game.

By configuring in this way, for example, even while the number of reserved memories of the first special symbol (the number of reserved special figures 1) has reached the upper limit, in order to establish the execution opportunity of the second special symbol lottery It is possible to continuously perform the right-handed game.

Next, with reference to FIG. 794, the contents of the production (final fluctuation production) executed during the final fluctuation of the special symbols in the time saving A mode will be described. When the final variation of the time saving state is reached, Dm6 displays the character "Last" to indicate that the special symbol variation of this time is the final variation during the time saving state, and a treasure box 805 is displayed. . In addition, the number of pending memories of the first special symbol at the present time (special figure 1 pending number) is displayed in the small area Dm16 and the small area Dm17. In Figure 794 (a), the number of special figures 1 pending shows a state of two. Also, when the time-saving state ends, a normal state is set in which the special symbol lottery is less likely to be executed than the time-saving state, so in order to play a game that acquires many special figure reservations during the time-saving state ” is displayed.

Then, when entering the second half period of the time-saving final variation, the effect of opening the treasure box 805 is executed, and the contents 805a based on the result of the first special symbol lottery being executed are displayed. In FIG. 794(b), the content 805a of "Unfortunate" indicating that the result of the middle battle of the time saving final fluctuation was out is displayed. That is, in the time saving final variation, the treasure box opening effect is always executed.

In the forty-sixth embodiment, the effect result of the treasure box opening effect executed in the time saving final variation is determined based on the result of the first special symbol lottery being executed, but it is limited to this. Contents 805a will be displayed based on the preliminary determination result (forecast result) of the special figure 1 reservation at the timing when the first half period of the time saving final fluctuation is completed and the result of the first special symbol lottery being executed. can be configured to By constructing in this way, a game is executed that makes the player ambitiously accumulate the special figure 1 reservation, aiming at executing the performance in which the results of a plurality of special symbol lotteries are combined and notified. can be made

In addition, as shown in Figure 794 (b), when the special figure 2 hold is acquired in the time saving final variation, the display mode indicating that the time saving state ends with the special figure 2 hold acquired "Bonus × 1” is displayed. In this case, the second special symbol variation is executed as the first special symbol variation after the time saving state ends. By configuring in this way, it is possible to inform the player of the game to be executed after the time saving state is finished in an easy-to-understand manner.

Although detailed illustration is omitted, in the state where special figure 2 suspension is acquired at the end of the time saving state of time saving A mode, in the period from the time when the normal state is set until all the special figure 2 suspension is consumed , is configured to execute a special effect (pull-back effect). By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it easier for the player to understand that the game being executed is a special game.

<Regarding the electrical configuration in the forty-sixth embodiment>
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 of the forty-sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 795 to 802. FIG. In the forty-sixth embodiment, a part of the configuration of the ROM 202 of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, a part of the configuration of the RAM 203, and the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 are replaced with the pachinko machine of the ninth embodiment described above. The difference is that part of the configuration of the ROM 222 and part of the configuration of the RAM 223 are changed, and the rest is the same. The same reference numerals are assigned to the same contents, and detailed descriptions thereof are omitted.

First, the configuration of the ROM 202 of the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 will be described with reference to FIGS. 795 to 799. FIG. FIG. 795(a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM 202 in the forty-sixth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 795(a), the configuration of the ROM 202 in the forty-sixth embodiment is different from the configuration of the ROM 202 in the ninth embodiment (see FIG. 129(a)) in the first random number table 202a. Instead, the first winning random number 17 table 202pa is replaced with the first winning type selection table 202b, the first winning type selection 17 table 202pb is replaced with the second winning random number table 202c, and the second winning random number table 202pc is replaced with the variation pattern. Variation pattern selection 17 table 202pd instead of selection table 202d, small hit type selection 17 table 202pe instead of small hit type selection table 202ea, and per normal figure type selection 17 table 202pf, and time saving The difference is that a grant 17 table 202p is added.

The general pattern per type selection 17 table 202pf is a data table that is referred to for determining the per general pattern type when winning (per normal pattern) in the lottery of normal symbols. Detailed contents will be described later with reference to FIG. 797 (b), but if you win in the lottery of normal symbols, this normal pattern per type selection 17 table 202pf is referenced, and the game state at the time of winning And, the type per general pattern corresponding to the value of the acquired per general pattern type counter C6 is determined.

The normal per figure type counter C6, like other various counters (first per random number counter C1, etc.), is a counter whose value is periodically updated by timer interrupt processing executed by the MPU 201 in the main control unit 110. is. Specifically, each time the timer interrupt process is executed, 1 is added to the value of the type counter C6 per normal figure, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (99 in this embodiment), the minimum value 0 clear to In other words, the normal figure per type counter C6, the value is updated while looping the range of "0 to 99". Then, the updated value is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203 . When the general pattern is elected, the general pattern per type counter C6 stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203 is read and referred to when the general pattern per type is determined.

Next, with reference to FIG. 795(b), the first winning random number 17 table 202pa in the forty-sixth embodiment will be described. FIG. 795(b) is a diagram showing the defined contents of the first winning random number 17 table 202pa in the forty-sixth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 795(b), in the first winning random number 17 table 202pa, three random numbers (counter values) of "0 to 2" are defined as judgment values for judging a big win (see FIG. 795(b)). See 795(b) 202pa1). It should be noted that the determination value for the big hit is common between the lottery for the first special symbol and the lottery for the second special symbol. Of the 600 possible random numbers (counter values) of the first winning random number counter C1, the number of determination values (counter values) determined as a big hit is 3, so the probability of being determined as a big win in the lottery of special symbols. is 1/200 (3/600).

In addition, "3 to 599" is defined as the range of the determination value that is determined to be out of the lottery of the first special symbol (see 202pa2 in FIG. 795 (b)), and is determined to be a small hit of the first special symbol. The value is not defined (see 202pa3 in Figure 795(b)). In addition, "3 to 499" is defined as the range of the determination value determined to be out of the second special symbol (see 202pa2 in FIG. 795 (b)), the determination value determined to be a small hit of the second special symbol "500 to 599" is defined as the range (see 202pa3 in FIG. 795(b)). Of the 600 random numbers (counter values) that can be taken by the first per random number counter C1, the number of determination values (counter values) that are determined to be small hits is 100, so the second special symbol lottery is a small hit. The determined probability is 1/6 (100/600).

In this way, in the forty-sixth embodiment, it is possible to win a small prize only in the second special symbol lottery. Thereby, the lottery of the second special symbol is easily executed (the special figure 2 non-electric accessory 3065a is easily operated) In the time saving state (normal symbol high probability state), it becomes easy to execute the small winning game, It becomes easier for the game ball to enter the specific area (V gate) 3650v during the small winning game. Therefore, it becomes easy for a big winning game to occur again in a short period of time. As a result, the degree of advantage in the time-saving state can be increased, so that great joy can be given to the player in the time-saving state.

Furthermore, in the forty-sixth embodiment, when the time saving state is set, the special symbol lottery is configured to be easier to execute than when the normal state is set, and as the type of time saving state, A time reduction type (time reduction A) in which the first special symbol lottery is easier to execute than the second special symbol lottery (time reduction A), and a time reduction type (time reduction B) in which the second special symbol lottery is easier to execute than the first special symbol lottery, is configurable.

That is, when the time saving state is set and the time saving type (time saving B) in which the second special symbol lottery is easily executed is set, the player can be made to play the most advantageous game.

In the forty-sixth embodiment, as shown in FIG. 795(b), the content of the first random number table 202pa is defined so that the small winning in the first special symbol lottery cannot be won. Without limitation, it may be constructed so that a small hit can be won with a lower probability (for example, 1/600) than the probability of winning a small hit in the second special symbol lottery. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make even a player who is playing a game in a normal state in which the second special symbol lottery is difficult to execute experience a game in which a big winning game is executed based on a small winning game. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored with the game early.

Next, with reference to FIG. 796(a), the first winning type selection 17 table 202pb in the forty-sixth embodiment will be described. FIG. 796(a) is a diagram showing the defined contents of the first win type selection 17 table 202pb. As shown in FIG. 796(a), the first hit type selection 17 table 202pb is provided with three types of jackpots A17, B17, and C17 as the jackpot types of the first special symbol. One type of jackpot D17 is provided as the jackpot type.

As shown in FIG. 796(a), for the first special symbol, the value of the first winning type counter C2 is defined in the range of "0 to 19" in association with "jackpot A17". (See 202pb1 in FIG. 796(a)). This "jackpot A17" is a jackpot type (9-round time reduction B jackpot) in which the number of rounds is 9 and the time reduction state of the time reduction type B (time reduction B) is set as the game state after the jackpot game ends. Of the 100 counter values that can be taken by the first winning type counter C2, 20 counter values are "jackpot A17", so when the first special pattern lottery results in a jackpot, "jackpot A17" is determined. ratio is 20% (20/100).

As shown in FIG. 796(a), for the first special symbol, the value of the first winning type counter C2 is defined in the range of "20 to 29" in association with "jackpot B17". (See 202pb2 in Figure 796(a)). This "jackpot B17" is a jackpot type (4-round time reduction A1 jackpot) in which the number of rounds is 4 and the time reduction state of the time reduction type A1 (time reduction A1) is set as the game state after the jackpot game ends. Of the 100 counter values that can be taken by the first winning type counter C2, 10 counter values are "jackpot B17", so when the first special symbol lottery results in a jackpot, "jackpot B17" is determined. ratio is 10% (10/100).

In addition, with respect to the first special symbol, the value of the first hit type counter C2 is defined in the range of "30 to 99" in association with "jackpot C17" (202pb3 in FIG. 796 (a) reference). This "big win C17" is a big win type (4 rounds short time A2 big win) in which the number of rounds is 4 and a time saving state of short time type A2 (short time A2) is set as the game state after the end of the big win game. Of the 100 possible counter values of the first winning type counter C2, 70 counter values become "jackpot C17", so when the first special symbol lottery results in a jackpot, "jackpot C17" is determined. ratio is 70% (70/100).

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 193(a), for the second special symbol, the value of the first hit type counter C2 is defined in the range of "0 to 99" as corresponding to "jackpot D17". (see 202pb4 in Figure 796(a)). This "jackpot D17" is a jackpot type (9 rounds of time reduction B jackpot) in which the number of rounds is 9 and the time reduction state of time reduction type B (time reduction B) is set as the game state after the end of the jackpot game. Of the 100 possible counter values of the first winning type counter C2, 100 counter values become "jackpot D17", so when the second special symbol lottery results in a jackpot, "jackpot D17" is determined. ratio is 100% (100/100).

Thus, in the forty-sixth embodiment, when the first special symbol lottery results in a big hit, the ratio of executing the four-round jackpot game with a small number of rounds is 80%, and the number of winning d is 80%. The ratio of execution of 9 rounds of jackpot games with many numbers is 20%, and 9 rounds of jackpot games are always executed when a jackpot win is won in the lottery of the second special pattern. Therefore, in terms of the number of prize balls that can be acquired during the jackpot game, a game is executed that is more advantageous to the player when the second special symbol lottery wins the jackpot than when the first special symbol lottery wins the jackpot. It is designed to be easy. As a result, the player can be motivated to play the game with the aim of executing a more advantageous game (aiming at a time-saving state in which the second special symbol lottery is easily executed).

Further, in the 46th embodiment, even when a big win is won in the first special pattern lottery and when a big win is won in the second special pattern lottery, the time saving state is set after the big win game ends. Then, a time-saving state (time-saving state of time-saving A) is set in which after the end of the big winning game based on the second special symbol lottery is more advantageous to the player than after the end of the big winning game based on the first special symbol lottery. It is designed to be easy. Therefore, the second special symbol lottery is more advantageous to the player than the first special symbol lottery in terms of the degree of advantage of the game that can be executed after the end of the jackpot game.

Next, with reference to FIG. 796(b), details of the second winning random number 17 table 202pc will be described. FIG. 796(b) is a diagram showing the defined contents of the second winning random number 17 table 202pc. This second winning random number 17 table 202pc is a data table in which a determination value for determining whether or not a normal symbol lottery is winning (winning a normal symbol) is defined, and a second winning random number counter C4. is defined in association with the game state (probability state of normal symbols).

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 796(b), the normal state (low probability state) of normal symbols as the game state, that is, in the normal state, the value of the second winning random number counter C4 is "0". A determination value is defined, and in a high-probability state of normal symbols, that is, in a time-saving state, a hit determination value is defined for the value "0 to 204" of the second hit random number counter C4. That is, in the forty-sixth embodiment, if the normal state is set as the gaming state, the probability that the lottery result of the normal symbol lottery will win is 1/240, and if the time saving state is set, The lottery result of the normal pattern lottery is constructed so that the probability of winning is 205/240.

Next, with reference to FIG. 797(a), details of the small hit type selection 17 table 202pe will be described. Figure 797 (a) is a diagram showing the defined contents of the small hit type selection 17 table 202pe. This small hit type selection 17 table 202pe is a data table that defines a determination value for determining a small hit type when a small hit is won in a special symbol lottery (second special symbol lottery). The determination value of the winning type counter C5 is defined in association with each small winning type.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 797 (a), the value of the small hit type counter C5 is in the range of "0 to 49", "small hit A17" is defined in association with the small hit type (see 202pe1 in FIG. 796(a)). This "small hit A17" is a big hit game corresponding to "big hit E17" (10 rounds short time B big hit) based on the fact that the game ball entered the specific area (V gate) 3650v during the small hit game. It is a small hit type to be executed.

Of the 100 counter values that the value of the small hit type counter C5 can take, 50 counter values are "small hit A17", so when a special symbol lottery results in a small hit, "small hit A17" The ratio determined is 50% (50/100).

In addition, for the value of the small hit type counter C5 "50 to 99", "small hit B17" is defined in association with the small hit type (see 202pe2 in Figure 797 (b)). This "small hit B17" is a small hit type in which a part of the contents of the correspondingly defined big hit type is different from the above-described "small hit A17", and "small hit A17" A jackpot type "jackpot F17" having a larger number of rounds of the jackpot game than the jackpot type defined in .

Here, in the forty-sixth embodiment, only the second special symbol lottery is configured to win the small prize, and in the second special symbol lottery, the probability of winning the big prize is higher than the probability of winning the jackpot (1/200). It is configured to win (1/6), and in the time saving state in which the time saving B is set as the game state, the second special symbol lottery is configured to be easily executed. Then, as described above, when the big winning game is executed based on the small winning of the second special symbol lottery, the time saving state of the time saving B is set (easily set) after the big winning game is completed. Configure.

Therefore, in the forty-sixth embodiment, the player is made to play while aiming to set the time saving state of time saving B in which the second special symbol lottery is likely to be executed, and when the time saving state of time saving B is set Wins a small win in a second special symbol lottery to be executed, and executes a big win game based on the small win winning, thereby playing a game aiming at continuously setting the time saving state of the time saving B.例文帳に追加be able to.

Here, if you explain the flow of the game when you win a small hit in the second special symbol lottery, when you win a small hit in the second special symbol lottery, at that time the small hit type selection 17 table 202pe (Fig. 797 (a) reference) is determined (set) by referring to the small hit type. Then, a small winning game is executed based on the big winning type corresponding to the determined small winning type. That is, the small winning game in which the variable winning device 3650 is opened is the first round winning game in the set big winning type.

Then, in the small winning game (substantially, the first round of the big winning game), when the game ball passes through the specific area (V gate) 3650v, the right to execute the big winning game after the small winning game The right to execute the second and subsequent rounds) is obtained, and the jackpot game (substantially, the second round to the final round of the jackpot game) is executed. On the other hand, in the small winning game (substantially, the first round of the big winning game), if the game ball did not pass through the specific area (V gate) 3650v, the right to continue the big winning game could not be acquired. , the big winning game is not executed after the small winning game is finished.

In other words, the jackpot type (jackpot E17, jackpot F17) defined corresponding to each small hit type shown with reference to FIG. For the jackpot type (see FIG. 796 (a)), the number of rounds that is one more round is defined, but this one round is for the small hit game, and the number of rounds executed as the jackpot game is substantially the same. becomes.

In the forty-sixth embodiment, the small winning game is configured to be the first round of the big winning game, but the small winning game is not limited to this. , During the small winning game (specific period), by passing the game ball through the specific area (V gate 3650v), it may be configured so that the big winning game is executed. In this case, since there is no need to include the rounds of the small winning game in the number of rounds of the big winning game stipulated as the jackpot type, it is executed based on the fact that the special symbol lottery wins the jackpot and the special symbol lottery wins the small win. It is possible to set the same jackpot type as when the conditions for executing the jackpot game are established during the small hit game.

In addition, the technical idea used in the ninth embodiment described above, that is, a plurality of specific areas through which the game ball can pass during the small winning game is provided, and according to the type of the specific area through which the game ball actually passes , You may use the structure which can set a different jackpot classification. In this case, the jackpot type is not determined at the time when the small hit is won in the special symbol lottery, and the jackpot type is set when the game ball passes through any specific area, so the jackpot type is set. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the condition for executing the jackpot game is not established despite the setting, that is, a situation in which useless processing (processing for setting the jackpot type) is executed.

Furthermore, even if the special symbols are stopped and displayed in a combination to show that a small win has been won in the special symbol lottery, even if the display mode of the stopped and displayed special symbols is analyzed, this small Since it does not contain information related to the contents of the jackpot game (jackpot type) executed when the conditions for executing the jackpot game during the hit game are established (the game ball passes through a specific area), for example, a small By analyzing that the stop display mode of the special symbols stopped and displayed at the time of winning contains information indicating that it is a small win in which a big win game that is disadvantageous to the player can be executed, It is possible to prevent a game from being intentionally not performed in which a game ball is passed through a specific area during a small winning game.

Therefore, a fair game can be provided to a player who can analyze the stop display mode of the special symbols and a player who cannot analyze the stop display mode of the special symbols.

Next, with reference to FIG. 797(b), the detailed contents of the per normal pattern type selection 17 table 202pf will be described. Figure 797 (b) is a diagram showing the contents defined in the per normal figure type selection 17 table 202pf. This general pattern per type selection 17 table 202pf is a data table that is referred to when determining the general pattern per type that is set in the case of winning in the normal pattern lottery, and the set time reduction type and acquisition Different types per general figure (A per general figure, B per general figure) are defined in association with the value of the per general figure type counter C6.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 797 (b), the time saving type is "time saving A1", and the value of the acquired type counter C6 per normal figure is in the range of "0 to 98". It is configured so that "per normal map A" is determined as the type, and when the value of the acquired per normal pattern type counter C6 is "99", "per normal per pattern B" is determined as the per normal pattern type, saving time. The type is "time saving A2", and the value of the acquired per-universal figure type counter C6 is in the range of "0 to 96". When the value of the counter C6 is in the range of "97 to 99", it is configured so that "per normal pattern B" is determined as the per normal pattern type.

Furthermore, for the time saving type "time saving B", the value of the acquired normal figure per type counter C6 is in the range of "0 to 99", that is, regardless of the acquired normal figure per type counter C6 value, " It is configured so that the normal figure per B" is determined.

Here, the contents of the per-universal figure type will be explained. In this embodiment, the opening pattern of the normal electric accessory 3071 in the normal pattern per game is different between when the low probability state of the normal pattern is set and when the high probability state of the normal pattern is set. When the normal pattern low probability state is set, the normal electric accessory 3071 is in the open state in one normal pattern per game than when the normal pattern high probability state is set. It is configured to shorten the period of time. As a result, it is possible to make it easier for the game ball to enter the operating device 3070 in the high-probability state of the normal symbol than in the low-probability state of the normal symbol.

As described above, inside the actuating device 3070, there is a special figure 1 non-electric opening 3073a for operating the special figure 1 non-electric accessory 3064a attached to the right first entrance 3064 from the closed state to the open state And, since the special figure 2 non-electric opening 3073b for operating the special figure 2 non-electric accessory 3065a associated with the second entrance 3065 from the closed state to the open state is arranged, the operating device A lottery of special symbols is executed in a state in which it is easier to flow game balls into 3070 (high probability state of normal symbols) than in a state in which it is difficult to flow game balls into actuator 3070 (low probability state of normal symbols). Since the game state is such that it is easy to play, the game state is advantageous to the player.

Furthermore, in the 46th embodiment, in the time saving state in which the high probability state of the normal pattern is set, different time saving types can be set, and according to the set time saving type, the normal pattern lottery is won. It is configured so that the selection ratio of the type per normal figure determined when it is different. In the forty-sixth embodiment, as shown in FIG. 797(b), it is possible to select "per normal pattern A" and "per normal pattern B" as per general pattern types.

Then, when "per normal pattern A" is determined as the type per normal pattern and when "per normal pattern B" is determined, the normal electric accessory 3071 is in the open state in one per normal pattern game. Without changing the length of the period, the length of the period (opening period) from the execution of the normal figure winning game to the opening of the normal electric accessory 3071 is configured to be different. That is, even if any normal pattern per type is determined, it is easier to flow the game ball into the operating device 3070 than the normal pattern per game executed in the normal state (normal pattern low probability state) Although the normal pattern per game is executed, according to the determined per normal pattern type, it is configured to vary the inflow timing of the game ball to the operating device 3070, and by varying the inflow timing, the operating device 3070 It is possible to execute a general pattern per game in which the game ball that has flowed into is easy to enter the special figure 1 non-electric working port 3073a, and a general pattern per game in which it is easy to enter the special figure 2 non-electric working port 3073b. It consists of

Specifically, when "per normal pattern A" is set as the type per normal pattern, the movable piece 3072 is opened during the period in which the game ball flowing into the operating device 3070 can reach the movable piece 3072 The opening period of the game per normal pattern is set so that it becomes easy to become a state, and when "per normal pattern B" is set, the game ball flowing into the operating device 3070 can reach the movable piece 3072. , the opening period of the game per normal pattern is set so that the movable piece 3072 is likely to be in the closed state.

In this way, depending on the type of jackpot, a game state (time saving state) in which the special symbol lottery is easily executed and a game state (normal state) in which the special symbol lottery is more difficult to execute than the game state (time saving state) are provided. In addition, in a game state in which a special symbol lottery can be easily executed, a disadvantageous time reduction state in which a first special symbol lottery is easily executed and a second special symbol lottery are executed in accordance with a normal pattern winning type. It is possible to make the player interested in not only whether the time saving state is set but also the time saving type to be set by configuring the advantageous time saving state to make it easier to set. can.

In addition, as shown in Figure 797 (b), the second special symbol lottery is executed as a time saving type in which the disadvantageous time saving state that makes it easier to execute the first special symbol lottery during the time saving state is set (normal pattern The second special symbol lottery is executed rather than the time saving type "time saving A1" with a low probability (1/100) and the time saving type "A1" with a low probability (1/100). ) It is configured to be able to set a time saving type “time saving A2” with a high probability (3/100).

By configuring in this way, even when a disadvantageous time-saving state is set as a time-saving state, the number of times of the second special symbol lottery that can be executed during the disadvantageous time-saving state can be easily varied according to the time-saving type. Therefore, the player who is set in the disadvantageous time-saving state can be motivated to play the game in anticipation of more execution of the second special symbol lottery.

In addition, in the present 46th embodiment, as described above with reference to FIGS. 783 and 784, the game ball that has flowed into the operating device 3070 is entered into the special figure 1 non-electric opening 3073a as a game per normal figure. The game ball that flows into the operating device 3070 enters the special figure 2 non-electric opening 3073b (normal figure per B However, it is not limited to this, for example, within the first period of the open period in which the normal electric accessory 3071 is in the open state by the normal game When the game ball is made to flow into the operating device 3070, it is possible to enter the game ball into the special figure 2 non-electric opening 3073b, and the game ball is inserted in the second period different from the first period. When it is made to flow into the operating device 3070, it is possible to enter the game ball to the special figure 1 non-electric activation port 3073a. may be configured to be executable.

By configuring in this way, the non-electrical opening (special figure 1 non-electrical opening 3073a, special figure 2 non-electrical opening 3073b) that the game ball can enter according to the set normal figure per type is determined Instead, a non-electric opening (special figure 1 non- Since the electric opening 3073a, the special figure 2 non-electric opening 3073b) is determined, the player can select any non-electric opening (special figure 1 non-electric opening 3073a, special figure 2 non-electric opening 3073b) It is possible to make it difficult to grasp which special symbol lottery (first special symbol lottery, second special symbol lottery) is likely to be executed until the game ball enters the ball.

Next, with reference to FIG. 798, detailed contents of the variation pattern 17 table 202pd will be described. FIG. 798(a) is a diagram showing the contents of the variation pattern 17 table 202pd. As shown in FIG. 798(a), the variation pattern 17 table 202pd in the forty-sixth embodiment selects a variation pattern according to the lottery result when a special symbol lottery is executed in the normal state. In order to select a variation pattern according to the lottery result when a special symbol lottery is executed in a time saving state in which the normal variation pattern table 202pd1 to be referred to and the time saving A1 and the time saving B are set as the time saving type. The variation pattern table 202pd2 for the time saving A1 and B to be referred to and the time saving A1, B variation for the time saving A1 and B are referred when the lottery of the special symbols is executed in the time saving state in which the time saving A2 is set as the time saving type. It is configured at least with a variation pattern table 202pd3 for time reduction A2 that is defined so that a variation time longer than the pattern table 202pd2 is easily selected.

In addition, the normal fluctuation pattern table 202pd1 described above is the same as the data table referred to in order to select the fluctuation pattern in the state where the normal state is set in the ninth embodiment or the thirteenth embodiment. , Variation patterns of various variation times are stipulated based on the lottery results of special symbols and the value of the acquired variation type counter CS1, and the detailed contents are the same as those of the above-described ninth embodiment or thirteenth embodiment. Therefore, description thereof is omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 798(b), the details of the fluctuation pattern table 202pd2 for time reduction A1 and B described above will be described. FIG. 798(b) is a data table schematically showing the contents of this time saving A1, B variation pattern table 202pd2. In the time-saving A1, B variation pattern table 202pd2, various variation patterns are set corresponding to the lottery results of the special symbols, and the range of values of the variation type counter CS1 corresponds to each of the variation patterns. It is stipulated with

More specifically, as shown in FIG. 798 (b), the type of special design is the first special design (special design 1), regardless of the success determination result (hit, regardless of off), the variation type counter A short variation with a variation time of 1 second is associated with the CS1 value range of "0 to 149", and a middle variation with a variation time of 10 seconds is defined for the range of "150 to 196". Long fluctuation with a fluctuation time of 60 seconds is defined in association with the range of "197, 198". Therefore, in the time-saving state in which the time-saving types of time-saving A1 and time-saving B are set, the fluctuation time is 1 at a rate of about 75% (150/199) as a variation pattern for showing the result of the first special symbol lottery. Seconds, about 24% (47/199) set the variable time to 10 seconds, and about 1% (2/199) set the variable time to 60 seconds.

On the other hand, the type of the special design is the second special design (special design 2), regardless of the success/failure determination result (regardless of hit or miss), the value of the variation type counter CS1 is in the range of "0 to 189" , a short variation with a variation time of 5 seconds is defined in correspondence, and a middle variation with a variation time of 20 seconds is defined in correspondence with the range of "190 to 198". Therefore, in the time-saving state in which the time-saving types of time-saving A1 and time-saving B are set, the variation time is 5 at a rate of about 90% (190/199) as a variation pattern for showing the result of the second special symbol lottery. Seconds, with a rate of about 10% (9/199) the variation time is set to 20 seconds.

Next, with reference to FIG. 798(c), the details of the time-saving A2 variation pattern table 202pd3 described above will be described. FIG. 798(c) is a data table schematically showing the contents of this time-saving A2 variation pattern table 202pd3. In the time-saving A1, B variation pattern table 202pd2, various variation patterns are set corresponding to the lottery results of the special symbols, and the range of values of the variation type counter CS1 corresponds to each of the variation patterns. It is stipulated with

More specifically, as shown in Figure 798 (c), the type of the special design is the first special design (special design 1), regardless of the success or failure determination result (hit, regardless of off), the variation type counter A short variation with a variation time of 1 second is associated with the CS1 value range of "0 to 149", and a middle variation with a variation time of 10 seconds is defined for the range of "150 to 196". Long fluctuation with a fluctuation time of 60 seconds is defined in association with the range of "197, 198". Therefore, in the time-saving state in which the time-saving types of time-saving A1 and time-saving B are set, the fluctuation time is 1 at a rate of about 75% (150/199) as a variation pattern for showing the result of the first special symbol lottery. Seconds, about 24% (47/199) the variation time is set to 10 seconds, and about 1% (2/199) the variation time is set to 60 seconds.

On the other hand, the type of the special design is the second special design (special design 2), regardless of the success/failure determination result (regardless of hit or miss), the value of the variation type counter CS1 is in the range of "0 to 189" , a short variation with a variation time of 5 seconds is defined in correspondence, and a middle variation with a variation time of 20 seconds is defined in correspondence with the range of "190 to 198". Therefore, in the time-saving state in which the time-saving types of time-saving A1 and time-saving B are set, the variation time is 5 at a rate of about 90% (190/199) as a variation pattern for showing the result of the second special symbol lottery. Seconds, with a rate of about 10% (9/199) the variation time is set to 20 seconds.

As described above, in the 46th embodiment, in the situation where the time saving state is set, regardless of the time saving type of the second special symbol, the same variation pattern is set at the same rate As a variation pattern for indicating the lottery result of the first special symbol lottery, a longer variation time is selected when the time reduction A2 is set than when the time reduction A1 and B are set. It is structured so that it is easy to Therefore, when the time saving A is set, the time saving A2 makes it easier to increase the number of execution times of the normal symbol lottery in one execution period of the first special symbol variation than the time saving A1. In this respect as well, the time saving A2 is more advantageous to the player than the time saving A1.

The time saving 17 table 202pg is a data table that is referred to when determining the time saving end condition for ending the time saving state (to end the high probability state of the normal symbol), and the time saving type to be set (set Different time-saving end conditions are defined according to the jackpot type). This time saving 17 table 202pg is referred to when it is determined that the jackpot game ends (the ending period of the jackpot game ends) in the jackpot control process (see S1091 in FIG. 808) (S1212 in FIG. 808: Yes) , Time saving number of times corresponding to the determined time saving end condition (time saving end condition) is set.

Here, with reference to FIG. 799, the contents specified in the time saving provision 17 table 202pg will be described. FIG. 799 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the time saving provision 17 table 202pg. In the 46th embodiment, the time saving state is always set after the jackpot game ends, and different time saving types are set according to the set jackpot types. And, as shown in FIG. 799, time saving end conditions with different contents are defined corresponding to each time saving type.

Specifically, for the time-saving types "time-saving A1" and "time-saving A2", the time-saving medium counter 203g for measuring the number of executions of the first special symbol lottery or the second special symbol lottery is "99 A value of "99" is defined for the special figure 2 variation counter 203ea for measuring the number of executions of the second special symbol lottery. As the timing at which the time saving state ends based on the fact that the time saving end condition is satisfied, the "stop time" of the special symbol variation when the time saving end condition is satisfied is defined. In other words, when the time saving type "time saving A1" and "time saving A2" are set, the total number of executions of the first special symbol lottery (special figure 1 variation) and the second special symbol lottery (special figure 2 variation) (total The number of fluctuations) reaches 99 times, and the content of giving the time saving state is stipulated until the 99th special symbol fluctuation is stopped and displayed.

For the time saving type "time saving B", the value of "99" for the time saving medium counter 203g for measuring the number of executions of the first special symbol lottery or the second special symbol lottery, the second special symbol lottery A value of "5" is defined for the special figure 2 variation counter 203ea for measuring the number of executions. Then, as the timing at which the time saving state ends based on the time saving end condition being satisfied, the "stop time" of the special symbol variation when the time saving end condition is satisfied is defined. In other words, when the time saving type "time saving A1" and "time saving A2" are set, the total number of executions of the first special symbol lottery (special figure 1 variation) and the second special symbol lottery (special figure 2 variation) (total Number of times of variation) is 99 times, or until the special symbol variation is stopped and displayed when the second special symbol lottery (special figure 2 variation) reaches 5 times, the time saving state is given. ing.

As described above, the time saving types "time saving A1" and "time saving A2" are time saving states in which the first special symbol lottery is mainly executed, and the time saving type "time saving B" is mainly the second special symbol lottery. It is a time-saving state that is executed. In the forty-sixth embodiment, the second special symbol lottery has a higher possibility of executing a big winning game based on one lottery than the first special symbol lottery. Therefore, in order to suppress the execution of a game that is excessively advantageous to the player, that is, in order to suppress the execution of the second special symbol lottery excessively during a short period of time, For ``time saving B'' in which the second special symbol lottery is mainly executed, the time saving state is terminated when the number of execution times of the second special symbol lottery reaches ``5 times''. As a result, it is possible to prevent a game that is excessively advantageous to the player from being executed.

On the other hand, when the time-saving types "time-saving A1" and "time-saving A2" are set, the first special symbol lottery is mainly executed, and the probability that the second special symbol lottery is executed is low. , When the game is executed within the normal probability range, the number of executions of the second special symbol lottery does not exceed ``5 times'', and the first special symbol lottery (special figure 1 fluctuation) and the second special symbol lottery (Special figure 2 fluctuation) total execution number (total fluctuation number) reaches 99 times. Therefore, unlike the time-saving type "time-saving B", the time-saving end condition is not set as the time-saving end condition, which is established only based on the number of executions of the second special symbol lottery.

By configuring in this way, when the time saving types "A1" and "A2" are set, the special symbol lottery can be easily executed 99 times during the time saving state. In addition, even if the type per normal pattern (per normal pattern B) that makes it possible to execute the second special symbol lottery is set 5 times or more as the type per normal pattern that is set at the time of winning per normal pattern ( Even if the second special symbol lottery is executed 5 times or more), the time saving end condition is not satisfied, so in some cases, one time short period than when the time saving type "time saving B" is set It is possible to execute many second special symbol lotteries inside.

Therefore, normally, even if a disadvantageous time-saving state (time-saving type "time-saving A1", "time-saving A2") that is disadvantageous to the player is set, there is a possibility that it may be slightly advantageous to the player. Since it can be left, it is possible to motivate the player to play more second special symbol lotteries until the end of the time saving state.

In addition, in the 46th embodiment, as the time saving end condition, the time saving end condition that can be established based on the number of executions of the special symbol lottery is set, but not limited to this, based on the result of the special symbol lottery You may comprise so that a time saving end condition which can be materialized can be set. For example, it is possible to set a time-saving end condition that is established based on the fact that the result of the second special symbol lottery is a small hit, or the number of times the result of the first special symbol lottery becomes a specific loss is a predetermined number of times. You may set the time-saving end conditions satisfied when it reaches|attains. To make it difficult for a player to understand at what timing the time-saving end condition is established, since the time-saving state can be ended without corresponding to the number of execution times of the special symbol lottery by constructing in this way. can be done.

Further, in the forty-sixth embodiment, a maximum of two time-saving end conditions are set at once, and the time-saving state is terminated based on the fact that one of the time-saving end conditions is satisfied. Without limitation, three or more time saving end conditions may be set at once, or the time saving state may be ended based on the establishment of two or more time saving end conditions. Furthermore, the first time-saving end condition is first set, and when it is determined that the first time-saving end condition is satisfied, the second time-saving end condition is set, and it is determined that the second time-saving end condition is satisfied. You may comprise so that a time saving state may be complete|finished based on that. In this way, by configuring a plurality of time saving end conditions to be settable in chronological order, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand at what timing the time saving state ends. , it is possible to make it difficult to easily predict the content of the previous game, and it is possible to prevent the player from becoming bored with the game early.

Next, referring to FIG. 800, the configuration of the RAM 203 included in the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in the forty-sixth embodiment will be described. FIG. 800 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 203 in the forty-sixth embodiment. As shown in Figure 800, the configuration of the RAM203 in the forty-sixth embodiment is the configuration of the RAM203 in the ninth embodiment described above (see Figure 194) with the addition of a special figure 2 variation counter 203pa is different. Since other configurations are the same as those of the RAM 203 in the ninth embodiment, detailed description thereof will be omitted here.

The small hit flag 203ea is a flag indicating whether or not the small hit is in progress. If the small hit medium flag 203ea is on, it means that the small hit is in progress, and if it is off, it means that the small hit is not in progress. The small hit medium flag 203ea is set to ON when a special symbol lottery results in a small hit and the small hit starts. In addition, it is set to OFF at the end of the small hit. In the special symbol variation process 13, this small hitting medium flag 203ea is referred to, and it is determined whether or not the small hitting is in progress. In addition, about the detailed content of flag 203ea in a small hit, since it is the same as the content mentioned above in 9th Embodiment, the description is abbreviate|omitted.

The jackpot type storage area 203eb is a storage area for temporarily storing data indicating the jackpot type when a jackpot is won. In the jackpot type storage area 203eb, data corresponding to the jackpot type is stored when a jackpot is won in a special symbol lottery. In addition, if a special pattern lottery results in a small hit, and the game ball enters the V winning opening (specific area) in the small hit, the big hit type corresponding to the small hit type (small Data indicating the jackpot type corresponding to the hit type) is stored. The data stored in the jackpot type storage area 203eb is held until the end timing of the winning jackpot, and is used to set the game state after the jackpot ends according to the jackpot type. In addition, about the detailed content of jackpot classification storage area 203eb, since it is the same as the content mentioned above in 9th Embodiment, the description is abbreviate|omitted. In addition, the timing of determining the jackpot type corresponding to the small hit type may be determined when the small hit is won (when the small hit type is set), or when the game ball enters the V winning opening (specific area). It may be determined at the point in time, or may be determined at the timing when the small winning game is finished.

The V passing flag 203ec indicates whether or not the game ball has entered the V winning opening (specific area) during execution of the small winning game (whether or not it is confirmed that the big winning will be after the small winning is completed). ) is a flag for indicating If the V passing flag 203ec is turned on at the end of the small win, the start of the big win is set at the end of the small win, while if the V passing flag 203ec is off, the small win is made without starting the big win. is terminated. The initial value of the V passage flag 203ec is set to OFF, and is set to ON when the game ball wins the V winning opening (specific area) during execution of the small winning game. In addition, it is set to OFF after setting the start of a big hit based on the entry of a game ball into the V winning hole (specific area). Note that the detailed contents of the V passage flag 203ec are the same as those described above in the ninth embodiment, so the description thereof will be omitted. Here, in the forty-sixth embodiment, when the small winning game ends, the setting state of the V passage flag 203ec is determined, and it is configured to determine whether or not to execute the big winning game after the small winning game ends. As a termination condition of this small winning game, when a predetermined small winning game period has elapsed, or when the number of game balls winning the variable winning device 3650 during the small winning game reaches a predetermined number However, without being limited to this, the small winning game may be ended based on the game ball entering the V winning opening (specific area). By constructing in this way, it is possible to quickly end the small winning game and execute the big winning game by quickly entering the game ball into the V winning opening (specific area) during the small winning game. Therefore, the player who wants to play the game efficiently can be motivated to play the game.

The special figure 2 variation counter 203pa is a counter for measuring the number of variations of the second special symbol variation during the time saving state, and the counter based on the fact that the second special symbol variation is executed during the time saving state. The value is updated. The value of this special figure 2 time saving number counter 203pa is set to a value corresponding to the type of time saving state set at the end of the jackpot game (S1294 in FIG. 808), and the second special symbol variation is executed during the time saving state. The counter value is updated (decremented) each time it is performed (S40254 in FIG. 804). Then, the counter value after the update is referenced when determining whether or not to end the time saving state (see S40258 in FIG. 804), and when the counter value becomes 0, the end condition of the time saving state is met. be discriminated. In addition, it is cleared to 0 when other time-saving end conditions are established (when the jackpot is won, the counter value of the time-saving counter 203i becomes 0).

Next, referring to FIG. 801(a), the configuration of the ROM 222 provided in the audio lamp control device 113 in the forty-sixth embodiment will be described. FIG. 801(a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM 222 in the forty-sixth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 801(a), the configuration of the ROM 222 in the forty-sixth embodiment has an expectation selection table 222pa added to the configuration of the ROM 222 in the ninth embodiment (see FIG. 193(a)). The only difference is that This expectation degree selection table 222pa is, in the state in which the time saving type "time saving A", that is, the time saving state in which the first special symbol lottery is mainly executed is set, the second special symbol lottery is relatively difficult to be executed "time saving A1” is set or relatively easy to execute “time saving A2” is set to the player. This is a data table that is referenced to determine the degree of expectation that

Here, as described above, in the forty-sixth embodiment, "time saving A" can be set as a time saving state in which the first special symbol lottery is more likely to be executed than the second special symbol lottery. Furthermore, as "time saving A", "time saving A1" in which the second special symbol lottery is relatively difficult to be executed is set, or "time saving A2" in which the second special symbol lottery is relatively easy to be executed can be set. Then, when "time saving A" is set, as described above with reference to FIGS. 789 and 790, any time saving type (time saving A1, time saving A2) is set common mode It is configured to execute production (time saving A mode).

By constructing in this way, the enjoyment of predicting whether the set time-saving type is 'time-saving A1' or 'time-saving A2' is provided to the player who has executed the effect of the time-saving A mode. can do. In addition, as shown in FIG. 791 (b), in the state in which the production of the time saving A mode is being executed, since it is configured to be able to execute the mode suggestion production, in the state in which the production of the time saving A mode is being executed , It is possible to provide an element for predicting the type of time reduction (time reduction A1, time reduction A2) actually set for the player.

Here, the details of the expectation level selection table 222pa will be described with reference to FIG. 801(b). FIG. 801(b) is a diagram showing the defined contents of the expectation level selection table 222pa. As shown in FIG. 801 (b), this expectation level selection table 222pa is, for each time reduction type, the type of expectation level (expectation level in which the time reduction type of time reduction A2 is set) and the value of the production lottery counter 223ea are defined in association with the range. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 801 (b), for the time saving type "time saving A1" (time saving type with a relatively low probability that the second special symbol lottery will be executed among the time saving A), the production The value of the lottery counter 223ea is defined in association with the production mode for high expectations in the range of "0 to 4", and the production mode for medium expectations is defined in association with the range of "5 to 49", The range of "50 to 99" is defined in association with the low-expectation performance mode.

Since the production lottery counter 223ea can take 100 values of "0 to 99", the production mode for high expectation, medium expectation, and low expectation is determined when the time saving type A1 is set. are 5% (5/100), 45% (45/100), and 50% (50/100), respectively.

Further, as shown in FIG. 801 (b), for the time saving type "time saving A2" (time saving type with a relatively high probability that the second special symbol lottery is executed among the time saving A), the effect lottery counter 223ea The value of "0 to 19" is defined in association with the production mode for high expectations, and the production mode for medium expectations (not shown) is defined in the range of "20 to 79". , and the range of "80 to 99" is defined in association with the effect mode for low expectations.

Since the production lottery counter 223eka can take 100 values from '0 to 99', the production mode for high expectation, medium expectation and low expectation is determined when time saving A2 is reached. The proportions are 20% (20/100), 60% (60/100) and 20% (20/100) respectively. From these stipulations, it can be said that the production mode for the high expectation level is more likely to be selected when the time reduction A2 is set, but is less likely to be selected when the time reduction A1 is set. In addition, the production mode for the middle expectation degree is selected at a relatively high rate regardless of whether the time reduction A1 or the time reduction A2 is set, and the production mode for the low expectation degree is set to the time reduction A2. In this case, it is difficult to be selected, and it is likely to be selected when the time saving A1 is selected. Therefore, when the production mode for the high expectation degree is executed, while it is possible to suggest that there is a high possibility that the set time reduction type is the time reduction A2, for the low expectation degree When the production mode is executed, it is possible to suggest that the set time saving type is likely to be the working time saving A1. In addition, when the performance mode for medium expectation level is executed, it is possible to suggest that the set time saving type may be any of time saving A1 and time saving A2. As a result, the player can predict the execution expectation degree of the second special symbol lottery during the time saving state according to the expectation degree suggested by the performance mode, so that the player's interest in the game is improved. be able to.

In addition, although the detailed contents will be described later with reference to FIG. 820, in the forty-sixth embodiment, the expectation level The selection table 222pa is configured to determine the expectation level type, but this is not the only option. Whenever the first special symbol lottery is executed, a lottery is made to determine whether the expectation level type is to be determined. A lottery means may be provided to determine the expectation level classification when the result of the lottery by the lottery means determines the expectation level classification. By configuring in this way, the number of executions of the mode suggestion performance executed during one time saving state (time saving state in which time saving A is set) can be varied according to the lottery result of the lottery means, The player's willingness to play can be increased by allowing the player to play the game while expecting the execution of the mode suggestion performance, compared with the configuration in which the expectation degree type is determined each time the first special symbol variation is executed. can increase

In this case, the lottery executed by the lottery means (the lottery for determining whether to determine the type of expectation level) may be configured to be executed completely independently regardless of other game situations, When the gaming situation satisfies a predetermined condition, the lottery may be more likely to be executed by the lottery means than when the predetermined condition is not satisfied. (For example, when the number of remaining short working hours is 10 times), it may be configured such that the lottery by the lottery means is more likely to be executed than outside the predetermined period.

In addition, a measurement means (for example, a secondary special figure 2 variation counter 223pb) capable of measuring the number of executions of the second special symbol lottery executed during the time saving A (the number of special figure 2 fluctuations) is provided, and measurement by the measurement means Based on the result, when the second special symbol lottery is executed more than a predetermined number of times during the time saving A, regardless of the time saving type actually set, the expectation degree that "time saving A2" is set In order to increase the expectation level, it may be configured such that the expectation level type of the high expectation level is likely to be selected. By configuring in this way, in addition to the case where "time saving A2" is actually set, "time saving A1" is set, and the second special symbol lottery is executed more than a predetermined number of times. It is possible to provide the player with a mode suggesting effect in which there is a high possibility that "shortening of working hours A2" is set even in the state where the player is on. Therefore, since it is possible to provide a mode suggestive effect that is likely to have set "time reduction A2" at a higher rate than the rate at which "time reduction A2" is actually selected, "time reduction A2" is set. can raise expectations of

In this way, when it is possible to determine the production mode of the mode suggestion production based on the actually set time saving type and the number of executions of the second special symbol lottery that is actually executed, other Also, for example, in a state where the time saving A2 is set, if the number of executions of the second special symbol lottery actually executed is small, that is, for the design value defined as the execution probability of the second special symbol lottery Therefore, if the execution probability of the second special symbol lottery that is actually executed is deviated, it is possible to execute a mode suggestive effect with a high possibility that "time saving A1" is set. good.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to suppress the fact that the number of executions of the second special symbol lottery is small and the player's willingness to play is lowered despite the "time saving A2" being set. . In addition, in the state where "time saving A2" is set, in a state where the number of executions of the second special symbol lottery is higher than the design value, "time saving A1" is likely to be set. It may be configured such that a suggestive effect is executed. In this case, the player can be made to think that the second special symbol lottery is frequently executed despite the fact that the second special symbol lottery is less likely to be executed "time saving A1" is set. can give satisfaction to

Further, as shown in FIG. 801(b), in the forty-sixth embodiment, any time reduction type (time reduction A1, time reduction A) is set as the production mode selected as the mode suggestion production. Although the production mode (expectation degree type "low expectation degree, medium expectation degree, high expectation degree") is used, the time reduction type (time reduction A2) that is advantageous to the player is set without being limited to this. A production mode (for example, a fixed production mode) that can be selected only when the player is present may be provided. By configuring in this way, the player can be informed that the most advantageous time-saving type in the time-saving A mode is set by executing the mode-suggesting effect of the fixed effect mode, A player can play a game with peace of mind.

Next, with reference to FIG. 802, the configuration of the RAM 223 provided in the audio lamp control device 113 in the forty-sixth embodiment will be described. FIG. 802 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 223. As shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 802, the RAM 223 in the forty-sixth embodiment is different from the configuration of the RAM 223 in the ninth embodiment described above (see FIG. 196). The difference is that special figure 1 non-electric open flag 223pc, special figure 2 non-electric open flag 223pd, initial fluctuation standby flag 223pe, and effect clear flag 223pf are added.

The effect lottery counter 223ea is a counter used to select one effect mode (expectation degree type) from the expectation degree selection table 222pa described above. The value of the effect lottery counter 223ea is updated within the range of "0 to 99". When selecting the effect mode (expectation type) of the special small hit effect, the random number (counter value) defined in the expectation selection table 222ea is compared with the value of the effect lottery counter 223ea, and the corresponding 1 is selected. This effect lottery counter 223ea is updated, for example, every 1 ms during the main process 17 (see FIG. 807).

The remaining time reduction counter 223pa is a counter for measuring the remaining time reduction number of times during the time reduction state.

Dependent special figure 2 fluctuation counter 223pb is a counter for measuring the number of fluctuations of the second special symbol fluctuation during the time saving state.

The special figure 1 non-electric opening flag 223pc is a flag for indicating that the special figure 1 non-electric accessory 3064a is operating. It is a flag that is set to ON when the special figure 1 non-electric accessory 3064a is in the open state (in operation) and is set to OFF in the case of the closed state (not in operation).

The special figure 2 non-electric opening flag 223pd is a flag for indicating that the special figure 2 non-electric accessory 3065a is operating. It is a flag that is set to ON when the special figure 2 non-electric accessary product 3065a is in the open state (in operation) and is set to OFF in the case of the closed state (not in operation).

The initial variation standby flag 223pe is a flag for indicating a period from the end of the big win game to the execution of the first special symbol variation, and is set to ON when the big win game ends. After the end of the jackpot game, it is set to OFF when the first special symbol variation is executed. In other words, the flag is set to ON from the end of the jackpot game to the execution of the first special symbol variation.

This initial fluctuation standby flag 223pe is referred to when determining the period for continuously displaying the game explanation screen (see FIG. 787(b)) displayed at the end of the jackpot game.

In addition, in this embodiment, regardless of the special symbol type to be executed after the end of the jackpot game, when the first special symbol lottery is executed, the initial fluctuation waiting flag 223pe is set to OFF. However, without being limited to this, for example, if the time saving type of the time saving state set after the end of the jackpot game is "time saving A", until the first first special symbol variation is executed, "time saving B" In the case of , the initial variation standby flag 223pe may be set to ON until the first second special symbol variation is executed. That is, depending on the time saving type of the time saving state to be set, it may be configured to vary the special symbol variation type for setting the initial variation standby flag 223pe to OFF, and it is mainly executed by the time saving type to be set The initial variation standby flag 223pe may be set to ON until the special symbol variation corresponding to the special symbol type is executed.

The effect clear flag 223pf is a flag indicating that the execution of the effect indicating that the normal pattern per A was won during the time reduction A mode (time reduction A), and the normal pattern per process ( In FIG. 816 S54413 reference), in a state in which the time-saving types A1 and A2 are set (S54551: Yes), the general figure per A is elected (S54553: Yes), and the special figure 2 non-electric auditors 3065a are in an open state If it is determined (S54554: No), that is, the timing of winning per normal figure per normal figure A during the time saving A mode (time saving A) is during operation of the special figure 2 non-electric accessory 3065a In the case, if you cancel the effect of the treasure box opening effect (see Figure 791 (a)) when the special figure 2 is opened, it is set to ON.

Then, in the non-electric situation management process (see S54102 in FIG. 823), when the special figure 2 non-electric accessory 3065a is operated to the closed state (S55512), the setting status of the flag is determined (S55513), turned on If it is determined that it is set (S55513: Yes), it is set to off. By determining the setting state of the effect clear flag 223pf, it is possible to cancel various effects for indicating that the second special symbol lottery is likely to be executed.

<Regarding the control processing of the main controller in the 46th embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 803 to 810, the contents of the control processing of main controller 110 in the forty-sixth embodiment will be described. In the forty-sixth embodiment, the special symbol variation processing 17 (see S191 in FIG. 803) is performed instead of the special symbol variation processing 13 for the control processing contents of the main controller 110 in the ninth embodiment described above. Time saving update process 17 (see S40201 in FIG. 804) instead of process 13, special symbol change start process 17 (see S292 in FIG. 805) instead of special symbol change start process 13, main process instead of main process 13 17 (see FIG. 807), replaces the jackpot control processing 13 with the jackpot control processing 17 (see S1091 in FIG. 808), replaces the small hit control processing 13 with the small hit control processing 17 (see S1092 in FIG. 809), The difference is that the V passage detection processing 17 (see FIG. 810) is executed instead of the V passage detection processing 13, and the rest is the same. Identical contents are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed descriptions thereof are omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 803, the detailed contents of the special symbol variation process 17 (S191) will be described. FIG. 803 is a flow chart showing the contents of the special symbol variation process 17 (S191). In this special symbol variation process 17 (S191), in contrast to the above-described special symbol variation process 13 (see S141 in FIG. 197), when the lottery result is a big hit (S218: Yes), the counter is reset to 0. The type of the time-saving counter 203i only (see S263 in FIG. 197) to two of the time-saving counter 203i and the special figure 2 fluctuation counter 203pa (see S293 in FIG. 803), and the lottery result is It is different in that the content of the time saving update process executed when it is not a jackpot winning (no winning) (S218: No) is changed to the time saving update process 17 (S40201), and the other is the same. Description is omitted.

Next, with reference to FIG. 804, the contents of the time saving update process (S40201) will be described. Drawing 801 is the flow chart which showed the contents of time saving update processing (S40201). In this time saving update process (S40201), it is determined based on the value of the time saving counter 203i that it is in the time saving state, and when it is determined that it is in the time saving state, the set time saving end condition is established. Processing for updating elements for (time saving medium counter 203i, each value of special figure 2 fluctuation counter 203pa), and determination of whether to end the time saving state based on the value of each element after updating The process to do is executed.

When the time saving update process (S40201) is executed, first, it is determined whether the value of the time saving counter 203i is greater than 0 (whether the time saving state is set) (S40251), and it is determined that it is not greater than 0 If so (S40251: No), this process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that it is greater than 0 (S40251: Yes), the value of the counter 203i during time saving is subtracted by 1 (S40252), and then the special figure fluctuation of this time is the second special symbol (special figure 2). It is determined whether (S40253), if it is determined that it is a special figure 2 (S40253: Yes), 1 is subtracted from the value of the special figure 2 variation counter 203pa (S40254), various counters (time saving medium counter 203i, special A remaining time reduction number command indicating the value of the fluctuation number counter 203pa) in FIG. 2 is set (S40255). In addition, in the processing of S40253, if it is determined that this special figure variation is not special figure 2 (S40253: No), skip the processing of S40254 and proceed to the processing of S40255.

When the processing of S40255 is completed, next, it is determined whether the value of the counter 203i during time saving is 0 (S40256), and if it is 0, that is, by this update process, the value of the counter 203i during time saving is set to 0 If it is determined that (S40256: Yes), the value of the special figure 2 fluctuation counter 203pa is reset to 0 (S40257), the game state is set to the normal state (S40260), and the state command indicating the normal state is set (S40261), and the process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S40256, if it is determined that the value of the counter 203i during time saving is not 0 (S40256: No), then it is determined whether the value of the special figure 2 fluctuation counter 203pa is 0 (S40258 ), when it is determined to be 0 (S40258: yes), the value of the time saving counter 203i is reset to 0 (S40259), and the process proceeds to S40260. In addition, in the processing of S40258, also when it is determined that the value of the special figure 2 fluctuation counter 203pa is not 0 (S40258: No), the process proceeds to S40260.

Next, with reference to FIG. 805, the contents of the special symbol variation start process 17 (S292) will be described. FIG. 805 is a flow chart showing the contents of the special symbol variation start process 17 (S292). This special symbol variation start process 17 (S292) differs from the above-described special symbol variation start process 13 (see S262 in FIG. 198) in that the process of S391 is executed instead of the processes of S302 to S304. Other than that, they are identical. The same reference numerals are assigned to the same contents, and detailed description thereof is omitted.

That is, in the above-described ninth embodiment, the process (S302 to S304) for executing the special symbol lottery propriety determination according to the probability state of the special symbol (low probability state, high probability state) is executed. Therefore, in the forty-sixth embodiment, since the high probability state of the special symbol is not set, the process of acquiring the lottery result is executed based on the first winning random number table (S391).

FIG. 806 is a flow chart showing the details of the small winning start process (S266) executed by the pachinko machine 10 in the forty-sixth embodiment. In the small winning start processing (S266), processing for storing the large winning type corresponding to the small winning type set when the small winning is won in the large winning type storage area 203eb, and processing for starting the small winning game. is executed. The detailed contents are the same as the small winning start process (see S266 in FIG. 199) in the ninth embodiment described above, so detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Next, the contents of main processing 17 will be described with reference to FIG. 807 is a flowchart showing the contents of main processing 17. FIG. This main processing 17 replaces the jackpot control processing 13 (S1071 in FIG. 201) with respect to the main processing 13 (see FIG. 201) in the ninth embodiment described above, and replaces the jackpot control processing 17 (S1091 in FIG. 807). They differ in their execution, but are otherwise identical. The same processing contents are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Here, with reference to FIG. 808, the contents of the jackpot control process 17 (S1091) will be described. FIG. 808 is a flow chart showing the contents of the jackpot control process 17 (S1091). In this jackpot control process 17 (S1091), the content of the control process executed at the end timing of the ending effect (end timing of the ending period) is different from the above-described jackpot control process 13 (see S1072 in FIG. 203). There is a difference.

In the jackpot control process 17 (S1091), first, it is determined whether the jackpot start flag 203k is ON (ie, whether the jackpot start is set) (S1201). In the process of S1201, when it is determined that the jackpot start flag 203k is ON (S1201: Yes), an opening command for notifying the start of the jackpot opening period is set (S1202). The opening command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is executed by the MPU 201 during the external output processing (S1001) of the main processing (see FIG. 30). It is sent towards device 113 . Upon receiving the opening command, the audio lamp control device 113 transmits a display opening command to the display control device 114 . When the display opening command is received by the display control device 114, the third pattern display device 81 starts the opening effect. In the forty-sixth embodiment, the opening period is set to 0.1 seconds, and the first round is started (opening/closing door 3650f1 is opened) with almost no time difference after the big win game is executed. After the process of S1202, while setting the flag 203m in a big hit to ON, the big-hit start flag 203k is set to OFF (S1203), and this process is complete|finished.

On the other hand, in the process of S1201, when it is determined that the big hit flag 203j is off (S1201: No), it is determined whether the big hit flag 203m is on (whether the special symbol is in the middle of a big hit) (S1204). . In the process of S1204, when it is determined that the jackpot flag 203m is off (the special symbol jackpot is not in progress) (S1204: No), this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S1204, if it is determined that the big hit flag 203m is ON (S1204: Yes), it is determined whether it is the start timing of a new round (S1205), and whether it is the start timing of a new round If (S1205: Yes), the opening of the specific winning opening corresponding to the number of rounds is set (S1206). When the process of S1206 is finished, next, a round number command indicating the number of rounds to be newly started is set (S1207), and this process is finished. The round number command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is output during the external output processing (S1001) of the main processing 17 (see FIG. 807) executed by the MPU 201. It is sent to the lamp control device 113 . When the audio ramp controller 113 receives the round number command, it extracts the round number from the round number command. Then, a display round number command corresponding to the extracted round number is transmitted to the display control device 114 . When the display round number command is received by the display control device 114, the third pattern display device 81 starts a new round effect.

On the other hand, in the process of S1205, if it is determined that it is not time to start a new round (S1205: No), it is determined whether the condition for closing the specific winning opening (specific winning opening 3650a) is satisfied (S1208). Specifically, if the current round period is one round, a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) has passed since the specific winning opening 3650a was opened, or 10 or more prizes have been won in the specific winning opening 3650a. is detected, it is determined that the closing condition is established.

In the processing of S1208, if it is determined that the condition for closing the specific winning opening (specific winning opening 3650a) is met (S1208: Yes), the specific winning opening (specific winning opening 3650a) set in the open state is closed. is set (S1209), and the process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S1208, when it is determined that the condition for closing the specific winning opening is not satisfied (S1208: No), it is determined whether it is time to start the ending effect (S1210). Specifically, when all the rounds of the special game state in which a larger amount of prize balls are paid out than in the normal state are completed, it is determined that it is time to start the ending effect.

In the process of S1210, when it is determined that it is time to start the ending effect (S1210: Yes), the ending command is set (S1211), and this process ends. The ending command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is executed by the MPU 201 during the external output processing (S1001) of the main processing (see FIG. 30). It is sent towards device 113 . When receiving the ending command, the audio lamp control device 113 transmits a display ending command to the display control device 114 . When the display control device 114 receives the display ending command, the third symbol display device 81 starts the ending effect. Specifically, an ending including at least a game explanation screen corresponding to the time saving type set after the end of the jackpot game, and a game result screen for notifying the player of the privilege (prize ball) obtained during the jackpot game. A performance is performed.

In the process of S1210, if it is determined that it is not the start timing of the ending effect (S1210: No), then it is determined whether it is the end timing of the ending effect (S1212), and it is determined that it is not the end time of the ending effect. If so (S1212: No), this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S1212, if it is determined that it is the end timing of the ending effect (S1212: Yes), the current jackpot type is read from the jackpot type storage area 203eb (S1291), and the time saving type corresponding to the read jackpot type (S1292), to determine the time saving end condition corresponding to the specified time saving type with reference to the time saving grant 17 table 202pg (S1293), the value of the time saving medium counter 203i, the value of the special figure 2 variation counter 203pa , set the value determined in the processing of S1293 (S1294), set a state command corresponding to the game state after the big win (after the end of the big win game) (S1216), set the end of the big win (S1217), End this process.

In the forty-sixth embodiment, the state command set in the process of S1216 includes information for indicating that the game state set after the end of the jackpot game is a time saving state, and the time saving type is "time saving A (mainly Information indicating which of the time-saving state in which the first special symbol lottery is executed), “time-saving B (mainly time-saving state in which the second special symbol lottery is executed)”, and a small classification of “time-saving A” At least information indicating which of the type "time reduction A1 (second special symbol lottery is difficult to execute)" and "time reduction A2 (second special symbol lottery is likely to be executed)" is included. . Furthermore, the time saving end condition corresponding to the time saving state to be set, ie, the value of the time saving counter 203i, the information corresponding to the value set in the process of S1294 as the value of the special figure 2 fluctuation counter 203pa is included.

By setting such a state command and configuring it to be output to the audio lamp control device 113, it is possible to manage detailed information regarding the time saving state set on the audio lamp control device 113 side. Therefore, it is possible to execute an effect according to the type of the time saving state and the progress of the game.

Next, with reference to FIG. 809, the contents of the small winning control process 17 (S1092) will be described. FIG. 809 is a flow chart showing the contents of the small winning control process 17 (S1092). In this small hit control processing 17 (S1092), in place of the V passage detection processing (S1326) for the small hit control processing 13 (see S1072 in FIG. 203) in the ninth embodiment described above, the V passage detection processing 17 ( S1391) is executed, and the rest is the same. The same reference numerals are given to the same contents, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Here, the contents of the V passage detection process 17 (S1391) executed in the small hit control process 17 (S1092) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 810 is a flow chart showing the contents of the V passage detection process 17 (S1391). This V passage detection process 17 (S1391) differs from the above-described V passage detection process (see S1625 in FIG. 204) in that the processes of S1605 and S1606 are deleted, and otherwise the same processes are executed. be. The same processing contents are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed descriptions thereof are omitted.

That is, in the ninth embodiment described above, a plurality of specific areas through which the game ball can pass are provided during the small winning game, and the content of the big winning game is changed according to the type of the specific area through which the game ball actually passes. While the processing is executed, in the 46th embodiment, the specific area through which the game ball can pass during the small winning game uses the configuration of one (V winning opening 3650v). making it different. Also in the forty-sixth embodiment, a plurality of types of specific areas may be provided through which a game ball can pass (enter a ball) during a small winning game.

<Regarding the control process of the sound lamp control device in the forty-sixth embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 811 to 824, characteristic contents among the contents of the control processing executed by the MPU 221 of the sound ramp control device 113 in the forty-sixth embodiment will be described. It should be noted that detailed description of the same control processing contents as those executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 in the ninth embodiment described above will be omitted. Further, among the control processes having the same content as the control processing executed by the MPU 221 of the sound ramp control device 113 in the ninth embodiment described above, some of the control processes are denoted by different reference numerals for convenience of explanation. , and detailed descriptions of the same contents are omitted.

First, the contents of main processing 17 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 811 is a flow chart showing the contents of main processing 17 executed by MPU 221 of sound lamp control device 113 . In this main processing 17, liquid crystal presentation execution management processing 17 (S54101) is replaced with command determination processing in place of liquid crystal presentation execution management processing with respect to the main processing in the ninth embodiment (first embodiment) described above. The command determination process 17 (S54112) is different in that the variable display setting process 17 (S54113) is executed instead of the variable display setting process 13, and the non-power status management process (S54102) is newly executed. are identical.

FIG. 812 is a flow chart showing the contents of command determination processing 17 (S54112). In this command determination process 17 (S54112), if it is determined that a state command has been received (S4309: Yes) in the command determination process described above, the state command process 17 is executed (S54301). When it is determined that the command has been received (S4313: Yes), the point of executing the per-related processing 17 (S54302) and when it is determined that the time-saving related command has been received (54303: Yes), the time-saving related processing 17 (S54304) to be executed, and when it is determined that the normal pattern fluctuation related command is received (S54305: Yes), the normal pattern fluctuation related processing 17 is executed (S54306) is different in that it executes the processing. Other than that, they are identical.

Here, the content of the state command process 17 (S54301) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 813 is a flow chart showing the contents of state command processing 17 (S54301). This state command process 17 (S54301) is a process executed when a state command is included in the command received from the main controller 110, and is the game state set by the main controller 110. Processing for setting the production mode based on and processing for setting the remaining time reduction number of times (time reduction end condition) when the time reduction state is set are executed.

When the state command process 17 (S54301) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not a command indicating the game state has been received (S54351). (S54352) and proceeds to S54353. Also, if it is determined that it has not been received (S54351: No), then it is determined whether a command indicating the setting of the number of times of working hours has been received (S54353), and if it is determined that it has been received (S54353: Yes) , Reads the time saving type stored in the gaming state storage area 223i (S54354), determines whether the read time saving type is "time saving B" (S54355), and determines that it is "time saving B" ( S54355: Yes), "5" is set to the value of the remaining time reduction counter 223pa, and the process proceeds to S54358. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is not "time reduction B" ("time reduction A") (S54355: No), the value of the remaining time reduction counter 223pa is set to 99 (S54357), and the process proceeds to S54358.

That is, the value of the remaining time reduction counter 223pa is a value corresponding to the time reduction end condition that is likely to be satisfied among the plurality of time reduction end conditions determined by referring to the time reduction provision 17 table 202pg in the main control device 110. is executed (S54356, S54357). Here, the value of the set remaining time reduction counter 223pa is displayed as the remaining time reduction number of the small area Dm6 displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 when the time reduction state is set.

In this way, in the pachinko machine 10 capable of setting the time-saving state in which the type of the special symbol lottery to be mainly executed is different, the value of the remaining time-saving number counter 223pa is the element for establishing the time-saving end condition that is likely to be established mainly. By configuring to set, the processing for updating and displaying the number of times of remaining short time may be executed based on the update content of the value of the number of times of short time remaining counter 223pa. processing can be simplified.

In the processing of S54358, processing corresponding to other information included in the status command is executed (S54358), and this processing ends.

Next, referring to FIG. 814, the content of the game state update process (S54352) will be described. FIG. 814 is a flow chart showing the contents of the game state update process (S54352). This game state update process (S54352) is a process executed when a command indicating the game state is received in the state command process 17 (see S54301 in FIG. 813). A process based on the game state is executed.

When the game state update process (S54352) is executed, first, based on the state command received this time, information for indicating the current game state is stored in the game state storage area 223i (S4401), and the state shifts to the normal state. It is determined whether or not (S54401). In the processing of S54401, if it is determined that the state has shifted to the normal state, that is, if it is determined that the command indicating the normal state is included in the state command received this time (S54401: Yes), the remaining time reduction counter 223pa , and the value of the dependent special figure 2 variation counter 223pb are cleared to 0 (S54402), and the game state is stored as to whether the game state before transition was time saving A1 or time saving A2, that is, time saving type "time saving A". The determination is made based on the information stored in the area 223i (S54403).

In the process of S54403, when it is determined that it is not "time saving A" (S54403: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is "time saving A" (S54403: Yes), then it is determined whether there is a special figure 2 reservation (holding memory of the second special symbol) (S54404), special figure 2 reservation If it is determined that there is no (S54404: No), this processing ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S54404, if it is determined that there is a special figure 2 reservation (S54404: Yes), set a display command for showing the pullback effect of the number of times corresponding to the special figure 2 reservation number (S54405), End this process.

That is, in the processing from S54403 to S54405, when the special figure 2 reservation is acquired at the time when the "time saving A (time saving A mode)" in which the first special symbol lottery is mainly executed ends, the transition to the normal state After that, a process for executing a dedicated effect (pull-back effect) is executed for the second special symbol lottery that is preferentially executed.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to inform the player in an easy-to-understand manner that the player is in a special state while the pull-back effect is being executed.

In the processing of S54401, if it is determined that there is no transition to the normal state (S54401: No), then it is determined whether it is a transition to the time saving state (S54406), and it is determined that there is no transition to the time saving state If so (S54406: No), this process ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined to be a transition to the time saving state (S54406: Yes), the initial fluctuation standby flag 223pe is set to ON (S54407), and the display command corresponding to the time saving type is set (S54408), this End the process.

That is, in the processing of S54407 and S54408 described above, when the jackpot game ends and the time saving state is set, the display of the game explanation screen displayed during the ending period of the jackpot game is continued even after the jackpot game ends. is executed.

Next, the contents of the win-related process 17 (S54302) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 815 is a flow chart showing the contents of the win-related process 17 (S54302). In this hit related process 17 (S54302), the contents of the control process executed when the ending command in the hit game (big hit game, small hit game) is received for the hit related process in each of the above-described embodiments, It is different in that the details of the processing executed when receiving a command related to the game per normal pattern are explained in detail, and the rest is the same. The same contents (corresponding to the processing of S54501 to S54507 in FIG. 815) are denoted by different reference numerals for convenience of explanation, but since the contents are the same, detailed explanation will be omitted.

In the processing of S54507, if it is determined that the ending command has been received (S54507: Yes), then it is determined whether the command received this time is a command related to the jackpot game (S54508), and if it is a command related to the jackpot game If it is determined (S54508: Yes), based on the information stored in the jackpot type storage area (part of the game state storage area 223i) time saving type (A1, A2, B) set after the jackpot game ends is specified (S54509), a display command for guiding the game content related to the specified time saving type is set (S54510), a display ending command is set (S54551), and this process is terminated.

Moreover, when it determines with having received per general figure related command (S54512: Yes), per general figure process 17 is performed (S54513), and this process is complete|finished.

Next, with reference to FIG. 816, the contents of the normal pattern winning process 17 (S54513) will be described. FIG. 816 is a flow chart showing the contents of the general pattern winning process 17 (S54513). This general figure per process 17 (S54513) is a process that is executed when a command indicating winning per general figure is received, and the set game state (time reduction type) and special figure 2 non-electric role A process for setting a different effect mode based on the operation status of 3065a is executed.

When the general pattern per process 17 (S54513) is executed, first, the current time reduction type is read out from the game state storage area 223i (S54551). Next, it is determined whether the current time-saving type is "time-saving A (time-saving A1 or time-saving A2)" (S54552), and the current time-saving type is "time-saving A (time-saving A1 or time-saving A2)". When it is determined (S54552: Yes), it is determined whether information corresponding to A per general pattern is included in the received general pattern per related command (S54553).

In the process of S54553, if it is determined that the information corresponding to the normal figure per A is included (S54553: Yes), then it is determined whether the special figure 2 non-electric open flag 223pd is set to ON Then (S54554), if it is determined that it is set to ON (S54554: Yes), it suggests to the player that the second special symbol lottery is likely to be executed in correspondence with the normal pattern per variation of this time. The effect clear flag 223pf is set to ON in order to cancel the execution of the effect for (informing) (S54557), and this processing is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S54554, if it is determined that the special figure 2 non-electric open flag 223pd is not set to ON (S54554: No), the second special symbol lottery is likely to be executed (special figure 2 non-electric Set a display command for indicating that it is a state in which a normal game per game is executed) that allows the game ball to enter the operation port 3073b (S54555), and display corresponding to the per normal pattern command is set (S54556), and this process ends.

Also, in the process of S54552, if it is determined that the time saving type read this time is not "time saving A" (S54552: No), it is determined whether the time saving type read this time is "time saving B" (S54558), If it is determined to be "time saving B" (S54558: Yes), the process of S54556 described above is executed, and if it is determined that it is not "time saving B" (S54558: No), this process ends as it is.

Next, with reference to FIG. 817, the contents of the time saving related process 17 (S54503) will be described. FIG. 817 is a flow chart showing the contents of time saving related processing 17 (S54503). In this time saving related process 17 (S54503), a process for determining the effect mode based on the special symbol lottery executed during the time saving state is executed.

When the time saving related process 17 (S54503) is executed, first, the current time saving type is read out from the game state storage area 223i (S54601). Next, it is determined whether the current time-saving type is "time-saving A (time-saving A1 or time-saving A2)" (S54602), and the current time-saving type is "time-saving A (time-saving A1 or time-saving A2)". When it is determined (S54602: Yes), it is determined whether the received command is a command related to special figure 2 variation (related to the execution of the second special symbol variation) (S54603).

In the processing of S54603, if it is determined that the special figure 2 fluctuation related (S54603: Yes), then 1 is added to the value of the special figure 2 fluctuation counter 223pb (S54604), and the special figure after the addition It is determined whether the value of the 2-variation number counter 203pb is greater than 5 (S54605). In the process of S54505, if it is determined that it is greater than 5 (S545605: Yes), set a display command to indicate that the special figure 2 fluctuation count has exceeded the upper limit (S54606), and move to the process of S54609 .

When the display command is set in the process of S54606, the display screen shown in FIG. 793(a) is displayed. That is, in the time saving state in which the time saving A in which the second special symbol lottery is difficult to execute is set, the time saving end condition set for the time saving B is more than "the number of times the second special symbol lottery is executed 5 times". A display mode for congratulating the execution of the second special symbol lottery is set.

On the other hand, in the process of S54602, if it is determined that the time saving type read this time is not "time saving A" (S54602: No), it is determined whether the time saving type read this time is "time saving B" (S54607), When it is determined that it is "time saving B" (S54607: Yes), it is determined whether the received command is related to special figure 2 variation (S54608), and when it is determined that it is related to special figure 2 variation (S54608 : Yes), the process proceeds to S54609, and when it is determined that it is not "time saving B" (S54607: No), this process ends.

In the process of S54609, the value of the remaining time reduction counter 223pa is updated based on the received information (S54609), and a display command for indicating the updated value of the remaining time reduction counter 223pa is set (S54610). End the process.

Next, with reference to FIG. 818, the contents of the normal pattern fluctuation related process 17 (S54306) will be described. FIG. 818 is a flowchart showing the contents of the normal pattern fluctuation related process 17 (S54306). In this general pattern variation related processing 17 (S54306), the processing for determining the production mode of the variation production corresponding to the execution of the normal pattern variation is executed, specifically, "Time reduction A ( Time saving A mode)” A processing for varying the production mode of the variation production for the variation of the normal pattern per normal pattern A winning per normal pattern according to the situation is executed.

When the normal figure fluctuation related process 17 (S54306) is executed, first, the current time reduction type is read out from the game state storage area 223i (S54701). Next, it is determined whether the current time-saving type is "time-saving A (time-saving A1 or time-saving A2)" (S54702), and the current time-saving type is "time-saving A (time-saving A1 or time-saving A2)". When it is determined (S54702: Yes), it is determined whether the received command is a command indicating a variation in the per A per normal pattern (S54703).

In the processing of S54703, if it is determined that it is a variation per normal per A (S54703: Yes), then it is determined whether the special figure 2 non-electric open flag 223pd is set to ON (S54704) , When it is determined that it is set to ON (S54704: Yes), the effect clear flag 223pf is set to ON (S54705), and this processing is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S54704, if it is determined that the flag 223pd during special figure 2 non-electric opening is not set to ON (S54704: No), it is determined whether the first special symbol variation is being executed (S54706 ), if it is determined that it is being executed (S54706: Yes), the mode of the special figure variation effect (treasure box opening effect) being executed is changed to the effect mode corresponding to A winning per normal figure (content 805a is "bonus") A switching display command for switching to is set (S54708), and this processing ends.

Also, in the process of S54707, if it is determined that the first special symbol is not changing (S54706: No), set a display command for showing the production mode (treasure box opening production) corresponding to the A winning per normal pattern. (S54707), and the process ends.

In the process of S54702, if it is determined that it is not time saving A (S54702: No), or in the process of S54703, if it is determined that it is not a per normal figure per A per variation (S54703: No), the corresponding production mode is set (S54709), and the process ends.

Next, referring to FIG. 819, the contents of the variable display setting process 17 (S54113) will be described. FIG. 819 is a flow chart showing the contents of the variable display setting process 17 (S54113). In this variable display setting process 17 (S54113), the special figure 1 variable effect setting process 17 (S55105) and the special figure 2 variable effect setting process 17 (S55109) are executed with respect to the variable display setting process 13 described above. The difference is that the The same processing contents are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Here, with reference to FIG. 820, the contents of the special figure 1 fluctuation effect setting process 17 (S55105) will be described. Figure 820 is a flow chart showing the contents of the special figure 1 fluctuation effect setting process 17 (S55105). In this special figure 1 fluctuation production setting process 17 (S55105), mainly, the process for determining the production mode corresponding to the first special symbol fluctuation executed during the time saving state will be explained. It is a matter of course that the processing contents used in each of the above-described embodiments are appropriately applied to the various processing executed in the game state other than that.

When the special figure 1 fluctuation effect setting process 17 (S55105) is executed, first, it is determined whether the current gaming state is a time saving state (S55201), and when it is determined that it is not a time saving state (S55201: No) , the effect mode of the variation pattern effect is set according to the game state and the lottery result (S55214), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S55201, if it is determined that it is in the time saving state (S55201: Yes), it is determined whether the initial fluctuation standby flag 223pe is set to ON (S55202), and it is determined that it is set to ON If (S55202: Yes), the initial fluctuation standby flag 223pe is set to OFF (S55203), and then the time saving type of this time is "time saving A (time saving A1, time saving A2)" (S55204) , When it is determined that it is not "time saving A", the process of S55214 is executed, and this process ends. The process of S55204 is also executed when it is determined in the process of S55202 that the initial change standby flag 223pe is not set to ON (S55202: No).

If it is determined that the time saving type this time is "time saving A (time saving A1, time saving A2)" (S55204: Yes), the expectation degree of time saving A1 is determined by referring to the expectation degree selection table 222pa (S55205), A display command is set to indicate the mode of presentation corresponding to the determined degree of expectation (S55206). Next, it is determined whether this special symbol variation is a long variation (60 seconds variation) (S55207), and if it is determined to be a long variation (S55207: Yes), it corresponds to the variation time counter 223f Set a value (value corresponding to 60 seconds) (S55208), set a display command for showing the effect mode (see FIG. 793 (b)) corresponding to long variation (S55209), and proceed to the processing of S55210 Transition.

In the process of S55210, it is determined whether this special symbol variation is the time saving final variation (S55210), and if it is determined that it is the final variation (S55210: Yes), in the state of acquiring special figure 2 reservation It is determined whether there is (S55211), and if it is determined that the special figure 2 reservation is acquired (S55221: Yes), a display command for indicating the number of special figure 2 reservations ("Bonus in FIG. 794 (b) Display command for indicating "number of times"), set the final variation effect mode to accumulate the special figure 1 reservation (S55213), and end this process.

Next, with reference to FIG. 821, the contents of the special figure 2 fluctuation effect setting process 17 (S55109) will be described. Figure 821 is the flowchart which shows the contents of special figure 2 fluctuation production setting processing 17 (S55109). In this special figure 2 fluctuation production setting process 17 (S55109), mainly, the process for determining the production mode corresponding to the second special symbol fluctuation executed during the time saving state will be explained. It is a matter of course that the processing contents used in each of the above-described embodiments are appropriately applied to the various processing executed in the game state other than that.

When the special figure 2 fluctuation effect setting process 17 (S55109) is executed, first, it is determined whether the current game state is a time saving state (S55301), and when it is determined that it is not a time saving state (S55301: No) , the effect mode of the variation pattern effect corresponding to the game state and the lottery result is set (S55306), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S55301, if it is determined that it is in the time saving state (S55301: Yes), it is determined whether the initial fluctuation standby flag 223pe is set to ON (S55302), and it is determined that it is set to ON In the case (S55302: Yes), the initial fluctuation standby flag 223pe is set to OFF (S55303), and then the time saving type of this time is "time saving A (time saving A1, time saving A2)" It is determined whether it is (S55304) , When it is determined that it is not "time saving A", the process of S55214 is executed, and this process ends. The process of S55304 is also executed when it is determined in the process of S55302 that the initial change standby flag 223pe is not set to ON (S55302: No).

In the processing of S55304, if it is determined that the current time saving type is "time saving A (time saving A1, time saving A2)" (S55304: Yes), set a display command for showing the effect mode corresponding to the bonus variation (S55305), and the process ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 822, the contents of the liquid crystal effect execution management process 17 (S54101) will be described. FIG. 822 is a flow chart showing the contents of the liquid crystal effect execution management process 17 (S54101). In this liquid crystal effect execution management process 17 (S54101), the value of the variable time counter, that is, in the "time saving A", set when the variable time of the executed first special symbol variation is long time (60 seconds) A process (S5402) for updating the value of the variable time counter (S5402) and a process (S55402) for determining an effect mode (for example, an effect in which the character 800 walks down the road) corresponding to the updated counter value are executed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 823, the contents of the non-power status management process (S54102) will be described. FIG. 823 is a flow chart showing the details of the non-power status management process (S54102). In this non-electric situation management process (S54102), based on the detection signal output from the detection means provided in the pachinko machine 10, the operation of the special figure 1 non-electric role 3064a and the special figure 2 non-electric role 3065a Actions are taken to manage the situation.

Conventionally, a ball entry means that can execute a lottery (for example, a special symbol lottery) by entering a game ball, and a first position (open state) that allows a game ball to enter the ball entry means. ) and a second position (closed state) in which it is more difficult to enter a game ball than the first position, and a variable means (for example, an ordinary electric accessory) that can be changed to play a winning game (for example, A pachinko machine capable of executing a game of entering a game ball into a ball entry means by variably operating a variable means by a normal pattern winning game executed when a winning is won in a normal pattern lottery. be.

Furthermore, as a game state, a winning game is likely to be executed, or an advantageous game state in which the period in which the variable means is positioned at the first position in one winning game tends to be long, that is, the game ball is entered into the ball entry means. There is a pachinko machine configured to be able to set an advantageous game state (for example, a time-saving state) that makes it easier to hit a ball.

In the conventional pachinko machine configured in this way, when the advantageous game state is set, the ball entering means is more likely to enter than when a game state other than the advantageous game state (for example, normal state) is set. Since the game ball can be easily entered, the player can be motivated to play the game while anticipating that an advantageous game state will be set.

However, in the conventional pachinko machine, only one type of lottery is executed when a game ball is entered into the ball-entering means, so that the contents of the lottery are excessively advantageous to the player. As a result, when the advantageous gaming state is set, the player is provided with a game that is excessively advantageous. However, there is a problem that it becomes difficult to motivate players to play games with the aim of setting an advantageous game state.

In addition, it is possible to set the lottery content with a higher degree of advantage to the player and set the frequency of setting the advantageous gaming state, that is, to allow the player to easily enter the game ball into the ball entry means. It is conceivable to use a specification that reduces the frequency with which possible game states are set. There is a problem that the player who is playing the game becomes bored with the game before the advantageous game state is set.

On the other hand, in the forty-sixth embodiment, when a game ball enters the ball-entering means in which the game ball is more likely to enter due to the setting of the advantageous game state, a plurality of types of lotteries are executed. It is structured so that it is easy to Then, the degree of advantage to the player is made different for a plurality of types of lotteries that are likely to be executed.

More specifically, according to the behavior (falling result) of the game ball entering the ball entering means, the first special symbol lottery with a low degree of advantage or the second special symbol lottery with a high degree of advantage is executed ( It is configured so that it is possible to By constructing in this way, the advantageous game state (time saving state) is set to provide the player with a period during which the special symbol lottery can be easily executed for a predetermined period, and the game is executed during the period. By switching the type of special symbol lottery (to make it easier to execute), the degree of advantage of the privilege given to the player during the advantageous game state (time saving state) can be changed, so excessive It is possible to suppress the provision of an advantageous game.

Further, detailed description is as described above with reference to FIG. 779, in the forty-sixth embodiment, the area where the game ball is likely to enter during the normal pattern per game executed when winning in the normal pattern lottery Inside (inside the operating device 3070), a special figure 1 non-electric opening 3073a that triggers the operation of the special figure 1 non-electric accessory 3064a and a special figure 2 non-electric opening that triggers the operation of the special figure 2 non-electric accessory 3065a An electric opening 3073b is provided, and the game ball is configured to be distributed to either the special figure 1 non-electric opening 3073a or the special figure 2 non-electric opening 3073b according to the operation pattern of the game per normal figure. is doing.

Then, when the game ball enters the special figure 1 non-electric opening 3073a, the special figure 1 non-electric accessory 3064a is operated, so that the first special symbol lottery is executed. The game ball is in a state where it is easy for the game ball to enter the mouth 3064, and when the ball enters the special figure 2 non-electric opening 3073b, the special figure 2 non-electric accessory 3065a is operated, so that the second special symbol lottery. It is configured so that the game ball can easily enter the second ball entrance 3065 which is the execution trigger. Furthermore, the second special symbol lottery is more advantageous to the player than the first special symbol lottery. 3065a are operating together, the game ball is configured to be difficult to reach the second ball entrance 3065.

Specifically, it is configured so that the special figure 1 non-electric accessory 3064a in operation blocks the flow path in which the game ball can reach the second ball entrance 3065. Therefore, in a state in which both the special figure 1 non-electric role 3064a and the special figure 2 non-electric role 3065a are operating, the game ball enters the first ball entrance 3064 rather than the second ball entrance 3065. It is configured to make it easier to hit the ball.

Furthermore, in the forty-sixth embodiment, as the end condition for ending the advantageous gaming state, the end that is established when the number of executions of the special symbol lottery executed during the advantageous gaming state reaches a predetermined number (99 times) You set the conditions. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it difficult to execute a game in which only the second special symbol lottery is executed during the advantageous game state.

In addition, in the forty-sixth embodiment, in the right region of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, there are a through gate 67, a normal electric accessory 3071, a special figure 1 non-electric accessory 3064a, and a special figure 2 non-electric accessory 3065a. Since it is arranged, for example, it is possible to make it difficult to shoot the game ball toward the through gate 67 and the normal electric accessory 3071 without making the game ball reach each non-electric accessory. Therefore, until it becomes possible to enter the game ball into the second ball entrance 3065 where the lottery advantageous to the player is executed (state in which the special figure 2 non-electric accessory 3065a is operating) , it is possible to make it difficult to play a game without entering a game ball into the right first ball entrance 3064.例文帳に追加

That is, when the game ball is fired toward any one of the through gate 67, the normal electric accessory 3071, the special figure 1 non-electric accessory 3064a, and the special figure 2 non-electric accessory 3065a, the other It is configured so that a game ball can be entered into the device. By configuring in this way, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which a player executes a game in which a game ball is entered only to a specific device.

In the forty-sixth embodiment, the through gate 67, the normal electric accessory 3071, the special figure 1 non-electric accessory 3064a, and the special figure 2 non-electric accessory 3065a are all provided in the right area of the game board 13. However, without being limited to this, at least a plurality of the various devices described above may be arranged at positions where game balls that have flowed down the same flow-down path can enter.

<47th Embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 in the forty-seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 824 to 826. FIG. The forty-seventh embodiment differs from the forty-sixth embodiment described above in that the configuration of the actuator 3070 is different. Other configurations are the same, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In the forty-sixth embodiment described above, according to the time-saving type (time-saving A1, time-saving A2, time-saving B) set based on the result of the special symbol lottery, during the time-saving state (low probability state of special symbols, high probability of normal symbols state), the types of special symbols that are likely to be executed by lottery are differentiated.

In addition, as a time-saving type (time-saving A) in which the first special symbol lottery is mainly executed, the frequency of the second special symbol lottery being executed is relatively high Time-saving A1 (special figure 1 advantageous time-saving mode) , Time reduction A2 (special figure 1 disadvantageous time reduction mode) in which the frequency of execution of the second special symbol lottery is relatively low, and time reduction type that is disadvantageous to the player in the time reduction state. Even when (time saving A) is set, the player can play the game while anticipating that the second special symbol lottery will be executed. In addition, in the forty-sixth embodiment described above, the execution frequency of the second special symbol lottery is different between when the time saving A1 is set as the time saving type and when the time saving A2 is set, so the time saving In the state, when a time saving type (time saving A) that is disadvantageous to the player is set, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to predict the number of executions of the second special symbol lottery during the time saving state, and more The game can be played enthusiastically while expecting the execution of the second special symbol lottery.

However, in the above-described 46th embodiment, the execution frequency of the second special symbol lottery during the time saving state is determined only by the lottery result of the special symbol lottery, so the time saving mode disadvantageous to the player (special figure 1 disadvantageous There is a problem that the player's willingness to play is reduced when the time saving mode is set.

On the other hand, in the forty-seventh embodiment, the behavior of the game ball that has flowed into the operating device 3070, when the opportunity for executing the first special symbol lottery is established, and the second special symbol lottery is executed. It is configured to switch between when the opportunity for

Specifically, the first special symbol lottery is mainly executed during the time saving state (time saving A) is set to one type (time saving A), and the behavior of the game ball that flows into the operating device 3070 , Entering the game ball into the non-electric opening (special figure 1 non-electric opening 3073a) for opening the special figure 1 non-electric accessory 3064a associated with the right first ball opening 3064, and the second entrance It is configured to switch between the entrance of the game ball to the non-electrical opening (second special figure 2 non-electrical opening 3173b) for opening the special figure 2 non-electrical accessory 3065a attached to the ball opening 3065. ing.

By configuring in this way, even in the time-saving state in which the same time-saving type is set, the number of executions of the second special symbol lottery can be greatly varied according to the behavior of the game ball (flowing situation). , it is possible to suppress the decrease in the player's desire to play. In addition, since the game ball that has flowed into the operating device 3070 is configured to be visible to the player whether or not it enters the second special figure 2 non-electrically operated opening 3173b, the above-mentioned 46th embodiment As such, by internal processing (lottery), the player is interested in the behavior of the game ball rather than the configuration in which it is determined whether the game ball enters the special figure 2 non-electric opening 3073b. It is possible to make the player hold it and improve the player's interest in the game.

Furthermore, in the forty-seventh embodiment, when the time-saving type (time-saving B) in which the second special symbol lottery is mainly executed during the time-saving state, that is, when the time-saving type most advantageous to the player is set is similar to the above-described forty-sixth embodiment, regardless of the behavior (flowing situation) of the game ball that has entered the ball entering means, the game ball enters the first special figure 2 non-electric opening 3173a. It consists of Therefore, since the second special symbol lottery can be reliably executed for the player for whom the time saving type B is set as the time saving type, the game ball flowed into the operating device 3070 may cause discomfort to the player. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation that makes you think.

Furthermore, although a detailed description will be given later, as a flow-down path in which the game ball that has flowed into the operating device 3070 in the time saving state enters one of the non-electric openings, the time saving B is set mainly when the game A flow-down path (advantageous flow-down path) for balls to flow down is configured to be shorter than a flow-down path (unfavorable flow-down path) to mainly flow down game balls when time saving A is set.

In other words, the time-saving B in which the time-saving game in which the second special symbol lottery is substantially determined to be executed is executed, that is, the time-saving type that does not require attention to the behavior of the game ball that has flowed into the operating device 3070 is set. If you are, by shortening the period (flowing period) required for the game ball that has flowed into the operating device 3070 to reach the first special figure 2 non-electric opening 3173a, the game efficiency during the time saving state configured to increase. By configuring in this way, the player can efficiently play the game, and the interest in the game can be improved.

On the other hand, when time saving A, ie, the time saving type in which the player pays attention to the flowing situation (behavior) of the game ball that has flowed into the operating device 3070, is set, the game ball that has flowed into the operating device 3070 After having the player grasp the behavior of the game ball that has flowed into the operating device 3070 in order to make it easier to follow the behavior with the eyes, the special figure 1 non-electric activation opening 3073a The period (flowing period) required to reach the mouth 3173b is configured to be longer than the flowing period when the time reduction A is set. In addition, than the time required for the game ball that has flowed into the operating device 3070 to reach the special figure 1 non-electric opening 3073a in a state in which the time saving A is set, the operating device in a state in which the time saving A is set It is configured so that the time required for the game ball that has flowed into 3070 to reach the second special figure 2 non-electric opening 3173b is longer.

That is, the game ball that has flowed into the operating device 3070 is any non-electrical opening (special figure 1 non-electrical opening 3073a, first special figure 2 non-electrical opening 3173a, second special figure 2 non-electrical opening 3173b) Of the time required to reach (flowing period), so that the flowing period until reaching the non-electric working port (2nd special figure 2 non-electric working port 3173b) that is advantageous to the player is the longest It consists of Therefore, the game ball that has flowed into the operating device 3070 enters any non-electrically operated opening, and the longer the period until any non-electrically operated accessory is activated, the special figure 2 non-electrically operated accessory is activated, the player can expect to play an advantageous game for a long period of time.

Although detailed description will be given later, in the forty-seventh embodiment, when the time saving A is set, the constant variable pattern that is always driven in a predetermined variable pattern is in the flow path where the game ball tends to flow down. A member 3172 is provided, and depending on the variable state of the always variable member 3172 at the time the game ball reaches the always variable member 3172, the destination of the game ball (type of non-electric opening into which the game ball enters) is configured to switch, but the game ball that has flowed into the operating device 3070 in the state where the time saving A is set, to the special figure 1 non-electric opening 3073a or the second special figure 2 non-electric opening 3173b The configuration for guiding is not limited to this, for example, a croon-shaped distribution member having a plurality of discharge holes is provided, and the game balls that flow down the flow-down surface of the distribution member are discharged Depending on the discharge hole The configuration may be such that the game ball is guided to a different non-electrically operated opening.

<Regarding the configuration of the game board 13 in the forty-seventh embodiment>
Here, with reference to FIGS. 824 and 825, the configuration of the game board 13 in the forty-seventh embodiment will be described. FIG. 824 is a front view schematically showing the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in the 47th embodiment. As shown in FIG. 824, the configuration of the game board 13 in the forty-seventh embodiment differs from the configuration of the game board 13 in the above-described forty-sixth embodiment (see FIG. 779) in that the configuration of the right region 3060 is different. There is a difference. More specifically, the difference is that the internal structure of the actuator 3070 is different. Other configurations are the same. The same reference numerals are assigned to the same configurations, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 824, inside the actuation device 3070, there is one non-electric opening (special figure 1 non-electric opening 3073a) corresponding to the special figure 1 non-electric role 3064a, special figure 2 non-electric role There are two non-electrical openings (non-electrical openings 3073b for special figure 2) corresponding to the object 3065a, and a total of three non-electrical openings are provided.

In the forty-seventh embodiment, two time-saving types, time-saving A and time-saving B, can be set as time-saving types, and when time-saving A is set, the second special symbol lottery (advantageous lottery) Also, the first special symbol lottery (unfavorable lottery) makes it easier to perform a time-saving game, and when the time-saving B is set, the second special symbol lottery (advantageous lottery) is the first special symbol lottery (unfavorable lottery). ) is configured to perform a time-saving game that is easier to execute.

The special figure 1 non-electric activation port 3073a has the same configuration as the above-described 46th embodiment, and although detailed illustration is omitted, the special figure 1 operation mechanism 3074 (Fig. 780 ( a) See) is configured to be variable (operated) to the open state special figure 1 non-electric accessory 3064a in the closed state by the operation. This special figure 1 non-electric opening 3073a is configured so that the game ball is easier to reach (enter) in the time saving state in which the time saving A is set than in the time saving state in which the time saving B is set. ing.

The first special figure 2 non-electric opening 3173a is similar to the special figure 2 non-electric opening 3073b of the 46th embodiment described above, and the game ball can reach (enter) when the time saving B is set It is a non-electrically operated opening, and the special figure 2 non-electrical accessory 3065a in the closed state is variable (operated) to the open state by operating the special figure 2 operation mechanism 3175a by the weight of the entered game ball. It is configured as follows. In this first special figure 2 non-electric opening 3173a, the time saving state in which the time saving B is set is easier for the game ball to reach (entrance) than the time saving state in which the time saving A is set. Configure.

The second special figure 2 non-electric opening 3173b is a non-electric opening that the game ball can reach (entrance) when the time saving A is set, and the special figure 2 by the weight of the game ball entered Special Figure 2 non-electric accessary product 3065a, which is in the closed state, is configured to be variable (operated) to the open state by the operation of the operating mechanism 3175b. In this second special figure 2 non-electric opening 3173b, the time saving state in which the time saving A is set is easier for the game ball to reach (entrance) than the time saving state in which the time saving B is set. Configure.

And, in the time-saving state in which the time-saving A is set, the flow path through which the game ball flows is always provided with a movable valve 3172, and the game ball that has flowed into the operating device 3070 is Alternatively, it is configured to be guided to the second special figure 2 non-electric opening 3173b.

This normally movable valve 3172 is a member that is repeatedly moved between an open state and a closed state in a predetermined movement pattern when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on. When the game ball reaches the always movable valve 3172 and the always movable valve 3172 is in a closed state, the game ball passes through the upper surface of the normally movable valve 3172 in the closed state, and the special figure 1 non-electric opening 3073a directed towards. On the other hand, when the game ball reaches the always movable valve 3172 and the always movable valve 3172 is in an open state, it passes through the opening and is guided toward the second special figure 2 non-electric opening 3173b. .

Although a detailed description will be given later, this normally movable valve 3172 is movably controlled in a movable pattern defined so that the period in which it is closed is longer than the period in which it is open. is set, about 97 of the 100 game balls that flowed into the actuation device 3070 are to the special figure 1 non-electric opening 3073a, and about 3 are the second special figure 2 non-electric operation It is configured to be movable and controlled at a rate that is guided to the mouth 3173b.

That is, in the 47th embodiment, while the time saving A is set as the time saving type, the game ball that has flowed into the operating device 3070 is the special figure 1 non-electric opening 3073a, or the second special figure 2 non-electric operation It is possible to make the player play the game while enjoying which of the openings 3173b the ball will enter.

Next, with reference to FIG. 825, the detailed configuration of the operating device 3070 in the pachinko machine 10 of the 47th embodiment will be described. FIG. 825(a) is an enlarged view schematically enlarging a part of the right side area of the game board 13 in the forty-seventh embodiment, and FIG. 825(b) is an enlarged view of FIG. 825(a). It is a diagram explaining the ball flow of the game ball and the operation contents of various mechanisms. It should be noted that the same components as those of the game board 13 (see FIG. 780(a)) of the pachinko machine 10 in the forty-sixth embodiment described above are assigned the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 825(a), a movable piece 3072 is provided downstream of the first flow path 3170a. flows down the second flow path 3170b and enters the first special figure 2 non-electric opening 3173a.

While the special figure 2 non-electric accessory 3065a is in the closed state, when the game ball enters the first special figure 2 non-electric working opening 3173a, the game ball comes into contact with the first special figure 2 operating mechanism 3175a By doing so, the first special figure 2 operating mechanism 3175a operates, and the special figure 2 non-electric accessory 3065a is changed to the open state.

On the other hand, when the game ball flowing down the first flow path 3170a reaches the movable piece 3072, if the movable piece 3072 is in the closed state, the upper surface of the movable piece 3072 in the closed state is placed on the downstream side (Fig. 825 ( It is guided (flows down) toward the lower left direction from the point of view a), and then flows down the third flow path 3170c. As shown in FIG. 825(a), the third flow path 3170c is formed in a meandering shape (inverted dogleg shape) so that the outer wall surface serving as the downflow surface of the game ball is switched in the middle, and is folded back. A constantly movable valve 3172 is provided at a position where the game ball flowing down the upstream side of the third flow path 3170c collides.

The normally movable valve 3172 is movably controlled so as to be repeatedly switched between an open state and a closed state in a predetermined movement pattern in the start-up process 18 (see FIG. 826) of the main controller 110. , When the movable valve 3172 is in an open state, the third flow path 3170c and the fourth flow path 3170d are in communication with each other, and the game ball flowing down the third flow path 3170c moves to the fourth flow path. Flow into 3170d. Then, the ball hits the second special figure 2 non-electric opening 3173b provided on the downstream side of the fourth flow path 3170d.

On the other hand, when the normally movable valve 3172 is positioned in the closed state, the communicating surface between the third flow path 3170c and the fourth flow path 3170d is blocked by the normally movable valve 3172, so that the downstream of the third flow path 3170c A game ball flows down toward the side. Then, the ball enters the special figure 1 non-electric opening 3073a provided on the downstream side of the third flow path 3170c.

As described above, in the forty-seventh embodiment, the normally movable valve 3172 is arranged in the region where the channel is turned back in the third channel 3170c, so that the game ball is positioned substantially perpendicular to the normally movable valve 3172. will be reached by That is, when the movable valve 3172 is in an open state, the game ball flowing down the third flow path 3170c can flow down in a substantially vertical direction toward the opening surface of the fourth flow path 3170d. Therefore, even if the period in which the constantly movable valve 3172 is in an open state is set short, when the timing at which the constantly movable valve 3172 is in an open state and the timing at which the game ball reaches the constantly movable valve 3172 match. In addition, the game ball can be reliably flowed into the fourth flow path 3170d.

In addition, compared to the case where the opening surface (always movable valve 3172) of the fourth flow path 3170d is provided in the middle of the region where the outer wall surface on one side forming the third flow path 3170c becomes the downflow surface of the game ball, the third flow It is possible to facilitate the flow of game balls flowing down the path 3170c into the fourth flow path 3170d. To explain in detail, the opening surface of the fourth flow path 3170d (constantly movable valve 3172) is located in the middle of the area where the outer wall surface on one side forming the third flow path 3170c becomes the downflow surface of the game ball (downflow surface extension area). is provided, the slope required for the game ball to flow down from the upstream side to the downstream side is formed on the flowing surface, so the game ball flows from the upstream side to the downstream side of the flowing surface will flow down. Therefore, when the opening surface of the fourth flow path 3170d is provided in the middle of the downstream surface extension area, the flowing direction of the game ball tends to be substantially parallel to the opening surface, so the movable valve 3172 is always open. Even if it is in the state, when the flow speed of the game ball flowing down the flow surface is fast (when the kinetic energy of the game ball flowing down from the upstream side to the downstream side is large), the opening surface of the fourth flow path 3170d The possibility of the game ball flowing down toward the downstream side of the third flow path 3170c by passing through becomes high. On the other hand, as in the forty-seventh embodiment, the flowing-down direction of the game ball is substantially perpendicular to the opening surface of the fourth flow path 3170d. Even in the case (when the kinetic energy of the game ball flowing down from the upstream side to the downstream side is large), since the game ball flows down in the direction of flowing into the opening surface of the fourth flow path 3170d, Game balls can be distributed smoothly to the fourth flow path 3170d.

Furthermore, in the forty-seventh embodiment, as shown in FIG. 825(a), the angle at which the game ball flowing down the third flow path 3170c collides with the normally movable valve 3172 in the closed state is slightly obtuse ( about 100 degrees). By configuring in this way, the game ball that collides with the constantly movable valve 3172 is caused to flow back from the downstream side to the upstream side on the flowing surface formed on the outer wall surface on the side where the constantly movable valve 3172 is provided. It is possible to disperse the kinetic energy of the game ball. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the constantly movable valve 3172 is damaged due to the game ball colliding with the constantly movable valve 3172 .

In addition, by causing the flowing surface formed on the outer wall surface on the side where the constantly movable valve 3172 is provided to flow backward, one game ball flowing down the third flow path 3170c reaches the constantly movable valve 3172 multiple times. configured to obtain Therefore, compared to the configuration in which one game ball flowing down the third flow path 3170c can reach the always movable valve 3172 only once, the timing at which the game ball reaches the always movable valve 3172 and the always movable valve 3172 are different. It is possible to easily match the timing with which the valve 3172 is opened.

In addition, by causing the game ball to flow backward from the downstream side to the upstream side, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to grasp the behavior of the game ball in the third flow path 3170c. It is possible to make it difficult to predict whether the game ball will enter the special figure 1 non-electric opening 3073a or the second special figure 2 non-electric opening 3173b. By making the player watch the behavior (flowing state) of the game ball that has flowed into 3070 (the game ball that flows down the third flow path 3170c), it is possible to prevent the player from quickly becoming bored with the game.

Next, with reference to FIG. 825(b), the ball flow of the game ball and the operation contents of various mechanisms when the time saving type A is set as the time saving type will be described. The same reference numerals are assigned to the same configurations as those of the various mechanisms in the forty-sixth embodiment described above, and the detailed description of the same operation contents will be omitted. As shown in FIG. 825(b), in the time-saving state (low-probability state of special symbols, high-probability state of normal symbols), when winning the normal symbol lottery, the maximum number of normal electric accessories 3071 is 2. It is opened for 5 seconds, and a state is created in which game balls can easily flow into the actuator 3070 .

Then, the game ball that has flowed into the operating device 3070 flows down the upper surface of the movable valve 3172 in the closed state, flows down the third flow path 3170c, and always reaches the movable valve 3172 . In the example shown in FIG. 825(b), since the game ball reaches the constantly movable valve 3172 at the timing when the constantly movable valve 3172 is in an open state, the game ball passes through the opening surface of the fourth flow path 3170d, It shows a state in which the ball is entered into the second special figure 2 non-electric opening 3173b provided on the downstream side of the 4 flow path 3170d. When the game ball enters the second special figure 2 non-electrically operated opening 3173b, the second special figure 2 operation mechanism 3175b is operated by the game ball, and the special figure 2 non-electrical accessory 3065a is changed to the open state. be.

It should be noted that, as shown in FIG. 825 (b), in the 47th embodiment, as a mechanism for varying the special figure 2 non-electric accessary 3065a to the open state, connect with the first special figure 2 non-electric opening 3173a It has a first special figure 2 operating mechanism 3175a and a second special figure 2 operating mechanism 3175b connected to the second special figure 2 non-electric activation port 3173b, and the first special figure The 2 operation mechanism 3175a and the 2nd special figure 2 operation mechanism 3175b are configured to operate in conjunction with each other.

That is, for example, the first special figure 2 operating mechanism 3175a is operated based on the game ball entering the first special figure 2 non-electrically operated opening 3173a, and the special figure 2 non-electrical role 3065a in the closed state is changed to the open state, the second special figure 2 operating mechanism 3175b is also activated in conjunction with the operation of the first special figure 2 operating mechanism 3175a. By configuring in this way, in a state in which the special figure 2 non-electrical accessory 3065a is changed to the open state by the operation of the first special figure 2 operation mechanism 3175a, to the second special figure 2 non-electrical activation opening 3173b Even if the game ball enters the ball, the second special figure 2 operating mechanism 3175b does not operate based on the entering ball, so the operating port (operating mechanism ), it is possible to smoothly vary the non-electric accessory.

In addition, by providing a plurality of operation openings (operation mechanisms) for actuating one non-electric accessory, a flow path through which game balls can flow down is created in the game area formed on the game board 13. Since the same non-electrical accessory can be changed to an open state by a plurality of provided game balls flowing down different flow paths, the game content of the pachinko machine 10 using the non-electrical accessory can be provided to the player. It can be made difficult to predict easily, and the player's interest in the game can be improved.

More specifically, the game area formed on the game board 13 is provided with a first flow path through which game balls can flow down, and the game balls flowing down the first flow path are moved to a second flow path different from the first flow path. A first distributing means capable of distributing to two flow paths or a third flow path is provided. Then, among the game balls distributed to the second flow path, a predetermined first percentage (for example, 10%) of the game balls are advantageous to the player. object) to a non-electrical opening (for example, the first special figure 2 non-electrical opening), and a predetermined second percentage (for example, 50%) of game balls are disadvantageous to the player Guide to a non-electrical opening (for example, 1st special figure 1 non-electrical opening) for opening non-electrical accessories (for example, special figure 1 non-electrical accessories), and other (for example, 40%) A game ball is provided with a first induction switching means that can be guided to a discharge port that cannot enter any non-electrically operated port. On the other hand, among the game balls distributed to the third flow path, a predetermined third percentage (for example, 20%) of the game balls are advantageous to the player. object) to a non-electrical opening (for example, the second special figure 2 non-electrical opening), and a predetermined fourth percentage (for example, 60%) of game balls are disadvantageous to the player Guide to a non-electrical opening (for example, 2nd special figure 1 non-electrical opening) for opening non-electrical accessories (for example, special figure 1 non-electrical accessories), and other (for example, 20%) The game ball may be configured to be provided with a second guidance switching means capable of being guided to the discharge port that cannot enter any non-electrically operated port.

In this case, the types of non-electrical accessories that can be released based on the game ball that has flowed down the first flow path are special figure 2 non-electrical accessories that are advantageous to the player and special figure 1 non-electrical accessories that are disadvantageous to the player. Although there are two types of accessories, there are four types of operation ports for actually opening non-electric accessories. Then, when the flow path distributed from the first flow path is the second flow path and when it is the third flow path, each The rate at which the non-electric accessories are operated can be varied. Therefore, the player can be interested not only in which non-electrically operated opening the game ball enters, but also in which channel the game ball flows down. Therefore, it is possible to make the player interested in the behavior (falling state) of the game ball from the stage before the timing when the game ball enters the non-electrically operated opening.

Furthermore, it may be used for other game characteristics, for example, some of the game balls flowing down the first flow path flow down the second flow path, and some of the game balls flowing down the second flow path 3 flow paths are configured so that they can flow down. Among the game balls flowing down the first flow path, some of the game balls distributed to other than the second flow path are non-electric accessories that are disadvantageous to the player (for example, a special figure 1 non-electric accessory) to open the ball into a non-electric opening (for example, the first special figure 1 non-electric opening), and the game ball flowing down the second flow path Of the game balls distributed to channels other than the third flow path, some of the game balls are for releasing non-electrical accessories that are disadvantageous to the player (for example, special figure 1 non-electrical accessories) A non-electrical opening (for example, the second special figure 1 non-electrical opening), or a non-electrical opening for opening a non-electrical role that is advantageous to the player (for example, a special figure 2 non-electrical role) (For example, the first special figure 2 non-electrically operated opening), and the game ball flowing down the third flow path is a non-electrical accessory (for example, , Special figure 2 non-electric accessory) may be configured to enter a non-electric opening (for example, the second special figure 2 non-electric opening).

In this case, the game ball flowing down the first flow path does not enter the non-electrically operated opening and flows down through the second and third flow paths so that the game is played in the non-electrically operated opening that is more advantageous to the player. It is possible to make it easier to enter the ball. Therefore, it is expected that the game ball flowing down the flow path that can enter the non-electrically operated opening will not enter the non-electrically operated opening (further flow down toward the downstream flow path). It is possible to provide a novel game property that makes the player pay attention to the behavior of the game ball.

<Regarding control processing of main controller 110 in the forty-seventh embodiment>
Next, the contents of control processing executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 in the pachinko machine 10 of the forty-seventh embodiment will be described. The forty-seventh embodiment is different from the forty-sixth embodiment described above in that the contents of the start-up process that is activated when the power is turned on are executed instead of the start-up process 18 (see FIG. 826). are otherwise identical. A detailed description of the same contents will be omitted.

FIG. 826 is a flow chart showing the contents of start-up processing 18 . As shown in FIG. 826, in start-up processing 18, first, initial setting processing is executed upon power-on (S901). For example, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. Next, in order to wait for the sub-side control devices (peripheral control devices such as the sound lamp control device 113 and the payout control device 111) to become operable, a wait process (one second in this embodiment) is executed. (S902). Then, access to the RAM 203 is permitted (S903).

After that, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) provided in the power supply 115 is turned on (S904), and if it is turned on (S904: Yes), the process proceeds to S915. On the other hand, if the RAM erasing switch 122 is not turned on (S904: No), it is determined whether or not power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S905), and if not stored (S905: No). , there is a possibility that the process at the time of the previous power shutdown did not end normally, so in this case as well, the process proceeds to S915.

If power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S905: Yes), the RAM determination value is calculated (S906). If the determination value does not match the RAM determination value saved at the time of power shutdown, the backed-up data is destroyed.

In the process of S915, a payout initialization command is transmitted in order to initialize the payout control device 111 serving as a sub-side control device (peripheral control device) (S915). When the payout control device 111 receives this payout initialization command, it clears the area (work area) other than the stack area of the RAM 213, sets the initial value, and becomes ready to start the game ball payout control. After transmitting the payout initialization command, main controller 110 executes the initialization processing of RAM 203 (S916, S917).

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, the power is turned on while the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed when the RAM data is initialized when the power is turned on, such as when the hall starts operating. Therefore, if the RAM erasing switch 122 is pressed during the start-up process, the RAM initialization process (S916, S917) is executed. Also, if power failure occurrence information is not set, or if a backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM determination value (checksum value, etc.), the RAM 203 initialization processing (S916, S917) is executed in the same way. . In the RAM initialization process (S916, S917), the used area of the RAM 203 is cleared to 0 (S916), and then the initial value of the RAM 203 is set (S917). After the process of S917 ends, the process proceeds to S910.

On the other hand, if the RAM erasing switch 122 is not turned on (S904: No), power failure occurrence information is stored (S905: Yes), and the RAM determination value (checksum value, etc.) is normal ( S907: Yes), while retaining the data backed up in the RAM 203, clear the power failure occurrence information (S908). Next, a payout return command at the time of power recovery for returning the sub-side control device (peripheral control device) to the game state at the time of drive power shutdown is transmitted (S909), and the process proceeds to S910. When the payout control device 111 receives this payout return command, the game ball payout control can be started while retaining the data stored in the RAM 213 .

In the processing of S910, an effect permission command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113, and the execution of various effects is permitted to the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114. FIG. After the processing of S910 is completed, the value of the counter 203i during the time saving, the setting status of the flag 203m during the jackpot, the value of the special figure 2 fluctuation counter 203pa (S951), The value of the counter 203i during the read time saving, the jackpot The setting status of the medium flag 203m, the game state indicated by the value of the special figure 2 fluctuation counter 203pa, that is, the game state before the power is turned off (normal state (low probability state of special symbols, low probability state of normal symbols ), In addition to time saving state (low probability state of special pattern, high probability state of normal pattern)), time saving type in time saving state (time saving A1, time saving A, time saving B) and remaining information until time saving end condition is satisfied (S912).

After the process of S912 is completed, the start of movement of the constantly movable valve 3172 is set (S952), the interruption is permitted (S914), and the process proceeds to the main process, which will be described later. The movable setting of the normally movable valve 3172 set by the process of S952 is not changed until the power is shut off. Thereby, while the game machine is powered on, the movable valve 3172 can always be kept moving in a predetermined movement pattern. Therefore, according to the execution timing of the normal pattern winning game executed when winning in the normal symbol lottery, the game ball moves through the fourth flow path 3170d (see FIG. 825) in the operating device 3070 during the normal pattern winning game. Since it is determined whether or not to flow down, it is possible to make the player interested in the flow down situation of the game ball during the normal game.

That is, even if the period (opening period of the game per normal pattern) from the time the game per normal pattern is executed to the opening of the normal electric auditors 3071 (see FIG. 825) is the same per game per normal pattern, the second When the opportunity for executing the 1 special symbol lottery is established (when the game ball enters the special figure 1 non-electric opening 3073a) and when the opportunity for executing the 2nd special symbol lottery is established ( When the game ball enters the second special figure 2 non-electric opening 3173b), it is possible to create a normal figure by grasping the game content (opening period) of the game per normal figure To prevent a player from easily predicting the game result of a winning game. Therefore, it is easy for the player to continue to enjoy the game until the game ball that has flowed into the operating device 3070 during the normal game is entered into any of the non-electrically operated openings. be able to.

Here, the movable pattern of the constantly movable valve 3172 will be described. The pachinko machine 10 in the forty-seventh embodiment has a storage area (movable pattern storage area) in which the movable pattern of the constantly movable valve 3172 is stored in advance in the ROM 202 of the MPU 201 of the main controller 110. In the process of S952, the movable pattern is read from the movable pattern storage area of the ROM 202, and the movable valve 3172 is always moved based on the read movable pattern. Then, every time the start-up process is executed and the movable pattern is read out, the stored movable pattern is referred to from the beginning (from the initial value) to always move the movable valve 3172 .

The movable patterns stored in the movable pattern storage area are composed of movable scenarios corresponding to the lapse of a predetermined time (for example, one minute). Information is stored for indicating whether the constantly movable valve 3172 is to be in an open state or a closed state according to (elapsed time after the normally movable valve 3172 is driven).

Specifically, a movable scenario is defined in which a movable pattern in which the open state is continued for 1 second is repeated 20 times after 2.9 seconds have passed in the closed state. That is, a movable scenario is defined in which the constantly movable valve 3172 is open for 2 seconds (0.1×20) within 60 seconds (3 seconds×20). By configuring in this way, it flows into the operating device 3070 during the game per normal figure, and the fourth flow path 3170d at a rate of about one per 30 game balls flowing down the third flow path 3170c can be induced.

As for the movable pattern defined in the movable scenario, as in the forty-seventh embodiment, an operation in which the relationship between the closed state period and the open state period is always the same is repeatedly executed. For example, when looking at the entire movable scenario, the movable valve 3172 is in the open state for only two seconds in 60 seconds, as in the forty-seventh embodiment. When viewed partially, a period (advantageous period) in which the ratio of the open period is high and a period (unfavorable period) in which the ratio is low with respect to the closed period are created. It may be configured to define a movable scenario.

Furthermore, in the forty-seventh embodiment, the movable valve 3172 is always movable so that it becomes difficult to shoot the game ball at the timing when the game ball that has flowed into the actuator 3070 flows down to the fourth flow path 3170d. The period of continuous open state is set short (0.1 seconds), that is, shorter than the period required for the game ball shot by the player to reach the movable valve 3172 at all times. Without limitation, for example, the longer the elapsed time after the constantly movable valve 3172 is operated, the higher the proportion of the open period to the closed period. Alternatively, the shorter the elapsed time after the constantly movable valve 3172 is operated, the higher the ratio of the open period to the closed period.

In the forty-seventh embodiment, while the game machine is powered on, the movable valve 3172 is always kept moving based on the variable pattern, but the present invention is not limited to this. During the normal pattern per game, more specifically, during the normal pattern per game when "normal per pattern B" is set as the per normal per pattern type, the movable valve 3172 is always moved in a predetermined movable pattern. As long as it can be configured, for example, the normal movable valve 3172 may be configured to be movable based on the execution of the game per normal figure.

<48th Embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 in the forty-eighth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 827 to 829. FIG. The pachinko machine 10 according to the forty-eighth embodiment is different from the pachinko machine 10 according to the forty-sixth embodiment described above in that an operating device 3270 is provided in place of the operating device 3070, and the special figure 2 non-electric role 3065a is arranged. They are different in that the installation positions are different. Other configurations are the same, and the same configurations are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed descriptions thereof are omitted.

In the forty-sixth embodiment described above, the normal figure electric accessory 3071 is in an open state and the game ball that has flowed into the operating device 3070 is a non-electric opening (special figure 1 non-electric opening 3073a, ), and by the action of the entered game ball, the closed state non-electric accessory (special figure 1 non-electric accessory 3064a, special figure 2 non-electric accessory 3065a) operates to the open state was configured to Then, the non-electrical accessory (special figure 1 non-electrical accessory 3064a, special figure 2 non-electrical accessory 3065a) is an actuator A game ball that did not flow into 3070 was placed at a position where it could enter (see FIG. 779).

That is, the pachinko machine 10 of the forty-sixth embodiment described above is a game ball that enters a non-electric opening (special figure 1 non-electric opening 3073a, special figure 2 non-electric opening 3073b), and is in an open state Since the game ball to enter the non-electric role (special figure 1 non-electric role 3064a, special figure 2 non-electric role 3065a) is always a different game ball, for example, To play a game in a state in which a game ball is entered into a non-electrically operated opening and the non-electrically-operated accessory is operated so as to be in an open state so that a player does not let the game ball enter the non-electrically-operated accessory. In this way, the open state of the non-electric accessory can be maintained for a long time.

In this case, the non-electric role is operated in the open state immediately before the game state (time saving state) in which the non-electric role is relatively easy to operate ends, and then the non-electric role is difficult to operate ( After the normal state) is set, there is a problem that the player easily performs the game of entering the game ball into the non-electric accessory.

In particular, like the pachinko machine 10 of the forty-sixth embodiment described above, when a game ball enters a specific non-electric role (special figure 2 non-electric role 3065a), a large privilege can be given to the player. The more the pachinko machine 10 has the more favorable game characteristics (for example, the game characteristics that can provide the privilege of executing a lottery (small winning lottery) that can realize a jackpot game execution machine with a high probability), the less the pachinko machine 10 has. When a game state (normal state) is set in which it is difficult to operate a non-electric accessory while the electric accessory is in an open state, the problem of providing an excessively advantageous game to the player becomes conspicuous. It was something. In addition, when the game specifications of the pachinko machine 10 are designed on the premise that a game state (normal state) in which it is difficult to operate the non-electric accessory is set while the non-electric accessory is in the open state, the non-electric accessory It is necessary to design the degree of advantage of the privilege given to the player when the game ball enters the electric accessory to be low, and the value of the game state (time saving state) in which the non-electric accessory is easily activated is reduced. As a result, there is a problem that the player's willingness to play, that is, the willingness to play aiming at setting the time saving state is lowered.

On the other hand, in the forty-eighth embodiment, unlike the forty-sixth embodiment described above, a game ball entered into the non-electrically operated opening is configured to be able to enter the non-electrically operated accessory thereafter. They are very different. By configuring in this way, it is possible to enter the game ball used for activating the non-electrical accessory in the open state, so that the non-electrical accessory is in the open state. is maintained for a long time.

Therefore, the above-mentioned problem, that is, the game state (normal state) in which the non-electric role product is operated during the game state (time saving state) in which the non-electric role product is easy to operate, and the non-electric role product is difficult to operate. After setting, it is possible to suppress the game in which the game ball is entered into the non-electric accessory.

In addition, in the forty-eighth embodiment, as in the forty-sixth embodiment described above, a plurality of non-electrical accessories (special figure 1 non-electrical accessory 3064a, special figure 2 non-electrical accessory 3265a) are provided. When the game ball enters the special figure 2 non-electric role 3265a than when the game ball enters the non-electric role 3064a in FIG. 2 special symbol lottery is executed) is configured to be able to execute a benefit (hit lottery) that is advantageous to the player, and the special figure 2 non-electric accessory 3265a that is advantageous to the player is in the open state. Although the configuration is used to suppress being maintained as it is, it is not limited to this, and may be configured to suppress that the special figure 1 non-electric accessory 3064a is maintained as it is in the open state.

Further, the technical idea of the forty-eighth embodiment described above is applied to the pachinko machine 10 provided with only one type of non-electric role (for example, the special figure 2 non-electric role 3265a) as the non-electric role. can be

First, referring to FIG. 827, the configuration of the game board 13 in the pachinko machine 10 of the 48th embodiment will be described. FIG. 827 is a front view schematically showing the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in the 48th embodiment. As shown in FIG. 827, the actuator 3270 is different from the actuator 3070 of the forty-sixth embodiment described above in that the special figure 2 non-electric activation port 3073b is deleted, and a special figure 2 non-electric activation member 3274a is provided instead. and that the game ball that has flowed down inside the operating device 3270 is discharged to the game area formed on the game board 13 . Furthermore, it is different in that the special figure 2 non-electric accessory 3265a is arranged at a position where the game ball discharged from the operating device 3070 to the game area can enter. Other configurations are the same, and the same configurations are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed descriptions thereof are omitted.

Next, referring to FIG. 828, the configuration of the actuator 3270 provided in the right area of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 of the 48th embodiment will be described. FIG. 828 is an enlarged view schematically showing the configuration of the actuator 3270. FIG. As shown in FIG. 828, the operating device 3270, like the operating device 3070 of the forty-sixth embodiment described above, is provided with a normal electric accessory 3071 in the opening into which game balls can flow, and is normally drawn by a symbol lottery. A game ball tends to flow into the operating device 3270 by a normal figure winning game executed when winning is achieved.

In the 48th embodiment, as in the above-described 46th embodiment, a game in which a high probability state of normal symbols is set rather than a game state (normal state) in which a low probability state of normal symbols is set. The state (time saving state) is configured to make it easier to win in the normal pattern lottery, and to extend the period in which the normal electric accessory 3071 is in the open state in the normal pattern winning game to be executed. Configure. In other words, when the time-saving state is set, the gaming state is such that the game balls are more likely to flow into the operating device 3270 than when the normal state is set. Since the game state is such that the game ball can be easily entered into each of the non-electrically operated openings, the game state is advantageous to the player.

Inside the actuating device 3270, a movable valve 3072 and a special figure non-electrical actuating port 3073a are provided in the same manner as in the forty-sixth embodiment described above. And, the third flow path 3270c is provided with a special figure 2 non-electrically operated member 3274a that can be rotated by contact with a game ball flowing down the third flow path 3270c. The special figure 2 non-electrically operated member 3274a has four blade members and is configured to be rotatable around the shaft.

Although detailed illustration is omitted, a part of the outer wall forming the third flow path 3270c of the actuator 3270 has a slit in the vertical direction with a width (about 5 mm) that prevents the game ball from being discharged to the outside. (notch) is formed. Then, the special figure 2 non-electrically operated member 3274a is attached so that the blade member of the special figure 2 non-electrically operated member 3274a provided outside the third flow path 3270c enters the third flow path 3270c from the slit there is

This blade member protrudes inside the second flow path and third flow path 3270c so as to come into contact with the game ball flowing down the third flow path 3270c, and rotates clockwise upon contact with the game ball. By this rotation, the special figure 2 operation mechanism 3274b operates, and the special figure 2 non-electric accessory 3265a provided downstream of the third flow path 3270c operates so as to be in an open state.

In the state where the special figure 2 non-electric accessory 3265a is operated to the open state, the transmission mechanism of the special figure 2 operation mechanism 3274b is in a neutral state, and even if the special figure 2 non-electric operation member 3274a rotates, the power is It is configured so as not to be transmitted to the special figure 2 non-electric accessory 3265a. In other words, the special figure 2 non-electric actuation member 3274a becomes part of the means for operating the special figure 2 non-electric accessory 3265a, which is in the closed state, to the open state without using electrical control.

The game ball that has flowed down the third flow path 3270c contacts the blade member of the special figure 2 non-electrically operated member 3274a, and then flows down the fourth flow path 3270d. At the downstream end of the fourth flow path 3270d, a discharge port communicating with the game area formed on the game board 13 is formed, and the game ball that has flowed down the fourth flow path 3270d is discharged from the discharge port and returned to the game area. flow down. A special figure 2 non-electric role product 3265a is provided directly under the discharge port, and when the special figure 2 non-electric role product 3265a is in an open state, the game ball discharged from the discharge port of the operating device 3270 Guided by the special figure 2 non-electric accessory 3265a, it flows down the fifth flow path 3270e and enters the second ball entrance 3265.

As shown in FIG. 828, the special figure 2 non-electric accessory 3265a is provided in the game area formed on the game board 13, and is configured so that other than the game ball that has flowed down inside the operating device 3270 can enter. However, the game ball ejected from the actuator 3270 is configured to enter more easily than the game ball flowing down the right channel without flowing into the actuator 3270 .

Next, with reference to FIG. 829, the relationship between the ball flow of the game ball when the game ball flows into the operating device 3270 and the operation contents of the special figure 2 non-electric accessory 3265a will be described. Figure 829 (a) is a diagram showing a state in which the game ball is flowing into the operating device 3270 during the normal game, and Figure 829 (b) is a game ball discharged from the operating device 3270 is a diagram showing a state in which the ball enters the second ball entrance 3265. FIG.

As shown in FIG. 829 (a), the game ball A flowing down the third flow path 3270c collides with the blade portion of the special figure 2 non-electrically operated member 3274a, and rotates the special figure 2 non-electrically operated member 3274a clockwise. rotate. The special figure 2 non-electric actuation member 3274a is operated by the special figure 2 non-electric actuation member 3274a rotated clockwise, and the special figure 2 non-electric accessory 3265a in the closed state operates to the open state. The game ball A flowing down the third flow path 3170c collides with the special figure 2 non-electrically operated member 3274a, so that the falling speed is reduced, so before the game ball A is discharged from the operating device 3270 The non-electric accessory 3265a shown in FIG. 2 is in an open state.

After that, as shown in FIG. 829(b), the closing mechanism 3274c is operated by the game ball A entering the second ball entrance 3265 guided by the special figure 2 non-electric accessory 3265a in the open state, The special figure 2 non-electric accessory 3265a operates to the closed state.

As described above, in the 48th embodiment, the game ball (game ball A in FIG. 829) used to operate the special figure 2 non-electric accessory 3265a from the closed state to the open state is Since it is configured to be able to enter the second ball entrance 3265 for operating the 2 non-electric accessory 3265a from the open state to the closed state, the open state of the special figure 2 non-electric accessory 3265a is long It can make it difficult to continue.

Furthermore, if the game ball used to operate the special figure 2 non-electric accessory 3265a from the closed state to the open state does not enter the second ball entrance 3265, for example, the inside of the operating device 3270 The falling speed of the game ball is fast, and even after colliding with the special figure 2 non-electrically operated member 3274a, it flows down the fourth flow path 3270d without losing momentum, and the special figure 2 non-electrical accessory 3265a is in an open state. If the game ball is discharged from the operating device 3270 before operating to, or if the game ball discharged from the operating device 3270 is in the open state When the area flows down, the special figure 2 non-electric accessory 3265a remains open, but as described above, in the forty-eighth embodiment, the arrangement position of the special figure 2 non-electric accessory 3265a is A game ball that has flowed down inside the operating device 3270 is relatively easy to enter, and a game ball that has not flowed down inside the operating device 3270 is relatively difficult to enter. 2 Even if the time saving state ends while the non-electric accessory 3265a is in the open state and the normal state is set, it is possible to make it difficult to easily enter the game ball into the second ball entrance 3265 during the normal state. can.

<Forty-ninth embodiment>
Next, the forty-ninth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 830 to 833. FIG. The 49th embodiment is different from the above-described 46th embodiment in that the contents of the normal pattern winning type set when winning in the normal symbol lottery are different. In the forty-ninth embodiment, as in the forty-eighth embodiment described above, the non-electric accessory (the second non-electric accessory 3065a) that is in the open state during the time saving state does not operate to the closed state. In a situation where the time-saving state ends while the state is still in place, that is, in an advantageous state in which advantageous benefits are likely to be given to the player, the right to give the privilege can be acquired, and the right acquired in the advantageous state is It is configured to be able to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the game is held even after a disadvantageous state that is more disadvantageous to the player than the advantageous state is set from the advantageous state.

Specifically, as in the forty-sixth embodiment described above, as the time-saving type, the time-saving A in which the first special symbol lottery is mainly performed during the time-saving state, and the second special symbol lottery is mainly performed during the time-saving state. When the time saving B is set, the time saving game in which the second special symbol lottery is likely to be executed is executed in the first half period of the time saving state, and the second special symbol lottery is executed in the second half period of the time saving state. It is configured so that it is possible to execute a time-saving game in which one special symbol lottery is likely to be executed.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to suppress the end of the time saving state while maintaining the state in which the second special symbol lottery more advantageous to the player than the first special symbol lottery is more likely to be executed.

<Regarding production content in the forty-ninth embodiment>
Fig. 830(a) is a diagram showing a display screen (first half) during the time saving B mode, and Fig. 830(b) is a diagram showing a display screen (second half) during the time saving B mode.

As shown in FIG. 830 (a), when the time saving B mode is set, the same display screen as the above-described 46th embodiment is displayed until the second special symbol lottery is executed 5 times. be. In addition, in the example shown in FIG. 830 (a), the number of special symbol variations (remaining time reduction count) until the time reduction end condition is satisfied is 9 times, but in the small area Dm6, execution during time reduction B "4" indicating the remaining number of special figure 2 fluctuation times that can be made is displayed.

By constructing in this way, it is possible to inform the player of the number of times the second special symbol lottery can be executed during the time saving state, not the condition for ending the time saving state, so that an easy-to-understand game is provided. can do.

Then, after the second special symbol lottery has been executed five times, as shown in FIG. A display mode of the end waiting zone that is displayed until the condition is established is displayed.

<Electrical configuration in the forty-ninth embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 831 and 832, the electrical configuration of the forty-ninth embodiment will be described. In the 49th embodiment, as shown in FIG. 831 (a), as the configuration of the ROM of the main control device 110, the type selection 20 table 202sf per normal pattern and the time reduction grant 20 table 202sg are provided. It differs from the forty-sixth embodiment.

First, with reference to FIG. 831(b), the configuration of the per normal figure type selection 20 table 202sf will be described. Drawing 831 (b) is a figure showing typically the contents of classification selection 20 table 202sf per normal figure.

In this normal map per type selection 20 table 202sf, for the above-described normal per type selection 17 table 202pf, the time reduction type is "time reduction B" for the special figure 2 fluctuation frequency. The only difference is that the The same reference numerals are assigned to the same contents, and detailed description thereof is omitted.

Specifically, the time saving type is "time saving B", and the number of special figures 2 fluctuations is up to 5 times, for all possible ranges of the acquired normal figure type counter C6, per normal figure A Defined, after the special figure 2 fluctuation frequency is 6 times, per general figure B is defined for all possible ranges of the acquired per general figure type counter C6. By configuring in this way, when the time saving B is set, when the special figure 2 fluctuation is executed 5 times, the general figure per game (special figure 1 non-electric opening 3073a It is possible to enter the game ball into the normal figure per game) will be executed.

Therefore, at the timing when the time saving state ends, it is possible to suppress that the special figure 2 non-electric accessory 3065a is activated.

Next, the contents of the time saving provision 20 table 202sg will be described with reference to FIG. Drawing 832 is a figure showing typically the contents of time saving provision 20 table 202sg. As shown in FIG. 832, the time saving 20 table 202sg differs from the time saving 17 table 202pg in that the time saving end conditions set for the time saving B are different, and the rest is the same. . The same reference numerals are given to the same contents, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Specifically, for the time saving B, both the value of the time saving medium counter 203i and the value of the special figure 2 variation counter 203pa are set to "10". By configuring in this way, even if the special figure 2 fluctuation is executed five times, the time saving state does not end, and then the value of the time saving counter 203i becomes 0, the first special A pattern lottery can be executed (end waiting zone).

<Regarding control processing contents of the audio ramp control device 113 in the forty-ninth embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIG. 833, the contents of control processing executed by the audio lamp control device 113 in the forty-ninth embodiment will be described. The forty-ninth embodiment differs from the forty-sixth embodiment described above in that the time-saving related process 20 (S454351) is executed instead of the time-saving related process 17, and the rest is the same. The same reference numerals are assigned to the same contents, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 833 is a flowchart showing the contents of the time saving related process 20 (S454351). In this time-saving related process 20 (S454351), for the time-saving related process 17 described above, in the process of S54608, when it is determined that the special figure 2 variation-related command is received (S54608: Yes), dependent special figure 2 Add 1 to the value of the fluctuation number counter 203 (S54651), and if it is determined that the value after the addition is greater than 5 (S54652: Yes), issue a display command to indicate the end preparation zone (end standby zone) The difference is in the setting (S54653), and the rest is the same. The same reference numerals are given to the same contents, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

<Fiftieth Embodiment>
Next, the fiftieth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 834 to 843. FIG. The fiftieth embodiment differs greatly from the forty-sixth embodiment described above in that the time saving type set as the time saving state is different.

In the forty-sixth embodiment described above, as the type of time saving state set after the end of the jackpot game, the first special symbol lottery during the time saving state is more likely to be executed than the second special symbol lottery. mode) and an advantageous time-saving state (special figure 2 time-saving mode) in which the second special symbol lottery is more likely to be executed than the first special symbol lottery during the time-saving state, and the time-saving end condition is established. It was configured so that the time-saving state (time-saving mode) that was set to continue.

Then, different time-saving end conditions are defined according to the set time-saving mode, for example, when the special figure 1 time-saving mode is set, the number of executions of the first special symbol lottery, and the second special symbol lottery It is stipulated that the time-saving end condition is satisfied when the total number of executions, which is the sum of the number of executions, reaches 99 times, and when the special figure 2 time-saving mode is set, the execution of the first special symbol lottery When the total number of executions obtained by summing the number of times and the number of executions of the second special symbol lottery reaches 99 times, or when the second special symbol lottery is executed 5 times, the time saving end condition is established. was

In this way, in the special figure 2 time saving mode in which the second special symbol lottery is mainly executed, the second special symbol lottery is excessively executed by changing the time saving end condition according to the type of the set time saving mode. In the special figure 1 time reduction mode in which the first special symbol lottery is mainly executed, the first special symbol lottery, which is more disadvantageous than the second special symbol lottery, can be executed more easily than the normal state. A period can be set for a predetermined period. Furthermore, in the special figure 1 time saving mode, the time saving end condition that is satisfied only based on the number of executions of the second special symbol lottery is not set, so the second special symbol lottery executed with a low probability was luckily executed multiple times. Even so, since the time saving state does not end until the total number of special symbol lottery executions reaches 99 times, it is possible to reliably provide the player with the time saving state for a predetermined period. .

In addition, in the special figure 1 time saving mode, since the time saving end condition that is satisfied only based on the number of times of execution of the second special symbol lottery is not set, in some cases, more numbers than when the special figure 2 time saving mode is set 2 It is possible to execute a special symbol lottery. Therefore, even when the special figure 1 time saving mode is set, it is possible to prevent the player's desire to play from significantly decreasing.

However, in the pachinko machine 10 in the forty-sixth embodiment described above, during the special figure 1 time reduction mode in which the first special symbol lottery is mainly executed, it can be established based only on the number of executions of the second special symbol lottery. Since the time-saving end condition is not set, for example, when the second special symbol lottery is excessively executed during the special figure 1 time-saving mode, there is a problem that an excessively advantageous game is provided to the player.

On the other hand, in the fiftieth embodiment, as the time saving end condition set during the special figure 1 time saving mode, the special figure 2 time saving end condition that can be established based only on the number of executions of the second special symbol lottery is set. It is configured to be possible, and, depending on the type of the special figure 1 time saving mode, the value of the special figure 2 time saving end condition (the number of executions of the second special symbol lottery) is configured to be different.

By configuring in this way, it is suppressed that the second special symbol lottery is excessively executed for the player who is playing the game in the special figure 1 time saving mode, and the second special symbol lottery is performed. Since it is possible to make it difficult to grasp how many times the special figure 2 time saving end condition is satisfied, it is expected that many second special symbol lotteries will be performed during the time saving state for the player. At the same time, it is possible to provide a novel game property that makes the player expect that the time-saving state will continue for a long time.

Furthermore, in the fiftieth embodiment, the effect executed during the time saving state is configured so that the player can predict the time saving end condition set for the special figure 1 time saving mode. there is In other words, by grasping the effect mode of the effect executed during the time saving state, the game can be played while understanding the process until the time saving end condition is satisfied. By configuring in this way, for example, in the state where the special figure 2 non-electric accessory 3065a is activated, if the game ball is entered into the second ball entrance 3065 at the present time, the time saving end condition (special figure Information indicating whether or not the 2 o'clock reduction end condition) is established, and the normal time reduction end condition (the number of executions of the first special symbol lottery and the number of executions of the second special symbol lottery) The total number of times is 100 times. Based on the information for indicating each of the remaining requirements until the time-saving end condition that is satisfied when it becomes true) and the remaining requirements until the special figure 2 time-saving end condition is satisfied, the time-saving state during execution It is possible to provide the player with information indicating whether or not the game in is advantageous to the player.

Therefore, the player can be interested in the performance executed during the time saving state, and the performance effect can be enhanced.

In addition, in the 50th embodiment, when a big hit game is executed based on the second special symbol lottery during the special figure 2 time saving mode in which the second special symbol lottery is mainly executed (smaller in the second special symbol lottery When a big winning game is executed based on the passage of a game ball through a specific area (V gate) during a small winning game executed based on winning a winning, time reduction set after the big winning game is completed. As a state, a special figure 2 hour reduction mode, a special figure 2 hour reduction mode that makes it easier to execute the second special symbol lottery than the special figure 1 hour reduction mode, and a special time reduction mode that makes it easier to execute the first special symbol lottery than the special figure 2 hour reduction mode, is configurable.

And when the special time saving mode is set, the special first time saving end condition established only based on the number of executions of the first special symbol lottery and the special established only based on the number of times of execution of the second special symbol lottery A second time-saving end condition is set, and when a special time-saving mode is set, the game property during the time-saving state can be greatly changed according to the result of the normal pattern lottery. is doing.

That is, the forty-sixth embodiment described above is configured so that when the jackpot game is executed during the special figure 2 time saving mode, the special figure 2 time saving mode is set again after the jackpot game ends. Therefore, when the special figure 2 time saving mode is set, the player can be interested in whether or not the jackpot game can be executed before the time saving end condition is satisfied. However, since the special figure 2 short time mode is always set after the end of the jackpot game, there is a risk that the game will become monotonous. In addition, since the special figure 2 time reduction mode is always set after the end of the jackpot game, if the probability that the jackpot game is executed during the special figure 2 time reduction mode is increased, the player will be hit multiple times. Since the special figure 2 short time mode is set continuously for a long period of time across the game and provides an excessively advantageous game to the player, the probability of executing the jackpot game during the special figure 2 short time mode is reduced. There was a problem that it was difficult to raise the height.

On the other hand, in the 50th embodiment, when the jackpot game is executed during the special figure 2 time saving mode, the special time saving mode can be set after the jackpot game is finished, and during the special time saving mode, the normal pattern Based on the result of the lottery (according to the type of the game per normal pattern to be executed), the first special pattern lottery and the second special pattern lottery are configured to be executed evenly, and the special number It is configured to provide a one-hour-shortening end condition and a special second hour-shortening end condition.

Therefore, the player who has set the special figure 2 time saving mode is interested not only in whether or not the jackpot game is executed but also in the type of the time saving state set after the jackpot game ends. can be done. Furthermore, when the special time saving mode is set, the player can be interested in which special symbol lottery will be executed. In addition, depending on the result of the normal pattern lottery (the type of game per normal pattern to be set), the type of time-saving end condition (special time-saving end condition) that can be established is switched. be able to.

In addition, in the fiftieth embodiment, as in the forty-sixth embodiment described above, the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 has a through gate 67, a normal electric role item 3071, a special figure 1 non-electric role item 3064a, Since the special figure 2 non-electrical accessory 3065a is arranged, it is difficult for the player to intentionally enter the game ball into one of the ball entrances, but it is not limited to this. For example, by selecting the direction in which the game ball is to be shot by the player, only one of the special symbol lotteries may be executed. By configuring in this way, when the time saving state is set, it is possible to allow the player to execute the game during the time saving state to the maximum based on the content of the effect to be executed.

<Regarding production content in the fiftieth embodiment>
834 to 837, description will be given of the effect content in the fiftieth embodiment. Here, the characteristic production contents executed during the time saving mode will be explained. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected and the detailed description is abbreviate|omitted about the content same as the content of the production|presentation performed during the time saving mode in 46th Embodiment mentioned above.

In the fiftieth embodiment, in contrast to the forty-sixth embodiment described above, the point that the time saving C mode can be set as the time saving state, and the number of executions of the second special symbol lottery executed in the time saving A mode (especially Set a time saving end condition (special figure 2 time saving end condition) that is established according to the number of times of figure 2 fluctuation), and set the special figure 2 fluctuation number that the special figure 2 time saving end condition is satisfied according to the type of time saving A The difference is that it stipulates that And also in the production|presentation performed during time-saving mode (time-saving state), the production|presentation aspect is made to correspond to the difference mentioned above, and differs.

First, with reference to FIGS. 834 to 836(a), the effect contents during the time saving A mode will be described. Figure 834 (a) is a diagram showing the production screen (during normal figure fluctuation) executed during the time saving A mode, Figure 834 (b) shows the production screen (per normal figure) executed during the time saving A mode A winning time), FIG. 835 (a) is a diagram showing the production screen (during special figure 2 fluctuation) executed during the time saving A mode, FIG. 835 (b) is a time saving A mode 836(a) is a diagram showing an effect screen (at the time of winning a small hit) executed during, and FIG. 836(a) is a view showing the effect screen (at the time of special figure 2 out) executed during the time saving A mode.

As shown in FIG. 835(a), in the fiftieth embodiment, an effect of turning over a card 1800 (card effect) is executed as an effect executed during the time-saving A mode, in contrast to the above-described forty-sixth embodiment. are different in that In addition, it is different in that the value of life is displayed in the small area Dm8 as a display mode for showing the update status of the element (the number of fluctuations of the special figure 2) related to the establishment of the special figure 2 time saving end condition.

In this card effect, an effect is executed in which the destination of the effect changes according to the display mode displayed on the face of the card 1800 turned over. In the sub-display area Ds, the type of display mode displayed on the back of the card and the guidance mode for indicating the direction of development of the effect, "Flip the card, next if NEXT, big hit if 777, confrontation if battle." ” comment is displayed.

Here, the contents of the card presentation will be briefly explained. This card effect is basically executed as a effect showing the lottery result of the first special symbol lottery. In the case of (lottery result (per normal figure A)) that can execute special figure 2 fluctuation, it is configured to be used as an effect for showing the lottery result of the normal symbol lottery.

Then, when the result of the corresponding first special symbol lottery is a jackpot winning, the display mode of "777" is displayed, and when the lottery result of the normal symbol lottery is A per normal symbol, "Battle" When the display mode is displayed and the result of the corresponding first special symbol lottery is out, or when the lottery result of the corresponding normal symbol lottery is out or in the case of a normal pattern B, that is, when the time saving state continues , the display mode of "NEXT" is displayed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 834(b), when the display mode of "battle" is displayed (when winning the normal game A), the character 1810 and the enemy character 1811 battle. A confrontation production that unfolds is executed.

In this confrontation performance, the game ball is entered into the special figure 2 non-electric opening 3073b during the normal figure per game of A, the special figure 2 non-electric accessory 3065a is operated, and the second ball entrance It is executed when the second special symbol lottery (fluctuation) executed by entering the game ball to 3065 is executed.

Then, when the result of the corresponding second special symbol lottery is a loser, as shown in FIG. An effect is executed in which the value of life to be played) is reduced. On the other hand, when the result of the corresponding second special symbol lottery is a small win, as shown in FIG. 835(b), an effect is executed in which the character 1810 attacks the enemy character 1811 and wins the confrontation. In addition, even when the result of the corresponding second special symbol lottery is a jackpot, the same effect is executed. Also, although illustration is omitted, when the game ball does not pass through the specific area during the small winning game executed by winning the small winning, the time saving state continues, so the second enemy character appears, The effect is resumed from the card effect (see FIG. 834(a)). In this case, the element (each special symbol fluctuation frequency) for establishing the time saving end condition is taken over.

The value of life displayed in the small area Dm8 can be changed in display mode every time the element (special figure 2 fluctuation number) for establishing the special figure 2 time saving end condition is updated, basically , When the special figure 2 variation is executed, the display value is reduced by 1 effect is executed. However, when the special figure 2 time saving end condition and the display value are completely associated, when a small special figure 2 fluctuation number (for example, 1 time) is set as the special figure 2 time saving end condition, the card effect is Immediately after the execution, the player is made to grasp the content of the special figure 2 o'clock shortening end condition, which causes a problem of lowering the player's desire to play.

On the other hand, in the fiftieth embodiment, even if a small number of special figures 2 fluctuations (for example, once) is set as the special figure 2 time saving end condition, a large number of special figures 2 fluctuations (for example, 10 times) is set, the display value of the life displayed in the small area Dm8 is displayed to be "3". Thereby, it is possible to prevent the content of the special figure 2 time saving end condition from being grasped by the display value of the life displayed in the small area Dm8.

In this case, as the attack pattern of the enemy character 1811, the production mode of the confrontation production is determined so that a weak attack, a medium attack, and a strong attack are executed, and a special figure 2 that can be executed before the time saving end condition is satisfied. Based on the number of changes and the display value displayed in the small area Dm8, the attack type is determined, and the display value of the life that decreases with one attack is changed according to the determined attack type. Configure.

By configuring in this way, regardless of the time saving end condition actually set, in the confrontation production, the attack type (for example, strong attack) that greatly reduces the display value of life with one attack is not determined. You can enjoy the production while expecting something. In addition, since the game can be played with a game feature that is easy for the player to understand that the time saving state ends when the display value of life becomes 0, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

Next, with reference to FIG.836(b) and FIG.837, the content of the production|presentation in time saving C mode is demonstrated. Figure 836 (b) is a diagram showing the display screen of the effect executed during the time saving C mode, Figure 837 is a game that is easy to end the time saving state by winning the normal figure per B in the time saving C mode It is a display screen showing that the situation has been established.

Details will be described later, but when the time saving C is set as the time saving type, the general pattern per A (the general pattern per type that makes it easy to execute the second special symbol lottery) and the general pattern per B (the first special symbol It is configured to be selected at an equal rate, and the time-saving end condition is that the first special pattern lottery (fluctuation) is executed 5 times, Alternatively, it is configured to set a time saving end condition that is established when the number of times the second special symbol lottery (fluctuation) is executed reaches five times.

Therefore, when the time-saving C mode is set, the duration of the time-saving state and the number of executions of the second special symbol lottery advantageous to the player are determined according to the lottery result of the normal symbol lottery. Become. In this way, the degree of advantage to the player during the time-saving state is greatly different according to the lottery result of the normal pattern lottery, thereby making the player have a great interest in the lottery result of the normal pattern lottery. It is possible to provide a novel game property that can be done.

In addition, in the 50th embodiment, when the time saving C is set, the general pattern per A (the general pattern per type that makes it easy to execute the second special symbol lottery) and the general pattern per B (the first special symbol lottery It is configured to be selected at an equal rate, but without equalizing the selection rate, either one is configured to be more easily selected than the other. can be

In addition, the time saving end condition is also established when the number of times the first special symbol lottery (variation) is executed is five times, or the number of times the second special symbol lottery (variation) is executed reaches five times. However, the time-saving end condition may be set so that the number of fluctuations of the other is greater than the number of fluctuations of one.

Furthermore, in the fiftieth embodiment, the time-saving end condition is established according to the number of special symbol fluctuations, but is not limited to this, and is established according to, for example, the number of times a specific loss is won. If the time-saving end condition is provided, and the number of times the result of the first special symbol lottery wins a specific loss reaches the first number, or the number of times the result of the second special symbol lottery wins a specified loss is the second You may comprise so that time saving end conditions may be materialized when it reaches|attains the frequency|count.

As shown in FIG. 836(b), in the time saving C mode production, the display mode indicating the number of remaining time saving times displayed in the small area Dm6 is " ?times” is displayed. In other words, the player is informed that it is not known when the time saving state will end. Then, as a guide mode indicating the display mode displayed on the back side of the card 1800, the sub-display area Ds displays the characters "Turn over the card, continue time saving if chance, end time saving if out". Other contents are the same as the presentation shown in FIG. 834(a), so detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Then, when the characters "out" are displayed on the back of the card, as shown in FIG. , the special figure 1 non-electric accessory 3064a is activated, and an image for guiding the entry of the game ball into the right first ball entrance 3064 is displayed in the small area Dm20.

<Regarding the electrical configuration in the fiftieth embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 838 to 841, the contents of the electrical configuration in the fiftieth embodiment will be described. In the fiftieth embodiment, in contrast to the above-described forty-sixth embodiment, the configuration of the ROM 202 of the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110 is replaced with the first winning random number 21 table 202ta instead of the first winning random number 17 table 202pa. Instead of the 1st per type selection 17 table 202pb, the first per type selection 21 table 202tb, the small per type selection 21 table 202te instead of the small per type selection 17 table 202pe, and the normal type per type selection 17 table pf The difference is that the type selection 17 table tf per normal figure is replaced with the time reduction 17 table 202pg and the time reduction 20 table 201tg is provided. In addition, as the configuration of the RAM203 that the MPU201 of the main control unit 110 has, it is different in that a special figure 1 fluctuation counter 203ta is provided. Other than that, since they are the same, detailed description is omitted.

First, the contents of the first winning random number 21 table 202ta will be described with reference to FIG. 838(a). FIG. 838(a) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the first winning random number 21 table 202ta. As shown in FIG. 838(a), the first winning random number 21 table 202ta reduces the probability of winning a small winning in the second special symbol lottery from about 1/2 to about The difference is that it is lowered to 1/3, and the rest is the same, so detailed description will be omitted.

Next, the contents of the first winning type selection 21 table 202tb will be described with reference to FIG. 838(b). FIG. 838(b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the first win type selection 21 table 202tb. This first hit type selection 21 table 202tb is different from the above-described first hit type selection 17 table 202pb in that the jackpot type defined corresponding to the first special symbol is different. Other than that, they are the same, so detailed description is omitted.

Specifically, the type of the special symbol is the first special symbol, and the value of the acquired first winning type counter C2 is in the range of "0 to 19" and the jackpot A21 is in the range of "20 to 29". B21 defines a jackpot C21 in the range of "30 to 69" and a jackpot D21 in the range of "70 to 99".

Here, when the jackpot A21 is set as the jackpot type, the same jackpot game as the jackpot A17 in the forty-sixth embodiment described above, and the time saving type after the jackpot game ends are set (9R time saving B jackpot), When the jackpot B21 to jackpot D21 are set, the 4R time-saving jackpot is set.

The jackpot B21 has a 4R time-saving A1 jackpot, the jackpot C21 has a 4R time-saving A2 jackpot, and the jackpot D21 has a 4R time-saving A3 jackpot. A grant 21 table 202tg is defined.

Next, with reference to FIG. 839(a), the contents of the small hit type selection 21 table 202te will be described. FIG. 839(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the small hit type selection 21 table 202te. As shown in Figure 839 (a), the small hit type selection 21 table 202te differs from the above-described small hit type selection 17 table 202pe in the content of the small hit type set when the small hit is won. is different. Other than that, they are identical.

Specifically, the value of the small hit type counter C5 is defined in the range of "0 to 49" in association with "small hit A21" as the small hit type (202te1 in FIG. 839 (a) reference). This "small hit A21" is a big hit game corresponding to "big hit F21" (10 rounds short time B big hit) based on the fact that the game ball entered the specific area (V gate) 3650v during the small hit game. It is a small hit type to be executed.

Of the 100 counter values that the value of the small hit type counter C5 can take, 50 counter values are "small hit A21", so if a special symbol lottery results in a small hit, "small hit A21" The ratio determined is 50% (50/100).

In addition, the value of the small hit type counter C5 is defined in the range of "50 to 79" in association with "small hit B21" as the small hit type (see 202te2 in FIG. 839(a)). This "small hit B21" is a small hit type in which a part of the content of the correspondingly defined big hit type is different from the above-described "small hit B21", and "small hit A21" (5 rounds (5R)) jackpot type "jackpot G21" is defined.

In addition, for the range of "80 to 99" for the value of the small hit type counter C5, "small hit C21" is defined in association with the small hit type (see 202te2 in FIG. 839(a)). This "small hit C21" is based on the fact that the game ball enters the specific area (V gate) 3650v during the small hit game, and the big hit game corresponding to "big hit H21" (5 rounds short time C big hit) It is a small hit type to be executed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 839(b), the detailed contents of the per normal pattern type selection 21 table 202tf will be described. FIG. 839(b) is a diagram showing the contents defined in the per normal figure type selection 21 table 202tf. This general pattern per type selection 21 table 202tf is a data table that is referred to when determining the general pattern per type that is set in the case of winning in the normal pattern lottery, and the set time reduction type and acquisition Different types per normal map (per normal map A, per normal map B, per normal map C) are defined in association with the value of the per normal map type counter C6.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 839 (b), the time saving type is "time saving A1" to "time saving A3", and the value of the acquired normal figure type counter C6 is in the range of "0 to 9" , "Per normal map A" is determined as the type per normal map, and the value of the acquired per normal map type counter C6 is "10 to 99", and "B per normal map" is determined as the type per normal map. , and for the time saving type "time saving B", the value of the acquired type counter C6 per normal figure is in the range of "0 to 99", that is, the value of the acquired type counter C6 per normal figure Regardless, it is configured so that "per normal figure A" is determined. In addition, the time saving type is “time saving C”, and the value of the acquired normal figure per type counter C6 is in the range of “0 to 49”, and the normal figure per type is “normal figure per A”. When the value of the per-figure type counter C6 is "50 to 99", the per-figure per type is determined as the per-figure per type B.

That is, in the fiftieth embodiment, in contrast to the above-described forty-sixth embodiment, if the time reduction type is "time reduction A", regardless of the type, A (10 %), and B (90%) per normal figure. In addition, when the time saving type is "time saving C", it is configured to be selected at the same rate as A (50%) per normal pattern and B (50%) per normal pattern.

By configuring in this way, when the time saving type is "time saving A", the game per normal figure per normal figure A is realistically executed, and according to the set time saving end condition, the time saving state is It is possible to make it easier to vary the period until the end. Further, when the time saving type is "time saving C", it is possible to determine which special symbol lottery is executed during the time saving state according to the result of the normal symbol lottery.

Next, with reference to FIG. 840, the contents of the time reduction provision 21 table 202tg will be described. Drawing 840 is a figure showing the contents of time reduction provision 21 table 202tg. As shown in Figure 840, in the time saving grant 21 table 202tg, for the time saving A1 ~ A3, the value set to the special figure 2 fluctuation counter 203pa, that is, the special figure until the special figure 2 time saving end condition is satisfied Different values are defined for the two fluctuation times.

Specifically, for the time saving type "time saving A1", "10" as the value of the special figure 2 variation counter 203pa for the time saving type "time saving A2", the special figure 2 variation number counter 203pa "1" as a value, for the time saving type "time saving A1", "5" is defined as the value of the special figure 2 fluctuation counter 203pa.

That is, when the time saving A1 is set, the special figure 2 time saving end condition is satisfied when the special figure 2 fluctuation number reaches 10 times, and when the time saving A2 is set, the special figure 2 fluctuation number If the special figure 2 time saving end condition is established when reaching 1 times, and if the time saving A3 is set, the special figure 2 time saving end condition is established when the special figure 2 fluctuation number reaches 5 times is configured as By configuring in this way, when the time saving state of time saving A is set, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to grasp how many times the special figure 2 variation can be executed during the time saving state.

In addition, for the time saving type "time saving C", "5" is defined as the value of the special figure 1 variation counter 203ta, and "5" is defined as the value of the special figure 2 variation counter 203pa. That is, when "time saving C" is set, the timing at which the time saving end condition is satisfied can be greatly varied depending on the type of the special symbol lottery executed during the time saving state.

Next, referring to FIG. 841, the configuration of the RAM 203 of the main controller 110 in the fiftieth embodiment will be described. The 50th embodiment differs from the above-described 46th embodiment in that a special figure 1 variation counter 203ta is added. Other than that, they are identical.

Special figure 1 variation counter 203ta is a counter for measuring the number of executions of the first special symbol lottery (variation) executed during the time saving state, and in the time saving update process 21 (see S40271 in FIG. 843), The value is subtracted when it is determined that the executed special symbol variation is the first special variation. Then, when determining whether or not the time saving end condition is satisfied, the value after the subtraction is referred to (see S40285 in FIG. 843).

<Regarding control processing in the fiftieth embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 842 and 843, the contents of control processing in the fiftieth embodiment will be described. In the fiftieth embodiment, the special symbol variation processing 21 (S191 in FIG. 842) is executed in which the contents of the time saving update processing are different from the special symbol variation processing 17 in contrast to the above-described forty-sixth embodiment. are different, and otherwise identical. A detailed description of the same contents will be omitted.

Next, the contents of the time saving update process 21 (S40271) will be described. FIG. 843 is a flowchart showing the contents of the time saving update process 21 (S40271). In this time saving update process 21 (S40271), as a process for determining the establishment of the time saving end condition, the process of updating the value of the special figure 1 fluctuation counter 203ta (S40281) and the value of the special figure 1 fluctuation number counter 203ta is 0 (S40285). A detailed description of the same contents will be omitted.

<Fifty-first Embodiment>
Next, the fifty-first embodiment will be described. Specifically, referring to FIG. 844, the game board configuration of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in the fifty-first embodiment will be described. FIG. 844 is a front view schematically showing the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in the fifty-first embodiment. As shown in FIG. 844, in the fifty-first embodiment, the configuration of the operating device 3070 is changed with respect to the game board configuration of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in the above-described forty-sixth embodiment (see FIG. 779). , and that the arrangement position of the variable winning device 3650 is changed. Other configurations are the same, and the same configurations are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed descriptions thereof are omitted.

In the fifty-first embodiment, the special figure 1 non-electric opening 3073a, the special figure 1 non-electric accessory 3064a, and the right first entrance 3064 are deleted from the above-described forty-sixth embodiment. , and when the time-saving state is set, the second special symbol lottery is configured to be executed more easily than in the normal state. Furthermore, the closing condition of the special figure 2 non-electric accessory 3065a is different. In the fifty-first embodiment, the closure condition is established when four game balls enter the second ball entrance 3065a. This embodiment differs from the above-described forty-sixth embodiment in that the

In the forty-sixth embodiment to the fiftieth embodiment described above, as a non-electric accessory, a game ball can be entered into the right first ball entrance 3064 that triggers the execution of the first special symbol lottery. A special figure 1 non-electric accessory 3064a that can be changed to a difficult closed state, an open state in which a game ball can be entered into a second ball entrance 3065 that is an execution machine for the second special symbol lottery, A special figure 2 non-electric accessory 3065a that can be changed to a closed state that is difficult to enter is provided, and when a time saving state (low probability state of special symbols, high probability state of normal symbols) is set, In order to make it easier to operate any non-electric accessory, within the area (within the operating device 3070) where the game ball is entered during the game per normal game, To operate the special figure 1 non-electric accessory 3064a A special figure 1 non-electrical operation port 3073a and a special figure 2 non-electrical operation port 3073b for operating the special figure 2 non-electrical accessory 3065a are provided, A special symbol lottery is made easier to execute than during a normal state in which a winning game is difficult to execute.

Furthermore, in order to suppress the fact that the time saving state ends while the non-electric accessory is in the open state (operating state) and the normal state is set, in the above-described forty-eighth embodiment, the special figure 2 non-electric operating member 3274a (Special Figure 2 operating mechanism 3274b) The game ball (the game ball that flows down the third flow path 3270 (c)) passes through the special figure 2 non-electric accessory 3265a that is in the open state (entering the ball ) was configured to Further, in the forty-ninth embodiment described above, when the time saving mode set during the time saving state is the special figure 2 time saving mode advantageous to the player, the end of the time saving state (the second special executed during the time saving state When the number of executions of the pattern lottery exceeds 5 times), the operation pattern of the normal figure winning game is switched so that the special figure 1 non-electric accessory 3064a can be easily operated.

By configuring in this way, when the time saving state ends and the normal state is set, it is possible to easily execute the second special symbol lottery advantageous to the player, that is, the special figure 2 non-electric It is possible to suppress the accessory 3065b from being activated (opened state), and to suppress the execution of a game that is excessively advantageous to the player.

In addition, in each of the above-described embodiments, the variable prize winning device (attacker) 3650, which is opened when a jackpot game is executed, is provided below the right area of the game board 13, and during the jackpot game, it is normal Since it is configured so that the low probability state of the pattern is set, when the jackpot game is executed, the non-electric role (special figure 1 non-electric role 3064a, special figure 2 non-electric role 3065a) is activated. Even if it is in the state, any of the game balls fired by the right-handed game during the jackpot game is a non-electric role (special figure 1 non-electric role 3064a, special figure 2 non-electric role 3065a) By entering the ball, the non-electrical accessories (special figure 1 non-electrical accessory 3064a, special figure 2 non-electrical accessory 3065a) can be switched to the non-operating state (closed state). rice field.

That is, in each of the above-described embodiments, the game state is switched while the non-electric accessory (special figure 1 non-electric accessory 3064a, special figure 2 non-electric accessory 3065a) is activated (open state). By suppressing , the player is given a special value for the game during the time saving state, and can be motivated to play the game with the aim of playing the game during the time saving state. rice field.

On the other hand, in the fifty-first embodiment, the variable winning device (attacker) 3650, which is opened during the jackpot game, is positioned below the central portion of the game board 13, that is, the game ball fired by the left-handed game , are arranged at positions where game balls shot by right-handed games can also enter. More specifically, a variable winning device (attacker) is provided so that the game ball can be won more efficiently by shooting the game ball in the right-handed game than in the case of shooting the game ball in the left-handed game. 3650 is installed.

By configuring in this way, the game content (right-handed game, left-handed game) during the jackpot game is sent to the player according to the situation at the time the jackpot game is executed (operation status of the non-electric role) It is possible to provide a novel game property that allows selection.

More specifically, in the fifty-first embodiment, when the special-figure 2 non-electric accessory 3065a is not in operation at the time the jackpot game is executed, the game ball is efficiently transferred to the variable winning device (attacker) 3650 When the game is played in a right-handed game that can be made to win, and the special figure 2 non-electric accessory 3065a is operating at the time when the jackpot game is executed, it is set after the jackpot game ends. Based on the prediction result of the game state and the remaining information until the closing condition of the special figure 2 non-electric accessory 3065a is satisfied (the number of game balls that have already entered the second ball entrance 3065), during the jackpot game Even if the number of game balls to be awarded to the variable winning device (attacker) 3650 is reduced (even if the ratio of the number of game balls won to the number of game balls fired is low), the special figure 2 non-electric accessory 3065a If it is determined that the jackpot game is terminated while the is activated, the left-handed game is determined to be no problem even if the special figure 2 non-electric auditor 3065a is switched to the non-operating state (for example, When the time-saving state is set after the end of the jackpot game, the game is configured to allow the player to select the right-handed game.

In this way, the player can select the game method during the jackpot game depending on the operation status of the special figure 2 non-electric accessory 3065a at the time the jackpot game is executed and the game state set after the jackpot game ends. By configuring as above, it is possible to provide a new game property of continuing the operation state of the special figure 2 non-electric accessory 3065a across the jackpot game.

Furthermore, in the fifty-first embodiment, the special figure 1 non-electric accessory 3064a is deleted from the above-described forty-sixth embodiment, and only the special figure 2 non-electric accessory 3065a is provided, and the special figure 2 non-electric When four game balls enter the accessory 3065a, the special figure 2 non-electric accessory 3065a in the open state is configured to be in the closed state. Then, in the second special symbol lottery executed based on the game ball entering the special figure 2 non-electric accessory 3065a entering the second ball entrance 3065, about 1/1.5 By winning a small prize with a probability and entering a game ball into a variable prize winning device (attacker) 3650 during a small prize game, the game ball can pass through a specific area in the variable prize winning device (attacker) 3650. configured to be possible. Furthermore, it is configured so that the execution right of the second special symbol lottery cannot be reserved and stored (there is no special figure 2 reserved storage function).

In other words, when the game ball is entered into the special figure 2 non-electric role 3065a during the jackpot game, it is not possible to acquire the right to execute the second special symbol lottery, and simply the special figure 2 non-electric role It is configured so that the condition for closing the object 3065a (four balls entering) is easily established.

In the fifty-first embodiment configured in this way, when the special figure 2 non-electric role product 3065a is activated, a maximum of 4 times until the operated special figure 2 non-electric role product 3065a is closed. It is possible to execute a jackpot game of . In addition, the special figure 2 non-electric accessory 3065a does not satisfy the closing condition due to the elapsed time after being activated, the switching of the game state, etc., and the number of balls entering the special figure 2 non-electric accessory 3065a is predetermined. Since it is configured so that the closing condition is satisfied only when the number (4 pieces) is reached, for example, after the jackpot game ends, the time saving state is set, the special figure 2 non-electric accessory 3065a operates, and the second Even if the normal state is set after the jackpot game executed based on the entry of the game ball to the entrance 3065, even if the special figure 2 non-electric accessory 3065a continues to be in the open state For example, although the normal state is set, it is possible to easily enter the game ball into the second ball entrance 3065 .

That is, when a game is executed to efficiently enter the game ball to the special figure 2 non-electric accessory 3065a, the normal state is set after the end of the jackpot game. To provide a player with a game capable of executing the next jackpot game with a high probability even if the player wins the prize.

On the other hand, when the number of balls entering the special figure 2 non-electric accessory 3065a is 3, the jackpot game is executed, and when the time saving state is set after the jackpot game ends, the special figure is displayed during the jackpot game. It is better to establish the closing condition of the 2 non-electric role 3065a and to perform a game that newly activates the special figure 2 non-electric role 3065a after the jackpot game ends, while continuing the special figure 2 non-electric role 3065a. can be made easier.

Thus, in the fifty-first embodiment, the activated special figure 2 non-electric accessory 3065a is configured to be closed (close condition is established) by entering a plurality of (four) game balls. Therefore, according to the number of remaining balls until the closing condition is satisfied and the game state set after the end of the jackpot game, the special figure 2 non-electric accessory 3065a is operating at the time the jackpot game is executed. Even so, the player can choose whether to execute a left-handed game or a right-handed game. Therefore, since the player can select a game method based on various factors, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

Furthermore, in the fifty-first embodiment, as the effect executed during the jackpot game (during the jackpot game effect), a game state suggestion mode for suggesting a game state set after the jackpot game ends, and a special figure 2 non-electric When the accessory 3065a is activated, it is configured to be able to execute the effect during the jackpot game, including the remaining number suggesting mode for suggesting the number of remaining balls until the closing condition is satisfied. By configuring in this way, the player can grasp the effect mode of the effect during the jackpot game executed during the jackpot game, and the merit when each game method (left-handed game, right-handed game) is selected. It is possible to select which game method to play while predicting the disadvantages. Therefore, it is possible to make the player interested in the performance being executed, to enhance the performance effect, and to make the player select an excessively disadvantageous game method, thereby increasing the desire to play the game. can be suppressed from significantly decreasing.

<Fifty-Second Embodiment>
Next, the fifty-second embodiment will be described. Specifically, referring to FIG. 845, the board configuration of the game board 13 in the pachinko machine 10 of the fifty-second embodiment will be described. FIG. 845 is a front view schematically showing the game board 13 in the pachinko machine 10 of the fifty-second embodiment. In the fifty-first embodiment described above, when the jackpot game is executed in the state (open state) in which the special figure 2 non-electric role product 3065a is operated, the special figure 2 non-electric role product 3065a is maintained in the open state. It is configured so that the player can select whether or not to end the game according to the game method executed during the jackpot game.

On the other hand, in the fifty-second embodiment, in contrast to the fifty-first embodiment described above, the variable winning device (attacker) 3650 that is opened during the small winning game and the second variable winning device that is opened during the big winning game A variable winning device (second attacker) 3565 is provided, the variable winning device 3650 is arranged at a position where only the game ball fired in the right-handed game can win, and the second variable winning device 3565 is used in the right-handed game. The point that the game ball fired by the left-handed game is more likely to win than the game ball fired by, and the game ball fired by the right-handed game is a special figure 2 non-electric accessory 3065a, or a second flow path that cannot reach the special figure 2 non-electric accessory 3065a. .

In other words, in the fifty-second embodiment, the right-handed game is performed during the small winning game executed when the small winning is won in the second special symbol lottery, and the right-hand hitting game is used during the small winning game Variable winning device Whether the game ball passes through a specific area (V gate) in 3650 or whether the closing condition of the special figure 2 non-electric accessory 3065a in the open state (operating state) is satisfied depends on the right-handed game It is greatly different from the fifty-first embodiment described above in that it is configured to be determined by the behavior of the shot game ball.

Then, in the big win game executed based on the game ball passing through the specific area (V gate) during the small win game, the left hitting game is more advantageous to the player than the right hitting game. Since it is configured, since it is configured to make the player execute the game during the jackpot game in the left-handed game, the game launched during the jackpot game in which the game period is longer than the small hit game It is different from the fifty-first embodiment described above in that it is configured such that the closed condition of the special figure 2 non-electric accessory 3065a is difficult to be established by the ball.

As described above, in the fifty-second embodiment, similarly to the fifty-first embodiment described above, the jackpot game is ended without closing the special figure 2 non-electric accessory 3065a that is in the operating state (open state). In this case, after the jackpot game is over, a game situation advantageous to the player (by maintaining the special figure 2 non-electric role 3065a in the open state, the second special symbol lottery can be easily executed game situation) can be created.

In addition, in contrast to the fifty-first embodiment described above, a game method in which the closing condition of the special figure 2 non-electric role product 3065a in the open state can be satisfied, and a game during a winning game that is executed based on winning a special symbol It is configured so that the overlapping period between the game method most advantageous to the player and the game method is shortened. In other words, in the fifty-first embodiment described above, in both the small winning game period in which the small winning game is executed and the big winning game period in which the big winning game is executed, the special figure 2 non-electric accessory 3065a in the open state is closed While it is configured to execute a game (right-handed game) in which the condition can be established, in the 52nd embodiment, the special figure 2 non-electric accessory 3065a in the open state only during the small winning game period It is configured to execute a game (right-handed game) in which the closing condition can be satisfied.

Here, the pachinko machine 10 in the fifty-first embodiment described above aims to reliably acquire prize balls that can be given during the jackpot game, so that the closing condition of the special figure 2 non-electric accessory 3065a can be established. The player is asked whether to perform a right-handed game or to perform a left-handed game in which it is difficult to obtain award balls that can be given during the big hit game in order to aim not to establish the closing condition of the special figure 2 non-electric accessory 3065a. In the 52nd embodiment, the execution condition of the big hit game is satisfied (passage of the game ball to the specific area (V gate) by the right hitting game during the small hit game) ), it is configured to be able to provide a playability that entertains whether or not the closing condition of the special figure 2 non-electric accessory 3065a is satisfied. That is, in the fifty-first embodiment described above, there are two advantageous games that are advantageous to the player, namely, a game in which the special figure 2 non-electric accessory 3065a is not closed, or a game in which a prize ball is surely acquired during the big win game. In contrast, in the fifty-second embodiment, when a specific condition is satisfied (during a small winning game The difference is that the above-described two advantageous games can be executed in the case where the condition for executing the jackpot game is established without establishing the closing condition for the special figure 2 non-electric accessory 3065a.

By constructing in this way, it is possible for the player to largely vary the subsequent game contents depending on the result of the right-handed game in the period during which the small winning game is executed which is shorter than the period during which the big winning game is executed. Therefore, it is possible to make the player more interested in the contents of the game in a short period of time.

In addition, in the fifty-second embodiment, the operation status of the special figure 2 non-electric role product 3065a at the time when the small winning game is executed is indefinite, and the special figure 2 non-electric role product 3065a is not operated. There is also a possibility that a winning game will be executed. Therefore, for example, when a game ball passes through an execution area (execution gate) in a state where a small hit is won in the second special symbol lottery, a small hit game is executed, and a game ball that has passed through the execution area is It is good to configure so as to provide a special figure 2 non-electric opening that serves as a trigger for operating the special figure 2 non-electric accessory 3065a at a position that can enter.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to suppress the execution of the small winning game while the special figure 2 non-electric role product 3065a is in the closed state (not operated). Also, when the special figure 2 non-electric accessary 3065a is in the closed state (unoperated), the small hit is won, and the game ball that has passed through the execution area enters the special figure 2 non-electric opening, the second Since it is possible to make it easier to start a small hit game in a state where no game ball is entered into the 2 ball entrance 3065, the special figure 2 non-electric accessory 3065a ends the big hit game while it is open. can be made easier.

Also, if a small hit is won in a state where several (for example, two) game balls have already been entered into the second ball entrance 3065, before the small hit game is executed (execution area (Before passing the game ball to), once the closed condition of the special figure 2 non-electric accessory 3065a in the open state is established, then the novel game aiming to pass the game ball to the execution area can provide sexuality.

<Modification of the 48th embodiment>
Next, a modification of the forty-eighth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. The modification of the forty-eighth embodiment differs from the pachinko machine 10 of the forty-eighth embodiment in that an actuation device 13270 is provided in place of the actuation device 3270 (see FIG. 828).

In the forty-eighth embodiment described above, the game ball that has flowed into the actuation device 3270 comes into contact with the special figure 2 non-electrically operated member 3274a by flowing down the third flow path 3270c, and comes into contact with the special figure 2 non-electrical By rotating the operating member 3274a clockwise, it was configured to operate the special figure 2 non-electric accessory 3265a in the closed state (variable to the open state). Then, after the game ball in contact with the special figure 2 non-electrically operated member 3274a flows down the fourth flow path 3270d and is discharged from the operating device 3270, the special figure 2 non-electrically operated member 3265a which is in the open state (operating state) It was configured to enter the ball.

On the other hand, in the modification of the forty-eighth embodiment, the game ball that has flowed into the actuator 3270 is not discharged out of the actuator 3270, and any entering ball provided inside the actuator 3270 The difference is that the ball is configured to enter the mouth (actuation mouth). Furthermore, each ball entrance (actuation opening) and each ball entrance (actuation opening) as a discharge route for discharging game balls that have entered each ball entrance (actuation opening) provided inside the actuator 3270 to the outside of the pachinko machine 10 The connected discharge paths are configured to merge, and detection means capable of detecting the passage of the game ball is provided in the confluence path where the game balls flowing down the discharge paths flow down, and the detection means detects the game ball. The difference is that it is configured so that prize balls (for example, two balls) can be awarded based on what has been done.

That is, the modification of the forty-eighth embodiment flows into the actuating device 3270 and operates the special figure 2 non-electric actuation member 3274a for varying the special figure 2 non-electric accessory 3265a from the closed state to the open state It is configured to close the special figure 2 non-electric accessory 3265a in the open state by entering the opened game ball into the special figure 2 non-electric accessory 3265a in the open state. That is, it is the same as the forty-eighth embodiment described above in that it is configured so that a single game ball can establish an opening opportunity for the special figure 2 non-electric accessory 3265a and can establish a closing opportunity. However, it is different from the forty-eighth embodiment described above in that the game ball that has flowed into the operating device 3270 is not discharged from the operating device 3270 to the game area.

By configuring in this way, the game state shifts from the time saving state to the normal state while the special figure 2 non-electric operating member 3274a is held in the open state, and the second special symbol lottery is easily executed in the normal state. You can prevent it from being done.

In addition, since the game ball that has flowed into the actuation device 3270 is not discharged to the game area, the game ball in contact with the special figure 2 non-electrically operated member 3274a game ball), after being ejected from the operating device 3270, enter the variable prize winning device 3650, and it is possible to prevent a single game ball from imparting an excessively advantageous privilege to the player. can. In addition, since the outlet for discharging the game ball that has flowed into the operating device 3270 from the operating device 3270 to the game area is blocked, for example, a jig may be inserted from the outlet of the operating device 3270 to illegally It is possible to suppress the action of actuating the special figure 2 non-electrically actuating member 3274a.

<Fifty-third embodiment>
Next, the fifty-third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 847 to 859. FIG. The fifty-third embodiment is different from the above-described forty-sixth embodiment in that the method of setting the jackpot type that is set when the jackpot is won in the special symbol lottery, and the method that is set when the small win is won in the second special symbol lottery. It is greatly different in that it is different from the setting method of the small hit type (jackpot type).

In the forty-sixth embodiment described above, when the jackpot is won in the special symbol lottery, the first hit type selection table 202pb (see FIG. 796 (a)) is referred to determine the jackpot type, and the second special symbol lottery When the small hit is elected, the small hit type is determined by referring to the small hit type selection 17 table 202pe (see FIG. 797 (a)).

In other words, the big win type set when the big win is won and the small win type set when the small win is won are determined by lottery. With this configuration, it is possible to provide the player with the pleasure of predicting which winning type will be determined as each winning type.

However, the player cannot select the type of win desired by the player, and for example, for the player who desires a game in which the game of the pachinko machine 10 is executed for a long time, the time-saving end condition is established early as the time-saving state. There is a problem that the time saving type "time saving B" to be obtained is set, and the player's willingness to play is lowered.

On the other hand, the fifty-third embodiment is greatly different from the forty-sixth embodiment described above in that the player can select the time-saving type that is set after the end of the jackpot game. Other configurations are the same as those of the forty-sixth embodiment described above, and the same configurations are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, referring to FIG. 847, the configuration of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in the fifty-third embodiment will be described. FIG. 847 is a front view schematically showing the configuration of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in the fifty-third embodiment. As shown in FIG. 847, the pachinko machine 10 in the fifty-third embodiment differs from the above-described forty-sixth embodiment in that the configuration of the right side area of the game board 13 is different. Specifically, the difference is that a sorting device 10680 is arranged above the right side area of the game board 13 and a variable winning device 13650 is provided instead of the variable winning device 3650 . Other configurations are the same, and the same reference numerals are given to the same contents, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, the configuration of the sorting device 10680 will be described. Note that the sorting device 10680 of the fifty-third embodiment is a variation of the sorting device 680 of the above-described fourth embodiment, and since the detailed configuration is the same, the description thereof will be partially omitted.

Inside the distribution device 10680, there are provided two operation winning openings (right operation winning opening 10681, left operation winning opening 10682) into which game balls can enter. Both of these two operation winning openings are determined to be valid for entry of game balls only during the jackpot standby state. In the jackpot standby state, when the game ball enters the right-acting winning port 10681, the jackpot game is started and "time-saving B" is set as the time-saving type, and the game ball moves to the left-acting winning port 10682. When a ball is entered, a jackpot game is started and "time saving A" is set as the time saving type. In other words, the above-described two operation winning openings (right operation winning opening 10681, left operation winning opening 10682) are used to shift the state of the pachinko machine 10 from the jackpot waiting state to the jackpot gaming state by the entry of a game ball. and a means for determining the time saving type in the time saving state set after the end of the jackpot game.

In addition, above the two operation winning openings (right operating winning opening 10681, left operating winning opening 10682), a distribution member for distributing the game balls entered into the distribution device 10680 to either of the operating winning openings 10683 is provided. This sorting member 10683 is configured to be rotatable about a shaft 10683a as a rotation axis. The arrangement (see the dashed line in FIG. 847) is changed alternately. When the distribution member 10683 is arranged to tilt to the right side, the upper side of the right operation winning opening 10681 is blocked by the distribution member 10683 and the upper side of the left operation winning opening 10682 is opened. Therefore, the game ball entering the distribution device 10680 while the distribution member 10683 is tilted to the right is tilted from the upper right direction in front view to the lower left direction in front view, which is formed by the distribution member 10683. It flows downward along the left direction and enters the left operation winning opening 10682.

On the other hand, when the distribution member 10683 is tilted to the left, the upper side of the right operation winning opening 10681 is opened and the upper side of the left operation winning opening 10682 is blocked by the distribution member 10683 . Therefore, the game ball entering the distribution device 10680 while the distribution member 10683 is tilted to the left is tilted from the upper left direction in the front view to the lower right direction in the front view, which is formed by the distribution member 10683. , and enters the right-hand winning opening 10681 .

As described above, in the fifty-third embodiment, when the jackpot standby state is entered, the disposition of the distributing member 10683 is switched every two seconds. By entering the game ball at the timing when the game ball can be entered into the operation winning hole corresponding to , it is possible to provide the game property that matches the taste of each player.

Between the right-operating winning opening 10681 and the left-operating winning opening 10682, when the game ball entered the distribution device 10680 does not enter any of the operation winning openings, the game ball is distributed to the distribution device. An out port is provided for discharging to the outside of the 10680. By providing this outlet, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the occurrence of problems such as ball clogging inside the sorting device 10680 .

Further, as shown in FIG. 847, in the fifty-third embodiment, the sorting device 10680 is provided on the upper side of the right side area, and the game balls shot by the player operating the operation handle 51 are directed to the sorting device 10680. It is configured so that it takes about 0.5 seconds to reach it. Also, on the trajectory of the launched game ball until it reaches the sorting device 10680, it is configured so that no member (such as a nail) is provided to change the moving direction (flowing direction) of the game ball. ing. In other words, the configuration is such that the game balls fired in a time shorter than the interval (two-second intervals) at which the arrangement of the distribution members 10683 is switched can reach the distribution device 10680, and the game balls reach the distribution device 10680. It is configured so that it is difficult for variation to occur in the time required to complete the process.

Therefore, even if the game ball is shot after visually confirming the tilting state of the distribution member 10683 in the distribution device 10680, the game ball can easily reach the distribution device 10680 before the tilting state of the distribution member 10683 is switched. be able to.

Next, the configuration of the variable winning device 13650 will be described. This variable winning device 13650, like the variable winning device 3650 of the forty-sixth embodiment described above, is a winning device that is opened in a small winning game that is executed based on winning a small winning in the second special symbol lottery. be. The variable winning device 13650 is provided with two specific areas (V gates), and a game ball that has entered the variable winning device 13650 during a small winning game has passed through one of the specific areas (V gates). Based on, the big winning game is executed after the small winning game ends. Then, it is configured to determine the time saving type of the time saving state set after the jackpot game ends based on the type of the specific area (V gate) through which the game ball passes.

In addition, although detailed description will be described later with reference to FIG. A specific area (V gate) through which the ball passes is configured to be selectable by the player.

By configuring in this way, when the jackpot game is executed via the small hit game (when the jackpot game is executed based on entering the game ball into the specific area during the small hit game) However, it is also possible for the player to select the time-saving type of the time-saving state set after the jackpot game ends.

Here, the configuration of the variable winning device 13650 used in the fifty-third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 848 and 849. FIG. FIG. 848(a) is a diagram schematically showing the configuration of the variable winning device 13650 immediately after the start of the small winning game, and FIG. 848(b) shows 2.6 seconds after the small winning game is started. It is the figure which showed typically the structure of the variable winning device 13650 later. Also, FIG. 849 is a diagram schematically showing the flow of operation of each mechanism during a small winning game.

First, the detailed configuration of the variable winning device 13650 will be described with reference to FIG. 848(a). The variable prize winning device 13650 is provided with an opening/closing door 13650f on its upper surface, and the upper surface of the opening/closing door 13650f is arranged in a state in which the upper surface is slightly inclined downward to the left when viewed from the front. As a result, when the player hits to the right with the opening/closing door 13650f closed and the game ball reaches the upper surface of the variable winning device 13650, the reaching game ball moves along the slope of the variable winning device 13650. The ball can be made to flow down in the lower left direction in front view and enter the out hole 66 . Therefore, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the game ball shot to the right from remaining on the upper portion of the variable winning device 13650 (the upper surface of the opening/closing door 13650f).

Inside the variable winning device 13650, a first V winning opening 13651v, a second V winning opening 13652v, and a specific winning opening 13653 are provided. It becomes a specific area in which a jackpot game is executed based on the winning of a game ball inside. That is, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the fifty-third embodiment, two specific areas are provided in the variable prize winning device 13650 that is opened during the small winning game to trigger the execution of the big winning game.

Although detailed description will be described later, among these two specific areas (1st V winning opening 13651v, 2nd V winning opening 13652v), according to the type of specific area where the game ball entered earlier during the small hit game, It is configured to determine the time-saving type of the time-saving state set after the end of the jackpot game.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 848(a), the game balls that have entered the variable winning device 13650 are provided with a first regulating member 13650b and a second regulating member 13650c for flowing down toward the specific winning opening 13653. It is The first regulating member 13650b and the second regulating member 13650c are in a guidance state for guiding the game ball to the specific winning opening 13653, and without guiding the game ball to the specific winning opening 13653, the first V winning opening 13651v, Alternatively, it is variably configured to a release state in which the game ball can flow down (pass) toward the second V winning opening 13652v, and when a small winning game is executed, the small winning game is started. It is configured to be variably controlled according to a predetermined operation scenario based on the elapsed time since. Details of the variable control contents of the first restricting member 13650b and the second restricting member 13650c will be described later with reference to FIG.

In the variable winning device 13650, a 2nd V winning opening 13652v is disposed on the upstream side (front view right side) lower side of the opening/closing door 13650f, and the game ball that has flowed down (dropped) to the right side area from the specific winning opening 13653 enters the 2nd V. A bottom member formed between the specific winning opening 13653 and the second V winning opening 13652v is formed to be inclined downward from the specific winning opening 13653 toward the second V winning opening 13652v so as to enter the winning opening 13652v. ing.

On the other hand, a first V winning opening 13651v is provided downstream (left side in front view) of the opening/closing door 13650f, and a game ball that has flowed down (dropped) down the area on the left side of the specific winning opening 13653 enters the first V winning opening 13651v. , a bottom member formed between the specific winning opening 13653 and the first V winning opening 13651v is formed to be inclined downward from the specific winning opening 13653 toward the first V winning opening 13651v.

As shown in FIG. 848 (a), immediately after the small winning game is started (when the opening and closing door 13650f is first opened), both the first regulation member 13650b and the second regulation member 13650c are in the induced state. It is configured so that all the game balls that have entered the variable winning device 13650 will enter the specific winning port 13653 .

Here, in the pachinko machine 10 in the fifty-third embodiment, an opening operation scenario is defined in which the opening and closing door 13650f is opened multiple times (9 times) during one small winning game, and the first half of the small winning game The period is configured so that the period (interval period) from when the opening/closing door 13650f is closed to when it is next opened is shorter than the second half period, and the player can When the right-handed game is continuously executed, the first half period of the small winning game is an interval period (0.6 seconds) during which the game ball cannot reach the downstream side of the opening and closing door 13650f during the interval period. is set, and in the latter half of the small winning game, an interval period (1.2 seconds) is set during which the game ball can reach the downstream side of the open/close door 13650f during the interval period.

That is, during the first half period of the small winning game, the game ball that has won the variable winning device 13650 is likely to enter the second V winning port 13652v, and during the second half period of the small winning game, the game ball that has won the variable winning device 13650. is configured to easily enter the first winning port 13651v. By configuring in this way, by varying the game method (the timing of shooting the game ball) during the small winning game, the player can determine the type of the specific area through which the game ball passes (enters) during the small winning game. can be selected.

Here, when the opening and closing door 13650f is first opened by the small winning game, that is, when the opening and closing door 13650f which has been in the closed state continuously from before the small winning game is executed is in the open state. , the game ball may flow down at any position on the upper surface of the opening/closing door 13650f. If the opening/closing door 13650f is changed to the open state in such a situation, there is a possibility that the game ball may enter a specific area different from the specific area desired by the player.

On the other hand, in the fifty-third embodiment, a small winning game is executed, and the game ball that wins the variable winning device 13650 during the period when the open/close door 13650f is first opened is released to the outside of the variable winning device 13650. Variable control is performed so that the first restricting member 13650b and the second restricting member 13650c are in the induced state for a time (two seconds) sufficient for ejection. By configuring in this way, the game ball that has entered the variable winning device 13650 during the period when the open/close door 13650f is in the open state can ) without entering the game ball into the specific winning hole 13653, the problem of the game ball entering a specific area different from the specific area desired by the player is suppressed. can do.

In addition, in the fifty-third embodiment, as described above, the game ball that has won the variable prize winning device 13650 immediately after the small winning game is executed is configured not to physically enter the specific area. , The method used to achieve the same purpose is not limited to this, for example, during a predetermined period (2 seconds) after the start of the small winning game, assuming that the game ball enters the specific area Also, it may be controlled so that the execution opportunity of the jackpot game is not established. To suppress the occurrence of a situation in which a game ball winning a prize in a variable winning device 13650 immediately after execution of a small winning game establishes an opportunity to execute a big winning game even in the case of such a configuration. can be done.

Further, as shown in FIG. 848, the distance from the downstream side of the opening/closing door 13650f to the first V winning opening 13651v is shorter than the distance from the upstream side of the opening/closing door 13650f to the second V winning opening 13652v. is doing. In other words, when the opening/closing door 13650f is changed to the open state in a state in which game balls exist respectively on the downstream side and the upstream side of the opening/closing door 13650f, the game ball enters the second V winning opening 13652v. It is configured so that the game ball can be easily made to enter the first V winning port 13651v before doing so.

As described above, in the first half period of the small winning game, since the interval period is set so that the game ball is not located downstream of the opening and closing door 13650f, the game ball exists on the downstream side of the opening and closing door 13650f. The situation is that the opening and closing door 13650f in the small winning game is first changed to the open state, and the small winning game in the second half period is executed.

Therefore, when a game (small winning game in the second half period) is performed to make the game ball enter the first V winning opening 13651v, the game ball exists on the upstream side and the downstream side of the open/close door 13650f. If so, in order to make it easier for the game ball that has entered the variable winning device 13650 to enter the 1st V winning port 13651v before the 2nd V winning port 13652v, the 2nd V The distance from the downstream side of the opening/closing door 13650f to the first V winning opening 13651v is shorter than the distance to the winning opening 13652v.

By configuring in this way, a player who is executing a small winning game for entering a game ball into the second V winning opening 13652v may mistakenly enter a game ball into the first V winning opening 136521. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game ball from entering a specific area on the side not desired by the player, thereby reducing the player's willingness to play.

Here, the structure of the flow path formed on the upper surface of the opening/closing door 13650f for causing the game balls to flow down will be described.

The pachinko machine 10 according to the fifty-third embodiment is designed so that the flow path formed on the upper surface of the opening/closing door 13650f is formed in a meandering shape, similarly to the opening/closing door 65f (see FIG. 5) of the first embodiment described above. Configure. That is, in the pachinko machine 10 of the fifty-third embodiment, a meandering flow path is formed in order to lengthen the period in which the game balls flow down the upper surface of the opening/closing door 13650f. By configuring in this way, a plurality of game balls can be easily present on the upper surface of the open/close door 13650f, so that in one winning game, a plurality of game balls are almost simultaneously awarded to the variable winning device 13650. can be made easier. Further, by using the meandering flow path, it is possible to reduce the flow speed of the game ball flowing down the upper surface of the opening/closing door 13650f.

Therefore, when the opening/closing door 13650f is opened, the game ball flowing down the upstream side of the opening/closing door 13650f has too much momentum and enters the second V winning opening 13652v. It can be suppressed.

FIG. 848(b) shows the flow of game balls in the first half of the small winning game and in a state where both the first regulation member 13650b and the second regulation member 13650c are open. be. As shown in Figure 848 (b), in the first half of the small winning game, the interval period of the opening and closing door 13650f is short (0.6 seconds), so during the interval period (during the closed state of the opening and closing door 13650f) A game ball flowing down the upper surface of the opening/closing door 13650f wins the variable winning device 13650 on the upstream side of the opening/closing door 13650f. Then, the ball enters the second V winning opening 13652v. Also, when the game ball enters the variable winning device 13650 slightly downstream of the example shown in FIG. It flows down the downward sloping bottom surface and enters the second V winning opening 13652v.

On the other hand, although not shown, in the second half period of the small winning game, an interval period (1.2 seconds) of a length that allows the game ball to flow down to the downstream side of the opening and closing door 13650f is set. During the interval period, the game ball flowing down to the downstream side of the open/close door 13650f enters the variable prize winning device 13650, and then falls to a position where the ball can enter the first V prize opening 13651v. The bottom formed between the winning opening 13651v flows down in the direction of the first V winning opening 13651v, and finally enters the second V winning opening 13652v.

Next, with reference to FIG. 849, the operating pattern of the small winning game in the fifty-third embodiment will be described. As shown in FIG. 849, when the small winning game is started, an opening period of 0.6 seconds is set, and then the open state 0.2 seconds and the closed state 0.6 seconds of the open/close door 13650f are repeated five times. , after the 6th open state of 0.2 seconds has elapsed, the closed state of 1.2 seconds, the open state of 0.2 seconds (7th time), the closed state of 1.2 seconds, the open state of 0.2 seconds (8th time), The closed state is 1.2 seconds and the open state is 0.2 seconds (9th time). A winning action scenario is set.

Then, the first regulating member 13650b and the second regulating member 13650c provided in the variable winning device 13650 are in the closed state (induction state) 1.6 seconds after the start of the small winning game, and the open state (released state) 7 seconds. A small winning operation scenario is set so as to be variably controlled at .9 seconds.

In other words, until 1.6 seconds have passed since the small winning game was executed, the game ball that won the variable winning device 13650 enters the specific area (1st V winning port 13651v, 2nd V winning port 13652v). There is no V winning prize invalid period (no V winning), and then until the first half period of the small winning game passes (4 seconds from 2 seconds to 6 seconds after the small winning game is started) , The winning period to the 2nd V winning opening 13652v that makes it easy to enter the game ball into the 2nd V winning opening 13652v, and the period (5.4 seconds) until the end of the small winning game is the 1st V winning opening It is a winning period to the 1st V winning opening 13651v which makes it easy to enter the game ball into 13651v.

<Regarding production content in the fifty-third embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 850 and 851, the characteristic presentation contents executed in the fifty-third embodiment will be described. In the fifty-third embodiment, similarly to the above-described fourth embodiment (see FIGS. 69 to 69), when the jackpot is won in the special symbol lottery, the state shifts to the jackpot waiting state, and during the jackpot waiting state, the operation winning opening (Right operation winning opening 10681, left operation winning opening 10682) It is constituted so that a big hit game may be performed by making a game ball enter. In addition, according to the type of the operation winning opening into which the game ball is entered in order to execute the jackpot game, the type of time saving state (time saving type) set after the jackpot game is completed is determined. .

In other words, in the fifty-third embodiment, the jackpot game content and the game state set after the jackpot game ends are determined by the jackpot type set when the jackpot is won in the special symbol lottery, and the game ball is sent to the operation winning opening. It is configured so that the time saving type is determined according to the entry of the ball.

Therefore, in order to allow the player to easily select the desired time-saving type during the jackpot standby state, it is possible to know which time-saving type is to be set by entering the game ball into which operating winning opening. It is configured to perform a jackpot standby state presentation in order to easily notify and to easily play a game of entering a game ball into an arbitrary operation winning hole (selecting a time-saving type).

Specifically, FIG. 850(a) shows a display mode while the sorting member 10683 is tilted to the right in the jackpot standby state.

As shown in FIG. 850(a), in the jackpot standby state in the fifty-third embodiment, similarly to the above-described fourth embodiment (see FIG. 70), a message "Jackpot confirmed!" A display area HR1 in which characters are displayed, and a combination (final stop symbol) of the third symbol finally stopped and displayed (determined display) in the variable display effect executed before the jackpot standby state are displayed. be. Further, as shown in FIG. 850(a), while the sorting member 10683 is tilted to the right side, the display area HR2 formed on the display screen is displayed with the message "I'm hitting now and I'm in a relaxing mode!?" , characters of "Get 99 times in short time", and an image showing the direction in which the game ball entering the sorting device 10680 flows down (the direction in which the left-acting winning port 10682 is arranged) are displayed. be.

By these display contents, it is possible to make the player recognize that there is a high possibility that the game ball will enter the left actuation winning hole 10682 when the game ball is shot toward the sorting device 10680 .

As shown in FIG. 850(b), while the sorting member 10683 is tilted to the left side, similarly to the fourth embodiment (see FIG. 70), the message "Big win confirmed!" and a combination (final stop symbol) of the third symbol finally stopped (determined) in the variable display effect executed before the big win standby state. is displayed. Then, for the display area HR2 formed on the display screen, the characters "If you hit it now, it's a short-term game mode!?" and an image showing the direction in which the entering game ball flows down (the direction in which the right operation winning hole 10681 is arranged) is displayed. With these display contents, it is possible to make the game ball recognize that there is a high possibility that the game ball will enter the right operation winning hole 10681 when the game ball is shot toward the sorting device 10680 .

Thus, in the fifty-third embodiment, in the jackpot standby state, when a game ball is shot aiming at the sorting device 10680, the type of the operating winning hole into which the ball enters, and the outline of the jackpot started by entering the ball (game ) are displayed on the third symbol display device 81. FIG. By configuring in this way, it is possible to allow the player to select a time-saving state (time-saving type) of game characteristics that suits his or her taste. Therefore, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of switching game characteristics according to each player's preference.

Next, with reference to FIG. 851, the content of the effect executed during the small winning game in the fifty-third embodiment will be described. In the fifty-third embodiment, as described above with reference to FIG. 848, the execution right of the jackpot game is granted by the game ball passing (entering) inside the variable winning device 13650 that is opened during the small hit game. A specific area (1st V winning opening 13651v, 2nd V winning opening 13652v) that can be obtained is provided, and the player operates the timing of launching the game ball during the small winning game, and the game ball is sent to the variable winning device 13650. By varying the winning timing, it is possible to select specific areas (first V winning opening 13651v, second V winning opening 13652v) through which the game ball passes (enters).

More specifically, in the first half of the small winning game, when a game is selected to shoot a game ball so as to win the game ball to the variable winning device 13650, the game ball enters the 2nd V winning opening 13652v. In the second half of the small winning game, when the game ball is shot so as to enter the variable winning device 13650, the game ball enters the first V winning port 13651v. It is configured to enter the ball.

And, according to the specific area (1st V winning opening 13651v, 2nd V winning opening 13652v) into which the game ball enters, the type of the time saving state (time saving type) set after the end of the jackpot game is configured to be different. there is In other words, even when the big winning game is executed via the small winning game, the player can select the time saving type set after the big winning game is finished.

In addition, in the fifty-third embodiment, based on the game state (time saving type) set during the small winning game, and the specific area through which the game ball passed (first V winning opening 13651v, second V winning opening 13652v) In the first half of the small winning game, the game ball is sent to the specific area (second V winning opening 13652v) on the side where the game ball is easy to pass. When passing (entering a ball), the same time-saving type as the time-saving type set during the small winning game is set after the end of the big winning game, and the side that is easy to pass the game ball in the latter half of the small winning game is specified. When the game ball is passed (entered) to the area (1st V winning opening 13651v), a time saving type different from the time saving type set during the small winning game is set after the big winning game ends. is doing.

That is, in the normal state, even if the jackpot is won in the first special symbol lottery and the player selects any time saving type using the distribution device 10680, the time saving state corresponding to the time saving type is set. When the winning game is executed, when the time-saving type selected by the player is to be continued, the game may be performed by entering the game ball into a specific area in the first half of the small winning game, and the efficiency of the game is improved. can be achieved.

Here, for example, for a plurality of specific areas provided inside the variable winning device 13650 (1st V winning opening 13651v, 2nd V winning opening 13652v), regardless of the time saving type during the small winning game, a specific time saving When using a configuration defined by associating the types, a player who wants to continue to select one time-saving type out of a plurality of time-saving types, and a player who wants to continue to select another time-saving type. Of these, every time a small winning game is executed for any of the players, it is necessary to suspend the game (a game in which the game ball is awarded to the variable winning device 13650) until the second half period of the small winning game. , there is a risk that the player's desire to play will decrease.

On the other hand, in the fifty-third embodiment, as described above, as long as the player continues to select one of the time-saving types, the game can be smoothly performed during the small winning game without interrupting the game. A game during a small winning game can be executed.

Fig. 851(a) is an example of the production screen of the production during the small winning game executed in the first half period of the small winning game, and Fig. 851(b) shows the small winning executed in the second half period of the small winning game. It is an example of the production screen of the in-game production. As shown in FIG. 851 (a), when the small winning game is executed, as a display mode for guiding the game during the small winning game, the characters "If you continue the time saving mode, hit right." Then, the text "Please stop firing when switching to the time saving mode" is displayed. Then, in the small area Dm24, as a display mode for guiding the player of the waiting time until the game for switching the time saving mode can be executed (until entering the second half period), "3 more until switching to the time saving mode" is displayed. seconds” is displayed. The number of seconds displayed in this small area Dm24 is counted down according to the passage of time during the small winning game, and when "0 seconds" is displayed, the display screen changes to the effect screen shown in FIG. switch.

In addition, a small display area Dm25 is formed on the lower right side of the main display area Dm, and "time saving B mode" is displayed as a display mode for indicating the currently set time saving type (time saving mode). In the small area Dm10, a guidance image is displayed indicating that the specific area into which the game ball can be entered is the second V winning opening 13652v.

Then, in the sub display area Ds, a comment of ``Continue the mode when entering V2, switch the mode when entering V1, and get a big win'' is displayed as a guide display mode for indicating the game contents during the small winning game. In other words, the player is notified that a jackpot game is executed by entering the game ball into the first V winning opening 13651v or the second V winning opening 13652v, and the game ball is sent to the first V winning opening 13651v. When the ball is entered, the same time-saving type (time-saving B mode) as the current one is set after the jackpot game ends, and when the game ball is entered into the second V winning port 13652v, the time-saving type different from the current one. (Time saving A mode) is notified that it is set after the end of the jackpot game. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make the player understand in an easy-to-understand manner what kind of game should be executed during the small winning game in order to perform the desired game.

In the second half period of the small winning game, as shown in FIG. 851 (b), the characters "time saving mode switching zone" are displayed in the upper center of the main display area Dm, and the player is made to execute the right-handed game. For this reason, the words "Right hit with full power" are displayed. Then, in the small area Dm10, a guidance image is displayed indicating that the specific area into which the game ball can be entered is the first V winning opening 13651v.

In the small area Dm24, the remaining time until the end of the second half of the small winning game, that is, the remaining time until the ending of the small winning game is displayed as a display mode for guiding the player. 2 seconds left" is displayed. The number of seconds displayed in the small area Dm24 is counted down according to the passage of time during the small winning game, and when "0 seconds" is displayed, the small winning game ends. In other words, when entering the second half of the small winning game, the game ball that has entered the variable winning device 13650 enters the first V winning opening 13651v, and the big winning game ends for the player. Since it is not possible to select the time saving type to be set later, the effect executed in the main display area Dm is changed to an effect that encourages the game ball to pass through the specific area before the small hit game ends. switch.

By constructing in this way, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the small winning game is ended while the player is worried about which type of time saving to be set after the big winning game is finished, and the big winning game is not executed. be able to.

<Regarding the electrical configuration in the fifty-third embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 852 to 854, the electrical configuration of the fifty-third embodiment will be described. The pachinko machine 10 in the fifty-third embodiment is different from the above-described forty-sixth embodiment in that after winning the jackpot in the special symbol lottery, the game ball is entered into the operating winning hole to execute the jackpot game. Constructed points, points configured to determine the type of time-saving state (time-saving type) set after the end of the jackpot game by entering the game ball into the operation winning hole, and the game ball during the small winning game Based on the type of the specific area passed by and the type of time saving state (time saving type) during the small winning game, the type of time saving state (time saving type) set after the jackpot game is completed is determined. The difference is that

In addition, part of the configuration of the ROM 202 and RAM 203 of the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110 and part of the configuration of the RAM 233 of the MOU 221 of the sound lamp control unit 113 are made different in correspondence with the differences described above. It is different from the above-described forty-sixth embodiment in that Other configurations are the same, and the same reference numerals are given to the same contents, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 852, the contents of the newly provided data table in the configuration of the ROM 202 of the pachinko machine 10 in the fifty-third embodiment will be described. In the fifty-third embodiment, the configuration of the ROM202 of the pachinko machine 10 in the forty-sixth embodiment described above is different in that a V-passing time reduction type selection table 202aaa is added, and other elements are the same. The same elements are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed descriptions thereof are omitted.

V passing time reduction type selection table 202 aaa, when the game ball enters the specific area (1st V winning opening 13651v, 2nd V winning opening 13652v) during the small winning game, time saving state set after the end of the big winning game It is a data table that is referenced to determine the type (time saving type) of the current game state (time saving type) and the V winning opening (specific area (1st V winning opening 13651v, 1st V winning opening 13651v, 1st A time saving type is defined in correspondence with the 2V winning opening 13652v)).

Specifically, the time-saving type (game state during small winning game) when passing V is “time-saving A”, and the specific area (passing V winning opening) where the game ball entered (passing) is the 1st V winning opening 13651v, "time saving B" is the time saving type, the specific area (passing V winning opening) where the game ball entered (passing), the specific area (passing V winning) where the game ball entered (passed) When the opening) is the second V winning opening 13652v, "time saving A" is determined as the time saving type. On the other hand, the time-saving type (game state during the small winning game) at the time of V passing is "time-saving B", and the specific area (passing V winning opening) where the game ball entered (passing) is the first V winning opening 13651v. In this case, "time saving A" is used as the time saving type, and when the specific area (passing V winning opening) where the game ball entered (passing) is the second V winning opening 13652v, "time saving B" is used as the time saving type. are defined respectively.

In this way, based on the current game state (time saving type when passing v) and the type of V winning opening (passing V winning opening), it is possible to change the time saving type set after the end of the jackpot game. By configuring so as to be such, it is possible to prevent the player from playing a monotonous game.

Furthermore, in the fifty-third embodiment, when the player selects the same time-saving type as the currently set time-saving type, the game ball can be entered in the first half of the small winning game. Since it is only necessary to enter the game ball into the 2V winning opening 13652v, the game can be smoothly performed without interrupting the game during the small winning game for the player who continues to play while desiring the same time-saving type. You can play games.

Next, referring to FIG. 853, the configuration of the RAM 203 included in the MPU 201 of the pachinko machine 10 in the fifty-third embodiment will be described. FIG. 853 is a diagram schematically showing the configuration of the RAM 203 included in the MPU 201 of the pachinko machine 10 in the fifty-third embodiment. As shown in FIG. 853, the RAM 203 of the fifty-third embodiment differs from the above-described RAM 203 of the forty-sixth embodiment (see FIG. 800) by entering ball waiting flag 203aaa, time saving type storage area 203aab, distribution state storage area 203aac and a distribution state timer 203aad are added, and other elements are the same. The same elements are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed descriptions thereof are omitted.

In addition, the pachinko machine 10 of the fifty-third embodiment has a function that the pachinko machine 10 of the forty-sixth embodiment described above does not have, after winning a jackpot in the special symbol lottery, the game ball is entered into the operation winning hole. This function has the same function as the above-described fourth embodiment (see FIG. 60), so a detailed description thereof is partially omitted. Various contents explained in the fourth embodiment (see FIG. 60) are naturally applied.

The ball entry standby flag 203aaa is a flag indicating whether or not it is in a jackpot standby state in which the start of the jackpot waits until the game ball enters the operation winning opening (right operation winning opening 10681, left operation winning opening 10682). is. If this ball entry waiting flag 203aaa is on, it means that the game is in a big win waiting state, and if it is off, it means that it is not in a big win waiting state. This entering ball standby flag 203aaa is set to ON when a special symbol lottery results in a big win and the variation time of the variation pattern corresponding to the big win has passed (see S220 in FIG. 855). In addition, the ball entry standby flag 203aaa is set to OFF when the game ball enters the operation winning opening (right operation winning opening 10681, left operation winning opening 10682) during the jackpot waiting state (S1104 in FIG. 856 reference). While this ball entry standby flag 203aaa is on, the entry of a ball into the operation winning opening (right operation winning opening 10681, left operation winning opening 10682) is treated as valid (when a ball is detected, a jackpot is started. ).

The time saving type storage area 203aab is a storage area for temporarily storing the time saving type set after the end of the jackpot game. ), or a specific area (1st V winning opening 13651v, 2nd V winning opening 13652v) during a small hit game Determined based on the entry of a game ball into The type of working hours saved is stored.

Then, in the jackpot control process 24 (see S11091 in FIG. 857), when it is determined that it is the end timing of the ending effect (end timing of the ending period) (S1212 in FIG. 857: Yes), it is stored (stored) The time saving type is read (S1129 in FIG. 857), and the time saving end condition corresponding to the read time saving type is set (see S1293 in FIG. 857). In addition, it is referred to when determining the type of game per normal figure to be executed during the time saving state.

The distribution state storage area 203aac is a storage area in which data indicating the direction of the distribution member 10683 is stored. Specifically, when "00H" is stored in the distribution state storage area 203aac, the state in which the distribution member 10683 is tilted to the left (the state in which the game ball can enter the right operation winning opening 10681) and When "01H" is stored, it means that the distribution member 10683 is tilted to the right side (a state in which a game ball can enter the left-operated winning hole 10682). means The data in the distribution state storage area 203aac is updated to data corresponding to the layout after the switching each time the layout of the distribution members 10683 is switched in the jackpot standby state (see S1125 and S1127 in FIG. 856). Note that the initial arrangement of the distribution member 10683 is in a state of being tilted to the left. In accordance with this, the initial value of the distribution status storage area 203aac also becomes "00H". In the jackpot standby state, every time the data in the distribution state storage area 203aac is updated, a command (distribution state command ) is set. By this distribution state command, it is determined that the arrangement of the distribution members 10683 has been switched, and the display form of the standby state effect is updated to the display form corresponding to the arrangement after the switching.

The distribution state timer 203aad is a timer for counting the remaining time until the state of the distribution member 10683 is switched. The timer value of the distribution state timer 203aad is reset to "0" each time the state of the distribution member 10683 is switched in the jackpot standby state, and 1 each time the jackpot start processing 24 (see FIG. 856) described later is executed. are added one by one (see S1121 in FIG. 856). That is, it is updated at intervals of 2 milliseconds, which is the execution interval of the main processing. Then, when the timer value reaches 500 or more, the state of the sorting member 683 is switched (see SS1124 and S1126 in FIG. 856).

Next, with reference to FIG. 854, the configuration of the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the sound ramp control device 113 of the pachinko machine 10 in the fifty-third embodiment will be described. 854 is a diagram showing the contents of RAM 223 of sound lamp control device 113. FIG. As shown in FIG. 854, the RAM 223 of the sound lamp control device 113 in the fifty-third embodiment has a standby state effect flag 223aaa for the RAM 223 (see FIG. 802) of the sound lamp control device 113 in the above-described forty-sixth embodiment. are the same except for the addition of The same reference numerals are assigned to the same contents, and detailed description thereof is omitted.

The standby state effect flag 223aaa is a flag indicating whether or not the standby state effect (see FIGS. 850(a) and (b)) is being executed. If the standby state effect flag 223aaa is ON, it means that the standby state effect is being executed, and if it is OFF, it means that the standby state effect is not being executed. This standby state effect flag 223aaa is set to ON when a standby state command indicating that the jackpot standby state has been set is received from the main controller 110 and the start of the standby state effect is set (FIG. 859). (see S4403 of ). In addition, this standby state effect flag 223aaa is set to OFF when an opening command indicating the start of the jackpot is received from main controller 110 (see S4406 in FIG. 859).

<Regarding control processing contents of the main controller 110 in the fifty-third embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 855 to 858, the contents of the control processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in the fifty-third embodiment will be described. In the fifty-third embodiment, in place of the special symbol variation processing 17 (see S191 in FIG. 803), the special symbol variation processing 24 (S10191 in FIG. 855) is replaced with the jackpot control processing 17 ( S1091 in FIG. 808) instead of jackpot control processing 24 (see S11091 in FIG. 857), V passing detection processing 17 (see S1391 in FIG. 810) instead of V passing detection processing 24 (see S11625 in FIG. 858) and executing the jackpot start process 24 (see S11041 in FIG. 856) similar to the jackpot start process of the main process (see FIG. 30) of the first embodiment described above in the main process 17 (see FIG. 807) The difference is that it is configured to Other contents are the same, and detailed description of the same contents will be omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 855, the detailed contents of the special symbol variation process 24 (S10191) will be described. FIG. 855 is a flow chart showing the contents of the special symbol variation process 24 (S10191). As shown in FIG. 855, the special symbol variation processing 24 (S10191) is different from the above-described special symbol variation processing 17 (see S191 in FIG. S218: Yes in FIG. 855) is different in that the contents of the processing executed are different, but the rest is the same.

When the special symbol variation process 24 (S10191) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the game is currently in the jackpot standby state (S201). Here, it is determined whether or not the ball entry standby flag 203aaa is set to ON. When it is determined that the entry standby flag 203aaa is set to ON in the process of S201, that is, in a state where the special symbol indicating that the result of the special symbol lottery is a jackpot is stopped and displayed, and the operation wins. When it is determined that the game ball is not entered into the opening (right operation winning opening 10681, left operation winning opening 10682) (S201: Yes), the start condition for executing a new special symbol lottery is Since the condition is not satisfied, the processing is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, in the processing of S201, if it is determined that the jackpot waiting state is not in progress (the entering ball waiting flag 203aaa is off) (S201: No), then the above-described special symbol variation processing 17 (S191 of FIG. 803 (see S261 to S218). Then, in the process of S218, if it is determined that the lottery result of this time is a big hit (S218: Yes), the value of the counter 203i during the time saving and the special figure 2 fluctuation counter 203pa is reset to 0 (S293), next Then, the ball entry standby flag 203aaa is set to ON, a standby state command is set to indicate that the current state is the jackpot standby state (S220), and the process proceeds to S223.

On the other hand, in the process of S218, if it is determined that the lottery result of this time is not a big hit (S218: No), the same time saving update process 17 (S40201) as the above-described special symbol variation process 17 (see S191 in FIG. 803) , S265 and S266 are executed, and the process proceeds to S223. In the process of S23, a stop command is set (S223), and the process ends.

By configuring in this way, as in the first embodiment described above, even if a big hit is won in the special symbol lottery, the entry to the operation winning port (right operation winning port 10681, left operation winning port 10682) Execution of the jackpot game can be put on standby until the game ball is entered into the ball. Therefore, for example, it is possible to temporarily suspend the game and take a break in a state (jackpot standby state) in which the execution of the jackpot game is confirmed.

It should be noted that the process of setting the jackpot standby state described above with reference to FIG. Although detailed descriptions of the processing contents and modifications of each process are omitted, the various contents described in each of the above-described embodiments can of course be applied.

Next, with reference to FIG. 856, the contents of the jackpot start process 24 (S11041) will be described. FIG. 856 is a flow chart showing the contents of the jackpot start process 24 (S11041). In this jackpot start process 24 (S11041), the same process as the jackpot start process 4 (see FIG. 72) in the fourth embodiment is executed, and is executed in the forty-sixth embodiment described above. It is a process executed as a process executed every 4 milliseconds in the main process 17 (see FIG. 807), and monitors the entry of a ball into the operation winning opening (right operation winning opening 10681, left operation winning opening 10682). , is a process for starting a jackpot game corresponding to the type of the operating winning opening when a ball entering the operating winning opening is detected.

Of the jackpot start processing 24 (see S11041 in FIG. 856) in the fifty-third embodiment, each of S1101 and S1104 of the jackpot start processing (see FIG. 31) in the first embodiment, and each of S1101 and S1104 The same processing as the processing is executed.

In addition, in the jackpot start processing 24 (see S11041) in the fifty-third embodiment, when it is determined that the entry waiting flag 203aaa is ON in the processing of S1101 (that is, in the jackpot waiting state) (S1101: Yes ), then 1 is added to the value of the distribution state timer 203aad (S1121), and it is determined whether the timer value after the addition is 500 or more (S1122). In the processing of S1122, if it is determined that the timer value of the distribution state timer 203aad after addition is 500 or more (S1122: Yes), it means that the timing for switching the state of the distribution member 10683 has come. Each process of S1123 to S1129 for switching the state of the member 10683 is executed.

Specifically, it is determined whether or not the data stored in the distribution state storage area 203aac is "00H" (whether the distribution member 10683 is tilted to the left) (S1123). In the processing of S1123, if it is determined that "00H" is stored (S1123: Yes), the sorting member 10683 tilted leftward is changed to the rightward tilted state (S1124), and the sorting state is changed. "01H" is stored in the storage area 203r (S1125), and the process proceeds to S1128.

On the other hand, in the processing of S1123, when it is determined that the data stored in the distribution state storage area 203aac is "01H" (S1123: No), the distribution member 10683 tilted to the right is tilted to the left. state (S1126), "00H" is stored in the distribution state storage area 203aac (S1127), and the process proceeds to S1128.

In the process of S1128 executed after the process of S1125 or S1127, a distribution state command indicating the arrangement of the distribution members 10683 after switching is set (S1128), and the value of the distribution state timer 203aad is reset to 0 ( S1129), and the process proceeds to S1130.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S1122 that the value of the distribution state timer 203aad after updating is less than 500 (S1122: No), it means that it is not the timing to switch the state of the distribution member 10683. Therefore, each process of S1123 to S1129 is skipped and the process proceeds to S1130. In the process of S1130, it is determined whether or not the ball into the right actuation winning opening 10681 is detected (S1130). The data corresponding to the type "time saving B" is stored (S11191), and the process proceeds to S11103. As a result, it is possible to set "time saving B" as the type of time saving state (time saving type) after the end of the jackpot game.

On the other hand, in the processing of S1130, if it is determined that the ball entering the right-acting winning port 10681 is not detected (S1130: No), then it is determined whether or not the ball entering the left-acting winning port 10682 is detected. (S1132). In the process of S1132, if it is determined that the ball entered the left-acting winning opening 10682 is detected (S1132: Yes), the data corresponding to the time-saving type "time-saving A" is stored in the time-saving type storage area 203aab. (S11192), the process proceeds to S11103. On the other hand, in the process of S1132, if it is determined that the ball into the left operation winning opening 10682 is not detected (S1132: No), it means that it is not the end timing of the jackpot standby state, so this End the process.

Then, in the process of S11103, the start of the big win corresponding to the set big win type is set, and the big win start flag 203k is set to ON (S11103). In the fifty-third embodiment, when a jackpot is won in a special symbol lottery, one jackpot type can be determined from a plurality of jackpot types, and a jackpot game is played according to the determined jackpot type. It is configured to determine the content (number of rounds, etc.) and the game state (time saving state) set after the end of the jackpot game.

However, unlike the forty-sixth embodiment described above, the type of time saving state is not defined in the jackpot type, but is defined for the operation winning opening (right operation winning opening 10681, left operation winning opening 10682) . In other words, when the jackpot is won in the special symbol lottery, the content of the jackpot game (number of rounds) and the setting of the time saving state after the jackpot game is specified only by the jackpot type. By shifting and entering the game ball into the operating winning port (right operating winning port 10681, left operating winning port 10682) in the jackpot standby state, the jackpot game is executed and the operating winning port ( It is configured to set the time saving type according to the specific area).

By constructing in this way, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand how much privilege will be given after the end of the jackpot game until the game ball is entered into the operation winning hole. It is possible to make it difficult to grasp the type of the time saving state (time saving type) set after the end of the jackpot game from the stop display mode of the special symbols stopped and displayed in the mode showing . In particular, in the pachinko machine 10 configured to be able to set the jackpot standby state as in the fifty-third embodiment, the length of the period from when the jackpot symbols are stopped and displayed to when the jackpot game is executed (jackpot standby state In the pachinko machine 10 configured so that the player can select the length of the period), the stop display mode of the special symbols can be stopped and displayed endlessly. Compared to the specifications in which the time-saving type is determined based on entering the game ball into the operation winning port based on the jackpot type set when the jackpot is won in the pattern lottery, it is set after the jackpot game ends. It is possible to make it difficult for the player to grasp the type of the time saving state (time saving type) in a stage before the start of the jackpot game.

In addition, the time-saving type is determined according to the type of the operation winning opening (right operation winning opening 10681, left operation winning opening 10682) into which the game ball is entered, and in the 53rd embodiment, two operation winning openings (Right operation winning opening 10681, left operation winning opening 10682), it is configured so that the player can select which of the operation winning openings the game ball is to enter. Therefore, it is possible to make it easier for the player to select the desired time saving type.

Next, with reference to FIG. 857, the contents of the jackpot control process 24 (see S11091 in FIG. 857) will be described. FIG. 857 is a flow chart showing the contents of the jackpot control process 24 (S11091). This jackpot control processing 24 (S11091) is different from the jackpot control processing 17 (see S11091 in FIG. 808) of the forty-sixth embodiment described above when it is determined that the ending effect (period) has ended (S1212 in FIG. 857). ; Yes), the contents of the processing to be executed are different, and the rest is the same. A detailed description of the same processing contents is omitted.

As shown in FIG. 857, when the jackpot control process 24 (S11091) is executed, the same S1201 to S1212 processes as the jackpot control process 17 of the forty-sixth embodiment (see S11091 in FIG. 808) are executed, If it is determined in the process of S1212 that it is the end timing of the ending effect (period) (S1212 in FIG. 808: Yes), the time saving type stored in the time saving type storage area 222c is read (S11291), and the read time saving type (S11292) corresponding to the time-saving end condition (S11292), the same S1293, S1294 and S1216, S1217 processing as the jackpot control processing 17 of the forty-sixth embodiment (see S11091 in FIG. 808) are executed be.

Next, the contents of the V passage detection process 24 (S11625) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 858 is a flow chart showing the contents of the V passage detection process 24 (S11625). This V passing detection process 24 (S11625) is executed when the game ball passes through the V (passes through the specific area) in contrast to the V passing detection process 17 (S1391 in FIG. 810) in the forty-sixth embodiment described above. The difference is that the content of the processing is different, and the rest is the same. The same reference numerals are given to the same contents, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In the fifty-third embodiment, the contents of the big win game (the number of rounds) when the big win game is executed and the contents of the big win game (number of rounds) when the big win game is executed are set after the end of the big win game based on the small win type set when the small win is won in the special symbol lottery. and a game state to be set. Then, based on the fact that the game ball passed through the specific area during the small winning game, the right to execute the big winning game is acquired after the small winning game is completed, and the time saving state type ( It is different from the above-described 46th embodiment in that it is configured to determine the time saving type).

Therefore, in the V passing detection process 24 (S11625) shown in FIG. 858, the game ball passes V ( It is different in that the process of determining the time saving type is added as the process executed when the specific area is passed). Other processing contents are the same, and the description of the same processing contents is omitted.

When the V passage detection process 24 (S11625) is executed, first, the same processes of S1601 to S1604 as the V passage detection process 17 (S1391 in FIG. 810) in the forty-sixth embodiment are executed. Then, in the process of S1603, if it is determined that it is during the V effective period (S1603: Yes), then the time saving type to be set this time is determined by referring to the V passing time saving type selection table 202aaa (S11606) , the determined time saving type is stored in the time saving type storage area 222aab (S11607).

When the processing of S11607 is completed, the processing of S1607 and S1608, which is the same as the jackpot control processing 17 (see S11091 in FIG. A V winning opening command indicating the type of the winning opening 13651v, the second V winning opening 13652v) is set (S1609), and this process ends.

<Regarding control processing contents of the audio ramp control device 113 in the fifty-third embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIG. 859, the contents of control processing of the audio ramp control device 113 in the fifty-third embodiment will be described. As described above, in the fifty-third embodiment, when the jackpot is won in the special symbol lottery, the state shifts to the jackpot standby state, and during the jackpot standby state, the operation winning port (right operation winning port 10681, left operation winning port 10682) ), a jackpot game is executed by entering a game ball into any one of them. In addition, according to the type of the operation winning opening into which the game ball is entered in order to execute the jackpot game, the type of time saving state (time saving type) set after the jackpot game is completed is determined. .

In other words, in the fifty-third embodiment, the jackpot game content and the game state set after the jackpot game ends are determined by the jackpot type set when the jackpot is won in the special symbol lottery, and the game ball is sent to the operation winning opening. It is configured so that the time saving type is determined according to the entry of the ball.

Therefore, in order to allow the player to easily select the desired time-saving type during the jackpot standby state, it is possible to know which time-saving type is set by entering the game ball into which operating winning opening. It is configured to perform a big win standby state performance in order to easily notify and to easily play a game of entering a game ball into an arbitrary operation winning hole (selecting a time saving type).

In the pachinko machine 10 according to the fifty-third embodiment, as the control process executed by the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113, the hit-related process 24 (S54352 in FIG. 859 ) is different. In this hit-related process 24 (S54352), a process to be executed when a standby state command is received from the main controller 110 is added to the hit-related process 17 (see S54352 in FIG. 815) of the forty-sixth embodiment described above. The only difference is that the two are identical. The same reference numerals are assigned to the same processing contents, and the description thereof is omitted.

When the hit related process 24 (S54352) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the standby state command is received (S54551), and if it is determined that the standby state command is received (S54551: Yes), the standby A display standby state command for starting the state rendering is set (S54552). The display standby state command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is sent to the display control device 114 during the command output processing (S4102) of the main processing executed by the MPU 221. sent to. When the display control device 114 receives the display standby state command, the third symbol display device 81 starts a standby state effect (see FIG. 850) for informing that the third symbol display device 81 is in the jackpot standby state. When the processing of S54552 ends, next, the waiting state effect flag 223aaa is set to ON to indicate that the waiting state effect is being executed (S54553), and this processing ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S54551 that the standby state command has not been received (S54551: No), then it is determined whether or not the opening command has been received (S54501), and if the opening command has been received. If (S54501: Yes), set the opening command for display for starting the opening effect (S54502), set the end of the standby state effect by turning off the standby state effect flag 223 aaa (S54554), this End the process. The display opening command set in the processing of S54502 is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is executed by the display control device 114 in the command output processing (S4102) of the main processing executed by the MPU 221. sent to. When the display control device 114 receives the opening command for display, the third symbol display device 81 starts an opening effect for notifying the start of the big win.

In the processing of S54501, if it is determined that the opening command has not been received (S54501: No), the same processing of S54503 to S54513 as the winning-related processing 17 of the forty-sixth embodiment (see S54352 in FIG. 815) is performed. Execute and terminate this process.

Since the detailed contents are the same as those of the above-described fourth embodiment (see FIG. 60), the description thereof will be omitted. The effect mode of the state effect (see FIG. 850) is an effect that is executed every millisecond in the main process 17 (see FIG. 811) based on the received content of the distribution state command output from the main controller 110. It is configured to be switched and set in the update process (FIG. 4111).

That is, when a distribution state command is received, the arrangement position of the distribution member 10683 included in the received command is specified, and the presentation mode corresponding to the specified arrangement position is determined. By configuring in this way, while the distribution member 10683 is tilted to the right side, the standby state effect is executed in the effect mode shown in FIG. While it is in the tilted state, the standby state effect is executed in the effect mode shown in FIG. 850(b). In this way, by specifying the placement position of the distribution member 10683 based on the command output from the main controller 110 and determining the effect mode based on the specified result, the player can actually visually confirm the position. It is possible to make it difficult to deviate between the disposition state of the distribution member 10683 that is present and the disposition state of the distribution member 10683 that is displayed in the standby state effect.

As a method for switching the effect mode of the standby state effect, a method other than the above-described method may be used. A means is provided to specify the placement position of the sorting member 10683 based on the sorting state command output from the main controller 110, start measurement by the measuring means, and actually switch the placement position of the sorting member 10683. It may be configured to switch the effect mode of the standby state effect at a stage earlier than the timing by a predetermined time (for example, 0.4 seconds).

In this case, when the game ball fired based on the effect mode of the standby state effect executed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 reaches the distribution member 10683, it is executed at the time when the game ball is shot. It suffices if the effect mode of the standby state effect that has been performed and the actual arrangement state of the distribution member 10683 match. Since it is configured so that the time required for this is about 0.5 seconds, if the standby state effect is executed so as to switch the effect mode 0.4 seconds before the actual switching of the arrangement state of the distribution member 10683a good. By configuring in this way, a player who grasps the standby state effect can easily enter a game ball into a desired operation winning hole.

<Fifty-fourth embodiment>
Next, the fifty-fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 860 to 863. FIG. The fifty-fourth embodiment differs from the above-described forty-sixth embodiment in that the configuration of the right region of the game board configuration of the game board 13 is different. Specifically, the placement relationship of the through gate 67 provided in the right area of the game board 13, the special figure 1 non-electric role 3064a, the special figure 2 non-electric role 3065a, and the normal electric role 3071 is changed. , in that the flow path for the game balls formed in the right area of the game board 13 is changed. Other configurations are the same, and the same reference numerals are given to the same contents, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In the forty-sixth embodiment described above, as shown in FIG. 779, as the configuration of the right side area of the game board 13, from the upstream side of the game ball flow path, the normal electric accessory 3071, the special figure 1 non-electric accessory 3064a, Each configuration was arranged in the order of the special figure 2 non-electric accessory 3065a and the through gate 67. A left channel and a right channel are formed in the right region of the game board 13, and the game ball flowing down the left channel is configured to reach the normal electric accessory 3071, and flows down the right channel. It was configured so that the game ball can reach the special figure 1 non-electric accessory 3064a and the special figure 2 non-electric accessory 3065a in this order. A through gate 67 is arranged at a position where a game ball flowing down any channel can reach.

In this way, regardless of the operation status of each non-electric role (special figure 1 non-electric role 3064a, special figure 2 non-electric role 3065a), the game ball reaches the normal electric role 3071 and the through gate 67 The game can be played smoothly during the time-saving state.

In addition, the special figure 1 non-electric accessory 3064a is arranged upstream of the special figure 2 non-electric accessory 3065a with respect to the right channel, and the special figure 1 non-electric accessory 3064a is in operation (open state), by configuring so that the game ball cannot reach the special figure 2 non-electric accessory 3065a, for example, the time saving state (time saving A) in which the first special symbol lottery is mainly executed is set, the game can be played until the special figure 2 non-electric accessory 3064a is in the open state without entering the game ball into the special figure 1 non-electric accessory 3064a which is in the open state. It was configured so that it couldn't be done.

On the other hand, in the fifty-fourth embodiment, the special figure 2 non-electric accessory 3065a is arranged upstream of the normal electric accessory 3071, and when the special figure 2 non-electric accessory 3065a is in the open state is configured so that the game ball cannot reach the normal electric accessary 3071 . By configuring in this way, when a right-handed game is performed when the special figure 2 non-electric role product 3065a is in the open state, the game ball fired by the right-hand game is a special figure 2 non-electric role product The ball will definitely enter 3065a. In other words, it is configured so that the game ball cannot flow into the operating device 3070 while the special figure 2 non-electric accessory 3065a is in the open state.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it difficult to terminate the time saving state while the special figure 2 non-electric accessory 3065a is in the open state.

Here, with reference to FIGS. 860 to 862, the configuration of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in the fifty-fourth embodiment will be described in detail. FIG. 860 is a front view showing the game board configuration of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in the fifty-fourth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 860, the pachinko machine 10 in the fifty-fourth embodiment has a through gate 67, a special 2 non-electric accessory 3065a, normal electric accessory 3071, special figure 1 non-electric accessory 3064a, and variable winning device 3650 are provided. Then, all the game balls flowing down the right side area of the game board 13 are configured to pass through the through gate 67, and further, the flow path for reaching the game balls to the special figure 2 non-electric accessory 3065a It is different in that it is constructed so as to have a passage width corresponding to one ball. Other configurations are the same as those of the forty-sixth embodiment described above, and the same contents are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Here, with reference to Figures 861 and 862, the state in which the time saving B is set as the time saving type, that is, when winning the normal pattern lottery, the game ball to the special figure 2 non-electric opening 3073b The flow of the game ball in the time-saving state in which it is easy to enter the ball will be explained. FIG. 861 is an enlarged view of the right side area of the game board 13 and shows the time when the game ball is flowing into the actuator 3070. FIG. Also, FIG. 862 is a diagram showing the time point when the game ball is entering the special figure 2 non-electric accessory 3065a.

In the fifty-fourth embodiment, the time required for the game ball to flow down from the point (point a) where the game ball passed through the through gate 67 to the point (point b) where it reaches the normal electric accessory 3071 is 1 second, The time required to flow down to the point (point c) to reach the special figure 2 non-electric opening 3073b is 0.3 seconds, and the point (point d) to reach the special figure 2 non-electric accessory 3065a from the point a It is configured so that it takes 0.6 seconds to flow down. Further, the variation time of the normal symbol variation executed when the result of the normal symbol lottery executed by passing the game ball through the through gate 67 is winning is 0.1 second. As the opening pattern of the per-figure game, there is a normal per-figure game in which the normal electric accessory 3071 is opened for 0.5 seconds after the per-figure game is started, or until one game ball enters the actuator 3070. configured to run.

That is, when a game (single-shot game) in which only one game ball is shot by a right-handed game is executed, it is a case of winning a normal symbol lottery executed based on passing through the through gate 67. Also, it is configured so that the game ball passed through the through gate 67 cannot reach the normal electric accessory 3071 during the normal game per game (during the open state of the normal electric accessory 3071). Therefore, in order to make the game balls flow into the actuator 3070, it is necessary to continuously shoot a plurality of game balls in a right-handed game.

Here, in the fifty-fourth embodiment, as in the above-described embodiments, when game balls are continuously shot in a right-handed game, game balls can be shot at intervals of 0.6 seconds. Therefore, by continuously shooting the game ball by the right-handed game, when the normal figure per game is executed based on the game ball B passing through the through gate 67, from the game ball B The game ball A launched earlier enters the normal electric accessory 3071 in the open state (flows into the actuator 3070).

The time required for the game ball B to move from the point a to the point d is longer than the time required for the game ball A flowing into the actuator 3070 to move from the point b to the point c (0.3 seconds). Since (0.6 seconds) is longer, before the game ball A reaches the special figure 2 non-electric accessory 3065a, the game ball B enters the special figure 2 non-electric opening 3073b. Then, the special figure 2 non-electric accessory 3065a will operate from the closed state to the open state.

As a result, the game ball B enters the special figure 2 non-electric accessory 3065a in the open state. This special figure 2 non-electric accessory 3065a is configured to operate (variable) from an open state to a closed state by acting on the entry of one game ball into the second ball entrance 3065. Therefore, when the game ball B enters the second ball entrance 3065, a closing mechanism (not shown) operates, and the special figure 2 non-electric accessory 3065a operates (variable) from the open state to the closed state.

That is, in the fifty-fourth embodiment, the game ball (game ball B) that has passed through the through gate 67 that triggers the execution of the normal symbol lottery can enter the special figure 2 non-electric accessory 3065a that is open. It is configured as follows. By configuring in this way, a plurality of game balls (game ball A, game ball B) fired to the right side area in an attempt to operate the special figure 2 non-electric accessory 3065a to the open state, in the open state Since it is possible to execute a series of operations until a special figure 2 non-electric accessory 3065a operates to a closed state, the open state of the special figure 2 non-electric accessory 3065a is held for a long time can be suppressed.

In addition, the game ball (game ball B) passed through the through gate 67 is elected in the normal pattern lottery more than the time (1 second) required for the game ball (game ball B) to reach the normal electric accessory 3071, and the normal pattern Since the time until the winning game is completed (0.1 seconds + 0.5 seconds = 0.6 seconds) is configured to be shorter, an irregular right-handed game (for example, single shot) is executed. When it does, it is configured so that the game ball cannot reach the operating device 3070 during the game per normal pattern. Therefore, it is possible to suppress that an irregular right-handed game is performed. In addition, in the fifty-fourth embodiment, as described above with reference to FIG. 860, all game balls that are shot in a right-handed game and flow down the right-hand side area are configured to pass through the through gate 67. Without limitation, part of the game ball fired by the right-handed game is configured to be able to pass through the through gate 67, and the game ball that has passed through the through gate 67 is a special figure 2 non-electric accessory 3065a, normal electric It may be configured to reach the accessory 3071, the special figure 1 non-electric accessory 3064a, and the variable winning device 3650 in this order.

<Regarding the electrical configuration in the fifty-fourth embodiment>
Next, referring to FIG. 863, the electrical configuration of main controller 110 in the fifty-fourth embodiment will be described. In the fifty-fourth embodiment, the content of the variation pattern table referred to when determining the variation pattern for indicating the lottery result of the special symbol lottery during the time saving state is changed from the above-described forty-sixth embodiment. are different, and otherwise identical.

With reference to FIG. 863, the contents of the time reduction A1, B variation pattern 25 table 202abd2 will be described. FIG. 863 is a diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the time saving A1, B variation pattern 25 table 202abd2. As shown in FIG. 863, the time saving A1, B variation pattern 25 table 202abd2 is the time saving A1, B variation pattern table 202pd2 (see FIG. 798 (b)) in the forty-sixth embodiment described above. The difference is that a different variation pattern is defined only for the final variation.

In the fifty-fourth embodiment, the time saving state is terminated when the special symbol variation that satisfies the time saving end condition is stopped and displayed. By acquiring the special figure 2 hold) up to the upper limit (4 pieces), the second special symbol lottery is executed a predetermined number of times (4 times) even after the time saving state is ended and the normal state is set. is doing. As a result, even when the time-saving state, which is advantageous to the player, ends, it is possible to prevent the player from significantly lowering his or her willingness to play.

Here, in order to acquire the special figure 2 hold up to the upper limit, if it is configured to be a long time (for example, 60 seconds) as the variation time of the special symbol variation corresponding to the final variation of the time saving state, the special figure There is a problem that it is possible to end the time saving state while acquiring 2 suspension up to the upper limit and opening the special figure 2 non-electric accessory 3065a.

On the other hand, when configured to be a short time (for example, 5 seconds) as the variation time of the special symbol variation corresponding to the final variation of the time saving state, the time saving state is obtained without acquiring the special figure 2 hold to the upper limit. There is a problem that the game ends and the player's motivation to play decreases.

On the other hand, in the fifty-fourth embodiment, when determining the variation time (variation pattern) of the special symbol variation corresponding to the final variation of the time saving state, refer to the special figure 2 pending number at that time, and the final variation Regardless of the special figure 2 reservation number when the final variation of the special symbol in the time saving state is executed, the special figure during the final variation period It is configured to select the variation pattern (variation time) of the final variation corresponding to the number of times of opening the special figure 2 non-electric accessory 3065a for acquiring 2 suspension up to the upper limit.

Here, in the fifty-fourth embodiment, as described above with reference to FIG. 861, the game ball that has passed through the through gate 67 (see game ball B in FIG. It is configured to enter the ball into 3065a (see Fig. 862). And, even when the game ball (game ball D) that passed through the through gate 67 next to the game ball B executes the normal pattern per game, the game ball is transferred to the operating device 3070 during the normal pattern per game. It is configured so that the inflow of

Therefore, the game ball that can enter the special figure 2 non-electric accessory 3065a next to the game ball B is configured to be the game ball D that is launched next to the game ball C. Specifically, a normal pattern lottery is executed based on the game ball D passing through the through gate 67 (variation time 0.1 second), and a game ball is executed by a normal pattern per game executed when a normal hit is won. C flows into the operating device 3070, by entering the special figure 2 non-electric opening 3073b, the special figure 2 non-electric accessory 3065a operates from the closed state to the open state, and then special figure 2 The game ball D that has reached the non-electric accessory 3065 a enters the second ball entrance 3065 .

In other words, when the player continues to play the right-handed game, the game ball enters the second ball entrance 3065 at intervals of 1.2 seconds at the shortest. Therefore, in this embodiment, as the variation time corresponding to the final variation of the time saving state, 1.2 seconds is set as a reference time that can be acquired by one special figure 2 hold, and the special feature to be acquired during the final variation at the reference time It is configured to be able to select a variation pattern with a variation time obtained by adding a predetermined grace period (0.4 seconds) to the time obtained by multiplying the number of holdings.

Specifically, it is the final variation of the time saving state, and the number of pending memories of the second special symbol at the start of the final variation (the number of special figures 2 pending) is "0 pieces", as a variation pattern, variation If the "special variation 1" with a time of 5200 milliseconds (5.2 seconds) is "one", the variation pattern is "special variation 2" with a variation time of 4000 milliseconds (4 seconds). In the case of 2”, the variation pattern is “special variation 3” with a variation time of 2800 ms (2.8 seconds), and in the case of “3”, the variation pattern is 1600 ms (2.8 seconds) 1.6 seconds) of "special variation 4" is defined.

By configuring in this way, by executing the right-handed game continuously during the final fluctuation period of the time saving state, it is possible to easily set the number of special figures 2 pending at the end of the time saving state to the upper limit, and excessive It is possible to end the time saving state without opening the special figure 2 non-electric accessory 3065a.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 863, in the time saving A1, B variation pattern 25 table 202abd2, in addition to the special symbol variation pattern, the corresponding symbol confirmation period is also defined, except for the final variation of the time saving state, uniform A symbol fixing period of 0.5 seconds is defined, and different symbol fixing periods are defined for the final variation according to the variation pattern.

Specifically, the pattern confirmation period is defined in correspondence with each variation pattern so that the time from the start of the time saving final variation to the end of the pattern confirmation period is uniformly 15 seconds, and the variation pattern is " Special variation 1 (fluctuation time 5.2 seconds)” has a symbol determination period of “9800 milliseconds (9.8 seconds)”, and “Special variation 2 (variation time 4 seconds)” has a symbol determination period of “11000 milliseconds (11 seconds)”, “special variation 3 (variation time 2.8 seconds)”, symbol determination period “12200 milliseconds (12.2 seconds)”, “special variation 4 (variation time 1.8 seconds)” 6 seconds)”, a symbol determination period of “13400 milliseconds (13.4 seconds)” is defined.

By configuring in this way, regardless of the number of special figures 2 pending at the time the final variation of the time saving state is executed, the special symbol final variation in the time saving state is executed. Since the time until the time elapses can be set to 15 seconds, the same production data as a dedicated production (time saving final fluctuation production (for example, see FIG. 794)) for informing the player that the time saving state ends can be used, the volume of performance data can be reduced as compared with the case of using different performance data according to the variation pattern (variation time) of the final time-saving variation as the time-saving final variation performance.

In addition, in the 54th embodiment, even if the number of special figures 2 pending at the time of the time saving final variation is executed, the number of special figures 2 pending during the final variation period can be acquired up to the upper limit number However, without being limited to this, for example, only "special variation 4" in which a variation time of 1.6 seconds is set as a variation pattern set as a time saving final variation is set, and time saving During the special symbol variation one before the final variation, it may be configured to execute an effect (for example, see FIG. 794) that prompts to acquire the special figure 2 reservation up to the upper limit (4 pieces).

By configuring in this way, the player who played the game according to the effect executed during the special symbol variation one before the time saving final variation acquires one special figure 2 hold during the final variation period of the time saving state. Then, the time saving state can be ended with the number of special figures 2 pending as the upper limit number. On the other hand, the player who did not play according to the effect executed during the special symbol variation one before the time saving final variation can end the time saving state with the number of special figures 2 reserved as the upper limit. Therefore, it is possible to vary the degree of advantage of the player when the time saving state ends. Therefore, the player will pay attention to the contents of the performance executed during the time saving state, and the performance effect can be enhanced.

Further, in the fifty-fourth embodiment described above, by executing the right-handed game continuously during the time saving state, the state in which the special figure 2 pending number is acquired to the upper limit number during the final fluctuation period of the time saving state, and Although it is configured so that it is possible to end the time saving state in a state where the non-electric accessary 3065a in FIG. It is also possible to end the time saving state while opening the special figure 2 non-electric accessory 3065a. In this case, simply because the special figure 2 hold that can be acquired during the time saving state is only acquired after the time saving state ends, the player who continues to execute the right-handed game during the time saving state A player who irregularly plays a right-handed game does not have an advantage.

That is, in the final fluctuation of the time saving state, in the state that the number of special figures 2 reserved has reached the upper limit number, the game ball is entered to the special figure 2 non-electric accessory 3065a in the open state, the second entrance If it is possible to enter the game ball to 3065 (overflow winning), after the time saving state ends the entering ball of the game ball corresponding to the overflow winning, that is, the second special symbol variation in the normal state is executed. By executing it after the special figure 2 reservation number has decreased, a situation occurs in which the player causes the second special symbol lottery to be executed extra. In the state that the number of reservations has reached the upper limit number, the variation time (variation pattern) shorter than the time required for the special figure 2 non-electric accessory 3065a to be in the open state is set as the final variation of the time saving state Therefore, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the second special symbol lottery is extra executed for the player.

<Regarding Modification of 54th Embodiment>
Next, a modification of the fifty-fourth embodiment described above will be described. In the fifty-fourth embodiment described above, it was configured to end the time saving state when the time saving end condition was satisfied at the stop timing of the special symbol fluctuation (end timing of the time saving fluctuation), but the time to end the time saving state , may be configured to be the start timing of the special symbol variation. In this case, the final variation of the time saving state is executed, and the time saving state ends, so at the timing when the time saving state ends, with the upper limit of the special figure 2 pending number acquired, and special figure 2 It is possible to reliably suppress the occurrence of a state in which the non-electric accessory 3065a is opened.

However, even for players who are playing normally, the time saving state ends immediately after consuming one special figure 2 reservation in the time saving final variation and executing the second special symbol variation. There is a problem that it becomes difficult to end the time saving state in a state where the upper limit number of special figure 2 reservations is acquired, and the player's willingness to play is lowered.

Therefore, in this modification, the special symbol variation (pseudo final variation) before the final variation of the time saving state (special symbol variation that ends the time saving state at the same time as the start of the variation) is the final variation of the time saving state. As you can imagine, during the special symbol variation period (during the pseudo final variation period) before the final variation of the time saving state (special symbol variation that ends the time saving state at the same time as the start of the variation), the time saving final variation production (for example , see FIG. 794).

In other words, the display mode of the remaining time reduction number of times that the time reduction state continues (see small display area Dm6 in FIG. 788 (a)) is not the number of special symbol fluctuations until the time reduction state actually ends, but the pseudo final variation is executed. The pseudo number of remaining short working hours (the number of times obtained by subtracting 1 from the actual number of short remaining working hours) is displayed, and the pseudo number of short remaining working hours displayed in the small display area Dm6 indicates the final change in the short working hours state. In the case of becoming pseudo final variation (final variation of the time saving state (special symbol variation that ends the time saving state at the same time as the start of the variation) Special symbol variation one before) is executed. set.

Then, during the pseudo final fluctuation period, the time saving final production (see Figure 794) is executed to accumulate the special figure 2 reservation to the upper limit number (4 pieces). In this case, in fact, of the special figure 2 hold that is saved up to the upper limit (4 pieces), the first special figure hold that is consumed is used for the actual time saving final fluctuation, and the remaining 3 to the normal state It will be used for the second special symbol variation after shifting. However, by executing the above-mentioned pseudo number of remaining time reduction and the effect corresponding to the pseudo final variation, the player is made to think that the time saving state has ended with the special figure 2 hold acquired to the upper limit number. Therefore, the performance effect can be enhanced. In the pachinko machine 10 from the forty-sixth embodiment to the fifty-third embodiment described above, for example, as described above with reference to FIG. A normal electric accessory 3071 having a structure that can be changed between an open state that makes it possible to enter a game ball into the 3070 and a closed state that makes it difficult was used. A configuration similar to that of the ordinary electric accessory 20640a may be used. In this case, from the state in which the normal electric accessory allows the game ball to flow into the operating device 3070 (the state in which the game ball can flow down on the normal electric accessory), the state in which it is difficult to flow in (normal electric It is possible to change the downstream destination by changing the position of the game ball at the time when it is changed to a state where the game ball is difficult to flow down on the accessory. For example, it is possible to vary the winning ratio to various devices provided below depending on whether the normal electric accessory falls on the upstream side or the downstream side. Therefore, by varying the opening and closing operation period of the normal electric accessory according to the game state, not only the degree of inflow of the game ball into the actuator 3070 but also various types provided downstream (lower) than the normal electric accessory The degree of inflow of game balls into the device can also be varied.

<Fifty-fifth embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 in the fifty-fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 864 to 878. FIG. In the fifty-fifth embodiment, a description will be given of an effect control example of an interesting effect that can be applied to each of the pachinko machines 10 of the above embodiments. More specifically, in the fifty-fifth embodiment, the same kind of production mode is executed over the variable display of the special symbols a plurality of times, so that there are held balls with a high possibility of becoming a big hit in the hold. On the premise that the foreshadowing effect capable of suggesting to the player that it is included is installed, a more suitable effect control method for the foreshadowing effect will be described.

The pachinko machine 10 according to the fifty-fifth embodiment differs in configuration from the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment described above in that the configurations of the ROM 222 and the RAM 223 in the sound lamp control device 113 are partially changed. and that the control processing executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 is partially changed. Other configurations, various processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, other processes executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113, and various processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 are described in the first It is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in the embodiment. Hereinafter, elements that are the same as those of the first embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals, and illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

First, with reference to FIGS. 864 and 865, the effect mode of the portent effect in the fifty-fifth embodiment will be described. Here, in the fifty-fifth embodiment, three types of portent effect A, portent effect B, and portent effect C are provided as types of portent effect in which the same type of effect mode is repeated over a plurality of variable display periods. ing. In the case of detecting the start winning of the first special symbol in the normal game state (low probability state of the special symbol and the normal state of the normal symbol), it is determined whether or not the indication effect can be executed, and if the execution is decided. , the type of the indication effect is determined based on the look-ahead result of the reserved ball corresponding to the start winning that triggered the execution. When the type of the portent effect is determined, the portent effect of the determined type is executed over a plurality of times of variable display. As a result, the sense of anticipation can be maintained in a plurality of times of the variable display effect, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In the fifty-fifth embodiment, when the portent effect A is selected, the possibility of a big win in the look-ahead result is relatively low, and when the portent effect B is selected, the possibility of a big win is higher than that of the portent effect A. The selection rate is assigned so that the possibility of winning the jackpot becomes the highest when the premonition effect C is selected. As a result, the game can be played while paying attention to the type of the portent effect, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

First, with reference to FIG. 864(a), the details of the portent effect A described above will be described. FIG. 864(a) is a diagram showing an example of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 when the portent effect A is executed. As shown in FIG. 864(a), when the variable display effect of the third symbol accompanied by the omen effect A is started, the eyes of the boy character 710 displayed in the small area Ds2 shine, and in the small area Ds3. On the other hand, a balloon image FD for displaying the words spoken by the character 710 is displayed. In addition, a character "Chance!" is displayed inside the balloon image FD. These display modes can make the player think that the possibility (expectation) of winning a big win is higher than usual. Incidentally, in the fifty-fifth embodiment, there is a possibility that the execution of the precursor effect is determined only when the start winning corresponding to the variation type involving reach is detected. In other words, when the predictive effect is executed, it is confirmed that the reserved balls that generate reach are included in the reserved balls, so that the player's expectation for the big win can be improved.

Next, with reference to FIG. 864(b), the details of the portent effect B will be described. FIG. 864(b) is a diagram showing an effect mode of the portent effect B. FIG. As shown in FIG. 864(b), when the variable display effect of the third symbol accompanied by the portent effect B is started, an image simulating a flame is displayed around the boy character 710 displayed in the small area Ds2. At the same time, the character "Hot!" is displayed for the balloon image FD displayed in the small area Ds3. Here, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines, words such as "chance" and "hot" are widely used as words indicating the degree of expectation, and the word "hot" is used more than the word "chance". is often used in the sense that expectations are higher. Therefore, it is possible for the player to intuitively understand that when the portent effect B is executed, the expectation of a big win is higher than when the portent effect A is executed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 865, the details of the portent effect C will be described. FIG. 865 is a diagram showing an effect mode of the portent effect C. FIG. As shown in FIG. 865, when the variable display effect of the third symbol accompanied by the portent effect C is started, an image simulating lightning is displayed around the boy character 710 displayed in the small area Ds2. , is displayed with respect to the balloon image FD displayed in the small area Ds3. In most cases, the word "hot" is treated as a word with a higher degree of expectation than the words "chance" and "hot" in the entertainment production of pachinko machines and the like. When executed, the player can intuitively understand that the degree of expectation for a big win is higher than when the portent performance A or the portent performance B is executed.

As described above, in the fifty-fifth embodiment, when the start winning is detected, a lottery is made as to whether or not the predictive effect can be executed according to the result of the look-ahead based on the start winning. Then, when the execution of the portent performance is determined, the portent performance is executed over a plurality of variable displays including the variable display corresponding to the starting prize winning which is the opportunity for the lottery as to whether or not the portent performance can be executed. As a result, the player can continue to have a sense of anticipation for the big win over a plurality of times of variable display, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved. In addition, in the fifty-fifth embodiment, when the execution of the predictive effect is determined, three types of predictive effects (predictive It is configured to be set to one of the effects A to C). By configuring in this way, it is possible to diversify the performance mode and to make the expectations for the big win different according to the type of the omen performance, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved. . Henceforth, for simplification of explanation, the holding|maintenance ball|ball based on the starting winning prize which became the lottery object of the execution propriety of omen production is called "lottery object holding|maintenance."

Here, in the fifty-fifth embodiment, when the predictive performance is set, a predictive lottery inhibited state is temporarily set in which a lottery as to whether or not the predictive performance can be executed is not performed even if the start winning is detected. By configuring in this way, it is possible to suppress the redundant determination of the execution of the sign performance based on the start winning detected during the execution of the sign performance, so that the sign performance becomes complicated and the player does not have to worry. It is possible to prevent the presentation mode from becoming difficult to understand. The portent lottery prohibition state is canceled (finished) when the execution of all the variable displays set with the portent performance is completed and the variable display of 1 not accompanied by the portent performance is completed. By configuring in this way, it is possible to interpose a normal (not accompanied by a sign effect) variable display at least once between the end of the sign effect and the start of the next sign effect. It is possible to prevent the player from misunderstanding that the performed portent effect and the subsequently performed portent effect are a series of portent effects. Therefore, it is possible to realize a more comprehensible mode of presentation. In addition, although the details will be described later, when the foreshadowing lottery prohibition state is canceled, the variation type of each reserved ball (each data stored in the prize winning information storage area 223a) is referred to, and the omen It is set as the structure which draws lots about the execution propriety of production. By constructing in this way, it is possible to draw a lottery as to whether or not to execute the omen performance by using the winning information based on the start winning detected during the omen lottery inhibited state, so that the execution frequency of the omen performance can be further improved. can be done.

In addition, in the fifty-fifth embodiment, execution of the predictive effect can be started only under the condition that the ready-to-win variation does not exist before the variation display corresponding to the holding of the lottery object. In other words, it is configured such that the variation in which the reach variation is executed is the final variation display in the precursor effect. By configuring in this way, it is possible to easily understand whether or not the portent effect will end, so it is possible to realize an effect mode that is easy for the player to understand.

Here, as a method for starting the predictive effect only under the condition that the reach fluctuation does not exist before the variable display corresponding to the lottery target hold, the above-mentioned predictive lottery prohibited state while the reach fluctuation exists in the hold It is also possible to set the However, when this method is employed, the number of situations in which the prognostic lottery prohibition state is set increases, and there is a possibility that the appearance frequency of the prognostic effect will decrease.

Therefore, in the fifty-fifth embodiment, the foreshadow lottery prohibition state is set only during the period from the setting of the omen effect to the end of the omen effect until the end of one normal variation display, so that the reach fluctuation can be controlled. Even under the condition that the corresponding reserved ball has already been reserved, it is configured to allow the lottery as to whether or not the sign performance can be executed. Then, when execution of the sign effect is determined in a state in which the ball corresponding to the reach variation is already reserved, the variable display effect based on the previously reserved ball corresponding to the reach variation is completed. It is configured to start the sign effect from the next variable display. By configuring in this way, the setting frequency of the portent lottery prohibited state can be minimized, so that it is possible to suppress a decrease in the frequency of execution of the portent effect. Therefore, it is possible to realize a more suitable presentation mode.

Next, with reference to FIG. 866, a specific example of an effect mode when an omen effect is set in the fifty-fifth embodiment will be described. First, with reference to FIG. 866(a), a new start winning prize is detected under the condition that the hold ball corresponding to the reach variation is not included in the hold, and a lottery is made to determine whether or not the predictive effect can be executed based on the start winning prize. Execution of the portent effect is determined by (won the portent lottery). In addition, in FIG. 866(a), a case will be described as an example in which execution of the sign effect is determined in a state in which two reserved balls are stored.

As shown in FIG. 866(a), two held balls are stored, and a normal variable display effect without an indication effect is executed (and a condition in which the prognostic lottery prohibition state is not set). When a new starting winning prize is detected in , a lottery is executed as to whether or not the predictive effect can be executed. If the lottery result of the omen lottery is the lottery result corresponding to the execution of the omen effect, from the next variable display effect to the variable display effect corresponding to the winning information (lottery target hold) used for the lottery of the omen effect After that, the effect mode of the variable display effect is set to the effect mode with the portent effect. That is, as shown in FIG. 866(a), as the variable display effects corresponding to the two reserved balls that were already reserved at the time when the execution of the portent effect was determined, the variable display of the effect mode accompanied by the portent effect is performed. The effect is executed, and the variable display effect of the effect mode accompanied by the predictive effect is also executed for the variable display effect corresponding to the winning information (lottery target reservation) that triggered the execution of the predictive effect. Then, when the three times of variable display for which the portent effect is set is finished, the normal variable display effect without the portent effect is set as the next variable display effect. In addition, as shown in FIG. 866(a), after execution of the predictive effect is determined, all the variable display effects accompanying the determined predictive effect are completed, and the normal variable display effect without the predictive effect is completed. is set to the premonition lottery prohibition state until the end of one time. As a result, it is possible to suppress the fact that the execution of the omen effect is redundantly determined in a state in which the omen effect has already been set. Confusion of the player due to continuation of the presentation can be suppressed.

In addition, if the pending ball corresponding to the reach fluctuation is not included in the hold when the execution of the omen effect is decided, when the execution of the omen effect is decided, the lottery of the type of omen effect is also executed. be done.

Next, with reference to FIG. 866(b), a new starting winning prize is detected under the condition that the holding ball corresponding to the reach fluctuation is included in the holding, and the execution or non-prediction effect based on the starting winning prize is executed. A description will be given of an effect mode when the execution of the portent effect is determined by lottery. In addition, in FIG. 866(b), a case will be described as an example in which execution of the sign effect is determined in a state in which three reserved balls are stored.

As shown in FIG. 866(b), three suspended balls are stored, and when a new start winning prize is detected in a situation where a normal variable display effect without an indication effect is executed, it is determined whether or not the predictive effect can be executed. A lottery is carried out. If the lottery result of the portent lottery is a lottery result corresponding to the execution of the portent effect, as shown in FIG. ), the variable display effect is executed in the variable display mode accompanied by the predictive effect from the next variation of the reach variation. In this case, the type of the portent effect is determined after the portent standby state is canceled (finished). That is, when the start winning is detected in a situation where the reach fluctuation is included in the hold, only the lottery for the execution of the omen effect is performed at the time of the start winning, and the timing is shifted for the omen type (the omen effect A lottery is performed after a state in which the start of execution is permitted. By configuring in this way, regardless of whether or not the reserved ball corresponding to the reach variation is included in the reservation, the predictive lottery can be executed, so that the execution frequency of the predictive performance is reduced. can be suppressed. Therefore, it is possible to realize a more suitable presentation mode.

In addition, in the fifty-fifth embodiment, when execution of the indication effect is determined under a situation in which the reservation includes a ball on hold corresponding to the reach variation, the execution of the indication effect is allowed until the state is reached. (That is, until the variable display effect corresponding to reach fluctuation is completed), the lottery for the type of sign effect is delayed, but it is not limited to this, and the holding ball corresponding to reach change is included. Even if there is, the kind of the sign effect may be drawn by lottery at the time when the execution of the sign effect is determined. By configuring in this way, regardless of whether or not there is a reserved ball corresponding to reach fluctuation, the type of omen effect can be drawn at the same timing, so control processing can be performed regardless of the presence or absence of a reserved ball corresponding to reach fluctuation. can be shared.

<Electrical configuration in the fifty-fifth embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIG. 867(a), details of the ROM 222 of the audio ramp control device 113 in the fifty-fifth embodiment will be described. FIG. 867(a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM 222 in the fifty-fifth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 867(a), the ROM 222 in the fifty-fifth embodiment has a precursor availability lottery table 222Aa and a precursor type The difference from the selection table 222Ab is that the selection table 222Ab is added. The portent availability lottery table 222Aa is a data table that is referred to when a lottery is made as to whether or not the portent effect can be executed according to the variation type indicated by the detected winning information when a new start winning is detected. The selection table 222Ab is a data table referred to for selecting the type when execution of the precursor effect is determined.

First, with reference to FIG. 868(a), details of the predictor availability lottery table 222Aa added to the ROM 222 in the fifty-fifth embodiment will be described. FIG. 868(a) is a diagram showing the specified contents of the portent availability lottery table 222Aa. As shown in FIG. 868(a), the predictor availability lottery table 222Aa contains a random value (counter value of the effect lottery counter) determined to execute the predictive effect for each variation type indicated by the winning information that detected the start winning. A range is associated and defined.

Specifically, the value "0 to 59" of the effect lottery counter is defined in association with the variation type of "special hit". Here, the effect lottery counter is composed of a known random number counter that is randomly updated within the range of "0 to 99". Of the 100 random numbers (counter values) of "0 to 99" that the value of the production lottery counter can take, the number of random numbers (counter values) associated with "special reach win" is "0 to 59 , the ratio of determining the execution of the premonition effect when the start winning corresponding to the "special reach win" is detected is 60% (60/100).

Further, as shown in FIG. 868 (a), the value of the effect lottery counter "0 to 54" is defined in association with the variation type of "super reach hit", and the variation type of "normal reach hit" , the value "0 to 24" of the effect lottery counter is defined in association with each other. That is, since 55 random numbers of "0 to 54" are defined in association with "super reach win", when the start winning corresponding to "super reach hit" is detected, the precursor effect is performed. The percentage of execution decisions is 55% (55/100). In addition, since 25 random numbers of "0 to 24" are associated with the "normal reach win" and defined, when the start winning corresponding to the "normal reach win" is detected, the predictive effect is executed. The ratio determined is 25% (25/100).

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 868 (a), the value of the effect lottery counter "0 to 34" is defined in association with the variation type of "special reach out", and the variation type of "super reach out" On the other hand, the value of the effect lottery counter "0 to 24" is defined in correspondence, and the value of the effect lottery counter "0 to 9" is defined in correspondence with the variation type of "normal reach out". Since 35 random numbers from "0 to 34" are associated with "out of special reach", it is decided to execute the predictive effect when a starting prize corresponding to "out of special reach" is detected. The percentage used is 35% (35/100). In addition, since 25 random numbers of "0 to 24" are defined in association with "super reach out", when a start winning corresponding to "super reach out" is detected, a sign effect is performed. The percentage of execution decisions is 25% (25/100). Furthermore, since 10 random numbers of "0 to 9" are associated with "normal reach out" and defined, when the start winning corresponding to "normal reach out" is detected, the precursor effect is executed. The percentage determined is 10% (10/100).

In this way, in the fifty-fifth embodiment, when the variation type of the same variation time is compared, the ratio (probability) of determining the execution of the sign effect is higher for the win than for the miss. there is In addition, it is configured such that the longer the fluctuation time is, the higher the ratio (probability) of determining the execution of the portent effect. To improve a sense of expectation for a win when an omen performance is executed, because a variation type with a long variation time is difficult to be selected in the case of a failure and is more likely to be selected in the case of a win. can be done. Therefore, it is possible to continuously make the player feel a sense of expectation for the big win over a plurality of times of the variable display performance in which the portent performance is set, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In addition, in the fifty-fifth embodiment, only when winning information of a variable type in which reach occurs is acquired based on the starting winning, the indication effect may be set, but this is not the only option. Even when prize winning information corresponding to a complete loss in which a reach does not occur is obtained, execution of an indication effect may be determined at a predetermined rate (for example, 1% rate). When configured in this way, it is possible to make it easier to execute the precursor effect.

Next, with reference to FIG. 868(b), details of the precursor type selection table 222Ab added to the ROM 222 in the fifty-fifth embodiment will be described. As shown in FIG. 868(b), the portent type selection table 222Ab is a data table that defines, for each variation type, the range of random numbers (rendering lottery counter values) for which each of the portent effects A to C is determined. be. A performance lottery counter used when selecting the type of the portent effect with reference to the portent type selection table 222Ab, and a performance lottery counter used when drawing lots to determine whether the portent effect can be executed with reference to the portent performance lottery table 222Aa. consists of random number counters that are updated independently of each other. That is, different effect lottery counters are provided according to the data table used for the lottery. As a result, randomness can be ensured more reliably when performing a lottery using each data table.

As shown in FIG. 868 (b), if the variation type is a special reach hit, the range of 15 random numbers (value of the production lottery counter) from “0 to 14” is “prediction effect A” (Fig. 864 (a)) is defined in association, and "predictive effect B" (see FIG. 864 (b)) is defined for the range of 60 random numbers (values of the effect lottery counter) of "15 to 74". A range of 25 random numbers (values of the effect lottery counter) from "75 to 99" is defined in association with "predictive effect C" (see Fig. 865). Since the effect lottery counter is randomly updated within a range of 100 values from "0 to 99", when the variation type is a special reach hit, the rate at which "predictive effect A" is determined is 15% (15 /100), the ratio of determination of "predictive effect B" is 60% (60/100), and the proportion of determination of "predictive effect C" is 25% (25/100).

Further, as shown in FIG. 868(b), when the variation type is super reach hit, the range of 20 random numbers of "0 to 19" (the value of the effect lottery counter) is "prediction effect A". is defined in association with the range of 60 random numbers (values of the production lottery counter) from '20 to 79', and 'prediction effect B' is defined in association with 20 from '80 to 99'. A "prediction effect C" is defined in association with the range of the random number value (value of the effect lottery counter). Therefore, when the variation type is Super Reach hit, the rate at which "predictive effect A" is determined is 20% (20/100), and the rate at which "predictive effect B" is determined is 60% (60/100). ), and the rate at which the “predictive effect C” is determined is 20% (20/100). That is, compared to the case of winning the special reach, the proportion of determining the portent effect A is higher, while the proportion of determining the portent effect C is lower.

Also, as shown in FIG. 868(b), when the variation type is normal reach hit, "prediction effect A" is applied to the range of 35 random numbers (value of effect lottery counter) from "0 to 34". A range of 50 random numbers (ratio lottery counter values) of "35 to 84" is defined in association with "predictive effect B", and 15 random numbers of "85 to 99" are defined. "Omen effect C" is defined in association with the range of the random number (value of the effect lottery counter). Therefore, when the variation type is per normal reach, the rate at which "predictive effect A" is determined is 35% (35/100), and the rate at which "predictive effect B" is determined is 50% (50/100). , and the rate at which the “predictive effect C” is determined is 15% (15/100). That is, the ratio of determining the portent effect A is higher than in the case of special reach or super reach, while the percentage of determining portent effect C is lower.

Also, as shown in FIG. 868(b), when the fluctuation type is out of special reach, the range of 50 random numbers (the value of the production lottery counter) of "0 to 49" is "prediction production A". is defined in association with the range of 40 random numbers (values of the production lottery counter) of "50 to 89", and "predictive effect B" is defined in association with 10 of "90 to 99". A "prediction effect C" is defined in association with the range of the random number value (value of the effect lottery counter). Therefore, when the variation type is out of special reach, the percentage of determining "predictive effect A" is 50% (50/100), and the percentage of determining "predictive effect B" is 40% (40/100). ), and the rate at which the “predictive effect C” is determined is 10% (10/100). That is, the ratio of determining the portent effect A is higher than in the cases of winning special reach, super reach and normal reach, while the percentages of determining portent effects B and C become lower.

Further, as shown in FIG. 868(b), when the fluctuation type is out of super reach, the range of 80 random numbers of "0 to 79" (the value of the production lottery counter) is "prediction production A". are defined in association with each other, and "predictive effect B" is defined in association with the range of 20 random numbers (values of the effect lottery counter) from "80 to 99". On the other hand, since no random number (the value of the effect lottery counter) is associated with the "predictive effect C", the "predictive effect C" is not selected. Therefore, when the variation type is out of Super Reach, the percentage of determining the “predictive effect A” is 80% (80/100), and the percentage of determining the “predictive effect B” is 20% (20/100). ), there is no possibility that the “predictive effect C” is determined. That is, the ratio of determining the portent effect A is higher and the percentage of determining the portent effect B is lower than in the cases of special reach hit, super reach hit, normal reach hit, and special reach loss. Moreover, the possibility that the portent effect C will be determined is zero.

Also, as shown in FIG. 868(b), if the variation type is out of normal reach, the range of 100 random numbers (the value of the production lottery counter) of "0 to 99" is "prediction production A". are defined in association with each other. That is, since the "predictive effect A" is associated with the entire range of possible values of the effect lottery counter, the "predictive effect A" is always selected when the predictive effect is set for the loss of normal reach. be.

Thus, in the fifty-fifth embodiment, the variation type with a long variation time (high possibility of winning a jackpot) is more likely to produce a sign than the variation type with a short expectation (low possibility of winning a jackpot). It is configured so that the ratio of determination of A is low, while the ratio of determination of premonition effect C is high. Therefore, when the portent effect C is started, the player can be strongly expected to win a big win, while when the portent effect A is started, the final variable display of the portent effect is performed. You can watch the performance with a sense of tension. Therefore, the game can be played while paying attention to the type of the portent effect.

Further, since the portent effect B is configured not to be selected (determined) when the normal reach is lost, when the portent effect B is started, it develops into super reach or higher (super reach out, special reach out) or becomes a big hit. It is confirmed. Therefore, it is possible to make the player feel a sense of expectation for the big win. Further, the portent performance C is configured not to be selected (determined) when the normal reach is lost or when the super reach is lost, so when the portent performance C is started, it is decided that it develops into a special reach or a big win. Therefore, when the portent effect C is started, it is possible to make the player have a stronger expectation for a big win.

Next, with reference to FIG. 867(b), the configuration of the RAM 223 provided in the sound lamp control device 113 in the fifty-fifth embodiment will be described. FIG. 867(b) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 223 in the fifty-fifth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 867(b), the RAM 223 in the fifty-fifth embodiment has an omen effect prohibition flag 223Aa and an omen number counter 223Ab in contrast to the configuration of the RAM 223 in the first embodiment (see FIG. 14(b)). , in that an omen prohibition release flag 223Ac, an omen type flag 223Ad, and a waiting number counter 223Ae are added.

The portent effect prohibition flag 223Aa is a flag for indicating whether or not there is a portent lottery prohibition state in which the lottery as to whether or not the portent effect can be executed is prohibited. If the portent effect prohibition flag 223Aa is ON, it means that the portent lottery prohibition state is set, and if it is OFF, it means that the portent lottery prohibition flag 223Aa is not. This portent effect prohibition flag 223Aa is set to ON when the portent effect is won in the lottery for whether or not to execute the portent effect with reference to the portent effect lottery table 222Aa (see FIG. 868(a)) (see S4712A in FIG. 872). , After the end of the portent effect, it is set to OFF when the normal variable display effect without the portent effect is completed once (see S4803A in FIG. 873). When the start winning of the first special symbol is detected, this portent effect prohibition flag 223Aa is referred to (see S4605A in FIG. 871), and the portent effect prohibition flag 223Aa is off (the portent lottery prohibition state is not set). ), a lottery as to whether or not the portent effect can be executed is executed. By configuring in this way, it is possible to suppress the redundant determination of the execution of the sign performance based on the start winning detected during the execution of the sign performance, so that the sign performance becomes complicated and the player does not have to worry. It is possible to prevent the presentation mode from becoming difficult to understand. The portent lottery prohibition state is canceled (finished) when the execution of all the variable displays set with the portent performance is completed and the variable display of 1 not accompanied by the portent performance is completed. By configuring in this way, it is possible to interpose a normal (not accompanied by a sign effect) variable display at least once between the end of the sign effect and the start of the next sign effect. It is possible to prevent the player from misunderstanding that the performed portent effect and the subsequently performed portent effect are a series of portent effects. Therefore, it is possible to realize a more comprehensible mode of presentation.

The portent number counter 223Ab is a counter for counting the number of times the variable display effect is executed until the portent effect is finished. When the omen effect is won in the lottery for whether or not to execute the omen effect, this omen number counter 223Ab is set to a value corresponding to the number of fluctuations until the end of the omen effect as a counter value (see S4711A in FIG. 872). The value is updated by subtracting 1 each time the start of is set (see S5105A in FIG. 877). If the value of the number of omen counter 223Ab is 1 or more, a variable display effect in a variable display mode accompanied by an omen effect is executed as the variable display effect. A variable display effect in a (normal) variable display mode without accompanying is executed.

The portent prohibition release flag 223Ac is a flag indicating whether or not to release the portent lottery prohibition state at the end of the variable display effect (during the stop display of the third symbol). This portent prohibition release flag 223Ac is set to ON at the start of the variable display effect of the normal (not accompanied by the portent effect) variable display mode which is executed first after the execution of the portent effect is finished (S5103A in FIG. 877). (see S4803A in FIG. 873), and is set to OFF at the end of the variable display effect of the normal variable display mode (during stop display of the third symbol) (see S4803A in FIG. 873). Since the portent effect prohibition flag 223Aa is also set to OFF (see S4803A in FIG. 873) in conjunction with the setting of the portent prohibition release flag 223Ac to OFF, the portent lottery prohibition state can be terminated.

The portent type flag 223Ad is a flag for indicating the type of the portent effect, and if the value is "01H", the type of the portent effect that is set is the portent effect A (see FIG. 864(a)). If it is "02H", it means that the type of the set portent effect is the portent effect B (see FIG. 864(b)), and if it is "03H", it is set. It means that the type of the portent effect is the portent effect C (see FIG. 865). Also, if the value is "00H", it indicates that the type of the portent effect is not set. When executing the variable display effect with the portent effect (when the variable display mode is selected when the value of the portent number counter 223Ab is 1 or more), the value (state) of the portent type flag 223Ad is referred to, and the corresponding A variable display mode is set with an indication effect of the type to be performed. Thus, the portent performance executed in a plurality of variable display performances from the start to the end of one portent performance can be made common, so that a performance mode with a sense of unity can be realized.

The number of waiting times counter 223Ae counts the number of executions of the variable display effect until the end of the predictive waiting state which is set in the case where the lottery as to whether or not the predictive effect can be executed is won while the ball corresponding to the reach variation is reserved. A counter for counting. The initial value of this waiting number counter 223Ae is set to 0, and the number of fluctuations until the reach fluctuation occurs when the lottery for whether or not to execute the portent effect is won in a state where the ball corresponding to the reach fluctuation is held. is set as the counter value (see S4709A in FIG. 872), and the value is updated by subtracting 1 each time the variable display effect is set (see S5201A in FIG. 878). While the value of the waiting number counter 223Ae is 1 or more, even if the value of the portent number counter 223Ab is 1 or more, execution of the variable display effect accompanying the portent effect is avoided (suppressed). As a result, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of reach in the variable display performance during the period from the start to the end of the portent performance, and allow the occurrence of reach only in the last variable display in which the portent performance is set. . Therefore, it is possible to make the player easily understand how long the portent effect continues, so that a more comprehensible effect mode can be realized.

Next, with reference to FIG. 869, a characteristic control process when the precursor lottery prohibition state is canceled will be described. FIG. 869 is a diagram for explaining part of the control process executed with reference to the information in each area of the winning information storage area 223a when the foreshadowing lottery prohibition state is terminated (released). As shown within the dashed line of the horizontally elongated substantially rectangular shape in FIG. 869, each area of the prize winning information storage area 223a is configured to be able to store 1 byte (8 bits) of data. As shown in FIG. 869, each bit of the 1-byte data is associated with a variation type, and ON bits indicate the variation type of winning information stored in the area. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 869, "special reach hit", "super reach hit", "normal reach hit", "special reach miss", "super reach miss", "normal reach miss" in order from the upper bit ”, “long deviation”, and “short deviation” are associated with each other. In the example shown in FIG. 869, since the second bit of the reserved first area is 1 (on) and the other bits are off, the "long out" associated with the second bit is the reserved first area. It becomes the lottery result (variation type) indicated by the data stored in the area. Similarly, in the second pending area of the winning prize information storage area 223a, since the fifth bit associated with "special reach out" is set to 1 (on), the lottery indicated by the data in the second pending area The result (fluctuation type) is "out of special reach". Similarly, the lottery result (variation type) indicated by the data of the third reserved area is "short out", and the lottery result (variation type) indicated by the data of the fourth reserved area is "super reach hit". Since the data in the execution area are not used for this control, illustration thereof is omitted.

When the prognostic lottery prohibition state is canceled, as shown in FIG. 869, the OR of the upper 6 bits of each reserved area except for the first reserved area is calculated. A logical sum is a logic that becomes true (1) if at least one data among a plurality of data is true (1), and becomes false (0) if all of the plurality of data are false (0). It is an operation. In the example of FIG. 869, data "010100" is generated (calculated) as the logical sum of the upper 6 bits. The reason for excluding the first reserved area is that the precursor effect in the fifty-fifth embodiment is configured to be executed over at least two variable displays. In other words, if the reserved first area is used as a target for determining whether or not the predictive effect can be executed, the predictive effect may be set only for one variable display based on the data of the first reserved area. , is intended to prevent (suppress) this.

In the fifty-fifth embodiment, based on the generated logical sum data, among the data stored in each reserved area of the winning information storage area 223a, the degree of expectation (priority for determining whether or not the predictive effect can be executed) is the highest. Determine what the data correspond to the high ball on hold. More specifically, since the logical sum data indicates that it is data corresponding to the retained sphere with higher expectations as it goes to higher order bits, it is determined whether there is an on (1) bit in the logical sum data. Whether or not is discriminated from the high-order bit side, and when an ON bit is detected, based on the variation type corresponding to the bit, the predictive effect is executed from the predictive possibility lottery selection table 222Aa and the value of the effect lottery counter. Perform a pass/fail lottery. Then, when it is determined to execute the sign effect, search is made for a reserved area in which the bit corresponding to the same degree of expectation (fluctuation type) as the ON (1) bit of the OR data is ON (1). Then, an indication effect is set that continues up to the holding ball corresponding to the holding area in which the same bit as the OR data is turned on.

As described above, in the fifty-fifth embodiment, when the foreshadowing lottery prohibition state is canceled, the logical sum data is generated based on the data in all the reserved areas of the prize winning information storage area 223a, and the logical sum data is Based on this, it is configured to determine whether or not the predictive effect can be executed. By configuring in this way, it is possible to reduce the processing load of the audio lamp control device 113 as compared with the case of determining whether or not the predictive effect can be executed after confirming the details of the data of all the reservation areas. . More specifically, for example, when all the reserved balls are out of long or out of short (that is, the lottery result not subject to the determination of whether or not to execute the omen effect), in the fifty-fifth embodiment, the logical sum Since all bits of the data are 0, the process can be terminated at that point. Therefore, the processing load can be reduced compared to the method of determining each bit of all reserved areas one by one. Also, for example, even if there are a plurality of pending balls to be determined whether or not to execute the omen effect, if determination is made based on the logical sum data, it is only necessary to determine the most significant bit in which the data of 1 is set. , it is possible to easily specify the variation type with the highest degree of expectation (priority for determining whether or not to execute the prognostic effect) in the hold. Therefore, there is no need to perform a process of determining each bit of all reserved areas and specifying a variation type with the highest degree of expectation among a plurality of variation types to be determined as to whether or not the predictive effect can be executed. Therefore, the processing load can be reduced.

<Regarding control processing of the audio ramp control device in the fifty-fifth embodiment>
Next, various control processes executed by the MPU 221 of the sound ramp control device 113 in the fifty-fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 870 to 878. FIG. First, referring to FIG. 870, the command determination processing A (S4112A) in the fifty-fifth embodiment will be described. FIG. 870 is a flow chart showing this command determination process A (S4112A). This command determination process A (S4112A) is executed in place of the command determination process (see FIG. 36) in the first embodiment in the main process (see FIG. 34) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113. This is a process for determining a command received from the main controller 110, similar to the command determination process (see FIG. 36) in the first embodiment.

S4301 to S4311, S4313, and S4315 of the command determination process A (S4112A) in the fifty-fifth embodiment correspond to S4301 to S4311, S4313, and S4315 of the command determination process (S4112) in the first embodiment, respectively. are executed. In addition, in the command determination process A (S4112A) in the fifty-fifth embodiment, when it is determined in the process of S4311 that the winning information command has been received (S4311: Yes), the Winning information command processing is executed (S4321A), and this processing ends. The details of this winning information command process (S4321A) will be described later with reference to FIG.

On the other hand, in the processing of S4311A, if it is determined that the winning information command has not been received from main controller 110 (S4311A: No), then the command received from main controller 110 includes a stop command. (S4322A), and if it is determined that a stop command is included (S4322: Yes), stop command processing for performing control according to the stop type indicated by the received stop command is executed. (S4323A), and the process ends. The details of this stop command processing will be described later with reference to FIG. On the other hand, in the process of S4322A, if it is determined that the stop command has not been received from the main controller 110 (S4322A: No), the process proceeds to S4313.

Also, in the command determination process A (see FIG. 870) in the fifty-fifth embodiment, when it is determined in the process of S4313 that the command received from the main controller 110 includes a hit-related command (S4313 : Yes), instead of the winning-related processing (see FIG. 37) in the first embodiment, the winning-related processing A is executed (S4324A), and this processing ends. The details of this win-related process A will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, with reference to FIG. 871, details of the winning information command process described above will be described. FIG. 871 is a flow chart showing this winning information command process (S4321A). In this winning information command process (S4321A), first, the information of the received winning information command is stored in the corresponding winning information storage area 223a (S4601A), and then the information of the received winning information command corresponds to the first special symbol. It is determined whether the winning information is to win (S4602A). In the process of S4602A, if it is determined that the winning information does not correspond to the first special symbol (S4602A: No), there is no possibility of executing the precursor effect, so this process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, in the processing of S4602A, when it is determined that the winning information corresponds to the first special symbol (S4602A: Yes), the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b is read (S4603A), and the read counter value is 2 or more (S4604A). If the read counter value is a value smaller than 2 (a value of 1 or less) (S4604A: No), the portent effect cannot be executed over a plurality of times of variable display, so this process ends as it is. On the other hand, in the processing of S4604A, if it is determined that the read counter value is 2 or more (S4604A: Yes), then it is determined whether the precursor effect prohibition flag 223Aa is ON (S4605A).

In the processing of S4605A, when it is determined that the portent effect prohibition flag 223Aa is ON (S4605A: Yes), it means that the lottery for whether or not to execute the portent effect is prohibited. This process is ended without executing the process of S4606A for performing a lottery as to whether execution is possible. On the other hand, if it is determined that the portent effect prohibition flag 223Aa is not on, that is, is off (S4605A: No), a portent start determination process for determining whether or not the portent effect can be executed is executed ( S4606A), this process ends. The details of this precursor start determination process (S4606A) will be described with reference to FIG.

FIG. 872 is a flowchart showing this precursor start determination process (S4606A). In the portent start determination process (S4606A), first, the portent availability lottery table 222Aa is read (S4701A), and the portent effect is executed according to the variation type indicated by the winning information for the lottery (winning information notified by the winning information command this time). Judge whether it is possible or not (S4702A). Next, it is determined whether or not the determination result of S4702A corresponds to the execution of the portent effect (S4703A). End this process. On the other hand, in the processing of S4703A, if it is determined that the determination result corresponds to the execution of the precursor effect (S4703A: Yes), it is determined whether there is a reach change in the hold (S4704A), reach change in the hold When it is determined that there is (S4704A: Yes), it is determined whether or not the retained ball digested one time before the lottery target retention is the retained ball corresponding to the reach fluctuation (S4708A).

In the processing of S4708A, when it is determined that the ball held one time before the holding of the lottery object is the ball held corresponding to the reach fluctuation (S4708A: Yes), even if the predictive effect is set, immediately before the holding of the lottery object Since the execution of the portent effect is on standby until the variable display of , and the portent effect over a plurality of variable display effects cannot be executed, the processing is terminated as it is. On the other hand, in the processing of S4708A, if it is determined that the held ball digested one time before the lottery target hold is not reach fluctuation (that is, complete deviation fluctuation) (S4708A: No), until reach fluctuation The lottery number is set in the waiting number counter 223Ae (S4709A), and the process proceeds to S4710A. By the processing of S4709A, it is possible to wait until the variation display based on the retained ball corresponding to the reach variation retained before the lottery object retention is completed, so that the execution of the indication effect can be waited across the reach variation. It is possible to suppress the continuation of the production.

On the other hand, in the process of S4704A, if it is determined that there is no reach change in the hold (S4704A: No), the precursor type selection table 222Ab (see FIG. 868 (b)) is read (S4705A), and the lottery target The precursor type is specified according to the variation type indicated by the winning information (S4706A). After identifying the precursor type, the precursor type flag 223Ad is updated according to the identified precursor type (S4707A), and the process proceeds to S4710A. In the process of S4707, when the omen effect A is determined as the omen type, the omen type flag 223Ad is set to "01H", and when the omen effect B is determined as the omen type, the omen type flag 223Ad is set to "02H". ” is set, and when the portent effect C is determined as the portent type, “03H” is set to the portent type flag 223Ad. By storing (setting) data corresponding to the determined portent type in the portent type flag 223Ad, the data of the portent type flag 223Ad is set at the start of the variable display effect over every variation until the portent effect is finished. Since the kind of portent corresponding to the can be selected, the same type of performance can be continuously executed until the portent performance is finished.

In the process of S4710A, the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter is read (S4710A), and then the read counter value is set as the value of the precursor number counter 223Ab (S4711A). Thereby, it is possible to set the portent effect for a plurality of times of the variable display effect until the holding of the lottery object is completed. Next, the portent effect prohibition flag 223Aa is set to ON (S4712A), and this process is terminated. By setting the portent effect prohibition flag 223Aa to ON in the process of S4712A, even if a new starting winning prize is detected during execution of the portent effect, it is possible to avoid the lottery as to whether or not the portent effect can be executed. , the processing load of the sound lamp control device 113 can be reduced while the portent effect is set.

Next, referring to FIG. 873, the stop command processing (S4323A) in the fifty-fifth embodiment will be described. As described above, this stop command process is one process in the command determination process A (see FIG. 870), and is a process for performing control according to the stop type notified by the stop command. FIG. 873 is a flow chart showing this stop command processing (S4323A). In the stop command process (S4323A), first, it is determined whether or not the precursor prohibition release flag 223Ac is on (S4801A). If it is determined that the portent prohibition release flag 223Ac is not ON, that is, it is OFF (S4801A: No), this processing ends.

On the other hand, in the processing of S4801A, if it is determined that the precursor prohibition release flag 223Ac is on (S4801A: Yes), it is determined whether the first reservation area is reach fluctuation (S4802A), and the first reservation area is If it is determined that there is a reach fluctuation (S4802A: Yes), this processing ends. That is, the premonition effect prohibition state is continued. On the other hand, in the processing of S4802A, if it is determined that the first reserved area is not reach change (S4802A: No), the possibility of execution of the predictive effect is determined in consideration of the reserved balls accumulated during the predictive effect prohibition state. Execute processing for determination. Specifically, the portent production prohibition flag 223Aa and the portent prohibition release flag 223Ac are set to OFF (S4803A), the value of the special symbol holding ball number counter is read (S4804A), and it is determined whether the read counter value is 2 or more. Determine (S4805A).

In the process of S4805A, if the read counter value is smaller than 2 (S4805A: No), the premonition effect cannot be set, so this process ends. On the other hand, in the processing of S4805A, if it is determined that the read counter value is 2 or more (S4805A: Yes), the logic of the high-order 6 bits of each reserved area excluding the first reserved area in the prize winning information storage area 223a A sum is calculated (S4806A), and then it is determined whether the most significant bit of the calculated logical sum data is 1 (S4807A).

In the process of S4807A, if it is determined that the most significant bit of the OR data is 1 (S4807A: Yes), the process proceeds to S4810A. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4807A that the most significant bit of the logical sum data is not 1 (S4807A: No), it is determined whether or not the lower bit of 1 bit is 1 (S4808A). If it is determined that the lower bit is 1 (S4808A: Yes), the process proceeds to S4810A. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4808A that the lower bit is not 1 (S4808A: No), then it is determined whether the least significant bit has been determined (S4809A). If the least significant bit is determined (S4809A: Yes), it means that the variation type to be the lottery target for the portent effect is not included in the hold, and this processing is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if the least significant bit has not been determined (S4809A: No), the process returns to S4808A. That is, in the processing of S4808A and S4809A, among the bits set to 1 in the OR data, the highest bit is specified and the processing of S4810A is performed, or the bit set to 1 is The non-existence results in either terminating the process as it is.

In the process of S4810A executed after the process of S4807A or S4808A, the reserved area in which the same bit as the most significant bit among the bits storing 1 data in the OR data is set to 1 is specified ( S4810A), the winning information stored in the specified reservation area is set as the winning information for the lottery target of the precursor effect (lottery object pending) (S4811A). Next, an omen start determination process for determining whether or not the omen effect can be executed is executed (S4812A), and the process ends. This portent start determination processing (S4812A) is the same processing as the portent start determination processing (S4606A, see FIG. 872) executed in the winning information command processing (see FIG. 871) described above. We omit detailed explanations.

In the stop command processing, when the omen lottery prohibition state is canceled, it is possible to determine whether or not the omen performance can be executed in consideration of the retained balls increased during the omen lottery prohibition state, so there is an opportunity to execute the omen performance. can be more. Therefore, it is possible to realize a more suitable presentation mode.

Next, with reference to FIG. 874, the details of the hit-related process A (S4324A) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 in the fifty-fifth embodiment will be described. This hit-related process A (S4324A) is a process executed in place of the hit-related process (see FIG. 37) in the first embodiment in the command determination process A (see FIG. 870). 37), this is a process for performing control according to the type of the received win-related command. FIG. 874 is a flowchart showing this win-related process A (S4324A). Of the hit-related process A (S4324A) in the fifty-fifth embodiment, the processes of S4901A to S4910A are the same as the processes of S4401 to S4410 of the hit-related process (S4314) in the first embodiment. be. In addition, in the hit-related process A (S4324A) in the fifty-fifth embodiment, after the process of S4910A is executed, a lottery is performed as to whether or not to execute the omen effect after the end of the hit, taking into account the number of balls that have been increased during the hit. Win end time sign lottery processing is executed (S4911A), and this processing ends. The details of this winning ending portent lottery process (S4911A) will be described with reference to FIG.

FIG. 875 is a flowchart showing the sign lottery process at the end of winning (S4911A). In the winning end omen lottery process (S4911A), first, it is determined whether the value of the omen number counter 223Ab is 0 (S5001A). ), and the process ends. Here, in the processing of S5001A, as a situation where the value of the omen number counter 223Ab becomes 1 or more, when the execution of the omen effect was decided last time, the reserved ball corresponding to the jackpot to be ended this time was already reserved. is. In other words, in the fifty-fifth embodiment, when the lottery for the precursor effect is won in a situation where the winning variation is included in the hold, the precursor effect that is naturally determined without resetting the data of the precursor effect by winning It is configured to execute the performance after winning. Therefore, it is possible to draw a lottery as to whether or not the portent performance can be executed even in a situation where the winning variation is included, so that the chances of lottery of the portent performance can be increased.

On the other hand, in the process of S5001A, if it is determined that the value of the number of omen counter 223Ab is 0 (it was not in the omen production standby state at the time of this hit) (S5001A: Yes), the value of the special symbol holding ball number counter is changed. It is read (S5002A), and then it is determined whether the read counter value is 2 or more (S5003A). In the process of S5003A, when it is determined that the read counter value is smaller than 2 (S5003A: No), the precursor effect cannot be executed, so the process ends as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined that the read counter value is equal to or greater than 2 (S5003A: Yes), the logical sum of the upper 6 bits of each reserved area excluding the reserved 1 area is calculated (S5004A). ), and it is determined whether the most significant bit of the calculated OR data is 1 (S5005A).

In the process of S5005A, if it is determined that the most significant bit of the OR data is 1 (S5005A: Yes), the process proceeds to S5008A. On the other hand, in the process of S5005A, if it is determined that the most significant bit of the logical sum data is not 1 (S5005A: No), it is determined whether or not the bit lower by one bit is 1 (S5006A). is 1 (S5006A: Yes), the process proceeds to S5008A. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S5006A that the lower bit of one bit is not 1 (S5006A: No), then whether the least significant bit of the OR data is determined in the processing of S5006A this time. It is determined whether or not (S5007A). In the process of S5007A, if it is determined that the least significant bit of the logical sum data is determined (S5007A: Yes), it means that there is no pending ball to be the lottery target for the omen effect in the pending state. End the process. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S5007A that the least significant bit has not been determined (S5007A: No), the process returns to S5006A. In the process of S5008A executed after the process of S5005A or S5006A, the reserved area in which the same bit as the bit determined to store the data of 1 in the OR data is set to 1 is specified (S5008A ), the winning information stored in the identified reservation area is set as the winning information for the lottery target of the precursor effect (lottery object pending) (S5009A). Next, a precursor start determination process is executed (S5010A), and this process ends. This portent start determination processing (S5010A) is the same processing as the portent start determination processing (S4606A, see FIG. 872) executed in the winning information command processing (see FIG. 871) described above. We omit detailed explanations.

By executing the sign lottery process at the end of the winning (see FIG. 875), it is determined whether or not to execute the sign production immediately after the jackpot game, taking into account the starting prize (increased reserved ball) detected during the jackpot game. Since it can be determined, the execution frequency of the portent effect can be improved. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

Next, with reference to FIG. 876, the variable display setting process A (S4113A) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 in the fifty-fifth embodiment will be described. FIG. 876 is a flowchart showing this variable display setting process A (S4113A). This variable display setting process A (S4113A) is a process executed instead of the variable display setting process (see FIG. 38) in the first embodiment in the main process (see FIG. 34). 38), in order to execute the variation display effect in the third pattern display device 81, processing for generating and setting a variation pattern command for display based on the variation pattern command received from the main controller 110 is. In the variable display setting process A (S4113A) in the fifty-fifth embodiment, the processes in S4501 to S4509 are the same as the processes in S4501 to S4509 in the variable display setting process (see FIG. 38) in the first embodiment. Processing is performed. Further, in the variable display setting process A (S4113A) in the fifty-fifth embodiment, the predictive effect setting process (S4511A) is executed between the process of S4503 and the process of S4504. This is different from the display setting process (see FIG. 38). Details of this portent effect setting process (S4511A) will be described with reference to FIG.

FIG. 877 is a flow chart showing the portent effect setting process (S4511A). In the portent effect setting process (S4511A), first, it is determined whether or not the value of the portent number counter 223Ab is greater than 0 (S5101A). If it is determined that the value of the portent number counter 223Ab is not greater than 0, that is, it is 0 (S5101A: No), it means that the portent effect is not being executed. It is determined whether it is on (S5102A). In the processing of S5102A, if it is determined that the portent effect prohibition flag 223Aa is ON (S5102A: Yes), it means that the variable display effect without the portent effect executed first after the end of the portent effect. Therefore, in order to release the prognostic lottery prohibition state when the variation is stopped, the prognostic prohibition cancellation flag 223Ac is set to ON (S5103A), and the process proceeds to S5104A. On the other hand, in the processing of S5102A, if it is determined that the portent effect prohibition flag 223Aa is not ON, that is, it is off (S5101A: No), the processing of S5103A is skipped, and the mode without the portent effect is performed. A variation pattern is determined according to the variation type (S5104A), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S5101A, when it is determined that the value of the number of omen counter 223Ab is greater than 0 (S5101A: Yes), it means that the omen effect is being executed. The value is decremented by 1 (S5105A), and it is determined whether the value of the waiting number counter 223Ae is greater than 0 (1 or more) (S5106A). In the process of S5106A, if it is determined that the value of the waiting number counter 223Ae is a value greater than 0 (a value of 1 or more) (S5106A: Yes), whether or not it is the last variable display effect of the precursory waiting state. (whether the omen standby state is terminated), and when the omen standby state is terminated, the omen cancellation for drawing the omen type of the omen effect to be executed from the next change display to the holding of the lottery object. The hour sign lottery process is executed (S5107A), the above-described S5104A is executed, and this process ends. The details of this canceling portent lottery process (S5107A) will be described later with reference to FIG.

On the other hand, in the processing of S5106A, if it is determined that the value of the waiting number counter 223Ae is not greater than 0 (that is, it is 0), it means that it is not in the portent standby state, so the portent effect is accompanied. In order to set the variable display effect, first, the portent type flag 223Ad is read (S5108A), the variation pattern accompanied by the portent effect indicated by the portent type flag 223Ad is determined (S5109A), and this processing ends.

By executing this portent effect setting process (see FIG. 877), when the portent effect is set, the same type of portent effect can be continuously executed until the lottery object is held. You can continue to have a sense of expectation for the jackpot.

Next, with reference to FIG. 878, the details of the above-described canceling portent lottery process (S5107A) will be described. FIG. 878 is a flow chart showing this canceling portent lottery process (S5107A). In the cancelation portent lottery process (S5107A), first, 1 is subtracted from the value of the waiting number counter 223Ae (S5201A), and it is determined whether the counter value after the subtraction is 0 (S5202A). That is, it is determined whether or not the current variable display effect is the last variable display effect to be executed in the portent standby state. In the process of S5202A, if it is determined that the counter value after subtraction is not 0 (S5202A: No), it means that the current variable display effect is not the last variable display effect in the omen standby state, so this End the process. On the other hand, in the processing of S5202A, if it is determined that the counter value after subtraction is 0 (S5202A: Yes), this means that the current variable display effect is the last variable display effect in the omen standby state. A process for determining the type of portent performance to be executed from the next variable display performance to the variable display performance related to the holding of the lottery object is performed. Specifically, first, an omen type is selected from the omen type selection table 222Ab (S5203A) in accordance with the variation type of the reserved ball (lottery target reserved) that triggered the setting of the standby state (S5203A), and then the selected omen type is selected. Accordingly, the portent type flag 223Ad is updated (S5204A), and this processing ends.

By executing this canceling portent lottery processing (see FIG. 878), the performance type of the portent performance to be executed after the end of the portent standby state can be set in advance in the portent type flag 223Ad, so the portent performance is started. It is possible to reduce the processing load at times.

As described above, the pachinko machine 10 according to the fifty-fifth embodiment is configured to be capable of executing an indication effect in which the same type of effect mode is repeated over a plurality of consecutive variable display effects. Each time a starting prize is detected, this predictive effect prefetches various counter values (random numbers) obtained based on the starting prize, and executes a lottery to determine whether execution is possible with a lottery probability according to the result of the prefetching. It is configured. When execution of the precursory performance is determined, the same type of precursory performance is set over a plurality of times of variable display performances until the variable display corresponding to the starting prize for which the execution is subject to lottery is completed. It is configured. By configuring in this way, it is possible to keep the player's expectation for a big win over a plurality of variable displays, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In addition, in the fifty-fifth embodiment, when the predictive effect is set, even if the start winning is detected, no lottery is conducted as to whether or not the predictive effect can be executed (the lottery as to whether the predictive effect can be executed is prohibited). It is configured to temporarily set the prohibition state. By configuring in this way, it is possible to suppress the redundant determination of the execution of the sign performance based on the start winning detected during the execution of the sign performance, so that the sign performance becomes complicated and the player does not have to worry. It is possible to prevent the presentation mode from becoming difficult to understand. The portent lottery prohibition state is canceled (finished) when the execution of all the variable displays set with the portent performance is completed and the variable display of 1 not accompanied by the portent performance is completed. By configuring in this way, it is possible to interpose a normal (not accompanied by a sign effect) variable display at least once between the end of the sign effect and the start of the next sign effect. It is possible to prevent the player from misunderstanding that the performed portent effect and the subsequently performed portent effect are a series of portent effects. Therefore, it is possible to realize a more comprehensible mode of presentation.

In addition, in the fifty-fifth embodiment, execution of the predictive effect can be started only under the condition that the ready-to-win fluctuation does not exist before the fluctuation display corresponding to the lottery object suspension. In other words, it is configured such that the variation in which the reach variation is executed is the final variation display in the precursor effect. By configuring in this way, it is possible to easily understand whether or not the portent effect will end, so that an effect mode that is easy for the player to understand can be realized.

Here, as a method for starting the predictive production only under the condition that the reach fluctuation does not exist before the fluctuation display corresponding to the lottery target hold, the predictive lottery prohibition state is set while the reach fluctuation exists in the hold. A method of doing so is also conceivable. However, when this method is employed, the number of situations in which the prognostic lottery prohibition state is set increases, and there is a possibility that the appearance frequency of the prognostic effect will decrease.

Therefore, in the fifty-fifth embodiment, the foreshadow lottery prohibition state is set only during the period from the setting of the omen effect to the end of the omen effect until the end of one normal variable display (that is, reach Even under the situation where the reserved ball corresponding to the fluctuation is already reserved, it is configured to allow the lottery of whether or not the omen effect can be executed), and the omen effect is performed in the state where the reserved ball corresponding to the reach fluctuation is already reserved. When the execution is determined, the portent effect is started from the next variable display after the variable display effect based on the reserved ball corresponding to the previously withheld reach fluctuation is completed. By configuring in this way, the setting frequency of the portent lottery prohibited state can be minimized, so that it is possible to suppress a decrease in the frequency of execution of the portent effect. Therefore, it is possible to realize a more suitable presentation mode.

Further, in the fifty-fifth embodiment, when the prognostic lottery prohibition state is canceled, the variation type of each reserved ball (each data stored in the prize winning information storage area 223a) is referred to and the reserved ball is stored. Whether or not the predictive performance can be executed is determined by lottery according to the variation type of the retained ball with the highest degree of expectation (the retained ball corresponding to the variation type of the (long) variation time that is likely to be selected in the case of winning). That is, substantially, it is configured to execute the control of lottery whether or not to execute the predictive effect by referring to all the reserved balls that are reserved while the predictive lottery prohibition state is set. By constructing in this way, not only the start winning prize detected after the end of the foreshadowing lottery prohibition state but also the reserved balls held during the foreshadowing lottery prohibition state are taken into account to draw a lottery as to whether or not the portent performance can be executed. can be performed, it is possible to further improve the execution frequency of the omen effect.

Similarly, in the fifty-fifth embodiment, even when the jackpot game ends, the variation type of each reserved ball (each data stored in the winning information storage area 223a) is referred to, and an omen effect is obtained. It is configured to draw a lottery as to whether or not the execution of the By constructing in this way, it is possible to draw a lottery as to whether or not the portent performance is to be executed in consideration of the reserved ball corresponding to the starting winning generated during the execution of the jackpot game, so that the execution frequency of the portent performance can be further improved. can be done.

In addition, in the fifty-fifth embodiment, when the predictive effect is won, when the predictive standby state is set because the reach variation is already included in the hold, the last change to be performed in the predictive standby state Although the configuration is such that the precursor type is determined at the start of the display effect, it is not limited to this. For example, it may be configured to determine the type of omen at the end of the last variable display effect in the omen standby state (when the pattern is stopped), or to determine the type of omen at the start of the first variable display effect accompanied by the omen effect. good too.

In the fifty-fifth embodiment, after all the variable display effects accompanied by the predictive effect are completed, the predictive lottery prohibition state is terminated based on the fact that the variable display effect not accompanied by the predictive effect is executed once. The number of executions of the variable display effect without the predictive effect for ending the predictive lottery prohibition state is not limited to this, and may be arbitrarily determined. For example, the sign lottery prohibition state may be set until the variable display performance without the portent performance is executed twice, or the portent lottery prohibition state may be set until the variable display performance without the portent performance is executed five times. You may To increase lottery opportunities for execution of omen performance by reducing starting prizes to be excluded from the lottery for omen performance as the number of variable display performances not accompanied by the omen performance for ending an omen lottery inhibited state is reduced. Conversely, the greater the number of variable display effects not accompanied by the portent effect, the more difficult it is for the player to misunderstand whether the portent effect is continuous or once terminated.

In the fifty-fifth embodiment, even in a situation where the reserved ball corresponding to the big win has already been reserved, when a new starting winning prize is detected, it is configured to draw a lottery as to whether or not the predictive effect can be executed. is already on hold, it may be configured to be set to a sign lottery prohibition state. Even if it is configured in this way, it is possible to refer to the fluctuation type of each reserved ball held at the end of the jackpot and execute a lottery as to whether or not the predictive effect can be executed in the sign lottery process at the end of the win (see FIG. 875). Therefore, it is possible to minimize the number of starting prizes that are not subject to the lottery for whether or not the omen effect can be executed.

In the fifty-fifth embodiment, when the prognostic lottery prohibition state is canceled or when the jackpot ends, the logical sum data of the data stored in each reserved area of the winning information storage area 223a is calculated, and the logical sum data is used. The variation type with the highest degree of expectation is discriminated by means of the ball, and whether or not the predictive performance can be executed is determined by lottery according to the variation type of the discriminated retained ball with the highest degree of expectation, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, each reserved area is discriminated one by one from the first reserved area, and if there is a reserved ball corresponding to the reach variation, a drawing is made as to whether or not the omen effect can be executed according to the variation type of the reserved ball. good too. By constructing in this way, the reach variation cannot exist before the holding of the lottery object, so that the portent effect can be started immediately after winning the portent lottery.

In the fifty-fifth embodiment, the so-called pending change effect (the display mode of the number of pending balls that is increased or decreased in conjunction with the increase or decrease in the number of pending balls) suggests the type of change in the corresponding pending symbols (expectation for a big hit). Although it was not assumed that the performance mode) and the predictive effect are executed at the same time, the predictive effect and the pending change effect may be configured to be executable at the same time. In this case, a lottery (reservation change mode) for winning the lottery to determine whether or not the omen effect can be executed and changing the display mode of the reserved ball number pattern corresponding to the lottery target reservation to a display (reservation change mode) different from the usual display (reservation change mode) Lottery), regardless of whether or not the reach variation is included in the hold, it may be configured to immediately start the predictive effect without setting the predictive waiting state. Even if it is configured in this way, if the reserved ball number pattern is in the reserved change mode, the player can easily understand which of the reserved balls the omen effect is set for. . Therefore, it is possible to reduce the number of cases in which the execution of the portent effect is suppressed, so that the number of executions of the portent effect can be preferably ensured. Further, in this case, if the reserved number of ball symbols corresponding to the ready-to-win fluctuation already reserved at the time of winning the predictive effect is also set to the reserved changing mode, the predictive waiting state is set until the ready-to-win fluctuation ends. You may When the indication performance is started in a situation where the reserved ball number patterns corresponding to the lottery object reservation and the reach fluctuation which was reserved before the lottery object reservation are both of the holding change mode, which of the reservation change modes is started. Since it becomes difficult for a player to recognize whether or not an omen effect is being executed for the reserved balls corresponding to the reserved ball number pattern, the omen lottery standby state is set until the reach fluctuation is digested first. As a result, the player can clearly grasp the "holding ball" which is the target of the omen effect.

In the fifty-fifth embodiment, as an indication effect, the same type of indication effect is provided over a plurality of consecutively executed variable display effects, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, as the portent effect, a type of effect in which the effect mode of the portent effect changes step by step for each variable display effect may be adopted. Specifically, for example, the numbers are displayed in a countdown manner for each variable display effect, and the numbers displayed in the foreshadowing effect in the variable display effect corresponding to the holding of the lottery object indicate the degree of expectation for the big win. A mode or, conversely, a mode in which numbers are added and displayed in a count-up format, and the number displayed in the portent mode in the variable display mode corresponding to the holding of the lottery object suggests the degree of expectation for a big win as the portent mode. may be adopted. Further, for example, like the precursor types in the fifty-fifth embodiment, a plurality of precursor types with different expectations are provided, and in the first half of the variable display effect, the precursor types (for example, the precursor effect) corresponding to the stage with the low degree of expectation A) is executed, and in the latter half of the variable display effect, the portent effects (for example, portent effects B and C) corresponding to the stages of high expectations are executed. In addition to the above examples, it is possible to adopt any effect mode in which the display mode (effect mode) changes step by step for each variable display effect. When adopting the production mode in which the production mode changes in stages, the production mode of the final stage from the variation type corresponding to the lottery target reservation (the foreshadowing production to be executed in the variable display production type), and depending on the final stage, the type of precursor effect to be executed in each variable display effect executed prior to the variable display effect corresponding to the lottery target reservation may be determined. Also, in this case, it may be configured to allow the execution of the same stage of the precursor effect only once in the series of precursor effects, and if the number of pending balls is greater than the number of stages in the final stage that has been determined, the precursor effect By not executing the portent performance for some variable display performances to be executed after determination of the performance, the portent performance of the stage determined in the holding of the lottery object may be executed. Furthermore, when adopting a type of omen production in which the production mode changes in stages, when the omen production is won, the reach hold is included in the hold, and when the omen standby state is set, the omen When the standby state is canceled, depending on the number of variable display effects executed until the lottery target reservation is completed and the variation type of the lottery target reservation, the final stage of the sign production and the sign It is good also as a structure which determines the pending|holding ball|ball of the object which starts production|presentation. By configuring in this way, it is possible to suggest the degree of expectation of the lottery target suspension to the player by means of the precursor performance while suppressing the continuation of the portent performance across the ready-to-win suspension. Also, for example, to set the sign effect of the stage that is set for each variable display effect assuming that the sign standby state was not set (that is, when the sign standby state is canceled, from the middle stage It may be a configuration in which an omen effect is started). By configuring in this way, it is possible not only to draw attention to whether or not the predictive effect will occur in the variable display effect after the reach fluctuation without the predictive effect is completed, but also to make the user pay attention to whether or not the predictive effect occurs. Since the game can be played while also paying attention to the type of precursor, the player's interest in the game can be further improved.

<Fifty-sixth embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 in the fifty-sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 879 to 886. FIG. In the pachinko machine 10 in the fifty-fifth embodiment described above, a new start winning prize is detected under the condition that the hold ball corresponding to the reach variation already exists in the hold, and a lottery is performed to determine whether or not the predictive effect can be executed based on the start winning prize. When the omen production is won (the execution of the omen production is decided), the omen standby state is set to wait for the execution of the omen production until the variable display production corresponding to the already pending reach fluctuation is completed. However, the premonition effect is started after the variable display effect corresponding to the reach fluctuation is completed. At this time, the configuration is such that the type of the sign effect is drawn by lottery after the end of the reach variation. As a result, while suppressing the continuation of the portent performance across the reach fluctuation, the period during which the lottery for execution of the portent performance is prohibited (the period set in the state of prohibition of the portent lottery) is limited to a minimum. was.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 of the fifty-sixth embodiment, it is allowed to continue the precursor effect across reach fluctuations. Then, a new start winning prize is detected under the situation where the ball on hold corresponding to the reach fluctuation already exists, and the omen effect is won in the lottery of whether or not the omen effect can be executed based on the start winning prize (execution of the omen effect is decided). ), at least until the variable display effect before the variable display effect corresponding to the reach fluctuation, a specific predictive effect (special predictive effect) is set, and from the variable display effect corresponding to the reach fluctuation or the reach fluctuation From the variable display performance to be executed next, the type of the precursor performance is selected, and the variable display performance accompanied by the selected type of precursor performance is executed. This special precursor effect is a type of precursor effect that may be set even if the reach fluctuation is not included in the hold, and compared to other types of precursor effects, the selection ratio for each variation type There is no (small) difference in the type of omen production. In other words, the special portent effect is almost a portent effect that only suggests that the portent effect is being executed. In addition, when the special portent effect is executed, it is configured to switch to a portent effect of a type other than the special portent effect at a high rate by the time the portent effect is finished. As a result, the degree of expectation for a big win can be suggested to the player by the performance mode after the switching, so that the sense of expectation can be increased step by step from the start to the end of the premonition performance. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In addition, in the fifty-sixth embodiment, at the start of the variable display effect corresponding to the reach variation that was suspended at the time when the execution of the predictive effect was determined, the predictive effect was terminated with the starting variable display effect, or As planned, it is configured to draw a lottery whether to continue the predictive effect until the variable display effect based on the lottery target reservation (reserved ball corresponding to the winning information that is the target of the lottery for the execution of the predictive effect). In this lottery, based on the fluctuation type of the reach fluctuation to be started and the fluctuation type of the lottery object reservation, it is decided whether to end the precursor production with the reach fluctuation or continue to the fluctuation display production based on the lottery object reservation. It is configured to As a result, it is possible to further diversify the mode of presentation, so that the player's interest in the game can be further improved.

The configuration of the pachinko machine 10 of the fifty-sixth embodiment differs from that of the pachinko machine 10 of the fifty-fifth embodiment described above in that the configurations of the ROM 222 and the RAM 223 in the sound lamp control device 113 are partially changed. and that the control processing executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 is partially changed. Other configurations, various processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, other processes executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp controller 113, and various processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display controller 114 are described in Section 55. It is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in the embodiment. Hereinafter, the same elements as those of the fifty-fifth embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals, and illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 879, the effect mode of the special portent effect in the fifty-sixth embodiment will be described. FIG. 879 is a diagram showing an example of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 when the variable display effect with the special portent effect is executed. As shown in FIG. 879, when the special portent effect is executed, a balloon image FD is formed in the small area Ds3 in the same manner as in the portent effects A to C. As shown in FIG. 879, in the special premonition effect, the characters "some signs..." are displayed on the balloon image FD. On the other hand, the boy character 710 does not undergo special appearance changes such as those of the precursor effects A to C. FIG. With these display modes, it is possible to make the player feel that the degree of expectation for a big win is likely to be low compared to the predictive effects A to C, even though the predictive effect is being executed. Therefore, the player can be expected to switch to a type of predictive effect with a higher degree of expectation for winning before the predictive effect ends. In the following, for the sake of simplification of explanation, the types of portent effects other than the special portent effect (the portent effects A to C) will be collectively referred to as normal portent effects.

Next, with reference to FIG. 880, the transition of the effect mode when the precursor effect is set in the fifty-sixth embodiment will be described. In FIG. 880, it is assumed that three reserved balls are already reserved at the time when execution of the portent effect is determined, and the second reserved ball is the reach variation. FIG. 880(a) is a diagram showing the transition of the effect mode in the case where the special predictive effect continues until the variable display effect corresponding to the reach fluctuation which is suspended at the time when the execution of the predictive effect is determined. be.

As shown in FIG. 880(a), when it is determined to execute the predictive effect in a state where the reach variation is already suspended, the variable display effect executed before the variable display effect involving the reach variation is a special It is set to a variable display effect with an omen. At the start of the variable display performance accompanied by the reach variation, it is determined whether the portent performance is to be continued until the lottery object is retained or whether the portent performance is terminated with the reach variation, and the type of the portent performance is drawn by lottery. The example of FIG. 880(a) illustrates the case where it is determined to continue the predictive effect until the lottery object is suspended. In this case, as shown in FIG. 880 (a), until the variable display effect corresponding to the reach fluctuation, the variable display mode with the special precursor effect is set, and from the variable display effect next to the reach fluctuation, the lottery object holding is supported. It is switched to a variable display effect accompanied by a normal portent effect (one of the portent effects A to C) until the variable display effect. As the sign type after this switching, a type determined in advance by lottery at the start of reach fluctuation is set.

Next, with reference to FIG. 880(b), the transition of the performance mode in the case of ending the portent performance with the variable display performance corresponding to the ready-to-win variation which has already been reserved at the time of lottery for execution of the portent performance will be described. As shown in FIG. 880(b), when it is decided to execute the predictive effect in a state where the reach fluctuation is already suspended, the variable display effect executed before the variable display effect involving the reach change is a special It is set to a variable display effect with an omen. At the start of the variable display performance accompanied by the reach variation, it is determined whether the portent performance is to be continued until the lottery object is retained or whether the portent performance is terminated with the reach variation, and the type of the portent performance is drawn by lottery. The example of FIG. 880(b) illustrates a case where it is determined that the predictive effect is to be terminated with the reach change to be started this time (the scenario of the predictive effect is rewritten). In this case, as shown in FIG. 880(b), with the reach variation to be started, a variable display effect accompanied by a normal predictive effect different from the special predictive effect is executed, and the predictive effect is terminated in the variable display effect. be. That is, from the next variable display effect, the normal variable display mode without the precursor effect is set. Therefore, the variable display effect corresponding to the holding of the lottery object is also set to the normal variable display mode without the predictive effect.

In addition, the ratio of ending the sign effect (rewriting the sign scenario) with the reach change that is digested before the lottery target hold is higher than the lottery target hold. It is configured to be high when the fluctuation type is high. By configuring in this manner, in a series of predictive effects, the variable display effects of the high-expectation variation type are first executed together with the predictive effects, and later the variable display effects of the low-expected change type are executed. can be suppressed. Therefore, it is possible to realize a more suitable presentation mode.

<Electrical configuration in the fifty-sixth embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIG. 881(a), details of the ROM 222 of the audio ramp control device 113 in the fifty-sixth embodiment will be described. FIG. 881(a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM 222 in the fifty-sixth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 881(a), the ROM 222 in the fifty-sixth embodiment has a precursor scenario selection table 222Ba and switching timing table 222Ba in contrast to the configuration of the ROM 222 in the fifty-fifth embodiment (see FIG. 867(a)). The difference is that the selection table 222Bb is added.

The precursor scenario selection table 222Ba determines the distribution (precursor scenario) of the special precursor effect and the normal precursor effect in each variable display effect up to the variable display effect corresponding to the lottery object reservation when the execution of the predictive effect is determined. is a data table referenced for In addition, the switching timing selection table 222Bb determines whether to switch from the reach fluctuation to be digested first to the normal predictive effect when the predictive effect is won in a state in which the ball corresponding to the reach variation is already reserved in the reserve. It is a data table referred to for determining whether to switch to the normal sign effect after the end of the reach variation. First, the details of the precursor scenario selection table 222Ba will be described with reference to FIG. 882(a).

FIG. 882(a) is a diagram showing the defined contents of the portent scenario selection table 222Ba. As described above, the portent scenario selection table 222Ba is data referred to for determining the distribution of the special portent effect and the normal portent effect (a portent scenario) in each variable display effect up to the variable display effect corresponding to the lottery target reservation. is a table. As shown in FIG. 882(a), this precursor scenario selection table 222Ba includes the number of special precursor effects set in a series of precursor effects (prediction Scenario) and the range of the value of the effect lottery counter (random number range) are defined. When the number of special portent effects is selected with reference to the portent scenario selection table 222Ba, the variable display effect accompanied by the selected number of special portent effects is first executed, and thereafter (the number of portent effects remains. If so), it is configured to set the normal sign effect over to the variable display effect corresponding to the holding of the lottery object. As a result, since the normal sign performance that makes it easy to guess the degree of expectation for a big win can be executed in the latter half of the sign performance, the sense of expectation is increased step by step from the start to the end of the sign performance. can be made possible. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

As shown in FIG. 882 (a), the number of omen is 2 times, and the lottery object reservation is a big hit (that is, the number of pending balls is 1, and a new start winning prize corresponding to the hit is detected, and the omen In the case of a situation where the execution of the effect is decided), the value of the effect lottery counter is in the range of “0 to 9”, and the precursor scenario of “no special precursor” (that is, the variable display effect with the normal precursor effect is 2 A precursor scenario executed twice) is defined in association with the value of the production lottery counter of "10 to 98", and a precursor scenario of "one special precursor" (that is, a variable display production accompanied by a special precursor production) is provided. A portent scenario in which a variable display effect accompanied by a normal portent effect is executed once after being executed once) is defined in association with the value of the effect lottery counter "99" and "special portent 2 times". An omen scenario (that is, an omen scenario in which a variable display effect accompanied by a special omen effect is executed twice) is defined in correspondence.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 882 (a), the situation where the number of indications is 2 times and the lottery object reservation is removed (that is, the number of reserved balls is 2) is detected and the execution of the precursor effect is determined), a precursor scenario of “no special precursor” (that is, a normal precursor effect A sign scenario in which the variable display effect is executed twice) is defined in association with the value of the effect lottery counter of “5 to 98”, and a sign scenario of “one special sign” (that is, a special sign effect is executed). A sign scenario in which a variable display effect accompanied by a normal sign effect is executed once after a variable display effect accompanied by a normal sign effect is executed once) is associated and defined, and the value of the effect lottery counter "99" is defined as "special A precursor scenario of "two precursors" (that is, a precursor scenario in which a variable display effect accompanied by a special precursor effect is executed twice) is defined in correspondence. That is, the selection rate of "no special sign" is slightly lower (5%) when the lottery object reservation is a loss than when the jackpot is won. As a result, it is possible to perform a game while paying attention to whether or not the normal sign effect is executed when the sign effect is started.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 882 (a), the situation where the number of indications is 3 times and the lottery target reservation is a big hit (that is, the number of pending balls is 2). , a situation in which it is decided to execute an omen effect), the value of the effect lottery counter is in the range of "0 to 9", and an omen scenario of "no special omen" (that is, a variable display effect with a normal omen effect) is executed three times), and the value of the production lottery counter is "10 to 54", and the precursor scenario of "one special precursor" (that is, the variable display with the special precursor effect) A portent scenario in which a variable display performance accompanied by a normal portent performance is executed twice after the performance is executed once) is defined in correspondence, and the value of the performance lottery counter is in the range of ``55 to 98'', A precursor scenario of "special precursor production twice" (that is, a precursor scenario in which a variable display production accompanied by a normal precursor production is executed once after a variable display production accompanied by a special precursor production is executed twice) is defined in correspondence. Then, the value of the effect lottery counter "99" is defined in association with the precursor scenario of "special precursor effect 3 times" (that is, the precursor scenario in which the variable display effect accompanied by the special precursor effect is executed three times). there is

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 882 (a), the situation where the number of indications is 3 times and the lottery object reservation is lost (that is, the number of pending balls is 1) is detected and the execution of the precursor effect is determined), for the value of the effect lottery counter in the range of “0 to 4”, a precursor scenario of “no special precursor” (that is, a normal precursor effect A sign scenario in which the variable display effect is executed three times) is defined in association with the value of the effect lottery counter of “5 to 44”, and a sign scenario of “one special sign” (that is, a special sign effect is executed). A sign scenario in which a variable display effect accompanied by a normal sign effect is executed twice after a variable display effect accompanied by a normal predictive effect is executed once) is associated and defined, and the value of the effect lottery counter is within the range of ``45 to 98''. On the other hand, the precursor scenario of "Special Omen 2 times" (that is, the precursor scenario in which the variable display effect with the normal precursor effect is executed once after the variable display effect with the special precursor effect is executed twice) is supported. and the effect lottery counter value “99” is associated with the precursor scenario “special precursor 3 times” (that is, the precursor scenario in which the variable display effect accompanied by the special precursor effect is executed three times). stipulated. In other words, even when the number of omens is 3, the selection rate of "no special omens" is slightly lower (5%) in the case of losing the lottery object reservation than in the case of a big win. . As a result, it is possible to perform a game while paying attention to whether or not the normal sign effect is executed when the sign effect is started. In addition, it is configured such that the selection ratio of the precursor scenario in which the number of special precursor effects is one is slightly higher in the case of winning than in the case of losing. In other words, since the number of executions of the special portent effect is smaller, the degree of expectation for winning is higher, so that the game can be played while paying attention to the number of times of execution of the special portent effect.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 882 (a), the situation where the number of indications is 4 times and the lottery object reservation is a big hit (that is, the number of pending balls is 3). , a situation in which it is decided to execute an omen effect), the value of the effect lottery counter is in the range of "0 to 9", and an omen scenario of "no special omen" (that is, a variable display effect with a normal omen effect) is executed four times), and the value of the effect lottery counter is "10 to 39", and the precursor scenario of "one special precursor" (that is, the variable display with the special precursor effect) A portent scenario in which a variable display performance accompanied by a normal portent performance is executed three times after the performance is executed once) is defined in correspondence, and the value of the performance lottery counter is in the range of ``40 to 69'', A precursor scenario of “special precursor production twice” (that is, a precursor scenario in which a variable display production accompanied by a normal precursor production is executed twice after a variable display production accompanied by a special precursor production is executed twice) is defined in association. Then, the value of the effect lottery counter is in the range of "70 to 98", and the sign scenario of "special sign 3 times" (that is, after the variable display effect with the special sign effect is executed three times, the normal sign effect A precursor scenario in which a variable display effect is executed once) is associated with the effect lottery counter value “99” and a precursor scenario of “special precursor 4 times” (that is, with a special precursor effect A premonition scenario in which the variable display effect is executed four times) is associated and defined.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 882 (a), the situation where the number of indications is 4 times and the lottery target reservation is lost (that is, the number of pending balls is 3) is detected and the execution of the precursor effect is determined), for the value of the effect lottery counter in the range of “0 to 4”, a precursor scenario of “no special precursor” (that is, a normal precursor effect A sign scenario in which the variable display effect is executed four times) is defined in association with the value of the effect lottery counter of “5 to 29”, and a sign scenario of “one special sign” (that is, a special sign effect is executed). A sign scenario in which a variable display effect accompanied by a normal sign effect is executed three times after a variable display effect accompanied by a normal predictive effect is executed once) is defined in correspondence, and the value of the effect lottery counter is within the range of ``30 to 54''. On the other hand, the precursor scenario of “special precursor effect twice” (that is, the precursor scenario in which the variable display effect with the normal precursor effect is executed twice after the variable display effect with the special precursor effect is executed twice) is supported. , and the value of the effect lottery counter is in the range of "55 to 98", and the sign scenario of "special sign 3 times" (that is, after the variable display effect with the special sign effect is executed three times A precursor scenario in which a variable display effect accompanied by a normal precursor effect is executed once) is defined in association with the value of the effect lottery counter "99" and a precursor scenario of "4 special precursors" (that is, a special precursor scenario) A premonition scenario in which a variable display effect accompanied by an effect is executed four times) is associated and defined. That is, even when the number of indications is four times, the selection ratio of the indication scenario with a large number of executions of the special indication effect is higher in the case of losing the lottery object reservation than in the case of a big win. . Therefore, the game can be played while paying attention to the number of executions of the special portent effect.

In addition, as an exception, for scenarios in which a special precursor effect is set for all variable display effects until the lottery target is held, it is uniformly selected at a rate of 1% regardless of the lottery result or the number of precursors. It is configured as follows. By configuring in this way, even if the special portent effect continues, it is possible to make the player think that there is a possibility that the percentage of 1% has been pulled by chance. It can be suppressed. In addition, if the special omen effect continues until the start of the lottery target reservation, it will be confirmed that the selection ratio is the same omen scenario between the time of the big hit and the time of the loss, so the expectation for the big hit will be greatly improved. can be made Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

Next, details of the switching timing selection table 222Bb will be described with reference to FIG. 882(b). FIG. 882(b) is a diagram showing the specified contents of the switching timing selection table 222Bb. As described above, in this switching timing selection table 222Bb, when the predictive effect is won in a state in which the reserved ball corresponding to the reach fluctuation is already reserved in the reserve, the reach fluctuation to be digested first is changed to the normal predictive effect. This is a data table referred to for determining whether to switch or to switch to the normal portent effect after reach fluctuation ends.

As shown in FIG. 882(b), in this switching timing selection table 222Bb, the variation type of the hold ball (reach hold) corresponding to the reach fluctuation digested earlier than the lottery target hold and the variation of the lottery target hold A corresponding relationship between the switching timing to the normal portent effect and the counter value of the effect lottery counter is defined for each combination of the type and the. More specifically, if the variation type of reach reservation that is digested earlier than the lottery target reservation is various per variation (per special reach, per super reach, or per normal reach), the variation type of reservation for lottery Regardless, the entire range of possible values (0 to 99) of the effect lottery counter is associated with "at the start of reach fluctuation". Therefore, when the ready-to-win reserve that is digested earlier than the lottery target hold is a win, the special predictive performance is always set up to the variable display before the ready-to-win reserve, and the ready-to-win reserve is switched to the normal predictive performance.

Also, as shown in FIG. 882 (b), the variation type of the reach reservation that is digested earlier than the lottery target reservation is removed special reach, and the variation type of the lottery target reservation is a combination of various per or off special reach (that is, If the lottery target hold is more advantageous (high expectation) variation type, or if it is a variation type equivalent to reach hold), the value of the production lottery counter is in the range of "0 to 19" , the switching timing of "at the start of reach fluctuation" is defined in correspondence, and the switching timing of "next fluctuation of reach fluctuation" is defined in association with the range of the value of the effect lottery counter "20 to 99". ing. Therefore, in this case, the ready-to-win reserve is switched to the normal portent effect at a rate of 20%, and the reserve next to the ready-to-win state is switched to the normal portent effect at a rate of 80%.

On the other hand, the variation type of reach retention that is digested before the retention of the lottery target is out of special reach, and the variation type of the retention of the lottery target is out of the combination of super reach or normal reach In the case of fluctuation type), the entire range of values (0 to 99) that the effect lottery counter can take is associated with "at the start of reach fluctuation". Therefore, when the ready-to-win reserve that is digested earlier than the lottery target hold is a win, the special predictive performance is always set up to the variable display before the ready-to-win reserve, and the ready-to-win reserve is switched to the normal predictive performance.

For this reason, if the omen target hold is a variation type with a degree of expectation greater than or equal to the deviation special reach fluctuation that is executed first, the special omen effect is selected at a rate of 80%, and the omen effect continues after the next change. On the other hand, if the expected variation type is less than the super reach fluctuation, it is switched to the normal omen effect in the outlier special reach that is executed first, and the omen effect is discontinued due to the reach fluctuation, so the special omen When the variable display effect accompanying the effect is lost and develops into a special reach, the expectation of a big win can be enhanced. Therefore, in addition to the timing at which the special portent effect is switched to the normal portent effect, the game can be played by paying attention to the variation type of the variable display effect in which the special portent effect is set.

Also, as shown in FIG. 882 (b), the variation type of reach retention that is digested earlier than the lottery target retention is removed Super reach, the variation type of lottery target retention is a combination of normal reach (that is, the lottery target retention direction is low expectation), the switching timing of "at the start of reach fluctuation" is defined in association with the entire range (0 to 99) that the value of the production lottery counter can take. ing. Therefore, in this case, the ready-to-win reservation is always switched to the normal sign effect.

On the other hand, the variation type of reach retention that is digested before the lottery target retention is removed Super reach, the variation type of reach retention that is digested before the lottery target retention is removed Combination other than normal reach (that is, the lottery target retention For the variation type with higher expectations or the variation type equivalent to reach retention), the value of the production lottery counter is in the range of "0 to 9", "at the start of reach variation" The switching timing is defined in association with the value of the effect lottery counter in the range of "10 to 99", and the switching timing of "next fluctuation of reach fluctuation" is defined in correspondence. Therefore, in this case, the ready-to-win reserve is switched to the normal portent effect at a rate of 10%, and the reserve next to the ready-to-win state is switched to the normal portent effect at a rate of 90%.

For this reason, if the omen target hold is a variation type with a degree of expectation greater than or equal to the deviation super reach fluctuation that is executed first, a special omen effect is selected at a rate of 90%, and the omen effect continues after the next change. On the other hand, if it is a variation type of expectation below normal reach fluctuation, it is switched to normal sign production in the out special reach that is executed first, and the sign production is discontinued at the reach fluctuation, so special sign production When the variable display effect accompanied by is lost and develops to super reach, the expectation of a big win can be enhanced. Therefore, in addition to the timing at which the special portent effect is switched to the normal portent effect, the game can be played by paying attention to the variation type of the variable display effect in which the special portent effect is set.

Also, as shown in FIG. 882 (b), if the variation type of reach retention digested earlier than the lottery target retention is normal reach, regardless of the variation type of lottery target retention, the value of the effect lottery counter is defined in association with the switching timing of “at the start of reach fluctuation” for the range of “0 to 4”, and the value of the effect lottery counter is “next to reach fluctuation” for the range of “5 to 99”. The switching timing of "fluctuation" is associated and defined. Therefore, in this case, the ready-to-reach suspension is switched to the normal portent effect at a rate of 5%, and the next suspension after the ready-to-reach suspension is switched to the normal portent effect at a rate of 95%. Therefore, when the variable display effect accompanied by the special portent effect is lost and develops into normal reach, the expectation of a big win can be enhanced. Therefore, in addition to the timing at which the special portent effect is switched to the normal portent effect, the game can be played by paying attention to the variation type of the variable display effect in which the special portent effect is set.

Next, with reference to FIG. 881(b), details of the RAM 223 provided in the sound lamp control device 113 in the fifty-sixth embodiment will be described. FIG. 881(b) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 223 in the fifty-sixth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 881(b), the RAM 223 in the fifty-sixth embodiment has a special omen counter 223Ba and a re-lottery flag in contrast to the configuration of the RAM 223 in the fifty-fifth embodiment (see FIG. 867(b)). 223Bb and , and the only difference is that the waiting number counter 223Ae is deleted.

The special portent counter 223Ba is a counter that indicates the number of times the special portent effect is executed. The special portent counter 223Ba has an initial value set to 0, and corresponds to the selected number of times when the number of special portent effects (a portent scenario) is selected with reference to the portent scenario selection table 222Ba. A counter value is set (see S4721A in FIG. 883). In addition, if you win the lottery for whether or not to execute the omen effect while the ball corresponding to the reach fluctuation is being held, the value corresponding to the number of fluctuations until the reach fluctuation (the number of special symbol lotteries) is used as the counter value. It is set (see S4723A in FIG. 883). The value of this special omen lottery counter 223Ba is updated by subtracting 1 each time a new variable display effect is executed (see S5113A in FIG. 885), and while the value is 1 or more, the variable display mode is selected. When doing so, a variable display mode accompanied by a special portent effect (see FIG. 879) is set. With this special portent counter 223Ba, the number of times of the special portent effect (a portent scenario) selected at the start of the portent effect can be reliably executed.

The re-lottery flag 223Bb is a flag indicating whether or not to execute a re-lottery (rewrite) of the precursor scenario. If this re-lottery flag 223Bb is on, the reserve ball digested before the lottery target reserve includes the reach variation, and the predictive scenario is replayed at the start of the variable display effect corresponding to the reach variation. On the other hand, if the re-lottery flag 223Bb is off, it means that there is no need for a re-lottery (there is no reach change before the lottery target is held). This re-lottery flag 223Bb is set to ON when execution of the sign effect is determined in a state in which the pending ball already contains the pending ball corresponding to the reach variation (see S4724A in FIG. 883). With this re-lottery flag 223Bb turned on, when it comes to the start timing of fluctuation of the reach variation that is digested before the lottery object holding, the switching timing selection table 222Bb is used to re-lottery of precursor scenarios (from special precursor effect to normal precursor effect). A re-lottery for switching timing to ) is executed (see S5304A in FIG. 886).

<Regarding the control process of the sound lamp control device in the fifty-sixth embodiment>
Next, referring to FIGS. 883 to 886, control processing executed by the MPU 221 of the sound ramp control device 113 in the fifty-sixth embodiment will be described. First, referring to FIG. 883, the precursor start determination process B (S4611A) in the fifty-sixth embodiment will be described. This portent start determination process B (S4611A) is a process executed in place of the portent start determination process (see FIG. 872) in the fifty-fifth embodiment.

In the processes of S4701A to S4707A and S4710A to S4712A of the precursor start determination process B (S4611A) in the fifty-sixth embodiment, S4701A to S4707A and S4710A to S4712A of the precursor start determination process (S4606A) in the fifty-fifth embodiment, respectively. are executed. In addition, in the precursor start determination process B (S4611A) in the fifty-sixth embodiment, when it is determined that there is a reach fluctuation in the hold in the process of S4704A (S4704A: Yes), the number of lotteries up to the reach fluctuation is counted by a special precursor counter. 223Ba (S4723A), then the re-lottery flag 223Bb is set to ON (S4724A), and the process proceeds to S4710A.

By setting the number of lotteries up to the reach to the special portent counter 223Ba in the processing of S4723A, it is possible to configure the special portent effect (see FIG. 879) to be executed until the reach changes.

On the other hand, in the processing of S4704A, if it is determined that there is no reach change in the hold (S4704A: No), after executing the processing of S4705A to S4707A, the current number of held balls is selected from the portent scenario selection table 222Ba. The appropriate predictive scenario is selected (S4721A), the number of special predictive effects of the selected scenario is set in the special predictive effect counter 223Ba (S4722A), and the process proceeds to S4710A.

Next, with reference to FIG. 884, the stop command process B (S4331A) in the fifty-sixth embodiment will be described. This stop command process B (S4331A) is a process executed instead of the stop command process (see FIG. 873) in the fifty-fifth embodiment.

Of the stop command process B (S4331A) in the fifty-sixth embodiment, the processes of S4801A and S4803A to S4811A are the same as the processes of S4801A and S4803A to S4811A of the stop command process (S4323A) in the fifty-fifth embodiment. Processing is performed. Also, in the stop command process B (S4331A) in the fifty-sixth embodiment, the process of S4802A of the stop command process (S4323A) in the fifty-fifth embodiment is deleted. Furthermore, in the stop command process B (S4331A) in the fifty-sixth embodiment, the precursor start determination process B (S4821A) is executed instead of the precursor start determination process (S4812A (4605A)). Since this portent start determination process B (S4812A) is the same control process as the portent start determination process B (S4611A) described with reference to FIG. 883, detailed description thereof will be omitted here.

Next, with reference to FIG. 885, the precursor effect setting process B (S4521A) in the fifty-sixth embodiment will be described. This portent effect setting process B (S4521A) is a process executed instead of the portent effect setting process (see FIG. 877) in the fifty-fifth embodiment in the variable display setting process A (see FIG. 876).

In each process of S5101A to S5105A, S5108A and S5109A in the portent effect setting process B (S4521A) in the fifty-sixth embodiment, S5101A to S5105A, S5108A and S5109A of the portent effect setting process (S4511A) in the fifty-fifth embodiment are executed.

In the portent effect setting process B (S4521A) in the fifty-sixth embodiment, after the process of S5105A is performed, a re-lottery process for re-lottering the portent scenario is performed (S5111A). The details of this re-lottery process (S5111A) will be described later with reference to FIG. When the processing of S5111A ends, it is then determined whether the value of the special portent counter 223Ba is greater than 0 (S5112A), and if it is determined that the value of the special portent counter 223Ba is not greater than 0, that is, is 0 (S5112A: No), the process proceeds to A5108. On the other hand, if the value of the special omen counter 223Ba is greater than 0 (S5112A: Yes), the value of the special omen counter 223Ba is decremented by 1 (S5113A), and then the variation pattern accompanied by the special omen effect is determined ( S5114A), this process ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 886, details of the above-described re-lottery processing (S5111A) will be described. FIG. 886 is a flow chart showing this re-lottery process (S5111A). In the re-lottery process (S5111A), first, it is determined whether or not the re-lottery flag 223Bb is ON (S5301A). If it is determined that the re-lottery flag 223Bb is not ON, that is, is OFF (S5301A: No), there is no possibility of performing a re-lottery for the predictive scenario, so this processing ends. On the other hand, in the process of S5301A, if it is determined that the re-lottery flag 223Bb is ON (S5301A: Yes), it is determined whether the value of the special predictor counter 223Ba is 1 (S5302A), and the value of the special predictor counter 223Ba is determined. is not 1 (S5302A: No), it is not the time to execute a re-lottery, so this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S5302A, if it is determined that the value of the special portent counter 223Ba is 1 (S5302A: Yes), it corresponds to the reach fluctuation that has already been suspended when the execution of the portent effect is determined. It means that it is the timing to start the variable display effect, and the switch timing is selected in order to re-lottery whether to end the predictive effect with the reach change or to execute the predictive effect until the lottery target is retained as originally planned. Table 222Bb is read out (S5303A), then the switching timing is determined according to the variation type of the reach variation that starts the variation this time and the target hold at the time of the omen effect lottery (S5304A), and the reach variation start time is determined ( In other words, it is determined whether or not the precursor scenario for setting the normal precursor effect with the current reach variation and ending the precursor effect with the current reach variation is drawn again (S5305A).

In the process of S5305A, if it is determined that the reach fluctuation start time has been determined (S5305A: Yes), the values of the precursor number counter 223Ab and the special precursor counter 223Ba are both reset to 0 (S5306A), and then the current fluctuation is started. The predictor type is selected from the predictor type selection table 222Ab according to the fluctuation type of the reach fluctuation to be caused (S5307A). After selecting the predictor type, the predictor type flag 223Ad is updated according to the selected predictor type (S5309A), and this process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S5305A, if it is determined that the reach fluctuation start time has not been determined (S5305A: No), the omen is selected from the omen type selection table 222Ab according to the variation type of the held ball that triggered the start of the omen effect. The type is selected (S5308A), the process of S5309A is executed, and this process ends.

As described above, the pachinko machine 10 of the fifty-sixth embodiment allows the predictive effect to continue across reach fluctuations. Then, a new start winning prize is detected under the situation where the ball on hold corresponding to the reach fluctuation already exists, and the omen effect is won in the lottery of whether or not the omen effect can be executed based on the start winning prize (execution of the omen effect is decided). ), set a specific precursor effect (special precursor effect) at least until the variable display effect before the variable display effect corresponding to the reach fluctuation, and from the variable display effect corresponding to the reach fluctuation, or the reach fluctuation From the variable display performance to be executed next, the type of the precursor performance is selected, and the variable display performance accompanied by the selected type of precursor performance is executed. This special precursor effect is a type of precursor effect that may be set even if the reach fluctuation is not included in the hold, and compared to other types of precursor effects, the selection ratio for each variation type There is no (small) difference in the type of omen production. In other words, the special portent effect is almost a portent effect that only suggests that the portent effect is being executed. In addition, when the special portent effect is executed, it is configured to switch to a portent effect of a type other than the special portent effect at a high rate by the time the portent effect is finished. As a result, the degree of expectation for a big win can be suggested to the player by the performance mode after the switching, so that the sense of expectation can be increased step by step from the start to the end of the premonition performance. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In addition, in the fifty-sixth embodiment, at the start of the variable display effect corresponding to the reach variation that was suspended at the time when the execution of the predictive effect was determined, the predictive effect was terminated with the starting variable display effect, or As planned, it is configured to draw a lottery whether to continue the predictive effect until the variable display effect based on the lottery target reservation (reserved ball corresponding to the winning information that is the target of the lottery for the execution of the predictive effect). In this lottery, based on the fluctuation type of the reach fluctuation to be started and the fluctuation type of the lottery target reservation, it is decided whether to end the precursor production with the reach fluctuation or continue to the fluctuation display production based on the lottery object hold. It is configured to As a result, it is possible to further diversify the mode of presentation, so that the player's interest in the game can be further improved.

In the fifty-sixth embodiment, execution of the predictive effect is determined in a state where the reach variation is included in the hold, and the predictive scenario re-lottery executed at the start of the reach change continues until the predictive target hold. When it is decided to execute the predictive effect (the predictive scenario is not rewritten), the reach fluctuation is accompanied by a special predictive effect and is set to a variable display mode in which the reach occurs. It is not limited. For example, a configuration may be adopted in which a variable display effect in which reach does not occur during the variable display period of reach variation (that is, corresponding to complete failure) is executed multiple times in a pseudo manner. By configuring in this way, as in the fifty-fifth embodiment described above, it is possible to configure such that the ready-to-win effect does not occur in the variable display effect other than the variable display effect of holding the lottery object in the portent effect. Therefore, it is possible to make the player clearly understand which of the variable displays the portent effect is intended for.

In the fifty-sixth embodiment, when it is decided to execute the predictive effect in a state where the reach variation is included in the hold, a special predictive effect is set as the predictive effect up to the variable display effect before the reach change, At the start of the reach fluctuation, after switching from the reach fluctuation to the normal sign production, it was configured to determine whether to end the sign production with the reach change or to set the special sign production until the reach change. It is not limited. For example, a configuration may be adopted in which the special predictive effect is always ended in the variable display effect before the reach change, and the normal predictive effect is always set in the reach change. Then, when the fluctuation type of the reach fluctuation that was withheld at the time when the execution of the omen effect was determined and the fluctuation type of the omen target suspension are compared, the omen target suspension is the fluctuation type with a lower degree of expectation. It may also be configured such that the ratio of ending the sign effect with the variable display corresponding to the reach variation is high. By configuring in this way, the variable display effect accompanying the normal sign effect develops into the ready-to-win effect, and when the sign effect continues even after the end of the reach effect, the predictive effect is displayed toward the variation type with a higher degree of expectation. Since the player can be made to recognize that there is a high possibility that the performance is being executed, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

<Fifty-seventh embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 in the fifty-seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 887 to 893. FIG. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the fifty-fifth embodiment described above, each time a new start-up winning is detected, a lottery is executed to determine whether or not the predictive effect can be executed. A variable display effect accompanied by an omen effect is executed over a plurality of times of the variable display effect. In addition, in the fifty-fifth embodiment, while suppressing the continuation of the variable display effect accompanied by the predictive effect across reach fluctuations, in order to maximize the chance of the lottery for whether the predictive effect can be executed, When a new starting prize is detected while the reach fluctuation is suspended, only a lottery for whether or not to execute the precursor effect is executed based on the start prize, and if the precursor effect is won, it is suspended first. An omen standby state is set in which the execution of the omen effect is restricted (avoided) until the variable display effect corresponding to the reach variation is completed, and the omen effect is started after the reach variation is completed.

On the other hand, the pachinko machine 10 in the fifty-seventh embodiment is configured to set the sign waiting state even when the sign lottery is won in a state in which the specified complete loss fluctuation is suspended in addition to the reach fluctuation. More specifically, in the fifty-seventh embodiment, it is configured to provide complete outlier fluctuations (longer outliers A and B) in which the fluctuation time varies according to the number of held balls, and basically less than 20 seconds. A short fluctuation time is set, but when the fluctuation starts under the condition that the number of held balls is a specific number, the fluctuation time (30 seconds) equivalent to the normal reach fluctuation is set. Then, when the fluctuation time equivalent to the fluctuation display of the reach fluctuation is set, the same production mode as the reach fluctuation is set in terms of production. For this reason, in a situation where a specific complete deviation variation is suspended, there is a possibility that a variation display mode corresponding to normal reach variation will be set by setting a variation time of 30 seconds at the start of variation depending on the transition of the number of retained balls. There is Therefore, in the fifty-seventh embodiment, if a sign lottery is won in a situation where a specific complete loss fluctuation with an indefinite fluctuation time is suspended, a sign standby state is set, and the specific complete loss fluctuation is a reach fluctuation. If it is set to a fluctuation time equivalent to , while starting the sign production after the specific complete deviation fluctuation is completed, when it is determined that the specific complete deviation fluctuation will not be the same fluctuation time as the reach fluctuation is configured to start an omen effect from the fixed point of time. By configuring in this way, it is possible to suppress the continuation of the portent effect across the variable display effect in which the ready-to-win effect occurs, as in the fifty-fifth embodiment described above. Therefore, it is possible to more preferably execute the premonition effect.

The pachinko machine 10 of the fifty-seventh embodiment differs in configuration from the pachinko machine 10 of the fifty-fifth embodiment described above in that the configuration of the ROM 202 in the main controller 110 is partially changed, and that the voice The point is that the control processing executed by the MPU 221 of the lamp control device 113 is partially changed. Other configurations, various processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, other processes executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp controller 113, and various processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display controller 114 are described in Section 55. It is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in the embodiment. Hereinafter, the same elements as those of the fifty-fifth embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals, and illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

First, with reference to FIGS. 887 and 888, when execution of the precursor effect is determined in the fifty-seventh embodiment, a specific complete deviation variation (only when the number of held balls at the start of variation is a specific number , variation type in which the variable time corresponding to the ready-to-win effect is set) will be described. Although the details will be described later, in the fifty-seventh embodiment, two types of complete deviation fluctuations, long deviations A and B, are provided as specific complete deviation deviations. Long deviation A is set to 30 seconds, which is the fluctuation time corresponding to normal reach fluctuation, only when the number of held balls starts to fluctuate with 1 or less, and when the number of held balls starts to fluctuate with 2 or more is a variation type in which a variation time of 20 seconds or 10 seconds, which is a variation time corresponding to a complete deviation variation, is set. In addition, in the long outlier B, when the fluctuation is started with the number of held balls of 2 or less, 30 seconds, which is the fluctuation time corresponding to the normal reach fluctuation, is set, and the fluctuation is started with the number of held balls of 3. In case, it is a variation type in which a variation time of 10 seconds corresponding to a complete deviation variation is set. By providing these specific complete deviation fluctuations, it is possible to lengthen the average fluctuation time when the number of held balls is small, so the possibility of accumulating new holds in situations where the number of held balls is small is high. In this way, it is possible to make it difficult to create a situation in which the variable display is not executed (that is, a situation in which the possibility of winning a jackpot is completely zero).

First, with reference to FIG. 887, the transition of the effect mode when the premonition effect is won in the state that the reserved ball corresponding to the long out B is already reserved will be described. FIG. 887(a) illustrates a case where, at the time of winning the execution lottery for the omen effect, two reserved balls have already been reserved, and the second reserved ball is a long outlier B, showing the effect mode. It is the figure which showed transition. As shown in FIG. 887(a), during the execution of the normal variable display effect (variable display effect without foreshadow effect) which is executed in a state where there are two held balls including the long out B, a new When the start winning prize is detected and the omen lottery based on the start winning prize is won, the number of reserved balls becomes two at that time. For this reason, after winning the omen effect, the first fluctuation display is the fluctuation display corresponding to the complete loss, the second fluctuation display is the fluctuation display corresponding to the long out B, and the third fluctuation display is the omen target hold. (Reach variation that triggers the winning of the omen effect) becomes a variable display corresponding to. At the start of the first complete deviation variation, the variation display is started under the condition that there are two retained balls, so the number of retained balls is two or more at the start of the second long deviation B. In other words, after winning the omen effect, at the start of the first complete deviation fluctuation, the number of retained balls at the start of the second long deviation B may be 2 or less, or 3. Due to a certain situation, a normal variation display mode without an indication effect is set in the first complete failure variation. As a result, when the fluctuation time of the second long out B becomes the fluctuation time corresponding to the reach fluctuation (that is, the number of times of detection of the new start winning until the start of the second long out B is 1 or less If it becomes), or if it becomes a variable time corresponding to complete loss (that is, if the number of times of detection of new start winnings until the start of the second long loss B is 2 or more), the precursor effect is in the middle It is possible to suppress the setting of an irregular performance mode such as ending or continuation of the predictive performance across reach fluctuations. Therefore, the mode of presentation can be set more appropriately.

As shown in FIG. 887(a), after winning the premonition effect, while the first complete loss variation is executed in the normal effect mode, if a new start winning prize is not detected, the second time The variable display corresponding to the long deviation B is started in the state of one reserved ball. In other words, the fluctuation time is set to 30 seconds, and the fluctuation display mode corresponding to the lost normal reach is set, so the rule of the precursor production in the fifty-fifth embodiment (the precursor production continues across the reach fluctuation) Following the law to avoid doing), the variable display effect of the off normal reach corresponding to the long out B is set to the normal variable display mode without the precursor effect. In this case, after the end of the variable display performance of the long outlier B, the first variable display becomes the variable display corresponding to the lottery target suspension, and there is no room for executing the sign performance multiple times, so the reach variation corresponding to the lottery target suspension. Also regarding, it is not possible to set the omen effect. Therefore, at the start of the variable display corresponding to the long outlier B, the precursor effect itself is canceled and the precursor lottery prohibition state is also terminated. By configuring in this way, the number of lotteries for the omen effect can be maximized.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 887 (b), after the execution of the precursor effect is determined, the start winning is detected twice or more during the execution of the first complete deviation variation, and the start time of the long deviation B If there are 3 balls on hold, the fluctuation time corresponding to the complete loss is set as the long out B, so the precursor effect is started from the long out B and corresponds to the long out B. Two times of the variable display performance over the variable display performance corresponding to the holding of the lottery object and the variable display performance corresponding to the holding of the lottery object are set to the variable display performance accompanied by the portent performance. As a result, when execution of the sign effect is determined in a state in which the complete failure B is suspended, the fluctuation time of the complete failure B (whether or not the fluctuation time corresponding to the normal reach is set) is taken into consideration, Since the start timing of the portent effect can be varied (or the portent effect can be canceled), the portent effect can be executed more preferably.

Next, with reference to FIG. 888, the transition of the effect mode when the omen effect is won in a state where the ball on hold corresponding to the long out A is already on hold will be described. Fig. 888 shows the transition of the effect mode, exemplifying the case where three reserved balls are already reserved at the time of winning the execution lottery for the omen effect, and the third reserved ball is a long outlier B. It is a diagram. Here, as described above, in the long outlier A, when the variation is started in the state where the number of pending balls is 1 or less (the special symbol lottery is executed), the variation time equivalent to the normal reach variation (30 seconds) While set, when the variation is started in a state where the number of pending balls is 2 or more (a special symbol lottery is executed), it is a variation type in which a variation time corresponding to complete loss is set. In the fifty-seventh embodiment, each time the variation display is executed, it is determined how many balls are held at the start of the fluctuation of the long deviation A, and the number of held balls at the start of the fluctuation of the long deviation A is 2. At the stage where the above is confirmed (that is, when it is confirmed that the normal ready-to-win effect does not occur in the variable display effect corresponding to the outlier A), the portent effect is started. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 888, while the normal variable display effect is being executed with three pending balls, a new start winning prize is detected, and the number of pending balls changes from three to four. In addition, when winning the sign performance in the lottery based on the start prize, at the start of the first variable display performance after winning the sign performance, one reserved ball is consumed and three reserved balls are in the state. A variable display effect is started. At this point, the held ball corresponding to the outlier A becomes the second oldest held ball in terms of time, but if the number of held balls does not increase before the fluctuation of the outlier A starts, there will be only one held ball. On the other hand, if the number of held balls increases even by one, the long deviation A is started in a state where the number of held balls is 2 or more. Therefore, at the time of starting the first variable display effect after winning the omen effect, it is impossible to specify whether or not the fluctuation time of the long loss A to be executed after the second time is set to 30 seconds. Therefore, in order to cope with both cases, the first variable display performance after winning the portent performance is set to the normal variable display mode without the portent performance.

Also, as shown in FIG. 888, after winning the omen effect, when a new start winning prize is detected during the execution of the first variable display effect and the number of retained balls increases by one, the variable display corresponding to the long outlier A It is determined that the performance is started in a state where the number of reserved balls is two or more. That is, it is determined that the normal ready-to-win effect will not occur in the variable display effect of the long-out A. Therefore, the variable display effect accompanied by the predictive effect is set from the next started variable display effect (the second variable display effect after winning the predictive effect). Then, when the outreach reach variation effect accompanied by the sign is executed in the lottery object holding, the sign effect is terminated.

It should be noted that, unlike the example in FIG. 888, if the number of held balls does not increase until the variable display corresponding to the long deviation A starts, it is executed before the long deviation A as in the example of FIG. 887(a). All variable display effects are set to the normal variable display mode. Further, the variable display effect corresponding to the long outs A is set to the normal variable display effect corresponding to the normal reach, and the execution of the portent effect is canceled.

As described above, in the fifty-seventh embodiment, execution of the predictive effect is newly determined under the condition that the variation type (long failure A or long failure B) corresponding to the specific complete failure is included in the hold. In this case, the start timing of the portent effect is differentiated depending on whether or not the variation type (long failure A or long failure B) corresponding to the specific complete failure is the variation time corresponding to the complete failure. More specifically, after winning the omen effect, determine the lower limit of the number of pending balls when the variation type corresponding to the specific complete loss is started to change each time the variation starts, and from the determined number of pending balls It is configured to determine the possibility of being set to a performance mode in which normal reach occurs, and to start the portent performance as soon as the possibility of normal reach is eliminated. By configuring in this way, it is possible to obtain more opportunities for the indication effect while complying with the basic effect rule of avoiding the continuation of the indication effect across reach fluctuations.

Here, as a method of adhering to the basic production of avoiding the continuation of the omen production across reach fluctuations, if a specific complete deviation fluctuation is included in the hold, up to a specific complete deviation fluctuation A method of uniformly prohibiting the execution of the portent effect is also conceivable. However, in this method, the execution of the portent effect is suppressed even if the normal reach effect is not executed in a specific complete deviation variation, so there is a possibility that the number of portent effects is unnecessarily reduced.

On the other hand, in the fifty-seventh embodiment, the change in the number of pending balls is monitored during the period from the determination of execution of the precursor effect to the start of the variable display effect of the variation type corresponding to the specific complete failure. , Even if it is before the start timing of the variable display effect corresponding to the specific complete failure, the sign effect will start when the possibility of the normal reach effect disappears at the start of the variable display effect corresponding to the specific complete failure. It is configured to By configuring in this way, it is possible to maximize the chances of executing the portent effect.

<Electrical configuration in the fifty-seventh embodiment>
Next, details of the ROM 202 in the main controller 110 in the fifty-seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. Here, the ROM 202 in the fifty-seventh embodiment changes instead of the variation pattern selection table 202d for the configuration of the ROM 202 in the fifty-fifth embodiment (and the first embodiment) (see FIG. 9A). The only difference is that a pattern selection table 202Cd is provided. Since other configurations are the same as those of the fifty-fifth embodiment (and the first embodiment) described above, detailed description thereof will be omitted here.

FIG. 889(a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the variation pattern selection table 202Cd in the fifty-seventh embodiment. As shown in FIG. 889(a), the variation pattern selection table 202Cd in the fifty-seventh embodiment includes a large winning variation pattern table 202Cd1 referred to when selecting a variation pattern corresponding to the big winning, and a special symbol in the normal state. (Normal) variation pattern table 202Cd2 for loss, which is referred to when selecting the variation pattern corresponding to the loss of the lottery result, and when selecting the variation pattern corresponding to the loss of the lottery result of the special symbol in the probability variation state. and a deviation (probability variation) variation pattern table 202Cd3. Of these, the big winning variation pattern table 202Cd1 and the losing (variable probability) variation pattern table 202Cd3 are the big winning variation pattern table 202d1 in the fifty-fifth embodiment (and the first embodiment) (see FIG. 11(b)). , and the deviation (probability variation) variation pattern table 202d3 (see FIG. 11(d)), so details thereof will be omitted here.

FIG. 889(b) is a diagram showing the defined contents of the deviation (normal) variation pattern table 202Cd2 in the fifty-seventh embodiment. It should be noted that there is no change in the variation pattern of the stop symbol being out of reach from the out (normal) variation pattern table 202d2 (see FIG. 11(d)) in the fifty-fifth embodiment (and the first embodiment). In (b), only the corresponding relationship between each variation pattern corresponding to the complete loss of the stopped symbol and the value of the variation type counter is illustrated.

As shown in FIG. 889(b), in the fifty-seventh embodiment, there are three types of variation patterns corresponding to completely out of stop symbols: "short out", "long out A", and "long out B". There is a variation pattern. As shown in FIG. 889 (b), the value of the variation type counter CS1 is defined to correspond to the range of "0 to 89", "short out", and the value of the variation type counter CS1 is "99 to 189 ” is defined in association with “long outlier A”, and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is defined in association with the range of “190 to 198” with “long outlier B”. .

"Short out" is a variation type in which the variation time varies in the range of 7 seconds to 20 seconds according to the number of held balls, and as shown in FIG. If the number of held balls is 0, the fluctuation time is set to 20 seconds, if the number of held balls is 1, the fluctuation time is set to 10 seconds, and if the number of held balls is 2 or more, Variation time is set to 7 seconds. For this reason, if "short out" is determined, the smaller the number of held balls, the longer the fluctuation time, but there is a possibility that the fluctuation time corresponding to the reach fluctuation (30 seconds or more fluctuation time) will be set. no.

In addition, "long out A" is a variation type in which the variation time varies in the range of 10 seconds to 30 seconds according to the number of pending balls, and as shown in FIG. At the time of lottery), if the number of pending balls is 0 or 1, the variable time is set to 30 seconds, and if the number of pending balls is 2, the variable time is set to 20 seconds, and the number of pending balls is 3. If it is 1, the variation time is set to 10 seconds. For this reason, when "long deviation A" is determined, the less the number of held balls, the longer the fluctuation time, and when the number of held balls is 1 or less, the fluctuation time corresponding to the reach fluctuation (30 seconds) is set.

Furthermore, "long out B" is a variation type in which the variation time varies in the range of 10 seconds to 30 seconds depending on the number of held balls, and as shown in FIG. If the number of reserved balls at the time of lottery) is 2 or less, the variable time is set to 30 seconds, and if the number of reserved balls is 3, the variable time is set to 10 seconds. Therefore, when "long deviation B" is determined, the smaller the number of held balls, the longer the fluctuation time, and when the number of held balls is 2 or less, the fluctuation time corresponding to the reach fluctuation (30 seconds) is set.

As described above, in the fifty-seventh embodiment, when the complete loss is selected as the stop symbol, the smaller the number of held balls, the longer the fluctuation time. It is configured so that starting prizes are easily generated. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the state in which the number of held balls becomes 0 and the variation completely stops from continuing for a long time.

<Regarding the control process of the audio ramp control device in the fifty-seventh embodiment>
Next, referring to FIGS. 890 to 893, control processing executed by the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 in the fifty-seventh embodiment will be described. First, referring to FIG. 890, the precursor start determination process C (S4621A) in the fifty-seventh embodiment will be described. This portent start determination process C (S4621A) is a process executed instead of the portent start determination process (see FIG. 872) in the fifty-fifth embodiment.

S4701A to S4703A, S4705A to S4708A, and S4710A to S4712A of the precursor start determination process C (S4621A) in the fifty-seventh embodiment correspond to S4701A to S4703A of the precursor start determination process (S4606A) in the fifty-fifth embodiment. , S4705A to S4708A and S4710A to S4712A are executed. In addition, in the sign start determination process C (S4621A) in the fifty-seventh embodiment, in the process of S4703A, if it is determined that the determination result corresponds to the execution of the sign effect (S4703A: Yes), reach fluctuation and It is determined whether or not there is an outlier variation (S4731A), and if it is determined that there is a reach variation and an outlier variation in the hold (S4731A: Yes), the process proceeds to S4708A.

In the process of S4708, if it is determined that there is no reach variation in the first reserved area (S4708A: No), the number of lotteries up to the variation executed most recently among the reach variation and the long deviation variation is set to the waiting number counter 223Ae (S4732A), and the process proceeds to S4710A.

On the other hand, in the process of S4731A, if it is determined that there is no reach fluctuation or long deviation fluctuation in the hold (S4731A: No), the process proceeds to S4705A. According to this sign start determination process C, not only when the execution of the sign effect is newly determined while the reach fluctuation is included in the hold, but also when the long deviation fluctuation (specific complete deviation fluctuation) is included in the hold Even if it is, it is possible to wait the start of execution of the sign effect.

Next, with reference to FIG. 891, the precursor effect setting process C (S4531A) in the fifty-seventh embodiment will be described. This portent effect setting process C (S4531A) is a process executed instead of the portent effect setting process (see FIG. 877) in the fifty-fifth embodiment.

In the processes of S5101A to S5106A, S5108A and S5109A in the portent effect setting process C (S4531A) in the fifty-seventh embodiment, S5101A to S5106A, S5108A and S5109A of the portent effect setting process (S4511A) in the fifty-fifth embodiment are performed. are executed.

Further, in the portent effect setting process C (S4531A) in the fifty-seventh embodiment, when it is determined in the process of S5106A that the value of the waiting number counter 223Ae is not greater than 0, that is, when it is determined that it is 0 (S5106A: No), the process proceeds to S5108A. On the other hand, in the processing of S5106A, if it is determined that the value of the waiting number counter 223Ae is a value greater than 0 (S5106A: Yes), the waiting state processing for setting the effect mode in the precursor waiting state is executed ( S5121A), this process ends. Details of this process during standby state (S5121A) will be described with reference to FIG.

FIG. 892 is a flowchart showing this process during standby state (S5121A). In the waiting state processing (S5121A), first, the value of the waiting number counter 223Ae is decremented by 1 (S5401A), and then it is determined whether the value of the waiting number counter 223Ae after the subtraction is 0 (S5402A). In the process of S5402A, if it is determined that the counter value after subtraction is 0 (S5402A: Yes), the omen type selection table according to the variation type of the ball held (lottery target hold) that triggered the setting of the standby state A precursor type is selected from 222Ab (S5404A), and the precursor type flag 223Ad is updated according to the selected precursor type (S5405A).

When the processing of S5405A ends, it is then determined whether or not the variation type of the held ball that starts the variation this time is the reach variation (S5406A). In the process of S5406A, when it is determined that there is reach variation (S5406A: Yes), the process proceeds to S5411A. On the other hand, in the processing of S5406A, if it is determined that the current variation type is not a reach variation (either long outlier A or B) (S5406A: No), it is determined whether the variation time is 30 seconds. Then (S5407A), if it is determined that the variable time is not 30 seconds (S5407A: No), a variable display effect that does not generate a ready-to-win effect is executed. It is not an operation that continues the omen production. Therefore, the variation pattern accompanied by the portent effect indicated by the portent type flag 223Ad is determined (S5408A), and this processing is terminated.

On the other hand, in the processing of S5407A, if it is determined that the variable time is 30 seconds (that is, the variable time set in the variable display mode in which the ready-to-win effect occurs in which the precursor effect cannot be set) (S5407A : Yes), it is determined whether the value of the precursor number counter 223Ab is 1 (S5409A). Since the display is a variable display related to the lottery target hold, if the precursor effect is set for the next variable display effect (variable display effect related to the lottery target hold), the precursor effect will be executed only once Unnatural behavior Become. Therefore, in this case, the portent effect counter 223Ab and the portent effect prohibition flag 223Aa are reset to cancel execution of the portent effect (S5410A), and the process proceeds to S5411A. On the other hand, in the processing of S5409A, if it is determined that the value of the number of omen counter 223Ab is not 1 (S5409A: No), 1 or It means that a plurality of complete deviation fluctuations are executed, and since the portent effect can be executed over a plurality of variable display effects, the process of S5410A is skipped and the process to S5411A.

In the process of S5411A, which may be executed after any one of S5406A, S5409A, and S5410A is executed, a variation pattern of a mode without precursor effect is determined according to the variation type (S5411A), and this process is performed. exit. On the other hand, in the process of S5402A, if it is determined that the counter value after the subtraction is not 0 (S5402A: No), if there is a long deviation fluctuation in the hold, the fluctuation time of the long deviation fluctuation will be 30 seconds ( (S5403A), this processing is performed by determining whether or not the variable time for executing the normal reach effect is reached, according to the number of held balls, and executing a long deviation determination process for setting the effect mode according to the determination result (S5403A). exit. Details of this out-of-length variation determination process (S5403A) will be described with reference to FIG.

FIG. 893 is a flow chart showing this out-of-length variation determination processing (S5403A). In the outlier fluctuation determination process (S5403A), first, it is determined whether or not there is a held ball corresponding to the fluctuation type of outlier A in the number of precursors (S5501A). If it is determined (S5501A: No), it means that the current precursor standby state is set based on the reach fluctuation, and the standby state can be canceled until the reach fluctuation regardless of the transition of the number of pending balls. Therefore, a variable display mode without an omen effect is set as the variable display mode to be set for the current variable display (S5509A), and this processing is terminated.

On the other hand, in the processing of S5501A, if it is determined that there is a long deviation A variation within the number of precursors (S5501A: Yes), then there is a reach variation or a long deviation B variation after the deviation A within the number of precursors (S5502A). In the process of S5502A, if it is determined that there is a reach variation or a long deviation B variation after the long deviation A within the number of indications (S5502A: Yes), regardless of the change in the number of held balls, the reach variation or long deviation B Since it means that there is no possibility that the standby state will be canceled until a change occurs, the process proceeds to S5509A.

On the other hand, in the process of S5502A, if it is determined that there is no reach variation or long deviation B variation after the long deviation A within the number of indications (S5502A: No), the current number of pending balls, long deviation A Since there is a possibility that it is possible to determine whether the fluctuation type is a reach fluctuation, first, the value (A) obtained by subtracting the number of fluctuations performed up to the long outlier A from the value of the pending ball number counter (S5503A), and then it is determined whether the calculated value A is greater than 1 (S5504A).

In the process of S5504A, if it is determined that the value A calculated in the process of S5503A is not greater than 1 (i.e., is less than or equal to 1) (S5504A: No), the held ball corresponding to the outlier A starts to fluctuate. If the number of pending balls does not increase to 2 or more by the timing (lottery timing of special symbols), the fluctuation time of long out A is set to 30 seconds corresponding to normal reach production, and the number of pending balls increases to lengthen If the number of held balls is 2 or more at the start of the deviation A, it means that the variation time (20 seconds or 10 seconds) corresponding to the complete deviation is set, and the variation time of the long deviation A at the current stage cannot be determined, the process proceeds to S5509A in order to continue the sign waiting state. On the other hand, in the processing of S5504A, if it is determined that the value of A is a value greater than 1 (S5504A: Yes), the number of held balls at the start of the fluctuation of long deviation A becomes at least 1, and long deviation A This means that the possibility of setting the variable time to 30 seconds (the variable time corresponding to the normal reach effect) has disappeared. Select an omen type from the omen type selection table 222Ab (see FIG. 868(b)) according to the variation type of the held ball (lottery target holding) (S5505A), and then, an omen type flag according to the selected omen type 223Ad is updated (S5506A), and the variation pattern accompanied by the portent effect indicated by the portent type flag 223Ad is determined (S5507A). Furthermore, by resetting the value of the waiting number counter 223Ae to 0, the precursor waiting state is ended (S5508A), and this process is finished.

By executing this outlier fluctuation determination processing (see FIG. 893), in the sign standby state set with a specific complete outlier fluctuation (longer outlier A) as a trigger, the hold at the start of the fluctuation of long outlier A for each fluctuation By determining the lower limit value of the number of balls (change in the number of held balls), it is possible to specify whether or not there is a possibility that the fluctuation time of the long outlier A will be the fluctuation time (30 seconds) corresponding to the ready-to-win effect. Therefore, at the stage when the possibility of the ready-to-win effect is eliminated, the standby state can be terminated and the portent effect can be started. Therefore, since the portent effect can be set for more variable display effects, the portent effect can be set more preferably.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the fifty-seventh embodiment, the variation time is the same variation time as the reach variation depending on the number of held balls at the start of variation (at the time of lottery of special symbols). is provided, and when the predictor lottery is won in a state in which the reach fluctuation is suspended and in a state in which a specific complete loss variation is suspended, the precursor standby state is set. Then, the transition of the pending pattern is monitored in the omen standby state set by holding the specific complete deviation fluctuation, and the possibility that the specific complete deviation fluctuation is set to the fluctuation time corresponding to the normal reach is eliminated. It is configured to start the omen production as soon as possible. By configuring in this way, it is possible to obtain more opportunities for the indication effect while complying with the basic effect rule of avoiding the continuation of the indication effect across reach fluctuations.

Here, as a method of adhering to the basic production of avoiding the continuation of the omen production across reach fluctuations, if a specific complete deviation fluctuation is included in the hold, up to a specific complete deviation fluctuation A method of uniformly prohibiting the execution of the portent effect is also conceivable. However, in this method, the execution of the portent effect is suppressed even if the normal reach effect is not executed in a specific complete deviation variation, so there is a possibility that the number of portent effects is unnecessarily reduced.

On the other hand, in the fifty-seventh embodiment, the change in the number of pending balls is monitored during the period from the determination of execution of the precursor effect to the start of the variable display effect of the variation type corresponding to the specific complete failure. , Even if it is before the start timing of the variable display effect corresponding to the specific complete failure, the sign effect will start at the time when the possibility of the normal reach effect disappears at the start of the variable display effect corresponding to the specific complete failure. It is configured to By configuring in this way, it is possible to maximize the chances of executing the portent effect.

In addition, in the fifty-seventh embodiment, when the execution of the predictive effect is determined in a situation where a specific complete failure has already been suspended, and the predictive standby state is set, each time it is time to start the variable display effect. , Determine whether or not there is a possibility that a specific complete deviation from the number of held balls will be a variable time (30 seconds) corresponding to the ready-to-win effect, and when the possibility of becoming a variable time corresponding to the ready-to-win effect disappears. Although it is configured to set the variable display effect accompanied by the portent effect, the timing for determining the specific complete deviation fluctuation time is not limited to this. It is sufficient if it can be determined before executing the variable display effect corresponding to the specific complete loss, for example, every time a new start winning prize is detected and the number of pending balls increases, the specific complete loss fluctuation time is determined. good too. The processing load at the start of the variable display presentation can be reduced by determining the variation time of the variable display corresponding to the specific complete loss at the timing when the number of held balls increases. Also, the specific complete deviation fluctuation time may be determined both when the fluctuation starts and when a new start winning is detected.

In the fifty-seventh embodiment, when a new start winning prize is detected in a state in which a ball corresponding to a specific complete loss is reserved in the reserve, the predictive effect is performed in the same way as when the reach fluctuation is reserved. Only whether or not to execute is drawn by lottery, and if the execution of the omen effect is decided in the lottery, the omen type lottery is executed at the timing when the omen effect is actually started, but it is limited to this. not a thing For example, during the number of reserved balls that may cause the ready-to-win effect, the reserved ball corresponding to a specific complete loss is reserved in the reserved state, and the prognostic lottery prohibition state may be set. Then, at the stage where the number of pending balls with no possibility of occurrence of the ready-to-win effect is reached, or at the stage when a specific complete deviation accompanied by the ready-to-win effect ends, the variation type of each pending ball is referred to, and the foreshadowing effect is obtained. It may be configured to determine whether or not execution is possible, and to determine the pending ball targeted for the prognostic effect (see FIG. 869). By constructing in this way, it is possible to draw a lottery as to whether or not to execute the portent performance by using the reserved ball corresponding to the variation type with the highest degree of expectation among the reserved balls, so that the degree of expectation of the portent performance is improved. be able to.

In the fifty-seventh embodiment, under the condition that the holding ball to be digested next to the holding ball corresponding to the specific complete omission is the lottery object holding, the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display corresponding to the specific complete omission is 30 seconds (reach When it becomes a variable time corresponding to the production), there is room to set the precursor production only for the variable display corresponding to the holding of the lottery object, so the configuration is such that the execution of the precursor production is canceled, but it is limited to this. is not. For example, during the fluctuation time of the variable display corresponding to a specific complete outage, a warning effect is accompanied and the fluctuation time is short (for example, 10 seconds or 15 seconds). It is also possible to have a configuration in which the process is executed multiple times. By configuring in this way, it is possible to suppress the cancellation of the determined portent effect, so it is possible to maximize the chances of executing the portent effect.

<Fifty-Eighth Embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 in the fifty-eighth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 894 to 902. FIG. In the fifty-fifth embodiment described above, every time a new start winning prize of the first special symbol is detected in the normal game state, a lottery is executed to determine whether or not the predictive effect can be executed. The configuration is such that the variable display effect accompanied by the foreshadow effect is executed over a plurality of times of the variable display effect up to the variable display effect based on. In addition, in the fifty-fifth embodiment, while suppressing the continuation of the variable display effect accompanied by the predictive effect across reach fluctuations, in order to maximize the chance of the lottery for whether the predictive effect can be executed, When a new starting prize is detected while the reach fluctuation is suspended, only a lottery for whether or not to execute the precursor effect is executed based on the start prize, and if the precursor effect is won, it is suspended first. An omen standby state is set in which the execution of the omen effect is restricted (avoided) until the variable display effect corresponding to the reach variation is completed, and the omen effect is started after the reach variation is completed.

In addition to this, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the fifty-eighth embodiment, after the precursor effect has already started, the start winning of the second special symbol in which the variable display is executed with priority over the first special symbol is newly detected. (the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is interrupted before the omen target suspension is digested), the already set omen effect, the timing at which the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is interrupted, and the second 2 The scenario of the sign effect can be rewritten according to the variation type of the special symbol. As a result, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of discrepancies with previous and subsequent performances during the variable period in the variable display of the second special symbol.

Here, conventionally, while providing a plurality of special symbols (first special symbol and second special symbol) in which the lottery is executed at different opportunities, the lottery of one special symbol (second special symbol) is replaced by the other special symbol. A gaming machine with a specification that executes the lottery (second special symbol) preferentially is widely known. In such a conventional gaming machine, when the lottery condition for the special symbols on the priority side is satisfied in the game state (for example, normal state) in which the lottery for the special symbols on the non-priority side is mainly executed, the special symbols on the priority side During the execution of the variable display of symbols, it is not possible to execute the effect for the special symbols on the non-priority side, so there is a possibility that the player will feel uncomfortable with the effect mode. There was a problem.

In addition, in the conventional gaming machine, in the normal game state in which the game should proceed by executing the special symbol lottery of the non-priority side, the lottery condition of the special symbol lottery of the priority side can be satisfied with a low probability. Sex game machines are also known. In such a conventional game machine, the lottery for the special symbols on the priority side is more advantageous than the lottery for the special symbols on the non-priority side, so that the lottery for the special symbols on the non-priority side wins big. In addition to that, there are also those that are trying to improve interest by realizing game characteristics that make you expect that the lottery conditions for the special symbols on the priority side are satisfied. However, in the gaming machine with such specifications, the state has shifted to a state where the lottery conditions for the special symbols on the priority side can be satisfied (for example, the electric accessory that opens and closes the starting port, which is the lottery condition for the special symbols on the priority side, has been released. ), it is normal to execute a special effect for indicating that the lottery conditions for the special symbols on the priority side are likely to be established, so it corresponds to the special symbol lottery on the non-priority side. There is a problem that the production is interrupted or canceled by a special production.

On the other hand, in the fifty-eighth embodiment, the irregular winning of the second special symbol is detected while the predictive effect is set for the variable display effect corresponding to the first special symbol, and the predictive effect is executed. When the variable display period of the second special pattern on the priority side is interrupted, the scenario of the portent performance can be rewritten in consideration of the variable display period of the second special pattern, so that the portent performance is interrupted. Instead, it is possible to draw attention to the variable display effect of the second special symbol on the priority side. Therefore, it is possible to realize a suitable presentation mode.

The configuration of the pachinko machine 10 of the fifty-eighth embodiment differs from that of the pachinko machine 10 of the fifty-fifth embodiment described above in that the configurations of the ROM 222 and the RAM 223 in the sound lamp control device 113 are partially changed. and that the control processing executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 is partially changed. Other configurations, various processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, other processes executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp controller 113, and various processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display controller 114 are described in Section 55. It is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in the embodiment. Hereinafter, the same elements as those of the fifty-fifth embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals, and illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

First, referring to FIGS. 894 and 895, after the execution of the precursor effect is started, a starting winning prize (hereinafter referred to as an irregular winning prize) corresponding to the second special symbol is detected, and corresponding to the lottery target reservation. A description will be given of an effect control example when the variable display corresponding to the irregular winning is executed before the variable display is started. First, with reference to FIG. 894(a), the transition of the effect mode when the irregular winning of the second special symbol is the variation type corresponding to complete failure will be described. FIG. 894(a) illustrates the case where the irregular winning of the second special symbol is detected during the execution period of the variable display effect executed one time before the holding of the lottery object.

As shown in FIG. 894 (a), a new start winning prize is detected during the execution of the normal variable display effect that has been executed with three pending balls, and the omen lottery is won in the lottery based on the start winning prize. Then, when the portent effect is started from the next variation, the variable display effect with the same type of portent effect is repeated. Under this circumstance, if the irregular winning of the second special symbol is detected during the execution of the variable display effect one time before the holding of the lottery target, and the irregular winning is an irregular winning that corresponds to a complete loss, A pseudo 1 variable display performance accompanied by an omen performance is executed in a variation period corresponding to the irregular variation of the second special pattern and a variation period of the ready-to-win variation corresponding to the holding of the lottery object. That is, at the start of the variable display corresponding to the irregular winning of the second special symbol, the start of the variable display mode of the effect period corresponding to the sum of the variable time of the second special symbol and the variable time of the holding of the lottery object is set. It is configured. By constructing in this way, it is possible to carry out the sign performance that continues until the lottery object is reserved without visually changing the number of executions of the sign performance determined at the start of the sign performance.

In addition, in FIG. 894 (a), if the execution timing of the variable display based on the irregular winning of the second special symbol is before the lottery target reservation (the variable display based on the irregular winning is followed by the lottery target pending When the variable display is executed) was explained as an example, but if the variable display based on the irregular winning of the second special symbol interrupts before the hold other than the lottery target hold, it is set at the start of the omen effect. Depending on the number of indications and the variation type of holding of the lottery object, the effect mode of the variable display based on the irregular winning is varied. Specifically, if the lottery target hold is a variable type hold ball that corresponds to a big hit, the variable display based on the irregular winning of the second special symbol is set to the normal variable display with the sign, regardless of the number of signs. be. That is, the number of portent effects is simply increased by one. In this case, if the originally set number of times of the portent effect is four, the number of times of the portent effect is increased by one to be five. In addition, if the lottery target reservation is various outlier reach, and the number of times of the indication effect originally set is 3 times or less, the fluctuation display based on the irregular winning of the second special symbol is normal fluctuation with indication By being set to display, the number of portent effects is increased by one. On the other hand, if the lottery target reservation is various outlier reach, and the number of times of the indication effect originally set is 4, similar to the example in FIG. 894 (a), fluctuation based on irregular winning A pseudo one variable display performance is executed by using the total variable time of the display and the variable display executed next to the variable display based on the irregular winning. In other words, the originally set number of times of the sign effects is maintained. That is, basically, the number of execution times of the portent performance is limited to 4 times or less, and the continuation of the portent performance beyond 4 times is permitted only when the lottery object reservation is successful. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make the player pay more attention to the number of continuations of the omen effect, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

Next, with reference to FIG. 894(b), in the case where the irregular winning of the second special symbol is various types of outreach, a continuous notice effect over four fluctuation displays is originally set, and in the outreach. An example will be described in which the irregular winning of the second special symbol is detected during the execution period of the variable display effect executed one time before the corresponding lottery object holding. As shown in FIG. 894 (b), when the irregular winning corresponding to the lost reach interrupts one time before the lottery target reservation in the precursor effect, as a variable display effect corresponding to the variable display based on the interrupting irregular winning , 1 variable display effect accompanied by the portent effect is set, and the portent effect is terminated. In other words, it is set so that the lottery object holding becomes a normal out-of-reach variation without an indication effect. By configuring in this way, it is possible to end the predictive effect with the reach fluctuation while suppressing the number of times of the predictive effect from continuing exceeding four times which is the normal upper limit number of times.

In addition, if an irregular winning corresponding to a change in reach reach is detected during the execution of a continuous notice effect of 4 signs that will eventually be lost, even if it interrupts before the lottery target reservation, irregular winning The variable display corresponding to is set to a variable display mode accompanied by the portent effect, and the portent effect is terminated with the variable display corresponding to the irregular winning. On the other hand, even if the irregular winning corresponding to the lost reach interrupts in the situation where the variable display to be executed next is completely off, the omen effect that is being executed will finally be a hit. If there is, or if there is room for the upper limit of the number of precursors (4 times) even in the final omen effect, the variable display based on the irregular winning and the variable display based on the irregular winning Pseudo-perfect-lose multiple-variation performance is executed in which full-lose variation is executed a plurality of times accompanied by pseudo-forecast performance by using the variable display corresponding to the full-lose run and the variation time. This pseudo-perfectly-outgoing multiple-variation effect will be described with reference to FIG.

FIG. 895 is a diagram showing the transition of the performance mode when the pseudo complete failure two-variation performance, which is a type of pseudo perfect failure multiple-variation performance, is set. As shown in Figure 895, it is executed using a total of 40 seconds of the second special symbol deviation normal reach variation variation time (30 seconds) and the second special symbol complete deviation variation variation time (10 seconds) When the pseudo complete failure 2-variation performance is set, a presentation mode is set in which the complete failure performance for 20 seconds accompanied by the premonitory performance is pseudo-executed twice during 40 seconds. By enabling execution of this pseudo-perfectly-missing plural-variation performance, the irregular winning of the second special pattern is detected during the execution of the sign performance, and even if the variation type is out of reach, the sign performance is accompanied. It can be made to look as if a complete miss has been performed multiple times. Therefore, since it is possible to make it difficult to deviate from the basic production rule of avoiding the continuation of the portent production across the ready-to-win production, the production mode can be set more preferably.

It should be noted that, when executing a pseudo-perfectly-out multiple-variation effect with the second special symbol's super reach variation (60 seconds) and the first special symbol's complete deviation variation (10 seconds), a pseudo complete deviation variation for 15 seconds A pseudo-complete failure 4-variation performance is executed in which a total of 4 pseudo-complete failure variations are performed, 2 times and 2 pseudo-complete failure variations for 20 seconds. In addition, when executing a pseudo complete deviation multiple variation effect with the special reach variation of the second special symbol (90 seconds) and the complete deviation variation of the first special symbol (10 seconds), the pseudo complete deviation variation for 20 seconds is executed 5 times.

<Electrical Configuration of the 58th Embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIG. 896(a), details of the ROM 222 provided in the audio lamp control device 113 in the fifty-eighth embodiment will be described. As shown in FIG. 896(a), the ROM 222 in the fifty-eighth embodiment has a sign rewriting table 222Da added to the configuration of the ROM 222 in the fifty-fifth embodiment (see FIG. 867(a)). differ only in that This predictive rewriting table 222Da is a data table referred to for rewriting the performance mode until the lottery mode suspension when irregular winning of the second special symbol is detected during execution of the predictive performance. Details of the predictor rewriting table 222Da will be described with reference to FIG.

FIG. 897 is a diagram showing the defined contents of this predictor rewriting table 222Da. As shown in FIG. 897, the predictor rewriting table 222Da in the fifty-eighth embodiment includes the variation type related to the irregular winning of the second special symbol, the number of predictive effects executed in the predictive effect, and the irregular winning. A combination of the variation type of the variation display of the first special symbol executed next to the variation display of the second special symbol related to and the variation type of the lottery target hold (lottery target hold that triggers the execution of the omen effect) Each type is defined in association with the type of precursory scenario.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 897, when the variation type related to the irregular winning of the second special symbol is various hits, the variation of the variable display executed next to the variable display related to the number of precursors and the irregular winning A variable display mode is uniformly set in which a single variable display effect accompanied by an omen effect is executed as the variable display effect of the second special symbol regardless of the type, the variable type of holding of the lottery object, or the like. In addition, the sign effect is terminated by the variable display effect of the second special symbol. Thus, it is possible to make the player feel as if it is an omen effect executed toward the reserved ball corresponding to the reserved ball related to the irregular winning, and furthermore, the omen effect finally becomes a win. is ended, it is possible to further increase the player's sense of expectation when the premonition effect is executed.

Also, as shown in FIG. 897, when the variation type related to the irregular winning of the second special symbol is completely off, different precursor scenarios are associated with the number of precursors and the variation type of lottery target reservation. . Specifically, as shown in FIG. 897, when the irregular winning of the second special symbol corresponding to the complete loss is detected during the execution of the precursor effect of the number of precursors of 3 times or less, the variation based on the irregular winning A variable display mode in which a single variable display effect accompanied by an omen effect is executed as the variable display effect of the second special symbol regardless of the variable type of the variable display executed next to the display and the variable type of the holding of the lottery object. is set. Further, the portent effect is continued without being terminated even after the variable display of the second special symbol ends. In this case, the number of signs increases from the number of signs set at the start of the sign production by one time of the variable display production related to the irregular winning, but does not exceed the upper limit of 4 times. It is possible to execute the omen effect without giving a sense of incongruity.

On the other hand, when the irregular winning of the second special symbol corresponding to the complete loss is detected during the execution of the predictive effect with the predictive count of 4 times, different predictive scenarios are associated according to the variation type of the lottery target hold. Specifically, when the lottery object reservation is various hits, regardless of the variation type of the variation display that is executed next to the variation display based on the irregular winning, as a variation display effect of the second special symbol A variable display mode is set in which a single variable display effect accompanied by an omen effect is executed. Further, the portent effect is continued without being terminated even after the variable display of the second special symbol ends. In this case, the number of indications is increased by one time of the variable display presentation related to the irregular winning from the number of indications set at the start of the indication presentation, and the number of indications is five. As a result, it is possible to make the player feel uncomfortable by increasing the number of signs than usual, and by finally winning, a big win was suggested due to the contradiction of the production pattern (so-called, It is possible to make the player recognize that the law has been violated. Therefore, since it is possible to diversify the mode of presentation, it is possible to further improve the interest of the player. On the other hand, if the lottery object reservation is various outlier reach, irregular Whether or not a single variable display effect accompanied by a precursor effect has been executed in a pseudo manner over the variable time of the variable display based on the prize winning and the variable time of the variable display executed next to the variable display based on the irregular winning. The pseudo 1-variation effect of such effect mode is determined as the precursor scenario. As a result, it is possible to complete the omen effect that eventually fails without increasing the number of omen times from four.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 897, when the variation type related to the irregular winning of the second special symbol is out of normal reach, different precursor scenarios are associated according to the number of precursors and the variation type of lottery target reservation. . Specifically, as shown in FIG. 897, when the irregular winning of the second special symbol corresponding to the complete loss is detected during the execution of the precursor effect of the number of precursors of 3 times or less, the variation based on the irregular winning When the variation type of the variable display executed next to the display is completely out, while the pseudo complete out 2 variation production (see FIG. 895) is executed, it is executed next to the variable display based on the irregular winning. When the variation type of the variable display is various reach variations, set a single variable display effect with a precursor effect as a variable display effect based on irregular winning, and end the precursor effect with the variable display configured to As a result, it is possible to suppress the continuation of the predictive effect across reach fluctuations while suppressing the number of executions of the predictive effect to four times or less.

On the other hand, if the variation type related to the irregular winning of the second special symbol is out of normal reach and the number of signs is set to 4 times, the next variable display of the irregular winning is completely off and is subject to lottery A sign scenario corresponding to a pseudo-perfectly-missing 2-variation production (see Fig. 895) accompanied by a sign production is associated with the situation where the hold is a win, and for situations other than the above, it is based on irregular winning. A single variable display effect accompanied by a predictive effect is set as the variable display effect, and a predictive scenario for ending the predictive effect in the variable display is defined in correspondence. As a result, it is possible to suppress the continuation of the predictive effect across reach fluctuations while allowing the number of predictive effects exceeding four times only in the case of the predictive effect that finally becomes a win.

In addition, as shown in Figure 897, in the case of Super Reach out of the variation type related to the irregular winning of the second special symbol, regardless of the number of indications set, the next variable display of the irregular winning is completely off. And, for the situation where the lottery target reservation is a win, the sign scenario corresponding to the pseudo-completely missing 4 fluctuation production accompanied by the sign production is defined in correspondence, and for situations other than the above, it is based on irregular winning. A single variable display effect accompanied by a predictive effect is set as the variable display effect, and a predictive scenario for ending the predictive effect in the variable display is defined in correspondence. As a result, only in the case of the final win sign production, the number of signs exceeding 4 times (up to 7 times in this case) is allowed, and the continuation of the sign production across reach fluctuations is suppressed. be able to.

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 897, in the case of Super Reach out of the variation type related to the irregular winning of the second special symbol, regardless of the set number of indications, the next variable display of the irregular winning is completely off. And, for the situation where the lottery target reservation is a win, the sign scenario corresponding to the pseudo complete failure 5 fluctuation production accompanied by the sign production is defined in correspondence, and for situations other than the above, it is based on irregular winning. A single variable display effect accompanied by a predictive effect is set as the variable display effect, and a predictive scenario for ending the predictive effect in the variable display is defined in correspondence. As a result, only in the case of the sign effect that finally becomes a win, while allowing the number of signs exceeding 4 times (up to 8 times in this case), it suppresses the continuation of the sign effect across reach fluctuations. be able to.

Thus, in the fifty-eighth embodiment, during the execution of the predictive effect a predetermined number of times, the variable display is executed preferentially over the variable display of the first special symbol, which is the target of the predictive effect. When the irregular winning of the 2 special symbols is detected and the variable display based on the irregular winning interrupts before the variable display based on the holding of the lottery object is executed, the second special symbol fluctuates depending on the situation. It is possible to rewrite to an appropriate sign scenario that also takes display into consideration. That is, in the final variable display effect in which the predictive effect is set, the reach effect is always generated, the continuation of the predictive effect across the reach fluctuation is avoided, and furthermore, when the predictive effect is finally lost, the predictive effect is performed. The variable display performance based on the irregular winning can be executed without making the player feel uncomfortable while observing the basic performance rule that the number of times of continuation is limited to four times or less. Therefore, it is possible to realize a more suitable presentation mode.

Next, with reference to FIG. 896(b), details of the RAM 223 provided in the sound lamp control device 113 in the fifty-eighth embodiment will be described. FIG. 896(b) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 223. As shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 896(b), the RAM 223 in the fifty-eighth embodiment has a continuation count storage area 223Da and a rewriting area 223Da in contrast to the configuration of the RAM 223 in the fifty-fifth embodiment described above (see FIG. 867(b)). The difference is that a scenario storage area 223Db and a scenario progress flag 223Dc are added.

The number-of-continuations storage area 223Da is a storage area for storing data corresponding to the number of continuations of the predictive effect (the number of consecutive variable display effects accompanied by the predictive effect) when execution of the predictive effect is determined. The initial value of the number-of-continuations storage area 223Da is set to 0, and when the execution of the portent effect is determined, the number of times the variable display effect accompanied by the portent is executed before the variable display effect based on the holding of the lottery object. is set (see S5211A in FIG. 901). If the irregular winning of the second special symbol is detected during execution of the predictive effect, and the variable display effect related to the irregular winning is interrupted before the variable display effect based on the predictive target hold is executed, this continuation Refer to the data stored in the number of times storage area 223Da, the variation type of the irregular winning, the variation type of the variable display executed next to the variable display related to the irregular winning, and the variation type of the lottery target hold. Then, the portent scenario after rewriting is selected from the portent rewriting table 222Da (see FIG. 897).

In the rewrite scenario storage area 223Db, the irregular winning of the second special symbol is detected after the execution of the precursor effect is started, and the variable display effect of the second special symbol is performed before the variable display effect based on the holding of the lottery object. This is a storage area for temporarily storing data indicating the rewritten portent scenario selected by referring to the portent rewriting table 222Da when is interrupted until the portent effect is completed. The initial value of the rewrite scenario storage area 223Db is set to "00H", and the irregular winning of the second special symbol is detected before the lottery target reservation is digested in the portent effect, and the portent is rewritten. Based on the selection of a precursor scenario for rewriting with reference to the table 222Da for rewriting, data corresponding to the selected precursor scenario is stored (see S5605A in FIG. 899). When starting the variable display effect with the predictive effect after the rewriting of the predictive scenario, the data stored in the rewriting scenario storage area 223Db is referred to change the variable display mode corresponding to the rewritten predictive scenario. set (see S5702A and S5705A in FIG. 902).

The scenario progress flag 223Dc is a flag for indicating whether or not the portent effect should proceed in the rewritten portent scenario selected with reference to the portent rewriting table 222Da. If the scenario progress flag 223Dc is on, it means that the precursor effect should be progressed in the rewritten precursor scenario, and if it is off, the precursor effect is not rewritten. It means that there is The scenario progress flag 223Dc has an initial value set to OFF, and is set to ON when setting the variable display mode corresponding to the variable display of the second special symbol during execution of the precursor effect (Fig. 902 (see S5703A of ). Also, although not shown, it is set to OFF based on the end of the premonitory scenario after rewriting. Specifically, when an indication scenario is set to execute one variable display effect in the variable display period of the second special symbol, the scenario progress flag 223Dc is set to OFF when the second special symbol is stopped from varying, A premonition scenario is set in which one or a plurality of variable displays are simulated using the variable display time of the second special symbol and the variable display time of the first special symbol to be executed next to the variable display of the second special symbol. If so, the scenario in-progress flag 223Dc is set to OFF when the fluctuation display of the first special symbol executed next to the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is stopped.

<Regarding control processing of the sound lamp control device in the fifty-eighth embodiment>
Next, referring to FIGS. 898 to 902, control processing executed by the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 in the fifty-eighth embodiment will be described. First, with reference to FIG. 898, the winning information command process D (S4331A) in the fifty-eighth embodiment will be described. This winning information command process D (S4331A) is a process executed instead of the winning information command process (see FIG. 871) in the 55th embodiment.

In the processing of S4601A to S4606A of the winning information command processing D (S4331A) in the fifty-eighth embodiment, the same processing as the processing of S4601A to S4606A in the winning information command processing (S4321A) in the fifty-fifth embodiment is performed. executed. In addition, in the winning information command process D (S4331A) in the 58th embodiment, after each process of S4602A to S4606A executed when receiving the winning information of the first special symbol is completed, the winning information command of this time It is determined whether the notified winning information is the winning information corresponding to the second special symbol (S4611A). In the process of S4611A, when it is determined that the winning information does not correspond to the second special symbol (S4611A: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of S4611A, if it is determined that the winning information corresponds to the second special symbol (S4611A: Yes), whether or not the precursor scenario is rewritten according to the winning information of the second special symbol of this time is executed (S4612A), and this process is terminated. The details of this predictor rewriting process (S4612A) will be described with reference to FIG.

FIG. 899 is a flow chart showing this sign rewriting process (S4612A). In the portent rewriting process (S4612A), first, it is determined whether the value of the portent number counter 223Ab is greater than 0 (S5601A). If it is determined (S5601A: No), it means that the start winning of the second special symbol notified by the winning information command this time is not an irregular winning during the execution of the precursor effect, so the process ends as it is. do. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S5601A that the value of the precursor number counter 223Ab is greater than 0 (S5601A: Yes), then whether or not the value of the waiting number counter 223Ae is greater than 0 (S5602A), and when it is determined that the value of the waiting number counter 223Ae is 0 (that is, the precursor effect is being executed) (S5602A: No), the start winning of the second special symbol of this time is Since it means that it is an irregular winning corresponding to the variable display effect that is executed (interrupted) before the lottery object holding, first, the sign rewriting table 222Da is read (S5603A), and then the number of continuation storage area. Based on the data of 223Da and the data of the winning information storage area 223a, the precursor scenario after rewriting is identified (S5604A). When the processing of S5604A ends, the data indicating the identified precursor scenario is stored in the rewriting scenario storage area 223Dd (S5605A), and the value of the precursor number counter 223Ab is updated according to the rewritten scenario (S5606A). End this process.

On the other hand, in the processing of S5602A, if it is determined that the value of the waiting number counter 223Ae is a value greater than 0 (a value of 1 or more) (S5602A: Yes), the start winning of the second special symbol is detected in the omen waiting state. It means that the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is interrupted before the start of the omen effect, and the number of fluctuations (the number of lotteries) until the start of the omen effect is increased by one, so the omen number counter 223Ab , and the value of the waiting number counter 223Ae by adding 1 to each to reflect the number of fluctuations corresponding to the fluctuation display of the second special symbol interrupted by updating (S5607A), and this process ends.

By executing this sign rewriting process (see FIG. 899), the start winning of the second special design is detected during the execution of the sign production, and the variable display of the second special design interrupts before the holding of the lottery object. Even so, since the predictive scenario can be rewritten in consideration of the variable display time of the second special symbol, the predictive effect can be preferably executed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 900, the precursor effect setting process D (S4541A) in the fifty-eighth embodiment will be described. This portent effect setting process D (S4541A) is a process executed instead of the portent effect setting process (see FIG. 877) in the fifty-fifth embodiment.

In each process of S5101A to S5106A of the portent effect setting process D (S4541A) in the fifty-eighth embodiment, the same process as each of S5101A to S5106A in the portent effect setting process (S4511A) in the fifty-fifth embodiment is performed. executed. In addition, in the portent effect setting process D (S4541A) in the fifty-eighth embodiment, when it is determined in the process of S5106A that the value of the waiting number counter 223Ae is greater than 0 (S5106A: Yes), the fifty-fifth embodiment Instead of the canceling predictor lottery process (see FIG. 878) in the form, the canceling predictor lottery process D is executed (S5131A), and the process proceeds to S5104A. The details of this canceling portent lottery process D (S5131A) will be described later with reference to FIG. On the other hand, in the process of S5106A, when it is determined that the value of the waiting number counter 223Ae is not greater than 0, that is, it is 0 (S5106A: No), Precursor mode setting processing is executed (S5132A), and this processing ends. The details of the portent mode setting process (S5132A) will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, with reference to FIG. 901, the details of the above-described canceling sign lottery process D (S5131A) will be described. FIG. 901 is a flow chart showing the cancellation portent lottery process D (S5131A) in the fifty-eighth embodiment. This canceling predictor lottery process D (S5131A) is a process executed in place of the canceling predictor lottery process (see FIG. 878) in the fifty-fifth embodiment. In the processes of S5201A to S5204A of the canceling predictor lottery process D (S5131A) in the fifty-eighth embodiment, the processes of S5201A to S5204A of the canceling predictor lottery process (S5107A) in the fifty-fifth embodiment are the same. Processing is performed. Further, in the canceling portent lottery processing D (S5131A) in the fifty-eighth embodiment, when the processing of S5204A is completed, data indicating the number of executions of the portent effect is then stored in the continuation count storage area 223Da (S5211A). End the process.

In the processing of S5211A, the number of executions of the indication effect is stored in advance in the continuation count storage area 223Da, so that when the irregular winning of the second special symbol occurs during the execution of the indication effect, the second special symbol is executed. The precursor scenario can be rewritten appropriately according to the lottery result, the lottery result of holding the lottery object, or the like. Therefore, the mode of presentation can be set more appropriately.

Next, with reference to FIG. 902, details of the above-described portent mode setting process (S5132A) will be described. FIG. 902 is a flow chart showing this portent mode setting process (S5132A). In the portent mode setting process (S5132A), first, it is determined whether the current variation display is the second special symbol variation display (S5701A), and if it is determined that the second special symbol variation display is performed (S5701A : Yes), sets the special 2 variation presentation mode according to the data in the rewriting scenario storage area 223Db (S5702A), then sets the scenario progress flag 223Dc to ON (S5703A), and terminates this processing. .

On the other hand, in the processing of S5701A, when it is determined that the second special symbol is not displayed in a variable manner (S5701A: No), it is determined whether the scenario progress flag 223Dc is ON (S5704A), and the scenario progress flag 223Dc is determined. is ON (S5704A: Yes), according to the data in the rewrite scenario storage area 223Dd, the variable display mode of the variable display effect of the first special symbol is set (S5705A), and this process exit. On the other hand, in the processing of S5704A, if it is determined that the scenario progress flag 223Dc is not ON, that is, is OFF (S5704A: No), the portent type flag 223Ad is read (S5706A), and the portent type flag 223Ad is read. is determined (S5707A), and this process is terminated.

By this portent mode setting process (see FIG. 902), the variable display mode is preferably set regardless of whether or not the portent scenario has been rewritten due to the irregular winning of the second special symbol that occurred during the portent effect. can be done.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 in the fifty-eighth embodiment, after the predictive effect has already started, the first When a specific period irrelevant to the lottery result of the special pattern interrupts, the specific period is incorporated into the execution period of the sign performance to rewrite the production scenario, thereby preventing the sign production from being interrupted in the middle. configured to be suppressible. More specifically, the start winning of the second special symbol in which the variable display is executed with priority over the first special symbol during the execution of the omen effect is newly detected (before the omen target suspension is digested is interrupted by the variable display of the second special symbol), according to the already set omen effect, the timing at which the variable display of the second special symbol is interrupted, and the variation type of the second special symbol, The scenario of the omen production was configured to be rewritable. More specifically, during the execution of the predictive effect a predetermined number of times, the effect of the second special symbol whose variable display is preferentially executed over the variable display of the first special symbol to be the target of the predictive effect. When the regular winning is detected and the variable display based on the irregular winning is interrupted before the variable display based on the holding of the lottery target is executed, the situation (preset number of indications, second special symbol fluctuation Depending on the timing at which the display is interrupted, the variation type of the second special symbol, and the variation type of the lottery object reservation), the variation display of the second special symbol is also taken into consideration within the range that does not deviate from the basic production law of the omen production. It is configured to rewrite to an appropriate precursor scenario. That is, in the final variable display effect in which the predictive effect is set, the reach effect is always generated, the continuation of the predictive effect across the reach fluctuation is avoided, and furthermore, when the predictive effect is finally lost, the predictive effect is performed. While observing the basic production rule that the number of times of continuation is limited to four times or less, the variable display production based on the irregular winning is executed without giving the player a sense of incongruity. Therefore, it is possible to realize a more suitable presentation mode.

In the fifty-eighth embodiment, when the precursor scenario is rewritten based on the detection of the irregular winning of the second special symbol, the variation following the irregular winning of the second special symbol is a complete deviation variation. (i.e., when the next variation is not a lottery subject reservation), the pseudo complete loss multiple variation performance is executed in which the pseudo complete loss variation is performed multiple times, but it is not limited to this. do not have. Even if the variable display based on the irregular winning is executed before the lottery object is reserved, the pseudo complete failure multiple variable effect may be executed. In this case, the basic rule of ending the portent effect with the reach variation may be observed by executing the pseudo reach variation effect after the pseudo multiple times of the variable display effect. More specifically, for example, in the case where the irregular winning is lost and normal reach, and the lottery target reservation is winning super reach, in the fifty-eighth embodiment, the predictive effect is terminated with a variable display effect based on the irregular winning. It was configured, but using 30 seconds of off normal reach and 60 seconds of hit super reach, there were 3 pseudo complete off fluctuations for 20 seconds and 1 pseudo normal reach fluctuation for 30 seconds. , may be configured to execute a pseudo 4-variation effect. In this way, when the ready-to-win continues during the predictive effect due to the irregular prize winning, the predictive effect can be continued until the lottery target is suspended by artificially setting the ready-to-win effect with the predictive effect only at the end. Cases can be increased. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the divergence between the type of the portent effect determined with reference to the variation type of the lottery target reservation and the actual result of the portent effect.

In the fifty-eighth embodiment, the effect period of the variable display effect corresponding to the irregular winning of the second special symbol and the effect period of the variable display effect to be executed next to the variable display effect corresponding to the irregular winning, Although it has been configured to execute a pseudo 1-variation production or a pseudo-completely-off multiple-variation production, it is not limited to this, and a pseudo-1-variation production or a pseudo-complete-off multiple-variation production over the production period of 3 or more variable display productions is performed. It may be configured to execute. By configuring in this way, it is possible to further increase the degree of freedom in the mode of presentation.

In the fifty-eighth embodiment, the effect period of the variable display effect corresponding to the irregular winning of the second special symbol and the effect period of the variable display effect to be executed next to the variable display effect corresponding to the irregular winning, Although it was configured to execute the pseudo 1-variation production and the pseudo-perfectly-lost multiple-variation production, the pseudo-1-variation production and the pseudo-completely-lost multiple-variation production do not necessarily include the production period of the variable display production corresponding to the irregular winning. good. For example, when there are a plurality of reserved balls that are digested after the variable display effect corresponding to the irregular winning is completed and before the lottery target reservation is digested, the plurality of reserved balls are handled. It is also possible to use the variable display time to execute a pseudo one-variation effect or a pseudo-completely-out multiple-variation effect. By configuring in this way, it is possible to further improve the degree of freedom of the mode of presentation.

In the fifty-eighth embodiment, it is assumed that one irregular winning is detected from the start to the end of the precursor effect. Control similar to morphology may be performed. That is, according to the variation type of the lottery target reservation, the number of continuations of the premonitory performance set in advance, and the variation type corresponding to the irregular winning, 1 variation with the predictive performance in the irregular winning variation time. It may be configured to determine whether to perform the display effect or to perform the pseudo one-variation effect or the pseudo-multiple-variation effect in the fluctuation period of the variable display to be executed next. By configuring in this way, it is possible to suitably execute the precursor effect regardless of the number of detections of irregular winnings. In addition, when an irregular winning of a predetermined number of times (for example, three times) or more is detected, a warning effect is executed to warn the player to return to left-handed during the fluctuation period of the irregular winning, A configuration may be adopted in which the rewriting lottery for the predictive scenario is not performed. By configuring in this way, it is possible to reduce the number of cases in which the rewriting lottery is executed, so that the processing load of the sound ramp control device 113 can be reduced, and in the normal state, the second ball is hit by hitting to the right. It is possible to suppress an irregular game method in which a game is played aiming at the mouth 640 .

In the fifty-eighth embodiment, when the irregular winning of the second special symbol is detected during execution of the precursor effect, the precursor scenario is rewritten in consideration of the fluctuation time of the second special symbol. It is not limited. It is also possible to simply set no portent effect for the variable display effect related to the irregular winning of the second special symbol. With this configuration, the processing load on the sound lamp control device 113 can be reduced because there is no need to rewrite the precursor scenario.

In the fifty-eighth embodiment, when the irregular winning of the second special symbol is detected during the execution of the omen effect and the fluctuation period of the second special symbol interrupts, the omen is calculated by taking into account the interrupted fluctuation period. Although the configuration is such that the scenario is rewritten, it is not limited to this. For example, as in the above-described third embodiment, etc., in the case of a specification that wins a small win with a predetermined probability in the lottery of the first special symbol, the small win game started by winning a small win during the omen production A configuration may be adopted in which the precursor scenario is rewritten in consideration of the period. By constructing in this way, it is possible to draw a lottery as to whether or not the portent performance can be executed even in a situation in which a ball held as a result of a small winning lottery is included, so that the opportunity to execute the portent performance can be secured to the maximum. .

In the fifty-eighth embodiment, it is assumed that the game ball hardly enters the second ball entrance 640 even if the player hits to the right in the normal state of the normal symbol, but it is not limited to this. . For example, the through gate 67 is also provided on the left side of the board surface of the game board 13, and the electric accessory 640a is relatively short as an opening pattern of the electric accessory 640a when the normal symbol wins in the normal state of the normal symbol. It is configured to be opened in either an open pattern that is open for a period (e.g., 0.2 seconds x 1 time) or an open pattern that is open for a relatively long period (e.g., 1 second x 2 times). good too. In other words, in a normal state (a low probability state of special symbols and a normal state of normal symbols) that is disadvantageous to the player, even if the player continuously hits to the left, the lottery of the advantageous second special symbols is executed. It may be combined with a specification that allows obtaining an opportunity (opportunity to open the electric accessory 640a by winning a normal symbol). In this case, when winning a normal pattern in which an opening pattern in which the electric accessory 640a is opened for a relatively long period of time is set, which is a great chance for obtaining a lottery opportunity for the second special symbol, a special effect is provided. (Production showing that the opportunity to execute the lottery of the second special symbol advantageous) is executed. It is configured to allow the special performance to be executed redundantly even during execution of the sign performance, and whether or not the game ball enters the second ball entrance 640 during the first opening period in the special performance. Depending on whether or not, the production mode of the remaining period in the win of the normal symbol may also be set to a mode corresponding to the portent production. In other words, it may be configured to change the effect mode according to the precursor effect from before the start of the variable display based on the irregular winning of the second special symbol. In other words, not only the performance scenario of the portent performance is updated in consideration of the variable display period of the second special symbol, but also the performance mode of the portent performance may be rewritten using the performance period of the special performance. By configuring in this way, it is possible to further diversify the mode of presentation. In addition, when winning in a normal pattern in a relatively short opening period, it is possible to preferentially execute the indication performance without executing the performance relating to the opening. By configuring in this way, it is possible to further diversify the mode of presentation.

In the fifty-fifth embodiment to the fifty-eighth embodiment described above, when starting winning is detected in the normal state (low probability state of special symbols and normal state of normal symbols), a lottery as to whether or not to execute the precursor effect is executed. Although it is configured, the game state in which the precursor effect is executed is not limited to the normal state, and can be executed in any game state.

<Fifty-ninth embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 in the fifty-ninth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 903 to 920. FIG. In the fifty-fifth embodiment described above, by enabling execution of an omen effect in which the same type of effect is executed over the variable display period of the variable display of the special symbol which is continuously executed a plurality of times, the variable display can be performed a plurality of times. It provides a game property that can continuously keep the player's sense of expectation over the display.

On the other hand, in the fifty-ninth embodiment, in combination with the above-described forty-sixth embodiment, the foreshadowing effect that continues over multiple fluctuations is detected when the start winning of the first special symbol is detected during the time saving A mode. It is configured to be able to execute a lottery for whether or not to execute. In addition, in the fifty-ninth embodiment, when the game ball passes through the through gate 67, the lottery result of the normal symbol is pre-read, and the pre-read result is notified to the sound lamp control device 113, and the sound lamp On the side of the control device 113, it is configured to be able to execute an omen effect in which the normal pattern winning B (and a part of the normal pattern winning A) is retained as a lottery object. In other words, according to the variation time of the normal pattern until the normal pattern B (and part of the normal pattern A) is started, the period of the normal pattern, and the breakdown of the reserved ball of the first special pattern It is possible to set an omen performance over a plurality of variable display periods of special symbols until the winning B (and a part of A winning normal) is started. In addition, when notifying the winning of a normal pattern B, a performance mode as if the winning of a normal pattern B was notified in the variable display performance of the last special pattern in the variable display performance accompanied by the omen performance is configured to be executable. By constructing in this way, it is possible to realize a very novel performance mode as if the variable display performance of the special symbols and the variable display performance of the normal symbols are combined, so that the player's interest in the game is improved. be able to.

Here, as in the forty-sixth embodiment described above, when it is configured to notify the general pattern B by a single production (treasure box opening production) when winning the general pattern B, the player has a sense of expectation. It becomes difficult for the player to continue to hold the .

On the other hand, in the 59th embodiment, according to the fluctuation time of the general pattern reservation and the look-ahead result of the period per general pattern of each reservation, it is specified when B will be executed, and the specific result is Accordingly, a sense of anticipation for the normal pattern winning B is provided by setting an omen performance in the variable display performance of a plurality of special patterns executed before the start of the normal pattern winning B in parallel with the variable display of the normal pattern. can be increased step by step. In addition, as in the fifty-fifth embodiment and the like, the predictive effect is determined according to the result of the first special symbol look-ahead (at a rate corresponding to the variation type), so the predictive effect is started. In this case, it is possible to realize a very special and novel game property that can be expected for both the big win and the normal game B.

In addition, in the fifty-ninth embodiment, when the start winning of the normal symbol corresponding to the normal symbol B is detected during the variable display effect of the special symbol, and the normal symbol B is started during the variable display effect being executed. Secondly, the performance contents of the variable display performance of the special symbols are rewritten, and the general pattern hit B is preferentially notified. By constructing in this way, it is possible to surely give the player an opportunity to generate the start winning of the second special symbol which is extremely advantageous compared to the first special symbol. In addition, as described above, in the 46th embodiment, when winning the normal pattern in the time saving A mode, it becomes easier to enter the special figure 1 non-electric opening 3073a with a relatively high probability of becoming a normal pattern per A. The normal electric accessory 3071 is opened during the open period, and the ordinary electric accessory 3071 is opened during the open period in which it becomes easy to enter the special figure 2 non-electric opening 3073b with a relatively low probability of hitting B in the normal figure. . When the game ball enters the special figure 1 non-electrical opening 3073a, the special figure 1 non-electrical accessory 3064a is opened to trigger the lottery of the first special symbol. A game ball can enter the opening 3064 . In addition, when the game ball enters the special figure 2 non-electric opening 3073b, the special figure 2 non-electric accessory 3065a is opened and the second entry, which is a kind of start winning opening that triggers the lottery of the second special symbol A game ball can enter the ball opening 3065 . Since there is no possibility of winning a small prize in the lottery of the first special pattern, the big prize game is not executed unless a big prize of 1/200 probability is won in the lottery of the special pattern, but the second special pattern is not executed. In the symbol lottery, in addition to winning the jackpot with a probability of 1/200, there is a probability of about 1/6 that the jackpot is virtually confirmed, so the lottery of the second special pattern is extremely better. It is a lottery with a high degree of advantage. Furthermore, even if a big hit is won in the lottery of the first special symbol, the time-saving B mode with a high degree of advantage is set only at a rate of 20%, and the time-saving A mode with a low degree of advantage is set at a high rate of 80%. On the other hand, when a big win is won directly or via a small win in the lottery of the second special symbols, the time-saving B mode with a high degree of advantage is always set. For this reason, although it was elected per normal B that can get the opportunity to open the special figure 2 non-electric accessory 3065a by entering the game ball into the special figure 2 non-electric opening 3073b, the operation If the game ball cannot enter the device 3070, it may cause the player to feel that he or she has missed a very big chance.

Therefore, in the fifty-ninth embodiment, in the time-saving A mode, the notification of the normal pattern hit B is given priority over the notification of the lottery result of the special symbol. In particular, when the start timing of the special pattern jackpot and the execution period of the normal pattern B overlap, the jackpot is not notified (the fact that the jackpot is won is concealed), and the winning of the normal pattern B is notified in the jackpot fluctuation. It is configured to And it is configured to notify that the jackpot has been reached after the end of the normal pattern hit B. - 特許庁By constructing in this way, even when normal pattern winning B is started just before the stop of the big winning pattern, the start of normal pattern winning B is clearly notified to the player. can be done. In other words, it can be suppressed that it will be confused with the announcement of the jackpot and it will be difficult to understand that it has been elected to B per normal pattern. It is possible to force the player to continue hitting to the right in order to enter the game ball into the actuation opening 3037b.

The configuration of the pachinko machine 10 of the fifty-ninth embodiment differs from that of the pachinko machine 10 of the forty-sixth embodiment described above in that the configurations of the ROM 222 and the RAM 223 in the sound lamp control device 113 are partially changed. and that the control processing executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 is partially changed. Other configurations, various processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, other processes executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp controller 113, and various processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display controller 114 are described in Section 46. It is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in the embodiment. Hereinafter, the same elements as in the forty-sixth embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals, and illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 903, the production mode of the special figure 2 chance production executed in the time saving A mode will be described. This special figure 2 chance production is a production that may be executed according to the result of the prefetching of the normal figure reservation that increased based on passing through the through gate 67, and is independent of the variable display of the special symbol. It is a performance that is executed. FIG. 903(a) is a diagram showing a display mode of the third symbol display device 81 at the start of the special figure 2 chance production. As shown in FIG. 903(a), the game ball passes through the through gate 67 and the number of reserved balls with normal symbols increases, and the execution of the special figure 2 chance effect is executed by lottery according to the prediction result of the increased reserved balls. When determined, a horizontally elongated substantially rectangular display area Dm21 is formed at the lower right of the main display area Dm. In this display area Dm21, an effect is executed in which a character resembling a rabbit discovers the treasure box 805, and the characters "What will come out?" are displayed. In addition, the text "If the content is a chance, open the special figure 2" is displayed in the sub-display area Ds. By these display contents, when the chance icon 805a appears from the treasure box 805, the player is informed that the normal electric accessory 3071 will be released during the period in which the game balls are distributed to the special figure 2 non-electric opening 3073b side. can be easily understood.

FIG. 903(b) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode when a normal figure hit B is notified in the special figure 2 chance production. As shown in FIG. 903(b), in the special-figure 2 chance production for notifying the normal figure hit B, the production mode in which the chance icon 805a appears from the treasure box 805 is executed in the display area Dm21. In addition, characters such as "Chance to execute special figure 2 lottery!! Hit right!!" are displayed in the sub-display area Ds. These display contents make it possible for the player to easily understand that the player has obtained a chance to execute the lottery for the second special symbol having a high degree of advantage by hitting to the right. In addition, special figure 2 chance production is executed with a predetermined probability (for example, probability of 1/50) even when winning A per normal figure. In this case, an effect that the contents of the treasure box 805 is empty is executed, and it is notified that the normal pattern B has not been won. By adopting a configuration in which the special figure 2 chance performance is executed even when the normal figure winning B is not won, the game can be played while paying attention to the performance result of the special figure 2 chance presentation.

Thus, in the fifty-ninth embodiment, basically, the special 2-chance effect for indicating the lottery result for the normal symbol is separately and independently from the variable display effect for indicating the lottery result for the first special symbol. It is configured to run. As a result, it is possible to inform that the general pattern winning B is won regardless of the execution status of the variable display of the special symbols. In addition, in the fifty-ninth embodiment, when winning a general pattern B under a specific condition, an omen production is set in the special symbol variation display production performed before the general pattern B is started. By doing so, it is possible to execute an omen effect targeting the normal pattern hit B. The portent effect in the fifty-ninth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG.

FIG. 904(a) is a diagram showing an example of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 when the precursor effect A is executed in the time saving A mode. As shown in FIG. 904(a), when the precursor effect A is executed in the time saving A mode, a effect is executed in which a boy character 710 appears at the lower left of the main display area Dm. In the portent effect A of the fifty-ninth embodiment, similar to the portent effect A of the fifty-fifth embodiment and the like, the boy character 710 is displayed in a display mode in which the eyes shine, and the line "chance!" configured in a manner. In addition, in the sub-display area Ds, characters such as "A big win with matching symbols, special figure 2 open when the chance eye is stopped!?" are displayed. By means of these display modes, it is possible to inform the game that an omen effect is being executed, and that there is a possibility that a big hit will be reported in the last variable display effect of the omen effect, and a possibility that a normal pattern hit B will be reported. It is easy for people to understand.

FIG. 904(b) is an indication effect executed in the time-saving A mode, and is a diagram showing a display mode in the case where a general pattern hit B is notified. The example of FIG. 904(b) illustrates a case where the variable display of the special symbols has not ended (during variation) when the symbols of B per normal pattern are stopped. As shown in FIG. 904(b), in the time saving A mode, when the normal pattern hit B is notified by the precursor effect, the third pattern is temporarily stopped by the combination of the chance eyes. Specifically, the right, middle, and left third symbols are all odd numbers, and the combination of at least the number 1 different from the other numbers (that is, the combination different from the combination corresponding to the big win) is temporarily stopped. . By setting all combinations of odd numbers as a chance, the player can easily determine whether or not it is a chance. Therefore, it is possible to realize an effect mode that is easy for the player to understand. Further, when the chance number is temporarily stopped during the variable display of the special pattern, the pattern display mode is set to indicate that the chance number is not completely stopped and displayed by performing a fine vibrating operation. Thereby, it is possible to suggest to the player that the lottery result of the special symbol has not been reported.

In addition, when the third symbol is temporarily stopped at the chance eye in the omen effect, the characters "Chance to execute special figure 2 lottery!! Hit right!!" This display content makes it possible for the player to easily understand that it is a chance to execute the lottery for the second special pattern with a high degree of advantage by winning the normal pattern B and hitting to the right. .

Next, with reference to FIGS. 905 and 906, the transition of the effect mode in the case where the premonitory effect with the normal hit B as the target is determined will be described. First, with reference to FIG. 905, the start winning of the normal pattern corresponding to the normal pattern B is detected, and the variable display effect of the special pattern is executed three times before the normal pattern per B is started. The transition of the performance mode when the premonition performance is set and the variable display of the special symbol is being executed at the start of the normal pattern hit B will be described. Here, in the fifty-ninth embodiment, when the start winning of the normal pattern corresponding to the normal pattern B is detected, the period until the normal pattern per B is started is specified from the breakdown of the normal pattern reserved balls. . In the fifty-ninth embodiment, the normal symbol variation time in the time saving A mode is set to 3 seconds, and the normal symbol per normal game period of A per normal symbol is set to 3.5 seconds. For this reason, for example, if the normal map per B is newly suspended in a state where two normal pattern reservations are already reserved, the newly suspended normal pattern per B is actually started It is 16 seconds (3 seconds x 3 + 3.5 seconds x 2) after the end of the normal figure variation that is being executed when the held ball corresponding to B per figure is detected. After specifying the start timing of the normal pattern hit B, how many times the variable display of the special pattern is executed until the specified start timing of the normal pattern hit B is determined from the reserved ball of the special pattern, On the condition that a plurality of reserved balls corresponding to the completely lost variation are reserved in the reservation, the execution of the sign effect is performed for the multiple times of the completely lost variation that is executed before the normal hit B is started. set.

In the example of FIG. 905, when the variation display of the special symbol is started three times before the start of the normal pattern B, and the normal pattern per B is started 2 seconds before the end of the third special symbol variation display. is exemplified. Here, since the special symbol lottery and the normal symbol lottery are executed separately and independently, the start timing of the normal symbol B and the fluctuation stop timing of the variable display of the last special symbol accompanied by the sign effect almost do not match. . Therefore, in the fifty-ninth embodiment, if the start timing of B per normal pattern is the timing after 5 seconds or more have elapsed after the start of the variable display of the special symbol, from the start of the last started variable display of the special symbol In the period until the normal pattern hit B is started, the variable display performance of 1 set to the performance result temporarily stopped at the chance eye is executed with the precursor performance, while the variable display of the last special symbol is executed. If B per normal pattern starts within 5 seconds from the start, from the start of the variable display of the special pattern one time before the last variable display to the start of per B per normal pattern, with an omen effect. It is configured to execute one variable display effect that is temporarily stopped at the chance. By constructing in this way, it is possible to reliably secure an effect period of 5 seconds or more for the variable display effect for notifying the normal game hit B.例文帳に追加Therefore, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the player will miss the fact that the normal pattern hit B. In addition, it is possible to realize a novel performance operation in which a normal pattern hit B is started at the same time when the chance eye is temporarily stopped. That is, using the variable display period of the special symbol a plurality of times, continuous production for notifying the lottery result of the normal symbol (per normal pattern B) (predictive production in which the same kind of production mode is continuously executed) It is possible to realize a very special and novel presentation mode of executing Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In Figure 905, of the variable display of the special symbols executed before the start of the normal pattern B, the normal pattern per B starts when 5 seconds have elapsed from the start of the special symbol variation display that is finally executed. After that, the variable display of the special symbol is stopped and displayed. In this case, after the execution of the predictive effect is determined, the predictive effect is set for a plurality of (three times in the example of FIG. 905) variable display effects that are started before the normal hit B is started. be. In addition, the last (third) variable display effect accompanied by the predictive effect is set to a variable display mode in which the chance number is temporarily stopped in accordance with the start of the normal hit B. That is, a variable display mode is set that ends before the special symbols stop changing. By configuring in this way, it is possible to suitably execute the omen effect targeting the normal game B. After the chance item is temporarily stopped, a special figure 2 route opening performance is executed indicating that the normal electric accessory 3071 is opened and the game ball can enter the special figure 2 non-electric opening 3073b. Then, the player is urged to enter the game ball into the normal electric accessory 3071 by hitting to the right. As a result, it is possible to enter the game ball into the special figure 2 non-electric opening 3073b during the normal figure per B.

Contrary to FIG. 905, FIG. 906 exemplifies a case where the variable display of the special symbol is stop-displayed before the start of the normal winning B. FIG. As shown in FIG. 906, when winning the sign effect in the determination (lottery) based on the detection of the start winning of the normal pattern B, the variation of the special symbol next to the variation display of the special symbol being executed at the time of winning From the display, a variable display effect accompanied by an omen effect is executed. Then, in the last variation display executed before the start of the normal pattern hit B, the variable display effect that accompanies the precursor effect and temporarily stops the chance eye is the normal pattern hit B from the start of the special pattern fluctuation. It is executed over the period until the start, and B per normal pattern is notified. As a result, it is possible to make the player continuously have expectations in the variable display effect of the special symbols executed a plurality of times until the normal pattern hit B is started. In addition, in FIG. 906, the case where the special symbol is in a state of stopping fluctuation (the state of the retained ball is 0) at the start of the normal pattern B is illustrated, but the retained ball of the special symbol is acquired in the middle of the omen production. There are plenty of possibilities. In this case, there is a possibility that the variable display of the new special symbol will start before the start of the normal pattern hit B, but the variable display effect with the precursor effect is executed during the variable display period in the new variable display. 906, and a presentation mode similar to that in the case of FIG. 906 is developed. If it is configured to execute a separate variable display effect for the variable display that starts immediately before the normal pattern hit B, the effect period of the variable display effect for informing the normal pattern hit B will be extremely short, and the normal pattern. There is a possibility that the player will have difficulty in recognizing that the hit B has been notified (the chance number has been temporarily stopped). Therefore, in the fifty-ninth embodiment, in the omen effect, a variable display effect from the start of variation of the variable display that fluctuates for 5 seconds or more until the start of the normal hit B to the start of the normal hit B It is configured to notify the hit B (temporarily stop the chance eye). By configuring in this way, it is possible to make the player surely notice the normal hit B, so even though the player wins the normal hit B, the normal electric accessory 3071 is not hit to the right. It is possible to suppress the loss of the lottery opportunity of the second special symbol with a high degree of advantage due to the passage of the open period.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 907 and 908, the transition of the effect mode in the case where the general pattern hit B is started during the variable display effect of the special symbol accompanied by the ready-to-win effect will be described. First, with reference to FIG. 907, a diagram showing the transition of the effect mode when detecting a normal pattern hit B during the execution of the super reach fluctuation, and when the normal pattern hit B is started within the super reach fluctuation. is. As shown in FIG. 907, during the execution of the super reach fluctuation, the start winning of the normal pattern corresponding to the normal pattern B is detected, and during the execution of the super reach fluctuation, the normal pattern per normal pattern per B When the game ends, the loss super reach fluctuation during execution is corrected (rewritten) to a performance mode in which the chance number is temporarily stopped at the start of the normal pattern hit B. - 特許庁In addition, in the 59th embodiment, in order to be able to rewrite smoothly, in the time saving A mode, it is configured so that reach always occurs in the third pattern with an odd number attached. . By constructing in this way, even if a normal hit B is detected after the occurrence of the reach, the combination of the chance eyes can be easily performed simply by setting the stop pattern to an odd number different from the number on which the reach is applied. can be stopped temporarily. When the chance eye is temporarily stopped and the normal figure hit B is started, the special figure 2 route opening effect is executed, and the player is urged to shoot the game ball aiming at the normal electric accessory 3071 by hitting to the right. be

Also, as shown in Figure 907, at the time when the special figure 2 route opening production ends with the end of the normal figure B, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol remains relatively long (for example, 5 seconds or more) Executes a pseudo-completely-outside effect until the fluctuation time elapses. By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent the game from being slowed down without performing any effect even though the variable display of the special symbols is actually performed. In addition, when the remaining variation time at the end of the normal figure B is short (for example, less than 5 seconds), the special figure 2 route opening effect is continued until the end of the variation. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game from being delayed.

Figure 908 detects the start winning of the normal pattern corresponding to the normal pattern B during the hit fluctuation of the first special pattern (during the reach fluctuation), the normal pattern hit B is started during the hit fluctuation, and the jackpot is started It is the figure which showed the transition of the production|presentation mode in the case of normal figure hitting B being complete|finished after that. As shown in Figure 908, the normal pattern per B is started just before the end of the variation of the per variation, and when the normal pattern per game corresponding to the normal pattern per B continues even after the start of the jackpot game, the normal pattern per B is started. When it is determined at the point of , the variable display performance corresponding to the big win variation is continued until the start of the normal pattern winning B, and is rewritten to a variable display mode in which the chance number is temporarily stopped. Then, when the chance eye is temporarily stopped and the normal figure hit B is started, the special figure 2 route opening effect is executed, and the player is urged to hit the game ball to the right toward the normal electric accessory 3071. be

As shown in FIG. 908, the special figure 2 route opening effect continues even after the jackpot game is started (opening period of the jackpot game) as long as the game per normal pattern per normal pattern B continues, It is ended with the end of the normal figure per B. Then, after the end of the special figure 2 route opening performance, a sudden big win performance for showing that the big win has been won is executed in the remaining opening period. In this sudden jackpot effect, for example, like the blackout effect in the seventh embodiment (see FIG. 93(a)), it is possible to give a large impact to the player in a short period of time. configured in a manner. As a result, it is possible to make the player feel as if he/she has suddenly been notified of a big win, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In the example of FIG. 908, taking as an example the case where the general pattern winning B continues even after the opening period of the jackpot has started, the transition of the production mode when the jackpot production is suddenly executed has been described. Even when the normal pattern winning B ends during the big winning fluctuation, there is a case where the big winning performance (see FIG. 93) is suddenly executed as the opening performance of the big winning. Specifically, even if the remaining variation time at the end of the normal pattern B is short (for example, less than 5 seconds) and the production period for notifying the jackpot by pseudo variation display cannot be secured, until the variation ends After executing the special figure 2 route opening performance, the jackpot winning is notified by suddenly executing the big win performance at the same time as the start of the opening period of the big win. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make the player grasp the winning of the jackpot surely.

Thus, in the fifty-ninth embodiment, when the general pattern per B is won, the general pattern per B is given priority over the lottery results of the special symbols including the jackpot. By configuring in this way, although the game ball can be entered into the special figure 2 non-electric opening 3073b, the normal electric accessory 3071 does not hit to the right even though it has been elected to the normal figure B. It can be suppressed that it is closed and loses the opportunity to open the special figure 2 non-electric accessory 3065a. If the opportunity to open the special figure 2 non-electric accessory 3065a is lost, the opportunity to execute the lottery of the second special symbol with a high degree of advantage is lost, which is extremely disadvantageous for the player. In the time-saving A mode, when the second special symbol lottery is executed, there is a probability of about 1/6 that a big win or a small win that is substantially confirmed to be a big win is won, and a big win based on the second special symbol lottery. After that, while always shifting to the time-saving B mode, which has a high degree of advantage, even if the lottery of the first special pattern is a big hit, it does not shift to the time-saving B mode, which is advantageous only at a rate of 20%. This is because the execution of the lottery of the second special symbols is more important than winning the jackpot in the lottery of the special symbols. Therefore, in the fifty-ninth embodiment, in the time-saving A mode, it is configured to most preferentially notify that you have won the B per normal pattern. As a result, even if a performance mode with a high degree of expectation is executed in the variable display performance of the special symbols, and the player is convinced of the big hit and stops shooting the game ball, again based on the notification of the normal pattern hit B, A game ball can be launched. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult to lose the opportunity to obtain the second special symbol reserved ball.

In the 59th embodiment, in the time-saving A mode, it was configured to most preferentially notify the winning of B per normal pattern, but under specific conditions, it may be configured not to notify per B per normal pattern. . More specifically, for example, if you win the general pattern B during the hit fluctuation based on winning the jackpot A17 in which the time saving B mode is set after the end of the jackpot, do not notify the winning of the general pattern B? , it may be configured to notify in a less conspicuous manner compared to the variable display effect of the special symbol. Even if it is configured in this way, after the end of the jackpot A17, the game shifts to the time-saving B mode in which only the lottery of the second special symbol is executed, so that the player can be configured so that the player does not substantially lose anything. can. In addition, when the start winning of the normal symbol is detected during the winning variation based on the big winning A17, it is possible to avoid the determination of rewriting of the performance mode, so that the processing load of the sound lamp control device 113 can be reduced. .

<Electrical configuration of the fifty-ninth embodiment>
Next, details of the ROM 222 provided in the sound lamp control device 113 in the fifty-ninth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 909(a). FIG. 909(a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM 222. As shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 909(a), the ROM 222 in the fifty-ninth embodiment has an omen availability lottery table 222Aa and an omen type The difference is that a selection table 222Ab and a fake effect lottery table 222Ea are added. The predictor availability lottery table 222Aa, similar to the predictor availability lottery table 222Aa (see FIG. 868(a)) in the fifty-fifth embodiment described above, is used to draw a lottery as to whether or not the predictive effect can be executed when a new start winning prize is detected. Data table used. In addition, in the fifty-ninth embodiment, whether or not the predictive effect can be executed is selected by lottery in the time saving A mode. Further, the portent type selection table 222Ab is a data table that is referred to for selecting the type of portent effect in accordance with the variation type of the lottery target hold, like the portent type selection table 222Ab in the fifty-fifth embodiment described above. . The portent availability lottery table 222Aa and the portent type selection table 222Ab have already been described in the above fifty-fifth embodiment, and therefore detailed description thereof will be omitted here. In addition, in the fake effect lottery table 222Ea, when the normal pattern lottery is executed in the time saving A mode and the lottery result other than the normal pattern B is obtained, it is finally lost (the contents of the treasure box 805 are empty). It is a data table that is referred to by lottery for the execution of the special figure 2 chance production (that is, the special figure 2 chance production of Gusset), which will be the production result). Although illustration is omitted, this fake effect lottery table 222Ea has a probability of 1/50 to win the special figure 2 chance effect of fake when the lottery result other than normal figure B is obtained in the time saving A mode. The data are specified as follows.

Next, with reference to FIG. 909(b), details of the RAM 223 provided in the sound lamp control device 113 in the fifty-ninth embodiment will be described. FIG. 909(b) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 223 in the fifty-ninth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 909(b), the RAM 223 in the fifty-ninth embodiment has an omen effect prohibition flag 223Aa and an omen number counter 223Ab in contrast to the configuration of the RAM 223 in the forty-sixth embodiment (see FIG. 802). The difference is that an omen prohibition release flag 223Ac, an omen type flag 223Ad, a waiting number counter 223Ae, a general pattern omen number counter 223Ea, an extension flag 223Eb, and a sudden jackpot effect flag 223Ec are added. there is Also, instead of the winning information storage area 223a, a special figure winning information storage area 223a1 and a normal figure winning information storage area 223a2 are provided. Note that the omen effect prohibition flag 223Aa, the omen number counter 223Ab, the omen inhibition release flag 223Ac, the omen type flag 223Ad, and the waiting number counter 223Ae are stored in the RAM 223 (see FIG. 867(b)) in the fifty-fifth embodiment. Since it is the same as the omen effect prohibition flag 223Aa, the omen number counter 223Ab, the omen prohibition release flag 223Ac, the omen type flag 223Ad, and the waiting number counter 223Ae provided, detailed description thereof will be omitted here.

The special figure winning information storage area 223a1 and the normal figure winning information storage area 223a2 are storage areas for storing special symbol winning information and normal symbol winning information, respectively. That is, in the forty-sixth embodiment described above, only the special symbol winning information is stored in the winning information storage area 223a. It is configured to receive from the device 110 as a general pattern winning information command and store it in the general pattern winning information storage area 223a2. Since the detailed configuration is the same as that of the winning information storage area 223a in the forty-sixth embodiment, detailed description thereof will be omitted here. The general pattern precursor number counter 223Ea is a counter in which the number of executions of the precursor production is set when the execution of the precursor production is determined as the production for notifying the normal pattern hit B. The initial value of this general pattern precursor number counter 223Ea is set to 0, and when the precursor effect is executed with the detection of the start winning of the normal pattern corresponding to the normal pattern per B in the time saving A mode, A counter value corresponding to the number of times of the variable display effect accompanied by the precursor effect to be executed until the start of the normal pattern hit B is set (see S5709A and S5710A in FIG. 912). While the value of the normal symbol number counter 223Ea is 1 or more, when starting the variable display effect of the special symbol, a variable display mode accompanied by the predictive effect is set (see S6104A in FIG. 920). In addition, each time the variable display effect with the predictive effect is executed, the value is updated by subtracting 1 (see S6101A in FIG. 920), and the variable display effect set when the value becomes 0 is the variable display period. Instead, a variable display effect is set for the effect period until the start timing of B per normal pattern (see S6104A in FIG. 920).

The extension flag 223Eb is, in the predictive effect for informing the normal pattern hit B, when the variable display of the special symbol ends first (stopped display) during the execution of the last variable display effect with the predictive effect, It is a flag for indicating that it is a period between the end of the variable display of the special symbol and the start of the normal pattern B. If this extension flag 223Eb is ON, it indicates that it is a period from the end of the variable display of the special symbol to the start of the general pattern B, and if it is OFF, it is a period other than this. indicates that The extension flag 223Eb has an initial value set to OFF, and in the last variable display effect involving the predictive effect, the variable display of the special symbol ends first, and then the normal pattern hit B is started. It is set to ON when execution is set (see S5711A in FIG. 912). In the state where the extension flag 223Eb is ON, execution of a new variable display effect without an indication effect is avoided (see S5143A in FIG. 919). For this reason, the variable display of the special symbol ends earlier during the effect period of the last variable display effect with the omen, and the variable display of the next special symbol is started before the general pattern hit B is started. Even if it does, it is possible to avoid execution of a new variable display effect. Therefore, until the start of the normal pattern B, the variable display effect with the omen effect can be continued without being canceled in the middle, so the lottery result of the normal symbol ( It is possible to more reliably complete the omen effect that can continuously increase the expectation for the normal hit B).

The sudden big win effect flag 223Ec is a flag that means whether or not it is in a state of waiting for execution of a sudden big win effect. If the sudden big win effect flag 223Ec is on, it means that the execution of the sudden big win effect (see FIG. 93) is waiting, and if it is off, the execution of the sudden big win effect is waiting. means no state. The initial value of the sudden jackpot performance flag 223Ec is set to off, and the normal hit B is won during the jackpot fluctuation in the time saving A mode, and the period from the end of the hit B to the end of the fluctuation is short. (Because it is less than 5 seconds), it is set to ON when the special symbol lottery result cannot be notified by the variable display effect (see S6005A in FIG. 918), and the normal pattern per B is completed, and When the execution period of the jackpot game is reached and the execution of the jackpot effect is suddenly set, it is set to OFF (see S5806A in FIG. 914 and S54566A in FIG. 915).

<Regarding control processing of the audio ramp control device in the fifty-ninth embodiment>
Next, referring to FIGS. 910 to 920, control processing executed by the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 in the fifty-ninth embodiment will be described. First, referring to FIG. 910, the command determination process E (S4121A) in the fifty-ninth embodiment will be described. This command determination process E (S4121A) is a process executed instead of the command determination process 17 (see FIG. 812) in the 46th embodiment.

Of the command determination process E (S4121A) in the fifty-ninth embodiment, the processes of S4301 to S4309, S4311, S4313, S4315, S54301, and S54303 to S54305 each correspond to the command determination process 17 (S54112) of the forty-sixth embodiment. The same processes as S4301 to S4309, S4311, S4313, S4315, S54301 and S54303 to S54305 are executed. In the command determination process E (S4121A) in the fifty-ninth embodiment, it is determined in the process of S4311 whether or not the winning information command has been received (S4311), and if it is determined that the winning information command has been received (S4311: Yes), the winning information command process E is executed (S4341A), and this process ends. Details will be described later with reference to FIG. 911, but this winning information command process E (S4341A) is the winning information command process (S4321A) executed within the command determination process A (see FIG. 870) in the fifty-fifth embodiment. This is a partial modification of the processing content of .

Also, in the command determination process E (see FIG. 910) in the fifty-ninth embodiment, when it is determined that a hit-related command has been received in the process of S4313 (S4313: Yes), the hit-related process in the forty-sixth embodiment 17 (see FIG. 815), the hit-related process E is executed (S4342A), and this process ends. The details of this win-related process E (S4342A) will be described with reference to FIG.

In addition, in the command determination process E (see FIG. 910) in the 59th embodiment, when it is determined that the general figure fluctuation related command is received in the process of S54305 (S54305: Yes), the general figure fluctuation in the 46th embodiment Instead of the related process 17 (see FIG. 818), normal figure fluctuation related process E is executed (S4343A), and this process ends. The details of this general/universal pattern fluctuation related process E (S4343A) will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, with reference to FIG. 911, details of the winning information command process E (S4341A) described above will be described. FIG. 911 is a flow chart showing this winning information command process E (S4341A). This winning information command process E (S4341A) is similar to the winning information command process (see FIG. 871) in the fifty-fifth embodiment. I will explain the differences.

In the processing of S4601A to S4606A of the winning information command processing E (S4341A) in the fifty-ninth embodiment, the same processing as the processing of S4601A to S4606A in the winning information command processing (S4321A) in the fifty-fifth embodiment is performed. executed.

In addition, in the winning information command process E (S4341A) in the 59th embodiment, when the process of S4601A is completed, then the general figure winning information for notifying the winning information corresponding to the normal symbol It is determined whether or not it is a command (S4621A). If it is determined that it is a normal figure winning information command (S4621A: Yes), then it is determined whether the current game state (mode) is time saving A mode (S4622A), and it is determined that it is time saving A mode If so (S4622A: Yes), a special precursor effect determination process is executed (S4623A), and the process proceeds to S4602A. Details will be described later with reference to FIG. 912, but this special predictive effect determination process (S4623A) is a process for determining whether or not to execute a special predictive effect toward the start of the normal game B.

On the other hand, in the processing of S4621A, if it is determined that it is not the winning information corresponding to the normal symbol (S4621A: No), and if it is determined that the current gaming state is not the time saving A mode in the processing of S4622A (S4622A: No ), the process of S4623A is skipped and the process proceeds to S4602A.

Next, with reference to FIG. 912, details of the above-described special portent effect determination processing (S4623A) will be described. FIG. 912 is a flowchart showing this special portent effect determination process (S4623A). In this special omen effect determination process (S4623A), first, it is determined whether or not the winning information of the normal design notified by the normal pattern winning information command of this time is the winning information corresponding to the normal pattern B (S5701A) . If it is determined that it is not the prize winning information corresponding to the normal figure per B (S5701A: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that it is winning information corresponding to B per normal pattern (S5701A: Yes), in order to determine whether or not to execute a special indication effect for the start timing of per normal B, It is determined whether the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b is 2 or more (S5702A). In the processing of S5702A, if it is determined that the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b is not a value of 2 or more (S5702A: No), it is not possible to set the precursor effect over a plurality of variable displays. , the process ends.

On the other hand, in the processing of S5702A, when it is determined that the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b is a value of 2 or more (S5702A: Yes), the normal figure winning information storage area 223a2 and the special figure winning Read the data of the information storage area 223a1 (S5703A), then, during the period from the read data to the start of B per normal pattern, by specifying the fluctuation display of the special symbol to be executed until the start of B per normal pattern, It is determined whether or not the start timing of the normal pattern B is the timing after 5 seconds or more have elapsed from the start of the variable display of the special symbol executed for the second time (S5704). In the process of S5704, the start timing of B per normal pattern is not the timing after 5 seconds or more have passed since the start of the special symbol variation display executed for the second time (that is, the normal symbol during the first special symbol variation display) If it is determined that the per figure B is started or the normal per figure B is started within 5 seconds from the start of the second special symbol variation display) (S5704A: No), over multiple variations Since the premonition effect cannot be set, the processing is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, in the process of S5704A, the start timing of the normal pattern B is the timing after 5 seconds or more have passed since the start of the special symbol variation display executed for the second time (that is, the special symbol executed for the second time During the fluctuation display, after 5 seconds after the start of the fluctuation, the normal pattern per B will start, or the normal pattern per B will start after the end of the second special pattern fluctuation display). (S5704A: Yes), read the data of the special figure winning information storage area 223a1 (S5705A), and determine whether there is a reach variation in the variation display executed before the start of the normal figure per B ( S5706A). In the processing of S5706A, when it is determined that reach variation exists in the variation display executed before the start of the normal per pattern B (S5706A: Yes), this processing is terminated as it is. On the other hand, in the processing of S5706A, if it is determined that the reach variation is not executed before the start of B per normal pattern (S5706A: No), the start timing of B per normal pattern is specified (S5707A), then, It is determined whether the normal pattern B starts within 5 seconds after the start of the variable display of the special symbol (S5708A).

In the processing of S5708A, if it is determined that the start timing of the normal pattern B is not within 5 seconds after the start of the special symbol variation display (it is after 5 seconds from the start of the special symbol variation display) ( S5708A: No), set the number of special figure fluctuations to be started before the start of B per normal pattern to the value of the normal pattern precursor frequency counter 223Ea (S5709A), and finish this process. On the other hand, in the processing of S5708A, when it is determined that the normal pattern per B starts within 5 seconds after the start of the fluctuation of the special pattern (S5708A: Yes), the special pattern that ends before the start of the normal pattern per B The number of fluctuation display times is set to the value of the normal map precursor number counter 223Ea (S5710A), then the extension flag 223Eb is set to ON (S5711A), and this process ends. As a result, a variable display effect with a precursor effect is set for the variable display in which the normal pattern B hit starts within 5 seconds after the start of the variation, and the normal pattern hit B is notified by an extremely short variable display effect. It is possible to prevent (suppress) the storage. In other words, by using the previous variable display and the variable display period of the variable display that is being executed at the start of the normal per hit B, it is possible to simulate the variable display effect accompanied by one precursor effect. , Sufficient performance period can be secured for informing the normal figure hit B. - 特許庁Therefore, it is possible to make the player surely grasp that he/she has won the normal pattern B.

Next, with reference to FIG. 913, the above-described win-related process E (S4342A) will be described. This hit-related process E (S4342A) is, as described above, executed in the command determination process E (see FIG. 910) in place of the hit-related process 17 (see FIG. 815) in the forty-sixth embodiment.

Of the hit-related process E (S4342A) in the fifty-ninth embodiment, in S54501 and in each process of S54503 to S54512, in the hit-related process 17 (S54302) in the forty-sixth embodiment S54501 and each process of S54503 to S54512 The same processing as is performed. In addition, in the hit-related process E (S4342A) in the fifty-ninth embodiment, in the process of S54501, it is determined whether an opening command has been received (S54501), and if it is determined that an opening command has been received (S54501A: Yes ), the opening command processing E for setting the opening effect according to the situation (jackpot type, normal drawing winning B execution situation, etc.) when the opening command is received (S4411A), and ends this processing . The details of this opening command process E (S4411A) will be described later with reference to FIG.

Also, in the hit-related process E (see FIG. 913) in the fifty-ninth embodiment, in the process of S54512, if it is determined that the hit-related command received from the main controller 110 is a normal-figure hit-related command (S54512A: Yes), instead of per normal pattern processing 17 (see FIG. 816) in the 46th embodiment, per normal pattern processing E is executed (S4412), and this processing ends. The details of this normal pattern per process E (S4412A) will be described with reference to FIG.

Next, with reference to FIG. 914, details of the opening command process E described above will be described. FIG. 914 is a flow chart showing this opening command process E (S4411A). In this opening command process E (S4411A), first, it is determined whether or not the sudden big win effect flag 223Ec is ON (S5801A), and if it is determined that the sudden big win effect flag 223Ec is not ON, that is, it is OFF (S5801A: No), set an opening command for display corresponding to the jackpot type (S5802A), and terminate this process. On the other hand, in the processing of S5801A, if it is determined that the jackpot effect flag 223Ec is turned on (S5801A: Yes), the normal pattern per B is started just before the end of the jackpot variation, and the normal pattern per B As a result of giving priority to the notification, it means that there was no time to notify the jackpot winning, so first, it is determined whether or not the general pattern per game related to the general pattern per B is being executed (S5803A) , When it is determined that the normal pattern per game related to the normal pattern B is being executed (S5803A: Yes), the jackpot is started in order to continue the player to concentrate on the normal pattern per game An opening command for display in a concealed jackpot mode is set (S5804A), and this process is terminated. Incidentally, as the concealment mode of the big win, for example, it is possible to execute pseudo-variation display of the special symbols, or to execute pseudo-effect as if the special symbols are in a state where the fluctuation is stopped. Further, for example, by executing the special figure 2 route chance production related to the normal figure hit B in most of the display area of the third symbol display device 81, it may be configured so that there is no room for displaying the opening production. .

On the other hand, in the processing of S5803A, if it is determined that the B game is not being executed per normal pattern (S5803A: No), the per normal pattern B itself has ended, but the jackpot is not notified. In this state, it means that it is time to start the big win, so by setting the opening command for display corresponding to the sudden big win effect (see FIG. 93), the player is notified of the winning of the big win (S5805A), and the sudden big win effect flag is set. 223Ec is set to OFF (S5806A), and this processing ends.

By executing this opening command process E (see FIG. 914), even if the general pattern B is started just before the end of the jackpot variation in the time saving A mode, the jackpot is won until the general pattern B is completed. Since it is possible to keep secret from the player what has been done, when the normal pattern hit B is executed in the time saving A mode, the game ball is fired to the normal electric accessory 3071 by surely hitting the player to the right. It is possible to obtain an opportunity to generate the start winning of the second special symbol. In addition, as soon as the general pattern winning B ends, a sudden big winning performance (see FIG. 93) capable of informing the player that the big winning has been won in a short period of time can be executed, so that the winning of the big winning can be notified to the player. The player can be made to understand immediately.

Next, with reference to FIG. 915, the process E (S4412A) per normal pattern described above will be described. This general pattern per process E (S4412A) is, as described above, a process that is executed in place of the general pattern per process 17 (see FIG. 816) in the 46th embodiment. In each of the processing of S54551 to S54555 and S54557 of the processing E (S4412A) in the 59th embodiment, each of S54551 to S54555 and S54557 in the processing 17 (S54513) in the 46th embodiment The same processing as the processing is executed.

In addition, in the process E (S4412A) per normal pattern in the 59th embodiment, first, it is determined whether the opening command per normal pattern is received (S54561A), and when it is determined that the opening command per normal pattern is received (S54561A: Yes), the process proceeds to S54551. On the other hand, if it is determined that the opening command per normal pattern is not received (S54561A: No), it is determined whether the ending command for per normal pattern B is received (S54562A), and the ending command for per normal pattern B has not been received (S54562A: No), this process ends.

On the other hand, in the processing of S54562A, when it is determined that the ending command of B per normal pattern is received (S54562A: Yes), first, it is determined whether the special symbol jackpot game is being executed (S54563A), and the jackpot game is not being executed (S54563A: No), this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the jackpot game is being executed in the process of S54563 (S54563A: Yes), then it is determined whether the sudden jackpot effect flag 223Ec is ON (S54564A), and the sudden jackpot effect flag 223Ec is determined. is not on, ie, is off (S54564A: No), this process ends. On the other hand, in the processing of S54564A, when it is determined that the jackpot effect flag 223Ec is turned on suddenly (S54564A: Yes), although it is already in the opening period of the jackpot, the effect related to the normal pattern hit B is preferentially executed. As a result, it means that the player is not clearly notified of the big win. Therefore, by setting the display command corresponding to the sudden big win effect, the sudden big win effect (see FIG. 93) is displayed. Execution is set (S54565A), then suddenly the jackpot effect flag 223Ec is set to OFF (S54566A), and this process is terminated.

Next, with reference to FIG. 916, the normal pattern fluctuation related process E (S4343A) in the fifty-ninth embodiment will be described. This general pattern fluctuation related process E (S4343A) is a process executed instead of the general pattern fluctuation related process 17 (see FIG. 818) in the 46th embodiment. In the processing of S54701, S54702 and S54709 of the normal pattern fluctuation related processing E (S4343A) in the 59th embodiment, S54701, S54702 and S54709 of the normal pattern fluctuation related processing 17 (S54306) in the 46th embodiment respectively The same processing as each processing is executed. In addition, in the normal figure fluctuation related process E (S4343A) in the 59th embodiment, in the process of S54702, it is determined whether the current gaming state is the time saving A mode (either time saving A1 or time saving A2). (S54702), when it is determined that the current game state is the time-saving A mode (S54702: Yes), the normal figure production setting process for setting the production mode related to the fluctuation of the normal symbol is executed (S54711A) , the process ends. The details of this normal figure effect setting process (S54711A) will be described with reference to FIG.

FIG. 917 is a flow chart showing this general-purpose drawing effect setting process (S54711A). In this general pattern production setting process (S54711A), first, it is determined whether the variation is per normal pattern B (S5901A), and if it is determined that it is not per normal pattern B per variation (S5901A: No) , It is determined whether or not it is during the normal pattern hit fluctuation (that is, the normal pattern per A hit fluctuation) (S5902A), and when it is determined that the normal pattern is not fluctuating (S5902A: No), This process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, in the process of S5902A, when it is determined that the per normal pattern is fluctuating (per normal pattern per A per fluctuation) (S5902A: Yes), the special pattern with reference to the gase production lottery table 222Ea It is determined whether or not a lottery result corresponding to the execution of the special figure 2 chance production is obtained (S5904A).

In the processing of S5904A, if the lottery result corresponds to the execution of the special figure 2 chance production (S5904A: Yes), the fake special figure 2 chance production indicating that the contents of the treasure box 805 is empty finally set (S5905A) and terminate this process. On the other hand, in the process of S5904A, when the lottery result corresponding to the execution of the special figure 2 chance production is not obtained (S5904A: No), the process of S5905 is skipped and the process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, in the processing of S5901A, if it is determined that the variation per normal per B (S5901A: Yes), then it is determined whether the value of the precursor number counter 223Ab is greater than 0 (S5906A), when it is determined that the value of the portent number counter 223Ab is greater than 0 (that is, the portent effect is being executed) (S5906A: Yes), the start of the variable display of the special symbols is triggered. , The chance eye is temporarily stopped (that is, the normal pattern hit B is notified). Since there is no need to set it, this processing ends. On the other hand, in the processing of S5906A, if it is determined that the value of the portent number counter 223Ab is not greater than 0 (that is, is 0) (S5906A: No), it means that the portent effect is not being executed. , Since it is necessary to notify the election of B per normal pattern in this normal pattern fluctuation, first, it is determined whether the reach fluctuation of the special symbol is currently in progress (S5907A). In the processing of S5907A, if it is determined that the reach is changing (S5907A: Yes), stop symbol rewrite processing is executed to rewrite the result of the reach change being executed to the chance eye (S5908A), and this End the process. The details of this stop symbol rewriting process (S5908A) will be described later with reference to FIG. On the other hand, in the process of S5907, if it is determined that the reach is not fluctuating (S5907A: No), the special figure 2 chance production (Fig. 903 (b )) is set (S5909A), and the process ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 918, details of the stop symbol rewriting process (S5908A) will be described. FIG. 918 is a flow chart showing the stop symbol rewriting process (S5908A). In this stop pattern rewriting process (S5908A), first, the variable display effect corresponding to the reach variation being executed is rewritten to a variable display mode in which the chance number is temporarily stopped within the normal figure variation period (S6001A), It is determined whether or not the remaining fluctuation time after completion of B is 5 seconds or longer (S6002A). In the processing of S6002A, if it is determined that the remaining variation time after the end of the normal pattern B is 5 seconds or more (S6002A: Yes), after the end of the normal pattern per B, reach fluctuation of the special symbol currently being executed A pseudo variable display effect for showing the lottery result of is set to start (S6003A), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the processing of S6002A, when it is determined that the remaining variation time after the end of the normal pattern B is not more than 5 seconds (that is, less than 5 seconds) (S6002A: No), the reach variation characteristics during execution The figure lottery result determines whether it is hit (S6004A), and the special figure lottery result of the reach fluctuation being executed is not hit, that is, when it is determined that it is out (S6004A: No), this processing is terminated as it is. In this case, when the reach fluctuation of the special symbol continues even after the end of the normal pattern hit B, the effect is set as if the normal pattern hit B continues. Even if the production mode related to the normal pattern B is extended until the fluctuation time of the special pattern ends, there is no disadvantage for the player because it is a game state in which the right-handed game must be performed in the time-saving A mode. . On the other hand, in the process of S6004A, if it is determined that the special drawing lottery result of the reach fluctuation being executed is a hit (S6004A: Yes), suddenly the big hit production flag 223Ec is set to ON (S6005A), this End the process. As a result, when the general pattern per B ends before the reach fluctuation of the special symbol, the production mode related to the general pattern per B is continued until the end of the big pervert fluctuation, and at the same time as the start of the big pervert, a sudden jackpot production (Fig. 93) See) can notify the jackpot. In addition, when the ready-to-win variation of the special symbol ends first and the big win is started, after waiting for the end of the normal pattern win B, the big win can be announced suddenly by the big win performance (see FIG. 93). As a result, it is possible for the player to fire the game ball aiming at the normal electric accessory 3071 by hitting to the right in the normal pattern hit B, so the player loses (the second special symbol It is possible to suppress the fact that the opportunity to acquire the reserved ball is lost).

Next, with reference to FIG. 919, the precursor effect setting process E (S4551A) in the fifty-ninth embodiment will be described. This portent effect setting process E (S4551A) is a process executed by slightly changing the content of the portent effect setting process (S4511A) performed in the variable display setting process A (see FIG. 876) in the fifty-fifth embodiment. This is the process executed before the process of S5103 in the variable display setting process 17 (see FIG. 819) in the forty-sixth embodiment.

In each process of S5101A to S5109A in the portent effect setting process E (S4551A) in the fifty-ninth embodiment, the same process as each of S5101A to S5109A in the portent effect setting process (S4511A) in the fifty-fifth embodiment is performed. executed. Further, when the portent effect setting process E (S4551A) in the fifty-ninth embodiment is executed, first, it is determined whether the value of the general pattern portent number counter 223Ea is greater than 0 (S5141A), and the normal pattern portent number counter 223Ea is determined. If it is determined that the value of is greater than 0 (S5141A: Yes), it means that a special omen effect targeting the normal figure B is set, so a special omen effect is set. A special predictor control process is executed (S5142A) to terminate this process. Details of this special precursor control process (S5142A) will be described later with reference to FIG.

On the other hand, in the processing of S5141A, if it is determined that the value of the normal pattern precursor number counter 223Ea is not greater than 0, that is, it is 0 (S5141A: No), it is determined whether the extension flag 223Eb is on. Then (S5143A), when it is determined that the extension flag 223Eb is on (S5143A: Yes), it is determined that the pseudo 1 variable display effect that continues until the start of the normal pattern hit B is in the middle of execution. This means that there is no need to newly install a variable display mode, so this processing is terminated as it is. On the other hand, in the process of S5143A, if it is determined that the extension flag 223Eb is not ON, that is, it is OFF (S5143A: No), the process proceeds to S5101A.

FIG. 920 is a flowchart showing the special portent control process (S5142A). In this special predictive control process (S5142A), first, the value of the general pattern precursor number counter 223Ea is subtracted by 1 (S6101A), and it is determined whether the value of the general pattern precursor number counter 223Ea after the subtraction is 0 (S6102A). When it is determined that the value of the general pattern precursor number counter 223Ea after the subtraction is not 0 (S6102A: No), a variation pattern accompanied by the precursor effect A is set (S6103A), and this processing ends. On the other hand, in the processing of S6102A, if it is determined that the value of the general pattern precursor number counter 223Ea after subtraction is 0 (S6102A: Yes), the variation of the fluctuation period below the period required until the start of the normal pattern per B Of the pattern effects, the variation pattern with the precursor effect A having the longest variation period is set (S6104A), and the process is terminated.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 in the fifty-ninth embodiment, in addition to the case where the start winning of the first special symbol is detected during the time saving A mode, it is possible to execute an omen effect that holds the winning B in the general pattern as a lottery target. configured to In other words, according to the variation time of the normal pattern until the normal pattern B (and part of the normal pattern A) is started, the period of the normal pattern, and the breakdown of the reserved ball of the first special pattern It is possible to set an omen performance over a plurality of variable display periods of special symbols until the winning B (and a part of A winning normal) is started. In addition, when notifying the winning of a normal pattern B, a performance mode as if the winning of a normal pattern B was notified in the variable display performance of the last special pattern in the variable display performance accompanied by the omen performance is configured to be executable. By constructing in this way, it is possible to realize a very novel performance mode as if the variable display performance of the special symbols and the variable display performance of the normal symbols are combined, so that the player's interest in the game is improved. be able to.

Here, as in the forty-sixth embodiment described above, when it is configured to notify the general pattern B by a single effect (treasure box opening effect) when the general pattern per B is won, the expectation for the player It becomes difficult to keep holding the B continuously, and there is a possibility that the player will have the impression that he has suddenly won the B in the normal pattern.

On the other hand, in the 59th embodiment, according to the fluctuation time of the general pattern reservation and the look-ahead result of the period per general pattern of each reservation, it is specified when B will be executed, and the specific result is Accordingly, a sense of anticipation for the normal pattern winning B is provided by setting an omen performance in the variable display performance of a plurality of special patterns executed before the start of the normal pattern winning B in parallel with the variable display of the normal pattern. can be increased step by step. In addition, as in the fifty-fifth embodiment and the like, the predictive effect is determined according to the result of the first special symbol look-ahead (at a rate corresponding to the variation type), so the predictive effect is started. In this case, it is possible to realize a very special and novel game property that can be expected for both the big win and the normal game B.

In addition, in the fifty-ninth embodiment, when the start winning of the normal symbol corresponding to the normal symbol B is detected during the variable display effect of the special symbol, and the normal symbol B is started during the variable display effect being executed. Secondly, the performance contents of the variable display performance of the special symbols are rewritten, and the general pattern hit B is preferentially notified. By constructing in this way, it is possible to surely give the player an opportunity to generate the start winning of the second special symbol which is extremely advantageous compared to the first special symbol. In addition, as described above, in the 46th embodiment, when winning the normal pattern in the time saving A mode, it becomes easier to enter the special figure 1 non-electric opening 3073a with a relatively high probability of becoming a normal pattern per A. The normal electric accessory 3071 is opened during the open period, and the ordinary electric accessory 3071 is opened during the open period in which it becomes easy to enter the special figure 2 non-electric opening 3073b with a relatively low probability of hitting B in the normal figure. . When the game ball enters the special figure 1 non-electrical opening 3073a, the special figure 1 non-electrical accessory 3064a is opened to trigger the lottery of the first special symbol. A game ball can enter the opening 3064 . In addition, when the game ball enters the special figure 2 non-electric opening 3073b, the special figure 2 non-electric accessory 3065a is opened and the second entry, which is a kind of start winning opening that triggers the lottery of the second special symbol A game ball can enter the ball opening 3065 . In the lottery of the first special pattern, since there is no possibility of winning a small prize, the jackpot game is not executed unless a big prize of 1/200 probability is won in the lottery of the special pattern, but the second special pattern is not executed. In the symbol lottery, in addition to winning the jackpot with a probability of 1/200, the lottery of the second special pattern is extremely better because the probability of winning is about 1/6. It is a lottery with a high degree of advantage. Furthermore, even if a big hit is won in the lottery of the first special symbol, the time-saving B mode with a high degree of advantage is set only at a rate of 20%, and the time-saving A mode with a low degree of advantage is set at a high rate of 80%. On the other hand, when a big win is won directly or via a small win in the lottery of the second special symbols, the time-saving B mode with a high degree of advantage is always set. For this reason, even though it was elected per normal B that can get the opportunity to open the special figure 2 non-electric accessory 3065a by entering the game ball into the special figure 2 non-electric opening 3073b, the operation If the game ball cannot enter the device 3070, it may cause the player to feel that he or she has missed a very big chance.

Therefore, in the fifty-ninth embodiment, in the time-saving A mode, the notification of the normal pattern hit B is given priority over the notification of the lottery result of the special symbol. In particular, when the start timing of the special pattern jackpot and the execution period of the normal pattern B overlap, the jackpot is not notified (the fact that the jackpot is won is concealed), and the winning of the normal pattern B is notified in the jackpot fluctuation. It is configured to And it is configured to notify that the jackpot has been reached after the end of the normal pattern hit B. - 特許庁By constructing in this way, even when normal pattern winning B is started just before the stop of the big winning pattern, the start of normal pattern winning B is clearly notified to the player. can be done. In other words, it can be suppressed that it will be confused with the announcement of the jackpot and it will be difficult to understand that it has been elected to B per normal pattern. It is possible to force the player to continue hitting to the right in order to enter the game ball into the actuation opening 3037b.

In addition, in the 59th embodiment, during the jackpot fluctuation in the time saving A mode, the normal pattern B is started first, and when the jackpot is started during the normal pattern B execution, the normal pattern per B is executed In the middle, the start of the big win is kept secret, and the end of the normal game B is used as a trigger to suddenly announce the big win by the big win performance (see FIG. 93), but it is not limited to this. For example, when the jackpot is started during execution of the normal pattern hit B, the jackpot performance (see FIG. 93) may be suddenly executed when the opening period of the jackpot ends. That is, it is good also as a structure which fixes the execution timing of sudden big-hit production. By configuring in this way, it is possible to simplify the control during the jackpot opening period.

In the 59th embodiment, in the time saving A mode, it was configured to most preferentially notify the winning of the general pattern B, but under specific conditions, the general pattern per B may not be notified. More specifically, for example, if you win the general pattern B during the hit fluctuation based on winning the jackpot A17 in which the time saving B mode is set after the end of the jackpot, do not notify the winning of the general pattern B? , it may be configured to notify in a less conspicuous manner compared to the variable display effect of the special symbol. Even if it is configured in this way, after the end of the jackpot A17, the game shifts to the time-saving B mode in which only the lottery of the second special symbol is executed, so that the player can be configured so that the player does not substantially lose anything. can. In addition, when the start winning of the normal symbol is detected during the winning variation based on the big winning A17, it is possible to avoid the determination of rewriting of the performance mode, so that the processing load of the sound lamp control device 113 can be reduced. .

In the 59th embodiment, in the time-saving A mode, when the normal pattern per B is elected during the jackpot fluctuation, and when the jackpot is started during the normal pattern per B, the jackpot game continues until the normal pattern per B is completed. It was configured to hide the fact that it is being executed (it is the opening period of the jackpot), and to notify that it is in the jackpot game state by suddenly jackpot performance (see FIG. 93) triggered by the end of the normal pattern hit B. , It is not necessary to keep the jackpot secret until the end of B per normal pattern. For example, in the general figure per B, it may be configured to notify the jackpot when the game ball enters the special figure 2 non-electric opening 3073b.

In the fifty-eighth embodiment described above, the irregular winning of the second special symbol is detected during the execution of the indication effect over the variable display effect of the first special symbols that is continuously executed, and the irregular winning of the second special symbol is detected during the indication effect. When the variable display period of the second special symbol interrupts between the variable display effects of the two first special symbols, the variable display period of the second special symbol is incorporated into the effect period of the omen effect. Although the alternate embodiment has been described, the period to be interrupted between the two variable display effects of the first special symbol is not limited to the variable display period of the second special symbol. For example, when the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is momentarily cut off during the execution of the precursor effect, the power cutoff is detected (detected that the power supply voltage is below a predetermined voltage), and then the sound lamp control device 113 is turned on. The configuration may be such that the premonition effect is executed until the motion is stopped. In addition, as a power-on image displayed when the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 10, a configuration is provided in which a state indicating that the precursor effect is being executed is provided, and the pachinko machine 10 is completely started up from power-on (sound lamp). The start-up process (see FIG. 33) of the control device 113 ends) (that is, until the variable display effect of the first special symbol becomes executable). Also, the period interrupted between the variable display effects of the two first special symbols may be a demo period showing the variable stop state.

In the fifty-fifth to fifty-ninth embodiments described above, when execution of the predictive effect is determined by a lottery based on a new start prize, the predictive effect is basically started from the next variable display effect. However, it is not limited to this. For example, when the omen performance is won, it may be determined by lottery which of the reserved balls to be digested before the lottery object reservation is to be started from the corresponding variable display performance. In other words, a configuration may be adopted in which the number of consecutive times of omen effects is drawn by lottery. In this case, it may be configured such that the consecutive number of times of easy selection (high rate of selection) is varied according to the variation type of the lottery target reservation. By configuring in this way, the game can be played while paying attention to the number of executions of the portent effect. Also, even in situations where reach fluctuations (or specific complete deviation fluctuations) are not included in the hold, it is possible to start the precursor production at a timing other than the next fluctuation of the starting prize, so it is possible to use the lottery to determine whether the precursor production can be executed. Reach fluctuation (or specific complete loss fluctuation) is included in the hold when winning, so a sign waiting state is set, and the start winning does not occur in reach fluctuation (or specific complete loss fluctuation). It is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable even if the premonition effect is started from the change of .

In the fifty-fifth embodiment to the fifty-ninth embodiment described above, when the lottery for whether or not to execute the predictive effect is won, the predictive effect is started from the variable display effect to be started after the next time, but it is limited to this. Instead, the configuration may be such that the predictive effect is started from the variable display effect being executed at the time when the lottery as to whether or not the predictive effect can be executed is won. In this case, in each of the above-described embodiments, the effect mode of executing the same type of effect immediately after the start of the fluctuation is adopted as the precursor effect, but the predictive effect is executed at the time of stopping the fluctuation (the second half of the variable display effect). With this configuration, it is possible to easily rewrite a variable display effect without an omen effect to a variable display mode with an omen effect. Specifically, for example, when the precursor performance is configured as a performance mode that is started at the stage of 1 second before the fluctuation stop, whether or not the precursor performance can be executed by lottery based on the start winning detected one second before the fluctuation stop. When the lottery is won, the portent performance can be started from the change, so that a longer period can be ensured for rewriting to the mode with the portent performance. Therefore, the portent effect can be accompanied by a larger number of variable display effects, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved. In addition, the effect mode of the type of predictive effect that is executed in the second half of the variable display effect is not limited to the above-described predictive effects A to C (see FIGS. 864 and 865), and an arbitrary effect mode is adopted. You may For example, it is possible to employ a production mode in which the stop symbols are displayed in a predetermined combination (for example, a combination of all even numbers), or to display a predetermined effect (for example, an effect imitating an earthquake or an explosion, etc.) when the fluctuation stops. It is good also as a structure which generates. By configuring in this way, it is possible to further improve the degree of freedom of the mode of presentation.

In the fifty-fifth embodiment and the fifty-seventh to fifty-ninth embodiments described above, the configuration is such that the same type of omen effect is accompanied over a plurality of consecutively executed variable display effects, but this is not the only option. It is not something that can be done. For example, as the portent effect, a type of effect in which the effect mode of the portent effect changes step by step for each variable display effect may be adopted. Specifically, for example, the numbers are displayed in a countdown manner for each variable display effect, and the numbers displayed in the foreshadowing effect in the variable display effect corresponding to the holding of the lottery object indicate the degree of expectation for the big win. A mode or, conversely, a mode in which numbers are added and displayed in a count-up format, and the number displayed in the portent mode in the variable display mode corresponding to the holding of the lottery object suggests the degree of expectation for a big win as the portent mode. may be adopted. In addition, for example, like the precursor types in the fifty-fifth embodiment, a plurality of precursor types with different expectations are provided, and in the first half of the variable display effect, the precursor types corresponding to the stages with the lower expectations (for example, the precursor effect A) is executed, and in the latter half of the variable display effect, the portent effects (for example, portent effects B and C) corresponding to the stages of high expectations are executed. In addition to the above examples, it is possible to adopt any effect mode in which the display mode (effect mode) changes step by step for each variable display effect. When adopting the production mode in which the production mode changes in stages, the production mode of the final stage from the variation type corresponding to the lottery target reservation (the foreshadowing production to be executed in the variable display production type), and depending on the final stage, the type of precursor effect to be executed in each variable display effect executed prior to the variable display effect corresponding to the lottery target reservation may be determined. Further, in this case, it may be configured to allow execution of the same stage of the precursory effect only once in a series of precursory effects. It may be configured such that the predictive performance at the stage determined in the lottery object reservation is executed by not executing the predictive performance for a part of the variable display performance executed after the determination of the performance.

In the fifty-fifth embodiment to the fifty-ninth embodiment described above, when the execution of the predictive effect is determined by the lottery based on the starting prize, the predictive effect is set for the lottery target hold, but this is not the case. It is not something that can be done. For example, at the time of winning the omen effect, it is determined whether there is a variation type with a higher expectation (difficult to select due to being out) in the hold, and if there is a variation type with a higher expectation, the expectation is It is good also as composition which changes into omen production toward the reservation ball corresponding to high fluctuation classification. By configuring in this way, the ready-to-reach performance with the predictive performance and the relatively low expectation is achieved in a relatively short period after the end of the ready-to-reach performance with the relatively high expectation without the predictive performance. It is possible to suppress the fact that the performance is executed and the expectation for the portent performance is spoiled. In addition, as in the fifty-sixth embodiment described above, at the start of the fluctuation of the reach reservation that has been reserved in advance, the variation type of the lottery target reservation and the change type of the reach reservation that starts the fluctuation are compared, and the sign effect is performed until which reservation. Since there is no need to determine whether to continue, the processing load at the start of reach fluctuation can be reduced.

In the gaming machine of each of the above embodiments, when the lottery result of the special symbol is lost, the variation type data is referred to for selecting the variation type data according to the type of ball entrance into which the ball entered, the number of held balls, etc. A different table is selected as the table, but even when the lottery result of the special symbol is a win, a different table is selected from the variation type selection table 202d according to the game situation. may As a result, it is possible to diversify the variation pattern presentation for notifying the big hit of the special symbol, so that the presentation can be prevented from becoming monotonous.

In the pachinko machine 10 of each of the above-described embodiments, the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 performs the setting of the variation pattern when the jackpot is won, the setting during the jackpot, and the setting when the jackpot ends. , but not limited to these. For example, it may be configured to be performed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 .

Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of each of the above embodiments, the game result setting table 202e, the state setting table 202f, etc. are provided in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, it may be configured to be provided in the ROM 222 of the audio lamp control device 113 .

As the configuration of the pachinko machine 10 used in each embodiment described above, the following configuration may be used.

<Regarding the high-probability state of normal symbols>
In each of the above-described embodiments, in a part of the case where the special symbol lottery wins the jackpot, the high probability state of the normal symbol can be set after the jackpot game ends, but the high probability state of the normal symbol is set. As a setting opportunity for this, a setting opportunity other than the jackpot winning of the special symbol lottery may be provided, for example, the number of executions of the special symbol variation is a predetermined number without winning the jackpot A setting opportunity for setting a high-probability state of normal symbols may be established when the value of the denominator of the probability of winning a jackpot in the special symbol lottery to be drawn reaches twice.

By configuring in this way, when a situation occurs in which a special symbol lottery (fluctuation) that does not result in a big hit is repeatedly executed, that is, a situation in which the player's willingness to play tends to decrease, a benefit (normal Since the high probability state of the pattern can be given, it is possible to suppress the player's desire to play from significantly decreasing.

In addition, the number of executions of the special symbol variation, which is an element for establishing the above-described setting opportunity, may be configured to be variable according to the game situation. It may be configured to vary the number of executions of the special symbol variation that establishes the setting opportunity for setting the high probability state. Specifically, when the normal state (low probability state of special design, low probability state of normal design) is set, the second variable state (high probability state of special design, low probability state of normal design) If it is set, that is, according to the type of game state in which the low probability state of normal symbols is set, the number of executions of the special symbol variation that establishes the setting opportunity may be varied. By configuring in this way, the degree of expectation that the high probability state of the normal symbol is set can be varied according to the set game state.

In this case, the second probability variable state in which the high probability state of the special symbol is set is easier to win the jackpot in the special symbol lottery than the normal state in which the low probability state of the special symbol is set (special Because the pattern lottery jackpot probability is high), when the second probability variation state is set, the high probability state of the normal design is set with fewer special design variations than when the normal state is set. It is preferable to configure so that the setting opportunity for performing is established. By configuring in this way, even if any game state is set, it is possible to make the ease of establishment of the setting opportunity for setting the high probability state of the normal symbol to the same degree. becomes.

On the other hand, when the normal state is set than when the second probability variable state is set, the setting opportunity for setting the high probability state of the normal design with a smaller number of executions of the special design variation is established. It can be configured as follows. That is, in the normal state (the most disadvantageous game state for the player) in which the low probability state disadvantageous to the player is set even in the probability state of the special symbol, the setting opportunity for setting the high probability state of the normal symbol Since it can be made easier to establish, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to play games that are excessively disadvantageous. In addition, since it becomes easy to set the high probability state of the normal design based on the setting opportunity that is established when the number of times of execution of the special design fluctuation reaches the predetermined number of times, the high probability state of the normal design is set without winning the jackpot. Therefore, it is possible to easily provide the player with a game with unexpectedness.

Further, when the setting opportunity for setting the high-probability state of normal symbols is configured to be different according to the set game state, in a part of the set game state, the high-probability of normal symbols The setting opportunity for setting the state may be provided (difficult) game state may be provided, for example, a plurality of types (for example , normal AA, normal AB) can be set, and a high probability state of normal symbols is set when the game state of normal AB is set rather than when the game state of normal AA is set. It may be configured such that the setting opportunity for performing is likely to be established.

By configuring in this way, at what timing the high probability state of the normal symbol is set for the player who is playing the game with the gaming machine in which the normal state is set? Or, is it a game state in which a setting opportunity for setting a high probability state of normal symbols can be established? Since the game can be played while predicting the game, it is possible to prevent the player from quickly becoming bored with the game. In this case, it is possible for the player to predict whether or not the currently set game state (game state for each type) is a game state in which the setting opportunity of the high probability state of the normal symbol is likely to be established. It is preferable to construct such a production so as to be executable.

Furthermore, the game state in which the high probability state of normal symbols is set is a privilege given to the player when a big win is won in the special symbol lottery rather than the game state in which the low probability state of normal symbols is set. In a gaming machine having a game specification that is likely to be advantageous to the player (jackpot game content and game state set to end the jackpot game), the remaining time until the establishment of the setting opportunity to set the high probability state of the normal symbol is established. Information indicating the period (number of remaining special symbol fluctuations) and information for indicating the lottery result of the special symbol lottery (or information to indicate the pre-discrimination result (forecast result) that determined the lottery result of the special symbol lottery in advance) ), and it is preferable to configure so as to be able to execute an effect in which the mode of effect is changed based on the above.

For example, when a special pattern lottery wins a jackpot, a high-probability state of a normal pattern is set when determining the production mode of a production (for example, a ready-to-win production) that is more likely to be executed than when it is not won. With reference to the remaining period (number of remaining special symbol fluctuations) until the setting opportunity is established, and when the number of remaining special symbol fluctuations is small, that is, the first situation in which the high probability state of the normal symbol is set soon, and the remaining When the number of special symbol fluctuations is large, that is, when the high probability state of normal symbols is not set for a while, a different presentation mode is determined, and the first situation is better than the second situation. It is preferable to determine the effect mode of the ready-to-win effect so that the ready-to-win effect can be easily executed in an effect mode that can inform the player that the situation is more advantageous than the situation.

By constructing in this way, it is possible to execute the ready-to-win performance of different performance modes depending on the timing of executing the ready-to-win performance for suggesting the winning of the jackpot and the timing of setting the high-probability state of the normal symbol. Therefore, the ready-to-win effect can be executed in various effects modes, and the effect of the effect can be enhanced. In addition, based on the effect mode of the ready-to-win effect to be executed, the degree of advantage of the timing when the ready-to-win effect is executed (whether it is immediately before the high probability state of the normal symbol is set or not) is made known to the player. Therefore, it is possible to provide a novel performance that makes the player expect that the performance result of the ready-to-win performance being executed will be lost (a performance result indicating that the result of the special symbol lottery is a failure). can.

In addition, when the normal symbol low probability state is set and the special symbol lottery is executed 100 times without winning the jackpot, the normal symbol high probability state is set. In addition, the high probability state of normal symbols is more likely to be set after the end of the jackpot game when the jackpot is won during the high probability state of the normal symbols than when the jackpot is won during the low probability state of the normal symbols. In the gaming machine configured as above, as a variable effect for showing the result of the special symbol lottery, a specific effect (for example, reach and, as the performance mode of the specific performance, a first performance mode suggesting that the jackpot is won in which a high probability state of normal symbols is set after the end of the jackpot game, and a simple jackpot. A second performance mode suggesting winning can be determined, and the frequency of execution of the specific performance of the first performance mode is determined regardless of the remaining number of special symbol fluctuations until the high probability state of the normal symbol is set. It may be fixed, and the frequency at which the specific effect of the second effect mode is executed may be made lower as the remaining number of special symbol variations until the high probability state of the normal symbol is set decreases.

By configuring in this way, the closer to the number of special symbol fluctuations in which the high probability state of the normal symbol is set, the higher the selection ratio of the first effect mode in the case where the specific effect is executed. When the specific effect is executed in a state close to the number of special symbol fluctuations in which the high probability state of the symbol is set (for example, the number of special symbol fluctuations after the end of the previous jackpot game is between 90 and 99 times) However, it is possible to make the player interested in the performance result of the specific performance without discouraging the player.

In addition, a frequency lottery means for determining the number of execution times of the special symbol variation for establishing the setting opportunity for setting the high probability state of the normal symbol is provided, and the setting opportunity is established based on the lottery result of the frequency lottery means. You may determine the execution frequency of a special design variation. In this case, for example, as the range of the number of executions that can be determined by the number of lottery means, the number of executions of the special symbol variation may be determined to be "0" as the number of executions at which the setting opportunity is most likely to be established.

By configuring in this way, even when a jackpot type in which a low probability state of normal symbols is set is set, substantially the same game state as when a high probability state of normal symbols is set is set. It becomes possible to

In other words, even when the same jackpot type (jackpot type in which a low-probability state of normal symbols is set) is set in a state where the same game state is set, based on the lottery result of the number-of-times lottery means, The game state (probability state of normal symbols) set after the end of the jackpot game (until the first special symbol variation is executed) can be varied.

Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to predict the game state to be set after the end of the jackpot game, and to provide the player with an unexpected game.

In addition, the timing at which the above-mentioned number-of-times lottery means is executed may be appropriately set, for example, it may be the timing at which the big win game ends, and the number-of-times lottery means is executed each time the special symbol variation is executed a predetermined number of times (50 times). It may be configured to be executable. In this case, when the number of executions of the special symbol variation determined as the lottery result of the frequency lottery means has already passed, the normal symbol high probability state is set immediately after the lottery by the frequency lottery means is executed. It should be configured as follows.

In this way, by constructing the number-of-times lottery means to be executable each time the special symbol variation is executed a predetermined number of times (50 times), during the period in which the special symbol variation is executed a plurality of times without winning the jackpot, It is possible to vary the contents of the setting opportunity for setting the high probability state of the normal design (the number of special design fluctuations in which the setting opportunity is established). Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to predict at what timing the high-probability state of the normal symbol is set. In this case, the range of the number of executions of the special symbol variation determined by the lottery must be different based on the number of times the lottery is executed by the lottery means during the period from the end of the jackpot game until the next jackpot is won. More specifically, the higher the number of execution times of the lottery, the easier it is to set the high-probability state of the normal symbol. By constructing in this way, the higher the number of special symbol variations executed between the big wins, the easier it is to set the high probability state of the normal symbols, so that the player's willingness to play is remarkably reduced. can be suppressed.

In addition, in the number-of-times lottery means described above, the lottery for determining the number of times of special symbol fluctuations at which the setting opportunity for setting the high-probability state of the normal symbol is established is executed, but this is not the case. Instead, for example, the contents of the number of lottery means may be configured so as to determine the number of special symbol fluctuations required until the high probability state of the normal symbol is set after the number of times lottery means is executed.

Furthermore, the configuration for executing the number of times lottery means every time the special symbol variation is executed a predetermined number of times (50 times), that is, the number of times lottery means can be executed when a predetermined lottery condition is established based on the execution of the special symbol variation. In the game machine configured as above, instead of the above-mentioned frequency lottery means, a normal pattern high probability lottery means is provided, and when winning the normal pattern high probability lottery means, a high probability state of the normal pattern is set. You can

In addition, another setting opportunity may be provided as a setting opportunity for the high probability state of the normal symbol, for example, the number of times that the result of the special symbol lottery is a specific lottery result other than the jackpot winning (eg, small winning) is provided, and when the measurement result of the measurement means is a predetermined measurement result, a setting opportunity for setting a high probability state of the normal symbol may be established, or the previous big hit When the game result (increase or decrease in the number of paid balls) after the end of the game exceeds a predetermined range (for example, when the degree of decrease in the number of paid balls is extremely large), a setting opportunity for setting a high probability state of normal symbols is established. It can be configured as follows.

Furthermore, the degree of establishment (easiness of establishment) of the setting opportunity for setting the high probability state of the normal symbol may be varied according to the past game results. When the game is biased toward a disadvantageous jackpot, that is, when a game that is disadvantageous to the player continues for a predetermined period of time, the setting opportunity for setting the high probability state of the normal symbol may be easily established. Alternatively, when a game advantageous to the player continues for a predetermined period of time, the setting opportunity for setting the high probability state of the normal symbol may be difficult to be established. By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent a player who has been playing for a long time from continuing to play an excessively disadvantageous game or an excessively advantageous game.

In each embodiment described above, when the time saving end condition is satisfied in a state in which the time saving state (special symbol low probability state, normal symbol high probability state) is set, the normal state (special symbol low probability state , Low probability state of normal symbols) is configured to be set. Then, as the time-saving end condition, a time-saving end condition that is established when the number of times of special symbol variation is executed (performed) a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times) is set.

In addition, the content of the time saving end condition is not limited to this, for example, different time saving end conditions may be set according to the type of special symbol, specifically, the number of times the first special symbol changes is the first number When executed, when the number of fluctuations of the second special symbol is executed the second time, or when the sum of the number of fluctuations of the first special symbol and the number of fluctuations of the second special symbol is executed the third time You may comprise so that time saving end conditions may be materialized by etc.

In addition, when setting the time-saving end condition to be established based on the number of executions of the special symbol variation, various times may be settable as the number of times of special symbol variation for which the time-saving end condition is established. As shown in each embodiment, except when the number of special symbol variations reaches 100 times, the time saving end condition is established when the number of special symbol variations is greater than 100 times (for example, 200 times). Alternatively, it may be configured such that the time-saving end condition is satisfied when the number of times (for example, 50 times) less than 100 times is executed. Furthermore, the content of the time saving end condition may be changed according to the setting opportunity (such as the type of jackpot and the number of special symbol fluctuations) established to set the time saving state. It is preferable to reduce the number of times of special symbol fluctuations in which the time saving end condition is satisfied so that the time saving end condition is more likely to be satisfied when another setting opportunity is satisfied. By configuring in this way, when the time saving state is set, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand at what timing the time saving state ends, and the time saving state is based on which setting opportunity is established. is set to interest the player.

In addition, an element other than the number of executions of the special symbol variation may be used as an element to establish the time saving end condition, for example, the number of times that the result of the special symbol lottery has become a specific lottery result (small hit) is a predetermined number of times. You may comprise so that time saving end conditions may be materialized when it reaches|attains.

In addition, the timing of ending the time saving state based on the establishment of the time saving end condition may be the start timing of the corresponding special symbol variation (lottery), the stop timing of the corresponding special symbol variation, or the corresponding special symbol variation. It may be a specific timing until the special symbol lottery next to the special symbol variation is executed. Furthermore, the time saving state may be terminated at the start timing and end timing of the winning game (jackpot game, small winning game), the start timing and stop timing of normal pattern fluctuation, the start timing and end timing of normal pattern per game You can end the time saving state with .

In this case, even if any of the time-saving end conditions are satisfied, the time-saving state may be configured to end at the same timing, or the time-saving state at different timings according to the type of the time-saving end condition that is satisfied may be configured to end, for example, when the time saving end condition is satisfied based on the number of executions of the special symbol variation, the time saving state is terminated at a predetermined timing related to the special symbol variation, and the special symbol lottery When the time saving end condition is satisfied based on the result (small hit winning etc.), the time saving state is terminated at a predetermined timing related to the winning game (small winning game, big winning game) executed based on the lottery result should be configured to By configuring in this way, the timing of ending the time saving state can be changed according to the type of the satisfied time saving end condition, so that it is possible to make it more difficult to understand how long the time saving state continues.

In each of the above-described embodiments, when the second variable probability state (high probability state of special symbols, low probability state of normal symbols) is set as the gaming state, the number of balls is increased without winning the jackpot. It is configured so that the game is executed with a game property (a game property that can increase the number of balls by small winning games that occur frequently), but the number of balls is increased without winning a big win. By using different game characteristics as possible game characteristics, it may be possible to increase the number of payout balls even in a state in which another game state is set.

For example, the number of prize balls to be paid out when the ball enters the ball entrance (for example, the right first ball entrance 64b2) that makes it easier for the ball to enter when the high probability state of the normal pattern is set By setting a large number of winning balls, it may be possible to increase the number of balls to be paid out without winning a big hit when a high probability state of normal symbols is set. By constructing in this way, the player can play the game aiming at winning the jackpot of the special symbols and the game aiming at winning the winning of the normal symbols in duplicate, so that the player's interest in the game is improved. can do.

Furthermore, in order to make the number of balls to be played out per unit time different between the first game state (time saving state) in which the high probability state of normal symbols is set and the second game state (variable probability state), the normal symbol variation time is set. The length of the period during which the ball can be actually entered into the right first ball entrance 64b2 in the game period of the normal pattern winning game executed when the normal pattern is won is varied. It may be configured to be able to vary the depth, and may be configured to be able to obtain more balls per unit time in the first game state than in the second game state.

In addition, in the state where the high probability state of the normal symbol is set, the high probability state of the normal symbol is set for the gaming machine having the performance that can increase the number of balls released without winning the jackpot. It is preferable to provide the above-described setting opportunity (setting opportunity established based on the number of special symbol fluctuations) as the setting opportunity. As a result, a high probability state of normal symbols is set for a player who is executing a special symbol variation (lottery) for a long time without winning a jackpot in a normal state of low probability of normal symbols. , it is possible to execute a game (relief game) for increasing the number of balls to be put out. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the execution of a game that results in an excessively disadvantageous game result for the player.

As described above, as a configuration that can increase the number of balls by a game that is executed without winning a jackpot in the time saving state (low probability state of special symbols, high probability state of normal symbols), for example, during the time saving state The number of prize balls to be paid out may be equal to or slightly greater (in the range of about 1 to 1.2 times the number of shot balls) with respect to the number of balls to be continuously shot. By configuring in this way, the game specification during the time saving state tends to be long Even in a game machine with a game specification in which a variable time is set, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's willingness to play the game during a time-saving state that continues for a long time.

As mentioned above, although the structure regarding the high probability state of a normal design was demonstrated, you may apply the same content as a structure regarding the high probability state of a special design. In this case, the element corresponding to the normal design of the content described above, may be applied to the configuration of the content changed to the special design. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand at which timing the probability state of the special pattern (low probability state, high probability state) is set, and the interest in the game is improved. can let you Furthermore, the configuration described above may be used for both normal symbols and special symbols.

<About the configuration regarding the high probability state of special symbols>
In each of the above-described embodiments, according to the jackpot type that is set when the jackpot is won in the special pattern lottery, the ratio of setting the high probability state of the special pattern after the jackpot game ends, the jackpot corresponding to the first special pattern Although a configuration is used in which the same ratio is defined in advance for the type and the jackpot type corresponding to the second special pattern, it is not limited to this, for example, the high probability state of the special pattern after the jackpot game ends. A jackpot game is played by passing a ball through a specific area during a jackpot game in a state in which a settable jackpot type is set (a state in which the right to set a high-probability state of special symbols is acquired). A high probability state of special symbols is set after completion, and a big winning game is executed based on the winning of the first special symbol lottery, and a big winning game is executed based on the winning of the second special symbol lottery. The execution ratio of an advantageous jackpot game in which the ball can pass through the specific area during the jackpot game and a disadvantageous jackpot game in which the ball is difficult to pass through the specific area during the jackpot game are made different. may be configured.

By configuring in this way, the ratio of setting the high probability state of the special symbol after the end of the big winning game is the same for the big winning type corresponding to the first special symbol and the big winning type corresponding to the second special symbol. Even if the ratio is stipulated in advance, the ratio of actually setting the high probability state of the special symbol is the case of winning the jackpot in the first special symbol lottery and the case of winning the jackpot in the second special symbol lottery. and can be made different.

In addition, other configurations may be used, for example, a high probability state of special symbols is set after the jackpot game is completed with the jackpot type corresponding to the first special pattern and the jackpot type corresponding to the second special pattern. It may be configured so as to prescribe different ratios. In this case, further, according to the game state (game state at the time of winning) at the time of winning the jackpot, the ratio of setting the high probability state of the special pattern after the jackpot game is set to be different for the same special pattern type. may be configured to be defined in advance.

In addition, a predetermined set lottery can be executed, and based on the result of the set lottery, it is determined whether or not a high probability state of special symbols is set after the jackpot game is finished for each special symbol jackpot type. It may be configured to give information to be used. That is, for a predetermined jackpot type, the type of game state set when the jackpot type is set may be configured to differ according to the game state. In this case, the game status includes, for example, the jackpot winning status within a predetermined period, the number of special symbol variations executed during the jackpot game, the amount of balls the player has won, and the like. When the result is a determination result disadvantageous to the player, it is preferable to set the high probability state of the special symbol more easily than when the determination result is advantageous to the player. As a result, it is possible to suppress the execution of a game that results in an excessively disadvantageous game result for the player.

Similarly, when a jackpot is won in a state in which a high probability state of special symbols is set, the above-described content is also applied to the ratio of setting a low probability state of special symbols after the end of the jackpot game. can be configured as

In each of the above-described embodiments, the low probability state of the special symbol is set after the jackpot game ends according to the jackpot type set when the jackpot is won in the special symbol lottery in the state where the high probability state of the special symbol is set. As a ratio to be played, the jackpot type corresponding to the first special symbol and the jackpot type corresponding to the second special symbol have the same ratio defined in advance. However, it is not limited to this, For example, after the end of the jackpot game, in a state in which a jackpot type capable of setting a high probability state of special symbols is set (a state in which the right to set a high probability state of special symbols is acquired), during the jackpot game a jackpot game configured to set a low-probability state of a special pattern after the jackpot game ends due to the ball not passing through the specific area, and executed based on the jackpot winning of a first special pattern lottery; A jackpot game executed based on the jackpot winning of a special pattern lottery, an advantageous jackpot game capable of passing a ball through a specific area during the jackpot game, and a ball passing through a specific area during the jackpot game. It may be configured such that the execution ratios of the difficult disadvantageous jackpot game and the execution ratio are different.

By configuring in this way, the ratio of setting the low probability state of the special symbol after the end of the big winning game is the same for the big winning type corresponding to the first special symbol and the big winning type corresponding to the second special symbol. Even if the ratio is stipulated in advance, the ratio at which the low probability state of the special pattern is actually set is the case of winning the jackpot in the first special symbol lottery and the case of winning the jackpot in the second special symbol lottery. and can be made different.

In addition, other configurations may be used, for example, the jackpot type corresponding to the first special pattern and the jackpot type corresponding to the second special pattern are selected during the high probability state of the special pattern, and the jackpot game ends. It may be configured so as to predefine by varying the rate at which the low probability state of the special symbol is set later. In this case, furthermore, according to the game state (game state at the time of winning) at the time of winning the jackpot, the rate at which the low probability state of the special pattern is set after the end of the jackpot game is made different for the same special pattern type. may be configured to be defined in advance.

In addition, a predetermined setting lottery can be executed, and based on the result of the setting lottery, it is determined whether or not the low probability state of the special symbol is set after the big winning game is finished for the big winning type of each special symbol. It may be configured to give information to be used. That is, for a predetermined jackpot type, the type of game state set when the jackpot type is set may be configured to differ according to the game state. In this case, the game status includes, for example, the jackpot winning status within a predetermined period, the number of special symbol variations executed during the jackpot game, the amount of balls the player has won, and the like. When the result is a determination result that is advantageous to the player, it is preferable to set the low probability state of the special symbol more easily than when the result is a determination result that is disadvantageous to the player. As a result, it is possible to suppress the execution of a game that results in an excessively advantageous game result for the player.

Furthermore, in each of the above-described embodiments, as the end condition for ending the high probability state of the special symbol, it is configured to be able to set the end condition based on the special symbol lottery jackpot winning, and the high probability state of the special symbol In the case of setting, the high probability state of the special symbol is continued until the next jackpot is won. The configuration used as the time-saving end condition for ending the high-probability state may be used as the end condition for ending the high-probability state of the special symbol.

Specifically, the end condition may be established when the number of special symbol variations after the special symbol high probability state is set reaches a specific number (for example, 150 times). As a result, the high probability state of the special symbols having a high probability of winning the jackpot can be ended without winning the jackpot, so that the game playing the game state in which the high probability state of the special symbols is set. It is possible to motivate a person to play a game so as to win a big win before a termination condition is satisfied.

In addition, the end condition and the time saving end condition described above may be configured to have both the game machine, in this case, the number of executions of the special symbol variation set as the end condition and the time saving end condition are set. It is preferable to configure so that the number of times of execution of the special symbol variation and the number of times of execution are different. By configuring in this way, it is possible to switch the game state each time each end condition is satisfied, so that the player can be provided with a game that does not get boring.

Furthermore, as the special symbol variation frequency set as the end condition, one special symbol variation frequency out of a plurality of variation frequencies including at least a first variation frequency and a second variation frequency different from the first variation frequency. should be configurable. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand the timing at which the end condition is satisfied.

In addition, for a gaming machine configured so that the number of special symbol fluctuations set as the end condition can be varied, when the end condition related to the number of special symbol fluctuations can be set, it can be set as the end condition. Among the special symbol fluctuation frequencies, the first fluctuation frequency is set to a fluctuation frequency smaller than the special symbol fluctuation frequency that satisfies the time saving end condition, and the second fluctuation frequency that is different from the first fluctuation frequency is set to satisfy the time saving end condition. It is preferable to configure so that the number of fluctuations is greater than the number of special symbol fluctuations. By comprising in this way, the conditions satisfied first can be varied among termination conditions and time saving termination conditions according to the termination conditions set.

Therefore, for example, in a situation where the first probability variable state (high probability state of special symbols, high probability state of normal symbols) is set, the game state to be set next is the second probability variable state) (high probability of special symbols State, low probability state of normal design) or time saving state (low probability state of special design, high probability state of normal design) can be changed according to the contents of the set end conditions Therefore, it is possible to play a game that predicts the game state to be set next while keeping the player interested in the content of the set end condition, thereby improving the interest in the game. can.

In this way, in a game machine configured to be able to set different contents as end conditions and time saving end conditions, information for indicating the contents of each condition currently set can be notified to the player. should be configured to be executable. By configuring in this way, it is possible to provide the player with information for predicting the timing at which each condition can be satisfied and the content of each set condition. It is possible to make the user interested in the performance and enhance the performance effect.

As described above, as the termination condition for ending the special symbol high probability state, the termination condition established based on the number of executions of the special symbol variation has been described, but not limited to this, for example, the special symbol high probability state The lottery (falling lottery) for shifting to a low probability state is configured to be executable separately from the special pattern jackpot lottery (special pattern lottery), and the end condition is established when the falling lottery is won. can be configured to Even in this case, the winning probability of the fall lottery and the number of times of execution of the fall lottery during the period in which the special pattern lottery is executed once can be changed so that the end condition during the high probability state of the special pattern can be determined. You may comprise so that the easiness of establishment may be made different. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand the timing at which the end condition is established after the high probability state of the special symbol is set.

<Regarding the function (limit function) that sets the upper limit for the period in which the high probability state can be set continuously>
A high-probability state and a low-probability state can be set as the probability state of the special pattern, and a high-probability state and a low-probability state can be set as the probability state of the normal pattern, and the degree of advantage is different according to the set probability state. In a game machine capable of setting a state, an upper limit is set for the number of times a probability state (for example, a high probability state) advantageous to a player is continuously set, and when the upper limit is reached, the player is favored. A game state advantageous to a player is provided by providing a function (limit function) for forcibly setting a probability state (e.g., high probability state) to a probability state (e.g., low probability state) more disadvantageous than the probability state. is excessively set, and execution of a game that is excessively advantageous to the player can be suppressed.

In a gaming machine having such a limit function, the conditions for activating the limit function may be varied according to the established limit setting conditions. Based on the type, any activation condition is selected and set from a first activation condition under which the limit function is likely to be activated and a second activation condition under which activation is more difficult than the first activation condition. You can

Specifically, a gaming machine with a probability variable limit function that sets an upper limit on the number of times that the high probability state of special symbols is set continuously, and forcibly sets the low probability state of special symbols when the upper limit is reached. , the upper limit until the probability variable limit function is activated can be set differently depending on the jackpot type, and when the first jackpot type is set, the upper limit is "5 times", and the first jackpot type and When a different second jackpot type is set, it is preferable that the activation condition can be set so that the upper limit is "three times".

By configuring in this way, according to the value set as the activation condition, the length of the advantageous game period in which the game can be continued and executed in a game state advantageous to the player is determined based on the set jackpot type. can be different.

In the above example, the limit function (probability variable limit function) for the high probability state of the special design was explained, but without limiting to this, the limit function (time saving limit function) for the high probability state of the normal design The contents described above may be applied, or the contents below may be combined and applied to each limit. Furthermore, as the symbol type probability state, for a gaming machine with a game specification in which the low probability state can be a game state more advantageous to the player than the high probability state, the number of times the low probability state is set continuously On the other hand, a limit function may be provided that sets an upper limit and forcibly sets a high probability state when the upper limit is reached.

In addition, in the above-described example, the above-described limit function is used for the purpose of suppressing the execution of a game that is excessively advantageous to the player, but the limit function may be used for other purposes, such as An upper limit is set for the number of times a game state (low-probability state) disadvantageous to the player is set in succession, and when the upper limit is reached, a game state (high-probability state) advantageous to the player is forcibly set. A limit function may be provided. By configuring in this way, it is possible to suppress the execution of a game that is excessively disadvantageous to the player.

<Regarding a configuration that can execute a winning game based on the ball passing through a specific area>
In each of the above-described embodiments, when the special symbol lottery wins the jackpot, the jackpot game can be executed. Another execution opportunity may be provided as an execution opportunity for a jackpot game that is advantageous to the player. A variable means that is opened in a variable pattern that is variable between a first state and a second state different from the first state when a condition is established, and the variable means is variable to the first state. a second ball entering means through which the ball can enter more easily than when the ball is changed to the second state, a specific area through which the ball entering the second ball entering means can pass, and the specific area and a jackpot game executing means capable of executing a jackpot game based on the ball passing through a specific area, that is, a constitution in which a trigger for executing the jackpot game is established based on the ball passing through the specific area. A gaming machine (so-called two-type specification) may be used. With this configuration, whether or not the big win game is executed is determined by the behavior of the ball entering the second ball entering means, so that the player can enjoy the behavior of the ball. can be done.

In such a two-type game machine, the operation condition may be established based on the ball entering the ball entering means described above, or the ball entering the ball entering means may be configured to satisfy the operating condition. An operation lottery may be executed based on the entry of the ball, and the operation condition may be established when the operation lottery is won. In the former case, the ball has entered the ball entry means. Therefore, it is possible to easily make the player interested in the behavior of the ball. On the other hand, in the latter case, even if a ball enters the ball-entering means, the operation condition is not satisfied unless the ball is won in the operation lottery, so the frequency of balls entering the ball-entering means can be increased.

Furthermore, in the gaming machine with the above-mentioned two types of specifications, as the flow path for the ball that enters the second ball entering means, there is a first flow path that can pass through the specific area, and a specific area that is wider than the first flow path. A plurality of flow paths including at least a second flow path that is difficult to pass through are provided, and a distribution means capable of distributing a ball that has entered the second ball entering means to any of the plurality of flow paths is provided. Alternatively, the rate at which a ball hit by the second ball-entering means passes through the specific area may be varied according to the sorting situation of the sorting means.

With this configuration, the degree of establishment of the trigger for the execution of the jackpot game can be varied depending on the distribution situation of the distribution means. You can make them interested in how they arrive at the means.

As described above, in a gaming machine having a configuration capable of varying the establishment degree of the execution opportunity of the jackpot game depending on the distribution status of the distribution means, the pachinko machine 10 is provided as the distribution operation contents of the distribution means. It may be configured so that a constant operation is always executed after the power is turned on, or the entry of the ball into the ball entry means, the establishment of the operating condition, or the entry of the ball into the second ball entry means. Based on which of the spheres, it may be configured such that a constant action is performed at all times.

Furthermore, the content of the sorting operation of the sorting means may be varied according to the establishment conditions. For example, the first sorting operation in which the ball is likely to pass through the specific area according to the winning type in the case of winning the motion lottery. One of a plurality of distribution operation contents including at least a content and a second distribution operation content in which the ball is more difficult to pass through a specific area than the first distribution operation content is determined, and distribution is performed. You may comprise so that a means may be operated.

In addition, a game machine configured so that a chance to execute a big win game can be established both when a special pattern lottery wins a big win and when a ball passes through a specific area (so-called one type and two types mixed specifications). , the execution period of the jackpot game being executed can be extended by passing the ball through a specific area during the jackpot game executed based on the jackpot winning in the special pattern lottery, in other words, the special pattern lottery. A ball may pass through a specific area during a jackpot game executed based on winning a jackpot in , so that the jackpot game being executed can be continued without ending midway. That is, if the ball does not pass through the specific area during the jackpot game that is executed based on the jackpot winning in the special symbol lottery, the jackpot game that is being executed is not extended (forcibly ended). It can be configured as follows.

By configuring in this way, the player can be interested in both the result of the special symbol lottery and the behavior of the ball flowing down toward the specific area.

<Regarding the configuration for changing the falling direction of the ball>
The nail member used in each of the above-described embodiments, that is, as a configuration for changing the flow direction (drop direction) of the ball flowing down the game area formed on the game board 13 configured in the pachinko machine 10, that is, In addition to the member that can change the downward direction of the ball within a range that does not oppose the direction of gravity, a means for moving the ball in a direction different from the direction of gravity (for example, upward direction) is provided. For example, by using an electric drive source or using the movement energy of another ball, the ball is moved in a direction different from the direction of gravity (for example, an upward direction) (for example, an upward direction). It is also possible to provide a moving means for

By configuring in this way, the movement direction of the ball flowing down the game area can be set in various directions including directions different from the direction of gravity. It can provide flexible ball movement. In addition, it is possible to move (raise) the ball that has reached the vicinity of the most downstream side of the game area, that is, the ball that has not entered the ball entrance where a privilege is given to the player, to the upstream side of the game area. Since it is possible, the player can have expectations for the behavior of one ball until the end.

Furthermore, for example, in a gaming machine configured so that a gate member through which a ball can pass is provided in the game area and a predetermined privilege can be granted when the ball passes through the gate member, the ball that has passed through the gate member reaches It is preferable that moving means be provided in the area to be obtained so that the balls are ejected above the gate member by the moving means. By configuring in this way, it is possible to provide a novel game property in which a plurality of benefits can be given to the player with one ball.

Further, the moving means described above may be provided in an area (for example, an internal area of the winning device that is opened during a winning game) in which a ball is likely to enter during a winning game (big winning game, small winning game). With this configuration, it is possible to raise the ball inside the prize-winning device, so that, for example, a privilege advantageous to the player can be provided by allowing the ball to pass through a specific area during a specific round of a jackpot game. In a game machine configured to be awarded, balls that have won a prize in a prize winning device in a round prior to a specific round are raised by a moving means to stay for a predetermined period, and the held balls are discharged. Depending on the timing, it is possible to make it possible to pass through a specific area during a specific round.

Thus, a moving means may be used to cause the sphere to stay within a specific area for a predetermined period of time. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to predict the timing at which the ball will be ejected from within the specific area.

<Regarding the structure that acts on the entry of the ball into the ball entrance to open another ball entrance>
A first operating port into which a game ball can enter and a first state in which the game ball enters the first operating port to facilitate entry of the game ball into the first operating port. A first operating member that operates is provided, and the first operating member acts on the fact that a predetermined number (for example, two) of game balls enter the first operating port, and the first state than the first state It is constructed so as to operate to a second state in which it is difficult for a game ball to enter the first operating hole.

Acting on the fact that the game ball entering the first working hole enters the specific area, the game ball enters a third state in which the game ball can enter the second working hole different from the first working hole. A second actuating member is provided for actuating with. This second operating member is a fourth state in which, when a predetermined number (for example, one) of game balls enter the second operating port, the game ball is less likely to enter the second operating port than in the third state. Configure to operate into a state.

With this configuration, the second operating member is operated to the third state based on the game ball entering the first operating port, thereby allowing the game ball to enter the second operating port. In this state, the second operating member operates to the fourth state by inserting one game ball into the second operating port. Then, by entering the game ball again into the first operating port in which the first operating member is in the first state, the second operating member is operated again to the third state, and the game is played to the second operating port. It is possible to enter the ball.

More specifically, when the game ball is entered into the first operating port in a state where the first operating member is in the second state, up to four balls are operated through the operating port (first operating port, first 2 operation opening). Furthermore, the game ball entered into the second operating port executes the first winning lottery (lottery of the first normal symbol) based on the entering ball into the second specific area, and the result of the first winning lottery. is a winning (probability of winning about 1/2), the first normal electric accessory capable of regulating the entry of the game ball into the first variable ball entry means is set to the first closing condition (for example, 5.8 The opening operation (changes the entry of game balls into the first variable entry means to a permissible state) is performed until seconds elapse or four wins are established. Then, based on the fact that the game ball that has entered the first variable ball entry means has entered the third specific area that can be entered, a second winning lottery (second normal symbol lottery) is executed, and a second lottery is performed. If the result of the lottery is winning (probability of winning about 1/1), the second normal electric accessory that can regulate the entry of the game ball to the second variable ball entry means is set to the second closing condition (for example, , 5.8 seconds have passed, or until 4 wins) are established, the opening operation (changes the entry of the game ball into the second variable entry means to an allowable state). Then, based on the fact that the game ball that has entered the second variable ball entry means has entered the fourth specific area that can be entered, a third winning lottery (third normal symbol lottery) is executed, and a third lottery is executed. If the result of the lottery is winning (probability of winning about 1/1), the third ordinary electric accessory capable of regulating the entry of the game ball into the third variable ball entry means is set to the third closing condition (for example , 5.8 seconds have passed, or 10 prizes have been won.

In this case, the maximum winning number of game balls that can be entered into each operating port based on the entry (winning) of the game ball into the first operating port is In the winning number "2", the maximum winning number to the second operating opening that can be won every time the game ball enters the first operating opening with respect to the maximum winning number (2) to the first operating opening It may be calculated as "4" by adding the value "2" multiplied by (1), or a winning game that is executed based on entering (winning) the game ball to the first operation opening The number of game balls that can be entered into each operation port during the period until (a winning game using a plurality of normal electric accessories) is executed is the maximum number of winnings, that is, one winning game is executed. It may be calculated as the number of winnings required until the start (“2” obtained by adding the number of balls entering the first operating port “1” to the number of balls entering the second operating port “1”). Then, every time a game ball enters the first operating port for the maximum winning number to the first operating port, the winning is possible to the second operating port The maximum winning number may be obtained by adding the value obtained by dividing the maximum winning number.

Then, when the maximum winning number reaches a predetermined limit number, the winning game is ended, and based on the satisfaction of the switching condition, it is calculated when determining whether or not the limit number has been reached. The value of the maximum number of prizes to be won may be switched and referred to among the values (maximum number of prizes) calculated by the various calculation formulas described above. If the switched value has not reached the limit number, the winning game may be extended until the maximum winning number after switching reaches the limit number.

In other words, using various calculation formulas that can vary the value after calculation, when the game ball enters the first operating hole, it is possible to win a plurality of operating holes in a series of game flows. The maximum number of prizes to be awarded to each operating port is stipulated so that the number of possible game balls is limited, and the calculation formula for specifying the maximum number of prizes is changed according to the conditions and specified. It may be configured to execute a winning game based on the maximum number of winnings to each operation port defined corresponding to the calculation formula.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to vary the contents of the winning game (total number of wins to each operation port and each variable ball entry means) according to the specified calculation formula.

Also, the value of the maximum number of prizes described above may be configured to vary according to conditions. When the number is changed to "3" and a second condition different from the first condition is satisfied, the maximum number of winnings to the first operation port is changed from "2" to "1". Also good. By configuring in this way, depending on the conditions to be established, the winning game executed when the game ball enters the first operation opening (each operation opening, the game ball to the variable ball entry means Since the content of the game to enter the ball can be changed, an advantageous establishment condition (a establishment condition that sets the total number of prize balls given during the winning game to be large) that is advantageous to the player is established. , and a game can be played while expecting that a winning game will be executed in a state where an advantageous establishment condition is established.

<Regarding game machines that can set multiple levels of settings>
It may be implemented as a pachinko machine in which a plurality of combinations of probabilities (commonly referred to as settings) relating to the jackpot lottery are provided in a plurality of stages and the settings can be changed on the gaming parlor side.

In addition, as a pachinko machine with multiple stages of settings, the combination of jackpot probability (a combination of the jackpot probability in the low probability state and the jackpot probability in the variable probability state) can be set in multiple stages (for example, 6 stages) can be set as a representative example, but is not limited to this. In place of or in addition to combinations of jackpot probabilities, for example, a pachinko machine capable of varying the ratio of each jackpot pattern (each jackpot type) determined in the event of a jackpot according to settings. may That is, depending on the setting, the rate at which a jackpot type advantageous to the player is determined may be varied, or the rate at which a jackpot type disadvantageous to the player is determined may be varied. More specifically, for example, the ratio of determining the jackpot with a large number of rounds (eg, 16 rounds) is varied according to the setting, or the jackpot with a small number of rounds (eg, 2 rounds) is determined. A configuration may be adopted in which the degree of advantage for each setting can be varied by varying the ratio of each setting according to the setting. In addition, for example, the ratio of determining the jackpot with a large number of times of time reduction (for example, 100 times) after the end of the jackpot is varied according to the setting, or the jackpot with a small number of times of time reduction (for example, 0 times) may be varied according to the setting. Furthermore, after the end of the jackpot, the rate at which the jackpot that transitions to (or easily transitions to) an advantageous game state (eg, variable probability state) is determined can be varied according to settings, or a disadvantageous game state (eg, normal state) ) (or easy to shift), the ratio of determining the jackpot may be varied according to the setting. Moreover, it is good also as a structure which provides a big-hit classification in which the ratio determined only by specific setting increases significantly (almost never determined by other settings). Specifically, for example, six settings from 1 to 6 can be set, and setting 6 is the most advantageous setting. In setting 6, a 6-round jackpot is determined at a rate of 2% when a jackpot is achieved, whereas in other settings, a 6-round jackpot is determined only at a rate of 0.01%. may be configured. By constructing in this way, when the jackpot ends in 6 rounds, the possibility that the setting is the most advantageous setting 6 is extremely high, so the player is made to play the game paying attention to the number of rounds of the jackpot. be able to. Alternatively or in addition, for example, in setting 6, the ratio of the jackpot type in which 66 times of time saving is given after the jackpot ends may be higher than other settings. By configuring in this way, it is possible to play a game while paying attention to the number of times the time saving state ends. Alternatively, or in addition to these, for example, a jackpot type in which the jackpot (or accessories inside the jackpot, etc.) operates in an operation pattern different from other jackpot types during execution of the jackpot game. It may be configured such that the jackpot type is easily determined by a specific setting (the rate of determination is increased). In addition, in the case of varying the combination of the probability of the big win according to the setting, in the low probability state, the setting is more advantageous to the player, the higher the probability of the big win, while in the variable probability state, the setting is disadvantageous to the player. It is good also as a structure which makes a jackpot probability high as it is. In particular, in the variable probability state, the more the number of special symbol lotteries increases, the easier it is to increase the number of possession balls (the number of prize balls paid out tends to be greater than the number of game balls fired). Effective in game machines. More specifically, for example, it is a configuration that continues until the next big hit is won in the variable probability state, and by applying it to a game machine of the type that becomes a small hit with a high probability in the variable probability state, the high setting advantage You can increase your sexuality. That is, if the probability of winning a big win in the variable probability state is low, the number of lottery times until the next big win tends to increase, so the chances of getting a small win and winning balls also increase. Therefore, when the variable probability state occurs, it becomes easier for the player to win more prize balls until the next big win, which is advantageous for the player.

In addition, in a pachinko machine having multiple stages of setting values, by changing the set value, the probability of winning by special symbol lottery (big win, small win, etc.) can be changed. The configuration may be used, for example, the first game state (low probability state of special symbols) in which the first probability is set as the probability of winning in the special symbol lottery, and the probability of winning is higher than the first probability. A gaming machine capable of setting a second game state in which a high second probability is set (high probability state of special symbols), and a specific period as a period in which the second game state continues, for example, a special symbol lottery When the period until the number of executions reaches a predetermined number of times or the period until winning a predetermined end lottery (so-called fall lottery) is set, the length of the specific period is set according to the set value. It may be configured to be different, for example, the second game state continues when a set value that is advantageous to the player is set rather than when a set value that is disadvantageous to the player is set. It may be configured such that the period is likely to be longer.

By configuring in this way, even if the winning probability of the special symbol lottery is not changed according to the set value, by varying the length of the second game state to continue, the set value can be achieved. Accordingly, it is possible to vary the frequency of winning by the special symbol lottery.

In the above example, in a pachinko machine provided with set values in a plurality of stages, set values that are advantageous to the player and set values that are disadvantageous to the player can be set regardless of the game situation. Although shown, without being limited to this, various game states set in the pachinko machine 10 (for example, among a plurality of types of game states set by a combination of a special symbol probability state and a normal symbol probability state, A setting that is advantageous to the player in at least one of the game situation in which a specific game state is set, the game situation in which a big winning game is executed, and the game situation in which a small winning game is executed. A value and a setting value that is disadvantageous to the player may be configured to be settable, and when a specific setting value is set, a predetermined setting value other than the specific setting value is set. It is more advantageous for the player in a specific game situation than when a specific setting value is set, and when a predetermined setting value other than a specific setting value is set, it is more advantageous than when a specific setting value is set. The contents of the game set corresponding to each setting value may be defined so as to be advantageous to the player in a predetermined game situation other than the game situation.

By configuring in this way, absolute advantages and disadvantages are eliminated for the set values, and it is possible to switch the relative advantage of each set value according to the game situation to be executed. Therefore, it is possible to motivate the player to play the game regardless of what setting values are set.

In addition, it is possible to allow a player who has grasped the set value to play while expecting a game in a game situation in which the set value is relatively advantageous over other set values. can. That is, it is possible to set a different game situation as the game situation desired by the player according to the set value. Therefore, it is possible to provide a game that does not cause the player to quickly become bored.

In the above-described example, the configuration aimed at varying the degree of advantage of the player according to the set value has been described, but the configuration is such that multiple levels of set values are provided for other purposes. For example, without changing the degree of advantage to the player, the game process until the privilege corresponding to the degree of advantage is given to the player may be configured to differ according to the set value. For example, in a pachinko machine 10 having different jackpot probabilities of special symbols according to set values, the probability (expectation) of winning a jackpot within a predetermined period does not differ (not greatly differ) depending on the set values. In addition, the length of the predetermined period may be varied according to the set value, for example, when the set value "1" is set, during the specific period until the special symbol lottery is executed 10 times, A game in which the probability of winning a jackpot in a special symbol lottery is 1/10 (probability of winning a jackpot during a specific period is about 65%) can be executed, and when the set value "6" is set, the special symbol is executed. A game in which the probability of winning a jackpot in a special symbol lottery is 1/9 (probability of winning a jackpot during a specific period is about 65%) can be executed during a specified period until the lottery is executed 9 times. good.

By configuring in this way, even if the special symbol lottery jackpot probability is changed according to each set value, it is possible to change only the game content without significantly changing the degree of advantage to the player. becomes. Therefore, the player can be allowed to play various games.

Moreover, it is preferable to configure (change) the above-described set values in multiple stages as part of the process (initial setting process) based on power-on of the pachinko machine. With this configuration, it is possible to prevent the setting values from being changed while the pachinko machine is powered on. Unfair play can be made difficult.

It should be noted that other timing may be used as the timing at which the set value can be set (changed). The value obtained by subtracting the number of balls used in the game) is changed from the currently set value to a different set value (a set value that is disadvantageous to the player) based on the payout exceeding the upper limit number, Based on the fact that the number of balls paid out (the number of balls paid out from the pachinko machine minus the number of balls used in the game on the pachinko machine) did not exceed the minimum number, It may be configured to change to a different set value (a set value that is advantageous to the player). By configuring in this way, it is possible to suppress the execution of a game that is excessively advantageous or disadvantageous to the player.

In each of the above embodiments, each time the value (AN) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203b in the main controller 110 is updated (that is, each time it increases or decreases), the reserved ball number command is issued. Although the case of transmitting from the main controller 110 to the audio lamp controller 113 has been described, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, only when the value (AN) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203b in the main controller 110 increases, the main controller 110 transmits the reserved number command to the sound lamp controller 113. In addition, in the voice lamp control device 113, when receiving the variation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110, it is configured to decrease the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223b2 by one. As a result, the number of times master controller 110 transmits a hold number command to audible lamp controller 113 and the number of times audible lamp controller 113 receives a hold number command can be reduced. The control load of the audio ramp control device 113 can be reduced.

In each of the above-described embodiments, the number of winnings in the first ball entrance 64 is suspended up to four times, and the passage through the through gate 67 is suspended up to four times, but the maximum number of suspended balls is limited to this. However, the number of times may be set to 3 times or less or 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). In addition, the number of pending balls in the variable display based on the winning to the first ball entrance 64 is displayed numerically in a part of the third pattern display device 81, or the area divided into four is displayed by the number of pending balls. It may be displayed in a different manner (for example, color or lighting pattern), and a light-emitting member such as a lamp is provided separately from the first pattern display device 37, and the number of reserved balls is notified by the light-emitting member. can be configured to

Further, as shown in each of the above embodiments, the variable display, which is a type of dynamic display, is not limited to vertically scrolling the pattern as identification information on the display screen of the third pattern display device 81. The pattern may be moved and displayed in the vertical direction or along a predetermined path such as an AL shape. Further, the dynamic display of the identification information is not limited to the variable display of the pattern. It also includes the production display etc. In this case, one or more characters are used as the third symbol. Further, it is difficult for the player to distinguish between the display mode of the dynamic display of the third symbol for indicating the lottery result of the special symbol and the display mode of the dynamic display of the decorative symbol for indicating the lottery result of the normal symbol. For example, each display mode may be set using common image data that the display control device 114 has.

In each of the above-described embodiments, the third symbol display for showing the lottery result of each symbol to the player is performed by one display means (third symbol display device 81), but other configurations are used. For example, among the third symbols, different display means may be provided for displaying the main symbol to be displayed in an emphasized manner to the player and for displaying the sub-symbols. Moreover, as the configuration of the display means, a configuration other than the liquid crystal display may be used.

In each of the above-described embodiments, the target area (game area) of the game board 13 is configured to be different according to the game state. state) and a game state (normal state) that is more disadvantageous to the player than the time-saving state, a left-handed game aiming at the left area of the game board 13 may be executed. . Also, a left-handed game may be executed during the time-saving state, and a right-handed game may be executed during the normal state.

In each of the above-described embodiments, the frame button 22 is used as the operation means that can be operated by the player. may be used, and an operation means configured in a lever shape that can determine whether the player has operated it by tilting it left or right or front and back, or can determine whether it has been operated by the player touching or approaching it. A touch sensor type operating means, or a wireless operating means capable of determining the operation by transmitting a predetermined radio wave may be used. In addition, the frame button 22 is electrically connected to the sound lamp control device 113, and the frame button 22 is used to change the performance mode of the performance executed by the pachinko machine 10 based on the player's operation. However, it is only necessary to be able to change the effect mode of various effects executed by the pachinko machine 10 based on the player's operation of the frame button 22. For example, the frame button 22 is displayed. It may be electrically connected to the control device 114, or an output signal from the operation means (the frame button 22) can be input, and the display control device 114, the sound lamp control device 113, the sound output device 226, the lamp display A controller capable of generating an effect setting signal that can be output to the device 227 may be provided. By configuring in this way, even when a plurality of operation means for effect are provided, the output signals (operation signals) output from the operation means for effect can be centrally managed. It is possible to smoothly set the effect mode for the player's operation of the means.

Distribution (percentage) of jackpot types, number of time reductions and variable number of times after the jackpot (ST number), probability of jackpots and small hits, probability of normal pattern hits, number of prize balls for winning prizes in each winning port, and variable limit Numerical values (probabilities) relating to game specifications such as the number of times are not limited to the numerical values in the above embodiments, and can be changed arbitrarily without changing the gist of the embodiments. By increasing the ratio of advantageous jackpot types, increasing the number of times of time saving and ST times, increasing the probability of jackpots and small hits, increasing the number of prize balls, and increasing the number of variable limits. It is possible to increase the degree of advantage of the person. Also, on the contrary, lower the ratio of advantageous jackpot types, reduce the number of time saving and ST times, lower the probability of jackpots and small hits, reduce the number of prize balls, and reduce the number of variable limits. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the player from becoming excessively advantageous.

The present invention may be implemented in a pachinko machine or the like of a type different from the above embodiments. For example, once the jackpot hits, the expected value of the jackpot is increased until the jackpot state occurs multiple times (for example, 2 times, 3 times) including the pachinko machine (commonly known as 2 times rights product, 3 times rights product) may be implemented as Further, after the big winning pattern is displayed, the pachinko machine may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game in which a predetermined game value is given to the player under the condition that the ball enters a predetermined area. Also, a pachinko machine having a winning device having a special area such as an AV zone and entering a special game state as a necessary condition for winning a ball in the special area may be implemented. In addition, it may be implemented as a pachinko machine in which a plurality of combinations of probabilities (commonly referred to as settings) relating to the jackpot lottery are provided, and the settings can be changed on the gaming parlor side. Furthermore, in addition to pachinko machines, various game machines such as arepachi, mammoth, slot machines, and so-called game machines in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are combined may be implemented.

In addition, as a pachinko machine with multiple stages of settings, the combination of jackpot probability (a combination of the jackpot probability in the low probability state and the jackpot probability in the variable probability state) can be set in multiple stages (for example, 6 stages) can be set as a representative example, but is not limited to this. In place of or in addition to combinations of jackpot probabilities, for example, a pachinko machine capable of varying the ratio of each jackpot pattern (each jackpot type) determined in the event of a jackpot according to settings. may That is, depending on the setting, the rate at which a jackpot type advantageous to the player is determined may be varied, or the rate at which a jackpot type disadvantageous to the player is determined may be varied. More specifically, for example, the ratio of determining the jackpot with a large number of rounds (eg, 16 rounds) is varied according to the setting, or the jackpot with a small number of rounds (eg, 2 rounds) is determined. A configuration may be adopted in which the degree of advantage for each setting can be varied by varying the ratio of each setting according to the setting. In addition, for example, the ratio of determining the jackpot with a large number of times of time reduction (for example, 100 times) after the end of the jackpot is varied according to the setting, or the jackpot with a small number of times of time reduction (for example, 0 times) may be varied according to the setting. Furthermore, after the end of the jackpot, the rate at which the jackpot that transitions to (or easily transitions to) an advantageous game state (eg, variable probability state) is determined can be varied according to settings, or a disadvantageous game state (eg, normal state) ) (or easy to shift), the ratio of determining the jackpot may be varied according to the setting. Moreover, it is good also as a structure which provides a big-hit classification in which the ratio determined only by specific setting increases significantly (almost never determined by other settings). Specifically, for example, six settings from 1 to 6 can be set, and setting 6 is the most advantageous setting. In setting 6, a 6-round jackpot is determined at a rate of 2% when a jackpot is achieved, whereas in other settings, a 6-round jackpot is determined only at a rate of 0.01%. may be configured. By constructing in this way, when the jackpot ends in 6 rounds, the possibility that the setting is the most advantageous setting 6 is extremely high, so the player is made to play the game paying attention to the number of rounds of the jackpot. be able to. Alternatively or in addition, for example, in setting 6, the ratio of the jackpot type in which 66 times of time saving is given after the jackpot ends may be higher than other settings. By configuring in this way, it is possible to play a game while paying attention to the number of times the time saving state ends. Alternatively, or in addition to these, for example, a jackpot type in which the jackpot (or accessories inside the jackpot, etc.) operates in an operation pattern different from other jackpot types during execution of the jackpot game. It may be configured such that the jackpot type is easily determined by a specific setting (the rate of determination is increased). In addition, in the case of varying the combination of the probability of the big win according to the setting, in the low probability state, the setting is more advantageous to the player, the higher the probability of the big win, while in the variable probability state, the setting is disadvantageous to the player. It is good also as a structure which makes a jackpot probability high as it is. In particular, in the variable probability state, the more the number of special symbol lotteries increases, the easier it is to increase the number of possession balls (the number of prize balls paid out tends to be greater than the number of game balls fired). Effective in gaming machines. More specifically, for example, it is a configuration that continues until the next big hit is won in the variable probability state, and by applying it to a game machine of the type that becomes a small hit with a high probability in the variable probability state, the high setting advantage You can increase your sexuality. That is, if the probability of winning a big win in the variable probability state is low, the number of lottery times until the next big win tends to increase, so the chances of getting a small win and winning balls also increase. Therefore, when the variable probability state occurs, it becomes easier for the player to win more prize balls until the next big win, which is advantageous for the player.

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 10 that can be set in multiple stages, the type of the variation pattern selection table 202b that is referred to when selecting the variation pattern by the main controller 110 based on the set value that has been set It is made different, the type of the variation pattern selection table 222a referred to when selecting the variation pattern (variation effect) of the third symbol in the sound lamp control device 113 is different, or the detailed effect executed as the variation effect It is preferable to configure so that the types of various selection tables referred to when selecting a mode are made different. By configuring in this way, it is possible to predict the set value set in the pachinko machine 10 according to the content of the variable performance to be executed, so that the variable performance that the player is interested in is executed. be able to.

In addition, when the data table referred to when selecting the effect mode of the operation effect is changed based on the setting value set in the pachinko machine 10, the set setting is used as the effect mode of the operation effect. The effect mode of "suggest setting" for suggesting a value is defined so that the selection ratio is the same in each data table used for each setting value, and the effect mode of "suggest setting" is executed. It is preferable to configure the content of the operation presentation to be different according to each set value, and to vary the selection ratio of other presentation modes according to the set value. By configuring in this way, when the operation effect of "setting suggestion" directly suggesting the setting value is executed, the content of the effect is displayed, and when the other operation effect is executed, each effect mode is displayed. Since it is possible to predict the setting value set in the pachinko machine 10 by comprehensively grasping the selection ratio of the pachinko machine 10, the player is interested in various operation effects to be executed. be able to.

Furthermore, as described above, the selection ratio of each effect mode in the operation effect is configured to vary according to the set game state. In a pachinko machine 10 in which set values can be set in six stages up to setting "6" which is advantageous to a player, the first game is set to the settings "1" to "3" and is advantageous to the player. The selection ratio of the operation effect selected when the state (variable probability state) is set, the setting "4" to "6" are set, and the second game state is more disadvantageous to the player than the first game state The pachinko machine 10 having setting values disadvantageous to the player is played by making the selection ratio of the operation presentation to be selected when the 2-game state (time-saving state) is set to be the same. The player can be made to think that the setting value that is advantageous to the player is set.

In this way, the setting value set in the pachinko machine 10 and other game conditions (lottery result of jackpot, set game condition, selected variation pattern (variation time)) By configuring the selection ratio to be variable, it is possible to prevent the setting values set in the pachinko machine 10 from being easily discriminated by the player.

In slot machines, for example, when a coin is inserted to determine a valid symbol line, the symbol is changed by operating an operation lever, and the symbol is stopped and fixed by operating a stop button. It is. Therefore, the basic concept of a slot machine is "provided with a display device that confirms and displays identification information after variably displaying an identification information string consisting of a plurality of pieces of identification information, The variable display of the identification information is started, and the variable display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the operation means for stopping (for example, a stop button) or after a predetermined period of time has passed, and the stop is displayed. It is a slot machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value under the condition that the combination of time identification information is a specific one. In this case, the game medium is represented by coins, medals, etc. Examples include:

Further, as a specific example of a game machine that combines a pachinko machine and a slot machine, it is equipped with a display device for displaying a symbol sequence consisting of a plurality of symbols in a variable manner and then confirming and displaying the symbols, and is equipped with a ball launching handle. There are things that are not. In this case, after throwing a predetermined amount of balls based on a predetermined operation (button operation), for example, the pattern starts to change due to the operation of the control lever, for example, due to the operation of the stop button, or a predetermined As time elapses, the fluctuation of the symbols is stopped, and a special game is generated in which a predetermined game value is given to the player under the condition that the determined symbols at the time of the stop are so-called jackpot symbols, and the player is given a special game. A lot of balls are paid out to the tray at the bottom. If such a game machine is used instead of a slot machine, only the balls can be treated as game value in the game hall. It is possible to solve the problems such as the burden on the equipment and the restrictions on the installation location of the game machine due to separate handling of medals and balls.

All or part of each of the above-described embodiments may be combined.

In the following, concepts of various inventions included in the above-described embodiments in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention are shown.

<Characteristic AA Group> (Configuration that makes it easy to intentionally generate over-winning)
A specific area into which a game ball can enter, a privilege granting means for imparting a predetermined privilege based on the fact that the game ball has entered the specific area, a specific channel in which the game ball can flow down, and its specification A game ball flowing down at least a predetermined section in a flow path has a first position at which it is more likely to be guided to the specific area than to pass the predetermined section, and a first position to pass the predetermined section rather than being guided to the specific area. A variable means that can be changed to a second position that becomes easier, an operation means that can be operated by the player, and when the operation content for the operation means becomes the first operation content, the game ball is moved to the specific flow path. When the game ball is shot at a first shooting speed that makes it easier to reach, and a second operation content different from the first operation content is obtained, a second shooting speed different from the first shooting speed A shooting means capable of shooting a game ball at a speed, and when the game ball is shot at the second shooting speed by the shooting means, the game ball is shot at the first shooting speed. determining means for determining whether or not a specific condition has been satisfied; and when the determining means has determined that the specific condition has been satisfied, the variable means moves from the second position to the first position for a predetermined period of time. and variable control means for performing variable control.

Here, some gaming machines such as pachinko machines shift to a win state when the result of a lottery performed based on the winning of a game ball into a start winning hole is a win. Among such gaming machines, there are some that are provided with a plurality of types of winning types with different numbers of rounds, and some that aim to improve interest during winning by varying the game value that can be obtained (for example, , Japanese Patent No. 2514417).

However, in the above-described conventional gaming machine, since the game value that can be obtained is almost constant for each winning type, it becomes like an operation to obtain the game value according to the winning type, and the game is played during the winning state. was sometimes monotonous. That is, there is a problem that it becomes difficult to improve the interest of the player in the game.

In addition, some conventional gaming machines allow the player to determine the start timing of the winning state when the winning is won, but the game value that can be obtained during winning is almost constant for each winning type. Since this is the same as other conventional gaming machines, it has been difficult to increase the interest of the player in the game during the winning state.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine AA1, a predetermined privilege is granted by the privilege granting means based on the game ball entering the specific area where the game ball can enter. A first position where a game ball flowing down at least a predetermined section in a specific flow path through which the game ball can flow is more likely to be guided to the specific area than passing through the predetermined section, and a predetermined section rather than being guided to the specific area. The variable means is configured to be variable to a second position at which it is easier to pass through. When the operation content of the operation means operable by the player becomes the first operation content, the game ball is shot by the shooting means at a first shooting speed at which the game ball easily reaches the specific flow path. . On the other hand, when a second operation content different from the first operation content is obtained, the game ball is shot by the shooting means at a second shooting speed different from the first shooting speed. When the game ball is shot at the second shooting speed by the shooting means, the determining means determines whether or not a specific condition that is more likely to be established than when the game ball is shot at the first shooting speed is established, and the determining means determines whether the game ball is shot at the second shooting speed. When it is determined that the specific condition is met, the variable control means controls the variable means to vary from the second position to the first position for a predetermined period of time.

As a result, the operation means can be operated in anticipation that the specific condition will be established while the game ball is passing through the predetermined section.

In the gaming machine AA1, the variable control means causes the variable means to vary from the first position to the second position based on the fact that a first number of game balls enter the specific area. The predetermined section is configured with a path length that allows a second number of game balls, which is larger than the first number, to flow simultaneously in a state in which the variable means is changed to the second position. A game machine AA2, characterized in that it is a game machine AA2.

According to the gaming machine AA2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine AA1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the variable control means controls the variable means to vary from the first position to the second position based on the fact that the first number of game balls enter the specific area. The predetermined section has a path length that allows a second number of game balls, which is larger than the first number, to flow down at the same time when the variable means is changed to the second position.

As a result, the number of game balls passing through the predetermined section can be made to exceed the first number, and then the operation means can be operated by devising to establish the specific condition, so that the player's interest in the game is enhanced. has the effect of being able to improve

In the gaming machine AA2, the shooting means is capable of shooting game balls at time intervals equal to or longer than a predetermined interval, and in the predetermined section, game balls are continuously shot in the second direction at the predetermined intervals. In this state, the second number of game balls reach the predetermined section after one game ball reaches the predetermined section until the game ball passes through the predetermined section. A gaming machine AA3 characterized in that it allows game balls to pass through as much as possible.

According to the gaming machine AA3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine AA2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the shooting means is configured to be able to shoot the game ball at a time interval equal to or longer than a predetermined interval. In the predetermined section, in a state in which game balls are continuously shot at predetermined intervals in the second direction, from when one game ball reaches the predetermined section until the game ball passes through the predetermined section. Between, the game ball is configured to pass so that the second number of game balls can reach the predetermined section.

As a result, there is an effect that a player who wants to increase the number of game balls passing through the predetermined section to a number exceeding the first number can continuously shoot game balls at predetermined intervals.

In any one of the gaming machines AA1 to AA3, the variable means is configured to be able to guide all game balls flowing down the predetermined section to the specific area when the variable means is varied to the first position. A game machine AA4 characterized by being a thing.

According to the gaming machine AA4, in addition to the effects produced by any one of the gaming machines AA1 to AA3, when it is varied to the first position, all game balls flowing down the predetermined section are guided to the specific area. Since the variable means is configured in , by confirming the number of game balls passing through the predetermined section, it is possible to know the number of game balls guided to the specific area when the specific condition is established. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can easily understand the degree of advantage when the specific condition is established.

In any one of the gaming machines AA1 to AA4, a ball entry means for allowing a game ball to enter is provided, and the determination means determines that the specific condition is established when the game ball enters the ball entrance means. A gaming machine AA5 characterized by:

According to the game machine AA5, in addition to the effects produced by any one of the game machines AA1 to AA4, when the game ball enters the ball-entering means in which the game ball can enter, the determination means satisfies the specific condition. Therefore, by shooting a game ball aiming at the ball-entering means, there is an effect that the specific condition can be easily established at the player's favorite timing.

A game machine AA6, wherein any one of the game machines AA1 to AA5 is provided with deceleration means for decelerating the flow speed of the game ball that is flowing in the predetermined section.

According to the game machine AA6, in addition to the effect produced by any one of the game machines AA1 to AA5, the speed of the game ball flowing down the predetermined section is reduced by the deceleration means, so that the game ball can be directed toward the specific flow path. When the balls are continuously shot, the number of game balls passing through the predetermined section can be increased. Therefore, there is an effect that more game balls can be guided to the specific area when the specific condition is established.

In any one of the game machines AA1 to AA6, display means capable of displaying an effect mode, advantage determination means for determining the degree of advantage when the specific condition is satisfied until the specific condition is satisfied, and a suggestive effect executing means for executing, on the display means, a suggestive effect suggesting the degree of advantage determined by the advantage determining means.

According to the gaming machine AA7, in addition to the effect produced by any one of the gaming machines AA1 to AA6, the advantage determination means determines the degree of advantage when the specific condition is satisfied until the specific condition is satisfied. Since the suggestive effect suggesting the degree of advantage determined by the discriminating means is executed on the display means by the suggestive effect executing means, by confirming the suggestive effect displayed on the display means, it is possible to determine the degree of advantage when the specific condition is satisfied. has the effect of making it easier to understand

In the gaming machine AA7, the advantage determination means determines the number of game balls passing through the predetermined section, and the suggestive effect execution means determines the number of game balls determined by the advantage determination means. A game machine AA8 characterized in that a suggestive effect is executed as the suggestive effect.

According to the gaming machine AA8, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine AA7, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the number of game balls passing through the predetermined section is discriminated by the advantage discriminating means. An effect suggesting the number of game balls determined by the advantage determining means is executed as a suggestive effect by the suggestive effect executing means.

Thus, there is an effect that the player can easily know the number of game balls entering the specific area when the specific condition is satisfied by confirming the suggestive effect.

In any one of the game machines AA1 to AA8, a specific lottery result is obtained by a ball entry means capable of entering a game ball, a lottery means for executing a lottery based on the establishment of a lottery condition, and a lottery by the lottery means. a valid state setting means for setting a valid state in which a ball entering the ball entering means is valid, and the determination means determines whether a game ball enters the ball entering means during the valid state. The variable control means determines that the specific condition is satisfied when the ball is entered, and the variable control means causes the variable means to change the second A game machine AA9 characterized by executing a variable game in which a position is changed from a position to the first position a predetermined number of times.

According to the gaming machine AA9, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines AA1 to AA8, the following effects are exhibited. That is, a lottery is executed by the lottery means based on the establishment of the lottery condition, and based on a specific lottery result in the lottery by the lottery means, the entry of the game ball into the ball entry means into which the game ball can enter is validated. is set by the valid state setting means. When the ball is entered into the ball entering means during the valid state, the determining means determines that the specific condition is satisfied. A variable game in which the variable means is varied from the second position to the first position by a predetermined number of times is executed by the variable control means when the determination means determines that the specific condition is satisfied.

Thus, there is an effect that the game can be played in anticipation of a specific lottery result in the lottery by the lottery means.

In the gaming machine AA9, a plurality of positions including at least a first operating position in which the game ball is likely to enter the ball entering means and a second operating position in which the game ball is more difficult to enter than the first operating position A gaming machine AA10 comprising: an operation means capable of moving to an operation position; and an operation control means for moving the operation position of the operation means to a corresponding operation position according to the elapsed time.

According to the gaming machine AA10, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine AA9, the following effects are exhibited. In other words, it operates to a plurality of operating positions including at least a first operating position where it is easy for a game ball to enter the ball entering means and a second operating position where it is more difficult for a game ball to enter than the first operating position. Means are operably configured. The operation position of the operation means is moved to the operation position according to the elapsed time by the operation control means.

Thus, in order to establish the specific condition, it is necessary to shoot the game ball toward the ball entering means aiming at the timing when the operation position of the operation means becomes the first operation position, so the game ball is shot at good timing. There is an effect that the player can be given the pleasure of playing.

<Characteristics AB group> (Provide a jackpot that can aim for over winning and a jackpot that cannot be aimed)
A variable ball entry means capable of changing between a first state in which a game ball can enter and a second state in which the game ball is more difficult to enter than in the first state, and a game ball is moved to the variable ball entry means. A benefit granting means that grants a predetermined benefit based on the entry of a ball, a determination means that performs determination based on the establishment of a determination condition, and a specific determination result obtained by determination by the determination means. variable game executing means for executing a variable game in which the variable ball-entering means is changed from the second state to the first state a predetermined number of times; operating means operable by a player; condition determination means for determining whether or not a specific condition that is likely to be established when a specific operation is executed by the determination means is determined; A first variable game in which the variable game is started when it is determined that the specific condition is satisfied by the condition determining means after a specific determination result is obtained, and regardless of whether the specific condition is satisfied or not. A gaming machine AB1, comprising: a second variable game from which the variable game is started;

Here, some gaming machines such as pachinko machines shift to a win state when the result of a lottery performed based on the winning of a game ball into a start winning hole is a win. Among such gaming machines, there are some that are provided with multiple types of winning types that differ in the number of times (the number of rounds) of opening the large opening to which prize balls are awarded by winning a game ball. There is an attempt to improve the interest in winning by making the values different (for example, Japanese Patent No. 2514417).

In addition, among such conventional gaming machines, even if the number of rounds is the same, the number of game balls that can be won in each round is varied by varying the opening pattern of the large opening in each round. Some have different degrees of advantage.

However, in the above-described conventional gaming machine, the number of prize balls that can be obtained is almost constant for each winning type, so it becomes like a work to obtain a game value according to the winning type, and the player is in a winning state. There was a case where the game became monotonous. Moreover, since it is necessary to vary the control according to the type of winning during the winning state, there is a problem that the processing load increases during the winning state.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine AB1, the variable ball entry means is varied between a first state in which a game ball can be entered and a second state in which the game ball is more difficult to enter than in the first state. , a predetermined privilege is given by the privilege giving means based on the game ball entering the variable ball entering means. Determination is performed by the determination means based on the establishment of the determination condition, and the variable ball entry means is changed from the second state to the first state a predetermined number of times based on the determination by the determination means resulting in a specific determination result. The variable game executed is executed by the variable game executing means. The condition determination means determines whether or not a specific condition, which is likely to be satisfied when a specific operation is performed on an operation means that can be operated by the player, has been established. As the type of the variable game executed by the variable game executing means, the variable game is started when the condition determining means determines that the specific condition is established after the determination by the determining means results in a specific determination result. One type is determined by the type determining means from among a plurality of types including at least the first variable game and the second variable game in which the variable game is started regardless of whether or not the specific condition is established.

Thereby, there is an effect that the timing at which the variable game is started can be varied according to the type of the variable game.

In the gaming machine AB1, a shooting means capable of shooting a game ball in a direction corresponding to an operation on the operation means, and a first ball shooting means arranged at a position where the game ball shot in the first direction by the shooting means can enter. A ball entering means, a second ball entering means arranged at a position where a game ball launched in a second direction different from the first direction can enter, and a game ball entering the second ball entering means. a ball entry determination means for determining whether or not a ball is entered, wherein the condition determination means determines that the specific condition is satisfied when the game ball enters the first ball entry means; The second variable game is based on the determination that the game ball has entered the second ball entry means by the ball entry determination means after the determination by the determination means has resulted in the specific determination result. A game machine AB2 characterized in that it is started by

According to the gaming machine AB2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine AB1, the game ball is shot by the shooting means in the direction corresponding to the operation of the operating means, and the game ball shot in the first direction by the shooting means enters. A first ball entering means is arranged at a possible position. A second ball entering means is arranged at a position where a game ball launched in a second direction different from the first direction can enter. Whether or not the game ball has entered the second ball entering means is discriminated by the entering ball discriminating means. When the game ball enters the first ball entering means, the condition determining means determines that the specific condition is satisfied. A second variable game is started based on determination that a game ball has entered the second ball entry means by the ball entry determination means after a specific determination result has been obtained in the determination by the determination means.

As a result, since the ball entry means that is the starting condition differs according to the type of the variable game, it is possible to shoot the game ball in different directions according to the type of the variable game. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to give the player the pleasure of changing the direction in which the game ball is shot.

In the gaming machine AB2, a third ball entry means provided at a position where a game ball launched in the second direction can enter, and a first channel through which the game ball launched in the second direction can flow down. a variable means capable of moving between a first position capable of holding at least one game ball that has flowed into the first flow path and a second position where the game ball is less likely to be held than at the first position; switching means for switching the variable means from the first position to the second position based on a specific determination result in determination by the determination means, wherein the determination means is the third ball-entered ball. The determination is performed based on the game ball entering the means, and the second ball entering means is arranged at a position where the game ball passing through the first flow path can enter. A game machine AB3 characterized by being a thing.

According to the gaming machine AB3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine AB2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the third ball entering means is provided at a position where the game ball launched in the second direction can enter. A first position capable of holding at least one game ball that has flowed into a first flow path in which game balls shot in a second direction can flow down; The position and the variable means are varied. The variable means is switched from the first position to the second position by the switching means based on a specific determination result obtained by the determination by the determination means. Determination is performed by the determination means based on the fact that the game ball has entered the third ball entry means. A second ball entering means is arranged at a position where a game ball that has passed through the first flow path can enter.

Accordingly, since it is necessary to shoot the game ball in the second direction in order to execute the determination by the determination means, the game ball is allowed to flow into the first flow path until a specific determination result is obtained. can be done. Therefore, when the second variable game is determined by the type determining means, the game ball held in the first flow path can be immediately entered into the second ball entering means. Therefore, when the second variable game is determined, there is an effect that the second variable game can be started even if the player does not shoot the game ball.

In the gaming machine AB3, the second ball entering means has a period until the game ball that has flowed down the first flow path enters the second ball entering means, the game ball launched in the first direction. is arranged at a position where the period of time until the ball enters the variable ball entering means is shorter than the period.

According to the game machine AB4, in addition to the effects of the game machine AB3, the period until the game ball that has flowed down the first flow path enters the second ball entry means is the game ball launched in the first direction. Since the second ball-entering means is arranged at a position where the period is shorter than the period until the ball enters the variable ball-entering means, the variable game is immediately started when the second variable game is determined. It has the effect of being able to

In any one of the gaming machines AB2 to AB4, a specific flow path is provided through which a game ball launched in the first direction can flow, and the first state is a game ball flowing down at least a predetermined section in the specific flow path. However, it is a state in which it is easier to be guided to the variable ball entry means than to pass through the predetermined section, and the second state is that the game ball flowing down the predetermined section is guided to the variable ball entry means. The game machine AB5 is characterized in that it is in a state in which it is easier to pass through the predetermined section than it is to pass through.

According to the gaming machine AB5, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines AB2 to AB4, the following effects are exhibited. That is, in the first state, the game ball that is flowing down at least a predetermined section in the specific flow path in which the game ball shot in the first direction can flow down is guided to the variable ball entry means rather than passing through the predetermined section. On the other hand, in the second state, the game ball flowing down the predetermined section is more likely to pass through the predetermined section than to be guided to the variable milk ball means.

As a result, the more game balls passing through the predetermined section at the time of entering the first ball entering means, the more game balls can be guided to the variable grade entering means. There is an effect that it is possible to provide the playability of shooting a game ball in a direction.

In the gaming machine AB5, the variable game executing means performs a first number of games to the variable ball entering means when the variable ball entering means is changed to the first state at least for the first time in one of the variable games. The variable ball-entering means is controlled to be varied to the second position based on the entry of the ball, and the variable ball-entering means is varied to the second position in the predetermined section. A gaming machine AB6 is characterized in that the path length allows a second number of game balls, which is larger than the first number, to flow down simultaneously in a state where the gaming machine AB6 is closed.

According to the gaming machine AB6, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine AB5, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when the variable ball entry means is changed to the first state at least for the first time in one variable game, the variable ball entry means is based on the fact that the first number of game balls enter the variable ball entry means. is controlled by the variable game executing means so as to vary to the second position. The predetermined section has a path length that allows a second number of game balls, which is larger than the first number, to flow down at the same time when the variable ball entry means is changed to the second position.

As a result, the number of game balls passing through the predetermined section can be made to exceed the first number, and then the operation means can be operated by devising to establish the specific condition, so that the player's interest in the game is enhanced. has the effect of being able to improve

In the gaming machine AB6, the shooting means is capable of shooting game balls at time intervals equal to or longer than a predetermined interval, and in the predetermined section, game balls are continuously shot in the second direction at the predetermined intervals. In this state, the second number of game balls reach the predetermined section after one game ball reaches the predetermined section until the game ball passes through the predetermined section. A game machine AB7 is characterized by allowing game balls to pass through as much as possible.

According to the gaming machine AB7, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine AB6, the shooting means is configured to shoot game balls at intervals equal to or longer than a predetermined interval. In a state in which game balls are continuously shot at predetermined intervals in the second direction, after one game ball reaches a predetermined section until the game ball passes through the predetermined section, a second The predetermined section is configured such that the game balls pass through such that two game balls can reach the predetermined section.

As a result, there is an effect that a player who wants to increase the number of game balls passing through the predetermined section to a number exceeding the first number can continuously shoot game balls at predetermined intervals.

The gaming machine AB8 is characterized in that, in any one of the gaming machines AB5 to AB7, the gaming machine AB8 is characterized by comprising deceleration means for decelerating the flowing speed of the game ball that is flowing in the predetermined section.

According to the game machine AB8, in addition to the effect produced by any one of the game machines AB5 to AB7, the speed of the game ball flowing down the predetermined section is reduced by the deceleration means, so that the game ball can be directed toward the specific flow path. When the balls are continuously shot, the number of game balls passing through the predetermined section can be increased. Therefore, when a game ball enters the first ball entering means, more game balls are guided to the variable ball entering means.

In any one of game machines AB5 to AB8, display means capable of displaying an effect mode, number determination means for determining the number of game balls passing through the predetermined section, and game balls determined by the number determination means a suggesting effect executing means for executing a suggesting effect suggesting the number of the game machines on the display means.

According to the gaming machine AB9, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines AB5 to AB8, the following effects are exhibited. Namely, the number of game balls passing through the predetermined section is discriminated by the number discriminating means, and the suggesting effect suggesting the number of the game balls discriminated by the number discriminating means is executed on the display means by the suggesting effect executing means. .

As a result, the player can easily know the number of game balls guided to the variable ball entering means when the game balls enter the first ball entering means by confirming the suggestive performance. There is

In the gaming machine AB9, while the suggestive effect is being executed, it is checked at predetermined intervals whether the number of game balls suggested by the suggestive effect and the number of game balls discriminated by the number discriminating means are different. A discriminating difference discriminating means, and discriminating by the discriminating means that the number of game balls suggested by the suggestive effect is different from the number of game balls discriminated by the number discriminating means. a suggestive effect updating means for updating the mode of the suggestive effect to a mode suggesting the number of game balls discriminated by the number discriminating means.

According to the gaming machine AB10, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine AB9, the following effects are exhibited. That is, during the execution of the suggestive effect, the difference discriminating means discriminates whether or not the number of game balls suggested by the suggestive effect and the number of game balls discriminated by the number discriminating means are different for each predetermined period. be. Based on the fact that the number of game balls suggested by the suggestive performance and the number of game balls discriminated by the number discriminating means are discriminated by the difference discriminating means, the aspect of the suggestive performance is: The suggestion effect update means updates the number of game balls determined by the number determination means to suggest the number.

As a result, it is possible to update the mode of suggestive performance every predetermined period in correspondence with the number determined by the number determining means, so that when the ball is made to enter the first ball entering means, it is guided to the variable entering means. There is an effect that the player can more easily know the number of game balls to be played.

a third ball entry means provided in a game machine AB2 at a position where a game ball launched in the second direction can enter, and satisfying the determination condition based on the entry of the game ball; and an effect mode. a display means capable of displaying, a specific effect executing means for executing a specific effect on the display means based on the determination by the determining means, and the specific effect executed by the specific effect executing means. As an effect mode, when the determination by the determination means results in the specific determination result, and the first variable game is determined by the type determination means, the first mode is determined, and the determination by the determination means is performed. When the determination result is different from the specific determination result, and when the determination by the determination means results in the specific determination result, and when the second variable game is determined by the type determination means, the second A game machine AB11, characterized by comprising a performance mode determining means capable of determining a second mode different from the first mode.

According to the gaming machine AB11, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine AB2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, there is provided a third ball entry means that satisfies a determination condition based on the fact that the game ball has entered a position where the game ball launched in the second direction can enter. In the display means capable of displaying an effect mode, the specific effect executing means executes the specific effect based on the determination by the determining means. As the effect mode of the specific effect executed by the specific effect execution means, the first mode by the effect mode determination means when the determination by the determination means results in a specific determination result and the first variable game is determined by the type determination means. is determined. On the other hand, when the determination by the determination means results in a different determination result from the specific determination result, and when the determination by the determination means results in a specific determination result, and when the second variable game is determined by the type determination means , the second mode different from the first mode is determined as the effect mode of the specific effect by the effect mode determining means.

Thereby, when the second variable game is determined, the player can be made to think that the specific determination result is not obtained. Therefore, even after the specific effect of the second mode is executed, the game ball can be continuously shot in the second direction in order to make the discrimination by the discriminating means, so that the user is aware of the specific discrimination result. The game ball can be entered into the second ball entering means before it is finished. Therefore, it is possible to make the player feel as if the second variable game has suddenly started, so that there is an effect that the player can be surprised and delighted.

In the gaming machine AB11, the specific effect of the second mode executed based on the determination by the determination means resulting in the specific determination result and the second variable game being determined by the type determination means. During the period from the end to the entry of the game ball into the second ball entering means, a pseudo specific effect that is difficult to distinguish from the specific effect of the second mode can be executed. A game machine AB12 characterized by comprising execution means.

According to the gaming machine AB12, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine AB11, the determination by the determination means results in a specific determination result, and the second variable game is executed based on the determination of the second variable game by the type determination means. During the period from the end of the specific performance of the mode to the entry of the game ball into the second ball entering means, a pseudo specific performance of a mode that is difficult to distinguish from the specific performance of the second mode is executed. Since it is executed by means, when the second variable game is determined by the type determining means, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to notice that a specific determination result has been obtained.

In the gaming machine AB12, an acquisition means for acquiring discrimination information used for discrimination by the discrimination means based on the entry of a game ball into the ball entry means, and the discrimination information acquired by the acquisition means, identification information storage means capable of storing a predetermined number of pieces of information as an upper limit; erasing means for erasing the identification information used for identification by the identification means from the identification information storage means; information number image display means for causing the display means to display an information number image suggesting the number of information in the discrimination information; and discrimination by the discrimination means provides the specific discrimination result, and the second During the period from the end of the specific effect of the second mode executed based on the determination of the variable game until the game ball enters the second ball entering means, the pseudo The game machine AB13 is characterized by comprising an image updating means for updating the information count image to an image corresponding to the information count with the information count reduced by one each time the specific effect is executed.

According to the gaming machine AB13, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine AB12, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the acquisition means acquires the determination information used for determination by the determination means based on the game ball entering the ball entry means. The determination information acquired by the acquisition means is stored in the determination information storage means with a predetermined number of pieces of information as the upper limit. Determination information used for determination by the determination means is erased from the determination information storage means by the deletion means. An information number image indicating the number of pieces of discrimination information stored in the discrimination information storage means is displayed on the display means by the information number image display means. After the specific effect of the second mode executed based on the fact that the determination by the determination means results in a specific determination result and the second variable game is determined by the type determination means is completed, the process proceeds to the second ball entry means. In the period between and until the game ball enters, the information count image is updated to an image corresponding to the information count with the information count reduced by one by the image updating means every time the pseudo specific performance is executed.

As a result, the information number image is updated by the image updating means, so that the player can be made to think that the number of discrimination information stored in the discrimination information storage means is decreasing. Therefore, when the second variable game is determined by the type determination means, the player who wants to continue the determination by the determination means can play the game ball in the second variable game even after a specific determination result is obtained. It has the effect of being able to keep firing in the direction.

<Characteristic AC group> (In an advantageous game state, over-winning navigation is performed when a small win is won)
A specific area into which a game ball can enter, a privilege granting means for imparting a predetermined privilege based on the fact that the game ball has entered the specific area, a specific channel in which the game ball can flow down, and its specification A game ball flowing down at least a predetermined section in a flow path has a first position at which it is more likely to be guided to the specific area than to pass the predetermined section, and a first position to pass the predetermined section rather than being guided to the specific area. A variable means that can be changed to a second position that makes it easier, a determination means that performs determination based on the establishment of a determination condition, and a specific determination result based on the determination by the determination means. is variable from the second position to the first position for a predetermined period of time. A game machine AC1 characterized by comprising a specific effect executing means capable of executing a specific effect before being varied to the first position.

Here, some game machines such as pachinko machines are provided with a display device such as a liquid crystal display device. In this conventional gaming machine, symbols are variably displayed on the display device, and the symbols are stopped and displayed in a predetermined combination, thereby providing a winning game advantageous to the player. In addition, various images such as characters and scenery are displayed on the display device in addition to the patterns, and various entertainment effects are executed to increase the interest of the game (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2003-325886). Gazette).

In addition, some of such conventional gaming machines are configured to be able to execute an effect that suggests the degree of expectation of whether or not a winning game that is advantageous to the player will be awarded after that by the effect displayed on the display device. There are also things that are being done.

However, in the above-described conventional type gaming machine, it is already decided whether or not the player will be advantageous when the effect suggesting the degree of expectation is started. does not affect Therefore, there is a problem that it becomes difficult for the player to pay attention to the display device while playing the game.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine AC1, a predetermined privilege is granted by the privilege granting means when the game ball enters the specific area where the game ball can enter. A first position where a game ball flowing down at least a predetermined section in a specific flow path through which the game ball can flow is more likely to be guided to the specific area than passing through the predetermined section, and a predetermined section rather than being guided to the specific area. The variable means is changed to the second position where it is easier to pass through. Determination is performed by the determination means based on the establishment of determination conditions, and the variable means is varied from the second position to the first position for a predetermined period based on the determination by the determination means resulting in a specific determination result. A variable game is executed by variable game executing means. When the determination by the determination means results in a specific determination result, the specific effect executing means executes the specific effect before the variable means is varied to the first position.

As a result, it is possible to determine whether or not to change to the first position by confirming whether or not the specific effect has been executed, so there is an effect that the effect can attract attention.

In the gaming machine AC1, the specific effect executing means provides, as the specific effect, an effect suggesting a launch timing at which the variable means may be varied to the first position while the game ball is passing through the predetermined section. A game machine AC2 characterized in that it executes

According to the game machine AC2, in addition to the effects of the game machine AC1, as the specific effect, the variable means may be changed to the first position while the game ball is passing through the predetermined section, and the effect suggests the timing of the launch. is executed by the specific effect executing means, there is an effect that the specific effect can attract attention.

In the gaming machine AC1 or AC2, the predetermined period is a period from when a game ball is shot in the direction in which the specific flow path is arranged until the shot game ball reaches the specific flow path. A gaming machine AC3 characterized by being shorter than the period.

According to the game machine AC3, in addition to the effects of the game machine AC1 or AC2, the game ball is ejected from the specific flow path for a predetermined period of time after the game ball is shot in the direction in which the specific flow path is arranged. Since it is constructed so as to be shorter than the period until reaching the point, it is possible to make it difficult to obtain a predetermined privilege unless the game ball is shot when the specific performance is executed. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can play the game while paying more attention to whether or not the specific effect is executed.

In any one of the game machines AC1 to AC3, the variable means changes from the second position to the first position based on the second determination result different from the specific determination result in the determination by the determination means. A second variable game execution means for executing a second variable game that is varied a specific number of times, and a period in which the variable means is varied from the second position to the first position in the second variable game, The gaming machine AC4 is characterized in that it tends to be longer than the predetermined period.

According to the gaming machine AC4, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines AC1 to AC3, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the second variable game in which the variable means is varied from the second position to the first position a specific number of times based on the second determination result different from the specific determination result in the determination by the determination means is the second variable game. 2 It is executed by variable game executing means. The period during which the variable means is varied from the second position to the first position in the second variable game is configured to be likely to be longer than the predetermined period.

Thereby, there is an effect that the game can be played in anticipation of execution of the second variable game.

In the gaming machine AC4, dynamic display execution means for executing dynamic display of identification information indicating the determination result of the determination by the determination means; a first variable game in which a period from the end of target display until the variable means is changed to the first position is set to a first period; and the variable game after the dynamic display of the identification information ends. A second variable game in which a period until the means is varied to the first position is set to a second period shorter than the first period, and a type of one variable game is determined from among a plurality of at least. and a type determination means, wherein the suggestive effect execution means operates during a period after the dynamic display of the identification information by the dynamic display execution means ends until the variable means is varied to the first position. A gaming machine AC5 characterized in that it executes the suggestive effect.

According to the gaming machine AC5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine AC4, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the dynamic display execution means executes dynamic display of the identification information indicating the determination result of the determination by the determination means. a first variable game in which a period from the end of the dynamic display of the identification information by the dynamic display execution means to the time the variable means is changed to the first position is set as the first period as the type of the variable game; a second variable game in which a period from the end of the dynamic display of the identification information until the variable means is varied to the first position is set to a second period shorter than the first period; The type of variable game from 1 is determined by the type determining means. The suggestive effect is executed by the suggestive effect executing means after the dynamic display of the identification information by the dynamic display executing means ends and before the variable means is changed to the first position.

As a result, when the first variable game is determined, more game balls can reach the predetermined section than when the second variable game is determined. There is an effect that it can be done.

In the gaming machine AC5, the first period is a period from when a game ball is shot in the direction in which the specific flow path is arranged until the shot game ball reaches the specific flow path. The second period is a period from when the game ball is shot in the direction in which the specific flow path is arranged until the shot game ball reaches the specific flow path. A gaming machine AC6 characterized in that the period is shorter than the period of .

According to the gaming machine AC6, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine AC5, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the first period after the game ball is shot in the direction in which the specific flow path is arranged is longer than the period until the shot game ball reaches the specific flow path. It is On the other hand, the second period is a period shorter than the period from when the game ball is shot in the direction in which the specific flow path is arranged until the shot game ball reaches the specific flow path. It is

As a result, when the second variable game is set, it becomes difficult for the game ball to reach the specific flow path, so that it is possible to strongly expect that the first variable game is determined. There is

In the gaming machine AC1, dynamic display execution means for executing dynamic display of identification information indicating the determination result of the determination by the determination means; First type determination for determining one specific performance out of a plurality of types including at least a first performance and a second performance different from the first performance as the type of the specific performance executed by the specific performance executing means. and execution of a second specific effect for executing the specific effect during execution of the dynamic display of the identification information, based on the fact that the determination by the determining means results in an outlier determination result different from the specific determination result. means, and a second type for determining one specific effect from among a plurality of types including at least the first effect and the second effect as types of the specific effect executed by the second specific effect executing means. determining means, wherein the first effect has a higher ratio determined by the first type determining means than the ratio determined by the second type determining means, and the second effect A game machine AC7 characterized in that the percentage determined by said first type determination means is lower than the percentage determined by said second type determination means.

According to the gaming machine AC7, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine AC1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the dynamic display execution means executes dynamic display of the identification information indicating the determination result of the determination by the determination means. At least a first effect and a second effect different from the first effect are included as types of the specific effect executed by the specific effect executing means during execution of the dynamic display of the identification information indicating the specific determination result. One specific effect is determined from among a plurality of effects by the first type determining means. A specific effect is executed by the second specific effect executing means during execution of dynamic display of the identification information based on the fact that the determination by the determining means results in a different determination result from the specific determination result. As the type of the specific performance to be executed by the second specific performance execution means, one specific performance is determined by the second type determination means from among a plurality of at least the first performance and the second performance. The first effect is configured such that the ratio determined by the first type determination means is higher than the ratio determined by the second type determination means. On the other hand, the second effect is configured such that the ratio determined by the second type determination means is higher than the ratio determined by the second type determination means.

As a result, there is an effect that the degree of expectation for execution of the variable game can be varied according to the content of the specific effect.

In the gaming machine AC7, the specific flow path is arranged during a period from the end of the dynamic display of the identification information indicating the specific determination result to the change of the variable means to the first position. is shorter than the period between when the game ball is shot in the direction in which the game ball is shot and when the shot game ball reaches the specific flow path, and the predetermined period is when the specific flow path is A gaming machine AC8 characterized in that the period from when a game ball is shot in the direction in which it is arranged until the shot game ball reaches the specific flow path is shorter than the period.

According to the gaming machine AC8, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine AC7, the following effects are exhibited. That is, during the period from the end of the dynamic display of the identification information indicating the specific determination result to the time the variable means is changed to the first position, the game ball moves in the direction in which the specific flow path is arranged. It is configured to be shorter than the period from when the game ball is shot until it reaches the specific flow path. The predetermined period is configured to be shorter than the period from when the game ball is shot in the direction in which the specific flow path is arranged until the shot game ball reaches the specific flow path. there is

As a result, the game ball cannot reach the predetermined section unless the game ball is shot toward the specific flow path during execution of the dynamic display of the identification information, so that the content of the specific performance results in a specific determination result. There is an effect that it is possible to make a more serious prediction as to whether or not

In the gaming machine AC7 or AC8, the first type determination means is configured to be capable of determining a third effect different from the first effect and the second effect at a predetermined ratio, and the second type The game machine AC9 is characterized in that the determining means is configured to be unable to determine the third effect.

According to the gaming machine AC9, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine AC7 or AC8, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the third effect, which is different from the first effect and the second effect, is determined by the first type determination means at a predetermined rate. The second type determining means is configured to be unable to determine the third effect.

As a result, when the third effect is executed, it is determined that a specific determination result has been obtained at that time, so there is an effect that the player can be pleased.

<Characteristic AD group> (The likelihood of over-winning is variable by varying the length of the closing period during the jackpot)
A specific area into which a game ball can enter, a privilege granting means for imparting a predetermined privilege based on the fact that the game ball has entered the specific area, a specific channel in which the game ball can flow down, and its specification A game ball flowing down at least a predetermined section in a flow path has a first position at which it is more likely to be guided to the specific area than to pass the predetermined section, and a first position to pass the predetermined section rather than being guided to the specific area. variable means that can be changed to a second position that makes it easier; determination means that performs determination based on the establishment of determination conditions; variable game execution means for executing a variable game that is varied from the second position to the first position a predetermined number of times; and a first control as a control method for the variable means during execution of the variable game; 1 control method from among a plurality of control methods including at least a second control in which the number of game balls passing through the predetermined section is likely to be larger than that in the first control at the timing when is changed to the first position and a control method determining means for determining the gaming machine AD1.

Here, some gaming machines such as pachinko machines shift to a win state when the result of a lottery performed based on the winning of a game ball into a start winning hole is a win. Among such gaming machines, there are some that are provided with multiple types of winning types that differ in the number of times (the number of rounds) of opening the large opening to which prize balls are awarded by winning a game ball. There is an attempt to improve the interest in winning by making the values different (for example, Japanese Patent No. 2514417).

In addition, among such conventional gaming machines, even if the number of rounds is the same, the number of game balls that can be won in each round is varied by varying the opening pattern of the large opening in each round. Some have different degrees of advantage.

However, in the above-described conventional gaming machine, the number of prize balls that can be obtained is almost constant for each winning type, so it becomes like a work to obtain a game value according to the winning type, and the player is in a winning state. There was a case where the game became monotonous. That is, there is a problem that it becomes difficult to improve the interest of the player in the game.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine AD1, a predetermined privilege is granted by the privilege granting means based on the game ball entering the specific area where the game ball can enter. A first position where a game ball flowing down at least a predetermined section in a specific flow path through which the game ball can flow is more likely to be guided to the specific flow path than passing through the predetermined section, and a predetermined position rather than being guided to the specific area. The variable means is changed to the second position where it becomes easier to pass through the section. Determination is performed by the determination means based on the establishment of the determination condition, and the variable means is varied from the second position to the first position a predetermined number of times based on the determination by the determination means resulting in a specific determination result. A variable game is executed by variable game executing means. As a control method of the variable means during execution of the variable game, a first control and a second control in which the number of game balls passing through the predetermined section at the timing when the variable means is changed to the first position tends to increase more than the first control. One control method is determined by the control method determining means from among a plurality of control methods including at least and.

As a result, the game can be played in anticipation that the variable means will be controlled by the second control when the determination by the determination means results in a specific determination result. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine AD1, the second control is controlled by the first control for at least one period among a plurality of periods in which the variable means is varied to the second position in one variable game. A game machine AD2 characterized in that it is controlled to be longer than the game machine AD2.

According to the gaming machine AD2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine AD1, the second control is such that at least one of the plurality of periods in which the variable means is varied to the second position in one variable game is the first control. Since it is configured to be longer than when controlled by control, the second control can cause more game balls to reach the predetermined section. Therefore, there is an effect that the game can be played with a strong expectation that the variable means will be controlled by the second control.

The gaming machine AD1 or AD2 includes dynamic display execution means for executing dynamic display of identification information indicating the result of determination by the determination means, and the first control is performed by controlling the identification information indicating the specific determination result. is controlled so that a period from the end of the dynamic display to the time the variable means is varied to the first position is the first period, and the second control is the specific determination Control is performed so that the period from the end of the dynamic display of the identification information indicating the result to the time the variable means is varied to the first position is a second period longer than the first period. A gaming machine AD3 characterized by:

According to the gaming machine AD3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine AD1 or AD2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the dynamic display execution means executes dynamic display of the identification information indicating the determination result of the determination by the determination means. In the first control, the period from the end of the dynamic display of the identification information indicating the specific determination result to the time the variable means is varied to the first position is controlled to be the first period. In the second control, the period from the end of the dynamic display of the identification information indicating the specific determination result to the time the variable means is changed to the first position is the second period longer than the first period. controlled by

Thus, when the game balls continue to be shot toward the specific flow path after the dynamic display of the identification information is completed, the second control allows more game balls to reach the predetermined section. Therefore, there is an effect that more game balls can enter the specific area when the variable means is changed to the first position.

In any one of the game machines AD1 to AD3, while the variable means is being varied to the first position, the variable means is based on a first number or more of game balls entering the specific area. is variable to the second position, and the predetermined section includes a second number, which is larger than the first number, in a state in which the variable means is varied to the second position. The game machine AD4 is characterized in that the path length is such that game balls can flow down at the same time.

According to the gaming machine AD4, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines AD1 to AD3, the following effects are exhibited. That is, while the variable means is variable to the first position, the variable means is variable to the second position by the variable control means based on the fact that the first number or more game balls enter the specific area. controlled as follows. The predetermined section has a path length that allows a second number or more of game balls, which is larger than the first number, to flow down at the same time when the variable means is changed to the second position.

As a result, there is an effect that the game can be played in anticipation that the variable means will be varied to the first position after the number of game balls passing through the predetermined section exceeds the first number. be.

The gaming machine AD4 comprises an operating means operable by a player, and a shooting means capable of shooting game balls into a game area at a time interval equal to or longer than a predetermined interval at a shooting speed corresponding to the operation content of the operating means. , in the predetermined section, in a state in which game balls are continuously shot at the predetermined interval in the second direction, after one game ball reaches the predetermined section, the game ball The gaming machine AD5 is characterized in that the game balls are allowed to pass through such that the second number of game balls can reach the predetermined section before passing through the predetermined section.

According to the gaming machine AD5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine AD4, the shooting means shoots the game ball into the game area at a time interval equal to or longer than a predetermined interval at a shooting speed corresponding to the operation contents of the operation means that the player can operate. Fired by In the predetermined section, in a state in which game balls are continuously shot at predetermined intervals in the second direction, from when one game ball reaches the predetermined section until the game ball passes through the predetermined section. During this time, the game balls are passed so that the second number of game balls can reach the predetermined section.

As a result, there is an effect that a player who wants to increase the number of game balls passing through the predetermined section to a number exceeding the first number can continuously shoot game balls at predetermined intervals.

In the gaming machine AD5, the second control is such that, of a plurality of periods in which the variable means is varied to the second position in one variable game, a specific period, which is at least one period, is fired by the firing means. at least the first number or more of the game balls are controlled to reach the predetermined section, and the first control is such that the specific period is the firing means A gaming machine AD6 characterized in that it is controlled to have a period of length in which it is difficult for the game balls shot by to reach the predetermined section in the number equal to or greater than the first number.

According to the gaming machine AD6, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine AD5, the following effects are exhibited. That is, in the second control, among a plurality of periods in which the variable means is varied to the second position in one variable game, the specific period, which is at least one period, is at least the first number or more fired by the firing means. It is controlled to have a length that allows the game ball to reach a predetermined section. In the first control, the specific period is controlled so as to have a length that makes it difficult for the game balls shot by the shooting means to reach the predetermined section in the first number or more.

As a result, when the variable means is controlled by the second control, there is an effect that the first number or more of game balls can enter the specific area by continuously shooting the game balls during the specific period. .

A game machine AD7, wherein any one of the game machines AD1 to AD6 is provided with deceleration means for decelerating the flow speed of the game ball flowing in the predetermined section.

According to the game machine AD7, in addition to the effects of the game machines AD1 to AD6, the speed of the game balls flowing down the predetermined section is reduced by the deceleration means, so that the game balls are continuously directed toward the specific flow path. It is possible to increase the number of game balls passing through the predetermined section when the ball is shot. Therefore, there is an effect that more game balls can be guided to the specific area when the variable means is varied to the first position.

A gaming machine AD8, wherein the decelerating means is composed of a meandering flow path in the gaming machine AD7.

According to the game machine AD8, in addition to the effects of the game machine AD7, the deceleration means is composed of a zigzag-shaped flow path, so the direction in which the game ball flows down can be changed multiple times in a predetermined section. Therefore, there is an effect that the speed of the game ball can be reduced more reliably.

In the gaming machine AD7, the speed reduction means makes dynamic frictional force between the game ball and the predetermined section higher than other locations in the specific flow path.

According to the gaming machine AD9, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine AD7, the dynamic friction force between the game ball and the predetermined section is made higher than other locations in the specific flow path by the deceleration means, so that the game ball flows down in the predetermined section. There is an effect that the speed can be reduced more reliably.

<Characteristic AE group> (Production that suggests the degree of advantage when the jackpot starts)
A display means capable of displaying an effect mode, a determination means for executing determination based on the establishment of a determination condition, and a determination based on the establishment of a specific condition after a specific determination result is obtained by the determination by the determination means. A privilege game executing means for executing a privilege game advantageous to the player, and when the execution of the privilege game is started in a predetermined period from the specific determination result to the establishment of the specific condition. A game machine AE1 comprising a suggestive effect execution means for executing a suggestive effect to suggest a degree of advantage to a player on the display means.

Here, some game machines such as pachinko machines are provided with a display device such as a liquid crystal display device. In this conventional gaming machine, symbols are variably displayed on the display device, and the symbols are stopped and displayed in a predetermined combination, thereby providing a winning game advantageous to the player. In addition, various images such as characters and scenery are displayed on the display device in addition to the patterns, and various entertainment effects are executed to increase the interest of the game (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2003-325886). Gazette).

In addition, some of such conventional gaming machines are configured to be able to execute an effect that suggests the degree of expectation of whether or not a winning game that is advantageous to the player will be awarded after that by the effect displayed on the display device. There are also things that are being done.

However, in the above-described conventional type gaming machine, it is already decided whether or not the player will be advantageous when the effect suggesting the degree of expectation is started. does not affect Therefore, there is a problem that it becomes difficult for the player to pay attention to the display device while playing the game.

According to the game machine AE1, the effect mode is displayed on the display means. Judgment is executed by the judging means based on the establishment of the judging condition. After a specific determination result is obtained in determination by the determination means, a privilege game advantageous to the player is executed by the privilege game execution means based on establishment of a specific condition. In a predetermined period from when a specific discrimination result is obtained until when a specific condition is established, a suggestive effect for suggesting to the player the degree of advantage when execution of a privilege game is started is displayed by a suggestive effect execution means by a display means. is executed in

As a result, there is an effect that the game can be played while paying attention to the suggestive effect.

In the gaming machine AE1, there are an operating means operable by a player, a shooting means capable of shooting a game ball at a shooting speed corresponding to the operation content of the operating means, and a game ball shot by the shooting means can enter. and ball-entering means, wherein the specific condition is established when a game ball enters the ball-entering means.

According to the gaming machine AE2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine AE1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the game ball is shot by the shooting means at a shooting speed according to the operation contents of the operation means that the player can operate. A specific condition is established when a game ball shot by the shooting means enters a ball entering means that can enter the game ball.

As a result, there is an effect that the timing of shooting the game ball can be adjusted according to the contents suggested by the suggestion performance.

In a gaming machine AE1 or AE2, a specific area into which a game ball can enter, a privilege granting means for imparting a predetermined privilege based on the game ball entering the specific area, and a game ball into which the game ball can flow A specific flow path, a first position at which a game ball flowing down at least a predetermined section in the specific flow path is more likely to be guided to the specific area than passing through the predetermined section, and more than being guided to the specific area variable means that can be changed to a second position at which the player can easily pass through the predetermined section, and the privilege game execution means changes the variable means to the second position based on the establishment of the specific condition. to the first position a predetermined number of times.

According to the game machine AE3, in addition to the effects of the game machine AE1 or AE2, the following effects are produced. That is, a predetermined privilege is given by the privilege giving means based on the fact that the game ball enters the specific area where the game ball can enter. A first position where a game ball flowing down at least a predetermined section in a specific flow path through which the game ball can flow is more likely to be guided to the specific flow path than passing through the predetermined section, and a predetermined position rather than being guided to the specific area. The variable means is changed to the second position where it becomes easier to pass through the section. Based on the establishment of the specific condition, the variable means is varied from the second position to the first position a predetermined number of times by the privilege game executing means.

As a result, there is an effect that the game can be played by paying attention to the number of game balls passing through the predetermined section at the timing when the specific condition is established.

In the gaming machine AE3, when the variable means is changed to the first position and the first number of game balls enter the specific area during execution of the privilege game, the variable means A variable control means is provided for controlling to vary from the first position to the second position, and the predetermined section is greater than the first number in a state where the variable means is varied to the second position. The game machine AE4 is characterized in that the second number of game balls are configured to have a path length that allows them to flow down at the same time.

According to the gaming machine AE4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine AE3, the following effects are exhibited. That is, during execution of the privilege game, the variable means is changed from the first position to the second position based on the fact that the first number of game balls enter the specific area after the variable means is changed to the first position. is controlled by the variable control means so as to be variable. The predetermined section has a path length that allows a second number of game balls, which is larger than the first number, to flow down without hesitation when the variable means is changed to the second position.

As a result, it is possible to make the player expect that the specific condition will be satisfied after the number of game balls passing through the predetermined section exceeds the first number, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved. has the effect of

The gaming machine AE4 comprises an operating means operable by a player, and a shooting means capable of shooting game balls at a time interval equal to or longer than a predetermined interval at a shooting speed corresponding to the details of the operation of the operating means, and the predetermined interval. is a state in which game balls are continuously shot at the predetermined intervals toward the specific flow path, and after one game ball reaches the predetermined section, the game ball passes the predetermined section. The gaming machine AE5 is characterized in that the game balls are allowed to pass through so that the second number of game balls can reach the predetermined section before they pass through.

According to the gaming machine AE5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine AE4, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the game ball is shot at a time interval equal to or longer than a predetermined interval by the shooting means at a shooting speed according to the operation contents of the operation means that the player can operate. In the predetermined section, the game ball passes through the predetermined section after one game ball reaches the predetermined section in a state in which the game balls are continuously shot toward the specific flow path at predetermined intervals. The game balls are made to flow down so that the second number of game balls can reach the predetermined section.

As a result, there is an effect that a player who wants to increase the number of game balls passing through the predetermined section to a number exceeding the first number can continuously shoot game balls at predetermined intervals.

In any one of the game machines AE3 to AE5, a number determining means for determining the number of game balls passing through the predetermined section is provided, and the suggestive effect execution means determines the number of game balls determined by the number determining means. A game machine AE6 characterized in that a suggestive effect is executed as the suggestive effect.

According to the gaming machine AE6, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines AE3 to AE5, the following effects are exhibited. Namely, the number of game balls passing through the predetermined section is discriminated by the number discriminating means. An effect suggesting the number of game balls discriminated by the number discriminating means is executed as a suggestive effect by the suggestive effect executing means.

This makes it possible for the player to easily understand the number of game balls to be guided to the specific area when the specific condition is established, depending on the content of the suggestive effect, so that it is possible to specify the number while the larger number is suggested. There is an effect that a game can be played in anticipation that the condition will be satisfied.

In the gaming machine AE6, an effect mode updating means for updating the effect mode of the suggestive effect in accordance with the number of game balls determined by the number determining means every predetermined period during execution of the suggestive effect, and the effect thereof. When updating the effect mode of the suggestive effect by the mode updating means, it is determined whether the number of game balls suggested by the suggestive effect and the number of game balls discriminated by the number discriminating means match. It is determined that the number of game balls suggested by the suggested effect by the match determination means for determining each period and the number of game balls determined by the number determination means match. an update avoiding means for avoiding updating of the performance mode by the performance mode updating means when the game machine AE7 is the game machine AE7.

According to the gaming machine AE7, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine AE6, the following effects are exhibited. That is, during execution of the suggestive effect, the effect mode of the suggestive effect is updated by the effect mode updating means every predetermined period according to the number of game balls determined by the number determining means. When the performance mode of the suggestive performance is updated by the performance mode updating means, it is determined whether or not the number of game balls suggested by the suggestive performance matches the number of game balls determined by the number determination means. It is determined by the means every predetermined period. When the coincidence determining means determines that the number of game balls suggested by the suggested performance and the number of game balls determined by the number determining means match, the performance updating means updates the performance mode. is avoided by the update avoidance means.

As a result, it is possible to reduce the frequency with which the presentation mode is updated, so there is an effect that the processing load required for updating the presentation mode can be reduced.

In the gaming machine AE6 or AE7, the predetermined section has a plurality of passage detection means capable of detecting the passage of game balls arranged at a plurality of locations, and the number determination means includes the plurality of passage detection means. The game machine AE8 is characterized in that the number of the passage detection means detecting passage of game balls is determined as the number of game balls passing through the predetermined section.

According to the gaming machine AE8, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine AE6 or AE7, the following effects are exhibited. That is, a plurality of passage detection means capable of detecting the passage of game balls are arranged at a plurality of locations in the predetermined section. Among the plurality of passage detection means, the number of passage detection means detecting passage of game balls is determined as the number of game balls passing through the predetermined section by the number determination means.

As a result, it is possible to accurately determine the number of game balls that are passing through the predetermined section.

<Characteristic AF group> (Production indicating the degree of expectation of whether or not it will be advantageous when hitting to the right)
A ball entry means arranged at a position where a game ball launched in a first direction can enter, a judgment means for executing judgment based on the entry of a game ball into the ball entry means, and the judgment. Advantageous state setting means for setting an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player when the game ball is shot in a second direction different from the first direction based on a specific determination result obtained by the determination by the means. display means capable of displaying identification information; dynamic display execution means for executing dynamic display of the identification information indicating the determination result by the determination means on the display means; A specific effect capable of executing a specific effect suggesting the degree of expectation as to whether or not an advantageous game state will occur when the game ball is shot in the second direction while the information is dynamically displayed. A gaming machine AF1 comprising: execution means;

Here, some game machines such as pachinko machines are provided with a display device such as a liquid crystal display device. In this conventional gaming machine, symbols are variably displayed on the display device, and the symbols are stopped and displayed in a predetermined combination, thereby providing a winning game advantageous to the player. In addition, various images such as characters and scenery are displayed on the display device in addition to the patterns, and various entertainment effects are executed to increase the interest of the game (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2003-325886). Gazette).

In addition, some of such conventional gaming machines are configured to be able to execute an effect that suggests the degree of expectation of whether or not a winning game that is advantageous to the player will be awarded after that by the effect displayed on the display device. There are also things that are being done.

However, in the above-described conventional type gaming machine, it is already decided whether or not the player will be advantageous when the effect suggesting the degree of expectation is started. does not affect Therefore, there is a problem that it becomes difficult for the player to pay attention to the display device while playing the game.

According to the gaming machine AF1, determination is performed by the determination means based on the fact that the game ball has entered the ball entry means arranged at a position where the game ball launched in the first direction can enter. . Based on the fact that the discrimination by the discriminating means has resulted in a specific discrimination result, the advantageous state setting means sets an advantageous state advantageous to the player when the game ball is shot in a second direction different from the first direction. set. Dynamic display of the identification information indicating the determination result by the determination means is performed on the display means by the dynamic display execution means. A specific effect suggesting the degree of expectation of whether or not an advantageous game state will occur when a game ball is shot in a second direction while dynamic display of identification information is being executed by a dynamic display executing means. is executed by the specific effect executing means.

As a result, the player can judge whether or not it is better to shoot the game ball in the second direction according to the suggestive content of the specific performance, so that the player can play the game while paying attention to the specific performance. There is

In the gaming machine AF1, the advantageous state is defined as the one who starts shooting the game ball in the second direction during the specific period during the execution of the dynamic display of the identification information indicating the specific determination result. This is more advantageous to the player than starting the shooting of the game ball in the second direction after the dynamic display of the identification information indicating the specific determination result is completed, and the specific effect executing means includes: When the specific effect is executed during the execution of the dynamic display of the identification information indicating the specific determination result, the specific effect is executed in a performance period including at least part of the specific period. A gaming machine AF2 characterized by:

According to the gaming machine AF2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine AF1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when the advantageous state is reached, it is better to start shooting the game ball in the second direction during the specific period during the execution of the dynamic display of the identification information indicating the specific determination result. This tends to be more advantageous to the player than starting the shooting of the game ball in the second direction after the dynamic display of the information ends. When the specific effect is executed during execution of the dynamic display of the identification information indicating the specific determination result, the specific effect execution means executes the specific effect during the effect period including at least a part of the specific period.

Thus, it is possible for the player to determine whether or not to start shooting the game ball in the second direction during the performance period of the specific performance based on the contents of the suggestion of the specific performance. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to play a game while paying more attention to the content of suggestion of the specific effect.

In the gaming machine AF2, the advantageous state is such that the earlier the shooting of the game ball in the second direction is started during the specific period, the more advantageous the player is likely to be. Amusement machine AF3.

According to the gaming machine AF3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine AF2, in an advantageous state, it is easier for the player to start shooting game balls in the second direction earlier during the specific period. Therefore, when the specific effect is executed, the player can be made to decide whether or not to shoot the game ball in the second direction as soon as possible. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to make the game more tense during execution of the specific effect.

In any of the game machines AF1 to AF3, the type of the specific effect executed by the specific effect executing means is determined when the dynamic display of the identification information indicating the specific determination result is executed. A first specific effect in which the ratio is high, and a second specific effect in which the ratio determined when the dynamic display of the identification information indicating the specific determination result is executed is lower than that of the first specific effect. A game machine AF4 comprising a performance type determining means for determining one type from among a plurality of types including at least .

According to the game machine AF4, in any one of the game machines AF1 to AF3, as the type of the specific effect executed by the specific effect execution means, when the dynamic display of the identification information indicating the specific determination result is executed A first specific effect in which the ratio of determination is higher, and a second specific effect in which the ratio of determination is lower when dynamic display of identification information indicating a specific determination result is executed than in the first specific effect. Since one type is determined by the effect type determination means from among a plurality of types including at least and, whether or not it is dynamic display of identification information indicating a specific determination result is determined from the effect type of the specific effect. You can let the player guess. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can play the game while paying more attention to the type of the specific effect.

In any one of the gaming machines AF1 to AF4, a specific area into which a game ball can enter; a privilege granting means for imparting a predetermined privilege based on the game ball entering the specific area; A specific flow path provided at a position where a game ball fired in a direction can flow in, and a game ball flowing down at least a predetermined section in the specific flow path enters the specific area rather than passing through the predetermined section. variable means that can be changed between a first position at which it is easier to be guided and a second position at which it is easier to pass through the predetermined section than to be guided to the specific area; As a state, the control for varying the variable means from the second position to the first position until a specific condition is satisfied is executed one or more times. It is better to start shooting the game ball in the second direction than to start shooting the game ball in the second direction after the dynamic display of the identification information indicating the specific determination result is completed. The gaming machine AF5 is characterized in that the number of game balls guided to the specific area tends to increase until the specific condition is satisfied.

According to the gaming machine AF5, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines AF1 to AF4, the following effects are exhibited. That is, a predetermined privilege is given by the privilege giving means based on the fact that the game ball enters the specific area where the game ball can enter. A game ball that is flowing down at least a predetermined section in a specific channel provided at a position where a game ball launched in a second direction can flow in is more likely to be guided to a specific area than passing through the predetermined section. The variable means is varied between a position and a second position where it is easier for the vehicle to pass through the predetermined section than to be guided to the specific area. As an advantageous state, the advantageous state setting means executes control for changing the variable means from the second position to the first position until a specific condition is satisfied one or more times. In the advantageous state, it is better to start shooting the game ball in the second direction during the specific period, and then shoot the game ball in the second direction after the dynamic display of the identification information indicating the specific determination result is completed. The number of game balls guided to the specific area tends to increase until the specific condition is established, rather than starting.

As a result, a player who wants to obtain a greater number of predetermined benefits can be made to make a more serious decision as to whether or not to start shooting the game ball in the second direction based on the suggested content of the specific effect. effective.

In the gaming machine AF5, the specific condition is established when the number of game balls entering the specific area after the variable means is changed to the first position becomes the first number, The predetermined section has a path length that allows a second number of game balls, which is larger than the first number, to flow down at least simultaneously when the variable means is changed to the second position. A game machine AF6 characterized by.

According to the gaming machine AF6, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine AF5, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the specific condition is established when the number of game balls entering the specific area after the variable means is changed to the first position reaches the first number. The predetermined section has a path length that allows a second number of game balls, which is larger than the second number, to flow down at least simultaneously when the variable means is changed to the second position.

As a result, the game can be played in anticipation that the predetermined section will be changed to the first position in a state where the number of game balls passing through the predetermined section exceeds the first number. There is

The gaming machine AF6 is equipped with a shooting means capable of shooting game balls at time intervals equal to or longer than a predetermined interval, and the predetermined section is in a state in which game balls are continuously shot at the predetermined intervals in the second direction. , so that the second number of game balls can reach the predetermined section after one game ball reaches the predetermined section until the game ball passes through the predetermined section. A game machine AF7 is characterized by allowing game balls to pass through.

According to the gaming machine AF7, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine AF6, the following effects are exhibited. Namely, game balls are shot by the shooting means at time intervals equal to or longer than a predetermined interval. The predetermined section is played so that the second number of game balls can reach the predetermined section after one game ball reaches the predetermined section until the game ball passes through the predetermined section. It is configured so that a sphere can pass through it.

As a result, the game ball is shot in the second direction at a predetermined interval, which is the shortest interval, to the player who determines that the dynamic display of the identification information indicating the specific determination result is based on the suggestive contents of the specific performance. has the effect of being able to

In the gaming machine AF7, the specific period is a period of a length that allows at least the second number of game balls to be shot when the game balls are continuously shot in the second direction at the predetermined intervals. A game machine AF8, characterized in that

According to the game machine AF8, in addition to the effects of the game machine AF7, at least the second number of game balls can be shot when the game balls are continuously shot in the second direction at predetermined intervals during the specific period. Since it is composed of a period of a certain length, there is a possibility that the second number of game balls can reach the predetermined section by shooting the game balls in the second direction during the specific period. , the player can make a more serious decision as to whether or not to shoot the game ball in the second direction.

In the gaming machine AF7 or AF8, as the advantageous state set by the advantageous state setting means, there is a first advantageous state, and after shifting to the advantageous state rather than the first advantageous state, the variable means shifts to the second position. A gaming machine AF9, characterized by comprising a state determining means for determining one state from among a plurality of states including at least a second advantageous state having a long period until it is changed.

According to the gaming machine AF9, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine AF7 or AF8, the advantageous state set by the advantageous state setting means is the first advantageous state, and after shifting to a more advantageous state than the first advantageous state One state is determined by the state determining means from among a plurality of states including at least a second advantageous state in which the period until the variable means is changed to the second position is long.

As a result, the number of game balls that can be shot before the variable means is changed to the second position increases in the second advantageous state, so more game balls are more likely to be guided to the specific area. Therefore, there is an effect that the game can be played expecting that the second advantageous state will be determined.

In the gaming machine AF9, the first advantageous state continues in the second direction at the predetermined interval as a period from transition to the advantageous state until the variable means is varied to the second position. A gaming machine AF10 is characterized in that a period is set for a length in which game balls exceeding the first number cannot be shot when the game balls are shot.

According to the game machine AF10, in addition to the effects of the game machine AF9, in the first advantageous state, the period from the transition to the advantageous state to the time when the variable means is changed to the second position is in the 23rd direction. When game balls are continuously shot with a predetermined feeling, a period of length in which game balls exceeding the first number cannot be shot is set, so the first advantageous state is determined. In this case, there is an effect that the game ball can be shot in the second direction during the specific period for the player who wants to obtain more predetermined benefits.

<Characteristic AG group> (Let the player choose between a jackpot that can aim for over-winning and a jackpot that cannot aim for over-winning)
A first area through which a game ball can pass, a second area different from the first area, first detection means capable of detecting passage of the game ball through the first area, and a game ball passing through the second area. a second detection means capable of detecting the passage of a ball; a determination means for executing determination based on the establishment of a determination condition; Alternatively, in a gaming machine provided with a bonus game execution means for executing a bonus game advantageous to the player based on the detection of the passage of the game ball by the second detection means, the game ball can be entered. A first specific area, a second specific area different from the first specific area, and a predetermined privilege based on the fact that the game ball enters the first specific area or the second specific area. A privilege granting means, a specific channel through which a game ball can flow down, and a game ball flowing down at least a predetermined section in the specific channel are more likely to be guided to the first specific region than passing through the predetermined section. A first variable means that can be changed between a first position and a second position that makes it easier to pass through the predetermined section rather than being guided to the first specific area, and a game ball entering the second specific area. a second variable means that can be changed between a third position where it is possible and a fourth position where it is more difficult to enter a game ball than the third position; As the type, when the passage of the game ball is detected by the first detection means after the determination by the determination means has resulted in the specific determination result, the first variable means changes from the second position to the second position. A first privilege game that is varied a predetermined number of times to one position is determined, and when passage of a game ball is detected by the second detection means, the second variable means moves from the fourth position to the third position. and a type determining means for determining a second privilege game that is varied a predetermined number of times.

Here, some gaming machines such as pachinko machines shift to a win state when the result of a lottery performed based on the winning of a game ball into a start winning hole is a win. Among such gaming machines, there are some that are provided with multiple types of winning types that differ in the number of times (the number of rounds) of opening the large opening to which prize balls are awarded by winning a game ball. There is an attempt to improve the interest in winning by making the values different (for example, Japanese Patent No. 2514417).

In addition, in such conventional gaming machines, the winning state is not started only by winning the lottery result, and the winning state is started when one of the plurality of operating winning holes provided on the game board wins. Some are started. In this conventional gaming machine, different types of winning games are started in accordance with the type of the actuated winning hole that the player wins.

However, in the above-described conventional gaming machine, when the winning type is determined, the amount of game value obtained during winning becomes a substantially constant amount corresponding to the winning type. In some cases, the game becomes monotonous during the winning state. That is, there is a problem that it becomes difficult to improve the interest of the player in the game.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine AG1, a first specific area into which a game ball can enter and a second specific area different from the first specific area are provided. A predetermined privilege is given by the privilege giving means based on the game ball entering the first specific area or the second specific area. A game ball flowing down at least a predetermined section in a specific channel through which the game ball can flow down is guided to a first position where it is more likely to be guided to the first specific area than passing through the predetermined section, and to the first specific area. The first variable means is variably configured to a second position at which it is easier to pass through the predetermined section. The second variable means is configured to be variable between a third position where the game ball can enter the second specific region and a fourth position where the game ball is more difficult to enter than the third position. ing. As the type of the privilege game executed by the privilege game execution means, after the determination by the determination means results in a specific determination result, when the passage of the game ball is detected by the first detection means, the first variable means A first privilege game that is varied from the second position to the first position a predetermined number of times is determined by the type determining means. On the other hand, when the passage of the game ball is detected by the second detection means, the second privilege game in which the second variable means is varied from the fourth position to the third position a predetermined number of times is determined by the type determination means. be.

As a result, the type of the privilege game can be changed according to whether the game ball passes through the first area or the second area, so that the area through which the game ball passes can be focused. It has the effect of being able to

The game machine AG1 is provided with passing means through which game balls can pass, and distributing means capable of distributing the game balls that have passed through the passing means to either the first area or the second area. A gaming machine AG2 characterized by:

According to the game machine AG2, in addition to the effects of the game machine AG1, the game balls that have passed through the passing means through which the game balls can pass are distributed to either the first area or the second area by the distribution means. Therefore, the type of privilege game is variable according to the area distributed by the distribution means. Therefore, there is an effect that the game can be played while paying attention to the area to be distributed.

In the game machine AG2, the state of the sorting means is shifted to the first area after at least a specific determination result is obtained in the determination by the determination means and before the execution of the privilege game is started. and a second distribution state in which the game balls are distributed to the second area at predetermined intervals.

According to the gaming machine AG3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine AG2, the state of the sorting means is changed at least during the period from when a specific determination result is obtained in the determination by the determining means to when the privilege game is started. , the first distribution state in which the game balls are distributed to the first area and the second distribution state in which the game balls are distributed to the second area are switched at predetermined intervals by the state switching means. By confirming the distribution state and passing through the passing means, there is an effect that the type of privilege game that the player likes can be determined.

The game machine AG3 is characterized by comprising display means capable of displaying an effect mode and effect execution means for executing a distribution state suggesting effect suggesting the distribution state of the distribution means on the display means. Game machine AG4.

According to the game machine AG4, in addition to the effects of the game machine AG3, the distribution state suggesting performance suggesting the distribution state of the distribution means is executed on the display means by the performance execution means, so the display means is confirmed. There is an effect that it is possible to easily recognize the timing at which the player's favorite privilege game is determined only by this.

In the game machine AG4, the effect executing means produces a first distribution state suggestion effect suggesting the first distribution state based on the switching to the first distribution state by the distribution state switching means. Execution of a second distribution state suggestive effect suggesting the second distribution state based on the fact that the distribution state switching means switches to the second distribution state. and a second suggestive effect execution means, wherein the gaming machine comprises an advantage determination means capable of determining the degree of advantage when the game ball passes through the first area, the first suggestive effect execution means comprising: The gaming machine AG5 is characterized in that the first distribution state suggesting effect can suggest the degree of advantage determined by the advantage determining means.

According to the gaming machine AG5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine AG4, the following effects are exhibited. That is, in the effect execution means, the first suggestion effect execution means performs the first distribution state suggestion effect suggesting the first distribution state based on the switching to the first distribution state by the distribution state switching means. While being executed, a second distribution state suggestion effect suggesting the second distribution state is executed based on the switching to the second distribution state. The degree of advantage when the game ball passes through the first area is discriminated by the advantage discriminating means. In the first distribution state suggesting effect, the degree of advantage determined by the advantage determining means is suggested by the first suggesting effect executing means.

As a result, there is an effect that the timing of passing through the first area can be determined according to the degree of advantage suggested in the first suggestion effect.

In the gaming machine AG5, the advantage determination means determines the number of game balls passing through the predetermined section, and the first suggestive effect execution means determines the number of game balls determined by the advantage determination means. A gaming machine AG6 characterized in that an effect suggesting the number can be suggested in the first distribution state suggesting effect.

According to the gaming machine AG6, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine AG5, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the number of game balls passing through the predetermined section is discriminated by the advantage discriminating means. An effect suggesting the number of game balls determined by the advantage determining means is suggested by the first suggesting effect executing means in the first distribution state suggesting effect.

As a result, by confirming the first suggestive effect, it is possible to easily understand the number of game balls guided to the first specific area when passing through the first area.

In any one of the gaming machines AG1 to AG6, the privilege game executing means is the game in which the ball enters the first specific area after the first variable means is first changed to the first position in the first privilege game. The first variable means is varied to the second position based on the number of balls becoming equal to or greater than the first number, and the predetermined section is a period in which the first variable means is varied to the second position. A gaming machine AG7 characterized by having a path length that allows a second number of game balls, which is larger than the first number, to flow down simultaneously.

According to the gaming machine AG7, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines AG1 to AG6, the following effects are exhibited. That is, in the first privilege game, after the first variable means is first changed to the first position, the number of game balls entering the first specific area becomes the first number or more, and the first variable means is changed. It is changed to the second position by the privilege game executing means. The predetermined section has a path length that allows a second number of game balls, which is larger than the first number, to flow down at the same time when the first variable means is changed to the second position.

As a result, the number of game balls passing through the predetermined section can be set to exceed the first number, and then the game balls can be shot by devising to pass through the first area. There is an effect that interest can be improved.

In the gaming machine AG7, the privilege game executing means is configured such that the game ball entering the second specific area after the second variable means is first changed to the third position in the second privilege game A game machine characterized in that the second variable means is varied to the fourth position based on a third number or more which is more than one and less than the second number. AG8.

According to the game machine AG8, in addition to the effects of the game machine AG7, the game ball entering the second specific area after the second variable means is first changed to the third position in the second privilege game Since the second variable means is changed to the fourth position by the privilege game executing means based on the third number, which is larger than the number and smaller than the second number, the second area is passed. Then, the third number of game balls, which is larger than the first number, can stably enter the second specific area. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can play the game with peace of mind while the second privilege game is being executed.

<Characteristic AH group> (Change the order of the selection menu according to the player's operation history)
Display means capable of displaying an image, operation means operable by the player, and display on the display means of an interlocking image whose mode changes in conjunction with the operation content of the operation means based on the establishment of a first condition. and when the second condition is satisfied while the linked image is being displayed by the linked image display means, the linked image displayed on the display means is displayed in accordance with the aspect of the linked image. One aspect is determined from among a plurality of aspects as the aspect of the interlocking image first displayed by the interlocking image display means when the first condition is established, and an effect executing means for executing a type of effect. and a gaming machine AH1, comprising: mode determining means.

Among gaming machines such as pachinko machines, gaming machines provided with a display device such as a liquid crystal display device are known. In this conventional gaming machine, symbols are variably displayed on the display device, and the symbols are stopped and displayed in a predetermined combination, thereby giving a player a big winning game. In addition, some of such conventional game machines are equipped with a sound output device such as a speaker, and by configuring not only visual effects but also auditory effects to be executable, the mode of effects can be changed. By diversifying, it was intended to improve interest (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2003-325886).

However, further diversification of production is required.

In addition, some of such conventional game machines are configured to be able to reproduce music as a kind of auditory effect during a predetermined period of time during a normal game, and are capable of reproducing music within the predetermined period of time. There are also those configured so that the type can be selected by the player.

However, in such a conventional game machine, as the number of songs set in the game machine becomes more diverse, it becomes more difficult for the player to find a favorite song from the list of selectable songs. There was a problem that the

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine AH1, when the first condition is established, an interlocking image whose mode changes in conjunction with the operation content of the operation means that the player can operate is displayed by the interlocking image display means. Is displayed. Based on the establishment of the second condition while the interlocked image is displayed by the interlocked image display means, the production execution means executes a type of production corresponding to the aspect of the interlocked image displayed on the display means. . The mode determining means determines one of a plurality of modes as the mode of the linked image to be displayed first by the linked image display means when the first condition is satisfied.

As a result, when the first condition is satisfied, it is possible to diversify the aspect of the interlocking image that is displayed first, so that there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In the game machine AH1, the mode determining means determines one mode according to at least the type of effect executed last time by the effect executing means.

According to the game machine AH2, since the mode determining means determines one mode according to at least the type of the effect executed last time by the effect executing means, the mode of the interlocking image can be diversified. has the effect of

The gaming machine AH1 or AH2 includes audio data reproduction means capable of reproducing audio data and audio output means for outputting audio corresponding to the audio data reproduced by the audio data reproduction means, and can be set as the linked image. The plurality of modes are composed of images of modes showing different musical pieces, and the effect executing means renders the audio data of the music corresponding to the mode of the linked image as the effect, the audio data reproducing means. A gaming machine AH3 characterized in that it is played back to the player.

According to the gaming machine AH3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine AH1 or AH2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the audio output means outputs audio corresponding to the audio data reproduced by the audio data reproducing means. A plurality of modes that can be set as linked images are composed of images of modes showing different songs. The audio data of the music piece corresponding to the form of the linked image is reproduced by the audio data reproducing means as an effect by the effect executing means.

As a result, it is possible to combine the visual presentation and the auditory presentation, so that there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In any one of the gaming machines AH1 to AH3, the aspect determining means selects one of a plurality of effect-corresponding images indicating information corresponding to the type of the effect as the mode of the interlocking image. The interlocking image display means provides an effect of displaying in the specific mode in a predetermined order each time the operation content of the operation means becomes the first operation content. The corresponding image is variable, and the effect executing means performs a type of effect according to the information shown in the effect corresponding image displayed in the specific mode when the second condition is satisfied. A game machine AH4 characterized in that it is executed based on.

According to the gaming machine AH4, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines AH1 to AH3, the following effects are exhibited. That is, as the mode of the interlocking image, the mode determining means determines the mode in which one of the plurality of effect-corresponding images indicating information corresponding to the type of effect is displayed in a specific mode. Each time the operation content of the operation means becomes the first operation content, the effect-corresponding image displayed in a specific mode is varied in a predetermined order by the interlocking image display means. A type of effect corresponding to information indicated in the effect-corresponding image displayed in a specific manner is executed by the effect execution means based on the establishment of the second condition.

As a result, the player can easily understand the type of effect executed by the effect executing means only by confirming the information shown in the effect-corresponding image displayed in a specific mode, thereby improving the game performance. There is an effect that the operation means can be operated so that the effect-corresponding image corresponding to the type of effect desired by the person is displayed in a specific manner.

In the game machine AH4, the mode determination means includes one of the effect-corresponding images to be displayed in a specific mode, and the effect-corresponding image to be changed to the specific mode when the operation of the first operation content is repeated. A gaming machine AH5, characterized in that it determines at least the order of images.

According to the gaming machine AH5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine AH4, one effect-corresponding image to be displayed in a specific mode and an effect that is changed to a specific mode when the operation of the first operation content is repeated. Since the order of the corresponding images is determined at least by the mode determining means, the order of the effect-corresponding images to be varied in a specific mode can be determined in advance. Therefore, there is an effect that the effect-corresponding image to be displayed in a specific mode can be specified earlier when the operation means is actually operated.

The gaming machine AH5 includes counting means for counting the number of executions of the effects executed by the effect executing means for each type of effect, and the mode determining means determines in advance the number of executions counted by the counting means. The order of the effect-corresponding images corresponding to the type of effect that is the number of times that the specified condition is satisfied is determined to be the order of being changed to the specific mode by the operation of the first operation content less than or equal to the specific number of times. A gaming machine AH6 characterized by:

According to the gaming machine AH6, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine AH5, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the number of times of execution of the effects executed by the effect executing means is counted by the counting means for each type of effect. A first operation content in which the order of the effect-corresponding images corresponding to the type of effect in which the number of executions counted by the counting means satisfies a predetermined specific condition is equal to or less than the specific number of times by the mode determining means. is determined in the order that is varied in a specific manner by the operation of .

As a result, the performance of the type of the number of times of execution satisfying the specific condition can be changed to a specific mode with the number of operations equal to or less than the specific number of times, so that the performance of the type of the number of times of execution satisfying the specific condition can be easily selected. can be done. Therefore, there is an effect that convenience for the player can be improved.

In the gaming machine AH6, the mode determination means determines the order of the effect-corresponding images corresponding to each of the first number of effects in descending order of the number of times of execution counted by the counting means by the first operation not more than the specific number of times. The game machine AH7 is characterized in that the order in which the content is changed to the specific mode is determined by the operation of the content.

According to the game machine AH7, in addition to the effects of the game machine AH6, the order of the effect-corresponding images corresponding to each of the first number of effects counted by the counting means in descending order of the number of times of execution counted by the counting means is determined a specific number of times by the mode determining means. Since the order of changing to the specific mode is determined by the operation of the following first operation content, the number of times that it has been changed to the specific mode is relatively large, and the player can change to the specific mode this time as well. An effect-corresponding image that is highly likely to be desired to be changed can be changed to a specific mode with a small number of operations. Therefore, there is an effect that convenience for the player can be further improved.

In the gaming machine AH7, the mode determining means changes the order of the effect-corresponding images corresponding to the first number of effects respectively to the specific mode as the number of executions counted by the counting means increases. The game machine AH8 is characterized in that the number of operations of the first operation content up to the point is determined so as to decrease.

According to the game machine AH8, in addition to the effects of the game machine AH7, the order of the effect-corresponding images corresponding to each of the first number of effects is changed in a specific manner as the number of executions counted by the counting means increases. Since it is determined by the mode determining means so as to reduce the number of operations of the first operation content until it is performed, the effect-corresponding image with a higher possibility that the player wants to change to a specific mode is selected. Since it is possible to change to a specific mode with a smaller number of operations, there is an effect that the convenience of the player can be further improved.

In any of the game machines AH6 to AH8, when the operation of the first operation content is executed within a predetermined period after the first condition is satisfied, the first operation after the first condition is satisfied The order of the effect-corresponding images displayed in a specific mode in the displayed interlocking image is changed to a specific mode by the second or more operations of the first operation content at least in the next determination by the mode determining means. A gaming machine AH9 characterized by comprising a setting means for setting the order to be changed.

According to the gaming machine AH9, in any of the gaming machines AH6 to AH8, when the operation of the first operation content is executed within a predetermined period after the first condition is met, the first condition is met. The order of the effect-corresponding images that have been displayed in a specific manner in the interlocking image that is first displayed from the beginning is changed to the specific manner in at least the next determination by the manner determining means, by the operation of the first operation content for the second number of times or more is set by the setting means so as to be determined in the order variable to . As for the effect-corresponding image that has been changed from a specific mode within a predetermined period, it is considered unlikely that the player will want to change it to a specific mode even when the linked image is displayed next time. By setting such an effect-corresponding image in an order in which it is changed to a specific mode with a relatively large number of operations equal to or greater than the second number of operations, the player is highly likely to want to change the effect to a specific mode. The images can be set in an order that is varied in a particular manner with relatively few manipulations. Therefore, there is an effect that convenience for the player can be further improved.

A game machine AH10 characterized in that, in any one of the game machines AH1 to AH9, the second condition is established when the operation content for the operation means becomes a specific operation content.

According to the game machine AH10, in addition to the effects produced by any one of the game machines AH1 to AH9, the second condition is established when the operation content for the operation means becomes a specific operation content. On the other hand, by performing an operation with specific operation content, it is possible to execute a type of effect corresponding to the aspect of the linked image displayed at that time. Therefore, there is an effect that the player himself/herself can select the effect that the player likes.

<Characteristic AI group> (varies the playback position of the song according to the circumstances in which the song was decided)
Based on the establishment of a predetermined execution condition, an effect execution means for executing one of a plurality of predetermined effects, and as the effect to be executed by the effect execution means, based on the establishment of a first condition, a first selection means for selecting one effect from a plurality of effects; a first start position set for each of the plurality of effects, and a second start position different from the first start position; The first start position is set as the start position of the effect selected by the first selection means among a plurality of start positions including at least, and the second start position is set as the start position of the effect selected by the second selection means. and start position setting means for setting the start position of the game machine AI1.

Among gaming machines such as pachinko machines, gaming machines provided with a display device such as a liquid crystal display device are known. In this conventional gaming machine, symbols are variably displayed on the display device, and the symbols are stopped and displayed in a predetermined combination, thereby giving a player a big winning game. In addition, some of such conventional game machines are equipped with a sound output device such as a speaker, and by configuring not only visual effects but also auditory effects to be executable, the mode of effects can be changed. By diversifying, it was intended to improve interest (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2003-325886).

In addition, among such conventional game machines, one song is randomly selected from a plurality of songs preset in the game machine as a kind of auditory presentation during a predetermined period of time during a normal game. There are some that can be played by In addition to reproducing randomly selected music during a predetermined period of time, some games are configured so that the player can select the type of music to be reproduced within the predetermined period of time.

However, in such a conventional gaming machine, there are cases where the player does not listen to the randomly selected music very well for a predetermined period of time and changes the music to the player's favorite music. There was a problem that most of the songs that were played may not be played.

On the other hand, according to the game machine AI1, one of a plurality of predetermined effects is executed by the effect execution means based on the establishment of a predetermined execution condition, and as the effect to be executed by the effect execution means , based on the establishment of the first condition, one effect is selected from the plurality of effects by the first selection means. On the other hand, based on the establishment of a second condition different from the first condition, one effect is selected from a plurality of effects by the second selecting means as the effect to be executed by the effect executing means. by a first selection means among a plurality of start positions including at least a first start position and a second start position different from the first start position set for each of a plurality of effects A first start position is set by the start position setting means as the start position of the selected effect. On the other hand, the second start position is set by the start position setting means as the start position of the effect selected by the second selection means.

As a result, since the performance can be started from a different start position depending on whether the performance is selected by the first selection means or the performance is selected by the second selection means, the player's interest in the game can be enhanced. has the effect of being able to improve

In the gaming machine AI1, an operation means operable by a player, an operation detection means for detecting an operation on the operation means, and a selection period setting for setting a selection period for selecting an effect to be executed by the effect execution means. wherein the first selection means selects an effect in accordance with the operation content of the operation means detected by the operation detection means during the selection period; The game machine AI2, wherein the means selects one effect from the plurality of effects based on the selection period being set by the selection period setting means.

According to the gaming machine AI2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine AI1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the operation detection means detects the operation of the operation means that the player can operate. A selection period for selecting an effect to be executed by the effect executing means is set by the selection period setting means. During the selection period, the first selection means selects an effect corresponding to the operation content for the operation means detected by the operation detection means. One effect is selected from a plurality of effects by the second selection means based on the selection period being selected by the selection period setting means.

As a result, the starting position of the performance can be changed depending on whether or not the performance is selected by the player's operation on the operating means, so that there is an effect that the performance mode can be diversified.

The gaming machine AI1 or AI2 comprises audio data reproduction means capable of reproducing audio data, and audio output means for outputting audio corresponding to the audio data reproduced by the audio data reproduction means, wherein the effect execution means is 2. A game machine AI3, wherein audio data corresponding to one of a plurality of mutually different songs is reproduced by said audio data reproducing means as said effect.

According to the game machine AI3, in addition to the effects of the game machine AI1 or AI2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the audio data reproducing means reproduces the audio data, and the audio output means outputs the audio corresponding to the audio data reproduced by the audio data reproducing means. Audio data corresponding to one of a plurality of songs different from each other is reproduced by the audio data reproducing means as an effect by the effect executing means.

As a result, the reproduction start position of the music can be changed according to whether the music is selected by the first selection means or the music is selected by the second selection means. has the effect of being able to improve

In the gaming machine AI3, the audio data is composed of a data group that becomes one piece of music by reproducing a plurality of data in a predetermined specific order, and the start position setting means comprises the setting such that when a piece of music is selected by the first selection means, reproduction is started from the first data among the plurality of data constituting the data group corresponding to the selected piece of music; The gaming machine AI4 is characterized in that, when a piece of music is selected by the selection means, reproduction is started from second data different from the first data.

According to the gaming machine AI4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine AI3, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the audio data is composed of a data group that becomes one piece of music by reproducing a plurality of pieces of data in a predetermined specific order. set by the start position setting means such that, when a piece of music is selected by the first selection means, reproduction is started from the first data among a plurality of data constituting a data group corresponding to the selected piece of music; be. On the other hand, when a piece of music is selected by the second selection means, the start position setting means sets so that the reproduction is started from the second data different from the first data.

Thus, by simply selecting one piece of data corresponding to the type of the selection means from among the data group as the data for starting reproduction, the reproduction start position of the music can be changed, so the reproduction start position is set. There is an effect that the processing load at the time can be reduced.

In the game machine AI4, an operation means operable by a player, an operation detection means for detecting an operation on the operation means, and a selection period setting for setting a selection period for selecting music to be executed by the effect execution means. wherein the first selection means selects one piece of music according to the operation content of the operation means detected by the operation detection means during the selection period; means for selecting one song from among the plurality of songs based on the selection period being selected by the selection period setting means, wherein the first data are arranged in the specific order; A game machine AI5 characterized in that the data is set in the first order among them.

According to the gaming machine AI5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine AI4, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the operation detection means detects the operation of the operation means that the player can operate. A selection period setting means sets a selection period for selecting a music piece to be executed by the effect executing means. One piece of music is selected by the first selection means according to the content of the operation on the operation means detected by the operation detection means during the selection period. One song is selected from the plurality of songs by the second selection means based on the selection period being selected by the selection period setting means. The first data is composed of data set in the first order among specific orders.

As a result, the music selected by the player by operating the operating means can be played back from the beginning of the music, so that the player can carefully listen to the music selected voluntarily from the beginning. can. Therefore, there is an effect that the player who listens to the music can be given a greater sense of satisfaction.

The gaming machine AI6 in the gaming machine AI5, wherein the second selection means randomly selects one song from the plurality of songs.

According to the game machine AI6, in addition to the effects of the game machine AI5, one song is randomly selected from a plurality of songs by the second selection means, so that the song set in the game machine can be reproduced without waste. It has the effect of being able to

A gaming machine AI7, wherein the second data comprises data including at least the most characteristic melody of the music in the gaming machine AI5 or AI6.

According to the game machine AI7, in addition to the effects of the game machine AI5 or AI6, the second data is composed of data including at least the most characteristic melody of the music, so when the selection period starts In addition, there is an effect that the player can decide whether or not to reproduce other music by operating the operation means after listening to at least the most characteristic melody among the music selected by the second selection means.

In the game machine AI3, the audio data is composed of one piece of data that becomes one piece of music when reproduced, and the plurality of start positions are set for the audio data corresponding to each piece of music. A gaming machine AI8 characterized by a plurality of playback positions set in advance.

According to the game machine AI8, in addition to the effects of the game machine AI3, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the audio data is composed of one piece of data that becomes one piece of music when reproduced. A plurality of start positions are composed of a plurality of playback positions preset for audio data corresponding to each piece of music.

This has the effect of making the audio data the simplest format.

<Characteristic AJ group> (Recombine the data of the song being played according to the progress of the game)
Based on the establishment of a predetermined execution condition, a performance execution means for executing one of a plurality of predetermined performances and one performance to be executed by the performance execution means are determined from the plurality of performances. and effect data group storage means for storing, for each type of the plurality of effects, a effect data group composed of a plurality of data, which is used by the effect executing means to execute one effect. a performance data group selection means for selecting a performance data group corresponding to the type of performance determined by the performance data group storage means from the performance data group storage means; and the performance data group selected by the performance data group selection means. data setting means for setting the plurality of data constituting the a game machine AJ1 characterized by comprising an order changing means capable of changing an order different from the specific order.

Among gaming machines such as pachinko machines, gaming machines provided with a display device such as a liquid crystal display device are known. In this conventional gaming machine, symbols are variably displayed on the display device, and the symbols are stopped and displayed in a predetermined combination, thereby giving a player a big winning game. In addition, some of such conventional game machines are equipped with a sound output device such as a speaker, and by configuring not only visual effects but also auditory effects to be executable, the mode of effects can be changed. By diversifying, it was intended to improve interest (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2003-325886).

In addition, some of such conventional game machines are configured to reproduce music as a kind of auditory presentation during a predetermined period of time during a normal game.

However, in such a conventional gaming machine, there is a possibility that the predetermined period will end before the chorus part, which is the most characteristic part of the song, is played, and the playback of the song will end. there were. Therefore, there is a problem that a player who cannot listen to the chorus may be dissatisfied.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine AJ1, one of a plurality of predetermined effects is executed by the effect execution means based on the establishment of a predetermined execution condition. One performance to be executed by a performance executing means is determined from a plurality of performances by a performance determining means. A performance data group composed of a plurality of data, which is used by a performance executing means to execute one performance, is stored for each of a plurality of performance types by a performance data storage means. A performance data group corresponding to the type of performance determined by the performance determination means is selected from the performance data group storage means by the performance data group selection means. The data setting means sets a plurality of data constituting the effect data group selected by the effect data group selection means so as to be used by the effect execution means in a predetermined specific order. The order in which the plurality of data are used is changed by the order changing means to a different order from the specific order according to the progress of the game.

Thereby, there is an effect that the effect can be preferably executed.

In the gaming machine AJ1, the data setting means sets the first order data in the specific order to the effect execution means based on the completion of the execution of the effect using the last order data in the specific order. A gaming machine AJ2 characterized in that it is set to be used by.

According to the gaming machine AJ2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine AJ1, based on the completion of the performance using the data of the last order in the specific order, the data of the first order in the specific order is produced. Since it is set by the data setting means so as to be used by the execution means, when the execution of one performance is completed by the performance execution means, the performance can be executed again from the beginning of the performance. Therefore, even if the execution of the performance using the data of the last order is finished, it is possible to prevent the period from becoming a non-performance period, so that there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In the game machine AJ1 or AJ2, a determination means for performing determination based on establishment of a predetermined determination condition, and a privilege game advantageous to the player is executed based on a specific determination result obtained by the determination by the determination means. and a bonus game executing means for executing the bonus game, wherein the effect executing means executes one of the plurality of effects during execution of the bonus game.

According to the game machine AJ3, in addition to the effects of the game machine AJ1 or AJ2, the following effects are produced. That is, the determination means executes determination based on the establishment of a predetermined determination condition, and the privilege game execution means executes a privilege game advantageous to the player based on a specific determination result obtained by the determination by the determination means. be done. During execution of the privilege game, one of a plurality of effects is executed by the effect executing means.

As a result, there is an effect that the effect can be favorably executed while the privilege game is being executed.

In the gaming machine AJ3, the effect data group provided for each of the plurality of types of effects includes first data corresponding to a specific effect mode set for each type of effect, and the first data. and at least second data different from the order variable means, wherein the first data is used by the effect execution means at least once until the privilege game ends. The game machine AJ4 is characterized in that the order in which the plurality of data are used is variable.

According to the game machine AJ4, in addition to the effects of the game machine AJ3, the following effects are achieved. That is, the effect data group provided for each of the plurality of types of effects includes first data corresponding to a specific effect mode set for each type of effect and second data different from the first data. data and at least The order in which the plurality of data are used is changed by the order changing means so that the first data is used by the effect execution means at least once before the privilege game is finished.

As a result, there is an effect that the specific effect mode can be executed at least once during execution of the privilege game.

In the gaming machine AJ4, the order changing means changes the plurality of data so that the first data is used by the effect executing means during a predetermined specific period in the bonus game. A game machine AJ5 characterized in that the order of use is variable.

According to the gaming machine AJ5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine AJ4, the plurality of data are generated so that the first data is used by the effect executing means during a predetermined specific period of the privilege game. Since the order in which is used is changed by the order changing means, there is an effect that the game can be played during the execution of the privilege game as one of the pleasures of entering the specific period.

any one of game machines AJ1 to AJ5, comprising audio data reproducing means capable of reproducing audio data, and audio output means capable of outputting audio corresponding to the audio data reproduced by the audio data reproducing means; The effect executing means causes the audio data reproducing means to reproduce one of a plurality of predetermined music pieces, and the effect data group includes a plurality of sounds for reproducing one piece of music. A gaming machine AJ6 characterized in that it is composed of data.

According to the gaming machine AJ6, in addition to the effects produced by any one of the gaming machines AJ1 to AJ5, the audio data is reproduced by the audio data reproducing means, and the audio corresponding to the audio data reproduced by the audio data reproducing means is output as audio. Output by means. One of a plurality of music pieces determined in advance is reproduced by the effect executing means for the audio data reproducing means. A performance data group is composed of a plurality of audio data for reproducing one piece of music.

As a result, since it is possible to execute an auditory effect by reproducing music, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In the game machine AJ6, the effect data group is composed of voice data for each part constituting one piece of music.

According to the game machine AJ7, in addition to the effects produced by the game machine AJ6, since the effect data group is composed of voice data for each part constituting one piece of music, the plurality of data are used by the order changing means. Even if the order is changed, there is an effect that it is possible to make the transition of the voice mode less uncomfortable.

In a game machine AJ7, a determination means for performing determination based on the establishment of a predetermined determination condition, and a privilege for executing a privilege game advantageous to a player based on a specific determination result obtained by the determination by the determination means. and game execution means, wherein the effect execution means causes the audio data reproduction means to reproduce any one of the plurality of songs during execution of the privilege game, and the types of the plurality of songs. The effect data group provided for each includes first data for reproducing a specific part set for each type of music, and second data for reproducing a part different from the specific part. and the order changing means is configured so that the first data is used by the effect execution means at least once until the privilege game ends. A game machine AJ8 characterized in that the order in which the data of is used is variable.

According to the gaming machine AJ8, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine AJ7, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the determination is performed by the determination means based on the establishment of a predetermined determination condition, and based on the determination by the determination means resulting in a specific determination result, the privilege game execution means performs a privilege game advantageous to the player. executed. During execution of the privilege game, one of a plurality of songs is reproduced by the performance execution means for the audio data reproduction means. The effect data group provided for each type of a plurality of music pieces includes first data for reproducing a specific part set for each type of music piece, and for reproducing a part different from the specific part. 2nd data and at least. The order in which the plurality of data are used is varied by the order varying means so that the first data is used at least once by the effect executing means until the privilege game is finished.

As a result, the specific part can be reproduced at least once before the privilege game ends, so that there is an effect that the player who is looking forward to the specific part and listening to the music can be satisfied. .

The game machine AJ8 is characterized in that it comprises operation means that can be operated by the player, and that the effect determination means determines one song from among the plurality of songs in accordance with the operation content of the operation means. A game machine AJ9.

According to the game machine AJ9, in addition to the effects of the game machine AJ8, one music piece is determined by the effect determination means from among a plurality of music pieces according to the operation contents of the operation means that the player can operate. , there is an effect that a specific part of a song voluntarily selected by the player can be played back at least once before the bonus game ends.

<Characteristic AK group> (When ending the playback of the music, play it until the playback position of the break and then end)
A first effect executing means for executing a first effect based on establishment of a predetermined execution condition, and a first condition predetermined while the first effect is being executed by the first effect executing means. is established, a progress determining means for determining the progress of the first effect being executed by the effect executing means, and the progress determined by the progress determining means are determined in advance. a second effect executing means for executing a second effect different from the first effect when the second condition is satisfied; and the progress determined by the progress determining means satisfies the second condition is not satisfied, suppressing means for suppressing execution of the second effect by the second effect executing means.

Among gaming machines such as pachinko machines, gaming machines provided with a display device such as a liquid crystal display device are known. In this conventional gaming machine, symbols are variably displayed on the display device, and the symbols are stopped and displayed in a predetermined combination, thereby giving a player a big winning game. In addition, some of such conventional game machines are equipped with a sound output device such as a speaker, and by configuring not only visual effects but also auditory effects to be executable, the mode of effects can be changed. By diversifying, it was intended to improve interest (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2003-325886).

In addition, some of such conventional game machines are configured to reproduce music as a kind of auditory presentation during a predetermined period of time during a normal game.

However, in such a conventional game machine, there is a possibility that the predetermined period will end during the reproduction of the chorus part, which is the most characteristic part of the music, and the chorus part will be cut off halfway. . For this reason, there is a problem that the player who cannot fully listen to the chorus may feel dissatisfied.

On the other hand, according to the game machine AK1, the first effect executing means executes the first effect based on the establishment of the predetermined execution condition, and the first effect executing means executes the first effect. The progress determining means determines the progress of the first effect being executed by the effect executing means based on the fact that a predetermined first condition is satisfied during the period. When the progress discriminated by the progress discriminating means satisfies a predetermined second condition, a second effect different from the first effect is executed by the second effect executing means. When the progress determined by the progress determining means does not satisfy the second condition, the suppressing means suppresses the execution of the second effect by the second effect executing means.

Thereby, there is an effect that the first effect can be preferably executed.

In the gaming machine AK1, the suppressing means suppresses execution of at least the second effect until the progress satisfies the second condition.

According to the gaming machine AK2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine AK1, the suppression means suppresses the execution of at least the second presentation until the progress satisfies the second condition, so the first presentation is suppressed. There is an effect that it can be executed more suitably.

In the gaming machine AK2, whether the progress satisfies the second condition based on the fact that the period during which the execution of the second effect is suppressed by the suppressing means is equal to or longer than a predetermined first period. A game machine AK3, further comprising an execution control means for controlling the execution of the second effect by the second effect executing means regardless of whether the second effect is executed.

According to the gaming machine AK3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine AK2, the progress status is changed based on the fact that the period during which the execution of the second effect is suppressed by the suppression means is longer than or equal to the predetermined first period. Regardless of whether or not the second condition is satisfied, the period during which the execution of the second effect is suppressed because the execution control means controls the second effect means to start the execution of the second effect. becomes too long and the period for executing the second effect becomes excessively short.

variable ball entry means capable of changing between a first state in which a game ball can be entered and a second state in which a game ball is more difficult to enter than in the first state, in any one of the game machines AK1 to AK3; Determining means for executing determination based on the establishment of a determination condition, and the variable ball entry means being predetermined from the second state to the first state based on a specific determination result obtained by the determination by the determining means. variable game execution means for executing a variable game whose number of times is variable, wherein the first effect execution means executes the first effect based on the start of the variable game; The second effect execution means executes the second effect in a period from the end of the last variable to the first state in the one variable game to the elapse of a predetermined second period. The game machine AK4 is characterized by

According to the game machine AK4, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines AK1 to AK3, the following effects are produced. That is, the variable ball entry means is configured to be variable between a first state in which a game ball can enter and a second state in which a game ball is more difficult to enter than in the first state. Determination is performed by the determination means based on the establishment of the determination condition, and the variable ball entry means is changed from the second state to the first state a predetermined number of times based on the specific determination result obtained in the determination by the determination means. A variable game is executed by the variable game executing means. A first effect execution means executes a first effect based on the start of the variable game. The second effect executing means executes the second effect during the period from the end of the last variable to the first state in one variable game to the elapse of a predetermined second period.

As a result, it is possible to prevent the first effect that has been executed while the change to the first state is being performed a predetermined number of times from being interrupted halfway due to the start of the second effect. be.

In the gaming machine AK4, the first effect includes at least a specific effect period during which a specific effect mode is executed in the effect period. A gaming machine AK5 characterized by suppressing execution of the second effect by the second effect execution means when the means determines that the specific effect period is in effect.

According to the game machine AK5, in addition to the effects of the game machine AK4, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the effect period of the first effect includes at least a specific effect period during which a specific effect mode is executed. When the progress determining means determines that it is the specific effect period, the suppressing means suppresses the execution of the second effect by the second effect executing means.

As a result, there is an effect that a specific effect mode can be executed for a longer time.

In the game machine AK4 or AK5, period determining means for determining a period during which the execution of the second effect is suppressed by the suppressing means, and based on the period determined by the period determining means, as the second effect a second effect mode selecting means for selecting one effect mode to end before the second period elapses from among a plurality of executable effect modes.

According to the game machine AK6, in addition to the effects of the game machine AK4 or AK5, the following effects are produced. That is, the period determination means determines the period during which the suppression means suppresses the execution of the second effect. Based on the period discriminated by the period discriminating means, one of the plurality of presentation modes executable as the second presentation is selected by the second presentation mode selecting means to end before the second period elapses. selected by

As a result, there is an effect that the second effect can be reliably ended before the second period elapses.

any one of game machines AK1 to AK6, comprising audio data reproducing means capable of reproducing audio data, and audio output means capable of outputting audio corresponding to the audio data reproduced by the audio data reproducing means, The first effect executing means executes the first effect by causing the audio data reproducing means to reproduce a predetermined music, and the suppressing means causes the progress status determining means to reproduce the predetermined music. , the game machine AK7 suppresses execution of the second effect by the second effect executing means when it is determined that the specific reproduction range is being reproduced in the game machine AK7.

According to the game machine AK7, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines AK1 to AK6, the following effects are produced. That is, the audio data reproducing means reproduces the audio data, and the audio output means outputs audio corresponding to the audio data reproduced by the audio data reproducing means. The first effect executing means executes the first effect by causing the audio data reproducing means to reproduce the predetermined music. When the progress determining means determines that the specific reproduction range of the predetermined music is being reproduced, the suppressing means suppresses the execution of the second effect by the second effect executing means.

As a result, it is possible to suppress the execution of the second effect while reproducing the specific reproduction range of the music, and the reproduction of the specific reproduction range to be discontinued, so that the player who wishes to listen to the specific reproduction range can be satisfied. It has the effect of being able to

In the gaming machine AK7, an operating means that can be operated by a player is provided, and the first effect executing means selects one song from a plurality of predetermined songs according to the operation content of the operating means. A gaming machine AK8 characterized in that it is to be reproduced by an audio data reproduction means.

According to the gaming machine AK8, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine AK7, one of a plurality of predetermined musical pieces according to the operation content of the operation means that the player can operate is executed as the first effect. Since the means causes the audio data reproducing means to reproduce the music, the specific reproduction range of the music voluntarily selected by the player can be reproduced for a longer period of time. Therefore, there is an effect that the player who selects the music can be given a greater sense of satisfaction.

The game machine AK9, wherein the specific reproduction range in the game machine AK7 or AK8 includes at least part of the chorus of the music.

According to the game machine AK9, in addition to the effects of the game machine AK7 or AK8, the specific reproduction range is configured to include at least a part of the chorus of the song, so that the part that is generally the most exciting in the song. A certain chorus can be played longer. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can be satisfied.

<Characteristic AL group> (Provide songs that can only be selected by random selection)
Based on the establishment of a predetermined execution condition, a predetermined specific condition is satisfied as a performance execution means for executing one of a plurality of predetermined performances and a performance to be executed by the performance execution means. The specific condition is satisfied as an effect to be executed by the first selection means capable of selecting one effect from the plurality of effects and the effect execution means based on the fact that the execution condition is satisfied in the state where the specific condition is satisfied. a second selection means capable of selecting one performance from among the plurality of performances excluding at least a specific performance, based on the fulfillment of the execution condition in a state in which the game is not running. game machine AL1.

Among gaming machines such as pachinko machines, gaming machines provided with a display device such as a liquid crystal display device are known. In this conventional gaming machine, symbols are variably displayed on the display device, and the symbols are stopped and displayed in a predetermined combination, thereby giving a player a big winning game. In addition, some of such conventional game machines are equipped with a sound output device such as a speaker, and by configuring not only visual effects but also auditory effects to be executable, the mode of effects can be changed. By diversifying, it was intended to improve interest (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2003-325886).

In addition, among such conventional gaming machines, during a predetermined period during a normal game, the player is allowed to select one song from a plurality of songs preset in the gaming machine, and the player selects one song. There exists a system that is configured to be able to reproduce a musical piece as a kind of auditory presentation. In addition, among the options selectable by the player, in addition to the item indicating the name of the song to be played back, there are also items indicating that the song is determined at random. It is configured to meet the maximum.

However, in such a conventional gaming machine, since there is little merit in randomly determining songs, most players select their favorite songs, and the selection frequency of items in which songs are randomly determined is low. There was a problem that it became low.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine AL1, one of a plurality of predetermined effects is executed by the effect execution means based on establishment of a predetermined execution condition. As the performance to be executed by the performance execution means, one performance is selected from a plurality of performances by the first selection means based on the fulfillment of the execution condition in a state where the predetermined specific condition is established. . On the other hand, as the effect to be executed by the effect execution means, the second selection means selects at least a specific effect from among a plurality of effects, excluding at least a specific effect, based on the fact that the execution condition is satisfied in a state where the specific condition is not satisfied. 1 effect is selected.

As a result, whether or not the specific performance is executed can be varied depending on whether or not the specific condition is established, so that the player can pay attention to whether or not the specific condition is established. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine AL1, display means capable of displaying an image, operation means operable by the player, and an interlocking image whose mode changes in conjunction with the operation content of the operation means on the basis of establishment of a predetermined display condition. and a linked image display means for displaying on the display means, the first selection means, as the specific condition, in a state where the linked image in a specific mode is displayed on the display means and the execution condition is One effect is selected from the plurality of effects based on the establishment of the effect, and the second selection means displays the linked image in a mode different from the specific mode on the display means. The gaming machine AL2 is characterized in that the game machine AL2 selects an effect corresponding to the aspect of the interlocking image based on the fact that the execution condition is satisfied in a state where the game machine AL2 is in a state where the game machine AL2 is on.

According to the gaming machine AL2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine AL1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, based on the establishment of a predetermined display condition, an interlocking image whose mode changes in conjunction with the operation content of the operating means is displayed on the display means by the interlocking image display means. As a specific condition, one performance is selected by a first selection means from among a plurality of performances based on establishment of an execution condition in a state in which an interlocking image of a specific mode is displayed on a display means. The second selecting means selects an effect corresponding to the mode of the interlocking image based on the fulfillment of the execution condition while the interlocking image of a mode different from the specific mode is being displayed on the display means.

Thus, by operating the operation means, the player can select whether the first selection means selects the effect or the second selection means selects the effect. There is an effect that the player himself/herself can select the selection method of the effect.

The gaming machine AL2 includes audio data reproducing means capable of reproducing audio data, and audio output means capable of outputting audio corresponding to the audio data reproduced by the audio data reproducing means, and is set as the linked image. The plurality of modes to be obtained are composed of images of modes showing different songs, and the second selection means selects a song corresponding to the mode of the linked image. Game machine AL3.

According to the gaming machine AL3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine AL1 or AL2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, audio data is reproduced by the audio data reproducing means, and audio corresponding to the audio data reproduced by the audio data reproducing means is output by the audio output means. A plurality of modes that can be set as linked images are composed of images of modes showing different songs. A piece of music corresponding to the aspect of the linked image is selected by the second selection means.

Thus, by operating the operation means and selecting the interlocking image showing the desired music, the music desired by the player can be played back, so that the sound mode suitable for each player can be selected. There is an effect of being able to provide

In any one of the game machines AL1 to AL3, a determining means for performing determination based on the establishment of a determining condition, and an advantage advantageous to the player based on the first determination result obtained by the determination by the determining means. and advantageous setting means for setting a game state, wherein the effect executing means executes one of the plurality of effects based on the determination by the determining means. The 1 selection means selects one effect from the plurality of effects when the determination by the determination means results in the first determination result, and the determination by the determination means is the first determination result. A game machine AL4 is characterized in that one performance is selected from among the plurality of performances excluding at least a specific performance when a different second determination result is obtained.

According to the gaming machine AL4, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines AL1 to AL3, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the discrimination is executed by the discrimination means based on the establishment of the discrimination condition, and the advantage setting means sets a profitable gaming state advantageous to the player based on the first discrimination result obtained by the discrimination by the discrimination means. be done. One of the plurality of effects is executed by the effect execution means based on the execution of the determination by the determination means. When the determination by the determination means results in a first determination result, the first selection means selects one effect from a plurality of effects, while the determination by the determination means differs from the first determination result. When the second determination result is obtained, one effect is selected by the first selection means from among the plurality of effects except at least the specific effect.

As a result, it is possible for the player to recognize that an advantageous game state is set when a specific performance is selected by the first selection means, so attention is paid to the type of performance selected by the first selection means. It has the effect of being able to

The game machine AL4 is provided with a notification performance execution means for executing a notification performance for reporting whether or not the advantageous game state is set, and the execution condition is met at least before the notification performance is executed. A game machine AL5 characterized by being a thing.

According to the gaming machine AL5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine AL4, the following effects are exhibited. In other words, the notification effect executing means executes the notification effect for notifying whether or not the game state is set. An execution condition is satisfied at least before the notification performance is executed.

As a result, if the specific performance is selected by the first selection means, it is confirmed that the advantageous game state will be established before the notification performance is confirmed, so whether or not the advantageous game state is set can be determined early. There is an effect that the player who wants to know can play the game expecting that the first selection means will select an effect.

In the gaming machine AL5, when the determination by the determination means results in the first determination result or the second determination result, a privilege game execution means for executing a privilege game advantageous to the player; a disadvantageous setting means for setting a disadvantageous game state more disadvantageous than the advantageous game state as a game state after the privilege game executed based on the determination result of is obtained, and the advantageous setting The means sets the advantageous game state as a game state after the privilege game executed based on the first determination result is completed, and the effect executing means sets the privilege. A game machine AL6 characterized in that an effect is executed during execution of a game.

According to the gaming machine AL6, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine AL5, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when the discrimination by the discriminating means results in the first discriminating result or the second discriminating result, the privilege game executing means executes a privilege game advantageous to the player. A disadvantageous game state more disadvantageous than the advantageous game state is set by the disadvantageous setting means as the game state after the privilege game executed based on the second determination result is completed. An advantageous game state is set by the advantage setting means as a game state after the privilege game executed based on the first determination result is completed. The performance is executed by the performance executing means during execution of the privilege game.

As a result, when the specific performance is executed, the privilege game is executed, which is advantageous to the player, and furthermore, the game state after the privilege game ends becomes the advantageous game state. is also determined, there is an effect that the player can have a greater sense of satisfaction.

The gaming machine AL6 comprises display means capable of displaying identification information, and dynamic display execution means for executing dynamic display of the identification information indicating the result of determination by the determination means on the display means. As a mode of dynamic display of the identification information executed based on the first determination result in determination, a first mode of a mode in which the first identification information is displayed in a stopped state, and a second identification a first mode determining means for determining one of the modes in which the information is statically displayed and the second mode; and a second mode determining means for determining the first mode as the dynamic display mode of the game machine AL7.

According to the gaming machine AL7, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine AL6, the following effects are exhibited. Namely, dynamic display of the identification information indicating the determination result by the determination means is performed on the display means by the dynamic display execution means. As a mode of dynamic display of the identification information executed based on the determination by the determination means having the first determination result, a first mode in which the first identification information is statically displayed, and a second mode. Either the second mode of the modes in which the identification information is displayed in a stopped state is determined by the first mode determining means. The second mode determination means determines the first mode as the dynamic display mode of the identification information to be executed based on the second determination result obtained by the determination by the determination means.

As a result, when the dynamic display of the identification information is executed in the first mode, it becomes difficult for the player to distinguish whether the first determination result or the second determination result is obtained. Therefore, there is an effect that a game can be played while paying attention to whether or not a specific effect is selected by the first selection means.

In the gaming machine AL7, the first selection means determines the first determination result in the determination by the determination means, and performs the determination by the determination means rather than the dynamic display of the identification information in the second mode. , the first determination result is obtained, and the ratio of selecting the specific effect is higher when the dynamic display of the identification information is executed in the first mode. A gaming machine AL8 characterized by:

According to the game machine AL8, in addition to the effects of the game machine AL7, the determination by the determination means results in the first determination result, and the determination by the determination means is performed rather than the dynamic display of the identification information in the second mode. When the identification information is displayed dynamically in the first mode, the first determination result is the first determination result. When the dynamic display is executed, there is an effect that the game can be played with a stronger expectation that the specific effect will be selected by the first selection means.

<Characteristic AM group> (The range of the history area is varied according to the number of accumulated history information)
storage means comprising at least a display means capable of displaying an image, a first storage area capable of storing game-related data, and a second storage area different from the first storage area; storage control means for controlling a plurality of predetermined data to be stored in the storage control means; and an image corresponding to at least the data stored in the first storage area and the second storage area by the storage control means. display control means for controlling display on a display means; and specific data among the plurality of data that satisfies a predetermined specific condition as data stored in the first storage area by the storage control means. and one or more data out of the plurality of data different from the specific data as data to be stored in the second storage area by the storage control means and data stored in the first storage area by the storage control means when the number of data set by the first data setting means is less than a predetermined specific number and additional data setting means for setting one or more data out of data different from the specific data in addition to the data set by the first data setting means. Machine AM1.

Among gaming machines such as pachinko machines, gaming machines provided with a display device such as a liquid crystal display device are known. In this conventional gaming machine, symbols are variably displayed on the display device, and the symbols are stopped and displayed in a predetermined combination, thereby giving a player a big winning game. In addition, some of such conventional game machines are equipped with a sound output device such as a speaker, and by configuring not only visual effects but also auditory effects to be executable, the mode of effects can be changed. By diversifying, it was intended to improve interest (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2003-325886).

However, further diversification of production is required.

In addition, some of such conventional game machines are configured to be able to reproduce music as a kind of auditory effect during a predetermined period of time during a normal game, and are capable of reproducing music within the predetermined period of time. There are also those configured so that the type can be selected by the player.

However, in such a conventional game machine, as the number of songs set in the game machine becomes more diverse, it becomes more difficult for the player to find a favorite song from the list of selectable songs. There was a problem that the

On the other hand, according to the game machine AM1, the storage means is composed of a first storage area capable of storing game-related data and a second storage area different from the first storage area. The storage control means controls such that a plurality of predetermined data are stored in the storage means. The display control means controls such that an image corresponding to at least the data stored in the first storage area and the second storage area by the storage control means is displayed on the display means. Specific data that satisfies a predetermined specific condition among the plurality of data is set by the first data setting means as data to be stored in the first storage area by the storage control means. As the data to be stored in the second storage area by the storage control means, one or a plurality of data out of the plurality of data different from the specific data are set by the second data setting means. When the number of data set by the first data setting means is less than the predetermined specific number, the data to be stored in the first storage area by the storage control means is one or A plurality of data are set by the additional data setting means in addition to the data set by the first data setting means.

Thus, even when the number of data set by the first data setting means is less than the specific number, the additional data setting means can additionally set the data, so that the data can be preferably set. has the effect of

In the game machine AM1, the display control means displays an image according to the order of data stored in the first storage area and the second storage area.

According to the game machine AM2, in addition to the effects of the game machine AM1, the display control means displays an image according to the order of the data stored in the first storage area and the second storage area. Images can be made different according to the order of arrangement. Therefore, there is an effect that the display mode can be diversified.

In the gaming machine AM1 or AM2, the additional data setting means additionally sets data to be stored in the first storage area so that the number of data stored in the first storage area is a specific number. A gaming machine AM3 characterized by:

According to the game machine AM3, in addition to the effects of the game machine AM1 or AM2, the data to be stored in the first storage area is set by the additional data setting means so that the number of data stored in the first storage area is the specified number. Even if the number of data set by the first data setting means is less than the specific number, the number of data to be set in the first storage area is surely set to the specific number. can be done. Therefore, there is an effect that the data can be set more appropriately.

In any one of the game machines AM1 to AM3, the additional data setting means selects data to be stored in the first storage area in descending order of preset priority among data different from the specific data. A gaming machine AM4 characterized by being additionally set.

According to the game machine AM4, in addition to the effect produced by any one of the game machines AM1 to AM3, among the data different from the specific data, the data different from the specific data are set to the first data by the additional data setting means in descending order of preset priority. Since the data to be stored in the storage area is additionally set, when the number of data set by the first data setting means is less than the specific number, the data is set more preferably in the first storage area. It has the effect of being able to

Any one of the game machines AM1 to AM4 includes an operation means operable by a player and an operation detection means for detecting an operation on the operation means, and the display control means comprises the first storage area and the When the operation detection means detects an operation to the operation means while an image corresponding to at least the data stored in the second storage area is being displayed, the A gaming machine AM5 characterized in that the aspect of an image is variable.

According to the game machine AM5, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines AM1 to AM4, the following effects are produced. That is, the operation detection means detects the operation of the operation means that the player can operate. When the operation detecting means detects an operation on the operating means while an image corresponding to at least the data stored in the first storage area and the second storage area is being displayed, it is interlocked with the details of the operation on the operating means. Then, the mode of the image is changed by the display control means.

As a result, the display mode can be changed in conjunction with the operation content of the operation means by the player, so that the operation means can be operated until the display mode desired by the player is obtained. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to provide the player with the enjoyment of selecting the display mode.

In the game machine AM5, the display control means displays on the display means an image group composed of a plurality of images corresponding to a plurality of data stored in the first storage area and the second storage area. In the image group, an image corresponding to one data among the plurality of data is displayed in a first mode, and the other images are displayed in a second mode different from the first mode. The game machine AM6 is characterized in that the display control means changes the image displayed in the first mode in conjunction with the operation content of the operation means.

According to the gaming machine AM6, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine AM5, the following effects are exhibited. That is, an image group composed of a plurality of images corresponding to a plurality of data stored in the first storage area and the second storage area is displayed on the display means by the display control means. An image corresponding to one data among the plurality of data is displayed in a first mode, and other images are displayed in a second mode different from the first mode. The image displayed in the first mode is changed by the display control means in conjunction with the operation content of the operation means.

As a result, the image displayed in the first mode can be changed in conjunction with the operation content of the operation means by the player, so that the player can select the image to be displayed in the first mode. It has the effect of being able to

In the gaming machine AM6, the image corresponding to the data stored in the first storage area can be changed to the first mode when the number of times the operating means is operated is within a predetermined specific number of times. A gaming machine AM7 characterized by:

According to the game machine AM7, in addition to the effects of the game machine AM6, the image corresponding to the data stored in the first storage area can be changed within a predetermined specific number of times of operation of the operating means. Therefore, there is an effect that the convenience of the player who wants to change the image corresponding to the data stored in the first storage area to the first mode can be improved.

In the gaming machine AM6 or AM7, when a predetermined specific condition is established while the group of images is being displayed, a specific effect in a mode corresponding to the image changed to the first mode is executed. A game machine AM8 characterized by comprising a specific effect execution means for executing.

According to the game machine AM8, in addition to the effects of the game machine AM6 or AM7, the image is changed to the first mode based on the establishment of a predetermined specific condition while the image group is being displayed. Since the specific effect of the mode corresponding to is executed by the specific effect executing means, there is an effect that the player can select the mode of the specific effect.

The gaming machine AM8 comprises audio data reproducing means capable of reproducing audio data, and audio output means for outputting audio corresponding to the audio data reproduced by the audio data reproducing means, wherein the specific effect execution means The game machine AM9 is characterized in that, as the specific effect, the audio data reproducing means reproduces audio data for outputting music corresponding to the image that is changed to the first mode.

According to the gaming machine AM9, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine AM8, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the audio data is reproduced by the audio data reproducing means. The audio output means outputs audio corresponding to the audio data reproduced by the audio data reproducing means. As the specific effect, audio data for outputting music corresponding to the image changed to the first mode is reproduced by the specific effect executing means to the audio data reproducing means.

As a result, the player can select the music to be reproduced, so that there is an effect that the interest of the player can be improved.

<Characteristic AN group> (Select whether to match the voice mode with the actual number of rounds or the number of rounds in the production)
A specific effect execution means for executing a specific effect based on the establishment of either a predetermined first condition or a second condition different from the first condition, and based on the establishment of the second condition, Suggestive effect execution means capable of executing a suggestive effect suggesting the establishment of the first condition at least before the specific effect is executed; a first mode setting means for setting a first mode as a mode; and a first mode setting means for setting the first mode as the mode of the specific effect when the second condition is satisfied and the suggestive effect is not executed by the suggestive effect executing means. a second mode setting means for setting a second mode different from the first mode; A gaming machine AN1 characterized by comprising third mode setting means for setting either the first mode or the second mode.

Among gaming machines such as pachinko machines, gaming machines provided with a display device such as a liquid crystal display device are known. In this conventional gaming machine, symbols are variably displayed on the display device, and the symbols are stopped and displayed in a predetermined combination, thereby providing a winning game advantageous to the player. In addition, some of such conventional game machines are equipped with a sound output device such as a speaker, and by configuring not only visual effects but also auditory effects to be executable, the mode of effects can be changed. By diversifying, it was intended to improve interest (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2003-325886).

However, further diversification of production is required.

In addition, in such conventional gaming machines, whether or not a winning game is given, and whether or not a state that is advantageous to the player after the winning game is completed (for example, a variable probability state). It is also known that it can be suggested by In this conventional gaming machine, it is possible to make the player play the game by paying attention to whether or not the effect of suggestive content that is advantageous to the player is executed. Furthermore, when it is determined that the player will be in an advantageous state, an effect with contents suggesting that the player will be disadvantaged is executed for a predetermined period of time, and after the predetermined period of time has elapsed, an effect that is advantageous to the player is executed. There are also those that execute an effect (so-called reverse effect) that suggests that it will be in a state.

However, for the player who wants to know early whether or not the state will shift to an advantageous state, the execution of the reversal effect delays the timing of knowing the result of whether or not the state will shift to an advantageous state. , there is a problem that the player may be dissatisfied.

On the other hand, according to the game machine AN1, the specific effect executing means executes the specific effect based on the establishment of either the predetermined first condition or the second condition different from the first condition. be. Based on the establishment of the second condition, the suggestive effect executing means executes a suggestive effect suggesting the establishment of the first condition at least before the specific effect is executed. The first mode is set by the first mode setting means as the mode of the specific effect executed based on the establishment of the first condition. When the second condition is established and the suggestive performance executing means does not execute the suggestive performance, the second mode setting means sets the second mode different from the first mode as the mode of the specific performance. When the second condition is satisfied and the suggestive effect executing means executes the suggestive effect, either the first mode or the second mode is set by the third mode setting means as the mode of the specific effect. be.

As a result, when the second mode is set by the third mode setting means, the player can perceive that the second condition is satisfied, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved. has the effect of

In the game machine AN1, a determining means for performing determination based on the establishment of a determining condition, and privilege game execution for executing a privilege game advantageous to the player based on a specific determination result obtained by the determination by the determining means. Among a plurality of types including at least a first privilege game and a second privilege game more advantageous to the player than the first privilege game as the privilege game type executed by means and the privilege game execution means and a type determining means for determining one type from, the first condition is satisfied when the first privilege game is determined by the type determining means, and the second condition is The game machine AN2 is characterized in that it is established when the second privilege game is determined by the type determining means.

According to the gaming machine AN2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine AN1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the discrimination means executes discrimination based on the establishment of the discrimination condition, and the privilege game execution means executes a privilege game advantageous to the player based on the specific discrimination result obtained by the discrimination by the discrimination means. . As the type of the privilege game to be executed by the privilege game execution means, a plurality of types including at least a first privilege game and a second privilege game more advantageous to the player than the first privilege game are selected by the category determination means. 1 type is determined. The first condition is satisfied when the type determination means determines the first privilege game, while the second condition is satisfied when the type determination means determines the second privilege game.

As a result, when the second mode is set by the third mode setting means, the player can perceive that a more advantageous second privilege game has been determined, so that more attention is paid to the mode of the specific effect. There is an effect that a game can be played by

In the gaming machine AN2, based on the determination of the first privilege game by the type determining means, a first notification effect is executed for informing a first degree of advantage corresponding to the degree of advantage of the first privilege game. A first notification effect execution means, and a second notification effect for notifying a second advantage degree corresponding to the advantage degree of the second privilege game based on the fact that the second privilege game is determined by the type determination means. and a second notification effect execution means for executing, wherein the suggestive effect execution means executes an effect that is difficult to distinguish from the first information effect as the suggestive effect. Machine AN3.

According to the game machine AN3, in addition to the effects of the game machine AN2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, based on the determination of the first privilege game by the type determination means, the first notification effect for notifying the first degree of advantage corresponding to the degree of advantage of the first privilege game is executed by the first notification effect execution means. be done. Based on the determination of the second privilege game by the type determining means, the second notification performance executing means executes the second notification performance for informing the second advantage degree corresponding to the advantage degree of the second privilege game. . As the suggestive effect, the suggestive effect executing means executes an effect that is difficult to distinguish from the first notification effect.

As a result, the player can be made to recognize the type of the privilege game according to the type of the notification effect to be executed, so that there is an effect that the player can play the game while paying more attention to the type of the notification effect. .

In the gaming machine AN2 or AN3, variable ball entry means for changing from a first state in which a game ball is difficult to enter to a second state in which a game ball can be entered during execution of the privilege game, and the variable ball entry means. and a privilege granting means for granting a predetermined privilege based on the game ball entering the second state, wherein the second privilege game is more likely than the first privilege game when the variable ball entering means is in the second state , the specific effect is to execute a specific effect mode at least once in one effect period, and the first mode is when the execution of the specific effect is started. A game machine AN4 characterized in that a period from when the game is played to when the specific effect mode is executed is shorter than that of the second mode.

According to the gaming machine AN4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine AN2 or AN3, the variable ball entry means changes from the first state in which the game ball is difficult to enter to the second state in which the game ball can enter during execution of the privilege game. is variable. A predetermined privilege is given by the privilege giving means based on the entry of the game ball into the variable ball entering means. The number of times the variable ball entering means is changed to the second state in the second privilege game is greater than in the first privilege game. A specific effect mode is executed at least once in the effect period of one specific effect. A period from the start of execution of the specific effect to the execution of the specific effect mode is shorter in the first mode than in the second mode.

As a result, when the number of times of changing to the second state is small and the period until the end of the privilege game becomes the first privilege game, which tends to be short, the period until the specific performance mode is executed is shortened. Therefore, regardless of the type of the privilege game, there is an effect that the specific effect mode can be executed more reliably until the privilege game is finished.

The gaming machine AN4 comprises audio data reproduction means capable of reproducing audio data, and audio output means for outputting audio corresponding to the audio data reproduced by the audio data reproduction means, wherein the specific effect executing means The specific effect is to cause the audio data reproducing means to reproduce audio data corresponding to a specific piece of music, and the specific effect mode is output when a specific reproduction range of the specific piece of music is reproduced. wherein the first mode setting means sets such that the audio data corresponding to the specific music is started to be reproduced from a first reproduction position; and the second mode setting means The audio data corresponding to the specific music piece is reproduced from the second reproduction position where the period until the reproduction of the specific reproduction range is started is longer than that at the first reproduction position. A game machine AN5 characterized in that it is set to .

According to the gaming machine AN5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine AN4, the following effects are exhibited. That is, audio data is reproduced by the audio data reproducing means, and audio corresponding to the audio data reproduced by the audio data reproducing means is output by the audio output means. As the specific effect, the specific effect executing means reproduces the audio data corresponding to the specific music for the audio data reproducing means. A specific rendering mode is output when a specific reproduction range of a specific piece of music is reproduced. The first mode setting means sets so that the audio data corresponding to the specific piece of music is started to be played back from the first playback position. A second mode is set so that audio data corresponding to a specific piece of music is played back from a second playback position at which a period until playback of a specific playback range is started is longer than at the first playback position. set by means.

As a result, regardless of the type of the privilege game, there is an effect that the specific reproduction range can be played until the privilege game is finished.

The game machine AN6, wherein the specific reproduction range in the game machine AN5 is a reproduction range including the most characteristic melody of the music.

According to the game machine AN6, in addition to the effects of the game machine AN5, since the specific reproduction range is a reproduction range including the most characteristic melody of the music, the characteristic melody part that the player is likely to want to listen to can be reproduced. There is an effect that the privilege game can be reproduced more surely until the end of the privilege game.

In the amusement machine AN5 or AN6, the audio data corresponding to the specific music is composed of a data group that enables the reproduction of one specific music by reproducing a plurality of data in a predetermined specific order. wherein the first mode setting means sets such that reproduction is started from the first data in the data group constituting the audio data corresponding to the specific music piece, The second mode setting means selects, from among the data group constituting the audio data corresponding to the specific piece of music, the second data that precedes the first data in the specific order. A game machine AN7 characterized by being set so that reproduction is started.

According to the game machine AN7, in addition to the effects of the game machine AN5 or AN6, the following effects are exhibited. In other words, the audio data corresponding to a specific piece of music is composed of a data group that enables reproduction of one specific piece of music by reproducing a plurality of pieces of data in a predetermined specific order. The first mode setting means sets so that the reproduction is started from the first data among the data group constituting the audio data corresponding to the specific music. second mode setting means for starting reproduction from the second data that precedes the first data in a specific order in the group of data constituting the audio data corresponding to the specific music piece; set by

As a result, the playback position can be changed by a simple process of selecting and playing back one piece of data in the data group, so the playback position can be set with a small processing load when starting playback of a song. effective.

In any one of the gaming machines AN2 to AN7, the suggestive effect executing means executes the suggestive effect when the execution of the privilege game is started, and the specific effect executing means is the privilege game. A gaming machine AN8 is characterized in that the specific effect is executed when a predetermined specific condition is established during the execution of.

According to the game machine AN8, in addition to the effects produced by any of the game machines AN2 to AN7, the following effects are produced. That is, the suggestive effect executing means executes the suggestive effect when the execution of the privilege game is started. A privilege game is executed by a specified effect execution means when a predetermined specific condition is established during execution of the privilege game.

As a result, it is possible to make it difficult to identify whether the first privilege game is decided or the second privilege game is decided until the specific condition is established when the suggestive performance is executed, so that the specific condition is established. There is an effect that the expectation for the second privilege game can be continued until the game is played.

<Characteristic AO group> (Preferentially placing songs used during normal games in menu positions where it is easy to select)
Display means capable of displaying an image, operation means operable by the player, and display on the display means of an interlocking image whose mode changes in conjunction with the operation content of the operation means based on the establishment of a first condition. and when the second condition is satisfied while the linked image is being displayed by the linked image display means, the linked image displayed on the display means is displayed. A first effect execution means for executing a first effect of a type according to a mode, a second effect execution means for executing a second effect different from the first effect based on establishment of a predetermined execution condition, and A type determining means for determining the type of the second effect to be executed by the second effect executing means from among a plurality of types, and first displayed by the interlocking image display means when the first condition is satisfied. A gaming machine AO1, further comprising mode setting means capable of setting, as the mode of the linked image, a mode corresponding to the type of the second effect determined by the type determining means.

Among gaming machines such as pachinko machines, gaming machines provided with a display device such as a liquid crystal display device are known. In this conventional gaming machine, symbols are variably displayed on the display device, and the symbols are stopped and displayed in a predetermined combination, thereby giving a player a big winning game. In addition, some of such conventional game machines are equipped with a sound output device such as a speaker, and by configuring not only visual effects but also auditory effects to be executable, the mode of effects can be changed. By diversifying, it was intended to improve interest (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2003-325886).

However, further diversification of production is required.

In addition, some of such conventional game machines are configured to be able to reproduce music as a kind of auditory effect during a predetermined period of time during a normal game, and are capable of reproducing music within the predetermined period of time. There are also those configured so that the type can be selected by the player.

However, in such a conventional game machine, as the number of songs set in the game machine becomes more diverse, it becomes more difficult for the player to find a favorite song from the list of selectable songs. There was a problem that the

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine AO1, an interlocking image whose mode changes in conjunction with the operation content of the operating means is displayed on the display means by the interlocking image display means based on the establishment of the first condition. Based on the fact that the second condition is met while the interlocking image is being displayed by the interlocking image display means, a first effect of a type corresponding to the form of the interlocking image displayed on the display means is executed by the first effect execution means. Executed by A second effect different from the first effect is executed by the second effect executing means based on the establishment of a predetermined execution condition, and the type of the second effect executed by the second effect executing means is determined by the type determining means. Determined from among multiple types. The mode setting means can set a mode corresponding to the type of the second effect determined by the type determining means as the mode of the interlocking image first displayed by the interlocking image display means when the first condition is satisfied. ing.

As a result, there is an effect that it is possible to diversify the modes of linked images.

In the gaming machine AO1, the interlocking image is composed of a plurality of effect-corresponding images indicating different types of the first effect, and the mode setting means selects one of the interlocking images as the mode of the interlocking image. A display mode in which the effect-corresponding image is displayed in a specific mode is set, and the linked image display means displays the specified image in a predetermined order each time the operation content of the operation means becomes the first operation content. and the effect executing means changes the first effect of the type indicated by the effect-corresponding image displayed in the specific mode to the second condition A game machine AO2 characterized in that it is executed based on the establishment of

According to the gaming machine AO2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine AO1, the following effects are exhibited. In other words, the linked image is composed of a plurality of effect-corresponding images indicating different types of the first effect. As the mode of the linked image, a display mode in which one effect-corresponding image is displayed in a specific mode is set by the mode setting means. Each time the operation content of the operation means becomes the first operation content, the effect-corresponding image displayed in a specific manner by the interlocked image display means is changed in a predetermined order. A specific effect of the type indicated by the effect corresponding image displayed in a specific mode is executed by the effect execution means based on the establishment of the second condition.

As a result, the player who visually recognizes the effect-corresponding image changed to a specific mode can easily understand the type of the first effect to be executed based on the establishment of the second condition. can be made Therefore, by operating the operation means, there is an effect that the player can select the type of the first effect of the desired type.

In the gaming machine AO2, the mode setting means includes one of the effect-corresponding images to be displayed in a specific mode, and the effect-corresponding image to be changed to the specific mode when the operation of the first operation content is repeated. A gaming machine AO3 characterized by setting at least the order of images.

According to the gaming machine AO3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine AO2, one effect-corresponding image to be displayed in a specific mode and an effect-corresponding image to be changed to a specific mode when the first operation content is repeated. is set by at least the mode setting means, there is an effect that when the operating means is actually operated, the performance corresponding image to be displayed in the specified mode can be specified earlier.

In the gaming machine AO2 or AO3, the mode setting means causes the effect-corresponding image corresponding to the type of the second effect determined by the type determining means to be specified by the operation of the first operation content within a specific number of times. A game machine AO4 characterized in that the aspect of the interlocking image can be set so as to be variable in the aspect of AO4.

According to the gaming machine AO4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine AO2 or AO3, the effect-corresponding image corresponding to the type of the second effect determined by the type determining means is specified by the operation of the first operation content within a specific number of times. Since the aspect of the interlocking image is set by the aspect setting means so as to be variable to the aspect, the effect-corresponding image corresponding to the type of the second effect executed by the second effect executing means can be specified with a small number of operations. It can be changed in any aspect. Therefore, there is an effect that convenience for the player can be enhanced.

The gaming machine AO4 comprises counting means for counting the number of times of the second effect executed by the second effect executing means for each type of the second effect, and the mode setting means counts the number of times the second effect is executed by the counting means. The effect-corresponding image corresponding to the second effect of a type that satisfies a specific condition in which the number of times the second effect is performed is changed to the specific mode by the operation of the first operation content within a specific number of times. The gaming machine AO5 is characterized in that it is configured such that the aspect of the interlocking image can be set as follows.

According to the gaming machine AO5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine AO4, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the number of times of the second effect executed by the second effect executing means is counted by the counting means for each type of the second effect. An effect-corresponding image corresponding to a second effect of a type that satisfies a specific condition in which the number of times counted by the counting means is predetermined is changed to a specific mode by the operation of the first operation content within the specific number of times. , the mode of the linked image is set by the mode setting means.

As a result, the effect-corresponding image corresponding to the second effect of the type whose number of times of execution satisfies the specific condition can be changed to a specific mode with a relatively small number of operations, thereby increasing convenience for the player. There is an effect that it can be improved.

In the gaming machine AO5, the mode setting means causes the effect-corresponding image corresponding to the second effect of the type with the larger number of times counted by the counting means to be specified by the operation of the first operation content the smaller number of times. A gaming machine AO6 characterized in that the mode of the interlocking image is set so as to be variable to the mode of .

According to the game machine AO6, in addition to the effects of the game machine AO5, the effect-corresponding image corresponding to the second effect of the type counted more times by the counting means is specified by the operation of the first operation content less times. Since the mode of the interlocking image is set by the mode setting means so as to be variable to the mode of (1), there is an effect that the convenience for the player can be further improved.

A game machine AO7 characterized in that, in any one of the game machines AO1 to AO6, the second condition is established when the operation content for the operation means is the second operation content.

According to the gaming machine AO7, in addition to the effects produced by any one of the gaming machines AO1 to AO6, the second condition is established when the operation content for the operating means becomes the second operation content, so that the player's arbitrary There is an effect that the first effect executing means can be caused to execute the first effect at the timing of .

<Characteristic AP group> (Based on the determination of a specific jackpot type, a state is formed in which the specific jackpot type is likely to be determined when the next jackpot is won)
discrimination means for executing discrimination based on the establishment of a discrimination condition; dynamic display means for dynamically displaying identification information for indicating the discrimination result of the discrimination means for a predetermined period; and the identification information by the dynamic display means. In the dynamic display, a privilege game execution means capable of executing a privilege game advantageous to the player based on the stationary display of the identification information for indicating the specific determination result, and the privilege game execution means executes the privilege game. As the type of the privilege game to be played, one of the plurality of types including at least a first privilege game and a second privilege game that is more advantageous to the player than the first privilege game is selected. A privilege game type setting means to be set, a first state in which the second privilege game is set at a first ratio by the privilege game type setting means, and a second privilege game higher than the first ratio a second state that can be set at a ratio of 2; A game machine AP1 characterized in that it is changed when a predetermined specific condition is established between the time when the bonus game is displayed and the time when the bonus game is finished.

Here, some game machines, such as pachinko machines, execute a win that is advantageous to the player when the result of a lottery performed based on the winning of a game ball into a start winning hole is a win. . Among such gaming machines, there are some that are provided with a plurality of types of winning types with different numbers of rounds, and some that aim to improve interest during winning by varying the game value that can be obtained (for example, , Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent No. 2514417). In addition, some of the conventional gaming machines have advantages such as changing the game state given after winning or changing the number of prize balls that can be obtained in each round instead of or in addition to the number of rounds. There are also those that aim to improve interest by providing a difference in degree.

Furthermore, some conventional gaming machines determine the type of winning (the number of rounds) at the timing when the game ball passes through a predetermined area after winning the winning.

However, in such conventional gaming machines, since the types of winnings are determined by lottery at a certain rate, the game may become monotonous, and it is difficult to increase the interest of the player in the game. There was a fear that

On the other hand, in the gaming machine AP1, determination is performed by the determination means based on the establishment of the determination condition, and the identification information for indicating the determination result of the determination means is dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means for a predetermined period. In the dynamic display of the identification information by the dynamic display means, the privilege game that is advantageous to the player is executed by the privilege game execution means based on the stationary display of the identification information for indicating the specific determination result. One privilege game among a plurality of types including at least a first privilege game and a second privilege game more advantageous to the player than the first privilege game as the privilege game type executed by the privilege game execution means. is set by the privilege game type setting means. A first state in which the second privilege game is set at a first ratio by the privilege game type setting means, a second state in which the second privilege game can be set at a second ratio higher than the first ratio, is varied by the state varying means. Triggered by establishment of a predetermined specific condition during the period from when identification information for indicating a specific determination result is stop-displayed in the first state to when the privilege game is completed, the state is changed to the second state. .

As a result, the second privilege game is set at a high rate by entering the second state, so that the game can be played in anticipation of the second state. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

Game state setting means for setting one game state out of a plurality of game states including at least a first game state and a second game state more advantageous to the player than the first game state in the game machine AP1. wherein the state varying means is configured to, when the specific condition is satisfied during the period from when the identification information for indicating the specific determination result is stopped and displayed in the first state until the end of the privilege game The game machine AP2 is characterized in that the game machine AP2 is changed to the second state at least before the game state after the privilege game is completed is set by the game state setting means.

According to the game machine AP2, in addition to the effects of the game machine AP1, the following effects are produced. That is, one game state is set by the game state setting means from among a plurality of game states including at least a first game state and a second game state more advantageous to the player than the first game state. When a specific condition is satisfied during a period from when the identification information for indicating the specific determination result is stopped and displayed in the first state to when the privilege game is completed, at least the game after the privilege game is completed by the game state setting means. Before the state is set, the state is changed to the second state by the state changing means.

As a result, the player can recognize at different timings whether to change to the second state and whether to set to the advantageous second game state, thereby making the game monotonous during execution of the privilege game. There is an effect that it is possible to prevent it from becoming.

In the gaming machine AP1 or AP2, the privilege game executing means executes the privilege game based on the establishment of a predetermined execution condition after the identification information indicating the specific determination result is stopped and displayed. wherein the predetermined execution condition includes at least a first execution condition and a second execution condition different from the first execution condition, and the state changing means comprises the first The gaming machine is characterized in that the game machine is changed to the second state on the basis that the second execution condition is established after the identification information indicating the specific determination result is stopped and displayed in the state. AP3.

According to the game machine AP3, in addition to the effects of the game machine AP1 or AP2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the privilege game is executed by the privilege game executing means based on the establishment of the predetermined execution condition after the identification information indicating the specific determination result is stopped and displayed. The predetermined execution conditions include at least a first execution condition and a 22nd execution condition different from the first execution condition. After the identification information indicating the specific determination result is stopped and displayed in the first state, the state is changed to the second state by the state changing means based on the establishment of the second execution condition.

As a result, the game can be played in anticipation of the fulfillment of the second execution condition, so there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine AP3, the privilege game type setting means sets the second privilege game based on the establishment of the second execution condition.

According to the gaming machine AP4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine AP3, the second privilege game is set by the privilege game type setting means based on the establishment of the second execution condition. It is possible to strongly expect that the execution condition 2 is established. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine AP4, the predetermined execution condition is the first execution condition, the second execution condition, and a third execution condition different from any of the first execution condition and the second execution condition. and, in the second state, the third execution condition is more likely to be established after the identification information indicating the specific determination result is stopped and displayed than in the first state. and wherein the privilege game type setting means sets the second privilege game based on the establishment of the third execution condition.

According to the gaming machine AP5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine AP4, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the predetermined execution condition includes at least a first execution condition, a second execution condition, and a third execution condition different from the first execution condition and the second execution condition. In the second state, the third execution condition is more likely to be satisfied after the identification information indicating the specific determination result is stopped and displayed than in the first state. The second privilege game is set by the privilege game type setting means based on the establishment of the third execution condition.

As a result, the game can be played in anticipation of the second state in which the third execution condition is likely to be satisfied.

In the game machine AP5, the state changing means changes the state to the first state based on the establishment of the third execution condition in the second state.

According to the gaming machine AP6, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine AP5, when the third execution condition is satisfied in the second state, the state changes from the second state to the first state. There is an effect that it can be suppressed that it becomes excessively advantageous for the person.

In any one of the gaming machines AP1 to AP6, a first ball-entering area into which a game ball can enter, a second ball-entering area different from the first ball-entering area, the first ball-entering area, and the second ball-entering area. Distributing means for distributing game balls to one of two ball-entering areas and distributing game balls to the second ball-entering area at the first ratio; A third ball entry area different from any of the two ball entry areas, a first position where a game ball can enter the third ball entry area, and a game ball more difficult to enter than the first position. a second position and a variable means that can be changed to a second position, wherein the privilege game type setting means moves to the first ball entry area after the identification information for indicating the specific determination result is stopped and displayed. The first privilege game is set based on the game ball entering, the second privilege game is set based on the game ball entering the second ball entering area, and the third entering The second privilege game is set based on the game ball entering the ball area, and the state changing means changes the second ball entering state in the state where the variable means is changed to the second position. The gaming machine AP7 is characterized in that the variable means is varied to the first position based on the entry of a game ball into the area.

According to the gaming machine AP7, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines AP1 to AP6, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the game ball is distributed by the distribution means to either the first ball entry area into which the game ball can enter or the second ball entry area different from the first ball entry area. Game balls are distributed to the second area at a first rate. A first position where a game ball can enter a third ball entry area different from the first ball entry area and the second ball entry area, and a second position where a game ball is more difficult to enter than the first position. The variable means is configured to be variable between two positions. While the first privilege game is set by the privilege game type setting means based on the fact that the game ball enters the first ball entry area after the identification information for indicating the specific determination result is stopped and displayed , the second privilege game is set by the privilege game type setting means based on the game ball entering the second ball entry area or the third ball entry area. The variable means is varied from the second position to the first position by the state variable means based on the game ball entering the second ball entry area while the variable means is variable to the second position.

As a result, the player can easily check the type of the privilege game set by the privilege game type setting means and whether or not the variable means is changed to the first position by simply confirming the ball entry area into which the game ball enters. There is an effect that it can be understood by

In the gaming machine AP7, a ball entry means in which the first ball entry area, the second ball entry area, and the distribution means are provided at least inside, and a game ball is configured to be able to enter; It is variable between a first ball-entering position where a game ball can enter the ball-entering means and a second ball-entering position where it is more difficult to enter the ball-entering means than the first ball-entering position. a second variable means, and the second variable means is variable from the second ball-entering position to the first ball-entering position on the basis that the identification information indicating the specific determination result is stopped and displayed. A gaming machine AP8 comprising: variable control means for causing the game machine AP8 to

According to the gaming machine AP8, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine AP7, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the first ball-entering area, the second ball-entering area, and the sorting means are provided inside the ball-entering means. A second variable means is provided at a first ball-entering position where a game ball can enter the ball-entering means and a second ball-entering position where it is more difficult to enter the ball into the ball-entering means than at the first ball-entering position. It is configured to be variable. The second variable means is varied from the second ball-entering position to the first ball-entering position by the variable control means based on the fact that the identification information for indicating the specific determination result is low index.

As a result, it is possible to prevent the game ball from entering the ball-entering means even though the specific determination result is not obtained, so that the variable means can be varied to the first position in the normal state. can be suppressed. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the player from being excessively advantageous.

In the game machine AP8, a shooting means capable of shooting a game ball at least in a first direction and a second direction different from the first direction is provided, and the ball entering means is shot in the first direction. It is provided at a position where a game ball can enter, and the third ball entry area is provided at a position where a game ball launched in the second direction can enter. A gaming machine AP9 characterized by:

According to the gaming machine AP9, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine AP8, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the shooting means is configured to shoot game balls in a first direction and a second direction different from the first direction. A ball entry means is provided at a position where a game ball launched in the first direction can enter, while a third ball entry area is located at a position where a game ball launched in the second direction can enter. is provided.

As a result, when a specific determination result is obtained in a state where the variable means is variable to the first position, the game can be reliably transferred to the third ball entry area simply by shooting the game ball in the second direction. You can enter the ball. Therefore, there is an effect that convenience for the player can be improved.

In the gaming machine AP9, a first ball entering means for allowing the game ball launched in the first direction to enter, a first variable position for allowing the game ball to enter the first ball entering means, and A third variable means that can be changed to a second variable position where the game ball is more difficult to enter than the first variable position, and a second ball entry means that can enter the game ball shot in the second direction. , a first game state, and a second game state in which the third variable means is more easily variable to the first variable position than in the first game state. a game state setting means for setting the determination condition, when a game ball enters the first ball entering means and when a game ball enters the second ball entering means; A game machine AP10 characterized in that at least it is established.

According to the game machine AP10, in addition to the effects of the game machine AP9, the following effects are produced. That is, the first ball entering means is provided at a position where the game ball launched in the first direction can enter. A third variable means is variable between a first variable position at which a game ball can be entered into the first ball entering means and a second variable position at which the game ball is more difficult to enter than the first variable position. is configured to A second ball entry means is provided at a position where a game ball launched in the second direction can enter. One game is played by a game state setting means from among a plurality of game states including at least a first game state and a second game state in which the third variable means is more easily variable to the first variable position than the first game state. State is set. A determination condition is established at least when a game ball enters the first ball entering means and when a game ball enters the second ball entering means.

Thereby, when the second game state is set in a state where the variable means is variable to the first position, the variable means is maintained at the first position simply by continuing to shoot the game ball in the first direction. , the discrimination condition can be established. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the variable device from changing to the second position before a specific determination result is obtained after changing the variable device to the first position.

<Characteristic AQ group> (1 type and 2 types of time saving, setting a state in which one type is more advantageous and a state in which two types are more advantageous)
A privilege game advantageous to a player is performed based on establishment of any one of a plurality of execution conditions including at least a first execution condition and a second execution condition different from the first execution condition. A privilege game executing means to be executed, and as the type of the privilege game executed by the privilege game execution means, at least a first privilege game and a second privilege game more advantageous to the player than the first privilege game are included. One game out of a plurality of game states including at least a type setting means for setting one type out of a plurality of types, a first game state, and a second game state different from the first game state. a game state setting means capable of setting a state; and at least in the second game state, the second privilege game is set by the type setting means when the second execution condition is satisfied rather than the first execution condition. and a second state in which the second privilege game is more likely to be set by the type setting means when the first execution condition is satisfied rather than the second execution condition. A gaming machine AQ1 comprising: state switching means.

A game machine such as a pachinko machine executes a winning game that is advantageous to the player when the result of a lottery based on the entry of a game ball into a starting winning hole is a winning. be. Among such gaming machines, there are some that are provided with a plurality of types of winning types with different numbers of rounds, and some that aim to improve interest during winning by varying the game value that can be obtained (for example, , Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent No. 2514417). In addition, some of the conventional gaming machines have advantages such as changing the game state given after winning or changing the number of prize balls that can be obtained in each round instead of or in addition to the number of rounds. There are also those that aim to improve interest by providing a difference in degree.

Furthermore, in conventional gaming machines, a winning game is also executed when a game ball enters a specific area provided on the board surface, in addition to the lottery based on winning to the start winning opening. something exists. In addition, among such conventional gaming machines, there is a difference in the percentage of advantageous winning types between when winning by lottery based on starting winnings and when winning by entering a specific area. There are also things that let you.

However, in such a conventional type gaming machine, the ratio of advantageous winning types is fixed for each chance of winning, so there are cases where the game becomes monotonous. Therefore, there is a problem that it becomes difficult to improve the interest of the player in the game.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine AQ1, when any one of a plurality of execution conditions including at least a first execution condition and a second execution condition different from the first execution condition is established. Based on this, a privilege game advantageous to the player is executed by the privilege game executing means. A game state is selected from a plurality of game states including at least a first privilege game and a second privilege game more advantageous to the player than the first privilege game as the type of the privilege game executed by the privilege game execution means. One game state is set by the setting means. At least in the second game state, when the second execution condition is satisfied rather than the first execution condition, the second privilege game is more likely to be set by the type setting means. The state switching means switches between a second state in which the second privilege game is more likely to be set by the type setting means when the execution condition 1 is satisfied.

Thereby, in the second game state, depending on whether it is the first state or the second state, the establishment of the first execution condition makes it easier to set the second privilege game, or the second game state. Whether or not the second privilege game is likely to be set depends on whether the execution condition is established, so there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

The gaming machine AQ1 is characterized by comprising a specific area into which a game ball can enter, and wherein the first execution condition is established based on the game ball entering the specific area. Game machine AQ2.

According to the gaming machine AQ2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine AQ1, the first execution condition is established based on the game ball entering the specific area. Since the player can easily determine whether or not the privilege game is to be executed simply by confirming whether or not to play, there is an effect that convenience for the player can be improved.

In the gaming machine AQ2, the specific area is provided inside, and a ball entering means is configured so that a game ball can enter; a first position where a game ball can enter the ball entering means; A variable means that can be changed to a second position where it is more difficult for a game ball to enter the ball-entering means than the first position, a determination means that performs determination based on the establishment of a determination condition, and determination by the determination means. variable game execution means for executing a variable game in which the variable means is varied from the second position to the first position for a predetermined period of time based on the result being the first determination result; The gaming machine AQ3 is characterized in that the second execution condition is established when the discrimination result by the discrimination means is a second discrimination result different from the first discrimination result.

According to the gaming machine AQ3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine AQ2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, a specific area is provided inside the ball entering means. The variable means is configured to be variable between a first position where the game ball can enter the ball entering means and a second position where the game ball enters the ball entering means more difficult than the first position. there is A variable game in which the variable means is varied from the second position to the first position for a predetermined period is executed by the variable game execution means based on the determination result by the determination means becoming the first determination result. A second execution condition is satisfied when the determination result by the determination means is a second determination result different from the first determination result.

As a result, the player can play the game while paying attention to the result of discrimination by the discriminating means.

In the gaming machine AQ3, the ball-entering means includes at least a first specific area and a second specific area as the specific areas, and the state switching means includes the first state. a gaming machine AQ4 characterized in that the game machine AQ4 is switched to the second state based on the fact that a game ball enters the second specific area in the above.

According to the gaming machine AQ4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine AQ3, the following effects are exhibited. That is, at least a first specific area and a second specific area are provided as specific areas inside the ball entering means. When the game ball enters the second specific area in the first state, the state is switched to the second state by the state switching means.

As a result, the player can easily determine whether or not the state is switched to the second state simply by confirming whether or not the game ball enters the second specific area, which is convenient for the player. has the effect of being able to improve

In the gaming machine AQ4, a distribution means is provided for distributing a game ball that has entered the ball-entering means to one of a plurality of areas including at least the first specific area and the second specific area. , The type setting means sets the first privilege game based on the game ball entering the first specific area, and the second privilege game based on the ball entering the second specific area A game machine AQ5 characterized in that it sets a privilege game.

According to the gaming machine AQ5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine AQ4, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the game ball entering the ball entering means is distributed by the distribution means to one of a plurality of regions including at least the first specific region and the second specific region. While the first privilege game is set by the type setting means based on the game ball entering the first specific area, the second privilege game is set by the type setting means based on the ball entering the second specific area. A privilege game is set.

As a result, the player can easily determine the type of the privilege game to be executed only by confirming the type of the specific area into which the game ball enters, so that the convenience of the player can be improved. has the effect of

In a gaming machine AQ4 or AQ5, a second ball entering means configured to allow a game ball to enter and a third specific area provided therein as the specific area, and a game ball entering the second ball entering means. a second variable means capable of changing between a third position where ball entry is possible and a fourth position where ball entry into the second ball entry means is more difficult than the third position; is for setting the second privilege game based on the fact that the game ball has entered the third specific area, the first state is the second variable means is variable to the fourth position and the second state is a state in which the second variable means is variable to the third position.

According to the gaming machine AQ6, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine AQ4 or AQ5, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the third specific area is provided as the specific area inside the second ball entering means. The second variable means is variable between a third position where the game ball can enter the second ball entering means and a fourth position where the ball entering the second ball entering means is more difficult than the third position. is configured to A second privilege game is set by the type setting means based on the game ball entering the third specific area. The first state is obtained by changing the second variable device to the fourth position, and the second state is obtained by changing the second variable device to the third position.

As a result, by confirming the state of the second variable means, it is possible for the player to easily understand whether the state is the first state or the second state.

In the gaming machine AQ6, the second variable means changes the position to the fourth position based on the game ball entering the second ball entering means while the position is changed to the third position. A gaming machine AQ7 characterized by:

According to the gaming machine AQ7, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine AQ6, the second Since the second variable means is variable to the fourth position, it is possible to prevent the state in which the second variable means is arranged at the third position from continuing for a long time. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the player from being excessively advantageous.

In the gaming machine AQ6 or AQ7, the type setting means, at least in the second game state, based on the determination result by the determination means being the second determination result, the second A privilege game is set, and the ball-entering means is configured so that the entered game ball enters the second specific area at a second rate lower than the first rate. A gaming machine AQ8 characterized by:

According to the gaming machine AQ8, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine AQ6 or AQ7, the following effects are exhibited. That is, at least in the second game state, the second privilege game is set at the first rate by the type setting means based on the determination result by the determination means being the second determination result. The ball-entering means is configured so that the entered game ball enters the second specific area at a second rate lower than the first rate.

As a result, in the first state, when the discrimination by the discriminating means results in the second discriminating result, the second privilege game is set at a higher rate, so that the discrimination by the discriminating means results in a specific discriminating result. Rather, the game can be played in anticipation of the second determination result. Therefore, there is an effect that the game can be played while paying more attention to the determination result by the determination means.

In any one of the game machines AQ6 to AQ8, a shooting means configured to shoot a game ball in at least a first direction and a second direction different from the first direction is provided, and the ball entering means comprises the It is provided at a position where a game ball launched in the first direction can be entered and a game ball launched in the second direction is difficult to enter, and the second ball entering means is , a game ball launched in the second direction can be entered, and a game ball launched in the first direction is difficult to enter. Machine AQ9.

According to the gaming machine AQ9, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines AQ6 to AQ8, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the shooting means is configured to be able to shoot game balls in a first direction and a second direction different from the first direction. A ball entry means is provided at a position where a game ball launched in a first direction can enter and a game ball launched in a second direction is difficult to enter. A second ball-entering means is provided at a position where game balls launched in the second direction are allowed to enter and game balls launched in the first direction are difficult to enter.

As a result, it is possible to easily change the type of the ball-entering means for entering the game ball according to the direction in which the game ball is launched.

<Characteristic AR group> (As a special 1 AV challenge, set up multiple types with different AV winning expectations)
A ball entry means into which a game ball can enter, a first position in which a game ball can enter the ball entry means, and a second position in which a game ball is more difficult to enter than the first position. A variable variable means, a first flow path configured so that a game ball that has entered the ball entering means can flow down, a second flow path different from the first flow path, and the ball entering means Distributing means for distributing a game ball entered into one of a plurality of flow paths including at least the first flow path and the second flow path, and the distribution means distributes the game ball to the first flow path A position where the distributed game balls can enter at a first rate and the game balls distributed to the second flow path can enter at a second rate higher than the first rate. A privilege game executing means for executing a privilege game advantageous to the player based on the provided specific area and the entry of the game ball into the specific area, and executing discrimination based on establishment of the discrimination condition. A variable game for executing a variable game in which the variable means is varied from the second position to the first position for a predetermined period based on a determining means and a determination result by the determining means becoming a specific determination result. As the type of the variable game executed by the execution means and the variable game execution means, a first variable game and a game ball that has entered the ball entry means from the first variable game is transferred to the second flow path. A game machine AR1 characterized by comprising a type setting means for setting one type of variable game out of a plurality of types including at least a second variable game that is easily sorted.

Here, a game machine such as a pachinko machine has a ball entrance that allows a ball to be entered by opening (or moving) an electric accessory. A game ball entered into an AV winning device that is released during a specific game (small win game, etc.) executed based on the game ball entering the AV winning device is provided in the AV winning device. A pachinko machine has been proposed that allows a special game (such as a winning game) that is advantageous to the player by passing through a specific area (such as a winning switch), which is intended to increase the interest of the player ( For example, Patent Document 1: JP-A-2011-010741).

In addition, some of such conventional gaming machines execute an effect that suggests the degree of expectation as to whether or not the privilege game given when passing through a specific area during a specific game is of an advantageous type. There is also a configuration that allows In such a conventional type gaming machine, when it is suggested that the degree of expectation of a privilege game of an advantageous type is high, the game can be played with a stronger expectation of passing through the specific area.

However, in such conventional gaming machines, when a specific game is executed, the rate at which game balls pass through the specific area is common, so it has been suggested that there is a high degree of expectation, which is an advantageous type. However, there is a problem that it is difficult to improve the interest of the player.

On the other hand, in the game machine AR1, the variable means is variable between a first position where the game ball can enter the ball entering means and a second position where the game ball is more difficult to enter than the first position. configured as possible. any one of a plurality of flow paths including at least a first flow path through which a game ball entering the ball-entering means can flow down, and a second flow path different from the first flow path, The game balls entering the ball entering means are distributed by the distribution means. The game balls distributed to the first flow path by the distribution means are used at a first rate, and the game balls distributed to the second flow path have a second rate higher than the first rate. A specific area is provided at a position where it is possible to enter the ball. A privilege game advantageous to the player is executed by the privilege game executing means based on the entry of the game ball into the specific area. Determination is performed by the determination means based on the establishment of the determination condition, and the variable means is varied from the second position to the first position for a predetermined period based on the result of determination by the determination means becoming a specific determination result. A variable game is executed by the variable game executing means. As types of the variable game executed by the variable game executing means, a first variable game and a second variable game in which a game ball entering the ball entering means is more likely to be distributed to the second flow path than the first variable game. , and one variable game type is set by the type setting means from among a plurality of types including at least .

As a result, when the second variable game is set, the percentage of balls entering the specific area is higher than when the first variable game is set. It is possible to strongly expect that the second variable game is executed. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine AR1, the first variable game is configured such that it is difficult for the game ball entering the ball entering means to flow into the second flow path, and the second variable game is , the game ball entering the ball entering means is configured to be difficult to flow into the first flow path, and the type setting means comprises the first variable game and the second variable game One variable game out of a plurality of types including at least a game and a third variable game in which a game ball entering the ball-entering means can flow into both the first channel and the second channel. A game machine AR2 characterized in that it sets the type of.

According to the game machine AR2, in addition to the effects of the game machine AR1, the following effects are produced. That is, in the first variable game, it is difficult for the game ball that has entered the ball entering means to flow into the second flow path, while in the second variable game, the game ball that has entered the ball entering means is It becomes difficult to flow into the first channel. A plurality of types of games including at least a first variable game, a second variable game, and a third variable game in which a game ball entering the ball entering means can flow into both the first flow path and the second flow path. One type of variable game is set by the type setting means from among them.

As a result, the possibility of the game ball entering the specific area can be varied according to the type of variable game set by the type setting means, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved. be.

In the gaming machine AR1 or AR2, the specific areas include a first specific area provided at a position where game balls distributed to the first flow path can enter at the first rate, and the second specific area. and a second specific area provided at a position where game balls distributed to the flow path can be entered at the second rate.

According to the game machine AR3, in addition to the effects of the game machine AR1 or AR2, the first specific area is provided as the specific area at a position where the game balls distributed to the first flow path can enter at a first rate. On the other hand, the second specific area is provided at a position where the game balls distributed to the second flow path can enter at the second rate, so it corresponds to the type of the distributed flow path. By confirming the specific area to be played, the player can easily grasp whether or not the game ball has entered the specific area. Therefore, there is an effect that convenience for the player can be improved.

In the gaming machine AR3, the first passage is provided with passing means through which a game ball can pass, and the privilege game execution means performs the above-described A gaming machine AR4 characterized by executing a privilege game.

According to the gaming machine AR4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine AR3, the privilege game is executed by the privilege game executing means based on the passage of the game ball through the passage means provided in the first flow path. , there is an effect that it is possible to improve the player's expectation for the privilege game when the game ball is distributed to the first flow path.

In the gaming machine AR4, the first flow path comprises at least a first route provided with the passing means and a second route not provided with the passing means. The gaming machine AR5 is characterized in that both the game balls that have passed through the first path and the game balls that have passed through the second path enter the first specific area at the first rate.

According to the game machine AR5, in addition to the effects of the game machine AR4, the following effects are produced. That is, the first flow path is composed of at least a first path provided with passage means and a second path not provided with passage means. A game ball that has passed through the first path and a game ball that has passed through the second path are both configured to enter the first specific area at a first rate.

As a result, the player can play the game in anticipation of passing through the first route, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

The gaming machine AR6, wherein the gaming machine AR5 comprises shielding means for making it difficult to visually recognize whether a game ball flowing into the first flow path has passed through the first path or the second path. .

According to the gaming machine AR6, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine AR5, the shielding means makes it difficult to see whether the game ball flowing into the first flow path has passed through the first path or the second path. Therefore, even when the player has passed through the second route, the player can expect that the player has passed through the first route. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine AR6, a specific effect executing means for executing a specific effect indicating whether a game ball has entered the specific area during the execution period of the variable game based on the execution of the variable game. In addition, when the game ball that has flowed into the first flow path does not enter the first specific area, the specific effect executing means, regardless of whether or not the game ball has passed through the passing means, The game machine AR7 is characterized in that it executes the specific effect of the effect mode indicating that the ball has not entered the specific area.

According to the gaming machine AR7, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine AR6, the following effects are exhibited. That is, based on the execution of the variable game, the specific effect executing means executes a specific effect indicating whether the game ball entered the specific area during the execution period of the variable game. When the game ball that has flowed into the first flow path does not enter the first specific area, it does not enter the specific area by the specific performance execution means regardless of whether or not it has passed through the passing means. A specific effect of the effect mode indicating that is executed.

As a result, it is possible to make it unclear for a longer period of time whether or not the privilege game will be executed after passing through the passing means, so that there is an effect that the player's expectation for the privilege game can be maintained for a longer period of time. be.

In the gaming machine AR7, when the game ball that has flowed into the first flow path passes through the passing means and does not enter the first specific area, after the specific effect is completed, the privilege The game machine AR8 is characterized by comprising a second effect executing means for executing a second effect indicating that a game is to be executed.

According to the game machine AR8, in addition to the effects of the game machine AR7, when the game ball that has flowed into the first flow path passes through the passing means and does not enter the first specific area, the specified After the effect is finished, the second effect indicating that the privilege game is to be executed is executed by the second effect executing means, so that the game ball flowing into the first flow path does not enter the first specific area. In this case, the player can play the game expecting that the second effect will be executed. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In any one of the gaming machines AR1 to AR8, the type setting means is configured so that the game ball entered into the first variable game, the second variable game, and the ball entering means is also transferred to the first flow path. A gaming machine AR9 characterized in that one type of variable game is set from among a plurality of types including at least a fourth variable game that cannot flow into the second channel.

According to the game machine AR9, in addition to the effects produced by any one of the game machines AR1 to AR8, the first variable game, the second variable game, and the game ball that has entered the ball entering means also enter the first flow path. Since one variable game type is set by the type setting means from among a plurality of types including at least a fourth variable game that cannot flow into the second flow path, the determination result of the determination means is a specific determination. When a result is obtained, there is an effect that the game can be played with a strong hope that the fourth variable game will not be executed.

<Characteristic AS group> (Even if a game ball is distributed to the route of the AV winning port side with low expectation of time saving, the game ball that enters after that can enter the AV winning port with high expectation of time saving)
A ball entry means into which a game ball can enter, a first position in which a game ball can enter the ball entry means, and a second position in which a game ball is more difficult to enter than the first position. Variable means that can be varied, determination means that performs determination based on the establishment of a determination condition, and when the determination result by the determination means is a specific determination result, the variable means is changed from the second position to the In a gaming machine having variable game execution means for executing a variable game that is variable to a first position for a predetermined period, a first flow path through which a game ball entered into the ball entry means flows down; A second flow path different from the first flow path, a first specific area provided at a position where a game ball that has flowed down the first flow path can enter, and a game ball that has flowed down the second flow path A game ball enters one of a plurality of specific areas including at least a second specific area provided at a position where the ball can be entered, the first specific area, and the second specific area and a privilege game executing means for executing a privilege game advantageous to the player based on, and the gaming machine continues until the game ball that has flowed into the first flow path enters the first specific area A game characterized in that the period between the Machine AS1.

Here, a game machine such as a pachinko machine has a ball entrance into which a ball can be entered by opening (or moving) an electric accessory, and a game ball enters the ball entrance. A game ball that enters the inside of the AV winning device that is opened during a specific game (small winning game, etc.) executed based on the There has been proposed a pachinko machine that can provide a privilege game (winning game, etc.) that is advantageous to the player by passing through it, and has been aimed at improving the interest of the player (for example, Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2011 -010741).

In addition, in such conventional gaming machines, a plurality of specific areas are provided on the board surface, and the degree of advantage of the privilege game given when passing through the specific area during a specific game is determined according to the type of the specific area. There are also those configured to be variable by

However, in such a conventional gaming machine, there is only one specific area where the game ball enters in one specific game, and when the game ball progresses toward a specific area with a low degree of advantage, the game ball However, there is a problem that the expectation of the person is remarkably lowered.

On the other hand, according to the game machine AS1, the variable means can be changed between the first position where the game ball can be entered into the ball entering means and the second position where the game ball is more difficult to enter than the first position. is variably configured. A variable game in which the variable means is biased from the second position to the first position for a predetermined period of time is executed by the variable game execution means based on the result of determination by the determination means becoming a specific determination result. A first flow path and a second flow path different from the first flow path are provided at a position where a game ball entering the ball-entering means can flow down. A first specific area is provided at a position where a game ball that has flowed down the first flow path can enter, and a second specific area is provided at a position where a game ball that has flowed down the second flow path can enter. It is A privilege game advantageous to the player is executed by the privilege game executing means based on the game ball entering one of a plurality of specific regions including at least the first specific region and the second specific region. be. The period until the game ball that has flowed into the first flow path enters the first specific area is the period until the game ball that has flowed into the second flow path enters the second specific area. It is configured so that it can easily be longer than

As a result, it is possible to lengthen the period until the game ball that has flowed into the first flow path enters the first specific area. It is possible to make the player expect for a longer period of time that the game ball enters the specific area and the privilege game is executed. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine AS1, at least a first privilege game and a second privilege game more advantageous to the player than the first privilege game are provided as types of the privilege game executed by the privilege game execution means. The privilege game executing means executes the second privilege game at a first rate when the game ball enters the first specific area, and the ball enters the second specific area. A gaming machine AS2 characterized in that it is configured to execute the second privilege game at a second rate higher than the first rate when the second bonus game is played.

According to the gaming machine AS2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine AS1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, as the types of privilege games executed by the privilege game executing means, at least a first privilege game and a second privilege game more advantageous to the player than the first privilege game are provided. While the second privilege game is executed at the first rate by the privilege game execution means when the game ball enters the first specific area, the second privilege game is executed at the first rate when the ball enters the second specified area. A second privilege game is executed at a second rate higher than.

As a result, it is possible to make the player strongly expect the game balls to flow into the second flow path, so that there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In the game machine AS1 or AS2, a first distribution state in which a game ball that has entered the ball entry means is distributed to the first flow path, and a second distribution state in which the game ball is distributed to the second flow path. distribution means configured to be variable to a plurality of distribution states including at least; distribution control means for varying the distribution state of the distribution means according to a predetermined variable pattern during execution of the variable game; As the type of the variable game executed by the variable game execution means, a first period in which the distribution means is in the first distribution state and a second period in which the distribution means is in the second distribution state. and a specific type setting means capable of setting a specific variable game in which at least the variable means is changed to the first position, and the gaming machine is provided with one specific variable game during the first period Game balls distributed to the first flow path enter the second specific area during the second period than the timing at which the game ball distributed to the first flow path enters the first specific area The game machine AS3 is characterized in that it is configured so that the timing of entering the ball tends to be earlier.

According to the game machine AS3, in addition to the effects of the game machine AS1 or AS2, the following effects are produced. That is, the distributing means has a plurality of states including at least a first distributing state in which the game ball that entered the ball entering means is distributed to the first flow path, and a second distribution state in which the game ball is distributed to the second flow path. It is configured to be variable in the distribution state. During execution of the variable game, the distribution state of the distribution means is varied in a predetermined variable pattern by the distribution control means. As the type of the variable game executed by the variable game execution means, at least the variable means has a first period in which the distribution means is in the first distribution state and a second period in which the distribution means is in the second distribution state. A specific variable game that is variable to the first position is set by the specific type setting means. A game distributed to a second flow path during a second period before the timing at which the game ball distributed to the first flow path during the first period in one specific variable game enters the first specific area. The timing at which the ball enters the second specific area is likely to be earlier.

As a result, when the game ball enters the ball entering means in both the first period and the second period, after the result of whether or not the ball enters the second specified area is obtained, the first specified area is entered. Since it becomes clear whether the ball will enter the area or not, it is possible to suppress the player from being confused as to whether the player should pay attention to the second specific area or the first specific area. It has the effect of being able to

In the gaming machine AS3, the game balls distributed to the first channel enter the first specific area at a first ball-entering rate, and are distributed to the second channel. The gaming machine AS4 is characterized in that game balls enter the second specific area at a second ball-entering rate lower than the first ball-entering rate.

According to the gaming machine AS4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine AS3, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the first flow path is configured such that game balls distributed to the first flow path enter the first specific area at a first ball-entering rate. The second flow path is configured such that game balls distributed to the second flow path enter the second specific area at a second ball-entering rate lower than the first ball-entering rate.

As a result, when the game ball enters the ball entering means in both the first period and the second period, first, whether or not the game ball enters the second specific region with a low percentage of ball entering. After it is clarified, it becomes clear whether or not the game ball enters the first specific area where the percentage of entering balls is high. Therefore, it is possible to increase the degree of expectation that the privilege game will be executed as the variable game progresses, so that there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine AS3 or AS4, at least a first privilege game and a second privilege game more advantageous to the player than the first privilege game are provided as types of the privilege game executed by the privilege game execution means. The privilege game executing means executes the second privilege game at a first rate when the game ball enters the first specific area, and moves to the second specific area. The second privilege game is executed at a second rate higher than the first rate when the ball is entered, and the privilege game execution means is executing one variable game. When the game ball enters the second specific area after that, regardless of whether or not the ball enters the first specific area after that, the second privilege game is executed at the second rate. A gaming machine AS5 characterized by:

According to the game machine AS5, in addition to the effects of the game machine AS3 or AS4, the following effects are produced. That is, as the types of privilege games executed by the privilege game executing means, at least a first privilege game and a second privilege game more advantageous to the player than the first privilege game are provided. While the second privilege game is executed at the first rate by the privilege game execution means when the game ball enters the first specific area, the second privilege game is executed at the first rate when the ball enters the second specified area. A second privilege game is executed at a second rate higher than. When the game ball enters the second specific area during the execution of the variable game of 1, regardless of whether or not the ball enters the first specific area after that, the privilege game executing means sets the second rate. , the second privilege game is executed.

As a result, the game ball enters the ball entry means in both the first period and the second period, and when the game ball enters the second specific area, the game ball enters the first specific area after that. Even if the ball enters the ball, the second privilege game is executed at a high rate, so there is an effect that the player can be relieved when the game ball enters the second specific area.

In any one of the gaming machines AS1 to AS5, the period until the game ball that has flowed into the first flow path enters the first specific area is the period that the game ball that has flowed into the second flow path is the A gaming machine AS6 comprising delay means for delaying the flow rate of a game ball flowing into the second flow path so as to be longer than the period until the ball enters the second specific area.

According to the gaming machine AS6, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines AS1 to AS5, the period until the game ball that has flowed into the first flow path enters the first specific area is extended to the second flow path. Since the delay means delays the flow speed of the game ball flowing into the second flow path so as to make the period longer than the period until the game ball enters the second specific area, the second specific area can be ensured. There is an effect that it is possible to realize the operation of clarifying whether or not the game ball will enter the first specific area after it is clarified whether the game ball will enter the second specific area. be.

In any one of the game machines AS1 to AS6, the privilege game executing means enables the privilege game to be executed based on the fact that the determination result by the determination means is a second determination result different from the specific determination result. A gaming machine AS7 characterized in that it is configured.

According to the gaming machine AS7, in addition to the effect produced by one of the gaming machines AS1 to AS6, the special game execution means performs Since the privilege game is executed, the game can be played while paying attention to the determination result by the determination means. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In any one of the gaming machines AS1 to AS7, as game states after the execution of the privilege game is completed, at least a first game state and a second game state more advantageous to the player than the first game state. game state setting means for setting one game state out of a plurality of game states, wherein the first game state has a higher probability that the discrimination result by the discrimination means is the specific discrimination result than the second game state. A gaming machine AS8 characterized by being low.

According to the gaming machine AS8, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines AS1 to AS7, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the game state setting means selects from a plurality of game states including at least a first game state and a second game state more advantageous to the player than the first game state as the game state after the effect of the privilege game is completed. 1 game state is set by . The first game state is configured such that the probability that the determination result by the determination means is a specific determination result is lower than that in the second game state.

As a result, in the first game state, it is expected that the determination by the determination means will result in the second determination result, while in the second game state, the determination by the determination means can be expected to result in a specific determination result. can be made Therefore, since the game can be sharpened according to the game state, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

<Characteristic AT group> (Make it difficult to understand whether it is a small hit without AV challenge)
A ball entry means into which a game ball can enter, a first position in which a game ball can enter the ball entry means, and a second position in which a game ball is more difficult to enter than the first position. Advantageous to the player based on variable variable means, a specific area provided at a position through which the game ball entering the ball entering means can pass, and the game ball passing through the specific area. privilege game execution means for executing a special privilege game, determination means for performing determination based on the establishment of determination conditions, and the determination result by the determination means being a specific determination result, the variable means is predetermined A variable game executing means for executing a variable game that is varied in a variable pattern, and a game ball passing through the specific area during one variable pattern as the type of the variable game executed by the variable game executing means. A first variable game in which the variable means is varied in a first variable pattern in which at least a specific variable mode to be difficult is set, and a game ball is easier to pass through the specific region than the first variable pattern, and A type that sets one type out of a plurality of types including at least a second variable game in which the variable means is varied in a second variable pattern in which the specific variable mode is set between one variable pattern. A gaming machine AT1 comprising: setting means;

Here, a game machine such as a pachinko machine has a ball entrance into which a ball can be entered by opening (or moving) an electric accessory, and a game ball enters the ball entrance. A game ball that enters the inside of the AV winning device that is opened during a specific game (small winning game, etc.) executed based on the There has been proposed a pachinko machine that can provide a privilege game (winning game, etc.) that is advantageous to the player by passing through it, and has been aimed at improving the interest of the player (for example, Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2011 -010741).

In addition, in such conventional gaming machines, as specific game types, a type in which a game ball can enter a specific area and a type in which it is difficult to enter a specific area are provided. Some exist.

However, in such a conventional gaming machine, in a specific game type in which it is difficult to enter a specific area, the operation is clearly different from that in which it is possible to enter a ball. In some cases, the player could understand whether or not the type of ball would make the ball difficult. Therefore, if the player understands that it is a type that makes it difficult to enter the specific area, there is a possibility that the player's motivation for playing the game may be lowered.

On the other hand, in the game machine AT1, the variable means is variable between a first position where the game ball can be entered into the ball entry means and a second position where the game ball is more difficult to enter than the first position. configured as possible. A privilege game advantageous to the player is executed by the privilege game executing means based on the passage of the game ball through a specific area provided at a position through which the game ball entering the ball entering means can pass. Judgment is executed by the judging means based on the establishment of the judging condition, and the variable game is a variable game in which the variable means is varied in a predetermined variable pattern based on the judging result by the judging means becoming a specific judging result. Executed by execution means. As the type of the variable game executed by the variable game execution means, the variable means is varied with a first variable pattern in which at least a specific variable mode in which the game ball is difficult to pass through the specific area during one variable pattern is set. and a second variable pattern in which the game ball passes through the specific area more easily than the first variable pattern, and a specific variable mode is set between the one variable patterns. One type is set by the type setting means from among a plurality of types including at least a variable second variable game.

As a result, a plurality of different types of variable games can be set by the type setting means, so there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine AT1, the second variable pattern includes the specific variable mode and the second variable mode in which the game ball passes through the specific area more easily than the specific variable mode during one variable pattern. , is set at least.

According to the gaming machine AT2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine AT1, in the second variable pattern, during one variable pattern, a specific variable mode and a game ball pass through a specific area rather than the specific variable mode. Since at least the second variable mode that makes it easier is set, a specific variable mode is set for both the first variable pattern and the second variable pattern. Therefore, since it is possible to make it difficult for the player to recognize whether it is the first variable pattern or the second variable pattern, there is an effect that the expectation for the second variable pattern can be maintained for a longer period of time.

In the game machine AT2, the second variable pattern is a game characterized in that the second variable mode is set after the specific variable mode is set during one variable pattern. Machine AT3.

According to the gaming machine AT3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine AT2, in the second variable pattern, after a specific variable mode is set during one variable pattern, the second variable mode is set. , it is possible to make it difficult for the player to recognize whether it is the first variable pattern or the second variable pattern, at least until the specific variable mode is completed. Therefore, there is an effect that the expectation for the second variable pattern can be maintained for a longer period of time.

In any one of the gaming machines AT1 to AT3, game value imparting means for imparting a predetermined game value based on the entry of a game ball into the ball entering means is provided, and the variable game execution means comprises: The game machine AT4 is characterized in that the variable game is terminated based on the fact that a specific number or more of game balls enter the ball entry means during execution of the variable game.

According to the gaming machine AT4, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines AT1 to AT3, the following effects are exhibited. That is, a predetermined game value is imparted by the game value imparting means based on the game ball entering the ball entering means. Since the execution of the variable game by the variable game execution means is terminated based on the fact that a specific number or more of game balls have entered the ball entry means during the execution of one variable game, is it the first variable pattern? It is possible to realize a novel game property by predicting whether it is the second variable pattern and allowing the player to select whether or not to enter the game ball into the ball entering means during execution of the specific variable mode. can. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine AT4, the second variable pattern makes it easier for the game ball to pass through the specific region than the specific variable mode after the specific variable mode is set during one variable pattern. A second variable mode is set, and at least during execution of the specific variable mode, the game determines whether the game ball is allowed to enter the ball entering means or the ball entering the ball entering means is avoided. The game machine AT5 is characterized by comprising a specific effect execution means for executing a specific effect of a performance mode to be selected by a player.

According to the gaming machine AT5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine AT4, the following effects are exhibited. That is, in the second variable pattern, after a specific variable mode is set during one variable pattern, a second variable mode is set in which the game ball passes through the specific region more easily than the specific variable mode. be. The specific effect of the effect mode that allows the player to select whether to allow the game ball to enter the ball entering means or avoid the ball entering the ball entering means during execution of at least the specific variable mode is the specific effect executing means. Executed by

As a result, the player can easily understand that it is sufficient to select whether to let the game ball enter the ball entering means or to avoid it by the specific performance, so that the easy-to-understand game property is realized. It has the effect of being able to

In the game machine AT5, the specific effect executing means executes the specific effect at least during execution of the specific variable mode regardless of the type of the variable game set by the type setting means. Characteristic game machine AT6.

According to the game machine AT6, in addition to the effects of the game machine AT5, the specific effect executing means executes the specific effect at least during execution of the specific variable mode regardless of the variable game type set by the type setting means. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to make it difficult for the player to recognize the type of variable game.

In the game machine AT5 or AT6, the specific effect executed by the specific effect executing means includes at least a first effect mode and a second effect mode different from the first effect mode. An effect mode determination means is provided for determining one effect mode from among a plurality of effect modes, and the effect mode determination means determines the effect mode rather than the second effect mode when the first variable pattern is set by the type setting means. A ratio of determining the first effect mode is increased, and when the second variable pattern is set by the type setting means, a ratio of determining the second effect mode is higher than that of the first effect mode. A gaming machine AT7 characterized by being configured.

According to the gaming machine AT7, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine AT5 or AT6, the following effects are exhibited. That is, as the effect mode of the specific effect executed by the specific effect executing means, the effect mode is determined from a plurality of effects including at least a first effect mode and a second effect mode that is different from the first effect mode. One effect mode is determined by the means. When the first variable pattern is set by the type setting means, the rate at which the first effect mode is determined is higher than the rate at which the second effect mode is determined by the effect mode determination means. On the other hand, when the second variable pattern is set by the type setting means, the ratio of determining the second effect mode is higher than the ratio of determining the first effect mode by the effect mode determining means.

As a result, it is possible to predict the type of the variable game according to the effect mode of the specific effect, so there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In any one of the game machines AT1 to AT7, the privilege game executing means executes the privilege game based on the determination result by the determination means being a second determination result different from the specific determination result. The game machine AT8 is characterized by being configured to be able to

According to the game machine AT8, in addition to the effect produced by any one of the game machines AT1 to AT7, the privilege game is executed based on the fact that the discrimination result by the discriminating means is the second discrimination result different from the specific discrimination result. Since the privilege game is executed by the means, the player can play the game while paying attention to the discrimination result by the discrimination means. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In any one of the game machines AT1 to AT8, as game states after the execution of the privilege game is completed, at least a first game state and a second game state more advantageous to the player than the first game state. game state setting means for setting one game state out of a plurality of game states, wherein the first game state has a higher probability that the discrimination result by the discrimination means is the specific discrimination result than the second game state. A gaming machine AT9 characterized by being low.

According to the gaming machine AT8, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines AT1 to AT8, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the game state setting means selects from a plurality of game states including at least a first game state and a second game state more advantageous to the player than the first game state as the game state after the execution of the privilege game is completed. 1 game state is set by . In the first game state, the probability that the determination result by the determination means is a specific determination result is lower than that in the second game state.

As a result, in the first game state, it is expected that the determination by the determination means will result in the second determination result, while in the second game state, the determination by the determination means can be expected to result in a specific determination result. can be made Therefore, since the game can be sharpened according to the game state, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

<Characteristic AU Group> (Change the role of the display mode displayed when the button is operated according to the player's operation status)
A specific effect executing means for executing a specific effect based on the establishment of a predetermined specific condition in a predetermined effect period, and a first specific effect as the type of the specific effect executed by the specific effect executing means. and a second specific effect suggesting that the game is more advantageous to the player than the first specific effect; As the ratio at which the second specific effect is determined, one ratio is selected from a plurality of ratios including at least a first ratio and a second ratio higher than the first ratio according to the game situation. A gaming machine AU1 characterized by comprising a setting ratio setting means.

Among gaming machines such as pachinko machines, gaming machines provided with a display device such as a liquid crystal display device are known. In this conventional gaming machine, symbols are variably displayed on the display device, and the symbols are stopped and displayed in a predetermined combination, thereby providing a winning game advantageous to the player. In addition, various images such as characters and scenery are displayed on the display device in addition to the patterns, and various entertainment effects are performed to improve the interest of the game (for example, Patent Document 1: 2003-325886).

In addition, in such conventional gaming machines, an operation means that can be operated by the player is provided, and every time the operation means is operated during the execution of the entertainment performance, the expectation of winning a game is suggested. There are also things that can perform production.

However, in such a conventional gaming machine, depending on whether the player tends to perform operations positively or the player tends not to perform operations, suggestive effects with a high degree of expectation are given between the first interest effects. Since the number of times that is executed varies, there is a problem that the degree of expectation of the entertainment effect also varies depending on the tendency of the player's operation.

On the other hand, according to the game machine AU1, a specific effect is executed by the specific effect executing means based on the fact that a predetermined specific condition is established during a predetermined effect period. A plurality of types including at least a first specific effect and a second specific effect suggesting that the player is more advantageous than the first specific effect as the types of the specific effect executed by the specific effect executing means. One type is determined from among them by the type determining means. As a rate at which the second specific effect is determined by the type determination means, the rate setting means selects from a plurality of rates including at least a first rate and a second rate higher than the first rate. A ratio of 1 is set according to the situation.

As a result, the rate at which the second specific effect is determined can be changed according to the game situation, so there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In the game machine AU1, the game machine AU2 is characterized in that the specific condition can be satisfied a plurality of times during one of the presentation periods.

According to the gaming machine AU2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine AU1, since it is configured so that the specific condition can be satisfied a plurality of times in one presentation period, the game is played with the expectation that the specific condition will be satisfied as many times as possible. can be done. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

A gaming machine AU3 characterized in that the gaming machine AU1 or AU2 is provided with operation means that can be operated by a player, and the specific condition is established when the operation means is operated during the performance period.

According to the gaming machine AU3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine AU1 or AU2, the specific condition is satisfied when the player operates the operation means during the presentation period, so that the specific presentation is performed more frequently. Since the player who wants to play the game can be made to operate the operating means positively, there is an effect that the player's willingness to participate in the game can be enhanced.

In any one of the gaming machines AU1 to AU3, at least one of the game machines AU1 to AU3 includes satisfaction status determination means for determining whether or not the specific condition is satisfied in at least one of the performance periods, and information corresponding to the determination result by the satisfaction status determination means is provided at least next to the above-mentioned and holding means capable of holding until a specific effect is executed, wherein the ratio setting means selects one of the plurality of ratios according to the information held by the holding means. A gaming machine AU4 characterized by setting a ratio.

According to the game machine AU4, in addition to the effects of the game machines AU1 to AU3, the following effects are produced. That is, the fulfillment status of the specific condition in at least one effect period is determined by the fulfillment status determining means, and the information corresponding to the determination result by the fulfillment status determining means is held by the holding means at least until the next specific effect is executed. held by According to the information held by the holding means, a ratio of 1 is set by the ratio setting means out of the plurality of ratios.

As a result, it is possible to vary the rate at which the second specific effect is determined when the specific condition is satisfied during the current effect period according to the establishment of the specific condition during the previous effect period. There is an effect that the ratio can be preferably set according to the tendency of the establishment of the specific condition.

In the gaming machine AU4, the establishment status determination means is configured to be able to determine at least whether or not the number of times the specific condition is satisfied in one of the presentation periods is equal to or greater than a specific number of times, and the ratio setting is performed. The means sets the first ratio when the establishment status determination means determines that the number of times the specific condition is satisfied is equal to or greater than the specific number of times, and sets the first ratio when the number of times the specific condition is satisfied is determined to be less than the specific number of times. A game machine AU5 characterized by setting a second ratio.

According to the gaming machine AU5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine AU4, the following effects are exhibited. That is, it is determined by the establishment status determining means whether or not the number of times the specific condition is satisfied in one performance period is equal to or greater than the specific number of times. When the number of times the specific condition is met is determined by the establishment status determining means to be equal to or greater than the specified number of times, and the first rate is set by the rate setting means while it is determined to be less than the specified number of times. is set to a second percentage.

Thus, when the number of times the specific condition is established is relatively small, the ratio of determining the second specific performance in the next performance period can be increased, so the second specific performance is determined within one performance period. can be evened out. Therefore, there is an effect that a more suitable presentation can be realized.

In any one of the game machines AU1 to AU4, a discrimination means for executing discrimination based on establishment of a discrimination condition, and a privilege game advantageous to the player based on the discrimination result of the discrimination means becoming a specific discrimination result. Suggestion performance execution means for executing a determination result suggestion performance indicating the determination result of the determination means in the predetermined performance period based on the fact that the determination by the determination means is performed, wherein the type determining means is arranged to have a performance period of the discrimination result suggestive effect indicating the specific discrimination result rather than a performance period of the discrimination result suggestive effect showing a different discrimination result from the specific discrimination result. However, the game machine AU5 is configured such that the ratio of determining the second specific effect increases when the specific condition is established.

According to the gaming machine AU5, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines AU1 to AU4, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the determination is performed by the determination means based on the establishment of the determination condition, and a privilege game advantageous to the player is executed based on the determination result of the determination means being a specific determination result. Based on execution of determination by the determining means, a determination result suggesting effect indicating the determination result of the determining means is executed in a predetermined effect period by the suggesting effect executing means. When a specific condition is satisfied, the type determination means determines that the performance period of the discrimination result suggestion presentation indicating the specific discrimination result is more than the presentation period of the discrimination result suggestion presentation showing the discrimination result different from the specific discrimination result. It is configured such that the ratio of determining the second specific effect is high.

As a result, the game can be played with the expectation that the second specific effect will be executed each time the specific condition is satisfied. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine AU5, the ratio setting means sets the first ratio, the second ratio, and the third ratio lower than the first ratio as the ratio at which the second specific effect is determined. , and a fourth ratio lower than the second ratio, and the ratio setting means sets one ratio out of a plurality of ratios including at least one of: the discrimination result indicating the specific discrimination result; Either the first ratio or the second ratio is set according to the game situation in the effect period of the suggestive effect, and in the effect period of the discrimination result suggestive effect indicating the result of the discrepancy, The game machine AU6 is characterized in that it is constructed such that either the third ratio or the fourth ratio can be set according to the game situation.

According to the gaming machine AU6, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine AU5, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the ratios at which the second specific effect is determined are the first ratio, the second ratio, the third ratio lower than the first ratio, and the fourth ratio lower than the second ratio. A ratio of 1 is set by the ratio setting means from among a plurality of ratios including at least . Either the first ratio or the second ratio is set according to the game situation by the ratio setting means in the performance period of the discrimination result suggestive effect indicating the specific discrimination result, while the outlier discrimination result is set. Either the third ratio or the fourth ratio is set according to the game situation by the ratio setting means in the production period of the discrimination result suggestive production shown.

As a result, there is an effect that the expectation of the player for the privilege game can be improved when the second specific effect is executed.

In the gaming machine AU6, the ratio setting means sets the first ratio when it is the performance period of the discrimination result suggesting effect indicating the specific discrimination result and the game situation is the first game situation. is set, and when it is the performance period of the discrimination result suggesting effect indicating the specific discrimination result, and the game situation is a second game situation different from the first game situation, the second Set the ratio of, when it is the production period of the discrimination result suggestion effect indicating the outlier discrimination result, and when the game situation is the first game situation, the third ratio is set, and the outlier A gaming machine characterized in that the fourth ratio is set when it is the performance period of the discrimination result suggestive effect indicating the discrimination result and the game situation is the second game situation. AU7.

According to the gaming machine AU7, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine AU6, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when it is the performance period of the discrimination result suggesting effect indicating the specific discrimination result and the game situation is the first game situation, the first ratio is set by the ratio setting means, and the specific discrimination result is displayed. and the game situation is a second game situation different from the first game situation, the second ratio is set by the ratio setting means, and the deviation is determined When it is the performance period of the discrimination result suggesting effect indicating the result and the game situation is the first game situation, the third ratio is set by the ratio setting means, and the discrimination result suggesting effect indicating the failure discrimination result. and the game situation is the second game situation, the fourth ratio is set by the ratio setting means, so that there is an effect that the production mode can be diversified.

In any one of the gaming machines AU5 to AU7, one of a plurality of periods including at least a first effect period and a second effect period longer than the first effect period as the effect period of the discrimination result suggesting effect. wherein the type determining means includes the first specific effect, the second specific effect, and a third specific effect different from any of the first specific effect and the second specific effect. , wherein one type can be determined from a plurality of types including at least a performance, and the third specific performance is performed during the second performance period rather than the first performance period. A game machine AU8 characterized in that the percentage determined when a condition is established is high.

According to the gaming machine AU8, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines AU5 to AU7, the following effects are exhibited. That is, as the performance period of the discrimination result suggesting performance, one period is set by the performance period setting means from among a plurality of periods including at least a first performance period and a second performance period longer than the first performance period. be done. The type of one specific performance is selected by a type determining means from a plurality of types including at least a first specific performance, a second specific performance, and a third specific performance different from any of the first specific performance and the second specific performance. is determined. The ratio of determining the third specific effect when the specific condition is established in the second effect period is higher than that in the first effect period.

As a result, when the third specific effect is executed, there is an effect that it is possible to heighten the expectation that the second effect period is set.

In the gaming machine AU8, the third specific effect is, when the specific condition is established during a period equal to or less than the length of the first effect period after the second effect period is started, A gaming machine AU9 characterized in that the ratio of determination is higher than when the specific condition is established in the first presentation period.

According to the gaming machine AU9, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine AU8, when the specific condition is established during the period from the start of the second effect period to the elapse of a period equal to or less than the length of the first effect period. , since the ratio of determination of the third specific effect becomes higher than when the specific condition is satisfied in the first effect period, the determination result suggesting effect is performed beyond the first effect period by executing the third specific effect. There is an effect that the expectation for the continuation can be increased.

In the gaming machine AU8 or AU9, the effect period setting means sets a higher ratio of setting the second effect period than the first effect period as the effect period of the discrimination result suggesting effect indicating the specific discrimination result. A game machine AU10 characterized in that it is configured to be.

According to the gaming machine AU10, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine AU8 or AU9, the ratio of setting the second rendering period is higher than the first rendering period as the rendering period of the discrimination result suggesting rendering showing the specific discrimination result. Since the effect period setting means is configured such that the third specific effect is executed, there is an effect that the expectation of the player for the privilege game can be improved.

In any one of the game machines AU8 to AU10, the specific effect executing means is configured to execute a period from when the discrimination result suggesting effect of the second effect period is started until a period of the same length as the first effect period elapses. The specific effect can be executed in a first period set between and in a second period set after a period of the same length as the first effect period has passed. The type determining means has a higher rate of determining the third specific effect when the specific condition is satisfied in the first period than in the second period, and the type determining means The determining means determines the third specific effect in the first period at a common specific ratio regardless of whether or not the discrimination result suggestive effect indicates the specific discrimination result. Gaming machine AU11.

According to the gaming machine AU 11, the first period set during the period from when the determination result suggesting effect of the second effect period is started until the period of the same length as the first effect period elapses, and the first effect A specific effect is executed by a specific effect executing means in a second period which is set after a period of the same length as the period has passed. When the specific condition is satisfied in the first period, the determination ratio of the third specific effect by the type determining means is higher than in the second period. The third specific effect is determined in the first period at a common specific ratio by the type determining means, regardless of whether or not it is a discrimination result suggestive effect indicating a specific discrimination result.

As a result, it becomes difficult to execute the specific performance of the type indicating the discrimination result during the first period, so there is an effect that the expectation for the specified discrimination result can be maintained until the second period.

<Characteristic AV group> (varies the effective number of button operations according to the production)
Specific effect execution means for executing a specific effect, and specific effect mode execution means for executing a specific effect mode based on the establishment of a predetermined first condition during a specific period included in the execution period of the specific effect. and specific control execution means capable of executing a predetermined specific control based on the establishment of a second condition different from the first condition, wherein the specific control execution means performs the second A game characterized in that the specific control is more difficult to execute when the condition is satisfied during the specific period than when the condition is satisfied during a period different from the specific period. Machine AV1.

Among gaming machines such as pachinko machines, gaming machines provided with a display device such as a liquid crystal display device are known. In this conventional gaming machine, symbols are variably displayed on the display device, and the symbols are stopped and displayed in a predetermined combination, thereby providing a winning game advantageous to the player. In addition, various images such as characters and scenery are displayed on the display device in addition to the patterns, and various entertainment effects are performed to improve the interest of the game (for example, Patent Document 1: 2003-325886).

In addition, in such a conventional gaming machine, an operation means that a player can operate is provided, and a suggestive effect that suggests the degree of expectation of winning a game by operating the operation means during the execution of an interesting effect. There are also those that can execute

Furthermore, in such conventional gaming machines, there are those in which various settings of the gaming machine can be changed by operating the operating means while the suggestive effect is not being executed.

However, such a conventional gaming machine has a problem that the setting of the gaming machine may be changed against the player's will due to an operation mistake during execution of the suggestive effect.

On the other hand, the game machine AV1 has the following effects. That is, the specific effect is executed by the specific effect executing means. A specific effect mode is executed by the specific effect mode executing means based on the establishment of a predetermined first condition during a specific period included in the execution period of the specific effect. A predetermined specific control is executed by the specific control execution means based on the establishment of a second condition different from the first condition. It is more difficult for the specific control executing means to execute the specific control when the second condition is satisfied during the specific period than when the second condition is satisfied during a period different from the specific period.

As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from being preoccupied with the specific control due to the execution of the specific control in the specific period, so that the player can concentrate on the specific effect mode. Therefore, there is an effect that the specific effect can be executed more preferably.

The gaming machine AV1 is provided with operation means that can be operated by the player, and the first condition is established based on the operation of the first operation content being performed on the operation means during the specific period. and the second condition is satisfied when an operation of a second operation content different from the first operation content is executed on the operating means. Game machine AV2 to play.

According to the gaming machine AV2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine AV1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the first condition is established based on the fact that the operation having the first operation content is performed on the operation means during the specific period. The second condition is established based on the fact that an operation having a second operation content different from the first operation content has been performed on the operating means.

As a result, when a player who wants to display a specific effect mode during a specific period of time erroneously operates the second operation content while trying to operate the first operation content, Since execution of specific control is restricted, there is an effect that it is possible to concentrate on specific effects.

In the gaming machine AV2, the specific control executing means executes the specific control each time the operation of the second operation content is executed during a period different from the specific period, and performs the second control during the specific period. The gaming machine AV3 is characterized in that the specific control is executed based on the fact that the operation of the operation content has been established for a predetermined specific number of times.

According to the game machine AV3, in addition to the effects of the game machine AV2, the specific control executing means can execute the specific control each time the operation of the second operation content is executed in a period different from the specific period. Then, the specific control execution means executes specific control based on the fact that the second operation content has been established for a predetermined specific number of times during the specific period. It is possible to fulfill the desire of the player who thinks that. Therefore, there is an effect that convenience for the player can be further improved.

In the game machine AV2 or AV3, the operating means is composed of at least a first operating means and a second operating means provided adjacent to the first operating means. The operation of the operation content of (1) is an operation to the first operation means, and the operation of the second operation content is an operation to the second operation means.

According to the game machine AV4, in addition to the effects of the game machine AV2 or AV3, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the operating means is composed of at least the first operating means and the second operating means provided adjacent to the first operating means. An operation of the first operation content is an operation on the first operation means, and an operation of the second operation content is an operation on the second operation means.

As a result, it is possible to prevent the second control from being executed against the player's will when the second operating means is erroneously operated while trying to operate the first operating means. Therefore, there is an effect that the specific effect can be executed more preferably.

A gaming machine AV5, wherein in any one of the gaming machines AV1 to AV4, the specific control is control for changing a predetermined setting of the gaming machine from a first setting to a second setting.

According to the game machine AV5, in addition to the effects produced by any one of the game machines AV1 to AV4, when specific control is executed, the predetermined setting of the game machine is changed from the first setting to the second setting. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the setting of the game machine from being changed during the specific period. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can be concentrated by the specific effect.

In any one of game machines AV1 to AV5, a discrimination means for executing discrimination based on establishment of a discrimination condition, and a privilege game advantageous to a player based on the discrimination result of the discrimination means becoming a specific discrimination result. and a first mode as the type of the specific effect mode executed by the specific effect mode execution means, and a second mode different from the first mode. mode type determination means for determining one type from among the When the first condition is established in the execution period of the specific effect indicating the specific determination result, the ratio of determining the second mode is higher than that of the first mode. A gaming machine AV6 characterized by:

According to the gaming machine AV6, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines AV1 to AV5, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the determination by the determination means is executed based on the establishment of the determination condition, and the privilege game that is advantageous to the player is executed by the privilege game execution means based on the determination result of the determination means becoming a specific determination result. be. As the type of the specific effect mode to be executed by the specific effect mode execution means, one type is selected by the mode type determination means from among a plurality of types including at least a first mode and a second mode different from the first mode. It is determined. The specific effect is composed of an effect for indicating the determination result of the determining means. When the first condition is met in the execution period of the specific effect indicating the specific determination result, the determination ratio of the first mode by the mode type determining means becomes higher than the determination rate of the second mode.

As a result, the player can expect that the second mode will be determined each time the first condition is satisfied, so there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine AV2, during the specific period, when the second condition is satisfied, the execution of the specific control by the specific control execution means is permitted, and when the second condition is satisfied, A gaming machine AV7, comprising state switching means for switching between a restricted state in which execution of the specific control by the specific control execution means is restricted, and a restricted state.

According to the gaming machine AV7, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine AV2, the allowable state in which the specific control executing means is allowed to execute the specific control when the second condition is satisfied during the specific period, and the second condition Since the state switching means switches between a restricted state in which the execution of the specific control by the specific control execution means is restricted when the is established, the player wants the specific control to be executed during the specific period. can fulfill your wishes. Therefore, there is an effect that convenience for the player can be improved.

In the gaming machine AV7, a restriction state setting means for setting the restriction state based on the start of the specific period is provided, and the state switching means controls the operation means during the restriction state to perform a third operation. The game machine AV8 is characterized in that it is switched to the allowable state based on the execution of the operation of the operation content.

According to the gaming machine AV8, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine AV7, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the restricted state is set by the restricted state setting means based on the start of the specific period. The state switching means switches to the allowable state based on the operation of the third operation content being performed on the operating means during the restricted state.

As a result, it is possible to easily fulfill the desire of the player who dares to execute the specific control during the specific period. Therefore, there is an effect that convenience for the player can be further improved.

In the gaming machine AV8, the state switching means, based on the fact that an operation of a fourth operation content different from the third operation content is executed on the operation means during the allowable state, causes the restriction A game machine AV9 characterized by switching to a state.

According to the game machine AV9, in addition to the effects of the game machine AV8, based on the execution of the fourth operation content different from the third operation content on the operating means during the allowable state, Since it is possible to switch to the restricted state by the state switching means, there is an effect that convenience for the player can be further improved.

The game machine AV10 in the game machine AV9, characterized in that the specific effect mode executing means restricts the execution of the specific effect mode when the first condition is satisfied in the allowable state.

According to the gaming machine AV10, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine AV9, when the first condition is satisfied in the allowable state, execution of the specific effect mode by the specific effect mode executing means is restricted. can concentrate on controlling the Therefore, there is an effect that more suitable control can be realized.

In the game machine AV10, the operation of the fourth operation content is the same as the operation of the first operation content.

According to the game machine AV11, in addition to the effects of the game machine AV10, since the operation of the fourth operation content and the operation of the first operation content are the same, switching from the allowable state to the restricted state and specifying can be realized by the operation of the same operation content. Therefore, there is an effect that the operation can be simplified.

In any one of the game machines AU8 to AU10, the specific effect executing means is configured to execute a period from when the discrimination result suggesting effect of the second effect period is started until a period of the same length as the first effect period elapses. The specific effect can be executed in a first period set between and in a second period set after a period of the same length as the first effect period has passed. The type determining means has a higher rate of determining the third specific effect when the specific condition is satisfied in the first period than in the second period, and the type determining means The determining means determines the third specific effect in the first period at a common specific ratio regardless of whether or not the discrimination result suggestive effect indicates the specific discrimination result. Gaming machine AU11.

According to the gaming machine AU 11, the first period set during the period from when the determination result suggesting effect of the second effect period is started until the period of the same length as the first effect period elapses, and the first effect A specific effect is executed by a specific effect executing means in a second period which is set after a period of the same length as the period has passed. The type determination means determines a third specific effect with a higher percentage when the specific condition is satisfied in the first period than in the second period. Irrespective of at least whether or not it is a discrimination result suggestive effect indicating a specific discrimination result, the third specific effect is determined by the type determining means at a common rate when the specific condition is satisfied in the first period.

As a result, it becomes difficult to execute the specific performance of the type indicating the discrimination result during the first period, so there is an effect that the expectation for the specified discrimination result can be maintained until the second period.

<Characteristic AW group> (A configuration in which the degree of expectation varies even with the same action according to the appearance timing of the mini character)
A display means capable of displaying an effect mode, a determination means for executing determination based on the establishment of a determination condition, and a display to a player based on the determination result of the determination means becoming a predetermined specific determination result. A privilege game executing means for executing an advantageous privilege game, a specific effect executing means for executing a specific effect indicating the determination result of the determining means, and a predetermined effect for the display means during execution of the specific effect. display control means capable of displaying a specific display mode; a first timing included in the effect period of the specific effect as a timing at which the specific display mode is displayed by the display control means; and a display timing determining means for determining one display timing from among a plurality of display timings including at least a second timing different from the timing, wherein the second timing is a second determination result different from the specific determination result. The game machine AW1 is characterized in that the ratio of determining the specific effect indicating the specific determination result is higher than the specific effect indicating the specific determination result.

Among gaming machines such as pachinko machines, gaming machines provided with a display device such as a liquid crystal display device are known. In this conventional gaming machine, symbols are variably displayed on the display device, and the symbols are stopped and displayed in a predetermined combination, thereby providing a winning game advantageous to the player. In addition, various images such as characters and scenery are displayed on the display device in addition to the patterns, and various entertainment effects are performed to improve the interest of the game (for example, Patent Document 1: 2003-325886).

In addition, in such conventional game machines, apart from the interest effect related to the variable display of symbols, there is a further interest by making a character perform a predetermined action to indicate a predetermined degree of expectation. There are also some that are trying to improve

However, in such a conventional gaming machine, it sometimes becomes difficult to understand the correspondence relationship between the variable display of symbols and the action of the character.

On the other hand, the game machine AW1 has the following effects. That is, the determination is performed by the determination means based on the establishment of the determination condition, and when the determination result of the determination means becomes a predetermined specific determination result, the privilege game execution means provides a privilege advantageous to the player. A game is executed. A specific effect indicating the determination result by the determining means is executed by the specific effect executing means. During execution of the specific effect, a predetermined specific display mode is displayed on the display means by the display control means. Display timing is determined from a plurality of timings including at least a first timing included in the performance period of the specific performance and a second timing different from the first timing as the timing at which the specific display mode is displayed by the display control means. The display timing of 1 is determined by means. The second timing is configured such that a specific effect indicating a specific determination result is determined more frequently than a specific effect indicating a second determination result different from the specific determination result.

As a result, the player can play the game by paying attention to whether or not the specific display mode is displayed at the second timing, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In the game machine AW1, an effect mode executing means capable of executing at least a first effect mode and a second effect mode that can be executed after the first effect mode is finished as the effect mode during execution of the specific effect. In the second effect mode, the ratio of execution of the specific effect indicating the specific determination result is higher than the specific effect indicating the second determination result, and the specific effect The game machine AW2 is characterized in that the display mode is configured to at least suggest that the second performance mode will be performed by being performed at the second timing.

According to the game machine AW2, in addition to the effects of the game machine AW1, the following effects are produced. That is, as the effect mode during execution of the specific effect, at least a first effect mode and a second effect mode that can be executed after the first effect mode is completed are configured to be executable by the effect mode executing means. there is The second effect mode is configured such that the specific effect indicating the specific determination result is executed at a higher rate than the specific effect indicating the second determination result. The specific display mode is configured to be able to at least suggest that the second rendering mode will be performed by being performed at the second timing.

As a result, it is possible to realize a game property in which a game is played by comparing a specific effect with a specific display mode. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine AW2, the display timing determining means determines the second timing in the specific effect in which the second effect mode is executed more frequently than in the specific effect in which the second effect mode is not executed. A gaming machine AW3 characterized by being configured as follows.

According to the game machine AW3, in addition to the effects of the game machine AW2, the second timing is determined by the display timing determining means in the specific effect in which the second effect mode is executed rather than in the specific effect in which the second effect mode is not executed. Since the ratio is high, there is an effect that it is possible to strongly expect that the display timing of the specific display mode will be the second timing.

In the game machine AW2 or AW3, the specific effect is to notify the determination result of the determination means at the end of the first effect mode when the second effect mode is not executed by the effect mode execution means, The gaming machine AW4 is characterized in that the second timing is composed of display timings at which the specific display mode is displayed across the start timing of the second effect mode.

According to the game machine AW4, in addition to the effects of the game machine AW2 or AW3, the following effects are produced. That is, when the second effect mode is not executed by the effect mode executing means, the determination result of the determining means is notified by the specific effect at the end of the first effect mode. When the specific display mode is displayed at the second timing, the specific display mode is displayed across the start timing of the second effect mode.

Thus, by comparing the progress of the first effect mode and the display timing of the specific display mode, the player can determine that the second effect mode will start before the second effect mode is executed. can be understood. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be further improved.

In the game machine AW4, the first timing is a display timing at which the display of the specific display mode ends during the execution period of the first effect mode.

According to the gaming machine AW5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine AW4, when the specific display mode is displayed at the first timing, the specific display mode ends during the execution period of the first presentation mode. It can be difficult to predict from a specific display mode whether or not the second rendering mode will be executed. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to improve the sense of anticipation for execution of the second effect mode.

In any one of the gaming machines AW1 to AW5, a ball entry means into which a game ball can enter, a first position in which a game ball can enter the ball entry means, and a game ball more than the first position. A variable means that can be changed to a second position where it is difficult to enter a ball, a value imparting means that imparts a predetermined value based on the fact that a game ball has entered the ball entering means, and a ball entering means. A second privilege game advantageous to the player is executed based on a specific area provided at a position where a game ball that has entered can be entered, and the game ball has entered the specific area. 2 privilege game execution means, wherein the privilege game execution means changes the variable means from the second position to the first position for a predetermined period as the privilege game. Machine AW6.

According to the game machine AW6, in addition to the effects of the game machines AW1 to AW5, the following effects are produced. That is, the variable means is variable between a first position where the game ball can enter the ball entering means, and a second position where the game ball is more difficult to enter than the first position. do. A predetermined valuable value is imparted by the value imparting means based on the game ball entering the ball entering means. A specific area is provided at a position where a game ball that has entered the ball entering means can enter. A second privilege game that is advantageous to the player is executed by the second privilege game execution means based on the game ball entering the specific area. As a privilege game, the variable means is changed from the second value to the first position for a predetermined period by the privilege game executing means.

As a result, the game can be played while paying attention to whether or not the game ball enters the specific area, so there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine AW6, a distribution means for distributing a game ball that has entered the ball entry means to either the specific area or a second area different from the specific area, and the privilege game execution means As the type of the privilege game to be executed, the variable means is varied to the first position during a period during which the game ball entered into the ball entering means is likely to be sorted to the specific area by the sorting means. A plurality of privilege game types including at least a first privilege game and a second privilege game in which the variable means is changed to the first position during a period in which the distribution means easily distributes to the second area. and a privilege game type determination means for determining one type of the above, wherein the privilege game type determination means determines the first privilege game based on the specific determination result, and the second The gaming machine AW7 is characterized in that the second privilege game is determined based on the determination result.

According to the gaming machine AW7, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine AW6, the following effects are exhibited. Namely, the game ball that entered the ball entering means is distributed by the distribution means to either the specific area or the second area different from the specific area. As the type of the privilege game executed by the privilege game execution means, the variable means is varied to the first position during the period in which the game ball entered into the ball entry means is easily sorted to the specific area by the sorting means. One type of a plurality of types of privilege games including at least one privilege game and a second privilege game in which the variable means is changed to the first position during a period in which the distribution means easily distributes to the second area. is determined by the privilege game type determining means. While the first privilege game is determined by the privilege game type determination means based on the specific determination result, the second privilege game is determined by the privilege game type determination means based on the second determination result. It is determined.

As a result, there is an effect that the player can be strongly expected to obtain a specific determination result.

In the gaming machine game machine AW7, the second timing is the specific effect indicating the second determination result rather than the specific effect indicating the result of determination that the privilege game is not executed by the privilege game executing means. The game machine AW8 is characterized in that it is configured such that a higher ratio is determined for .

According to the game machine AW8, in addition to the effects of the game machine AW7, the specific effect indicating the second determination result is more preferable than the specific effect indicating the result of the determination that the privilege game is not executed by the privilege game execution means. However, since the rate at which the second timing is determined increases, there is an effect that when a specific display mode is displayed at the second timing, the expectation for the execution of the privilege game can be improved. .

In the gaming machine AW8, the second privilege game execution means determines that the determination result of the determination means is a third determination result different from any of the specific determination result, the second determination result, and the out-of-range determination result. The second privilege game can be executed based on the display timing determination means, the specific effect indicating the result of the determination of the deviation, and the specific effect indicating the result of the third determination. , a gaming machine AW9 characterized in that it is configured such that a ratio for determining the second timing is common.

According to the gaming machine AW9, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine AW8, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the second privilege game is executed by the second privilege game execution means based on the fact that the discrimination result of the discrimination means is the third discrimination result different from any of the specific discrimination result, the second discrimination result, and the outlier discrimination result. be done. A ratio of determining the second timing by the display timing determination means is made common between the specific effect indicating the result of the determination of the failure and the specific effect indicating the result of the third determination.

As a result, even when the specific display mode is not displayed at the second timing, there is an effect that it is possible to maintain the expectation of the specific effect indicating the third determination result.

<Characteristic AX group> (During the small hit, the production that suggests the expectation that it is switched to a route that is easy to be guided to the AV winning entrance with high expectations for time saving is executed at a timing that is not in time even if you see it and hit it)
A ball entry means into which a game ball can enter, a first position in which a game ball can enter the ball entry means, and a second position in which a game ball is more difficult to enter than the first position. A variable variable means, a first flow path configured so that a game ball that has entered the ball entering means can flow down, a second flow path different from the first flow path, and the ball entering means Distributing means for distributing a game ball entering into one of a plurality of flow paths including at least the first flow path and the second flow path, and a game ball flowing down the first flow path A specific area provided at a position where a ball can be entered, a privilege game execution means for executing a privilege game advantageous to the player based on the fact that the game ball has entered the specific area, and establishment of a discrimination condition. a determining means for performing determination based on a specific determination result, and the variable means is varied from the second position to the first position for a predetermined period of time based on the determination result of the determining means becoming a specific determination result. A variable game execution means for executing a game, and a game ball that has entered the ball entering means is distributed to the first flow path based on the execution of the variable game by the variable game execution means. A distribution control means for controlling the distribution means such that a plurality of distribution states including at least a first distribution state and a second distribution state distributed to the second flow path are switched in a specific switching pattern. and specific effect executing means for executing a specific effect suggesting that the game is in the first distribution state during execution of the variable game.

Here, a game machine such as a pachinko machine has a ball entry opening that allows a ball to be entered by opening (or moving) an electric accessory, and a game ball enters the ball entry opening. A game ball that enters the AV winning device that is opened during a specific game (small winning game, etc.) executed by There has been proposed a pachinko machine that can provide a privilege game (such as a winning game) that is advantageous to the player by playing, and has been aimed at improving the interest of the player in the game (for example, Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent Laid-Open 2011-010741).

In addition, some of such conventional game machines are provided with a distribution member that distributes a game ball entered inside the AV winning device to either a specific area or a non-specific area. , the player's interest in the game is enhanced by making the player pay attention to how the game is distributed by the distribution member.

However, in such a conventional gaming machine, there is a problem that it is difficult to understand the state of the distribution member, and it is difficult to grasp to which area the game ball entering the AV winning device is distributed.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine AX1, there is a first position where a game ball can be entered into a ball entry means into which a game ball can be entered, and a game ball is more difficult to enter than the first position. A variable means is configured to be variable between the second position and the second position. A first flow path and a second flow path are provided at positions where a game ball entering the ball entering means can flow down. A game ball entered into the ball-entering means is distributed to one of a plurality of flow paths including at least a first flow path and a second flow path by the distribution means. A specific area is provided at a position where the game ball that has flowed down the first flow path can enter, and a privilege that is advantageous to the player by the privilege game execution means based on the fact that the game ball has entered the specific area. A game is executed. Determination by the determination means is executed based on the establishment of the determination condition, and when the determination result of the determination means becomes a specific determination result, the variable means is changed from the second position to the first position for a predetermined period by the variable game execution means. A variable game that is variable in position is executed. Based on the execution of the variable game by the variable game executing means, the game ball entering the ball entering means is distributed to the first flow path, and the game ball is distributed to the second flow path. The distribution control means controls the distribution means such that a plurality of distribution states including at least the second distribution state are switched in a predetermined switching pattern. During the execution of the variable game, the specific effect executing means executes a specific effect suggesting that the player is in the first distribution state.

As a result, the game can be played while paying attention to whether or not the game ball enters the ball entering means during execution of the specific performance, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved. There is

In the gaming machine AX1, a shooting means capable of shooting game balls is provided, and the specific switching pattern is set so that the game balls shot by the shooting means after the specific effect is started are in the first distribution state. A gaming machine AX2 characterized in that the length of the period for switching to the first distribution state is set so that it is difficult to reach the ball-entering means.

According to the gaming machine AX2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine AX1, the specific switching pattern is such that the game ball shot by the shooting means after the start of the specific effect enters the ball entering means during the first distribution state. Since the length of the period of switching to the first distribution state is set so that it is difficult to reach the , it realizes a game that makes you expect that the specific performance will be executed luckily at the timing when the game ball enters. can do. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine AX1 or AX2, a third flow path different from either of the first flow path and the second flow path is configured so that a game ball entered into the ball entering means can flow down, and the third flow path and a second specific area provided at a position where a game ball that has flowed down the path can enter, and the sorting means distributes the game ball that has entered the ball entering means to the first flow path. , the second flow path, or the third flow path, and the distribution control means comprises the first distribution state, the second distribution state, and the ball-entering means. and a third distribution state in which the game ball entered into the third flow path is distributed to the third flow path, and the distribution means is controlled so as to switch according to the specific switching pattern, and the privilege game execution means The gaming machine AX3 executes the privilege game based on the game ball entering at least one of the specific area and the second specific area.

According to the gaming machine AX3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine AX1 or AX2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the second specific area is provided at a position where the game ball that has flowed down through the third flow path, in which the game ball that has entered the ball-entering means can flow down, can enter. A game ball entering the ball entering means is distributed to any one of the first flow path, the second flow path, and the third flow path. A first distribution state, a second distribution state, and a third distribution state in which a game ball entering the ball entering means is distributed to the third flow path are switched in a specific switching pattern, The distribution control means controls the distribution means. The privilege game is executed by the privilege game executing means based on the game ball entering at least one of the specific area and the second specific area.

Thereby, even if the game ball does not enter the ball-entering means during execution of the specific performance, the special performance is executed by the game ball entering the ball during the third distribution state. Even when the game ball enters the ball-entering means at a timing different from that during the execution of , there is an effect that the player's expectation for the privilege game can be maintained.

In the gaming machine AX3, as the game state after the privilege game ends, one game state is selected from a plurality of game states including at least a first game state and a second game state more advantageous than the first game state. game state setting means for setting the game state setting means, the game ball enters the specific area than when the game ball enters the second specific area and the privilege game is executed; The gaming machine AX4 is characterized in that the ratio of setting the second game state is higher when the privilege game is executed.

According to the gaming machine AX4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine AX3, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the game state setting means selects one game state from among a plurality of game states including at least a first game state and a second game state that is more advantageous than the first game state, as the game state after the privilege game ends. is set. When a game ball enters the second specific area and the privilege game is executed, the second specific area by the game state setting means is higher than when the game ball enters the second specific area and the privilege game is executed. The setting ratio of the game state increases.

As a result, there is an effect that it is possible to strongly expect that the game ball will enter the ball entering means during execution of the specific effect.

In the gaming machine AX4, as the type of the variable game executed by the variable game execution means, a game ball enters the second specific area during the execution period of the variable game, and the privilege game is executed. one of a plurality of at least a first variable game type in which the first game state is set by the game state setting means and a second variable game type in which the second game state is set when the game state setting means and a variable game type determination means for determining the type of the first variable game type is configured so that the proportion determined by the variable game type determination means is higher than that of the second variable game type. A game machine AX5 characterized by being a thing.

According to the gaming machine AX5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine AX4, the following effects are exhibited. That is, as the type of variable game executed by the variable game execution means, when a game ball enters the second specific area during the execution period of the variable game and the privilege game is executed, the game state setting means One type is determined by the variable game type determination means from among a plurality of at least including a first variable game type in which the first game state is set by and a second variable game type in which the second game state is set by be. The first variable game type is configured to have a higher percentage determined by the variable game type determining means than the second variable game type.

Thereby, there is an effect that it is possible to expect that the second variable game type is determined when the game ball enters the second specific area.

The gaming machine AX5 is provided with a second specific effect executing means for executing a second specific effect suggesting that the third allocation state is established during execution of the variable game of the second variable game type. Characteristic game machine AX6.

According to the gaming machine AX6, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine AX5, during execution of the variable game of the second variable game type, the second specific effect suggesting that the third allocation state is reached is the second specific effect. Since it is executed by the effect executing means, the player can be made to recognize that the second variable game type is set when the second specific effect is executed in the third distribution state. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can strongly expect to enter the game ball into the ball entering means during execution of the second specific effect.

In the gaming machine AX5 or AX6, the game state setting means determines the type of the variable game determined by the variable game type determining means when the game ball enters the specific area and the privilege game is executed. The game machine AX7 is characterized in that the second game state is set as the game state after the privilege game is finished regardless of whether or not the second game state is set.

According to the gaming machine AX7, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine AX5 or AX6, when the game ball enters the specific area and the privilege game is executed, the variable game type determined by the variable game type determination means Since the second game state is set by the game state setting means as the game state after the privilege game is completed regardless of whether or not the game ball enters the ball entry means during execution of the specific effect There is an effect that the game can be played with strong expectations.

In any one of the game machines AX4 to AX7, the game machine AX8 is characterized in that the second game state is a game state in which the determination result of the determination means is more likely to be a specific determination result than the first game state. .

According to the gaming machine AX8, in addition to the effects produced by any one of the gaming machines AX4 to AX7, in the second gaming state, the discrimination result of the discrimination means is more likely to be a specific discrimination result than in the first gaming state. On the other hand, there is an effect that the second game state can be strongly expected.

In the gaming machine AX8, a first ball-entering means capable of entering a game ball and a second ball-entering means different from the first ball-entering means are provided; a first determination means for performing determination based on the entry of a game ball, and a second determination means for performing determination based on the entry of a game ball into the second entry means; At least, the determination by the first determination means is configured to have a lower probability of obtaining the specific determination result than the determination by the second determination means, and the first game The gaming machine AX9 is characterized in that the state is configured such that it is more difficult for a game ball to enter the second ball-entering means than in the second game state.

According to the gaming machine AX9, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine AX8, the following effects are exhibited. That is, there are provided a first ball-entering means into which a game ball can enter, and a second ball-entering means different from the first ball-entering means. While discrimination is executed by the first discriminating means based on the game ball entering the first ball entering means, second discrimination is carried out based on the game ball entering the second ball entering means. Determination is performed by the means. The determination by the first determination means is configured to have a lower probability of obtaining a specific determination result than the determination by the second determination means. In the first game state, it becomes more difficult to enter the game ball into the second ball entering means than in the second game state.

As a result, there is an effect that it is possible to strongly anticipate that the variable game will be executed when the determination by the second determination means is performed.

In the gaming machine AX9, a second position that can be changed between a third position where a game ball can enter the second ball entering means and a fourth position where a game ball is more difficult to enter than the third position. A gaming machine AX10 comprising variable means, wherein said first game state is configured such that said second variable means is more difficult to change to said third position than said second game state. .

According to the gaming machine AX10, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine AX9, the following effects are exhibited. That is, a second variable means is provided which is variable between a third position where the game ball can enter the second ball entering means and a fourth position where the game ball is more difficult to enter than the third position. It is In the first game state, the second variable means is more difficult to change to the third position than in the second game state.

As a result, the superiority of the second game state can be further enhanced, so there is an effect that the second game state can be expected more strongly.

<Feature AY group> (small win open control that suppresses magnet goto without affecting normal games)
A ball entry means into which a game ball can enter, a first position in which the game ball can enter the ball entry means, and a second position in which the game ball is more difficult to enter than the first position. A variable means that can be varied, a specific area provided at a position where a game ball that has entered the ball entering means can enter, and the variable means is predetermined based on the establishment of a predetermined specific condition. variable game execution means for executing a variable game that is varied from the second position to the first position for a period; a privilege granting means for imparting a predetermined privilege beneficial to the player; a discharging means for discharging the game ball that has entered the ball-entering means to the outside of the ball-entering means; and execution of the variable game. Based on the elapse of a predetermined specific period from the start of the variable game, regardless of whether or not all the game balls entered into the ball entry means have been discharged by the discharge means. A gaming machine AY1 characterized by comprising variable game ending means capable of ending the game.

Here, a game machine such as a pachinko machine has a ball entry opening that allows a ball to be entered by opening (or moving) an electric accessory, and a game ball enters the ball entry opening. A game ball that enters the AV winning device that is opened during a specific game (small winning game, etc.) executed by There has been proposed a pachinko machine that can provide a privilege game (such as a winning game) that is advantageous to the player by playing, and has been aimed at improving the interest of the player in the game (for example, Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent Laid-Open 2011-010741).

In addition, some of such conventional game machines are provided with a distribution member that distributes a game ball entered inside the AV winning device to either a specific area or a non-specific area. , the player's interest in the game is enhanced by making the player pay attention to how the game is distributed by the distribution member.

However, in such a conventional game machine, if a game ball is forcibly guided to a specific area regardless of the state of the distribution member due to cheating using a magnet or the like, the cheater There was a problem that it was unfairly advantageous.

On the other hand, the game machine AY1 has the following effects. That is, the variable means is changed between the first position where the game ball can enter the ball entering means and the second position where the game ball is more difficult to enter than the first position. A specific area is provided at a position where a game ball that has entered the ball entering means can enter. A variable game in which the variable means is varied from the second position to the first position for a predetermined period based on the establishment of a predetermined specific condition is executed by the variable game executing means. Based on the fact that the game ball enters the specific area during the execution period of the variable game, a predetermined privilege that is advantageous to the player is granted by the privilege granting means. The game ball entering the ball entering means is discharged outside the ball entering means by the discharging means. Based on the elapse of a predetermined specific period from the start of execution of the variable game, regardless of whether or not all the game balls entered into the ball entry means are discharged by the discharge means, the variable game The variable game is ended by the ending means.

As a result, there is an effect that the variable game can be ended more favorably.

In the gaming machine AY1, a specific channel through which a game ball that has entered the ball entering means can pass; a first distribution state in which a game ball that has entered the specific channel is distributed to the specific area; a second distribution state for distributing to a second region different from the specific region; and a distribution means that can be varied between the first distribution state and the second distribution state based on the establishment of the specific condition. and a distribution control means for controlling the distribution means to switch in a predetermined specific switching pattern, and the specific period, the specific flow path during the second distribution state A game ball that has passed through and flowed down toward the specific area has a length that makes it difficult for the game ball to enter the specific area during the execution period of the variable game. Characteristic gaming machine AY2.

According to the gaming machine AY2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine AY1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, a first distribution state in which a game ball that has entered a specific channel through which a game ball that has entered the ball entry means can pass is distributed to a specific region, and a second distribution state that is different from the specific region. The second distribution state and the distribution means are configured to be variable. Based on the establishment of the specific condition, the distribution control means controls the distribution means so that the first distribution state and the second distribution state are switched according to a predetermined specific switching pattern. During the specific period, it is difficult for a game ball that has passed through the specific channel during the second distribution state and flowed down toward the specific area to enter the specific area during the execution period of the variable game. consists of periods of length

As a result, in the event of an unnatural movement in which the ball flows down into the specific area even though it has passed through the specific flow path during the second distribution state, the ball can be changed before entering the specific area. You can end the game. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the act of forcibly causing the game ball to flow down to the specific area due to fraud.

In the gaming machine AY2, during the execution period of the variable game, the game ball that has passed through the specific flow path during the first distribution state and flowed down toward the specific area is A game machine AY3 characterized by comprising a period of a length in which a ball can be easily entered into the specific area.

According to the gaming machine AY3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine AY2, during the specific period, during the first allocation state, the game ball that has passed through the specific flow path and flowed down toward the specific area is a variable game Since it is composed of a period of time during which the ball can easily enter the specific area during the execution period, if the ball enters the specific area with a natural action, the predetermined privilege will be given normally. be able to. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress cheating without affecting ordinary players.

In the gaming machine AY2 or AY3, the distribution means is variable to the first distribution state to close the bottom surface of the specific range in the specific flow path to allow game balls to pass through the specific range, and The gaming machine AY4 is characterized in that by changing to the second distribution state, the bottom surface of the specific range is opened and game balls that have reached the specific range are dropped toward the second area.

According to the game machine AY4, in addition to the effects of the game machine AY2 or AY3, the distribution means is variable to the first distribution state, so that the bottom surface of the specific range in the specific flow path is closed and the specific range is released. can pass through, while the distribution means is changed to the second distribution state, the bottom surface of the specific range is opened, and the game ball that has reached the specific range is dropped toward the second area. In the case where the game ball flows down to the specific area even though it passed through the specific flow path during the second distribution state, the game ball is forcibly guided to the specific area by floating the game ball against the specific flow path with a magnet or the like. can be limited to cases where serious misconduct has been committed. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress cheating without affecting players who are playing games legally.

The gaming machine AY4 includes shielding means for shielding the game area so as to make it difficult for the player to touch the game area, and the specific range is closer to the shielding means than other ranges in the specific flow path. A game machine AY5 characterized in that it is configured so that the

According to the gaming machine AY5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine AY4, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the game area is shielded by the shielding means so as to make it difficult for the player to touch the game area. The specific range is configured to be farther from the shielding means than other ranges in the specific channel.

As a result, even if an attempt is made to cheat by guiding the game ball with a magnet or the like, the influence of the magnetic force on the game ball can be weakened in the specific range, so that it is difficult to guide the game ball to the specific area. can be done. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress fraudulent acts.

Any one of the gaming machines AY1 to AY5 is provided with determination means for executing determination based on the establishment of a determination condition, and the variable game execution means is based on the determination result of the determination means being a specific determination result. A game machine AY6 characterized in that the variable game is executed by pressing the variable game.

According to the gaming machine AY6, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines AY1 to AY5, the following effects are exhibited. In other words, determination by the determination means is executed based on the establishment of the determination condition. A variable game is executed by the variable game execution means when the determination result of the determination means becomes a specific determination result.

As a result, there is an effect that a game can be played while paying attention to the discrimination result of the discriminating means.

In the gaming machine AY6, a first game state in which the discrimination result of the discriminating means is unlikely to be the specific discrimination result, and the first game state, as game states after the granting of the predetermined privilege by the privilege granting means is completed. and game state setting means for setting one game state out of a plurality of game states including at least a second game state in which the specific determination result is more likely to occur than the second game state.

According to the gaming machine AY7, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine AY6, the first game state in which the determination result of the determination means is unlikely to be a specific determination result as the game state after the grant of the predetermined privilege by the privilege granting means is completed. and a second game state in which a specific determination result is more likely to occur than the first game state. There is an effect that the game can be played with a stronger expectation that the game will be played.

In the gaming machine AY7, a specific channel through which a game ball that has entered the ball entering means can pass; a first distribution state in which a game ball that has entered the specific channel is distributed to the specific area; a second distribution state for distributing to a second region different from the specific region; and a distribution means that can be varied between the first distribution state and the second distribution state based on the establishment of the specific condition. and a distribution control means for controlling the distribution means to switch in a predetermined specific switching pattern, and the privilege provision means includes at least one of the specific region and the second region a privilege game advantageous to the player is executed as the predetermined privilege based on the fact that the game ball has entered the specific area, and the game state setting means, when the game ball has entered the specific area When the ball enters the second area, the ratio of setting the second game state as the game state after the execution of the privilege game is lower than that. A gaming machine AY8 characterized by:

According to the gaming machine AY8, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine AY7, the following effects are exhibited. That is, a first distribution state in which a game ball that has entered a specific channel through which a game ball that has entered the ball entry means can pass is distributed to a specific region, and a second distribution state in which the game ball is distributed to a second region that is different from the specific region. Two distribution states and a distribution means are configured to be variable. Based on the establishment of the specific condition, the distribution control means controls the distribution means so that the first distribution state and the second distribution state are switched according to a predetermined specific switching pattern. Based on the entry of the game ball into at least one of the specific area and the second area, a privilege game advantageous to the player is executed by the privilege giving means as a predetermined privilege. The second game state is set by the game state setting means as the game state after the execution of the privilege game is completed when the game ball enters the second area rather than when the game ball enters the specific area. lower percentage.

As a result, there is an effect that the game can be played with a strong expectation that the game ball will enter the specific area.

<Feature BA group> (Multiple types of V winning chances using small winning balls)
A ball entry means into which a game ball can enter, a first position in which a game ball can enter the ball entry means, and a second position in which a game ball is more difficult to enter than in the first position, a variable means that can be changed to the first position, a determination means that performs determination based on whether a determination condition is established, and a determination result of the determination means that is a specific determination result, the variable means is set to the first position Alternatively, a variable game execution means for executing a variable game that is variable to the second position in a predetermined variable pattern, a specific area into which a game ball that has entered the ball entering means can enter, and a specific area A gaming machine having privilege granting means for imparting a predetermined privilege advantageous to a player based on the entry of the game ball, wherein the game ball entered into the entering means is directed to the specific area. characterized by having a first flow path that allows a ball to enter and a second flow path that is different from the first flow path and allows a game ball to enter the specific area. Gaming machine BA1 to play.

Here, a game machine such as a pachinko machine has a ball entry opening that allows a ball to be entered by opening (or moving) an electric accessory, and a game ball enters the ball entry opening. A game ball that enters the inside of the V winning device that is opened during a specific game (small winning game, etc.) executed by There has been proposed a pachinko machine that can provide a privilege game (such as a winning game) that is advantageous to the player by playing, and has been aimed at improving the interest of the player in the game (for example, Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent Laid-Open 2011-010741).

In addition, some of such conventional gaming machines are provided with a sorting member that sorts a game ball entered inside the V winning device into either a specified area or a non-specified area. , the player's interest in the game is enhanced by making the player pay attention to how the game is distributed by the distribution member.

However, in such a conventional gaming machine, there is only one flow path that can win V prizes, and there is a problem that the player cannot enjoy whether or not the game ball entering the V winning device wins V prizes. there was a point

According to the gaming machine BA1, it is possible to enter the game ball that has entered the ball entering means and flowed down the first flow path or the second flow path into the specific area. Therefore, since game balls that have flowed down various flow paths can be made to enter the specific area, there is an effect that the amusement of the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine BA1, the specific area comprises at least a first specific area and a second specific area different from the first specific area, and the game ball flowing down the first flow path is , it becomes easier to enter the first specific area than the second specific area, and the game ball that has flowed down the second flow path can enter the second specific area more easily than the first specific area. A game machine BA2 characterized by being a thing.

According to the gaming machine BA2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine BA1, it is possible to allow the game ball to enter different specific areas according to the flow path through which the game ball that has entered the ball entering means flows down. Therefore, it is possible to make the game during the variable game more interesting, and it is possible to prevent the player from quickly becoming bored with the game.

In the game machine BA1 or BA2, a game ball that has flowed down through the second flow path is more likely to enter the specific region than a game ball that has flowed down through the first flow path. BA3.

According to the gaming machine BA3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine BA1 or BA2, it is possible to vary the ease with which a game ball enters a specific area according to the flow path through which the game ball flows. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can enthusiastically play the game while anticipating that the game ball will flow down the passage where the ball is likely to enter the specific area during the variable game.

In the gaming machine BA3, the number of game balls entering the ball entering means is greater than the first period until the game ball entering the ball entering means flows down the first flow path and reaches the specific area. The gaming machine BA4 is characterized in that the second period from flowing down the second flow path to reaching the specific area tends to be shorter.

According to the gaming machine BA4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine BA3, during the second period in which the game ball flows down the second flow path in which the game ball is likely to enter the specific area, the game ball flows down the first flow path. can be shorter than the first period of time. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to efficiently execute the variable game in which the game ball is easily entered into the specific area.

In the gaming machine BA4, as the type of the variable game executed by the variable game executing means, from among a plurality of types including at least a first variable game and a second variable game different from the first variable game It has a type determining means for determining the type of one variable game, and the first variable game is such that the ball entering means becomes the first position after the variable game is executed rather than the second variable game. A game machine BA5 characterized by a variable game with a long period until.

According to the gaming machine BA5, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine BA4, the period from when the variable game is executed until the ball entry means becomes the first position according to the type of the variable game determined by the type determination means can be different. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to make it difficult to predict the timing when the variable means becomes the first position according to the type of the variable game to be executed.

In the gaming machine BA5, the gaming machine BA6 is characterized in that when the second variable game is executed, game balls are made to easily flow down the second flow path.

According to the gaming machine BA6, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine BA5, when the second variable game is executed, it is possible to make it easier for the game ball to flow down the second flow path. There is an effect that the game in which the game ball is entered into the specific area can be efficiently performed.

<Characteristic BB group> (Variable V winning rate according to the length of the small winning game period)
A ball entry means into which a game ball can enter, a first position in which a game ball can enter the ball entry means, and a second position in which a game ball is more difficult to enter than in the first position, a variable means that can be changed to the first position, a determination means that performs determination based on whether a determination condition is established, and a determination result of the determination means that is a specific determination result, the variable means is set to the first position Alternatively, a variable game execution means for executing a variable game that is variable to the second position in a predetermined variable pattern, a specific area into which a game ball that has entered the ball entering means can enter, and a specific area A gaming machine having privilege granting means for imparting a predetermined privilege advantageous to a player based on the entry of a game ball, wherein the game ball entered into the entering means is directed toward the specific area. and a second flow path that makes it more difficult for the game ball to flow down toward the specific area than the first flow path. A game machine BB1 characterized in that the ease with which a game ball enters the specific area is variable according to the elapsed time after the start of the game machine BB1.

Here, a game machine such as a pachinko machine has a ball entry opening that allows a ball to be entered by opening (or moving) an electric accessory, and a game ball enters the ball entry opening. A game ball that enters the inside of the V winning device that is opened during a specific game (small winning game, etc.) executed by There has been proposed a pachinko machine that can provide a privilege game (such as a winning game) that is advantageous to the player by playing, and has been aimed at improving the interest of the player in the game (for example, Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent Laid-Open 2011-010741).

In addition, some of such conventional gaming machines are provided with a sorting member that sorts a game ball entered inside the V winning device into either a specified area or a non-specified area. , the player's interest in the game is enhanced by making the player pay attention to how the game is distributed by the distribution member.

However, in such a conventional gaming machine, the ease with which a ball enters the V winning device in a specific game does not change according to the flow period of the game ball entering the V winning device. There is a problem that the game performance is poor after the ball enters the V winning device, and the player cannot enjoy whether or not the game ball entering the V winning device wins the V prize.

According to the gaming machine BB1, the ease with which a game ball enters the specific area is varied according to the elapsed time after the start of the variable game. As a result, the player can play the game while being conscious of the elapsed period of the variable game, so that when the elapsed period of the variable game becomes long, the player feels that the game is slow. , there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the decline of the desire to play.

In the gaming machine BB1, a second variable means that can be varied between a third position and a fourth position different from the third position, and the second variable means is set to a specific variable pattern during execution of the variable game. and a variable control means for varying with, the state in which the second variable means is varied to the third position is more likely to affect the specific area than the state in which the second variable means is varied to the fourth position. A gaming machine BB2 characterized by being constructed so that a ball can easily enter.

According to the gaming machine BB2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine BB1, it is possible to make it easier for the game ball to enter the specific area by changing the second variable means to the third position. Therefore, since the player can be made to pay attention to the variable state of the second variable means, there is an effect that interest in the variable game can be improved.

The gaming machine BB3 is characterized in that, in the gaming machine BB2, the second variable means restricts the flow of the game ball to the second flow path in the state of being varied to the third position.

According to the gaming machine BB3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine BB2, by varying the second variable means to the third position, the game ball is restricted from flowing down the second flow path. Therefore, the game ball that has entered the ball entering means can easily flow down the first flow path, so that the game ball can be made easier to enter the specific area. Therefore, since the player can be made to pay attention to the variable state of the second variable means, there is an effect that interest in the variable game can be improved.

In the gaming machine BB2 or BB3, the specific variable pattern comprises a variable pattern that varies the second variable means to the third position based on the elapse of the first period from the start of the variable game. A game machine BB4 characterized in that the game machine BB4 is

According to the gaming machine BB4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine BB2 or BB3, a state is provided in which the game ball can easily enter the specific area by the lapse of the first period from the start of the variable game. can do. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can play the game while expecting the variable game to continue for a long time.

In any one of gaming machines BB2 to BB4, the specific variable pattern is such that the second variable means is held at the third position until a second period shorter than the first period elapses after the variable game is started. , and based on the passage of the second period, the second variable means is configured to vary from the third position to the fourth position. Machine BB5.

According to the gaming machine BB5, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines BB2 to BB4, the second variable means is positioned at the third position until the second period elapses after the variable game is started. It is possible to make it difficult for the ball to flow down the second flow path. Therefore, although the variable game is started, the game ball immediately flows down the second flow path, and it is not possible to enjoy whether the game ball flows down the first flow path or not, and the game motivation. There is an effect that it is possible to suppress the decrease in

<Characteristic BC group> (Multiple chances in one small winning game)
A ball entry means into which a game ball can enter, a first position in which a game ball can enter the ball entry means, and a second position in which a game ball is more difficult to enter than in the first position, a variable means capable of varying the position of the first position, a determining means for performing determination based on the establishment of a determining condition, and the variable means being set to the first position based on the determination result of the determining means becoming a specific determination result. Alternatively, a variable game execution means for executing a variable game that is variable to the second position in a predetermined variable pattern, a specific area into which a game ball that has entered the ball entering means can enter, and a specific area A gaming machine having privilege granting means for imparting a predetermined privilege advantageous to a player based on the entry of a game ball, wherein the game ball entered into the entering means is directed toward the specific area. and a second flow path different from the first flow path and capable of flowing down toward the specific region or a specific region different from the specific region. wherein, in one of the variable games executed by the variable game executing means, the game ball entered into the ball entering means passes through the first flow path and the second flow path. A game machine BC1 characterized in that it is constructed so as to be able to flow down either of a flow path and a flow path.

Here, a game machine such as a pachinko machine has a ball entry opening that allows a ball to be entered by opening (or moving) an electric accessory, and a game ball enters the ball entry opening. A game ball that enters the inside of the V winning device that is opened during a specific game (small winning game, etc.) executed by There has been proposed a pachinko machine that makes it possible to provide a privilege game (winning game, etc.) that is advantageous to the player by playing, and has been aimed at improving the interest of the player in the game (for example, Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent Laid-Open 2011-010741).

In addition, some of such conventional gaming machines are provided with a sorting member that sorts a game ball entered inside the V winning device into either a specified area or a non-specified area. , the player's interest in the game is enhanced by making the player pay attention to how the game is distributed by the distribution member.

However, in such a conventional gaming machine, there is only one possibility that a game ball that has entered the V winning device passes through the specific area in one specific game. There is a problem that the player's desire to play is lowered because the player cannot have a feeling.

According to the gaming machine BC1, during one variable game, a game in which a game ball is entered into a specific area by flowing down the first flow path, and a game ball is entered in a specific area by flowing down the second flow path. It is possible to execute a ball-throwing game. Therefore, it is possible to provide the player with a plurality of opportunities for the game ball to enter the specific area during one variable game, and it is possible to increase the player's willingness to play during the variable game.

In the gaming machine BC1, the game balls that have flowed down the first flow path can enter the specific area at a first rate, and the game balls that have flowed down the second flow path have a higher rate than the first rate. A game machine BC2 characterized in that it is possible to enter a ball into the specific area at a rate of 2.

According to the gaming machine BC2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine BC1, the percentage of balls entering the specific area for each of the opportunities for the game ball to enter the specific area provided during one variable game. can be made different, various games can be provided during the variable game, and there is an effect that the amusement of the game can be improved.

The game machine BC1 or BC2 has a distribution means for distributing a game ball that has entered the ball entry means to one of the plurality of flow paths, The gaming machine BC3 is characterized in that it is constructed so that a plurality of game balls entered into the entering ball means can be distributed to the first channel and the second channel respectively.

According to the game machine BC3, in addition to the effects of the game machine BC1 or BC2, a plurality of game balls entering the ball entry means during one variable game are divided into the first flow path and the second flow path by the distribution means. It becomes possible to distribute to each road. Therefore, there is an effect that the game can be played with motivation to enter a plurality of game balls into the ball entering means during one variable game.

In the gaming machine BC1 or BC2, a distribution means for distributing a game ball that has entered the ball entry means to any one of the plurality of flow paths, and the second A gaming machine BC4, characterized by comprising guiding means for guiding the game balls distributed to the flow path to the first flow path.

According to the gaming machine BC4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine BC1 or BC2, among the game balls that enter the ball entry means during one variable game, the game balls distributed to the second flow path are It becomes possible to guide to the first channel. As a result, one game ball entered during the variable game can flow down through the first flow path and the second flow path, so that the player can be made to watch the flow of the game ball during the variable game. . Therefore, there is an effect that the amusement of the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine BC3, variable game determining means for determining one type of variable game from among a plurality of types including at least a specific variable game as the type of variable game to be executed by the variable game executing means; A plurality of distribution states including at least a first distribution state in which game balls are distributed to the first flow path and a second distribution state in which the game balls are distributed to the second flow path by means of a predetermined specific switching control means for switching the state of the distribution means so as to switch in a switching pattern, and the variable game execution means causes a game ball to enter the ball entry means during execution of the specific variable game. Thus, while the sorting means is set to the first sorting state, the first period during which the ball is likely to reach the sorting means and the ball entering the ball entering means can The variable means is controlled to be variable to the first position at least during a second period during which the dividing means is set to the second distribution state and the distribution means is easily reached. A gaming machine BC5 characterized by:

According to the gaming machine BC5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine BC3, the state of the distribution means can be switched by the switching control means. A variable game that flows down and a variable game that flows down the first flow path and the second flow path can be set. Therefore, according to the type of variable game determined by the variable game determining means, it is possible to set variable games with different degrees of advantage to the player.

In the gaming machine BC5, a game ball entering the ball entering means during the first period is more likely to reach the specific area than a game ball entering the ball entering means during the second period. A gaming machine BC6 characterized in that it is configured so that the timing of reaching is likely to be earlier.

According to the gaming machine BC6, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine BC5, the game ball that entered the ball entering means during the first period is the game that entered the ball entering means during the second period. The timing of reaching the specific area can be made earlier than that of the sphere. As a result, in one variable game, the timing of reaching the specific area can be delayed for the game ball flowing down the flow path that easily enters the specific area, thereby improving the interest of the game. It has the effect of being able to

In the gaming machine BC5 or BC6, the specific areas include a first specific area provided at a position where game balls flowing down the first flow path can enter at a first rate, and the second flow path. and a second specific area provided at a position where the game ball that has flowed down can be entered at the second rate, and the privilege granting means is composed of A privilege with a higher degree of advantage to the player is given as the predetermined privilege when the game ball enters the first specified area than when the game ball enters the second specified area. A gaming machine BC7 characterized in that it is configured so that the ratio of playing is high.

According to the gaming machine BC7, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine BC5 or BC6, when the game ball enters the second specific area, the player is more likely than when the game ball enters the first specific area. It is possible to give advantageous benefits to Therefore, there is an effect that the player can watch which channel the game ball flows down.

<Feature group CA> (Set multiple time-saving states with different V winning probabilities when winning a small hit)
A ball entering means for allowing a game ball to enter, a first state for allowing a game ball to enter the ball entering means, and a second state for making it more difficult for a game ball to enter than the first state. A variable means that can be varied, a determination means that performs determination when a determination condition is satisfied, and a result of determination by the determination means is a specific determination result. Based on the variable control means for changing from the second state to the first state, the specific area where the game ball that entered the ball entering means can enter, and the variable control performed by the variable control means a switching means for switching between a permissive state in which a game ball that has entered the ball-entering means can enter the specific area, and a restricted state in which the game ball is less likely to enter the specific area than in the permissible state; A privilege game executing means for executing a privilege game advantageous to a player based on the entry of a game ball into a specific area, an advantageous game state in which discrimination by the discrimination means is easily executed, and a more advantageous game state than the advantageous game state. In a gaming machine having a game state setting means capable of setting at least a disadvantageous game state in which discrimination by the discrimination means is difficult to execute, the game state setting means sets a first advantageous game state as the advantageous game state. and a second advantageous gaming state different from the first advantageous gaming state. The gaming machine CA1 is characterized in that a game ball entering the ball entering means is more likely to enter the specific area when a game state is set.

Here, a game machine such as a pachinko machine has a ball entry opening that allows a ball to be entered by opening (or moving) an electric accessory, and a game ball enters the ball entry opening. A game ball that enters the inside of the V winning device that is opened during a specific game (small winning game, etc.) executed by There has been proposed a pachinko machine that can provide a privilege game (such as a winning game) that is advantageous to the player by playing, and has been aimed at improving the interest of the player in the game (for example, Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent Laid-Open 2011-010741).

Furthermore, by configuring it so that it is possible to set an advantageous game state in which the electric accessory is likely to be released, the player is provided with a game state in which it is easy for the ball to pass through the specific area in the V winning device and a game state in which it is difficult to do so. Something was possible. However, in such a conventional gaming machine, there is a problem that it is not possible to set one type of advantageous game state, and the player cannot be entertained.

According to the game machine CA1, the game state setting means can set an advantageous game state in which discrimination by the discriminating means is easily executed and a disadvantageous game state in which discrimination by the discriminating means is more difficult than in the advantageous game state. Further, as advantageous game states, a first advantageous game state and a second advantageous game state can be set. When the second advantageous gaming state is set, the game ball entering the ball-entering means is more likely to enter the specific area than when the first advantageous gaming state is set. Therefore, when an advantageous game state is set, it is possible to provide the player with the pleasure of predicting which advantageous game state will be set, and to improve the interest in the game.

In the gaming machine CA1, the variable control means controls the game in which the ball is entered in the ball-entering means when the second advantageous gaming state is set rather than when the first advantageous gaming state is set. The game machine CA2 is characterized in that the variable means is variably controlled so that the ball can easily enter the specific area.

According to the gaming machine CA2, when the second advantageous gaming state is set by the variable control of the variable means by the variable control means, the ball entering means is more affected than when the first advantageous gaming state is set. It is possible to make it easier for the entering game ball to enter the specific area. Therefore, there is an effect that the execution probability of the privilege game can be easily variably set according to the type of advantageous gaming state.

In the gaming machine CA2, the variable control means changes the variable means to the first state depending on whether the first advantageous gaming state is set or the second advantageous gaming state is set. The gaming machine CA3 is characterized in that the variable timing is made different.

According to the gaming machine CA3, by varying the timing at which the game ball enters the ball entering means according to the type of the set advantageous gaming state, the game ball entering the ball entering means is directed to the specific area. The ease of entering the ball can be varied. Therefore, there is an effect that the execution probability of the privilege game can be easily variably set according to the type of advantageous gaming state.

In the game machine CA1 or CA3, when the switching means is in the allowable state, a game ball entering the ball-entering means can flow down; a second flow path different from the first flow path through which the game ball that has entered the ball-entering means can flow down, and the game ball that flows down the first flow path is the second flow A gaming machine CA4 characterized in that it is harder for a ball to enter the specific area than a game ball flowing down a path.

According to the game machine CA4, the flow path through which the game ball entering the ball entering means flows down can be switched between the first flow path and the second flow path according to the state of the switching means. A game ball flowing down the first flow path is more difficult to enter the specific area than a game ball flowing down the second flow path. In this way, by switching the flow path through which the game ball that has entered the ball-entering means flows down, the easiness of the ball entering the specific area is varied, so that the execution probability of the privilege game can be easily variably set. It has the effect of being able to

In the gaming machine CA4, the specific areas include a first specific area into which a game ball that has flowed down the first flow path can enter, and a second specific area into which a game ball that has flowed down the second flow path can enter. and a game machine CA5.

According to the gaming machine CA5, since each channel can be provided with a specific area, there is an effect that the degree of freedom in designing the inside of the ball entering means can be increased.

In any one of the game machines CA2 to CA5, at least one of the first flow path and the second flow path is configured so that a game ball flowing down the flow path can be visually recognized by the player. A gaming machine CA6 characterized in that it is

According to the gaming machine CA6, the game ball flowing down at least one of the first flow path and the second flow path can be visually recognized by the player. , it is possible for the player to visually recognize which channel the liquid has flowed down. Therefore, it is possible to make it easy for the player to predict whether or not the game ball that has entered the ball entering means will enter the specific area, and there is an effect that the interest in the game can be improved.

In any one of game machines CA1 to CA6, as the determination means, a first determination means for executing a first determination based on establishment of a first determination condition, and establishment of a second determination condition different from the first determination condition. and a second determination means for executing a second determination different from the first determination based on, and the game state setting means determines that the first determination by the first determination means is performed as the advantageous game state A first advantageous gaming state in which the second determination is more likely to be performed than the second determination by the second determination means, and a second determination in which the second determination by the second determination means is more likely to be performed than the first determination by the first determination means. A game machine CA7 characterized by being able to set an advantageous game state.

In any one of the game machines CA1 to CA7, the privilege game executing means executes the privilege game based on the fact that the discrimination result by the discrimination means is a special discrimination result different from the specific discrimination result. A gaming machine CA8 characterized by:

<Feature group CB> (Different conditions for determining winning ball error in winning game)
Determination means capable of performing a predetermined determination, privilege game execution means for executing a privilege game based on the fact that the determination result of the determination means is a specific determination result, and the privilege executed by the privilege game execution means Type setting means for setting one privilege game type from a plurality of privilege game types as a game type, and a first state in which a game ball can be entered as the privilege game executed by the privilege game execution means. and a second state in which a game ball is more difficult to enter than in the first state, and a variable ball entering means that is variable between the first state and a game ball remaining inside the variable ball entering means. determination means for determining a predetermined state when a predetermined condition is established in a state in which the and condition setting means capable of setting different predetermined conditions based on the type of privilege game to be set.

Here, a game machine such as a pachinko machine has a ball entry opening that allows a ball to be entered by opening (or moving) an electric accessory, and a game ball enters the ball entry opening. A game ball that enters the inside of the V winning device that is opened during a specific game (small winning game, etc.) executed by There has been proposed a pachinko machine that can provide a privilege game (such as a winning game) that is advantageous to the player by playing, and has been aimed at improving the interest of the player in the game (for example, Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent Laid-Open 2011-010741).

In addition, some of such conventional gaming machines are provided with a sorting member that sorts a game ball entered inside the V winning device into either a specified area or a non-specified area. , the player's interest in the game is enhanced by making the player pay attention to how the game is distributed by the distribution member.

However, there is a problem that it is difficult to determine whether the timing at which the ball remains in the V winning device is normal or abnormal, and even if an illegal game is being played, it is difficult to notice.

According to the gaming machine CB1, different determination conditions can be set by the determination condition setting means according to the privilege game to be executed, so it is possible to appropriately determine the predetermined state according to the privilege game. . Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the illegal game in which the game ball is intentionally left inside the ball-entering means, and to allow an appropriate game to be played.

The gaming machine CB2 in the gaming machine CB1 is characterized in that the condition setting means can set different determination timings as the predetermined condition based on the privilege game type.

According to the gaming machine CB2, it is possible to vary the determination timing of the predetermined state based on the privilege game type. Therefore, the period until it is determined that the predetermined state has occurred can be appropriately set according to the type of the privilege game to be executed, so there is an effect that the generation of the predetermined state can be determined without delay.

The gaming machine CB2 has a discharge unit for discharging a game ball that has entered the variable ball entry means to the outside of the variable ball entry means, and the privilege game execution means is the type of the privilege game. When a predetermined first type is set as, a game ball entering the variable ball entering means executes a first privilege game in which the game ball can be discharged from the discharge unit in the first period, and the first type A second privilege game in which a game ball entering the variable ball entering means can be discharged from the discharge unit in a second period longer than the first period when a second type different from is set The condition setting means delays the determination timing when the second bonus game is executed as compared to when the first bonus game is executed. A gaming machine CB3 characterized by:

According to the gaming machine CB3, when a privilege game is executed in which the length of the period until the ball entered by the variable ball entry means is discharged from the discharge unit is different, the determination timing is determined according to the length. Since it is set by the condition setting means, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the situation where the game ball normally flows down through the variable ball entry means during the privilege game and the predetermined state is determined.

In any one of the gaming machines CB1 to CB3, a specific area through which the game ball entering the variable ball entering means can pass before being discharged from the discharge part, and a game ball passing through the specific area. A game machine CB4, characterized in that it has a condition switching means for switching the predetermined condition in a case where the game machine CB4.

According to the gaming machine CB4, when the game ball passes through the specific area, the predetermined condition can be switched, so that the game ball that has entered the variable ball entry means can flow through one of a plurality of flow paths with different flowing periods. Even in the case of using a structure that flows down, there is an effect that the determination of the predetermined state can be executed at an appropriate timing according to the flow down situation of the game ball.

In any one of the gaming machines CB1 to CB4, the privilege game execution means terminates the privilege game when the determination means does not determine that the predetermined state exists. CB5.

In the gaming machine CB5, when a switching condition is established between a first flow path through which a game ball that has entered the variable ball entry means can flow down, and a second flow path that is different from the first flow path, the variable switching means for changing from an initial state in which a game ball entering the ball-entering means flows down the first flow path to a switching state in which the game ball flows down the second flow path; , a game machine CB6, wherein the determination condition is established when the switching means is in the initial state.

<Feature group CC> (measures against blackouts during small hits)
A main control means for executing a predetermined game control, a ball entry means into which a game ball can enter, a first position in which a game ball can enter the ball entry means, and a game ball higher than the first position. a second position where it is difficult to enter a ball; a variable means that can be changed to a specified position; In a gaming machine having an area and detection means capable of detecting that a game ball has entered the specific area, the main control means comprises: determination means for performing determination based on whether a determination condition is satisfied; variable control means for changing the variable means from the second state to the first state for a predetermined period based on the determination result of the determination means being a specific determination result; Drive control means for driving a driving member for changing the flow-down region in which the game ball flows down; and privilege granting for imparting a predetermined privilege advantageous to the player based on detection of the game ball by the detection means. means, and specific control means capable of executing specific control based on the flowing state of the game ball that has entered the ball entering means in a specific state in which the game ball is difficult to be detected by the detection means. A gaming machine CC1 characterized by:

Here, a game machine such as a pachinko machine has a ball entry opening that allows a ball to be entered by opening (or moving) an electric accessory, and a game ball enters the ball entry opening. A game ball that enters the inside of the V winning device that is opened during a specific game (small winning game, etc.) executed by There has been proposed a pachinko machine that can provide a privilege game (such as a winning game) that is advantageous to the player by playing, and has been aimed at improving the interest of the player in the game (for example, Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent Laid-Open 2011-010741).

In addition, some of such conventional gaming machines are provided with a sorting member that sorts a game ball entered inside the V winning device into either a specified area or a non-specified area. , the player's interest in the game is enhanced by making the player pay attention to how the game is distributed by the distribution member.

However, if the game cannot be played normally due to a power failure or the like during a specific game, for example, the ball passes through a specific area at the timing when the winning switch cannot detect the ball. occurs, and there is a risk that the player will experience a problem.

According to the gaming machine CC1, the specific control means executes the specific control based on the flowing state of the game ball that entered the ball entering means in a state where the game ball is difficult to be detected by the detection means. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent a situation in which a privilege is not granted even if a game ball enters the specific area, and the player is distrustful.

The game machine CC1 has a power failure state determination means for determining a power failure state when the voltage supplied to the game machine is equal to or less than a predetermined voltage value, and the specific control means is the power failure state determination means. A game characterized in that the control for stopping the driving member driven by the drive control means is executed before the specific state is reached, based on the determination that the power is cut off by Machine CC2.

According to the gaming machine CC2, when the power failure state is determined, the driving of the driving member can be stopped before the specific state is reached. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the game ball from entering the specific area in the specific state.

In the gaming machine CC1 or CC2, the specific control means causes the drive control means to start driving the drive member after the game ball can be detected by the detection means when the power is restored from the power failure state. A gaming machine CC3 characterized in that it executes a process for causing the player to play.

In the game machine CC2 or CC3, the specific control means performs the specific control when the power failure state determination means determines that the power failure state occurs while the variable control means is executing the variable control. A gaming machine CC4 characterized by being executable.

The game machine CC4 has situation determination means for determining whether or not a game ball that has entered the ball entry means can reach the drive member, The specific control can be executed in a situation where a game ball entering the ball means can reach the driving member and the power failure state determination means determines the power failure state. A gaming machine CC5 characterized by:

Any one of the game machines CC2 to CC5 has backup voltage supply means capable of supplying a backup voltage to the game machine even during the power failure state, and the main control means controls the detection means during the power failure state. A storage means capable of storing detection results is provided, and the specific control means executes specific control based on the detection results of the detection means stored in the storage means when returning from the power failure state. A gaming machine CC6 characterized by:

In any one of the game machines CC1 to CC6, a first flow path through which a game ball entering the ball-entering means can flow down, and a ball provided in the first flow path to hold the ball flowing down the first flow path. and a second state in which the ball flowing down the first flow path is not held, wherein the specific region is the ball flowing down the first flow path. When the power supply from the external power supply is stopped, the regulation means changes the holding means to the first state, and the power supply from the external power supply is started. The gaming machine CC7 is characterized in that the holding means is changed to the second state based on the state of the gaming machine CC7.

<Characteristic CD group> (The mode of right-handed notification during a winning game is changed according to the open pattern)
It is possible to change the area of the game area where the game ball can flow down by varying the ejection intensity of the shooting means based on the player's operation and the shooting means capable of shooting the game ball into the game area. a shooting intensity adjustment means, a ball entry means provided in a predetermined area of the game area and capable of allowing a game ball to enter, a first state in which a game ball can enter the ball entry means, and A variable means that can be changed to a second state in which a game ball is more difficult to enter than the first state, and a predetermined variable means that changes the variable means to the first state or the second state based on the establishment of a specific condition. variable game execution means for executing a variable game that is varied in a variable pattern; and type setting for setting one variable game type out of a plurality of variable game types as the type of the variable game executed by the variable game execution means. and guidance notification means capable of executing guidance notification for guiding a game ball to be shot toward the predetermined area when the variable game is executed by the variable game execution means. In the machine, the variable game execution means varies the variable means in a variable pattern corresponding to the variable game type set by the type setting means, and the guidance and notification means is controlled by the variable game execution means. A gaming machine CD1 characterized in that the guidance notification is executed in a notification mode based on the variable pattern to be executed.

Here, a game machine such as a pachinko machine has a ball entry opening that allows a ball to be entered by opening (or moving) an electric accessory, and a game ball enters the ball entry opening. A game ball that enters the inside of the V winning device that is opened during a specific game (small winning game, etc.) executed by There has been proposed a pachinko machine that can provide a privilege game (such as a winning game) that is advantageous to the player by playing, and has been aimed at improving the interest of the player in the game (for example, Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent Laid-Open 2011-010741).

In addition, some of such conventional gaming machines are provided with a sorting member that sorts a game ball entered inside the V winning device into either a specified area or a non-specified area. , the player's interest in the game is enhanced by making the player pay attention to how the game is distributed by the distribution member. Also, when a specific game is executed, there is a guidance notification for guiding the ball to be shot toward the area where the V winning device is provided.

However, since the guidance notification is executed based on the execution of a specific game, if the game ball is shot according to the guidance notification, it will reach the V winning device in the closed state, causing discomfort to the player. There was a problem of giving

According to the gaming machine CD1, the player is notified that the variable game is to be executed by the guidance notification means. Furthermore, it is possible for the player to predict the variable pattern of the variable game according to the notification mode of the guidance notification means. Therefore, it is possible to shoot a game ball while allowing the player to predict the timing at which the game ball can enter the ball-entering means during the variable game, thereby improving the interest of the game. .

The game machine CD1 has a period setting means capable of setting a specific period including at least a period in which the variable means is in the first state, and the guide notification means includes a specific notification mode capable of notifying the specific period. A gaming machine CD2 characterized in that it executes the guidance notification.

According to the game machine CD2, by grasping the notification mode of the guidance notification, the game ball is shot while allowing the player to predict the timing at which the game ball can enter the ball entry means during the variable game. There is an effect that it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

A game characterized in that the game machine CD2 has a determination means capable of determining the remaining period of the specific period, and the guide notification means notifies the remaining period of the specific period as the specific notification mode. Machine CD3.

According to the gaming machine CD3, since the remaining period of the specific period can be grasped, the game ball is shot while the player predicts the period during which the game ball can enter the ball entering means during the variable game. There is an effect that it is possible to increase the interest of the game.

In the gaming machine CD2 or CD3, the variable game executing means is capable of executing a variable game in which the variable means is changed to the first state a plurality of times, and the period setting means is such that the variable means A first specific period and a second specific period different from the first specific period can be set when the state is changed to the first state a plurality of times. A gaming machine CD4 characterized in that it executes the guidance notification including a first specific notification mode in which a specific period can be notified and a second specific notification mode in which the second specific period can be notified.

According to the gaming machine CD4, when a variable game is executed in which the variable means is varied to the first state a plurality of times, different specific periods are set according to each first state, and corresponding to each specific period. Since the guidance notification can be executed using the notification mode, the game ball can be shot while the player predicts the period during which the game ball can enter the ball entry means during the variable game, There is an effect that the amusement of the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine CD4, the period setting means has a variable interval shorter than a predetermined interval when a variable game is executed in which the variable means is varied to the first state a plurality of times. A gaming machine CD5 characterized in that the first state that is variable before and after the case is set as one specific period.

According to the game machine CD5, when the variable means is changed to the first state at short intervals, it is set as a specific period of 1, so that it is possible to carry out an easy-to-understand guide notification for the player. There is

<Feature CE group> (Set a right-handed notification period for a certain period regardless of the length of the OP period of the winning game)
It is possible to change the area of the game area where the game ball can flow down by varying the ejection intensity of the shooting means based on the player's operation and the shooting means capable of shooting the game ball into the game area. a shooting intensity adjustment means, a ball entry means provided in a predetermined area of the game area and capable of allowing a game ball to enter, a first state in which a game ball can enter the ball entry means, and Variable means capable of changing to a second state in which a game ball is more difficult to enter than in the first state, determination means capable of executing a predetermined determination, and predetermined identification information for indicating the determination result of the determination means. dynamic display means for dynamically displaying for a period of time; and based on the static display of specific identification information by the dynamic display means, the variable means is changed to the first state or the second state in a predetermined variable pattern. a variable game executing means for executing a variable game that is variable by the variable game executing means; In a gaming machine having an executable guide notification means, the variable game execution means has a plurality of different waiting periods from the execution of the variable game until the variable means is changed to the first state. The variable game can be executed according to the variable pattern, and the guidance and notification means, regardless of the length of the waiting period of the variable game executed by the variable game execution means, for a certain period of time A gaming machine CE1 characterized in that it is capable of executing specific guidance notification.

Here, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, there has been proposed a pachinko machine capable of executing a plurality of types of specific games and enhancing the interest of the game for the player (for example, Patent Document 1: Patent Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2011-010741).

In addition, there is a gaming machine in which a plurality of types of specific games are executed, which provides a game that is easy for the player to understand by executing guidance notification for informing the player that the specific game is to be executed. rice field.

However, there is a problem that the type of the specific game to be executed next is determined by the player depending on the timing at which the guidance notification is executed, and the interest in the game is reduced.

According to the gaming machine CE1, regardless of the waiting period of the variable game, it is possible to execute the specific guidance notification for a certain period of time. is not discriminated by the player. Therefore, there is an effect that the amusement of the game can be improved.

In the game machine CE1, the guidance notification means completes execution of the specific guidance notification before the standby period elapses.

According to the game machine CE2, since the specific guidance notification is completed before the waiting period elapses, there is an effect that the guidance notification can be effectively executed.

In the game machine CE1 or CE2, when the identification information is statically displayed by the dynamic display means, a fixed display means for fixedly displaying the identification information for a predetermined period, and a fixed period for fixed display by the fixed display means , fixed period setting means capable of setting a different fixed period, the variable game execution means executes the variable game after the fixed period has passed, and the guidance notification means includes the specific The game machine CE3 is characterized in that the guidance information is executed over the fixed period and the waiting period.

In any one of the gaming machines CE1 to CE3, the specific guidance notification includes suggestive information capable of suggesting the timing at which the variable means becomes the first state in the variable game executed by the variable game execution means. A gaming machine CE4 characterized by:

A game characterized in that, in any one of the gaming machines CE1 to CE4, the fixed period during which the specific guidance notification is executed is longer than the waiting period of the variable game executed by the variable game executing means. Machine CE5.

<Characteristic DA group> (Resin constituent members that replace nails)
A game machine comprising a game board main body, a fixed member whose arrangement is fixed with respect to the game board main body, and a connecting member connecting the game board main body and the fixed member, wherein the connecting member A gaming machine DA1 characterized in that it is configured to be able to guide a ball.

2. Description of the Related Art Among game machines such as pachinko machines, there is a game machine in which a nail driven into a game board randomly configures a flow-down path of a game ball (see, for example, Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2007-325743). However, in the above-mentioned conventional game machine, since the flow-down path of the game ball is composed only of nails, it is necessary to drive nails into almost the entire area of the game board. Therefore, it is necessary to make the game board thick, so there is a problem that the degree of freedom in designing the shape of the game board becomes low, especially in the design in the direction of thickness.

On the other hand, according to the game machine DA1, the connection member that connects the game board main body and the member to be fixed can guide the game ball. No need to drive nails into Therefore, in the range where the connecting member is arranged, the degree of freedom in designing the shape of the game board main body, particularly in the thickness direction, can be improved.

For example, it is possible to reduce the material cost by reducing the volume of the parts required for the entire game board by forming thin parts where the thickness can be designed arbitrarily. A decorative board, etc.) can be arranged to enable execution of various lighting effects.

In addition, the arrangement of the connecting member is not limited at all, and various aspects are exemplified. For example, the connecting member may be arranged above the center frame of the game board so as to constitute the part where the game ball introduced into the game area collides first, or the connecting member may be arranged above the center frame of the game board as a member holding the through gate inside. It may be arranged on the left and right sides of the frame, or it may be arranged on the lower side of the center frame as a member for guiding game balls to the winning opening.

Moreover, the connecting member may be configured in a left-right symmetrical shape, or may be configured in a left-right asymmetrical shape. Basically, if the game area has a bilaterally symmetrical shape, it is preferable that the connecting member also has a bilaterally symmetrical shape. It is preferable that the connecting member is also configured in a left-right asymmetrical shape.

In the game machine DA1, the connecting member has a guide part configured to guide a game ball, and the guide part is configured to protrude toward the game area.

According to the game machine DA2, in addition to the effects of the game machine DA1, the guiding portion can produce the same effects as the nails formed overhanging on the game area side. When formed from a flexible resin material, it can be made easier to transmit light than a nail. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the visibility of the light emitted from behind the guide section from being lowered toward the player even in the range where the guide section is arranged.

As for the shape of the guide part, it is possible to imitate the shape of a nail. However, if the thin shape of the nail is formed from a resin material, the strength is lower than that of a nail made of a metal material. It may be formed in a shape such that the range in which it is arranged is surrounded by a single guide portion. As a result, the lack of strength can be resolved even when the member is formed from a resin material.

A game machine DA3 in the game machine DA2, wherein the guide part has a concave part on the opposite side of the game area.

According to the game machine DA3, in addition to the effects of the game machine DA2, the weight of the connection member can be reduced. Furthermore, since the thickness of the guide portion is reduced, the guide portion can be easily bent. Since the generated load can be relieved, it is possible to easily avoid damage to the guide portion due to the load at the time of impact.

In the game machine DA2 or DA3, the guide portion includes a first guide portion arranged close to the game board main body and a second guide portion arranged close to the fixed member, and the first guide portion is formed narrower than the second guide portion.

According to the game machine DA4, in addition to the effects of the game machine DA2 or DA3, since the first guide portion is narrow, the guide portion itself is easily bent, and the load can be relieved even if the game board main body is not bent. On the other hand, the second guide part can relieve the load by bending the fixed member formed as a thin plate, even if the guide part itself does not bend.

It should be noted that the narrow width aspect may be set to have a small maximum width, or may be specified by having a narrow portion such as a triangular shape.

In any one of the game machines DA2 to DA4, the guiding part is characterized in that a part where the angle at which the sides forming the frame shape in the extension direction intersect is maximized is arranged below the upper end position. A game machine DA5.

According to the game machine DA5, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines DA2 to DA4, it is possible to easily withstand the collision of the game ball by allowing bending deformation around the portion where the angle is maximum. can.

A game machine DA6 in any one of the game machines DA1 to DA5, wherein the member to be fixed is formed in an annular shape and is fixed inside the game board main body.

According to the game machine DA6, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines DA1 to DA5, the shape of the member to be fixed can be easily held by the rigidity of the game board main body.

A gaming machine DA7 characterized in that, in any one of the gaming machines DA1 to DA6, the connecting member and the game board main body or the member to be fixed overlap each other, and the overlapped object changes depending on the location.

According to the game machine DA7, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines DA1 to DA6, by omitting the formation of the game board main body and covering it with the fixed member, it is possible to form the game board main body without omitting it. In comparison, the material cost required for the game board main body can be reduced.

In addition, in the range where the member to be fixed and the connecting member overlap, it is possible to make it easier for the light emitted from the back to pass through, and by forming the member to be fixed thin, it is possible to secure a space on the back side. , the degree of freedom in arranging the production device can be improved.

In the gaming machine DA7, a gaming machine DA8 in which a light emitting means is arranged behind a portion where the fixed member and the connecting member overlap.

According to the game machine DA8, in addition to the effects of the game machine DA7, compared to the case where the light emitting means is arranged behind the game board main body, by forming the member to be fixed thin, the space for arranging the light emitting means is reduced. can be easily ensured.

In any one of the game machines DA1 to DA8, a thin decorative member disposed between the fixed member and the connecting member is provided, and the thin decorative member is a first positioning member formed on the fixed member. and a second positioning portion formed on the connecting member.

According to the game machine DA9, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines DA1 to DA8, it is possible to align the thin decorative members without being restricted by the shapes of the fixed members and the connecting members.

A gaming machine DA10 characterized in that, in the gaming machine DA9, the first positioning portion and the second positioning portion are engaged.

According to the gaming machine DA10, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine DA9, the position of the fixed member and the connecting member can be aligned by the first positioning portion and the second positioning portion.

<Characteristics DB group> (No nail distribution)
A passage area through which a game ball can pass; a guide means configured to be able to guide the game ball to the passage area; The ratio of guiding the game ball to the passing area can be changed, the flowing area includes a first ball entrance and a second ball entrance configured to allow the game ball to enter, and the first entrance A gaming machine DB1 characterized in that it is configured to be able to maintain the ratio of game balls entering a ball opening and the ratio of game balls entering the second ball opening.

2. Description of the Related Art Among gaming machines such as pachinko machines, there is a gaming machine that allocates game balls to winning slots by means of nails driven into a game board (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2007-325743). However, in the above-described conventional game machine, the nail used for allocating the downflow path of the game ball may change its state with respect to the base plate due to collision with the game ball, and the change in state may cause the nail to enter the winning slot. Since a state where it is easy to hit the ball and a state where it is difficult to enter the ball can be formed, there is a problem that there is room for improvement from the viewpoint of fairness of the game.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine DB 1, in a situation where the guide means can change the rate at which the game ball is guided to the passing area, the flow-down area has a rate of game balls entering the first ball entrance and the above-mentioned second ball entrance. Since the ratio of the game balls entering the second ball entrance can be maintained, the game balls can enter the first ball entrance or the second ball entrance more easily or more difficultly. This can be avoided, and improvements can be made from the viewpoint of game fairness.

A game machine DB2 characterized in that, in the game machine DB1, the flowing-down area is formed of a resin material.

According to the game machine DB2, in addition to the effects of the game machine DB1, the flow-down region is formed of a resin material, so that when a part of the resin member forming the flow-down region is damaged, the resin member itself can be replaced. can be easily restored. Therefore, compared with the case where game balls are sorted with nails, improvements can be made in terms of maintainability and the operating period of the game machine.

In the case of a nail, even if it is bent, it is difficult to visually distinguish it. When is formed, it is possible to make it difficult to configure a state different from the state at the time of shipment by making a shape that is difficult to bend or by designing it to be easily damaged when bending occurs. Thereby, it is possible to easily maintain the distribution state (balance) of the game balls as it is at the time of shipment.

In the gaming machine DB1 or DB2, the first ball entrance is disposed on the upstream side of the second ball entrance, and the profit obtained by the player when the game ball enters the second ball entrance is , a game machine DB3 characterized in that the profit obtained by a player when a game ball enters the first ball entrance is larger than the profit obtained by the player.

According to the gaming machine DB3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine DB1 or DB2, it is possible to draw attention to whether the game ball flows down to the second ball entrance side.

It should be noted that the mode of profit that the player can obtain is not limited at all. For example, the presence or absence of prize balls, the number of prize balls, the presence or absence of lottery of symbols, the profit that the probability of lottery changes depending on the passage of game balls, or a combination of these may be used.

Any one of the game machines DB1 to DB3 is provided with upstream means arranged on the upstream side of the passing area and capable of guiding game balls in a third direction different from the passing area, the upstream means The game balls distributed in the third direction are configured to prevent the game balls from flowing down to the second ball entrance, and the game balls pass through the profit passing means through which the player can obtain a profit when entering the ball. A game machine DB 4 characterized by being constructed so as to be able to flow down along a route.

According to the game machine DB4, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines DB1 to DB3, the game ball that did not go to the passing area side does not interfere with the flow of the ball toward the second ball entrance, and furthermore, , there is a possibility that it will pass through the profit passing means, so it is possible to improve the attention to the game ball that deviates from the passing area side.

In the gaming machine DB 4, the game ball guided in the third direction by the upstream means has a higher possibility of entering the profit passage means when the point at which guidance is started is on the upstream side. A gaming machine DB5 characterized by being configured as follows.

According to the gaming machine DB5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine DB4, attention of upstream means can be improved not only on the downstream side arranged on the profit passing means side but also on the upstream side. In other words, it is possible to configure the game area so that even if the player is dissatisfied with the normal game, the player is comfortable with the big win game.

A gaming machine DB6 characterized in that a first member forming a general winning hole side and a second member forming a profit passing means side are positioned by engagement of resin structural members in the gaming machine DB5.

According to the gaming machine DB6, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine DB5, compared to the case where the first member and the second member are fixed with a metal fastening screw, fastening screws can be omitted. It is possible to improve the visibility at the overlapping position between the member and the second member.

A game machine DB7 characterized in that a positioning method in the game machine DB6 is sandwiching with a game board.

According to the game machine DB7, in addition to the effects of the game machine DB6, it is possible to easily define the positional relationship between the first member and the second member in the portion arranged to face the game area. As a result, it is possible to avoid irregular disturbance of the flow of the game balls flowing down while contacting the first member and the second member. That is, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the first member and the second member are reversed in the front-rear position, which tends to occur when the member is fixed to the game board body with the fastening screw.

In any of the game machines DB5 to DB7, the game machine DB8 is characterized by comprising a deceleration protrusion that secures momentum of the game machine until it comes directly above the profit passing means and decelerates after coming directly above. .

According to the game machine DB8, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines DB5 to DB7, it is possible to avoid damage to the profit passage means caused by a game ball colliding with the profit passage means at high speed.

In the gaming machine DB8, the gaming machine DB9 is characterized in that the gaming machine DB8 is collectively collected from a wide range on the left and right, and the profit passing means ahead thereof is configured to be wide on the left and right.

According to the gaming machine DB 9, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine DB 8, even when the game balls reach the profit passage means in succession, the game balls that have reached first are allowed to flow left and right, making it easier to accept the following game balls. can do. As a result, it is possible to easily avoid defective ball entry when the game balls reach the profit passing means continuously.

1. A gaming machine DB10 characterized in that, in the gaming machine DB8 or DB9, auxiliary means for assisting the flow of game balls in a predetermined manner is arranged behind the flow-down path of the game balls to the profit passage means.

According to the gaming machine DB 10, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine DB 8 or DB 9, the auxiliary means can assist the flow of the game balls to the profit passage means in a predetermined manner, so that the problems associated with the flow of the game balls can be eliminated. It can be improved in certain ways.

A game machine DB 11 in the game machine DB 10, wherein the auxiliary means is a game ball that enters a predetermined winning hole and flows down, and a flow path for the game ball.

According to the game machine DB 11, in addition to the effects of the game machine DB 10, it is possible to make the game balls that enter a predetermined winning hole and flow down look as if they are flowing down toward the profit passage means. As a result, the number of game balls that enter a predetermined winning hole during execution of a jackpot game can be added as the number of game balls that seem to enter the profit passage means, so that most of the game balls that are shot are profitable. It is possible to create the illusion that the ball is entering the passing means.

In the gaming machine DB 10, the auxiliary means is decoration means for decorating the flow-down path to the profit passage means from behind.

According to the gaming machine DB 12, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine DB 10, when the player's attention is focused on the flow-down path to the profit passage means, the game is played by the decoration means compared to when the decoration is not applied. It is possible to improve the interest of people.

In any one of gaming machines DB1 to DB12, maintenance of the ratio of game balls entering the first ball entrance and the ratio of game balls entering the second ball entrance in the flow-down area is defined as a different ratio. A gaming machine DB 13 characterized in that it can be executed in a plurality of states.

According to the gaming machine DB13, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines DB1 to DB12, the state maintained in the flow-down region can be changed in a plurality of states. For example, it is possible to dispose a means for appearing and disappearing in the flow-down region at regular intervals, or to change the inclination angle of the inclined plate arranged between the first entrance and the second entrance. can be controlled.

<Characteristic DC group> (Compact device for left and right distribution of game balls)
A game machine comprising a game board main body and a flow-down means configured to allow game balls to flow down in a manner of allocating the game balls to a plurality of ball inlets behind the front end surface of the game board main body, wherein the game board main body comprises: An arrangement area in which a nail for distributing a game ball flow path can be arranged and a non-arrangement area in which a nail cannot be arranged are provided, and the flow-down means is configured so that the flow-down path of the game ball is the non-arrangement area. A gaming machine DC1 characterized in that it is arranged in a range including the rear of the setting area.

In a game machine such as a pachinko machine, a first ball entrance and a second ball entrance are provided on the left and right sides, and a swing is configured to allow game balls to flow down toward the first ball entrance or the second ball entrance. There is a gaming machine that has a branch channel (for example, see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-144741, especially FIG. 4). The distribution channel is formed of a resin material, and the game balls are formed so that the game balls can flow down inside it. On the upstream side of the second ball entrance (position just before the ball enters), a gap portion is formed that is large enough for a game ball to pass through.

However, in the above-described conventional game machine, the first ball entrance and the second ball entrance are configured to protrude toward the front side of the game board, so that the game area can be formed on the front side of the sorting channel. There was a problem of difficulty. In other words, there is a problem that there is room for improvement from the viewpoint of securing a large formation range of the game area.

In other words, the area necessary for arranging the first ball entrance and the second ball entrance is partially overhanging the front side of the game board, so that the other range in which the game ball can flow down is There is a problem that the design flexibility of the range in which the game balls flow down may be reduced because the range is narrowed.

On the other hand, according to the game machine DC1, since the flow-down means is arranged behind the front end face of the game board main body, another member for guiding the game ball is provided on the front side of the front end face of the game board main body. Since it can be arranged, it is possible to secure a large formation range of the game area.

In the gaming machine DC1, the plurality of ball entrances include a first ball entrance, and the first ball entrance is arranged so as not to overlap a movable accessory provided in the game area when viewed from the front. A gaming machine DC2 characterized by:

According to the gaming machine DC2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine DC1, the movable accessory can prevent the visibility of the game ball entering the first ball entrance from being lowered.

In the gaming machine DC1 or DC2, at least a part of the flow-down path of the game ball flowing down from the first ball-entry port is arranged at a position overlapping the movable accessory arranged in the game area in a front view. A game machine DC3 characterized by.

According to the gaming machine DC3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine DC1 or DC2, it is possible to hide the game ball flowing down from the first ball entrance with the movable accessory.

In any one of the gaming machines DC1 to DC3, the flow-down means includes a direction switching unit configured to flow game balls toward the player on the upstream side of the plurality of ball entrances. Machine DC4.

According to the gaming machine DC4, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines DC1 to DC3, the direction switching unit allows the game ball flowing down the flow-down means to flow to the player side just before the plurality of ball entrances. It is possible to improve the visibility of the ball and improve the ability to pay attention to the game ball flowing down toward a plurality of ball entrances.

A gaming machine DC5, wherein in the gaming machine DC4, a distributing means for distributing the flowing direction of game balls is provided at a position in front of the direction switching section on the front side of the game board main body.

According to the game machine DC5, in addition to the effects of the game machine DC4, the game balls can be distributed by the distribution means even at the front position of the game board main body where it is difficult to drive a nail. Thereby, the degree of freedom in designing the game area can be improved.

In the gaming machine DC5, a ball entry means configured to allow at least a part of the game balls distributed by the distribution means to enter, and the game balls that have flowed down through the flow-down means and flowed down the direction switching section are The game machine DC6 is characterized in that game balls discharged to the rear side and flowing down the flow-down means are configured to be visible through the game board main body.

According to the gaming machine DC6, the subsequent visibility of the game ball that has flowed down the direction switching portion is reduced, so that it is possible to give the illusion that the game ball has entered the ball entering means. As a result, the number of game balls flowing down the flowing means can be added to the number of game balls flowing down toward the ball entering means, and a large amount of game balls appear to flow down toward the ball entering means. can be done.

In this case, the game balls flowing down the flow-down means and the game balls flowing down the front side of the game board main body are separated by the game board main body and cannot collide with each other. It is possible to avoid obstruction of the flowing down of the game ball that is being played by the game ball flowing down the flowing-down means. In other words, an effect is executed to show the player that more game balls are flowing down towards the ball entering means while ensuring the ball entering efficiency of the game balls actually flowing down towards the ball entering means. can do.

The gaming machine DC1 includes a first ball entrance, a second ball entrance, and a first flow path configured such that a game ball can flow down toward the first ball entrance, and the first flow path is a gaming machine DC7 characterized by comprising a branched flow path in which a game ball flows in a direction away from said first ball entrance on the upstream side of said first ball entrance.

According to the game machine DC7, even if ball clogging occurs on the first ball inlet side in the first channel, the game balls can be discharged from the branched channel, thereby facilitating the elimination of the ball clogging. can be done.

In the gaming machine DC7, the first flow path advances the game ball in a direction crossing a predetermined straight line connecting the first ball entrance and the second ball entrance on the upstream side of the first ball entrance. A gaming machine DC8 characterized in that it is configured to allow a game ball to deviate from the first ball entrance.

In a game machine such as a pachinko machine, a first ball entrance and a second ball entrance are provided on the left and right sides, and a swing configured to allow game balls to flow down toward the first ball entrance or the second ball entrance. There is a game machine with a branch channel (for example, see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-144741, especially FIG. 4). The distribution channel is formed of a resin material, and the game balls are formed so that the game balls can flow down inside it. On the upstream side of the second ball entry port (position just before entering the ball), a gap portion of a size through which the game ball can pass is formed.

However, in the above-described conventional game machine, the gap formed in the upstream side of the first ball entrance and the second ball entrance and having a size capable of discharging the game ball discharges the game ball in the horizontal direction. Since it is formed with, in order to secure the passage area of the game ball, there is a flow path for letting the game ball flow down toward the first ball entrance and a game ball flowing down toward the second ball entrance Since it is necessary to leave a horizontal interval between the arrangement of the flow path for and the diameter of the game ball or more, the first ball entrance is compared to the actual width of the first ball entrance and the second ball entrance There is a problem that the lateral width for arranging the mouth and the second ball entrance becomes too large.

In other words, the horizontal width (area) required for arranging the first ball entrance and the second ball entrance is excessive, so that the game ball flow-down path can be formed on the front side or the rear side of the game board. However, there is a problem that the degree of freedom in designing the range in which the game balls flow down may be reduced.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine DC8, the configuration for deflecting the game ball from the first ball entrance is configured to advance the game ball in the direction intersecting the predetermined straight line, so that the first ball entrance and the Since it is possible to eliminate the need to make the distance from the second ball entrance equal to or larger than the diameter of the game ball, it is possible to reduce the lateral width (area) for arranging the first ball entrance and the second ball entrance. Therefore, it is possible to improve the degree of freedom in designing the range in which game balls flow down.

It should be noted that the design of the range in which the game ball is allowed to flow is not limited at all. For example, the area between the game board and the glass plate of the door frame (so-called game area) may be designed, or the area behind the front end surface of the game board (for example, the resin interior flow path) may be used. In the former case, the aspect of designing the arrangement of nails driven into the game board as members for guiding game balls is also included.

In the gaming machine DC8, a second flow path configured to allow game balls to flow down toward the second ball entrance is provided, and the second flow path is upstream of the second ball entrance, and the second A gaming machine characterized in that it is constructed so as to advance a game ball in a direction intersecting a predetermined straight line connecting a first ball entrance and the second ball entrance, thereby diverting the game ball from the second ball entrance. DC9.

According to the gaming machine DC9, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine DC8, the lateral width (area) for arranging the first ball entrance and the second ball entrance can be further suppressed.

In the gaming machine DC8 or DC9, a second flow path configured so that a game ball can flow down toward the second ball entrance, and a game ball that has flowed down the first flow path and is the first ball entrance a receiving means configured to receive a game ball deviated from the second passage and a game ball flowing down the second flow path and deviated from the second ball entrance. DC10.

According to the gaming machine DC10, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine DC8 or DC9, the means for receiving game balls deviated from the first ball entrance and the means for receiving game balls deviated from the second ball entrance are integrated into a single unit. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the cost of parts by reducing the number of parts.

In the gaming machine DC10, the receiving means is arranged on the front side of the predetermined straight line.

According to the gaming machine DC11, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine DC10, the visibility of the game ball received by the receiving means can be improved. It is possible to easily determine whether the ball has passed through the second ball entrance or whether the ball has deviated from the first ball entrance and the second ball entrance and has been received by the receiving means.

In the gaming machine DC10, the receiving means is arranged on the back side of the predetermined straight line.

According to the game machine DC12, in addition to the effects of the game machine DC10, the visibility of the flow-down means can be improved compared to the case where the flow path for game balls is formed on the front side of the flow-down means. It can be made easy to determine that the game ball is passing through the first ball entrance and the second ball entrance arranged on the downstream side of the flow-down means.

<Characteristic DD group> (The effect is performed on the side that is easy to see, and the retreat is performed as a movement to the side that is difficult to see)
A moving means capable of moving between a first position for effecting an action and a second position different from the first position is provided, and the second position is a position where the visibility of the moving means is lower than that of the first position. A gaming machine DD1 characterized by:

2. Description of the Related Art Among game machines such as pachinko machines, there is a game machine that includes a rotating member pivotally supported by a movable body that moves up and down inside an opening facing an image display device (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200914). However, in the above-described conventional gaming machine, since the rotating member is always visible inside the opening, the position of the rotating member may be shifted due to poor control, or the rotating member after over-rotation may be displayed to the player. There is a problem that it is easy to be visually recognized and there is a possibility that the presentation effect is lowered.

On the other hand, according to the game machine DD1, compared to the first position where the action effect is executed, the visibility of the moving means at the second position is made lower, so that at the second position, there is no posture deviation or excessive rotation. Even if this occurs, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to visually recognize the state, and to prevent the performance effect from deteriorating.

In addition, the manner in which the visibility of the moving means is lowered is not limited at all, and various manners are exemplified. For example, regardless of whether it is a transparent member or an opaque member, a member that blocks the view of the player may be arranged between the moving means and the player. It may be displaced (retracted) outward from the area on the front side of the device.

A game machine DD2 characterized in that, in the game machine DD1, the first position is arranged closer to the front side of the game machine than the second position.

According to the gaming machine DD2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine DD1, the visible size of the moving means itself can be enlarged by moving the moving means from the second position to the first position.

In the gaming machine DD2, the moving means is rotatable about a predetermined rotating shaft, and the anteroposterior arrangement is changed by the rotating movement.

According to the gaming machine DD3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine DD2, the front-rear arrangement of the moving means can be changed while eliminating the need to move the moving means back and forth in parallel. Therefore, the structure for changing the front-to-rear arrangement of the moving means can be simplified.

A game machine DD4, wherein any one of the game machines DD1 to DD3 is provided with auxiliary means for assisting the state of the moving means arranged at the second position to the proper side.

According to the game machine DD4, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines DD1 to DD3, by adjusting the state of the movement means at the second position with the auxiliary means, the effect of the movement means at the first position can be appropriately performed. can be executed.

In addition, the aspect of assistance is not limited at all. For example, the posture of the moving means may be corrected to the proper side by abutment, or the moving means may be maintained on the proper side by the biasing force.

In the game machine DD4, the game machine DD5 is characterized in that the auxiliary means is arranged on the second position side with respect to the first position.

According to the game machine DD5, in addition to the effects of the game machine DD4, the auxiliary means can be easily hidden by placing the auxiliary means on the inconspicuous side. Therefore, a separate member for hiding the auxiliary means can be made unnecessary, and the space in front of the auxiliary means can be secured as a performance space.

In addition, the mode of arrangement on the second position side is not limited at all, and various modes are exemplified. For example, it may be on the side that is simply inconspicuous, on the rear side in the front-rear direction, or on the outer side of the central opening of the game board facing the liquid crystal device.

In the gaming machine DD5, the second position is set closer to the back side of the gaming machine than the first position, and the assisting means moves the player through the moving means when the moving means is placed at the second position. A gaming machine DD6 characterized by being arranged so as to block the line of sight.

According to the game machine DD6, in addition to the effects of the game machine DD5, the auxiliary means can be hidden by using the moving means, so that the auxiliary means can be easily prevented from being exposed, and the moving means can be retracted. Good looking. Thereby, the degree of freedom in designing the auxiliary means can be increased.

In any one of the game machines DD1 to DD6, the movement of the moving means includes a first movement toward the first position and a second movement for placing the moving means in a state in which the first movement is possible. and moving, and is configured to bring the state of the moving means closer to the proper side during the second movement.

According to the game machine DD7, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines DD1 to DD6, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the moving means is in an inappropriate state when moving toward the first position.

In the game machine DD7, the game machine DD8 is characterized in that the moving means is brought closer to the proper side by an urging force.

According to the gaming machine DD8, the moving means can be brought closer to the proper side without depending on the control.

A game machine DD9 characterized in that, in the game machine DD7 or DD8, the second movement is a rotational motion about a predetermined rotation axis.

According to the game machine DD9, in addition to the effects of the game machine DD7 or DD8, it is possible to change the state of the movement means so as to bring the movement means closer to the appropriate side while the attitude of the movement means is changing.

A game machine DD10 characterized in that, in any one of the game machines DD7 to DD9, the front side and the back side of the moving means are formed in different manners at the time of the first movement.

According to the game machine DD10, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines DD7 to DD9, the front side seen by the player is formed in a shape suitable for decoration, and the back side is formed in a shape suitable for function. be able to.

<Characteristic DE group> (Production that changes the surface shown by the production device)
A first means capable of executing a predetermined effect is provided, and the first means is changeable between a first posture for performing a first effect and a second posture for performing a second effect as the predetermined effect. , a game machine DE1 characterized in that the side facing the front changes between the first attitude and the second attitude.

2. Description of the Related Art Among game machines such as pachinko machines, there is a game machine that includes a posture changing member pivotally supported by a movable body that moves up and down inside an opening facing an image display device (see, for example, Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2010-200914). However, in the above-described conventional game machine, the posture changing member always faces the same side toward the front side, and the appearance does not change beyond the change in posture, so the performance effect using the posture changing member is improved. There is a problem that there is room for improvement from the point of view.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine DE1, since the side facing the front of the first means is configured to change between the first posture and the second posture, each of the single movable means called the first means By designing the sides differently, it is possible to change the viewed side (the front side), thereby making the first means appear to the player as a completely different object. Therefore, it can be improved from the viewpoint of improving the presentation effect of the first means.

Note that the mode of the predetermined effect is not limited at all, and various modes are exemplified. For example, an action effect in which at least a part of the first means operates, or a light emission effect using light emitted from the light emitting means of the first means may be used.

In the game machine DE1, the first means comprises predetermined light emitting means arranged along a predetermined shape so that the figure can be visually recognized by emitted light, and the figure visually recognized by the predetermined light emitting means A gaming machine DE2 characterized by being configured to be changeable between a first posture and the second posture.

According to the game machine DE2, in addition to the effects of the game machine DE1, by changing the figure visually recognized by the predetermined light emitting means, the presentation effect of the first means can be improved.

It should be noted that the mode of change of the figure visually recognized by the predetermined light emitting means is not limited at all, and various modes are exemplified. For example, by controlling the light emission pattern of each light emitting element of the predetermined light emitting means in the stopped state, the visible figure may be changed, or the light emitting state of each light emitting element of the predetermined light emitting means may be fixed and predetermined. A mode in which a visible figure (an afterimage or the like) is changed by operating the light emitting means may be used, or a mode in which these are combined may be used.

In the gaming machine DE1 or DE2, the first means is movable between a first position and a second position, and has an outer shape of the first means that is visible at the first position and a shape that is visible at the second position. The gaming machine DE3 is characterized in that the outer shape of the first means is different.

According to the game machine DE3, in addition to the effects of the game machine DE1 or DE2, the first means is configured so that the visually recognized external shape changes while moving, so that an effect that is difficult to realize with a single member can be achieved. It can be visually recognized by the player. Thereby, the presentation effect of the first means can be improved.

In the gaming machine DE3, the gaming machine DE4 is characterized in that an area in which the first means can perform an effect operation is set corresponding to an effect mode.

According to the gaming machine DE4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine DE3, the area required for the performance operation executed by the first means is configured to change in size corresponding to the aspect of the performance. Even if the area in which the first means can perform the performance operation changes for each arrangement of the first means, the first means can be operated in a mode of performance that matches the area, so the degree of freedom in designing the action performance of the first means is improved. can be improved.

A gaming machine DE5, wherein the gaming machine DE3 or DE4 comprises a dividing means arranged to divide the first means arranged at the first position when viewed from a predetermined direction.

According to the gaming machine DE5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine DE3 or DE4, the dividing means allows the appearance of the first means at the first position, the appearance of the first means at the second position (non-divided), can be different.

In any one of the game machines DE3 to DE5, the predetermined light emitting means has a figure visually recognized in the first posture at the first position corresponding to the shape of the progress assisting means for assisting the progress of the game ball in the game area. A gaming machine DE6 characterized by being configured as follows.

According to the gaming machine DE6, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines DE3 to DE5, the light emission in the first posture can perform an effect to suggest the traveling direction of the game ball to the player. In addition to a single performance, it can also be used as a performance related to the traveling direction of the game ball.

In addition, the mode of the progress assistance means is not limited at all, and various modes are exemplified. For example, it may be a metal rail including a portion that guides the shot ball to the game area, or it may be a guide means that is arranged in the game area and guides the flow of the game ball. It is also possible to use ball passing state switching means that can be switched by .

In the gaming machine DE6, the graphic visually recognized in the second posture at the second position is a graphic for drawing attention to a predetermined ball entry area into which a game ball can enter.

According to the gaming machine DE7, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine DE6, another mode of optical presentation can be performed by the single first means as the optical presentation executed for the same purpose. This makes it easy to prevent the player from becoming bored with the performance.

In any one of the game machines DE3 to DE7, the movement of the first means includes a first movement toward the first position and a second movement for placing the movement means in a state in which the first movement is possible. A game machine DE8 characterized in that it is constructed so as to bring the state of said first means close to the proper side during said second movement.

According to the game machine DE8, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines DE3 to DE7, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the moving means is in an inappropriate state when moving toward the first position.

In the game machine DE8, the game machine DE9 is characterized in that the first means brings the state closer to the proper side by an urging force.

According to the game machine DE9, in addition to the effects of the game machine DE8, the first means can be brought closer to the proper side without relying on control.

The game machine DE10, wherein the second movement is a rotational motion about a predetermined rotation axis in the game machine DE8 or DE9.

According to the gaming machine DE10, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine DE8 or DE9, it is possible to change the state of the moving means so as to bring the moving means closer to the appropriate side while the attitude of the displacement means is changing.

A gaming machine DE11 in any one of the gaming machines DE8 to DE10, characterized in that the front side and the back side of the displacement means are formed in different manners at the time of the first movement.

According to the game machine DE11, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines DE8 to DE10, the front side seen by the player is formed in a shape suitable for decoration, and the back side is formed in a shape suitable for function. be able to.

<Characteristic DF group> (support structure of the member to be operated)
Displacing means configured to be displaceable, and supporting means for supporting the displacing means, wherein the supporting means includes a permissible portion that allows displacement of the displacing means and a displacement that can limit the displacement of the displacing means. A game machine DF1 comprising: a restriction unit;

In a game machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a game machine in which a movable unit that moves up and down by driving a pair of left and right driving devices has a rotating member that is driven to rotate by an individual driving device (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2013-000482). (see Gazette). However, in the above-described conventional game machine, the movable unit is supported by plate portions extending vertically on both the left and right sides so as to move linearly in the vertical direction. If a load is applied in a direction that causes the movable unit to lose its posture (tilt), the movement of the movable unit will lose its smoothness and the movement resistance will increase, increasing the possibility of damage to the power transmission system. was there. That is, there is a problem that there is room for improvement from the viewpoint of performance and durability.

On the other hand, according to the game machine DF1, the support means for supporting the displacement means is provided with a permitting part for permitting the displacement of the displacement means in addition to the restriction part for limiting the displacement of the displacement means. Since the displacement of the displacement means with respect to the support means is permitted in advance even if there is a deviation in the drive timing that causes the displacement to occur, the smoothness of the operation of the displacement means can be maintained within the allowable width, and the gap between the support means and the displacement means can be maintained. can reduce the load applied to the displacement means. This makes it possible to improve performance and durability.

Further, as a support mode of the displacement means, it is possible to configure two types of support modes by appropriately selecting whether the rate of influence of the allowable section or the rate of influence of the restriction section is increased. can.

In the conventional game machine, the movable unit is displaced in the vertical direction, but the displacing direction of the displacing means is not limited at all. For example, it may be in the vertical direction, the horizontal direction, the front-rear direction, the rotation direction about a predetermined rotation axis, or a combination thereof.

In addition, the configuration of the allowable portion and the restricting portion can be arbitrarily set in shape, and various modes are exemplified. For example, the allowance portion may be formed as an elongated hole extending in the first direction, and the restriction portion may be formed in a perfect circular shape with a diameter shorter than the longitudinal dimension of the allowance portion.

In the gaming machine DF1, the permitting section is configured to permit displacement of the displacement means in a state in which displacement of the restricted portion of the displacement means is restricted by the restricting section. Game machine DF2.

According to the game machine DF2, in addition to the effects of the game machine DF1, it is possible to allow the displacement of the displacement means with the restricting part as the base end. As a result, as compared with the case where the presence or absence of the displacement restriction is switched by electrical control, the smoothness of the displacement of the displacement means can be easily ensured because the control is unnecessary.

In the gaming machine DF1 or DF2, the permitting unit has a first permitting state permitting displacement of the displacement means within a first permitting width and a displacement of the displacement means within a second permitting width smaller than the first permitting width. A gaming machine DF3 characterized by being configured to be able to change its state in a second allowable state.

According to the game machine DF3, in addition to the effects of the game machine DF1 or DF2, even if the displacement widths corresponding to the types of displacement of the displacement means are different, the different displacement widths can be accommodated by one permissible portion. can.

In the game machine DF3, the game machine DF4 is characterized in that the state change is caused by a change in posture of the displacement means.

According to the game machine DF4, in addition to the effects of the game machine DF3, the change in the allowable width allowed by the allowable unit occurs due to the change in the posture of the displacement means. and the size of the allowable width can be directly linked, it is possible to prevent malfunction of the displacement means in advance. In addition, the number of constituent members can be reduced as compared with the case of adopting another limiting member for holding the displacement means and limiting the displacement.

In the gaming machine DF4, the displacement means is supported by the support means so as to be displaced along the first direction, and the first allowable state is such that the direction of displacement of the displacement means allowed by the allowable portion is the The game machine DF5 is characterized in that it is included on a predetermined plane parallel to the first direction, and the second allowable state is such that the direction of displacement of the displacement means permitted by the allowable portion intersects the predetermined plane.

According to the game machine DF5, in addition to the effects of the game machine DF4, the allowable width of displacement by the allowable part can be changed by switching the direction allowed by the allowable part as the direction of displacement of the displacement means with respect to the first direction. can.

As a result, in relation to the control of the driving device that drives the displacement means, the posture of the displacement means is maintained in the first allowable state within a range in which positional deviation between the displacement means and the support means is likely to occur in the first direction. By setting the attitude of the displacement means to the second allowable state within the range where it is possible to prevent the occurrence of positional displacement or where it is desired to prevent the positional displacement, the displacement of the displacement means is neither too soft nor too hard, and the displacement is sharp. It can be in some displacement mode.

In any one of game machines DF3 to DF5, the displacement means supports operation means configured to be operable, the operation means is configured to be capable of high-speed operation, and the high-speed operation is performed by the permitting unit. A game machine DF6 characterized in that it can be executed in a state of 2 allowable state.

According to the game machine DF6, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines DF3 to DF5, it is possible to easily prevent displacement of the displacing means due to the inertia load caused by the high-speed operation of the operation means.

A game machine DF7 in any one of game machines DF1 to DF6, wherein said support means comprises a pair of members supporting said displacement means from both sides.

According to the game machine DF7, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines DF1 to DF6, the displacement means can be stably supported.

The game machine DF7 is characterized in that the pair of members are configured to be rotationally displaceable around a first axis, and the allowable width of the allowable portion is formed to extend along the first axis direction. A game machine DF8.

According to the game machine DF8, in addition to the effects of the game machine DF7, the displacement of the displacement means within the allowable width allowed by the allowable portion can be caused on the tangential plane of the cylinder centered on the first axis. can. In other words, the displacement permitted by the permitting portion can be generated as a displacement in which the displacement means is twisted with respect to the first axis.

As a result, it is possible to three-dimensionally deal with deviations in the amount of displacement that are difficult to avoid, such as backlash, which may occur when gears are used in the drive transmission mechanisms on both the left and right sides, and the rotation of the displacement means about the first axis. Displacement can be generated smoothly.

A gaming machine DF9 characterized in that one of the supporting means in the gaming machine DF8 is provided with the restricting section.

According to the game machine DF9, in addition to the effects of the game machine DF8, it is possible to allow misalignment of the supporting means and the moving means at the time of assembling on the other side, thereby facilitating the assembling.

A game machine according to any one of the game machines DF1 to DF9, wherein the allowance part is formed as an elongated hole, and the restriction part is formed as an elongated hole whose longitudinal direction is shorter than the longitudinal direction of the allowance part. DF10.

According to the game machine DF10, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines DF1 to DF9, the movement means can be slid in the longitudinal direction of the restriction portion and the allowance portion. As a result, it is possible to release the load on the moving means and to use it for effecting the movement of the moving means.

<Characteristic DG group> (Technical concept for setting multiple types of fixing force of moving means)
A movable moving means and a load applying means capable of applying a load to the moving means are provided, and the load applying means is capable of switching the applied load according to the state of the moving means. A gaming machine DG1 characterized by:

In a game machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a game machine provided with a regulating means (load applying means) configured to be movable to a position where the movement of the moving means that is vertically displaced can be regulated (for example, JP-A-2016-54856). ). However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, although the movement of the moving means can be controlled by the control means, no further effect can be expected, and the cost-effectiveness relative to the volume occupied by the control means has been low. That is, there is a problem that there is room for improvement from the viewpoint of effectively utilizing the control means.

On the other hand, according to the game machine DG1, the load applied from the load applying means to the moving means can be switched according to the state of the moving means. Can affect movement in multiple ways. That is, it is possible to effectively utilize the load applying means.

The mode of the state of the moving means employed as a reference for switching the load of the load applying means is not limited at all, and various modes are exemplified. For example, as the difference in state of the moving means, a difference in arrangement of the moving means may be adopted, or a difference in operation mode may be adopted.

Examples of states in which the operation modes are different include a state in which the moving means actively operates, and a state in which other moving means held by the moving means or other moving means arranged outside the moving means receive the operation. and passively operating states.

The mode of switching the applied load is not limited at all, and various modes are exemplified. For example, the direction of the load based on the moving direction of the moving means may be switched (the direction opposite to the moving direction of the moving means and the direction crossing the moving direction of the moving means may be switched). However, the mode of the load applied by the load applying means may be switched according to the elapsed time from the start of movement of the moving means.

Moreover, as a mode of switching the load, switching between the magnitude of the load and switching of the generation mode of the load may be performed. The form of load generation may be, for example, a mode as a frictional force (brake) due to friction with the moving means, or a mode as a restricting force (stopper) generated when the limit of the allowable movement width is reached. .

In the game machine DG1, the load applying means has an opposing state in which the load is applied in a direction opposite to the moving direction of the moving means, and an intersecting state in which the load is applied in a direction intersecting the moving direction of the moving means. A game machine DG2 characterized in that the applied load can be switched.

According to the game machine DG2, in addition to the effects of the game machine DG1, by changing the arrangement of the load applying means with respect to the moving path of the moving means, the load applied from the load applying means to the moving means can be switched. A complicated shape for switching the load is not required, and the load application means can be configured simply.

In the gaming machine DG1 or DG2, the load applying means includes load applying moving means capable of moving in a direction crossing the moving direction of the moving means, and the load applying moving means is configured to be able to contact the moving means. A gaming machine DG3 characterized by:

According to the game machine DG3, in addition to the effects of the game machine DG1 or DG2, the load-applying movement means can be configured to appear and disappear with respect to the movement path of the movement means by linear motion (linear motion). In addition, it is possible to reduce the movement width (movement width in consideration of variations in motion) required for the load applying movement means in order to switch the mode of the load applied from the load applying means to the movement means.

Therefore, the space for arranging the load applying movement means can be suppressed. In game machines such as pachinko machines, the space for arranging moving means and load applying means is usually limited to the size (volume) determined by a predetermined standard. By suppressing the space of , it is possible to improve the degree of freedom in arranging the moving means and the load applying means.

In the gaming machine DG3, the load imparting means is configured such that the moving direction of the load applying means crosses the moving direction of the moving means at right angles, and the movement of the moving means in the moving direction is restricted. Gaming machine DG4.

According to the game machine DG4, in addition to the effects of the game machine DG3, the difference in the mode of the load applied to the moving means can be increased with the minimum movement width of the load applying means.

In any one of the game machines DG1 to DG4, the game machine DG5 is characterized in that switching of the load applied by the load applying means is executed in accordance with the position of the moving means.

According to the game machine DG5, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines DG1 to DG4, it is possible to cope with the case where the performance operation of the moving means is configured to be different depending on the position.

For example, in the case where the moving means has a predetermined operating means, the operating means operates at high speed when the moving means is at rest, while the operating means stops or operates at low speed when the moving means moves. When the performance is executed, there may be a demand to firmly fix the moving means when the position of the moving means is stopped, while a demand to loosely fix (braking) when the moving means moves. can occur.

By switching the load applied by the load applying means in accordance with the position of the moving means, it is possible to meet different demands due to differences in the arrangement of the moving means.

In any one of the gaming machines DG1 to DG5, the load applying means applies a load when the moving means moves in the forward direction, and applies a load when the moving means moves in the reverse direction. A gaming machine DG6 characterized by releasing.

According to the game machine DG6, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines DG1 to DG5, it is possible to respond to the difference in the forward/reverse movement direction by the presence or absence (size) of the load from the load applying means.

In any one of the game machines DG1 to DG6, a driving means for generating a driving force for moving the moving means is provided, and a separation load is generated in a direction separating the moving means and the driving means. Gaming machine DG7.

According to the game machine DG7, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines DG1 to DG6, the movement means can be separated from the driving means by generating the separation load, and the driving force transmission efficiency can be reduced. .

In the game machine DG7, the game machine DG8 is characterized in that the separated load is generated from the load applying means.

According to the game machine DG8, in addition to the effects of the game machine DG7, the load imparting means can be configured with multiple functions.

The game machine DG9 is characterized in that, in the game machine DG7, the separation load is generated in the driving means.

According to the gaming machine DG9, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine DG7, it is possible to lower the driving force transmission efficiency on the upstream side of the driving force transmission path.

In any one of the game machines DG1 to DG9, it is possible to configure a case where the frictional force is applied from the load applying means to the moving means and a case where the load applying means restricts the movement of the moving means. A gaming machine DG10 characterized by:

According to the game machine DG10, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines DG1 to DG9, even when the same driving force is generated to move the movement means, the variation of the movement mode of the movement means is increased. be able to.

<Characteristic DH group>
It is characterized by comprising movable moving means, first guiding means for guiding movement of the moving means, and second guiding means for guiding movement of the moving means in a manner different from that of the first guiding means. A game machine DH1.

2. Description of the Related Art Among game machines such as pachinko machines, there is a game machine in which movement is guided by a pair of guide means having the same mode (for example, see Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2012-157474). However, in the above-described conventional game machine, the aspect of the load applied to the pair of parts guided by the guide means, which is part of the moving means, is common. Since it is necessary to increase the strength, there is a problem that the degree of freedom in designing the moving means (the part thereof and guided by the pair of guiding means) is low.

On the other hand, according to the game machine DH1, since the first guide means and the second guide means for guiding the movement of the moving means differ in the guidance mode, the mode of the applied load and the durability improvement are required. Different strength values can be used. Therefore, since it is possible to configure the shape and strength of the portions of the moving means that are guided by the plurality of guiding means so as to differ, the moving means (the portion of the moving means that is guided by the plurality of guiding means) ) can improve the degree of design freedom.

It should be noted that the difference in mode between the first guide means and the second guide means is not limited at all, and various modes are exemplified. For example, the first guide means may be configured as guide rails, while the second guide means may be configured as guide holes, or the first guide means may be rotary guide means pivotally supported by a predetermined rotating shaft. , the second guide means may be configured as a guide groove, or may be a mode in which the combination of each configuration is changed.

For example, when the first guide means and the second guide means are guide grooves, the first guide means and the second guide means may extend in parallel with each other, but may have different groove widths. The width of the grooves may be common while the extension directions of the grooves are non-parallel between the first guide means and the second guide means.

In the gaming machine DH1, the gaming machine DH2 is characterized in that at least a part of the second guiding means is arranged along the first guiding means.

According to the game machine DH2, in addition to the effects of the game machine DH1, at least a part of the second guide means follows the first guide means, so that the movement means can be operated in two steps.

In the game machine DH2, the second guiding means includes an annexed section along the first guiding means, and an auxiliary section for guiding the moving means in a direction different from the direction when the moving means is guided by the annexed section. Characterized game machine DH3.

According to the gaming machine DH3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine DH2, it is possible to change the movement direction in which the moving means is guided and moved at the boundary between the annexed section and the auxiliary section. Therefore, the moving mode of the moving means can be complicated.

Any one of the game machines DH1 to DH3 is provided with transmission means for transmitting a driving force for moving the movement means to the movement means, and the displacement direction of the transmission means is one direction regardless of the movement direction of the movement means. A game machine DH4 characterized in that it is fixed to the .

According to the game machine DH4, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines DH1 to DH3, the design of the driving force transmission system is facilitated compared to the case of switching the displacement direction of the transmission means during movement of the movement means. be able to.

In the game machine DH4, the transmission means is configured to transmit the driving force through the guided portion guided by the second guide means.

According to the gaming machine DH5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine DH4, the driving force is transmitted through the guided portion guided by the narrow second guide means. It is possible to suppress misalignment.

In the gaming machine DH5, the guided portion is configured to overtake the auxiliary guiding portion guided by the first guiding means in the moving direction of the transmitting means.

According to the game machine DH6, in addition to the effects of the game machine DH5, the total weight of the auxiliary guide portion is applied to the guided portion side, and compared to the case where the driven portion is driven against the total weight, the movement means is reduced. It is possible to reduce the driving force required at the start of movement.

In any one of the gaming machines DH2 to DH6, when the moving means is guided by the juxtaposed portion, the moving means rotates in the direction of rotation about the second guiding means side of the moving means as the rotation axis. In a state in which the guide means side is energized and the moving means is guided by the auxiliary portion, the second guide means side of the moving means rotates in the direction of rotation about the first guiding means side of the moving means. A gaming machine DH7 characterized by being energized.

According to the game machine DH7, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines DH2 to DH6, when the rollers guided by the guide means are adopted as the configuration, the rollers can be easily rotated. wear can be reduced.

In any one of the game machines DH3 to DH7, when the moving means is guided by the auxiliary part, the moving means is maintained at a predetermined portion of the first guiding means, and the first guiding means is guided to the second guiding means. 2. A gaming machine DH8 characterized in that it is formed wider than the guide means.

According to the game machine DH8, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines DH3 to DH7, the wide first guide means can be used to maintain the position at the predetermined portion, so the moving means guided by the auxiliary portion movement can be stabilized. Therefore, it is possible to easily prevent the part of the moving means that is guided by the second guiding means from becoming unstable when passing through the boundary between the juxtaposed portion and the auxiliary portion. As a result, the movement of the moving means can be stabilized, and smooth step switching can be performed when the movement is configured to switch in steps.

Further, since the support area of the predetermined portion of the first guide means can be increased, it is possible to easily avoid local wear between the moving means and the first guide means.

A gaming machine DH9 in the gaming machine DH8, wherein the predetermined portion is configured to suppress at least vertical displacement of the moving means.

According to the gaming machine DH9, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine DH8, it is possible to reduce the load required to move the moving means in the portion guided by the first guiding means.

A game machine DH10 in the game machine DH8 or DH9, wherein an electric wiring connected to the moving means is arranged through the first guide means.

According to the gaming machine DH10, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine DH8 or DH9, it is possible to secure a sufficient cross-sectional area for passing the electrical wiring, and to prevent displacement of the electrical wiring when the moving means is guided by the auxiliary section. Since it can be suppressed, the durability of the electrical wiring can be improved.

<Characteristic EA group> (invalid control)
Determination means capable of executing determination, display means for displaying identification information for indicating determination results by the determination means, operation means operable by the player, and based on the operation of the operation means a display control means capable of causing the display means to display the mode, and a privilege capable of giving a privilege advantageous to the player when identification information for indicating the specific determination result is displayed on the display means. a first process execution means capable of executing a first process when power supply is started; and invalidation control means capable of invalidating the operation of the means.

2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a starting hole provided on the game board surface, a lottery is drawn to determine whether the game is successful or not. An advantageous privilege game is executed. A gaming machine has been proposed in which, when the gaming machine is powered on, initial settings are executed as power-on processing (prior art document: Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-217766).

However, it is necessary to restrict the execution of the game during the period until the game can be started when the initial setting is executed.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of suitably executing initial settings.

According to the game machine EA1, when the operation means is operated while the first process is being executed, the operation can be invalidated. There is an effect that it is possible to suppress the problem that the operation control is hindered.

In the game machine EA1, the game machine EA2 is characterized in that the first process is a process necessary for displaying the mode on the display means.

According to the gaming machine EA2, during the period in which the first process is executed for executing the process necessary for displaying the mode on the display means, the process for invalidating the operation of the operation means is executed. This has the effect of suppressing defects.

In the game machine EA1 or EA2, the invalidation control means can set an invalid period during which the operation of the operation means is invalidated if the first process is not completed when a predetermined condition is established. A game machine EA3 characterized by being

According to the game machine EA3, in addition to the effects of the game machine EA1 or EA2, if the first process is completed during the period until the predetermined condition is satisfied, the invalid period is not set, so the period during which the operation means cannot be operated. There is an effect that it is possible to suppress the problem of long-term maintenance.

Any one of the game machines EA1 to EA3 has a setting process execution means capable of executing a setting process based on setting information, and the first process execution means also executes the setting process while the setting process is being executed. 1 process can be executed, and the predetermined condition is satisfied when the setting process is completed by the setting process execution means.

According to the gaming machine EA4, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines EA1 to EA3, the period during which the setting process is executed becomes long, and when the first process is completed, the operating means is not invalidated, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the problem that the operation means is invalidated for a long period of time.

<Characteristic EB group>
Information acquisition means capable of acquiring information, storage means for storing information acquired by the information acquisition means, determination means capable of performing determination based on the information stored in the storage means, and the determination display means for displaying identification information for indicating the determination result by the means; and a privilege capable of giving a privilege advantageous to the player when the identification information for indicating the specific determination result is displayed on the display means. Giving means, in a gaming machine having: pre-discrimination means capable of executing discrimination based on the information stored in the storage means before being discriminated by the discrimination means; and pre-discrimination means and a prohibition period setting means capable of setting a prohibition period during which execution of discrimination by the prior discrimination means is prohibited. Characteristic game machine EB1.

2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a starting hole provided on the game board surface, a lottery is drawn to determine whether the game is successful or not. An advantageous privilege game is executed. When a game ball enters the starting port, a random number or the like for executing a game lottery or the like is acquired, stored as a reserved ball until the lottery is executed, and prior to the execution of the lottery. A game machine has been proposed in which determination such as determination of whether the ball is held is performed, and an advance notice effect etc. based on the result of the prediction is performed (Prior art document: Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2012-217766).

However, there have been cases where there is a problem in the execution of game effects and the like due to the execution of effects based on the look-ahead result.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to provide a game machine in which defects are suppressed.

According to the game machine EB1, a prohibition period is set in which execution of determination by the prior determination means is prohibited, so a period is set in which performance based on a new prior determination cannot be performed, and performance based on the prior determination is suppressed. It has the effect of being able to

In the gaming machine EB1, the prohibition period setting means can set a first prohibition period and a second prohibition period longer than the first prohibition period, and the advance determination means can If it is not within the second prohibited period, the preliminary determination is executed, and if the specific condition is not satisfied, the preliminary determination is executed if it is not within the first prohibited period. The gaming machine EB2 is characterized in that it is configured to be able to

According to the gaming machine EB2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine EB1, the first prohibition period and the second prohibition period can be used properly, so that the period during which the preliminary determination is not executed can be switched according to the situation. There is an effect that suitable control can be executed.

The game machine EB1 or EB2 has specific effect executing means capable of executing a specific effect based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, and the prohibition period setting means sets the prohibition period corresponding to the period during which the specific effect is executed. A gaming machine EB3 characterized in that it is configured to be configurable.

According to the game machine EB3, in addition to the effects of the game machine EB1 or EB2, the prohibition period is set corresponding to the period during which the specific effect is executed, so that the effect based on the prior determination is performed when the specific effect is started. There is an effect that it is possible to suppress the problem of interruption.

<Characteristic EC group>
Information acquisition means capable of acquiring information, storage means for storing information acquired by the information acquisition means, determination means capable of performing determination based on the information stored in the storage means, and the determination display means for displaying identification information for indicating the determination result by the means; and when identification information for indicating the specific determination result is displayed on the display means, a privilege game that is advantageous to the player can be executed. a bonus game execution means, in a gaming machine having: pre-determination means capable of performing determination based on the information stored in the storage means prior to being determined by the determination means; and pre-determination thereof a production executing means capable of executing a production based on a result of discrimination by the means; The gaming machine EC1 is characterized in that the prohibition period setting means is configured to be capable of setting a plurality of different prohibition periods.

2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a starting hole provided on the game board surface, a lottery is drawn to determine whether the game is successful or not. An advantageous privilege game is executed. When a game ball enters the starting port, a random number or the like for executing a game lottery or the like is acquired, stored as a reserved ball until the lottery is executed, and prior to the execution of the lottery. A game machine has been proposed in which determination such as determination of whether the ball is held is performed, and an advance notice effect etc. based on the result of the prediction is performed (Prior art document: Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2012-217766).

However, there have been cases where there is a problem in the execution of game effects and the like due to the execution of effects based on the look-ahead results.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to provide a game machine in which defects are suppressed.

According to the gaming machine EC1, since a plurality of different prohibition periods can be set, the length of the prohibition period can be varied depending on the state, and the problem of the prohibition period becoming unnecessarily long can be suppressed. be.

In the gaming machine EC1, the prohibition period setting means is configured to be capable of setting a prohibition period corresponding to the number of pieces of information discriminated as the specific discrimination result stored in the storage means. Characteristic game machine EC2.

According to the gaming machine EC2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine EC1, the prohibition period is set corresponding to the specific determination result and the number stored in the storage means. Since the prohibition period is set, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the problem that the prohibition period is long.

The game machine EC1 or EC2 has specific effect execution means capable of executing a specific effect based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, and the prohibition period setting means sets a prohibition period corresponding to the period during which the specific effect is executed. A gaming machine EC3 characterized by being configured to be configurable.

According to the gaming machine EC3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine EC1 or EC2, since the prohibition period is set corresponding to the period during which the fixed effect is executed, the effect based on the prior determination is performed when the specific effect is started. There is an effect that it is possible to suppress the problem of interruption.

<Feature ED group>
Information acquisition means capable of acquiring information, storage means for storing information acquired by the information acquisition means, determination means capable of performing determination based on the information stored in the storage means, and the determination display means for displaying identification information for indicating the determination result by the means; and when identification information for indicating the specific determination result is displayed on the display means, a privilege game that is advantageous to the player can be executed. and a privilege game execution means, wherein the privilege game is composed of a plurality of small privilege games, and the gaming machine is suggested to correspond to the privilege given to the player in the small privilege game. A suggestive mode executing means capable of executing a mode, and an adding means capable of adding specific information when the suggestive mode executing means executes the suggestive mode. Game machine ED1.

2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a starting hole provided on the game board surface, a lottery is drawn to determine whether the game is successful or not. An advantageous privilege game is executed. A game machine has been proposed in which a winning game is executed in which a lottery result such as a winning is notified, and in which notification such as a probability variable winning that is advantageous to the player is executed at a specific timing (prior art document: JP-A 2012-217766).

However, there has been a problem that the timing at which the notification is executed tends to be constant, making the game monotonous.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to provide a game machine in which defects are suppressed.

According to the gaming machine ED1, a privilege is given in a small privilege game, and the specific information can be notified at the timing when the suggestion mode is executed. Therefore, it is possible to diversify the timing at which the specific information is notified. It has the effect of being able to

In the gaming machine ED1, variable ball entry means capable of changing between a first state in which a game ball can be entered and a second state in which the game ball is more difficult to enter than the first state, and the variable ball entry means. and a privilege granting means capable of granting the privilege based on the fact that the game ball enters the game ball, and the small privilege game is such that the variable ball entering means is variable from the second state to the first state. A gaming machine ED2 characterized in that it is configured to be able to

According to the gaming machine ED2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine ED1, by executing a small privilege game, it is possible to enter the game ball into the variable ball entry means and obtain a privilege, so that the game can be used. There is an effect that it can give a fresh taste.

The game machine ED1 or ED2 is characterized by having a determining means capable of determining the small privilege game to which the specific information can be given, among the plurality of small privilege games. Game machine ED3.

According to the gaming machine ED3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine ED1 or ED2, the small privilege game to which the specific information is given is determined by the determining means, so that it is possible to determine which of the privilege games the small privilege game has the specific information. There is an effect that it is possible to diversify whether or not to be awarded, and to provide various games.

<Characteristic EE group>
Determination means capable of performing determination, display means for dynamically displaying identification information for indicating determination results by the determination means, and a dynamic display period for the identification information dynamically displayed on the display means are determined. dynamic display period determination means capable of providing a dynamic display period; and privilege giving means capable of giving a privilege advantageous to a player when identification information for indicating a specific determination result is displayed on the display means. a storage means storing a plurality of dynamic display period groups in which a plurality of different dynamic display periods are set as the dynamic display periods determined by the dynamic display period determination means; In the dynamic period group, a determination probability determined by the dynamic display period determination means for the set dynamic display period is set in advance, and the plurality of dynamic display period groups include: A specific dynamic display period group is set in which the probability of the specific dynamic display period being determined is set higher than that of other dynamic display periods, and the dynamic display period determination means determines that a predetermined condition is satisfied. The dynamic display period is determined from the specific dynamic display period group based on, and the gaming machine executes a specific effect when it is determined in advance that the predetermined condition is satisfied. A game machine EE1 characterized in that it has a specific effect execution means capable of.

2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a starting hole provided on the game board surface, a lottery is drawn to determine whether the game is successful or not. An advantageous privilege game is executed. A game machine has been proposed in which a winning game is executed in which a lottery result such as a winning is notified, and in which notification such as a probability variable winning that is advantageous to the player is executed at a specific timing (prior art document: JP-A 2012-217766).

However, there is a problem that the game becomes monotonous. SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine that suppresses the problem that games become monotonous.

According to the game machine EE1, it is possible to determine in advance that the dynamic display period is determined from the specific dynamic display period group by the specific effect, so that the dynamic display can be expected in the specific dynamic display period. has the effect of being able to

In the gaming machine EE1, the dynamic display period determining means can determine the dynamic display period from the specific dynamic display period group until an end condition is satisfied when the predetermined condition is satisfied. A gaming machine EE2 characterized by being configured.

According to the gaming machine EE1, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine EE1, the state in which the dynamic display period is determined by the specific dynamic display period group continues until the termination condition is satisfied. can be easily executed continuously, and the special dynamic display period can give a freshness to the game.

In the gaming machine EE1 or EE2, when a dynamic display period is determined from the specific dynamic display period group by the dynamic display period determination means, and a dynamic display period different from the specific dynamic display period is determined. A gaming machine EE3 characterized in that it has a special effect executing means capable of executing a special effect in the game machine EE3.

According to the gaming machine EE3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine EE1 or EE2, the dynamic display period with a low probability of being determined is determined to execute the special effect, so the special effect is executed continuously. By doing so, it can be determined that the specific dynamic display period group is continuously set, and there is an effect that the interest of the player can be improved.

<Characteristic EF group>
Determination means capable of performing determination, display means for dynamically displaying identification information for indicating determination results by the determination means, and a dynamic display period for the identification information dynamically displayed on the display means are determined. dynamic display period determination means capable of providing a dynamic display period; and privilege giving means capable of giving a privilege advantageous to a player when identification information for indicating a specific determination result is displayed on the display means. a storage means storing a plurality of dynamic display period groups in which a plurality of different dynamic display periods are set as the dynamic display periods determined by the dynamic display period determination means; In the dynamic period group, a determination probability determined by the dynamic display period determination means for the set dynamic display period is set in advance, and the plurality of dynamic display period groups include: A specific dynamic display period group is set in which the probability of the specific dynamic display period being determined is set higher than that of other dynamic display periods, and the dynamic display period determination means determines that a predetermined condition is satisfied. When the dynamic display period is determined from the specific dynamic display period group, a specific suggestion mode is provided to the player. A game machine EF1 characterized in that it is to be notified.

2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a starting hole provided on the game board surface, a lottery is drawn to determine whether the game is successful or not. An advantageous privilege game is executed. A game machine has been proposed in which a winning game is executed in which a lottery result such as a winning is notified, and in which notification such as a probability variable winning that is advantageous to the player is executed at a specific timing (prior art document: JP-A 2012-217766).

However, there has been a problem that the timing at which the notification is executed tends to be constant, making the game monotonous.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine that suppresses the problem that games become monotonous.

According to the gaming machine EF1, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the problem that the game becomes monotonous by making the player expect that the dynamic display will be performed during the specific dynamic display period by notifying the suggestion mode.

<Characteristic EG group>
Determination means capable of performing determination, display means for dynamically displaying identification information for indicating the determination result by the determination means, and identification information for indicating the specific determination result displayed on the display means. In a gaming machine having privilege granting means capable of imparting a privilege advantageous to a player when a situation arises, a performance execution means capable of executing a performance based on setting information, and a period during which the identification information is dynamically displayed. and storage means for storing information based on the establishment of a specific condition that can be established, and the production execution means executes production based on the information stored in the storage means. A gaming machine EG1 characterized by:

2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a starting hole provided on the game board surface, a lottery is drawn to determine whether the game is successful or not. An advantageous privilege game is executed. A configuration has been proposed in which game-related information such as lottery result information is notified to the player (prior art document: JP-A-2012-217766).

However, there is a problem that the game becomes monotonous and the player becomes bored with the game early.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine that prevents the problem of early boredom with games.

According to the game machine EG1, since the performance is executed based on the information stored in the storage means, the performance is executed by dynamically displaying the identification information, and the game is continued to be executed. There is an effect that it can be done easily.

The gaming machine EG1 has specific effect execution means capable of executing a specific effect based on the fulfillment of the effect condition, and the predetermined condition can be established during a period in which the specific effect is being executed. A game machine EG2 characterized in that the game machine EG2 is

According to the gaming machine EG2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine EG1, it is configured such that a predetermined condition is established during the period in which the specific presentation is being performed, so that the execution of the specific presentation can be expected. There is an effect that a game can be played and the interest in the game can be improved.

<Characteristic EH group>
Information acquisition means capable of acquiring information, storage means for storing information acquired by the information acquisition means, determination means capable of performing determination based on the information stored in the storage means, and the determination display means for displaying identification information for indicating the determination result by the means; and when identification information for indicating the specific determination result is displayed on the display means, a privilege game that is advantageous to the player can be executed. In a gaming machine having privilege game execution means, identification pattern display means capable of displaying identification patterns corresponding to information stored in said storage means on said display means, and an effect corresponding to setting information. and an effect executing means capable of executing the effect, wherein the effect executing means is configured to be able to execute the effect based on the display of the identification pattern. EH1.

2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a starting hole provided on the game board surface, a lottery is drawn to determine whether the game is successful or not. An advantageous privilege game is executed. A configuration has been proposed in which game-related information such as lottery result information is notified to the player (prior art document: JP-A-2012-217766).

However, there is a problem that the game becomes monotonous and the player becomes bored with the game early.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine that prevents the problem of early boredom with games.

According to the gaming machine EH1, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the problem of early boredom of the game.

<Feature EGEB 1 Group> (Determines the period during which setting suggestion effect is likely to be executed and the period during which it is difficult to execute)
Determination means capable of executing determination, privilege game execution means capable of executing a privilege game when a determination result by the determination means is the specific determination result, and a probability of the specific determination result being a first probability. and a second set value set to a higher probability than the first set value. a set value storage means capable of storing information about the set value set by the set value setting means; and an effect execution means capable of executing an effect based on the information stored in the set value storage means. and a period setting means capable of setting at least a first period during which the performance can be executed by the performance executing means and a second period during which the performance is less likely to be executed than the first period. A game machine EGEB1 characterized by having

Here, in some gaming machines such as a pachinko machine, when the result of a lottery performed based on the winning of a game ball into a start winning opening is a win, the machine shifts to a winning state. Among such gaming machines, there are some that are provided with a plurality of types of winning types with different numbers of rounds, and some that aim to improve interest during winning by varying the game value that can be obtained (for example, , Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent No. 2514417).

However, although the player can be interested in whether or not the winning game is executed, the game content cannot be changed according to the period during which the game is executed, and the game becomes monotonous. There was a problem of getting stuck.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine EGEB1, since the ease of execution of the effect can be varied according to the period set by the period setting means, it is possible to make the player interested in the game period. There is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In the game machine EGEB1, dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying the identification information for indicating the determination result by the determination means and a period during which the identification information is dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means are used. a dynamic display effect executing means capable of executing a predetermined effect; and effect mode determining means capable of determining a mode of effect of the dynamic display effect, wherein the effect executing means is specified by the effect mode determining means. A game machine EGEB2 is characterized in that the production can be executed when a production mode different from the production mode for indicating the determination result of .

According to the game machine EGEB2, in addition to the effects of the game machine EGEB1, when an effect indicating that the determination result of the determination means is not the specific determination result is executed, the effect execution means executes an effect related to the set value. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress a situation in which the player's desire to play is lowered.

<Feature EGEC Group> (determines the content of the effect according to the frequency with which the setting suggestion effect is executed)
Determination means capable of executing determination, privilege game execution means capable of executing a privilege game when a determination result by the determination means is the specific determination result, and a probability of the specific determination result being a first probability. and a second set value set to a higher probability than the first set value. a set value storage means capable of storing information about the set value set by the set value setting means; and an effect execution means capable of executing an effect based on the information stored in the set value storage means. The game machine EGEC1 is characterized in that the game machine is configured to be able to determine the effect mode of the effect based on the execution frequency of the effect by the effect executing means.

Here, in some gaming machines such as a pachinko machine, when the result of a lottery performed based on the winning of a game ball into a start winning opening is a win, the machine shifts to a winning state. Among such gaming machines, there are some that are provided with a plurality of types of winning types with different numbers of rounds, and some that aim to improve interest during winning by varying the game value that can be obtained (for example, , Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent No. 2514417).

However, although the player can be interested in whether or not the winning game is executed, the game content cannot be changed according to the period during which the game is executed, and the game becomes monotonous. There was a problem of getting stuck.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine EGEC1, since the ease of execution of the effect can be varied according to the period set by the period setting means, it is possible to make the player interested in the game period. There is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

According to the gaming machine EGEC1, the effect mode of the effect can be determined based on the execution frequency of the effect related to the set value, so that the player can easily predict the set value based on the effect to be executed. It can be suppressed. On the other hand, even when the performance execution frequency is low, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the player from predicting the set value and lowering the player's desire to play.

In the gaming machine EGEC1, the presentation mode of the presentation executed by the presentation execution means includes a first mode in which the information can be grasped and a second mode in which the information is more difficult to grasp than the first mode. It has an effect mode setting means capable of setting a predetermined mode from among a plurality of modes, and the effect mode setting means sets the number of executions of the effect within a predetermined period to be equal to or greater than the specified number of times when the number of times the effect is executed is less than the specified number of times. The game machine EGEC2 is characterized in that it is easier to set the first mode than in the case of .

According to the game machine EGEC2, in addition to the effects of the game machine EGEC1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when the number of performances executed in a predetermined period is small, it is easy to execute performances in which the set values are easy to understand. There is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine EGEC1 or EGEC2, a first state in which the performance is difficult to be executed, and a first state in which the performance is difficult to be executed by the operation means operable by the player and the performance execution means are different in frequency. and a state setting means capable of setting at least a second state in which the effect is likely to be executed; and selection means capable of selecting the second state.

According to the game machine EGEC3, in addition to the effects of the game machine EGEC1 or EGEC2, it is possible to select the first state or the second state by the selection means. Therefore, the player can select between the game property of predicting the set value by increasing the execution frequency of the effect and the game property of predicting the set value based on the content of the effect. There is an effect that the willingness to participate in the game can be enhanced, and the player's interest in the game can be improved.

<Characteristic EI group>
Information acquiring means capable of acquiring information; storage means for storing the information acquired by the information acquiring means; Identification pattern display means capable of being displayed in the pattern display area, discrimination means capable of performing discrimination based on the information stored in the storage means, and identification information for indicating discrimination results by the discrimination means are moved. display means for dynamically displaying, dynamic display period determination means capable of determining a dynamic display period of the identification information dynamically displayed on the display means, and displaying the specific determination result on the display means and a privilege granting means capable of granting a privilege advantageous to a player when the identification information for indicating is displayed, wherein the identification pattern display means stores the information stored in the storage means. The identification pattern is displayed at a position corresponding to the number of the information stored when the identification information is displayed, and the identification pattern corresponding to the dynamic display of the identification information is not displayed in the identification pattern display area. , the display position of the displayed identification pattern can be updated and displayed, and based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, the mode displayed in one identification pattern is changed to the identification pattern different from that identification pattern. A gaming machine EI1 characterized in that it is configured so that it can be moved and displayed as a form of a pattern.

2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a starting hole provided on the game board surface, a lottery is drawn to determine whether the game is successful or not. An advantageous privilege game is executed. When a game ball enters the starting port and information such as a winning random number is acquired, it is configured so that it can be stored as a reserved ball up to a predetermined number, and a reserved pattern for indicating the stored reserved number is displayed. The game machine is displayed one by one corresponding to the reserved ball, is hidden when the variable display of the special pattern corresponding to the reserved ball is started, and is displayed after updating the order of the displayed reserved patterns. has been proposed (prior art document: JP-A-2012-217766).

However, there is a problem that the performance by the reserved symbols is monotonous and the player gets bored early.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of preventing the player from quickly becoming bored with the game.

According to the gaming machine EI1, by moving and displaying the form of the identification pattern as the form of another identification pattern, the identification information is dynamically displayed and identified even when the dynamic display of the identification information is not started. The display position of the pattern can be made to look like it has been updated, and by diversifying the playability, it is possible to prevent the player from quickly becoming bored with the game.

In the gaming machine EI1, when the identification pattern display means moves and displays the identification pattern, the identification pattern is moved to the identification pattern that is displayed earlier than the identification pattern that is being displayed. The gaming machine EI2 is characterized in that it allows

According to the gaming machine EI2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine EI1, even when the dynamic display of the identification information is not started, the identification information is made to appear to be newly dynamically displayed. There is an effect that the number of times can be made to think more than the actual number.

In the game machine EI1 or EI2, as a dynamic display mode in which the identification information is dynamically displayed, there is a special dynamic display mode in which the identification information is dynamically displayed, temporarily stopped and displayed, and dynamic display is started again. is set, and the predetermined condition can be established in the special dynamic display mode.

According to the game machine EI3, in addition to the effects of the game machine EI1 or EI2, the special dynamic display mode is actually displayed a plurality of times. It has the effect of making it easier to think of.

<Characteristic EJ group>
A process execution means capable of executing a specific process necessary for a game when a specific condition is established, and an audio output means capable of outputting a specific sound when the specific process is executed by the process execution means. and a gaming machine comprising: volume setting means capable of setting a volume output by said audio output means, said audio output means being set by said volume setting means when outputting said specific audio characterized in that it is possible to switch between outputting the specific sound at a set volume and outputting the specific sound at a volume different from the volume. A game machine EJ1.

2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a starting hole provided on the game board surface, a lottery is drawn to determine whether the game is successful or not. An advantageous privilege game is executed. A game machine has been proposed that is ready for a game after an initial process necessary for the game is executed when the power of the game machine is turned on. (Prior art document: JP-A-2012-217766).

However, when the gaming machine is executing specific processing such as initial processing, there is a problem that it is difficult to know what kind of processing is being executed outside.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine in which the processes being executed are easy to understand.

According to the gaming machine EJ1, when a specific process is executed, a specific sound is output to make it easy to understand that the specific process is being executed, and a notification is given at a set volume. Since there are cases where the notification is made with different volume, there is an effect that the notification can be easily noticed.

The game machine EJ2 is characterized in that, in the game machine EJ1, the specific processing is configured to be able to be executed based on an operation from the outside of the game machine.

According to the game machine EJ2, in addition to the effect of the game machine EJ1, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress illegal switching of settings.

The game machine EJ1 or EJ2 has operation means that can be operated by a player, and the game machine is configured to be able to change and set the volume based on the operation of the operation means, and the specific process is executed. The game machine EJ3 is configured to be capable of outputting the specific sound at a newly set volume when the operation means is operated during the period of the gaming machine EJ3.

According to the game machine EJ3, in addition to the effect of the game machine EJ1 or EJ2, there is an effect that even when the specific process is being executed, the volume setting can be easily performed by the operation means.

<Characteristic EK group> (Different setting suggestions are determined according to the start timing of the jackpot game)
Determination means capable of executing determination, bonus game execution means capable of executing a bonus game when the determination result by the determination means is the specific determination result, effect execution means capable of executing a predetermined effect, WHEREIN: It has a specific period setting means which can set a specific period, and the said effect|presentation execution means has a case where the timing at which the said privilege game is performed is the said specific period, and a case where it is not the said specific period. The game machine EK1 is characterized in that it is configured so that the easiness of execution of a predetermined specific effect is different.

Here, in some gaming machines such as a pachinko machine, when the result of a lottery performed based on the winning of a game ball into a start winning opening is a win, the machine shifts to a winning state. Among such gaming machines, there are some that are provided with a plurality of types of winning types with different numbers of rounds, and some that aim to improve interest during winning by varying the game value that can be obtained (for example, , Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent No. 2514417).

However, although the player can be interested in whether or not the winning game is executed, the degree of advantage to the player is constant regardless of when the winning game is executed. However, there is a problem that the player cannot be interested in the execution timing of the winning game, and the game becomes monotonous.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine EK1, since the ease of execution of the specific performance can be varied depending on the timing at which the privilege game is executed, the player is interested in the timing at which the privilege game is executed. There is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine EK1, a plurality of values including at least a first set value in which the probability of obtaining the specific determination result is set to a first probability and a second set value in which the probability is set to be higher than the first probability A setting value setting means capable of setting one setting value out of the setting values, and a setting value storing means capable of storing information about the setting value set by the setting value setting means, and the effect executing means. a gaming machine EK2 characterized in that an effect based on the information stored by the set value storage means can be executed as the specific effect;

According to the gaming machine EK2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine EK1, the performance executing means can execute the performance based on the information about the set value as the specific performance. There is an effect that the interest can be aroused and the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine EK1 or EK2, the effect executing means, of the cases where the timing at which the bonus game is executed is within the specific period, prefers the case where the timing at which the bonus game ends is within the specific period. The game machine EK3 is characterized in that it is easier to execute the specific effect than when it is not within the specific period.

According to the game machine EK3, in addition to the effects of the game machine EK1 or EK2, the easiness of executing the specific performance is varied based on not only the timing when the privilege game is executed but also the timing when the privilege game ends. be able to. Furthermore, when the timing at which the privilege game is executed and the timing at which the privilege game ends are within the specific period, it is possible to make it easier to execute the specific effect. Therefore, it is possible to motivate the player to play the game to finish the privilege game within a specific period, and to improve the player's interest in the game.

<Characteristic EL group>
Information acquisition means capable of acquiring information, storage means for storing information acquired by the information acquisition means, determination means capable of performing determination based on the information stored in the storage means, and the determination display means for displaying identification information for indicating the determination result by the means; and when the identification information for indicating the specific determination result is displayed on the display means, a privilege game that is advantageous to the player can be executed. In a gaming machine having privilege game execution means, a suggestion mode execution means capable of executing a suggestion mode corresponding to a privilege given during the privilege game, and the suggestion mode is executed by the suggestion mode execution means. a giving means capable of giving specific information in a case where the game machine EL1 is a gaming machine EL1.

2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a starting hole provided on the game board surface, a lottery is drawn to determine whether the game is successful or not. An advantageous privilege game is executed. A game machine has been proposed in which a winning game is executed in which a lottery result such as a winning is notified, and in which notification such as a probability variable winning that is advantageous to the player is executed at a specific timing (prior art document: JP-A 2012-217766).

However, there has been a problem that the timing at which the notification is executed tends to be constant, making the game monotonous.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to provide a game machine in which defects are suppressed.

According to the game machine EL1, since the specific information can be notified at the timing when the suggestion mode corresponding to the privilege given during the privilege game is executed, the timing at which the specific information is notified is diversified. It has the effect of being able to

The gaming machine EL1 has privilege amount determination means capable of determining the privilege amount of the privilege to be granted during the privilege game, and provision timing determination means capable of determining the timing at which the predetermined privilege amount is provided. The gaming machine EL2 is characterized in that the granting means can grant the specific information based on the determination result of the privilege amount determination means and the determination result of the grant timing determination means.

According to the gaming machine EL2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine EL1, specific information is provided based on the amount of privilege and the awarding timing, so that the player can be interested in the degree of awarding of the privilege. It has the effect of being able to

The gaming machine EL2 has an advantageous period setting means capable of setting an advantageous period advantageous to the player, and the advantageous period setting means can set a period including at least a period during which the bonus game is executed as the advantageous period. and the privilege amount determining means is capable of determining the privilege amount of the privilege granted during the advantageous period.

According to the gaming machine EL3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine EL2, the specific information is provided based on the privilege amount provided during the advantageous period, so that it is provided to the player during the period other than the privilege game. There is an effect that the privilege can also make the user interested.

<Characteristic EM group>
Determination means capable of performing determination, display means for dynamically displaying identification information for indicating determination results by the determination means, and a dynamic display period for the identification information dynamically displayed on the display means are determined. dynamic display period determination means capable of providing a dynamic display period; and privilege giving means capable of giving a privilege advantageous to a player when identification information for indicating a specific determination result is displayed on the display means. a storage means storing a plurality of dynamic display period groups in which a plurality of different dynamic display periods are set as the dynamic display periods determined by the dynamic display period determination means; In the dynamic period group, a determination probability determined by the dynamic display period determination means for the set dynamic display period is set in advance, and the plurality of dynamic display period groups include: A group of specific dynamic display periods is set in which the probability that the specific dynamic display period is determined is set higher than that of other dynamic display periods, and in a state where a predetermined condition is satisfied, the specific dynamic display period is set. A gaming machine EM1 is characterized by having a specific effect executing means capable of executing a specific effect when a period is determined.

2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a starting hole provided on the game board surface, a lottery is drawn to determine whether the game is successful or not. An advantageous privilege game is executed. A game machine has been proposed in which a winning game is executed in which a lottery result such as a winning is notified, and in which notification such as a probability variable winning that is advantageous to the player is executed at a specific timing (prior art document: JP-A 2012-217766).

However, there is a problem that the game becomes monotonous.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to provide a game machine that prevents the monotony of games.

According to the gaming machine EM1, since the specific effect can be executed when the specific dynamic display period is determined, the player can be notified in an easy-to-understand manner that the dynamic display will be performed during the specific dynamic display period. has the effect of being able to

In the gaming machine EM1, the dynamic display period determining means is configured to be able to determine the dynamic display period from the specific dynamic display period group until an end condition is satisfied. A game machine EM2.

According to the gaming machine EM2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine EM1, the state in which the dynamic display period is determined from the specific dynamic display period group makes it easier for the specific dynamic display period to be continuously executed. There is an effect that the dynamic display period can give freshness to the game.

In the gaming machine EM1 or EM2, when a dynamic display period is determined from the specific dynamic display period group by the dynamic display period determination means, a dynamic display period different from the specific dynamic display period is determined. A gaming machine EM3 characterized in that it has a special effect executing means capable of executing a special effect in the game machine EM3.

<Characteristic EN group>
Information acquiring means capable of acquiring information; storage means for storing the information acquired by the information acquiring means; Identification pattern display means capable of being displayed in the pattern display area, discrimination means capable of performing discrimination based on the information stored in the storage means, and identification information for indicating discrimination results by the discrimination means are moved. display means for dynamically displaying, dynamic display period determination means capable of determining a dynamic display period of the identification information dynamically displayed on the display means, and displaying the specific determination result on the display means and a privilege granting means capable of granting a privilege advantageous to a player when the identification information for indicating is displayed, wherein the identification pattern display means stores the information stored in the storage means. The identification pattern is displayed at a position corresponding to the number of the information stored when the identification information is displayed, and the identification pattern corresponding to the dynamic display of the identification information is not displayed in the identification pattern display area. , the display position of the displayed identification pattern can be updated and displayed, and the gaming machine can change the display mode of the identification pattern based on the establishment of a predetermined condition. A gaming machine EN1 characterized by having mode changing means.

2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a starting hole provided on the game board surface, a lottery is drawn to determine whether the game is successful or not. An advantageous privilege game is executed. When a game ball enters the starting port and information such as a winning random number is acquired, it is configured so that it can be stored as a reserved ball up to a predetermined number, and a reserved pattern for indicating the stored reserved number is displayed. The game machine is displayed one by one corresponding to the reserved ball, is hidden when the variable display of the special pattern corresponding to the reserved ball is started, and is displayed after updating the order of the displayed reserved patterns. has been proposed (prior art document: JP-A-2012-217766).

However, there is a problem that the performance by the reserved symbols is monotonous and the player gets bored early.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of preventing the player from quickly becoming bored with the game.

According to the gaming machine EN1, by moving and displaying the form of the identification pattern as the form of another identification pattern, the identification information is dynamically displayed and the identification pattern is displayed even when the dynamic display of the identification information is not started. It is possible to make the player think that the display position of is updated, and by diversifying the playability, it is possible to suppress the problem that the player gets bored with the game early.

In the gaming machine EN1, when the identification symbol display means moves and displays the identification symbol, the identification symbol is moved to the identification symbol that is displayed earlier than the identification symbol that is being displayed. The game machine EN2 is characterized in that it allows

According to the gaming machine EN2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine EN1, even when the dynamic display of the identification information is not started, the identification information is made to appear to be dynamically displayed anew. There is an effect that the number of times can be made to think more than the actual number.

In the gaming machine EN1 or EN2, as a dynamic display mode in which the identification information is dynamically displayed, there is a special dynamic display mode in which the identification information is temporarily stopped after being dynamically displayed, and dynamic display is started again. is set, and the predetermined condition can be established in the special dynamic display mode.

According to the game machine EN3, in addition to the effects of the game machine EN1 or EN2, the special dynamic display mode is actually displayed a plurality of times, and the mode of the identification symbol moves to the player. It has the effect of making it easier to think of.

<Characteristic EO group> (Different setting suggestions are determined according to the start timing of the jackpot game)
Determination means capable of executing determination, bonus game execution means capable of executing a bonus game when the determination result by the determination means is the specific determination result, effect execution means capable of executing a predetermined effect, WHEREIN: It has a specific period setting means which can set a specific period, and the said effect|presentation execution means has a case where the timing at which the said privilege game is performed is the said specific period, and a case where it is not the said specific period. A game machine EO1 characterized in that the easiness of execution of a predetermined specific effect is different.

Here, in some gaming machines such as a pachinko machine, when the result of a lottery performed based on the winning of a game ball into a start winning opening is a win, the machine shifts to a winning state. Among such gaming machines, there are some that are provided with a plurality of types of winning types with different numbers of rounds, and some that aim to improve interest during winning by varying the game value that can be obtained (for example, , Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent No. 2514417).

However, although the player can be interested in whether or not the winning game is executed, the degree of advantage to the player is constant regardless of when the winning game is executed. However, there is a problem that the player cannot be interested in the execution timing of the winning game, and the game becomes monotonous.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine EK1, since the ease of execution of the specific performance can be varied depending on the timing at which the privilege game is executed, the player is interested in the timing at which the privilege game is executed. There is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine EO1, a plurality of values including at least a first set value in which the probability of obtaining the specific determination result is set to a first probability, and a second set value in which the probability is set to be higher than the first probability. A setting value setting means capable of setting one setting value out of the setting values, and a setting value storing means capable of storing information about the setting value set by the setting value setting means, and the effect executing means. a gaming machine EO2 characterized in that an effect based on the information stored by the set value storage means can be executed as the specific effect.

According to the gaming machine EO2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine EO1, the performance executing means can execute the performance based on the information about the set value as the specific performance. There is an effect that it is possible to arouse the interest of the player and improve the interest in the game of the player.

In the gaming machine EO1 or EO2, the effect executing means, of the cases where the timing at which the privilege game is executed is the specified period, prefers the case where the timing at which the privilege game ends is within the specified period. The game machine EO3 is characterized in that it is easier to execute the specific effect than when it is not within the specific period.

According to the game machine EO3, in addition to the effect of the game machine EO1 or EO2, the easiness of executing the specific performance is varied based on not only the timing when the privilege game is executed but also the timing when the privilege game ends. be able to. Furthermore, when the timing at which the privilege game is executed and the timing at which the privilege game ends are within the specific period, it is possible to make it easier to execute the specific effect. Therefore, it is possible to motivate the player to play the game to finish the privilege game within a specific period, and to improve the player's interest in the game.

<Feature FA group> (After the upper limit of balls, shift to base maintenance mode)
Giving means capable of giving a game medium to a player based on the establishment of a giving condition; Discriminating means capable of executing discrimination based on the establishment of a discrimination condition established by using the game medium; dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying identification information for indicating the determination result by the determination means on a display means; and statically displaying the identification information for indicating the specific determination result on the display means. and a bonus game executing means capable of executing a bonus game in which the granting condition is likely to be satisfied, and when the switching condition is satisfied in the normal game state, the player consumes in the game for a predetermined period. a first game state in which more game media than the game media that can be played are provided by the provision means; It has a game state setting means capable of setting a second game state in which the number of game media can be limited, and the game state setting means has the first game state set and an end condition is established. The second game state can be set until a specific condition is established later, and the specific condition is established after the period during which the second game state is set is equal to or longer than a predetermined period. The game machine FA1 is characterized in that the second game state is set such that the game medium is more likely to be given than in the normal game state.

Conventionally, when a game ball enters a start hole provided on a game board, a lottery is executed, and when the lottery result is a win, a privilege game is executed and the probability of winning the lottery result is high. 2. Description of the Related Art A game machine such as a pachinko machine is known in which a game state changes from one to another. In such a game machine, when the game state shifts to a high probability state in which the probability of winning the lottery result increases, the lottery result becomes a win, and the high probability state is maintained until the next privilege game is executed. is continuously set (for example, Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2010-075741).

In this type of gaming machine, after the game state shifts to a high probability state where the probability of winning the lottery result is high, the lottery result becomes a win and the high probability state is set again continuously. However, there is a risk that an excessive number of game media will be provided due to the privilege game being executed multiple times in a short period of time, and the gambling aspect of the game will become too high. SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of suppressing the gambling aspect of a game.

According to the gaming machine FA1, after the execution of the first game state in which the game medium held by the player is increased, the second game state in which the provision of the game medium is restricted while the game medium is provided more than in the normal game state. Since the game state is set for a period equal to or longer than the predetermined period, the number of game media given to the player per unit time can be suppressed, and excessive game media are continuously given for a long period of time. There is an effect that it is possible to suppress the gambling nature of the game.

In the gaming machine FA1, in the second game state, a small privilege game in which the granting condition is less likely to be satisfied than in the privilege game is set to be executed more easily than in the first game state, and the specific condition is set to the small privilege game. The game machine FA2 is characterized in that it is set so that it can be established when a privilege game is executed a predetermined number of times.

According to the game machine FA2, in addition to the effects of the game machine FA1, the second game state can be continued until the small privilege game is executed a predetermined number of times, so the game medium to be consumed can be replaced by the small privilege game. There is an effect that the game can be played in the second game state for a long time while compensating.

In the game machine FA1 or FA2, the game machine FA3 is characterized in that the end condition is established based on the fact that the privilege game has been executed a predetermined number of times.

According to the game machine FA3, in addition to the effects of the game machine FA1 or FA2, the first game state is continuously set until the privilege game is executed a predetermined number of times, so the game medium provided in the first game state has the effect of stabilizing the

Any one of the game machines FA1 to FA3 has privilege game type determination means capable of determining the privilege game type to be executed by the privilege game execution means, and in the first game state, a set number or more of games are played. A setting is made to enable execution of the privilege game in which the medium can be awarded to the player, and in the second game state, execution of the privilege game in which the set number or more of the game media is awarded is restricted. A game machine FA4 characterized in that it is set to be set.

According to the game machine FA4, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines FA1 to FA3, in the second game state, the execution of privilege games equal to or more than the set number is regulated, so the game provided in the second game state There is an effect that it is possible to suppress the problem that the number of media becomes excessive.

In the game machine FA4, in the special game type executed when the second game state is set, the game medium given in the first game state before the second game state is set and the first 1. A game machine FA5 characterized in that a privilege game capable of maintaining a difference from a game medium consumed in one game state within a predetermined range is executed.

According to the game machine FA5, in addition to the effects of the game machine FA4, in the second game state, it is possible to maintain the game medium increased in the first game state within a predetermined range. There is an effect that the game can be played in the second game state while suppressing the decrease in motivation.

In any one of the gaming machines FA1 to FA5, a first ball entering means capable of entering a game ball as the game medium, a second ball entering means different from the first ball entering means, and the first ball entering means a first state in which a game ball is easier to enter, and variable means capable of changing to a second state in which the game ball is more difficult to enter than in the first state; A first determination can be executed as the determination based on the game ball entering the first ball entering means, and a second determination can be executed as the determination based on the game ball entering the second ball entering means. first identification information for indicating a first identification result by the first identification is dynamically displayed on the display means; and second identification information for indicating a second identification result by the second identification. Information is dynamically displayed on the display means, and when the first game state is set, a dynamic display period shorter than the second identification information as the dynamic display of the first identification information is easily determined, the determination based on the first determination is easily executed, and when the second game state is set, the dynamic display of the second identification information rather than the first identification information The gaming machine FA6 is characterized in that determination based on the second determination is facilitated by facilitating determination of a short dynamic display period.

According to the game machine FA6, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines FA1 to FA5, the dynamic display period is switched and selected according to the game state, so that the first determination and the second determination are switched according to the game state. There is an effect that the privilege game to be executed can be easily controlled.

<Characteristic FB group> (Variable ball output speed)
A granting means capable of granting a game medium to a player based on satisfaction of a granting condition, a first game state, and a second game state in which the granting condition is more likely to be satisfied than the first game state are set. and a possible game state setting means, wherein the game state setting means is capable of setting the second game state when the first game state is set and an end condition is satisfied. The first game state is set as a period in which more game media than the game media that the player can consume per unit time is allowed, and the second game state is: It is possible to prevent the player from being given more game media than the game media can be consumed per unit time, and the number of game media increased by being given in the first game state is reduced. The game machine FB1 is characterized in that it is set as a period in which it is possible to suppress the

Conventionally, when a game ball enters a start hole provided on a game board, a lottery is executed, and when the lottery result is a win, a privilege game is executed and the probability of winning the lottery result is high. 2. Description of the Related Art A game machine such as a pachinko machine is known in which a game state changes from one to another. In such a game machine, when the game state shifts to a high probability state in which the probability of winning the lottery result increases, the lottery result becomes a win, and the high probability state is maintained until the next privilege game is executed. is continuously set (for example, Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2010-075741).

In this type of gaming machine, after the game state shifts to a high probability state where the probability of winning the lottery result is high, the lottery result becomes a win and the high probability state is set again continuously. However, there is a risk that an excessive number of game media will be provided due to the privilege game being executed multiple times in a short period of time, and the gambling aspect of the game will become too high.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of suppressing the gambling aspect of a game.

According to the gaming machine FB1, even after the end of the first game state in which the game media held by the player increases, it is possible to suppress the decrease of the game media while suppressing the further increase of the game media. Since the second game state is set, there is an effect that the gambling aspect of the game can be suppressed.

In the game machine FB1, a determination means capable of performing determination with a predetermined probability based on the satisfaction of a determination condition established by using the game medium, and a display means for displaying identification information for indicating the determination result by the determination means. and a dynamic display period determination means capable of determining a dynamic display period for dynamically displaying the identification information by the dynamic display means, a privilege game executing means capable of executing a privilege game in which the granting condition is likely to be satisfied when the identification information for indicating the specific determination result is stopped and displayed on the display means; The game machine FB2 is characterized in that the display period determining means can easily determine a longer dynamic display period in the second game state than in the first game state.

According to the gaming machine FB2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine FB1, a longer dynamic display period is more likely to be determined in the second gaming state, so there is an effect that the period of the second gaming state can be lengthened. be.

In the gaming machine FB1 or FB2, the dynamic display period determination means determines the period until the identification information is dynamically displayed a predetermined number of times, the specific determination result, when the second game state is determined. A game machine FB3, characterized in that it determines a dynamic display period of the identification information corresponding to .

According to the gaming machine FB3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine FB1 or FB2, the special dynamic display period is determined even when a specific determination result is determined in a short period of time after the second game state is set. Therefore, there is an effect that the minimum period in which the second game state is set can be made a stable period.

In any one of the game machines FB1 to FB3, the dynamic display period determining means determines the dynamic display period of the identification information determined as the specific determination result in the state where the second game state is set. A gaming machine FB4 characterized in that, in the case of doing so, it is possible to set a period corresponding to an elapsed period after the second game state is set.

According to the game machine FB4, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines FB1 to FB3, the period during which the second game state is set can be easily set to a fixed period, so that the game medium application rate can be uniformed. has the effect of being able to

<Characteristic FC group> (Equalization of advantageous state period)
A determination means capable of executing determination, a dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying identification information for indicating a determination result by the determination means on a display means, and a specific determination result displayed on the display means. and a privilege game executing means capable of executing a privilege game when the identification information for the purpose is stopped and displayed, and when a predetermined condition is established after the privilege game is executed special period setting means capable of setting a special period that is advantageous to the player; A gaming machine FC1 characterized by comprising a regulation means for regulating setting and an auxiliary means for making it easier to set a period until a predetermined number of privilege games are executed in the special period to a fixed period. .

Conventionally, a lottery is executed when a game ball enters a starting hole provided on the game board surface, and when the lottery result is a win, a privilege game is executed and a game that is advantageous to the player different from the normal game state. A game machine such as a pachinko machine that shifts to a state is known. In such a game state, a game state in which the probability of winning the lottery result is high, and a game state in which the probability of winning the lottery result of the normal pattern increases and the game ball is likely to enter the start hole are set. It is designed to improve the interest of the game.

In such gaming machines, for example, when the lottery result is a win and the game state shifts to the high probability state, the game state shifts to the normal state when the lottery is executed a predetermined number of times. Further, when the game state is a high-probability state, if the lottery result is a win, there is a case where the game state shifts again to the normal state with a predetermined probability (for example, JP-A-2010-075741).

In this type of gaming machine, when the game state shifts to the high-probability state immediately after the game state shifts to the normal state, the lottery is executed a predetermined number of times, and the game state is changed to the normal state. If the game shifts to a normal state, the period in which it is advantageous to the player ends immediately, and there is a risk that the player will have the impression that fairness is lacking. there were. SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION The present invention has been made to solve the problems exemplified above, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine with improved fairness.

According to the gaming machine FC1, by facilitating the special period to be a fixed period, it is possible to equalize the periods advantageous to the players and to provide games with enhanced fairness.

In the gaming machine FC1 or FC2, when setting of the special period is regulated by the regulating means, it is possible to set a specific period longer than a predetermined period during which the reduction of the privilege given in the special period can be suppressed. A gaming machine FC3 characterized by having a specific period setting means.

According to the game machine FC3, in addition to the effects of the game machine FC1 or FC2, by setting a specific period, the period during which the privilege given in the special period is maintained can be extended, and the interest in the game is improved. It has the effect of being able to

<Characteristic FD group> (limit number of times control)
A determination means capable of executing determination, a dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying identification information for indicating a determination result by the determination means on a display means, and a specific determination result displayed on the display means. and a privilege game executing means capable of executing a privilege game when the identification information for is stopped and displayed, after the privilege game is executed, the first setting and the first setting. a setting means capable of setting at least a second setting different from the second setting; a second releasing means capable of releasing the second setting when the privilege game is executed a second number of times different from the first number of times.

2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, there is a pachinko machine or the like in which a bonus game is executed when the result of a lottery executed based on winning a prize at a starting port is a win, and a game state advantageous to the player is set after the bonus game is finished. Gaming machines are known. In this type of game machine, there is a game machine intended to suppress the gambling nature of the game by setting a limit on the number of times the game state that is advantageous to the player is set in succession (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2010-075741). Gazette).

In this type of gaming machine, when the set content of the number of times that the game state advantageous to the player is continuously set is always the same number of times, the next game state to be set by the player is predicted, and there is a risk of spoiling the interest of the game. SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to provide a game machine capable of improving the enjoyment of a game.

According to the gaming machine FD1, since the first number of times and the second number of times are different, the timing of canceling the first setting and the timing of canceling the second setting can be varied, and the game can be played in various states. There is an effect that it can be executed and the interest in the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine FD1, a game ball can enter a first ball entering means that can enter a game ball, a second ball entering means different from the first ball entering means, and a game ball entering the second ball entering means. It has variable means capable of changing between a first state in which it is easy and a second state in which game ball entry is more difficult than in the first state, wherein the determination means is the first ball entry means. It is possible to execute a first determination based on the game ball entering the second ball entering means, and it is possible to execute a second determination based on the game ball entering the second ball entering means, The gaming machine FD2 is characterized in that the variable means is easily variable to the first state based on execution of the second setting.

According to the game machine FD2, in addition to the effects of the game machine FD1, the second setting makes it easier for the game ball to enter the second ball entry means, thereby diversifying the game and improving the interest of the game. It has the effect of being able to

The gaming machine FD3 is characterized in that, in the gaming machine FD1 or FD2, the first setting is set so that the probability of being determined as a specific determination result is set high.

According to the gaming machine FD3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine FD1 or FD2, the first setting makes it easier to determine the specific determination result, so the effect that the degree of expectation for the privilege game can be increased. There is

<Characteristic FE group> (Left-handed without low-precision sapo, right-handed with high-precision sapo is advantageous)
A shooting means capable of shooting a game ball toward a game area, an adjusting means capable of adjusting the shooting intensity of the game ball shot by the shooting means in accordance with a player's operation, and a first shot by the shooting means. A first area in which a game ball shot with a high intensity can flow down, and a second area in which a game ball shot with a second shot intensity different from the first shot intensity by the shooting means can flow down. a first ball-entering means capable of entering a game ball that has flowed down the first area; a second ball-entering means capable of entering a game ball that has flowed down the second area; and the first ball-entering means. means, or a determination means capable of executing determination when a determination condition is satisfied based on the fact that a game ball has entered the second ball entering means; and a second state that restricts the entry of the game ball into the second ball entry means rather than the first state, and the variable condition is established based on the a variable control means capable of variably controlling the variable means in a predetermined variable pattern; a first game state in which the variable means is easily changed to the first state by the variable control means; In a gaming machine having a second game state that is difficult to change to the first state, and a game state setting means capable of setting a second game state, the game machine is configured such that, while the first game state is set, the second game state is set to the second game state. Shooting the game ball with the shooting intensity of 2 makes it easier to execute the discrimination by the discrimination means than shooting the game ball with the first shooting intensity, and the second game state is set. a first period during which the determination by the determination means is easier to execute when the game ball is shot with the second firing intensity than when the game ball is shot with the first firing intensity; It has a period setting means capable of setting a second period during which the determination by the determining means is easier to execute when the game ball is shot with the shooting intensity than when the game ball is shot with the second shooting intensity. Characteristic game machine FE1.

Conventionally, a game such as a pachinko machine with a playability in which a player aims to enter a game ball into a starting hole provided on the game board surface by adjusting and operating the firing intensity of a shooting device. machine is known. In such a game machine, there is a game machine that selects a game method that facilitates the execution of a lottery by adjusting the firing intensity based on the set game state and switching the starting port for entering the game ball. (For example, JP-A-2010-075741).

In this type of game machine, since the start opening at which the lottery is likely to be executed is determined based on the game state, if the game state does not change, the adjustment of the firing intensity of the shooting device will always be constant, and the game will not be played. There is a risk that the game will become monotonous and that the player will quickly become bored with the game. SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of preventing a player from quickly becoming bored with the game.

According to the game machine FE1, in the first game state, it is easy to distinguish by firing with the second firing intensity, while in the second game state, the easy-to-distinguish game method can be switched depending on the period. Since it is configured so as to be possible, it is possible to switch between a high rate and a low rate at which the degree of advantage can be varied by the player's operation, thereby preventing the player from quickly becoming bored with the game. It has the effect of being able to

In the game machine FE1, a privilege game execution means capable of executing a privilege game advantageous to the player based on the fact that the determination means has determined a specific determination result, and information is updated based on the execution of the privilege game. and updating means capable of updating, wherein the game state setting means is capable of setting the first game state when a specific privilege game is executed, and is based on the specific information. The gaming machine FE2 is characterized in that it is constructed so that the second gaming state can be forcibly set.

According to the gaming machine FE2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine FE1, the second game state is forcibly set by the information updated by the execution of the privilege game, so that the specific privilege game can be played continuously. Even if it is executed, it is possible to shift to the second game state, and there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the problem that the gambling property becomes too high.

In the game machine FE1 or the game machine FE2, dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying identification information for indicating the determination result of the determination means on the display means, and dynamic display by the dynamic display means. dynamic display period determination means capable of determining a dynamic display period, wherein the dynamic display period determination means, when the second game state is set, in the first period, The determination probability of a long dynamic display period as the dynamic display period of the identification information corresponding to the first ball entering means is increased, and in the second period, the ball is entered by the second ball entering means. The game machine FE3 is characterized in that the determination probability of a long dynamic display period is increased as the dynamic display period of the identification information corresponding to the fact that the identification information is displayed.

According to the gaming machine FE3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine FE1 or FE2, the easy-to-discriminate ball-entering means can be changed by varying the dynamic display period. There is an effect that it can be changed.

<Characteristic FF group> (V certain machine, advantageous distribution with special low probability, disadvantageous distribution with special high probability)
Determination means capable of executing determination, privilege game execution means capable of executing a privilege game based on the result of the determination by the determination means being a specific determination result, and the specific determination result as a game state At least a first game state in which a first probability is set as the probability of becoming a specific determination result and a second game state in which a second probability higher than the first probability is set as the probability of the specific determination result can be set. and game state setting means, in the gaming machine having said game state setting means, when a game ball enters a specific area while said privilege game is being executed, after said privilege game is finished A second game state is set, and when the game ball does not enter the specific area, the specific first game state is set after the privilege game is finished, and the gaming machine When the specific determination result is obtained in the first game state, it is easier to give a privilege with a high degree of advantage after the privilege game is completed than when the specific determination result is obtained in the second game state. A gaming machine FF1 characterized by:

2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, there has been known a game machine such as a pachinko machine in which a privilege game is executed and a game state advantageous to a player is set when the result of a lottery executed based on winning a prize at a starting port is a win. ing. In some gaming machines of this type, when a game state is shifted to a game state that is advantageous to the player, the game state is set to be advantageous to the player until the next win is won. -075741).

In this type of gaming machine, if a game state that is advantageous to the player is set, the game becomes monotonous just waiting for the next win, and there is a risk that the player will soon become bored with the game. rice field.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of preventing a player from quickly becoming bored with the game.

According to the gaming machine FF1, it is possible to play a game in which the player determines whether or not to pass the game ball through the specific area, to prevent the game from becoming monotonous, and to prevent the player from getting bored with the game. There is an effect that it is possible to suppress the problem that is caused.

In the gaming machine FF1, a first ball entry means capable of executing a first determination as a determination by the determination means based on the entry of a game ball, and a first determination based on the entry of a game ball A second ball entering means capable of executing a second discrimination as a discrimination by the discriminating means, a first state in which a game ball is likely to enter the first ball entering means, and a ball entering more than the first state. and a variable means capable of changing between a second state in which it is difficult to perform the first determination, and a display means capable of dynamically displaying the first identification information for indicating the first determination result by the first determination. 1 dynamic display means, second dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying on the display means second identification information for indicating a second determination result of the second determination, and the first identification information and dynamic display period determination means capable of determining dynamic display periods of the second identification information and the dynamic display period, wherein the first ball-entering means is a variable first variable associated with the variable means. A ball entering means and a normal first ball entering means not accompanied by the variable means are arranged respectively, and the game ball flows down to the first flow path where the game ball easily enters the variable first ball entering means. a state setting means for setting a permissible state in which it is permitted to play a game with a game ball and a restricted state in which playing a game with a game ball flowing down the first flow path is set; In a first game state, the allowable state is set by the state setting means, and in a first game state other than the specific first game state, the restricted state is set by the state setting means. Game machine FF2 characterized.

According to the gaming machine FF2, when the first game state is set without passing the ball through the specific area, it becomes easier to play the game with the ball entering the first ball entering means, so that the game can be played more advantageously. It has the effect of being able to

In the gaming machine FF1 or FF2, the second game state is either an advantageous second game state in which the privilege possessed by the player increases or a disadvantageous second game state in which the increase in the privilege is suppressed. A game machine FF3 characterized in that one is set.

According to the gaming machine FF3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine FF1 or FF2, the type of the second game state set by the player can be determined to determine whether or not to pass through the specific area. has the effect of being able to diversify

<Characteristic FG group> (maintenance mode improvement control)
Giving means capable of giving a game medium to a player based on the establishment of a giving condition; Discriminating means capable of executing discrimination based on the establishment of a discrimination condition established by using the game medium; dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying identification information for indicating the determination result by the determination means on a display means; and statically displaying the identification information for indicating the specific determination result on the display means. and a bonus game executing means capable of executing a bonus game in which the granting condition is likely to be satisfied, and when the switching condition is satisfied in the normal game state, the player consumes in the game for a predetermined period. a first game state in which more game media than the game media that can be played are provided by the provision means; It has game state setting means capable of setting a second game state in which the number of game media can be limited and in which game media are more likely to be awarded than in the normal game state, wherein the game state setting means After the first game state is set and an end condition is satisfied, the second game state can be set until a specific condition is satisfied, and the specific condition is set after the second game state is set. and the game machine provides a short dynamic display period as a dynamic display period of the identification information after the privilege game is executed in the second game state. A gaming machine FG1 characterized by having dynamic display period determination means capable of facilitating determination of the period.

2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, there has been known a game machine such as a pachinko machine in which a privilege game is executed and a game state advantageous to a player is set when the result of a lottery executed based on winning a prize at a starting port is a win. ing. In some gaming machines of this type, when a game state is shifted to a game state that is advantageous to the player, the game state is set to be advantageous to the player until the next win is won. -075741).

In this type of gaming machine, if a game state that is advantageous to the player is set, the game becomes monotonous just waiting for the next win, and there is a risk that the player will soon become bored with the game. rice field. SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of preventing a player from quickly becoming bored with the game.

According to the gaming machine FG1, even when the second game state in which the provision of game media is restricted is set, the dynamic display period of the identification information is shortened after the privilege game is executed a plurality of times. Execution intervals of the privilege game can be shortened, and there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the player from quickly becoming bored with the game.

The game machine FG1 has counting means capable of counting the number of times the identification information is dynamically displayed even after the privilege game is executed when the second game state is set. The gaming machine FG2 is characterized in that the dynamic display period determining means is configured to be able to determine the dynamic display period based on the count value of the counting means.

According to the game machine FG2, in addition to the effect of the game machine FG1, the dynamic display period is determined by the number of times the identification information is dynamically displayed in the second game state. There is an effect that the dynamic display period can be varied and a stable game can be played.

In the game machine FG1 or FG2, the determination means is configured to be able to determine a special determination result that is easier to determine than the specific determination result, and the game machine outputs a game medium when the special determination result is determined. A game machine FG3 characterized in that it is configured to be able to execute a special game that can obtain

According to the gaming machine FG3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine FG1 or FG2, game media are obtained by executing a special game by determining as a special determination result even if it is not determined as a specific determination result. There is an effect that it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

<Characteristic FH Group> (Set an advantageous state when multiple conditions for shifting to different game states are satisfied at the same time)
In a gaming machine having a determining means capable of executing determination and a privilege game executing means capable of executing a privilege game based on a result of the determination by the determining means being a specific determination result, the privilege game is executed, an updating means capable of updating at least one of the first information and the second information, and the updating means updates the first information or the second information, and after updating, a privilege setting means capable of setting a privilege advantageous to the player when the first information and the second information are in a specific state.

2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, there is a pachinko machine or the like in which a bonus game is executed when the result of a lottery executed based on winning a prize at a starting port is a win, and a game state advantageous to the player is set after the bonus game is finished. Gaming machines are known. In this type of game machine, there is a game machine intended to suppress the gambling nature of the game by setting a limit on the number of times the game state that is advantageous to the player is set in succession (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2010-075741). Gazette).

In this type of gaming machine, when the set content of the number of times that the game state advantageous to the player is continuously set is always the same number of times, the next game state to be set by the player is predicted, and there is a risk of spoiling the interest of the game. SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to provide a game machine capable of improving the enjoyment of a game.

According to the gaming machine FH1, when the first information and the second information are in a specific state, a privilege is given. It is possible to make the player interested in how the is updated, and it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

The game machine FH1 has a game state setting means capable of setting at least a first game state and a second game state more disadvantageous to the player than the first game state as game states, and the game state The setting means can set the second game state when the first information is updated to the specific information by the update means while the first game state is set, and the specific state is: A gaming machine FH2, wherein at least the first information is updated to the specific information.

According to the gaming machine FH2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine FH1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when the condition for setting the second game state that is disadvantageous to the player is satisfied, the privilege can be set. There is an effect that the player can play the game while having a sense of anticipation until the end.

In the gaming machine FH2, the game state setting means can set a third game state that is different from the second game state and is more disadvantageous to the player than the first game state. The state setting means is capable of setting the third game state when the second information is updated to the second specific information by the update means while the first game state is set. The gaming machine FH3 is characterized in that the state is a state in which at least the second information is updated to the second specific information.

According to the gaming machine FH3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine FH2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when the condition for setting the third game state that is disadvantageous to the player is satisfied, the privilege can be set. There is an effect that the player can play the game while having a sense of anticipation until the end. In addition, since it is configured such that a game state disadvantageous to the player is set when each of the plurality of information forming the specific state is updated to the specific information, a privilege is set for the player. It is possible to make the player play a game that is unfavorable to the player while expecting that the game will be played, thereby suppressing the player from getting tired of the game early. be.

In the gaming machine FH2 or FH3, the updating means can update the first information to the specific information by updating the first information from an initial stage to a specific stage, and the number of steps of the specific stage can be set to a plurality of different values. A gaming machine FH4 characterized by having step number setting means capable of setting a value of 1 from among them.

According to the game machine FH4, in addition to the effects of the game machine FH2 or the game machine FH3, the following effects are exhibited. That is, since different values can be set as the number of stages of information update necessary for the first information to be updated to the specific information, the timing when the first information and the second information become the specific state can be set. It can make it difficult for people to predict. Therefore, since it is possible to make it difficult for the player to know in advance whether or not the privilege will be granted, there is an effect that the player can easily play the game while expecting the privilege to be granted.

<Characteristic FI group> (Production according to the remaining number of times up to the probability limit without high accuracy support)
Determination means capable of executing determination, bonus game execution means capable of executing a bonus game when the result of the determination by the determination means is a specific determination result, and the probability of obtaining the specific determination result as a game state. and a second game state in which a second probability lower than the first probability is set as the probability of obtaining the specific determination result. game state setting means, an upper limit determination means capable of determining an upper limit number of times the first game state is set during a specific period; A forced setting means capable of forcibly setting the second game state when the second game state is reached, a remaining number determination means capable of determining the remaining number of times until the upper limit number of times is reached, and a determination result of the remaining number determination means. a game machine FI1 characterized by having an effect executing means capable of executing an effect based on.

2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, there has been known a game machine such as a pachinko machine in which a privilege game is executed and a game state advantageous to a player is set when the result of a lottery executed based on winning a prize at a starting port is a win. ing. In some gaming machines of this type, when a game state is shifted to a game state that is advantageous to the player, the game state is set to be advantageous to the player until the next win is won. -075741).

In this type of gaming machine, if a game state that is advantageous to the player is set, the game becomes monotonous just waiting for the next win, and there is a risk that the player will soon become bored with the game. rice field. SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of preventing a player from quickly becoming bored with the game.

According to the gaming machine FI1, it is possible to make it easier for the player to grasp the remaining number of times until reaching the upper limit number of times by grasping the content of the effect executed by the effect executing means. Therefore, the player can play the game while predicting the contents of the game that can be executed until the upper limit number of times is reached, and it is possible to prevent the player from quickly becoming bored with the game. There is

In the gaming machine FI1, the game state setting means sets the first probability in a state in which the first game state is set, and a third game that is more advantageous to the player than in the first game state. a second upper limit determination means capable of setting a state and capable of determining a second upper limit number of times for which the third game state is set during the specific period; the remaining number determined by the remaining number determination means; A game machine FI2, characterized by comprising an effect mode determination means capable of determining the effect mode of the effect based on the determination result of the second upper limit number of times.

According to the gaming machine FI2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine FI1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, since the effect mode can be determined based on the determination result as to whether or not the third game state can be set for the second upper limit number of times, the player can respond to the effect mode of the effect to be executed. can be of great interest. Therefore, there is an effect that the production effect can be enhanced.

In the game machine FI2, the game machine FI3 is characterized in that the performance mode determining means can determine a specific performance mode when determining that the remaining number of times and the second upper limit number of times are the same.

According to the game machine FI3, in addition to the effects of the game machine FI2, the following effects are produced. That is, when the performance of the specific performance mode is executed, if the first game state is set, the third game state cannot be set for the second upper limit number of times. Since the player can be notified of this, there is an effect that the player can be motivated to play the game while expecting that the third game state will be set.

<Characteristic FJ group> (Determines the production mode during the probability variation based on the probability variation limit remaining number and the time saving limit remaining number)
Determination means capable of executing determination, privilege game execution means capable of executing a privilege game based on the fact that the result of the determination by the determination means is a specific determination result, and effect execution capable of executing an effect and updating means capable of updating first information and second information different from the first information based on the execution of the privilege game, and the updating means. Executed by game state setting means capable of setting one game state out of a plurality of game states based on the update result, and by the effect execution means based on at least one of the first information and the second information. a game machine FJ1 characterized by comprising a performance mode determining means capable of determining a performance mode to be played.

2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, there has been known a game machine such as a pachinko machine in which a privilege game is executed and a game state advantageous to a player is set when the result of a lottery executed based on winning a prize at a starting port is a win. ing. In some gaming machines of this type, when a game state is shifted to a game state that is advantageous to the player, the game state is set to be advantageous to the player until the next win is won. -075741).

In this type of gaming machine, if a game state that is advantageous to the player is set, the game becomes monotonous just waiting for the next win, and there is a risk that the player will soon become bored with the game. rice field.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of preventing a player from quickly becoming bored with the game.

According to the gaming machine FJ1, it is possible for the player to predict the update status by the update means based on the effect mode of the effect executed by the effect execution means. Therefore, since the player can play the game while predicting the game state that can be set next, it is possible to prevent the player from quickly becoming bored with the game.

In the gaming machine FJ1, the game state setting means sets the first game state based on the updating of the first information to the first specific information by the updating means, and the updating means updates the second information. is updated to the second specific information, a second game state that is more disadvantageous to the player than the first game state can be set.

According to the gaming machine FJ2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine FJ1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, since it is possible to change the degree of advantage of the game state set by the game state setting means according to the update contents by the update means, the player receives the first information and the second information updated by the update means. You can get interested in the update content of . Therefore, since it is possible to make the player more interested in the presentation mode of the presentation to be executed, there is an effect that the presentation effect can be enhanced.

In the game machine FJ2, the updating means can update the first information to the first specific information by updating the first information from an initial stage to a specific stage, and the number of steps of the specific stage can be set to a plurality of different values. The game machine FJ3 is characterized by having step number setting means capable of setting a value of 1 from among them.

According to the game machine FJ3, in addition to the effects of the game machine FN2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, since different values can be set as the number of stages of information update necessary for updating the first information to the specific information, the timing at which the first information is updated to the first specific information can be set in the game. It can make it difficult for people to predict. Therefore, since it is possible to make it difficult for the player to know in advance whether or not the privilege will be granted, there is an effect that the player can easily play the game while expecting the privilege to be granted.

<Characteristic FK group> (Limit number update notification control)
Determination means capable of executing determination, privilege game execution means capable of executing a privilege game when the result of the determination by the determination means is a specific determination result, and the privilege game executed by the privilege game execution means a privilege game type determining means for determining any one of a plurality of privilege game categories including at least a first privilege game and a second privilege game different from the first privilege game, A game machine having game state setting means capable of setting at least a first game state and a second game state more disadvantageous to a player than the first game state as game states, wherein the first game state an effect executing means capable of executing an effect for indicating the determination result executed during a game state; an effect mode determining means capable of determining a effect mode of the effect executed by the effect executing means; and updating means capable of updating information based on execution of the privilege game, and when specific information is stored as a game state after execution of the privilege game, the second game state is updated. A gaming machine FK1 characterized in that setting means capable of forcibly setting and said effect mode determining means are capable of determining said effect mode based on said information.

2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, there has been known a game machine such as a pachinko machine in which a privilege game is executed and a game state advantageous to a player is set when the result of a lottery executed based on winning a prize at a starting port is a win. ing. In some gaming machines of this type, when the game state is shifted to a game state that is advantageous to the player, the game state is set to be advantageous to the player until the next win is won (Prior art document: Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-075741).

In this type of gaming machine, if a game state that is advantageous to the player is set, the game becomes monotonous just waiting for the next win, and there is a risk that the player will soon become bored with the game. rice field. SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of preventing a player from quickly becoming bored with the game.

According to the gaming machine FK1, when the first game state is set, the effect mode is determined based on the information updated based on the execution of the first privilege game, and when the specific information is updated, Since the second game state is forcibly set, it is possible to predict whether or not the second game state will be set from the performance mode executed for the player, and the specific information can be updated. By making the player strongly interested in whether or not the first privilege game is determined when a specific determination result is obtained in the state, it is possible to prevent the player from quickly becoming bored with the game. be.

The game machine FK1 has a measuring means for measuring the number of times the first game state is set by the game state setting means after the first bonus game is finished, and the information is the setting measured by the measuring means. The update means is capable of initializing the information updated based on the execution of the first privilege game based on the execution of the second privilege game. Game machine FK2 to play.

According to the gaming machine FK2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine FK1, the information is initialized by executing the second privilege game, so that the execution of the second privilege game updates the specific information. There is an effect that the period until the player can play can be lengthened and the interest of the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine FK1 or FK2, the updating means can update the second information different from the information based on the execution of the second privilege game, and the setting means can update the second information after the execution of the privilege game. When specific second information is stored as the game state, it is possible to forcibly set the second game state, and the effect mode determination means determines the effect based on the second information A game machine FK3 characterized in that it is possible to determine a mode.

According to the game machine FK3, in addition to the effects of the game machine FK1 or FK2, it is possible to predict the period until switching to the second game state by the performance mode, thereby improving the interest of the game.

In any one of the game machines FK1 to FK3, the performance mode determining means selects a special performance mode predetermined as the performance mode based on the predetermined information and the second information being stored. A game machine FK4 characterized in that it is possible to decide.

According to the game machine FK4, in addition to the effects of the game machines FK1 to FK3, the state of the stored information can be determined by executing a special effect, and there is an effect that the interest in the game can be improved.

<Feature FL group> (V certain machine, advantageous distribution with special low probability, disadvantageous distribution with special high probability)
Determination means capable of executing determination, privilege game execution means capable of executing a privilege game based on the fact that the result of the determination by the determination means is a specific determination result, and when the privilege game is executed When a first game state is set based on a specific area where a game ball can enter and the game ball has entered the specific area, and the game ball has not entered the specific area. (2) game state setting means capable of setting a second game state different from the first game state; effect execution means capable of executing a effect during the period when the privilege game is being executed; and execution of the effect. A performance capable of determining a performance mode from a plurality of performance modes including at least a suggestive performance mode capable of suggesting that a game ball enters the specific area as a performance mode of the performance executed by means. and a mode determining means, wherein a first setting for executing the suggestive performance mode during a period in which a game ball can be entered into the specific area; and a performance mode different from the suggestive performance mode. A gaming machine FL1 characterized by having a setting means capable of setting either the second setting to be executed based on specific information.

2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, there has been known a game machine such as a pachinko machine in which a privilege game is executed and a game state advantageous to a player is set when the result of a lottery executed based on winning a prize at a starting port is a win. ing. In some gaming machines of this type, when a game state is shifted to a game state that is advantageous to the player, the game state is set to be advantageous to the player until the next win is won. -075741).

In this type of gaming machine, if a game state that is advantageous to the player is set, the game becomes monotonous just waiting for the next win, and there is a risk that the player will soon become bored with the game. rice field. SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of preventing a player from quickly becoming bored with the game.

According to the gaming machine FL1, whether or not to execute the suggestive effect mode as the effect mode of the effect executed during the period in which the game ball can enter the specific area is determined according to the setting contents by the setting means. Therefore, it is possible to vary the ease with which the game ball enters the specific area during the privilege game according to the effect mode to be executed. Therefore, when the same privilege game is executed, the type of game state to be set can be easily changed, so that there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the player from quickly becoming bored with the game. .

In the gaming machine FL1, as the privilege game types executed by the privilege game execution means, from among a plurality of privilege game categories including at least a first privilege game and a second privilege game more advantageous than the first privilege game. It has privilege game type determination means for determining one of the privilege game types, and in the first game state, the privilege game is more likely to be executed than in the second game state, and the privilege game type determination means determines the first game type. A game machine FL2 is characterized in that a privilege game is easily determined.

According to the gaming machine FL2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine FL1, the type of privilege game to be executed can be changed according to the game state, so that the interest of the game can be changed according to the type of the game state. has the effect of

In the gaming machine FL1 or FL2, the game state setting means sets the game state from the first game state and the second game state based on the game ball entering the specific area during execution of the second privilege game. A game machine FL3 characterized by being able to set a third game state that is more advantageous.

According to the gaming machine FL3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine FL1 or FL2, the third game state is set by the game ball entering the specific area, so the game is played with the expectation of the ball entering the specific area. There is an effect that the amusement of the game can be improved by causing the game to be performed.

any one of the gaming machines FL1 to FL3 has measuring means for measuring the number of times the first game state and the third game state are set by the game state setting means, wherein the game state setting means is A game machine FL4, wherein the second game state can be forcibly set based on the fact that the set number of times measured by the measuring means reaches a predetermined specific set number of times.

According to the game machine FL4, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines FL1 to FL3, the second game state can be forcibly set, so there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the problem that the gambling nature becomes too high.

In any one of the game machines FL2 to FL4, the game machine FL5 is characterized in that the setting means easily sets the first setting during execution of the second privilege game.

According to the gaming machine FL5, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines FL2 to FL4, expectations for execution of the second privilege game can be heightened, and there is an effect that the amusement of the game can be improved.

In the game machine FL4 or FL5, the game machine FL6 is characterized in that the setting means makes it easy to set the second setting when the number of times of setting measured by the measuring means is a predetermined number of times of setting.

According to the gaming machine FL6, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine FL4 or FL5, the second setting is likely to be set when the predetermined set number of times is reached. There is an effect that interest can be improved.

<Characteristic FM group>
A determination means capable of executing determination, a dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying identification information for indicating a determination result by the determination means on a display means, and a specific determination result displayed on the display means. and a privilege game executing means capable of executing a privilege game when the identification information for is stopped and displayed, after the privilege game is executed, the first setting and the first setting. a setting means capable of setting at least a second setting different from the first setting; a first canceling means for canceling the first setting based on the establishment of a first condition when the first setting is set; a second canceling means for canceling the second setting based on the establishment of the two conditions when the second setting is set.

2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, there is a pachinko machine or the like in which a bonus game is executed when the result of a lottery executed based on winning a prize at a starting port is a win, and a game state advantageous to the player is set after the bonus game is finished. Gaming machines are known. Among gaming machines of this type, there has been proposed a gaming machine in which game states that are advantageous to the player are continuously set (prior art document: JP-A-2010-075741).

In this type of game machine, there is a problem that the release condition of the setting is constant, and the interest in the game is reduced. SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to provide a game machine capable of improving the enjoyment of a game.

According to the game machine FM1, since the first setting and the second setting are released independently, the situations set in the game can be diversified, and the interest in the game can be improved.

<Characteristic FN group>
Giving means capable of giving a game medium to a player based on the establishment of a giving condition; Discriminating means capable of executing discrimination based on the establishment of a discrimination condition established by using the game medium; dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying identification information for indicating the determination result by the determination means on a display means; and statically displaying the identification information for indicating the specific determination result on the display means. and a privilege game executing means capable of executing a privilege game in which the granting condition is likely to be satisfied, in the case where the switching condition is satisfied in the normal game state, the first setting and the first setting. has a setting means capable of setting one of a different second setting, and the setting means sets the second setting until a specific condition is satisfied after the first setting is set and an end condition is satisfied. A gaming machine FN1 characterized in that it is configured to be able to

2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, there has been known a game machine such as a pachinko machine in which a privilege game is executed and a game state advantageous to a player is set when the result of a lottery executed based on winning a prize at a starting port is a win. ing. In some gaming machines of this type, when the game state shifts to a game state that is advantageous to the player, the game state or the like is set to be advantageous to the player until the next win is won (prior art document: Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2010-075741).

In this type of gaming machine, there is a risk that the player will quickly become bored with the game due to the termination of an advantageous game state or the like. SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of preventing a player from quickly becoming bored with the game.

According to the gaming machine FN1, the second setting is performed even after the setting of the first setting is completed, so that the game can be varied and the problem of early boredom can be suppressed.

<Characteristic FO group>
A gaming machine having a determining means capable of executing determination and a privilege game executing means capable of executing a privilege game based on the result of the determination by the determining means being a specific determination result, wherein the privilege game is executed, an updating means capable of updating at least one of the first information and the second information, and the updating means updates the first information or the second information, and after updating, A game machine FO1 characterized by comprising specific effect execution means capable of executing a specific effect when the first information and the second information are in a specific state.

2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, there is a pachinko machine or the like in which a bonus game is executed when the result of a lottery executed based on winning a prize at a starting port is a win, and a game state advantageous to the player is set after the bonus game is finished. Gaming machines are known. In this type of game machine, there is a game machine intended to suppress the gambling nature of the game by setting a limit on the number of times the game state that is advantageous to the player is set in succession (prior art document: JP-A-2010-2010). 075741).

In this type of gaming machine, when the set content of the number of times that the game state advantageous to the player is continuously set is always the same number of times, the next game state to be set by the player is predicted, and there is a risk of spoiling the interest of the game.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to provide a game machine capable of improving the enjoyment of a game.

According to the game machine FO1, when the first information and the second information are in the specific state, the specific effect is executed. can be performed, and there is an effect that the amusement of the game can be improved.

<Characteristic FP group>
discrimination means capable of executing discrimination; dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying identification information for indicating the result of the discrimination executed by the discrimination means; A dynamic display period determining means capable of determining a dynamic display period of identification information, and a privilege when the identification information dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means is stopped and displayed in a display mode indicating a specific determination result. and privilege game execution means capable of executing a game, the gaming machine having update means capable of updating information based on the performance of the privilege game within a specific period, wherein the gaming machine comprises: The game machine FP1 is characterized in that it is possible to execute a specific effect based on the fact that the information updated by the updating means is the specific information.

Conventionally, when a game ball enters a start hole provided on a game board, a lottery is executed, and when the lottery result is a win, a privilege game is executed and the probability of winning the lottery result is high. 2. Description of the Related Art A game machine such as a pachinko machine is known in which a game state changes from one to another. Among such gaming machines, when the game state shifts to a high-probability state in which the probability of winning the lottery result increases, the lottery result becomes a win and a special game is executed ( Prior art document: JP-A-2010-075741).

In this type of gaming machine, there is a risk that the game will become monotonous due to the repeated execution of the privilege game.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of preventing games from becoming monotonous.

According to the game machine FP1, when the privilege game is executed and the specific information is updated, the specific performance is executed, so that not only the privilege game is monotonously and repeatedly executed, but also the updated information is made aware of the game. can be performed, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the game from becoming monotonous.

<Characteristic FQ group>
Determination means capable of executing determination, privilege game execution means capable of executing a privilege game based on the fact that the result of the determination by the determination means is a specific determination result, and when the privilege game is executed When a first game state is set based on a specific area where a game ball can enter and the game ball has entered the specific area, and the game ball has not entered the specific area. and game state setting means capable of setting a second game state different from the first game state, wherein the game ball does not enter the specific area in the first state. When the game ball does not enter the specific area in a second state different from the first state, a second specific effect different from the first effect and advantageous to the player is executed. and a specific performance executing means capable of executing a game machine FQ1.

2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, there has been known a game machine such as a pachinko machine in which a privilege game is executed and a game state advantageous to a player is set when the result of a lottery executed based on winning a prize at a starting port is a win. ing. In some gaming machines of this type, when the game state is shifted to a game state that is advantageous to the player, the game state is set to be advantageous to the player until the next win is won (Prior art document: Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-075741).

In this type of gaming machine, if a game state that is advantageous to the player is set, the game becomes monotonous just waiting for the next win, and there is a risk that the player will soon become bored with the game. rice field.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of preventing a player from quickly becoming bored with the game.

According to the gaming machine FQ1, even if the game ball does not enter the specific area, the second specific effect that is advantageous to the player is executed depending on the state type, so the player is set. There is an effect that it is possible to determine whether or not to pass the game ball to the specific area while being conscious of the state, and it is possible to suppress early boredom with the game.

<Characteristic FR group> (Slow down with the number of consecutive chans)
discrimination means capable of executing discrimination; dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying identification information for indicating the result of the discrimination executed by the discrimination means; A dynamic display period determining means capable of determining a dynamic display period of identification information, and a privilege when the identification information dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means is stopped and displayed in a display mode indicating a specific determination result. and privilege game execution means capable of executing a game, the gaming machine having update means capable of updating information based on the performance of the privilege game within a specific period, and determining the dynamic display period. The gaming machine FR1, wherein the means can determine the dynamic display period based on the information.

Conventionally, when a game ball enters a start hole provided on a game board, a lottery is executed, and when the lottery result is a win, a privilege game is executed and the probability of winning the lottery result is high. 2. Description of the Related Art A game machine such as a pachinko machine is known in which a game state changes from one to another. In such a game machine, when the game state shifts to a high probability state in which the probability of winning the lottery result increases, the lottery result becomes a win, and the high probability state is maintained until the next privilege game is executed. is continuously set (for example, Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2010-075741).

In this type of gaming machine, after the game state shifts to a high probability state where the probability of winning the lottery result is high, the lottery result becomes a win and the high probability state is set again continuously. However, there is a risk that an excessive number of game media will be provided due to the privilege game being executed multiple times in a short period of time, and the gambling aspect of the game will become too high. SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of suppressing the gambling aspect of a game.

According to the gaming machine FR1, it is possible to change the dynamic display period according to the information updated based on the execution of the privilege game within the specific period. be able to. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the privilege game from being excessively executed within the specific period, and it is possible to suppress the gambling aspect of the game.

In the gaming machine FR1, the dynamic display period determining means determines a longer period as the dynamic display period when the number of times the information is updated within the specific period is greater than when the number of times the information is updated is less. A game machine FR2 characterized in that it is possible to make it easier.

According to the game machine FR2, in addition to the effects of the game machine FR1, the following effects are produced. That is, the longer the dynamic display period is set, the more privilege games are executed within the specific period. There is an effect that it can suppress the gambling of people.

In the gaming machine FR2, as the game state, one game state can be set from a plurality of game states including at least a first game state and a second game state different from the first game state. means, wherein the dynamic display period determination means can determine the dynamic display period corresponding to the game state set by the game state setting means; The game machine FR3 is characterized in that it is possible to shift the set game state from the first game state to the second game state based on the information updated by the update means.

According to the game machine FR3, in addition to the effects of the game machine FR2, the following effects are produced. That is, it is possible to shift the game state based on the information updated by the updating means, and determine the dynamic display period corresponding to the game state after the shift. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to reliably set a state in which a long dynamic display period is likely to be determined within a specific period.

In the gaming machine FR3, the dynamic display period determining means is more likely to determine a longer dynamic display period when the second game state is set than when the first game state is set. and the specific period continues at least until the second game state is set.

According to the game machine FR4, in addition to the effects of the game machine FJ3, the following effects are exhibited. That is, at least the specific period can be continued until the second game state in which a long dynamic display period is likely to be determined is set. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the game from being executed for a long time without setting a game state in which a long dynamic display period is likely to be determined.

<Feature FS group> (Provide hits where end condition elements are updated and hits where they are not updated)
Determination means capable of executing determination, privilege game execution means capable of executing a privilege game when the result of the determination by the determination means is a specific determination result, and the privilege game executed by the privilege game execution means a privilege game type determining means for determining any one of a plurality of privilege game categories including at least a first privilege game and a second privilege game different from the first privilege game, A game machine having game state setting means capable of setting at least a first game state and a second game state more disadvantageous to a player than the first game state as game states, wherein the first game state and updating means capable of updating information based on execution of the privilege game, and when the information updated by the updating means becomes specific information as a game state after the execution of the privilege game. , and setting means capable of forcibly setting the second game state.

2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, there is a pachinko machine or the like in which a bonus game is executed when the result of a lottery executed based on winning a prize at a starting port is a win, and a game state advantageous to the player is set after the bonus game is finished. Gaming machines are known. In this type of game machine, there is a game machine intended to suppress the gambling nature of the game by setting a limit on the number of times the game state that is advantageous to the player is set in succession (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2010-075741). Gazette).

In this type of gaming machine, when the set content of the number of times that the game state advantageous to the player is continuously set is always the same number of times, the next game state to be set by the player is predicted, and there is a risk of spoiling the interest of the game. SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to provide a game machine capable of improving the enjoyment of a game.

According to the gaming machine FS1, the information is updated when the first privilege game is determined by the privilege game type determination means, and the second game state is forcibly set when the updated information becomes the specific information. Therefore, the number of times the privilege game is executed until the second game state is forcibly set can be varied according to the privilege game category determined by the privilege game category determination means. Therefore, compared to conventional gaming machines in which the second game state is forcibly set based on the number of times the privilege game is executed, the player is expected not to be forced to set the second game state. The effect is that the game can be played while the player is playing, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine FS1, when the second privilege game is determined by the privilege game type determination means, the update means can perform a special update that makes it difficult for the information to be updated to the specific information. A gaming machine FS2 characterized by having:

According to the game machine FS2, in addition to the effects of the game machine FS1, the following effects are produced. That is, by executing the second privilege game, it becomes possible to make it difficult for the information to be updated to the specific information by the special updating means. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can enthusiastically play the game while expecting that the type of privilege game that can extend the period until the second game state is forcibly set is determined. be.

In the gaming machine FS2, the updating means can update the information to the specific information by updating the information from the initial stage to the specific stage, and the special updating means can update the information to the initial stage. A gaming machine FS3 characterized by:

According to the gaming machine FS3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine FS2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when the second privilege game is executed in a state in which the information is updated by a predetermined stage from the initial stage based on the execution of the first privilege game, the information updated by the predetermined stage is transferred to the second privilege game. It is possible to update to the initial stage by the updating means. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can be interested in the timing at which the second privilege game is executed.

The gaming machine FS1 has second updating means capable of updating second information different from the information based on the execution of the second privilege game, and the game state after the execution of the privilege game is the above-mentioned The game machine further comprises second setting means capable of forcibly setting the second game state when the second information updated by the second updating means becomes the specific second information. Gaming machine FS5.

According to the gaming machine FS5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine FS1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, since the second game state can also be forcibly set by the second setting means, the first privilege game and the second privilege game can be executed without imbalance for the player. There is an effect that the game can be played while expecting the

In any one of the gaming machines FS1 to FS5, the privilege game executing means can execute the privilege game of the same content when the first privilege game is determined and when the second privilege game is determined. A gaming machine FS6 characterized by:

According to the gaming machine FS6, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines FS1 to FS5, the following effects are exhibited. That is, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to grasp which type of privilege game is determined from the content of the privilege game executed by the privilege game executing means. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to provide the player with the pleasure of predicting the type of privilege game.

<Characteristic FT group> (Probability regulation according to time saving limit)
Determination means capable of executing determination, bonus game execution means capable of executing a bonus game when the result of the determination by the determination means is a specific determination result, a first game state, and the first game state a game state setting means capable of setting at least a second game state that is more disadvantageous than the second game state, the updating means capable of updating information based on the execution of the privilege game; setting means capable of forcibly setting the second game state as a game state after execution of a privilege game when it is determined that the information is specific information; and variable means capable of varying a period until the information determined as the specific information is updated.

2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, there is a pachinko machine or the like in which a bonus game is executed when the result of a lottery executed based on winning a prize at a starting port is a win, and a game state advantageous to the player is set after the bonus game is finished. Gaming machines are known. In this type of game machine, there is a game machine intended to suppress the gambling nature of the game by setting a limit on the number of times the game state that is advantageous to the player is set in succession (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2010-075741). Gazette).

In this type of gaming machine, when the set content of the number of times that the game state advantageous to the player is continuously set is always the same number of times, the next game state to be set by the player is predicted, and there is a risk of spoiling the interest of the game. SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to provide a game machine capable of improving the enjoyment of a game.

According to the gaming machine FT1, in the state where the first game state is set, the length of the period until the second game state is forcibly set by the setting means can be varied by the variable means. Therefore, since it is possible to make it difficult for the player to predict the period during which the first game state continues, the player can be motivated to play the game while expecting the first game state to continue for a long time. There is an effect that it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

In the gaming machine FT1, the game state setting means can set a third game state that is more disadvantageous than the second game state, and the information updated by the update means is specific second information. It has a second setting means capable of forcibly setting the third gaming state when it is determined, and the updating means updates the information to the specific second information rather than updating the information to the specific second information. A gaming machine FT2 characterized in that it can be updated to the specific information before.

According to the game machine FT2, in addition to the effects of the game machine FT1, the following effects are produced. That is, since the upper limit of the period during which the first game state continues can be set by the second setting means, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the execution of a game that is excessively advantageous to the player. .

In the game machine FT2, when the second game state is forcibly set by the setting means, the third game state is forcibly set regardless of the content of the information updated by the update means. A game machine FT3 characterized by having a third setting means capable of executing a setting process for.

According to the game machine FT3, in addition to the effects of the game machine FT2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when the first game state advantageous to the player ends, the third game state can be forcibly set, so the second game state disadvantageous to the player continues unnecessarily long. There is an effect that it is possible to suppress the player's desire to play.

<Characteristic FU group> (Unfavorable state setting using multiple wins)
Determination means capable of executing determination, privilege game execution means capable of executing a privilege game when the result of the determination by the determination means is a specific determination result, a first game state as a game state, and a second game state. A game machine having a game state setting means capable of setting at least a second game state more disadvantageous to a player than the first game state and a third game state more disadvantageous than the second game state. a first setting means capable of setting the second game state as a game state after the privilege game by executing the privilege game when the first game state is set; and a second setting means capable of setting a third game state as a game state after the privilege game by executing the privilege game when the second game state is set. A game machine FU1 characterized by.

2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, there is a pachinko machine or the like in which a bonus game is executed when the result of a lottery executed based on winning a prize at a starting port is a win, and a game state advantageous to the player is set after the bonus game is finished. Gaming machines are known. In this type of game machine, there is a game machine intended to suppress the gambling nature of the game by setting a limit on the number of times the game state that is advantageous to the player is set in succession (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2010-075741). Gazette).

In this type of gaming machine, when the set content of the number of times that the game state advantageous to the player is continuously set is always the same number of times, the next game state to be set by the player is predicted, and there is a risk of spoiling the interest of the game. SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to provide a game machine capable of improving the enjoyment of a game.

According to the gaming machine FU1, the game state can be shifted step by step from the first game state to the third game state using a plurality of privilege games, so that a disadvantageous game state is suddenly set. , there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the player's desire to play from declining, and to improve the interest in the game.

The game machine FU1 is characterized in that the game machine is configured not to set the third game state after the privilege game executed when the first game state is set. Game machine FU2.

According to the game machine FU2, in addition to the effects of the game machine FU1, the following effects are achieved. Since the third game state is not set by one privilege game executed when the first game state is set, the game state is shifted step by step to a game state disadvantageous to the player. It is possible to reliably execute the settings that cause Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to further suppress the decrease in the player's willingness to play due to the sudden setting of an unfavorable game state.

The game machine FU1 or FU2 has an execution number measuring means capable of measuring the number of times the privilege game is executed during a specific period after the first game state is set, and the first setting means The second game state is set based on the fact that the first number of times is measured by the number-of-times measuring means, and the second setting means sets a second game state larger than the first number of times by the number-of-execution measuring means. The gaming machine FU3 is characterized in that the third gaming state is set based on the counting of the number of times.

According to the gaming machine FU3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine FU1 or FU2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, since the game states can be set in the order of the second game state and the third game state based on the number of times the privilege game is executed after the first game state is set, the first game state to the third game state can be set. A transition process to a game state can be defined in advance. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress an excessively long transition period for shifting the game state from the first game state to the third game state.

The gaming machine FU3 is characterized in that it has a first count determination means capable of determining the number of times to be 1 out of different counts as the first count.

According to the gaming machine FU4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine FU3, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the length of the period during which the first game state continues can be varied according to the number of times determined by the first number-of-times determining means. Therefore, it is possible to allow the player to play the game while expecting the first game state to continue for a long period of time, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

The gaming machine FU4 is characterized in that the gaming machine is configured such that the difference between the first number of times and the second number of times is always constant regardless of the first number of times. Game machine FU5.

According to the gaming machine FU5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine FU4, the following effects are exhibited. That is, there is an effect that the length of the period in which the second game state continues can be made constant regardless of the period in which the first game state continues.

<Characteristic GA group> (Set the data specified in the table using the label)
Control means for controlling a game according to a predetermined control procedure, storage means for storing a plurality of information groups constituted by one or more information for the control means to perform control, and from the storage means, the control information group selection means for selecting one of the information groups to be used for control by means; and head position specifying means for indicating the head position of a predetermined information group among storage areas storing the plurality of information groups. A game machine GA1, wherein said information group selection means selects said one information group based on the leading position indicated by said leading position designating means.

According to the gaming machine GA1, a plurality of information groups composed of one or more information for the control means to perform control are stored in the storage means, and one information group used for control by the control means is stored from the storage means. , is selected by the information group selection means. Among storage areas storing a plurality of information groups, the head position of a predetermined information group is indicated by the head position designating means, and based on the head position indicated by the head position designating means, the information group selecting means One information group is selected.

As a result, it is only necessary to read the head position of a predetermined information group in the control process for designating one information group, and there is no need to write the information constituting the information group individually in the program. Therefore, when diverting a program to another model, it is not necessary to rewrite a large amount of information on the program, so it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a value rewriting error. Therefore, there is an effect that malfunction of the gaming machine can be suppressed.

In the game machine GA1, among the plurality of information groups stored in the storage means, the leading position of the information group stored next to the predetermined information group whose leading position is indicated by the leading position designating means is determined. the head position of the predetermined information group indicated by the head position designating means; and the head position of the information group stored next to the predetermined information group indicated by the designation means. information number calculation means for calculating the number of pieces of information constituting the information group, and the information group selection means selects the head position specified by the head position designation means and the information calculated by the information number calculation means A gaming machine GA2 characterized in that one of the information groups is selected from the number of .

According to the game machine GA2, in addition to the effects of the game machine GA1, the following effects are produced. That is, among the plurality of information groups stored in the storage means, the designation means indicates the head position of the information group stored next to the predetermined information group whose head position is indicated by the head position designation means. Based on the head position of the predetermined information group indicated by the head position designating means and the head position of the information group stored next to the predetermined information group indicated by the designating means, the information number calculating means selects the predetermined information group. The number of pieces of information to constitute is calculated. One information group is selected by the information group selection means from the head position designated by the head position designation means and the number of information calculated by the information number calculation means.

This eliminates the need to numerically specify the number of pieces of information that make up the information group in the program. It is possible to omit the step of rewriting the number in the process using the number. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the game machine from malfunctioning due to correction mistakes made by the creator of the program.

In the game machine GA2, the storage means is composed of a plurality of addresses capable of storing information, and each of the information constituting the plurality of information groups is stored one by one in the plurality of addresses. A gaming machine GA3 characterized in that it has a

According to the game machine GA3, in addition to the effects of the game machine GA2, the following effects are produced. That is, the storage means is composed of a plurality of addresses capable of storing information. Each information constituting a plurality of information groups is stored one by one at the plurality of addresses.

As a result, the number of addresses in which information is stored matches the number of information that constitutes the information group. has the effect of being able to calculate

In the gaming machine GA3, identification data for identifying the information group is associated with the leading address of the plurality of addresses storing the plurality of information groups, and the leading position is A gaming machine GA4, characterized in that designating means and said designating means designate a top address of said information group based on said identification data.

According to the game machine GA4, in addition to the effects of the game machine GA3, the following effects are produced. Namely, identification data for identifying the information group is associated with the leading address of a plurality of addresses storing a plurality of information groups, and based on the identification data, the leading position specifying means, and the specifying means specifies the top address of the information group.

As a result, the head position specifying means and the specifying means do not need to specify the head position by the address itself. , there is no need to rewrite the head position in the control processing program for reading out each information group. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the game machine from malfunctioning due to program rewriting errors.

In any one of the game machines GA1 to GA4, acquisition means for acquiring random information; comparison means for comparing the random information acquired by the acquisition means with the information group selected by the information group selection means; The gaming machine GA5 is characterized by comprising privilege game imparting means for determining whether or not to impart a privilege game advantageous to the player based on the result of comparison by the comparison means.

According to the gaming machine GA5, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines GA1 to GA4, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the random information acquired by the acquisition means and the information group selected by the information group selection means are compared by the comparison means, and a privilege game advantageous to the player is awarded based on the comparison result of the comparison means. Whether or not to play is determined by the privilege game providing means.

As a result, it is possible to randomly determine whether or not to award a privilege game, so there is an effect that the player can feel a sense of fairness.

In the gaming machine GA5, the comparison means compares the information constituting the information group selected by the information group selection means with the random information in the order of the addresses in which the information is stored. Characteristic game machine GA6.

According to the game machine GA6, in addition to the effects of the game machine GA5, the information constituting the information group selected by the information group selection means is randomized in the order of the addresses in which the information is stored by the comparison means. Since it is compared, the information to be compared with the random information next can be identified by a simple process. Therefore, there is an effect that the processing load at the time of comparison by the comparing means can be reduced.

In the game machine GA6, the comparison means compares the random information acquired by the acquisition means by the number of times corresponding to the number of information calculated by the information number calculation means with the information selected by the information group selection means. A gaming machine GA7 characterized in that it compares with each piece of information that constitutes a group.

According to the game machine GA7, in addition to the effects of the game machine GA6, the random information acquired by the acquisition means the number of times corresponding to the number of information calculated by the information number calculation means and the information group selection means select Since comparison with each information constituting the information group is performed by the comparison means, there is no need to perform processing for separately determining the number of times of comparison. Therefore, there is an effect that the processing load at the time of comparison by the comparing means can be reduced.

In any one of the gaming machines GA5 to GA7, when the privilege game imparting means decides to impart the privilege game, the random information acquired by the acquisition means is erased before imparting the privilege game. A gaming machine GA8 characterized by comprising erasing means for

According to the gaming machine GA8, in addition to the effect produced by any one of the gaming machines GA5 to GA7, when the privilege game imparting means determines to impart the privilege game, the erasing means acquires the privilege game before imparting the privilege game Since the random information acquired by the means is erased, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the lottery result corresponding to the provision of the privilege game from being fraudulently acquired from the outside.

<Characteristic GB group> (calculate the number of data using the label)
Control means for controlling a game according to a predetermined control procedure, storage means for storing a plurality of information, and a part of the storage means, which is composed of a plurality of information used for control by the control means. and information group selection means for selecting one of the information groups to be used for control by the control means from the storage area storing a plurality of information groups, wherein all the information groups have the same specific number. and in the storage area, each information constituting the plurality of information groups is stored in order without empty addresses in the plurality of addresses associated with the storage area. wherein the information group selection means selects the information group based on the leading address of the predetermined information group stored in the storage area and the specific number of the information groups. Gaming machine GB1.

According to the gaming machine GB1, a game is controlled by the control means according to a predetermined control procedure. A plurality of pieces of information are stored by a storage means, and a plurality of information groups each composed of a plurality of pieces of information used for control by the control means are stored in a storage area which is a part of the storage means. One information group used for control by the control means is selected from the storage area by the information group selection means. All information groups are composed of the same number of specific pieces of information. In the storage area, each piece of information forming a plurality of information groups is stored in order without any vacant addresses in a plurality of addresses associated with the storage area. An information group is selected by the information group selection means based on the leading address of the predetermined information group stored in the storage area and the specific number.

As a result, the information group can be specified only by specifying the head address of the predetermined information group and the specific number, so it is not necessary to define the head position of each information group on the program. do not have. Therefore, when diverting the program to other models, it is not necessary to rewrite many values such as the head position of each information group on the program, so it is possible to suppress the occurrence of value rewriting errors. Therefore, there is an effect that malfunction of the gaming machine can be suppressed.

In the gaming machine GB1, address specifying means for indicating a head address of an information group stored next to the predetermined information group among the plurality of information groups sequentially stored in the storage area; A game machine GB2, further comprising specific number calculation means for calculating the specific number from the leading address of the information group and the address indicated by the address designation means.

According to the gaming machine GB2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine GB1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the address designating means indicates the top address of the information group stored next to the predetermined information group among the plurality of information groups sequentially stored in the storage area. A specific number is calculated by the specific number calculating means from the head address of the predetermined information group and the address indicated by the address designating means.

As a result, there is no need to input the specific number in numerical values in the program. Therefore, when the program is used for other models with different specific numbers, the specific number can be input in each process that performs control using the specific number. The process of repairing can be omitted. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the game machine from malfunctioning due to an error in correcting the program.

In the gaming machine GB1 or GB2, an identification information storage means for storing a plurality of identification data used for selecting one information group from the plurality of information groups; and identification information selection means for selecting one identification data from the plurality of identification data, wherein the information group selection means selects the one identification data selected by the identification information selection means and the storage area A game machine GB3, wherein the information group is selected based on the head address of the information group stored at the head of the game machine GB3 and the specific number.

According to the gaming machine GB3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine GB1 or GB2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, a plurality of identification data used for selecting one information group from a plurality of information groups are stored in the identification information storage means, and from the plurality of identification data stored in the identification information storage means, One piece of identification data is selected by the identification information selection means. An information group is selected by the information group selection means based on one identification data selected by the identification information selection means, the head address of the information group stored at the head of the storage area, and the specific number.

As a result, when any of the information groups stored in the storage area is referenced in each control process, there is no need to individually identify and refer to the address where the information specified in the information group is stored. . Therefore, there is an effect that the processing load when selecting an information group by the information group selection means can be reduced.

In the game machine GB3, the information group selection means advances the head address of the information group stored at the head of the storage area by a value calculated from the identification data of 1 and the specific number. A gaming machine GB4 characterized in that it selects the information group defined at the position of .

According to the game machine GB4, in addition to the effects of the game machine GB3, only the value calculated from the identification data of 1 and the specific number is added to the head address of the information group stored at the head of the storage area. Since the information group defined in the previous position is selected by the information group selection means, the information group can be selected by simple processing. Therefore, there is an effect that the processing load when selecting an information group by the information group selection means can be reduced.

In any one of the game machines GB1 to GB4, information storage means capable of storing information, and information storage control means for controlling to store one information group selected by the information group selection means in the information storage means. and wherein the control means performs control based on the information group stored in the information storage means.

According to the gaming machine GB5, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines GB1 to GB4, the following effects are exhibited. That is, one information group selected by the information group selection means is controlled to be stored in the information storage means by the information storage control means, and based on the information group stored in the information storage means, control is performed. Control is performed by means.

As a result, the control means only has to perform control based on the information group stored in the information group storage means in advance, and there is an effect that the processing load of the control means can be reduced.

The gaming machine GB5 comprises a lottery means for performing a predetermined lottery, and a privilege game imparting means for imparting a privilege game advantageous to the player based on a predetermined lottery result by the lottery means, and the identification information. The selection means selects the one identification data based on the result of the lottery by the lottery means being the predetermined lottery result, and selects the one identification data selected by the identification information selection means. A gaming machine GB6, further comprising holding means for holding information until a predetermined condition is established, wherein the information group selection means selects the information group based on the establishment of the predetermined condition.

According to the gaming machine GB6, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine GB5, the following effects are exhibited. That is, based on a predetermined lottery result of the lottery performed by the lottery means, the privilege game imparting means provides a privilege game advantageous to the player. Further, based on a predetermined result of the lottery performed by the lottery means, one identification data is selected by the identification information selection means, and the one identification data is held by the holding means until a prescribed condition is satisfied. be done. An information group is selected by the information group selection means based on the establishment of a predetermined condition.

Thus, when a predetermined condition is satisfied, it is possible to quickly select and set an information group based on one piece of identification data held by the holding means. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the gaming machine from malfunctioning due to the delay in setting the information group.

The game machine GB7 is characterized by comprising erasing means for erasing the result of the lottery by the lottery means on the basis that the identification data 1 is selected by the identification information selection means in the game machine GB6.

According to the gaming machine GB7, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine GB6, the lottery result by the lottery means is erased by the erasing means based on the selection of 1 identification data by the identification information selection means. There is an effect that it is possible to suppress the illegal acquisition of the lottery result corresponding to the award of the game from the outside.

In the gaming machine GB7, the holding means holds the 1 identification data until a condition for terminating the awarding of the privilege game is satisfied, and the information group selecting means terminates the awarding of the privilege game. A game machine GB8 is characterized in that the information group is selected based on the establishment of a condition.

According to the gaming machine GB8, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine GB7, the following effects are exhibited. In other words, the holding means holds one piece of identification data until the condition for terminating the provision of the privilege game is established. Further, an information group is selected by the information group selection means based on the establishment of a condition for terminating the provision of the privilege game.

As a result, it is possible to prevent a predetermined lottery result from being held for a relatively long period of time from the start of awarding of the privilege game to the end of awarding of the privilege game. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress a fraudulent act of illegally obtaining a predetermined lottery result from the outside while a privilege game is awarded.

A gaming machine GB9, wherein in any one of the gaming machines GB3 to GB8, the identification data has a smaller amount of data than the specific number of information constituting the information group.

According to the game machine GB9, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines GB3 to GB8, the identification data has a smaller data amount than the specific number of information constituting the information group, so the specific number of information is stored in the holding means. The amount of data to be held in the holding means can be reduced compared to the case of holding. Therefore, there is an effect that the storage capacity of the holding means can be reduced.

<Characteristic GC group> (Determines whether or not to add pending balls depending on whether the most significant bit is 1)
A control means for controlling a game according to a predetermined control procedure, a first storage means storing a plurality of predetermined data, and a control means selected based on the predetermined data stored in the first storage means, and the control means second storage means for storing a plurality of set values for setting related to; first selection means for selecting one predetermined data from the first storage means; and predetermined data selected by the first selection means specific information determining means for determining whether or not specific information is included in the one data, and when the specific information determining means determines that the one predetermined data includes the specific information, the one data A conversion means for converting predetermined data according to a game situation, and one set value is selected from the second storage means based on the one predetermined data subjected to the predetermined conversion by the conversion means. a gaming machine GC1 characterized by comprising a second selection means for setting the

According to the gaming machine GC1, a game is controlled by the control means according to a predetermined control procedure. A plurality of predetermined data are stored by the first storage means, selected based on the predetermined data stored in the first storage means, and a plurality of set values for the control means to set the game are stored by the second storage means. remembered. The first selection means selects one predetermined data from the first storage means, and the specific information determination means determines whether or not the predetermined data selected by the first selection means contains specific information. . When the specific information determining means determines that the one predetermined data contains the specific information, the converting means performs predetermined conversion on the one predetermined data, and the converting means performs the predetermined conversion. One setting value is selected and set from the second storage means by the second selection means based on the one predetermined data thus obtained.

As a result, it is possible to cause the conversion means to perform different conversions on one predetermined data according to the game situation, so that the second selection means can be made to select different set values according to the conversion contents. Therefore, the number of predetermined data stored in the first storage means can be made smaller than the number of set values stored in the second storage means, so the capacity of the first storage means can be reduced. has the effect of

In the gaming machine GC1, when it is determined by the specific information determining means that the specific information is not included in the one predetermined data, one of the data is extracted from the second storage means based on the one predetermined data. A gaming machine GC2 comprising a third selection means for selecting and setting a set value.

According to the gaming machine GC2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine GC1, when it is determined by the specific information determining means that the one predetermined data does not contain the particular information, the third data is determined based on the one predetermined data. Since one setting value is selected and set from the second storage means by the storage means, conversion by the conversion means can be omitted when one predetermined data not containing specific information is selected. . Therefore, there is an effect that processing load can be reduced when specific information is not included in one piece of predetermined data.

In the gaming machine GC1 or GC2, the specific information determining means determines that the specific information is included in the one predetermined data when the highest bit of the one predetermined data is 1. A gaming machine GC3 characterized by:

According to the game machine GC3, in addition to the effects of the game machine GC1 or GC2, when the highest bit of the predetermined data of 1 is 1, specific information is included in the predetermined data of 1 by the specific information determination means. Therefore, when determining whether or not specific information is included, there is no need to determine the data specified in bits other than the most significant bit, and determination is performed by simple processing. be able to. Therefore, there is an effect that the processing load on the specific information determination means can be reduced.

In the gaming machine GC3, a ball entrance into which a game ball can enter, dynamic display execution means for dynamically displaying identification information on a display means based on the entry of a game ball into the ball entrance, and When a game ball newly enters the ball entrance while the identification information is dynamically displayed on the display means by the dynamic display execution means, the number of times the game ball newly enters with a predetermined value as the upper limit. wherein the converting means sets the most significant bit of the predetermined data of 1 to 0, and adds the count value of the counting means to the predetermined data of 1. Gaming machine GC4.

According to the gaming machine GC4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine GC3, the following effects are exhibited. Namely, the identification information is dynamically displayed on the display means by the dynamic display execution means based on the game ball entering the ball entrance into which the game ball can enter, and the identification information is dynamically displayed. When a game ball newly enters the ball entrance during this period, the counting means counts the number of new game balls entering with a predetermined value as the upper limit. The most significant bit of the predetermined data of 1 is set to 0 by the converting means, and the count value of the counting means is added.

Thereby, different setting values can be selected by the second selection means according to the count value of the counting means. Therefore, since various settings can be realized, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the game from becoming monotonous.

In the gaming machine GC4, the plurality of set values stored in the second storage means include at least information regarding the display time of the dynamic display of the identification information executed by the dynamic display execution means. A gaming machine GC5 characterized by:

According to the gaming machine GC5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine GC4, the plurality of set values stored in the second storage means include at least the display time of the dynamic display of the identification information executed by the dynamic display execution means. Since the information about is included, dynamic display can be performed in the form of dynamic display of various identification information with different display periods. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the game from becoming monotonous.

In the gaming machine GC5, the second selection means selects from the second storage means the set value corresponding to the dynamic display of the identification information having a shorter display time as the count value of the counting means increases. A game machine GC6 characterized in that it

According to the gaming machine GC6, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine GC5, the larger the count value of the counting means, the higher the setting value corresponding to the dynamic display of the identification information with the shorter display time by the second selection means. Since the identification information is selected from the two storage means, it is possible to suppress continuous dynamic display of identification information having a long display time. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from being continuously greatly disappointed by the long display time and only the performances that are missed, thereby improving the player's interest in the game. It has the effect of being able to

Any one of the game machines GC1 to GC6 is provided with information acquisition means for acquiring random information based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, and the first selection means is based on the random information acquired by the information acquisition means. A game machine GC7 characterized in that one predetermined data is selected from the first storage means.

According to the gaming machine GC7, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines GC1 to GC6, the following effects are exhibited. That is, random information is obtained by the information obtaining means based on the establishment of the predetermined condition. Then, one predetermined data is selected from the first storage means by the first selection means based on the random information acquired by the information acquisition means.

As a result, the predetermined data can be given randomness, so that the set value selected based on the given data can also be given randomness. Therefore, since the game settings are determined at random, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to predict the settings, and there is an effect that it is possible to give the player a sense of surprise.

<Characteristic GD group> (Determine the variation pattern table based on the pattern and the number of rotations)
Dynamic display execution means for dynamically displaying identification information on display means based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, and a combination of a plurality of predetermined identification information in the dynamic display of the identification information executed by the dynamic display execution means. a privilege game imparting means for imparting a privilege game advantageous to the player when any one of the combinations appears; and executing the dynamic display after the privilege game imparted by the privilege game imparting means is finished. and a number counting means for counting the number of times the dynamic display of the identification information is executed by the means, and the dynamic display execution means counts the number of times counted by the number counting means and the previous A gaming machine GD1, wherein the dynamic display mode of the identification information is determined based on the information determined when the privilege game is provided.

According to the gaming machine GD1, the identification information is dynamically displayed on the display means by the dynamic display execution means based on the establishment of the predetermined condition, and in the dynamic display of the identification information executed by the dynamic display execution means, When any one of the determined combinations of identification information appears, a privilege game advantageous to the player is imparted by the privilege game imparting means. The frequency counting means counts the number of times the identification information is dynamically displayed by the dynamic display executing means after the privilege game imparted by the privilege game imparting means is finished. Based on the number of times counted by the number of times counting means and the information determined when the previous privilege game is awarded by the privilege game imparting means, the dynamic display execution means determines the dynamic display mode of the identification information. be done.

Thus, it is possible to variously determine the mode of dynamic display of the identification information according to the information determined when the last privilege game was awarded and the number of times counted by the number counting means. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the dynamic display of the identification information from becoming monotonous, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

In the gaming machine GD1, the dynamic display executing means stores the number of times counted by the number counting means, specific information based on the identification information that appeared when the previous bonus game was awarded, and the identification information. wherein the dynamic display mode of the identification information is determined based on the dynamic display mode of the identification information executed by the dynamic display executing means when the identification information is displayed. GD2.

According to the gaming machine GD2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine GD1, the number of times counted by the number counting means, specific information based on the identification information that appeared when the previous privilege game was awarded, and its identification The dynamic display execution means determines the dynamic display mode of the identification information based on the dynamic display mode of the identification information executed by the dynamic display execution means when the information is displayed. A wide variety of aspects of the dynamic display of information can be determined. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the dynamic display of the identification information from becoming monotonous, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

In the gaming machine GD1 or GD2, the information group composed of a plurality of pieces of information relating to the dynamic display mode of the identification information corresponds to the information determined when the previous privilege game is awarded by the privilege game imparting means. a plurality of pieces of information forming the information group are stored in association with the count value of the number counting means, and the dynamic display execution means comprises the One information group is selected from the information group storage means based on the number of times counted by the number counting means and the information determined when the last privilege game is awarded by the privilege game imparting means. A game machine GD3 characterized in that it is used to determine the mode of dynamic display of identification information.

According to the gaming machine GD3, the information group composed of a plurality of pieces of information regarding the mode of dynamic display of the identification information is associated with the information determined when the previous privilege game is awarded by the privilege game imparting means. It is stored by the information group storage means. A plurality of pieces of information forming the information group are stored in association with the count value of the number counting means. Based on the number of times counted by the number-of-times counting means and the information determined when the previous privilege game is awarded by the privilege game imparting means, one information group is retrieved from the information group storage means by the dynamic display execution means. It is selected and used to determine the manner in which identification information is dynamically displayed.

Accordingly, the dynamic display executing means can determine the dynamic display mode of the identification information only by selecting the information group stored in the information group storage means in advance, so that the dynamic display mode of the identification information can be determined. There is an effect that the processing load of the determining process can be reduced.

Any one of the gaming machines GD1 to GD3 is provided with a ball entrance into which a game ball can enter, and the dynamic display execution means displays a display on the display means based on the game ball entering the ball entrance. A gaming machine GD4 characterized by dynamically displaying identification information.

According to the gaming machine GD4, in addition to the effects produced by any one of the gaming machines GD1 to GD3, the dynamic display executing means displays the Since the identification information is dynamically displayed on the display means, the player can easily trigger the execution of the dynamic display of the identification information only by confirming whether or not the game ball has entered the entrance. It has the effect of being recognizable.

In the gaming machine GD4, a plurality of the ball entrances are provided, and the dynamic display executing means receives the type of the ball entrance into which the game ball enters and the number of times counted by the number counting means. and information determined when the previous privilege game is awarded by the privilege game imparting means, and determines the form of dynamic display of the identification information. .

According to the game machine GD5, in addition to the effects of the game machine GD4, a plurality of ball entrances are provided, and the type of the ball entrance into which the game ball enters, the number of times counted by the number counting means, and the privilege Since the dynamic display execution means determines the dynamic display mode of the identification information based on the information determined when the previous privilege game is awarded by the game provision means, the dynamic display of the identification information is A wide variety of aspects can be determined. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the dynamic display of the identification information from becoming monotonous, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

In any one of the gaming machines GD1 to GD5, after the awarding of the privilege game by the privilege game imparting means is completed, a first game state or a second game state more advantageous to the player than the first game state is established. A game state setting means for setting to either game state is provided, and the dynamic display execution means is capable of dynamically displaying the identification information in a specific mode when the game state is the second game state. A gaming machine GD6 characterized by:

According to the game machine GD6, in addition to the effects produced by any of the game machines GD1 to GD5, the following effects are produced. That is, after the awarding of the privilege game by the privilege game imparting means is completed, the game state setting means selects either the first game state or the second game state which is more advantageous to the player than the first game state. state. When the game state is the second game state, dynamic display of the identification information is executed in a specific manner by the dynamic display executing means.

As a result, the player can determine whether or not the game state is the second game state by confirming whether or not the dynamic display of the identification information is executed in a specific manner. A careful observation can be made about the manner in which the information is displayed dynamically. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine GD6, the dynamic display executing means is capable of dynamically displaying the identification information in the specific mode when the count value of the number counting means is a specific value. A game machine GD7.

According to the game machine GD7, in addition to the effects of the game machine GD6, when the count value of the number counting means is a specific value, dynamic display of the identification information is executed in a specific mode by the dynamic display execution means. Therefore, the player can be expected to dynamically display the identification information in a specific manner when the count value is a specific value. Therefore, there is an effect that a well-balanced game can be played.

In the gaming machine GD7, when the count value of the number-of-times counting means is a specific value and the game state is the first game state, the dynamic display execution means displays the A gaming machine GD8 characterized by executing dynamic display of identification information.

According to the game machine GD8, in addition to the effects of the game machine GD7, when the count value of the number counting means is a specific value and the game state is the first game state, the dynamic display execution means displays a specific mode. Since the dynamic display of the identification information is executed in a manner different from the above, it is possible to suppress the execution of the dynamic display of the identification information in a specific manner in the first gaming state. Therefore, even though the identification information is dynamically displayed in a specific manner, the second game state that is advantageous to the player does not occur, which may cause the player to distrust the gaming machine and the hall. There is an effect that it is possible to suppress the storage.

Any one of the game machines GD1 to GD8 is provided with information acquisition means for acquiring random information based on establishment of a specific condition, and the dynamic display execution means receives the random information acquired by the information acquisition means. determining the dynamic display mode of the identification information based on the number of times counted by the number counting means and the information determined when the last privilege game is awarded by the privilege game giving means; A gaming machine GD9 characterized by:

According to the game machine GD9, in addition to the effect produced by any one of the game machines GD1 to GD8, random information is acquired by the information acquisition means based on the establishment of a specific condition, and the acquired random information and the number of times are counted. Based on the number of times counted by the means and the information determined when the previous privilege game is awarded by the privilege game imparting means, the dynamic display execution means determines the mode of dynamic display of the identification information. Therefore, randomness can be imparted to the mode of dynamic display of the determined identification information. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to predict the mode of the dynamic display of the identification information to be executed. There is an effect that it is possible to give unexpectedness to it.

<Characteristic group of 5065 series>
<Feature HA group> (A game machine with multiple jackpot routes has a time-saving state where it is easier to aim for a jackpot with one route than the normal state, and a time-saving state where it is easier to aim for a jackpot with other routes than in the normal state)
A state setting means capable of setting one state out of a plurality of states including at least a first state and a special state more advantageous to the player than the first state, and the special state by the state setting means. is set, the first condition is satisfied when the result of determination by the determination means is a specific determination result, or the second condition is satisfied based on the game ball entering the specific area and a privilege game executing means capable of executing a privilege game advantageous to the player when any one of the conditions is satisfied.

Conventionally, as a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a start hole provided on the game board surface, a lottery is drawn to determine whether the game is successful or not, and if the lottery result is a win, it is advantageous to the player. A configuration has been proposed in which a privilege game is executed (prior art document: JP-A-2012-217766). However, there is a problem that the game becomes monotonous because the trigger for executing the privilege game is only the lottery of the game. It is an object of the present invention to solve the above-mentioned problems and the like, and to provide a gaming machine capable of preventing a game from becoming monotonous.

According to the game machine HA0, out of the first condition that is established when the determination result by the determination means is a specific determination result, or the second condition that is established based on the game ball entering the specific area. Since the privilege game is executed when any one of the conditions is satisfied, the player can be caused to execute the privilege game under various conditions. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the game from becoming monotonous.

In the gaming machine HA0, the state setting means may set, as the special states, a first special state in which the first condition is more likely to be satisfied than the second condition, and a first special state in which the second condition is more likely to be satisfied than the first condition. A game machine HA1 characterized by being able to set a second special state that is easy to play.

According to the gaming machine HA1, when the special state is set, the player is caused to play a game aimed at fulfilling the first condition and a game aiming at fulfilling the second condition in order to execute the privilege game. be able to. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the player from becoming bored with the game early.

In the gaming machine HA1, specific game executing means capable of executing a specific game based on the result of the determination by the determining means being a specific second determination result different from the specific determination result; and execution of the specific game. a variable ball entry means that allows a game ball to enter the game ball based on the fact that the specific game is executed by the means, A gaming machine HA2 characterized in that it is possible to enter a ball into an area.

According to the game machine HA2, in addition to the effects of the game machine HA1, the following effects are produced. That is, since the second condition can be established when the discrimination result of the discriminating means is different from the first condition, the player is more interested in the discrimination result of the discriminating means. has the effect of being able to

In the game machine HA2, the game machine HA3 is characterized in that the special state is one in which the determination is more likely to be executed than in the normal state. According to the game machine HA3, in addition to the effects of the game machine HA2, the following effects are produced. That is, in a special state in which discrimination by the discriminating means is easier to execute than in a normal state, a game aiming to satisfy the first condition and a game aiming to satisfy the second condition are executed in order to execute the privilege game. Therefore, there is an effect that a state advantageous to the player can be obtained regardless of which game is executed.

A game machine HA4 characterized in that, in any one of the game machines HA1 to HA3, the first condition is more likely to satisfy the first condition than the second condition.

According to the gaming machine HA4, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines HA1 to HA3, the following effects are exhibited. That is, since the second condition is difficult to be satisfied during the first state, there is an effect that the player can enthusiastically play the game with the aim of setting a special state in which the second condition is likely to be satisfied. be.

In the gaming machine HA4, a gaming machine characterized in that a probability that the discrimination result by the discrimination means is the specific second discrimination result is set higher than a probability that the discrimination result is the specific discrimination result. HA5.

According to the game machine HA5, in addition to the effects of the game machine HA4, the following effects are produced. That is, when the second special state is set, the privilege game can be executed more quickly than when the first special state is set. There is an effect that the game can be motivated to play with the aim of setting the second special state.

<Characteristic HB group> (Advantageous non-electrification prize suppression after the end of time saving)
A first ball entering means capable of entering a game ball, a first discrimination means capable of executing a first discrimination based on the fact that a game ball has entered the first ball entering means, and the first discrimination means. A first variable ball entry means capable of changing to an open state in which a game ball can be entered based on the fact that the result of the first judgment by is a specific first judgment result, and the first variable ball entry means A second variable ball entry means that can be changed to a state in which the game ball can be entered by the game ball entering the means, and the game ball entering the second variable ball entry means. a first game state; and a second game state in which the result of the first determination is more likely to become a specific first determination result than in the first game state. and a game state setting means capable of setting a game state, wherein the game state setting means can set the first game state when an end condition is established in the state where the second game state is set. In the period from when the second game state is set until the end condition is satisfied, the first game ball is allowed to enter the first variable ball entry means in the open state. and a second state in which entry of a game ball into the first variable ball entry means in the open state is restricted from the first state is variable. Game machine HB1.

Conventionally, as a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a start hole provided on the game board surface, a lottery is drawn to determine whether the game is successful or not, and if the lottery result is a win, it is advantageous to the player. A configuration has been proposed in which a privilege game is executed. After the end of the privilege game, the player is motivated to set the advantageous state by constructing an advantageous state in which the success or failure of the game is more likely to be drawn by lottery than in the normal state. A configuration has been proposed (prior art document: JP-A-2012-217766).

However, when the advantageous state is set, the information of the game is always in a state where it is easy to draw a lottery. .

In addition, as a general configuration, a variable means is provided to allow the entry of the game ball into the starting hole and the restriction position to restrict the entry of the game ball. A configuration has been proposed in which the period during which the variable means is in the allowable position is longer in the middle, thereby facilitating the execution of the winning or losing lottery of the game. However, there are cases where the advantageous state ends while the variable means is positioned at the allowable position, and in this case, the lottery for winning or losing the game is likely to be executed in spite of the normal state, and the game is excessively advantageous to the player. There was a problem that the It is intended to solve the problems exemplified above, and to provide a gaming machine capable of preventing a game from becoming monotonous.

According to the gaming machine HB1, during the second game state in which the first variable ball entering means is easily changed to the open state, the first variable ball entering means is allowed to enter the first variable ball entering means in the open state. Since the state and the regulating second state are variable, the ease with which a ball can be entered into the first variable ball-entering means during the second game state can be varied. Therefore, even when the second game state is set, the player can play the game while expecting the first state to be maintained, and the game can be prevented from becoming monotonous. has the effect of

In addition, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent a large number of game balls from entering the second variable ball entry means during the second game state, and excessive awarding of benefits.

In the gaming machine HB1, at least a period in which the second variable ball entry means is changed to a state in which a game ball can be entered is in the second state. Machine HB2.

According to the gaming machine HB2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine HB1, the following effects are achieved. That is, since it is possible to restrict the entry of a game ball into the first variable ball entry means during the period in which the game ball can be entered into the second variable ball entry means, the second game state is established. There is an effect that it is possible to suppress excessive entry of game balls into the second variable ball entry means.

In the gaming machine HB1 or HB2, the second state is set after the first state in a period from when the second game state is set until the end condition is satisfied. A game machine HB3.

According to the gaming machine HB3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine HB1 or HB2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the second state is set at the end of the second game state. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult to enter a state in which a game ball can be entered into the second variable ball entering means after the condition for ending the second game state is established.

In the gaming machine HB3, a second privilege game can be executed based on a second determination means capable of executing the second determination and the result of the second determination by the second determination means being a specific second determination result. and a second privilege game executing means, wherein the end condition is satisfied when the number of executions of the second determination reaches a specific number of times, and the gaming machine executes the second determination. The game machine HB4 is characterized in that when the number of times reaches the specific number of times, the game machine HB4 is easily changed to the second state.

According to the gaming machine HB4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine HB3, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the second state is set at the end of the second game state. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult to enter a state in which a game ball can be entered into the second variable ball entering means after the condition for ending the second game state is established.

<Characteristic HC group> (During a game state where it is easy to enter a game ball into one special figure start opening, a game that makes it easy to enter a game ball into the other special figure start opening can be executed for a predetermined period)
A game ball is entered by a first ball entering means capable of entering a game ball, a second ball entering means different from the first ball entering means, and a game ball entering the first ball entering means. and a second variable entry means that can be changed to a state where the game ball can be entered by entering the game ball into the second ball entry means. a ball means; a first privilege granting means capable of imparting a first privilege based on the fact that a game ball enters the first variable ball entering means; and a game ball entering the second variable ball entering means. and a second privilege granting means capable of granting a second privilege more advantageous than the first privilege based on the fact that the ball has been struck, and when a specific condition is satisfied, the game machine normally operates until an end condition is satisfied. and a state setting means capable of setting a special state that is more advantageous to the player than the state, and during the period in which the special state is set by the state setting means, the second ball entering means a first period during which a game ball can easily enter the first ball entering means, and a game ball can enter the second ball entering means more easily than the first ball entering means. A gaming machine HC1 characterized in that either one of a second period in which the period can be set can be set corresponding to a condition different from the specific condition.

Conventionally, as a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a start hole provided on the game board surface, a lottery is drawn to determine whether the game is successful or not, and if the lottery result is a win, it is advantageous to the player. A special game is executed, and there was a case where a lottery of multiple types can be executed. Further, there has been proposed a game machine capable of setting an advantageous state in which a win-or-fail lottery is more likely to be executed than a normal state after the end of a privilege game. (Prior art document: JP-A-2012-217766).

However, when an advantageous state is set, only one winning lottery among multiple types of lotteries is likely to be executed, and various types of lotteries cannot be easily executed. There is a problem that the game becomes monotonous. It is an object of the present invention to provide a game machine capable of preventing games from becoming monotonous.

According to the gaming machine HC1, during the period until the special state set when the specific condition is satisfied ends, the first period during which the game ball can be easily entered into the first ball entering means. , the second period for making it easier for the game ball to enter the second ball entering means is set according to the conditions. It is possible to make the player interested in whether the game ball is hit into. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the game from becoming monotonous.

In the gaming machine HC1, an acquiring means capable of acquiring information based on the fact that a game ball has entered the second variable ball entering means, and the information acquired by the acquiring means are stored at least until a determination condition is satisfied. storage means capable of storing for a period of time, determination means capable of executing determination based on the information stored in the storage means when a determination condition is established, and the determination performed by the determination means and privilege game executing means capable of executing a privilege game based on the fact that the result of (1) is a specific determination result.

According to the gaming machine HC2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine HC1, the following effects are achieved. That is, since information can be stored up to a predetermined number based on the fact that a game ball has entered the second variable ball entry means, a benefit is provided for the information that the ball has entered the second variable ball entry means. There is an effect that it can be made easier.

In the gaming machine HC1 or HC2, the state setting means may set, as the special states, a first special state in which the first period is more likely to be set than the second period, and a second period to be set more easily than the first period. A gaming machine HC3 characterized in that it is possible to set a second special state that is likely to occur.

According to the gaming machine HC3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine HC1 or HC2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, since different periods can be easily set according to the type of special state set by the state setting means, the player can be made to play games with different game characteristics, and the interest in the game can be improved. has the effect of

In the gaming machine HC3, the first period is more easily switched to the second period when the first special state is set than when the second special state is set. A gaming machine HC4 characterized by:

According to the gaming machine HC4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine HC3, the following effects are exhibited. That is, in the first special state in which the first period disadvantageous to the player is set, it is easier to switch to the second period. There is an effect that the game can be played while expecting that the is set.

<Characteristic HD group> (It is possible to set a time saving with a low upper limit, which is easy to play advantageous games, and a short time with a high upper limit, but it is difficult to play advantageous games)
a first discrimination means capable of executing a first discrimination; a second discrimination means capable of executing a second discrimination more advantageous to the player than the first discrimination executed by the first discrimination means; a first privilege granting means capable of granting a first privilege based on the fact that the result of the first discrimination by the means is a specific first discrimination result; and the result of the second discrimination by the second discrimination means. is a specific second determination result, a first game state, and a second game state that is more advantageous to the player than the first game state and game state setting means capable of setting one game state out of a plurality of game states including at least two game states. a termination means capable of terminating the second game state based on the total number of times of execution of the first determination and the number of times of execution of the second determination becoming a specific number; and and setting means capable of setting setting information for varying the number of times the second determination can be executed in a period in which is set in accordance with the specific information. .

Conventionally, as a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a start hole provided on the game board surface, a lottery is drawn to determine whether the game is successful or not, and if the lottery result is a win, it is advantageous to the player. A configuration has been proposed in which a privilege game is executed. After the end of the privilege game, the player is motivated to set the advantageous state by constructing an advantageous state in which the success or failure of the game is more likely to be drawn by lottery than in the normal state. A configuration has been proposed (prior art document: JP-A-2012-217766).

However, since the same termination condition is set as the termination condition for terminating the advantageous state, there is a problem that the player in the advantageous state quickly becomes bored with the game. It is an object of the present invention to provide a game machine capable of preventing games from becoming monotonous.

According to the gaming machine HD1, since the number of times of the second determination that can be executed in the second game state that is advantageous to the player can be changed by the setting means, more second determinations can be made when the second game state is set. The game can be played while expecting that the 2 determination will be executed. Therefore, there is an effect that the amusement of the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine HD1, the setting means may set, as the setting information, first setting information that the number of times that the second determination may be performed is the first number, and the number of times that the second determination may be performed is the first number of times. and a second setting information that is a second number of times greater than the number of times, and the second setting information is set by the setting means more than the first setting information is set by the setting means. , a game machine HD2 characterized in that it is difficult to execute the second determination during the second game state.

According to the gaming machine HD2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine HD1, the following effects are exhibited. In other words, it is made more difficult to execute the second determination during the second game state when the number of times the second determination can be performed is the first number of times than when the second number of times is greater than the first number of times. can be done. Therefore, since the player can play the game with the aim of executing many second determinations before the second game state ends, there is an effect that the player's willingness to play can be improved. be.

The game machine HD1 or HD2 has a second end means capable of ending the second game state based on the number of executions of the second determination reaching the number of times indicated by the setting information. A game machine HD3 characterized by.

According to the gaming machine HD3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine HD1 or HD2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, since the second game state can be terminated based on the number of executions of the second determination performed during the second game state, the excessive execution of the second determination during the second game state can be prevented. There is an effect that it can be suppressed.

In the gaming machine HD3, the first privilege granting means enables execution of a privilege game that is advantageous to the player as the first privilege, and the setting means sets the above-mentioned after the completion of the privilege game. The game machine HD4 is characterized in that the first setting information or the second setting information can be set for the second game state.

According to the gaming machine HD4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine HD3, the following effects are exhibited. That is, since it is possible to set the first setting information or the second setting information as the second game state set after the end of the privilege game, the second game state is set after the end of the privilege game. In this case, it is possible to provide the player with games with different game characteristics. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the player from becoming bored with the game early.

<Characteristic HE group> (Multiple end conditions can be set for ending an advantageous game state, and the aspect of the effect executed during an advantageous game state is determined based on the update details of the end conditions that are difficult to establish)
a game state setting means capable of setting one game state out of a plurality of game states including at least a first game state and a second game state more advantageous to the player than the first game state; In the gaming machine having the second game state, either a first termination condition or a second termination condition that can be satisfied before the first termination condition is satisfied is established. The gaming machine, during the period in which the second gaming state is set, displays the first period information corresponding to the period until the first termination condition is satisfied. Based on the fact that a condition different from the condition corresponding to the establishment of the second end condition is established, the condition corresponding to the establishment of the second end condition can be established next. A performance executing means capable of executing a performance corresponding to the period until the specified performance is regulated, and a specific performance can be executed in a state where the performance is regulated based on the establishment of a condition corresponding to the establishment of the second end condition. and a specific effect executing means.

Conventionally, as a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a start hole provided on the game board surface, a lottery is drawn to determine whether the game is successful or not, and if the lottery result is a win, it is advantageous to the player. A configuration has been proposed in which a privilege game is executed. After the end of the privilege game, the player is motivated to set the advantageous state by constructing an advantageous state in which the success or failure of the game is more likely to be drawn by lottery than in the normal state. A configuration has been proposed (prior art document: JP-A-2012-217766).

Furthermore, by setting a termination condition for terminating the advantageous state and informing the player of update information for indicating the remaining period until the termination condition is satisfied, the advantageous state is terminated for the player. There is a production that makes it easy to understand the remaining period until.

However, since the same termination condition is set as the termination condition for terminating the advantageous state, the content of the presentation for indicating the remaining period until the advantageous state ends to the player becomes monotonous, resulting in the advantageous state. There is a problem that some players get bored with the game early. It is an object of the present invention to provide a game machine capable of preventing games from becoming monotonous.

According to the gaming machine HE1, the effect for indicating that the second game state is set can be executed in a specific effect mode when the element for establishing the second end condition is updated. , the player can predict the period until the second end condition is satisfied. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the second game state is abruptly terminated due to the establishment of the second end condition before the establishment of the first end condition, and the player is confused. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to provide a game that is easy for the player to understand.

In the gaming machine HE1, the gaming machine HE2 is characterized in that the second ending condition is more difficult to satisfy than the first ending condition.

According to the gaming machine HE2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine HE1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, although there is a possibility that the second termination condition is satisfied before the first termination condition, the second termination condition is less likely to be satisfied. There is an effect that an effect that is easy for the player to understand can be executed based on the period information.

The game machine HE2 has a determination means capable of performing determination, and the first end condition and the second end condition can be satisfied based on the result of the determination by the determination means. A privilege that is more advantageous to the player is given to the player when the determination result satisfies the condition corresponding to the establishment of the second termination condition than the determination result satisfies the condition corresponding to the establishment of the first termination condition. The gaming machine HE3 is characterized by being easy to use.

According to the gaming machine HE3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine HE2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when the second element is updated rather than when the first element is updated, the privilege game is more likely to be performed, so the player is expected to perform the specific effect while playing the game. It has the effect of being able to

In the gaming machine HE3, the game state setting means, in the state where the second game state is set, determines whether the first end condition is satisfied or the second end condition is satisfied. A gaming machine HE4 characterized by being able to set a gaming state.

According to the game machine HE4, even if the second game state is ended by the establishment of any end condition, the game state set after the end is not affected, so that a game that is easy for the player to understand is provided. has the effect of being able to

In any one of the game machines HE2 to HE4, a measuring means capable of measuring the number of times the condition corresponding to the establishment of the second end condition is established, and whether or not the number of times measured by the measuring means reaches a specific number of times. A game machine HE5, characterized by having a judging means capable of judging, and a special production execution means capable of executing a special production when the judging means judges that the specified number of times has been reached.

According to the gaming machine HE5, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines HE1 to HE4, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when the number of times the condition corresponding to the establishment of the second end condition, which is less likely to be satisfied than the first end condition, is satisfied reaches a specific number of times, the special effect can be executed, so that the effect of the effect can be enhanced. can.

<HF group> (Special figure 1 time saving and special figure 2 time saving can be executed)
A state setting means capable of setting one state out of a plurality of states including at least a first state and a special state more advantageous to the player than the first state, and the special state by the state setting means. is set, the first condition is satisfied when the result of determination by the determination means is a specific determination result, or the second condition is satisfied based on the game ball entering the specific area A gaming machine HF0 characterized by having privilege game executing means capable of executing a privilege game advantageous to the player when any of the conditions is satisfied.

Conventionally, as a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a start hole provided on the game board surface, a lottery is drawn to determine whether the game is successful or not, and if the lottery result is a win, it is advantageous to the player. A configuration has been proposed in which a privilege game is executed (prior art document: JP-A-2012-217766).

However, there is a problem that the game becomes monotonous because the trigger for executing the privilege game is only the lottery of the game. It is an object of the present invention to solve the above-mentioned problems and the like, and to provide a gaming machine capable of preventing a game from becoming monotonous.

According to the game machine HF0, out of the first condition that is established when the determination result by the determination means is a specific determination result, or the second condition that is established based on the fact that the game ball enters the specific area Since the privilege game is executed when any one of the conditions is satisfied, the player can be caused to execute the privilege game under various conditions. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the game from becoming monotonous.

<Characteristic HG group> (It is difficult to maintain an advantageous state at the end of time saving)
A ball entering means capable of entering a game ball, a determining means capable of performing a determination based on the entering of a game ball into the entering means, and a result of the determination by the determining means being a specific determination result. a privilege granting means capable of granting a privilege based on the fact that a game ball can be entered into said ball entering means; a first position capable of entering a game ball into said ball entering means; A first game state, and a second game state in which the variable means is more likely to be changed to the first position than in the first game state. and game state setting means capable of setting one game state out of a plurality of game states, wherein the game state setting means has a state in which the second game state is set and the end condition is It is possible to set the first game state when it is established, and the gaming machine can make it difficult for the end condition to be established in a state in which the variable means is varied to the second state. A gaming machine HG1 characterized by

Conventionally, as a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a start hole provided on the game board surface, a lottery is drawn to determine whether the game is successful or not, and if the lottery result is a win, it is advantageous to the player. A configuration has been proposed in which a privilege game is executed. After the end of the privilege game, the player is motivated to set the advantageous state by constructing an advantageous state in which the success or failure of the game is more likely to be drawn by lottery than in the normal state. A configuration has been proposed (prior art document: JP-A-2012-217766).

However, as a general configuration, a variable means is provided that allows the entry of a game ball into the starting hole and the regulation position that regulates the entry of the ball, and a more advantageous state than the normal state is provided. A configuration has been proposed in which the period during which the variable means is in the allowable position is longer in the middle, thereby facilitating the execution of the winning or losing lottery of the game. However, there are cases where the advantageous state ends while the variable means is positioned at the allowable position, and in this case, the lottery for the game is likely to be executed in spite of the normal state, and the game is excessively advantageous to the player. There was a problem that the The purpose of this invention is to solve the above-mentioned problems, etc., and to provide a gaming machine that can improve the interest of the player in the game by making it easier for the player to play a proper game. and

According to the game machine HG1, it is possible to make it difficult to satisfy the end condition while the variable means is changed to the second state. It is possible to make it difficult to generate the state that is changed to . Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved by facilitating the player to play a proper game.

<Characteristics HH group> (During a game state where it is easy to enter a game ball into one special figure start opening, a game that makes it easy to enter a game ball into the other special figure start opening can be executed for a predetermined period)
When a first condition is satisfied based on a ball entry means into which a game ball can enter and the game ball enters the ball entry means, the first state in which the game ball is difficult to enter is changed from the first condition to the ball entry means. A first variable ball entry means that can be changed to a second state in which a game ball is easier to enter than the first state, and the first condition based on the fact that the game ball has entered the ball entry means. a second variable ball entry means capable of changing from a third state in which a game ball is difficult to enter to a fourth state in which a game ball is easier to enter than the third state when a different second condition is established; a first privilege granting means capable of granting a first privilege based on the game ball entering the first variable ball entering means; and the game ball entering the second variable ball entering means. a second privilege granting means capable of imparting a second privilege that is more advantageous than the first privilege based on, and the first A game in which one game state can be set from among a plurality of game states including at least a first game state in which a condition is likely to be established and a second game state in which the second condition is more likely to be established than the first condition. and a state setting means, wherein the game machine is configured such that when a specific condition is satisfied in a state where the first game state is set, the second condition is more likely to be satisfied than the first condition. A game machine HH1 characterized in that a game can be executed for a predetermined period during the first game state.

Conventionally, as a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a start hole provided on the game board surface, a lottery is drawn to determine whether the game is successful or not, and if the lottery result is a win, it is advantageous to the player. A special game is executed, and there was a case where a lottery of multiple types can be executed. Further, there has been proposed a game machine capable of setting an advantageous state in which a win-or-fail lottery is more likely to be executed than a normal state after the end of a privilege game. (Prior art document: JP-A-2012-217766).

However, when an advantageous state is set, only one win-or-fail lottery out of a plurality of types of win-or-fail lotteries is likely to be executed, and various types of win-or-fail lotteries cannot be easily executed. There is a problem that the game becomes monotonous. It is an object of the present invention to provide a game machine capable of preventing games from becoming monotonous.

According to the gaming machine HH1, during the period until the end of the special state set when the specific condition is established, the first period during which the game ball can be easily entered into the first ball entering means; , the second period for making it easier for the game ball to enter the second ball entering means is set according to the conditions. It is possible to make the player interested in whether the game ball is hit into. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the game from becoming monotonous.

<Characteristic HI group> (It is possible to set a time saving with a low upper limit while advantageous games are easy to execute, and a time saving with a high upper limit but difficult to execute advantageous games)
a first discrimination means capable of executing a first discrimination; a second discrimination means capable of executing a second discrimination more advantageous to the player than the first discrimination executed by the first discrimination means; a first privilege granting means capable of granting a first privilege based on the fact that the result of the first discrimination by the means is a specific first discrimination result; and the result of the second discrimination by the second discrimination means. is a specific second determination result, a second privilege granting means capable of granting a second privilege, a first game state, and the second discrimination is executed from the first game state and a third game state in which the second determination is more likely to be performed than in the first game state and in which the second determination is less likely to be performed than in the second game state. and game state setting means capable of setting one game state out of the states, wherein the number of times of the second determination executed in the state where the second game state is set is a first number. A second game state ending means capable of ending the second game state based on reaching the a third game state ending means capable of ending the third game state based on reaching a second number of times greater than the first number of times.

Conventionally, as a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a start hole provided on the game board surface, a lottery is drawn to determine whether the game is successful or not, and if the lottery result is a win, it is advantageous to the player. A configuration has been proposed in which a privilege game is executed. After the end of the privilege game, the player is motivated to set the advantageous state by constructing an advantageous state in which the success or failure of the game is more likely to be drawn by lottery than in the normal state. A configuration has been proposed (prior art document: JP-A-2012-217766).

However, since the same termination condition is set as the termination condition for terminating the advantageous state, there is a problem that the player in the advantageous state quickly becomes bored with the game. It is an object of the present invention to provide a game machine capable of preventing games from becoming monotonous.

According to the gaming machine HI1, it is possible to set the second game state or the third game state in which the second determination is more likely to be performed than in the first game state, and the second game state is more likely to be the second determination than the third game state. is easier to execute. Then, since the second game state can be finished with a smaller number of executions of the second determination than the third game state, the second game state is set for the player, and the third game state is set. It is possible to execute the second determination with different game characteristics depending on whether it is performed or not. Therefore, there is an effect that the amusement of the game can be improved.

<Characteristic HJ Group> (Multiple end conditions for ending the advantageous game state can be set, and the aspect of the effect executed during the advantageous game state is determined based on the update details of the end conditions that are difficult to establish)
Determination means capable of executing determination, privilege game execution means capable of executing a privilege game based on the fact that the result of the determination by the determination means is a specific determination result, a first game state, and the first game a game state setting means capable of setting one game state out of a plurality of game states including at least a second game state that is more advantageous to the player than the state; End condition determination means capable of determining at least a first end condition and a second end condition that is less likely to be satisfied than the first end condition as end conditions for ending the state, and the second game state are set. and a performance mode determination means capable of determining a performance mode of the performance to be executed by the performance execution means, wherein the performance mode determination means is provided. A gaming machine HJ1, wherein said effect mode can be determined based on update contents of information for establishing said second termination condition determined by said termination condition determining means.

Conventionally, as a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a start hole provided on the game board surface, a lottery is drawn to determine whether the game is successful or not, and if the lottery result is a win, it is advantageous to the player. A configuration has been proposed in which a privilege game is executed. After the end of the privilege game, the player is motivated to set the advantageous state by constructing an advantageous state in which the success or failure of the game is more likely to be drawn by lottery than in the normal state. A configuration has been proposed (prior art document: JP-A-2012-217766).

Furthermore, by setting a termination condition for terminating the advantageous state and informing the player of update information for indicating the remaining period until the termination condition is satisfied, the advantageous state is terminated for the player. There is a production that makes it easy to understand the remaining period until.

However, since the same termination condition is set as the termination condition for terminating the advantageous state, the content of the presentation for indicating the remaining period until the advantageous state ends to the player becomes monotonous, resulting in the advantageous state. There is a problem that some players get bored with the game early. It is an object of the present invention to provide a game machine capable of preventing games from becoming monotonous.

According to the gaming machine HJ1, the effect for indicating that the second game state is set is executed in a specific effect mode when the element for establishing the second end condition which is difficult to be satisfied is updated. Therefore, it is possible for the player to predict the period until the second end condition is satisfied. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the second game state is abruptly terminated due to the establishment of the second end condition before the establishment of the first end condition, and the player is confused. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to provide a game that is easy for the player to understand.

<Characteristic group of 5067 series>
<Characteristic group A> (Only whether or not to execute the predictive prognostic effect that occurs over multiple fluctuations is selected first, and the specific effect mode is determined after the predetermined regulation condition is not satisfied)
In a gaming machine comprising main control means for executing main control relating to a game, and sub-control means for performing control according to a control signal output from the main control means, the main control means has a discrimination condition. Determination means for performing determination based on establishment, and privilege game execution means for performing a privilege game advantageous to the player based on the fact that the determination result of the determination means is a predetermined first determination result. a first output means for outputting a determination result signal indicating the determination result of the determination means to the slave control means; and acquisition of determination information used for determination by the determination means based on establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition. a second output means capable of outputting a discrimination information signal based on the discrimination information acquired by the discrimination information acquisition means to the slave control means before the discrimination condition is satisfied; and the slave control means is configured to receive at least the determination result signal output by the first output means and the determination information signal output by the second output means. a first effect execution means for executing a first effect according to the determination result indicated by the received determination result signal based on the reception of the determination result signal by the signal receiving means; Based on the fact that the discrimination information signal is received by the means, the signal receiving means receives the discrimination result signal corresponding to the received discrimination information signal, up to a predetermined number of information as an upper limit. and a slave discriminating means for performing discrimination by using at least the received discriminating information signal based on the receipt of the discriminating information signal by the signal receiving means. , based on the determination result of the sub-discrimination means becoming a predetermined second determination result, over the execution period of one or more of the first effects executed after the determination, the first effect A second effect executing means for executing two effects, and effect control capable of performing control so that at least one of the first effects is executed without the second effect after the second determination result is obtained. A gaming machine A1 characterized by comprising means.

Among gaming machines such as pachinko machines, gaming machines provided with a display device such as a liquid crystal display device are known. In this conventional gaming machine, symbols are variably displayed on the display device, and the symbols are stopped and displayed in a predetermined combination, thereby providing a winning game advantageous to the player. In addition, various images such as characters and scenery are displayed on the display device in addition to the patterns, and various entertainment effects are performed to improve the interest of the game (for example, Patent Document 1: 2003-325886).

However, there has been a demand for further enhancement of interest.

In addition, in such a conventional gaming machine, by executing the same kind of presentation mode over the presentation period of a plurality of consecutive symbol variation displays, during the presentation period of the plurality of symbol variation displays, Also widely known is one equipped with an omen effect that continuously gives the player a feeling of anticipation for the awarding of a winning game. In such a conventional gaming machine, in order to create a greater sense of expectation for the final variable display effect in which the foreshadowing effect is set, the ball corresponding to the variable display with a relatively high degree of expectation is already reserved. When a new starting prize is detected in the state of being in a state where the prediction effect is drawn, the control is performed so that the lottery itself of the prediction effect is not performed. It is known to suppress the difficulty of understanding whether to pay attention to the display.

However, in such a conventional gaming machine, there is a problem that the frequency of execution of the predictive effect decreases due to the decrease in the lottery opportunity of the predictive effect.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine A1, the second determination result is obtained even if the second effect is not started in the first effect executed immediately after the determination information signal is received by the signal receiving means. Since there is a possibility, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine A1, the performance control means controls the sub-discrimination means in a state in which information corresponding to the discrimination information signal corresponding to a predetermined specific discrimination result is stored in the information storage means. When the determination result becomes the second determination result, it is configured to be controllable so that at least the first effect corresponding to the specific determination result is executed without the second effect. A gaming machine A2 characterized by:

According to the game machine A2, in addition to the effects of the game machine A1, the first effect corresponding to the specific determination result is executed without the second effect, so that the effect mode can be preferably set. effective.

In the game machine A2, an effect mode determining means for determining one of a plurality of predetermined effect modes as the effect mode of the second effect executed by the second effect executing means, wherein the effect The control means stores the information corresponding to the discrimination information signal corresponding to the specific discrimination result in the information storage means, and stores the discrimination result of the secondary discrimination means as the second discrimination result. In such a case, the first effect can be controlled to be executed without the second effect until the effect period of the first effect corresponding to the specific determination result ends. A game characterized in that the effect mode determination means is configured to be able to determine the effect mode of the second effect after the first effect corresponding to the specific determination result is completed. Machine A3.

According to the game machine A3, in addition to the effects of the game machine A2, it is possible to differentiate the timing of the determination by the subordinate determination means and the control for determining the effect mode of the second effect, so that the control process can be concentrated. There is an effect that it is possible to suppress an increase in the processing load due to an increase in processing load.

In the game machine A2 or A3, the main control means includes dynamic display means for dynamically displaying identification information for indicating the determination result of the determination means, and dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the identification information by the dynamic display means. dynamic display period selection means for selecting from a plurality of periods including at least a predetermined specific period as the dynamic display period, wherein the specific determination result is a dynamic display period longer than the specific period. A game machine A4 characterized in that it is composed of a determination result corresponding to a target display period.

According to the gaming machine A4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine A2 or A3, by configuring not to execute the second presentation for the first presentation during the dynamic display period longer than the specified period, the specified There is an effect that it is possible to concentrate on the first effect showing the determination result of .

The gaming machine A5, wherein the specific determination result is composed of a plurality of determination results including at least an outlier determination result different from the first determination result.

According to the gaming machine A5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine A4, it is possible to provide a situation in which the second effect is started after the specific determination result is completed even though the privilege game is not executed. It is possible to make it difficult to predict the start timing of the production. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In any one of the game machines A1 to A5, the secondary control means suppresses the secondary determination means from giving the second determination result at least while the first effect accompanied by the second effect is being executed. A game machine A6, characterized in that it comprises suppression state setting means for setting a suppression state to be played.

According to the game machine A6, in addition to the effect produced by any one of the game machines A1 to A5, the second determination result is obtained while the second effect is being executed, and the second effect is overwritten. There is an effect that it can be suppressed.

In the game machine A6, the suppression state setting means keeps the suppression state until the last first effect accompanied by the second effect is completed and the first effect not accompanied by the second effect is executed a specific number of times. A gaming machine A7 characterized in that it is configured to be able to set to .

According to the game machine A7, in addition to the effects of the game machine A6, it is possible to suppress the execution of the second effect from being newly determined until the first effect not accompanied by the second effect is completed a specific number of times. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can clearly understand how long the second effect set at the opportunity 1 continues.

In the game machine A6 or A7, the sub-control means can determine whether or not the second effect can be executed using a plurality of pieces of information stored in the information storage means based on the termination of the suppression state. A gaming machine A8 characterized by comprising a means for judging the time of termination.

According to the game machine A8, in addition to the effects of the game machine A6 or A7, when the suppression state ends, it is possible to determine whether or not the second effect can be executed using a plurality of information stored in the information storage means. can be made, the information that is excluded from the determination as to whether or not the second effect can be executed can be minimized. Therefore, there is an effect that more opportunities to execute the second effect can be secured.

In the gaming machine A8, the end determination means determines the second effect using one calculation data obtained by performing predetermined calculation processing on a plurality of information stored in the information storage means. A game machine A9 characterized in that it is configured to be able to determine whether or not it can be executed.

According to the game machine A9, in addition to the effects of the game machine A8, it is possible to determine whether or not the second effect is to be executed using one calculation data, so it is possible to efficiently determine whether or not the second effect is to be executed. It has the effect of being able to

In any one of the game machines A1 to A9, the secondary control means uses a plurality of pieces of information stored in the information storage means to perform the second effect based on the end of execution of the privilege game. A gaming machine A10 characterized by comprising post-game privilege determination means capable of determining whether or not execution of the above is possible.

According to the gaming machine A10, in addition to the effect produced by any one of the gaming machines A1 to A9, the information stored in the information storage means during the execution of the privilege game is also taken into consideration, and whether the second effect is executed after the privilege game. Since it is possible to determine whether or not the execution of the second effect is possible, it is possible to minimize the information that is excluded from the determination of whether or not the execution of the second effect is possible. Therefore, there is an effect that more opportunities to execute the second effect can be secured.

<Characteristics B group> (When the ball corresponding to the predetermined lottery result is already reserved and the pre-reading omen effect is won, a specific omen is run, and after the predetermined condition is satisfied, a specific (Determines the mode of production)
In a gaming machine comprising main control means for executing main control relating to a game, and sub-control means for performing control according to a control signal output from the main control means, the main control means has a discrimination condition. Determination means for performing determination based on establishment, and privilege game execution means for performing a privilege game advantageous to the player based on the fact that the determination result of the determination means is a predetermined first determination result. a first output means for outputting a determination result signal indicating the determination result of the determination means to the slave control means; and acquisition of determination information used for determination by the determination means based on establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition. a second output means capable of outputting a discrimination information signal based on the discrimination information acquired by the discrimination information acquisition means to the slave control means before the discrimination condition is satisfied; and the slave control means is configured to receive at least the determination result signal output by the first output means and the determination information signal output by the second output means. a first effect execution means for executing a first effect according to the determination result indicated by the received determination result signal based on the reception of the determination result signal by the signal receiving means; Based on the fact that the discrimination information signal is received by the means, the signal receiving means receives the discrimination result signal corresponding to the received discrimination information signal, up to a predetermined number of information as an upper limit. and a slave discriminating means for performing discrimination by using at least the received discriminating information signal based on the receipt of the discriminating information signal by the signal receiving means. , based on the determination result of the sub-discrimination means becoming a predetermined second determination result, the first effect is performed over the execution period of one or more of the first effects executed after the determination. and a second effect execution means for executing a second effect, wherein the second effect execution means performs the sub-determination in a situation where information corresponding to a predetermined specific determination result is stored in the information storage means. When the determination result of the means is the second determination result, the second effect in the first effect mode is executed at least until the execution period of the first effect corresponding to the specific determination result, and The gaming machine B1 is characterized by being configured to be able to execute the second effect of the second effect mode based on the end of the first effect corresponding to a specific determination result.

Among gaming machines such as pachinko machines, gaming machines provided with a display device such as a liquid crystal display device are known. In this conventional gaming machine, symbols are variably displayed on the display device, and the symbols are stopped and displayed in a predetermined combination, thereby providing a winning game advantageous to the player. In addition, various images such as characters and scenery are displayed on the display device in addition to the patterns, and various entertainment effects are performed to improve the interest of the game (for example, Patent Document 1: 2003-325886).

However, there has been a demand for further enhancement of interest.

In addition, in such a conventional gaming machine, by executing the same kind of presentation mode over the presentation period of a plurality of consecutive symbol variation displays, during the presentation period of the plurality of symbol variation displays, Also widely known is one equipped with an omen effect that continuously gives the player a feeling of anticipation for the awarding of a winning game. In such a conventional gaming machine, in order to create a greater sense of expectation for the final variable display effect in which the foreshadowing effect is set, the ball corresponding to the variable display with a relatively high degree of expectation is already reserved. When a new starting prize is detected in the state of being in a state where the prediction effect is drawn, the control is performed so that the lottery itself of the prediction effect is not performed. It is known to suppress the difficulty of understanding whether to pay attention to the display.

However, in such a conventional gaming machine, there is a problem that the frequency of execution of the predictive effect decreases due to the decrease in the lottery opportunity of the predictive effect.

On the other hand, according to the game machine B1, the second effect is executed in the first effect mode until the first effect corresponding to the specific determination result ends, and the first effect corresponding to the specific determination result ends. After that, the second effect of the second effect mode can be executed, so there is an effect that the effect mode can be diversified.

In the gaming machine B1, the secondary control means causes the second effect executing means to execute the second effect in the first effect mode until the execution period of the first effect corresponding to the specific determination result. and, based on the end of the first effect corresponding to the specific determination result, a first effect control for executing the second effect of the second effect mode, and the second effect executing means Then, the second effect in the first effect mode is executed until the execution period of the predetermined first effect executed before the first effect corresponding to the specific determination result, and the predetermined second effect is executed. The game machine B2 is characterized by comprising a performance control means capable of controlling a second performance control for executing the second performance of the second performance mode based on the completion of the first performance.

According to the game machine B2, in addition to the effects of the game machine B1, there is an effect that the mode of presentation can be diversified.

In the gaming machine B2, the slave control means stores information corresponding to the determination information signal stored in the information storage means when the determination result of the slave determination means is the second determination result, and the second determination result. and information corresponding to the specific determination result stored in the information storage means when the determination result of 2 is obtained, and a second subordinate determination means for performing determination using at least the information, the effect control means , a game machine B3 characterized in that it is configured to be switchable between execution of the first effect control and execution of the second effect control in accordance with the determination result of the second sub-determining means.

According to the game machine B3, in addition to the effects of the game machine B2, the first effect is produced using the information stored in the information storage means when the second determination result is obtained and the information corresponding to the specific determination result. Since it is possible to switch whether to execute the control or to execute the second effect control, there is an effect that the effect mode can be set more preferably.

In the gaming machine B3, the second sub-discrimination means stores information corresponding to the discrimination information signal stored in the information storage means when the discrimination result of the sub-discrimination means becomes the second discrimination result. , the first performance of a performance mode indicating that the information corresponding to the specific determination result stored in the information storage means is more likely to be advantageous to the player when the second determination result is obtained. is information corresponding to a determination result that is likely to be executed, the first effect control is easier to execute than the second effect control, and the determination result of the secondary determination means is the second determination result. The information corresponding to the determination information signal stored in the information storage means when the second determination result corresponds to the specific determination result stored in the information storage means when the second determination result is obtained. When the information corresponds to the determination result that the first performance of the performance mode indicating that the first performance is likely to be executed more easily than the information to execute the second performance control rather than the first performance control. A gaming machine B4 characterized in that it is configured to facilitate playing.

According to the gaming machine B4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine B3, when the first rendering of the rendering mode indicating that it is likely to be advantageous to the player is executed, the second rendering of the second rendering mode is executed. Therefore, it is possible to improve the expectation of the player when the second effect of the second effect mode is executed. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In any one of the game machines B2 to B4, the game machine B5 is characterized in that the second effect control terminates execution of the second effect with the first effect corresponding to the specific determination result. .

According to the gaming machine B5, in addition to the effects produced by any one of the gaming machines B2 to B4, the second presentation continues even after the first presentation of the presentation mode indicating that the player is likely to be advantageous, and the second presentation continues. There is an effect that it is possible to prevent the player from having the impression that the bottom is narrowed because the second effect is finished with the first effect of the effect mode showing that it is difficult for the player to benefit.

In any one of game machines B1 to B5, the effect control means determines that the determination result of the secondary determination means is the second determination in a situation where the information corresponding to the specific determination result is not stored in the information storage means. When a result is obtained, the second effect of the first effect mode is executed until the first effect of the specific number of times is completed, and based on the completion of the first effect of the specific number of times, the A game machine B6 is configured to be able to execute a third effect control for executing the second effect of the second effect mode.

According to the gaming machine B6, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines B1 to B5, even if the information corresponding to the specific determination result is not stored in the information storage means when the second determination result is obtained. Since the second effect of the first effect mode can be executed, there is an effect that it is possible to make it difficult for the player to predict whether or not the information corresponding to the specific determination result is stored.

In any one of game machines B1 to B6, the main control means includes dynamic display means for dynamically displaying identification information for indicating the determination result of the determination means, and movement of the identification information by the dynamic display means. and dynamic display period selection means for selecting from a plurality of periods including at least a predetermined specific period as a dynamic display period in the dynamic display, wherein the specific determination result is longer than the specific period. A game machine B7 characterized in that it is composed of a discrimination result corresponding to a dynamic display period of a small number.

According to the game machine B7, in addition to the effects produced by any one of the game machines B1 to B6, the first effect mode is displayed up to the first effect corresponding to the information corresponding to the dynamic display period longer than the specific period. Since the second effect can be executed, there is an effect that the effect mode can be preferably set.

A gaming machine B8, wherein the specific determination result comprises a plurality of determination results including at least a non-compliance determination result different from the first determination result.

According to the game machine B8, in addition to the effect of the game machine B7, the effect mode of the second effect can be switched in response to the result of the discrepancy determination, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved. be.

In any one of the game machines B1 to B8, the secondary control means suppresses the secondary determination means from giving the second determination result at least while the first effect accompanied by the second effect is being executed. A game machine B9 characterized by comprising suppression state setting means for setting a suppression state to be played.

According to the game machine B9, in addition to the effect produced by any one of the game machines B1 to B8, it is suppressed that the second performance is set redundantly due to the second determination result during execution of the second performance. It has the effect of being able to

In the gaming machine B9, the suppression state setting means keeps the suppression state until the last first effect accompanied by the second effect is completed and the first effect not accompanied by the second effect is executed a specific number of times. A gaming machine B10 characterized in that it is configured to be able to set to .

According to the game machine B10, in addition to the effects of the game machine B9, it is possible to suppress the execution of the second effect from being newly determined until the first effect a specific number of times without the second effect is completed. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can clearly understand how long the second effect set at the opportunity 1 continues.

<Characteristic group C> (When a start winning is detected in a state in which a predetermined lost lottery result is included in the hold, the execution timing of the prefetching precursor effect is determined by considering the fluctuation time of the predetermined lost lottery result)
In a gaming machine comprising main control means for executing main control relating to a game, and sub-control means for performing control according to a control signal output from the main control means, the main control means has a discrimination condition. Determination means for performing determination based on establishment, and privilege game execution means for performing a privilege game advantageous to the player based on the fact that the determination result of the determination means is a predetermined first determination result. a first output means for outputting a determination result signal indicating the determination result of the determination means to the slave control means; and acquisition of determination information used for determination by the determination means based on establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition. a second output means capable of outputting a discrimination information signal based on the discrimination information acquired by the discrimination information acquisition means to the slave control means before the discrimination condition is satisfied; and the slave control means is configured to receive at least the determination result signal output by the first output means and the determination information signal output by the second output means. a first effect execution means for executing a first effect according to the determination result indicated by the received determination result signal based on the reception of the determination result signal by the signal receiving means; Based on the fact that the discrimination information signal is received by the means, the signal receiving means receives the discrimination result signal corresponding to the received discrimination information signal, up to a predetermined number of information as an upper limit. and a slave discriminating means for performing discrimination by using at least the received discriminating information signal based on the receipt of the discriminating information signal by the signal receiving means. , based on the determination result of the sub-discrimination means becoming a predetermined second determination result, over the execution period of one or more of the first effects executed after the determination, the first effect second effect executing means for executing two effects; During the period from the determination result to the execution of the first effect corresponding to the specific determination result, there are cases where a predetermined specific condition is established and cases where the specific condition is not established. , and effect variable means capable of varying the effect mode of the second effect.

Among gaming machines such as pachinko machines, gaming machines provided with a display device such as a liquid crystal display device are known. In this conventional gaming machine, symbols are variably displayed on the display device, and the symbols are stopped and displayed in a predetermined combination, thereby providing a winning game advantageous to the player. In addition, various images such as characters and scenery are displayed on the display device in addition to the patterns, and various entertainment effects are performed to improve the interest of the game (for example, Patent Document 1: 2003-325886).

However, there has been a demand for further enhancement of interest.

In addition, in such a conventional gaming machine, by executing the same kind of presentation mode over the presentation period of a plurality of consecutive symbol variation displays, during the presentation period of the plurality of symbol variation displays, Also widely known is one equipped with an omen effect that continuously gives the player a feeling of anticipation for the awarding of a winning game. In such a conventional gaming machine, in order to create a greater sense of expectation for the final variable display effect in which the foreshadowing effect is set, the ball corresponding to the variable display with a relatively high degree of expectation is already reserved. When a new starting prize is detected in the state of being in a state where the prediction effect is drawn, the control is performed so that the lottery itself of the prediction effect is not performed. It is known to suppress the difficulty of understanding whether to pay attention to the display.

However, in such a conventional gaming machine, there is a problem that the frequency of execution of the predictive effect decreases due to the decrease in the lottery opportunity of the predictive effect.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine C1, the effect mode of the second effect can be varied according to the type of the first effect corresponding to the specific determination result, so the effect mode can be diversified. effective.

In the gaming machine C1, the effect variable means corresponds to a first effect mode in which at least the second effect is executed in the effect period of the first effect corresponding to the specific determination result and the specific determination result. A second performance mode in which the second performance is started from the performance period of the first performance executed after the first performance is variable.

According to the game machine C2, in addition to the effects of the game machine C1, there is an effect that the mode of presentation can be diversified.

In the gaming machine C2, the first effect executing means, when executing the first effect corresponding to the specific determination result in a state where the specific condition is established, performs a performance period less than the specific period. When the first effect is executed and the first effect corresponding to the specific determination result is executed in a state where the specific condition is not satisfied, the first effect is performed for a performance period equal to or longer than a predetermined specific period. The effect variable means is configured to be able to execute an effect, and the effect variable means determines that the specific condition is not established until the first effect corresponding to the specific determination result is executed. A gaming machine C3 characterized in that it is constructed so as to be variable to the second performance mode when the game is played.

According to the gaming machine C3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine C2, it is possible to suppress the execution of the second effect during the effect period of the first effect of the effect period longer than the specific period. When the first effect corresponding to the determination result is the effect period longer than the specific period, there is an effect that the player can concentrate on the first effect itself.

In the gaming machine C3, the main control means includes dynamic display means for dynamically displaying identification information for indicating the determination result of the determination means, and dynamic display means for dynamic display of the identification information by the dynamic display means. dynamic display period selection means for selecting from a plurality of periods including at least the specific period as a display period; discrimination information storage means that can be stored until it is used for discriminating means, wherein the dynamic display period selection means selects the dynamic display period in the dynamic display of the identification information for indicating the specific discrimination result. selecting a period of a length less than the specific period when the number of pieces of information of the identification information stored in the identification information storage means is equal to or greater than a predetermined first information number; When the number of information of the discrimination information stored is less than the number of the first information, a period longer than the specific period can be selected, and the first effect is executed. The gaming machine C4 is characterized in that the means is configured to be able to execute the first effect with the dynamic display period selected by the dynamic display period selecting means as the effect period.

According to the gaming machine C4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine C3, the identification information stored in the identification information storage means is used as the dynamic display period in the dynamic display of the identification information for indicating the specific identification result. Since the dynamic display period can be lengthened when the number is less than the first information number than when the number is equal to or greater than the first information number, the number of identification information stored in the identification information storage means is small. There is an effect that the state can be made difficult to continue.

In the gaming machine C4, the secondary control means controls the determination result of the secondary determination means to be the second determination result in a state in which information corresponding to the specific determination result is stored in the information storage means. until the determination using the determination information corresponding to the specific determination result is performed, every time a predetermined specific determination condition is satisfied, the determination corresponding to the specific determination result A lower limit value determination means for determining a lower limit of the determination information stored in the determination information storage means when determination using the information is executed, and the effect variable means is determined by the lower limit value determination means. The game machine C5 is configured to be variable to the first performance mode when the specific condition is met when the determined lower limit value becomes equal to or greater than the first information number.

According to the game machine C5, in addition to the effect of the game machine C4, there is an effect that it is possible to quickly determine whether the first effect mode or the second effect mode is to be used.

In the gaming machine C5, the effect variable means discriminates the sub-control means as the first effect mode based on the fact that the lower limit value determined by the lower limit value determination means is greater than or equal to the first information number. For a plurality of performance periods of the first performance up to the first performance corresponding to the information corresponding to the discrimination information signal stored in the information storage means when the result becomes the second discrimination result A gaming machine C6 characterized in that the effect mode is variable so that the second effect is executed by pressing the second effect.

According to the game machine C6, in addition to the effect of the game machine C5, there is an effect that the second effect can be executed over a larger number of effect periods of the first effect.

In the game machine C5 or C6, the lower limit determination means is configured to be able to determine the lower limit of the discrimination information stored in the discrimination information storage means using the information stored in the information storage means. A gaming machine C7, characterized in that

According to the game machine C7, in addition to the effects of the game machine C5 or C6, there is no need to separately acquire information from the main control means in the judgment, and the judgment is executed only by the information stored on the side of the slave control means. It has the effect of being able to

In any one of game machines C2 to C7, the slave control means responds to the determination information signal stored in the information storage means when the determination result of the slave determination means is the second determination result. When the first effect is changed to the second effect mode by the effect changing means under a situation where the first effect is executed next to the first effect corresponding to the specific determination result, the second effect is performed. A gaming machine C8 characterized by comprising canceling means for canceling execution.

According to the game machine C8, in addition to the effect produced by any one of the game machines C2 to C7, it is possible to suppress an irregular performance mode in which the second effect is executed only for a single first effect. has the effect of being able to

<Feature D Group> (If an irregular winning on the priority side occurs during the look-ahead predictive effect, the predictive scenario is rewritten in consideration of the variable display of the irregular winning.)
In a gaming machine comprising main control means for executing main control related to a game and sub-control means for performing control according to a control signal output from the main control means, the main control means controls a predetermined acquisition discrimination information acquisition means for acquiring discrimination information based on the establishment of a condition; discrimination means for performing discrimination using the discrimination information acquired by the discrimination information acquisition means based on the establishment of a predetermined discrimination condition; A privilege game executing means for executing a privilege game advantageous to the player based on the discrimination result of the discrimination means becoming a predetermined first discrimination result; discrimination information storage means capable of storing discrimination information up to a predetermined number of pieces of information until it is used for discriminating the discriminating means; display means capable of displaying the discriminating information; dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the identification information for indicating a result; dynamic display period determination means for determining a dynamic display period in the dynamic display of the identification information by the dynamic display means; a first output means for outputting a discrimination result signal indicating a discrimination result of means to the slave control means; a second output means capable of outputting to the slave control means before the dynamic display of the identification information is completed, and the dynamic display means when a predetermined specific condition is satisfied; specific state setting means for setting a specific state in which the start of dynamic display of the new identification information is suppressed by the and a third output means for outputting a specific state setting signal indicating to the slave control means, the slave control means outputting the determination result signal output by the first output means and the second output means a signal receiving means configured to receive at least the discrimination information signal output by the third output means and the specific state signal output by the third output means; and the discrimination result signal received by the signal receiving means. Based on that, the first effect execution means for executing the first effect according to the determination result indicated by the received determination result signal, and the signal receiving means based on the reception of the determination information signal, Information corresponding to the received discrimination information signal is recorded at least up to a predetermined number of information until the corresponding discrimination result signal is received by the signal receiving means. a sub discriminating means for performing discrimination by using at least the received discriminating information signal based on the discrimination information signal being received by the signal receiving means; and a sub discriminating means therefor. Based on the determination result of the means becoming a predetermined second determination result, the second effect is executed over the execution period of one or more of the first effects executed after the determination. and the case where the specific state signal is not received based on the fact that the specific state signal is received by the signal receiving means after the execution of the second effect is started. A game machine D1, characterized by comprising an effect control means for controlling different effect modes.

Among gaming machines such as pachinko machines, gaming machines provided with a display device such as a liquid crystal display device are known. In this conventional gaming machine, symbols are variably displayed on the display device, and the symbols are stopped and displayed in a predetermined combination, thereby providing a winning game advantageous to the player. In addition, various images such as characters and scenery are displayed on the display device in addition to the patterns, and various entertainment effects are performed to improve the interest of the game (for example, Patent Document 1: 2003-325886).

However, there has been a demand for further enhancement of interest.

In addition, in such conventional gaming machines, a plurality of special symbols (first special symbol and second special symbol) are provided in which a lottery is executed at different timings, and one special symbol (second special symbol) is provided. There is also a gaming machine with a specification that executes the lottery for the other special symbol (second special symbol) preferentially over the lottery for the other special symbol (second special symbol). In such a conventional gaming machine, when the lottery condition for the special symbols on the priority side is satisfied in the game state (for example, normal state) in which the lottery for the special symbols on the non-priority side is mainly executed, During the execution of the variable display of the special symbols, it becomes impossible to execute the performance targeting the special symbols on the non-prioritized side, so there is a possibility that the player will feel uncomfortable with the performance mode. There was a problem.

Furthermore, in conventional gaming machines, in a game state (for example, normal game state) in which the game should proceed by executing a non-prioritized special symbol lottery, the lottery conditions for the priority side special symbols are low. There are also known gaming machines with game properties that can be established with probability. In such a conventional game machine, the lottery for the special symbols on the priority side is more advantageous than the lottery for the special symbols on the non-priority side, so that the lottery for the special symbols on the non-priority side wins big. In addition to that, there are also those that are trying to improve interest by realizing game characteristics that make you expect that the lottery conditions for special symbols on the priority side are satisfied. However, in the gaming machine with such specifications, the state has shifted to a state where the lottery conditions for the special symbols on the priority side can be satisfied (for example, the electric accessory that opens and closes the starting port, which is the lottery condition for the special symbols on the priority side, has been released. ), it is normal to execute a special effect for indicating that the lottery conditions for the special symbols on the priority side are likely to be established, so it corresponds to the special symbol lottery on the non-priority side. There is a problem that the production is interrupted or canceled by a special production.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine D1, the effect mode can be varied depending on whether or not the specific period is set during the execution of the second effect, so that the effect of being able to diversify the effect mode is obtained. be.

In the game machine D1, the game machine D2 is characterized in that the effect control means is configured to be controllable such that one of the second effects is executed during the specific state.

According to the game machine D2, in addition to the effects of the game machine D1, the second effect can be executed using the specific state, so there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the interruption of the second effect. .

In the gaming machine D1 or D2, second discrimination information acquisition means for acquiring second discrimination information based on the establishment of a second acquisition condition different from the predetermined acquisition condition, and acquired by the discrimination information acquisition means The second determination information acquired by the second determination means for performing determination using the second determination information, and the second determination information acquired by the second determination information acquisition means, with the second information number as the upper limit, the second second discrimination information storage means for storing information until it is used for discrimination by the discrimination means; and second dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the identification information for indicating the discrimination result of the second discrimination means on the display means. and when one or more of the discrimination information are stored in the discrimination information storage means and one or more of the second discrimination information are stored in the second discrimination information storage means, the dynamic display means The dynamic display of the identification information by the second dynamic display means is prioritized over the dynamic display of the identification information by the specific state setting means. The gaming machine D3 is characterized in that a dynamic display period in the dynamic display of the identification information by the second dynamic display means can be set as the specific state.

According to the gaming machine D3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine D1 or D2, when the second determination is performed during execution of the second effect, the identification information corresponding to the second determination is moved. Since the dynamic display period of the target display can be incorporated into the effect period of the second effect, there is an effect that the effect mode can be preferably set.

In any one of the game machines D1 to D3, the effect control means controls the second effect over the specific state and an execution period of at least one of the first effects executed after the specific state ends. A gaming machine D4 characterized by being controllable so as to execute a pseudo first effect in a mode of effect difficult to distinguish from the first effect of 1 above.

According to the game machine D4, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines D1 to D3, there is an effect that the mode of presentation can be diversified.

In the game machine D4, the effect control means executes one of the second effects during the specific state so that the number of executions of the first effect accompanied by the second effect is a predetermined specific number of times of execution. The game machine D5 is configured so as to be controllable so that the pseudo first effect is executed when the value exceeds.

According to the gaming machine D5, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine D4, there is an effect that the number of executions of the first effect accompanied by the second effect can be visually limited to a specific number of times of execution or less.

In the gaming machine D5, the effect control means controls the first effect accompanied by the second effect when the last first effect accompanied by the second effect is the first effect corresponding to the first determination result. Regardless of whether or not the number of executions of one performance exceeds the specific number of executions, the second performance is configured to be controllable so that one of the second performances is executed during the specific state. Game machine D6.

According to the game machine D6, in addition to the effects of the game machine D5, when the first determination result is obtained, the apparent number of times the first effect accompanied by the second effect is executed is set to a number larger than the specified number of times. Therefore, there is an effect that a game can be played while paying attention to the number of times the first effect accompanied by the second effect and the pseudo first effect are executed.

In any one of the game machines D4 to D6, the effect control means controls the specific state and the end of the specific state when a period longer than a predetermined first period is set as the specific state. and the execution period of at least one of the first effects to be executed later, a plurality of the pseudo first effects having the effect period less than the first period are executed. Characterized game machine D7.

According to the game machine D7, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines D4 to D6, there is an effect that it is possible to further diversify the mode of presentation.

<Feature E group> (When the normal pattern hold corresponding to the advantageous electric chew opening pattern is suspended, set the precursor effect at least until the electric chew is opened according to the look-ahead result of the normal pattern and special pattern do)
In a gaming machine comprising main control means for executing main control relating to a game and sub-control means for performing control according to a control signal output from the main control means, the main control means comprises a first A first determination means for executing a first determination based on the establishment of a determination condition, and an advantage for a player based on the fact that the determination result of the first determination means is a predetermined first determination result. privilege game execution means for executing a privilege game; first output means for outputting a first determination result signal indicating the determination result of the determination means to the secondary control means; and a predetermined first acquisition condition Based on the establishment of a first determination information acquisition means for acquiring the first determination information used for determination of the first determination means, and a first determination information based on the first determination information acquired by the first determination information acquisition means a second output means capable of outputting a determination information signal to said sub-control means before said first determination condition is established; a ball entering means capable of entering a game ball; and said ball entering means. A variable means capable of changing between a first position where a game ball can enter and a second position where a game ball is more difficult to enter than the first position, and at least different from the first determination condition. a second determination means for executing a second determination different from the first determination based on the establishment of a second determination condition; and a predetermined second determination result that is the determination result of the second determination means variable game execution means for executing a variable game in which the variable means is varied from the second position to the first position for a predetermined period based on the fact that the variable game is executed; and the variable game executed by the variable game execution means. Type determination means for determining the type of one variable game out of a plurality of types including at least a first variable game and a second variable game that is more likely to be advantageous to the player than the first variable game as a type; second discrimination information acquisition means for acquiring second discrimination information used for discrimination by the second discrimination means based on the establishment of a predetermined second acquisition condition; a third output means capable of outputting a second determination information signal based on the second determination information to the slave control means before the second determination condition is satisfied, wherein the slave control means the first determination result signal output by the first output means, the first determination information signal output by the second output means, the second determination result signal output by the third output means; based on the reception of the determination result signal by the signal receiving means configured to receive at least the a first effect execution means for executing a first effect according to the determination result indicated by the received determination result signal; information storage means capable of storing information corresponding to the received first determination information signal, up to a predetermined number of pieces of information, at least until the corresponding first determination result signal is received by the signal receiving means; When the second discrimination information signal is received by the signal receiving means, a sub discriminating means for discriminating at least using the received second discrimination information signal; based on the fact that the determination result of the secondary determination means is a predetermined specific determination result in a state in which the information corresponding to the first determination information signal that is supplied satisfies a predetermined specific condition, A gaming machine E1 characterized by comprising a second effect executing means for executing a second effect that continues at least until a corresponding determination result of the second determination is indicated.

Among gaming machines such as pachinko machines, gaming machines provided with a display device such as a liquid crystal display device are known. In this conventional gaming machine, symbols are variably displayed on the display device, and the symbols are stopped and displayed in a predetermined combination, thereby providing a winning game advantageous to the player. In addition, various images such as characters and scenery are displayed on the display device in addition to the patterns, and various entertainment effects are performed to improve the interest of the game (for example, Patent Document 1: 2003-325886).

However, there has been a demand for further enhancement of interest.

In addition, in such a conventional gaming machine, by executing the same kind of presentation mode over the presentation period of a plurality of consecutive symbol variation displays, during the presentation period of the plurality of symbol variation displays, Also widely known is one equipped with an omen effect that continuously gives the player a feeling of anticipation for the awarding of a winning game. However, the predictive effect in such a conventional gaming machine can only notify the degree of expectation that a winning game will be awarded, so there is a problem that the effect mode becomes monotonous.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine E1, whether or not to execute the second effect indicating the determination result of the second determination according to the information corresponding to the first determination information signal stored in the information storage means. There is an effect that it is possible to realize a novel control of discriminating .

In the gaming machine E1, the sub-discrimination means is configured so that the specific discrimination result can be obtained when the second discrimination information signal is a signal indicating discrimination information corresponding to the second variable game. Characterized game machine E2.

According to the gaming machine E2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine E1, the second effect can indicate that the second variable game has a high degree of advantage. There is an effect that interest can be improved.

In the gaming machine E1 or E2, the second effect comprises an effect for executing a predetermined specific effect mode during the execution period of the plurality of the first effects, and the second effect is executed. The means is based on the judgment result of the sub-judgment means being the specific judgment result in a state in which a plurality of pieces of information corresponding to the first discrimination information signal stored in the information storage means are stored. , the second effect can be executed such that a predetermined specific effect mode is executed for a plurality of the first effects started until the corresponding second determination result is indicated. The game machine E3 is characterized by being

According to the game machine E3, in addition to the effects of the game machine E1 or E2, a specific effect mode is continuously executed for a plurality of first effects, and finally the second determination result is displayed. Since it is possible to realize such an effect mode, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine E3, the secondary control means, during the execution of the second effect, after the predetermined first determination executed before the second determination result is shown, the first A game characterized by comprising a pseudo first effect executing means for executing a pseudo first effect composed of a performance mode indistinguishable from the first effect, with a period until the determination result of 2 is indicated as a performance period. Machine E4.

According to the game machine E4, in addition to the effects of the game machine E3, a novel presentation mode is realized that makes the player think that the second discrimination result is the discrimination result of the first discrimination means. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine E4, the pseudo first effect execution means starts last of the plurality of first determinations that are started before the second determination result is shown during execution of the second effect. If the period from the execution of the first determination performed until the second determination result is indicated is a period shorter than a predetermined specific period, the last start of the first determination The pseudo first effect can be executed with a period from the start of the first determination that is started one time before to the display of the second determination result as a performance period. Gaming machine E5.

According to the gaming machine E5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine E4, the execution period of the pseudo first effect can be sufficiently ensured, so that the player can be assured that the second determination result has been obtained. There is an effect that it can be recognized.

In the gaming machine E5, the pseudo first effect execution means is the last of the plurality of first determinations to be started before the second determination result is shown during execution of the second effect. If the period from the execution of the first determination to the indication of the second determination result is equal to or longer than a predetermined specific period, from the start of the first determination that is started last to the The gaming machine E6 is characterized in that it is configured to be able to execute the pseudo first effect, the period of time until the second determination result is indicated as the effect period.

According to the game machine E6, in addition to the effect of the game machine E5, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the execution period of the pseudo first effect from becoming too long.

In the gaming machine E5 or E6, the sub-control means executes the pseudo effects of a plurality of predetermined different effect periods as a pseudo effect mode included in the pseudo first effect executed by the pseudo first effect executing means. A game machine characterized by comprising a pseudo performance mode selection means for selecting the pseudo performance mode of the longest performance period among the performance periods ending before the second determination result is indicated among the modes. E7.

According to the gaming machine E7, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine E5 or E6, the period from the end of the pseudo performance mode to the second determination result can be shortened, so that the game is slowed down. There is an effect that it can be suppressed that it will be done.

In the gaming machine E7, the pseudo first effect comprises at least an effect mode in which a predetermined notification symbol corresponding to the second determination result is displayed, and the pseudo first effect executing means The game machine E8 is characterized in that the predetermined notification pattern can be continuously displayed from the end of the pseudo performance mode to the display of the second determination result.

According to the gaming machine E8, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine E7, it is possible to prevent the performance from not being executed during the period from the end of the pseudo performance mode to the display of the second determination result. has the effect of being able to

A game machine E9 characterized in that, in any one of the game machines E1 to E8, the game ball enters the ball entering means so that the first determination information can be easily acquired.

According to the gaming machine E9, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines E1 to E8, it is possible to execute a novel presentation that indicates to the player that the first discrimination information is more likely to be acquired by the second presentation. effective.

<Feature F group> (When it is determined that a general pattern hit with an advantageous electric chew opening pattern will start during the hit fluctuation, the general pattern hit is notified preferentially over the notification of the hit)
A first determination means for executing a first determination based on the establishment of a first determination condition, and a game based on the determination result of the first determination means becoming a predetermined first determination result. A first privilege game executing means for executing a first privilege game advantageous to the player, a specific effect executing means for executing a specific effect for indicating the determination result of the first determining means, and the first determination condition. a second determination means for executing a second determination different from the first determination based on the establishment of a different second determination condition; and a second determination result in which the determination result of the second determination means is predetermined. Based on that, a second privilege game execution means for executing a second privilege game that is advantageous to the player and different from the first privilege game, and the second privilege game execution means executed by the second privilege game execution means a type determining means for determining one of a plurality of types including at least a first type and a second type having a higher degree of advantage than the first type as the type of the second privilege game; and the first discrimination. When the determination result of the second determination means is the second determination result during execution of the specific effect for indicating the result, and the second type is determined by the type determination type means, the first type is determined. A performance control means capable of controlling so that the second determination result is notified earlier than the determination result, and the privilege that can be obtained from the start to the end of the first privilege game is , The gaming machine F1 is characterized in that the amount of bonuses that can be obtained during the period from the start of the second bonus game to the end of the second bonus game is likely to be larger than that of the second bonus game.

Among gaming machines such as pachinko machines, gaming machines provided with a display device such as a liquid crystal display device are known. In this conventional gaming machine, symbols are variably displayed on the display device, and the symbols are stopped and displayed in a predetermined combination, thereby providing a winning game advantageous to the player. In addition, various images such as characters and scenery are displayed on the display device in addition to the patterns, and various entertainment effects are performed to improve the interest of the game (for example, Patent Document 1: 2003-325886).

However, there has been a demand for further enhancement of interest.

In addition, in such a conventional game machine, there is a configuration in which an electric accessory is attached to a part of the start port, and an effect indicating whether or not the electric accessory is opened is displayed in the winning game. There are also those that are executed in parallel with the effect indicating whether or not to be given. However, in such a conventional gaming machine, since it is common to execute the effect mode indicating that a winning game is awarded most conspicuously, the timing of starting the winning game and the timing of releasing the electric accessory are different. There is also the problem that, when they are close to each other in terms of time, it is not possible to notify that the electric accessary is released, and there is a possibility that the player loses the opportunity to enter the game ball into the start opening. rice field.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine F1, it is possible to realize a novel performance mode in which the second privilege game, which tends to have fewer privileges, is announced earlier than the first privilege game, which tends to have more privileges. There is an effect that it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

In the gaming machine F1, passing means that can satisfy the second determination condition by passing a game ball, and ball entry means that facilitates the establishment of the first determination condition by the entry of a game ball, A variable means that can be changed between a first position where a game ball can be entered into the ball entering means and a second position where the game ball is more difficult to enter than the first position, The gaming machine F2 is characterized in that the second privilege game executing means varies the variable means from the second position to the first position for a predetermined period as the second privilege game.

According to the game machine F2, in addition to the effects of the game machine F1, a novel effect is given in which the second privilege game, which merely facilitates the establishment of the first discrimination condition, is given priority over the first privilege game. There is an effect that the mode can be realized.

In the gaming machine F1 or F2, when the first privilege game is started during execution of the second privilege game, a first effect is provided that makes it difficult for the player to recognize that the first privilege game has started. , a game machine F3 characterized by being provided with a first effect executing means for executing at least until the second privilege game is finished.

According to the gaming machine F3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine F1 or F2, there is an effect that the player can concentrate only on the second privilege game while the second privilege game is being executed.

In the gaming machine F3, a start effect execution means for executing a start effect for indicating that the first privilege game has started based on the start of the first privilege game, and the start effect execution means a type determining means for determining one of a plurality of types including at least a first type and a second type having a shorter effect period than the first type as the type of the start effect to be executed, The start effect executing means is configured to be able to execute the start effect of the second type after the first effect is completed when the first effect is executed by the first effect executing means. A gaming machine F4 characterized by:

According to the gaming machine F4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine F3, it is possible to make the player feel as if the first privilege game was suddenly announced based on the end of the second privilege game. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In any one of the game machines F1 to F4, the effect control means causes the determination result of the second determination means to be the second determination result during execution of the specific effect for indicating the first determination result, When the second type is determined by the type determination type means, the performance result of the specific performance can be changed to the performance result for indicating the second determination result. A game machine F5.

According to the game machine F5, in addition to the effects produced by any one of the game machines F1 to F4, both the determination result of the first determination means and the determination result of the second determination means can be indicated by the specific effect, so that the player can understand. There is an effect that an easy presentation mode can be realized.

In the gaming machine F5, the first privilege based on the end of the second privilege game of the second type during the execution of the specific performance that is changed to the performance result for indicating the second determination result. A game machine F6 comprising a pseudo specific effect executing means for executing a pseudo specific effect of a performance mode difficult to distinguish from the specific effect showing the first determination result in a period until the execution of the game is started. .

According to the game machine F6, in addition to the effects of the game machine F5, after preferentially notifying that the second determination result is obtained by the specific effect, it is preferably notified that the first determination result is obtained. It has the effect of being able to

In the gaming machine F6, the pseudo specific effect executing means has a period from the end of the second privilege game of the second type to the start of execution of the first privilege game longer than or equal to a predetermined specific period. The gaming machine F7 is configured to be able to execute the pseudo specific effect when .

According to the game machine F7, in addition to the effects of the game machine F6, the effect period of the pseudo specific effect can be made longer than the specific period, so that the player can be clearly informed that the first determination result has been obtained. There is an effect that it can be understood.

The gaming machine F7 includes a second privilege game effect executing means for executing a second privilege game effect indicating that the second privilege game is being executed during the execution period of the second privilege game, 2 privilege game effect executing means, when the period from the end of the second privilege game of the second type to the start of execution of the first privilege game is less than the specific period, the first The gaming machine F8 is characterized in that the execution of the second privilege game effect can be extended until the execution of the privilege game is started.

According to the game machine F8, in addition to the effect of the game machine F7, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the fact that the pseudo specific effect is executed in a short period of time and the effect mode becomes difficult to understand.

<Characteristic group G> (A lottery for whether or not to execute the look-ahead prognostic effect that occurs over multiple fluctuations and the timing to actually start are different)
A determination means for performing determination based on the establishment of a determination condition, and a privilege for executing a privilege game advantageous to a player based on the fact that the determination result of the determination means is a predetermined first determination result. a game execution means; a first effect execution means for executing a first effect according to the determination result of the determination based on the execution of determination by the determination means; a discrimination information acquiring means for acquiring discrimination information used for discrimination by the discriminating means; and information corresponding to the acquired discrimination information based on the discrimination information being acquired by the discrimination information acquiring means, a predetermined Judgment is performed based on the acquisition of the discrimination information by the information storage means capable of storing up to the number of pieces of information until the corresponding discrimination information is used for discrimination by the discrimination means, and by the discrimination information acquisition means. Determination means, and based on the fact that the determination result of the determination means is a predetermined first determination result, over the execution period of at least one or more of the first effects that are executed after the determination and a second effect executing means for executing the second effect by pressing the second effect, and controllable so that at least one of the first effects is executed without the second effect after the first determination result is obtained. and effect control means.

Among gaming machines such as pachinko machines, gaming machines provided with a display device such as a liquid crystal display device are known. In this conventional gaming machine, symbols are variably displayed on the display device, and the symbols are stopped and displayed in a predetermined combination, thereby providing a winning game advantageous to the player. In addition, various images such as characters and scenery are displayed on the display device in addition to the patterns, and various entertainment effects are performed to improve the interest of the game (for example, Patent Document 1: 2003-325886).

However, there has been a demand for further enhancement of interest.

On the other hand, in the game machine G1, even after the execution of the second performance is determined, at least one first performance can be executed without the second performance, so that the player's interest in the game is improved. It has the effect of being able to

In the gaming machine G1, the effect control means controls the information storage means so that the determination result of the determination means is the first determination in a state in which information corresponding to a predetermined specific determination result is stored. The game machine G2 is configured so as to be controllable so that at least the first effect corresponding to the specific determination result is executed without the second effect when a result is obtained.

According to the game machine G2, in addition to the effects of the game machine G1, the first effect corresponding to the specific determination result is executed without the second effect, so that the effect mode can be preferably set. effective.

The gaming machine G2 includes an effect mode determining means for determining one of a plurality of predetermined effect modes as the effect mode of the second effect executed by the second effect executing means, wherein the effect The control means performs the specific determination when the determination result of the determination means is the first determination result in a state where the information corresponding to the specific determination result is stored in the information storage means. The first performance is configured to be controllable so that it is executed without the second performance until the performance period of the first performance corresponding to the result ends, and the performance mode. The game machine G3 is characterized in that the determination means is configured to be able to determine the effect mode of the second effect after the first effect corresponding to the specific determination result is completed.

According to the gaming machine G3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine G2, it is possible to differentiate the timing between the determination by the determination means and the control for determining the rendering mode of the second rendering, so that the control processing is concentrated. There is an effect that it is possible to suppress an increase in processing load due to storage.

In the game machine G2 or G3, dynamic display means for dynamically displaying identification information for indicating the determination result of the determination means, and a dynamic display period in the dynamic display of the identification information by the dynamic display means, dynamic display period selection means for selecting from among a plurality of periods including at least a predetermined specific period, wherein the first effect execution means performs the dynamic display period selected by the dynamic display means. The first effect can be executed, and the specific determination result is composed of a determination result corresponding to a dynamic display period longer than the specific period. Game machine G4.

According to the gaming machine G4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine G2 or G3, by configuring not to execute the second presentation for the first presentation during the dynamic display period longer than the specified period, the specified There is an effect that it is possible to concentrate on the first effect showing the determination result of .

In the game machine G4, the specific determination result is composed of a plurality of determination results including at least an outlier determination result different from the first determination result.

According to the gaming machine G5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine G4, it is possible to provide a situation in which the second effect is started after the specific determination result is completed even though the privilege game is not executed. It is possible to make it difficult to predict the start timing of the production. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

<Characteristic group H> (When winning the look-ahead omen effect in a state in which the ball corresponding to the predetermined lottery result is already on hold, a specific omen is run)
A determination means for performing determination based on the establishment of a determination condition, and a privilege for executing a privilege game advantageous to a player based on the fact that the determination result of the determination means is a predetermined first determination result. a game execution means; a first effect execution means for executing a first effect according to the determination result of the determination based on the execution of determination by the determination means; a discrimination information acquiring means for acquiring discrimination information used for discrimination by the discriminating means; and information corresponding to the acquired discrimination information based on the discrimination information being acquired by the discrimination information acquiring means, a predetermined Judgment is performed based on the acquisition of the discrimination information by the information storage means capable of storing up to the number of pieces of information until the corresponding discrimination information is used for discrimination by the discrimination means, and by the discrimination information acquisition means. Determination means, and based on the fact that the determination result of the determination means is a predetermined first determination result, over the execution period of at least one or more of the first effects that are executed after the determination and a second effect execution means for executing the second effect in a state where the information corresponding to the predetermined specific determination result is stored in the information storage means. When the determination result of the determination means is the first determination result, the second effect in the first effect mode is executed at least until the execution period of the first effect corresponding to the specific determination result. , the gaming machine H1 is configured to be able to execute the second effect of the second effect mode based on the end of the first effect corresponding to the specific determination result.

Among gaming machines such as pachinko machines, gaming machines provided with a display device such as a liquid crystal display device are known. In this conventional gaming machine, symbols are variably displayed on the display device, and the symbols are stopped and displayed in a predetermined combination, thereby providing a winning game advantageous to the player. In addition, various images such as characters and scenery are displayed on the display device in addition to the patterns, and various entertainment effects are performed to improve the interest of the game (for example, Patent Document 1: 2003-325886).

However, there has been a demand for further enhancement of interest.

On the other hand, in the gaming machine H1, the effect mode can be changed before and after the first effect corresponding to the specific determination result is finished, so that there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine H1, the second effect executing means is caused to execute the second effect in the first effect mode until the execution period of the first effect corresponding to the specific determination result, and the specific determination is performed. Based on the completion of the first effect corresponding to the result, the specific determination is performed with respect to the first effect control for executing the second effect of the second effect mode and the second effect executing means. The second performance of the first performance mode is executed until the execution period of the predetermined first performance executed before the first performance corresponding to the result, and the predetermined first performance is completed. A game machine H2 comprising a second effect control for executing the second effect of the second effect mode based on, and effect control means capable of being controlled by the second effect control.

According to the game machine H2, in addition to the effects of the game machine H1, there is an effect that the mode of presentation can be diversified.

In the gaming machine H2, the information stored in the information storage means when the determination result of the determination means is the first determination result, and the information storage means already stored when the determination result is the second determination result. and information corresponding to the specific determination result stored in the second determination means for executing determination using at least the effect control means, according to the determination result of the second determination means, the The game machine H3 is configured to be switchable between executing the first effect control and executing the second effect control.

According to the game machine H3, in addition to the effects of the game machine H2, the first effect is produced using the information stored in the information storage means when the first determination result is obtained and the information corresponding to the specific determination result. Since it is possible to switch whether to execute the control or to execute the second effect control, there is an effect that the effect mode can be set more preferably.

In the gaming machine H3, the second determination means determines the first determination result rather than the information stored in the information storage means when the determination result of the first determination means becomes the first determination result. The determination result that the first effect of the effect mode indicating that the information corresponding to the specific determination result already stored in the information storage means is likely to be more advantageous to the player when the condition becomes , is likely to be executed. When it is information corresponding to, it becomes easier to execute the first effect control than the second effect control, and when the determination result of the first determination means becomes the first determination result, the information The information stored in the storage means is likely to be more advantageous to the player than the information corresponding to the specific determination result already stored in the information storage means when the second determination result is obtained. When the information corresponds to the determination result that the first effect of the effect mode indicating that is likely to be executed, the second effect control is easier to execute than the first effect control. A gaming machine H4 characterized by:

According to the gaming machine H4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine H3, when the first rendering of the rendering mode indicating that it is likely to be advantageous to the player is executed, the second rendering of the second rendering mode is executed. Therefore, it is possible to improve the expectation of the player when the second effect of the second effect mode is executed. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In any one of the game machines H2 to H4, the game machine H5 is characterized in that the second effect control terminates execution of the second effect with the first effect corresponding to the specific determination result. .

According to the gaming machine H5, in addition to the effect produced by any one of the gaming machines H2 to H4, the second presentation continues even after the first presentation of the presentation mode indicating that the player is likely to be advantageous, and the second presentation continues. There is an effect that it is possible to prevent the player from having the impression that the bottom is narrowed because the second effect is finished with the first effect of the effect mode showing that it is difficult for the player to benefit.

<Feature Group I> (When a start winning is detected in a state in which a predetermined lottery result is included in the hold, the effect mode of the precursor effect is determined according to the effect mode of the predetermined lottery result)
A determination means for performing determination based on the establishment of a determination condition, and a privilege for executing a privilege game advantageous to a player based on the fact that the determination result of the determination means is a predetermined first determination result. a game execution means; a first effect execution means for executing a first effect according to the determination result of the determination based on the execution of determination by the determination means; a discrimination information acquiring means for acquiring discrimination information used for discrimination by the discriminating means; and information corresponding to the acquired discrimination information based on the discrimination information being acquired by the discrimination information acquiring means, a predetermined Judgment is performed based on the acquisition of the discrimination information by the information storage means capable of storing up to the number of pieces of information until the corresponding discrimination information is used for discrimination by the discrimination means, and by the discrimination information acquisition means. Determination means, and based on the fact that the determination result of the determination means is a predetermined first determination result, over the execution period of at least one or more of the first effects that are executed after the determination second effect executing means for executing the second effect by pressing the second effect executing means; After the judgment result of 1 is obtained, the second production is performed when the production mode of the first production corresponding to the specific determination result satisfies a predetermined specific condition and when the specific condition is not satisfied. A game machine I1 characterized by comprising an effect variable means capable of varying the effect mode.

Among gaming machines such as pachinko machines, gaming machines provided with a display device such as a liquid crystal display device are known. In this conventional gaming machine, symbols are variably displayed on the display device, and the symbols are stopped and displayed in a predetermined combination, thereby providing a winning game advantageous to the player. In addition, various images such as characters and scenery are displayed on the display device in addition to the patterns, and various entertainment effects are performed to improve the interest of the game (for example, Patent Document 1: 2003-325886).

However, there has been a demand for further enhancement of interest.

On the other hand, in the gaming machine I1, the effect mode of the second effect can be changed according to the effect mode of the first effect corresponding to the specific determination result, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved. It has the effect of being able to

In the gaming machine I1, the effect variable means corresponds to a first effect mode in which at least the second effect is executed during the effect period of the first effect corresponding to the specific determination result and the specific determination result. The game machine I2 is characterized by being configured to be able to change a second performance mode in which the second performance is started from the performance period of the first performance executed after the first performance.

According to the game machine I2, in addition to the effects of the game machine I1, there is an effect that the mode of presentation can be diversified.

In the gaming machine I2, the first effect execution means, when executing the first effect corresponding to the specific determination result in a state where the specific condition is established, performs a performance period of less than the specific period. When the first effect is executed and the first effect corresponding to the specific determination result is executed in a state where the specific condition is not satisfied, the first effect is performed for a performance period equal to or longer than a predetermined specific period. The effect variable means is configured to be able to execute an effect, and the effect variable means determines that the specific condition is not established until the first effect corresponding to the specific determination result is executed. A gaming machine I3 characterized in that it is constructed so as to be variable to the second performance mode when the game machine I3.

According to the gaming machine I3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine I2, it is possible to suppress the execution of the second effect during the effect period of the first effect in the effect period longer than the specific period. When the first effect corresponding to the determination result is the effect period longer than the specific period, there is an effect that the player can concentrate on the first effect itself.

In the gaming machine I3, the dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the identification information for indicating the determination result of the determination means, and the dynamic display period in the dynamic display of the identification information by the dynamic display means, the specified and dynamic display period selection means for selecting from among a plurality of periods including at least a period, wherein the dynamic display period selection means selects a dynamic display of the identification information for indicating the specific determination result. If the number of pieces of information stored in the information storage means is equal to or greater than a predetermined first number of pieces of information, a period shorter than the specific period is selected as the target display period, and stored in the information storage means. when the number of pieces of information stored is less than the first number of pieces of information, a period longer than the specific period can be selected, and the first effect executing means is configured to select the dynamic The game machine I4 is configured to be able to execute the first effect with the dynamic display period selected by the display period selection means as the effect period.

According to the gaming machine I4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine I3, the discrimination information stored in the discrimination information storage means is used as the dynamic display period in the dynamic display of the discrimination information for indicating the specific discrimination result. Since the dynamic display period can be lengthened when the number is less than the first information number than when the number is equal to or greater than the first information number, the number of identification information stored in the identification information storage means is small. There is an effect that the state can be made difficult to continue.

In the game machine I4, when the information corresponding to the specific determination result is stored in the information storage means, the determination result of the determination means becomes the first determination result, and then the specific determination result is obtained. Until the determination using the determination information corresponding to is performed, each time a predetermined specific determination condition is satisfied, the information when the determination corresponding to the specific determination result is performed A lower limit value determination means for determining a lower limit value of the number of information stored in the storage means is provided, and the effect variable means determines that the lower limit value determined by the lower limit value determination means is greater than or equal to the first number of information. as the establishment of the specific condition, the game machine I5 is configured to be variable to the first performance mode.

According to the game machine I5, in addition to the effect of the game machine I4, there is an effect that it is possible to quickly determine whether the first effect mode or the second effect mode is to be used.

<Feature J group> (If a specific state is set in which the special lottery is restricted during the foreshadowing effect, the precursor scenario is rewritten considering the period of the specific state)
A determination means for performing determination based on the establishment of a determination condition, and a privilege for executing a privilege game advantageous to a player based on the fact that the determination result of the determination means is a predetermined first determination result. a game execution means; a first effect execution means for executing a first effect according to the determination result of the determination based on the execution of determination by the determination means; a discrimination information acquiring means for acquiring discrimination information used for discrimination by the discriminating means; and information corresponding to the acquired discrimination information based on the discrimination information being acquired by the discrimination information acquiring means, a predetermined Judgment is performed based on the acquisition of the discrimination information by the information storage means capable of storing up to the number of pieces of information until the corresponding discrimination information is used for discrimination by the discrimination means, and by the discrimination information acquisition means. Determination means, and based on the fact that the determination result of the determination means is a predetermined first determination result, over the execution period of at least one or more of the first effects that are executed after the determination A second effect executing means for executing the second effect by pressing and when a predetermined specific condition is satisfied after the determination by the determining means is completed, the determining means performs new determination. and a specific state setting means for setting a specific state in which the second effect is suppressed, and a different effect when the specific state is set after the execution of the second effect is started and when the specific state is not set. A game machine J1 characterized by comprising a performance control means for controlling to be in a mode.

Among gaming machines such as pachinko machines, gaming machines provided with a display device such as a liquid crystal display device are known. In this conventional gaming machine, symbols are variably displayed on the display device, and the symbols are stopped and displayed in a predetermined combination, thereby providing a winning game advantageous to the player. In addition, various images such as characters and scenery are displayed on the display device in addition to the patterns, and various entertainment effects are performed to improve the interest of the game (for example, Patent Document 1: 2003-325886).

However, there has been a demand for further enhancement of interest.

On the other hand, in the gaming machine J1, the effect mode can be varied depending on whether or not the specific state is set, so there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In the game machine J1, the game machine J2 is characterized in that the effect control means is configured to be controllable such that one of the second effects is executed during the specific state.

According to the game machine J2, in addition to the effects of the game machine J1, the second effect can be executed using the specific state, so there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the second effect from being interrupted. .

In the gaming machine J1 or J2, display means capable of displaying identification information; first dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the identification information for indicating the determination result of the determination means on the display means; second discrimination information acquisition means for acquiring second discrimination information based on the establishment of a second acquisition condition different from the acquisition condition; and discrimination using the second discrimination information acquired by the discrimination information acquisition means and information corresponding to the second discrimination information acquired by the second discrimination information acquisition means, with the number of second information as the upper limit, the corresponding discrimination information is the second a second information storage means capable of storing information until it is used for discrimination by the discrimination means; a second dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the identification information for indicating the discrimination result of the second discrimination means on the display means; wherein the information storage means stores one or more of the discrimination information, and the second information storage means stores one or more of the second discrimination information, the identification by the dynamic display means The dynamic display of the identification information by the second dynamic display means is prioritized over the dynamic display of the information, and the specific state setting means sets the specific state to , a game machine J3 characterized in that a dynamic display period in the dynamic display of the identification information by the second dynamic display means can be set.

According to the gaming machine J3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine J1 or J2, when the second determination is performed during execution of the second effect, the identification information corresponding to the second determination is moved. Since the dynamic display period of the target display can be incorporated into the effect period of the second effect, there is an effect that the effect mode can be preferably set.

In any one of the game machines J1 to J3, the effect control means performs the second effect over the specific state and an execution period of at least one of the first effects executed after the specific state ends. A game machine J4 characterized by being controllable so as to execute a pseudo first effect in an effect mode that is difficult to distinguish from the first effect of 1 above.

According to the game machine J4, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines J1 to J3, there is an effect that the mode of presentation can be diversified.

In the game machine J4, the effect control means executes one of the second effects during the specific state so that the number of executions of the first effect accompanied by the second effect is a predetermined specific number of times of execution. A game machine J5 characterized in that it is configured to be controllable so that the pseudo first effect is executed when it exceeds.

According to the game machine J5, in addition to the effect of the game machine J4, there is an effect that the number of executions of the first effect accompanied by the second effect can be visually limited to a specific number of times or less.

A gaming machine Z1 characterized in that the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine in any one of the gaming machines described above. Above all, the basic structure of a pachinko game machine is provided with an operating handle, and in response to the operation of the operating handle, balls are shot into a predetermined game area, and the balls are ejected into actuating openings arranged at predetermined positions in the game area. For example, the identification information dynamically displayed on the display device is determined and stopped after a predetermined period of time, with the requirement of winning a prize (or passing through an activation opening). In addition, when a special game state occurs, a variable prize winning device (specific prize winning port) arranged at a predetermined position in the game area is opened in a predetermined manner to allow balls to win prizes, and a value corresponding to the number of prizes won Values (including not only prize balls but also data written to magnetic cards, etc.) can be given.

A gaming machine Z2 characterized in that the gaming machine is a slot machine in any one of the gaming machines described above. Among them, the basic configuration of the slot machine is "provided with variable display means for displaying the identification information in a fixed manner after dynamically displaying an identification information string consisting of a plurality of identification information, As a result, the dynamic display of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined time has passed, and the stop time and a special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on the condition that the definite identification information of is the specific identification information. In this case, typical examples of game media include coins and medals.

A gaming machine Z3 characterized in that, in any one of the gaming machines described above, the gaming machine is a combination of a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. Among them, the basic configuration of the integrated game machine is "provided with variable display means for confirming and displaying the identification information after dynamically displaying an identification information string consisting of a plurality of identification information, and an operation means for starting (such as an operation lever) The identification information starts to change due to the operation of, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or after a predetermined period of time has passed. a special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on condition that the fixed identification information at the time of stop is the specific identification information; the ball is used as a game medium; A gaming machine configured to require a predetermined number of balls at the start of dynamic display, and to pay out a large number of balls at the occurrence of a special game state.

10 Pachinko machines (game machines)
110 main controller (main control means)
113 Audio lamp control device (slave control means)
223a Winning information storage area (information storage means)
225 input/output port (signal receiving means)
3070a first flow path (entering means)
3071 Ordinary electric accessories (variable means)
S264 Bonus game execution means S305 First determination means S310 First output means S406, S412 First determination information acquisition means S506 Second output means S611, S619 Second determination means S623 Variable game execution means S702 Second determination information acquisition means S4623A Determination means S5103 First effect execution means S5142A Second effect execution means

Claims (5)

Main control means for executing main control related to games;
A game machine comprising a slave control means for performing control according to a control signal output from the main control means,
The main control means is
a first determination means for executing a first determination based on the establishment of a first determination condition;
privilege game executing means for executing a privilege game advantageous to the player based on the fact that the discrimination result of the first discrimination means is a predetermined first discrimination result;
a first output means for outputting a first determination result signal indicating a determination result of the first determination means to the slave control means;
a first determination information acquisition unit that acquires first determination information used for determination by the first determination unit based on the establishment of a predetermined first acquisition condition;
second output means capable of outputting a first discrimination information signal based on the first discrimination information acquired by the first discrimination information acquiring means to the slave control means before the first discrimination condition is satisfied; When,
a ball entry means for allowing a game ball to enter;
a variable means capable of being varied between a first position at which a game ball can be entered into the ball entry means and a second position at which a game ball is more difficult to enter than the first position;
a second determination means for performing a second determination different from the first determination based on establishment of a second determination condition different from at least the first determination condition;
A variable game is executed in which the variable means is varied from the second position to the first position for a predetermined period based on the determination result of the second determination means becoming a predetermined second determination result. variable game execution means;
As the type of the variable game executed by the variable game execution means, one of a plurality of at least a first variable game and a second variable game that is more likely to be advantageous to the player than the first variable game. Type determining means for determining the type of variable game;
a second determination information acquisition unit for acquiring second determination information used for determination by the second determination unit based on the establishment of a second predetermined acquisition condition;
Third output means capable of outputting a second discrimination information signal based on the second discrimination information acquired by the second discrimination information acquisition means to the slave control means before the second discrimination condition is established. and
The slave control means
The first determination result signal output by the first output means, the first determination information signal output by the second output means, and the second determination information signal output by the third output means. a signal receiving means configured to receive at least
a first effect execution means for executing a first effect according to the determination result indicated by the received first determination result signal based on the reception of the first determination result signal by the signal receiving means;
Based on the fact that the first discrimination information signal is received by the signal receiving means, the information corresponding to the received first discrimination information signal is set to a predetermined number of information as an upper limit, and the corresponding first discrimination is performed. information storage means capable of storing at least until a result signal is received by said signal receiving means;
a slave discriminating means for performing discrimination by using at least the received second discrimination information signal based on the second discrimination information signal being received by the signal receiving means;
When the information corresponding to the first discrimination information signal stored in the information storage means satisfies a predetermined specific condition, the discrimination result of the slave discriminating means is the predetermined specific discrimination result. a second effect execution means for executing a second effect that continues at least until a corresponding determination result of the second determination is indicated based on the occurrence of the second effect. Said sub-discrimination means is characterized in that it is constructed so as to obtain said specific discrimination result when said second discrimination information signal is a signal indicating discrimination information corresponding to said second variable game. 1. The gaming machine according to 1. The second effect is composed of a effect that executes a predetermined specific effect mode during the execution period of the plurality of first effects,
The second performance execution means is configured such that the determination result of the subordinate determination means becomes the specific determination result in a state in which a plurality of pieces of information corresponding to the first determination information signal stored in the information storage means are stored. Based on this, the second effect is executed such that a predetermined specific effect mode is executed with respect to the plurality of first effects started until the corresponding second determination result is indicated. 3. The game machine according to claim 1, wherein the game machine is configured to be executable. The slave control means
During the execution of the second effect, a period from the execution of the predetermined first determination executed before the second determination result is indicated until the second determination result is indicated 4. The game machine according to claim 3, further comprising a pseudo first effect executing means for executing a pseudo first effect composed of an effect mode that is difficult to distinguish from the first effect during the effect period. The pseudo first effect execution means is configured to execute the first effect lastly among a plurality of the first determinations started before the second determination result is shown during the execution of the second effect. when the period from the execution of the discrimination to the indication of the second discrimination result is a period shorter than a predetermined specific period, one time before the first discrimination that is started last 5. The pseudo first effect can be executed with a period of effect from the start of the first determination to the display of the second determination result. game machine.

Images